← All Acts

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

Compilation #266 | Effective 2026-07-01

FRBR Work URI: /akn/au/act/1997/38

View raw AKN 3.0 XML

Chapter 1 — Introduction and core provisions

Part 1-1 — Preliminary

Division 1 — Preliminary

Table of sections

1-1 Short title

1-2 Commencement

1-3 Differences in style not to affect meaning

1-4 Application

1-7 Administration of this Act

1-1 Short title

This Act may be cited as the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.

1-2 Commencement

This Act commences on 1 July 1997.

1-3 Differences in style not to affect meaning

(1) This Act contains provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in a rewritten form.

If:

that Act expressed an idea in a particular form of words; and

this Act appears to have expressed the same idea in a different form of words in order to use a clearer or simpler style;

the ideas are not to be taken to be different just because different forms of words were used.

Note: A public or private ruling about a provision of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is taken also to be a ruling about the corresponding provision of this Act, so far as the 2 provisions express the same ideas: see section 357-85 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

1-4 Application

This Act extends to every external Territory referred to in the definition of Australia.

1-7 Administration of this Act

The Commissioner has the general administration of this Act.

Note: An effect of this provision is that people who acquire information under this Act are subject to the confidentiality obligations and exceptions in Division 355 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Part 1-2 — A Guide to this Act

Division 2 — How to use this Act

Table of Subdivisions

2-A How to find your way around

2-B How the Act is arranged

2-C How to identify defined terms and find the definitions

2-D The numbering system

2-E Status of Guides and other non-operative material

Subdivision 2-A — How to find your way around

2-1 The design

This Act is designed to help you identify accurately and quickly the provisions that are relevant to your purpose in reading the income tax law.

The Act contains tables, diagrams and signposts to help you navigate your way.

You can start at Division 3 (What this Act is about) and follow the signposts as far into the Act as you need to go. You may also encounter signposts to several areas of the law that are relevant to you. Each one should be followed.

Sometimes they will lead down through several levels of detail. At each successive level, the rules are structured in a similar way. They will often be preceded by a Guide to the rules at that level. The rules themselves will usually deal first with the general or most common case and then with the more particular or special cases.

Subdivision 2-B — How the Act is arranged

2-5 The pyramid

This Act is arranged in a way that reflects the principle of moving from the general case to the particular.

In this respect, the conceptual structure of the Act is something like a pyramid. The pyramid shape illustrates the way the income tax law is organised, moving down from the central or core provisions at the top of the pyramid, to general rules of wide application and then to the more specialised topics.

Note: The Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains the provisions on collection and recovery of tax and provisions on administration.

Subdivision 2-C — How to identify defined terms and find the definitions

Table of sections

2-10 When defined terms are identified

2-15 When terms are not identified

2-20 Identifying the defined term in a definition

2-10 When defined terms are identified

Many of the terms used in the income tax law are defined.

Most defined terms in this Act are identified by an asterisk appearing at the start of the term: as in “business”. The footnote that goes with the asterisk contains a signpost to the Dictionary definitions starting at section 995-1.

2-15 When terms are not identified

(1) Once a defined term has been identified by an asterisk, later occurrences of the term in the same subsection are not usually asterisked.

(2) Terms are not asterisked in the non-operative material contained in this Act.

Note: The non-operative material is described in Subdivision 2-E.

(3) The following basic terms used throughout the Act are not identified with an asterisk. They fall into 2 groups:

Key participants in the income tax system

Core concepts

2-20 Identifying the defined term in a definition

Within a definition, the defined term is identified by bold italics.

Subdivision 2-D — The numbering system

Table of sections

2-25 Purposes

2-30 Gaps in the numbering

2-25 Purposes

Two main purposes of the numbering system in this Act are:

To indicate the relationship between units at different levels.

For example, the number of Part 2-15 indicates that the Part is in Chapter 2. Similarly, the number of section 165-70 indicates that the section is in Division 165.

To allow for future expansion of the Act. The main technique here is leaving gaps between numbers.

2-30 Gaps in the numbering

There are gaps in the numbering system to allow for the insertion of new Divisions and sections.

Subdivision 2-E — Status of Guides and other non-operative material

Table of sections

2-35 Non-operative material

2-40 Guides

2-45 Other material

2-35 Non-operative material

In addition to the operative provisions themselves, this Act contains other material to help you identify accurately and quickly the provisions that are relevant to you and to help you understand them.

This other material falls into 2 main categories.

2-40 Guides

The first is the “Guides”. A Guide consists of sections under a heading indicating that what follows is a Guide to a particular Subdivision, Division etc.

Guides form part of this Act but are kept separate from the operative provisions. In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may only be considered for limited purposes. These are set out in section 950-150.

2-45 Other material

The other category consists of material such as notes and examples. These also form part of the Act. They are distinguished by type size from the operative provisions, but are not kept separate from them.

Division 3 — What this Act is about

Table of sections

3-5 Annual income tax

3-10 Your other obligations as a taxpayer

3-15 Your obligations other than as a taxpayer

3-5 Annual income tax

Income tax is payable for each year by each individual and company, and by some other entities.

Note 1: Individuals who are Australian residents, and some trustees, are also liable to pay Medicare levy for each year. See the Medicare Levy Act 1986 and Part VIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: Income tax is imposed by the Income Tax Act 1986 and the other Acts referred to in the definition of income tax in section 995-1.

(2) Most entities have to pay instalments of income tax before the income tax they actually have to pay can be worked out.

This Act answers these questions:

1. What instalments of income tax do you have to pay? When and how do you pay them?

See Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

2. How do you work out how much income tax you must pay?

See Division 4, starting at section 4-1.

3. What happens if your income tax is more than the instalments you have paid? When and how must you pay the rest?

See Division 5 of this Act and Part 4-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

4. What happens if your income tax is less than the instalments you have paid? How do you get a refund?

See Division 3A of Part IIB of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

5. What are your other obligations as a taxpayer, besides paying instalments and the rest of your income tax?

See section 3-10.

6. Do you have any other obligations under the income tax law?

See section 3-15.

7. If a dispute between you and the Commissioner of Taxation cannot be settled by agreement, what procedures for objection, review and appeal are available?

See Part IVC (sections 14ZL to 14ZZS) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

3-10 Your other obligations as a taxpayer

Besides paying instalments and the rest of your income tax, your main obligations as a taxpayer are:

to keep records and provide information as required by:

the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

Division 900 (which sets out substantiation rules) of this Act; and

to lodge income tax returns as required by:

the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Tax file numbers

(2) Under Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, a tax file number can be issued to you. You are not obliged to apply for a tax file number. However, if you do not quote one in certain situations:

you may become liable for instalments of income tax that would not otherwise have been payable;

the amount of certain of your instalments of income tax may be increased.

3-15 Your obligations other than as a taxpayer

Your main obligations under the income tax law, other than as a taxpayer are:

in certain situations, to deduct from money you owe to another person, and to remit to the Commissioner, instalments of income tax payable by that person.

See Part 4-5 (Collection of income tax instalments), starting at section 750-1.

Part 1-3 — Core provisions

Division 4 — How to work out the income tax payable on your taxable income

Table of sections

4-1 Who must pay income tax

4-5 Meaning of you

4-10 How to work out how much income tax you must pay

4-15 How to work out your taxable income

4-25 Special provisions for working out your basic income tax liability

4-1 Who must pay income tax

Income tax is payable by each individual and company, and by some other entities.

For a list of the entities that must pay income tax, see Division 9, starting at section 9-1.

Note: The actual amount of income tax payable may be nil.

4-5 Meaning of you

If a provision of this Act uses the expression you, it applies to entities generally, unless its application is expressly limited.

Note 1: The expression you is not used in provisions that apply only to entities that are not individuals.

Note 2: For circumstances in which the identity of an entity that is a managed investment scheme for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 is not affected by changes to the scheme, see Subdivision 960-E of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

4-10 How to work out how much income tax you must pay

You must pay income tax for each financial year.

(2) Your income tax is worked out by reference to your taxable income for the income year. The income year is the same as the *financial year, except in these cases:

(a) for a company, the income year is the previous financial year;

if you have an accounting period that is not the same as the financial year, each such accounting period or, for a company, each previous accounting period is an income year.

Note 1: The Commissioner can allow you to adopt an accounting period ending on a day other than 30 June. See section 18 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: An accounting period ends, and a new accounting period starts, when a partnership becomes, or ceases to be, a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP. See section 18A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Work out your income tax for the financial year as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out your taxable income for the income year.

To do this, see section 4-15.

Step 2. Work out your basic income tax liability on your taxable income using:

the income tax rate or rates that apply to you for the income year; and

any special provisions that apply to working out that liability.

See the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 and section 4-25.

Step 3. Work out your tax offsets for the income year. A tax offset reduces the amount of income tax you have to pay.

For the list of tax offsets, see section 13-1.

Step 4. Subtract your *tax offsets from your basic income tax liability. The result is how much income tax you owe for the financial year.

Income tax worked out on another basis

Note 1: Division 63 explains what happens if your tax offsets exceed your basic income tax liability. How the excess is treated depends on the type of tax offset.

Note 2: Section 4-11 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 (which is about the temporary budget repair levy) may increase the amount of income tax worked out under this section.

For some entities, some or all of their income tax for the financial year is worked out by reference to something other than taxable income for the income year.

See section 9-5.

4-15 How to work out your taxable income

(1) Work out your taxable income for the income year like this:

Method statement

Step 1. Add up all your assessable income for the income year.

To find out about your assessable income, see Division 6.

Step 2. Add up your deductions for the income year.

To find out what you can deduct, see Division 8.

Step 3. Subtract your deductions from your assessable income (unless they exceed it). The result is your taxable income. (If the deductions equal or exceed the assessable income, you don’t have a taxable income.)

Note: If the deductions exceed the assessable income, you may have a tax loss which you may be able to utilise in that or a later income year: see Division 36.

There are cases where taxable income is worked out in a special way:

Note: A life insurance company can have a taxable income of the complying superannuation class and/or a taxable income of the ordinary class for the purposes of working out its income tax for an income year: see Subdivision 320-D.

4-25 Special provisions for working out your basic income tax liability

Subsection 119-10(1) or 392-35(3) may increase your basic income tax liability beyond the liability worked out simply by applying the income tax rates to your taxable income.

Note 1: Subsection 119-10(1) increases some individuals’ tax liability by requiring them to pay extra income tax in relation to certain capital gains.

Note 2: Subsection 392-35(3) increases some primary producers’ tax liability by requiring them to pay extra income tax on their averaging components worked out under Subdivision 392-C.

Division 5 — How to work out when to pay your income tax

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 5

5-A How to work out when to pay your income tax

Guide to Division 5

5-1 What this Division is about

If your assessed income tax liability exceeds the credits available to you under the PAYG system, this Division explains when you must pay the excess to the Commissioner.

If your assessment is amended so that you must pay income tax, or pay more income tax than under the previous assessment, this Division explains:

(a) when you must pay the additional tax; and

(b) when any associated interest charges must be paid.

Note: For provisions about the collection and recovery of income tax and other tax-related liabilities, see Part 4-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 5-A — How to work out when to pay your income tax

Table of sections

5-5 When income tax is payable

5-10 When shortfall interest charge is payable

5-15 General interest charge payable on unpaid income tax or shortfall interest charge

5-5 When income tax is payable

Scope

This section tells you when income tax you must pay for a financial year is due and payable.

Note: The Commissioner may defer the time at which the income tax is due and payable: see section 255-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

The income tax is only due and payable if the Commissioner makes an *assessment of your income tax for the year.

However, if the Commissioner does make an *assessment of your income tax for the year, the tax may be taken to have been due and payable at a time before your assessment was made.

Note: This is to ensure that general interest charge begins to accrue from the same date for all like entities. General interest charge on unpaid income tax is calculated from when the tax is due and payable, not from when the assessment is made: see section 5-15.

Original assessments—self-assessment entities

If you are a self-assessment entity, the income tax is due and payable on the first day of the sixth month after the end of the income year.

Example: If your income year is the same as the financial year, your income tax would be due and payable on 1 December.

Original assessments—other entities

(5) If you are not a *self-assessment entity, the income tax is due and payable 21 days after the day (the return day) on or before which you are required to lodge your *income tax return with the Commissioner.

Note: For rules about income tax returns and when they are due, see Part IV of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(6) However, if you lodge your return on or before the return day and the Commissioner gives you a notice of *assessment (other than an amended assessment) after the return day, the income tax is due and payable 21 days after the Commissioner gives you the notice.

Amended assessments

If the Commissioner amends your *assessment, any extra income tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

Note: Shortfall interest charge may be payable, on any amount of extra income tax payable as a result of the amended assessment, for each day in the period that:

starts at the time income tax was due and payable on your original assessment; and

ends the day before the day on which the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

5-10 When shortfall interest charge is payable

An amount of shortfall interest charge that you are liable to pay is due and payable 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives you notice of the charge.

Note: Shortfall interest charge is imposed if the Commissioner amends an assessment and the amended assessment results in an increase in some tax payable. For provisions about liability for shortfall interest charge, see Division 280 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

5-15 General interest charge payable on unpaid income tax or shortfall interest charge

If an amount of income tax or shortfall interest charge that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

starts at the beginning of the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and

finishes at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the income tax or shortfall interest charge;

general interest charge on any of the income tax or shortfall interest charge.

Note 1: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: Shortfall interest charge is worked out under Division 280 in Schedule 1 to that Act.

Division 6 — Assessable income and exempt income

Guide to Division 6

Table of sections

6-1 Diagram showing relationships among concepts in this Division

Operative provisions

6-5 Income according to ordinary concepts (ordinary income)

6-10 Other assessable income (statutory income)

6-15 What is not assessable income

6-20 Exempt income

6-23 Non-assessable non-exempt income

6-25 Relationships among various rules about ordinary income

6-1 Diagram showing relationships among concepts in this Division

Assessable income consists of ordinary income and statutory income.

Some ordinary income, and some statutory income, is exempt income.

Exempt income is not assessable income.

Some ordinary income, and some statutory income, is neither assessable income nor exempt income.

For the effect of the GST in working out assessable income, see Division 17.

An amount of ordinary income or statutory income can have only one status (that is, assessable income, exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income) in the hands of a particular entity.

Operative provisions

6-5 Income according to ordinary concepts (ordinary income)

(1) Your assessable income includes income according to ordinary concepts, which is called ordinary income.

Note: Some of the provisions about assessable income listed in section 10-5 may affect the treatment of ordinary income.

If you are an Australian resident, your assessable income includes the ordinary income you *derived directly or indirectly from all sources, whether in or out of Australia, during the income year.

If you are a foreign resident, your assessable income includes:

the ordinary income you *derived directly or indirectly from all *Australian sources during the income year; and

other ordinary income that a provision includes in your assessable income for the income year on some basis other than having an *Australian source.

(4) In working out whether you have derived an amount of *ordinary income, and (if so) when you derived it, you are taken to have received the amount as soon as it is applied or dealt with in any way on your behalf or as you direct.

6-10 Other assessable income (statutory income)

(1) Your assessable income also includes some amounts that are not *ordinary income.

Note: These are included by provisions about assessable income. For a summary list of these provisions, see section 10-5.

(2) Amounts that are not *ordinary income, but are included in your assessable income by provisions about assessable income, are called statutory income.

Note 1: Although an amount is statutory income because it has been included in assessable income under a provision of this Act, it may be made exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income under another provision: see sections 6-20 and 6-23.

Note 2: Many provisions in the summary list in section 10-5 contain rules about ordinary income. These rules do not change its character as ordinary income.

If an amount would be statutory income apart from the fact that you have not received it, it becomes statutory income as soon as it is applied or dealt with in any way on your behalf or as you direct.

If you are an Australian resident, your assessable income includes your statutory income from all sources, whether in or out of Australia.

If you are a foreign resident, your assessable income includes:

your statutory income from all *Australian sources; and

other statutory income that a provision includes in your assessable income on some basis other than having an *Australian source.

6-15 What is not assessable income

(1) If an amount is not *ordinary income, and is not *statutory income, it is not assessable income (so you do not have to pay income tax on it).

(2) If an amount is *exempt income, it is not assessable income.

Note: If an amount is exempt income, there are other consequences besides it being exempt from income tax. For example:

the amount may be taken into account in working out the amount of a tax loss (see section 36-10);

you cannot deduct as a general deduction a loss or outgoing incurred in deriving the amount (see Division 8);

capital gains and losses on assets used solely to produce exempt income are disregarded (see section 118-12).

(3) If an amount is *non-assessable non-exempt income, it is not assessable income.

Note 1: You cannot deduct as a general deduction a loss or outgoing incurred in deriving an amount of non-assessable non-exempt income (see Division 8).

Note 2: Capital gains and losses on assets used to produce some types of non-assessable non-exempt income are disregarded (see section 118-12).

6-20 Exempt income

(1) An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is exempt income if it is made exempt from income tax by a provision of this Act or another *Commonwealth law.

For summary lists of provisions about exempt income, see sections 11-5 and 11-15.

(2) *Ordinary income is also exempt income to the extent that this Act excludes it (expressly or by implication) from being assessable income.

(3) By contrast, an amount of *statutory income is exempt income only if it is made exempt from income tax by a provision of this Act outside this Division or another *Commonwealth law.

(4) If an amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is *non-assessable non-exempt income, it is not exempt income.

Note: An amount of non-assessable non-exempt income is not taken into account in working out the amount of a tax loss.

6-23 Non-assessable non-exempt income

An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is non-assessable non-exempt income if a provision of this Act or of another *Commonwealth law states that it is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

For a summary list of provisions about non-assessable non-exempt income, see Subdivision 11-B.

Note: Capital gains and losses on assets used to produce some types of non-assessable non-exempt income are disregarded (see section 118-12).

6-25 Relationships among various rules about ordinary income

Sometimes more than one rule includes an amount in your assessable income:

the same amount may be ordinary income and may also be included in your assessable income by one or more provisions about assessable income; or

the same amount may be included in your assessable income by more than one provision about assessable income.

For a summary list of the provisions about assessable income, see section 10-5.

However, the amount is included only once in your assessable income for an income year, and is then not included in your assessable income for any other income year.

Unless the contrary intention appears, the provisions of this Act (outside this Part) prevail over the rules about ordinary income.

Note: This Act contains some specific provisions about how far the rules about ordinary income prevail over the other provisions of this Act.

Division 8 — Deductions

Table of sections

8-1 General deductions

8-5 Specific deductions

8-10 No double deductions

8-1 General deductions

(1) You can deduct from your assessable income any loss or outgoing to the extent that:

it is incurred in gaining or producing your assessable income; or

it is necessarily incurred in carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income.

Note: Division 35 prevents losses from non-commercial business activities that may contribute to a tax loss being offset against other assessable income.

However, you cannot deduct a loss or outgoing under this section to the extent that:

it is a loss or outgoing of capital, or of a capital nature; or

it is a loss or outgoing of a private or domestic nature; or

it is incurred in relation to gaining or producing your exempt income or your non-assessable non-exempt income; or

a provision of this Act prevents you from deducting it.

For a summary list of provisions about deductions, see section 12-5.

(3) A loss or outgoing that you can deduct under this section is called a general deduction.

For the effect of the GST in working out deductions, see Division 27.

Note If you receive an amount as insurance, indemnity or other recoupment of a loss or outgoing that you can deduct under this section, the amount may be included in your assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

8-5 Specific deductions

(1) You can also deduct from your assessable income an amount that a provision of this Act (outside this Division) allows you to deduct.

Some provisions of this Act prevent you from deducting an amount that you could otherwise deduct, or limit the amount you can deduct.

(3) An amount that you can deduct under a provision of this Act (outside this Division) is called a specific deduction.

Note: If you receive an amount as insurance, indemnity or other recoupment of a deductible expense, the amount may be included in your assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

For a summary list of provisions about deductions, see section 12-5.

8-10 No double deductions

If 2 or more provisions of this Act allow you deductions in respect of the same amount (whether for the same income year or different income years), you can deduct only under the provision that is most appropriate.

Part 1-4 — Checklists of what is covered by concepts used in the core provisions

Division 9 — Entities that must pay income tax

Table of sections

9-1A Effect of this Division

9-1 List of entities

9-5 Entities that work out their income tax by reference to something other than taxable income

9-1A Effect of this Division

This Division is a Guide.

9-1 List of entities

Income tax is payable by the entities listed in the table.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

9-5 Entities that work out their income tax by reference to something other than taxable income

For some entities, some or all of their income tax for the financial year is worked out as described in the table.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(2) For entities covered by an item in the table in subsection (1), the income year is the same as the *financial year, except in these cases:

(a) for a company, or an entity covered by item 2 or 3 in the table, the income year is the previous financial year;

if an entity has an accounting period that is not the same as the financial year, each such accounting period or, for a company, each previous accounting period is an income year.

Note 1: The Commissioner can allow an entity to adopt an accounting period ending on a day other than 30 June. See section 18 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: An accounting period ends, and a new accounting period starts, when a partnership becomes, or ceases to be, a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP. See section 18A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Division 10 — Particular kinds of assessable income

10-1 Effect of this Division

This Division is a Guide.

10-5 List of provisions about assessable income

The provisions set out in the table:

include in your assessable income amounts that are not ordinary income; and

vary or replace the rules that would otherwise apply for certain kinds of ordinary income.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Division 11 — Particular kinds of non-assessable income

Table of Subdivisions

11-A Lists of classes of exempt income

11-B Particular kinds of non-assessable non-exempt income

Subdivision 11-A — Lists of classes of exempt income

Table of sections

11-1A Effect of this Subdivision

11-1 Overview

11-5 Entities that are exempt, no matter what kind of ordinary or statutory income they have

11-15 Ordinary or statutory income which is exempt

11-1A Effect of this Subdivision

This Subdivision is a Guide.

11-1 Overview

Ordinary income or statutory income which is exempt from income tax can be divided into 2 main classes:

ordinary or statutory income of entities that are exempt, no matter what kind of ordinary or statutory income they have (see table in section 11-5);

ordinary or statutory income of a kind that is exempt (see table in section 11-15).

11-5 Entities that are exempt, no matter what kind of ordinary or statutory income they have

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: Special rules apply to entities that cease to be exempt. See Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

11-15 Ordinary or statutory income which is exempt

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: The following provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 give rise to notional exempt income and not exempt income. For this reason the provisions do not appear in the lists of kinds of exempt income.

The provisions are: paragraphs 384(1)(b) and 385(1)(b), subsection 402(2) and section 403.

Subdivision 11-B — Particular kinds of non-assessable non-exempt income

Table of sections

11-50 Effect of this Subdivision

11-55 List of non-assessable non-exempt income provisions

11-50 Effect of this Subdivision

This Subdivision is a Guide.

11-55 List of non-assessable non-exempt income provisions

The provisions set out in the list make amounts non-assessable non-exempt income.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Division 12 — Particular kinds of deductions

12-1 Effect of this Division

This Division is a Guide.

12-5 List of provisions about deductions

The provisions set out in the table contain rules about specific types of deduction.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Division 13 — Tax offsets

13-1A Effect of this Division

This Division is a Guide.

13-1 List of tax offsets

The provisions set out in the list allow you a tax offset.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Chapter 2 — Liability rules of general application

Part 2-1 — Assessable income

Division 15 — Some items of assessable income

Guide to Division 15

15-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out some items that are included in your assessable income. Remember that the general rules about assessable income in Division 6 apply to these items.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

15-2 Allowances and other things provided in respect of employment or services

15-3 Return to work payments

15-5 Accrued leave transfer payments

15-10 Bounties and subsidies

15-15 Profit-making undertaking or plan

15-20 Royalties

15-22 Payments made to members of a copyright collecting society

15-23 Payments of resale royalties by resale royalty collecting society

15-25 Amount received for lease obligation to repair

15-30 Insurance or indemnity for loss of assessable income

15-35 Interest on overpayments and early payments of tax

15-40 Providing mining, quarrying or prospecting information or geothermal exploration information

15-45 Amounts paid under forestry agreements

15-46 Amounts paid under forestry managed investment schemes

15-50 Work in progress amounts

15-55 Certain amounts paid under funeral policy

15-60 Certain amounts paid under scholarship plan

15-70 Reimbursed car expenses

15-75 Bonuses

15-80 Franked distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction—Additional Tier 1 capital exception

Operative provisions

15-2 Allowances and other things provided in respect of employment or services

Your assessable income includes the value to you of all allowances, gratuities, compensation, benefits, bonuses and premiums *provided to you in respect of, or for or in relation directly or indirectly to, any employment of or services rendered by you (including any service as a member of the Defence Force).

This is so whether the things were *provided in money or in any other form.

However, the value of the following are not included in your assessable income under this section:

a superannuation lump sum or an employment termination payment;

an unused annual leave payment or an unused long service leave payment;

a dividend or non-share dividend;

an amount that is assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5;

*ESS interests to which Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies.

Note: Section 23L of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 provides that fringe benefits are non-assessable non-exempt income.

15-3 Return to work payments

Your assessable income includes an amount you receive under an arrangement that an entity enters into for a purpose of inducing you to resume working for, or providing services to, any entity.

15-5 Accrued leave transfer payments

Your assessable income includes an accrued leave transfer payment that you receive.

To find out if the payment is deductible to the payer, see section 26-10.

15-10 Bounties and subsidies

Your assessable income includes a bounty or subsidy that:

you receive in relation to carrying on a business; and

is not assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5.

15-15 Profit-making undertaking or plan

Your assessable income includes profit arising from the carrying on or carrying out of a profit-making undertaking or plan.

This section does not apply to a profit that:

is assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5; or

arises in respect of the sale of property acquired on or after 20 September 1985.

Note: If you sell property you acquired before 20 September 1985 for profit-making by sale, your assessable income includes the profit: see section 25A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

15-20 Royalties

(1) Your assessable income includes an amount that you receive as or by way of royalty within the ordinary meaning of “royalty” (disregarding the definition of royalty in subsection 995-1(1)) if the amount is not assessable as *ordinary income under section 6-5.

Subsection (1) does not apply to an amount of a payment to which section 15-22 or 15-23 applies.

15-22 Payments made to members of a copyright collecting society

(1) This section, instead of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, applies to a payment that a *copyright collecting society, to which section 51-43 applies, makes to you as a *member of the society.

(2) Your assessable income includes the amount of the payment, except to the extent that the payment represents an amount on which the directors of the society are or have been assessed, and are liable to pay *tax, under section 98, 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: Section 410-5 of this Act requires a copyright collecting society to give you a notice at the time of payment.

15-23 Payments of resale royalties by resale royalty collecting society

(1) This section, instead of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, applies to a payment that the *resale royalty collecting society makes to you under section 26 of the Resale Royalty Right for Visual Artists Act 2009.

(2) Your assessable income includes the amount of the payment, except to the extent that the payment represents an amount on which the directors of the society are or have been assessed, and are liable to pay *tax, under section 98, 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: Section 410-50 of this Act requires the resale royalty collecting society to give you a notice at the time of payment.

15-25 Amount received for lease obligation to repair

Your assessable income includes an amount you receive from an entity if:

you receive it as a lessor or former lessor of premises; and

the entity pays you the amount for failing to comply with a lease obligation to make repairs to the premises; and

the entity uses or has used the premises for the *purpose of producing assessable income; and

the amount is not assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5.

Note: The entity can deduct the amount: see section 25-15.

15-30 Insurance or indemnity for loss of assessable income

Your assessable income includes an amount you receive by way of insurance or indemnity for the loss of an amount (the lost amount) if:

the lost amount would have been included in your assessable income; and

the amount you receive is not assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5.

15-35 Interest on overpayments and early payments of tax

Your assessable income includes interest payable to you under the Taxation (Interest on Overpayments and Early Payments) Act 1983. The interest becomes assessable when it is paid to you or applied to discharge a liability you have to the Commonwealth.

15-40 Providing mining, quarrying or prospecting information or geothermal exploration information

Your assessable income includes an amount you receive for providing *mining, quarrying or prospecting information to another entity if:

you continue to *hold the information; and

the amount you receive is not assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5.

Your assessable income includes an amount you receive for providing geothermal exploration information you have to another entity if:

you continue to have the information; and

the information is, and continues to be, relevant to:

geothermal energy extraction that you carry on or propose to carry on; or

a business that you carry on that includes *exploration or prospecting for geothermal energy resources from which energy can be extracted by geothermal energy extraction; and

the amount you receive is not assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5.

It does not matter whether the information is generally available or not.

(3) Geothermal exploration information is geological, geophysical or technical information that:

relates to the presence, absence or extent of geothermal energy resources in an area; or

is likely to help in determining the presence, absence or extent of such resources in an area.

(4) Geothermal energy extraction means operations that are for:

the extraction of energy from geothermal energy resources; and

the *purpose of producing assessable income.

15-45 Amounts paid under forestry agreements

Your assessable income includes an amount you receive under an agreement for the planting and tending of trees for felling if:

(a) you are the manager of the agreement as mentioned in section 82KZMG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the amount satisfies, for the entity that paid it, the requirements of that section.

The amount is included for the income year in which the entity can claim a deduction for the amount.

No part of an amount included under subsection (1) is included in your assessable income for a later income year.

15-46 Amounts paid under forestry managed investment schemes

Your assessable income includes an amount you receive under a forestry managed investment scheme if:

you are the *forestry manager of the scheme, or an associate of the forestry manager; and

the entity that paid the amount can deduct or has deducted the amount under section 394-10 in relation to the scheme (disregarding subsection 394-10(5)).

The amount is included for the income year for which the entity that paid the amount can or has claimed a deduction for it (disregarding subsection 394-10(5)).

No part of an amount included under subsection (1) is included in your assessable income for a later income year.

15-50 Work in progress amounts

Your assessable income includes a work in progress amount that you receive.

Note: To find out whether the amount is deductible to the payer, see section 25-95.

15-55 Certain amounts paid under funeral policy

Your assessable income includes the amount of a benefit provided to you by a life insurance company under a funeral policy issued after 31 December 2002 to pay for the funeral of the insured person, reduced by:

the amount of the premium or premiums of the policy that is reasonably related to the benefit; and

the amount of the fees and charges included in the company’s assessable income for any income year under paragraph 320-15(1)(k) that is reasonably related to the benefit.

This section does not apply if the benefit is included in your assessable income as:

ordinary income under section 6-5; or

statutory income under a section of this Act other than this section.

15-60 Certain amounts paid under scholarship plan

Your assessable income includes the amount of a benefit provided to you, or on your behalf, by a life insurance company under a scholarship plan covered by subsection (2) or (3), reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (4), if:

the benefit is provided on or after 1 January 2003; and

you are nominated in the plan as a beneficiary whose education is to be helped by the benefit.

This subsection covers a scholarship plan issued by the life insurance company after 31 December 2002.

This subsection covers a scholarship plan if:

the plan was issued by the life insurance company before 1 January 2003; and

no amount received by the company on or after 1 January 2003 and attributable to the plan is non-assessable non-exempt income of the company under paragraph 320-37(1)(d).

The amount of the reduction is the sum of:

the amount of the premium or premiums of the plan that is reasonably related to the benefit; and

the amount of the fees and charges included in the company’s assessable income for any income year under paragraph 320-15(1)(k) that is reasonably related to the benefit.

15-70 Reimbursed car expenses

Your assessable income includes a reimbursement mentioned in section 22 of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986 (about exempt car expense payment benefits) that, but for that section, would be a *fringe benefit *provided to you.

15-75 Bonuses

Your assessable income includes any amount you receive as or by way of bonus on a *life insurance policy, other than a reversionary bonus.

Note: Reversionary bonuses are covered by section 6-5 of this Act if they are ordinary income and, if not, by section 26AH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

15-80 Franked distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction—Additional Tier 1 capital exception

If section 207-158 would, apart from subsection 207-158(2), apply to a *franked distribution, then an amount equal to the foreign income tax deduction referred to in subsection (1) of that section is included in the assessable income of the entity that made the distribution for the income year mentioned in subsection (2) of this section.

The income year is:

if the *foreign tax period in which the foreign income tax deduction arises falls wholly within an income year of the entity—that income year; or

if the foreign tax period in which the foreign income tax deduction arises straddles 2 income years of the entity—the later of those income years.

Division 17 — Effect of GST etc. on assessable income

Guide to Division 17

17-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the effect of the GST in working out assessable income. Generally speaking, GST, input tax credits and adjustments under the GST Act are disregarded.

Table of sections

17-5 GST and increasing adjustments

17-10 Certain decreasing adjustments

17-15 Elements in calculation of amounts

17-20 GST groups and GST joint ventures

17-30 Special credits because of indirect tax transition

17-35 Certain sections not to apply to certain assets or expenditure

17-5 GST and increasing adjustments

An amount is not assessable income, and is not exempt income, to the extent that it includes an amount relating to:

GST payable on a taxable supply; or

an increasing adjustment that relates to a supply; or

an increasing adjustment that:

relates to an *acquisition; and

arises in circumstances that also give rise to a recoupment that is included in assessable income.

17-10 Certain decreasing adjustments

(1) An amount of a *decreasing adjustment that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the *GST Act is assessable income, unless the entity that has the adjustment is an *exempt entity.

(2) However, the amount is not assessable income to the extent that, because it becomes a component of a *net input tax credit, a reduction is made under section 103-30 (reduction of cost base etc. by net input tax credits).

17-15 Elements in calculation of amounts

In calculating an amount that may be included in assessable income:

an element in the calculation that is an amount received or receivable is treated as not including an amount equal to any GST payable on a taxable supply related to the amount received or receivable, or any increasing adjustment related to that amount; and

an element in the calculation that is an amount paid or payable is treated as not including an amount equal to any input tax credit for an *acquisition related to the amount paid or payable, or any decreasing adjustment related to that amount.

17-20 GST groups and GST joint ventures

A *member of a GST group is to be treated, for the purposes of this Division, as if Subdivision 48-B of the GST Act (other than paragraph 48-40(2)(a) and subsection 48-40(3)) did not apply to that member.

A *participant in a GST joint venture is to be treated, for the purposes of this Division, as if Subdivision 51-B of the GST Act (other than subsections 51-30(2) and (3)) did not apply to that participant.

17-30 Special credits because of indirect tax transition

A special credit under section 19A of the A New Tax System (Goods and Services Tax Transition) Act 1999 is assessable income at the time it is attributed to a *tax period (for a credit under section 19A).

17-35 Certain sections not to apply to certain assets or expenditure

Sections 17-5, 17-10 and 17-15 do not apply to assets, or to expenditure, for which you can deduct amounts under Division 40 or Division 328.

Note: See instead Subdivision 27-B.

Division 20 — Amounts included to reverse the effect of past deductions

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 20

20-A Insurance, indemnity or other recoupment for deductible expenses

20-B Disposal of a car for which lease payments have been deducted

Guide to Division 20

20-1 What this Division is about

This Division includes amounts in your assessable income to reverse the effect of certain kinds of deductions.

Table of sections

20-5 Other provisions that reverse the effect of deductions

20-5 Other provisions that reverse the effect of deductions

The table lists other provisions that reverse the effect of certain kinds of deductions.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 20-A — Insurance, indemnity or other recoupment for deductible expenses

Guide to Subdivision 20-A

20-10 What this Subdivision is about

Recoupment of expenses you incurred and can deduct

Your assessable income may include an amount that you receive by way of insurance, indemnity or other recoupment if:

it is for a deductible expense; and

it is not otherwise assessable income.

Recoupment of expenses you did not incur but can deduct

Your assessable income may include an amount that another entity receives by way of insurance, indemnity or other recoupment if:

it is for an expense that you can deduct; and

it is not otherwise your assessable income.

Table of sections

20-15 How to use this Subdivision

What is an assessable recoupment?

20-20 Assessable recoupments

20-25 What is recoupment?

20-30 Tables of deductions for which recoupments are assessable

How much is included in your assessable income?

20-35 If the expense is deductible in a single income year

20-40 If the expense is deductible over 2 or more income years

20-45 Effect of balancing charge

20-50 If the expense is only partially deductible

20-55 Meaning of previous recoupment law

What if you can deduct a loss or outgoing incurred by another entity?

20-60 If you are the only entity that can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing

20-65 If 2 or more entities can deduct amounts for the loss or outgoing

20-15 How to use this Subdivision

If you incurred the deductible loss or outgoing

First, read sections 20-20 to 20-30 to work out whether you have received an assessable recoupment. If not, you do not need to read the rest of the Subdivision.

(2) If you have received one or more assessable recoupments, sections 20-35 to 20-55 tell you how much is included in your assessable income for an income year.

If another entity incurred a loss or outgoing you can deduct

Sections 20-60 and 20-65 tell you how to apply this Subdivision.

What is an assessable recoupment?

20-20 Assessable recoupments

Exclusion

(1) An amount is not an assessable recoupment to the extent that it is *ordinary income, or it is *statutory income because of a provision outside this Subdivision.

Insurance or indemnity

(2) An amount you have received as *recoupment of a loss or outgoing is an assessable recoupment if:

you received the amount by way of insurance or indemnity; and

you can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing for the current year, or you have deducted or can deduct an amount for it for an earlier income year, under any provision of this Act.

Other recoupment

(3) An amount you have received as *recoupment of a loss or outgoing (except by way of insurance or indemnity) is an assessable recoupment if:

you can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing for the current year; or

you have deducted or can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing for an earlier income year;

under a provision listed in section 20-30.

20-25 What is recoupment?

General

(1) Recoupment of a loss or outgoing includes:

any kind of recoupment, reimbursement, refund, insurance, indemnity or recovery, however described; and

a grant in respect of the loss or outgoing.

Amount paid for you

(2) If some other entity pays an amount for you in respect of a loss or outgoing that you incur, you are taken to receive the amount as recoupment of the loss or outgoing.

Remission of general interest charge or shortfall interest charge

If:

you have incurred expenditure that consists of general interest charge or shortfall interest charge; and

the Commissioner remits any of that charge;

then you are taken to receive the remitted amount as recoupment of that expenditure.

Amount for disposing of right to recoupment

(3) If you dispose of your right to receive an amount as *recoupment of a loss or outgoing you are taken to receive as recoupment of the loss or outgoing any amount you receive for disposing of that right. (The disposal need not be to another entity.)

Amount received that is recoupment to an unspecified extent

(4) If you receive an amount that is, to an unspecified extent, *recoupment of a loss or outgoing, the amount is taken to be recoupment of the loss or outgoing to whatever extent is reasonable.

Balancing adjustments not covered

(5) If a balancing adjustment is required for property on which you incurred a loss or outgoing, no part of the *termination value of the property is an amount you receive as recoupment of the loss or outgoing.

Note: The termination value is usually the amount you receive because of disposal, loss or destruction of the property.

20-30 Tables of deductions for which recoupments are assessable

(1) This table shows the deductions under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 for which recoupments are assessable.

Note: References are to section numbers except where otherwise indicated.

(2) This table shows the deductions under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for which recoupments are assessable.

Note: References are to section numbers except where otherwise indicated.

How much is included in your assessable income?

20-35 If the expense is deductible in a single income year

Your assessable income includes an assessable recoupment of a loss or outgoing if:

you can deduct the whole of the loss or outgoing for the current year; or

you have deducted or can deduct the whole of the loss or outgoing for an earlier income year.

Note 1: The operation of this section may be affected if a balancing charge has been included in your assessable income because of a deduction for the loss or outgoing: see section 20-45.

Note 2: Recoupment of a loss or outgoing for which you can deduct amounts over more than one income year is covered by section 20-40.

Note 3: Recoupment of a loss or outgoing that is only partially deductible is covered by section 20-50.

Total assessed not to exceed the loss or outgoing

The total of all amounts that subsection (1) includes in your assessable income for one or more income years in respect of a loss or outgoing cannot exceed the amount of the loss or outgoing.

Recoupment received before income year of the deduction

If:

you can deduct the whole of a loss or outgoing for the current year; and

before the current year you received an assessable recoupment of the loss or outgoing;

your assessable income for the current year includes so much of the recoupment as subsection (1) would have included if you had instead received the recoupment at the start of the current year.

20-40 If the expense is deductible over 2 or more income years

This section includes an amount in your assessable income if:

you receive in the current year an assessable recoupment of a loss or outgoing for which you can deduct amounts over 2 or more income years; or

(b) you received in an earlier income year an *assessable recoupment of a loss or outgoing of that kind (unless all of the recoupment has already been included in your assessable income for one or more earlier income years by this section or a *previous recoupment law).

(This section applies even if the recoupment was received before the first of those income years.)

Note: Recoupment of a loss or outgoing that is only partially deductible is covered by section 20-50.

Work out as follows how much is included in your assessable income for the current year because of one or more *assessable recoupments of the loss or outgoing.

Note: The method statement ensures that assessable recoupments are included:

only so far as they have not already been included for an earlier income year; and

only to the extent of your total deductions to date for the loss or outgoing.

Method statement

Step 1. Add up all the *assessable recoupments of the loss or outgoing that you have received (in the *current year or earlier). The result is the total assessable recoupment.

Step 2. Add up the amounts (if any) included in your assessable income for earlier income years, in respect of the loss or outgoing, by this section or a *previous recoupment law. The result is the recoupment already assessed. (If no amount was included, the recoupment already assessed is nil.)

Step 3. Subtract the recoupment already assessed from the total assessable recoupment. The result is the unassessed recoupment.

Step 4. Add up each amount that you can deduct for the loss or outgoing for the *current year, or you have deducted or can deduct for the loss or outgoing for an earlier income year. The result is the total deductions for the loss or outgoing.

Step 5. Subtract the recoupment already assessed from the total deductions for the loss or outgoing. The result is the outstanding deductions.

Step 6. The unassessed recoupment is included in your assessable income, unless it is greater than the outstanding deductions. In that case, the amount of the outstanding deductions is included instead.

In the 2002-03 income year, the company receives $20,000 as recoupment. How much is assessable for the 2002-03 income year?

Applying the method statement:

After step 1: the total assessable recoupment is $20,000.

After step 2: the recoupment already assessed is nil.

After step 3: the unassessed recoupment is: total assessable recoupment minus recoupment already assessed, i.e. $20,000 minus 0 = $20,000.

After step 4: the total deductions for the loss or outgoing are $10,000.

After step 5: the outstanding deductions are: total deductions for the loss or outgoing minus recoupment already assessed, i.e. $10,000 minus 0 = $10,000.

After step 6: the unassessed recoupment (step 3) is greater than outstanding deductions (step 5), so the amount of the outstanding deductions is included in assessable income, i.e. $10,000.

Applying the method statement to the 2003-04 income year: a further $10,000 is included in the company’s assessable income.

Note: The total deductions may be reduced if an amount has been included in your assessable income because of a balancing adjustment: see section 20-45.

Example: At the start of the 2002-03 income year, a company incurs $100,000 to start to hold a depreciating asset. The company uses the prime cost method, and the effective life is 10 years. $10,000 is deductible for the 2002-03 income year and for each of the following 9 income years under section 40-25.

20-45 Effect of balancing charge

This section may affect the operation of section 20-35 or 20-40 (as appropriate) if:

a balancing adjustment is required for the current year (or for an earlier income year) because you have deducted or can deduct an amount for an income year for the loss or outgoing; and

(b) an amount (the balancing charge) is included in your assessable income for the *current year (or for the earlier income year) because of the balancing adjustment.

To find out about balancing adjustments, see Subdivision 40-D.

Effect on section 20-35

In applying section 20-35, treat each of the following as reduced by the balancing charge:

the amount of the loss or outgoing;

the total of what you can deduct for the loss or outgoing for the current year, or have deducted or can deduct for an earlier income year.

Effect on section 20-40

(3) In applying the method statement in subsection 20-40(2), reduce the total deductions for the loss or outgoing by the balancing charge.

Example: Continuing the example in subsection 20-40(2): at the start of the 2005-06 income year, the company:

receives a further $10,000 as recoupment; and

sells the depreciating asset for $75,000.

As a result of the sale, a balancing adjustment of $5,000 is included under section 40-285 in the company’s assessable income for that income year.

How much of the recoupment amount received in the 2005-06 income year is assessable for that income year?

Applying the method statement in subsection 20-40(2):

After step 1: the total assessable recoupment is $30,000 (received during 2002-03 and 2005-06).

After step 2: the recoupment already assessed is $20,000 (for 2002-03 and 2003-04).

After step 3: the unassessed recoupment is: total assessable recoupment minus recoupment already assessed, i.e. $30,000 minus $20,000 = $10,000.

After step 4: the total deductions for the loss or outgoing are $30,000 ($10,000 for each of 2002-03, 2004-04 and 2004-05), reduced by $5,000 (the amount included in assessable income for the balancing adjustment), i.e. $25,000.

After step 5: the outstanding deductions are: total deductions for the loss or outgoing minus recoupment already assessed, i.e. $25,000 minus $20,000 = $5,000.

After step 6: the unassessed recoupment (step 3) is greater than outstanding deductions (step 5), so the amount of the outstanding deductions is included in assessable income, i.e. $5,000.

20-50 If the expense is only partially deductible

(1) This section extends the operation of section 20-35 or 20-40 (as appropriate) to a case where the total of what you can deduct under a provision (the deduction provision) for a loss or outgoing is limited to a proportion of the loss or outgoing.

If you receive an assessable recoupment of the loss or outgoing, section 20-35 or 20-40 applies as if:

(a) you had incurred only that proportion of the loss or outgoing, but could deduct the whole of that proportion under the deduction provision; and

you had received only that proportion of the recoupment.

Example: You incur expenditure of $500. A provision listed in section 20-30 entitles you to deduct 10% of the expenditure ($50) over 5 years. This means you can deduct $10 in each of the 5 years.

You recoup $300 of the expenditure. This section treats you as receiving only 10% of the recoupment. Therefore, $30 is dealt with by section 20-40.

20-55 Meaning of previous recoupment law

(1) Previous recoupment law means a provision of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 listed in this table.

(2) Former section 330-350 of this Act is also a previous recoupment law.

What if you can deduct a loss or outgoing incurred by another entity?

20-60 If you are the only entity that can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing

This Subdivision applies in a different way if:

an entity (other than you) incurs a loss or outgoing; and

you can deduct the whole of the loss or outgoing for an income year, or you can deduct amounts for the loss or outgoing over 2 or more income years; and

no other entity can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing; and

the entity that incurred the loss or outgoing receives one or more amounts as recoupment of the loss or outgoing.

This Subdivision (except this section and section 20-65) applies as if you had incurred the loss or outgoing and had also received the recoupment.

20-65 If 2 or more entities can deduct amounts for the loss or outgoing

Special rules apply if:

(a) an entity (the first entity) incurs a loss or outgoing; and

(b) 2 or more entities (the deducting entities, which may include the first entity) have deducted or can deduct amounts for the loss or outgoing (whether for the same income year or for different income years); and

the first entity receives one or more amounts as recoupment of the loss or outgoing.

(2) This Subdivision (except this section and section 20-60) applies as if the first entity and the deducting entities together constituted a single entity (the notional entity) that had:

incurred the loss or outgoing; and

received the amount or amounts as recoupment; and

included in its assessable income any amount included in the assessable income of any of the deducting entities under a previous recoupment law or this Subdivision (except this section).

(3) If because of subsection (2) the notional entity’s assessable income for an income year (the assessment year) would include an amount under this Subdivision (the assessable amount), the amount reverses in the assessment year the deductions for the loss or outgoing, in accordance with the rules in subsection (5).

The assessable income of each deducting entity for the assessment year includes the total amounts (if any) by which that entity’s actual deductions for the loss or outgoing are reversed in that income year.

Deductions for the loss or outgoing are reversed in the assessment year as follows:

the amounts by which deductions are reversed total the assessable amount (unless all the deductions have been reversed);

a deduction for an income year is not reversed until all deductions for earlier income years have been reversed;

a deduction is not reversed in the assessment year to the extent that it has already been reversed in an earlier year;

if each of 2 or more entities can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing for the same income year, those deductions are reversed in the assessment year by amounts proportionate to the amounts of the deductions.

Subdivision 20-B — Disposal of a car for which lease payments have been deducted

Guide to Subdivision 20-B

20-100 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision reverses the effect of deductions for lease payments for a car leased to you (or to your associate), but only if you make a profit by disposing of the car after acquiring it from the lessor. The smallest of these amounts is included in your assessable income:

your profit on the disposal;

the total deductible lease payments for the period of the lease;

the total amounts you could have deducted for the car’s decline in value if, instead of leasing it, you had owned it and used it solely for the purpose of producing assessable income.

Table of sections

20-105 Map of this Subdivision

The usual case

20-110 Disposal of a leased car for profit

20-115 Working out the profit on the disposal

20-120 Meaning of notional depreciation

The associate case

20-125 Disposal of a leased car for profit

Successive leases

20-130 Successive leases

Previous disposals of the car

20-135 No amount included if earlier disposal for market value

20-140 Reducing the amount to be included if there has been an earlier disposal

Miscellaneous rules

20-145 No amount included if you inherited the car

20-150 Reducing the amount to be included if another provision requires you to include an amount for the disposal

20-155 Exception for particular cars taken on hire

20-157 Exception for small business entities

Disposals of interests in a car: special rules apply

20-160 Disposal of an interest in a car

20-105 Map of this Subdivision

The usual case

20-110 Disposal of a leased car for profit

Your assessable income includes the *profit you make on disposing of a car if:

the car was designed mainly for carrying passengers; and

the car was leased to you and has been leased to no-one else; and

you or another entity can deduct for the income year any of the lease payments paid or payable by you, or have deducted or can deduct any of them for an earlier income year, under this Act; and

you acquired the car from the lessor.

Note 1: Even if subsection (1) does not apply, an amount may still be included in your assessable income:

under section 20-125 (which deals with more complicated cases that may involve your associate); or

if you disposed of an interest in a car (rather than the car itself): see section 20-160.

Note 2: In some cases you do not include an amount in your assessable income:

if there has been an earlier disposal of the car for market value: see section 20-135; or

if you inherited the car: see section 20-145; or

if the car was let on hire in the circumstances set out in section 20-155.

However, the amount included cannot exceed the smaller of these limits:

the total lease payments for the lease that you or another entity have deducted or can deduct under this Act for an income year;

the amount of *notional depreciation for the lease period.

Note 1: If, because of more than one lease of the car, there is more than one way to work out the amount to be included, you only include the largest amount: see section 20-130.

Note 2: In some cases you reduce the amount to be included:

if there has been an earlier disposal of the car, or of an interest in it: see section 20-140; or

if another provision requires you to include an amount because of the disposal: see section 20-150.

You increase those limits if you have previously leased the car from the same lessor, or from an associate of that lessor.

You increase the first limit by the total lease payments for each previous lease of that kind that you or another entity have deducted or can deduct under this Act for an income year.

You increase the second limit by the amount of *notional depreciation for the period of each previous lease of that kind.

20-115 Working out the profit on the disposal

(1) The profit on the disposal is the amount by which the *consideration receivable for the disposal exceeds:

the amount it cost you to acquire the car;

plus:

any capital expenditure you incurred on the car after acquiring it.

(2) The consideration receivable is worked out using this table:

(3) However, if the disposal of the *car is a *taxable supply, the consideration receivable does not include an amount equal to the *GST payable on the supply.

20-120 Meaning of notional depreciation

This is how to work out the notional depreciation for a lease period:

Method statement

Step 1. Compare:

• the car’s *cost to the lessor for the purposes of Subdivision 40-C (which is about working out the cost of *depreciating assets);

with:

• the car’s termination value for the purposes of section 40-300 when the lessor disposed of it.

Step 2. If the car’s cost exceeds the car’s termination value, multiply the excess by:

• the number of days in the lease period;

divided by:

• the number of days the lessor owned the car.

Step 3. The result is the notional depreciation for the lease period.

Step 4. If the car’s cost does not exceed the car’s termination value, the notional depreciation for the lease period is zero.

Note 1: The notional depreciation for the lease period represents:

the amount you could have deducted for the car’s decline in value if, instead of leasing it, you had owned it and used it solely for the purpose of producing assessable income for that period;

adjusted by:

the balancing adjustment you would have made if you had disposed of the car at the end of that period.

Note 2: The car’s cost to the lessor is worked out differently if the lessor acquired it in the 1996-97 income year or an earlier income year: see section 20-105 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 3: The car’s termination value is worked out differently if the lessor disposed of it in the 1996-97 income year or an earlier income year: see section 20-110 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

The associate case

20-125 Disposal of a leased car for profit

Your assessable income includes the *profit you make on disposing of a car if:

(a) section 20-110 does not include an amount in your assessable income because of the disposal; and

the car was designed mainly for carrying passengers; and

the car was leased to you or your associate; and

you, your associate or another entity can deduct for the income year any of the lease payments paid or payable by the lessee, or have deducted or can deduct any of them for an earlier income year, under this Act; and

either:

you, your associate, or entities including you or your associate, acquired the car from the lessor; or

another entity acquired the car from the lessor under an arrangement that enabled you or your associate to acquire the car.

Note 1: Even if subsection (1) does not apply, an amount may be included in your assessable income if you disposed of an interest in a car (rather than the car itself): see section 20-160.

Note 2: In some cases you do not include an amount in your assessable income:

if there has been an earlier disposal of the car for market value: see section 20-135; or

if you inherited the car: see section 20-145; or

if the car was let on hire in the circumstances set out in section 20-155.

However, the amount included cannot exceed the smallest of these limits:

the total lease payments for the lease that you, your associate or another entity have deducted or can deduct under this Act for an income year;

the amount of *notional depreciation for the lease period;

if an entity other than you, or if entities including you, acquired the car from the lessor—the amount by which the *consideration receivable for the disposal of the car by you exceeds the total of:

the car’s cost to that entity, or those entities; and

any capital expenditure that entity, or any of those entities, incurred on the car after that acquisition and before you acquired it.

Note 1: If, because of more than one lease of the car, there is more than one way to work out the amount to be included, you only include the largest amount: see section 20-130.

Note 2: In some cases you reduce the amount to be included:

if there has been an earlier disposal of the car, or of an interest in it: see section 20-140; or

if another provision requires you to include an amount because of the disposal: see section 20-150.

Example: Your associate leases a car for 5 years and then acquires it from the lessor for $4,000. Your associate sells it to you for $3,000. You sell it for $10,000.

Your profit is $10,000 (the consideration receivable) less $3,000 (the car’s cost to you) = $7,000.

The first 2 limits on the amount to be included in your assessable income are $9,000 (total deductible lease payments for the lease) and $8,000 (notional depreciation for the lease period).

Since your associate acquired the car from the lessor, the third limit is $10,000 (the consideration receivable by you) less $4,000 (the car’s cost to the associate) = $6,000.

The amount you include in your assessable income cannot exceed the smallest of the limits. So, you do not include your profit of $7,000. Instead, you include $6,000 (the smallest of the limits).

You increase the first 2 limits if you, or your associate, have previously leased the car from the same lessor, or from an associate of that lessor.

You increase the first limit by the total lease payments for each previous lease of that kind that you, your associate or another entity have deducted or can deduct under this Act for an income year.

You increase the second limit by the amount of *notional depreciation for the period of each previous lease of that kind.

Successive leases

20-130 Successive leases

If, because of 2 or more leases of the car, there are different amounts that could be included in your assessable income because of the disposal, only the largest of those amounts is included.

Previous disposals of the car

20-135 No amount included if earlier disposal for market value

You do not include an amount in your assessable income because of the disposal if, after the lessor disposed of the *car and before you disposed of it, an entity other than you disposed of the car and:

the *consideration receivable for that disposal was at least the *market value of the car at the time of that disposal; or

because of that disposal, that market value was included, or an amount worked out using that market value was included, in the entity’s assessable income under this Act.

20-140 Reducing the amount to be included if there has been an earlier disposal

Each limit on the amount to be included in your assessable income because of your disposal of the car is reduced if, after the lease period began and before your disposal, the car, or an interest in it, was disposed of in one of these situations:

Examples: Your associate leases a car for 5 years and then acquires it. Your associate disposes of it to you and section 20-110 includes $500 in your associate’s assessable income.

You later dispose of the car.

In working out the amount to include in your assessable income for your disposal, you can reduce each limit in subsection 20-125(2) by $500 because the disposal by your associate occurred after the lease period began.

Contrast this case:

You lease a car for 5 years and then acquire it. You dispose of it to another entity and section 20-110 includes $1,000 in your assessable income.

You lease the car from that entity for 2 years and then acquire it. You later dispose of it.

In working out the amount to include in your assessable income in respect of the second lease, you cannot reduce each limit in subsection 20-110(2) by $1,000 because the first disposal did not occur after the start of that lease.

Miscellaneous rules

Note: If the earlier disposal occurred in the 1996-97 income year or an earlier income year, each limit may be able to be reduced by a further amount: see section 20-115 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

20-145 No amount included if you inherited the car

You do not include an amount in your assessable income because of the disposal if you inherited the *car.

20-150 Reducing the amount to be included if another provision requires you to include an amount for the disposal

The amount to be included in your assessable income because of the disposal is reduced by any amount that another provision of this Act (except sections 40-285 and 40-370) requires you to include in your assessable income because of the disposal.

Note: sections 40-285 and 40-370 are about including an amount after making a balancing adjustment on the disposal of a car.

20-155 Exception for particular cars taken on hire

This Subdivision does not apply to these kinds of leases:

letting a car on hire under a *hire purchase agreement; or

letting a car on hire under an agreement of a kind ordinarily entered into by people who take cars on hire intermittently on an hourly, daily, weekly or monthly basis.

20-157 Exception for small business entities

This Subdivision does not apply to you if, at any time in the income year in which you disposed of the car, it was allocated to a pool of yours under Division 328.

Disposals of interests in a car: special rules apply

20-160 Disposal of an interest in a car

This Subdivision applies to the disposal of an interest in a car in almost the same way as it does to the disposal of the car itself. The differences are set out below.

(2) Your assessable income includes so much of your *profit on the disposal as is reasonable. The limits in subsections 20-110(2) and 20-125(2) do not apply.

The cost of the interest to you is taken to be a reasonable amount.

(4) Sections 20-135 and 20-140 do not apply to the disposal.

Note 1: Section 20-135 says that you do not include an amount if there has been an earlier disposal of the car for market value.

Note 2: Section 20-140 allows you to reduce the amount to be included if there has been an earlier disposal of the car.

Section 20-145 applies to the disposal if you inherited either the interest or the car itself.

Note: Section 20-145 says that you do not include an amount if you inherited the car.

Part 2-5 — Rules about deductibility of particular kinds of amounts

Division 25 — Some amounts you can deduct

Guide to Division 25

25-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out some amounts you can deduct. Remember that the general rules about deductions in Division 8 (which is about general deductions) apply to this Division.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

25-5 Tax-related expenses

25-10 Repairs

25-15 Amount paid for lease obligation to repair

25-20 Lease document expenses

25-25 Borrowing expenses

25-30 Expenses of discharging a mortgage

25-35 Bad debts

25-40 Loss from profit-making undertaking or plan

25-45 Loss by theft etc.

25-47 Misappropriation where a balancing adjustment event occurs

25-50 Payments of pensions, gratuities or retiring allowances

25-55 Payments to associations

25-60 Parliament election expenses

25-65 Local government election expenses

25-70 Deduction for election expenses does not extend to entertainment

25-75 Rates and land taxes on premises used to produce mutual receipts

25-85 Certain returns in respect of debt interests

25-90 Deduction relating to foreign non-assessable non-exempt income

25-95 Deduction for work in progress amounts

25-100 Travel between workplaces

25-110 Capital expenditure to terminate lease etc.

25-115 Deduction for payment of rent from land investment by operating entity to asset entity in relation to approved economic infrastructure facility

25-120 Transitional—deduction for payment of rent from land investment by operating entity to asset entity

25-125 COVID-19 tests

25-130 Standard deduction for work-related expenses

Operative provisions

25-5 Tax-related expenses

You can deduct expenditure you incur to the extent that it is for:

managing your tax affairs; or

complying with an obligation imposed on you by a Commonwealth law, insofar as that obligation relates to the tax affairs of an entity; or

a penalty under Subdivision 162-D of the GST Act; or

(cb) levy under the Major Bank Levy Act 2017; or

obtaining a valuation in accordance with section 30-212 or 31-15; or

managing your Australian GloBE tax affairs; or

complying with an obligation imposed on you by a Commonwealth law, insofar as that obligation relates to the Australian GloBE tax affairs of an entity.

Note 1: To find out whether a trustee of a deceased estate can deduct expenditure under this section, see subsection 69(7) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: If you receive an amount as recoupment of the expenditure, the amount may be included in your assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

No deduction for certain expenditure

You cannot deduct under subsection (1):

*tax; or

(b) an amount withheld or payable under Part 2-5 or Part 2-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; or

expenditure for borrowing money (including payments of interest) to pay an amount covered by paragraph (a) or (b); or

expenditure for a matter relating to the commission (or possible commission) of an offence against an Australian law or a foreign law; or

a fee or commission for advice about the operation of a Commonwealth law relating to taxation, unless that advice is provided by a *recognised tax adviser.

No deduction for expenditure excluded from general deductions

You cannot deduct expenditure under subsection (1) to the extent that a provision of this Act (except section 8-1) expressly prevents or limits your deducting it under section 8-1 (about general deductions). It does not matter whether the provision specifically refers to section 8-1.

No deduction for capital expenditure

You cannot deduct capital expenditure under subsection (1). However, for this purpose, expenditure is not capital expenditure merely because the tax affairs or Australian GloBE tax affairs concerned relate to matters of a capital nature.

Example: Under this section, you can deduct expenditure you incur in applying for a private ruling on whether you can depreciate an item of property.

Use of property taken to be for income producing purpose

Under some provisions of this Act it is important to decide whether you used property for the *purpose of producing assessable income. For provisions of that kind, your use of property is taken to be for that purpose insofar as you use the property for:

managing your tax affairs; or

complying with an obligation imposed on you by a Commonwealth law, insofar as that obligation relates to the tax affairs of another entity.

Example: You buy a computer to prepare your tax returns. The expenditure you incur in buying the computer is capital expenditure and cannot be deducted under this section.

However, to the extent that you use the computer in preparing your income tax return, you will be able to deduct the decline in value of your computer under Division 40. That is because, under this subsection, the computer is property that you are taken to use for the purpose of producing assessable income.

If another provision of this Act expressly provides that a particular use of property is not taken to be for the *purpose of producing assessable income, that provision overrides subsection (5).

Expenditure by trustee of deceased estate

If:

after you die, the trustee of your deceased estate incurs expenditure; and

had you incurred the expenditure before you died, you could have deducted it under subsection (1);

for the purposes of assessing the trustee for the income year in which you died, the expenditure is a deduction under that subsection.

25-10 Repairs

(1) You can deduct expenditure you incur for repairs to premises (or part of premises) or a *depreciating asset that you held or used solely for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

Property held or used partly for that purpose

(2) If you held or used the property only partly for that purpose, you can deduct so much of the expenditure as is reasonable in the circumstances.

No deduction for capital expenditure

You cannot deduct capital expenditure under this section.

25-15 Amount paid for lease obligation to repair

You can deduct an amount that you pay for failing to comply with a lease obligation to make repairs to premises if you use or have used the premises for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

Note: The amount is assessable income of the entity to which you pay it: either as ordinary income under section 6-5 or because it is included by section 15-25.

25-20 Lease document expenses

You can deduct expenditure you incur for preparing, registering or stamping:

a lease of property; or

an assignment or surrender of a lease of property;

if you have used or will use the property solely for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

Property used partly for that purpose

(2) If you have used, or will use, the leased property only partly for that purpose, you can deduct the expenditure to the extent that you have used, or will use, the leased property for that purpose.

25-25 Borrowing expenses

You can deduct expenditure you incur for borrowing money, to the extent that you use the money for the *purpose of producing assessable income. In most cases the deduction is spread over the period of the loan.

For the cases where the deduction is not spread, see subsection (6).

Income year when money used solely for the purpose of producing assessable income

Note: Your deductions under this section may be reduced if any of your commercial debts have been forgiven in the income year: see Subdivision 245-E.

(2) You can deduct for an income year the maximum amount worked out under subsection (4) if you use the *borrowed money during that income year solely for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

Example: In 1997-98 you borrow $100,000 and incur expenditure of $1,500 for the borrowing. You use the money to buy a house. Throughout 1998-99 you rent the house to a tenant. You can deduct for the expenditure for 1998-99 the maximum amount worked out under subsection (4).

Income year when borrowed money used partly for that purpose

(3) If you use the money only partly for that purpose during that income year, you can deduct the proportion of that maximum amount that is appropriate having regard to the extent that you used the *borrowed money for that purpose.

Note: You cannot deduct anything for that income year if you do not use the money for that purpose at all during that income year.

Maximum deduction for an income year

You work out as follows the maximum amount that you can deduct for the expenditure for an income year:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the remaining expenditure as follows:

• For the income year in which the period of the loan begins, it is the amount of the expenditure.

• For a later income year, it is the amount of the expenditure reduced by the maximum amount that you can deduct for the expenditure for each earlier income year.

Step 2. Work out the remaining loan period as follows:

• For the income year in which the period of the loan begins, it is the period of the loan (as determined at the end of the income year).

• For a later income year, it is the period from the start of the income year until the end of the period of the loan (as determined at the end of the income year).

Step 3. Divide the remaining expenditure by the number of days in the remaining loan period.

Step 4. Multiply the result from Step 3 by the number of days in the remaining loan period that are in the income year.

Applying the method statement:

After Step 1: the remaining expenditure is $1,500 (the amount of the expenditure).

After Step 2: the remaining loan period is 4 years from 1 September 1997 (1,461 days).

After Step 3: the result is $1,500 divided by 1,461 = $1.03.

After Step 4: the result is $1.03 multiplied by 302 days = $310.06.

Suppose you repay the loan early, on 31 December 1998. What is the maximum amount you can deduct for the expenditure for 1998-99?

Applying the method statement:

After Step 1: the remaining expenditure is $1,500 (the amount of the expenditure) reduced by $310.06 (the maximum amount you can deduct for 1997-98) = $1,189.94.

After Step 2: the remaining loan period is the period from 1 July 1998 to 31 December 1998 (183 days).

After Step 3: the result is $1,189.94 divided by 183 days = $6.50.

After Step 4: the result is $6.50 multiplied by 183 days = $1,189.94.

Meaning of period of the loan

Example: To continue the example in subsection (2): suppose the original period of the loan is 4 years starting on 1 September 1997. What is the maximum amount you can deduct for the expenditure for 1997-98?

(5) The period of the loan is the shortest of these periods:

the period of the loan as specified in the original loan contract;

the period starting on the first day on which the money was borrowed and ending on the day the loan is repaid;

5 years starting on the first day on which the money was borrowed.

When deduction not spread

If the total of the following is $100 or less:

(a) each amount of expenditure you incur in an income year for *borrowing money you use during that income year solely for the *purpose of producing assessable income;

(b) for each amount of expenditure you incur in that income year for borrowing money you use during that income year only partly for that purpose—the proportion of that amount that is appropriate having regard to the extent that you use the money during that income year for that purpose;

you can deduct for the income year:

each amount covered by paragraph (a); and

each proportion covered by paragraph (b).

25-30 Expenses of discharging a mortgage

Mortgage for borrowed money

(1) You can deduct expenditure you incur to discharge a mortgage that you gave as security for the repayment of money that you *borrowed if you used the money solely for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

Mortgage for property bought

(2) You can deduct expenditure you incur to discharge a mortgage that you gave as security for the payment of the whole or part of the purchase price of property that you bought if you used the property solely for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

Money or property used partly for that purpose

(3) If you used the money you *borrowed, or the property you bought, only partly for the *purpose of producing assessable income, you can deduct the expenditure to the extent that you used the money or property for that purpose.

No deduction for payments of principal or interest

You cannot deduct payments of principal or interest under this section.

25-35 Bad debts

You can deduct a debt (or part of a debt) that you write off as bad in the income year if:

it was included in your assessable income for the income year or for an earlier income year; or

it is in respect of money that you lent in the ordinary course of your business of lending money.

Note: If a bad debt is in respect of a payment that is required to be made under a qualifying security (within the meaning of Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936): see subsection 63(1A) of that Act.

Writing off a debt you have bought

You can deduct a debt that you write off as bad in the income year if you bought the debt in the ordinary course of your business of lending money. However, you cannot deduct more than the expenditure you incurred in buying the debt.

Writing off part of a debt you have bought

You can deduct a part of a debt if:

you write off that part as bad in the income year; and

you bought the debt in the ordinary course of your business of lending money.

However, the maximum that you can deduct under subsection (3) for one or more income years is the amount (if any) by which:

• the expenditure you incurred in buying the debt;

exceeds:

• so much of the debt as has not yet been written off as bad.

Limit on deductions for bad debts under leases of luxury cars

There is a limit to how much you can deduct under this section for debts you write off that relate to *luxury car lease payments that have become or will become liable to be made under a lease of a car to which Division 242 (about luxury car leases) applies.

The most you can deduct for an income year is:

• the interest for the notional loan you are taken to have made to the lessee;

reduced by:

• each amount that you have deducted, or can deduct, for an earlier income year under this section (or section 63 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) for debts relating to *luxury car lease payments that have become or will become liable to be made under the lease.

Special rules affecting deductions under this section

The rules described in the table may affect your entitlement to deductions under this section, or may result in a deduction being reversed.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 are identified in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: Subsections 230-180(3), (5) and (6) and 230-195(3), (5) and (6) provide that in certain circumstances a deduction for a loss in relation to a financial arrangement is to be treated, for the purposes of this Act, as a deduction of a bad debt. The rules referred to in this subsection apply to that deduction.

25-40 Loss from profit-making undertaking or plan

You can deduct a loss arising from the carrying on or carrying out of a profit-making undertaking or plan if any profit from that plan would have been included in your assessable income by section 15-15 (which is about profit-making undertakings and plans).

When section does not apply

You cannot deduct a loss under subsection (1) if the loss arises in respect of the sale of property acquired on or after 20 September 1985.

Note: If you sell property you acquired before 20 September 1985 for profit-making by sale, you may be able to deduct a loss on the sale: see section 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Notice to Commissioner

You can deduct a loss under subsection (1), insofar as it arises in respect of property, only if:

you notified the Commissioner that you acquired the property for the purpose of profit-making by sale or for the carrying on or carrying out of any profit-making undertaking or plan (however described); or

the Commissioner is satisfied that you acquired the property for either of those purposes.

When notice must have been given

The notice must have been given at or before the time you lodged your income tax return:

for the income year in which you acquired the property; or

(b) if you were not required to lodge an income tax return for that income year—for the first income year after that income year for which you were required to lodge one.

25-45 Loss by theft etc.

You can deduct a loss in respect of money if:

you discover the loss in the income year; and

the loss was caused by theft, stealing, embezzlement, larceny, defalcation or misappropriation by your employee or *agent (other than an individual you employ solely for private purposes); and

the money was included in your assessable income for the income year, or for an earlier income year.

Note: If you receive an amount as recoupment of the loss, the amount may be included in your assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

25-47 Misappropriation where a balancing adjustment event occurs

You can deduct an amount if:

a balancing adjustment event occurs for a depreciating asset you *held; and

your employee or *agent misappropriates (whether by theft, embezzlement, larceny or otherwise) all or part of the amount applicable to you under:

item 8 of the table in subsection 40-300(2); or

item 1, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 40-305(1);

in relation to the balancing adjustment event.

Note 1: The amount applicable to you under subsection 40-300(2) or 40-305(1) may be the market value of an asset or of a non-cash benefit.

Note 2: If you receive an amount as recoupment of the amount misappropriated, the amount may be included in your assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

The amount you can deduct is so much of the amount misappropriated as represents an amount applicable to you under item 8 of the table in subsection 40-300(2) or item 1, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 40-305(1) in relation to the balancing adjustment event.

You can deduct the amount for the income year in which the misappropriation happens.

You must reduce the amount you can deduct under this section if your deductions for the asset have been reduced under section 40-25 because of use for a purpose other than a taxable purpose. The reduction is by the same proportion you reduce the balancing adjustment amount for the asset under section 40-290.

You must further reduce the amount you can deduct under this section if your deductions for the asset have been reduced under section 40-27 (about second-hand assets in residential property). The reduction is by the same proportion you reduce the balancing adjustment amount for the asset under section 40-291.

(5) Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this section for an income year if:

you discover the misappropriation after you lodged your income tax return for the income year; and

the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after you discover the misappropriation.

25-50 Payments of pensions, gratuities or retiring allowances

You can deduct a payment of a pension, gratuity or retiring allowance that you make to:

an employee; or

a former employee; or

a dependant of an employee or a former employee.

However, you can deduct it only to the extent that it is made in good faith in consideration of the past services of the employee, or former employee, in any business that you carried on for the purpose of gaining or producing assessable income.

You cannot deduct a payment under this section if you can deduct it under any other provision of this Act.

25-55 Payments to associations

You can deduct a payment you make for membership of a trade, business or professional association.

Note: Alternatively, you can deduct the expense under section 8-1 (which is about general deductions) if you satisfy the requirements of that section.

Maximum amount—$42

However, $42 is the maximum amount you can deduct under this section for the payments that you make in the income year to any one association.

If you deduct under section 8-1

If you deduct a payment under section 8-1 (which is about general deductions) instead of this section:

(a) the payment does not count towards the $42 limit; and

(b) the amount that you can deduct for the payment is not limited to $42.

25-60 Parliament election expenses

You can deduct expenditure you incur in contesting an election for membership of:

the Parliament of the Commonwealth; or

the Parliament of a State; or

the Legislative Assembly for the Australian Capital Territory; or

the Legislative Assembly of the Northern Territory of Australia.

Note 1: Entertainment expenses are excluded: see section 25-70.

Note 2: If you receive an amount as recoupment of the expenditure, the amount may be included in your assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

25-65 Local government election expenses

You can deduct expenditure you incur in contesting an election for membership of a local governing body, but you cannot deduct more than $1,000 per election. You deduct the expenditure for the income year in which you incur it.

However, you can deduct more than the $1,000 limit if:

you have received an amount as recoupment of the expenditure; and

some or all of that amount is included in your assessable income for an income year; and

(c) the total of your deductions for the election would be less than the $1,000 limit if you disregarded so much (the assessed recoupment) of the expenditure as equals the amount so included in your assessable income.

In that case:

the assessed recoupment is disregarded in applying the $1,000 limit; and

the further amount that you can deduct because of paragraph (d) is deducted for the income year referred to in paragraph (b).

Example: Chris is elected to the Bunyip Shire Council. In the 2007-08 income year he incurs expenditure of $1,200 in contesting the election, of which he deducts $1,000 (the limit under subsection (1)).

In 2008-09, Chris receives $360 as an assessable recoupment of the expenditure. $300 of that is included in his assessable income by section 20-35 (as extended by section 20-50).

Because of the assessable recoupment, $300 of the expenditure is disregarded under paragraph (2)(d) in applying the $1,000 limit. As a result, Chris’s deductions are treated as being only $700, which is less than the limit. This does not affect his original deduction for 2007-2008, but it means he can deduct the previously undeducted $200, for 2008-09 (see paragraph (2)(e)).

This triggers a further application of section 20-35 (as extended by section 20-50) to include the remaining $60 of the assessable recoupment in Chris’s assessable income for 2008-09. His total deductions (net of recoupment included in assessable income) come to $840, which is the same as his original expenditure (net of recoupment).

Note: An amount you receive as recoupment of expenditure may be included in your assessable income as an assessable recoupment under Subdivision 20-A, as ordinary income under section 6-5 or as statutory income under some other provision.

25-70 Deduction for election expenses does not extend to entertainment

To the extent that you incur expenditure in respect of providing entertainment, you cannot deduct it under section 25-60 or 25-65.

However, subsection (1) does not stop you deducting expenditure to the extent that you incur it in respect of:

providing entertainment that is available to the public generally; or

providing food or drink to yourself, unless it would be concluded that you have a purpose of enabling or facilitating entertainment to be provided to someone else.

25-75 Rates and land taxes on premises used to produce mutual receipts

An entity can deduct these amounts it pays for premises:

rates which are annually assessed;

land tax imposed under a State law or Territory law.

But only if it uses the premises:

for the purpose of producing mutual receipts; or

in carrying on a business for the purpose of producing mutual receipts; or

for the purpose of producing amounts to which section 59-35 applies (amounts that would be mutual receipts but for prohibition on distributions to members or issue of MCIs); or

in carrying on a business for the purpose of producing amounts to which section 59-35 applies.

Note: If the entity receives an amount as recoupment of the rates or land tax, the amount may be included in its assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A

When premises used only for deductible purposes

(2) The entity can deduct the whole of the rates or land tax if it uses the premises only in one or more of these ways:

for the purpose of producing mutual receipts;

in carrying on a business for the purpose of producing mutual receipts;

for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

When premises used partly for deductible purposes

(3) If the entity uses the premises partly in one or more of the ways referred to in subsection (2) and partly in some other way, it can deduct the rates or land tax to the extent that it uses the premises in one or more of the ways referred to in that subsection.

No deduction under section 8-1

The entity cannot deduct the rates or land tax under section 8-1 (which is about general deductions).

25-85 Certain returns in respect of debt interests

This section deals with a *return that an entity pays or provides on a *debt interest.

The *return is not prevented from being a general deduction for an income year under section 8-1 merely because:

the return is contingent on aspects of the economic performance (whether past, current or future) of:

the entity or a part of the entity’s activities; or

a *connected entity of the entity or a part of the activities of a connected entity of the entity; or

the return secures a permanent or enduring benefit for the entity or a connected entity of the entity.

If the *return is a dividend, the entity can deduct the return to the extent to which it would have been a general deduction under section 8-1 if:

the payment of the return were the incurring by the entity of a liability to pay the same amount as interest; and

that interest were incurred in respect of the finance raised by the entity and in respect of which the return was paid or provided; and

the *debt interest retained its character as a debt interest for the purposes of subsection (2).

Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply to a *return to the extent to which it would be a general deduction under section 8-1 apart from this section.

Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply to a *return on a *debt interest that is a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

Subject to regulations made for the purposes of subsection (6), subsections (2) and (3) do not apply to the return to the extent to which the annually compounded internal rate of return exceeds the *benchmark rate of return for the interest increased by 150 basis points.

The regulations may provide that subsection (5) applies in the circumstances specified in the regulations as if the reference to 150 basis points were a reference to a greater or lesser number of basis points.

25-90 Deduction relating to foreign non-assessable non-exempt income

An Australian entity can deduct an amount of loss or outgoing from its assessable income for an income year if:

the amount is incurred by the entity in deriving income from a foreign source; and

(b) the income is *non-assessable non-exempt income under section 768-5, or section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

(c) the amount is a cost in relation to a *debt interest issued by the entity that is covered by paragraph (1)(a) of the definition of debt deduction.

Note: This section does not apply to a Division 230 financial arrangement.

25-95 Deduction for work in progress amounts

You can deduct a work in progress amount that you pay for the income year in which you pay it to the extent that, as at the end of that income year:

a recoverable debt has arisen in respect of the completion or partial completion of the work to which the amount related; or

you reasonably expect a recoverable debt to arise in respect of the completion or partial completion of that work within the period of 12 months after the amount was paid.

You can deduct the remainder (if any) of the work in progress amount for the following income year.

(3) An amount is a work in progress amount to the extent that:

(a) an entity agrees to pay the amount to another entity (the recipient); and

the amount can be identified as being in respect of work (but not goods) that has been partially performed by the recipient for a third entity but not yet completed to the stage where a recoverable debt has arisen in respect of the completion or partial completion of the work.

(4) An amount does not stop being a work in progress amount merely because it is paid after a recoverable debt has arisen in respect of the completion or partial completion of the work to which the amount related.

25-100 Travel between workplaces

When a deduction is allowed

If you are an individual, you can deduct a transport expense to the extent that it is incurred in your travel between workplaces.

Transport expense

(1A) A transport expense is a loss or outgoing to do with transport (including the decline in value of a *depreciating asset used in connection with transport) but does not include:

a loss or outgoing for accommodation or for food or drink; or

expenditure incidental to transport.

Travel between workplaces

(2) Your travel between workplaces is travel directly between 2 places, to the extent that:

while you were at the first place, you were:

engaged in activities to gain or produce your assessable income; or

engaged in activities in the course of carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income; and

the purpose of your travel to the second place was to:

engage in activities to gain or produce your assessable income; or

engage in activities in the course of carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income;

and you engaged in those activities while you were at the second place.

(3) Travel between 2 places is not travel between workplaces if one of the places you are travelling between is a place at which you reside.

(4) Travel between 2 places is not travel between workplaces if, at the time of your travel to the second place:

the arrangement under which you gained or produced assessable income at the first place has ceased; or

the business in respect of which you engaged in activities at the first place has ceased.

No deduction for capital expenditure

You cannot deduct expenditure under subsection (1) to the extent that the expenditure is capital, or of a capital nature.

25-110 Capital expenditure to terminate lease etc.

You can deduct an amount for capital expenditure you incur to terminate a lease or licence (including an authority, permit or quota) that results in the termination of the lease or licence if the expenditure is incurred:

in the course of carrying on a business; or

in connection with ceasing to carry on a business.

The amount you can deduct is 20% of the expenditure:

for the income year in which the lease or licence is terminated; and

for each of the next 4 income years.

Exceptions

You cannot deduct any amount for expenditure you incur to terminate a lease that, in accordance with accounting standards, or statements of accounting concepts made by the Australian Accounting Standards Board, is classified as a finance lease.

If you incurred the expenditure under an arrangement and:

there is at least one other party to the arrangement with whom you did not deal at *arm’s length; and

apart from this subsection, the amount of the expenditure would be more than the *market value of what it was for (assuming the termination did not occur and was never proposed to occur);

the amount of expenditure you take into account is that market value.

You cannot deduct any amount for expenditure you incur to terminate a lease or licence if:

after the termination, you or an associate of yours enters into another lease or licence with the same party or an associate of that party; and

the other lease or licence is of the same kind as the original one.

You cannot deduct any amount for expenditure you incur to terminate a lease or licence to the extent that the expenditure is for the granting or receipt of another lease or licence in relation to the asset that was the subject of the original lease or licence.

25-115 Deduction for payment of rent from land investment by operating entity to asset entity in relation to approved economic infrastructure facility

An entity that is an operating entity in relation to a cross staple arrangement can deduct an amount, for an income year, of rent from land investment if:

another entity derives or receives the amount from the operating entity:

in the income year; and

on or after 27 March 2018; and

the cross staple arrangement was entered into in relation to:

(i) a facility that is covered by section 12-439 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 at a time in the income year; or

an improvement to a facility that is covered by that section at a time in the income year; and

the other entity is an asset entity in relation to the cross staple arrangement; and

apart from this subsection, the operating entity could otherwise deduct the amount under this Act; and

the amount is excepted MIT CSA income of the asset entity for the income year; and

each entity that is a *stapled entity in relation to the cross staple arrangement has made a choice in accordance with subsection (3).

If the asset entity is not a managed investment trust in relation to the income year, for the purposes of paragraph (1)(e), treat it as a managed investment trust in relation to the income year.

An entity makes a choice in accordance with this subsection if:

the entity makes the choice in the approved form; and

the entity makes the choice before:

the start of the income year in which the asset is first put to use; or

a later time allowed by the Commissioner; and

the entity gives the choice to the Commissioner within 60 days after the entity makes the choice.

The choice cannot be revoked.

25-120 Transitional—deduction for payment of rent from land investment by operating entity to asset entity

(1) This section applies if the requirements in subsection 12-440(1) or (2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 are satisfied in relation to a *cross staple arrangement.

An entity that is an operating entity in relation to the cross staple arrangement can deduct, for an income year, an amount of rent from land investment if:

another entity derives or receives the amount from the operating entity at a time that:

is in the income year; and

is on or after 27 March 2018; and

(iii) meets the requirements in subsection 12-440(4) of Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; and

the other entity is an asset entity in relation to the cross staple arrangement; and

apart from this subsection, the operating entity could otherwise deduct the amount under this Act; and

the amount is excepted MIT CSA income of the asset entity for the income year.

If the asset entity is not a managed investment trust in relation to the income year, for the purposes of paragraph (2)(d), treat it as a managed investment trust in relation to the income year.

25-125 COVID-19 tests

You can deduct a loss or outgoing to the extent it is incurred in gaining or producing your assessable income if:

you are an individual; and

the loss or outgoing is incurred in respect of testing you for the novel coronavirus SARS-CoV-2 that causes COVID-19 using a test covered by subsection (3); and

the purpose of testing you is to determine whether you may attend or remain at a place where you:

engage in activities to gain or produce your assessable income; or

engage in activities in the course of carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income.

However, you cannot deduct a loss or outgoing under this section to the extent that it is a loss or outgoing of capital, or of a capital nature.

This subsection covers a test that:

is a polymerase chain reaction test; or

(b) is a therapeutic good (within the meaning of the Therapeutic Goods Act 1989) that:

is included in the Australian Register of Therapeutic Goods maintained under section 9A of that Act; and

has an intended purpose, accepted in relation to that inclusion, that relates to the detection of the novel coronavirus SARS-CoV-2 that causes COVID-19.

25-130 Standard deduction for work-related expenses

You can deduct the amount provided by subsection (2) for an income year if:

you are an individual; and

you are an Australian resident at any time during the income year; and

you derive assessable labour income in the income year.

The amount is the lesser of:

$1,000; and

the total amount of your assessable labour income for the income year;

reduced, but not below zero, by the sum of the following amounts (if any):

subject to subsection (3), each of your deductions for the income year under section 8-1 (general deductions), to the extent that the loss or outgoing that gives rise to the deduction is incurred in gaining or producing your assessable labour income;

each of your deductions for the income year under Division 28 (car expenses), to the extent that the deduction arises in respect of gaining or producing your assessable labour income;

each of your deductions for the income year under section 25-100 (travel between workplaces), to the extent that either of the following is satisfied in relation to the deduction:

(i) while you were at the first place mentioned in paragraph 25-100(2)(a), you were engaged in activities to gain or produce your assessable labour income;

(ii) while you were at the second place mentioned in paragraph 25-100(2)(b), you were engaged in activities to gain or produce your assessable labour income;

each of your deductions for the income year under any of the following provisions, to the extent that the deduction arises in respect of a depreciating asset that is used for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable labour income:

section 25-10 (repairs);

Subdivision 40-B (deducting amounts for depreciating assets);

Subdivision 40-D (balancing adjustments);

each of your deductions under section 25-125 (COVID-19 tests) for the income year.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(c), disregard each of your deductions under section 8-1 to the extent that the deduction is in respect of any of the following:

an income protection insurance premium;

a personal sickness insurance premium;

an accident insurance premium;

membership of a trade, business or professional association.

(4) Your assessable labour income, for an income year, is each amount included in your assessable income for the income year from which an amount must be withheld (even if the amount is not withheld) under any of the following provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953:

section 12-35 (payment to employee);

section 12-40 (payment to company director);

section 12-45 (payment to office holder);

section 12-47 (payment to religious practitioners);

section 12-50 (return to work payment);

Subdivision 12-C (payments for retirement or because of termination of employment);

paragraph 12-110(1)(ca) (parental leave pay).

Division 26 — Some amounts you cannot deduct, or cannot deduct in full

Guide to Division 26

26-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out some amounts that you cannot deduct, or that you cannot deduct in full.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

26-5 Penalties

26-10 Leave payments

26-15 Franchise fees windfall tax

26-17 Commonwealth places windfall tax

26-19 Rebatable benefits

26-20 Assistance to students

26-22 Political contributions and gifts

26-25 Interest or royalty

26-25A Payments to employees—labour mobility programs

26-26 Non-share distribution and dividends

26-30 Relative’s travel expenses

26-31 Travel related to use of residential premises as residential accommodation

26-35 Reducing deductions for amounts paid to related entities

26-40 Maintaining your family

26-45 Recreational club expenses

26-47 Non-business boating activities

26-50 Expenses for a leisure facility

26-52 Bribes to foreign public officials

26-53 Bribes to public officials

26-54 Expenditure relating to illegal activities

26-55 Limit on deductions

26-60 Superannuation contributions surcharge

26-68 Loss from disposal of eligible venture capital investments

26-70 Loss from disposal of venture capital equity

26-75 Excess non-concessional contributions tax cannot be deducted

26-80 Financing costs on loans to pay superannuation contribution

26-85 Borrowing costs on loans to pay life insurance premiums

26-90 Superannuation supervisory levy

26 96 Laminaria and Corallina decommissioning levy cannot be deducted

26-97 National Disability Insurance Scheme expenditure

26-98 Division 293 tax cannot be deducted

26-99 Excess transfer balance tax cannot be deducted

26-99A Division 296 tax cannot be deducted

26-99B Build to rent development misuse tax cannot be deducted

26-99C Australian IIR/UTPR tax and Australian DMT tax cannot be deducted

26-100 Expenditure attributable to water infrastructure improvement payments

26-102 Expenses associated with holding vacant land

26-105 Non-compliant payments for work and services

26-155 Using or holding residential dwellings

26-160 Meaning of residential dwelling and new residential dwelling

Operative provisions

26-5 Penalties

You cannot deduct under this Act:

an amount (however described) payable, by way of penalty, under an Australian law or a foreign law; or

an amount ordered by a court to be paid on the conviction of an entity for an offence against an Australian law or a foreign law.

Without limiting paragraph (1)(a), you cannot deduct under this Act the general interest charge or the shortfall interest charge.

This section does not apply to an amount payable, by way of penalty, under Subdivision 162-D of the GST Act.

Note: See paragraph 25-5(1)(ca) for the deductibility of penalties that arise under Subdivision 162-D of the GST Act.

26-10 Leave payments

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing for long service leave, annual leave, sick leave or other leave except:

an amount paid in the income year to the individual to whom the leave relates (or, if that individual has died, to that individual’s dependant or *legal personal representative); or

an accrued leave transfer payment that is made in the income year.

(2) An accrued leave transfer payment is a payment that an entity makes:

in respect of an individual’s leave (some or all of which accrued while the entity was required to make payments in respect of the individual’s leave, or leave the individual might take); and

when the entity is no longer required (or is about to stop being required) to make payments in respect of such leave; and

to another entity when the other entity has begun (or is about to begin) to be required to make payments in respect of such leave; and

under (or for the purposes of facilitating the provisions of) an Australian law, or an award, order, determination or industrial agreement under an Australian law.

It does not matter whether the leave accrues to the individual as an employee or for some other reason.

Example: Your employee goes to a new employer. You pay the new employer $2,000 for the employee’s unused long service leave because an industrial agreement requires you to make that payment.

Note: An accrued leave transfer payment is included in the assessable income of the entity to which it is made: see section 15-5.

26-15 Franchise fees windfall tax

You cannot deduct under this Act any tax that is imposed by the Franchise Fees Windfall Tax (Imposition) Act 1997.

26-17 Commonwealth places windfall tax

You cannot deduct under this Act any tax that is imposed by the Commonwealth Places Windfall Tax (Imposition) Act 1998.

26-19 Rebatable benefits

(1) You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing to the extent that the loss or outgoing is incurred in gaining or producing a rebatable benefit (within the meaning of section 160AAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

(2) To the extent that you use property in gaining or producing a rebatable benefit, your use of the property is taken not to be for the *purpose of producing assessable income if subsection (1) would stop you deducting a loss or outgoing if you incurred it in the income year in gaining or producing the rebatable benefit.

Note: Under some provisions of this Act, in order to deduct an amount for your property, you must have used the property for the purpose of producing assessable income.

26-20 Assistance to students

You cannot deduct under this Act:

(ca) a student contribution amount within the meaning of the Higher Education Support Act 2003 paid to a higher education provider (within the meaning of that Act); or

a payment made to reduce a debt to the Commonwealth under Chapter 4 of that Act; or

(cba) a payment made to reduce a debt to the Commonwealth under Part 3A of the VET Student Loans Act 2016; or

(cc) a payment made to reduce a debt to the Commonwealth under Chapter 2AA of the Social Security Act 1991 or Part 2 of the Student Assistance Act 1973; or

(cd) a payment made to reduce a debt to the Commonwealth under Chapter 3 of the Australian Apprenticeship Support Loans Act 2014; or

(ce) a payment made to reduce a liability to overseas debtors repayment levy under the Student Loans (Overseas Debtors Repayment Levy) Act 2015; or

(d) a payment made to reduce a debt to the Commonwealth, or to a participating corporation, under Chapter 2B of the Social Security Act 1991 or Part 4A of the Student Assistance Act 1973.

Exception when you provide a fringe benefit

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting expenditure you incur in *providing a *fringe benefit.

26-22 Political contributions and gifts

You cannot deduct political contributions or gifts

You cannot deduct under this Act (other than Subdivision 30-DA):

(a) a contribution (including a membership fee) or gift to a political party that is registered under Part XI of the Commonwealth Electoral Act 1918 or under corresponding State or Territory legislation; or

a contribution or gift to an individual when the individual is a candidate in an election for members of:

an *Australian legislature; or

a local governing body; or

a contribution or gift to an individual who is a member of:

an Australian legislature; or

a local governing body.

Exception for employees and office holders

(2) However, subsection (1) does not apply to a loss or outgoing incurred in gaining or producing assessable income from which an amount is required to be withheld under section 12-35 or 12-45 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note: These provisions of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 require amounts to be withheld from income of employees and office holders.

Starting and stopping being a candidate

For the purposes of this section, an individual:

starts being a candidate when the individual’s intention to be or to attempt to be a candidate for the election is publicly available; and

stops being a candidate at the earlier of:

(i) the time when the result of the election is declared or otherwise publicly announced by an entity (an electoral official) authorised under the relevant electoral legislation; and

the time (if any) when the individual’s intention to no longer be a candidate for the election is publicly available.

Starting being a member

An individual who becomes a member as a result of an election (including an election that is later declared void) is taken to start being a member when the individual’s election as a member is declared or otherwise publicly announced by an electoral official.

26-25 Interest or royalty

(1) You cannot deduct under this Act interest (within the meaning of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) or a *royalty if:

(a) Subdivision 12-F in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 requires you to withhold an amount from the interest or royalty; and

either:

you fail to withhold the amount; or

after withholding the amount, you fail to comply with section 16-70 in that Schedule in relation to that amount.

(2) You cannot deduct under this Act interest (within the meaning of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936), or a *royalty, that is in the form of a *non-cash benefit if:

(a) section 14-5 or 14-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 requires you to pay an amount to the Commissioner before providing the benefit, because of Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule; and

you fail to pay the amount as required by that section.

If:

(a) apart from subsection (1) or (2), you can deduct interest (within the meaning of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) or a *royalty for an income year; and

the withholding tax payable for the interest or the royalty is paid;

you can deduct the interest or royalty for that income year.

26-25A Payments to employees—labour mobility programs

No deduction to extent amount not withheld

(1) You cannot deduct under this Act salary, wages, commission, bonuses or allowances from which Subdivision 12-FC in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about labour mobility programs) requires you to withhold an amount, to the extent that:

you fail to withhold the amount; or

after withholding the amount, you fail to comply with section 16-70 in that Schedule in relation to that amount.

Note: Section 16-70 in that Schedule requires you to pay the amount to the Commissioner.

Deduction to extent amount not withheld but withholding tax paid

You can deduct, for an income year, salary, wages, commission, bonuses or allowances to the extent that:

you cannot deduct the salary, wages, commission, bonuses or allowances for that income year only because of subsection (1) of this section; and

the labour mobility program withholding tax payable for the salary, wages, commission, bonuses or allowance is paid.

26-26 Non-share distributions and dividends

A company cannot deduct under this Act:

a non-share distribution; or

a return that has accrued on a *non-share equity interest.

A company cannot deduct a dividend paid on an *equity interest in the company as a general deduction under this Act.

26-30 Relative’s travel expenses

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing you incur, insofar as it is attributable to your *relative’s travel, if:

you travelled in the course of performing your duties as an employee, or in the course of carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income; and

your relative accompanied you while you travelled.

Exception to subsection (1)

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing if:

your *relative, while accompanying you, performed substantial duties as your employer’s employee, or as your employee; and

it is reasonable to conclude that your relative would still have accompanied you even if he or she had not had a personal relationship with you.

Exception when you provide a fringe benefit

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting expenditure you incur in *providing a *fringe benefit.

This section also applies to individuals who are not employees

(4) If an individual is not an employee, but receives, or is entitled to receive, *withholding payments covered by subsection (6), this section applies to the individual as if:

he or she were an employee; and

the entity, who pays (or is liable to pay) *withholding payments covered by subsection (6) that result in the individual being in receipt of, or entitled to receive, such payments, were the individual’s employer; and

any other individual who receives (or is entitled to receive) *withholding payments covered by subsection (6):

that result in that other individual being in receipt of, or entitled to receive, such payments; and

that the entity pays (or is liable to pay) to that other individual;

were an employee of the entity.

This section also applies to entities who are not employers

(5) If an entity is not an employer, but pays (or is liable to pay) *withholding payments covered by subsection (6), this section applies to the entity as if:

it were an employer; and

an individual to whom the entity pays (or is liable to pay) such withholding payments were the entity’s employee.

Withholding payments covered

This subsection covers:

(a) a *withholding payment covered by any of the provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 listed in the table; and

(b) a withholding payment covered by section 12-47 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 where:

the payment is made to a religious practitioner by a religious institution; and

the activity, or series of activities, for which the payment is made is done by the religious practitioner as a member of the religious institution.

26-31 Travel related to use of residential premises as residential accommodation

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing you incur, insofar as it is related to travel, if:

it is incurred in gaining or producing your assessable income from the use of residential premises as residential accommodation; and

it is not necessarily incurred in carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income.

Exception—kind of entity

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing if, at any time during the income year in which the loss or outgoing is incurred, you are:

a corporate tax entity; or

a *superannuation plan that is not a self managed superannuation fund; or

a managed investment trust; or

(d) a public unit trust (within the meaning of section 102P of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

a unit trust or partnership, if each *member of the trust or partnership is covered by a paragraph of this subsection at that time during the income year.

26-35 Reducing deductions for amounts paid to related entities

You can only deduct reasonable amounts paid to related entities

If, under another provision of this Act, you can deduct an amount for a payment you make, or for a liability you incur, to a related entity, then you can only deduct so much of the amount as the Commissioner considers reasonable.

Note: This section has a special operation if the payment is made, or the liability is incurred, by a partnership in which a private company is a partner: see section 65 (Payments to associated persons and relatives) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Meaning of related entity

(2) A related entity is any of the following:

your *relative; or

a partnership in which your relative is a partner.

(3) In the case of a partnership, a related entity is any of the following:

a *relative of a partner in the partnership;

an individual who is or has been a director of a company that is a partner in the partnership and is a private company for the income year;

an entity that is or has been a shareholder in a company of that kind;

a *relative of an individual who is or has been a director or shareholder of a company of that kind;

a beneficiary of a trust if the trustee is a partner in the partnership;

a *relative of a beneficiary of a trust if the trustee is a partner in the partnership;

another partnership, if a partner in the other partnership is a *relative of a partner in the first partnership.

However, a partner in a partnership is not a related entity of the partnership.

If you can’t deduct, then related entity doesn’t include amount as income

To the extent that subsection (1) stops you deducting an amount, the amount is neither assessable income, nor exempt income, of the related entity.

26-40 Maintaining your family

You cannot deduct under this Act expenditure you incur for maintaining:

your *spouse (except a spouse permanently living separately and apart from you); or

your *child who is under 16 years.

Example: A farmer cannot deduct an amount for food or lodgings that the farmer provides to his or her child who is under 16 years for the work the child performs on the farm.

26-45 Recreational club expenses

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing to the extent you incur it to obtain or maintain:

membership of a recreational club; or

rights to enjoy (otherwise than as a *member) facilities provided by a recreational club for the use or benefit of its *members;

whether for yourself or someone else.

Meaning of recreational club

(2) A recreational club is a company that was established or is carried on mainly to provide facilities, for the use or benefit of its *members, for drinking, dining, *recreation or entertainment.

Exception when you provide a fringe benefit

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting expenditure you incur in *providing a *fringe benefit.

26-47 Non-business boating activities

Object

The object of this section is to improve the integrity of the taxation system by preventing deductions from boating activities that are not carried on as a business being offset against other assessable income.

Rule

This Act applies to you as if so much of the amounts relating to using or *holding boats that you could otherwise deduct for an income year as exceeds your assessable income from using or holding boats for that year:

were not deductible for that income year; and

(b) were an amount (a quarantined amount) relating to using or holding boats that you can deduct for the next income year.

Note: A quarantined amount may be reduced under subsection (5) (for boat capital gains), reduced under subsection (7) (where you deduct part of a quarantined amount under subsection (6) for boat business profits), reduced under subsection (8) (about exempt income) or affected by subsection (10) (about bankruptcy).

Example: Ian does not use his boat in a business. In Year 1, Ian would be able to claim $100,000 in deductions for the boat (but for this subsection), including interest, depreciation and running costs. He earns only $40,000 of income from the boat. He can only deduct $40,000. He carries the remaining $60,000 forward to Year 2 (the quarantined amount).

In Year 2, Ian has $95,000 of expenses and $30,000 of income for the boat. He can deduct $30,000. The quarantined amount is now $125,000: the quarantined amount from Year 1 plus the excess of expenses over income from Year 2.

In Year 3, Ian has $60,000 of expenses and $150,000 of income from the boat. The expenses from Year 3 plus the quarantined amount is $185,000. Therefore, Ian claims a deduction of $150,000 and carries forward $35,000 to Year 4.

Exception: business use

The rule in subsection (2) does not apply to amounts that are attributable to one or more of the following:

*holding a boat as your trading stock;

using a boat (or holding it) mainly for letting it on hire in the ordinary course of a business that you carry on;

using a boat (or holding it) mainly for transporting the public or goods for payment in the ordinary course of a business that you carry on;

using a boat for a purpose that is essential to the efficient conduct of a business that you carry on.

Note: Even if this exception applies to you, you may still have to quarantine losses under Division 35 (deferral of losses from non-commercial business activities).

Exception: fringe benefits

The rule in subsection (2) does not apply to so much of an amount you incur in *providing a *fringe benefit.

Modification if you have boat capital gains

You reduce a quarantined amount you have for an income year by so much of that amount as is applied under section 118-80 to reduce a *capital gain you have for the year in relation to a boat. You make this reduction before you deduct an amount under subsection (6).

Deduction if you have boat business profits

You can deduct all or part of your remaining quarantined amount for an income year if your assessable income for the year from activities of a kind referred to in subsection (3) exceeds your deductions for the year relating to those activities. The amount you can deduct is the lesser of that excess and that remaining quarantined amount.

You reduce your quarantined amount for the year by the amount you deduct. You make this reduction before a reduction under subsection (8).

Modification if you have exempt income

You reduce any remaining quarantined amount you have for an income year by your net exempt income for that year (after *utilising the net exempt income under section 35-15 (about non-commercial business activities) or section 36-10 or 36-15 (about tax losses)).

Modification if you become bankrupt

The modification in subsection (10) has effect if:

(a) in an income year (the current year) you become bankrupt or are released from a debt by the operation of an Act relating to bankruptcy; or

you became bankrupt before the current year and:

(i) the bankruptcy is annulled in the current year under section 74 of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 because your creditors have accepted a proposal for a composition or scheme of arrangement; and

under the composition or scheme of arrangement, you have been, will be or may be released from some or all of the debts from which you would have been released if you had instead been discharged from the bankruptcy.

This Act applies to you as if any amount that:

is a quarantined amount for you for the current year or was a quarantined amount for you for an earlier year; and

has not been applied under section 118-80 and that you have not yet deducted;

were not an amount relating to using or holding boats that you can deduct for the current year or a later year.

26-50 Expenses for a leisure facility

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing to the extent you incur it:

to acquire ownership of a leisure facility; or

to retain ownership of a leisure facility; or

to acquire rights to use a leisure facility; or

to retain rights to use a leisure facility; or

to use, operate, maintain or repair a leisure facility; or

in relation to any obligation associated with your ownership of a leisure facility; or

in relation to any obligation associated with your rights to use a leisure facility.

However, there are exceptions (see subsections (3), (4) and (8)).

What is a leisure facility?

(2) A leisure facility is land, a building, or part of a building or other structure, that is used (or held for use) for holidays or *recreation.

Exception—leisure facilities

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing for a leisure facility if at all times in the income year:

you hold the leisure facility for sale in the ordinary course of your business of selling leisure facilities; or

you use the leisure facility (or hold it for use) mainly to provide it:

in the ordinary course of your business of providing leisure facilities for payment; or

to produce your assessable income in the nature of rents, lease premiums, licence fees or similar charges; or

for your employees to use; or

for the care of your employees’ *children.

In the case of a company, subparagraphs (b)(iii) and (iv) do not apply to employees who are *members or directors of the company.

Exception—part year use of leisure facilities

(4) If you use a *leisure facility (or hold it) as described in subsection (3) at all times during part of the income year, then subsection (1) does not stop you deducting so much of the loss or outgoing as is reasonable in the circumstances.

Anti-avoidance—when exceptions do not apply

A leisure facility is taken not to be used (or held) as described in subsection (3) if:

apart from this subsection, the leisure facility would be used (or held) in that way because of a *scheme; and

in the Commissioner’s opinion, the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if this section had not been enacted.

Exception when you provide a fringe benefit

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting expenditure you incur in *providing a *fringe benefit.

26-52 Bribes to foreign public officials

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing you incur that is a bribe to a foreign public official.

(2) An amount is a bribe to a foreign public official to the extent that:

you incur the amount in, or in connection with:

providing a benefit to another person; or

causing a benefit to be provided to another person; or

offering to provide, or promising to provide, a benefit to another person; or

causing an offer of the provision of a benefit, or a promise of the provision of a benefit, to be made to another person; and

you incur the amount with the intention of improperly influencing a foreign public official (who may be the other person) in order to obtain or retain business or a business or personal advantage (whether or not for yourself).

The benefit may be any advantage and is not limited to property.

For the purposes of subsection (2), disregard whether business, or a business or personal advantage, was actually obtained or retained.

Payments that written law of foreign public official’s country requires or permits

(3) An amount is not a bribe to a foreign public official if, assuming the benefit had been provided, and all related acts had been done, in the *foreign public official’s country, a written law of that country would have required or permitted the provision of the benefit.

Facilitation payments

(4) An amount is not a bribe to a foreign public official if:

the value of the benefit is of a minor nature; and

the amount is incurred for the sole or dominant purpose of expediting or securing the performance of a routine government action of a minor nature.

(5) For the purposes of this section, a routine government action is an action of a *foreign public official that:

is ordinarily and commonly performed by the official; and

is covered by any of the following subparagraphs:

granting a permit, licence or other official document that qualifies a person to do business in a foreign country or in a part of a foreign country;

processing government papers such as a visa or work permit;

providing police protection or mail collection or delivery;

scheduling inspections associated with contract performance or related to the transit of goods;

providing telecommunications services, power or water;

loading and unloading cargo;

protecting perishable products, or commodities, from deterioration;

any other action of a similar nature; and

does not involve a decision about:

whether to award new business; or

whether to continue existing business with a particular person; or

the terms of new business or existing business; and

does not involve encouraging a decision about:

whether to award new business; or

whether to continue existing business with a particular person; or

the terms of new business or existing business.

Improper influence

In determining whether influence is improper, disregard the following:

the fact that the benefit, or the offer or promise to provide the benefit, may be, or be perceived to be, customary, necessary or required in the situation;

any official tolerance of the benefit;

if particular business or a particular business or personal advantage is relevant to determining whether influence is improper—the following:

if the value of the business or advantage is insignificant—that fact;

in the case of an advantage—any official tolerance of the advantage;

in the case of an advantage—the fact that the advantage may be customary, or perceived to be customary, in the situation.

Duties of foreign public official

The duties of a foreign public official are any authorities, duties, functions or powers that:

are conferred on the official; or

the official holds himself or herself out as having.

26-53 Bribes to public officials

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing you incur that is a bribe to a public official.

(2) An amount is a bribe to a public official to the extent that:

you incur the amount in, or in connection with:

providing a benefit to another person; or

causing a benefit to be provided to another person; or

offering to provide, or promising to provide, a benefit to another person; or

causing an offer of the provision of a benefit, or a promise of the provision of a benefit, to be made to another person; and

the benefit is not legitimately due to the other person (see subsection (3)); and

you incur the amount with the intention of influencing a public official (who may or may not be the other person) in the exercise of the official’s duties as a public official in order to:

obtain or retain business; or

obtain or retain an advantage in the conduct of business that is not legitimately due to you, or another person, as the recipient, or intended recipient, of the advantage in the conduct of business (see subsection (4)).

The benefit may be any advantage and is not limited to property.

Benefit not legitimately due

In working out if a benefit is not legitimately due to another person in a particular situation, disregard the following:

the fact that the benefit may be customary, or perceived to be customary, in the situation;

the value of the benefit;

any official tolerance of the benefit.

Advantage in the conduct of business that is not legitimately due

In working out if an advantage in the conduct of business is not legitimately due in a particular situation, disregard the following:

the fact that the advantage may be customary, or perceived to be customary, in the situation;

the value of the advantage;

any official tolerance of the advantage.

Duties of public official

The duties of a public official are any authorities, duties, functions or powers that:

are conferred on the official; or

the official holds himself or herself out as having.

26-54 Expenditure relating to illegal activities

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing to the extent that it was incurred in the furtherance of, or directly in relation to, a physical element of an offence against an Australian law of which you have been convicted if the offence was, or could have been, prosecuted on indictment.

(2) Despite section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the Commissioner may amend your assessment at any time within 4 years after you are convicted of the relevant offence for the purpose of giving effect to subsection (1) of this section.

26-55 Limit on deductions

There is a limit on the total of the amounts you can deduct for the income year under these provisions:

section 25-50 (which is about payments of pensions, gratuities or retiring allowances) of this Act;

Division 30 (which is about deductions for gifts or contributions) of this Act;

Division 31 (which is about deductions for conservation covenants) of this Act;

section 290-150 (which is about deductions for personal superannuation contributions).

Do not include in the total an amount that you could also deduct under another provision of this Act, apart from section 8-10 (which prevents double deductions).

The limit is worked out by subtracting from your assessable income all your deductions except:

*tax losses; and

See Division 36 (which is about tax losses of earlier income years).

the amount you can deduct for the income year under section 393-5 (which provides for deductions for making *farm management deposits).

26-60 Superannuation contributions surcharge

You cannot deduct under this Act:

(a) a superannuation contributions surcharge within the meaning of the Superannuation Contributions Tax (Assessment and Collection) Act 1997; or

(b) a superannuation contributions surcharge within the meaning of the Superannuation Contributions Tax (Members of Constitutionally Protected Superannuation Funds) Assessment and Collection Act 1997.

26-68 Loss from disposal of eligible venture capital investments

Partners in VCLPs and ESVCLPs

You cannot deduct under this Act your share of a loss made from the disposal or other realisation of an eligible venture capital investment if:

it is made by a VCLP, or an ESVCLP, that is *unconditionally registered; and

were that disposal or other realisation to be a *disposal of a CGT asset, your share of any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded under section 118-405 or 118-407.

Partners in AFOFs

You cannot deduct under this Act your share of a loss made from the disposal or other realisation of an eligible venture capital investment if:

it is made by:

an AFOF that is *unconditionally registered; or

a VCLP, or an ESVCLP, that is unconditionally registered and in which an AFOF that is *unconditionally registered is a partner; and

were that disposal or other realisation to be a *disposal of a CGT asset, your share of any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded under section 118-410.

Eligible venture capital investors

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss made from the disposal or other realisation of an eligible venture capital investment if:

you are an eligible venture capital investor; and

were that disposal or other realisation to be a *disposal of a CGT asset, any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded under section 118-415.

26-70 Loss from disposal of venture capital equity

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss made from the disposal or other realisation of venture capital equity in a resident investment vehicle if:

it is made by a venture capital entity or a *limited partnership referred to in subsection 118-515(2); and

if that disposal or other realisation were a *disposal of a CGT asset, any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded under Subdivision 118-G.

26-75 Excess non-concessional contributions tax cannot be deducted

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount of excess non-concessional contributions tax that you pay.

26-80 Financing costs on loans to pay superannuation contribution

You can only deduct under this Act a financing cost connected with a contribution you make to a *superannuation plan if you can deduct the contribution under Subdivision 290-B.

(2) A financing cost connected with a contribution is expenditure incurred to the extent that it relates to obtaining finance to make the contribution, including:

interest, and payments in the nature of interest; and

expenses of borrowing.

26-85 Borrowing costs on loans to pay life insurance premiums

You can only deduct under this Act interest on, or other expenses associated with, money you borrow to pay a premium for a *life insurance policy if:

the *risk component of the premium received by the insurer is the entire amount of the premium; and

each amount the insurer is liable to pay under the policy would be included in your assessable income if it were paid.

(2) The risk component of a premium for a *life insurance policy means the amount of the premium worked out on the basis specified in the regulations.

26-90 Superannuation supervisory levy

You cannot deduct under this Act so much of a levy imposed by the Superannuation (Self Managed Superannuation Funds) Supervisory Levy Imposition Act 1991 as represents the late lodgment amount (within the meaning of section 6 of that Act).

26-96 Laminaria and Corallina decommissioning levy cannot be deducted

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount of Laminaria and Corallina decommissioning levy that you pay.

26-97 National Disability Insurance Scheme expenditure

A participant (within the meaning of the National Disability Insurance Scheme Act 2013) cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing to the extent the loss or outgoing is funded (including funded by way of reimbursement) by an *NDIS amount the participant *derives.

26-98 Division 293 tax cannot be deducted

You cannot deduct under this Act any of the following:

an amount of Division 293 tax that you pay;

an amount of debt account discharge liability that you pay.

26-99 Excess transfer balance tax cannot be deducted

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount of excess transfer balance tax that you pay.

26-99A Division 296 tax cannot be deducted

You cannot deduct under this Act any of the following:

an amount of Division 296 tax that you pay;

an amount of Division 296 debt account discharge liability that you pay.

26-99B Build to rent development misuse tax cannot be deducted

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount of build to rent development misuse tax that you pay.

26-99C Australian IIR/UTPR tax and Australian DMT tax cannot be deducted

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount of *Australian IIR/UTPR tax or Australian DMT tax that you pay.

26-100 Expenditure attributable to water infrastructure improvement payments

You cannot deduct under this Act SRWUIP expenditure if the matching SRWUIP payment is, or is reasonably expected to be, non-assessable non-exempt income (whether for you or for another entity) under section 59-65.

(2) SRWUIP expenditure, in respect of a *SRWUIP program, is expenditure that:

you incur that satisfies an obligation under an arrangement under the program; and

is, or is reasonably expected to be, matched by a SRWUIP payment in respect of the program.

(3) However, treat the expenditure as if it had never been SRWUIP expenditure if it is no longer reasonable to expect that the expenditure will be matched by a *SRWUIP payment in respect of the program.

26-102 Expenses associated with holding vacant land

Limit on deduction

If:

at a particular time, you incur a loss or outgoing relating to holding land (including interest or any other ongoing costs of borrowing to acquire the land); and

(b) at the earlier of the following (the critical time):

that time;

if you have ceased to hold the land—the time just before you ceased to hold the land;

there is no substantial and permanent structure in use or available for use on the land having a purpose that is independent of, and not incidental to, the purpose of any other structure or proposed structure;

you can only deduct under this Act the loss or outgoing to the extent that the land is in use, or available for use, in carrying on a business covered by subsection (2) at the time applying under subsection (3).

Note 1: The ordinary meaning of structure includes a building and anything else built or constructed.

Note 2: The land need not be all of the land under a land title.

A business is covered by this subsection if the business is carried on for the purpose of gaining or producing the assessable income of one or more of the following entities:

you;

your affiliate, or an entity of which you are an affiliate;

if you are an individual—your *spouse, or any of your *children who is under 18 years of age;

an entity *connected with you.

The time applying under this subsection is the critical time unless:

the business referred to in subsection (1) ceases before the critical time; and

the loss or outgoing is otherwise deductible because of the use or availability for use of the land at an earlier time or during an earlier period; and

at that earlier time or during that earlier period the land was in use or available for use in carrying on that business;

in which case the time applying under this subsection is that earlier time or the end of that earlier period.

Disregard certain residential premises if not rented etc.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), treat a building as not being a substantial and permanent structure if it is residential premises constructed, or *substantially renovated, while you hold the land unless:

the residential premises are lawfully able to be occupied; and

the residential premises are:

leased, hired or licensed; or

available for lease, hire or licence.

Note: If all of the structures on the land are disregarded under this subsection, then subsection (1) may deny you a deduction for a loss or outgoing relating to the land.

Exception—kind of entity

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing if, at any time during the income year in which the loss or outgoing is incurred, you are:

a corporate tax entity; or

a *superannuation plan that is not a self managed superannuation fund; or

a managed investment trust; or

(d) a public unit trust (within the meaning of section 102P of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

a unit trust or partnership, if each *member of the trust or partnership is covered by a paragraph of this subsection at that time during the income year.

Exception—structures affected by natural disasters or other exceptional circumstances

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing relating to holding land if:

had an earlier time been the critical time (see paragraph (1)(b)), paragraph (1)(b) would not have applied to you for the land because of the existence at that earlier time of a substantial and permanent structure on the land; and

after that earlier time, paragraph (1)(b):

began to apply to you for the land wholly or mainly because of a circumstance affecting that structure; and

continued to do so at the critical time; and

the circumstance was exceptional and beyond the reasonable control of you, and of all the entities referred to in paragraphs (2)(b), (c) and (d); and

the critical time happened before:

the third anniversary of the time paragraph (1)(b) began to apply to you for the land as described in subparagraph (b)(i) of this subsection; or

such later time as the Commissioner allows.

If subsection (6) applies to you and you deduct the loss or outgoing, you must keep written records of:

the circumstance; and

the circumstance’s effect on the affected structure;

until the fifth anniversary of the end of the income year in which you incurred the loss or outgoing.

Exception—land held by primary producers

Note: There is an administrative penalty if you fail to keep these records (see section 288-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953).

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing relating to holding land if, at the critical time (see paragraph (1)(b)):

the land is under lease, hire or licence to another entity; and

you are, or an entity referred to in paragraph (2)(b), (c) or (d) is, carrying on a *primary production business; and

the land does not contain residential premises; and

residential premises are not being constructed on the land.

Exception—land in use or available for use in carrying on a business

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing relating to holding land if, at the critical time (see paragraph (1)(b)):

the land is under lease, hire or licence to another entity as a result of a dealing at *arm’s length; and

the land is in use, or available for use, in carrying on a business; and

the land does not contain residential premises; and

residential premises are not being constructed on the land.

26-105 Non-compliant payments for work and services

No deduction if amount not withheld or Commissioner not notified

You cannot deduct under this Act a payment if:

(a) any of the following provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 require you to withhold an amount from the payment:

section 12-35 (about payments to employees);

section 12-40 (about payments to directors);

section 12-47 (about payments to *religious practitioners);

section 12-60 (about payments under labour hire and certain other arrangements);

in relation to a supply, other than a supply referred to in subsection (3) of this section—section 12-190 (about quoting of ABN); and

either:

you fail to withhold an amount (whether or not that amount is the amount required to be withheld as mentioned in paragraph (a)) from the payment; or

after withholding the amount from the payment, you fail to comply, or purportedly comply, with section 16-150 or 389-5 (as the case requires) in that Schedule, in relation to the amount.

You cannot deduct under this Act a *non-cash benefit if:

(a) section 14-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 requires you to pay an amount to the Commissioner before providing the benefit, because of any of the following provisions in that Schedule:

section 12-35 (about payments to employees);

section 12-40 (about payments to directors);

section 12-47 (about payments to *religious practitioners);

section 12-60 (about payments under labour hire and certain other arrangements);

in relation to a supply, other than a supply referred to in subsection (3) of this section—section 12-190 (about quoting of ABN); and

you fail to comply, or purportedly comply, with section 16-150 in that Schedule in relation to the amount.

For the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(a)(v) and (2)(a)(v), the supplies are supplies that are wholly a supply of either or both of the following:

a supply of goods (within the meaning of section 195-1 of the GST Act);

a supply of real property (within the meaning of that section of that Act).

Exception—nil amounts

Subsection (1) or (2) does not apply if the amount required to be withheld, or the amount required to be paid to the Commissioner, (as the case requires) is a nil amount.

Exception—ABN quoted

(5) Subsection (1) does not apply in relation to an amount required to be withheld from a payment under section 12-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, if:

when the payment is made, you have been given:

an invoice or some other document that relates to the payment that *quotes the individual’s ABN; or

if the payment relates to a supply that has been made through an *agent—an invoice or some other document that relates to the payment that quotes the agent’s ABN; or

when the payment is made:

you have been given an invoice or some other document that relates to the payment that purports to quote the individual’s ABN; and

the individual does not have an ABN, or the invoice or other document does not in fact quote the individual’s ABN; and

you have no reasonable grounds to believe that the individual does not have an ABN, or that the invoice or other document does not quote the individual’s ABN; or

if the payment relates to a supply that has been made through an agent—when the payment is made:

you have been given an invoice or some other document that relates to the payment that purports to quote the agent’s ABN; and

the agent does not have an ABN, or the invoice or other document does not in fact quote the agent’s ABN; and

you have no reasonable grounds to believe that the agent does not have an ABN, or that the invoice or other document does not quote the agent’s ABN.

Subsection (2) does not apply in relation to a *non-cash benefit that requires an amount to be paid to the Commissioner, if:

when the non-cash benefit is provided, you have been given:

an invoice or some other document that relates to the non-cash benefit that *quotes the individual’s ABN; or

if the non-cash benefit relates to a supply that has been made through an *agent—an invoice or some other document that relates to the non-cash benefit that quotes the agent’s ABN; or

when the non-cash benefit is provided:

you have been given an invoice or some other document that relates to the non-cash benefit that purports to quote the individual’s ABN; and

the individual does not have an ABN, or the invoice or other document does not in fact quote the individual’s ABN; and

you have no reasonable grounds to believe that the individual does not have an ABN, or that the invoice or other document does not quote the individual’s ABN; or

if the non-cash benefit relates to a supply that has been made through an agent—when the non-cash benefit is provided:

you have been given an invoice or some other document that relates to the non-cash benefit that purports to quote the agent’s ABN; and

the agent does not have an ABN, or the invoice or other document does not in fact quote the agent’s ABN; and

you have no reasonable grounds to believe that the agent does not have an ABN, or that the invoice or other document does not quote the agent’s ABN.

Exception—voluntarily tell the Commissioner about a mistake

Subsection (1) does not apply if, before the Commissioner tells you that an examination is to be made of your affairs relating to a *taxation law for a relevant period, you voluntarily tell the Commissioner, in the approved form, that you have failed to:

withhold an amount; or

(b) comply with section 16-150 or 389-5 (as the case requires) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to the amount.

(8) Subsection (2) does not apply if, before the Commissioner tells you that an examination is to be made of your affairs relating to a *taxation law for a relevant period, you voluntarily tell the Commissioner, in the *approved form, that you have failed to comply with section 16-150 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to the amount.

26-155 Using or holding residential dwellings

General rule

(1) If the amounts relating to the using or holding of *residential dwellings as residential accommodation that you could otherwise deduct for an income year exceed your assessable income from using or holding residential dwellings as residential accommodation for the income year, this Act applies to the amount of the excess as follows:

it is not deductible for that income year;

(b) it is an amount (a quarantined amount) that could be applied in accordance with the method statement in section 102-5 (about working out your net capital gain) for that income year;

to the extent any part of it remains after applying that method statement—it is treated as an amount relating to using or holding residential dwellings as residential accommodation for the next income year.

Example: Henrietta acquires an established residential dwelling in July 2028. For the 2028-29 income year Henrietta has assessable income of $50,000 from renting out the residential dwelling as residential accommodation. For that year, Henrietta has (but for this subsection) $65,000 in deductions for the residential dwelling, including interest, insurance and strata costs. She can only deduct $50,000 and the remaining $15,000 is carried forward to the next income year.

For the 2029-30 income year, Henrietta has (but for this subsection) $70,000 in deductions and $52,000 of assessable income from renting out the residential dwelling as residential accommodation. She can deduct $52,000 and $33,000 is carried forward to the next income year (comprising the $15,000 carried forward from the 2028-29 income year and $18,000 from the 2029-30 income year).

For the 2030-31 income year, Henrietta has $20,000 in deductions and $72,000 of assessable income from renting out the residential dwelling as residential accommodation, having reduced her mortgage following an inheritance. She has net rental income from the residential dwelling of $52,000 for this income year and can fully offset the amount of $33,000 that has been carried forward from the previous income year.

Exceptions for non-quarantined residential dwellings

For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard amounts you could otherwise deduct, and amounts of assessable income, to the extent those amounts relate to the using or holding of the following:

an *ownership interest in a *residential dwelling you last *acquired before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 12 May 2026;

a residential dwelling that is a *new residential dwelling in relation to you;

a residential dwelling for an activity or purpose determined by the Minister by legislative instrument for the purposes of this paragraph.

Note: If you have a net gain from your non-quarantined residential dwellings for an income year: see subsection (6).

(3) Despite subsection 118-130(2), for the purposes of paragraph (2)(a) of this section, for a *residential dwelling that you *acquire under a contract, you have an *ownership interest in the residential dwelling from the time when you enter into the contract.

Before determining an activity or purpose for the purposes of paragraph (2)(c), the Minister must be satisfied that determining the activity or purpose will assist in achieving one or more of the following objectives:

improving availability of social or affordable housing;

improving housing outcomes for one or more of the following:

Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander persons;

persons with a disability;

aged persons;

another class of persons suffering disadvantage.

Exception for certain kinds of entities

Subsection (1) does not apply to you if you are:

(a) a widely held unit trust as defined in section 272-105 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

a *complying superannuation entity.

Exception for fringe benefits

For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard amounts you could otherwise deduct, and amounts of assessable income, to the extent those amounts relate to *providing a *fringe benefit.

Modification in relation to certain gains

Reduce the amount of an excess referred to in subsection (1) for an income year (before applying any of paragraphs (1)(a) to (c)) by the sum of the following:

any amount by which your assessable income covered by subsection (2) for the income year exceeds your deductions covered by that subsection for the income year;

any gain you *realised for income tax purposes for the income year from a realisation event occurring in relation to a *residential dwelling that is a revenue asset.

Modification in relation to beneficiaries of trusts

If:

you are a beneficiary of a trust estate; and

(b) an amount is taken to have been included in your assessable income for an income year under Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the *net income of the trust estate;

to the extent that the amount is referable (either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed partnerships or trust estates) to using or holding *residential dwellings as residential accommodation, the amount is taken to be included in your assessable income from using or holding residential dwellings as residential accommodation for that year.

Modification if you become bankrupt

The modification in subsection (9) has effect if:

(a) in an income year (the current year) you become bankrupt or are released from a debt by the operation of an Act relating to bankruptcy; or

you became bankrupt before the current year and:

(i) the bankruptcy is annulled in the current year under section 74 of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 because your creditors have accepted a proposal for a composition or scheme of arrangement; and

under the composition or scheme of arrangement, you have been, will be or may be released from some or all of the debts from which you would have been released if you had instead been discharged from the bankruptcy.

This Act applies to you as if any amount that:

is an amount that you cannot deduct for the current year in accordance with paragraph (1)(a); and

has not been applied in accordance with the method statement in section 102-5;

were not an amount relating to using or holding *residential dwellings as residential accommodation that you can deduct for the current year or a later year.

26-160 Meaning of residential dwelling and new residential dwelling

Meaning of residential dwelling

(1) A residential dwelling means a *dwelling other than any of the following:

a caravan, mobile tiny home, or other mobile home;

a hotel, motel, inn, hostel or boarding house;

a dwelling providing accommodation to students in connection with a school or an education institution that is not a school;

a boat or other marine vessel.

(2) For the purposes of subsection (1), a residential dwelling is taken to include any of the following things to the extent that the thing is available for use by an occupant of the *dwelling:

land adjacent to the dwelling;

a garage, storeroom or other structure associated with the dwelling.

Meaning of new residential dwelling

(3) A *residential dwelling is a new residential dwelling in relation to you if the requirements determined under subsection (4) are met in relation to you and the residential dwelling.

The Minister must, by legislative instrument, determine requirements for the purposes of subsection (3). Without limiting this subsection, the requirements may include requirements relating to one or more of the following:

the kind of *residential dwelling;

the kind of interest you hold in the residential dwelling and the circumstances in which you acquired your interest (such as whether you were the builder or a subsequent purchaser of the residential dwelling);

circumstances relating to the creation of the residential dwelling (such as whether the residential dwelling was built on vacant land, was created through substantial renovations of an existing building, or was built to replace a demolished residential dwelling);

whether the residential dwelling has a separate title, equitable title or similar legal interest that can be acquired by an entity.

Before determining requirements for the purposes of subsection (4), the Minister must be satisfied that determining the requirements will assist in achieving the objective of genuinely adding to the supply of residential dwellings in Australia.

To avoid doubt, the Minister may determine requirements under subsection (4) relating to matters or circumstances existing before the commencement of this section.

Division 27 — Effect of input tax credits etc. on deductions

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 27

27-A General

27-B Effect of input tax credits etc. on capital allowances

Guide to Division 27

27-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the effect of the GST in working out deductions. Generally speaking, input tax credits, GST and adjustments under the GST Act are disregarded.

Subdivision 27-A — General

Table of sections

27-5 Input tax credits and decreasing adjustments

27-10 Certain increasing adjustments

27-15 GST payments

27-20 Elements in calculation of amounts

27-25 GST groups and GST joint ventures

27-35 Certain sections not to apply to certain assets or expenditure

27-5 Input tax credits and decreasing adjustments

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing you incur, to the extent that the loss or outgoing includes an amount relating to an input tax credit to which you are entitled or a decreasing adjustment that you have.

27-10 Certain increasing adjustments

You can deduct an amount of an increasing adjustment that arises under Division 129 of the GST Act.

However, you cannot deduct the amount to the extent (if any) that the adjustment arises from an increase in the extent to which the activity giving rise to the adjustment is of a private or domestic nature.

If:

you have an increasing adjustment under Division 138 of the GST Act in respect of an asset as a result of the cancellation of your registration under Part 2-5 of the GST Act; and

immediately after the cancellation, you held the asset for the purpose of gaining or producing assessable income;

you can deduct the amount of the increasing adjustment.

However, you cannot deduct an amount under subsection (1) or (3) to the extent that, because it becomes a component of a *net input tax credit, a reduction is made under section 103-30 (reduction of cost base etc. by net input tax credits).

27-15 GST payments

You cannot deduct under this Act a loss or outgoing consisting of a payment under Division 33 of the GST Act.

This section does not apply to the payment:

to the extent (if any) that the net amount to which the payment relates was increased under section 21-5 of the Wine Tax Act (which allows for such increases to take account of wine equalisation tax); and

to the extent (if any) that the net amount was increased under section 13-5 of the Luxury Car Tax Act (which allows for such increases to take account of luxury car tax); and

to the extent (if any) that the net amount was increased under paragraph 13-10(1)(a) of the Luxury Car Tax Act (which allows for such alterations to take account of increasing luxury car tax adjustments under that Act).

This section does not apply to the payment of assessed GST (under section 33-15 of the GST Act) on a taxable importation that:

was not a creditable importation; or

was *partly creditable;

but only to the extent that that payment of assessed GST exceeds the input tax credit (if any) to which you are entitled for that importation.

This section does not apply to the payment of an assessed net amount under section 33-3 or 33-5 of the GST Act to the extent that the assessed net amount includes GST on a taxable supply that:

exceeds the input tax credit (if any) to which you are entitled for a creditable acquisition that relates to that supply; and

is payable by you (and is not payable by the supplier of that supply) because of the operation of Division 83, 84 or 86 of the GST Act.

27-20 Elements in calculation of amounts

In calculating an amount that you may be able to deduct:

an element in the calculation that is an amount paid or payable is treated as not including an amount equal to any input tax credit for an *acquisition related to the amount paid or payable, or any decreasing adjustment related to that amount; and

an element in the calculation that is an amount received or receivable is treated as not including an amount equal to any GST payable on a taxable supply related to the amount received or receivable, or any increasing adjustment related to that amount.

27-25 GST groups and GST joint ventures

A *member of a GST group is to be treated, for the purposes of this Division, as if Subdivision 48-B of the GST Act (other than subsections 48-45(3) and (4)) did not apply to that member.

A *participant in a GST joint venture is to be treated, for the purposes of this Division, as if Subdivision 51-B of the GST Act did not apply to that participant.

27-35 Certain sections not to apply to certain assets or expenditure

Sections 27-5, 27-10, 27-15 and 27-20 do not apply to assets, or to expenditure, for which you can deduct amounts under Division 40 or 328.

Note: See instead Subdivision 27-B.

Subdivision 27-B — Effect of input tax credits etc. on capital allowances

Table of sections

27-80 Cost or opening adjustable value of depreciating assets reduced for input tax credits

27-85 Cost or opening adjustable value of depreciating assets reduced: decreasing adjustments

27-87 Certain decreasing adjustments included in assessable income

27-90 Cost or opening adjustable value of depreciating assets increased: increasing adjustments

27-92 Certain increasing adjustments can be deducted

27-95 Balancing adjustment events

27-100 Pooling

27-105 Other Division 40 expenditure

27-110 Input tax credit etc. relating to 2 or more things

27-80 Cost or opening adjustable value of depreciating assets reduced for input tax credits

A depreciating asset’s *cost is reduced if:

an entity’s acquisition or importation of the asset constitutes a creditable acquisition or creditable importation; and

the entity is or becomes entitled to an input tax credit for the acquisition or importation; and

the entity can deduct amounts for the asset under Division 40 or 328.

The reduction is the amount of the input tax credit.

A depreciating asset’s *cost is also reduced if:

the entity that *holds the asset incurs expenditure that is included in the second element of the asset’s cost for the income year in which the asset’s *start time occurs; and

the entity is or becomes entitled to an input tax credit for the creditable acquisition or creditable importation to which the expenditure relates; and

the entity can deduct amounts for the asset under Division 40 or 328.

The reduction is the amount of the input tax credit.

However, subsections (1) and (2) do not apply if the *cost of the depreciating asset is modified under Division 40 to be its *market value.

A depreciating asset’s *opening adjustable value for an income year and its *cost is reduced if:

an entity’s acquisition or importation of the asset constitutes a creditable acquisition or creditable importation; and

(b) the entity is or becomes entitled to an *input tax credit in an income year (the credit year) for the acquisition or importation and the credit year occurs after the income year in which the acquisition or importation occurred; and

the income year is after the one in which the asset’s *start time occurs; and

the entity can deduct amounts for the asset under Division 40 or 328.

The reduction is the amount of the input tax credit.

A depreciating asset’s *opening adjustable value for an income year and its *cost is reduced if:

the entity that *holds the asset incurs expenditure that is included in the second element of the asset’s cost for that income year; and

that income year is after the one in which the asset’s*start time occurs; and

the entity is or becomes entitled to an input tax credit for the creditable acquisition or creditable importation to which the expenditure relates for the income year in which the expenditure was incurred; and

the entity can deduct amounts for the asset under Division 40 or 328.

The reduction is the amount of the input tax credit.

If the reduction under subsection (2), (3A) or (4) is more than:

for a subsection (2) case—the depreciating asset’s *cost; or

for a subsection (3A) or (4) case—the depreciating asset’s *opening adjustable value;

the excess is included in the entity’s assessable income unless the entity is an *exempt entity.

Exception: pooling

This section does not apply to:

a depreciating asset allocated to a low-value pool or a pool under Division 328 for or in the current year; or

*in-house software if expenditure on the software is allocated to a software development pool for the current year; or

a project pool.

27-85 Cost or opening adjustable value of depreciating assets reduced: decreasing adjustments

This section applies to an entity if:

the entity can deduct amounts for a depreciating asset under Division 40 or 328; and

the entity has a decreasing adjustment in an income year that relates directly or indirectly to the asset.

However, this section does not apply to a decreasing adjustment that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the GST Act.

Note: See instead section 27-87.

The asset’s *cost is reduced by an amount equal to the decreasing adjustment if the adjustment arises in the income year in which the asset’s *start time occurs.

The asset’s *opening adjustable value for an income year and its *cost is reduced by an amount equal to the decreasing adjustment if the adjustment arises in that year and that year is after the one in which the asset’s*start time occurs.

If the reduction under subsection (2) or (3) is more than:

for a subsection (2) case—the depreciating asset’s *cost; or

for a subsection (3) case—the depreciating asset’s *opening adjustable value;

the excess is included in the entity’s assessable income unless the entity is an *exempt entity.

Exception: pooling

This section does not apply to:

a depreciating asset allocated to a low-value pool or a pool under Division 328 for or in the current year; or

*in-house software if expenditure on the software is allocated to a software development pool for the current year; or

a project pool.

27-87 Certain decreasing adjustments included in assessable income

This section applies to an entity if:

the entity can deduct amounts for a depreciating asset under Division 40 or 328; and

the entity has a decreasing adjustment that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the GST Act in an income year that relates directly or indirectly to the asset; and

section 27-95 does not apply to the entity in relation to the asset.

The amount of the decreasing adjustment is included in the entity’s assessable income for the income year unless the entity is an *exempt entity.

27-90 Cost or opening adjustable value of depreciating assets increased: increasing adjustments

This section applies to an entity if:

the entity can deduct amounts for a depreciating asset under Division 40 or 328; and

the entity has an increasing adjustment in an income year that relates directly or indirectly to the asset.

However, this section does not apply to an increasing adjustment that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the GST Act.

Note: See instead section 27-92.

The asset’s *cost is increased by an amount equal to the increasing adjustment if the adjustment arises in the income year in which the asset’s *start time occurs.

The asset’s *opening adjustable value for an income year and its *cost is increased by an amount equal to the increasing adjustment if the adjustment arises in that year and that year is after the one in which the asset’s *start time occurs.

Exception: pooling

This section does not apply to:

a depreciating asset allocated to a low-value pool or a pool under Division 328 for or in the current year; or

*in-house software if expenditure on the software is allocated to a software development pool for the current year; or

a project pool.

27-92 Certain increasing adjustments can be deducted

This section applies to an entity if:

the entity can deduct amounts for a depreciating asset under Division 40 or 328; and

the entity has an increasing adjustment that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the GST Act in an income year that relates directly or indirectly to the asset.

The entity can deduct the amount of the increasing adjustment for the income year.

However, the entity cannot deduct the amount to the extent (if any) that the adjustment arises from an increase in the extent to which the activity giving rise to the adjustment is of a private or domestic nature.

27-95 Balancing adjustment events

The termination value of a depreciating asset is reduced if the relevant balancing adjustment event is a taxable supply. The reduction is an amount equal to the GST payable on the supply.

However, subsection (1) does not apply if the termination value of the depreciating asset is modified under Division 40 to be its *market value.

The termination value of a depreciating asset is increased if the entity that *held the asset has a decreasing adjustment that relates directly or indirectly to that taxable supply in the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred. The increase is the amount of the decreasing adjustment.

The termination value of a depreciating asset is decreased if the entity that *held the asset has an increasing adjustment that relates directly or indirectly to that taxable supply in the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred. The decrease is the amount of the increasing adjustment.

An amount is included in the assessable income of the entity that *held the asset if the entity has a decreasing adjustment that relates directly or indirectly to that taxable supply in a later income year. The amount included is the amount of the decreasing adjustment.

The entity that *held the asset can deduct an amount if the entity has an increasing adjustment that relates directly or indirectly to that taxable supply in a later income year. The amount it can deduct is the amount of the increasing adjustment.

27-100 Pooling

(1) This section contains special rules for expenditure (the pooled expenditure) incurred by an entity:

on a depreciating asset allocated to a low-value pool; or

on a depreciating asset allocated to a pool under Division 328 for or in an income year; or

on *in-house software if the expenditure on the software is allocated to a software development pool; and

on *project amounts if the amounts are allocated to a project pool.

Reduction to pools etc.

There is a reduction under subsection (3) or (5) if:

the pooled expenditure relates directly or indirectly to a creditable acquisition or creditable importation; and

(b) the entity is or becomes entitled to an *input tax credit in an income year (the credit year) for the acquisition or importation and the credit year occurs after the income year in which the acquisition or importation occurred.

There is a reduction under subsection (4) if:

the pooled expenditure relates directly or indirectly to a creditable acquisition or creditable importation; and

(b) the entity is or becomes entitled to an *input tax credit in an income year (the credit year) for the acquisition or importation.

Reduced cost of assets allocated to a pool

A depreciating asset’s *cost is reduced if:

an entity’s acquisition or importation of the asset constitutes a creditable acquisition or creditable importation; and

the entity is or becomes entitled to an input tax credit for the acquisition or importation and the income year in which the acquisition or importation occurred is the same as the one in which the input tax credit arose; and

the asset is allocated to a low-value pool or a pool under Division 328 for or in that year.

The reduction is the amount of the input tax credit.

Low-value pools

For a low-value pool, the *closing pool balance of the pool for:

if the credit year is later than the first income year for which *depreciating assets were allocated to the pool—the income year before the credit year; or

if the credit year is the first income year for which *depreciating assets were allocated to the pool—the credit year;

is reduced by an amount equal to the input tax credit.

Software development pools and project pools

For a software development pool or a project pool, the expenditure in the pool for the credit year, or the *pool value for the credit year, is reduced by an amount equal to the input tax credit.

Small business pools

For a pool under Division 328, the opening pool balance of the pool for the credit year is reduced by an amount equal to the input tax credit.

No reduction if market value

However, there is no reduction to the *cost of a depreciating asset if its cost is modified under Division 40 to be its *market value.

Second element of cost

There is a reduction under subsection (7) if:

(a) the entity incurs expenditure in an income year (also the credit year) that is included in the second element of the *cost of a *depreciating asset allocated to a low-value pool or a pool under Division 328 for or in the credit year; and

the entity is or becomes entitled, after the credit year, to an input tax credit for the expenditure.

An amount equal to the amount of the input tax credit is applied in reduction of:

for a low-value pool:

if the credit year is later than the first income year for which *depreciating assets were allocated to the pool—the *closing pool balance of the pool for the income year before the credit year; or

if the credit year is the first income year for which *depreciating assets were allocated to the pool—the *closing pool balance of the pool for the credit year; or

for a pool under Division 328—the opening pool balance of the pool for the credit year.

There is a reduction to an amount of expenditure included in the second element of the *cost of a depreciating asset if:

the asset is allocated to a low-value pool or a pool under Division 328 for or in the income year in which the expenditure was incurred; and

the entity that incurred the expenditure is or becomes entitled to an input tax credit for the expenditure; and

the entitlement arises in the income year in which the expenditure was incurred.

The reduction is the amount of the input tax credit.

Increasing adjustments

(8) There is an increase under subsection (9) if the entity has an *increasing adjustment (except one that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the *GST Act) in an income year (the adjustment year) that relates directly or indirectly to a *creditable acquisition or *creditable importation to which the pooled expenditure relates.

Note: For an increasing adjustment that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the GST Act, see section 27-92.

An amount equal to the amount of that increasing adjustment is added to:

for a low-value pool:

if the adjustment year is later than the first income year for which *depreciating assets were allocated to the pool—the *closing pool balance of the pool for the income year before the adjustment year; or

if the adjustment year is the first income year for which *depreciating assets were allocated to the pool—the *closing pool balance of the pool for the adjustment year; or

for a pool under Division 328—the opening pool balance of the pool for the adjustment year; or

for *in-house software—the amount of expenditure allocated to the software development pool for the adjustment year; or

for a project pool—the *pool value for the adjustment year.

Decreasing adjustments

(10) There is a decrease under subsection (11) if the entity has a *decreasing adjustment (except one that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the *GST Act) in an income year (also the adjustment year) that relates directly or indirectly to a *creditable acquisition or *creditable importation to which the pooled expenditure relates.

Note: For a decreasing adjustment that arises under Division 129 or 132 of the GST Act, see section 27-87.

An amount equal to the amount of the decreasing adjustment is applied in reduction of:

for a low-value pool:

if the adjustment year is later than the first income year for which *depreciating assets were allocated to the pool—the *closing pool balance of the pool for the income year before the adjustment year; or

if the adjustment year is the first income year for which *depreciating assets were allocated to the pool—the *closing pool balance of the pool for the adjustment year; or

for a pool under Division 328—the opening pool balance of the pool for the adjustment year; or

for *in-house software—the amount of expenditure allocated to the software development pool for the adjustment year; or

for a project pool—the *pool value for the adjustment year.

If the amount available for reduction under subsection (11) is more than the amount referred to in paragraph (11)(a), (b), (c) or (d) (whichever is applicable), the excess is included in the entity’s assessable income unless the entity is an *exempt entity.

27-105 Other Division 40 expenditure

This section applies to expenditure for which an entity can deduct amounts under Division 40 (but not under Subdivision 40-B or 40-E, or Subdivision 40-I to the extent that that Subdivision relates to project pools).

The amount of the expenditure is reduced if the entity is or becomes entitled to an input tax credit for a creditable acquisition or creditable importation to which the expenditure directly or indirectly relates. The reduction is the amount of the input tax credit that relates to that expenditure.

If the entity has a decreasing adjustment in an income year that relates directly or indirectly to the expenditure, an amount equal to the decreasing adjustment is included in the entity’s assessable income for that income year.

If the entity has an increasing adjustment in an income year that relates directly or indirectly to the expenditure, the entity can deduct an amount equal to the increasing adjustment for that income year.

If the entity is a partnership and partners in that partnership can deduct amounts under Division 40 because section 40-570 or 40-665 applies, an amount equal to the input tax credit, the decreasing adjustment or the increasing adjustment is apportioned to each of the partners as set out in subsection 40-570(2) or 40-665(2).

However, this section does not apply to an *exempt entity.

27-110 Input tax credit etc. relating to 2 or more things

This Subdivision applies to an input tax credit, or an increasing adjustment or decreasing adjustment, that relates directly or indirectly to 2 or more things of which at least one is a depreciating asset as if a reasonable proportion of the input tax credit or adjustment related directly or indirectly to each of those depreciating assets and each of those other things.

Division 28 — Car expenses

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 28

28-A Deductions for car expenses

28-B Choosing which method to use

28-C The “cents per kilometre” method

28-F The “log book” method

28-G Keeping a log book

28-H Odometer records for a period

28-I Retaining the log book and odometer records

28-J Situations where you cannot use, or do not need to use, one of the 2 methods

Guide to Division 28

28-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the rules for working out deductions for car expenses if you own or lease a car or hire a car under a hire purchase agreement.

Table of sections

28-5 Map of this Division

28-5 Map of this Division

Subdivision 28-A — Deductions for car expenses

Table of sections

28-10 Application of Division 28

28-12 Car expenses

28-13 Meaning of car expense

28-10 Application of Division 28

This Division applies to an individual.

It also applies to a partnership that includes at least one individual, as if the partnership were an individual.

It does not apply to any other entity.

28-12 Car expenses

If you owned or leased a car, you can deduct for the car’s expenses an amount or amounts worked out using one of 2 methods.

Note 1: For particular types of cars taken on hire you cannot use one of the 2 methods: see section 28-165.

Note 2: In certain circumstances the lessee of a luxury car is taken to be its owner (see subsection 242-15(2)).

Note 3: In certain circumstances (for example, under a hire purchase agreement) the notional buyer of property is taken to be its owner (see subsection 240-20(2)).

You must use one of the 2 methods unless an exception applies. If you can’t use either of the methods, you can’t deduct anything for the car expenses.

28-13 Meaning of car expense

(1) A car expense is a loss or outgoing to do with a *car.

In addition, any of the following is a car expense:

a loss or outgoing to do with operating a car;

the decline in value of a car.

None of the following is a car expense:

a loss or outgoing incurred, or a payment made, in respect of travel outside Australia;

a taxi fare or similar loss or outgoing.

Subdivision 28-B — Choosing which method to use

Guide to Subdivision 28-B

28-14 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the rules about choosing a method of calculating car expense deductions.

Table of sections

28-15 Choosing between the 2 methods

Operative provision

28-20 Rules governing choice of method

28-15 Choosing between the 2 methods

Below is a diagram giving information about the 2 methods of calculating car expense deductions.

The 2 methods give you the choice of which method best suits your situation and needs. For instance, one method may involve more paperwork than the other, but could give you bigger deductions.

Operative provision

28-20 Rules governing choice of method

You can choose only one method for all the car expenses for the car for the income year. Choosing one method precludes the other method.

However, you can change your choice for the income year.

Example: You choose the “log book” method and deduct $1,000. On audit, the Commissioner finds that your claim is too high and should be reduced to $500. You would have been able to deduct $700 if you had chosen the “cents per kilometre” method. This rule lets you change your choice and deduct the $700.

You can also choose different methods for the same car for different income years and different methods for different cars for the same year.

Subdivision 28-C — The “cents per kilometre” method

Table of sections

28-25 How to calculate your deduction

28-30 Capital allowances

28-35 Substantiation

28-25 How to calculate your deduction

To calculate your deduction using the “cents per kilometre” method, use this formula:

But you can use this formula for the first 5,000 business kilometres only. If the car travelled more than 5,000 business kilometres, you must discard the kilometres in excess of 5,000.

Example: If the car travelled 5,085 business kilometres, you could claim for 5,000, and would lose the extra 85.

(3) Business kilometres are kilometres the *car travelled in the course of:

producing your assessable income; or

your travel between workplaces.

You calculate the number of business kilometres by making a reasonable estimate.

For the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, determine rates of cents per kilometre for cars for an income year.

In determining a rate, the Commissioner must have regard to the average operating costs for the cars to be covered by that rate.

Note: Examples of operating costs include fixed costs such as registration, insurance and depreciation, and variable costs such as fuel and maintenance.

28-30 Capital allowances

If a balancing adjustment event occurs for the car, you will need to refer to the capital allowances rules in Division 40 to find out how using this method affects the operation of those rules. See section 40-370 (about balancing adjustments for some cars).

28-35 Substantiation

To use this method, you do not need to substantiate the *car expenses for the *car.

Subdivision 28-F — The “log book” method

Table of sections

28-90 How to calculate your deduction

28-95 Eligibility

28-100 Substantiation

28-90 How to calculate your deduction

To use the “log book” method, you multiply the amount of each car expense by the business use percentage.

The expense

The expense must qualify as a deduction under some provision of this Act outside this Division (or would qualify if, while you *held the car, you had used it only in producing your assessable income). If only part of the expense would qualify, you multiply that part by the business use percentage.

Example: You borrow money to buy a car. You make repayments of principal and payments of interest.

You cannot deduct the repayments of principal because they are capital expenses.

The interest payments would be deductible in full if, throughout the income year, you had used the car only in producing your assessable income.

Using the “log book” method:

if you held the car for the whole income year—multiply the interest payments by the business use percentage;

if you held the car for only 6 months of the income year—multiply the interest payments for those 6 months by the business use percentage.

To find out whether an expense qualifies as a deduction under this Act, see Division 8 (Deductions).

The percentage

(3) The business use percentage is calculated by dividing:

the number of business kilometres that the car travelled in the period when you *held it during the income year;

by

the total number of kilometres that the car travelled in that period;

and expressing the result as a percentage.

(4) Business kilometres are kilometres the *car travelled in the course of:

producing your assessable income; or

your travel between workplaces.

You calculate the number of business kilometres by making a reasonable estimate. The estimate must take into account all relevant matters, including:

any log books, odometer records or other records you have; and

any variations in the pattern of use of the car; and

any changes in the number of cars you used in the course of producing your assessable income.

(6) You hold a *car while you own it, or it is leased to you, for use in the course of producing your assessable income, even if it is also used for some other purpose.

Note 1: In certain circumstances the lessee of a luxury car is taken to be its owner (see subsection 242-15(2)).

Note 2: In certain circumstances the notional buyer of property is taken to be its owner (see subsection 240-20(2)).

28-95 Eligibility

You can use this method only if you *held the car for some or all of the income year.

28-100 Substantiation

To use this method, you must substantiate the car expenses under Subdivision 900-C.

You must also keep a log book. Subdivision 28-G explains:

how often you need to keep a log book;

how to keep a log book.

The log book is relevant to estimating the number of business kilometres the car travelled in the period when you *held it during the income year.

You must keep odometer records for the period when you *held the car during the income year. Subdivision 28-H tells you about odometer records, which document the total number of kilometres the car travelled in that period.

You must record the following information, in writing, before you lodge your income tax return:

your estimate of the number of business kilometres; and

the business use percentage.

However, the Commissioner may allow you to record the information later.

You must retain the log book and the odometer records. Subdivision 28-I has the rules about this.

Subdivision 28-G — Keeping a log book

Guide to Subdivision 28-G

28-105 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you how to keep a log book. A log book is relevant to estimating the number of business kilometres the car travelled in the period when you held it during the income year.

Table of sections

28-110 Steps for keeping a log book

Operative provisions

28-115 Income years for which you need to keep a log book

28-120 Choosing the 12 week period for a log book

28-125 How to keep a log book

28-130 Replacing one car with another

28-110 Steps for keeping a log book

There are 3 steps you need to follow in keeping a log book:

identify an income year for which to keep a log book;

choose a period of at least 12 weeks for the log book to cover;

record journeys made in the car during the log book period in the course of producing your assessable income.

Operative provisions

28-115 Income years for which you need to keep a log book

You need to keep a log book for the first income year for which you use this method for the car.

Having kept a log book for one income year, you don’t need to keep a new one for the next 4 or more income years unless subsection (3) or (4) requires it. If you haven’t kept a new log book for 4 income years in a row, you must keep one for the next income year.

Example: If you keep a log book in 1997-98, you would need to keep the next one in 2002-2003, unless subsection (3) or (4) requires one sooner.

You must keep a log book for an income year if the Commissioner sends you a notice before the year directing you to keep a log book for the car for that year.

You must keep a log book for an income year if, during that year, you get one or more additional *cars for which you want to use the “log book” method for that year.

When you replace one car with another, you might have a period when you *hold both the new car and the old car, or a period when you no longer *hold the old car but do not yet hold the new car. In both these cases, you are treated for the purposes of subsection (4) as if you held the one car continuously.

You may choose to keep a log book for an income year even if you don’t need to; for example, because you want to establish a higher business use percentage.

28-120 Choosing the 12 week period for a log book

The log book must cover a continuous period of at least 12 weeks throughout which you *held the car. If you hold the car for less than 12 weeks, the period must be the entire period for which you held the car.

The period may overlap the start or end of the income year, so long as it includes part of the year.

If you want to use the “log book” method for 2 or more *cars for the same income year, the log books for those cars must cover periods that are concurrent.

28-125 How to keep a log book

It is in your interests to record in the log book any journey made in the car during the log book period in the course of producing your assessable income. If a journey is not recorded, the log book will indicate a lower business use percentage than is actually the case.

A journey is recorded by making in the log book an entry specifying:

the day the journey began and the day it ended;

the car’s odometer readings at the start and end of the journey;

how many kilometres the car travelled on the journey;

why the journey was made.

The record must be made at the end of the journey or as soon as possible afterwards.

If 2 or more journeys in a row are made in the car on the same day in the course of producing your assessable income, they can be recorded as a single journey.

The following must be entered in the log book:

when the log book period begins and ends;

the car’s odometer readings at the start and the end of the period;

the total number of kilometres that the car travelled during the period;

the number of kilometres that the car travelled, in the course of producing your assessable income, on journeys recorded in the log book;

the number of kilometres referred to in paragraph (d), expressed as a percentage of the total number referred to in paragraph (c).

Each of the entries must be made at or as soon as possible after the start or end of the period, as appropriate.

Each entry in the log book must be in English.

28-130 Replacing one car with another

For the purposes of using the “log book” method, you may nominate one car as having replaced another car with effect from a day specified in the nomination.

After the nomination takes effect, the replacement car is treated as the original car, and the original car is treated as a different car. This means that you do not need to repeat for the replacement car the steps you have already taken for the original car under this Subdivision.

You must record the nomination in writing before you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the nomination takes effect. However, the Commissioner may allow you to do it later.

You must retain the nomination document until the end of the period for which you must retain the last log book that you began to keep for the original car before the day of effect of the nomination.

Section 28-150 (which is about retaining log books) applies to the nomination document in the same way as it applies to that last log book.

Subdivision 28-H — Odometer records for a period

Guide to Subdivision 28-H

28-135 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you how to keep odometer records for a car during a particular period. Odometer records document the total number of kilometres the car travelled during a particular period.

Table of sections

Operative provision

28-140 How to keep odometer records for a car for a period

Operative provision

28-140 How to keep odometer records for a car for a period

Odometer records for a period are kept in the form of a document in which the following are entered:

the car’s odometer readings at the start and the end of the period;

if there is a nomination under section 28-130 to replace the car with another car with effect from a day in that period—the odometer readings, at the end of that day, of both cars affected by the nomination.

Each entry under subsection (1) must be in English and must be made at or as soon as possible after the start or end of the period, or the end of the specified day, as appropriate.

The following must also be entered in the document:

the car’s make, model and registration number (if any);

if the car has an internal combustion engine—its engine capacity expressed in cubic centimetres;

if there is a nomination under section 28-130 to replace the car with another car—the corresponding details for the other car affected by the nomination.

Each entry under subsection (3) must be made in English and must be made before you lodge your income tax return.

The Commissioner may allow you to make an entry under this section after you lodge your income tax return.

Subdivision 28-I — Retaining the log book and odometer records

Table of sections

28-150 Retaining the log book for the retention period

28-155 Retaining odometer records

28-150 Retaining the log book for the retention period

You must retain the log book:

first, until the end of the latest income year for which you rely on the log book to support your calculation of the business use percentage for the car; and

then for another 5 years.

The period for which you must retain the log book is called the retention period.

The 5 years start on the due day for lodging your income tax return for that latest income year. If you lodge your return later, the 5 years start on the day you lodge it.

However, the retention period is extended if, when the 5 years end, you are involved in a dispute with the Commissioner that relates to a deduction worked out using a business use percentage that you are relying on the log book to support. See section 900-170.

If you do not retain the log book for the retention period, you cannot deduct any amount worked out using a business use percentage that you are relying on the log book to support. If you have already deducted such an amount, your assessment may be amended to disallow the deduction.

For the purposes of the rules about retaining and producing records of expenses (see Subdivision 900-G), the log book is treated as a record of the car expenses for each year for which you use a business use percentage that you are relying on the log book to support.

If you lose the log book, there are rules that might help you in section 900-205. For the purposes of the rules about relief from the effects of failing to substantiate (see Subdivision 900-H), not doing something required by this Division is treated in the same way as not doing something necessary to follow the rules in Division 900.

28-155 Retaining odometer records

You must retain your odometer records relating to the period when you *held the car in the income year.

If you keep a log book for the income year, you must retain the odometer records for the same period as the log book, and section 28-150 applies to them in the same way as it applies to the log book.

If you don’t keep a log book for the income year, you must retain the odometer records for the same period as written evidence of a car expense for the car for the income year, and section 900-75 applies to them in the same way as it applies to written evidence of an expense.

Note: Section 900-75 is about retaining written evidence of a car expense.

Subdivision 28-J — Situations where you cannot use, or do not need to use, one of the 2 methods

Guide to Subdivision 28-J

28-160 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the situations where you cannot use, or don’t need to use, either of the 2 methods. These situations involve either the nature of your car or the way you use it.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

28-165 Exception for particular cars taken on hire

28-170 Exception for particular cars used in particular ways

28-175 Further miscellaneous exceptions

28-185 Application of Subdivision 28-J to recipients and payers of certain withholding payments

Operative provisions

28-165 Exception for particular cars taken on hire

For particular types of *cars taken on hire you cannot use one of the 2 methods to calculate your deductions for car expenses.

Instead, you must calculate the deductions under the normal principles governing deductions, including the rules for apportioning a loss or outgoing that is only partly attributable to producing assessable income.

This section applies to a taxi taken on hire.

It also applies to a motor vehicle taken on hire under an agreement of a kind ordinarily entered into by people who take motor vehicles on hire intermittently, as the occasion requires, on an hourly, daily, weekly or short term basis, except if the motor vehicle:

has been taken on hire under successive agreements of a kind that result in substantial continuity of the motor vehicle being taken on hire; or

it is reasonable to expect that the motor vehicle will be taken on hire under successive agreements of a kind that will so result.

28-170 Exception for particular cars used in particular ways

For particular types of *cars used in particular ways you don’t need to use one of the 2 methods to calculate your deductions for car expenses.

(2) You may use one of the 2 methods, or you may instead calculate the deductions under the normal principles governing deductions, including the rules for apportioning a loss or outgoing that is only partly attributable to producing assessable income.

This section applies if, whenever you used the car in the income year:

the car was covered by the description in column 2 of an item in the table below; and

you used the car as described in column 3 of that item.

28-175 Further miscellaneous exceptions

This section lists some miscellaneous cases where you don’t need to use one of the 2 methods to calculate your deductions for car expenses.

(2) You may use one of the 2 methods, or you may instead calculate the deductions under the normal principles governing deductions, including the rules for apportioning a loss or outgoing that is only partly attributable to producing assessable income.

The cases are as follows:

the car was unregistered throughout the period when you *held it during the income year, and during that period you used it principally in the course of producing your assessable income; or

at some time during the income year the car was part of the trading stock of a business of selling cars that you carried on, and you didn’t use the car at any time during that year; or

the expense is to do with repairs to or other work on the car, and you incurred it in the course of a business that you carried on of doing repairs or other work on cars.

In applying paragraph (a), the car is taken to be registered in a particular place while it is lawful to drive the car on a public road there.

28-185 Application of Subdivision 28-J to recipients and payers of certain withholding payments

Application to recipients

If an individual receives, or is entitled to receive, *withholding payments covered by subsection (3), this Subdivision applies to him or her:

in the same way as it applies to an employee; and

(b) as if an entity (a notional employer) that makes (or is liable to make) such payments to him or her were his or her employer; and

as if any other individual who receives, or is entitled to receive, such payments from a notional employer were also an employee of the notional employer.

Application to payers

This Division applies to an entity that makes, or is liable to make, *withholding payments covered by subsection (3):

in the same way as it applies to an employer; and

as if an individual to whom the entity makes (or is liable to make) such payments were the entity’s employee.

Withholding payments covered

(3) This subsection covers a *withholding payment covered by any of the provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 listed in the table.

Division 30 — Gifts or contributions

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 30

30-A Deductions for gifts or contributions

30-B Tables of recipients for deductible gifts

30-BA Endorsement of deductible gift recipients

30-C Rules applying to particular gifts of property

30-CA Administrative requirements relating to ABNs

30-DA Donations to political parties and independent candidates and members

30-DB Spreading certain gift and covenant deductions over up to 5 income years

30-G Index to this Division

Guide to Division 30

30-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the rules for working out deductions for certain gifts or contributions that you make.

Table of sections

30-5 How to find your way around this Division

30-10 Index

30-5 How to find your way around this Division

You should start at Subdivision 30-A unless you are making a contribution or gift to a political party, independent candidate or member.

Note: Subdivision 30-DA deals with the deductibility of contributions and gifts to political parties, independent candidates and members.

Subdivision 30-A contains a table of all the gifts and contributions that you can deduct. You need to look at the table to see whether the type of gift or contribution you are making is covered by it.

In some cases, the table sends you off to Subdivision 30-B. It has a number of tables that list particular funds, authorities or institutions that deductible gifts can be made to.

In other cases, the table sends you off to Subdivision 30-C. It contains rules that apply to particular gifts of property.

(4AA) Subdivision 30-BA provides for the Commissioner to endorse as a deductible gift recipient an entity that is, or operates, a fund, authority or institution. The relevance of the Subdivision to you is that generally you can deduct only a gift you make to a recipient that is endorsed or named in:

this Division; or

regulations made for the purposes of this Division.

Note: The fact that gifts to a recipient registered in the Australian Business Register are deductible will be shown in the Register.

(4AB) Subdivision 30-CA sets out administrative rules which do not directly affect whether you can deduct a gift you make. The rules require:

a receipt issued by an entity for a gift to the entity or to a fund, authority or institution operated by the entity to show the entity’s ABN; and

the Australian Business Registrar to enter in the Australian Business Register a statement in relation to an entity entered in the Register if:

gifts to the entity are deductible; or

gifts to a fund, authority or institution operated by the entity are deductible.

Subdivision 30-DB allows you to spread deductions for certain gifts and covenants over up to 5 income years.

30-10 Index

There is an index to this Division in Subdivision 30-G.

Subdivision 30-A — Deductions for gifts or contributions

Table of sections

30-15 Table of gifts or contributions that you can deduct

30-17 Requirements for certain recipients

30-15 Table of gifts or contributions that you can deduct

You can deduct a gift or contribution that you make in the situations set out in the following table. It tells you:

who the recipient of the gift or contribution can be; and

the type of gift or contribution that you can make; and

how much you can deduct for the gift or contribution; and

any special conditions that apply.

A testamentary gift or contribution is not deductible under this section.

Note: Subdivision 30-DA deals with the deductibility of contributions and gifts to political parties, independent candidates and members.

For the purposes of items 4, 5 and 6 of the table in subsection (2), the GST inclusive market values of the property or place in question are reduced by 1/11 if you would have been entitled to an input tax credit if:

you had *acquired the property or place at the time you made the gift; and

your acquisition had been for a creditable purpose.

For the purposes of item 7 of the table in subsection (2), in working out the GST inclusive market value of the right in question, disregard anything that would prevent or restrict conversion of the right to money.

For the purposes of item 8 of the table in subsection (2), in working out the GST inclusive market value of the goods or services in question, disregard anything that would prevent or restrict conversion of the goods or services to money.

30-17 Requirements for certain recipients

This section sets out requirements to be met for you to be able to deduct a gift you make to a fund, authority or institution described in the column headed “Recipient” of item 1, 2 or 4 of the table in section 30-15. However, this section does not apply to:

a fund, authority or institution that is mentioned by name in an item of a table in Subdivision 30-B; or

the Australiana Fund.

The fund, authority or institution must:

be an entity or government entity that is endorsed under Subdivision 30-BA as a deductible gift recipient; or

in the case of a fund—either:

be owned legally by an entity that is endorsed under Subdivision 30-BA as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of the fund; or

be under the control of one or more persons who constitute a government entity that is endorsed under Subdivision 30-BA as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of the fund; or

in the case of an authority or institution—be part of an entity or government entity that is endorsed under Subdivision 30-BA as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of the authority or institution.

Example: A public fund that is established and maintained for constructing a building to be used by a State school and is controlled by the principal of the school would be an example of a fund under the control of one or more persons who constitute a government entity that is endorsed as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of the fund, if the school were so endorsed.

Subdivision 30-B — Tables of recipients for deductible gifts

Table of sections

Health

30-20 Health

Education

30-25 Education

30-30 Gifts that must be for certain purposes

30-35 Rural schools hostel buildings

30-37 Scholarship etc. funds

Research

30-40 Research

Welfare and rights

30-45 Welfare and rights

30-45A Australian disaster relief funds—declarations by Minister

30-46 Australian disaster relief funds—declarations under State and Territory law

Defence

30-50 Defence

Environment

30-55 The environment

30-60 Gifts to a National Parks body or conservation body must satisfy certain requirements

Industry, trade and design

30-65 Industry, trade and design

The family

30-70 The family

30-75 Marriage education organisations must be approved

International affairs

30-80 International affairs

30-85 Developing country relief funds

30-86 Developed country disaster relief funds

Sports and recreation

30-90 Sports and recreation

Philanthropic trusts

30-95 Philanthropic trusts

Cultural organisations

30-100 Cultural organisations

Fire and emergency services

30-102 Fire and emergency services

Other recipients

30-105 Other recipients

30-110 Community charities

Health

30-20 Health

This table sets out general categories of health recipients.

This table sets out specific health recipients.

Education

30-25 Education

This table sets out general categories of education recipients.

This table sets out specific education recipients.

30-30 Gifts that must be for certain purposes

You can deduct a gift that you make to:

a technical and further education institution covered by item 2.1.7 of the table in subsection 30-25(1); or

the Marcus Oldham Farm Management College;

only if the gift is for:

purposes of the institution, or of the College, that have been declared by the Student Assistance Minister to relate solely to tertiary education; or

the provision of facilities for the institution, or the College, if the Student Assistance Minister has declared that he or she is satisfied the facilities are to be used principally for such purposes.

A declaration under subsection (1) must be in writing, signed by the Minister.

30-35 Rural schools hostel buildings

For the purposes of item 2.1.11 of the table in subsection 30-25(1), a rural school hostel building is one to which this section applies if it meets the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4).

The rural school hostel building must be used, or going to be used, principally as residential accommodation for students:

whose usual place of residence is in a rural area; and

who are undertaking primary or secondary education, or special education programs for children with disabilities, at a school in the same area as the building.

The costs of the school must be solely or partly funded by the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory.

The residential accommodation must be provided by:

the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory; or

a public authority; or

a company that:

is not carried on for the purposes of profit or gain to its individual members; and

is prohibited by its *constitution from making any distribution of money or property to its members.

30-37 Scholarship etc. funds

For the purposes of item 2.1.13 of the table in subsection 30-25(1), a scholarship, bursary or prize is one to which this section applies if:

(a) it may only be awarded to Australian citizens, or permanent residents of Australia, within the meaning of the Australian Citizenship Act 2007; and

it is open to individuals or groups of individuals throughout a region of at least 200,000 people, or throughout at least an entire State or Territory; and

it promotes recipients’ education in either or both of the following:

*pre-school courses, *primary courses, *secondary courses or *tertiary courses;

educational institutions overseas, by way of study of a component of a course covered by subparagraph (i); and

it is awarded on merit or for reasons of equity.

Research

30-40 Research

This table sets out general categories of research recipients.

This table sets out specific research recipients.

Welfare and rights

30-45 Welfare and rights

This table sets out general categories of welfare and rights recipients.

This table sets out specific welfare and rights recipients.

30-45A Australian disaster relief funds—declarations by Minister

For the purposes of item 4.1.5 of the table in subsection 30-45(1), an event is a disaster to which this subsection applies if the Minister has declared it to be a disaster. The Minister may do so if satisfied that:

the event developed rapidly and resulted in:

the death, serious injury or other physical suffering of a large number of people; or

widespread damage to property or the natural environment; or

(b) if a national emergency declaration (within the meaning of the National Emergency Declaration Act 2020) is in force—the event is the subject of the national emergency declaration.

The Minister’s declaration of an event as a disaster:

must be in writing; and

must specify the day (or the first day) of the event; and

must be published on the internet or by another method determined by the Minister.

The Minister’s declaration of an event as a disaster is not a legislative instrument.

You can deduct a gift that you make to a public fund covered by item 4.1.5 of the table in subsection 30-45(1), in relation to a disaster to which subsection (1) of this section applies, only within the 2 years beginning on the day specified in the declaration as the day (or the first day) of the event for which the fund is to provide relief.

Note: Public funds under item 4.1.5 of the table in subsection 30-45(1) are for disaster relief of people in Australia. Public funds may also be established for disaster relief of people in other countries. See items 9.1.1 (which is not limited to disaster relief) and 9.1.2 of the table in section 30-80.

30-46 Australian disaster relief funds—declarations under State and Territory law

For the purposes of item 4.1.5 of the table in subsection 30-45(1), a disaster is one to which this subsection applies if:

it is declared to be a disaster, or it gives rise to a declaration of a state of emergency, by or with the approval of a Minister of a State or Territory under the law of the State or Territory; and

it developed rapidly; and

it resulted in the death, serious injury or other physical suffering of a large number of people, or in widespread damage to property or the natural environment; and

subsection 30-45A(1) does not apply to it.

You can deduct a gift that you make to a public fund covered by item 4.1.5 of the table in subsection 30-45(1), in relation to a disaster to which subsection (1) of this section applies, only within the 2 years beginning:

if the day (or the first day) on which the event occurred is specified in the declaration mentioned in paragraph (1)(a)—on that day; or

otherwise—on the day of the declaration.

Note: Public funds under item 4.1.5 of the table in subsection 30-45(1) are for disaster relief of people in Australia. Public funds may also be established for disaster relief of people in other countries. See items 9.1.1 (which is not limited to disaster relief) and 9.1.2 of the table in section 30-80.

Defence

30-50 Defence

This table sets out general categories of defence recipients.

This table sets out specific defence recipients.

Environment

30-55 The environment

This table sets out general categories of environment recipients.

This table sets out specific environment recipients.

30-60 Gifts to a National Parks body or conservation body must satisfy certain requirements

You can deduct a gift that you make to an environmental institution covered by any of table items 6.2.1 to 6.2.12 or 6.2.22 in subsection 30-55(2) only if, at the time of making the gift, the institution has a policy of not acting as a mere conduit for the donation of money or property to other entities.

Industry, trade and design

30-65 Industry, trade and design

This table sets out specific industry, trade and design recipients.

The family

30-70 The family

This table sets out general categories of family recipients.

This table sets out specific family recipients.

30-75 Marriage education organisations must be approved

For the purposes of item 8.1.1 of the table in subsection 30-70(1), this section applies to a company if the company has been approved by the *Families Minister under section 9C of the Marriage Act 1961.

International affairs

30-80 International affairs

This table sets out general categories of international affairs recipients.

This table sets out specific international affairs recipients.

30-85 Developing country relief funds

For the purposes of item 9.1.1 of the table in subsection 30-80(1), a country is covered by this section if:

it is included in the list of official development assistance recipients published from time to time by the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development’s Development Assistance Committee; or

it is specified in a declaration under subsection (2) of this section.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), the Foreign Affairs Minister may, by legislative instrument, make a declaration specifying a country as a developing country.

30-86 Developed country disaster relief funds

For the purposes of item 9.1.2 of the table in subsection 30-80(1), a disaster is one to which this subsection applies if the Minister has recognised it as a disaster. The Minister may do so if satisfied that:

it developed rapidly; and

it resulted in the death, serious injury or other physical suffering of a large number of people, or in widespread damage to property or the natural environment.

The Minister’s recognition of an event as a disaster:

must be by notifiable instrument; and

must specify the day (or the first day) of the event.

You can deduct a gift that you make to a public fund covered by item 9.1.2 of the table in subsection 30-80(1) only within the 2 years beginning on the day specified in the recognition as the day (or the first day) of the event for which the fund is to provide relief.

Note: A public fund may also be established for disaster relief of people in Australia (see item 4.1.5 of the table in section 30-45).

Sports and recreation

30-90 Sports and recreation

This table sets out specific sports and recreation recipients.

Philanthropic trusts

30-95 Philanthropic trusts

This table sets out specific philanthropic trusts.

Cultural organisations

30-100 Cultural organisations

This table sets out general categories of cultural recipients.

This table sets out specific cultural recipients.

Fire and emergency services

30-102 Fire and emergency services

This table sets out general categories of fire and emergency services recipients.

Other recipients

30-105 Other recipients

This table sets out general categories of other recipients.

This table sets out specific other recipients.

30-110 Community charities

For the purposes of item 13.1.1 of the table in subsection 30-105(1), this section applies to a community charity trust if the trust is established and maintained under a will or instrument of trust:

for the purposes covered by:

subsections (3) and (4) of this section; or

subsections (3), (4) and (5) of this section; and

for no other purposes.

For the purposes of item 13.1.2 of the table in subsection 30-105(1), this section applies to a community charity corporation if the corporation is operated:

for the purposes covered by:

subsections (3) and (4) of this section; or

subsections (3), (4) and (5) of this section; and

for no other purposes.

Mandatory purposes

This subsection covers the purpose of providing money, property or benefits to a fund, authority or institution if:

gifts to the fund, authority or institution are deductible under item 1 of the table in section 30-15; and

the fund, authority or institution is described (whether or not by name) in an item of a table in this Subdivision (other than item 13.1.1 or 13.1.2 of the table in subsection 30-105(1)); and

the money, property or benefits are so provided to the fund, authority or institution for any purposes set out in the item of that table in which the fund, authority or institution is described.

This subsection covers the purpose of engaging in an activity that:

is the principal activity of a fund, authority or institution described (but not by name) in an item of a table in this Subdivision (other than item 13.1.1 or 13.1.2 of the table in subsection 30-105(1)); or

involves pursuing the principal purpose of a fund, authority or institution described (but not by name) in an item of a table in this Subdivision (other than item 13.1.1 or 13.1.2 of the table in subsection 30-105(1)).

Permitted purpose

This subsection covers the purpose of establishing a fund, authority or institution described (whether or not by name) in an item of a table in this Subdivision (other than item 13.1.1 or 13.1.2 of the table in subsection 30-105(1)).

Subdivision 30-BA — Endorsement of deductible gift recipients

Guide to Subdivision 30-BA

30-115 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out rules about endorsement of entities and government entities as deductible gift recipients. Endorsement of an entity described (except by name) in Subdivision 30-A or 30-B lets you deduct a gift you make to a fund, authority or institution that is, or is operated by, the entity.

Table of sections

Endorsement as a deductible gift recipient

30-120 Endorsement by Commissioner

30-125 Entitlement to endorsement

30-130 Maintaining a gift fund

Government entities treated like entities

30-180 How this Subdivision applies to government entities

Endorsement as a deductible gift recipient

30-120 Endorsement by Commissioner

If an entity applies for endorsement in accordance with Division 426 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, the Commissioner must endorse the entity:

as a deductible gift recipient, if the entity is entitled to be endorsed as a deductible gift recipient; or

as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of a fund, authority or institution, if the entity is entitled to be endorsed as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of the fund, authority or institution.

Note: For procedural rules relating to endorsement, see Division 426 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

30-125 Entitlement to endorsement

Endorsement of an entity that is a fund, authority or institution

An entity is entitled to be endorsed as a deductible gift recipient if:

the entity has an ABN; and

the entity is a fund, authority or institution that:

is described (but not by name) in item 1, 2 or 4 of the table in section 30-15; and

is not described by name in Subdivision 30-B if it is described in item 1 of that table; and

meets the relevant conditions (if any) identified in the column headed “Special conditions” of the item of that table in which it is described; and

the entity meets the requirements of subsection (6), unless:

the entity is established by an Act; and

the Act (or another Act) does not provide for the winding up or termination of the entity; and

in the case of an *ancillary or community charity trust fund—the fund and all of its trustees comply with the rules in the *applicable trust fund guidelines; and

in the case of a community charity corporation—the corporation and all of its directors comply with the rules in the community charity corporation guidelines.

Endorsement of an entity for operating a fund, authority etc.

An entity is entitled to be endorsed as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of a fund, authority or institution that is described (but not by name) in item 1, 2 or 4 of the table in section 30-15 and is not described by name in Subdivision 30-B if:

the entity has an ABN; and

the entity:

legally owns the fund; or

includes the authority or institution; and

the fund, authority or institution meets the relevant conditions (if any) identified in the column headed “Special conditions” of that item; and

the entity meets the requirements of subsection (6), unless:

the entity is established by an Act; and

the Act (or another Act) does not provide for the winding up or termination of the entity; and

the entity meets the requirements of section 30-130, unless the entity is endorsed as a deductible gift recipient under paragraph 30-120(a).

Relevant special conditions in table in section 30-15

To avoid doubt:

a condition requiring the fund, authority or institution to meet the requirements of section 30-17 is not a relevant condition for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(iii) or paragraph (2)(c) of this section; and

Note: Section 30-17 requires the entity to be endorsed under this Subdivision as a deductible gift recipient.

in the case of a fund, authority or institution that is described in item 1 of the table in section 30-15—a condition set out in the relevant table item in Subdivision 30-B, including a condition identified in the column headed “Special conditions—fund, authority or institution” of that item (if any), is a relevant condition for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(iii) or paragraph (2)(c) of this section.

Note: Paragraph (c) of the column headed “Special conditions” of item 1 of the table in section 30-15 requires any conditions set out in the relevant table item in Subdivision 30-B to be satisfied.

Transfer of assets from fund, authority or institution

A law (outside this Subdivision), a document constituting the entity or rules governing the entity’s activities must require the entity, at the first occurrence of an event described in subsection (7), to transfer to a fund, authority or institution gifts to which can be deducted under this Division:

any surplus assets of the gift fund (see section 30-130); or

if the entity is not required by this section to meet the requirements of section 30-130—any surplus:

gifts of money or property for the principal purpose of the fund, authority or institution; and

contributions described in item 7 or 8 of the table in section 30-15 in relation to a fund-raising event held for that purpose; and

money received by the entity because of such gifts or contributions.

Events requiring transfer

The events are:

the winding up of the fund, authority or institution; and

if the entity is endorsed because of a fund, authority or institution—the revocation of the entity’s endorsement under this Subdivision relating to the fund, authority or institution.

Note 1: There are 2 ways an entity can be endorsed because of a fund, authority or institution. An entity can be endorsed either because it is a fund, authority or institution or because it operates a fund, authority or institution.

Note 2: Section 426-55 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 deals with revocation of endorsement.

Note 3: The entity is also required to keep appropriate records: see section 382-15 of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

30-130 Maintaining a gift fund

(1) The entity must maintain for the principal purpose of the fund, authority or institution a fund (the gift fund):

to which gifts of money or property for that purpose are to be made; and

to which contributions described in item 7 or 8 of the table in section 30-15 in relation to a fund-raising event held for that purpose are to be made; and

to which any money received by the entity because of such gifts or contributions is to be credited; and

that does not receive any other money or property.

The entity must use the gift fund only for the principal purpose of the fund, authority or institution.

Exception—only one gift fund required per entity

An entity that operates 2 or more funds, authorities or institutions also meets the requirements of this section for 2 or more of those funds, authorities or institutions by maintaining a single gift fund if:

the gift fund meets the requirements in paragraphs (1)(a), (b) and (c) in respect of each of the funds, authorities or institutions for which the gift fund is maintained; and

the gift fund does not receive any other money or property.

The entity must use a gift or contribution made to the fund and any money credited to the fund only for the principal purpose of the fund, authority or institution to which the gift, contribution or money relates.

Note: The entity is also required to keep appropriate records for each of the funds, authorities or institutions: see section 382-15 of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Government entities treated like entities

30-180 How this Subdivision applies to government entities

The other sections of this Subdivision apply in relation to a government entity in the same way as they apply in relation to an entity.

Subparagraph 30-125(2)(b)(i) (as applied by this section) operates as if it referred to the government entity consisting of persons, one or more of whom controlled the fund (instead of referring to the entity legally owning the fund).

Subdivision 30-C — Rules applying to particular gifts of property

Table of sections

Valuation requirements

30-200 Getting written valuations

30-205 Proceeds of the sale would have been assessable

30-210 Approved valuers

30-212 Valuations by the Commissioner

Working out the amount you can deduct for a gift of property

30-215 How much you can deduct

30-220 Reducing the amount you can deduct

Joint ownership of property

30-225 Gift of property by joint owners

Valuation requirements

30-200 Getting written valuations

You satisfy the valuation requirements if you get 2 or more written valuations of the gift you made.

Note 1: In most cases, you need to get these written valuations to be able to deduct a gift of property that you make to a recipient covered by item 4, 5 or 6 of the table in section 30-15.

Note 2: You do not need to get written valuations in the circumstances set out in section 30-205.

The valuations must be by different individuals, each of whom is an approved valuer of the kind of property you are giving away.

Note: Section 30-210 deals with how an individual becomes an approved valuer.

Each valuation must state the amount that, in the opinion of the valuer, was:

the GST inclusive market value of the property on the day you made the gift; or

the GST inclusive market value of the property on the day the valuation was made.

If a valuation states the GST inclusive market value of the property on the day the valuation was made, it must have been made within 90 days before or after the gift was made. However, the Commissioner may allow a longer period than this.

30-205 Proceeds of the sale would have been assessable

(1) You do not need to get written valuations of the gift you made if:

no amount is included in your assessable income in respect of the gift you made; but

(b) an amount would have been included in your assessable income if you had sold the property instead of making the gift.

However, this section does not apply if, apart from the operation of subsection 118-60(2), an amount would have been included in your assessable income in respect of the gift you made.

30-210 Approved valuers

The Arts Secretary may approve an individual as a valuer of a particular kind of property. The approval must be in writing, signed by the Secretary.

The Secretary must, in deciding whether to approve an individual, have regard to:

the individual’s qualifications, experience and knowledge in valuing that kind of property; and

the individual’s knowledge of the current GST inclusive market value of that kind of property; and

the individual’s standing in the professional community.

30-212 Valuations by the Commissioner

If you make a gift or contribution that is covered by a provision of this Division that refers to the value of property as determined by the Commissioner, you must seek the valuation from the Commissioner.

The Commissioner may charge you the amount worked out in accordance with the regulations for making the valuation.

Working out the amount you can deduct for a gift of property

30-215 How much you can deduct

This section contains the rules for working out how much you can deduct for a gift of property that you make to a recipient covered by item 4, 5 or 6 of the table in section 30-15.

The general rule is that the amount you can deduct for a gift of this kind is the average of the GST inclusive market values (as reduced under subsection 30-15(3) if that subsection applies) specified in the written valuations you got from the approved valuers.

Note: In some situations you must reduce the amount you can deduct: see section 30-220.

The exceptions to the general rule are set out in this table:

For the purposes of items 3 and 4 of the table in subsection (3), the GST inclusive market values of the property in question are reduced by 1/11 if you would have been entitled to an input tax credit if:

you had *acquired the property at the time you made the gift; and

your acquisition had been for a creditable purpose.

30-220 Reducing the amount you can deduct

The amount you can deduct is reduced by a reasonable amount if:

the terms and conditions on which the gift is made are such that the recipient:

does not receive immediate custody and control of the property; or

does not have the unconditional right to retain custody and control of the property in perpetuity; or

does not obtain an immediate, indefeasible and unencumbered legal and equitable title to the property; or

the custody, control or use of the property by the recipient is affected by an arrangement entered into in respect of the making of the gift.

In deciding what is a reasonable amount, have regard to the effect of those terms and conditions, or that arrangement, on the GST inclusive market value of the gift.

Joint ownership of property

30-225 Gift of property by joint owners

If:

you own property jointly with one or more other entities; and

you and the other entities make a gift of the property; and

you would have been able to deduct the gift under section 30-15 because of item 4, 5 or 6 of the table in that section if you had made a gift of the property as sole owner of it;

you can deduct so much of the gift as is reasonable, having regard to your interest in the property.

Subdivision 30-CA — Administrative requirements relating to ABNs

Guide to Subdivision 30-CA

30-226 What this Subdivision is about

An entity must ensure certain details must appear on a receipt it issues for a gift that:

is made to the entity or a fund, authority or institution it operates; and

is of a kind that the giver can deduct under Subdivision 30-A.

If the entity has an ABN, the Australian Business Registrar must state in the Australian Business Register that the entity is a deductible gift recipient.

Table of sections

Requirements

30-227 Entities to which this Subdivision applies

30-228 Content of receipt for gift or contribution

30-229 Australian Business Register must show deductibility of gifts to deductible gift recipient

Requirements

30-227 Entities to which this Subdivision applies

This Subdivision sets out requirements relating to a deductible gift recipient.

(2) A deductible gift recipient is an entity or *government entity that:

is a fund, authority or institution described in item 1, 2, 4, 5 or 6 of the table in section 30-15 and is:

endorsed under Subdivision 30-BA as a deductible gift recipient; or

mentioned by name in that table or in Subdivision 30-B; or

is endorsed as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of a fund, authority or institution described in item 1, 2 or 4 of the table in section 30-15.

30-228 Content of receipt for gift or contribution

If a deductible gift recipient issues a receipt for a gift described in the relevant item of the table in section 30-15 to the fund, authority or institution, the deductible gift recipient must ensure that the receipt states:

the name of the fund, authority or institution; and

the ABN (if any) of the deductible gift recipient; and

the fact that the receipt is for a gift.

Note: If the deductible gift recipient is endorsed as a deductible gift recipient and it contravenes this section, the Commissioner may revoke its endorsement: see section 426-55 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

If a deductible gift recipient issues a receipt for a contribution described in item 7 of the table in section 30-15, the deductible gift recipient must ensure that the receipt states:

the name of the deductible gift recipient; and

the ABN (if any) of the deductible gift recipient; and

the fact that the receipt is for a contribution made in return for a right to attend, or participate in, a specified fund-raising event; and

if the contribution is money—the amount of the contribution; and

the amount of the GST inclusive market value, on the day the contribution was made, of the right to attend, or participate in, the fund-raising event.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(e), in working out the GST inclusive market value of the right in question, disregard anything that would prevent or restrict conversion of the right to money.

If a deductible gift recipient issues a receipt for a contribution described in item 8 of the table in section 30-15, the deductible gift recipient must ensure that the receipt states:

the name of the deductible gift recipient; and

the ABN (if any) of the deductible gift recipient; and

the fact that the receipt is for a contribution made by way of consideration for the supply of goods or services; and

the fact that the contribution was made because the contributor was the successful bidder at an auction that:

was a specified fund-raising event; or

was held at a specified fund-raising event; and

if the contribution is money—the amount of the contribution; and

the GST inclusive market value, on the day the contribution was made, of the goods or services.

For the purposes of paragraph (4)(f), in working out the GST inclusive market value of the goods or services in question, disregard anything that would prevent or restrict conversion of the goods or services to money.

30-229 Australian Business Register must show deductibility of gifts to deductible gift recipient

If a deductible gift recipient has an ABN, the Australian Business Registrar must enter in the Australian Business Register in relation to the deductible gift recipient a statement that it is a deductible gift recipient for a specified period.

Note 1: An entry (or lack of entry) of a statement required by this section does not affect whether you can deduct a gift to the fund, authority or institution.

Note 2: This section will apply to all entities and government entities that are endorsed as deductible gift recipients under Subdivision 30-BA, because they must have ABNs to be endorsed. It will also apply to other entities described or named in Subdivision 30-A if they have ABNs.

If the deductible gift recipient is a deductible gift recipient only because it is endorsed under Subdivision 30-BA as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of a fund, authority or institution, the statement must name the fund, authority or institution.

If:

the deductible gift recipient is:

a fund, authority or institution; or

a deductible gift recipient only because it is endorsed under Subdivision 30-BA as a deductible gift recipient for the operation of a fund, authority or institution; and

the fund, authority or institution is covered by item 1, 2 or 4 of the table in section 30-15;

the statement must specify that the fund, authority or institution is covered by that item.

The Australian Business Registrar may remove the statement from the Australian Business Register after the end of the period.

The Australian Business Registrar must take reasonable steps to ensure that a statement appearing in the Australian Business Register under this section is true. For this purpose, the Registrar may:

change the statement; or

remove the statement from the Register if the statement is not true; or

remove the statement from the Register and enter another statement in the Register under this section.

Subdivision 30-DA — Donations to political parties and independent candidates and members

Guide to Subdivision 30-DA

30-241 What this Subdivision is about

Generally, you can deduct certain contributions and gifts to political parties, independent candidates and members.

Contributions and gifts must be at least $2 and there is a limit on the total amount that you can deduct.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

30-242 Deduction for political contributions and gifts

30-243 Amount of the deduction

30-244 When an individual is an independent candidate

30-245 When an individual is an independent member

Operative provisions

30-242 Deduction for political contributions and gifts

You can deduct any of the following for the income year in which they are made:

(a) a contribution or gift to a political party that is registered under Part XI of the Commonwealth Electoral Act 1918 or under corresponding State or Territory legislation;

a contribution or gift to an individual when the individual is an independent candidate for a Commonwealth, State, Northern Territory or Australian Capital Territory election;

a contribution or gift to an individual who is, or was, an independent member of the Commonwealth Parliament, a State Parliament, the Legislative Assembly of the Northern Territory or the Legislative Assembly for the Australian Capital Territory.

The contribution or gift must be of:

money; or

property that you purchased during the 12 months before making the contribution or gift.

The value of the contribution or gift must be at least $2.

You can deduct the contribution or gift only if:

you are an individual; and

(b) you do not make the gift or contribution in the course of carrying on a *business.

You cannot deduct a testamentary contribution or gift under this Subdivision.

A contribution or gift to an individual who is, or was, an independent member must be made:

when the individual is an independent member; or

if the individual ceases to be an independent member because:

a Parliament, a House of a Parliament or a Legislative Assembly is dissolved or has reached its maximum duration; or

the individual comes up for election;

after the individual ceases to be a member but before candidates for the resulting election are declared or otherwise publicly announced by an entity authorised under the relevant electoral legislation.

30-243 Amount of the deduction

If the contribution or gift is money, the amount of the deduction is the amount of money.

If the contribution or gift is property, the amount of the deduction is the lesser of:

the market value of the property on the day that you made the contribution or gift; and

the amount that you paid for the property.

$1,500 limit on deductions

You cannot deduct more than $1,500 under this Subdivision for an income year for contributions and gifts to political parties.

You cannot deduct more than $1,500 under this Subdivision for an income year for contributions and gifts to *independent candidates or *independent members.

30-244 When an individual is an independent candidate

(1) An individual is an independent candidate if:

the individual is a candidate in an election (including an election that is later declared void) for members of the Commonwealth Parliament, a State Parliament, the Legislative Assembly of the Northern Territory or the Legislative Assembly for the Australian Capital Territory; and

(b) the individual’s candidature is not endorsed by a political party that is registered under Part XI of the Commonwealth Electoral Act 1918 or under corresponding State or Territory legislation.

However, an individual does not start being an independent candidate until the candidates for the election are declared or otherwise publicly announced by an entity authorised under the relevant electoral legislation.

An individual stops being an independent candidate when the result of the election is declared or otherwise publicly announced by an entity authorised under the relevant electoral legislation.

If:

the election is taken to have wholly failed under the relevant electoral legislation; and

the result of the election has not been declared or otherwise publicly announced by an entity authorised under the relevant electoral legislation;

the individual stops being an independent candidate in that election when candidates for the replacement election are declared or otherwise publicly announced by an entity authorised under the relevant electoral legislation.

30-245 When an individual is an independent member

(1) An individual is an independent member of the Commonwealth Parliament, a State Parliament, the Legislative Assembly of the Northern Territory or the Legislative Assembly for the Australian Capital Territory if the individual:

is a member of that Parliament or Legislative Assembly; and

(b) the individual is not a member of a political party that is registered under Part XI of the Commonwealth Electoral Act 1918 or under corresponding State or Territory legislation.

An individual who becomes a member as a result of an election (including an election that is later declared void) is taken to start being a member of the Parliament or Legislative Assembly when the individual’s election as a member is declared or otherwise publicly announced by an entity authorised under the relevant electoral legislation.

Subdivision 30-DB — Spreading certain gift and covenant deductions over up to 5 income years

Guide to Subdivision 30-DB

30-246 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision allows you to elect to spread deductions for certain gifts and covenants over up to 5 income years. There are some different requirements for environmental, heritage and cultural property gifts and conservation covenants.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

30-247 Gifts and covenants for which elections can be made

30-248 Making an election

30-249 Effect of election

30-249A Requirements—environmental property gifts

30-249B Requirements—heritage property gifts

30-249D Requirements—conservation covenants

Operative provisions

30-247 Gifts and covenants for which elections can be made

An election under this Subdivision may be made for a gift, made on or after 1 July 2003, that is:

a gift of:

money; or

property valued by the Commissioner at more than $5,000;

made to a fund, authority or institution covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in section 30-15; or

a gift that is covered by item 4, 5 or 6 of the table in section 30-15.

An election under this Subdivision may also be made for entering into a conservation covenant, under Division 31, on or after 1 July 2003.

30-248 Making an election

If you can deduct an amount:

under this Division for a gift covered by subsection 30-247(1); or

under Division 31 for entering into a conservation covenant covered by subsection 30-247(2);

you may make a written election to spread that deduction over the current income year and up to 4 of the immediately following income years.

In the election, you must specify the percentage (if any) of the deduction that you will deduct in each of the income years.

You must make the election before you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which you made the gift or entered into the covenant.

You may vary an election at any time. However, the variation can only change the percentage that you will deduct in respect of income years for which you have not yet lodged an income tax return.

Unless section 30-249A or 30-249B applies, the election and any variation must be in the approved form.

Note: Sections 30-249A and 30-249B provide for the form of elections and variations for gifts covered by those sections.

30-249 Effect of election

In each of the income years you specified in the election, you can deduct the amount corresponding to the percentage you specified for that year.

You cannot deduct the amount that you otherwise would have been able to deduct for the gift in the income year in which you made the gift or entered into the covenant.

30-249A Requirements—environmental property gifts

This section applies if you make an election for a gift of property made to a fund, authority or institution covered by section 30-55.

You must give a copy of the election to the Environment Secretary before you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which you made the gift.

If you vary the election, you must give a copy of the variation to the Environment Secretary before you lodge your income tax return for the first income year to which the variation applies.

The election and any variation must be in a form approved in writing by the Environment Secretary.

30-249B Requirements—heritage property gifts

This section applies if you make an election for a gift of property made to a fund, authority or institution covered by item 6 of the table in section 30-15.

You must give a copy of the election to the Heritage Secretary before you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which you made the gift.

If you vary the election, you must give a copy of the variation to the Heritage Secretary before you lodge your income tax return for the first income year to which the variation applies.

The election and any variation must be in a form approved in writing by the Heritage Secretary.

30-249D Requirements—conservation covenants

This section applies if you make an election for a conservation covenant.

You must give a copy of the election to the Environment Secretary before you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which you entered the covenant.

If you vary the election, you must give a copy of the variation to the Environment Secretary before you lodge your income tax return for the first income year to which the variation applies.

Subdivision 30-G — Index to this Division

Table of sections

30-315 Index

30-320 Effect of this Subdivision

30-315 Index

The table in this section gives you an index to this Division.

It tells you:

 each topic covered by this Division; and

 where in this Division you can find the detail about each topic.

Note: In the last column there are many references in this form: item 2.2.1. These refer to items in the tables in Subdivision 30-B.

30-320 Effect of this Subdivision

This Subdivision is a Guide.

Note: In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150.

Division 31 — Conservation covenants

Guide to Division 31

31-1 What this Division is about

You can deduct an amount if you enter into a conservation covenant over land that you own and you satisfy certain conditions.

The amount you can deduct is the difference between the market value of the land just before and after you enter into the covenant.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

31-5 Deduction for entering into conservation covenant

31-10 Requirements for fund, authority or institution

31-15 Valuations by the Commissioner

Operative provisions

31-5 Deduction for entering into conservation covenant

You can deduct an amount if:

you enter into a conservation covenant over land you own; and

the conditions set out in subsection (2) are met.

These conditions must be satisfied:

the covenant must be perpetual;

you must not receive any money, property or other material benefit for entering into the covenant;

the *market value of the land must decrease as a result of your entering into the covenant;

one or both of these must apply:

the change in the market value of the land as a result of entering into the covenant must be more than $5,000;

you must have entered into a contract to acquire the land not more than 12 months before you entered into the covenant;

the covenant must have been entered into with:

a fund, authority or institution that meets the requirements of section 31-10; or

the Commonwealth, a State, a Territory or a local governing body; or

an authority of the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory.

Note: You must seek a valuation of the change in market value from the Commissioner: see section 31-15.

The amount you can deduct is the difference between the *market value of the land just before you entered the covenant and its decreased market value just after that time, but only to the extent that the decrease is attributable to your entering into the covenant.

Note: You can spread the deduction over a 5 year period: see Subdivision 30-DB.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), a covenant is treated as being perpetual even if a Minister of a State or Territory has a power to rescind it.

(5) A conservation covenant over land is a covenant that:

restricts or prohibits certain activities on the land that could degrade the environmental value of the land; and

is permanent and registered on the title to the land (if registration is possible); and

is approved in writing by, or is entered into under a program approved in writing by, the Environment Minister.

31-10 Requirements for fund, authority or institution

The fund, authority or institution:

must be covered by an item in any of the tables in Subdivision 30-B and must meet any conditions set out in the relevant table item; or

must be an *ancillary fund established under a will or instrument of trust solely for:

the purpose of providing money, property or benefits to a fund, authority or institution mentioned in paragraph (a) and for any purposes set out in the item of the table in Subdivision 30-B that covers the fund, authority or institution; or

the establishment of such a fund, authority or institution.

If the fund, authority or institution is not listed specifically in Subdivision 30-B, it must also:

be in Australia; and

meet the requirements of section 30-17 (about the endorsement of deductible gift recipients).

31-15 Valuations by the Commissioner

You must seek a valuation of the change in the *market value of the land from the Commissioner for the purposes of this Division.

The Commissioner may charge you the amount worked out in accordance with the regulations for making the valuation.

Division 32 — Entertainment expenses

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 32

32-A No deduction for entertainment expenses

32-B Exceptions

32-C Definitions relevant to the exceptions

32-D In-house dining facilities (employer expenses table item 1.2)

32-E Anti-avoidance

32-F Special rules for companies and partnerships

Guide to Division 32

32-1 What this Division is about

You cannot deduct costs of providing entertainment. Nor can you deduct amounts for property that you use for providing entertainment. But there are exceptions.

Subdivision 32-A — No deduction for entertainment expenses

Table of sections

32-5 No deduction for entertainment expenses

32-10 Meaning of entertainment

32-15 No deduction for property used for providing entertainment

32-5 No deduction for entertainment expenses

To the extent that you incur a loss or outgoing in respect of providing entertainment, you cannot deduct it under section 8-1. However, there are exceptions, which are set out in Subdivision 32-B.

Note 1: Under section 8-1 you can deduct a loss or outgoing that you incur for the purpose of producing assessable income.

Note 2: If you have used your property in providing entertainment, you may not be able to deduct an amount for the property: see section 32-15.

Note 3: Section 32-75 deals with arrangements to avoid the operation of this section.

32-10 Meaning of entertainment

(1) Entertainment means:

entertainment by way of food, drink or recreation; or

accommodation or travel to do with providing entertainment by way of food, drink or recreation.

(2) You are taken to provide entertainment even if business discussions or transactions occur.

Note: These are some examples of what is entertainment:

business lunches

social functions.

These are some examples of what is not entertainment:

meals on business travel overnight

theatre attendance by a critic

a restaurant meal of a food writer.

32-15 No deduction for property used for providing entertainment

To the extent that you use property in providing *entertainment, your use of the property is taken not to be for the *purpose of producing assessable income if section 32-5 would stop you deducting a loss or outgoing if you incurred it in the income year in providing the entertainment.

Note: Under some provisions of this Act, in order to deduct an amount for your property, you must have used the property for the purpose of producing assessable income.

Subdivision 32-B — Exceptions

Table of sections

32-20 The main exception—fringe benefits

32-25 The tables set out the other exceptions

32-30 Employer expenses

32-35 Seminar expenses

32-40 Entertainment industry expenses

32-45 Promotion and advertising expenses

32-50 Other expenses

32-20 The main exception—fringe benefits

Section 32-5 does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing to the extent that you incur it in respect of providing entertainment by way of *providing a *fringe benefit.

But this exception does not apply to the extent that the taxable value of the *fringe benefit is reduced under section 63A of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

Note 1: You may be able to deduct losses or outgoings that are fringe benefits under section 51AEA, 51AEB or 51AEC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936. If you do, then you cannot deduct them under section 8-1 (about general deductions) and so this section is not relevant.

Note 2: There are other exceptions for a loss or outgoing you incur in providing a benefit that would be a fringe benefit if it were not an exempt benefit: see items 1.6 and 1.7 of the table in section 32-30.

32-25 The tables set out the other exceptions

Section 32-5 does not stop you deducting a loss or outgoing to the extent that you incur it in respect of providing entertainment as described in column 2 of an item of a table in this Subdivision.

However, if column 3 of that item applies, the exception in column 2 of that item does not.

32-30 Employer expenses

Note 1: In the case of a company, items 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.5 and 1.8 cover directors of the company as if they were employees: see section 32-80.

Note 2: In the case of a company, items 1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 1.5 cover directors, employees and property of another company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group: see section 32-85.

Note 3: Item 1.8 has a special operation for partnerships: see section 32-90.

32-35 Seminar expenses
32-40 Entertainment industry expenses
32-45 Promotion and advertising expenses
32-50 Other expenses

Subdivision 32-C — Definitions relevant to the exceptions

Table of sections

32-55 In-house dining facility (employer expenses table items 1.1 and 1.2)

32-60 Dining facility (employer expenses table item 1.3)

32-65 Seminars (seminar expenses table item 2.1)

32-55 In-house dining facility (employer expenses table items 1.1 and 1.2)

An in-house dining facility is a canteen, dining room or similar facility that:

is on property you occupy; and

is operated mainly for providing food and drink to your employees; and

is not open to the public.

Note 1: In the case of a company, this definition also covers directors of the company as if they were employees: see section 32-80.

Note 2: In the case of a company, this definition also covers directors, employees and property of another company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group: see section 32-85.

32-60 Dining facility (employer expenses table item 1.3)

A dining facility is:

a canteen, dining room or similar facility; or

a cafe, restaurant or similar facility;

that is on property you occupy.

Note: In the case of a company, this definition also covers property of another company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group: see section 32-85.

32-65 Seminars (seminar expenses table item 2.1)

(1) Seminar includes a conference, convention, lecture, meeting (including a meeting for the presentation of awards), speech, “question and answer session”, training session or educational course.

(2) In working out whether a *seminar goes for at least 4 hours the following are taken not to affect the seminar’s continuity, nor to form part of it:

any part of the seminar that occurs during a meal;

any break during the seminar for the purpose of a meal, rest or recreation.

(3) A *seminar is a business meeting if its main purpose is for individuals who are (or will be) associated with the carrying on of a particular *business to give or receive information, or discuss matters, relating to the business.

However, the *seminar is not a business meeting if it:

is organised by (or on behalf of) an employer solely for either or both of these purposes:

training the employer and the employer’s employees (or just those employees) in matters relevant to the employer’s business (or prospective business);

enabling the employer and the employer’s employees (or just those employees) to discuss general policy issues relevant to the internal management of the employer’s business; and

is conducted on property that is occupied by a person (other than the employer) whose business includes organising seminars or making property available for conducting seminars.

Note 1: In the case of a company, subsection (3) covers directors of the company as if they were employees: see section 32-80.

Note 2: In the case of a company, paragraph (3)(b) also covers property of another company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group: see section 32-85.

Note 3: Subsection (3) has a special operation for partnerships: see section 32-90.

Subdivision 32-D — In-house dining facilities (employer expenses table item 1.2)

Table of sections

32-70 $30 is assessable for each meal provided to non-employee in an in-house dining facility

32-70 $30 is assessable for each meal provided to non-employee in an in-house dining facility

Your assessable income includes $30 for a meal you provide in an in-house dining facility in the income year to an individual other than your employee, but only if:

you incur a loss or outgoing in respect of providing the meal; and

because of item 1.2 of the table in section 32-30, section 32-5 does not stop you deducting the loss or outgoing under section 8-1 (which deals with general deductions); and

the loss or outgoing is one that you can deduct under section 8-1 for the income year or some other income year.

(2) However, you can choose not to include in your assessable income $30 for each meal you provide in the *in-house dining facility in the income year to an individual other than your employee.

Note: If you do choose, you cannot rely on item 1.2 of the table in section 32-30 as a basis for deducting a loss or outgoing you incur in respect of providing a meal.

You must choose by the day you lodge your income tax return for the income year, or within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

Subdivision 32-E — Anti-avoidance

Table of sections

32-75 Commissioner may treat you as having incurred entertainment expense

32-75 Commissioner may treat you as having incurred entertainment expense

If:

you incur a loss or outgoing under an arrangement; and

someone provides entertainment under the arrangement to you or someone else; and

section 32-5 would have stopped you deducting the loss or outgoing under section 8-1 (which deals with general deductions) if you had incurred it in respect of providing that entertainment;

this Division applies to you as if you had incurred the loss or outgoing in providing that entertainment, to the extent (if any) that the Commissioner thinks reasonable.

Note: This means that section 32-5 will prevent you from deducting the loss or outgoing under section 8-1 unless an exception applies.

Example: A company pays $1,000 to sponsor a football game. Under the same arrangement, the company is given a viewing box at the game. To the extent the Commissioner thinks reasonable, he or she can treat the company as having incurred the $1,000 in providing entertainment.

Subdivision 32-F — Special rules for companies and partnerships

Table of sections

32-80 Company directors

32-85 Directors, employees and property of wholly-owned group company

32-90 Partnerships

32-80 Company directors

In the case of a company, these provisions cover directors of the company as if they were the company’s employees:

item 1.1 (exception for *in-house dining facilities) of the table in section 32-30;

item 1.2 (exception for *in-house dining facilities) of the table in section 32-30;

item 1.3 (exception for *dining facilities) of the table in section 32-30;

item 1.5 (exception for recreational facilities) of the table in section 32-30;

item 1.8 (exception for providing your employee with an allowance) of the table in section 32-30;

section 32-55 (which defines in-house dining facility);

subsection 32-65(3) (which defines business meeting).

32-85 Directors, employees and property of wholly-owned group company

Employees and directors of group company

In the case of a company, these provisions cover directors and employees of another company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group as if they were the company’s own directors and employees:

item 1.1 (exception for *in-house dining facilities) of the table in section 32-30;

item 1.2 (exception for *in-house dining facilities) of the table in section 32-30;

item 1.3 (exception for *dining facilities) of the table in section 32-30;

item 1.5 (exception for recreational facilities) of the table in section 32-30;

section 32-55 (which defines in-house dining facility);

subsection 32-60(1) (which defines dining facility);

paragraph 32-65(3)(b).

Property occupied by group company

Those provisions also cover property occupied by that other company as if the company occupied that property.

32-90 Partnerships

In the case of a partnership:

item 1.8 (exception for providing employee with an allowance) of the table in section 32-30; and

subsection 32-65(3) (which defines business meeting);

apply to a partner in the same way as they apply to an employee of the partnership, but only for the purposes of calculating, in accordance with section 90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the partnership’s net income or partnership loss.

Division 34 — Non-compulsory uniforms

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 34

34-A Application of Division 34

34-B Deduction for your non-compulsory uniform

34-C Registering the design of a non-compulsory uniform

34-D Appeals from Industry Secretary’s decision

34-E The Register of Approved Occupational Clothing

34-F Approved occupational clothing guidelines

34-G The Industry Secretary

Guide to Division 34

34-1 What this Division is about

This Division is about deductions for the costs of non-compulsory uniforms.

Table of sections

34-3 What you need to read

34-3 What you need to read

Employees

If you incur expenditure for your non-compulsory uniform, you need to read Subdivision 34-B (which is about deductions for your non-compulsory uniform), starting at section 34-10.

Employers

If you have people working for you who want to deduct expenditure of that kind, you need to read:

Subdivision 34-C (which is about registering the design of a non-compulsory uniform), starting at section 34-25; and

Subdivision 34-D (which is about appeals from Industry Secretary’s decision), starting at section 34-40.

Subdivision 34-A — Application of Division 34

Table of sections

34-5 This Division applies to employees and others

34-7 This Division applies to employers and others

34-5 This Division applies to employees and others

(1) This Division applies not only to an individual who is an employee. It also applies to an individual who is not an employee, but who receives, or is entitled to receive, *withholding payments covered by subsection (3).

(2) If an individual is not an employee, but is covered by subsection (1), this Division applies to the individual as if:

he or she were an employee; and

the entity, who pays (or is liable to pay) *withholding payments covered by subsection (3) that result in the individual being in receipt of, or entitled to receive, such payments, were the individual’s employer; and

any other individual who receives (or is entitled to receive) *withholding payments covered by subsection (3):

that result in that other individual being in receipt of, or entitled to receive, such payments; and

that the entity pays (or is liable to pay) to that other individual;

were an employee of the entity.

(3) This subsection covers a *withholding payment covered by any of the provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 listed in the table.

34-7 This Division applies to employers and others

If an entity is not an employer, but pays (or is liable to pay) *withholding payments covered by subsection 34-5(3), this Division applies to the entity as if:

it were an employer; and

an individual to whom the entity pays (or is liable to pay) such withholding payments were the entity’s employee.

Subdivision 34-B — Deduction for your non-compulsory uniform

Table of sections

34-10 What you can deduct

34-15 What is a non-compulsory uniform?

34-20 What are occupation specific clothing and protective clothing?

34-10 What you can deduct

If you are an employee, you can deduct expenditure you incur in respect of your *non-compulsory uniform if:

you can deduct the expenditure under another provision of this Act; and

the *design of the uniform is registered under this Division when you incur the expenditure.

Note 1: This Division also applies to individuals who are not employees: see Subdivision 34-A.

Note 2: Employers apply to register designs of uniforms: see Subdivision 34-C.

(2) You cannot deduct the expenditure under this Act if the *design is not registered at the time you incur the expenditure.

However, this Division does not stop you deducting expenditure you incur in respect of your occupation specific clothing or protective clothing.

34-15 What is a non-compulsory uniform?

What is a uniform?

(1) A uniform is one or more items of clothing (including accessories) which, when considered as a set, distinctively identify you as a person associated (directly or indirectly) with:

your employer; or

a group consisting of your employer and one or more of your employer’s *associates.

When is a uniform non-compulsory?

(2) Your uniform is non-compulsory unless your employer consistently enforces a policy that requires you and the other employees (except temporary or relief employees) who do the same type of work as you:

to wear the uniform when working for your employer; and

(b) not to substitute an item of clothing not included in the uniform for an item of clothing included in the uniform when working for your employer;

except in special circumstances.

34-20 What are occupation specific clothing and protective clothing?

(1) Occupation specific clothing is clothing that distinctively identifies you as belonging to a particular profession, trade, vocation, occupation or calling. To determine this, disregard any feature of the clothing that distinctively identifies you as a person associated (directly or indirectly) with:

your employer; or

a group consisting of your employer and one or more of your employer’s *associates.

Example: Occupation specific clothing includes a nurse’s uniform, a chef’s checked pants and a religious cleric’s ceremonial robes.

(2) Protective clothing is clothing of a kind that you mainly use to protect yourself, or someone else, from risk of:

death; or

disease (including the contraction, aggravation, acceleration or recurrence of a disease); or

injury (including the aggravation, acceleration or recurrence of an injury); or

damage to clothing; or

damage to an artificial limb or other artificial substitute, or to a medical, surgical or other similar aid or appliance.

Example: Protective clothing includes overalls, aprons, goggles, hard hats and safety boots, when worn to protect the wearer.

Meaning of disease

(3) Disease includes any mental or physical ailment, disorder, defect or morbid condition, whether of sudden onset or gradual development and whether of genetic or other origin.

Subdivision 34-C — Registering the design of a non-compulsory uniform

Table of sections

34-25 Application to register the design

34-30 Industry Secretary’s decision on application

34-33 Written notice of decision

34-35 When uniform becomes registered

34-25 Application to register the design

The employer of an employee who has, or will have, a *non-compulsory uniform can apply to the Industry Secretary for the *design of the uniform to be registered.

Note: This Division also applies to entities that are not employers: see Subdivision 34-A.

Meaning of design of a uniform

(2) The design of a *uniform includes features such as its colouring, construction, durability, ornamentation, pattern and shape.

Form of application

The application must be:

in writing; and

in a form approved in writing by the Industry Secretary; and

accompanied by such information as the Industry Secretary requires.

34-30 Industry Secretary’s decision on application

Industry Secretary must decide to grant or refuse application

After considering the application, the Industry Secretary must decide to either grant or refuse the application.

Criteria for grant of application

The Industry Secretary must not decide to grant an application unless he or she is satisfied that the design meets the criteria set out in the approved occupational clothing guidelines.

Note: The approved occupational clothing guidelines are created under section 34-55.

When Industry Secretary taken to have refused application

(3) The *Industry Secretary is taken to have refused an application if he or she does not make a decision by the later of the following times (the deadline):

(a) the end of 90 days (the 90-day period) after the day the Industry Secretary receives the application;

if the Industry Secretary, by written notice given to the applicant within the 90-day period, requests the applicant to give further information about the application—the end of 90 days after the Industry Secretary receives the further information.

34-33 Written notice of decision

If the Industry Secretary makes a decision to grant or refuse an application under subsection 34-30(1) before the *deadline, the Industry Secretary must give the applicant written notice of the decision.

Reasons for refusal

If the notice is a notice of a decision to refuse the application, it must also set out the reasons for the refusal.

Statements to accompany notice of decision

The notice of the decision is to include the statements set out in subsections (4) and (5).

(4) There must be a statement to the effect that, subject to the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024, an application may be made to the *ART, by (or on behalf of) any entity whose interests are affected by the decision, for review of the decision.

There must also be a statement to the effect that a request may be made under section 268 of that Act by (or on behalf of) such an entity for a statement of reasons.

Failure does not affect validity

If the Industry Secretary fails to comply with subsection (4) or (5), that failure does not affect the validity of his or her decision.

34-35 When uniform becomes registered

If the Industry Secretary decides to grant the application, the *design of the uniform becomes registered on:

the day the decision is made; or

if the applicant requests—such earlier day as the Industry Secretary specifies.

Note: When the design becomes registered, an entry for the design is made on the Register of Approved Occupational Clothing. Subdivision 34-E is about the Register.

Subdivision 34-D — Appeals from Industry Secretary’s decision

Table of sections

34-40 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal

34-40 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal

Applications may be made to the ART for review of a decision made by the Industry Secretary under subsection 34-30(1).

Subdivision 34-E — The Register of Approved Occupational Clothing

Table of sections

34-45 Keeping of the Register

34-50 Changes to the Register

34-45 Keeping of the Register

The Industry Secretary must keep the Register of Approved Occupational Clothing, listing the designs that are required to be entered on the Register because of this Division.

Register to be open for inspection

The Industry Secretary must arrange for the Register to be available for inspection at any reasonable time by any person on request.

34-50 Changes to the Register

Removal of registration

The Industry Secretary must remove an entry for a *design from the Register of Approved Occupational Clothing if requested to do so by the employer who applied for the design to be registered.

Correcting errors and mistakes

The Industry Secretary may correct a clerical error or an obvious mistake in an entry for a design in the Register and, if the Industry Secretary does so, the correction takes effect on the day on which the design to which the entry relates was registered.

Subdivision 34-F — Approved occupational clothing guidelines

Table of sections

34-55 Approved occupational clothing guidelines

34-55 Approved occupational clothing guidelines

(1) The Minister must, by legislative instrument, formulate written guidelines (the approved occupational clothing guidelines) setting out criteria that *designs of uniforms must meet if the designs are to be registered.

Matters to be taken into account in making guidelines

In making approved occupational clothing guidelines, the matters to which the Minister is to have regard include:

how distinctively a uniform’s *design identifies the wearer as a person associated (directly or indirectly) with:

the applicant for registering the uniform’s design; or

a group consisting of the applicant and one or more of the applicant’s *associates; and

the nature of the business or activities the applicant carries on.

Subdivision 34-G — The Industry Secretary

Table of sections

34-60 Industry Secretary to give Commissioner information about entries

34-65 Delegation of powers by Industry Secretary

34-60 Industry Secretary to give Commissioner information about entries

The Industry Secretary must give the Commissioner information about entries of *designs on the Register of Approved Occupational Clothing if the Commissioner requests him or her to do so.

34-65 Delegation of powers by Industry Secretary

The Industry Secretary may, by writing, delegate any or all of his or her functions and powers under this Division to a person in the Industry Department:

who holds or performs the duties of a Senior Executive Service office; or

(b) whose classification level appears in Group 7 or 8 of Schedule 1 to the Classification Rules under the Public Service Act 1999; or

who is acting in a position usually occupied by a person with a classification level of the kind mentioned in paragraph (b).

Division 35 — Deferral of losses from non-commercial business activities

Guide to Division 35

35-1 What this Division is about

This Division prevents losses of individuals from non-commercial business activities being offset against other assessable income in the year the loss is incurred. The loss is deferred.

It sets out an income requirement and a series of tests to determine whether a business activity is treated as being non-commercial.

The deferred losses may be offset in later years against profits from the activity. They may also be offset against other income if the income requirement and one of the other tests are satisfied, or if the Commissioner exercises a discretion.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

35-5 Object

35-10 Deferral of deductions from non-commercial business activities

35-15 Modification if you have exempt income

35-20 Modification if you become bankrupt

35-25 Application of Division to certain partnerships

35-30 Assessable income test

35-35 Profits test

35-40 Real property test

35-45 Other assets test

35-50 Apportionment

35-55 Commissioner’s discretion

Operative provisions

35-5 Object

The object of this Division is to improve the integrity of the taxation system by:

preventing losses from non-commercial activities that are carried on as *businesses by individuals (alone or in partnership) being offset against other assessable income; and

preventing pre-business capital expenditure and post-business capital expenditure by individuals (alone or in partnership) in relation to non-commercial activities being deductible under section 40-880 (business related costs);

unless certain exceptions apply.

This Division is not intended to apply to activities that do not constitute carrying on a business (for example, the receipt of income from passive investments).

35-10 Deferral of deductions from non-commercial business activities

The rule in subsection (2) applies for an income year to each business activity you carried on in that year if you are an individual, either alone or in partnership (whether or not some other entity is a member of the partnership), unless:

you satisfy subsection (2E) for that year, and one of the tests set out in any of the following provisions is satisfied for the business activity for that year:

section 35-30 (assessable income test);

section 35-35 (profits test);

section 35-40 (real property test);

section 35-45 (other assets test); or

the Commissioner has exercised the discretion set out in section 35-55 for the business activity for that year; or

the exception in subsection (4) applies for that year.

Note: This section covers individuals carrying on a business activity as partners, but not individuals merely in receipt of income jointly. Compare the definition of partnership in subsection 995-1(1).

Rules

If the amounts attributable to the business activity for that income year that you could otherwise deduct under this Act for that year exceed your assessable income (if any) from the business activity for that year, or your share of it, this Act applies to you as if the excess:

were not incurred in that income year; and

were an amount attributable to the activity that you can deduct from assessable income from the activity for the next income year in which the activity is carried on.

Note 1: There are modifications of this rule if you have exempt income (see section 35-15) or you become bankrupt (see section 35-20).

Note 2: This rule does not apply if your excess is solely due to deductions under Division 41 (see section 35-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Example: Jennifer has a salaried job, and she also carries on a business activity consisting of selling lingerie.

Jennifer starts that activity on 1 July 2002, and for the 2002-03 income year, the activity produces assessable income of $8,000 and deductions of $10,000. The activity does not pass any of the tests and the discretion is not exercised so the $2,000 excess is carried over to the next income year in which the activity is carried on.

For the 2003-04 income year, the activity produces assessable income of $9,000 and deductions of $10,000 (excluding the $2,000 excess from 2002-03). Again, no tests passed and no exercise of discretion.

$3,000 is carried over to the next income year (comprising the $1,000 excess for the current year, plus the previous year’s $2,000 excess) when the activity is carried on.

You cannot deduct an amount under section 40-880 (business related costs) for expenditure in relation to a business activity you used to carry on if you are an individual, either alone or in partnership (whether or not some other entity is a member of the partnership) unless:

you satisfied subsection (2E), and one of the tests set out in any of the following provisions was satisfied for the business activity:

section 35-30 (assessable income test);

section 35-35 (profits test);

section 35-40 (real property test);

section 35-45 (other assets test); or

the Commissioner has exercised the discretion set out in section 35-55 for the business activity; or

the exception in subsection (4) applied;

for the income year in which the business activity ceased to be carried on or an earlier income year.

If you are an individual, either alone or in partnership (whether or not some other entity is a member of the partnership), you cannot deduct an amount under section 40-880 (business related costs) for expenditure in relation to a business activity:

you propose to carry on; or

another entity proposes to carry on if the other entity is not an individual, either alone or in partnership;

for an income year before the one in which the business activity starts to be carried on.

This section applies to an amount that you could have deducted, apart from paragraph (2B)(a), as if it were an amount attributable to the business activity that you can deduct from assessable income from the activity for the income year in which the business activity starts to be carried on.

You can deduct expenditure covered by paragraph (2B)(b) for the income year in which the business activity starts to be carried on.

Income requirement

You satisfy this subsection for an income year if the sum of the following is less than $250,000:

your taxable income for that year, disregarding your *assessable FHSS released amount for that year;

your reportable fringe benefits total for that year;

your *reportable superannuation contributions for that year;

your *total net investment losses for that year.

For the purposes of paragraph (a), when working out your taxable income, disregard any excess mentioned in subsection (2) for any business activity for that year that you could otherwise deduct under this Act for that year.

Grouping business activities

In applying this Division, you may group together business activities of a similar kind.

Exceptions

The rule in subsection (2), (2A) or (2B) does not apply to a business activity for an income year if:

the activity is a *primary production business, or a professional arts business; and

your assessable income for that year (except any net capital gain) from other sources that do not relate to that activity is less than $40,000.

(5) A professional arts business is a *business you carry on as:

the author of a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work; or

Note: The expression “author” is a technical term from copyright law. In general, the “author” of a musical work is its composer and the “author” of an artistic work is the artist, sculptor or photographer who created it.

a performing artist; or

a production associate.

35-15 Modification if you have exempt income

The rule in subsection 35-10(2) may be modified for an income year if you *derived exempt income in that year.

Any amount to which paragraph 35-10(2)(b) would otherwise apply for an income year for you is reduced by your net exempt income for that year (after *utilising the net exempt income under section 36-10 or 36-15 (about tax losses)). This reduction is made before you apply the paragraph 35-10(2)(b) amount against assessable income from the business activity.

35-20 Modification if you become bankrupt

(1) The rule in subsection 35-10(2) or (2A) is modified as set out in subsection (3) for an income year if in that year (the current year) you become bankrupt or are released from a debt by the operation of an Act relating to bankruptcy.

The rule is also modified as set out in subsection (3) if:

you became bankrupt before the current year; and

(b) the bankruptcy is annulled in the current year under section 74 of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 because your creditors have accepted a proposal for a composition or scheme of arrangement; and

under the composition or scheme of arrangement, you have been, will be or may be released from some or all of the debts from which you would have been released if you had instead been discharged from the bankruptcy.

This Act applies to you as if any amount that:

paragraph 35-10(2)(b) had applied to for an income year before the current year for you; and

you have not yet deducted;

were not an amount attributable to the business activity that you can deduct for the current year or a later income year.

35-25 Application of Division to certain partnerships

For the purpose of applying the tests in sections 35-30, 35-40 and 35-45 where you carry on a business activity in an income year as a partner, ignore:

any part of the assessable income from the business activity for the year that is attributable to the interest of a partner that is not an individual in the partnership net income or partnership loss for the year; and

any part of the assessable income from the business activity for the year that is *derived from the activity by another partner otherwise than as a member of the partnership; and

any part of the *reduced cost bases or other values of assets of the partnership used in carrying on the activity in that year that is attributable to the interest of a partner that is not an individual in those assets; and

any part of the reduced cost bases or other values of assets owned or leased by another partner that are not partnership assets and used in carrying on the activity in that year.

35-30 Assessable income test

The rules in section 35-10 do not apply to a business activity for an income year if:

the amount of assessable income from the business activity for the year; or

you started to carry on the business activity, or stopped carrying it on, during the year—a reasonable estimate of what would have been the amount of that assessable income if you had carried on that activity throughout the year;

is at least $20,000.

35-35 Profits test

(1) The rules in section 35-10 do not apply to a *business activity (except an activity carried on by one or more individuals as partners, whether or not some other entity is a member of the partnership) for an income year (the current year) if, for each of at least 3 of the past 5 income years (including the current year) the sum of the deductions attributable to that activity for that year (apart from the operation of subsections 35-10(2) and (2C)) is less than the assessable income from the activity for that year.

For a business activity you carried on with one or more others as partners, the rules in section 35-10 do not apply to you for the current year if, for each of at least 3 of the past 5 income years (including the current year) the sum of your deductions (including your share of the partnership deductions) attributable to that activity for that year (apart from the operation of subsections 35-10(2) and (2C)) is less than your assessable income (including your share of the partnership’s assessable income) from the activity for that year.

35-40 Real property test

The rules in section 35-10 do not apply to a business activity for an income year if the total *reduced cost bases of real property or interests in real property used on a continuing basis in carrying on the activity in that year is at least $500,000.

You may use the *market value of the real property or interest if that value is more than its *reduced cost base.

The *reduced cost base or *market value is worked out:

as at the end of the income year; or

if you stopped carrying on the business activity during the year:

as at the time you stopped; or

if you disposed of the asset before that time in the course of stopping carrying on the activity—as at the time you disposed of it.

However, these assets are not counted for this test:

a dwelling, and any adjacent land used in association with the dwelling, that is used mainly for private purposes;

fixtures owned by you as a tenant.

35-45 Other assets test

The rules in section 35-10 do not apply to a business activity for an income year if the total values of assets that are counted for this test (see subsections (2) and (4)) and that are used on a continuing basis in carrying on the activity in that year is at least $100,000.

The assets counted for this test, and their values for this test, are set out in this table:

The value of such an asset is worked out:

as at the end of the income year; or

if you stopped carrying on the business activity during the year:

as at the time you stopped; or

if you disposed of the asset before that time in the course of stopping carrying on the activity—as at the time you disposed of it.

However, these assets are not counted for this test:

assets that are real property or interests in real property that are taken into account for that year under section 35-40;

*cars, motor cycles and similar vehicles.

35-50 Apportionment

If an asset that is being taken into account under section 35-40 or 35-45 is used during an income year partly in carrying on the relevant business activity and partly for other purposes, only that part of its *reduced cost base, *market value or other value that is attributable to its use in carrying on the business activity in that year is taken into account for that section.

35-55 Commissioner’s discretion

(1) The Commissioner may, on application, decide that the rule in subsection 35-10(2) does not apply to a *business activity for one or more income years (the excluded years) if the Commissioner is satisfied that it would be unreasonable to apply that rule because:

the business activity was or will be affected in the excluded years by special circumstances outside the control of the operators of the business activity, including drought, flood, bushfire or some other natural disaster; or

Note: This paragraph is intended to provide for a case where a business activity would have satisfied one of the tests if it were not for the special circumstances.

for an applicant who carries on the business activity who satisfies subsection 35-10(2E) (income requirement) for the most recent income year ending before the application is made—the business activity has started to be carried on and, for the excluded years:

because of its nature, it has not satisfied, or will not satisfy, one of the tests set out in section 35-30, 35-35, 35-40 or 35-45; and

there is an objective expectation, based on evidence from independent sources (where available) that, within a period that is commercially viable for the industry concerned, the activity will either meet one of those tests or will produce assessable income for an income year greater than the deductions attributable to it for that year (apart from the operation of subsections 35-10(2) and (2C)); or

for an applicant who carries on the business activity who does not satisfy subsection 35-10(2E) (income requirement) for the most recent income year ending before the application is made—the business activity has started to be carried on and, for the excluded years:

because of its nature, it has not produced, or will not produce, assessable income greater than the deductions attributable to it; and

there is an objective expectation, based on evidence from independent sources (where available) that, within a period that is commercially viable for the industry concerned, the activity will produce assessable income for an income year greater than the deductions attributable to it for that year (apart from the operation of subsections 35-10(2) and (2C)).

Note: Paragraphs (b) and (c) are intended to cover a business activity that has a lead time between the commencement of the activity and the production of any assessable income. For example, an activity involving the planting of hardwood trees for harvest, where many years would pass before the activity could reasonably be expected to produce income.

The Commissioner may, on application, decide that the rule in subsection 35-10(2B) does not apply to a business activity for an income year if the Commissioner is satisfied that it would be unreasonable to apply that rule because special circumstances of the kind referred to in paragraph (1)(a) of this section prevented the activity from starting.

Note: This subsection is intended to provide for a case where a business activity would have begun to be carried on and satisfied one of the tests if it were not for the special circumstances.

An application for a decision by the Commissioner under this section must be made in the approved form.

Division 36 — Tax losses of earlier income years

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 36

36-A Deductions for tax losses of earlier income years

36-B Effect of you becoming bankrupt

36-C Excess franking offsets

Guide to Division 36

36-1 What this Division is about

If you have more deductions for an income year than you have income, the difference is a tax loss.

Note: You may be able to utilise the tax loss in that or a later income year.

Subdivision 36-A — Deductions for tax losses of earlier income years

Table of sections

36-10 How to calculate a tax loss for an income year

36-15 How to deduct tax losses of entities other than corporate tax entities

36-17 How to deduct tax losses of corporate tax entities

36-20 Net exempt income

36-25 Special rules about tax losses

36-10 How to calculate a tax loss for an income year

Add up the amounts you can deduct for an income year (except *tax losses for earlier income years).

Subtract your total assessable income.

(3) If you *derived *exempt income, also subtract your *net exempt income (worked out under section 36-20).

(4) Any amount remaining is your tax loss for the income year, which is called a loss year.

Note 1: Some deductions are limited so that they cannot contribute to a tax loss. See section 26-55 (Limit on certain deductions).

Note 2: The meanings of tax loss and loss year are modified by section 36-55 for a corporate tax entity that has an amount of excess franking offsets.

For subsection (3), if you have exempt income under section 51-100 (about shipping), disregard 90% of so much of your net exempt income as directly relates to that exempt income.

36-15 How to deduct tax losses of entities other than corporate tax entities

Your *tax loss for a loss year is deducted in a later income year as follows if you are not a corporate tax entity at any time during the later income year.

Note 1: See section 36-17 for the deduction of a tax loss of an entity that is a corporate tax entity at any time during the later income year.

Note 2: A tax loss can be deducted only to the extent that it has not already been utilised: see subsection 960-20(1).

If you have no net exempt income

If your total assessable income for the later income year exceeds your total deductions (other than *tax losses), you deduct the tax loss from that excess.

If you have net exempt income

If you have net exempt income for the later income year and your total assessable income (if any) for the later income year exceeds your total deductions (except *tax losses), you deduct the tax loss:

first, from your net exempt income; and

secondly, from the part of your total assessable income that exceeds those deductions.

However, if you have net exempt income for the later income year and those deductions exceed your total assessable income, then:

subtract that excess from your net exempt income; and

deduct the tax loss from any net exempt income that remains.

To work out your net exempt income: see section 36-20.

General

If you have 2 or more *tax losses, you deduct them in the order in which you incurred them.

36-17 How to deduct tax losses of corporate tax entities

A *tax loss of an entity for a loss year is deducted in a later income year as follows if the entity is a corporate tax entity at any time during the later income year.

Note 1: A tax loss can be deducted under this section only to the extent that it has not already been utilised: see subsection 960-20(1).

Note 2: A corporate tax entity may also, in the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year, be able to carry a loss back to the 2018-19, 2019-20, 2020-21 or 2021-2022 income year: see Division 160.

If the entity has no net exempt income

If the entity’s total assessable income for the later income year exceeds the entity’s total deductions (except *tax losses), the entity is to deduct from that excess so much of the tax loss as the entity chooses. The entity may choose a nil amount.

If the entity has net exempt income

If the entity has net exempt income for the later income year and the entity’s total assessable income (if any) for that year exceeds the entity’s total deductions (except *tax losses), the entity is to:

first, deduct the tax loss from the net exempt income; and

secondly, deduct from the part of the total assessable income that exceeds those deductions so much of the undeducted amount of the tax loss (if any) as the entity chooses.

The entity may choose a nil amount under paragraph (b).

Note: To work out the corporate tax entity’s net exempt income: see section 36-20.

However, if the entity has net exempt income for the later income year and those deductions exceed the entity’s total assessable income, the entity is to:

subtract that excess from the net exempt income; and

deduct the *tax loss from any net exempt income that remains.

Note: This means there is no choice available under this subsection.

For subsection (3) or (4), if the entity has exempt income under section 51-100 (about shipping) for the later income year, disregard 90% of so much of the entity’s net exempt income for the later income year as directly relates to that exempt income.

Limit to how much the entity can choose

The choice that the entity has under subsection (2) or (3) for the later income year is subject to both of the following:

the entity must choose a nil amount if, disregarding the *tax loss and other tax losses of the entity, the entity would have an amount of excess franking offsets for that year;

(b) if, disregarding the tax loss and other tax losses of the entity, the entity would not have an amount of excess franking offsets for that year—the entity must not choose an amount that would result in the entity having an amount of excess franking offsets for that year.

Example: For the 2017-18 income year, Company A (which is not a base rate entity) has:

a tax loss of $150 from a previous income year; and

assessable income of $200 (franked distribution of $70, franking credit of $30 and $100 of income from other sources); and

no deductions; and

no net exempt income.

The tax offset of $30 from the franking credit is not stated in Division 67 to be subject to the refundable tax offset rules.

Company A would not have an amount of excess franking offsets for that year if the tax loss were disregarded (see section 36-55). This is because the tax offset of $30 is less than $60, the amount of income tax that Company A would have to pay if it did not have the tax offset and the tax loss. Paragraph (a) therefore does not apply.

If Company A chooses to deduct the full amount of the tax loss, it would have an amount of excess franking offsets of $15:

Company A therefore cannot make this choice because of paragraph (b).

However, if Company A chooses to deduct $100 of the tax loss, it would not have an amount of excess franking offsets:

Company A therefore can choose to deduct $100 of the tax loss.

The entity must state its choice under subsection (2) or (3) in its income tax return for the later income year.

General

If the entity has 2 or more *tax losses, the entity is to deduct them in the order in which the entity incurred them.

Recalculation of amounts resulting in a choice or a change of a choice

Subsection (11) or (12) applies if at least one of the following amounts is recalculated after an entity has lodged its income tax return for an income year:

the amount of a *tax loss that the entity can *utilise in that year;

the amount of the difference between the entity’s total assessable income for that year and the entity’s total deductions (other than *tax losses) for that year;

the amount of the entity’s net exempt income for that year;

whether or not the amount is recalculated in an amendment of the entity’s assessment for that year, and whether or not the amount was a nil amount before the recalculation (or has become a nil amount after the recalculation).

If:

before the recalculation, a choice under subsection (2) or (3) for the income year was not available to the entity; but

as a result of the recalculation, the choice has (apart from subsection (6)) become available to the entity;

the entity can make that choice by written notice given to the Commissioner.

If:

the entity made a choice under subsection (2) or (3) for the income year; but

as a result of the recalculation, the entity wishes to change that choice;

the entity can do so by written notice given to the Commissioner.

(13) Subsections (10) to (12) have effect subject to section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about amendment of assessments).

36-20 Net exempt income

(1) If you are an Australian resident, your net exempt income is the amount by which your total *exempt income from all sources exceeds the total of:

the losses and outgoings (except capital losses and outgoings) you incurred in deriving that exempt income; and

any taxes payable outside Australia on that exempt income.

(2) If you are a foreign resident, your net exempt income is the amount (if any) by which the total of:

your exempt income *derived from sources in Australia; and

(b) your exempt income to which section 26AG (Certain film proceeds included in assessable income) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies;

exceeds the total of:

the losses and outgoings (except capital losses and outgoings) you incurred in deriving exempt income covered by paragraph (a) or (b); and

any taxes payable outside Australia on income covered by paragraph (b).

36-25 Special rules about tax losses

Tax losses of individuals

Tax losses of companies

Tax losses of corporate tax entities

Tax losses of entities generally

Tax losses of pooled development funds (PDFs)

Tax losses of VCLPs, ESVCLPs, AFOFs and VCMPs

Tax losses of entities that become foreign hybrids

Tax losses of trusts

Tax losses of greenfields minerals explorers

Subdivision 36-B — Effect of you becoming bankrupt

Guide to Subdivision 36-B

36-30 What this Subdivision is about

After you become bankrupt, you cannot deduct a tax loss that you incurred beforehand. However, you may be able to deduct repayments of debts you incurred in the loss year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

36-35 No deduction for tax loss incurred before bankruptcy

36-40 Deduction for amounts paid for debts incurred before bankruptcy

36-45 Limit on deductions for amounts paid

Operative provisions

36-35 No deduction for tax loss incurred before bankruptcy

If:

you became bankrupt; or

you were released from a debt by the operation of an Act relating to bankruptcy;

before the income year, you cannot deduct a *tax loss that you incurred before the day on which you either became bankrupt or were released.

If:

you became bankrupt before the income year; and

(b) the bankruptcy is later annulled under section 74 of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 because your creditors have accepted your proposal for a composition or scheme of arrangement; and

under the composition or scheme of arrangement, you have been, will be or may be released from some or all of the debts from which you would have been released if you had instead been discharged from the bankruptcy;

you cannot deduct a *tax loss that you incurred before the day on which you became bankrupt.

36-40 Deduction for amounts paid for debts incurred before bankruptcy

Tax losses generally

If:

you pay an amount in the income year for a debt that you incurred in an earlier income year; and

you have a *tax loss covered by section 36-35 for that earlier income year;

you can deduct the amount paid, but only to the extent that it does not exceed so much of the debt as the Commissioner is satisfied was taken into account in calculating the amount of the tax loss.

Film losses

If:

you pay an amount in the income year for a debt that you incurred in an earlier income year; and

you incurred the debt in the course of deriving or gaining *assessable film income or *exempt film income; and

you also incurred a film loss covered by section 36-35 in that earlier income year;

you can deduct the amount paid, but only to the extent that it does not exceed so much of the debt as the Commissioner is satisfied was taken into account in calculating the amount of the film loss.

(3) A film loss is the *film component (if any) of a *tax loss.

(4) Your *tax loss for an income year has a film component if your *film deductions for the year exceed the sum of:

your *assessable film income for the year; and

your *net exempt film income for the year.

The amount of the film component is the excess or the tax loss, whichever is lesser.

(5) However, if your *tax loss worked out under a provision listed in the table, the film component is what that tax loss would have been if:

your film deductions for the loss year had been your only deductions; and

your *assessable film income for the loss year had been your only assessable income; and

your *net exempt film income for the loss year had been your only net exempt income.

However, the film component cannot exceed the actual tax loss.

36-45 Limit on deductions for amounts paid

Tax losses generally

The total of your deductions under subsection 36-40(1) for amounts paid in the income year for debts incurred in the loss year cannot exceed the amount of the *tax loss reduced by the sum of:

your deductions under that subsection for amounts paid in earlier income years for debts incurred in the loss year; and

any amounts of the tax loss *utilised in earlier income years; and

any amounts of the tax loss that, apart from section 36-35, would have been deductible from your net exempt income for the income year or earlier income years.

Film losses

The total of your deductions under subsection 36-40(2) for amounts paid in the income year for debts incurred in the loss year cannot exceed the amount of the film loss reduced by the sum of:

your deductions under that subsection for amounts paid in earlier income years for debts incurred in the loss year; and

any amounts of the film loss deducted in earlier income years; and

any amounts of the film loss that, apart from section 36-35, would have been deductible from your *net exempt film income for the income year or earlier income years.

Subdivision 36-C — Excess franking offsets

Guide to Subdivision 36-C

36-50 What this Subdivision is about

Amounts of tax offsets to which a corporate tax entity is entitled under Division 207 and Subdivision 210-H may in some circumstances be converted into an amount of a tax loss for the entity.

Table of sections

Operative provision

36-55 Converting excess franking offsets into tax loss

Operative provision

36-55 Converting excess franking offsets into tax loss

Excess franking offsets

(1) An entity that is a *corporate tax entity at any time during an income year has an amount of excess franking offsets for that year if:

the total amount of *tax offsets to which the entity is entitled for that year under Division 207 and Subdivision 210-H (except those that are subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-25);

exceeds:

the amount of income tax that the entity would have to pay on its taxable income for that year if:

it did not have those tax offsets; and

it did not have any tax offsets that are subject to the tax offset carry forward rules or the refundable tax offset rules; and

it did not have any tax offset under section 205-70;

but had all its other tax offsets.

The excess is the amount of excess franking offsets.

Note: Division 65 sets out the tax offset carry forward rules. Division 67 sets out which tax offsets are subject to the refundable tax offset rules.

Example: For the 2017-18 income year, Company E (which is not a base rate entity) has:

assessable income of $200 (franked distribution of $140 and franking credit of $60); and

$100 of deductions that are allowable.

The tax offset of $60 from the franking credit is not stated in Division 67 to be subject to the refundable tax offset rules.

Disregarding the tax offset of $60 from the franking credit, the amount of income tax that Company E would have to pay is $30:

This amount is $30 less than the tax offset of $60. Company E therefore has an amount of excess franking offsets of $30 for that year.

How to work out the amount of the tax loss

For the purposes of this Act, if:

an entity has an amount of excess franking offsets for an income year; and

the result of applying the following method statement is a positive amount;

then:

the entity is taken to have a *tax loss for that year equal to that positive amount (instead of an amount of tax loss worked out under section 36-10, 165-70, 175-35 or 701-30); and

that year is taken to be a loss year for the entity if the entity would not otherwise have a tax loss for that year.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the amount (if any) that would have been the entity’s *tax loss for that year under section 36-10, 165-70, 175-35 or 701-30 if the entity’s net exempt income for that year (if any) were disregarded.

Step 2. Divide the amount of excess franking offsets by the entity’s *corporate tax rate for imputation purposes for that year.

Step 3. Add the results of steps 1 and 2.

Step 4. Reduce the result of step 3 by the entity’s net exempt income for that year (if any).

The result of this step is taken to be the entity’s *tax loss for that year. However, if the result of this step is nil or a negative amount, the company does not have any tax loss for that year.

Applying the method statement, the amount of excess franking offsets of $30 generates a tax loss of $100 for that year, which can be deducted in a later income year under section 36-15 or 36-17.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Note: See section 36-20 for the calculation of net exempt income.

Example: Assume that company E did not derive any exempt income for the 2017-2018 income year and that it would not otherwise have any tax loss for that year under section 36-10, 165-70, 175-35 or 701-30.

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 2—Liability rules of general application 1

Part 2-10—Capital allowances: rules about deductibility of capital expenditure 1

Division 40—Capital allowances 1

Guide to Division 40 2

40-1 What this Division is about 2

40-10 Simplified outline of this Division 2

Subdivision 40-A—Objects of Division 5

40-15 Objects of Division 5

Subdivision 40-B—Core provisions 5

Guide to Subdivision 40-B 5

40-20 What this Subdivision is about 5

Operative provisions 7

40-25 Deducting amounts for depreciating assets 7

40-27 Further reduction of deduction for second-hand assets in residential property 9

40-30 What a depreciating asset is 11

40-35 Jointly held depreciating assets 13

40-40 Meaning of hold a depreciating asset 13

40-42 When mining, quarrying or prospecting rights are used 16

40-45 Assets to which this Division does not apply 17

40-50 Assets for which you deduct under another Subdivision 18

40-53 Alterations etc. to certain depreciating assets 18

40-55 Use of the “cents per kilometre” car expense deduction method 18

40-60 When a depreciating asset starts to decline in value 19

40-65 Choice of methods to work out the decline in value 19

40-70 Diminishing value method 21

40-72 Diminishing value method for post-9 May 2006 assets 22

40-75 Prime cost method 23

40-80 When you can deduct the asset’s cost 26

40-82 Assets costing less than $150,000—medium sized businesses—assets first acquired between 2 April 2019 and 31 December 2020 28

40-85 Meaning of adjustable value and opening adjustable value of a depreciating asset 33

40-90 Debt forgiveness 34

40-95 Choice of determining effective life 34

40-100 Commissioner’s determination of effective life 43

40-102 Capped life of certain depreciating assets 44

40-103 Effective life and remaining effective life of certain vessels 46

40-105 Self-assessing effective life 48

40-110 Recalculating effective life 49

40-115 Splitting a depreciating asset 51

40-120 Replacement spectrum licences 52

40-122 Partial conversions of mining, quarrying or prospecting rights 52

40-125 Merging depreciating assets 53

40-130 Choices 53

40-135 Certain anti-avoidance provisions 54

40-140 Getting tax information from associates 54

Subdivision 40-C—Cost 56

Guide to Subdivision 40-C 56

40-170 What this Subdivision is about 56

Operative provisions 56

40-175 Cost 56

40-180 First element of cost 57

40-185 Amount you are taken to have paid to hold a depreciating asset or to receive a benefit 60

40-190 Second element of cost 62

40-195 Apportionment of cost 63

40-200 Exclusion from cost 63

40-205 Cost of a split depreciating asset 64

40-210 Cost of merged depreciating assets 64

40-215 Adjustment: double deduction 64

40-217 Cost of partial continuations of mining, quarrying or prospecting rights 65

40-220 Cost reduced by amounts not of a capital nature 65

40-222 Cost reduced by water infrastructure improvement expenditure 65

40-225 Adjustment: acquiring a car at a discount 65

40-230 Adjustment: car limit 66

40-235 Adjustment: National Disability Insurance Scheme costs 67

Subdivision 40-D—Balancing adjustments 67

Guide to Subdivision 40-D 67

40-280 What this Subdivision is about 67

Operative provisions 68

40-285 Balancing adjustments 68

40-290 Reduction for non-taxable use 70

40-291 Reduction for second-hand assets used in residential property 71

40-291A Fixed reduction for certain assets used to produce assessable labour income 73

40-292 Adjustments—assets used for both general tax purposes and R&D activities 73

40-293 Adjustments—partnership assets used for both general tax purposes and R&D activities 74

40-295 Meaning of balancing adjustment event 75

40-300 Meaning of termination value 77

40-305 Amount you are taken to have received under a balancing adjustment event 79

40-310 Apportionment of termination value 81

40-320 Car to which section 40-225 applies 81

40-325 Adjustment: car limit 81

40-335 Deduction for in-house software where you will never use it 81

40-340 Roll-over relief 82

40-345 What the roll-over relief is 85

40-350 Additional consequences 85

40-360 Notice to allow transferee to work out how this Division applies 86

40-362 Roll-over relief for holders of vessels covered by certificates under the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012 87

40-363 Roll-over relief for interest realignment arrangements 88

40-364 Interest realignment adjustments 91

40-365 Involuntary disposals 93

40-370 Balancing adjustments where there has been use of different car expense methods 95

Subdivision 40-E—Low-value and software development pools 97

Guide to Subdivision 40-E 97

40-420 What this Subdivision is about 97

Operative provisions 97

40-425 Allocating assets to a low-value pool 97

40-430 Rules for assets in low-value pools 99

40-435 Private or exempt use of assets 100

40-440 How you work out the decline in value of assets in low-value pools 100

40-445 Balancing adjustment events 102

40-450 Software development pools 102

40-455 How to work out your deduction 103

40-460 Your assessable income includes consideration for pooled software 103

Subdivision 40-F—Primary production depreciating assets 104

Guide to Subdivision 40-F 104

40-510 What this Subdivision is about 104

Operative provisions 105

40-515 Water facilities, horticultural plants, fodder storage assets and fencing assets 105

40-520 Meaning of water facility, horticultural plant, fodder storage asset and fencing asset 106

40-525 Conditions 107

40-530 When declines in value start 109

40-535 Meaning of horticulture and commercial horticulture 109

40-540 How you work out the decline in value for water facilities 110

40-545 How you work out the decline in value for horticultural plants 110

40-548 How you work out the decline in value for fodder storage assets 112

40-551 How you work out the decline in value for fencing assets 112

40-555 Amounts you cannot deduct 112

40-560 Non-arm’s length transactions 114

40-565 Extra deduction for destruction of a horticultural plant 114

40-570 How this Subdivision applies to partners and partnerships 115

40-575 Getting tax information if you acquire a horticultural plant 115

Subdivision 40-G—Capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders 117

Guide to Subdivision 40-G 117

40-625 What this Subdivision is about 117

Operative provisions 117

40-630 Landcare operations 117

40-635 Meaning of landcare operation 120

40-640 Meaning of approved management plan 121

40-645 Electricity and telephone lines 121

40-650 Amounts you cannot deduct under this Subdivision 122

40-655 Meaning of connecting power to land or upgrading the connection and metering point 124

40-660 Non-arm’s length transactions 125

40-665 How this Subdivision applies to partners and partnerships 125

40-670 Approval of persons as farm consultants 126

40-675 Review of decisions relating to approvals 126

Subdivision 40-H—Capital expenditure that is immediately deductible 127

Guide to Subdivision 40-H 127

40-725 What this Subdivision is about 127

Operative provisions 127

40-730 Deduction for expenditure on exploration or prospecting 127

40-735 Deduction for expenditure on mining site rehabilitation 130

40-740 Meaning of ancillary mining activities and mining building site 131

40-745 No deduction for certain expenditure 131

40-750 Deduction for payments of petroleum resource rent tax 132

40-755 Environmental protection activities 132

40-760 Limits on deductions from environmental protection activities 134

40-765 Non-arm’s length transactions 134

Subdivision 40-I—Capital expenditure that is deductible over time 135

Guide to Subdivision 40-I 135

40-825 What this Subdivision is about 135

Operative provisions 136

40-830 Project pools 136

40-832 Project pools for post-9 May 2006 projects 137

40-835 Reduction of deduction 138

40-840 Meaning of project amount 138

40-845 Project life 140

40-855 When you start to deduct amounts for a project pool 140

40-860 Meaning of mining capital expenditure 140

40-865 Meaning of transport capital expenditure 142

40-870 Meaning of transport facility 143

40-875 Meaning of processed minerals and minerals treatment 143

40-880 Business related costs 144

40-885 Non-arm’s length transactions 148

Subdivision 40-J—Capital expenditure for the establishment of trees in carbon sink forests 148

Guide to Subdivision 40-J 148

40-1000 What this Subdivision is about 148

Operative provisions 149

40-1005 Deduction for expenditure for establishing trees in carbon sink forests 149

40-1010 Expenditure for establishing trees in carbon sink forests 151

40-1015 Carbon sequestration by trees 153

40-1020 Certain expenditure disregarded 153

40-1025 Non-arm’s length transactions 153

40-1030 Extra deduction for destruction of trees in carbon sink forest 154

40-1035 Getting information if you acquire a carbon sink forest 155

Subdivision 40-K—Farm-in farm-out arrangements 156

Guide to Subdivision 40-K 156

40-1095 What this Subdivision is about 156

Farm-in farm-out arrangements and exploration benefits 157

40-1100 Meaning of farm-in farm-out arrangement and exploration benefit 157

Consequences for transferors 159

40-1105 Treatment of certain exploration benefits received under farm-in farm-out arrangements 159

40-1110 Cost of split interests resulting from farm-in farm-out arrangements 159

40-1115 Deductions relating to receipt of exploration benefits 160

40-1120 Cost base and reduced cost base of exploration benefits etc. 161

40-1125 Effect of exploration benefits on the cost of mining, quarrying or prospecting information 161

Consequences for transferees 161

40-1130 Consequences of certain exploration benefits provided under farm-in farm-out arrangements 161

Division 41—Additional deduction for certain new business investment 163

Guide to Division 41 163

41-1 What this Division is about 163

Operative provisions 164

41-5 Object of Division 164

41-10 Entitlement to deduction for investment 164

41-15 Amount of deduction 165

41-20 Recognised new investment amount 167

41-25 Investment commitment time 168

41-30 First use time 170

41-35 New investment threshold 170

Division 43—Deductions for capital works 171

Guide to Division 43 171

43-1 What this Division is about 171

43-2 Key concepts used in this Division 171

Subdivision 43-A—Key operative provisions 173

Guide to Subdivision 43-A 173

43-5 What this Subdivision is about 173

Operative provisions 173

43-10 Deductions for capital works 173

43-15 Amount you can deduct 174

43-20 Capital works to which this Division applies 174

43-25 Rate of deduction 176

43-30 No deduction until construction is complete 176

43-35 Requirement for registration under the Industry Research and Development Act 177

43-40 Deduction for destruction of capital works 177

43-45 Certain anti-avoidance provisions 178

43-50 Links and signposts to other parts of the Act 178

43-55 Anti-avoidance—arrangement etc. with tax-exempt entity 179

Subdivision 43-B—Establishing the deduction base 180

Guide to Subdivision 43-B 180

43-60 What this Subdivision is about 180

43-65 Explanatory material 181

Operative provisions 181

43-70 What is construction expenditure? 181

43-72 Meaning of forestry road, timber operation and timber mill building 183

43-75 Construction expenditure area 184

43-80 When capital works begin 186

43-85 Pools of construction expenditure 186

43-90 Table of intended use at time of completion of construction 187

43-95 Meaning of hotel building and apartment building 190

43-100 Certificates by Industry Innovation and Science Australia 191

Subdivision 43-C—Your area and your construction expenditure 191

Guide to Subdivision 43-C 191

43-105 What this Subdivision is about 191

43-110 Explanatory material 192

Operative provisions 192

43-115 Your area and your construction expenditure—owners 192

43-120 Your area and your construction expenditure—lessees and quasi-ownership right holders 192

43-125 Lessees’ or right holders’ pools can revert to owner 193

43-130 Identifying your area on acquisition or disposal 194

Subdivision 43-D—Deductible uses of capital works 194

Guide to Subdivision 43-D 194

43-135 What this Subdivision is about 194

Using your area 195

43-140 Using your area in a deductible way 195

43-145 Using your area in the 4% manner 197

Industrial activities 202

43-150 Meaning of industrial activities 202

Build to rent developments 204

43-151 Meaning of active build to rent development area 204

43-152 Build to rent developments 204

43-153 Build to rent developments—eligibility 207

43-154 Notice of events 210

43-154A References to buildings 211

Subdivision 43-E—Special rules about uses 211

Guide to Subdivision 43-E 211

43-155 What this Subdivision is about 211

Operative provisions 212

43-160 Your area is used for a purpose if it is maintained ready for use for the purpose 212

43-165 Temporary cessation of use 212

43-170 Own use—capital works other than hotel and apartment buildings 212

43-175 Own use—hotel and apartment buildings 213

43-180 Special rules for hotel and apartment buildings 214

43-185 Residential or display use 215

43-190 Use of facilities not commonly provided, and of certain buildings used to operate a hotel, motel or guest house 216

43-195 Use for R&D activities must be in connection with a business 217

Subdivision 43-F—Calculation of deduction 217

Guide to Subdivision 43-F 217

43-200 What this Subdivision is about 217

43-205 Explanatory material 218

Operative provisions 219

43-210 Deduction for capital works begun after 26 February 1992 219

43-215 Deduction for capital works begun before 27 February 1992 221

43-220 Capital works taken to have begun earlier for certain purposes 222

Subdivision 43-G—Undeducted construction expenditure 223

Guide to Subdivision 43-G 223

43-225 What this Subdivision is about 223

Operative provisions 224

43-230 Calculating undeducted construction expenditure—common step 224

43-235 Post-26 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure 224

43-237 Post-26 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure—modification for active build to rent developments that have ceased 225

43-240 Pre-27 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure 226

Subdivision 43-H—Balancing deduction on destruction of capital works 226

Guide to Subdivision 43-H 226

43-245 What this Subdivision is about 226

Operative provisions 227

43-250 The amount of the balancing deduction 227

43-255 Amounts received or receivable 228

43-260 Apportioning amounts received for destruction 228

Division 44—Build to rent development misuse tax 229

Guide to Division 44 229

44-1 What this Division is about 229

Subdivision 44-A—Object of this Division 229

Operative provisions 229

44-5 Object of this Division 229

Subdivision 44-B—Build to rent development misuse tax 230

Guide to Subdivision 44-B 230

44-10 What this Subdivision is about 230

Liability for tax 230

44-15 Liability for tax 230

Build to rent misuse amounts 231

44-20 Build to rent misuse amounts 231

44-25 Your build to rent capital works deduction amount 231

44-30 Your build to rent withholding amount 234

Subdivision 44-C—When tax is payable 235

Guide to Subdivision 44-C 235

44-35 What this Subdivision is about 235

44-40 When tax is payable—original assessments 235

44-45 When tax is payable—amended assessments 235

44-50 General interest charge 235

Division 45—Disposal of leases and leased plant 237

Guide to Division 45 237

45-1 What this Division is about 237

Operative provisions 238

45-5 Disposal of leased plant or lease 238

45-10 Disposal of interest in partnership 240

45-15 Disposal of shares in 100% subsidiary that leases plant 242

45-20 Disposal of shares in 100% subsidiary that leases plant in partnership 243

45-25 Group members liable to pay outstanding tax 244

45-30 Reduction for certain plant acquired before 21.9.99 245

45-35 Limit on amount included for plant for which there is a CGT exemption 246

45-40 Meaning of plant and written down value 246

Part 2-15—Non-assessable income 249

Division 50—Exempt entities 249

Subdivision 50-A—Various exempt entities 249

50-1 Entities whose ordinary income and statutory income is exempt 250

50-5 Charity, education and science 250

50-10 Community service 251

50-15 Employees and employers 251

50-25 Government 252

50-30 Health 253

50-35 Mining 253

50-40 Primary and secondary resources, and tourism 253

50-45 Sports, culture and recreation 255

50-47 Special condition for all items 261

50-50 Special conditions for item 1.1 261

50-52 Special condition for item 1.1 262

50-55 Special conditions for items 1.3, 1.4, 6.1 and 6.2 262

50-65 Special conditions for item 1.6 262

50-70 Special conditions for items 1.7, 2.1, 9.1 and 9.2 263

50-72 Special condition for item 4.1 264

50-75 Certain distributions may be made overseas 264

Subdivision 50-B—Endorsing charitable entities as exempt from income tax 265

Guide to Subdivision 50-B 265

50-100 What this Subdivision is about 265

Endorsing charitable entities as exempt from income tax 265

50-105 Endorsement by Commissioner 265

50-110 Entitlement to endorsement 266

Division 51—Exempt amounts 267

51-1 Amounts of ordinary income and statutory income that are exempt 267

51-5 Defence 268

51-10 Education and training 270

51-30 Welfare 273

51-32 Compensation payments for loss of tax exempt payments 275

51-33 Compensation payments for loss of pay and/or allowances as a Defence reservist 276

51-35 Payments to a full-time student at a school, college or university 277

51-40 Payments to a secondary student 278

51-42 Bonuses for early completion of an apprenticeship 278

51-43 Income collected or derived by copyright collecting society 278

51-45 Income collected or derived by resale royalty collecting society 279

51-50 Maintenance payments to a spouse or child 280

51-52 Income derived from eligible venture capital investments by ESVCLPs 281

51-54 Gain or profit from disposal of eligible venture capital investments 283

51-55 Gain or profit from disposal of venture capital equity 284

51-57 Interest on judgment debt relating to personal injury 284

51-60 Prime Minister’s Prizes 285

51-100 Shipping 286

51-105 Shipping activities 286

51-110 Core shipping activities 287

51-115 Incidental shipping activities 288

51-120 Interest on unclaimed money and property 288

51-125 2018 storms—relief payments 289

Division 52—Certain pensions, benefits and allowances are exempt from income tax 290

Guide to Division 52 290

52-1 What this Division is about 290

Subdivision 52-A—Exempt payments under the Social Security Act 1991 291

Guide to Subdivision 52-A 291

52-5 What this Subdivision is about 291

Operative provisions 291

52-10 How much of a social security payment is exempt? 291

52-15 Supplementary amounts of payments 306

52-20 Tax-free amount of an ordinary payment after the death of your partner 309

52-25 Tax-free amount of certain bereavement lump sum payments 311

52-30 Tax-free amount of certain other bereavement lump sum payments 313

52-35 Tax-free amount of a lump sum payment made because of the death of a person you are caring for 314

52-40 Provisions of the Social Security Act 1991 under which payments are made 315

Subdivision 52-B—Exempt payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 319

Guide to Subdivision 52-B 319

52-60 What this Subdivision is about 319

Operative provisions 319

52-65 How much of a veterans’ affairs payment is exempt? 319

52-70 Supplementary amounts of payments 324

52-75 Provisions of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 under which payments are made 325

Subdivision 52-C—Exempt payments made because of the Veterans’ Entitlements (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 1986 327

Guide to Subdivision 52-C 327

52-100 What this Subdivision is about 327

Operative provisions 327

52-105 Supplementary amount of a payment made under the Repatriation Act 1920 is exempt 327

52-110 Other exempt payments 329

Subdivision 52-CA—Exempt payments under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004 329

Guide to Subdivision 52-CA 329

52-112 What this Subdivision is about 329

Operative provisions 329

52-114 How much of a payment under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act is exempt? 329

Subdivision 52-CB—Exempt payments under the Australian Participants in British Nuclear Tests and British Commonwealth Occupation Force (Treatment) Act 2006 334

52-117 Payments of travelling expenses and pharmaceutical supplement are exempt 334

Subdivision 52-CC—Exempt payments under the Treatment Benefits (Special Access) Act 2019 334

52-120 Payments of travelling expenses and pharmaceutical supplement are exempt 334

Subdivision 52-E—Exempt payments under the ABSTUDY scheme 335

Guide to Subdivision 52-E 335

52-130 What this Subdivision is about 335

Operative provisions 335

52-131 Payments under ABSTUDY scheme 335

52-132 Supplementary amount of payment 338

52-133 Tax-free amount of ordinary payment on death of partner if no bereavement payment payable 339

52-134 Tax-free amount if you receive a bereavement lump sum payment 340

Subdivision 52-F—Exemption of Commonwealth education or training payments 340

52-140 Supplementary amount of a Commonwealth education or training payment is exempt 341

52-145 Meaning of Commonwealth education or training payment 342

Subdivision 52-G—Exempt payments under the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) (Administration) Act 1999 343

52-150 Family assistance payments are exempt 343

Subdivision 52-H—Other exempt payments 343

52-160 Economic security strategy payments are exempt 343

52-162 ETR payments are exempt 343

52-165 Household stimulus payments are exempt 344

52-170 Outer Regional and Remote payments under the Helping Children with Autism package are exempt 344

52-172 Outer Regional and Remote payments under the Better Start for Children with Disability initiative are exempt 344

52-175 Continence aids payments are exempt 344

52-180 National Disability Insurance Scheme amounts are exempt 344

52-185 Acute support packages are exempt 345

Division 53—Various exempt payments 346

Guide to Division 53 346

53-1 What this Division is about 346

Operative provisions 346

53-10 Exemption of various types of payments 346

53-20 Exemption of similar Australian and United Kingdom veterans’ payments 348

53-25 Coronavirus economic response payment 348

53-30 Territories Stolen Generations Redress Scheme payments are exempt 348

Division 54—Exemption for certain payments made under structured settlements and structured orders 349

Guide to Division 54 349

54-1 What this Division is about 349

Subdivision 54-A—Definitions 349

Operative provisions 350

54-5 Definitions 350

54-10 Meaning of structured settlement and structured order 350

Subdivision 54-B—Tax exemption for personal injury annuities 353

Operative provisions 353

54-15 Personal injury annuity exemption for injured person 353

54-20 Lump sum compensation etc. would not have been assessable 353

54-25 Requirements of the annuity instrument 354

54-30 Requirements for payments of the annuity 354

54-35 Payments during the guarantee period on the death of the injured person 355

54-40 Requirement for minimum monthly level of support 357

Subdivision 54-C—Tax exemption for personal injury lump sums 359

Operative provisions 359

54-45 Personal injury lump sum exemption for injured person 359

54-50 Lump sum compensation would not have been assessable 360

54-55 Requirements of the instrument under which the lump sum is paid 360

54-60 Requirements for payments of the lump sum 360

Subdivision 54-D—Miscellaneous 361

Operative provisions 362

54-65 Exemption for certain payments to reversionary beneficiaries 362

54-70 Special provisions about trusts 362

54-75 Minister to arrange for review and report 363

Division 55—Payments that are not exempt from income tax 365

Guide to Division 55 365

55-1 What this Division is about 365

Operative provisions 365

55-5 Occupational superannuation payments 365

55-10 Education entry payments 366

Division 58—Capital allowances for depreciating assets previously owned by an exempt entity 367

Guide to Division 58 367

58-1 What this Division is about 367

Subdivision 58-A—Application 368

58-5 Application of Division 368

58-10 When an asset is acquired in connection with the acquisition of a business 369

Subdivision 58-B—Calculating decline in value of privatised assets under Division 40 371

58-60 Purpose of rules in this Subdivision 371

58-65 Choice of method to work out cost of privatised asset 371

58-70 Application of Division 40 372

58-75 Meaning of notional written down value 373

58-80 Meaning of undeducted pre-existing audited book value 375

58-85 Pre-existing audited book value of depreciating asset 376

58-90 Method and effective life for transition entity 377

Division 59—Particular amounts of non-assessable non-exempt income 378

Guide to Division 59 378

59-1 What this Division is about 378

Operative provisions 379

59-10 Compensation under firearms surrender arrangements 379

59-15 Mining payments 379

59-20 Taxable amounts relating to franchise fees windfall tax 380

59-25 Taxable amounts relating to Commonwealth places windfall tax 380

59-30 Amounts you must repay 380

59-35 Amounts that would be mutual receipts but for prohibition on distributions to members or issue of MCIs 381

59-40 Issue of rights 381

59-50 Native title benefits 382

59-55 2019-20 bushfires—payments for volunteer work with fire services 384

59-60 2019-20 bushfires—disaster relief payments and non-cash benefits 384

59-65 Water infrastructure improvement payments 385

59-67 Meaning of SRWUIP program, SRWUIP payment, direct SRWUIP payment and indirect SRWUIP payment 387

59-70 List of SRWUIP programs 388

59-75 Commissioner to be kept informed 389

59-80 Amending assessments 389

59-85 2019 floods—recovery grants for small businesses, primary producers and non-profit organisations 390

59-86 2019 floods—on-farm grant program for primary producers 390

59-90 Cash flow boost 391

59-95 Coronavirus economic response payment 391

59-96 COVID-19 disaster payment 391

59-97 State and Territory grants to small business relating to the recovery from the coronavirus known as COVID-19 391

59-98 Commonwealth small business support payments relating to the coronavirus known as COVID-19 393

59-99 2021 floods and storms—recovery grants 394

59-100 Refund of large-scale generation shortfall charge 394

59-105 Cyclone Seroja—recovery grants 394

59-110 Payment to victim following perpetrator contributions release order 395

Part 2-20—Tax offsets 396

Division 61—Generally applicable tax offsets 396

Subdivision 61-A—Dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset 396

Guide to Subdivision 61-A 396

61-1 What this Subdivision is about 396

Object of this Subdivision 397

61-5 Object of this Subdivision 397

Entitlement to the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset 397

61-10 Who is entitled to the tax offset 397

61-15 Cases involving more than one spouse 399

61-20 Exceeding the income limit for family tax benefit (Part B) 399

61-25 Eligibility for family tax benefit (Part B) without shared care 400

Amount of the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset 401

61-30 Amount of the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset 401

61-35 Families with shared care percentages 401

61-40 Reduced amounts of dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset 402

61-45 Reductions to take account of the other individual’s income 403

Subdivision 61-D—Low Income tax offset 404

Guide to Subdivision 61-D 404

61-100 What this Subdivision is about 404

Operative provisions 404

61-110 Entitlement to the Low Income tax offset 404

61-115 Amount of the Low Income tax offset 405

Subdivision 61-E—Working Australians tax offset 407

Guide to Subdivision 61-E 407

61-150 What this Subdivision is about 407

Operative provisions 407

61-155 Entitlement to the working Australians tax offset 407

61-160 Amount of the working Australians tax offset 409

Subdivision 61-G—Private health insurance offset complementary to Part 2-2 of the Private Health Insurance Act 2007 409

Guide to Subdivision 61-G 409

61-200 What this Subdivision is about 409

Operative provisions 410

61-205 Entitlement to the private health insurance tax offset 410

61-210 Amount of the private health insurance tax offset 411

61-215 Reallocation of the private health insurance tax offset between spouses 411

Subdivision 61-L—Tax offset for Medicare levy surcharge (lump sum payments in arrears) 412

Guide to Subdivision 61-L 412

61-575 What this Subdivision is about 412

Operative provisions 413

61-580 Entitlement to a tax offset 413

61-585 The amount of a tax offset 415

61-590 Definition of MLS lump sums 416

Subdivision 61-N—Seafarer tax offset 416

Guide to Subdivision 61-N 416

61-695 What this Subdivision is about 416

Operative provisions 417

61-700 Object of this Subdivision 417

61-705 Who is entitled to the seafarer tax offset 417

61-710 Amount of the seafarer tax offset 419

Subdivision 61-P—ESVCLP tax offset 420

Guide to Subdivision 61-P 420

61-750 What this Subdivision is about 420

Operative provisions 420

61-755 Object of this Subdivision 420

61-760 Who is entitled to the ESVCLP tax offset 421

61-765 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—general case 421

61-770 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—members of trusts or partnerships 423

61-775 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—trustees 424

Division 63—Common rules for tax offsets 425

Guide to Division 63 425

63-1 What this Division is about 425

63-10 Priority rules 425

Division 65—Tax offset carry forward rules 429

Guide to Division 65 429

65-10 What this Division is about 429

Operative provisions 429

65-30 Amount carried forward 429

65-35 How to apply carried forward tax offsets 430

65-40 When a company cannot apply a tax offset 431

65-50 Effect of bankruptcy 431

65-55 Deduction for amounts paid for debts incurred before bankruptcy 432

Division 67—Refundable tax offset rules 434

Guide to Division 67 434

67-10 What this Division is about 434

Operative provisions 434

67-20 Which tax offsets this Division applies to 434

67-23 Refundable tax offsets 434

67-25 Refundable tax offsets—franked distributions 436

67-30 Refundable tax offsets—R&D 438

Chapter 2 — Liability rules of general application

Part 2-10 — Capital allowances: rules about deductibility of capital expenditure

Division 40 — Capital allowances

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 40

40-A Objects of Division

40-B Core provisions

40-C Cost

40-D Balancing adjustments

40-E Low-value and software development pools

40-F Primary production depreciating assets

40-G Capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders

40-H Capital expenditure that is immediately deductible

40-I Capital expenditure that is deductible over time

40-J Capital expenditure for the establishment of trees in carbon sink forests

40-K Farm-in farm-out arrangements

Guide to Division 40

40-1 What this Division is about

You can deduct an amount equal to the decline in value of a depreciating asset (an asset that has a limited effective life and that is reasonably expected to decline in value over the time it is used) that you hold.

That decline is generally measured by reference to the effective life of the asset.

You can also deduct amounts for certain other capital expenditure.

40-10 Simplified outline of this Division

The key concepts about depreciating assets and certain other capital expenditure are outlined below (in bold italics).

Subdivision 40-A — Objects of Division

Table of sections

40-15 Objects of Division

40-15 Objects of Division

The objects of this Division are:

to allow you to deduct the *cost of a depreciating asset; and

to spread the deduction over a period that reflects the time for which the asset can be used to obtain benefits; and

to provide deductions for certain other capital expenditure that is not otherwise deductible.

Note 1: This Division does not apply to some depreciating assets: see section 40-45.

Note 2: The application of this Division to a life insurance company is affected by sections 320-200 and 320-255.

Subdivision 40-B — Core provisions

Guide to Subdivision 40-B

40-20 What this Subdivision is about

The rules that apply to most depreciating assets are in this Subdivision. It explains:

• what a depreciating asset is; and

• when you start deducting amounts for depreciating assets; and

• how to work out your deductions.

It also contains rules for splitting and merging depreciating assets.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-25 Deducting amounts for depreciating assets

40-27 Further reduction of deduction for second-hand assets in residential property

40-30 What a depreciating asset is

40-35 Jointly held depreciating assets

40-40 Meaning of hold a depreciating asset

40-42 When mining, quarrying or prospecting rights are used

40-45 Assets to which this Division does not apply

40-50 Assets for which you deduct under another Subdivision

40-53 Alterations etc. to certain depreciating assets

40-55 Use of the “cents per kilometre” car expense deduction method

40-60 When a depreciating asset starts to decline in value

40-65 Choice of methods to work out the decline in value

40-70 Diminishing value method

40-72 Diminishing value method for post-9 May 2006 assets

40-75 Prime cost method

40-80 When you can deduct the asset’s cost

40-82 Assets costing less than $150,000—medium sized businesses—assets first acquired between 2 April 2019 and 31 December 2020

40-85 Meaning of adjustable value and opening adjustable value of a depreciating asset

40-90 Debt forgiveness

40-95 Choice of determining effective life

40-100 Commissioner’s determination of effective life

40-102 Capped life of certain depreciating assets

40-103 Effective life and remaining effective life of certain vessels

40-105 Self-assessing effective life

40-110 Recalculating effective life

40-115 Splitting a depreciating asset

40-120 Replacement spectrum licences

40-122 Partial conversions of mining, quarrying or prospecting rights

40-125 Merging depreciating assets

40-130 Choices

40-135 Certain anti-avoidance provisions

40-140 Getting tax information from associates

Operative provisions

40-25 Deducting amounts for depreciating assets

You deduct the decline in value

You can deduct an amount equal to the decline in value for an income year (as worked out under this Division) of a depreciating asset that you *held for any time during the year.

Note 1: Sections 40-70, 40-72 and 40-75 show you how to work out the decline for most depreciating assets. There is a limit on the decline: see subsections 40-70(3), 40-72(3) and 40-75(7).

Note 2: Small business entities can choose to both deduct and work out the amount they can deduct under Division 328.

Note 3: Generally, only one taxpayer can deduct amounts for a depreciating asset. However, if you and another taxpayer jointly hold the asset, each of you deduct amounts for it: see section 40-35.

Reduction of deduction

You must reduce your deduction by the part of the asset’s decline in value that is attributable to your use of the asset, or your having it installed ready for use, for a purpose other than a taxable purpose.

Example: Ben holds a depreciating asset that he uses for private purposes for 30% of his total use in the income year.

If the asset declines by $1,000 for the year, Ben would have to reduce his deduction by $300 (30% of $1,000).

Further reduction: leisure facilities

Note: You may have to make a further reduction under subsections (3) and (4) or section 40-27.

You may have to make a further reduction for a depreciating asset that is a leisure facility attributable to your use of it, or your having it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose.

That reduction is the part of the leisure facility’s decline in value that is attributable to your use of it, or your having it installed ready for use, at a time when:

its use did not constitute a *fringe benefit; or

you did not use it or *hold it for use as mentioned in paragraph 26-50(3)(b) (about using it in the course of your business or for your employees).

Exception: low-value pools

Subsections (2), (3) and (4) do not apply to *depreciating assets allocated to a low-value pool.

Despite subsection (1), you can continue to deduct an amount equal to the decline in value for an income year (as worked out under this Division) of such an asset even though you do not continue to *hold that asset.

Meaning of taxable purpose

Note: See Subdivision 40-E for low-value pools.

(7) Subject to subsection (8), a taxable purpose is:

the *purpose of producing assessable income; or

the purpose of *exploration or prospecting; or

the purpose of mining site rehabilitation; or

environmental protection activities.

Note 1: Where you have had a deduction under this Division an amount may be included in your assessable income if the expenditure was financed by limited recourse debt that has terminated: see Division 243.

Note 2: When this Division notionally applies under section 355-310 (about depreciating assets used for R&D activities), the taxable purpose is sometimes only the purpose of conducting R&D activities.

If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is a depreciating asset:

if section 250-150 applies—you are taken not to be using the asset for a taxable purpose to the extent of the disallowed capital allowance percentage; or

otherwise—you are taken not to be using the asset for such a purpose.

40-27 Further reduction of deduction for second-hand assets in residential property

In addition to subsections 40-25(2) to (4), you may have to further reduce your deduction for a depreciating asset for the income year.

Reduce your deduction by any part of the asset’s decline in value that is attributable to your use of it, or your having it installed ready for use, for the *purpose of producing assessable income:

from the use of residential premises to provide residential accommodation; but

not in the course of carrying on a business;

if:

you did not *hold the asset when it was first used, or first installed ready for use, (other than as trading stock) by any entity; or

at any time during the income year or an earlier income year, the asset was used, or installed ready for use, either:

in residential premises that were one of your residences at that time; or

for a purpose that was not a taxable purpose, and in a way that was not occasional.

Note: Your deduction could be reduced to nil if the purpose to which paragraphs (a) and (b) relate is your only taxable purpose for using the asset or having the asset installed ready for use.

Exception—kind of entity

Subsection (2) does not apply to you for the asset if, at any time during the income year, you are:

a corporate tax entity; or

a *superannuation plan that is not a self managed superannuation fund; or

a managed investment trust; or

(d) a public unit trust (within the meaning of section 102P of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

a unit trust or partnership, if each *member of the trust or partnership is covered by a paragraph of this subsection at that time during the income year.

Exception—certain assets in new residential premises

Paragraph (2)(c) does not apply to you for the asset if:

(a) the *residential premises referred to in paragraph (2)(a) (the current premises) are supplied to you as new residential premises on a particular day (the current supply day); and

the asset is supplied to you as part of that supply of the current premises; and

at the time you first *hold the asset as a result of that supply, the asset is used, or installed ready for use, in:

the current premises; or

any other real property in which an interest was supplied to you as part of that supply of the current premises; and

at any earlier time, no entity was residing in any residential premises in which the asset was used, or installed ready for use, at that earlier time; and

no amount can be deducted under this Division, or under Subdivision 328-D, for the asset for any income year by any previous holder of the asset.

Note: An entity residing at an earlier time in other residential premises in the same complex will not cause paragraph (d) to prevent this subsection from applying.

However, disregard paragraph (4)(d) for an earlier time if:

the asset was used, or installed ready for use, in the current premises at that time; and

both that time, and the current supply, happen during the 6-month period starting on the day the current premises became new residential premises.

Exception—low-value pools

Subsection (2) does not apply to *depreciating assets allocated to a low-value pool.

Note: See Subdivision 40-E for low-value pools.

40-30 What a depreciating asset is

(1) A depreciating asset is an asset that has a limited *effective life and can reasonably be expected to decline in value over the time it is used, except:

land; or

an item of trading stock; or

an intangible asset, unless it is mentioned in subsection (2).

(2) These intangible assets are depreciating assets if they are not *trading stock:

*mining, quarrying or prospecting rights;

*mining, quarrying or prospecting information;

items of *intellectual property;

*in-house software;

*IRUs;

spectrum licences;

*telecommunications site access rights.

This Division applies to an improvement to land, or a fixture on land, whether the improvement or fixture is removable or not, as if it were an asset separate from the land.

Note 1: Whether such an asset is a depreciating asset depends on whether it falls within the definition in subsection (1).

Note 2: This Division does not apply to capital works for which you can deduct amounts under Division 43: see subsection 40-45(2).

(4) Whether a particular composite item is itself a depreciating asset or whether its components are separate depreciating assets is a question of fact and degree which can only be determined in the light of all the circumstances of the particular case.

Example 1: A car is made up of many separate components, but usually the car is a depreciating asset rather than each component.

Example 2: A floating restaurant consists of many separate components (like the ship itself, stoves, fridges, furniture, crockery and cutlery), but usually these components are treated as separate depreciating assets.

This Division applies to a renewal or extension of a depreciating asset that is a right as if the renewal or extension were a continuation of the original right.

(6) This Division applies to a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right (the new right) as if it were a continuation of another mining, quarrying or prospecting right you *held if:

the other right ends; and

any of the following conditions are satisfied:

the new right and the other right relate to the same area, or any difference in area is not significant;

the new right relates to an area that is a part of the area that the other right relates to.

Note: If the other right does not end, it may be taken to be split into 2 assets: see section 40-122.

For the purposes of subsection (6), it does not matter whether the new right begins immediately after the other right ends or later (including in a later income year).

40-35 Jointly held depreciating assets

(1) This Division and the provisions referred to in subsection (3) apply to a *depreciating asset (the underlying asset) that you *hold, and that is also held by one or more other entities, as if your interest in the underlying asset were itself the underlying asset.

Note: Partners do not hold partnership assets: see section 40-40.

As a result, the decline in value of the underlying asset is not itself taken into account.

Example: Buford Corp owns an office block that it leases to 2 companies, Smokey Pty Ltd and Bandit Pty Ltd. Smokey and Bandit decide to install a fountain in front of the building.

They discuss it with Buford who agrees to pay half the cost (because the fountain won’t be removable at the end of the lease). Smokey and Bandit split the rest of the cost between them.

Smokey and Bandit would each hold the asset under item 3 of the table in section 40-40 and Buford would hold it under item 10. They would be joint holders, so each would write-off its interest in the fountain.

The provisions are:

Divisions 41, 328 and 775 of this Act; and

(b) Divisions 40 and 328 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

40-40 Meaning of hold a depreciating asset

Use this table to work out who holds a *depreciating asset. An entity identified in column 3 of an item in the table as not holding a depreciating asset cannot hold the asset under another item.

Example 1: Power Finance leases a luxury car to Kris who subleases it to Rachael. As lessee, item 1 makes Rachael the holder of the car. Power, as the legal owner, would normally hold the car under item 10.

However, item 1 makes it clear that Power, as lessor, does not hold the car. As the lessee, item 1 would normally mean that Kris held the car but, again, she is also a lessor and so is not the holder (she also doesn’t have the right to use the car during the sublease).

Jenny is reasonably expected to exercise that option because the final payment will be well below the expected market value of the machine at the end of the agreement. Sandra, as the machine’s legal owner, would normally be its holder under item 10 but item 6 makes it clear that the legal owner is not the holder.

Example 2: Sandra sells a packing machine to Jenny under a hire purchase agreement. Jenny holds the machine under item 6 because, although she is not the legal owner until she exercises her option to purchase, she possesses the machine now and can exercise an option to become its legal owner.

Note 1: Some assets may have holders under more than one item in the table.

Note 2: As well as hire purchase agreements, items 5 and 6 cover cases like assets subject to chattel mortgages, sales subject to retention of title clauses and assets subject to bare trusts.

40-42 When mining, quarrying or prospecting rights are used

This Division and Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities) apply to a depreciating asset you *hold that is a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right as if a reference to using the asset were a reference to engaging in activity that involves exercising rights conferred on you by the asset.

(2) If the asset is an interest covered by paragraph (c) of the definition of mining, quarrying or prospecting right in subsection 995-1(1), the reference in subsection (1) of this section to rights conferred on you by the asset is taken to be a reference to rights conferred on you by the authority, licence, permit, right or lease referred to in paragraph (c) of that definition.

40-45 Assets to which this Division does not apply

Eligible work related items

(1) This Division does not apply to an asset that is an eligible work related item for the purposes of section 58X of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986 where the relevant benefit provided by the employer is an expense payment benefit or a property benefit (within the meaning of that Act).

Capital works

This Division does not apply to capital works for which you can deduct amounts under Division 43, or for which you could deduct amounts under that Division:

but for expenditure being incurred, or capital works being started, before a particular day; or

had you used the capital works for a purpose relevant to those capital works under section 43-140.

Note: Section 43-20 lists the capital works to which that Division applies.

Films

This Division does not apply to a depreciating asset if you or another taxpayer has deducted or can deduct amounts for it under:

(a) former Division 10BA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about Australian films); or

former Division 10B of Part III of that Act if the depreciating asset relates to a copyright in an Australian film within the meaning of that Division.

This Division applies to a depreciating asset that is copyright in a film where a company is entitled to a tax offset under section 376-55 in respect of the film as if the asset’s *cost were reduced by the amount of that offset.

40-50 Assets for which you deduct under another Subdivision

You cannot deduct an amount, or work out a decline in value, for a depreciating asset under this Subdivision if you or another taxpayer has deducted or can deduct amounts for it under Subdivision 40-F (about primary production depreciating assets), 40-G (about capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders) or 40-J (about capital expenditure for the establishment of trees in carbon sink forests).

You cannot deduct an amount, or work out a decline in value, for *in-house software under this Subdivision if you have allocated expenditure on the software to a software development pool under Subdivision 40-E.

40-53 Alterations etc. to certain depreciating assets

These things are not the same depreciating asset for the purposes of section 40-50 and Subdivision 40-F:

a depreciating asset; and

a repair of a capital nature, or an alteration, addition or extension, to that asset that would, if it were a separate depreciating asset, be a water facility, fodder storage asset or fencing asset.

These things are not the same depreciating asset for the purposes of section 40-50 and Subdivision 40-G:

a depreciating asset; and

a repair of a capital nature, or an alteration, addition or extension, to that asset that would, if it were a separate depreciating asset, be a landcare operation.

40-55 Use of the “cents per kilometre” car expense deduction method

You cannot deduct any amount for the decline in value of a car for an income year if you use the “cents per kilometre” method for the car for that year.

Note: See Subdivision 28-C for that method.

40-60 When a depreciating asset starts to decline in value

A depreciating asset you *hold starts to decline in value from when its *start time occurs.

(2) The start time of a *depreciating asset is when you first use it, or have it *installed ready for use, for any purpose.

Note: Previous use by a transition entity is ignored: see section 58-70.

(3) However, there is another start time for a *depreciating asset you *hold if a *balancing adjustment event referred to in paragraph 40-295(1)(b) occurs for the asset and you start to use the asset again. Its second start time is when you start using it again.

40-65 Choice of methods to work out the decline in value

You have a choice of 2 methods to work out the decline in value of a depreciating asset. You must choose to use either the diminishing value method or the prime cost method.

Note 1: Once you make the choice for an asset, you cannot change it: see section 40-130.

Note 2: For the diminishing value method, see sections 40-70 and 40-72. For the prime cost method, see section 40-75.

Note 3: In some cases you do not have to make the choice because you can deduct the asset’s cost: see sections 40-80 and 40-82.

Note 4: Subdivisions 40-BA and 40-BB of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 may affect the operation of this section.

Exception: asset acquired from associate

For a depreciating asset that you acquire from an associate of yours where the associate has deducted or can deduct an amount for the asset under this Division, you must use the same method that the associate was using.

Note: You can require the associate to tell you which method the associate was using: see section 40-140.

Exception: holder changes but user same or associate of former user

For a depreciating asset that you acquire from a former *holder of the asset, you must use the same method that the former holder was using for the asset if:

(a) the former holder or another entity (each of which is the former user) was using the asset at a time before you became the holder; and

while you hold the asset, the former user or an associate of the former user uses the asset.

However, you must use the diminishing value method if:

you do not know, and cannot readily find out, which method the former holder was using; or

the former holder did not use a method.

Exception: low-value pools

You work out the decline in value of a depreciating asset in a low-value pool under Subdivision 40-E rather than under this Subdivision.

Exception: also notionally deductible under R&D provisions

If:

only one of the following events has happened:

you have deducted one or more amounts under this Division for an asset;

you have been entitled under section 355-100 (about R&D) to one or more *tax offsets because you can deduct one or more amounts under section 355-305 for an asset; but

later, the other event happens for the asset;

then, for the purposes of working out the deduction for the later event, you must choose the same method that you chose for the first event.

Note 1: Deductions under section 355-305 (about decline in value of tangible depreciating assets used for R&D activities) are worked out using a notional application of this Division.

Note 2: This subsection applies with changes if you have or could have deducted an amount under former section 73BA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the asset (see section 40-67 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

If:

the events in paragraph (6)(a) could both arise for the same period for an asset; and

neither event has already arisen for the asset;

then you must choose the same method for the purposes of working out the deduction for each event.

40-70 Diminishing value method

(1) You work out the decline in value of a *depreciating asset for an income year using the diminishing value method in this way:

where:

base value is:

for the income year in which the asset’s *start time occurs—its *cost; or

for a later year—the sum of its *opening adjustable value for that year and any amount included in the second element of its cost for that year.

days held is the number of days you *held the asset in the income year from its *start time, ignoring any days in that year when you did not use the asset, or have it *installed ready for use, for any purpose.

You can choose to recalculate effective life because of changed circumstances: see section 40-110. That section also requires you to recalculate effective life in some cases.

Exception: intangibles

Note 1: If you recalculate the effective life of a depreciating asset, you use that recalculated life in working out your deduction.

Note 2: The effective life of a vessel can change in some cases: see subsection 40-103(2).

You cannot use the diminishing value method to work out the decline in value of:

*in-house software; or

an item of *intellectual property (except copyright in a film); or

a spectrum licence; or

a telecommunications site access right.

Limit on decline

The decline in value of a depreciating asset under this section for an income year cannot be more than the amount that is the asset’s *base value for that income year.

40-72 Diminishing value method for post-9 May 2006 assets

(1) You work out the decline in value of a *depreciating asset for an income year using the diminishing value method in this way if you started to *hold the asset on or after 10 May 2006:

where:

days held has the same meaning as in subsection 40-70(1).

You can choose to recalculate effective life because of changed circumstances: see section 40-110. That section also requires you to recalculate effective life in some cases.

Exception: intangibles

Note: If you recalculate the effective life of a depreciating asset, you use that recalculated life in working out your deduction.

You cannot use the diminishing value method to work out the decline in value of:

*in-house software; or

an item of *intellectual property (except copyright in a film); or

a spectrum licence; or

a telecommunications site access right.

Limit on decline

The decline in value of a depreciating asset under this section for an income year cannot be more than the amount that is the asset’s *base value for that income year.

40-75 Prime cost method

(1) You work out the decline in value of a *depreciating asset for an income year using the prime cost method in this way:

where:

where:

days held has the same meaning as in subsection 40-70(1).

Example: Greg acquires an asset for $3,500 and first uses it on the 26th day of the income year. If the effective life of the asset is 31/3 years, the asset would decline in value in that year by:

The asset’s adjustable value at the end of the income year is:

(2) However, you must adjust the formula in subsection (1) for an income year (the change year):

for which you recalculate the depreciating asset’s *effective life; or

after the year in which the asset’s start time occurs and in which an amount is included in the second element of the asset’s *cost; or

for which the asset’s *opening adjustable value is reduced under section 40-90 (about debt forgiveness); or

in which the *remaining effective life of the asset is calculated under section 40-103; or

for which there is a reduction to the asset’s opening adjustable value under paragraph 40-365(5)(b) (about involuntary disposals) where you are using the prime cost method; or

for which the opening adjustable value of the asset is modified under subsection 27-80(3A) or (4), 27-85(3) or 27-90(3); or

for which there is a reduction in the asset’s opening adjustable value under section 775-70; or

for which there is an increase in the asset’s opening adjustable value under section 775-75.

The adjustments apply for the change year and later years.

Note 1: For recalculating a depreciating asset’s effective life: see section 40-110.

Note 2: You may also adjust the formula for an income year if you had undeducted core technology expenditure for the asset at the end of your last income year commencing before 1 July 2011 (see section 355-605 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Note 3: Subdivision 40-BA or 40-BB of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 may also require you to adjust the formula: see subsections 40-135(3) and 40-180(2) of that Act.

The adjustments are:

instead of the asset’s *cost, you use its *opening adjustable value for the change year plus the amounts (if any) included in the second element of its cost for that year; and

instead of the asset’s *effective life, you use its *remaining effective life.

(4) The remaining effective life of a *depreciating asset is any period of its *effective life that is yet to elapse as at:

the start of the change year; or

in the case of a roll-over under section 40-340—the time when the balancing adjustment event occurs for the transferor.

Note: Effective life is worked out in years and fractions of years.

You must also adjust the formula in subsection (1) for an intangible depreciating asset that:

is mentioned in an item in the table in subsection 40-95(7) (except item 5, 7 or 8); and

you acquire from a former *holder of the asset.

The adjustment applies for the income year in which you acquire the asset and later income years.

Instead of the asset’s *effective life under the table in subsection 40-95(7), you use the number of years remaining in that effective life as at the start of the income year in which you acquire the asset.

Limit on decline

The decline in value of a depreciating asset under this section for an income year cannot be more than:

for the income year in which the asset’s *start time occurs—its *cost; or

for a later year—the sum of its *opening adjustable value for that year and any amount included in the second element of its cost for that year.

40-80 When you can deduct the asset’s cost

Exploration or prospecting

The decline in value of a depreciating asset you *hold is the asset’s *cost if:

you first use the asset for *exploration or prospecting for *minerals, or quarry materials, obtainable by mining and quarrying operations; and

when you first use the asset, you do not use it for:

development drilling for petroleum; or

operations in the course of working a mining property, quarrying property or petroleum field; and

you satisfy one or more of these subparagraphs at the asset’s *start time:

you carry on mining and quarrying operations;

it would be reasonable to conclude you proposed to carry on such operations;

you carry on a business of, or a business that included, exploration or prospecting for minerals or quarry materials obtainable by such operations, and expenditure on the asset was necessarily incurred in carrying on that business; and

in a case where the asset is a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right—you acquired the asset from an *Australian government agency or a government entity; and

in a case where the asset is *mining, quarrying or prospecting information:

you acquired the asset from an Australian government agency or a government entity; or

the asset is a geophysical or geological data package you acquired from an entity to which subsection (1AA) applies; or

you created the asset, or contributed to the cost of its creation; or

you caused the asset to be created, or contributed to the cost of it being created, by an entity to which subsection (1AA) applies.

(1AA) This subsection applies to an entity if, at the time of the acquisition referred to in subparagraph (1)(e)(ii) or the creation referred to in subparagraph (1)(e)(iv), the entity predominantly carries on a business of providing *mining, quarrying or prospecting information to other entities that:

carry on mining and quarrying operations; or

it would be reasonable to conclude propose to carry on such operations; or

carry on a business of, or a business that included, *exploration or prospecting for *minerals or quarry materials obtainable by such operations.

(1AB) If an amount is included in the second element of the *cost of a depreciating asset, subsection (1) applies in relation to that amount only if:

your first use of the asset, after the inclusion of the amount in the second element, is for *exploration or prospecting for *minerals, or quarry materials, obtainable by mining and quarrying operations; and

at the time of that first use:

you satisfy paragraph (1)(b) as if that first use was your first use of the asset; and

you satisfy paragraph (1)(c) as if the time of that first use was the asset’s *start time; and

if the amount relates to a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right—after the inclusion of the amount in the second element, you satisfy paragraph (1)(d) in relation to the right; and

if the amount relates to *mining, quarrying or prospecting information—after the inclusion of the amount in the second element:

you satisfy paragraph (1)(e) in relation to the information; or

you would satisfy that paragraph, in relation to the economic benefit that resulted in the inclusion of the amount in the second element, if that economic benefit were the asset referred to in that paragraph.

(1AC) If subsection (1) does not apply to a depreciating asset:

the fact that subsection (1) does not apply to the asset does not prevent the application of subsection (1AB) to an amount included in the second element of the *cost of the asset; but

subsection (1) only affects the asset’s decline in value to the extent that the asset’s cost consists of that amount.

Depreciating assets used for certain purposes

The decline in value of a depreciating asset you start to *hold in an income year is the asset’s *cost if:

that cost does not exceed $300; and

you use the asset predominantly for the *purpose of producing assessable income that is not income from carrying on a business; and

the asset is not one that is part of a set of assets that you started to hold in that income year where the total cost of the set of assets exceeds $300; and

the total cost of the asset and any other identical, or substantially identical, asset that you start to hold in that income year does not exceed $300.

40-82 Assets costing less than $150,000—medium sized businesses—assets first acquired between 2 April 2019 and 31 December 2020

Year in which asset first used, or installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose

(1) The decline in value of a *depreciating asset you *hold for the income year (the current year) in which you start to use the asset, or have it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose is the amount worked out under subsection (2) if:

you are an entity covered by subsection (4) (about medium sized businesses) for:

the current year; and

the income year in which you started to hold the asset; and

you first acquired the asset:

at or after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 2 April 2019; and

before 12 March 2020; and

the current year ends on or after 2 April 2019; and

you start to use the asset, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose before 12 March 2020; and

the asset is a depreciating asset whose *cost as at the end of the current year is less than $30,000.

Note: The amount you can deduct may be reduced by other provisions, such as subsection 40-25(2) (about taxable purpose) and section 40-215 (about double deductions).

The amount is:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the asset’s *cost as at the end of the current year; or

if the asset’s *start time occurred in an earlier income year—the sum of the asset’s *opening adjustable value for the current year and any amount included in the second element of its cost for the current year.

(2A) The decline in value of a *depreciating asset you *hold for the income year (the current year) in which you start to use the asset, or have it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose is the amount worked out under subsection (2B) if:

you are an entity covered by subsection (4) (about medium sized businesses), or by subsection (4A) (about medium sized businesses and certain assets) in relation to the asset, for:

the current year; and

the income year in which you started to hold the asset; and

you first acquired the asset:

at or after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 2 April 2019; and

on or before 31 December 2020; and

the current year ends on or after 12 March 2020; and

you start to use the asset, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose:

on or after 12 March 2020; and

on or before 30 June 2021; and

the asset is a depreciating asset whose *cost as at the end of the earlier of:

the end of the current year; and

31 December 2020;

is less than $150,000.

Note 1: The amount you can deduct may be reduced by other provisions, such as subsection 40-25(2) (about taxable purpose) and section 40-215 (about double deductions).

Note 2: This subsection does not apply if Subdivision 40-BB of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applies: see section 40-145 of that Act.

The amount is:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the asset’s *cost as at the earlier of:

the end of the current year; and

31 December 2020; or

if the asset’s *start time occurred in an earlier income year—the sum of:

the asset’s *opening adjustable value for the current year; and

any amount included in the second element of the asset’s cost for the current year, other than an amount included after 31 December 2020.

Later year

(3) The decline in value of a *depreciating asset you *hold for an income year (the later year) is the first amount included in the second element of the asset’s *cost for the later year if:

you are an entity covered by subsection (4) (about medium sized businesses) for the later year; and

the amount is included before 12 March 2020; and

the amount included is less than $30,000; and

you worked out the decline in value of the asset for an earlier income year under subsection (1); and

the later year ends on or after 2 April 2019.

Note: The amount you can deduct may be reduced by other provisions, such as subsection 40-25(2) (about taxable purpose) and section 40-215 (about double deductions).

(3A) The decline in value of a *depreciating asset you *hold for an income year (the later year) is the first amount included in the second element of the asset’s *cost for the later year if:

you are an entity covered by subsection (4) (about medium sized businesses), or by subsection (4B) (about medium sized businesses and certain amounts) in relation to the amount, for the later year; and

the amount is included:

on or after 12 March 2020; and

on or before 31 December 2020; and

the amount included is less than $150,000; and

you worked out the decline in value of the asset for an earlier income year under subsection (1) or (2A); and

the later year ends on or after 12 March 2020.

Note 1: The amount you can deduct may be reduced by other provisions, such as subsection 40-25(2) (about taxable purpose) and section 40-215 (about double deductions).

Note 2: This subsection does not apply if Subdivision 40-BB of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applies: see section 40-145 of that Act.

Medium sized business

An entity is covered by this subsection for an income year if:

the entity is not a small business entity for the income year; and

the entity would be a small business entity for the income year if:

each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $50 million; and

the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this subsection.

An entity is covered by this subsection for an income year in relation to an asset mentioned in subsection (2A) if:

the entity starts to use the asset, or has the asset installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose in the period beginning on 12 March 2020 and ending on 30 June 2021; and

the entity is not a small business entity for the income year; and

the entity would be a small business entity for the income year if:

each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $500 million; and

the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this subsection in relation to the asset.

An entity is covered by this subsection for an income year in relation to an amount included as mentioned in subsection (3A) if:

the amount is so included in the period beginning on 12 March 2020 and ending on 31 December 2020; and

the entity is not a small business entity for the income year; and

the entity would be a small business entity for the income year if:

each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $500 million; and

the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this subsection in relation to the amount.

Assets you start to use, or have installed ready for use, after 30 June 2021

The decline in value of a depreciating asset you start to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose after 30 June 2021 is worked out under the other provisions of this Division.

Amounts included in second element of cost after 31 December 2020

The effect on the value of a depreciating asset of an amount included in the second element of the asset’s *cost after 31 December 2020 is worked out under the other provisions of this Division.

40-85 Meaning of adjustable value and opening adjustable value of a depreciating asset

(1) The adjustable value of a *depreciating asset at a particular time is:

if you have not yet used it or had it installed ready for use for any purpose—its *cost; or

for a time in the income year in which you first use it, or have it installed ready for use, for any purpose—its cost less its decline in value up to that time; or

for a time in a later income year—the sum of its *opening adjustable value for that year and any amount included in the second element of its cost for that year up to that time, less its decline in value for that year up to that time.

Note: The adjustable value of a depreciating asset may be modified by section 250-285.

(2) The opening adjustable value of a *depreciating asset for an income year is its *adjustable value to you at the end of the previous income year.

Note: The opening adjustable value of a depreciating asset may be modified by one of these provisions:

Subdivision 27-B;

subsection 40-90(3);

subsection 40-285(4);

paragraph 40-365(5)(b);

section 775-70;

section 775-75;

(g) section 355-605 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

40-90 Debt forgiveness

(1) This section applies if an amount (the debt forgiveness amount) is applied in reduction of expenditure for a *depreciating asset in an income year under section 245-155 or 245-157.

The asset’s *cost is reduced for that income year by the debt forgiveness amount.

The asset’s *opening adjustable value for that income year is reduced by the debt forgiveness amount if that income year is later than the one in which its *start time occurs.

40-95 Choice of determining effective life

You must choose either:

to use an *effective life determined by the Commissioner for a depreciating asset under section 40-100; or

to work out the effective life of the asset yourself under section 40-105.

Note: If you choose to use an effective life determined by the Commissioner for a depreciating asset, a capped life may apply to the asset under section 40-102.

Your choice of an *effective life determined by the Commissioner for a depreciating asset is limited to one in force as at:

the time when you entered into a contract to acquire the asset, you otherwise acquired it or you started to construct it if its *start time occurs within 5 years of that time; or

for plant that you entered into a contract to acquire, you otherwise acquired or you started to construct before 11.45 am, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 21 September 1999—the time when you entered into the contract to acquire it, otherwise acquired it or started to construct it; or

otherwise—its *start time.

You must make the choice for the income year in which the asset’s *start time occurs.

Note: For rules about choices: see section 40-130.

Exception: asset acquired from associate

For a depreciating asset that you start to *hold where the former holder is an associate of yours and the associate has deducted or can deduct an amount for the asset under this Division, you must use:

if the associate was using the diminishing value method for the asset—the same *effective life that the associate was using; or

if the associate was using the prime cost method—an effective life equal to any period of the asset’s effective life the associate was using that is yet to elapse at the time you started to hold it.

Note: You can require the associate to tell you which effective life the associate was using: see section 40-140.

Subsection (4) does not apply to a depreciating asset if subsection (4B) or (4C) applies to the asset.

For a depreciating asset that you start to *hold if:

the former holder is an associate of yours; and

the associate has deducted or can deduct an amount for the asset under this Division; and

(c) section 40-102 applied to the asset immediately before you started to hold it because an item in the tables in subsections 40-102(4) and (5) applied to it at the relevant time (the relevant time for the associate) that applied to the associate under subsection 40-102(3); and

a different item in the tables in subsections 40-102(4) and (5) applies to the asset when you start to hold it; and

(e) the item referred to in paragraph (d) would have applied to the asset at the relevant time for the associate if the use to which the asset were put at that time were the use (the new use) to which it is put when you start to hold it;

you must use:

if the associate was using the diminishing value method for the asset—an *effective life equal to the *capped life that would have applied to the asset under subsection 40-102(4) or (5) at the relevant time for the associate if the use to which the asset were put at that time were the new use; or

if the associate was using the prime cost method—an effective life equal to the capped life that:

would have applied to the asset under subsection 40-102(4) or (5) at the relevant time for the associate if the use to which the asset were put at that time were the new use; and

is yet to elapse at the time you start to hold it.

Note 1: If paragraph (e) is not satisfied, subsection (4C) may apply to the depreciating asset.

Note 2: You can require the associate to tell you the relevant time that applied to the associate under subsection 40-102(3): see section 40-140.

For a depreciating asset that you start to *hold if:

the former holder is an associate of yours; and

the associate has deducted or can deduct an amount for the asset under this Division; and

section 40-102 applied to the asset immediately before you started to hold it; and

one of the following applies:

no item in the tables in subsections 40-102(4) and (5) applies to the asset when you start to hold it;

subsection (4B) would apply to the asset but for paragraph (e) of that subsection not being satisfied;

you must use:

if the associate was using the diminishing value method for the asset—the *effective life determined by the Commissioner for the asset under section 40-100 that the associate would have used if section 40-102 had not applied to the asset; or

if the associate was using the prime cost method—an effective life equal to any period of the effective life determined by the Commissioner for the asset under section 40-100 that:

the associate would have used if section 40-102 had not applied to the asset; and

is yet to elapse at the time you start to hold it.

Note: You can require the associate to tell you which effective life the associate would have used if section 40-102 had not applied to the asset: see section 40-140.

Exception: holder changes but user same or associate of former user

For a depreciating asset that you start to *hold where:

(a) the former holder or another entity (each of which is the former user) was using the asset at a time before you became the holder; and

while you hold the asset, the former user or an associate of the former user uses the asset;

you must use:

if the former holder was using the diminishing value method for the asset—the same *effective life that the former holder was using; or

if the former holder was using the prime cost method—an effective life equal to any period of the asset’s effective life the former holder was using that is yet to elapse at the time you started to hold it.

Subsection (5) does not apply to a depreciating asset if subsection (5B) or (5C) applies to the asset.

For a depreciating asset that you start to *hold if:

paragraphs (5)(a) and (b) apply; and

(b) section 40-102 applied to the asset immediately before you started to hold it because an item in the tables in subsections 40-102(4) and (5) applied to it at the relevant time (the relevant time for the former holder) that applied to the former holder under subsection 40-102(3); and

a different item in the tables in subsections 40-102(4) and (5) applies to the asset when you start to hold it; and

(d) the item referred to in paragraph (c) would have applied to the asset at the relevant time for the former holder if the use to which the asset were put at that time were the use (the new use) to which it is put when you start to hold it;

you must use:

if the former holder was using the diminishing value method for the asset—an *effective life equal to the *capped life that would have applied to the asset under subsection 40-102(4) or (5) at the relevant time for the former holder if the use to which the asset were put at that time were the new use; or

if the former holder was using the prime cost method—an effective life equal to the capped life that:

would have applied to the asset under subsection 40-102(4) or (5) at the relevant time for the former holder if the use to which the asset were put at that time were the new use; and

is yet to elapse at the time you start to hold it.

Note: If paragraph (d) is not satisfied, subsection (5C) may apply to the depreciating asset.

For a depreciating asset that you start to *hold if:

paragraphs (5)(a) and (b) apply; and

section 40-102 applied to the asset immediately before you started to hold it; and

one of the following applies:

no item in the tables in subsections 40-102(4) and (5) applies to the asset when you start to hold it;

subsection (5B) would apply to the asset but for paragraph (d) of that subsection not being satisfied;

you must use:

if the former holder was using the diminishing value method for the asset—the *effective life determined by the Commissioner for the asset under section 40-100 that the former holder would have used if section 40-102 had not applied to the asset; or

if the former holder was using the prime cost method—an effective life equal to any period of the effective life determined by the Commissioner for the asset under section 40-100 that:

the former holder would have used if section 40-102 had not applied to the asset; and

is yet to elapse at the time you start to hold it.

However, you must use an *effective life determined by the Commissioner if:

you do not know, and cannot readily find out, which effective life the former holder was using and, if subsection (5B) or (5C) applied to the asset, either of the following matters:

the effective life the former holder would have used if section 40-102 had not applied to the asset;

the relevant time that applied to the former holder under subsection 40-102(3); or

the former holder did not use an effective life.

Exception: intangible depreciating assets

(7) The effective life of an intangible *depreciating asset mentioned in this table is the period applicable to that asset under the table.

(8) The effective life of an intangible *depreciating asset that is not mentioned in the table in subsection (7) and is not an *IRU or a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right cannot be longer than the term of the asset as extended by any reasonably assured extension or renewal of that term.

(9) The effective life of an *IRU is the *effective life of the telecommunications cable over which the IRU is granted.

Exceptions: mining, quarrying or prospecting rights and mining, quarrying or prospecting information

(10) Subject to subsection (12), the effective life of:

a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; or

*mining, quarrying or prospecting information;

is the period you work out yourself by estimating the period (in years, including fractions of years) set out in column 2 of this table:

(10A) However, if the only reason that subsection 40-80(1) does not apply to the *mining, quarrying or prospecting right, or *mining, quarrying or prospecting information, is that the right or information does not meet the requirements of paragraph 40-80(1)(d) or (e), the effective life of the right or information is the shorter of:

the period that would, apart from this subsection, be the effective life of the information or right under subsection (10); and

15 years.

You work out the period in subsection (10):

as from the *start time of the *mining, quarrying or prospecting right or *mining, quarrying or prospecting information; and

by reference only to the period of time over which the reserves, reasonably estimated using an appropriate accepted industry practice, are expected to be extracted from the mine, petroleum field or quarry.

(12) The effective life of a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right, or *mining, quarrying or prospecting information, is 15 years if the right or information does not relate to:

a mine or proposed mine; or

a petroleum field or proposed petroleum field; or

a quarry or proposed quarry.

40-100 Commissioner’s determination of effective life

(1) The Commissioner may make a written determination specifying the effective life of *depreciating assets. The determination may specify conditions for particular depreciating assets.

A determination may specify a day from which it takes effect for *depreciating assets specified in the determination.

A determination may operate retrospectively to a day specified in the determination if:

there was no applicable determination at that day for the depreciating asset covered by the determination; or

the determination specifies a shorter *effective life for the depreciating asset covered by the determination than was previously applicable.

Criteria for making a determination

(4) The Commissioner is to make a determination of the effective life of a *depreciating asset in accordance with subsections (5) and (6).

Firstly, estimate the period (in years, including fractions of years) the asset can be used by any entity for one or more of the following purposes:

a taxable purpose;

the purpose of producing exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income;

the purpose of conducting *R&D activities, assuming that this is reasonably likely.

Secondly, if relevant for the asset:

assume the asset will be subject to wear and tear at a rate that is reasonable for the Commissioner to assume; and

assume the asset will be maintained in reasonably good order and condition; and

have regard to the period within which the asset is likely to be scrapped, sold for no more than scrap value or abandoned.

However, for paragraph (c), disregard reasons attributable to the technical risk in conducting *R&D activities if it is reasonably likely that the asset will be used for such activities.

40-102 Capped life of certain depreciating assets

(1) If this section applies to a *depreciating asset, the effective life of the asset is the period (the capped life) that applies to the asset under subsection (4) or (5) at the relevant time (which is worked out using subsection (3)).

Working out if this section applies

This section applies to a depreciating asset if:

you choose, under paragraph 40-95(1)(a), to use an *effective life determined by the Commissioner for the asset under section 40-100; and

your choice is limited to a determination in force at the time mentioned in paragraph 40-95(2)(a) or (c); and

a *capped life applies to the asset under subsection (4) or (5) at the relevant time (which is worked out using subsection (3)); and

the capped life is shorter than the effective life mentioned in paragraph (a).

For the purposes of this section, the relevant time is:

the *start time of the depreciating asset if:

paragraph 40-95(2)(c) applies to you; or

paragraph 40-95(2)(a) applies to you and a *capped life does not apply to the asset under subsection (4) or (5) at the time mentioned in that paragraph; or

paragraph 40-95(2)(a) applies to you and the capped life that applies to the asset under subsection (4) or (5) at the time mentioned in that paragraph is longer than the capped life that applies to the asset at its start time; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply—the time mentioned in paragraph 40-95(2)(a).

Capped life

(4) If the *depreciating asset corresponds exactly to the description in column 2 of the table, the capped life of the asset is the period specified in column 3 of the table.

Item 10 of the table in subsection 40-102(4) does not apply to a vessel if:

ordinary income that you *derive, or your statutory income, in relation to the vessel; or

ordinary income that your associate derives, or your associate’s statutory income, in relation to the vessel;

is exempt from income tax under section 51-100 for the income year for which you are working out the vessel’s decline in value.

(5) If the *depreciating asset is of a kind described in column 2 of the table and is used in the industry specified in column 3 of the table for the asset, the capped life of the asset is the period specified in column 4 of the table.

40-103 Effective life and remaining effective life of certain vessels

If, at a particular time, item 10 of the table in subsection 40-102(4):

starts to apply to a vessel (whether or not that item has previously applied to the vessel); or

ceases to apply to a vessel (whether or not that item subsequently applies to the vessel);

at that time the effective life of the vessel changes accordingly.

(2) If subsection (1) applies and the decline in value of the vessel is worked out using the *prime cost method, the remaining effective life of the vessel just after that time is:

where:

alternative effective life is:

if that item starts to apply to the vessel at that time—what would have been the *effective life of the vessel just before that time if that item had applied to the vessel; or

if that item ceases to apply to the vessel at that time—what would have been the effective life of the vessel just before that time if that item had not applied to the vessel.

unadjusted effective life is what was the *effective life of the vessel just before that time.

unadjusted remaining effective life is what was the *remaining effective life of the vessel just before that time.

The remaining effective life of the vessel just before that item ceases to apply to the vessel is 3 years. Its alternative effective life is 20 years, and its unadjusted effective life is 10 years. Its remaining effective life just after that time is therefore 6 years.

The remaining effective life of the vessel just before that item again starts to apply to the vessel is 2 years. Its alternative effective life is 10 years, and its unadjusted effective life is 20 years. Its remaining effective life just after that time is therefore 1 year.

Example: Assume that item 10 of the table in subsection 40-102(4) ceases to apply to a vessel after having applied to the vessel for 7 years, and again starts to apply after another 4 years. Assume further that the effective life of a vessel of that kind has been determined under section 40-100 to be 20 years.

40-105 Self-assessing effective life

(1) You work out the effective life of a *depreciating asset yourself in accordance with this section.

Firstly, estimate the period (in years, including fractions of years) the asset can be used by any entity for one or more of the following purposes:

a taxable purpose;

the purpose of producing exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income;

the purpose of conducting *R&D activities, assuming that this is reasonably likely.

Secondly, if relevant for the asset:

have regard to the wear and tear you reasonably expect from your expected circumstances of use; and

assume that the asset will be maintained in reasonably good order and condition.

If, in working out that period, you decide that the asset would be likely to be:

scrapped; or

sold for no more than scrap value or abandoned;

before the end of that period, its effective life ends at the earlier time. However, when making your decision, disregard reasons attributable to the technical risk in conducting *R&D activities if it is reasonably likely that the asset will be used for such activities.

You work out the period mentioned in subsection (1A) or (2) beginning at the *start time of the depreciating asset.

Exception: intangibles

This section does not apply to the following intangible *depreciating assets:

assets to which an item in the table in subsection 40-95(7) applies;

*mining, quarrying or prospecting rights;

*mining, quarrying or prospecting information.

40-110 Recalculating effective life

You may choose to recalculate the *effective life of a depreciating asset from a later income year if the effective life you have been using is no longer accurate because of changed circumstances relating to the nature of the use of the asset.

Example: Some examples of changes in circumstances that may result in your recalculating the effective life of a depreciating asset are:

• your use of the asset turns out to be more or less rigorous than you expected (or was anticipated by the Commissioner’s determination);

• there is a downturn in demand for the goods or services the asset is used to produce that will result in the asset being scrapped;

• legislation prevents the asset’s continued use;

• changes in technology make the asset redundant;

• there is an unexpected demand, or lack of success, for a film.

You must recalculate a depreciating asset’s *effective life from a later income year if:

you:

self-assessed its effective life; or

are using an effective life worked out under section 40-100 (about the Commissioner’s determination), or 40-102 (about the capped life of certain depreciating assets), and the prime cost method; or

are using an effective life because of subsection 40-95(4), (4B), (4C), (5), (5B) or (5C); and

its *cost is increased in that year by at least 10%.

Note 1: You may conclude that the effective life is the same.

Note 2: For the elements of the cost of a depreciating asset, see Subdivision 40-C.

Example 1: Paul purchases a photocopier and self-assesses its effective life at 6 years. In a later year he incurs expenditure to increase the quality of the reproductions it makes. He recalculates its effective life, but concludes that it remains the same.

Example 2: Fiona also purchases a photocopier and self-assesses its effective life at 6 years. In a later year she incurs expenditure to incorporate a more robust paper handling system. She recalculates its effective life, and concludes that it is increased to 7 years.

You must recalculate a depreciating asset’s *effective life for the income year in which you started to *hold it if:

you are using an effective life because of subsection 40-95(4), (4B), (4C), (5), (5B) or (5C); and

the asset’s *cost is increased after you started to hold it in that year by at least 10%.

Subsections (1), (2) and (3) do not apply to a depreciating asset that is a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right or *mining, quarrying or prospecting information.

You may choose to recalculate the *effective life of a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right, or *mining, quarrying or prospecting information, from a later income year if the effective life you have been using is no longer accurate:

because of changed circumstances relating to an existing or proposed mine, petroleum field or quarry to which that right or information relates; or

because that right or information now relates to an existing or proposed mine, petroleum field or quarry; or

because that right or information no longer relates to an existing or proposed mine, petroleum field or quarry.

A recalculation under this section must be done using:

if paragraph (b) does not apply—section 40-105 (about self-assessing effective life); or

if the depreciating asset is a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right or *mining, quarrying or prospecting information:

subsections 40-95(10) and (11) (if the right or information relates to an existing or proposed mine, petroleum field or quarry); or

subsection 40-95(12) (if the right or information no longer relates to an existing or proposed mine, petroleum field or quarry).

Exception: intangibles

This section does not apply to an intangible depreciating asset to which an item in the table in subsection 40-95(7) applies.

40-115 Splitting a depreciating asset

If a depreciating asset you *hold is split into 2 or more assets, this Division applies as if you had stopped holding the original asset and started holding the assets into which it is split.

Note 1: For the cost of the split assets, see section 40-205.

Note 2: A balancing adjustment event does not occur just because you split a depreciating asset: see section 40-295.

If you stop *holding part of a depreciating asset, this Division applies as if, just before you stopped holding that part, you had split the original asset into the part you stopped holding and the rest of the original asset. (The rest of the original asset is then taken to be a different asset from the original asset.)

Example: Bronwyn sells Tim a part interest in a depreciating asset she owns. They become joint holders under section 40-35. She is taken to have split the underlying asset into the interest she retains and the interest Tim buys. She now holds an interest (a new depreciating asset) in the underlying asset and is taken to have stopped holding the interest sold.

If you grant or assign an interest in an item of *intellectual property, subsection (2) applies to you as if you had stopped *holding part of the item.

40-120 Replacement spectrum licences

If:

some (but not all) of a spectrum licence you *hold is assigned or resumed; and

your original licence is replaced by one or more other spectrum licences (possibly including a modified version of your original licence); and

the replacement licences together cover exactly the same rights as were covered by your original licence just after the assignment or resumption;

this Division applies as if your original licence (as it existed just after the assignment or resumption) had been split into the replacement licences.

The Australian Communications and Media Authority adjusts the licence to specify only areas A and B, and issues a new licence specifying area D.

Area D represents 25% of the market value of the spectrum remaining in the licence. The adjustable value of the new licence is therefore $1m and the adjustable value of the original (modified) licence is $3m.

Example: MGP Communications Ltd buys a spectrum licence on 1 July 2003 for $5 million. The licence specifies areas A, B, C and D. The company assigns the spectrum relating to area C. Area C represents 20% of the market value of the overall licence. $1m of the adjustable value is allocated to it and $4m is allocated to the remaining licence.

If a spectrum licence you *hold is replaced by 2 or more spectrum licences (possibly including a modified version of your original licence) that together cover exactly the same rights as your original licence, this Division applies as if the original licence had been split into the replacement licences.

40-122 Partial conversions of mining, quarrying or prospecting rights

This section applies if:

(a) a *depreciating asset you *hold is a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right (the old right) that relates to an area; and

(b) you begin to hold another depreciating asset (the partial new right) that:

is a mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and

relates to an area that is a part of the area that the old right relates to; and

the old right does not end when you begin to hold the partial new right.

This Division applies as if:

when you begin to hold the partial new right, the old right is split into:

an asset that is the partial new right; and

an asset that is the old right; and

the assets mentioned in subparagraphs (a)(i) and (ii) are both continuations of the old right.

Note: For the cost of the split assets, see section 40-205.

40-125 Merging depreciating assets

If a depreciating asset or assets that you *hold is or are merged into another depreciating asset, this Division applies as if you had stopped holding the original asset or assets and started holding the merged asset.

Note 1: For the cost of the merged asset, see section 40-210.

Note 2: A balancing adjustment event does not occur just because you merge depreciating assets: see section 40-295.

40-130 Choices

A choice you can make under this Division about a depreciating asset must be made:

by the day you lodge your income tax return for the income year to which the choice relates; or

within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

Your choice, once made, applies to that income year and all later income years.

Exception: recalculating effective life

However, subsection (2) does not apply to a choice to recalculate the *effective life of a depreciating asset under section 40-110.

40-135 Certain anti-avoidance provisions

These anti-avoidance provisions:

(a) section 51AD (Deductions not allowable in respect of property under certain leveraged arrangements) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

Division 16D (Certain arrangements relating to the use of property) of Part III of that Act;

apply to your deductions under this Division for a depreciating asset you *hold as if you were the owner of the asset instead of any other person.

40-140 Getting tax information from associates

If you acquire a depreciating asset from an associate of yours where the associate has deducted or can deduct an amount for the asset under this Division, you may give the associate a written notice requiring the associate to tell you:

the method the associate was using to work out the decline in value of the asset; and

the *effective life the associate was using; and

if section 40-102 applied to the asset at any time:

the effective life that the associate would have used if section 40-102 had not applied to the asset; and

the relevant time that applied to the associate under subsection 40-102(3).

The notice must:

be given within 60 days of your acquiring the asset; and

specify a period of at least 60 days within which the information must be given; and

set out the effect of subsection (3).

Note: Subsections (4) and (5) explain how this subsection operates if the associate is a partnership.

Requirement to comply with notice

The associate must not intentionally refuse or fail to comply with the notice.

Penalty: 10 penalty units.

Giving the notice to a partnership

If the associate is a partnership:

you may give it to the partnership by giving it to any of the partners (this does not limit how else you can give it); and

the obligation to comply with the notice is imposed on each of the partners (not on the partnership), but may be discharged by any of them.

A partner must not intentionally refuse or fail to comply with that obligation, unless another partner has already complied with it.

Penalty: 10 penalty units.

Limits on giving a notice

Only one notice can be given in relation to the same depreciating asset.

Subdivision 40-C — Cost

Guide to Subdivision 40-C

40-170 What this Subdivision is about

Your cost of a depreciating asset is a component in working out the amounts you can deduct for it.

There are 2 elements of the cost of a depreciating asset. This Subdivision shows you how to work out those elements.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-175 Cost

40-180 First element of cost

40-185 Amount you are taken to have paid to hold a depreciating asset or to receive a benefit

40-190 Second element of cost

40-195 Apportionment of cost

40-200 Exclusion from cost

40-205 Cost of a split depreciating asset

40-210 Cost of merged depreciating assets

40-215 Adjustment: double deduction

40-217 Cost of partial continuations of mining, quarrying or prospecting rights

40-220 Cost reduced by amounts not of a capital nature

40-222 Cost reduced by water infrastructure improvement expenditure

40-225 Adjustment: acquiring a car at a discount

40-230 Adjustment: car limit

40-235 Adjustment: National Disability Insurance Scheme costs

Operative provisions

40-175 Cost

The cost of a *depreciating asset you *hold consists of 2 elements.

• Subdivision 27-B;

• subsection 40-90(2);

• paragraph 40-362(3)(c);

• paragraph 40-365(5)(a);

• section 40-1110;

• section 775-70;

• section 775-75.

Note: The cost of a depreciating asset may be modified by one of these provisions:

40-180 First element of cost

The first element is worked out as at the time when you began to *hold the depreciating asset (except for a case to which item 3, 4 or 14 of the table in subsection (2) applies). It is:

if an item in that table applies—the amount specified in that item; or

otherwise—the amount you are taken to have paid to hold the asset under section 40-185.

Note 1: The first element of the cost may be modified by a later provision in this Subdivision.

Note 2: Section 230-505 provides special rules for working out the amount of consideration for an asset if the asset is a Division 230 financial arrangement or a Division 230 financial arrangement is involved in that consideration.

If more than one item in this table covers the asset, apply the last item that covers it.

The first element of *cost includes an amount you paid or are taken to have paid in relation to starting to *hold the depreciating asset if that amount is directly connected with holding the asset.

The first element of *cost of a depreciating asset does not include an amount that forms part of the second element of cost of another depreciating asset.

Note: The first element of cost may be reduced under section 40-1130 to account for exploration benefits received under farm-in farm-out arrangements.

40-185 Amount you are taken to have paid to hold a depreciating asset or to receive a benefit

This Division applies to you as if you had paid, to *hold a depreciating asset or for an economic benefit for such an asset, the greater of these amounts:

the sum of the amounts that would have been included in your assessable income because you started to hold the asset or received the benefit, or because you gave something to start holding the asset or receive the benefit, if you ignored the value of anything you gave that reduced the amount actually included; or

the sum of the applicable amounts set out in this table in relation to holding the asset or receiving the benefit.

Example 1: Gold Medals Ltd manufactures some medals for a local sporting association’s annual meeting in return for a die cut stamping machine. The medals have a market value of $20,000. The machine has an arm’s length value of $100,000 but Gold Medals has to contribute $75,000 towards acquiring it from the association. Gold Medals will have to include:

in its assessable income because of section 21A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The first element of the machine’s cost will be the greater of:

• the amount it paid ($75,000) plus the market value of the non-cash benefits it provided ($20,000), which comes to $95,000; and

• the amount that was assessable income from receiving the machine ($25,000) plus the amount by which that assessable income was reduced because of the payment Gold Medals made ($75,000), which comes to $100,000.

So, in this case, the first element of the machine’s cost to Gold Medals is $100,000.

Example 2: Laura travels overseas to purchase a purpose-built vehicle for use in her trade. The purchase of the vehicle is the sole reason for the trip. Laura incurs expenses for airfares and accommodation. These expenses are included in the cost of the vehicle because they are “in relation to starting to hold” the vehicle.

Note 1: Item 1 includes not only amounts actually paid but also amounts taken to have been paid. Examples include the price of the notional purchase made when trading stock is converted to a depreciating asset under section 70-110, the cost of an asset held under a hire purchase arrangement under section 240-25 and a lessor’s deemed purchase price when a luxury car lease ends under subsection 242-90(3).

Note 2: Section 230-505 provides special rules for working out the amount of consideration for an asset if the asset is a Division 230 financial arrangement or a Division 230 financial arrangement is involved in that consideration.

In applying the table in subsection (1) to a liability of yours to pay an amount or provide a *non-cash benefit, don’t count any part of the liability you have already satisfied.

40-190 Second element of cost

The second element is worked out after you start to *hold the depreciating asset.

The second element is:

the amount you are taken to have paid under section 40-185 for each economic benefit that has contributed to bringing the asset to its present condition and location from time to time since you started to *hold the asset; and

expenditure you incur that is reasonably attributable to a balancing adjustment event occurring for the asset.

Example 1: Andrew adds a new tray and canopy to his ute. The materials and labour that go into the addition are economic benefits that Andrew received and that contribute to the ute’s present condition.

The payments he makes for those economic benefits are included in the second element of the ute’s cost.

Example 2: Leonie needed to replace one of her old depreciating assets that was fixed to her land with a new, more efficient one. Leonie paid a contractor a fee to demolish and remove the old asset. This resulted in a balancing adjustment event occurring for the old asset, and the fee forms part of the second element of the cost of the old asset that was demolished.

Note: The second element of the cost may be modified by a later provision in this Subdivision.

Paragraph (2)(b) does not apply to a balancing adjustment event referred to in item 6 or 11 of the table in subsection 40-300(2).

However, the second element is worked out using this table if an item in it applies. Use the last applicable item.

40-195 Apportionment of cost

If you pay an amount for 2 or more things that include at least one depreciating asset, or that include a contribution to bringing a depreciating asset to its present condition and location, you take into account as part of its *cost only that part of what you paid that is reasonably attributable to the asset.

The first element of the depreciating asset’s cost is $25,000.

Example: Ian buys 3 assets (one depreciating asset and 2 other assets) under the one transaction. He pays $30,000 for the 3 assets. $25,000 of that amount is reasonably attributable to the depreciating asset.

40-200 Exclusion from cost

The *cost of a depreciating asset that is not plant does not include any amount that was incurred:

before 1 July 2001; or

under a contract entered into before that day.

40-205 Cost of a split depreciating asset

If you split a *depreciating asset into separate assets as mentioned in section 40-115, the first element of the cost of each of the separate assets is a reasonable proportion of the sum of these amounts:

the *adjustable value of the original asset just before it was split; and

the amount you are taken to have paid under section 40-185 for any economic benefit involved in splitting the original asset.

Example: Barry owns a spectrum licence that covers 3 areas: Area A, area B and area C. The licence has an adjustable value of $160,000. He sells area A to Chris, and his costs of splitting are $10,000. Barry is taken to have split the licence into 2 assets.

On the basis of their relative market values, Barry apportions $170,000 to area A (that he disposed of) and to the licence he still holds for areas B and C.

40-210 Cost of merged depreciating assets

If a *depreciating asset or assets that you *hold is or are merged into another depreciating asset as mentioned in section 40-125, the first element of the cost of the merged asset is a reasonable proportion of the sum of:

the *adjustable value or adjustable values of the original asset or assets just before the merger; and

the amount you are taken to have paid under section 40-185 for any economic benefit involved in merging the original asset or assets.

40-215 Adjustment: double deduction

Each element of the *cost of a depreciating asset is reduced by any portion of that element of cost that you have deducted or can deduct, or that has been or will be taken into account in working out an amount you can deduct, other than under this Division, Division 41 or Division 328.

Note: This section does not apply to notional deductions under section 355-305 or 355-520 (about R&D) because those provisions are about deducting the asset’s decline in value, not its cost.

40-217 Cost of partial continuations of mining, quarrying or prospecting rights

If:

(a) because of subsection 40-30(6), this Division applies to a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right (the new right) as if it were a continuation of another mining, quarrying or prospecting right you *held; and

the new right satisfies the condition in subparagraph (b)(ii) of that subsection because it relates to an area that is a part of the area that the other right relates to;

the first element of the cost of the new right is a reasonable proportion of the *adjustable value of other right at the time just before the other right ends.

40-220 Cost reduced by amounts not of a capital nature

The *cost of a depreciating asset is reduced by any portion of it that consists of an amount that is not of a capital nature.

40-222 Cost reduced by water infrastructure improvement expenditure

The *cost of a depreciating asset is reduced by any portion of it that consists of expenditure that you cannot deduct because of section 26-100.

40-225 Adjustment: acquiring a car at a discount

(1) You must increase the first element of the cost of a *car designed mainly for carrying passengers you acquire at a discount if:

(a) it is reasonable to conclude that any portion (the discount portion) of the discount is referable to you or another entity selling another asset for less than its *market value; and

you, or another entity, has deducted or can deduct an amount for the other asset for any income year; and

the sum of the cost of the car and the discount portion exceeds the car limit for the financial year in which you first use the car for any purpose.

(2) The first element of the cost of the *car is increased by the discount portion.

This section does not apply to a car that is excluded from the car limit by subsection 40-230(2).

40-230 Adjustment: car limit

(1) The first element of the cost of a *car designed mainly for carrying passengers (after applying section 40-225 and Subdivision 27-B) is reduced to the *car limit for the *financial year in which you started to *hold it if its cost exceeds that limit.

However, the car limit does not apply to a car:

fitted out for transporting disabled people in wheelchairs for profit; or

whose first element of *cost exceeds that limit only because of modifications made to enable an individual with a disability to use it for a taxable purpose.

(3) The car limit for the 2000-01 *financial year is $55,134. The limit is indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.

If you *hold a car that is also held by one or more other entities, subsection (1) applies to the *cost of the car despite section 40-35. Then section 40-35 applies to the cost of the car as reduced under subsection (1).

40-235 Adjustment: National Disability Insurance Scheme costs

The *cost of a depreciating asset does not include an amount to the extent that section 26-97 prevents the amount from being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).

Note: Section 26-97 denies deductions for National Disability Insurance Scheme expenditure.

Subdivision 40-D — Balancing adjustments

Guide to Subdivision 40-D

40-280 What this Subdivision is about

You may have to make an adjustment to your taxable income if you stop holding a depreciating asset.

The adjustment is generally based on the difference between the actual value of the asset when you stop holding it and its adjustable value.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-285 Balancing adjustments

40-290 Reduction for non-taxable use

40-291 Reduction for second-hand assets used in residential property

40-291A Fixed reduction for certain assets used to produce assessable labour income

40-292 Adjustments—assets used for both general tax purposes and R&D activities

40-293 Adjustments—partnership assets used for both general tax purposes and R&D activities

40-295 Meaning of balancing adjustment event

40-300 Meaning of termination value

40-305 Amount you are taken to have received under a balancing adjustment event

40-310 Apportionment of termination value

40-320 Car to which section 40-225 applies

40-325 Adjustment: car limit

40-335 Deduction for in-house software where you will never use it

40-340 Roll-over relief

40-345 What the roll-over relief is

40-350 Additional consequences

40-360 Notice to allow transferee to work out how this Division applies

40-362 Roll-over relief for holders of vessels covered by certificates under the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012

40-363 Roll-over relief for interest realignment arrangements

40-364 Interest realignment adjustments

40-365 Involuntary disposals

40-370 Balancing adjustments where there has been use of different car expense methods

Operative provisions

40-285 Balancing adjustments

An amount is included in your assessable income if:

a balancing adjustment event occurs for a depreciating asset you *held and:

whose decline in value you worked out under Subdivision 40-B; or

whose decline in value you would have worked out under that Subdivision if you had used the asset; and

the asset’s termination value is more than its *adjustable value just before the event occurred.

The amount included is the difference between those amounts, and it is included for the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred.

Note 1: The most common balancing adjustment event is where you sell the depreciating asset.

Note 2: There is a different calculation if you had used different car expense methods for a car: see section 40-370.

Note 3: There is a modification to the calculation in the case of misappropriation by your employee or agent: see section 25-47.

You can deduct an amount if:

a balancing adjustment event occurs for a depreciating asset you *held and:

whose decline in value you worked out under Subdivision 40-B; or

whose decline in value you would have worked out under that Subdivision if you had used the asset; and

the asset’s termination value is less than its *adjustable value just before the event occurred.

The amount you can deduct is the difference between those amounts, and you can deduct it for the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred.

Note 1: There is a different calculation if you had used different car expense methods for a car: see section 40-370.

Note 2: The timing of a deduction allowed under this subsection is determined under Subdivision 170-D where that Subdivision applies to the balancing adjustment event.

Note 3: There is a modification to the calculation in the case of misappropriation by your employee or agent: see section 25-47.

The *adjustable value of a depreciating asset you *hold after this section applies to it is then zero.

(4) However, subsection (3) does not apply to a *depreciating asset for which you have a *cost under item 3, 4 or 14 of the table in subsection 40-180(2). Instead, the asset’s *opening adjustable value for the income year (the later year) after the one in which the *balancing adjustment event occurred is that cost plus any amounts included in the second element of that cost after the event occurred and before the start of the later year.

Note: Those items deal with a case where a balancing adjustment event happens even though you still hold the asset in question.

Despite subsection (1), an amount included in your assessable income under that subsection is included for the second income year after the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurs if:

the depreciating asset is a vessel; and

(b) you have a certificate for the vessel under Part 2 of the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012 that:

applies to the day that the balancing adjustment event occurs; and

is not a shipping exempt income certificate.

Note: An amount will not be included in your assessable income in relation to the balancing adjustment event if you choose roll-over relief under section 40-362.

40-290 Reduction for non-taxable use

(1) You must reduce the amount (the balancing adjustment amount) included in your assessable income, or the amount you can deduct, under section 40-285 for a *depreciating asset if your deductions for the asset have been reduced under section 40-25.

Note: You may instead choose a fixed reduction for certain depreciating assets that have been used to produce your assessable labour income: see section 40-291A.

The reduction is:

where:

sum of reductions is the sum of:

the reductions in your deductions for the asset under section 40-25; and

if there has been roll-over relief for the asset under section 40-340—the reductions in deductions for the asset for the transferor or an earlier successive transferor under section 40-25; and

if you *hold the asset as the *legal personal representative of an individual—the reductions in deductions for the asset for the individual under section 40-25.

total decline is the sum of:

the decline in value of the depreciating asset since you started to *hold it; and

if there has been roll-over relief for the asset under section 40-340—the decline in value of the asset for the transferor or an earlier successive transferor; and

if you *hold the asset as the *legal personal representative of an individual—the decline in value of the asset for the individual.

(3) You must further reduce the amount included in your assessable income, or the amount you can deduct, under section 40-285 for a *depreciating asset (the current asset) if:

the asset’s *cost (for you) was worked out under section 40-205 (Cost of a split depreciating asset) or 40-210 (Cost of merged depreciating assets); and

you used the depreciating asset from which the current asset was split, or a depreciating asset that was merged into the current asset, or had it installed ready for use, for a purpose other than a taxable purpose.

The further reduction is such amount as is reasonable having regard to the extent of the use referred to in paragraph (3)(b).

Exception: mining, quarrying or prospecting information

This section does not apply to *mining, quarrying or prospecting information.

40-291 Reduction for second-hand assets used in residential property

(1) In addition to section 40-290, you must reduce the amount (the balancing adjustment amount) included in your assessable income, or that you can deduct, under section 40-285 for a *depreciating asset if your deductions for the asset have been reduced under section 40-27.

Note: You may instead choose a fixed reduction for certain depreciating assets that have been used to produce your assessable labour income: see section 40-291A.

The reduction is the following, as increased under subsection (3) if applicable:

where:

sum of section 40-27 reductions is the sum of:

the reductions in your deductions for the asset under section 40-27; and

if there has been roll-over relief for the asset under section 40-340—the reductions in deductions for the asset for the transferor or an earlier successive transferor under section 40-27; and

if you *hold the asset as the *legal personal representative of an individual—the reductions in deductions for the asset for the individual under section 40-27.

total decline is the sum of:

the decline in value of the depreciating asset since you started to *hold it; and

if there has been roll-over relief for the asset under section 40-340—the decline in value of the asset for the transferor or an earlier successive transferor; and

if you hold the asset as the *legal personal representative of an individual—the decline in value of the asset for the individual.

If:

(a) the *cost (for you) of the asset (the current asset) was worked out under section 40-205 (Cost of a split depreciating asset) or 40-210 (Cost of merged depreciating assets); and

you used the depreciating asset from which the current asset was split, or a depreciating asset that was merged into the current asset, or had it installed ready for use, for the purpose to which paragraphs 40-27(2)(a) and (b) relate;

the reduction includes an increase equal to such amount as is reasonable having regard to the extent of the use referred to in paragraph (b) of this subsection.

40-291A Fixed reduction for certain assets used to produce assessable labour income

(1) Instead of a reduction under section 40-290 or 40-291, you may reduce, by a fixed amount, the amount (the balancing adjustment amount) included in your assessable income, or the amount you can deduct, under section 40-285 for a *depreciating asset if:

the depreciating asset has been used at any time for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable labour income; and

you have deducted an amount under section 25-130 for an income year (whether the income year in which the balancing adjustment event that gave rise to the balancing adjustment amount occurred or another income year); and

the *effective life of the depreciating asset overlaps, wholly or partly, with that income year.

The amount of the reduction is 50% of the balancing adjustment amount.

40-292 Adjustments—assets used for both general tax purposes and R&D activities

This section applies if:

(a) a *balancing adjustment event happens in an income year (the event year) for an asset you *held and for which:

(i) you can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

you could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if you had used the asset; and

(b) you are entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R&D deductions) under section 355-305 for the asset.

Note 1: This section applies in a modified way if you have deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-292 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Note 2: To the extent that any amount is included in your assessable income under section 40-285 in relation to R&D activities, you may have an additional amount included in your assessable income (see section 355-447).

Note 3: To the extent any amount that you are entitled to as a deduction under section 40-285 relates to R&D activities, you may have an additional amount you can deduct (see section 355-466).

Section 40-290 to be applied as if use for conducting R&D activities were use for a taxable purpose

In applying section 40-290 (including references in that section to the reduction of deductions under section 40-25) in relation to the asset, assume that using the asset for a taxable purpose includes using it for the purpose of conducting the *R&D activities to which the R&D deductions relate.

40-293 Adjustments—partnership assets used for both general tax purposes and R&D activities

This section applies to an *R&D partnership if:

(a) a *balancing adjustment event happens in an income year (the event year) for a *depreciating asset *held by the R&D partnership and for which:

(i) the R&D partnership can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

the R&D partnership could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if it had used the asset; and

(b) one or more partners of the R&D partnership are entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R&D deductions) under section 355-520 for the asset.

Note 1: This section applies in a modified way if the partners have deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-293 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Note 2: To the extent any amount that is included in the R&D partnership’s assessable income under section 40-285 relates to R&D activities, a partner may have an additional amount included in the partner’s assessable income (see section 355-449).

Note 3: To the extent any amount that the R&D partnership is entitled to as a deduction under section 40-285 relates to R&D activities, a partner may have an additional amount the partner can deduct (see section 355-468).

Section 40-290 to be applied as if use for conducting R&D activities were use for a taxable purpose

In applying section 40-290 (including references in that section to the reduction of deductions under section 40-25) in relation to the asset, assume that using the asset for a taxable purpose includes using it for the purpose of conducting the *R&D activities to which the R&D deductions relate.

40-295 Meaning of balancing adjustment event

(1) A balancing adjustment event occurs for a *depreciating asset if:

you stop *holding the asset; or

you stop using it, or having it installed ready for use, for any purpose and you expect never to use it, or have it installed ready for use, again; or

you have not used it and:

if you have had it installed ready for use—you stop having it so installed; and

you decide never to use it.

Note: A balancing adjustment event occurs under paragraph 40-295(1)(a) when you start holding a depreciating asset as trading stock.

(1A) A balancing adjustment event occurs for a *depreciating asset you *hold that is a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right, or *mining, quarrying or prospecting information, if:

the only reason that subsection 40-80(1) does not apply to the right or information is that the right or information does not meet the requirements of paragraph 40-80(1)(d) or (e); and

you have neither budgeted nor planned for further expenditure that:

will relate to the tenement to which the right or information relates; and

will exceed the minimum expenditure required to maintain the tenement; and

you choose to apply this subsection to the right or information.

(1B) A balancing adjustment event occurs for a *depreciating asset you *hold that is a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right, or *mining, quarrying or prospecting information, if:

since the last time you commenced to hold the right or information, a balancing adjustment event occurred, because of subsection (1A), to the right or information; and

paragraph (1A)(b) no longer applies.

(2) A balancing adjustment event occurs for a *depreciating asset if:

for any reason, a change occurs in the *holding of, or in the interests of entities in, the asset; and

the entity or one of the entities that had an interest in the asset before the change has an interest in it after the change; and

the asset was a partnership asset before the change or becomes one as a result of the change.

(3) However, a balancing adjustment event does not occur for a *depreciating asset merely because you split it into 2 or more depreciating assets or you merge it with one or more other depreciating assets.

Note: A balancing adjustment event will occur if you stop holding part of a depreciating asset.

40-300 Meaning of termination value

(1) The termination value of a *depreciating asset is worked out as at the time when the *balancing adjustment event occurs. It is:

if an item in the table in subsection (2) applies—the amount specified in that item; or

otherwise—the amount you are taken to have received under section 40-305 for the asset.

Note: Section 230-505 provides special rules for working out the amount of consideration for an asset if the asset is a Division 230 financial arrangement or a Division 230 financial arrangement is involved in that consideration.

If more than one item applies, use the value under the last applicable item.

(3) The termination value of a *depreciating asset does not include an amount that is included in assessable income as *ordinary income under section 6-5 or as *statutory income under section 6-10 (except an amount that is statutory income under this Division).

Note 1: Termination value may be adjusted under Subdivision 27-B so that any GST consequences are accounted for.

Note 2: Termination value may be reduced under section 40-1105 to account for exploration benefits received under farm-in farm-out arrangements.

40-305 Amount you are taken to have received under a balancing adjustment event

This Division applies to you as if you had received, under a balancing adjustment event, the greater of these amounts:

the sum of the amounts you have deducted or can deduct, or has been or will be taken into account in working out an amount you can deduct because of the balancing adjustment event and any amount by which the amount so deductible was reduced because of a case described in the table in this subsection; and

the sum of the applicable amounts set out in that table:

Note 1: Item 1 includes not only amounts actually received but also amounts taken to have been received. Examples include the price of the notional sale made when a depreciating asset is converted to trading stock under section 70-30, the consideration for an asset held under a hire purchase arrangement under section 240-25 and a lessee’s deemed consideration when a luxury car lease ends under subsection 242-90(3).

Note 2: Section 230-505 provides special rules for working out the amount of consideration for an asset if the asset is a Division 230 financial arrangement or a Division 230 financial arrangement is involved in that consideration.

In applying the table in subsection (1) to a right you have to receive an amount or a *non-cash benefit, don’t count any part of the right that has already been satisfied.

40-310 Apportionment of termination value

If you receive an amount for 2 or more things that include a balancing adjustment event occurring for a depreciating asset, you take into account as its termination value only that part of what you received that is reasonably attributable to the asset.

40-320 Car to which section 40-225 applies

You must increase the termination value of a car the *cost of which was increased under section 40-225 by the discount portion for the car referred to in that section.

40-325 Adjustment: car limit

The termination value of a *car the *cost of which was worked out by applying section 40-230 (Car limit) is the amount worked out under subsection 40-300(1) multiplied by the fraction:

where:

CL is the *car limit for the *car for the *financial year in which you first used it for any purpose.

40-335 Deduction for in-house software where you will never use it

You can deduct expenditure you incurred on *in-house software if:

you incurred the expenditure with the intention of using the software for a taxable purpose; and

the expenditure relates to a unit of software that you have not used or had installed ready for use; and

the expenditure is not allocated to a software development pool (see Subdivision 40-E); and

in the current year, you have decided that you will never use the software, or have it installed ready for use.

The amount that you can deduct in the current year is:

(a) the total of your expenditure on the *in-house software in the current year and any previous income year; less

any amount of consideration you *derive in relation to the software or any part of it (but no more than the total in paragraph (a));

but only to the extent that, when you incurred the expenditure, you intended to use the software, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose.

Example: Shannon has abandoned a software project that she was working on. She could not deduct expenditure on the project for the current year or any previous income year under any other provision. Shannon can deduct it under this section, to the extent that she intended to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose.

Note: If an amount of the expenditure is recouped, the amount may be included in her assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

40-340 Roll-over relief

Automatic roll-over relief

There is roll-over relief if:

(a) there is a *balancing adjustment event because an entity (the transferor) disposes of a *depreciating asset in an income year to another entity (the transferee); and

the disposal involves a CGT event; and

the conditions in an item in this table are satisfied.

Note 1: Section 40-345 sets out what the relief is.

Note 2: This Act also applies as if there were roll-over relief under this subsection in the circumstances set out in section 620-30 (which is about a body incorporated under one law ceasing to exist and disposing of its assets to a company incorporated under another law that has not significantly different ownership).

In applying an item in the table in subsection (1), disregard the following so far as they relate to the depreciating asset you disposed of:

an exemption in Division 118 (which contains the general exemptions from CGT); and

subsection 122-25(3) (which excludes certain assets from some kinds of CGT roll-over); and

subsection 124-870(5) (which excludes certain assets from roll-over relief under Subdivision 124-N).

Choosing roll-over relief

There is also roll-over relief if:

there is a balancing adjustment event for a depreciating asset because of subsection 40-295(2) (about a change in the holding of, or in interests in, the asset); and

(b) the entity or entities that had an interest in the asset before the change (also the transferor) and the entity or entities that have an interest in the asset after the change (also the transferee) jointly choose the roll-over relief.

Example: The change could be a variation in the constitution of a partnership or in the interests of the partners.

Note 1: Section 40-345 sets out what the relief is.

Note 2: Subdivision 328-D sets out what the relief is for small business entities that calculate deductions for their depreciating assets under that Subdivision.

The choice must:

be in writing; and

contain enough information about the transferor’s holding of the property for the transferee to work out how this Division or Subdivision 328-D applies to the transferee’s holding of the depreciating asset; and

be made within 6 months after the end of the transferee’s income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred, or within a longer period allowed by the Commissioner.

If you die before the end of the time allowed for jointly choosing roll-over relief, the trustee of your estate may be a party to the choice.

The transferor must keep the choice or a copy of it for 5 years after the balancing adjustment event occurred.

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

The transferee must keep the choice or a copy of it until the end of 5 years after the next balancing adjustment event occurs for the depreciating asset.

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

Exception: Subdivision 170-D applies

There can be no roll-over relief if Subdivision 170-D (about transactions by a company that is a member of a linked group) applies to the disposal of the depreciating asset or the change in interests in it.

40-345 What the roll-over relief is

Section 40-285 does not apply to the balancing adjustment event for the transferor.

The transferee can deduct the decline in value of the depreciating asset using the same method and *effective life (or *remaining effective life if that method is the prime cost method) that the transferor was using.

40-350 Additional consequences

For the purposes of Division 45:

if the transferor, or a partnership of which the transferor was a member, leased the depreciating asset to another entity for most of the time that the transferor or partnership *held the asset, the transferee is taken also to have done so; and

if the transferor, or a partnership of which the transferor was a member, leased the asset to another entity for a period on or after 22 February 1999, the transferee is taken also to have done so; and

if the main business of the transferor, or a partnership of which the transferor was a member, was to lease assets, the main business of the transferee is taken also to have been to lease assets.

However, subsection (1) does not apply to roll-over relief under subsection 40-340(3) if the sum of the amounts specified in paragraph 45-5(1)(e) or 45-10(1)(f), or subsection 45-5(4) or 45-10(4), is at least equal to the *market value of the plant or interest concerned.

40-360 Notice to allow transferee to work out how this Division applies

This section applies if there is roll-over relief because of subsection 40-340(1).

The transferor must give the transferee a notice containing enough information about the transferor’s *holding of the property for the transferee to work out how this Division applies to the transferee’s holding of the depreciating asset.

The transferor must give the notice within 6 months after the end of the transferee’s income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred, or within a longer period allowed by the Commissioner.

The transferee must keep the notice until the end of 5 years after the earlier of these events:

the transferee disposes of the property;

the property is lost or destroyed.

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

40-362 Roll-over relief for holders of vessels covered by certificates under the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012

Circumstances giving rise to roll-over relief

There is roll-over relief if:

(a) there is a *balancing adjustment event under section 40-295 because you cease to *hold a *depreciating asset that is a vessel (the original vessel); and

(b) on the day that the balancing adjustment event occurs, you have a certificate for the vessel under Part 2 of the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012 that:

applies to that day; and

is not a shipping exempt income certificate; and

there is no roll-over relief under section 40-340 relating to the original vessel; and

(d) on the day occurring 2 years after the day you cease to hold the original vessel, you are the holder of another depreciating asset that is a vessel (the other vessel):

for which you choose to apply roll-over relief in relation to the original vessel; and

(ii) for which you have a certificate under Part 2 of the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012 (other than a shipping exempt income certificate) that applies to the day of that choice; and

you became the holder of the other vessel during the period starting 1 year before the day you cease to hold the original vessel and ending 2 years after that day.

Choosing to apply roll-over relief

The choice must:

be in writing; and

be made within 6 months after the end of the second income year after the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurs, or within a longer period allowed by the Commissioner.

The effect of roll-over relief

If there is roll-over relief under this section:

subsection 40-285(1) does not apply to the balancing adjustment event in relation to the original vessel; and

an amount is included in your assessable income if the original vessel’s termination value exceeds the sum of:

the original vessel’s *adjustable value just before the balancing adjustment event occurred; and

the *cost of the other vessel (disregarding paragraph (3)(c)); and

for the purpose of applying this Act to the other vessel, its cost is reduced (but not below zero) by the difference between:

the original vessel’s termination value; and

the original vessel’s adjustable value just before the balancing adjustment event occurred.

The amount included in your assessable income under paragraph (3)(b) is the amount of the excess mentioned in that paragraph. It is included in the second income year after the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurs.

40-363 Roll-over relief for interest realignment arrangements

Circumstances giving rise to roll-over relief

There is roll-over relief if:

there is a balancing adjustment event under section 40-295 because, in an income year, you dispose of a depreciating asset to another entity; and

the asset is a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and

the disposal occurs under an interest realignment arrangement; and

you choose to apply roll-over relief in relation to the asset.

Choosing to apply roll-over relief

The choice must:

be in writing; and

be made at or before the time you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurs, or within a longer period allowed by the Commissioner.

The effect of roll-over relief

If there is roll-over relief under this section:

section 40-285 does not apply to the balancing adjustment event in relation to the asset; and

(b) an amount is included in your assessable income if such an amount (the non-realignment amount) would have been included under subsection 40-285(1) if:

paragraph (a) of this subsection did not apply; and

the *adjustable value of the *mining, quarrying or prospecting rights that you disposed of under the arrangement were taken to be the market value of the mining, quarrying or prospecting rights that you received under the arrangement; and

in working out the *cost of a mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you receive under the arrangement, if:

some or all of the cost consists of a *non-cash benefit that you provide; and

that benefit is a mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you disposed of under the arrangement;

the market value of the benefit is taken to be the adjustable value of the benefit.

The amount included in your assessable income under paragraph (3)(b) is the non-realignment amount, and it is included for the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred.

Meaning of interest realignment arrangement etc.

(5) An interest realignment arrangement is an *arrangement:

that is entered into between entities:

that are undertaking jointly, or propose to undertake jointly, a project for carrying out mining and quarrying operations; and

that each *holds one or more *mining, quarrying or prospecting rights relating to the project; and

under which those entities exchange (or agree to exchange), with the effect set out in subsection (6), parts of those rights; and

that does not provide for any transfer, of a mining, quarrying or prospecting right, that does not give rise to the effect referred to in subsection (6).

Note: The parts referred to in paragraph (b) are themselves mining, quarrying or prospecting rights (see paragraph (c) of the definition of mining, quarrying or prospecting right in subsection 995-1(1)), and are therefore not referred to elsewhere in this Act as parts of such rights.

The effect referred to in paragraphs (5)(b) and (c) must be that, for each of those entities, the following are equal:

the entity’s percentage interest in the project;

the reserves and resources represented by the *mining, quarrying or prospecting rights that the entity *holds relating to the project, expressed as a percentage of the reserves and resources represented by all mining, quarrying or prospecting rights that any of the entities hold relating to the project.

For the purposes of subsection (6):

the reserves represented by a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right are taken to be the reserves, reasonably estimated using an appropriate accepted industry practice, that are expected to be extracted from the mine, petroleum field or quarry to which the right relates; and

the resources represented by a mining, quarrying or prospecting right are taken to be the resources, reasonably estimated using an appropriate accepted industry practice, that are expected to be situated in the area to which the right relates (other than those resources that are reserves referred to in paragraph (a)).

40-364 Interest realignment adjustments

Effect of receiving interest realignment adjustment on assessable income

(1) If you receive an *interest realignment adjustment in an income year, include in your assessable income for the year an amount (the adjustment amount) equal to:

the amount of the adjustment; or

if the adjustment is not an amount—the *market value of the adjustment.

Effect of providing interest realignment adjustment on cost, or cost base and reduced cost base

If an interest realignment adjustment is provided by you or on your behalf:

include the adjustment amount in the second element of the *cost of a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you acquired under the interest realignment arrangement to which the adjustment amount relates; or

if this Division does not apply to that right—include the adjustment amount in the *cost base and *reduced cost base of that right.

However, if you acquired more than one such right under the arrangement, apportion the adjustment amount between the costs, or cost bases and reduced cost bases, of those rights on a reasonable basis.

Tax effects of the right to an interest realignment adjustment

Note: Subsections 40-77(1D) and (1E) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 set out when this Division does not apply to the right.

In calculating the termination value of a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you provide under an interest realignment arrangement, assume to be zero the *market value of any contractual right conferred by the arrangement to an interest realignment adjustment to be received by you.

In calculating the *cost of a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you receive under an interest realignment arrangement, assume to be zero the *market value of any contractual right conferred by the arrangement to an interest realignment adjustment to be provided by you.

The creation of a right to an interest realignment adjustment does not cause CGT event D1 or CGT event D3 to happen.

Your receipt of an interest realignment adjustment does not cause CGT event C2 to happen in relation to the right to receive the adjustment.

Meaning of interest realignment adjustment

(7) An interest realignment adjustment is an amount, or an asset (other than a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right), that:

is provided under an interest realignment arrangement to a party to the arrangement by or on behalf of another party to the arrangement; and

is provided as an adjustment, to the parties’ contributions of value to the project to which the arrangement relates, that arises because information that has become available since the time the arrangement took effect indicates that the other party did not make an appropriate contribution at that time.

40-365 Involuntary disposals

(1) You may exclude some or all of an amount that has been included in your assessable income for a *depreciating asset (the original asset) as a result of a *balancing adjustment event to the extent that you choose to treat it as an amount to be applied under subsection (5) for one or more replacement assets.

You can only make this choice if you stop *holding the asset because:

the original asset is lost or destroyed; or

the original asset is compulsorily acquired by an *Australian government agency; or

the original asset is acquired by an entity (other than an Australian government agency or a *foreign government agency) under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by a law covered under subsection (2A); or

you dispose of the original asset to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

the disposal takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of the entity;

the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to the entity acquiring the asset by agreement;

the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, the asset would be compulsorily acquired by the entity;

the compulsory acquisition would have been under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by a law covered under subsection (2A); or

you dispose of land onto which the original asset was fixed to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

a mining lease was compulsorily granted over the land;

the lease significantly affected your use of the land;

the lease was in force just before the disposal;

the entity to which you dispose of the land was the lessee under the lease; or

you dispose of land onto which the original asset was fixed to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

a mining lease would have been compulsorily granted over the land if you had not disposed of it;

that lease would have significantly affected your use of the land;

the entity to which you dispose of the land would have been the lessee under the lease.

A law is covered under this subsection if it is:

(a) an *Australian law (other than Chapter 6A of the Corporations Act 2001); or

(b) a *foreign law (other than a foreign law corresponding to Chapter 6A of the Corporations Act 2001).

You can only make this choice for a replacement asset if you incur the expenditure on the replacement asset, or you start to *hold it:

no earlier than one year, or within a further period the Commissioner allows, before the balancing adjustment event occurred; and

no later than one year, or within a further period the Commissioner allows, after the end of the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred.

You can only make this choice for a replacement asset if:

at the end of the income year in which you incurred the expenditure on the asset, or you started to *hold it, you used it, or had it installed ready for use, wholly for a taxable purpose; and

you can deduct an amount for it.

For the purposes of applying this Act to the replacement asset:

its *cost is reduced by the amount covered by the choice for the income year in which the asset’s *start time occurs; and

if the income year is later than the one in which the asset’s *start time occurs—the sum of its *opening adjustable value for that later year and any amount included in the second element of the asset’s cost for that later year is reduced by the amount covered by the choice.

If you are making the choice for 2 or more replacement assets, you apportion the amount covered by the choice between those items in proportion to their *cost.

40-370 Balancing adjustments where there has been use of different car expense methods

An amount is included in your assessable income or you can deduct an amount under this section instead of section 40-285 if:

a balancing adjustment event occurs for a car you *held; and

you have deducted or can deduct an amount for the decline in value of the car for an income year under this Division; and

you chose the “cents per kilometre” method in Subdivision 28-C for deducting your car expenses for the car for one or more other income years.

Note 1: This means if you have only used the “log book” method since you began using the car, you calculate the assessable amount or deductible amount under section 40-285.

Note 2: Also, if you have only used the “cents per kilometre” method since you began using the car, no amount is assessable or deductible under this section or section 40-285.

Work out the amount you include in your assessable income or the amount you can deduct in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Subtract the car’s *adjustable value just before the balancing adjustment event occurred from the car’s termination value.

Step 2. Reduce the step 1 amount by the part of the car’s decline in value that is attributable to your using the car, or having it installed ready for use, for purposes other than *taxable purposes. You do this by applying the formula in subsection 40-290(2).

Step 3. Multiply the step 2 amount by the total number of days for which you deducted the decline in value of the car under this Division.

Step 4. Divide the step 3 amount by the total number of days you *held the car.

Step 5. The step 4 amount is a deduction if it is negative or it is included in your assessable income if it is positive.

In working out the *adjustable value for the income years for which you chose the “cents per kilometre method”, assume the decline in value was calculated under this Division on the same basis as those income years when that method did not apply.

In working out the reduction in step 2 for the income years for which you chose the “cents per kilometre method”, assume that:

you had not chosen that method for the car; and

Division 28 (about car expenses) had not applied to the car; and

20% was the extent of your use of the car for *taxable purposes.

Subdivision 40-E — Low-value and software development pools

Guide to Subdivision 40-E

40-420 What this Subdivision is about

You may choose to work out the decline in value of low-cost assets (assets costing less than $1,000) and certain other depreciating assets through a low-value pool.

You may also choose to deduct amounts for expenditure you incur on in-house software through a software development pool.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-425 Allocating assets to a low-value pool

40-430 Rules for assets in low-value pools

40-435 Private or exempt use of assets

40-440 How you work out the decline in value of assets in low-value pools

40-445 Balancing adjustment events

40-450 Software development pools

40-455 How to work out your deduction

40-460 Your assessable income includes consideration for pooled software

Operative provisions

40-425 Allocating assets to a low-value pool

You may choose to allocate a *low cost asset you *hold to a low-value pool for the income year in which you start to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose.

(2) A low-cost asset is a *depreciating asset (except a *horticultural plant) whose *cost as at the end of the income year in which you start to use it, or have it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose is less than $1,000.

You may also choose to allocate a low-value asset to a low-value pool.

You cannot allocate a depreciating asset to a low-value pool if:

its *cost does not exceed $300; and

you use the asset predominantly for the *purpose of producing assessable income that is not income from carrying on a business; and

the asset is not part of a set of assets that you started to hold in that income year where the total cost of the set of assets exceeds $300; and

the total cost of the asset and any other identical, or substantially identical, asset that you start to hold in that income year does not exceed $300.

(5) A low-value asset is a *depreciating asset, except a *horticultural plant, you *hold:

if you have deducted or can deduct amounts for it under this Division for a previous income year—for which you used the diminishing value method; and

that has an *opening adjustable value for the current year of less than $1,000 (worked out using the diminishing value method); and

that is not a low-cost asset.

A depreciating asset:

to which Division 58 (about assets previously owned by an exempt entity) applied for an entity sale situation; and

for which you used the diminishing value method; and

whose *adjustable value as at the end of the income year before the current year is less than $1,000;

is also a low-value asset.

Exception: small business entities

You cannot allocate a depreciating asset to a low-value pool if you deduct amounts for it under Subdivision 328-D (about capital allowances for small business entities).

Exception: medium sized businesses

You cannot allocate a depreciating asset to a low-value pool if the decline in value of the asset for any income year is determined by section 40-82 (about assets costing below a threshold).

Exception: R&D

You cannot allocate a depreciating asset to a low-value pool if you are entitled under section 355-100 to a tax offset for a deduction under section 355-305 for the asset for an income year starting before, or at the same time as, the allocation has effect.

Note: A similar rule applies if you deducted or could have deducted amounts under former 73BA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-430 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Exception: assessable labour income

You cannot allocate a depreciating asset to a low-value pool if, at the time you:

started to use it; or

had it installed ready for use;

you reasonably expected to use it mainly for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable labour income.

40-430 Rules for assets in low-value pools

Once you have made a choice to allocate a low-cost asset to a low-value pool for an income year, you must allocate all low-cost assets you start to *hold in that income year or a later one to the pool.

Note 1: This rule does not apply to low-value assets.

Note 2: If you are a small business entity for the income year and you calculate your deductions for your depreciating assets under Subdivision 328-D, you must deduct amounts for your depreciating assets under that Subdivision unless deductions for particular assets are specifically excluded by that Subdivision.

Once you allocate any depreciating asset to a low-value pool, it must remain in the pool.

40-435 Private or exempt use of assets

(1) When you allocate a *depreciating asset to a low-value pool, you must make a reasonable estimate of the percentage (the taxable use percentage) of your use of the asset (including any past use) that will be for a *taxable purpose over:

for a low-cost asset—its *effective life; or

for a low-value asset—any period of its effective life that is yet to elapse at the start of the income year for which you allocate it to the pool.

For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard a taxable purpose that is the *purpose of producing assessable income:

from the use of residential premises to provide residential accommodation; but

not in the course of carrying on a business;

if, apart from subsections 40-25(5) and 40-27(6), section 40-27 would reduce your deductions under subsection 40-25(1) for the asset.

40-440 How you work out the decline in value of assets in low-value pools

You work out the decline in value of *depreciating assets in a low-value pool for an income year in this way:

Step 1. Work out the amount obtained by taking 183/4% of the taxable use percentage of the *cost of each low-cost asset you allocated to the pool for that year. Add those amounts.

Step 2. Add to the step 1 amount 183/4% of the taxable use percentage of any amounts included in the second element of the *cost for that year of:

assets allocated to the pool for an earlier income year; and

*low-value assets allocated to the pool for the current year.

Step 3. Add to the step 2 amount 371/2% of the sum of:

the *closing pool balance for the previous income year; and

the taxable use percentage of the *opening adjustable values of *low-value assets, at the start of the income year, that you allocated to the pool for that year.

Step 4. The result is the decline in value of the *depreciating assets in the pool.

(2) The closing pool balance of a low-value pool for an income year is the sum of:

the *closing pool balance of the pool for the previous income year; and

the taxable use percentage of the *costs of *low-cost assets you allocated to the pool for that year; and

the taxable use percentage of the *opening adjustable values of any *low-value assets you allocated to the pool for that year as at the start of that year; and

the taxable use percentage of any amounts included in the second element of the cost for the income year of:

assets allocated to the pool for an earlier income year; and

low-value assets allocated to the pool for the current year;

less the decline in value of the *depreciating assets in the pool worked out under subsection (1).

Note: The closing pool balance may be reduced under section 40-445 if a balancing adjustment event happens.

40-445 Balancing adjustment events

If a balancing adjustment event happens to a depreciating asset in a low-value pool in an income year, the *closing pool balance for that year is reduced (but not below zero) by the taxable use percentage of the asset’s termination value.

If the sum of the *termination values, or the part of it, applicable under subsection (1) exceeds the *closing pool balance of the pool for that year, the excess is included in your assessable income.

40-450 Software development pools

You may choose to allocate amounts of expenditure you incur on *in-house software in an income year to a software development pool if it is expenditure on developing, or having another entity develop, computer software.

Note: You cannot allocate expenditure on in-house software to a software development pool if it is expenditure on acquiring computer software or a right to use computer software.

Once you choose to create a software development pool for an income year, any amounts of the kind referred to in subsection (1) you incur after the pool is created (whether in that income year or a later one) must be allocated to a software development pool.

However, an amount of expenditure on *in-house software can only be allocated to a software development pool if you intend to use the software solely for a taxable purpose.

You must create a separate software development pool for each income year for which you incur amounts of the kind referred to in subsection (1).

40-455 How to work out your deduction

For all the expenditure on *in-house software in a software development pool that was incurred in a particular income year (Year 1), you get deductions in successive income years as follows:

40-460 Your assessable income includes consideration for pooled software

If expenditure on *in-house software is (or was) in your software development pool, your assessable income includes any amount you *derive as consideration in relation to the software.

However, subsection (1) does not apply if subsection 40-340(3) (roll-over relief) applies to the change.

Subdivision 40-F — Primary production depreciating assets

Guide to Subdivision 40-F

40-510 What this Subdivision is about

You can deduct amounts for capital expenditure on depreciating assets that are water facilities, horticultural plants, fodder storage assets or fencing assets.

The amount you can deduct is equal to the asset’s decline in value during an income year (as measured under this Subdivision).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-515 Water facilities, horticultural plants, fodder storage assets and fencing assets

40-520 Meaning of water facility, horticultural plant, fodder storage asset and fencing asset

40-525 Conditions

40-530 When declines in value start

40-535 Meaning of horticulture and commercial horticulture

40-540 How you work out the decline in value for water facilities

40-545 How you work out the decline in value for horticultural plants

40-548 How you work out the decline in value for fodder storage assets

40-551 How you work out the decline in value for fencing assets

40-555 Amounts you cannot deduct

40-560 Non-arm’s length transactions

40-565 Extra deduction for destruction of a horticultural plant

40-570 How this Subdivision applies to partners and partnerships

40-575 Getting tax information if you acquire a horticultural plant

Operative provisions

40-515 Water facilities, horticultural plants, fodder storage assets and fencing assets

You can deduct an amount equal to the decline in value for an income year (as worked out under this Subdivision) of a depreciating asset that is one of these:

a water facility;

a horticultural plant;

a fodder storage asset;

a fencing asset.

Note 1: Sections 40-540, 40-545, 40-548 and 40-551 show you how to work out the decline.

Note 2: Generally, only one taxpayer can deduct amounts for a depreciating asset. However, if you and another taxpayer jointly hold the asset, each of you deduct amounts for it: see section 40-35.

Conditions

However, the applicable condition in section 40-525 must be satisfied for the depreciating asset.

Limit on deduction

You cannot deduct more in total than:

for a water facility—the amount of capital expenditure (disregarding expenditure that you cannot deduct because of section 26-100 (about water infrastructure improvement expenditure)) incurred on the facility; or

for a horticultural plant—the amount of capital expenditure incurred on the plant; or

for a fodder storage asset—the amount of capital expenditure incurred on the asset; or

for a fencing asset—the amount of capital expenditure incurred on the asset.

Reduction of deduction: water facilities, fodder storage assets and fencing assets

You must reduce your deduction for a water facility, fodder storage asset or fencing asset for an income year by the part of the decline in value of the facility or asset that is attributable to the period (if any) in the income year when it was:

not wholly used in carrying on a *primary production business on land in Australia; or

not wholly used for a taxable purpose.

Paragraph (4)(a) does not apply to a water facility if the expenditure incurred on the construction, manufacture, installation or acquisition of the water facility was incurred by an irrigation water provider.

Meaning of irrigation water provider

(6) An irrigation water provider is an entity whose *business is primarily and principally the supply (otherwise than by using a *motor vehicle) of water to entities for use in *primary production businesses on land in Australia.

40-520 Meaning of water facility, horticultural plant, fodder storage asset and fencing asset

(1) A water facility is:

plant or a structural improvement, or a repair of a capital nature, or an alteration, addition or extension, to plant or a structural improvement, that is primarily and principally for the purpose of conserving or conveying water; or

a structural improvement, or a repair of a capital nature, or an alteration, addition or extension, to a structural improvement, that is reasonably incidental to conserving or conveying water.

Example: Examples of a water facility include a dam, tank, tank stand, bore, well, irrigation channel, pipe, pump, water tower and windmill. Examples of things reasonably incidental to conserving or conveying water include a culvert, a fence to prevent live stock entering an irrigation channel and a bridge over an irrigation channel.

(2) A horticultural plant is a live plant or fungus that is cultivated or propagated for any of its products or parts.

(3) A fodder storage asset is an asset or a structural improvement, or a repair of a capital nature, or an alteration, addition or extension, to an asset or a structural improvement, that is primarily and principally for the purpose of storing fodder.

(4) A fencing asset is:

an asset or a structural improvement that is a fence; or

a repair of a capital nature, or an alteration, addition or extension, to a fence.

40-525 Conditions

Water facilities

The capital expenditure you incurred on the construction, manufacture, installation or acquisition of the water facility must have been incurred:

primarily and principally for the purpose of conserving or conveying water for use in a *primary production business that you conduct on land in Australia; or

for expenditure incurred by an irrigation water provider—primarily and principally for the purpose of conserving or conveying water for use in primary production businesses conducted by other entities on land in Australia, being entities supplied with water by the irrigation water provider.

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is a water facility:

if section 250-150 applies—the condition in this subsection is taken not to be satisfied for the facility to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—the condition in this subsection is taken not to be satisfied for the facility.

Horticultural plants

One of the conditions in this table must be satisfied:

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is a horticultural plant:

if section 250-150 applies—a condition in this subsection is taken not to be satisfied for the plant to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—the conditions in this subsection are taken not to be satisfied for the horticultural plant.

Fodder storage assets

The capital expenditure you incurred on the construction, manufacture, installation or acquisition of the fodder storage asset must have been incurred primarily and principally for use in a *primary production business that you conduct on land in Australia.

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is a fodder storage asset:

if section 250-150 applies—the condition in this subsection is taken not to be satisfied for the asset to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—the condition in this subsection is taken not to be satisfied for the asset.

Fencing assets

The capital expenditure you incurred on the construction, manufacture, installation or acquisition of the fencing asset must have been incurred primarily and principally for use in a *primary production business that you conduct on land in Australia.

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is a fencing asset:

if section 250-150 applies—the condition in this subsection is taken not to be satisfied for the asset to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—the condition in this subsection is taken not to be satisfied for the asset.

40-530 When declines in value start

A water facility, fodder storage asset or fencing asset starts to decline in value in the income year in which you first incur expenditure on the facility or asset.

A horticultural plant starts to decline in value in:

if you are the first entity to satisfy a condition in subsection 40-525(2) for the plant—the income year in which the first commercial season starts; or

if not—the later of the income year in which you first satisfied that condition and the income year in which the first commercial season starts.

40-535 Meaning of horticulture and commercial horticulture

(1) Horticulture includes:

propagation and cultivation of a horticultural plant in any environment (whether natural or artificial); and

propagation and cultivation of seeds, bulbs, spores and similar things; and

propagation and cultivation of fungi.

(2) Use for commercial horticulture means use for the *purpose of producing assessable income in a *business of *horticulture.

40-540 How you work out the decline in value for water facilities

The decline in value of a water facility for the income year in which you incurred the expenditure is the amount of capital expenditure you incurred on the construction, manufacture, installation or acquisition of the water facility.

However, disregard expenditure that you cannot deduct because of section 26-100 (about water infrastructure improvement expenditure).

40-545 How you work out the decline in value for horticultural plants

The decline in value of a horticultural plant for the income year in which it starts to decline in value is all of the capital expenditure attributable to the establishment of the plant if its *effective life is less than 3 years.

You work out the decline in value for an income year of a horticultural plant whose *effective life is 3 years or more in this way:

where:

establishment expenditure is the amount of capital expenditure incurred that is attributable to the establishment of the *horticultural plant.

write-off days in income year is the number of days in the income year on which you satisfied a condition in subsection 40-525(2) for the plant and either used it for *commercial horticulture or held it ready for that use.

write-off rate is the rate shown in this table for the *horticultural plant according to its *effective life.

Limit on write-off days

Disregard your use of the horticultural plant on a day outside the period that:

(a) starts when the plant can first be used for *commercial horticulture; and

extends for the time shown in this table (depending on the plant’s *effective life).

40-548 How you work out the decline in value for fodder storage assets

The decline in value of a fodder storage asset for the income year in which you incurred the expenditure is the amount of capital expenditure you incurred on the construction, manufacture, installation or acquisition of the fodder storage asset.

40-551 How you work out the decline in value for fencing assets

The decline in value of a fencing asset for the income year in which you incurred the expenditure is the amount of capital expenditure you incurred on the construction, manufacture, installation or acquisition of the fencing asset.

40-555 Amounts you cannot deduct

Water facilities

You cannot deduct an amount for any income year for capital expenditure on the acquisition of a water facility if any entity has deducted or can deduct an amount under this Subdivision for any income year for earlier capital expenditure on:

the construction or manufacture of the facility; or

a previous acquisition of the facility.

Note: A depreciating asset and a repair of a capital nature or an alteration, addition or extension to that asset that is a water facility are not the same depreciating asset for the purposes of section 40-50 and this Subdivision: see section 40-53.

Horticultural plants

In working out your deduction under this Subdivision for a horticultural plant, disregard expenditure incurred:

in draining swamp or low-lying land; or

in clearing land.

Fodder storage assets

You cannot deduct an amount for any income year for capital expenditure on the acquisition of a fodder storage asset if any entity has deducted or can deduct an amount under this Subdivision for any income year for earlier capital expenditure on:

the construction or manufacture of the asset; or

a previous acquisition of the asset.

Note: A depreciating asset and a repair of a capital nature or an alteration, addition or extension to that asset that is a fodder storage asset are not the same depreciating asset for the purposes of section 40-50 and this Subdivision: see section 40-53.

Fencing assets

You cannot deduct an amount for any income year for capital expenditure on the acquisition of a fencing asset if any entity has deducted or can deduct an amount under this Subdivision for any income year for earlier capital expenditure on:

the construction or manufacture of the fencing asset; or

a previous acquisition of the fencing asset.

Note: A depreciating asset and a repair of a capital nature or an alteration, addition or extension to that asset that is a fencing asset are not the same depreciating asset for the purposes of section 40-50 and this Subdivision: see section 40-53.

You cannot deduct an amount for any income year for capital expenditure on a fencing asset to the extent that any entity has deducted or can deduct the amount under subsection 40-630(1) (about landcare operations).

You cannot deduct an amount for any income year for capital expenditure on a fencing asset if the fencing asset is (or is a repair, alteration, addition or extension to):

a stockyard or pen; or

a portable fence.

40-560 Non-arm’s length transactions

If you incurred capital expenditure under an arrangement and:

there is at least one other party to the arrangement with whom you did not deal at *arm’s length; and

apart from this section, the amount of the expenditure would be more than the *market value of what it was for;

the amount of expenditure you take into account under this Subdivision is that market value.

40-565 Extra deduction for destruction of a horticultural plant

You can deduct the amount worked out under subsection (2) for a horticultural plant for an income year if its *effective life is 3 years or more and it is destroyed during the income year while you own it and use it for commercial horticulture.

Work out your deduction as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the total of the amounts you could have deducted under this Subdivision for the horticultural plant for the period:

starting when the plant could first be used for commercial horticulture; and

ending when it was destroyed;

assuming that, during that period, you satisfied a condition in section 40-525 for the plant and used it for commercial horticulture.

Step 2. Subtract from the capital expenditure that is attributable to the establishment of the horticultural plant:

the result from step 1; and

any amount you received (under an insurance policy or otherwise) for the destruction.

The remaining amount (if any) is your deduction under subsection (1).

This deduction is in addition to any deduction for the income year under section 40-545.

40-570 How this Subdivision applies to partners and partnerships

This section applies to allocate expenditure to you for the purposes of this Subdivision if you were a partner in a partnership when it incurred capital expenditure during an income year.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, you are taken to have incurred during that income year:

the amount of the expenditure that the partners agreed you should bear; or

if there was no such agreement—the proportion of the expenditure equal to the proportion of your individual interest in the net income or partnership loss of the partnership for that income year.

(3) Disregard this Subdivision when working out the net income or partnership loss of the partnership under section 90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

40-575 Getting tax information if you acquire a horticultural plant

If you begin to satisfy a condition in section 40-525 for a horticultural plant, you may give the last entity (if any) that satisfied such a condition for the plant a written notice requiring the entity to give you any or all of the following information:

the amount of establishment expenditure for the plant;

if the entity used the plant’s *effective life to work out the decline in value of the plant—its effective life and the day on which it could first be used for commercial horticulture.

The notice must:

be given within 60 days of your beginning to satisfy that condition; and

specify a period of at least 60 days within which the information must be given; and

set out the effect of subsection (3).

Note: Subsections (4) and (5) explain how this subsection operates if the last owner is a partnership.

Requirement to comply with notice

The entity to whom the notice is given must not intentionally refuse or fail to comply with the notice.

Penalty: 10 penalty units.

Giving the notice to a partnership

If the entity to whom the notice is given is a partnership:

you may give it to the partnership by giving it to any of the partners (this does not limit how else you can give it); and

the obligation to comply with the notice is imposed on each of the partners (not on the partnership), but may be discharged by any of them.

A partner must not intentionally refuse or fail to comply with that obligation, unless another partner has already complied with it.

Penalty: 10 penalty units.

Limits on giving a notice

Only one notice can be given in relation to the same horticultural plant.

Subdivision 40-G — Capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders

Guide to Subdivision 40-G

40-625 What this Subdivision is about

You can deduct amounts for capital expenditure you incur:

• on landcare operations; or

• on electricity connections or telephone lines.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-630 Landcare operations

40-635 Meaning of landcare operation

40-640 Meaning of approved management plan

40-645 Electricity and telephone lines

40-650 Amounts you cannot deduct under this Subdivision

40-655 Meaning of connecting power to land or upgrading the connection and metering point

40-660 Non-arm’s length transactions

40-665 How this Subdivision applies to partners and partnerships

40-670 Approval of persons as farm consultants

40-675 Review of decisions relating to approvals

Operative provisions

40-630 Landcare operations

You can deduct capital expenditure you incur at a time in an income year on a landcare operation for:

land in Australia you use at the time for carrying on a *primary production business; or

rural land in Australia you use at the time for carrying on a business for a taxable purpose from the use of that land (except a business of mining and quarrying operations).

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is land:

if section 250-150 applies—you are taken not to be using the land for the purpose of carrying on a primary production business, or a business for the purpose of producing assessable income from the use of rural land (except a business of mining and quarrying operations), to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—you are taken not to be using the land for such a purpose.

A rural land irrigation water provider can deduct capital expenditure it incurs at a time in an income year on a landcare operation for:

land in Australia that other entities use at the time for carrying on *primary production businesses; or

rural land in Australia that other entities use at the time for carrying on *businesses for a taxable purpose from the use of that land (except a business of mining and quarrying operations);

being entities supplied with water by the rural land irrigation water provider.

(1B) A rural land irrigation water provider is:

an irrigation water provider; or

an entity whose business is primarily and principally the supply (otherwise than by using a motor vehicle) of water to entities for use in carrying on *businesses (except businesses of mining and quarrying operations) using rural land in Australia.

Exception: plant

However, you cannot deduct an amount under this Subdivision for capital expenditure on plant, except:

a fence erected for a purpose described in paragraph 40-635(1)(a) or (b); or

(b) a dam or structural improvement (except a fence) covered by paragraph (1)(c), (d), (e) or (f) of the definition of plant in section 45-40.

In applying paragraph (2)(b) to capital expenditure incurred by a rural land irrigation water provider on a dam or structural improvement, the requirement in paragraph 45-40(1)(c) that the land on which the dam or structural improvement is situated be used for agricultural or pastoral operations is to be disregarded.

Exception: deduction available under Subdivision 40-F

A rural land irrigation water provider cannot deduct an amount under this Subdivision for capital expenditure if the entity can deduct an amount for that expenditure under Subdivision 40-F.

Exception: deduction available under Subdivision 40-J

You cannot deduct an amount under this Subdivision for capital expenditure if any entity can deduct an amount for that expenditure for any income year under Subdivision 40-J.

Reduction of deduction

You must reduce your deduction by a reasonable amount to reflect your use of the land in the income year after the time when you incurred the expenditure for a purpose other than the purpose of carrying on:

a *primary production business; or

a business for the *purpose of producing assessable income from the use of rural land (except a business of mining and quarrying operations).

Subsection (3) does not apply to expenditure incurred by a rural land irrigation water provider. Instead, a rural land irrigation water provider must reduce its deduction in relation to particular land by a reasonable amount to reflect an entity’s use of the land in the income year after the rural land irrigation water provider incurred the expenditure for a purpose other than a taxable purpose.

40-635 Meaning of landcare operation

(1) Landcare operation for land means:

erecting a fence to separate different land classes on the land in accordance with an *approved management plan for the land; or

erecting a fence on the land primarily and principally for the purpose of excluding animals from an area affected by land degradation:

to prevent or limit extension or worsening of land degradation in the area; and

to help reclaim the area; or

constructing a levee or a similar improvement on the land; or

constructing drainage works on the land primarily and principally for the purpose of controlling salinity or assisting in drainage control; or

an operation primarily and principally for the purpose of:

eradicating or exterminating from the land animals that are pests; or

eradicating, exterminating or destroying plant growth detrimental to the land; or

preventing or fighting land degradation (except by erecting fences on the land); or

a repair of a capital nature, or an alteration, addition or extension, to an asset described in paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d) or an extension of an operation described in paragraph (e); or

constructing a structural improvement, or a repair of a capital nature, or an alteration, addition or extension, to a structural improvement, that is reasonably incidental to an asset described in paragraph (c) or (d).

Note: A depreciating asset and a repair of a capital nature or an alteration, addition or extension to that asset are not the same asset for the purposes of section 40-50 and this Subdivision: see section 40-53.

Paragraph (1)(d) does not apply to an operation draining swamp or low-lying land.

40-640 Meaning of approved management plan

An approved management plan for *land is a plan that:

shows the different classes within the land and the location of any fencing needed to separate any of the land classes to prevent land degradation; and

describes the kind of fencing and how it will prevent land degradation; and

has been prepared by, or approved in writing as a suitable plan for the land by:

an officer of an *Australian government agency responsible for land conservation who has authority to do so; or

an individual who was at the time approved as a farm consultant under this Subdivision.

40-645 Electricity and telephone lines

You can deduct amounts for capital expenditure you incur on connecting power to land or upgrading the connection if, when you incur the expenditure:

you have an interest in the land or are a share-farmer carrying on a business on the land; and

you or another entity intends to use some or all of the electricity to be supplied as a result of the expenditure in carrying on a business on the land for a taxable purpose at a time when you have an interest in the land or are a share-farmer carrying on a business on the land.

You can also deduct amounts for capital expenditure you incur on a telephone line on or extending to land if, when you incurred the expenditure:

a *primary production business was carried on the land; and

you had an interest in the land or you were a share-farmer carrying on a primary production business on the land.

The amount you can deduct is 10% of the expenditure:

for the income year in which you incur it; and

for each of the next 9 income years.

Note 1: Various provisions may reduce the amount you can deduct or stop you deducting. For example, see:

Division 26 (limiting deductions generally); and

section 40-650 (specifying expenditure you cannot deduct under this Subdivision); and

Division 245 (which may affect your entitlement to a deduction if your debts are forgiven).

Note 2: If you recoup an amount of the expenditure, the amount will be included in your assessable income. See Subdivision 20-A.

40-650 Amounts you cannot deduct under this Subdivision

You cannot deduct amounts for capital expenditure you incur on connecting power to land or upgrading the connection if, during the 12 months after electricity is first supplied to the land as a result of the expenditure, no electricity supplied as a result of the expenditure is used in carrying on a business on the land for a taxable purpose.

(2) If you deducted an amount for any income year under this Subdivision for the expenditure, your assessment for that income year may be amended under section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to disallow the deduction.

You cannot deduct an amount for capital expenditure you incur on connecting power to land or upgrading the connection for:

expenditure in providing water, light or power for use on, access to or communication with the site of mining and quarrying operations; or

a contribution to the cost of providing water, light or power for those operations.

You cannot deduct an amount for any income year for your capital expenditure on a part of a telephone line if:

any entity has deducted, or can deduct, an amount for any income year for the cost of that part under a provision of this Act (except this Subdivision); or

the cost of that part has been, or must be, taken into account in working out:

the amount of any entity’s deduction (including a deduction for a depreciating asset) for any income year under a provision of this Act (except this Subdivision); or

(ii) the net income, or partnership loss, of a partnership under section 90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

However, you can deduct an amount under this Subdivision for your expenditure on a part of a telephone line even if:

an entity that worked on installing that part has deducted, or can deduct, an amount relating to that part for any income year under this Act (except this Subdivision); or

the cost of that part has been, or must be, taken into account:

in working out the amount of such an entity’s deduction for any income year under a provision of this Act (except this Subdivision); or

(ii) under section 90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in working out the net income, or partnership loss, of a partnership that worked on installing that part.

Subsection (5) has effect whether the entity did the work itself or through one or more employees or *agents.

If you can deduct, or have deducted, an amount for any income year under section 40-645 for your expenditure:

an entity cannot deduct an amount for any income year under a provision of this Act (except this Subdivision) for the expenditure; and

the expenditure cannot be taken into account to work out the amount of an entity’s deduction for any income year under a provision of this Act (except this Subdivision).

(8) Subsection (7) also applies in working out the net income, or partnership loss, of a partnership under section 90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

40-655 Meaning of connecting power to land or upgrading the connection and metering point

(1) Each of these operations is connecting power to land or upgrading the connection:

connecting a mains electricity cable to a *metering point on the land (whether or not the point from which the cable is connected is on the land);

providing or installing equipment designed to measure the amount of electricity supplied through a mains electricity cable to a metering point on the land;

providing or installing equipment for use directly in connection with the supply of electricity through a mains electricity cable to a metering point on the land;

work to increase the amount of electricity that can be supplied through a mains electricity cable to a metering point on the land;

work to modify or replace equipment designed to measure the amount of electricity supplied through a mains electricity cable to a metering point on the land, if the modification or replacement results from increasing the amount of electricity supplied to the land;

work to modify or replace equipment for use directly in connection with the supply of electricity through a mains electricity cable to the land, if the modification or replacement results from increasing the amount of electricity supplied to the land;

work carried out as a result of a contribution to the cost of a project consisting of the connection of mains electricity facilities to that land and other land.

(2) However, an operation described in subsection (1) done in the course of replacing or relocating mains electricity cable or equipment is connecting power to land or upgrading the connection only if done to increase the amount of electricity that can be supplied to a *metering point on the land.

(3) A metering point on land is a point where consumption of electricity supplied to the land through a mains electricity cable is measured.

40-660 Non-arm’s length transactions

If you incurred capital expenditure under an arrangement and:

there is at least one other party to the arrangement with whom you did not deal at *arm’s length; and

apart from this section, the amount of the expenditure would be more than the *market value of what it was for;

the amount of expenditure you take into account under this Subdivision is that market value.

40-665 How this Subdivision applies to partners and partnerships

This section applies to allocate expenditure to you for the purposes of this Subdivision if you were a partner in a partnership when it incurred capital expenditure during an income year.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, you are taken to have incurred during that income year:

the amount of the expenditure that the partners agreed you should bear; or

if there was no such agreement—the proportion of the expenditure equal to the proportion of your individual interest in the net income or partnership loss of the partnership for that income year.

(3) Disregard this Subdivision when working out the net income or partnership loss of the partnership under section 90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

40-670 Approval of persons as farm consultants

A person may be approved in writing as a farm consultant by:

the Agriculture Secretary; or

an officer of the Agriculture Department who has been authorised in writing by the Agriculture Secretary to approve persons as farm consultants.

Note: This subsection also allows the approval of an individual as a farm consultant to be revoked. See subsection 33(3) of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901.

The following matters must be taken into account when deciding whether to approve a person as a farm consultant:

the person’s qualifications, experience and knowledge relating to *land conservation and farm management;

the person’s standing in the professional community;

any other relevant matters.

40-675 Review of decisions relating to approvals

A person may apply to the *ART for review of a decision (as defined in the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024):

to refuse to approve the person as a farm consultant; or

to revoke the approval of the person as a farm consultant.

Subdivision 40-H — Capital expenditure that is immediately deductible

Guide to Subdivision 40-H

40-725 What this Subdivision is about

You get an immediate deduction for certain capital expenditure on:

• exploration or prospecting; and

• rehabilitation of mining or quarrying sites; and

• paying petroleum resource rent tax; and

• environmental protection activities.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-730 Deduction for expenditure on exploration or prospecting

40-735 Deduction for expenditure on mining site rehabilitation

40-740 Meaning of ancillary activities and mining building site

40-745 No deduction for certain expenditure

40-750 Deduction for payments of petroleum resource rent tax

40-755 Environmental protection activities

40-760 Limits on deductions from environmental protection activities

40-765 Non-arm’s length transactions

Operative provisions

40-730 Deduction for expenditure on exploration or prospecting

You can deduct expenditure you incur in an income year on *exploration or prospecting for *minerals, or quarry materials, obtainable by mining and quarrying operations if, for that expenditure, you satisfy one or more of these paragraphs:

you carried on mining and quarrying operations;

it would be reasonable to conclude you proposed to carry on such operations;

you carried on a business of, or a business that included, exploration or prospecting for minerals or quarry materials obtainable by such operations, and the expenditure was necessarily incurred in carrying on that business.

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is land:

if section 250-150 applies—you cannot deduct expenditure you incur in relation to the land to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—you cannot deduct such expenditure.

However, you cannot deduct expenditure under subsection (1) if it is expenditure on:

development drilling for petroleum; or

operations in the course of working a mining property, quarrying property or petroleum field.

Also, you cannot deduct expenditure under subsection (1) to the extent that it forms part of the *cost of a depreciating asset.

Definitions

(4) Exploration or prospecting includes:

for mining in general, and quarrying:

geological mapping, geophysical surveys, systematic search for areas containing *minerals (except petroleum) or quarry materials, and search by drilling or other means for such minerals or materials within those areas; and

search for ore within, or near, an ore-body or search for quarry materials by drives, shafts, cross-cuts, winzes, rises and drilling; and

for petroleum mining:

geological, geophysical and geochemical surveys; and

exploration drilling and appraisal drilling; and

feasibility studies to evaluate the economic feasibility of mining minerals or quarry materials once they have been discovered; and

obtaining *mining, quarrying or prospecting information associated with the search for, and evaluation of, areas containing minerals or quarry materials.

(5) Minerals includes *petroleum.

(6) Petroleum means:

any naturally occurring hydrocarbon or naturally occurring mixture of hydrocarbons, whether in a gaseous, liquid or solid state; or

any naturally occurring mixture of:

one or more hydrocarbons, whether in a gaseous, liquid or solid state; and

one or more of the following: hydrogen sulphide, nitrogen, helium or carbon dioxide;

whether or not that substance has been returned to a natural reservoir.

(7) Mining and quarrying operations means:

mining operations on a mining property for extracting *minerals (except petroleum) from their natural site; or

mining operations for the purpose of obtaining petroleum; or

quarrying operations on a quarrying property for extracting quarry materials from their natural site;

for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

(8) Mining, quarrying or prospecting information is geological, geophysical or technical information that:

relates to the presence, absence or extent of deposits of *minerals or quarry materials in an area; or

is likely to help in determining the presence, absence or extent of such deposits in an area.

40-735 Deduction for expenditure on mining site rehabilitation

You can deduct for an income year expenditure you incur in that year to the extent it is on mining site rehabilitation of:

a site on which you:

carried on mining and quarrying operations; or

conducted *exploration or prospecting; or

conducted ancillary mining activities; or

a mining building site.

Note 1: If an amount of the expenditure is recouped, the amount may be included in your assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

Note 2: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is land:

if section 250-150 applies—you cannot deduct expenditure you incur in relation to the land to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—you cannot deduct such expenditure.

However, a provision of this Act (except Division 8 (which is about deductions)) that expressly prevents or restricts the operation of that Division applies in the same way to this section.

However, you cannot deduct expenditure under subsection (1) to the extent that it forms part of the *cost of a depreciating asset.

(4) Mining site rehabilitation is an act of restoring or rehabilitating a site or part of a site to, or to a reasonable approximation of, the condition it was in before *mining and quarrying operations, *exploration or prospecting or *ancillary mining activities were first started on the site, whether by you or by someone else.

(5) Partly restoring or rehabilitating such a site counts as mining site rehabilitation (even if you had no intention of completing the work).

For a mining building site, the time when ancillary mining activities were first started on the site is the earliest time when the buildings, improvements or *depreciating assets concerned were located on the site.

40-740 Meaning of ancillary mining activities and mining building site

(1) Any of the following are ancillary mining activities:

preparing a site for you to carry on mining and quarrying operations;

providing water, light or power for, access to, or communications with, a site on which you carry on, or will carry on, mining and quarrying operations;

minerals treatment of *minerals or minerals treatment of quarry materials, obtained by you in carrying on mining and quarrying operations;

storing (whether before or after minerals treatment) such minerals, petroleum or quarry materials in relation to the operation of a depreciating asset for use primarily and principally in treating such minerals or quarry materials;

liquefying natural gas obtained from mining and quarrying operations you carry on.

(2) A mining building site is a site, or a part of a site, where there are *depreciating assets that are or were necessary for you to carry on *mining and quarrying operations. However, a mining building site does not include anything covered by the definition of housing and welfare.

40-745 No deduction for certain expenditure

Expenditure on these things is not deductible under section 40-735:

acquiring land or an interest in land or a right, power or privilege to do with land;

a bond or security, however described, for performing mining site rehabilitation;

*housing and welfare.

40-750 Deduction for payments of petroleum resource rent tax

You can deduct a payment of petroleum resource rent tax, or an *instalment of petroleum resource rent tax, that you make in an income year.

Note 1: If an amount of the expenditure is recouped, the amount may be included in your assessable income: see Subdivision 20-A.

Note 2: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset:

if section 250-150 applies—you cannot deduct expenditure you incur in relation to the asset to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—you cannot deduct such expenditure.

(2) You cannot deduct under subsection (1) a payment that you make under paragraph 99(c) of the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax Assessment Act 1987.

These amounts are included in your assessable income for the income year in which they are refunded, credited, paid or applied:

(a) an amount the Commissioner pays you in total or partial discharge of a debt of the kind referred to in subsection 47(1) of the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax Assessment Act 1987; or

(b) an amount the Commissioner applies under subsection 47(2) of the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax Assessment Act 1987 in total or partial discharge of a liability you have.

40-755 Environmental protection activities

You can deduct expenditure you incur in an income year for the sole or dominant purpose of carrying on environmental protection activities.

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is land:

if section 250-150 applies—you cannot deduct expenditure you incur in relation to the land to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—you cannot deduct such expenditure.

(2) Environmental protection activities are any of the following activities that are carried on by or for you:

preventing, fighting or remedying:

pollution resulting, or likely to result, from your earning activity; or

pollution of or from the site of your earning activity; or

pollution of or from a site where an entity was carrying on any business that you have acquired and carry on substantially unchanged as your earning activity;

treating, cleaning up, removing or storing:

waste resulting, or likely to result, from your earning activity; or

waste that is on or from the site of your earning activity; or

waste that is on or from a site where an entity was carrying on any business that you have acquired and carry on substantially unchanged as your earning activity.

No other activities are environmental protection activities.

(3) Your earning activity is an activity you carried on, carry on, or propose to carry on:

for the *purpose of producing assessable income for an income year (except a net capital gain); or

for the purpose of *exploration or prospecting; or

for the purpose of mining site rehabilitation; or

for purposes that include one or more of those purposes.

If your earning activity is:

leasing a site you own; or

granting a right to use a site you own or control; or

a similar activity involving a site;

that site is taken to be the site of your earning activity.

Note: This means you can deduct your expenditure on environmental protection activities relating to the site, even if the pollution or waste is caused by another entity that uses the site.

40-760 Limits on deductions from environmental protection activities

Expenditure you cannot deduct

You cannot deduct an amount under section 40-755 for an income year for:

expenditure for acquiring land; or

capital expenditure for constructing a building, structure or structural improvement; or

capital expenditure for constructing an extension, alteration or improvement to a building, structure or structural improvement; or

a bond or security (however described) for performing environmental protection activities; or

expenditure to the extent that you can deduct an amount for it under a provision of this Act outside this Subdivision.

Note: You may be able to deduct expenditure described in paragraph (1)(b) or (c) under Division 43 (which deals with capital works).

In particular, you cannot deduct under section 40-755 expenditure to the extent that you incur it on carrying out an activity for environmental impact assessment of your project.

However, a provision of this Act (except Division 8 (which is about deductions)) that expressly prevents or restricts the operation of that Division applies in the same way to section 40-755.

40-765 Non-arm’s length transactions

If you incurred capital expenditure under an arrangement and:

there is at least one other party to the arrangement with whom you did not deal at *arm’s length; and

apart from this section, the amount of the expenditure would be more than the *market value of what it was for;

the amount of expenditure you take into account under this Subdivision is that market value.

Subdivision 40-I — Capital expenditure that is deductible over time

Guide to Subdivision 40-I

40-825 What this Subdivision is about

You can deduct amounts for certain capital expenditure associated with projects you carry on. You deduct the amounts over the life of the project using a pool.

You can also deduct amounts for certain business related costs. You deduct these amounts over 5 years (or immediately in the case of some start-up expenses for small businesses) if the amounts are not otherwise taken into account and are not denied a deduction.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-830 Project pools

40-832 Project pools for post-9 May 2006 projects

40-835 Reduction of deduction

40-840 Meaning of project amount

40-845 Project life

40-855 When you start to deduct amounts for a project pool

40-860 Meaning of mining capital expenditure

40-865 Meaning of transport capital expenditure

40-870 Meaning of transport facility

40-875 Meaning of processed minerals and minerals treatment

40-880 Business related costs

40-885 Non-arm’s length transactions

Operative provisions

40-830 Project pools

You can allocate *project amounts to a project pool.

You can deduct amounts for *project amounts that are allocated to the project pool.

You calculate your deduction for an income year for a project pool in this way:

where:

DV project pool life is:

the project life of the project; or

if its project life has been recalculated—its most recently recalculated project life.

pool value is:

for the first income year that a project amount is allocated to the pool—the sum of the project amounts allocated to the pool for that year; or

for a later income year—the sum of the pool’s closing pool value for the previous income year and any project amounts allocated to the pool for the later year.

Note: The calculation is made under subsection 40-832(3) for project amounts incurred on or after 10 May 2006 for projects that start to operate on or after that day.

If, in an income year, you abandon, sell or otherwise dispose of a project for which you have a project pool, you can deduct for that year the sum of the pool’s closing pool value for the previous income year and any *project amounts allocated to the pool for the income year.

Your assessable income for that income year includes any amount you receive for the abandonment, sale or other disposal.

Your assessable income for an income year includes other capital amounts that you *derive in that year in relation to a project amount allocated to your project pool or in relation to something on which the project amount is expended.

(7) The closing pool value of a project pool for an income year is:

for the first income year that a project amount is allocated to the pool—the sum of the project amounts allocated to the pool for that year less the amount you could deduct for the pool for that year (apart from section 40-835); or

for a later income year—the sum of the pool’s closing pool value for the previous income year and any project amounts allocated to the pool for the later year less the amount you could deduct for the pool for the later year (apart from section 40-835).

Your deduction for an income year cannot be more than the amount of the component “pool value” in the formula in subsection (3) for that year.

40-832 Project pools for post-9 May 2006 projects

You calculate your deduction for an income year for a project pool in this way if the project pool contains only *project amounts incurred on or after 10 May 2006 for projects that start to operate on or after that day:

where:

DV project pool life has the same meaning as in subsection 40-830(3).

pool value has the same meaning as in subsection 40-830(3).

If, in an income year, you abandon, sell or otherwise dispose of a project for which you have a project pool, you can deduct for that year the sum of the pool’s closing pool value for the previous income year and any *project amounts allocated to the pool for the income year.

Your assessable income for that income year includes any amount you receive for the abandonment, sale or other disposal.

Your assessable income for an income year includes other capital amounts that you *derive in that year in relation to a project amount allocated to your project pool or in relation to something on which the project amount is expended.

Your deduction for an income year cannot be more than the amount of the component “pool value” in the formula in subsection (1) for that year.

40-835 Reduction of deduction

You must reduce your deduction under section 40-830 or 40-832 for an income year by a reasonable amount for the extent (if any) to which the project operates in the year for purposes other than *taxable purposes.

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset:

if section 250-150 applies—you are taken not to be using the asset for taxable purposes to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—you are taken not to be using the asset for such purposes.

40-840 Meaning of project amount

(1) An amount of *mining capital expenditure or *transport capital expenditure you incur is a project amount if:

it does not form part of the *cost of a depreciating asset you *hold or held; and

you cannot deduct it under a provision of this Act outside this Subdivision; and

it is directly connected with:

for mining capital expenditure—carrying on the mining and quarrying operations in relation to which the expenditure is incurred; or

for transport capital expenditure—carrying on the business in relation to which the expenditure is incurred.

(2) Another amount of capital expenditure you incur is also a project amount so far as:

it does not form part of the *cost of a depreciating asset you *hold or held; and

you cannot deduct it under a provision of this Act outside this Subdivision; and

it is directly connected with a project you carry on or propose to carry on for a taxable purpose; and

it is one of these:

an amount paid to create or upgrade community infrastructure for a community associated with the project; or

an amount incurred for site preparation costs for depreciating assets (except, for *horticultural plants, in draining swamp or low-lying land or in clearing land); or

an amount incurred for feasibility studies for the project; or

an amount incurred for environmental assessments for the project; or

an amount incurred to obtain information associated with the project; or

an amount incurred in seeking to obtain a right to *intellectual property; or

an amount incurred for ornamental trees or shrubs.

40-845 Project life

You work out the project life of a project by estimating how long (in years, including fractions of years) it will be from when the project starts to operate until it stops operating.

40-855 When you start to deduct amounts for a project pool

You start to deduct amounts for a project pool for the first income year when the project starts to operate.

40-860 Meaning of mining capital expenditure

(1) Mining capital expenditure is capital expenditure you incur:

in carrying on mining and quarrying operations; or

in preparing a site for those operations; or

on buildings or other improvements necessary for you to carry on those operations; or

in providing, or in contributing to the cost of providing:

water, light or power for use on the site of those operations; or

access to, or communications with, the site of those operations; or

on buildings for use directly in connection with operating or maintaining plant that is primarily and principally for *treating *minerals, or quarry materials, that you obtain by carrying on such operations; or

on buildings or other improvements for use directly in connection with storing minerals or quarry materials or to facilitate minerals treatment of them (whether the storage happens before or after the treatment).

(2) Capital expenditure you incur on *housing and welfare in carrying on *mining and quarrying operations (except quarrying operations) is also mining capital expenditure, but only if:

for residential accommodation—the accommodation is provided by you, on or adjacent to a site where you carry on those operations, for the use of:

your employees, or someone else’s employees, who are employed or engaged in those operations, or in operations of yours that are connected with those operations; or

dependants of such employees; or

for health, education, recreation or other similar facilities, or facilities for meals—the facilities:

are on or adjacent to a site where you carry on those operations, and are principally for the benefit of the employees or dependants covered by paragraph (a); and

are not run for profit by any person, except in the case of facilities for meals (which may be run for profit); or

in the case of works, including works for providing water, light, power, access or communications—the works are carried out directly in connection with the accommodation or facilities covered by this section.

(3) However, expenditure on these is not mining capital expenditure:

railway lines, roads, pipelines or other facilities, for use wholly or partly for transporting *minerals or quarry materials, or their products, other than facilities used for transport wholly within the site of mining and quarrying operations you carry on;

works carried out in connection with, or buildings or other improvements constructed or acquired for use in connection with, establishing, operating or using a port facility or other facility for ships;

an office building that is not at or adjacent to the site of mining and quarrying operations you carry on;

*housing and welfare in relation to quarrying operations.

40-865 Meaning of transport capital expenditure

(1) Transport capital expenditure is capital expenditure you incur, in carrying on a *business for a *taxable purpose, on:

a transport facility; or

obtaining a right to construct or install a transport facility, or part of one, on land owned or leased by another entity or in an area referred to in subsection 960-505(2) (about offshore areas and installations); or

paying compensation for any damage or loss caused by constructing or installing a transport facility or part of one; or

earthworks, bridges, tunnels or cuttings that are necessary for a transport facility.

(2) Transport capital expenditure also includes capital expenditure you incur, in carrying on a *business for a *taxable purpose, by way of contribution to:

someone else’s capital expenditure on a transport facility or on anything else covered by a paragraph of subsection (1); or

an *exempt Australian government agency’s capital expenditure on railway rolling-stock.

(3) Transport capital expenditure does not include expenditure on:

road vehicles or ships; or

railway rolling-stock; or

(c) a thing covered by the definition of housing and welfare; or

works for providing water, light or power, in connection with a port facility or other facility for ships;

and does not include expenditure by way of contribution to that expenditure (except expenditure by way of contribution to an *exempt Australian government agency’s capital expenditure on railway rolling-stock).

40-870 Meaning of transport facility

(1) A transport facility is a railway, a road, a pipe-line, a port facility or other facility for ships, or another facility, that is used primarily and principally for transport of:

*minerals or quarry materials obtained by any entity in carrying on mining and quarrying operations; or

processed minerals produced from minerals or quarry materials.

(2) However, a facility used for these is not a transport facility:

transport wholly within the site of mining and quarrying operations;

transport of petroleum:

that has been treated at a refinery; or

that forms part of a system of reticulation to consumers; or

to a particular consumer or consumers.

40-875 Meaning of processed minerals and minerals treatment

(1) Processed minerals are any of the following:

materials resulting from minerals treatment of *minerals or quarry materials (except petroleum);

materials resulting from sintering or calcining;

pellets or other agglomerated forms of iron;

alumina and blister copper.

(2) Minerals treatment means:

cleaning, leaching, crushing, grinding, breaking, screening, grading or sizing; or

concentration by a gravity, magnetic, electrostatic or flotation process; or

any other treatment:

that is applied to *minerals, or to quarry materials, before that concentration; or

for a mineral or materials not requiring that concentration, that would, if the mineral or materials had required concentration, have been applied before the concentration;

but does not include:

sintering or calcining; or

producing alumina, or pellets or other agglomerated forms of iron, or processing connected with such production.

40-880 Business related costs

Object

The object of this section is to make certain business capital expenditure deductible over 5 years, or immediately in the case of some start-up expenses for small businesses, if:

the expenditure is not otherwise taken into account; and

a deduction is not denied by some other provision; and

the business is, was or is proposed to be carried on for a taxable purpose.

Note: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset:

if section 250-150 applies—you cannot deduct an amount for capital expenditure you incur in relation to the asset to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—you cannot deduct an amount for such expenditure.

Deduction

You can deduct, in equal proportions over a period of 5 income years starting in the year in which you incur it, capital expenditure you incur:

in relation to your business; or

in relation to a business that used to be carried on; or

in relation to a business proposed to be carried on; or

to liquidate or deregister a company of which you were a *member, to wind up a partnership of which you were a partner or to wind up a trust of which you were a beneficiary, that carried on a business.

However, you can deduct the capital expenditure in the income year in which you incur it if:

the expenditure is incurred in relation to a business that is proposed to be carried on; and

the expenditure is incurred:

in obtaining advice or services relating to the proposed structure, or proposed operation of the business; or

in payment to an *Australian government agency of fees, taxes or charges relating to establishing the business or its operating structure; and

you are a small business entity, or an entity covered by subsection (2B), for the income year, or both of the following apply:

you are not carrying on a business in the income year;

you are not *connected with, or an affiliate of, another entity that carries on a business in the income year and that is neither a small business entity, nor an entity covered by subsection (2B), for the income year.

An entity is covered by this subsection for an income year if:

the entity is not a small business entity for the income year; and

the entity would be a small business entity for the income year if:

each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $50 million; and

the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this subsection.

Limitations and exceptions

You can only deduct the expenditure, for a business that you carry on, used to carry on or propose to carry on, to the extent that the business is carried on, was carried on or is proposed to be carried on for a taxable purpose.

You can only deduct the expenditure, for a business that another entity used to carry on or proposes to carry on, to the extent that:

the business was carried on or is proposed to be carried on for a taxable purpose; and

the expenditure is in connection with:

your deriving assessable income from the business; and

the business that was carried on or is proposed to be carried on.

You cannot deduct anything under this section for an amount of expenditure you incur to the extent that:

it forms part of the *cost of a depreciating asset that you *hold, used to hold or will hold; or

you can deduct an amount for it under a provision of this Act other than this section; or

it forms part of the cost of land; or

it is in relation to a lease or other legal or equitable right; or

it would, apart from this section, be taken into account in working out:

a profit that is included in your assessable income (for example, under section 6-5 or 15-15); or

a loss that you can deduct (for example, under section 8-1 or 25-40); or

it could, apart from this section, be taken into account in working out the amount of a *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event; or

a provision of this Act other than this section would expressly make the expenditure non-deductible if it were not of a capital nature; or

a provision of this Act other than this section expressly prevents the expenditure being taken into account as described in paragraphs (a) to (f) for a reason other than the expenditure being of a capital nature; or

it is expenditure of a private or domestic nature; or

it is incurred in relation to gaining or producing exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

The exceptions in paragraphs (5)(d) and (f) do not apply to expenditure you incur to preserve (but not enhance) the value of goodwill if the expenditure you incur is in relation to a legal or equitable right and the value to you of the right is solely attributable to the effect that the right has on goodwill.

You cannot deduct an amount under paragraph (2)(c) in relation to a business proposed to be carried on unless, having regard to any relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the business is proposed to be carried on within a reasonable time.

You cannot deduct anything under this section for an amount of expenditure that, because of a market value substitution rule, was excluded from the *cost of a depreciating asset or the *cost base or reduced cost base of a *CGT asset.

Note: Some examples of market value substitution rules are subsection 40-180(2) (table item 8), subsection 40-190(3) (table item 1) and sections 40-765 and 112-20.

You cannot deduct anything under this section for an amount of expenditure you incur:

by way of returning an amount you have received (except to the extent that the amount was included in your assessable income or taken into account in working out an amount so included); or

to the extent that, for another entity, the amount is a *return on or of:

an *equity interest; or

a *debt interest that is an obligation of yours.

40-885 Non-arm’s length transactions

If you incurred capital expenditure, or received an amount, under an arrangement and:

there is at least one other party to the arrangement with whom you did not deal at *arm’s length; and

apart from this section:

the amount of the expenditure would be more than the *market value of what it was for; or

the amount you received would be less than the market value of what it was for;

the amount of expenditure, or the amount received, you take into account under this Subdivision is that market value.

Subdivision 40-J — Capital expenditure for the establishment of trees in carbon sink forests

Guide to Subdivision 40-J

40-1000 What this Subdivision is about

You can deduct amounts for capital expenditure incurred for establishing trees that meet the requirements for constituting a carbon sink forest.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

40-1005 Deduction for expenditure for establishing trees in carbon sink forests

40-1010 Expenditure for establishing trees in carbon sink forests

40-1015 Carbon sequestration by trees

40-1020 Certain expenditure disregarded

40-1025 Non-arm’s length transactions

40-1030 Extra deduction for destruction of trees in carbon sink forest

40-1035 Getting information if you acquire a carbon sink forest

Operative provisions

40-1005 Deduction for expenditure for establishing trees in carbon sink forests

You can deduct an amount for an income year if:

you or another entity incurred capital expenditure that is covered under section 40-1010 in relation to particular trees; and

you satisfy a condition in subsection (5) for the trees for at least part of the income year; and

you are carrying on a business in the income year; and

you use the land occupied by the trees for the primary and principal purpose of carbon sequestration by the trees (see section 40-1015); and

your purposes in using the land occupied by the trees do not include any of the following:

felling the trees;

using the trees for commercial horticulture; and

you do not use the land in connection with:

a managed investment scheme; or

a forestry managed investment scheme.

The amount of the deduction is worked out under this formula:

where:

establishment expenditure is the amount of expenditure mentioned in subsection (1).

write-off days in income year is the number of days in the income year:

that occur within the period:

starting on the first day of the income year in which the trees are established; and

ending 14 years and 105 days after that day; and

on which you use the land occupied by the trees for the primary and principal purpose of carbon sequestration by the trees; and

on which you satisfy a condition in subsection (5) for the trees.

write-off rate is 7%.

You cannot deduct more in total than the amount of capital expenditure incurred for establishing the trees up to the time at which they are established.

The conditions are as follows:

40-1010 Expenditure for establishing trees in carbon sink forests

Expenditure is covered under this section in relation to particular trees if:

the trees are established in an income year; and

you incur or another entity incurs the expenditure in the income year or an earlier income year for establishing the trees; and

(c) the entity incurring the expenditure (the establishing entity) is carrying on a *business in the income year; and

the establishing entity’s primary and principal purpose for establishing the trees is carbon sequestration by the trees (see section 40-1015); and

the establishing entity’s purposes for establishing the trees do not include any of the following:

felling the trees;

using the trees for commercial horticulture; and

the establishing entity does not incur the expenditure under:

a managed investment scheme; or

a forestry managed investment scheme; and

all of the conditions in subsection (2) are satisfied for the trees; and

the establishing entity gives the Commissioner, in accordance with subsection (4), a statement that:

sets out all information necessary to determine whether all of the conditions in subsection (2) are satisfied for the trees; and

is in the approved form.

The conditions are as follows:

at the end of the income year, the trees occupy a continuous land area in Australia of 0.2 hectares or more;

at the time the trees are established, it is more likely than not that they will:

attain a crown cover of 20% or more; and

reach a height of at least 2 metres;

on 1 January 1990, the area occupied by the trees was clear of other trees that:

attained, or were more likely than not to attain, a crown cover of 20% or more; and

reached, or were more likely than not to reach, a height of at least 2 metres;

the establishment of the trees meets the requirements of the guidelines mentioned in subsection (3).

The Climate Change Minister must, by legislative instrument, make guidelines about environmental and natural resource management in relation to the establishment of trees for the purposes of carbon sequestration.

The statement mentioned in paragraph (1)(h) is to be given to the Commissioner no later than:

if the establishing entity lodges its income tax return for the income year within 5 months after the end of the income year—the day the establishing entity lodges that income tax return; or

otherwise—5 months after the end of the income year.

(5) However, expenditure is not covered under this section if the *Climate Change Secretary gives the Commissioner a notice under subsection (6) in relation to the trees.

The Climate Change Secretary must give the Commissioner a notice in writing under this subsection if the Climate Change Secretary is satisfied that one or more of the conditions in subsection (2) have not been satisfied for the trees.

(7) A person may apply to the *ART for review of a decision (as defined in the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024) of the *Climate Change Secretary to give a notice under subsection (6).

The Commissioner may give the Climate Change Secretary a copy of the statement mentioned in paragraph (1)(h), for the purposes of subsections (5), (6) and (7).

40-1015 Carbon sequestration by trees

Carbon sequestration by trees means the process by which trees absorb carbon dioxide from the atmosphere.

40-1020 Certain expenditure disregarded

In working out a deduction under this Subdivision in relation to the establishment of trees, disregard expenditure incurred:

in draining swamp or low-lying land; or

in clearing land.

40-1025 Non-arm’s length transactions

If an entity incurred capital expenditure under an arrangement and:

there is at least one other party to the arrangement with whom the entity did not deal at *arm’s length; and

apart from this section, the amount of the expenditure would be more than the *market value of what it was for;

the amount of expenditure taken into account under this Subdivision is that market value.

40-1030 Extra deduction for destruction of trees in carbon sink forest

You can deduct the amount worked out under subsection (2) for an income year if:

you or another entity incurred capital expenditure that is covered under section 40-1010 in relation to particular trees; and

you use the land occupied by the trees for the primary and principal purpose of carbon sequestration by the trees; and

the trees are destroyed during the income year; and

you satisfy a condition in subsection 40-1005(5) for the trees just before they are destroyed.

Work out the amount of the deduction as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the total of the amounts you could have deducted under this Subdivision in relation to the trees for the period:

starting on the first day of the income year in which the trees are established; and

ending when the trees were destroyed;

assuming that, during that period, you satisfied a condition in the table in subsection 40-1005(5).

Step 2. Subtract from the expenditure that is covered under section 40-1010 in relation to the trees:

the result from step 1; and

any amount you received (under an insurance policy or otherwise) for the destruction.

The remaining amount (if positive) is your deduction under subsection (1).

This deduction is in addition to any deduction for the income year under section 40-1005.

40-1035 Getting information if you acquire a carbon sink forest

This section applies if:

you or another entity incurred capital expenditure; and

the expenditure is covered under section 40-1010 in relation to particular trees; and

you begin to satisfy a condition in the table in subsection 40-1005(5) for the trees.

You may give the last entity (if any) that satisfied a condition mentioned in subsection 40-1005(5) for the trees a written notice requiring the entity to give you any or all of the following information:

the amount of the expenditure covered under section 40-1010 in relation to the trees;

the income year in which the trees were established.

The notice must:

be given within 60 days of your beginning to satisfy the condition mentioned in paragraph (1)(c); and

specify a period of at least 60 days within which the information must be given; and

set out the effect of subsection (4).

Note: Subsections (5), (6) and (7) explain how this subsection operates if the entity to which the notice is to be given is a partnership.

Requirement to comply with notice

The entity to whom the notice is given must not intentionally refuse or fail to comply with the notice.

Penalty: 10 penalty units.

Giving the notice to a partnership

If the entity to whom the notice is given is a partnership:

you may give it to the partnership by giving it to any of the partners (this does not limit how else you can give it); and

the obligation to comply with the notice is imposed on each of the partners (not on the partnership), but may be discharged by any of them.

A partner must not intentionally refuse or fail to comply with that obligation.

Penalty: 10 penalty units.

Subsection (6) does not apply if another partner has already complied with that obligation.

Note: A defendant bears an evidential burden in relation to the matters in subsection (7), see subsection 13.3(3) of the Criminal Code.

Limits on giving a notice

Only one notice can be given in relation to the same trees.

Subdivision 40-K — Farm-in farm-out arrangements

Guide to Subdivision 40-K

40-1095 What this Subdivision is about

The costs and termination values of parts of interests in mining, quarrying or prospecting rights that are transferred under farm-in farm-out arrangements are reduced by the market value of the exploration benefits conferred under the arrangements.

Table of sections

Farm-in farm-out arrangements and exploration benefits

40-1100 Meaning of farm-in farm-out arrangement and exploration benefit

Consequences for transferors

40-1105 Treatment of certain exploration benefits received under farm-in farm-out arrangements

40-1110 Cost of split interests resulting from farm-in farm-out arrangements

40-1115 Deductions relating to receipt of exploration benefits

40-1120 Cost base and reduced cost base of exploration benefits etc.

40-1125 Effect of exploration benefits on the cost of mining, quarrying or prospecting information

Consequences for transferees

40-1130 Consequences of certain exploration benefits provided under farm-in farm-out arrangements

Farm-in farm-out arrangements and exploration benefits

40-1100 Meaning of farm-in farm-out arrangement and exploration benefit

(1) A farm-in farm-out arrangement is an *arrangement under which:

(a) an entity (the transferor) transfers, or agrees to transfer, part of the entity’s interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right to another entity (the transferee); and

in exchange for the transfer, the transferee provides to the transferor one or more *exploration benefits.

(2) The transferee provides an exploration benefit to the transferor if:

the transferee:

conducts *exploration or prospecting for *minerals, or quarry materials, obtainable by mining and quarrying operations; or

undertakes to conduct exploration or prospecting for minerals, or quarry materials, obtainable by mining and quarrying operations; or

funds, on the transferor’s behalf, expenditure that the transferor incurs in relation to exploration or prospecting by the transferor or another entity (other than the transferee); or

undertakes to fund, on the transferor’s behalf, expenditure that the transferor incurs in relation to exploration or prospecting by the transferor or another entity (other than the transferee); and

the exploration or prospecting relates to the part of the transferor’s interest in the *mining, quarrying or prospecting right that the transferor does not transfer, or agree to transfer, under the arrangement; and

in a case where the transferor conducts the exploration or prospecting—expenditure incurred by the transferor relating to the exploration or prospecting is:

included in the *cost of *mining, quarrying or prospecting information *held by the transferor; or

included in any other depreciating asset, held by the transferor, for which the decline in value is provided under section 40-80; or

expenditure, of a kind referred to in subsection 40-730(1), that meets the requirements of subsection (3) of this section; and

in a case where the transferor does not conduct the exploration or prospecting—were the transferor to conduct the exploration or prospecting, expenditure incurred by the transferor relating to the exploration or prospecting would:

be included in the cost of mining, quarrying or prospecting information held by the transferor; or

be included in any other depreciating asset, held by the transferor, for which the decline in value is provided under section 40-80; or

be expenditure, of a kind referred to in subsection 40-730(1), that meets the requirements of subsection (3) of this section.

Expenditure meets the requirements of this subsection if:

for that expenditure, the transferor satisfies, or would satisfy, one or more of paragraphs 40-730(1)(a) to (c); and

the expenditure is not of a kind referred to in subsection 40-730(2) or (3); and

the expenditure is not of a kind that another provision of this Act provides is not deductible.

Consequences for transferors

40-1105 Treatment of certain exploration benefits received under farm-in farm-out arrangements

If, under a farm-in farm-out arrangement, you receive an exploration benefit in relation to the transfer of part of your interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right, the termination value of the part of the interest is reduced by the *market value of the exploration benefit.

40-1110 Cost of split interests resulting from farm-in farm-out arrangements

Despite section 40-205, if:

under a farm-in farm-out arrangement, you provide a part of your interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and

because of subsection 40-115(2), this Division applies as if you had split your interest into the part you stopped *holding and the rest of your interest;

then:

the first element of the *cost of the asset that consists of the part you stopped holding is a reasonable proportion of the amount you are taken to have paid under section 40-185 for any economic benefit involved in splitting your interest; and

the first element of the cost of the asset that consists of the rest of your interest is the sum of:

the *adjustable value of your interest just before it was split; and

a reasonable proportion of the amount you are taken to have paid under section 40-185 for any economic benefit involved in splitting your interest.

40-1115 Deductions relating to receipt of exploration benefits

If:

under a farm-in farm-out arrangement, you receive an exploration benefit in exchange for providing a part of your interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and

because of section 40-1105, the termination value of the interest you provide is reduced (including reduced to nil);

you are not entitled to a deduction under a provision of this Act in relation to your expenditure consisting of the provision of that part.

If:

under a farm-in farm-out arrangement, you receive an exploration benefit in exchange for providing a part of your interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and

because of section 40-1105, the termination value of the interest you provide is reduced (including reduced to nil); and

the exploration benefit consists of another party to the arrangement funding on your behalf, or undertaking to fund on your behalf, expenditure that you incur in relation to exploration or prospecting;

your entitlement (if any) to a deduction under a provision of this Act in relation to that expenditure is reduced to the same extent as the extent to which the expenditure is reasonably attributable to the exploration benefit.

40-1120 Cost base and reduced cost base of exploration benefits etc.

If:

under a farm-in farm-out arrangement, you receive an exploration benefit; and

the benefit involves one or more undertakings of the kinds referred to in subparagraphs 40-1100(2)(a)(ii) and (iv);

the first element of the *cost base and the *reduced cost base of the benefit are reduced by the *market value of the undertakings.

40-1125 Effect of exploration benefits on the cost of mining, quarrying or prospecting information

If:

you *hold a depreciating asset that is *mining, quarrying or prospecting information; and

under a farm-in farm-out arrangement, you receive an exploration benefit; and

an amount or expenditure would, apart from this section, be included in the second element of the *cost of the asset;

do not include that amount or expenditure in the second element to the extent (if any) that it is reasonably attributable to the exploration benefit.

Consequences for transferees

40-1130 Consequences of certain exploration benefits provided under farm-in farm-out arrangements

If, under a farm-in farm-out arrangement, you provide an exploration benefit in relation to the transfer to you of part of another entity’s interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right:

the first element of the *cost of the part of the interest is reduced by the *market value of the exploration benefit; and

if, for providing the exploration benefit, you receive a reward as a result of which an amount would, apart from this paragraph, be included in your assessable income—the entire amount of the reward is not assessable income and is not exempt income; and

subsection 40-730(3) does not apply in relation to expenditure that you incur under the arrangement if the reduction in market value under paragraph (a) took into account your liability to incur that expenditure.

A reduction under paragraph(1)(a) may be a reduction to nil.

Division 41 — Additional deduction for certain new business investment

Guide to Division 41

41-1 What this Division is about

You may be able to deduct an amount in relation to a depreciating asset for the 2008-09, 2009-10, 2010-11 or 2011-12 income year if:

you can deduct an amount for the decline in value for the asset for the relevant year under Subdivision 40-B; and

you make certain new investments in respect of the asset in the period starting on 13 December 2008 and ending on 31 December 2009; and

the total of those new investments is at least $1000 (for small businesses) or $10,000 (for other businesses).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

41-5 Object of Division

41-10 Entitlement to deduction for investment

41-15 Amount of deduction

41-20 Recognised new investment amount

41-25 Investment commitment time

41-30 First use time

41-35 New investment threshold

Operative provisions

41-5 Object of Division

The object of this Division is to provide a temporary business tax break for Australian businesses using assets in Australia, with a view to encouraging business investment and economic activity.

41-10 Entitlement to deduction for investment

You can deduct an amount for an income year in relation to an asset if:

the asset is a depreciating asset, other than an intangible asset; and

you can deduct an amount under section 40-25 in relation to the asset for the income year; and

the income year is the 2008-09, 2009-10, 2010-11 or 2011-12 income year; and

the total of the *recognised new investment amounts for the income year in relation to the asset equals or exceeds the new investment threshold for the income year in relation to the asset.

Subsection 355-715(2) (tax offset for assets used for R&D activities) does not apply to a deduction under subsection (1).

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), in determining whether you can deduct the amount in relation to the asset under section 40-25 for the income year:

disregard section 40-90 (reduction in cost where debt is forgiven); and

disregard subsection 40-365(5) (reduction in cost for replacement asset where involuntary disposal); and

disregard Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities); and

disregard subsection 355-715(2) (tax offset for assets used for R&D activities).

Counting additional recognised new investment amounts for the purposes of meeting the threshold

(4) For the purposes of paragraph (1)(d), treat each of the following as a *recognised new investment amount for the income year in relation to the asset (the relevant asset):

a recognised new investment amount for a previous income year in relation to the relevant asset;

a recognised new investment amount for the income year or a previous income year in relation to another asset, if:

the other asset is part of a set of assets including the relevant asset; or

the other asset is identical, or substantially identical, to the relevant asset;

a recognised new investment amount for the income year or a previous income year in relation to an asset *held by another entity, if:

(i) subsection 40-35(1) (jointly held depreciating assets) applies in relation to the relevant asset because it is your interest in an asset (the underlying asset); and

the asset held by the other entity is the other entity’s interest in the underlying asset.

41-15 Amount of deduction

The amount that you can deduct is:

if the new investment threshold for the income year in relation to the asset is $1000 (small business entities)—50% of the total of the *recognised new investment amounts for the income year in relation to the asset; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply but subsection (3), (4) or (5) applies—10% of that total; or

otherwise—the sum of:

30% of the total of the recognised new investment amounts for the income year in relation to the asset that meet the condition in subsection (2); and

10% of the total of the other recognised new investment amounts for the income year in relation to the asset.

A recognised new investment amount meets the condition in this subsection if:

the investment commitment time for the amount occurred before 1 July 2009; and

the first use time for the amount occurred before 1 July 2010.

This subsection applies if the income year is the 2011-12 income year.

This subsection applies if:

you can deduct the amount because of paragraph 41-10(4)(a); and

the new investment threshold for the income year in relation to the asset exceeds the total of the *recognised new investment amounts for the income year in relation to the asset that meet the condition in subsection (2).

This subsection applies if:

you can deduct the amount because of paragraph 41-10(4)(b) or (c); and

the new investment threshold for the income year in relation to the asset exceeds the sum of:

the total of the *recognised new investment amounts for the income year in relation to the asset that meet the condition in subsection (2); and

the total of the amounts treated under paragraph 41-10(4)(b) or (c) (as the case requires) as recognised new investment amounts for the income year in relation to the asset that meet the condition in subsection (2).

41-20 Recognised new investment amount

An amount is a recognised new investment amount for the income year in relation to the asset if:

either:

the amount is included in the first element of the asset’s *cost (worked out in accordance with Subdivision 40-C); or

the amount is included in the second element of the asset’s cost under paragraph 40-190(2)(a); and

the investment commitment time for the amount occurs in the period:

starting at 12.01 am, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 December 2008; and

ending on 31 December 2009; and

the first use time for the amount occurs:

no later than the end of the income year; and

no later than 31 December 2010; and

at the first use time for the amount, it is reasonable to conclude that you will use the asset principally in Australia for the principal purpose of carrying on a business; and

if the amount is included in the first element of the asset’s cost—the first use time for the amount is the first time you or any other entity have used the asset, or have it installed ready for use, for any purpose; and

you have not been entitled to a deduction under this Division for any previous income year in relation to the amount.

(2) Treat the requirements in paragraph (1)(d) as not being met if, at the first use time for the amount, it is reasonable to conclude that the asset will never be located in Australia.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(e), disregard any previous use of the asset that was merely for the purposes of reasonable testing or trialling.

(4) Treat the requirements in paragraph (1)(e) as not being met if the amount becomes included in the first element of the asset’s *cost at a time because of paragraph 40-205(a) (splitting depreciating assets) or 40-210(a) (merging depreciating assets).

In determining the amount of a recognised new investment amount, disregard:

subsection 40-90(2) (reduction in cost where debt is forgiven); and

paragraph 40-365(5)(a) (reduction in cost for replacement asset where involuntary disposal).

41-25 Investment commitment time

(1) The investment commitment time for the amount is:

if the amount is included in the first element of the asset’s *cost—the time at which you:

enter into a contract under which you *hold the asset at that time, or will hold the asset at a later time; or

start to construct the asset; or

start to hold the asset in some other way; or

if the amount is included in the second element of the asset’s cost—the time at which you enter into a contract, or start construction, for the economic benefit in relation to which the amount becomes, or will become, included in that element under paragraph 40-190(2)(a).

Integrity rule

Subsection (3) applies in relation to an amount if:

at a time, you:

enter into a contract under which you *hold an asset at that time, or will hold the asset at a later time; or

start to construct an asset; or

start to hold an asset in some other way; and

at a later time, you engage in conduct that results in you:

entering into a contract under which you hold the asset mentioned in paragraph (a) (or an identical or substantially similar asset) at that later time, or will hold that asset (or an identical or substantially similar asset) at an even later time; or

starting to construct an asset that is identical or substantially similar to the asset mentioned in paragraph (a); or

starting to hold the asset mentioned in paragraph (a) (or an identical or substantially similar asset) in some other way; and

you engage in that conduct for the purpose, or for purposes that include the purpose, of becoming entitled to a deduction under this Division.

(3) Despite paragraph (1)(a), the investment commitment time for an amount to which that paragraph would otherwise apply is the time mentioned in paragraph (2)(a).

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) and subsection (2), treat yourself as having started to construct an asset at a time if you first incur expenditure in respect of the construction of the asset at that time.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), treat yourself as having started construction for an economic benefit at a time if you first incur expenditure in respect of the construction for the benefit at that time.

Options

To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this section, you do not enter into a contract under which you *hold an asset merely because you acquire an option to enter into such a contract.

41-30 First use time

The first use time for the amount is:

if the amount is included in the first element of the asset’s *cost—the time at which you start to use the asset, or have it installed ready for use; or

if the amount is included in the second element of the asset’s cost—the later of:

the time at which it becomes included in that element under paragraph 40-190(2)(a); or

the time mentioned in paragraph (a).

41-35 New investment threshold

The new investment threshold for an income year (the relevant income year) in relation to an asset means:

$1000 if you are a small business entity during any of the following income years:

the income year in which occurs the investment commitment time for any recognised new investment amount for the asset in relation to the relevant income year;

the income year in which occurs the first use time for any such amount;

the relevant income year; or

otherwise—$10,000.

Division 43 — Deductions for capital works

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 43

43-A Key operative provisions

43-B Establishing the deduction base

43-C Your area and your construction expenditure

43-D Deductible uses of capital works

43-E Special rules about uses

43-F Calculation of deduction

43-G Undeducted construction expenditure

43-H Balancing deduction on destruction of capital works

Guide to Division 43

43-1 What this Division is about

You can deduct certain capital expenditure on assessable income producing buildings and other capital works. This Division sets out the rules for working out those deductions.

Table of sections

43-2 Key concepts used in this Division

43-2 Key concepts used in this Division

The following graphic introduces the key concepts used in this Division and shows the relationships between them.

Subdivision 43-A — Key operative provisions

Guide to Subdivision 43-A

43-5 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision contains the key operative provisions for this Division, including all of the deduction entitlement provisions. You should read all of this Subdivision to understand how this Division works.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

43-10 Deductions for capital works

43-15 Amount you can deduct

43-20 Capital works to which this Division applies

43-25 Rate of deduction

43-30 No deduction until construction is complete

43-35 Requirement for registration under the Industry Research and Development Act

43-40 Deduction for destruction of capital works

43-45 Certain anti-avoidance provisions

43-50 Links and signposts to other parts of the Act

43-55 Anti-avoidance—arrangement etc. with tax-exempt entity

Operative provisions

43-10 Deductions for capital works

You can deduct an amount for capital works for an income year.

You can only deduct the amount if:

the capital works have a construction expenditure area; and

there is a pool of construction expenditure for that area; and

you use your area in the income year in the way set out in Table 43-140 (Current year use).

Note 1: The deduction is limited to capital works to which this Division applies, see section 43-20.

Note 2: Amongst other things, the definition of your area ensures that only owners and certain lessees of capital works, and certain holders of quasi-ownership rights over land on which capital works are constructed, can deduct an amount under this Division.

43-15 Amount you can deduct

The amount you can deduct is a portion of your construction expenditure. However, it cannot exceed the amount of undeducted construction expenditure for your area.

Note: The limit in this subsection has 2 effects:

• It ensures that not more than 100% of your construction expenditure can be deducted.

• It imposes a time limit on the period over which your construction expenditure can be deducted. For capital works begun before 27 February 1992, that period will be 25 years if the rate of deduction is 4% or 40 years if the rate is 2.5%. For other capital works, the period will be 25 years or 40 years or some period between 25 and 40 years depending on their use.

Your deduction is calculated under section 43-210 or 43-215.

43-20 Capital works to which this Division applies

Buildings

This Division applies to capital works being a building, or an extension, alteration or improvement to a building:

begun in Australia after 21 August 1979; or

begun outside Australia after 21 August 1990.

Note: Section 43-80 explains when capital works begin.

Structural improvements

This Division also applies to capital works (other than capital works referred to in subsection (1)) begun after 26 February 1992 that are structural improvements, or extensions, alterations or improvements to structural improvements, whether they are in or outside Australia.

Some examples of structural improvements are:

sealed roads, sealed driveways, sealed car parks, sealed airport runways, bridges, pipelines, lined road tunnels, retaining walls, fences, concrete or rock dams and artificial sports fields; and

earthworks that are integral to the construction of a structural improvement (other than a structural improvement described in subsection (4)), for example, embankments, culverts and tunnels associated with a runway, road or railway.

This Division does not apply to structural improvements being:

earthworks that:

are not integral to the installation or construction of a structure; and

are permanent (assuming they are maintained in reasonably good order and condition); and

can be economically maintained in reasonably good order and condition for an indefinite period;

for example, unlined channels, unlined basins, earth tanks and dirt tracks; or

earthworks that merely create artificial landscapes, for example, grass golf course fairways and greens, gardens, and grass sports fields.

Environment protection earthworks

This Division also applies to capital works being earthworks, or extensions, alterations or improvements to earthworks, if:

they are constructed as a result of carrying out of environmental protection activities; and

they can be economically maintained in reasonably good order and condition for an indefinite period; and

they are not integral to the construction of capital works; and

the expenditure on the capital works was incurred after 18 August 1992.

Note: This subsection allows you to deduct an amount for some earthworks that are excluded by paragraph (4)(a) if the earthworks are constructed in carrying out an environmental protection activity.

43-25 Rate of deduction

For capital works begun after 26 February 1992, there is a basic entitlement to a rate of 2.5% for parts used as described in Table 43-140 (Current year use). The rate increases to 4% for parts used as described in Table 43-145 (Use in the 4% manner).

For capital works begun before 27 February 1992 and used as described in Table 43-140, the rate is:

4% if the capital works were begun after 21 August 1984 and before 16 September 1987; or

2.5% in any other case.

Note: Section 43-80 explains when capital works begin.

43-30 No deduction until construction is complete

You cannot deduct an amount for any period before the completion of construction of the capital works even though you used them, or part of them, before completion.

43-35 Requirement for registration under the Industry Research and Development Act

You may deduct an amount under this Division on the basis of using capital works for the purpose of conducting *R&D activities only if:

(a) you are registered under section 27A (registering R&D activities) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for the R&D activities for an income year; or

if you are an *R&D partnership—an *R&D entity, who was a partner of the R&D partnership at some time while the R&D activities were conducted, is registered under that section for the R&D activities for an income year.

Note 1: R&D activities must be conducted in connection with a business carried on for the purpose of producing assessable income, see section 43-195.

Note 2: You may still deduct an amount under this Division if you were registered for the R&D activities under former section 39J (Registration of eligible companies) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 (see section 355-200 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

43-40 Deduction for destruction of capital works

You can deduct an amount if all or a part of your area is destroyed in an income year and:

(a) you have been allowed, or can claim, a deduction under this Division, or former Division 10C or 10D of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, for your area; and

there is an amount of undeducted construction expenditure for your area; and

you were using your area in the way that applies to it under Table 43-140 (Current year use) immediately before the destruction or, if not, neither you nor any other entity used your area for any purpose since it was last used by you in that way.

The deduction is allowable in the income year in which the destruction occurs, and is calculated under section 43-250.

Note: The effect of this provision is to allow you to deduct an amount in the income year in which the capital works are destroyed for all of your construction expenditure that has not yet been deducted. However, you must reduce the deduction by any insurance and salvage receipts.

43-45 Certain anti-avoidance provisions

These anti-avoidance provisions:

(a) section 51AD (Deductions not allowable in respect of property under certain leveraged arrangements) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

Division 16D (Certain arrangements relating to the use of property) of Part III of that Act;

apply to your deductions under this Division for an asset as if you were the owner of the asset instead of any other person.

43-50 Links and signposts to other parts of the Act

Links

No part of a pool of construction expenditure can be a deduction, or taken into account in working out the amount of a deduction, under a provision of this Act other than this Division.

No part of an amount incurred by an entity in acquiring capital works for which there is a pool of construction expenditure can be a deduction, or taken into account in working out the amount of a deduction, under a provision of this Act other than this Division.

You will be taken not to be the owner of any part of capital works that are the subject of a lease to which you have chosen to apply section 104-115 (CGT event F2). The lessee or sublessee will be taken to be the owner of that part.

Note 1: Choosing to apply section 104-115 results in the lease being treated for CGT purposes more like an outright disposal.

Note 2: See subsection 43-180(3) for the effect of the rule in subsection (3) of this section on the need to own 10 apartments, units or flats in an apartment building.

Signposts

(6) There are special record-keeping rules that apply to this Division in subsection 262A(4AJA) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Your deductions under this Division may be reduced if any of your commercial debts have been forgiven in the income year: see Subdivision 245-E.

Where you have had a deduction under this Division an amount may be included in your assessable income if the expenditure was financed by limited recourse debt that has terminated: see Division 243.

43-55 Anti-avoidance—arrangement etc. with tax-exempt entity

You will not be allowed a deduction under this Division for an income year if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

you entered into an arrangement with:

an entity to which section 50-5, 50-10, 50-15, 50-25, 50-30, 50-40 or 50-45 (dealing with exempt income) applies; or

(ii) an STB (within the meaning of Division 1AB of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) whose *ordinary income and *statutory income is exempt from income tax;

under which you were to pay an amount, or transfer property, directly or indirectly, to the entity; and

the amount of the payment or the value of the property is calculated by reference to the amount of a deduction allowable to you under this Division; and

a purpose of the arrangement that is not a merely incidental purpose is to ensure that the benefit of the deduction would pass wholly or substantially to the entity, whether directly or indirectly.

Subsection (1) applies to *arrangements entered into with an entity referred to in subparagraph (1)(a)(i) after 1 May 1980 that relate to deductions for *hotel buildings or *apartment buildings begun before 1 July 1997.

Subsection (1) also applies to *arrangements entered into with an entity referred to in subparagraph (1)(a)(ii) after 30 June 1994 that relate to deductions for *hotel buildings or *apartment buildings begun before 1 July 1997.

Subdivision 43-B — Establishing the deduction base

Guide to Subdivision 43-B

43-60 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision explains the meaning of the terms construction expenditure, construction expenditure area and pool of construction expenditure.

Table of sections

43-65 Explanatory material

Operative provisions

43-70 What is construction expenditure?

43-72 Meaning of forestry road, timber operation and timber mill building

43-75 Construction expenditure area

43-80 When capital works begin

43-85 Pools of construction expenditure

43-90 Table of intended use at time of completion of construction

43-95 Meaning of hotel building and apartment building

43-100 Certificates by Industry Innovation and Science Australia

43-65 Explanatory material

Expenditure in respect of the construction of capital works is only eligible for a deduction under this Division if there is a construction expenditure area for the capital works. The area defined as the construction expenditure area may comprise the whole of the capital works or only part of them.

Whether there is a construction expenditure area for capital works and how it is identified depends on the following factors:

the type of expenditure incurred;

the time when the capital works began;

the area of the capital works that is to be owned, leased or held by the entity that incurred the expenditure;

for capital works begun before 1 July 1997, the area of the capital works that was to be used in a particular manner.

A pool of construction expenditure is that part of an amount of construction expenditure that is attributable to a particular construction expenditure area.

Operative provisions

43-70 What is construction expenditure?

(1) Construction expenditure is capital expenditure incurred in respect of the construction of capital works.

(2) Construction expenditure does not include:

expenditure on acquiring land; or

expenditure on demolishing existing structures; or

expenditure on clearing, levelling, filling, draining or otherwise preparing the construction site prior to carrying out excavation works; or

expenditure on landscaping; or

expenditure on plant; or

expenditure on property for which a deduction is allowable, or would be allowable if the property were for use for the *purpose of producing assessable income, under:

Subdivision 40-F (about primary production depreciating assets), Subdivision 40-G (about capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders), Subdivision 40-H (about capital expenditure that is immediately deductible) or Subdivision 40-I (about capital expenditure that is deductible over time); or

(ii) the former Division 330 of this Act or the former Division 10, 10AAA or 10AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (all of which dealt with mining and/or quarrying); or

(iii) section 73A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about expenditure on scientific research); or

(iv) the former Subdivision 387-A of this Act or the former section 75D of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (both of which allowed deductions for capital expenditure to prevent land degradation); or

(v) the former Subdivision 387-B of this Act or the former section 75B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (both of which allowed deductions for capital expenditure on facilities to conserve or convey water); or

(vi) the former Subdivision 387-G of this Act or the former section 124F or 124JA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (all of which allowed deductions for capital expenditure on forestry roads and/or timber mill buildings); or

any of these kinds of expenditure if a deduction is allowable for the expenditure, or would be allowable if property had been used for the purpose of producing assessable income:

mining capital expenditure or transport capital expenditure;

expenditure on a forestry road in connection with carrying on a timber operation for a taxable purpose;

expenditure for the construction or acquisition of a timber mill building;

expenditure on a depreciating asset you can deduct under subsection 40-80(1) (about exploration and prospecting); or

expenditure on property for which a deduction under section 355-305 or 355-520 is allowable for the property, or would be allowable if the property were for use for conducting *R&D activities; or

(h) eligible heritage conservation expenditure within the meaning of the former Subdivision AAD of Division 17 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

expenditure that you cannot deduct because of section 26-100 (about water infrastructure improvement expenditure).

43-72 Meaning of forestry road, timber operation and timber mill building

(1) A forestry road is a road constructed primarily and principally for the purpose of providing access to an area to enable:

trees to be planted or tended in the area; or

timber felled in the area to be removed.

For this purpose, a road includes any bridge, culvert or similar work forming part of the road.

(2) A timber operation is:

planting or tending trees for felling; or

felling standing timber; or

removing felled timber; or

milling felled timber or processing it in another way.

(3) A timber mill building is a building:

for use primarily and principally:

in carrying on your business of milling timber for a taxable purpose; or

as residential accommodation for your employees engaged in connection with the business, or for their dependants; and

located in a forest, and in or adjacent to the area where timber milled in the business is, or is to be, felled.

43-75 Construction expenditure area

(1) The construction expenditure area of capital works begun after 30 June 1997 is the part of the capital works on which the *construction expenditure was incurred that, at the time when it was incurred by an entity, was to be owned or leased by the entity or held by the entity under a *quasi-ownership right over land granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency.

Note: Section 43-80 explains when capital works begin.

(2) The construction expenditure area of capital works begun before 1 July 1997 is the part of the capital works on which the *construction expenditure was incurred that:

at the time when it was incurred by an entity, was to be owned or leased by the entity or held by the entity under a *quasi-ownership right over land granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency; and

at the time of completion of construction, was to be used in the way described in Column 3 of Table 43-90 (intended use at completion) for the time period when the capital works began as set out in Column 1.

(3) There is taken to be a construction expenditure area for capital works purchased by an entity from another entity if:

the capital works would have had a construction expenditure area but for the fact that the other entity did not incur capital expenditure in constructing the capital works; and

the other entity is not an associate of the entity; and

the other entity constructed the capital works on land that it owned or leased in the course of a business that included the construction and sale of capital works of that kind.

Note: Subsection (3) makes capital works purchased from a speculative builder eligible for deduction in the hands of the first and subsequent purchasers.

The construction of the capital works must be complete before the construction expenditure area is determined.

Only one construction expenditure area is created each time an entity constructs capital works.

Example: An entity undertakes the construction of a building. During the course of construction, the entity makes 3 progress payments to the builder. There is still only one construction expenditure area.

A separate construction expenditure area will be created each time an entity undertakes the construction of capital works.

Example: In the diagram below, area 1 relates to the original construction of a building which gives rise to one construction expenditure area. Area 2 is a subsequent extension of the same building which gives rise to another, while area 3 is a later renovation of the entire building which gives rise to another.

43-80 When capital works begin

Capital works are taken to begin when the first step in the construction phase starts. For example, the pouring of foundations or sinking of pilings for a building.

Note 1: Capital works begun after 15 September 1987 are taken to have begun before 16 September 1987 in certain circumstances. See section 43-220.

Note 2: The time when capital works begin is relevant for determining whether the capital works qualify for deduction, the use to which those works must be put, the rate of deduction and the calculation mechanism used. However, the time when capital works begin does not limit what qualifies as construction expenditure.

43-85 Pools of construction expenditure

(1) A pool of construction expenditure is so much of the *construction expenditure incurred by an entity on capital works as is attributable to the *construction expenditure area.

In applying subsection (1) in a case to which subsection 43-75(3) (dealing with purchases from speculative builders) applies, assume that the expenditure incurred by the other entity was capital expenditure, but that the limitations in subsection 43-70(2) (which sets out types of expenditure that are not construction expenditure) still apply to the other entity’s expenditure.

Note: The builder’s profit margin does not form part of the construction expenditure of the purchaser.

43-90 Table of intended use at time of completion of construction

Note: There are special rules that explain or qualify the uses described in Column 3 of this Table. These rules are set out in Subdivision 43-E (sections 43-155 to 43-195). For example, certain facilities that are not commonly provided in a hotel, motel or guest house in Australia are taken not to be used or for use to operate a hotel, motel or guest house, see subsection 43-180(6).

43-95 Meaning of hotel building and apartment building

(1) A hotel building is:

a building begun after 21 August 1979 and before 18 July 1985, or after 26 February 1992 and before 1 July 1997, that, at the time of completion of its construction, was intended to be used in the way referred to in Column 3 of Table 43-90 (intended use at completion) for a hotel building; or

a building begun after 30 June 1997 and that, in the income year, is used in the way referred to in Column 3 (time period 2) of Table 43-145 (use in the 4% manner) for a hotel building.

(2) An apartment building is:

a building begun after 21 August 1979 and before 18 July 1985, or after 26 February 1992 and before 1 July 1997, that, at the time of completion of its construction, was intended to be used in the way referred to in Column 3 of Table 43-90 for an apartment building; or

a building begun after 30 June 1997 and that, in the income year, is used in the way referred to in Column 3 (time period 2) of Table 43-145 for an apartment building.

43-100 Certificates by Industry Innovation and Science Australia

A certificate by Industry Innovation and Science Australia stating that activities carried on by or for an entity were or were not *core R&D activities or *supporting R&D activities is conclusive for the purposes of this Division.

Note: Core R&D activities and supporting R&D activities are kinds of R&D activities.

Subdivision 43-C — Your area and your construction expenditure

Guide to Subdivision 43-C

43-105 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision explains your area and your construction expenditure.

Table of sections

43-110 Explanatory material

Operative provisions

43-115 Your area and your construction expenditure—owners

43-120 Your area and your construction expenditure—lessees and quasi-ownership right holders

43-125 Lessees’ or right holders’ pools can revert to owner

43-130 Identifying your area on acquisition or disposal

43-110 Explanatory material

You can only get a deduction under this Division for an income year if you own, lease or hold part of a construction expenditure area of capital works. The area you own, lease or hold is called your area.

In working out your deductions, you must identify your area for each construction expenditure area of the capital works.

Your area may comprise the whole of the construction expenditure area or part of it.

Operative provisions

Note: In certain circumstances the notional buyer of property is taken to be its owner (see subsection 240-20(2)).

43-115 Your area and your construction expenditure—owners

(1) Your area is the part of the *construction expenditure area that you own.

(2) Your construction expenditure is the portion of the *pool of construction expenditure that is attributable to your area.

43-120 Your area and your construction expenditure—lessees and quasi-ownership right holders

Own expenditure

(1) Your area is the part of the *construction expenditure area that you lease, or hold under a *quasi-ownership right over land granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency, and that:

is attributable to a pool of construction expenditure that you incurred; and

you have continuously leased or held since the construction was completed.

Earlier lessees’ or holders’ expenditure

(2) Your area is the part of the *construction expenditure area that you lease, or hold under a *quasi-ownership right over land granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency, and that:

is attributable to a pool of construction expenditure incurred by another lessee or holder of a quasi-ownership right over land; and

has been continuously leased or held since the construction was completed by the lessee or holder who incurred the expenditure or an assignee of that lessee’s lease or that holder’s quasi-ownership right over land.

(3) Your construction expenditure is the portion of the *pool of construction expenditure that is attributable to your area.

43-125 Lessees’ or right holders’ pools can revert to owner

An amount that relates to a pool of construction expenditure that arises as a result of expenditure incurred by a lessee or a holder of a *quasi-ownership right over land:

can only be deducted by a lessee or a holder of a quasi-ownership right over land who satisfies subsection 43-120(1) or (2); and

cannot be deducted by the owner of the capital works while there is a lessee or a holder of a quasi-ownership right over land who satisfies that subsection.

The owner of the capital works may deduct an amount that relates to that pool if there is no longer a lessee or a holder of a *quasi-ownership right over land who satisfies subsection 43-120(1) or (2).

43-130 Identifying your area on acquisition or disposal

There will be a separate your area at each time in an income year when you:

acquire an additional part of a construction expenditure area; or

dispose of some but not all of a construction expenditure area.

Example: You own half of a building (part A) throughout the income year, and you acquire the other half (part B) on 1 January. This section ensures that part A is your area for the entire year and that part B is your area for the second 6 months of the year.

Note: This ensures that the same area is not counted twice in calculating your deduction. You will have to make separate deduction calculations if you have identified more than one area as your area of the capital works.

Subdivision 43-D — Deductible uses of capital works

Guide to Subdivision 43-D

43-135 What this Subdivision is about

You can only get a deduction under this Division if you use your area in a way described in Table 43-140 or 43-145 of this Subdivision.

Table of sections

Using your area

43-140 Using your area in a deductible way

43-145 Using your area in the 4% manner

Industrial activities

43-150 Meaning of industrial activities

Build to rent developments

43-151 Meaning of active build to rent development area

43-152 Build to rent developments

43-153 Build to rent developments—eligibility

43-154 Notice of events

43-154A References to buildings

Using your area

43-140 Using your area in a deductible way

The following table sets out the way you must use your area in an income year for a deduction to be allowed under section 43-10 (the main deduction provision). The relevant use depends on the time when the capital works began (Column 1) and the type of capital works (Column 2). Column 3 sets out the use.

Note 1: There are special rules that explain or qualify the uses described in Column 3 of this Table. These rules are set out in Subdivision 43-E (sections 43-155 to 43-195). For example:

• Your area is taken to be used, for use or available for use for a purpose or in a way if it is maintained ready for use for that purpose or in that way. See section 43-160.

• R&D activities must be conducted in connection with a business carried on for the purpose of producing assessable income, see section 43-195.

Note 2: If Division 250 applies to you and an asset that is a capital work:

if section 250-150 applies—you are taken not to be using the capital work for the purpose of producing assessable income, or for the purpose of conducting R&D activities, to the extent specified under subsection 250-150(3); or

otherwise—you are taken not to be using the capital work for such a purpose.

This Division applies to an entity as if the entity used property for the *purpose of producing assessable income if the entity uses the property for:

environmental protection activities; or

the environmental impact assessment of a project;

unless a provision of this Act expressly provides that that use is not for the purpose of producing assessable income.

43-145 Using your area in the 4% manner

(1) You use a part of *your area in the 4% manner if you use it as described in the following Table. The relevant use depends on the time when the capital works began (Column 1) and the type of capital works (Column 2). Column 3 sets out the use.

Note: There are special rules that explain or qualify the uses described in Column 3 of this Table. These rules are set out in Subdivision 43-E (sections 43-155 to 43-195). For example:

• Your area is taken to be used, for use or available for use for a purpose or in a way if it is maintained ready for use for that purpose or in that way. See section 43-160.

• A suite of rooms in a hotel building may be treated as one bedroom, see subsection 43-180(2).

(2) You use a part of *your area in the 4% build to rent manner if:

you use the part of your area for the *purpose of producing assessable income; and

(b) that part is, or is part of, an *active build to rent development area (the eligible development); and

if the build to rent compliance period for each of the *dwellings in the eligible development has ended:

no other entity is using the eligible development, or any part of the eligible development, for the purpose of producing assessable income; and

at each earlier time (if any) at which you or another entity used the eligible development, or any part of the eligible development, for the purpose of producing assessable income and at which the eligible development was an active build to rent development, no other entity was using the eligible development, or any part of the eligible development, for the purpose of producing assessable income.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(c), disregard use of the eligible development, or any part of the eligible development, for the *purpose of producing assessable income by providing management services.

Industrial activities

43-150 Meaning of industrial activities

Industrial activities means:

(a) any of the following activities (core activities):

operations where manufactured items are derived from other goods even if those manufactured items are themselves used as parts or materials in the manufacture of other items;

operations (other than packing, placing in containers or labelling) by which manufactured items are brought into or maintained in the form or condition in which they are sold or used, even if they are for sale or use as parts or materials in the manufacture of other items;

the separation of a metal or a compound of a metal from its ore (not including crushing, grinding, breaking, screening or sizing to facilitate that separation) or the treatment or processing of a metal or a compound of a metal after its separation;

for a metal or a compound of a metal not requiring separation—applying to the metal or compound a treatment or process which, if the metal or compound had required separation, would not have been applied until after the separation;

refining petroleum;

scouring or carbonising wool;

milling timber;

freezing primary products;

printing, lithographing or engraving, or a similar process, in the course of carrying on a business as a publisher, printer, lithographer or engraver;

curing meat or fish;

producing chilled or frozen meat;

pasteurising milk;

canning or bottling foodstuffs;

producing electric current, hydraulic power, steam, compressed air or gases (other than natural gas) for the purpose of sale, or use wholly or mainly in carrying on another activity mentioned in this paragraph; or

any of the following activities:

the packing, placing in containers or labelling of any goods resulting from the carrying on of core activities;

the disposal of waste substances resulting from the carrying on of core activities;

the cleansing or sterilising of bottles, vats or other containers used by the entity to store goods to be used in carrying on core activities or goods resulting from the carrying on of core activities;

the assembly, maintenance, cleansing, sterilising or repair of property used in carrying on core activities;

the storage, within premises in which core activities are carried on, or premises contiguous to those premises, of goods in carrying on core activities, goods in relation to which core activities have commenced but not finally been completed or goods resulting from core activities;

but does not include the preparation of food or drink (whether for consumption on the premises where it is prepared or elsewhere) in, or in premises occupied in connection with, a hotel, motel, boarding house, catering establishment, restaurant, cafe, milk-bar, coffee shop, retail shop or similar establishment.

Build to rent developments

43-151 Meaning of active build to rent development area

(1) An active build to rent development area is a part of a building comprising any of the following:

the *dwellings of an active build to rent development;

any *common areas for those dwellings.

(2) An active build to rent development is a *build to rent development that has:

*commenced to be an active build to rent development (see subsections 43-152(1) and (2)); and

not *ceased to be an active build to rent development (see subsection 43-152(4)).

(3) A common area for *dwellings of a *build to rent development is an area, facility or amenity:

intended for use for the purposes of those dwellings; or

intended for use for the purposes of those dwellings and any other dwellings in the same building.

43-152 Build to rent developments

Commencement

On and after the first day on which a building has 50 or more *dwellings:

that satisfy subsection 43-153(1); and

that the owner of the dwellings chooses to form a build to rent development in accordance with subsection (6) of this section;

those dwellings are a build to rent development, of the building, that commences to be an *active build to rent development on that day.

Also, on and after the first day (if any):

after the most recent instance of a build to rent development of a building *commencing to be an active build to rent development; and

on which the building has 50 or more *dwellings:

that satisfy subsection 43-153(1); and

that were not part of a build to rent development just before that day; and

that the owner of the dwellings chooses to form a build to rent development in accordance with subsection (6) of this section;

those dwellings are a build to rent development, of the building, that commences to be an active build to rent development on that day unless an active build to rent development *expands under subsection (3) on that day to include the dwellings.

Expansion

(3) If a building has a *build to rent development (the existing development) that has *commenced to be an *active build to rent development, on the first day (if any) on which the building has *dwellings (the new dwellings):

that taken together with the dwellings of the existing development for which the build to rent compliance period has not ended, satisfy subsection 43-153(1); and

that are not already a part of a build to rent development; and

that the owner of the dwellings chooses to form part of the existing development in accordance with subsection (6) of this section;

the existing development expands to comprise:

the dwellings of the existing development; and

the new dwellings.

Cessation

(4) A *build to rent development ceases to be an *active build to rent development if the dwellings of the active build to rent development for which the *build to rent compliance period has not ended cease to satisfy subsection 43-153(1).

Build to rent compliance period

(5) The build to rent compliance period for a *dwelling of an *active build to rent development is the 15 years beginning on the day after the day on which:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the development *commences to be an active build to rent development; or

if:

the dwelling is not part of the development when it commences to be an active build to rent development; but

the development *expands to include the dwelling;

the development expands to include the dwelling.

To make a choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), subparagraph (2)(b)(iii) or paragraph (3)(c) in respect of *dwellings, the owner of the dwellings must:

make the choice in the approved form; and

give it to the Commissioner.

The choice is taken to be made on the following day:

if:

the owner nominates a day in the choice; and

the Commissioner receives the choice before the nominated day;

the nominated day; or

otherwise—the day the Commissioner receives the choice.

43-153 Build to rent developments—eligibility

For the purposes of section 43-152, *dwellings of a building satisfy this subsection at a particular time if, at that time:

each of the dwellings is:

available to the public to be tenanted by way of lease for a period of 5 years or more in accordance with any requirements determined under subsection (1A); or

being tenanted by way of lease as a result of being made available to the public to be tenanted by way of lease for a period of 5 years or more in accordance with any requirements determined under subsection (1A); and

all of the dwellings are:

residential premises; and

taxable Australian real property; and

not commercial residential premises; and

all of the dwellings and *common areas for the dwellings are owned by a single entity; and

the number of the dwellings that are *affordable dwellings is equal to or greater than:

10% of the number of the dwellings; or

if the number of dwellings worked out under subparagraph (i) is not a whole number—that number rounded down to the nearest whole number of dwellings; and

subsection (5) applies to each of the affordable dwellings.

Note: For the purposes of paragraph (a), a lease is still offered to the public for a period of 5 years or more even if a prospective tenant subsequently requests and the lessor accepts a shorter lease.

For the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(a)(i) and (ii), the Minister may, by legislative instrument, determine requirements relating to the terms of the lease.

For the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(a)(i) and (ii), disregard a requirement determined under subsection (1A) if complying with that requirement would contravene a law of a State or Territory.

Affordable dwellings

(2) A *dwelling is an affordable dwelling if the requirements determined under subsection (3) in relation to the dwelling are met.

For the purposes of subsection (2), the Minister must, by legislative instrument, determine requirements relating to a dwelling. Without limiting this subsection, the requirements may include requirements relating to:

the rent payable under the lease for the dwelling; or

the income of the tenant or prospective tenant.

A reference in paragraph (1)(a) to the public in relation to a lease of a dwelling is taken to be a reference to a segment of the public if:

the dwelling is an affordable dwelling; and

requirements determined under subsection (3) require that the dwelling be tenanted, or be available to be tenanted, only to that segment of the public.

(5) For the purposes of paragraph (1)(e), this subsection applies in relation to an affordable dwelling (the test dwelling) if:

where:

number of comparable affordable dwellings means the number of the dwellings (including the test dwelling) that:

are *affordable dwellings; and

have the same number of bedrooms as the test dwelling; and

have a floor area that is at least equal to the floor area of the test dwelling, but does not exceed 110% of that floor area.

number of comparable non-affordable dwellings means the number of the dwellings that:

are not *affordable dwellings; and

have the same number of bedrooms as the test dwelling; and

have a floor area that is at least equal to the floor area of the test dwelling, but does not exceed 110% of that floor area.

Eligibility during construction

Dwellings of a building are taken to satisfy subsection (1) at a particular time if:

one or more of the dwellings is not tenanted, and not available to be tenanted, at that time as mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) because of:

construction of an extension, alteration or improvement to any of the dwellings or the building; or

the making of repairs to any of the dwellings or the building; and

the dwellings satisfied subsection (1) just before paragraph (a) of this subsection began to apply; and

it is reasonable to expect that the dwellings will satisfy subsection (1) when the construction or repairs are completed.

Commissioner’s discretion

(7) The Commissioner may determine that *dwellings of a building are taken to satisfy one or more of paragraphs (1)(a), (d) and (e) (the eligibility criteria) at all times during a particular period, if:

the entity that owns the dwellings applies to the Commissioner in the approved form; and

the Commissioner is satisfied of the following:

the dwellings did not otherwise satisfy the eligibility criteria at all times during the period due to events outside the control of the entity;

the entity took all reasonable steps to ensure that the dwellings would satisfy the eligibility criteria as soon as practicable;

at the time of the determination, the dwellings satisfy the eligibility criteria;

at the time of the determination, the entity intends that each dwelling will satisfy subsection (1) for the remainder of its build to rent compliance period.

A determination made under subsection (7) has effect according to its terms.

43-154 Notice of events

If any of the following events happen in relation to a build to rent development, each entity to which subsection (3) applies must notify the Commissioner of the event:

the development *commences to be an active build to rent development;

the development *expands;

the *ownership interest in the development is acquired by another entity;

the development *ceases to be an active build to rent development.

The notice must be:

in the approved form; and

given no later than 28 days after the event.

This subsection applies to the following entities:

the owner of the development at the time just before the event happens;

(b) if in the income year in which the event happens, an entity is required to notify the Commissioner under subsection 16-150(4) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 of an amount to which subsection 12-450(5) in that Schedule applies, to any extent, because of a *dwelling of the development—the entity;

if the event is the event mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) of this section—the entity that acquires the *ownership interest in the development.

43-154A References to buildings

A reference in sections 43-151 to 43-153 to a building includes a reference to any other buildings that are on the same or adjacent land.

Subdivision 43-E — Special rules about uses

Guide to Subdivision 43-E

43-155 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision contains special rules about uses of capital works. It is relevant to whether you can get a deduction for capital works and also to the rate of that deduction. The rules in this Subdivision affect the uses of capital works described in Tables 43-90, 43-140 and 43-145.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

43-160 Your area is used for a purpose if it is maintained ready for use for the purpose

43-165 Temporary cessation of use

43-170 Own use—capital works other than hotel and apartment buildings

43-175 Own use—hotel and apartment buildings

43-180 Special rules for hotel and apartment buildings

43-185 Residential or display use

43-190 Use of facilities not commonly provided, and of certain buildings used to operate a hotel, motel or guest house

43-195 Use for R&D activities must be in connection with a business

Operative provisions

43-160 Your area is used for a purpose if it is maintained ready for use for the purpose

A part of your area is taken to be used, for use or available for use for a particular purpose or in a particular manner at a time if, at that time:

it was maintained ready for use for that purpose or in that manner; and

it was not used or for use for any other purpose or in any other manner; and

its use or intended use for that purpose or in that manner had not been abandoned.

Note 1: Construction must be complete before you can deduct an amount, see section 43-30.

Note 2: This section affects Tables 43-140 and 43-145.

43-165 Temporary cessation of use

A part of your area is taken to be used, for use or available for use for a particular purpose or in a particular manner if its use for that purpose or in that manner temporarily ceases because of:

the construction of an extension, alteration or improvement, or the making of repairs; or

seasonal or climatic factors.

Note: This section affects Tables 43-140 and 43-145.

43-170 Own use—capital works other than hotel and apartment buildings

A part of capital works, other than a hotel building or an apartment building, is taken not to be used for the *purpose of producing assessable income if that part is for use mainly for, or in association with, residential accommodation by you or an associate.

Note: This subsection affects Tables 43-140 and 43-145.

Subsection (1) does not apply to use by an associate under an arrangement:

to which you and the associate are parties; and

that is of a kind that the parties could reasonably be expected to have entered into if they had been dealing with each other at *arm’s length; and

that was not entered into for the purpose of obtaining a deduction under this Division.

If property that constitutes the whole or part of capital works, other than a hotel building or an apartment building, is part of an individual’s home, the property is taken to be used, or for use, wholly or mainly for or in association with residential accommodation.

Note: This subsection affects Tables 43-90 and 43-140.

43-175 Own use—hotel and apartment buildings

An entity is taken not to have used a bedroom in a hotel building, or an apartment, unit or flat in an apartment building, for the *purpose of producing assessable income at a time if, at that time, the bedroom, apartment, unit or flat is used, or reserved for use, by:

the entity; or

if the entity is a partnership—any of the partners in the partnership.

Note: This subsection affects Tables 43-140 and 43-145.

Also, an entity is taken not to use a bedroom in a hotel building, or an apartment, unit or flat in an apartment building for any purpose at a time if:

at that time, a right to use or a right to occupy the bedroom, apartment, unit or flat was vested in the entity; and

that right was vested in the entity because the entity was, at that time, a member of a company, a beneficiary of a trust estate or a partner in a partnership.

Note: This subsection affects Tables 43-90, 43-140 and 43-145.

43-180 Special rules for hotel and apartment buildings

Rules about counting rooms or apartments etc.

A bedroom in a hotel building, or an apartment, unit or flat in an apartment building, is taken to be used or available for use wholly for short-term accommodation for travellers in a period if it is used or available for use mainly for short-term accommodation for travellers in that period.

Note: This subsection ensures that a limited period of non-short-term traveller accommodation use will be disregarded in counting the number of rooms provided the bedroom, apartment, unit or flat is used mainly for short-term traveller accommodation.

For the purpose of counting the number of bedrooms in a hotel building, if 2 or more rooms that are bedrooms or include a bedroom are for use together as a suite of rooms, the suite is taken to constitute one bedroom.

Despite subsection 43-50(3) (which treats you as not being the owner of certain capital works), you can still count an apartment, unit or flat in relation to which CGT event F2 has happened in working out whether you own or lease at least 10 apartments, units or flats in an apartment building if you own or lease at least one other apartment, unit or flat in the building.

Note 1: CGT event F2 results in a lease with a term of 50 years or more being treated for CGT purposes more like an outright disposal.

Note 2: Subsection 43-50(3) treats you as not being the owner of capital works that are the subject of such a lease.

Rules about hotel or apartment complexes

A group of buildings that constitutes a complex of buildings is taken to be one hotel building or apartment building, and none of the buildings in the group is taken to be a separate building.

The construction of a hotel building or apartment building is taken to be an extension of another building if, after completion of the construction, those buildings are taken to be one building under subsection (4).

Note: Subsections (4) and (5) ensure that a hotel or apartment building that provides short-term traveller accommodation in detached buildings will be treated as a single building so that the 10 hotel room/apartment test is applied to the complex as a whole. It also has the effect that the complex as a whole must be completed before there can be a construction expenditure area.

Rules about facilities not commonly provided in Australia

If a hotel building contains a facility of a kind that is not commonly provided in a hotel, motel or guest house in Australia, the facility is taken not to be used or for use to operate a hotel, motel or guest house.

If an apartment building contains a facility of a kind that is not commonly provided in a hotel, motel or guest house in Australia, the facility is taken not to be a facility for use in association with providing short-term accommodation for travellers in apartments, units or flats.

Note: Subsections (6) and (7) exclude areas such as casinos from the construction expenditure area of a hotel building or apartment building.

43-185 Residential or display use

A building, other than a hotel building or an apartment building, or an extension, alteration or improvement to such a building, begun after 19 July 1982 and before 18 July 1985 is taken not to be used for the *purpose of producing assessable income or exempt income if it is used or for use wholly or mainly for exhibition or display in connection with:

the sale of all or part of any building; or

the lease of all or part of any building for use wholly or mainly for or in association with residential accommodation.

Note: Subsection (1) affects time period 2 in Table 43-90 and time period 3 in Table 43-140.

A building, other than a hotel building or an apartment building, begun after 19 July 1982 and before 18 July 1985 is taken not to be used for the *purpose of producing assessable income if it is used or available for use wholly or mainly for or in association with residential accommodation.

Note: Subsection (2) affects time period 2 in Table 43-90 and time period 3 in Table 43-140.

A building, other than a hotel building or an apartment building, begun after 17 July 1985 and before 1 July 1997 is taken not to be used for the *purpose of producing assessable income if it is used or for use wholly or mainly for exhibition or display in connection with the sale of all or part of any building.

Note: Subsection (3) affects time periods 2 and 3 in Table 43-140.

43-190 Use of facilities not commonly provided, and of certain buildings used to operate a hotel, motel or guest house

A facility in a hotel building or an apartment building that is not commonly provided in a hotel, motel or guest house in Australia is taken not to be used, or for use, for or in association with residential accommodation if the facility is part of a building begun after 19 July 1982 and before 18 July 1985.

Note: This subsection means that, for time period 2 in Table 43-90, a facility referred to in subsection 43-180(6) or (7) (dealing with facilities not commonly provided in Australia) is taken to be a non-residential building if it satisfies the use test in Column 3 of that table for a building of that kind, and is therefore eligible for deduction even though it would ordinarily be taken to be used for residential accommodation.

A building, other than a hotel building or an apartment building, begun after 19 July 1982 and before 18 July 1985 that is used, or for use, wholly or mainly for the purpose of operating a hotel, motel or guest house is taken to be used or for use wholly or mainly for, or in association with, residential accommodation.

Note: This subsection ensures that hotels, motels and guest houses begun in the specified time period that do not satisfy the tests for hotel and apartment buildings (for example, because they had fewer than 10 bedrooms or apartments) do not qualify for a deduction under this Division.

43-195 Use for R&D activities must be in connection with a business

You are taken not to use capital works for *R&D activities unless you do so in connection with a business that you carry on for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

Note: This section affects Tables 43-90 and 43-140.

Subdivision 43-F — Calculation of deduction

Guide to Subdivision 43-F

43-200 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision shows you how to calculate the amount of a deduction under section 43-10. The calculations must be made separately for each area that is identified as your area.

There are 2 separate calculation provisions: One for capital works begun before 27 February 1992; and the other for capital works begun after 26 February 1992.

Table of sections

43-205 Explanatory material

Operative provisions

43-210 Deduction for capital works begun after 26 February 1992

43-215 Deduction for capital works begun before 27 February 1992

43-220 Capital works taken to have begun earlier for certain purposes

43-205 Explanatory material

Capital works begun before 27 February 1992

The calculation for these works is based on your construction expenditure and the applicable rate of deduction. There can be only one rate of deduction that applies to your area. However, reductions of deductions may apply.

You must reduce your deduction for any period in the income year that you did not own your area and use it in the way described in Table 43-140 (Current year use). Because there are 2 use tests in Table 43-140 for *hotel buildings and *apartment buildings (a general income producing test and a more specific hotel and short-term traveller accommodation use test), there are 2 reduction steps.

The first step reduces your deduction if part of your area was not used as a hotel building or apartment building. The second step reduces the deduction to the extent that your area is used only partly for the *purpose of producing assessable income. This occurs, for example, if you *derive both assessable and exempt income, or if part of your area is not used to produce assessable income for all or part of the period it was used as a hotel building or apartment building.

Capital works begun after 26 February 1992

The calculation for these works is based on a portion of your construction expenditure and the applicable rate of deduction. There can be 2 rates of deduction for your area depending on the way you use it.

If 2 rates apply, there will be a separate calculation for the part of your area used in the way described in Table 43-140 and for the part of your area used in the way described in Table 43-145 (Use in the 4% manner). A gross deduction and subsequent reduction is calculated for each.

The reduction is the same as the second reduction for capital works begun before 27 February 1992.

Operative provisions

43-210 Deduction for capital works begun after 26 February 1992

Step 1 Calculate the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

portion of your CE is the portion of *your construction expenditure that is attributable to the part of *your area that you used in the *4% manner.

days used is the number of days in the income year that:

you owned or were the lessee of that part of your area and used it in the *4% manner; or

you were the holder of that part of your area under a *quasi-ownership right over land granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency, and used that part of your area in the 4% manner.

Step 2 Reduce the Step 1 amount by the extent to which the part referred to in Step 1 was used only partly for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

• part of your income from the part referred to in Step 1 is exempt income; or

• part of the part referred to in Step 1 was not used for the purpose of producing assessable income or was not available for that use; or

• the part of the part referred to in Step 1 was not used for such a purpose during a part of the days used period.

Step 3 Calculate the amount worked out using the formula:

Note: This Step applies if:

where:

portion of your CE is the portion of *your construction expenditure that is attributable to the part of *your area that you did not use in the *4% manner but was used as described in Table 43-140 (Current year use).

days used is the number of days in the income year that:

you owned or were the lessee of that part of your area and used it in that manner; or

you were the holder of that part of your area under a *quasi-ownership right over land granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency, and used that part of your area in that manner.

Step 4 Reduce the Step 3 amount by the extent to which the part referred to in Step 3:

for a hotel building or apartment building—was used only partly for the *purpose of producing assessable income; or

for any other capital works—was used only partly for the purpose of *producing assessable income or conducting *R&D activities.

Note: This Step applies if:

• part of your income from the part referred to in Step 3 is exempt income; or

• part of the part referred to in Step 3 was not used for the purpose of producing assessable income (or R&D activities) or was not available for that use; or

• the part of the part referred to in Step 3 was not used for such a purpose during a part of the days used period.

Step 5 Add the Step 2 and Step 4 amounts.

Step 6 The amount of your deduction is the lesser of your Step 5 amount or the *undeducted construction expenditure for *your area.

43-215 Deduction for capital works begun before 27 February 1992

Step 1 Calculate the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

your CE is *your construction expenditure.

days used is the number of days in the income year that you owned or were the lessee of *your area and used it in the way that applies to the capital works under Table 43-140 (Current year use).

applicable rate is:

0.04 if the capital works began after 21 August 1984 and before 16 September 1987; or

0.025 in any other case.

Note: For the purpose of working out the applicable rate, capital works begun after 15 September 1987 are taken to have begun before 16 September 1987 in certain circumstances. See section 43-220.

Step 2 This step applies only to *hotel buildings and *apartment buildings. Reduce the Step 1 amount by the extent to which:

for a hotel building—any part of your area was not used wholly or mainly to operate a hotel, motel or guest house; or

for an apartment building—any part of your area was not used wholly for or in association with providing short-term accommodation for travellers.

Step 3 Reduce the Step 1 or 2 amount by the extent to which:

for a hotel building or apartment building—your area was used only partly for the *purpose of producing assessable income; or

for any other capital works—your area was used only partly for the *purpose of producing assessable income or conducting *R&D activities.

Note: This Step applies if:

• part of your income from the capital works is exempt income; or

• part of the capital works were not used for the purpose of producing assessable income or were not available for that use; or

• the capital works were not used for such a purpose during a part of the days used period.

Step 4 The amount of your deduction is the lesser of your Step 3 amount or the *undeducted construction expenditure for *your area.

43-220 Capital works taken to have begun earlier for certain purposes

A building, other than a hotel building or an apartment building, or an extension, alteration or improvement to such a building, begun after 15 September 1987 is taken to have begun before 16 September 1987 if:

the construction was under a contract that was entered into before 16 September 1987, or was under 2 or more contracts any of which was entered into before that date; or

money was borrowed for a purpose that included the purpose of financing the construction under a contract or contracts entered into before 16 September 1987 by an entity that was, or by entities each of which was, a qualifying investor, and that money was used to finance the construction.

(2) An entity is a qualifying investor for the construction of a building if:

at the end of 15 September 1987, the entity was the owner or lessee of the land on which the building was constructed; or

the entity became the owner or lessee of the land under a contract entered into before 16 September 1987.

(3) An entity is a qualifying investor for the construction of an extension, alteration or improvement to a building if:

at the end of 15 September 1987, the entity was the owner or lessee of the building, or the part of the building to which the extension, alteration or improvement was made; or

the entity became the owner or lessee of the building or that part under a contract entered into before 16 September 1987.

Subdivision 43-G — Undeducted construction expenditure

Guide to Subdivision 43-G

43-225 What this Subdivision is about

The undeducted construction expenditure for your area is the part of your construction expenditure you have left to write off. It is used to work out:

• the number of years in which you can deduct amounts for your construction expenditure; and

• the amount that you can deduct under section 43-40 if your area or a part is destroyed.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

43-230 Calculating undeducted construction expenditure—common step

43-235 Post-26 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure

43-237 Post-26 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure—modification for active build to rent developments that have ceased

43-240 Pre-27 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure

Operative provisions

43-230 Calculating undeducted construction expenditure—common step

Identify the date when the capital works began.

Note 1: The date determines whether your calculation is to be made under section 43-235 (for post-26/2/92 expenditure) or 43-240 (for pre-27/2/92 expenditure).

Note 2: Section 43-80 explains when capital works begin.

(2) If you are calculating a deduction under Subdivision 43-F, identify the period (use period) that:

started when your area, or a part of it, was first used by any entity for any purpose after completion of the relevant construction; and

ended at the end of the preceding income year or, if you acquired your area during the income year, at the end of the day before the time of the acquisition.

(3) If you are calculating a deduction under Subdivision 43-H, identify the period (use period) that started at the time described in paragraph (2)(a) and ended at the time of the destruction.

43-235 Post-26 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure

Step 1 Calculate for each day in the use period the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

portion of your CE is the portion of *your construction expenditure that is attributable to the part of *your area that you used in the *4% manner.

Step 2 Calculate for each day in the use period the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

portion of your CE is the portion of *your construction expenditure that is attributable to the part of *your area that you did not use in the *4% manner.

Step 3 Add the aggregate of the amounts calculated under Steps 1 and 2.

Step 4 Deduct the sum of those amounts from *your construction expenditure. The result is the undeducted construction expenditure for *your area.

43-237 Post-26 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure—modification for active build to rent developments that have ceased

This section applies if:

a part of your area was an active build to rent development area; and

(b) on a day (the cessation day) in the income year or a prior income year, the *active build to rent development of the active build to rent development area *ceases to be an active build to rent development.

Section 43-235 applies to the part as if for each day in the use period:

before the cessation day; and

that the part was an active build to rent development;

you did not use the part in the *4% manner.

43-240 Pre-27 February 1992 undeducted construction expenditure

Step 1 Calculate for each day in the use period the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

your CE is *your construction expenditure.

applicable rate is:

0.04 if the capital works began after 21 August 1984 and before 16 September 1987; or

0.025 in any other case.

Note: For the purpose of working out the applicable rate, capital works begun after 15 September 1987 are taken to have begun before 16 September 1987 in certain circumstances. See section 43-220.

Step 2 Deduct the sum of the amounts calculated under Step 1 from *your construction expenditure. The result is the undeducted construction expenditure for *your area.

Subdivision 43-H — Balancing deduction on destruction of capital works

Guide to Subdivision 43-H

43-245 What this Subdivision is about

You may deduct an amount for the undeducted construction expenditure for your area if your area or part of it is destroyed in the circumstances described in section 43-40.

This Subdivision shows you how to work out that deduction.

The calculations in this Subdivision are made separately for each part of the capital works that is identified as your area.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

43-250 The amount of the balancing deduction

43-255 Amounts received or receivable

43-260 Apportioning amounts received for destruction

Operative provisions

43-250 The amount of the balancing deduction

Method statement

Step 1. Calculate the amount (if any) by which the undeducted construction expenditure for the part of your area that was destroyed exceeds the amounts you have received or have a right to receive for the destruction of that part.

Step 2. Reduce the amount at Step 1 if one or more of these happened to that part of your area:

Step 2 or 4 in section 43-210, or Step 2 or 3 in section 43-215, applied to you or another person for it;

you were, or another person was, not allowed a deduction for it under this Division;

(c) a deduction for it was not allowed or was reduced (for you or another person) under former Division 10C or 10D of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The reduction under this step must be reasonable.

43-255 Amounts received or receivable

The amounts you have received or have a right to receive for the destruction of that part of your area include:

an amount received under an insurance policy or otherwise for the destruction of that part; and

an amount received for disposing of property that was included in that part of your area, less any demolition expenditure incurred on the property.

43-260 Apportioning amounts received for destruction

If an amount received or receivable in respect of the destruction of property relates to both the part of your area for which you are claiming the balancing deduction and to property:

the cost of which did not form part of your construction expenditure; or

that is capital works that was not part of your area;

you must apportion the amount received or receivable to the amount that is attributable to the part of your area that was destroyed. The apportionment must be reasonable.

Division 44 — Build to rent development misuse tax

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 44

44-A Object of this Division

44-B Build to rent development misuse tax

44-C When tax is payable

Guide to Division 44

44-1 What this Division is about

This Division removes certain tax concessions for build to rent developments when they cease to be active build to rent developments.

Subdivision 44-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

Operative provisions

44-5 Object of this Division

Operative provisions

44-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to remove certain tax concessions for *build to rent developments when they *cease to be *active build to rent developments.

Subdivision 44-B — Build to rent development misuse tax

Guide to Subdivision 44-B

44-10 What this Subdivision is about

You are liable to pay a tax if a build to rent development you own ceases to be an active build to rent development. The tax is on an amount (called a build to rent misuse amount) related to past capital works deductions and withholding amounts (if any) for the active build to rent development.

Table of sections

Liability for tax

44-15 Liability for tax

Build to rent misuse amounts

44-20 Build to rent misuse amounts

44-25 Your build to rent capital works deduction amount

44-30 Your build to rent withholding amount

Liability for tax

44-15 Liability for tax

You are liable to pay build to rent development misuse tax for an income year if you have a build to rent misuse amount for the income year.

Build to rent misuse amounts

Note: The amount of tax is set out in the Capital Works (Build to Rent Misuse Tax) Act 2024.

44-20 Build to rent misuse amounts

(1) You have a build to rent misuse amount for an income year, equal to the amount worked under subsection (2), if the amount worked out under that subsection is greater than nil.

For the purposes of subsection (1), the amount is the sum of:

the amount that is the sum of your *build to rent capital works deduction amounts, worked out under section 44-25, for each build to rent development to which subsection (3) of this section applies for the income year (if any); and

the amount that is 10 times the sum of your *build to rent withholding amounts, worked out under section 44-30, for each build to rent development to which subsection (3) of this section applies for the income year (if any).

For the purposes of paragraphs (2)(a) and (b), this subsection applies to a build to rent development for an income year if:

the build to rent development *ceases to be an active build to rent development during the income year; and

you owned the *dwellings of the build to rent development immediately before that cessation.

44-25 Your build to rent capital works deduction amount

Your build to rent capital works deduction amount, for a *build to rent development that *ceases to be an *active build to rent development, is the amount worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Identify each income year in which, at any time during the year, the build to rent development was an active build to rent development.

Step 2. For each of those years:

identify each construction expenditure area of capital works that are or include the active build to rent development area of the build to rent development at any time during the year; and

calculate the amount worked out by the following formula for each construction expenditure area:

where:

active build to rent part, of the *construction expenditure area, is the part of the area that was the *active build to rent development area, or part of the active build to rent development area at any time during the year.

days used is the number of days in the income year that:

any entity owned or was the lessee of the active build to rent part and used it in the *4% build to rent manner; or

any entity was the holder of the active build to rent part under a *quasi ownership right over land granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency, and used it in the 4% build to rent manner.

portion of construction expenditure is the portion of *construction expenditure that is attributable to the *active build to rent part.

Step 3. Reduce the Step 2 amount for each construction expenditure area, for each year, by the extent to which the active build to rent part was used only partly for the *purpose of producing assessable income in the year.

Note: This step applies if:

part of the income from the active build to rent part is exempt income; or

part of the active build to rent part was not used for the purpose of producing assessable income or was not available for that use; or

the active build to rent part was not used for such a purpose during a part of the days used period.

Step 4. For each year, add up the amounts worked out under Step 3 for each construction expenditure area.

Step 5. Add up the Step 4 amounts for each year.

Step 6. Multiply the Step 5 amount by:

(a) if *you are a company (other than a company in the capacity of a trustee)—the *corporate tax rate for the income year in which the *build to rent development *ceases to be an *active build to rent development (the cessation year); or

(b) in any other case—the maximum rate specified in the table in Part I of Schedule 7 to the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 for the cessation year.

Step 7. Your build to rent capital works deduction amount is the Step 6 amount multiplied by 1.08.

Note: You can have more than one build to rent capital works deduction amount because there can be more than one build to rent development for which you have a build to rent capital works deduction amount.

44-30 Your build to rent withholding amount

Your build to rent withholding amount, for a *build to rent development that *ceases to be an *active build to rent development, is the amount worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Identify each income year in which, at any time during the year, the build to rent development was an active build to rent development.

Step 2. For each of those years, identify each fund payment made by the owner of the active build to rent development, or each part of such a fund payment, (if any) that is referable to any of the following:

a payment of rental income under a lease of a dwelling of the active build to rent development;

a *capital gain from a CGT event in relation to a dwelling of the active build to rent development.

Note: For the purposes of this step, it does not matter whether an amount must be withheld from a fund payment under Part 2-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Step 3. For each year add up the amounts of payments, or parts of payments, identified under Step 2.

Step 4. Add up the Step 3 amounts for each year.

Step 5. Your build to rent withholding amount is the Step 4 amount multiplied by 1.08.

Subdivision 44-C — When tax is payable

Guide to Subdivision 44-C

44-35 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision has rules about payment of build to rent development misuse tax.

Table of sections

44-40 When tax is payable—original assessments

44-45 When tax is payable—amended assessments

44-50 General interest charge

44-40 When tax is payable—original assessments

Your assessed build to rent development misuse tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives you notice of the assessment of the amount of the build to rent development misuse tax.

Note: For assessments of build to rent development misuse tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

44-45 When tax is payable—amended assessments

If the Commissioner amends your assessment, any extra assessed build to rent development misuse tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 21 days after the day the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

44-50 General interest charge

If an amount of assessed build to rent development misuse tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

begins on the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and

ends on the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the assessed build to rent development misuse tax;

general interest charge on any of the assessed build to rent development misuse tax.

Note: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 45 — Disposal of leases and leased plant

Guide to Division 45

45-1 What this Division is about

This Division is designed to prevent tax being avoided through:

the disposal of leased plant, or an interest in leased plant; or

the disposal of a partnership interest in a partnership that leased plant; or

the disposal of shares in a 100% subsidiary that leased plant;

where amounts have been deducted for the decline in value of the plant.

It includes amounts in assessable income. Any benefit received, and any reduction in a liability, is taken into account in calculating the amounts included.

Where the disposal of shares in a 100% subsidiary is involved, the companies in the former wholly-owned group may be made jointly and severally liable for tax that the former subsidiary does not pay.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

45-5 Disposal of leased plant or lease

45-10 Disposal of interest in partnership

45-15 Disposal of shares in 100% subsidiary that leases plant

45-20 Disposal of shares in 100% subsidiary that leases plant in partnership

45-25 Group members liable to pay outstanding tax

45-30 Reduction for certain plant acquired before 21.9.99

45-35 Limit on amount included for plant for which there is a CGT exemption

45-40 Meaning of plant and written down value

Operative provisions

45-5 Disposal of leased plant or lease

An amount is included in your assessable income if:

you have deducted or can deduct an amount for the decline in value of plant; and

for most of the time when you *held the plant, you leased it to another entity; and

all or part of the lease period occurred on or after 22 February 1999; and

on or after that day, you dispose of the plant or an interest in the plant, and that disposal constitutes a balancing adjustment event; and

(e) the sum of the following amounts is more than the plant’s *written down value or of that part of it that is attributable to that interest:

the money you receive or are entitled to receive for the disposal;

the amount of any reduction in a liability of yours as a result of the disposal;

the *market value of any other benefit you receive or are entitled to receive as a result of the disposal.

The amount included is the excess referred to in paragraph (1)(e). It is included for the income year in which the disposal occurred.

Example: Sean owns a leased asset. The asset has a written down value of $20,000. He has an outstanding loan for the asset of $60,000.

Sean sells a 50% interest in the asset to Leprechaun Pty Ltd for $40,000. Leprechaun agrees to take over 50% of Sean’s obligation to make debt service payments.

The excess referred to in paragraph 45-5(1)(e) is:

That amount is included in Sean’s assessable income.

This amount would be reduced if part of it is included in Sean’s assessable income under another provision (see subsection 45-5(5)).

Note 1: There is a reduction of the amount included for certain plant acquired before 21 September 1999: see section 45-30.

Note 2: There is a limit on the amount included for plant for which there is a CGT exemption: see section 45-35.

An amount is also included in your assessable income if:

you have deducted or can deduct an amount for the plant’s decline in value; and

for most of the time when you *held the plant, you leased it to another entity; and

all or part of the lease period occurred on or after 22 February 1999; and

on or after that day, you dispose of:

your interest in the plant, or part of it; or

a right under, or an interest in, the lease;

and that disposal does not constitute a balancing adjustment event.

The amount included is the sum of the following amounts:

the money you receive or are entitled to receive for the disposal;

the amount of any reduction in a liability of yours as a result of the disposal;

the *market value of any other benefit you receive or are entitled to receive as a result of the disposal;

It is included for the income year in which the disposal occurred.

However, an amount is not included in your assessable income under this section to the extent that:

it is included in that assessable income under a provision of this Act outside this Division; or

you apply it under section 40-365 (about offsetting balancing adjustments); or

roll-over relief is available for the disposal under section 40-340.

Note: There are special rules for disposals between 22 February 1999 and 21 September 1999: see Division 45 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

45-10 Disposal of interest in partnership

An amount is included in your assessable income if:

a partnership of which you are (or were) a member has deducted or can deduct an amount for the decline in value of plant; and

the deductions have been or would be reflected in your interest in the partnership net income or partnership loss; and

for most of the time when the partnership *held the plant, it leased it to another entity; and

all or part of the lease period occurred on or after 22 February 1999; and

on or after that day, you dispose of your interest in the plant, or part of it, and that disposal constitutes a balancing adjustment event; and

(f) the sum of the following amounts is more than that part of the plant’s *written down value that is attributable to that interest:

the money you receive or are entitled to receive for the disposal;

the amount of any reduction in a liability of yours as a result of the disposal;

the *market value of any other benefit you receive or are entitled to receive as a result of the disposal.

The amount included is the excess referred to in paragraph (1)(f). It is included for the income year in which the disposal occurred.

Example: Chris has a 50% share in a partnership formed to lease an asset. The asset has a written down value of $124,000 (of which Chris’ share is $62,000).

Chris assigns his partnership share to another entity for $34,000 plus the other entity agreeing to take over Chris’ obligations to service his share of the partnership debt (which is $165,000). The total consideration is:

The amount assessable under section 45-10 is the excess referred to in paragraph 45-10(1)(f), which is:

This amount would be reduced if part of it is included in Chris’ assessable income under another provision (see subsection 45-10(5)).

Note 1: There is a reduction of the amount included for certain plant acquired before 21 September 1999: see section 45-30.

Note 2: There is a limit on the amount included for plant for which there is a CGT exemption: see section 45-35.

An amount is also included in your assessable income if:

a partnership of which you are (or were) a member has deducted or can deduct an amount for the decline in value of plant; and

the deductions have been or would be reflected in your interest in the partnership net income or partnership loss; and

for most of the time when the partnership *held the plant, it leased it to another entity; and

all or part of the lease period occurred on or after 22 February 1999; and

on or after that day, you dispose of:

your interest in the plant, or part of it; or

a right under, or an interest in, the lease;

and that disposal does not constitute a balancing adjustment event.

The amount included is the sum of the following amounts:

the money you receive or are entitled to receive for the disposal;

the amount of any reduction in a liability of yours as a result of the disposal;

the *market value of any other benefit you receive or are entitled to receive as a result of the disposal.

It is included for the income year in which the disposal occurred.

However, an amount is not included in your assessable income under this section to the extent that:

it is included in that assessable income under a provision of this Act outside this Division; or

you apply it under section 40-365 (about offsetting balancing adjustments).

Note: There are special rules for disposals between 22 February 1999 and 21 September 1999: see Division 45 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

45-15 Disposal of shares in 100% subsidiary that leases plant

(1) A company (the former subsidiary) is treated as if it had disposed of *plant, received its *market value for that disposal and immediately reacquired it for the same amount if:

the former subsidiary has deducted or can deduct an amount for the decline in value of the plant; and

the former subsidiary was a *100% subsidiary of another company in a wholly-owned group at a time when it *held the plant; and

for most of the time when the former subsidiary held the plant, the plant was leased to another entity; and

the main business of the former subsidiary was to lease assets; and

all or part of the lease period occurred on or after 22 February 1999; and

on or after that day, the direct or indirect beneficial ownership of more than 50% of the *shares in the former subsidiary is acquired by an entity or entities none of which is a member of the wholly-owned group; and

the plant’s *written down value at the time of that acquisition is less than its market value at that time.

However, the former subsidiary is not treated as if it had disposed of plant and reacquired it if the main business of each of the entities that acquired the direct or indirect beneficial ownership of *shares in the former subsidiary is the same as the main business of the wholly-owned group of which the former subsidiary was a member.

The disposal and reacquisition of the plant:

is taken to have occurred when that direct or indirect beneficial ownership was acquired; and

is taken not to have affected any lease of the plant.

45-20 Disposal of shares in 100% subsidiary that leases plant in partnership

(1) A company (also the former subsidiary) is treated as if it had disposed of its interest in *plant, received its *market value for that disposal and immediately reacquired it for the same amount if:

a partnership of which the former subsidiary is (or was) a member has deducted or can deduct an amount for the decline in value of the plant; and

the former subsidiary was a *100% subsidiary of another company in a wholly-owned group at a time when:

it was a member of that partnership; and

the partnership *held the plant; and

for most of the time when the partnership held the plant, the plant was leased to another entity; and

the main business of the partnership was to lease assets; and

all or part of the lease period occurred on or after 22 February 1999; and

on or after that day, the direct or indirect beneficial ownership of more than 50% of the *shares in the former subsidiary is acquired by an entity or entities none of which is a member of the wholly-owned group; and

the plant’s *written down value at the time of that acquisition is less than its market value at that time.

However, the former subsidiary is not treated as if it had disposed of the interest and reacquired it if the main business of each of the entities that acquired the direct or indirect beneficial ownership of *shares in the former subsidiary is the same as the main business of the wholly-owned group of which the former subsidiary was a member.

The disposal and reacquisition of the interest:

is taken to have occurred when that direct or indirect beneficial ownership was acquired; and

is taken not to have affected any lease of the plant.

45-25 Group members liable to pay outstanding tax

The consequences specified in subsection (2) apply if:

an amount is included in the former subsidiary’s assessable income for an income year because of section 45-15 or 45-20; and

the former subsidiary is liable to pay an amount of income tax for that income year; and

the former subsidiary does not pay all of that income tax within 6 months after it became payable.

The consequences are that:

(a) the former subsidiary remains liable to pay the outstanding amount of income tax (reduced by any payments of tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Former Subsidiary Tax Imposition) Act 1999); and

(b) each company that was, just before the time when the direct or indirect beneficial ownership referred to in paragraph 45-15(1)(f) or 45-20(1)(f) was acquired, a member of the former subsidiary’s former *wholly-owned group, is jointly and severally liable to pay tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Former Subsidiary Tax Imposition) Act 1999.

45-30 Reduction for certain plant acquired before 21.9.99

The amount included in your assessable income under subsection 45-5(2) or 45-10(2) is reduced if:

you acquired the plant at or before 11.45 am, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 21 September 1999 and you disposed of the plant or an interest in it after that time; and

(b) the sum of the amounts (your proceeds) referred to in paragraph 45-5(1)(e) or 45-10(1)(f) is more than the plant’s *cost, or that part of it that is attributable to the interest you disposed of.

The amount included is reduced by the lesser of:

the amount (if any) by which the plant’s *cost base exceeds its *cost, or that part of the excess that is attributable to the interest you disposed of; and

the difference between your proceeds and the plant’s cost, or that part of its cost that is attributable to the interest you disposed of.

However, the amount is not reduced under this section if:

the plant was a pre-CGT asset at the time of the balancing adjustment event; or

a *capital gain or *capital loss from the plant or interest would be disregarded because of a provision listed in the table in this subsection if:

you had made the gain or loss from CGT event A1; and

that CGT event had happened at the time of the balancing adjustment event.

45-35 Limit on amount included for plant for which there is a CGT exemption

For plant to which subsection 45-30(3) applies there is a limit on the amount that can be included in your assessable income under subsection 45-5(2) or 45-10(2).

The limit for subsection 45-5(2) is the lesser of:

the excess referred to in paragraph 45-5(1)(e); and

the amounts you have deducted or can deduct for the decline in value of the plant or, if you disposed of an interest in the plant, so much of those amounts as is attributable to that interest.

The limit for subsection 45-10(2) is the lesser of:

the excess referred to in paragraph 45-10(1)(f); and

(b) that part of the amounts the partnership has deducted or can deduct for the decline in value of the *plant that has been or would be reflected in your interest in the partnership net income or partnership loss (your partnership amount) or, if you disposed of part of your interest in the plant, so much of your partnership amount as is attributable to that part of that interest.

45-40 Meaning of plant and written down value

(1) Plant includes:

articles, machinery, tools and rolling stock; and

animals used as beasts of burden or working beasts in a business, other than a *primary production business; and

fences, dams and other structural improvements, other than those used for domestic or residential purposes, on land that is used for agricultural or pastoral operations; and

structural improvements, other than a forestry road or structural improvements used for domestic or residential purposes, on land used in a business involving:

planting or tending trees in a plantation or forest that are intended to be felled; or

felling trees in a plantation or forest; or

transporting trees, or parts of trees, that you felled in a plantation or forest to the place where they are first to be milled or processed, or from which they are to be transported to the place where they are first to be milled or processed; and

structural improvements, other than those used for domestic or residential purposes, that are used wholly for operations (carried out in the course of a business) relating directly to:

taking or culturing pearls or pearl shell; or

taking or catching trochus, bêche-de-mer or green snails;

and that are situated at or near a port or harbour from which the business is conducted; and

structural improvements that are excluded from paragraph (c), (d) or (e) because they are used for domestic or residential purposes if they are provided for the accommodation of employees, tenants or sharefarmers who are engaged in or in connection with the activities referred to in that paragraph.

(2) Plant also includes plumbing fixtures and fittings (including wall and floor tiles) provided by an entity mainly for:

either or both:

employees in a business carried on by the entity for the *purpose of producing assessable income; or

employees in a business carried on for that purpose by a company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group of which the entity is a member; or

*children of any of those employees.

(3) The written down value of a *depreciating asset is its *cost less the sum of:

the amounts you have deducted or can deduct for its decline in value; and

if section 40-340 applied to your acquisition of it—the amounts the transferor, and earlier successive transferors, deducted or can deduct for its decline in value.

Part 2-15 — Non-assessable income

Division 50 — Exempt entities

Table of Subdivisions

50-A Various exempt entities

50-B Endorsing charitable entities as exempt from income tax

Subdivision 50-A — Various exempt entities

Table of sections

50-1 Entities whose ordinary income and statutory income is exempt

50-5 Charity, education and science

50-10 Community service

50-15 Employees and employers

50-25 Government

50-30 Health

50-35 Mining

50-40 Primary and secondary resources, and tourism

50-45 Sports, culture and recreation

50-47 Special condition for all items

50-50 Special conditions for item 1.1

50-52 Special condition for item 1.1

50-55 Special conditions for items 1.3, 1.4, 6.1 and 6.2

50-65 Special conditions for item 1.6

50-70 Special conditions for items 1.7, 2.1, 9.1 and 9.2

50-72 Special condition for item 4.1

50-75 Certain distributions may be made overseas

50-1 Entities whose ordinary income and statutory income is exempt

The total ordinary income and statutory income of the entities covered by the following tables is exempt from income tax. In some cases, the exemption is subject to special conditions.

Note 1: Ordinary and statutory income that is exempt from income tax is called exempt income: see section 6-20. The note to subsection 6-15(2) describes some of the other consequences of it being exempt income.

Note 2: Even if you are an exempt entity, the Commissioner can still require you to lodge an income tax return or information under section 161 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 3: In all cases the exemption is subject to the special condition in section 50-47 (about an entity that is an ACNC type of entity).

50-5 Charity, education and science

Note 1: Section 50-52 has the effect that certain charities are exempt from income tax only if they are endorsed under Subdivision 50-B.

Note 2: Section 50-80 may affect which item a trust is covered by.

50-10 Community service
50-15 Employees and employers
50-25 Government

Note: The ordinary and statutory income of a State or Territory body is exempt: see Division 1AB of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

50-30 Health
50-35 Mining
50-40 Primary and secondary resources, and tourism
50-45 Sports, culture and recreation
50-47 Special condition for all items

An entity that:

is covered by any item; and

is an ACNC type of entity;

is not exempt from income tax unless the entity is registered under the Australian Charities and Not-for-profits Commission Act 2012.

50-50 Special conditions for item 1.1

An entity covered by item 1.1 is not exempt from income tax unless the entity:

has a physical presence in Australia and, to that extent, incurs its expenditure and pursues its objectives principally in Australia; or

is an institution that meets the description and requirements in item 1 of the table in section 30-15; or

is a prescribed institution which is located outside Australia and is exempt from income tax in the country in which it is resident; or

is a prescribed institution that has a physical presence in Australia but which incurs its expenditure and pursues its objectives principally outside Australia;

and the entity satisfies the conditions in subsection (2).

Note 1: Certain distributions may be disregarded: see section 50-75.

Note 2: The entity must also meet other conditions to be exempt from income tax: see section 50-52.

The entity must:

comply with all the substantive requirements in its governing rules; and

apply its income and assets solely for the purpose for which the entity is established.

50-52 Special condition for item 1.1

An entity covered by item 1.1 is not exempt from income tax unless the entity is endorsed as exempt from income tax under Subdivision 50-B.

This section has effect despite all the other sections of this Subdivision.

50-55 Special conditions for items 1.3, 1.4, 6.1 and 6.2

An entity covered by item 1.3, 1.4, 6.1 or 6.2 is not exempt from income tax unless the entity:

has a physical presence in Australia and, to that extent, incurs its expenditure and pursues its objectives principally in Australia; or

is an institution that meets the description and requirements in item 1 of the table in section 30-15; or

is a prescribed institution which is located outside Australia and is exempt from income tax in the country in which it is resident;

and the entity satisfies the conditions in subsection (2).

Note: Certain distributions may be disregarded: see section 50-75.

The entity must:

comply with all the substantive requirements in its governing rules; and

apply its income and assets solely for the purpose for which the entity is established.

50-65 Special conditions for item 1.6

A fund covered by item 1.6 is not exempt from tax unless the fund is applied for the purposes for which it was established and is:

a fund that is located in, and which incurs its expenditure principally in, Australia and that is established for the purpose of enabling scientific research to be conducted principally in Australia by or in conjunction with a public university or public hospital; or

a scientific research fund that meets the description and requirements in item 1 or 2 of the table in section 30-15;

and the fund satisfies the conditions in subsection (2).

Note: Certain distributions may be disregarded: see section 50-75.

The fund must:

comply with all the substantive requirements in its governing rules; and

apply its income and assets solely for the purpose for which the fund is established.

50-70 Special conditions for items 1.7, 2.1, 9.1 and 9.2

An entity covered by item 1.7, 2.1, 9.1 or 9.2 is not exempt from tax unless the entity is a society, association or club that is not carried on for the purpose of profit or gain of its individual members and that:

has a physical presence in Australia and, to that extent, incurs its expenditure and pursues its objectives principally in Australia; or

is a society, association or club that meets the description and requirements in item 1 of the table in section 30-15; or

is a prescribed society, association or club which is located outside Australia and is exempt from income tax in the country in which it is resident;

and the entity satisfies the conditions in subsection (2).

Note: Certain distributions may be disregarded: see section 50-75.

The entity must:

comply with all the substantive requirements in its governing rules; and

apply its income and assets solely for the purpose for which the entity is established.

50-72 Special condition for item 4.1

A fund covered by item 4.1 is not exempt from income tax unless the fund:

is applied for the purposes for which it is established; and

distributes solely, and has at all times since the time mentioned in subsection (2) distributed solely, to a fund, authority or institution that:

meets the description and requirements in item 1 of the table in section 30-15; and

is an *exempt entity; and

complies with all the substantive requirements in its governing rules; and

applies its income and assets solely for the purpose for which the fund is established.

(2) The time is the start of the income year after the income year in which the Tax Laws Amendment (2005 Measures No. 3) Act 2005 receives the Royal Assent.

50-75 Certain distributions may be made overseas

In determining for the purposes of this Subdivision whether an institution, fund or other body incurs its expenditure or pursues its objectives principally in Australia, distributions of any amount received by the institution, fund or other body as a gift (whether of money or other property) or by way of government grant are to be disregarded.

In determining for the purposes of this Subdivision whether an institution, fund or other body incurs its expenditure or pursues its objectives principally in Australia, distributions of any amount from a fund that is referred to in a table in Subdivision 30-B and operated by the institution, fund or other body are to be disregarded.

Subdivision 50-B — Endorsing charitable entities as exempt from income tax

Guide to Subdivision 50-B

50-100 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out rules about endorsement of charities as exempt from income tax. Such entities are only exempt from income tax if they are endorsed.

Table of sections

Endorsing charitable entities as exempt from income tax

50-105 Endorsement by Commissioner

50-110 Entitlement to endorsement

Endorsing charitable entities as exempt from income tax

50-105 Endorsement by Commissioner

The Commissioner must endorse an entity as exempt from income tax if the entity:

is entitled to be endorsed as exempt from income tax; and

(b) has applied for that endorsement in accordance with Division 426 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note: For procedural rules relating to endorsement, see Division 426 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

50-110 Entitlement to endorsement

General rule

An entity is entitled to be endorsed as exempt from income tax if the entity meets all the relevant requirements of this section.

Which entities are entitled to be endorsed?

To be entitled, the entity must be an entity covered by item 1.1 of the table in section 50-5.

Requirement for ABN

To be entitled, the entity must have an ABN.

Requirement to meet special conditions

To be entitled:

the entity must meet the relevant conditions referred to in the column headed “Special conditions” of item 1.1 of the table in section 50-5; or

both of the following conditions must be met:

the entity must not have carried on any activities as a charity;

there must be reasonable grounds for believing that the entity will meet the relevant conditions referred to in the column headed “Special conditions” of item 1.1 of the table.

The entity must also satisfy section 50-47, if the entity is an ACNC type of entity.

To avoid doubt, the condition set out in section 50-52 (requiring the entity to be endorsed under this Subdivision) is not a relevant condition for the purposes of subsection (5).

Division 51 — Exempt amounts

Table of sections

51-1 Amounts of ordinary income and statutory income that are exempt

51-5 Defence

51-10 Education and training

51-30 Welfare

51-32 Compensation payments for loss of tax exempt payments

51-33 Compensation payments for loss of pay and/or allowances as a Defence reservist

51-35 Payments to a full-time student at a school, college or university

51-40 Payments to a secondary student

51-42 Bonuses for early completion of an apprenticeship

51-43 Income collected or derived by copyright collecting society

51-45 Income collected or derived by resale royalty collecting society

51-50 Maintenance payments to a spouse or child

51-52 Income derived from eligible venture capital investments by ESVCLPs

51-54 Gain or profit from disposal of eligible venture capital investments

51-55 Gain or profit from disposal of venture capital equity

51-57 Interest on judgment debt relating to personal injury

51-60 Prime Minister’s Prizes

51-100 Shipping

51-105 Shipping activities

51-110 Core shipping activities

51-115 Incidental shipping activities

51-120 Interest on unclaimed money and property

51-125 2018 storms—relief payments

51-1 Amounts of ordinary income and statutory income that are exempt

The amounts of ordinary income and statutory income covered by the following tables are exempt from income tax. In some cases, the exemption is subject to exceptions or special conditions, or both.

Note 1: Ordinary and statutory income that is exempt from income tax is called exempt income: see section 6-20. The note to subsection 6-15(2) describes some of the other consequences of it being exempt income.

Note 2: Even if an exempt payment is made to you, the Commissioner can still require you to lodge an income tax return or information under section 161 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

51-5 Defence

Note: Reparation payments referred to in item 1.7 relate to abuse in the Defence Force.

51-10 Education and training
51-30 Welfare
51-32 Compensation payments for loss of tax exempt payments

A compensation payment for the loss of pay or an allowance for your warlike service is exempt from income tax if:

(a) the compensation payment is made under the Safety, Rehabilitation and Compensation (Defence-related Claims) Act 1988 in respect of an injury (as defined in that Act) you suffered; and

(b) you suffered your injury while covered by a certificate in force under paragraph 23AD(1)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

your injury or disease caused the loss of your pay or allowance; and

(d) your pay or allowance was payable under the Defence Act 1903 or under a determination under that Act.

A compensation payment for the loss of pay or an allowance for your warlike service is exempt from income tax if:

(a) the compensation payment is made under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004 in respect of a service injury or disease (as defined in that Act); and

(b) you sustained your service injury or contracted your service disease, or your service injury or disease was aggravated or materially contributed to, while covered by a certificate in force under paragraph 23AD(1)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

your injury or disease caused the loss of your pay or allowance; and

(d) your pay or allowance was payable under the Defence Act 1903 or under a determination under that Act.

Subsections (4) and (5) apply to:

a deployment allowance; or

some other allowance that is exempt from income tax specified in writing by the Defence Minister for the purposes of this subsection;

that is payable under a determination under the Defence Act 1903 for your non-warlike service.

A compensation payment for the loss of the allowance is exempt from income tax if:

(a) the compensation payment is made under the Safety, Rehabilitation and Compensation (Defence-related Claims) Act 1988 in respect of an injury (as defined in that Act) you suffered; and

your injury caused the loss of your allowance.

A compensation payment for the loss of the allowance is exempt from income tax if:

(a) the compensation payment is made under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004 in respect of a service injury or disease (as defined in that Act); and

your injury or disease caused the loss of your allowance.

51-33 Compensation payments for loss of pay and/or allowances as a Defence reservist

A compensation payment for the loss of your pay or an allowance is exempt from income tax if:

(a) the compensation payment is made under the Safety, Rehabilitation and Compensation (Defence-related Claims) Act 1988 in respect of an injury (as defined in that Act) you suffered; and

you suffered your injury while serving as a member of the Naval Reserve, Army Reserve or Air Force Reserve (but not while on continuous full time service); and

your pay or allowance was payable for service of a kind described in paragraph (b).

A compensation payment for the loss of your pay or an allowance is exempt from income tax if:

(a) the compensation payment is made under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004 in respect of a service injury or disease (as defined in that Act); and

you sustained your service injury or contracted your service disease, or your service injury or disease was aggravated or materially contributed to, while serving as a member of the Naval Reserve, Army Reserve or Air Force Reserve; and

your pay or allowance was payable for service of a kind described in paragraph (b); and

the compensation payment is worked out by reference to your normal earnings (as defined in that Act) as a part-time Reservist (as defined in that Act).

51-35 Payments to a full-time student at a school, college or university

The following payments made to or on behalf of a full-time student at a school, college or university are not exempt from income tax under item 2.1A of the table in section 51-10:

a payment by the Commonwealth for assistance for secondary education or in connection with education of isolated children;

a Commonwealth education or training payment;

a payment by an entity or authority on the condition that the student will (or will if required) become, or continue to be, an employee of the entity or authority;

a payment by an entity or authority on the condition that the student will (or will if required) enter into, or continue to be a party to, a contract with the entity or authority that is wholly or principally for the labour of the student;

a payment under a scholarship where the scholarship is not provided principally for educational purposes;

(f) an education entry payment under Part 2.13A of the Social Security Act 1991.

Note: The whole or part of a Commonwealth education or training payment may be exempt under Subdivision 52-E or 52-F.

51-40 Payments to a secondary student

The following payments made to or on behalf of a student are not exempt from income tax under item 2.1B of the table in section 51-10:

a Commonwealth education or training payment;

(b) an education entry payment under Part 2.13A of the Social Security Act 1991.

Note: The whole or part of a Commonwealth education or training payment may be exempt under Subdivision 52-E or 52-F.

51-42 Bonuses for early completion of an apprenticeship

The bonus must be provided under a scheme provided by a State or Territory, and the scheme must be specified in the regulations for the purposes of this section.

The apprenticeship:

must be for an occupation of a kind specified in the regulations; and

must be completed within a time frame specified in the regulations for apprenticeships of that kind.

51-43 Income collected or derived by copyright collecting society

(1) This section applies to a *copyright collecting society if Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the income of the society.

The following are exempt from income tax:

*royalties, and interest on royalties, collected or *derived by the society in an income year;

any other amounts, relating to copyright, that are:

derived by the society in an income year; and

prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph;

other ordinary income and statutory income derived by the society in an income year, to the extent that it does not exceed the lesser of:

5% of the total amount of the ordinary income and statutory income collected and derived by the society in the income year; and

$5 million or such other amount as is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subparagraph.

51-45 Income collected or derived by resale royalty collecting society

(1) This section applies to the *resale royalty collecting society if Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the income of the society.

The following are exempt from income tax:

*resale royalties, and interest on resale royalties, collected or *derived by the society in an income year;

any other amounts, relating to resale royalty rights, that are:

derived by the society in an income year; and

prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph;

other ordinary income and statutory income derived by the society in an income year, to the extent that it does not exceed the lesser of:

5% of the total amount of the ordinary income and statutory income collected and derived by the society in the income year; and

$5 million or such other amount as is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subparagraph.

51-50 Maintenance payments to a spouse or child

This section sets out the conditions on which a periodic payment, in the nature of maintenance, that:

(a) is made by an individual (the maintenance payer); or

(b) is attributable to a payment made by an individual (also the maintenance payer);

is exempt from income tax under item 5.1 of the table in section 51-30.

The maintenance payment is exempt from income tax only if it is made:

to an individual who is or has been the maintenance payer’s *spouse; or

to or for the benefit of an individual who is or has been:

a *child of the maintenance payer; or

a child who is or has been a child of an individual who is or has been a *spouse of the maintenance payer.

(3) The maintenance payment is not exempt if, in order to make it or a payment to which it is attributable, the maintenance payer:

divested any income-producing assets; or

diverted ordinary income or statutory income upon which the maintenance payer would otherwise have been liable to income tax.

51-52 Income derived from eligible venture capital investments by ESVCLPs

General

An entity’s share of income derived from an eligible venture capital investment is exempt from income tax if:

the entity is a partner in a *limited partnership; and

the partnership made the investment; and

the investment meets all of the additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs for the investment; and

when the partnership made the investment, the partnership was an early stage venture capital limited partnership that was *unconditionally registered; and

when the income was derived, the partnership:

owned the investment; and

was an early stage venture capital limited partnership that was unconditionally registered.

Partners in AFOFs

An entity’s share of income derived from an eligible venture capital investment is exempt from income tax if:

the entity is a partner in an AFOF; and

the AFOF is a partner in a partnership that made the investment; and

when the partnership made the investment, the partnership was an early stage venture capital limited partnership that was *unconditionally registered; and

the investment meets all of the additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs for the investment; and

when the income was derived, the partnership:

owned the investment; and

was an early stage venture capital limited partnership that was unconditionally registered.

Residency requirements for general partners

However, if the entity is a general partner in the partnership, this section does not apply to the entity unless the entity is:

an Australian resident; or

(b) a resident of a foreign country in respect of which a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) is in force that is an agreement of a kind referred to in subparagraph (b)(i), (ia), (ii), (iii), (iv) or (v) of that definition.

For the purposes of this section, the place of residence of a general partner in a *limited partnership:

that is a company or limited partnership; and

that is not an Australian resident;

is the place in which the general partner has its central management and control.

Beneficiaries’ shares of capital gains made by unit trusts

For the purposes of this section, an entity’s share of income derived from an eligible venture capital investment that is an investment in a unit trust includes any present entitlement of the entity, as a beneficiary, to a share of an amount included in the assessable income of the unit trust under section 102-5.

Carried interests

This section does not apply to an entity’s share of income derived from an eligible venture capital investment to the extent that the income is a payment of a *carried interest of a general partner in an ESVCLP or an AFOF.

51-54 Gain or profit from disposal of eligible venture capital investments

Partners in VCLPs and ESVCLPs

An entity’s share of any gain or profit made from the disposal or other realisation of an eligible venture capital investment is exempt from income tax if:

it is made by a VCLP, or an ESVCLP, that is *unconditionally registered; and

were that disposal or other realisation to be a *disposal of a CGT asset, the entity’s share of any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded under section 118-405 or 118-407.

An entity’s share of any gain or profit made:

by an ESVCLP that is *unconditionally registered; and

from the disposal or other realisation of an eligible venture capital investment;

is exempt from income tax to the extent that, were that disposal or other realisation to be a *disposal of a CGT asset, the equivalent *capital gain arising from the CGT event would be disregarded because of a partial exemption from the CGT event under section 118-408.

Partners in AFOFs

An entity’s share of any gain or profit made from the disposal or other realisation of an eligible venture capital investment is exempt from income tax if:

it is made by:

an AFOF that is *unconditionally registered; or

a VCLP, or an ESVCLP, that is unconditionally registered and in which an AFOF that is *unconditionally registered is a partner; and

were that disposal or other realisation to be a *disposal of a CGT asset, the entity’s share of any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded under section 118-410.

Eligible venture capital investors

Any gain or profit made from the disposal or other realisation of an eligible venture capital investment is exempt from income tax if:

you are an eligible venture capital investor; and

were that disposal or other realisation to be a *disposal of a CGT asset, any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded under section 118-415.

51-55 Gain or profit from disposal of venture capital equity

Any gain or profit made from the disposal or other realisation of venture capital equity in a resident investment vehicle is exempt from income tax if:

it is made by a venture capital entity or a *limited partnership referred to in subsection 118-515(2); and

if that disposal or other realisation were a *disposal of a CGT asset, any *capital gain or *capital loss would be disregarded under Subdivision 118-G.

51-57 Interest on judgment debt relating to personal injury

An amount paid by way of interest on a judgment debt, whether payable under an Australian law, or otherwise, is exempt from income tax if:

(a) the judgment debt arose from a judgment (the original judgment) given by, or entered in, a court for an award of damages for personal injury; and

the amount is in respect of the whole or any part of the period:

beginning at the time of the original judgment, or, if the judgment debt is taken to have arisen at an earlier time, at that earlier time; and

ending when the original judgment is finalised.

(2) For the purposes of subsection (1), an original judgment is finalised at whichever of the following times is applicable:

if the period for lodging an appeal against either the original judgment or a subsequent related judgment ends without an appeal being lodged—the end of the period;

if an appeal from either the original judgment or a subsequent related judgment is lodged and final judgment on the appeal is given by, or entered in, a court—when the final judgment takes effect;

if an appeal from either the original judgment or a subsequent related judgment is lodged but is settled or discontinued—when the settlement or discontinuance takes effect.

(3) For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), a judgment is a final judgment if:

no appeal lies against the judgment; or

leave to appeal against the judgment has been refused.

51-60 Prime Minister’s Prizes

To the extent that the Prime Minister’s Prize for Australian History would otherwise be assessable income, it is exempt from income tax.

To the extent that the Prime Minister’s Prize for Science would otherwise be assessable income, it is exempt from income tax.

To the extent that a Prime Minister’s Literary Award would otherwise be assessable income, it is exempt from income tax.

51-100 Shipping

(1) An entity’s *ordinary income *derived during an income year (the present year), or *statutory income for the present year, is exempt from income tax to the extent that it is from *shipping activities that:

relate to a vessel for which the entity has a shipping exempt income certificate for the present year; and

(b) take place on a day (a certified day) to which the certificate applies.

Note: For the days to which the certificate applies, see subsection 8(5) of the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012.

Subsection (1) does not apply to ordinary income *derived from, or statutory income from, incidental shipping activities relating to the vessel if:

where:

total core shipping income means the sum of the entity’s:

ordinary income *derived from core shipping activities relating to the vessel on the certified days (see paragraph (1)(b)); and

statutory income from those activities on those days.

total incidental shipping income means the sum of the entity’s:

ordinary income *derived from incidental shipping activities relating to the vessel on the certified days (see paragraph (1)(b)); and

statutory income from those activities on those days.

51-105 Shipping activities

Shipping activities are *core shipping activities or *incidental shipping activities.

51-110 Core shipping activities

(1) Core shipping activities are activities directly involved in operating a vessel to carry *shipping cargo or *shipping passengers for consideration.

(2) Without limiting subsection (1), core shipping activities include the following:

carrying the shipping cargo or *shipping passengers on the vessel;

crewing the vessel;

carrying goods on board for the operation of the vessel (including for the enjoyment of shipping passengers);

providing the containers that carry shipping cargo on the vessel;

loading shipping cargo onto, and unloading it from, the vessel;

repacking shipping cargo to be carried on the vessel;

providing temporary storage for shipping cargo just before or after its carriage on the vessel;

providing space on board the vessel for carrying shipping cargo or shipping passengers;

activities generating onboard income from shipping passengers of the vessel;

providing shore excursions to shipping passengers of the vessel;

transporting shipping cargo, or shipping passengers, between the vessel and the shore;

providing administration and insurance services that are directly related to carrying shipping cargo or shipping passengers on the vessel;

onboard selling of tickets on behalf of other entities to shipping passengers of the vessel;

onboard advertising to shipping passengers of the vessel;

providing quay-side services to shipping passengers that:

are similar to those provided on the vessel; and

are provided from a floor area that does not exceed that from which similar services are provided on the vessel;

providing car parking to individuals while they are shipping passengers on the vessel;

making contracts solely to reduce the risk of financial loss from currency exchange rate fluctuations that directly relate to the operation of the vessel;

an activity specified in regulations made for the purposes of this paragraph.

(3) Despite subsections (1) and (2), core shipping activities do not include an activity specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

51-115 Incidental shipping activities

Incidental shipping activities are activities incidental to *core shipping activities.

51-120 Interest on unclaimed money and property

The following amounts are exempt from income tax:

(a) an amount of interest paid under paragraph 69(7AA)(b) of the Banking Act 1959;

Note: An amount of interest paid under paragraph 69(7AA)(a) of the Banking Act 1959 is not ordinary income or statutory income.

(b) an amount of interest paid under subsection 1341(3A) of the Corporations Act 2001;

(e) an amount of interest paid under paragraph 216(7A)(b) of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

Note: An amount of interest paid under paragraph 216(7A)(a) of the Life Insurance Act 1995 is not ordinary income or statutory income.

Note: For interest paid under the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999, see subsections 307-142(3B) and (3C).

51-125 2018 storms—relief payments

A payment is exempt from income tax if the payment:

is made to a primary producer for the purposes of an agreement covered by subsection (2); and

relates to storm damage sustained by the primary producer on or around 25 October 2018.

An agreement is covered by this subsection if:

the parties to the agreement are the Commonwealth and the Foundation for Rural and Regional Renewal; and

the objective of the agreement is principally to assist primary producers affected by storms that occurred on or around 25 October 2018.

Note: Payments may be made to primary producers by the Foundation for Rural and Regional Renewal, or by other entities on behalf of the Foundation.

Division 52 — Certain pensions, benefits and allowances are exempt from income tax

Guide to Division 52

52-1 What this Division is about

Certain payments made under various Acts are wholly or partly exempt from income tax. This Division tells you if a payment is exempt and how much is exempt.

Table of Subdivisions

52-A Exempt payments under the Social Security Act 1991

52-B Exempt payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986

52-C Exempt payments made because of the Veterans’ Entitlements (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 1986

52-CA Exempt payments under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004

52-CB Exempt payments under the Australian Participants in British Nuclear Tests and British Commonwealth Occupation Force (Treatment) Act 2006

52-CC Exempt payments under the Treatment Benefits (Special Access) Act 2019

52-E Exempt payments under the ABSTUDY scheme

52-F Exemption of Commonwealth education or training payments

52-G Exempt payments under the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) (Administration) Act 1999

52-H Other exempt payments

Subdivision 52-A — Exempt payments under the Social Security Act 1991

Guide to Subdivision 52-A

52-5 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you:

(a) the payments under the Social Security Act 1991 that are wholly or partly exempt from income tax; and

any special circumstances, conditions or exceptions that apply to a payment in order for it to be exempt; and

how to work out how much of a payment is exempt.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

52-10 How much of a social security payment is exempt?

52-15 Supplementary amounts of payments

52-20 Tax-free amount of an ordinary payment after the death of your partner

52-25 Tax-free amount of certain bereavement lump sum payments

52-30 Tax-free amount of certain other bereavement lump sum payments

52-35 Tax-free amount of a lump sum payment made because of the death of a person you are caring for

52-40 Provisions of the Social Security Act 1991 under which payments are made

Operative provisions

52-10 How much of a social security payment is exempt?

The table in this section tells you about the income tax treatment of social security payments, other than payments of:

pension bonus and pension bonus bereavement payment; or

child disability assistance; or

carer supplement; or

(ac) one-off energy assistance payment under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(ad) first 2020 economic support payment under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(ae) second 2020 economic support payment under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(af) additional economic support payment 2020 under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(ag) additional economic support payment 2021 under the Social Security Act 1991; or

payments under a scheme referred to in subsection (1CB); or

one-off payment to carers (carer payment related); or

one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related); or

2005 one-off payment to carers (carer payment related); or

2005 one-off payment to carers (carer service pension related); or

2005 one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related); or

2006 one-off payment to carers (carer payment related); or

2006 one-off payment to carers (wife pension related); or

2006 one-off payment to carers (partner service pension related); or

2006 one-off payment to carers (carer service pension related); or

2006 one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related); or

2007 one-off payment to carers (carer payment related); or

2007 one-off payment to carers (wife pension related); or

2007 one-off payment to carers (partner service pension related); or

2007 one-off payment to carers (carer service pension related); or

2007 one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related); or

2008 one-off payment to carers (carer payment related); or

2008 one-off payment to carers (wife pension related); or

2008 one-off payment to carers (partner service pension related); or

2008 one-off payment to carers (carer service pension related); or

2008 one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related); or

payments under a scheme referred to in subsection (1E); or

(wa) payments under the Social Security Act 1991 referred to in subsection (1EA); or

(x) economic security strategy payment under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(y) training and learning bonus under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(za) education entry payment supplement under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(zb) clean energy payments under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(zc) 2022 cost of living payment under the Social Security Act 1991.

Note: Section 52-40 sets out the provisions of the Social Security Act 1991 under which the payments are made.

(1A) Payments of pension bonus and pension bonus bereavement payment under Part 2.2A of the Social Security Act 1991 are exempt from income tax.

(1AA) Child disability assistance under Part 2.19AA of the Social Security Act 1991 is exempt from income tax.

(1AB) Carer supplement under Part 2.19B of the Social Security Act 1991 is exempt from income tax.

(1AC) One-off energy assistance payments under Part 2.6 of the Social Security Act 1991 are exempt from income tax.

(1AD) One-off energy assistance payments under Part 2.6A of the Social Security Act 1991 are exempt from income tax.

The following payments are exempt from income tax:

(a) first 2020 economic support payments under Division 1 of Part 2.6B of the Social Security Act 1991;

(b) second 2020 economic support payments under Division 2 of Part 2.6B of the Social Security Act 1991.

The following payments are exempt from income tax:

(a) additional economic support payment 2020 under Division 1 of Part 2.6C of the Social Security Act 1991;

(b) additional economic support payment 2021 under Division 2 of Part 2.6C of the Social Security Act 1991.

(1CA) 2022 cost of living payment under Division 1 of Part 2.6D of the Social Security Act 1991 is exempt from income tax.

(1CB) Payments to older Australians under the following schemes are exempt from income tax:

(a) a scheme determined under item 1 of Schedule 2 to the Social Security and Veterans’ Entitlements Legislation Amendment (One-off Payments to Increase Assistance for Older Australians and Carers and Other Measures) Act 2006;

(b) a scheme determined under item 1 of Schedule 2 to the Social Security and Veterans’ Affairs Legislation Amendment (One-off Payments and Other 2007 Budget Measures) Act 2007;

(c) a scheme determined under item 1 of Schedule 2 to the Social Security and Veterans’ Entitlements Legislation Amendment (One-off Payments and Other Budget Measures) Act 2008.

(1D) The following payments under the Social Security Act 1991 are exempt from income tax:

one-off payment to carers (carer payment related) (see Division 1 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related) (see Division 1 of Part 2.19A of that Act);

2005 one-off payment to carers (carer payment related) (see Division 2 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2005 one-off payment to carers (carer service pension related) (see Division 3 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2005 one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related) (see Division 2 of Part 2.19A of that Act);

2006 one-off payment to carers (carer payment related) (see Division 4 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2006 one-off payment to carers (wife pension related) (see Division 5 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2006 one-off payment to carers (partner service pension related) (see Division 6 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2006 one-off payment to carers (carer service pension related) (see Division 7 of Part 2.5A of that Act); or

2006 one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related) (see Division 3 of Part 2.19A of that Act);

2007 one-off payment to carers (carer payment related) (see Division 8 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2007 one-off payment to carers (wife pension related) (see Division 9 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2007 one-off payment to carers (partner service pension related) (see Division 10 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2007 one-off payment to carers (carer service pension related) (see Division 11 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2007 one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related) (see Division 4 of Part 2.19A of that Act);

2008 one-off payment to carers (carer payment related) (see Division 12 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2008 one-off payment to carers (wife pension related) (see Division 13 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2008 one-off payment to carers (partner service pension related) (see Division 14 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2008 one-off payment to carers (carer service pension related) (see Division 15 of Part 2.5A of that Act);

2008 one-off payment to carers (carer allowance related) (see Division 5 of Part 2.19A of that Act).

Payments to carers under the following schemes are exempt from income tax:

(a) a scheme determined under Schedule 3 to the Family Assistance Legislation Amendment (More Help for Families—One-off Payments) Act 2004;

(b) a scheme determined under Schedule 2 to the Social Security Legislation Amendment (One-off Payments for Carers) Act 2005;

(c) a scheme determined under Schedule 4 to the Social Security and Veterans’ Entitlements Legislation Amendment (One-off Payments to Increase Assistance for Older Australians and Carers and Other Measures) Act 2006;

(d) a scheme determined under Schedule 4 to the Social Security and Veterans’ Affairs Legislation Amendment (One-off Payments and Other 2007 Budget Measures) Act 2007;

(e) a scheme determined under Schedule 4 to the Social Security and Veterans’ Entitlements Legislation Amendment (One-off Payments and Other Budget Measures) Act 2008.

(1F) Economic security strategy payment under the Social Security Act 1991 is exempt from income tax.

(1G) Training and learning bonus under the Social Security Act 1991 is exempt from income tax.

(1J) Education entry payment supplement under the Social Security Act 1991 is exempt from income tax.

(1K) Australian Victim of Terrorism Overseas Payment under Part 2.24AA the Social Security Act 1991 is exempt from income tax.

(1L) Clean energy payments under the Social Security Act 1991 are exempt from income tax.

(2) Expressions used in this Subdivision that are also used in the Social Security Act 1991 have the same meaning as in that Act.

(3) Ordinary payment means a payment other than a payment made because of a person’s death.

Note: A reference in this table to jobseeker payment or youth allowance includes a reference to farm household allowance under the Farm Household Support Act 2014 (see Part 5 of that Act). Other payments referred to in this table (such as advance pharmaceutical supplement) might also be payable to a person who is receiving farm household allowance.

52-15 Supplementary amounts of payments

You work out the supplementary amount of a social security payment using the following table:

Note: A reference in this table to jobseeker payment or youth allowance includes a reference to farm household allowance under the Farm Household Support Act 2014 (see Part 5 of that Act).

52-20 Tax-free amount of an ordinary payment after the death of your partner

(1) You work out under this section the *tax-free amount of an *ordinary payment made under the Social Security Act 1991 after the death of your partner if:

you do not qualify for payments under a bereavement Subdivision; and

the ordinary payment became due to you during the bereavement period.

Note: For the provisions of the Social Security Act 1991 that tell you if you qualify for payments under a bereavement Subdivision: see subsection (3).

(2) This is how to work out the tax-free amount:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the *supplementary amount of the payment.

Step 2. Subtract the *supplementary amount from the amount of the payment.

Step 3. Work out what would have been the amount of the payment if your partner had not died.

Step 4. Work out what would have been the *supplementary amount of the payment if your partner had not died.

Step 5. Subtract the amount at Step 4 from the amount at Step 3.

Step 6. Subtract the amount at Step 5 from the amount at Step 2: the result is the tax-free amount.

Note: The supplementary amount is also exempt and is worked out under section 52-15.

This table sets out:

(a) the Subdivisions of the Social Security Act 1991 that are bereavement Subdivisions; and

the provision of that Act that tells you if you qualify for payments under the relevant bereavement Subdivision.

52-25 Tax-free amount of certain bereavement lump sum payments

This section applies if a lump sum of any of these categories of social security payments becomes due to you because of your partner’s death.

The total of the following are exempt up to the *tax-free amount:

the lump sum payment;

(b) all other payments that become due to you under the Social Security Act 1991 during the bereavement lump sum period.

(3) This is how to work out the tax-free amount:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the payments under the Social Security Act 1991 that would have become due to you during the bereavement lump sum period if:

your partner had not died; and

your partner had been under pension age; and

immediately before your partner died, you and your partner had been neither an illness separated couple nor a respite care couple.

Step 2. Work out how much of those payments would have been exempt in those circumstances.

Step 3. Work out the payments under the Social Security Act 1991 or Part III of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 that would have become due to your partner during the bereavement lump sum period if:

your partner had not died; and

immediately before your partner died, you and your partner were neither an illness separated couple nor a respite care couple;

even if the payments would not have been exempt.

Step 4. Total the payments worked out at Steps 2 and 3: the result is the tax-free amount.

Your partner dies. Seven instalments are due to you during the bereavement lump sum period. You work out the tax-free amount as follows:

Step 1: The instalments that would have become due to you during the bereavement lump sum period are:

Example: You are receiving a disability support pension of $300 a fortnight and a pharmaceutical allowance of $5 a fortnight. You are over pension age. Your partner is receiving a jobseeker payment of $250 a fortnight and rent assistance of $75 a fortnight.

The total for the period is $2,135.

Step 2: The exempt component of each instalment is $5. The total for the 7 instalments is $35.

Step 3: The instalments that would have become due to your partner during the same period are:

The total for the period is $2,275.

Step 4: The tax-free amount is:

52-30 Tax-free amount of certain other bereavement lump sum payments

This section applies if a lump sum of any of these categories of social security payments becomes due to you because of your partner’s death.

Note: A reference in this table to jobseeker payment or youth allowance includes a reference to farm household allowance under the Farm Household Support Act 2014 (see Part 5 of that Act).

The total of the following are exempt up to the *tax-free amount:

the lump sum payment;

(b) all other payments that become due to you under the Social Security Act 1991 during the bereavement lump sum period.

(3) This is how to work out the tax-free amount:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the payments under the Social Security Act 1991 that would have become due to you during the bereavement lump sum period if:

your partner had not died; and

your partner had been under pension age; and

immediately before your partner died, you and your partner had been neither an illness separated couple nor a respite care couple.

Step 2. Work out how much of those payments would have been exempt in those circumstances.

Step 3. Work out the payments under the Social Security Act 1991 that would have become due to your partner during the bereavement lump sum period if your partner had not died, even if the payments would not have been exempt.

Step 4. Total the payments worked out at Steps 2 and 3: the result is the tax-free amount.

52-35 Tax-free amount of a lump sum payment made because of the death of a person you are caring for

(1) This section applies if a lump sum payment becomes due to you under section 236A of the Social Security Act 1991 because of the death of the care receiver or any of the care receivers.

The total of the following are exempt up to the *tax-free amount:

the lump sum payment;

(b) all other payments that become due to you under the Social Security Act 1991 during the bereavement lump sum period.

(3) This is how to work out the tax-free amount:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the payments under the Social Security Act 1991 that would have become due to you during the bereavement lump sum period if:

the care receiver had not died; and

the care receiver had been under pension age.

Step 2. Work out how much of those payments would have been exempt in those circumstances.

Step 3. Work out the payments under the Social Security Act 1991 that would have become due to the care receiver during the bereavement lump sum period if the care receiver had not died, even if the payments would not have been exempt.

Step 4. Total the payments worked out at Steps 2 and 3: the result is the tax-free amount.

52-40 Provisions of the Social Security Act 1991 under which payments are made

This table lists the provisions of the Social Security Act 1991 under which social security payments are made that are wholly or partly exempt from income tax under this Subdivision.

Subdivision 52-B — Exempt payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986

Guide to Subdivision 52-B

52-60 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you:

(a) the payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 that are wholly or partly exempt from income tax; and

any special circumstances, conditions or exceptions that apply to a payment in order for it to be exempt; and

how to work out how much of a payment is exempt.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

52-65 How much of a veterans’ affairs payment is exempt?

52-70 Supplementary amounts of payments

52-75 Provisions of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 under which payments are made

Operative provisions

52-65 How much of a veterans’ affairs payment is exempt?

The table in this section tells you about the income tax treatment of veterans’ affairs payments, other than:

payments of pension bonus or pension bonus bereavement payment; or

clean energy payments; or

(c) one-off energy assistance payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986; or

(d) first 2020 economic support payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986; or

(da) second 2020 economic support payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986; or

(db) payments of additional economic support payment 2020 under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986; or

(dc) payments of additional economic support payment 2021 under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986; or

(f) a 2022 cost of living payment under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986.

Note: Section 52-75 sets out the provisions of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 under which the payments are made.

(1A) Payments of pension bonus and pension bonus bereavement payment under Part IIIAB of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 are exempt from income tax.

(1E) A lump sum payment under section 198N of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 is exempt from income tax.

(1G) Clean energy payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 are exempt from income tax.

(1GA) One-off energy assistance payments under Part IIIF of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 are exempt from income tax.

(1H) One-off energy assistance payments under Part IIIG of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 are exempt from income tax.

The following payments are exempt from income tax:

(a) first 2020 economic support payments under Division 1 of Part IIIH of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986;

(b) second 2020 economic support payments under Division 2 of Part IIIH of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986.

The following payments are exempt from income tax:

(a) additional economic support payment 2020 under Division 1 of Part IIIJ of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986;

(b) additional economic support payment 2021 under Division 2 of Part IIIJ of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986.

(1L) 2022 cost of living payment under Division 1 of Part IIIK of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 is exempt from income tax.

(2) Expressions (except “pension age”) used in this Subdivision that are also used in the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 have the same meaning as in that Act.

Note: Pension age has the meaning given by subsection 23(1) of the Social Security Act 1991: see subsection 995-1(1).

(4) Ordinary payment means a payment other than a payment made because of a person’s death.

52-70 Supplementary amounts of payments

The supplementary amount of a veterans’ affairs payment is the total of:

so much of the payment as is included by way of rent assistance; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of an additional amount for each of your dependent *children; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of remote area allowance; and

so much of the payment as is equal to the tax-exempt pension supplement for the payment; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of energy supplement.

52-75 Provisions of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 under which payments are made

This table lists the provisions of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 under which veterans’ affairs payments are made that are wholly or partly exempt from income tax under this Subdivision.

Subdivision 52-C — Exempt payments made because of the Veterans’ Entitlements (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 1986

Guide to Subdivision 52-C

52-100 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you:

(a) the payments made because of the Veterans’ Entitlements (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 1986 that are wholly or partly exempt from income tax; and

any special circumstances, conditions or exceptions that apply to a payment in order for it to be exempt; and

how to work out how much of a payment is exempt.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

52-105 Supplementary amount of a payment made under the Repatriation Act 1920 is exempt

52-110 Other exempt payments

Operative provisions

52-105 Supplementary amount of a payment made under the Repatriation Act 1920 is exempt

The *supplementary amount of a payment made to you is exempt from income tax if:

you are a *parent of a member of the Forces who has died (but you are neither a widow nor a woman divorced or deserted by her husband) and you are of pension age or over; or

you are the mother of a member of the Forces who has died and you are also a widow, or divorced or deserted by your husband;

and the payment is covered by subsection (2).

The payment must be made in circumstances that are a prescribed case under:

(a) Table A in Schedule 3 to the Repatriation Act 1920; or

(b) that Table as applying because of the Repatriation (Far East Strategic Reserve) Act 1956; or

(c) that Table as applying because of the Repatriation (Special Overseas Service) Act 1962; or

(d) that Table as applying because of the Interim Forces Benefits Act 1947;

as in force because of subsection 4(6) of the Veterans’ Entitlements (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 1986.

(3) The supplementary amount is the total of:

so much of the payment as is included by way of rental assistance; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of an additional amount for each of your dependent *children; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of remote area allowance.

(4) Member of the Forces has the same meaning as in the Act referred to in the relevant paragraph of subsection (2).

(5) Expressions (except pension age) used in this Subdivision that are also used in the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 have the same meaning as in that Act.

Note: Pension age has the meaning given by subsection 23(1) of the Social Security Act 1991: see subsection 995-1(1).

52-110 Other exempt payments

Payments (except those covered by section 52-105) made because of subsection 4(6) of the Veterans’ Entitlements (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 1986 are exempt from income tax.

Subdivision 52-CA — Exempt payments under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004

Guide to Subdivision 52-CA

52-112 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you:

(a) the payments under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004 that are wholly or partly exempt from income tax; and

any special circumstances, conditions or exceptions that apply to a payment in order for it to be exempt; and

how to work out how much of a payment is exempt.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

52-114 How much of a payment under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act is exempt?

Operative provisions

52-114 How much of a payment under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act is exempt?

(1) The table in this section tells you about the income tax treatment of payments under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004. References in the table to provisions are to provisions of that Act.

(2) Expressions used in this Subdivision that are also used in the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004 have the same meanings as in that Act.

(3) Ordinary payment means a payment other than a payment made because of a person’s death.

Note: The supplementary amount of a payment covered by item 16 of the table made to a person aged 16 or over is also exempt from income tax (see section 52-140).

Subdivision 52-CB — Exempt payments under the Australian Participants in British Nuclear Tests and British Commonwealth Occupation Force (Treatment) Act 2006

52-117 Payments of travelling expenses and pharmaceutical supplement are exempt

(1) A payment made to you under Part 3 (travelling expenses) of the Australian Participants in British Nuclear Tests and British Commonwealth Occupation Force (Treatment) Act 2006 is exempt from income tax.

(2) A payment of pharmaceutical supplement made to you under Part 3A of the Australian Participants in British Nuclear Tests and British Commonwealth Occupation Force (Treatment) Act 2006 is exempt from income tax.

Subdivision 52-CC — Exempt payments under the Treatment Benefits (Special Access) Act 2019

52-120 Payments of travelling expenses and pharmaceutical supplement are exempt

(1) A payment made to you under Part 3 (travelling expenses) of the Treatment Benefits (Special Access) Act 2019 is exempt from income tax.

(2) A payment of pharmaceutical supplement made to you under Part 4 of the Treatment Benefits (Special Access) Act 2019 is exempt from income tax.

Subdivision 52-E — Exempt payments under the ABSTUDY scheme

Guide to Subdivision 52-E

52-130 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you:

the payments under the ABSTUDY scheme that are wholly or partly exempt from income tax; and

any special circumstances, conditions or exceptions that apply to a payment in order for it to be exempt; and

how to work out how much of a payment is exempt.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

52-131 Payments under ABSTUDY scheme

52-132 Supplementary amount of payment

52-133 Tax-free amount of ordinary payment on death of partner if no bereavement payment payable

52-134 Tax-free amount if you receive a bereavement lump sum payment

Operative provisions

52-131 Payments under ABSTUDY scheme

This section tells you about the income tax treatment of a payment under the ABSTUDY scheme made in respect of a period commencing at a time when you were at least 16 years old.

Note: The whole of a payment made under the ABSTUDY scheme in respect of a period commencing at a time when you are under 16 years old may be exempt under section 51-10.

The following payments made to you under the ABSTUDY scheme are exempt from income tax:

a crisis payment;

a clean energy payment;

a first 2020 economic support payment;

a second 2020 economic support payment;

a 2022 cost of living payment.

If:

an *ordinary payment becomes due to you; and

the payment is not covered by subsection (4) or (6);

the *supplementary amount of the ordinary payment is exempt from income tax.

Note: To work out the supplementary amount of the ordinary payment, see section 52-132.

If:

your partner dies; and

you do not qualify for a payment under the ABSTUDY scheme in respect of that death; and

an *ordinary payment becomes due to you during the bereavement period;

the *supplementary amount and the *tax-free amount of the ordinary payment are exempt from income tax.

Note 1: To work out the supplementary amount of the ordinary payment, see section 52-132.

Note 2: To work out the tax-free amount of the ordinary payment, see section 52-133.

If a payment becomes due to you under the ABSTUDY scheme because of a person’s death (except a lump sum payment because of your partner’s death), the payment is exempt from income tax.

If:

your partner dies; and

a lump sum payment under the ABSTUDY scheme becomes due to you because of your partner’s death;

the total of the following are exempt from income tax up to the *tax free amount:

the lump sum payment; and

all other payments that become due to you under the ABSTUDY scheme during the bereavement lump sum period.

Note: To work out the tax-free amount, see section 52-134.

(7) ABSTUDY scheme means the scheme known as ABSTUDY.

(8) Ordinary payment means a payment under the ABSTUDY scheme, other than:

a crisis payment; or

a clean energy payment; or

a first 2020 economic support payment; or

a second 2020 economic support payment; or

a 2022 cost of living payment; or

a payment made because of a person’s death.

The following expressions used in this Subdivision have the same meaning as in the ABSTUDY Policy Manual:

bereavement lump sum period;

bereavement period;

illness separated couple;

lump sum payment;

partner;

pension age;

respite care couple.

Note: In 2009, the ABSTUDY Policy Manual was accessible through the website of the Department administered by the Student Assistance Minister.

52-132 Supplementary amount of payment

The *supplementary amount of a payment is the total of:

so much of the payment as is included to assist you with, or to reimburse you for, the costs of any one or more of the following:

rent;

living in a remote area;

commencing employment;

travel to, or participation in, courses, interviews, education or training;

a child or children wholly or substantially dependent on you;

telephone bills;

living away from your usual residence;

maintaining your usual residence while living away from that residence;

accommodation, books or equipment;

(xi) discharging a compulsory repayment amount (within the meaning of the Higher Education Support Act 2003);

(xia) discharging a compulsory VETSL repayment amount (within the meaning of the VET Student Loans Act 2016);

transport in travelling to undertake education or training, or to visit your usual residence when undertaking education or training away from that residence;

if you are disabled—acquiring any special equipment, services or transport as a result of the disability;

anything that would otherwise prevent you from beginning, continuing or completing any education or training; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of pharmaceutical allowance; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of energy supplement.

52-133 Tax-free amount of ordinary payment on death of partner if no bereavement payment payable

This is how to work out the tax-free amount of an *ordinary payment for the purposes of subsection 52-131(4):

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the *supplementary amount of the payment.

Step 2. Subtract the *supplementary amount from the amount of the payment.

Step 3. Work out what would have been the amount of the payment if your partner had not died.

Step 4. Work out what would have been the *supplementary amount of the payment if your partner had not died.

Step 5. Subtract the amount at Step 4 from the amount at Step 3.

Step 6. Subtract the amount at Step 5 from the amount at Step 2: the result is the tax-free amount.

Note: The supplementary amount is also exempt and is worked out under section 52-132.

52-134 Tax-free amount if you receive a bereavement lump sum payment

This is how to work out the tax-free amount for the purposes of subsection 52-131(6):

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the payments under the ABSTUDY scheme that would have become due to you during the bereavement lump sum period if:

your partner had not died; and

your partner had been under pension age; and

immediately before your partner died, you and your partner had been neither an illness separated couple nor a respite care couple.

Step 2. Work out how much of those payments would have been exempt in those circumstances.

Step 3. Work out the payments under the ABSTUDY scheme or the Social Security Act 1991 that would have become due to your partner during the bereavement lump sum period if your partner had not died, even if the payments would not have been exempt.

Step 4. Total the payments worked out at Steps 2 and 3: the result is the tax-free amount.

Subdivision 52-F — Exemption of Commonwealth education or training payments

Table of sections

52-140 Supplementary amount of a Commonwealth education or training payment is exempt

52-145 Meaning of Commonwealth education or training payment

52-140 Supplementary amount of a Commonwealth education or training payment is exempt

This section tells you about the income tax treatment of a Commonwealth education or training payment (other than a payment to or on behalf of a student under the scheme known as ABSTUDY).

Note: The income tax treatment of payments under the scheme known as ABSTUDY is dealt with in Subdivision 52-E.

The *supplementary amount of the payment is exempt from income tax.

(3) The supplementary amount is the total of:

so much of the payment as is included to assist you with, or to reimburse you for, the costs of any one or more of the following:

rent;

living in a remote area;

commencing employment;

travel to, or participation in, courses, interviews, education or training;

a child or children wholly or substantially dependent on you;

telephone bills;

living away from your usual residence;

maintaining your usual residence while living away from that residence;

accommodation, books or equipment;

(xa) discharging a compulsory repayment amount (within the meaning of the Higher Education Support Act 2003);

(xb) discharging a compulsory VETSL repayment amount (within the meaning of the VET Student Loans Act 2016);

transport in travelling to undertake education or training, or to visit your usual residence when undertaking education or training away from that residence;

if you are disabled—acquiring any special equipment, services or transport as a result of the disability;

anything that would otherwise prevent you from beginning, continuing or completing any education or training; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of pharmaceutical allowance; and

so much of the payment as is included by way of energy supplement.

52-145 Meaning of Commonwealth education or training payment

(1) A Commonwealth education or training payment is a payment by the Commonwealth, or in connection with a payment by the Commonwealth, of an allowance or reimbursement:

to or on behalf of a participant in a Commonwealth labour market program; or

to or on behalf of a student under:

the scheme known as ABSTUDY; or

the scheme known as the Assistance for Isolated Children Scheme; or

(iiia) the scheme under section 258 of the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004 to provide education and training; or

the scheme known as youth allowance; or

the scheme known as austudy payment;

in respect of a period commencing at a time when the student was at least 16 years old.

(2) A Commonwealth labour market program is a program administered by the Commonwealth under which:

unemployed persons are given training in skills to improve their employment prospects; or

unemployed persons are assisted in obtaining employment or to become self-employed; or

employed persons are given training in skills and other assistance to aid them in continuing to be employed by their current employer or in obtaining other employment.

Subdivision 52-G — Exempt payments under the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) (Administration) Act 1999

52-150 Family assistance payments are exempt

A payment of child care subsidy, additional child care subsidy, family tax benefit, stillborn baby payment, economic security strategy payment to families, back to school bonus, single income family bonus, clean energy advance, single income family supplement, ETR payment, first 2020 economic support payment, second 2020 economic support payment, additional economic support payment 2020 or additional economic support payment 2021 made to you under the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) (Administration) Act 1999 is exempt from income tax.

Subdivision 52-H — Other exempt payments

52-160 Economic security strategy payments are exempt

Payments under the scheme determined under Schedule 4 to the Social Security and Other Legislation Amendment (Economic Security Strategy) Act 2008 are exempt from income tax.

52-162 ETR payments are exempt

Payments under the scheme determined under Part 2 of Schedule 1 to the Family Assistance and Other Legislation Amendment (Schoolkids Bonus Budget Measures) Act 2012 are exempt from income tax.

52-165 Household stimulus payments are exempt

Payments under the scheme determined under Schedule 4 to the Household Stimulus Package Act (No. 2) 2009 are exempt from income tax.

52-170 Outer Regional and Remote payments under the Helping Children with Autism package are exempt

Payments known as Outer Regional and Remote payments under the Helping Children with Autism package are exempt from income tax.

52-172 Outer Regional and Remote payments under the Better Start for Children with Disability initiative are exempt

Payments known as Outer Regional and Remote payments under the Better Start for Children with Disability initiative are exempt from income tax.

52-175 Continence aids payments are exempt

Payments under the scheme known as the Continence Aids Payment Scheme are exempt from income tax.

52-180 National Disability Insurance Scheme amounts are exempt

An *NDIS amount *derived by a participant (within the meaning of the National Disability Insurance Scheme Act 2013) is exempt from income tax.

52-185 Acute support packages are exempt

Payments under an instrument made under any of the following are exempt from income tax:

(a) section 268B of the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004;

(b) section 41B of the Safety, Rehabilitation and Compensation (Defence-related Claims) Act 1988;

(c) section 115S of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986.

Division 53 — Various exempt payments

Guide to Division 53

53-1 What this Division is about

This Division tells you:

about various payments that are wholly or partly exempt from income tax; and

any special conditions that apply to a payment in order for it to be exempt; and

how to work out how much of a payment is exempt.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

53-10 Exemption of various types of payments

53-20 Exemption of similar Australian and United Kingdom veterans’ payments

53-25 Coronavirus economic response payment

53-30 Territories Stolen Generations Redress Scheme payments are exempt

Operative provisions

53-10 Exemption of various types of payments

This table tells you about the income tax treatment of various types of payments.

53-20 Exemption of similar Australian and United Kingdom veterans’ payments

The following payments made by the Government of Australia, or the Government of the United Kingdom, are exempt from income tax:

(a) payments similar to payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 that are exempt under Subdivision 52-B;

(b) payments similar to payments that are made because of the Veterans’ Entitlements (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 1986 and are exempt under Subdivision 52-C.

53-25 Coronavirus economic response payment

A payment is exempt from income tax if:

(a) the payment is paid in accordance with rules made under the Coronavirus Economic Response Package (Payments and Benefits) Act 2020; and

those rules state that the payment is exempt from income tax.

53-30 Territories Stolen Generations Redress Scheme payments are exempt

Payments under the scheme known as the Territories Stolen Generations Redress Scheme are exempt from income tax.

Division 54 — Exemption for certain payments made under structured settlements and structured orders

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 54

54-A Definitions

54-B Tax exemption for personal injury annuities

54-C Tax exemption for personal injury lump sums

54-D Miscellaneous

Guide to Division 54

54-1 What this Division is about

Certain annuities and lump sums provided under structured settlements and structured orders are exempt from income tax. This Division tells you what a structured settlement is and what a structured order is, and when such an annuity or lump sum is exempt.

Subdivision 54-A — Definitions

Table of sections

Operative provisions

54-5 Definitions

54-10 Meaning of structured settlement and structured order

Operative provisions

54-5 Definitions

In this Division:

date of the settlement or order:

for a structured settlement, means:

the date on which the agreement that is the structured settlement was entered into; or

if that agreement depends, for its effectiveness, on being approved (however described) by an order of a court, or on being embodied in a consent order made by a court, the date on which that order was made; and

for a structured order, means the date on which the order was made.

personal injury annuity means an *annuity: that is purchased under the terms of a structured settlement as mentioned in paragraph 54-10(1)(e); or that is purchased under the terms of a structured order as mentioned in paragraph 54-10(1A)(e).

that is purchased under the terms of a structured settlement as mentioned in paragraph 54-10(1)(e); or

that is purchased under the terms of a structured order as mentioned in paragraph 54-10(1A)(e).

personal injury lump sum means a lump sum: that is purchased under the terms of a structured settlement as mentioned in paragraph 54-10(1)(e); or that is purchased under the terms of a structured order as mentioned in paragraph 54-10(1A)(e).

that is purchased under the terms of a structured settlement as mentioned in paragraph 54-10(1)(e); or

that is purchased under the terms of a structured order as mentioned in paragraph 54-10(1A)(e).

54-10 Meaning of structured settlement and structured order

(1) A structured settlement is a settlement of a claim that satisfies the following conditions:

the claim:

(i) is for compensation or damages for, or in respect of, personal injury suffered by a person (the injured person); and

is made by the injured person or by his or her *legal personal representative;

the claim is based on the commission of a wrong, or on a right created by statute;

(c) the claim is made against a person (the defendant) and satisfies the following conditions:

the claim is not made against the defendant in his or her capacity as an employer, or associate of an employer, of the injured person;

the claim is not made under a *workers’ compensation law, and is not made as an alternative to a claim under such a law;

the settlement takes the form of a written agreement between the parties to the claim (whether or not that agreement is approved by an order of a court, or is embodied in a consent order made by a court);

under the terms of the settlement, some or all of the compensation or damages is to be used by the defendant (or by a person with whom the defendant has insurance against the liability to which the claim relates) to purchase from one or more *life insurance companies or *State insurers:

an *annuity or annuities to be paid to the injured person, or to a trustee for the benefit of the injured person; or

such an annuity or annuities, together with one or more lump sums that are also to be paid to the injured person, or to a trustee for the benefit of the injured person.

(1A) A structured order is an order of a court that satisfies the following conditions:

the order is made in respect of a claim that:

(i) is for compensation or damages for, or in respect of, personal injury suffered by a person (the injured person); and

is made by the injured person or by his or her *legal personal representative;

the order is not an order approving or endorsing an agreement as mentioned in paragraph (1)(d);

the claim is based on the commission of a wrong, or on a right created by statute;

(d) the claim is made against a person (the defendant) and satisfies the following conditions:

the claim is not made against the defendant in his or her capacity as an *employer, or associate of an employer, of the injured person;

the claim is not made under a *workers’ compensation law, and is not made as an alternative to a claim under such a law;

under the terms of the order, some or all of the compensation or damages is to be used by the defendant (or by a person with whom the defendant has insurance against the liability to which the claim relates) to purchase from one or more *life insurance companies or *State insurers:

an *annuity or annuities to be paid to the injured person, or to a trustee for the benefit of the injured person; or

such an annuity or annuities, together with one or more lump sums that are also to be paid to the injured person, or to a trustee for the benefit of the injured person.

If a claim is both:

for compensation or damages for personal injury suffered by a person; and

for some other remedy (for example, compensation or damages for loss of, or damage to, property);

this section applies to the claim, but only to the extent that it relates to the compensation or damages referred to in paragraph (a), and only to annuities or lump sums that, in the settlement agreement, or in the order, are identified as being solely in payment of that compensation or those damages.

Subdivision 54-B — Tax exemption for personal injury annuities

Table of sections

Operative provisions

54-15 Personal injury annuity exemption for injured person

54-20 Lump sum compensation etc. would not have been assessable

54-25 Requirements of the annuity instrument

54-30 Requirements for payments of the annuity

54-35 Payments during the guarantee period on the death of the injured person

54-40 Requirement for minimum monthly level of support

Operative provisions

54-15 Personal injury annuity exemption for injured person

A payment of a personal injury annuity that is made to the *injured person is exempt from income tax if the conditions in this Subdivision are satisfied.

Note: Section 54-70 provides a tax exemption if the payment is instead made to the trustee of a trust.

54-20 Lump sum compensation etc. would not have been assessable

If the compensation or damages that were used to purchase the *annuity had instead been paid to the *injured person in a single lump sum on the *date of the settlement or order, the compensation or damages would not have been assessable income.

Note: Paragraph 118-37(1)(b) disregards a capital gain or capital loss that arises from compensation or damages the injured person receives for any wrong he or she suffers personally.

54-25 Requirements of the annuity instrument

The annuity instrument must:

identify the structured settlement or structured order under which the *annuity is provided; and

only allow for payments of the annuity to be made to:

the injured person; or

a trustee of a trust of which the injured person is the beneficiary; or

a reversionary beneficiary, or the injured person’s estate, in accordance with section 54-35; and

contain a statement to the effect that the annuity cannot be assigned, and cannot be commuted except as mentioned in section 54-35.

Note: Division 2A of Part 10 of the Life Insurance Act 1995 makes a purported assignment or commutation that is contrary to paragraph (c) ineffective.

54-30 Requirements for payments of the annuity

The annuity instrument must provide that payments of the *annuity are to be made at least annually:

over a period of at least 10 years during the life of the *injured person; or

for the life of the injured person.

The annuity instrument must specify:

the date of the first payment of the *annuity; and

if the annuity instrument specifies a period of years—the date of the last payment in that period; and

the amount of each periodic payment of the annuity.

The annuity instrument may only allow the amount of a payment to be varied by increasing the amount:

in order to maintain its real value:

by indexation by reference to increases in the All Groups Consumer Price Index number; or

by indexation by reference to increases in the full-time adult average weekly ordinary time earnings, published by the Australian Statistician; or

by a percentage specified in the annuity instrument.

The annuity instrument may only allow the amount of a particular payment to be varied:

by only one of the methods referred to in subsection (3); or

by whichever of 2 or more of those methods would result in the biggest or smallest increase.

A reference in this section to specifying a date or percentage requires an actual date or figure to be specified, not merely a method of determining a date or figure.

Example: Under subsection (2), “13 September 2002” would be allowed, but “The date on which the annuitant finishes university” would not be allowed.

54-35 Payments during the guarantee period on the death of the injured person

This section applies if the annuity instrument provides for payments to be made to the *injured person during any part of the period ending 10 years after the *date of the settlement or order (whether the *annuity is expressed to be for the life of the person or for a period of years).

(2) The *annuity instrument may specify a period (the guarantee period) of up to 10 years after the *date of the settlement or order, during which, if the *injured person dies, the payments (the remaining payments) for the remainder of the guarantee period that would have been paid to the injured person are to be paid instead to:

the injured person’s estate; or

a reversionary beneficiary.

Note: For tax exemptions in this situation, see sections 54-65 and 54-70.

If the annuity instrument provides for the remaining payments to be made to a reversionary beneficiary, the instrument must:

name the beneficiary; and

allow the beneficiary to choose either:

to be paid the amounts of the remaining payments when the injured person would have received them; or

to commute those payments into a lump sum worked out under subsection (5).

The *injured person’s estate may only be paid the lump sum worked out under subsection (5) (and not the periodic payments).

The amount of the lump sum under subparagraph (3)(b)(ii) or subsection (4) is the policy termination value of the *life insurance policy that is the annuity instrument, as calculated by an actuary as at the date of the injured person’s death. In making this calculation, the following are to be disregarded:

any payments of the annuity due to be made after the end of the guarantee period;

any structured settlement lump sums that are also provided for by that policy.

In this section:

pay to a person includes pay to the trustee of a trust of which the person is the beneficiary.

pay to the injured person’s estate includes pay to the trustee of a trust established by the *injured person’s will.

54-40 Requirement for minimum monthly level of support

Either:

the annuity instrument must provide; or

if there is more than one *annuity provided under the structured settlement or structured order—the annuity instruments for all of those annuities that satisfy the other conditions in this Subdivision, taken as a whole, must provide;

that at least once a month for the life of the *injured person, he or she is to be paid an amount that equals or exceeds the minimum monthly level of support.

(2) The minimum monthly level of support means:

for the year starting on the *date of the settlement or order—one twelfth of the amount that is, on that date, the sum of:

(i) the maximum basic rate of age pension payable to a person in accordance with item 1 of Table B in point 1064-B1 of Pension Rate Calculator A in section 1064 of the Social Security Act 1991; and

the amount of a person’s pension supplement, worked out (using that maximum basic rate) in accordance with Module BA of that Pension Rate Calculator; and

for any subsequent year starting on an anniversary of the date of the settlement or order:

if the indexation factor for the year (see subsection (3)) is greater than 1—the amount worked out under subsection (4); or

otherwise—the minimum monthly level of support for the previous year.

Note: In working out the rate and amount that count for the purposes of paragraph (a), the effect of the indexation provisions in sections 1191 to 1195 of the Social Security Act 1991 must be taken into account. The indexed figures are available from the Department administered by the Minister administering the Human Services (Centrelink) Act 1997.

(3) The indexation factor for a year is to be worked out on the anniversary of the *date of the settlement or order in accordance with the formula:

where:

base year means:

if there have been one or more previous years for which the indexation factor was greater than 1—the year ending immediately before the most recent year for which the indexation factor was greater than 1; or

otherwise—the year ending immediately before the *date of the settlement or order.

Note: This has effect subject to subsection (6).

If the indexation factor for a year is greater than 1, then the minimum monthly level of support for the year is the amount worked out in accordance with the following formula:

The results under subsections (3) and (4) must be rounded to 3 decimal places (rounding up if the fourth decimal place is 5 or more).

The indexation factor for a year must be worked out by reference to figures for the same quarter (for example, the March quarter) as has been used in previous years, even if, on the anniversary of the *date of the settlement or order, the All Groups Consumer Price Index number for that quarter has not yet been published. If this happens, the calculation must be made as soon as practicable after the number for that quarter is published.

In this section:

pay to a person includes pay to the trustee of a trust of which the person is the beneficiary.

Subdivision 54-C — Tax exemption for personal injury lump sums

Table of sections

Operative provisions

54-45 Personal injury lump sum exemption for injured person

54-50 Lump sum compensation would not have been assessable

54-55 Requirements of the instrument under which the lump sum is paid

54-60 Requirements for payments of the lump sum

Operative provisions

54-45 Personal injury lump sum exemption for injured person

A payment of a personal injury lump sum that is made to the *injured person is exempt from income tax if:

there is at least one personal injury annuity (provided under the same structured settlement or structured order) that satisfies the conditions in Subdivision 54-B; and

the other conditions in this Subdivision are satisfied.

Note: Section 54-70 provides a tax exemption if the payment is instead made to the trustee of a trust.

54-50 Lump sum compensation would not have been assessable

If the compensation or damages that were used to purchase the personal injury lump sum had instead been paid to the *injured person on the *date of the settlement or order, the compensation or damages would not have been assessable income.

Note: Paragraph 118-37(1)(b) disregards a capital gain or capital loss that arises from compensation or damages the injured person receives for any wrong he or she suffers personally.

54-55 Requirements of the instrument under which the lump sum is paid

The instrument under which the personal injury lump sum is paid must:

identify the structured settlement or structured order under which the lump sum is provided; and

only allow for the payment of the lump sum to be made to:

the *injured person; or

a trustee of a trust of which the injured person is the beneficiary; and

contain a statement to the effect that the right to receive the lump sum cannot be assigned, and cannot be commuted or otherwise cashed-out early.

Note: Division 2A of Part 10 of the Life Insurance Act 1995 makes a purported assignment or commutation (or cashing-out) that is contrary to paragraph (c) ineffective.

54-60 Requirements for payments of the lump sum

The instrument under which the personal injury lump sum is paid must specify the date and amount of the payment of the lump sum.

The instrument may only allow the amount of the payment to be varied by increasing the amount:

in order to maintain its real value:

by indexation by reference to increases in the All Groups Consumer Price Index number; or

by indexation by reference to increases in the full-time adult average weekly ordinary time earnings, published by the Australian Statistician; or

by a percentage specified in the instrument.

The instrument may only allow the amount of the payment to be varied:

by only one of the methods referred to in subsection (2); or

by whichever of 2 or more of those methods would result in the biggest or smallest increase.

A reference in this section to specifying a date or percentage requires an actual date or figure to be specified, not merely a method of determining a date or figure.

Example: Under subsection (1), “13 September 2002” would be allowed, but “The date on which the annuitant finishes university” would not be allowed.

Subdivision 54-D — Miscellaneous

Table of sections

Operative provisions

54-65 Exemption for certain payments to reversionary beneficiaries

54-70 Special provisions about trusts

54-75 Minister to arrange for review and report

Operative provisions

54-65 Exemption for certain payments to reversionary beneficiaries

A payment that is made to the reversionary beneficiary of a personal injury annuity for which there is a *guarantee period is exempt from income tax if:

the payment is a periodic or lump sum payment made in accordance with subsection 54-35(3); and

either:

if subparagraph 54-35(3)(b)(i) applies—the payment; or

if subparagraph 54-35(3)(b)(ii) applies—each of the payments taken into account in working out the amount of the lump sum under subsection 54-35(5);

would be exempt from income tax under this Division if the *injured person were still alive and the payment, or each of the payments, were instead made to the injured person.

54-70 Special provisions about trusts

A payment of a personal injury annuity or a personal injury lump sum to the trustee of a trust is exempt from income tax for the trustee if:

the beneficiary of the trust is the *injured person; and

because of Subdivision 54-B or 54-C, the payment would have been exempt from income tax if it had been made directly to the beneficiary.

A payment made in accordance with paragraph 54-35(3)(b) to the trustee of a trust is exempt from income tax for the trustee if:

the beneficiary of the trust is the reversionary beneficiary; and

because of section 54-65, the payment would have been exempt from income tax if it had been made directly to the beneficiary.

A payment of a lump sum in accordance with subsection 54-35(4) to the trustee of a trust is exempt from income tax for the trustee.

If a payment is exempt from income tax for a trustee because of this section, the payment is also exempt from income tax for a beneficiary, or the beneficiary, of the trust, even if the trustee:

pays all or part of the payment to the beneficiary; or

applies all or part of the payment for the benefit of the beneficiary.

54-75 Minister to arrange for review and report

(1) The Minister must cause a person to review, and to report to the Minister in writing about, the operation of the following provisions (the structured settlements and orders provisions):

the other provisions of this Division;

(b) Division 2A of Part 10 of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

The person must be someone who, in the Minister’s opinion, is suitably qualified and appropriate to conduct the review.

The review and report must relate to the period beginning when this Division commences and ending after 4 years and 6 months.

The person must give the report to the Minister as soon as practicable, and in any event within 6 months, after the end of that period.

The report may include suggestions for changes to the structured settlements and orders provisions that, in the person’s opinion, are needed to overcome, or would help overcome, problems identified during the review and set out in the report.

The person must provide a reasonable opportunity for members of the public to make submissions to him or her about matters to which the review relates.

The Minister must cause a copy of the report to be laid before each House of the Parliament within 15 sitting days of that House after the Minister receives the report.

Division 55 — Payments that are not exempt from income tax

Guide to Division 55

55-1 What this Division is about

A variety of payments are not exempt from income tax even though they are similar in nature to payments that are wholly or partly exempt under this Part.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

55-5 Occupational superannuation payments

55-10 Education entry payments

Operative provisions

55-5 Occupational superannuation payments

This Part does not exempt from income tax any amount or pension paid under the following provisions or Acts, or under schemes established under any of them:

(a) Defence Force Retirement and Death Benefits Act 1973;

(b) Defence Forces Retirement Benefits Act 1948;

(c) Military Superannuation and Benefits Act 1991;

(ca) Australian Defence Force Superannuation Act 2015;

(cb) Australian Defence Force Cover Act 2015;

(d) Papua New Guinea (Staffing Assistance) Act 1973;

(e) Parliamentary Contributory Superannuation Act 1948;

(f) section 10 of the Superannuation (Pension Increases) Act 1971;

(g) section 9 or 14 of the Superannuation Act (No. 2) 1956;

(h) subsection 8(1) of the Superannuation Act 1948;

(i) Superannuation Act 1922;

(j) Superannuation Act 1976;

(k) Superannuation Act 1990;

(l) Superannuation Act 2005.

This section operates despite anything contained in any other provision of this Part.

55-10 Education entry payments

This Part does not exempt from income tax an education entry payment under Part 2.13A of the Social Security Act 1991.

Division 58 — Capital allowances for depreciating assets previously owned by an exempt entity

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 58

58-A Application

58-B Calculating decline in value of privatised assets under Division 40

Guide to Division 58

58-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out special rules that apply in calculating deductions for the decline in value of depreciating assets and balancing adjustments for assets previously owned by an exempt entity if the assets:

• continue to be owned by that entity after the entity becomes taxable; or

• are acquired from that entity, in connection with the acquisition of a business, by a purchaser that is a taxable entity.

There is a choice of 2 methods for each depreciating asset:

• the notional written down value method; and

• the undeducted pre-existing audited book value method.

Subdivision 58-A — Application

58-5 Application of Division

This Division applies in 2 situations.

Entity sale

(2) The first (an entity sale situation) is where:

at a particular time on or after 1 July 2001, an entity is an *exempt entity; and

just after that time, the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income becomes to any extent assessable income.

In an entity sale situation:

(a) the entity is a transition entity; and

(b) the time when the entity’s *ordinary income or *statutory income becomes to that extent assessable is the transition time; and

(c) the income year in which the *transition time occurs is the transition year for the entity; and

(d) the *depreciating assets the *transition entity *held just before the transition time are privatised assets.

Asset sale

(4) The second (an asset sale situation) is where:

(a) at a particular time on or after 1 July 2001, an entity (the purchaser) whose *ordinary income or statutory income is to any extent assessable acquires a *depreciating asset from the Commonwealth, a State, a Territory or an *exempt entity; and

the asset is acquired in connection with the acquisition of a business from the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the exempt entity.

In an asset sale situation:

(a) the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the *exempt entity is the tax exempt vendor; and

(b) the time when the *depreciating asset is acquired is the acquisition time; and

(c) the income year in which the *acquisition time occurs is the acquisition year; and

(d) each *depreciating asset the purchaser acquires from the *tax exempt vendor at the acquisition time is a privatised asset.

58-10 When an asset is acquired in connection with the acquisition of a business

A depreciating asset is taken to be acquired in connection with the acquisition of a business from the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the *exempt entity if and only if:

the asset was used by the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the exempt entity in carrying on a business and the purchaser or another entity uses the asset in carrying on the business; or

subsection (2) applies.

This subsection applies if:

the asset was used by the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the *exempt entity in performing functions, or engaging in activities, that did not constitute the carrying on of a business by the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the exempt entity and the asset is used by the purchaser or another entity in performing those functions or engaging in those activities as part of carrying on a business; or

all of these subparagraphs apply:

the acquisition by the purchaser of the asset was connected with the acquisition of another asset by the purchaser or another entity from the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the exempt entity or from an associate of the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the exempt entity;

ownership of the other asset gives the purchaser or other entity a right, or imposes on the purchaser or other entity an obligation, to perform functions or engage in activities as part of the carrying on of a business or confers on the purchaser or other entity a commercial advantage or opportunity in connection with performing functions or engaging in activities as part of the carrying on of a business;

the asset is used by the purchaser or other entity in performing those functions or engaging in those activities under the right or obligation or in taking the benefit of the advantage or opportunity; or

the asset was acquired by the purchaser under an arrangement under which the purchaser or another entity acquired another asset from the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the exempt entity or from an associate of the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the exempt entity and:

the other asset is taken by paragraph (1)(a), or by paragraph (a) or (b) of this subsection; or

where the other asset is not a depreciating asset, it would, if it were a depreciating asset, be taken by paragraph (1)(a), or by paragraph (a) or (b) of this subsection;

to be acquired in connection with the acquisition of a business from the Commonwealth, the State, the Territory or the exempt entity.

Paragraphs (2)(a), (b) and (c) do not apply if the asset is used by the purchaser solely to *derive assessable income from the provision of office or residential accommodation.

Subdivision 58-B — Calculating decline in value of privatised assets under Division 40

58-60 Purpose of rules in this Subdivision

This Subdivision sets out rules that affect the way in which the transition entity or the purchaser work out the decline in value of, and balancing adjustments for, *privatised assets under Division 40 after the transition time or the acquisition time.

58-65 Choice of method to work out cost of privatised asset

The transition entity or the purchaser has a choice to work out the first element of the *cost of each privatised asset.

The choice is to use either:

the *notional written down value of the asset; or

the *undeducted pre-existing audited book value (if any) of the asset.

The choice must be made:

for the transition entity—by the day on which the transition entity lodges its income tax return for the transition year; or

for the purchaser—by the day on which the purchaser lodges the purchaser’s income tax return for the acquisition year;

or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner.

The choice, once made, cannot be changed.

58-70 Application of Division 40

Application of Division 40

The transition entity and the purchaser work out the decline in value of, and the effect of a balancing adjustment event occurring for, each privatised asset using Division 40 (Capital allowances) as if the asset had been acquired under a contract entered into on or after 1 July 2001.

Entity sale situation

Division 40 applies to a privatised asset *held by the transition entity as if the asset had not been used, or installed ready for use, for any purpose before the transition time.

The first element of the *cost to the transition entity at the transition time is the *notional written down value of the asset or the *undeducted pre-existing audited book value of the asset (depending on the choice made for the asset).

No amount incurred before the transition time is included in the second element of the *cost of a privatised asset.

Asset sale situation

The first element of the *cost of a privatised asset to the purchaser at the acquisition time is the sum of:

the *notional written down value of the asset or the *undeducted pre-existing audited book value of the asset (depending on the choice made for the asset); and

the amount of any incidental costs to the purchaser in acquiring the asset.

58-75 Meaning of notional written down value

(1) The notional written down value of a *privatised asset is its *adjustable value in the hands of:

the transition entity just before the transition time; or

the tax exempt vendor just before the acquisition time;

worked out using the assumptions in this section.

Application of Division 40

Assume that Division 40 had always applied to work out the decline in value of the privatised asset.

Use for taxable purposes

Assume that, in applying Division 40 to the privatised asset, it had always been used by the transition entity or the tax exempt vendor wholly for *taxable purposes.

Cost and acquisition time: exempt Australian government agency

If the transition entity or the tax exempt vendor was an *exempt Australian government agency just before the transition time and had acquired the privatised asset from another exempt Australian government agency:

assume that the transition entity or tax exempt vendor acquired it at the time when it was acquired or constructed by the other exempt Australian government agency and that the first element of its *cost to the transition entity or tax exempt vendor is the amount that was its cost to the other exempt Australian government agency; or

if it had, before its acquisition by the transition entity or tax exempt vendor, been successively *held by 2 or more exempt Australian government agencies—assume that:

the transition entity or tax exempt vendor acquired it at the time when it was acquired or constructed by the first of those exempt Australian government agencies that owned it; and

the first element of its cost to the transition entity or tax exempt vendor is the sum of the amount that was the first element of its cost to the first of those exempt Australian government agencies that owned it and any amount included in the second element of its cost for that first agency or a later successive agency.

Effective life

Assume that:

the transition entity or the tax exempt vendor had chosen to use an *effective life determined by the Commissioner for the privatised asset as in force at the transition time or the acquisition time; and

subsection 40-95(2) did not apply.

Assume that section 40-102 did not apply to a privatised asset unless all of the following are satisfied:

it is an entity sale situation within the meaning of section 58-5;

a *capped life applies to the asset under subsection 40-102(4) or (5) at both the asset’s *start time and the transition time;

the transition entity chooses, for the purposes of this section, to have section 40-102 apply to the asset.

If section 40-102 is to be applied to the asset, disregard paragraphs 40-102(2)(a) and (b) and assume that the relevant time for the purposes of the application of that section to the asset were the transition time.

Assume also that section 40-110 (about recalculating effective life) did not apply.

58-80 Meaning of undeducted pre-existing audited book value

(1) The undeducted pre-existing audited book value of a *privatised asset is its *adjustable value in the hands of:

the transition entity just before the transition time; or

the tax exempt vendor just before the acquisition time;

worked out using the assumptions in this section.

Application of Division 40

Assume that Division 40 had always applied to work out the decline in value of the privatised asset.

Use for taxable purposes

Assume that, in applying Division 40 to the privatised asset, it had always been used by the transition entity or the tax exempt vendor wholly for *taxable purposes.

Cost

Assume that:

(a) the first element of the *privatised asset’s *cost to the *transition entity or the *tax exempt vendor is its *pre-existing audited book value as at the latest time (the test time) at which it had a pre-existing audited book value; and

no amount was included in the second element of the asset’s cost before the test time; and

any amount included in the second element of the asset’s cost after the test time had been incurred by the transition entity or the tax exempt vendor.

Acquisition time

Assume that the transition entity or the tax exempt vendor had acquired the privatised asset at the test time.

Effective life

Assume that:

the transition entity or the tax exempt vendor had chosen to use an *effective life determined by the Commissioner for the privatised asset as in force at the transition time or the acquisition time; and

subsection 40-95(2) did not apply.

Note: Section 40-102 does not apply to a privatised asset for the purposes of this section.

Assume also that section 40-110 (about recalculating effective life) did not apply.

58-85 Pre-existing audited book value of depreciating asset

(1) A *privatised asset has a pre-existing audited book value if:

(a) a balance sheet, as at the end of an annual accounting period (the balance date), that was prepared as part of the final accounts of the Commonwealth, a State, a Territory or an *exempt entity for that period showed the asset as an asset of the relevant entity and specified a value for it; and

a qualified independent auditor who was engaged, or was required by law, to undertake an audit of those accounts had prepared and signed, before 4 August 1997, a final audit report on those accounts; and

the report did not state that the auditor was not satisfied that the specified value fairly represented the value of the asset.

The asset is taken to have had a pre-existing audited book value at the balance date of an amount equal to the specified value.

If a balance sheet did not specify a value for the asset but specified a total value for 2 or more assets including the asset, the balance sheet is taken to have specified as the value of the asset so much of that total value as is reasonably attributable to the asset.

58-90 Method and effective life for transition entity

The transition entity must, in working out the decline in value of a privatised asset, use the diminishing value method or the prime cost method for the asset that it used to work out the *notional written down value, or the *undeducted pre-existing audited book value, of the asset.

In working out the decline in value of a privatised asset held by a transition entity:

if section 40-102 applied to the asset for the purposes of subsection 58-75(5A)—section 40-102 applies to the asset and applies as if the relevant time for the asset for the purposes of that section were the transition time; or

if section 40-102 did not apply to the asset for the purposes of subsection 58-75(5A) or section 58-80—section 40-102 does not apply to the asset.

Division 59 — Particular amounts of non-assessable non-exempt income

Guide to Division 59

59-1 What this Division is about

This Division details particular amounts that are non-assessable non-exempt income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

59-10 Compensation under firearms surrender arrangements

59-15 Mining payments

59-20 Taxable amounts relating to franchise fees windfall tax

59-25 Taxable amounts relating to Commonwealth places windfall tax

59-30 Amounts you must repay

59-35 Amounts that would be mutual receipts but for prohibition on distributions to members or issue of MCIs

59-40 Issue of rights

59-50 Native title benefits

59-55 2019-20 bushfires—payments for volunteer work with fire services

59-60 2019-20 bushfires—disaster relief payments and non-cash benefits

59-65 Water infrastructure improvement payments

59-67 Meaning of SRWUIP program, SRWUIP payment, direct SRWUIP payment and indirect SRWUIP payment

59-70 List of SRWUIP programs

59-75 Commissioner to be kept informed

59-80 Amending assessments

59-85 2019 floods—recovery grants for small businesses, primary producers and non-profit organisations

59-86 2019 floods—on-farm grant program for primary producers

59-90 Cash flow boost

59-95 Coronavirus economic response payment

59-96 COVID-19 disaster payment

59-97 State and Territory grants to small business relating to the recovery from the coronavirus known as COVID-19

59-98 Commonwealth small business support payments relating to the coronavirus known as COVID-19

59-99 2021 floods and storms—recovery grants

59-100 Refund of large-scale generation shortfall charge

59-105 Cyclone Seroja—recovery grants

59-110 Payment to victim following perpetrator contributions release order

Operative provisions

59-10 Compensation under firearms surrender arrangements

A payment made to you by way of compensation under *firearms surrender arrangements for any loss of business is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

59-15 Mining payments

These are not assessable income and are not exempt income:

a mining payment made to a distributing body;

a mining payment made to one or more *Indigenous persons, or applied for their benefit.

A payment:

made to a distributing body; or

made to one or more *Indigenous persons, or applied for their benefit;

is not assessable income and is not exempt income if the payment is made by a distributing body out of a mining payment that it has received.

A payment made to a distributing body by another distributing body, out of a mining payment received by the other distributing body, is taken to be a mining payment for the purposes of:

any further applications of subsection (2); and

any further applications of this subsection.

Subsection (2) does not apply to a payment by a distributing body for the purposes of meeting its administrative costs.

This section does not apply to an amount paid to or applied for the benefit of a person if it is remuneration or consideration for goods or services provided by that person.

59-20 Taxable amounts relating to franchise fees windfall tax

Taxable amounts on which tax is imposed by the Franchise Fees Windfall Tax (Imposition) Act 1997 are not assessable income and are not *exempt income.

59-25 Taxable amounts relating to Commonwealth places windfall tax

Taxable amounts on which tax is imposed by the Commonwealth Places Windfall Tax (Imposition) Act 1998 are not assessable income and are not *exempt income.

59-30 Amounts you must repay

An amount you receive is not assessable income and is not exempt income for an income year if:

you must repay it; and

you repay it in a later income year; and

you cannot deduct the repayment for any income year.

It does not matter if:

you received the amount as part of a larger amount; or

the obligation to repay existed when you received the amount or it came into existence later.

This section does not apply to an amount you must repay because you received a lump sum as compensation or damages for a wrong or injury you suffered in your occupation.

59-35 Amounts that would be mutual receipts but for prohibition on distributions to members or issue of MCIs

An amount of ordinary income of an entity is not assessable income and not exempt income if:

the amount would be a mutual receipt, but for:

the entity’s constituent document preventing the entity from making any *distribution, whether in money, property or otherwise, to its members; or

(ii) the entity’s constituent document providing for the entity to issue MCIs (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) or to pay *dividends in respect of MCIs; or

(iii) the entity having issued one or more MCIs (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) or having paid dividends in respect of one or more MCIs; and

apart from this section, the amount would be assessable income only because of section 6-5.

59-40 Issue of rights

(1) The *market value, as at the time of issue (the issue time), of rights issued to you:

by a company to *acquire *shares in that company; or

by a trustee of a unit trust to acquire units in that trust;

is not assessable income and is not exempt income as at the issue time if the conditions in subsection (2) are satisfied.

The conditions are as follows:

(a) at the issue time, you must already own *shares in the company or units in the unit trust (the original interests);

the rights must be issued to you because of your ownership of the original interests;

the original interests and the rights must not be *revenue assets or trading stock at the issue time;

if you acquired a beneficial interest in the rights under an employee share scheme—neither Subdivision 83A-B nor 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the beneficial interest;

the original interests and the rights must not be *traditional securities;

the original interests must not be *convertible interests.

59-50 Native title benefits

To the extent that a native title benefit would otherwise be included in your assessable income, it is not assessable income and is not exempt income if you are an Indigenous person or an Indigenous holding entity.

To the extent that an amount, or other benefit, arising directly or indirectly from a native title benefit would otherwise be included in your assessable income, it is not assessable income and is not exempt income if you are an Indigenous person or an Indigenous holding entity.

Neither subsection (1) nor (2) applies to an amount, or benefit, to the extent that it:

is for the purposes of meeting the provider’s administrative costs; or

is remuneration or consideration for the provision of goods or services.

Subsection (2) does not apply to an amount, or benefit, to the extent that it arises directly or indirectly:

from so much of:

the native title benefit; or

an amount, or benefit, arising directly or indirectly from the native title benefit;

as is not non-assessable non-exempt income of an entity because of this section; or

from an entity investing any or all of:

the native title benefit; or

an amount, or benefit, arising directly or indirectly from the native title benefit.

(5) A native title benefit is an amount, or *non-cash benefit, that:

arises under:

an agreement made under an Act of the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory, or under an instrument made under such an Act; or

an ancillary agreement to such an agreement;

to the extent that the amount or benefit relates to an act that would extinguish native title or that would otherwise be wholly or partly inconsistent with the continued existence, enjoyment or exercise of native title; or

(b) is compensation determined in accordance with Division 5 of Part 2 of the Native Title Act 1993.

Note 1: Agreements that can be covered by paragraph (a) include:

(a) indigenous land use agreements (within the meaning of the Native Title Act 1993); and

an agreement of the kind mentioned in paragraph 31(1)(b) of that Act; and

(c) recognition and settlement agreements (within the meaning of the Traditional Owner Settlement Act 2010 (Vic.)).

Note 2: Paragraph (a) does not require a determination of native title under the Native Title Act 1993.

(6) An Indigenous holding entity is:

a distributing body; or

a trust, if the beneficiaries of the trust can only be *Indigenous persons or Indigenous holding entities; or

a registered charity.

59-55 2019-20 bushfires—payments for volunteer work with fire services

A payment to an individual is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the purpose of the payment is to compensate the individual for the loss of income as a result of the individual performing volunteer work with a fire service (however described) of a State or Territory; and

the work is performed during the 2019-20 income year; and

the payment is made by a State or Territory and is covered by an agreement between the Commonwealth and that State or Territory; and

the payment is made on or after 1 January 2020.

However, this section does not apply to:

a payment received in the individual’s capacity as an employee or contractor (including a payment of an entitlement to paid leave); or

a workers’ compensation payment.

59-60 2019-20 bushfires—disaster relief payments and non-cash benefits

A payment made to an entity, or a *non-cash benefit provided to an entity, to the extent it would otherwise be assessable income of the entity, is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the payment has been made or the benefit provided directly as a result of the bushfires commencing in Australia in the 2019-20 financial year; and

the purpose of the payment or benefit is to provide the entity with relief from, or assist the entity in recovering from, the effects of the bushfires; and

the payment is made, or the benefit is provided, by:

the Commonwealth; or

a State or Territory; or

a municipal corporation; or

a local governing body.

Note: Payments covered by this subsection would include Disaster Recovery Allowance paid under the Social Security Act 1991 and payments made under disaster recovery funding arrangements made by or on behalf of the Commonwealth.

A payment made to an entity, or a *non-cash benefit provided to an entity, to the extent it would otherwise be assessable income of the entity, is also not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the payment or benefit relates to the bushfires commencing in Australia in the 2019-20 financial year; and

the payment or benefit is of a kind prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection.

However, this section does not apply to:

a payment or benefit received in an individual’s capacity as an employee or contractor (including a payment of an entitlement to paid leave); or

a workers’ compensation payment; or

a payment of compensation or damages made to an entity as a result of an order of a court or tribunal or settlement of a claim.

59-65 Water infrastructure improvement payments

A SRWUIP payment, in respect of a SRWUIP program, to an entity that is a participant in the program is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the entity has made a choice under subsection (2) for the program; and

if the payment is an indirect SRWUIP payment—the entity *derives the payment because it owns an asset (otherwise than under a financial arrangement) to which the program relates.

Note: One of the requirements for a SRWUIP payment is for the SRWUIP program to be on the published list of SRWUIP programs for the day the payment is made (see subsection 59-67(5)).

An entity may make a choice for a SRWUIP program under this subsection if, in an income year:

(a) the entity *derives a *SRWUIP payment in respect of the program but has not, in an earlier income year:

derived a SRWUIP payment in respect of the program; or

incurred SRWUIP expenditure in respect of the program; or

(b) the entity incurs SRWUIP expenditure in respect of the program but has not, in an earlier income year:

derived a SRWUIP payment in respect of the program; or

incurred SRWUIP expenditure in respect of the program.

Disregard subsection 26-100(3) (about expenditure that is never SRWUIP expenditure) for the purposes of this subsection.

The choice must be:

made in the approved form; and

made:

unless subparagraph (ii) or (iii) applies—on or before the day the entity lodges its income tax return for the income year; or

if the Commissioner makes an assessment of the entity’s taxable income for the income year before the entity lodges its income tax return for the income year, and subparagraph (iii) does not apply—on or before the day the Commissioner makes that assessment; or

within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

The choice cannot be revoked.

Integrity rule

Subsection (1) does not apply if, at the time the entity *derives the SRWUIP payment in respect of a SRWUIP program, it is reasonable to conclude that:

the entity will not incur expenditure at least equal to the payment on works required by the program; and

despite not incurring such expenditure, the entity will comply with the program because an associate of the entity will incur expenditure on those works; and

the associate has not made, and will not make, a choice under subsection (2) for the program.

59-67 Meaning of SRWUIP program, SRWUIP payment, direct SRWUIP payment and indirect SRWUIP payment

(1) A SRWUIP program is a program under the program administered by the Commonwealth known as the Sustainable Rural Water Use and Infrastructure program.

(2) A SRWUIP payment, in respect of a *SRWUIP program, is:

a direct SRWUIP payment in respect of the program; or

an indirect SRWUIP payment in respect of the program.

(3) A direct SRWUIP payment is a payment by the Commonwealth to a participant in a *SRWUIP program to the extent that it is made under that program.

(4) An indirect SRWUIP payment is a payment to a participant in a *SRWUIP program to the extent that it is reasonably attributable to a payment by the Commonwealth under that program.

For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), treat a payment as being made under a SRWUIP program only if that SRWUIP program is on the published list of SRWUIP programs (see section 59-70) for the day the payment is made.

However, treat a payment as if it had never been made under a SRWUIP program to the extent that the Commonwealth seeks to recover the payment.

Example: The Commonwealth seeks to recover half of a payment made under a SRWUIP program. The remaining half is still a payment made under the SRWUIP program.

59-70 List of SRWUIP programs

The Water Secretary must keep a list of *SRWUIP programs. The list must:

specify the days for which each program is on the list; and

be published on the Water Department’s website.

Example: A program could be listed for each day on or after 1 July 2011.

Entering SRWUIP programs on the list

The Water Secretary must enter on the list each SRWUIP program (and its days) in accordance with a direction under subsection (3).

The Minister and the Water Minister may jointly direct the Water Secretary to enter a program (and its days) on the list only if the Water Minister has notified the Minister in writing that the Water Minister is satisfied that the program:

is a SRWUIP program; and

will generate efficiencies in water use through infrastructure improvements.

A direction under subsection (3) must be in writing and specify the days for which the SRWUIP program is to be on the list. Some or all of those days may be before the day the direction is given.

Changing the days for which a SRWUIP program is listed

The Minister and the Water Minister may jointly direct the Water Secretary to change the list to specify:

additional days (including days before the day the direction is given) for which a SRWUIP program is on the list; or

the final day (which must be after the day the direction is given) for which a SRWUIP program is on the list.

The Water Secretary must change the list accordingly.

A direction under subsection (5) must be in writing.

Giving directions

The Minister and the Water Minister must have regard to the policies and budgetary priorities of the Commonwealth Government in deciding whether to give a direction under subsection (3) or (5).

59-75 Commissioner to be kept informed

The Water Secretary must notify the Commissioner about each payment described in subsection 59-67(6) that the Commonwealth seeks to recover.

59-80 Amending assessments

Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purpose of giving effect to an outcome that is consequential on any or all of the following events:

the inclusion of a SRWUIP program on the published list of SRWUIP programs (see section 59-70);

the publication of a change to a SRWUIP program’s listing on the published list of SRWUIP programs;

the Commonwealth seeking to recover a payment described in subsection 59-67(6);

the making of a choice under subsection 59-65(2);

the event that causes subsection 26-100(3) to treat expenditure as if it had never been SRWUIP expenditure;

if the amendment is made at any time during the period of 2 years starting immediately after that event.

Note: Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 specifies the usual period within which assessments may be amended.

59-85 2019 floods—recovery grants for small businesses, primary producers and non-profit organisations

A payment is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

for the purposes of the Disaster Recovery Funding Arrangements 2018 (set out in a determination made by the Minister for Law Enforcement and Cyber Security on 5 June 2018), the payment is a recovery grant made to a small business, primary producer or non-profit organisation as part of a Category C or Category D measure; and

the payment relates to floods commencing in Australia in the period between 25 January 2019 and 28 February 2019.

59-86 2019 floods—on-farm grant program for primary producers

A payment is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

for the purposes of an agreement covered by subsection (2), the payment is a grant made to a primary producer; and

the grant is for replacing or repairing farm infrastructure, restocking, replanting, or a similar purpose.

An agreement is covered by this subsection if:

the agreement is entered into in the period between 1 February 2019 and 1 July 2019; and

the parties to the agreement are the Commonwealth and a State or Territory; and

the objective of the agreement is principally to assist primary producers impacted by floods commencing in Australia in the period between 25 January 2019 and 28 February 2019.

59-90 Cash flow boost

A cash flow boost paid in accordance with the Boosting Cash Flow for Employers (Coronavirus Economic Response Package) Act 2020 is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

59-95 Coronavirus economic response payment

A payment is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

(a) the payment is paid in accordance with rules made under the Coronavirus Economic Response Package (Payments and Benefits) Act 2020; and

those rules state that the payment is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

59-96 COVID-19 disaster payment

A payment an individual receives is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if it is a COVID-19 disaster payment (within the meaning of the COVID-19 Disaster Payment (Funding Arrangements) Act 2021).

59-97 State and Territory grants to small business relating to the recovery from the coronavirus known as COVID-19

A payment an entity receives is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the entity receives the payment under a grant program administered by:

a State or a Territory; or

an authority of a State or a Territory; and

the grant program is declared under subsection (3) to be an eligible program (whether this declaration is made before, on or after the day the entity receives the payment); and

the entity receives the payment in the 2020-21 or 2021-22 financial year; and

the entity is a small business entity, or an entity covered by subsection (2), for the income year in which the entity receives the payment.

An entity is covered by this subsection for an income year if:

the entity is not a small business entity for the income year; and

the entity would be a small business entity for the income year if:

each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $50 million; and

the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this subsection.

The Minister must, by legislative instrument, declare a grant program to be an eligible program if the Minister is satisfied that:

the program was first publicly announced on or after 13 September 2020 by the State, Territory or authority that is administering it; and

the program is, in effect, responding to economic impacts of the coronavirus known as COVID-19; and

the program is, in effect, directed at supporting businesses:

who are the subject of a public health directive applying to a geographical area in which the businesses operate; and

whose operations have been significantly disrupted as a result of the public health directive; and

the State, Territory or authority has requested the program to be declared to be an eligible program under this subsection.

59-98 Commonwealth small business support payments relating to the coronavirus known as COVID-19

A payment an entity receives is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the entity receives the payment under a program administered by the Commonwealth or an authority of the Commonwealth; and

the program is declared under subsection (2) to be an eligible program (whether this declaration is made before, on or after the day the entity receives the payment); and

the entity receives the payment in the 2021-22 financial year; and

the entity is a small business entity, or an entity covered by subsection 59-97(2), for the income year in which the entity receives the payment.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), the Minister may, by legislative instrument, declare a program to be an eligible program if the Minister is satisfied that the program is, in effect:

responding to economic impacts of the coronavirus known as COVID-19; and

directed at supporting *businesses the operations of which have been significantly disrupted as a result of a public health directive.

59-99 2021 floods and storms—recovery grants

A payment is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

for the purposes of the Disaster Recovery Funding Arrangements 2018 (set out in a determination made by the Minister for Law Enforcement and Cyber Security on 5 June 2018), the payment is a recovery grant made to a small business or primary producer as part of a Category D measure; and

the payment relates to:

floods commencing in Australia as a consequence of rainfall events occurring in the period between 19 February 2021 and 31 March 2021; or

storms occurring in Australia in that period.

59-100 Refund of large-scale generation shortfall charge

(1) A payment to an entity under section 98 of the Renewable Energy (Electricity) Act 2000 is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

(2) Disregard subsection (1) for the purposes of determining whether an entity can deduct expenditure that it incurs in relation to large-scale generation certificates (within the meaning of the Renewable Energy (Electricity) Act 2000).

59-105 Cyclone Seroja—recovery grants

A payment is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

for the purposes of the Disaster Recovery Funding Arrangements 2018 (set out in a determination made by the Minister for Law Enforcement and Cyber Security on 5 June 2018), the payment is a recovery grant made to a small business or primary producer as part of a Category C measure; and

the payment relates to Cyclone Seroja.

59-110 Payment to victim following perpetrator contributions release order

A payment made by the Commissioner of an amount mentioned in subsection 139-160(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

Part 2-20 — Tax offsets

Division 61 — Generally applicable tax offsets

Subdivision 61-A — Dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 61-A

61-1 What this Subdivision is about

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year if you maintain certain dependants who are unable to work.

Table of sections

Object of this Subdivision

61-5 Object of this Subdivision

Entitlement to the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

61-10 Who is entitled to the tax offset

61-15 Cases involving more than one spouse

61-20 Exceeding the income limit for family tax benefit (Part B)

61-25 Eligibility for family tax benefit (Part B) without shared care

Amount of the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

61-30 Amount of the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

61-35 Families with shared care percentages

61-40 Reduced amounts of dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

61-45 Reductions to take account of the other individual’s income

Object of this Subdivision

61-5 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to provide a tax offset to assist with the maintenance of certain types of dependants who are genuinely unable to work because of invalidity, or because of their care obligations.

Entitlement to the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

61-10 Who is entitled to the tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

during the year you contribute to the maintenance of another individual who:

is your *spouse; or

is your *parent or your spouse’s parent; or

is aged 16 years or over, and is your *child, brother or sister or a brother or sister of your spouse; and

during the year, the other individual meets the requirements of one or more of subsections (2), (3) and (4); and

during the year:

the other individual is an Australian resident; or

if the other individual is your spouse or your child—you had a domicile in Australia.

The other individual meets the requirements of this subsection if he or she is being paid:

(a) a disability support pension or a special needs disability support pension under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(b) an invalidity service pension under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986.

The other individual meets the requirements of this subsection if he or she:

is your *spouse or parent, or your spouse’s parent; and

(b) is being paid a carer allowance or carer payment under the Social Security Act 1991 in relation to provision of care to a person who:

is your *child, brother or sister, or the brother or sister of your spouse; and

is aged 16 years or over.

The other individual meets the requirements of this subsection if he or she is your *spouse or parent, or your spouse’s parent, and is wholly engaged in providing care to an individual who:

is your *child, brother or sister, or the brother or sister of your spouse; and

is aged 16 years or over; and

is being paid:

(i) a disability support pension or a special needs disability support pension under the Social Security Act 1991; or

(ii) an invalidity service pension under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986.

You may be entitled to more than one tax offset for the year under subsection (1) if:

you contributed to the maintenance of more than one other individual (none of whom are your *spouse) during the year; or

you had different *spouses at different times during the year.

Note 1: If paragraph (b) applies, the amount of the tax offset in relation to each spouse would be only part of the full amount: see section 61-40.

Note 2: Section 960-255 may be relevant to determining relationships for the purposes of this section.

61-15 Cases involving more than one spouse

Despite paragraph 61-10(1)(a), if, during a period comprising some or all of the year, there are 2 or more individuals who are your *spouse, you are taken, for the purposes of section 61-10, only to contribute to the maintenance of the spouse with whom you reside during that period.

Despite paragraph 61-10(1)(a) and subsection (1) of this section, if, during a period comprising some or all of the year:

you reside with 2 or more individuals who are your *spouse; or

2 or more individuals are your *spouse but you reside with none of them;

you are taken, for the purposes of section 61-10, only to contribute to the maintenance of whichever of those individuals in relation to whom you are entitled to the smaller, or smallest, amount (including a nil amount) of tax offset under this Subdivision in relation to that period.

61-20 Exceeding the income limit for family tax benefit (Part B)

Despite section 61-10, you are not entitled to a tax offset for an income year if the sum of:

your adjusted taxable income for offsets for the year; and

if you had a *spouse for the whole or part of the year, and your spouse was not the other individual referred to in subsection 61-10(1)—the spouse’s adjusted taxable income for offsets for the year;

is more than the amount specified in subclause 28B(1) of Schedule 1 to the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999, as indexed under Part 2 of Schedule 4 to that Act.

However, if you had a *spouse for only part of the year, the spouse’s adjusted taxable income for offsets for the year is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), to be this amount:

If you had a different *spouse during different parts of the year, include the adjusted taxable income for offsets of each spouse under paragraph (1)(b) and subsection (2).

61-25 Eligibility for family tax benefit (Part B) without shared care

Despite section 61-10, you are not entitled to a tax offset in relation to another individual for an income year if:

your entitlement to the tax offset would, apart from this section, be based on the other individual being your spouse during the year; and

during the whole of the year:

(i) you, or your *spouse while being your partner (within the meaning of the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999), is eligible for family tax benefit at the Part B rate (within the meaning of that Act); and

clause 31 of Schedule 1 to that Act does not apply in respect of the Part B rate.

Note: Clause 31 of Schedule 1 to the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999 reduces the standard rate for the family tax benefit to take account of shared care percentages.

Amount of the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

61-30 Amount of the dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

The amount of the tax offset to which you are entitled in relation to another individual under section 61-10 for an income year is $2,423. The amount is indexed annually.

Note 1: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.

Note 2: The amount of the tax offset may be reduced by the application, in order, of sections 61-35 to 61-45.

61-35 Families with shared care percentages

The amount of the tax offset under section 61-30 in relation to the other individual for the year is reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (2) of this section if:

your entitlement to the tax offset is based on the other individual being your spouse during the year; and

(b) during a period (the shared care period) comprising the whole or part of the year:

(i) you, or your *spouse while being your partner (within the meaning of the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999), was eligible for family tax benefit at the Part B rate within the meaning of that Act; and

clause 31 of Schedule 1 to that Act applied in respect of that Part B rate because you, or your spouse, had a shared care percentage for an FTB child (within the meaning of that Act).

The reduction is worked out as follows:

where:

non-shared care rate is the rate that would be the standard rate in relation to you or your *spouse under clause 30 of Schedule 1 to the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999 if:

clause 31 of that Schedule did not apply; and

the FTB child in relation to whom the standard rate was determined under clause 31 of that Schedule was the only FTB child of you or your spouse, as the case requires.

shared care rate is the standard rate in relation to you or your *spouse worked out under clause 31 of Schedule 1 to the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999.

unaltered offset amount is what would, but for this section, be the amount of your *tax offset in relation to the other individual under section 61-10 for the year.

61-40 Reduced amounts of dependant (invalid and carer) tax offset

The amount of the tax offset under sections 61-30 and 61-35 in relation to the other individual for the year is reduced by the amount in accordance with subsection (2) of this section if one or more of the following applies:

you contribute to the maintenance of the other individual during part only of the year;

during the whole or part of the year, 2 or more individuals contribute to the maintenance of the other individual;

the other individual is an individual of a kind referred to in subparagraph 61-10(1)(a)(i), (ii) or (iii) during part only of the year;

paragraph 61-10(1)(b) applies to the other individual during part only of the year;

paragraph 61-10(1)(c) applies during part only of the year;

the other individual is your spouse, and, during part of the year:

(i) you, or your *spouse while being your partner (within the meaning of the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999), is eligible for family tax benefit at the Part B rate (within the meaning of that Act); and

clause 31 of Schedule 1 to that Act does not apply in respect of the Part B rate;

(g) the other individual is your spouse, and, during part of the year, parental leave pay is payable under the Paid Parental Leave Act 2010 to you, or to your spouse while being your partner (within the meaning of that Act).

The amount of the tax offset under sections 61-30 and 61-35 is reduced to an amount that, in the Commissioner’s opinion, is a reasonable apportionment in the circumstances, having regard to the applicable matters referred to in paragraphs (1)(a) to (g).

If paragraph (1)(f) or (g) applies, the Commissioner is not to consider the part of the year covered by that paragraph.

61-45 Reductions to take account of the other individual’s income

The amount of the tax offset under sections 61-30 to 61-40 in relation to the other individual for the year is reduced by $1 for every $4 by which the following exceeds $282:

if you contribute to the maintenance of the other individual for the whole of the year—the other individual’s adjusted taxable income for offsets for the year;

if paragraph (a) does not apply—the other individual’s adjusted taxable income for offsets for that part of the year during which you contribute to the maintenance of the other individual.

Subdivision 61-D — Low Income tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 61-D

61-100 What this Subdivision is about

You may be entitled to a tax offset if you:

are a lower-income earner; or

are the trustee of a trust who is liable to be assessed in respect of a share of the trust’s net income to which a beneficiary is presently entitled.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

61-110 Entitlement to the Low Income tax offset

61-115 Amount of the Low Income tax offset

Operative provisions

61-110 Entitlement to the Low Income tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset for the 2020-21 income year or a later income year if:

you are an individual who is an Australian resident at any time during the income year; and

your taxable income for the income year does not exceed $66,667.

You are entitled to a tax offset for the 2020-21 income year or a later income year if:

(a) for the income year, you are a trustee who is liable to be assessed under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a share of the *net income of a trust; and

the beneficiary who is presently entitled to that share is an individual who is an Australian resident at any time during the income year; and

that share does not exceed $66,667.

If you are entitled to a tax offset under subsection (2), you are entitled to a separate tax offset for each beneficiary who is presently entitled to a share for which subsection (2) is satisfied.

61-115 Amount of the Low Income tax offset

General rule

(1) The amount of your *tax offset is set out in the following table in respect of the following income (your relevant income):

if you are an individual—your taxable income for the income year;

if you are a trustee—the amount of the share of *net income referred to in subsection 61-110(2).

If you are less than 18 years of age

Despite subsection (1), the amount of your tax offset for the income year cannot exceed a cap if:

(a) you are an individual who is a prescribed person in relation to the income year for the purposes of Division 6AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

(b) part (the excluded part) of your basic income tax liability for the income year is attributable to your eligible taxable income (within the meaning of section 102AD of that Act).

The cap is an amount equal to the remaining part of your basic income tax liability for the income year.

Note: Division 6AA (including section 102AD) is about income that particular kinds of children derive from particular sources.

(3) When working out the remaining part of your basic income tax liability, if you are also entitled to a *tax offset under section 160AAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, treat that tax offset as having been applied, to the extent possible, against the excluded part of your basic income tax liability.

Note: That tax offset is for individuals eligible for certain benefits.

If you are a trustee and the beneficiary is less than 18 years of age

Despite subsection (1), the amount of your tax offset for the income year cannot exceed a cap if:

you are a trustee; and

(b) the beneficiary who is presently entitled to the share of *net income to which the tax offset relates is a prescribed person in relation to the income year for the purposes of Division 6AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

part of your basic income tax liability for the income year is attributable to the portion of that share to which that Division applies.

The cap is an amount equal to the part of your basic income tax liability attributable to the remaining portion of that share.

Note 1: Division 6AA is about income that particular kinds of children derive from particular sources.

Note 2: To work out the portion of that share to which Division 6AA applies, see section 102AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 61-E — Working Australians tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 61-E

61-150 What this Subdivision is about

You may be entitled to a tax offset if you earn certain labour income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

61-155 Entitlement to the working Australians tax offset

61-160 Amount of the working Australians tax offset

Operative provisions

61-155 Entitlement to the working Australians tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

you are an individual who is an Australian resident at any time during the income year; and

(b) in the income year, the amount worked out for you under subsection (2) (about your net labour income) exceeds the tax-free threshold (within the meaning of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986).

Net labour income

Work out the amount for an income year using the formula:

where:

labour amounts means the sum of the following amounts included in your assessable income for the income year:

an amount of assessable labour income;

an amount you *derive from carrying on a business as an individual (not including assessable income you derive from a business carried on by a partnership or trust);

an amount of personal services income;

an amount included in your assessable income under section 83A-25 (about discounts given in relation to an *ESS interest included in assessable income);

(e) an amount that is a payment from which an amount must be withheld (even if the amount is not withheld) under section 12-60 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about payments under labour hire and certain other arrangements).

labour deductions means the sum of the following amounts you can deduct in relation to the income year:

(a) an amount of a loss or outgoing that you incurred in gaining or producing an amount mentioned in paragraph (a) or (c) of the definition of labour amounts;

an amount of a loss or outgoing that you necessarily incurred in carrying on a business as an individual (not including a loss or outgoing necessarily incurred by a business carried on by a partnership or trust);

an amount you can deduct under section 25-130;

an amount you can deduct under section 40-25 (other than an amount equal to the decline in value of a depreciating asset that you allocate to a low-value pool under section 40-425), to the extent that the deduction arises for a depreciating asset that you use to:

(i) derive an amount mentioned in paragraph (b) of the definition of labour amounts; or

(ii) gain or produce an amount mentioned in paragraph (c) of the definition of labour amounts;

an amount of a deduction mentioned in paragraphs 25-130(2)(d) to (g) (standard deduction for work-related expenses);

(f) an amount you can deduct under Subdivision 328-D, to the extent that the deduction arises for a depreciating asset that you use to derive an amount mentioned in paragraph (b) of the definition of labour amounts.

(3) If more than one paragraph in the definition of labour amounts or labour deductions covers an amount, include the amount only once.

61-160 Amount of the working Australians tax offset

The amount of your tax offset for an income year is the lesser of:

$250; and

the amount that would be the amount of your basic income tax liability for the income year if your taxable income was comprised only of your net labour income worked out under subsection 61-155(2) for the income year.

Subdivision 61-G — Private health insurance offset complementary to Part 2-2 of the Private Health Insurance Act 2007

Guide to Subdivision 61-G

61-200 What this Subdivision is about

You can choose to claim a tax offset for a premium, or an amount in respect of a premium, paid under a private health insurance policy instead of having the premium reduced under Division 23 of the Private Health Insurance Act 2007.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

61-205 Entitlement to the private health insurance tax offset

61-210 Amount of the private health insurance tax offset

61-215 Reallocation of the private health insurance tax offset between spouses

Operative provisions

61-205 Entitlement to the private health insurance tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset for the 2012-13 income year or a later income year if:

(a) a premium, or an amount in respect of a premium, was paid by you or another entity during the income year under a *complying health insurance policy in respect of a period (the premium period); and

you are a *PHIIB in respect of the premium or amount; and

each person insured under the policy during the premium period is, for the whole of the time that he or she is insured under the policy during the premium period:

(i) an eligible person (within the meaning of section 3 of the Health Insurance Act 1973); or

treated as such because of section 6, 6A or 7 of that Act.

You are also entitled to the tax offset if:

(a) you are a trustee who is liable to be assessed under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a share of the net income of a trust estate; and

the beneficiary who is presently entitled to the share of the income of the trust estate would be entitled to the tax offset because of subsection (1).

61-210 Amount of the private health insurance tax offset

The amount of the tax offset is your *share of the PHII benefit in respect of the premium or amount.

Reduction because PHII benefit received in another form

(2) Subsections (3), (4) and (5) apply if the amount of the premium was reduced because of the operation or purported operation of Division 23 of the Private Health Insurance Act 2007.

Divide the total of the reduction by the number of persons who are *PHIIBs in respect of the premium or amount.

Reduce your tax offset under subsection (1) to nil if the amount worked out under subsection (3) equals or exceeds your *share of the PHII benefit in respect of the premium or amount.

Note: If the amount worked out under subsection (3) exceeds your share of the PHII benefit, you are liable to pay the excess to the Commonwealth. See section 282-18 of the Private Health Insurance Act 2007 (Liability for excess private health insurance premium reduction or refund).

Otherwise, reduce your tax offset under subsection (1) by the amount worked out under subsection (3).

61-215 Reallocation of the private health insurance tax offset between spouses

You can make a choice under this section in relation to the income year if:

you are a *PHIIB in respect of the premium or amount; and

(b) on the last day of the income year, you are married (within the meaning of the A New Tax System (Medicare Levy Surcharge—Fringe Benefits) Act 1999; and

the individual to whom you are married is also a PHIIB in respect of the premium or amount; and

(d) the individual to whom you are married has not made a choice under this section in relation to the income year.

Note: If you make a choice under this section, you might be liable to pay an amount under section 282-18 of the Private Health Insurance Act 2007 (Liability for excess private health insurance premium reduction or refund).

If you make a choice under this section in relation to the income year:

the amount (if any) of the tax offset for the income year under section 61-205 in respect of the premium or amount of the individual to whom you are married is reduced to nil; and

your tax offset for the income year under that section in respect of the premium or amount is increased by that amount.

A choice under this section in relation to the income year can only be made in your income tax return for the income year.

A choice under this section in relation to an income year has effect for all premiums, or amounts in respect of premiums, paid during the income year.

Subdivision 61-L — Tax offset for Medicare levy surcharge (lump sum payments in arrears)

Guide to Subdivision 61-L

61-575 What this Subdivision is about

You may get a tax offset under this Subdivision if:

Medicare levy surcharge is payable by you for the current year; and

a substantial lump sum was paid to you in the current year; and

the lump sum accrued in whole or in part in a previous year.

The amount of the offset is the amount of additional Medicare levy surcharge payable by you for the current year because of your lump sums and your spouse’s lump sums.

Alternatively, you may get a tax offset under this Subdivision if your spouse gets a tax offset under this Subdivision. The amount of the offset is the amount of additional Medicare levy surcharge payable by you for the current year because of your spouse’s lump sums.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

61-580 Entitlement to a tax offset

61-585 The amount of a tax offset

61-590 Definition of MLS lump sums

Operative provisions

61-580 Entitlement to a tax offset

Tax offset for MLS lump sums paid to you

You are entitled to a tax offset for the current year if:

you are an individual; and

Medicare levy surcharge is payable by you for the current year because of:

(i) section 8B, 8C or 8D of the Medicare Levy Act 1986; or

(ii) the A New Tax System (Medicare Levy Surcharge—Fringe Benefits) Act 1999; and

your assessable income or exempt foreign employment income for the current year includes one or more MLS lump sums paid to you; and

the total of the MLS lump sums paid to you is greater than or equal to one-eleventh of the total of the following amounts:

(i) your normal taxable income (within the meaning of section 159ZR of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) for the current year, disregarding your *assessable FHSS released amount for the current year;

your exempt foreign employment income for the current year;

your reportable fringe benefits total for the current year;

(iv) the amounts that would be included in your assessable income for the current year if, and only if, subsection 271-105(1) (family trust distribution tax) in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 were ignored;

your *reportable superannuation contributions for the current year;

your *total net investment loss for the current year.

Note: The test in paragraph (d) is similar to the 10% test in paragraph 159ZRA(1)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, which also deals with a tax offset for lump sum payments in arrears.

Tax offset for MLS lump sums paid to your spouse

You are also entitled to a tax offset for the current year if:

(a) during all or part of the current year, you were married to an individual (within the meaning of section 3 of the Medicare Levy Act 1986 or section 7 of the A New Tax System (Medicare Levy Surcharge—Fringe Benefits) Act 1999); and

the individual is entitled to a tax offset for the current year under subsection (1); and

Medicare levy surcharge is payable by you for the current year because of:

(i) section 8D of the Medicare Levy Act 1986; or

(ii) Division 4 of Part 3 of the A New Tax System (Medicare Levy Surcharge—Fringe Benefits) Act 1999;

(which are about Medicare Levy surcharge for individuals who are married); and

you are not entitled to a tax offset for the current year under subsection (1); and

less of the Medicare levy surcharge referred to in paragraph (c) would be payable by you for the current year if the MLS lump sums paid to the individual referred to in paragraph (a) were disregarded.

61-585 The amount of a tax offset

The amount of a tax offset under subsection 61-580(1) is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

total Medicare levy surcharge means the total of the *Medicare levy surcharge referred to in paragraph 61-580(1)(b) that is payable by you for the *current year.

total non-arrears Medicare levy surcharge means the amount that would be the total Medicare levy surcharge if the *MLS lump sums paid to you (and the MLS lump sums paid to the individual referred to in paragraph 61-580(2)(a)) were disregarded.

The amount of a tax offset under subsection 61-580(2) is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

total family Medicare levy surcharge means the total of the *Medicare levy surcharge referred to in paragraph 61-580(2)(c) that is payable by you for the *current year.

total non-arrears family Medicare levy surcharge means the amount that would be the total family Medicare levy surcharge if the *MLS lump sums referred to in paragraph 61-580(2)(e) were disregarded.

61-590 Definition of MLS lump sums

Both of the following are MLS lump sums paid to an individual:

(a) a lump sum payment of eligible income (within the meaning of section 159ZR of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that is included in the individual’s assessable income for the *current year (but only to the extent that it accrued in an earlier income year);

a lump sum payment that is included in the individual’s exempt foreign employment income for the current year (but only to the extent that it accrued during a period ending more than 12 months before the date on which it was paid).

Subdivision 61-N — Seafarer tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 61-N

61-695 What this Subdivision is about

A company may get a refundable tax offset for withholding payments made to Australian seafarers for overseas voyages if:

(a) the voyage is made by a vessel for which the company, or another entity, has a certificate under the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012; and

the company employs or engages the seafarer on such voyages for at least 91 days in the income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

61-700 Object of this Subdivision

61-705 Who is entitled to the seafarer tax offset

61-710 Amount of the seafarer tax offset

Operative provisions

61-700 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to stimulate opportunities for Australian seafarers to:

be employed or engaged on overseas voyages; and

acquire maritime skills.

61-705 Who is entitled to the seafarer tax offset

A company is entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

the company is a corporation to which paragraph 51(xx) of the Constitution applies; and

there is at least one individual in respect of whom the company has 91 days or more in the income year that qualify for the tax offset as mentioned in subsection (2).

A particular day qualifies for the tax offset under this Subdivision for a company for an individual if:

on the day, the individual is an Australian resident who:

is employed by the company; or

(ii) performs work or services under an *arrangement under which the company makes, at any time, a payment that is a *withholding payment covered by subsection 12-60(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about labour hire arrangements); and

on the day, the individual is so employed, or performs the work or services, on a voyage of a vessel as master, deck officer, integrated rating, steward or engineer; and

(c) the company, or another entity, has a certificate for the vessel that applies to the day under Part 2 of the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012; and

in the course of the voyage, the vessel travels between:

a port in Australia and a port outside Australia; or

a port in Australia and a place in the waters of the sea above the continental shelf of a country other than Australia; or

a port outside Australia and a place in the waters of the sea above the continental shelf of Australia; or

a place in the waters of the sea above the continental shelf of Australia and a place in the waters of the sea above the continental shelf of a country other than Australia; or

ports outside Australia; or

places beyond the continental shelf of Australia;

whether or not the ship travels between 2 or more ports in Australia in the course of the voyage.

Note 1: An entity may be entitled to a certificate for a vessel under Part 2 of the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012 if it meets the requirements (relating to such things as tonnage, registration and usage) in that Act.

Note 2: An entity cannot be entitled to a certificate for a vessel under Part 2 of that Act for a day before 1 July 2012: see paragraph 8(4)(b) of that Act.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), the voyage of a vessel is taken to:

start on the earliest day on which one or more of the following occurs:

shipping cargo to be carried on the voyage, or any part of the voyage, is first loaded into the vessel;

*shipping passengers to be carried on the voyage, or any part of the voyage, first board the vessel;

the voyage begins; and

end on the latest day on which any of the following occurs:

all shipping cargo carried on the voyage, or any part of the voyage, is completely unloaded from the vessel;

all shipping passengers carried on the voyage, or any part of the voyage, finally disembark from the vessel;

the voyage ends.

61-710 Amount of the seafarer tax offset

The amount of the company’s tax offset for the income year is the amount (rounded up to the nearest whole dollar) worked out using the formula:

where:

gross payment amounts means the total amount of *withholding payments covered by section 12-35 or subsection 12-60(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 payable by the company in the income year:

to individuals in respect of whom the company has 91 days or more in the income year that qualify for the offset as mentioned in subsection 61-705(2); and

in respect of any of the following:

the employment of, or the work or services performed by, such individuals in relation to which the company so qualifies for the offset;

leave accrued by such individuals during such employment, work or services;

training of such individuals that relates to such employment, work or services.

Subdivision 61-P — ESVCLP tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 61-P

61-750 What this Subdivision is about

A limited partner in an ESVCLP may be entitled to a tax offset for investing in the ESVCLP.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

61-755 Object of this Subdivision

61-760 Who is entitled to the ESVCLP tax offset

61-765 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—general case

61-770 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—members of trusts or partnerships

61-775 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—trustees

Operative provisions

61-755 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to encourage new investment in early stage venture capital by providing investors with a tax offset to reduce the effective cost of such investments.

61-760 Who is entitled to the ESVCLP tax offset

General case

A limited partner of an ESVCLP is entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

the partner contributes to the ESVCLP during the income year; and

the partner is not a trust or partnership.

Members of trusts or partnerships

A *member of a trust or partnership is entitled to a tax offset for an income year if the trust or partnership would be entitled to a tax offset, under this section, for the income year if it were an individual.

Trustees

A trustee of a trust is entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

the trust would be entitled to a tax offset, under this section, for the income year if it were an individual; and

in a case where the trustee has determined percentages under subsection 61-770(2) in relation to the *members of the trust—the sum of those percentages is not 100%; and

(c) the trustee is liable to be assessed or has been assessed, and is liable to pay *tax, on a share of, or all or a part of, the trust’s *net income under section 98, 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for that income year.

61-765 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—general case

If subsection 61-760(1) applies, the amount of the tax offset for the income year is 10% of the lesser of:

the sum of the amounts the partner contributes to the ESVCLP during the income year, reduced by any amounts excluded under subsection (2); and

(b) the amount (the investment related amount) worked out under subsection (3).

The following amounts are excluded for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) in relation to the income year:

any parts of a contribution the partner made to the ESVCLP that the ESVCLP is, or will become, obliged to repay to the partner, whether or not:

the obligation arises during the income year; or

the obligation arises only when the partner requests repayment;

any parts of a contribution the partner made to the ESVCLP that, during the income year, are repaid to the partner within 12 months after the contribution was made;

any parts of a contribution the partner made to the ESVCLP to the extent that they comprise a commitment to provide money or property in the future.

Work out the investment related amount as follows:

where:

partner’s share is the partner’s share of the capital of the *ESVCLP at the end of the income year, expressed as a percentage of the entire capital of the ESVCLP.

sum of eligible venture capital investments is the sum of:

all the amounts of the *eligible venture capital investments made by the ESVCLP during the period starting at the start of the income year and ending 2 months after the end of the income year; and

all the incidental costs, incurred during that period, of making those investments; and

all the administrative expenses, incurred during that period, associated with those investments.

(4) For the purposes of paragraph (a) of the definition of sum of eligible venture capital investments in subsection (3), disregard the amounts of any *eligible venture capital investments that were taken into account in working out the amount of a *tax offset under this Subdivision for a preceding income year.

61-770 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—members of trusts or partnerships

If subsection 61-760(2) applies, the amount of the *member’s tax offset for the income year is as follows:

where:

determined share of notional tax offset is the percentage determined under subsection (2) for the *member.

notional tax offset amount is what would, under section 61-765, have been the amount of the trust’s or partnership’s *tax offset (the notional tax offset) if the trust or partnership had been an individual.

The trustee or partnership may determine the percentage of the notional tax offset that is the *member’s share of the notional tax offset.

If, under the terms and conditions under which the trust or partnership operates, the *member would be entitled to a fixed proportion of any *capital gain from a *disposal:

relating to the trust or partnership; and

of investments made as a result of the contributions that gave rise to the notional tax offset; and

happening at the end of the income year to which the notional tax offset relates;

the percentage determined under subsection (2) must be equivalent to that fixed proportion, and a determination of any other percentage has no effect.

The trustee or partnership must give the *member written notice of the determination. The notice:

must enable the member to work out the amount of the member’s tax offset by including enough information to enable the member to work out the member’s share of the notional tax offset; and

must be given to the member within 3 months after the end of the income year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

The sum of all the percentages determined under subsection (2) in relation to the *members of the trust or partnership must not exceed 100%.

61-775 Amount of the ESVCLP tax offset—trustees

If subsection 61-760(3) applies, the amount of the tax offset for the income year is the difference between:

what would, under section 61-765, have been the amount of the tax offset to which the trust would have been entitled if it had been an individual; and

if *members of the trust are entitled to tax offsets under subsection 61-760(2) arising from the same contributions from which the trustee’s entitlement arises under subsection 61-760(3)—the sum of the amounts, under section 61-770, of those tax offsets.

Division 63 — Common rules for tax offsets

Guide to Division 63

63-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out some rules that are common to all tax offsets.

Table of sections

63-10 Priority rules

63-10 Priority rules

If you have one or more *tax offsets for an income year, apply them against your basic income tax liability in the order shown in the table. To the extent that an amount of a tax offset remains, the table tells you what happens to it.

Note 1: Section 13-1 lists tax offsets.

Note 2: Former Division 388 was repealed by the New Business Tax System (Capital Allowances—Transitional and Consequential) Act 2001.

Note 4: The remaining amount of a carry forward tax offset may be reduced by section 65-30 or 65-35 to take account of net exempt income.

Note 5: Tax offsets mentioned in items 5 and 10 are more commonly referred to as the Senior Australians Tax Offset.

Within each item, apply the tax offsets in the order in which they arose.

Note: This would be relevant if you have carry forward tax offsets of the same category for different income years.

Division 65 — Tax offset carry forward rules

Guide to Division 65

65-10 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the rules about carrying forward excess tax offsets to later income years.

You can only carry forward certain tax offsets.

Before you can apply a tax offset to reduce the amount of income tax that you will pay in a later year, you must apply it to reduce certain amounts of net exempt income.

The same rules that prevent companies from utilising certain losses of earlier income years prevent companies from applying tax offsets that they have carried forward.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

65-30 Amount carried forward

65-35 How to apply carried forward tax offsets

65-40 When a company cannot apply a tax offset

65-50 Effect of bankruptcy

65-55 Deduction for amounts paid for debts incurred before bankruptcy

Operative provisions

65-30 Amount carried forward

The amount of the tax offset that is carried forward is the amount of the excess worked out under Division 63.

However, reduce the tax offset by the amount worked out by multiplying your net exempt income by:

(a) if you are a base rate entity (within the meaning of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986) for the income year—0.25; or

otherwise—0.3;

if you have a taxable income for the income year.

65-35 How to apply carried forward tax offsets

A tax offset that you have carried forward decreases the amount of income tax that you would otherwise have to pay under section 4-10 in a later income year.

You apply a tax offset that is carried forward to a later year in accordance with the priorities set out in Division 63 as if it were a tax offset for that later year.

Before you apply a tax offset to reduce the amount of income tax that you pay in a later income year in which you have a taxable income, you must apply it to reduce to nil any net exempt income for:

that later income year; or

any income year after the year in which the tax offset arose and before the later income year in which you had a taxable income but did not apply the tax offset to reduce the amount of income tax you had to pay.

Note: Paragraph (b) would apply to cases such as where your taxable income was below your tax-free threshold or where you had other tax offsets that reduced your income tax to nil.

In reducing net exempt income for an income year under subsection (3):

(a) if you were a base rate entity (within the meaning of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986) for the year—each 25 cents of *tax offset reduces the net exempt income by $1; or

otherwise—each 30 cents of tax offset reduces the net exempt income by $1.

You can only apply a tax offset that you have carried forward to the extent that it has not already been applied.

Note: Section 65-40 contains special restrictions on applying carried forward tax offsets.

65-40 When a company cannot apply a tax offset

In working out its tax offset for the current year, a company cannot apply a tax offset it has carried forward if, assuming:

the tax offset were a *tax loss of the company for the income year in which it became entitled to the tax offset; and

section 165-20 (deducting part of a tax loss) were disregarded;

Subdivision 165-A would prevent the company from deducting it for the current year.

Note: Subdivision 165-A deals with the deductibility of a company’s tax loss for an earlier income year if there has been a change in the ownership or control of the company in the loss year or the income year.

(2) If subsection (1) prevents the company from applying the *tax offset, it can apply the part of the tax offset that it is reasonable to consider relates to a part of the income year in which it became entitled to the tax offset, but only if, assuming that part of that income year had been treated as the whole of it, the company would have been entitled to apply the tax offset.

65-50 Effect of bankruptcy

If during the current year:

you became bankrupt; or

you were released from debts under a law relating to bankruptcy;

you cannot apply a tax offset that you have carried forward from an earlier income year in working out the tax offset for the current year or a later income year.

Subsection (1) applies even though your bankruptcy is annulled if:

(a) the annulment happens under section 74 of the Bankruptcy Act 1966 because your creditors have accepted your proposal for a composition or scheme of arrangement; and

under the composition or scheme of arrangement concerned, you were, will be or may be released from debts from which you would have been released if instead you had been discharged from the bankruptcy.

65-55 Deduction for amounts paid for debts incurred before bankruptcy

If:

you pay an amount in the current year for a debt that you incurred in an earlier income year; and

you have a tax offset referred to in section 65-50 for that earlier income year;

you can deduct the amount paid, but only to the extent that it does not exceed so much of the debt as the Commissioner is satisfied was taken into account in calculating the amount of the tax offset.

The total of the following amounts cannot exceed the total of the expenditure that the Commissioner is satisfied was taken into account in calculating the amount of the tax offset that you are unable to apply because of section 66-50:

your deductions under subsection (1) for amounts paid in the current year or an earlier income year for debts incurred in the income year for which you have the tax offset; and

the expenditure that the Commissioner is satisfied was taken into account in calculating any amounts of the tax offset that, apart from section 65-50, would have been applied in reducing your net exempt income for the current year or earlier income years.

Division 67 — Refundable tax offset rules

Guide to Division 67

67-10 What this Division is about

If your total tax offsets exceed your basic income tax liability, and some of those offsets are subject to the refundable tax offset rules, you may get a refund instead of paying income tax (see section 63-10). This Division tells you which tax offsets are subject to the refundable tax offset rules.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

67-20 Which tax offsets this Division applies to

67-23 Refundable tax offsets

67-25 Refundable tax offsets—franked distributions

67-30 Refundable tax offsets—R&D

Operative provisions

67-20 Which tax offsets this Division applies to

This Division only applies to a tax offset if it is stated to be subject to the refundable tax offset rules.

67-23 Refundable tax offsets

The following *tax offsets are subject to the refundable tax offset rules:

Note 1: Subsection 61-205(2) of this Act deals with tax offsets for trustees who are assessed and liable to pay tax under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: For the tax offsets available under Division 207 and Subdivision 210-H (franked distributions), see section 67-25.

Note 3: For the tax offsets available under Division 355 (about R&D), see section 67-30.

67-25 Refundable tax offsets—franked distributions

*Tax offsets available under Division 207 (which sets out the effects of receiving a *franked distribution) or Subdivision 210-H (which sets out the effects of receiving a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit) are subject to the refundable tax offset rules, unless otherwise stated in this section.

Where the trustee of a non-complying superannuation fund or a non-complying approved deposit fund is entitled to a tax offset under Division 207 because a *franked distribution is made to, or *flows indirectly to, the trustee, the tax offset is not subject to the refundable tax offset rules.

If:

the trustee of a trust to whom a *franked distribution *flows indirectly under subsection 207-50(4) is entitled to a tax offset under Division 207 for an income year because of the distribution; and

(b) the trustee is liable to be assessed under section 98 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 on a share of, or all or a part of, the trust’s *net income for that income year;

the tax offset is not subject to the refundable tax offset rules.

Where a corporate tax entity is entitled to a tax offset under Division 207 because a *franked distribution is made to the entity, the tax offset is not subject to the refundable tax offset rules unless:

the entity is an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund; or

the entity is a life insurance company and the *membership interest on which the distribution was made was not held by the company on behalf of its shareholders at any time during the period:

starting at the beginning of the income year of the company in which the distribution is made; and

ending when the distribution is made.

Where a corporate tax entity is entitled to a tax offset under Division 207 because a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity, the tax offset is not subject to the refundable tax offset rules unless:

the entity is an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund; or

the entity is a life insurance company and the company’s interest in the *membership interest on which the distribution was made was not held by the company on behalf of its shareholders at any time during the period:

starting at the beginning of the income year of the company in which the distribution is made; and

ending when the distribution is made.

(1DA) A tax offset is not subject to the refundable tax offset rules if:

an entity is entitled to the tax offset under Division 207 because a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly, to the entity; and

the entity is a foreign resident and carries on business in Australia at or through a permanent establishment of the entity in Australia, being a permanent establishment within the meaning of:

(i) a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that relates to a foreign country and affects the entity; or

subsection 6(1) of that Act, if there is no such agreement; and

the distribution is attributable to the permanent establishment.

Where a corporate tax entity is entitled to a tax offset under Subdivision 210-H because a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit is made to the entity, the tax offset is not subject to the refundable tax offset rules unless:

the entity is a life insurance company; and

the *membership interest on which the distribution was made was not held by the company on behalf of its shareholders at any time during the period:

starting at the beginning of the income year of the company in which the distribution is made; and

ending when the distribution is made.

67-30 Refundable tax offsets—R&D

A tax offset to which an *R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 (about R&D) for an income year is subject to the refundable tax offset rules if the amount of the tax offset is worked out in accordance with item 1 of the table in subsection 355-100(1) (disregarding subsection 355-100(3)).

Note: Otherwise, the tax offset will be a non-refundable tax offset (see item 35 of the table in subsection 63-10(1)).

Without limiting its effect apart from this subsection, subsection (1) also has the effect it would have if:

subsection (3) had not been enacted; and

the reference in subsection (1) to an *R&D entity were, by express provision, confined to an R&D entity that:

is a *constitutional corporation; or

(ii) has its registered office (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) or principal place of business (within the meaning of that Act) located in a Territory.

Without limiting its effect apart from this subsection, subsection (1) also has the effect it would have if:

subsection (2) had not been enacted; and

this Act applied so that *tax offsets under section 355-100 could only be worked out in respect of *R&D activities conducted or to be conducted:

solely in a Territory; or

solely outside of Australia; or

solely in a Territory and outside of Australia; or

for the dominant purpose of supporting *core R&D activities conducted, or to be conducted, solely in a Territory.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 2—Liability rules of general application 1

Part 2-25—Trading stock 1

Division 70—Trading stock 1

Guide to Division 70 1

70-1 What this Division is about 1

70-5 The 3 key features of tax accounting for trading stock 2

Subdivision 70-A—What is trading stock 2

70-10 Meaning of trading stock 3

70-12 Registered emissions units 3

Subdivision 70-B—Acquiring trading stock 3

70-15 In which income year do you deduct an outgoing for trading stock? 3

70-20 Non-arm’s length transactions 4

70-25 Cost of trading stock is not a capital outgoing 4

70-30 Starting to hold as trading stock an item you already own 5

Subdivision 70-C—Accounting for trading stock you hold at the start or end of the income year 8

General rules 8

70-35 You include the value of your trading stock in working out your assessable income and deductions 8

70-40 Value of trading stock at start of income year 9

70-45 Value of trading stock at end of income year 9

Special valuation rules 10

70-50 Valuation if trading stock obsolete etc. 10

70-55 Working out the cost of natural increase of live stock 11

70-60 Valuation of horse breeding stock 11

70-65 Working out the horse opening value and the horse reduction amount 12

Subdivision 70-D—Assessable income arising from disposals of trading stock and certain other assets 13

Guide to Subdivision 70-D 13

70-75 What this Subdivision is about 13

70-80 Why the rules in this Subdivision are necessary 14

Operative provisions 14

70-85 Application of this Subdivision to certain other assets 14

70-90 Assessable income on disposal of trading stock outside the ordinary course of business 15

70-95 Purchase price is taken to be market value 16

70-100 Notional disposal when you stop holding an item as trading stock 16

70-105 Death of owner 18

70-110 You stop holding an item as trading stock but still own it 19

70-115 Compensation for lost trading stock 20

Subdivision 70-E—Miscellaneous 20

70-120 Deducting capital costs of acquiring trees 20

Part 2-40—Rules affecting employees and other taxpayers receiving PAYG withholding payments 23

Division 80—General rules 23

Guide to Division 80 23

80-1 What this Division is about 23

Operative provisions 23

80-5 Holding of an office 23

80-10 Application to the termination of employment 24

80-15 Transfer of property 24

80-20 Payments for your benefit or at your direction or request 24

Division 82—Employment termination payments 26

Guide to Division 82 26

82-1 What this Division is about 26

Subdivision 82-A—Employment termination payments: life benefits 26

Guide to Subdivision 82-A 26

82-5 What this Subdivision is about 26

Operative provisions 27

82-10 Taxation of life benefit termination payments 27

Subdivision 82-B—Employment termination payments: death benefits 30

Guide to Subdivision 82-B 30

82-60 What this Subdivision is about 30

Operative provisions 31

82-65 Death benefits for dependants 31

82-70 Death benefits for non-dependants 32

82-75 Death benefits paid to trustee of deceased estate 33

Subdivision 82-C—Key concepts 34

Guide to Subdivision 82-C 34

82-125 What this Subdivision is about 34

Operative provisions 35

82-130 What is an employment termination payment? 35

82-135 Payments that are not employment termination payments 37

82-140 Tax free component of an employment termination payment 38

82-145 Taxable component of an employment termination payment 38

82-150 What is an invalidity segment of an employment termination payment? 39

82-155 What is a pre-July 83 segment of an employment termination payment? 39

82-160 What is the ETP cap amount? 40

Division 83—Other payments on termination of employment 41

Guide to Division 83 41

83-1 What this Division is about 41

Subdivision 83-A—Unused annual leave payments 41

Guide to Subdivision 83-A 41

83-5 What this Subdivision is about 41

Operative provisions 42

83-10 Unused annual leave payment is assessable 42

83-15 Entitlement to tax offset 43

Subdivision 83-B—Unused long service leave payments 43

Guide to Subdivision 83-B 43

83-65 What this Subdivision is about 43

General 44

83-70 Application—long service leave 44

83-75 Meaning of unused long service leave payment 44

83-80 Taxation of unused long service leave payments 45

83-85 Entitlement to tax offset 46

83-90 Meaning of pre-16/8/78 period, pre-18/8/93 period, post-17/8/93 period and long service leave employment period 46

Employment wholly full-time or wholly part-time 47

83-95 How to work out amount of payment attributable to each period 47

83-100 How to work out unused days of long service leave for each period 48

83-105 How to work out long service leave accrued in each period 49

Employment partly full-time and partly part-time 50

83-110 Leave accrued in pre-16/8/78, pre-18/8/93 and post-17/8/93 periods—employment full-time and part-time 50

Long service leave taken at less than full pay 50

83-115 Working out used days of long service leave if leave taken at less than full pay 50

Subdivision 83-C—Genuine redundancy payments and early retirement scheme payments 51

Guide to Subdivision 83-C 51

83-165 What this Subdivision is about 51

Operative provisions 52

83-170 Tax-free treatment of genuine redundancy payments and early retirement scheme payments 52

83-175 What is a genuine redundancy payment? 53

83-180 What is an early retirement scheme payment? 54

Subdivision 83-D—Foreign termination payments 56

Guide to Subdivision 83-D 56

83-230 What this Subdivision is about 56

Operative provisions 56

83-235 Termination payments tax free—foreign resident period 56

83-240 Termination payments tax free—Australian resident period 57

Subdivision 83-E—Other payments 58

Guide to Subdivision 83-E 58

83-290 What this Subdivision is about 58

Operative provisions 58

83-295 Termination payments made more than 12 months after termination etc. 58

Division 83A—Employee share schemes 59

Guide to Division 83A 59

83A-1 What this Division is about 59

Subdivision 83A-A—Objects of Division and key concepts 59

83A-5 Objects of Division 59

83A-10 Meaning of ESS interest and employee share scheme 60

Subdivision 83A-B—Immediate inclusion of discount in assessable income 61

Guide to Subdivision 83A-B 61

83A-15 What this Subdivision is about 61

Operative provisions 61

83A-20 Application of Subdivision 61

83A-25 Discount to be included in assessable income 62

83A-30 Amount for which discounted ESS interest acquired 62

83A-33 Reducing amounts included in assessable income—start ups 63

83A-35 Reducing amounts included in assessable income—other cases 65

83A-45 Further conditions for reducing amounts included in assessable income 67

Subdivision 83A-C—Deferred inclusion of gain in assessable income 69

Guide to Subdivision 83A-C 69

83A-100 What this Subdivision is about 69

Main provisions 70

83A-105 Application of Subdivision 70

83A-110 Amount to be included in assessable income 73

83A-115 ESS deferred taxing point—shares 73

83A-120 ESS deferred taxing point—rights to acquire shares 74

83A-125 Tax treatment of ESS interests held after ESS deferred taxing points 76

Takeovers and restructures 76

83A-130 Takeovers and restructures 76

Subdivision 83A-D—Deduction for employer 79

Guide to Subdivision 83A-D 79

83A-200 What this Subdivision is about 79

Operative provisions 80

83A-205 Deduction for employer 80

83A-210 Timing of general deductions 81

Subdivision 83A-E—Miscellaneous 81

83A-305 Acquisition by associates 81

83A-310 Forfeiture etc. of ESS interest 82

83A-315 Market value of ESS interest 83

83A-320 Interests in a trust 83

83A-325 Application of Division to relationships similar to employment 84

83A-330 Application of Division to ceasing employment 85

83A-335 Application of Division to stapled securities 85

83A-340 Application of Division to indeterminate rights 86

Part 2-42—Personal services income 87

Division 84—Introduction 87

Guide to Part 2-42 87

84-1 What this Part is about 87

Operative provisions 88

84-5 Meaning of personal services income 88

84-10 This Part does not imply that individuals are employees 88

Division 85—Deductions relating to personal services income 89

Guide to Division 85 89

85-1 What this Division is about 89

Operative provisions 89

85-5 Object of this Division 89

85-10 Deductions for non-employees relating to personal services income 90

85-15 Deductions for rent, mortgage interest, rates and land tax 91

85-20 Deductions for payments to associates etc. 91

85-25 Deductions for superannuation for associates 92

85-30 Exception: personal services businesses 92

85-35 Exception: employees, office holders and religious practitioners 93

85-40 Application of Subdivision 900-B to individuals who are not employees 93

Division 86—Alienation of personal services income 94

Guide to Division 86 94

86-1 What this Division is about 94

86-5 A simple description of what this Division does 94

Subdivision 86-A—General 96

86-10 Object of this Division 96

86-15 Effect of obtaining personal services income through a personal services entity 96

86-20 Offsetting the personal services entity’s deductions against personal services income 98

86-25 Apportionment of entity maintenance deductions among several individuals 100

86-27 Deduction for net personal services income loss 101

86-30 Assessable income etc. of the personal services entity 101

86-35 Later payments of, or entitlements to, personal services income to be disregarded for income tax purposes 102

86-40 Salary payments shortly after an income year 102

Subdivision 86-B—Entitlement to deductions 103

86-60 General rule for deduction entitlements of personal services entities 104

86-65 Entity maintenance deductions 104

86-70 Car expenses 105

86-75 Superannuation 106

86-80 Salary or wages promptly paid 106

86-85 Deduction entitlements of personal services entities for amounts included in an individual’s assessable income 107

86-87 Personal services entity cannot deduct net personal services income loss 107

86-90 Application of Divisions 28 and 900 to personal services entities 107

Division 87—Personal services businesses 109

Guide to Division 87 109

87-1 What this Division is about 109

87-5 Diagram showing the operation of this Division 110

Subdivision 87-A—General 112

87-10 Object of this Division 112

87-15 What is a personal services business? 112

87-18 The results test for a personal services business 114

87-20 The unrelated clients test for a personal services business 115

87-25 The employment test for a personal services business 116

87-30 The business premises test for a personal services business 117

87-35 Personal services income from Australian government agencies 117

87-40 Application of this Division to certain agents 118

Subdivision 87-B—Personal services business determinations 120

87-60 Personal services business determinations for individuals 121

87-65 Personal services business determinations for personal services entities 123

87-70 Applying etc. for personal services business determinations 126

87-75 When personal services business determinations have effect 127

87-80 Revoking personal services business determinations 127

87-85 Review of decisions 128

Chapter 3—Specialist liability rules 129

Part 3-1—Capital gains and losses: general topics 129

Division 100—A Guide to capital gains and losses 129

General overview 129

100-1 What this Division is about 129

100-5 Effect of this Division 130

100-10 Fundamentals of CGT 130

100-15 Overview of Steps 1 and 2 132

Step 1—Have you made a capital gain or a capital loss? 133

100-20 What events attract CGT? 133

100-25 What are CGT assets? 134

100-30 Does an exception or exemption apply? 135

100-33 Can there be a roll-over? 135

Step 2—Work out the amount of the capital gain or loss 136

100-35 What is a capital gain or loss? 136

100-40 What factors come into calculating a capital gain or loss? 136

100-45 How to calculate the capital gain or loss for most CGT events 137

Step 3—Work out your net capital gain or loss for the income year 138

100-50 How to work out your net capital gain or loss 138

100-55 How do you comply with CGT? 139

Keeping records for CGT purposes 139

100-60 Why keep records? 139

100-65 What records? 139

100-70 How long you need to keep records 140

Division 102—Assessable income includes net capital gain 141

Guide to Division 102 141

102-1 What this Division is about 141

102-3 Concessions in working out your net capital gain 141

Operative provisions 142

102-5 Assessable income includes net capital gain 142

102-6 Meanings of the different categories of capital gains 144

102-10 How to work out your net capital loss 148

102-15 How to apply net capital losses 148

102-20 Ways you can make a capital gain or a capital loss 149

102-22 Amounts of capital gains and losses 149

102-23 CGT event still happens even if gain or loss disregarded 149

102-25 Order of application of CGT events 150

102-30 Exceptions and modifications 151

Division 103—General rules 154

Guide to Division 103 154

103-1 What this Division is about 154

Operative provisions 154

103-5 Giving property as part of a transaction 154

103-10 Entitlement to receive money or property 154

103-15 Requirement to pay money or give property 155

103-25 Choices 155

103-30 Reduction of cost base etc. by net input tax credits 156

Division 104—CGT events 157

Guide to Division 104 157

104-1 What this Division is about 157

104-5 Summary of the CGT events 158

Subdivision 104-A—Disposals 171

104-10 Disposal of a CGT asset: CGT event A1 171

Subdivision 104-B—Use and enjoyment before title passes 173

104-15 Use and enjoyment before title passes: CGT event B1 173

Subdivision 104-C—End of a CGT asset 174

104-20 Loss or destruction of a CGT asset: CGT event C1 174

104-25 Cancellation, surrender and similar endings: CGT event C2 175

104-30 End of option to acquire shares etc.: CGT event C3 176

Subdivision 104-D—Bringing into existence a CGT asset 177

104-35 Creating contractual or other rights: CGT event D1 177

104-40 Granting an option: CGT event D2 179

104-45 Granting a right to income from mining: CGT event D3 180

104-47 Conservation covenants: CGT event D4 180

Subdivision 104-E—Trusts 182

104-55 Creating a trust over a CGT asset: CGT event E1 183

104-60 Transferring a CGT asset to a trust: CGT event E2 184

104-65 Converting a trust to a unit trust: CGT event E3 184

104-70 Capital payment for trust interest: CGT event E4 185

104-71 Adjustment of non-assessable part 187

104-72 Reducing your capital gain under CGT event E4 if you are a trustee 191

104-75 Beneficiary becoming entitled to a trust asset: CGT event E5 192

104-80 Disposal to beneficiary to end income right: CGT event E6 193

104-85 Disposal to beneficiary to end capital interest: CGT event E7 194

104-90 Disposal by beneficiary of capital interest: CGT event E8 196

104-95 Making a capital gain 196

104-100 Making a capital loss 199

104-105 Creating a trust over future property: CGT event E9 201

104-107A AMIT—cost base reduction exceeds cost base: CGT event E10 202

104-107B Annual cost base adjustment for member’s unit or interest in AMIT 203

104-107C AMIT cost base net amount 204

104-107D AMIT cost base reduction amount 204

104-107E AMIT cost base increase amount 205

104-107F Receipt of money etc. increasing AMIT cost base reduction amount not to be treated as income 206

104-107G Effect of AMIT cost base net amount on cost of AMIT membership interest or unit that is a revenue asset—adjustment of cost of asset 206

104-107H Effect of AMIT cost base net amount on cost of AMIT membership interest or unit that is a revenue asset—amount included in assessable income 208

Subdivision 104-F—Leases 209

104-110 Granting a lease: CGT event F1 209

104-115 Granting a long-term lease: CGT event F2 210

104-120 Lessor pays lessee to get lease changed: CGT event F3 211

104-125 Lessee receives payment for changing lease: CGT event F4 211

104-130 Lessor receives payment for changing lease: CGT event F5 212

Subdivision 104-G—Shares 213

104-135 Capital payment for shares: CGT event G1 213

104-145 Liquidator or administrator declares shares or financial instruments worthless: CGT event G3 214

Subdivision 104-H—Special capital receipts 216

104-150 Forfeiture of deposit: CGT event H1 216

104-155 Receipt for event relating to a CGT asset: CGT event H2 217

Subdivision 104-I—Australian residency ends 218

104-160 Individual or company stops being an Australian resident: CGT event I1 218

104-165 Exception for individuals 219

104-170 Trust stops being a resident trust: CGT event I2 220

Subdivision 104-J—CGT events relating to roll-overs 221

104-175 Company ceasing to be member of wholly-owned group after roll-over: CGT event J1 221

104-180 Sub-group break-up 223

104-182 Consolidated group break-up 225

104-185 Change in relation to replacement asset or improved asset after a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E: CGT event J2 225

104-190 Replacement asset period 227

104-195 Trust failing to cease to exist after roll-over under Subdivision 124-N: CGT event J4 228

104-197 Failure to acquire replacement asset and to incur fourth element expenditure after a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E: CGT event J5 230

104-198 Cost of acquisition of replacement asset or amount of fourth element expenditure, or both, not sufficient to cover disregarded capital gain: CGT event J6 231

Subdivision 104-K—Other CGT events 232

104-205 Incoming international transfer of emissions unit: CGT event K1 233

104-210 Bankrupt pays amount in relation to debt: CGT event K2 234

104-215 Asset passing to tax-advantaged entity: CGT event K3 235

104-220 CGT asset starts being trading stock: CGT event K4 235

104-225 Special collectable losses: CGT event K5 236

104-230 Pre-CGT shares or trust interest: CGT event K6 237

104-235 Balancing adjustment events for depreciating assets and certain assets used for R&D: CGT event K7 240

104-240 Working out capital gain or loss for CGT event K7: general case 243

104-245 Working out capital gain or loss for CGT event K7: pooled assets 245

104-250 Direct value shifts: CGT event K8 246

104-255 Carried interests: CGT event K9 247

104-260 Certain short-term forex realisation gains: CGT event K10 248

104-265 Certain short-term forex realisation losses: CGT event K11 248

104-270 Foreign hybrids: CGT event K12 249

Subdivision 104-L—Consolidated groups and MEC groups 249

104-500 Loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in entity becoming subsidiary member: CGT event L1 249

104-505 Where pre-formation intra-group roll-over reduction results in negative allocable cost amount: CGT event L2 251

104-510 Where tax cost setting amounts for retained cost base assets exceeds joining allocable cost amount: CGT event L3 252

104-515 Where no reset cost base assets and excess of net allocable cost amount on joining: CGT event L4 252

104-520 Where amount remaining after step 4 of leaving allocable cost amount is negative: CGT event L5 253

104-525 Error in calculation of tax cost setting amount for joining entity’s assets: CGT event L6 253

104-535 Where reduction in tax cost setting amounts for reset cost base assets cannot be allocated: CGT event L8 255

Division 106—Entity making the gain or loss 257

Guide to Division 106 257

106-1 What this Division is about 257

Subdivision 106-A—Partnerships 258

106-5 Partnerships 258

Subdivision 106-B—Bankruptcy and liquidation 260

106-30 Effect of bankruptcy 260

106-35 Effect of liquidation 261

Subdivision 106-C—Absolutely entitled beneficiaries 261

106-50 Absolutely entitled beneficiaries 261

Subdivision 106-D—Securities, charges and encumbrances 262

106-60 Securities, charges and encumbrances 262

Division 108—CGT assets 263

Guide to Division 108 263

108-1 What this Division is about 263

Subdivision 108-A—What a CGT asset is 263

108-5 CGT assets 263

108-7 Interest in CGT assets as joint tenants 264

Subdivision 108-B—Collectables 264

108-10 Losses from collectables to be offset only against gains from collectables 265

108-15 Sets of collectables 266

108-17 Cost base of a collectable 266

Subdivision 108-C—Personal use assets 267

108-20 Losses from personal use assets must be disregarded 267

108-25 Sets of personal use assets 267

108-30 Cost base of a personal use asset 268

Subdivision 108-D—Separate CGT assets 268

Guide to Subdivision 108-D 268

108-50 What this Subdivision is about 268

Operative provisions 269

108-55 When is a building a separate asset from land? 269

108-60 Depreciating asset that is part of a building is a separate asset 270

108-65 Land adjacent to land acquired before 20 September 1985 270

108-70 When is a capital improvement a separate asset? 270

108-75 Capital improvements to CGT assets for which a roll-over may be available 272

108-80 Deciding if capital improvements are related to each other 274

108-85 Meaning of improvement threshold 275

Division 109—Acquisition of CGT assets 276

Guide to Division 109 276

109-1 What this Division is about 276

Subdivision 109-A—Operative rules 276

109-5 General acquisition rules 277

109-10 When you acquire a CGT asset without a CGT event 279

Subdivision 109-B—Signposts to other acquisition rules 280

109-50 Effect of this Subdivision 280

109-55 Other acquisition rules 280

109-60 Acquisition rules outside this Part and Part 3-3 286

Division 110—Cost base and reduced cost base 291

Guide to Division 110 291

110-1 What this Division is about 291

110-5 Modifications to general rules 291

110-10 Rules about cost base not relevant for some CGT events 291

Subdivision 110-A—Cost base 293

110-25 General rules about cost base 294

110-35 Incidental costs 296

110-36 Indexation 297

What does not form part of the cost base 300

110-37 Expenditure forming part of cost base or element 300

110-38 Exclusions 300

110-40 Assets acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997 302

110-43 Partnership interests acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997 302

110-45 Assets acquired after 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997 303

110-50 Partnership interests acquired after 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997 305

110-53 Exceptions to application of sections 110-45 and 110-50 307

110-54 Debt deductions disallowed by thin capitalisation rules 308

Subdivision 110-B—Reduced cost base 308

110-55 General rules about reduced cost base 308

110-60 Reduced cost base for partnership assets 312

Division 112—Modifications to cost base and reduced cost base 314

Guide to Division 112 314

112-1 What this Division is about 314

112-5 Discussion of modifications 314

Subdivision 112-A—General modifications 315

112-15 General rule for replacement modifications 315

112-20 Market value substitution rule 316

112-25 Split, changed or merged assets 317

112-30 Apportionment rules 319

112-35 Assumption of liability rule 320

112-36 Acquisitions of assets involving look-through earnout rights 320

112-37 Put options 323

Subdivision 112-B—Finding tables for special rules 323

112-40 Effect of this Subdivision 324

112-45 CGT events 324

112-46 Annual cost base adjustment for member’s unit or interest in AMIT 325

112-48 Gifts acquired by associates 325

112-50 Main residence 326

112-53 Scrip for scrip roll-over 326

112-53AA Statutory licences 327

112-53AB Change of incorporation 327

112-53A MDO roll-over 327

112-53B Exchange of stapled ownership interests for units in a unit trust 328

112-53C Water entitlement roll-overs 328

112-54 Demergers 328

112-54A Transfer of assets between certain trusts 329

112-55 Effect of you dying 329

112-60 Bonus shares or units 330

112-65 Rights 330

112-70 Convertible interests 331

112-77 Exchangeable interests 331

112-78 Exploration investments 332

112-80 Leases 332

112-85 Options 333

112-87 Residency 333

112-90 An asset stops being a pre-CGT asset 334

112-92 Demutualisation of certain entities 334

112-95 Transfer of tax losses and net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies 334

112-97 Modifications outside this Part and Part 3-3 335

Subdivision 112-C—Replacement-asset roll-overs 345

112-100 Effect of this Subdivision 345

112-105 What is a replacement-asset roll-over? 345

112-110 How is the cost base of the replacement asset modified? 346

112-115 Table of replacement-asset roll-overs 346

Subdivision 112-D—Same-asset roll-overs 347

112-135 Effect of this Subdivision 348

112-140 What is a same-asset roll-over? 348

112-145 How is the cost base of the asset modified? 348

112-150 Table of same-asset roll-overs 348

Subdivision 112-E—Deemed sales just before, and reacquisitions on, 1 July 2027 350

112-155 Australian resident individuals—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027 350

112-160 Australian resident individuals—defer a gain or loss from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens 352

112-165 Trusts—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027 354

112-170 Trusts—defer a gain or loss from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens 357

112-175 Pre-CGT assets—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027 359

112-180 Pre-CGT assets—defer a gain from CGT event K6 from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens 361

112-185 Method for apportioning capital gains and losses between realisation events and earlier deemed CGT events 362

Division 114—Indexation of cost base 364

114-1 Indexing elements of cost base 364

114-5 When indexation relevant 365

114-10 Requirement for 12 months ownership 366

114-15 Cost base modifications 368

114-20 When expenditure is incurred for roll-overs 370

114-25 Residency requirements for individuals for indexation to be included in a cost base under subsection 110-36(1A) 370

114-30 Asset requirements for indexation to apply for a cost base worked out under subsection 110-36(1A) 372

Division 115—Discount capital gains and certain trust capital gains 373

Guide to Division 115 373

115-1 What this Division is about 373

Subdivision 115-A—Discount capital gains 374

What is a discount capital gain? 374

115-5 What is a discount capital gain? 374

115-10 Who can make a discount capital gain? 375

115-15 Discount capital gain must be made after 21 September 1999 375

115-20 Discount capital gain must not have indexed cost base 375

115-25 Discount capital gain must be on asset acquired at least 12 months before 376

115-30 Special rules about time of acquisition 378

115-32 Special rule about time of acquisition for certain replacement-asset roll-overs 382

115-34 Further special rule about time of acquisition for certain replacement-asset roll-overs 382

What are not discount capital gains? 384

115-40 Capital gain resulting from agreement made within a year of acquisition 384

115-45 Capital gain from equity in an entity with newly acquired assets 384

115-50 Discount capital gain from equity in certain entities 386

115-55 Capital gains involving money received from demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurer 389

Subdivision 115-B—Discount percentage 389

115-100 What is the discount percentage for a discount capital gain 389

115-102 New residential dwellings 390

115-105 Foreign or temporary residents—individuals with direct gains 391

115-110 Foreign or temporary residents—individuals with trust gains 392

115-115 Foreign or temporary residents—percentage for individuals 395

115-120 Foreign or temporary residents—trusts with certain gains 398

115-125 Investors disposing of property used for affordable housing 398

Subdivision 115-C—Rules about trusts with net capital gains 401

Guide to Subdivision 115-C 401

115-200 What this Division is about 401

Operative provisions 402

115-210 When this Subdivision applies 402

115-215 Assessing presently entitled beneficiaries 403

115-220 Assessing trustees under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 404

115-222 Assessing trustees under section 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 405

115-225 Attributable gain 406

115-227 Share of a capital gain 408

115-228 Specifically entitled to an amount of a capital gain 409

115-230 Choice for resident trustee to be specifically entitled to capital gain 410

115-235 Giving information to beneficiaries 412

Subdivision 115-CA—Extended application of rules about trusts with net capital gains (disregarding indexation) 413

Guide to Subdivision 115-CA 413

115-250 What this Subdivision is about 413

Operative provisions 413

115-255 Extended application of Subdivision 115-C—disregarding indexation 413

Subdivision 115-D—Tax relief for shareholders in listed investment companies 415

Guide to Subdivision 115-D 415

115-275 What this Subdivision is about 415

Operative provisions 415

115-280 Deduction for certain dividends 415

115-285 Meaning of LIC capital gain 418

115-290 Meaning of listed investment company 419

115-295 Maintaining records 421

Division 116—Capital proceeds 422

Guide to Division 116 422

116-1 What this Division is about 422

116-5 General rules 423

116-10 Modifications to general rules 423

General rules 424

116-20 General rules about capital proceeds 424

Modifications to general rules 426

116-25 Table of modifications to the general rules 426

116-30 Market value substitution rule: modification 1 429

116-35 Companies and trusts that are not widely held 431

116-40 Apportionment rule: modification 2 433

116-45 Non-receipt rule: modification 3 433

116-50 Repaid rule: modification 4 434

116-55 Assumption of liability rule: modification 5 434

116-60 Misappropriation rule: modification 6 435

Special rules 436

116-65 Disposal etc. of a CGT asset the subject of an option 436

116-70 Option requiring both acquisition and disposal etc. 436

116-75 Special rule for CGT event happening to a lease 436

116-80 Special rule if CGT asset is shares or an interest in a trust 437

116-85 Section 47A of 1936 Act applying to rolled-over asset 437

116-95 Company changes residence from an unlisted country 438

116-100 Gifts of property 440

116-105 Conservation covenants 440

116-110 Roll-overs for merging superannuation funds 441

116-115 Farm-in farm-out arrangements 441

116-120 Disposals of assets involving look-through earnout rights 442

Division 118—Exemptions 444

Guide to Division 118 444

118-1 What this Division is about 444

Subdivision 118-A—General exemptions 445

Exempt assets 446

118-5 Cars, motor cycles and valour decorations 446

118-10 Collectables and personal use assets 446

118-12 Assets used to produce exempt income etc. 448

118-13 Shares in a PDF 449

118-15 Registered emissions units 449

Anti-overlap provisions 449

118-20 Reducing capital gains if amount otherwise assessable 449

118-21 Carried interests 452

118-22 Superannuation lump sums and employment termination payments 452

118-24 Depreciating assets 452

118-25 Trading stock 453

118-27 Division 230 financial arrangements and financial arrangements to which Subdivision 250-E applies 454

118-30 Film copyright 454

118-35 R&D 455

Exempt or loss-denying transactions 455

118-37 Compensation, damages etc. 455

118-40 Expiry of a lease 459

118-42 Transfer of stratum units 459

118-45 Sale of rights to mine 460

118-55 Foreign currency hedging gains and losses 460

118-60 Certain gifts 460

118-65 Later distributions of personal services income 461

118-70 Transactions by exempt entities 461

118-75 Marriage or relationship breakdown settlements 461

118-77 Native title and rights to native title benefits 462

Boat capital gains 463

118-80 Reduction of boat capital gain 463

Special disability trusts 463

118-85 Special disability trusts 463

Subdivision 118-B—Main residence 463

Guide to Subdivision 118-B 463

118-100 What this Subdivision is about 463

118-105 Map of this Subdivision 467

Basic case and concepts 468

118-110 Basic case 468

118-115 Meaning of dwelling 469

118-120 Extension to adjacent land etc. 470

118-125 Meaning of ownership period 471

118-130 Meaning of ownership interest in land or a dwelling 471

Rules that may extend the exemption 472

118-135 Moving into a dwelling 472

118-140 Changing main residences 472

118-145 Absences 472

118-147 Absence from dwelling replacing main residence that was compulsorily acquired, destroyed etc. 473

118-150 If you build, repair or renovate a dwelling 475

118-155 Where individual referred to in section 118-150 dies 476

118-160 Destruction of dwelling and sale of land 477

Rules that may limit the exemption 478

118-165 Separate CGT event for adjacent land or other structures 478

118-170 Spouse having different main residence 478

118-175 Dependent child having different main residence 479

Roll-overs under Subdivision 126-A 479

118-178 Previous roll-over under Subdivision 126-A 479

118-180 Acquisition of dwelling from company or trust on marriage or relationship breakdown—roll-over provision applying 480

Partial exemption rules 481

118-185 Partial exemption where dwelling was your main residence during part only of ownership period 481

118-190 Use of dwelling for producing assessable income 482

118-192 Special rule for first use to produce income 484

Dwellings acquired from deceased estates 485

118-195 Dwelling acquired from a deceased estate 485

118-197 Special rule for surviving joint tenant 487

118-200 Partial exemption for deceased estate dwellings 487

118-205 Adjustment if dwelling inherited from deceased individual 489

118-210 Trustee acquiring dwelling under will 490

Special disability trusts 492

118-215 What the following provisions are about 492

118-218 Exemption available to trustee—main case 492

118-220 Exemption available to trustee—after the principal beneficiary’s death 493

118-222 Exemption available to other beneficiary who acquires the CGT asset after the principal beneficiary’s death 494

118-225 Amount of exemption available after the principal beneficiary’s death—general 494

118-227 Amount of exemption available after the principal beneficiary’s death—cost base and reduced cost base 496

118-230 Application of CGT events E5 and E7 in relation to main residence exemption and special disability trusts 497

Compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land only 497

118-240 What the following provisions are about 497

118-245 CGT events happening only to adjacent land 497

118-250 Compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land 499

118-255 Maximum exempt area 501

118-260 Partial exemption rules 502

118-265 Extension to adjacent structures 502

Subdivision 118-D—Insurance and superannuation 503

118-300 Insurance policies 503

118-305 Superannuation 505

118-310 RSA’s 506

118-313 Superannuation agreements under the Family Law Act 506

118-315 Segregated exempt assets of life insurance companies 506

118-320 Segregated current pension assets of a complying superannuation entity 506

Subdivision 118-E—Units in pooled superannuation trusts 507

118-350 Units in pooled superannuation trusts 507

Subdivision 118-F—Venture capital investment 507

Guide to Subdivision 118-F 507

118-400 What this Subdivision is about 507

Operative provisions 509

118-405 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital investments through venture capital limited partnerships 509

118-407 Exemption for certain venture capital investments through early stage venture capital limited partnerships 511

118-408 Partial exemption for some capital gains otherwise fully exempt under section 118-407 513

118-410 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital investments through Australian venture capital funds of funds 515

118-415 Exemption for certain venture capital investments by foreign residents 518

118-420 Meaning of eligible venture capital partner etc. 519

118-425 Meaning of eligible venture capital investment—investments in companies 521

118-427 Meaning of eligible venture capital investment—investments in unit trusts 531

118-428 Additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs 541

118-430 Meaning of at risk 542

118-432 Findings of substantially novel applications of technology 543

118-435 Special rule relating to investment in foreign resident holding companies 544

118-440 Meaning of permitted entity value 545

118-445 Meaning of committed capital 548

118-450 Values of assets and investments of entities without auditors 548

118-455 Impact Assessment of this Subdivision 549

Subdivision 118-G—Venture capital: investment by superannuation funds for foreign residents 550

Guide to Subdivision 118-G 550

118-500 What this Subdivision is about 550

118-505 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital 550

118-510 Meaning of resident investment vehicle 551

118-515 Meaning of venture capital entity 551

118-520 Meaning of superannuation fund for foreign residents 552

118-525 Meaning of venture capital equity 553

Subdivision 118-H—Demutualisation of Tower Corporation 555

118-550 Demutualisation of Tower Corporation 555

Subdivision 118-I—Look-through earnout rights 555

118-560 Object 556

118-565 Look-through earnout rights 556

118-570 Extra ways a CGT asset can be an active asset 558

118-575 Creating and ending look-through earnout rights 559

118-580 Temporarily disregard capital losses affected by look-through earnout rights 559

Division 119—Minimum rate of tax on capital gains 561

Guide to Division 119 561

119-1 What this Division is about 561

Operative provisions 561

119-5 Your minimum tax capital gain for an income year 561

119-10 When extra income tax is payable on your minimum tax capital gain 562

119-15 Exception for recipients of certain payments 563

Division 121—Record keeping 566

Guide to Division 121 566

121-10 What this Division is about 566

Operative provisions 566

121-20 What records you must keep 566

121-25 How long you must retain the records 568

121-30 Exceptions 569

121-35 Asset register entries 569

Chapter 2 — Liability rules of general application

Part 2-25 — Trading stock

Division 70 — Trading stock

Guide to Division 70

70-1 What this Division is about

This Division deals with amounts you can deduct, and amounts included in your assessable income, because of these situations:

• you acquire an item of trading stock;

• you carry on a business and hold trading stock at the start or the end of the income year;

• you dispose of an item of trading stock outside the ordinary course of business, or it ceases to be trading stock in certain other circumstances.

Table of sections

70-5 The 3 key features of tax accounting for trading stock

70-5 The 3 key features of tax accounting for trading stock

The purpose of income tax accounting for trading stock is to produce an overall result that (apart from concessions) properly reflects your activities with your trading stock during the income year.

There are 3 key features:

You bring your gross outgoings and earnings to account, not your net profits and losses on disposal of trading stock.

Those outgoings and earnings are on revenue account, not capital account. As a result:

the gross outgoings are usually deductible as general deductions under section 8-1 (when the trading stock becomes trading stock on hand); and

the gross earnings are usually assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5 (when the trading stock stops being trading stock on hand).

You must bring to account any difference between the value of your trading stock on hand at the start and at the end of the income year. This is done in such a way that, in effect:

you account for the value of your trading stock as assessable income; and

you carry that value over as a corresponding deduction for the next income year.

Note: You may not have to bring to account that difference if you are a small business entity: see Division 328.

Subdivision 70-A — What is trading stock

Table of sections

70-10 Meaning of trading stock

70-12 Registered emissions units

70-10 Meaning of trading stock

(1) Trading stock includes:

anything produced, manufactured or acquired that is held for purposes of manufacture, sale or exchange in the ordinary course of a business; and

*live stock.

(2) Trading stock does not include:

a *Division 230 financial arrangement; or

a CGT asset covered by section 275-105 that:

is owned by a *complying superannuation entity; or

is a complying superannuation asset of a life insurance company.

Note 1: Shares in a PDF are not trading stock. See section 124ZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: If a company becomes a PDF, its shares are taken not to have been trading stock before it became a PDF. See section 124ZQ of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

70-12 Registered emissions units

A registered emissions unit is not trading stock.

Subdivision 70-B — Acquiring trading stock

Table of sections

70-15 In which income year do you deduct an outgoing for trading stock?

70-20 Non-arm’s length transactions

70-25 Cost of trading stock is not a capital outgoing

70-30 Starting to hold as trading stock an item you already own

70-15 In which income year do you deduct an outgoing for trading stock?

This section tells you in which income year to deduct under section 8-1 (about general deductions) an outgoing incurred in connection with acquiring an item of trading stock. (The outgoing must be deductible under that section.)

If the item becomes part of your trading stock on hand before or during the income year in which you incur the outgoing, deduct it in that income year.

Otherwise, deduct the outgoing in the first income year:

during which the item becomes part of your trading stock on hand; or

for which an amount is included in your assessable income in connection with the disposal of that item.

Note You can deduct your capital costs of acquiring land carrying trees or of acquiring a right to fell trees, to the extent that the trees are felled for sale, or for use in manufacture, by you. (This is because the trees will then usually become your trading stock.) See section 70-120.

70-20 Non-arm’s length transactions

If:

you incur an outgoing that is directly attributable to your buying or obtaining delivery of an item of your trading stock; and

you and the seller of the item did not deal with each other at *arm’s length; and

the amount of the outgoing is greater than the *market value of what the outgoing is for;

the amount of the outgoing is instead taken to be that market value. This has effect for the purposes of applying this Act to you and also to the seller.

Note: This section also affects the value of the item of trading stock at the end of an income year if you value it at its cost under section 70-45 (Value of trading stock at end of income year).

70-25 Cost of trading stock is not a capital outgoing

An outgoing you incur in connection with acquiring an item of trading stock is not an outgoing of capital or of a capital nature.

Note: This means that paragraph 8-1(2)(a) does not prevent the outgoing from being a general deduction under section 8-1.

70-30 Starting to hold as trading stock an item you already own

If you start holding as trading stock an item you already own, but do not hold as trading stock, you are treated as if:.

just before it became trading stock, you had sold the item to someone else (at *arm’s length) for whichever of these amounts you elect:

• its cost (as worked out under subsection (3) or (4));

• its *market value just before it became trading stock; and

you had immediately bought it back for the same amount.

Example: You start holding a depreciating asset as part of your trading stock. You are treated as having sold it just before that time, and immediately bought it back, for its cost or market value, whichever you elect. (Subdivision 40-D provides for the consequences of selling depreciating assets.)

The same amount is normally a general deduction under section 8-1 as an outgoing in connection with acquiring trading stock. The amount is also taken into account in working out the item’s cost for the purposes of section 70-45 (about valuing trading stock at the end of the income year).

When you must make the election

Note: Depending on how you elect under paragraph (1)(a), the sale may or may not give rise to a capital gain or a capital loss for the purposes of Parts 3-1 and 3-3 (about CGT). It does not if you elect to be treated as having sold the item for what would have been its cost: see subsection 118-25(2). However, it can if you elect market value.

You must make the election by the time you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which you start holding the item as trading stock. (If you do not make the election by then because you do not realise until later that you started to hold the item as trading stock, you must make the election as soon as is reasonable after realising that.)

However, the Commissioner can allow you to make it later (in either case).

How to work out the item’s cost

The item’s cost is what would have been its cost for the purposes of section 70-45 (about valuing trading stock at the end of the income year) if it had been your trading stock ever since you last acquired it. In working that out, disregard section 70-55 (about acquiring live stock by natural increase).

However, if you last acquired the item for no consideration, its cost is worked out using this table:

Exceptions

Subsection (1) does not apply if you start holding any of the following as trading stock because they are severed from land:

standing or growing crops;

crop-stools;

trees planted and tended for sale.

(This does not prevent subsection (1) from applying to a severed item that you later start holding as trading stock.)

Subsection (1) does not apply if:

you start holding an item as trading stock; and

immediately before you started holding the item as trading stock, you *held the item as a registered emissions unit.

Note: A transaction that this section treats as having occurred is disregarded for the purposes of these provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

• subsection 47A(10) (which treats certain benefits as dividends paid by a CFC)

• paragraph 103A(3A)(c) (which affects whether a company is a public company for an income year).

Subdivision 70-C — Accounting for trading stock you hold at the start or end of the income year

Table of sections

General rules

70-35 You include the value of your trading stock in working out your assessable income and deductions

70-40 Value of trading stock at start of income year

70-45 Value of trading stock at end of income year

Special valuation rules

70-50 Valuation if trading stock obsolete etc.

70-55 Working out the cost of natural increase of live stock

70-60 Valuation of horse breeding stock

70-65 Working out the horse opening value and the horse reduction amount

General rules

70-35 You include the value of your trading stock in working out your assessable income and deductions

If you carry on a business, you compare:

the *value of all your trading stock on hand at the start of the income year; and

the *value of all your trading stock on hand at the end of the income year.

Note: You may not need to do this stocktaking if you are a small business entity: see Division 328.

(2) Your assessable income includes any excess of the *value at the end of the income year over the value at the start of the income year.

(3) On the other hand, you can deduct any excess of the *value at the start of the income year over the value at the end of the income year.

70-40 Value of trading stock at start of income year

(1) The value of an item of *trading stock on hand at the start of an income year is the same amount at which it was taken into account under this Division or Subdivision 328-E (about trading stock for small business entities) at the end of the last income year.

(2) The value of the item is a nil amount if the item was not taken into account under this Division or Subdivision 328-E (about trading stock for small business entities) at the end of the last income year.

70-45 Value of trading stock at end of income year

(1) You must elect to value each item of *trading stock on hand at the end of an income year at:

its *cost; or

its market selling value; or

its replacement value.

Note: An item’s market selling value at a particular time may not be the same as its market value.

In working out the *cost, market selling value or replacement value of an item of trading stock (other than an item the supply of which cannot be a taxable supply) at the end of an income year, disregard an amount equal to the amount of the input tax credit (if any) to which you would be entitled if:

you had *acquired the item at that time; and

the acquisition had been solely for a creditable purpose; and

Note: Some assets, such as shares, cannot be the subject of a taxable supply.

The rest of this Subdivision deals with cases where the normal operation of this section is modified, or where a different valuation method may or must be used. The table sets out other cases where that happens because of provisions outside this Subdivision.

Special valuation rules

70-50 Valuation if trading stock obsolete etc.

You may elect to value an item of your *trading stock below all the values in section 70-45 if:

that is warranted because of obsolescence or any other special circumstances relating to that item; and

the value you elect is reasonable.

70-55 Working out the cost of natural increase of live stock

(1) The cost of an animal you hold as *live stock that you acquired by natural increase is whichever of these you elect:

the actual cost of the animal;

the cost prescribed by the regulations for each animal in the applicable class of live stock.

(2) However, if you incur a service fee for insemination and, as a result, acquire a horse by natural increase, its cost is the greater of:

the amount worked out under subsection (1); and

the part of the service fee that is attributable to your acquiring the horse.

An election under this section must be made by the time you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which you acquired the animal. However, the Commissioner can allow you to make it later.

70-60 Valuation of horse breeding stock

(1) For a horse at least 3 years old that you acquired under a contract and hold for breeding, you can elect a value other than the values in section 70-45.

(2) The value you can elect for the horse at the end of the income year is worked out using the table:

(3) However, if the value worked out under subsection (2) would be less than $1, you must elect the value of $1.

A horse’s age is to be measured in whole years as at the end of the relevant income year. The age of a horse not born on 1 August is determined as if the horse had been born on the last 1 August before it was actually born.

70-65 Working out the horse opening value and the horse reduction amount

(1) The horse opening value is:

if the horse has been your *live stock ever since the start of the income year—its *value as trading stock at the start of the income year; or

otherwise—the horse’s base amount (see subsection (3)).

(2) The horse reduction amount is worked out as follows:

for female horses under 12 years of age:

for any male horse:

In this section:

base amount is the lesser of:

the horse’s *cost; and

the horse’s *adjustable value when it most recently became your *live stock.

breeding days is the number of whole days in the income year since you most recently began to hold the horse for breeding.

nominated percentage is any percentage, up to 25%, you nominate when you make the election in section 70-60.

reduction factor is the greater of:

3; and

the difference between 12 and the horse’s age when you most recently began to hold it for breeding.

Subdivision 70-D — Assessable income arising from disposals of trading stock and certain other assets

Guide to Subdivision 70-D

70-75 What this Subdivision is about

Your assessable income includes the market value of an item of trading stock if you dispose of it outside the ordinary course of business or it ceases to be trading stock in certain other circumstances.

This Subdivision treats certain other assets in the same way as trading stock.

Table of sections

70-80 Why the rules in this Subdivision are necessary

Operative provisions

70-85 Application of this Subdivision to certain other assets

70-90 Assessable income on disposal of trading stock outside the ordinary course of business

70-95 Purchase price is taken to be market value

70-100 Notional disposal when you stop holding an item as trading stock

70-105 Death of owner

70-110 You stop holding an item as trading stock but still own it

70-115 Compensation for lost trading stock

70-80 Why the rules in this Subdivision are necessary

When you dispose of an item of your trading stock in the ordinary course of business, what you get for it is included in your assessable income (under section 6-5) as ordinary income.

Note: An incorporated body is treated as disposing of an item of its trading stock in the ordinary course of business if the body ceases to exist and disposes of the asset to a company that has not significantly different ownership: see Division 620.

If an item stops being your trading stock for certain other reasons, an amount is generally included in your assessable income to balance the reduction in trading stock on hand, which is a transaction on revenue account.

The other reasons for an item to stop being your trading stock are:

you dispose of it outside the ordinary course of business; or

interests in it change; or

you die; or

you stop holding it as trading stock.

Operative provisions

70-85 Application of this Subdivision to certain other assets

This Subdivision (except section 70-115) applies to certain assets of a business as if they were trading stock on hand of the entity that carries on that business. The assets are:

standing or growing crops; and

crop-stools; and

trees planted and tended for sale.

Note: Section 70-115 assesses insurance or indemnity amounts for lost trading stock.

70-90 Assessable income on disposal of trading stock outside the ordinary course of business

If you dispose of an item of your trading stock outside the ordinary course of a business:

that you are carrying on; and

of which the item is an asset;

your assessable income includes the *market value of the item on the day of the disposal.

If the disposal is the giving of a gift of property by you for which a valuation under section 30-212 is obtained, you may choose that the *market value is replaced with the value of the property as determined under the valuation. You can only make this choice if the valuation was made no more than 90 days before or after the disposal.

Any amount that you actually receive for the disposal is not included in your assessable income (nor is it exempt income).

Note 1: In the case of an asset covered by section 70-85 (which applies this Subdivision to certain other assets), the disposal will usually involve disposing of the land of which the asset forms part.

Note 2: For certain disposals of live stock by primary producers, special rules apply: see Subdivision 385-E.

Note 3: If the disposal is by way of gift, you may be able to deduct the gift: see Division 30 (Gifts).

Note 4: If the disposal is of trees, you can deduct the relevant portion of your capital costs of acquiring the land carrying the trees or of acquiring a right to fell the trees: see section 70-120.

Note 5: This section and section 70-95 also apply to disposals of certain items on hand at the end of 1996-97 that are not trading stock but were trading stock as defined in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936: see section 70-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

70-95 Purchase price is taken to be market value

If an entity disposes of an item of the entity’s trading stock outside the ordinary course of business, the entity acquiring the item is treated as having bought it for the amount included in the disposing entity’s assessable income under section 70-90.

70-100 Notional disposal when you stop holding an item as trading stock

(1) An item of *trading stock is treated as having been disposed of outside the ordinary course of *business if it stops being trading stock on hand of an entity (the transferor) and, immediately afterwards:

the transferor is not the item’s sole owner; but

an entity that owned the item (alone or with others) immediately beforehand still has an interest in the item.

Example: A grocer decides to take her daughters into partnership with her. Her trading stock becomes part of the partnership assets, owned by the partners equally. As a result, it becomes trading stock on hand of the partnership instead of the grocer. This section treats the grocer as having disposed of the trading stock to the partnership outside the ordinary course of her business.

Note: If the transferor is the item’s sole owner after it stops being trading stock on hand of the transferor, section 70-110 applies instead of this section.

As a result, the transferor’s assessable income includes the *market value of the item on the day it stops being trading stock on hand of the transferor.

(3) The entity or entities (the transferee) that own the item immediately after it stops being *trading stock on hand of the transferor are treated as having bought the item for the same value on that day.

Election to treat item as disposed of at closing value

(4) However, an election can be made to treat the item as having been disposed of for what would have been its *value as *trading stock of the transferor on hand at the end of an income year ending on that day.

If this election is made, this *value is included in the transferor’s assessable income for the income year that includes that day. The transferee is treated as having bought the item for the same value on that day.

This election can only be made if:

(a) immediately after the item stops being *trading stock on hand of the transferor, it is an asset of a *business carried on by the transferee; and

(b) immediately after the item stops being trading stock on hand of the transferor, the entities that owned it immediately beforehand have (between them) interests in the item whose total value is at least 25% of the item’s *market value on that day; and

(c) the *value elected is less than that market value; and

the item is not a thing in action.

Also, the election can only be made before 1 September following the end of the financial year in which the item stops being trading stock on hand of the transferor. However, the Commissioner can allow the election to be made later.

An election must be in writing and signed by or on behalf of each of:

the entities that own the item immediately before it stops being trading stock on hand of the transferor; and

the entities that own it immediately afterwards.

If a person whose signature is required for the election has died, the *legal personal representative of that person’s estate may sign instead.

When election has no effect

An election has no effect if:

the item stops being trading stock on hand of the transferor outside the course of ordinary family or commercial dealing; and

the *consideration receivable by the transferor (or by any of the entities constituting the transferor) substantially exceeds what would reasonably be expected to be the consideration receivable by the entity concerned if the *market value of the item immediately before it stops being trading stock on hand of the transferor were the *value elected under subsection (4).

Note: Section 960-255 may be relevant to determining family relationships for the purposes of paragraph (10)(a).

(11) Consideration receivable by an entity means so much of the value of any benefit as it is reasonable to expect that the entity will obtain in connection with the item ceasing to be *trading stock on hand of the transferor.

70-105 Death of owner

When you die, your assessable income up to the time of your death includes the *market value at that time of the trading stock of your business (if any).

Note: In the case of trees, you can deduct the relevant portion of your capital costs of acquiring the land carrying the trees or of acquiring a right to fell the trees: see section 70-120.

The entity on which the trading stock devolves is treated as having bought it for its *market value at that time.

However, your *legal personal representative can elect to have included in your assessable income (instead of the *market value) the amount that would have been the *value of the trading stock at the end of an income year ending on the day of your death.

In the case of an asset covered by section 70-85 (which applies this Subdivision to certain other assets), your *legal personal representative can elect to have a nil amount included in your assessable income (instead of the *market value).

Your *legal personal representative can make an election only if:

the business is carried on after your death; and

the trading stock continues to be held as trading stock of that business, or the asset continues to be held as an asset of that business, as appropriate.

If an election is made, the entity on which the trading stock devolves is treated as having bought it for the amount referred to in subsection (3) or (4).

An election can only be made on or before the day when your *legal personal representative lodges your income tax return for the period up to your death. However, the Commissioner can allow it to be made later.

70-110 You stop holding an item as trading stock but still own it

If you stop holding an item as trading stock, but still own it, you are treated as if:

just before it stopped being trading stock, you had sold it to someone else (at *arm’s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its *cost; and

you had immediately bought it back for the same amount.

Example 1: You are a sheep grazier and take a sheep from your stock to slaughter for personal consumption. You are treated as having sold it for its cost. This amount is assessable income, just like the proceeds of sale of any of your trading stock.

Although you are also treated as having bought the sheep for the same amount, it would not be deductible because the sheep is for personal consumption.

You are also treated as having bought the item for the same amount, which is relevant to working out the item’s cost for capital allowance purposes (see Subdivision 40-C) and the item’s cost base for CGT purposes (see Division 110).

Example 2: You stop holding an item as trading stock and begin to use it as a depreciating asset for the purpose of producing your assessable income. You are treated as having sold it for its cost. This amount is assessable income, just like the proceeds of sale of any of your trading stock.

This section does not apply if:

you stop holding an item as trading stock; and

immediately after you stopped holding the item as trading stock, you start to *hold the item as a registered emissions unit.

Note: A transaction that this section treats as having occurred is disregarded for the purposes of these provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

• subsection 47A(10) (which treats certain benefits as dividends paid by a CFC)

• paragraph 103A(3A)(c) (which affects whether a company is a public company for an income year).

70-115 Compensation for lost trading stock

Your assessable income includes an amount that:

you receive by way of insurance or indemnity for a loss of trading stock; and

is not assessable as ordinary income under section 6-5.

Subdivision 70-E — Miscellaneous

70-120 Deducting capital costs of acquiring trees

This section gives you deductions for your capital costs of acquiring land carrying trees or of acquiring a right to fell trees.

Note: This section is included in this Division because:

• trees felled for sale, or for use in manufacture, by you will usually become your trading stock; and

• before they are felled, the trees are covered by sections 70-90 and 70-105 because of section 70-85.

Land carrying trees

You can deduct the amount you paid to acquire land carrying trees if:

some or all of the trees are felled during the income year for sale, or for use in manufacture, by you for the *purpose of producing assessable income; or

some or all of the trees are felled during the income year under a right you granted to another entity in consideration of payments as or by way of royalty; or

the *market value of some or all of the trees is included in your assessable income for the income year by section 70-90 (because you disposed of the trees outside the ordinary course of business) or section 70-105 (because of your death).

(It does not matter when you acquired the land.)

Right to fell trees

Note: The market value of trees is not included in your assessable income for the income year by section 70-105 (because of your death) if your legal personal representative elects under subsection 70-105(4) to have a nil amount included instead.

You can deduct the amount you paid to acquire a right to fell trees if:

some or all of the trees are felled during the income year for sale, or for use in manufacture, by you for the *purpose of producing assessable income; or

some or all of the trees are felled during the income year under a right you granted to another entity in consideration of payments as or by way of royalty.

(It does not matter when you acquired the right.)

How much you can deduct for costs of acquiring land or right

You can deduct for the income year so much of the amount you paid as is attributable to the trees covered by a paragraph of subsection (2) or (3).

If you can deduct an amount because of paragraph (2)(c), you can also deduct for the income year so much of any other capital expenditure you incurred as is attributable to acquiring the trees covered by that paragraph (except so far as you have deducted it, or can deduct it, for any income year under a provision of this Act outside this section).

No deduction for carbon sink forests

You cannot deduct under this section so much of an amount you paid or incurred as is attributable to the establishment of trees for which any entity has deducted, or can deduct, an amount for any income year under Subdivision 40-J.

Non-arm’s length transactions

If:

you can deduct an amount under this section for expenditure incurred in connection with a transaction; and

the parties to the transaction did not deal with each other at *arm’s length; and

the amount of the expenditure is greater than the *market value of what the expenditure is for;

the amount of the expenditure is instead taken to be that market value. This has effect for the purposes of working out what you can deduct under this section.

Part 2-40 — Rules affecting employees and other taxpayers receiving PAYG withholding payments

Division 80 — General rules

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 80

Guide to Division 80

80-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out rules that apply throughout the Part. The rules are about holding an office, the termination of employment, the transfer of property and receiving and making payments.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

80-5 Holding of an office

80-10 Application to the termination of employment

80-15 Transfer of property

80-20 Payments for your benefit or at your direction or request

Operative provisions

80-5 Holding of an office

If a person holds (or has held) an office, this Part applies to the person in the same way as it would apply if the person were (or had been) employed.

80-10 Application to the termination of employment

For the purposes of this Part, treat the termination of employment as including:

retirement from employment; and

the cessation of employment because of death.

80-15 Transfer of property

Any of the following payments covered by this Part (but no others covered by this Part) can be or include a transfer of property:

an employment termination payment;

a genuine redundancy payment;

an early retirement scheme payment;

a payment covered by Subdivision 83-D (Foreign termination payments);

a payment that would be an employment termination payment but for paragraph 82-130(1)(b) (see Subdivision 83-E).

Note: An unused annual leave payment or an unused long service leave payment cannot include a transfer of property.

The amount of the payment is or includes the *market value of the property.

The *market value is reduced by the value of any consideration given for the transfer of the property.

80-20 Payments for your benefit or at your direction or request

(1) This section applies for the purposes of:

determining whether Division 82 or 83 applies to a payment; and

determining whether a payment mentioned in Division 82 or 83 is made to you, or received by you.

A payment is treated as being made to you, or received by you, if it is made:

for your benefit; or

(b) to another person or to an entity at your direction or request.

Division 82 — Employment termination payments

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 82

82-A Employment termination payments: life benefits

82-B Employment termination payments: death benefits

82-C Key concepts

Guide to Division 82

82-1 What this Division is about

This Division tells you how employment termination payments are treated for the purpose of income tax.

Subdivision 82-A — Employment termination payments: life benefits

Guide to Subdivision 82-A

82-5 What this Subdivision is about

If you receive a life benefit termination payment, part of the payment may be tax free (the tax free component).

You are entitled to a tax offset on the remaining part of the payment (the taxable component), subject to limitations.

The extent of your entitlement to the offset depends on your age in the year you receive the offset, on the total amount of payments you receive in the same year, and on the total amount of payments you receive in consequence of the same employment termination.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

82-10 Taxation of life benefit termination payments

Operative provisions

82-10 Taxation of life benefit termination payments

Tax free component

The *tax free component of a life benefit termination payment you receive is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Taxable component

The *taxable component of the payment is assessable income.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (4) does not exceed:

if you are your preservation age or older on the last day of the income year in which you receive the payment—15%; or

otherwise—30%.

Note: The remainder of the taxable component is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

The amount is so much of the *taxable component of the payment as does not exceed the smallest of the following:

the ETP cap amount reduced (but not below zero) by:

(i) if the payment is a payment of a kind referred to in subsection (6) (an excluded payment)—the amount worked out under this subsection for each *life benefit termination payment you have received earlier in the income year to the extent that it is an excluded payment; or

if the payment is not an excluded payment—the amount worked out under this subsection for each life benefit termination payment you have received earlier in the income year;

the ETP cap amount reduced (but not below zero) by:

if the payment is an excluded payment—the amount worked out under this subsection for each life benefit termination payment you have received earlier in consequence of the same employment termination (whether in the income year or an earlier income year) to the extent that it is an excluded payment; or

if the payment is not an excluded payment—the amount worked out under this subsection for each life benefit termination payment you have received earlier in consequence of the same employment termination (whether in the income year or an earlier income year);

if the payment is not an excluded payment—$180,000, reduced (but not below zero) by your taxable income for the income year in which the payment is made.

Note 1: For the ETP cap amount, see section 82-160.

Note 2: If you have also received a death benefit termination payment in the same income year, your entitlement to a tax offset under this section is not affected by your entitlement (if any) to a tax concession for the death benefit termination payment (under section 82-65 or 82-70).

Note 3: Certain other life benefit termination payments made before 1 July 2012 may be treated as earlier payments under paragraph (4)(b): see section 82-10H of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

In working out, for the purposes of paragraph (4)(c), your taxable income for the income year, disregard:

the taxable component of the payment; and

the taxable component of each life benefit termination payment you receive later in the income year.

Paragraph (4)(c) does not apply in relation to *life benefit termination payments:

that are *genuine redundancy payments, or that would be genuine redundancy payments but for paragraph 83-175(2)(a); or

that are early retirement scheme payments; or

that include *invalidity segments, or what would be invalidity segments included in such payments but for paragraph 82-150(1)(c); or

that:

are paid in connection with a genuine dispute; and

are principally compensation for personal injury, unfair dismissal, harassment, discrimination or a matter prescribed by the regulations; and

exceed the amount that could, at the time of the termination of your employment, reasonably be expected to be received by you in consequence of the voluntary termination of your employment.

If the payment is partly an excluded payment:

subsection (4) applies as if the payment were 2 payments as follows:

first, a payment consisting only of the part of the payment that is an excluded payment;

second, another payment, made immediately after the first payment, consisting only of the part of the payment that is not an excluded payment; and

subsection (4) applies to the second payment as if a reference in subsection (5) to the taxable component of a payment were a reference to so much of the taxable component as relates to the part of the payment that is not an excluded payment.

Despite subsections (4) and (7), the amount mentioned in subsection (4) in relation to the payment must not exceed either of the following:

the ETP cap amount reduced (but not below zero) by the amount worked out under subsection (4) for each life benefit termination payment you have received earlier in the income year;

the ETP cap amount reduced (but not below zero) by the amount worked out under subsection (4) for each life benefit termination payment you have received earlier in consequence of the same employment termination (whether in the income year or an earlier income year).

Subdivision 82-B — Employment termination payments: death benefits

Guide to Subdivision 82-B

82-60 What this Subdivision is about

If you receive a death benefit termination payment after the death of a person, part of the payment may be tax free (the tax free component).

You are entitled to a tax offset on the remaining part of the payment (the taxable component), subject to limitations.

The extent of your entitlement to the offset depends on whether or not you were a death benefits dependant of the deceased, and on the total amount of payments you receive in consequence of the same employment termination.

If a death benefit termination payment is payable to the trustee of the estate of the deceased for the benefit of another person, the payment is taxed in the hands of the trustee in the same way as it would be taxed if it had been paid directly to the other person.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

82-65 Death benefits for dependants

82-70 Death benefits for non-dependants

82-75 Death benefits paid to trustee of deceased estate

Operative provisions

82-65 Death benefits for dependants

Tax free component

The *tax free component of a death benefit termination payment that you receive after the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Taxable component

If you receive a death benefit termination payment after the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant:

the part of the *taxable component of the payment mentioned in subsection (3) is not assessable income and is not exempt income; and

the remainder of the taxable component (if any) of the payment is assessable income.

Note: The remainder of the taxable component is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

The amount is so much of the *taxable component of the payment as does not exceed the ETP cap amount.

Note: For the ETP cap amount, see section 82-160.

The ETP cap amount is reduced (but not below zero) by the amount worked out under subsection (3) for each death benefit termination payment (if any) you have received earlier in consequence of the same employment termination, whether in the income year or an earlier income year.

Note 1: See subsection 82-75(2) for the tax treatment of any amount by which you may have benefited from an employment termination payment to the trustee of the estate of the deceased.

Note 2: If you have also received a life benefit termination payment in the same income year, your entitlement to a tax concession under this section is not affected by your entitlement (if any) to an offset for the life benefit termination payment (under section 82-10).

82-70 Death benefits for non-dependants

Tax free component

(1) The *tax free component of a *death benefit termination payment that you receive after the death of a person of whom you are not a *death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

Taxable component

(2) If you receive a *death benefit termination payment after the death of a person of whom you are not a *death benefits dependant, the *taxable component of the payment is assessable income.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (4) does not exceed 30%.

Note: The remainder of the taxable component is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

The amount is so much of the *taxable component of the payment as does not exceed the ETP cap amount.

Note: For the ETP cap amount, see section 82-160.

The ETP cap amount is reduced (but not below zero) by the amount worked out under subsection (4) for each death benefit termination payment (if any) you have received earlier in consequence of the same employment termination, whether in the income year or an earlier income year.

Note 1: See subsection 82-75(3) for the tax treatment of any amount by which you may have benefited from an employment termination payment to the trustee of the estate of the deceased.

Note 2: If you have also received a life benefit termination payment in the same income year, your entitlement to a tax offset under this section is not affected by your entitlement (if any) to an offset for the life benefit termination payment (under section 82-10).

82-75 Death benefits paid to trustee of deceased estate

This section applies to you if:

you are the trustee of a deceased estate; and

a death benefit termination payment is made to you in your capacity as trustee.

Note: See also subsection 101A(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Dependants of deceased benefit from payment

To the extent that 1 or more beneficiaries of the estate who were *death benefits dependants of the deceased have benefited, or may be expected to benefit, from the payment:

the payment is treated as if it had been made to you as a person who was a death benefits dependant of the deceased; and

the payment is taken to be income to which no beneficiary is presently entitled.

Note: Section 82-65 deals with the taxation of employment termination payments made to persons who are death benefits dependants of deceased persons.

Non-dependants of deceased benefit from payment

(3) To the extent that 1 or more beneficiaries of the estate who were not *death benefits dependants of the deceased have benefited, or may be expected to benefit, from the payment:

(a) the payment is treated as if it had been made to you as a person who was not a death benefits dependant of the deceased; and

the payment is taken to be income to which no beneficiary is presently entitled.

Note: Section 82-70 deals with the taxation of employment termination payments made to persons who are not death benefits dependants of deceased persons.

Subdivision 82-C — Key concepts

Guide to Subdivision 82-C

82-125 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision defines an employment termination payment as a payment made in consequence of the termination of a person’s employment that is received no later than 12 months after the termination (though the 12 month restriction is relaxed in some circumstances).

An employment termination payment can be a life benefit termination payment (received by the person whose employment is terminated) or a death benefit termination payment (received by another person after the death of a person whose employment is terminated).

Certain types of payments are declared not to be employment termination payments.

Various other terms used in describing the taxation treatment of employment termination payments are defined in the Subdivision.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

82-130 What is an employment termination payment?

82-135 Payments that are not employment termination payments

82-140 Tax free component of an employment termination payment

82-145 Taxable component of an employment termination payment

82-150 What is an invalidity segment of an employment termination payment?

82-155 What is a pre-July 83 segment of an employment termination payment?

82-160 What is the ETP cap amount?

Operative provisions

82-130 What is an employment termination payment?

(1) A payment is an employment termination payment if:

it is received by you:

in consequence of the termination of your employment; or

after another person’s death, in consequence of the termination of the other person’s employment; and

(b) it is received no later than 12 months after that termination (but see subsection (4)); and

(c) it is not a payment mentioned in section 82-135.

Note 1: If a payment would be an employment termination payment but for paragraph (b), see subsection (4) and section 83-295.

Note 2: The holding of an office is treated as employment for this Part: see section 80-5. Also, the termination of employment is treated as including the termination of employment by retirement or by death: see section 80-10.

Types of employment termination payment

(2) A life benefit termination payment is an *employment termination payment to which subparagraph (1)(a)(i) applies.

(3) A death benefit termination payment is an *employment termination payment to which subparagraph (1)(a)(ii) applies.

Exemption from 12 month rule

Paragraph (1)(b) does not apply to you if:

you are covered by a determination under subsection (5) or (7); or

the payment is a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment.

Note: The part of a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment worked out under section 83-170 is not an employment termination payment: see section 82-135.

The Commissioner may determine, in writing, that paragraph (1)(b) does not apply to you if the Commissioner considers the time between the employment termination and the payment to be reasonable, having regard to the following:

the circumstances of the employment termination, including any dispute in relation to the termination;

the circumstances of the payment;

the circumstances of the person making the payment;

any other relevant circumstances.

A determination under subsection (5) is not a legislative instrument.

The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, determine that paragraph (1)(b) does not apply to either or both of the following, as specified in the determination:

a class of payments;

a class of recipients of payments.

A determination under subsection (7) may provide for paragraph (1)(b) not to apply in circumstances relating to any (or all) of the following, as specified in the determination:

a class of employment termination (including a class described by reference to disputes of a specified type);

a class of payments;

a class of persons making payments;

the period after the employment termination until payment is received;

any other relevant circumstances.

82-135 Payments that are not employment termination payments

The following payments you receive are not employment termination payments:

a superannuation benefit (see Divisions 301 to 307);

a payment of a pension or an *annuity (whether or not the payment is a superannuation benefit); and

an unused annual leave payment (see Subdivision 83-A);

an unused long service leave payment (see Subdivision 83-B);

the part of a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment worked out under section 83-170 (see Subdivision 83-C);

a payment to which Subdivision 83-D (Foreign termination payments) applies;

a payment (or part of one) made by a company or trust as mentioned in subsection 152-310(2);

a payment that is an advance or a loan to you on terms and conditions that would apply if you and the payer were dealing at *arm’s length;

a payment that is deemed to be a dividend under this Act;

(i) a capital payment for, or in respect of, personal injury to you so far as the payment is reasonable having regard to the nature of the personal injury and its likely effect on your capacity to *derive income from personal exertion (within the meaning of the definition of income derived from personal exertion in subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936);

a capital payment for, or in respect of, a legally enforceable contract in restraint of trade by you so far as the payment is reasonable having regard to the nature and extent of the restraint;

a payment:

received by you, or to which you are entitled, as the result of the commutation of a pension payable from a constitutionally protected fund; and

(ii) wholly applied in paying any superannuation contributions surcharge (as defined in section 37 of the Superannuation Contributions Tax (Members of Constitutionally Protected Superannuation Funds) Assessment and Collection Act 1997);

a payment:

(i) received by you, or to which you are entitled, as the result of the commutation of a pension payable by a superannuation provider (within the meaning of the Superannuation Contributions Tax (Assessment and Collection) Act 1997); and

wholly applied in paying any superannuation contributions surcharge (as defined in section 43 of that Act);

(m) an amount included in your assessable income under Division 83A of this Act (which deals with employee share schemes).

Note: For paragraph (e)—the remaining part of a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment (apart from the amount mentioned in the paragraph) is an employment termination payment if section 82-130 applies to that part.

82-140 Tax free component of an employment termination payment

The tax free component of an *employment termination payment is so much of the payment as consists of the following:

the *invalidity segment of the payment;

the *pre-July 83 segment of the payment.

82-145 Taxable component of an employment termination payment

The taxable component of an *employment termination payment is the amount of the payment less the *tax free component of the payment (see section 82-140).

82-150 What is an invalidity segment of an employment termination payment?

(1) An *employment termination payment includes an invalidity segment if:

the payment was made to a person because he or she stops being gainfully employed; and

the person stopped being gainfully employed because he or she suffered from ill-health (whether physical or mental); and

the gainful employment stopped before the person’s *last retirement day; and

2 legally qualified medical practitioners have certified that, because of the ill-health, it is unlikely that the person can ever be gainfully employed in capacity for which he or she is reasonably qualified because of education, experience or training.

(2) Work out the amount of the invalidity segment by applying the following formula:

where:

days to retirement is the number of days from the day on which the person’s employment was terminated to the *last retirement day.

employment days is the number of days of employment to which the payment relates.

82-155 What is a pre-July 83 segment of an employment termination payment?

(1) An *employment termination payment includes a pre-July 83 segment if any of the employment to which the payment relates occurred before 1 July 1983.

(2) Work out the amount of the pre-July 83 segment as follows:

Step 1. Subtract the *invalidity segment (if any) from the employment termination payment.

Step 2. Multiply the amount at step 1 by the fraction:

82-160 What is the ETP cap amount?

The ETP cap amount for the 2007-2008 income year is $140,000. This amount is indexed annually.

Note 1: Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the ETP cap amount: see section 960-285.

Note 2: The ETP cap amount may be reduced for the purpose of working out tax offsets for individual employment termination payments.

Division 83 — Other payments on termination of employment

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 83

83-A Unused annual leave payments

83-B Unused long service leave payments

83-C Genuine redundancy payments and early retirement scheme payments

83-D Foreign termination payments

83-E Other payments

Guide to Division 83

83-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the taxation treatment for a variety of payments, other than employment termination payments, that are made in consequence of the termination of employment.

Subdivision 83-A — Unused annual leave payments

Guide to Subdivision 83-A

83-5 What this Subdivision is about

You are entitled to a tax offset for a payment that you receive in consequence of the termination of your employment that is for unused annual leave.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

83-10 Unused annual leave payment is assessable

83-15 Entitlement to tax offset

Operative provisions

83-10 Unused annual leave payment is assessable

Application—annual leave

(1) This section applies to leave (annual leave) of the following types (whether it is made available as an entitlement or as a privilege):

leave ordinarily known as annual leave, including recreational leave and annual holidays;

any other leave made available in circumstances similar to those in which the leave mentioned in paragraph (a) is ordinarily made available.

Unused annual leave payments

Your assessable income includes an unused annual leave payment that you receive.

(3) A payment that you receive in consequence of the termination of your employment is an unused annual leave payment if:

it is for annual leave you have not used; or

it is a bonus or other additional payment for annual leave you have not used; or

it is for annual leave, or is a bonus or other additional payment for annual leave, to which you were not entitled just before the employment termination, but that would have been made available to you at a later time if it were not for the employment termination.

83-15 Entitlement to tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset to ensure that the rate of tax on an unused annual leave payment does not exceed 30%, to the extent that:

the payment was made in connection with a payment that includes, or consists of, any of the following:

a genuine redundancy payment;

an early retirement scheme payment;

the *invalidity segment of an employment termination payment or superannuation benefit; or

the payment was made in respect of employment before 18 August 1993.

Subdivision 83-B — Unused long service leave payments

Guide to Subdivision 83-B

83-65 What this Subdivision is about

You are entitled to a tax offset for a payment that you receive in consequence of the termination of your employment that is for unused long service leave.

Table of sections

General

83-70 Application—long service leave

83-75 Meaning of unused long service leave payment

83-80 Taxation of unused long service leave payments

83-85 Entitlement to tax offset

83-90 Meaning of pre-16/8/78 period, pre-18/8/93 period, post-17/8/93 period and long service leave employment period

Employment wholly full-time or wholly part-time

83-95 How to work out amount of payment attributable to each period

83-100 How to work out unused days of long service leave for each period

83-105 How to work out long service leave accrued in each period

Employment partly full-time and partly part-time

83-110 Leave accrued in pre-16/8/78, pre-18/8/93 and post-17/8/93 periods—employment full-time and part-time

Long service leave taken at less than full pay

83-115 Working out used days of long service leave if leave taken at less than full pay

General

83-70 Application—long service leave

This Subdivision applies to leave (long service leave) of the following types (whether it is made available as an entitlement or as a privilege), other than annual leave to which section 83-10 applies:

leave ordinarily known as long service leave, including long leave, furlough and extended leave;

any other leave made available in circumstances similar to those in which the leave mentioned in paragraph (a) is ordinarily made available;

if your employer has entered into a *scheme or arrangement for leave and, because of the existence and nature of the scheme or arrangement, the employer does not have to comply with the requirements of a law of the Commonwealth, or of a State or Territory, relating to leave mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b)—leave made available under the scheme or arrangement.

83-75 Meaning of unused long service leave payment

A payment that you receive in consequence of the termination of your employment is an unused long service leave payment if:

it is for long service leave you have not used; or

it is for long service leave to which you were not entitled just before the employment termination, but that would have been made available to you at a later time if it were not for the employment termination.

83-80 Taxation of unused long service leave payments

Assessable and tax-free parts of unused long service leave payments

If you receive an unused long service leave payment, your assessable income includes the part of the payment shown in this table:

The remainder of that part (if any) of an unused long service leave payment that is attributable to the *pre-16/8/78 period is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Note 1: If your employment was wholly full-time or wholly part-time during a period, see sections 83-95, 83-100 and 83-105 to work out the amount of an unused long service leave payment that is attributable to the period.

Note 2: If your employment was partly full-time and partly part-time during a period, see section 83-110 to work out the amount of an unused long service leave payment that is attributable to the period.

83-85 Entitlement to tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset on an unused long service leave payment that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount of the payment mentioned in subsection (2) does not exceed 30%.

The amount is the part of the unused long service leave payment included in your assessable income under subsection 83-80(1):

to the extent that it is attributable to the *pre-18/8/93 period; and

to the extent that it is attributable to the *post-17/8/93 period, if the payment was made in connection with a payment that includes, or consists of, any of the following:

a genuine redundancy payment; or

an early retirement scheme payment; or

an *invalidity segment of an employment termination payment or a superannuation benefit.

83-90 Meaning of pre-16/8/78 period, pre-18/8/93 period, post-17/8/93 period and long service leave employment period

(1) The pre-16/8/78 period consists of each day (if any) in your *long service leave employment period that occurred before 16 August 1978.

(2) The pre-18/8/93 period consists of each day (if any) in your *long service leave employment period to which the payment relates that occurred after 15 August 1978 and before 18 August 1993.

(3) The post-17/8/93 period consists of each day (if any) in your *long service leave employment period to which the payment relates that occurred after 17 August 1993.

(4) Your long service leave employment period, for a period of long service leave, is:

the period of employment to which the long service leave relates; or

if your entitlement to long service leave changes so that it accrues over a shorter period—the period that would apply under paragraph (a) assuming the change had not happened.

Employment wholly full-time or wholly part-time

83-95 How to work out amount of payment attributable to each period

Work out how much of an unused long service leave payment is attributable to a period as follows:

for the *pre-18/8/93 period or to the *post-17/8/93 period—use the formula in subsection (2);

for the *pre-16/8/78 period—subtract the sum of the amounts (if any) worked out for paragraph (a) for the other 2 periods from the total amount of the payment.

For the *pre-18/8/93 period or the *post-17/8/93 period, the formula is:

where:

total unused long service leave days means the total number of unused days of long service leave in the *long service leave employment period for the payment.

unused long service leave days in the relevant period means the number of unused days of long service leave in the *pre-18/8/93 period or the *post-17/8/93 period (as applicable), worked out under section 83-100.

Note 1: For the meaning of unused days of long service leave, see section 83-100.

Note 2: Section 83-110 explains how to work out the period of unused long service leave if your employment was partly full-time and partly part-time during the period.

83-100 How to work out unused days of long service leave for each period

(1) The number of unused days of long service leave for each of the *pre-16/8/78 period, the *pre-18/8/93 period and the *post-17/8/93 period is the number of days of long service leave that accrued to you during that period less the number of days of long service leave that you used in the period.

Exception if days used exceed days accrued in the pre-18/8/93 period and the post-17/8/93 period

To the extent that the number of days of long service leave that you used during the *pre-18/8/93 period or the *post-17/8/93 period exceeds the number of days of long service leave that accrued to you during the period, apply the excess days as shown in this table:

(3) The number of unused days of long service leave in each period is the number of days after applying the table.

Note: Section 83-115 explains how to work out the number of days of long service leave you are taken to have used if you took long service leave at less than the full pay rate.

83-105 How to work out long service leave accrued in each period

Work out the number of days of long service leave that accrued to you during each part of your long service leave employment period as follows:

for the *pre-18/8/93 period or the *post-17/8/93 period—use the formula in subsection (2);

for the *pre-16/8/78 period—subtract the sum of the number of days (if any) worked out under paragraph (a) for the other 2 periods from the total number of days of long service leave accrued to you during the long service leave employment period.

For the *pre-18/8/93 period or the *post-17/8/93 period, the formula is:

where:

relevant period means the *pre-18/8/93 period or the *post 17/8/93 period (as applicable).

How to treat fraction of day

If long service leave accrued to you during the *pre-18/8/93 period and the *post-17/8/93 period but not during the *pre-16/8/78 period, and the number of days worked out under subsection (2) for the post-17/8/93 period includes a fraction, treat the fraction as having accrued during the pre-18/8/93 period.

If long service leave accrued to you during all 3 periods and the number of days worked out under subsection (2) for the *post-17/8/93 period or the *pre-18/8/93 period includes a fraction, treat the fraction as having accrued during the *pre-16/8/78 period.

Employment partly full-time and partly part-time

83-110 Leave accrued in pre-16/8/78, pre-18/8/93 and post-17/8/93 periods—employment full-time and part-time

This section applies if the long service leave employment period for an unused long service leave payment includes:

1 or more periods when you were employed on a full-time basis; and

1 or more periods when you were employed on a part-time basis.

(2) Work out how much of the payment is attributable to the period or periods when you were employed on a full-time basis (the full-time payment) and how much to the period or periods when you were employed on a part-time basis (the part-time payment).

The amount of the payment that is attributable to each of the *pre-16/8/78 period, the *pre-18/8/93 period and the *post-17/8/93 period is the sum of the amounts worked out in accordance with sections 83-95, 83-100 and 83-105 that would be attributable to those periods if the full-time payment and the part-time payment were each *unused long service leave payments.

Long service leave taken at less than full pay

83-115 Working out used days of long service leave if leave taken at less than full pay

If you used days of long service leave at a rate of pay that is less than the rate to which you are entitled, the number of days of long service leave you are taken to have used (disregarding fractions of days) is as follows:

Example: If you took 100 actual days of long service leave at a rate of pay of $30 per hour, while the rate of pay to which you were entitled when taking leave is $40 per hour, you are taken to have used 75 days of long service leave, worked out as follows:

Subdivision 83-C — Genuine redundancy payments and early retirement scheme payments

Guide to Subdivision 83-C

83-165 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision defines what are genuine redundancy payments and early retirement scheme payments.

If you receive a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment, you do not have to pay income tax on the payment so far as it does not exceed a certain amount worked out under this Subdivision.

A part of a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment that is not tax free under this Subdivision will normally be an employment termination payment.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

83-170 Tax-free treatment of genuine redundancy payments and early retirement scheme payments

83-175 What is a genuine redundancy payment?

83-180 What is an early retirement scheme payment?

Operative provisions

83-170 Tax-free treatment of genuine redundancy payments and early retirement scheme payments

This section applies if you receive a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment.

Note: A payment cannot be both a genuine redundancy payment and an early retirement scheme payment, because of the nature of each of these types of payment: see sections 83-175 and 83-180.

So much of the relevant payment as does not exceed the amount worked out under subsection (3) is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Work out the amount using the formula:

where:

base amount means:

for the income year 2006-2007—$6,783; and

for a later income year—the amount mentioned in paragraph (a) indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index the base amount.

service amount means:

for the income year 2006-2007—$3,392; and

for a later income year—the amount mentioned in paragraph (a) indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index the service amount.

years of service means the number of whole years in the period, or sum of periods, of employment to which the payment relates.

Note: The remaining part of a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment (apart from the amount mentioned in subsection (3)) is an employment termination payment if section 82-130 applies to that part.

83-175 What is a genuine redundancy payment?

(1) A genuine redundancy payment is so much of a payment received by an employee who is dismissed from employment because the employee’s position is genuinely redundant as exceeds the amount that could reasonably be expected to be received by the employee in consequence of the voluntary termination of his or her employment at the time of the dismissal.

(2) A genuine redundancy payment must satisfy the following conditions:

the employee is dismissed before the earlier of the following:

the day the employee reached pension age;

if the employee’s employment would have terminated when he or she reached a particular age or completed a particular period of service—the day he or she would reach the age or complete the period of service (as the case may be);

if the dismissal was not at *arm’s length—the payment does not exceed the amount that could reasonably be expected to be made if the dismissal were at arm’s length;

at the time of the dismissal, there was no arrangement between the employee and the employer, or between the employer and another person, to employ the employee after the dismissal.

(3) However, a genuine redundancy payment does not include any part of a payment that was received by the employee in lieu of *superannuation benefits to which the employee may have become entitled at the time the payment was received or at a later time.

Payments not covered

(4) A payment is not a genuine redundancy payment if it is a payment mentioned in section 82-135 (apart from paragraph 82-135(e)).

Note: Paragraph 82-135(e) provides that the part of a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment worked out under section 83-170 is not an employment termination payment.

83-180 What is an early retirement scheme payment?

(1) An early retirement scheme payment is so much of a payment received by an employee because the employee retires under an *early retirement scheme as exceeds the amount that could reasonably be expected to be received by the employee in consequence of the voluntary termination of his or her employment at the time of the retirement.

(2) An early retirement scheme payment must satisfy the following conditions:

the employee retires before the earlier of the following:

the day the employee reached pension age;

if the employee’s employment would have terminated when he or she reached a particular age or completed a particular period of service—the day he or she would reach the age or complete the period of service (as the case may be);

if the retirement is not at *arm’s length—the payment does not exceed the amount that could reasonably be expected to be made if the retirement were at arm’s length;

at the time of the retirement, there was no arrangement between the employee and the employer, or between the employer and another person, to employ the employee after the retirement.

(3) A scheme is an early retirement scheme if:

all the employer’s employees who comprise such a class of employees as the Commissioner approves may participate in the scheme; and

the employer’s purpose in implementing the scheme is to rationalise or re-organise the employer’s operations by making any change to the employer’s operations, or the nature of the work force, that the Commissioner approves; and

before the scheme is implemented, the Commissioner, by written instrument, approves the scheme as an early retirement scheme for the purposes of this section.

(4) A scheme is also an early retirement scheme if:

paragraph (3)(a) or (b) does not apply; and

the Commissioner is satisfied that special circumstances exist in relation to the scheme that make it reasonable to approve the scheme; and

before the scheme is implemented, the Commissioner, by written instrument, approves the scheme as an early retirement scheme for the purposes of this section.

(5) However, an early retirement scheme payment does not include any part of the payment that was paid to the employee in lieu of *superannuation benefits to which the employee may have become entitled at the time the payment was made or at a later time.

Payments not covered

(6) A payment is not an early retirement scheme payment if it is a payment mentioned in section 82-135 (apart from paragraph 82-135(e)).

Note: Paragraph 82-135(e) provides that the part of a genuine redundancy payment or an early retirement scheme payment worked out under section 83-170 is not an employment termination payment.

Subdivision 83-D — Foreign termination payments

Guide to Subdivision 83-D

83-230 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision deals with termination payments that arise out of foreign employment.

These payments are not employment termination payments, and are tax free (except for amounts worked out under this Subdivision).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

83-235 Termination payments tax free—foreign resident period

83-240 Termination payments tax free—Australian resident period

Operative provisions

83-235 Termination payments tax free—foreign resident period

A payment received by you is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

it was received in consequence of the termination of your employment in a foreign country; and

it is not a superannuation benefit; and

it is not a payment of a pension or an *annuity (whether or not the payment is a superannuation benefit); and

it relates only to a period of employment when you were not an Australian resident.

83-240 Termination payments tax free—Australian resident period

A payment received by you is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

it was received in consequence of:

the termination of your employment in a foreign country; or

(ii) the termination of your engagement on qualifying service on an approved project (within the meaning of section 23AF of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936), in relation to a foreign country; and

it relates only to the period of that employment or engagement; and

it is not a superannuation benefit; and

it is not a payment of a pension or an *annuity (whether or not the payment is a superannuation benefit); and

you were an Australian resident during the period of the employment or engagement; and

the payment is not exempt from income tax under the law of the foreign country; and

(g) for a period of employment—your foreign earnings from the employment are exempt from income tax under section 23AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

for a period of engagement—your *eligible foreign remuneration from the service is exempt from income tax under section 23AF of that Act.

For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(a)(ii), treat the termination of engagement on qualifying service on an approved project as including:

retirement from the engagement; and

cessation of the engagement because of the person’s death.

Note: The termination of a person’s employment is treated in the same way: see section 80-10.

Subdivision 83-E — Other payments

Guide to Subdivision 83-E

83-290 What this Subdivision is about

If a payment you receive in consequence of the termination of your employment is made more than 12 months after the termination of your employment, it does not qualify as an employment termination payment, subject to certain exceptions (see section 82-130).

The payment is treated as assessable income and no tax concession is allowed under Division 82.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

83-295 Termination payments made more than 12 months after termination etc.

Operative provisions

83-295 Termination payments made more than 12 months after termination etc.

A payment received by you that would be an employment termination payment but for paragraph 82-130(1)(b) is assessable income.

Division 83A — Employee share schemes

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 83A

83A-A Objects of Division and key concepts

83A-B Immediate inclusion of discount in assessable income

83A-C Deferred inclusion of gain in assessable income

83A-D Deduction for employer

83A-E Miscellaneous

Guide to Division 83A

83A-1 What this Division is about

Your assessable income includes discounts on shares, rights and stapled securities you (or your associate) acquire under an employee share scheme.

You may be entitled:

to have the amount included in your assessable income reduced; or

to have the income year in which it is included deferred.

Subdivision 83A-A — Objects of Division and key concepts

Table of sections

83A-5 Objects of Division

83A-10 Meaning of ESS interest and employee share scheme

83A-5 Objects of Division

The objects of this Division are:

to ensure that benefits provided to employees under *employee share schemes are subject to income tax at the employees’ marginal rates under income tax law (instead of being subject to fringe benefits tax law); and

to increase the extent to which the interests of employees are aligned with those of their employers, by providing a tax concession to encourage lower and middle income earners to acquire *shares under such schemes; and

to increase the number of new entrepreneurial companies in Australia by assisting them to attract and retain employees by providing those employees with a tax concession for acquiring shares under such schemes.

83A-10 Meaning of ESS interest and employee share scheme

(1) An ESS interest, in a company, is a beneficial interest in:

a *share in the company; or

a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a share in the company.

(2) An employee share scheme is a *scheme under which *ESS interests in a company are provided to employees, or *associates of employees, (including past or prospective employees) of:

the company; or

*subsidiaries of the company;

in relation to the employees’ employment.

Note: See section 83A-325 for relationships similar to employment.

Subdivision 83A-B — Immediate inclusion of discount in assessable income

Guide to Subdivision 83A-B

83A-15 What this Subdivision is about

Generally, a discount you receive on shares, rights or stapled securities you acquire under an employee share scheme is included in your assessable income when you acquire the beneficial interest in those shares, rights or securities.

You may be entitled to reduce the amount included in your assessable income if you meet one of 2 sets of conditions.

If you are a foreign resident, only the part of the discount that relates to your employment in Australia is included in your assessable income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

83A-20 Application of Subdivision

83A-25 Discount to be included in assessable income

83A-30 Amount for which discounted ESS interest acquired

83A-33 Reducing amounts included in assessable income—start ups

83A-35 Reducing amounts included in assessable income—other cases

83A-45 Further conditions for reducing amounts included in assessable income

Operative provisions

83A-20 Application of Subdivision

This Subdivision applies to an *ESS interest if you acquire the interest under an employee share scheme at a discount.

Note 1: This Subdivision does not apply if Subdivision 83A-C applies: see section 83A-105.

Note 2: If an associate of yours acquires an interest in relation to your employment, this Division applies as if you, rather than your associate, acquired the interest: see section 83A-305.

However, this Subdivision does not apply if the *ESS interest is a beneficial interest in a *share that you acquire as a result of exercising a right, if you acquired a beneficial interest in the right under an employee share scheme.

83A-25 Discount to be included in assessable income

Your assessable income for the income year in which you acquire the *ESS interest includes the discount given in relation to the interest.

Note: Regulations made for section 83A-315 may be relevant to working out whether you acquire the ESS interest at a discount.

(2) Treat an amount included in your assessable income under subsection (1) as being from a source other than an *Australian source to the extent that it relates to your employment outside Australia.

Note: For the CGT treatment of employee share schemes, see Subdivision 130-D.

83A-30 Amount for which discounted ESS interest acquired

For the purposes of this Act (other than this Division), the *ESS interest (and the *share or right of which it forms part) is taken to have been acquired for its *market value (rather than for its discounted value).

Note: Regulations made for the purposes of section 83A-315 may substitute a different amount for the market value of the ESS interest.

Subsection (1) does not apply to an *ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right (or to the right of which it forms part), if section 83A-33 (about start ups) reduces the amount to be included in your assessable income in relation to the interest.

83A-33 Reducing amounts included in assessable income—start ups

Reduce the total amount included in your assessable income under subsection 83A-25(1) for an income year by the total of the amounts included in your assessable income under that subsection, for the income year, for *ESS interests to which all of the following provisions apply:

subsections (2) to (6) of this section;

section 83A-45 (about further conditions);

for ESS interests that are beneficial interests in *shares—subsection 83A-105(2) (about broad availability of schemes).

No equity interests listed on a stock exchange

(2) This subsection applies to an *ESS interest in a company (the first company) if no *equity interests in any of the following companies are listed for quotation in the official list of any *approved stock exchange at the end of the first company’s most recent income year before you acquired the interest:

the first company;

any *subsidiary of the first company at the end of that income year;

(c) any holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of the first company at the end of that income year;

any subsidiary of a holding company (within the meaning of that Act) of the first company at the end of that income year.

Note: For identifying any holding company, see also subsection (7).

Incorporated for less than 10 years

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest in a company if:

(a) the company (the first company); and

each of the other companies referred to in subsection (2);

was incorporated by or under an Australian law or foreign law less than 10 years before the end of the first company’s most recent income year before you acquired the interest.

Company has aggregated turnover not exceeding $50 million

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest in a company if the company has an aggregated turnover not exceeding $50 million for the company’s most recent income year before the income year in which you acquire the ESS interest.

Note: For working out aggregated turnover, see also subsection (7).

Conditions relating to market value

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest in a company if:

in the case of an ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a *share—the discount on the ESS interest is no more than 15% of its *market value when you acquire it; or

in the case of an ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right—the amount that must be paid to exercise the right is greater than or equal to the market value of an ordinary share in the company when you acquire the ESS interest.

Employer to be an Australian resident company

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an employee share scheme if, when you acquire the interest, your employer is an Australian resident.

Disregard certain investments

For the purposes of subsections (2) and (4), disregard:

*eligible venture capital investments by a VCLP, ESVCLP or AFOF; and

investments by an *exempt entity that is a deductible gift recipient;

when identifying any holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) or working out *aggregated turnover.

83A-35 Reducing amounts included in assessable income—other cases

Reduction and income test

Reduce the total amount included in your assessable income under subsection 83A-25(1) for an income year by the total of the amounts included in your assessable income under that subsection, for the income year, for *ESS interests to which all of the following provisions apply:

subsections (6) and (7) of this section;

section 83A-45 (about further conditions).

However:

do not reduce the total amount by more than $1,000; and

only make the reduction if the sum of the following does not exceed $180,000:

your taxable income for the income year (including any amount that would be included in your taxable income if you disregarded this section, but not including your *assessable FHSS released amount for the income year);

your reportable fringe benefits total for the income year;

your *reportable superannuation contributions (if any) for the income year;

your *total net investment loss for the income year; and

subsection (1) does not apply if section 83A-33 (about start ups) reduces the amount to be included in your assessable income for the income year for the *ESS interests.

Scheme must be non-discriminatory

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an employee share scheme if, when you acquire the interest, both:

the employee share scheme; and

any scheme for the provision of financial assistance in respect of acquisitions of ESS interests under the employee share scheme;

are operated on a non-discriminatory basis in relation to at least 75% of the permanent employees of your employer who have completed at least 3 years of service (whether continuous or non-continuous) with your employer and who are Australian residents.

No risk of losing interest or share under the conditions of the scheme

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an employee share scheme if, when you acquire the interest:

if the ESS interest is a beneficial interest in a *share—there is no real risk that, under the conditions of the scheme, you will forfeit or lose the ESS interest (other than by disposing of it); or

if the ESS interest is a beneficial interest in a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a *share:

there is no real risk that, under the conditions of the scheme, you will forfeit or lose the ESS interest (other than by disposing of it, exercising the right or letting the right lapse); and

there is no real risk that, under the conditions of the scheme, if you exercise the right, you will forfeit or lose the beneficial interest in the share (other than by disposing of it).

83A-45 Further conditions for reducing amounts included in assessable income

Employment

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest in a company if, when you acquire the interest, you are employed by:

the company; or

a *subsidiary of the company.

Employee share scheme relates only to ordinary shares

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an employee share scheme if, when you acquire the interest, all the ESS interests available for acquisition under the scheme relate to ordinary *shares.

Integrity rule about share trading and investment companies.

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest in a company unless, when you acquire the interest:

the predominant business of the company (whether or not stated in its constituent documents) is the acquisition, sale or holding of *shares, securities or other investments (whether directly or indirectly through one or more companies, partnerships or trusts); and

you are employed by the company; and

you are also employed by any other company that is:

a *subsidiary of the first company; or

(ii) a holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of the first company; or

(iii) a subsidiary of a holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of the first company.

Minimum holding period

(4) This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an *employee share scheme if, at all times during the interest’s *minimum holding period, the scheme is operated so that every acquirer of an ESS interest (the scheme interest) under the scheme is not permitted to dispose of:

the scheme interest; or

a beneficial interest in a *share acquired as a result of the scheme interest;

during the scheme interest’s minimum holding period.

Note: This subsection is taken to apply in the case of a takeover or restructure: see subsection 83A-130(3).

(5) An *ESS interest’s minimum holding period is the period starting when the interest is acquired under the *employee share scheme and ending at the earlier of:

3 years later, or such earlier time as the Commissioner allows if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

the operators of the scheme intended for subsection (4) to apply to the interest during the 3 years after that acquisition of the interest; and

at the earlier time that the Commissioner allows, all *membership interests in the relevant company were disposed of under a particular *scheme; and

when the acquirer of the interest ceases being employed by the relevant employer.

10% limit on shareholding and voting power

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest in a company if, immediately after you acquire the interest:

you do not hold a beneficial interest in more than 10% of the *shares in the company; and

you are not in a position to cast, or to control the casting of, more than 10% of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the company.

For the purposes of subsection (6), you are taken to:

hold a beneficial interest in any *shares in the company that you can acquire under an *ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right to acquire a beneficial interest in such shares; and

be in a position to cast votes as a result of holding that interest in those shares.

Subdivision 83A-C — Deferred inclusion of gain in assessable income

Guide to Subdivision 83A-C

83A-100 What this Subdivision is about

If there is a real risk you might forfeit the share, right or stapled security you acquired under an employee share scheme, you don’t include the discount in your assessable income when you acquired it. Instead, in the first income year you are able to dispose of the share, right or security, your assessable income will include any gain you have made to that time. If 15 years pass, the gain is included in that income year instead.

This deferred taxing point can also apply to:

a share or stapled security you acquire under salary sacrifice arrangements, if you get no more than $5,000 worth of shares under those arrangements; or

a right, if the scheme restricted you immediately disposing of the right, and stated that this Subdivision applies.

Table of sections

Main provisions

83A-105 Application of Subdivision

83A-110 Amount to be included in assessable income

83A-115 ESS deferred taxing point—shares

83A-120 ESS deferred taxing point—rights to acquire shares

83A-125 Tax treatment of ESS interests held after ESS deferred taxing points

Takeovers and restructures

83A-130 Takeovers and restructures

Main provisions

83A-105 Application of Subdivision

Scope of Subdivision

This Subdivision applies, and Subdivision 83A-B does not apply, to an *ESS interest in a company if:

Subdivision 83A-B would, apart from this section, apply to the interest (see section 83A-20); and

after applying section 83A-315, there is still a discount given in relation to the interest; and

section 83A-33 (about start ups) does not reduce the amount to be included in your assessable income in relation to the interest; and

subsections 83A-45(1), (2), (3) and (6) apply to the interest; and

if the interest is a beneficial interest in a *share:

subsection (2) of this section applies to the interest; and

subsection (3) or (4) applies to the interest; and

if the interest is a beneficial interest in a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a share—subsection (3) or (6) applies to the interest.

Note: Subsections 83A-45(1), (2), (3) and (6) contain conditions relating to the following:

your employment;

the types of shares available under the employee share scheme;

share trading and investment companies;

your shareholding and voting power in the company.

Broad availability of schemes

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an employee share scheme if, when you acquire the interest, at least 75% of the permanent employees of your employer who have completed at least 3 years of service (whether continuous or non-continuous) with your employer and who are Australian residents are, or at some earlier time had been, entitled to acquire:

ESS interests under the scheme; or

ESS interests in:

your employer; or

(ii) a holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of your employer;

under another employee share scheme.

Real risk of losing interest or share under the conditions of the scheme

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an employee share scheme if, when you acquire the interest:

if the ESS interest is a beneficial interest in a *share—there is a real risk that, under the conditions of the scheme, you will forfeit or lose the ESS interest (other than by disposing of it); or

if the ESS interest is a beneficial interest in a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a share:

there is a real risk that, under the conditions of the scheme, you will forfeit or lose the ESS interest (other than by disposing of it, exercising the right or letting the right lapse); or

there is a real risk that, under the conditions of the scheme, if you exercise the right, you will forfeit or lose the beneficial interest in the share (other than by disposing of it).

Salary sacrifice arrangement

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an employee share scheme during an income year at a discount if:

the interest is provided:

because you agreed to acquire the interest in return for a reduction in your salary or wages that would not have happened apart from the agreement; or

as part of your remuneration package, in circumstances where it is reasonable to conclude that your salary or wages would be greater if the interest was not made part of that package; and

at the time you acquire the interest:

the discount equals the *market value of the ESS interest; and

all of the ESS interests available for acquisition under the scheme are ESS interests to which subsection (3) applies, beneficial interests in *shares, or both; and

the governing rules of the scheme expressly state that this Subdivision applies to the scheme (subject to the requirements of this Act); and

(c) the total *market value of the *ESS interests in your employer and any holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of your employer:

that you acquire during the year under any employee share scheme or schemes; and

to which both this Subdivision and this subsection apply;

does not exceed $5,000.

For the purposes of paragraph (4)(c), work out the *market value of each *ESS interest as at the time you acquire it.

Note: Regulations made for the purposes of section 83A-315 may substitute a different amount for the market value of the ESS interest.

Scheme’s rules state that this Subdivision applies

This subsection applies to an *ESS interest you acquire under an employee share scheme during an income year at a discount if:

the interest is a beneficial interest in a right; and

at the time you acquired the interest:

the scheme genuinely restricted you immediately disposing of the right; and

the governing rules of the scheme expressly stated that this Subdivision applies to the scheme (subject to the requirements of this Act).

83A-110 Amount to be included in assessable income

Your assessable income for the income year in which the *ESS deferred taxing point for the *ESS interest occurs includes the *market value of the interest at the ESS deferred taxing point, reduced by the *cost base of the interest.

Note: Regulations made for the purposes of section 83A-315 may substitute a different amount for the market value of the ESS interest.

(2) Treat an amount included in your assessable income under subsection (1) as being from a source other than an *Australian source to the extent that it relates to your employment outside Australia.

Note: For the CGT treatment of employee share schemes, see Subdivision 130-D.

83A-115 ESS deferred taxing point—shares

Scope

This section applies if the *ESS interest is a beneficial interest in a *share.

Meaning of ESS deferred taxing point

(2) The ESS deferred taxing point for the *ESS interest is the earlier of the times mentioned in subsections (4) and (6).

(3) However, the ESS deferred taxing point for the *ESS interest is instead the time you dispose of the interest, if that time occurs within 30 days after the time worked out under subsection (2).

No restrictions on disposing of share

The first possible taxing point is the earliest time when:

there is no real risk that, under the conditions of the employee share scheme, you will forfeit or lose the *ESS interest (other than by disposing of it); and

if, at the time you acquired the interest, the scheme genuinely restricted you immediately disposing of the interest—the scheme no longer so restricts you.

Maximum time period for deferral

The 2nd possible taxing point is the end of the 15 year period starting when you acquired the interest.

83A-120 ESS deferred taxing point—rights to acquire shares

Scope

This section applies if the *ESS interest is a beneficial interest in a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a *share.

Meaning of ESS deferred taxing point

(2) The ESS deferred taxing point for the *ESS interest is the earliest of the times mentioned in subsections (4), (6) and (7).

(3) However, the ESS deferred taxing point for the *ESS interest is:

the time you dispose of the ESS interest (other than by exercising the right); or

if you exercise the right—the time you dispose of the beneficial interest in the *share;

if that time occurs within 30 days after the time worked out under subsection (2).

No restrictions on disposing of right

The first possible taxing point is the earliest time when:

you have not exercised the right; and

there is no real risk that, under the conditions of the employee share scheme, you will forfeit or lose the *ESS interest (other than by disposing of it, exercising the right or letting the right lapse); and

if, at the time you acquired the ESS interest, the scheme genuinely restricted you immediately disposing of the ESS interest—the scheme no longer so restricts you.

Maximum time period for deferral

The 2nd possible taxing point is the end of the 15 year period starting when you acquired the interest.

No restrictions on disposing of a share after exercising the right

The 3rd possible taxing point is the earliest time when:

you exercise the right; and

there is no real risk that, under the conditions of the scheme, after exercising the right, you will forfeit or lose the beneficial interest in the *share (other than by disposing of it); and

if, at the time you acquired the ESS interest, the scheme genuinely restricted you immediately disposing of the beneficial interest in the share if you exercised the right—the scheme no longer so restricts you.

83A-125 Tax treatment of ESS interests held after ESS deferred taxing points

For the purposes of this Act (other than this Division), the *ESS interest (and the *share or right of which it forms part) is taken to have been acquired immediately after the *ESS deferred taxing point for the interest for its *market value, unless the ESS deferred taxing point occurs at the time the interest is disposed of.

Takeovers and restructures

Note: Regulations made for the purposes of section 83A-315 may substitute a different amount for the market value of the ESS interest.

83A-130 Takeovers and restructures

Object and scope

The object of this section is to allow this Division to continue to apply if:

at least one of the following applies:

(i) an *arrangement (the takeover) is entered into that is intended to result in a company (the old company) becoming a *100% subsidiary of another company;

(ii) *ESS interests in a company (the old company) acquired under *employee share schemes can reasonably be regarded as having been replaced, wholly or partly, by ESS interests in one or more other companies as a result of a change (the restructure) in the ownership (including the structure of the ownership) of the old company or a *demerger subsidiary of the old company; and

(b) just before the takeover or restructure, you held ESS interests (the old interests) in the old company that you acquired under an employee share scheme.

Treat new interests as continuations of old interests

(2) For the purposes of this Division, treat any *ESS interests (the new interests) in a company (the new company) that you acquire in connection with the takeover or restructure as a continuation of the old interests, to the extent that:

as a result of the arrangement or change, you stop holding the old interests; and

the new interests can reasonably be regarded as matching any of the old interests.

Note: In determining to what extent something can reasonably be regarded as matching any of the old interests, one of the factors to consider is the respective market values of that thing and of the old interests.

Subsection 83A-45(4) (about the minimum holding period) is taken to apply to the *ESS interests.

Subsections (2) and (3) only apply if the new interests relate to ordinary *shares.

Old interest not matched by new interests

For the purposes of this Division, treat yourself as having disposed of the old interests to the extent that, in connection with the takeover or restructure, you acquire anything that:

can reasonably be regarded as matching any of the old interests; but

is not treated by subsection (2) as a continuation of those interests.

Continuation of your employment

For the purposes of this Division, treat your employment by:

the new company; or

a *subsidiary of the new company; or

(c) a holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of the new company; or

(d) a subsidiary of a holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of the new company;

as a continuation of the employment in respect of which you acquired the old interests.

Apportionment of cost base of old interests

Treat yourself as having given, as consideration for the assets mentioned in subsection (8), the amount worked out by apportioning among those assets, according to their respective *market values immediately after the takeover or restructure, the total of:

the *cost bases of the old interests when you stop holding them; and

the cost bases of the assets mentioned in paragraph (8)(b) immediately after the takeover or restructure (ignoring the effect of this subsection).

The assets are:

the things that:

you acquired in connection with the takeover or restructure; and

can reasonably be regarded as matching the old interests;

(including all of the new interests); and

in a case covered by subparagraph (1)(a)(ii)—any *ESS interests in the old company that:

you held just before, and continue to hold just after, the restructure; and

that can reasonably be regarded as matching the old interests.

Exceptions

This section only applies if:

at or about the time you acquire the new interests, you are employed as mentioned in subsection (6); and

at the time you acquire the new interests:

you do not hold a beneficial interest in more than 10% of the *shares in the new company; and

you are not in a position to cast, or to control the casting of, more than 10% of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the new company.

For the purposes of paragraph (9)(b), you are taken to:

hold a beneficial interest in any *shares in the new company that you can acquire under an *ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right to acquire a beneficial interest in such shares; and

be in a position to cast votes as a result of holding that interest in those shares.

Subdivision 83A-D — Deduction for employer

Guide to Subdivision 83A-D

83A-200 What this Subdivision is about

You can deduct an amount for shares, rights or stapled securities you provide to your employees under an employee share scheme if they are eligible for a reduction in their assessable income under section 83A-35. The amount you can deduct is equal to that reduction.

You must defer any deduction you are entitled to for amounts you provide to finance your employees acquiring interests in shares, rights or stapled securities under an employee share scheme until the employees have actually acquired those interests.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

83A-205 Deduction for employer

83A-210 Timing of general deductions

Operative provisions

83A-205 Deduction for employer

You can deduct an amount for an income year if:

during the year you provided one or more *ESS interests to an individual under an employee share scheme; and

you did so as:

the employer of the individual; or

(ii) a holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of the employer of the individual; and

section 83A-35 applies to reduce the amount included in the individual’s assessable income under subsection 83A-25(1) in relation to some or all of the interests.

Disregard paragraph 83A-35(2)(b) (income test) for the purposes of paragraph (1)(c) of this section.

The amount of the deduction is the amount of the reduction mentioned in paragraph (1)(c).

Deduction to be apportioned if interest provided by multiple entities

The amount of the deduction worked out under subsection (3) must be apportioned between 2 or more entities on a reasonable basis if the entities jointly provide an *ESS interest for which an amount can be deducted under subsection (1).

83A-210 Timing of general deductions

If:

at a particular time, you provide another entity with money or other property:

under an arrangement; and

(ii) for the purpose of enabling an individual (the ultimate beneficiary) to acquire, directly or indirectly, an *ESS interest under an *employee share scheme in relation to the ultimate beneficiary’s employment (including past or prospective employment); and

(b) that particular time occurs before the time (the acquisition time) the ultimate beneficiary acquires the *ESS interest;

then, for the purpose of determining the income year (if any) in which you can deduct an amount in respect of the provision of the money or other property, you are taken to have provided the money or other property at the acquisition time.

Subdivision 83A-E — Miscellaneous

Table of sections

83A-305 Acquisition by associates

83A-310 Forfeiture etc. of ESS interest

83A-315 Market value of ESS interest

83A-320 Interests in a trust

83A-325 Application of Division to relationships similar to employment

83A-330 Application of Division to ceasing employment

83A-335 Application of Division to stapled securities

83A-340 Application of Division to indeterminate rights

83A-305 Acquisition by associates

(1) If an *associate (other than an *employee share trust) of an individual acquires an *ESS interest in relation to the individual’s employment (including past or prospective employment), then, for the purposes of this Division:

treat the interest as having being acquired by the individual (instead of the associate); and

treat any circumstance, right or obligation existing or not existing in relation to the interest in relation to the associate as existing or not existing in relation to the individual; and

treat anything done or not done by or in relation to the associate in relation to the interest as being done or not done by or in relation to the individual.

Example 1: The following are attributed to the employee, rather than to the associate:

the associate’s voting rights;

the associate’s ability or inability to dispose of the ESS interest;

whether there is a real risk that the associate may lose the ESS interest;

the associate’s cost base for the ESS interest.

Example 2: If the associate disposes of the ESS interest, the employee is taken to have disposed of the ESS interest instead.

For the purposes of subsections 83A-45(6) and (7), subsection (1) of this section also applies if the associate acquired the *ESS interest otherwise than in relation to the individual’s employment.

83A-310 Forfeiture etc. of ESS interest

This Division (apart from this Subdivision) is taken never to have applied in relation to an *ESS interest acquired by an individual under an employee share scheme if:

disregarding this section, an amount is included in the individual’s assessable income under this Division in relation to the interest; and

either:

the individual forfeits the interest; or

in the case of an ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right—the individual forfeits or loses the interest (without having disposed of the interest or exercised the right); and

the forfeiture or loss is not the result of:

a choice made by the individual (other than a choice to which subsection (2) applies); or

a condition of the scheme that has the direct effect of protecting (wholly or partly) the individual against a fall in the *market value of the interest.

This subsection applies to the following choices by the individual:

a choice to cease particular employment;

in the case of an *ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right:

a choice not to exercise the right before it lapsed; or

a choice to allow the right to be cancelled.

83A-315 Market value of ESS interest

Whenever this Division (other than section 83A-20) uses the *market value of an *ESS interest, instead use the amount specified in the regulations for the purposes of this section in relation to the interest, if the regulations specify such an amount.

To avoid doubt, apply the rule in subsection (1) to the *market value component of any calculation for the purposes of this Division that involves market value.

Example: If the regulations specify an amount in relation to an ESS interest, use that amount instead of the market value of the interest in working out:

whether there is a discount given in relation to interest; and

if so—the amount of the discount.

83A-320 Interests in a trust

This section applies if, at a time:

you hold an interest in a trust whose assets include *shares; and

that interest corresponds to a particular number of the shares (even if the interest does not correspond to particular shares).

For the purposes of this Division, treat yourself as holding at that time a beneficial interest in each of a number of the *shares included in the assets of the trust equal to the number mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

If there are 2 or more classes of *shares included in the assets of the trust, this section operates separately in relation to each class as if the shares in that class were all the shares included in the assets of the trust.

This section applies to rights to acquire beneficial interests in *shares in the same way it applies to shares.

Note: For the CGT treatment of employee share schemes, see Subdivision 130-D.

83A-325 Application of Division to relationships similar to employment

This Division applies to an individual covered by column 1 of an item in the table as if:

he or she were employed by the entity referred to in column 2 of that item; and

the thing referred to column 3 of that item constituted that employment.

83A-330 Application of Division to ceasing employment

For the purposes of this Division, you are treated as ceasing employment when you are no longer employed by any of the following:

your employer in that employment;

(b) a holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of your employer;

a *subsidiary of your employer;

(d) a *subsidiary of a holding company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) of your employer.

83A-335 Application of Division to stapled securities

This Division applies in relation to a stapled security in the same way as it applies in relation to a *share in a company, if at least one of the *ownership interests that are stapled together to form the stapled security is a share in the company.

Note: This means the Division also applies to rights to acquire such a stapled security in the same way it applies to rights to acquire a share.

This Division applies in relation to a stapled security in the same way as it applies in relation to an ordinary *share in a company, if at least one of the *ownership interests that are stapled together to form the stapled security is an ordinary share in the company.

For the purposes of this Division, in relation to a stapled security or right to acquire a beneficial interest in a stapled security, a company is taken to include (as part of the company) each *stapled entity for the stapled security, if at least one of the *ownership interests that are stapled together to form the stapled security is a *share in the company.

83A-340 Application of Division to indeterminate rights

This section applies if:

you acquire a beneficial interest in a right; and

the right later becomes a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a *share.

Example 1: You acquire a right to acquire, at a future time:

shares with a specified total value, rather than a specified number of shares; or

an indeterminate number of shares.

Example 2: You acquire a right under which the provider must provide you with either ESS interests or cash, whichever the provider chooses.

This Division applies as if the right had always been a right to acquire the beneficial interest in the *share.

Part 2-42 — Personal services income

Division 84 — Introduction

Guide to Part 2-42

84-1 What this Part is about

This Part is about 2 issues relating to personal services income.

Division 85 limits the entitlements of individuals to deductions relating to their personal services income.

Division 86 sets out the tax consequences of individuals’ personal services income being diverted to other entities (often called alienation of the income).

These Divisions do not affect individuals or other entities that conduct personal services businesses. Division 87 defines personal services businesses.

Table of sections

84-5 Meaning of personal services income

84-10 This Part does not imply that individuals are employees

Operative provisions

Note: This Part may not apply until the 2002-03 income year to participants in the prescribed payments system on 13 April 2000: see item 26 of Schedule 1 to the New Business Tax System (Alienation of Personal Services Income) Act 2000.

84-5 Meaning of personal services income

(1) Your *ordinary income or *statutory income, or the ordinary income or statutory income of any other entity, is your personal services income if the income is mainly a reward for your personal efforts or skills (or would mainly be such a reward if it was your income).

Example 1: NewIT Pty. Ltd. provides computer programming services, but Ron does all the work involved in providing those services. Ron uses the clients’ equipment and software to do the work. NewIT’s ordinary income from providing the services is Ron’s personal services income because it is a reward for his personal efforts or skills.

Example 2: Trux Pty. Ltd. owns one semi-trailer, and Tom is the only person who drives it. Trux’s ordinary income from transporting goods is not Tom’s personal services income because it is produced mainly by use of the semi-trailer, and not mainly as a reward for Tom’s personal efforts or skills.

Example 3: Jim works as an accountant for a large accounting firm that employs many accountants. None of the firm’s ordinary income or statutory income is Jim’s personal services income because it is produced mainly by the firm’s business structure, and not mainly as a reward for Jim’s personal efforts or skills.

Only individuals can have personal services income.

This section applies whether the income is for doing work or is for producing a result.

The fact that the income is payable under a contract does not stop the income being mainly a reward for your personal efforts or skills.

84-10 This Part does not imply that individuals are employees

The application of this Part to an individual does not imply, for the purposes of any Australian law or any instrument made under an Australian law, that the individual is an employee.

Division 85 — Deductions relating to personal services income

Guide to Division 85

85-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out amounts, relating to personal services income, that an individual cannot deduct. In particular, deductions that are unavailable to an employee are similarly unavailable to an individual who has personal services income and who is not an employee.

However, this Division does not apply if the individual is conducting a personal services business or receives the income as an employee or office holder.

Table of sections

85-5 Object of this Division

85-10 Deductions for non-employees relating to personal services income

85-15 Deductions for rent, mortgage interest, rates and land tax

85-20 Deductions for payments to associates etc.

85-25 Deductions for superannuation for associates

85-30 Exception: personal services businesses

85-35 Exception: employees, office holders and religious practitioners

85-40 Application of Subdivision 900-B to individuals who are not employees

Operative provisions

85-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to ensure that individuals who are not conducting *personal services businesses cannot deduct certain amounts (such as amounts that employees cannot deduct).

Note: This Division also affects the extent to which a personal services entity is entitled to deductions relating to gaining or producing an individual’s personal services income: see section 86-60.

85-10 Deductions for non-employees relating to personal services income

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount to the extent that it relates to gaining or producing that part of your ordinary income or statutory income that is your personal services income if:

the income is not payable to you as an employee; and

you would not be able to deduct the amount under this Act if the income were payable to you as an employee.

Example: Ruth is an architect who works as an independent contractor for one firm. She is not conducting a personal services business. On most days she travels from her home to the business premises of the firm, where she does her work. She also has a home office, where she does some of her work.

This section confirms that Ruth cannot deduct her expenses of travelling between her home and the firm’s premises because she could not deduct them if she were an employee.

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting an amount to the extent that it relates to:

gaining work; or

Examples: Advertising, tendering and quoting for work.

insuring against loss of your income or your income earning capacity; or

Examples: Sickness, accident and disability insurance.

insuring against liability arising from your acts or omissions in the course of earning income; or

Examples: Public liability insurance and professional indemnity insurance.

engaging an entity that is not your associate to perform work; or

engaging your associate to perform work that forms part of the principal work for which you gain or produce your personal services income; or

contributing to a fund in order to obtain *superannuation benefits for yourself or for your *SIS dependants in the event of your death; or

Note: For deductions for superannuation contributions: see Subdivision 290-C.

meeting your obligations under a *workers’ compensation law to pay premiums, contributions or similar payments or to make payments to an employee in respect of compensable work-related trauma; or

meeting your obligations, or exercising your rights, under the GST law.

85-15 Deductions for rent, mortgage interest, rates and land tax

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount of rent, mortgage interest, rates or land tax:

for some or all of your residence; or

for some or all of your associate’s residence;

to the extent that the amount relates to gaining or producing your personal services income.

85-20 Deductions for payments to associates etc.

You cannot deduct under this Act:

any payment you make to your associate; or

any amount you incur arising from an obligation you have to your associate;

to the extent that the payment or amount relates to gaining or producing your personal services income.

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a payment or amount to the extent that it relates to engaging your associate to perform work that forms part of the principal work for which you gain or produce your personal services income.

An amount or payment that you cannot deduct because of this section is neither assessable income nor exempt income of your associate.

85-25 Deductions for superannuation for associates

You cannot deduct under this Act a contribution you make to a fund or an RSA to provide for *superannuation benefits payable for your associate, to the extent that the associate’s work for you relates to gaining or producing your personal services income.

Subsection (1) does not stop you deducting a contribution to the extent that your associate’s performance of work forms part of the principal work for which you gain or produce your personal services income.

However, if subsection (2) applies, your deduction cannot exceed the amount you would have to contribute, for the benefit of the associate, to a complying superannuation fund or an RSA in order to ensure that you did not have any individual final superannuation guarantee shortfalls for the associate and any *QE days in the income year.

(4) To work out the amount you would have to contribute under subsection (3), assume under the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 that your payments of qualifying earnings (within the meaning of that Act) to the associate do not include any amounts that section 85-10 or 85-20 of this Act would prevent you from deducting.

Note: See paragraph 85-10(2)(e) for deductions relating to employment of associates.

85-30 Exception: personal services businesses

This Division does not apply to an amount, payment or contribution to the extent that the amount, payment or contribution relates to income from you conducting a *personal services business.

85-35 Exception: employees, office holders and religious practitioners

This Division does not apply to an amount, payment or contribution to the extent that the amount, payment or contribution relates to personal services income that you receive as:

an employee; or

(b) an individual referred to in paragraph 12-45(1)(a), (b), (c), (d) or (e) (about payments to office holders) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

(2) This Division does not apply to an amount, payment or contribution to the extent that the amount, payment or contribution relates to a payment referred to in section 12-47 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (payments to *religious practitioners).

85-40 Application of Subdivision 900-B to individuals who are not employees

This Division does not have the effect of applying Subdivision 900-B (about substantiating work expenses) to an individual who is not an employee.

Division 86 — Alienation of personal services income

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 86

86-A General

86-B Entitlement to deductions

Guide to Division 86

86-1 What this Division is about

Income from the rendering of your personal services is treated as your assessable income if it is the income of another entity and is not promptly paid to you as salary.

However, this does not apply if the other entity is conducting a personal services business.

There are limits to the other entity’s entitlement to deductions to offset against the amount treated as your income.

86-5 A simple description of what this Division does

This diagram shows an example of a simple arrangement for the alienation of personal services income.

Note 1: Solid lines indicate actual payments between the parties. Dotted lines indicate other interactions between the parties.

Note 2: This Division also applies to different and more complex arrangements.

This Division has the effect of attributing the personal services entity’s income from the personal services to the individual who performed them (unless the income is promptly paid to the individual as salary). Certain deduction entitlements of the personal services entity can reduce the amount of the attribution.

Subdivision 86-A — General

Table of sections

86-10 Object of this Division

86-15 Effect of obtaining personal services income through a personal services entity

86-20 Offsetting the personal services entity’s deductions against personal services income

86-25 Apportionment of entity maintenance deductions among several individuals

86-27 Deduction for net personal services income loss

86-30 Assessable income etc. of the personal services entity

86-35 Later payments of, or entitlements to, personal services income to be disregarded for income tax purposes

86-40 Salary payments shortly after an income year

86-10 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to ensure that individuals cannot reduce or defer their income tax (and other liabilities) by alienating their personal services income through companies, partnerships or trusts that are not conducting *personal services businesses.

Note: The general anti-avoidance provisions of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 may still apply to cases of alienation of personal services income that fall outside this Division.

86-15 Effect of obtaining personal services income through a personal services entity

Amounts included in your assessable income

Your assessable income includes an amount of ordinary income or statutory income of a personal services entity that is your personal services income.

Example: Continuing example 1 in section 84-5: Assume that NewIT only provides services to one client. Ron’s assessable income includes ordinary income of NewIT from providing the computer programming services, because the income is Ron’s personal services income.

Note: The amount included in your assessable income can be reduced by certain deductions to which the personal services entity is entitled: see section 86-20.

(2) A personal services entity is a company, partnership or trust whose *ordinary income or *statutory income includes the *personal services income of one or more individuals.

Exception: personal services businesses

This section does not apply if that amount is income from the personal services entity conducting a *personal services business.

Note: Even if the entity is conducting a personal services business, it is possible that some of its income is not income from conducting that business.

Exception: amounts promptly paid to you as salary or wages

This section does not apply to the extent that:

the personal services entity pays that amount to you, as an employee, as salary or wages; and

the payment is made before the end of the 14th day after the *PAYG payment period during which the amount became ordinary income or statutory income of the entity.

Note: The entity is obliged to withhold amounts from salary or wages paid before the end of that day: see section 12-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Exception: exempt income etc.

This section only applies to the extent that that amount would be assessable income of the personal services entity if this Division did not apply.

Example: If the entity’s income includes an amount that is your personal services income for a service on which GST is payable, the amount included in your assessable income will not include the GST, because the GST is neither assessable income nor exempt income of the entity: see section 17-5.

86-20 Offsetting the personal services entity’s deductions against personal services income

The amount of your personal services income included in your assessable income under section 86-15 may be reduced (but not below nil) by the amount of certain deductions to which the personal services entity is entitled.

Note 1: Subdivision 86-B limits a personal services entity’s entitlement to deductions.

Note 2: If the amount of the deductions exceeds the amount of the personal services income, a deduction for the excess is available to you under section 86-27. The personal services entity cannot deduct the amount of the excess: see section 86-87.

Use this method statement to work out whether, and by how much, the amount is reduced:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out, for the income year, the amount of any deductions (other than *entity maintenance deductions or deductions for amounts of salary or wages paid to you) to which the *personal services entity is entitled that are deductions relating to your *personal services income.

Step 2. Work out, for the income year, the amount of any *entity maintenance deductions to which the *personal services entity is entitled.

Step 3. Work out the *personal services entity’s assessable income for that income year, disregarding any income it receives that is your *personal services income or the personal services income of anyone else.

Step 4. Subtract the amount under step 3 from the amount under step 2.

Step 5. If the amount under step 4 is greater than zero, the amount of the reduction under subsection (1) is the sum of the amounts under steps 1 and 4.

Step 6. If the amount under step 4 is not greater than zero, the amount of the reduction under subsection (1) is the amount under step 1.

• $120,000 of NewIT’s income is Ron’s personal services income;

• NewIT has deductions (including superannuation contributions) of $50,000 relating to Ron’s personal services income (step 1);

• NewIT has entity maintenance deductions of $8,000 (step 2);

• NewIT has investments that produce income. NewIT’s assessable income, disregarding Ron’s or anyone else’s personal services income, is $20,000 (step 3).

Because the step 4 amount is less than zero (-$12,000), step 5 does not apply and, under step 6, the amount of the reduction is $50,000. Therefore the amount included in Ron’s assessable income is:

Note 1: Step 4 ensures that, before entity maintenance deductions can contribute to the reduction, they are first exhausted against any income of the entity that is not personal services income.

Note 2: If the personal services entity receives another individual’s personal services income, see section 86-25.

Example 1: Continuing example 1 in section 84-5: Assume these additional facts:

Example 2: Assume, as an alternative set of facts, that NewIT’s assessable income under step 3 was only $2,000.

The step 4 amount would have been $6,000, and, under step 5, the amount of the reduction would have been $56,000 (adding the amounts under steps 1 and 4). The amount included in Ron’s assessable income would then have been:

Note: The personal services entity’s deductions that do not relate to your personal services income and that are not entity maintenance deductions cannot reduce the amount included in your assessable income under section 86-15.

86-25 Apportionment of entity maintenance deductions among several individuals

If, in the income year:

the amount worked out under step 4 of the method statement in section 86-20 is greater than zero; and

Note: This happens if the entity has entity maintenance deductions that form some or all of the reduction under section 86-20.

the ordinary income or statutory income of the personal services entity includes another individual’s personal services income (as well as your personal services income); and

the other individual’s personal services income is included in the other individual’s assessable income under section 86-15;

the amount worked out under step 4 is taken to be:

where:

original step 4 amount is the amount that would be the amount worked out under step 4 if this section did not apply.

total personal services income is the sum of all the amounts of personal services income (whether your personal services income or someone else’s) that are included in the personal services entity’s ordinary income or statutory income for the income year.

your personal services income is the sum of all the amounts of your personal services income that are included in the personal services entity’s ordinary income or statutory income for the income year.

Because NewIT now receives the personal services income of someone else, Ron’s step 4 amount is reduced as follows:

Example: Continuing example 2 in section 86-20: Assume that Robyn, another computer consultant, joined NewIT, and NewIT’s ordinary income from providing the services also includes Robyn’s personal services income of $168,000.

Under step 5 of the method statement in section 86-20, the amount of the reduction under that section is therefore $52,500, and the amount included in Ron’s assessable income is $67,500.

86-27 Deduction for net personal services income loss

If your personal services deduction amount exceeds your unreduced personal services income, then you can deduct the excess amount. For this purpose:

(a) your personal services deduction amount is the amount of deductions relating to your *personal services income worked out under step 1 of the method statement in section 86-20, increased by the amount (if greater than zero) worked out under step 4 of the method statement; and

(b) your unreduced personal services income is the personal services income that would have been included in your assessable income for the income year if there had not been any reduction under section 86-20.

86-30 Assessable income etc. of the personal services entity

*Ordinary income or statutory income of the personal services entity is neither assessable income nor exempt income of the entity, to the extent that it is personal services income included in your assessable income under section 86-15.

Note: Subsection 118-20(4) prevents this income being treated as a capital gain.

86-35 Later payments of, or entitlements to, personal services income to be disregarded for income tax purposes

To the extent that a payment by the personal services entity, or by your associate, is a payment to you or any of your associates of:

personal services income included in your assessable income under section 86-15; or

any other amount that is attributable to that income;

the payment:

is neither assessable income nor exempt income of the entity receiving it; and

Note: Subsection 118-20(4) prevents this income being treated as a capital gain.

is not an amount that the entity making it can deduct.

Note: Section 118-65 prevents this amount being treated as a capital loss.

Example: Continuing example 2 in section 86-20: Assume that NewIT had paid Jill, Ron’s wife, an amount for work that is not the principal work of NewIT. The payment is made from money already included in Ron’s assessable income under section 86-15.

The amount is neither assessable income nor exempt income of Jill, and NewIT cannot deduct the amount.

To the extent that you are entitled, or any of your *associates are entitled, to a share of the net income of the personal services entity, or of any of your associates, and that income is:

personal services income included in your assessable income under section 86-15; or

any other amount that is attributable to that income;

that share is neither assessable income nor exempt income of the entity receiving it or entitled to receive it.

86-40 Salary payments shortly after an income year

If:

before the end of 14 July in a particular income year, you receive, as salary or wages, personal services income of yours from the personal services entity; and

failure to make the payment before the end of 14 July would have resulted in an amount of income being included in your assessable income under section 86-15 for the preceding income year;

you are taken to have received the payment on 30 June of that preceding income year.

The $20,000 that Ron receives is assessable income for the income year ended on 30 June 2001.

Example: Continuing example 2 in section 86-20: Assume that NewIT is a small withholder for PAYG withholding purposes, and its PAYG payment period covering April 2001 to June 2001 is the quarter ending on 30 June 2001. NewIT’s income for that period (after taking into account any reductions under sections 86-20 and 86-25) includes $20,000 that is Ron’s personal services income, and NewIT pays this to Ron on 12 July 2001.

However, this section does not affect the time at which the personal services entity is treated as having paid the salary or wages.

Note 1: Therefore neither the timing of the entity’s deduction for the payment, nor the timing of the obligation to withhold amounts under section 12-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, is affected.

Note 2: However, these payments are treated as relating to the preceding income year for the purposes of the rules relating to payment summaries, PAYG credits and PAYG withholding non-compliance tax (see Subdivisions 16-C, 18-A and 18-D in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953).

Subdivision 86-B — Entitlement to deductions

Table of sections

86-60 General rule for deduction entitlements of personal services entities

86-65 Entity maintenance deductions

86-70 Car expenses

86-75 Superannuation

86-80 Salary or wages promptly paid

86-85 Deduction entitlements of personal services entities for amounts included in an individual’s assessable income

86-87 Personal services entity cannot deduct net personal services income loss

86-90 Application of Divisions 28 and 900 to personal services entities

86-60 General rule for deduction entitlements of personal services entities

A personal services entity cannot deduct under this Act an amount to the extent that it relates to gaining or producing an individual’s personal services income, unless:

the individual could have deducted the amount under this Act if the circumstances giving rise to the entity’s entitlement to deduct the amount had applied instead to the individual; or

Note: In particular, Division 85 specifies limits on an individual’s entitlements to deductions relating to the individual’s personal services income.

the entity receives the individual’s personal services income in the course of conducting a *personal services business.

86-65 Entity maintenance deductions

Section 86-60 does not stop a personal services entity deducting an amount to the extent that it is an entity maintenance deduction.

Note: See section 86-25 for how entity maintenance deductions are offset against a personal services entity’s income.

(2) Each of these is an entity maintenance deduction:

any fee or charge payable by the entity for opening, operating or closing an account with an *ADI;

any deduction under section 25-5 (about tax-related expenses);

(c) any loss or outgoing incurred in relation to preparation or lodgment of any document the entity is required to lodge under the Corporations Act 2001;

any fee or charge payable by the entity to an *Australian government agency for any licence, permission, approval, authorisation, registration or certification (however described) that is granted or given under an Australian law.

However, paragraph (2)(c) does not include any payment that the entity makes to an associate.

86-70 Car expenses

Cars used solely for business

Section 86-60 does not stop a personal services entity deducting a car expense for a car of which there is no *private use.

Other cars

Section 86-60 does not stop a personal services entity deducting:

a car expense; or

(b) an amount of tax payable under the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986 for a *car fringe benefit;

for a car of which there is *private use. However, there cannot be, at the same time, more than one car for which such deductions can arise in relation to gaining or producing the same individual’s personal services income.

If there is more than one car to which subsection (2) could apply at the same time, the entity must choose the car to which subsection (2) applies at that time. The choice remains in effect until the entity ceases to *hold that car.

Example: Continuing example 2 in section 86-20: Assume that NewIT provides 3 cars to Ron. Car 1 is used solely for business purposes and cars 2 and 3 are used for private purposes.

NewIT can deduct all the car expenses it incurs for car 1. It can also deduct all the car expenses it incurs for its choice of either car 2 or car 3, as well as the fringe benefits tax it pays for that car. However, it cannot deduct any car expenses or fringe benefits tax for the car that it does not choose.

Note: If car expenses for a car are not deductible because of section 86-60, the car benefit being provided is an exempt benefit for the purposes of fringe benefits tax: see subsection 8(4) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

86-75 Superannuation

Section 86-60 does not stop a personal services entity deducting a contribution the entity makes to a fund or an RSA for the purpose of making provision for *superannuation benefits payable for an individual whose personal services income is included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income.

However, if:

the individual performs less than 20% (by *market value) of the entity’s principal work; and

the individual is an associate of another individual whose personal services income is included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income;

the entity’s deduction cannot exceed the amount it would have to contribute, for the benefit of the individual, to a complying superannuation fund or an RSA in order to ensure that it did not have any individual final superannuation guarantee shortfalls for the individual and any *QE days in the income year.

(3) To work out the amount the entity would have to contribute under subsection (2), assume under the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 that the entity’s payments of qualifying earnings (within the meaning of that Act) to the individual do not include any amounts that section 86-60 of this Act would prevent the entity from deducting.

Note: Section 86-60 will apply the limitations under sections 85-10 and 85-20 on an individual’s entitlement to deductions (but see paragraph 85-10(2)(e) on employment of associates).

86-80 Salary or wages promptly paid

Section 86-60 does not stop a personal services entity deducting an amount for salary or wages it pays to the individual referred to in that section before the end of the 14th day after the *PAYG payment period during which the amount became ordinary income or statutory income of the entity.

86-85 Deduction entitlements of personal services entities for amounts included in an individual’s assessable income

The fact that a personal services entity:

incurs an amount in gaining or producing an individual’s assessable income; or

uses a depreciating asset, or has it installed ready for use, for the *purpose of producing assessable income of an individual;

does not stop the entity deducting the loss or outgoing, or deducting an amount for the decline in value of the asset, under this Act if:

the entity incurs the amount in gaining or producing, or uses or installs the depreciating asset for the purpose of producing, its ordinary income or statutory income; and

the income is included in the individual’s assessable income under section 86-15.

86-87 Personal services entity cannot deduct net personal services income loss

The total amount of the deductions to which a personal services entity is entitled for an income year is reduced by the amount of any deduction that an individual, whose personal services income is ordinary or statutory income of the entity for that income year, is entitled to under section 86-27.

86-90 Application of Divisions 28 and 900 to personal services entities

This Division does not have the effect of applying Division 28 (about car expenses) or Division 900 (about substantiation rules) to a personal services entity.

Note: Divisions 28 and 900 can still apply to a personal services entity that is a partnership: see subsections 28-10(2) and 900-5(2).

Division 87 — Personal services businesses

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 87

87-A General

87-B Personal services business determinations

Guide to Division 87

87-1 What this Division is about

Divisions 85 and 86 do not apply to personal services income that is income from conducting a personal services business.

It is not intended that the Divisions apply to independent contractors.

A personal services business exists if there is a personal services business determination or if one or more of 4 tests for what is a personal services business are met.

Regardless of how much of your personal services income is paid from one source, you can self-assess against the results test to determine whether you are an independent contractor. The results test is based on the traditional tests for determining independent contractors and it is intended that it apply accordingly.

However, you cannot “self-assess” whether you meet any of the other 3 tests if 80% or more of your personal services income is from one source. In these cases, you need a personal services business determination in order to be treated as conducting a personal services business.

87-5 Diagram showing the operation of this Division

This diagram shows how this Division operates to ascertain whether personal services income is income from conducting a personal services business.

Subdivision 87-A — General

Table of sections

87-10 Object of this Division

87-15 What is a personal services business?

87-18 The results test for a personal services business

87-20 The unrelated clients test for a personal services business

87-25 The employment test for a personal services business

87-30 The business premises test for a personal services business

87-35 Personal services income from Australian government agencies

87-40 Application of this Division to certain agents

87-10 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to define *personal services businesses in a way that ensures that it covers genuine businesses but not situations that are merely arrangements for dealing with the personal services income of individuals.

87-15 What is a personal services business?

(1) An individual or *personal services entity conducts a personal services business if:

for an individual—a personal services business determination is in force relating to the individual’s personal services income; or

for a personal services entity—a personal services business determination is in force relating to an individual whose personal services income is included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income; or

in any case—the individual or entity meets at least one of the 4 *personal services business tests in the income year for which the question whether the individual or entity is conducting a personal services business is in issue.

Note 1: For personal services business determinations, see Subdivision 87-B.

Note 2: Under subsection (3), the personal services business tests, apart from the results test under section 87-18, do not apply if 80% or more of your personal services income is from one source (but they can still be used in deciding whether to make a personal services business determination).

(2) The 4 personal services business tests are:

the results test under section 87-18; and

the unrelated clients test under section 87-20; and

the employment test under section 87-25; and

the business premises test under section 87-30.

However, if 80% or more of an individual’s personal services income (not including income referred to in subsection (4)) during an income year is income from the same entity (or one entity and its *associates), and:

the individual’s personal services income is not included in a personal services entity’s ordinary income or statutory income during an income year, and the individual does not meet the results test under section 87-18 in that income year; or

the individual’s personal services income is included in a personal services entity’s ordinary income or statutory income during an income year, and the entity does not, in relation to the individual, meet the results test under section 87-18 in that income year;

the individual’s personal services income is not taken to be from conducting a *personal services business unless:

when the personal services income is gained or produced, a personal services business determination is in force relating to the individual’s personal services income; and

if the determination was made on the application of a personal services entity—the individual’s personal services income is income from the entity conducting the personal services business.

Note: Sections 87-35 and 87-40 affect the operation of subsection (3) in relation to Australian government agencies and certain agents.

Subsection (3) does not apply to income:

that the individual receives as an employee; or

(b) that the individual receives as an individual referred to in paragraph 12-45(1)(a), (b), (c), (d) or (e) (payments to office holders) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; or

to the extent that it is a payment referred to in section 12-47 (payments to *religious practitioners) in that Schedule.

87-18 The results test for a personal services business

An individual meets the results test in an income year if, in relation to at least 75% of the individual’s personal services income (not including income referred to in subsection (2)) during the income year:

the income is for producing a result; and

the individual is required to supply the plant and equipment, or tools of trade, needed to perform the work from which the individual produces the result; and

the individual is, or would be, liable for the cost of rectifying any defect in the work performed.

Paragraph (1)(a) does not apply to income:

that the individual receives as an employee; or

(b) that the individual receives as an individual referred to in paragraph 12-45(1)(a), (b), (c), (d) or (e) (payments to office holders) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; or

to the extent that it is a payment referred to in section 12-47 (payments to *religious practitioners) in that Schedule.

A personal services entity meets the results test in an income year if, in relation to at least 75% of the personal services income of one or more individuals that is included in the personal services entity’s ordinary income or statutory income during the income year:

the income is for producing a result; and

the personal services entity is required to supply the plant and equipment, or tools of trade, needed to perform the work from which the personal services entity produces the result; and

the personal services entity is, or would be, liable for the cost of rectifying any defect in the work performed.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c) or (3)(a), (b) or (c), regard is to be had to whether it is the custom or practice, when work of the kind in question is performed by an entity other than an employee:

for the personal services income from the work to be for producing a result; and

for the entity to be required to supply the plant and equipment, or tools of trade, needed to perform the work; and

for the entity to be liable for the cost of rectifying any defect in the work performed;

as the case requires.

87-20 The unrelated clients test for a personal services business

An individual or a personal services entity meets the unrelated clients test in an income year if:

during the year, the individual or personal services entity gains or produces income from providing services to 2 or more entities that are not *associates of each other, and are not associates of the individual or of the personal services entity; and

the services are provided as a direct result of the individual or personal services entity making offers or invitations (for example, by advertising), to the public at large or to a section of the public, to provide the services.

Note: Sections 87-35 and 87-40 affect the operation of paragraph (1)(a) in relation to Australian government agencies and certain agents.

(2) The individual or *personal services entity is not treated, for the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), as having made offers or invitations to provide services merely by being available to provide the services through an entity that conducts a *business of arranging for persons to provide services directly for clients of the entity.

87-25 The employment test for a personal services business

An individual meets the employment test in an income year if:

the individual engages one or more entities (other than *associates of the individual that are not individuals) to perform work; and

that entity performs, or those entities together perform, at least 20% (by *market value) of the individual’s principal work for that year.

A personal services entity meets the employment test in an income year if:

the entity engages one or more other entities to perform work, other than:

individuals whose personal services income is included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income; or

*associates of the entity that are not individuals; and

that other entity performs, or those other entities together perform, at least 20% (by *market value) of the entity’s principal work for that year.

If the personal services entity is a partnership, work that a partner performs is taken, for the purposes of subsection (2), to be work that the personal services entity engages another entity to perform.

An individual or a personal services entity also meets the employment test in an income year if, for at least half the income year, the individual or entity has one or more apprentices.

87-30 The business premises test for a personal services business

An individual or a personal services entity meets the business premises test in an income year if, at all times during the income year, the individual or entity maintains and uses business premises:

at which the individual or entity mainly conducts activities from which personal services income is gained or produced; and

of which the individual or entity has exclusive use; and

that are physically separate from any premises that the individual or entity, or any associate of the individual or entity, uses for private purposes; and

that are physically separate from the premises of the entity to which the individual or entity provides services and from the premises of any associate of the entity to which the individual or entity provides services.

The individual or entity need not maintain and use the same business premises throughout the income year.

87-35 Personal services income from Australian government agencies

*Australian government agencies are not treated as *associates of each other for the purposes of subsection 87-15(3) and paragraph 87-20(1)(a).

Example: You receive 60% of your personal services income from a Department of a State government and 40% of your personal services income from a corporation in which that State has a majority shareholding.

You are not treated as if 80% or more of your personal services income is income from the same entity and that entity’s associates, and therefore you will not need a personal services business determination to satisfy subsection 87-15(3).

In addition, you satisfy the first limb (but not necessarily the second limb) of the unrelated clients test in subsection 87-20(1), because you receive your personal services income from 2 entities that are not treated as associates of each other.

(2) Each Agency within the meaning of the Public Service Act 1999:

is treated as a separate entity; and

is not treated as an associate of any other such Agency, or of any *Australian government agency;

for the purposes of subsection 87-15(3) and paragraph 87-20(1)(a).

You are not treated as if 80% or more of your personal services income is income from the same entity, or from the same entity and that entity’s associates, and therefore you will not need a personal services business determination to satisfy subsection 87-15(3).

In addition, you satisfy the first limb (but not necessarily the second limb) of the unrelated clients test in subsection 87-20(1), because you receive your personal services income from 2 bodies that are treated as separate entities and that are not treated as associates of each other.

Example: You receive 70% of your personal services income from the Commonwealth Department of Treasury and 30% of your personal services income from the Australian Taxation Office (neither body has a legal identity separate from the Commonwealth Government).

(3) Each part of the government of a State or Territory, and each part of an authority of the State or Territory, that has, under a law of the State or Territory, a status corresponding to an Agency within the meaning of the Public Service Act 1999:

is treated as a separate entity; and

is not treated as an associate of any other part of such a government or authority, or of any *Australian government agency;

for the purposes of subsection 87-15(3) and paragraph 87-20(1)(a).

87-40 Application of this Division to certain agents

Object of this section

The object of this section is to modify the operation of this Division for *agents who bear entrepreneurial risk in the way they provide services.

Agent rules do not apply

The rules in section 960-105 (Certain entities treated as agents) do not apply to this section.

Agents covered by this section

Subsection 87-15(3) and section 87-20 apply, in the manner specified in this section, to an individual or personal services entity if:

(a) the individual or personal services entity is an *agent of another entity (the principal) but not the principal’s employee; and

(b) the agent receives income from the principal that is for services that the agent provides to other entities (customers) on the principal’s behalf; and

at least 75% of that income is commissions, or fees, based on the agent’s performance in providing services to the customers on the principal’s behalf; and

the agent actively seeks other entities to whom the agent could provide services on the principal’s behalf; and

the agent does not provide any services to the customers, on the principal’s behalf, using premises:

that the principal or an associate of the principal owns; or

in which the principal or an associate of the principal has a leasehold interest;

unless the agent uses the premises under an arrangement entered into at *arm’s length.

Whether personal services income is from one source

If the *agent is an individual, in applying subsection 87-15(3) to the personal services income of the agent during an income year, any part of the agent’s personal services income from the principal that:

the agent gains or produces during the income year; and

is for services that the agent provided to a customer on the principal’s behalf in the income year or an earlier income year;

is treated as if it were personal services income from the customer, and not personal services income from the principal.

If the *agent is a personal services entity, in applying subsection 87-15(3) to an individual’s personal services income that is included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income during an income year, any part of the individual’s personal services income from the principal that:

the agent gains or produces during the income year; and

is for services that the individual or the agent provided to a customer on the principal’s behalf in the income year or an earlier income year;

is treated as if it were personal services income from the customer, and not personal services income from the principal.

The unrelated clients test for a personal services business

In determining whether, during an income year, the *agent meets the unrelated clients test under section 87-20, any services the agent provided in the income year or an earlier income year:

for which the agent gains or produces, during the income year, personal services income from the principal; and

that were provided to a customer on the principal’s behalf;

are treated for the purposes of paragraph 87-20(1)(a) as if the agent, and not the principal, provided them to the customer.

Subdivision 87-B — Personal services business determinations

Table of sections

87-60 Personal services business determinations for individuals

87-65 Personal services business determinations for personal services entities

87-70 Applying etc. for personal services business determinations

87-75 When personal services business determinations have effect

87-80 Revoking personal services business determinations

87-85 Review of decisions

87-60 Personal services business determinations for individuals

Making etc. personal services business determinations

The Commissioner may, by giving written notice to an individual:

make a personal services business determination relating to the individual; or

vary such a determination.

The Commissioner may, in the notice, specify:

the day on which the determination or variation takes effect, or took effect;

the period for which the determination has effect;

conditions to which the determination is subject.

Matters about which the Commissioner must be satisfied

The Commissioner must not make the determination unless satisfied that, in the income year during which the determination first has effect, or is taken to have first had effect, the conditions in one or more of subsections (3A), (3B), (5) and (6) are met.

First alternative—results, employment or business premises test met or reasonably expected to be met

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the individual could reasonably be expected to meet, or met, the results test under section 87-18, the employment test under section 87-25, the business premises test under section 87-30 or more than one of those tests; and

the individual’s personal services income could reasonably be expected to be, or was, from the individual conducting activities that met one or more of those tests.

Second alternative—unusual circumstances prevented the results, employment or business premises test from being met

The conditions in this subsection are that:

but for unusual circumstances applying to the individual in that year, the individual could reasonably have been expected to meet, or would have met, the results test under section 87-18, the employment test under section 87-25, the business premises test under section 87-30 or more than one of those tests; and

the individual’s personal services income could reasonably be expected to be, or was, from the individual conducting activities that met one or more of those tests.

For the purposes of paragraph (3B)(a) but without limiting the scope of that paragraph, unusual circumstances include providing services to an insufficient number of entities to meet the unrelated clients test under section 87-20 if:

the individual starts a business during the income year, and can reasonably be expected to meet the test in subsequent income years; or

the individual provides services to only one entity during the income year, but met the test in one or more preceding income years and can reasonably be expected to meet the test in subsequent income years.

Third alternative—unrelated clients test was met but 80% or more of income from same source because of unusual circumstances

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the individual could reasonably be expected to meet, or met, the unrelated clients test under section 87-20; and

because of unusual circumstances applying to the individual in the income year, 80% or more of the individual’s personal services income (not including income mentioned in subsection 87-15(4)) could reasonably have been expected to be, or would have been, income from the same entity (or one entity and its *associates); and

the individual’s personal services income could reasonably be expected to be, or was, from the individual conducting activities that met the unrelated clients test under section 87-20.

Fourth alternative—unrelated clients test not met because of unusual circumstances

The conditions in this subsection are that:

but for unusual circumstances applying to the individual in that year, the individual could reasonably have been expected to meet, or would have met, the unrelated clients test under section 87-20; and

if 80% or more of the individual’s personal services income (not including income mentioned in subsection 87-15(4)) could reasonably have been expected to be, or would have been, income from the same entity (or one entity and its *associates)—that is the case only because of unusual circumstances applying to the individual in the income year; and

the individual’s personal services income could reasonably be expected to be, or was, from the individual conducting activities that met the unrelated clients test under section 87-20.

87-65 Personal services business determinations for personal services entities

Making etc. personal services business determinations

The Commissioner may, by giving written notice to a personal services entity whose ordinary income or statutory income includes some or all of an individual’s personal services income:

make a personal services business determination relating to the individual’s personal services income included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income; or

vary such a determination.

The Commissioner may, in the notice, specify:

the day on which the determination or variation takes effect, or took effect;

the period for which the determination has effect;

conditions to which the determination is subject.

Matters about which the Commissioner must be satisfied

The Commissioner must not make the determination unless satisfied that, in the income year during which the determination first has effect, or is taken to have first had effect, the conditions in one or more of subsections (3A), (3B), (5) and (6) are met.

First alternative——results, employment or business premises test met or reasonably expected to be met

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the entity could reasonably be expected to meet, or met, the results test under section 87-18, the employment test under section 87-25, the business premises test under section 87-30 or more than one of those tests; and

the individual’s personal services income included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income could reasonably be expected to be, or was, from the entity conducting activities that met one or more of those tests.

Second alternative—unusual circumstances prevented the results, employment or business premises test from being met

The conditions in this subsection are that:

but for unusual circumstances applying to the entity in that year, the entity could reasonably have been expected to meet, or would have met, the results test under section 87-18, the employment test under section 87-25, the business premises test under section 87-30 or more than one of those tests; and

the individual’s personal services income included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income could reasonably be expected to be, or was, from the entity conducting activities that met one or more of those tests.

For the purposes of paragraph (3B)(a) but without limiting the scope of that paragraph, unusual circumstances include providing services to an insufficient number of entities to meet the unrelated clients test under section 87-20 if:

thepersonal services entity starts a business during the income year, and can reasonably be expected to meet that test in subsequent income years; or

the personal services entity provides services to only one entity during the income year, but met the test in one or more preceding income years and can reasonably be expected to meet the test in subsequent income years.

Third alternative—unrelated clients test was met but 80% or more of income from same source because of unusual circumstances

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the entity could reasonably be expected to meet, or met, the unrelated clients test under section 87-20; and

because of unusual circumstances applying to the entity in the income year, 80% or more of the individual’s personal services income (not including income mentioned in subsection 87-15(4)) included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income could reasonably have been expected to be, or would have been, income from the same entity (or one entity and its *associates); and

the individual’s personal services income included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income could reasonably be expected to be, or was, from the entity conducting activities that met the unrelated clients test under section 87-20.

Fourth alternative—unrelated clients test not met because of unusual circumstances

The conditions in this subsection are that:

but for unusual circumstances applying to the entity in that year, the entity could reasonably have been expected to meet, or would have met, the unrelated clients test under section 87-20; and

if 80% or more of the individual’s personal services income (not including income mentioned in subsection 87-15(4)) included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income could reasonably have been expected to be, or would have been, income from the same entity (or one entity and its *associates)—that is the case only because of unusual circumstances applying to the entity in the income year; and

the individual’s personal services income included in the entity’s ordinary income or statutory income could reasonably be expected to be, or was, from the entity conducting activities that met the unrelated clients test under section 87-20.

87-70 Applying etc. for personal services business determinations

An individual or a personal services entity may apply to the Commissioner, in the approved form:

for a personal services business determination; or

for a variation of a personal services business determination.

The Commissioner may request the applicant to give the Commissioner specified information, or a specified document, that the Commissioner needs to decide the application.

If the Commissioner has not decided the application within 60 days after it is made, the applicant may, at any time, give the Commissioner written notice that the applicant wishes to treat the application as having been refused.

If the applicant gives notice under subsection (3), the Commissioner is taken, for the purposes of section 87-85, to have refused the application on the day on which the notice is given.

For the purposes of measuring the 60 days mentioned in subsection (3), disregard each period (if any):

starting on the day when the Commissioner requests the applicant under subsection (2) to give the Commissioner specified information or a specified document; and

ending at the end of the day the applicant gives the Commissioner the specified information or document.

87-75 When personal services business determinations have effect

The determination, or a variation of the determination, has effect, or is taken to have had effect, on and from:

the day specified in the notice as the day on which the determination or variation takes effect, or took effect; or

if a day is not specified—the day on which the notice is given.

The determination ceases to have effect at the end of the earliest day on which one or more of these occurs:

one or more conditions to which the determination is subject are not met;

the Commissioner revokes the determination;

the period for which the determination has effect comes to an end.

87-80 Revoking personal services business determinations

The Commissioner must, by giving written notice to the individual or personal services entity on whose application a personal services business determination was made, revoke the determination if the Commissioner is no longer satisfied that there are grounds on which the determination could be made.

87-85 Review of decisions

A person who is dissatisfied with;

a decision of the Commissioner to make, vary or revoke a personal services business determination; or

the Commissioner’s refusal of an application for a personal services business determination or for a variation of a personal services business determination;

may object against the decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Chapter 3 — Specialist liability rules

Part 3-1 — Capital gains and losses: general topics

Division 100 — A Guide to capital gains and losses

General overview

100-1 What this Division is about

This Division is a simplified outline of the capital gains and capital losses provisions, commonly referred to as capital gains tax (CGT). It will help you to understand your current liabilities, and to factor CGT into your on-going financial affairs.

Table of sections

100-5 Effect of this Division

100-10 Fundamentals of CGT

100-15 Overview of Steps 1 and 2

Step 1—Have you made a capital gain or a capital loss?

100-20 What events attract CGT?

100-25 What are CGT assets?

100-30 Does an exception or exemption apply?

100-33 Can there be a roll-over?

Step 2—Work out the amount of the capital gain or loss

100-35 What is a capital gain or loss?

100-40 What factors come into calculating a capital gain or loss?

100-45 How to calculate the capital gain or loss for most CGT events

Step 3—Work out your net capital gain or loss for the income year

100-50 How to work out your net capital gain or loss

100-55 How do you comply with CGT?

Keeping records for CGT purposes

100-60 Why keep records?

100-65 What records?

100-70 How long you need to keep records

100-5 Effect of this Division

This Division is a Guide.

Note: In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150.

100-10 Fundamentals of CGT

CGT affects your income tax liability because your assessable income includes your net capital gain for the income year. Your net capital gain is the total of your capital gains for the income year, reduced by certain capital losses you have made.

See later in this Guide (section 100-50) for more detail.

When you prepare your income tax return, you need to check whether you have made any capital gains for the income year.

You also need to check whether you have made any capital losses. You cannot deduct a capital loss from your assessable income, but it will reduce your capital gain in the current income year or later income years.

You will also need to consider the impact of CGT when doing your financial planning. In particular, you will need adequate record-keeping to deal most effectively with any immediate or future CGT liability.

To give you a sense of the range of things affected by CGT, if you are involved with any of the following, you may have a CGT liability now or at some time in the future:

100-15 Overview of Steps 1 and 2

Note: Capital proceeds and cost base are not relevant for some CGT events, for example CGT event K7 or any of the CGT events created by Subdivision 104-L.

Step 1—Have you made a capital gain or a capital loss?

100-20 What events attract CGT?

(1) You can make a capital gain or loss only if a CGT event happens.

There are a wide range of CGT events. Some happen often and affect many different taxpayers. Others are rare and affect only a few.

A summary of all the CGT events is in section 104-5.

Identifying the time of a CGT event

The specific time when a CGT event happens is important for various reasons: in particular, for working out whether a capital gain or loss from the event affects your income tax for the current or another income year.

If a CGT event involves a contract, the time of the event will often be when the contract is made, not when it is completed.

The time of each CGT event is explained early in the relevant section in Division 104.

100-25 What are CGT assets?

(1) Most CGT events involve a CGT asset. (For many, there is an exception if the CGT event happens before 1 July 2027 and the CGT asset was acquired before 20 September 1985.) However, many CGT events are concerned directly with capital receipts and do not involve a CGT asset.

See the summary of the CGT events in section 104-5.

Some CGT assets are reasonably well-known:

• land and buildings, for example, a weekender;

• shares;

• units in a unit trust;

• collectables which cost over $500, for example, jewellery or an artwork;

• personal use assets which cost over $10,000, for example, a boat.

Other CGT assets are not so well-known. For example:

• your home;

• contractual rights;

• goodwill;

• foreign currency.

For a full explanation of what things are CGT assets: see Division 108.

100-30 Does an exception or exemption apply?

Once you identify a CGT event which applies to you, you need to know if there is an exception or exemption that would reduce the capital gain or loss or allow you to disregard it.

There are 4 categories of exemptions:

1. exempt assets: for example, cars;

2. exempt or loss-denying transactions: for example, compensation for personal injury or your tenancy comes to an end;

3. anti-overlap provisions (that reduce your capital gain by the amount that is otherwise assessable);

4. small business relief.

Some exemptions are limited

Note: Most of the exceptions are in Division 104. You will find most of the possible exemptions in Division 118. The small business relief provisions are in Division 152.

Take the family home for example. Generally, you are exempt from CGT when you make a capital gain on disposing of your main residence.

But this can change depending on how you came to own the house and what you have done with it. For example, if you rent it out, you may be liable to CGT when you sell it.

For the limits on the general exemption of your main residence: see Subdivision 118-B.

100-33 Can there be a roll-over?

Roll-overs allow you to defer or disregard a capital gain or loss from a CGT event. They apply in specific situations. Some require a choice (for example, where an asset is compulsorily acquired: see Subdivision 124-B) and some are automatic (for example, where an asset is transferred because of marriage or relationship breakdown: see Subdivision 126-A).

There are 2 types of roll-over:

1. a replacement-asset roll-over allows you to defer a capital gain or loss from one CGT event until a later CGT event happens where a CGT asset is replaced with another one;

2. a same-asset roll-over allows you to disregard a capital gain or loss from a CGT event where the same CGT asset is involved.

Note: The replacement-asset roll-overs are listed in section 112-115, and the same-asset roll-overs are listed in section 112-150.

Step 2—Work out the amount of the capital gain or loss

100-35 What is a capital gain or loss?

For most CGT events:

• You make a capital gain if you receive (or are entitled to receive) capital amounts from the CGT event which exceed your total costs associated with that event.

• You make a capital loss if your total costs associated with the CGT event exceed the capital amounts you receive (or are entitled to receive) from the event.

100-40 What factors come into calculating a capital gain or loss?

Capital proceeds

(1) For most CGT events, the capital amounts you receive (or are entitled to receive) from the event are called the capital proceeds.

To work out the capital proceeds: see Division 116.

Cost base and reduced cost base

For most CGT events, your total costs associated with the event are worked out in 2 different ways:

• For the purpose of working out a capital gain, those costs are called the cost base of the CGT asset.

• For the purpose of working out a capital loss, those costs are called the reduced cost base of the asset.

One of the main differences is that the costs may be indexed for inflation in working out a capital gain for a CGT asset (which reduces the size of the gain), but not in working out a capital loss. Indexation is only available for certain entities and may not be available for the entire period the CGT asset is held.

To work out the cost base and reduced cost base: see Division 110.

100-45 How to calculate the capital gain or loss for most CGT events

1. Work out your capital proceeds from the CGT event.

2. Work out the cost base for the CGT asset.

3. Subtract the cost base from the capital proceeds.

4. If the proceeds exceed the cost base, the difference is your capital gain.

5. If not, work out the reduced cost base for the asset.

6. If the reduced cost base exceeds the capital proceeds, the difference is your capital loss.

7. If the capital proceeds are less than the cost base but more than the reduced cost base, you have neither a capital gain nor a capital loss.

Step 3—Work out your net capital gain or loss for the income year

100-50 How to work out your net capital gain or loss

1. Reduce your capital gains for the income year by your capital losses for the income year. You need to reduce certain kinds of capital gains before you can reduce other kinds of capital gains. (If the capital losses for the income year exceed the capital gains, the difference is your net capital loss. You cannot deduct a net capital loss from your assessable income.)

2. Reduce any remaining capital gains by any unapplied net capital losses for previous income years. You need to reduce certain kinds of remaining capital gains before you can reduce other kinds of remaining capital gains.

3. Apply any quarantined amount relating to using or holding residential dwellings as residential accommodation to reduce certain kinds of remaining capital gains.

4. Reduce any remaining capital gains that are discount capital gains by the discount percentage.

5. If you carry on a small business, apply the small business concessions in further reduction of your capital gains (whether or not the gains are discount capital gains).

6. Add up any remaining capital gains. The total is your net capital gain.

Note: To find out what is a discount capital gain and the discount percentage, see Division 115.

Note: For the small business concessions, see Division 152.

Note: For the rules on working out your net capital gain or loss, see Division 102.

100-55 How do you comply with CGT?

Declare any net capital gain as assessable income in your income tax return.

Defer any net capital loss to the next income year for which you have capital gains that exceed the capital losses for that income year.

Keeping records for CGT purposes

100-60 Why keep records?

1. To ensure you do not disadvantage yourself.

2. To comply as easily as possible.

3. To plan for your CGT position in future income years.

4. The law requires you to: see Division 121.

100-65 What records?

Keeping full records will make it easier for you to comply. For example, keep records of:

• receipts of purchase or transfer;

• interest on money you borrowed;

• costs of agents, accountants, legal, advertising etc.;

• insurance costs and land rates or taxes;

• any market valuations;

• costs of maintenance, repairs or modifications;

• brokerage on shares;

• legal costs.

100-70 How long you need to keep records

The law requires you to keep records for 5 years after a CGT event has happened.

Division 102 — Assessable income includes net capital gain

Guide to Division 102

102-1 What this Division is about

This Division tells you how to work out if you have made a net capital gain or a net capital loss for the income year. A net capital gain is included in your assessable income. However, you cannot deduct a net capital loss. (Amounts otherwise included in your assessable income do not form part of a net capital gain.)

Some or all of your net capital gain may be subject to a 30% minimum tax (see Division 119).

102-3 Concessions in working out your net capital gain

Concessional rules apply to working out the net capital gain of some entities (see subsection (2)) if:

(a) they have a capital gain (a discount capital gain) from a CGT asset acquired at least 12 months before the CGT event that caused the capital gain; and

they have not chosen to include indexation in the cost base of the asset for working out the capital gain (if relevant).

Note 1: Division 115 explains what is a discount capital gain.

Note 2: Under Division 110, the entity can choose to include indexation in the cost base of a CGT asset acquired at or before 11.45 am on 21 September 1999.

Only these entities get the concession:

complying superannuation entities;

life insurance companies, in relation to discount capital gains for CGT events in respect of CGT assets that are complying superannuation assets.

Note: Shareholders in a listed investment company can also receive a concession equivalent to a discount capital gain: see Subdivision 115-D.

(3) The concession is that the net capital gain includes only part of the amount of the discount capital gain left after applying capital losses and net capital losses from earlier income years.

See subsection 102-5(1).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

102-5 Assessable income includes net capital gain

102-6 Meanings of the different categories of capital gains

102-10 How to work out your net capital loss

102-15 How to apply net capital losses

102-20 Ways you can make a capital gain or a capital loss

102-22 Amounts of capital gains and losses

102-23 CGT event still happens even if gain or loss disregarded

102-25 Order of application of CGT events

102-30 Exceptions and modifications

Operative provisions

102-5 Assessable income includes net capital gain

(1) Your assessable income includes your net capital gain (if any) for the income year. You work out your net capital gain in this way:

Working out your net capital gain

Step 1. Reduce the *capital gains you made during the income year by the *capital losses (if any) you made during the income year as follows:

first, reduce any *deferred non‑residential capital gains;

then, reduce any *deferred residential capital gains;

then, reduce any *non‑residential capital gains;

then, reduce any *residential capital gains.

Note 1: Indexation may apply in relation to working out your capital gains: see Divisions 110 and 114.

Note 2: Some provisions of this Act (such as Divisions 104 and 118) permit or require you to disregard certain capital gains or losses when working out your net capital gain. Subdivision 152-B permits you, in some circumstances, to disregard a capital gain made from a CGT event happening to a CGT asset you held for at least 15 years.

Note 3: If you have more than one capital gain within a category mentioned in paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d), you can choose the order in which you reduce them.

Step 2. Apply any previously unapplied *net capital losses from earlier income years to further reduce the amounts (if any) remaining after the reduction of *capital gains under step 1. Make the further reductions in the same order as mentioned in step 1.

Step 3. Apply any quarantined amount referred to in paragraph 26-155(1)(b) you have for the income year to reduce the amounts (if any) of any *deferred residential capital gains remaining after the reduction of *capital gains under step 2.

Step 4. Apply any quarantined amount referred to in paragraph 26-155(1)(b) you have for the income year remaining after step 3 to reduce the amounts (if any) of any *residential capital gains remaining after the reduction of *capital gains under step 2.

Step 5. Reduce by the discount percentage each amount of any discount capital gain remaining after the application of steps 1 to 4.

Step 6. If any of your *capital gains (whether or not they are *discount capital gains) remaining after step 5 qualify for any of the small business concessions in Subdivisions 152-C, 152-D and 152-E, apply those concessions to each of those capital gains as provided for in those Subdivisions.

Step 7. Add up the amounts of any *capital gains remaining after step 6. The sum is your net capital gain for the income year.

Note: Section 102-15 explains how to apply net capital losses.

Note: Subsection 26-155(1) deals with amounts relating to using or holding residential dwellings as residential accommodation.

Note: Only some entities can have discount capital gains, and only if they have capital gains from certain CGT assets acquired at least a year before making the gains: see Division 115.

Note 1: The basic conditions for getting these concessions are in Subdivision 152-A.

Note 2: Subdivision 152-C does not apply to CGT events J2, J5 and J6. In addition, Subdivision 152-E does not apply to CGT events J5 and J6.

Note: For exceptions and modifications to these rules: see section 102-30.

102-6 Meanings of the different categories of capital gains

Non-residential capital gains

(1) If a *capital gain you make during an income year is not one to which subsection (5) applies, then so much of the capital gain as is not a *residential capital gain is a non-residential capital gain.

Residential capital gains

If a *capital gain you make during an income year:

is not one to which subsection (5) applies; and

arises from a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset that is or was a *residential dwelling;

then so much of the capital gain as is worked out as follows is a residential capital gain:

where:

post-July 2027 ownership period means the number of days in so much of the following period:

unless paragraph (b) applies—your *ownership period of the CGT asset;

if because of section 115-215 you are taken to have made the *capital gain as a beneficiary of a trust—the trustee’s ownership period of the CGT asset;

as:

is on or after 1 July 2027, and as ends on the day the CGT event happens; and

does not include a day or part of a day for which you can reasonably expect to disregard the capital gain because of Subdivision 118-B (about the main residence exemption).

Note 1: If the CGT event is a realisation event mentioned in paragraph 112-155(1)(c) or 112-165(1)(c), subsection (4) of this section applies to your capital gain for the portion of your ownership period that is before 1 July 2027.

Note 2: If the CGT event happens (on or after 1 July 2027) in relation to a CGT asset that was a pre-CGT asset just before 1 July 2027, your capital gain for the portion of your ownership period that is before 1 July 2027 is disregarded (see subsection 112-175(2)).

residential accommodation days means the sum of:

the number of days in the post-July 2027 ownership period in which the CGT asset is used, or held, solely for the provision of residential accommodation; and

for each other day in the post-July 2027 ownership period—the fraction of that day that represents the extent to which, on that day, the CGT asset is used, or held, for the provision of residential accommodation.

Deferred non-residential capital gains

(3) If a *capital gain you make during an income year is one to which subsection (5) applies, then so much of the capital gain as is not a *deferred residential capital gain is a deferred non-residential capital gain.

Deferred residential capital gains

If a *capital gain you make during an income year:

is one to which subsection (5) applies; and

arises from a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset that is or was a *residential dwelling;

then so much of the capital gain as is worked out as follows is a deferred residential capital gain:

where:

pre-July 2027 ownership period means the number of days in so much of the following period:

unless paragraph (b) applies—your *ownership period of the CGT asset;

if because of section 115-215 you are taken to have made the *capital gain as a beneficiary of a trust—the trustee’s ownership period of the CGT asset;

as:

ends on 30 June 2027; and

does not include a day or part of a day for which you can reasonably expect to disregard the capital gain because of Subdivision 118-B (about the main residence exemption).

residential accommodation days means the sum of:

the number of days in the pre-July 2027 ownership period in which the CGT asset is used, or held, solely for the provision of residential accommodation; and

for each other day in the pre-July 2027 ownership period—the fraction of that day that represents the extent to which, on that day, the CGT asset is used, or held, for the provision of residential accommodation.

Does the capital gain arise from a deemed sale on 30 June 2027?

This subsection applies to a *capital gain you have made if:

paragraph 112-160(3)(a) or 112-170(3)(a) treats you as having made the capital gain; or

because of section 115-215, you are taken to have made the capital gain as a beneficiary of a trust in relation to the trust’s deferred gain (within the meaning of paragraph 112-170(3)(a)).

Note 1: Subsection 112-160(3) covers individuals who are Australian residents. Subsection 112-170(3) covers trusts.

Note 2: Paragraph (b) can cover a capital gain taken to have been made by any of the trust’s beneficiaries, not just beneficiaries who are individuals and Australian residents.

Note 3: Section 112-175 applies to assets that were pre-CGT assets on 30 June 2027. Section 112-175 has the effect that a capital gain from a CGT event happening on or after 1 July 2027 in relation to such an asset will be either a residential capital gain or a non-residential capital gain.

However, if during the income year:

you became bankrupt; or

you were released from debts under a law relating to bankruptcy;

any net capital loss you made for an earlier income year must be disregarded in working out whether you made a net capital gain for the income year or a later one.

Subsection (2) applies even though your bankruptcy is annulled if:

(a) the annulment happens under section 74 of the Bankruptcy Act 1966; and

under the composition or scheme of arrangement concerned, you were, will be or may be released from debts from which you would have been released if instead you had been discharged from the bankruptcy.

102-10 How to work out your net capital loss

(1) You work out if you have a net capital loss for the income year in this way:

Working out your net capital loss

Step 1. Add up the *capital losses you made during the income year. Also add up the *capital gains you made.

Step 2. Subtract your *capital gains from your *capital losses.

Step 3. If the Step 2 amount is more than zero, it is your net capital loss for the income year.

Note: For exceptions and modifications to these rules: see section 102-30.

(2) You cannot deduct from your assessable income a *net capital loss for any income year.

102-15 How to apply net capital losses

In working out if you have a net capital gain, your *net capital losses are applied in the order in which you made them.

Note 1: A net capital loss can be applied only to the extent that it has not already been utilised: see subsection 960-20(1).

Note 2: For applying a net capital loss for the 1997-98 income year or an earlier income year, see section 102-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

102-20 Ways you can make a capital gain or a capital loss

You can make a *capital gain or *capital loss if and only if a CGT event happens. The gain or loss is made at the time of the event.

Note 1: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

Note 2: The gain or loss may be affected by an exemption, or may be able to be rolled-over. For exemptions generally, see Division 118. For roll-overs, see Divisions 122, 123, 124 and 126.

Note 3: You may make a capital gain or capital loss as a result of a CGT event happening to another entity: see subsections 115-215(3), 170-275(1) and 170-280(3).

Note 4: You cannot make a capital loss from a CGT event that happens to your original interests during a trust restructuring period if you choose a roll-over under Subdivision 124-N.

Note 5: The capital loss may be affected if the CGT asset was owned by a member of a demerger group just before a demerger: see section 125-170.

Note 6: Under subsection 230-310(4) gains and losses are taken to arise from a CGT event in particular circumstances.

Note 7: This section does not apply in relation to the capital gain mentioned in paragraph 294-120(5)(b) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

102-22 Amounts of capital gains and losses

Most *CGT events provide for calculating a *capital gain or *capital loss by comparing 2 different amounts. The amount of the gain or loss is the difference between those amounts.

102-23 CGT event still happens even if gain or loss disregarded

A CGT event still happens even if:

it does not result in a *capital gain or *capital loss; or

a capital gain or capital loss from the event is disregarded.

Example: Lindy sells a car. Section 118-5 says that any capital gain or loss from a CGT event happening to a car is disregarded. However, the sale is still an example of CGT event A1.

102-25 Order of application of CGT events

Work out if a CGT event (except *CGT events D1 and H2) happens to your situation. If more than one event can happen, the one you use is the one that is the most specific to your situation.

However, there are 3 exceptions: one for CGT event J2, one for CGT event K5 and one for CGT event K12.

If the circumstances that gave rise to CGT event J2 constitute another CGT event, CGT event J2 applies in addition to the other event.

Example: CGT event J2 happens because a replacement asset for a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E becomes your trading stock (in circumstances where CGT event K4 happens). Both CGT events apply.

CGT event K5 happens if CGT event A1, C2 or E8 happens. CGT event K5 applies in addition to the other event.

If:

*CGT events happen for which you make *capital gains or *capital losses; and

the capital gains or losses are taken into account in working out a foreign hybrid net capital loss amount; and

the foreign hybrid net capital loss amount is itself taken into account in determining that CGT event K12 happens;

CGT event K12 applies in addition to the other CGT events.

If no CGT event (except *CGT events D1 and H2) happens:

work out if CGT event D1 happens and use that event if it does; and

if it does not, work out if CGT event H2 happens and use that event if it does.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

102-30 Exceptions and modifications

Provisions of this Act are in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Division 103 — General rules

Guide to Division 103

103-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out some general rules that apply to the provisions dealing with capital gains and capital losses.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

103-5 Giving property as part of a transaction

103-10 Entitlement to receive money or property

103-15 Requirement to pay money or give property

103-25 Choices

103-30 Reduction of cost base etc. by net input tax credits

Operative provisions

103-5 Giving property as part of a transaction

There are a number of provisions in this Part and Part 3-3 that say that a payment, cost or expenditure can include giving property.

To the extent that such a provision does say that a payment, cost or expenditure can include giving property, use the *market value of the property in working out the amount of the payment, cost or expenditure.

103-10 Entitlement to receive money or property

This Part and Part 3-3 apply to you as if you had received money or other property if it has been applied for your benefit (including by discharging all or part of a debt you owe) or as you direct.

Those Parts apply to you as if you are entitled to receive money or other property:

if you are entitled to have it so applied; or

if:

you will not receive it until a later time; or

the money is payable by instalments.

103-15 Requirement to pay money or give property

This Part and Part 3-3 apply to you as if you are required to pay money or give other property even if:

you do not have to pay or give it until a later time; or

the money is payable by instalments.

103-25 Choices

A choice you can make under this Part or Part 3-3 must be made:

by the day you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the relevant CGT event happened; or

within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

The way you (and any other entity making the choice) prepare your income tax returns is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

However, there are some exceptions:

subsection 115-230(3) (relating to assessment of *capital gains of resident testamentary trusts) requires a trustee to make a choice by the time specified in subsection 115-230(5); and

subsections 152-315(4) and (5) (relating to the small business retirement exemption) require a choice to be made in writing.

Note: This section is modified in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 421 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

103-30 Reduction of cost base etc. by net input tax credits

Reduce the *cost base and reduced cost base of a *CGT asset, and any other amount that could be involved in the calculation of an entity’s *capital gain or *capital loss, by the amount of any *net input tax credit of the entity in relation to that amount.

Example: The other amount could be expenditure in the case of some CGT events (see, for example, CGT event D1).

Note: Subsection 116-20(5) deals with the effect of net GST on supplies for the purposes of capital proceeds.

Division 104 — CGT events

Guide to Division 104

104-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out all the CGT events for which you can make a capital gain or loss. It tells you how to work out if you have made a gain or loss from each event and the time of each event. It also contains exceptions for gains and losses for many events (such as the exception for CGT assets acquired before 20 September 1985) and some cost base adjustment rules.

104-5 Summary of the CGT events

Note: Subsection 230-310(4) (which deals with hedging financial arrangements) provides that in certain circumstances a CGT event is taken to have occurred in relation to a hedging financial arrangement at the same time as a CGT event actually occurs in relation to a hedged item covered by the arrangement.

Subdivision 104-A — Disposals

104-10 Disposal of a CGT asset: CGT event A1

(1) CGT event A1 happens if you *dispose of a *CGT asset.

(2) You dispose of a *CGT asset if a change of ownership occurs from you to another entity, whether because of some act or event or by operation of law. However, a change of ownership does not occur if you stop being the legal owner of the asset but continue to be its beneficial owner.

Note: A change in the trustee of a trust does not constitute a change in the entity that is the trustee of the trust (see subsection 960-100(2)). This means that CGT event A1 will not happen merely because of a change in the trustee.

The time of the event is:

when you enter into the contract for the *disposal; or

if there is no contract—when the change of ownership occurs.

Example: In June 1999 you enter into a contract to sell land. The contract is settled in October 1999. You make a capital gain of $50,000.

The gain is made in the 1998-99 income year (the year you entered into the contract) and not the 1999-2000 income year (the year that settlement takes place).

Note 1: If the contract falls through before completion, this event does not happen because no change in ownership occurs.

Note 2: If the asset was compulsorily acquired from you: see subsection (6).

(4) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the disposal are more than the asset’s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Exceptions

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:

you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985; or

for a lease that you granted:

it was granted before that day; or

if it has been renewed or extended—the start of the last renewal or extension occurred before that day.

Note 1: You can make a gain if you dispose of shares in a company, or an interest in a trust, that you acquired before that day: see CGT event K6.

Note 2: A capital gain or loss you make because you assign a right under or in relation to a general insurance policy you held with an HIH company to the Commonwealth, the trustee of the HIH Trust or a prescribed entity is also disregarded: see section 322-15.

Note 3: A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity from CGT event A1 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see section 125-155.

Note 4: A capital gain or loss you make because of section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959 is disregarded: see section 253-10 of this Act. Section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959:

reduces your right to be paid an amount by an ADI in connection with an account to the extent of your entitlement under Division 2AA of Part II of that Act to be paid an amount by APRA; and

provides that, to the extent of the reduction, the right becomes a right of APRA.

Note 5: A capital gain or loss you make because, under section 62ZZL of the Insurance Act 1973, you dispose of a CGT asset consisting of your rights against a general insurance company to APRA is disregarded: see section 322-30 of this Act.

Compulsory acquisition

If the asset was *acquired from you by an entity under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by an Australian law or a foreign law, the time of the event is the earliest of:

when you received compensation from the entity; or

when the entity became the asset’s owner; or

when the entity entered it under that power; or

when the entity took possession under that power.

Note: You may be able to choose a roll-over if an asset is compulsorily acquired: see Subdivision 124-B.

Subdivision 104-B — Use and enjoyment before title passes

104-15 Use and enjoyment before title passes: CGT event B1

(1) CGT event B1 happens if you enter into an agreement with another entity under which:

the right to the use and enjoyment of a CGT asset you own passes to the other entity; and

title in the asset will or may pass to the other entity at or before the end of the agreement.

Note: Division 240 provides for the inclusion of amounts under hire purchase agreements in assessable income.

The time of the event is when the other entity first obtains the use and enjoyment of the asset.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the agreement are more than the asset’s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Exceptions

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:

title in the asset does not pass to the other entity at or before the end of the agreement; or

you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

Subdivision 104-C — End of a CGT asset

104-20 Loss or destruction of a CGT asset: CGT event C1

(1) CGT event C1 happens if a *CGT asset you own is lost or destroyed.

Note: This event can apply to part of a CGT asset: see section 108-5 (definition of CGT asset).

The time of the event is:

when you first receive compensation for the loss or destruction; or

if you receive no compensation—when the loss is discovered or the destruction occurred.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the loss or destruction are more than the asset’s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Exception

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

104-25 Cancellation, surrender and similar endings: CGT event C2

(1) CGT event C2 happens if your ownership of an intangible *CGT asset ends by the asset:

being redeemed or cancelled; or

being released, discharged or satisfied; or

expiring; or

being abandoned, surrendered or forfeited; or

if the asset is an option—being exercised; or

if the asset is a convertible interest—being converted.

The time of the event is:

when you enter into the contract that results in the asset ending; or

if there is no contract—when the asset ends.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the ending are more than the asset’s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Note: The capital proceeds referred to in this subsection are reduced if the gain or loss was for shares and an amount was taken into account as a capital gain for the shares under former section 160ZL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the 1997-98 income year or an earlier income year: see section 104-25 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

A lease is taken to have expired even if it is extended or renewed.

Exceptions

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:

you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985; or

for a lease that you granted:

it was granted before that day; or

if it has been renewed or extended—the start of the last renewal or extension occurred before that day.

Note 1: There are other exceptions if:

• your lease expires and you did not use it mainly to produce assessable income: see section 118-40; or

• you exercise rights to acquire shares or units: see section 130-40; or

• you acquire shares or units by converting a convertible interest: see section 130-60; or

• you exercise an option: see section 134-1.

Note 2: A company can agree to forgo any capital loss it makes as a result of forgiving a commercial debt owed to it by another company where the companies are under common ownership: see section 245-90.

Note 3: A capital gain or loss a company makes because shares in its 100% subsidiary are cancelled (an example of CGT event C2) on the liquidation of the subsidiary may be reduced if there was a roll-over for a CGT asset under Subdivision 126-B: see section 126-85.

Note 5: Cost base adjustments are made only under Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT event C2 happening as a result of a demerger.

Note 6: A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity from CGT event C2 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see section 125-155.

Note 7: A capital gain or loss you make from the meeting of your entitlement under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 or Part VC (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent general insurers) of the Insurance Act 1973 is disregarded: see sections 253-10 and 322-30 of this Act.

104-30 End of option to acquire shares etc.: CGT event C3

(1) CGT event C3 happens if an option a company or a trustee of a unit trust granted to an entity to *acquire a *CGT asset that is:

*shares in the company or units in the unit trust; or

*debentures of the company or unit trust;

ends in one of these ways:

it is not exercised by the latest time for its exercise;

it is cancelled;

it is released or abandoned.

The time of the event is when the option ends.

(3) The company or trustee makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the grant of the option are more than the expenditure incurred in granting it. It makes a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, it does not include an amount you have received as recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income.

Exception

A *capital gain or *capital loss the company or trustee makes is disregarded if it granted the option before 20 September 1985.

Note: This subsection is modified for the purpose of calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 418 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 104-D — Bringing into existence a CGT asset

104-35 Creating contractual or other rights: CGT event D1

(1) CGT event D1 happens if you create a contractual right or other legal or equitable right in another entity.

Example: You enter into a contract with the purchaser of your business not to operate a similar business in the same town. The contract states that $20,000 was paid for this.

You have created a contractual right in favour of the purchaser. If you breach the contract, the purchaser can enforce that right.

The time of the event is when you enter into the contract or create the other right.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from creating the right are more than the *incidental costs you incurred that relate to the event. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less.

Example: To continue the example: If you paid your lawyer $1,500 to draw up the contract, you make a capital gain of:

The costs can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, they do not include an amount you have received as recoupment of them and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

Exceptions

(5) CGT event D1 does not happen if:

you created the right by borrowing money or obtaining credit from another entity; or

the right requires you to do something that is another CGT event that happens to you; or

a company issues or allots *equity interests or *non-equity shares in the company; or

the trustee of a unit trust issues units in the trust; or

a company grants an option to acquire equity interests, non-equity shares or *debentures in the company; or

the trustee of a unit trust grants an option to acquire units or debentures in the trust; or

you created the right by creating in another entity a right to receive an exploration benefit under a farm-in farm-out arrangement.

Example: You agree to sell land. You have created a contractual right in the buyer to enforce completion of the transaction. The sale results in you disposing of the land, an example of CGT event A1. This means that CGT event D1 does not happen.

104-40 Granting an option: CGT event D2

(1) CGT event D2 happens if you grant an option to an entity, or renew or extend an option you had granted.

Note: Some options are not covered: see subsections (6) and (7).

The time of the event is when you grant, renew or extend the option.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the grant, renewal or extension of the option are more than the expenditure you incurred to grant, renew or extend it. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, it does not include an amount you have received as recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

Exceptions

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the grant, renewal or extension of the option is disregarded if the option is exercised.

Note 1: Section 134-1 sets out the consequences of an option being exercised.

Note 2: A capital gain or capital loss you made for the 1997-98 income year or an earlier income year under former Part IIIA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is also disregarded where the option is exercised in the 1998-99 income year or a later one: see section 104-40 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

This section does not apply to an option granted, renewed or extended by a company or the trustee of a unit trust to *acquire a CGT asset that is:

*shares in the company or units in the unit trust; or

debentures of the company or unit trust.

Note: Section 104-30 deals with this situation.

Nor does it apply to an option relating to a personal use asset or a collectable.

104-45 Granting a right to income from mining: CGT event D3

(1) CGT event D3 happens if you own a *prospecting entitlement or *mining entitlement, or an interest in one, and you grant another entity a right to receive *ordinary income or *statutory income from operations permitted to be carried on by the entitlement.

Note: If this event applies, there is no disposal of the entitlement.

The time of the event is:

when you enter into the contract with the other entity; or

if there is no contract—when you grant the right to receive ordinary income or statutory income.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the grant of the right are more than the expenditure you incurred in granting it. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, it does not include an amount you have received as recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

104-47 Conservation covenants: CGT event D4

(1) CGT event D4 happens if you enter into a *conservation covenant over land you own.

The time of the event is when you enter into the covenant.

(3) You make a *capital gain if the *capital proceeds from entering into the covenant are more than that part of the *cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant. You make a *capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the part of the *reduced cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant.

Note: The capital proceeds from entering into the covenant are modified if you do not receive anything for entering into the covenant: see section 116-105.

The part of the *cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant is worked out in this way:

The part of the *reduced cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant is worked out similarly.

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the land are reduced by the part of the cost base or reduced cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant.

Example: Lisa receives $10,000 for entering into a conservation covenant that covers 15% of the land she owns. Lisa uses the following figures in calculating the cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant:

The cost base of the entire land is $200,000.

The market value of the entire land before entering into the covenant is $300,000, and its market value after entering into the covenant is $285,000.

Lisa calculates the cost base of the land that is apportioned to the covenant to be:

She reduces the cost base of the land by the part that is apportioned to the covenant:

Exceptions

CGT event D4 does not happen if:

you did not receive any capital proceeds for entering into the covenant; and

you cannot deduct an amount under Division 31 for entering into the covenant.

Note: In this case, CGT event D1 will apply.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the land before 20 September 1985.

Subdivision 104-E — Trusts

104-55 Creating a trust over a CGT asset: CGT event E1

(1) CGT event E1 happens if you create a trust over a *CGT asset by declaration or settlement.

Note: A change in the trustee of a trust does not constitute a change in the entity that is the trustee of the trust (see subsection 960-100(2)). This means that CGT event E1 will not happen merely because of a change in the trustee.

The time of the event is when the trust over the asset is created.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the creation are more than the asset’s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Cost base rule

If you are the trustee of the trust and no beneficiary is absolutely entitled to the asset as against you (disregarding any legal disability), the first element of the asset’s *cost base and *reduced cost base in your hands is its *market value when the trust is created.

Exceptions

(5) CGT event E1 does not happen if you are the sole beneficiary of the trust and:

you are absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability); and

the trust is not a unit trust.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

104-60 Transferring a CGT asset to a trust: CGT event E2

(1) CGT event E2 happens if you transfer a *CGT asset to an existing trust.

Note: A change in the trustee of a trust does not constitute a change in the entity that is the trustee of the trust (see subsection 960-100(2)). This means that CGT event E2 will not happen merely because of a change in the trustee.

The time of the event is when the asset is transferred.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the transfer are more than the asset’s *cost base. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

If you are the trustee of the trust and no beneficiary is absolutely entitled to the asset as against you (disregarding any legal disability), the first element of the asset’s *cost base and *reduced cost base in your hands is its *market value when the asset is transferred.

Exceptions

(5) CGT event E2 does not happen if you are the sole beneficiary of the trust and:

you are absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability); and

the trust is not a unit trust.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

104-65 Converting a trust to a unit trust: CGT event E3

(1) CGT event E3 happens if:

a trust (that is not a unit trust) over a CGT asset is converted to a unit trust; and

just before the conversion, a beneficiary under the trust was absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability the beneficiary is under).

The time of the event is when the trust is converted.

(3) The beneficiary makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (when the trust is converted) is more than the asset’s *cost base. The beneficiary makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Exception

A *capital gain or *capital loss the beneficiary makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

104-70 Capital payment for trust interest: CGT event E4

(1) CGT event E4 happens if:

the trustee of a trust makes a payment to you in respect of your unit or your interest in the trust (except for CGT event A1, C2, E1, E2, E6 or E7 happening in relation to it); and

(b) some or all of the payment (the non-assessable part) is not included in your assessable income.

To avoid doubt, in applying paragraph (b) to work out what part of the payment is included in your assessable income, disregard your share of the trust’s net income that is subject to the rules in subsection 115-215(3).

Note 1: Subsections 104-71(1) (tax-exempted amounts), 104-71(3) (tax-free amounts) and 104-71(4) (CGT concession amounts) can affect the calculation of the non-assessable part.

Note 2: The non-assessable part includes amounts (tax-deferred amounts) associated with the small business 50% reduction, frozen indexation, building allowance and accounting differences in income.

Note 3: A payment made to you after you stop owning the unit or interest in the trust forms part of the capital proceeds for the CGT event that happened when you stopped owning it.

(1A) However, CGT event E4 does not happen if the unit or interest mentioned in subsection (1) is a unit or interest in an *AMIT.

The payment can include giving property (see section 103-5).

The time of the event is:

just before the end of the income year in which the trustee makes the payment; or

if another CGT event (except CGT event E4) happens in relation to the unit or interest or part of it after the trustee makes the payment but before the end of that income year—just before the time of that other CGT event.

(4) You make a capital gain if the sum of the amounts of the non-assessable parts of the payments made in the income year made by the trustee in respect of the unit or interest is more than its *cost base.

Note: You cannot make a capital loss.

If you make a *capital gain, the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the unit or interest are reduced to nil.

Note: A capital gain under former section 160ZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is also taken into account for the purposes of this subsection: see subsection 104-70(3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

However, if that sum is not more than the *cost base:

the cost base is reduced by that sum; and

the *reduced cost base is reduced by that sum (without the adjustment in subsection 104-71(3)).

Example: Mandy owns units in a unit trust that she bought on 1 July 1998 for $10 each. During the 1999-2000 income year the trustee makes 4 non-assessable payments of $0.50 per unit. If at the end of the income year Mandy’s cost base for each unit (including indexation) would otherwise be $10.10, the payments require that it be reduced by $2, giving a new cost base of $8.10. If Mandy sells the units (CGT event A1) in the 2000-01 year for more than their cost base at that time, she will make a capital gain equal to the difference.

Note: Cost base adjustments are made only under Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT event E4 happening as a result of a demerger.

Exceptions

A *capital gain you make from CGT event E4 is disregarded if you *acquired the CGT asset that is the unit or interest before 20 September 1985.

(8) CGT event E4 does not happen to the extent that the payment is reasonably attributable to a *LIC capital gain.

(9) CGT event E4 does not happen for a payment made to a foreign resident to the extent that the payment is reasonably attributable to *ordinary income or *statutory income from sources other than an *Australian source. However, this exception does not apply if the trust is a *public trading trust.

104-71 Adjustment of non-assessable part

In working out the non-assessable part referred to in section 104-70, disregard any part of the payment that is:

non-assessable non-exempt income; or

paid from an amount that has been assessed to the trustee; or

paid from an amount that is personal services income included in your assessable income, or another entity’s assessable income, under section 86-15; or

a payment to which paragraph 118-37(1)(ba) applies (about compensation paid through a trust); or

a payment to which subsection 118-300(1A) applies (about insurance and annuity payments paid through a trust); or

repaid by you; or

compensation you paid that can reasonably be regarded as a repayment of all or part of the payment; or

an amount referred to in section 152-125 (which exempts a payment of a small business 15-year exemption amount) as an exempt amount.

The payment can include giving property (see section 103-5).

However, the non-assessable part is not reduced by any part of the payment that you can deduct.

The amount of the non-assessable part referred to in section 104-70 is adjusted to exclude any part of it that is attributable to:

(a) an amount that is not included in the assessable income of an entity because of section 124ZM or 124ZN (which exempt income arising from *shares in a *PDF) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

an amount that is not included in the assessable income of an entity because of section 51-52 or subsection 51-54(1) or (1A) of this Act; or

capital proceeds from a CGT event that happens in relation to *shares in a company that was a *PDF when that event happened; or

capital proceeds from a CGT event if:

the CGT event relates to an eligible venture capital investment; and

the share of a partner in an ESVCLP in a *capital gain or *capital loss from the CGT event is disregarded under section 118-407; or

that part of the capital proceeds from a CGT event, relating to an eligible venture capital investment, for which there is a partial exemption under section 118-408; or

capital proceeds from a CGT event if a capital gain made from the event may be disregarded under subsection 360-50(4).

The amount of the non-assessable part referred to in section 104-70 for an entity shown in the table is adjusted to exclude the amount or amounts applicable to the entity under the table.

Example: Claude is paid $100 by the trustee of a unit trust. The trustee advises that the amount comprises $50 CGT discount, $25 small business 50% reduction and $25 net income from a capital gain made by the trust.

In applying the rules in Subdivision 115-C of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997, Claude reduces his capital gain of $100 by a $20 net capital loss from an earlier year. He then reduces the remaining $80 gain by $40 (CGT discount) and $20 (small business 50% reduction) leaving a net capital gain of $20.

In applying the rules in CGT event E4, the $100 payment is reduced by $25 (being the amount assessed under section 97 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936). It is further reduced by $50 under item 1 of the table and $5 under item 3. Claude’s non-assessable part is $20.

Effectively, CGT event E4 applies to the $20 small business 50% reduction allowed to Claude in applying Subdivision 115-C of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.

Note 1: Step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) (see table item 1) reduces by 50% the trust’s discount capital gains remaining after applying capital losses and earlier net capital losses. That 50% is excluded from the trust’s net capital gain.

Note 2: Subdivision 152-C (small business 50% reduction—see table items 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7) reduces by 50% the trust’s capital gains or discount capital gains remaining after applying step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1). That 50% is also excluded from the trust’s net capital gain.

Note 3: Paragraph 115-215(3)(b) or (c) (see table items 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6) treats a beneficiary as having an extra capital gain if an amount of the trust’s net income that is included in the beneficiary’s assessable income is attributable to trust gains that were reduced by step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) and/or the small business 50% reduction.

(5) A chain of trusts consists of 2 or more trusts where at least one of these conditions is satisfied for each of the trusts:

the trustee of the trust owns units or interests in another of the trusts; or

the trustee of another of the trusts owns units or interests in the trust.

Item 7 of the table in subsection (4) does not apply if the entity making the payment is a managed investment trust.

104-72 Reducing your capital gain under CGT event E4 if you are a trustee

A *capital gain you make under subsection 104-70(4) is reduced if:

you are the trustee of another trust that is a *fixed trust and is not a *complying superannuation entity; and

(b) you are taken to have a *capital gain under paragraph 115-215(3)(b) or (c) (your notional gain) in respect of a corresponding trust gain (the trust gain); and

(c) some or all (the attributable amount) of the total of the non-assessable parts referred to in subsection 104-70(4) is attributable to proceeds from the trust gain.

The *capital gain is reduced (but not below 0) by the lesser of:

your notional gain; and

the attributable amount.

104-75 Beneficiary becoming entitled to a trust asset: CGT event E5

(1) CGT event E5 happens if a beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to a *CGT asset of a trust (except a unit trust or a trust to which Division 128 applies) as against the trustee (disregarding any legal disability the beneficiary is under).

Note: Division 128 deals with the effect of death.

The time of the event is when the beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to the asset.

Trustee makes a capital gain or loss

(3) The trustee makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the event) is more than its *cost base. The trustee makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Exception for trustee

A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

Note: There is also an exception for employee share trusts: see section 130-80.

Beneficiary makes a capital gain or loss

(5) The beneficiary makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the event) is more than the *cost base of the beneficiary’s interest in the trust capital to the extent it relates to the asset.

The beneficiary makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the *reduced cost base of that beneficiary’s interest in the trust capital to the extent it relates to the asset.

Exceptions for beneficiary

A *capital gain or *capital loss the beneficiary makes is disregarded if:

the beneficiary *acquired the CGT asset that is the interest (except by way of an assignment from another entity) for no expenditure; or

the beneficiary acquired it before 20 September 1985; or

all or part of the capital gain or capital loss the trustee makes from the CGT event is disregarded under Subdivision 118-B (about main residence).

Expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note 1: For provisions affecting the application of Subdivision 118-B to the trustee, see sections 118-215 to 118-230.

Note 2: There are also exceptions for employee share trusts: see sections 130-80 and 130-90.

104-80 Disposal to beneficiary to end income right: CGT event E6

(1) CGT event E6 happens if the trustee of a trust (except a unit trust or a trust to which Division 128 applies) *disposes of a *CGT asset of the trust to a beneficiary in satisfaction of the beneficiary’s right, or part of it, to receive *ordinary income or *statutory income from the trust.

Note: Division 128 deals with the effect of death.

The time of the event is when the disposal occurs.

Trustee makes a capital gain or loss

(3) The trustee makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the disposal) is more than its *cost base. It makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Exception for trustee

A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

Beneficiary makes a capital gain or loss

(5) The beneficiary makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the disposal) is more than the *cost base of the right, or the part of it. The beneficiary makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the *reduced cost base of the right or part.

Note: If the beneficiary did not pay anything for the right, the market value substitution rule does not apply: see section 112-20.

Exception for beneficiary

A *capital gain or *capital loss the beneficiary makes is disregarded if it *acquired the CGT asset that is the right before 20 September 1985.

104-85 Disposal to beneficiary to end capital interest: CGT event E7

(1) CGT event E7 happens if the trustee of a trust (except a unit trust or a trust to which Division 128 applies) *disposes of a *CGT asset of the trust to a beneficiary in satisfaction of the beneficiary’s interest, or part of it, in the trust capital.

Note: Division 128 deals with the effect of death.

The time of the event is when the disposal occurs.

Trustee makes a capital gain or loss

(3) The trustee makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the disposal) is more than its *cost base. It makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Exception for trustee

A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

Beneficiary makes a capital gain or loss

(5) The beneficiary makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the disposal) is more than the *cost base of the interest, or the part of it, being satisfied. The beneficiary makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the *reduced cost base of that interest or part.

Exceptions for beneficiary

A *capital gain or *capital loss the beneficiary makes is disregarded if:

the beneficiary *acquired the CGT asset that is the interest (except by way of an assignment from another entity) for no expenditure; or

the beneficiary acquired it before 20 September 1985; or

all or part of the capital gain or capital loss the trustee makes from the CGT event is disregarded under Subdivision 118-B (about main residence).

Expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note 1: For provisions affecting the application of Subdivision 118-B to the trustee, see sections 118-215 to 118-230.

Note 2: There is also an exception for employee share trusts: see section 130-90.

104-90 Disposal by beneficiary of capital interest: CGT event E8

(1) CGT event E8 happens if:

you are the beneficiary under a trust (except a unit trust or a trust to which Division 128 applies); and

you did not give any money or property to *acquire the CGT asset that is your interest in the trust capital and you did not acquire it by assignment; and

you *dispose of the interest, or part of it (but not to the trustee).

Note: Division 128 deals with the effect of death.

The time of the event is:

when you enter into the contract for the *disposal; or

if there is no contract—when you stop owning the interest or part.

Note 1: You work out if you have made a capital gain or capital loss under sections 104-95 and 104-100.

Note 2: There is a special indexation rule for this event: see section 114-10.

104-95 Making a capital gain

You are the only beneficiary

If you are the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of that interest, you work out if you have made a *capital gain in this way:

Working out your capital gain

Step 1. Work out the capital proceeds from the *disposal.

Step 2. Work out the net asset amount.

Step 3. If the Step 1 amount is greater, you make a capital gain equal to the difference.

(2) The net asset amount is worked out in this way:

Working out the net asset amount

Step 1. Work out the total of the *cost bases (at the time of the disposal) of the *CGT assets that the trustee *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and that formed part of the trust capital at that time.

Step 2. Work out the total of the *market values (at the time of the disposal) of the *CGT assets that the trustee *acquired before 20 September 1985 and that formed part of the trust capital at that time.

Step 3. Work out the amount of money that formed part of the trust capital at the time of the disposal.

Step 4. Add up the Step 1, 2 and 3 amounts.

Step 5. Subtract from the Step 4 amount any liabilities of the trust at the time of the disposal.

Step 6. The result is the net asset amount.

Example: You dispose of your interest in the trust capital for $10,000 (the capital proceeds).

The total of the cost bases of the CGT assets that the trustee acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is $6,000.

The total of the market values of the CGT assets that the trustee acquired before 20 September 1985 is $2,500.

There is $1,000 in the trust. The trust liabilities are $500.

The net asset amount is:

You make a capital gain of:

(3) If you *dispose of only part of that interest, any *capital gain is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:

Example: To vary the example in subsection (2), suppose you dispose of 50% of your interest for $5,000 (the capital proceeds).

The Step 2 amount becomes:

You make a capital gain of:

There is more than one beneficiary

(4) If you are not the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of your interest, any *capital gain is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:

Example: To vary the example in subsection (2), suppose you have a 20% interest in the trust capital and you dispose of it for $4,000 (the capital proceeds).

The Step 2 amount becomes:

You make a capital gain of:

(5) If you are not the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of part of your interest, any *capital gain is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:

Example: To vary the example in subsection (2), suppose you have a 50% interest in the trust capital. You dispose of 20% of it for $1,000 (the capital proceeds).

The Step 2 amount becomes:

You make a capital gain of:

Exception

A *capital gain you make is disregarded if you *acquired the CGT asset that is the interest in the trust capital before 20 September 1985.

Note: You can make a gain if you dispose of an interest in a trust that you acquired before that day: see CGT event K6.

104-100 Making a capital loss

You are the only beneficiary

If you are the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of that interest, you work out if you have made a *capital loss in this way:

Working out your capital loss

Step 1. Work out the capital proceeds from the *disposal.

Step 2. Work out the reduced net asset amount.

Step 3. If the Step 1 amount is less, you make a capital loss equal to the difference.

(2) The reduced net asset amount is worked out in this way:

Working out the reduced net asset amount

Step 1. Work out the total of the *reduced cost bases (at the time of the disposal) of the *CGT assets that the trustee *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and that formed part of the trust capital at that time.

Step 2. Work out the total of the *market values (at the time of the disposal) of the *CGT assets that the trustee *acquired before 20 September 1985 and that formed part of the trust capital at that time.

Step 3. Work out the amount of money that formed part of the trust capital at the time of the disposal.

Step 4. Add up the Step 1, 2 and 3 amounts.

Step 5. Subtract from the Step 4 amount any liabilities of the trust at the time of the disposal.

Step 6. The result is the reduced net asset amount.

(3) If you *dispose of only part of that interest, any *capital loss is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:

There is more than one beneficiary

(4) If you are not the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of your interest, any *capital loss is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:

(5) If you are not the only beneficiary with an interest in the trust capital and you *dispose of part of your interest, any *capital loss is worked out using the method statement in subsection (1), except that the Step 2 amount is replaced by:

Exception

A *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the CGT asset that is the interest in the trust capital before 20 September 1985.

104-105 Creating a trust over future property: CGT event E9

(1) CGT event E9 happens if:

you agree for consideration that when property comes into existence you will hold it on trust; and

at the time of the agreement, no potential beneficiary under the trust has a beneficial interest in the rights created by the agreement.

The time of the event is when you made the agreement.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *market value the property would have had if it had existed when you made the agreement is more than any *incidental costs you incurred that relate to the event. You make a capital loss if that market value is less.

The costs can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, they do not include an amount you have received as recoupment of them and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

104-107A AMIT—cost base reduction exceeds cost base: CGT event E10

(1) CGT event E10 happens if:

you are a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year because you have a CGT asset that is your unit or your interest in the AMIT; and

either:

the *cost base of that asset is reduced under subsection 104-107B(2) during the income year; or

the cost base of that asset is nil at the start of the income year; and

the asset’s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the excess mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(a); and

the asset’s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year exceeds the cost base of the asset.

The time of the event is:

if subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies—the time at which the reduction occurs under section 104-107B; or

if subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) applies—the time at which the *cost base would have been reduced under subsection 104-107B(2) during the income year if the cost base had been greater than nil at the start of the income year.

(3) You make a capital gain equal to:

if the *cost base of the asset is nil—the excess mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(a); or

if the cost base of the asset is not nil—the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(d) of this section.

Note 1: If you make a capital gain, the cost base and reduced cost base of the CGT asset are reduced to nil (see paragraph 104-107B(2)(a)).

Note 2: You cannot make a capital loss.

Exceptions

A *capital gain you make from CGT event E10 is disregarded if you *acquired the CGT asset that is the unit or interest before 20 September 1985.

104-107B Annual cost base adjustment for member’s unit or interest in AMIT

This section applies if you are a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year because you have a CGT asset that is your unit or your interest in the AMIT.

If the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the excess mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(a):

(a) in a case where that AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the *cost base of the asset—reduce the cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset to nil; or

(b) otherwise—reduce the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset by that AMIT cost base net amount.

Note: If that AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the cost base of the asset, CGT event E10 will happen (see section 104-107A).

(3) If the *CGT asset’s *AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the shortfall mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(b), increase the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset by that AMIT cost base net amount.

The time of the reduction or increase is:

(a) unless paragraph (b) applies—just before the end of the income year; or

(b) if a *CGT event happens to the *CGT asset at a time when you hold it before the end of the income year—just before the time of that CGT event.

104-107C AMIT cost base net amount

The *CGT asset’s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is:

if the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year exceeds the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base increase amount for the income year—the amount of the excess; or

if the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year falls short of the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base increase amount for the income year—the amount of the shortfall.

104-107D AMIT cost base reduction amount

(1) The *CGT asset’s AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year is the total of:

money, and the *market value of any property, if:

you start to have a right to receive the money or property from the trustee of the *AMIT in the income year; and

that right is indefeasible (disregarding section 276-55) or is reasonably likely not to be defeated; and

all amounts of tax offset that you have for the income year in respect of the AMIT because of the operation of section 276-80;

to the extent that the total is reasonably attributable to the CGT asset.

If:

CGT event A1, C2, E1, E2, E6 or E7 happens to the CGT asset before the end of the income year; and

as a result, the time of the reduction or increase mentioned in subsection 104-107B(4) is just before the time of that CGT event;

do not include in the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year any *capital proceeds from that CGT event.

104-107E AMIT cost base increase amount

(1) The *CGT asset’s AMIT cost base increase amount for the income year is the total of the 2 amounts set out in the following subsections.

First amount—total of amounts not related to capital gains

The first amount is the total of all of the following amounts included in your assessable income or non-assessable non-exempt income for the income year in respect of the *AMIT, to the extent that they are reasonably attributable to the CGT asset:

amounts so included because of the operation of section 276-80;

amounts so included otherwise than because of the operation of section 276-80 (as reduced in accordance with section 276-100).

For the purposes of subsection (2), disregard the *AMIT’s net capital gain (if any) for the income year.

Second amount—total of amounts related to capital gains

The second amount is the total of each determined member component of a character relating to *capital gains that:

you have for the income year in respect of the *AMIT; and

is taken into account under section 276-80.

Residence assumption

For the purposes of working out amounts under subsections (2) and (4), assume that you are an Australian resident.

104-107F Receipt of money etc. increasing AMIT cost base reduction amount not to be treated as income

Subsections (2) and (3) apply if:

you start to have a right to receive any money or any property from the trustee of an *AMIT in an income year; and

the right is indefeasible (disregarding section 276-55) or is reasonably likely not to be defeated; and

(c) the right is not remuneration or consideration for you providing finance, services, goods or property to the trustee of the AMIT or to another person; and

the right is reasonably attributable to a CGT asset that is a *membership interest in the AMIT; and

(e) the CGT asset is neither *trading stock nor a *Division 230 financial arrangement; and

as a result of you starting to have the right, the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base reduction amount for the income year is increased because of the operation of section 104-107D.

These provisions do not apply to you starting to have the right:

sections 6-5 (about ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans);

(b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes).

Section 6-10 (about statutory income) does not apply to you starting to have the right except so far as that section applies in relation to section 102-5 (about net capital gains).

104-107G Effect of AMIT cost base net amount on cost of AMIT membership interest or unit that is a revenue asset—adjustment of cost of asset

This section applies if:

you are a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year because you have a CGT asset that is your unit or your interest in the AMIT; and

the CGT asset is a revenue asset; and

the CGT asset is not a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

Make the adjustments in subsection (3) for the purposes of working out an amount included in your assessable income (or working out an amount treated as a deduction) under any of these provisions:

sections 6-5 (about ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans);

(b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes).

If the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the excess mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(a):

in a case where that AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the cost of the asset—reduce the cost of the asset to nil; or

otherwise—reduce the cost of the asset by that AMIT cost base net amount.

Note: If the AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the cost of the asset, see section 104-107H.

If the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year is the shortfall mentioned in paragraph 104-107C(b), increase the cost of the asset by that AMIT cost base net amount.

The time of the reduction or increase is:

(a) unless paragraph (b) applies—just before the end of the income year; or

(b) if a *CGT event happens to the *CGT asset at a time when you hold it before the end of the income year—just before the time of that CGT event.

For the purposes of this section and section 104-107H, in working out the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year, disregard any right that you start to have in the income year if:

the right is for you to receive any money or any property from the trustee of the *AMIT; and

the right is remuneration or consideration for you providing finance, services, goods or property to the trustee of the AMIT or to another person.

For the purposes of section 118-20, treat this section as being outside of this Part.

Note: Section 118-20 deals with reducing capital gains if an amount is otherwise assessable.

104-107H Effect of AMIT cost base net amount on cost of AMIT membership interest or unit that is a revenue asset—amount included in assessable income

Subsection (2) applies if:

paragraph 104-107G(3)(a) applies in respect of the CGT asset’s AMIT cost base net amount for the income year; and

that AMIT cost base net amount exceeds the cost of the CGT asset just before the time mentioned in subsection 104-107G(5).

Include in your assessable income for the income year in which that time occurs:

if the cost of the CGT asset was nil just before that time—the cost reduction amount; or

otherwise—the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

Subsection (2) applies despite subsection 104-107F(3).

For the purposes of section 118-20, treat this section as being outside of this Part.

Note: Section 118-20 deals with reducing capital gains if an amount is otherwise assessable.

Subdivision 104-F — Leases

104-110 Granting a lease: CGT event F1

(1) CGT event F1 happens if a lessor grants, renews or extends a lease.

Note 1: Other CGT events can apply to leases. An assignment of a lease is an example of CGT event A1.

Note 2: There are special rules that apply to some lease transactions: see Division 132.

The time of the event is:

for the grant of a lease:

when the contract for the lease is entered into; or

if there is no contract—at the start of the lease; or

for a renewal or extension—at the start of the renewal or extension.

(3) The lessor makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the grant, renewal or extension are more than the expenditure it incurred on the grant, renewal or extension. It makes a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, it does not include an amount you have received as recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income, or an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

Exception

The lessor can choose to apply section 104-115 to certain long term leases. If it does so, this section does not apply.

104-115 Granting a long-term lease: CGT event F2

(1) CGT event F2 happens if:

a lessor grants a lease over land (whether or not the lessor owns an estate in fee simple in the land), or renews or extends a lease over land; and

the lease, renewal or extension is for at least 50 years and:

at the time of the grant, renewal or extension, it was reasonable to expect that it would continue for at least 50 years; and

the terms of the lease, renewal or extension as they apply to the lessee are substantially the same as those under which the lessor owned the land or held a lease of the land; and

the lessor chooses to apply this section instead of section 104-110.

Note: Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.

The time of the event is when the lessor grants the lease, or at the start of the renewal or extension, as appropriate.

(3) The lessor makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the event are more than the *cost base of the lessor’s interest in the land. The lessor makes a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less than the *reduced cost base of that interest.

Exceptions

A *capital gain or *capital loss the lessor makes is disregarded if:

it *acquired the CGT asset that is the land, or the lease to the lessor was granted, before 20 September 1985; or

the lease to the lessor has been renewed or extended and the last renewal or extension started before that day.

Note: For any later CGT event that happens to the land or the lessor’s lease of it: see section 132-10.

104-120 Lessor pays lessee to get lease changed: CGT event F3

(1) CGT event F3 happens if a lessor incurs expenditure in getting the lessee’s agreement to vary or waive a term of the lease. The lessor makes a capital loss equal to the amount of expenditure it incurred. (The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.)

The time of the event is when the term is varied or waived.

Exception

However, this event does not apply to expenditure for a lease to which the lessor has chosen to apply section 104-115.

104-125 Lessee receives payment for changing lease: CGT event F4

(1) CGT event F4 happens if a lessee receives a payment from the lessor for agreeing to vary or waive a term of the lease.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

The time of the event is when the term is varied or waived.

(3) The lessee makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the event are more than the lease’s *cost base (at the time of the event). If the lessee makes a *capital gain, the lease’s cost base is also reduced to nil.

Note: The lessee cannot make a capital loss.

(4) On the other hand, if those *capital proceeds are less, the lease’s *cost base is reduced by that amount at the time of the event.

Example: On 1 January 1999 a lessee enters a lease. On 1 May 1999 the lessee agrees to waive a term. The lessor pays the lessee $1,000 for this.

If the lease’s cost base at the time of the waiver is $2,500, it is reduced from $2,500 to $1,500.

On 1 September 1999 the lessee agrees to waive another term. The lessor pays the lessee $2,000 for this.

If the lease’s cost base at the time of the waiver is $1,500, the lessee makes a capital gain of $500, and the cost base is reduced to nil.

Exceptions

A *capital gain the lessee makes is disregarded if:

the lease was granted before 20 September 1985; or

for a lease that has been renewed or extended—the start of the last renewal or extension occurred before that day.

104-130 Lessor receives payment for changing lease: CGT event F5

(1) CGT event F5 happens if a lessor receives a payment from the lessee for agreeing to vary or waive a term of the lease.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

The time of the event is when the term is varied or waived.

(3) The lessor makes a capital gain if the *capital proceeds from the event are more than the expenditure the lessor incurs in relation to the variation or waiver. The lessor makes a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less.

Example: You own a shopping centre. The lessee of a shop in the centre pays you $10,000 for agreeing to change the terms of its lease. You incur expenses of $1,000 for a solicitor and $500 for a valuer. You make a capital gain of $8,500.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, it does not include an amount you have received as recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income.

Exceptions

A *capital gain or *capital loss the lessor makes is disregarded if:

the lease was granted before 20 September 1985; or

for a lease that has been renewed or extended—the start of the last renewal or extension occurred before that day.

Subdivision 104-G — Shares

104-135 Capital payment for shares: CGT event G1

(1) CGT event G1 happens if:

a company makes a payment to you in respect of a *share you own in the company (except for CGT event A1 or C2 happening in relation to the share); and

(b) some or all of the payment (the non-assessable part) is not a *dividend, or an amount that is taken to be a dividend under section 47 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the payment is not included in your assessable income.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

In working out the non-assessable part, disregard any part of the payment that is:

non-assessable non-exempt income; or

repaid by you; or

compensation you paid that can reasonably be regarded as a repayment of all or part of the payment; or

an amount referred to in section 152-125 (which exempts a payment of a small business 15-year exemption amount) as an exempt amount.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

However, the non-assessable part is not reduced by any part of the payment that you can deduct.

The time of the event is when the company makes the payment.

(3) You make a capital gain if the amount of the non-assessable part is more than the *share’s *cost base. If you make a *capital gain, the share’s *cost base and *reduced cost base are reduced to nil.

Note 1: You cannot make a capital loss.

Note 2: A capital gain under former section 160ZL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is also taken into account for the purposes of this subsection: see section 104-135 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

However, if the amount of the non-assessable part is not more than the *share’s *cost base, that cost base and its *reduced cost base are reduced by the amount of the non-assessable part.

Note: Cost base adjustments are made only under Subdivision 125-B if there is a roll-over under that Subdivision for CGT event G1 happening as a result of a demerger.

Exceptions

A *capital gain you make is disregarded if you *acquired the CGT asset that is the *share before 20 September 1985.

You disregard a payment by a liquidator for the purposes of this section if the company ceases to exist within 18 months of the payment.

Note: The payment will be part of your capital proceeds for CGT event C2 happening when the share ends.

You also disregard a payment that is personal services income included in your assessable income, or another entity’s assessable income, under section 86-15.

104-145 Liquidator or administrator declares shares or financial instruments worthless: CGT event G3

(1) CGT event G3 happens if you own *shares in a company, or financial instruments issued by or created by or in relation to a company, and a liquidator or administrator of the company declares in writing that the liquidator or administrator has reasonable grounds to believe (as at the time of the declaration) that:

for shares—there is no likelihood that shareholders in the company, or shareholders of the relevant class of shares, will receive any further distribution for their shares; or

for financial instruments—the instruments, or a class of instruments that includes instruments of that kind, have no value or have only negligible value.

The time of the event is when the declaration was made.

Examples of financial instruments referred to in subsection (1) are:

*debentures, bonds or promissory notes issued by the company; and

loans to the company; and

futures contracts, forward contracts or currency swap contracts relating to the company; and

rights or options to acquire an asset referred to in a preceding paragraph of this subsection; and

rights or options to acquire *shares in the company.

(4) You can choose to make a capital loss equal to the *reduced cost base of your *shares or financial instruments (as at the time of the declaration).

If you make the choice, the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *shares or financial instruments are reduced to nil just after the declaration was made.

Note: This is for the purpose of working out if you make a capital gain or loss from any later CGT event in relation to the shares or financial instruments.

Exceptions

You cannot choose to make a *capital loss if:

you *acquired the shares or financial instruments before 20 September 1985; or

the shares or financial instruments were *revenue assets at the time when the declaration was made.

You cannot choose to make a *capital loss for a *share, or a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a share, if:

(a) you acquired the beneficial interest (the ESS interest) in the share or right under an *employee share scheme; and

subsequent to an amount being included in your assessable income under Division 83A (about employee share schemes) in relation to the ESS interest, section 83A-310 (about forfeiture) applies in relation to ESS interest.

Subdivision 104-H — Special capital receipts

104-150 Forfeiture of deposit: CGT event H1

(1) CGT event H1 happens if a deposit paid to you is forfeited because a prospective sale or other transaction does not proceed.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Example: You decide to sell land. Before entering into a contract of sale, the prospective purchaser pays you a 2 month holding deposit of $1,000.

The negotiations fail and the deposit is forfeited.

The amount of the deposit is reduced by any part of the deposit that is:

repaid by you; or

compensation you paid that can reasonably be regarded as a repayment of all or part of the deposit.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

However, the deposit is not reduced by any part of the payment that you can deduct.

The time of the event is when the deposit is forfeited.

(3) You make a capital gain if the deposit is more than the expenditure you incur in connection with the prospective sale or other transaction. You make a capital loss if the deposit is less.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, it does not include an amount you have received as recoupment of it and that is not included in your assessable income.

Example: To continue the example: if you gave a lawyer wine worth $400 in connection with the prospective sale, you make a capital gain of:

104-155 Receipt for event relating to a CGT asset: CGT event H2

(1) CGT event H2 happens if:

an act, transaction or event occurs in relation to a CGT asset that you own; and

the act, transaction or event does not result in an adjustment being made to the asset’s *cost base or *reduced cost base.

Example: You own land on which you intend to construct a manufacturing facility. A business promotion organisation pays you $50,000 as an inducement to start construction early.

No contractual rights or obligations are created by the arrangement.

The payment is made because of an event (the inducement to start construction early) in relation to your land.

Note: This event does not apply if any other CGT event applies: see section 102-25.

The time of the event is when the act, transaction or event occurs.

(3) You make a capital gain if the *capital proceeds because of the *CGT event are more than the *incidental costs you incurred that relate to the event. You make a capital loss if those capital proceeds are less.

The costs can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, they do not include an amount you have received as recoupment of them and that is not included in your assessable income.

Exceptions

(5) CGT event H2 does not happen if:

the act, transaction or event is the borrowing of money or the obtaining of credit from another entity; or

the act, transaction or event requires you to do something that is another CGT event that happens to you; or

a company issues or allots *equity interests or *non-equity shares in the company; or

the trustee of a unit trust issues units in the trust; or

a company grants an option to acquire equity interests, non-equity shares or *debentures in the company; or

a company grants an option to dispose of *shares in the company to the company; or

the trustee of a unit trust grants an option to acquire units or debentures in the trust; or

a company or a trust that is a member of a demerger group issues new *ownership interests under a demerger.

Note: For demergers, see Division 125.

Subdivision 104-I — Australian residency ends

104-160 Individual or company stops being an Australian resident: CGT event I1

(1) CGT event I1 happens if you stop being an Australian resident.

The time of the event is when you stop being one.

You need to work out if you have made a *capital gain or a *capital loss for each CGT asset that you owned just before the time of the event, except one that is taxable Australian property:

covered by item 1 or 3 of the table in section 855-15; or

covered by item 4 of that table because it is an option or right to *acquire a CGT asset covered by item 1 or 3 of that table.

(4) You make a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the event) is more than its *cost base. You make a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

If the asset is an indirect Australian real property interest, or an option or right to acquire such an interest, this Part and Part 3-3 apply to the asset as if the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset (just after the time of the event) were its *market value at the time of the event.

Subsection (4A) does not apply if the *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded under subsection (5) or (6), or subsection 104-165(2).

Exceptions

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

104-165 Exception for individuals

Choosing to disregard making a gain or loss

If you are an individual, you can choose to disregard making a *capital gain or a *capital loss from all *CGT assets covered by CGT event I1.

If you do so choose, each of those assets is taken to be taxable Australian property until the earlier of:

a CGT event happening in relation to the asset, if the CGT event involves you ceasing to own the asset;

you again becoming an Australian resident.

Note: If you are an individual who was in Australia on 6 April 2006, and you remain an Australian resident from that day until you stop being one, and you were an Australian resident for less than 5 years during the 10 years before you stopped being one, see section 104-166 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

104-170 Trust stops being a resident trust: CGT event I2

(1) CGT event I2 happens if a trust stops being a *resident trust for CGT purposes.

The time of the event is when the trust stops being one.

(3) The trustee needs to work out if it has made a *capital gain or a *capital loss for each *CGT asset that it owned (in the capacity as trustee of the trust) just before the time of the event except one that is *taxable Australian property:

covered by item 1 or 3 of the table in section 855-15; or

covered by item 4 of that table because it is an option or right to *acquire a CGT asset covered by item 1 or 3 of that table.

(4) The trustee makes a capital gain if the *market value of the asset (at the time of the event) is more than the asset’s *cost base. The trustee makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

If the asset is an indirect Australian real property interest, or an option or right to acquire such an interest, this Part and Part 3-3 apply to the asset as if the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset (just after the time of the event) were its *market value at the time of the event.

Subsection (4A) does not apply if the *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded under subsection (5).

Exception

A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes is disregarded if it *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

Subdivision 104-J — CGT events relating to roll-overs

104-175 Company ceasing to be member of wholly-owned group after roll-over: CGT event J1

(1) CGT event J1 happens if:

(a) there is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B for a *CGT event (the roll-over event) that happens in relation to a *CGT asset (the roll-over asset) involving 2 companies that are members of the same *wholly-owned group; and

(b) the company (the recipient company) that owns the roll-over asset just after the roll-over stops being a 100% subsidiary of a company in the group in the circumstances set out in subsection (2) or (3); and

at the time of the roll-over, the recipient company was a *100% subsidiary of:

(i) the other company involved in the roll-over event (the originating company); or

another member of the same wholly-owned group.

Note: If the roll-over was under former section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, CGT event J1 does not happen if there would not have been a deemed disposal and re-acquisition under that Act: see section 104-175 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

This condition applies if there has been only one roll-over within the wholly-owned group under Subdivision 126-B involving the roll-over asset.

The recipient company must stop, at a time (the break-up time) when it still owns the roll-over asset, being a *100% subsidiary of a member of the group (the ultimate holding company) that is not a 100% subsidiary of any other member of the group at the time of the roll-over event.

This condition applies if the roll-over event was the last in a series of *CGT events involving the roll-over asset and there was a roll-over within the wholly-owned group under Subdivision 126-B for all the events.

The recipient company must stop, at a time (also the break-up time) when it still owns the roll-over asset, being a *100% subsidiary of another member of the group (also the ultimate holding company) that was not a 100% subsidiary of any other member of the group at the time of the first of the events.

The time of the event is the break-up time.

(5) The recipient company makes a capital gain if the roll-over asset’s *market value (at the break-up time) is more than its *cost base. It makes a capital loss if that market value is less than its *reduced cost base.

Exceptions

(6) CGT event J1 does not happen if the conditions in section 104-180 or 104-182 are satisfied.

A *capital gain or *capital loss the recipient company makes is disregarded if the roll-over asset is taken to have been *acquired by it before 20 September 1985 under Subdivision 126-B (except where the roll-over asset has stopped being a pre-CGT asset, for example, because of Division 149).

Note: CGT event J1 does not happen to a demerged entity or a member of a demerger group if CGT event A1 or C2 happens to a demerging entity under a demerger: see section 125-160.

Acquisition rule

The recipient company is taken to have *acquired the roll-over asset at the break-up time.

Cost base adjustment

The first element of the recipient company’s *cost base and *reduced cost base of the roll-over asset (just after the break-up time) is its *market value (at the break-up time).

104-180 Sub-group break-up

The condition in subsection (2) must have been satisfied at each time when there is a roll-over within the wholly-owned group under Subdivision 126-B for a CGT event happening in relation to the roll-over asset.

(2) The originating company and the recipient company must have been members of a group of 2 or more companies (the sub-group) within the *wholly-owned group (excluding the ultimate holding company) for which one of these is satisfied:

(a) if the sub-group consists of 2 companies, either the recipient company is a 100% subsidiary of the other company (the holding company), or the other company is a 100% subsidiary of the recipient company (also the holding company);

if the sub-group consists of 3 or more companies:

(i) the recipient company is a 100% subsidiary of one of those other companies (also the holding company) and so are the other companies (except the holding company) in the sub-group; or

(ii) each of the companies in the sub-group (except the recipient company) is a 100% subsidiary of the recipient company (also the holding company).

If the roll-over event was the last in a series of *CGT events involving the roll-over asset and there was a roll-over within the wholly-owned group under Subdivision 126-B for all the events, each company that was the originating company or the recipient company for the purposes of that Subdivision for one of those roll-overs must have been members of the sub-group at the time of each of the roll-overs.

The conditions in subsection (5) or (6) must be satisfied just after the break-up time.

If the recipient company was the holding company of the sub-group, none of its *shares can be owned by:

the ultimate holding company; or

a company that is a *100% subsidiary of the ultimate holding company just after the break-up time.

If the recipient company was not the holding company of the sub-group, no *shares in it or in the holding company can be owned by:

the ultimate holding company; or

a company that is a *100% subsidiary of the ultimate holding company just after the break-up time.

104-182 Consolidated group break-up

CGT event J1 does not happen if the recipient company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group at the break-up time (whether or not it becomes a subsidiary member of another consolidated group at that time).

104-185 Change in relation to replacement asset or improved asset after a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E: CGT event J2

(1) CGT event J2 happens if you choose a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year and:

(a) you *acquire a replacement asset (the replacement asset), or you incur *fourth element expenditure in relation to a CGT asset (also the replacement asset), or you do both, by the end of the *replacement asset period; and

the replacement asset is your active asset at the end of the replacement asset period; and

if the replacement asset is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust, at the end of the replacement asset period:

either you, or an entity *connected with you, is a CGT concession stakeholder in the company or trust; or

CGT concession stakeholders in the company or trust have a small business participation percentage in you of at least 90%; and

a change of a kind specified in subsection (2) or (3) happens after the end of the replacement asset period.

Note 1: The replacement asset period may be modified or extended, see section 104-190.

Note 2: There is an exception: see subsection (8).

Note 3: There may be 2 or more replacement assets.

Note 4: CGT event J2 can also happen in relation to a capital gain you rolled-over under Division 17A of former Part IIIA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or Division 123 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 if the status of the replacement asset changes: see section 104-185 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

For any replacement asset that satisfied paragraph (1)(b) and, if applicable, paragraph (1)(c), the change is:

the asset stops being your active asset; or

the asset becomes your trading stock; or

you start to use the asset solely to produce your exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

In addition, for a *share in a company or an interest in a trust, the change is:

CGT event G3 or I1 happens in relation to it; or

paragraph (1)(c) stops being satisfied.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

The time of the event is when the change happens.

(5) You make a capital gain equal to:

(a) if there is only one replacement asset that satisfied paragraph (1)(b) and, if applicable, paragraph (1)(c)—the amount of the capital gain that you disregarded under Subdivision 152-E (the 152-E amount); or

if there are 2 or more replacement assets that satisfied paragraph (1)(b) and, if applicable, paragraph (1)(c) and a change of a kind specified in subsection (2) or (3) occurs for all of them—the 152-E amount; or

if there are 2 or more replacement assets that satisfied paragraph (1)(b) and, if applicable, paragraph (1)(c) and such a change occurs for one or more but not all of them—so much (if any) of the 152-E amount as exceeds the sum of the following:

the first element of the *cost base of each of those replacement assets *acquired;

the incidental costs you incurred to acquire each of those replacement assets (which can include giving property, see section 103-5);

the amount of fourth element expenditure incurred in relation to each of those replacement assets;

in relation to which such a change did not occur.

If CGT event J6 has happened in relation to the small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E, subsection (5) applies to the 152-E amount reduced by the amount of the capital gain under that event.

If CGT event J2 happens again in a later income year in relation to the small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E, subsection (5) applies to any remaining part of the 152-E amount reduced by the amount of the capital gain under the earlier event.

(8) CGT event J2 does not happen because of paragraph (2)(a) for a *share in a company or an interest in a trust if the share or interest ceased to be an *active asset only because of changes in the *market values of assets that were owned by the company or trust when you *acquired the share or interest or incurred the *fourth element expenditure.

(9) You incur fourth element expenditure in relation to a *CGT asset if you incur capital expenditure that is included, under subsection 110-25(5), in the fourth element of the *cost base of the asset.

104-190 Replacement asset period

(1A) If you choose a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year, the replacement asset period is the period:

starting one year before the last CGT event in the income year for which you obtain the roll-over; and

ending at the later of:

2 years after that last CGT event; and

if the first-mentioned CGT event happened because you *disposed of the CGT asset—6 months after the latest time a possible financial benefit becomes or could become due under a look-through earnout right relating to the CGT asset and the disposal.

(1) The replacement asset period is modified if your *capital proceeds for the *CGT event are increased under subsection 116-45(2) or 116-60(3) after the end of that period. Instead, you have until 12 months after you receive those additional proceeds to *acquire a replacement asset, or incur *fourth element expenditure in relation to a *CGT asset, or do both.

Note: Section 116-45 applies if you do not receive your capital proceeds despite having taken all reasonable steps to get them, and section 116-60 applies if your capital proceeds are misappropriated by your employee or agent.

(2) The Commissioner may extend the replacement asset period, or that period as modified by subsection (1).

104-195 Trust failing to cease to exist after roll-over under Subdivision 124-N: CGT event J4

(1) CGT event J4 happens if:

there is a roll-over under Subdivision 124-N for a trust *disposing of a CGT asset to a company under a trust restructure; and

the trust fails to cease to exist:

within 6 months after the start of the trust restructuring period; or

if that is not possible because of circumstances outside the control of the trustee—as soon as practicable after the end of that 6 month period; and

the company owns the asset when the failure happens.

Example: Circumstances would be outside the control of the trustee if the trustee is involved in litigation concerning the trust and cannot wind up the trust until the litigation is finished.

(2) CGT event J4 also happens if:

(a) there is a roll-over under Subdivision 124-N for an entity (the shareholding entity) receiving a *share in a company in exchange for a unit or interest in a trust under a trust restructure; and

the trust fails to cease to exist:

within 6 months after the start of the trust restructuring period; or

if that is not possible because of circumstances outside the control of the trustee—as soon as practicable after the end of that 6 month period; and

the shareholding entity owns the share when the failure happens.

The time of the event is when the failure to cease to exist happens.

(4) The company makes a capital gain if the *CGT asset’s *market value at the time the company *acquired the asset is more than its *cost base at that time. The company makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the asset’s *reduced cost base at that time.

This Part and Part 3-3 apply to the company from just after the time of the event as if the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset were its *market value at the time the company *acquired the asset.

(6) The shareholding entity makes a capital gain if the *share’s *market value at the time the entity *acquired the share is more than its *cost base at that time. The shareholding entity makes a capital loss if that market value is less than the share’s *reduced cost base at that time.

This Part and Part 3-3 apply to the shareholding entity from just after the time of the event as if the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *share were its *market value at the time the entity *acquired the share.

Exception

(8) This section does not apply to a *CGT asset acquired under a trust restructure that happened before the day on which the Taxation Laws Amendment Act (No. 4) 2002 received the Royal Assent.

104-197 Failure to acquire replacement asset and to incur fourth element expenditure after a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E: CGT event J5

(1) CGT event J5 happens if you choose a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year and, by the end of the *replacement asset period:

(a) you have not *acquired a replacement asset (the replacement asset), and have not incurred *fourth element expenditure in relation to a CGT asset (also the replacement asset); or

the replacement asset does not satisfy the conditions set out in subsection (2).

Note: You do not have to satisfy the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A for the gain in relation to CGT event J5 (see subsection 152-305(4)).

The conditions are:

the replacement asset must be your active asset; and

if the replacement asset is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust:

you, or an entity *connected with you, must be a CGT concession stakeholder in the company or trust; or

CGT concession stakeholders in the company or trust must have a small business participation percentage in you of at least 90%.

Example: Joseph owns 50% of the shares in Company A and Company B. He is therefore a CGT concession stakeholder in the companies: see section 152-60. The companies are connected with Joseph (see section 328-125) because he controls both of them.

Company A owns land which it leases to Joseph for use in a business. It sells the land at a profit and buys shares in Company B.

Subsection (2) is satisfied for the shares because Joseph is connected with Company A and is a CGT concession stakeholder in Company B.

The time of the event is at the end of the replacement asset period.

(4) You make a capital gain equal to the amount of the *capital gain that you disregarded under Subdivision 152-E.

The replacement asset period may be modified or extended as mentioned in section 104-190.

104-198 Cost of acquisition of replacement asset or amount of fourth element expenditure, or both, not sufficient to cover disregarded capital gain: CGT event J6

(1) CGT event J6 happens if you choose a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset in an income year and:

by the end of the replacement asset period, you have done either or both of the following:

(i) *acquired a replacement asset (the replacement asset);

(ii) incurred *fourth element expenditure in relation to a CGT asset (also the replacement asset); and

at the end of the replacement asset period, the replacement asset is your active asset; and

if the replacement asset is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust, at the end of the replacement asset period:

you, or an entity *connected with you, are a CGT concession stakeholder in the company or trust; or

CGT concession stakeholders in the company or trust have a small business participation percentage in you of at least 90%; and

(d) the total (the amount incurred) of the following, in relation to each replacement asset that satisfied paragraph (b) and, if applicable, paragraph (c), is less than the amount of the capital gain that you disregarded:

the first element of the *cost base;

the incidental costs you incurred (which can include giving property, see section 103-5);

the amount of fourth element expenditure incurred.

Note: You do not have to satisfy the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A for the gain in relation to CGT event J6 (see subsection 152-305(4)).

The time of the event is at the end of the replacement asset period.

(3) You make a capital gain equal to the difference between:

the amount of the *capital gain that you disregarded under Subdivision 152-E; and

the amount incurred.

The replacement asset period may be modified or extended as mentioned in section 104-190.

Subdivision 104-K — Other CGT events

104-205 Incoming international transfer of emissions unit: CGT event K1

(1) CGT event K1 happens if:

any of the following conditions is satisfied:

(iii) a *Kyoto unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

(iv) a Kyoto unit is transferred from your nominee’s foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

(v) an *Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011);

(vi) an *Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your nominee’s foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011); and

as a result of the transfer, you start to *hold the unit as a registered emissions unit; and

just before the transfer, the unit was neither your trading stock nor your revenue asset.

The time of the event is when you start to *hold the unit as a registered emissions unit.

(3) You make a capital gain if the unit’s *market value (just before you started to *hold the unit as a *registered emissions unit) is more than its *cost base. You make a capital loss if that market value is less than its *reduced cost base.

104-210 Bankrupt pays amount in relation to debt: CGT event K2

(1) CGT event K2 happens if:

you made a net capital loss for an income year that, because of subsection 102-5(2), cannot be applied in working out whether you made a net capital gain for the income year or a later one; and

(b) you make a payment in an income year (the payment year) in respect of a debt that was taken into account in working out the amount of that net capital loss; and

(c) ignoring subsection 102-5(2), some part of the net capital loss (the denied part) would have been applied (if you had made sufficient *capital gains) in working out whether you had made a *net capital gain for the payment year.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

The time of the event is when you make the payment.

(3) You make a capital loss equal to the smallest of:

the amount you paid; or

that part of it that was taken into account in working out the denied part; or

the denied part less the sum of *capital losses you made as a result of previous payments you made in respect of the debt that was taken into account in working out the denied part.

(4) In calculating that capital loss, disregard any amount you have received as *recoupment of the payment and that is not included in your assessable income.

104-215 Asset passing to tax-advantaged entity: CGT event K3

(1) CGT event K3 happens if you die and a *CGT asset you owned just before dying *passes to a beneficiary in your estate who (when the asset passes):

is an *exempt entity; or

is the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity; or

is a foreign resident.

(2) If the asset passes to a beneficiary who is a foreign resident, CGT event K3 happens only if:

you were an Australian resident just before dying; and

the asset (in the hands of the beneficiary) is not taxable Australian property.

The time of the event is just before you die.

(4) A capital gain is made if the *market value of the asset on the day you died is more than the asset’s *cost base. A capital loss is made if that market value is less than the asset’s *reduced cost base.

Note: The trustee of the estate must include in the date of death return any net capital gain for the income year when you died.

Exception

A *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

Note: There is also an exception for certain philanthropic testamentary gifts: see section 118-60.

104-220 CGT asset starts being trading stock: CGT event K4

(1) CGT event K4 happens if:

you start holding as trading stock a CGT asset you already own but do not hold as trading stock; and

you elect under paragraph 70-30(1)(a) to be treated as having sold the asset for its *market value.

Note 1: Paragraph 70-30(1)(a) allows you to elect the cost of the asset, or its market value, just before it became trading stock.

Note 2: There is an exemption if you elect its cost: see section 118-25.

The time of the event is when you start.

(3) You make a capital gain if the asset’s *market value (just before it became *trading stock) is more than its *cost base. You make a capital loss if that market value is less than its *reduced cost base.

Exception

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

104-225 Special collectable losses: CGT event K5

(1) CGT event K5 happens if the requirements in subsections (2), (3) and (4) are satisfied.

There is a fall in the *market value of a collectable of a company or trust.

CGT event A1, C2 or E8 happens to:

*shares you own in the company (or in a company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group); or

an interest you have in the trust;

and there is no roll-over for that CGT event.

As a result of the capital proceeds from that event being replaced under section 116-80:

you make a *capital gain that you would not otherwise have made; or

you do not make the *capital loss you would otherwise have made; or

you make a capital loss that is less than you would otherwise have made.

Note: The capital proceeds from that event are replaced with the market value of the shares or the interest in the trust as if the fall in the market value of collectables and personal use assets had not occurred: see section 116-80.

The time of CGT event K5 is the time of CGT event A1, C2 or E8.

(6) You make a capital loss from a *collectable equal to:

• the *market value of the *shares or the interest in the trust (worked out as at the time of *CGT event A1, C2 or E8 as if the fall in market value of the collectable had not occurred);

less:

• the actual capital proceeds from CGT event A1, C2 or E8.

Example: You own 50% of the shares in a company. You bought them in 1999 for $60,000. The company owns a painting worth $100,000 and another asset worth $20,000. The painting falls in value to $50,000.

In 1999 you sell your shares for $35,000 (the actual capital proceeds). You would otherwise make a capital loss of $25,000.

However, the actual capital proceeds are replaced with $60,000 (the market value of the shares if the painting had not fallen in value). You do not make a capital loss from selling the shares.

You do make a collectable loss equal to:

Note: You can subtract capital losses from collectables only from your capital gains from collectables: see section 108-10.

104-230 Pre-CGT shares or trust interest: CGT event K6

(1) CGT event K6 happens if:

(a) you own *shares in a company or an interest in a trust you *acquired before 20 September 1985; and

CGT event A1, C2, E1, E2, E3, E5, E6, E7, E8, J1 or K3 happens in relation to the shares or interest; and

there is no roll-over for the other CGT event; and

the applicable requirement in subsection (2) is satisfied.

Just before the other event happened:

the *market value of property of the company or trust (that is not its trading stock) that was *acquired on or after 20 September 1985; or

the market value of interests the company or trust owned through interposed companies or trusts in property (except trading stock) that was *acquired on or after 20 September 1985;

must be at least 75% of the *net value of the company or trust.

The time of CGT event K6 is when the other event happens.

(6) You make a *capital gain equal to that part of the *capital proceeds from the *share or interest that is reasonably attributable to the amount by which the *market value of the property referred to in subsection (2) is more than the sum of the *cost bases of that property.

Note: You cannot make a capital loss.

This section applies to property that a company that is a foreign resident *acquired after 15 August 1989 from another company as if it were acquired before 20 September 1985 if:

the other company acquired it before 20 September 1985; and

the companies are members of the same wholly-owned group; and

the property is not taxable Australian property.

In working out the *net value of a company or trust for the purposes of subsection (2), disregard:

the discharge or release of any liabilities; or

the *market value of any *CGT assets acquired;

if the discharge or release, or the *acquisition, was done for a purpose that included ensuring that the requirement in subsection (2) would not be satisfied in a particular situation.

Exceptions

(9) CGT event K6 does not happen if:

for a company referred to in subsection (2)—some of its *shares were listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country at the time of the other event and at all times in the period of 5 years before the time of the other event; or

for a trust referred to in subsection (2) that is a unit trust—some of its units were so listed, or were ordinarily available to the public for subscription or purchase, at the time of the other event and at all times in that period.

Paragraph (9)(a) applies to a case where:

the company referred to in subsection (2) is a demerged entity; and

*shares in the demerged entity do not satisfy the test referred to in that paragraph; and

the demerger happened not more than 5 years before the other CGT event happened;

as if shares in the demerged entity were listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country at all times when some of the shares in the *head entity of the demerger group were so listed.

Since the head entity was listed for only 3 years, the demerged entity must remain listed for 2 years before Louise’s new interests become eligible for the exception from CGT event K6.

Example: Louise owns shares in a company which has been listed for 3 years. The company is the head entity of a demerger group. As part of a demerger, she receives new interests in a demerged entity. The demerged entity then lists in its own right.

Paragraph (9)(b) applies to a case where:

the trust referred to in subsection (2) is a demerged entity and a unit trust; and

units in the demerged entity do not satisfy the test referred to in that paragraph; and

the demerger happened not more than 5 years before the other CGT event happened;

as if units in the demerged entity were listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country, or were ordinarily available to the public for subscription or purchase, at all times when some of the units in the *head entity of the demerger group were so listed or available.

A *capital gain is disregarded for a *share in a company or an interest in a trust to the extent that, had you *acquired it on or after 20 September 1985, you could have chosen a roll-over for the other CGT event under Subdivision 124-M (scrip for scrip roll-over).

Example: Bill owns a unit in a trust that he acquired before 20 September 1985. He exchanges the unit for a unit in another trust worth $60 and $40 cash. He makes a capital gain of $50 because of CGT event K6.

Had the unit been acquired after 20 September 1985, Bill would have been entitled to a partial roll-over of the capital gain under Subdivision 124-M to the extent that his capital proceeds constituted a replacement unit.

Bill can therefore disregard 60/100 of the $50 gain ($30). The cost base of Bill’s replacement unit is reduced by this amount. Bill must include the remaining $20 of the CGT event K6 gain in the calculation of his net capital gain or loss for the year.

Note: A capital gain or loss made by a demerging entity from CGT event K6 happening as a result of a demerger is also disregarded: see section 125-155.

104-235 Balancing adjustment events for depreciating assets and certain assets used for R&D: CGT event K7

(1) CGT event K7 happens if:

a balancing adjustment event occurs for a depreciating asset you *held; and

at some time when you held the asset, you used it, or had it installed ready for use, for:

a purpose other than a taxable purpose; or

the purpose to which paragraphs 40-27(2)(a) and (b) relate (about second-hand assets in residential property).

However, subsection (1) does not apply if:

you are an *R&D entity and you could deduct an amount under section 40-25 for the depreciating asset if the following assumptions were made:

(i) despite paragraph 40-30(1)(c) and subsection 40-30(2), all intangible assets were excluded from the definition of depreciating asset in section 40-30;

subsection 40-45(2) did not, except in the case of buildings, prevent Division 40 from applying to capital works to which Division 43 applies, or to which Division 43 would apply but for expenditure being incurred, or capital works being started, before a particular day;

you satisfied any relevant requirement for deductibility under Division 40; or

there is roll-over relief for the balancing adjustment event under section 40-340 of this Act; or

the asset is one for which you or another entity has deducted or can deduct amounts under Subdivision 40-F or 40-G.

(1AA) Without limiting subsection (1A), if the asset is a vessel for which:

you have a shipping exempt income certificate; or

you have at any time had such a certificate;

subsection (1) does not apply in relation to the asset to the extent that you are using, or at any time have used, it to produce income that is exempt under section 51-100.

(1B) CGT event K7 also happens if:

you are an *R&D entity; and

a balancing adjustment event occurs for a depreciating asset you *held; and

when you held the asset, you could deduct an amount under section 40-25 for the asset if the assumptions set out in paragraph (1A)(a) were made; and

at some time when you held the asset:

(i) you used it other than for a taxable purpose or for the purpose of conducting *R&D activities for which you were registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986; or

(ii) you had it installed ready for use other than for a taxable purpose.

Note: For subparagraph (d)(i), disregard any use of the asset for the purpose of carrying on research and development activities (within the meaning of former section 73B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936): see section 104-235 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

The time of CGT event K7 is when the balancing adjustment event occurs.

Any *capital gain or *capital loss is worked out:

under section 104-240; or

under section 104-245 if the depreciating asset was allocated to a low-value pool.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:

the depreciating asset covered by subsection (1) or (1B) is a pre-CGT asset; or

you can deduct an amount for the asset under Division 328 (about small business entities) for the income year in which the balancing adjustment event occurred.

104-240 Working out capital gain or loss for CGT event K7: general case

(1) You make a capital gain if the *termination value of the *depreciating asset covered by subsection 104-235(1) or (1B) is more than its *cost. The amount of the *capital gain is:

where:

sum of reductions is the sum of:

if the depreciating asset is covered by subsection 104-235(1):

if subparagraph (ii) does not apply—the reductions in your deductions for the asset under sections 40-25 and 40-27; or

(ii) if there is a reduction of the balancing adjustment amount under section 40-291A in relation to the *balancing adjustment event—the amount of that reduction; or

(b) if the depreciating asset is covered by subsection 104-235(1B)—the reductions that would have been required under section 40-25 on the assumption that using the asset for a *taxable purpose included using it for the purpose of conducting *R&D activities for which you were registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986.

total decline is the decline in value of the *depreciating asset since you started to *hold it.

Note 1: This subsection applies in a modified way if you used the asset for the purpose of carrying on research and development activities (within the meaning of former section 73B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936): see section 104-235 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 2: The CGT concepts of cost base and capital proceeds are not relevant for this event.

(2) You make a capital loss if the *cost of the *depreciating asset covered by subsection 104-235(1) or (1B) is more than its *termination value. The amount of the *capital loss is:

where:

sum of reductions and total decline have the same meanings as in subsection (1).

In applying subsection (1) or (2), reduce the termination value of the depreciating asset by so much of an amount misappropriated by your employee or *agent (whether by theft, embezzlement, larceny or otherwise) as represents an amount applicable to you under:

item 8 of the table in subsection 40-300(2); or

item 1, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 40-305(1);

in relation to the balancing adjustment event.

If you later receive an amount as recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, the amount applicable under subsection (3) is increased by the amount received.

(5) Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this section for an income year if:

you discover the misappropriation, or you receive an amount as recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, after you lodged your income tax return for the income year; and

the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after you discover the misappropriation or receive the amount.

104-245 Working out capital gain or loss for CGT event K7: pooled assets

(1) You make a capital gain if the *depreciating asset’s *termination value is more than its *cost. The amount of the *capital gain is:

where:

taxable use fraction is the taxable use percentage (expressed as a fraction) that you estimated for the asset when you allocated it to the pool.

Note: The CGT concepts of cost base and capital proceeds are not relevant for this event.

(2) You make a capital loss if the *depreciating asset’s *cost is more than its *termination value. The amount of the *capital loss is:

where:

taxable use fraction has the same meaning as in subsection (1).

In applying subsection (1) or (2), reduce the termination value of the depreciating asset by so much of an amount misappropriated by your employee or *agent (whether by theft, embezzlement, larceny or otherwise) as represents an amount applicable to you under:

item 8 of the table in subsection 40-300(2); or

item 1, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 40-305(1);

in relation to the balancing adjustment event.

If you later receive an amount as recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, the amount applicable under subsection (3) is increased by the amount received.

(5) Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this section for an income year if:

you discover the misappropriation, or you receive an amount as recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, after you lodged your income tax return for the income year; and

the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after you discover the misappropriation or receive the amount.

104-250 Direct value shifts: CGT event K8

(1) CGT event K8 happens if there is a *taxing event generating a gain for a *down interest under section 725-245.

Note: That section sets out some of the CGT consequences of a direct value shift for affected owners of down interests. See also the rest of Division 725.

The time of the event is the *decrease time for the down interest.

(3) You make a capital gain equal to the gain generated for the taxing event.

Note: You cannot make a capital loss.

(4) If, because of the same *direct value shift, there are 2 or more *taxing events generating a gain that are covered by subsection (1), CGT event K8 happens for each of those taxing events, and you make a separate capital gain for each.

Exceptions

A *capital gain is disregarded if the down interest is a pre-CGT asset.

104-255 Carried interests: CGT event K9

(1) CGT event K9 happens if you become entitled to receive a *payment of a *carried interest of a *general partner in a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP or an *AFOF or a *limited partner in a *VCMP.

The time of the event is the time you become entitled to receive the *payment.

(3) You make a capital gain equal to the *capital proceeds from the *CGT event.

Note: You cannot make a capital loss.

Meaning of carried interest

(4) The carried interest of a *general partner in a *VCLP, an *ESVCLP or an *AFOF is the partner’s entitlement to a distribution from the VCLP, ESVCLP or AFOF, to the extent that the distribution is contingent upon the attainment of profits for the *limited partners in the VCLP, ESVCLP or AFOF.

(5) The carried interest of a *limited partner in a *VCMP is the partner’s entitlement to a distribution from the VCMP, to the extent that the distribution is contingent upon the attainment of profits for the *limited partners in the VCLP, ESVCLP or AFOF in which the VCMP is a *general partner.

(6) The carried interest does not include:

any part of the partner’s entitlement to that distribution that is attributable to a fee (by whatever name called) for the management of the VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or VCMP; or

any part of the partner’s entitlement to that distribution that is attributable to the partner’s *equity interest in the VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or VCMP.

Meaning of payment of carried interest

(7) Payment, of a *carried interest, includes:

a payment that is attributable to the carried interest; or

the giving of property in satisfaction of the carried interest: see section 103-5; or

the giving of property in satisfaction of an entitlement that is attributable to the carried interest: see section 103-5.

104-260 Certain short-term forex realisation gains: CGT event K10

(1) CGT event K10 happens if:

you make a *forex realisation gain as a result of forex realisation event 2; and

item 1 of the table in subsection 775-70(1) applies.

(2) The time of the event is when the forex realisation event happens.

(3) You make a capital gain equal to the *forex realisation gain.

Note: You cannot make a capital loss under CGT event K10. However, if you make a forex realisation loss covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 775-75(1), you will make a capital loss under CGT event K11 (see section 104-265).

104-265 Certain short-term forex realisation losses: CGT event K11

(1) CGT event K11 happens if:

you make a *forex realisation loss as a result of forex realisation event 2; and

item 1 of the table in subsection 775-75(1) applies.

(2) The time of the event is when the forex realisation event happens.

(3) You make a capital loss equal to the *forex realisation loss.

Note: You cannot make a capital gain under CGT event K11. However, if you make a forex realisation gain covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 775-70(1), you will make a capital gain under CGT event K10 (see section 104-260).

104-270 Foreign hybrids: CGT event K12

(1) CGT event K12 happens if, in accordance with paragraph 830-50(2)(b) or (3)(b), you make a *capital loss under this section for an income year.

The time of the event is just before the end of the income year.

(3) You make a capital loss equal to the amount applicable under paragraph 830-50(2)(b) or (3)(b).

Subdivision 104-L — Consolidated groups and MEC groups

Table of sections

104-500 Loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in entity becoming subsidiary member: CGT event L1

104-505 Where pre-formation intra-group roll-over reduction results in negative allocable cost amount: CGT event L2

104-510 Where tax cost setting amounts for retained cost base assets exceeds joining allocable cost amount: CGT event L3

104-515 Where no reset cost base assets and excess of net allocable cost amount on joining: CGT event L4

104-520 Where amount remaining after step 4 of leaving allocable cost amount is negative: CGT event L5

104-525 Error in calculation of tax cost setting amount for joining entity’s assets: CGT event L6

104-535 Where reduction in tax cost setting amounts for reset cost base assets cannot be allocated: CGT event L8

104-500 Loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in entity becoming subsidiary member: CGT event L1

(1) CGT event L1 happens if, under section 705-57 (including in its application in accordance with Subdivisions 705-B to 705-E), there is a reduction in the *tax cost setting amount of assets of an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *MEC group.

The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

(3) For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2), the *head company makes a capital loss equal to the reduction.

(4) The amount of the capital loss that can be applied to reduce the head company’s *capital gains for the first income year ending after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group (the first income year) cannot exceed 1/5 of the *capital loss.

(5) The amount of the *net capital loss from the first income year, to the extent the amount is attributable to the *capital loss (the extent being the event L1 attributable loss), that can be applied to reduce the head company’s *capital gains for a later income year cannot exceed the amount worked out for the year using the following table:

104-505 Where pre-formation intra-group roll-over reduction results in negative allocable cost amount: CGT event L2

(1) CGT event L2 happens if:

an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a MEC group; and

in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the entity, the amount remaining after applying step 3A of the table in section 705-60 is negative.

The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

(3) For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2), the *head company makes a capital gain equal to the amount remaining.

104-510 Where tax cost setting amounts for retained cost base assets exceeds joining allocable cost amount: CGT event L3

(1) CGT event L3 happens if:

an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a MEC group; and

the sum of the tax cost setting amounts for all *retained cost base assets that are taken into account under paragraph 705-35(1)(b) in working out the tax cost setting amount of each reset cost base asset of the entity exceeds the group’s allocable cost amount for the entity.

The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

(3) For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2), the *head company makes a capital gain equal to the excess.

104-515 Where no reset cost base assets and excess of net allocable cost amount on joining: CGT event L4

(1) CGT event L4 happens if:

an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a MEC group; and

in working out the tax cost setting amount for assets of the entity in accordance with section 705-35 (including in its application in accordance with Subdivisions 705-B to 705-D), there is an amount that results after applying paragraphs 705-35(1)(b) and (c) (including in their application in accordance with those Subdivisions); and

Note: Section 705-35 is about the tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets.

it is not possible to allocate, in accordance with the latter paragraph, the amount that results because there are no reset cost base assets of the kind mentioned in that paragraph.

The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

(3) For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2), the *head company makes a capital loss equal to the amount that results.

104-520 Where amount remaining after step 4 of leaving allocable cost amount is negative: CGT event L5

(1) CGT event L5 happens if:

an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a MEC group; and

in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the entity, the amount remaining after applying step 4 of the table in section 711-20 is negative.

The time of the event is when the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group.

(3) For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2), the *head company makes a capital gain equal to the amount remaining.

Note: The amount remaining may be reduced under section 707-415.

104-525 Error in calculation of tax cost setting amount for joining entity’s assets: CGT event L6

(1) CGT event L6 happens if:

you are the *head company of a consolidated group or a MEC group; and

the conditions in section 705-315 (about errors in tax cost setting amounts) are satisfied for a *subsidiary member of the group; and

you have a net overstated amount or a net understated amount for the subsidiary member.

The time of the event is the start of the income year in which the Commissioner becomes aware of the errors.

(3) You work out whether you have a net overstated amount or net understated amount using this table:

If the time when the Commissioner becomes aware of the errors is within the period within which the Commissioner may amend all of the assessments necessary to correct the errors, then, for the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2):

(a) if you have a *net overstated amount—you make a capital gain equal to that amount; or

(b) if you have a *net understated amount—you make a capital loss equal to that amount.

If the time when the Commissioner becomes aware of the errors is not within that period, then, for the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2):

(a) if you have a *net overstated amount—you make a capital gain of the amount worked out under subsection (6); or

(b) if you have a *net understated amount—you make a capital loss of the amount worked out under subsection (6).

The amount of the *capital gain or *capital loss is worked out as follows:

where:

current asset setting amount means the *tax cost setting amount for all assets referred to in subsection 705-315(2) as reset cost base assets that the *head company of the *consolidated group or the *MEC group held continuously from the time when the *subsidiary member joined the group until the start of the head company’s income year that is the earliest income year for which the Commissioner could amend the head company’s assessment to correct any of the errors.

original asset setting amount means the *tax cost setting amount for all assets referred to in subsection 705-315(2) as reset cost base assets that the *subsidiary member held at the time it joined the group.

stated amount means the *net overstated amount or the *net understated amount, as the case requires.

104-535 Where reduction in tax cost setting amounts for reset cost base assets cannot be allocated: CGT event L8

(1) CGT event L8 happens if:

an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a MEC group; and

the tax cost setting amount for a reset cost base asset of the entity is reduced under subsection 705-40(1) (including in its application in accordance with Subdivisions 705-B to 705-D); and

(c) some or all (the unallocated amount) of the reduction cannot be allocated as mentioned in subsection 705-40(2).

The time of the event is just after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

(3) For the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2), the *head company makes a capital loss equal to the unallocated amount.

Division 106 — Entity making the gain or loss

Guide to Division 106

106-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the cases where a capital gain or loss is made by someone other than the entity to which a CGT event happens.

The entities affected are:

• partnerships (Subdivision 106-A);

• bankruptcy trustees and company liquidators (Subdivision 106-B);

• trustees where there is an absolutely entitled beneficiary (Subdivision 106-C);

• security holders (Subdivision 106-D).

Subdivision 106-A — Partnerships

106-5 Partnerships

Any *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event happening in relation to a partnership or one of its *CGT assets is made by the partners individually.

Each partner’s gain or loss is calculated by reference to the partnership agreement, or partnership law if there is no agreement.

Example 1: A partnership creates contractual rights in another entity (CGT event D1). Each partner’s capital gain or loss is calculated by allocating an appropriate share of the capital proceeds from the event and the incidental costs that relate to the event (according to the partnership agreement, or partnership law if there is no agreement).

Example 2: Helen and Clare set up a business in partnership. Helen contributes a block of land to the partnership capital. Their partnership agreement recognises that Helen has a 75% interest in the land and Clare 25%. The agreement is silent as to their interests in other assets and profit sharing.

When the land is sold, Helen’s capital gain or loss will be determined on the basis of her 75% interest. For other partnership assets, Helen’s gain or loss will be determined on the basis of her 50% interest (under the relevant Partnership Act).

Each partner has a separate *cost base and *reduced cost base for the partner’s interest in each CGT asset of the partnership.

If a partner leaves a partnership, a remaining partner *acquires a separate CGT asset to the extent that the remaining partner acquires a share of the departing partner’s interest in a partnership asset.

Note: The remaining partners would not be affected if the departing partner sells its interests to an entity that was not a partner.

Example: (Indexation is ignored for the purpose of this example).

John, Wil and Patricia form a partnership (in equal shares).

John contributes a building (which is a pre-20 September 1985 asset) having a market value of $200,000. Wil and Patricia contribute $200,000 each in cash.

The partnership buys another asset for $400,000.

John is taken to have disposed of 2/3 of his interest in the building (1/3 to Wil and 1/3 to Patricia). His remaining 1/3 share in the building remains a pre-CGT asset. The 1/3 shares that Wil and Patricia acquire are post-CGT assets.

Wil retires from the partnership when the partnership assets have a market value of $1,200,000 ($500,000 for the building and $700,000 for the other asset). John and Patricia pay Wil $400,000 for his interest in the partnership.

Wil has a capital gain of $100,000 on the building and $100,000 on the other asset. John and Patricia each acquire an additional 1/6 interest in the partnership assets. These additional interests are separate assets and post-CGT assets.

If a new partner is admitted to a partnership:

the new partner *acquires a share (according to the partnership agreement, or partnership law if there is no agreement) of each partnership asset; and

the existing partners are treated as having *disposed of part of their interest in each partnership asset to the extent that the new partner has acquired it.

Example: (Indexation is ignored for the purpose of this example).

Lyn and Barry form a partnership, each contributing $15,000 to its capital. The partnership buys land for $30,000.

The land increases in value to $300,000.

Andrew is admitted as an equal partner, paying Lyn and Barry $50,000 each to acquire a 1/3 share in the land. His cost base is $100,000.

Lyn and Barry have each disposed of 1/3 of their interest in the land. Each has a cost base for that interest of $5,000, and capital proceeds of $50,000, leaving them with a capital gain of $45,000 each on Andrew’s admission to the partnership.

The land is sold for its market value.

Andrew has no capital gain on the land.

Lyn and Barry have disposed of their remaining 2/3 original interest in the land for capital proceeds of $100,000, leaving each of them with a capital gain of:

Subdivision 106-B — Bankruptcy and liquidation

106-30 Effect of bankruptcy

(1) For the purposes of this Part and Part 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) and Subdivision 328-C (What is a small business entity), the vesting of the individual’s *CGT assets in the trustee under the Bankruptcy Act 1966 or under a similar foreign law is ignored.

This Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 328-C apply to an act done in relation to a CGT asset of an individual in these circumstances as if the act had been done by the individual (instead of by the trustee etc.):

as a result of the bankruptcy of the individual by the Official Trustee in Bankruptcy or a registered trustee, or the holder of a similar office under a foreign law;

(b) by a trustee under a personal insolvency agreement made under Part X of the Bankruptcy Act 1966, or under a similar instrument under a foreign law;

by a trustee as a result of an arrangement with creditors under that Act or a foreign law.

Example: A CGT asset of an individual vests in a trustee because of the bankruptcy of the individual. No CGT event happens as a result of the vesting.

The trustee later sells the CGT asset. Any capital gain or loss is made by the individual, not the trustee.

106-35 Effect of liquidation

For the purposes of this Part and Part 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) and Subdivision 328-C (What is a small business entity), the vesting of a company’s *CGT assets in a liquidator, or the holder of a similar office under a foreign law, is ignored.

This Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 328-C apply to an act done by a liquidator of a company, or the holder of a similar office under a foreign law, as if the act had been done by the company (instead of by the liquidator etc.).

Example: Ben, a liquidator of a company, sells a CGT asset of the company. Any capital gain or loss is made by the company, not by Ben.

Subdivision 106-C — Absolutely entitled beneficiaries

Table of sections

106-50 Absolutely entitled beneficiaries

106-50 Absolutely entitled beneficiaries

For the purposes of this Part and Part 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) and Subdivision 328-C (What is a small business entity), from just after the time you become absolutely entitled to a CGT asset as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), the asset is treated as being your asset (instead of being an asset of the trust).

This Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 328-C apply, from just after the time you become absolutely entitled to a CGT asset as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), to an act done in relation to the asset by the trustee as if the act had been done by you (instead of by the trustee).

Example: An individual becomes absolutely entitled to a CGT asset of a trust. The trustee later sells the asset. Any capital gain or loss from the sale is made by the individual, not the trustee.

Subdivision 106-D — Securities, charges and encumbrances

Table of sections

106-60 Securities, charges and encumbrances

106-60 Securities, charges and encumbrances

For the purposes of this Part and Part 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) and Subdivision 328-C (What is a small business entity):

the vesting of a CGT asset in an entity is ignored, if:

the vesting is for the purpose of enforcing, giving effect to or maintaining a security, charge or encumbrance over the asset; and

the security, charge or encumbrance remains over the asset just after the vesting; and

a CGT asset is treated as vesting in an entity at the time a security, charge or encumbrance ceases to be over the asset, if:

the entity holds the asset just after that time because the asset vested in the entity at an earlier time; and

that earlier vesting was ignored under paragraph (a) because it was for the purpose of enforcing, giving effect to or maintaining the security, charge or encumbrance.

This Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 328-C apply to an act done by an entity (or an *agent of the entity) in relation to a CGT asset for the purpose of enforcing, giving effect to or maintaining a security, charge or encumbrance over the asset as if the act had been done by the entity that provided the security (instead of by the first-mentioned entity or its agent).

Example: A CGT asset of a borrower vests in a lender as security for a loan. No CGT event happens as a result of the vesting.

If the borrower fails to make payments on the loan and the lender sells the CGT asset under the security arrangement, any capital gain or loss is made by the borrower, not the lender.

Division 108 — CGT assets

Guide to Division 108

108-1 What this Division is about

This Division defines the various categories of assets that are relevant to working out your capital gains and losses. They are CGT assets, collectables and personal use assets.

It also tells you how capital losses from collectables and personal use assets are relevant to working out your net capital gain or loss.

It also sets out when land, buildings and capital improvements are taken to be separate CGT assets.

Subdivision 108-A — What a CGT asset is

108-5 CGT assets

(1) A CGT asset is:

any kind of property; or

a legal or equitable right that is not property.

(2) To avoid doubt, these are CGT assets:

part of, or an interest in, an asset referred to in subsection (1);

goodwill or an interest in it;

an interest in an asset of a partnership;

an interest in a partnership that is not covered by paragraph (c).

Note 1: Examples of CGT assets are:

• land and buildings;

• shares in a company and units in a unit trust;

• options;

• debts owed to you;

• a right to enforce a contractual obligation;

• foreign currency.

Note 2: An asset is not a CGT asset if the asset was last acquired before 26 June 1992 and was not an asset for the purposes of former Part IIIA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936: see section 108-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

108-7 Interest in CGT assets as joint tenants

Individuals who own a CGT asset as joint tenants are treated as if they each owned a separate CGT asset constituted by an equal interest in the asset and as if each of them held that interest as a tenant in common.

Note: Section 128-50 contains rules that apply when a joint tenant dies.

Subdivision 108-B — Collectables

Table of sections

108-10 Losses from collectables to be offset only against gains from collectables

108-15 Sets of collectables

108-17 Cost base of a collectable

108-10 Losses from collectables to be offset only against gains from collectables

In working out your net capital gain or net capital loss for the income year, *capital losses from *collectables can be used only to reduce *capital gains from collectables.

Note: You choose the order in which you reduce your capital gains from collectables by your capital losses from collectables.

Example: Your capital gains from collectables total $200 and your capital losses from collectables total $400. You have other capital gains of $500. You have a net capital gain of $500 and a net capital loss from collectables of $200.

The losses from collectables cannot be used to reduce the $500 capital gain.

(2) A collectable is:

*artwork, jewellery, an antique, or a coin or medallion; or

a rare folio, manuscript or book; or

a postage stamp or first day cover;

that is used or kept mainly for your (or your associate’s) personal use or enjoyment.

(3) These are also collectables:

an interest in any of the things covered by subsection (2); or

a debt that arises from any of those things; or

an option or right to *acquire any of those things.

Note: Collectables acquired for $500 or less are exempt. However, you get an exemption for an interest in one only if the market value of all the interests combined is $500 or less: see Subdivision 118-A.

If some or all of a *capital loss from a collectable cannot be applied in an income year, the unapplied amount can be applied in the next income year for which your *capital gains from *collectables exceed your *capital losses (if any) from collectables.

Example: You have a capital gain from a collectable for the income year of $200 and a capital loss from another collectable of $600.

Your capital loss from one collectable reduces your capital gain from the other to zero. You cannot apply the remaining $400 of the capital loss in this income year, but you can apply it in a later income year.

If you have 2 or more unapplied *net capital losses from *collectables, you must apply them in the order you made them.

108-15 Sets of collectables

This section sets out what happens if:

you own *collectables that are a set; and

they would ordinarily be *disposed of as a set; and

you dispose of them in one or more transactions for the purpose of trying to obtain the exemption in section 118-10.

Example: You buy a set of 3 books for $900. You apportion the $900 among each book: see section 112-30. If the books are of equal value, you have acquired each one for $300.

If you dispose of each book individually, you would ordinarily obtain the exemption in section 118-10, because you acquired each one for less than $500.

The set of *collectables is taken to be a single collectable and each of your *disposals is a disposal of part of that collectable.

Example: To continue the example, the 3 books are taken to be a single collectable. You will not obtain the exemption in section 118-10, because you acquired the set for more than $500.

You work out if you make a capital gain or loss from a disposal of part of an asset by comparing the capital proceeds from it with the cost base or reduced cost base (as appropriate) of the disposed part.

Note 1: Section 112-30 tells you how to apportion the cost base and reduced cost base of a CGT asset on a disposal of part of an asset.

Note 2: This section does not apply to a collectable you last acquired before 16 December 1995: see section 108-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

108-17 Cost base of a collectable

In working out the *cost base of a collectable, disregard the third element (about costs of ownership).

Subdivision 108-C — Personal use assets

Table of sections

108-20 Losses from personal use assets must be disregarded

108-25 Sets of personal use assets

108-30 Cost base of a personal use asset

108-20 Losses from personal use assets must be disregarded

In working out your net capital gain or net capital loss for the income year, any *capital loss you make from a personal use asset is disregarded.

(2) A personal use asset is:

a CGT asset (except a collectable) that is used or kept mainly for your (or your associate’s) personal use or enjoyment; or

an option or right to *acquire a CGT asset of that kind; or

a debt arising from a CGT event in which the CGT asset the subject of the event was one covered by paragraph (a); or

a debt arising other than:

in the course of gaining or producing your assessable income; or

from your carrying on a business.

Note 1: There is an exemption for a personal use asset you acquire for $10,000 or less: see section 118-10.

Note 2: A debt arising from a CGT event involving a CGT asset kept mainly for your personal use and enjoyment is a personal use asset to prevent any loss arising from the debt being a normal capital loss.

(3) A personal use asset does not include land, a *stratum unit or a building or structure that is taken to be a separate *CGT asset because of Subdivision 108-D.

108-25 Sets of personal use assets

This section sets out what happens if:

you own *personal use assets that are a set; and

they would ordinarily be *disposed of as a set; and

you dispose of them in one or more transactions for the purpose of trying to obtain the exemption in section 118-10.

The set of *personal use assets is taken to be a single personal use asset and each of your *disposals is a disposal of part of that asset.

108-30 Cost base of a personal use asset

In working out the *cost base of a personal use asset, disregard the third element (about the costs of ownership).

Subdivision 108-D — Separate CGT assets

Guide to Subdivision 108-D

108-50 What this Subdivision is about

For CGT purposes, there are:

• exceptions to the common law principle that what is attached to the land is part of the land; and

• special rules about buildings and adjacent land; and

• rules about when a capital improvement to a CGT asset is treated as a separate CGT asset.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

108-55 When is a building a separate asset from land?

108-60 Depreciating asset that is part of a building is a separate asset

108-65 Land adjacent to land acquired before 20 September 1985

108-70 When is a capital improvement a separate asset?

108-75 Capital improvements to CGT assets for which a roll-over may be available

108-80 Deciding if capital improvements are related to each other

108-85 Meaning of improvement threshold

Operative provisions

Note: In addition to the circumstances set out in this Subdivision, separate asset treatment can apply under section 124-595 (about a roll-over for a Crown lease) and section 124-725 (about a roll-over for a prospecting or mining entitlement).

108-55 When is a building a separate asset from land?

(1) A building or structure on land that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is taken to be a separate *CGT asset from the land if one of these balancing adjustment provisions applies to the building or structure (whether or not there is a balancing adjustment):

Subdivision 40-D; or

section 355-315 or 355-525 (about R&D).

Example: You construct a timber mill building on land you own. The building is subject to a balancing adjustment on its disposal, loss or destruction. It is taken to be a separate CGT asset from the land.

(2) A building or structure that is constructed on land that you *acquired before 20 September 1985 is taken to be a separate *CGT asset from the land if:

you entered into a contract for the construction on or after that day; or

if there is no contract—the construction started on or after that day.

Example: You bought a block of land with a building on it on 10 August 1984. On 1 December 1999 you construct another building on the land. The other building is taken to be a separate CGT asset from the land.

108-60 Depreciating asset that is part of a building is a separate asset

A depreciating asset that is part of a building or structure is taken to be a separate CGT asset from the building or structure.

Example: You own a factory from which you carry on a business. You install rest rooms for your employees. The plumbing fixtures and fittings are depreciating assets. These are taken to be a separate CGT asset from the factory.

108-65 Land adjacent to land acquired before 20 September 1985

Land that you *acquire on or after 20 September 1985 that is adjacent to land (the original land) you acquired before that day is taken to be a separate *CGT asset from the original land if it and the original land are amalgamated into one title.

The second block is treated as a separate CGT asset. You can make a capital gain or loss from it if you sell the whole area of land.

Example: On 1 April 1984 you bought a block of land. On 1 June 1999 you bought another block of land adjacent to the first block. You amalgamate the titles to the 2 blocks into 1 title.

108-70 When is a capital improvement a separate asset?

Improvements to land

A capital improvement to land is taken to be a separate CGT asset from the land if one of the balancing adjustment provisions set out in subsection 108-55(1) applies to the improvement (whether or not there is a balancing adjustment).

Example: You own land that you use for pastoral operations. You build some fences that are destroyed by fire. The fences are depreciating assets and are subject to a balancing adjustment on their destruction under Division 40. The fences are taken to be a separate CGT asset from the land.

Unrelated improvements to pre-CGT assets

(2) A capital improvement to a *CGT asset (the original asset) that you *acquired before 20 September 1985 (that is not related to any other capital improvement to the asset) is taken to be a separate *CGT asset if its *cost base (assuming it were a separate CGT asset) when a CGT event happens (except one that happens because of your death) in relation to the original asset is:

more than the improvement threshold for the income year in which the event happened; and

more than 5% of the capital proceeds from the event.

Example: In 1983 you bought a boat. In 1999 you install a new mast (a capital improvement) for $30,000. Later, you sell the boat for $150,000.

If the cost base of the improvement in the sale year is $41,000 and the improvement threshold for that year is $96,000, the improvement will not be treated as a separate asset.

Related improvements to pre-CGT assets

Note 1: Section 108-80 sets out the factors for deciding whether capital improvements are related to each other.

Note 2: If the improvement is a separate asset, the capital proceeds from the event must be apportioned between the original asset and the improvement: see section 116-40.

(3) Capital improvements to a *CGT asset (the original asset) that you *acquired before 20 September 1985 that are related to each other are taken to be a separate *CGT asset if the total of their *cost bases (assuming each one were a separate CGT asset) when a *CGT event happens in relation to the original asset is:

more than the improvement threshold for the income year in which the event happened; and

more than 5% of the capital proceeds from the event.

Note: If the improvements are a separate asset, the capital proceeds from the event must be apportioned between the original asset and the improvements: see section 116-40.

Some improvements not relevant

This section does not apply to a capital improvement:

that took place under a contract that you entered into before 20 September 1985; or

if there is no contract—that started or occurred before that day.

Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply if the capital improvement is made to:

a Crown lease; or

a prospecting entitlement or mining entitlement; or

a statutory licence; or

a depreciating asset to which Subdivision 124-K applies.

Note: Section 108-75 deals with this situation.

This section does not apply to a capital improvement consisting of repairs to or restoration of a CGT asset *acquired before 20 September 1985 in circumstances where there is a roll-over under Subdivision 124-B.

108-75 Capital improvements to CGT assets for which a roll-over may be available

This section is relevant only if a CGT event happens in relation to a CGT asset that is:

a Crown lease; or

a prospecting entitlement or mining entitlement; or

a statutory licence; or

a depreciating asset to which Subdivision 124-K applies.

You must have *acquired it before 20 September 1985.

Note: Division 124 treats you as having acquired a CGT asset before that day in some situations.

There are possible consequences if there has been one or more capital improvements to:

the CGT asset the subject of the CGT event; or

any *CGT assets of the same kind that were in existence before the CGT asset and came to an end where a roll-over was obtained under a provision set out in this table:

Note: Roll-overs under former sections 160ZWA, 160ZZF, 160ZZPE and 160ZWC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are also relevant: see section 108-75 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Example: In 1984 you acquired a commercial fishing licence. In 1986 you paid $62,000 to get an extra right (a capital improvement) attached to the licence.

In June 1999 the licence expired and you got a new licence. You obtained a roll-over for the old licence expiring. In April 2000 you sold the new fishing licence for $200,000.

Any capital improvement that is not related to another capital improvement is taken to be a separate CGT asset if its *cost base (assuming it were a separate CGT asset) when the CGT event happens is:

more than the improvement threshold for the income year in which the event happened; and

more than 5% of the capital proceeds from the event.

Example: To continue the example, suppose the cost base of the right is $101,000 and the improvement threshold for the 1999-2000 income year is $96,000.

Since the cost base of the right is more than the improvement threshold and more than 5% of the capital proceeds, the right is taken to be a separate CGT asset.

Note 1: Section 108-80 sets out the factors for deciding whether capital improvements are related to each other.

Note 2: If the improvement is a separate asset, the capital proceeds from the event must be apportioned between the asset and the improvement: see section 116-40.

Any capital improvements that are related to each other are taken to be a separate CGT asset if the total of their *cost bases (assuming each one were a separate CGT asset) when the CGT event happens is:

more than the improvement threshold for the income year in which the event happened; and

more than 5% of the capital proceeds from the event.

Note: If the improvements are a separate asset, the capital proceeds from the event must be apportioned between the asset and the improvements: see section 116-40.

This section does not apply to any capital improvement:

that took place under a contract that you entered into before 20 September 1985; or

if there is no contract—that started or occurred before that day.

108-80 Deciding if capital improvements are related to each other

In deciding whether capital improvements are related to each other, the factors to be considered include:

the nature of the CGT asset to which the improvements are made; and

the nature, location, size, value, quality, composition and utility of each improvement; and

whether an improvement depends in a physical, economic, commercial or practical sense on another improvement; and

whether the improvements are part of an overall project; and

whether the improvements are of the same kind; and

whether the improvements are made within a reasonable period of time of each other.

108-85 Meaning of improvement threshold

(1) The improvement threshold for the 1997-98 income year is $89,992.

The improvement threshold is indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.

The Commissioner must publish before the beginning of each financial year the improvement threshold for that year.

Division 109 — Acquisition of CGT assets

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 109

109-A Operative rules

109-B Signposts to other acquisition rules

Guide to Division 109

109-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the ways in which you can acquire a CGT asset and the time of acquisition.

The time of acquisition is important for indexation, and for the exemption of assets acquired before 20 September 1985.

Generally, you acquire a CGT asset when you become its owner. You can also acquire a CGT asset:

• as a result of a CGT event happening: see section 109-5; or

• in other circumstances: see section 109-10.

This Division also directs you to special acquisition rules in other Divisions.

Subdivision 109-A — Operative rules

Table of sections

109-5 General acquisition rules

109-10 When you acquire a CGT asset without a CGT event

109-5 General acquisition rules

(1) In general, you acquire a *CGT asset when you become its owner. In this case, the time when you *acquire the asset is when you become its owner.

(2) This table sets out specific rules for the circumstances in which, and the time at which, you acquire a *CGT asset as a result of a *CGT event happening.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

Note 1: For CGT events E1, E2 and E3, if the circumstances specified in the second column of the table happened to an asset before 12 January 1994, there may be no acquisition: see section 109-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 2: The acquisition rule for CGT event E9 in the table does not apply to you as trustee if the agreement to create the trust was made before 12 noon on 12 January 1994: see section 109-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

109-10 When you acquire a CGT asset without a CGT event

This table sets out some specific rules for the circumstances in which, and the time at which, you acquire a *CGT asset otherwise than as a result of a *CGT event happening.

Subdivision 109-B — Signposts to other acquisition rules

Table of sections

109-50 Effect of this Subdivision

109-55 Other acquisition rules

109-60 Acquisition rules outside this Part and Part 3-3

109-50 Effect of this Subdivision

This Subdivision is a Guide.

109-55 Other acquisition rules

This table sets out other acquisition rules in this Part and Part 3-3. Some of the rules have effect only for limited purposes.

Note: Section 115-34 sets out other acquisition rules for certain cases involving replacement-asset roll-overs covered by that section.

109-60 Acquisition rules outside this Part and Part 3-3

This table sets out other acquisition rules outside this Part and Part 3-3.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are in bold.

Division 110 — Cost base and reduced cost base

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 110

110-A Cost base

110-B Reduced cost base

Guide to Division 110

110-1 What this Division is about

This Division tells you how to work out the cost base and reduced cost base of a CGT asset. You need to know these to work out if you make a capital gain or loss from most CGT events.

Table of sections

110-5 Modifications to general rules

110-10 Rules about cost base not relevant for some CGT events

110-5 Modifications to general rules

After you have read the general rules, you need to know if there are any modifications to them. Division 112 lists each situation that may result in a modification and tells you where you can find the detailed provisions for each situation.

110-10 Rules about cost base not relevant for some CGT events

This table sets out each CGT event for which you do not need to know what the cost base or reduced cost base of a CGT asset is to work out if you make a capital gain or loss. The section describing the event tells you what amount is relevant instead.

Subdivision 110-A — Cost base

Table of sections

110-25 General rules about cost base

110-35 Incidental costs

110-36 Indexation

What does not form part of the cost base

110-37 Expenditure forming part of cost base or element

110-38 Exclusions

110-40 Assets acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997

110-43 Partnership interests acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997

110-45 Assets acquired after 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997

110-50 Partnership interests acquired after 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997

110-53 Exceptions to application of sections 110-45 and 110-50

110-54 Debt deductions disallowed by thin capitalisation rules

110-25 General rules about cost base

(1) The cost base of a *CGT asset consists of 5 elements.

Note 1: You need to keep records of each element: see Division 121.

Note 2: The cost base is reduced by net input tax credits: see section 103-30.

Note 3: An amount that makes up all or part of an element of the cost base of an asset may be determined under section 230-505, if the amount is provided for acquiring a thing, and you start or cease to have a Division 230 financial arrangement as consideration for the acquisition of the thing.

5 elements of the cost base

The first element is the total of:

the money you paid, or are required to pay, in respect of *acquiring it; and

the *market value of any other property you gave, or are required to give, in respect of acquiring it (worked out as at the time of the acquisition).

Note 1: There are special rules for working out when you are required to pay money or give other property: see section 103-15.

Note 2: This element is replaced with another amount in many situations: see Division 112.

The second element is the incidental costs you incurred. These costs can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note: There is one situation to do with options in which the incidental costs relating to the CGT event are modified: see section 112-85.

The third element is the costs of owning the CGT asset you incurred (but only if you *acquired the asset after 20 August 1991). These costs include:

interest on money you borrowed to acquire the asset; and

costs of maintaining, repairing or insuring it; and

rates or land tax, if the asset is land; and

interest on money you borrowed to refinance the money you borrowed to acquire the asset; and

interest on money you borrowed to finance the capital expenditure you incurred to increase the asset’s value.

These costs can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note: This element does not apply to personal use assets or collectables: see sections 108-17 and 108-30.

The fourth element is capital expenditure you incurred:

the purpose or the expected effect of which is to increase or preserve the asset’s value; or

that relates to installing or moving the asset.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note: There are 3 situations involving leases in which this element is modified: see section 112-80.

Subsection (5) does not apply to capital expenditure incurred in relation to goodwill.

The fifth element is capital expenditure that you incurred to establish, preserve or defend your title to the asset, or a right over the asset. (The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.)

Assume a CGT event for purposes of working out cost base at a particular time

If:

it is necessary to work out the *cost base at a particular time; and

a CGT event does not happen in relation to the asset at or just after that time;

assume, for the purpose only of working out the cost base at the particular time, that such an event does happen in relation to the asset at or just after that time.

Note 1: For example, in order to apply subsection 110-37(1), it is necessary for there to be a CGT event.

Note 2: The assumption that a CGT event happens does not have any consequence beyond that stated. For example, it does not mean that the asset is afterwards to be treated as having been acquired at the particular time with a first element of cost base equal to all of its former cost base elements.

110-35 Incidental costs

(1) There are a number of incidental costs you may have incurred. Except for the ninth, they are costs you may have incurred:

to *acquire a CGT asset; or

that relate to a CGT event.

(2) The first is remuneration for the services of a surveyor, valuer, auctioneer, accountant, broker, *agent, consultant or legal adviser. However, remuneration for professional advice about the operation of this Act is not included unless it is provided by a *recognised tax adviser.

Note: Expenditure for professional advice about taxation incurred before 1 July 1989 does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset: see section 110-35 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

(3) The second is costs of transfer.

(4) The third is stamp duty or other similar duty.

(5) The fourth is:

if you *acquired a CGT asset—costs of advertising or marketing to find a seller; or

if a CGT event happened—costs of advertising or marketing to find a buyer.

(6) The fifth is costs relating to the making of any valuation or apportionment for the purposes of this Part or Part 3-3.

(7) The sixth is search fees relating to a *CGT asset.

(8) The seventh is the cost of a conveyancing kit (or a similar cost).

(9) The eighth is borrowing expenses (such as loan application fees and mortgage discharge fees).

(10) The ninth is expenditure that:

is incurred by the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group to an entity that is not a *member of the group; and

reasonably relates to a CGT asset *held by the head company; and

is incurred because of a transaction that is between members of the group.

Example: Land is transferred by one company to another company. The companies are members of a consolidated group. Stamp duty is payable as a result of the transaction.

The transaction has no taxation consequences because of its intra-group nature.

The stamp duty is included in the cost base and reduced cost base of the land.

Note: Intra-group assets are not held by the head company because of the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule). An example of an intra-group asset is a debt owed by a member of the consolidated group to another member of the group.

(11) The tenth is termination or other similar fees incurred as a direct result of your ownership of a *CGT asset ending.

110-36 Indexation

Indexation for working out capital gains of Australian resident individuals or trusts for CGT events happening on or after 1 July 2027

(1A) The cost base of a *CGT asset also includes indexation of the elements of the cost base (except the third element) for the purposes of working out the *capital gain of an individual or a trust from a *CGT event happening in relation to the CGT asset if:

the CGT event happens on or after 1 July 2027; and

the requirements of Division 114 are met.

Note 1: This subsection does not extend to foreign residents or temporary residents (see section 114-25).

Note 2: This subsection is mainly relevant for a trust to the extent that the trust’s beneficiaries are individuals who are Australian residents (see Subdivision 115-C and section 114-25).

Note 3: This subsection extends to the capital gain of an individual that is attributable to a partnership of which the individual is a partner.

Note 4: If an asset (including a pre-CGT asset) was held on 30 June 2027, it may be taken to have been sold just before, and reacquired on, 1 July 2027 (see subsections 112-155(2), 112-165(2) and 112-175(2)). For such an asset, indexation because of this subsection will happen only for the period the asset is held on or after 1 July 2027 (see subsection 960-275(1B)).

Indexation for working out capital gains in other circumstances

(1) The cost base of a *CGT asset also includes indexation of the elements of the cost base (except the third element) for the purposes of working out the *capital gain of an entity from a *CGT event happening in relation to the CGT asset if:

the most recent *acquisition of the CGT asset is at or before 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999; and

for an entity that is an individual or a trust—the CGT event happens before 1 July 2027, and not because of subsection 112-155(2) or 112-165(2); and

the requirements of Division 114 are met.

Note: For paragraph (b), indexation is not applicable for working out a capital gain arising:

directly from a CGT event taken to have happened under subsection 112-155(2); or

directly or indirectly from a CGT event taken to have happened under subsection 112-165(2).

Instead, capital gains from such CGT events may be discount capital gains.

(2) However, for the purposes of working out the *capital gain of an entity mentioned in an item of the table from a *CGT event happening after 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999, the cost base includes indexation because of subsection (1) only if the entity mentioned in the item chooses that the cost base includes indexation.

Note 1: Section 103-25 specifies when you must make the choice and provides that the way you prepare your income tax return is evidence of your choice.

Note 2: For each CGT asset whose cost base you need to work out, you may either choose to index the expenditure included in the asset’s cost base or not make that choice. If you do not choose to index the expenditure, your net capital gain includes only part of your capital gain on the CGT asset as worked out on the basis of the cost base not including indexation and reduced by your capital losses.

Note 3: This subsection only applies for an individual or a trust for a CGT event happening before 1 July 2027 (see paragraph (1)(b)).

(3) Also, for the purpose of working out the *capital gain of a *life insurance company from a *CGT event happening after 30 June 2000 in respect of a *CGT asset that is a *complying superannuation asset, the cost base includes indexation because of subsection (1) only if the life insurance company chooses that the cost base includes indexation.

Note: Section 110-25 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides that, in working out the capital gain from a CGT event after 11.45 am on 21 September 1999 and before 1 July 2000 in respect of an asset of a life insurance company or registered organisation, the cost base includes indexation only if the company or organisation chooses it.

What does not form part of the cost base

110-37 Expenditure forming part of cost base or element

If a later provision of this Subdivision says that:

certain expenditure does not form part of the cost base of a *CGT asset; or

the cost base is reduced by certain expenditure;

the expenditure is initially included in the cost base, which is then reduced by the amount of the expenditure just before a CGT event happens in relation to the asset.

Note: This has the effect of recognising in the cost base any indexed component relating to the expenditure.

On the other hand, if such a provision says that:

(a) certain expenditure does not form part of one or more elements of the *cost base of a *CGT asset; or

(b) one or more elements of the cost base are reduced by certain expenditure;

the expenditure is never included in the relevant elements of the cost base.

Note: This has the effect of not recognising to any extent this expenditure in the cost base.

110-38 Exclusions

(1) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-54 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).

Note: Section 26-54 prevents deductions for expenditure related to certain offences.

(2) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that it is a *bribe to a foreign public official or a *bribe to a public official.

(3) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that it is in respect of providing *entertainment.

(4) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-5 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).

Note: Section 26-5 denies deductions for penalties.

(4A) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-31 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-31 denies deductions for travel related to the use of residential premises as residential accommodation.

(5) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-47 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-47 denies deductions for the excess of boat expenditure over boat income.

(6) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-22 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-22 denies deductions for political contributions and gifts.

(7) Expenditure does not form any part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-97 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).

Note: Section 26-97 denies deductions for National Disability Insurance Scheme expenditure.

(8) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-100 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-100 denies deductions for certain expenditure on water infrastructure improvements.

(8A) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that section 26-155 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-155 denies deductions for the excess of residential dwelling related expenditure over residential dwelling related income.

(9) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent that a provision of Division 832 (about hybrid mismatch rules) prevents it being deducted.

110-40 Assets acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997

This section prevents some expenditure from forming part of one or more elements of the cost base of a *CGT asset *acquired at or before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997. (The expenditure mentioned in this section can include giving property: see section 103-5.)

Note: For the cost base of a partnership interest you acquire at or before that time, see section 110-43.

(2) Expenditure does not form part of the second or third element of the cost base to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

(3) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent of any amount you have received as *recoupment of it, except so far as the amount is included in your assessable income.

Subsection (2) does not apply in relation to amounts that you have deducted or can deduct under Division 243.

110-43 Partnership interests acquired before 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997

This section prevents some expenditure from forming part of one or more elements of the *cost base of your interest in a CGT asset of a partnership if you *acquired the interest at or before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997. (The expenditure mentioned in this section can include giving property: see section 103-5.)

(2) Expenditure does not form part of the second or third element of the cost base to the extent that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have deducted or can deduct it.

(3) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent of any amount that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have received as *recoupment of the expenditure, except so far as the amount is included in your assessable income or the partnership’s assessable income.

Subsection (2) does not apply in relation to amounts that you have deducted or can deduct under Division 243.

110-45 Assets acquired after 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997

This section prevents some expenditure from forming part of the *cost base, or of an element of the cost base, of a CGT asset *acquired after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997. (The expenditure mentioned in this section can include giving property: see section 103-5.)

For the cost base of interests in partnership assets acquired after that time, see section 110-50.

For exceptions to the application of this section, see section 110-53.

This section also applies to expenditure incurred after 30 June 1999 on land or a building if:

the land or building was *acquired at or before the time mentioned in subsection (1); and

the expenditure forms part of the fourth element of the *cost base of the land or building.

Deductible expenditure excluded from second and third elements

(1B) Expenditure does not form part of the second or third element of the cost base to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it.

Other deductible expenditure

(2) Expenditure (except expenditure excluded by subsection (1B)) does not form part of the cost base to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it for an income year, except so far as:

the deduction has been reversed by an amount being included in your assessable income for an income year by a provision of this Act (outside this Part and Part 3-3 and Division 243); or

Note: Division 20 contains some of the provisions that reverse deductions. Section 20-5 lists some others.

the deduction is under Division 243; or

the deduction would have been so reversed apart from a provision listed in the table (relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income).

Recouped expenditure

(3) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent of any amount you have received as *recoupment of it, except so far as the amount is included in your assessable income.

Capital expenditure by previous owner that you can deduct after acquisition

(4) The cost base is reduced to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct for an income year capital expenditure incurred by another entity in respect of the *CGT asset. (This rule does not apply so far as the deduction is covered by paragraph (2)(a) or (b).)

Example: Under Division 43 you can deduct expenditure incurred by a previous owner of capital works you own.

Landcare and water facility expenditure giving rise to a tax offset

(5) Expenditure does not form part of the cost base to the extent that you choose a *tax offset for it under the former section 388-55 (about the landcare and water facility tax offset) instead of deducting it.

Heritage conservation expenditure giving rise to a tax offset

(6) Expenditure does not form part of the cost base to the extent that:

(a) it is eligible heritage conservation expenditure (as determined under former section 159UO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

you could have deducted it for an income year under any of these Divisions (about capital works):

Division 43 of this Act;

former Division 10C or 10D of Part III of that Act;

but for the exclusions in paragraph 43-70(2)(h) of this Act and former subsections 124ZB(4) and 124ZG(5) of that Act.

Note: Because eligible heritage conservation expenditure is the subject of a tax offset, it is also not deductible.

110-50 Partnership interests acquired after 7.30 pm on 13 May 1997

This section prevents some expenditure from forming part of the *cost base, or of an element of the cost base, of your interest in a CGT asset of a partnership if you *acquired the interest after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997. (The expenditure mentioned in this section can include giving property: see section 103-5.)

For exceptions to the application of this section, see section 110-53.

This section also applies to expenditure incurred after 30 June 1999 on land or a building if:

the land or building was *acquired at or before the time mentioned in subsection (1); and

the expenditure forms part of the fourth element of the *cost base of the land or building.

Deductible expenditure excluded from second and third elements

(1B) Expenditure does not form part of the second or third element of the cost base to the extent that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have deducted or can deduct it.

Other deductible expenditure

(2) Expenditure (except expenditure excluded by subsection (1B) does not form part of the cost base to the extent that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have deducted or can deduct it for an income year, except so far as:

the deduction has been reversed by an amount being included in your assessable income for an income year, or in the assessable income of a partnership in which you are or were a partner, by a provision of this Act (outside this Part and Part 3-3 and Division 243); or

Note: Division 20 contains some of the provisions that reverse deductions. Section 20-5 lists some others.

the deduction is under Division 243; or

the deduction would have been so reversed apart from a provision listed in the table in subsection 110-45(2) (relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income).

Recouped expenditure

(3) Expenditure does not form part of any element of the cost base to the extent of any amount that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have received as *recoupment of it, except so far as the amount is included in your assessable income or the partnership’s assessable income.

Capital expenditure by previous owner of the asset

(4) The cost base is reduced to the extent that you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, have deducted or can deduct for an income year capital expenditure incurred by another entity in respect of the *CGT asset. (This rule does not apply so far as the deduction is covered by paragraph (2)(a) or (b).)

Example: Under Division 43 an entity can deduct expenditure incurred by a previous owner of capital works that the entity owns.

Landcare and water facility expenditure giving rise to a tax offset

(5) Expenditure does not form part of the cost base to the extent that you choose a *tax offset for it under the former section 388-55 (about the landcare and water facility tax offset) instead of deducting it.

Heritage conservation expenditure giving rise to a tax offset

(6) Expenditure does not form part of the cost base to the extent that:

(a) it is eligible heritage conservation expenditure (as determined under former section 159UO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, could have deducted it for an income year under any of these Divisions (about capital works):

Division 43 of this Act;

former Division 10C or 10D of Part III of that Act;

but for the exclusions in paragraph 43-70(2)(h) of this Act and former subsections 124ZB(4) and 124ZG(5) of that Act.

Note: Because eligible heritage conservation expenditure is the subject of a tax offset, it is also not deductible.

110-53 Exceptions to application of sections 110-45 and 110-50

(1) Subsection 110-45(2), (4), (5) or (6) or 110-50(2), (4), (5) or (6) does not prevent expenditure from forming part of the cost base to the extent that the deduction mentioned in that subsection could reasonably be regarded as arising before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997, or as relating to a period before that time.

(2) Subsections 110-45(5) and (6) and 110-50(5) and (6) do not apply to expenditure incurred before the day on which the Bill that became the Taxation Laws Amendment Act (No. 1) 1999 was introduced into the House of Representatives.

110-54 Debt deductions disallowed by thin capitalisation rules

Expenditure does not form part of the third element of the cost base to the extent that Division 820 (Thin capitalisation rules) prevented or prevents you, or a partnership in which you are or were a partner, from deducting it.

Subdivision 110-B — Reduced cost base

Table of sections

110-55 General rules about reduced cost base

110-60 Reduced cost base for partnership assets

110-55 General rules about reduced cost base

(1) The reduced cost base of a *CGT asset consists of 5 elements. It does not include indexation of those elements.

Note: The reduced cost base is reduced by net input tax credits: see section 103-30.

5 elements of the reduced cost base

(2) All of the elements (except the third one) of the reduced cost base of a *CGT asset are the same as those for the *cost base.

The third element is:

any amounts worked out under whichever of the following subparagraphs applies:

if Division 58 does not apply to the asset—any amount included in your assessable income for any income year because of a balancing adjustment for the asset;

if Division 58 applies to the asset and an amount has been included in your assessable income for an income year because of a balancing adjustment for the asset—any part of that amount that was attributable to amounts you have deducted or can deduct for the decline in value of the asset; and

any amount that would have been so included apart from any of these (which provide relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income):

section 40-365; or

any of these former sections—section 42-285, 42-290 or 42-293; or

(iii) former subsection 59(2A) or (2D) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

What does not form part of the reduced cost base

(4) The reduced cost base does not include an amount to the extent that you have deducted or can deduct it (including because of a balancing adjustment) or could have deducted apart from paragraph 43-70(2)(h).

Note: That paragraph excludes from deductibility under Division 43 expenditure that qualifies for the heritage conservation rebate.

(5) The reduced cost base does not include an amount that you could have deducted for a *CGT asset had you used it wholly for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

(6) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent of any amounts you have received as *recoupment of it. However, this rule does not apply to the extent that the amounts are included in your assessable income.

(6A) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that you chose a *tax offset for it under the former section 388-55 (about the landcare and water facility tax offset) instead of deducting it.

(7) If your *CGT asset is a *share in a company, its reduced cost base is reduced by the amount calculated under subsection (8) if:

you are a corporate tax entity; and

the company makes a distribution to you under an arrangement; and

(b) an amount (the attributable amount) representing the distribution or part of it is reasonably attributable to profits *derived by the company before you cacquired the share; and

(c) you are entitled to a *tax offset under Division 207 on the part of the distribution that is a *dividend (the dividend amount); and

you were a *controller (for CGT purposes) of the company, or an associate of such a controller, when the arrangement was made or carried out.

The amount of the reduction is:

(9) The reduced cost base is to be reduced by any amount that you have deducted or can deduct, or could have deducted except for Subdivision 170-D, as a result of a *CGT event that happens in relation to a *CGT asset. However, do not make a reduction for an amount that relates to a cost that could never have formed part of the reduced cost base or is excluded from the reduced cost base as a result of another provision of this section.

(9A) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-54 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).

Note: Section 26-54 prevents deductions for expenditure related to certain offences.

(9B) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that it is a *bribe to a foreign public official or a *bribe to a public official.

(9C) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that it is in respect of providing *entertainment.

(9D) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-5 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).

Note: Section 26-5 denies deductions for penalties.

(9E) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-47 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-47 denies deductions for the excess of boat expenditure over boat income.

(9F) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-22 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-22 denies deductions for political contributions and gifts.

(9G) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-100 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-100 denies deductions for certain expenditure on water infrastructure improvements.

(9H) Expenditure does not form any part of any element of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-97 prevents it being deducted (even if some other provision also prevents it being deducted).

Note: Section 26-97 denies deductions for National Disability Insurance Scheme expenditure.

(9J) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-31 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-31 denies deductions for travel related to the use of residential premises as residential accommodation.

(9JA) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that section 26-155 prevents it being deducted.

Note: Section 26-155 denies deductions for the excess of residential dwelling related expenditure over residential dwelling related income.

(9K) Expenditure does not form part of the reduced cost base to the extent that a provision of Division 832 (about hybrid mismatch rules) prevents it being deducted.

Assume a CGT event for purposes of working out reduced cost base at a particular time

If:

it is necessary to work out the *reduced cost base at a particular time; and

a CGT event does not happen in relation to the asset at or just after that time;

assume, for the purpose only of working out the reduced cost base at the particular time, that such an event does happen in relation to the asset at or just after that time.

110-60 Reduced cost base for partnership assets

(1) The third element of an entity’s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership is the entity’s share of:

any amounts worked out under whichever of the following subparagraphs applies:

if Division 58 does not apply to the asset—any amount included in the assessable income of the partnership for any income year because of a balancing adjustment for the asset;

if Division 58 applies to the asset and an amount has been included in the assessable income of the partnership for an income year because of a balancing adjustment for the asset—any part of that amount that was attributable to amounts that the partnership has deducted or can deduct for depreciation of the asset; and

any amount that would have been so included apart from any of these (which provide relief from including a balancing charge in your assessable income):

section 40-365; or

any of these former sections—section 42-285, 42-290 or 42-293; or

(iii) former subsection 59(2A) or (2D) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

calculated according to the entity’s share in the partnership net income or net loss.

(2) Expenditure does not form part of an entity’s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership to the extent that a partnership in which the entity is or was a partner has deducted or can deduct it (including because of a balancing adjustment), or could have deducted it apart from paragraph 43-70(2)(h).

(3) Expenditure does not form part of an entity’s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership to the extent that a partnership in which the entity is or was a partner could have deducted an amount for the asset if it had used it wholly for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

(4) Expenditure does not form part of an entity’s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership to the extent of any amounts that a partnership in which the entity is or was a partner has received as *recoupment of it and that are not included in the assessable income of the partnership.

(4A) Expenditure does not form part of an entity’s reduced cost base for its interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership to the extent that the entity chose a *tax offset for the expenditure under the former section 388-55 (about the landcare and water facility tax offset) instead of deducting it.

(7) The reduced cost base of an entity’s interest in a *CGT asset of a partnership is to be reduced by the entity’s share of any amount that the partnership has deducted or can deduct, or could have deducted except for Subdivision 170-D, as a result of a *CGT event that happens in relation to the asset. However, a reduction is not to be made for an amount that relates to a cost that could never have formed part of the reduced cost base or is excluded from the reduced cost base as a result of another provision of this section.

Division 112 — Modifications to cost base and reduced cost base

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 112

112-A General modifications

112-B Finding tables for special rules

112-C Replacement-asset roll-overs

112-D Same-asset roll-overs

Guide to Division 112

112-1 What this Division is about

This Division tells you the situations that may modify the general rules about the cost base and reduced cost base of a CGT asset.

112-5 Discussion of modifications

Modifications can occur from the time you acquired the CGT asset to when a CGT event happens in relation to it.

Note: You should keep records of the modifications: see Division 121.

Most modifications replace the first element (what you paid for a CGT asset) of the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset.

Subdivision 112-A contains operative provisions setting out the general situations that may result in a modification to the general rules.

(4) Subdivision 112-B (which is a guide) has a number of tables (each one covering a specialist topic) that tell you each situation that may result in a modification to the general rules.

(5) Subdivision 112-C (which is a guide) explains what a replacement-asset roll-over is and how it can modify the cost base or reduced cost base.

(6) Subdivision 112-D (which is a guide) explains what a same-asset roll-over is and how it can modify the cost base or reduced cost base.

Subdivision 112-E contains operative provisions setting out some deemed sales and reacquisitions that may result in a modification to the general rules.

Section 230-505 provides special rules for working out the amount of consideration for an asset if the asset is a *Division 230 financial arrangement or a Division 230 financial arrangement is involved in that consideration.

Subdivision 112-A — General modifications

Table of sections

112-15 General rule for replacement modifications

112-20 Market value substitution rule

112-25 Split, changed or merged assets

112-30 Apportionment rules

112-35 Assumption of liability rule

112-36 Acquisitions of assets involving look-through earnout rights

112-37 Put options

112-15 General rule for replacement modifications

If a cost base modification replaces an element of the cost base of a *CGT asset with an amount, this Part and Part 3-3 apply to you as if you had paid that amount.

Section 134-1 applies to the legal personal representative as if the representative had paid $10,000 for the option.

Example: An individual pays $10,000 to acquire an option. The individual dies and the option devolves to his legal personal representative, who exercises the option.

112-20 Market value substitution rule

The first element of your *cost base and reduced cost base of a *CGT asset you *acquire from another entity is its *market value (at the time of acquisition) if:

you did not incur expenditure to acquire it, except where your acquisition of the asset resulted from:

CGT event D1 happening; or

another entity doing something that did not constitute a CGT event happening; or

some or all of the expenditure you incurred to acquire it cannot be valued; or

you did not deal at *arm’s length with the other entity in connection with the acquisition.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Despite paragraph (1)(c), if:

you did not deal at *arm’s length with the other entity; and

your *acquisition of the CGT asset resulted from another entity doing something that did not constitute a CGT event happening;

the *market value is substituted only if what you paid to acquire the CGT asset was more than its market value (at the time of acquisition).

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

There are some situations in which the rule in subsection (1) does not apply. They include the situations set out in this table:

Note 1: Disregard subsections (2) and (3) for shares or units that you acquired before 16 August 1989: see section 112-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 2: This section does not apply to ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes: see subsection 130-80(4).

112-25 Split, changed or merged assets

Split or changed assets

This section sets out what happens if:

(a) a *CGT asset (the original asset) is split into 2 or more assets (the new assets); or

(b) a *CGT asset (also the original asset) changes in whole or in part into an asset (also the new asset) of a different nature;

and you are the beneficial owner of the original asset and each new asset.

Example: You subdivide a block of land into 3 separate blocks. Each of those blocks is a new asset.

The splitting or change is not a CGT event.

You work out the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each new asset as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out each element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the original asset at the time of the event referred to in subsection (1).

Step 2. Apportion in a reasonable way each element to each new asset. The result is each corresponding element of the new asset’s *cost base and *reduced cost base.

Merged assets

(4) If 2 or more *CGT assets (the original assets) are merged into a single asset (the new asset) and you are the beneficial owner of the original assets and the new asset:

the merger is not a CGT event; and

each element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the new asset (at the time of the merging) is the sum of the corresponding elements of each original asset.

112-30 Apportionment rules

Apportionment on acquisition of an asset

If you *acquire a CGT asset because of a transaction and only part of the expenditure you incurred under the transaction relates to the acquisition of the asset, the first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset is that part of the expenditure that is reasonably attributable to the acquisition of the asset.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Apportionment of expenditure in other elements

If you incur expenditure and only part of it relates to another element of the *cost base or reduced cost base of a *CGT asset, that element includes that part of the expenditure that is reasonably attributable to that element.

Apportionment for CGT asset that was part of another asset

The *cost base and reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is apportioned if a CGT event happens to some part of the asset, but not to the remainder of it.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

The *cost base for the CGT asset representing the part to which the CGT event happened is worked out using the formula:

The *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

The remainder of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset is attributed to the part that remains.

Example: You acquire a truck for $24,000 and sell its motor for $9,000. Suppose the market value of the remainder of the truck is $16,000.

Under subsection (3), the cost base of the motor is:

Under subsection (4), the cost base of the remainder of the truck is:

However, an amount forming part of the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the asset is not apportioned if, on the facts, that amount is wholly attributable to the part to which the CGT event happened or to the remaining part.

112-35 Assumption of liability rule

If you *acquire a CGT asset from another entity that is subject to a liability, the first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset includes the amount of the liability you assume.

Example: You acquire a block of land for $150,000. You pay $50,000 and assume a liability for an outstanding mortgage of $100,000. The first element of your cost base and reduced cost base is $150,000.

Note: The first element of cost base is dealt with in subsection 110-25(2). The first element of reduced cost base is the same: see subsection 110-55(2).

112-36 Acquisitions of assets involving look-through earnout rights

Consequences for cost base and reduced cost base

(1) If you *acquire a *CGT asset because an entity *disposes of the CGT asset to you, and that disposal causes *CGT event A1 (the first CGT event) to happen:

neither the *cost base nor the *reduced cost base of the CGT asset includes the value of any look-through earnout right relating to the CGT asset and the acquisition; and

include in the first element of the CGT asset’s cost base and reduced cost base any financial benefit that you provide under such a look-through earnout right; and

reduce the first element of the CGT asset’s cost base and reduced cost base by an amount equal to the amount of any financial benefit that you receive under such a look-through earnout right.

Remaking choices affected by the look-through earnout right

Despite section 103-25, you may remake any choice you made under this Part or Part 3-3 for a later CGT event involving the CGT asset if:

after the later CGT event, you provide or receive a financial benefit under such a look-through earnout right; and

you remake the choice at or before the time you are required to lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the financial benefit is provided or received.

Amending assessments affected by the look-through earnout right

The Commissioner may amend an assessment of a tax-related liability if:

an entity provides or receives a financial benefit under such a look-through earnout right; and

the amount of the tax-related liability:

depends on that entity’s taxable income for an income year in which a CGT event, involving the CGT asset, happens after the first CGT event but before the financial benefit is provided or received; or

is otherwise affected by that right’s character as a look-through earnout right; and

the Commissioner makes the amendment before the end of the 4-year period starting at the end of the income year in which the last possible financial benefit becomes or could become due under the look-through earnout right.

The tax-related liability need not be a liability of that entity.

Note: Subparagraph (b)(ii) covers changes to the amount of that tax-related liability that happen directly or indirectly because of subsection (1) or (2).

If at a particular time a right is taken never to have been a look-through earnout right because of subsection 118-565(2), the Commissioner may amend an assessment of a tax-related liability for up to 4 years after that time if:

an entity provides or receives a financial benefit under the right; and

the amount of the tax-related liability:

depends on that entity’s taxable income for an income year in which a CGT event, involving the CGT asset, happens after the first CGT event but before the financial benefit is provided or received; or

was otherwise affected by that right’s character as a look-through earnout right before subsection 118-565(2) applied.

The tax-related liability need not be a liability of that entity.

Note: Subsection 118-565(2) restricts look-through earnout rights to rights to financial benefits over a period not exceeding 5 years from the end of the income year in which the first CGT event happens.

If, after providing or receiving a financial benefit under a right referred to in subsection (3) or (4):

you are dissatisfied with an assessment referred to in that subsection; and

the Commissioner notifies you that the Commissioner has decided under that subsection not to amend your assessment;

you may object against the assessment, to the extent that it does not take account of that right’s character (as a *look-through earnout right or not such a right), in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

112-37 Put options

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a right to *dispose of a *share in a company that you *acquire as a result of CGT event D2 happening to the company is the sum of:

the amount that is included in your assessable income as ordinary income as a result of your acquisition of the right; and

the amount (if any) that you paid to acquire the right.

Subdivision 112-B — Finding tables for special rules

Table of sections

112-40 Effect of this Subdivision

112-45 CGT events

112-46 Annual cost base adjustment for member’s unit or interest in AMIT

112-48 Gifts acquired by associates

112-50 Main residence

112-53 Scrip for scrip roll-over

112-53AA Statutory licences

112-53AB Change of incorporation

112-53A MDO roll-over

112-53B Exchange of stapled ownership interests for units in a unit trust

112-53C Water entitlement roll-overs

112-54 Demergers

112-54A Transfer of assets between certain trusts

112-55 Effect of you dying

112-60 Bonus shares or units

112-65 Rights

112-70 Convertible interests

112-77 Exchangeable interests

112-78 Exploration investments

112-80 Leases

112-85 Options

112-87 Residency

112-90 An asset stops being a pre-CGT asset

112-92 Demutualisation of certain entities

112-95 Transfer of tax losses and net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies

112-97 Modifications outside this Part and Part 3-3

112-40 Effect of this Subdivision

This Subdivision is a Guide.

Note: In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150.

It sets out which element of the cost base or reduced cost base of a CGT asset is affected by various situations.

112-45 CGT events
112-46 Annual cost base adjustment for member’s unit or interest in AMIT
112-48 Gifts acquired by associates
112-50 Main residence
112-53 Scrip for scrip roll-over
112-53AA Statutory licences
112-53AB Change of incorporation
112-53A MDO roll-over
112-53B Exchange of stapled ownership interests for units in a unit trust
112-53C Water entitlement roll-overs
112-54 Demergers
112-54A Transfer of assets between certain trusts
112-55 Effect of you dying
112-60 Bonus shares or units
112-65 Rights
112-70 Convertible interests
112-77 Exchangeable interests
112-78 Exploration investments
112-80 Leases
112-85 Options
112-87 Residency
112-90 An asset stops being a pre-CGT asset
112-92 Demutualisation of certain entities
112-95 Transfer of tax losses and net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies
112-97 Modifications outside this Part and Part 3-3

This table sets out other cost base modifications outside this Part and Part 3-3.

Provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are in bold.

Subdivision 112-C — Replacement-asset roll-overs

Table of sections

112-100 Effect of this Subdivision

112-105 What is a replacement-asset roll-over?

112-110 How is the cost base of the replacement asset modified?

112-115 Table of replacement-asset roll-overs

112-100 Effect of this Subdivision

This Subdivision is a Guide.

Note: In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150.

112-105 What is a replacement-asset roll-over?

(1) A replacement-asset roll-over allows you to defer the making of a capital gain or a capital loss from one CGT event until a later CGT event happens.

(2) It involves your ownership of one CGT asset (the original asset) ending and you acquiring another one (the replacement asset).

All replacement-asset roll-overs are set out in the table in section 112-115.

112-110 How is the cost base of the replacement asset modified?

If you acquired the original asset on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the replacement asset’s cost base is replaced by the original asset’s cost base at the time you acquired the replacement asset; and

the first element of the replacement asset’s reduced cost base is replaced by the original asset’s reduced cost base at the time you acquired the replacement asset.

Note 1: Some replacement-asset roll-overs involve other rules that affect the cost base or reduced cost base of the replacement asset.

Note 2: If you acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the replacement asset before that day: see Subdivision 124-A.

Note 3: The reduced cost base may be further modified if the replacement asset roll-over happens after a demerger: see section 125-170.

112-115 Table of replacement-asset roll-overs

This table sets out all the replacement-asset roll-overs and tells you where you can find more detail about each one.

Provisions of this Act are in normal text. The other provisions, in bold, are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 112-D — Same-asset roll-overs

Table of sections

112-135 Effect of this Subdivision

112-140 What is a same-asset roll-over?

112-145 How is the cost base of the asset modified?

112-150 Table of same-asset roll-overs

112-135 Effect of this Subdivision

This Subdivision is a Guide.

Note: In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may be considered only for limited purposes: see section 950-150.

112-140 What is a same-asset roll-over?

A same-asset roll-over allows one entity (the transferor) to disregard a capital gain or loss it makes from disposing of a CGT asset to, or creating a CGT asset in, another entity (the transferee). Any gain or loss is deferred until another CGT event happens in relation to the asset (in the hands of the transferee).

All same-asset roll-overs are set out in the table in section 112-150.

112-145 How is the cost base of the asset modified?

If the transferor acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the asset’s cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is replaced by the asset’s cost base at the time the transferee acquired it; and

the first element of the asset’s reduced cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is replaced by the asset’s reduced cost base at the time the transferee acquired it.

Note 1: If the transferor acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, the transferee is taken to have acquired it before that day: see Subdivision 126-A.

Note 2: The reduced cost base may be further modified if the same asset roll-over happens after a demerger: see section 125-170.

112-150 Table of same-asset roll-overs

This table sets out all the same-asset roll-overs and tells you where you can find more detail about each one.

Subdivision 112-E — Deemed sales just before, and reacquisitions on, 1 July 2027

Table of sections

112-155 Australian resident individuals—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027

112-160 Australian resident individuals—defer a gain or loss from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens

112-165 Trusts—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027

112-170 Trusts—defer a gain or loss from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens

112-175 Pre-CGT assets—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027

112-180 Pre-CGT assets—defer a gain from CGT event K6 from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens

112-185 Method for apportioning capital gains and losses between realisation events and earlier deemed CGT events

112-155 Australian resident individuals—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027

Application

This section applies in relation to a CGT asset of yours if:

on 30 June 2027, the asset is not a pre-CGT asset; and

you are an individual who *acquired the asset and then held it throughout the period:

starting at a time before 1 July 2027; and

ending at the end of 30 June 2027; and

you continue to hold the asset until a realisation event happens in relation to the asset on or after 1 July 2027; and

if it were assumed that you make a discount capital gain from the realisation event—section 115-105 (about foreign or temporary residents) would not apply to the discount capital gain; and

the asset is not an asset for which either of the following sections applies in relation to a *capital gain you make in relation to the realisation event:

section 115-102 (about new residential dwellings);

section 115-125 (about affordable housing).

Deemed sale and reacquisition

For the purposes of this Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 960-M, you are taken:

to have sold the asset just before 1 July 2027, with your capital proceeds for that sale taken to be the amount applying under subsection (3); and

to have *acquired the asset again just after that sale for an amount equal to those capital proceeds.

Note 1: The sale under paragraph (a) happens on 30 June 2027, and the reacquisition under paragraph (b) happens on 1 July 2027.

Note 2: Any capital gain or loss you make from the sale on 30 June 2027 is disregarded (and deferred) until the income year in which the realisation event happens. You can wait until then before working out the amount of the capital gain or loss (see section 112-160).

Note 3: Subdivision 960-M deals with indexation of a CGT asset’s cost base.

The capital proceeds are taken to be equal to:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the asset’s *market value just before 1 July 2027; or

if you choose to use an apportioning method determined under section 112-185—the amount of capital proceeds worked out using that method.

For the purposes of paragraph 103-25(1)(a), the realisation event is the relevant CGT event for such a choice.

Note 1: Section 103-25 sets out rules for making choices.

Note 2: This subsection and section 103-25 mean you do not have to make a choice until the day you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the realisation event happens (see paragraph 103-25(1)(a)).

Note 3: The realisation event is the event mentioned in paragraph (1)(c).

Except for the purposes of section 112-185 (about making apportioning determinations), none of the following apply in relation to a sale and acquisition mentioned in paragraphs (2)(a) and (b) for which a choice is made under paragraph (3)(b):

Subdivisions 112-A, 112-B, 112-C and 112-D (about modifications of the cost base and reduced cost base);

sections 116-25 to 116-60 (about modifications of the general rules about capital proceeds).

112-160 Australian resident individuals—defer a gain or loss from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens

Application

This section applies in relation to a CGT asset of yours if, under paragraph 112-155(2)(a), you make:

(a) a *capital gain (the initial notional gain); or

(b) a *capital loss (the initial notional loss);

in respect of the asset (disregarding subsection (2) of this section).

Disregard the initial notional gain or loss because it is to be deferred

Note: The initial notional gain or loss is made from the sale that is taken to happen at the end of 30 June 2027 (see paragraph 112-155(2)(a)), and is disregarded under subsection (2) of this section.

Disregard the initial notional gain or the initial notional loss, except for the purposes of subsection (3) or (4).

Deferring an initial notional gain

If you made an initial notional gain, then for the purposes of Division 102:

(a) in the income year in which the *realisation event happens in relation to the *CGT asset—you are treated as having made a *capital gain (your deferred gain):

(i) for the *CGT event that happens under paragraph 112-155(2)(a) (the deemed CGT event); and

that is a discount capital gain if the initial notional gain is a discount capital gain; and

that is equal to the amount of the initial notional gain; and

disregard section 102-20 in relation to your deferred gain; and

for the purposes of subparagraph (a)(ii) of this subsection, in working out whether the initial notional gain is a discount capital gain, treat the deemed CGT event as if it happens on the day the realisation event happens; and

in working out whether, under step 6 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1), your deferred gain qualifies for any of the small business concessions, treat the deemed CGT event as if it happens on the day the realisation event happens.

Note 1: For paragraph (a), the realisation event is the CGT event referred to in paragraph 112-155(1)(c).

Note 2: Paragraph (c) is relevant for working out whether the 12-month rule in subsection 115-25(1) is satisfied for the initial notional gain.

Note 3: If the initial notional gain is a discount capital gain, then under step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1), the 50% discount mentioned in paragraph 115-100(aa) can apply to your deferred gain.

Deferring an initial notional loss

If you made an initial notional loss, then for the purposes of Division 102:

(a) in the income year in which the *realisation event happens in relation to the *CGT asset—you are treated as having made a *capital loss (your deferred loss) equal to the amount of the initial notional loss; and

disregard section 102-20 in relation to your deferred loss.

Note: You may make a separate capital loss from the realisation event for the period starting on 1 July 2027. In working out whether you make a capital loss from the realisation event for this period, you are taken to have acquired the CGT asset at the time, and for the amount, mentioned in paragraph 112-155(2)(b).

Working out whether concessions are available for a capital gain from the realisation event

In working out when you *acquired the CGT asset for the purposes of working out whether your *capital gain resulting from the realisation event is a discount capital gain, disregard the sale and acquisition under subsection 112-155(2).

Note: If you make a capital gain from the realisation event in respect of the asset, this subsection is relevant for working out whether the 12-month rule in subsection 115-25(1) is satisfied for the capital gain.

In working out whether, under step 6 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1), your *capital gain resulting from the realisation event qualifies for any of the small business concessions, disregard the sale and acquisition under subsection 112-155(2).

Note: Subsections (5) and (6) refer to the capital gain from the realisation event for the period starting on 1 July 2027. The sale and reacquisition under subsection 112-155(2) remain relevant for working out the amount of this capital gain, just not for whether this capital gain:

is a discount capital gain; or

qualifies for any of the small business concessions.

112-165 Trusts—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027

Application

This section applies in relation to a CGT asset of a trust estate if:

on 30 June 2027, the asset is not a pre-CGT asset; and

the trustee *acquired the asset and then held it throughout the period:

starting at a time before 1 July 2027; and

ending at the end of 30 June 2027; and

the trustee continues to hold the asset until a realisation event happens in relation to the asset on or after 1 July 2027; and

(d) if it were assumed that the trust estate makes a *discount capital gain (the primary trust gain) from the realisation event—at least one beneficiary of the trust makes, because of section 115-215, a discount capital gain in relation to the primary trust gain for which:

for a beneficiary who is an individual—section 115-110 (about foreign or temporary residents) does not apply; or

for a beneficiary that is another trust (other than a *complying superannuation entity)—section 115-120 (about foreign or temporary residents) does not apply; and

the asset is not an asset for which either:

section 115-102 (about new residential dwellings); or

section 115-125 (about affordable housing);

applies in relation to all of the *capital gains that, because of section 115-215, are made by the beneficiaries of the trust in relation to the capital gain the trust estate makes in relation to the realisation event.

Deemed sale and reacquisition

For the purposes of this Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 960-M, the trustee is taken:

to have sold the asset just before 1 July 2027, with the trustee’s capital proceeds for that sale taken to be the amount applying under subsection (3); and

to have *acquired the asset again just after that sale for an amount equal to those capital proceeds.

Note 1: The sale under paragraph (a) happens on 30 June 2027, and the reacquisition under paragraph (b) happens on 1 July 2027.

Note 2: Any capital gain or loss the trust estate makes from the sale on 30 June 2027 is disregarded (and deferred) until the income year in which the realisation event happens. The trustee (and beneficiaries) can wait until then before working out the amount of the capital gain or loss (see section 112-170).

Note 3: Subdivision 960-M deals with indexation of a CGT asset’s cost base.

The capital proceeds are taken to be equal to:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the asset’s *market value just before 1 July 2027; or

if the trustee chooses to use an apportioning method determined under section 112-185—the amount of capital proceeds worked out using that method.

For the purposes of paragraph 103-25(1)(a), the realisation event is the relevant CGT event for such a choice.

Note 1: Section 103-25 sets out rules for making choices.

Note 2: This subsection and section 103-25 mean the trustee does not have to make a choice until the day the trustee lodges the trust’s income tax return for the income year in which the realisation event happens (see paragraph 103-25(1)(a)).

Note 3: The realisation event is the event mentioned in paragraph (1)(c).

Except for the purposes of section 112-185 (about making apportioning determinations), none of the following apply in relation to a sale and acquisition mentioned in paragraphs (2)(a) and (b) for which a choice is made under paragraph (3)(b):

Subdivisions 112-A, 112-B, 112-C and 112-D (about modifications of the cost base and reduced cost base);

sections 116-25 to 116-60 (about modifications of the general rules about capital proceeds).

(6) To avoid doubt, subsection (2) applies only for the purposes of the provisions mentioned in that subsection. For example, it does not apply for the purposes of Subdivision EA of Division 7A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about unpaid present entitlements).

112-170 Trusts—defer a gain or loss from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens

Application

This section applies in relation to a CGT asset of a trust estate if, under paragraph 112-165(2)(a), the trust estate makes:

(a) a *capital gain (the initial notional gain); or

(b) a *capital loss (the initial notional loss);

in respect of the asset (disregarding subsection (2) of this section).

Disregard the initial notional gain or loss because it is to be deferred

Note: The initial notional gain or loss is made from the sale that is taken to happen at the end of 30 June 2027 (see paragraph 112-165(2)(a)), and is disregarded under subsection (2) of this section.

Disregard the initial notional gain or the initial notional loss, except for the purposes of subsection (3) or (4).

Deferring an initial notional gain

If the trust estate made an initial notional gain, then for the purposes of Division 102 and Subdivision 115-C:

(a) in the income year in which the *realisation event happens in relation to the *CGT asset—treat the trust estate as having made a *capital gain (the trust’s deferred gain):

(i) for the *CGT event that happens under paragraph 112-165(2)(a) (the deemed CGT event); and

that is a discount capital gain if the initial notional gain is a discount capital gain; and

that is equal to the amount of the initial notional gain; and

disregard section 102-20 in relation to the trust’s deferred gain; and

for the purposes of subparagraph (a)(ii) of this subsection, in working out whether the initial notional gain is a discount capital gain, treat the deemed CGT event as if it happens on the day the realisation event happens; and

in working out whether, under step 6 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1), the trust’s deferred gain qualifies for any of the small business concessions, treat the deemed CGT event as if it happens on the day the realisation event happens.

Note 1: For paragraph (a), the realisation event is the CGT event referred to in paragraph 112-165(1)(c).

Note 2: Paragraph (c) is relevant for working out whether the 12-month rule in subsection 115-25(1) is satisfied for the initial notional gain.

Note 3: If the initial notional gain is a discount capital gain, then under step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1), the 50% discount mentioned in paragraph 115-100(ab) can apply to the trust’s deferred gain.

Note 4: A beneficiary of the trust may also be taken to have made, because of section 115-215, a capital gain in relation to the trust’s deferred gain.

Deferring an initial notional loss

If the trust estate made an initial notional loss, then for the purposes of Division 102:

(a) in the income year in which the *realisation event happens in relation to the *CGT asset—treat the trust estate as having made a *capital loss (the trust’s deferred loss) equal to the amount of the initial notional loss; and

disregard section 102-20 in relation to the trust’s deferred loss.

Note 1: For paragraph (a), the realisation event is the CGT event referred to in paragraph 112-165(1)(c).

Note 2: The trust estate may make a separate capital loss from the realisation event for the period starting on 1 July 2027. In working out whether the trust estate makes a capital loss from the realisation event for this period, the trust estate is taken to have acquired the CGT asset at the time, and for the amount, mentioned in paragraph 112-165(2)(b).

Note 3: The trust’s deferred loss, and any separate capital loss referred to in note 2, are taken into account to work out whether the trust estate has a net capital gain for the income year in which the realisation event happens. If the trust estate does, then a beneficiary of the trust may also be taken to have, because of section 115-215, an extra capital gain for that income year.

Working out whether concessions are available for a capital gain from the realisation event

In working out when the trustee *acquired the CGT asset for the purposes of working out whether the trust estate’s *capital gain resulting from the realisation event is a discount capital gain, disregard the sale and acquisition under subsection 112-165(2).

Note: If the trust estate make a capital gain from the realisation event in respect of the asset, this subsection is relevant for working out whether the 12-month rule in subsection 115-25(1) is satisfied for the capital gain.

In working out whether, under step 6 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1), the trust estate’s *capital gain resulting from the realisation event qualifies for any of the small business concessions, disregard the sale and acquisition under subsection 112-165(2).

Note 1: Subsections (5) and (6) refer to the capital gain from the realisation event for the period starting on 1 July 2027. The sale and reacquisition under subsection 112-165(2) remain relevant for working out the amount of this capital gain, just not for whether this capital gain:

is a discount capital gain; or

qualifies for any of the small business concessions.

Note 2: A beneficiary of the trust may also be taken to have made, because of section 115-215, a capital gain in relation to the capital gain of the trust estate referred to in subsections (5) and (6).

112-175 Pre-CGT assets—deemed sale just before, and reacquisition on, 1 July 2027

This section applies in relation to your asset if:

the asset is a pre-CGT asset on 30 June 2027; and

you continue to hold the asset until a realisation event happens in relation to the asset on or after 1 July 2027.

Deemed sale and reacquisition

For the purposes of this Part, Part 3-3 and Subdivision 960-M, you are taken:

to have sold the asset just before 1 July 2027, with your capital proceeds for that sale taken to be the amount applying under subsection (3); and

to have *acquired the asset again just after that sale for an amount equal to those capital proceeds.

Note 1: This subsection causes the asset to cease to be a pre-CGT asset, and for the first element of the asset’s cost base to be reset, on 1 July 2027 (see paragraph 149-10(a) and subsection 110-25(2)).

Note 2: The sale under paragraph (a) happens on 30 June 2027, and the reacquisition under paragraph (b) happens on 1 July 2027.

Note 3: Any capital gain or capital loss you make from the sale on 30 June 2027 is disregarded (see subsection 104-10(5)).

Note 4: For the purposes of working out whether you make a capital gain or capital loss from the realisation event, you are taken to have acquired the CGT asset at the time, and for the amount, applying under paragraph (b).

Note 5: Subdivision 960-M deals with indexation of a CGT asset’s cost base.

The capital proceeds are taken to be equal to:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the asset’s *market value immediately before 1 July 2027; or

if you choose to use an apportioning method determined under section 112-185—the amount of capital proceeds worked out using that method.

For the purposes of paragraph 103-25(1)(a), the realisation event is the relevant CGT event for such a choice.

Note 1: Section 103-25 sets out rules for making choices.

Note 2: This subsection and section 103-25 mean you do not have to make a choice until the day you lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the realisation event happens (see paragraph 103-25(1)(a)).

Except for the purposes of section 112-185 (about making apportioning determinations), none of the following apply in relation to a sale and acquisition mentioned in paragraphs (2)(a) and (b) for which a choice is made under paragraph (3)(b):

Subdivisions 112-A, 112-B, 112-C and 112-D (about modifications of the cost base and reduced cost base);

sections 116-25 to 116-60 (about modifications of the general rules about capital proceeds).

(6) To avoid doubt, subsection (2) applies only for the purposes of the provisions mentioned in that subsection. For example, it does not apply for the purposes of Subdivision EA of Division 7A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about unpaid present entitlements).

112-180 Pre-CGT assets—defer a gain from CGT event K6 from the deemed sale until the later realisation event happens

Application

This section applies if:

you own *shares in a company or an interest in a trust; and

(b) under subsection 112-175(2), you are taken to have sold the shares or interest (the deemed sale) and acquired them again; and

(c) *CGT event K6 happens on 30 June 2027 as a result of the deemed sale, and you make a *capital gain from this CGT event (the initial notional gain); and

you continue to hold the shares or interest until a realisation event happens in relation to them on or after 1 July 2027.

Disregard the initial notional gain because it is to be deferred

Disregard the initial notional gain, except for the purposes of subsection (3).

Deferring an initial notional gain

For the purposes of Division 102:

(a) in the income year in which the *realisation event happens in relation to the *CGT asset—you are treated as having made a *capital gain (your deferred gain):

for the CGT event K6 mentioned in paragraph (1)(c); and

that is a discount capital gain if the initial notional gain is a discount capital gain; and

that is equal to the amount of the initial notional gain; and

disregard section 102-20 in relation to your deferred gain.

Note 1: If the initial notional gain is a discount capital gain, then under step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1), the 50% discount mentioned in paragraph 115-100(aa) or (ab) can apply to your deferred gain.

Note 2: For a trust, a beneficiary of the trust may also be taken to have made, because of section 115-215, a capital gain in relation to the deferred gain.

112-185 Method for apportioning capital gains and losses between realisation events and earlier deemed CGT events

The Minister may, by legislative instrument, determine a method for apportioning *capital gains and *capital losses between:

*realisation events happening on or after 1 July 2027 in relation to *CGT assets; and

earlier *CGT events relating to those CGT assets that are taken to have happened under subsection 112-155(2), 112-165(2) or 112-175(2).

For such a CGT asset, such a method must take into account:

the *acquisition of the CGT asset that is taken to have happened under paragraph 112-155(2)(b), 112-165(2)(b) or 112-175(2)(b); and

any expenditure (including indexation) in an element of the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the CGT asset on or after 1 July 2027; and

any other matter the Minister considers relevant.

For such a CGT asset, such a method must enable the following to be worked out:

the capital proceeds for the sale of the CGT asset that is taken to have happened under paragraph 112-155(2)(a), 112-165(2)(a) or 112-175(2)(a);

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the CGT asset when it is taken to have been *acquired under paragraph 112-155(2)(b), 112-165(2)(b) or 112-175(2)(b).

The method may also enable other things to be worked out.

Division 114 — Indexation of cost base

Table of sections

114-1 Indexing elements of cost base

114-5 When indexation relevant

114-10 Requirement for 12 months ownership

114-15 Cost base modifications

114-20 When expenditure is incurred for roll-overs

114-25 Residency requirements for individuals for indexation to be included in a cost base under subsection 110-36(1A)

114-30 Asset requirements for indexation to apply for a cost base worked out under subsection 110-36(1A)

114-1 Indexing elements of cost base

In working out the cost base of a *CGT asset under subsection 110-36(1A), index expenditure incurred in each element (except the third element).

Note 1: The expenditure can include giving property (see section 103-5).

Note 2: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts (see subsections 960-275(1B) and (1C) in particular).

Note 3: You have to work out the cost base of a CGT asset if a CGT event happens in relation to it or if there is a cost base modification.

Note 4: You cannot index expenditure in the third element (costs of ownership) (see subsection 960-275(4)).

In working out the cost base of a *CGT asset under subsection 110-36(1), index expenditure incurred in each element (except the third element) at or before the time mentioned in paragraph 110-36(1)(a).

Note 1: The expenditure can include giving property (see section 103-5).

Note 2: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts. Indexation under subsection 110-36(1) does not take account of inflation after 30 September 1999 (see subsections 960-275(2) and (3)).

Note 3: You have to work out the cost base of a CGT asset if a CGT event happens in relation to it or if there is a cost base modification.

Note 4: You cannot index expenditure in the third element (costs of ownership) (see subsection 960-275(4)).

Note 5: Indexation under subsection 110-36(1) is not relevant to expenditure incurred after 11.45 am on 21 September 1999 or any expenditure relating to a CGT asset acquired after that time.

114-5 When indexation relevant

Indexation is only relevant if the cost base of a *CGT asset is relevant to a CGT event.

Note 1: The table in section 110-10 sets out the CGT events for which cost base is not relevant.

Note 2: Indexation is not relevant to the reduced cost base of a CGT asset.

Indexation for some entities only if indexation chosen

(2) Indexation is not relevant for the purposes of working out under subsection 110-36(1):

the cost base of a *CGT asset; and

the *capital gain of an entity mentioned in an item of the table from a CGT event happening in relation to the CGT asset after 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999;

unless the relevant entity mentioned in that item chooses that the cost base includes indexation.

(3) Indexation is not relevant for the purposes of working out under subsection 110-36(1):

the cost base of a *CGT asset; and

the *capital gain of a life insurance company from a CGT event happening after 30 June 2000 in respect of a CGT asset that is a complying superannuation asset;

unless the company chooses that the cost base includes indexation.

Note: Section 114-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides that indexation is not relevant to the capital gain of a life insurance company or registered organisation from a CGT event after 11.45 am on 21 September 1999 and before 1 July 2000 unless the company or organisation chooses it.

114-10 Requirement for 12 months ownership

You only index expenditure in the cost base of a *CGT asset because of subsection 110-36(1A) or (1) for a CGT event happening in relation to the asset if you, or the entity whose cost base is being worked out, had *acquired the asset at least 12 months before the time of the CGT event.

Note: Generally, expenditure is indexed from when it is incurred: see subsection 960-275(1B) or (2). The exception is when there is an acquisition that did not result from a CGT event. The first element in this case is indexed from when the expenditure was paid: see subsection 960-275(1C) or (3).

There are 6 exceptions:

• one for CGT event E8: see subsection (3); and

• one for roll-overs: see subsections (4) and (5); and

• one for deceased estates: see subsection (6); and

• one for a surviving joint tenant: see subsection (7); and

• one for CGT event J1: see subsection (8); and

• one for a sale and reacquisition taken to have happened under subsection 112-155(2), 112-165(2) or 112-175(2): see subsection (9).

CGT event E8

For CGT event E8, the beneficiary indexes the *cost bases of the *CGT assets of the trust only if the beneficiary *acquired the CGT asset that is the interest in the trust capital at least 12 months before *disposing of it.

It does not matter (for indexation from the beneficiary’s point of view) how long the trustee owned any of the assets of the trust.

Same asset roll-overs

The 12 month rule is satisfied for both the entity that owned a CGT asset before a *same-asset roll-over and the entity that owned it after the roll-over if the sum of their periods of ownership of the asset (and the sum of the periods of ownership of the asset of other entities involved in an unbroken series of roll-overs) is at least 12 months.

Replacement asset roll-overs

The 12 month rule is satisfied for an entity obtaining a *replacement-asset roll-over for a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset if the period of the entity’s ownership of the original asset (and of other assets for an unbroken series of replacement-asset roll-overs) and of the replacement asset are together at least 12 months.

Example: Company A transfers a CGT asset to Company B (which is a member of the same wholly-owned group and a foreign resident) 5 months after acquiring it. There is a roll-over for the transfer under Subdivision 126-B.

Company B sells the asset 8 months after the transfer.

Company A indexes expenditure in its cost base up to the transfer. That cost base becomes the first element of Company B’s cost base. Company B indexes its cost base from the transfer to the sale.

Deceased estates

If a CGT asset you owned just before dying devolves to your *legal personal representative or *passes to a beneficiary in your estate, the 12 month rule applies to the legal personal representative or the beneficiary as if that entity had *acquired the asset when you acquired it.

Surviving joint tenant

If individuals own a CGT asset as joint tenants and one of them dies, the 12 month rule applies to the surviving joint tenant as if the surviving joint tenant had *acquired the deceased’s interest in the asset when the deceased acquired it.

Note: The surviving joint tenant is taken to have acquired the deceased’s interest in the asset: see section 128-50.

CGT event J1

If CGT event J1 happens, the company that owns the roll-over asset ignores (for indexation purposes) the acquisition rule in subsection 104-175(8).

Sales and reacquisitions taken to have happened in relation to adjustments to the 50% capital gains discount

Disregard subsections 112-155(2), 112-165(2) and 112-175(2) for the purposes of applying the 12 month rule.

114-15 Cost base modifications

There are a number of modifications to the *cost base of *CGT assets (see sections 112-20 and 112-35 and Subdivisions 112-B, 112-C and 112-D). These affect the way indexation because of subsection 110-36(1A) or (1) works.

If a cost base modification replaces an element of the cost base of a *CGT asset with an amount, or includes an amount in such an element, you index the element or the amount as if expenditure equal to the amount had been incurred in the quarter in which the modification occurred.

Example: A trust is declared over a CGT asset (an example of CGT event E1). The first element of the cost base in the hands of the trustee is its market value. The trustee indexes that market value from the quarter in which the trust was declared.

(3) A different rule applies if a cost base modification reduces the total *cost base of a *CGT asset.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the *cost base (all elements) of the asset as at the quarter in which the modification occurred.

Step 2. Subtract the amount of the reduction.

Step 3. The Step 2 amount forms a new first element of your *cost base, and is later indexed as if you had incurred expenditure equal to that amount in the quarter in which the modification occurred.

Example: Margaret receives a capital payment of $1,000 for shares (an example of CGT event G1). The first element of her cost base is $10,250 (indexed to the quarter in which the payment was made) and the second element (similarly indexed) is $210. Add those amounts ($10,460) and subtract the $1,000. Her new first element of the cost base is $9,460. There are no other elements at that time.

Despite subsection (2), there are different rules for the exercise of an option or the conversion of a convertible interest.

Exercise of options

The amount you paid for the option, and the amount you paid to exercise it, are indexed from the quarter in which the liabilities to pay the amounts were incurred.

Example: On 1 April 1997, Robyn grants Andrew an option to buy land she owns. The option fee is $10,000, and the option is to buy the land on 30 June 1998 for $100,000.

Andrew exercises the option and acquires the land on 30 June 1998. To work out whether there is a capital gain when Andrew disposes of the land, indexation is available if the land is disposed of 12 months or more after its acquisition.

The $10,000 option fee can be indexed from 1 April 1997 (when the liability to pay it was incurred). The $100,000 exercise price can be indexed from 30 June 1998 (when the liability to pay the price was incurred).

Convertible interests

If you *acquire *shares in a company or units in a unit trust by converting a convertible interest, the amount paid for the convertible interest, and the amount paid to convert it, are indexed from the quarter in which the liabilities to pay the amounts were incurred.

Note: If shares or units are acquired as a result of the exercise of the option or the conversion of the convertible interest, and an amount is paid to the company or trust on the shares or units after the day of acquisition, that amount is indexed from the time it is paid: see subsection 960-275(1C) or (3).

114-20 When expenditure is incurred for roll-overs

If there is a roll-over for a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset and the first element of the *cost base of the asset is the whole of the cost base of:

for a *replacement-asset roll-over, the original asset; or

for a *same-asset roll-over, the CGT asset;

when indexing that element because of subsection 110-36(1A) or (1), you index that element as if expenditure equal to the amount in that element had been incurred in the quarter in which the CGT event happened.

114-25 Residency requirements for individuals for indexation to be included in a cost base under subsection 110-36(1A)

This section sets out requirements for indexation to be included under subsection 110-36(1A) in the cost base of a *CGT asset for the purposes of working out your *capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to the CGT asset if:

you are an individual; and

the CGT event happened while you were holding the CGT asset (as a result of earlier *acquiring it).

Note: This section applies for working out a capital gain you make from directly holding the asset. A similar result arises for any capital gain you make indirectly as a beneficiary of a trust (see Subdivision 115-C, in particular subsections 115-225(4) and (5)).

(2) You must be neither a foreign resident nor a *temporary resident at any time during the period (the testing period):

starting on the later of 1 July 2027 and the day of *acquiring the CGT asset; and

ending on the day the CGT event happens.

For the purposes of subsection (2), if:

another individual owned the CGT asset on a particular day before the testing period ends; and

(b) on that day, that individual was one of the following (that individual’s residency status):

an Australian resident (but not a *temporary resident);

a temporary resident;

a foreign resident; and

section 115-30 treats you as having *acquired the CGT asset when that individual, or an earlier owner of the CGT asset, acquired it;

you are treated as having the same residency status on that day as that individual had on that day.

Section 115-30 applies to subsections (2) and (3) of this section in a corresponding way to the way that section applies in relation to section 115-105.

Note: Section 115-30 has special rules about when assets are acquired.

114-30 Asset requirements for indexation to apply for a cost base worked out under subsection 110-36(1A)

This section sets out requirements for indexation to be included under subsection 110-36(1A) in the cost base of a *CGT asset for the purposes of working out your *capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to the CGT asset if:

you are an individual; and

you make the capital gain directly or, because of section 115-215, as a beneficiary of a trust.

The CGT asset must not be an asset for which either of the following sections applies in relation to the *capital gain:

section 115-102 (about new residential dwellings);

section 115-125 (about affordable housing).

Note 1: If you are a beneficiary of a trust, the requirements in this section do not affect whether indexation is included in the cost base of the CGT asset for the purposes of working out whether the trust estate makes a capital gain. If section 115-102 or 115-125 (the discount section) applies for your capital gain, then in working out your capital gain:

the cost base will be adjusted to remove the effect of indexation (see subsection 115-225(5)); and

instead, the discount relating to the discount section applies (see paragraph 115-215(4)(a)).

Note 2: However, the result in paragraphs (a) and (b) of note 1 does not happen for your capital gain if the trust chooses under the discount section for that section not to apply. If the trust makes this choice, the indexation included in the cost base of the CGT asset will flow through to working out your capital gain (see subsection 115-215(3)(a)).

Division 115 — Discount capital gains and certain trust capital gains

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 115

115-A Discount capital gains

115-B Discount percentage

115-C Rules about trusts with net capital gains

115-D Tax relief for shareholders in listed investment companies

Guide to Division 115

115-1 What this Division is about

A discount capital gain remaining after the application of any capital losses and net capital losses from previous income years is reduced by the discount percentage when working out your net capital gain.

A capital gain from a CGT asset is a discount capital gain only if the entity making the gain acquired the asset at least a year before the CGT event causing the gain and no choice has been made to include indexation in the cost base of the asset.

Special rules apply to the net income of trusts with net capital gains (and in certain other circumstances), to ensure that the appropriate discount percentage is applied and to let beneficiaries apply their capital losses against their share of the trust’s capital gains.

Special rules apply to certain capital gains made by listed investment companies to enable shareholders receiving dividends that include these gains to obtain benefits similar to those conferred by the CGT discount.

For a discount capital gain from a CGT event happening on or after 1 July 2027, a discount of at least 50% continues to be available if the CGT event relates to a new residential dwelling or to the provision of affordable housing.

Subdivision 115-A — Discount capital gains

Table of sections

What is a discount capital gain?

115-5 What is a discount capital gain?

115-10 Who can make a discount capital gain?

115-15 Discount capital gain must be made after 21 September 1999

115-20 Discount capital gain must not have indexed cost base

115-25 Discount capital gain must be on asset acquired at least 12 months before

115-30 Special rules about time of acquisition

115-32 Special rule about time of acquisition for certain replacement-asset roll-overs

115-34 Further special rule about time of acquisition for certain replacement-asset roll-overs

What are not discount capital gains?

115-40 Capital gain resulting from agreement made within a year of acquisition

115-45 Capital gain from equity in an entity with newly acquired assets

115-50 Discount capital gain from equity in certain entities

115-55 Capital gains involving money received from demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurer

What is a discount capital gain?

115-5 What is a discount capital gain?

A discount capital gain is a *capital gain that meets the requirements of sections 115-10, 115-15, 115-20 and 115-25.

Note: Sections 115-40, 115-45 and 775-70 identify capital gains that are not discount capital gains, despite this section.

115-10 Who can make a discount capital gain?

To be a discount capital gain, the *capital gain must be made by:

an individual; or

a *complying superannuation entity; or

a trust; or

a life insurance company in relation to a discount capital gain from a CGT event in respect of a CGT asset that is a complying superannuation asset.

115-15 Discount capital gain must be made after 21 September 1999

To be a discount capital gain, the *capital gain must result from a CGT event happening after 11.45 am (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 21 September 1999.

115-20 Discount capital gain must not have indexed cost base

To be a discount capital gain, the *capital gain must have been worked out:

using a *cost base that has been calculated without reference to indexation at any time; or

for a capital gain that arose under CGT event K7—using the *cost of the depreciating asset concerned.

Note: A listed investment company must also calculate capital gains without reference to indexation in order to allow its shareholders to access the concessions in Subdivision 115-D.

For the purposes of working out whether the *capital gain is a discount capital gain and the amount of that gain, the *cost base taken into account in working out the capital gain may be recalculated without reference to indexation if the cost base had an element including indexation because of another provision of this Act. This subsection has effect despite that other provision.

Note: This lets a capital gain of an entity (the gain entity) on a CGT asset be a discount capital gain even if:

(a) another provision of this Act (such as a provision for a same-asset roll-over or Division 128) set the gain entity’s cost base for the asset by reference to the cost base for the asset when it was owned by another entity (the earlier owner), and the earlier owner’s cost base for the asset included indexation; or

another provision of this Act (such as a provision for a replacement-asset roll-over) set the cost base of the asset by reference to the cost base of the original asset involved in the roll-over, and the original asset’s cost base included indexation.

Example: In 1995 Elizabeth acquired land from her ex-husband under an order made by a court under the Family Law Act 1975. Former section 160ZZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 treated her as having paid $56,000 for the land, equal to her ex-husband’s indexed cost base for it. His cost base for the land then was $40,000.

In 2000, she sold the land for capital proceeds of $150,000.

Her discount capital gain on the land is $110,000 (equal to the capital proceeds less the cost base for the land without indexation).

This section does not apply to a *capital gain worked out under subsection 104-255(3) (about carried interests).

115-25 Discount capital gain must be on asset acquired at least 12 months before

To be a discount capital gain, the *capital gain must result from a CGT event happening to a CGT asset that was *acquired by the entity making the capital gain at least 12 months before the CGT event.

Note 1: Even if the capital gain results from a CGT event happening at least a year after the CGT asset was acquired, the gain may not be a discount capital gain, depending on the cause of the CGT event (see section 115-40) and the nature of the asset (see sections 115-45 and 115-50).

Note 2: Section 115-30 or 115-34 may affect the time when the entity is treated as having acquired the CGT asset.

To avoid doubt, subsection (1) applies to the CGT asset shown in the table for a CGT event listed in the table.

If the *capital gain results from a CGT event K9 happening:

subsection (1) does not apply; and

to be a discount capital gain, the *carried interest to which the CGT event relates must arise under a partnership agreement entered into at least 12 months before the CGT event.

(3) A *capital gain from one of these *CGT events is not a discount capital gain (despite section 115-5):

CGT event D1;

CGT event D2;

CGT event D3;

CGT event E9;

CGT event F1;

CGT event F2;

CGT event F5;

CGT event H2;

CGT event J2;

CGT event J5;

CGT event J6;

CGT event K10.

Note: Capital gains from the CGT events mentioned in paragraphs (3)(a) to (f) are not discount capital gains because the CGT asset involved in the CGT event comes into existence at the time of the event, so it is impossible to meet the requirement in this section that the asset have been acquired at least 12 months before the event.

115-30 Special rules about time of acquisition

Entity is treated as acquiring some CGT assets early

(1) Sections 115-25, 115-40, 115-45, 115-105, 115-110 and 115-115 (the affected sections) apply as if an entity (the acquirer) had acquired a *CGT asset described in an item of the table at the time mentioned in the item:

Note: Under section 128-50, the acquirer is taken to acquire the interest of a deceased individual in a CGT asset the acquirer and the deceased held as joint tenants immediately before the deceased’s death (or an equal share of that interest if there are other surviving joint tenants).

For the purposes of sections 115-105, 115-110 and 115-115, item 2 of the table in subsection (1) applies in relation to all *replacement-asset roll-overs, including those covered by paragraph 115-34(1)(c).

CGT event E8

For the purposes of applying sections 115-25 and 115-40 in relation to CGT event E8 and the CGT asset consisting of a beneficiary’s interest in trust capital, it does not matter how long the trustee owned any of the assets of the trust.

Note: Section 115-45 limits the effect of this subsection in some cases.

Relationship with Subdivision 109-A and Division 128

This section has effect despite Subdivision 109-A and Division 128 (which contain rules about the time when you *acquire a CGT asset).

115-32 Special rule about time of acquisition for certain replacement-asset roll-overs

This section applies if:

a CGT event happens to:

your *share in a company; or

your trust voting interest, unit or other fixed interest in a trust; and

you *acquired the share or interest as a replacement asset for a *replacement-asset roll-over (other than a roll-over covered by paragraph 115-34(1)(c)); and

at the time of the CGT event, the company or trust:

(i) owns a *membership interest in an entity (the original entity); and

has owned that membership interest for less than 12 months; and

that membership interest is the original asset for the roll-over.

Note: This section does not affect the time when you are treated as having acquired the replacement asset. That time is worked out under item 2 of the table in subsection 115-30(1).

Application of tests about the assets of the company or trust

Subsection 115-45(4) applies as if the company or trust had *acquired the original asset at least 12 months before the CGT event, if the condition in that subsection would not be met were it to be applied to the original entity and the CGT event.

Subsection 115-45(6) applies as if the company or trust had *acquired the original asset at least 12 months before the CGT event, if the condition in subsection 115-45(5) would not be met were it to be applied to the original entity and the CGT event.

115-34 Further special rule about time of acquisition for certain replacement-asset roll-overs

This section applies if:

a CGT event happens to your *share in a company; and

at the time of the CGT event, you had owned the share for less than 12 months; and

you *acquired the share as a replacement asset for:

a *replacement-asset roll-over under Subdivision 122-A (disposal of assets by individuals or trustees to a wholly-owned company) for which you *disposed of a CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to the company; or

a replacement-asset roll-over under Subdivision 122-B (disposal of assets by partners to a wholly-owned company) for which you disposed of your interests in a CGT asset, or your interests in all the assets of a business, to the company; or

a replacement-asset roll-over under Subdivision 124-N (disposal of assets by trusts to a company) for which a trust of which you were a beneficiary disposed of all of its CGT assets to the company.

Application of tests about when you acquired the share

Sections 115-25 and 115-40 apply as if you had *acquired the *share at least 12 months before the CGT event.

Application of tests about the company’s assets

For each asset mentioned in subparagraph (1)(c)(i), subsections 115-45(4) and (6) apply as if the company had *acquired that asset when you acquired it.

For each asset mentioned in subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), subsections 115-45(4) and (6) apply as if the company had *acquired that asset when you acquired your interests in it.

For each asset mentioned in subparagraph (1)(c)(iii), subsections 115-45(4) and (6) apply as if the company had *acquired that asset when the trust acquired it.

Relationship with Subdivision 109-A

This section has effect despite Subdivision 109-A (which contains rules about the time of acquisition of CGT assets).

What are not discount capital gains?

115-40 Capital gain resulting from agreement made within a year of acquisition

Your *capital gain on a *CGT asset from a *CGT event is not a discount capital gain (despite section 115-5) if the CGT event occurred under an agreement you made within 12 months of *acquiring the CGT asset.

Note: Section 115-30 or 115-34 may affect the time when you are treated as having acquired the CGT asset.

115-45 Capital gain from equity in an entity with newly acquired assets

Purpose of this section

(1) The purpose of this section is to deny you a *discount capital gain on your *share in a company or interest in a trust if you would not have had *discount capital gains on the majority of *CGT assets (by cost and by value) underlying the share or interest if:

you had owned them for the time the company or trust did; and

*CGT events had happened to them when the CGT event happened to your share or interest.

When a capital gain is not a discount capital gain

Your *capital gain from a CGT event happening to:

your *share in a company; or

your trust voting interest, unit or other fixed interest in a trust;

is not a discount capital gain if the 3 conditions in subsections (3), (4) and (5) are met. This section has effect despite section 115-5 and subsection 115-30(2).

You had at least 10% of the equity in the entity before the event

Note: This section does not prevent a capital gain from being a discount capital gain if there are at least 300 members or beneficiaries of the company or trust and control of the company or trust is not and cannot be concentrated (see section 115-50).

The first condition is that, just before the CGT event, you and your *associates beneficially owned:

at least 10% by value of the *shares in the company (except shares that carried a right only to participate in a distribution of profits or capital to a limited extent); or

at least 10% of the *trust voting interests, issued units or other fixed interests (as appropriate) in the trust.

Cost bases of new assets are more than 50% of all cost bases of entity’s assets

(4) The second condition is that the total of the *cost bases of *CGT assets that the company or trust owned at the time of the *CGT event and had *acquired less than 12 months before then is more than half of the total of the *cost bases of the *CGT assets the company or trust owned at the time of the event.

Note: Sections 115-30 and 115-32, or section 115-34, may affect the time when the company or trust is treated as having acquired a CGT asset.

Net capital gain on entity’s new assets would be more than 50% of net capital gain on all the entity’s assets

(5) The third condition is that the amount worked out under subsection (6) is more than half of the amount worked out under subsection (7).

Work out the amount that would be the net capital gain of the company or trust for the income year if:

just before the CGT event, the company or trust had *disposed of all of the *CGT assets that it owned then and had *acquired less than 12 months before the CGT event; and

it had received the *market value of those assets for the disposal; and

the company or trust did not have any *capital gains or *capital losses from *CGT events other than the disposal; and

the company or trust did not have a net capital loss for an earlier income year.

Note: Sections 115-30 and 115-32, or section 115-34, may affect the time when the company or trust is treated as having acquired a CGT asset.

Work out the amount that would be the net capital gain of the company or trust for the income year if:

just before the CGT event, the company or trust had *disposed of all of the *CGT assets that it owned then; and

it had received the *market value of those assets for the disposal; and

all of the *capital gains and *capital losses from those assets were taken into account in working out the net capital gain, despite any rules providing that one or more of those capital gains or losses are not to be taken into account in working out the net capital gain; and

the company or trust did not have any *capital gains or *capital losses from *CGT events other than the disposal; and

the company or trust did not have a net capital loss for an earlier income year.

115-50 Discount capital gain from equity in certain entities

Capital gain from share in company with 300 members

Section 115-45 does not prevent a *capital gain from a CGT event happening to a *share in a company with at least 300 *members from being a discount capital gain, unless subsection (3) or (6) applies in relation to the company.

Capital gain from interest in fixed trust with 300 beneficiaries

Section 115-45 does not prevent a *capital gain from a CGT event happening to an interest in a trust from being a discount capital gain if:

entities have *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the trust; and

the trust has at least 300 beneficiaries; and

neither subsection (4) nor subsection (6) applies in relation to the trust.

No discount capital gain if ownership is concentrated

Section 115-45 may prevent a *capital gain from a *share in a company from being a discount capital gain if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, *shares in the company:

carrying *fixed entitlements to:

at least 75% of the company’s income; or

at least 75% of the company’s capital; or

carrying at least 75% of the voting rights in the company.

Section 115-45 may prevent a *capital gain from an interest in a trust from being a discount capital gain if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, interests in the trust:

carrying *fixed entitlements to:

at least 75% of the trust’s income; or

at least 75% of the trust’s capital; or

if beneficiaries of the trust have a right to vote in respect of activities of the trust—carrying at least 75% of those voting rights.

Subsections (3) and (4) operate as if all of these were a single individual:

an individual, whether or not the individual holds *shares in the company or interests in the trust (as appropriate);

the individual’s *associates;

for any *shares or interests in respect of which other individuals are nominees of the individual or of the individual’s associates—those other individuals.

No discount capital gain if rights can be varied to concentrate ownership

(6) Section 115-45 may prevent a *capital gain from a *share in a company, or from an interest in a trust, from being a *discount capital gain if, because of anything listed in subsection (7), it is reasonable to conclude that the rights attaching to any of the *shares in the company or interests in the trust (as appropriate) can be varied or abrogated in such a way that subsection (3) or (4) would be satisfied.

These are the things:

any provision in the constituent document of the company or trust, or in any contract, agreement or instrument:

authorising the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to any of the *shares in the company or interests in the trust (as appropriate); or

relating to the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of any of those shares or interests;

any contract, arrangement, option or instrument under which a person has power to acquire any of those shares or interests;

any power, authority or discretion in a person in relation to the rights attaching to any of those shares or interests.

(8) It does not matter for the purposes of subsection (6) whether or not the rights attaching to any of the *shares or interests are varied or abrogated in the way described in that subsection.

115-55 Capital gains involving money received from demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurer

Your *capital gain from a *CGT event is not a discount capital gain if it is affected by section 316-60 or 316-165.

Note: Those sections affect capital gains involving the receipt of money as a result of the demutualisation of a friendly society health or life insurer.

Subdivision 115-B — Discount percentage

Table of sections

115-100 What is the discount percentage for a discount capital gain

115-102 New residential dwellings

115-105 Foreign or temporary residents—individuals with direct gains

115-110 Foreign or temporary residents—individuals with trust gains

115-115 Foreign or temporary residents—percentage for individuals

115-120 Foreign or temporary residents—trusts with certain gains

115-125 Investors disposing of property used for affordable housing

115-100 What is the discount percentage for a discount capital gain

The discount percentage for an amount of a *discount capital gain is:

50% if section 115-102 (about new residential dwellings) applies to the gain; or

50% if:

the gain is made by an individual from a CGT event happening before 1 July 2027; and

neither section 115-105 nor 115-110 (about foreign or temporary residents) applies to the gain; or

50% if:

the gain is made by a trust (other than a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity) from a CGT event happening before 1 July 2027; and

section 115-120 (about foreign or temporary residents) does not apply to the gain; or

331/3% if the gain is made:

by a complying superannuation entity; or

by a life insurance company from a CGT asset that is a complying superannuation asset; or

the percentage resulting from section 115-115 if section 115-105 or 115-110 applies to the gain; or

the percentage resulting from section 115-120 if that section applies to the gain; or

the percentage resulting from section 115-125 if that section applies to the gain; or

0% if none of the above paragraphs applies to the gain.

115-102 New residential dwellings

This section applies to a discount capital gain if:

you are an individual; and

neither section 115-105 nor 115-110 (about foreign or temporary residents) applies to the discount capital gain; and

either:

you make the discount capital gain from a CGT event happening on or after 1 July 2027 in relation to a CGT asset covered by subsection (2); or

because of section 115-215, Division 102 applies to you as if you had made the discount capital gain for a *capital gain of a trust covered by subsection (4); and

where subparagraph (c)(ii) applies—the trust’s capital gain was made directly, or indirectly through one or more entities that are all covered by subsection (4), from a CGT event happening on or after 1 July 2027 in relation to a CGT asset covered by subsection (2).

Note: The discount percentage for the discount capital gain is 50% (see paragraph 115-100(a)).

CGT assets to which this section relates

This subsection covers a *new residential dwelling.

Relevant trusts and interposed entities

This subsection covers the following:

(a) a trust, other than a *superannuation fund or a public unit trust (within the meaning of section 102P of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936);

a partnership.

Note: For paragraph (a), a trust includes a managed investment trust.

Indexation may be able to be chosen as an alternative

Despite subsection (1), the following person may choose for this section not to apply to the discount capital gain:

if you make the discount capital gain in the way described in subparagraph (1)(c)(i)—you;

if you make the discount capital gain in the way described in subparagraph (1)(c)(ii)—the trustee of the trust.

Such a choice by the trustee applies to you in a similar way to a choice made by you for a gain covered by paragraph (a).

Note: Instead, the cost base of the CGT asset may be able to be indexed (see subsection 110-36(1A)).

115-105 Foreign or temporary residents—individuals with direct gains

Object

The object of this section (with section 115-115) is to adjust the discount percentage so as to deny you a discount to the extent that you accrued a *capital gain while a foreign resident or *temporary resident.

When this section applies

This section applies to a discount capital gain if:

you are an individual; and

you *acquire a CGT asset; and

you make the discount capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to the CGT asset; and

(d) the period (the discount testing period):

starting on the day you acquired the CGT asset; and

ending on the day the CGT event happens;

ends after 8 May 2012; and

you were a foreign resident or *temporary resident during some or all of so much of that period as is after 8 May 2012.

Note: Section 115-30 has special rules about when assets are acquired.

Changed residency status

For the purposes of this section and section 115-115, if:

another individual owned the CGT asset on a particular day before the discount testing period ends; and

(b) on that day, that individual was one of the following (that individual’s residency status):

an Australian resident (but not a *temporary resident);

a temporary resident;

a foreign resident; and

section 115-30 treats you as having *acquired the CGT asset when that individual, or an earlier owner of the CGT asset, acquired it;

you are treated as having the same residency status on that day as that individual had on that day.

115-110 Foreign or temporary residents—individuals with trust gains

Object

The object of this section (with section 115-115) is to adjust the discount percentage so as to deny you a discount for a *capital gain you make because of section 115-215 to the extent that the gain was accrued while you were a foreign resident or *temporary resident.

When this section applies

This section applies to a discount capital gain if:

(a) you are an individual and a beneficiary of a trust (your trust); and

(b) because of section 115-215, Division 102 applies to you as if you had made the discount capital gain on a particular day (your gain day) for a *capital gain (the relevant trust gain) of the trust estate; and

(c) the period (the discount testing period) worked out from the following table ends after 8 May 2012; and

you were a foreign resident or *temporary resident during some or all of so much of that period as is after 8 May 2012.

Note: Section 115-30 has special rules about when assets (including membership interests in trusts) are acquired.

Changed residency status

For the purposes of this section and section 115-115, if:

your trust is a *fixed trust and another individual owned your *membership interest in your trust on a particular day before the discount testing period ends; and

(b) on that day, that individual was one of the following (that individual’s residency status):

an Australian resident (but not a *temporary resident);

a temporary resident;

a foreign resident; and

section 115-30 treats you as having *acquired your membership interest in your trust when that individual, or an earlier owner of that membership interest, acquired it;

you are treated as having the same residency status on that day as that individual had on that day.

115-115 Foreign or temporary residents—percentage for individuals

This section applies if section 115-105 or 115-110 applies to a discount capital gain.

Periods starting after 8 May 2012

If the discount testing period starts after 8 May 2012, the following (expressed as a percentage) is the percentage resulting from this section:

Note 1: The percentage will be 0% if you were a foreign resident or temporary resident during all of the discount testing period.

Note 2: Subsection 115-105(3) or 115-110(3) may change your residency status for this formula.

Periods starting earlier—Australian residents

If:

the discount testing period starts on or before 8 May 2012; and

you were an Australian resident (but not a *temporary resident) on 8 May 2012;

the following (expressed as a percentage) is the percentage resulting from this section:

where:

apportionable day means a day, after 8 May 2012, during the discount testing period.

Periods starting earlier—other residents may choose market value

Note: Subsection 115-105(3) or 115-110(3) may change your residency status for this formula.

The percentage resulting from this section is worked out from the following table if:

the discount testing period starts on or before 8 May 2012; and

you were a foreign resident or *temporary resident on 8 May 2012; and

the most recent *acquisition (before the CGT event) of the CGT asset happened on or before 8 May 2012; and

the CGT asset’s *market value on 8 May 2012 exceeds the amount that was its *cost base at the end of that day; and

you choose for this subsection to apply.

Note 1: The CGT event and CGT asset are those expressly or impliedly referred to in section 115-105 or 115-110.

Note 2: Section 115-30 has special rules about when assets are acquired.

For the purposes of table item 2 in subsection (4), the following (expressed as a percentage) is the percentage resulting from this section:

where:

apportionable day means a day, after 8 May 2012, during the discount testing period.

eligible resident means an Australian resident who is not a *temporary resident.

excess means the excess from paragraph (4)(d).

shortfall means the amount that the excess falls short of the amount of the *discount capital gain.

Periods starting earlier—other residents not choosing market value

Note: Subsection 115-105(3) or 115-110(3) may change your residency status for this formula.

If:

the discount testing period starts on or before 8 May 2012; and

you were a foreign resident or *temporary resident on 8 May 2012; and

subsection (4) does not apply;

the following (expressed as a percentage) is the percentage resulting from this section:

where:

apportionable day means a day, after 8 May 2012, during the discount testing period.

Note 1: The percentage will be 0% if you were a foreign resident or temporary resident on each of the apportionable days.

Note 2: Subsection 115-105(3) or 115-110(3) may change your residency status for this formula.

115-120 Foreign or temporary residents—trusts with certain gains

The object of this section is to adjust the discount percentage so as to deny a trustee a discount for a *capital gain for which the trustee is liable:

to be assessed; and

to pay tax;

under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate in respect of a beneficiary to the extent that the beneficiary was a foreign resident or *temporary resident.

This section applies to a discount capital gain of a trust estate if:

you are the trustee of that trust; and

section 115-220 applies to you in relation to the discount capital gain and a beneficiary of the trust who is an individual.

The percentage resulting from this section is the same as the discount percentage for the corresponding discount capital gain the beneficiary would have made for the purposes of Division 102 had section 115-215 applied to the beneficiary.

115-125 Investors disposing of property used for affordable housing

Object

The object of this section is to increase the discount percentage to the extent that the discount capital gain relates to a dwelling used to provide affordable housing.

When this section applies

This section applies to a discount capital gain if:

you are an individual; and

either:

you make the discount capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset that is your *ownership interest in a dwelling; or

because of section 115-215, Division 102 applies to you as if you had made the discount capital gain for a *capital gain of a trust covered by subsection (3); and

where subparagraph (b)(ii) applies—the trust’s capital gain was made directly, or indirectly through one or more entities that are all covered by subsection (3), from a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset that is an ownership interest in a dwelling; and

the dwelling was used to provide affordable housing on at least 1095 days:

before the CGT event; and

during your, or the relevant trustee’s or partner’s, *ownership period of that dwelling; and

on or after 1 January 2018.

The days mentioned in paragraph (d) need not be consecutive.

Note 1: 1095 days is the same as 3 years.

Note 2: It may be possible to choose indexation as an alternative to a discount under this section (see subsection (6)).

This subsection covers the following:

(a) a trust, other than a *superannuation fund or a public unit trust (within the meaning of section 102P of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936);

a partnership.

Note: For paragraph (a), a trust includes a managed investment trust.

Discount percentage

The percentage resulting from this section is the sum of:

either:

50% if neither section 115-105 nor 115-110 (about foreign or temporary residents) applies to the discount capital gain; or

the discount percentage that, apart from this section, would result from section 115-115 if section 115-105 or 115-110 applies to the discount capital gain; and

the result (expressed as a percentage) of subsection (5).

Work out the following:

where:

affordable housing days means the number of days during that *ownership period (see paragraph (2)(d)) of the *dwelling, and on or after 1 January 2018, on which:

the dwelling was used to provide affordable housing; and

you were neither a foreign resident nor a *temporary resident.

total ownership days means the number of days during that *ownership period (see paragraph (2)(d)) of the *dwelling, less the number of days after 8 May 2012 during that ownership period that you were a foreign resident or a *temporary resident.

Indexation may be able to be chosen as an alternative

If the percentage that would result from this section for you and the discount capital gain is 60%, then, despite subsection (2), the following person may choose for this section not to apply to the discount capital gain:

if you make the discount capital gain in the way described in subparagraph (2)(b)(i)—you;

if you make the discount capital gain in the way described in subparagraph (2)(b)(ii)—the trustee of the trust.

Such a choice by the trustee applies to you in a similar way to a choice made by you for a gain covered by paragraph (a).

Note: Instead, the cost base of the CGT asset may be able to be indexed (see subsection 110-36(1A)).

Subdivision 115-C — Rules about trusts with net capital gains

Guide to Subdivision 115-C

115-200 What this Division is about

This Subdivision sets out rules for dealing with the net income of a trust that has a net capital gain. The rules treat parts of the net income attributable to the trust’s net capital gain as capital gains made by the beneficiary entitled to those parts. This lets the beneficiary reduce those parts by any capital losses and unapplied net capital losses it has.

If the trust’s capital gain was reduced by either the general 50% discount in step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) or by the small business 50% reduction in Subdivision 152-C (but not both), then the gain is doubled. The beneficiary can then apply its capital losses to the gain before applying the appropriate discount percentage (if any) or the small business 50% reduction.

If the trust’s capital gain was reduced by both the general 50% discount and the small business 50% reduction, then the gain is multiplied by 4. The beneficiary can then apply its capital losses to the gain before applying the appropriate discount percentage (if any) and the small business 50% reduction.

Division 6E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 will exclude amounts from the beneficiary’s assessable income if necessary to prevent it from being taxed twice on the same parts of the trust’s net income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

115-210 When this Subdivision applies

115-215 Assessing presently entitled beneficiaries

115-220 Assessing trustees under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

115-222 Assessing trustees under section 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

115-225 Attributable gain

115-227 Share of a capital gain

115-228 Specifically entitled to an amount of a capital gain

115-230 Choice for resident trustee to be specifically entitled to capital gain

115-235 Giving information to beneficiaries

Operative provisions

115-210 When this Subdivision applies

(1) This Subdivision applies if a trust estate has a *net capital gain for an income year that is taken into account in working out the trust estate’s net income (as defined in section 95 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) for the income year.

Note: This Subdivision has an extended application under Subdivision 115-CA (about trusts that would have net capital gains if indexation were disregarded).

If the trust estate has a beneficiary that is a *complying superannuation entity that is a trust, this Subdivision applies in relation to the complying superannuation entity as a beneficiary but not as a trust estate. This Subdivision does not apply otherwise to a *complying superannuation entity that is a trust.

115-215 Assessing presently entitled beneficiaries

Purpose

The purpose of this section is to ensure that appropriate amounts of the trust estate’s net income attributable to the trust estate’s *capital gains are treated as a beneficiary’s capital gains when assessing the beneficiary, so:

the beneficiary can apply *capital losses against gains; and

the beneficiary can apply the appropriate discount percentage (if any) to gains.

Extra capital gains

If you are a beneficiary of the trust estate, for each *capital gain of the trust estate, Division 102 applies to you as if you had:

if the capital gain was not reduced under either step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) (discount capital gains) or Subdivision 152-C (small business 50% reduction)—a capital gain equal to the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1); and

if the capital gain was reduced under either step 5 of the method statement or Subdivision 152-C but not both (even if it was further reduced by the other small business concessions)—a capital gain equal to twice the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1); and

if the capital gain was reduced under both step 5 of the method statement and Subdivision 152-C (even if it was further reduced by the other small business concessions)—a capital gain equal to 4 times the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1).

Note: This subsection does not affect the amount (if any) included in your assessable income under Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 because of the capital gain of the trust estate. However, Division 6E of that Part may have the effect of reducing the amount included in your assessable income under Division 6 of that Part by an amount related to the capital gain you have under this subsection.

For each *capital gain of yours mentioned in subsection (3):

if the relevant trust gain is a discount capital gain (disregarding section 115-20)—Division 102 also applies to you as if your capital gain were a discount capital gain, if you are the kind of entity that can have a discount capital gain; and

if the relevant trust gain was reduced under Subdivision 152-C—the capital gain remaining after you apply step 5 of the method statement is reduced by 50%.

Note: This ensures that your share of the trust estate’s net capital gain is taxed as if it were a capital gain you made (assuming you made the same choices about cost bases including indexation as the trustee).

To avoid doubt, subsection (3) treats you as having a *capital gain for the purposes of Division 102, despite section 102-20.

Section 118-20 does not reduce extra capital gains

To avoid doubt, section 118-20 does not reduce a *capital gain that subsection (3) treats you as having for the purpose of applying Division 102.

115-220 Assessing trustees under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

This section applies if:

you are the trustee of the trust estate; and

(b) on the assumption that there is a share of the income of the trust to which a beneficiary of the trust is presently entitled, you would be liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate in respect of the beneficiary.

(2) For each *capital gain of the trust estate, increase the amount (the assessable amount) in respect of which you are actually liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate in respect of the beneficiary by:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) in relation to the beneficiary; or

if the liability is under paragraph 98(3)(b) or subsection 98(4), and the capital gain was reduced under step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) (discount capital gains)—twice the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1) in relation to the beneficiary.

To avoid doubt, increase the assessable amount under subsection (2) even if the assessable amount is nil.

115-222 Assessing trustees under section 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

Subsection (2) applies if:

you are the trustee of the trust estate; and

(b) section 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply in relation to the trust estate in relation to the relevant income year.

(2) For each *capital gain of the trust estate, increase the amount (the assessable amount) in respect of which you are liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 99 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate by the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1).

Subsection (4) applies if:

you are the trustee of the trust estate; and

subsection (2) does not apply.

(4) For each *capital gain of the trust estate, increase the amount (the assessable amount) in respect of which you are liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the trust estate by:

if the capital gain was not reduced under either step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) (discount capital gains) or Subdivision 152-C (small business 50% reduction)—the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1); and

if the capital gain was reduced under either step 3 of the method statement or Subdivision 152-C but not both (even if it was further reduced by the other small business concessions)—twice the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1); and

if the capital gain was reduced under both step 3 of the method statement and Subdivision 152-C (even if it was further reduced by the other small business concessions)—4 times the amount mentioned in subsection 115-225(1).

To avoid doubt, increase the assessable amount under subsection (2) or (4) even if the assessable amount is nil.

115-225 Attributable gain

The amount is the product of:

the amount of the *capital gain remaining after applying steps 1 to 6 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1); and

your *share of the capital gain (see section 115-227), divided by the amount of the capital gain.

Special rule if net income falls short of certain amount

Subsection (3) applies if the net income of the trust estate (disregarding the amount of any *franking credits) for the relevant income year falls short of the sum of:

the net capital gain (if any) of the trust estate for the income year; and

the total of all *franked distributions (if any) included in the assessable income of the trust estate for the income year (to the extent that an amount of the franked distributions remained after reducing them by deductions that were directly relevant to them).

For the purposes of subsection (1), replace paragraph (a) of that subsection with the following paragraph:

the product of:

the amount of the *capital gain remaining after applying steps 1 to 6 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1); and

the *net income of the trust estate for that income year (disregarding the amount of any *franking credits), divided by the sum mentioned in subsection (2); and

Special rule relating to indexation

Subsection (5) applies if the *capital gain has been worked out using a *cost base that includes indexation because of subsection 110-36(1A), and the amount mentioned in subsection (1) of this section:

is being worked out for the purposes of subsection 115-215(3) in circumstances where, had you:

made the capital gain; and

*acquired and held any relevant CGT asset in the same way as the trust estate did;

that indexation could not have applied to the cost base; or

is being worked out for the purposes of subsection 115-215(3) in connection with you having a resultant discount capital gain to which section 115-102 (about new residential dwellings) or 115-125 (about affordable housing) applies; or

is being worked out for the purposes of subsection 115-220(2) in relation to a beneficiary in circumstances where, had the beneficiary:

made the capital gain; and

acquired and held any relevant CGT asset in the same way as the trust estate did;

that indexation could not have applied to the cost base; or

is being worked out for the purposes of subsection 115-220(2) in connection with a beneficiary having a resultant discount capital gain to which section 115-102 (about new residential dwellings) or 115-125 (about affordable housing) applies; or

is being worked out for the purposes of subsection 115-222(4).

Note 1: For paragraph (a) or (c), indexation under subsection 110-36(1A) is only applicable in relation to capital gains, of individuals and trusts, that arise from a CGT event that happens on or after 1 July 2027. In addition, residency requirements for individuals apply under section 114-25.

Note 2: For paragraph (b) or (d), indexation may be able to be chosen by the trustee of a trust as an alternative to the discount percentage applying for a beneficiary’s attributed gain: see subsections 115-102(5) and 115-125(6).

Note 3: For paragraph (e), subsection 115-222(4) relates to assessing trustees under section 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

For the purposes of the provision mentioned in subsection (6) of this section, determine the amount of the *capital gain remaining assuming that:

in working out the amount of the capital gain before any reductions under the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) were applied, the *cost base was adjusted to remove the effect of indexation on its calculation; and

(b) the assumption in paragraph (a) did not result in any changes to the application of *capital losses, previously unapplied *net capital losses or quarantined amounts (including how much of each of those was applied) under that method statement to reduce the capital gain.

The provision is:

if subsection (3) does not apply—paragraph (1)(a); or

if subsection (3) applies—subparagraph (1)(a)(i) (as taken to be included because of subsection (3)).

115-227 Share of a capital gain

An entity that is a beneficiary or the trustee of a trust estate has a share of a *capital gain that is the sum of:

the amount of the capital gain to which the entity is *specifically entitled; and

if there is an amount of the capital gain to which no beneficiary of the trust estate is specifically entitled, and to which the trustee is not specifically entitled—that amount multiplied by the entity’s *adjusted Division 6 percentage of the income of the trust estate for the relevant income year.

115-228 Specifically entitled to an amount of a capital gain

(1) A beneficiary of a trust estate is specifically entitled to an amount of a *capital gain made by the trust estate in an income year equal to the amount calculated under the following formula:

where:

net financial benefit means an amount equal to the *financial benefit that is referable to the *capital gain (after any application by the trustee of losses and quarantined amounts, to the extent that the application is consistent with the application of capital losses and quarantined amounts against the capital gain in accordance with the method statement in subsection 102-5(1)).

share of net financial benefit means an amount equal to the *financial benefit that, in accordance with the terms of the trust:

the beneficiary has received, or can be reasonably expected to receive; and

is referable to the *capital gain (after application by the trustee of any losses and quarantined amounts, to the extent that the application is consistent with the application of capital losses and quarantined amounts against the capital gain in accordance with the method statement in subsection 102-5(1)); and

is recorded, in its character as referable to the capital gain, in the accounts or records of the trust no later than 2 months after the end of the income year.

Note: A trustee of a trust estate that makes a choice under section 115-230 is taken to be specifically entitled to a capital gain.

To avoid doubt, for the purposes of subsection (1), something is done in accordance with the terms of the trust if it is done in accordance with:

the exercise of a power conferred by the terms of the trust; or

the terms of the trust deed (if any), and the terms applicable to the trust because of the operation of legislation, the common law or the rules of equity.

For the purposes of this section, in calculating the amount of the *capital gain, disregard sections 112-20 and 116-30 (Market value substitution rule) to the extent that those sections have the effect of increasing the amount of the capital gain.

In this section:

quarantined amount means a quarantined amount referred to in paragraph 26-155(1)(b) (about using or holding residential dwellings as residential accommodation).

115-230 Choice for resident trustee to be specifically entitled to capital gain

Purpose

The purpose of this section is to allow a trustee of a resident trust to make a choice that has the effect that the trustee will be assessed on a *capital gain of the trust if no trust property representing the capital gain has been paid to or applied for the benefit of a beneficiary of the trust.

Trusts for which choice can be made

(2) A trustee can only make a choice under this section in relation to a trust estate that is, in the income year in respect of which the choice is made, a resident trust estate (within the meaning of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

Circumstances in which choice can be made

If:

a *capital gain is taken into account in working out the net capital gain of a trust for an income year; and

trust property representing all or part of that capital gain has not been paid to or applied for the benefit of a beneficiary of the trust by the end of 2 months after the end of the income year;

the trustee may, no later than the deadline in subsection (5), make a choice that subsection (4) applies in respect of the capital gain.

Consequences if trustee makes choice

These are the consequences if the trustee makes a choice that this subsection applies in respect of a *capital gain:

sections 115-215 and 115-220 do not apply in relation to the capital gain;

for the purposes of this Act, the trustee is taken to be *specifically entitled to all of the capital gain.

Deadline for making choice

The deadline for the purposes of subsection (3) is:

the day 2 months after the last day of the income year; or

a later day allowed by the Commissioner.

Note: This deadline is an exception to the general rule about choices in section 103-25.

115-235 Giving information to beneficiaries

If a trust is covered by a determination under subsection (4), the trustee must:

prepare a statement for each beneficiary of the trust who, because of subsection 115-215(3), makes one or more *capital gains for an income year in relation to capital gains of the trust estate for the income year; and

ensure the statement complies with subsection (2); and

give the statement to the beneficiary within the period specified in, or worked out under, the determination.

Note: Section 286-75 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 provides an administrative penalty for breach of this subsection.

The statement complies with this subsection if it:

is in the approved form; and

states the amount of each of those *capital gains that the beneficiary makes; and

sets out which of those capital gains are *non-residential capital gains, *residential capital gains, *deferred non-residential capital gains or *deferred residential capital gains; and

sets out the effect of subsections 115-215(4), and 115-225(5) if applicable, in relation to each of those capital gains.

Note: Subsection 115-215(4) deals with the status of capital gains as discount capital gains, and the effect of Subdivision 152-C having been applied to the trust gain. Subsection 115-225(5) makes adjustments to remove the effect of indexation on the cost bases of the relevant CGT assets.

(3) A trustee of a trust is not required to prepare and give a statement under subsection (1) for an income year if a report is given, or required to be given, under section 393-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in respect of the trust estate for the *financial year that corresponds to the income year.

The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, determine that trustees of all or specified kinds of trusts are required:

to prepare and give statements under subsection (1) to beneficiaries of the trusts; and

to do so before the end of:

a specified period; or

a period worked out using a specified method.

Subdivision 115-CA — Extended application of rules about trusts with net capital gains (disregarding indexation)

Guide to Subdivision 115-CA

115-250 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision extends the application of Subdivision 115-C in certain circumstances where indexation is used in working out the cost base for trust estate capital gains, and Subdivision 115-C does not otherwise apply because the trust estate does not have a net capital gain.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

115-255 Extended application of Subdivision 115-C—disregarding indexation

Operative provisions

115-255 Extended application of Subdivision 115-C—disregarding indexation

In addition to its application under subsection 115-210(1), Subdivision 115-C applies as set out in this section if:

a trust estate has one or more *capital gains that have been worked out using a *cost base that includes indexation because of subsection 110-36(1A); and

that Subdivision does not apply under subsection 115-210(1) in relation to the trust estate for an income year; and

that Subdivision would so apply if, in working out whether the trust estate has a net capital gain for the income year, the following assumptions applied in relation to each of those capital gains:

in working out the amount of the capital gain before any reductions under the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) were applied, the *cost base was adjusted to remove the effect of indexation on its calculation;

the assumption in subparagraph (i) did not result in any changes to the application of *capital losses, previously unapplied *net capital losses or quarantined amounts (including how much of each of those was applied) under that method statement to reduce the capital gain.

(2) Subdivision 115-C applies under this section as follows in relation to such a *capital gain of the trust estate (the trust gain):

that Subdivision applies for the purposes of treating a beneficiary of the trust estate as having a related capital gain under subsection 115-215(3) in circumstances where subsection 115-225(5) would apply for working out the amount of the trust gain;

if paragraph (a) applies—section 115-235 applies for such a related capital gain;

that Subdivision applies for the purposes of increasing the trustee’s assessable amount under subsection 115-220(2) or 115-222(4) in circumstances where subsection 115-225(5) would apply for working out the amount of the trust gain.

The reference to the trust estate’s net income in subsection 115-215(1) does not limit the application of section 115-215 for those purposes.

To avoid doubt, subsection 115-210(2) applies in relation to the application of Subdivision 115-C under this section.

To avoid doubt, a reference in a *taxation law to Subdivision 115-C or a provision of that Subdivision includes a reference to that Subdivision, or that provision (as the case requires), as it applies because of this section.

Subdivision 115-D — Tax relief for shareholders in listed investment companies

Guide to Subdivision 115-D

115-275 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision allows shareholders of certain listed companies to obtain benefits similar to those conferred by discount capital gains.

The benefits accrue where dividends paid by those companies represent capital gains that would be discount capital gains had they been made by an individual, a trust or a complying superannuation entity.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

115-280 Deduction for certain dividends

115-285 Meaning of LIC capital gain

115-290 Meaning of listed investment company

115-295 Maintaining records

Operative provisions

115-280 Deduction for certain dividends

(1) You can deduct an amount for a *dividend paid to you by a company (the payment company) if:

you are:

an individual, a *complying superannuation entity, a trust or a partnership; or

a life insurance company where the dividend is in respect of *shares that are *complying superannuation assets; and

when the dividend is paid, either you are an Australian resident or you are an individual who is a foreign resident and carries on business in Australia at or through your permanent establishment in Australia, being a permanent establishment within the meaning of:

(i) a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that relates to a foreign country and affects the individual; or

subsection 6(1) of that Act, if there is no such agreement; and

if, when the dividend is paid, you are an individual who is a foreign resident and has in Australia such a permanent establishment—the dividend is attributable to the permanent establishment; and

all or some part of the dividend is reasonably attributable to a LIC capital gain made by a listed investment company; and

in a case where the LIC capital gain was made by a company other than the payment company—the payment company was a listed investment company when it received a dividend part of which is attributable to the LIC capital gain.

Note: The concession is available for LIC capital gains made directly by a listed investment company, and for LIC capital gains that company receives as a dividend through one or more other listed investment companies.

The amount you can deduct is:

(a) 50% of your share of the amount (the attributable part) worked out under subsection (3) if you are an individual, a trust (except a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity) or a partnership; or

331/3% of your share of the attributable part if you are a complying superannuation entity or a life insurance company.

Note 1: The listed investment company will advise you of your share of the attributable part.

Note 2: If a shareholder in a listed investment company is a trust or partnership, a beneficiary of the trust or a partner in the partnership has no share of the attributable part.

The attributable part is worked out using this formula:

where:

after tax gain is the after tax *LIC capital gain.

The net capital gain is subject to tax at 30%. The after tax gain is therefore $7,000.

The company pays a fully franked dividend to Daryl, one of its shareholders. It advises Daryl that his share of the attributable part of the dividend is:

Example: A listed investment company (which is not a base rate entity) disposes of a CGT asset for $30,000. The asset had a cost base of $10,000. The capital gain is therefore $20,000. The company applies a capital loss of $10,000 against the gain. Its net capital gain is $10,000.

Daryl, being an individual, can deduct 50% of $10, which is $5.

An amount is included in your assessable income if:

a deduction is allowed under subsection (1) to a trust or a partnership; and

you are a beneficiary of the trust or a partner in the partnership and you are not an individual; and

the income of the trust or partnership is reduced by an amount because of that deduction; and

(d) a part of the deduction (the reduction amount) is reflected in your share of the net income of the trust or partnership.

The amount included is:

the reduction amount if you are a company, a trust (except a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity) or a partnership; or

one-third of the reduction amount if you are a complying superannuation entity or a life insurance company.

Example: The Burnett Partnership received a dividend from a listed investment company. The dividend statement advised that the dividend included a $100 attributable part. The partnership deducted $50 under this section in calculating its net income.

The partnership has 2 equal partners, Amy Burnett and Burnett Consulting Pty Ltd.

Burnett Consulting’s assessable income includes its share of the net income of the partnership plus $25 (being that part of the $50 deduction allowed to the partnership that is reflected in the company’s share of the partnership net income).

Subsections (4) and (5) do not apply to Amy because she is an individual.

115-285 Meaning of LIC capital gain

(1) A LIC capital gain is a *capital gain:

from a CGT event that happens on or after 1 July 2001; and

that is made by a company that is a listed investment company from a CGT asset that is an investment to which paragraph 115-290(1)(c) applies; and

that meets the requirements of sections 115-20 and 115-25; and

that is not a capital gain that could not be a discount capital gain had it been made by an individual because of section 115-40 or 115-45; and

that is included in the net capital gain of the company; and

that is reflected in the taxable income of the company for the income year in which the company had the net capital gain.

Note 1: The listed investment company must be able to demonstrate that at least some part of the LIC capital gain, whether made by the company itself or by another listed investment company, remains after claiming deductions and losses against that income for the income year.

Note 2: Section 115-30 may affect the date of acquisition of a CGT asset for the purposes of sections 115-25, 115-40 and 115-45.

(2) However, a *capital gain made by a company is not a LIC capital gain if the company:

became a listed investment company after 1 July 2001; and

*acquired the CGT asset concerned before the day on which it became a listed investment company.

(3) In applying subsection (2), a *CGT asset is treated as if it had been *acquired by the company before it became a *listed investment company if the asset would otherwise be treated as being acquired after that time because of one of these provisions:

section 70-110 (about trading stock);

Subdivision 124-E or 124-F (replacement asset roll-overs for exchange of *shares, units, rights or options);

Subdivision 124-Q (exchange of stapled ownership interests);

Subdivision 126-B (same-asset roll-over for transfers within certain wholly-owned groups).

115-290 Meaning of listed investment company

(1) A listed investment company is a company:

that is an Australian resident; and

*shares in which are listed for quotation on the official list of ASX Limited or an approved stock exchange; and

at least 90% of the *market value of whose *CGT assets consists of investments permitted by subsection (4).

(2) A company is also a listed investment company if:

it is a 100% subsidiary of a company that is a listed investment company because of subsection (1); and

the subsidiary would be a listed investment company because of subsection (1) if it were able to comply with paragraph (1)(b).

This Subdivision applies to a company that does not comply with paragraph (1)(c) as if it did comply if the failure:

was of a temporary nature only; and

was caused by circumstances outside its control.

The permitted investments are:

*shares, units, options, rights or similar interests to the extent permitted by subsections (5), (6), (7) and (8); or

financial instruments (such as loans, debts, debentures, bonds, promissory notes, futures contracts, forward contracts, currency swap contracts and a right or option in respect of a share, security, loan or contract); or

an asset whose main use by the company in the course of carrying on its business is to *derive interest, an annuity, rent, royalties or foreign exchange gains unless:

the asset is an intangible asset and has been substantially developed, altered or improved by the company so that its *market value has been substantially enhanced; or

its main use for deriving rent was only temporary; or

goodwill.

The company can own a *100% subsidiary if the subsidiary is a listed investment company because of subsection (2).

The company can own (directly or indirectly) any percentage of another listed investment company that is not the company’s *100% subsidiary.

Otherwise, the company cannot own (directly or indirectly) more than 10% of another company or trust.

In working out whether a company indirectly owns any part of another company or trust:

disregard any ownership it has indirectly through a listed public company or a publicly traded unit trust; and

if the company owns not more than 50% of another listed investment company—disregard any ownership it has indirectly through the other company.

115-295 Maintaining records

A listed investment company must maintain records showing the balance of its *LIC capital gains available for distribution.

Division 116 — Capital proceeds

Guide to Division 116

116-1 What this Division is about

This Division tells you how to work out what the capital proceeds from a CGT event are. You need to know this to work out if you made a capital gain or loss from the event.

Table of sections

116-5 General rules

116-10 Modifications to general rules

General rules

116-20 General rules about capital proceeds

Modifications to general rules

116-25 Table of modifications to the general rules

116-30 Market value substitution rule: modification 1

116-35 Companies and trusts that are not widely held

116-40 Apportionment rule: modification 2

116-45 Non-receipt rule: modification 3

116-50 Repaid rule: modification 4

116-55 Assumption of liability rule: modification 5

116-60 Misappropriation rule: modification 6

Special rules

116-65 Disposal etc. of a CGT asset the subject of an option

116-70 Option requiring both acquisition and disposal etc.

116-75 Special rule for CGT event happening to a lease

116-80 Special rule if CGT asset is shares or an interest in a trust

116-85 Section 47A of 1936 Act applying to rolled-over asset

116-95 Company changes residence from an unlisted country

116-100 Gifts of property

116-105 Conservation covenants

116-110 Roll-overs for merging superannuation funds

116-115 Farm-in farm-out arrangements

116-120 Disposals of assets involving look-through earnout rights

116-5 General rules

Section 116-20 sets out the general rules about capital proceeds. They are relevant to each CGT event that is listed in the table in section 116-25.

116-10 Modifications to general rules

(1) There are 6 modifications to the general rules that may be relevant. The table in section 116-25 lists which ones may be relevant to each CGT event listed in the table.

Explanation of modifications

The first is a market value substitution rule. It is relevant if:

• you receive no capital proceeds from a CGT event; or

• some or all of the capital proceeds cannot be valued; or

• you did not deal at arm’s length with another entity in connection with the event.

The second is an apportionment rule. It is relevant if a payment you receive in connection with a transaction relates in part only to a CGT event.

Example: You sell 3 CGT assets for a total of $100,000. The $100,000 needs to be apportioned between the 3 assets.

The third is a non-receipt rule. It is relevant if you do not receive, or are not likely to receive, some or all of the capital proceeds from a CGT event.

The fourth is a repaid rule. It is relevant if you are required to repay some or all of the capital proceeds from a CGT event.

The fifth is relevant only if another entity assumes a liability in connection with a CGT event.

The sixth relates to misappropriation by an employee or agent. It is relevant if your employee or agent misappropriates all or part of the capital proceeds from a CGT event.

Note 1: Also, these provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 modify capital proceeds:

section 23B (undistributed FIF attribution income on disposal of an interest in a FIF);

sections 159GZZZF and 159GZZZG (cancellation of shares in a holding company);

sections 159GZZZQ and 159GZZZS (buy-backs of shares);

sections 401, 422, 423 and 461 (CFCs).

Note 2: Section 230-505 of this Act (Division 230 financial arrangement as consideration for provision or acquisition of a thing) also modifies capital proceeds.

General rules

116-20 General rules about capital proceeds

(1) The capital proceeds from a *CGT event are the total of:

the money you have received, or are entitled to receive, in respect of the event happening; and

the *market value of any other property you have received, or are entitled to receive, in respect of the event happening (worked out as at the time of the event).

Note 1: The timing rules for each event are in Division 104.

Note 2: In some situations you are treated as having received money or other property, or being entitled to receive it: see section 103-10.

Note 3: If you dispose of shares in a buy-back, the capital proceeds are worked out under Division 16K of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(2) This table sets out what the capital proceeds from *CGT events F1, F2, H2 and K9 are:

In working out the *market value of the property the subject of the grant, renewal or extension of a long-term lease:

include the market value of any building, part of a building, structure or improvement that is treated as a separate CGT asset from the property; and

disregard any *depreciating assets for whose decline in value the lessor has deducted or can deduct an amount under this Act.

Note: Subdivision 108-D sets out when a building, structure or improvement is treated as a separate CGT asset.

In working out the amount of any premium paid or payable to the lessor for the grant, renewal or extension of a long-term lease, disregard any part of it that is attributable to a depreciating asset of that kind.

The payment of any premium can include giving property: see section 103-5.

In working out the proceeds of a CGT event that is a supply, disregard the amount of your *net GST (if any) on the supply.

Modifications to general rules

116-25 Table of modifications to the general rules

There are 6 modifications to the general rules that may be relevant to a *CGT event. This table tells you:

• each CGT event for which the general rules about capital proceeds are relevant; and

• the modifications that can apply to that event; and

• any special rules that apply to that event.

116-30 Market value substitution rule: modification 1

No capital proceeds

If you received no capital proceeds from a CGT event, you are taken to have received the *market value of the CGT asset that is the subject of the event. (The market value is worked out as at the time of the event.)

Example: You give a CGT asset to another entity. You are taken to have received the market value of the CGT asset.

There are capital proceeds

The capital proceeds from a CGT event are replaced with the *market value of the CGT asset that is the subject of the event if:

some or all of those proceeds cannot be valued; or

those capital proceeds are more or less than the market value of the asset and:

(i) you and the entity that *acquired the asset from you did not deal with each other at *arm’s length in connection with the event; or

the CGT event is CGT event C2 (about cancellation, surrender and similar endings).

(The market value is worked out as at the time of the event.)

Subsection (2) does not apply if there is a partial roll-over for the CGT event because of section 124-150.

Subsection (2) does not apply to a situation that would otherwise be covered by paragraph (2)(b) if the CGT event is CGT event C2 (about cancellation, surrender and similar endings) and the CGT asset that is the subject of the event is:

a *share in a company that has at least 300 *members and is not a company that is covered by section 116-35; or

a unit in a unit trust that has at least 300 unit holders and is not a trust that is covered by section 116-35.

Note: So, for one of these assets, the capital proceeds for the cancellation will be what you actually received.

Subsection (2) does not apply if:

you are a complying superannuation fund, a complying approved deposit fund or a pooled superannuation trust; and

the capital proceeds from the CGT event exceed the *market value of the CGT asset; and

assuming the capital proceeds were your statutory income, the proceeds would be *non-arm’s length income.

Market value for CGT events C2 and D1

Subsection (1) does not apply to:

these examples of CGT event C2:

the expiry of a CGT asset you own;

the cancellation of your statutory licence; or

CGT event D1 (about creating contractual or other rights).

If you need to work out the *market value of a CGT asset that is the subject of CGT event C2, work it out as if the event had not occurred and was never proposed to occur.

Example: A company cancels shares you own in it. You work out the market value of the shares by disregarding the cancellation.

CGT assets the subject of certain events

To avoid doubt, the CGT asset that is the subject of a CGT event specified in this table is the asset so specified.

Carried interests

This section does not apply to CGT event A1 or C2 to the extent that the CGT event is constituted by ceasing to own:

the *carried interest of a general partner in a VCLP, an ESVCLP or an AFOF or a limited partner in a VCMP; or

an entitlement to receive a payment of such a carried interest.

Note: This section does not apply to ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes: see subsection 130-80(4).

116-35 Companies and trusts that are not widely held

Coverage

A company is covered by this section if subsection (3) or (5) applies to the company.

A unit trust is covered by this section if subsection (4) or (5) applies to the trust.

Concentrated ownership

This subsection applies to a company if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, *shares in the company:

carrying *fixed entitlements to at least 75% of the company’s income or at least 75% of the company’s capital; or

carrying at least 75% of the voting power in the company.

This subsection applies to a trust if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, units in the trust:

carrying *fixed entitlements to at least 75% of the trust’s income or at least 75% of the trust’s capital; or

if unit holders of the trust have a right to vote in respect of activities of the trust—carrying at least 75% of the voting power in the trust.

Possible variation of rights

This subsection applies to a company or trust if, because of:

any provision in the entity’s constituent document, or in any contract, agreement or instrument:

authorising the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to any of the *shares or units in the entity; or

relating to the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of any of those shares or units; or

any contract, arrangement, option or instrument under which a person has power to acquire any of those shares or units; or

any power, authority or discretion in a person in relation to the rights attaching to any of those shares or units;

it is reasonable to conclude that the rights attaching to any of those shares or units are capable of being varied or abrogated in such a way (even if they are not in fact varied or abrogated in that way) that, directly or indirectly, subsection (3) or (4) would apply to the entity.

Single individual

For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), all of the following are taken to be a single individual:

an individual, whether or not the individual holds *shares or units in the entity concerned;

the individual’s *associates;

for any shares or units in respect of which other individuals are nominees of the individual or of the individual’s associates—those other individuals.

116-40 Apportionment rule: modification 2

(1) If you receive a payment in connection with a transaction that relates to more than one *CGT event, the capital proceeds from each event are so much of the payment as is reasonably attributable to that event.

Example: You sell a block of land and a boat for a total of $100,000. This transaction involves 2 CGT events.

The $100,000 must be divided among the 2 events. The capital proceeds from the disposal of the land are so much of the $100,000 as is reasonably attributable to it. The rest relates to the boat.

(2) If you receive a payment in connection with a transaction that relates to one *CGT event and something else, the capital proceeds from the event are so much of the payment as is reasonably attributable to the event.

Example: You are an architect. You receive $70,000 for selling a block of land and giving advice to the new owner. This transaction involves one CGT event: the disposal of the land.

The capital proceeds from the disposal of the land is so much of the $70,000 as is reasonably attributable to that disposal.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

116-45 Non-receipt rule: modification 3

The capital proceeds from a CGT event are reduced if:

(a) you are not likely to receive some or all (the unpaid amount) of those proceeds; and

this is not because of anything you (or your associate) have done or omitted to do; and

you took all reasonable steps to get the unpaid amount paid.

The capital proceeds are reduced by the unpaid amount.

Example You sell a painting to another entity for $5,000 (the capital proceeds). You agree to accept monthly instalments of $100.

You receive $2,000, but then the other entity stops making payments. It becomes clear that you are not likely to receive the remaining $3,000. The capital proceeds are reduced to $2,000.

Note: This rule exists because the general rules treat you as having received an amount when you are entitled to receive it.

There is a further consequence if:

those proceeds are reduced by the unpaid amount; but

you later receive a part of that amount.

Those proceeds are increased by that part.

This Part and Part 3-3 apply to the debt owed to you (the unpaid amount) as if it were not a CGT asset.

116-50 Repaid rule: modification 4

The capital proceeds from a CGT event are reduced by:

any part of them that you repay; or

any compensation you pay that can reasonably be regarded as a repayment of part of them.

However, the capital proceeds are not reduced by any part of the payment that you can deduct.

The capital proceeds are reduced by $10,000.

Example: You sell a block of land for $50,000 (the capital proceeds). The purchaser later finds out that you misrepresented a term in the contract. The purchaser sues you and the court orders you to pay $10,000 in damages to the purchaser.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

116-55 Assumption of liability rule: modification 5

The capital proceeds from a CGT event are increased if another entity *acquires the CGT asset (the subject of the event) subject to a liability by way of security over the asset.

They are increased by the amount of the liability the other entity assumes.

Example: You sell land for $150,000. You receive $50,000 (the capital proceeds) and the buyer becomes responsible for a $100,000 liability under an outstanding mortgage. The capital proceeds are increased by $100,000 to $150,000.

116-60 Misappropriation rule: modification 6

The capital proceeds from a CGT event are reduced if your employee or *agent misappropriates (whether by theft, embezzlement, larceny or otherwise) all or part of those proceeds.

Note: This rule exists because the general rules treat you as having received an amount when you are entitled to receive it.

The capital proceeds are reduced by the amount misappropriated.

There is a further consequence if:

those proceeds are reduced by the amount misappropriated; and

you later receive an amount as recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated.

Those proceeds are increased by the amount received.

This Part and Part 3-3 apply to the debt owed to you (the amount misappropriated) as if it were not a CGT asset.

(5) Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this section for an income year if:

you discover the misappropriation, or you receive an amount as recoupment of all or part of the amount misappropriated, after you lodged your income tax return for the income year; and

the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after you discover the misappropriation or receive the amount.

Special rules

116-65 Disposal etc. of a CGT asset the subject of an option

This section applies if:

you granted, renewed or extended an option to create (including grant or issue) or *dispose of a CGT asset; and

another entity exercises the option; and

because of the exercise of the option, you create (including grant or issue) or dispose of the CGT asset.

The capital proceeds from the creation (including grant or issue) or disposal include any payment you received for granting, renewing or extending the option.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

116-70 Option requiring both acquisition and disposal etc.

This section applies if:

you granted, renewed or extended an option; and

the option requires you both to *acquire, and to create (including grant or issue) or *dispose of, a CGT asset.

The option is treated as 2 separate options and half of the capital proceeds from the grant, renewal or extension is attributed to each option.

116-75 Special rule for CGT event happening to a lease

The capital proceeds from the expiry, surrender or forfeiture of a lease include any payment (because of the lease ending) by the lessor to the lessee for expenditure of a capital nature incurred by the lessee in making improvements to the leased property.

The payment or expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

116-80 Special rule if CGT asset is shares or an interest in a trust

This section sets out what happens if:

there is a fall in the *market value of a personal use asset (other than a car, motor cycle or similar vehicle) or a collectable of a company or trust; and

CGT event A1, C2 or E8 happens to:

*shares you own in the company (or in a company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group); or

an interest you have in the trust.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

The capital proceeds from the event are replaced with the *market value of the *shares, or the interest in the trust.

The market value is worked out as at the time of the event as if the fall in market value of the *personal use asset or *collectable had not occurred.

Note: You may also make a collectable loss: see CGT event K5.

116-85 Section 47A of 1936 Act applying to rolled-over asset

You reduce the capital proceeds from a CGT event that happens in relation to a CGT asset you have if the conditions in this table are satisfied.

Note: For roll-overs: see Divisions 122, 124 and 126.

The reduction is the lesser of:

the amount of the dividend; and

the amount of any *capital gain that, apart from the roll-over, the company or CFC would have made from the CGT event if its capital proceeds from the event had been the asset’s *market value (at the time of the event).

Note: This section is disregarded in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 410 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

116-95 Company changes residence from an unlisted country

This section sets out what happens if:

(a) a *CFC ceases at a time (the residency change time) to be a resident of an *unlisted country and becomes a resident of a *listed country; and

(aa) subsection 457(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply to the change of residence; and

(b) because of the change in its residency status, an amount is included in an entity’s assessable income under section 457 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (including because of paragraph 58(1)(d) of the Taxation Laws Amendment (Foreign Income) Act 1990); and

(c) a *CGT event happens in relation to a *CGT asset (the CFC asset) that is *taxable Australian property and that the CFC owned since the residency change time.

If the conditions in subsection (3) are satisfied, the capital proceeds from the CGT event are reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (4). If the conditions in subsection (5) are satisfied, those capital proceeds are increased by the amount worked out under subsection (6).

Reduction of capital proceeds

(3) If all the *CFC’s assets were *disposed of at the residency change time for their *market values in the circumstances mentioned in subparagraph 457(2)(a)(ii) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

(a) *distributable profits of the CFC of a particular amount (the distributable profit amount) would be created, or its distributable profits would be increased by an amount (also the distributable profit amount); and

(b) the CFC would have made a profit (the CFC asset profit) on the disposal of the CFC asset.

The capital proceeds are reduced by:

where:

total asset profits is the sum of the profits that the CFC would have made if all its assets were *disposed of at the residency change time for their *market values (ignoring disposals that would not result in a profit).

Increase in capital proceeds

(5) If all the *CFC’s assets were *disposed of at the residency change time for their *market values in the circumstances mentioned in subparagraph 457(2)(a)(ii) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

(a) the *distributable profits of the CFC would be reduced by an amount (the distributable profit reduction amount); and

(b) the CFC would have made a loss (the CFC asset loss) on the disposal of the CFC asset.

The capital proceeds are increased by:

where:

total asset losses is the sum of the losses that the CFC would have made if all its assets were *disposed of at the residency change time for their *market values (ignoring disposals that would not result in a loss).

Note: This section is disregarded in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 410 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

116-100 Gifts of property

If CGT event A1 is the giving of a gift of property by you for which a valuation under section 30-212 is obtained, you may choose that the capital proceeds from the event are replaced with the value of the property as determined under the valuation.

You can only make this choice if the valuation was made no more than 90 days before or after the CGT event.

116-105 Conservation covenants

If CGT event D4 happens because you enter into a conservation covenant over land you own and you can deduct an amount under Division 31 because you enter into the covenant, the capital proceeds from the event are the amount you can deduct.

Note: To get a deduction under Division 31, you must not receive money, property or other material benefit for entering into the covenant.

116-110 Roll-overs for merging superannuation funds

If a roll-over is chosen under Subdivision 310-D in relation to CGT event A1, C2 or E2, the capital proceeds of the transferring entity (within the meaning of that Division) from the event are the amount worked out under subsection 310-55(1) or 310-60(3).

116-115 Farm-in farm-out arrangements

If:

CGT event A1 is the *disposal of part of your interest in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and

the part is disposed of under a farm-in farm-out arrangement; and

you have received an exploration benefit in respect of the event happening;

in working out the capital proceeds for the CGT event, treat as zero the *market value of the exploration benefit.

If:

CGT event C2 arises as a result of an exploration benefit being provided to you; and

the exploration benefit is provided under a farm-in farm-out arrangement;

in working out the capital proceeds for the CGT event, treat as zero the *market value of the exploration benefit.

116-120 Disposals of assets involving look-through earnout rights

Consequences for capital proceeds

If CGT event A1 happens because you *dispose of a CGT asset, your capital proceeds from the disposal:

do not include the value of any look-through earnout right relating to the CGT asset and the disposal; and

are increased by any financial benefit that you receive under such a look-through earnout right; and

are reduced by any financial benefit that you provide under such a look-through earnout right.

Remaking choices affected by the look-through earnout right

Despite section 103-25, you may remake any choice you made under this Part or Part 3-3 in relation to the CGT event if:

you provide or receive a financial benefit under such a look-through earnout right; and

you remake the choice at or before the time you are required to lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the financial benefit is provided or received.

Amending assessments affected by the look-through earnout right

The Commissioner may amend an assessment of a tax-related liability if:

an entity provides or receives a financial benefit under such a look-through earnout right; and

the amount of the tax-related liability:

depends on that entity’s taxable income for the income year in which the CGT event happens; or

is otherwise affected by that right’s character as a look-through earnout right; and

the Commissioner makes the amendment before the end of the 4-year period starting at the end of the income year in which the last possible financial benefit becomes or could become due under the look-through earnout right.

The tax-related liability need not be a liability of that entity.

Note: Subparagraph (b)(ii) covers changes to the amount of that tax-related liability that happen directly or indirectly because of subsection (1) or (2).

If at a particular time a right is taken never to have been a look-through earnout right because of subsection 118-565(2), the Commissioner may amend an assessment of a tax-related liability for up to 4 years after that time if:

an entity provides or receives a financial benefit under the right; and

the amount of the tax-related liability:

depends on that entity’s taxable income for the income year in which the CGT event happens; or

was otherwise affected by that right’s character as a look-through earnout right before subsection 118-565(2) applied.

The tax-related liability need not be a liability of that entity.

Note: Subsection 118-565(2) restricts look-through earnout rights to rights to financial benefits over a period not exceeding 5 years from the end of the income year in which the CGT event happens.

If, after providing or receiving a financial benefit under a right referred to in subsection (3) or (4):

you are dissatisfied with an assessment referred to in that subsection; and

the Commissioner notifies you that the Commissioner has decided under that subsection not to amend your assessment;

you may object against the assessment, to the extent that it does not take account of that right’s character (as a *look-through earnout right or not such a right), in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 118 — Exemptions

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 118

118-A General exemptions

118-B Main residence

118-D Insurance and superannuation

118-E Units in pooled superannuation trusts

118-F Venture capital investment

118-G Venture capital: investment by superannuation funds for foreign residents

118-H Demutualisation of Tower Corporation

118-I Look-through earnout rights

Guide to Division 118

118-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out various exemptions for many capital gains and losses.

There are other provisions that provide exemptions from CGT liability, for example, Division 104 (exceptions from CGT events), Division 152 (small business relief) and Division 50 (exempt entities).

• section 23AH (about foreign branch gains and losses of companies);

• section 26BC (about securities lending arrangements);

• section 121AS (about demutualisation of insurance companies);

• sections 121EL, 121ELA and 121ELB (about offshore banking units);

• section 159GZZZN (about buy-back and cancellation of shares);

• section 315 (about superannuation and related businesses);

• section 408 (about calculating the attributable income of a CFC).

Note 1: There are also these exemptions in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

Note 2: There are also exemptions in Division 54.

Note 3: There are also exemptions in Divisions 315 and 316 (about demutualisation of certain insurers).

Subdivision 118-A — General exemptions

Table of sections

Exempt assets

118-5 Cars, motor cycles and valour decorations

118-10 Collectables and personal use assets

118-12 Assets used to produce exempt income etc.

118-13 Shares in a PDF

118-15 Registered emissions units

Anti-overlap provisions

118-20 Reducing capital gains if amount otherwise assessable

118-21 Carried interests

118-22 Superannuation lump sums and employment termination payments

118-24 Depreciating assets

118-25 Trading stock

118-27 Division 230 financial arrangements and financial arrangements to which Subdivision 250-E applies

118-30 Film copyright

118-35 R&D

Exempt or loss-denying transactions

118-37 Compensation, damages etc.

118-40 Expiry of a lease

118-42 Transfer of stratum units

118-45 Sale of rights to mine

118-55 Foreign currency hedging gains and losses

118-60 Certain gifts

118-65 Later distributions of personal services income

118-70 Transactions by exempt entities

118-75 Marriage or relationship breakdown settlements

118-77 Native title and rights to native title benefits

Boat capital gains

118-80 Reduction of boat capital gain

Special disability trusts

118-85 Special disability trusts

Exempt assets

118-5 Cars, motor cycles and valour decorations

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from any of these *CGT assets is disregarded:

a car, motor cycle or similar vehicle;

a decoration awarded for valour or brave conduct (unless you paid money or gave any other property for it).

118-10 Collectables and personal use assets

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a collectable is disregarded if the first element of its *cost base, or the first element of its *cost if it is a depreciating asset, is $500 or less.

Example: On 10 July 2001, Gayle buys a print for $450 and hangs it in her home. On 30 November 2001 she takes the print to her office and hangs it in the lobby. Gayle self assesses the effective life of the print to be 7 years.

Gayle sells the print to Anna for $700 on 2 January 2002.

How much can Gayle deduct for the 2001-02 income year?

The cost of the print is $450. Gayle chooses to use the prime cost method to calculate its decline in value.

The print’s decline in value is:

= $31

Gayle can deduct $6 as the taxable use portion of the decline in value under Division 40:

Due to the balancing adjustment event that occurred on 2 January 2002, $54 is included in Gayle’s assessable income for the 2001-02 income year under section 40-285. The amount is reduced for non-taxable use by section 40-290.

A capital gain of $202 is disregarded under this section because the asset is a collectable acquired for less than $500.

However, there is a special rule if the collectable is an interest in one of these *CGT assets:

*artwork, jewellery, an antique, or a coin or medallion;

a rare folio, manuscript or book;

a postage stamp or first day cover.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the interest is disregarded only if the *market value of the asset (when you *acquired the interest) is $500 or less.

Note: If you last acquired the interest before 16 December 1995, a capital gain or loss is disregarded if you acquired the interest for $500 or less: see section 118-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

A *capital gain you make from a personal use asset, or part of the asset, is disregarded if the first element of the asset’s *cost base, or the first element of its *cost if it is a depreciating asset, is $10,000 or less.

Note: A capital loss you make from a personal use asset is disregarded: see subsection 108-20(1).

118-12 Assets used to produce exempt income etc.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT asset that you used solely to produce your exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income is disregarded.

However, the exemption does not apply if the asset was used to gain or produce an amount that is non-assessable non-exempt income because of:

any of these provisions of this Act:

section 59-15 (mining payments);

section 59-35 (amounts that would be mutual receipts but for prohibition on distributions to members or issue of MCIs);

subsection 70-90(2) (disposing of trading stock outside the ordinary course of business);

section 86-30 (income of a personal services entity);

subsection 86-35(1) (payment by a personal services entity);

subsection 86-35(2) (share of personal services entity’s net income);

section 240-40 (treatment of arrangement payments);

section 242-40 (about luxury car lease payments);

section 768-5 (foreign equity distributions on participation interests);

section 802-15 (foreign residents—exempting CFI from Australian tax);

section 840-815 (foreign residents—final withholding tax on managed investment trust income); or

(b) any of these provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

section 23AH (foreign branch profits of Australian companies);

section 23AI (amounts paid out of attributed income);

section 23AK (attributed foreign investment fund income);

subsection 23L(1) (fringe benefits);

subsection 99B(2A) (attributed trust income);

section 128D (dividends, royalties and interest subject to withholding tax);

subsection 271-105(3) in Schedule 2F (amounts subject to family trust distribution tax).

Note: These provisions make amounts non-assessable non-exempt income to prevent them being double taxed rather than to remove them entirely from the taxation system. Therefore, the policy reason for disregarding gains and losses does not apply to assets used to produce those amounts.

118-13 Shares in a PDF

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event happening in relation to *shares in a *PDF is disregarded.

118-15 Registered emissions units

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a registered emissions unit is disregarded.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a right to receive an Australian carbon credit unit is disregarded.

Anti-overlap provisions

118-20 Reducing capital gains if amount otherwise assessable

A *capital gain you make from a CGT event is reduced if, because of the event, a provision of this Act (outside of this Part) includes an amount (for any income year) in:

your assessable income or exempt income; or

if you are a partner in a partnership, the assessable income or exempt income of the partnership.

Subsection (1) applies to an amount that, under a provision of this Act (outside of this Part), is included in:

your assessable income or exempt income; or

if you are a partner in a partnership, the assessable income or exempt income of the partnership;

in relation to a CGT asset as if it were so included because of the CGT event referred to in that subsection if the amount would also be taken into account in working out the amount of a *capital gain you make.

Note: An example is an amount assessable under Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, which deals with accruals taxation of certain securities.

The rule in subsection (1) does not apply to:

(a) an amount that is taken to be a dividend under section 159GZZZP of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which relates to buy-backs of *shares); or

an amount included in assessable income under subsection 207-20(1), 207-35(1) or 207-35(3) of this Act (which relate to franked distributions).

(2) The gain is reduced to zero if it does not exceed:

the amount included; or

(b) if you are a partner, your share (the partner’s share) of the amount included in the assessable income or *exempt income of the partnership (calculated according to your entitlement to share in the partnership net income or loss).

Example: Liz bought some land in 1990, as part of a profit-making scheme. In December 1998 she sells it.

Her profit from the sale is $40,000 and is included in her assessable income under section 6-5 (about ordinary income).

Suppose she made a capital gain from the sale of $30,000. It is reduced to zero because it is does not exceed the amount included.

The gain is reduced by the amount included, or the amount of the partner’s share, if the gain exceeds that amount.

Note: These rules are modified for complying superannuation funds that become non-complying and for foreign superannuation funds that become Australian superannuation funds: see Division 295.

A *capital gain you make from a CGT event is reduced by the extent that a provision of this Act (except sections 59-40 and 316-255) treats:

an amount of your ordinary income or statutory income from the event as being non-assessable non-exempt income; or

if you are a partner, your share of the ordinary income or statutory income of the partnership from the event (calculated according to your entitlement to share in the partnership net income or loss) as being non-assessable non-exempt income of the partnership.

A *capital gain the trustee of a superannuation fund makes from a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset in an income year is reduced if the asset’s *market value was taken into account in working out the fund’s income from previous years under section 295-325 or 295-330.

The gain is reduced to zero if it does not exceed the amount that would have been the *capital gain from the CGT event if the capital proceeds from the event were the asset’s *market value that was taken into account in working out that net previous income.

If the gain exceeds that amount, it is reduced by that amount.

Exceptions

The gain is not reduced if an amount is included in your assessable income, or the assessable income of the partnership, for any income year because of a balancing adjustment.

The gain is not reduced if an amount is included in your non-assessable non-exempt income under section 768-5 (about foreign equity distributions on participation interests) because a company makes a foreign equity distribution that is:

debited against a share capital account of the company; or

debited against an asset revaluation reserve of the company; or

directly or indirectly attributable to amounts transferred from such an account or reserve of the company.

118-21 Carried interests

CGT events relating to carried interests not to be treated as income

The modifications in subsections (2) and (3) apply if CGT event K9 happens in relation to your entitlement to receive a payment of the *carried interest of a general partner in a VCLP, an ESVCLP or an AFOF or a limited partner in a VCMP.

These provisions do not apply to the CGT event:

sections 6-5 (about ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans) and 118-20 (reducing capital gains if amount otherwise assessable);

(b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes).

Section 6-10 (about statutory income) does not apply to the CGT event except so far as that section applies in relation to section 102-5 (about net capital gains).

118-22 Superannuation lump sums and employment termination payments

In applying section 118-20, treat a superannuation lump sum or an employment termination payment that you receive as being included in your assessable income.

118-24 Depreciating assets

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event (that is also a balancing adjustment event) that happens to a depreciating asset is disregarded if the asset was:

an asset you *held; or

if you are a partner, an asset of the partnership; or

if you are absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), an asset of the trustee;

where the decline in value of the asset was worked out under Division 40 (including that Division as it applies under Division 355), or the deduction for the asset was calculated under Division 328, or would have been if the asset had been used.

However, subsection (1) does not apply to:

a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from CGT event J2 or CGT event K7 happening; or

a depreciating asset for which you or another entity has deducted or can deduct amounts under Subdivision 40-F or 40-G.

118-25 Trading stock

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT asset is disregarded if, at the time of the CGT event, the asset is:

your trading stock; or

if you are a partner, trading stock of the partnership; or

if you are absolutely entitled to the asset as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), trading stock of the trustee.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make in these circumstances is disregarded:

you start holding as trading stock a CGT asset you already own but do not hold as trading stock; and

you elect under paragraph 70-30(1)(a) to be treated as having sold the asset for its cost (worked out under that section).

Note 1: Paragraph 70-30(1)(a) allows you to elect the cost of the asset, or its market value, just before it became trading stock.

Note 2: You may make a capital gain or loss if you elect its market value: see CGT event K4.

118-27 Division 230 financial arrangements and financial arrangements to which Subdivision 250-E applies

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make:

from a CGT asset; or

in creating a CGT asset; or

from the discharge of a liability;

is disregarded if, at the time of the CGT event, the asset or liability is, or is part of, a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

Note 1: Paragraph (b) is relevant for CGT event D1.

Note 2: Paragraph (c) is relevant for CGT event L7.

Subsection (1) does not apply to the following:

a gain or loss that subsection 230-310(4) (which deals with hedging financial arrangements) provides is to be treated as a *capital gain or *capital loss;

a loss that is reduced under subsection 230-465(2), to the extent of that reduction (this is the extent to which the loss is of a capital nature).

(3) Subsection (1) does not apply if the situation that gives rise to the *CGT event does not result in a gain from the arrangement being included in your assessable income under Division 230, or in a loss from the arrangement entitling you to a deduction under Division 230.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT asset is disregarded if, at the time of the CGT event, the asset is, or is part of, a financial arrangement to which Subdivision 250-E applies.

118-30 Film copyright

(1) A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event relating to your interest in the copyright in a film is disregarded if an amount is included in your assessable income under section 26AG (about film proceeds) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 because of the event.

If you are a partner in a partnership, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event relating to the partnership’s interest in the copyright in a film is disregarded if an amount is included in the assessable income of a partner (including you) under section 26AG of that Act because of the event.

If you are absolutely entitled to an interest in the copyright in a film as against the trustee of a trust (disregarding any legal disability), a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event relating to the interest is disregarded if an amount is included in your assessable income or the net income of the trust under section 26AG of that Act because of the event.

118-35 R&D

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event if an amount is included in your assessable income in any income year under section 355-410 (about disposal of R&D results) because of that CGT event.

Exempt or loss-denying transactions

118-37 Compensation, damages etc.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event relating directly to any of these is disregarded:

compensation or damages you receive for:

any wrong or injury you suffer in your occupation; or

any wrong, injury or illness you or your *relative suffers personally;

compensation or damages you receive as the trustee of a trust (other than a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity) for:

any wrong or injury a beneficiary of the trust suffers in his or her occupation; or

any wrong, injury or illness a beneficiary of the trust, or the beneficiary’s relative, suffers personally;

a CGT asset you receive, as a beneficiary of a trust, from the trustee of the trust to the extent that the CGT asset is attributable to compensation or damages that the trustee receives as described in paragraph (b) for:

any wrong or injury you suffer in your occupation; or

any wrong, injury or illness you or your relative suffers personally;

gambling, a game or a competition with prizes;

a tobacco industry exit grant that you receive under the program known as the Tobacco Growers Adjustment Assistance Programme 2006 if, as a condition of receiving the grant, you entered into an undertaking not to become the owner or operator of any agricultural enterprise within 5 years after receiving the grant;

a water entitlement, to the extent that the CGT event happens because an entity *derives a SRWUIP payment that is non-assessable non-exempt income under section 59-65;

a SRWUIP payment you derive that is non-assessable non-exempt income under section 59-65;

a right or entitlement to a tax offset, a deduction, or a similar benefit under an Australian law, a foreign law or a law of part of a foreign country;

(i) a variation, transfer or revocation of an allocation (within the meaning of the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008);

anything of economic value provided to you (whether directly or indirectly, such as through an *NRAS consortium of which you are a *member) by:

a Department of a State or Territory; or

a body (whether incorporated or not) established for a public purpose by or under a law of a State or Territory;

in relation to your participation in the National Rental Affordability Scheme.

A *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded if you make it as a result of receiving a payment or property as reimbursement or payment of your expenses, or receiving or using a voucher or certificate, under:

a scheme established by an *Australian government agency, a local governing body or a *foreign government agency under an enactment or an instrument of a legislative character; or

the General Practice Rural Incentives Program or the Rural and Remote General Practice Program; or

the Sydney Aircraft Noise Insulation Project; or

the M4/M5 Cashback Scheme; or

the Unlawful Termination Assistance Scheme or the Alternative Dispute Resolution Assistance Scheme.

A *capital gain you make from compensation you receive under the *firearms surrender arrangements is disregarded.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a payment you receive is disregarded if:

you are an Australian resident; and

you receive the payment:

under the program known as the “German Forced Labour Compensation Programme”; and

from the Foundation known as “Remembrance, Responsibility and Future” or any of the Foundation’s partner organisations; and

the payment is in the nature of compensation for:

any wrong or injury; or

any loss of, or damage to, property;

that you, or another person, suffered as a result of injustices committed during the National Socialist period.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of receiving a payment or property is disregarded if:

you are an individual who is an Australian resident; and

you receive the payment or property from a source in a foreign country; and

you do not receive the payment or property directly or indirectly from an associate of yours; and

the payment or property you receive is in connection with:

any wrong or injury; or

any loss of, or damage to, property; or

any other detriment;

that you, or another individual, suffered as a result of:

persecution by the National Socialist regime of Germany during the National Socialist period; or

persecution by any other enemy of the Commonwealth during the Second World War; or

persecution by an enemy-associated regime during the Second World War; or

flight from persecution mentioned in subparagraph (iv), (v) or (vi); or

participation in a resistance movement during the Second World War against forces of the National Socialist regime of Germany; or

participation in a resistance movement during the Second World War against forces of any other enemy of the Commonwealth.

For the purposes of subsection (5), the duration of the Second World War includes:

the period immediately before the Second World War; and

the period immediately after the Second World War.

(7) For the purposes of subsection (5), a regime is an enemy-associated regime if, and only if, it was:

in alliance with; or

occupied by; or

effectively controlled by; or

under duress from; or

surrounded by;

either or both of the following:

the National Socialist regime of Germany;

any other enemy of the Commonwealth.

Subsection (5) applies to a payment or property received by the *legal personal representative of an individual in a corresponding way to the way in which that subsection would have applied if the payment or property had been received by the individual.

Subsection (5) applies to a payment or property received by:

the *legal personal representative of a deceased individual; or

the trustee of a trust established by the will of a deceased individual;

in a corresponding way to the way in which that subsection would have applied if:

the individual had not died; and

the payment or property had been received by the individual.

118-40 Expiry of a lease

A *capital loss a lessee makes from the expiry, surrender, forfeiture or assignment of a lease (except one granted for 99 years or more) is disregarded if the lessee did not use the lease solely or mainly for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

118-42 Transfer of stratum units

If:

you own land on which there is a building; and

you subdivide the building into *stratum units; and

you transfer each unit to the entity who had the right to occupy it just before the subdivision;

a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from transferring the unit is disregarded.

118-45 Sale of rights to mine

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the sale, transfer or assignment of your rights to mine in a particular area in Australia is disregarded if you have exempt income for the income year (because of the former section 330-60) from the sale, transfer or assignment.

118-55 Foreign currency hedging gains and losses

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a contract you entered into solely to reduce the risk of financial loss you may suffer from currency exchange rate fluctuations is disregarded if the contract relates to:

a liability you have to make a payment under another contract; or

(b) a *CGT asset that is a right you *acquired before 20 September 1985 to receive money under another contract.

118-60 Certain gifts

A *capital gain or *capital loss made from a testamentary gift of property that would have been deductible under section 30-15 if it had not been a testamentary gift is disregarded.

If the only reason the gain or loss is not disregarded under subsection (1) is because the property has not been valued by the Commissioner at more than $5,000, then, for the purposes of that subsection, it is taken to have been so valued.

A *capital gain or *capital loss made from a gift of property that is deductible under section 30-15 because of item 4 or 5 in the table in that section is disregarded.

However, subsection (2) does not apply if the gift was not a testamentary gift and the property is later *acquired for less than *market value by the person who made the gift or an associate of that person.

(4) If the gift was a testamentary gift and the property is later *acquired for less than *market value by the deceased person’s estate or a person (the deceased’s associate) who:

is an associate of the deceased person’s estate; or

was an associate of the deceased person immediately before the deceased person’s death;

the *cost base and the *reduced cost base of the property in the hands of the estate or the deceased’s associate is worked out under section 128-15 as if the property had passed in the estate to the estate or the deceased’s associate.

118-65 Later distributions of personal services income

A *capital loss you make from a payment is disregarded if it is a payment to any entity of:

personal services income included in an individual’s assessable income under section 86-15; or

any other amount that is attributable to that income.

118-70 Transactions by exempt entities

A *capital loss made by an entity is disregarded if it was an *exempt entity at the time it made the loss.

118-75 Marriage or relationship breakdown settlements

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of CGT event C2 happening is disregarded if:

you make the gain or loss in relation to a right that directly relates to the breakdown of a relationship between *spouses; and

at the time of the CGT event:

you and your spouse or former spouse are separated; and

there is no reasonable likelihood of cohabitation being resumed.

Example: Maude receives an amount from Claude by way of a settlement directly related to the breakdown of their marriage. CGT event C2 would happen to Maude on satisfaction of her legally enforceable right to the amount. Any capital gain or loss that Maude makes in these circumstances is disregarded.

(2) For the purposes of this section, the question whether *spouses or former spouses have separated is to be determined in the same way as it is for the purposes of section 48 of the Family Law Act 1975 (as affected by sections 49 and 50 of that Act).

118-77 Native title and rights to native title benefits

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if:

you are an Indigenous person or an Indigenous holding entity; and

you make the gain or loss because one of the following things happens in relation to a CGT asset mentioned in subsection (2):

you transfer the CGT asset to one or more entities that are either Indigenous persons or Indigenous holding entities;

you create a trust, that is an Indigenous holding entity, over the CGT asset;

your ownership of the CGT asset ends, resulting in CGT event C2 happening in relation to the CGT asset.

The *CGT assets are as follows:

native title;

the right to be provided with a native title benefit.

Note: Paragraph (a) does not require a determination of native title under the Native Title Act 1993.

Boat capital gains

118-80 Reduction of boat capital gain

A *capital gain you make from a CGT event happening in relation to a boat for an income year is reduced by an amount that is a quarantined amount for you for the income year under subsection 26-47(2).

Special disability trusts

Note: Section 26-47 denies deductions for the excess of boat expenditure over boat income.

118-85 Special disability trusts

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make is disregarded if you make it from transferring a CGT asset for no consideration to:

a *special disability trust; or

a trust that becomes a special disability trust as soon as practicable after the transfer.

In working out whether the transfer was for consideration, disregard any interest in the trust.

Subdivision 118-B — Main residence

Guide to Subdivision 118-B

118-100 What this Subdivision is about

You can ignore a capital gain or capital loss you make from a CGT event that happens to a dwelling that is your main residence.

However, this exemption may not apply if you are a foreign resident, and may not apply in full if:

• it was your main residence during part only of your ownership period; or

• it was used for the purpose of producing assessable income.

There are special rules for dwellings passed from, or owned by a trustee of, a deceased estate.

There is a similar exemption for a CGT event that is a compulsory acquisition (or similar arrangement) happening to adjacent land but not also to the dwelling itself.

Table of sections

118-105 Map of this Subdivision

Basic case and concepts

118-110 Basic case

118-115 Meaning of dwelling

118-120 Extension to adjacent land etc.

118-125 Meaning of ownership period

118-130 Meaning of ownership interest in land or a dwelling

Rules that may extend the exemption

118-135 Moving into a dwelling

118-140 Changing main residences

118-145 Absences

118-147 Absence from dwelling replacing main residence that was compulsorily acquired, destroyed etc.

118-150 If you build, repair or renovate a dwelling

118-155 Where individual referred to in section 118-150 dies

118-160 Destruction of dwelling and sale of land

Rules that may limit the exemption

118-165 Separate CGT event for adjacent land or other structures

118-170 Spouse having different main residence

118-175 Dependent child having different main residence

Roll-overs under Subdivision 126-A

118-178 Previous roll-over under Subdivision 126-A

118-180 Acquisition of dwelling from company or trust on marriage or relationship breakdown—roll-over provision applying

Partial exemption rules

118-185 Partial exemption where dwelling was your main residence during part only of ownership period

118-190 Use of dwelling for producing assessable income

118-192 Special rule for first use to produce income

Dwellings acquired from deceased estates

118-195 Dwelling acquired from a deceased estate

118-197 Special rule for surviving joint tenant

118-200 Partial exemption for deceased estate dwellings

118-205 Adjustment if dwelling inherited from deceased individual

118-210 Trustee acquiring dwelling under will

Special disability trusts

118-215 What the following provisions are about

118-218 Exemption available to trustee—main case

118-220 Exemption available to trustee—after the principal beneficiary’s death

118-222 Exemption available to other beneficiary who acquires the CGT asset after the principal beneficiary’s death

118-225 Amount of exemption available after the principal beneficiary’s death—general

118-227 Amount of exemption available after the principal beneficiary’s death—cost base and reduced cost base

118-230 Application of CGT events E5 and E7 in relation to main residence exemption and special disability trusts

Compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land only

118-240 What the following provisions are about

118-245 CGT events happening only to adjacent land

118-250 Compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land

118-255 Maximum exempt area

118-260 Partial exemption rules

118-265 Extension to adjacent structures

118-105 Map of this Subdivision

Note: The exemption may not be available for the main residence of a foreign resident.

Basic case and concepts

118-110 Basic case

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event that happens in relation to a CGT asset that is a dwelling or your *ownership interest in it is disregarded if:

you are an individual; and

the dwelling was your main residence throughout your *ownership period; and

the interest did not *pass to you as a beneficiary in, and you did not *acquire it as a trustee of, the estate of a deceased person.

Note 1: You may make a capital gain or capital loss even though you comply with this section if the dwelling was used for the purpose of producing assessable income: see section 118-190.

Note 2: There is a separate rule for beneficiaries and trustees of deceased estates: see section 118-195.

Note 3: There is a separate rule for a CGT event that is a compulsory acquisition (or similar arrangement) happening to adjacent land but not also to the dwelling itself: see section 118-245.

Only these *CGT events are relevant:

CGT events A1, B1, C1, C2, E1, E2, F2, K3, K4 and K6 (except one involving the forfeiting of a deposit); and

a CGT event that involves the forfeiting of a deposit as part of an uninterrupted sequence of transactions ending in one of the events specified in paragraph (a) subsequently happening.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

However, this section does not apply if, at the time the CGT event happens, you:

are an excluded foreign resident; or

are a foreign resident who does not satisfy the life events test.

(4) You are an excluded foreign resident, at a particular time, if:

you are a foreign resident at that time; and

the continuous period ending at that time for which you have been a foreign resident is more than 6 years.

(5) You satisfy the life events test, at the time a *CGT event happens, if:

the continuous period ending at that time for which you have been a foreign resident is 6 years or less; and

you are covered by any of the following subparagraphs:

you or your *spouse has had a terminal medical condition that existed at any time during that period of foreign residency;

your *child has had a terminal medical condition that existed at any time during that period of foreign residency, and that child was under 18 years of age at at least one such time;

your spouse, or your child who was under 18 years of age at death, has died during that period of foreign residency;

the CGT event happens because of a matter referred to in a paragraph of subsection 126-5(1) involving you and your spouse (or former spouse).

118-115 Meaning of dwelling

(1) A dwelling includes:

a unit of accommodation that:

is a building or is contained in a building; and

consists wholly or mainly of residential accommodation; and

a unit of accommodation that is a caravan, houseboat or other mobile home; and

any land immediately under the unit of accommodation.

(2) However, except as provided in section 118-120, a dwelling does not include any land adjacent to a building.

118-120 Extension to adjacent land etc.

Adjacent land

This Subdivision applies to a dwelling’s adjacent land (if the same CGT event happens to that land or your *ownership interest in it) as if it were a dwelling.

(2) Land adjacent to a *dwelling is its adjacent land to the extent that the land was used primarily for private or domestic purposes in association with the dwelling.

(3) The maximum area of *adjacent land covered by the exemption for the *CGT event (the current event) is 2 hectares, less the area of the land immediately under the *dwelling.

However, if subsection 118-245(2) applied to you for an earlier CGT event that happened in relation to:

other land that was part of the dwelling’s adjacent land at the time of the earlier CGT event; or

your *ownership interest in that other land at that time;

the maximum area of land covered by the exemption for the current event is the maximum exempt area for the current event and the dwelling.

Adjacent structures

This Subdivision applies to an adjacent structure of a flat or home unit (if the same CGT event happens to that structure or your *ownership interest in it) as if it were a dwelling.

(6) A garage, storeroom or other structure associated with a flat or home unit is an adjacent structure of the flat or home unit to the extent that the structure was used primarily for private or domestic purposes in association with the flat or home unit.

118-125 Meaning of ownership period

Your ownership period of a *dwelling is the period on or after 20 September 1985 when you had an *ownership interest in:

the dwelling; or

(b) land (*acquired on or after 20 September 1985) on which the dwelling is later built.

118-130 Meaning of ownership interest in land or a dwelling

(1) You have an ownership interest in land or a *dwelling if:

for land—you have a legal or equitable interest in it or a right to occupy it; or

for a dwelling that is not a flat or home unit—you have a legal or equitable interest in the land on which it is erected, or a licence or right to occupy it; or

for a flat or home unit—you have:

a legal or equitable interest in a stratum unit in it; or

a licence or right to occupy it; or

a *share in a company that owns a legal or equitable interest in the land on which the flat or home unit is erected and that gives you to a right to occupy it.

(2) For land or a *dwelling that you *acquire under a contract, you have an ownership interest in it from:

the time when you obtain legal ownership of it; or

if the contract or a related contract gives you a right to occupy it at an earlier time—the earlier time.

(3) For land or a *dwelling where you have a contract for the happening of the *CGT event, you have an ownership interest in it until your legal ownership of it ends.

Rules that may extend the exemption

118-135 Moving into a dwelling

If a dwelling becomes your main residence by the time it was first practicable for you to move into it after you *acquired your *ownership interest in it, the dwelling is treated as your main residence from when you acquired the interest until it actually became your main residence.

118-140 Changing main residences

If you *acquire an *ownership interest in a dwelling that is to become your main residence and you still have your ownership interest in your existing main residence, both dwellings are treated as your main residence for the shorter of:

6 months ending when your ownership interest in your existing main residence ends; or

the period between the acquisition of the new ownership interest and the time when the ownership interest referred to in paragraph (a) ends.

Subsection (1) only applies if:

your existing main residence was your main residence for a continuous period of at least 3 months in the 12 months ending when your ownership interest in it ends; and

your existing main residence was not used for the *purpose of producing assessable income in any part of that 12 month period when it was not your main residence.

118-145 Absences

If a dwelling that was your main residence ceases to be your main residence, you may choose to continue to treat it as your main residence.

If you use the part of the dwelling that was your main residence for the *purpose of producing assessable income, the maximum period that you can treat it as your main residence under this section while you use it for that purpose is 6 years. You are entitled to another maximum period of 6 years each time the dwelling again becomes and ceases to be your main residence.

If you do not use the dwelling for that purpose, you can treat it as your main residence under this section indefinitely.

This section does not apply if the dwelling was your main residence because of section 118-147 and ceases to be your main residence because of subsections 118-147(3) and (4).

If you make the choice, you cannot treat any other dwelling as your main residence while you apply this section, except if section 118-140 (about changing main residences) applies.

Example: You live in a house for 3 years. You are posted overseas for 5 years and you rent it out during your absence. On your return you move back into it for 2 years. You are then posted overseas again for 4 years (again renting it out). You then move back into it for 3 years, after which you sell the house.

You have not treated any other dwelling as your main residence during your absences.

You may choose to continue to treat the house as your main residence during both absences because each absence is less than 6 years.

You can make this choice when preparing your income tax return for the income year in which you sold the house.

118-147 Absence from dwelling replacing main residence that was compulsorily acquired, destroyed etc.

This section applies if:

(a) a *dwelling (the old dwelling) is treated as your main residence because of your choice under section 118-145; and

(b) because of an event (the key event) described in subsection 124-70(1):

you cease to have any *ownership interest in the old dwelling; or

the old dwelling is lost or destroyed; and

(c) after the key event you have an ownership interest (the substitute property interest) in:

(i) a dwelling (the substitute dwelling); or

(ii) land (the substitute land) that did not have a dwelling on it at the later of the time just after the key event and the time you *acquired the interest; and

(d) you acquired the substitute property interest at a time (the substitute property acquisition time) no later than one year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows in special circumstances, after the end of the income year in which the key event happens.

Note 1: Subsection 124-70(1) deals with compulsory acquisitions, disposals in circumstances involving powers of compulsory acquisition, expiry of leases granted by Australian government agencies and loss or destruction of a CGT asset.

Note 2: The substitute property acquisition time may be before, at or after the time the key event happened. The old dwelling and the substitute dwelling may be different or the same. The land on which the old dwelling is erected and the substitute land may be different or the same.

You may choose to treat the substitute dwelling, or a dwelling you built on the substitute land within 4 years after the later of the time of the key event and the substitute property acquisition time, as your main residence from the later of the following times (or from either of them if they are the same):

the substitute property acquisition time;

the time one year before the key event happened.

Subsection (4) limits the time you can treat a dwelling as your main residence under this section if you use all or part of it or the substitute land, after the later of the key event and the substitute property acquisition time, for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

The maximum period you can treat the dwelling that way while you use it or the substitute land as described in subsection (3) is:

6 years; or

if, just before the key event, you used all or part of the old dwelling for that purpose—so much of the period of 6 years described in subsection 118-145(2) in relation to the old dwelling as had not passed before the event.

If you do not use the dwelling or substitute land as described in subsection (3) you can treat the dwelling as your main residence under this section indefinitely.

If you make the choice:

you cannot treat any other dwelling as your main residence while you apply this section; and

section 118-140 does not apply in relation to your *acquisition, while you still have an *ownership interest in the old dwelling, of an ownership interest in the dwelling you choose to treat as your main residence under this section; and

section 118-150 does not apply after the key event to the land on which the old dwelling is erected or the substitute land; and

section 118-155 does not apply after the key event in relation to the old dwelling, the substitute dwelling or a dwelling built on the substitute land.

Paragraph (6)(a) does not prevent the old dwelling from being your main residence at any time before the key event happened.

118-150 If you build, repair or renovate a dwelling

This section applies to land in which you have an *ownership interest (except a life interest) if you build a dwelling on the land, or repair, renovate or finish building a dwelling on the land.

You can choose to apply this Subdivision as if the dwelling that you are building, repairing or renovating on the land were your main residence from the time you *acquired the *ownership interest.

You can make the choice only if:

a dwelling on the land that you construct, repair or renovate becomes your main residence (except because of section 118-147) as soon as practicable after the work is finished; and

it continues to be your main residence for at least 3 months.

There is a time limit during which the choice can operate. This is the shorter of:

4 years, or a longer time allowed by the Commissioner, before the dwelling becomes your main residence; and

the period starting when you *acquired your *ownership interest in the land and ending when the dwelling becomes your main residence.

If there was already a dwelling on the land when you *acquired your *ownership interest and you or someone else occupied it after that time, the period in subsection (2) and paragraph (4)(b) starts when the dwelling ceased to be occupied.

Once you make the choice, no other dwelling can be treated as your main residence during the period referred to in subsection (4), except if section 118-140 (about changing main residences) applies.

118-155 Where individual referred to in section 118-150 dies

This section applies if the individual referred to in subsection 118-150(1) dies:

after the work began, or the individual entered into a contract for it to be done, but before it was finished; or

after the work was finished but before it was practicable for the dwelling to become the individual’s main residence; or

during the period of 3 months referred to in paragraph 118-150(3)(b).

If the individual owned the interest in the land as a joint tenant, the surviving joint tenant or, if none, the trustee of the individual’s estate, can choose to apply this Subdivision as if the dwelling were the main residence of the individual:

when the individual died; and

for the shorter of:

4 years before the individual’s death; or

the period starting when the individual *acquired the interest in the land and ending when the individual died.

If there was already a dwelling on the land when the individual *acquired the interest in the land and someone occupied it after that time, the period in subparagraph (2)(b)(ii) starts when the dwelling ceased to be occupied so that it could be repaired or renovated.

If the dwelling is treated as the deceased’s main residence under this section, no other dwelling can be treated as the deceased’s main residence at the same time.

However, this section does not apply if, just before the individual’s death, the individual was an excluded foreign resident.

118-160 Destruction of dwelling and sale of land

This section applies if a dwelling that is your main residence is accidentally destroyed and a CGT event happens in relation to the land on which it was built without you erecting another dwelling on the land.

You can choose to apply this Subdivision to the land as if, from the time of the destruction until your *ownership interest in the land ends, the dwelling had not been destroyed and were your main residence.

If you do so, you cannot treat any other dwelling as your main residence during that period, except under section 118-140 (about changing main residences).

Rules that may limit the exemption

118-165 Separate CGT event for adjacent land or other structures

The exemption does not apply to a CGT event that happens in relation to land, or a garage, storeroom or other structure, to which the exemption can extend under section 118-120 (about adjacent land) if that event does not also happen in relation to the dwelling or your *ownership interest in it.

Note: There is a separate rule for a CGT event that is a compulsory acquisition (or similar arrangement) happening to adjacent land but not also to the dwelling itself: see section 118-245.

118-170 Spouse having different main residence

If, during a period, a dwelling is your main residence and another dwelling is the main residence of your *spouse (except a spouse living permanently separately and apart from you), you and your spouse must either:

choose one of the dwellings as the main residence of both of you for the period; or

nominate the different dwellings as your main residences for the period.

If you nominate the different *dwellings as your main residences for the period, you split the exemption in accordance with subsections (3) and (4).

If your interest in the dwelling you chose was not, during the period, more than half of the total interests in the dwelling, the dwelling is taken to have been your main residence during the period. Otherwise, the dwelling is taken to have been your main residence for half of the period.

(4) If your *spouse’s interest in the *dwelling your spouse chose was not, during the period, more than half of the total interests in the dwelling, the dwelling is taken to have been your spouse’s main residence during the period. Otherwise, the dwelling is taken to have been your spouse’s main residence for half of the period.

Example: You and your spouse (who are Australian residents) own a town house as tenants in common in equal shares. You and your spouse also own a beach house as tenants in common, with your interest being 30% and your spouse’s 70%. From 1 July 1999, you live mainly in the town house and your spouse lives mainly in the beach house. On 1 July 2000 you and your spouse dispose of both dwellings.

For the period 1 July 1999-30 June 2000 you nominate the town house as your main residence and your spouse nominates the beach house. The town house is taken to be your main residence during the period. The beach house is taken to be your spouse’s main residence during half the period.

118-175 Dependent child having different main residence

If, at a particular time, a dwelling is your main residence and another dwelling is the main residence of a *child of yours who is under 18 and is dependent on you for economic support, you must choose one of them as the main residence of both of you.

Roll-overs under Subdivision 126-A

118-178 Previous roll-over under Subdivision 126-A

This section applies to you if:

(a) you *acquired an *ownership interest in a *dwelling from another person (your former partner) as a result of a *CGT event (the earlier event); and

your former partner acquired the ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985; and

there was a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A (marriage or relationship breakdown roll-over) for the earlier event; and

(d) a CGT event (the later event) happens in relation to the ownership interest.

This Subdivision applies to the later event in the way that it would if:

(a) your *ownership interest had commenced when your former partner’s ownership interest commenced (the acquisition time); and

from the acquisition time until the time your former partner’s ownership interest ended:

you had used the dwelling in the same way that your former partner used it; and

the dwelling had been your main residence for the same number of days as it was your former partner’s main residence.

Example 1: Peter (the transferor spouse) is the 100% owner of a dwelling that he uses only as a main residence before transferring it to Susan (the transferee spouse). Susan uses the dwelling only as a rental property.

Susan will be eligible for a partial main residence exemption having regard to how both Peter and Susan used the dwelling if, at the time the dwelling is sold, Susan is an Australian resident.

David will be eligible for only a partial main residence exemption having regard to how both Caroline and David used the dwelling if, at the time the dwelling is sold, David is an Australian resident.

Example 2: Caroline (the transferor spouse) is the 100% owner of a dwelling that she uses only as a rental property before transferring it to David (the transferee spouse). David uses the dwelling only as a main residence.

118-180 Acquisition of dwelling from company or trust on marriage or relationship breakdown—roll-over provision applying

This Subdivision applies to you as if you owned an *ownership interest in land or a dwelling during a period when it was actually owned by a company or trustee if:

you *acquired the interest from the company or trustee; and

(b) it was acquired by the company or trustee on or after 20 September 1985; and

a roll-over was available to the company or trustee under Subdivision 126-A.

If subsection (1) applies to a dwelling, it cannot be treated as your main residence during the period, despite other provisions of this Subdivision that would allow you to treat it as your main residence during the period.

Partial exemption rules

118-185 Partial exemption where dwelling was your main residence during part only of ownership period

You get only a partial exemption for a CGT event that happens in relation to a dwelling or your *ownership interest in it if:

you are an individual; and

the dwelling was your main residence for part only of your *ownership period; and

the interest did not *pass to you as a beneficiary in, and you did not *acquire it as a trustee of, the estate of a deceased person.

You calculate your *capital gain or *capital loss using the formula:

where:

CG or CL amount is the *capital gain or *capital loss you would have made from the *CGT event apart from this Subdivision.

non-main residence days is the number of days in your *ownership period when the *dwelling was not your main residence.

You choose to continue to treat the dwelling as your main residence under section 118-145 (about absences) for the first 6 of the 7 years during which you rented the house out.

Under this section, you will be taken to have made a capital gain of:

Note: The capital gain or loss may be further adjusted if the dwelling was used to produce assessable income: see section 118-190.

Example: You bought a house in July 2020 and moved in immediately. In July 2023, you moved out and began to rent it. You sold it in July 2030, making (apart from this Subdivision) a capital gain of $10,000. At the time you sold the house, you were an Australian resident.

However, this section does not apply if, at the time the CGT event happens, you:

are an excluded foreign resident; or

are a foreign resident who does not satisfy the life events test.

118-190 Use of dwelling for producing assessable income

You get only a partial exemption for a CGT event that happens in relation to a dwelling or your *ownership interest in it if:

apart from this section, because the dwelling was your main residence or someone else’s during a period:

you would not make a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event; or

you would make a lesser capital gain or loss than if this Subdivision had not applied; and

the dwelling was used for the *purpose of producing assessable income during all or a part of that period; and

if you had incurred interest on money borrowed to *acquire the dwelling, or your ownership interest in it, you could have deducted some or all of that interest.

Example: You acquire a house as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, rent it out for 12 months and sell it within 2 years of the deceased’s death. You can ignore the rental because the exemption does not require the house to be your main residence during the 2 years after the death.

The *capital gain or *capital loss that you would have made apart from this section from the CGT event is increased by an amount that is reasonable having regard to the extent to which you would have been able to deduct that interest.

However, you ignore any use of the dwelling for the *purpose of producing assessable income during any period that you continue to treat it as your main residence under section 118-145 (about absences) to the extent that any part of it was not used for that purpose just before it last ceased to be your main residence.

Example: To continue the example from section 118-185, assume that, when you moved in, you used 1/4 of the house as a doctor’s surgery.

Under section 118-185, your capital gain was $1,000.

Under this section, it would be reasonable to add an amount of:

You have a total capital gain of $3,250 on the sale of the house.

Also, you ignore any use of the dwelling for the *purpose of producing assessable income during any period that you treat it as your main residence under section 118-147 (about absences) to the extent that any part of the old dwelling mentioned in that section was not used for that purpose just before the old dwelling last ceased to be your main residence.

If a dwelling or your *ownership interest in a dwelling *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, or you owned it as the trustee of a deceased estate, you ignore any use of the dwelling for the *purpose of producing assessable income before the deceased’s death if:

the dwelling was the deceased’s main residence just before the death; and

it was not being used for that purpose just before the death, or any use for that purpose just before the death was ignored because of subsection (3).

118-192 Special rule for first use to produce income

There is a special rule if:

you would get only a partial exemption under this Subdivision for a CGT event happening in relation to a dwelling or your *ownership interest in it because the dwelling was used for the *purpose of producing assessable income during your *ownership period; and

that use occurred for the first time after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 20 August 1996; and

(b) you would have got a full exemption under this Subdivision if the CGT event had happened just before the first time (the income time) it was used for that purpose during your ownership period.

You are taken to have *acquired the dwelling or your *ownership interest at the income time for its *market value at that time.

If your *ownership interest in the dwelling *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, or you owned it as the trustee of a deceased estate and the CGT event did not happen within 2 years of the deceased’s death, you apply this Subdivision as if:

you had *acquired the interest as an individual and not as a beneficiary or trustee of a deceased estate; and

(b) for applying the formula in section 118-185, your non-main residence days were the number of days in your *ownership period when the dwelling was not the main residence of an individual referred to in item 2, column 3 of the table in section 118-195.

Note: There are special rules for dwellings acquired before 7.30 pm on 20 August 1996: see section 118-195 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Dwellings acquired from deceased estates

118-195 Dwelling acquired from a deceased estate

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event that happens in relation to a dwelling or your *ownership interest in it is disregarded if:

you are an individual and the interest *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, or you owned it as the trustee of a deceased estate; and

at least one of the items in column 2 and at least one of the items in column 3 of the table are satisfied; and

the deceased was not an excluded foreign resident just before the deceased’s death.

Note 1: You may make a capital gain or capital loss if the dwelling was used for the purpose of producing assessable income: see section 118-190.

Note 2: In some cases the use of a dwelling to produce assessable income can be disregarded: see sections 118-145 and 118-190.

Note 3: There are special rules for dwellings acquired before 7.30 pm on 20 August 1996. These rules also affect the operation of section 118-192 and subsections 118-190(4) and 118-200(4): see section 118-195 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

For the purposes of a provision of this Subdivision that applies the table in subsection (1):

disregard paragraphs (a) and (b) in column 3 of item 2 of the table if, just before the deceased’s death, the deceased was an excluded foreign resident; and

disregard paragraph (c) in column 3 of item 2 of the table if, at the time the relevant CGT event happened, the individual was an excluded foreign resident.

Note: The other provisions that apply the table include paragraph 118-192(3)(b), subsection 118-200(2), paragraph 118-225(3)(c) and section 118-260.

Only these *CGT events are relevant:

CGT events A1, B1, C1, C2, E1, E2, F2, K3, K4 and K6 (except one involving the forfeiting of a deposit); and

a CGT event that involves the forfeiting of a deposit as part of an uninterrupted sequence of transactions ending in one of the events specified in paragraph (a) subsequently happening.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

118-197 Special rule for surviving joint tenant

This Subdivision applies to you as if the *ownership interest of another individual in a dwelling had *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate if:

you and the other individual owned ownership interests in the dwelling as joint tenants; and

the other individual dies.

118-200 Partial exemption for deceased estate dwellings

You get only a partial exemption (or no exemption) if:

you are an individual and your *ownership interest in a dwelling *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate, or you owned it as the trustee of a deceased estate; and

section 118-195 does not apply.

You calculate your *capital gain or *capital loss using the formula:

where:

CG or CL amount is the *capital gain or *capital loss you would have made from the *CGT event apart from this Subdivision.

non-main residence days is the sum of:

(a) if the deceased *acquired the *ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985—the number of days in the deceased’s *ownership period when the *dwelling was not the deceased’s main residence; and

(aa) if the deceased acquired the ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985 and, just before the deceased’s death, the deceased was an *excluded foreign resident—the number of remaining days in the deceased’s ownership period; and

the number of days in the period from the death until your ownership interest ends when the dwelling was not the main residence of an individual referred to in item 2, column 3 of the table in section 118-195.

total days is:

(a) if the deceased *acquired the *ownership interest before 20 September 1985—the number of days in the period from the death until your ownership interest ends; or

(b) if the deceased acquired the ownership interest on or after that day—the number of days in the period from the acquisition of the dwelling by the deceased until your ownership interest ends.

(3) However, you can adjust the formula by ignoring any non-main residence days and total days in the period from the deceased’s death until your *ownership interest ended, if:

(a) the deceased *acquired the ownership interest on or after 20 September 1985; and

your ownership interest ends within:

2 years of the deceased’s death; or

a longer period allowed by the Commissioner; and

you get a more favourable result by doing so; and

the deceased was not an excluded foreign resident just before the deceased’s death.

Note 1: The formula in this section will be adjusted (or further adjusted) under section 118-205 if the deceased acquired the dwelling through a deceased estate.

Note 2: There may be a further adjustment if the dwelling was used for the purpose of producing assessable income: see section 118-190.

(4) You ignore any non-main residence days before the deceased’s death if:

the dwelling was the deceased’s main residence just before the death; and

the dwelling was not being used for the *purpose of producing assessable income just before the death, or any use for that purpose just before the death was ignored because of subsection 118-190(3) or (3A); and

the deceased was not an excluded foreign resident just before the deceased’s death.

118-205 Adjustment if dwelling inherited from deceased individual

(1) You must adjust the formula in subsection 118-200(2) if the *ownership interest of the deceased individual referred to in section 118-200 (the most recently deceased) *passed to the individual on or after 20 September 1985 as a beneficiary in, or the individual owned it as trustee of, a deceased estate.

Note: Any gains or losses of individuals earlier in the inheritance chain are included in the gain or loss you would have made apart from this Subdivision. This section adjusts the formula to take account of times when the dwelling was the main residence of the individuals.

(2) Add to the component total days in the formula the fewer of:

the number of days between 20 September 1985 and the day when the interest *passed to or was *acquired as trustee by the most recently deceased; and

(b) the number of days between the time when an *ownership interest in the *dwelling was last acquired on or after 20 September 1985 by an individual except as a beneficiary in a deceased estate or as trustee of a deceased estate and the day when the interest passed to or was acquired as trustee by the most recently deceased.

(3) Add to the component non-main residence days in the formula the number of days in the period applicable under subsection (2) that the *dwelling was not the main residence of one or more of:

an individual who owned the dwelling at the time of the individual’s death; or

an individual who, immediately before the death of an individual referred to in paragraph (a), was the spouse of that individual (except a spouse who was living permanently separately and apart from the individual); or

an individual who had a right to occupy the dwelling under a will; or

an individual to whom an *ownership interest in the dwelling *passed as a beneficiary in, or who *acquired an ownership interest in the dwelling as trustee of, a deceased estate.

(4) Add to the component non-main residence days in the formula the number of days in the period applicable under subsection (2) that the *dwelling was the main residence of an individual who:

owned the dwelling; and

was an excluded foreign resident;

just before the individual’s death.

118-210 Trustee acquiring dwelling under will

This section applies if you are the trustee of a deceased estate and, under the deceased’s will, you *acquire an *ownership interest in a dwelling for occupation by an individual.

If a CGT event happens to the interest in relation to the individual and you receive no money or property for it:

a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the event is disregarded; and

the first element of the dwelling’s *cost base and *reduced cost base in the hands of the individual is its cost base and reduced cost base in your hands at the time of the event; and

the individual is taken to have *acquired it when you did.

If:

you receive money or property for the CGT event happening or the event happens in relation to another entity; and

the dwelling was the main residence of the individual from the time you *acquired the interest until the time of the event;

you do not make a *capital gain or *capital loss from the CGT event.

However, if the dwelling was the main residence of the individual during part only of that period, you make a *capital gain or *capital loss worked out using the formula:

where:

CG or CL amount is the *capital gain or *capital loss you would have made from the *CGT event apart from this Subdivision.

non-main residence days is the number of days in that period when the *dwelling was not the individual’s main residence.

Only these *CGT events are relevant:

CGT events A1, B1, C1, C2, E1, E2, E5, F2, K3, K4 and K6 (except one involving the forfeiting of a deposit); and

a CGT event that involves the forfeiting of a deposit as part of an uninterrupted sequence of transactions ending in one of the events specified in paragraph (a) subsequently happening.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

However, this section does not apply if, just before the deceased’s death, the deceased was an excluded foreign resident.

Special disability trusts

118-215 What the following provisions are about

The trustee of a trust that is or has been a special disability trust may be eligible for an exemption to the extent that a dwelling is the main residence of the individual who is or has been the principal beneficiary of the trust.

Another beneficiary of the trust may be eligible for an exemption if the dwelling is distributed to that other beneficiary at or after the principal beneficiary’s death.

Note 1: The following provisions also apply to the exemption about compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land (see section 118-245).

Note 2: The exemptions may not apply if the principal beneficiary of the trust is a foreign resident.

118-218 Exemption available to trustee—main case

This section applies to you in relation to a CGT event if:

the CGT event happens in relation to a CGT asset; and

just before the CGT event happens, you hold the CGT asset as trustee of a trust; and

the trust was a *special disability trust on at least one of the days on which you held the CGT asset.

Note: This section may not apply if the principal beneficiary of the trust is a foreign resident (see subsection (5)).

For the purposes of applying this Subdivision in relation to the CGT event, on each day to which paragraph (1)(c) applies:

treat yourself as holding the CGT asset personally (and not as trustee of the trust); and

if the *principal beneficiary of the trust uses the applicable dwelling in a particular way on that day—treat yourself as using the dwelling in that way on that day.

Example: If the principal beneficiary uses the dwelling as his or her main residence on the day, then treat yourself as using the dwelling as your main residence on that day.

Note 1: The CGT asset need not be a dwelling (or an ownership interest in a dwelling) if it is land adjacent to a dwelling, an adjacent structure of a flat or home unit, or an ownership interest in such an asset.

Note 2: If the trustee is an individual, the individual’s actual circumstances are ignored. Similarly, this subsection does not affect how this Subdivision applies for the individual’s actual circumstances. See section 960-100.

If you are not an individual, treat yourself as being an individual for the purposes of applying this Subdivision in relation to the CGT event.

If the CGT asset, or your *ownership interest in it, *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate:

treat the deceased as never having used the applicable dwelling for the *purpose of producing assessable income; and

treat the dwelling as being the deceased’s main residence on each day during the deceased’s *ownership period;

for the purposes of applying this Subdivision in relation to the CGT event.

Despite subsection (1), this section does not apply if, at the time the CGT event happens, the *principal beneficiary of the trust:

is an excluded foreign resident; or

is a foreign resident who does not satisfy the life events test.

118-220 Exemption available to trustee—after the principal beneficiary’s death

This section applies to you in relation to a CGT event if:

(a) the trustee of a trust holds a *CGT asset on a particular day (the transition day); and

on the transition day, or on an earlier day on which the CGT asset was held by the trustee of the trust, the trust is a *special disability trust; and

the individual who is or has been the *principal beneficiary of the trust dies on the transition day; and

the CGT event happens in relation to the CGT asset at or after the deceased’s death; and

the CGT event happens while you hold the CGT asset:

as trustee of the trust; or

as trustee of an implied trust arising because of the deceased’s death.

118-222 Exemption available to other beneficiary who acquires the CGT asset after the principal beneficiary’s death

This section applies to you in relation to a CGT event if:

the CGT event happens in relation to a CGT asset; and

you *acquired the CGT asset or your *ownership interest in it:

as a result of an earlier CGT event; and

as a beneficiary of a trust; and

section 118-220 applied to the trustee of the trust in relation to the earlier CGT event and the CGT asset.

118-225 Amount of exemption available after the principal beneficiary’s death—general

Full exemption for trustee unless sells asset for proceeds etc.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event is disregarded if:

section 118-220 applies to you in relation to the CGT event; and

as a result of the CGT event, an entity *acquires the CGT asset:

as trustee of an implied trust arising because of the deceased’s death; or

as a beneficiary of the relevant trust referred to in paragraph 118-220(e).

Exemption for beneficiary, or trustee selling asset for proceeds etc.

If:

section 118-220 applies to you in relation to a CGT event, but paragraph (1)(b) does not; or

section 118-222 applies to you in relation to a CGT event;

the amount of the *capital gain or *capital loss that you would have made apart from this section from the CGT event is decreased by an amount that is reasonable.

In determining what is a reasonable decrease:

if section 118-220 applies to you, but paragraph (1)(b) does not—treat yourself as being an individual who owned the CGT asset as the trustee of the deceased’s estate; and

if section 118-222 applies to you—treat yourself as being an individual and treat the CGT asset or your *ownership interest in it as having *passed to you as a beneficiary in the deceased’s estate; and

have regard to the principles in this Subdivision, and to:

the extent that the applicable dwelling was the deceased’s main residence for the relevant period; and

the extent that the dwelling was used for the *purpose of producing assessable income during the relevant period.

For the purposes of subparagraph (3)(c)(i), assume the dwelling was not the deceased’s main residence on each day the trust referred to in paragraph 118-220(b) was not a *special disability trust.

However, subsection (2) does not apply if, just before the deceased’s death, the deceased was an excluded foreign resident.

118-227 Amount of exemption available after the principal beneficiary’s death—cost base and reduced cost base

If section 118-220 applies to you and:

the applicable dwelling was the deceased’s main residence just before the deceased’s death; and

that dwelling was not then being used for the *purpose of producing assessable income; and

the trust referred to in paragraph 118-220(b) was then a *special disability trust; and

the deceased was not an excluded foreign resident just before the deceased’s death;

then:

the first element of the CGT asset’s *cost base, in your hands, is the CGT asset’s *market value just before the deceased’s death; and

the first element of the CGT asset’s *reduced cost base, in your hands, is worked out similarly.

However, if section 118-220 applies to you as trustee of an implied trust arising because of the deceased’s death, but subsection (1) does not, then:

the first element of the CGT asset’s *cost base, in your hands, is the CGT asset’s cost base just before the deceased’s death; and

the first element of the CGT asset’s *reduced cost base, in your hands, is worked out similarly.

If section 118-222 applies to you:

the first element of the CGT asset’s *cost base, in your hands, is the CGT asset’s cost base just before the earlier CGT event happened that resulted in you *acquiring the CGT asset or your *ownership interest in it; and

the first element of the CGT asset’s *reduced cost base, in your hands, is worked out similarly.

118-230 Application of CGT events E5 and E7 in relation to main residence exemption and special disability trusts

If CGT event E5 or E7 happens in relation to a CGT asset held by a trust that is or has been a *special disability trust, treat the lists of CGT events in paragraphs 118-110(2)(a) and 118-195(2)(a) as including a reference to that CGT event.

Compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land only

118-240 What the following provisions are about

You can ignore a capital gain or capital loss you make from a compulsory acquisition (or similar arrangement) that happens only to land that is adjacent to:

a dwelling that is your main residence; or

a dwelling that passed to you as a beneficiary, or trustee, of a deceased estate;

to the extent that the land was used primarily for private or domestic purposes in association with the dwelling.

There is a limit on the maximum area of land covered by the exemption.

Note 1: The exemption may not apply in full if the dwelling:

was not always a main residence; or

was used for the purpose of producing assessable income.

Note 2: The exemption may not apply at all if you are a foreign resident.

118-245 CGT events happening only to adjacent land

Total adjacent land is 2 hectares or less

(1) A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a *CGT event that happens in relation to land (the exempt land), or your *ownership interest in it, is disregarded if:

you are an individual; and

the exempt land is all or part of a dwelling’s adjacent land at the time of the CGT event; and

the CGT event does not happen in relation to the dwelling and does not happen in relation to your ownership interest in the dwelling; and

one of the following subparagraphs applies:

the dwelling was your main residence throughout all or part of your *ownership period of the dwelling;

your ownership interest in the dwelling *passed to you as a beneficiary in a deceased estate;

you own your ownership interest in the dwelling as the trustee of a deceased estate; and

section 118-250 (about compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land) applies to the CGT event and the exempt land; and

the sum of the following is 2 hectares or less:

the area of all of the dwelling’s adjacent land at the time of the CGT event;

the area of the land immediately under the dwelling;

if this section applied to you for an earlier CGT event that involved reducing the area of the dwelling’s adjacent land at the time of that earlier CGT event—that reduction in area.

Note: You may get only a partial exemption for the gain or loss (see section 118-260).

Total adjacent land is more than 2 hectares

If:

apart from paragraph (1)(f), subsection (1) would apply to the gain or loss; and

you choose this subsection to apply to the gain or loss;

disregard so much of the gain or loss that relates to land (the exempt land) within the *maximum exempt area for the *CGT event and the *dwelling.

No exemption if you are an excluded foreign resident

Note: You may get only a partial exemption for this portion of the gain or loss (see section 118-260).

However, this section does not apply if, at the time the CGT event happens, you:

are an excluded foreign resident; or

are a foreign resident who does not satisfy the life events test.

118-250 Compulsory acquisitions of adjacent land

This section applies to the CGT event and the exempt land if the CGT event involves:

the compulsory *acquisition of the exempt land by:

an *Australian government agency; or

an entity under a power conferred by an Australian law; or

you *disposing of the exempt land to an entity in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

the disposal takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of the entity;

the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to the entity acquiring the exempt land by agreement;

the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, the exempt land would be compulsorily acquired by the entity;

the compulsory acquisition would have been under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by an Australian law.

Note: For paragraph (b), the entity may be an Australian government agency.

This section applies to the CGT event and the exempt land if the CGT event involves:

your *ownership interest in the exempt land being compulsorily cancelled (however described) or varied (however described) by:

an *Australian government agency; or

an entity under a power conferred by an Australian law; or

you surrendering (however described) or varying (however described) your ownership interest in the exempt land in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

the surrender or variation takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of an entity;

the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to you agreeing to surrender or vary your ownership interest;

the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, your ownership interest would be compulsorily cancelled, or varied, under a power conferred by an Australian law.

Note: For paragraph (b), the entity may be an Australian government agency.

This section applies to the CGT event and the exempt land if the CGT event involves:

an interest or right in or relating to the exempt land being compulsorily conferred on:

an *Australian government agency; or

an entity under a power conferred by an Australian law; or

you conferring on an entity an interest or right in or relating to the exempt land in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

the conferral takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of an entity;

the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to you agreeing to confer an interest or right in or relating to the exempt land;

the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, an interest or right in or relating to the exempt land would be compulsorily conferred on the entity under a power conferred by an Australian law.

Note: For paragraph (b), the entity may be an Australian government agency.

This section applies to the CGT event and the exempt land if:

your *ownership interest in the exempt land:

was conferred on you by an *Australian government agency; and

had a limited, but renewable, period of operation; and

the CGT event involves that ownership interest not being renewed by that agency.

118-255 Maximum exempt area

Your maximum exempt area for the *CGT event and the *dwelling is 2 hectares less the amount worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Identify each earlier CGT event (if any) that:

happened in relation to land that was part of the dwelling’s adjacent land at the time of the earlier CGT event, or happened in relation to your *ownership interest in that land at that time; and

resulted in you losing rights to the substantial use and enjoyment of that land either completely or for at least 10 years;

for which you made a *capital gain or *capital loss that was wholly or partly disregarded because of the application of subsection 118-245(2).

Step 2. For each earlier CGT event covered by step 1, work out the area of the exempt land for that application of subsection 118-245(2).

Step 3. Add the results from step 2 to the area of the land immediately under the dwelling.

118-260 Partial exemption rules

If section 118-245 applies to a CGT event, the amount of the *capital gain or *capital loss that you would have made apart from this section from the CGT event is increased by an amount that is reasonable having regard to the following:

the extent that the dwelling was not a main residence for the relevant period;

the extent that the dwelling was used for the *purpose of producing assessable income during the relevant period.

In determining what is a reasonable increase, have regard to the principles in this Subdivision applicable to *CGT events happening in relation to a dwelling or your *ownership interest in it.

118-265 Extension to adjacent structures

Sections 118-245 to 118-260 (with appropriate modifications) apply to an adjacent structure of a flat or home unit in a corresponding way to the way they apply to a dwelling’s adjacent land.

Subdivision 118-D — Insurance and superannuation

Table of sections

118-300 Insurance policies

118-305 Superannuation

118-310 RSA’s

118-313 Superannuation agreements under the Family Law Act

118-315 Segregated exempt assets of life insurance companies

118-320 Segregated current pension assets of a complying superannuation entity

118-300 Insurance policies

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset that is your interest in rights under a general insurance policy, a *life insurance policy or an annuity instrument is disregarded in the situations set out in this table.

Example 1: Brian (as the insured) receives an insurance payment from his insurer for the destruction of a building he owned as an investment. The payment constitutes capital proceeds on the destruction (CGT event C1). The discharge of the insurance policy (CGT event C2) has no CGT consequences.

Example 2: Peter is the original beneficial owner of the rights under a policy of insurance on the life of an individual. He transfers the rights to his spouse for nothing. There are no CGT consequences for him, and none for his spouse if he dies.

Payment to trust beneficiary (or representative) if trustee owns the policy or instrument

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event happening because you receive a CGT asset from the trustee of a trust is disregarded if:

you receive the CGT asset as:

a beneficiary of the trust; or

a *legal personal representative of a beneficiary of the trust; and

the CGT asset is attributable to another CGT event and CGT asset to which table item 3 in subsection (1) applies for the trustee.

Only these *CGT events are relevant: CGT events A1, B1, C2, E1, E2, E3, E5, E6, E7, E8, I1, I2, K3 and K4.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

118-305 Superannuation

A *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded if you make it from a CGT event happening in relation to any of the following:

a right to an allowance, annuity or capital amount payable out of a superannuation fund or approved deposit fund;

a right to an asset of such a fund;

a right to any part of such an allowance, annuity, capital amount or asset.

Example: Angela retires from her employment and receives a lump sum payment from her superannuation fund. This is an example of CGT event C2 (her rights to receive the payment ending). There are no CGT consequences for Angela.

However, this exemption is not available if:

you are the trustee of the fund and a CGT event happens in relation to a CGT asset of the fund; or

an entity receives a payment or property where:

the entity was not a member of the fund; and

the entity *acquired the right to the payment or property for consideration.

Subsection (2) does not apply if:

a payment split applies to a splittable payment; and

as a result, a payment is made to the non-member spouse (or to his or her *legal personal representative if the non-member spouse has died).

118-310 RSA’s

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event happening in relation to a right to, or any part of, an RSA is disregarded.

118-313 Superannuation agreements under the Family Law Act

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from CGT event C2 or D1 relating directly to any of the following is disregarded:

(a) the making of a superannuation agreement (within the meaning of Part VIIIB or VIIIC of the Family Law Act 1975);

the termination, or setting aside, of such an agreement;

such an agreement otherwise coming to an end.

118-315 Segregated exempt assets of life insurance companies

A *capital gain or *capital loss that a life insurance company makes from a CGT event happening in relation to a *segregated exempt asset is disregarded.

118-320 Segregated current pension assets of a complying superannuation entity

A *capital gain or *capital loss that a *complying superannuation entity makes from a CGT event happening in relation to a *segregated current pension asset is disregarded.

However, subsection (1) does not apply to a *capital gain if the capital gain would, if it were an amount of ordinary income or statutory income received by the complying superannuation fund, be *non-arm’s length income.

Subdivision 118-E — Units in pooled superannuation trusts

118-350 Units in pooled superannuation trusts

A *capital gain or *capital loss an entity makes from a CGT event happening in relation to a unit in a unit trust is disregarded if:

the trust is a pooled superannuation trust for the income year in which the event happened; and

one of the conditions in subsection (2) is satisfied.

The entity must be:

the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity for the income year in which the CGT event happened; or

a life insurance company and, just before the event happened, the unit must have been a complying superannuation asset or a *segregated exempt asset of the company.

Subdivision 118-F — Venture capital investment

Guide to Subdivision 118-F

118-400 What this Subdivision is about

You can ignore capital gains and capital losses from CGT events that relate to investments, in Australian companies and unit trusts (and in some cases foreign holding companies), that meet the requirements of this Subdivision.

These investments are made:

(a) through limited partnerships, known as venture capital limited partnerships or early stage venture capital limited partnerships, that are unconditionally registered under Part 2 of the Venture Capital Act 2002; or

through limited partnerships, known as Australian venture capital funds of funds, that are unconditionally registered under that Part; or

directly by foreign residents who are registered under Part 3 of that Act.

However, unless investments are made through early stage venture capital limited partnerships, you must be a foreign resident for this Subdivision to apply.

This is an exception to the general rule, under Division 5A of that Part, that limited partnerships are assessed as companies.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

118-405 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital investments through venture capital limited partnerships

118-407 Exemption for certain venture capital investments through early stage venture capital limited partnerships

118-408 Partial exemption for some capital gains otherwise fully exempt under section 118-407

118-410 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital investments through Australian venture capital funds of funds

118-415 Exemption for certain venture capital investments by foreign residents

118-420 Meaning of eligible venture capital partner etc.

118-425 Meaning of eligible venture capital investment—investments in companies

118-427 Meaning of eligible venture capital investment—investments in unit trusts

118-428 Additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs

118-430 Meaning of at risk

118-432 Findings of substantially novel applications of technology

118-435 Special rule relating to investment in foreign resident holding companies

118-440 Meaning of permitted entity value

118-445 Meaning of committed capital

118-450 Values of assets and investments of entities without auditors

118-455 Impact Assessment of this Subdivision

Operative provisions

Note: Registration of a limited partnership under Part 2 of that Act also leads to its income and losses being assessed under Division 5 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 on the basis that it is a partnership.

118-405 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital investments through venture capital limited partnerships

General

All of your share in a *capital gain or a *capital loss from a CGT event is disregarded if:

you are an eligible venture capital partner in a *limited partnership; and

the CGT event relates to an investment that the partnership made that is an eligible venture capital investment; and

when the partnership made the investment, the partnership was a venture capital limited partnership that was *unconditionally registered; and

at the time of the CGT event, the partnership:

owned the investment; and

had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

was a venture capital limited partnership that was unconditionally registered; and

in the case of a capital gain—met all of the registration requirements of a VCLP that are not *investment registration requirements.

Note: The registration requirements of a VCLP are set out in section 9-1 of the Venture Capital Act 2002. It is important to understand that this is a separate requirement from registration under Part 2 of that Act (which effectively determines whether an entity is a VCLP).

It is technically possible to be registered under Part 2 of that Act without meeting the registration requirements of a VCLP, but you might still not be entitled to exemption under this section.

Meaning of venture capital limited partnership

(2) A *limited partnership is a venture capital limited partnership at a particular time if, at that time, the partnership’s registration as a venture capital limited partnership under Part 2 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 is, or is taken to have been, in force.

For when the registration is, or is taken to have been, in force, see section 13-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

Effect of converting convertible notes etc.

Note: In this Act and the Venture Capital Act 2002, the term “venture capital limited partnership” is usually abbreviated to “VCLP”.

A partnership that acquired a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as having owned the share from the time when it last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

A partnership that acquired a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by or on behalf of the trustee of the unit trust is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as having owned the unit from the time when it last acquired the convertible note.

Subsection (3) or (4) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note, or convertible preference share, was an eligible venture capital investment.

A partnership that converts a *convertible note into a share or a unit is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as continuing to own the convertible note until the partnership no longer owns the share or unit.

118-407 Exemption for certain venture capital investments through early stage venture capital limited partnerships

General

All of your share in a *capital gain or a *capital loss from a CGT event is disregarded if:

you are a partner in a *limited partnership; and

the CGT event relates to an investment that the partnership made that:

is an eligible venture capital investment; and

meets all of the additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs for the investment; and

when the partnership made the investment, the partnership was an early stage venture capital limited partnership that was *unconditionally registered; and

at the time of the CGT event, the partnership:

owned the investment; and

had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

was an early stage venture capital limited partnership that was unconditionally registered; and

in the case of a capital gain—met all of the registration requirements of an ESVCLP that are not *investment registration requirements.

Note 1: The registration requirements of an ESVCLP are set out in section 9-3 of the Venture Capital Act 2002. It is important to understand that this is a separate requirement from registration under Part 2 of that Act (which effectively determines whether an entity is an ESVCLP).

It is technically possible to be registered under Part 2 of that Act without meeting the registration requirements of an ESVCLP, but you might still not be entitled to exemption under this section.

Residency requirements for general partners

Note 2: This section does not apply if you get a partial exemption in relation to a CGT event under section 118-408.

However, if you are a general partner in the partnership, subsection (1) does not apply to you unless you are:

an Australian resident; or

(b) a resident of a foreign country in respect of which a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) is in force that is an agreement of a kind referred to in subparagraph (b)(i), (ia), (ii), (iii), (iv) or (v) of that definition.

For the purposes of this section, the place of residence of a general partner in a *limited partnership:

that is a company or limited partnership; and

that is not an Australian resident;

is the place in which the general partner has its central management and control.

Meaning of early stage venture capital limited partnership

(4) A *limited partnership is an early stage venture capital limited partnership at a particular time if, at that time, the partnership’s registration as an early stage venture capital limited partnership under Part 2 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 is, or is taken to have been, in force.

Note 1: For when the registration is, or is taken to have been, in force, see section 13-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

Note 2: In this Act and the Venture Capital Act 2002, the term “early stage venture capital limited partnership” is usually abbreviated to “ESVCLP”.

Effect of converting convertible notes etc.

A partnership that acquired a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as having owned the share from the time when it last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

A partnership that acquired a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by the trustee of the unit trust is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as having owned the unit from the time when it last acquired the convertible note.

Subsection (6) or (7) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note, or convertible preference share, was an eligible venture capital investment.

A partnership that converts a *convertible note into a share or a unit is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), as continuing to own the convertible note until the partnership no longer owns the share or unit.

118-408 Partial exemption for some capital gains otherwise fully exempt under section 118-407

Despite section 118-407, you get only a partial exemption for a *capital gain from a CGT event relating to an eligible venture capital investment if:

apart from this section, all of your share in the capital gain from the CGT event relating to the investment would be disregarded under section 118-407; and

(b) at the end of an income year to which subsection (4) applies (a valuation year), the sum of the values of:

the assets of the company or unit trust in which the investment is made; and

the assets of each other entity that is a *connected entity of the company or unit trust;

exceeds $250 million; and

the CGT event happens after:

if there is only one valuation year—the end of the period of 6 months after the end of that valuation year; or

if there is more than one valuation year—the end of the period of 6 months after the end of the earliest of those valuation years.

If subsection (1) applies, work out your *capital gain using the formula:

where:

normal capital gain is what your *capital gain from the *CGT event would be apart from section 118-407 and this section.

valuation year capital gain is the capital gain you would have made in relation to the *CGT event if the CGT event had happened:

if there is only one valuation year—at the end of the period of 6 months after the end of that valuation year; or

if there is more than one valuation year—at the end of the period of 6 months after the end of the earliest of those valuation years.

Work out the capital gain based on what the capital proceeds would have been, and on other matters relating to the amount of the gain being determined on a reasonable basis, if the CGT event resulting in the gain had happened at the end of that period.

Despite subsection (2), you are taken not to have a *capital gain, or a *capital loss, from the CGT event if the amount worked out under the formula in that subsection would be less than zero.

This subsection applies to any income year that:

precedes the income year in which the CGT event happens; but

does not precede the income year in which the investment was made.

Note: There must always be at least one valuation year, because paragraph 118-407(1)(d) ensures the CGT event will not happen in the year the investment was made.

Section 118-407 does not apply in relation to a CGT event if this section applies in relation to the CGT event.

118-410 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital investments through Australian venture capital funds of funds

Gains or losses as a partner in a VCLP or an ESVCLP

All of your share in a *capital gain or a *capital loss from a CGT event is disregarded if:

you are an eligible venture capital partner in a *limited partnership; and

the CGT event relates to an eligible venture capital investment made by a VCLP, or an ESVCLP, in which the partnership is a partner; and

when the investment was made, the partnership was an Australian venture capital fund of funds that was *unconditionally registered; and

when the investment was made, the VCLP or ESVCLP was unconditionally registered; and

at the time of the CGT event, the partnership:

was an Australian venture capital fund of funds that was unconditionally registered; and

in the case of a capital gain—met all of the registration requirements of an AFOF that are not *investment registration requirements; and

at the time of the CGT event, the VCLP or ESVCLP:

owned the investment; and

had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

was unconditionally registered; and

in the case of a capital gain—met all of the registration requirements of a VCLP, or all of the registration requirements of an ESVCLP, (as the case requires) that are not investment registration requirements.

Note: The registration requirements of an AFOF are set out in section 9-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002. It is important to understand that this is a separate requirement from registration under Part 2 of that Act (which effectively determines whether an entity is an AFOF).

It is technically possible to be registered under Part 2 of that Act without meeting the registration requirements of an AFOF, but you might still not be entitled to exemption under this section.

Gains or losses from direct investments

All of your share in a *capital gain or a *capital loss from a CGT event is disregarded if:

you are an eligible venture capital partner in a *limited partnership; and

in the case of a capital gain—the CGT event relates to an eligible venture capital investment that the partnership made in a company, or a unit trust, in which a VCLP, or an ESVCLP, of which the partnership is a partner, owns one or more eligible venture capital investments; and

when the investment was made, the partnership was an Australian venture capital fund of funds that was *unconditionally registered; and

when the investment was made, the VCLP or ESVCLP owned one or more eligible venture capital investments in the company referred to in paragraph (b); and

at the time of the CGT event, the partnership:

owned the investment; and

had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

was an Australian venture capital fund of funds that was unconditionally registered; and

in the case of a capital gain—met all of the registration requirements of an AFOF that are not *investment registration requirements.

Note: The registration requirements of an AFOF are set out in section 9-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002. It is important to understand that this is a separate requirement from registration under Part 2 of that Act (which effectively determines whether an entity is an AFOF).

It is technically possible to be registered under Part 2 of that Act without meeting the registration requirements of an AFOF, but you might still not be entitled to exemption under this section.

Meaning of Australian venture capital fund of funds

(3) A *limited partnership is an Australian venture capital fund of funds at a particular time if, at that time, the partnership’s registration as an Australian venture capital fund of funds under Part 2 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 is, or is taken to have been, in force.

For when the registration is, or is taken to have been, in force, see section 13-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

Effect of converting convertible notes etc.

Note: In this Act and the Venture Capital Act 2002, the term “Australian venture capital fund of funds” is usually abbreviated to “AFOF”.

A partnership that acquired a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company is treated, for the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(f)(ii) and (2)(e)(ii), as having owned the share from the time when it last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

A partnership that acquired a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by or on behalf of the trustee of the unit trust is treated, for the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(f)(ii) and (2)(e)(ii), as having owned the unit from the time when it last acquired the convertible note.

Subsection (4) or (5) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note, or convertible preference share, was an eligible venture capital investment.

A partnership that converts a *convertible note into a share or a unit is treated, for the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(f)(ii) and (2)(e)(ii), as continuing to own the convertible note until the partnership no longer owns the share or unit.

118-415 Exemption for certain venture capital investments by foreign residents

General

A *capital gain or a *capital loss from a CGT event is disregarded if:

the CGT event relates to an investment that you made that is an eligible venture capital investment; and

you were an eligible venture capital investor when you made the investment; and

at the time of the CGT event:

you owned the investment; and

you had owned the investment for at least 12 months; and

you were an eligible venture capital investor.

Meaning of eligible venture capital investor

(2) An entity is an eligible venture capital investor at a particular time if, at that time, the entity:

is a tax-exempt foreign resident; and

(b) is registered under Part 3 of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

Effect of converting convertible notes etc.

An entity that acquired a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), as having owned the share from the time when it last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

An entity that acquired a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by or on behalf of the trustee of the unit trust is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), as having owned the unit from the time when it last acquired the convertible note.

Subsection (3) or (4) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note, or convertible preference share, was an eligible venture capital investment.

An entity that converts a *convertible note into a share or a unit is treated, for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), as continuing to own the convertible note until the entity no longer owns the share or unit.

118-420 Meaning of eligible venture capital partner etc.

(1) A partner in a *limited partnership is an eligible venture capital partner if:

the partner is a tax-exempt foreign resident; or

the partner is a foreign venture capital fund of funds, and the sum of:

the partner’s *committed capital in the partnership; and

the sum of the amounts of committed capital in the partnership of any entities that are *connected entities of the partner;

does not exceed 30% of the partnership’s committed capital; or

the partner is a widely held foreign venture capital fund of funds; or

the partner is a foreign resident who is not a general partner of a VCLP or an ESVCLP and is neither a tax-exempt foreign resident nor a foreign venture capital fund of funds, and the sum of:

the partner’s committed capital in the partnership; and

the sum of the amounts of committed capital in the partnership of any entities that are connected entities of the partner;

is less than 10% of the partnership’s committed capital.

Note: Subsection (7) prevents some trusts from being eligible venture capital partners.

An entity that is an associate of the partner only because the entity is a partner in the partnership in question is taken not to be a *connected entity of the partner for the purposes of subparagraphs (1)(b)(ii) and (c)(ii).

(3) An entity is a tax-exempt foreign resident if:

the entity is a foreign resident; and

the entity is not a general partner of a VCLP or an ESVCLP; and

the entity’s income is exempt, or effectively exempt, from taxation in the entity’s country of residence.

(4) An entity that is a *limited partnership is a foreign venture capital fund of funds if:

the partnership was established in a foreign country; and

every partner who is a general partner is a foreign resident; and

the partnership is not a general partner of a VCLP or an ESVCLP.

(5) An entity that is not a *limited partnership is a foreign venture capital fund of funds if:

whether by operation of law or by election, the entity is not taxed as an entity in its country of residence, but the entity’s income is taxed to its members according to their interests in the entity; and

the entity was established in a foreign country; and

the entity is a foreign resident; and

the entity is not a general partner of a VCLP or an ESVCLP.

(6) An entity is a widely held foreign venture capital fund of funds if:

the entity is a foreign venture capital fund of funds; and

the entity is a widely held entity; and

*eligible venture capital partners (other than foreign venture capital fund of funds) ultimately hold the rights to at least 90% of the entity’s income; and

each other entity who:

if the entity is a *limited partnership—is a general partner of the partnership; or

otherwise—exercises day to day control of the entity;

is a foreign resident.

A trust is not an eligible venture capital partner if an Australian resident:

(a) is or is likely to become presently entitled, for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, to; or

(b) has or is likely to have an individual interest, for the purposes of Division 5 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, in;

a share of income of the trust, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed partnerships or trusts.

For the purposes of this section, the place of residence of a general partner of a *limited partnership:

that is a company or a limited partnership; and

that is a foreign resident;

is the place in which the general partner has its central management and control.

For the purposes of this section, the place of residence of an entity referred to in paragraph (5)(a) is the place in which the entity has its central management and control.

118-425 Meaning of eligible venture capital investment—investments in companies

Requirements for an eligible venture capital investment

(1) An investment is an eligible venture capital investment if:

it is at risk; and

it is:

an acquisition of *shares in a company; or

an acquisition of options (including warrants) originally issued by a company to acquire shares in the company; or

an acquisition of *convertible notes (other than convertible notes that are *debt interests) issued by a company; and

the company meets the requirements of subsections (2) to (7); and

the sum of:

the total amount that the partnership has invested in all the *equity interests and *debt interests that the partnership owns in the company; and

the total amount that the partnership has invested in all the equity interests and debt interests that the partnership owns in any entities that are *connected entities of the company;

does not exceed 30% of the partnership’s *committed capital.

Certain entities not treated as connected entities

In applying subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), ignore an entity that is a *connected entity of the company only because it is an associate of the company because of an investment made in the entity by the partnership.

Location within Australia

The company:

must, at the time the investment is made, be an Australian resident; and

if at that time the entity making the investment does not own any other investments in the company—must meet the following requirements:

more than 50% of the people who are currently engaged by the company to perform services must perform those services primarily in Australia;

more than 50% of its assets (determined by value) must be situated in Australia;

during the whole of the period of 12 months, or such shorter period as *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002, starting from the time the investment is made.

However, subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii) does not apply to the company if Industry Innovation and Science Australia so determines under section 25-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

See subsection (10) for the value of assets.

Predominant activity

Note: A company that fails to meet the requirements of this subsection can still be eligible in certain circumstances: see subsection (12A).

The company must satisfy at least 2 of these requirements:

more than 75% of the assets (determined by value) that are assets of either:

the company; or

(ii) any entity controlled by the company in a way described in section 328-125 (a controlled entity);

must be used primarily in activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section;

more than 75% of the persons who are employees of either or both of the following:

the company;

any one or more of its controlled entities;

must be engaged (as such employees) primarily in activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section;

more than 75% of the total assessable income, exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income of:

the company; and

each of its controlled entities;

must come from activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section.

Note 1: This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

Note 2: See subsection (10) for the value of assets.

Note 3: A company that fails to meet at least 2 of the requirements can still be eligible if:

Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines that the company’s primary activity is not ineligible and the failure is temporary: see subsection (14); or

all amounts invested in the company are appropriately invested within the first 6 months: see subsection (14A).

Industry Innovation and Science Australia may also determine that the activities of a controlled entity of the company are to be disregarded in applying this section to the company: see subsection (14B).

Investment in other entities

The company must not invest, in another entity, any part of the amount invested, unless:

the other entity:

is *connected with the company (but not because the other entity is an associate of the company as a result of an investment made in the other entity by the partnership); and

meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (7); or

the other entity:

is, after the investment is made, controlled by the company in a way described in section 328-125; and

meets the requirements of subsections (2) to (7) of this section (other than subsection (3)).

However, this subsection does not prevent the company from depositing money with an *ADI, or with a body authorised by or under a law of a foreign country to carry on banking business in that country.

Investment in the capacity of a trustee

Note 1: This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

Note 2: The other entity can be taken to meet the requirements of subsection (2) if Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines that its activities are complementary to activities of the company or other controlled entities and that the company meets those requirements at the time of the investment: see subsection (14C).

The company must not, in the capacity of a trustee, use any part of the amount invested.

Note: This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

Registered auditor

The company must have as its auditor a *registered auditor at all times (if any) referred to in subsection (5A) during which the company:

(a) is not a proprietary company within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001; or

is a large proprietary company within the meaning of that Act; or

would exceed the permitted entity value if the amount provided for under subsection 118-440(9) were $12.5 million.

Note: This requirement is ongoing.

The times are:

the end of the income year in which the investment is made; and

all times after the end of that income year.

Permitted entity value

The company must not, immediately before the investment is made, exceed the permitted entity value.

Listing

The company must be a company whose *shares:

are, at the time the investment is made, not listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country; or

are so listed at that time, but cease to be so listed at any time during the 12 months after the investment is made.

However, the company is taken to meet the requirements of this subsection in relation to any investment made by an ESVCLP (whether or not shares in the company are so listed).

Scrip for scrip investments

Note: The additional requirements for ESVCLPs deal with listing in relation to initial investments by ESVCLPs in companies: see paragraph 118-428(1)(a).

However, a company is taken to meet the requirements of subsections (2) to (7) if:

the investment is an acquisition of *shares in that company in exchange for shares in another company; and

at the time that the VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or eligible venture capital investor in question acquired the shares being exchanged, the other company meets the requirements of subsections (2) to (7), but not only because this subsection applies to the other company; and

the shares in the other company that are being exchanged are all of the shares in the other company that the entity making the investment owned at the time of the exchange.

Debt interests

To avoid doubt, a *debt interest cannot be an eligible venture capital investment.

The value of an asset or investment

The value of an asset, or an investment, of an entity at a particular time for the purposes of this section is the value of the asset or investment as shown in:

(a) the last audited accounts prepared for the entity for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 that relates to a period ending less than 18 months before that time; or

if there are no such audited accounts—a statement, prepared in accordance with the accounting standards and audited by the entity’s auditor, showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before that time.

However, for the purposes of this section, the value of the asset or investment at that time is the value provided for by section 118-450 if:

there are no such audited accounts; and

the entity does not have an auditor at that time; and

the entity is not required under subsection (5) of this section to have an auditor at that time.

Application to consolidated or consolidatable groups

This section applies to a consolidated group or consolidatable group as if:

the *head company of the group carried on all of the activities that are carried on by *subsidiary members of the group; and

the assets, employees and income of the subsidiary members of the group were assets, employees and income of the head company; and

each subsidiary member of the group were parts of the head company rather than separate entities.

Exception to requirements relating to location within Australia

A company is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (2) in relation to an investment made by an entity if the sum of:

the value of the investment at the time the entity makes it; and

the total value of all the other investments that the entity owns at that time that do not, or apart from this subsection would not, meet those requirements;

does not exceed 20% of the partnership’s *committed capital.

Ineligible activities

Note: See subsection (10) for the value of investments.

These activities are ineligible activities:

property development or land ownership;

finance, to the extent that it is any of the following:

banking;

providing capital to others;

leasing;

factoring;

securitisation;

insurance;

(d) construction (including extension, improvement or up-grading) or acquisition of infrastructure facilities (within the meaning of section 93L of the Development Allowance Authority Act 1992, as in force just before the commencement of Schedule 6 to the Statute Update (Smaller Government) Act 2018) or related facilities (within the meaning of section 93M of that Act), or both;

making investments, whether made directly or indirectly, that are directed to deriving income in the nature of interest, rents, dividends, royalties or lease payments.

For the purposes of this subsection, activities that are ancillary or incidental to a particular activity are taken to form part of that activity.

Note: Under Division 362 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, Industry Innovation and Science Australia can make rulings that activities, or classes of activities, are not ineligible activities.

However, none of the following activities are ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13):

developing technology for use in relation to an activity referred to in paragraph (13)(b), (c) or (e);

an activity that is ancillary or incidental to the activity of developing technology referred to in paragraph (a) of this subsection;

an activity referred to in paragraph (13)(b), (c) or (e) that is the subject of a finding in force under section 118-432 at the time the investment is made.

Subsection (13A) does not apply in circumstances prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

Industry Innovation and Science Australia discretion

(14) A company is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (3) even if it fails to satisfy at least 2 of the requirements in that subsection if *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

the company’s primary activity is not an ineligible activity mentioned in subsection (13); and

the failure is temporary and did not exist at the time the investment referred to in subsection (1) was made and, if it has been disposed of, when it was disposed of.

Temporary exception to the requirements for predominant activity

A company is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (3) even if it fails to satisfy at least 2 of the requirements in that subsection if:

the company’s sole purpose is making one or more investments that are *eligible venture capital investments, or would be eligible venture capital investments apart from paragraph (1)(d); and

during the 6 month period starting immediately before the first investment made by a VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or eligible venture capital investor, the company has used all of the amounts invested in it:

to make investments of a kind referred to in paragraph (a); or

to engage in activities that are ancillary or incidental to making those investments.

However, this subsection applies to the company only for that 6 month period.

Activities disregarded in applying the predominant activity test

(14B) If *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

the activities of the controlled entity of a company are complementary to one or more of the activities, of the company or its other controlled entities, that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section; and

the activities that, taken together, constitute the principal activities of the company and all of its controlled entities are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (13) of this section; and

in all the circumstances, it is appropriate that, for a period specified in the determination, the activities of the controlled entity are disregarded when applying subsection (3) of this section to the company;

in applying subsection (3) of this section to the company, disregard, for the period specified in the determination, the activities of the controlled entity.

Other entity can be taken to meet requirements relating to location in Australia

(14C) In applying subsection (4) to a company in relation to its investment in another entity, the other entity is taken, for the purposes of subparagraph (4)(b)(ii), to meet the requirements of subsection (2) if *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

the activities of the other entity are complementary to one or more of the activities of the company or its other controlled entities; and

the company meets the requirements of subsection (2) of this section at the time the investment is made, or will meet those requirements at the time the investment is proposed to be made.

Convertible notes and convertible preference shares

To the extent that an investment by an entity consists of the acquisition of a *share in a company by converting a *convertible note, or a convertible preference share, issued by the company, the investment is, for the purpose of determining whether the company meets the requirements of subsections (2) to (7), taken to have been made at the time when the entity last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share.

118-427 Meaning of eligible venture capital investment—investments in unit trusts

Requirements for an eligible venture capital investment

(1) An investment is an eligible venture capital investment if:

it is at risk; and

it is either:

an acquisition of units in a unit trust; or

an acquisition of options (including warrants) originally issued by or on behalf of the trustee of a unit trust to acquire units in the unit trust; or

an acquisition of *convertible notes (other than convertible notes that are *debt interests) issued by or on behalf of the trustee of a unit trust; and

the unit trust meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (8); and

the sum of:

the total amount that the partnership has invested in all the *equity interests and *debt interests that the partnership owns in the unit trust; and

the total amount that the partnership has invested in all the equity interests and debt interests that the partnership owns in any entities that are *connected entities of the unit trust;

does not exceed 30% of the partnership’s *committed capital.

Certain entities not treated as connected entities

In applying subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), ignore an entity that is a *connected entity of the unit trust only because it is an associate of the unit trust because of an investment made in the entity by the partnership.

Location within Australia

The unit trust:

must, at the time the investment is made, carry on business in Australia; and

must, at that time, meet at least one of the following requirements:

the central management and control of the unit trust is in Australia;

more than 50% of the beneficial interests in the income of the unit trust are held by Australian residents;

more than 50% of the beneficial interests in the property of the unit trust are held by Australian residents; and

if at that time the entity making the investment does not own any other investments in the unit trust—must meet the following requirements:

more than 50% of the people who are currently engaged by the trustee of the unit trust to perform services must perform those services primarily in Australia;

more than 50% of its assets (determined by value) must be situated in Australia;

during the whole of the period of 12 months, or such shorter period as *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002, starting from the time the investment is made.

However, subparagraph (c)(i) or (ii) does not apply to the unit trust if Industry Innovation and Science Australia so determines under section 25-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

Predominant activity

Note: A company that fails to meet the requirements of this subsection can still be eligible in certain circumstances: see subsection (13).

The unit trust must satisfy at least 2 of these requirements:

more than 75% of the assets (determined by value) that are assets of either:

the unit trust; or

(ii) any entity controlled by the unit trust in a way described in section 328-125 (a controlled entity);

must be used primarily in activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section;

more than 75% of the persons who are employees of either or both of the following:

the trustee of the unit trust;

any one or more of the unit trust’s controlled entities;

must be engaged (as such employees) primarily in activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section;

more than 75% of the total assessable income, exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income of:

the unit trust; and

each of its controlled entities;

must come from activities that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section.

Investment in other entities

Note 1: This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

Note 2: See subsection (11) for the value of assets.

Note 3: A unit trust that fails to meet at least 2 of the requirements can still be eligible if Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines that the unit trust’s primary activity is not ineligible and the failure is temporary: see subsection (15).

Note 4: Industry Innovation and Science Australia may also determine that the activities of a controlled entity of the unit trust are to be disregarded in applying this section to the unit trust: see subsection (15A).

The unit trust must not invest, in another entity, any part of the amount invested, unless:

the other entity:

is *connected with the unit trust (but not because the other entity is an associate of the unit trust as a result of an investment made in the other entity by the partnership); and

meets the requirements of subsections (4) to (8); or

the other entity:

is, after the investment is made, controlled by the unit trust in a way described in section 328-125; and

meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (8) of this section (other than subsection (4)).

However, this subsection does not prevent the unit trust from depositing money with an *ADI, or with a body authorised by or under a law of a foreign country to carry on banking business in that country.

Investment in the capacity of a trustee

Note 1: This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

Note 2: The other entity can be taken to meet the requirements of subsection (3) if Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines that its activities are complementary to activities of the unit trust or other controlled entities and that the unit trust meets those requirements at the time of the investment: see subsection (15B).

The unit trust must not, in the capacity of a trustee, use any part of the amount invested.

Note: This requirement is ongoing. It is not limited to the circumstances at the time the investment was made.

Registered auditor

The unit trust must have as its auditor a *registered auditor at all times (if any) referred to in subsection (6A) during which the unit trust:

if it were a company:

(i) would not be a proprietary company within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001; or

would be a large proprietary company within the meaning of that Act; or

would exceed the permitted entity value if the amount provided for under subsection 118-440(9) were $12.5 million.

Note: This requirement is ongoing.

The times are:

the end of the income year in which the investment is made; and

all times after the end of that income year.

Permitted entity value

The unit trust must not, immediately before the investment is made, exceed the permitted entity value.

Listing

The unit trust must be a unit trust whose units:

are, at the time the investment is made, not listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country; or

are so listed at that time, but cease to be so listed at any time during the 12 months after the investment is made.

However, the unit trust is taken to meet the requirements of this subsection in relation to any investment made by an ESVCLP (whether or not units in the unit trust are so listed).

Scrip for scrip investments

Note: The additional requirements for ESVCLPs deal with listing in relation to initial investments by ESVCLPs in unit trusts: see paragraph 118-428(1)(a).

However, a unit trust is taken to meet the requirements of subsections (3) to (8) if:

the investment is an acquisition of units in that unit trust in exchange for units in another unit trust; and

at the time that the VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or eligible venture capital investor in question acquired the units being exchanged, the other unit trust meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (8), but not only because this subsection applies to the other unit trust; and

the units in the other unit trust that are being exchanged are all of the units in the other unit trust that the entity making the investment owned at the time of the exchange.

Debt interests

To avoid doubt, a *debt interest cannot be an eligible venture capital investment.

The value of an asset or investment

The value of an asset or investment of an entity at a particular time for the purposes of this section is:

the value of the asset or investment as shown in a statement, prepared in accordance with the accounting standards and audited by the entity’s auditor, showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before that time; or

the value provided for by section 118-450 if:

the entity does not have an auditor at that time; and

the entity is not required under subsection (6) of this section to have an auditor at that time.

Application to groups

If a group of entities:

is treated as a consolidated group because of a choice that a unit trust has made under section 713-130; or

would be treated as a consolidated group because of such a choice:

if a unit trust were to make such a choice; or

if a unit trust that is not a public trading trust were such a trust and were to make such a choice;

this section applies in relation to the entities as if:

the unit trust carried on, as the *head company of the consolidated group or consolidatable group, all of the activities that are carried on by the other members of the group; and

the assets, employees and income of the other members of the group were assets, employees and income of the unit trust; and

each of the other members of the group were parts of the unit trust rather than separate entities.

Exception to requirements relating to location within Australia

A unit trust is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (3) in relation to an investment made by an entity if the sum of:

the value of the investment at the time the entity makes it; and

the total value of all the other investments that the entity owns at that time that do not, or apart from this subsection would not, meet those requirements;

does not exceed 20% of the partnership’s *committed capital.

Ineligible activities

Note: See subsection (11) for the value of investments.

These activities are ineligible activities:

property development or land ownership;

finance, to the extent that it is any of the following:

banking;

providing capital to others;

leasing;

factoring;

securitisation;

insurance;

(d) construction (including extension, improvement or up-grading) or acquisition of infrastructure facilities (within the meaning of section 93L of the Development Allowance Authority Act 1992, as in force just before the commencement of Schedule 6 to the Statute Update (Smaller Government) Act 2018) or related facilities (within the meaning of section 93M of that Act), or both;

making investments, whether made directly or indirectly, that are directed to deriving income in the nature of interest, rents, dividends, royalties or lease payments.

For the purposes of this subsection, activities that are ancillary or incidental to a particular activity are taken to form part of that activity.

Note: Under Division 362 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, Industry Innovation and Science Australia can make rulings that activities, or classes of activities, are not ineligible activities.

However, none of the following activities are ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14):

developing technology for use in relation to an activity referred to in paragraph (14)(b), (c) or (e);

an activity that is ancillary or incidental to the activity of developing technology referred to in paragraph (a) of this subsection;

an activity referred to in paragraph (14)(b), (c) or (e) that is the subject of a finding in force under section 118-432 at the time the investment is made.

Subsection (14A) does not apply in circumstances prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

Industry Innovation and Science Australia discretion

(15) A unit trust is taken to meet the requirements of subsection (4) even if it fails to satisfy at least 2 of the requirements in that subsection if *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

the unit trust’s primary activity is not an ineligible activity mentioned in subsection (14); and

the failure is temporary and did not exist at the time the investment referred to in subsection (1) was made and, if it has been disposed of, when it was disposed of.

Activities disregarded in applying the predominant activity test

(15A) If *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

the activities of the controlled entity of a unit trust are complementary to one or more of the activities, of the unit trust or its other controlled entities, that are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section; and

the activities that, taken together, constitute the principal activities of the unit trust and all of its controlled entities are not ineligible activities mentioned in subsection (14) of this section; and

in all the circumstances, it is appropriate that, for a period specified in the determination, the activities of the controlled entity are disregarded when applying subsection (4) of this section to the unit trust;

in applying subsection (4) of this section to the unit trust, disregard, for the period specified in the determination, the activities of the controlled entity.

Other entity can be taken to meet requirements relating to location in Australia

(15B) In applying subsection (5) to a unit trust in relation to its investment in another entity, the other entity is taken, for the purposes of subparagraph (5)(b)(ii), to meet the requirements of subsection (3) if *Industry Innovation and Science Australia determines under section 25-15 of the Venture Capital Act 2002 that:

the activities of the other entity are complementary to one or more of the activities of the unit trust or its other controlled entities; and

the unit trust meets the requirements of subsection (3) of this section at the time the investment is made, or will meet those requirements at the time the investment is proposed to be made.

Convertible notes

To the extent that an investment by an entity consists of the acquisition of a unit in a unit trust by converting a *convertible note issued by or on behalf of the trustee of the unit trust, the investment is, for the purpose of determining whether the unit trust meets the requirements of subsections (3) to (8), taken to have been made at the time when the entity last acquired the convertible note.

Subsection (16) applies whether or not the acquisition of the *convertible note was an eligible venture capital investment.

118-428 Additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs

(1) The additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs, for an investment in a company or in a unit trust, are:

if the entity making the investment does not, when the investment is made, own any other investment in the company or unit trust:

*shares in the company; or

units in the unit trust;

are not, when the investment is made, listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country; and

if the investment is pre-owned when the investment is made:

the entity already owns investments in the company or unit trust; or

the entity will, in connection with making the investment, make other investments in the company or unit trust, some or all of which are not pre-owned; and

if the investment is pre-owned when the investment is made—the sum of:

the value of the investment when the entity makes it; and

the total value of all the other pre-owned investments that the entity owns at that time;

does not exceed 20% of the partnership’s *committed capital.

Note: See subsection (3) for the value of investments.

(2) An investment is pre-owned if it was issued or allotted to an entity other than the entity that owns the investment. However, the investment is not pre-owned if it:

was issued:

to an underwriter or sub-underwriter of the issue of the investment; or

to a person for the purpose of being offered for sale; and

was still held by the underwriter, sub-underwriter or person immediately before being acquired by the entity that now owns the investment.

The value of an investment of an entity at a particular time for the purposes of this section is the value of the investment as shown in:

(a) the last audited accounts prepared for the entity for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 that relates to a period ending less than 18 months before that time; or

a statement, prepared in accordance with the accounting standards and audited by the entity’s auditor, showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before that time.

However, for the purposes of this section, the value of the investment at that time is the value provided for by section 118-450 if:

there are no such audited accounts; and

the entity does not have an auditor at that time.

118-430 Meaning of at risk

An *eligible venture capital investment is at risk if the entity that owns the investment had no *arrangement as to:

the maintenance of the value of the investment; or

the maintenance of any earnings or other return that might be made from owning the investment, including (if the investment relates to a unit trust) the maintenance of any conferrals of present entitlement to income or capital of the unit trust or to any distributions of income or capital of the unit trust.

118-432 Findings of substantially novel applications of technology

Public findings

Industry Innovation and Science Australia may, by legislative instrument, find that each activity within a specified class is a substantially novel application of one or more technologies.

Note: A substantially novel application of a technology could, for example, take the form of a substantially novel product or service.

Private findings

Industry Innovation and Science Australia may, on application by a company or unit trust, make a written decision:

finding that a specified activity is a substantially novel application of one or more technologies; or

refusing to make such a finding about a specified activity.

Note: A refusal to make a finding is reviewable (see Part 5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002).

Period for which a finding is in force

Subject to variation or revocation, a finding under subsection (1) or paragraph (2)(a) is in force for the period specified in the finding.

Note: For variation and revocation, see subsection 33(3) of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901.

Applications for private findings

An application for a finding under paragraph (2)(a) must be in the form approved by Industry Innovation and Science Australia.

Industry Innovation and Science Australia must notify the applicant in writing of any decision under subsection (2) about the application.

A failure to comply with subsection (5) does not affect the validity of a finding or decision.

118-435 Special rule relating to investment in foreign resident holding companies

A company that meets the requirements of subsections 118-425(6) and (7) is treated as also meeting the requirements of subsections 118-425(2), (3), (4), (4A) and (5) if:

it is a resident of:

Canada; or

France; or

Germany; or

Japan; or

the United Kingdom; or

the United States of America; or

any other foreign country prescribed by the regulations; and

it beneficially owns all the *shares in another company or all the units in a unit trust; and

it does not carry on any business other than to support the primary activity of the other company or unit trust; and

the other company meets the requirements of subsections 118-425(2) to (7), or the unit trust meets the requirements of subsections 118-427(3) to (8), as the case requires.

However, if:

the company is so treated as meeting those requirements; and

at any time within the period of 12 months after the day on which the first eligible venture capital investment was made in the company:

the other company ceases to be an Australian resident; or

the unit trust ceases to carry on business in Australia;

as the case requires;

then:

any eligible venture capital investments already made in the company or unit trust cease to be eligible venture capital investments; and

any further investments made in the company or unit trust are not eligible venture capital investments.

118-440 Meaning of permitted entity value

(1) An entity exceeds the permitted entity value immediately before a proposed investment is made in the entity if, at that time, the sum of the following exceeds the amount provided for under subsection (9):

the total value of the entity’s assets;

the total value of the assets of any other entity *connected with the entity to the extent that they are not reflected in the value of any assets referred to in paragraph (a).

Note: The time the entity makes the investment is, for a share acquired by converting a convertible note or convertible preference share or for a unit in a unit trust acquired by converting a convertible note, the time when the entity last acquired the convertible note or convertible preference share: see subsections 118-425(15) and 118-427(16).

The total value of the assets of an entity is the total value of its assets (both current and non-current) as shown in:

(a) the last audited accounts prepared for the entity for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 that relates to a period ending less than 18 months before that time; or

if there are no such audited accounts—a statement, prepared in accordance with the accounting standards and audited by the entity’s auditor, showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before that time.

However, for the purposes of this section, the total value of its assets at that time is the sum of the values of those assets provided for by section 118-450 if:

there are no such audited accounts; and

the entity does not have an auditor at that time; and

the entity is not required under subsection 118-425(5) or 118-427(6) to have an auditor at that time.

(3) In applying paragraphs (1)(b), (5)(b) and (7)(c), ignore the total value of the assets of an entity that is *connected with the entity first-mentioned in subsection (1) (the target entity) either immediately before or immediately after the investment referred to in that subsection if it is so connected only because of *eligible venture capital investments made in both of those entities by the same *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor.

In applying paragraphs (1)(b), (5)(b) and (7)(c), ignore the total value of the assets of an entity that, immediately after the investment is made, is not *connected with the target entity.

(5) Despite the previous provisions of this section, the target entity exceeds the permitted entity value immediately before the time (the investment time) when the *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor made the investment in the target entity if:

(a) the target entity was *connected with an entity (the linked entity) in which the VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or eligible venture capital investor had made an *eligible venture capital investment at some time in the period of 12 months before the investment time; and

the sum of the total value of the assets of the target entity and of any entity *connected with the target entity (at the investment time) and the linked entity and of any entity connected with the linked entity (at the time that the entity making the investment made its investment in the linked entity) exceeds the amount provided for under subsection (9).

The Commissioner may determine that subsection (5) does not apply if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

the activities of the target entity are not the same as, not an integral part of and not a necessary support for the activities of the linked entity; and

the making of the investment in the target entity is not part of a *scheme to acquire interests in all or a substantial part of a group of companies that are *connected with each other.

(7) Despite the previous provisions of this section, the target entity exceeds the permitted entity value immediately before the investment time if:

(a) the target entity was *connected with an entity (also the linked entity) in which the *VCLP, *ESVCLP, *AFOF or *eligible venture capital investor had made an *eligible venture capital investment more than 12 months before the investment time; and

the activities of the target entity are the same as, are an integral part of or are a necessary support for the activities of the linked entity; and

the sum of the total value of the assets of the target entity and of any entity *connected with the target entity (at the investment time) and the linked entity and of any entity connected with the linked entity (at the time that the entity making the investment made its investment in the linked entity) exceeds the amount provided for under subsection (9).

In applying paragraphs (5)(b) and (7)(c), ignore the total value of the assets of an entity that is *connected with the linked entity either immediately before or immediately after the investment in the linked entity if it is so connected only because of *eligible venture capital investments made in both of those entities by the same VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or eligible venture capital investor.

The amount in relation to a proposed investment is:

if an ESVCLP is to make the proposed investment—$50 million; or

in any other case—$250 million.

118-445 Meaning of committed capital

(1) A partner’s committed capital in a partnership is the sum of the amounts that the partner may, under the partnership agreement establishing the partnership, become obliged to contribute to the partnership.

It does not matter whether:

the partner contributes all of those amounts; or

any amounts contributed are subsequently returned to the partner; or

the contributions give rise to *equity interests or *debt interests in the partnership, or both.

(3) A partnership’s committed capital is the sum of the committed capital of all of the partnership’s partners.

118-450 Values of assets and investments of entities without auditors

If, under a provision of this Subdivision, the value of an asset or investment at a particular time is the value provided for by this section, that value is:

if paragraph (b) does not apply—its *market value at that time; or

the amount stated to be its current market value, at that time or a time in the 12 months preceding that time, in a statutory declaration by:

if the entity is a company—the directors of the company; or

if the entity is a unit trust—the trustees of the unit trust.

Paragraph (1)(b) does not apply if the Commissioner reasonably believes that the amount stated in the statutory declaration to be the *market value of the asset or investment at the relevant time is inaccurate.

118-455 Impact Assessment of this Subdivision

(1) As soon as practicable after 24 months after the Treasury Laws Amendment (Tax Integrity and Other Measures) Act 2018 receives the Royal Assent, the Minister must cause an impact assessment of the operation of this Subdivision and other related tax concessions to be conducted.

The impact assessment must:

examine the operation of the tax concession regime for:

investments made through a VCLP, ESVCLP or AFOF; and

(ii) investments made directly by foreign residents registered under Part 3 of the Venture Capital Act 2002; and

be conducted by the Department and Industry Innovation and Science Australia; and

make provision for public consultation.

(3) For the purposes of conducting the impact assessment, the reference to Industry Innovation and Science Australia in item 6 of the table in subsection 355-65(4) of Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 is taken to include the Secretary of the Department.

The Minister must cause a written report about the impact assessment to be prepared.

The Minister must cause a copy of the report to be tabled in each House of the Parliament within 15 sitting days of that House after the day on which the report is given to the Minister.

Subdivision 118-G — Venture capital: investment by superannuation funds for foreign residents

Guide to Subdivision 118-G

118-500 What this Subdivision is about

A foreign resident tax exempt pension fund that invests in venture capital equity in an Australian company or fixed trust (a resident investment vehicle) can disregard a capital gain or capital loss it makes from a CGT event that happens to that equity if:

(a) the entity is registered under the Pooled Development Funds Act 1992; and

the entity owned the equity for at least 12 months.

Table of sections

118-505 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital

118-510 Meaning of resident investment vehicle

118-515 Meaning of venture capital entity

118-520 Meaning of superannuation fund for foreign residents

118-525 Meaning of venture capital equity

118-505 Exemption for certain foreign venture capital

A *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded if it is made from a CGT event happening in relation to a CGT asset that is venture capital equity where the asset:

was *acquired by a venture capital entity; and

at the time of the CGT event:

was owned by that entity; and

had been owned by that entity for at least 12 months.

(2) The *venture capital entity must be registered under Part 7A of the Pooled Development Funds Act 1992 at the time of the *CGT event.

118-510 Meaning of resident investment vehicle

(1) A resident investment vehicle is a company that is an Australian resident, or a trust that is a *resident trust for CGT purposes, if:

the sum of:

the total value of the assets of the company or trust, and

the total value of the assets of any company or trust *connected with the first company or trust; and

the amount of the investment proposed to be made in venture capital equity in the company or trust by the relevant venture capital entity;

is not more than $50,000,000 just before the time (the acquisition time) when the relevant venture capital entity acquires venture capital equity in the company or trust; and

the primary activity of the company or trust is not, at any time, property development or land ownership.

(2) However, a trust is not a resident investment vehicle unless entities have *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the trust.

The total value of the assets of a company or trust is the total value of its assets (both current and non-current) as shown in:

(a) the last audited accounts prepared for the company or trust for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 that relates to a period ending less than 18 months before the acquisition time; or

if there are no such audited accounts—a statement audited by the company’s or trust’s auditor showing that value as at a time no longer than 12 months before the acquisition time.

118-515 Meaning of venture capital entity

(1) An entity (except a partner in a partnership) is a venture capital entity if:

it is a foreign resident; and

it is a superannuation fund for foreign residents; and

it is not a prescribed dual resident; and

it is a resident of:

Canada; or

France; or

Germany; or

Japan; or

the United Kingdom; or

the United States of America; or

some other foreign country prescribed by the regulations; and

its income is exempt, or effectively exempt, from taxation in its country of residence.

(2) A partner in a partnership is a venture capital entity if:

all of the partners in it are entities that are *venture capital entities under subsection (1); or

the partnership is a *limited partnership and:

all of the partners in it (except its general partner or managing partner) are venture capital entities under subsection (1); and

its general partner or managing partner has interests in less than 10% of the total value of the assets of the partnership.

118-520 Meaning of superannuation fund for foreign residents

(1) A fund is a superannuation fund for foreign residents at a time if:

at that time, it is:

an indefinitely continuing fund; and

a provident, benefit, superannuation or retirement fund; and

it was established in a foreign country; and

it was established, and is maintained at that time, only to provide benefits for individuals who are not Australian residents; and

at that time, its central management and control is carried on outside Australia by entities none of whom is an Australian resident.

(2) However, a fund is not a superannuation fund for foreign residents if:

an amount paid to the fund or set aside for the fund has been or can be deducted under this Act; or

a tax offset has been allowed or is allowable for such an amount.

118-525 Meaning of venture capital equity

(1) A *CGT asset is venture capital equity for a *venture capital entity if it is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust where:

the company or trust is a resident investment vehicle; and

the share or interest was issued or allotted to the entity by the company or trust; and

the entity was at risk in owning the share or interest in that it had no arrangement (either before or after the share or interest was issued or allotted) as to:

the maintenance of the value of the share or interest; or

any earnings or other return that might be made from owning it; or

protection from commercial loss because of owning it.

Example: A company borrows money to purchase some shares. The terms of the loan include a term that, if the value of the shares falls below the amount of the loan, the company can repay the loan by transferring the shares to the lender.

The company’s ownership of the shares is not at risk, because there is no possibility that it can lose money under the transaction.

(2) However, *shares or interests in the *resident investment vehicle issued or allotted to a *venture capital entity are not venture capital equity for the entity if:

one or more of these events happens:

a share or interest in the resident investment vehicle that was *acquired by some other entity before that issue or allotment is cancelled or redeemed; or

there is a return of some of the capital of the resident investment vehicle that was acquired before that issue or allotment; or

value is shifted out of a share or interest in that vehicle that was acquired before that issue or allotment; and

it is reasonable to conclude that the happening of the event referred to in paragraph (a) is connected to that issue or allotment, or to some arrangement between the entities concerned.

Example: The capital of an Australian company is 100,000 shares, with a market value of $1 per share. The shares have full voting and dividend rights.

The Australian company issues another 100,000 shares to a foreign company. The new shares are issued at one cent each, but have very limited voting and dividend rights.

The Australian company then changes the rights attaching to its shares so that the new shares have full voting and dividend rights, and the original shares have none.

Value has been shifted out of the original shares, effectively converting “old equity” to “new equity”.

In deciding whether it is reasonable to reach the conclusion referred to in paragraph (2)(b), these matters are relevant:

whether the amount of the decrease in the *net value of the resident investment vehicle because of the happening of the event referred to in paragraph (2)(a) is the same as, or is calculated by reference to, the value of the issue or allotment of *shares or interests to the venture capital entity; and

the time lapse between the happening of that event and that issue or allotment.

Subdivision 118-H — Demutualisation of Tower Corporation

118-550 Demutualisation of Tower Corporation

This section applies if, just before the mutual entity known in New Zealand as Tower Corporation ceased to be a mutual entity, you had membership rights in that entity.

Note: Tower Corporation demutualised on 1 October 1999.

No capital gain or capital loss from end of membership rights

Disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss that resulted from any of your membership rights in Tower Corporation ceasing to exist when that entity ceased to be a mutual entity.

Note: Subsection (2) applies to you even if, because you could not be located at the time of demutualisation, you were not immediately issued with shares in the demutualised entity in substitution for your old membership rights, and rights to shares were instead put aside in a trust.

Cost base of replacement assets

The *cost base and the *reduced cost base of any *shares or other *CGT assets that you *acquire in substitution for the membership rights that have ceased to exist do not include any amounts that you paid in acquiring or maintaining those old rights.

Subdivision 118-I — Look-through earnout rights

Table of sections

118-560 Object

118-565 Look-through earnout rights

118-570 Extra ways a CGT asset can be an active asset

118-575 Creating and ending look-through earnout rights

118-580 Temporarily disregard capital losses affected by look-through earnout rights

118-560 Object

This Subdivision and its related provisions set out special rules for *look-through earnout rights. The object of these rules is to avoid unnecessary compliance costs and disadvantageous tax outcomes when entities involved in the sale of a business:

cannot agree on the current value of some or all of the business’ assets due to uncertainty about the future economic performance of the business; and

resolve this uncertainty by agreeing to potentially provide future additional consideration linked to this performance.

These rules achieve this object by:

disregarding any *capital gain or *capital loss relating to the creation of a look-through earnout right; and

for the acquirer of the business—treating any *financial benefits provided (or received) under the right as forming part of (or reducing) the cost base or reduced cost base of the business assets; and

for the seller of the business—treating any financial benefits received (or provided) under the right as increasing (or reducing) the capital proceeds for the business assets.

Note: Sections 112-36 and 116-120 are 2 of the more important related provisions that set out these rules.

118-565 Look-through earnout rights

Look-through earnout rights—main case

(1) A look-through earnout right is a right for which the following conditions are met:

the right is a right to future *financial benefits that are not reasonably ascertainable at the time the right is created;

the right is created under an arrangement that involves the *disposal of a CGT asset;

the disposal causes CGT event A1 to happen;

just before the CGT event, the CGT asset was an active asset of the entity who disposed of the asset;

Note: For extra ways to be an active asset, see section 118-570.

all of the financial benefits that can be provided under the right are to be provided over a period ending no later than 5 years after the end of the income year in which the CGT event happens;

those financial benefits are contingent on the economic performance of:

the CGT asset; or

a business for which it is reasonably expected that the CGT asset will be an active asset for the period to which those financial benefits relate;

the value of those financial benefits reasonably relates to that economic performance;

the parties to the arrangement deal with each other at *arm’s length in making the arrangement.

Matters affecting the 5-year maximum period

The condition in paragraph (1)(e) is not met, and is treated as never having been met, for the right if:

the arrangement includes an option to extend or renew the arrangement; or

the parties to the arrangement vary the arrangement; or

those parties enter into another arrangement over the CGT asset or a business for which it is reasonably expected that the CGT asset will be an active asset;

so that a party could, or does, provide *financial benefits under the right (or one or more equivalent rights) over a total period ending later than 5 years after the end of the income year in which the CGT event happens.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(e) or subsection (2), in working out the period over which *financial benefits under a right can be provided, disregard any part of an arrangement that allows for an entity to defer providing such a financial benefit if:

the deferral is contingent on an event happening that is beyond the control of the parties to the arrangement; and

the deferral cannot change the amount of any financial benefit provided, or to be provided, under the right; and

when the arrangement is entered into, the contingent event is not reasonably expected to happen.

Look-through earnout rights—rights for ending other rights

(4) A look-through earnout right is a right to receive one or more future *financial benefits that:

are for ending a right to which subsection (1) applies; and

are certain.

Note: This subsection will not apply if the old right ends as described in subsection (2), as subsection (2) causes the old right to be treated as if it had never been a right to which subsection (1) applies.

118-570 Extra ways a CGT asset can be an active asset

For the purposes of this Subdivision, treat a CGT asset as if it were an active asset of an entity at a particular time, if:

the entity owns it at that time; and

it is either a *share in a company, or an interest in a trust; and

at that time, the entity:

is a CGT concession stakeholder of the company or trust; or

if the entity is not an individual—has a small business participation percentage in the company or trust of at least 20%; and

at that time, the company or trust:

is carrying on a business, and has been carrying on a business since the start of the most recent income year ending before that time; and

is not a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

the assessable income of the company or trust for that most recent income year was greater than nil, and at least 80% of that assessable income was:

from the carrying on of one or more businesses; but

not *derived (directly or indirectly) from an asset of a kind to which paragraph 152-40(4)(d) or (e) applies.

Note: Paragraphs 152-40(4)(d) and (e) refer to financial instruments and assets used to derive interest, annuities, rent, royalties or foreign exchange gains.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, treat a CGT asset as if it were an active asset of an entity at a particular time, if subsection 152-40(3) would have been satisfied for the asset at that time had paragraph 152-40(3)(a) only required the asset to be:

a *share in a company; or

an interest in a trust.

Note: This enables shares and interests in foreign entities to be active assets for the purposes of this Subdivision.

Subsections (1) and (2) do not limit section 152-40 (about active assets).

118-575 Creating and ending look-through earnout rights

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make because:

CGT event C2 happens in relation to a look-through earnout right you receive; or

CGT event D1 happens when you create a look-through earnout right in another entity.

118-580 Temporarily disregard capital losses affected by look-through earnout rights

Temporarily disregard a portion of a *capital loss you make from *disposing of a CGT asset if the capital loss could be reduced by you receiving one or more *financial benefits under a look-through earnout right relating to the CGT asset and the disposal.

The portion of the *capital loss that is temporarily disregarded is:

if those *financial benefits can never exceed a maximum amount that is certain—so much of the capital loss as is equal to that maximum amount; or

otherwise—all of the capital loss.

Note: When you receive a financial benefit under the look-through earnout right:

you cease to disregard under this section a portion of your loss related to the amount of that financial benefit; and

your capital proceeds for the disposal increase (see paragraph 116-120(1)(b)), causing a reduction in the amount of your loss.

Division 119 — Minimum rate of tax on capital gains

Guide to Division 119

119-1 What this Division is about

If you are an individual who is an Australian resident, you may have to pay extra income tax relating to certain capital gains you make during an income year to ensure, before applying offsets, a rate of tax of 30% on so much of those gains as remains after applying section 119-5.

This Division sets out how to work out when extra income tax is payable and matters relating to the amount of that tax.

The requirement to pay extra income tax does not apply if you received certain payments during the income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

119-5 Your minimum tax capital gain for an income year

119-10 When extra income tax is payable on your minimum tax capital gain

119-15 Exception for recipients of certain payments

Operative provisions

119-5 Your minimum tax capital gain for an income year

(1) Your minimum tax capital gain (if any) for an income year is worked out as follows:

first, total the amounts of *capital gains (if any) covered by subsection (2) that are remaining after applying step 6 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1);

next, reduce the result of paragraph (a) (but not below nil) by the total amount (if any) you are entitled to deduct, for the income year, under any of the following:

Division 30 (about gifts or contributions);

Division 31 (about conservation covenants).

This subsection covers a *capital gain you made during the income year, including because of section 115-215 (about attribution of trust gains to beneficiaries), if:

the capital gain is:

a residential capital gain; or

a non-residential capital gain; and

section 115-102 (about new residential dwellings) does not apply to the capital gain; and

section 115-125 (about affordable housing) does not apply to the capital gain.

119-10 When extra income tax is payable on your minimum tax capital gain

You must pay extra income tax on your minimum tax capital gain for an income year if:

you are an individual; and

you are an Australian resident at any time during the income year; and

you have a minimum tax gap amount for the income year.

Note: Section 12AA of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 sets the rate at which you must pay extra income tax on your minimum tax capital gain. It does so in such a way that the extra income tax you must pay equals the minimum tax gap amount.

(2) Use this method statement to work out whether you have a minimum tax gap amount for the income year:

Method statement

Step 1. Multiply your minimum tax capital gain for the income year by 30%.

Step 2. Work out your basic income tax liability for the income year under step 2 of the method statement in subsection 4-10(3), disregarding this Division.

Step 3. Work out what the amount at step 2 of this method statement would be if your taxable income for the income year were reduced (but not below nil) by the amount of your minimum tax capital gain.

Step 4. Subtract the amount at step 3 from the amount at step 2.

Step 5. Subtract the amount at step 4 from the amount at step 1.

Step 6. Round the result down to the nearest whole dollar if the result is not already a number of whole dollars.

Step 7. If the result (as rounded) is more than nil, you have a minimum tax gap amount for the income year equal to that amount.

119-15 Exception for recipients of certain payments

Section 119-10 does not apply to you if you receive, at any time during the income year, a payment covered by any of subsections (2) to (5).

Social Security Act 1991 payments

(2) This subsection covers the following payments under the Social Security Act 1991:

an age pension under Part 2.2 of that Act;

an austudy payment under Part 2.11A of that Act;

a carer payment under Part 2.5 of that Act;

a disability support pension under Part 2.3 of that Act;

a double orphan pension under Part 2.20 of that Act;

a jobseeker payment under Part 2.12 of that Act;

parenting payment under Part 2.10 of that Act;

special benefit under Part 2.15 of that Act;

youth allowance under Part 2.11 of that Act.

Other social support payments

This subsection covers the following payments:

(a) family tax benefit under the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999;

(b) a stillborn baby payment under the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) Act 1999;

(c) farm household allowance under Part 2 of the Farm Household Support Act 2014;

(d) parental leave pay under the Paid Parental Leave Act 2010;

a payment under the scheme known as the ABSTUDY scheme that includes an amount identified as living allowance.

Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986 payments

(4) This subsection covers the following payments under the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986:

an age service pension under Division 3 of Part III of that Act;

a carer service pension under former Division 6 of Part III of that Act, as saved by clause 8 of Schedule 5 to that Act;

income support supplement under Part IIIA of that Act;

an invalidity service pension under Division 4 of Part III of that Act;

a partner service pension under Division 5 of Part III of that Act;

a veteran payment under section 45SB of that Act;

a pension under Part II or IV of that Act at a rate determined under or by reference to subsection 30(1) of that Act;

a pension under Part II or IV of that Act at a rate determined under or by reference to paragraph 30(2)(a) or (b) of that Act;

a pension under Part II or IV of that Act at a rate applicable under section 23, 24 or 25 of that Act.

Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004 payments

(5) This subsection covers the following payments under the Military Rehabilitation and Compensation Act 2004:

a Special Rate Disability Pension under Part 6 of Chapter 4 of that Act;

the weekly amount mentioned in paragraph 234(1)(b) of that Act, including a reduced weekly amount because of a choice under section 236 of that Act;

a lump sum mentioned in subsection 236(5) of that Act.

Division 121 — Record keeping

Guide to Division 121

121-10 What this Division is about

You must keep records of matters that affect the capital gains and losses you make. You must retain them for 5 years after the last relevant CGT event.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

121-20 What records you must keep

121-25 How long you must retain the records

121-30 Exceptions

121-35 Asset register entries

Operative provisions

121-20 What records you must keep

You must keep records of every act, transaction, event or circumstance that can reasonably be expected to be relevant to working out whether you have made a *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event. (It does not matter whether the CGT event has already happened or may happen in the future.)

Note 1: There are exceptions: see section 121-30.

Example 1: You dispose of a CGT asset. The records that are relevant to working out your capital gain or loss are records of:

• the date you acquired the asset;

• the date you disposed of it;

• each element of its cost base and reduced cost base and the effect of indexation on those elements;

• what you sold it for (the capital proceeds).

• the status of the 2 companies as members of the group;

• which company is the ultimate holding company in the group;

• the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of company B just before the roll-over (because these become company A’s cost base and reduced cost base).

• the essential elements of the relevant scheme;

• the date when the share value shift occurred;

• the amounts of the decreases and increases in the market values of all shares involved in the scheme;

• if shares are issued at a discount under the scheme, the amount of the discount;

• the cost bases and market values of the shares that decreased in value.

Example 2: Company A disposes of a CGT asset it acquired from company B (a member of the same wholly-owned group and a foreign resident) where company B obtained a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B. In addition to the records mentioned in example 1, company A needs records showing:

Example 3: CGT event G2 (about shifts in share values) happens involving company X and Greg (a controller (for CGT purposes) of company X). Z Nominees Pty Ltd (an associate of Greg’s) suffers a material decrease in the value of its shares in company X as a result of the shift. Z Nominees needs records showing:

Note 2: There is an administrative penalty if you do not keep records as required by this Division: see section 288-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

(2) The records must be in English, or be readily accessible and convertible into English. They must show what is described in this section. (They show something if they include whatever material is necessary for that thing to be easily identified or worked out.)

They must show the nature of the act, transaction, event or circumstance, the day when it happened or arose and:

in the case of an act—who did it; and

in the case of a transaction—who were the parties to it.

They must show details (including relevant amounts) of how the act, transaction, event or circumstance is relevant (or can reasonably be expected to be relevant) to working out whether you have made a *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event.

If the necessary records of an act, transaction, event or circumstance do not already exist, you must reconstruct them or have someone else reconstruct them.

Example: Your capital gain or capital loss from a CGT event may depend on the market value of property at a particular time. To record that market value properly, you may need to get a valuation done.

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

Note: See section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1914 for the current value of a penalty unit.

An offence under this section is an offence of strict liability.

Note: For strict liability, see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code.

121-25 How long you must retain the records

You must retain records that section 121-20 requires you to keep.

You must retain them until the end of 5 years after it becomes certain that no CGT event (or no further CGT event) can happen such that the records could reasonably be expected to be relevant to working out whether you have made a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event.

An offence under this section is an offence of strict liability.

Note: For strict liability, see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code.

(3) This section has effect despite subsection 262A(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which requires records to be retained for a different period).

However, it is not necessary to retain records:

if the Commissioner notifies you that you do not need to retain them; or

for a company that has finally ceased to exist.

Note 1: There are special record keeping rules where there has been a roll-over for a merger between superannuation funds under former section 160ZZPI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936: see section 121-25 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

Note 2: See section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1914 for the current value of a penalty unit.

121-30 Exceptions

You do not need to keep records under section 121-20 if:

for each CGT event (if any) that has happened such that the records are relevant (or could reasonably be expected to be relevant) to working out whether you have made a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event; and

for each CGT event that may happen in the future such that the records could reasonably be expected to be relevant to working out whether you might make a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event;

any capital gain or capital loss you made (or might make) from it is to be (or would be) disregarded, except because of a roll-over.

However, the exceptions in this section do not apply to a CGT event as a result of which a *capital gain or *capital loss is disregarded under section 855-40 (about capital gains and losses of foreign residents through *fixed trusts).

121-35 Asset register entries

You satisfy a requirement under this Division to retain records for a period if you:

retain for that period an entry in a register for the records that satisfies the requirements in subsection (2), or a combination of the records and such an entry for them, containing all the information required to be contained in the records; and

retain those of the records that contain the information entered in the register for at least 5 years after the requirement in paragraph (2)(b) is satisfied.

The requirements are:

you must make an entry in a register, in English, setting out some or all of the information contained in the records; and

another entity who is a registered tax agent or some other person approved by the Commissioner must certify in the register that the information entered is information from those records.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 3—Specialist liability rules 1

Part 3-3—Capital gains and losses: special topics 1

Division 122—Roll-over for the disposal of assets to, or the creation of assets in, a wholly-owned company 1

Guide to Division 122 1

122-1 What this Division is about 1

Subdivision 122-A—Disposal or creation of assets by an individual or trustee to a wholly-owned company 2

Guide to Subdivision 122-A 2

122-5 What this Subdivision is about 2

When is a roll-over available 3

122-15 Disposal or creation of assets—wholly-owned company 3

122-20 What you receive for the trigger event 3

122-25 Other requirements to be satisfied 4

122-35 What if the company undertakes to discharge a liability (disposal case) 7

122-37 Rules for working out what a liability in respect of an asset is 8

Replacement-asset roll-over if you dispose of a CGT asset 9

122-40 Disposal of a CGT asset 9

Replacement-asset roll-over if you dispose of all the assets of a business 9

122-45 Disposal of all the assets of a business 9

122-50 All assets acquired on or after 20 September 1985 10

122-55 All assets acquired before 20 September 1985 11

122-60 Assets acquired before and after 20 September 1985 12

Replacement-asset roll-over for a creation case 13

122-65 Creation of asset 13

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (disposal case) 13

122-70 Consequences for the company (disposal case) 13

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (creation case) 14

122-75 Consequences for the company (creation case) 14

Subdivision 122-B—Disposal or creation of assets by partners to a wholly-owned company 15

Guide to Subdivision 122-B 15

122-120 What this Subdivision is about 15

When is a roll-over available 16

122-125 Disposal or creation of assets—wholly-owned company 16

122-130 What the partners receive for the trigger event 17

122-135 Other requirements to be satisfied 17

122-140 What if the company undertakes to discharge a liability (disposal case) 19

122-145 Rules for working out what a liability in respect of an interest in an asset is 21

Replacement-asset roll-over if partners dispose of a CGT asset 22

122-150 Capital gain or loss disregarded 22

122-155 Disposal of post-CGT or pre-CGT interests 22

122-160 Disposal of both post-CGT and pre-CGT interests 22

Replacement-asset roll-over if the partners dispose of all the assets of a business 23

122-170 Capital gain or loss disregarded 23

122-175 Other consequences 24

122-180 All interests acquired on or after 20 September 1985 24

122-185 All interests acquired before 20 September 1985 25

122-190 Interests acquired before and after 20 September 1985 26

Replacement-asset roll-over for a creation case 27

122-195 Creation of asset 27

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (disposal case) 27

122-200 Consequences for the company (disposal case) 27

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (creation case) 29

122-205 Consequences for the company (creation case) 29

Division 124—Replacement-asset roll-overs 30

Guide to Division 124 31

124-1 What this Division is about 31

124-5 How to find your way around this Division 31

Subdivision 124-A—General rules 31

124-10 Your ownership of one CGT asset ends 32

124-15 Your ownership of more than one CGT asset ends 33

124-20 Share and interest sale facilities 35

Subdivision 124-B—Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed 37

When a roll-over is available 37

124-70 Events giving rise to a roll-over 37

124-75 Other requirements if you receive money 39

124-80 Other requirements if you receive an asset 40

The consequences of a roll-over being available 41

124-85 Consequences for receiving money 41

124-90 Consequences for receiving an asset 43

124-95 You receive both money and an asset 44

Subdivision 124-C—Statutory licences 47

124-140 New statutory licences 47

124-145 Rollover consequences—capital gain or loss disregarded 48

124-150 Rollover consequences—partial roll-over 48

124-155 Roll-over consequences—all original licences were post-CGT 49

124-160 Roll-over consequences—all original licences were pre-CGT 50

124-165 Roll-over consequences—some original licences were pre-CGT, others were post-CGT 50

Subdivision 124-D—Strata title conversion 51

124-190 Strata title conversion 51

Subdivision 124-E—Exchange of shares or units 51

124-240 Exchange of shares in the same company 52

124-245 Exchange of units in the same unit trust 52

Subdivision 124-F—Exchange of rights or options 53

124-295 Exchange of rights or option to acquire shares in a company 53

124-300 Exchange of rights or option to acquire units in a unit trust 54

Subdivision 124-I—Change of incorporation 56

Guide to Subdivision 124-I 56

124-510 What this Subdivision is about 56

Object of this Subdivision 56

124-515 Object of this Subdivision 56

Change of incorporation without change of entity 57

124-520 Change of incorporation without change of entity 57

Old corporation wound up 59

124-525 Old corporation wound up 59

Special consequences of some roll-overs 61

124-530 Shares in company replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body 61

124-535 Rights as member of Indigenous corporation replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body 62

Subdivision 124-J—Crown leases 62

Guide to Subdivision 124-J 62

124-570 What this Subdivision is about 62

Operative provisions 63

124-575 Extension or renewal of Crown lease 63

124-580 Meaning of Crown lease 64

124-585 Original right differs in area from new right 64

124-590 Part of original right excised 64

124-595 Treating parts of new right as separate assets 65

124-600 What is the roll-over? 65

124-605 Change of lessor 66

Subdivision 124-K—Depreciating assets 67

124-655 Roll-over for depreciating assets 67

124-660 Right granted to associate 68

Subdivision 124-L—Prospecting and mining entitlements 68

Guide to Subdivision 124-L 68

124-700 What this Subdivision is about 68

Operative provisions 68

124-705 Extension or renewal of prospecting or mining entitlement 68

124-710 Meaning of prospecting entitlement and mining entitlement 69

124-715 Original entitlement differs in area from new entitlement 70

124-720 Part of original entitlement excised 70

124-725 Treating parts of new entitlement as separate assets 71

124-730 What is the roll-over? 71

Subdivision 124-M—Scrip for scrip roll-over 72

Guide to Subdivision 124-M 72

124-775 What this Subdivision is about 72

Operative provisions 73

124-780 Replacement of shares 73

124-781 Replacement of trust interests 77

124-782 Transfer or allocation of cost base of shares acquired by acquiring entity etc. 80

124-783 Meaning of significant stakeholder, common stakeholder, significant stake and common stake 82

124-783A Rights that affect stakes 84

124-784 Cost base of equity or debt given within acquiring group 86

124-784A When arrangement is a restructure 86

124-784B What is the cost base and reduced cost base when arrangement is a restructure? 89

124-784C Cost base of equity or debt given within acquiring group 93

124-785 What is the roll-over? 93

124-790 Partial roll-over 94

124-795 Exceptions 95

124-800 Interest received for pre-CGT interest 95

124-810 Certain companies and trusts not regarded as having 300 members or beneficiaries 96

Subdivision 124-N—Disposal of assets by a trust to a company 98

Guide to Subdivision 124-N 98

124-850 What this Subdivision is about 98

Operative provisions 98

124-855 What this Subdivision deals with 98

124-860 Requirements for roll-over 99

124-865 Entities both choose the roll-over 101

124-870 Roll-over for owner of units or interests in a trust 101

124-875 Effect on the transferor and transferee 102

Subdivision 124-P—Exchange of a membership interest in an MDO for a membership interest in another MDO 103

Guide to Subdivision 124-P 103

124-975 What this Subdivision is about 103

Operative provisions 104

124-980 Exchange of membership interests in an MDO 104

124-985 What the roll-over is for post-CGT interests 105

124-990 Partial roll-over 105

124-995 Pre-CGT interests 106

Subdivision 124-Q—Exchange of stapled ownership interests for ownership interests in a unit trust 106

Guide to Subdivision 124-Q 106

124-1040 What this Subdivision is about 106

Operative provisions 107

124-1045 Exchange of stapled securities 107

124-1050 Conditions 108

124-1055 Consequences of the roll-over for exchanging members 109

124-1060 Consequences of the roll-over for interposed trust 110

Subdivision 124-R—Water entitlements 112

Guide to Subdivision 124-R 112

124-1100 What this Subdivision is about 112

Replacement case 113

124-1105 Replacement water entitlements roll-over 113

124-1110 Roll-over consequences—capital gain or loss disregarded 115

124-1115 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over 115

124-1120 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements post-CGT 116

124-1125 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements pre-CGT 116

124-1130 Roll-over consequences—some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT 117

Reduction case 118

124-1135 Reduction in water entitlements roll-over 118

124-1140 Roll-over consequences—capital gain or loss disregarded 118

124-1145 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements post-CGT 118

124-1150 Roll-over consequences—some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT 119

Variation to CGT asset case 120

124-1155 Roll-over for variation to CGT asset 120

124-1160 Roll-over consequences 120

124-1165 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over 120

Subdivision 124-S—Interest realignment arrangements 121

Guide to Subdivision 124-S 121

124-1220 What this Subdivision is about 121

Operative provisions 121

124-1225 Disposals of interests under interest realignment arrangements 121

124-1230 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over 122

124-1235 Roll-over consequences—all original interests were post-CGT and pre-UCA 123

124-1240 Roll-over consequences—all original interests were pre-CGT 123

124-1245 Roll-over consequences—original interests were of mixed CGT status, all were pre-UCA 124

124-1250 Roll-over consequences—some original interests were pre-UCA 125

Division 125—Demerger relief 127

Guide to Division 125 127

125-1 What this Division is about 127

Subdivision 125-A—Object of this Division 128

125-5 Object of this Division 128

Subdivision 125-B—Consequences for owners of interests 128

Guide to Subdivision 125-B 128

125-50 Guide to Subdivision 125-B 128

Operative provisions 129

125-55 When a roll-over is available for a demerger 129

125-60 Meaning of ownership interest and related terms 130

125-65 Meanings of demerger group, head entity and demerger subsidiary 131

125-70 Meanings of demerger, demerged entity and demerging entity 132

125-75 Exceptions to subsection 125-70(2) 136

125-80 What is the roll-over? 139

125-85 Cost base adjustments where CGT event happens but no roll-over chosen 141

125-90 Cost base adjustments where no CGT event 142

125-95 No other cost base adjustment after demerger 142

125-100 No further demerger relief in some cases 142

Subdivision 125-C—Consequences for members of demerger group 143

Guide to Subdivision 125-C 143

125-150 Guide to Subdivision 125-C 143

Operative provisions 143

125-155 Certain capital gains or losses disregarded for demerging entity 143

125-160 No CGT event J1 144

125-165 Adjusted capital loss for value shift under a demerger 144

125-170 Reduced cost base reduction if demerger asset subject to roll-over 144

Subdivision 125-D—Public trading trusts 145

Guide to Subdivision 125-D 145

125-225 Guide to Subdivision 125-D 145

Operative provisions 145

125-230 Application of Division to public trading trusts 145

Subdivision 125-E—Miscellaneous 145

125-235 Share and interest sale facilities 146

Division 126—Same-asset roll-overs 148

Guide to Division 126 148

126-1 What this Division is about 148

Subdivision 126-A—Marriage or relationship breakdowns 148

126-5 CGT event involving spouses 149

126-15 CGT event involving company or trustee 151

126-20 Subsequent CGT event happening to roll-over asset where transferor was a CFC or a non-resident trust 154

126-25 Conditions for the purposes of subsections 126-5(3A) and 126-15(5) 155

Subdivision 126-B—Companies in the same wholly-owned group 155

Guide to Subdivision 126-B 155

126-40 What this Subdivision is about 155

Operative provisions 156

126-45 Roll-over for members of wholly-owned group 156

126-50 Requirements for roll-over 156

126-55 When there is a roll-over 159

126-60 Consequences of roll-over 160

126-75 Originating company is a CFC 161

126-85 Effect of roll-over on certain liquidations 162

Subdivision 126-C—Changes to trust deeds 164

Guide to Subdivision 126-C 164

126-125 What this Subdivision is about 164

126-130 Changes to trust deeds 164

126-135 Consequences of roll-over 165

Subdivision 126-D—Small superannuation funds 166

126-140 CGT event involving small superannuation funds 166

Subdivision 126-E—Entitlement to shares after demutualisation and scrip for scrip roll-over 170

Guide to Subdivision 126-E 170

126-185 What this Subdivision is about 170

Operative provisions 170

126-190 When there is a roll-over 170

126-195 Consequences of roll-over 171

Subdivision 126-G—Transfer of assets between certain trusts 172

Guide to Subdivision 126-G 172

126-215 What this Subdivision is about 172

Operative provisions 172

126-220 Object of this Subdivision 172

126-225 When a roll-over may be chosen 173

126-230 Beneficiaries’ entitlements not be discretionary etc. 174

126-235 Exceptions for roll-over 175

126-240 Consequences for the trusts 176

126-245 Consequences for beneficiaries—general approach for working out cost base etc. 178

126-250 Consequences for beneficiaries—other approach for working out cost base etc. 180

126-255 No other cost base etc. adjustment for beneficiaries 181

126-260 Giving information to beneficiaries 181

126-265 Interest sale facilities 183

Division 128—Effect of death 185

Guide to Division 128 185

128-1 What this Division is about 185

General rules 185

128-10 Capital gain or loss when you die is disregarded 185

128-15 Effect on the legal personal representative or beneficiary 186

128-20 When does an asset pass to a beneficiary? 189

128-25 The beneficiary is a trustee of a superannuation fund etc. 189

Special rules for joint tenants 190

128-50 Joint tenants 190

Division 130—Investments 192

Guide to Division 130 192

130-1 What this Division is about 192

Subdivision 130-A—Bonus shares and units 193

Guide to Subdivision 130-A 193

130-15 Acquisition time and cost base of bonus equities 193

Operative provisions 194

130-20 Issue of bonus shares or units 194

Subdivision 130-B—Rights 198

130-40 Exercise of rights 198

130-45 Timing rules 201

130-50 Application to options 201

Subdivision 130-C—Convertible interests 201

130-60 Shares or units acquired by converting a convertible interest 201

Subdivision 130-D—Employee share schemes 204

130-75 Objects of Subdivision 204

130-80 ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes 205

130-85 Interests in employee share trusts 206

130-90 Shares held by employee share trusts 208

130-95 Shares and rights in relation to ESS interests 209

130-97 Application of certain provisions of Division 83A 209

Subdivision 130-E—Exchangeable interests 209

130-100 Exchangeable interest 210

130-105 Shares acquired in exchange for the disposal or redemption of an exchangeable interest 210

Subdivision 130-F—Exploration investments 213

130-110 Reducing the reduced cost base before disposal 213

Division 132—Leases 214

132-1 Lessee incurs expenditure to get lease term varied or waived 214

132-5 Lessor pays lessee for improvements 214

132-10 Grant of a long-term lease 214

132-15 Lessee of land acquires reversionary interest of lessor 215

Division 134—Options 217

134-1 Exercise of options 217

Division 137—Granny flat arrangements 220

Subdivision 137-A—When CGT events do not happen 220

Guide to Subdivision 137-A 220

137-1 What this Subdivision is about 220

Operative provisions 220

137-10 Meaning of key terms 220

137-15 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is entered into 221

137-20 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is varied 222

137-25 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is terminated 223

Division 149—When an asset stops being a pre-CGT asset 224

Subdivision 149-A—Key concepts 224

149-10 What is a pre-CGT asset? 224

149-15 Majority underlying interests in a CGT asset 225

Subdivision 149-B—When asset of non-public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset 226

149-25 Which entities are affected 226

149-30 Effects if asset no longer has same majority underlying ownership 226

149-35 Cost base elements of asset that stops being a pre-CGT asset 227

Subdivision 149-C—When asset of public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset 228

149-50 Which entities are affected 228

149-55 Entity to give the Commissioner evidence periodically as to whether asset still has same majority underlying ownership 229

149-60 What the evidence must show 231

149-70 Effects if asset no longer has same majority underlying ownership 232

149-75 Cost base elements of asset that stops being a pre-CGT asset 233

149-80 No more evidence needed after asset stops being a pre-CGT asset 233

Subdivision 149-F—How to treat a “demutualised” public entity 233

149-162 Subdivision applies only if entity gives sufficient evidence 233

149-165 Members treated as having underlying interests in assets until demutualisation 234

149-170 Effect of demutualisation of interposed company 235

Division 152—Small business relief 236

Guide to Division 152 236

152-1 What this Division is about 236

Subdivision 152-A—Basic conditions for relief under this Division 237

Guide to Subdivision 152-A 237

152-5 What this Subdivision is about 237

Basic conditions for relief 239

152-10 Basic conditions for relief 239

152-12 Special conditions for CGT event D1 244

Maximum net asset value test 245

152-15 Maximum net asset value test 245

152-20 Meaning of net value of the CGT assets 245

Active asset test 249

152-35 Active asset test 249

152-40 Meaning of active asset 249

152-45 Continuing time periods for involuntary disposals 253

Treatment of passively held CGT assets 255

152-47 Spouses or children taken to be affiliates for certain passively held CGT assets 255

152-48 Working out an entity’s aggregated turnover for passively held CGT assets 256

152-49 Businesses that are winding up 257

Significant individual test 258

152-50 Significant individual test 258

152-55 Meaning of significant individual 258

CGT concession stakeholder 258

152-60 Meaning of CGT concession stakeholder 258

Small business participation percentage 259

152-65 Small business participation percentage 259

152-70 Direct small business participation percentage 259

152-75 Indirect small business participation percentage 262

Nomination of controllers of discretionary trust 263

152-78 Trustee of discretionary trust may nominate beneficiaries to be controllers of trust 263

CGT event happens to asset or interest within 2 years of an individual’s death 264

152-80 CGT event happens to an asset or interest within 2 years of individual’s death 264

Subdivision 152-B—Small business 15-year exemption 265

Guide to Subdivision 152-B 265

152-100 What this Subdivision is about 265

152-105 15-year exemption for individuals 267

152-110 15-year exemption for companies and trusts 267

152-115 Continuing time periods for involuntary disposals 268

152-125 Payments to company’s or trust’s CGT concession stakeholders are exempt 270

Subdivision 152-C—Small business 50% reduction 272

Guide to Subdivision 152-C 272

152-200 What this Subdivision is about 272

152-205 You get the small business 50% reduction 273

152-210 You may also get the small business retirement exemption and small business roll-over relief 273

152-215 15-year rule has priority 273

152-220 You may choose not to apply this Subdivision 273

Subdivision 152-D—Small business retirement exemption 274

Guide to Subdivision 152-D 274

152-300 What this Subdivision is about 274

152-305 Choosing the exemption 275

152-310 Consequences of choice 276

152-315 Choosing the amount to disregard 277

152-320 Meaning of CGT retirement exemption limit 278

152-325 Company or trust conditions 278

152-330 15-year rule has priority 281

Subdivision 152-E—Small business roll-over 281

Guide to Subdivision 152-E 281

152-400 What this Subdivision is about 281

Operative provisions 282

152-410 When you can obtain the roll-over 282

152-415 What the roll-over consists of 282

152-420 Rules where an individual who has obtained a roll-over dies 283

152-430 15-year rule has priority 284

Part 3-5—Corporate taxpayers and corporate distributions 285

Division 160—Corporate loss carry back tax offset for 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 for businesses with turnover under $5 billion 285

Guide to Division 160 285

160-1 What this Division is about 285

Subdivision 160-A—Entitlement to and amount of loss carry back tax offset 286

160-5 Entitlement to loss carry back tax offset 286

160-10 Amount of loss carry back tax offset 287

Subdivision 160-B—Loss carry back choice 291

160-15 Loss carry back choice 291

160-16 Changing a loss carry back choice 293

160-20 Entity must have had turnover less than $5 billion for loss year 293

160-25 Entity must have been a corporate tax entity during relevant years 293

160-30 Transferred tax losses, income tax liabilities etc. not included 295

160-35 Integrity rule—no loss carry back tax offset if scheme entered into 296

Division 164—Non-share capital accounts for companies 298

Guide to Division 164 298

164-1 What this Division is about 298

Operative provisions 298

164-5 Object 298

164-10 Non-share capital account 299

164-15 Credits to non-share capital account 300

164-20 Debits to non-share capital account 302

Division 165—Income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company 304

Guide to Division 165 304

165-1 What this Division is about 304

Subdivision 165-A—Deducting tax losses of earlier income years 305

Guide to Subdivision 165-A 305

165-5 What this Subdivision is about 305

Operative provisions 306

165-10 To deduct a tax loss 306

165-12 Company must maintain the same owners 306

165-13 Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test 308

165-15 The same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test 309

165-20 When company can deduct part of a tax loss 310

Subdivision 165-B—Working out the taxable income and tax loss for the income year of the change 311

Guide to Subdivision 165-B 311

165-23 What this Subdivision is about 311

165-25 Summary of this Subdivision 312

165-30 Flow chart showing the application of this Subdivision 314

When a company must work out its taxable income and tax loss under this Subdivision 315

165-35 On a change of ownership, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test 315

165-37 Who has more than a 50% stake in the company during a period 315

165-40 On a change of control of the voting power in the company, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test 317

Working out the company’s taxable income 318

165-45 First, divide the income year into periods 318

165-50 Next, calculate the notional loss or notional taxable income for each period 319

165-55 How to attribute deductions to periods 319

165-60 How to attribute assessable income to periods 321

165-65 How to calculate the company’s taxable income for the income year 322

Working out the company’s tax loss 323

165-70 How to calculate the company’s tax loss for the income year 323

Special rules that apply if the company is in partnership 324

165-75 How to calculate the company’s notional loss or notional taxable income for a period when the company was a partner 324

165-80 How to calculate the company’s share of a partnership’s notional loss or notional net income for a period if both entities have the same income year 325

165-85 How to calculate the company’s share of a partnership’s notional loss or notional net income for a period if the entities have different income years 326

165-90 Company’s full year deductions include a share of partnership’s full year deductions 327

Subdivision 165-CA—Applying net capital losses of earlier income years 328

Guide to Subdivision 165-CA 328

165-93 What this Subdivision is about 328

Operative provisions 328

165-96 When a company cannot apply a net capital loss 328

Subdivision 165-CB—Working out the net capital gain and the net capital loss for the income year of the change 329

Guide to Subdivision 165-CB 329

165-99 What this Subdivision is about 329

When a company must work out its net capital gain and net capital loss under this Subdivision 330

165-102 On a change of ownership, or of control of voting power, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test 330

Working out the company’s net capital gain and net capital loss 330

165-105 First, divide the income year into periods 330

165-108 Next, calculate the notional net capital gain or notional net capital loss for each period 330

165-111 How to work out the company’s net capital gain 331

165-114 How to work out the company’s net capital loss 332

Subdivision 165-CC—Change of ownership or control of company that has an unrealised net loss 333

Guide to Subdivision 165-CC 333

165-115 What this Subdivision is about 333

165-115AA Special rules to save compliance costs 333

Operative provisions 334

165-115A Application of Subdivision 334

165-115B What happens when the company makes a capital loss or becomes entitled to a deduction in respect of a CGT asset after a changeover time 337

165-115BA What happens when a CGT event happens after a changeover time to a CGT asset of the company that is trading stock 339

165-115BB Order of application of assets: residual unrealised net loss 340

165-115C Changeover time—change in ownership of company 342

165-115D Changeover time—change in control of company 343

165-115E What is an unrealised net loss 344

165-115F Notional gains and losses 347

Subdivision 165-CD—Reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company 349

Guide to Subdivision 165-CD 349

165-115GA What this Subdivision is about 349

165-115GB When adjustments must be made 349

165-115GC How adjustments are calculated 350

165-115H How this Subdivision applies 351

Operative provisions 354

165-115J Object of Subdivision 354

165-115K Application and interpretation 355

165-115L Alteration time—alteration in ownership of company 356

165-115M Alteration time—alteration in control of company 358

165-115N Alteration time—declaration by liquidator or administrator 359

165-115P Notional alteration time—disposal of interests in company within 12 months before alteration time 359

165-115Q Notional alteration time—disposal of interests in company earlier than 12 months before alteration time 360

165-115R When company is a loss company at first or only alteration time in income year 362

165-115S When company is a loss company at second or later alteration time in income year 364

165-115T Reduction of certain amounts included in company’s overall loss at alteration time 366

165-115U Adjusted unrealised loss 366

165-115V Notional losses 369

165-115W Calculation of trading stock decrease 370

165-115X Relevant equity interest 371

165-115Y Relevant debt interest 374

165-115Z What constitutes a controlling stake in a company 377

165-115ZA Reductions and other consequences if entity has relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in loss company immediately before alteration time 378

165-115ZB Adjustment amounts for the purposes of section 165-115ZA 382

165-115ZC Notices to be given 385

165-115ZD Adjustment (or further adjustment) for interest realised at a loss after global method has been used 389

Subdivision 165-C—Deducting bad debts 393

Guide to Subdivision 165-C 393

165-117 What this Subdivision is about 393

Operative provisions 394

165-119 Application of Subdivision 394

165-120 To deduct a bad debt 394

165-123 Company must maintain the same owners 396

165-126 Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test 398

165-129 Same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test 399

165-132 When tax losses resulting from bad debts cannot be deducted 400

Subdivision 165-D—Tests for finding out whether the company has maintained the same owners 401

The primary and alternative tests 402

165-150 Who has more than 50% of the voting power in the company 402

165-155 Who has rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends 402

165-160 Who has rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions 403

165-165 Rules about tests for a condition or occurrence of a circumstance 404

165-175 Tests can be satisfied by a single person 406

Rules affecting the operation of the tests 406

165-180 Arrangements affecting beneficial ownership of shares 406

165-185 Shares treated as not having carried rights 407

165-190 Shares treated as always having carried rights 407

165-200 Rules do not affect totals of shares, units in unit trusts or rights carried by shares and units 408

165-202 Shares held by government entities and charities etc. 409

165-203 Companies where no shares have been issued 409

165-205 Death of share owner 409

165-207 Trustees of family trusts 410

165-208 Companies in liquidation etc. 411

165-209 Dual listed companies 413

Subdivision 165-E—Business continuity test 413

165-210 The business continuity test—carrying on the same business 413

165-211 The business continuity test—carrying on a similar business 414

165-212D Restructure of MDOs etc. 415

165-212E Entry history rule does not apply for the purposes of sections 165-210 and 165-211 416

Subdivision 165-F—Special provisions relating to ownership by non-fixed trusts 416

165-215 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-A 416

165-220 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-B 418

165-225 Special way of dividing the income year under Subdivision 165-B 420

165-230 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-C 421

165-235 Information about non-fixed trusts with interests in company 423

165-240 Notices where requirements of section 165-235 are met 424

165-245 When an entity has a fixed entitlement to income or capital of a company 426

Subdivision 165-G—Other special provisions 426

165-250 Control of companies in liquidation etc. 426

165-255 Incomplete periods 427

Division 166—Income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company 428

Guide to Division 166 428

166-1 What this Division is about 428

Subdivision 166-AA—The object of this Division 429

166-3 The object of this Division 429

Subdivision 166-A—Deducting tax losses of earlier income years 429

166-5 How Subdivision 165-A applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company 430

166-15 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them 431

Subdivision 166-B—Working out the taxable income, tax loss, net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year of the change 432

166-20 How Subdivisions 165-B and 165-CB apply to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company 432

166-25 How to work out the taxable income, tax loss, net capital gain and net capital loss 434

166-35 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them 434

Subdivision 166-C—Deducting bad debts 435

166-40 How Subdivision 165-C applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company 435

166-50 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them 437

Subdivision 166-CA—Changeover times and alteration times 437

166-80 How Subdivision 165-CC or 165-CD applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company 437

166-90 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them 439

Subdivision 166-D—Tests for finding out whether the widely held or eligible Division 166 company has maintained the same owners 439

Guide to Subdivision 166-D 439

166-135 What this Subdivision is about 439

The ownership tests: substantial continuity of ownership 440

166-145 The ownership tests: substantial continuity of ownership 440

166-165 Relationship with rules in Division 165 442

Corporate change in a company 442

166-175 Corporate change in a company 442

Subdivision 166-E—Concessional tracing rules 443

Guide to Subdivision 166-E 443

166-215 What this Subdivision is about 443

Application of this Subdivision 445

166-220 Application of this Subdivision 445

Stakes of less than 10% in the tested company 445

166-225 Direct stakes of less than 10% in the tested company 445

166-230 Indirect stakes of less than 10% in the tested company 447

166-235 Voting, dividend and capital stakes 450

Stakes held directly and/or indirectly by widely held companies 452

166-240 Stakes held directly and/or indirectly by widely held companies 452

166-245 Stakes held by other entities 454

When identity of foreign stakeholders is not known 457

166-255 Bearer shares in foreign listed companies 457

166-260 Depository entities holding stakes in foreign listed companies 459

Other rules relating to voting power and rights 461

166-265 Persons who actually control voting power or have rights are taken not to control power or have rights 461

166-270 Single notional entity stakeholders taken to have minimum voting control, dividend rights and capital rights 462

166-272 Same shares or interests to be held 464

When the rules in this Subdivision do not apply 467

166-275 Rules in this Subdivision intended to be concessional 467

166-280 Controlled test companies 468

Division 167—Companies whose shares carry unequal rights to dividends, capital distributions or voting power 470

Guide to Division 167 470

167-1 What this Division is about 470

Subdivision 167-A—Rights to dividends or capital distributions 470

Guide to Subdivision 167-A 470

167-5 What this Subdivision is about 470

167-7 Simplified outline of this Subdivision 471

Operative provisions 472

167-10 When this Subdivision applies 472

167-15 First way—disregard debt interests 474

167-20 Second way—also disregard secondary share classes 474

167-25 Third way—treat remaining shares as having fixed rights to dividends and capital distributions 475

167-30 Fixing rights if practicable to work out market values 476

167-35 Fixing rights if impracticable to work out market values etc. 476

167-40 The valuing times for conditions listed in subsection 167-10(1) 477

Subdivision 167-B—Voting power 478

Guide to Subdivision 167-B 478

167-75 What this Subdivision is about 478

Operative provisions 478

167-80 When this Subdivision applies 478

167-85 Different method for working out voting power 479

167-90 Dual listed companies 480

Division 170—Treatment of certain company groups for income tax purposes 481

Subdivision 170-A—Transfer of tax losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies 481

Guide to Subdivision 170-A 481

170-1 What this Subdivision is about 481

170-5 Basic principles for transferring tax losses 482

Effect of transferring a tax loss 483

170-10 When a company can transfer a tax loss 483

170-15 Income company is taken to have incurred transferred loss 483

170-20 Who can deduct transferred loss 484

170-25 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss 484

Conditions for transfer 485

170-30 Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc. 485

170-32 Tax loss incurred by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A 486

170-33 Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies 487

170-35 The loss company 489

170-40 The income company 490

170-42 If the income company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group 491

170-45 Maximum amount that can be transferred 492

170-50 Transfer by written agreement 495

170-55 Losses must be transferred in order they are incurred 495

170-60 Income company cannot transfer transferred tax loss 496

Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred 496

170-65 Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred 496

170-70 Amendment of assessments 497

Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities 497

170-75 Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks 497

Subdivision 170-B—Transfer of net capital losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies 498

Guide to Subdivision 170-B 498

170-101 What this Subdivision is about 498

170-105 Basic principles for transferring a net capital loss 499

Effect of transferring a net capital loss 500

170-110 When a company can transfer a net capital loss 500

170-115 Who can apply transferred loss 500

170-120 Gain company is taken to have made transferred loss 501

170-125 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss 501

Conditions for transfer 502

170-130 Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc. 502

170-132 Net capital loss made by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A 503

170-133 Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies 504

170-135 The loss company 506

170-140 The gain company 507

170-142 If the gain company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group 508

170-145 Maximum amount that can be transferred 509

170-150 Transfer by written agreement 512

170-155 Losses must be transferred in order they are made 513

170-160 Gain company cannot transfer transferred net capital loss 513

Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred 513

170-165 Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred 513

170-170 Amendment of assessments 514

Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities 514

170-174 Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks 514

Subdivision 170-C—Provisions applying to both transfers of tax losses and transfers of net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies 515

Guide to Subdivision 170-C 515

170-201 What this Subdivision is about 515

Operative provisions 516

170-205 Object of Subdivision 516

170-210 Transfer of tax loss: direct and indirect interests in the loss company 516

170-215 Transfer of tax loss: direct and indirect interests in the income company 519

170-220 Transfer of net capital loss: direct and indirect interests in the loss company 522

170-225 Transfer of net capital loss: direct and indirect interests in the gain company 524

Subdivision 170-D—Transactions by a company that is a member of a linked group 527

Guide to Subdivision 170-D 527

170-250 What this Subdivision is about 527

Operative provisions 528

170-255 Application of Subdivision 528

170-260 Linked group 530

170-265 Connected entity 531

170-270 Immediate consequences for originating company 532

170-275 Subsequent consequences for originating company 533

170-280 What happens if certain events happen in respect of the asset 534

Division 175—Use of a company’s tax losses or deductions to avoid income tax 537

Guide to Division 175 537

175-1 What this Division is about 537

Subdivision 175-A—Tax benefits from unused tax losses 537

175-5 When Commissioner can disallow deduction for tax loss 538

175-10 First case: income or capital gain injected into company because of available tax loss 538

175-15 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of tax loss available to company 539

Subdivision 175-B—Tax benefits from unused deductions 540

175-20 Income or capital gain injected into company because of available deductions 540

175-25 Deduction injected into company because of available income or capital gain 541

175-30 Someone else obtains a tax benefit because of a deduction, income or capital gain available to company 542

175-35 Tax loss resulting from disallowed deductions 543

Subdivision 175-CA—Tax benefits from unused net capital losses of earlier income years 544

175-40 When Commissioner can disallow net capital loss of earlier income year 544

175-45 First case: capital gain injected into company because of available net capital loss 545

175-50 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of net capital loss available to company 546

Subdivision 175-CB—Tax benefits from unused capital losses of the current year 546

175-55 When Commissioner can disallow capital loss of current year 547

175-60 Capital gain injected into company because of available capital loss 547

175-65 Capital loss injected into company because of available capital gain 548

175-70 Someone else obtains a tax benefit because of capital loss or gain available to company 548

175-75 Net capital loss resulting from disallowed capital losses 549

Subdivision 175-C—Tax benefits from unused bad debt deductions 550

175-80 When Commissioner can disallow deduction for bad debt 550

175-85 First case: income or capital gain injected into company because of available bad debt 550

175-90 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of bad debt deduction available to company 551

Subdivision 175-D—Common rules 552

175-95 When a person has a shareholding interest in the company 552

175-100 Commissioner may disallow excluded losses etc. of insolvent companies 553

Division 180—Information about family trusts with interests in companies 554

Guide to Division 180 554

180-1 What this Division is about 554

Subdivision 180-A—Information relevant to Division 165 554

180-5 Information about family trusts with interests in companies 554

180-10 Notice where requirements of section 180-5 are met 556

Subdivision 180-B—Information relevant to Division 175 559

180-15 Information about family trusts with interests in companies 559

180-20 Notice where requirements of section 180-15 are met 560

Division 195—Special types of company 563

Subdivision 195-A—Pooled development funds (PDFs) 563

Guide to Subdivision 195-A 563

195-1 What this Subdivision is about 563

Working out a PDF’s taxable income and tax loss 564

195-5 Deductibility of PDF tax losses 564

195-10 PDF cannot transfer tax loss 564

195-15 Tax loss for year in which company becomes a PDF 564

Working out a PDF’s net capital gain and net capital loss 565

195-25 Applying a PDF’s net capital losses 565

195-30 PDF cannot transfer net capital loss 565

195-35 Net capital loss for year in which company becomes a PDF 566

Working out a PDF’s loss carry back tax offset 567

195-37 PDF cannot carry back tax loss 567

Subdivision 195-B—Limited partnerships 567

Guide to Subdivision 195-B 567

195-60 What this Subdivision is about 567

Operative provisions 568

195-65 Tax losses cannot be transferred to a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP 568

195-70 Previous tax losses can be deducted after ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP 568

195-72 Tax losses cannot be carried back to before ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP 568

195-75 Determinations to take account of income years of less than 12 months 568

Subdivision 195-C—Corporate collective investment vehicles 569

Guide to Subdivision 195-C 569

195-100 What this Subdivision is about 569

Operative provisions 570

195-105 Effect of this Subdivision 570

195-110 Each sub-fund of a CCIV is taken to be a separate trust 571

195-115 A CCIV sub-fund trust is a unit trust 572

195-120 Beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has fixed entitlements to shares of income and capital of the trust 572

195-123 How to work out the income of the trust estate of a CCIV sub-fund trust for an income year 573

195-125 When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust is presently entitled to trust income 574

195-127 When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has an individual interest in exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate 575

195-130 Application of Division 275 (managed investment trusts) to a CCIV sub-fund trust 576

195-135 Application of Division 276 (AMITs) to a CCIV sub-fund trust 577

195-140 Entry on Australian Business Register 577

Division 197—Tainted share capital accounts 579

Guide to Division 197 579

197-1 What this Division is about 579

Subdivision 197-A—What transfers into a company’s share capital account does this Division apply to? 579

197-5 Division generally applies to an amount transferred to share capital account from another account 580

197-10 Exclusion for amounts that could be identified as share capital 581

197-15 Exclusion for amounts transferred under debt/equity swaps 581

197-20 Exclusion for amounts transferred leading to there being no shares with a par value—non-Corporations Act companies 581

197-25 Exclusion for transfers from option premium reserves 582

197-30 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of non-insurance etc. companies 582

197-35 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of insurance etc. companies 584

197-37 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of private health insurers 585

197-38 Exclusion for transfers connected with demutualisations of friendly society health or life insurers 586

197-40 Exclusion for post-demutualisation transfers relating to life insurance companies 587

197-42 Exclusion for exploration credits 589

Subdivision 197-B—Consequence of transfer: franking debit arises 589

197-45 A franking debit arises in relation to the transfer 589

Subdivision 197-C—Consequence of transfer: tainting of share capital account 590

197-50 The share capital account becomes tainted (if it is not already tainted) 590

197-55 Choosing to untaint a tainted share capital account 591

197-60 Choosing to untaint—liability to untainting tax 591

197-65 Choosing to untaint—further franking debits may arise 594

197-70 Due date for payment of untainting tax 595

197-75 General interest charge for late payment of untainting tax 595

197-80 Notice of liability to pay untainting tax 595

197-85 Evidentiary effect of notice of liability to pay untainting tax 596

Chapter 3 — Specialist liability rules

Part 3-3 — Capital gains and losses: special topics

Division 122 — Roll-over for the disposal of assets to, or the creation of assets in, a wholly-owned company

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 122

122-A Disposal or creation of assets by an individual or trustee to a wholly-owned company

122-B Disposal or creation of assets by partners to a wholly-owned company

Guide to Division 122

122-1 What this Division is about

A roll-over can delay the making of a capital gain or loss if:

• you dispose of a CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to a company in which you own all the shares; or

• you create a CGT asset in such a company; or

• all the partners in a partnership dispose of partnership property to a company in which they own all the shares; or

• the partners create a CGT asset in such a company.

Subdivision 122-A — Disposal or creation of assets by an individual or trustee to a wholly-owned company

Guide to Subdivision 122-A

122-5 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out when you can obtain a roll-over if you transfer a CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to a company. It also deals with the creation of a CGT asset in a company. There are consequences for the company also.

Table of sections

When is a roll-over available

122-15 Disposal or creation of assets—wholly-owned company

122-20 What you receive for the trigger event

122-25 Other requirements to be satisfied

122-35 What if the company undertakes to discharge a liability (disposal case)

122-37 Rules for working out what a liability in respect of an asset is

Replacement-asset roll-over if you dispose of a CGT asset

122-40 Disposal of a CGT asset

Replacement-asset roll-over if you dispose of all the assets of a business

122-45 Disposal of all the assets of a business

122-50 All assets acquired on or after 20 September 1985

122-55 All assets acquired before 20 September 1985

122-60 Assets acquired before and after 20 September 1985

Replacement-asset roll-over for a creation case

122-65 Creation of asset

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (disposal case)

122-70 Consequences for the company (disposal case)

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (creation case)

122-75 Consequences for the company (creation case)

When is a roll-over available

122-15 Disposal or creation of assets—wholly-owned company

If you are an individual or a trustee, you can choose to obtain a roll-over if one of the *CGT events (the trigger event) specified in this table happens involving you and a company in the circumstances set out in sections 122-20 to 122-35.

Note 1: The roll-over starts at section 122-40.

Note 2: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

Note 3: A roll-over may also be available under Subdivision 328-G (Restructures of small businesses).

Example: Gavin runs a plumbing business. He wants to incorporate it so he disposes of all its assets to a company. He becomes the sole shareholder of the company.

122-20 What you receive for the trigger event

The consideration you receive for the trigger event happening must be only:

*shares in the company; or

(b) for a *disposal of a *CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to the company (a disposal case)—shares in the company and the company undertaking to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of the asset or assets of the *business (as appropriate).

Note: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37.

The *shares cannot be *redeemable shares.

The *market value of the *shares you receive for the trigger event happening must be substantially the same as:

for a disposal case—the market value of the asset or assets you disposed of, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of the asset or assets (as appropriate); or

(b) for another trigger event (a creation case)—the market value of the CGT asset created in the company (the created asset).

In working out if the requirement in paragraph (3)(a) is satisfied, if the *market value of the *shares is different to what it would otherwise be only because of the possibility of liabilities attaching to the asset or assets, disregard the difference.

Note: The company may have to pay income tax if an amount is included in its assessable income because of a CGT event happening to an asset you disposed of, or it may have a liability because of accrued leave entitlements of employees. The market value of the shares will reflect these contingent liabilities.

122-25 Other requirements to be satisfied

You must own all the *shares in the company just after the time of the trigger event.

Note: You must own the shares in the same capacity as you owned or created the assets that the company now owns.

This Subdivision does not apply to the *disposal or creation of any of the assets specified in this table:

(3) A precluded asset is:

a depreciating asset; or

trading stock; or

an interest in the copyright in a film referred to in section 118-30; or

a registered emissions unit.

If:

the CGT asset or any of the assets of the business is a right, option, convertible interest or exchangeable interest; and

the company *acquires another CGT asset by exercising the right or option or by converting the convertible interest or in exchange for the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest;

the other asset cannot become trading stock of the company just after the company acquired it.

The ordinary income and statutory income of the company must not be exempt from income tax because it is an *exempt entity for the income year of the trigger event.

If you are an individual at the time of the trigger event, either:

you and the company must both be Australian residents at that time; or

both of the following requirements must be satisfied:

(i) each asset must be *taxable Australian property at that time;

(ii) the shares in the company mentioned in subsection 122-20(1) must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

If you are a trustee of a trust at the time of the trigger event, either:

at that time, the trust must be a *resident trust for CGT purposes and the company must be an Australian resident; or

both of the following requirements must be satisfied:

each CGT asset must be a CGT asset of the trust that is taxable Australian property at that time; and

(ii) the shares in the company mentioned in subsection 122-20(1) must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

122-35 What if the company undertakes to discharge a liability (disposal case)

Disposal of a CGT asset

One of the requirements in this table must be satisfied if:

you *dispose of a CGT asset; and

the company undertakes to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of it.

(The *market value, or the *cost base, of an asset is worked out when you disposed of it.)

Note: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37.

Disposal of all the assets of a business

One of the requirements in this table must be satisfied if:

you *dispose of all the assets of a business; and

the company undertakes to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of the assets of the business.

(The *market value, or the *cost base, of an asset is worked out when you disposed of it.)

122-37 Rules for working out what a liability in respect of an asset is

These rules are relevant to working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset.

A liability incurred for the purposes of a business that is not a liability in respect of a specific asset or assets of the business is taken to be a liability in respect of all the assets of the business.

Note: An example is a bank overdraft.

If a liability is in respect of 2 or more assets, the proportion of the liability that is in respect of any one of those assets is equal to:

Replacement-asset roll-over if you dispose of a CGT asset

122-40 Disposal of a CGT asset

If you choose a roll-over, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the trigger event is disregarded.

If you *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of each *share’s *cost base is the asset’s cost base when you *disposed of it (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of it) divided by the number of shares; and

the first element of each share’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Note 1: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37.

Note 2: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

If you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the *shares before that day.

Replacement-asset roll-over if you dispose of all the assets of a business

122-45 Disposal of all the assets of a business

If you choose a roll-over for *disposing of all the assets of a business to the company, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from each of the assets of the business is disregarded.

The other consequences relate to the *shares you receive and depend on when you *acquired the assets of the business.

Note 1: There are 3 possible cases:

• you acquired all the assets on or after 20 September 1985: see section 122-50;

• you acquired all the assets before that day: see section 122-55;

• you acquired some of the assets on or after that day: see section 122-60.

Note 2: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Note 3: There are other consequences for you and the company if you dispose of trading stock: see Division 70.

122-50 All assets acquired on or after 20 September 1985

If you *acquired all of the assets of the business on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of each *share’s *cost base is the sum of the *market values of the *precluded assets and the cost bases of the other assets (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those assets) divided by the number of shares; and

the first element of each share’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Note 1: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37.

Note 2: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Example: Nick is a small trader. He wants to incorporate his business. He disposes of all its assets to a company and receives 10 shares in return.

Nick acquired all the assets of the business after 20 September 1985.

Trading stock, plant and equipment and office furniture are precluded assets.

The market value of Nick’s trading stock when he disposed of it is $20,000. The market value of his plant and equipment at that time is $50,000 and the market value of his office furniture at that time is $10,000.

The cost bases of Nick’s land and buildings at that time total $120,000.

Nick has a business overdraft of $15,000. It is taken to be a liability in respect of all the assets of his business.

The first element of the cost base of the 10 shares is:

The first element of the reduced cost base of the 10 shares is worked out similarly.

The *market value of an asset is worked out when you *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an asset is worked out at the same time.

122-55 All assets acquired before 20 September 1985

You are taken to have *acquired all of the *shares before 20 September 1985 if you acquired all the assets of the business before that day and none of the assets is a precluded asset.

However, if at least one of the assets is a precluded asset, you are taken to have *acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares) does not exceed:

• the total of the *market values of the assets that are not *precluded assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets;

expressed as a percentage of:

• the total of the market values of all the assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets.

Note: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an asset: see section 122-37.

The first element of each other *share’s *cost base and *reduced cost base is the total of the *market values of the *precluded assets (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets) divided by the number of those other shares.

The *market value of an asset is worked out when you *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an asset is worked out at the same time.

122-60 Assets acquired before and after 20 September 1985

If you *acquired some of the assets on or after 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares) does not exceed:

• the total of the *market values of the assets (except any *precluded assets) that you acquired before that day, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets;

expressed as a percentage of:

• the total of the market values of all the assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those assets.

The first element of each other *share’s *cost base is the sum of the *market values of the *precluded assets and the cost bases of the other assets that you *acquired on or after that day (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those assets) divided by the number of those other shares.

Note: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

The first element of each other *share’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

The *market value of an asset is worked out when you *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an asset is worked out at the same time.

Replacement-asset roll-over for a creation case

122-65 Creation of asset

If you choose a roll-over, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the trigger event is disregarded.

The first element of each *share’s *cost base is the amount applicable under this table divided by the number of shares. The first element of each share’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

The expenditure can include a transfer of property: see section 103-5.

Bill’s cost base for each of the shares is $500.

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (disposal case)

Example: Bill grants a licence (CGT event D1) to Tiffin Pty Ltd (a company he owns). The company issues him with 2 additional shares. He incurs legal expenses of $1,000 to grant the licence.

122-70 Consequences for the company (disposal case)

There are these consequences for the company in a disposal case if you choose to obtain a roll-over. They are relevant for each CGT asset (except a precluded asset) that you *disposed of to the company.

Note: A capital gain or loss from a precluded asset can be disregarded: see Subdivision 118-A.

Asset acquired on or after 20 September 1985

If you *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the company) is the asset’s cost base when you disposed of it; and

the first element of the asset’s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the company) is the asset’s reduced cost base when you disposed of it.

Note 1: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Note 2: The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170.

Asset acquired before 20 September 1985

If you *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, the company is taken to have acquired it before that day.

Note: A capital gain or loss from a CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104. This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149.

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (creation case)

122-75 Consequences for the company (creation case)

There are these consequences for the company in a creation case if you choose to obtain a roll-over.

The first element of the created asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the company) is the applicable amount from the table in subsection 122-65(2).

Example: To continue the example in section 122-65, the cost base of the licence in Tiffin Pty Ltd’s hands is $1,000.

The first element of the created asset’s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the company) is worked out similarly.

Subdivision 122-B — Disposal or creation of assets by partners to a wholly-owned company

Guide to Subdivision 122-B

122-120 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out when the partners in a partnership can obtain a roll-over on transferring a CGT asset, or all the assets of a business, to a company. It also deals with the creation of a CGT asset in a company. There are consequences for the company also.

Table of sections

When is a roll-over available

122-125 Disposal or creation of assets—wholly-owned company

122-130 What the partners receive for the trigger event

122-135 Other requirements to be satisfied

122-140 What if the company undertakes to discharge a liability (disposal case)

122-145 Rules for working out what a liability in respect of an interest in an asset is

Replacement-asset roll-over if partners dispose of a CGT asset

122-150 Capital gain or loss disregarded

122-155 Disposal of post-CGT or pre-CGT interests

122-160 Disposal of both post-CGT and pre-CGT interests

Replacement-asset roll-over if the partners dispose of all the assets of a business

122-170 Capital gain or loss disregarded

122-175 Other consequences

122-180 All interests acquired on or after 20 September 1985

122-185 All interests acquired before 20 September 1985

122-190 Interests acquired before and after 20 September 1985

Replacement-asset roll-over for a creation case

122-195 Creation of asset

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (disposal case)

122-200 Consequences for the company (disposal case)

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (creation case)

122-205 Consequences for the company (creation case)

When is a roll-over available

122-125 Disposal or creation of assets—wholly-owned company

All of the partners in a partnership can choose to obtain a roll-over if one of the *CGT events (the trigger event) specified in this table happens involving the partners and a company in the circumstances set out in sections 122-130 to 122-140.

Note 1: The roll-over starts at section 122-150.

Note 2: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

Example: Michael and Sandra operate a fish shop in partnership. They agree to incorporate the business so they dispose of their interests in all its assets to a company. They are the only shareholders of the company.

122-130 What the partners receive for the trigger event

The consideration the partners receive must be only:

*shares in the company; or

(b) for a *disposal of their interests in a *CGT asset, or in all the assets of a business, to the company (a disposal case)—shares in the company and the company undertaking to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of their interests.

Note: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an interest in an asset: see section 122-145.

The *shares cannot be *redeemable shares.

The *market value of the *shares each partner receives for the trigger event happening must be substantially the same as:

for a disposal case—the market value of the interests in the asset or assets the partner disposed of, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of the interests in the asset or assets (as appropriate); or

(b) for another trigger event (a creation case)—the market value of what would have been the partner’s interest in the *CGT asset created in the company (the created asset) if it were an asset of the partnership.

In working out if the requirement in paragraph (3)(a) is satisfied, if the *market value of the *shares is different to what it would otherwise be only because of the possibility of liabilities attaching to the asset or assets, disregard the difference.

Note: The company may have to pay income tax if an amount is included in its assessable income because of a CGT event happening to an asset a partner disposed of, or it may have a liability because of accrued leave entitlements of employees. The market value of the shares will reflect these contingent liabilities.

122-135 Other requirements to be satisfied

The partners must own all the *shares in the company just after the time of the trigger event.

Each partner must own the *shares the partner received for the trigger event happening in the same capacity that the partner:

owned the partner’s interests in the assets that the company now owns; or

participated in the creation of the asset in the company.

Note: If a partner’s interests were owned as trustee, the partner must receive shares as trustee.

This Subdivision does not apply to the *disposal or creation of any of the assets specified in this table:

If:

the CGT asset or any of the assets of the business is a right, option, convertible interest or exchangeable interest; and

the company *acquires another CGT asset by exercising the right or option or by converting the convertible interest or in exchange for the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest;

the other asset cannot become trading stock of the company just after the company acquired it.

The ordinary income and statutory income of the company must not be exempt from income tax because it is an *exempt entity for the income year of the trigger event.

For a partner who is not a trustee of a trust at the time of the trigger event, either:

the partner and the company must both be Australian residents at that time; or

both of the following requirements must be satisfied:

each asset must be taxable Australian property at that time; and

the shares in the company mentioned in subsection 122-130(1) must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

For a partner who is a trustee of a trust at the time of the trigger event, either:

at that time, the trust must be a *resident trust for CGT purposes and the company must be an Australian resident; or

both of the following requirements must be satisfied:

each CGT asset must be a CGT asset of the trust that is taxable Australian property at that time; and

the shares in the company mentioned in subsection 122-130(1) must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

122-140 What if the company undertakes to discharge a liability (disposal case)

Disposal of a CGT asset

One of these requirements must be satisfied (for each partner) if:

the partners *dispose of their interests in a CGT asset; and

the company undertakes to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of the interests in the asset.

(The *market value, or the *cost base, of an interest is worked out at the time of the disposal.)

Note: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an interest in an asset: see section 122-145.

Disposal of all the assets of a business

One of these requirements must be satisfied (for each partner) if:

the partners *dispose of their interests in all the assets of a business; and

the company undertakes to discharge one or more liabilities in respect of the interests in the assets.

(The *market value, or the *cost base, of an interest is worked out at the time of the disposal.)

122-145 Rules for working out what a liability in respect of an interest in an asset is

These rules are relevant to working out what are the liabilities in respect of a partner’s interests in an asset.

A liability incurred for the purposes of a business that is not a liability in respect of interests in a specific asset or assets of the business is taken to be a liability in respect of the partner’s interests in all the assets of the business.

Note: An example is a bank overdraft.

If a liability is in respect of both:

the partner’s interests in one or more assets that the partner *acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and

the partner’s interests in one or more assets that the partner acquired before that day;

the proportion of the liability that is in respect of the partner’s interests that the partner acquired on or after that day is equal to:

Replacement-asset roll-over if partners dispose of a CGT asset

122-150 Capital gain or loss disregarded

If the partners choose a roll-over for *disposing of their interests in a CGT asset to the company, a *capital gain or *capital loss any partner makes from the disposal is disregarded.

122-155 Disposal of post-CGT or pre-CGT interests

If a partner *acquired all the partner’s interests in the asset on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of each *share’s *cost base is the sum of the cost bases of the interests when the partner *disposed of them (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of them) divided by the number of the partner’s shares; and

the first element of each share’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Note 1: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an interest in an asset: see section 122-145.

Note 2: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

If a partner *acquired all the partner’s interests in the asset before 20 September 1985, the partner is taken to have acquired the *shares before that day.

122-160 Disposal of both post-CGT and pre-CGT interests

If a partner *acquired some of the partner’s interests in the asset on or after 20 September 1985 and some before that day, the partner is taken to have acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares the partner acquires) does not exceed:

• the *market value of the interests in the asset that the partner acquired before that day;

expressed as a percentage of:

• the total of the market values of all the partner’s interests in the asset.

The first element of each other *share’s *cost base is the sum of the cost bases of the partner’s interests that the partner *acquired on or after that day (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those interests) divided by the number of the other shares.

Note: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

The first element of each other *share’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

The *market value of an interest in an asset is worked out when the partner *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an interest in an asset is worked out at the same time.

Replacement-asset roll-over if the partners dispose of all the assets of a business

122-170 Capital gain or loss disregarded

If the partners choose a roll-over for *disposing of their interests in all the assets of a business to the company, a *capital gain or *capital loss any partner makes from the disposal is disregarded.

122-175 Other consequences

The other consequences relate to the *shares the partners receive and depend on when they *acquired their interests in the assets of the business.

• a partner acquired all the interests on or after 20 September 1985: see section 122-180;

• a partner acquired all the interests before that day: see section 122-185;

• a partner acquired some of the interests on or after that day: see section 122-190.

Note 1: There are 3 possible cases:

Note 2: There are other consequences for the partnership and the company if the partners dispose of their interests in trading stock of the partnership: see Division 70.

122-180 All interests acquired on or after 20 September 1985

If a partner *acquired all of the partner’s interests in the assets of the business on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the partner’s *cost base of each *share is the sum of the *market values of the partner’s interests in the *precluded assets and the cost bases of the partner’s interests in the other assets (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those interests) divided by the number of the partner’s shares; and

the first element of the partner’s *reduced cost base of each *share is worked out similarly.

Note 1: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of interests: see section 122-145.

Note 2: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

The *market value of an interest in an asset is worked out when the partner *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an interest is worked out at the same time.

122-185 All interests acquired before 20 September 1985

A partner is taken to have *acquired all of the *shares before 20 September 1985 if the partner acquired all the partner’s interests in the assets of the business before that day and none of the assets is a precluded asset.

However, if at least one of the assets is a precluded asset, the partner is taken to have *acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares) does not exceed:

• the total of the *market values of the partner’s interests in the assets that are not *precluded assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests;

expressed as a percentage of:

• the total of the market values of the partner’s interests in all the assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests.

Note: There are rules for working out what are the liabilities in respect of an interest: see section 122-145.

The first element of the partner’s *cost base and *reduced cost base of each other *share is the total of the *market values of the partner’s interests in the *precluded assets (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests) divided by the number of the other shares.

The *market value of an interest in an asset is worked out when the partner *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an interest is worked out at the same time.

122-190 Interests acquired before and after 20 September 1985

If a partner *acquired some of the interests in the assets on or after 20 September 1985, the partner is taken to have acquired a whole number of the *shares (but not all of them) before that day. The number is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the shares) does not exceed:

• the total of the *market values of the partner’s interests in the assets (except any *precluded assets) that the partner acquired before that day, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests;

expressed as a percentage of:

• the total of the market values of all the partner’s interests in the assets, less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of those interests.

The first element of the partner’s *cost base of each other *share is the sum of the *market values of the partner’s interests in the *precluded assets and the cost bases of the partner’s interests in the other assets that the partner *acquired on or after that day (less any liabilities the company undertakes to discharge in respect of all of those interests) divided by the number of the other shares.

Note: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

The first element of the partner’s *reduced cost base of each other *share is worked out similarly.

The *market value of an interest in an asset is worked out when the partner *disposed of it. The *cost base or *reduced cost base of an interest in an asset is worked out at the same time.

Replacement-asset roll-over for a creation case

122-195 Creation of asset

If the partners choose a roll-over, a *capital gain or *capital loss any partner makes from the trigger event is disregarded.

The first element of the partner’s *cost base of each *share is the amount applicable under this table divided by the number of shares. The first element of each share’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

The expenditure can include a transfer of property: see section 103-5.

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (disposal case)

122-200 Consequences for the company (disposal case)

There are these consequences for the company in a disposal case if the partners choose to obtain a roll-over. They are relevant for interests in each CGT asset (except a precluded asset) that the partners *disposed of to the company.

Note 1: A capital gain or loss from a precluded asset can be disregarded: see Subdivision 118-A.

Note 2: The reduced cost base (as determined under this section) may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170.

Interests acquired on or after 20 September 1985

If all of the partners’ interests in an asset were *acquired on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the company) is the sum of the cost bases of the partners’ interests in the asset when it was disposed of; and

the first element of the asset’s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the company) is the sum of the reduced cost bases of the partners’ interests in the asset when it was disposed of.

Note: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Interests acquired before 20 September 1985

If all of the partners’ interests in an asset were *acquired before 20 September 1985, the company is taken to have acquired it before that day.

Note: A capital gain or loss from a CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104. This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149.

Interests acquired on or after and before 20 September 1985

(4) If some of the partners’ interests in an asset (the original asset) were *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 and some before that day, the company is taken to have acquired 2 separate *CGT assets:

one (which the company is taken to have acquired on or after 20 September 1985) representing the extent to which the partners’ interests in the original asset were acquired by the partners on or after that day; and

another (which the company is taken to have acquired before that day) representing the extent to which the partners’ interests in the original asset were acquired by the partners before that day.

The first element of the *cost base of the separate asset that the company is taken to have *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is the sum of the cost bases of the partners’ interests in the original asset that they acquired on or after that day.

Note: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

The first element of its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Same-asset roll-over consequences for the company (creation case)

122-205 Consequences for the company (creation case)

There are these consequences for the company in a creation case if the partners choose to obtain a roll-over.

The first element of the created asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the company) is the applicable amount from this table.

The expenditure can include a transfer of property: see section 103-5.

The first element of the created asset’s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the company) is worked out similarly.

Division 124 — Replacement-asset roll-overs

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 124

124-A General rules

124-B Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed

124-C Statutory licences

124-D Strata title conversion

124-E Exchange of shares or units

124-F Exchange of rights or options

124-I Change of incorporation

124-J Crown leases

124-K Depreciating assets

124-L Prospecting and mining entitlements

124-M Scrip for scrip roll-over

124-N Disposal of assets by a trust to a company

124-P Exchange of a membership interest in an MDO for a membership interest in another MDO

124-Q Exchange of stapled ownership interests for ownership interests in a unit trust

124-R Water entitlements

124-S Interest realignment arrangements

Guide to Division 124

124-1 What this Division is about

A replacement-asset roll-over allows you, in special cases, to defer the making of a capital gain or loss from one CGT event until a later CGT event happens. It involves your ownership of one CGT asset ending and you acquiring another one.

124-5 How to find your way around this Division

First, find out if you can obtain a roll-over when your ownership of one or more CGT assets ends and you acquire one or more CGT assets: see Subdivisions 124-B to 124-R.

Note: If you carry on a small business, you may also be able to obtain a roll-over under Subdivision 152-E.

Second, find out what the consequences are for being able to obtain a roll-over: see Subdivision 124-A.

Note: The consequences of a scrip for scrip roll-over are set out in Subdivision 124-M. The consequences of replacing a statutory licence by a new statutory licence are set out in Subdivision 124-C. The consequences of an exchange of a membership interest in an MDO are set out in Subdivision 124-P. The consequences of an exchange of stapled ownership interests are set out in Subdivision 124-Q. The consequences of a roll-over for water entitlements are set out in Subdivision 124-R.

Third, find out if there are any special rules relevant to your situation: see the Subdivision under which you can get the roll-over.

Subdivision 124-A — General rules

Table of sections

124-10 Your ownership of one CGT asset ends

124-15 Your ownership of more than one CGT asset ends

124-20 Share and interest sale facilities

124-10 Your ownership of one CGT asset ends

(1) There are these consequences (in most cases) if you can obtain a roll-over when your ownership of a *CGT asset (the original asset) ends and you *acquire one or more CGT assets (the new assets) in a situation covered by this Division.

A car, motor cycle or similar vehicle must not be one of the new assets.

A *capital gain or a *capital loss you make from the original asset is disregarded.

(3) If you *acquired the original asset on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of each new asset’s *cost base is:

The first element of each new asset’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Note 1: In some cases the amount you paid to acquire the new asset also forms part of the first element: see Subdivision 124-D (about strata title conversion).

Note 2: There are modifications to the consequences in Subdivision 124-B (about compulsory acquisition, loss or destruction), Subdivision 124-C (about statutory licences), Subdivision 124-J (about Crown leases) and Subdivision 124-L (about prospecting and mining).

Note 3: No other elements of the cost base of the new asset are affected by the roll-over.

Note 4: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Note 5: The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170.

If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired each new asset before that day.

Note: A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104. This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149.

However, subsection (4) is taken never to have applied to a *share to which subsection 104-195(6) applies (CGT event J4).

124-15 Your ownership of more than one CGT asset ends

(1) There are these consequences (in most cases) if you can obtain a roll-over when your ownership of more than one *CGT asset (the original assets) ends and you acquire one or more CGT assets (the new assets) in a situation covered by this Division.

Example: You own 100 shares in a company. The company cancels these shares and issues you with 10 shares in return.

A car, motor cycle or similar vehicle must not be one of the new assets.

(2) A *capital gain or a *capital loss you make from each original asset is disregarded.

If you *acquired all the original assets on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of each new asset’s cost base is:

The first element of each new asset’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Note 1: No other elements of the cost base of the new asset are affected by the roll-over.

Note 2: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

If you *acquired all the original assets before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired each new asset before that day.

Note: A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104. This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149.

If you *acquired some of the original assets before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired a number of new assets before that day. It is the maximum possible that does not exceed:

If the result is less than one, none of the new assets are taken to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985.

Example: To continue the example, suppose you acquired 67 of the 100 original shares before 20 September 1985. The number of new shares that you are taken to have acquired before that day cannot exceed:

So, you are taken to have acquired 6 of the 10 shares before that day.

These rules are relevant to each remaining new asset. The first element of each one’s *cost base is:

The first element of each one’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

The first element of the cost base of each of the remaining 4 shares is:

Note: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Example: To continue the example, suppose the total of the cost bases of the 33 shares you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is $400.

The first element of the reduced cost base of those 4 shares is worked out similarly.

However, subsections (4) and (5) are taken never to have applied to a *share to which subsection 104-195(6) applies (CGT event J4).

124-20 Share and interest sale facilities

Share and interest sale facilities

(1) An entity (the investor) is treated as owning an *ownership interest (the roll-over interest) in a company or trust (the issuer) at a time (the deeming time), if:

(a) the investor owned an ownership interest (the original interest) in a company or trust; and

a transaction happened in relation to the original interest; and

because:

a foreign law impedes the ability of the issuer to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor; or

it would be impractical or unreasonably onerous to determine whether a foreign law impedes the ability of the issuer to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor;

it is *arranged that the issuer will issue or transfer the roll-over interest to another entity (the facility) under the transaction instead of to the investor; and

in accordance with that arrangement and as a result of the transaction, the facility:

becomes the owner of the roll-over interest; and

owns the roll-over interest at the deeming time; and

under the arrangement, the investor is entitled to receive from the facility:

an amount equivalent to the capital proceeds of any CGT event that happens in relation to the roll-over interest (less expenses); or

(ii) if a CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over interest together with CGT events happening in relation to other ownership interests—an amount equivalent to the investor’s proportion of the total capital proceeds of the CGT events (less expenses).

The facility is treated as not owning the roll-over interest at the deeming time.

This section applies for the purposes of:

(a) applying one of the following provisions (the roll-over provision) in relation to the transaction:

Subdivision 124-I (Change of incorporation);

Subdivision 124-N (Disposal of assets by a trust to a company);

Subdivision 124-Q (Exchange of stapled ownership interests for ownership interests in a unit trust);

Division 615 (Roll-overs for business restructures); and

the following provisions, to the extent that they relate to a roll-over under the roll-over provision that involves the transaction:

item 2 of the table in subsection 115-30(1);

sections 124-10 and 124-15.

Incorporated bodies

Without limiting this section, it also has effect, in a case covered by subparagraph (3)(a)(iii) (about Subdivision 124-I), as if each reference in this section to an *ownership interest in a company or trust were a reference to:

an interest in an incorporated body; and

any rights relating to the body owned by the entity that owns that interest.

(5) This section applies, in a case covered by subparagraph (3)(a)(iii) (about Subdivision 124-I), in relation to rights as a *member of a company incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 in the same way as it applies in relation to *shares in a company.

Subdivision 124-B — Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed

Table of sections

When a roll-over is available

124-70 Events giving rise to a roll-over

124-75 Other requirements if you receive money

124-80 Other requirements if you receive an asset

The consequences of a roll-over being available

124-85 Consequences for receiving money

124-90 Consequences for receiving an asset

124-95 You receive both money and an asset

When a roll-over is available

124-70 Events giving rise to a roll-over

(1) You may be able to choose a roll-over if one of these events happens to a *CGT asset (the original asset) you own:

it is compulsorily *acquired by an *Australian government agency;

it is compulsorily acquired by an entity (other than an Australian government agency or a *foreign government agency) under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by a law covered under subsection (1A);

it, or part of it, is lost or destroyed;

you *dispose of it to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

the disposal takes place after a notice was served on you by or on behalf of the entity;

the notice invited you to negotiate with the entity with a view to the entity acquiring the asset by agreement;

the notice informed you that if the negotiations were unsuccessful, the asset would be compulsorily acquired by the entity;

the compulsory acquisition would have been under a power of compulsory acquisition conferred by a law covered under subsection (1A);

you dispose of it to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

the asset is land over which a mining lease was compulsorily granted;

the lease significantly affected your use of the land;

the lease was in force just before the disposal;

the entity to which you dispose of the land was the lessee under the lease;

you dispose of it to an entity (other than a foreign government agency) in circumstances meeting all of these conditions:

the asset is land over which a mining lease would have been compulsorily granted if you had not disposed of it;

that lease would have significantly affected your use of the land;

the entity to which you dispose of the land would have been the lessee under the lease.

if it is a lease granted to you by an *Australian government agency under an Australian law—the lease expires and is not renewed.

Note 1: There are no roll-over consequences if you make a capital loss from the event.

Note 2: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

A law is covered under this subsection if it is:

(a) an *Australian law (other than Chapter 6A of the Corporations Act 2001); or

(b) a *foreign law (other than a foreign law corresponding to Chapter 6A of the Corporations Act 2001).

You must receive money or another CGT asset (except a car, motor cycle or similar vehicle), or both:

as compensation for the event happening; or

under an insurance policy against the risk of loss or destruction of the original asset.

Note: There are other requirements that must be satisfied if:

• you receive money: see section 124-75; or

• you receive another CGT asset: see section 124-80.

The requirement in subsection (4) must be satisfied if:

you are a foreign resident just before the event happens; or

you are the trustee of a trust that is a foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which the event happens.

The original asset must be taxable Australian property just before the event happens. The other asset must be taxable Australian property just after you *acquire it.

124-75 Other requirements if you receive money

If you receive money for the event happening, you can choose to obtain a roll-over only if these other requirements are satisfied.

Note: The roll-over consequences are set out in section 124-85.

You must:

incur expenditure in *acquiring another CGT asset (except a depreciating asset whose decline in value is worked out under Division 40 or deductions for which are calculated under Division 328); or

if part of the original asset is lost or destroyed—incur expenditure of a capital nature in repairing or restoring it.

At least some of the expenditure must be incurred:

no earlier than one year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows in special circumstances, before the event happens; or

no later than one year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows in special circumstances, after the end of the income year in which the event happens.

Special rules if you acquire another asset

If just before the event happened the original asset:

was used in your business; or

was installed ready for use in your business; or

was in the process of being installed ready for use in your business;

the other asset must be used in the business, or be installed ready for use in the business, for a reasonable time after you *acquired it.

Otherwise, you must use the other asset (for a reasonable time after you *acquired it) for the same purpose as, or for a similar purpose to, the purpose for which you used the original asset just before the event happened.

The other asset cannot become an item of your trading stock just after you *acquire it, nor can it be a depreciating asset whose decline in value is worked out under Division 40 or deductions for which are calculated under Division 328.

The other asset cannot become a registered emissions unit *held by you just after you *acquire it.

124-80 Other requirements if you receive an asset

If you receive another CGT asset for the event happening, you can choose to obtain a roll-over only if these other requirements are satisfied.

Note: The roll-over consequences are set out in section 124-90.

The other asset cannot become an item of your trading stock just after you *acquire it, nor can it be a depreciating asset whose decline in value is worked out under Division 40 or deductions for which are calculated under Division 328 nor can it be a registered emissions unit.

The *market value of the other asset (when you *acquire it) must be more than the *cost base of the original asset just before the event happens.

The consequences of a roll-over being available

124-85 Consequences for receiving money

If you receive money for the event happening, there are these consequences if you choose to obtain a roll-over.

Original asset acquired on or after 20 September 1985

If you make a *capital gain from the event, this table sets out in what situations the gain is reduced, not reduced or disregarded.

It also sets out in what situations the expenditure you incurred to *acquire another CGT asset or to repair or restore the original asset is reduced.

Example: In 1999 Simon bought a small factory. In 2000 a fire destroys part of it. He receives $100,000 under an insurance policy.

The capital gain is worked out under section 112-30.

Suppose the factory’s cost base at the time of the fire is $75,000 and the market value of the part that is not destroyed is $150,000. The cost base of the part that is destroyed is:

The capital gain is:

Case 1

Suppose Simon spent $80,000 on repairing the factory. The money he received under the insurance policy exceeds the repair cost by $20,000. The gain exceeds that by $50,000.

The result is that the gain is reduced to $20,000 and the $80,000 he spent on repairs is reduced to $30,000.

Case 2

Suppose Simon spent $15,000 on repairs instead. The money he received under the policy exceeds that amount by $85,000. This is more than the gain he made.

The gain is relevant to working out Simon’s net capital gain or loss for the income year and the $15,000 he spent on repairs forms part of the factory’s cost base.

Case 3

Suppose Simon spent $120,000 on repairs instead. The gain is disregarded and the $120,000 is reduced to $50,000.

Original asset acquired before 20 September 1985

If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985 and you incurred expenditure in acquiring another CGT asset, you are taken to have acquired the other asset before that day if:

the expenditure is not more than 120% of the *market value of the original asset when the event happened; or

a natural disaster happened so that the original asset, or part of it, is lost or destroyed and it is reasonable to treat the other asset as substantially the same as the original asset.

If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985 and you incurred expenditure of a capital nature in repairing or restoring it, you are taken to have acquired the original asset (as repaired or restored) before that day.

124-90 Consequences for receiving an asset

If you receive another CGT asset for the event happening, there are these consequences if you choose to obtain a roll-over.

A *capital gain you make from the original asset is disregarded.

If you *acquired the original asset on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the other asset’s *cost base is the original asset’s cost base at the time of the event; and

the first element of the other asset’s *reduced cost base is the original asset’s reduced cost base at the time of the event.

Note: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Example: Steven bought land in 1999 for $100,000. In 2001 the government compulsorily acquires the land and gives him new land in return.

A capital gain he makes from the original land is disregarded. Suppose the original land’s cost base when it is acquired is $120,000. The first element of the new land’s cost base becomes $120,000.

If you acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have *acquired the other asset before that day.

124-95 You receive both money and an asset

If you receive both money and another CGT asset for the event happening and choose to obtain a roll-over, the requirements and consequences are different for each part of the compensation attributable to the original asset (having regard to the amount of money and the *market value of the other asset).

The other asset as a part of compensation

The *market value of the other asset (when you *acquire it) must be more than that part of the *cost base of the original asset that is attributable to the new asset.

Note: This requirement is different to that in subsection 124-80(3). It requires a proportional attribution of the cost base of the original asset.

If you *acquired the original asset on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the other asset’s *cost base is that part of the original asset’s cost base at the time of the event that is attributable to the new asset; and

the first element of the other asset’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Note: These consequences are different to those in subsection 124-90(3). They require a proportional attribution of the cost base of the original asset.

If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the new asset before that day.

Money as a part of compensation

If you make a *capital gain from the event, this table sets out in what situations that part of the gain on the original asset that is attributable to the amount of money you received is reduced, not reduced or disregarded.

It also sets out in what situations the expenditure you incurred to *acquire another CGT asset or to repair or restore the original asset is reduced.

Note: These consequences are different to those in subsection 124-85(2). They require a proportional attribution of capital gain on the original asset.

If you *acquired the original asset before 20 September 1985 and you incurred expenditure in acquiring another CGT asset, you are taken to have acquired the other asset before that day if:

the expenditure you incurred in acquiring the other asset is not more than 120% of the *market value of that part of the original asset that is attributable to the other asset when the event happened; or

a natural disaster happened so that the original asset, or part of it, is lost or destroyed and it is reasonable to treat the other asset as substantially the same as that part of the original asset that is attributable to the new asset.

Note 1: The consequences in paragraph (6)(a) are different to those in paragraph 124-85(3)(a). They require a proportional attribution of the market value of the original asset.

Note 2: The consequences in paragraph (6)(b) are different to those in paragraph 124-85(3)(b). They require a proportional attribution of the original asset.

Example: Kris owns land, which he acquired in 1998. It is compulsorily acquired, and Kris receives $80,000 in cash and replacement land with a market value of $80,000.

The cost base of the original land is $150,000.

Kris buys additional land for $80,000.

Subsection (2) is satisfied because the market value of the replacement land ($80,000) is more than the part of the cost base of the original land that is attributable to the replacement land:

Applying subsection (5), the other part of the gain is disregarded, and the first element of the cost base of the replacement land is the part of the cost base of the original land that is attributable to the replacement land:

Applying subsection (3), the money he received ($80,000) is the same as the expenditure he incurred to buy the additional land. Item 3 in the table applies. The part of the gain that is attributable to that money is disregarded:

The expenditure is reduced by $5,000.

Subdivision 124-C — Statutory licences

124-140 New statutory licences

There is a roll-over if:

(a) your ownership of one or more *statutory licences (each of which is an original licence) ends, resulting in *CGT event C2 happening to the licence (or to each of the licences as part of an *arrangement); and

(b) as a result of the CGT event or events, you are issued one or more new licences (each of which is a new licence) for the original licence (or original licences); and

the new licence authorises (or the new licences taken together authorise) substantially similar activity as that authorised by the original licence (or by the original licences taken together).

Note 1: If there has been a capital improvement to the original licence: see section 108-75.

Note 2: Subdivision 124-C of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 modifies this roll-over for certain water-related licences. A separate roll-over for other water entitlements is provided in Subdivision 124-R of this Act.

If:

you are a foreign resident just before the CGT event happens (or just before one or more of the CGT events happens); or

you are the trustee of a trust that is a foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which the event happens (or for an income year in which one or more of those events happens);

there is no roll-over under this section unless the conditions in subsection (1B) are satisfied.

The conditions are that:

if there was only one original licence—the licence must be taxable Australian property just before the CGT event happens; and

if there was more than one original licence—each original licence must be taxable Australian property just before the CGT event in relation to it happens; and

if there is only one new licence—the licence must be taxable Australian property just after you *acquire it; and

if there is more than one new licence—each new licence must be taxable Australian property just after you acquire it.

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the new licence includes any amount you paid to get it (which can include giving property: see section 103-5).

(3) A statutory licence is an authority, licence, permit or quota (except a lease or a *mining entitlement or *prospecting entitlement) granted by:

an *Australian government agency under an Australian law; or

a *foreign government agency under a foreign law.

124-145 Rollover consequences—capital gain or loss disregarded

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the original licence (or from each of the original licences) is disregarded.

124-150 Rollover consequences—partial roll-over

(1) You can obtain only a partial roll-over in relation to an original licence if the *capital proceeds for that licence includes something (the ineligible proceeds) other than a new licence or new licences. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part) of the licence for which you received the ineligible proceeds.

Note: If there is more than one original licence, some or all of those original licences may each have an ineligible part.

The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the original licence as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

The *reduced cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the reduced cost base of the original licence as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

For the purposes of sections 124-155 and 124-165, for each original licence that has an ineligible part:

reduce the *cost base of that licence (just before the CGT event that happened in relation to it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part; and

reduce the *reduced cost base of that licence (just before the CGT event that happened in relation to it) by so much of that reduced cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part.

124-155 Roll-over consequences—all original licences were post-CGT

This section applies if you *acquired the original licence (or all of the original licences) on or after 20 September 1985.

The first element of the *cost base of the new licence (or of each of the new licences) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the cost bases of all the original licences; and

the number, *market value and character of the original licences; and

the number, market value and character of the new licences.

The first element of the *reduced cost base of the new licence (or of each of the new licences) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the reduced cost bases of all the original licences; and

the number, *market value and character of the original licences; and

the number, market value and character of the new licences.

124-160 Roll-over consequences—all original licences were pre-CGT

If you *acquired the original licence (or all of the original licences) before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the new licence (or all of the new licences) before that day.

124-165 Roll-over consequences—some original licences were pre-CGT, others were post-CGT

This section applies if:

there was more than one original licence; and

you *acquired one or more of the original licences before 20 September 1985; and

you acquired one or more of the original licences on or after that day.

Each new licence is taken to be 2 separate *CGT assets that are both *statutory licences:

one (which you are taken to have *acquired on or after 20 September 1985) representing the extent to which you acquired the original licences on or after that day; and

another (which you are taken to have acquired before that day) representing the extent to which you acquired the original licences before that day.

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the CGT asset mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) in relation to a new licence is worked out under the formula:

where:

market value of all new licences is the total of the *market values of all of the new licences.

market value of new licence is the *market value of the new licence to which the *CGT asset mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) relates.

total post-CGT cost base is the total of the *cost bases of all the original licences that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985.

Subdivision 124-D — Strata title conversion

124-190 Strata title conversion

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

you own property that gives you a right to occupy a unit in a building; and

the building’s owner subdivides it into *stratum units; and

the owner transfers to you the stratum unit that corresponds to the unit you had the right to occupy just before the subdivision.

Note 1: The roll-over consequences are set out in section 124-10. The original asset is the property that gave you the right to occupy a unit in the building. The new asset is the stratum unit.

Note 2: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the stratum unit includes any amount you paid to get it (which can include giving property: see section 103-5).

Note: The rest of the first element is worked out under Subdivision 124-A.

(3) A stratum unit is a lot or unit (however described in an *Australian law or a *foreign law relating to strata title or similar title) and any accompanying common property.

Subdivision 124-E — Exchange of shares or units

Table of sections

124-240 Exchange of shares in the same company

124-245 Exchange of units in the same unit trust

124-240 Exchange of shares in the same company

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

(a) you own *shares (the original shares) of a certain class in a company; and

(b) the company redeems or cancels all shares of that class; and

the company issues you with new shares (and you receive nothing else) in substitution for the original shares; and

the *market value of the new shares just after they were issued is at least equal to the market value of the original shares just before they were redeemed or cancelled; and

the *paid-up share capital of the company just after the new shares were issued is the same as just before the original shares were redeemed or cancelled; and

one of these requirements is satisfied:

you are an Australian resident at the time of the redemption or cancellation; or

if you are a foreign resident at that time—the original shares were taxable Australian property just before that time and the new shares are taxable Australian property when they are issued.

Note 1: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A. The original assets are the original shares. The new assets are the new shares.

Note 2: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

124-245 Exchange of units in the same unit trust

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

(a) you own units (the original units) of a certain class in a unit trust; and

(b) the trustee redeems or cancels all units of that class; and

the trustee issues you with new units (and you receive nothing else) in substitution for the original units; and

the *market value of the new units just after they were issued is at least equal to the market value of the original units just before they were redeemed or cancelled; and

one of these requirements is satisfied:

you are an Australian resident at the time of the redemption or cancellation; or

if you are a foreign resident at that time—the original units were taxable Australian property just before that time and the new units are taxable Australian property when they are issued.

Note: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A. The original assets are the original units. The new assets are the new units.

Subdivision 124-F — Exchange of rights or options

Table of sections

124-295 Exchange of rights or option to acquire shares in a company

124-300 Exchange of rights or option to acquire units in a unit trust

124-295 Exchange of rights or option to acquire shares in a company

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

(a) you own rights (the original rights) to *acquire *shares in a company or to acquire an option to acquire *shares in a company; or

(b) you own an option (the original option) to acquire *shares in a company;

and these other requirements are satisfied.

Note: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

The *shares must:

be consolidated and divided into new shares of a larger amount; or

be subdivided into new shares of a smaller amount.

The company must cancel the original rights or original option because of the consolidation or subdivision.

The company must:

issue you with new rights (relating to the new *shares) in substitution for the original rights; or

issue you with a new option (relating to the new shares) in substitution for the original option.

You must receive nothing else in substitution for the original rights or original option.

The *market value of the new rights or new option just after it was issued must be at least equal to the market value of the original rights or original option just before it was cancelled.

One of these requirements must be satisfied:

you must be an Australian resident at the time of the cancellation; or

if you are a foreign resident at that time:

the original rights or original option were taxable Australian property just before that time; and

the new rights or new option are taxable Australian property when they are issued.

Note: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A. The original asset is the original rights or original option. The new asset is the new rights or new option.

124-300 Exchange of rights or option to acquire units in a unit trust

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

(a) you own rights (the original rights) to *acquire units in a unit trust or to acquire an option to acquire units in a unit trust; or

(b) you own an option (the original option) to acquire units in a unit trust;

and these other requirements are satisfied.

Note: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

The units must:

be consolidated and divided into new units of a larger amount; or

be subdivided into new units of a smaller amount.

The trustee must cancel the original rights or original option because of the consolidation or subdivision.

The trustee must:

issue you with new rights (relating to the new units) in substitution for the original rights; or

issue you with a new option (relating to the new units) in substitution for the original option.

You must receive nothing else in substitution for the original rights or original option.

The *market value of the new rights or new option just after it was issued must be at least equal to the market value of the original rights or original option just before it was cancelled.

One of these requirements must be satisfied:

you must be an Australian resident at the time of the cancellation; or

if you are a foreign resident at that time:

the original rights or original option were taxable Australian property just before that time; and

the new rights or new option are taxable Australian property when they are issued.

Note: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A. The original asset is the original rights or original option. The new asset is the new rights or new option.

Subdivision 124-I — Change of incorporation

Guide to Subdivision 124-I

124-510 What this Subdivision is about

Roll-over relief is available for members of a body that is incorporated under one law and is converted to, or replaced with, a body incorporated under another law.

Table of sections

Object of this Subdivision

124-515 Object of this Subdivision

Change of incorporation without change of entity

124-520 Change of incorporation without change of entity

Old corporation wound up

124-525 Old corporation wound up

Special consequences of some roll-overs

124-530 Shares in company replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body

124-535 Rights as member of Indigenous corporation replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body

Object of this Subdivision

124-515 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that CGT considerations for *members of a body incorporated under a law do not impede a change of incorporation involving converting the body to, or replacing it with, a company incorporated under:

(a) the Corporations Act 2001 or a similar *foreign law; or

(b) the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006.

Note: Subdivision 620-A provides a roll-over for the assets of the body.

Change of incorporation without change of entity

124-520 Change of incorporation without change of entity

This section applies if:

you are a *member of a body incorporated under a law described in column 1 of an item of the table; and

the body is converted into a company incorporated under a law described in column 2 of the item, without creating a new legal entity; and

it is reasonable to conclude that there is no significant difference:

between the ownership of the body, and of rights relating to the body held by entities that owned the body, just before the conversion and the ownership of the company just after the conversion; or

between the mix of ownership of the body, and of rights relating to the body held by entities that owned the body, just before the conversion and the mix of ownership of the company just after the conversion.

Note: See section 124-20 if an entity uses a share or interest sale facility.

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

as a result of the conversion you are issued with *shares in the company and you receive nothing else; and

either you are an Australian resident at the time of the conversion or, if you are a foreign resident at that time:

each of your interest and your other rights (if any) relating to the body was taxable Australian property just before that time; and

the shares are taxable Australian property when they are issued.

Note 1: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A and section 124-530.

Note 2: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

(3) If the company is incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006, subsection (2) applies in relation to rights as a *member of the company in the same way as that subsection applies to *shares in a company.

Note: This may allow you to choose to obtain a roll-over. The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A and section 124-535.

Exception for demutualisation of certain bodies

(4) This section does not apply to demutualisation of a body if Division 326 in Schedule 2H to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the demutualisation.

Note: That Division deals with demutualisation of entities other than insurance companies and health insurers.

Old corporation wound up

124-525 Old corporation wound up

This section applies if:

a body is incorporated under a law described in column 1 of an item of the table; and

a company is incorporated under a law described in column 2 of the item; and

(c) the body ceases to exist, but the company continues to exist, after the time (the switch time) the *members of the body receive *shares in the company, or rights as members of it if it is incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006, on account of:

their interests in the body; and

their other rights (if any) relating to the body; and

the members of the body do not receive anything else on account of the expected ending of those interests and rights; and

it is reasonable to conclude that there is no significant difference:

between the ownership of the body, and of rights relating to the body held by entities that owned the body, just before the switch time and the ownership of the company just after the switch time; or

between the mix of ownership of the body, and of rights relating to the body held by entities that owned the body, just before the switch time and the mix of ownership of the company just after the switch time; and

Note: See section 124-20 if an entity uses a share or interest sale facility.

the body *disposes of all its *CGT assets to the company, except any assets expected to be needed to meet the body’s existing or expected liabilities before it ceases to exist.

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

you were a *member of the body just before the switch time; and

(b) your ownership of your interest in the body ends at a time (the end time) after the switch time; and

at the end time you have the *shares in the company that you received at the switch time; and

either you are an Australian resident at the end time or, if you are a foreign resident at the end time:

each of your interest in the body and your other rights (if any) relating to the body was taxable Australian property just before the end time; and

the shares in the company that you received at the switch time are taxable Australian property at the end time.

Note 1: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A and section 124-530.

Note 2: Section 103-25 tells you when you have to make the choice.

(3) If the company is incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006, subsection (2) applies in relation to rights as a *member of the company in the same way as that subsection applies to *shares in a company.

Note: This may allow you to choose to obtain a roll-over. The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A and section 124-535.

Special consequences of some roll-overs

124-530 Shares in company replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body

This section applies if:

(a) you choose to obtain a roll-over under section 124-520 or 124-525 relating to *shares you have in the company on account of the following (your original assets):

your interest in the body mentioned in that section;

your other rights relating to the body mentioned in that section; and

you *acquired some of your original assets before 20 September 1985 and the rest of them on or after that day.

You are taken to have *acquired so many of the *shares before 20 September 1985 as is reasonable, having regard to:

the number and *market value of your original assets; and

the number and market value of the shares.

(3) The first element of the *cost base of each of the *shares not taken by subsection (2) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 (your post-CGT shares) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the cost bases of your original assets that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and

the number and *market value of your post-CGT shares.

The reduced cost base of each of your post-CGT shares is worked out similarly.

This section has effect despite subsections 124-15(5) and (6).

124-535 Rights as member of Indigenous corporation replacing pre-CGT and post-CGT mix of interest and rights in body

This section applies if:

(a) you choose to obtain a roll-over under section 124-520 or 124-525 relating to rights (the replacement rights) you have as a *member of a company incorporated under the Corporations (Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander) Act 2006 on account of the following (your original assets):

your interest in the body mentioned in that section;

your other rights relating to the body mentioned in that section; and

you *acquired any of your original assets before 20 September 1985.

You are taken to have *acquired the replacement rights before 20 September 1985.

This section has effect despite subsection 124-15(5).

Subdivision 124-J — Crown leases

Guide to Subdivision 124-J

124-570 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the situations in which the holder of a Crown lease over land obtains a replacement asset roll-over when the lease is, among other things, renewed, extended or converted to an estate in fee simple.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

124-575 Extension or renewal of Crown lease

124-580 Meaning of Crown lease

124-585 Original right differs in area from new right

124-590 Part of original right excised

124-595 Treating parts of new right as separate assets

124-600 What is the roll-over?

124-605 Change of lessor

Operative provisions

124-575 Extension or renewal of Crown lease

There is a roll-over if:

(a) you hold one or more *CGT assets that are *Crown leases over land (the original right); and

the original right expires or you surrender it; and

(c) you are granted one or more new Crown leases over land or one or more estates in fee simple in land, or both (the new right); and

the new right relates to the same land as the original right.

Note 1: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A. They might be modified: see section 124-600.

Note 2: If there has been a capital improvement to the Crown lease: see section 108-75.

The new right must have been granted in one of these ways:

by renewing or extending the term of the original right where the renewal or extension is mainly due to your having held the original right; or

by changing the purpose for which the land to which the original right related can be used; or

by converting the original right to a Crown lease in perpetuity; or

by converting the original right to an estate in fee simple; or

by consolidating, or consolidating and dividing, the original right; or

by subdividing the original right; or

by excising or relinquishing a part of the land to which the original right related; or

by expanding the area of that land.

124-580 Meaning of Crown lease

A Crown lease is:

a lease of land granted by the Crown under an Australian law (other than the common law); or

a similar lease granted under a foreign law.

124-585 Original right differs in area from new right

Even if the new right relates to different land to that to which the original right related, this Subdivision applies as if it relates to the same land in these cases:

the difference in area is not significant;

the difference in *market value is not significant;

the new right was granted to correct errors in or omissions from the original right;

the new right relates to a significantly different area of land but you had made reasonable efforts to ensure that the area was the same;

it is otherwise reasonable for this Subdivision to apply in that way.

However, the rule in subsection (1) does not apply if section 124-590 applies.

124-590 Part of original right excised

(1) There is a partial roll-over if you *acquired the original right on or after 20 September 1985 and:

(a) the land to which the new right relates is different in area to the land the subject of the original right because a part (the excised part) of the land to which the original right related was excised or you relinquished it; and

you received a payment for the expiry or surrender of the original right.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note: Section 124-600 sets out the effect on your cost base.

There is no roll-over for the excised part. The *cost base of the excised part is so much of the *cost base of the relevant Crown lease as is attributable to the excised part.

Its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Note: You may make a capital gain or loss on the excised part because of CGT event C2.

124-595 Treating parts of new right as separate assets

Each part of a Crown lease or an estate in fee simple that is part of the new right is taken to be a separate CGT asset to the extent that it relates to:

land to which a Crown lease (that was part of the original right) related where you *acquired the lease before 20 September 1985; and

land to which a Crown lease (that was part of the original right) related where you acquired the lease on or after 20 September 1985; and

other land.

You are taken to have *acquired each asset that is a separate CGT asset because of paragraph (1)(a) before 20 September 1985.

124-600 What is the roll-over?

The roll-over is mainly as specified in Subdivision 124-A.

However, you work out the *cost base and *reduced cost base of *CGT assets (that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985) and that are part of the new right a bit differently where section 124-590 or 124-595 applies.

The first element of your *cost base for each of those assets is:

where:

CB of post-CGT original right is the sum of the *cost bases of the *Crown leases (that were part of the original right) and that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (just before the original right expired or was surrendered) reduced, if there is an excised part, by so much of those cost bases as is attributable to the excised part.

market value of all new assets is the *market value of all *CGT assets (that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985) that are part of the new right just after you acquired them.

market value of separate asset is the *market value of the particular asset just after you *acquired it.

The first element of the *reduced cost base of each of those assets is worked out similarly.

124-605 Change of lessor

(1) You treat a lease of land (whether or not it is a *Crown lease) granted to you (the fresh lease) as being a renewal of your original right if:

(a) after the grant of the original right, the land (the original land) to which it related became vested in an *Australian government agency (other than the one that granted the original right); and

the second agency granted you the fresh lease over:

the original land; or

the original land less an excised area; or

the original land and other land; and

the fresh lease was granted under an Australian law (other than the common law).

You do this even if there is a period between the end of the original right and the grant of the fresh lease if you continued to occupy the original land during that period under a permission, licence or authority granted by the second agency.

Subdivision 124-K — Depreciating assets

Table of sections

124-655 Roll-over for depreciating assets

124-660 Right granted to associate

124-655 Roll-over for depreciating assets

There is a roll-over for a depreciating asset if:

the asset is attached to land you hold under a *quasi-ownership right granted by an *exempt Australian government agency or an *exempt foreign government agency; and

you *hold the asset because of section 40-40; and

the quasi-ownership right expires or is terminated or you surrender it; and

you are granted a new quasi-ownership right over the land or an estate in fee simple in the land; and

there is no roll-over for you under Subdivision 124-J (about Crown leases) or Subdivision 124-L (about prospecting and mining entitlements).

Note 1: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A.

Note 2: This section provides a roll-over for a depreciating asset in the limited circumstances where Subdivision 124-J cannot because a quasi-ownership right over land covers situations that a Crown lease does not (for example, an easement over land).

Note 3: If there has been a capital improvement to the quasi-ownership right: see section 108-75.

124-660 Right granted to associate

If the *quasi-ownership right or estate in fee simple is instead granted to an associate or an *associated government entity of yours:

your *reduced cost base of the depreciating asset is reduced by the *adjustable value of the asset just before the original quasi-ownership right expired or was surrendered or terminated; and

there is no roll-over.

Subdivision 124-L — Prospecting and mining entitlements

Guide to Subdivision 124-L

124-700 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the situations in which there is a roll-over if a prospecting or mining entitlement expires or is surrendered and it is replaced by a new one.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

124-705 Extension or renewal of prospecting or mining entitlement

124-710 Meaning of prospecting entitlement and mining entitlement

124-715 Original entitlement differs in area from new entitlement

124-720 Part of original entitlement excised

124-725 Treating parts of new entitlement as separate assets

124-730 What is the roll-over?

Operative provisions

124-705 Extension or renewal of prospecting or mining entitlement

There is a roll-over if:

(a) you hold one or more *CGT assets that are *prospecting entitlements or *mining entitlements (the original entitlement); and

the original entitlement expires or you surrender it; and

(c) you are granted one or more new prospecting entitlements or mining entitlements (the new entitlement); and

the new entitlement relates to the same land as the original entitlement.

Note 1: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A. They might be modified: see section 124-730.

Note 2: If there has been a capital improvement to the entitlement: see section 108-75.

The new entitlement must have been granted in one of these ways:

by renewing or extending the term of the original entitlement where the renewal or extension is mainly due to your having held the original entitlement; or

by consolidating, or consolidating and dividing, the original entitlement; or

by subdividing the original entitlement; or

by converting a prospecting entitlement to a mining entitlement, or a mining entitlement to a prospecting entitlement; or

by excising or relinquishing a part of the land to which the original entitlement related; or

by expanding the area of that land.

124-710 Meaning of prospecting entitlement and mining entitlement

(1) A prospecting entitlement is:

an authority, licence, permit or entitlement under an Australian law or foreign law to prospect or explore for *minerals in an area; or

an authority, licence, permit or entitlement under an Australian law to prospect or explore for geothermal energy resources in an area; or

a lease of land that allows the lessee to prospect or explore for minerals or geothermal energy resources on the land; or

an interest in a thing referred to in paragraph (a), (aa) or (b).

(2) A mining entitlement is:

an authority, licence, permit or entitlement under an Australian law or foreign law to mine for *minerals in an area; or

an authority, licence, permit or entitlement under an Australian law to extract energy from geothermal energy resources in an area; or

a lease of land that allows the lessee to mine for minerals, or extract energy from geothermal energy resources, on the land; or

an interest in a thing referred to in paragraph (a), (aa) or (b).

124-715 Original entitlement differs in area from new entitlement

Even if the new entitlement relates to different land to that to which the original entitlement related, this Subdivision applies as if it relates to the same land in these cases:

the difference in area is not significant;

the difference in *market value is not significant;

the new entitlement was granted to correct errors in or omissions from the original entitlement;

it is otherwise reasonable for this Subdivision to apply in that way.

However, the rule in subsection (1) does not apply if section 124-720 applies.

124-720 Part of original entitlement excised

(1) There is partial roll-over if you *acquired the original entitlement on or after 20 September 1985 and:

(a) the land to which the new entitlement relates is different in area to the land the subject of the original entitlement because a part (the excised part) of the land to which the original entitlement related was excised or you relinquished it; and

you received a payment for the expiry or surrender of the original entitlement.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note: Section 124-730 sets out the effect on your cost base.

There is no roll-over for the excised part. The *cost base of the excised part is so much of the *cost base of the original entitlement as is attributable to the excised part.

Its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Note: You may make a capital gain or loss on the excised part because of CGT event C2.

124-725 Treating parts of new entitlement as separate assets

Each part of a prospecting entitlement or mining entitlement that is part of the new entitlement is taken to be a separate CGT asset to the extent that it relates to:

land to which a prospecting entitlement or mining entitlement (that was part of the original entitlement) related where you *acquired the entitlement before 20 September 1985; and

land to which a prospecting entitlement or mining entitlement (that was part of the original entitlement) related where you acquired the entitlement on or after 20 September 1985; and

other land.

You are taken to have *acquired each asset that is a separate CGT asset because of paragraph (1)(a) before 20 September 1985.

124-730 What is the roll-over?

The roll-over is mainly as specified in Subdivision 124-A.

However, you work out the *cost base and *reduced cost base of *CGT assets (that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985) and that are part of the new entitlement a bit differently where section 124-720 or 124-725 applies.

The first element of your *cost base for each of those assets is:

where:

CB of post-CGT original entitlement is the sum of the *cost bases of the prospecting entitlements or mining entitlements (that were part of the original entitlement) and that you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (just before the original entitlement expired or was surrendered) reduced, if there is an excised part, by so much of those cost bases as is attributable to the excised part.

market value of all new assets is the *market value of all *CGT assets (that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985) that are part of the new entitlement just after you acquired them.

market value of separate asset is the *market value of the particular asset just after you *acquired it.

The first element of the *reduced cost base of each of those assets is worked out similarly.

Subdivision 124-M — Scrip for scrip roll-over

Guide to Subdivision 124-M

124-775 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision allows you to choose a roll-over where post-CGT shares or trust interests you own are replaced with other shares or trust interests, for example, where there is a company takeover.

You can only choose the roll-over if you would have made a capital gain from the exchange.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

124-780 Replacement of shares

124-781 Replacement of trust interests

124-782 Transfer or allocation of cost base of shares acquired by acquiring entity etc.

124-783 Meaning of significant stakeholder, common stakeholder, significant stake and common stake

124-783A Rights that affect stakes

124-784 Cost base of equity or debt given within acquiring group

124-784A When arrangement is a restructure

124-784B What is the cost base and reduced cost base when arrangement is a restructure?

124-784C Cost base of equity or debt given within acquiring group

124-785 What is the roll-over?

124-790 Partial roll-over

124-795 Exceptions

124-800 Interest received for pre-CGT interest

124-810 Certain companies and trusts not regarded as having 300 members or beneficiaries

Operative provisions

124-780 Replacement of shares

There is a roll-over if:

(a) an entity (the original interest holder) exchanges:

(i) a *share (the entity’s original interest) in a company (the original entity) for a share (the holder’s replacement interest) in another company; or

(ii) an option, right or similar interest (also the holder’s original interest) issued by the original entity that gives the holder an entitlement to acquire a share in the original entity for a similar interest (also the holder’s replacement interest) in another company; and

the exchange is in consequence of a single arrangement that satisfies subsection (2) or (2A); and

the conditions in subsection (3) are satisfied; and

if subsection (4) applies, the conditions in subsection (5) are satisfied.

Note 1: There are some exceptions: see section 124-795.

Note 2: The original interest holder can obtain only a partial roll-over if the capital proceeds for its original interest include something other than its replacement interest: see section 124-790.

Note 3: A trustee who gets a roll-over under this Subdivision for an original interest consisting of shares issued as part of a demutualisation may be eligible for a further roll-over under Subdivision 126-E when a beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to the replacement shares.

Example 1: You can get a roll-over if you exchange your shares in one entity for shares in another entity or if you exchange options in one entity for options in another entity. You cannot get a roll-over if you exchange options for shares.

Example 2: Examples of arrangements that could be involved include:

• a company takeover, whether or not it is regulated by the Corporations Act 2001, resulting in a company owning 80% or more of another company’s shares.

• a scheme of arrangement governed by the Corporations Act 2001 that involves a cancellation of some interests in an original entity resulting in another entity owning 80% or more of the interests in the original entity.

Conditions for arrangement

The arrangement must:

result in:

(i) a company (the acquiring entity) that is not a member of a *wholly-owned group becoming the owner of 80% or more of the *voting shares in the original entity; or

(ii) a company (also an acquiring entity) that is a member of such a group increasing the percentage of voting shares that it owns in the original entity, and that company or members of the group becoming the owner of 80% or more of those shares; and

be one in which at least all owners of *voting shares in the original entity (except a company referred to in paragraph (a)) could participate; and

be one in which participation was available on substantially the same terms for all of the owners of interests of a particular type in the original entity.

Note 1: The 80% or more requirement is satisfied if the acquiring entity ends up owning at least 80% of the voting shares in the original entity. This may include shares held before the arrangement started.

Note 2: Participation will be on substantially the same terms if, for example, matters such as those referred to in subsections 619(2) and (3) of the Corporations Act 2001 affect the capital proceeds that each participant can receive.

Conditions for arrangement—takeover bids and arrangements

The arrangement must:

satisfy paragraph (2)(a); and

be, be part of, or include one or more of the following:

(i) a takeover bid (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) for the original interests by the acquiring entity that is not carried out in contravention of the provisions mentioned in paragraphs 612(a) to (g) of that Act;

Note: For exemption and modification of provisions by ASIC (and review by the takeovers panel) see Part 6.10 of the Corporations Act 2001. For Court declarations excusing contraventions see section 1325D of that Act.

(ii) a compromise or arrangement entered into by the original entity under Part 5.1 of the Corporations Act 2001, approved by order of a court made for the purposes of paragraph 411(4)(b) of that Act.

Conditions for roll-over

The conditions are:

the original interest holder *acquired its original interest on or after 20 September 1985; and

apart from the roll-over, it would make a *capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to its original interest; and

(c) its replacement interest is in a company (the replacement entity) that is:

the company referred to in subparagraph (2)(a)(i); or

in any other case—the *ultimate holding company of the wholly-owned group; and

the original interest holder chooses to obtain the roll-over or, if section 124-782 applies to it for the arrangement, it and the replacement entity jointly choose to obtain the roll-over; and

if that section applies, the original interest holder informs the replacement entity in writing of the *cost base of its original interest worked out just before a CGT event happened in relation to it; and

if an acquiring entity is a member of a wholly-owned group—no member of the group issues equity (other than a replacement interest), or owes new debt, under the arrangement:

to an entity that is not a member of the group; and

in relation to the issuing of the replacement interest.

Note: If the original interest holder also exchanges a CGT asset that it acquired before 20 September 1985, the cost base of any interest received in exchange for it is worked out under section 124-800.

Further roll-over conditions in certain cases

The conditions specified in subsection (5) must be satisfied if the original interest holder and an acquiring entity did not deal with each other at *arm’s length and:

neither the original entity nor the replacement entity had at least 300 *members just before the arrangement started; or

the original interest holder, the original entity and an acquiring entity were all members of the same linked group just before that time.

Note: There are some cases where a company will not be regarded as having 300 members: see section 124-810.

The conditions are:

the *market value of the original interest holder’s capital proceeds for the exchange is at least substantially the same as the market value of its original interest; and

its replacement interest carries the same kind of rights and obligations as those attached to its original interest.

CUFS

This section applies to the holder of a Chess Unit of Foreign Security as if the holder held the underlying interests that the unit represents.

Note: A Chess Unit of Foreign Security is an interest, traded on the stock market operated by ASX Limited, in a foreign share, unit or interest.

(7) A company is the ultimate holding company of a *wholly-owned group if it is not a *100% subsidiary of another company in the group.

124-781 Replacement of trust interests

There is a roll-over if:

(a) an entity (also the original interest holder) exchanges:

(i) a unit or other interest (also the holder’s original interest) in a trust (also the original entity) for a unit or other interest (also the holder’s replacement interest) in another trust (also the acquiring entity and the replacement entity); or

(ii) an option, right or similar interest (also the holder’s original interest) issued by the original entity that gives the holder an entitlement to acquire a unit or other interest in the original entity for a similar interest (also the holder’s replacement interest) in another trust (also the acquiring entity and the replacement entity); and

entities have *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the original entity and the acquiring entity; and

the exchange is in consequence of an arrangement that satisfies subsection (2) or (2A); and

the conditions in subsections (3) and (4) are satisfied.

Note 1: There are some exceptions: see section 124-795.

Note 2: The original interest holder can obtain only a partial roll-over if the capital proceeds for its original interest include something other than its replacement interest: see section 124-790.

Conditions for arrangement

The arrangement must:

result in the acquiring entity owning 80% or more of the *trust voting interests in the original entity or, if there are none, 80% or more of the units or other interests in the original entity; and

be one in which at least all owners of trust voting interests (or of units or other interests) in the original entity (except the acquiring entity) could participate; and

be one in which participation was available on substantially the same terms for all of the owners of interests or units of a particular type in the original entity.

Conditions for arrangement—takeover bids

The arrangement must:

satisfy paragraph (2)(a); and

(b) be, be part of, or include a takeover bid (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) for the original interests by the acquiring entity that is not carried out in contravention of the provisions mentioned in paragraphs 612(a) to (g) of that Act.

Note: For exemption and modification of provisions by ASIC (and review by the takeovers panel) see Part 6.10 of the Corporations Act 2001. For Court declarations excusing contraventions see section 1325D of that Act.

Conditions for roll-over

The conditions are:

the original interest holder *acquired its original interest on or after 20 September 1985; and

apart from the roll-over, it would make a *capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to its original interest; and

it chooses to obtain the roll-over or, if section 124-782 applies to it for the arrangement, it and the trustee of the acquiring entity jointly choose to obtain the roll-over; and

if that section applies to it, it informs that trustee in writing of the *cost base of its original interest as at the time just before a CGT event happened in relation to it.

Note: If the original interest holder also exchanges a CGT asset that it acquired before 20 September 1985, the cost base of any interest received in exchange for it is worked out under section 124-800.

Further roll-over conditions in certain cases

These conditions must be satisfied if the original interest holder and the trustee of the acquiring entity did not deal with each other at *arm’s length and neither the original entity nor the acquiring entity had at least 300 beneficiaries just before the arrangement started:

the *market value of the original interest holder’s capital proceeds for the exchange is at least substantially the same as the market value of its original interest; and

its replacement interest carries the same kind of rights and obligations as those attached to its original interest.

Note: There are some cases where a trust will not be regarded as having 300 beneficiaries: see section 124-810.

CUFS

This section applies to the holder of a Chess Unit of Foreign Security as if the holder held the underlying interests that the unit represents.

Note: A Chess Unit of Foreign Security is an interest, traded on the stock market operated by ASX Limited, in a foreign share, unit or interest.

Meaning of trust voting interest

(6) A trust voting interest in a trust is an interest in the trust that confers rights of the same or a similar kind as the rights conferred by a *voting share in a company.

124-782 Transfer or allocation of cost base of shares acquired by acquiring entity etc.

Transfer of cost base

The *cost base of an original interest *acquired by an acquiring entity under the arrangement from an original interest holder becomes the first element of the cost base and *reduced cost base of the acquiring entity for the interest if:

the original interest holder obtains a roll-over; and

the holder is a significant stakeholder or a common stakeholder for the arrangement.

Note 1: For other interests, for example, interests for which the roll-over is not chosen, the cost base will be worked out under the ordinary cost base rules in Divisions 110 and 112.

Note 2: There is a special rule to determine the cost base of equity or debt given to a member of an acquiring wholly-owned group by another member of the group under an arrangement: see section 124-784.

Allocation of cost base in cancellation case

(2) The *cost base and *reduced cost base of any interests (the new interests) issued by the original entity to an acquiring entity under the *arrangement is worked out under subsection (3) if:

original interests of an original interest holder are cancelled under the arrangement; and

the holder obtains a roll-over for the cancellation; and

the holder is a significant stakeholder or a common stakeholder for the arrangement.

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the new interests of an acquiring entity is that part of the cost base of the cancelled interests as can be reasonably allocated to the new interests, having regard to:

the nature of the arrangement; and

the number, type and relative *market values of the cancelled interests and the new interests; and

any other relevant matters.

Example: Robert Co has 3 shareholders: Antill Co with 300 shares, Rachael Co 400 shares and Margaret Co 300 shares. The cost base of each share is $1 and market value is $2. Margaret Co is owned by two shareholders, John and Paul, who each have 50 shares. The market value of each share is $20.

Under an arrangement, Robert Co cancels the shares of Antill Co and Rachael Co. They receive 30 and 40 shares respectively in Margaret Co, which becomes the sole shareholder in Robert Co. The market value of Antill Co’s and Rachael Co’s shares in Margaret Co is equivalent to the market value of their cancelled shares in Robert Co.

Robert Co also issues 700 shares to Margaret Co, reflecting the $1,400 total market value of the shares issued by Margaret Co to Antill Co and Rachael Co. Before and after the arrangement, Margaret Co’s shares in Robert Co were worth $2 each.

It is necessary to reasonably allocate the cost bases of the cancelled shares (700 x $1) to the 700 shares issued by Robert Co to Margaret Co. In this case, an allocation of $1 per share would be reasonable.

Note: If no new shares are issued by Robert Co, the cost base of the original shares that Margaret Co holds would not be adjusted.

The amount allocated to a new interest under subsection (3) must not be more than its *market value just after the arrangement was completed.

124-783 Meaning of significant stakeholder, common stakeholder, significant stake and common stake

Significant stakeholder

(1) An original interest holder is a significant stakeholder for an *arrangement if it had:

a significant stake in the original entity just before the arrangement started; and

a significant stake in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed.

(2) Also, if an original interest holder is an acquiring entity, any other original interest holder is a significant stakeholder for an *arrangement if it:

had a significant stake in the original entity just before the arrangement started; and

is an associate of the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed.

Common stakeholder

(3) An original interest holder is a common stakeholder for an *arrangement if it had:

a common stake in the original entity just before the arrangement started; and

a common stake in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed.

(4) If an acquiring entity for an *arrangement is an original interest holder, each other original interest holder that has a replacement interest is a common stakeholder for the arrangement.

(5) No original interest holder is a common stakeholder for an *arrangement if either the original entity or the replacement entity had at least 300 *members (for a company) or 300 beneficiaries (for a trust) just before the arrangement started.

Significant stake

(6) An entity has a significant stake in a company at a time if the entity, or the entity and the entity’s *associates between them:

have at that time *shares carrying 30% or more of the voting rights in the company; or

have at that time the right to receive 30% or more of any *dividends that the company may pay; or

have at that time the right to receive 30% or more of any distribution of capital of the company.

Example: There are 4 shareholders in YZT Company: Sonja has 60%, Mario has 20%, Peter has 10% and Dave has 10%.

Sonja, Mario and Peter are associates. They each have a significant stake in YZT because, on an associate inclusive basis, they each have a 90% stake in YZT. Dave does not have a significant stake because his total stake, on an associate inclusive basis, is 10%.

(7) An entity has a significant stake in a trust at a time if the entity, or the entity and the entity’s *associates between them, had at that time the right to receive 30% or more of any distribution to beneficiaries of the trust of income or capital of the trust.

(8) No original interest holder has a significant stake in a company that has at least 300 *members or a trust that has at least 300 beneficiaries if it is reasonable for the company or the trustee of the trust to conclude that this is the case on the information available to it.

Note: There are some cases where a company or trust will not be regarded as having 300 members or beneficiaries: see section 124-810.

Common stake

(9) If the original entity and the replacement entity are companies, an entity, or 2 or more entities, have a common stake in the original entity just before the *arrangement started and in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed if the entity or entities, and their *associates, between them:

had 80% or more of:

the voting rights in the original entity just before the arrangement started; and

the voting rights in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed; or

had the right to receive 80% or more of:

any *dividends that the original entity may pay just before the arrangement started; and

any dividends that the replacement entity may pay just after the arrangement was completed; or

had the right to receive 80% or more of:

any distribution of capital of the original entity just before the arrangement started; and

any distribution of capital of the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed.

(10) If the original entity and the replacement entity are trusts, an entity, or 2 or more entities, have a common stake in the original entity just before the *arrangement started and in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed if the entity or entities, and their *associates, between them:

had, just before the arrangement started, the right to receive 80% or more of any distribution to beneficiaries of the original entity of income or capital of the original entity; and

had, just after the arrangement was completed, the right to receive 80% or more of any distribution to beneficiaries of the replacement entity of income or capital of that entity.

124-783A Rights that affect stakes

(1) An entity has a significant stake in another entity if:

the first entity has one or more *stake options in the other entity; and

the first entity would have such a stake (under section 124-783) if the first entity acquired *stake interests in the other entity under any of those stake options.

Note: Paragraph (b) is satisfied if there are any circumstances (e.g. the first entity exercises some but not all of the stake options) in which the first entity would have a significant stake in the other entity, even if in other circumstances the first entity would not have such a stake.

(2) An entity, or 2 or more entities, have a common stake in the original entity just before the *arrangement started and in the replacement entity just after the arrangement was completed if:

the entities:

had one or more *stake options in the original entity before the arrangement started; or

have one or more stake options in the replacement entity; and

the entities would have such stakes (under section 124-783) if:

the entities had acquired *stake interests in the original entity under any of the stake options mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i); or

the entities acquired stake interests in the replacement entity under some or all of the stake options mentioned in subparagraph (a)(ii).

(3) Something is a stake option an entity has in another entity if it gives the first entity, or its *associates, a right to acquire the following (stake interests):

if the other entity is a company:

voting rights in the company; or

the right to receive any part of any *dividends that the company may pay; or

the right to receive any part of any distribution of capital of the company;

if the other entity is a trust—the right to receive any part of any distribution to beneficiaries of the trust of income or capital of the trust;

and the acquisition could occur before the end of 5 years after the arrangement was completed.

Example 1: An option.

Example 2: A share that gives a voting right that is temporarily supressed.

For the purposes of subsection (1), treat the reference in subparagraph (3)(a)(i) to voting rights as being a reference to *shares carrying voting rights.

This section does not limit subsections 124-783(6) to (10).

124-784 Cost base of equity or debt given within acquiring group

Purpose

(1) This section allocates an appropriate *cost base to equity issued, or new debt owed, under the *arrangement, by a member of a *wholly-owned group to another member (the recipient) of the group, if:

the acquiring entity is a member of the group; and

the cost base of an original interest was transferred or allocated under section 124-782 because the original interest holder is a significant stakeholder or a common stakeholder for the arrangement.

Allocation of cost base

The first element of the *cost base of the equity or debt for the recipient is that part of the cost base of the original interest transferred or allocated under section 124-782 as:

may be reasonably allocated to the equity or debt; and

is not more than the *market value of the equity or debt just after the arrangement was completed.

124-784A When arrangement is a restructure

This section applies in relation to a single arrangement if:

the replacement entity for the arrangement knows, or could reasonably be expected to know:

that a roll-over under section 124-780 or 124-781 has been, or will be, obtained in relation to the arrangement; and

that there is a common stakeholder for the arrangement (disregarding subsections 124-783(4) and (5)); and

subsection (2) is satisfied for the arrangement.

Note: If this section applies, the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of interests in the original entity acquired under the arrangement is worked out under section 124-784B.

This subsection is satisfied for the arrangement if the result of step 2 is more than 80% of the result of step 3.

Method statement

Step 1. Add up the *market value just after the *arrangement was completed (the completion time) of all of the replacement interests issued by the replacement entity under the arrangement in exchange for the following interests (the qualifying interests):

original interests in the original entity;

any interests issued by the original entity to an acquiring entity under the arrangement in respect of other original interests in the original entity cancelled under the arrangement.

Step 2. Add to the result of step 1 the *market value at the completion time of all of the replacement interests issued by the replacement entity under any earlier arrangement for which this section applied in exchange for qualifying interests in the original entity.

Step 3. Add up the *market value at the completion time of all of the:

if the replacement entity is a company—*shares *on issue by the replacement entity; and

if the replacement entity is a company—options, rights and similar interests issued by the replacement entity that give the holder an entitlement to acquire a share in the replacement entity at or after the completion time; and

if the replacement entity is a trust—units or other interests in the replacement entity; and

if the replacement entity is a trust—options, rights or similar interests issued by the replacement entity that gives the holder an entitlement to acquire a unit or other interest in the replacement entity at or after the completion time.

Application if an entity is listed

For the purposes of:

subsection (2); and

step 5 of the method statement in subsection 124-784B(2);

if interests in an entity are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange at the completion time, then the replacement entity may choose that the *market value at that time of an interest in the first-mentioned entity is taken to be the officially quoted price of the interest at that time.

Application if more than one original entity

If qualifying interests in more than one original entity are *acquired under the arrangement, then, for the purposes of subsections (1) and (2):

those interests of each of those original entities are taken to have been acquired under separate arrangements; and

those separate arrangements are taken to have happened in the same order as the acquisitions.

If qualifying interests in more than one original entity:

would be taken by subsection (4) to have been *acquired under separate *arrangements happening at the same time; or

are acquired under separate arrangements that commence at the same time;

then, for the purposes of subsections (1) and (2), the replacement entity must choose the order in which those separate arrangements are to have happened.

Meaning of officially quoted price

(6) An interest in an entity has an officially quoted price at a particular time if, during the one week period starting on the day in which that time occurred, there was at least one transaction on the relevant stock exchange in interests of that class. That price is the weighted average of the prices at which those interests were traded on that stock exchange during that period.

(7) For the purposes of subsection (6), if an interest is quoted on 2 or more *approved stock exchanges on that day, the officially quoted price of the interest is determined under subsection (6) in respect of whichever of those the entity chooses.

124-784B What is the cost base and reduced cost base when arrangement is a restructure?

This section applies in relation to each qualifying interest in the original entity:

*acquired by an acquiring entity under an arrangement to which section 124-784A applies; and

for which the first element of the *cost base of the acquiring entity is not worked out under section 124-782.

Note: Section 124-782 applies when an original interest holder is a significant stakeholder or a common stakeholder.

First element of cost base—qualifying interests acquired in exchange for replacement interests only

The first element of the *cost base of the acquiring entity for the qualifying interest in the original entity is worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Add up:

the *market value, at the completion time, of the original entity’s *pre-CGT assets (except trading stock); and

the *cost bases, at the completion time, of the original entity’s *post-CGT assets (except trading stock); and

for the original entity’s *CGT assets (except trading stock) that had no cost base—the maximum amount of consideration the original entity would need to receive if it were to dispose, at the completion time, of those assets without an amount being assessable income of, or deductible to, the original entity; and

the amount worked out under steps 2 and 3.

Step 2. For the original entity’s trading stock, add up:

the *value of the trading stock at the start of the income year containing the completion time; and

for *live stock acquired by natural increase during that income year but before the completion time—the *cost of that live stock; and

the amount of any outgoing incurred in connection with acquiring an item of trading stock during that income year but before the completion time (except live stock acquired by natural increase); and

the amount of any outgoings forming part of the cost of the trading stock incurred by the entity during its current holding of the trading stock but before the completion time.

Step 3. For any asset of the original entity not covered by steps 1 and 2, work out the amount that would be the asset’s *cost base at the completion time if it were a CGT asset.

Step 4. Subtract from the result of step 1 the original entity’s liabilities (if any) at the completion time in respect of those assets.

Step 5. If there is one class of *membership interests in the original entity, divide the result of step 4 by the total number of those membership interests at the completion time.

If there are 2 or more classes of membership interests in the original entity, allocate a portion of the result of step 4 to each class in proportion to the *market value of all the membership interests in that class and divide that result by the total number of membership interests in that class at the completion time.

First element of cost base—interests acquired in exchange for replacement interests and cash etc.

Note 1: For the purposes of this subsection, Division 701 (Core rules for consolidated groups) is disregarded for an original entity that becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group under the arrangement (see paragraph 715-910(1)(a)).

Note 2: If the original entity is the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group, then subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) and section 701-5 (the entry history rule) apply in relation to that group when working out steps 1 and 2 (see subsection 715-910(2)).

Note 3: For step 5, the replacement entity may choose to use the officially quoted price of the qualifying interests as their market value (see subsection 124-784A(3)).

However, if the qualifying interest was acquired under the arrangement partly in exchange for one or more replacement interests and partly for something else, subsection (2) applies only for working out the first element of that part of the *cost base of the qualifying interest that is attributable to the replacement interests.

Note 1: This means that the acquiring entity will have to apportion the cost base amount worked out under subsection (2) according to the relative values of the replacement interests and the other component.

Note 2: The first element of that part of the cost base, and reduced cost base, of the qualifying interest that is attributable to cash etc. is worked out using the general rules about cost base.

Liabilities

For the purposes of step 4 of subsection (2), a liability of the original entity that is not a liability in respect of a specific asset or assets of the entity is taken to be a liability in respect of all the assets of the entity.

If a liability is in respect of 2 or more assets, the proportion of the liability that is in respect of any one of those assets is equal to:

First element of reduced cost base

The first element of the *reduced cost base of the acquiring entity for the qualifying interest in the original entity is worked out similarly.

Rights and options to acquire membership interests

For the purposes of step 5 of subsection (2), if at the completion time a person holds an option, right or similar interest (including a contingent option, right or interest), created or issued by the original entity, to acquire a *membership interest in the original entity, that option, right or interest is treated as if it were a membership interest in the original entity.

124-784C Cost base of equity or debt given within acquiring group

Purpose

(1) This section allocates an appropriate *cost base to equity issued, or new debt owed, under the *arrangement by a member of a *wholly-owned group to another member (the holder) of the group, if:

an acquiring entity is a member of the group; and

the cost base of the acquiring entity for a qualifying interest was worked out under section 124-784B.

Allocation of cost base

The first element of the *cost base of the equity or debt for the holder is that part of the cost base of the qualifying interest worked out under section 124-784B as:

may be reasonably allocated to the equity or debt; and

is not more than the *market value of the equity or debt at the completion time.

124-785 What is the roll-over?

A *capital gain you make from your original interest is disregarded.

You work out the first element of the *cost base of each CGT asset you received as a result of the exchange by reasonably attributing to it the cost base (or the part of it) of your original interest for which it was exchanged and for which you obtained the roll-over.

In applying subsection (2), you reduce the *cost base of your original interest (just before you stop owning it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to an ineligible part (see section 124-790).

The first element of the *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Example 1: Lyn exchanges 1 share with a cost base of $10 for another share. The cost base of the new share is $10.

Example 2: Glenn exchanges 2 shares with cost bases of $10 and $11 respectively for one new share. The cost base of the new share is $21.

Example 3: Wayne exchanges 1 share with a cost base of $9 for share A with a market value of $5 and share B with a market value of $10. The cost base of share A is $3 and the cost base of share B is $6.

124-790 Partial roll-over

(1) The original interest holder can obtain only a partial roll-over if its *capital proceeds for its original interest include something (the ineligible proceeds) other than its replacement interest. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part) of its original interest for which it received ineligible proceeds.

The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of your original interest as is reasonably attributable to it.

Example: Ken owns 100 shares in Aim Ltd. Those shares have a cost base of $2.

Ken accepts an offer from LBZ Ltd to acquire those shares. The offer is 1 share in LBZ (market value $4) plus $1 for each Aim share.

Ken chooses the roll-over to the extent that he can.

The cost base of the ineligible part is [$100 $200] $500 $40.

Ken makes a capital gain of $100 $40 $60.

124-795 Exceptions

You cannot obtain the roll-over if, just before you stop owning your original interest, you are a foreign resident unless, just after you *acquire your replacement interest, the replacement interest is taxable Australian property.

You cannot obtain the roll-over if:

any *capital gain you might make from your replacement interest would be disregarded (except because of a roll-over); or

you and the acquiring entity are members of the same wholly-owned group just before you stop owning your original interest and the acquiring entity is a foreign resident.

Example: An example of a capital gain or loss being disregarded as mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) is because the asset is trading stock.

Note: A roll-over may be available under Subdivision 126-B in the circumstances mentioned in paragraph (2)(b).

You cannot obtain the roll-over for the CGT event happening in relation to the exchange of your original interest if you can choose a roll-over under Division 122 or 615 for that event.

Note: Division 122 deals with the disposal of assets to a wholly-owned company, and Division 615 deals with business restructures.

You cannot obtain the roll-over for the CGT event happening in relation to the exchange of your qualifying interest if:

the replacement entity makes a choice to that effect under this subsection; and

that entity or the original entity notifies you in writing of the choice before the exchange.

124-800 Interest received for pre-CGT interest

If, in consequence of the arrangement, you exchange an interest that you *acquired before 20 September 1985 for an interest in the replacement entity, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the interest in the replacement entity is its *market value just after you acquired it.

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the interest in the replacement entity is reduced if all or part of a *capital gain from CGT event K6 happening is disregarded because of subsection 104-230(10). The amount of the reduction is the amount of the *capital gain you disregard under that subsection.

Note 1: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

Note 2: Subsection 104-230(10) provides that a capital gain from CGT event K6 is disregarded to the extent that you could have chosen a roll-over under this Subdivision if your original interest had been post-CGT.

124-810 Certain companies and trusts not regarded as having 300 members or beneficiaries

For the purposes of this Subdivision, a company is treated as if it did not have at least 300 *members if subsection (3) or (5) applies to it.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, a trust is treated as if it did not have at least 300 beneficiaries if subsection (4) or (5) applies to it.

Concentrated ownership

This subsection applies to a company if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, *shares in the company:

carrying *fixed entitlements to:

at least 75% of the company’s income; or

at least 75% of the company’s capital; or

carrying at least 75% of the voting rights in the company.

This subsection applies to a trust if an individual owns, or up to 20 individuals own between them, directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) and for their own benefit, units or other fixed interests in the trust:

carrying *fixed entitlements to:

at least 75% of the trust’s income; or

at least 75% of the trust’s capital; or

if beneficiaries of the trust have a right to vote in respect of activities of the trust—carrying at least 75% of those voting rights.

Possible variation of rights etc.

This subsection applies to a company or trust if, because of:

any provision in the entity’s constituent document, or in any contract, agreement or instrument:

authorising the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to any of the *shares, units or other fixed interests in the entity; or

relating to the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of any of those interests; or

any contract, arrangement, option or instrument under which a person has power to acquire any of those interests; or

any power, authority or discretion in a person in relation to the rights attaching to any of those shares, units or interests;

it is reasonable to conclude that the rights attaching to any of those interests are capable of being varied or abrogated in such a way (even if they are not in fact varied or abrogated in that way) that, directly or indirectly, subsection (3) or (4) would apply to the entity.

Single individual

For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), all of the following are taken to be a single individual:

an individual, whether or not the individual holds *shares, units or other interests in the entity concerned;

the individual’s *associates;

for any shares, units or interests in respect of which other individuals are nominees of the individual or of the individual’s associates—those other individuals.

Subdivision 124-N — Disposal of assets by a trust to a company

Guide to Subdivision 124-N

124-850 What this Subdivision is about

Entities can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

a trust disposes of all of its assets to a company; and

units and interests in the trust are replaced by shares in the company.

The roll-over may also be available for 2 or more trusts disposing of all their assets to a single company.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

124-855 What this Subdivision deals with

124-860 Requirements for roll-over

124-865 Entities both choose the roll-over

124-870 Roll-over for owner of units or interests in a trust

124-875 Effect on the transferor and transferee

Operative provisions

Note: The effect of the roll-over may be reversed if the trust does not cease to exist within 6 months: see section 104-195.

124-855 What this Subdivision deals with

(1) A roll-over may be available for a restructuring (a trust restructure) if:

(a) a trust, or 2 or more trusts, (the transferor) *dispose of all of their *CGT assets to a company limited by *shares (the transferee); and

CGT event E4 is capable of applying to all of the units and interests in the transferor; and

the requirements in section 124-860 are met.

Note: A roll-over is not available for a restructure undertaken by a discretionary trust.

For 2 or more transferors, units and interests in each transferor must be owned in the same proportions by the same beneficiaries.

Example: Matthew and Jaclyn each own 50% of the units in the Spring Unit Trust and the Dale Unit trust. All of the assets of both trusts are disposed of to Jonathon Pty Ltd. A roll-over for a trust restructure is available if the other requirements of this Subdivision are met.

124-860 Requirements for roll-over

All of the *CGT assets owned by the transferor must be disposed of to the transferee during the trust restructuring period. However, ignore any CGT assets retained by the transferor to pay existing or expected debts of the transferor.

(2) The trust restructuring period for a trust restructure:

starts just before the first CGT asset is *disposed of to the transferee under the trust restructure, which must happen on or after 11 November 1999; and

ends when the last CGT asset of the transferor is disposed of to the transferee.

The transferee must not be an *exempt entity.

The transferee must be a company that:

has never carried on commercial activities; and

has no *CGT assets, other than any or all of the following:

small amounts of cash or debt;

its rights under an arrangement, if (collectively) those rights only facilitate the transfer of assets to the transferee from the transferor; and

has no losses of any kind.

Example: It could be a shelf company.

Subsection (4) does not apply to a transferee that is the trustee of the transferor.

Just after the end of the trust restructuring period:

each entity that owned interests in a transferor just before the start of the trust restructuring period must own replacement interests in the transferee in the same proportion as it owned those interests in that transferor; and

the *market value of the replacement interests each of those entities owns in the transferee must be at least substantially the same as the market value of the interests it owned in the transferor or transferors just before the start of the trust restructuring period.

Note 1: Any assets in the company just before the start of the trust restructuring period may affect the ability of owners of units or interests to comply with paragraph (6)(b).

Note 2: See section 124-20 if an entity uses an interest sale facility.

For the purposes of subsection (6), ignore any *shares in the transferee that:

just before the start of the trust restructuring period, were owned by entities who together owned no more than 5 shares; and

just after the end of that period, represented such a low percentage of the total *market value of all the shares that it is reasonable to treat other entities as if they owned all the shares in the transferee.

Example: To continue the example in subsection 124-855(2), assume that Jonathon Pty Ltd was a shelf company organised for Matthew and Jaclyn by their solicitor, Indira.

Indira owned the 2 shares in Jonathon Pty Ltd before the trust restructuring period. The company issues Matthew and Jaclyn 5,000 shares each.

In these circumstances, it is reasonable to treat Matthew and Jaclyn as if they owned all the shares in Jonathon Pty Ltd.

124-865 Entities both choose the roll-over

A roll-over is only available for the transferor and transferee if both the transferor and transferee choose to obtain it.

Note 1: If they do so, the consequences for the transferor and transferee are set out in section 124-875.

Note 2: An entity that owns a unit or interest in the transferor can also choose to obtain a roll-over: see section 124-870.

124-870 Roll-over for owner of units or interests in a trust

You can choose to obtain a roll-over (whether or not the transferor and transferee choose to obtain a roll-over, and even if CGT event J4 applies) if:

(a) you own units or interests in the transferor (your original interests); and

(b) the ownership of all your units or interests ends under a trust restructure in exchange for *shares in the transferee (your replacement interests).

Note 1: The roll-over consequences are set out in Subdivision 124-A. The original assets are your units and interests in the transferor. The new assets are your shares in the transferee.

Note 2: The effect of the roll-over may be reversed if the transferor does not cease to exist within 6 months: see section 104-195.

You must make the choice for each of your original interests.

An entity that is a foreign resident cannot choose a roll-over under this section unless the replacement interests the entity *acquires in the transferee are taxable Australian property just after their acquisition.

If you choose a roll-over, you cannot make a *capital loss from a CGT event that happens to your original interests during the trust restructuring period.

Note: The rule in subsection (4) prevents a capital loss arising on your units or interests after the trust assets have been disposed of to the company but before your shares are issued to you.

Exception: trading stock

This section does not apply to your ownership of an original interest ending if:

the interest was an item of your trading stock and the corresponding replacement interest becomes an item of your trading stock when you *acquire it; or

the interest was not an item of your trading stock but the corresponding replacement interest becomes an item of your trading stock when you acquire it.

124-875 Effect on the transferor and transferee

Capital gains and losses disregarded

Any *capital gain or *capital loss from CGT event A1 happening to the transferor under the trust restructure is disregarded (even if CGT event J4 applies).

Note: The effect of the roll-over may be reversed if the transferor does not cease to exist within 6 months: see section 104-195.

Cost base is transferred

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base (for the transferee) of each CGT asset that the transferee *acquires under the trust restructure is the same as the cost base and reduced cost base of that asset (for the transferor) just before that acquisition.

Note: For the cost base and reduced cost base of interests in the transferee: see Subdivision 124-A.

Pre-CGT assets retain their status

If the transferor *acquired any of the *CGT assets *disposed of to the transferee under the trust restructure before 20 September 1985, the transferee is taken to have acquired it before that day.

However, subsection (3) is taken never to have applied to such an asset of the transferee if subsection 104-195(4) (CGT event J4) applies to the transferee in relation to the asset.

Exception: trading stock

This section does not apply to a CGT asset if:

the asset was an item of trading stock of the transferor and becomes an item of trading stock of the transferee; or

the asset was not an item of trading stock of the transferor but becomes an item of trading stock of the transferee when the transferee *acquires it.

Exception: asset must be taxable Australian property for foreign resident transferee

For a transferee that is a foreign resident, this section only applies to a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property just after the transferee *acquires it under the trust restructure.

Subdivision 124-P — Exchange of a membership interest in an MDO for a membership interest in another MDO

Guide to Subdivision 124-P

124-975 What this Subdivision is about

You can choose a roll-over if you exchange your interest as a member of an MDO for an interest as a member of another MDO.

You can only choose the roll-over if you would have made a capital gain from the exchange.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

124-980 Exchange of membership interests in an MDO

124-985 What the roll-over is for post-CGT interests

124-990 Partial roll-over

124-995 Pre-CGT interests

Operative provisions

124-980 Exchange of membership interests in an MDO

There is a roll-over if:

an entity exchanges:

(i) an interest (the original interest) in an *MDO (the original MDO) as a member of the original MDO; for

(ii) a similar interest (the replacement interest) in another MDO (the new MDO) as a member of the new MDO; and

both the original MDO and the new MDO are companies limited by guarantee; and

the exchange is in consequence of a single arrangement that satisfies subsection (3); and

apart from the roll-over, the entity would make a *capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to its original interest; and

the entity chooses to obtain the roll-over; and

the entity acquired the original interest on or after 20 September 1985.

Note: The entity can obtain only a partial roll-over if the capital proceeds for its original interest include something other than its replacement interest: see section 124-990.

In working out whether an original interest is exchanged for a similar interest, disregard a difference that consists only of a right to receive distributions of income or capital.

Conditions for arrangement

The arrangement must:

result in the new MDO becoming the sole *member of the original MDO; and

be one in which participation was available on substantially the same terms for all of the holders of interests as members of the original MDO of a particular type.

124-985 What the roll-over is for post-CGT interests

A *capital gain the entity makes from an original interest *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is disregarded.

The entity works out the first element of the *cost base of each replacement interest the entity received as a result of the exchange by reasonably attributing to it the cost base (or the part of it) of the entity’s original interest for which it was exchanged and for which the entity obtained the roll-over.

In applying subsection (2), the entity reduces (but not below zero) the *cost base of the original interest (just before stopping owning it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to an ineligible part (see section 124-990).

The first element of the *reduced cost base of a replacement interest is worked out similarly.

124-990 Partial roll-over

(1) The entity can obtain only a partial roll-over if its *capital proceeds for its original interest include something (the ineligible proceeds) other than its replacement interest. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part) of its original interest for which it received ineligible proceeds.

The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the original interest as is reasonably attributable to it.

124-995 Pre-CGT interests

If the entity exchanges an original interest that the entity *acquired before 20 September 1985 for its replacement interest, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the replacement interest is zero.

Subdivision 124-Q — Exchange of stapled ownership interests for ownership interests in a unit trust

Guide to Subdivision 124-Q

124-1040 What this Subdivision is about

There is a roll-over if you own ownership interests that are stapled and, as a result of a reorganisation, you stop owning those interests and you acquire or own ownership interests in an interposed unit trust.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

124-1045 Exchange of stapled securities

124-1050 Conditions

124-1055 Consequences of the roll-over for exchanging members

124-1060 Consequences of the roll-over for interposed trust

Operative provisions

124-1045 Exchange of stapled securities

There is a roll-over if:

you own *ownership interests in 2 or more trusts, or in one or more companies and one or more trusts, and those interests are stapled together to form stapled securities; and

(b) at least one of the trusts is a trust whose trustee is not assessed and liable to pay tax under Division 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

if no company is involved—at least one of the trusts is a trust whose trustee is assessed and liable to pay tax under Division 6C of Part III of that Act; and

(d) under a *scheme for reorganising the affairs of the relevant *stapled entities, you and the other entities that own the ownership interests in the stapled entities (together the exchanging members):

(i) stop being the owner of those ownership interests and acquire ownership interests in a new unit trust (the interposed trust) and nothing else (a new trust case); or

(ii) retain their ownership interests in one of those trusts (also the interposed trust), stop being the owner of the remaining ownership interests that form the stapled securities and receive nothing other than ownership interests in the interposed trust, or an increase in value of their existing ownership interests in the interposed trust, or both (an existing trust case); and

Note: See section 124-20 if an exchanging member uses an interest sale facility.

under the scheme, the interposed trust becomes the owner of:

for a new trust case—all of the ownership interests in the stapled entities; or

for an existing trust case—all of the ownership interests in the other stapled entities; and

the conditions in section 124-1050 are satisfied.

Note: Division 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 deals with taxing public trading trusts in the same way as companies.

(2) An entity is a stapled entity in relation to stapled securities if *ownership interests in the entity form part of the stapled securities.

Ignore for the purposes of subsection (1) *ownership interests held by one *stapled entity in another stapled entity as at the start of the day on which the Bill for this Act was introduced into the Parliament.

124-1050 Conditions

(1) Just after the *scheme is completed (the completion time), each exchanging member must own a percentage of the *ownership interests in the interposed trust that reasonably equates to the percentage of the ownership interests that the member owned in the *stapled entities.

Example: Public Company A, Unit Trust No. 1 and Unit Trust No. 2 are stapled entities. Each stapled entity has 4,000 ownership interests on issue. There are no ownership interests in any of the stapled entities other than shares in the company and units in the trusts.

Under a scheme for reorganising the stapled entities, Unit Trust No. 3 is interposed between the stapled entities and the owners of the interests in those entities. Unit Trust No. 3 (the interposed trust) becomes the owner of all of the interests in each of the three stapled entities. Exchanging members receive one unit in the interposed trust for each stapled security they owned. All units in the interposed trust are of the same class.

Naomi owned 200 shares in Public Company A, 200 units in Unit Trust No. 1 and 200 units in Unit Trust No. 2. Naomi therefore owned 5% of the ownership interests in each of the stapled entities. Under the scheme, Naomi receives 100 units in Unit Trust No. 3 (out of a total of 2,000 units) in exchange for her ownership interests in the stapled entities. Naomi now owns 5% of the ownership interests in the interposed trust and meets the condition in subsection (1).

Just after the completion time, each exchanging member must have the same, or as nearly as practicable the same, proportionate *market value of *ownership interests in the interposed trust as the member had in the *stapled entities just before that time.

In working out whether an exchanging member complies with subsection (2), an anticipated reasonable approximation of the *market value of *ownership interests just after the completion time is sufficient.

Note: An anticipated reasonable approximation of market values of ownership interests may include valuations provided to exchanging members in scheme documents.

You must be an Australian resident at the completion time or, if you are a foreign resident at that time:

some or all of your *ownership interests in the *stapled entities must have been taxable Australian property just before that time; and

your ownership interests in the interposed trust must be taxable Australian property just after that time.

124-1055 Consequences of the roll-over for exchanging members

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of the *scheme from each of your *ownership interests is disregarded.

If you *acquired all of your *ownership interests in the *stapled entities on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of your ownership interests in the interposed trust is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the *cost bases of all of your ownership interests in the *stapled entities; and

the number, *market value and character of your ownership interests in the interposed trust.

Example: Naomi had a cost base of $2.00 for each of her 200 Public Company A shares, $1.50 for each of her 200 Unit Trust No. 1 units and $0.50 for each of her 200 Unit Trust No. 2 units. The total of the cost bases of all of her membership interests is $800.00.

It is reasonable to allocate $8.00 to each of the 100 units in the interposed trust that she receives under the reorganisation.

If you *acquired all of your *ownership interests in the *stapled entities before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired all of your ownership interests in the interposed trust before that day.

If you *acquired some of your *ownership interests in the *stapled entities before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired so many of your ownership interests in the interposed trust as is reasonable before that day having regard to:

the number, *market value and character of your ownership interests in the stapled entities; and

the number, market value and character of your ownership interests in the interposed trust.

Note: Generally, a capital gain or capital loss from a CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 can be disregarded: see Division 104.

(5) The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of your *ownership interests in the interposed trust that is not taken by subsection (4) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 (your post-CGT interests) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the cost bases of your ownership interests in the *stapled entities that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and

the number, *market value and character of your post-CGT interests.

124-1060 Consequences of the roll-over for interposed trust

Apply this section separately for the interposed trust in relation to the *ownership interests in each *stapled entity that the trustee of the interposed trust *acquires under the *scheme.

A whole number of *ownership interests in a *stapled entity that the trustee *acquires under the *scheme are taken to have been acquired before 20 September 1985 if any of the stapled entity’s assets as at the completion time were acquired by it before that day.

Note: Generally, a capital gain or capital loss from a CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 can be disregarded: see Division 104.

The number (worked out as at the completion time) is the greatest possible that (when expressed as a percentage of all the *ownership interests in the *stapled entity *acquired by the trustee) does not exceed:

the *market value of the stapled entity’s assets that it acquired before 20 September 1985; less

its liabilities (if any) in respect of those assets;

expressed as a percentage of the market value of all the stapled entity’s assets less all of its liabilities. The amounts in paragraphs (a) and (b) are to be worked out as at the completion time.

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of the trustee’s *ownership interests in that *stapled entity that are not taken by subsection (3) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 is such proportion as is reasonable of the total of the cost bases (as at the completion time) of that stapled entity’s assets that it acquired on or after that day less its liabilities (if any) in respect of those assets.

In applying this section:

a liability of a *stapled entity that is not a liability in respect of a specific asset or assets of the stapled entity is a liability in respect of all the assets of the stapled entity; and

if a liability is in respect of 2 or more assets, the proportion of the liability that is in respect of any one of those assets is such amount as is reasonable having regard to the *market values of each of those assets.

Subdivision 124-R — Water entitlements

Guide to Subdivision 124-R

124-1100 What this Subdivision is about

There is a roll-over if a CGT event happens to you because of something occurring in relation to one or more water entitlements. You do not need to own water entitlements for the event to happen to you.

Table of sections

Replacement case

124-1105 Replacement water entitlements roll-over

124-1110 Roll-over consequences—capital gain or loss disregarded

124-1115 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over

124-1120 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements post-CGT

124-1125 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements pre-CGT

124-1130 Roll-over consequences—some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT

Reduction case

124-1135 Reduction in water entitlements roll-over

124-1140 Roll-over consequences—capital gain or loss disregarded

124-1145 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements post-CGT

124-1150 Roll-over consequences—some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT

Variation to CGT asset case

124-1155 Roll-over for variation to CGT asset

124-1160 Roll-over consequences

124-1165 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over

Replacement case

124-1105 Replacement water entitlements roll-over

Automatic roll-over for single water entitlements

There is a roll-over if:

(a) your ownership of a *water entitlement (the original entitlement) ends, resulting in a *CGT event happening; and

(b) as a result of your ownership of the original entitlement ending, you *acquire one or more water entitlements (each of which is a new entitlement); and

if you are a foreign resident just before your ownership of the original entitlement ends, or you are the trustee of a trust that is a foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which your ownership of the original entitlement ends:

the original entitlement was taxable Australian property just before you stopped owning it; and

if there is only one new entitlement—the new entitlement is taxable Australian property just after you acquire it; and

if there is more than one new entitlement—each new entitlement is taxable Australian property just after you acquire it; and

you have not chosen a roll-over in relation to the original entitlement under subsection (2).

Elective roll-over for bundled water entitlements

There is a roll-over if:

(a) your ownership of more than one *water entitlement (each of which is an original entitlement) ends, resulting in a *CGT event happening; and

(b) as a result of your ownership of the original entitlements ending, you *acquire one or more water entitlements (each of which is a new entitlement); and

if you are a foreign resident just before your ownership of the original entitlements ends, or you are the trustee of a trust that is a foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which your ownership of the original entitlements ends:

each original entitlement was taxable Australian property just before you stopped owning it; and

if there is only one new entitlement—the new entitlement is taxable Australian property just after you acquire it; and

if there is more than one new entitlement—each new entitlement is taxable Australian property just after you acquire it; and

you choose to obtain the roll-over.

Note: Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.

No roll-over if Subdivision 124-C applies

However, there is no roll-over in relation to a water entitlement under this section if there is a roll-over in relation to the water entitlement under Subdivision 124-C (statutory licences).

Meaning of water entitlement

(4) A water entitlement is a legal or equitable right that an entity owns that relates to water, including a right to:

receive water; or

take water from a water resource; or

have water delivered; or

deliver water;

and includes a right that must be owned by the entity in order to own a right covered by paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d).

Example: Philip owns a share in Big Pump Irrigation Ltd. The share provides Philip with the right to receive dividends, to participate in the running of the company and to have a separate contractual agreement with Big Pump Irrigation Ltd for the delivery of 1 megalitre of water. Philip has such an agreement. Philip’s agreement is a water entitlement. Philip’s share is also a water entitlement because he must own the share in order to have a contractual arrangement with Big Pump Irrigation Ltd for the delivery of water.

124-1110 Roll-over consequences—capital gain or loss disregarded

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from each original entitlement that qualifies for a roll-over.

124-1115 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over

(1) You can obtain only a partial roll-over in relation to an original entitlement if the *capital proceeds for that entitlement includes something (the ineligible proceeds) other than a new entitlement or new entitlements. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part) of the entitlement for which you received the ineligible proceeds.

Note: If the roll-over is under subsection 124-1105(2), some or all of the original entitlements may each have an ineligible part.

The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the original entitlement as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

The *reduced cost base of the ineligible part is worked out similarly.

In working out what is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part for the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), have regard to the *market value of the new entitlement relative to the market value of the ineligible proceeds.

If the roll-over is under subsection 124-1105(2), for the purposes of sections 124-1120 and 124-1130, for each original entitlement that has an ineligible part:

reduce the *cost base of that entitlement (just before you stopped owning it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part; and

reduce the *reduced cost base of that entitlement similarly.

124-1120 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements post-CGT

In a situation covered by subsection 124-1105(1), if you *acquired the original entitlement on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base of the new entitlement (or of each of the new entitlements) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the cost base and *market value of the original entitlement; and

the number and market value of the new entitlements; and

any amount you paid to get the new entitlement (which can include giving property: see section 103-5).

In a situation covered by subsection 124-1105(2), if you *acquired the original entitlements on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base of the new entitlement (or of each of the new entitlements) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the cost bases of all the original entitlements; and

the number and *market value of the original entitlements; and

the number and market value of the new entitlements; and

any amount you paid to get the new entitlements (which can include giving property: see section 103-5).

In the situation covered by subsection 124-1105(1) or (2), the first element of the *reduced cost base of the new entitlement (or of each of the new entitlements) is worked out similarly.

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(b) and (2)(c), the *market value of the new entitlements is their market value at the time you *acquired them.

124-1125 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements pre-CGT

In the situation covered by subsection 124-1105(1), if you *acquired the original entitlement before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the new entitlement (or all of the new entitlements) before that day.

In the situation covered by subsection 124-1105(2), if you *acquired the original entitlements before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired the new entitlement (or all of the new entitlements) before that day.

124-1130 Roll-over consequences—some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT

This section applies if:

the roll-over is under subsection 124-1105(2); and

you *acquired one or more of the original entitlements before 20 September 1985; and

you acquired one or more of the original entitlements on or after that day.

You are taken to have *acquired so many of your new entitlements before 20 September 1985 as is reasonable, having regard to:

the number and *market value of your original entitlements; and

the number and market value of your new entitlements.

(3) The first element of the *cost base of each of your new entitlements that are not taken by subsection (2) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 (your post-CGT entitlements) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the cost bases of the original entitlements you acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and

the number and *market value of your post-CGT entitlements; and

any amount you paid to get the new entitlements (which can include giving property: see section 103-5).

The reduced cost base of each of your post-CGT entitlements is worked out similarly.

Reduction case

124-1135 Reduction in water entitlements roll-over

There is a roll-over if:

you own more than one water entitlement; and

under an arrangement:

(i) your ownership of one or more of the water entitlements (each of which is an original entitlement) ends, resulting in a *CGT event happening; and

you do not receive anything for the original entitlement or entitlements; and

(iii) you retain one or more of your original entitlements (the retained entitlements); and

the total of the *market values of all of the retained entitlements immediately after the CGT event happens is substantially the same as the total of the market values of all of the original entitlements immediately before the CGT event happened.

124-1140 Roll-over consequences—capital gain or loss disregarded

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from your ownership of the original entitlements ending is disregarded.

124-1145 Roll-over consequences—all original entitlements post-CGT

This section applies if you *acquired the original entitlement (or all of the original entitlements) on or after 20 September 1985.

The first element of the *cost base of the retained entitlement (or of each of the retained entitlements) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the cost bases of all the original entitlements; and

the number and *market value of the original entitlements; and

the number and market value of the retained entitlements.

The first element of the *reduced cost base of the retained entitlements is worked out similarly.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(c), the *market value of the retained entitlements is their market value just after the CGT event referred to in section 124-1135 happens.

124-1150 Roll-over consequences—some original entitlements pre-CGT, others post-CGT

This section applies if:

you *acquired one or more of the original entitlements before 20 September 1985; and

you acquired one or more of the original entitlements on or after that day.

You are taken to have *acquired so many of your retained entitlements before 20 September 1985 as is reasonable, having regard to:

the number and *market value of your original entitlements; and

the number and market value of your retained entitlements.

(3) The first element of the *cost base of each of your retained entitlements that are not taken by subsection (2) to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 (your post-CGT entitlements) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the cost bases of the original entitlements you acquired on or after 20 September 1985; and

the number and *market value of the your post-CGT entitlements.

The reduced cost base of each of your post-CGT entitlements is worked out similarly.

Variation to CGT asset case

124-1155 Roll-over for variation to CGT asset

There is a roll-over if:

a CGT event happens to a CGT asset that you own; and

the CGT event happens as a direct result of the circumstances that gave rise to a roll-over under section 124-1105; and

(c) you continue to be the owner of the asset (the retained asset) immediately after the CGT event has happened.

124-1160 Roll-over consequences

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the CGT event is disregarded.

124-1165 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over

(1) You can obtain only a partial roll-over in relation to a *CGT asset if the *capital proceeds for that asset includes something (the ineligible proceeds) other than your retained asset. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part) of the asset for which you received the ineligible proceeds.

The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the CGT asset as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

The *reduced cost base of the ineligible part is worked out similarly.

In working out what is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part for the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), have regard to the *market value of the retained asset relative to the market value of the ineligible proceeds.

Subdivision 124-S — Interest realignment arrangements

Guide to Subdivision 124-S

124-1220 What this Subdivision is about

There is roll-over relief if an interest in a mining, quarrying or prospecting right is disposed of under an interest realignment arrangement.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

124-1225 Disposals of interests under interest realignment arrangements

124-1230 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over

124-1235 Roll-over consequences—all original interests were post-CGT and pre-UCA

124-1240 Roll-over consequences—all original interests were pre-CGT

124-1245 Roll-over consequences—original interests were of mixed CGT status, all were pre-UCA

124-1250 Roll-over consequences—some original interests were pre-UCA

Operative provisions

124-1225 Disposals of interests under interest realignment arrangements

There is a roll-over if:

CGT event A1 happens because you *dispose of one or more assets each of which:

(i) is an interest (an original interest) in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right; and

is an interest that you started to *hold before 1 July 2001; and

the disposal occurs under an interest realignment arrangement.

(2) The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of an interest (a new interest) in a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you acquire under the *interest realignment arrangement includes any amount you paid to acquire the new interest.

Note 1: The rest of the first element is worked out under Subdivision 124-A.

Note 2: Under subsections 124-10(2) and 124-15(2), a capital gain or capital loss you make from the original interest is disregarded.

The amount can include giving property: see section 103-5. However, it does not include a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right that you dispose of under the interest realignment arrangement.

124-1230 Roll-over consequences—partial roll-over

(1) You can obtain only a partial roll-over in relation to an original interest if the *capital proceeds for that interest includes something (the ineligible proceeds) other than a new interest or new interests. There is no roll-over for that part (the ineligible part) of the interest for which you received the ineligible proceeds.

Note: If there is more than one original interest, some or all of those original interests may each have an ineligible part.

The *cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the cost base of the original interest as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

The *reduced cost base of the ineligible part is that part of the reduced cost base of the original interest as is reasonably attributable to the ineligible part.

For the purposes of sections 124-1235 and 124-1245, for each original interest that has an ineligible part:

reduce the *cost base of that interest (just before the CGT event that happened in relation to it) by so much of that cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part; and

reduce the *reduced cost base of that interest (just before the CGT event that happened in relation to it) by so much of that reduced cost base as is attributable to that ineligible part.

124-1235 Roll-over consequences—all original interests were post-CGT and pre-UCA

If you acquire the new interest in exchange for:

one original interest that you started to *hold on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001; or

2 or more original interests, each of which you started to hold on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001;

you are taken to have started to hold the new interest (or all of the new interests) on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001.

The first element of the *cost base of the new interest (or of each of the new interests) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the cost bases of all the original interests; and

the number, *market value and character of the original interests; and

the number, market value and character of the new interests.

The first element of the *reduced cost base of the new interest (or of each of the new interests) is such amount as is reasonable having regard to:

the total of the reduced cost bases of all the original interests; and

the number, *market value and character of the original interests; and

the number, market value and character of the new interests.

124-1240 Roll-over consequences—all original interests were pre-CGT

If you acquire the new interest in exchange for:

one original interest that you started to *hold before 20 September 1985; or

2 or more original interests, each of which you started to hold before 20 September 1985;

you are taken to have started to hold the new interest (or all of the new interests) before that day.

124-1245 Roll-over consequences—original interests were of mixed CGT status, all were pre-UCA

This section applies if:

you acquire the new interest in exchange for more than one original interest; and

you started to *hold one or more of the original interests before 20 September 1985; and

you started to hold one or more of the original interests on or after that day; and

you did not start to hold any of the original interests on or after 1 July 2001.

Each new interest is taken to be 2 separate *CGT assets that are both new interests:

one (which you are taken to have started to *hold on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which you started to hold the original interests on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001; and

another (which you are taken to have started to hold before 20 September 1985) representing the extent to which you started to hold the original interests before that day.

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the CGT asset mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) in relation to a new interest is worked out under the formula:

where:

market value of all new interests is the total of the *market values of all of the new interests.

market value of new interest is the *market value of the new interest to which the *CGT asset mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) relates.

total post-CGT cost base is the total of the *cost bases of all the original interests that you started to *hold on or after 20 September 1985.

124-1250 Roll-over consequences—some original interests were pre-UCA

This section applies if:

you acquire the new interest in exchange for more than one original interest; and

(b) you started to *hold one or more of the original interests (pre-UCA interests) before 1 July 2001; and

(c) you started to hold one or more of the original interests (post-UCA interests) on or after that day.

If you started to *hold all of the pre-UCA interests on or after 20 September 1985, each new interest is taken to be 2 separate assets that are both new interests:

one (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after that day and before 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests are pre-UCA interests; and

another (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests are post-UCA interests.

Apply section 124-1235 to the interest referred to in paragraph (a) as if the pre-UCA interests were the only original interests. Apply Division 40 to the interests referred to in paragraph (b).

If you started to *hold all of the pre-UCA interests before 20 September 1985, each new interest is taken to be 2 separate assets that are both new interests:

one (which you are taken to have started to hold before that day) representing the extent to which the original interests are pre-UCA interests; and

another (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests are post-UCA interests.

Apply section 124-1240 to the new interest referred to in paragraph (a) as if the pre-UCA interests were the only original interests. Apply Division 40 to the new interest referred to in paragraph (b).

If you started to *hold one or more of the pre-UCA interests before 20 September 1985 and one or more of the pre-UCA interests on or after that day, each new interest is taken to be 3 separate assets that are all new interests:

one (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after 20 September 1985 and before 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests that you started to hold on or after 20 September 1985 are pre-UCA interests; and

another (which you are taken to have started to hold before 20 September 1985) representing the extent to which the original interests that you started to hold before 20 September 1985 are pre-UCA interests; and

another (which you are taken to have started to hold on or after 1 July 2001) representing the extent to which the original interests are post-UCA interests.

Apply section 124-1245 to the new interests referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b) as if the pre-UCA interests were the only original interests. Apply Division 40 to the new interest referred to in paragraph (c).

Division 125 — Demerger relief

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 125

125-A Object of this Division

125-B Consequences for owners of interests

125-C Consequences for members of demerger group

125-D Public trading trusts

125-E Miscellaneous

Guide to Division 125

125-1 What this Division is about

Entities can obtain CGT relief for a demerger.

Owners of ownership interests in the head entity of a demerger group can obtain a roll-over to defer CGT consequences for the CGT events that happen to their interests under the demerger (see Subdivision 125-B).

Capital gains and capital losses made by members of the demerger group from certain CGT events that happen under the demerger are disregarded (see Subdivision 125-C).

Note: Dividend relief is also available: see section 44 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 125-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

125-5 Object of this Division

125-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to facilitate the demerging of entities by ensuring that capital gains tax considerations are not an impediment to restructuring a business.

Subdivision 125-B — Consequences for owners of interests

Guide to Subdivision 125-B

125-50 Guide to Subdivision 125-B

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if a CGT event happens to your interests in a company or trust because of a demerger of an entity from the group of which the company or trust is the head entity.

There are cost base adjustments if you receive new interests under a demerger and no CGT event happens to your original interests.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

125-55 When a roll-over is available for a demerger

125-60 Meaning of ownership interest and related terms

125-65 Meanings of demerger group, head entity and demerger subsidiary

125-70 Meanings of demerger, demerged entity and demerging entity

125-75 Exceptions to subsection 125-70(2)

125-80 What is the roll-over?

125-85 Cost base adjustments where CGT event happens but no roll-over chosen

125-90 Cost base adjustments where no CGT event

125-95 No other cost base adjustment after demerger

125-100 No further demerger relief in some cases

Operative provisions

125-55 When a roll-over is available for a demerger

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

(a) you own an *ownership interest in a company or trust (your original interest); and

the company or trust is the *head entity of a demerger group; and

a demerger happens to the demerger group; and

(d) under the demerger, a *CGT event happens to your original interest and you *acquire a new or replacement interest (your new interest) in the *demerged entity.

Note 1: Section 125-80 sets out what the roll-over is.

Note 2: You have to make cost base adjustments even if there is no CGT event: see section 125-90.

Example: Peter owns shares (his original interests) in Company A, a public company. Company B is a wholly owned subsidiary of Company A. Company A announces a demerger utilising a proportionate capital reduction and the disposal of all its shares in Company B to its 320,000 shareholders. Following the demerger all of the shareholders in Company A, including Peter, will own all of the shares in Company B (their new interests).

You cannot choose to obtain a roll-over under this Subdivision for an original interest if:

you are a foreign resident; and

the new interest you *acquire under the demerger in exchange for that original interest is not taxable Australian property just after you acquire it.

Note: For taxable Australian property, see section 855-15.

125-60 Meaning of ownership interest and related terms

(1) An ownership interest in a company or trust is:

for a company, a *share in the company or an option, right or similar interest issued by the company that gives the owner an entitlement to *acquire a share in the company; and

for a trust, a unit or other interest in the trust or an option, right or similar interest issued by the trustee that gives the owner an entitlement to acquire a unit or other interest in the trust.

(2) However, this Subdivision applies to a *dual listed company voting share in a company that is the *head entity of a *demerger group as if it were not an ownership interest if there are not more than 5 of those *shares in the company.

(3) A dual listed company voting share is a *share in a company:

issued:

as part of a dual listed company arrangement; and

mainly for the purpose of ensuring that shareholders of both companies involved in the arrangement vote as a single decision-making body on matters affecting them; and

that does not carry rights to financial entitlements (except the return of the amount paid up on the share and a dividend that is the equivalent of a dividend paid on an ordinary share).

(4) A dual listed company arrangement is an *arrangement under which 2 publicly listed companies, while maintaining their separate legal entity status, shareholdings and listings, align their strategic directions and the economic interests of their respective shareholders through:

the appointment of common (or almost identical) boards of directors, except where the effect of the relevant regulatory requirements prevents this; and

management of the operations of the 2 companies on a unified basis; and

the shareholders of both companies voting in effect as a single decision-making body on substantial issues affecting their combined interests; and

equalised distributions to shareholders in accordance with an equalisation ratio applying between the 2 companies, both generally and in the event of a winding up of one or both of the companies; and

cross-guarantees as to, or similar financial support for, each other’s substantial obligations or operations, except where the effect of the relevant regulatory requirements prevents those guarantees or that financial support.

(5) However, an arrangement is not a dual listed company arrangement unless one but not both of the companies is an Australian resident.

125-65 Meanings of demerger group, head entity and demerger subsidiary

(1) A demerger group comprises the *head entity of the group and one or more *demerger subsidiaries.

Note: An entity may be a member of one or more demerger groups.

(2) A trust cannot be a member of a demerger group unless *CGT event E4 is capable of applying to all of the units and interests in the trust.

Note: A discretionary trust cannot be a member of a demerger group.

Neither a corporation sole nor a *complying superannuation entity is a member of a demerger group.

(3) A company or trust is the head entity of a *demerger group if no other member of the group owns *ownership interests in the company or trust.

(4) If apart from this subsection, a company or trust would be the *head entity of a *demerger group and the company or trust, and all of its *demerger subsidiaries, are also demerger subsidiaries of another company or trust in another demerger group, the first-mentioned company or trust is not the head entity of a demerger group.

(5) A company or trust (the first company or trust) that would, apart from this subsection, be a member of a demerger group is not a member of the demerger group if:

the first company or trust owns, either alone or together with another company or trust that would, apart from this subsection, be a member of the demerger group, more than 20% but less than 80% of the *ownership interests in a listed public company or listed widely held trust; and

the listed public company or listed widely held trust chooses that the first company or trust not be a member of the demerger group.

(6) A company is a demerger subsidiary of another company or a trust that is a member of a *demerger group if the other company or the trust, either alone or together with other members of the group, owns, or has the right to *acquire, *ownership interests in the company that carry between them:

the right to receive more than 20% of any distribution of income or capital by the company; or

the right to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 20% of the voting power of the company.

(7) A trust is a demerger subsidiary of another trust or a company that is a member of a *demerger group if the other trust or the company, either alone or together with other members of the group, owns, or has the right to *acquire, *ownership interests in the trust that carry between them the right to receive more than 20% of any distribution of income or capital by the trustee.

125-70 Meanings of demerger, demerged entity and demerging entity

(1) A demerger happens to a *demerger group if:

there is a restructuring of the demerger group; and

under the restructuring:

members of the demerger group *dispose of at least 80% of their total *ownership interests in another member of the demerger group to owners of original interests in the *head entity of the demerger group; or

at least 80% of the total ownership interests of members of the demerger group in another member of the demerger group end and new interests are issued to owners of original interests in the head entity; or

the demerged entity issues sufficient new ownership interests in itself with the result that owners of original interests in the head entity own at least 80% of the total ownership interests in the demerged entity; or

some combination of the processes referred to in subparagraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) happens with the effect that members of the demerger group stop owning at least 80% of the total ownership interests owned by members of the demerger group in another member of the group; and

Note: CGT event C2 and CGT event C3 are the only relevant CGT events in a subparagraph (ii) case.

under the restructuring:

a CGT event happens to an original interest owned by an entity in the head entity of the group and the entity *acquires a new interest and nothing else; or

no CGT event happens to an original interest owned by an entity in the head entity of the group and the entity acquires a new interest and nothing else; and

the acquisition by entities of new interests happens only because those entities own or owned original interests; and

the new interests acquired are:

if the head entity is a company—ownership interests in a company; or

if the head entity is a trust—ownership interests in a trust; and

neither the original interests nor the new interests are in a trust that is a non-complying superannuation fund; and

the requirements of subsection (2) are met.

Example: To continue the example from subsection 125-55(1), Peter owns 400 post-CGT shares in Company A. Companies A and B are both members of a demerger group. Company A is the head entity of the demerger group and Company B is a demerger subsidiary.

Company A proceeds to demerge 100% of its shares in Company B to its shareholders.

Company A enters into a proportionate capital reduction, returning 40 cents per share to its ordinary shareholders. Peter is entitled to $160 (40c times 400 shares) under the capital reduction.

For Peter, the capital reduction amount of $160 is compulsorily applied to acquire Company A’s shares in Company B, at $6.75 (a discount of 10% to current market value). Company A rounds up the fractional amounts in calculating the number of whole shares to be distributed to each shareholder. This gives Peter 24 shares in Company B (160 divided by 6.75, rounded up to the nearest whole number).

• to sell on the owner’s behalf; or

• to hold pending the owner being located.

Note: Acquiring new interests by an owner of original interests may include the allocation of the owner’s entitlement to new interests to a nominee:

(2) Each owner (an original owner) of original interests in the *head entity of the *demerger group must:

*acquire, under the demerger, the same proportion, or as nearly as practicable the same proportion, of new interests in the demerged entity as the original owner owned in the head entity just before the demerger; and

just after the demerger, have the same proportionate total *market value of *ownership interests in the head entity and demerged entity as the original owner owned in the head entity just before the demerger.

Note 1: There is an exception: see section 125-75.

Note 2: Dual listed company voting shares are not treated as ownership interests: see section 125-60.

Note 3: Fractional interests will generally not affect your ability to choose a roll-over.

Example: To continue the example from subsection (1), Company A concludes, given the circumstances of the demerger, that the market values of Peter’s and the other shareholders’ shares in A and B are expected to be in proportion with their original interests in Company A, and advises the shareholders of this position.

In working out whether an original owner complies with subsection (2):

disregard *ownership interests that are original interests the owner owns in the demerged entity; and

an anticipated reasonable approximation of the *market value of ownership interests is sufficient.

Example: An anticipated reasonable approximation of market values of ownership interests may include:

• valuations provided to shareholders in scheme documents;

• the price selected for use under a sale facility;

and may be made by reference to long-term value.

Exception: off-market buy-backs

(4) A buy-back of *shares that is an off-market purchase for the purposes of Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is not a *demerger.

Exception: roll-over available under another provision

(5) Circumstances where an owner of original interests can obtain a roll-over under a provision of this Act outside this Division for all of the CGT events that happened to the owner’s original interests under the circumstances cannot be a demerger.

Note: An owner might be able to obtain a roll-over for the CGT events under Subdivision 124-E, or 124-M or Division 615.

Meaning of demerged entity

(6) An entity that is a former member of a *demerger group is a demerged entity if, under a *demerger that happens to the group, *ownership interests in the entity are acquired by:

shareholders in the *head entity of the group; or

unitholders or holders of interests in the head entity of the group.

Meaning of demerging entity

(7) An entity that is a member of a *demerger group just before the *CGT event referred to in section 125-155 happens is a demerging entity if, under a *demerger that happens to the group:

the entity (either alone or together with other members of the demerger group)*dispose of at least 80% of their total *ownership interests in another member of the demerger group to owners of original interests in the *head entity of the demerger group; or

at least 80% of the total ownership interests of that entity and of other members of the demerger group in another member of the demerger group end and new interests are issued to owners of original interests in the head entity; or

Note: CGT event C2 and CGT event C3 are the only relevant CGT events.

the demerged entity issues sufficient new ownership interests in itself with the result that owners of original interests in the head entity own at least 80% of the total ownership interests in the demerged entity; or

some combination of the processes referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) happens with the effect that members of the demerger group stop owning at least 80% of the total ownership interests owned by members of the demerger group in another member of the group.

125-75 Exceptions to subsection 125-70(2)

Employee share schemes

In working out whether the requirements in subsection 125-70(2) are met, disregard each of the *ownership interests described in subsections (2) and (3) if, just before the demerger, those interests (taking into account either or both of their number and value) represented not more than 3% of the total *ownership interests in the entity.

An *ownership interest, in a company, that is owned by an entity is disregarded under subsection (1) if:

the entity acquired a beneficial interest in the ownership interest under an employee share scheme; and

these provisions apply to the beneficial interest:

Subdivision 83A-B and the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-33(1)(a) to (c); or

Subdivision 83A-B and the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-35(1)(a) and (b); or

Subdivision 83A-C; and

the ownership interest is not a fully-paid ordinary *share.

An *ownership interest, in a trust, that is owned by an entity is disregarded under subsection (1) if:

both of the following would apply if Division 83A (about employee share schemes) applied to ownership interests in trusts in the same way as it applies to *shares:

the entity acquired a beneficial interest in the ownership interest under an employee share scheme;

the provisions referred to in subparagraph (2)(b)(i), (ii) or (iii) apply to the beneficial interest; and

the ownership interest is not a fully-paid unit.

Adjusting instruments

(4) In working out whether the requirements in subsection 125-70(2) are met, disregard each of the *ownership interests described in subsection (5) (adjusting instruments) if, just before the *demerger, those interests represented not more than 10%, or such greater percentage (not exceeding 17%) as is prescribed, of the ownership interests in the entity.

An *ownership interest in a listed public company or a listed widely held trust that is the *head entity of a demerger group is disregarded under subsection (4) if:

the adjusting instrument was issued on terms that ensure that its value is not adversely affected by an arrangement undertaken by the company or trust in relation to other ownership interests in the company or trust; and

if the adjusting instrument can be converted into an ordinary *share in the company or an ordinary unit in the trust, any conversion will occur on a basis:

that is set out in the terms of the issue of the instrument; and

that is adjusted to take into account a capital reduction or a capital reconstruction; and

before conversion, the owner of the adjusting instrument does not have a right to participate in distributions of profit or capital except as set out in the terms of the issue of the instrument; and

the adjusting instrument deals with the effect of a demerger that happens to the demerger group on the value of the instrument.

Example: Some examples of adjusting instruments are:

• convertible preference shares, including reset preference shares;

• convertible notes;

• partly paid shares where the paid-up amount is adjusted to reflect a capital reduction.

Additional exceptions

The regulations may provide that, in working out whether the requirements in subsection 125-70(2) are met, other *ownership interests of a kind specified in the regulations are to be disregarded if, just before the demerger, those interests represented not more than a prescribed percentage of the ownership interests in the entity.

However, the total percentage of *ownership interests to be disregarded under this section must not exceed 20% of the ownership interests in the entity.

125-80 What is the roll-over?

If you choose the roll-over, a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event happening under the demerger to an original interest you own is disregarded.

If you choose the roll-over, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of:

each new interest that you are not taken to have *acquired before 20 September 1985; and

if not all of your original interests ended under the demerger—each of your remaining original interests that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985;

is such proportion of the sum of the cost bases of all your original interests that you acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (worked out just before the demerger) as is reasonable having regard to the matters specified in subsection (3).

Note 1: These rules replace the cost base and reduced cost base adjustments in CGT event E4 and CGT event G1.

Note 2: The head entity or the demerging entity may advise you of the proportions.

The matters are:

the *market values of your remaining original interests just after the demerger, or an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values; and

the market values of your new interests just after the demerger, or an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values.

Example: To continue the example from subsection 125-70(2), Company A advises its shareholders that Company B at that time represents 5% of the market value of the group as a whole. Peter’s cost base for each of his shares in A is $4.60, and Peter recalculates his cost base as follows:

to be spread over 400 shares in A and 24 shares in B.

Pre-CGT interests

The following subsections apply if you choose the roll-over and you *acquired some or all of your original interests before 20 September 1985.

If you *acquired all of your original interests before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired all of your new interests before that day.

If you *acquired some of your original interests before 20 September 1985, you are taken to have acquired a reasonable whole number of your new interests before that day having regard to:

the *market values of your original interests and your remaining original interests just after the demerger, or an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values; and

the market values of your new interests just after the demerger, or an anticipated reasonable approximation of those market values.

If a proportion, but not all, of your original interests ends under the demerger and you *acquired some of your original interests before 20 September 1985, that same proportion of those interests you acquired before that day ends.

Note: CGT event K6 may be relevant if you later dispose of your interests that are treated as being pre-CGT.

Example: Bert owned 100 shares in a company of which 50 were acquired pre-CGT. Under a demerger 20 of Bert’s 100 shares were cancelled in exchange for new interests. As 20% of his shares were cancelled, 10 of his pre-CGT shares are taken to have been cancelled.

Partial roll-over

If you choose a roll-over for some but not all of your original interests, you apply the rules in this section as if your original interests for which you chose the roll-over were your only original interests.

125-85 Cost base adjustments where CGT event happens but no roll-over chosen

You must adjust the *cost base and *reduced cost base of an *ownership interest you own in a company or trust if:

a demerger happens to a demerger group of which the company or trust is a member; and

you owned an original interest in the *head entity of the demerger group just before the demerger; and

a CGT event happens to the original interest and you *acquire a new interest under the demerger; and

you do not choose a roll-over under this Subdivision for the original interest.

The adjustments you must make are the same as the adjustments you would have to make under section 125-80 for the *cost bases and *reduced cost bases of the remaining original interests and new interests just after the CGT event if you could have chosen a roll-over under this Subdivision for the demerger and you had done so.

125-90 Cost base adjustments where no CGT event

You must adjust the *cost base and *reduced cost base of an *ownership interest you own in a company or trust if:

a demerger happens to a demerger group of which the company or trust is a member; and

you owned an original interest in the *head entity of the demerger group just before the demerger; and

no CGT event happens to the original interest, but you *acquire a new interest under the demerger.

The adjustments you must make are the same as the adjustments you would have to make under section 125-80 if you could have chosen a roll-over under this Subdivision for the demerger and you had done so.

125-95 No other cost base adjustment after demerger

If you have to make adjustments to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of your *ownership interests under section 125-80, 125-85 or 125-90 because of a demerger, no other adjustment can be made under this Act to those cost bases and reduced cost bases because of something that happens under the demerger.

Note: Those sections deal with any value shift that might occur under the demerger and avoid the need for the general value shifting regime to apply.

125-100 No further demerger relief in some cases

This Division does not apply to the remaining *ownership interests in a demerged entity if one or more members of the demerger group *disposed of or cancelled less than 100% of the total ownership interests of that group in the demerged entity.

Note: After the demerger, a former member of the demerger group can undertake a further demerger to which this Division can apply.

Subdivision 125-C — Consequences for members of demerger group

Guide to Subdivision 125-C

125-150 Guide to Subdivision 125-C

Certain capital gains and capital losses that members of a demerger group make under a demerger are disregarded.

Certain capital losses made under a demerger are reduced where the demerger results in a value shift.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

125-155 Certain capital gains or losses disregarded for demerging entity

125-160 No CGT event J1

125-165 Adjusted capital loss for value shift under a demerger

125-170 Reduced cost base reduction if demerger asset subject to roll-over

Operative provisions

125-155 Certain capital gains or losses disregarded for demerging entity

Any *capital gain or *capital loss a demerging entity makes from CGT event A1, CGT event C2, CGT event C3 or CGT event K6 happening to its *ownership interests in a demerged entity under a demerger is disregarded.

Note 1: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

Note 2: This section will not apply if section 125-100 applies.

125-160 No CGT event J1

CGT event J1 does not happen to a demerged entity or a member of a demerger group under a demerger.

125-165 Adjusted capital loss for value shift under a demerger

A *capital loss made by an entity that was a member of a demerger group from a CGT event happening to a CGT asset under a demerger or after a demerger is reduced to the extent that the capital loss is reasonably attributable to a reduction in the *market value of the asset because of the demerger.

Example: The market value of equity or loan interests in the demerging entity may be reduced by the disposal, for inadequate value, of ownership interests of another member of the demerger group to owners of original interests in the head entity of the group.

125-170 Reduced cost base reduction if demerger asset subject to roll-over

The reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is reduced if:

the *market value of the asset is reduced because of a demerger; and

(b) after the demerger the asset is *acquired by an entity from another entity (the transferor) in a situation where the transferor obtained a roll-over for the disposal; and

the reduction occurred when the transferor owned the asset.

The *reduced cost base of the asset as determined under the roll-over is reduced just after the roll-over to the extent of the reduction in *market value caused by the demerger.

Note: The rules in section 125-165 and this section deal with any value shift that might occur under the demerger and avoid the need for the general value shifting regime to apply.

If the reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is reduced under this section because of a demerger, no other adjustment can be made under this Act to that reduced cost base because of something that happens under the demerger.

Subdivision 125-D — Public trading trusts

Guide to Subdivision 125-D

125-225 Guide to Subdivision 125-D

This Division applies to corporate unit trusts and public trading trusts as if they were companies.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

125-230 Application of Division to public trading trusts

Operative provisions

125-230 Application of Division to public trading trusts

This Division applies to a trust to which section 102S of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for an income year in which a *demerger happens as if:

the trust were a company; and

*ownership interests in it were interests in a company.

Subdivision 125-E — Miscellaneous

Table of sections

125-235 Share and interest sale facilities

125-235 Share and interest sale facilities

Share and interest sale facilities

(1) An entity (the investor) is treated as owning an *ownership interest (the roll-over interest) in a *demerged entity at a time (the deeming time), if:

the investor owned an ownership interest in a company or trust that was the *head entity of a demerger group; and

a demerger happens to the demerger group; and

because:

a foreign law impedes the ability of a member of the demerger group to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor; or

it would be impractical or unreasonably onerous to determine whether a foreign law impedes the ability of a member of the demerger group to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor;

it is *arranged that the member will issue or transfer the roll-over interest to another entity (the facility) under the demerger instead of to the investor; and

in accordance with that arrangement and as a result of the demerger, the facility:

becomes the owner of the roll-over interest (which is a new or replacement interest in the demerged entity); and

owns the roll-over interest at the deeming time; and

under the arrangement, the investor is entitled to receive from the facility:

an amount equivalent to the capital proceeds of any CGT event that happens in relation to the roll-over interest (less expenses); or

if a CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over interest together with CGT events happening in relation to other ownership interests—an amount equivalent to the investor’s proportion of the total capital proceeds of the CGT events (less expenses).

The facility is treated as not owning the roll-over interest at the deeming time.

This section applies for the purposes of:

applying this Division in relation to the demerger; and

item 2 of the table in subsection 115-30(1), to the extent that it relates to a roll-over under this Division that involves the demerger.

Division 126 — Same-asset roll-overs

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 126

126-A Marriage or relationship breakdowns

126-B Companies in the same wholly-owned group

126-C Changes to trust deeds

126-D Small superannuation funds

126-E Entitlement to shares after demutualisation and scrip for scrip roll-over

126-G Transfer of assets between certain trusts

Guide to Division 126

126-1 What this Division is about

A same-asset roll-over allows a capital gain or loss an entity makes from disposing of a CGT asset to, or creating a CGT asset in, another entity to be disregarded. For a disposal, certain attributes of the asset are transferred to the receiving entity.

Subdivision 126-A — Marriage or relationship breakdowns

Table of sections

126-5 CGT event involving spouses

126-15 CGT event involving company or trustee

126-20 Subsequent CGT event happening to roll-over asset where transferor was a CFC or a non-resident trust

126-25 Conditions for the purposes of subsections 126-5(3A) and 126-15(5)

126-5 CGT event involving spouses

(1) There is a roll-over if a *CGT event (the trigger event) happens involving an individual (the transferor) and his or her *spouse (the transferee), or a former *spouse (also the transferee), because of:

(a) a court order under the Family Law Act 1975 or under a *State law, *Territory law or *foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; or

(b) a maintenance agreement approved by a court under section 87 of the Family Law Act 1975 or a corresponding agreement approved by a court under a corresponding *foreign law; or

something done under:

(i) a financial agreement made under Part VIIIA of the Family Law Act 1975 that is binding because of section 90G of that Act; or

a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or

something done under:

(i) a Part VIIIAB financial agreement (within the meaning of the Family Law Act 1975) that is binding because of section 90UJ of that Act; or

a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or

something done under:

(i) an award made in an arbitration referred to in section 13H of the Family Law Act 1975; or

a corresponding award made in an arbitration under a corresponding State law, Territory law or foreign law; or

something done under a written agreement:

that is binding because of a State law, Territory law or foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; and

that, because of such a law, prevents a court making an order about matters to which the agreement applies, or that is inconsistent with the terms of the agreement in relation to those matters, unless the agreement is varied or set aside.

Only these *CGT events are relevant:

(a) CGT events A1 and B1 (a disposal case); and

(b) CGT events D1, D2, D3 and F1 (a creation case).

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

However, there is no roll-over if:

the CGT asset involved is trading stock of the transferor; or

for CGT event B1—title in the CGT asset does not pass to the transferee at or before the end of the agreement.

There is no roll-over because of paragraph (1)(d), (da) or (f) unless the conditions set out in section 126-25 are met.

A *capital gain or a *capital loss the transferor makes from the CGT event is disregarded.

Consequences for the transferee (disposal case)

For a disposal case where the transferor *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:

(a) the first element of the asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is the asset’s cost base (in the hands of the transferor) at the time the transferee acquired it; and

(b) the first element of the asset’s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is worked out similarly.

Example: Your spouse transfers land to you because of a court order under the Family Law Act 1975. Any capital gain or loss your spouse makes is disregarded.

If the land’s cost base at the time you acquired it is $10,000, the first element of the land’s cost base in your hands becomes $10,000.

Note 1: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Note 2: A roll-over under this Subdivision may have an effect on the transferee’s main residence exemption: see sections 118-178 and 118-180.

For a disposal case where the transferor *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, the transferee is taken to have acquired it before that day.

Note: A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104. This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149.

For a disposal case where the transferor *disposed of a collectable or personal use asset, the transferee is taken to have *acquired one.

Note 1: Capital losses from collectables can be subtracted only from capital gains from collectables: see section 108-10.

Note 2: Capital losses from personal use assets are disregarded: see section 108-20.

Consequences for the transferee (creation case)

(8) For a creation case, the first element of the asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is the amount applicable under this table. The first element of its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

126-15 CGT event involving company or trustee

(1) There are the roll-over consequences in section 126-5 if the trigger event involves a company (the transferor) or a trustee (also the transferor) and a *spouse or former spouse (the transferee) of another individual because of:

(a) a court order under the Family Law Act 1975 or under a *State law, *Territory law or *foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; or

(b) a maintenance agreement approved by a court under section 87 of the Family Law Act 1975 or a corresponding agreement approved by a court under a corresponding *foreign law; or

something done under:

(i) a financial agreement made under Part VIIIA of the Family Law Act 1975 that is binding because of section 90G of that Act; or

a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or

something done under:

(i) a Part VIIIAB financial agreement (within the meaning of the Family Law Act 1975) that is binding because of section 90UJ of that Act; or

a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or

something done under:

(i) an award made in an arbitration referred to in section 13H of the Family Law Act 1975; or

a corresponding award made in an arbitration under a corresponding State law, Territory law or foreign law; or

something done under a written agreement:

that is binding because of a State law, Territory law or foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; and

that, because of such a law, prevents a court making an order about matters to which the agreement applies, or that is inconsistent with the terms of the agreement in relation to those matters, unless the agreement is varied or set aside.

There are other consequences if:

just before the time of the trigger event, an entity (including the transferee) owned another CGT asset of a kind covered by this table; and

the entity *acquired it on or after 20 September 1985; and

a CGT event happens in relation to it.

Example: An individual owns all the shares in a company. The company owns land. The individual’s marriage breaks down. A court orders that the company transfer the land it owns to the individual’s spouse. The individual later sells the shares.

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the other asset are reduced by an amount that reasonably reflects the fall in its *market value because of the trigger event. The reduction occurs at the time of the trigger event.

If the entity owning the other asset is also the transferee, the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the other asset are then increased by any amount that is included in the entity’s assessable income for any income year because of the trigger event.

Note: The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170.

There is no roll-over because of paragraph (1)(d), (da) or (f) unless the conditions set out in section 126-25 are met.

126-20 Subsequent CGT event happening to roll-over asset where transferor was a CFC or a non-resident trust

This section applies if:

there is a roll-over for the trigger event under section 126-15; and

the transferor was:

a CFC; or

(ii) a trustee of a trust that is a non-resident trust estate within the meaning of section 102AAB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the income year of the trigger event; and

section 126-15 is relevant to:

(i) the calculation of the *attributable income of the CFC under Division 7 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

the calculation of the attributable income of the trust under Subdivision D of Division 6AAA of Part III of that Act;

because (ignoring the residency assumptions in that Division or Subdivision) the roll-over asset was not taxable Australian property; and

a subsequent CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over asset.

(2) In working out the amount of any *capital gain or *capital loss the transferee (or a subsequent owner of the roll-over asset if there is a series of roll-overs until there is no roll-over) makes when a subsequent *CGT event happens in relation to the asset, the modifications specified in Division 7 of Part X, or Subdivision D of Division 6AAA of Part III, of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 apply.

126-25 Conditions for the purposes of subsections 126-5(3A) and 126-15(5)

The conditions referred to in subsections 126-5(3A) and 126-15(5) are that:

at the time of the trigger event:

the *spouses, or former spouses, involved are separated; and

there is no reasonable likelihood of cohabitation being resumed; and

the trigger event happened because of reasons directly connected with the breakdown of the relationship between the spouses or former spouses.

(2) For the purposes of this section, the question whether *spouses or former spouses have separated is to be determined in the same way as it is for the purposes of section 48 of the Family Law Act 1975 (as affected by sections 49 and 50 of that Act).

Subdivision 126-B — Companies in the same wholly-owned group

Guide to Subdivision 126-B

126-40 What this Subdivision is about

A roll-over may be available for the transfer of a CGT asset between 2 companies, or the creation of a CGT asset by one company in another, if:

both companies are members of the same wholly-owned group; and

at least one of the companies is a foreign resident.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

126-45 Roll-over for members of wholly-owned group

126-50 Requirements for roll-over

126-55 When there is a roll-over

126-60 Consequences of roll-over

126-75 Originating company is a CFC

126-85 Effect of roll-over on certain liquidations

Operative provisions

126-45 Roll-over for members of wholly-owned group

(1) There may be a roll-over if a *CGT event (the trigger event) happens involving a company (the originating company) and another company (the recipient company) in the circumstances set out in section 126-50.

Only these *CGT events are relevant:

(a) CGT events A1 and B1 (a disposal case); and

(b) CGT events D1, D2, D3 and F1 (a creation case).

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

However, there is no roll-over for CGT event B1 if title in the CGT asset does not pass to the transferee at or before the end of the agreement.

Note: CGT event J1 can happen if the recipient company stops being a 100% subsidiary of a company in the relevant group: see section 104-175.

126-50 Requirements for roll-over

The originating company and recipient company must be members of the same wholly-owned group at the time of the trigger event.

Note: This requirement is taken to be satisfied in the case of the transfer of the life insurance business of a life insurance company: see section 121AS of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(2) The *CGT asset involved (the roll-over asset) must not be:

trading stock of the recipient company just after the time of the trigger event; or

a registered emissions unit *held by the recipient company just after the time of the trigger event.

If:

the roll-over asset is a right or convertible interest referred to in Division 130, or an option referred to in Division 134, or an exchangeable interest; and

the recipient company *acquires another CGT asset by exercising the right or option or by converting the convertible interest or in exchange for the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest;

the other asset cannot become trading stock of the recipient company just after the recipient company acquired it.

If:

the roll-over asset is an option referred to in Division 134; and

the recipient company *acquires another CGT asset by exercising the option;

the other asset cannot become a registered emissions unit *held by the recipient company just after the recipient company acquired it.

The ordinary income and statutory income of the recipient company must not be exempt from income tax because it is an *exempt entity for the income year of the trigger event.

The requirements in one of the items in this table must be satisfied.

If the originating company or the recipient company is an Australian resident at the time of the trigger event, that company must:

be a *member of a consolidated group or MEC group at that time; or

(b) not be a member of a *consolidatable group at that time.

(7) If the originating company is a foreign resident, it must not have *acquired the *CGT asset described in subsection (8) because of:

(a) a single *CGT event giving rise to a roll-over under a previous application of this Subdivision (as amended by the New Business Tax System (Consolidation) Act (No. 1) 2002) involving an Australian resident originating company other than the company that is the recipient company for the current application of this Subdivision; or

(b) a series (whether or not it is the longest possible series) of consecutive CGT events giving rise to roll-overs under previous applications of this Subdivision (as amended by the New Business Tax System (Consolidation) Act (No. 1) 2002), the earliest involving an Australian resident originating company other than the company that is the recipient company for the current application of this Subdivision.

Subsection (7) operates in relation to the CGT asset:

that was involved in the trigger event in a disposal case; or

because of which the originating company was able to create the CGT asset that was involved in the trigger event in a creation case.

Subsection (7) does not apply if each of the following companies mentioned in that subsection:

the recipient company for the roll-over under the current application of this Subdivision;

the Australian resident originating company for the roll-over under:

for paragraph (7)(a)—the previous application of this Subdivision; or

for paragraph (7)(b)—the earliest previous application of this Subdivision for that series of consecutive *CGT events;

was, at the time of its roll-over, the *head company of the same MEC group.

126-55 When there is a roll-over

Capital gain or no loss

There is a roll-over if:

either:

the trigger event would have resulted in the originating company making a *capital gain, or making no *capital loss and not being entitled to a deduction; or

the originating company *acquired the roll-over asset before 20 September 1985; and

the originating company and recipient company both choose to obtain it.

Note: Section 103-25 sets out when the choice must be made.

126-60 Consequences of roll-over

Consequences for the originating company in all cases

A *capital gain the originating company makes from the trigger event is disregarded.

Consequences for the recipient company (disposal case)

For a disposal case, if the originating company *acquired the roll-over asset on or after 20 September 1985:

(a) the first element of the asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the recipient company) is the asset’s cost base (in the hands of the originating company) when the recipient company acquired it; and

(b) the first element of the asset’s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the recipient company) is worked out similarly.

Note 1: There are special indexation rules for roll-overs: see Division 114.

Note 2: The reduced cost base may be modified for a roll-over happening after a demerger: see section 125-170.

If the originating company *acquired the roll-over asset before 20 September 1985, the recipient company is taken to have acquired it before that day.

Note 1: A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104. This exemption is removed in some situations: see, for example, Division 149.

Note 2: Under section 716-855, where there have been certain roll-overs, the cost base and reduced cost base of pre-CGT assets for the purposes of Part 3-90 (Consolidated groups) are worked out by applying subsection (2), rather than subsection (3), of this section.

If the trigger event involved a personal use asset of the originating company, the recipient company is taken to have *acquired one.

Consequences for the recipient company (creation case)

(5) For a creation case, the first element of the asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the recipient company) is the amount applicable under this table. The first element of its *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note: CGT event J1 may occur if the recipient company stops being a member of the wholly-owned group while still owning the roll-over asset: see section 104-175.

126-75 Originating company is a CFC

This section applies if:

there is a roll-over for the trigger event under this Subdivision; and

the originating company was a CFC at the time of the trigger event; and

(c) this Subdivision is relevant to the calculation of the *attributable income of the originating company under Division 7 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 because (ignoring the residency assumptions in that Division) the roll-over asset was not *taxable Australian property for the originating company; and

a subsequent CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over asset.

(2) In working out the amount of any *capital gain or *capital loss the recipient company (or a subsequent owner of the roll-over asset if there is a series of roll-overs until there is no roll-over) makes when a subsequent *CGT event happens in relation to the asset, the modifications specified in Division 7 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 apply.

126-85 Effect of roll-over on certain liquidations

(1) A *capital gain a company (the holding company) makes because *shares in its *100% subsidiary are cancelled (an example of *CGT event C2: see section 104-25) on the liquidation of the subsidiary is reduced if the conditions in subsection (2) are satisfied. The reduction is worked out under subsection (3).

These conditions must be satisfied:

(a) there must be a roll-over under this Subdivision for at least one *CGT asset that the subsidiary *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 (the CGT roll-over asset) being *disposed of by the subsidiary to the holding company in the course of the liquidation of the subsidiary;

the disposals must either:

be part of the liquidator’s final distribution in the course of the liquidation; or

have occurred within 18 months of the dissolution of the subsidiary if they are part of an interim distribution in the course of the liquidation;

the holding company must have beneficially owned all of the shares in the subsidiary for the whole period from the time of the disposal, or the first disposal, of a CGT roll-over asset until the cancellation of the shares;

the *market value of the CGT roll-over asset or assets must comprise at least part of the capital proceeds for the cancellation of the shares in the subsidiary that are beneficially owned by the holding company;

(f) one or more of the shares that were cancelled (the post-CGT shares) must have been acquired by the holding company on or after 20 September 1985.

The reduction of the *capital gain is worked out in this way.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out (disregarding this section) the sum of the *capital gains and the sum of the *capital losses the holding company would make on the cancellation of its shares in the subsidiary.

Step 2. Work out (disregarding this Subdivision):

the sum of the *capital gains the subsidiary would make on the *disposal of its CGT roll-over assets to the holding company; and

the sum of the *capital losses it would make except for Subdivision 170-D on the disposal of its *CGT assets to the holding company;

in the course of the liquidation assuming the capital proceeds were the assets’ *market values at the time of the disposal.

Step 3. If, after subtracting the sum of the *capital losses from the sum of the *capital gains, there is an overall capital gain from step 1 and an overall capital gain from step 2, then continue. Otherwise there is no adjustment.

Step 4. Express the number of post-CGT shares as a fraction of the total number of shares the holding company owned in the subsidiary.

Step 5. Multiply the overall *capital gain from Step 2 by the fraction from Step 4.

Step 6. Reduce the overall *capital gain from Step 1 by the amount from Step 5. The result is the *capital gain the holding company makes from the cancellation of its shares in the subsidiary.

Note: This Subdivision is modified in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 419 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 126-C — Changes to trust deeds

Guide to Subdivision 126-C

126-125 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out when there is a roll-over for a CGT event that happens because of an amendment to or replacement of the trust deed of a complying approved deposit fund, a complying superannuation fund or a fund that accepts worker entitlement contributions.

Table of sections

126-130 Changes to trust deeds

126-135 Consequences of roll-over

126-130 Changes to trust deeds

There is a roll-over if:

CGT event E1 or E2 happens in relation to a CGT asset because the trust deed of a complying approved deposit fund or complying superannuation fund is amended or replaced; and

the amendment or replacement is done for the purpose of:

(i) complying with the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993; or

enabling a complying approved deposit fund to become a complying superannuation fund; and

the assets and members of the fund do not change as a consequence of the amendment or replacement.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

There is a roll-over if:

CGT event E1 or E2 happens in relation to a CGT asset because the trust deed of a fund is amended or replaced; and

the amendment or replacement is done for the purpose of having:

(i) the fund endorsed as an approved worker entitlement fund under subsection 58PB(3) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986; or

the entity that operates the fund endorsed for the operation of the fund as an approved worker entitlement fund under subsection 58PB(3A) of that Act.

the assets and members of the fund do not change as a consequence of the amendment or replacement.

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

126-135 Consequences of roll-over

A *capital gain or *capital loss made from the CGT event is disregarded.

If the fund that owned the CGT asset just before the time of the CGT event *acquired it before 20 September 1985, the asset retains its status as a pre-CGT asset in the hands of the fund that owned it after the time of the event.

If the fund that owned the CGT asset just before the time of the CGT event *acquired it on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the fund that owned the asset after the time of the event) is its cost base just before that time; and

the first element of the asset’s *reduced cost base asset is worked out similarly; and

the fund that owned the asset after the time of the event is taken to have acquired the asset at that time.

Subdivision 126-D — Small superannuation funds

Table of sections

126-140 CGT event involving small superannuation funds

126-140 CGT event involving small superannuation funds

Payment splits under Family Law Act

There is a roll-over if:

an interest in a small superannuation fund is subject to a payment split; and

(b) the *non-member spouse in relation to that interest serves a waiver notice under section 90XZA or 90YZQ of the Family Law Act 1975 in respect of that interest; and

(c) as a result of serving the notice, the trustee (the transferor) of the fund transfers a *CGT asset to the trustee (the transferee) of another *complying superannuation fund for the benefit of the non-member spouse.

Note: CGT event E2 may apply to the transfer.

Payment splits under the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations

There is also a roll-over if:

(a) an interest in a *small superannuation fund (the first fund) is subject to a *payment split; and

as a result of the payment split, there is a transfer or roll over of benefits, for the benefit of the non-member spouse, from the first fund to another complying superannuation fund; and

(c) the transfer is under provisions of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 dealing with superannuation interests that are subject to payment splits; and

(d) in order to give effect to the payment split, the trustee (the transferor) of the first fund transfers a *CGT asset to the trustee (the transferee) of the other fund for the benefit of the non-member spouse.

Note: CGT event E2 may apply to the transfer.

Transfer of own interest in a small superannuation fund

There is also a roll-over if:

(a) an individual has an interest in a *small superannuation fund (the first fund); and

the individual’s *spouse, or former spouse, also has an interest in the first fund; and

(c) the trustee (the transferor) of the first fund transfers a *CGT asset to the trustee (the transferee) of another *complying superannuation fund for the benefit of the individual; and

the transfer is in accordance with an award, order or agreement mentioned in subsection (2B); and

if the transfer is part of a series of transfers in accordance with the award, order or agreement—the individual will no longer have an interest in the first fund when the series of transfers is complete; and

if the transfer is not part of a series of transfers in accordance with the award, order or agreement—as a result of the transfer, the individual no longer has an interest in the first fund; and

there has not been a roll-over under subsection (1) or (2) or this subsection in relation to the transfer of another CGT asset from the first fund, where the transfer was:

made because of the award, order or agreement; and

for the benefit of that spouse, or former spouse; and

if the transfer is in accordance with an agreement mentioned in paragraph (2B)(d), (da) or (e), the conditions in subsection (2C) are satisfied.

Note: CGT event E2 may apply to the transfer.

The awards, orders and agreements are:

(a) an award made in an arbitration referred to in section 13H of the Family Law Act 1975 or a corresponding award made in an arbitration under a corresponding *State law, *Territory law or *foreign law; or

(b) a court order made under section 79, subsection 90AE(2) or 90AF(2) or section 90SM or 90YX of the Family Law Act 1975; or

(c) a court order made under a State law, Territory law or foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between *spouses that corresponds to an order made under subsection 90AE(2) or 90AF(2) or section 90SM of the Family Law Act 1975; or

(d) a financial agreement made under Part VIIIA of the Family Law Act 1975 that is binding because of section 90G of that Act or a corresponding written agreement that is binding because of a corresponding foreign law; or

(da) a Part VIIIAB financial agreement (within the meaning of the Family Law Act 1975) that is binding because of section 90UJ of that Act; or

a written agreement:

that is binding under a State law, Territory law or foreign law relating to breakdowns of relationships between spouses; and

that, because of such a law, prevents a court making an order about matters to which the agreement applies, or that is inconsistent with the terms of the agreement in relation to those matters, unless the agreement is varied or set aside.

The conditions are that:

at the time of the transfer:

the *spouses, or former spouses, involved are separated; and

there is no reasonable likelihood of cohabitation being resumed; and

the transfer happened because of reasons directly connected with the breakdown of the relationship between the spouses or former spouses.

(2D) For the purposes of subsection (2C), the question whether *spouses, or former spouses, have separated is to be determined in the same way as it is for the purposes of section 48 of the Family Law Act 1975 (as affected by sections 49 and 50 of that Act).

Roll-over consequences

A *capital gain or *capital loss the transferor makes from the transfer of the asset is disregarded.

If the transferor *acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985:

the first element of the asset’s *cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is the asset’s cost base (in the hands of the transferor) at the time the transferee acquired it; and

the first element of the asset’s *reduced cost base (in the hands of the transferee) is worked out similarly.

If the transferor *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985, the transferee is taken to have acquired it before that day.

Note: A capital gain or loss you make from a CGT asset you acquired before 20 September 1985 is generally disregarded: see Division 104. This exemption is removed in some situations: see Division 149.

Subdivision 126-E — Entitlement to shares after demutualisation and scrip for scrip roll-over

Guide to Subdivision 126-E

126-185 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out when there is a roll-over for a CGT event that happens because a beneficiary becomes absolutely entitled to a share as against the trustee where the trustee obtained a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M following a demutualisation.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

126-190 When there is a roll-over

126-195 Consequences of roll-over

Operative provisions

126-190 When there is a roll-over

There is a roll-over if:

an insurance company demutualises; and

the trustee of a trust holds a *share issued under the demutualisation in trust for an entity to whom the share would have been issued if the entity could, and were in a position to, prove the entity’s entitlement to the share; and

(c) the trustee obtains a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M of this Act (Scrip for scrip roll-over) for the share because the trustee exchanges the share for a share (the replacement share) in another company (whether or not the trustee receives something in addition to the replacement share); and

a CGT event happens in relation to the replacement share because the entity becomes absolutely entitled to the share as against the trustee.

Note: This Subdivision does not apply to the demutualisation of a private health insurer: see section 315-160.

126-195 Consequences of roll-over

A *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes from the CGT event is disregarded.

The first element of the *cost base of the replacement share for the entity is the cost base of the replacement share in the hands of the trustee just before the CGT event happened. The first element of the *reduced cost base of the replacement share for the entity is worked out similarly.

Example: The JB mutual insurance company demutualises, issuing shares in JB Limited to its policyholders. It is unable to locate some of its policyholders so it establishes a trust and issues shares to the trustee on behalf of those policyholders. Steve is one of those policyholders (being potentially entitled to 50 shares).

JB Limited is taken over by PVDM Limited. Members of JB are issued with 2 shares in PVDM for each share they have in JB. The trustee obtains a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M for the exchange. Each PVDM share held by the trustee has a cost base and reduced cost base of $15.

Steve writes to the trustee and proves his entitlement to the shares held in trust for him.

There is a roll-over under this Subdivision so that any capital gain or loss made by the trustee is disregarded. The first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of each of Steve’s PVDM shares is $15.

Subdivision 126-G — Transfer of assets between certain trusts

Guide to Subdivision 126-G

126-215 What this Subdivision is about

Roll-overs may be available when CGT assets are transferred between certain trusts.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

126-220 Object of this Subdivision

126-225 When a roll-over may be chosen

126-230 Beneficiaries’ entitlements not be discretionary etc.

126-235 Exceptions for roll-over

126-240 Consequences for the trusts

126-245 Consequences for beneficiaries—general approach for working out cost base etc.

126-250 Consequences for beneficiaries—other approach for working out cost base etc.

126-255 No other cost base etc. adjustment for beneficiaries

126-260 Giving information to beneficiaries

126-265 Interest sale facilities

Operative provisions

126-220 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that CGT considerations are not an impediment to the restructure of trusts, whilst ensuring that subsequent changes to the manner and extent to which beneficiaries can benefit from the trusts are subject to appropriate tax consequences.

126-225 When a roll-over may be chosen

(1) A roll-over may be chosen for a *CGT asset (the roll-over asset) if:

(a) the trustee of a trust (the transferring trust):

(i) creates a trust (the receiving trust), by declaration or settlement, over one or more CGT assets that include the roll-over asset; or

(ii) transfers the roll-over asset to an existing trust (the receiving trust);

at a particular time (the transfer time); and

if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies—the receiving trust has no CGT assets immediately before the transfer time, other than any or all of the following:

small amounts of cash or debt;

its rights under an arrangement, if (collectively) those rights only facilitate the transfer of assets to it from the transferring trust; and

just after the transfer time:

each of the trusts has the same beneficiaries; and

the receiving trust has the same *classes of *membership interests that the transferring trust had just before, and has just after, the transfer time; and

the sum of the *market values of each beneficiary’s membership interests of a particular class in both trusts is substantially the same as the sum of the market values, just before the transfer time, of the beneficiary’s membership interests of that class in both trusts; and

the requirement in section 126-230 is met; and

the exceptions in section 126-235 do not apply.

Exception if other roll-over assets already transferred

However, paragraph (1)(b) does not apply if:

the roll-over asset is transferred to the receiving trust under an arrangement; and

the roll-over asset was an asset of the transferring trust just before the arrangement was made; and

at least one other asset of the receiving trust:

is an asset for which a roll-over was obtained under this Subdivision for the trusts; and

is an asset over which the receiving trust was created, or was transferred by the transferring trust to the receiving trust under the arrangement; and

(d) the transfer time is in the income year for the transferring trust that includes the earliest transfer time (the start time) for the assets covered by paragraph (c).

Obtaining the roll-over

The roll-over only happens if both the trustee of the transferring trust and the trustee of the receiving trust choose to obtain it.

126-230 Beneficiaries’ entitlements not be discretionary etc.

The conditions in subsections (2) and (3) must be met:

if subsection 126-225(2) applies—at all times during the period:

starting at the start time; and

ending at the transfer time; and

otherwise—at the transfer time.

CGT event E4 is capable of happening

The first condition is met at a particular time if, at that time, CGT event E4 is capable of happening to all of the *membership interests in each of the trusts.

Note: A roll-over cannot be chosen if either trust is a discretionary trust.

Beneficiaries’ entitlements not discretionary

The second condition is met at a particular time if, at that time, the manner or extent to which each beneficiary of each trust can benefit from the trust is not capable of being significantly affected by the exercise, or non-exercise, of a power.

However, if both trusts are *managed investment trusts, disregard a power if the power’s existence at that time does not significantly affect the *market value at that time of each *membership interest in each of the trusts.

126-235 Exceptions for roll-over

Foreign trusts

An exception applies for a CGT asset if:

the receiving trust is a foreign trust for CGT purposes for the income year that includes the transfer time; and

the roll-over asset is not taxable Australian property just after the transfer time.

Public trading trusts

(2) Another exception applies if either trust is a trust to which section 102S of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the income year that includes the transfer time.

Choices

Another exception applies if, just after the transfer time:

a choice (however described) under a provision of a *taxation law is in force for either of the trusts in relation to particular circumstances; and

(b) the same choice (however described) under that provision for the other trust in relation to those circumstances (a mirror choice) is not also in force; and

the absence of a mirror choice would or could have an ongoing effect on the calculation of an entity’s *net income, or taxable income, for:

the entity’s income year that includes the transfer time; or

a later income year.

However, the exception in subsection (3) does not apply if:

the other trust makes a mirror choice before the first time after the transfer time when the absence of the mirror choice would affect the calculation of an entity’s *net income, or taxable income, for an income year; or

it would not be reasonable for subsection (3) to apply.

Note: For paragraph (a), the other trust must still be able, under the relevant provision of the taxation law, to make the mirror choice.

If, just after the transfer time:

(a) a choice (however described) referred to in paragraph (3)(a) is in force for either of the trusts (the first choice); and

a provision of a *taxation law:

prevents the revocation or variation of that choice; or

sets out a consequence for an entity if that choice is revoked or varied;

that provision is taken to apply for a mirror choice, in force for the other trust at or after that time, in a way corresponding to the way in which it applies for the first choice.

Note: For example, if the provision sets out consequences that flow from the revocation of the first choice, then those consequences will also flow if the mirror choice is revoked.

126-240 Consequences for the trusts

Disregard any capital gain or loss

If the roll-over is chosen, disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee of the transferring trust makes from:

creating the receiving trust over the roll-over asset; or

transferring the roll-over asset to the receiving trust;

at the transfer time.

Adjust roll-over asset’s cost base and reduced cost base

If the roll-over is chosen:

the first element of the roll-over asset’s *cost base, in the hands of the receiving trust, is its cost base just before the transfer time; and

the first element of the roll-over asset’s *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

Any pre-transfer losses of receiving trust cannot be utilised

If the roll-over is chosen:

any net capital loss of the receiving trust for an income year ending before the transfer time cannot be applied after the transfer time to reduce an amount of that trust’s *capital gains; and

(b) the sum of the receiving trust’s *capital losses for the income year that includes the transfer time (the transfer year) is reduced by an amount equal to any net capital loss that the trust would have had for that year had that year ended just before the transfer time; and

any *tax loss of the receiving trust for an income year ending before the transfer time cannot be deducted after the transfer time from an amount of that trust’s assessable income or net exempt income; and

the sum of the receiving trust’s deductions for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to any tax loss that the trust would have had for that year had that year ended just before the transfer time.

References in this subsection to the transfer time are to be read as references to the start time if subsection 126-225(2) applies.

Pre-CGT assets

Note: Subsection 126-225(2) applies if the roll-over asset is transferred to the receiving trust after an earlier roll-over under this Subdivision, for another asset, was obtained for the trusts.

If:

the roll-over is chosen; and

the transferring trust last *acquired the roll-over asset before 20 September 1985;

the receiving trust is taken to have acquired it before that day.

126-245 Consequences for beneficiaries—general approach for working out cost base etc.

If the roll-over is chosen, each of the following:

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of a beneficiary’s *membership interests in each trust;

the time each of the beneficiary’s membership interests in the receiving trust is treated as having been *acquired;

is adjusted under this section for the transfer time unless the beneficiary has chosen for them to be adjusted under section 126-250.

First element of cost base of interests in transferring trust

Note: The beneficiary can choose for these things to be adjusted once for several consecutive transfer times (for multiple roll-over assets) if the beneficiary owned the interests at all of those times (see section 126-250).

The first element of the *cost base, just after the transfer time, of each of the beneficiary’s *membership interests in the transferring trust is an amount equal to such proportion of the interest’s cost base just before the transfer time as is reasonable having regard to:

the *market value of the interest just after the transfer time, or a reasonable approximation of that market value; and

the market value of the interest just before the transfer time, or a reasonable approximation of that market value.

First element of cost base of interests in receiving trust

The first element of the *cost base, just after the transfer time, of each of the beneficiary’s *membership interests in the receiving trust is such amount so that the sum of:

the cost base, just before the transfer time, of that membership interest in the receiving trust; and

if, just after the transfer time, that interest in the receiving trust corresponds to at least one of the beneficiary’s membership interests in the transferring trust—the cost base, just before the transfer time, of each of those corresponding membership interests in the transferring trust; and

if, just after the transfer time, that interest in the receiving trust corresponds to a proportion of one of the beneficiary’s membership interests in the transferring trust—that proportion of the cost base, just before the transfer time, of that corresponding membership interest in the transferring trust;

reasonably approximates:

if paragraph (b) applies—the sum of the cost bases, just after the transfer time, of each of the interests referred to in paragraphs (a) and (b); and

if paragraph (c) applies—the sum of:

the cost base, just after the transfer time, of the interest referred to in paragraph (a); and

the proportion of the cost base, just after the transfer time, of the interest referred to in paragraph (c).

First element of reduced cost base of interests in each trust

The first element of the *reduced cost base, just after the transfer time, of each of the beneficiary’s *membership interests in each trust is worked out similarly.

Time of acquisition for interests in the receiving trust

Each of the beneficiary’s *membership interests in the receiving trust is treated as having been *acquired just after the transfer time.

Time of acquisition for pre-CGT interests in the receiving trust

However, if one or more of the beneficiary’s *membership interests in the transferring trust were *pre-CGT assets just before the transfer time, the beneficiary is treated as having *acquired before 20 September 1985 its interests in the receiving trust that correspond to those interests in the transferring trust.

126-250 Consequences for beneficiaries—other approach for working out cost base etc.

This section applies if the beneficiary owns one or more *membership interests in the transferring trust at all times during the period:

(a) starting just before this time (the starting time):

the transfer time; or

the transfer time for an asset referred to in paragraph 126-225(2)(c) (assuming subsection 126-225(2) applies); and

(b) ending just after this time (the ending time):

the transfer time (assuming this is not also the starting time); or

a later time in the transfer year that is the transfer time for another asset for which a roll-over is obtained under this Subdivision for the trusts.

Note: Subsection 126-225(2) applies if the roll-over asset is transferred to the receiving trust after an earlier roll-over under this Subdivision, for another asset, was obtained for the trusts.

The beneficiary may choose for each of the following:

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of each of those *membership interests and of the beneficiary’s corresponding membership interests in the receiving trust;

the time each of those corresponding interests in the receiving trust is treated as having been *acquired;

to be adjusted under subsection (3) for the period.

For each of the interests referred to in subsection (2), subsections 126-245(2), (3), (4), (5) and (6) apply as if:

references in those subsections to just before the transfer time were references to just before the starting time; and

references in those subsections to just after the transfer time were references to just after the ending time.

126-255 No other cost base etc. adjustment for beneficiaries

If a beneficiary of the trusts makes adjustments under section 126-245 or 126-250 to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the beneficiary’s *membership interests in relation to the CGT event that is:

the creation of the receiving trust over the roll-over asset; or

the transfer of the roll-over asset to the receiving trust;

no other adjustment is to be made under this Act to those cost bases and reduced cost bases because of something that happens in relation to that event.

Note: This section prevents the general value shifting regime from applying in relation to the event because sections 126-245 and 126-250 deal with any value shift that might occur.

126-260 Giving information to beneficiaries

Beneficiaries must be given particulars of the roll-over

If the roll-over is chosen, the trustee of the transferring trust must, within 3 months after the end of the transfer year, send written notice of the particulars set out in subsection (2) to each of the trust’s beneficiaries:

by post to the address most recently notified by the beneficiary as the beneficiary’s address; or

by any other means notified by the beneficiary for receiving correspondence from the trust.

Note: The trustee may also notify beneficiaries of other details of the roll-over.

The particulars that must be given

The particulars are as follows:

the roll-over asset’s transfer time;

sufficient information to enable a beneficiary to work out which of the beneficiary’s *membership interests in the receiving trust correspond to each of the beneficiary’s membership interests in the transferring trust;

the *market value of each of the membership interests held by the beneficiary in the transferring trust just after the roll-over asset’s transfer time, or a reasonable approximation of that market value;

the market value of each of the membership interests held by the beneficiary in the transferring trust just before the roll-over asset’s transfer time, or a reasonable approximation of that market value.

Offence

A trustee commits an offence if the trustee contravenes subsection (1).

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

An offence against subsection (3) is an offence of strict liability.

Note: For strict liability, see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code.

If the transferring trust has multiple trustees

If the transferring trust has 2 or more trustees, the obligation imposed by subsection (1) is imposed on each of the trustees, but may be discharged by any of the trustees.

Note: Each of the trustees commits an offence against subsection (3) if none of them discharges the obligation imposed by subsection (1).

In a prosecution of a trustee for an offence against subsection (3) for an act or omission contravening subsection (1), it is a defence if the trustee proves that the trustee:

did not aid, abet, counsel or procure the act or omission; and

was not in any way knowingly concerned in, or party to, the act or omission (whether directly or indirectly and whether by any act or omission of the trustee).

Note: A defendant bears a legal burden in relation to the matters in subsection (6): see section 13.4 of the Criminal Code.

Obligations of beneficiary unaffected if not notified of roll-over

A failure by a trustee to comply with subsection (1) does not affect the application of section 126-245 to the beneficiary.

126-265 Interest sale facilities

Interest sale facilities

(1) For the purposes of this Subdivision, an entity (the investor) is treated as owning a *membership interest (the roll-over interest) in the receiving trust at a time (the deeming time), if:

the investor owned a membership interest in the transferring trust; and

(b) a trust is created, or a transfer happens, (the transaction) as mentioned in paragraph 126-225(1)(a) in relation to *CGT assets of the transferring trust; and

because:

a foreign law impedes the ability of the receiving trust to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor; or

it would be impractical or unreasonably onerous to determine whether a foreign law impedes the ability of the receiving trust to issue or transfer the roll-over interest to the investor;

it is *arranged that the receiving trust will issue or transfer the roll-over interest to another entity (the facility) under the transaction instead of to the investor; and

in accordance with that arrangement and as a result of the transaction, the facility:

becomes the owner of the roll-over interest; and

owns the roll-over interest at the deeming time; and

under the arrangement, the investor is entitled to receive from the facility:

an amount equivalent to the capital proceeds of any CGT event that happens in relation to the roll-over interest (less expenses); or

if a CGT event happens in relation to the roll-over interest together with CGT events happening in relation to other membership interests—an amount equivalent to the investor’s proportion of the total capital proceeds of the CGT events (less expenses).

The facility is treated as not owning the roll-over interest at the deeming time.

Division 128 — Effect of death

Guide to Division 128

128-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out what happens when you die and a CGT asset you owned just before dying devolves to your legal personal representative or passes to a beneficiary in your estate.

It also contains rules about what happens when a joint tenant dies.

General rules

128-10 Capital gain or loss when you die is disregarded

128-15 Effect on the legal personal representative or beneficiary

128-20 When does an asset pass to a beneficiary?

128-25 The beneficiary is a trustee of a superannuation fund etc.

Special rules for joint tenants

128-50 Joint tenants

General rules

128-10 Capital gain or loss when you die is disregarded

When you die, a *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event that results for a CGT asset you owned just before dying is disregarded.

• an exempt entity; or

• the trustee of a complying superannuation entity; or

• a foreign resident.

Note 1: Section 104-215 sets out an exception to this rule if the CGT asset passes to a beneficiary in your estate who is:

Note 2: There is a special indexation rule for deceased estates: see section 114-10.

128-15 Effect on the legal personal representative or beneficiary

This section sets out what happens if a CGT asset you owned just before dying:

devolves to your *legal personal representative; or

*passes to a beneficiary in your estate.

Note 1: Section 128-25 has different rules if the asset passes to a beneficiary in your estate who is the trustee of a complying superannuation entity.

Note 2: If the beneficiary is an exempt entity, Division 57 in Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 has rules about exempt entities that become taxable. It sets out what the entity is taken to have purchased its assets for when it becomes taxable.

Note 3: If the beneficiary is a foreign resident, Subdivision 855-B sets out what happens if the beneficiary becomes an Australian resident. The beneficiary is taken to have acquired each asset owned just before becoming an Australian resident for the market value of the asset at that time.

The *legal personal representative, or beneficiary, is taken to have *acquired the asset on the day you died.

Special rule for legal personal representative

Any *capital gain or *capital loss the *legal personal representative makes if the asset *passes to a beneficiary in your estate is disregarded.

Cost base rules for both

This table sets out the modifications to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the CGT asset in the hands of the *legal personal representative or beneficiary.

Note 1: Section 70-105 has a general rule that the person on whom the trading stock devolves is taken to have bought it for its market value. There are some exceptions though.

Note 2: Subdivision 118-B contains other rules about dwellings acquired through deceased estates.

Note 3: The rule in item 3 in the table does not apply to a dwelling that devolved to your legal personal representative, or passed to a beneficiary in your estate, on or before 7.30 pm on 20 August 1996: see section 128-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Further rule for a beneficiary

(5) A beneficiary can include in the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the asset any expenditure that the *legal personal representative would have been able to include at the time the asset *passes to the beneficiary. The beneficiary can include the expenditure on the day the representative incurred it.

Example: You die on 1 May 1995 owning land. On 15 June 1995 your legal personal representative pays $500 council rates for the land.

On 31 July 1995 your representative transfers it to a beneficiary in your estate, who is taken to have acquired it on 1 May 1995.

The beneficiary can include the $500 in the third element of the cost base of the land. It is included on 15 June 1995.

Collectables and personal use assets

The *legal personal representative or beneficiary is taken to have *acquired a collectable or a personal use asset if:

you acquired it on or after 20 September 1985; and

it was a collectable or a personal use asset (as appropriate) in your hands when you died.

Note 1: Capital losses from collectables can be used only to reduce capital gains from collectables: see section 108-10.

Note 2: Capital losses from personal use assets are disregarded: see section 108-20.

128-20 When does an asset pass to a beneficiary?

(1) A *CGT asset passes to a beneficiary in your estate if the beneficiary becomes the owner of the asset:

under your will, or that will as varied by a court order; or

by operation of an intestacy law, or such a law as varied by a court order; or

because it is appropriated to the beneficiary by your legal personal representative in satisfaction of a pecuniary legacy or some other interest or share in your estate; or

under a deed of arrangement if:

the beneficiary entered into the deed to settle a claim to participate in the distribution of your estate; and

any consideration given by the beneficiary for the asset consisted only of the variation or waiver of a claim to one or more other *CGT assets that formed part of your estate.

(It does not matter whether the asset is transmitted directly to the beneficiary or is transferred to the beneficiary by your *legal personal representative.)

(2) A *CGT asset does not pass to a beneficiary in your estate if the beneficiary becomes the owner of the asset because your *legal personal representative transfers it under a power of sale.

128-25 The beneficiary is a trustee of a superannuation fund etc.

This section has rules about *cost base and *reduced cost base that are relevant if you die and a CGT asset you owned just before dying *passes to a beneficiary in your estate who (when the asset passes) is the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity.

Note: A capital gain or loss is also made: see section 104-215.

The beneficiary is taken to have *acquired the asset on the day you died. The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset is its *market value on that day.

(3) The beneficiary can include in the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the asset any expenditure that your *legal personal representative would have been able to include at the time the asset *passes to the beneficiary. The beneficiary can include the expenditure on the day the representative incurred it.

Special rules for joint tenants

128-50 Joint tenants

This section has rules that are relevant if a CGT asset is owned by joint tenants and one of them dies.

The survivor is taken to have *acquired (on the day the individual died) the individual’s interest in the asset. If there are 2 or more survivors, they are taken to have acquired that interest in equal shares.

Note: Joint tenants are treated as owning a CGT asset in equal shares: see section 108-7.

(3) If the individual who died *acquired his or her interest in the asset on or after 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base of the interest each survivor is taken to have acquired is:

The first element of the *reduced cost base of the interest each survivor is taken to have *acquired is worked out similarly.

Example: In 1999 2 individuals buy land for $50,000 as joint tenants. Each one is taken to have a 50% interest in it. On 1 May 2001 one of them dies.

The survivor is taken to have acquired the interest of the individual who died on 1 May 2001. If the cost base of that interest on that day is $27,000, the survivor is taken to have acquired that interest for that amount.

(4) If the individual who died *acquired his or her interest in the asset before 20 September 1985, the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the interest each survivor is taken to have acquired is:

Note: There is a special indexation rule for surviving joint tenants: see section 114-10.

Division 130 — Investments

Guide to Division 130

130-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the rules for these kinds of investments:

• bonus shares and units; and

• rights; and

• convertible interests; and

• shares acquired under an employee share scheme; and

• exchangeable interests; and

• exploration investments.

Most are about modifying the cost base and reduced cost base of a CGT asset.

Subdivision 130-A — Bonus shares and units

Guide to Subdivision 130-A

130-15 Acquisition time and cost base of bonus equities

Operative provisions

130-20 Issue of bonus shares or units

This section sets out what happens if:

(a) you own *shares in a company or units in a unit trust (the original equities); and

(b) the company issues other shares, or the trustee issues other units, (the bonus equities) to you in relation to the original equities.

The first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base for the bonus equities includes:

(a) for *shares—any part of the shares that are a *dividend (or taken to be a dividend under subsection 45(2) or 45C(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

for units—any part of the other units that are or will be included in your assessable income.

You are taken to have *acquired the bonus equities when they were issued.

Note 1: There are special indexation rules for cost base modifications: see Division 114.

Note 2: The amounts of calls you pay on partly-paid equities will also form part of the first element of their cost base and reduced cost base.

Note 3: There is a special rule for shares issued on or before 30 June 1987: see subsection 130-20(2) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 4: Certain capital distributions are taken to be dividends under subsections 45(2) and 45C(1) if a company has entered into a capital streaming or dividend substitution arrangement.

This table sets out what happens if:

(a) none of the shares are a *dividend (or taken to be a dividend under subsection 45(2) or 45C(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

none of the other units are or will be included in your assessable income.

Note: Certain capital distributions are taken to be dividends under subsections 45(2) and 45C(1) if a company has entered into a capital streaming or dividend substitution arrangement.

The amount paid or payable can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note 1: The amounts of calls you pay on partly-paid equities will also form part of the first element of their cost base and reduced cost base.

Note 2: There is a special rule for bonus equities issued on or before 1 pm on 10 December 1986 that affects item 2 of the table: see subsection 130-20(3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

(3A) If only a part of a capital benefit that is bonus equities is a *dividend, or is taken to be a dividend under subsection 45(2) or 45C(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, you apportion the first element of your *cost base and *reduced cost base for the original equities in a reasonable way over both the original equities and the bonus equities.

(4) The modifications in this section are not made if, for the income year in which the bonus equities are issued, the unit trust is a public trading trust within the meaning of section 102R of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: Subsection 26BC(9E) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about securities lending arrangements) modifies the operation of this section.

Subdivision 130-B — Rights

130-40 Exercise of rights

The table in this section sets out the modifications to the rules about *cost base and *reduced cost base that happen if you exercise rights to *acquire:

*shares, or options to acquire shares, in a company; or

units, or options to acquire units, in a unit trust.

Note: For rights acquired under employee share schemes, see Division 83A, Subdivision 130-D and Division 134.

The modifications happen only if:

you did not pay for the rights and the condition in subsection (3) is satisfied; or

the condition in subsection (4) is satisfied.

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

When you were issued the rights, you must:

(a) already own shares in, or *convertible interests issued by, the company or a company that is a member of the same *wholly-owned group (the original shares or interests); or

(b) already own units in, or convertible interests issued by the trustee of, the unit trust (the original units or interests).

You must have *acquired the rights from an entity that already owned shares, units or convertible interests of the kind referred to in subsection (3).

The company that is a member of the same wholly-owned group mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) includes a company that would cease to be a member of that group by the exercise of the rights.

The rights to *acquire units or to acquire an option to acquire units in a unit trust must have been issued by the trustee after 28 January 1988.

An amount is to be added under this subsection if a *capital gain made from the right has been reduced under section 118-20. This is so even though a capital gain that is made on exercise is disregarded under subsection (7). The amount to be added is the amount of the reduction.

Note: For example, a capital gain made on the exercise of the right under section 118-20 may be reduced because an amount is included in the owner’s assessable income under subsection 26BB(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about assessing a gain on disposal or redemption of a traditional security) or section 159GS of that Act (about balancing adjustments on transfer of a qualifying security).

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from the exercise of the rights is disregarded.

Note 1: The exercise of the rights would be an example of CGT event C2 (about a CGT asset ending).

Note 2: There are transitional rules for some rights: see section 130-40 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 3: The effect of this Subdivision is modified in 2 cases by sections 102AAZBA (about non-resident trusts) and 414 (about CFC’s) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

130-45 Timing rules

Acquisition of rights

If you *acquired the rights from the company or trustee, you are taken to have acquired the rights when you acquired the original shares or interests or the original units or interests.

Acquisition of shares, units or options on exercise of rights

You are taken to have *acquired the new *shares, units or options when you exercise the rights.

130-50 Application to options

This Subdivision applies to options in the same way that it applies to rights.

Subdivision 130-C — Convertible interests

130-60 Shares or units acquired by converting a convertible interest

This table sets out the modification to the rules about *cost base and *reduced cost base that happens if you *acquire *shares, or units in a unit trust, by converting a convertible interest.

An amount is to be added under this subsection if a *capital gain from the convertible interest has been reduced under section 118-20. This is so even though a capital gain that is made on conversion is disregarded under subsection (3). The amount to be added is the amount of the reduction.

Note: For example, a capital gain made on the conversion under section 118-20 may be reduced because an amount is included in the owner’s assessable income under subsection 26BB(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about assessing a gain on disposal or redemption of a traditional security) or section 159GS of that Act (about balancing adjustments on transfer of a qualifying security).

The payment to convert the convertible interest can include giving property (see section 103-5).

You are taken to have *acquired the shares or units when the conversion of the convertible interest happened.

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from converting the convertible interest is disregarded.

Note 1: The conversion of the convertible interest would be an example of CGT event C2 (about a CGT asset ending).

Note 2: There are transitional rules for some convertible notes: see section 130-60 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Subdivision 130-D — Employee share schemes

Table of sections

130-75 Objects of Subdivision

130-80 ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes

130-85 Interests in employee share trusts

130-90 Shares held by employee share trusts

130-95 Shares and rights in relation to ESS interests

130-97 Application of certain provisions of Division 83A

130-75 Objects of Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are:

to recognise that:

Division 83A contains the primary rules for taxing gains on *ESS interests acquired under *employee share schemes; and

*capital gains and *capital losses on such interests should usually be disregarded during the period in which Division 83A applies to them; and

to align the treatment of ESS interests under Division 83A and the CGT provisions by, for example:

turning off certain special CGT rules; and

extending some of the deeming provisions of that Division into the CGT provisions; and

to disregard *employee share trusts for most CGT purposes, by treating ESS interests owned by such trusts as being directly owned by the beneficiaries of the trusts.

130-80 ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes

Capital gains and losses

Disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss to the extent that it results from a CGT event if:

the CGT event happens in relation to an *ESS interest you *acquire under an employee share scheme; and

the CGT event is not CGT event E4, G1 or K8; and

if Subdivision 83A-B applies to the interest—the time of the acquisition is the time when the CGT event happens; and

if Subdivision 83A-C applies to the interest:

the time of the acquisition is the time when the CGT event happens; or

the CGT event happens on or before the *ESS deferred taxing point for the ESS interest.

Subsection (1) does not apply if:

Subdivision 83A-C applies to the *ESS interest; and

the CGT event happens because you forfeit or lose the ESS interest (other than by disposing of it) on or before the *ESS deferred taxing point for the interest.

General acquisition rule

Subsection 109-5(2) (about when you acquire a CGT asset) does not apply to a CGT asset and a CGT event if:

the CGT asset is:

a *share; or

a right to acquire a beneficial interest in a share; and

the CGT event is CGT event A1; and

you acquire an *ESS interest; and

the ESS interest is a beneficial interest in the share or right; and

Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the ESS interest.

Market value substitution rule

Sections 112-20 and 116-30 (about the market value substitution rule) do not apply to the extent that they relate to:

you acquiring an *ESS interest to which Subdivision 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies; or

you:

forfeiting an ESS interest; or

forfeiting or losing an ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right (without you having disposed of the interest or exercised the right);

if Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C applies to the ESS interest (ignoring section 83A-310); or

you acquiring an ESS interest that:

is a beneficial interest in a right; and

is an ESS interest to which the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-33(1)(a) to (c) (about start ups) apply.

130-85 Interests in employee share trusts

Scope

This section applies if:

you *acquire an *ESS interest under an employee share scheme; and

Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C applies to the ESS interest; and

the ESS interest is, or arises because of, an interest you hold in an employee share trust.

Application of Division 83A, Part 3-1 and this Part

Division 83A (Employee share schemes), Part 3-1 (Capital gains and losses: general topics) and this Part apply as if you were absolutely entitled to the relevant *share or right:

from the time of acquisition of the *ESS interest; and

until you no longer have an ESS interest in the share or right.

Note 1: An interest you hold in an employee share trust may give rise to an ESS interest because of the operation of section 83A-320.

Note 2: As a result of subsection (2) of this section, CGT event E5 might happen at the time of acquisition. This may result in the trustee making a capital gain. However, any capital gain made by the beneficiary would be disregarded under section 130-80.

However, if this section applies to you because an associate of yours *acquired the *ESS interest, Division 83A, this Part and Part 3-3 apply as if your associate were absolutely entitled to the relevant *share or right (instead of you):

either:

if Subdivision 83A-B applies to the ESS interest—from the time of acquisition; or

if Subdivision 83A-C applies to the ESS interest—from immediately after the *ESS deferred taxing point for the ESS interest; and

until your associate no longer has an ESS interest in the share or right.

Note: Once the ESS interest has been taxed to you under Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C, section 83A-305 (which treats the interest as having been acquired by you, rather than your associate) is no longer relevant. Subsection (3) of this section ensures that your associate then gets the same tax treatment as you would have, had you originally acquired the interest. This does not, however, imply a disposal from you to your associate.

Meaning of employee share trust

(4) An employee share trust, for an *employee share scheme, is a trust whose sole activities are:

obtaining *shares or rights in a company; and

ensuring that *ESS interests in the company that are beneficial interests in those shares or rights are provided under the employee share scheme to employees, or to *associates of employees, of:

the company; or

a *subsidiary of the company; and

other activities that are merely incidental to the activities mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b).

130-90 Shares held by employee share trusts

Shares held for future acquisition under employee share schemes

Disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss made by an employee share trust to the extent that it results from a CGT event, if:

immediately before the event happens, an *ESS interest is a CGT asset of the trust; and

either of the following subparagraphs applies:

the event is CGT event E5, and the event happens because a beneficiary of the trust becomes absolutely entitled to the ESS interest as against the trustee;

the event is CGT event E7, and the event happens because the trustee *disposes of the ESS interest to a beneficiary of the trust; and

Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the ESS interest.

Shares held to satisfy the future exercise of rights acquired under employee share schemes

Disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss made by an employee share trust, or a beneficiary of the trust, to the extent that it results from a CGT event, if:

the CGT event is CGT event E5 or E7; and

the CGT event happens in relation to a *share; and

the beneficiary had acquired a beneficial interest in the share by exercising a right; and

the beneficiary’s beneficial interest in the right was an *ESS interest to which Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applied.

Subsection (1A) or (1) does not apply if the beneficiary acquired the beneficial interest in the *share for more than its *cost base in the hands of the employee share trust at the time the CGT event happens.

130-95 Shares and rights in relation to ESS interests

For the purposes of Part 3-1 (Capital gains and losses: general topics) and this Part, treat a CGT event that happens in relation to a *share or right in the same way as a CGT event that happens in relation to an *ESS interest, if:

Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the ESS interest; and

the ESS interest forms part of the share or right.

130-97 Application of certain provisions of Division 83A

The following provisions have effect for the purposes of this Subdivision in the same way as they have for the purposes of Division 83A:

section 83A-130 (about takeovers and restructures);

section 83A-305 (about associates);

section 83A-320 (about trusts);

section 83A-325 (about relationships similar to employment);

section 83A-335 (about stapled securities);

section 83A-340 (about indeterminate rights).

Subdivision 130-E — Exchangeable interests

Table of sections

130-100 Exchangeable interest

130-105 Shares acquired in exchange for the disposal or redemption of an exchangeable interest

130-100 Exchangeable interest

An exchangeable interest is a *traditional security or *qualifying security that:

was issued on the basis that it will or may be:

disposed of to the issuer of the traditional security or the qualifying security or to a *connected entity of the issuer of the traditional security or the qualifying security; or

redeemed;

in exchange for *shares in a company that is neither:

the issuer of the traditional security or the qualifying security; nor

a connected entity of the issuer of the traditional security or the qualifying security; and

was issued on or after 1 July 2001.

130-105 Shares acquired in exchange for the disposal or redemption of an exchangeable interest

Cost base and reduced cost base

The table has effect:

An amount is to be added under this subsection if a *capital gain on the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest has been reduced under section 118-20. This is so even though a capital gain that is made on the disposal or redemption of the exchangeable interest is disregarded under subsection (4). The amount to be added is the amount of the reduction.

The payment for the exchange can include giving property (see section 103-5).

Other CGT consequences

The table has effect:

Application

This section applies to the disposal or redemption of an exchangeable interest on or after 1 July 2001.

Subdivision 130-F — Exploration investments

130-110 Reducing the reduced cost base before disposal

This section applies if:

(a) an entity (the minerals explorer) issues a *share in the minerals explorer to another entity (the investor) during the 2017-18, 2018-19, 2019-20, 2020-21, 2021-22, 2022-23, 2023-24 or 2024-25 income year; and

the Commissioner makes a determination under section 418-101 allocating exploration credits to the minerals explorer for the income year in which the share is issued; and

the share is issued to the investor on or after the day on which the Commissioner’s determination is made; and

the share is an *equity interest.

The *reduced cost base of the *share is to be reduced immediately before the disposal of the share by the amount worked out as follows:

where:

investment period means the period, within the income year in which the *share is issued to the investor, that:

begins on the day on which the Commissioner makes the determination mentioned in paragraph (1)(b); and

ends at the end of the income year.

Division 132 — Leases

132-1 Lessee incurs expenditure to get lease term varied or waived

If the lessee of property incurs expenditure in obtaining the consent of the lessor to vary or waive a term of the lease, the fourth element of the lease’s *cost base and *reduced cost base includes the amount of that expenditure.

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

132-5 Lessor pays lessee for improvements

The fourth element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of property that was subject to a lease includes any payment (because of the lease expiring or being surrendered or forfeited) by the lessor to the lessee for expenditure of a capital nature incurred by the lessee in making improvements to the lease property.

The payment or expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

132-10 Grant of a long-term lease

These rules apply if CGT event F2 happens for a lessor of property.

For any later CGT event that happens to the land or the lessor’s lease of it, its *cost base and *reduced cost base (including the cost base and reduced cost base of any building, part of a building, structure or improvement that is treated as a separate CGT asset) excludes:

any expenditure incurred before CGT event F2 happens; and

the *cost of any depreciating asset for which the lessor has deducted or can deduct an amount for the asset’s decline in value under this Act.

Note: Subdivision 108-D sets out when a building, structure or improvement is treated as a separate CGT asset.

The fourth element of the property’s *cost base and *reduced cost base includes any payment by the lessor to the lessee to vary or waive a term of the lease or for the forfeiture or surrender of the lease, reduced by the amount of any input tax credit to which the lessor is entitled for the variation or waiver.

The expenditure or payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

132-15 Lessee of land acquires reversionary interest of lessor

This table sets out what happens if:

the lessee of land *acquires the reversionary interest of the lessor in the land; and

Subdivision 124-J (roll-over provisions for Crown leases) does not apply to the acquisition.

All the payments can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note: CGT events F1 to F5 deal specifically with leases. See also (in particular) CGT event C2 (about cancellation, surrender and similar endings).

Division 134 — Options

134-1 Exercise of options

(1) This table sets out the effects of the exercise of an option (including an option that has been renewed or extended) on the *cost bases and *reduced cost bases of the grantor and the entity that exercises the option (the grantee).

Note 1: If you granted, renewed or extended an option, CGT event C3 or D2 may happen.

Note 2: Item 1 in the table is modified for certain options granted before 20 September 1985: see section 134-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 3: Item 1 in the table is modified for ESS interests acquired under employee share schemes: see Division 83A and section 112-97.

Note 4: This Division has no operation in relation to an option acquired under an employee share scheme if the option is exercised before the ESS deferred taxing point for the option: see Subdivision 130-D. Division 83A applies instead.

All the payments can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Example 1: Steven obtains an option to buy a yacht (for $75,000) from Tom. Steven pays $5,000 for the option.

Steven exercises the option. The first element of his cost base and reduced cost base for the yacht includes the expenditure he incurred for the option.

So, the first element of his cost base and reduced cost base for the yacht is:

Example 2: An entity owns 1,000 shares in a company. Bill grants the entity an option which, if exercised, would require him to buy the shares for $2 each. The entity pays Bill 10 cents per share for the option.

The entity exercises the option. Bill paid $2,000 for the shares. He received $100 from the entity for granting the option.

The first element of Bill’s cost base and reduced cost base for the shares is:

In working out whether the entity made a capital gain or loss on the sale of the shares, the second element of its cost base (and reduced cost base) includes the $100 the entity paid for the option.

A *capital gain or *capital loss the grantee makes from exercising the option is disregarded. However, this rule does not apply if the grantee *acquired the option under a trust restructure (see Subdivision 124-N) and, on exercising the option, held the resulting asset as an item of trading stock.

Note 1: The exercise of the option would be an example of CGT event C2 (about a CGT asset ending).

Note 2: There is an exemption for the grantor if the option is exercised: see subsection 104-40(5).

This Division does not apply to rights or options to which Subdivision 130-B applies.

Note: Subdivision 130-B deals (amongst other things) with rights and options issued by a company or trust where you did not pay or give anything to acquire them.

This Division does not apply to:

an option to the extent that the option binds the grantor to *dispose of foreign currency; or

an option to the extent that the option binds the grantor to *acquire foreign currency.

Division 137 — Granny flat arrangements

Table of Subdivisions

137-A—When CGT events do not happen

Subdivision 137-A — When CGT events do not happen

Guide to Subdivision 137-A

137-1 What this Subdivision is about

A CGT event does not happen when certain granny flat arrangements are entered into, varied or terminated.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

137-10 Meaning of key terms

137-15 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is entered into

137-20 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is varied

137-25 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is terminated

Operative provisions

137-10 Meaning of key terms

(1) An individual holds a granny flat interest in a *dwelling under an *arrangement if the individual has a right to occupy the dwelling for life that has been conferred by the arrangement.

(2) An individual is eligible for a granny flat interest at a particular time if:

the individual reached pension age at or before that time; or

the individual:

needs, because of a disability, assistance to carry out most day-to-day activities; and

is likely to continue to need that assistance, because of that disability, for at least 12 months after that time.

This Subdivision applies:

to a dwelling’s adjacent land in a corresponding way to the way Subdivision 118-B applies to the adjacent land; or

to an adjacent structure of a flat or home unit in a corresponding way to the way Subdivision 118-B applies to the adjacent structure.

Note: Subsections 118-120(1) and (5) provide that Subdivision 118-B (about main residences) applies to adjacent land and adjacent structures as if they were a dwelling.

137-15 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is entered into

A *CGT event does not happen, to the extent it relates to creating a *granny flat interest in a *dwelling under an *arrangement by entering into the arrangement at a particular time (the start time), if:

the individual who holds, or who is to hold, the granny flat interest under the arrangement is eligible for a granny flat interest at the start time; and

another individual:

holds an *ownership interest in the dwelling at the start time; or

agrees, under the arrangement, to *acquire an ownership interest in a dwelling that is to be the dwelling in which the first-mentioned individual is to hold the granny flat interest; and

at the start time, both individuals are parties to the arrangement; and

the arrangement:

is in writing; and

indicates an intention for the parties to the arrangement to be legally bound by it; and

the arrangement is not of a commercial nature.

137-20 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is varied

A *CGT event does not happen, to the extent it relates to creating or varying a *granny flat interest in a *dwelling under an *arrangement by varying the arrangement at a particular time (the variation time), if:

the individual who holds, or who is to hold, the granny flat interest under the arrangement (as varied) is eligible for a granny flat interest at the variation time; and

another individual:

holds an *ownership interest in the dwelling at the variation time; or

agrees, under the arrangement (as varied), to *acquire an ownership interest in a dwelling that is to be the dwelling in which the first-mentioned individual is to hold the granny flat interest; and

at the variation time, both individuals are parties to the arrangement (as varied); and

the arrangement (as varied):

is in writing; and

indicates an intention for the parties to the arrangement to be legally bound by it; and

the arrangement (as varied) is not of a commercial nature.

137-25 CGT event does not happen when a certain kind of granny flat arrangement is terminated

A CGT event does not happen, to the extent that it relates to terminating a granny flat interest in a dwelling under an arrangement by terminating the arrangement, if:

section 137-15 applied so that a CGT event did not happen when the arrangement was entered into; or

section 137-20 applied so that a CGT event did not happen when the arrangement was varied.

Division 149 — When an asset stops being a pre-CGT asset

Table of Subdivisions

149-A Key concepts

149-B When asset of non-public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset

149-C When asset of public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset

149-F How to treat a “demutualised” public entity

Subdivision 149-A — Key concepts

Table of sections

149-10 What is a pre-CGT asset?

149-15 Majority underlying interests in a CGT asset

149-10 What is a pre-CGT asset?

A *CGT asset that an entity owns is a pre-CGT asset if, and only if:

the entity last acquired the asset before 20 September 1985; and

the entity was not, immediately before the start of the 1998-99 income year, taken under:

(i) former subsection 160ZZS(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

Subdivision C of Division 20 of former Part IIIA of that Act;

to have acquired the asset on or after 20 September 1985; and

the asset has not stopped being a pre-CGT asset of the entity because of this Division.

Note 1: There are transitional rules for assets that stopped being pre-CGT assets under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936: see section 149-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 2: A CGT asset will cease to be a pre-CGT asset on 1 July 2027 (see section 112-175).

149-15 Majority underlying interests in a CGT asset

(1) Majority underlying interests in a *CGT asset consist of:

more than 50% of the beneficial interests that *ultimate owners have (whether directly or *indirectly) in the asset; and

more than 50% of the beneficial interests that ultimate owners have (whether directly or indirectly) in any ordinary income that may be *derived from the asset.

(2) An underlying interest in a *CGT asset is a beneficial interest that an *ultimate owner has (whether directly or *indirectly) in the asset or in any *ordinary income that may be *derived from the asset.

(3) An ultimate owner is:

an individual; or

a company whose *constitution prevents it from making any distribution, whether in money, property or otherwise, to its members; or

the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory; or

a municipal corporation; or

a local governing body; or

the government of a foreign country, or of part of a foreign country.

(4) An *ultimate owner indirectly has a beneficial interest in a *CGT asset of another entity (that is not an ultimate owner) if he, she or it would receive for his, her or its own benefit any of the capital of the other entity if:

the other entity were to distribute any of its capital; and

the capital were then successively distributed by each entity interposed between the other entity and the ultimate owner.

(5) An *ultimate owner indirectly has a beneficial interest in *ordinary income that may be *derived from a *CGT asset of another entity (that is not an ultimate owner) if he, she or it would receive for his, her or its own benefit any of a *dividend or income if:

the other entity were to pay that dividend, or otherwise distribute that income; and

the dividend or income were then successively paid or distributed by each entity interposed between the other entity and the ultimate owner.

Subdivision 149-B — When asset of non-public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset

Table of sections

149-25 Which entities are affected

149-30 Effects if asset no longer has same majority underlying ownership

149-35 Cost base elements of asset that stops being a pre-CGT asset

149-25 Which entities are affected

This Subdivision provides for when a CGT asset of an entity stops being a pre-CGT asset (unless the entity is covered by section 149-50).

Note: Subdivision 149-C deals with when an asset of such an entity stops being a pre-CGT asset.

149-30 Effects if asset no longer has same majority underlying ownership

(1) The asset stops being a *pre-CGT asset at the earliest time when *majority underlying interests in the asset were not had by *ultimate owners who had *majority underlying interests in the asset immediately before 20 September 1985.

Also, Part 3-1 and this Part (except this Division) apply to the asset as if the entity had acquired it at that earliest time.

(2) If the Commissioner is satisfied, or thinks it reasonable to assume, that at all times on and after 20 September 1985 and before a particular time *majority underlying interests in the asset were had by *ultimate owners who had *majority underlying interests in the asset immediately before that day, subsections (1) and (1A) apply as if that were in fact the case.

New owner standing in shoes of former owner

(3) Subsection (4) affects how the *majority underlying interests in the asset are worked out if an *ultimate owner (the new owner) has acquired a percentage (the acquired percentage) of the *underlying interests in the asset because of an event described in column 2 of an item in the table. The former owner is the entity described in column 3 of that item.

(4) This section applies as if the new owner had (in addition to any other *underlying interests), at any time when the former owner had a percentage (the former owner’s percentage) of the underlying interests in the asset, a percentage of the underlying interests in the asset equal to the acquired percentage, or the former owner’s percentage at that time, whichever is the less.

149-35 Cost base elements of asset that stops being a pre-CGT asset

This section affects the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset if it stops being a pre-CGT asset.

The first element of each is the asset’s *market value at the time referred to in subsection 149-30(1).

Subdivision 149-C — When asset of public entity stops being a pre-CGT asset

Table of sections

149-50 Which entities are affected

149-55 Entity to give the Commissioner evidence periodically as to whether asset still has same majority underlying ownership

149-60 What the evidence must show

149-70 Effects if asset no longer has same majority underlying ownership

149-75 Cost base elements of asset that stops being a pre-CGT asset

149-80 No more evidence needed after asset stops being a pre-CGT asset

149-50 Which entities are affected

This Subdivision provides for when a CGT asset of an entity of any of these kinds stops being a pre-CGT asset:

a company *shares in which (except shares that carry the right to a fixed rate of dividend) are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange;

a publicly traded unit trust;

a mutual insurance company;

a mutual affiliate company;

a company (other than one covered by paragraph (a)) all the *shares in which are beneficially owned, whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, by one or more of the following:

a company covered by paragraph (a);

a mutual insurance company;

a mutual affiliate company;

a publicly traded unit trust;

(2) A publicly traded unit trust is a unit trust the units in which:

are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; or

are ordinarily available for subscription or purchase by the public.

This Division applies as if what is done or not done by the trustee of a publicly traded unit trust had been done or not done by the trust.

149-55 Entity to give the Commissioner evidence periodically as to whether asset still has same majority underlying ownership

Within 6 months after each test day, the entity must give the Commissioner written evidence about the *majority underlying interests in the asset at the end of that day. (The Commissioner can extend the period for doing so.)

The evidence must be given in a form that makes the information about those interests readily apparent.

The only consequences of failing to give the evidence are those set out in section 149-70. It is not an offence to fail to give the evidence.

Test days

(2) Each of these days is a test day:

30 June 1999;

a day that is 5 years (or a multiple of 5 years) after 30 June 1999 (but see subsection (3));

if the entity is covered by paragraph 149-50(1)(a) or (e)—a day on which there is abnormal trading in *shares in the company;

if the entity is a publicly traded unit trust—a day on which there is abnormal trading in units in the trust;

if the entity is a company all the *shares in which are beneficially owned, whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, by one or more of the following:

a company *shares in which (except shares that carry the right to a fixed rate of dividend) are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange;

a publicly traded unit trust;

a day on which there is abnormal trading in *shares in the other company or in units in that unit trust.

Note: Subsections (6) and (7) change the normal rules about abnormal trading.

(3) If a day (the fifth anniversary) that would otherwise be a *test day because of paragraph (2)(a) is:

a Saturday; or

a Sunday; or

a day that is a public holiday or a bank holiday in the place where the records of ownership of shares or other interests in the entity are kept;

the next day that is not covered by a paragraph of this subsection is a test day instead of the fifth anniversary.

Determining the end of a day

For the purposes of this section, the end of a day is determined according to legal time in the place where the records of ownership of shares or other interests in the entity are kept.

Special rules about abnormal trading

Subsections (6) and (7) change how Subdivision 960-H applies for the purposes of determining under this section whether there is abnormal trading in *shares in a company or in units in a unit trust.

(6) An issue, redemption or transfer, or any other dealing, is a trading if, and only if, it changes the respective proportions in which *ultimate owners have *underlying interests in *CGT assets of the company or trust.

Section 960-235 (about suspected transactions involving 5% or more of *shares in the company or units in the trust) is disregarded.

149-60 What the evidence must show

To avoid the consequences in section 149-70, the following condition must be complied with.

(1) On the basis solely of the evidence given to the Commissioner under subsection 149-55(1), the Commissioner must be satisfied that, or think it reasonable to assume that, at the end of the *test day, *majority underlying interests in the asset were had by *ultimate owners who also had *majority underlying interests in the asset at the end of the starting day. The starting day is:

a day the entity chooses under subsection (2); or

if no day is so chosen—19 September 1985.

The day chosen:

must be no earlier than 1 July 1985 and no later than 30 June 1986; and

must be one the choice of which will allow evidence to be given that enables a reasonable approximation of the *ultimate owners who had *underlying interests in the assets of the entity at the end of 19 September 1985.

How unidentified owners are treated

(3) So far as the evidence does not show who had *underlying interests in the asset at the end of the *starting day, the evidence must be treated on the assumption that those interests were then had by *ultimate owners who did not have *underlying interests in the asset at the end of the *test day.

New owner standing in the shoes of former owner

(4) Subsection (5) affects how the evidence must be treated if an *ultimate owner (the new owner) has acquired a percentage (the acquired percentage) of the *underlying interests in the asset because of an event described in column 2 of an item in the table. The former owner is the entity described in column 3 of that item.

(5) The evidence must be treated on the assumption that the new owner had (in addition to any other *underlying interests), at any time when the former owner had a percentage (the former owner’s percentage) of the *underlying interests in the asset, a percentage of the underlying interests in the asset equal to the acquired percentage, or the former owner’s percentage at that time, whichever is the less.

Determining the end of a day

For the purposes of this section, the end of a day is determined according to legal time in the place where the records of ownership of shares or other interests in the entity are kept.

149-70 Effects if asset no longer has same majority underlying ownership

The asset stops being a pre-CGT asset if the condition in subsection 149-60(1) is not satisfied.

Also, Part 3-1 and this Part (except this Division) apply to the asset as if the entity had acquired it at the end of the test day (as determined under subsection 149-55(4)).

149-75 Cost base elements of asset that stops being a pre-CGT asset

This section affects the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset if it stops being a pre-CGT asset.

The first element of each is the asset’s *market value at the time referred to in subsection 149-70(2).

149-80 No more evidence needed after asset stops being a pre-CGT asset

After the asset stops being a pre-CGT asset, the entity need not give the Commissioner any more evidence about it under section 149-55.

Subdivision 149-F — How to treat a “demutualised” public entity

Table of sections

149-162 Subdivision applies only if entity gives sufficient evidence

149-165 Members treated as having underlying interests in assets until demutualisation

149-170 Effect of demutualisation of interposed company

149-162 Subdivision applies only if entity gives sufficient evidence

This Subdivision applies only if, on the basis solely of evidence the entity gives the Commissioner, the Commissioner is satisfied, or thinks it reasonable to assume, that this Subdivision applies to the entity.

The evidence must be given in a form that makes it readily apparent whether this Subdivision applies.

149-165 Members treated as having underlying interests in assets until demutualisation

This section modifies the treatment of evidence that an entity gives the Commissioner under section 149-55 as to the *ultimate owners who had *underlying interests in the asset at a particular time if the entity:

was:

a mutual insurance company; or

a mutual affiliate company;

at the end of the starting day (as determined under subsection 149-60(6)); and

has since stopped being a company of either of those kinds, but either:

has continued in existence as a company covered by paragraph 149-50(1)(a) or (e) or a publicly traded unit trust; or

has undergone a demutualisation in relation to which Division 316 (Demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurers) applied and has continued in existence as a company; and

(c) when it stopped being an entity of either of those kinds (the stopping time), had more than 50 members.

The entity may require the Commissioner to treat the evidence on the assumption that an ultimate owner who:

immediately before the stopping time was a member of the entity; and

immediately after the stopping time had an *underlying interest in the asset;

had the interest at all times from and including the end of the starting day until immediately after the stopping time.

149-170 Effect of demutualisation of interposed company

(1) This section modifies the treatment of evidence that an entity (the head entity) gives the Commissioner under section 149-55 as to the *ultimate owners who had *underlying interests in the asset at a particular time if another entity (the interposed company):

was:

a mutual insurance company; or

a mutual affiliate company;

at the end of the starting day (as determined under subsection 149-60(6)) for the head entity; and

has since stopped being a company of either of those kinds, but either:

has continued in existence as a company covered by paragraph 149-50(1)(a) or (e) or a publicly traded unit trust; or

has undergone a demutualisation in relation to which Division 316 (Demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurers) applied and has continued in existence as a company; and

(c) when it stopped being an entity of either of those kinds (the stopping time), had more than 50 members.

The head entity may require the Commissioner to treat the evidence on the assumption that an ultimate owner who:

immediately before the stopping time was a member of the interposed company; and

immediately after the stopping time had, through the interposed company, an *underlying interest in the asset;

had the interest at all times from and including the end of the starting day until immediately after the stopping time.

Division 152 — Small business relief

Guide to Division 152

152-1 What this Division is about

To help small business, if the basic conditions for relief are satisfied, capital gains can be reduced by the various concessions in this Division. Those basic conditions are in Subdivision 152-A. Some of the concessions have additional, specific conditions that must also be satisfied.

The 4 available small business concessions are:

the 15-year exemption (in Subdivision 152-B);

the 50% reduction (in Subdivision 152-C);

the retirement concession (in Subdivision 152-D);

the roll-over (in Subdivision 152-E).

A capital gain that qualifies for the 15-year exemption is disregarded entirely and is not taken into account under the method statement in subsection 102-5(1). By contrast, the other concessions are only activated by step 6 of that method statement. This means that you must apply all available capital losses against your capital gains and quarantined amounts to first reduce your capital gains (under steps 1 to 4) before you can use those 3 concessions to further reduce them.

Table of Subdivisions

152-A Basic conditions for relief under this Division

152-B Small business 15-year exemption

152-C Small business 50% reduction

152-D Small business retirement exemption

152-E Small business roll-over

Subdivision 152-A — Basic conditions for relief under this Division

Guide to Subdivision 152-A

152-5 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out some basic conditions for relief. If the basic conditions are satisfied, an entity may be able to reduce its capital gains using the small business concessions in this Division.

The 2 major basic conditions are:

the entity must be a CGT small business entity or a partner in a partnership that is a CGT small business entity, or the net value of assets that the entity and related entities own must not exceed $6,000,000; and

the CGT asset must be an active asset.

Additional basic conditions must be satisfied in the following circumstances:

the CGT asset is a share in a company or an interest in a trust;

the CGT event involves certain rights or interests in relation to the income or capital of a partnership.

Some of the concessions have additional, specific conditions that also must be satisfied. For example, the 15-year exemption applies only if you have held the CGT asset for at least 15 years and you retire.

There are limitations on the availability of the small business concessions for CGT events J2, J5 and J6.

You do not need to satisfy the basic conditions for the retirement exemption in relation to CGT events J5 and J6.

Table of sections

Basic conditions for relief

152-10 Basic conditions for relief

152-12 Special conditions for CGT event D1

Maximum net asset value test

152-15 Maximum net asset value test

152-20 Meaning of net value of the CGT assets

Active asset test

152-35 Active asset test

152-40 Meaning of active asset

152-45 Continuing time periods for involuntary disposals

Treatment of passively held CGT assets

152-47 Spouses or children taken to be affiliates for certain passively held CGT assets

152-48 Working out an entity’s aggregated turnover for passively held CGT assets

152-49 Businesses that are winding up

Significant individual test

152-50 Significant individual test

152-55 Meaning of significant individual

CGT concession stakeholder

152-60 Meaning of CGT concession stakeholder

Small business participation percentage

152-65 Small business participation percentage

152-70 Direct small business participation percentage

152-75 Indirect small business participation percentage

Nomination of controllers of discretionary trust

152-78 Trustee of discretionary trust may nominate beneficiaries to be controllers of trust

CGT event happens to asset or interest within 2 years of an individual’s death

152-80 CGT event happens to an asset or interest within 2 years of individual’s death

Basic conditions for relief

152-10 Basic conditions for relief

A *capital gain (except a capital gain from CGT event K7) you make may be reduced or disregarded under this Division if the following basic conditions are satisfied for the gain:

a CGT event happens in relation to a CGT asset of yours in an income year;

Note: This condition does not apply in the case of CGT event D1: see section 152-12.

the event would (apart from this Division) have resulted in the gain;

at least one of the following applies:

you are a CGT small business entity for the income year;

you satisfy the maximum net asset value test (see section 152-15);

you are a partner in a partnership that is a CGT small business entity for the income year and the CGT asset is an interest in an asset of the partnership;

the conditions mentioned in subsection (1A) or (1B) are satisfied in relation to the CGT asset in the income year;

the CGT asset satisfies the active asset test (see section 152-35).

Note: This condition does not apply in the case of CGT event D1: see section 152-12.

CGT small business entity

(1AA) You are a CGT small business entity for an income year if:

you are a small business entity for the income year; and

you would be a small business entity for the income year if each reference in section 328-110 to $10 million were a reference to $2 million.

Note 1: For the purposes of subsection (1A) or (1B), in determining whether an entity would be a small business entity, see also sections 152-48 and 152-78.

Note 2: Disregard the $2 million threshold in paragraph (b) for working out the availability of the small business 50% reduction mentioned in Subdivision 152-C (see subsection 152-205(2)).

Passively held assets—affiliates and entities connected with you

The conditions in this subsection are satisfied in relation to the CGT asset in the income year if:

your affiliate, or an entity that is *connected with you, is a CGT small business entity for the income year; and

you do not carry on a business in the income year (other than in partnership); and

if you carry on a business in partnership—the CGT asset is not an interest in an asset of the partnership; and

in any case—the CGT small business entity referred to in paragraph (a) is the entity that, at a time in the income year, carries on the business (as referred to in subparagraph 152-40(1)(a)(ii) or (iii) or paragraph 152-40(1)(b)) in relation to the CGT asset.

Note 1: The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78.

Note 3: For businesses that are winding up, see section 152-49 and subsection 328-110(5).

Passively held assets—partnerships

The conditions in this subsection are satisfied in relation to the CGT asset in the income year if:

you are a partner in a partnership in the income year; and

the partnership is a CGT small business entity for the income year; and

you do not carry on a business in the income year (other than in partnership); and

the CGT asset is not an interest in an asset of the partnership; and

(e) the business you carry on as a partner in the partnership referred to in paragraph (a) is the business that you, at a time in the income year, carry on (as referred to in subparagraph 152-40(1)(a)(i) or paragraph 152-40(1)(b)) in relation to the CGT asset.

Note: For businesses that are winding up, see section 152-49 and subsection 328-110(5).

Additional basic conditions for shares in a company or interests in a trust

(2) The following additional basic conditions must be satisfied if the *CGT asset is a *share in a company, or an interest in a trust, (the object entity):

the CGT asset would still satisfy the active asset test (see section 152-35) if the assumptions in subsection (2A) were made;

if you do not satisfy the maximum net asset value test (see section 152-15)—you are carrying on a business just before the CGT event;

either:

the object entity would be a CGT small business entity for the income year; or

the object entity would satisfy the maximum net asset value test (see section 152-15);

if the following assumptions were made:

the only CGT assets or *annual turnovers considered were those of the object entity, each affiliate of the object entity, and each entity controlled by the object entity in a way described in section 328-125;

each reference in section 328-125 to 40% were a reference to 20%;

no determination under subsection 328-125(6) were in force;

just before the CGT event, either:

you are a CGT concession stakeholder in the object entity; or

CGT concession stakeholders in the object entity together have a small business participation percentage in you of at least 90%.

(2A) For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), in working out whether subsection 152-40(3) applies at a given time (the test time) assume that:

an asset of a company or trust is covered by neither:

subparagraph 152-40(3)(b)(ii) (about financial instruments); nor

subparagraph 152-40(3)(b)(iii) (about cash);

if the company or trust acquired that asset for a purpose that included assisting an entity to otherwise satisfy paragraph (2)(a) of this section; and

paragraph 152-40(3)(b) does not cover an asset that:

(i) is a share in a company, or an interest in a trust, (the later entity); and

is held at the test time by the object entity directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities); and

subparagraph 152-40(3)(b)(i) also covers each asset that:

is held at the test time by a later entity covered by subsection (2B); and

is, for that later entity, an asset of a kind referred to in subparagraph 152-40(3)(b)(i), (ii) or (iii), as modified by paragraphs (a) and (b) of this subsection; and

subject to paragraph (b) of this subsection, all of the assets of the object entity at the test time included all of the assets of each later entity at the test time; and

for the purposes of paragraph 152-40(3)(b), the *market value at the test time of an asset held by a later entity were the product of:

the asset’s market value, apart from this paragraph, at the test time; and

the object entity’s small business participation percentage in the later entity at the test time.

For the purposes of paragraph (2A)(c), this subsection covers a later entity if:

at the test time:

your small business participation percentage in the later entity is at least 20%; or

you are a CGT concession stakeholder of the later entity; and

either:

the later entity would be a CGT small business entity for the income year that includes the test time; or

the later entity would satisfy the maximum net asset value test (see section 152-15) for a notional CGT event taken to have happened at the test time;

if the following assumptions were made:

the only *CGT assets or *annual turnovers considered were those of the later entity and of the entities referred to in subparagraph (2)(c)(iii);

each reference in section 328-125 to 40% were a reference to 20%;

no determination under subsection 328-125(6) were in force.

Additional basic condition for CGT events involving certain rights or interests in relation to the income or capital of a partnership

(2C) If the *CGT event involves the creation, transfer, variation or cessation of a right or interest that would entitle an entity to:

an amount of the income or capital of a partnership; or

an amount calculated by reference to a partner’s entitlement to an amount of income or capital of a partnership;

it is an additional basic condition that the right or interest is a *membership interest of the entity in the partnership:

immediately after the CGT event happens; or

if the CGT event involved the cessation of the right or interest—immediately before the CGT event happens.

Extra conditions for some concessions

In addition to the basic conditions in this section, some of the concessions in this Division have extra conditions that must be satisfied for the concession to be available. These extra conditions are set out in the relevant Subdivisions.

Special rules for certain CGT events

Subdivisions 152-B and 152-C do not apply to *CGT events J2, J5 and J6. In addition, Subdivision 152-E does not apply to CGT events J5 and J6.

Note 1: Those CGT events are about previous applications of the roll-over in Subdivision 152-E.

Note 2: This Subdivision does not apply to CGT events J5 and J6 in relation to the retirement exemption (see subsection 152-305(4)).

152-12 Special conditions for CGT event D1

Paragraphs 152-10(1)(a) and (d) do not apply in the case of CGT event D1.

Instead, it is a basic condition that the right you create that triggers the CGT event must be inherently connected with a CGT asset of yours that satisfies the active asset test (see section 152-35).

Maximum net asset value test

152-15 Maximum net asset value test

You satisfy the maximum net asset value test if, just before the CGT event, the sum of the following amounts does not exceed $6,000,000:

the *net value of the CGT assets of yours;

the net value of the CGT assets of any entities *connected with you;

the net value of the CGT assets of any *affiliates of yours or entities connected with your affiliates (not counting any assets already counted under paragraph (b)).

Note 1: Some assets are not included in the definition of net value of the CGT assets: see subsections 152-20(2), (3) and (4).

Note 2: The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78.

152-20 Meaning of net value of the CGT assets

Meaning of net value of the CGT assets

(1) The net value of the CGT assets of an entity is the amount (whether positive, negative or nil) obtained by subtracting from the sum of the *market values of those assets the sum of:

the liabilities of the entity that are related to the assets; and

the following provisions made by the entity:

provisions for annual leave;

provisions for long service leave;

provisions for unearned income;

provisions for tax liabilities.

Assets to be disregarded

(2) In working out the net value of the CGT assets of an entity:

(a) disregard *shares, units or other interests (except debt) in another entity that is *connected with the first-mentioned entity or with an *affiliate of the first-mentioned entity, but include any liabilities related to any such shares, units or interests; and

if the entity is an individual, disregard:

assets being used solely for the personal use and enjoyment of the individual, or the individual’s affiliate (except a dwelling, or an *ownership interest in a dwelling, that is the individual’s main residence, including any adjacent land to which the main residence exemption can extend because of section 118-120); and

except for an amount included under subsection (2A), the *market value of a dwelling, or an ownership interest in a dwelling, that is the individual’s main residence (including any relevant adjacent land); and

a right to, or to any part of, any allowance, annuity or capital amount payable out of a superannuation fund or an approved deposit fund; and

a right to, or to any part of, an asset of a superannuation fund or of an approved deposit fund; and

a policy of insurance on the life of an individual.

Note: The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78.

Individual’s dwelling

(2A) In working out the net value of the CGT assets of an individual, if:

adwelling of the individual, an *ownership interest in such a dwelling or any relevant adjacent land, was used, during all or part of the *ownership period of the dwelling, by the individual to produce assessable income to a particular extent; and

the individual satisfied paragraph 118-190(1)(c) (about interest deductibility) at least to some extent;

include such amount as is reasonable having regard to the extent to which that paragraph was satisfied.

Net value of the CGT assets of others

Note: The net value of the CGT assets of the individual will be reduced by the same proportion of the individual’s liabilities related to the dwelling, ownership interest or adjacent land.

(3) In working out the net value of the CGT assets of:

your affiliate; or

an entity that is *connected with your affiliate;

include only those assets that are used, or held ready for use, in the carrying on of a business by you or another entity *connected with you (whether the business is carried on alone or jointly with others).

Note: The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78.

However, disregard assets under subsection (3) that are used, or held ready for use, in the carrying on of a business by an entity that is *connected with you only because of your affiliate.

Example: You and your husband sell a florist’s business that you jointly carry on. Your husband also wholly owns a company that carries on a newsagency business. You yourself have no other involvement with the newsagency business.

Under subsection (4), you disregard the newsagency company’s assets in working out whether you satisfy the maximum net asset value test because, although the company is “connected” with you, it is so connected only because of your affiliate (your husband).

Effect of look-through earnout rights

Note: The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78.

(5) Despite subsections (1) to (4), in working out the net value of the CGT assets of an entity at the time just before the *CGT event (the valuing time), you can make a choice under subsection (6) if:

at the valuing time, one or more of the entity’s *CGT assets were assets for which the entity later provided, or was later provided with, one or more *financial benefits under one or more *look-through earnout rights that were in existence at the valuing time; or

at the valuing time, one or more of the entity’s CGT assets were look-through earnout rights relating to CGT assets of:

one or more of the other entities referred to in section 152-15; or

one or more entities not referred to in that section; or

you are the entity, and:

the CGT event referred to in section 152-15 happened because you *disposed of a CGT asset; and

your capital proceeds from the disposal were affected by one or more financial benefits provided to, or by, you under one or more look-through earnout rights;

and no further financial benefits can be provided under any of those look-through earnout rights.

Note: For paragraph (c), capital proceeds can be affected by financial benefits provided under a look-through earnout right (see section 116-120).

You can choose to treat the *market value of each of the *CGT assets first mentioned in the applicable paragraph of subsection (5) as if it were, at the valuing time, equal to:

if paragraph (5)(a) applies—the first element of the CGT asset’s *cost base at the valuing time; or

if subparagraph (5)(b)(i) applies—nil; or

if subparagraph (5)(b)(ii) applies—the total of the financial benefits provided under the look-through earnout right after the valuing time; or

if paragraph (5)(c) applies—those capital proceeds.

Note: For paragraph (a), the first element of a CGT asset’s cost base can be affected by financial benefits provided under a look-through earnout right (see section 112-36).

(7) In working out the net value of the CGT assets of an entity at the valuing time, if:

you make a choice under subsection (6) about a CGT asset of the entity that is a CGT asset covered by paragraph (5)(a) or (c); and

a look-through earnout right covered by that paragraph is also a CGT asset of the entity;

treat the *market value of that right as if it were nil at the valuing time.

Active asset test

152-35 Active asset test

A CGT asset satisfies the active asset test if:

you have owned the asset for 15 years or less and the asset was an active asset of yours for a total of at least half of the period specified in subsection (2); or

you have owned the asset for more than 15 years and the asset was an active asset of yours for a total of at least 71/2 years during the period specified in subsection (2).

The period:

begins when you *acquired the asset; and

ends at the earlier of:

the CGT event; and

if the relevant business ceased to be carried on in the 12 months before that time or any longer period that the Commissioner allows—the cessation of the business.

152-40 Meaning of active asset

(1) A *CGT asset is an active asset at a time if, at that time:

you own the asset (whether the asset is tangible or intangible) and it is used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on a business that is carried on (whether alone or in partnership) by:

you; or

your affiliate; or

another entity that is *connected with you; or

if the asset is an intangible asset—you own it and it is inherently connected with a business that is carried on (whether alone or in partnership) by you, your affiliate, or another entity that is connected with you.

Note 1: An intangible asset need satisfy only paragraph (a) or paragraph (b).

Note 2: The meaning of connected with in subparagraph (1)(a)(iii) and paragraph (b) is affected by section 152-78.

Note 3: An example of an asset that is inherently connected with a business is goodwill or the benefit of a restrictive covenant.

Note 4: For businesses that are winding up, see section 152-49 and subsection 328-110(5).

Subsection 392-20(1) is disregarded in determining, for the purposes of subsection (1) of this section, whether an entity is carrying on a business.

Note: An entity would be taken to be carrying on a primary production business under subsection 392-20(1) if the business is carried on by a trust and the entity is presently entitled to trust income.

(3) A *CGT asset is also an active asset at a given time if, at that time, you own it and:

it is either a *share in a company that is an Australian resident at that time or an interest in a trust that is a *resident trust for CGT purposes for the income year in which that time occurs; and

the total of:

the *market values of the active assets of the company or trust; and

the market value of any financial instruments of the company or trust that are inherently connected with a business that the company or trust carries on; and

any cash of the company or trust that is inherently connected with such a business;

is 80% or more of the market value of all of the assets of the company or trust.

(3A) A *share in a company, or an interest in a trust, mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) is an active asset at a time (the later time) if:

the share or interest was an active asset at an earlier time; and

it is reasonable to conclude that the share or interest is still an active asset at the later time.

Note: This ensures that the 80% test does not need to be applied on a day to day basis.

(3B) A *share in a company, or an interest in a trust, mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) is an active asset at a time if:

the share or interest fails to meet the requirements under subsection (3) at that time; and

the failure is of a temporary nature only.

Note: If a share in a company or an interest in a trust is chosen as a replacement asset, this ensures that a temporary failure of the 80% test does not automatically lead to CGT event J2 happening.

Exceptions

(4) However, the following *CGT assets cannot be active assets:

(a) interests in an entity that is *connected with you, other than *shares and interests covered by subsection (3);

shares in a company, other than:

shares in a *widely held company that are covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (3B) and held by a CGT concession stakeholder of the company; and

shares in any other company that are covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (3B);

interests in a trust, other than:

interests in a trust to which subsection (5) applies that are covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (3B) and held by a CGT concession stakeholder of the trust; and

interests in any other trust that are covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (3B);

financial instruments (such as loans, debentures, bonds, promissory notes, futures contracts, forward contracts, currency swap contracts and a right or option in respect of a share, security, loan or contract);

an asset whose main use by you is to *derive interest, an annuity, rent, royalties or foreign exchange gains unless:

the asset is an intangible asset and has been substantially developed, altered or improved by you so that its *market value has been substantially enhanced; or

its main use for deriving rent was only temporary.

Example: A company uses a house purely as an investment property and rents it out. The house is not an active asset because the company is not using the house in the course of carrying on a business. If, on the other hand, the company ran the house as a guest house the house would be an active asset because the company would be using it to carry on a business and not to derive rent.

Note: The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78.

For the purposes of paragraph (4)(e), in determining the main use of an asset:

disregard any personal use or enjoyment of the asset by you; and

treat any use by your affiliate, or an entity that is *connected with you, as your use.

Note: The meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78.

This subsection applies to a trust if:

interests in the trust are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; or

the trust has more than 50 *members, unless the trust is a discretionary trust or a trust where at least one of the following conditions is met during an income year:

no more than 20 persons held, or had the right to acquire or become the holders of, *membership interests representing at least 75% of the value of the membership interests in the trust;

if there are *trust voting interests in the trust—at least 75% of the trust voting interests in the trust was capable of being controlled by no more than 20 persons;

at least 75% of the amount of any distribution made by the trustee during the year was made to no more than 20 persons;

if no distribution was made by the trustee during the year—the Commissioner is of the opinion that, if a distribution had been made during the year, at least 75% of the distribution would have been made to no more than 20 persons.

152-45 Continuing time periods for involuntary disposals

Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed

(1) If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset) you acquired to satisfy the requirement in subsection 124-70(2) or 124-75(2) for a roll-over under Subdivision 124-B, then the active asset test in section 152-35 applies as if:

you had acquired the new asset when you acquired the old asset; and

the new asset had been your active asset at all times when the original asset was your active asset; and

the new asset had not been your active asset at all times when the original asset was not your active asset.

Note 1: Subdivision 124-B allows you to choose a roll-over if your CGT asset is compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed.

Note 2: If this subsection applies to a CGT asset, then section 152-115 (which is about continuing time periods) will apply for the 15-year exemption.

Assets replaced during FSR transition (same owner roll-overs)

(1A) If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset) you acquired in a situation covered by former section 124-880, 124-885 or 124-890, then the active asset test in section 152-35 applies as if:

you had acquired the new asset when you acquired the original asset; and

the new asset had been your active asset at all times when the original asset was your active asset; and

the new asset had not been your active asset at all times when the original asset was not your active asset.

Note 1: Former Subdivision 124-O provided a roll-over for certain CGT assets that came to an end as a result of an FSR transition.

Note 2: If this subsection applies to a CGT asset, then section 152-115 (which is about continuing time periods) will apply for the 15-year exemption.

Assets replaced during FSR transition (new owner roll-overs)

(1B) If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset) acquired in a situation covered by former section 124-900, 124-905 or 124-910, then the active asset test in section 152-35 applies as if:

the new owner had acquired the new asset when the original owner acquired the original asset; and

the new asset had been the active asset of the new owner at all times when the original asset was the original owner’s active asset; and

the new asset had not been the active asset of the new owner at all times when the original asset was not the original owner’s active asset.

Note 1: Former Subdivision 124-O provided a roll-over for certain CGT assets that came to an end as a result of an FSR transition.

Note 2: If this subsection applies to a CGT asset, then section 152-115 (which is about continuing time periods) will apply for the 15-year exemption.

Marriage or relationship breakdowns

If you were the transferee of a CGT asset for which there has been a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A, then you may choose that the active asset test in section 152-35 applies as if:

you had acquired the asset when the transferor acquired the asset; and

the asset had been an active asset of yours at all times when the asset was an active asset of the transferor; and

the asset had not been an active asset of yours at all times when the asset was not an active asset of the transferor.

Note 1: Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.

Note 2: There is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A if CGT assets are transferred because of a marriage or relationship breakdown.

Note 3: If you don’t make the choice, the time of acquisition is simply the time of the transfer.

Note 4: Making the choice here has certain consequences for the 15-year exemption: see section 152-115.

Treatment of passively held CGT assets

152-47 Spouses or children taken to be affiliates for certain passively held CGT assets

This section applies if:

(a) one entity (the asset owner) owns a *CGT asset (whether the asset is tangible or intangible); and

either:

(i) the asset is used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on a *business in an income year by another entity (the business entity); or

(ii) the asset is inherently connected with a business that is carried on in an income year by another entity (the business entity); and

the business entity is not (apart from this section) an affiliate of, or *connected with, the asset owner.

Note: The meaning of connected with an entity is affected by section 152-78.

(2) For the purposes of this Subdivision, in determining whether the business entity is an *affiliate of, or is *connected with, the asset owner, take the following to be affiliates of an individual:

a *spouse of the individual;

a *child of the individual, being a child who is under 18 years.

If an entity is an affiliate of, or *connected with, another entity as a result of subsection (2), then the *spouse or *child mentioned in that subsection is, in addition, taken to be an affiliate of the individual for the purposes of this Subdivision, and for the purposes of sections 328-110 to 328-125 to the extent that they relate to this Subdivision.

Example: The spouse or child mentioned in subsection (2) is taken to be an affiliate of the individual for the purposes of working out which entities are affiliates of or connected with entities under section 152-48.

To avoid doubt, subsection (2) applies:

for the purposes of reducing or disregarding, under this Division, any *capital gain from any CGT asset; but

only while:

a *spouse remains a spouse; or

a *child remains a child who is under 18 years.

152-48 Working out an entity’s aggregated turnover for passively held CGT assets

(1) This section applies for the purposes of section 328-115 to determine whether an entity (the test entity) is a *CGT small business entity for the purposes of subsection 152-10(1A) or (1B).

(2) An entity (the deemed entity) is taken to be an *affiliate of, or *connected with, the test entity (as the case requires) if:

the deemed entity is an affiliate of, or connected with, the entity that owns the CGT asset referred to in subsection 152-10(1A) or (1B); and

the deemed entity is not (apart from this section) an affiliate of, or connected with, the test entity.

Note: Paragraphs (a) and (b)—the meaning of connected with is affected by section 152-78.

If:

the entity that owns the CGT asset referred to in subsection 152-10(1B) is a partner in 2 or more partnerships; and

the asset is:

used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on a business that is carried on by at least 2 of those partnerships; or

inherently connected with businesses that are carried on by at least 2 of those partnerships;

then, each partnership referred to in paragraph (b) that is not (apart from this section) *connected with the test entity is taken to be connected with the test entity.

152-49 Businesses that are winding up

(1) This section applies to an entity in an income year (the CGT event year) if:

a business that the entity previously carried on (including in partnership) is being wound up in that year; and

either:

the asset was used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on the business at a time in the income year in which the business stopped being carried on; or

if the asset is an intangible asset—the asset was inherently connected with the business that was carried on at a time in the income year in which the business stopped being carried on.

For the purposes of paragraphs 152-40(1)(a) and (b) as they apply for the purposes of paragraphs 152-10(1A)(d) and (1B)(e):

the entity is taken to carry on the business at a time in the CGT event year; and

either:

the CGT asset is taken to be used, or held ready for use, in the course of carrying on the business at that time; or

if the asset is an intangible asset—the CGT asset is taken to be inherently connected with the business at that time.

Note: The entity might also be taken to be a small business entity in the CGT event year (see subsection 328-110(5)).

Significant individual test

152-50 Significant individual test

An entity satisfies the significant individual test if the entity had at least one *significant individual just before the *CGT event.

152-55 Meaning of significant individual

An individual is a significant individual in a company or a trust at a time if, at that time, the individual has a *small business participation percentage in the company or trust of at least 20%.

CGT concession stakeholder

152-60 Meaning of CGT concession stakeholder

An individual is a CGT concession stakeholder of a company or trust at a time if the individual is:

a significant individual in the company or trust; or

a spouse of a significant individual in the company or trust, if the spouse has a small business participation percentage in the company or trust at that time that is greater than zero.

Small business participation percentage

152-65 Small business participation percentage

An entity’s small business participation percentage in another entity at a time is the percentage that is the sum of:

the entity’s direct small business participation percentage in the other entity at that time; and

the entity’s indirect small business participation percentage in the other entity at that time.

152-70 Direct small business participation percentage

(1) An entity holds a direct small business participation percentage at the relevant time in an entity equal to the percentage worked out using this table:

Companies

For item 1 of the table, ignore *redeemable shares.

Paragraph (a) of item 1 of the table does not apply if the entity holds the legal and equitable interests in the *shares jointly with another entity.

Discretionary trusts

(4) Subsections (5) and (6) apply for the purpose of working out the *direct small business participation percentage in an entity in connection with a *CGT event that happened in an income year (the CGT event year), if:

the entity is a trust (where entities do not have entitlements to all the income and capital of the trust); and

during the relevant year mentioned in item 3 of the table in subsection (1) (disregarding subsection (5)), the trustee mentioned in that item:

does not make a distribution of income; and

does not make a distribution of capital.

Treat the references in that item to the relevant year as being references to:

if the trustee made a distribution of income or capital during the CGT event year—the CGT event year; or

otherwise—the last income year before the CGT event year in which the trustee did make a distribution of income or capital.

(6) Despite subsection (5), an entity holds a direct small business participation percentage of 0% in the trust at the relevant time if either:

the trust:

had a *net income for the relevant year; and

did not have a *tax loss for the relevant year; or

the trustee did not make a distribution of income or capital at any time before the end of the CGT event year.

152-75 Indirect small business participation percentage

(1) Work out the indirect small business participation percentage that an entity (the holding entity) holds at a particular time in another entity (the test entity) by multiplying:

(a) the holding entity’s *direct small business participation percentage (if any) in another entity (the intermediate entity) at that time; by

the sum of:

the intermediate entity’s direct small business participation percentage (if any) in the test entity at that time; and

the intermediate entity’s indirect small business participation percentage (if any) in the test entity at that time (as worked out under one or more other applications of this section).

Note: When testing an intermediate entity’s indirect small business participation percentage in another entity, the intermediate entity becomes the holding entity.

(2) If there is more than one intermediate entity to which paragraph (1)(a) applies at that time, the holding entity’s indirect small business participation percentage is the sum of the percentages worked out under subsection (1) in relation to each of those intermediate entities.

Example: The individual mentioned in the diagram has an indirect small business participation percentage in the unit trust.

Multiplying the percentages as mentioned in subsection (1) produces small business participation percentage of 43.2%.

If the individual had a direct small business participation percentage of 10% in the unit trust, that would be added to the individual’s indirect small business participation percentage to produce a small business participation percentage in the trust of 53.2%.

Nomination of controllers of discretionary trust

152-78 Trustee of discretionary trust may nominate beneficiaries to be controllers of trust

This section applies for the purposes of determining whether an entity is *connected with you, for the purposes of:

this Subdivision; and

sections 328-110, 328-115 and 328-125 so far as they relate to this Subdivision.

(2) The trustee of a discretionary trust may nominate not more than 4 beneficiaries as being controllers of the trust for an income year (the relevant income year) for which the trustee did not make a distribution of income or capital if the trust had a *tax loss, or no *net income, for that year.

A nomination under subsection (2) has effect as if each nominated beneficiary controlled the trust for the relevant income year in a way described in section 328-125.

Note: This means each nominated beneficiary is connected with the trust.

A nomination under subsection (2) must:

be in writing; and

be signed by the trustee and by each nominated beneficiary.

CGT event happens to asset or interest within 2 years of an individual’s death

152-80 CGT event happens to an asset or interest within 2 years of individual’s death

This section applies if:

a CGT asset:

forms part of the estate of a deceased individual; or

was owned by joint tenants and one of them dies; and

any of the following applies:

the asset devolves to the individual’s *legal personal representative;

the asset *passes to a beneficiary of the individual;

an interest in the asset is *acquired by the surviving joint tenant or tenants (as the case may be) as mentioned in section 128-50;

the asset devolves to a trustee of a trust established by the will of the individual; and

the deceased individual referred to in subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii) would have been entitled to reduce or disregard a *capital gain under this Division if a CGT event had happened in relation to the CGT asset immediately before his or her death; and

a CGT event happens in relation to the CGT asset within 2 years of the individual’s death.

A person mentioned in subsection (2A) is entitled to reduce or disregard a *capital gain under this Division in the same way as the deceased individual would have been entitled to as if:

paragraph 152-105(d) only required the deceased individual to have been 55 or over, or permanently incapacitated, at the time of the CGT event referred to in paragraph (1)(c) of this section; and

paragraph 152-305(1)(b) did not apply.

The following persons (as the case requires) are entitled to reduce or disregard a *capital gain under this Division in accordance with subsection (2):

the *legal personal representative of the individual;

the beneficiary of the individual;

the surviving joint tenant or tenants;

the trustee or a beneficiary of the trust.

The Commissioner may extend the time limit in paragraph (1)(d).

Subdivision 152-B — Small business 15-year exemption

Guide to Subdivision 152-B

152-100 What this Subdivision is about

A CGT small business entity can disregard a capital gain arising from a CGT asset that it has owned for at least 15 years if certain conditions are met. Capital losses are not affected.

Also, any amount of income a company or trust derives from a CGT event covered by this Subdivision is neither assessable income nor exempt income. If the company or trust makes payments to its CGT concession stakeholders that are attributable to the exempt amount, the payments will not be taken into account in determining the taxable income of the company, trust or recipient.

The main conditions are that:

• the basic conditions for relief in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied;

• the entity continuously owned the asset for the 15-year period leading up to the CGT event;

• if the entity is an individual, the individual retires or is permanently incapacitated;

• if the entity is a company or trust, the entity had a significant individual for a total of at least 15 years during which the entity owned the asset and the individual who was the significant individual just before the CGT event retires or is permanently incapacitated.

The Subdivision also allows time periods to continue to run if there has been a roll-over because of marriage or relationship breakdown or compulsory acquisition.

Table of sections

152-105 15-year exemption for individuals

152-110 15-year exemption for companies and trusts

152-115 Continuing time periods for involuntary disposals

152-125 Payments to company’s or trust’s CGT concession stakeholders are exempt

152-105 15-year exemption for individuals

If you are an individual, you can disregard any *capital gain arising from a CGT event if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain;

you continuously owned the CGT asset for the 15-year period ending just before the CGT event;

Note: Section 152-115 allows for continuation of the period if there is an involuntary disposal of the asset.

if the CGT asset is a *share in a company or an interest in a trust—the company or trust had a significant individual for a total of at least 15 years (even if the 15 years was not continuous and it was not always the same significant individual) during which you owned the CGT asset;

either:

you are 55 or over at the time of the CGT event and the event happens in connection with your retirement; or

you are permanently incapacitated at the time of the CGT event.

152-110 15-year exemption for companies and trusts

An entity that is a company or trust can disregard any *capital gain arising from a CGT event if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain;

the entity continuously owned the CGT asset for the 15-year period ending just before the CGT event;

Note: Section 152-115 allows for continuation of the period if there is an involuntary disposal of the asset.

the entity had a significant individual for a total of at least 15 years (even if the 15 years was not continuous and it was not always the same significant individual) during which the entity owned the CGT asset;

an individual who was a significant individual of the company or trust just before the CGT event either:

was 55 or over at that time and the event happened in connection with the individual’s retirement; or

was permanently incapacitated at that time.

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(b) and (c), disregard subsection 149-30(1A) (which applies if an asset stops being a pre-CGT asset).

Any ordinary income or statutory income the company or trust *derives from a CGT event that would be covered by subsection (1) (assuming the event gave rise to a *capital gain, even if it didn’t) is neither assessable income nor exempt income.

Exception

However, subsection (2) does not apply to income *derived by a company or trust as a result of a balancing adjustment event occurring to a depreciating asset:

whose decline in value is worked out under Division 40; or

deductions for which are calculated under Division 328.

152-115 Continuing time periods for involuntary disposals

Asset compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed

(1) If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset) you acquired to satisfy the requirement in subsection 124-70(2) or 124-75(2) for a roll-over under Subdivision 124-B, then paragraphs 152-105(b) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if you had acquired the new asset when you acquired the original asset.

Note: Subdivision 124-B allows you to choose a roll-over if your CGT asset is compulsorily acquired, lost or destroyed.

Assets replaced during FSR transition (same owner roll-overs)

(1A) If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset) you acquired in a situation covered by former section 124-880, 124-885 or 124-890, then paragraphs 152-105(b) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if you had acquired the new asset when you acquired the original asset.

Note: Former Subdivision 124-O provided a roll-over for certain CGT assets that came to an end as a result of an FSR transition.

Asset replaced during FSR transition (new owner roll-overs)

(1B) If a *CGT asset is an asset (the new asset) acquired in a situation covered by former section 124-900, 124-905 or 124-910, then paragraphs 152-105(b) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if the new owner had acquired the new asset when the original owner acquired the original asset.

Note: Former Subdivision 124-O provided a roll-over for certain CGT assets that came to an end as a result of an FSR transition.

Marriage or relationship breakdowns

If you made the choice mentioned in subsection 152-45(2) for a CGT asset, then paragraphs 152-105(b) and (c) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if you had acquired the asset when the transferor acquired it.

Note: There is a roll-over under Subdivision 126-A if CGT assets are transferred because of a marriage or relationship breakdown.

Restructures of small businesses

If section 328-450 or 328-455 applies in relation to the transfer of an asset to you, then paragraphs 152-105(b) and (c) and 152-110(1)(b) and (c) (the 15-year and significant individual rules) apply as if:

you had acquired the asset when the entity transferring the asset acquired it; or

in a case where, for the purposes of applying those paragraphs, the time when that entity acquired the asset was provided for by this subsection—you had acquired the asset at that time.

152-125 Payments to company’s or trust’s CGT concession stakeholders are exempt

This section applies if:

one or more of the following apply:

(i) under section 152-110, a *capital gain (the exempt amount) of a company or trust is disregarded;

(ii) under section 152-110, an amount of income (the exempt amount) is *non-assessable non-exempt income of a company or trust;

(iii) subparagraph (i) of this paragraph would have applied to an amount (the exempt amount) except that the capital gain was disregarded anyway because the relevant *CGT asset was *acquired before 20 September 1985;

(iv) subparagraph (i) of this paragraph would have applied to an amount (the exempt amount) if subsection 149-30(1A) and section 149-35 had not applied to the relevant asset; and

the company or trust makes one or more payments relating to the exempt amount to an individual (whether directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) before the later of:

2 years after the relevant CGT event; and

if the relevant CGT event happened because the company or trust *disposed of the relevant CGT asset—6 months after the latest time a possible financial benefit becomes or could become due under a look-through earnout right relating to that CGT asset and the disposal; and

the individual was a CGT concession stakeholder of the company or trust just before the relevant CGT event.

Note: A normal business payment, for example, a payment of wages, would not be made “in relation to the exempt amount”.

In determining the taxable income of the company, the trust, the individual, or any of the interposed entities, disregard the total amount of the payment or payments made to the CGT concession stakeholder, up to the following limit:

where:

stakeholder’s participation percentage means:

in the case of a company or a trust referred to in item 2 of the table in subsection 152-70(1)—the stakeholder’s small business participation percentage in the company or trust just before the relevant CGT event; or

in the case of a trust referred to in item 3 of that table—the amount (expressed as a percentage) worked out using the following formula:

If a company makes such a payment, this Act applies to the payment, to the extent that it is less than or equal to the limit mentioned in subsection (2), as if:

it were not a dividend; and

it were not a frankable distribution.

The Commissioner may extend the time limit under paragraph (1)(b).

Subdivision 152-C — Small business 50% reduction

Guide to Subdivision 152-C

152-200 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you how to apply the small business CGT concessions mentioned in step 6 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1).

A capital gain is reduced by 50% if the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied (assuming the $2 million threshold for a small business entity to be a CGT small business entity were disregarded).

If the capital gain has already been reduced by the discount percentage, the 50% reduction under this Subdivision applies to that reduced gain.

The capital gain may be further reduced by the small business retirement exemption or a small business rollover, or both.

Alternatively, you may choose not to apply the 50% reduction and instead apply the small business retirement exemption or small business rollover.

None of these rules apply if the 15-year exemption already applies to the capital gain, since such a gain is disregarded anyway.

Table of sections

152-205 You get the small business 50% reduction

152-210 You may also get the small business retirement exemption and small business roll-over relief

152-215 15-year rule has priority

152-220 You may choose not to apply this Subdivision

152-205 You get the small business 50% reduction

The amount of a *capital gain remaining after applying step 5 of the method statement in subsection 102-5(1) is reduced by 50%, if the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain.

Note: The cost bases of CGT assets of an individual are indexed from 1 July 2027, reducing capital gains that arise after 1 July 2027. This reduction applies after indexation, allowing the indexed gain to be reduced by a further 50%.

In working out for the purposes of subsection (1) whether the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied, disregard paragraph 152-10(1AA)(b).

152-210 You may also get the small business retirement exemption and small business roll-over relief

The *capital gain, as reduced under section 152-205, may also qualify for:

the small business retirement exemption (see Subdivision 152-D); or

a small business roll-over (see Subdivision 152-E);

or both.

If it qualifies for both of those concessions, you may choose which order to apply them in.

152-215 15-year rule has priority

This Subdivision does not apply to a *capital gain to which Subdivision 152-B (15-year exemption) applies.

Note: Under that Subdivision, such a gain is entirely disregarded, so there is no need for any further concession to apply.

152-220 You may choose not to apply this Subdivision

You may choose not to apply the reduction mentioned in section 152-205 to a particular *capital gain.

Note: Making this choice might allow a company or trust to make larger tax-free payments under the small business retirement exemption: see section 152-325.

Subdivision 152-D — Small business retirement exemption

Guide to Subdivision 152-D

152-300 What this Subdivision is about

You can choose to disregard a capital gain from a CGT event happening to a CGT asset of your small business if the capital proceeds from the event are used in connection with your retirement.

There is a lifetime limit of $500,000 for all choices that can be made in respect of an individual under this Subdivision.

You may choose not to apply the concession in section 152-205 (small business 50% reduction) before this one. For an additional concession, see also Subdivision 152-E (small business roll-over).

You do not need to satisfy the basic conditions for this exemption in relation to CGT events J5 and J6.

Table of sections

152-305 Choosing the exemption

152-310 Consequences of choice

152-315 Choosing the amount to disregard

152-320 Meaning of CGT retirement exemption limit

152-325 Company or trust conditions

152-330 15-year rule has priority

152-305 Choosing the exemption

Individual

If you are an individual, you can choose to disregard all or part of a *capital gain if:

the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain; and

if you are under 55 just before you make the choice—you contribute an amount equal to the asset’s CGT exempt amount to a complying superannuation fund or an RSA; and

Note: For the non-deductibility of the contribution, see subsection 290-150(4).

the contribution is made:

if the relevant CGT event is CGT event J2, J5 or J6—when you made the choice; or

otherwise—at the later of when you made the choice and when you received the proceeds.

Note 1: Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.

If you receive the capital proceeds from the CGT event in instalments, paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) apply to each instalment in succession (up to the asset’s CGT exempt amount).

For the purposes of (but without limiting) subsection (1A), you are treated as receiving the capital proceeds in instalments if:

the CGT event happened because you *disposed of the CGT asset; and

the capital proceeds from the disposal are increased by one or more *financial benefits that you receive under a look-through earnout right.

Company or trust

A company or a trust (except a public entity—see subsection (3)) can also choose to disregard such an amount if:

the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the *capital gain; and

the entity satisfies the significant individual test (see section 152-50); and

the company or trust conditions in section 152-325 are satisfied.

Note: Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.

Entities of a kind referred to in subsection 328-125(8) cannot make the choice.

Paragraphs (1)(a) and (2)(a) do not apply if the *capital gain arose from CGT event J5 or J6.

152-310 Consequences of choice

Consequences in all cases

If the individual, company or trust makes the choice mentioned in section 152-305 for any part of the *capital gain from the CGT asset, that part of the capital gain equal to its CGT exempt amount is disregarded.

Additional consequences in relation to company or trust

Any payment or part of one the company or trust makes to comply with section 152-325:

is not assessable income, and is not exempt income, of the CGT concession stakeholder to whom it is made; and

cannot be deducted from the company’s or trust’s assessable income.

Additional consequences in relation to interposed entities

If:

(a) an entity (the paying entity) receives a payment (whether directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) that a company or trust makes to comply with section 152-325; and

the paying entity passes on the payment to the CGT concession stakeholder or another interposed entity;

then:

the payment cannot be deducted from the paying entity’s assessable income; and

the payment received by the paying entity is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

152-315 Choosing the amount to disregard

You can choose to disregard all or part of each *capital gain to which this Subdivision applies.

Note 1: You make capital gains equal to any parts that you do not choose to disregard.

Note 2: Section 103-25 tells you when the choice must be made.

However, the choice must be made in a way that ensures that:

for an individual—your CGT retirement exemption limit is not exceeded; or

for a company or trust—the CGT retirement exemption limit of each individual for whom the choice is made is not exceeded.

(3) The amount chosen for the asset is its CGT exempt amount.

The CGT exempt amount must be specified in writing.

If a company or trust is making the choice and it has more than one CGT concession stakeholder, it must specify in writing the percentage of each CGT asset’s CGT exempt amount that is attributable to each of those stakeholders. One or more of the percentages may be nil, but all of the percentages must add up to 100%.

Example: Daryl is a significant individual in a company. The company specifies 90% for Daryl under subsection (5) (which means that the percentage specified for the other stakeholder must be 10%). Daryl’s retirement exemption limit is $500,000.

To determine whether subsection (2) is complied with, Daryl would take 90% of the asset’s CGT exempt amount, add that to amounts previously specified in choices made by or for him under this Subdivision and see whether the total exceeds $500,000.

Note: Subsections (4) and (5) are exceptions to the general rule about choices in section 103-25.

152-320 Meaning of CGT retirement exemption limit

(1) An individual’s CGT retirement exemption limit at a time is $500,000 reduced by the *CGT exempt amounts of *CGT assets specified in choices previously made by or for the individual under this Subdivision.

Note: The $500,000 is also reduced by any reduction under old provisions about reduction of the CGT retirement exemption limit: see item 62 of Schedule 1 to the New Business Tax System (Capital Gains Tax) Act 1999.

If the individual was one of at least 2 *CGT concession stakeholders of a company or trust, and the company or trust made a choice for the individual, only the individual’s percentage (see subsection 152-315(5)) of the assets’ *CGT exempt amounts is taken into account under subsection (1) for that choice.

152-325 Company or trust conditions

Company or trust to make payments

A company or trust must make a payment (whether directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) to at least one of its *CGT concession stakeholders if:

the company or trust makes a choice under this Subdivision to disregard a *capital gain from CGT event J2, J5 or J6; or

the company or trust receives an amount of capital proceeds from a CGT event for which it makes a choice under this Subdivision.

If the company or trust receives the capital proceeds from the CGT event in instalments, subsection (1) applies to each instalment in succession (up to the relevant CGT exempt amount).

For the purposes of (but without limiting) subsection (2), the company or trust is treated as receiving the capital proceeds in instalments if:

the CGT event happened because the company or trust *disposed of the CGT asset; and

the capital proceeds from the disposal are increased by one or more *financial benefits that the company or trust receives under a look-through earnout right.

Amount and timing of payments

If a payment is made to more than one CGT concession stakeholder, the amount of each such payment is to be worked out by reference to each individual’s percentage (see subsection 152-315(5)) of the relevant CGT exempt amount.

If the CGT concession stakeholder to whom the payment is made is an employee of the company or trust, the payment must not be of a kind mentioned in section 82-135 (disregarding paragraph (fa) of that section).

The payment must be made by:

if paragraph (1)(a) applies—7 days after the company or trust makes the choice; and

otherwise—the later of:

7 days after the company or trust makes the choice; and

7 days after the company or trust receives an amount of capital proceeds from the CGT event.

The amount of the payment, or the sum of the amounts of the payments, required to be made under this section must be equal to the lesser of:

either:

if paragraph (1)(a) applies—the amount of the *capital gain from the CGT event that the company or trust disregarded; or

otherwise—the amount of capital proceeds received; and

the relevant CGT exempt amount.

Payments may be joint or separate

If this section requires the company or trust to make 2 or more payments to a single CGT concession stakeholder (whether or not by the same time), the company or trust may meet that requirement by making one payment or by making separate payments.

If a CGT concession stakeholder is under 55 just before a payment is made under this section in relation to him or her:

the company or trust must make the payment to the CGT concession stakeholder by contributing it for the stakeholder to a complying superannuation fund or an RSA in respect of the stakeholder; and

the company or trust must notify the trustee of the fund or the RSA provider at the time the contribution is made that the contribution is made in accordance with this section.

Note: For the non-deductibility of the contribution, see subsection 290-150(4).

For the purposes of Part 3-30, treat a payment mentioned in paragraph (7)(a), made in accordance with this section, as a contribution made by the CGT concession stakeholder.

Payments are not dividends or frankable distributions

Subsection (10) applies if:

a company makes a payment to comply with subsection (1) to:

a CGT concession stakeholder; or

an interposed entity, in relation to a CGT concession stakeholder; or

both of the following apply:

an interposed entity receives a payment (whether directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) that a company or trust makes to comply with subsection (1), in relation to a CGT concession stakeholder;

the interposed entity passes on the payment to the CGT concession stakeholder or another interposed entity.

This Act applies to the payment, to the extent that it is less than or equal to the amount mentioned in subsection (3) for the stakeholder, as if:

it were not a dividend; and

it were not a frankable distribution.

(11) Subsection (10) applies in relation to the payment despite section 109 and Division 7A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

152-330 15-year rule has priority

This Subdivision does not apply to a *capital gain to which Subdivision 152-B (15-year exemption) applies.

Note: Under that Subdivision, such a gain is entirely disregarded, so there is no need for any further concession to apply.

Subdivision 152-E — Small business roll-over

Guide to Subdivision 152-E

152-400 What this Subdivision is about

A small business roll-over allows you to defer the making of a capital gain from a CGT event happening in relation to one or more small business assets if the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain.

You may choose not to apply the concession in section 152-205 (small business 50% reduction) before this one. For an additional exemption, see also Subdivision 152-D (small business retirement exemption).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

152-410 When you can obtain the roll-over

152-415 What the roll-over consists of

152-420 Rules where an individual who has obtained a roll-over dies

152-430 15-year rule has priority

Operative provisions

152-410 When you can obtain the roll-over

You can choose to obtain a roll-over under this Subdivision for a *capital gain if the basic conditions in Subdivision 152-A are satisfied for the gain.

Note 1: You can choose the roll-over even if you have not yet acquired a replacement asset or incurred fourth element expenditure, but:

CGT event J5 happens if, by the end of the replacement asset period, you do not acquire the asset or incur the expenditure (see section 104-197); and

CGT event J6 happens if, by the end of the replacement asset period, the cost of the replacement asset or the amount of fourth element expenditure incurred (or both) is less than the amount of the capital gain that you disregarded (see section 104-198).

Note 2: If you have acquired a replacement asset or incurred fourth element expenditure but there is a change in relation to the replacement asset or improved asset after the end of the replacement asset period, CGT event J2 may happen: see section 104-185.

152-415 What the roll-over consists of

If you choose the roll-over, you can choose to disregard all or part of each *capital gain to which this Subdivision applies.

Note: If you choose to disregard only some of the capital gain, you make a capital gain equal to the remaining amount.

Example: The original capital gain was $100,000. You have reduced it to $25,000 under other concessions (apart from the roll-over). If you choose to disregard $20,000, you are left with a final capital gain of $5,000.

152-420 Rules where an individual who has obtained a roll-over dies

This section applies if:

a replacement asset, or an asset in relation to which fourth element expenditure has been incurred, formed part of the estate of an individual who has died; and

either or both of the following apply:

the asset has devolved to the deceased’s *legal personal representative;

the asset has *passed to a beneficiary of the deceased; and

a change covered by subsection 104-185(2) or (3) did not happen while the deceased owned it or, if the asset has passed to a beneficiary, while the asset was in the hands of the deceased’s legal personal representative.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, anything done or not done by the deceased in relation to the asset is treated as though it had been done or not done by the *legal personal representative.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, if the asset has *passed to a beneficiary, anything done or not done by the deceased or by the deceased’s *legal personal representative (including because of the operation of subsection (2)) in relation to the asset is treated as though it had been done or not done by the beneficiary.

152-430 15-year rule has priority

This Subdivision does not apply to a *capital gain to which Subdivision 152-B (15-year exemption) applies.

Note: Under that Subdivision, such a gain is entirely disregarded, so there is no need for any further concession to apply.

Part 3-5 — Corporate taxpayers and corporate distributions

Division 160 — Corporate loss carry back tax offset for 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 for businesses with turnover under $5 billion

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 160

160-A Entitlement to and amount of loss carry back tax offset

160-B Loss carry back choice

Guide to Division 160

160-1 What this Division is about

A corporate tax entity can choose to “carry back” a tax loss it had for 2019-20, 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 against the income tax liability it had for 2018-19, 2019-20, 2020-21 or 2021-22.

The entity gets a refundable tax offset for 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 that is a proxy for the tax the entity would save if it deducted the loss in the income year to which the loss is “carried back”.

The refundable tax offset:

is capped at the entity’s franking account balance; and

is only available for losses for years for which the entity’s turnover was less than $5 billion.

Subdivision 160-A — Entitlement to and amount of loss carry back tax offset

Table of sections

160-5 Entitlement to loss carry back tax offset

160-10 Amount of loss carry back tax offset

160-5 Entitlement to loss carry back tax offset

An entity is entitled to a *tax offset (the loss carry back tax offset) for the *current year if the following conditions are satisfied:

the current year is:

the 2020-21 income year; or

the 2021-22 income year; or

the 2022-23 income year;

the entity is a corporate tax entity throughout the current year;

Note: See also section 160-25.

any or all of the following income years were *loss years:

the 2019-20 income year;

the 2020-21 income year;

if the current year is the 2021-22 income year—the 2021-22 income year;

if the current year is the 2022-23 income year—the 2022-23 income year or the 2021-22 income year;

the entity had an income tax liability for any or all of the following income years:

the 2018-19 income year;

the 2019-20 income year;

if the current year is the 2021-22 income year and the 2021-22 income year was a loss year—the 2020-21 income year;

if the current year is the 2022-23 income year and the 2022-23 income year was a loss year—the 2021-22 income year or the 2020-21 income year;

if the current year is the 2022-23 income year and the 2021-22 income year was a loss year—the 2020-21 income year;

any of the following requirements are satisfied for the current year and each of the 5 income years before the current year:

the entity has lodged its income tax return for the year;

the entity was not required to lodge an income tax return for the year;

the Commissioner has made an assessment of the entity’s income tax for the year;

the entity makes a loss carry back choice for the current year in accordance with Subdivision 160-B.

Note 1: The entity can be entitled to only one loss carry back tax offset for 2020-21. However, that offset has 2 components: one relating to 2018-19 and one relating to 2019-20: see section 160-10.

Note 2: The entity can be entitled to only one loss carry back tax offset for 2021-22. However, that offset has 3 components: one relating to 2018-19, one relating to 2019-20 and one relating to 2020-21: see section 160-10.

Note 2A: The entity can be entitled to only one loss carry back tax offset for 2022-23. However, that offset has 4 components: one relating to 2018-19, one relating to 2019-20, one relating to 2020-21 and one relating to 2021-22: see section 160-10.

Note 3: The loss carry back tax offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23.

160-10 Amount of loss carry back tax offset

The amount of the entity’s loss carry back tax offset for the current year is the lesser of the following amounts:

the sum of the loss carry back tax offset components for:

the 2018-19 income year; and

the 2019-20 income year; and

if the current year is the 2021-22 income year—the 2020-21 income year; and

if the current year is the 2022-23 income year—the 2021-22 income year and the 2020-21 income year;

the entity’s franking account balance at the end of the current year.

Meaning of loss carry back tax offset component

(2) For the purposes of working out the amount of the entity’s *loss carry back tax offset for the *current year, the entity’s loss carry back tax offset component for an income year is:

if the entity does not, in its loss carry back choice for the current year, *carry back any *tax losses to the income year—nil; or

otherwise—so much of the entity’s income tax liability for the income year as does not exceed:

if, in its loss carry back choice for the current year, the entity carries back only one tax loss to the income year—the amount worked out at step 3 of the following method statement in relation to the tax loss; or

if, in its loss carry back choice for the current year, the entity carries back tax losses for 2, 3 or 4 *loss years to the income year—the sum of the amounts worked out at step 3 of the following method statement in relation to each of those tax losses.

Method statement

Step 1. Start with the amount of the *tax loss the entity *carries back to the income year.

Step 2. Reduce the step 1 amount by the entity’s net exempt income for the income year.

Step 3. Multiply the step 2 amount by the *corporate tax rate for the loss year.

Note: Do not reduce the step 1 amount by the entity’s net exempt income to the extent the net exempt income has already been utilised: see section 960-20.

Example: Company A (which is not a base rate entity) has at the end of the 2020-21 income year:

a tax loss of $900,000 for that year and a franking account balance of $280,000; and

for the 2018-19 income year—an income tax liability of $120,000 and net exempt income of $5,000; and

for the 2019-20 income year—an income tax liability of $210,000.

Company A chooses to carry back $405,000 of its tax loss for the 2020-21 year to the 2018-19 year and $495,000 of that loss to the 2019-20 year.

Company A’s loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21 year is $268,500, worked out as follows:

an offset component for the 2018-19 income year of $120,000, calculated by starting with the $405,000 carried back, reducing that at step 2 by $5,000, and multiplying the result by 30%;

an offset component for the 2019-20 income year of $148,500, calculated by starting with the $495,000 carried back and multiplying the result by 30%.

The sum of the 2 components is $268,500 (which is less than Company A’s $280,000 franking account balance at the end of the 2020-21 year). If that sum had exceeded that balance, the amount of the offset would have been limited under paragraph (1)(b) of this section to that balance.

Income tax liability for the 2018-19 or 2019-20 income year already utilised—entitlement to loss carry back tax offset for 2021-22 income year

(3) Subsection (4) applies in relation to applying paragraph (2)(b) to work out the entity’s *loss carry back tax offset component for the 2018-19 or 2019-20 income year (the gain year) as part of working out the entity’s entitlement to a *loss carry back tax offset for the 2021-22 income year.

Disregard so much of the entity’s income tax liability for the gain year as has previously been included (as part of working out the entity’s entitlement to a loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21 income year) in a loss carry back tax offset component.

Income tax liability for the 2018-19, 2019-20 or 2020-21 income year already utilised—entitlement to loss carry back tax offset for 2022-23 income year

(4A) Subsection (4B) applies in relation to applying paragraph (2)(b) to work out the entity’s *loss carry back tax offset component for the 2018-19, 2019-20 or 2020-21 income year (the gain year) as part of working out the entity’s entitlement to a *loss carry back tax offset for the 2022-23 income year.

Disregard so much of the entity’s income tax liability for the gain year as has previously been included (as part of working out the entity’s entitlement to a loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21 or 2021-22 income year) in a loss carry back tax offset component.

Foreign residents

Paragraph (1)(b) does not apply if the entity was a foreign resident (other than an NZ franking company) for:

if the entity *carries back an amount to the 2018-19 income year—more than half of the 2018-19 income year; and

if the entity carries back an amount to the 2019-20 income year—more than half of the 2019-20 income year; and

if the current year is the 2021-22 income year and the entity carries back an amount to the 2020-21 income year—more than half of the 2020-21 income year; and

if the current year is the 2022-23 income year:

where the entity carries back an amount to the 2021-22 income year—more than half of the 2021-22 income year; and

where the entity carries back an amount to the 2020-21 income year—more than half of the 2020-21 income year.

Subdivision 160-B — Loss carry back choice

Table of sections

160-15 Loss carry back choice

160-16 Changing a loss carry back choice

160-20 Entity must have had turnover less than $5 billion for loss year

160-25 Entity must have been a corporate tax entity during relevant years

160-30 Transferred tax losses, income tax liabilities etc. not included

160-35 Integrity rule—no loss carry back tax offset if scheme entered into

160-15 Loss carry back choice

(1) If the *current year is the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year, the entity may make a loss carry back choice for the current year that specifies the following:

if the current year is the 2021-22 income year:

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s *tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be *carried back to the 2020-21 income year; and

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2019-20 income year; and

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year;

if the current year is the 2022-23 income year and the 2022-23 income year was a loss year:

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2022-23 income year is to be carried back to the 2021-22 income year; and

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2022-23 income year is to be carried back to the 2020-21 income year; and

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2022-23 income year is to be carried back to the 2019-20 income year; and

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2022-23 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year;

if the current year is the 2022-23 income year and the 2021-22 income year was a loss year:

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2020-21 income year; and

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2019-20 income year; and

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2021-22 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year;

in any case:

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2020-21 income year is to be carried back to the 2019-20 income year; and

how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2020-21 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year;

in any case—how much (expressed as a specified amount) of the entity’s tax loss (if any) for the 2019-20 income year is to be carried back to the 2018-19 income year.

The choice under subsection (1) must be made in the approved form by:

the day the entity lodges its income tax return for the current year; or

such later day as the Commissioner allows.

160-16 Changing a loss carry back choice

An entity may change a loss carry back choice for the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year by notice, in the approved form, given to the Commissioner.

(2) The notice to change a *loss carry back choice for an income year must be given to the Commissioner within the limited amendment period (within the meaning of section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) for an assessment for that income year.

To avoid doubt, the change takes effect from the day the entity made the original loss carry back choice under section 160-15.

160-20 Entity must have had turnover less than $5 billion for loss year

The entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss for an income year unless the entity:

was a small business entity for the income year; or

would have been a small business entity for the income year if:

each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $5 billion; and

the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this section.

160-25 Entity must have been a corporate tax entity during relevant years

If the current year is the 2020-21 income year:

the entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss to the 2018-19 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:

the 2018-19 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

the 2019-20 income year; and

the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2019-20 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout the 2019-20 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence).

Note: The entity must be a corporate tax entity throughout 2020-21: see paragraph 160-5(b).

If the current year is the 2021-22 income year:

the entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss to the 2018-19 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:

the 2018-19 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

the 2019-20 income year; and

the 2020-21 income year; and

the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2019-20 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:

the 2019-20 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

the 2020-21 income year; and

the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2020-21 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout the 2020-21 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence).

Note: The entity must be a corporate tax entity throughout 2021-22: see paragraph 160-5(b).

If the current year is the 2022-23 income year:

the entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss to the 2018-19 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:

the 2018-19 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

the 2019-20 income year; and

the 2020-21 income year; and

the 2021-22 income year; and

the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2019-20 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:

the 2019-20 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

the 2020-21 income year; and

the 2021-22 income year; and

the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2020-21 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout:

the 2020-21 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence); and

the 2021-22 income year; and

the entity cannot carry back an amount of a tax loss to the 2021-22 income year unless the entity was a corporate tax entity throughout the 2021-22 income year (disregarding any period when the entity was not in existence).

Note: The entity must be a corporate tax entity throughout 2022-23: see paragraph 160-5(b).

160-30 Transferred tax losses, income tax liabilities etc. not included

The entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss for an income year, to the extent that the loss:

was transferred to or from the entity under Division 170 or Subdivision 707-A (about certain company groups); or

exceeds the amount that would be the entity’s tax loss for the year if section 36-55 (about excess franking offsets) were disregarded.

For the purposes of this Division, disregard the income tax liability of the entity for an income year to the extent that it consists of an income tax liability of a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group that is taken to be an income tax liability of the entity because of section 701-5 (the entry history rule).

160-35 Integrity rule—no loss carry back tax offset if scheme entered into

No loss carry back tax offset if scheme entered into

(1) The *corporate tax entity cannot *carry back an amount of a *tax loss to an income year (the gain year) if:

there is a *scheme for a disposition of *membership interests, or an interest in membership interests, in:

the corporate tax entity; or

an entity that has a direct or indirect interest in the corporate tax entity; and

the scheme is entered into or carried out during the period:

starting at the start of the gain year; and

ending at the end of the current year; and

the disposition results in a change in who controls, or is able to control, (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) the voting power in the corporate tax entity; and

another entity receives, in connection with the scheme, a financial benefit calculated by reference to one or more *loss carry back tax offsets to which it was reasonable, at the time the scheme was entered into or carried out, to expect the corporate tax entity would be entitled; and

having regard to the relevant circumstances of the scheme, it would be concluded that a person, or one of the persons, who entered into or carried out the scheme or any part of the scheme did so for a purpose (whether or not the dominant purpose but not including an incidental purpose) of enabling the corporate tax entity to get a loss carry back tax offset.

Relevant circumstances

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(e), the relevant circumstances of the *scheme for a disposition include the following:

the extent to which the corporate tax entity continued to conduct the same activities after the scheme as it did before the scheme;

if the corporate tax entity continued to use the same assets after the scheme as it did before the scheme—the extent to which those assets were assets for which equivalents were not readily available at the time of the scheme;

(c) the matters referred to in subsection 177D(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (applying paragraph 177D(2)(d) as if the reference in that paragraph to Part IVA of that Act were instead a reference to this section).

Application of this section to non-share equity interests

This section:

applies to a *non-share equity interest in the same way as it applies to a *membership interest; and

applies to an *equity holder in the same way as it applies to a *member.

Division 164 — Non-share capital accounts for companies

Guide to Division 164

164-1 What this Division is about

A company that issues non-share equity interests will have a notional account called a non-share capital account. This account records contributions to the company in relation to those non-share equity interests and returns made by the company of those contributions.

A non-share distribution that represents a return of contributions is not taxed as a dividend (subject to the anti-avoidance provisions dealing with dividend substitution). In certain circumstances a company may use its share capital account as the source for such distributions.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

164-5 Object

164-10 Non-share capital account

164-15 Credits to non-share capital account

164-20 Debits to non-share capital account

Operative provisions

164-5 Object

This Division provides for the non-share capital account through which a company records contributions made to it in respect of *non-share equity interests and returns by it of those contributions.

This allows a non-share distribution to be characterised as either:

a non-share dividend; or

a non-share capital return.

164-10 Non-share capital account

(1) A company has a non-share capital account if:

the company issues a *non-share equity interest in the company on or after 1 July 2001; or

the company has issued a non-share equity interest in the company before 1 July 2001 that is still in existence on 1 July 2001; or

(c) a *debt interest in the company changes at a particular time (the change time) to an *equity interest in the company because of subsection 974-110(1) or (2); or

the following conditions are satisfied in relation to an interest in the company:

immediately before subsection 974-75(4) ceases to have effect, the interest is taken to be a debt interest in the company because of that subsection;

(ii) the interest is an equity interest in the company at the time (the change time) that is immediately after that cessation;

subsection 974-75(6) does not apply to the interest in relation to the income year that includes the change time; or

the following conditions are satisfied in relation to an interest in the company:

subsection 974-75(6) applies to the interest in relation to a particular income year;

that subsection does not apply to the interest in relation to the next income year;

(iii) the interest is an equity interest in the company at the time (the change time) that is the start of that next income year.

The account continues in existence even if the company ceases to have any *non-share equity interests on issue.

The balance of the account cannot fall below nil.

The only credits and debits that may be made to the account are those provided for in sections 164-15 and 164-20.

164-15 Credits to non-share capital account

If the company issues a *non-share equity interest in the company on or after 1 July 2001, there is a credit to the non-share capital account equal to:

where:

amount received is the *market value, when it is provided, of the consideration the company receives for the issue of the interest.

share capital account credit is the amount of any credit made to the company’s *share capital account in respect of the issue of the interest.

Note: The issue of a non-share equity interest can give rise to a credit to the company’s share capital account if the interest consists, for example, of a stapled security that includes a share in the company’s capital.

If paragraph 164-10(1)(c), (d) or (e) applies in relation to a particular interest in the company, there is a credit to the non-share capital account at the change time referred to in that paragraph of an amount equal to:

where:

amount received is the *market value, when it was provided, of the consideration the company received for the issue of the interest.

amount returned is so much of the amount received as has been returned to a holder of the interest before the change time.

share capital account credit is the amount of any credit made to the company’s *share capital account in respect of the issue of the interest.

If the company has a non-share capital account at the beginning of 1 July 2001 because of a *non-share equity interest the company issued before 1 July 2001, there is a credit to the non-share capital account on that day for each non-share equity interest in the company that:

was issued before 1 July 2001; and

(b) is still in existence on 1 July 2001.

The amount of the credit under subsection (3) is:

where:

amount received is the *market value, when it is provided, of the consideration the company receives for the issue of the interest.

return of amount received is the sum of the amounts paid before 1 July 2001 by way of return, in whole or in part, of the amount received.

share capital account credit is the sum of any amounts credited before 1 July 2001 to the company’s *share capital account in respect of the issue of the interest.

To avoid doubt, if:

it appears that a credit to the company’s non-share capital account has arisen under this section because an interest in the company appears to be, or have become, an *equity interest at a time in a particular income year; and

because subsection 974-75(6) or 974-110(1A) is subsequently found to apply in relation to the interest and that income year, the interest was not in fact, or did not in fact become, an equity interest at that time;

the credit referred to in paragraph (a) is taken never to have arisen.

164-20 Debits to non-share capital account

The company may debit the whole or a part of a non-share distribution against the company’s non-share capital account:

to the extent to which the distribution is made as consideration for the surrender, cancellation or redemption of a *non-share equity interest in the company; or

to the extent to which:

the distribution is made in connection with a reduction in the *market value of a non-share equity interest in the company; and

the amount of the distribution is equal to the amount of the reduction in market value.

The total of the amounts debited to the account in respect of a particular *non-share equity interest must not exceed the total of the amounts credited to the account in respect of the interest.

If:

(a) an *equity interest in the company changes at a particular time (the change time) to a *debt interest in the company because of subsection 974-110(1) or (2); or

(b) an equity interest in the company changes to a debt interest in the company, with effect from a time (the change time) that is the start of a particular income year, because of subsection 974-110(1A); or

the following conditions are satisfied in relation to an interest in the company:

subsection 974-75(6) does not apply to the interest in relation to a particular income year;

the interest is an equity interest in the company at the end of that income year;

(iii) subsection 974-75(6) applies to the interest from the time (the change time) that is the start of the next income year;

there is, or is taken to have been, a debit to the non-share capital account at the change time equal to:

where:

credits in relation to the interest is the sum of all the credits that have been made to the *non-share capital account in relation to the interest before the change time.

debits in relation to the interest is the sum of all the debits that have been made to the *non-share capital account in relation to the interest before the change time.

To avoid doubt, if:

it appears that a debit to the company’s non-share capital account has arisen because an interest in the company appears to be, or have become, a *debt interest at a time in a particular income year; and

because subsection 974-75(6) or 974-110(1A) is subsequently found not to apply in relation to the interest and that income year, the interest was not in fact, or did not in fact become, a debt interest at that time;

the debit referred to in paragraph (a) is taken never to have arisen.

Division 165 — Income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 165

165-A Deducting tax losses of earlier income years

165-B Working out the taxable income and tax loss for the income year of the change

165-CA Applying net capital losses of earlier income years

165-CB Working out the net capital gain and the net capital loss for the income year of the change

165-CC Change of ownership or control of company that has an unrealised net loss

165-CD Reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company

165-C Deducting bad debts

165-D Tests for finding out whether the company has maintained the same owners

165-E Business continuity test

165-F Special provisions relating to ownership by non-fixed trusts

165-G Other special provisions

Guide to Division 165

165-1 What this Division is about

A change in the ownership or control of a company can affect:

• whether it can deduct its tax losses of earlier income years; and

• how it calculates its taxable income and tax loss for the income year of the change; and

• whether it can deduct debts owed to it that are written off as bad.

Subdivision 165-A — Deducting tax losses of earlier income years

Guide to Subdivision 165-A

165-5 What this Subdivision is about

A company cannot deduct a tax loss unless:

it has the same owners and the same control throughout the period from the start of the loss year to the end of the income year; or

it satisfies the business continuity test by carrying on the same business (including entering into no new kinds of transactions and conducting no new kinds of business), or by carrying on a similar business (on or after 1 July 2015).

Note: The exceptions mentioned in this section apply differently in relation to designated infrastructure project entities: see section 415-35.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

165-10 To deduct a tax loss

165-12 Company must maintain the same owners

165-13 Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test

165-15 The same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test

165-20 When company can deduct part of a tax loss

Operative provisions

165-10 To deduct a tax loss

A company cannot deduct a *tax loss unless either:

it meets the conditions in section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners); or

Note: See section 165-215 for a special alternative to these conditions.

it meets the condition in section 165-13 (which is about the company satisfying the business continuity test).

Note: In the case of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company, Subdivision 166-A modifies how this Subdivision applies, unless the company chooses otherwise.

165-12 Company must maintain the same owners

Ownership test period

(1) In determining whether section 165-10 prevents a company from deducting a *tax loss, the ownership test period is the period from the start of the *loss year to the end of the income year.

Note: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

Voting power

There must be persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at all times during the ownership test period.

Note 1: See section 165-150 to work out who had more than 50% of the voting power.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

Rights to dividends

There must be persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends at all times during the ownership test period.

Note 1: See section 165-155 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to dividends in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends.

Rights to capital distributions

There must be persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions at all times during the ownership test period.

Note 1: See section 165-160 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to capital distributions.

When to apply the primary test

To work out whether a condition in this section was satisfied at all times during the ownership test period, apply the primary test for that condition unless subsection (6) requires the alternative test to be applied.

Note: For the primary test, see subsections 165-150(1), 165-155(1) and 165-160(1).

When to apply the alternative test

Apply the alternative test for that condition if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares or interests in shares in the company at any time during the ownership test period.

Note: For the alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2), 165-155(2) and 165-160(2).

Conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4) may be treated as having been satisfied in certain circumstances

If any of the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4) have not been satisfied, those conditions are taken to have been satisfied if:

they would have been satisfied except for the operation of section 165-165; and

the company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of the *tax loss has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the company during the ownership test period.

If the company is:

a non-profit company; or

a mutual affiliate company; or

a mutual insurance company;

during the whole of the ownership test period, the conditions in subsections (3) and (4) are taken to have been satisfied by the company.

Time of happening of CGT event

The happening of a CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the company that results in the failure of the company to satisfy a condition in subsection (2), (3) or (4) is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (7)(b), to have occurred during the ownership test period.

165-13 Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test

This section sets out the condition that a company must meet to be able to deduct the *tax loss if:

the company fails to meet a condition in subsection 165-12(2), (3) or (4); or

it is not practicable to show that the company meets the conditions in those subsections.

Note Other provisions may treat the company as meeting, or failing to meet, the conditions in subsections 165-12(2), (3) and (4).

(2) The company must satisfy the *business continuity test for the income year (the business continuity test period). Apply the test to the *business the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time) shown in the relevant item of the table.

For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E.

165-15 The same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test

Even if a company meets the conditions in section 165-12 or 165-13, it cannot deduct the *tax loss if:

for some or all of the part of the ownership test period that started at the end of the loss year, a person controlled, or was able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); and

(b) for some or all of the *loss year, that person did not control, and was not able to control, that voting power (directly, or indirectly in that way); and

that person began to control, or became able to control, that voting power (directly, or indirectly in that way) for the purpose of:

getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else;

or for purposes including that purpose.

Note: A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250.

(2) However, that person’s control of the voting power, or ability to control it, does not prevent the company from deducting the *tax loss if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the income year (the business continuity test period).

(3) Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time) when the person began to control that voting power, or became able to control it.

For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E.

165-20 When company can deduct part of a tax loss

(1) If section 165-10 (which is about deducting a tax loss) prevents a company from deducting a *tax loss, the company can deduct the part of the tax loss that was incurred during a part of the loss year.

(2) However, the company can do this only if, assuming that part of the *loss year had been treated as the whole of the loss year for the purposes of section 165-10, the company would have been entitled to deduct the *tax loss.

Subdivision 165-B — Working out the taxable income and tax loss for the income year of the change

Guide to Subdivision 165-B

165-23 What this Subdivision is about

A company that has not had the same ownership and control during the income year, and has not satisfied the business continuity test, works out its taxable income and tax loss under this Subdivision.

Table of sections

165-25 Summary of this Subdivision

165-30 Flow chart showing the application of this Subdivision

When a company must work out its taxable income and tax loss under this Subdivision

165-35 On a change of ownership, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test

165-37 Who has more than a 50% stake in the company during a period

165-40 On a change of control of the voting power in the company, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test

Working out the company’s taxable income

165-45 First, divide the income year into periods

165-50 Next, calculate the notional loss or notional taxable income for each period

165-55 How to attribute deductions to periods

165-60 How to attribute assessable income to periods

165-65 How to calculate the company’s taxable income for the income year

Working out the company’s tax loss

165-70 How to calculate the company’s tax loss for the income year

Special rules that apply if the company is in partnership

165-75 How to calculate the company’s notional loss or notional taxable income for a period when the company was a partner

165-80 How to calculate the company’s share of a partnership’s notional loss or notional net income for a period if both entities have the same income year

165-85 How to calculate the company’s share of a partnership’s notional loss or notional net income for a period if the entities have different income years

165-90 Company’s full year deductions include a share of partnership’s full year deductions

165-25 Summary of this Subdivision

The company calculates its taxable income for the income year in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Divide the income year into periods: each change in ownership or control is a dividing point between periods.

Step 2. Treat each period as if it were an income year and work out the notional loss or notional taxable income for that period.

Step 3. Work out the taxable income for the year of the change by adding up:

each notional taxable income; and

any full year amounts (amounts of assessable income not taken into account at Step 2);

and then subtracting any full year deductions (deductions not taken into account at Step 2).

Note: Do not take into account any notional loss.

As well as a taxable income, the company will have a tax loss. It is the total of:

• each notional loss; and

• excess full year deductions of particular kinds.

Special rules apply if the company was in partnership at some time during the income year.

For the special rules that apply if the company was in partnership: see sections 165-75 to 165-90.

165-30 Flow chart showing the application of this Subdivision

Note: If the company was a partner during the income year, special rules apply to calculating a notional loss or notional taxable income.

When a company must work out its taxable income and tax loss under this Subdivision

165-35 On a change of ownership, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test

A company must calculate its taxable income and *tax loss under this Subdivision unless:

there are persons who had *more than a 50% stake in the company during the whole of the income year; or

Note: See section 165-220 for a special alternative to the condition in this paragraph.

(b) there is only part of the income year (a part that started at the start of the income year) during which the same persons had *more than a 50% stake in the company, but the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the rest of the income year (the business continuity test period); or

the company was a designated infrastructure project entity during the whole of the income year.

Note: See subsection 415-35(7) if there is only part of the income year during which the company was a designated infrastructure project entity.

For the purposes of paragraph (b), apply the business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time) when that part ended.

Note 1: For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E.

Note 2: In the case of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company, Subdivision 166-B modifies how this Subdivision applies, unless the company chooses otherwise.

165-37 Who has more than a 50% stake in the company during a period

If:

(a) there are persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company during the whole of a period (the ownership test period) consisting of the income year or a part of it; and

there are persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends during the whole of the ownership test period; and

there are persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions during the whole of the ownership test period;

those persons had more than a 50% stake in the company during the ownership test period.

Note: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

To work out whether a condition in subsection (1) was satisfied during the ownership test period, apply the primary test for that condition unless subsection (3) requires the alternative test to be applied.

For the primary tests: see subsections 165-150(1), 165-155(1) and 165-160(1).

Apply the alternative test for that condition if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares, or interests in shares, in the company at any time during the ownership test period.

For the alternative tests: see subsections 165-150(2), 165-155(2) and 165-160(2).

Conditions in subsection (1) may be treated as having been satisfied in certain circumstances

If any of the conditions in subsection (1) have not been satisfied, those conditions are taken to have been satisfied if:

they would have been satisfied except for the operation of section 165-165; and

the company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of the *notional loss for the ownership test period has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the company during that period.

If the company is:

a non-profit company; or

a mutual affiliate company; or

a mutual insurance company;

during the whole of the ownership test period, the conditions in paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to have been satisfied by the company.

Time of happening of CGT event

The happening of a CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the company that results in the failure of the company to satisfy a condition in subsection (1) is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (4)(b), to have occurred during the ownership test period.

165-40 On a change of control of the voting power in the company, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test

A company must calculate its taxable income and tax loss under this Subdivision if, during the income year, a person begins to control, or becomes able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of:

getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else.

Note 1: A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

(2) However, that person’s control of the voting power, or ability to control it, does not require the company to calculate its taxable income under this Subdivision if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the rest of the income year (the business continuity test period).

(3) Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time) when the person began to control that voting power, or became able to control it.

For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E.

Working out the company’s taxable income

165-45 First, divide the income year into periods

Divide the income year into periods as follows.

The first period starts at the start of the income year. Each later period starts immediately after the end of the previous period.

(3) The last period ends at the end of the income year. Each period (except the last) ends at the earlier of:

(a) the latest time that would result in persons having *more than a 50% stake in the company during the whole of the period; or

(b) the earliest time when a person begins to control, or becomes able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of:

getting some benefit or advantage to do with how this Act applies; or

getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else.

Note: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete periods.

(4) However, what would otherwise be 2 or more successive periods are treated as a single period if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for all of them, considered as a single period (the business continuity test period). Apply the business continuity test to the *business the company carried on immediately before the end of the first of the periods (the test time).

Note 1: For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E.

Note 2: See section 165-225 for a special alternative to subsections (3) and (4) of this section.

165-50 Next, calculate the notional loss or notional taxable income for each period

(1) The company has a *notional loss for a period if the deductions attributed to the period under section 165-55 exceed the assessable income attributed to the period under section 165-60. The notional loss is the amount of the excess.

For a period during which the company was in partnership, the notional loss is worked out under section 165-75.

(2) On the other hand, if that assessable income exceeds those deductions, the company has a notional taxable income for the period, equal to the excess.

For a period during which the company was in partnership, the notional taxable income is worked out under section 165-75.

(3) If the company has a *notional loss for none of the periods in the income year, this Subdivision has no further application, and the company’s taxable income for the income year is calculated in the usual way.

The usual way of working out taxable income is set out in section 4-15.

165-55 How to attribute deductions to periods

The company’s deductions for the income year are attributed to periods in the income year as follows.

The following deductions are attributed to each period in proportion to the length of the period:

deductions for the decline in value of a depreciating asset;

See Division 40.

deductions for *exploration or prospecting, or mining capital expenditure, in connection with mining or quarrying;

See section 40-80 and Subdivisions 40-H and 40-I.

deductions for expenditure, deductions for which are spread over 2 or more income years, but not:

deductions for exploration or prospecting, or capital expenditure, in connection with mining or quarrying; or

See Subdivision 40-I.

full year deductions (see subsection (5));

deductions for expenditure of capital monies in connection with an Australian film.

See former section 124ZAFA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

All other deductions (except full year deductions) are attributed to periods as if each period were an income year.

*Full year deductions are not attributed to any of the periods. They are brought in at a later stage of the process of calculating the company’s taxable income for the income year.

(5) These are full year deductions:

deductions for bad debts under section 8-1 (about general deductions) or section 25-35 (about bad debts);

(b) deductions for losses on debt/equity swaps under section 63E of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

(c) deductions, so far as they are allowable under Division 8 (which is about deductions) because Subdivision H (Period of deductibility of certain advance expenditure) of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the company in relation to the income year;

deductions for payments of pensions, gratuities or retiring allowances under section 25-50;

deductions for gifts under Division 30;

deductions for *tax losses of earlier income years.

See Division 36.

(6) However, a deduction for the balance of capital expenditure is not a full year deduction if the deduction results from the disposal, loss, lapse, termination of use or destruction of the property.

165-60 How to attribute assessable income to periods

The company’s assessable income for the income year is attributed to periods in the income year as follows.

The following amounts are attributed to periods so far as they are reasonably attributable to those periods:

(a) amounts included in the company’s assessable income under section 97 (Beneficiary of a trust estate who is not under a legal disability) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

(b) amounts included in the company’s assessable income under section 98A (Non-resident beneficiaries assessable in respect of certain income) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(2A) However, so much of an amount included in the company’s assessable income under section 97 or 98A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as is a *capital gain that forms part of a *net capital gain is not attributed to a period.

The following items of assessable income are attributed to each period in proportion to the length of the period:

insurance recoveries for loss of *live stock or trees;

See section 385-130.

amounts included in assessable income as a result of elections relating to the forced disposal of live stock;

See Subdivision 385-E and section 385-160.

recoupment of mains electricity connection expenditure.

See items 1.16 and 2.5 in section 20-30, which lists deductions for which recoupments are assessable under Subdivision 20-A.

An amount included in the company’s assessable income under section 385-135 (Election to defer including profit on second wool clip) is attributed to the period when the wool would ordinarily have been shorn.

An amount included in the company’s assessable income that is a dividend under:

section 65 (Payments to associated persons); or

section 109 (Excessive payments to shareholders and associates);

of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is attributed to the period when the amount was paid or credited, whichever occurred first.

All other items of assessable income (except full year amounts) are attributed to periods as if each period were an income year.

A net capital gain is not attributed to a period.

Note: This is because Subdivision 165-CB provides for how the company must work out its net capital gain for the income year.

(7) Full year amounts are amounts referred to in paragraphs (2)(a) and (b), so far as they are not reasonably attributable to a period, but do not include any part of a *capital gain that forms part of a *net capital gain. Full year amounts are brought in at a later stage of the process of calculating the company’s taxable income for the income year.

165-65 How to calculate the company’s taxable income for the income year

(1) The company’s taxable income for the income year is calculated as follows.

Add up the *notional taxable incomes (if any) worked out under section 165-50 or 165-75.

Note: A notional loss for a period is not taken into account, but counts towards the company’s tax loss for the income year.

Add the full year amounts referred to in subsection 165-60(7) (if any) and any net capital gain of the company for the income year.

Subtract the company’s full year deductions of these kinds:

deductions for bad debts under section 8-1 (about general deductions) or section 25-35 (about bad debts);

(c) deductions, so far as they are allowable under Division 8 (which is about deductions) because Subdivision H (Period of deductibility of certain advance expenditure) of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the company in relation to the income year;

unless they exceed the total of the *notional taxable incomes and the full year amounts. (If they equal or exceed that total, the company does not have a taxable income for the income year.)

If an amount remains, subtract from it the company’s other full year deductions, in the order shown in subsection 165-55(5), unless they exceed the amount remaining. (If they equal or exceed that amount, the company does not have a taxable income for the income year.)

(6) If an amount remains, it is the company’s taxable income for the income year.

Working out the company’s tax loss

165-70 How to calculate the company’s tax loss for the income year

(1) The company’s tax loss for the income year is calculated as follows.

Total the *notional losses worked out under section 165-50 or 165-75.

Add to the total in subsection (2) the amount (if any) by which the company’s full year deductions of these kinds:

deductions for bad debts under section 8-1 (about general deductions) or section 25-35 (about bad debts);

(c) deductions, so far as they are allowable under Division 8 (which is about deductions) because Subdivision H (Period of deductibility of certain advance expenditure) of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the company in relation to the income year;

exceed the total of:

the *notional taxable incomes (if any); and

To work out the notional taxable income: see section 165-50.

the full year amounts referred to in section 165-60 (if any); and

any net capital gain of the company for the income year.

If the company *derived exempt income, subtract its net exempt income (worked out under section 36-20).

(5) Any amount remaining is the company’s tax loss for the income year, which is called a loss year.

Note: The meanings of tax loss and loss year are modified by section 36-55 for a corporate tax entity that has an amount of excess franking offsets.

To find out how much of the tax loss can be deducted in later income years: see Subdivision 165-A. To find out how to deduct it: see section 36-17.

Special rules that apply if the company is in partnership

165-75 How to calculate the company’s notional loss or notional taxable income for a period when the company was a partner

This section applies if at any time during a period the company was a partner in one or more partnerships.

(2) The company has a *notional loss for the period if the total (the loss total) of:

the deductions attributed to the period under section 165-55; and

the *company’s share of each *notional loss (if any) of a partnership for the period;

exceeds the total (the income total) of:

the assessable income attributed to the period under section 165-60; and

the *company’s share of each *notional net income (if any) of a partnership for the period.

The notional loss is the amount of the excess.

Note: A notional loss is taken into account in working out the company’s tax loss under section 165-70.

(3) On the other hand, if the income total exceeds the loss total, the company has a notional taxable income for the period, equal to the excess.

Note: A notional taxable income is taken into account in working out the company’s taxable income under section 165-65.

(4) If the company has a *notional taxable income for all periods in the income year, this Subdivision has no further application, and the company’s taxable income for the income year is calculated in the usual way.

Note: The usual way of working out taxable income is set out in section 4-15.

165-80 How to calculate the company’s share of a partnership’s notional loss or notional net income for a period if both entities have the same income year

This section applies if at any time during a period the company is a partner in a partnership that has an income year that starts and ends when the company’s income year starts and ends.

(2) The partnership’s notional loss or notional net income for the period is calculated in the same way as the *notional loss or *notional taxable income of a company.

(3) The company’s share is calculated by dividing:

• the company’s interest in the partnership’s net income or partnership loss of the income year;

by

• the amount of that net income or partnership loss;

and expressing the result as a percentage.

(4) However, if the partnership had neither a net income nor a partnership loss, the company’s share is a percentage that is fair and reasonable having regard to the extent of the company’s interest in the partnership.

165-85 How to calculate the company’s share of a partnership’s notional loss or notional net income for a period if the entities have different income years

This section applies if at any time during a period the company is a partner in a partnership that has an income year that starts and ends at a different time from when the company’s income year starts and ends.

(2) So much of the partnership’s net income or partnership loss of an income year as was *derived during the period is a notional net income or notional loss of the partnership for the period. (For the purposes of this subsection, the partnership’s net income or partnership loss is calculated without taking account of the partnership’s *full year deductions for that income year.)

Note: The partnership’s full year deductions are dealt with in section 165-90.

(3) The company’s share is calculated by dividing:

• the company’s interest in the partnership’s net income or partnership loss of that income year;

by

• the amount of that net income or partnership loss;

and expressing the result as a percentage.

165-90 Company’s full year deductions include a share of partnership’s full year deductions

This section applies if at any time during the income year the company is a partner in a partnership that has one or more full year deductions for the income year of the partnership that corresponds to the income year of the company.

The partnership’s full year deductions are treated as full year deductions of the company, but only to the extent of the *company’s share.

(3) If the partnership’s income year is the same as the company’s, the company’s share is calculated by dividing:

• the company’s interest in the partnership’s net income or partnership loss of the income year;

by

• the amount of that net income or partnership loss;

and expressing the result as a percentage.

(4) However, if the partnership had neither a net income nor a partnership loss, the company’s share is a percentage that is fair and reasonable having regard to the extent of the company’s interest in the partnership.

(5) If the partnership’s income year does not start and end at the same time as the company’s income year, the company’s share is a percentage that is fair and reasonable having regard to all relevant circumstances.

Subdivision 165-CA — Applying net capital losses of earlier income years

Guide to Subdivision 165-CA

165-93 What this Subdivision is about

In working out its net capital gain for an income year, a company cannot apply a net capital loss for an earlier income year unless:

it has the same owners and the same control from the start of the loss year to the end of the income year; or

it satisfies the business continuity test by carrying on the same business (including entering into no new kinds of transactions and conducting no new kinds of business), or by carrying on a similar business (on or after 1 July 2015).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

165-96 When a company cannot apply a net capital loss

Operative provisions

165-96 When a company cannot apply a net capital loss

In working out its net capital gain for the current year, a company cannot apply a net capital loss it has for an earlier income year if Subdivision 165-A would prevent it from deducting the loss for the current year if:

the loss were a *tax loss of the company for that earlier income year; and

section 165-20 (about deducting part of a tax loss) were disregarded.

Note 1: A company’s net capital gain for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5.

Note 2: Subdivision 165-A deals with the deductibility of a company’s tax loss for an earlier income year if there has been a change in the ownership or control of the company in the period from the start of the loss year to the end of the income year.

Note 3: Subdivision 165-F may affect the application of Subdivision 165-A.

(2) If subsection (1) prevents the company from applying the *net capital loss, it can apply the part of the loss that it made during a part of that earlier income year, but only if, assuming that part of that income year had been treated as the whole of it, the company would have been entitled to apply the net capital loss.

Subdivision 165-CB — Working out the net capital gain and the net capital loss for the income year of the change

Guide to Subdivision 165-CB

165-99 What this Subdivision is about

A company that has not had the same ownership and control during the income year, and has not satisfied the business continuity test, works out its net capital gain and net capital loss under this Subdivision.

Table of sections

When a company must work out its net capital gain and net capital loss under this Subdivision

165-102 On a change of ownership, or of control of voting power, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test

Working out the company’s net capital gain and net capital loss

165-105 First, divide the income year into periods

165-108 Next, calculate the notional net capital gain or notional net capital loss for each period

165-111 How to work out the company’s net capital gain

165-114 How to work out the company’s net capital loss

When a company must work out its net capital gain and net capital loss under this Subdivision

165-102 On a change of ownership, or of control of voting power, unless the company satisfies the business continuity test

A company must calculate its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year under this Subdivision if:

it must calculate its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B; or

Note: Subdivision 165-F may affect the application of Subdivision 165-B.

it would be required to calculate them under that Subdivision but for subsection 165-50(3) (about cases where that Subdivision would make no difference to the taxable income).

Note: In the case of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company, Subdivision 166-B modifies how this Subdivision applies, unless the company chooses otherwise.

Working out the company’s net capital gain and net capital loss

165-105 First, divide the income year into periods

Divide the income year into periods according to section 165-45 (which is about working out the company’s taxable income under Subdivision 165-B).

165-108 Next, calculate the notional net capital gain or notional net capital loss for each period

(1) The company has a notional net capital gain for a period if the total of the *capital gains it made during the period exceeds the total of the *capital losses it made during the period. The notional net capital gain is the amount of the excess.

(2) On the other hand, if the total of those losses exceeds the total of those gains, the company has a notional net capital loss for the period, equal to the excess.

If the company has a notional net capital loss for none of the periods in the income year, this Subdivision has no further application, and the company’s net capital gain for the income year is calculated in the usual way.

The usual way of working out the net capital gain is set out in section 102-5.

Trust’s capital gain attributed to company beneficiary

(4) If some or all (the attributable amount) of an amount included in the company’s assessable income for the income year under:

(a) section 97 (Beneficiary of a trust estate who is not under a legal disability) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

section 98A (Non-resident beneficiaries assessable in respect of certain income) of that Act;

is attributable to a *capital gain that the trust made at a particular time during the period, this section applies to the attributable amount as if it were a *capital gain made by the company at that time.

165-111 How to work out the company’s net capital gain

The company’s net capital gain for the income year is worked out in this way:

Working out the company’s net capital gain

Step 1. Add up the *notional net capital gains (if any) worked out under section 165-108.

Step 2. Add to the Step 1 amount so much of each amount included in the company’s assessable income for the income year under:

Note: A notional net capital loss for a period is not taken into account, but counts towards the company’s net capital loss for the income year.

(a) section 97 (Beneficiary of a trust estate who is not under a legal disability) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

(b) section 98A (Non-resident beneficiaries assessable in respect of certain income) of that Act;

as is attributable to a *capital gain that the trust made outside the income year.

Step 3. If the Step 2 amount is more than zero, reduce it by applying any unapplied *net capital losses from previous income years. (If this reduces it to zero, the company has no net capital gain for the income year.)

Step 4. If the Step 3 amount is more than zero, it is the company’s net capital gain.

Note: This is relevant only if the trust has an income year that starts and ends at a different time from when the company’s income year starts and ends.

Note: To apply net capital losses: see section 102-15.

Note : For exceptions and modifications to these rules: see section 102-30.

165-114 How to work out the company’s net capital loss

The company’s net capital loss for the income year is worked out in this way:

Working out the company’s net capital loss

Step 1. Add up the *notional net capital losses (if any) worked out under section 165-108.

Step 2. If the Step 1 amount is more than zero, it is the company’s net capital loss.

Note: For exceptions and modifications to these rules: see section 102-30.

Subdivision 165-CC — Change of ownership or control of company that has an unrealised net loss

Guide to Subdivision 165-CC

165-115 What this Subdivision is about

If a change occurs in the ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss, the company cannot, to the extent of the unrealised net loss, have capital losses taken into account, or deduct revenue losses, in respect of CGT events that happen to CGT assets that it owned at the time of the change, unless it satisfies the business continuity test.

165-115AA Special rules to save compliance costs

A company is exempt from these rules if, at the time of the change in ownership or control, it (together with certain related entities) has a net asset value of not more than $6,000,000 under the test in section 152-15 (for small business CGT relief).

In working out whether it has an unrealised net loss, a company can choose to work out the market value of each of its assets individually, or of all of its assets together.

If a company works out the market value of each of its assets individually, it may choose to exclude every asset that it acquired for less than $10,000, in which case:

unrealised losses and gains on the excluded assets will not be taken into account in calculating the company’s unrealised net loss; and

losses on the excluded assets will be allowed without the company being subject to the business continuity test.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

165-115A Application of Subdivision

165-115B What happens when the company makes a capital loss or becomes entitled to a deduction in respect of a CGT asset after a changeover time

165-115BA What happens when a CGT event happens after a changeover time to a CGT asset of the company that is trading stock

165-115BB Order of application of assets: residual unrealised net loss

165-115C Changeover time—change in ownership of company

165-115D Changeover time—change in control of company

165-115E What is an unrealised net loss

165-115F Notional gains and losses

Operative provisions

165-115A Application of Subdivision

Application

This Subdivision applies to a company if:

a changeover time has occurred or occurs in relation to the company after the commencement time; and

at the changeover time the company had an unrealised net loss (see section 165-115E); and

either of the following applies:

the company makes a *capital loss, or apart from this Subdivision would be entitled to a deduction, in respect of a CGT event that happens to a CGT asset referred to in subsection (1A);

the company makes a trading stock loss in respect of a CGT asset referred to in subsection (1A) that is an item of trading stock; and

the company would not, at the changeover time, satisfy the maximum net asset value test under section 152-15.

CGT assets in respect of which Subdivision applies

The *CGT assets for the purposes of paragraph (1)(c) are:

any CGT asset that the company owned at the changeover time; and

any CGT asset that the company did not own at the changeover time but had owned at a previous time, where:

a deferral event referred to in subsection 170-255(1) happened before the changeover time; and

the deferral event involved the company as the originating company referred to in that subsection; and

the deferral event would have resulted in the company making a *capital loss, or becoming entitled to a deduction, in respect of the CGT asset except for section 170-270; and

the company is not taken to have made a capital loss at or before the changeover time, or to have become entitled to a deduction at that time, under section 170-275 in respect of the asset.

Company may choose to disregard CGT assets acquired for less than $10,000

A company may choose, for the purposes of the application of this Subdivision to it in respect of a particular changeover time, that every CGT asset that has been acquired by it for less than $10,000 is to be disregarded.

However, the choice does not affect the application of the *global method of working out whether the company has an unrealised net loss (see subsection 165-115E(2)).

Time for making choice

A choice under subsection (1B) must be made on or before:

the day on which the company lodges its income tax return for the income year in which the relevant changeover time occurred; or

such later day as the Commissioner allows.

Trading stock loss

(1D) A company is taken to have made a trading stock loss in respect of an asset that is an item of *trading stock if, and only if:

one of the following applies:

the company *disposes of the item;

the item stops being trading stock (within the meaning of section 70-80);

the item is revalued under Division 70; and

if subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii) applies—the item’s *market value at the time when it is disposed of or stops being trading stock is less than:

in respect of an item that has been valued under Division 70—its latest value under the Division; or

otherwise—its cost at that time; and

if subparagraph (a)(iii) applies—the item’s value under the revaluation is less than:

in respect of an item that has previously been valued under Division 70—its latest value under that Division before the revaluation; or

otherwise—its cost at the time of the revaluation.

The difference worked out under paragraph (b) or (c), as the case may be, constitutes the amount of the trading stock loss.

Commencement time

(2) For the purposes of this Subdivision, the commencement time of a company is:

if the company was in existence at 1 pm (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 11 November 1999—that time; or

if the company came into existence after that time—the time when it came into existence.

Reference time

(2A) For the purposes of the application of this Subdivision to a company in relation to a particular time (the test time), the reference time is:

if no changeover time occurred in respect of the company before the test time—the commencement time; or

otherwise—the time immediately after the last changeover time that occurred in respect of the company before the test time.

Asset owned at more than one changeover time

If:

2 or more changeover times have occurred or occur in relation to a company; and

the company owned a particular asset at more than one of those changeover times;

this Subdivision applies to the company in respect of that asset only in relation to the later or latest of those changeover times.

Note: For changeover time see sections 165-115C and 165-115D.

165-115B What happens when the company makes a capital loss or becomes entitled to a deduction in respect of a CGT asset after a changeover time

Where capital loss or deduction is equal to or less than residual unrealised net loss

If the *capital loss or deduction referred to in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(i) is equal to or less than the company’s residual unrealised net loss at the time of the occurrence of the event that resulted in the capital loss or entitled the company to the deduction:

the capital loss is taken to have been a net capital loss; or

the deduction is taken to have been a *tax loss;

of the company for the income year immediately before the income year in which the changeover time occurred.

Where capital loss or deduction is greater than residual unrealised net loss

If the *capital loss or deduction referred to in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(i) is greater than the company’s residual unrealised net loss at the time of the occurrence of the event that resulted in the capital loss or entitled the company to the deduction:

the part of the capital loss that is equal to the residual unrealised net loss is taken to have been a net capital loss; or

the part of the deduction that is equal to the residual unrealised net loss is taken to have been a *tax loss;

of the company for the income year immediately before the income year in which the changeover time occurred.

Company does not meet certain conditions in relation to net capital loss or tax loss

(3) The company is taken not to have met, at the changeover time, the conditions in subsections 165-12(2), (3) and (4) in relation to the *net capital loss or the *tax loss. The changeover time is the test time for applying section 165-13 to the company.

Need to meet business continuity test

The effect of subsection (3) is that the company cannot apply the net capital loss (see section 165-10 as it applies because of section 165-96), or deduct the *tax loss (see section 165-10), unless it meets the condition in section 165-13 (the business continuity test).

Consequences for net capital loss

The net capital loss cannot be applied against *capital gains made in an income year before the income year in which the company made the capital loss referred to in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(i).

Consequences for tax loss

The *tax loss cannot be deducted from assessable income *derived in an income year before the income year in which the company would have been entitled to the deduction referred to in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(i).

Note: For changeover time see sections 165-115C and 165-115D.

165-115BA What happens when a CGT event happens after a changeover time to a CGT asset of the company that is trading stock

Application

This section applies to the company if, after the changeover time, the company makes a trading stock loss in respect of an item of trading stock as mentioned in subparagraph 165-115A(1)(c)(ii).

Where trading stock loss is equal to or less than residual unrealised net loss

If the trading stock loss is equal to or less than the company’s residual unrealised net loss at the time of the occurrence of the trading stock loss, the amount of the trading stock loss is to be included in the company’s assessable income.

Where trading stock loss is greater than unrealised net loss

If the trading stock loss is greater than the company’s residual unrealised net loss at the time of the occurrence of the trading stock loss, the part of the trading stock loss that is equal to the residual unrealised net loss is to be included in the company’s assessable income.

No increase in assessable income if company satisfies the business continuity test

Neither subsection (2) nor (3) applies to the company if the company meets the condition in section 165-13 (the business continuity test).

Assumptions for purposes of business continuity test

In determining whether the company meets the condition in section 165-13, assume:

that the trading stock loss (if subsection (2) applies) or the part of the trading stock loss (if subsection (3) applies) is a net capital loss of the company for the income year immediately before the income year in which the changeover time occurred; and

that the company failed, at the changeover time, to meet the condition in subsections 165-12(2), (3) and (4) in relation to the net capital loss referred to in paragraph (a); and

(c) that the changeover time is the test time; and

that the business continuity test period is the income year in which the loss occurred.

165-115BB Order of application of assets: residual unrealised net loss

Order in which assets are to be applied

In applying subsection 165-115B(2) or 165-115BA(3) in respect of assets that the company owned at the changeover time:

the company’s *capital losses are taken to have been made, the company is taken to have become entitled to deductions and the company is taken to have made trading stock losses in the order in which the events that resulted in the capital losses, deductions or trading stock losses occurred; and

if 2 or more such events occurred at the same time, they are taken to have occurred in such order as the company determines.

Residual unrealised net loss

(2) The company’s residual unrealised net loss, at the time of an event (the relevant event) that resulted in the company making a *capital loss, becoming entitled to a deduction or making a *trading stock loss, in respect of an asset, is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

previous capital losses, deductions or trading stock losses means the total of the following:

capital losses that the company made, deductions to which the company became entitled, or trading stock losses that the company made, as a result of events earlier than the relevant event in respect of assets that the company owned at the *changeover time;

each reduction that section 715-105 (as applying to the company as the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group) makes in respect of such an asset because an entity ceased before the time of the relevant event to be a *subsidiary member of the group (but counting only the greater or greatest such reduction if 2 or more are made for the same asset);

or nil if there are none.

unrealised net loss means the company’s unrealised net loss at the last changeover time that occurred before the relevant event.

Note: For changeover time see sections 165-115C and 165-115D.

165-115C Changeover time—change in ownership of company

(1) A time (the test time) is a changeover time in respect of a company if:

persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at the reference time do not have more than 50% of that voting power immediately after the test time; or

persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends at the reference time do not have rights to more than 50% of those dividends immediately after the test time; or

persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions at the reference time do not have rights to more than 50% of those distributions immediately after the test time.

Note 1: See section 165-150 to work out who had more than 50% of the voting power in the company.

Note 2: See section 165-155 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends.

Note 3: See section 165-160 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions.

Note 4: For reference time see subsection 165-115A(2A).

Note 5: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

To work out whether paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c) applied at a particular time, apply the primary test unless subsection (3) requires the alternative test to be applied.

Note: For the primary test see subsections 165-150(1), 165-155(1) and 165-160(1).

Apply the alternative test if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares or interests in shares in the company at any time during the period from the reference time to the *test time.

Note: For the alternative test see subsections 165-150(2), 165-155(2) and 165-160(2).

A *test time that would, apart from this subsection, be a changeover time in respect of the company because of the application of subsection (1) is taken not to be a changeover time if:

that subsection would not have applied except for the operation of section 165-165; and

the company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of the company’s unrealised net loss at the test time has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the company during the period from the reference time to the test time.

If the company is:

a non-profit company; or

a mutual affiliate company; or

a mutual insurance company;

during the whole of the period from the reference time to the *test time, the test time is taken not to be a *changeover time in respect of the company because of the application of paragraphs (1)(b) and (c).

The happening of any CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the company that results in the time of the happening of the event being a changeover time in respect of the company is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (4)(b), to have occurred during the period referred to in that paragraph.

165-115D Changeover time—change in control of company

(1) A time (the test time) is also a changeover time in respect of a company if, at the test time:

a person or persons who did not control, and were not able to control, the voting power in the company at the reference time began to control, or became able to control, that voting power immediately after the test time; and

that person or those persons so began, or became able, to control that voting power for the purpose of:

getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else;

or for purposes including that purpose.

Note 1: A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

In this section:

control of the voting power in a company means control of that voting power either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities.

165-115E What is an unrealised net loss

(1) The question whether a company has an unrealised net loss at a particular time (the relevant time) is worked out in this way (the individual asset method), unless the company chooses to work it out using the *global method (set out in subsection (2)).

Method statement

Step 1. Work out under section 165-115F in respect of each CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant time any notional capital gain or notional revenue gain or any notional capital loss or notional revenue loss that the company has at that time in respect of the asset.

The sum of the notional capital gains is the company’s unrealised capital gain at the relevant time.

The sum of the notional capital losses is the company’s unrealised capital loss at the relevant time.

The sum of the notional revenue gains is the company’s unrealised revenue gain at the relevant time.

The sum of the notional revenue losses is the company’s unrealised revenue loss at the relevant time.

Step 2. Add up the unrealised capital gain and the unrealised revenue gain at the relevant time. The total is the unrealised gross gain at that time.

Step 3. Add up the unrealised capital loss and the unrealised revenue loss at the relevant time. The total is the unrealised gross loss at that time.

Step 4. If the unrealised gross loss at the relevant time exceeds the unrealised gross gain at that time, the excess is the company’s preliminary unrealised net loss at that time.

Step 5. Add up the company’s preliminary unrealised net loss and any *capital loss, deduction or share of a deduction disregarded under section 170-270 in relation to an asset referred to in paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b). The total is the company’s unrealised net loss at the relevant time.

(2) The global method of working out whether the company has an unrealised net loss at the relevant time is as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the total *market value of all *CGT assets that the company owned at the relevant time (including those it *acquired for less than $10,000), using a valuation method that would generally be regarded as appropriate in the circumstances.

Step 2. Work out the total of the *cost bases of those *CGT assets at the relevant time.

Step 3. If the step 2 amount exceeds the step 1 amount, the excess is the company’s preliminary unrealised net loss at the relevant time.

Step 4. Add up the company’s preliminary unrealised net loss and any *capital loss, deduction or share of a deduction disregarded under section 170-270 in relation to an asset referred to in paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b). The total is the company’s unrealised net loss at the relevant time.

Note: If a CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant time was also trading stock or a revenue asset at that time, see subsection (3) of this section.

If:

a CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant time was also trading stock or a revenue asset at that time; and

(b) the asset’s *cost base at the relevant time is less than the amount that would be compared under section 165-115F with the asset’s *market value in working out a notional revenue gain or notional revenue loss that the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset;

then, for the purposes of step 2 of the method statement in subsection (2) of this section, the amount that would be so compared is to be taken into account instead of that cost base.

A choice to use the *global method must be made on or before:

the day on which the company lodges its income tax return for the income year in which the relevant time occurred; or

such later day as the Commissioner allows.

165-115F Notional gains and losses

(1) This section applies for the purpose of calculating whether a company has at a particular time (the relevant time) a notional capital gain, a notional capital loss, a notional revenue gain or a notional revenue loss in respect of a *CGT asset that it owned at that time.

The calculation is to be made on the assumption that the company disposed of the asset at its *market value at the relevant time.

In relation to an asset other than an item of trading stock:

(a) if the company would make a *capital gain in respect of the disposal of the asset—the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset a notional capital gain equal to the amount of the capital gain; or

(b) if an amount (other than a capital gain) would be included in the company’s assessable income in respect of the disposal of the asset—the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset a notional revenue gain equal to the amount so included; or

(c) if the company would make a *capital loss in respect of the disposal of the asset—the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset a notional capital loss equal to the amount of the capital loss; or

(d) if the company would be entitled to a deduction in respect of the disposal of the asset—the company has at the relevant time in respect of the asset a notional revenue loss equal to the amount of the deduction.

In relation to an asset that is an item of trading stock:

if the item’s *market value at the relevant time exceeds:

in respect of an item that has been valued under Division 70—the item’s latest valuation under that Division; or

otherwise—the *cost of the item at the relevant time;

the company has at the relevant time in respect of the article a notional revenue gain equal to the excess; or

if the item’s market value at the relevant time is less than:

in respect of an item that has been valued under Division 70—the item’s latest valuation under that Division; or

otherwise—the *cost of the item at the relevant time;

the company has at the relevant time in respect of the article a notional revenue loss equal to the difference.

A company may choose that this section is to apply to the company at the relevant time in respect of an asset to which subsection (6) applied at that time as if references to the *market value of the asset were references to its *written down value.

This subsection applies to an asset at the relevant time if:

the asset is a depreciating asset (not a building or structure) for whose decline in value the company has deducted or can deduct an amount; and

the expenditure incurred by the company to *acquire the asset was less than $1,000,000 (the expenditure can include the giving of property: see section 103-5); and

it would be reasonable for the company to conclude that the *market value of the asset at that time was not less than 80% of its *written down value at that time.

Subdivision 165-CD — Reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company

Guide to Subdivision 165-CD

165-115GA What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision prevents multiple recognition of a company’s losses when significant equity and debt interests that entities (not individuals) have in the company are realised.

165-115GB When adjustments must be made

The operation of this Subdivision is triggered at an alteration time, which is when:

an alteration takes place in the ownership or control of the company; or

a liquidator or administrator of the company declares that shares or financial instruments are worthless (CGT event G3).

An alteration time is the trigger for making reductions and other adjustments to the reduced cost base of significant equity and debt interests in the company that are owned by an entity (not an individual) that, alone or with its associates, has a controlling stake in the company and either:

has a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest of at least 10% in the company; or

is owed a debt of at least $10,000 by the company or by another entity that has a significant equity or debt interest in the company.

Deductions that relate to such interests held as trading stock or otherwise on revenue account are also reduced.

Adjustments may also be made when such an entity’s interests in the company are partly realised within 12 months before an alteration time or if, under an arrangement, such interests are realised partly within that period or at the alteration time and partly at an earlier time.

However, entities in which there are no interests in respect of which the company’s losses have been, or can be, duplicated are not affected by this Subdivision.

165-115GC How adjustments are calculated

Adjustments are based on the overall loss of the company. This comprises its realised losses and unrealised losses on CGT assets.

Special rules, directed at saving compliance costs, apply to determine whether unrealised losses have to be counted at an alteration time and, if so, how to work them out.

The company may not have to calculate its unrealised losses if the alteration time is not also a changeover time for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss), and the company has no realised losses.

The company does not have to count unrealised losses at an alteration time if (together with certain related entities) it has a net asset value of not more than $6,000,000 under the test in section 152-15 (for small business CGT relief).

In working out its unrealised losses on CGT assets, the company can choose to work out the *market value of each of its assets individually, or of all of its assets together.

If the company works out the *market value of each of its assets individually, unrealised losses on assets acquired for less than $10,000 do not have to be calculated at any time.

Amounts (whether realised or unrealised) counted at a previous alteration time are not counted again at a later alteration time. (This does not apply to unrealised losses worked out by reference to the *market value of all the company’s assets together.)

(8) However, if unrealised amounts are not counted at a previous alteration time (for example, because of the $10,000 exclusion, or because you satisfy the maximum net asset value test in section 152-15) and are not required to be taken into account in adjustments made at that time, they may be counted at a later time as part of a realised loss.

A formula is provided for making adjustments in straightforward cases if applying the formula gives a reasonable result having regard to the object of the Subdivision. Otherwise, reasonable adjustments must be made having regard to a number of stated factors.

To help entities to make the adjustments, any entity that, in its own right, has a controlling stake in the company is required to provide a written notice to its associates setting out relevant information. In limited circumstances, the company itself may have to provide a written notice to entities that, to its knowledge, have a significant equity or debt interest in it.

165-115H How this Subdivision applies

This Subdivision provides for certain taxation consequences for an entity (not an individual) that had a significant equity or debt interest in a loss company immediately before an alteration time occurred in respect of the company.

The following flowchart explains how to work out whether this Subdivision applies to an entity.

If this Subdivision applies to an entity, reductions are made to:

the reduced cost base of the entity’s equity or debt (see subsection 165-115ZA(3)); or

any deduction to which the entity is entitled in respect of the disposal of the equity or debt (see subsection 165-115ZA(4)); or

deductions in respect of, and the cost of, any of the equity or debt that is trading stock (see subsection 165-115ZA(5)).

Example: The following is an example of how this Subdivision operates:

Facts: Alpha Co acquired 80% of the shares in Beta Co on 5 May 1998 for $1,000.

Gamma Co owns 20% of the shares in Beta Co.

On 6 February 2000, Alpha Co disposed of its shares for $600.

At the beginning of the 1999-2000 income year, Beta Co had an unapplied net capital loss of $500 from the 1998-99 income year. This loss was fully reflected in the market value of shares in Beta Co.

Alpha Co and Gamma Co are not associated in any way.

Result:

Step 1: An alteration time occurred in respect of Beta Co as a result of the change in ownership that occurred when Alpha Co sold its shares.

Step 2: Beta Co was a loss company at the alteration time because it had an unapplied net capital loss from an earlier income year.

Step 3: Alpha Co had a relevant equity interest in Beta Co immediately before the alteration time because it had a controlling stake and significant interest (80% equity interest). Gamma Co did not have a relevant equity interest in Beta Co because it did not have a controlling stake.

Step 4: Because Alpha Co had a relevant equity interest in Beta Co, the reduced cost bases of its shares in Beta Co are reduced by 80% of Beta Co’s net capital loss:

Alpha Co does not make a capital gain on the disposal of its shares in Beta Co because the capital proceeds ($600) are less than the cost bases ($1,000).

Nor did Alpha Co make a capital loss on the disposal of its shares in Beta Co because the capital proceeds ($600) are not less than the reduced cost bases as further reduced by this Subdivision ($600).

The net capital loss in Beta Co is not duplicated on the sale of Alpha Co’s shares in Beta Co.

Step 5. There are no notice requirements in this simple case. If Gamma Co and Alpha Co were associates (so that Gamma Co had a relevant equity interest in Beta Co), Alpha Co would need to provide the following information to Gamma Co:

the alteration time: 6 February 2000;

Beta Co’s overall loss at the alteration time: $500;

details of the overall loss: a net capital loss of $500 for the 1998-99 income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

165-115J Object of Subdivision

165-115K Application and interpretation

165-115L Alteration time—alteration in ownership of company

165-115M Alteration time—alteration in control of company

165-115N Alteration time—declaration by liquidator or administrator

165-115P Notional alteration time—disposal of interests in company within 12 months before alteration time

165-115Q Notional alteration time—disposal of interests in company earlier than 12 months before alteration time

165-115R When company is a loss company at first or only alteration time in income year

165-115S When company is a loss company at second or later alteration time in income year

165-115T Reduction of certain amounts included in company’s overall loss at alteration time

165-115U Adjusted unrealised loss

165-115V Notional losses

165-115W Calculation of trading stock decrease

165-115X Relevant equity interest

165-115Y Relevant debt interest

165-115Z What constitutes a controlling stake in a company

165-115ZA Reductions and other consequences if entity has relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in loss company immediately before alteration time

165-115ZB Adjustment amounts for the purposes of section 165-115ZA

165-115ZC Notices to be given

165-115ZD Adjustment (or further adjustment) for interest realised at a loss after global method has been used

Operative provisions

165-115J Object of Subdivision

The main object of this Subdivision is to make appropriate adjustments (under section 165-115ZA) to the tax values of significant equity and debt interests held directly or indirectly by entities other than individuals in a *loss company whose ownership or control alters. The purpose of the adjustments is to prevent the duplication of the company’s realised and unrealised losses when any of those interests are *disposed of or otherwise realised. This happens because the company’s losses are reflected in the values of the interests.

165-115K Application and interpretation

Application

This Subdivision applies if:

an alteration time occurs in respect of a company; and

the company is a *loss company at the alteration time; and

one or more entities had relevant equity interests or relevant debt interests in the company immediately before the alteration time.

Note 1: For alteration time, see sections 165-115L, 165-115M, 165-115N, 165-115P and 165-115Q.

Note 2: For relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests, see sections 165-115X and 165-115Y.

Alteration time before commencement time to be disregarded

(2) An alteration time does not include a time before the commencement time.

Commencement time

(3) The commencement time for a company is:

if the company was in existence at 1 pm (by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory) on 11 November 1999—that time; or

if the company came into existence after that time—the time when it came into existence.

Certain alteration times to be disregarded

If:

(a) a time (the test time) would, apart from this subsection, be an alteration time in relation to a company; and

the company does not have any losses of the kinds referred to in paragraphs 165-115R(3)(a), (b), (c) and (d) and 165-115S(3)(a) and (b); and

the test time is not a changeover time in relation to the company under Subdivision 165-CC; and

if the test time were such a changeover time, it would be reasonable for the company to conclude that it would not have an unrealised net loss at that time under section 165-115E;

the test time is taken not to be an alteration time in relation to the company.

Application to CGT events other than disposals

This Subdivision applies to a CGT event (other than a *disposal) happening in relation to a CGT asset (for example, an interest in a company that is constituted by an equity or debt):

in the same way as it applies to a disposal of a CGT asset; and

as if the asset had been disposed of at the time when the CGT event happens.

165-115L Alteration time—alteration in ownership of company

(1) A time (the test time) is an alteration time in respect of a company if:

persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at the reference time do not have more than 50% of that voting power immediately after the test time; or

persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends at the reference time do not have rights to more than 50% of those dividends immediately after the test time; or

persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions at the reference time do not have rights to more than 50% of those distributions immediately after the test time.

Note 1: See section 165-150 to work out who had more than 50% of the voting power in the company.

Note 2: See section 165-155 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends.

Note 3: See section 165-160 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions.

Note 4: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

(2) The reference time is:

if no alteration time occurred in respect of the company before the *test time—the commencement time; or

otherwise—the time immediately after the last alteration time.

To work out whether paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c) applied at a particular time, apply the primary test unless subsection (4) requires the alternative test to be applied.

Note: For the primary test see subsections 165-150(1), 165-155(1) and 165-160(1).

Apply the alternative test if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares or interests in shares in the company at any time during the period from the reference time to the *test time.

Note: For the alternative test see subsections 165-150(2), 165-155(2) and 165-160(2).

If the company is:

a non-profit company; or

a mutual affiliate company; or

a mutual insurance company;

during the whole of the period from the reference time to the *test time, the test time is taken not to be an *alteration time in respect of the company because of the application of paragraphs (1)(b) and (c).

165-115M Alteration time—alteration in control of company

(1) A time (the test time) is also an alteration time in respect of a company if, at the test time:

a person or persons who did not control, and were not able to control, the voting power in the company at the reference time began to control, or became able to control, that voting power immediately after the test time; and

that person or those persons so began, or became able, to control that voting power for the purpose of:

getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else;

or for purposes including that purpose.

Note 1: A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

(2) The reference time is:

if no alteration time occurred in respect of the company before the *test time—the commencement time; or

otherwise—the time immediately after the last alteration time.

In this section:

control of the voting power in a company means control of that voting power either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities.

165-115N Alteration time—declaration by liquidator or administrator

If a liquidator or administrator makes a declaration referred to in section 104-145 in relation to a company, the time of the declaration is also an alteration time in respect of the company.

165-115P Notional alteration time—disposal of interests in company within 12 months before alteration time

This section applies if:

an alteration time occurs in respect of a *loss company; and

(b) an entity *disposed of an interest in the company (an equity) or a debt (a debt) at a time (the disposal time) within 12 months before the alteration time but not earlier than the commencement time; and

immediately before the disposal time, the entity had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company that included the equity or debt, or would have had such an interest if any previous disposals of interests or debts by the entity had not occurred; and

immediately before the alteration time, the entity had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company, or would have had such an interest if any previous disposals of interests or debts by the entity had not occurred.

The references in paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) to previous *disposals of interests or debts by the entity are references to:

previous disposals within the period referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and

previous disposals before that period if those previous disposals and any one or more of the following:

the disposal of the equity or debt;

a disposal referred to in paragraph (a);

a disposal at the alteration time;

occurred as part of an arrangement.

(3) The time immediately before the *disposal of the equity or debt is taken to have been an alteration time (a notional alteration time) in respect of the company.

The entity:

is taken to have had, immediately before the notional alteration time, a relevant equity interest in the company constituted by the equity or a relevant debt interest in the company constituted by the debt, as the case may be; and

is taken not to have had, immediately before the notional alteration time, any other relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the company.

No entity (other than the entity referred to in paragraph (1)(b)) is taken to have had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company immediately before the notional alteration time.

In applying this Subdivision in relation to the company in respect of a time after a notional alteration time, the notional alteration time is taken not to have occurred.

Note: For relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests, see sections 165-115X and 165-115Y.

165-115Q Notional alteration time—disposal of interests in company earlier than 12 months before alteration time

This section applies if:

an alteration time occurs in respect of a *loss company; and

(b) an entity that *disposed of an interest in the company (the later equity) or a debt (the later debt) at, or within 12 months before, the alteration time also disposed of an interest in the company (the earlier equity) or a debt (the earlier debt) at a time (the earlier disposal time) earlier than 12 months before the alteration time but not earlier than the commencement time; and

the disposal of the later equity or later debt and the disposal of the earlier equity or earlier debt occurred as part of an arrangement; and

immediately before the earlier disposal time, the entity had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company that included the earlier equity or earlier debt, or would have had such an interest if any previous disposals of interests or debts by the entity had not occurred; and

immediately before the alteration time, the entity had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company, or would have had such an interest if any previous disposals of interests or debts by the entity had not occurred.

The references in paragraphs (1)(d) and (e) to previous *disposals of interests or debts by the entity are references to:

previous disposals within the period referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and

previous disposals before that period if those previous disposals and any one or more of the following:

the disposal of the equity or debt;

a disposal referred to in paragraph (a);

a disposal at the alteration time;

occurred as part of an arrangement.

(3) The time immediately before the *disposal of the earlier equity or earlier debt is taken to have been an alteration time (a notional alteration time) in respect of the company.

The entity:

is taken to have had, immediately before the notional alteration time, a relevant equity interest in the company constituted by the earlier equity or a relevant debt interest in the company constituted by the earlier debt, as the case may be; and

is taken not to have had, immediately before the notional alteration time, any other relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the company.

No entity (other than the entity referred to in paragraph (1)(b)) is taken to have had a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the company immediately before the notional alteration time.

In applying this Subdivision in relation to the company in respect of a time after a notional alteration time, the notional alteration time is taken not to have occurred.

Note: For relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests, see sections 165-115X and 165-115Y.

165-115R When company is a loss company at first or only alteration time in income year

Application

(1) The question whether a company is a loss company at the first or only alteration time in a particular income year is to be worked out in this way.

Assumed income year

Assume that the period that started at the beginning of the income year and ended at the alteration time is an income year and apply paragraphs (3)(a), (b), (c) and (d) on that assumption.

What is a loss company

(3) The company is a loss company at the alteration time if:

at the beginning of the income year it had a *tax loss or tax losses for an earlier income year or earlier income years; or

at the beginning of the income year it had a net capital loss or net capital losses for an earlier income year or earlier income years; or

it has a tax loss for the income year, calculated as if the income year were a period for the purposes of Subdivision 165-B; or

it has a net capital loss for the income year, calculated as if the income year were a period for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CB; or

it has an adjusted unrealised loss at the alteration time.

Note: For adjusted unrealised loss, see section 165-115U.

How losses are to be calculated

In applying subsection (3):

a *tax loss or net capital loss that was taken into account in working out under this section whether the company was a *loss company at an alteration time in a previous income year is to be disregarded; and

Subdivision 170-D is to be disregarded.

Overall loss

The sum of:

the amount or amounts of any *tax loss or tax losses referred to in paragraph (3)(a); and

the amount or amounts of any net capital loss or net capital losses referred to in paragraph (3)(b); and

the amount of any tax loss referred to in paragraph (3)(c); and

the amount of any net capital loss referred to in paragraph (3)(d); and

the amount of any adjusted unrealised loss referred to in paragraph (3)(e);

is the *loss company’s overall loss at the alteration time.

Certain losses to be disregarded

Note: The loss company’s overall loss is relevant for the purposes of subsections 165-115ZB(3) and (6).

A reference in a paragraph of subsection (3) and in the corresponding paragraph of subsection (5) to a particular loss is a reference only to a loss to the extent to which it represents an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the company.

Note: Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.

Subsection (6) does not apply to paragraphs (3)(e) and (5)(e) if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at the alteration time.

Amounts of losses may be reduced

The amounts referred to in paragraphs (5)(a) to (d) may be reduced under section 165-115T.

165-115S When company is a loss company at second or later alteration time in income year

Application

(1) The question whether a company is a loss company at an alteration time (the current alteration time) that is the second or a later alteration time in the same income year is to be worked out in this way.

Assumed income year

Assume that the period that started immediately after the last alteration time and ended at the current alteration time is an income year and apply paragraphs (3)(a) and (b) on that assumption.

What is a loss company

(3) The company is a loss company at the current alteration time if:

it has a *tax loss for the income year, calculated as if the income year were a period for the purposes of Subdivision 165-B; or

it has a net capital loss for the income year, calculated as if the income year were a period for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CB; or

it has an adjusted unrealised loss at the current alteration time.

Note: For adjusted unrealised loss, see section 165-115U.

How losses are to be calculated

In applying subsection (3), Subdivision 170-D is to be disregarded.

Overall loss

The sum of:

the amount of any *tax loss referred to in paragraph (3)(a); and

the amount of any net capital loss referred to in paragraph (3)(b); and

the amount of any adjusted unrealised loss referred to in paragraph (3)(c);

is the *loss company’s overall loss at the current alteration time.

Certain losses to be disregarded

Note: The loss company’s overall loss is relevant for the purposes of subsections 165-115ZB(3) and (6).

A reference in a paragraph of subsection (3) and in the corresponding paragraph of subsection (5) to a particular loss is a reference only to a loss to the extent to which it represents an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the company.

Note: Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.

Subsection (6) does not apply to paragraphs (3)(c) and (5)(c) if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at the current alteration time.

Amounts of losses may be reduced

The amounts referred to in paragraphs (5)(a) and (b) may be reduced under section 165-115T.

165-115T Reduction of certain amounts included in company’s overall loss at alteration time

(1) In working out under section 165-115R or 165-115S whether a company was a *loss company at an alteration time (the current alteration time), if a loss (the realised loss) referred to in paragraph 165-115R(3)(a), (b), (c) or (d) or 165-115S(3)(a) or (b) that the company had at the current alteration time reflected an amount of a notional revenue loss, a trading stock decrease or a notional capital loss included in an adjusted unrealised loss, that the company had at a previous alteration time, the realised loss is taken to be reduced by that amount.

Note 1: For notional revenue loss and notional capital loss see section 165-115V.

Note 2: For trading stock decrease see section 165-115W.

Subsection (1) does not apply to an adjusted unrealised loss that the company had at a previous alteration time if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at that previous time.

165-115U Adjusted unrealised loss

(1) The question whether a company has an adjusted unrealised loss at an alteration time (the relevant alteration time) is worked out in this way (the individual asset method), unless the company chooses to work it out using the *global method (set out in subsection (1B)).

Method statement

Step 1. Work out under section 165-115V or 165-115W in respect of each CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant alteration time any notional capital loss, notional revenue loss or trading stock decrease that the company has at that time in respect of the asset.

To the extent that a notional capital loss or a notional revenue loss in respect of an asset at the relevant alteration time reflected an amount that was counted at an earlier alteration time, do not count it again at the relevant alteration time.

Step 2. Add up the notional capital losses and the notional revenue losses that the company had at the relevant alteration time. The total is the company’s nominal unrealised loss at that time.

Step 3. Add up the trading stock decreases that the company had at the relevant alteration time. The total is the company’s overall trading stock decrease at that time.

Step 4. The sum of the company’s nominal unrealised loss and overall trading stock decrease at the relevant time is the company’s adjusted unrealised loss at that time.

Note: Certain alteration times are disregarded (see subsections 165-115K(2) and (4)).

Step 1 in the method statement in subsection (1) does not apply to an amount that was counted at an earlier alteration time if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at that earlier time.

(1B) The global method of working out whether the company has an adjusted unrealised loss at the relevant alteration time is as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the total *market value of all *CGT assets that the company owned at the relevant alteration time (including those it *acquired for less than $10,000), using a valuation method that would generally be regarded as appropriate in the circumstances.

Step 2. Work out the total of the *cost bases of those *CGT assets at the relevant time.

Step 3. If the step 2 amount exceeds the step 1 amount, the excess is the company’s adjusted unrealised loss at the relevant time.

Note: If a CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant time was also trading stock or a revenue asset at that time, see subsection (1C) of this section.

If:

a CGT asset that the company owned at the relevant alteration time was also trading stock or a revenue asset at that time; and

(b) the asset’s *cost base at the relevant alteration time is less than the amount that, if the relevant alteration time were a changeover time, would be compared under section 165-115F with the asset’s *market value in working out a notional revenue gain or notional revenue loss that the company would have at the changeover time in respect of the asset;

then, for the purposes of step 2 of the method statement in subsection (1B) of this section, the amount that would be so compared is to be taken into account instead of that cost base.

A choice to use the *global method must be made on or before:

the day on which the company lodges its income tax return for the income year in which the relevant alteration time occurred; or

such later day as the Commissioner allows.

However, the company does not have an adjusted unrealised loss at the relevant alteration time if the company would, at that time, satisfy the maximum net asset value test under section 152-15.

165-115V Notional losses

This section applies for the purpose of calculating whether a company has at an alteration time a notional capital loss or a notional revenue loss in respect of a CGT asset that it owned at that time.

However, a company does not have a notional capital loss or a notional revenue loss at an alteration time in respect of a CGT asset that it *acquired for less than $10,000.

The calculation is to be made on the assumption that the company disposed of the asset at its *market value at the alteration time.

(4) If the company would make a *capital loss in respect of the disposal of the asset, the company has at the alteration time in respect of the asset a notional capital loss equal to the amount of the capital loss.

(5) If the company would be entitled to a deduction in respect of the disposal of the asset, the company has at the alteration time in respect of the asset a notional revenue loss equal to the amount of the deduction.

A company may choose that this section is to apply to the company at the alteration time in respect of an asset to which subsection (7) applied at that time as if the reference in subsection (3) to the *market value of the asset were a reference to its *written down value.

This subsection applies to an asset at the alteration time if:

the asset is a depreciating asset (not a building or structure) for whose decline in value the company has deducted or can deduct an amount; and

the expenditure incurred by the company to *acquire the asset was less than $1,000,000 (the expenditure can include the giving of property: see section 103-5); and

it would be reasonable for the company to conclude that the *market value of the asset at the alteration time was not less than 80% of its *written down value at that time.

165-115W Calculation of trading stock decrease

(1) The question whether there is a trading stock decrease in relation to a company at an alteration time for a *CGT asset of the company that was an item of *trading stock at that time is worked out in this way.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out whether the item’s *market value immediately before the alteration time was less than:

if there was no earlier alteration time in the income year in which that alteration time occurred—the item’s value under subsection 70-40(1) at the start of that income year or its cost if subsection 70-40(2) applies; or

if there was an earlier alteration time or there were earlier alteration times in that income year—the item’s market value immediately before that earlier alteration time or the later or latest of those earlier alteration times, as the case may be, or its cost if the company did not own it at that time.

Step 2. If the item’s *market value immediately before the alteration time was less than:

the item’s value or cost referred to in paragraph (a) in step 1; or

its market value or cost (as applicable) in paragraph (b) in step 1;

as the case requires, the difference is the trading stock decrease for the item.

To the extent (if any) to which the difference reflects an amount counted at an earlier alteration time, do not count that amount again.

Note: Certain alteration times are disregarded (see subsections 165-115K(2) and (4)).

Step 2 in the method statement in subsection (1) does not apply to an amount counted at an earlier alteration time if the company has chosen to use the *global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at that earlier time.

However, a company does not have a trading stock decrease at an alteration time in respect of an item of trading stock that it *acquired for less than $10,000.

165-115X Relevant equity interest

(1) An entity (not an individual) has a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:

at that time the entity has a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z); and

(b) at that time the entity has an interest (an equity) that gives, or interests (each of which is also called an equity) that between them give, the entity:

the control of, or the ability to control, 10% or more of the voting power in the loss company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or

the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) 10% or more of any dividends that the loss company may pay; or

the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) 10% or more of any distribution of capital of the loss company; and

the equity or each equity is either:

an interest (including a *share or shares, or an option or right to acquire a share or shares) in the loss company; or

an interest (including an option or right to acquire an interest) held by the entity directly in another entity that has a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the loss company.

Note: For paragraph (b), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

The equity or equities constitute the entity’s relevant equity interest in the *loss company.

A *widely held company that, apart from this subsection, would have a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time does not have such an interest at that time.

Subsection (2A) does not apply if:

an entity has a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z); and

that entity has a direct or indirect interest in, or is owed a debt by, the *widely held company, being an interest or debt in respect of which:

the entity could, if a CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, make a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) that reflects any part of the loss company’s overall loss; or

the entity has deducted or can deduct, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company’s overall loss.

Subsection (2A) does not apply in respect of a particular time if an entity that had a direct or indirect interest in, or was owed a debt by, the *widely held company at an earlier time, and had a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z) at the earlier time:

made a capital loss (other than a capital loss that was disregarded) because a CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, where the capital loss reflected any part of the *loss company’s overall loss; or

has deducted or could have deducted at an earlier time, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company’s overall loss.

(3) An entity (the first entity) that, apart from this subsection, would have a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time does not have such an interest if, at that time, there is no other entity that has a direct or indirect interest in, or is owed a debt by, the first entity, being an interest or debt in respect of which:

the other entity could, if a CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, make a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) that reflects any part of the loss company’s overall loss; or

the other entity has deducted or can deduct, or could deduct at a later time:

an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition of the interest or debt; or

a net loss on the *disposal of the interest or debt;

where the deduction reflected, or would reflect, any part of the loss company’s overall loss.

Subsection (3) does not apply if the first entity is a *widely held company.

Subsection (3) does not apply to the first entity in respect of a particular time if an entity that had a direct or indirect interest in, or was owed a debt by, the first entity at an earlier time:

made a capital loss (other than a capital loss that was disregarded) because a CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, where the capital loss reflected any part of the *loss company’s overall loss; or

has deducted or could have deducted at an earlier time, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company’s overall loss.

(5) An individual is not taken to have a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at any time.

(6) A partnership that consists only of individuals is not taken to have a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at any time.

If section 106-30, 106-50 or 106-60 would treat an act referred to in that section that is done in relation to an interest as having been done by an individual, the interest is not a relevant equity interest.

165-115Y Relevant debt interest

(1) An entity (not an individual) has a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time if, at that time:

the entity has a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z); and

(b) the entity is owed by the loss company a debt of not less than $10,000 (a debt) or debts at least one of which is not less than $10,000 (each debt of not less than $10,000 is also called a debt).

(2) An entity (not an individual) also has a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time if, at that time:

the entity has a controlling stake in the loss company; and

(b) the entity is owed by an entity (the debtor entity) other than the loss company a debt of not less than $10,000 (also a debt) or debts at least one of which is not less than $10,000 (each debt of not less than $10,000 is also called a debt); and

the debtor entity has a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest in the loss company.

The total of the debts referred to in subsections (1) and (2) constitutes the entity’s relevant debt interest in the *loss company.

A *widely held company that, apart from this subsection, would have a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time does not have such an interest at that time.

Subsection (3A) does not apply if:

an entity has a controlling stake in the loss company (see section 165-115Z); and

that entity has a direct or indirect interest in, or is owed a debt by, the *widely held company, being an interest or debt in respect of which:

the entity could, if a CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, make a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) that reflects any part of the loss company’s overall loss; or

the entity has deducted or can deduct, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company’s overall loss.

Subsection (3A) does not apply in respect of a particular time if an entity that had a direct or indirect interest in, or was owed a debt by, the *widely held company at an earlier time, and had a controlling stake in the *loss company (see section 165-115Z) at the earlier time:

made a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that was disregarded) because a CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, where the capital loss reflected any part of the loss company’s overall loss; or

has deducted or could have deducted at an earlier time, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company’s overall loss.

(4) An entity (the first entity) that, apart from this subsection, would have a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time does not have such an interest if, at that time, there is no other entity that has a direct or indirect interest in, or is owed a debt by, the first entity, being an interest or debt in respect of which:

the other entity could, if a CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, make a *capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) that reflects any part of the loss company’s overall loss; or

the other entity could deduct, or can deduct or could deduct at a later time:

an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition of the interest or debt; or

a net loss on the *disposal of the interest or debt;

where the deduction reflects, or would have reflected, any part of the loss company’s overall loss.

Subsection (4) does not apply if the first entity is a *widely held company.

Subsection (4) does not apply to the first entity in respect of a particular time if an entity that had a direct or indirect interest in, or was owed a debt by, the first entity at an earlier time:

made a capital loss (other than a capital loss that would be disregarded) at an earlier time because a CGT event happened in respect of the interest or debt, where the capital loss reflected any part of the *loss company’s overall loss; or

has deducted or could have deducted at an earlier time, or could deduct at a later time, an amount in respect of the cost of the *acquisition, or a net loss on the *disposal, of the interest or debt, where the deduction reflected or would have reflected, or would reflect, as the case may be, any part of the company’s overall loss.

(6) An individual is not taken to have a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at any time.

(7) A partnership that consists only of individuals is not taken to have a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at any time.

If section 106-30, 106-50 or 106-60 would treat an act referred to in that section that is done in relation to a debt as having been done by an individual, the debt is not a relevant debt interest.

165-115Z What constitutes a controlling stake in a company

(1) An entity has a controlling stake in a company at a particular time if the entity, or the entity and the entity’s *associates between them:

are able at that time to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 50% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or

have at that time the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or

have at that time the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company.

Note 1: The effect of subsection (1) is that, if an entity has a controlling stake in a company, each associate of the entity also has a controlling stake in the company.

Note 2: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

If:

apart from this subsection, an interest that gives an entity and its *associates (if any):

the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting power in a company; or

the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or

the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company;

would, in the application of paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c), be counted more than once; and

the interest is both direct and indirect;

only the direct interest is to be counted.

165-115ZA Reductions and other consequences if entity has relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in loss company immediately before alteration time

Application of section

(1) This section applies to an entity (an affected entity) that has a relevant equity interest or a relevant debt interest, or both, in a *loss company immediately before a time (a relevant time) that is an alteration time in respect of the loss company.

Note: This section and section 165-115ZB can apply differently for a company that has used the global method of working out whether it has an adjusted unrealised loss at an alteration time. See section 165-115ZD.

Application of section nullified in certain circumstances

However, if:

this section has applied to an entity in respect of a debt owed to the entity; and

Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G (which relate to the forgiveness of commercial debts) also applied in respect of the debt at the same time or at a later time;

any reductions or other consequences affecting the entity in respect of the debt under this section are taken not to have occurred or to have been required to occur.

Reduction of reduced cost base

Note: An amendment of an assessment can be made at any time to give effect to this subsection (see subsection 170(10AA) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

The *reduced cost base of an equity or debt that was *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 is to be reduced immediately before the relevant time by the adjustment amount calculated under section 165-115ZB.

Reduction of deduction—equity or debt is not trading stock

If an equity or debt is not an item of trading stock of the affected entity immediately before the relevant time, any amount that the entity can deduct in respect of the disposal of any of the equity or debt is to be reduced by the adjustment amount calculated under section 165-115ZB.

Reduction of cost—equity or debt is trading stock

If:

an equity or debt is an item of trading stock of the affected entity immediately before the relevant time; and

the *cost for the purposes of Division 70 of the equity or debt exceeds its *market value immediately before the relevant time;

then, subject to any later application or applications of this Subdivision, the cost of the equity or debt for the purposes of Division 70, and any deduction for an outlay to *acquire it, are reduced by the lesser of the following amounts or, if they are equal, by one of them:

the adjustment amount calculated under section 165-115ZB;

the amount of the excess referred to in paragraph (b).

Subsection (4) to apply only in respect of certain income years

For the purpose of working out:

deductions under section 8-1; or

whether an amount is included in assessable income under subsection 70-35(2); or

whether an amount can be deducted under subsection 70-35(3);

subsection (5) applies only in respect of income years ending after the later of the following:

the commencement time;

the time 12 months before the relevant time.

Further election to value trading stock

If an election has been made under section 70-45 to value an item of trading stock on hand at the end of an income year otherwise than at its *cost and subsection (5) applies in respect of it, a further election may be made under that section to value the item of trading stock at cost.

Previous applications of this section in relation to trading stock to be taken into account

In applying this section to the affected entity in respect of an equity or debt that is trading stock of the entity, any previous applications of this section to the entity in respect of the equity or debt are to be taken into account.

Cost of equity or debt that becomes trading stock after relevant time

If:

an equity or debt becomes an item of trading stock of the affected entity after the relevant time; and

had the equity or debt been an item of trading stock of the affected entity at an earlier time that was, or at 2 or more earlier times each of which was, the relevant time for the purposes of a previous application or previous applications of this section, its *cost for the purposes of Division 70 would have exceeded its *market value at the earlier time or at one of the earlier times;

its cost for the purposes of Division 70 is taken to be its market value at the earlier time or the smallest of its market values at the earlier times.

Reduction of proceeds of disposal of trading stock

If:

an equity or debt was an item of trading stock of the affected entity immediately before a relevant time or became such an item of trading stock after a relevant time; and

the equity or debt is *disposed of by the entity after the relevant time concerned; and

the equity or debt is an item of trading stock of the affected entity at the time of the disposal; and

the proceeds of the disposal exceed the *market value of the equity or debt immediately before the relevant time concerned or the market value of the equity or debt immediately before any previous relevant time;

the proceeds of the disposal are taken to be reduced by so much of the amount or the total of the amounts of any reductions made by any previous application or applications of subsection (5) in relation to the affected entity in respect of the equity or debt as does not exceed the excess amount or the greater or greatest of the excess amounts referred to in paragraph (d).

165-115ZB Adjustment amounts for the purposes of section 165-115ZA

This section has effect for the purposes of:

section 165-115ZA; and

sections 715-255 and 715-270 (about effect of alteration time for head company on membership interests of leaving entity just before leaving time).

Calculation of adjustment amount

An adjustment amount in relation to an equity or debt is to be worked out by the affected entity, and applied by it in making reductions:

if subsection (2) applies—in accordance with subsection (3); or

otherwise—in accordance with subsection (6).

Selection of method of calculation

This subsection applies if:

the affected entity has a relevant equity interest, but does not have a relevant debt interest, in the *loss company immediately before the alteration time and:

all the *shares in the loss company are of the same class and have the same *market value; and

the equity consists only of a share or shares in the loss company; or

the affected entity has both a relevant equity interest, and a relevant debt interest under subsection 165-115Y(1), in the loss company immediately before the alteration time and:

all the shares in the loss company are of the same class and have the same market value; and

the equity consists only of a share or shares in the loss company; and

the debt consists of a single debt or 2 or more debts of the same kind;

and the reductions that would result from the application of subsection (3) would be reasonable in the circumstances.

Formula method

(3) The adjustment amount to be worked out under this subsection is the amount worked out using the formula:

and the amount so worked out is to be applied in making reductions as follows:

the adjustment amount is to be applied in relation to the *share or shares constituting the equity; and

if there is an amount remaining after making reductions in relation to those shares—the amount remaining is to be applied in relation to any debt or, if there is a debt consisting of 2 or more separate debts, in relation to those debts.

Applying adjustment amount under formula method to shares

If the adjustment amount referred to in subsection (3) is to be applied in relation to an equity consisting of 2 or more *shares:

it is to be applied equally among the shares; and

if there is any amount remaining after the application of part of the adjustment amount to a share, the amount remaining is to be applied to any other share, or equally among any other shares, to the maximum extent possible.

Applying adjustment amount under formula method to debt

(5) If the adjustment amount referred to in subsection (3) or part of it is to be applied in relation to a debt (the overall debt) and the overall debt consists of 2 or more debts (the constituent debts), the amount to be applied in relation to each constituent debt is the amount worked out using the formula:

Non-formula method

(6) The adjustment amount to be worked out under this subsection is the amount that is appropriate having regard to:

the object of this Subdivision and other matters set out in section 165-115J; and

the extent of the affected entity’s relevant equity interests or relevant debt interests, as the case may be, in the *loss company immediately before the alteration time; and

when, and under what circumstances, the relevant equity interests or relevant debt interests were *acquired by the affected entity; and

the loss company’s overall loss at the alteration time; and

the extent to which that overall loss has reduced the *market values of the equity or debt; and

to prevent double counting, the extent of any adjustments required under this Subdivision because of any application of this Subdivision to another loss company in which the affected entity has a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest;

and the amount so worked out is to be applied in making reductions in an appropriate way.

How to work out the extent to which the overall loss has reduced the market value of an equity or debt

To avoid doubt in applying paragraph (6)(e) in relation to an equity or a debt, if factors other than an overall loss altered the *market value of the equity or debt, the extent to which the overall loss reduced that market value is taken to be the extent to which that market value would have been reduced apart from those other factors.

Note 1: For a company’s overall loss see subsections 165-115R(5) and 165-115S(5).

Note 2: An example of a factor other than the overall loss is the unrealised value of assets (including assets in respect of which there is an unrealised gain) of the loss company, whether or not generated by outlays or economic losses reflected in the loss for income tax purposes.

165-115ZC Notices to be given

Application

This section applies when an alteration time occurs in respect of a *loss company.

Note: Section 165-115ZC of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 affects the operation of this section.

Controlling entity

(2) For the purposes of this section, an entity is a controlling entity of a *loss company if:

the entity is not an individual; and

the entity, disregarding any of its *associates, has a controlling stake in the loss company; and

no other entity (except an individual or 2 or more individuals between them) has a controlling stake in the entity.

Foreign resident controlling entity to be disregarded in certain circumstances

If:

apart from this subsection, an entity that is a foreign resident would be a controlling entity of a *loss company; and

there is an entity that is an Australian resident and would be a controlling entity of the loss company if all the foreign residents that held direct or indirect interests in the Australian resident were individuals;

then, for the purposes of this section, the entity referred to in paragraph (a) is taken not to be a controlling entity of the company but the Australian resident is taken to be a controlling entity of the company.

Notice by controlling entity of loss company

An entity that was a controlling entity of the *loss company immediately before the alteration time must, before the end of 6 months after the latest of the following:

the alteration time;

(b) the day on which the New Business Tax System (Miscellaneous) Act (No. 2) 2000 received the Royal Assent;

the time (if any) specified by the Commissioner;

give a written notice, setting out the information mentioned in subsection (6), to each of its *associates that, to the loss company’s knowledge, had a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the loss company immediately before the alteration time.

Notice by loss company

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

If:

there was no controlling entity of the *loss company immediately before the alteration time; or

no entity that was a controlling entity of the loss company immediately before the alteration time told the loss company in writing, within 2 months after the later of the following:

the alteration time;

(ii) the day on which the New Business Tax System (Miscellaneous) Act (No. 2) 2000 received the Royal Assent;

that it had given, or proposed to give, notices to its associates under subsection (4);

the loss company must, before the end of 6 months after the latest of the following:

the alteration time;

(d) the day on which the New Business Tax System (Miscellaneous) Act (No. 2) 2000 received the Royal Assent;

the time (if any) specified by the Commissioner;

give a written notice, setting out the information mentioned in subsection (6), to each entity that, to the loss company’s knowledge, had a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in the company immediately before the alteration time.

Offences are strict liability

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

An offence under subsection (4) or (5) is an offence of strict liability.

Note: For strict liability, see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code.

Information to be included in notice

The information to be contained in a notice given under subsection (4) or (5) must include:

the time that is the alteration time; and

the amount of the *loss company’s overall loss at that time; and

for each income year for which the loss company had at that time a *tax loss or net capital loss referred to in subsection 165-115R(3) or 165-115S(3)—the type and amount of the loss; and

the amount of any adjusted unrealised loss that the loss company had at that time; and

(e) particulars (for the purpose of assisting the entity to whom the notice is given (the recipient) to comply with the requirements of this Subdivision) of the amounts, proportions, and times of *acquisition, of all relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests in the loss company held by entities through which the recipient had relevant equity interests or relevant debt interests in the loss company.

Entity or loss company not required to give information about matters that are not known to it

An entity or *loss company is not required by this section to set out information in a notice unless:

the information is known to the entity or company; or

the entity or company could reasonably be expected to know the information and can readily obtain it.

Commissioner’s power to specify a later time for giving notice

The Commissioner may, by written notice given to an entity, or *loss company, that is required to give a notice under subsection (4) or (5), specify a time later than the alteration time as the start of the 6 months mentioned in the subsection.

Commissioner’s power to waive requirement for notice

The Commissioner may give an entity or *loss company a written declaration that subsection (4) or (5) does not apply to require the entity or company to give a notice relating to the alteration time. If the Commissioner does so, the subsection does not apply in relation to the alteration time.

Considerations relating to Commissioner’s powers

In deciding whether to specify a time for the purposes of subsection (4) or (5) or declare that the subsection does not apply, the Commissioner must consider:

the consequences of doing so for each entity to which notice must be given under the subsection (apart from any such declaration); and

any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

Obligations of person not affected by failure to give notice

Any failure by an entity or the *loss company to give a notice to a person under this section does not affect any obligation of the person to comply with the requirements of this Subdivision.

165-115ZD Adjustment (or further adjustment) for interest realised at a loss after global method has been used

(1) This section affects how sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB apply to an interest (the equity) in, or a debt owed by, a company if, apart from this section, a loss (the realised loss):

would be *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to the equity or debt; or

would be so realised but for Subdivision 170-D (which defers realisation of capital losses and deductions);

and the company chose to use the *global method of working out whether it had an adjusted unrealised loss at the last alteration time:

that happened for the company before the realisation event; and

immediately before which the equity or debt was, or was part of:

if the company was a *loss company at that alteration time—a relevant equity interest, or a relevant debt interest, that an entity had in the company; or

otherwise—what would have been such an interest if the company had been a loss company at that alteration time.

Note: If that last alteration time is before the day on which the New Business Tax System (Consolidation, Value Shifting, Demergers and Other Measures) Act 2002 received the Royal Assent, the owner of the equity or debt may choose to apply section 165-115ZD of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 instead of this section.

In addition to any application to the equity or debt, in relation to that last alteration time, that sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB have apart from this section, those sections apply (and are taken always to have applied) to the equity or debt, in relation to that last alteration time, as if:

the company had an adjusted unrealised loss at that time worked out under this section; and

the company were therefore a *loss company at that time; and

that adjusted unrealised loss were the company’s overall loss at that time.

For the purposes of how sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB apply because of this section, the adjustment amount under section 165-115ZB is to be worked out and applied in accordance with subsection 165-115ZB(6) (the non-formula method).

Adjusted unrealised loss worked out under this section

The adjusted unrealised loss referred to in paragraph (2)(a) is worked out using this method statement:

Method statement

Step 1. Add up the amount or value of each thing covered by subsection (5). (If the total exceeds the realised loss, reduce the total by the excess.)

Step 2. Reduce the step 1 amount by so much of the realised loss as it is reasonable to conclude is attributable to none of these:

a notional capital loss, or a notional revenue loss, that the company has at that last alteration time in respect of a CGT asset;

a trading stock decrease in relation to that time for a CGT asset that was trading stock of the company at that time.

Note: If the equity or debt is a revenue asset, the realised loss is different from the loss referred to in subsection (1): see subsection (9).

This subsection covers each thing covered by an item in the table, except to the extent that:

(a) it is reasonable to conclude that the thing was not attributable to value that is reflected in what would, if that last alteration time had been a *changeover time for the company, be a notional capital gain or notional revenue gain that the company had under section 165-115F at that changeover time in respect of a *CGT asset; or

the thing has resulted in a reduction of the *reduced cost base of the equity or debt.

The period starts at that last alteration time and ends at the earlier of:

the time of the realisation event referred to in paragraph (1)(a); or

the time immediately before the earliest time when the equity or debt is no longer, or is no longer part of:

if the company was a *loss company at that last alteration time—a relevant equity interest, or a relevant debt interest, that an entity has in the company; or

otherwise—what would have been such an interest if the company had been a loss company at that last alteration time.

For the purposes of item 6 of the table in subsection (5), the capital proceeds of the CGT event are to be worked out:

under subsection 116-20(1) only; and

disregarding subsection 103-10(1) and paragraph 103-10(2)(a) (about entitlement to receive money or property).

Notices under section 165-115ZC not affected

To avoid doubt:

a notice need not be given under section 165-115ZC because of this section; and

this section does not affect the requirements that apply to a notice that otherwise must be given under that section.

If equity or debt is a revenue asset

If the equity or debt is a revenue asset at the time of the realisation event, subsection (4) applies on the basis that the realised loss is the total of:

the loss (if any) *realised for income tax purposes by the realisation event happening to the equity or debt in its character as a CGT asset; and

the loss (if any) realised for income tax purposes by the realisation event happening to the equity or debt in its character as a revenue asset.

Subdivision 165-C — Deducting bad debts

Guide to Subdivision 165-C

165-117 What this Subdivision is about

A company cannot deduct a bad debt unless:

if the debt was incurred in an earlier income year—the company had the same owners and the same control throughout the period from the day on which the debt was incurred to the end of the income year in which it writes off the debt as bad; or

if the debt was incurred in the current year—the company had the same owners and the same control during the income year both before and after the debt was incurred;

or, if there has been a change of ownership or control, the company satisfies the business continuity test by carrying on the same business (including entering into no new kinds of transactions and conducting no new kinds of business), or by carrying on a similar business (on or after 1 July 2015).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

165-119 Application of Subdivision

165-120 To deduct a bad debt

165-123 Company must maintain the same owners

165-126 Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test

165-129 Same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test

165-132 When tax losses resulting from bad debts cannot be deducted

Operative provisions

Note: The exceptions mentioned in this section apply differently in relation to designated infrastructure project entities: see section 415-40.

165-119 Application of Subdivision

This Subdivision applies to a debt only to the extent (if any) to which Subdivision 165-CC does not apply in respect of the debt.

Note: Subdivision 165-CC applies to certain capital losses or tax losses of a company to the extent to which the capital loss or tax loss does not exceed the company’s unrealised net loss.

165-120 To deduct a bad debt

A company cannot deduct a debt (or part of a debt) that it writes off as bad in the current year unless:

it meets the conditions in section 165-123 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners); or

Note: See section 165-230 for a special alternative to the condition in this paragraph.

the Commissioner thinks it would be unreasonable to require the company to meet the conditions in that section, having regard to the entities that beneficially owned the shares in the company when (in the Commissioner’s opinion) the debt (or part) became bad; or

the company meets the condition in section 165-126 (which is about the company satisfying the business continuity test).

Note 1: In the case of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company, Subdivision 166-C modifies how this Subdivision applies, unless the company chooses otherwise.

Note 2: Normally bad debts are deductible under section 8-1 or 25-35.

Note 3: Subdivisions 709-D and 719-I modify how this Subdivision operates in relation to a company that used to be a member of a consolidated group or MEC group and that writes off as bad a debt that used to be owed to a member of the group.

The conditions in section 165-123 or 165-126 apply to different periods, depending on whether the debt was incurred in the current year or an earlier income year:

A company cannot deduct a debt (or part of a debt) that it writes off as bad on the last day of the current year if the debt was also incurred on that day.

165-123 Company must maintain the same owners

Ownership test period

(1) In determining whether section 165-120 prevents a company from deducting a debt or a part of a debt, the ownership test period is the period from the start of the *first continuity period to the end of the *second continuity period.

Note: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

Voting power

There must be persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at all times during the ownership test period.

Note 1: See section 165-150 to work out who had more than 50% of the voting power.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

Rights to dividends

There must be persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends at all times during the ownership test period.

Note 1: See section 165-155 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to dividends in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends.

Rights to capital distributions

There must be persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions at all times during the ownership test period.

Note 1: See section 165-160 to work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to capital distributions.

When to apply the primary test

To work out whether a condition in this section was satisfied at all times during the ownership test period, apply the primary test for that condition unless subsection (6) requires the alternative test to be applied.

Note: For the primary test, see subsections 165-150(1), 165-155(1) and 165-160(1).

When to apply the alternative test

Apply the alternative test for that condition if one or more other companies beneficially owned *shares or interests in shares in the company at any time during the ownership test period.

Note: For the alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2), 165-155(2) and 165-160(2).

Conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4) may be treated as having been satisfied in certain circumstances

If any of the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (4) have not been satisfied, those conditions are taken to have been satisfied if:

they would have been satisfied except for the operation of section 165-165; and

the company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of the debt or of the part of a debt has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the company during the ownership test period.

If the company is:

a non-profit company; or

a mutual affiliate company; or

a mutual insurance company;

during the whole of the ownership test period, the conditions in subsections (3) and (4) are taken to have been satisfied by the company.

Time of happening of CGT event

The happening of any CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the company that results in the failure of the company to satisfy a condition in subsection (2), (3) or (4) is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (7)(b), to have occurred during the ownership test period.

165-126 Alternatively, the company must satisfy the business continuity test

This section sets out the condition that a company must meet to be able to deduct a debt or part of a debt that it writes off as bad in the current year if:

either:

the company fails to meet a condition in subsection 165-123(2), (3) or (4); or

it is not practicable to show that the company meets the conditions in those subsections; and

paragraph 165-120(1)(b) (about the Commissioner thinking it is unreasonable to require the company to meet the conditions in section 165-123) does not apply.

Note Other provisions may treat the company as meeting, or failing to meet, the conditions in subsections 165-123(2), (3) and (4).

(2) The company must satisfy the *business continuity test for the *second continuity period (the business continuity test period). Apply the test to the *business the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time) shown in the relevant item of the table.

For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E.

165-129 Same people must control the voting power, or the company must satisfy the business continuity test

Even if section 165-120 does not prevent a company from deducting a bad debt (or part of one), it cannot deduct the bad debt (or that part of it) if:

for some or all of the part of the ownership test period that started at the end of the first continuity period, a person controlled, or was able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); and

(b) for some or all of the *first continuity period, that person did not control, and was not able to control, that voting power (directly, or indirectly in that way); and

that person began to control, or became able to control, that voting power (directly, or indirectly in that way) for the purpose of:

getting some benefit or advantage in relation to how this Act applies; or

getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else;

or for purposes including that purpose.

Note 1: A person can still control the voting power in a company that is in liquidation etc.: see section 165-250.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

(2) However, that person’s control of the voting power, or ability to control it, does not prevent the company from deducting the bad debt (or that part of it) if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the *second continuity period (the business continuity test period).

(3) Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the time (the test time) when the person began to control that voting power, or became able to control it.

For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E.

165-132 When tax losses resulting from bad debts cannot be deducted

If:

a company can deduct a debt (or part of a debt) that it wrote off as bad in an income year; and

because the company failed to meet a condition in section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners), it could not have deducted the debt (or part) apart from section 165-126 (about the company satisfying the business continuity test); and

(c) the company wrote off the debt after the *test time worked out under section 165-126; and

because of the deduction, the company has a *tax loss for that income year, or there was an increase in the amount of its *tax loss for that income year; and

the company carried on a business during that income year for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of securing a deduction for the debt (or part) by relying on section 165-126;

the company cannot deduct the *tax loss for a later income year, or cannot deduct it to the extent of the increase, unless it also satisfies the *business continuity test for the later income year (the business continuity test period).

Apply the test to the business that the company carried on immediately before the *test time worked out for section 165-126.

For the business continuity test: see Subdivision 165-E.

Subdivision 165-D — Tests for finding out whether the company has maintained the same owners

Table of sections

The primary and alternative tests

165-150 Who has more than 50% of the voting power in the company

165-155 Who has rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends

165-160 Who has rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions

165-165 Rules about tests for a condition or occurrence of a circumstance

165-175 Tests can be satisfied by a single person

Rules affecting the operation of the tests

165-180 Arrangements affecting beneficial ownership of shares

165-185 Shares treated as not having carried rights

165-190 Shares treated as always having carried rights

165-200 Rules do not affect totals of shares, units in unit trusts or rights carried by shares and units

165-202 Shares held by government entities and charities etc.

165-203 Companies where no shares have been issued

165-205 Death of share owner

165-207 Trustees of family trusts

165-208 Companies in liquidation etc.

165-209 Dual listed companies

The primary and alternative tests

165-150 Who has more than 50% of the voting power in the company

The primary test

(1) Applying the primary test: if there are persons who, at a particular time, beneficially own (between them) *shares that carry (between them) the right to exercise more than 50% of the voting power in the company, those persons have more than 50% of the voting power in the company at that time.

The alternative test

(2) Applying the alternative test: if it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that there are persons (none of them companies or *trustees) who (between them) at a particular time control, or are able to control (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) the voting power in the company, those persons have more than 50% of the voting power in the company at that time.

165-155 Who has rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends

The primary test

(1) Applying the primary test: if there are persons who, at a particular time, beneficially own (between them) *shares that carry (between them) the right to receive more than 50% of any *dividends that the company may pay, those persons have rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends at that time.

The alternative test

(2) Applying the alternative test: if it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that there are persons (none of them companies) who (between them) at a particular time have the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly or *indirectly) more than 50% of any *dividends that the company may pay, those persons have rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends at that time.

165-160 Who has rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions

The primary test

(1) Applying the primary test: if there are persons who, at a particular time, beneficially own (between them) *shares that carry (between them) the right to receive more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company, those persons have rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions at that time.

The alternative test

(2) Applying the alternative test: if it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that there are persons (none of them companies) who (between them) at a particular time have the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly or *indirectly) more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company, those persons have rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions at that time.

165-165 Rules about tests for a condition or occurrence of a circumstance

Exactly the same shares or interests must continue to be held

For the purpose of determining whether a company has satisfied a condition or whether a time is a changeover time or an alteration time in respect of a company:

a condition that has to be satisfied is not satisfied; or

a time that, apart from this subsection, would not be a changeover time or alteration time is taken to be a changeover time or alteration time, as the case may be;

unless, at all relevant times:

the only *shares in the company that are taken into account are exactly the same shares and are held by the same persons; and

the only interests in any other entity (including shares in another company) that are taken into account are exactly the same interests and are beneficially owned by the same persons.

What happens in case of share splitting

If:

(a) a particular *share (an old share) in a company of which a person is the beneficial owner at the start of a *test period is divided into 2 or more new shares; and

the person becomes the beneficial owner of each of the new shares immediately after the division takes place and remains the beneficial owner until the end of that period;

the new shares are taken to be exactly the same shares as the old share.

What happens in case of splitting of units in a unit trust

If:

(a) a particular unit (the old unit) in a unit trust of which a person is the holder at the start of a *test period is divided into 2 or more new units; and

the person becomes the holder of each of the new units immediately after the division takes place and remains the holder until the end of that period;

the new units are taken to be exactly the same units as the old unit.

What happens in case of consolidation of shares

If:

(a) a particular *share (an old share) in a company of which a person is the beneficial owner at the start of a *test period, and other shares (each of which also called an old share) in the company of which the person is the beneficial owner at the start of that period, are consolidated into a new share; and

the person becomes the beneficial owner of the new share immediately after the consolidation takes place;

the new share is taken to be exactly the same share as the old shares.

What happens in case of consolidation of units in a unit trust

If:

(a) a particular unit (an old unit) in a unit trust of which a person is the holder at the start of a *test period and other units (each of which also called an old unit) in the trust of which the person is the holder at the start of that period are consolidated into a new unit; and

the person becomes the holder of the new unit immediately after the consolidation takes place;

the new unit is taken to be exactly the same unit as the old units.

Test period

(6) A test period is:

for the purpose of determining whether a condition in section 165-12 has been satisfied—the ownership test period; or

for the purpose of determining whether a test time is a changeover time for the purposes of section 165-115C—the period between the reference time referred to in subsection 165-115A(2A) and the test time; or

for the purpose of determining whether a test time is an alteration time for the purposes of section 165-115L—the period between the reference time referred to in subsection 165-115L(2) and the test time.

Satisfaction by primary test by public company

A public company is taken to satisfy the primary test if it is reasonable to assume that the test is satisfied.

165-175 Tests can be satisfied by a single person

To avoid doubt, a test for a condition can be satisfied by one person.

Rules affecting the operation of the tests

165-180 Arrangements affecting beneficial ownership of shares

For the purposes of a test, the Commissioner may treat a person as not having beneficially owned particular *shares at a particular time if the conditions in subsections (2) and (3) are met.

Example: The Commissioner may treat a person as not having beneficially owned redeemable shares at a particular time if the conditions in subsections (2) and (3) are met in respect of those shares.

An arrangement must have been entered into at some time that in any way (directly or indirectly) related to, affected, or depended for its operation on:

the beneficial interest in the *shares, or the value of that beneficial interest; or

a right carried by, or relating to, the shares; or

the exercise of such a right.

The arrangement must also have been entered into for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of eliminating or reducing a liability of an entity to pay income tax for a financial year.

165-185 Shares treated as not having carried rights

(1) In applying a test for the purposes of this Division other than Subdivision 165-CC, *shares are taken not to have carried particular rights during a part of the *ownership test period if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

(a) the shares stopped carrying those rights after the ownership test period; or

(b) the shares will or may stop carrying those rights after the ownership test period;

because of:

(c) the company’s *constitution as in force at some time during the ownership test period; or

an arrangement entered into before or during the ownership test period.

In applying a test for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC, *shares are taken not to have carried particular rights after a particular time if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

(a) the shares stopped carrying those rights after that time; or

(b) the shares will or may stop carrying those rights after that time;

because of:

the company’s *constitution as in force at any time; or

an arrangement entered into at any time.

165-190 Shares treated as always having carried rights

(1) In applying a test for the purposes of this Division other than Subdivision 165-CC, *shares are taken to have carried particular rights at all times during a part of the *ownership test period if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

(a) the shares started to carry those rights after the ownership test period; or

(b) the shares will or may start to carry those rights after the ownership test period;

because of:

(c) the company’s *constitution as in force at some time during the ownership test period; or

an arrangement entered into before or during the ownership test period.

In applying a test for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC, *shares are taken to have carried particular rights after a particular time if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

(a) the shares started to carry those rights after that time; or

(b) the shares will or may start to carry those rights after that time;

because of:

the company’s *constitution as in force at any time; or

an arrangement entered into at any time.

165-200 Rules do not affect totals of shares, units in unit trusts or rights carried by shares and units

Sections 165-165, 165-180, 165-185 and 165-190 do not affect how *shares, and rights carried by *shares, are counted for the purposes of determining:

the total voting power in the company; or

the total *dividends that the company may pay; or

the total distributions of capital of the company.

Section 165-165 does not affect how units in a unit trust, or the rights carried by such units, are counted for the purposes of determining the total rights, or the total rights of a particular kind, in the trust of the holders of such units.

165-202 Shares held by government entities and charities etc.

For the purposes of a test, *shares that are beneficially owned by each of the following entities are taken to be beneficially owned instead by a person (who is not a company):

the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory;

a municipal corporation;

a local governing body;

the government of a foreign country, or of part of a foreign country;

a company, established under a law, in which no person has a *membership interest;

a non-profit company;

a charity that is not a trust;

a complying superannuation fund;

a superannuation fund that is established in a foreign country and is regulated under a foreign law;

a complying approved deposit fund;

a *special company;

a managed investment scheme.

For the purposes of a test, *shares that are beneficially owned through a charity that is a trust are taken to be beneficially owned instead by a person (who is neither a company nor a trustee).

165-203 Companies where no shares have been issued

For the purposes of a test, if no *shares have been issued in a company, each *membership interest in the company is taken to be a share in the company.

165-205 Death of share owner

If an individual beneficially owns *shares in a company when he or she dies, this section applies if and while the shares:

are owned by the trustee of the deceased’s estate; or

are beneficially owned by someone who receives them as a beneficiary of the deceased’s estate.

For the purposes of a test:

the *shares are taken to continue to be beneficially owned by the deceased; and

as a result of being taken to continue to beneficially own the shares, the deceased is taken to continue:

to have any rights to exercise, or to be able to control (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities), any of the voting power in the company; and

to have any rights to receive for the deceased’s own benefit (whether directly or *indirectly) any *dividends that the company may pay; and

to have any rights to receive for the deceased’s own benefit (whether directly or indirectly) any distributions of capital of the company.

165-207 Trustees of family trusts

This section applies if one or more trustees of a family trust:

owns *shares in a company; or

controls, or is able to control, (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) voting power in a company; or

has a right to receive (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities) a percentage of a dividend or a distribution of capital of a company.

For the purposes of a primary test, a single notional entity that is a person (but is neither a company nor a trustee) is taken to own the *shares beneficially.

Note: For a primary test, see subsections 165-150(1), 165-155(1) and 165-160(1).

For the purposes of an alternative test, a single notional entity that is a person (but is neither a company nor a trustee) is taken:

to control, or have the ability to control, the voting power in the company; or

to have the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly) the percentage of the dividend or distribution for the entity’s own benefit.

Note: For an alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2), 165-155(2) and 165-160(2).

If a trustee of the trust is subsequently replaced by another trustee of the trust, the same single notional entity is taken:

to own the *shares beneficially; or

to control, or have the ability to control, the voting power in the company; or

to have the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly) the percentage of the dividend or distribution for the entity’s own benefit.

165-208 Companies in liquidation etc.

For the purposes of a primary test or an alternative test, an entity is not prevented from:

beneficially owning *shares in a company; or

having the right to exercise, controlling, or being able to control, voting power in a company; or

having the right to receive any *dividends that a company may pay; or

having the right to receive any distribution of capital of a company;

merely because:

the company is or becomes:

(i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001; or

an entity with a similar status under a foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; or

either:

(i) a provisional liquidator is appointed to the company under section 472 of the Corporations Act 2001; or

a person with a similar status under a foreign law to a provisional liquidator is appointed to the company.

Note 1: For a primary test, see subsections 165-150(1), 165-155(1) and 165-160(1).

Note 2: For an alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2), 165-155(2) and 165-160(2).

(2) For the purposes of a primary test or an alternative test, a company (the stakeholding company) is not prevented from:

beneficially owning *shares in another company, or any other interest in another entity; or

having the right to exercise, controlling, or being able to control, voting power in another company or any other entity; or

having the right to receive any *dividends that another company or any other entity may pay; or

having the right to receive any distribution of capital of another company or of any other entity;

merely because:

the stakeholding company is or becomes:

(i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001; or

an entity with a similar status under a foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; or

either:

(i) a provisional liquidator is appointed to the stakeholding company under section 472 of the Corporations Act 2001; or

a person with a similar status under a foreign law to a provisional liquidator is appointed to the stakeholding company.

165-209 Dual listed companies

Section 165-150 does not apply to *shares that are *dual listed company voting shares.

Subdivision 165-E — Business continuity test

165-210 The business continuity test—carrying on the same business

(1) A company satisfies the business continuity test if throughout the *business continuity test period it carries on the same *business as it carried on immediately before the *test time.

(2) However, the company does not satisfy the *business continuity test under this section if, at any time during the *business continuity test period, it *derives assessable income from:

a business of a kind that it did not carry on before the *test time; or

a transaction of a kind that it had not entered into in the course of its business operations before the *test time.

(3) The company also does not satisfy the *business continuity test under this section if, before the *test time, it:

started to carry on a business it had not previously carried on; or

in the course of its business operations, entered into a transaction of a kind that it had not previously entered into;

and did so for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of being taken to have carried on throughout the business continuity test period the same business as it carried on immediately before the test time.

(4) So far as the *business continuity test under this section is applied for the purpose of Subdivision 165-B (which is about working out the taxable income and *tax loss for the income year of change of ownership or control), the company also does not satisfy the test if, at any time during the *business continuity test period, it incurs expenditure:

in carrying on a business of a kind that it did not carry on before the *test time; or

as a result of a transaction of a kind that it had not entered into in the course of its business operations before the test time.

165-211 The business continuity test—carrying on a similar business

(1) A company also satisfies the business continuity test in relation to:

a *tax loss for an income year starting on or after 1 July 2015; or

taxable income for an income year starting on or after 1 July 2015; or

a net capital loss for an income year starting on or after 1 July 2015; or

a debt, incurred in an income year starting on or after 1 July 2015, that the company writes off as bad;

if throughout the *business continuity test period it carries on a business (its current business) that is similar to the *business it carried on immediately before the *test time (its former business).

Without limiting the matters that may be taken into account in ascertaining whether the company’s current business is similar to its former business, the following must be taken into account:

the extent to which the assets (including goodwill) that are used in its current business to generate assessable income throughout the business continuity test period were also used in its former business to generate assessable income;

the extent to which the activities and operations from which its current business generated assessable income throughout the business continuity test period were also the activities and operations from which its former business generated assessable income;

the identity of its current business and the identity of its former business;

the extent to which any changes to its former business result from development or commercialisation of assets, products, processes, services or marketing or organisational methods of the former business.

(3) However, the company does not satisfy the *business continuity test under this section if, before the *test time, it:

started to carry on a business it had not previously carried on; or

in the course of its business operations, entered into a transaction of a kind that it had not previously entered into;

and did so for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of being taken to have carried on throughout the business continuity test period a business that is similar to the business it carried on immediately before the test time.

165-212D Restructure of MDOs etc.

An MDO does not fail to satisfy the business continuity test merely because, before 1 July 2003:

the MDO restructured the way it provides medical indemnity cover; or

the MDO ceased to provide medical indemnity cover;

in order to comply with the Medical Indemnity (Prudential Supervision and Product Standards) Act 2003.

A general insurance company which is an associate of an MDO does not fail to satisfy the business continuity test merely because, before 1 July 2003:

the MDO restructured the way it provides medical indemnity cover; or

the MDO ceased to provide medical indemnity cover;

in order to comply with the Medical Indemnity (Prudential Supervision and Product Standards) Act 2003.

165-212E Entry history rule does not apply for the purposes of sections 165-210 and 165-211

For the purposes of sections 165-210 and 165-211, section 701-5 (the entry history rule) does not operate in relation to an entity becoming a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a MEC group.

Subdivision 165-F — Special provisions relating to ownership by non-fixed trusts

Table of sections

165-215 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-A

165-220 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-B

165-225 Special way of dividing the income year under Subdivision 165-B

165-230 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-C

165-235 Information about non-fixed trusts with interests in company

165-240 Notices where requirements of section 165-235 are met

165-245 When an entity has a fixed entitlement to income or capital of a company

165-215 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-A

If a company does not meet the conditions in section 165-12, it is nevertheless taken to meet the conditions if it meets the conditions in this section.

First condition

At all times during the ownership test period:

both:

persons must have held *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

*non-fixed trusts, other than *family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the company; or

both:

(i) a *fixed trust or a company (which trust or company is the holding entity) must have held, directly or indirectly, fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

non-fixed trusts, other than *family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the holding entity.

Second condition

The persons holding *fixed entitlements to shares of the income, and the persons holding fixed entitlements to shares of the capital, of:

in a paragraph (2)(a) case—the company; or

in a paragraph (2)(b) case—the holding entity;

at the beginning of the loss year must have held those entitlements to those shares at all times during the ownership test period.

Third condition

At the beginning of the loss year:

individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, *fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the income of the company; or

individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the capital of the company.

Fourth condition

(5) It must be the case that, for each *non-fixed trust (other than an *excepted trust) that, at any time during the *ownership test period, held directly or indirectly a *fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company, section 267-20 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 would not have prevented the non-fixed trust from deducting the *tax loss concerned if it, rather than the company, had incurred the tax loss.

Note: See section 165-245 for when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.

165-220 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-B

If the company does not meet the condition in paragraph 165-35(a), it is nevertheless taken to meet the condition if it meets the conditions in this section.

First condition

At all times during the income year:

both:

persons must have held *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

*non-fixed trusts, other than *family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the company; or

both:

(i) a *fixed trust or a company (which trust or company is the holding entity) must have held, directly or indirectly, fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

non-fixed trusts, other than family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the holding entity.

Second condition

The persons holding *fixed entitlements to shares of the income, and the persons holding fixed entitlements to shares of the capital, of:

in a paragraph (2)(a) case—the company; or

in a paragraph (2)(b) case—the holding entity;

at the beginning of the income year must have held those entitlements to those shares at all times during the income year.

Third condition

At the beginning of the income year:

individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, *fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the income of the company; or

individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the capital of the company.

Fourth condition

(5) It must be the case that, for each *non-fixed trust (other than an *excepted trust) that, at any time in the income year, held directly or indirectly a *fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company, section 267-60 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not require the non-fixed trust to work out its net income and *tax loss for the income year under Division 268.

Note: See section 165-245 for when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.

165-225 Special way of dividing the income year under Subdivision 165-B

If:

the company is required to calculate:

its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B; and

its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-CB; and

the company meets the requirements of subsections 165-220(2) and (4);

then, in dividing the income year into periods, apply subsection (2) of this section instead of subsections 165-45(3) and (4).

The last period ends at the end of the income year. Each period (except the last) ends at the earliest of:

the latest time that would result in the persons holding *fixed entitlements to shares of the income or shares of the capital of:

if the company meets the requirements of paragraph 165-220(2)(a)—the company; or

if the company meets the requirements of paragraph 165-220(2)(b)—the holding entity mentioned in that paragraph;

and the percentages of the shares that they hold, remaining the same during the whole of the period; and

the times that, for all of the *non-fixed trusts, other than *excepted trusts, holding directly or indirectly a fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company at any time during the income year, are the latest times that would result in individuals having *more than a 50% stake in their income or capital; and

(c) the earliest time in the period when a group (within the meaning of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) begins to *control a non-fixed trust, other than an excepted trust, that holds directly or indirectly a fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company at any time during the income year.

Note: See section 165-245 for when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.

165-230 Special alternative to change of ownership test for Subdivision 165-C

If a company does not meet the conditions in section 165-123, it is nevertheless taken to meet the conditions if it meets the conditions in this section.

First condition

At all times during the ownership test period:

both:

persons must have held *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

*non-fixed trusts, other than *family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the company; or

both:

(i) a *fixed trust or a company (which trust or company is the holding entity) must have held, directly or indirectly, fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the company; and

non-fixed trusts, other than family trusts, must have held fixed entitlements to a 50% or greater share of the income or a 50% or greater share of the capital of the holding entity.

Second condition

The persons holding *fixed entitlements to shares of the income, and the persons holding fixed entitlements to shares of the capital, of:

in a paragraph (2)(a) case—the company; or

in a paragraph (2)(b) case—the holding entity;

at the beginning of the first continuity period must have held those entitlements to those shares at all times during the ownership test period.

Third condition

At the beginning of the first continuity period:

individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, *fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the income of the company; or

individuals must not have had (between them), directly or indirectly, and for their own benefit, fixed entitlements to a greater than 50% share of the capital of the company.

Fourth condition

(5) It must be the case that, for each *non-fixed trust (other than an *excepted trust) that, at any time during the *ownership test period, held directly or indirectly a *fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the company, section 267-25 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 would not have prevented the non-fixed trust from deducting the amount in respect of the debt if it, rather than the company, would otherwise be entitled to deduct the amount.

Note: See section 165-245 for when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.

165-235 Information about non-fixed trusts with interests in company

Notice about foreign resident non-fixed trust

The Commissioner may give the company a notice in accordance with section 165-240 if the requirements of subsections (2) to (5) of this section are met.

Tax detriment under Division 165

In its income tax return for the income year:

the company must have deducted a *tax loss from a loss year where it would not be allowed to deduct the tax loss unless it met the conditions in section 165-215; or

the company must not have calculated:

its taxable income and tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B; and

its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-CB;

where it would have been required to calculate them unless it met the conditions in section 165-220; or

the company must have applied a net capital loss for an earlier income year in working out its net capital gain where it would not have been allowed to apply the loss unless it met the conditions in section 165-215 as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1); or

the company must have deducted a debt that it wrote off as bad in the income year where it would not be allowed to deduct the debt unless it met the conditions in section 165-230.

Information about non-fixed trust

In order to determine whether it meets the conditions concerned, the Commissioner must need information about a non-fixed trust mentioned in:

if paragraph (2)(a) applies—subsection 165-215(5); or

if paragraph (2)(b) applies—subsection 165-220(5); or

if paragraph (2)(c) applies—subsection 165-215(5) as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1); or

if paragraph (2)(d) applies—subsection 165-230(5).

Foreign resident trust

When the Commissioner gives the notice:

a trustee of the non-fixed trust must be a foreign resident; or

the central management and control of the non-fixed trust must be outside Australia.

When notice must be given

The Commissioner must give the notice before the later of:

5 years after the income year; and

(b) the end of the period during which the company is required by section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to retain records in relation to that income year.

165-240 Notices where requirements of section 165-235 are met

Information required

The notice that the Commissioner may give if the requirements of subsections 165-235(2) to (5) are met must require the company to give the Commissioner specified information that is relevant in determining whether:

if paragraph 165-235(2)(a) applies—the requirements of subsection 165-215(5); or

if paragraph 165-235(2)(b) applies—the requirements of subsection 165-220(5); or

if paragraph 165-235(2)(c) applies—the requirements of subsection 165-215(5) as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1); or

if paragraph 165-235(2)(d) applies—the requirements of subsection 165-230(5);

are satisfied in relation to the non-fixed trust mentioned in subsections 165-235(3) and (4).

Company knowledge

The information need not be within the knowledge of the company at the time the notice is given.

Period for giving information

The notice must specify a period within which the company is to give the information. The period must not end earlier than 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives the notice.

Consequence of not giving the information

If the company does not give the information within the period or within such further period as the Commissioner allows, the company is taken not to meet, and never to have met, the conditions mentioned in whichever paragraph of subsection 165-235(2) is applicable.

Application of Subdivision 165-B

If, because of subsection (4), the company is required to calculate under Subdivision 165-B its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year concerned, that Subdivision is to be applied as if it required the income year to be divided into such periods as would result in the highest possible taxable income for the income year.

Application of Subdivision 165-CB

If, because of subsection (4), the company is required to calculate under Subdivision 165-CB its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year concerned, that Subdivision is to be applied as if it required the income year to be divided into such periods as would result in the highest net capital gain for the income year.

165-245 When an entity has a fixed entitlement to income or capital of a company

For the purposes of this Act, an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a *fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company at a time if and only if the entity held or had, directly or indirectly, that fixed entitlement at that time for the purposes of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 165-G — Other special provisions

Table of sections

165-250 Control of companies in liquidation etc.

165-255 Incomplete periods

165-250 Control of companies in liquidation etc.

For the purposes of sections 165-15, 165-40, 165-115D, 165-115M and 165-129, a person is not prevented from controlling, or being or becoming able to control, voting power in a company merely because:

the company is or becomes:

(i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001; or

an entity with a similar status under a foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; or

either:

(i) a provisional liquidator is appointed to the company under section 472 of the Corporations Act 2001; or

a person with a similar status under a foreign law to a provisional liquidator is appointed to the company.

(2) For the purposes of sections 165-15, 165-40, 165-115D, 165-115M and 165-129, a company (the stakeholding company) is not prevented from controlling, or being or becoming able to control, voting power in another company merely because:

the stakeholding company is or becomes:

(i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001; or

an entity with a similar status under a foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; or

either:

(i) a provisional liquidator is appointed to the stakeholding company under section 472 of the Corporations Act 2001; or

a person with a similar status under a foreign law to a provisional liquidator is appointed to the stakeholding company.

165-255 Incomplete periods

If:

this Division or Division 166 requires a company to meet or satisfy a condition or test, or work out an amount, for a period; and

the company is only in existence after the beginning of the period;

then the period is taken to start on the first day that the company is in existence.

If:

this Division or Division 166 requires a company to meet or satisfy a condition or test, or work out an amount, for a period; and

the company ceases to be in existence before the end of the period;

then the period is taken to end on the day the company ceases to be in existence.

Division 166 — Income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 166

166-AA The object of this Division

166-A Deducting tax losses of earlier income years

166-B Working out the taxable income, tax loss, net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year of the change

166-C Deducting bad debts

166-CA Changeover times and alteration times

166-D Tests for finding out whether the widely held or eligible Division 166 company has maintained the same owners

166-E Concessional tracing rules

Guide to Division 166

166-1 What this Division is about

This Division modifies the way the rules in Division 165 apply to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company by making it easier for the company to apply the rules.

If the company has maintained the same owners as between certain points of time, it does not need to prove it has maintained the same owners throughout the periods in between.

In certain cases, special concessional tracing rules deem entities to hold voting, dividend or capital stakes in the company so that the company does not have to trace through to the ultimate beneficial owners of the stakes.

Subdivision 166-AA — The object of this Division

166-3 The object of this Division

The object of this Division is to make it easier for a *widely held company, or an eligible Division 166 company, to apply the rules in Division 165 (because of the difficulty the company might have under that Division in actually tracing through to the ultimate beneficial owners of *voting stakes, dividend stakes and *capital stakes in the company).

This Division makes it easier to apply the rules in Division 165 by:

making it unnecessary for the company to prove that it has maintained the same owners throughout a period, if the company had the same owners at certain test times; and

making it unnecessary for the company to trace through to the ultimate beneficial owners of:

*voting stakes, dividend stakes and *capital stakes in the company held by certain entities (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities); and

small voting stakes, dividend stakes and capital stakes in the company.

Subdivision 166-A — Deducting tax losses of earlier income years

Table of sections

166-5 How Subdivision 165-A applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

166-15 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them

166-5 How Subdivision 165-A applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

This Subdivision modifies the way Subdivision 165-A applies to a company that is:

a *widely held company at all times during the income year; or

an eligible Division 166 company at all times during the income year; or

a widely held company for a part of the income year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the income year.

Note 1: Subdivision 165-A is about the conditions a company must meet before it can deduct a tax loss for an earlier income year.

Note 2: A company can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to it: see section 166-15.

Note 3: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete income years.

Meaning of test period

(2) The company’s test period is the period consisting of the *loss year, the income year and any intervening period.

Note: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

Substantial continuity of ownership

The company is taken to have met the conditions in section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners) if there is substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the test period and:

the end of each income year in that period; and

the *end of each corporate change in that period.

Note: See sections 166-145 and 166-175 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership and a corporate change.

No substantial continuity of ownership

(4) The company is taken to have failed to meet the conditions in section 165-12 if there is no *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and:

the end of an income year in that period; or

the *end of a corporate change in that period.

Satisfies the business continuity test

(5) However, if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the income year (the business continuity test period), it is taken to have satisfied the condition in section 165-13.

Note 1: For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E.

Note 2: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

(6) Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the earlier of the following times (the test time):

the end of the first income year;

the first time in the test period that a corporate change in the company *ends;

for which there is no substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the test period and that time.

166-15 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them

(1) The company can choose that Subdivision 165-A is to apply to it for the income year without the modifications made by this Subdivision.

The company must choose on or before the day it lodges its income tax return for the income year, or before a later day if the Commissioner allows.

Subdivision 166-B — Working out the taxable income, tax loss, net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year of the change

Table of sections

166-20 How Subdivisions 165-B and 165-CB apply to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

166-25 How to work out the taxable income, tax loss, net capital gain and net capital loss

166-35 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them

166-20 How Subdivisions 165-B and 165-CB apply to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

This Subdivision modifies how Subdivisions 165-B and 165-CB apply to a company that is:

(a) a *widely held company at all times during the income year (the test period); or

(b) an *eligible Division 166 company at all times during the income year (the test period); or

(c) a widely held company for a part of the income year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the income year (the whole year being the test period).

Note 1: Subdivision 165-B is about when a company must calculate its taxable income and tax loss for the income year in a special way. Subdivision 165-CB is about when a company must calculate its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year in a special way.

Note 2: A company can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to it: see section 166-35.

Note 3: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

No corporate change etc.

If:

(a) no *corporate change in the company *ends at any time in the *test period; or

a corporate change in the company *ends during the test period, but there is substantial continuity of ownership as between the start of the test period and immediately after the corporate change ends;

the company is taken to have met the condition in paragraph 165-35(a) (which is about there being persons having *more than a 50% stake in it during the whole of the income year).

Corporate change

Note: See sections 166-145 and 166-175 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership and a corporate change.

If:

a corporate change in the company *ends at any time in the test period; and

there is no substantial continuity of ownership as between the start of the test period and immediately after the corporate change ends;

then the company is taken to have failed to meet the condition in paragraph 165-35(a).

Satisfies the business continuity test

(4) However, if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the rest of the income year (the business continuity test period) after the first time (the test time) in the *test period that a *corporate change in the company *ended, the company is taken to have satisfied the condition in paragraph 165-35(b).

Note 1: For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E.

Note 2: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

Apply the business continuity test to the business that the company carried on immediately before the *test time.

166-25 How to work out the taxable income, tax loss, net capital gain and net capital loss

If the company must calculate its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B, and its net capital gain and net capital loss under Subdivision 165-CB, then, in dividing the income year into periods, apply subsection (2) of this section instead of subsection 165-45(3).

(2) The last period ends at the end of the income year. Each period (except the last) ends at the earlier of:

(a) the earliest time when:

a corporate change in the company *ends; and

there is no substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the test period and that time; or

(b) the earliest time when a person begins to control, or becomes able to control, the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) for the purpose, or for purposes including the purpose, of:

getting some benefit or advantage to do with how this Act applies; or

getting such a benefit or advantage for someone else.

Note: See sections 166-145 and 166-175 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership and a corporate change.

166-35 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them

(1) The company can choose that Subdivisions 165-B and 165-CB are to apply to it for the income year without the modifications made by this Subdivision.

The company must choose on or before the day it lodges its income tax return for the income year, or before a later day if the Commissioner allows.

Subdivision 166-C — Deducting bad debts

Table of sections

166-40 How Subdivision 165-C applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

166-50 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them

166-40 How Subdivision 165-C applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

This Subdivision modifies the way Subdivision 165-C applies to a company that is:

a *widely held company at all times during the current year; or

an eligible Division 166 company at all times during the current year; or

a widely held company for a part of the current year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the current year.

Note 1: Subdivision 165-C is about the conditions a company must meet before it can deduct a bad debt.

Note 2: A company can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to it: see section 166-50.

Note 3: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete current years.

Meaning of test period

(2) The company’s test period is the period:

that begins at whichever of the following times the company chooses:

the start of the income year in which the debt was incurred;

the start of the first continuity period; and

that ends at the end of the second continuity period;

and includes any intervening period.

Substantial continuity of ownership

Note: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

The company is taken to have met the conditions in section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners) if there is substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the test period and:

the end of each income year in that period; and

the *end of each corporate change in that period.

Note: See sections 166-145 and 166-175 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership and a corporate change.

No substantial continuity of ownership

(4) The company is taken to have failed to meet the conditions in section 165-123 if there is no *substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and:

the end of an income year in that period; or

the *end of a corporate change in that period.

Satisfies the business continuity test

(5) However, if the company satisfies the *business continuity test for the *second continuity period (the business continuity test period), it is taken to have satisfied the condition in section 165-126.

Note 1: For the business continuity test, see Subdivision 165-E.

Note 2: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

(6) Apply the *business continuity test to the *business that the company carried on immediately before the earlier of the following times (the test time):

the end of the first income year;

the first time in the test period that a corporate change in the company *ends;

for which there is no substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the test period and that time.

166-50 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them

(1) The company can choose that Subdivision 165-C is to apply to it for the income year without the modifications made by this Subdivision.

The company must choose on or before the day it lodges its income tax return for the income year, or before a later day if the Commissioner allows.

Subdivision 166-CA — Changeover times and alteration times

Table of sections

166-80 How Subdivision 165-CC or 165-CD applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

166-90 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them

166-80 How Subdivision 165-CC or 165-CD applies to a widely held or eligible Division 166 company

This Subdivision modifies the way in which:

Subdivision 165-CC applies in determining whether a changeover time (within the meaning of section 165-115C) has occurred; or

Subdivision 165-CD applies in determining whether an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L) has occurred;

in relation to a company that is:

a *widely held company at all times during the income year; or

an eligible Division 166 company at all times during the income year; or

a widely held company for a part of the income year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the income year.

Note 1: Subdivision 165-CC is about the conditions a company that has an unrealised net loss must satisfy before it can have capital losses taken into account or deduct revenue losses. Subdivision 165-CD provides for reductions in cost bases and certain other reductions after alterations have occurred in the ownership or control of a loss company.

Note 2: A company can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to it: see section 166-90.

Note 3: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete income years.

Meaning of test period and test time

(2) The company’s test period is the period starting at the time that is the reference time for the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC or section 165-115L, as the case may be, and ending at each of the following times (the test time):

the end of the income year in which the reference time occurred;

the end of a later income year;

the *end of a corporate change in the company.

Note 1: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

Note 2: See section 166-175 to work out whether there is a corporate change.

Substantial continuity of ownership

A changeover time or an alteration time is taken not to have occurred in respect of the company during the test period if there is substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the test period and the *test time.

Note: See section 166-145 to work out whether there is substantial continuity of ownership.

No substantial continuity of ownership

Subsections (5) and (6) have effect if there is no substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the test period and the *test time.

The *test time is taken to have been a changeover time or an alteration time, as the case may be, in respect of the company.

No other time during the test period is a changeover time or an alteration time in respect of the company.

166-90 Companies can choose that this Subdivision is not to apply to them

(1) The company can choose that Subdivision 165-CC or 165-CD is to apply to it in respect of a *test period for the purposes of section 166-80 without the modifications made by this Subdivision.

The company must choose on or before the day it lodges its income tax return for the income year in which the test period begins, or before a later day if the Commissioner allows.

Subdivision 166-D — Tests for finding out whether the widely held or eligible Division 166 company has maintained the same owners

Guide to Subdivision 166-D

166-135 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision has the tests to work out whether a widely held or eligible Division 166 company has maintained the same owners as between different times. (Subdivision 166-E has rules which make it easier for the company to satisfy these tests.)

This Subdivision also defines when there has been a corporate change in the company.

Table of sections

The ownership tests: substantial continuity of ownership

166-145 The ownership tests: substantial continuity of ownership

166-165 Relationship with rules in Division 165

Corporate change in a company

166-175 Corporate change in a company

The ownership tests: substantial continuity of ownership

166-145 The ownership tests: substantial continuity of ownership

(1) There is substantial continuity of ownership of the company as between the start of the *test period and another time in the test period if (and only if) the conditions in this section are met.

Note: Section 166-165, and Subdivision 166-E, affect how this section is applied.

Voting power

There must be persons (none of them companies or trustees) who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company at the start of the test period. Also, those persons must have had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company immediately after the other time in the test period.

Note 1: To work out who had more than 50% of the voting power, see section 165-150.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

Rights to dividends

There must be persons (none of them companies) who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends at the start of the test period. Also, those persons must have had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends immediately after the other time in the test period.

Note 1: To work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s dividends, see section 165-155.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to dividends in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends.

Rights to capital distributions

There must be persons (none of them companies) who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions at the start of the test period. Also, those persons must have had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions immediately after the other time in the test period.

Note 1: To work out who had rights to more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions, see section 165-160.

Note 2: Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to capital distributions.

When to apply the test

(5) To work out whether a condition in this section was satisfied at a time (the ownership test time), apply the alterative test for that condition.

Note: For the alternative test, see subsections 165-150(2), 165-155(2) and 165-160(2).

Conditions in subsections (3) and (4) satisfied by non-profit and mutual companies

If the company is:

a non-profit company; or

a mutual affiliate company; or

a mutual insurance company;

during the whole of the test period, the conditions in subsections (3) and (4) are taken to have been satisfied by the company.

166-165 Relationship with rules in Division 165

The provisions of Subdivision 165-D (other than section 165-165) apply for the purposes of the tests in section 166-145.

The following provisions apply for the purposes of the tests in section 166-145 as if the reference to a particular time were a reference to the ownership test time:

section 165-180 (which is about arrangements affecting beneficial ownership of shares);

subsection 165-185(2) (which treats some shares as never having carried rights);

subsection 165-190(2) (which treats some shares as always having carried rights).

Corporate change in a company

166-175 Corporate change in a company

Meaning of corporate change

(1) There is a corporate change in a company if:

there is a takeover bid for *shares in the company; or

there is a scheme of arrangement, involving more than 50% of the company’s shares, that has been approved by a court; or

(c) there is any other arrangement, involving the acquisition of more than 50% of the company’s shares, that is regulated under the Corporations Act 2001 or a *foreign law; or

there is an issue of *shares in the company that results in an increase of 20% or more in:

the issued share capital of the company; or

the number of the company’s shares on issue; or

there is a corporate change in another company which beneficially owns one or more of the following stakes in the first company:

a voting stake that carries rights to more than 50% of the voting power of the first company;

a dividend stake that carries rights to receive more than 50% of any dividends the first company may pay;

a capital stake that carries rights to receive more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the first company;

(whether the other company owns those stakes directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities).

When a corporate change ends

Note: For paragraph (e), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

(2) A *corporate change ends:

if paragraph (1)(a) applies (or paragraph (1)(e) applies because of paragraph (1)(a))—at the latest time when a bid period of the takeover bid ends; and

if paragraph (1)(b) or (c) applies (or paragraph (1)(e) applies because of paragraph (1)(b) or (c))—when the scheme of arrangement or other arrangement ends; and

if paragraph (1)(d) applies (or paragraph (1)(e) applies because of paragraph (1)(d))—when the offer period for the issue of *shares ends.

Subdivision 166-E — Concessional tracing rules

Guide to Subdivision 166-E

166-215 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision has rules which make it easier for a widely held or eligible Division 166 company to satisfy the ownership tests in Subdivision 166-D.

Special concessional tracing rules deem entities to hold the following stakes in the company so that the company does not have to trace through to the beneficial owners of the stakes:

stakes of less than 10% in the company;

stakes of between 10% and 50% that are held by widely held companies;

stakes that are held by complying superannuation funds, complying approved deposit funds, special companies and managed investment schemes;

stakes in interposed foreign listed companies that are held as bearer shares;

stakes in interposed foreign listed companies that are held by depository entities.

Table of sections

Application of this Subdivision

166-220 Application of this Subdivision

Stakes of less than 10% in the tested company

166-225 Direct stakes of less than 10% in the tested company

166-230 Indirect stakes of less than 10% in the tested company

166-235 Voting, dividend and capital stakes

Stakes held directly and/or indirectly by widely held companies

166-240 Stakes held directly and/or indirectly by widely held companies

166-245 Stakes held by other entities

When identity of foreign stakeholders is not known

166-255 Bearer shares in foreign listed companies

166-260 Depository entities holding stakes in foreign listed companies

Other rules relating to voting power and rights

166-265 Persons who actually control voting power or have rights are taken not to control power or have rights

166-270 Single notional entity stakeholders taken to have minimum voting control, dividend rights and capital rights

166-272 Same shares or interests to be held

When the rules in this Subdivision do not apply

166-275 Rules in this Subdivision intended to be concessional

166-280 Controlled test companies

Application of this Subdivision

166-220 Application of this Subdivision

This Subdivision applies to a company (the tested company) that is:

a *widely held company at all times during the income year; or

an eligible Division 166 company at all times during the income year; or

a widely held company for a part of the income year and an eligible Division 166 company for the rest of the income year.

Note: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete income years.

Stakes of less than 10% in the tested company

166-225 Direct stakes of less than 10% in the tested company

This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if:

a voting stake that carries rights to less than 10% of the voting power in the company is held directly in the company; or

a dividend stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any dividends that the company may pay is held directly in the company; or

a capital stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any distribution of capital of the company is held directly in the company.

Note 1: Other rules might affect this provision: see sections 166-270, 166-275 and 166-280.

Note 2: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

Notional shareholder

The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the ownership test time, a single notional entity:

directly controlled the voting power that is carried by each such voting stake; and

had the right to receive, for its own benefit and directly:

any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of each such dividend stake; and

any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of each such capital stake; and

were a person (other than a company).

Note: The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265.

To avoid doubt, the single notional entity mentioned in subsection (2) is a different single notional entity from the one mentioned in section 165-207 and the one mentioned in section 166-255.

166-230 Indirect stakes of less than 10% in the tested company

This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume that:

(a) an entity (the stakeholder) indirectly holds any of these stakes in the tested company:

a voting stake that carries rights to less than 10% of the voting power in the company; or

a dividend stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any dividends that the company may pay; or

a capital stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any distribution of capital of the company; and

either:

(i) the stakeholder indirectly holds the stake in the tested company by holding *shares directly in a company (the top interposed entity) that is interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company; or

(ii) the stakeholder indirectly holds the stake in the tested company by holding another interest directly in an entity (the top interposed entity) that is not a company and that is interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company.

Note 1: There might also be other entities interposed between the top interposed entity and the tested company.

Note 2: Other rules might affect this provision: see subsection (3) and sections 166-272, 166-275 and 166-280.

Note 3: For paragraph (a), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

Top interposed entity deemed to hold stakes directly in the tested company

The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the ownership test time:

if the stake is a voting stake—the top interposed entity controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by that stake at that time; and

if the stake is a dividend stake—the top interposed entity *indirectly had the right to receive, for its own benefit, any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of that stake at that time; and

if the stake is a capital stake—the top interposed entity indirectly had the right to receive, for its own benefit, any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of that stake at that time; and

in any case—the top interposed entity were a person (other than a company).

Note: The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265.

Acquisition of top interposed entity by another entity

If:

(a) a new entity (the new interposed entity) acquires all the *shares or other interests in the top interposed entity (the old interposed entity); and

the new interposed entity has the same classes of shares or other interests as the old interposed entity; and

if the new interposed entity is a company—the shares are not *redeemable shares; and

in any case—each stakeholder holds the same proportion, or a reasonably equivalent proportion, of the total *voting stakes, dividend stakes or *capital stakes in the new interposed entity immediately after the acquisition as the stakeholder held in the old interposed entity immediately before the acquisition;

then, at all times that the old interposed entity held or is taken to have held a stake in the tested company, the new interposed entity is taken to have held that stake.

Except for the purposes of determining whether a time is an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L), section 166-272 (which is about the same shares or interests) is to be disregarded when applying subsection (3).

Acquisition of tested company by new interposed entity

If:

(a) a new entity (the new interposed entity) that is a company acquires all the *shares in the tested company; and

assuming that the time immediately before the acquisition had been an ownership test time, section 166-225 would have applied the tests to the tested company as if there were a single notional entity as described in subsection 166-225(2) in respect of some or all of the *voting stakes, dividend stakes or *capital stakes in the tested company; and

the new interposed entity has the same classes of shares as the tested company; and

the shares are not *redeemable shares; and

each entity that held a proportion of the voting stakes, dividend stakes or capital stakes in the tested company immediately before the acquisition (disregarding section 166-225) holds the same proportion, or a reasonably equivalent proportion, of that kind of stake in the new interposed entity immediately after the acquisition;

then, at all times that the single notional entity mentioned in paragraph (b) held or is taken to have held a stake in the tested company, the new interposed entity is taken to have held that stake.

Except for the purposes of determining whether a time is an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L), section 166-272 (which is about the same shares or interests) is to be disregarded when applying subsection (5) of this section.

166-235 Voting, dividend and capital stakes

Meaning of voting stake

(1) An entity holds a voting stake in a company if:

the entity is the registered holder of *shares in the company; and

the shares carry rights to exercise voting power in the company.

(2) An entity (the stakeholder) also holds a voting stake in a company if:

one or more other entities are interposed between the company and the stakeholder; and

the stakeholder controls, or is able to control, voting power in the company indirectly through the interposed entity or entities.

Note: For working out the size of a voting stake (for example, for paragraph 166-225(1)(a)), Subdivision 167-B has special rules for working out voting power in a company whose shares do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

Meaning of dividend stake

(3) An entity holds a dividend stake in a company if:

the entity is the registered holder of *shares in the company; and

the shares carry rights to all or any *dividends that the company may pay.

(4) An entity (the stakeholder) also holds a dividend stake in a company if:

one or more other entities are interposed between the company and the stakeholder; and

the stakeholder has the right to receive, for its own benefit and *indirectly through the interposed entity or entities, all or any *dividends that the company may pay.

Note: For working out the size of a dividend stake (for example, for paragraph 166-225(1)(b)), Subdivision 167-A has special rules for a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends.

Meaning of capital stake

(5) An entity holds a capital stake in a company if:

the entity is the registered holder of *shares in the company; and

the shares carry rights to all or any of a distribution of capital of the company.

(6) An entity (the stakeholder) also holds a capital stake in a company if:

one or more other entities are interposed between the company and the stakeholder; and

the stakeholder has the right to receive, for its own benefit and *indirectly through the interposed entity or entities, all or any of a distribution of capital of the company.

Note: For working out the size of a capital stake (for example, for paragraph 166-225(1)(c)), Subdivision 167-A has special rules for a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to capital distributions.

Stakes held by nominees

For the purposes of sections 166-225 and 166-230, if:

(a) an entity (the nominee entity) holds a *voting stake, a *dividend stake, or a *capital stake, in a company; and

the nominee entity is itself a company; and

the nominee entity holds the stake as a nominee for more than one other entity;

then, for each entity for whom a part of the stake is held by the nominee entity, that entity’s part of the stake may be treated instead as a separate stake.

Stakes held directly and/or indirectly by widely held companies

166-240 Stakes held directly and/or indirectly by widely held companies

This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if a *widely held company directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities), or both directly and indirectly, holds any of the following:

a voting stake that carries rights to between 10% and 50% (inclusive) of the voting power in the company;

a dividend stake that carries the right to receive between 10% and 50% (inclusive) of any dividends that the company may pay;

a capital stake that carries the right to receive between 10% and 50% (inclusive) of any distribution of capital of the company.

Note 1: Other rules might affect this provision: see subsections (3) and (4) and sections 166-272, 166-275 and 166-280.

Note 2: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the ownership test time:

if the stake is a voting stake—the *widely held company controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by that stake at that time; and

if the stake is a dividend stake—the widely held company had the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly), for its own benefit, any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of that stake at that time; and

if the stake is a capital stake—the widely held company had the right to receive (whether directly or indirectly), for its own benefit, any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of that stake at that time; and

in any case—the widely held company were a person (other than a company).

Note: The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265.

Exception

This section does not apply in respect of a *widely held company if the company is not a widely held company for the whole income year in which the ownership test time occurs.

Note: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete periods.

Acquisition of widely held company by another entity

If:

a new company acquires all the *shares in the *widely held company; and

immediately before the acquisition, the shares in the widely held company were listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; and

immediately after the acquisition, the shares in the new company are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; and

the new company has the same classes of shares (not being *redeemable shares) as the widely held company; and

each entity that held stakes in the widely held company immediately before the acquisition holds the same proportion of the total *voting stakes, dividend stakes or *capital stakes in the new company immediately after the acquisition as the entity held in the widely held company immediately before the acquisition;

then, at all times that the widely held company held or is taken to have held a stake in the tested company, the new company is taken to have held that stake.

Except for the purposes of determining whether a time is an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L), section 166-272 (which is about same shares or interests) is to be disregarded when applying subsection (4).

166-245 Stakes held by other entities

This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if:

an entity mentioned in subsection (2) directly or indirectly (through one or more interposed entities) holds a voting stake, a dividend stake or a capital stake in the company; and

neither the entity nor another entity has, under section 166-225, 166-230 or 166-240, been taken to control voting power or have rights in respect of the stake; and

the entity mentioned in subsection (2) satisfies the condition in subsection (3).

Note: Other rules might affect this provision: see sections 166-272, 166-275 and 166-280.

For the purposes of subsection (1), these are the entities:

a superannuation fund; and

an approved deposit fund; and

a *special company; and

(d) a *managed investment scheme; and

any other entity, or entity of a kind, prescribed by the regulations.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), an entity satisfies the condition in this subsection if at all times during the income year of the tested company in which the ownership test time occurs:

if the entity is a superannuation fund:

the fund is a complying superannuation fund; or

the fund is a superannuation fund that is established in a foreign country and is regulated under a foreign law; or

if the entity is an approved deposit fund—the fund is a complying approved deposit fund; or

if the entity is a *special company—the company is a special company; or

if the entity is a managed investment scheme:

the scheme is registered under the Corporations Act 2001; or

the entity is recognised, under a foreign law relating to corporate regulation, as an entity with a similar status to a managed investment scheme; or

if the entity is an entity, or an entity of a kind, prescribed by the regulations—the entity meets any conditions prescribed by the regulations.

Note: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete periods.

If the entity has 10 members or fewer

If the entity has 10 *members or fewer, the tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the ownership test time:

if the stake is a voting stake—each member controls, or is able to control, an equal proportion of the voting power in the tested company that is carried by that stake at that time; and

if the stake is a dividend stake—each member had the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly), for its own benefit, an equal proportion of any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of that stake at that time; and

if the stake is a capital stake—each member had the right to receive (whether directly or indirectly), for its own benefit, an equal proportion of any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of that stake at that time; and

in any case—each member were a person (other than a company or a trustee).

Note 1: If each member’s proportion of the voting power, the dividends or the distributions is less than 10%, then subsections (5) and (6) apply instead.

Note 2: The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265.

If the entity has more than 10 members etc.

The ownership tests are applied as set out in subsection (6) if:

the entity has more than 10 *members; or

under subsection (4):

the proportion of the voting power in the company that each member controls, or is able to control, is less than 10% of the total voting power; or

the proportion of the *dividends that the tested company may pay for the benefit of each member is less than 10% of the total dividends; or

the proportion of the distributions of capital that the tested company may pay for the benefit of each member is less than 10% of the total distributions.

The ownership tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the ownership test time:

if the stake is a voting stake—the entity controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by that stake at that time; and

if the stake is a dividend stake—the entity had the right to receive (whether directly or *indirectly), for its own benefit, any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of that stake at that time; and

if the stake is a capital stake—the entity had the right to receive (whether directly or indirectly), for its own benefit, any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of that stake at that time; and

in any case—the entity were a person (other than a company or a trustee).

Note: The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265.

When identity of foreign stakeholders is not known

166-255 Bearer shares in foreign listed companies

This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if:

at the ownership test time, it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that persons (none of them companies or trustees) hold a voting stake, a dividend stake or a capital stake in the tested company; and

an entity has not, under section 166-225, 166-230, 166-240 or 166-245, been taken to control voting power or have rights in respect of the stake; and

(c) another company (the foreign listed company) is interposed, at that time, between those persons and the tested company; and

at all times during the income year of the tested company in which the ownership test time occurs, the *principal class of shares in the foreign listed company is listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; and

at the ownership test time:

voting stakes that carry rights to 50% or more of the voting power in the foreign listed company; or

dividend stakes that carry rights to receive 50% or more of any dividends that the foreign listed company may pay; or

capital stakes that carry rights to receive 50% or more of any distribution of capital of the foreign listed company;

as the case requires, are directly held by way of bearer shares; and

the beneficial owners of some or all of those bearer shares have not been disclosed to the foreign listed company.

Note 1: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

Note 2: Other rules might affect this provision: see sections 166-270, 166-275 and 166-280.

Note 3: For paragraph (e), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the ownership test time, for each of those bearer shares whose owners have not been disclosed:

a single notional entity controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by those shares at that time; and

the entity *indirectly had the right to receive, for its own benefit:

any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of those shares at that time; and

any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of those shares at that time; and

the entity were a person (other than a company).

Note: The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265.

To avoid doubt, the single notional entity mentioned in subsection (2) is a different single notional entity from the one mentioned in section 165-207 and the one mentioned in section 166-225.

166-260 Depository entities holding stakes in foreign listed companies

This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to the tested company if:

at the ownership test time, it is the case, or it is reasonable to assume, that persons (none of them companies or trustees) have a voting stake, a dividend stake or a capital stake in the tested company; and

an entity has not, under section 166-225, 166-230, 166-240, 166-245 or 166-255, been taken to control voting power or have rights in respect of the stake; and

(c) another company (the foreign listed company) is interposed, at that time, between those persons and the tested company; and

at all times during the income year of the tested company in which the ownership test time occurs, the *principal class of shares in the foreign listed company is listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; and

at the ownership test time:

voting stakes that carry rights to 50% or more of the voting power in the foreign listed company; or

dividend stakes that carry rights to receive 50% or more of any dividends that the foreign listed company may pay; or

capital stakes that carry rights to receive 50% or more of any distribution of capital of the foreign listed company;

as the case requires, are directly held by one or more *depository entities (see subsection (3)); and

a law of a foreign country, or a part of a foreign country, in which the approved stock exchange is located, prevents the disclosure of the beneficial owners of some or all of those shares that are held by the depository entities; and

the beneficial owners of some or all of the shares held by the depository entities have not been disclosed to the foreign listed company.

Note 1: See section 165-255 for the rule about incomplete test periods.

Note 2: This rule might not apply in all circumstances: see sections 166-275 and 166-280.

Note 3: For paragraph (e), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

The tests are applied to the tested company as if, at the ownership test time, for each of those *shares held by a depository entity whose owners have not been disclosed, the depository entity:

controls, or is able to control, the voting power in the tested company that is carried by those shares at that time; and

*indirectly had the right to receive, for its own benefit:

any *dividends the tested company may pay in respect of those shares at that time; and

any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of those shares at that time; and

were a person (other than a company).

Note: The persons who actually control the voting power and have rights to dividends and capital are taken not to control that power or have those rights: see section 166-265.

If the effect of subsection (2) is that the depository entity is taken to hold:

a voting stake that carries rights to less than 10% of the voting power in the tested company; or

a dividend stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any dividends that the tested company may pay; or

a capital stake that carries the right to receive less than 10% of any distribution of capital of the tested company;

then neither section 166-225 nor section 166-230 applies in respect of that stake.

Note: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

(4) If the *depository entity (the old depository entity) is subsequently replaced by another depository entity (the new depository entity), then, at all times that the old depository entity held or is taken to have held a stake in the tested company, the new entity is taken to have held that stake.

(5) A depository entity is an entity:

that is a central securities repository; and

that provides custody of share certificates; and

that provides services for the exchange of shares.

Other rules relating to voting power and rights

166-265 Persons who actually control voting power or have rights are taken not to control power or have rights

If any of sections 166-225, 166-230, 166-240, 166-245, 166-255 or 166-260 apply, the ownership tests in section 166-145 are also applied to the tested company as if, at the ownership test time:

(a) the persons who control, or are able to control, the voting power in the tested company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) that is carried by each *voting stake in the tested company mentioned in that section had not had that control; and

the persons who have the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities):

any *dividends that the tested company may pay in respect of each dividend stake in the tested company mentioned in that section; and

any distributions of capital of the tested company in respect of each capital stake in the tested company mentioned in that section;

had not had that right.

166-270 Single notional entity stakeholders taken to have minimum voting control, dividend rights and capital rights

Minimum control of voting power

If:

the ownership test time is after the start of the test period; and

a single notional entity mentioned in section 166-225 or 166-255 has voting power in a company; and

the voting power that the entity has at the ownership test time is greater than the voting power that the entity had at the start of the test period;

then the entity is taken to have voting power in the company at the ownership test time only to the extent that it had it at the start of the test period.

Minimum percentage of rights to dividends and capital

If:

the ownership test time is after the start of the test period; and

a single notional entity mentioned in section 166-225 or 166-255 has a percentage of rights to the *dividends or distributions of capital of a company; and

(c) the percentage that the entity has rights to at the ownership test time is greater than the percentage (the lower percentage) of the dividends or distributions of capital of the company that the entity had rights to at the start of the test period;

then the entity is taken to have rights to the lower percentage of the dividends or distributions of capital at the ownership test time.

Acquisition of tested company by new interposed entity—minimum control of voting power

If:

the ownership test time is after the start of the test period; and

at the start of the test period, a single notional entity mentioned in section 166-225 had voting power in a company (disregarding subsection 166-230(5)); and

under subsection 166-230(5), a new interposed entity is taken to have held that voting power at the start of the test period; and

at the ownership test time, the voting power in the company held indirectly by stakeholders covered by subsection 166-230(1) is greater than the voting power that the single notional entity had at the start of the test period;

then the stakeholders referred to in paragraph (d) are, collectively, taken to have indirect voting power in the company at the ownership test time only to the extent that the single notional entity had it at the start of the test period.

Acquisition of tested company by new interposed entity—minimum percentage of rights to dividends and capital

If:

the ownership test time is after the start of the test period; and

at the start of the test period, a single notional entity mentioned in section 166-225 had a percentage of rights to the *dividends or distributions of capital of a company (disregarding subsection 166-230(5)); and

under subsection 166-230(5), a new interposed entity is taken to have had those rights at the start of the test period; and

(d) the percentage that stakeholders covered by subsection 166-230(1) have rights to indirectly at the ownership test time is greater than the percentage (the lower percentage) of the dividends or distributions of capital of the company that the single notional entity had rights to at the start of the test period;

then the stakeholders referred to in paragraph (d) are, collectively, taken to have indirect rights to the lower percentage of the dividends or distributions of capital at the ownership test time.

166-272 Same shares or interests to be held

Application

(1) This section modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 are applied to a *voting stake, a *dividend stake or a *capital stake in the tested company held by one of the following entities (the stakeholder):

a top interposed entity mentioned in section 166-230 (which is about indirect stakes of less than 10%);

a *widely held company mentioned in section 166-240;

an entity mentioned in subsection 166-245(2) (which is about stakes held by other entities);

a depository entity mentioned in section 166-260;

(whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities).

Exactly the same shares or interests must continue to be held

For the purpose of determining whether the tested company has satisfied a condition or whether a time is a changeover time or an alteration time in respect of the tested company:

a condition that has to be satisfied is not satisfied; or

a time that, apart from this subsection, would not be a changeover time or alteration time is taken to be a changeover time or alteration time, as the case may be;

unless, at all relevant times:

the only *shares in the tested company that are taken into account are exactly the same shares and are held by the same persons; and

the only interests (including shares) in any other entity that is interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company that are taken into account are exactly the same interests and are held by the same persons.

What happens in case of share splitting

If:

(a) a particular *share (an old share) in a company of which the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, is the holder at the start of the *test period is divided into 2 or more new shares during that period; and

the stakeholder or entity becomes the holder of each of the new shares immediately after the division takes place and remains the holder until the end of that period;

the new shares are taken to be exactly the same shares as the old share.

What happens in case of splitting of units in a unit trust

If:

(a) a particular unit (an old unit) in a unit trust of which the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, is the holder at the start of the *test period is divided into 2 or more new units during that period; and

the stakeholder or entity becomes the holder of each of the new units immediately after the division takes place and remains the holder until the end of that period;

the new units are taken to be exactly the same units as the old unit.

What happens in case of consolidation of shares

If:

(a) a particular *share (an old share) in a company of which the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, is the holder at the start of the *test period, and other shares (each of which is also called an old share) in the company of which the stakeholder or entity is the holder at the start of that period, are consolidated into a new share during that period; and

the stakeholder or entity becomes the holder of the new share immediately after the consolidation takes place;

the new share is taken to be exactly the same share as the old shares.

What happens in case of consolidation of units in a unit trust

If:

(a) a particular unit (an old unit) in a unit trust of which the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, is the holder at the start of the *test period and other units (each of which is also called an old unit) in the trust of which the stakeholder or entity is the holder at the start of that period are consolidated into a new unit during that period; and

the stakeholder or entity becomes the holder of the new unit immediately after the consolidation takes place;

the new unit is taken to be exactly the same unit as the old units.

Totals of shares or rights not affected

This section does not affect how *shares, and rights carried by shares, are counted for the purpose of determining:

the total voting power in the tested company; or

the total dividends that the tested company may pay; or

the total distributions of capital of the tested company.

Conditions in section 166-145 may be treated as having been satisfied in certain circumstances

If any of the conditions in section 166-145 have not been satisfied, those conditions are taken to have been satisfied if:

they would have been satisfied except for the operation of subsection (2) of this section; and

the tested company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that less than 50% of:

the *tax loss; or

the *notional loss; or

the bad debt; or

the unrealised net loss (within the meaning of section 165-115E);

as the case requires, has been reflected in deductions, capital losses, or reduced assessable income, that occurred, or could occur in future, because of the happening of any CGT event in relation to any *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests held in the tested company by the stakeholder, or an entity interposed between the stakeholder and the tested company, during the test period.

Subsection (8) not to apply for purpose of determining whether an alteration time has occurred

However, subsection (8) does not apply in relation to any of the conditions in section 166-145 in so far as those conditions have effect for the purpose of determining whether an alteration time (within the meaning of section 165-115L) has occurred.

Time of happening of CGT event

The happening of any CGT event in relation to a *direct equity interest or *indirect equity interest in the tested company that results in the failure of the tested company to satisfy a condition in section 166-145 is taken, for the purposes of paragraph (8)(b), to have occurred during the test period.

When the rules in this Subdivision do not apply

166-275 Rules in this Subdivision intended to be concessional

A company is taken to have met the conditions in section 165-12, paragraph 165-35(a) or section 165-123, or a changeover time or an alteration time is taken not to have occurred in respect of a company, (as the case requires), if:

a tracing rule modifies how the ownership tests in section 166-145 apply to the tested company in respect of a voting stake, a dividend stake or a capital stake; and

the company fails the tests (whether at the time of applying the tracing rule or at another time); and

the company believes, on reasonable grounds, that if the tracing rule did not modify how the tests apply to the company in respect of that stake, it would not fail the tests.

Example: 11 people own shareholdings of 9% in the listed company. Under section 166-225, one notional shareholder is deemed to hold all of those shareholdings. 2 of the people sell their shareholdings so that 9 of the original 11 people now own shareholdings of 11%. Without the rule in this section, the company would fail the ownership tests (as the rule in section 166-225 no longer applies).

166-280 Controlled test companies

A tracing rule does not modify how the ownership tests in section 166-145 apply to the tested company in respect of all or part of the voting power in the tested company, or all or some of the rights to *dividends of, or capital in, the tested company, if:

either:

(i) an entity (the controlling entity) directly holds that power or has those rights; or

(ii) an entity (the controlling entity) indirectly holds that power or has those rights through one or more interposed entities; and

(b) the tested company is sufficiently influenced (within the meaning of paragraph 318(6)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) by the controlling entity.

Note: However, a tracing rule can modify how the ownership tests in section 166-145 apply to the tested company in respect of voting power or dividend or capital rights held by entities other than controlling entities.

A tracing rule does not modify how the ownership tests in section 166-145 apply to the tested company in respect of all or part of the voting power in the tested company if:

the tested company is a *widely held company; and

that voting power:

is more than 25% of the total voting power in the tested company and is controlled (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) by a natural person, together with his or her *associates; or

is more than 50% of the total voting power in the tested company and is controlled (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) by a trustee or company, together with its associates.

Division 167 — Companies whose shares carry unequal rights to dividends, capital distributions or voting power

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 167

167-A Rights to dividends or capital distributions

167-B Voting power

Guide to Division 167

167-1 What this Division is about

This Division modifies the way conditions relating to this Part apply to companies whose shares:

do not all carry the same rights to dividends or capital distributions; or

do not all carry the same voting rights, or do not carry all of the voting rights in the company.

Subdivision 167-A — Rights to dividends or capital distributions

Guide to Subdivision 167-A

167-5 What this Subdivision is about

Companies whose shares do not all carry the same rights to dividends or capital distributions may test the possession of those rights similarly to companies whose shares are all of a single class with the same rights.

167-7 Simplified outline of this Subdivision

If a condition of the continuity of ownership test cannot be worked out for a company:

because of its unequal share structure; or

because of a holding company’s unequal share structure;

an entity can choose to reconsider that condition in up to 3 ways.

The first way involves disregarding debt interests.

The second way involves disregarding debt interests and secondary share classes.

The third way involves disregarding those shares, and treating the remaining shares as carrying certain percentages of the rights to receive dividends and capital distributions.

The second way can only be tried after the first way, while the third way can only be tried after the second way.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

167-10 When this Subdivision applies

167-15 First way—disregard debt interests

167-20 Second way—also disregard secondary share classes

167-25 Third way—treat remaining shares as having fixed rights to dividends and capital distributions

167-30 Fixing rights if practicable to work out market values

167-35 Fixing rights if impracticable to work out market values etc.

167-40 The valuing times for conditions listed in subsection 167-10(1)

Operative provisions

167-10 When this Subdivision applies

When this Subdivision applies

This Subdivision applies in relation to a company if:

(a) as described in the following table, a condition (the unsatisfied condition) cannot be worked out for the company for a particular period (the test period); and

at one or more times during the test period:

the company; or

a company that has a shareholding interest in it;

(an unequally structured company) has an *unequal share structure.

Note: Each of these conditions is about rights to the company’s dividends or capital distributions.

This Subdivision also applies in relation to a company if:

(a) as described in the following table, a condition (the unsatisfied condition) cannot be worked out for the company for a particular time (the test time); and

(b) at the test time, the company, or a company that has a *shareholding interest in it, (an unequally structured company) has an *unequal share structure.

Note 1: Each of these conditions is about rights to the company’s dividends or capital distributions.

Note 2: If a condition cannot be worked out for several of the times to which the provision relates, apply this Subdivision separately for each of those times.

Meaning of unequal share structure

(3) A company has an unequal share structure at a particular time if, at that time:

the company’s *shares do not all carry the same rights to *dividends, or capital distributions, of the company; or

some or all of the company’s shares carry discretionary rights to dividends, or capital distributions, of the company; or

the company is a co-operative company that has *on issue one or more interests (other than shares) in the company’s capital.

167-15 First way—disregard debt interests

The unsatisfied condition may be reconsidered by disregarding any *debt interests in each unequally structured company.

The way an entity prepares its income tax return is sufficient evidence of it choosing to work out the unsatisfied condition under subsection (1).

167-20 Second way—also disregard secondary share classes

This section applies in relation to each unequally structured company if:

despite section 167-15, the unsatisfied condition cannot be worked out; and

(b) on the last day of the test period or at the test time (as appropriate), there is *on issue in that company one or more classes of *shares (the secondary share classes) other than:

the class or classes of ordinary or common shares that represent the majority of that company’s value; and

*debt interests; and

it is reasonable to conclude that the total *market value of the secondary share classes does not exceed 25% of the total market value of all of that company’s shares (other than debt interests); and

for one or more of the secondary share classes, it is reasonable to conclude that the market value of each of them does not exceed 10% of the total market value of all of that company’s shares (other than debt interests).

Note: This section can apply separately for each unequally structured company.

For the purposes of subsection (1), use *market values on the last day of the test period, or at the test time, (as appropriate).

The unsatisfied condition may be reconsidered by disregarding:

those of the secondary share classes that, under paragraph (1)(d), caused this section to apply; and

any *debt interests in that company.

The way an entity prepares its income tax return is sufficient evidence of it choosing to work out the unsatisfied condition under subsection (3).

167-25 Third way—treat remaining shares as having fixed rights to dividends and capital distributions

When this section applies

This section applies if, despite sections 167-15 and 167-20, the unsatisfied condition cannot be worked out for the test period or test time (as appropriate).

How to fix rights to dividends and capital distributions

The unsatisfied condition may be reconsidered by applying subsections (3) and (4) to each unequally structured company. When doing this for an unsatisfied condition listed in subsection 167-10(1), assume:

that the test period consists only of the valuing times worked out under section 167-40; and

that each of those valuing times is a test time.

Firstly, disregard any *debt interests in that company and any of its *shares that can be disregarded under subsection 167-20(3).

Secondly, treat each of that company’s remaining *shares *on issue at the test time as having at that time the percentage of the rights to receive *dividends, and capital distributions, worked out either:

under section 167-30; or

under section 167-35 if:

it is not reasonably practicable to work out the market values of each of those remaining shares; or

the sum of the *market values of all of those remaining shares is nil.

Note: The remaining shares are those remaining after disregarding the shares mentioned in subsection (3).

Evidence of a choice under this section

The way an entity prepares its income tax return is sufficient evidence of it choosing to work out the unsatisfied condition under this section.

167-30 Fixing rights if practicable to work out market values

Each remaining *share is treated at the test time as carrying the following percentage of the rights to receive *dividends, and capital distributions, from the company:

where market value is worked out at the test time.

167-35 Fixing rights if impracticable to work out market values etc.

Each remaining *share is treated at the test time as carrying such a percentage of the rights to receive *dividends, and capital distributions, from the company as is reasonable worked out:

at the test time; and

having regard to the purpose of the unsatisfied condition.

In working out what is reasonable for subsection (1), have regard to the following:

the company’s *constitution;

any agreements between the company and either or both of the following:

any or all of the shareholders in the company;

any or all of the *associates of a shareholder in the company;

any statement by the company of its policy in paying *dividends or making capital distributions;

the ability of an entity to control (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) how the company pays dividends or makes capital distributions;

how the company has previously paid dividends or made capital distributions;

whether all classes of *shares carry substantially the same rights to receive dividends and capital distributions;

the principle that:

a *tax loss or bad debt should only be deductible; and

a net capital loss should only be applied;

if a majority of the persons entitled to the benefits of dividend and capital distributions of the company is maintained.

167-40 The valuing times for conditions listed in subsection 167-10(1)

For the purposes of subsection 167-25(2), the valuing times for the test period are:

the time the test period starts; and

the time just before, and the time just after, any of the following events that happen during the test period:

the issue of *shares of a class of remaining shares;

the variation of rights attached to any remaining shares to receive *dividends or capital distributions;

the redemption or cancellation of any remaining shares; and

the time the test period ends.

For paragraph (1)(b), disregard a time if it is outside the test period.

Subdivision 167-B — Voting power

Guide to Subdivision 167-B

167-75 What this Subdivision is about

Companies whose shares:

do not all carry the same voting rights; or

do not carry all of the voting rights in the company;

may test the possession of voting rights similarly to companies whose shares are all of a single class with the same rights.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

167-80 When this Subdivision applies

167-85 Different method for working out voting power

167-90 Dual listed companies

Operative provisions

167-80 When this Subdivision applies

For the purposes of this Part, voting power in a company at one or more times can be worked out under section 167-85 if:

the company’s *shares do not all, at those times, carry the same voting rights for all matters affecting the company; or

the company’s shares do not carry all of the voting rights in the company;

whether this is because of the company’s *constitution, an arrangement or some other reason.

Note: Disregard dual listed company voting shares (see section 167-90).

Further, if those times are consecutive times during a period, the voting power in the company can be worked out under section 167-85 as if that period consists only of:

the time that period starts; and

each later time (if any) during that period when there is a change in the maximum number of votes any entity could cast on a poll described in paragraph 167-85(1)(a) or (b).

167-85 Different method for working out voting power

An entity may choose whether voting power in the company at a particular time is worked out solely by reference to:

the maximum number of votes that could be cast on a poll on the election of a director of the company, if such a poll were to be held at that time; or

the maximum number of votes that could be cast on a poll on an amendment to the company’s *constitution, other than an amendment altering:

the rights carried by any of the company’s *shares; or

other forms of voting power in the company;

if such a poll were to be held at that time.

The way the entity prepares its income tax return is sufficient evidence of it making a choice under subsection (1).

167-90 Dual listed companies

For the purposes of this Subdivision, disregard *shares that are *dual listed company voting shares.

Division 170 — Treatment of certain company groups for income tax purposes

Table of Subdivisions

170-A Transfer of tax losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies

170-B Transfer of net capital losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies

170-C Provisions applying to both transfers of tax losses and transfers of net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies

170-D Transactions by a company that is a member of a linked group

Subdivision 170-A — Transfer of tax losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies

Guide to Subdivision 170-A

170-1 What this Subdivision is about

A company can transfer a surplus amount of its tax loss to another company so that the other company can deduct the amount in the income year of the transfer. One of the companies must be an Australian branch of a foreign bank, and both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group.

Table of sections

170-5 Basic principles for transferring tax losses

Effect of transferring a tax loss

170-10 When a company can transfer a tax loss

170-15 Income company is taken to have incurred transferred loss

170-20 Who can deduct transferred loss

170-25 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss

Conditions for transfer

170-30 Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc.

170-32 Tax loss incurred by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A

170-33 Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies

170-35 The loss company

170-40 The income company

170-42 If the income company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group

170-45 Maximum amount that can be transferred

170-50 Transfer by written agreement

170-55 Losses must be transferred in order they are incurred

170-60 Income company cannot transfer transferred tax loss

Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred

170-65 Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred

170-70 Amendment of assessments

Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities

170-75 Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks

170-5 Basic principles for transferring tax losses

A company can transfer a tax loss to another company so that the other company can deduct it in the income year of the transfer.

Both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group. There are other eligibility requirements that they must also satisfy.

One of the companies must be an Australian branch of a foreign bank. The other company must be:

the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; or

(b) not a member of a consolidatable group.

Note: This Subdivision applies to Australian permanent establishments of foreign entities that are financial entities in the same way as it applies to Australian branches of foreign banks. See section 170-75.

The transferred loss must be “surplus” in the sense that the transferring company cannot use it because there is not enough assessable income to offset it. The other company must have enough assessable income to offset the transferred tax loss.

Neither company must be prevented from deducting the loss by Division 165 or 175.

Note: Division 165 deals with the income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Division 175 deals with using a company’s tax losses to avoid income tax.

The tax loss is transferred by an agreement between the 2 companies.

The tax loss can be transferred in the same year as it is incurred. In that case different rules apply.

Effect of transferring a tax loss

170-10 When a company can transfer a tax loss

(1) A company (the loss company) can transfer an amount of its *tax loss for an income year (the loss year) to another company (the income company) if the conditions in this Subdivision are met.

The amount transferred can be the whole or part of the *tax loss.

Note: A PDF cannot transfer a tax loss, except one for a period before it became a PDF: see section 195-10.

170-15 Income company is taken to have incurred transferred loss

If an amount of a *tax loss is transferred, the amount is taken to be a tax loss incurred by the income company in the loss year.

However, if the loss year is the same as the income year of the transfer, the income company is taken to have incurred the *tax loss in the income year before the loss year.

Note: This rule is needed because Division 36 allows a tax loss to be deducted only if it was incurred in an earlier income year.

Despite subsection (1), if the *tax loss is transferred because the conditions in section 170-32 are met, the income company is taken to have incurred the tax loss for the income year for which the first prior transferor mentioned in that section incurred the tax loss.

Despite subsection (1), if the *tax loss is transferred because the condition in subsection 170-42(4) is met, the income company is taken to have incurred the tax loss for the income year for which that subsection assumes the income company incurred the tax loss.

170-20 Who can deduct transferred loss

(1) If an amount of a *tax loss is transferred, the *income company can deduct the amount in accordance with section 36-17 (which is about how to deduct a tax loss), but only for the income year of the income company for which the amount is transferred. That income year is called the deduction year.

The *loss company can no longer *utilise the transferred amount and is taken not to have incurred the *tax loss to the extent of that amount.

170-25 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss

If the *loss company receives any consideration from the income company for the amount of the *tax loss:

so much of the consideration as is given for the amount of the tax loss is neither assessable income nor exempt income of the loss company; and

a *capital gain does not accrue to the loss company because of the receipt of the consideration.

Note: However, the consideration may affect how section 170-210 modifies the cost base of direct and indirect interests in the loss company.

If the income company gives any consideration to the *loss company for the amount of the *tax loss:

the income company cannot deduct the amount or value of the consideration; and

the income company does not incur a *capital loss because of the giving of the consideration.

Note: However, the consideration may affect how section 170-215 modifies the cost base of direct and indirect interests in the income company.

Conditions for transfer

170-30 Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc.

Both companies must be in existence during at least part of each of the following income years:

the loss year; and

the deduction year; and

any intervening income year.

Note: In some cases, this condition may not apply, or may be taken to be met even if it is not actually met. See sections 170-32 and 170-33.

Also, both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group during the whole or part of those income years when both companies were in existence.

Note: In some cases, this condition may not apply, or may be taken to be met even if it is not actually met. See sections 170-32 and 170-33.

(3) One of the companies must be an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of a *foreign bank.

Note: The Australian branch can be taken to be a separate entity from the foreign bank for this Subdivision. See Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The other company must be covered by an item of this table.

170-32 Tax loss incurred by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A

When the conditions in this section apply

The conditions in this section apply instead of the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) if:

(a) the *income company is an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of a *foreign bank; and

the *loss company incurred the *tax loss because of one or more transfers of the tax loss under Subdivision 707-A.

Conditions

(2) Each transferor (prior transferor) of the *tax loss under Subdivision 707-A must have been a company.

It must have been possible to meet the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) in relation to the *loss company and the income company assuming:

the loss year were so much of the income year in which the *tax loss was transferred to the loss company under Subdivision 707-A as occurred after the transfer; and

so much (if any) of the deduction year as occurred before the transfer were disregarded.

The income company and each prior transferor must both be in existence during at least part of each of these periods:

the period consisting of:

if the prior transferor incurred the *tax loss apart from Subdivision 707-A—the loss year; or

if the prior transferor incurred the tax loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A (other than a transfer from the prior transferor to itself)—so much of the income year in which the transfer occurred as was after the transfer (but before any later transfer of the loss from the prior transferor under that Subdivision);

so much of the income year during which the tax loss was transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the prior transferor to another company as occurs before the transfer (but after the start of the period described in paragraph (a));

any intervening income year.

The income company must be a member of the same wholly-owned group as each prior transferor during the whole or part of the periods described in subsection (4) for the prior transferor when both were in existence.

170-33 Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies

The conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) are taken to be met in relation to the *loss company and the income company if:

(a) the loss company is an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of a *foreign bank; and

the income company is covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 170-30(4) (because the company is the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group at the time described in that item); and

the relevant circumstances in this section exist.

Circumstances

(2) One circumstance is that there is another company (the first link company) in relation to which all these conditions are met:

the first link company became a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group after the start of the loss year but before the time described in the item of the table in subsection 170-30(4) that covers the income company;

the *tax loss could have been transferred from the *loss company to the first link company under this Subdivision (apart from subsection 170-30(4) and this section) for a deduction year consisting of the trial year for the first link company becoming a subsidiary member of that group had:

the first link company continued to be *in existence as a separate entity (rather than being part of the head company of that group) when it was a subsidiary member of that group; and

the trial year not started before the start of the loss year; and

the first link company had enough assessable income for the trial year;

the tax loss would have been incurred by the income company because of one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A assuming the tax loss had been made by the first link company (apart from that Subdivision) for the loss year.

If the condition in paragraph (2)(c) could be met only if there had been a transfer described in that paragraph involving a company other than the first link company and the income company, another circumstance is that the other company and the *loss company were *in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group for the period:

(a) starting when the *tax loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the other company as described in that paragraph; and

(b) ending when the tax loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the other company as described in that paragraph.

It does not matter whether or not any of the transfers mentioned in subsection (3) would have involved the first link company or the income company as well as the other company.

Another circumstance is that the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) would have been met for the *loss company and the income company assuming:

the loss year consisted of the part of the income year in which the *tax loss would have been transferred to the income company under Subdivision 707-A as described in paragraph (2)(c) occurring after the time the transfer would have occurred; and

so much (if any) of the deduction year as occurred before the time the transfer would have occurred were disregarded.

170-35 The loss company

The *loss company:

must be an Australian resident and not a prescribed dual resident; and

must not be a dual resident investment company in either the loss year or the deduction year.

(2) If the *loss year and the *deduction year are the same, it must be the case that the *loss company was not required to calculate the *tax loss:

under section 165-70 (because of a change in ownership or control); or

under section 175-35 (because of injected income or deductions).

Also, it must be the case that neither Subdivision 165-A nor Subdivision 175-A would have prevented the *loss company from deducting the *tax loss in the deduction year if it had had enough assessable income (including *assessable film income) to offset the tax loss.

Note 1: Subdivision 165-A deals with the deductibility of a company’s tax loss for an earlier income year if there has been a change in the ownership or control of the company in the loss year or the income year. Subdivision 175-A is about the Commissioner preventing a company from getting certain tax benefits through its unused tax losses.

Note 2: Division 707 affects the operation of Subdivision 165-A if the loss company incurred the tax loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A.

170-40 The income company

The income company must be an Australian resident and not a prescribed dual resident.

It must not be prevented by Division 165 or 175 from deducting the transferred amount in the deduction year. Those Divisions do not apply to the income company if the loss year and the deduction year are the same.

Note 1: Division 165 deals with the income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Division 175 deals with using a company’s tax losses to avoid income tax.

Note 2: The condition in subsection (2) may not apply in some cases. See section 170-42.

170-42 If the income company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group

The condition in subsection (2) of this section applies to the income company instead of the condition in subsection 170-40(2) if the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) are met in relation to the *loss company and the income company apart from section 170-33 and either:

both these circumstances exist:

after the start of the loss year but before the relevant time described in subsection 170-30(4), the income company became the *head company of a consolidated group or of a MEC group that came into existence after the start of the loss year;

the loss year and deduction year are not the same; or

all these circumstances exist:

the income company is, at the relevant time described in subsection 170-30(4), the head company of a MEC group;

before that time but after the end of the loss year, the MEC group was involved in an application event described in section 719-300 (but not covered by subsection 719-300(4) or (5));

the income company would be taken under section 719-305 to have transferred losses to itself under Subdivision 707-A, assuming it had made losses while head company of the group or of a consolidated group involved in the event;

the MEC group or consolidated group came into existence before the start of the loss year.

Note: An application event involves either expanding an existing MEC group by including extra eligible tier-1 companies of the top company for the group or creating a MEC group because more companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company of which the head company of a consolidated group is an eligible tier-1 company.

The income company must have been able to deduct the *tax loss in the deduction year assuming that it had incurred the tax loss for the loss year.

The condition in subsection (4) of this section applies to the income company instead of the condition in subsection 170-40(2) if the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) are met in relation to the *loss company and the income company because of section 170-33.

The income company must have been able to deduct the *tax loss in the deduction year assuming that it had incurred the tax loss, for the income year in which the loss would have been transferred to it as described in paragraph 170-33(2)(c), because of one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A described in that paragraph.

170-45 Maximum amount that can be transferred

Loss company can only transfer what it cannot use itself

The amount transferred cannot exceed what would be the amount of the *loss company’s unutilised *tax loss at the end of the deduction year if the loss company utilised the tax loss to the greatest extent possible.

Transferred loss must not exceed what the income company can use

The amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Add together the income company’s assessable income and net exempt income (if any) for the deduction year.

Step 2. Subtract the *income company’s deductions for the *deduction year, except deductions for amounts of *tax losses transferred to the income company (by the *loss company or any other company).

Step 3. Subtract the *income company’s deductions for the *deduction year for amounts of *tax losses transferred to the income company (by the *loss company or any other company) by agreements made before the agreement by which the first amount is transferred.

• the income company has assessable income of $60,000, net exempt income of $10,000 and deductions of $25,000 (apart from the transferred loss); and

• another company, being a member of the same wholly-owned group as the income company, transferred a tax loss of $15,000 to the income company; and

• the loss company incurred a tax loss of $50,000.

Of the $50,000 loss, the loss company can transfer no more than $30,000 ($60,000+$10,000-$25,000-$15,000) to the income company.

Example: In the deduction year:

Subsection (2) does not apply if the *tax loss is a film loss. In that case, the amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Add together the income company’s *net assessable film income and *net exempt film income (if any) for the deduction year.

Step 2. Subtract the *income company’s deductions for the *deduction year for amounts of *film losses transferred to the income company (by the *loss company or any other company) by agreements made before the agreement by which the first amount is transferred.

Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply if the transfer occurs because either or both of the conditions in subsections 170-42(2) and (4) are met. In that case, the amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Identify each bundle of losses that, on the assumption in subsection 170-42(2) or (4) (as appropriate), would have included the *tax loss or film loss (as appropriate).

Step 2. For each *bundle identified, work out how much of the *tax loss or film loss (as appropriate) the income company would have been able to deduct in the deduction year assuming that:

Note 1: There will be 2 or more bundles of losses identified if both of the conditions in subsections 170-42(2) and (4) are met.

Note 2: There will be more than 1 bundle of losses identified on the basis of the assumption in paragraph 170-42(4) if the conditions in subsections 170-30(1) and (2) are met in relation to the loss company and the income company because of multiple applications of section 170-33 each involving a different first link company.

(a) the loss could have been deducted in that year only after the deduction in that year of any other losses of that *sort that would have been included in the bundle, other than losses (the transferable losses) that could be transferred from the *loss company to the income company for that year; and

if the bundle would have included 2 or more transferable losses of that sort—those losses could have been deducted only in the order in which the loss company incurred them.

Note 1: If the assumption in subsection 170-42(2) is relevant to the bundle, it would have included losses incurred by the income company and transferred (or taken to be transferred) to the company (from itself) under Subdivision 707-A.

Note 2: If the assumption in paragraph 170-42(4) is relevant to the bundle, it would have included losses actually incurred by the first link company and transferred (by one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A) to the income company.

Step 3. Total every result of step 2 for the *tax loss or film loss (as appropriate).

170-50 Transfer by written agreement

(1) The transfer must be made by a written agreement between the *loss company and the *income company.

(2) The agreement must:

specify the income year of the transfer (which may be earlier than the income year in which the agreement is made); and

specify the amount of the *tax loss being transferred; and

be signed by the public officer of each company; and

be made on or before the day of lodgement of the income company’s income tax return for the deduction year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

Note: The agreement will usually be made in the next income year after the one for which the income company will deduct the loss.

170-55 Losses must be transferred in order they are incurred

If the *loss company has 2 or more *tax losses (other than film losses) that it can transfer in the deduction year, it can transfer them only in the order in which it incurred them.

If the *loss company has 2 or more film losses that it can transfer in the deduction year, it can transfer them only in the order in which it incurred them.

If:

the *loss company has 2 or more *tax losses, or 2 or more film losses, it can transfer for the deduction year; and

it incurred at least one of those losses apart from Subdivision 707-A and at least one of those losses because of a transfer under that Subdivision;

it can transfer under this Subdivision the losses it incurred because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A only after transferring under this Subdivision the losses it incurred apart from that Subdivision.

For the purposes of subsection (3), treat a loss incurred by the company both apart from that Subdivision and because of a transfer under that Subdivision as a loss incurred because of a transfer under that Subdivision.

Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to subsection (3).

170-60 Income company cannot transfer transferred tax loss

The income company cannot transfer an amount of a *tax loss transferred to it, or any part of the amount.

Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred

170-65 Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred

If the amount specified in an agreement exceeds the maximum amount that the *loss company can transfer to the income company in the deduction year, only that maximum amount is taken to have been transferred.

One reason why an agreement might specify more than can be transferred is that an assessment has been amended since the agreement.

170-70 Amendment of assessments

The Commissioner may amend an assessment to disallow a deduction for a transferred amount of a *tax loss:

if the agreement to transfer the tax loss is ineffective because the *loss company did not actually incur the loss; or

to the extent that section 170-65 reduces the transferred amount of a tax loss because the loss company did not actually incur some of it.

The Commissioner may do so despite section 170 (Amendment of assessments) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities

170-75 Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks

The object of this section is to let *tax losses be transferred under this Subdivision to and from *Australian permanent establishments of *foreign entities that are *financial entities in the same way as tax losses can be transferred to and from Australian branches of *foreign banks.

(2) This Subdivision (except this section) applies to an *Australian permanent establishment of a *foreign entity that is a *financial entity in the same way as this Subdivision applies to an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of a *foreign bank.

Subdivision 170-B — Transfer of net capital losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies

Guide to Subdivision 170-B

170-101 What this Subdivision is about

A company can transfer a surplus amount of its net capital loss to another company so that the other company can apply the amount in working out its net capital gain for the income year of the transfer. One of the companies must be an Australian branch of a foreign bank, and both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group.

Table of sections

170-105 Basic principles for transferring a net capital loss

Effect of transferring a net capital loss

170-110 When a company can transfer a net capital loss

170-115 Who can apply transferred loss

170-120 Gain company is taken to have made transferred loss

170-125 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss

Conditions for transfer

170-130 Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc.

170-132 Net capital loss made by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A

170-133 Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies

170-135 The loss company

170-140 The gain company

170-142 If the gain company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group

170-145 Maximum amount that can be transferred

170-150 Transfer by written agreement

170-155 Losses must be transferred in order they are made

170-160 Gain company cannot transfer transferred net capital loss

Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred

170-165 Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred

170-170 Amendment of assessments

Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities

170-174 Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks

170-105 Basic principles for transferring a net capital loss

A company can transfer a net capital loss (except a net capital loss from collectables) to another company so that the other company can apply it in working out its net capital gain for the income year of the transfer.

Both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group. There are other eligibility requirements that they must also satisfy.

One of the companies must be an Australian branch of a foreign bank. The other company must be:

the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; or

(b) not a member of a consolidatable group.

Note: This Subdivision applies to Australian permanent establishments of foreign entities that are financial entities in the same way as it applies to Australian branches of foreign banks. See section 170-174.

The transferred loss must be “surplus” in the sense that, for the income year of the transfer, the transferring company does not have enough capital gains against which to apply it. The other company must have enough capital gains against which to apply it.

Neither company must be prevented by Subdivision 165-CA or 175-CA from applying the loss in working out its net capital gain for the income year of the transfer.

Note: Subdivision 165-CA deals with the consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Subdivision 175-CA deals with using a company’s net capital losses to avoid income tax.

The net capital loss is transferred by an agreement between the 2 companies.

The net capital loss can be transferred in the same year as it is made. In that case different rules apply.

The provisions of Subdivision 170-C (so far as they relate to the transfer of net capital losses) are to be disregarded in applying the provisions of this Subdivision where the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 was made before 22 February 1999.

Effect of transferring a net capital loss

170-110 When a company can transfer a net capital loss

(1) A company (the loss company) can transfer an amount of its *net capital loss for an income year (the capital loss year) to another company (the gain company) if the conditions in this Subdivision are met.

The amount transferred can be the whole or part of the net capital loss.

Note: A PDF cannot transfer a net capital loss, except one for a period before it became a PDF: see section 195-30 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997.

170-115 Who can apply transferred loss

(1) If an amount of a *net capital loss is transferred, the gain company can apply the amount in working out its *net capital gain, but only for the income year of the gain company for which the amount is transferred. That income year is called the application year.

Note: A company’s net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5 or 102-10.

The loss company can no longer *utilise the transferred amount and is taken not to have made the net capital loss to the extent of that amount.

Despite subsection (1), if the net capital loss is transferred because the conditions in section 170-132 are met, the gain company is taken to have made the net capital loss for the income year for which the first prior transferor mentioned in that section made the net capital loss.

Despite subsection (1), if the net capital loss is transferred because the condition in subsection 170-142(4) is met, the gain company is taken to have made the net capital loss for the income year for which that subsection assumes the gain company made the net capital loss.

170-120 Gain company is taken to have made transferred loss

If an amount of a net capital loss is transferred, the amount is taken to be a net capital loss of the gain company for the capital loss year.

However, if the capital loss year is the same as the application year, the amount is taken to be a *capital loss of the gain company for the application year.

170-125 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred tax loss

If the loss company receives consideration from the gain company for the transferred amount:

the consideration is neither assessable income nor exempt income of the loss company; and

the loss company does not make a *capital gain because of receiving the consideration.

Note: However, the consideration may affect how section 170-220 modifies the cost base of direct and indirect interests in the loss company.

If the gain company gives consideration to the loss company for the transferred amount:

the gain company cannot deduct the consideration; and

the gain company does not make a *capital loss because of giving the consideration.

Note: However, the consideration may affect how section 170-225 modifies the cost base of direct and indirect interests in the gain company.

Conditions for transfer

170-130 Companies must be in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group etc.

Both companies must be in existence during at least part of each of the following income years:

the capital loss year; and

the application year; and

any intervening income year.

Note: In some cases, this condition may not apply, or may be taken to be met even if it is not actually met. See sections 170-132 and 170-133.

Also, both companies must be members of the same wholly-owned group at all times during those income years when both companies were in existence.

Note: In some cases, this condition may not apply, or may be taken to be met even if it is not actually met. See sections 170-132 and 170-133.

(3) One of the companies must be an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of a *foreign bank.

Note: The Australian branch can be taken to be a separate entity from the foreign bank for this Subdivision. See Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The other company must be covered by an item of this table.

170-132 Net capital loss made by the loss company because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A

When the conditions in this section apply

The conditions in this section apply instead of the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) if:

(a) the gain company is an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of a *foreign bank; and

the *loss company made the net capital loss because of one or more transfers of the net capital loss under Subdivision 707-A.

Conditions

(2) Each transferor (prior transferor) of the *net capital loss under Subdivision 707-A must have been a company.

It must have been possible to meet the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) in relation to the *loss company and the gain company assuming:

the capital loss year were so much of the income year in which the net capital loss was transferred to the loss company under Subdivision 707-A as occurred after the transfer; and

so much (if any) of the application year as occurred before the transfer were disregarded.

The gain company and each prior transferor must both be in existence during at least part of each of these periods:

the period consisting of:

if the prior transferor made the net capital loss apart from Subdivision 707-A—the capital loss year; or

if the prior transferor made the net capital loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A (other than a transfer from the prior transferor to itself)—so much of the income year in which the transfer occurred as was after the transfer (but before any later transfer of the loss from the prior transferor under that Subdivision);

so much of the income year during which the net capital loss was transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the prior transferor to another company as occurs before the transfer (but after the start of the period described in paragraph (a));

any intervening income year.

The gain company must be a member of the same wholly-owned group as each prior transferor during the whole or part of the periods described in subsection (4) for the prior transferor when both were in existence.

170-133 Alternative test of relations between the loss company and other companies

The conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) are taken to be met in relation to the *loss company and the gain company if:

(a) the loss company is an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of a *foreign bank; and

the gain company is covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 170-130(4) (because the company is the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group at the time described in that item); and

the relevant circumstances in this section exist.

Circumstances

(2) One circumstance is that there is another company (the first link company) in relation to which all these conditions are met:

the first link company became a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group after the start of the capital loss year but before the time described in the item of the table in subsection 170-130(4) that covers the gain company;

the net capital loss could have been transferred from the *loss company to the first link company under this Subdivision (apart from subsection 170-130(4) and this section) for an application year consisting of the trial year for the first link company becoming a subsidiary member of that group had:

the first link company continued to be in existence as a separate entity (rather than being part of the head company of that group) when it was a subsidiary member of that group; and

the trial year not started before the start of the capital loss year; and

the first link company had enough *capital gains for the trial year;

the net capital loss would have been made by the gain company because of one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A assuming the net capital loss had been made by the first link company (apart from that Subdivision) for the capital loss year.

If the condition in paragraph (2)(c) could be met only if there had been a transfer described in that paragraph involving a company other than the first link company and the gain company, another circumstance is that the other company and the *loss company were in existence and members of the same wholly-owned group for the period:

(a) starting when the *net capital loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the other company as described in that paragraph; and

(b) ending when the net capital loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the other company as described in that paragraph.

It does not matter whether or not any of the transfers mentioned in subsection (3) would have involved the first link company or the gain company as well as the other company.

Another circumstance is that the conditions in subsection 170-130(1) and (2) would have been met for the *loss company and the gain company assuming:

the capital loss year consisted of the part of the income year in which the net capital loss would have been transferred to the gain company under Subdivision 707-A as described in paragraph (2)(c) occurring after the time the transfer would have occurred; and

so much (if any) of the application year as occurred before the time the transfer would have occurred were disregarded.

170-135 The loss company

The loss company:

must be an Australian resident (but not a prescribed dual resident) throughout the capital loss year; and

must not be a dual resident investment company in either the capital loss year or the application year.

(2) It must be the case that the loss company was not required to calculate the *net capital loss:

under section 165-114 (because of a change in ownership or control); or

under section 175-75 (because of an injected capital gain or loss).

Also, it must be the case that neither Subdivision 165-CA nor Subdivision 175-CA would have prevented the loss company from applying the net capital loss in working out its net capital gain for the application year if it had made enough *capital gains in that year.

Note 1: Subdivision 165-CA deals with the consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Subdivision 175-CA deals with using a company’s net capital losses to avoid income tax.

Note 2: Division 707 affects the operation of Subdivision 165-CA if the loss company made the net capital loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A.

Note 3: A company’s net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5 or 102-10.

170-140 The gain company

The gain company must be an Australian resident throughout the application year.

(2) If the capital loss year and the application year are not the same, the gain company must not be prevented by Subdivision 165-CA or 175-CA from applying the transferred amount in working out its *net capital gain for the application year.

Note 1: Subdivision 165-CA deals with the consequences of changing ownership or control of a company. Subdivision 175-CA deals with using a company’s net capital losses to avoid income tax.

Note 2: A company’s net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5 or 102-10.

Note 3: The condition in subsection (2) may not apply in some cases. See section 170-142.

(3) If the capital loss year and the application year are the same, it must be the case that the gain company was not required to calculate its own *net capital gain or *net capital loss for the application year:

under Subdivision 165-CB (because of a change in ownership or control); or

under section 175-75 (because of an injected capital gain or loss).

Note: In deciding whether paragraph (b) applies, remember that the transferred amount is taken to be a capital loss of the gain company for the application year (because of subsection 170-120(2)).

170-142 If the gain company has become the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group

The condition in subsection (2) of this section applies to the gain company instead of the condition in subsection 170-140(2) if the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) are met in relation to the *loss company and the gain company apart from section 170-133 and either:

both these circumstances exist:

after the start of the capital loss year but before the relevant time described in subsection 170-130(4), the gain company became the *head company of a consolidated group or of a MEC group that came into existence after the start of the capital loss year;

the capital loss year and application year are not the same; or

all these circumstances exist:

the gain company is, at the relevant time described in subsection 170-130(4), the head company of a MEC group;

before that time but after the end of the capital loss year, the MEC group was involved in an application event described in section 719-300 (but not covered by subsection 719-300(4) or (5));

the gain company would be taken under section 719-305 to have transferred losses to itself under Subdivision 707-A, assuming it had made losses while head company of the group or of a consolidated group involved in the event;

the MEC group or consolidated group came into existence before the start of the capital loss year.

Note: An application event involves either expanding an existing MEC group by including extra eligible tier-1 companies of the top company for the group or creating a MEC group because more companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company of which the head company of a consolidated group is an eligible tier-1 company.

The gain company must have been able to apply the net capital loss in working out its net capital gain for the application year assuming that it had made the net capital loss for the capital loss year.

The condition in subsection (4) of this section applies to the gain company instead of the condition in subsection 170-140(2) if the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) are met in relation to the *loss company and the gain company because of section 170-133.

The gain company must have been able to apply the net capital loss in working out its net capital gain for the application year assuming that it had made the net capital loss, for the income year in which the loss would have been transferred to it as described in paragraph 170-133(2)(c), because of one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A described in that paragraph.

170-145 Maximum amount that can be transferred

Loss company can only transfer what it cannot use itself

The amount transferred cannot exceed what would be the amount of the *loss company’s unutilised net capital loss at the end of the application year if the loss company utilised the net capital loss to the greatest extent possible.

Note: If the capital loss year and the application year are the same, the whole of the net capital loss would be unutilised, because section 102-5 does not allow a net capital loss to be applied in the income year in which it was made.

Example: In the application year the loss company has:

• a net capital loss from an earlier income year of $25,000; and

• other capital losses totalling $10,000; and

• capital gains totalling $20,000;

Of the $25,000 loss, the loss company can transfer to the gain company no more than:

Transferred loss must not exceed what the gain company can use

(5) No amount can be transferred if, apart from the operation of this section, the gain company would not have a *net capital gain for the application year.

The amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out what, apart from the operation of this section, would have been the gain company’s net capital gain for the application year.

Step 2. Subtract each amount that:

the gain company can apply under section 170-115 in working out its net capital gain for the application year; and

(b) was transferred to the gain company (by the loss company or any other company) by an agreement made before the agreement by which the first amount is transferred.

Example: In the application year:

• the gain company has capital gains totalling $60,000 and capital losses totalling $25,000; and

• another company, being a member of the same wholly-owned group as the gain company, transferred a net capital loss of $15,000 to the gain company; and

• the loss company incurred a net capital loss of $50,000.

Of the $50,000 loss, the loss company can transfer to the gain company no more than:

Subsection (6) does not apply if the transfer occurs because either or both of the conditions in subsections 170-142(2) and (4) are met. In that case, the amount transferred also cannot exceed the amount worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Identify each bundle of losses that, on the assumption in subsection 170-142(2) or (4) (as appropriate), would have included the net capital loss.

Step 2. For each *bundle identified, work out how much of the net capital loss the gain company would have been able to apply in working out its net capital gain for the application year assuming that:

Note 1: There will be 2 or more bundles of losses identified if both of the conditions in subsections 170-142(2) and (4) are met.

Note 2: There will be more than 1 bundle of losses identified on the basis of the assumption in paragraph 170-142(4) if the conditions in subsections 170-130(1) and (2) are met in relation to the loss company and the gain company because of multiple applications of section 170-133 each involving a different first link company.

(a) the loss could have been applied in that year only after the application in that year of any other losses of that *sort that would have been included in the bundle, other than losses (the transferable losses) that could be transferred from the *loss company to the gain company for that year; and

if the bundle would have included 2 or more transferable losses of that sort—those losses could have been applied only in the order in which the loss company made them.

Note 1: If the assumption in subsection 170-142(2) is relevant to the bundle, it would have included losses made by the gain company and transferred (or taken to be transferred) to the company (from itself) under Subdivision 707-A.

Note 2: If the assumption in paragraph 170-142(4) is relevant to the bundle, it would have included losses actually made by the first link company and transferred (by one or more transfers under Subdivision 707-A) to the gain company.

Step 3. Total every result of step 2 for the net capital loss.

170-150 Transfer by written agreement

The transfer must be made by a written agreement between the loss company and the gain company.

The agreement must:

specify the income year of the transfer (which may be earlier than the income year in which the agreement is made); and

specify the amount of the net capital loss being transferred; and

be signed by the public officer of each company; and

be made on or before the day of lodgment of the gain company’s income tax return for the application year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

Note: The agreement will usually be made in the next income year after the one for which the gain company will apply the loss.

170-155 Losses must be transferred in order they are made

If the loss company has 2 or more *net capital losses that it can transfer in the application year, it can transfer them only in the order in which it made them.

If:

the *loss company has 2 or more *net capital losses it can transfer for the application year; and

it made at least one of those losses apart from Subdivision 707-A and at least one of those losses because of a transfer under that Subdivision;

it can transfer under this Subdivision the losses it made because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A only after transferring under this Subdivision the losses it made apart from that Subdivision.

For the purposes of subsection (2), treat a loss made by the company both apart from Subdivision 707-A and because of a transfer under that Subdivision as a loss made because of a transfer under that Subdivision.

Subsection (1) has effect subject to subsection (2).

170-160 Gain company cannot transfer transferred net capital loss

The gain company cannot transfer an amount of a net capital loss transferred to it, or any part of the amount.

Effect of agreement to transfer more than can be transferred

170-165 Agreement transfers as much as can be transferred

If the amount specified in an agreement exceeds the maximum amount that the loss company can transfer to the gain company in the application year, only that maximum amount is taken to have been transferred.

One reason why an agreement might specify more than can be transferred is that an assessment has been amended since the agreement.

170-170 Amendment of assessments

The Commissioner may amend an assessment to *disallow a transferred amount of a net capital loss:

if the agreement to transfer the net capital loss is ineffective because the loss company did not actually make the loss; or

to the extent that section 170-165 reduces the transferred amount because the loss company did not actually make some of it.

The Commissioner may do so despite section 170 (Amendment of assessments) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Australian permanent establishments of foreign financial entities

Note: This Subdivision is disregarded in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 410 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

170-174 Treatment like Australian branches of foreign banks

The object of this section is to let *net capital losses be transferred under this Subdivision to and from *Australian permanent establishments of *foreign entities that are *financial entities in the same way as net capital losses can be transferred to and from Australian branches of *foreign banks.

(2) This Subdivision (except this section) applies to an *Australian permanent establishment of a *foreign entity that is a *financial entity in the same way as this Subdivision applies to an Australian branch (as defined in Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of a *foreign bank.

Subdivision 170-C — Provisions applying to both transfers of tax losses and transfers of net capital losses within wholly-owned groups of companies

Guide to Subdivision 170-C

170-201 What this Subdivision is about

If a tax loss or a net capital loss is transferred between companies in the same wholly-owned group, this Subdivision provides for adjustments to:

the cost base and reduced cost base of direct and indirect equity interests held by group companies in the loss company, or in the income company or gain company; and

the reduced cost base of direct and indirect debt interest held by group companies in the loss company; and

the cost base and reduced cost base of direct and indirect debt interests held by group companies in the income company or gain company.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

170-205 Object of Subdivision

170-210 Transfer of tax loss: direct and indirect interests in the loss company

170-215 Transfer of tax loss: direct and indirect interests in the income company

170-220 Transfer of net capital loss: direct and indirect interests in the loss company

170-225 Transfer of net capital loss: direct and indirect interests in the gain company

Operative provisions

170-205 Object of Subdivision

Interests in the loss company

The main object of this Subdivision is to ensure that, if an amount of a *tax loss or net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company in the same wholly-owned group, the loss transferred is not duplicated by a member of the group.

Duplication could occur by the making of a *capital loss, or the reduction of a *capital gain, from a CGT event that happens in relation to an equity interest held (directly or indirectly) in the loss company or by the making of a capital loss in relation to a debt interest held (directly or indirectly) in the loss company.

Interests in the income company or gain company

This Subdivision may also require an adjustment to the cost base and reduced cost base of an equity or debt interest held (directly or indirectly) by a group company in the income company or gain company.

This adjustment is to reflect an increase in the *market value of the interest because of the transfer of the loss if the increase is still reflected in the market value of the interest when a CGT event happens in relation to the interest.

170-210 Transfer of tax loss: direct and indirect interests in the loss company

If:

an amount of a *tax loss is transferred by a company to another company; and

Subdivision 170-A applies in respect of the transfer; and

(c) a company (the group company) holds a *share in the loss company or is owed a debt by the loss company in respect of a loan; and

the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and

throughout the deduction year, the group company is a member of the same wholly-owned group as the loss company (disregarding a period when either was not in existence); and

a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt on or after the commencement of this section; and

the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-50 is made on or after that commencement;

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced in accordance with subsection (3).

If:

an amount of a *tax loss is transferred by a company to another company; and

Subdivision 170-A applies in respect of the transfer; and

(c) a company (the group company) holds a *share in another company or is owed a debt by another company in respect of a loan; and

the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and

the money that the group company paid for the share, or the borrowed money, has been applied (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities):

in the other company or a third company acquiring shares in the loss company; or

in a borrowing by the loss company from the other company or from a third company; and

throughout the deduction year, the group company, the other company and the third company (if any) are all members of the same wholly-owned group as the loss company (disregarding, for a particular company, a period when it was not in existence); and

a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt on or after the commencement of this section; and

the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-50 is made on or after that commencement;

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced in accordance with subsection (3).

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced by an amount that is appropriate having regard to:

the main object of this Subdivision and other matters mentioned in subsections 170-205(1) and (2); and

the group company’s direct or indirect interest in the loss company; and

any reduction in the reduced cost base made under Subdivision 165-CD; and

the amount of the loss transferred; and

the extent to which the loss reduced the *market value of the share or debt; and

any consideration received by the loss company for the loss transferred; and

whether, because of a dividend or dividends paid by the loss company, the consideration is no longer reflected (wholly or partly) in the market value of the share or debt when a CGT event happens in relation to it.

To avoid doubt in applying paragraph (3)(c) in relation to a *share or debt, if factors other than the loss altered the *market value of the share or debt, the extent to which the loss reduced that market value is taken to be the extent to which that market value would have been reduced apart from those other factors.

Note: An example of a factor other than the loss is the unrealised value of assets (including assets in respect of which there is an unrealised gain) of the loss company, whether or not generated by outlays or economic losses reflected in the loss for income tax purposes.

This section applies to a *tax loss only to the extent that the loss represents an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the *loss company.

Note: Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.

Any reduction is to be made immediately before a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt and is to have effect from that time or the end of the deduction year, whichever is the earlier.

Note 1: For deduction year see subsection 170-20(1).

Note 2: Subsection (4) is relevant for indexing elements of a cost base (see sections 114-1 and 114-15).

170-215 Transfer of tax loss: direct and indirect interests in the income company

If:

an amount of a *tax loss is transferred by a company to another company; and

Subdivision 170-A applies in respect of the transfer; and

(c) a company (the group company) holds a *share in the income company or is owed a debt by the income company in respect of a loan; and

the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and

throughout the deduction year, the group company is a member of the same wholly-owned group as the income company (disregarding a period when either was not in existence); and

a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt on or after the commencement of this section; and

the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-50 is made on or after that commencement; and

there are shares in, or debts owed by, the *loss company the *reduced cost base of at least one of which has been reduced by subsection 170-210(1) or (2);

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or debt are increased in accordance with subsection (3).

If:

an amount of a *tax loss is transferred by a company to another company; and

Subdivision 170-A applies in respect of the transfer; and

(c) a company (the group company) holds a *share in another company or is owed a debt by another company in respect of a loan; and

the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and

the money that the group company paid for the share, or the borrowed money, has been applied (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities):

in the other company or a third company acquiring shares in the income company; or

in a borrowing by the income company from the other company or from a third company; and

throughout the deduction year, the group company, the other company and the third company (if any) are all members of the same wholly-owned group as the income company (disregarding, for a particular company, a period when it was not in existence); and

a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt on or after the commencement of this section; and

the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-50 is made on or after that commencement; and

there are shares in, or debts owed by, the *loss company the *reduced cost base of at least one of which has been reduced by subsection 170-210(1) or (2);

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or debt are increased in accordance with subsection (3).

The *cost base and *reduced cost base are increased by an amount that is appropriate having regard to:

the matters mentioned in subsections 170-205(3) and (4); and

the amounts of any reductions to the cost base and reduced cost base of *shares, and to the reduced cost base of debts, under subsection 170-210(3); and

the group company’s direct or indirect interest in the income company; and

the amount of the loss transferred; and

any consideration given by the income company for the loss transferred.

Note: This is because the consideration may be less than the commercial value of the loss transferred.

However, the increase cannot exceed the increase in the *market value of the *share or debt that results from the transfer of the loss. (If no increase in that market value results, for example because the consideration paid for the transfer of the loss equals the commercial value of the loss transferred, then there is no increase in the *cost base and *reduced cost base.)

No increase is to be made to the extent that the *tax loss transferred does not represent an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the company that transferred the tax loss.

Note: Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.

Any increase is to be made immediately before a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt and is to have effect from that time or the end of the deduction year, whichever is the earlier.

Note: This subsection is relevant for indexing elements of a cost base (see sections 114-1 and 114-15).

No increase is to be made to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a share or debt to the extent to which, because of a dividend or dividends paid by the income company, the increase in the *market value of the share or debt that resulted from the transfer of the loss is no longer in existence at the time when a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt.

Note: For deduction year see subsection 170-20(1).

170-220 Transfer of net capital loss: direct and indirect interests in the loss company

If:

an amount of a net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company; and

Subdivision 170-B applies in respect of the transfer; and

(c) a company (the group company) holds a *share in the loss company or is owed a debt by the loss company in respect of a loan; and

the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and

throughout the application year, the group company is a member of the same wholly-owned group as the loss company (disregarding a period when either was not in existence); and

the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 is made on or after the commencement of this section;

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced in accordance with subsection (3).

If:

an amount of a net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company; and

Subdivision 170-B applies in respect of the transfer; and

(c) a company (the group company) holds a *share in another company or is owed a debt by another company in respect of a loan; and

the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and

the money that the group company paid for the share, or the borrowed money, has been applied (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities):

in the other company or a third company acquiring shares in the loss company; or

in a borrowing by the loss company from the other company or from a third company; and

throughout the application year, the group company, the other company and the third company (if any) are all members of the same wholly-owned group as the loss company (disregarding, for a particular company, a period when it was not in existence); and

the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 is made on or after the commencement of this section;

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced in accordance with subsection (3).

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or the reduced cost base of the debt is reduced by an amount that is appropriate having regard to:

the main object of this Subdivision and other matters mentioned in subsections 170-205(1) and (2); and

the group company’s direct or indirect interest in the loss company; and

any reduction in the reduced cost base made under Subdivision 165-CD; and

the amount of the loss transferred; and

the extent to which the loss reduced the *market value of the share or debt; and

any consideration received by the loss company for the loss transferred; and

whether, because of a dividend or dividends paid by the loss company, the consideration is no longer reflected (wholly or partly) in the market value of the share or debt when a CGT event happens in relation to it.

To avoid doubt in applying paragraph (3)(c) in relation to a *share or debt, if factors other than the loss altered the *market value of the share or debt, the extent to which the loss reduced that market value is taken to be the extent to which that market value would have been reduced apart from those other factors.

Note: An example of a factor other than the loss is the unrealised value of assets (including assets in respect of which there is an unrealised gain) of the loss company, whether or not generated by outlays or economic losses reflected in the loss for income tax purposes.

This section applies to a net capital loss only to the extent that the loss represents an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the *loss company.

Note: Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.

Any reduction is to be made immediately before a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt and is to have effect from that time or the end of the application year, whichever is the earlier.

Note 1: Subsection (4) is relevant for indexing elements of a cost base (see sections 114-1 and 114-15).

Note 2: Reductions under former subsection 160ZP(13) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are also relevant: see section 170-220 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 3: For applicable year see subsection 170-115(1).

170-225 Transfer of net capital loss: direct and indirect interests in the gain company

If:

an amount of a net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company; and

Subdivision 170-B applies in respect of the transfer; and

(c) a company (the group company) holds a *share in the gain company or is owed a debt by the gain company in respect of a loan; and

the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and

throughout the application year, the group company is a member of the same wholly-owned group as the gain company (disregarding a period when either was not in existence); and

the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 is made on or after the commencement of this section; and

there are shares in, or debts owed by, the *loss company the *cost base and *reduced cost base of at least one of which have been reduced by subsection 170-220(1) or (2);

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or debt are increased in accordance with subsection (3).

If:

an amount of a net capital loss is transferred by a company to another company; and

Subdivision 170-B applies in respect of the transfer; and

(c) a company (the group company) holds a *share in another company or is owed a debt by another company in respect of a loan; and

the group company *acquired the share or debt on or after 20 September 1985; and

the money that the group company paid for the share, or the borrowed money, has been applied (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities):

in the other company or a third company acquiring shares in the gain company; or

in a borrowing by the gain company from the other company or from a third company; and

throughout the application year, the group company, the other company and the third company (if any) are all members of the same wholly-owned group as the gain company (disregarding, for a particular company, a period when it was not in existence); and

the relevant agreement referred to in section 170-150 is made on or after the commencement of this section; and

there are shares in, or debts owed by, the *loss company the *cost base and *reduced cost base of at least one of which have been reduced by subsection 170-220(1) or (2);

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share or debt are increased in accordance with subsection (3).

The *cost base and *reduced cost base are increased by an amount that is appropriate having regard to:

the matters mentioned in subsections 170-205(3) and (4); and

the amounts of any reductions to the cost base and reduced cost base of *shares, and to the reduced cost base of debts, under subsection 170-220(3); and

the group company’s direct or indirect interest in the gain company; and

the amount of the loss transferred; and

any consideration given by the gain company for the loss transferred.

Note: This is because the consideration may be less than the commercial value of the loss transferred.

However, the increase cannot exceed the increase in the *market value of the *share or debt that results from the transfer of the loss. (If no increase in that market value results, for example because the consideration paid for the transfer of the loss equals the commercial value of the loss transferred, then there is no increase in the *cost base and *reduced cost base.)

No increase is to be made to the extent that the net capital loss transferred does not represent an outlay or loss of any of the economic resources of the company that transferred the net capital loss.

Note: Where the income tax law allows, as all or part of a loss, an amount for the decline in value of a depreciating asset that exceeds the actual economic depreciation or depletion of the asset concerned, the excess is not to be regarded for the purposes of this subsection as representing an outlay or loss of economic resources of the company.

Any increase is to be made immediately before a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt and is to have effect from that time or the end of the application year, whichever is the earlier.

Note: This subsection is relevant for indexing elements of a cost base (see sections 114-1 and 114-15).

No increase is to be made to the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a share or debt to the extent to which, because of a dividend or dividends paid by the gain company, the increase in the *market value of the share or debt that resulted from the transfer of the loss is no longer in existence at the time when a CGT event happens in relation to the share or debt.

Note: Increases under former subsections 160ZP(14) and (15) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are also relevant: see section 170-225 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Subdivision 170-D — Transactions by a company that is a member of a linked group

Guide to Subdivision 170-D

170-250 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides that there is a deferral of a *capital loss or deduction if a company (the originating company) that is a member of a *linked group disposes of a *CGT asset to, or creates a CGT asset in, another entity that:

is a company that is also a member of the linked group; or

is a connected entity of the originating company or an associate of such a connected entity;

and the disposal or creation of the asset would have resulted in the originating company making a capital loss or becoming entitled to a deduction.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

170-255 Application of Subdivision

170-260 Linked group

170-265 Connected entity

170-270 Immediate consequences for originating company

170-275 Subsequent consequences for originating company

170-280 What happens if certain events happen in respect of the asset

Operative provisions

170-255 Application of Subdivision

This Subdivision applies if:

(a) an event (the deferral event) happens involving a company (the originating company) and another entity; and

one or more of the following apply:

the deferral event is a CGT event that would have resulted in the originating company making a *capital loss (except a capital loss that would be disregarded under a provision of this Act other than this Subdivision);

the deferral event would have resulted in the originating company becoming entitled to a deduction in respect of the disposal of a CGT asset or of an interest in a CGT asset;

if the originating company is a partner in a partnership—the deferral event would have resulted in the partnership becoming entitled to a deduction in respect of the disposal of a CGT asset or of an interest in a CGT asset; and

if subparagraph (b)(i) applies—the CGT event is one of the following:

(i) CGT events A1 and B1 (a disposal case);

(ii) CGT events D1, D2, D3 and F1 (a creation case); and

Note: The full list of CGT events is in section 104-5.

one of the following applies:

the originating company is an Australian resident at the time of the deferral event;

if the deferral event is a CGT event D1—the CGT asset that is the subject of the creation of the contractual or other rights is taxable Australian property;

if the deferral event is a CGT event A1, B1 or F1—the asset or the subject of the lease, as the case may be, was taxable Australian property immediately before the deferral event;

if the deferral event is a CGT event D2—the option was taxable Australian property immediately after the deferral event;

if subparagraph (b)(ii) or (iii) applies—the originating company is a foreign resident at the time of the deferral event; and

at the time of the deferral event, the originating company is a member of a linked group and one of the following applies:

the other entity is a company that is not a connected entity of the originating company and is a member of that linked group;

the other entity is a connected entity of the originating company;

the other entity is an associate of such a connected entity.

Despite subsection (1):

this Subdivision does not apply because of CGT event B1 if title in the CGT asset does not pass to the other entity when the agreement ends; and

this Subdivision does not apply if the deferral event involves the *acquisition of a greater than 50% interest in a CGT asset by an entity other than an entity referred to in subparagraph (1)(e)(i), (ii) or (iii).

170-260 Linked group

(1) Companies that are linked to one another are a linked group.

(2) Two companies are linked to each other if:

one of them has a controlling stake in the other; or

the same entity has a controlling stake in each of them.

(3) For the purposes of this section, an entity has a controlling stake in a company at a particular time if the entity, or the entity and the entity’s *associates between them:

are able at that time to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 50% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or

have at that time the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or

have at that time the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company.

Note: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

If:

apart from this subsection, an interest that gives an entity and its *associates (if any):

the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting power in a company; or

the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or

the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company;

would, in the application of paragraph (3)(a), (b) or (c), be counted more than once; and

the interest is both direct and indirect;

only the direct interest is to be counted.

170-265 Connected entity

(1) An entity is a connected entity of the originating company at a particular time if, at that time:

the entity is a trustee of a trust and either:

if the trust is a *fixed trust—one or more companies that are members of the linked group of which the originating company is a member, or one or more of those companies and their *associates, between them have the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any distribution to beneficiaries of the trust of income or corpus of the trust; or

if the trust is not a fixed trust—any company that is a member of the linked group of which the originating company is a member or any associate of such a company benefits or is capable of benefiting under the trust; or

the entity is an individual who has a controlling stake in the company.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), an individual has a controlling stake in a company at a particular time if the individual, or the individual and his or her *associates between them:

are able at that time to exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 50% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or

have at that time the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or

have at that time the right to receive for their own benefit (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company.

Note: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

If:

apart from this subsection, an interest that gives an entity and its *associates (if any):

the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting power in a company; or

the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or

the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company;

would, in the application of paragraph (2)(a), (b) or (c), be counted more than once; and

the interest is both direct and indirect;

only the direct interest is to be counted.

170-270 Immediate consequences for originating company

If, apart from this Subdivision:

the originating company would have made a *capital loss (except a capital loss that would be disregarded under a provision of this Act other than this Subdivision) as a result of the deferral event; or

the originating company would have become entitled to a deduction in respect of the deferral event; or

where the originating company is a partner in a partnership—the partnership would have become entitled to a deduction in respect of the deferral event;

the capital loss, the deduction or the partner’s share of the deduction, as the case may be, is disregarded.

To avoid doubt, the amount of the *capital loss, deduction, or partnership deduction, referred to in this section is:

the amount remaining after applying Division 723 or section 727-615; or

nil, if none of the amount remains after applying that section or Division.

Note: Division 723 and section 727-615 reduce a loss realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event happening to a non-depreciating asset (in the case of Division 723) or an affected interest in a losing entity under an indirect value shift (in the case of section 727-615).

170-275 Subsequent consequences for originating company

(1) If, at a time after the deferral event, any one or more of the following events (the new events) happens:

(a) the *CGT asset *acquired by the other entity referred to in paragraph 170-255(1)(a) (the relevant CGT asset), or a greater than 50% interest in it, ceases to exist;

the relevant CGT asset, or a greater than 50% interest in it, is acquired by an entity that is none of the following:

a member of the linked group of which the originating company is a member;

a connected entity of the originating company;

an associate of such a connected entity;

if the relevant CGT asset is acquired by a company that is a member of that linked group—that company ceases to be a member of that linked group;

the originating company ceases to be a member of that linked group;

if the relevant CGT asset is acquired by an entity that is a connected entity of the originating company or is an associate of such a connected entity—that entity ceases to be such a connected entity or ceases to be an associate of such a connected entity, as the case may be;

the originating company is taken, immediately before the time of the happening of the new event or the earliest of the new events, as the case may be, to have made a *capital loss equal to the amount of the capital loss referred to in section 170-270 or to have become entitled to a deduction equal to the deduction, or the share of the deduction, referred to in that section, as the case may be.

If the *capital loss referred to in section 170-270 would have been made from a personal use asset or from a collectable, any corresponding capital loss that the originating company is taken by subsection (1) of this section to have made is taken to have been made from a personal use asset or from a collectable, as the case may be.

170-280 What happens if certain events happen in respect of the asset

(1) This section applies if, as a result of the occurrence of a new event in respect of a *CGT asset, the originating company is taken by subsection 170-275(1) to have made a *capital loss or to be entitled to a deduction and, within 4 years after the occurrence of the new event, one of the following events (further events) occurs:

the asset or a greater than 50% interest in it is *acquired by the originating company or by an entity that, at the time of the acquisition, is:

a company that is a member of the linked group of which the originating company is a member; or

a connected entity of the originating company; or

an associate of such a connected entity;

a company that owns the asset or a greater than 50% interest in it becomes a member of the linked group of which the originating company is a member;

the originating company becomes a member of a linked group another member of which owns the asset or a greater than 50% interest in it;

an entity that owns the asset or a greater than 50% interest in it becomes:

a connected entity of the originating company; or

an associate of such a connected entity.

If the originating company has information from which it would be reasonable to conclude that, if the CGT asset involved were owned by the originating company immediately after the further event, *majority underlying interests in the asset immediately after the further event would not have been had by *ultimate owners who had majority underlying interests in the asset immediately before the deferral event, the further event is taken not to have occurred.

The company is taken not to have made the *capital loss or not to have been entitled to the deduction, as the case may be.

(3) If, at a time after the further event, any one or more of the following events (the realisation events) happens:

(a) the *CGT asset referred to in subsection (1) (the relevant CGT asset), or a greater than 50% interest in it, ceases to exist;

the relevant CGT asset, or a greater than 50% interest in it, is *acquired by an entity that is none of the following:

a member of the linked group of which the originating company is a member;

a connected entity of the originating company;

an associate of such a connected entity;

if the relevant CGT asset is acquired by a company that is a member of that linked group—that company ceases to be a member of that linked group;

the originating company ceases to be a member of that linked group;

if the relevant CGT asset is acquired by an entity that is a connected entity of the originating company or is an associate of such a connected entity—that entity ceases to be such a connected entity or ceases to be an associate of such a connected entity, as the case may be;

the originating company is taken, immediately before the time of the happening of the realisation event or the earliest of the realisation events, as the case may be , to have made a *capital loss equal to the amount of the capital loss referred to in subsection (2) or to have become entitled to a deduction equal to the deduction referred to in that subsection, as the case may be.

If the *capital loss referred to in subsection (2) would have been made from a personal use asset or from a collectable, any corresponding capital loss that the originating company is taken by subsection (3) to have made is taken to have been made from a personal use asset or from a collectable, as the case may be.

Division 175 — Use of a company’s tax losses or deductions to avoid income tax

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 175

175-A Tax benefits from unused tax losses

175-B Tax benefits from unused deductions

175-CA Tax benefits from unused net capital losses of earlier income years

175-CB Tax benefits from unused capital losses of the current year

175-C Tax benefits from unused bad debt deductions

175-D Common rules

Guide to Division 175

175-1 What this Division is about

The Commissioner can reverse the effect of schemes that, in order to avoid tax, bring together in the same company:

assessable income; and

tax losses, current year deductions, or deductions for bad debts, that apart from the scheme would not be fully used.

Subdivision 175-A — Tax benefits from unused tax losses

Table of sections

175-5 When Commissioner can disallow deduction for tax loss

175-10 First case: income or capital gain injected into company because of available tax loss

175-15 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of tax loss available to company

175-5 When Commissioner can disallow deduction for tax loss

(1) This Subdivision sets out cases where the Commissioner may disallow some or all of a *tax loss (or of part of a tax loss) (the excluded loss) as a deduction in calculating a company’s taxable income of an income year after the *loss year.

However, the Commissioner cannot disallow the excluded loss if the company:

fails to meet a condition in section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners) in respect of the loss year or the income year; but

meets the condition in section 165-13 in respect of the income year by satisfying the business continuity test under section 165-210.

175-10 First case: income or capital gain injected into company because of available tax loss

(1) The Commissioner may disallow the *excluded loss if, during the income year, the company *derived assessable income, or a *capital gain accrued to the company, some or all of which (the injected amount) would not have been derived, or would not have accrued, if the excluded loss had not been available to be taken into account for the purposes of:

• Division 36 (which is about tax losses of earlier years);

• Division 165 (which is about the income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company);

• former Subdivision 375-G (which is about film losses).

However, the Commissioner cannot disallow the excluded loss if the continuing shareholders will benefit from the derivation or accrual of the injected amount to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective rights and interests in the company.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow an excluded loss of an insolvent company.

(3) The continuing shareholders are:

all of the persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company during the whole (or the relevant part) of the loss year and during the whole of the income year; and

all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends during the whole (or the relevant part) of the loss year and during the whole of the income year; and

all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions during the whole (or the relevant part) of the loss year and during the whole of the income year.

To find out who they were, apply whichever tests are applied in order to determine whether the company can deduct the *tax loss (or the part of the tax loss) in the first place.

Note 1: See section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners).

Note 2: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

175-15 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of tax loss available to company

The Commissioner may disallow the excluded loss if:

a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and

the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the excluded loss had not been available to be taken into account for the purposes of:

• Division 36 (which is about tax losses of earlier years);

• Division 165 (which is about the income tax consequences of changing ownership or control of a company);

• former Subdivision 375-G (which is about film losses).

However, the Commissioner cannot disallow the excluded loss if:

the person had a shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and

the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow an excluded loss of an insolvent company.

(3) An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 175-B — Tax benefits from unused deductions

Table of sections

175-20 Income or capital gain injected into company because of available deductions

175-25 Deduction injected into company because of available income or capital gain

175-30 Someone else obtains a tax benefit because of a deduction, income or capital gain available to company

175-35 Tax loss resulting from disallowed deductions

175-20 Income or capital gain injected into company because of available deductions

The Commissioner may disallow deductions of a company (or parts of them) for an income year if:

(a) the company has *derived assessable income, or a *capital gain accrued to the company, some or all of which (the injected amount) would not have been derived, or would not have accrued, if the company did not have those deductions; and

the income was derived, or the capital gain accrued, in that income year.

The disallowed deductions and parts of deductions may exceed the injected amount.

Note: The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year. See section 175-35.

The Commissioner cannot disallow the deductions or parts of the deductions if the continuing shareholders will benefit from the derivation of the injected amount to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective *shareholding interests in the company.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow the whole or part of any deductions of an insolvent company.

(3) The continuing shareholders are the individuals who had *shareholding interests in the company both immediately before the *injected amount was *derived, and immediately afterwards.

175-25 Deduction injected into company because of available income or capital gain

The Commissioner may disallow a deduction of a company for an income year to the extent that the company would not have incurred the loss, outgoing or expenditure that the deduction is for if it had not *derived some or all of the assessable income it derived in that income year, or had not made some or all of a *capital gain it made in that income year.

Note: The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year. See section 175-35.

The Commissioner cannot disallow any of the deduction if:

the continuing shareholders will benefit from any profit or advantage that has arisen or might arise directly or indirectly from the loss, outgoing or expenditure being incurred; and

the Commissioner thinks that the extent to which they will benefit is fair and reasonable having regard to their respective *shareholding interests in the company.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow a deduction of an insolvent company.

(3) The continuing shareholders are the individuals who had *shareholding interests in the company both immediately before the loss, outgoing or expenditure was incurred, and immediately afterwards.

175-30 Someone else obtains a tax benefit because of a deduction, income or capital gain available to company

The Commissioner may disallow a deduction of a company if:

a person (other than the company) has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and

(b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the company had not incurred some or all (the available expense) of the loss, outgoing or expenditure that the deduction is for.

However, the deduction may be disallowed only to the extent of the available expense.

The Commissioner may disallow deductions of a company (or parts of them) if:

a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and

(b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if some or all (the available amount) of the assessable income that the company *derived or of a *capital gain that accrued to the company:

before it incurred the losses, outgoings or expenditure that the deductions were for; and

in the same income year as it incurred them;

had not been derived or had not accrued, as the case may be.

The disallowed deductions and parts of deductions may exceed the available amount.

Note: The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year. See section 175-35.

(3) An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The Commissioner cannot disallow under this section if:

the person who has obtained or will obtain the tax benefit had a shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and

the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow the whole or part of any deductions of an insolvent company.

175-35 Tax loss resulting from disallowed deductions

If a company has a taxable income for an income year because the Commissioner disallows under this Subdivision deductions of the company for the income year (or parts of them), the company may also have a *tax loss for the income year.

(2) The company’s tax loss for the income year is calculated as follows.

Total what the Commissioner has disallowed under this Subdivision.

If the company has exempt income for the income year, subtract its net exempt income.

(5) Any amount remaining is the company’s tax loss for the income year, which is called a loss year.

Note: The meanings of tax loss and loss year are modified by section 36-55 for a corporate tax entity that has an amount of excess franking offsets.

To find out how much of the tax loss can be deducted in later income years: see Subdivision 165-A. To find out how to deduct it: see section 36-17.

Subdivision 175-CA — Tax benefits from unused net capital losses of earlier income years

Table of sections

175-40 When Commissioner can disallow net capital loss of earlier income year

175-45 First case: capital gain injected into company because of available net capital loss

175-50 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of net capital loss available to company

175-40 When Commissioner can disallow net capital loss of earlier income year

(1) This Subdivision sets out cases where the Commissioner may prevent a company, in working out its *net capital gain for an income year, from applying some or all of a *net capital loss it has for an earlier income year (or of part of one) (the excluded loss). This is called disallowing the excluded loss.

Note: A company’s net capital gain for an income year is usually worked out under section 102-5.

However, the Commissioner cannot *disallow the excluded loss if, in determining (under section 165-96) whether Subdivision 165-A would prevent the company from deducting the loss (or the part of the loss) for the income year if the loss were a *tax loss of the company for that earlier income year, the company:

would fail to meet a condition in section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners) in respect of the income year; but

would meet the condition in section 165-13 in respect of the income year by satisfying the business continuity test under section 165-210.

Note: Subdivision 165-A deals with the deductibility of a company’s tax loss for an earlier income year if there has been a change in the ownership or control of the company in the period from the start of the loss year to the end of the income year.

175-45 First case: capital gain injected into company because of available net capital loss

(1) The Commissioner may *disallow the *excluded loss if, during the income year, the company made a *capital gain some or all of which (the injected capital gain) it would not have made if the excluded loss had not been available to be applied in working out the company’s *net capital gain for the income year (or for some other income year).

However, the Commissioner cannot *disallow the excluded loss if the continuing shareholders will benefit from the making of the injected capital gain to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective rights and interests in the company.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow an excluded loss of an insolvent company.

(3) The continuing shareholders are:

all of the persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company during the whole (or the relevant part) of the earlier income year and during the whole of the income year; and

all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends during the whole (or the relevant part) of the earlier income year and during the whole of the income year; and

all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions during the whole (or the relevant part) of the earlier income year and during the whole of the income year.

To find out who they were, apply whichever tests are applied in order to determine (under section 165-96) whether Subdivision 165-A would prevent the company from deducting the loss for the current year if it were a *tax loss of the company for that earlier income year.

Note 1: See section 165-12 (which is about the company maintaining the same owners).

Note 2: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

175-50 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of net capital loss available to company

The Commissioner may *disallow the excluded loss if:

a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and

the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the excluded loss had not been available to be applied in working out the company’s net capital gain for the income year (or for some other income year).

However, the Commissioner cannot *disallow the excluded loss if:

the person had a shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and

the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow an excluded loss of an insolvent company.

(3) An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 175-CB — Tax benefits from unused capital losses of the current year

Table of sections

175-55 When Commissioner can disallow capital loss of current year

175-60 Capital gain injected into company because of available capital loss

175-65 Capital loss injected into company because of available capital gain

175-70 Someone else obtains a tax benefit because of capital loss or gain available to company

175-75 Net capital loss resulting from disallowed capital losses

175-55 When Commissioner can disallow capital loss of current year

This Subdivision sets out cases where the Commissioner may prevent a company, in working out its *net capital gain or *net capital loss for an income year, from applying all or part of a *capital loss it made during the income year. This is called disallowing the capital loss or part.

175-60 Capital gain injected into company because of available capital loss

The Commissioner may *disallow *capital losses of a company (or parts of them) for an income year if:

(a) the company has made a *capital gain some or all of which (the injected capital gain) it would not have made if it did not have those capital losses; and

the injected capital gain was made in that income year.

The disallowed capital losses and parts of capital losses may exceed the amount of the injected capital gain.

Note: The disallowance may result in a net capital loss for the income year: see section 175-75.

The Commissioner cannot *disallow the *capital losses or parts of the capital losses if the continuing shareholders will benefit from the making of the injected capital gain to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective *shareholding interests in the company.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow capital losses or parts of capital losses of an insolvent company.

(3) The continuing shareholders are the individuals who had *shareholding interests in the company both immediately before the *injected capital gain was made, and immediately afterwards.

175-65 Capital loss injected into company because of available capital gain

The Commissioner may *disallow a *capital loss of a company for an income year to the extent that the company would not have made the loss if it had not also made some or all of a *capital gain it made in that income year.

Note: The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year: see section 175-75.

The Commissioner cannot *disallow any of the *capital loss if:

the continuing shareholders will benefit from any profit or advantage that has arisen or might arise directly or indirectly from the loss being made; and

the Commissioner thinks that the extent to which they will benefit is fair and reasonable having regard to their respective *shareholding interests in the company.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow a capital loss of an insolvent company.

(3) The continuing shareholders are the individuals who had *shareholding interests in the company both immediately before the *capital loss was made, and immediately afterwards.

175-70 Someone else obtains a tax benefit because of capital loss or gain available to company

The Commissioner may *disallow a *capital loss of a company if:

a person (other than the company) has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and

(b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the company had not made some or all (the available capital loss) of the capital loss.

However, the capital loss may be disallowed only to the extent of the available capital loss.

The Commissioner may *disallow *capital losses of a company (or parts of them) if:

a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and

(b) the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the company had not made some or all (the available capital gains) of the *capital gains it made:

before it made the capital losses; and

in the same income year as it made them.

The disallowed capital losses and parts of capital losses may exceed the amount of the available capital gains.

Note: The disallowance may result in a tax loss for the income year: see section 175-75.

(3) An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The Commissioner cannot *disallow under this section if:

the person who has obtained or will obtain the tax benefit had a shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and

the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow the whole or part of any capital losses of an insolvent company.

175-75 Net capital loss resulting from disallowed capital losses

If a company has a *net capital gain for an income year because the Commissioner *disallows under this Subdivision *capital losses of the company for the income year (or parts of them), the company also has a net capital loss for the income year equal to the total of those losses and parts of losses.

To find out how much of the net capital loss can be applied in later income years: see Subdivision 165-CA.

To find out how to apply it: see sections 102-5 and 102-15.

Subdivision 175-C — Tax benefits from unused bad debt deductions

Table of sections

175-80 When Commissioner can disallow deduction for bad debt

175-85 First case: income or capital gain injected into company because of available bad debt

175-90 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of bad debt deduction available to company

175-80 When Commissioner can disallow deduction for bad debt

This Subdivision sets out cases where the Commissioner may disallow some or all of a deduction for a debt (or part of a debt) that is owed to a company and is written off as bad in the income year.

However, the Commissioner cannot disallow any of the deduction if the company:

fails to meet a condition in section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners) in respect of the first continuity period or the second continuity period; but

meets the condition in section 165-126 by satisfying the business continuity test under section 165-210.

175-85 First case: income or capital gain injected into company because of available bad debt

(1) The Commissioner may disallow some or all of the deduction if the company would not have had some or all (the injected amount) of its assessable income or *capital gains for the income year if:

the debt had not been incurred; and

the debt (or the relevant part of the debt) had not been written off (or able to be written off) as bad.

However, the Commissioner cannot disallow any of the deduction if the continuing shareholders will benefit from the company having the injected amount to an extent that the Commissioner thinks fair and reasonable having regard to their respective rights and interests in the company.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow some or all of a deduction of an insolvent company.

(3) The continuing shareholders are:

all of the persons who had *more than 50% of the voting power in the company throughout the first continuity period and the second continuity period; and

all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s dividends throughout the first continuity period and the second continuity period; and

all of the persons who had rights to *more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions throughout the first continuity period and the second continuity period.

To find out who they were, apply whichever tests are applied in order to determine whether the company can deduct the debt (or the relevant part of the debt) in the first place.

Note 1: See section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners).

Note 2: Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

175-90 Second case: someone else obtains a tax benefit because of bad debt deduction available to company

The Commissioner may disallow some or all of the deduction if:

a person has obtained or will obtain a tax benefit in connection with a *scheme; and

the scheme would not have been entered into or carried out if the debt had not been incurred and the debt (or the relevant part of the debt) had not been written off (or able to be written off) as bad.

However, the Commissioner cannot disallow any of the deduction if:

the person had a shareholding interest in the company at some time during the income year; and

the Commissioner considers the tax benefit to be fair and reasonable having regard to that shareholding interest.

Note: Section 175-100 allows the Commissioner to disallow some or all of a deduction of an insolvent company.

(3) An expression means the same in this section as in Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 175-D — Common rules

Table of sections

175-95 When a person has a shareholding interest in the company

175-100 Commissioner may disallow excluded losses etc. of insolvent companies

175-95 When a person has a shareholding interest in the company

(1) A person has a shareholding interest in the company if the person is:

the beneficial owner; or

the trustee of a family trust who is the owner;

of:

*shares in the company; or

an interest in *shares in the company.

(2) A person also has a shareholding interest in the company if:

the person has a shareholding interest in another company; and

the other company has a shareholding interest in the company (including one resulting from any other application or applications of this subsection).

175-100 Commissioner may disallow excluded losses etc. of insolvent companies

Despite a subsection listed in column 1, the Commissioner may, under a subsection listed in column 2, disallow some or all of an excluded loss, deduction, or *capital loss, of a company (as the case requires) if:

the company is or becomes:

(i) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001; or

an entity with a similar status under a foreign law to a Chapter 5 body corporate; and

(b) the company is insolvent (within the meaning of section 9 of the Corporations Act 2001) when the company becomes an entity mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii).

Division 180 — Information about family trusts with interests in companies

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 180

180-A Information relevant to Division 165

180-B Information relevant to Division 175

Guide to Division 180

180-1 What this Division is about

If a company would only avoid the tax consequences of Division 165 or 175 because of interests held by a foreign resident family trust, the Commissioner may require the company to give certain information about the family trust. If it is not given, the company does not avoid the tax consequences of that Division.

Subdivision 180-A — Information relevant to Division 165

Table of sections

180-5 Information about family trusts with interests in companies

180-10 Notice where requirements of section 180-5 are met

180-5 Information about family trusts with interests in companies

Notice about company

The Commissioner may give a company a notice in accordance with section 180-10 if the requirements of this section are met.

Tax detriment under Division 165

In its income tax return for an income year:

the company must have deducted a *tax loss from a loss year where it would not be allowed to deduct the tax loss if it did not meet the conditions in section 165-12; or

the company must not have calculated:

its taxable income and tax loss under Subdivision 165-B; and

its net capital gain and net capital loss under Subdivision 165-CB;

where it would have been required to calculate them under that Subdivision if it did not satisfy the requirements of paragraph 165-35(a); or

the company must have applied a net capital loss from an earlier income year in working out its net capital gain where it would not have been allowed to apply the loss if it did not meet the condition in section 165-12 as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1); or

the company must have deducted a debt that it wrote off as bad in the income year where it would not be allowed to deduct the debt if it did not satisfy the requirements of paragraph 165-120(1)(a) or (b).

Role of family trust

The Commissioner must be satisfied that the company:

if paragraph (2)(a) applies—meets the conditions in section 165-12; or

if paragraph (2)(b) applies—satisfies the requirements of paragraph 165-35(a); or

if paragraph (2)(c) applies—meets the conditions in section 165-12 as applied on the assumption mentioned in subsection 165-96(1); or

if paragraph (2)(d) applies—satisfies the requirements of paragraph 165-120(1)(a) or (b);

but it would not do so unless one or more trusts were *family trusts.

Foreign resident trust

When the Commissioner gives the notice, for at least one of the *family trusts:

a trustee of the trust must be a foreign resident; or

the central management and control of the trust must be outside Australia.

When notice must be given

The Commissioner must give the notice before the later of:

5 years after the income year to which the return relates; and

(b) the end of the period during which the company is required by section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to retain records in relation to that income year.

180-10 Notice where requirements of section 180-5 are met

Information required

(1) The notice that the Commissioner may give if the requirements of section 180-5 are met must require the company to give the Commissioner specified information about conferrals of present entitlements to, and distributions (within the meaning of Subdivision 272-B in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of, income and capital, since the start of:

if paragraph 180-5(2)(a) applies—the loss year mentioned in that paragraph; or

if paragraph 180-5(2)(b) applies—the income year for which that paragraph is being applied; or

if paragraph 180-5(2)(c) applies—the earlier income year mentioned in that paragraph; or

if paragraph 180-5(2)(d) applies:

where the debt mentioned in that paragraph was incurred in an earlier income year—the day on which the debt was incurred; or

where the debt mentioned in that paragraph was incurred in the income year mentioned in that paragraph—that income year;

by all of the *family trusts meeting the requirements of paragraph 180-5(4)(a) or (b).

Company knowledge

The information need not be within the knowledge of the company at the time the notice is given.

Period for giving information

The notice must specify a period within which the company is to give the information. The period must not end earlier than 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives the notice.

Consequence of not giving the information

If the company does not give the information within the period or within such further period as the Commissioner allows:

if paragraph 180-5(2)(a) applies—the company is not entitled, and is taken never to have been entitled, to deduct the *tax loss; or

if paragraph 180-5(2)(b) applies—the company is required, and taken always to have been required:

to calculate its taxable income and tax loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-B; and

to calculate its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year under Subdivision 165-CB; or

if paragraph 180-5(2)(c) applies—the company is not entitled, and is taken never to have been entitled, to apply the net capital loss; or

if paragraph 180-5(2)(d) applies—the company is not entitled, and is taken never to have been entitled, to deduct the debt.

If, because of paragraph (4)(b), the company is required to calculate under Subdivision 165-B its taxable income and *tax loss for the income year concerned, that Subdivision is to be applied as if it required the income year to be divided into such periods as would result in the highest possible taxable income for the income year.

If, because of paragraph (4)(b), the company is required to calculate under Subdivision 165-CB its net capital gain and net capital loss for the income year concerned, that Subdivision is to be applied as if it required the income year to be divided into such periods as would result in the highest net capital gain for the income year.

No offences or penalties

(7) To avoid doubt, subsections (4) to (6) do not cause the company to commit any offence or be liable to any penalty under Part 4-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for:

deducting the *tax loss; or

not calculating its taxable income and tax loss under Subdivision 165-B as it applies in accordance with subsection (5) of this section; or

not calculating its net capital gain and net capital loss under Subdivision 165-CB as it applies in accordance with subsection (6) of this section; or

applying the net capital loss; or

deducting the debt;

in the company’s income tax return.

Subdivision 180-B — Information relevant to Division 175

Table of sections

180-15 Information about family trusts with interests in companies

180-20 Notice where requirements of section 180-15 are met

180-15 Information about family trusts with interests in companies

Notice about company

The Commissioner may give a company a notice in accordance with section 180-20 if the requirements of this section are met.

Tax detriment under Division 175

The Commissioner:

must have been prevented by subsection 175-10(2) or 175-15(2) from disallowing, as a deduction for an income year, the whole or part of a *tax loss from a loss year; or

must have been prevented by subsection 175-20(2), 175-25(2) or 175-30(4) from disallowing the whole or part of a deduction for an income year; or

must have been prevented by subsection 175-45(2) or 175-50(2) from disallowing, in working out the net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year, the whole or part of a net capital loss for an earlier income year (or a part of one); or

must have been prevented by subsection 175-60(2), 175-65(2) or 175-70(4) from disallowing, in working out its net capital gain or net capital loss for an income year, the whole or part of a *capital loss made during the income year; or

must have been prevented by subsection 175-85(2) or 175-90(2) from disallowing, as a deduction for an income year, the whole or part of a debt.

Role of family trust

A family trust must have been:

one of the continuing shareholders mentioned in subsection 175-10(2), 175-20(2), 175-25(2), 175-45(2), 175-60(2), 175-65(2) or 175-85(2); or

the person who had the shareholding interest mentioned in subsection 175-15(2), 175-30(4), 175-50(2), 175-70(4) or 175-90(2);

as the case requires.

Foreign resident trust

When the Commissioner gives the notice:

a trustee of the family trust must be a foreign resident; or

the central management and control of the family trust must be outside Australia.

When notice must be given

The Commissioner must give the notice before the later of:

5 years after the income year mentioned in subsection (2); and

(b) the end of the period during which the company is required by section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to retain records in relation to that income year.

180-20 Notice where requirements of section 180-15 are met

Information required

(1) The notice that the Commissioner may give if the requirements of section 180-15 are met must require the company to give the Commissioner specified information about conferrals of present entitlements to, and distributions (within the meaning of Subdivision 272-B in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of, income and capital by the *family trust since the start of:

the loss year mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(a); or

the income year mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(b) or (d); or

the earlier income year mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(c); or

if the debt mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(e) was incurred in the income year mentioned in that paragraph—that income year; or

if the debt mentioned in paragraph 180-15(2)(e) was incurred in an earlier income year than the one mentioned in that paragraph—the day on which the debt was incurred.

Company knowledge

The information need not be within the knowledge of the company at the time the notice is given.

Period for giving information

The notice must specify a period within which the company is to give the information. The period must not end earlier than 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives the notice.

Consequence of not giving the information

If the company does not give the information within the period or within such further period as the Commissioner allows:

subsection 175-10(2), 175-15(2), 175-20(2), 175-25(2), 175-30(4), 175-85(2) or 175-90(2) does not prevent the Commissioner from disallowing the deduction; or

subsection 175-45(2) or 175-50(2) does not prevent the Commissioner from *disallowing the net capital loss; or

subsection 175-60(2), 175-65(2) or 175-70(4) does not prevent the Commissioner from *disallowing the *capital loss;

as the case requires.

No offences or penalties

(5) To avoid doubt, subsection (4) does not cause the company to commit any offence or be liable to any penalty under Part 4-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for claiming the deduction, or applying the *net capital loss or *capital loss, in the company’s *income tax return.

Division 195 — Special types of company

Table of Subdivisions

195-A Pooled development funds (PDFs)

195-B Limited partnerships

195-C Corporate collective investment vehicles

Subdivision 195-A — Pooled development funds (PDFs)

Guide to Subdivision 195-A

195-1 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision contains rules about the income tax treatment of:

pooled development funds (PDFs)

shares in PDFs.

Table of sections

Working out a PDF’s taxable income and tax loss

195-5 Deductibility of PDF tax losses

195-10 PDF cannot transfer tax loss

195-15 Tax loss for year in which company becomes a PDF

Working out a PDF’s net capital gain and net capital loss

195-25 Applying a PDF’s net capital losses

195-30 PDF cannot transfer net capital loss

195-35 Net capital loss for year in which company becomes a PDF

Working out a PDF’s loss carry back tax offset

195-37 PDF cannot carry back tax loss

Working out a PDF’s taxable income and tax loss

195-5 Deductibility of PDF tax losses

If a company is a *PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a *tax loss, it can deduct the tax loss in a later income year only if it is a PDF throughout the later income year.

195-10 PDF cannot transfer tax loss

If a company is a *PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a *tax loss, it cannot transfer any amount of the tax loss under Subdivision 170-A (which is about the transfer of tax losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies).

195-15 Tax loss for year in which company becomes a PDF

This section applies if a company becomes a *PDF during an income year and is still a PDF at the end of it.

Divide the income year into periods as follows:

(a) the non-PDF period is the period beginning at the start of the income year and ending when the company becomes a *PDF;

(b) the PDF period is the rest of the income year.

For each period, work out whether the company has a taxable income or a *tax loss (or both), treating each period as if it were an income year.

If the company has:

a taxable income for the non-PDF period; and

a *tax loss for the PDF period;

that tax loss is a tax loss of the company for the income year.

Note: The company can only deduct the tax loss while it is a PDF: see section 195-5.

If the company has a *tax loss for the non-PDF period:

(a) section 195-5 does not prevent the company from deducting its tax loss for the income year in a later income year; and

(b) section 195-10 does not prevent the company from transferring an amount of the tax loss under Subdivision 170-A (which is about the transfer of tax losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies); and

(c) section 195-37 does not prevent the company from *carrying back its tax loss for the purpose of working out the amount of the company’s *loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year;

to the extent that the tax loss does not exceed the tax loss for the non-PDF period.

These rules apply in addition to the other rules about how *tax losses are applied or transferred.

The other rules start in Division 36 (which is about tax losses of earlier income years).

Working out a PDF’s net capital gain and net capital loss

195-25 Applying a PDF’s net capital losses

If a company is a *PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a net capital loss, it can apply the loss in working out its net capital gain for a later income year only if it is a PDF throughout the last day of the later income year.

195-30 PDF cannot transfer net capital loss

If a company is a *PDF at the end of an income year for which it has a net capital loss, it cannot transfer any amount of the loss under Subdivision 170-B (which is about the transfer of net capital losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies).

195-35 Net capital loss for year in which company becomes a PDF

This section applies if a company becomes a *PDF during an income year and is still a PDF at the end of it.

Divide the income year into periods according to subsection 195-15(2) (about working out the company’s tax loss for the income year).

For each period, work out whether the company has a net capital gain or a net capital loss (or both), treating each period as if it were an income year.

If the company has:

a net capital gain for the non-PDF period; and

a net capital loss for the PDF period;

that loss is a net capital loss of the company for the income year.

Note: The company can only apply the loss while it is a PDF: see section 195-25.

If the company has a net capital loss for the non-PDF period:

(a) section 195-25 does not prevent the company from applying its *net capital loss for the income year in working out its *net capital gain for a later income year; and

(b) section 195-30 does not prevent the company from transferring an amount of its net capital loss for the income year under Subdivision 170-B (which is about the transfer of net capital losses within certain wholly-owned groups of companies);

to the extent that its net capital loss for the income year does not exceed its net capital loss for the non-PDF period.

These rules apply in addition to the other rules about how *net capital losses are applied or transferred.

The other rules start in Division 102 (about net capital gains and losses).

Working out a PDF’s loss carry back tax offset

195-37 PDF cannot carry back tax loss

A company that:

has a *tax loss for an income year; and

is a *PDF at the end of the income year;

cannot *carry back the loss to an earlier income year for the purposes of working out the amount of the company’s *loss carry back tax offset for the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year (the offset year) unless the company is a PDF throughout the earlier income year and the offset year.

Subdivision 195-B — Limited partnerships

Guide to Subdivision 195-B

195-60 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision contains rules about the income tax treatment of limited partnerships that become, or cease to be, venture capital limited partnerships, early stage venture capital limited partnerships, Australian venture capital funds of funds or venture capital management partnerships.

It also allows the Commissioner to determine how to take account of limited partnerships having income years of less than 12 months when they become, or cease to be, venture capital limited partnerships, early stage venture capital limited partnerships, Australian venture capital funds of funds or venture capital management partnerships.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

195-65 Tax losses cannot be transferred to a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP

195-70 Previous tax losses can be deducted after ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP

195-72 Tax losses cannot be carried back to before ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP

195-75 Determinations to take account of income years of less than 12 months

Operative provisions

195-65 Tax losses cannot be transferred to a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP

A *limited partnership’s *tax loss for a loss year cannot be deducted in a later income year during which the partnership is a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP.

195-70 Previous tax losses can be deducted after ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP

This Subdivision does not prevent a *limited partnership that has ceased to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP from deducting, in an income year, a *tax loss for a loss year that occurred before the partnership was a VCLP, ESVCLP, AFOF or VCMP.

195-72 Tax losses cannot be carried back to before ceasing to be a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP

A *limited partnership’s *tax loss for a loss year cannot be *carried back to an income year during which the partnership was a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP.

195-75 Determinations to take account of income years of less than 12 months

(1) The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, make a determination modifying the operation of one or more provisions of this Act in relation to limited partnerships whose accounting periods commence or end under section 18A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

A determination can only be made in order to take account of the fact that such accounting periods are of less than 12 months’ duration.

Subdivision 195-C — Corporate collective investment vehicles

Guide to Subdivision 195-C

195-100 What this Subdivision is about

The business, assets and liabilities of each sub-fund of a CCIV are taken to constitute the trust estate of a separate trust (a CCIV sub-fund trust), of which the CCIV is the trustee and the members of the sub-fund are the beneficiaries.

This Subdivision sets out further rules to facilitate the CCIV, and the sub-fund and its members, being taxed on this basis, including:

• modifications of the rules for determining whether the CCIV sub-fund trust is a managed investment trust (under Division 275) and an attribution managed investment trust (under Division 276); and

• rules to support the application of Division 6 or 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, to the extent that Division applies to the trust; and

• rules to support the application to the trust of relevant rules about trust losses and capital gains.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

195-105 Effect of this Subdivision

195-110 Each sub-fund of a CCIV is taken to be a separate trust

195-115 A CCIV sub-fund trust is a unit trust

195-120 Beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has fixed entitlements to shares of income and capital of the trust

195-123 How to work out the income of the trust estate of a CCIV sub-fund trust for an income year

195-125 When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust is presently entitled to trust income

195-127 When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has an individual interest in exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate

195-130 Application of Division 275 (managed investment trusts) to a CCIV sub-fund trust

195-135 Application of Division 276 (AMITs) to a CCIV sub-fund trust

195-140 Entry on Australian Business Register

Operative provisions

Note: These modifications also affect whether the trust is a withholding MIT under Subdivision 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

195-105 Effect of this Subdivision

This Subdivision has effect for the purposes of all *taxation laws, to the exclusion of those laws as they would otherwise apply in relation to *CCIVs and their members (in their capacity as such).

Note: Subsection (3) excludes some taxation laws from this subsection.

Without limiting the generality of subsection (1), the purposes referred to in that subsection include how *taxation laws apply in relation to other entities, in so far as that application is affected by the application of those laws in relation to *CCIVs and their members (in their capacity as such).

Note: For example, in applying subsection 318(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to determine whether a CCIV is an associate of a natural person for the purposes of a provision affecting the income tax payable by that person:

paragraph 318(1)(d) of that Act (providing for when a trustee of a trust is an associate of the natural person) would apply; and

paragraph 318(1)(e) of that Act (providing for when a company is an associate of the natural person) would not apply.

Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to the following *taxation laws:

(a) the Foreign Acquisitions and Takeovers Act 1975;

legislative instruments made under that Act.

195-110 Each sub-fund of a CCIV is taken to be a separate trust

For each *sub-fund of a *CCIV, the business, *assets and *liabilities of the sub-fund are taken to constitute the trust estate of a separate trust, of which the CCIV is the trustee and the *members of the sub-fund are the beneficiaries.

(2) A trust that is taken to exist because of the application of subsection (1) to a *sub-fund of a *CCIV is a CCIV sub-fund trust.

Note: The combined effect of this section and subsections 960-100(2) and (3) is that a CCIV is a different entity in its capacity as trustee of each of its CCIV sub-fund trusts.

Because of subsection 195-105(1), the tax treatment of the CCIV in those capacities excludes the tax treatment that would otherwise apply to the CCIV as a company. Also, the tax treatment of members of the CCIV is based on them being treated as beneficiaries of their respective CCIV sub-fund trusts, to the exclusion of the tax treatment that would otherwise apply to them as members of a company.

CCIV A holds shares in CCIV B. The shares are referable to sub-fund B. They are assets of sub-fund A.

In its capacity as trustee of the CCIV sub-fund trust for sub-fund A, CCIV A is a beneficiary of the CCIV sub-fund trust for sub-fund B.

As permitted by section 1230Q of the Corporations Act 2001, the CCIV acquires, in respect of sub-fund A, shares that are referable to sub-fund B. The shares are assets of sub-fund A.

In its capacity as trustee of the CCIV sub-fund trust for sub-fund A, the CCIV is a beneficiary of the CCIV sub-fund trust for sub-fund B.

Example 1: CCIV A has only one sub-fund (sub-fund A). CCIV B has only one sub-fund (sub-fund B).

Example 2: A CCIV has 2 sub-funds: sub-fund A and sub-fund B.

195-115 A CCIV sub-fund trust is a unit trust

A CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to be a unit trust.

Note: One consequence of this subsection is that a CCIV sub-fund trust can be a public unit trust if it meets the other tests in section 102P of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The *shares that are *referable to the *sub-fund are taken to be the units in the trust.

The rights, obligations and other characteristics attaching to a unit in the trust are taken to be the same, as nearly as practicable, as the rights, obligations and other characteristics attaching to the share that is taken to be that unit.

Note: One consequence of this section is that if shares that are referable to the sub-fund are listed for quotation in the official list of a stock exchange, the units in the sub-fund trust that those shares are taken to be will likewise be taken to be listed in that official list.

Examples of provisions to which this is relevant are:

paragraph 275-20(2)(a) (widely-held requirement for managed investment trusts) of this Act; and

(b) paragraph 102P(1)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (public unit trusts).

195-120 Beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has fixed entitlements to shares of income and capital of the trust

(1) A *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to have a fixed entitlement to a share of income of the trust that the trust derives from time to time. At a particular time, that share is equal to the percentage worked out using the formula:

where:

beneficiary dividends is the total of the *dividends that the *beneficiary has a right to receive because of *shares that the beneficiary holds at that time and are *referable to the *sub-fund.

total dividends is the total of all *dividends that are payable on all *shares that are on issue at that time and are *referable to the *sub-fund.

(2) A *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to have a fixed entitlement to a share of the capital of the trust at a particular time equal to the percentage worked out using the formula:

where:

beneficiary capital distribution is the amount of a distribution of paid-up capital (in the event of a return of capital) that the *beneficiary has a right to receive because of *shares that the beneficiary holds at that time and are *referable to the *sub-fund.

total capital distribution is the total distribution of paid-up capital (in that event) payable on all *shares that are on issue at that time and are *referable to the *sub-fund.

(3) A fixed entitlement that exists because of this section is taken to be a fixed entitlement within the meaning given by sections 272-5, 272-10, 272-15 and 272-40 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: This is relevant to, for example, the definition of fixed entitlement in subsection 102UC(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

195-123 How to work out the income of the trust estate of a CCIV sub-fund trust for an income year

(1) The income (the trust income) of the trust estate of a *CCIV sub-fund trust for an income year is worked out in accordance with this section.

Note: This is relevant to working out the income tax position of the CCIV sub-fund trust and its beneficiaries under Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

If:

the *CCIV is a retail CCIV at the end of the income year; and

(b) the amount of the *sub-fund’s profit for the income year, as required to be stated in the financial statements included in the financial report for the sub-fund for the income year that the CCIV is required to prepare because of paragraph 1232C(1)(a) of the Corporations Act 2001, is greater than nil;

the trust income is that profit.

If:

the *CCIV is not a retail CCIV at the end of the income year; and

the amount of the *sub-fund’s profit for the income year that would, if the CCIV had been a retail CCIV at the end of the income year, be required to be stated as mentioned in paragraph (2)(b) is greater than nil;

the trust income is that profit.

If neither of subsections (2) and (3) applies, the trust income is nil.

195-125 When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust is presently entitled to trust income

A *beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to be presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust estate for an income year if any of the *sub-fund’s profit for the income year was or is payable to the beneficiary by way of one or more *dividends declared during, or within 3 months after, the income year.

That share consists of so much of that profit as was or is payable to the beneficiary by way of one or more such *dividends.

Note: To the extent that any of that profit is not payable to a beneficiary by way of such dividends, it will be income to which no beneficiary is presently entitled. This can have consequences under section 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Within 3 months after the end of the income year, the *CCIV must notify the *beneficiary, in the approved form, of the following matters:

whether the beneficiary is presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust estate for the income year and, if so, the amount of that share;

for each dividend that was declared during, or within 3 months after, the income year on *shares referable to the *sub-fund, and was or is payable to the beneficiary:

the amount of the dividend; and

how much of the dividend consists of any of the *sub-fund’s profit for the income year.

Note: Failure to comply with this section may constitute an offence against subsection 8C(1) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

For the purposes of this section, an amount is taken to be payable to the *beneficiary if it is required to be applied or dealt with in any way on the beneficiary’s behalf or as the beneficiary directs.

Except as provided in this section, a *beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust is not taken to be presently entitled to a share of income of the trust estate.

195-127 When a beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust has an individual interest in exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate

A *beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust:

is taken to have an individual interest in the exempt income of the trust estate from time to time; and

is taken to have an individual interest in the non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate from time to time.

The individual interest referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or (b) is the same as the share (of income that the trust derives from time to time) to which the beneficiary has a *fixed entitlement under subsection 195-120(1).

Except as provided in this section, a *beneficiary of a CCIV sub-fund trust is not taken to have an individual interest in the exempt income, or non-assessable non-exempt income, of the trust estate.

195-130 Application of Division 275 (managed investment trusts) to a CCIV sub-fund trust

(1) This section sets out how to apply Division 275 to a trust that is a *CCIV sub-fund trust.

Determining whether the trust is a managed investment trust

Section 275-10 has effect in relation to the trust as if the following paragraph were substituted for paragraph 275-10(3)(c):

at the time the payment is made, the *sub-fund is being used for collective investment by pooling the contributions of the *members of the sub-fund as consideration to acquire rights to benefits produced from those contributions; and

In applying section 275-10 to the trust, disregard the following provisions:

paragraph 275-10(3)(d);

paragraph 275-10(3)(g).

Section 275-10 has effect in relation to the trust as if the following paragraph were substituted for paragraph 275-10(3)(e):

the trust satisfies, in relation to the income year:

if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is covered by section 275-15—either or both of the widely-held requirements in subsection 275-20(1) and 275-25(1); or

(ii) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is not covered by section 275-15—either or both of the widely-held requirements in subsections 275-20(2) and 275-25(1); and

Determining whether the trust is a trust with wholesale membership

In applying section 275-15 to the trust, disregard paragraph 275-15(a).

Determining whether the trust satisfies the widely-held requirements

In applying section 275-45 to the trust, disregard paragraph 275-45(1)(d).

195-135 Application of Division 276 (AMITs) to a CCIV sub-fund trust

(1) This section sets out how to apply Division 276 to a trust that is a *CCIV sub-fund trust.

Determining whether the trust is an attribution managed investment trust (AMIT)

In applying section 276-10 to the trust, disregard the following provisions:

paragraph 276-10(1)(b);

paragraph 276-10(1)(e).

Note: The effect of disregarding paragraph 276-10(1)(e) is that the trustee of a CCIV sub-fund trust does not have a choice as to whether the trust is an AMIT.

Trustee cannot choose to treat classes of membership interests as separate AMITs

In applying Division 276 to the trust, disregard section 276-20.

195-140 Entry on Australian Business Register

If a CCIV sub-fund trust has an ABN, the Australian Business Registrar must enter in the Australian Business Register in relation to the trust a statement that:

indicates that the trust is taken to exist for tax purposes because of the application of section 195-110 to a *sub-fund of a *CCIV; and

(b) sets out the sub-fund’s ARFN (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001).

Note: ARFN is short for Australian Registered Fund Number.

The Australian Business Registrar must take reasonable steps to ensure that information entered in the Australian Business Register under this section is accurate. For this purpose, the Registrar may correct or update the information.

Division 197 — Tainted share capital accounts

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 197

197-A What transfers into a company’s share capital account does this Division apply to?

197-B Consequence of transfer: franking debit arises

197-C Consequence of transfer: tainting of share capital account

Guide to Division 197

197-1 What this Division is about

This Division:

applies to certain amounts transferred to a company’s share capital account (see Subdivision 197-A); and

provides for a franking debit to arise if such an amount is transferred to the share capital account (see Subdivision 197-B); and

provides for the tainting of the share capital account if such an amount is transferred, for how the account may be untainted, and for consequences that flow from untainting the account (see Subdivision 197-C).

Subdivision 197-A — What transfers into a company’s share capital account does this Division apply to?

Table of sections

197-5 Division generally applies to an amount transferred to share capital account from another account

197-10 Exclusion for amounts that could be identified as share capital

197-15 Exclusion for amounts transferred under debt/equity swaps

197-20 Exclusion for amounts transferred leading to there being no shares with a par value—non-Corporations Act companies

197-25 Exclusion for transfers from option premium reserves

197-30 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of non-insurance etc. companies

197-35 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of insurance etc. companies

197-37 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of private health insurers

197-38 Exclusion for transfers connected with demutualisations of friendly society health or life insurers

197-40 Exclusion for post-demutualisation transfers relating to life insurance companies

197-42 Exclusion for exploration credits

197-5 Division generally applies to an amount transferred to share capital account from another account

(1) Subject to subsection (2), this Division applies to an amount (the transferred amount) that is transferred to a company’s *share capital account from another of the company’s accounts, if the company was an Australian resident immediately before the time of the transfer.

Note: If a company has 2 or more share capital accounts, those accounts are taken to be a single account (see subsection 975-300(2)).

The other provisions of this Subdivision may stop this Division from applying to some or all of the transferred amount. If those other provisions stop this Division from applying to only some of the transferred amount, this Division (other than this Subdivision) applies to the balance of the transferred amount as if only that balance of the amount had been transferred to the company’s share capital account.

197-10 Exclusion for amounts that could be identified as share capital

This Division does not apply to the transferred amount if it could, at all times before the transfer, be identified in the books of the company as an amount of share capital.

197-15 Exclusion for amounts transferred under debt/equity swaps

Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

the transfer is under an arrangement under which:

a person discharges, releases or otherwise extinguishes the whole or a part of a debt that the company owes to the person; and

the discharge, release or extinguishment is in return for the company issuing *shares (other than redeemable preference shares) in the company to the person; and

the transfer is a credit to the share capital account that is made because of the issue of the shares in return for the discharge, release or extinguishment of the debt.

If the transferred amount exceeds the lesser of:

the *market value of the *shares issued by the company; and

so much of the debt as is discharged, released or extinguished in return for the shares;

subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to the amount of the excess.

197-20 Exclusion for amounts transferred leading to there being no shares with a par value—non-Corporations Act companies

This Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

(a) immediately before the transfer of the amount, the company was not incorporated under the Corporations Act 2001; and

the transfer is under, or in accordance with, an Australian law that requires or allows either or both of the following to become part of the company’s share capital account:

the company’s share premium account;

the company’s capital redemption reserve; and

the transfer is made as part of a process that leads to there being no *shares in the company that have a par value; and

the amount is transferred from the company’s share premium account or capital redemption reserve.

197-25 Exclusion for transfers from option premium reserves

This Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

it is transferred from an option premium reserve of the company; and

the transfer is because of the exercise of options to acquire *shares in the company; and

premiums in respect of those options were credited to the option premium reserve.

197-30 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of non-insurance etc. companies

Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

the amount is transferred in connection with a demutualisation of the company; and

(b) Division 326 in Schedule 2H to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the demutualisation; and

the transfer occurs within the limitation period in relation to the demutualisation (see subsection 326-20(3) in that Schedule).

If the sum of:

the transferred amount; and

any other amounts that were previously transferred to the company’s share capital account, from another account of the company, in connection with the demutualisation;

exceeds the total capital contributions amount described in whichever of subsections (3) and (4) applies, subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much of the transferred amount as equals the lesser of the transferred amount and the amount of the excess.

Note: If there are several transfers of amounts to the company’s share capital account in connection with the demutualisation, this section must be applied separately in relation to each transferred amount, in the order in which the transfers are made.

(3) If the company was not formed by the merger of 2 or more mutual entities, the total capital contributions amount referred to in subsection (2) is the sum of all the capital amounts:

that were contributed to the company by *members of the company before its demutualisation; and

in respect of which deductions are not allowable to the members; and

that were not payments for goods or services provided by the company.

(4) If the company was formed by the merger of 2 or more mutual entities, the total capital contributions amount referred to in subsection (2) is the sum of:

all the capital amounts:

that were contributed to the company, before its demutualisation, by persons who became *members of the company at or after the time when the merger took place; and

in respect of which deductions are not allowable to those members; and

that were not payments for goods or services provided by the company; and

the *market values, at the time of the merger, of the entities that merged to form the company, as determined by a qualified valuer.

197-35 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of insurance etc. companies

Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

the amount is transferred in connection with the demutualisation of a company; and

(b) the demutualisation is implemented in accordance with a demutualisation method specified in Division 9AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the transfer occurs within the listing period in relation to the demutualisation (see subsection 121AE(6) of that Act); and

(d) the company (the issuing company) to whose *share capital account the amount is transferred is:

(i) if the demutualisation method is the method specified in section 121AF or 121AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936—the demutualising company; or

(ii) if the demutualisation method is the method specified in section 121AH, 121AI, 121AJ, 121AK or 121AL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936—the company issuing the ordinary shares referred to in that section.

If the sum of:

the transferred amount; and

all amounts that were previously transferred to the issuing company’s share capital account, from another account of the company, in connection with the demutualisation; and

all amounts that were previously transferred to the issuing company’s retained profit account in connection with the demutualisation;

exceeds the listing day company valuation amount (see subsection (3)), subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much of the transferred amount as equals the lesser of the transferred amount and the amount of the excess.

Note: If there are several transfers of amounts to the issuing company’s share capital account, this section must be applied separately in relation to each transferred amount, in the order in which the transfers are made.

(3) The listing day company valuation amount has the same meaning as it has for the purposes of table 1 in section 121AS of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, as that table applies in relation to the demutualising company (see note 3 to that table).

197-37 Exclusion for transfers made in connection with demutualisations of private health insurers

Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

the amount is transferred in connection with a demutualisation of a company; and

Division 315 (about demutualisations of private health insurers) applies to the demutualisation; and

(c) the company (the issuing company) to whose *share capital account the amount is transferred is either:

the demutualising health insurer; or

(ii) the company mentioned in subparagraph 315-85(1)(a)(iii) issuing shares that are assets covered by section 315-85 (demutualisation assets).

Subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much, if any, of the transferred amount as exceeds the sum of the amounts worked out under subsection (3) for each demutualisation asset that is a share issued:

by the issuing company under the demutualisation; and

to an entity that is either:

covered by section 315-90 (about participating policy holders); or

the trustee of a trust covered by Subdivision 315-C (about the lost policy holders trust).

The amount worked out under this subsection for a share is:

the *market value of the share on the day it is issued; or

if the share is in a company covered by subparagraph 315-85(1)(a)(iii) that owns other assets in addition to the shares in the demutualising health insurer—worked out using the method statement in subsection 315-210(2).

197-38 Exclusion for transfers connected with demutualisations of friendly society health or life insurers

Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

the amount is transferred in connection with a demutualisation of a company; and

Division 316 (about demutualisations of friendly society health and life insurers) applies in relation to the demutualisation; and

(c) the company (the issuing company) to whose *share capital account the amount is transferred is either:

the *friendly society described in that Division; or

the company that owns all the shares in the friendly society.

Subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much, if any, of the transferred amount as exceeds the sum of the *cost bases of *shares in the issuing company that:

are demutualisation assets (see section 316-110); and

are issued to an entity covered by section 316-115.

Note: Section 316-115 identifies entities connected directly or indirectly with the friendly society and affected by the special cost base rules in section 316-105.

For the purposes of subsection (2), work out the *cost base of a *share on the day on which it is issued, taking account of section 316-105.

197-40 Exclusion for post-demutualisation transfers relating to life insurance companies

Subject to subsection (2), this Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

(a) a *life insurance company (the demutualised company) has demutualised; and

(b) the demutualisation was implemented in accordance with a demutualisation method specified in Division 9AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the amount is transferred after the end of the listing period in relation to the demutualisation (see subsection 121AE(6) of that Act); and

the company transferring the amount to its share capital account is either:

the demutualised company (whichever demutualisation method was used); or

(ii) if the demutualisation method was the method specified in section 121AH, 121AI, 121AJ, 121AK or 121AL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936—the company (the issuing company) that issued the ordinary shares referred to in that section; and

if subparagraph (d)(i) applies—the following conditions are satisfied in relation to the transferred amount:

(i) the amount is transferred from an account of the demutualised company consisting of shareholders’ capital (within the meaning of the Life Insurance Act 1995) in relation to a statutory fund (within the meaning of that Act);

the amount was part of such an account at the time of the demutualisation; and

if subparagraph (d)(ii) applies—the amount is transferred from a capital reserve created at the time of or in connection with the demutualisation.

If the sum of:

the transferred amount; and

all amounts that were previously transferred to the demutualised company’s share capital account, from another account of the demutualised company, as described in subsection (1); and

(c) if the demutualisation method was the method specified in section 121AH, 121AI, 121AJ, 121AK or 121AL of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936—all amounts that were previously transferred to the issuing company’s share capital account, from another account of the issuing company, as described in subsection (1); and

all amounts that were previously transferred, in connection with the demutualisation, to the share capital account of the issuing company (within the meaning of section 197-35) as described in subsection 197-35(1), or to its retained profit account as described in paragraph 197-35(2)(c);

exceeds the listing day company valuation amount (see subsection (3)), subsection (1) does not stop this Division from applying to so much of the transferred amount as equals the lesser of the transferred amount and the amount of the excess.

Note: If there are several transfers of amounts to the share capital account of the demutualised company or the issuing company, this section must be applied separately in relation to each transferred amount, in the order in which the transfers are made.

(3) The listing day company valuation amount has the same meaning as it has for the purposes of table 1 in section 121AS of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, as that table applies in relation to the demutualised company (see note 3 to that table).

197-42 Exclusion for exploration credits

This Division does not apply to the transferred amount if:

the company transferring the amount is a greenfields minerals explorer; and

the amount is transferred in connection with the creation of *exploration credits.

Subdivision 197-B — Consequence of transfer: franking debit arises

Table of sections

197-45 A franking debit arises in relation to the transfer

197-45 A franking debit arises in relation to the transfer

(1) A *franking debit arises in a company’s *franking account if an amount (the transferred amount) to which this Division applies is transferred to the company’s *share capital account. The debit arises immediately before the end of the *franking period in which the transfer of the amount occurs.

The amount of the franking debit is calculated in accordance with the formula:

where:

applicable franking percentage means:

if, before the debit arises, the benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the transfer of the amount occurs has already been set by section 203-30—that percentage; or

otherwise—100%.

applicable gross-up rate means the company’s *corporate tax gross-up rate for the income year in which the franking debit arises.

Subdivision 197-C — Consequence of transfer: tainting of share capital account

Table of sections

197-50 The share capital account becomes tainted (if it is not already tainted)

197-55 Choosing to untaint a tainted share capital account

197-60 Choosing to untaint—liability to untainting tax

197-65 Choosing to untaint—further franking debits may arise

197-70 Due date for payment of untainting tax

197-75 General interest charge for late payment of untainting tax

197-80 Notice of liability to pay untainting tax

197-85 Evidentiary effect of notice of liability to pay untainting tax

197-50 The share capital account becomes tainted (if it is not already tainted)

(1) A company’s *share capital account becomes tainted when an amount to which this Division applies is transferred to the account, if, at the time of the transfer, the account is not already tainted (because of the application of this section in relation to a previous transfer).

Note: If a company’s share capital account is tainted, then a distribution from the account is taxed as a dividend in the hands of the shareholder. This is because a tainted share capital account does not count as a share capital account for the purposes of paragraph (d) of the definition of dividend in subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see subsection 975-300(3) of this Act). However, although the distribution is taxed as a dividend, the company cannot pass on to the shareholder the benefit of the tax it has paid, because a distribution from a share capital account (whether or not tainted) is unfrankable (see paragraphs 202-45(e) and 975-300(3)(ba) of this Act).

(2) The *share capital account remains tainted until the company chooses to untaint the account (see section 197-55).

Note: If, after a choice to untaint is made, the company’s share capital account becomes tainted again, the account remains tainted until a fresh choice to untaint is made.

(3) The tainting amount, for a company’s *share capital account that is *tainted at a particular time, means the sum of:

(a) the amount transferred to the company’s share capital account that most recently caused the account to become tainted; and

any other amounts to which this Division applies that have been transferred to the company’s share capital account since the transfer referred to in paragraph (a) and before the particular time.

197-55 Choosing to untaint a tainted share capital account

A company with a share capital account that is *tainted may make a choice in the approved form given to the Commissioner to untaint the account.

The choice can be made at any time, but cannot be revoked.

Note: The choice has no effect in relation to a subsequent tainting of the share capital account that occurs after the choice is made.

197-60 Choosing to untaint—liability to untainting tax

Definitions

For the purpose of this section:

(a) a company whose *share capital account is *tainted is a company with only lower tax members in relation to the tainting period if, throughout the tainting period, all *members of the company were covered by one, or a combination of 2 or more, of the following subparagraphs:

other companies;

*complying superannuation entities;

foreign residents; and

(b) a company whose share capital account is tainted is a company with higher tax members in relation to the tainting period if it is not a company with only lower tax members in relation to the tainting period.

For this purpose, the tainting period is the period beginning when the share capital account most recently became tainted and ending when the company chooses to untaint the account.

Liability to untainting tax

(2) A company that chooses to untaint its *share capital account is liable to pay tax, known as untainting tax, equal to the amount calculated in accordance with the formula:

where:

applicable tax amount has the meaning given by subsection (3).

section 197-45 franking debits means the total *franking debits arising under section 197-45 because of the transfer of the amounts that made up the *tainting amount at the time of the choice.

section 197-65 franking debits means the total (if any) *franking debits arising under section 197-65 because of the choice to untaint.

Note: The payment of untainting tax does not give rise to a franking credit.

(3) In subsection (2), the applicable tax amount is the amount calculated in accordance with the formula:

where:

applicable tax rate means:

for a company with only lower tax members in relation to the tainting period—the company’s *corporate tax rate for imputation purposes for the income year in which the choice is made; or

for a company with higher tax members in relation to the tainting period—the sum of:

(i) the maximum rate specified in column 2 of the table in Part I of Schedule 7 to the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 that applies for the income year in which the choice is made; and

3%.

Note: The 3% referred to in subparagraph (b)(ii) relates to rates of Medicare levy and surcharge.

notional franking amount has the meaning given by subsection (4).

(4) In subsection (3), the notional franking amount is the amount calculated in accordance with the formula:

where:

applicable gross-up rate means the company’s *corporate tax gross-up rate for the income year in which the choice is made.

Temporary budget repair levy

(5) If the income year in which the choice is made corresponds to a temporary budget repair levy year (within the meaning of section 4-11 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997), increase the applicable tax rate calculated under subsection (3) by 2 percentage points.

197-65 Choosing to untaint—further franking debits may arise

When this section applies

This section applies if:

a company chooses to untaint its share capital account; and

(b) the applicable franking percentage (within the meaning of subsection (3)) is higher than the percentage that was the *benchmark franking percentage in relation to the *franking period in which the transfer of an amount (the transferred amount) that is, or is part of, the *tainting amount occurred.

Note: If paragraph (b) is satisfied in relation to 2 or more amounts, this section is to be applied separately in relation to each of those amounts (so a separate franking debit will arise in relation to each of those amounts).

Franking debit arises in relation to making the choice

A franking debit arises in the company’s franking account in relation to the transferred amount. The debit arises immediately before the end of the franking period in which the choice to untaint is made.

The amount of the franking debit is the amount by which the amount calculated in accordance with the following formula exceeds the amount of the franking debit that arose under section 197-45 in relation to the transferred amount:

where:

applicable franking percentage means:

if, before the debit arises, the benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the choice to untaint is made has already been set by section 203-30—that percentage; or

otherwise—100%.

applicable gross-up rate means the company’s *corporate tax gross-up rate for the income year in which the franking debit arises.

197-70 Due date for payment of untainting tax

*Untainting tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the end of the franking period in which the choice to untaint was made.

Note: For provisions about collection and recovery of untainting tax, see Part 4-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

197-75 General interest charge for late payment of untainting tax

If any of the untainting tax that a company is liable to pay remains unpaid 60 days after the day by which it is due to be paid, the company is liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

started at the beginning of the 60th day after the day by which the untainting tax was due to be paid; and

ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the untainting tax;

general interest charge on any of the untainting tax.

197-80 Notice of liability to pay untainting tax

The Commissioner may give a company, by post or otherwise, a notice specifying:

the amount of any untainting tax that the Commissioner has ascertained is payable by the company; and

the day on which that tax became or will become due and payable.

Effect of notice on liability etc.

Subject to section 197-85, the amount of the liability of a company to untainting tax, and the due date for payment of the tax, are not dependent on, or in any way affected by, the giving of a notice.

Amendment of notice

The Commissioner may at any time amend a notice. An amended notice is a notice for the purposes of this section.

Inconsistency between notices

If there is an inconsistency between notices that relate to the same subject matter, the later notice prevails to the extent of the inconsistency.

Objections

(5) A company that is dissatisfied with a notice made in relation to the company may object against the notice in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

197-85 Evidentiary effect of notice of liability to pay untainting tax

The production of:

a notice given under section 197-80; or

a document that is signed by the Commissioner and appears to be a copy of such a notice;

is conclusive evidence that:

the notice was duly given; and

the amount of untainting tax specified in the notice became due and payable by the company to which it was given on the day specified in the notice.

(2) Subsection (1) does not apply in proceedings under Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 on a review or appeal relating to the review.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 3—Specialist liability rules 1

Part 3-6—The imputation system 1

Division 200—Guide to Part 3-6 1

Guide to Division 200 1

200-1 What this Division is about 1

200-5 The imputation system 1

200-10 Franking a distribution 2

200-15 The franking account 2

200-20 How a distribution is franked 2

200-25 A corporate tax entity must not give its members credit for more tax than the entity has paid 3

200-30 Benchmark rule 3

200-35 Effect of receiving a franked distribution 3

200-40 An Australian corporate tax entity can pass the benefit of having received a franked distribution on to its members 4

200-45 Special rules for franking by some entities 4

Division 201—Objects and application of Part 3-6 5

201-1 Objects 5

201-5 Application of this Part 5

Division 202—Franking a distribution 6

Subdivision 202-A—Franking a distribution 6

Guide to Subdivision 202-A 6

202-1 What this Subdivision is about 6

Operative provisions 6

202-5 Franking a distribution 6

Subdivision 202-B—Who can frank a distribution? 7

Guide to Subdivision 202-B 7

202-10 What this Subdivision is about 7

Operative provisions 7

202-15 Franking entities 7

202-20 Residency requirement when making a distribution 8

Subdivision 202-C—Which distributions can be franked? 8

Guide to Subdivision 202-C 8

202-25 What this Subdivision is about 8

202-30 Frankable distributions 8

Operative provisions 9

202-35 Object 9

202-40 Frankable distributions 9

202-45 Unfrankable distributions 9

202-47 Distributions of certain ADI profits following restructure 10

Subdivision 202-D—Amount of the franking credit on a distribution 11

Guide to Subdivision 202-D 11

202-50 What this Subdivision is about 11

202-55 What is the maximum franking credit for a frankable distribution? 12

Operative provisions 12

202-60 Amount of the franking credit on a distribution 12

202-65 Where the franking credit stated in the distribution statement exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution 12

Subdivision 202-E—Distribution statements 13

Guide to Subdivision 202-E 13

202-70 What this Subdivision is about 13

Operative provisions 13

202-75 Obligation to give a distribution statement 13

202-80 Distribution statement 14

202-85 Changing the franking credit on a distribution by amending the distribution statement 15

Division 203—Benchmark rule 18

Guide to Division 203 18

203-1 What this Division is about 18

203-5 Benchmark rule 18

203-10 Benchmark franking percentage 19

Operative provisions 19

203-15 Object 19

203-20 Application of the benchmark rule 19

203-25 Benchmark rule 20

203-30 Setting a benchmark franking percentage 21

203-35 Franking percentage 21

203-40 Franking periods—where the entity is not a private company 21

203-45 Franking period—private companies 22

203-50 Consequences of breaching the benchmark rule 22

203-55 Commissioner’s powers to permit a departure from the benchmark rule 25

Division 204—Anti-streaming rules 27

Subdivision 204-A—Objects and application 27

204-1 Objects 27

204-5 Application 27

Subdivision 204-B—Linked distributions 28

Guide to Subdivision 204-B 28

204-10 What this Subdivision is about 28

Operative provisions 28

204-15 Linked distributions 28

Subdivision 204-C—Substituting tax-exempt bonus share for franked distributions 30

Guide to Subdivision 204-C 30

204-20 What this Subdivision is about 30

Operative provisions 30

204-25 Substituting tax-exempt bonus shares for franked distributions 30

Subdivision 204-D—Streaming distributions 32

Guide to Subdivision 204-D 32

204-26 What this Subdivision is about 32

Operative provisions 33

204-30 Streaming distributions 33

204-35 When does a franking debit arise if the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(a) 36

204-40 Amount of the franking debit 37

204-41 Amount of the exempting debit 38

204-45 Effect of a determination about distributions to favoured members 39

204-50 Assessment and notice of determination 39

204-55 Right to review where a determination made 40

Subdivision 204-E—Disclosure requirements 40

Guide to Subdivision 204-E 40

204-65 What this Subdivision is about 40

Operative provisions 40

204-70 Application of this Subdivision 40

204-75 Notice to the Commissioner 41

204-80 Commissioner may require information where the Commissioner suspects streaming 42

Division 205—Franking accounts, franking deficit tax liabilities and the related tax offset 43

Guide to Division 205 43

205-1 What this Division is about 43

205-5 Franking accounts, franking deficit tax liabilities and the related tax offset 44

Operative provisions 45

205-10 Each entity that is or has been a corporate tax entity has a franking account 45

205-15 Franking credits 45

205-20 Paying a PAYG instalment, income tax, diverted profits tax or Australian DMT tax 50

205-25 Residency requirement for an event giving rise to a franking credit or franking debit 52

205-30 Franking debits 53

205-35 Refund of income tax, diverted profits tax or Australian DMT tax 61

205-40 Franking surplus and deficit 63

205-45 Franking deficit tax 63

205-50 Deferring franking deficit 64

205-70 Tax offset arising from franking deficit tax liabilities 65

Division 207—Effect of receiving a franked distribution 69

Guide to Division 207 69

207-5 Overview 69

Subdivision 207-A—Effect of receiving a franked distribution generally 70

Guide to Subdivision 207-A 70

207-10 What this Subdivision is about 70

Operative provisions 71

207-15 Applying the general rule 71

207-20 General rule—gross-up and tax offset 72

Subdivision 207-B—Franked distribution received through certain partnerships and trustees 72

Guide to Subdivision 207-B 72

207-25 What this Subdivision is about 72

Gross-up and tax offset 73

207-30 Applying this Subdivision 73

207-35 Gross-up—distribution made to, or flows indirectly through, a partnership or trustee 74

207-37 Attributable franked distribution—trusts 76

207-45 Tax offset—distribution flows indirectly to an entity 77

Key concepts 78

207-50 When a franked distribution flows indirectly to or through an entity 78

207-55 Share of a franked distribution 81

207-57 Share of the franking credit on a franked distribution 85

207-58 Specifically entitled to an amount of a franked distribution 85

207-59 Franked distributions within class treated as single franked distribution 86

Subdivision 207-C—Residency requirements for the general rule 87

Guide to Subdivision 207-C 87

207-60 What this Subdivision is about 87

207-65 Satisfying the residency requirement 87

Operative provisions 88

207-70 Gross-up and tax offset under section 207-20 88

207-75 Residency requirement 88

Subdivision 207-D—No gross-up or tax offset where distribution would not be taxed 89

Guide to Subdivision 207-D 89

207-80 What this Subdivision is about 89

Operative provisions 90

207-85 Applying this Subdivision 90

207-90 Distribution that is made to an entity 90

207-95 Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity 91

Subdivision 207-E—Exceptions to the rules in Subdivision 207-D 94

Guide to Subdivision 207-E 94

207-105 What this Subdivision is about 94

Operative provisions 95

207-110 Effect of non-assessable income on gross up and tax offset 95

Exempt institutions 96

207-115 Which exempt institutions are eligible for a refund? 96

207-117 Residency requirement 97

207-119 Entity not treated as exempt institution eligible for refund in certain circumstances 97

207-120 Entity may be ineligible because of a distribution event 98

207-122 Entity may be ineligible if distribution is in the form of property other than money 100

207-124 Entity may be ineligible if other money or property also acquired 100

207-126 Entity may be ineligible if distributions do not match trust share amounts 101

207-128 Reinvestment choice 102

207-130 Controller’s liability 104

207-132 Treatment of benefits provided by an entity to a controller 107

207-134 Entity’s present entitlement disregarded in certain circumstances 108

207-136 Review of certain decisions 109

Subdivision 207-F—No gross-up or tax offset where the imputation system has been manipulated 109

Guide to Subdivision 207-F 109

207-140 What this Subdivision is about 109

Operative provisions 110

207-145 Distribution that is made to an entity 110

207-150 Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity 112

207-155 When is a distribution made as part of a dividend stripping operation? 115

207-157 Distribution washing 116

207-158 Distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction 117

207-159 Distributions funded by capital raising 118

207-160 Distribution that is treated as an interest payment 121

Division 208—Exempting entities and former exempting entities 123

Guide to Division 208 123

208-5 What is an exempting entity? 123

208-10 Former exempting entities 124

208-15 Distributions by exempting entities and former exempting entities 124

Subdivision 208-A—What are exempting entities and former exempting entities? 124

208-20 Exempting entities 125

208-25 Effective ownership of entity by prescribed persons 125

208-30 Accountable membership interests 126

208-35 Accountable partial interests 129

208-40 Prescribed persons 130

208-45 Persons who are taken to be prescribed persons 131

208-50 Former exempting companies 134

Subdivision 208-B—Franking with an exempting credit 134

Guide to Subdivision 208-B 134

208-55 What this Subdivision is about 134

Operative provisions 134

208-60 Franking with an exempting credit 134

Subdivision 208-C—Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution 135

Guide to Subdivision 208-C 135

208-65 What this Subdivision is about 135

Operative provisions 135

208-70 Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution 135

Subdivision 208-D—Distribution statements 136

Guide to Subdivision 208-D 136

208-75 Guide to Subdivision 208-D 136

Operative provisions 136

208-80 Additional information to be included by a former exempting entity or exempting entity 136

Subdivision 208-E—Distributions to be franked with exempting credits to the same extent 137

Guide to Subdivision 208-E 137

208-85 What this Subdivision is about 137

Operative provisions 137

208-90 All frankable distributions made within a franking period must be franked to the same extent with an exempting credit 137

208-95 Exempting percentage 138

208-100 Consequences of breaching the rule in section 208-90 138

Subdivision 208-F—Exempting accounts and franking accounts of exempting entities and former exempting entities 138

Guide to Subdivision 208-F 138

208-105 What this Subdivision is about 138

Operative provisions 140

208-110 Exempting account 140

208-115 Exempting credits 140

208-120 Exempting debits 145

208-125 Exempting surplus and deficit 147

208-130 Franking credits arising because of status as exempting entity or former exempting entity 148

208-135 Relationships that will give rise to a franking credit under item 5 of the table in section 208-130 154

208-140 Membership of the same effectively wholly-owned group 155

208-145 Franking debits arising because of status as exempting entity or former exempting entity 157

208-150 Residency requirement 158

208-155 Eligible continuing substantial member 159

208-160 Distributions that are affected by a manipulation of the imputation system 161

208-165 Amount of the exempting credit or franking credit arising because of a distribution franked with an exempting credit 161

208-170 Where a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 affects part of the distribution 162

208-175 When does a distribution franked with an exempting credit flow indirectly to an entity? 163

208-180 What is an entity’s share of the exempting credit on a distribution? 163

208-185 Minister may convert exempting surplus to franking credit of former exempting entity previously owned by the Commonwealth 163

Subdivision 208-G—Tax effects of distributions by exempting entities 165

Guide to Subdivision 208-G 165

208-190 What this Subdivision is about 165

Operative provisions 165

208-195 Division 207 does not generally apply 165

208-200 Distributions to exempting entities 166

208-205 Distributions to employees acquiring shares under eligible employee share schemes 166

208-215 Eligible employee share schemes 166

Subdivision 208-H—Tax effect of a distribution franked with an exempting credit 168

Guide to Subdivision 208-H 168

208-220 What this Subdivision is about 168

Operative provisions 168

208-225 Division 207 does not generally apply 168

208-230 Distributions to exempting entities and former exempting entities 168

208-235 Distributions to employees acquiring shares under eligible employee share schemes 169

208-240 Distributions to certain individuals 169

Division 210—Venture capital franking 171

Guide to Division 210 171

210-1 Purpose of venture capital franking 171

210-5 How is this achieved? 171

210-10 What is a venture capital credit? 172

210-15 What does the PDF have to do to distribute the credits? 172

210-20 Limits on venture capital franking 172

Subdivision 210-A—Franking a distribution with a venture capital credit 173

Guide to Subdivision 210-A 173

210-25 What this Subdivision is about 173

Operative provisions 173

210-30 Franking a distribution with a venture capital credit 173

Subdivision 210-B—Participating PDFs 174

Guide to Subdivision 210-B 174

210-35 What this Subdivision is about 174

Operative provisions 174

210-40 What is a participating PDF 174

Subdivision 210-C—Distributions that are frankable with a venture capital credit 174

Guide to Subdivision 210-C 174

210-45 What this Subdivision is about 174

Operative provisions 175

210-50 Which distributions can be franked with a venture capital credit? 175

Subdivision 210-D—Amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution 175

Guide to Subdivision 210-D 175

210-55 What this Subdivision is about 175

Operative provisions 176

210-60 Amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution 176

Subdivision 210-E—Distribution statements 176

Guide to Subdivision 210-E 176

210-65 What this Subdivision is about 176

Operative provisions 177

210-70 Additional information to be included when a distribution is franked with a venture capital credit 177

Subdivision 210-F—Rules affecting the allocation of venture capital credits 177

Guide to Subdivision 210-F 177

210-75 What this Subdivision is about 177

Operative provisions 178

210-80 Draining the venture capital surplus when a distribution frankable with venture capital credits is made 178

210-81 Distributions to be franked with venture capital credits to the same extent 179

210-82 Consequences of breaching the rule in section 210-81 179

Subdivision 210-G—Venture capital sub-account 179

Guide to Subdivision 210-G 179

210-85 What this Subdivision is about 179

210-90 The venture capital sub-account 180

210-95 Venture capital deficit tax 181

Operative provisions 181

210-100 Venture capital sub-account 181

210-105 Venture capital credits 182

210-110 Determining the extent to which a franking credit is reasonably attributable to a particular payment of tax 182

210-115 Participating PDF may elect to have venture capital credits arise on its assessment day 183

210-120 Venture capital debits 183

210-125 Venture capital debit where CGT limit is exceeded 185

210-130 Venture capital surplus and deficit 186

210-135 Venture capital deficit tax 186

210-140 Effect of a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax on franking deficit tax 187

210-145 Effect of a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax on the franking account 188

210-150 Deferring venture capital deficit 188

Subdivision 210-H—Effect of receiving a distribution franked with a venture capital credit 189

Guide to Subdivision 210-H 189

210-155 What this Subdivision is about 189

210-160 The significance of a venture capital credit 189

210-165 Recipients for whom the venture capital credit is not significant 190

Operative provisions 190

210-170 Tax offset for certain recipients of distributions franked with venture capital credits 190

210-175 Amount of the tax offset 191

210-180 Application of Division 207 where the recipient is entitled to a tax offset under section 210-170 192

Division 214—Administering the imputation system 193

Guide to Division 214 193

214-1 Purpose of the system 193

214-5 Key features 193

Subdivision 214-A—Franking returns 194

Guide to Subdivision 214-A 194

214-10 What this Subdivision is about 194

Operative provisions 195

214-15 Requirement to give franking return—general 195

214-20 Notice to a specific corporate tax entity 195

214-25 Content and form of a franking return 196

214-30 Franking account balance 196

214-35 Venture capital sub-account balance 196

214-40 Meaning of franking tax 197

214-45 Effect of a refund on franking returns 197

Subdivision 214-B—Franking assessments 198

Guide to Subdivision 214-B 198

214-55 What this Subdivision is about 198

Operative provisions 199

214-60 Commissioner may make a franking assessment 199

214-65 Commissioner taken to have made a franking assessment on first return 200

214-70 Part-year assessment 201

214-75 Validity of assessment 201

214-80 Objections 201

Subdivision 214-C—Amending franking assessments 201

Guide to Subdivision 214-C 201

214-90 What this Subdivision is about 201

Operative provisions 202

214-95 Amendments within 3 years of the original assessment 202

214-100 Amended assessments are treated as franking assessments 202

214-105 Further return as a result of a refund affecting a franking deficit tax liability 202

214-110 Later amendments—on request 203

214-115 Later amendments—failure to make proper disclosure 203

214-120 Later amendments—fraud or evasion 204

214-125 Further amendment of an amended particular 204

214-135 Amendment on review etc. 205

214-140 Notice of amendments 205

Subdivision 214-D—Collection and recovery 205

Guide to Subdivision 214-D 205

214-145 What this Subdivision is about 205

Operative provisions 206

214-150 Due date for payment of franking tax 206

214-155 General interest charge 207

214-160 Refunds of amounts overpaid 208

Subdivision 214-E—Records 208

Guide to Subdivision 214-E 208

214-170 What this Subdivision is about 208

Operative provisions 208

214-175 Record keeping 208

Division 215—Consequences of the debt/equity rules 210

Subdivision 215-A—Application of the imputation system to non-share equity interests 210

215-1 Application of the imputation system to non-share equity interests 210

Subdivision 215-B—Non-share dividends that are unfrankable to some extent 210

Guide to Subdivision 215-B 210

215-5 What this Subdivision is about 210

215-10 Certain non-share dividends by ADIs unfrankable 211

215-15 Non-share dividends are unfrankable if profits are unavailable 212

215-20 Working out the available frankable profits 213

215-25 Anticipating available frankable profits 214

Division 216—Cum dividend sales and securities lending arrangements 217

Subdivision 216-A—Circumstances where a distribution to a member of a corporate tax entity is treated as having been made to someone else 217

216-1 When a distribution made to a member of a corporate tax entity is treated as having been made to someone else 217

216-5 First situation (cum dividend sales) 217

216-10 Second situation (securities lending arrangements) 218

216-15 Distribution closing time 219

Subdivision 216-B—Statements to be made where there is a cum dividend sale or securities lending arrangement 219

216-20 Cum dividend sale—statement by securities dealer 219

216-25 Cum dividend sale—statement by party 220

216-30 Securities lending arrangements—statement by borrower 220

Division 218—Application of imputation rules to co-operative companies 221

218-5 Application of imputation rules to co-operative companies 221

Division 219—Imputation for life insurance companies 222

Guide to Division 219 222

219-1 What this Division is about 222

Subdivision 219-A—Application of imputation rules to life insurance companies 222

219-10 Application of imputation rules to life insurance companies 222

Subdivision 219-B—Franking accounts of life insurance companies 223

219-15 Franking credits 223

219-30 Franking debits 230

219-40 Residency requirement 232

219-45 Assessment day 232

219-50 Amount attributable to shareholders’ share of income tax liability 232

219-55 Adjustment resulting from an amended assessment 234

219-70 Tax offset under section 205-70 235

219-75 Working out franking credits and franking debits where a tax offset under section 205-70 is applied 235

Division 220—Imputation for NZ resident companies and related companies 239

Guide to Division 220 239

220-1 What this Division is about 239

Subdivision 220-A—Objects of this Division 239

220-15 Objects 240

220-20 What is an NZ resident? 240

Subdivision 220-B—NZ company treated as Australian resident for imputation system if company chooses 241

220-25 Application of provisions of Part 3-6 outside this Division 241

220-30 What is an NZ franking company? 242

220-35 Making an NZ franking choice 242

220-40 When is an NZ franking choice in force? 242

220-45 Revoking an NZ franking choice 242

220-50 Cancelling an NZ franking choice 242

Subdivision 220-C—Modifications of other Divisions of this Part 243

Franking NZ franking companies’ distributions 245

220-100 Residency requirement for franking 245

220-105 Unfrankable distributions by NZ franking companies 245

220-110 Maximum franking credit under section 202-60 245

NZ franking companies’ franking accounts etc. 246

220-205 Franking credit for payment of NZ franking company’s withholding tax liability 246

220-210 Effect of franked distribution to NZ franking company or flowing indirectly to NZ franking company 246

220-215 Effect on franking account if NZ franking choice ceases to be in force 247

Franking accounts of NZ franking company and some of its 100% subsidiaries 248

220-300 NZ franking company’s franking account affected by franking accounts of some of its 100% subsidiaries 248

Effect of NZ franking company making distribution that is non-assessable and non-exempt 251

220-350 Providing for a franking credit to arise 251

Effects of supplementary dividend from NZ franking company 252

220-400 Gross-up and tax offset for distribution from NZ franking company reduced by supplementary dividend 252

220-405 Franked distribution and supplementary dividend flowing indirectly 254

220-410 Franking credit reduced if tax offset reduced 256

Rules about exempting entities 257

220-500 Publicly listed post-choice NZ franking company and its 100% subsidiaries are not exempting entities 257

220-505 Post-choice NZ franking company is not automatically prescribed person 257

220-510 Parent company’s status as prescribed person sets status of all other members of same wholly-owned group 258

NZ franking companies’ exempting accounts 259

220-605 Effect on exempting account if NZ franking choice ceases to be in force 259

Tax effect of distribution franked by NZ franking company with an exempting credit 260

220-700 Tax effect of distribution franked by NZ franking company with an exempting credit 260

Joint and several liability for NZ resident company’s unmet franking liabilities 260

220-800 Joint and several liability for NZ resident company’s franking tax etc. 260

Part 3-10—Financial transactions 264

Division 230—Taxation of financial arrangements 264

Guide to Division 230 264

230-1 What this Division is about 264

230-5 Scope of this Division 265

Subdivision 230-A—Core rules 266

Objects 267

230-10 Objects of this Division 267

Tax treatment of gains and losses from financial arrangements 267

230-15 Gains are assessable and losses deductible 267

230-20 Gain or loss to be taken into account only once under this Act 270

230-25 Associated financial benefits to be taken into account only once under this Act 271

230-30 Treatment of gains and losses related to exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income 272

230-35 Treatment of gains and losses of private or domestic nature 273

Method to be applied to take account of gain or loss 274

230-40 Methods for taking gain or loss into account 274

Financial arrangement concept 276

230-45 Financial arrangement 276

230-50 Financial arrangement (equity interest or right or obligation in relation to equity interest) 278

230-55 Rights, obligations and arrangements (grouping and disaggregation rules) 279

General rules 281

230-60 When financial benefit provided or received under financial arrangement 281

230-65 Amount of financial benefit relating to more than one financial arrangement etc. 282

230-70 Apportionment when financial benefit received or right ceases 283

230-75 Apportionment when financial benefit provided or obligation ceases 283

230-80 Consistency in working out gains or losses (integrity measure) 284

230-85 Rights and obligations include contingent rights and obligations 285

Subdivision 230-B—The accruals/realisation methods 286

Guide to Subdivision 230-B 287

230-90 What this Subdivision is about 287

Objects of Subdivision 288

230-95 Objects of this Subdivision 288

When accruals method or realisation method applies 288

230-100 When accruals method or realisation method applies 288

230-105 Sufficiently certain overall gain or loss 290

230-110 Sufficiently certain gain or loss from particular event 291

230-115 Sufficiently certain financial benefits 292

230-120 Financial arrangements with notional principal 295

The accruals method 296

230-125 Overview of the accruals method 296

230-130 Applying accruals method to work out period over which gain or loss is to be spread 297

230-135 How gain or loss is spread 298

230-140 Method of spreading gain or loss—effective interest method 300

230-145 Application of effective interest method where differing income and accounting years 301

230-150 Election for portfolio treatment of fees 303

230-155 Election for portfolio treatment of fees where differing income and accounting years 303

230-160 Portfolio treatment of fees 305

230-165 Portfolio treatment of premiums and discounts for acquiring portfolio 306

230-170 Allocating gain or loss to income years 308

230-172 Applying accruals method to loss resulting from impairment 309

230-175 Running balancing adjustments 310

Realisation method 312

230-180 Realisation method 312

Reassessment and re-estimation 314

230-185 Reassessment 314

230-190 Re-estimation 316

230-192 Re-estimation—impairments and reversals 318

230-195 Balancing adjustment if rate of return maintained on re-estimation 320

230-200 Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal 321

Subdivision 230-C—Fair value method 323

230-205 Objects of this Subdivision 323

230-210 Fair value election 324

230-215 Fair value election where differing income and accounting years 325

230-220 Financial arrangements to which fair value election applies 326

230-225 Financial arrangements to which election does not apply 328

230-230 Applying fair value method to gains and losses 329

230-235 Splitting financial arrangements into 2 financial arrangements 330

230-240 When election ceases to apply 331

230-245 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply 332

Subdivision 230-D—Foreign exchange retranslation method 333

230-250 Objects of this Subdivision 333

230-255 Foreign exchange retranslation election 333

230-260 Foreign exchange retranslation election where differing income and accounting years 335

230-265 Financial arrangements to which general election applies 336

230-270 Financial arrangements to which general election does not apply 338

230-275 Balancing adjustment for election in relation to qualifying forex accounts 339

230-280 Applying foreign exchange retranslation method to gains and losses 340

230-285 When election ceases to apply 342

230-290 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply 343

Subdivision 230-E—Hedging financial arrangements method 344

230-295 Objects of this Subdivision 345

230-300 Applying hedging financial arrangement method to gains and losses 345

230-305 Table of events and allocation rules 347

230-310 Aligning tax classification of gain or loss from hedging financial arrangement with tax classification of hedged item 349

230-315 Hedging financial arrangement election 353

230-320 Hedging financial arrangement election where differing income and accounting years 354

230-325 Hedging financial arrangements to which election applies 354

230-330 Hedging financial arrangements to which election does not apply 355

230-335 Hedging financial arrangement and hedged item 356

230-340 Generally whole arrangement must be hedging financial arrangement 360

230-345 Requirements not satisfied because of honest mistake or inadvertence 361

230-350 Derivative financial arrangement and foreign currency hedge 362

230-355 Recording requirements 363

230-360 Determining basis for allocating gain or loss 365

230-365 Effectiveness of the hedge 366

230-370 When election ceases to apply 366

230-375 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply 367

230-380 Commissioner may determine that requirement met 367

230-385 Consequences of failure to meet requirements 369

Subdivision 230-F—Reliance on financial reports 370

230-390 Objects of this Subdivision 371

230-395 Election to rely on financial reports 371

230-400 Financial reports election where differing income and accounting years 373

230-405 Commissioner discretion to waive requirements in paragraphs 230-395(2)(c) and (e) 374

230-410 Financial arrangements to which the election applies 375

230-415 Financial arrangements not covered by election 378

230-420 Effect of election to rely on financial reports 379

230-425 When election ceases to apply 380

230-430 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply 381

Subdivision 230-G—Balancing adjustment on ceasing to have a financial arrangement 382

230-435 When balancing adjustment made 382

230-440 Exceptions 384

230-445 Balancing adjustment 385

Subdivision 230-H—Exceptions 390

230-450 Short-term arrangements where non-money amount involved 390

230-455 Certain taxpayers where no significant deferral 391

230-460 Various rights and/or obligations 394

230-465 Ceasing to have a financial arrangement in certain circumstances 399

230-470 Forgiveness of commercial debts 400

230-475 Clarifying exceptions 401

230-480 Treatment of gains in form of franked distribution etc. 402

230-481 Registered emissions units 402

Subdivision 230-I—Other provisions 402

230-485 Effect of change of residence—rules for particular methods 403

230-490 Effect of change of residence—disposal and reacquisition etc. after ceasing to be Australian resident where no further recognised gains or losses from arrangement 405

230-495 Effect of change of accounting principles or standards 405

230-500 Comparable foreign accounting and auditing standards 406

230-505 Financial arrangement as consideration for provision or acquisition of a thing 407

230-510 Non-arm’s length dealings in relation to financial arrangement 409

230-515 Arm’s length dealings in relation to financial arrangement—adjustment to gain or loss in certain situations 410

230-520 Disregard gains or losses covered by value shifting regime 411

230-522 Adjusting a gain or loss that gives rise to a hybrid mismatch 412

230-525 Consolidated financial reports 413

230-527 Elections—reporting documents of foreign ADIs 413

Subdivision 230-J—Additional operation of Division 414

230-530 Additional operation of Division 414

Division 235—Particular financial transactions 416

Guide to Division 235 416

235-1 What this Division is about 416

Subdivision 235-I—Instalment trusts 416

Guide to Subdivision 235-I 416

235-805 What this Subdivision is about 416

Operative provisions 417

235-810 Object of this Subdivision 417

235-815 Application of Subdivision 417

235-820 Look-through treatment for instalment trusts 418

235-825 Meaning of instalment trust and instalment trust asset 418

235-830 What trusts are covered—instalment trust arrangements 419

235-835 Requirement for underlying investments to be listed or widely held 420

235-840 What trusts are covered—limited recourse borrowings by regulated superannuation funds 421

235-845 Interactions with other provisions 422

Division 240—Arrangements treated as a sale and loan 423

Guide to Division 240 423

240-1 What this Division is about 423

240-3 How the recharacterisation affects the notional seller 423

240-7 How the recharacterisation affects the notional buyer 424

Subdivision 240-A—Application and scope of Division 425

Operative provisions 425

240-10 Application of this Division 425

240-15 Scope of Division 426

Subdivision 240-B—The notional sale and notional loan 426

Operative provisions 426

240-17 Who is the notional seller and the notional buyer? 426

240-20 Notional sale of property by notional seller and notional acquisition of property by notional buyer 427

240-25 Notional loan by notional seller to notional buyer 427

Subdivision 240-C—Amounts to be included in notional seller’s assessable income 428

Guide to Subdivision 240-C 428

240-30 What this Subdivision is about 428

Operative provisions 429

240-35 Amounts to be included in notional seller’s assessable income 429

240-40 Arrangement payments not to be included in notional seller’s assessable income 430

Subdivision 240-D—Deductions allowable to notional buyer 430

Guide to Subdivision 240-D 430

240-45 What this Subdivision is about 430

Operative provisions 431

240-50 Extent to which deductions are allowable to notional buyer 431

240-55 Arrangement payments not to be deductions 431

Subdivision 240-E—Notional interest and arrangement payments 431

Operative provisions 432

240-60 Notional interest 432

240-65 Arrangement payments 433

240-70 Arrangement payment periods 433

Subdivision 240-F—The end of the arrangement 434

Operative provisions 434

240-75 When is the end of the arrangement? 434

240-80 What happens if the arrangement is extended or renewed 435

240-85 What happens if an amount is paid by or on behalf of the notional buyer to acquire the property 436

240-90 What happens if the notional buyer ceases to have the right to use the property 436

Subdivision 240-G—Adjustments if total amount assessed to notional seller differs from amount of interest 437

Guide to Subdivision 240-G 437

240-100 What this Subdivision is about 437

Operative provisions 438

240-105 Adjustments for notional seller 438

240-110 Adjustments for notional buyer 439

Subdivision 240-H—Application of Division 16E to certain arrangements 440

240-112 Division 16E applies to certain arrangements 440

Subdivision 240-I—Provisions applying to hire purchase agreements 441

Operative provisions 441

240-115 Another person, or no person taken to own property in certain cases 441

Division 242—Leases of luxury cars 443

Guide to Division 242 443

242-1 What this Division is about 443

Subdivision 242-A—Notional sale and loan 444

Guide to Subdivision 242-A 444

242-5 What this Subdivision is about 444

Operative provisions 444

242-10 Application 444

242-15 Notional sale and acquisition 445

242-20 Consideration for notional sale, and cost, of car 446

242-25 Notional loan by lessor to lessee 446

Subdivision 242-B—Amount to be included in lessor’s assessable income 447

Guide to Subdivision 242-B 447

242-30 What this Subdivision is about 447

Operative provisions 448

242-35 Amount to be included in lessor’s assessable income 448

242-40 Treatment of lease payments 449

Subdivision 242-C—Deductions allowable to lessee 450

Guide to Subdivision 242-C 450

242-45 What this Subdivision is about 450

Operative provisions 450

242-50 Extent to which deductions are allowable to lessee 450

242-55 Lease payments not deductible 451

Subdivision 242-D—Adjustments if total amount assessed to lessor differs from amount of interest 451

Guide to Subdivision 242-D 451

242-60 What this Subdivision is about 451

Operative provisions 452

242-65 Adjustments for lessor 452

242-70 Adjustments for lessee 453

Subdivision 242-E—Extension, renewal and final ending of the lease 453

Guide to Subdivision 242-E 453

242-75 What this Subdivision is about 453

Operative provisions 454

242-80 What happens if the term of the lease is extended or the lease is renewed 454

242-85 What happens if an amount is paid by the lessee to acquire the car 456

242-90 What happens if the lessee stops having the right to use the car 456

Division 243—Limited recourse debt 458

Guide to Division 243 458

243-10 What this Division is about 458

Subdivision 243-A—Circumstances in which Division operates 458

Operative provisions 459

243-15 When does this Division apply? 459

243-20 What is limited recourse debt? 460

243-25 When is a debt arrangement terminated? 462

243-30 What is the financed property and the debt property? 463

Subdivision 243-B—Working out the excessive deductions 463

Operative provisions 464

243-35 Working out the excessive deductions 464

Subdivision 243-C—Amounts included in assessable income and deductions 466

Operative provisions 467

243-40 Amount included in debtor’s assessable income 467

243-45 Deduction for later payments in respect of debt 467

243-50 Deduction for payments for replacement debt 468

243-55 Effect of Division on later capital allowance deductions 469

243-57 Effect of Division on later capital allowance balancing adjustments 470

243-58 Adjustment where debt only partially used for expenditure 471

Subdivision 243-D—Special provisions 472

Operative provisions 472

243-60 Application of Division to partnerships 472

243-65 Application where partner reduces liability 472

243-70 Application of Division to companies ceasing to be 100% subsidiary 474

243-75 Application of Division where debt forgiveness rules also apply 474

Division 245—Forgiveness of commercial debts 475

Guide to Division 245 475

245-1 What this Division is about 475

245-2 Simplified outline of this Division 475

Subdivision 245-A—Debts to which operative rules apply 476

Guide to Subdivision 245-A 476

245-5 What this Subdivision is about 476

Application of Division 477

245-10 Commercial debts 477

245-15 Non-equity shares 477

245-20 Parts of debts 477

Subdivision 245-B—What constitutes forgiveness of a debt 478

Guide to Subdivision 245-B 478

245-30 What this Subdivision is about 478

Operative provisions 478

245-35 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt 478

245-36 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if the debt is assigned 479

245-37 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if a subscription for shares enables payment of the debt 479

245-40 Forgivenesses to which operative rules do not apply 479

245-45 Application of operative rules if forgiveness involves an arrangement 480

Subdivision 245-C—Calculation of gross forgiven amount of a debt 481

Guide to Subdivision 245-C 481

245-48 What this Subdivision is about 481

Working out the value of a debt 482

245-50 Extent of forgiveness if consideration is given 482

245-55 General rule for working out the value of a debt 482

245-60 Special rule for working out the value of a non-recourse debt 483

245-61 Special rule for working out the value of a previously assigned debt 484

Working out if an amount is offset against the value of the debt 485

245-65 Amount offset against amount of debt 485

Working out the gross forgiven amount 488

245-75 Gross forgiven amount of a debt 488

245-77 Gross forgiven amount shared between debtors 488

Subdivision 245-D—Calculation of net forgiven amount of a debt 489

Guide to Subdivision 245-D 489

245-80 What this Subdivision is about 489

Operative provisions 489

245-85 Reduction of gross forgiven amount 489

245-90 Agreement between companies under common ownership for creditor to forgo capital loss or deduction 490

Subdivision 245-E—Application of net forgiven amounts 492

Guide to Subdivision 245-E 492

245-95 What this Subdivision is about 492

General operative provisions 493

245-100 Subdivision not to apply to calculation of attributable income 493

245-105 How total net forgiven amount is applied 494

Reduction of tax losses 494

245-115 Total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of tax losses 494

245-120 Allocation of total net forgiven amount in respect of tax losses 494

Reduction of net capital losses 495

245-130 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of net capital losses 495

245-135 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of net capital losses 495

Reduction of expenditure 495

245-145 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of expenditure 495

245-150 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of expenditures 497

245-155 How expenditure is reduced—straight line deductions 497

245-157 How expenditure is reduced—diminishing balance deductions 499

245-160 Amount applied in reduction of expenditure included in assessable income in certain circumstances 499

Reduction of cost bases of assets 499

245-175 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of cost bases of CGT assets 499

245-180 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount among relevant cost bases of CGT assets 500

245-185 Relevant cost bases of investments in associated entities are reduced last 501

245-190 Reduction of the relevant cost bases of a CGT asset 501

Unapplied total net forgiven amount 502

245-195 No further consequences if there is any remaining unapplied total net forgiven amount 502

Subdivision 245-F—Special rules relating to partnerships 502

Guide to Subdivision 245-F 502

245-200 What this Subdivision is about 502

Operative provisions 503

245-215 Unapplied total net forgiven amount of a partnership is transferred to partners 503

Subdivision 245-G—Record keeping 504

245-265 Keeping and retaining records 504

Division 247—Capital protected borrowings 507

Guide to Division 247 507

247-1 What this Division is about 507

Operative provisions 507

247-5 Object of Division 507

247-10 What capital protected borrowing and capital protection are 508

247-15 Application of this Division 508

247-20 Treating capital protection as a put option 509

247-25 Number of put options 511

247-30 Exercise or expiry of option 512

Division 250—Assets put to tax preferred use 513

Guide to Division 250 513

250-1 What this Division is about 513

Subdivision 250-A—Objects 514

250-5 Main objects 514

Subdivision 250-B—When this Division applies to you and an asset 514

Overall test 515

250-10 When this Division applies to you and an asset 515

250-15 General test 515

250-20 First exclusion—small business entities 516

250-25 Second exclusion—financial benefits under minimum value limit 516

250-30 Third exclusion—certain short term or low value arrangements 517

250-35 Exceptions to section 250-30 518

250-40 Fourth exclusion—sum of present values of financial benefits less than amount otherwise assessable 520

250-45 Fifth exclusion—Commissioner determination 522

Tax preferred use of asset 522

250-50 End user of an asset 522

250-55 Tax preferred end user 523

250-60 Tax preferred use of an asset 523

250-65 Arrangement period for tax preferred use 525

250-70 New tax preferred use at end of arrangement period if tax preferred use continues 526

250-75 What constitutes a separate asset for the purposes of this Division 526

250-80 Treatment of particular arrangements in the same way as leases 527

Financial benefits in relation to tax preferred use 528

250-85 Financial benefits in relation to tax preferred use of an asset 528

250-90 Financial benefit provided directly or indirectly 530

250-95 Expected financial benefits in relation to an asset put to tax preferred use 531

250-100 Present value of financial benefit that has already been provided 531

Discount rate to be used in working out present values 531

250-105 Discount rate to be used in working out present values 531

Predominant economic interest 532

250-110 Predominant economic interest 532

250-115 Limited recourse debt test 532

250-120 Right to acquire asset test 534

250-125 Effectively non-cancellable, long term arrangement test 535

250-130 Meaning of effectively non-cancellable arrangement 535

250-135 Level of expected financial benefits test 536

250-140 When to retest predominant economic interest under section 250-135 537

Subdivision 250-C—Denial of, or reduction in, capital allowance deductions 539

250-145 Denial of capital allowance deductions 539

250-150 Apportionment rule 539

Subdivision 250-D—Deemed loan treatment of financial benefits provided for tax preferred use 541

250-155 Arrangement treated as loan 541

250-160 Financial benefits that are subject to deemed loan treatment 544

250-180 End value of asset 546

250-185 Financial benefits subject to deemed loan treatment not assessed 548

Subdivision 250-E—Taxation of deemed loan 548

Guide to Subdivision 250-E 549

250-190 What this Subdivision is about 549

Application and objects of Subdivision 550

250-195 Application of Subdivision 550

250-200 Objects of this Subdivision 550

Tax treatment of gains and losses from financial arrangements 550

250-205 Gains are assessable and losses deductible 550

250-210 Gain or loss to be taken into account only once under this Act 551

Method to be applied to take account of gain or loss 551

250-215 Methods for taking gain or loss into account 551

General rules 552

250-220 Consistency in working out gains or losses (integrity measure) 552

250-225 Rights and obligations include contingent rights and obligations 553

The accruals method 553

250-230 Application of accruals method 553

250-235 Overview of the accruals method 553

250-240 Applying accruals method to work out period over which gain or loss is to be spread 554

250-245 How gain or loss is spread 554

250-250 Allocating gain or loss to income years 555

250-255 When to re-estimate 556

250-260 Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal 558

Balancing adjustment 559

250-265 When balancing adjustment made 559

250-270 Exception for subsidiary member leaving consolidated group 561

250-275 Balancing adjustment 561

Other provisions 564

250-280 Financial arrangement received or provided as consideration 564

Subdivision 250-F—Treatment of asset when Division ceases to apply to the asset 567

250-285 Treatment of asset after Division ceases to apply to the asset 567

250-290 Balancing adjustment under Subdivision 40-D in some circumstances 570

Subdivision 250-G—Objections against determinations and decisions by the Commissioner 571

250-295 Objections against determinations and decisions by the Commissioner 571

Division 253—Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs 572

Subdivision 253-A—Tax treatment of entitlements under financial claims scheme 572

Guide to Subdivision 253-A 572

253-1 What this Subdivision is about 572

Operative provisions 573

253-5 Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from ADI 573

253-10 Disposal of rights against ADI to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects 573

253-15 Cost base of financial claims scheme entitlement and any remaining part of account that gave rise to entitlement 574

Chapter 3 — Specialist liability rules

Part 3-6 — The imputation system

Division 200 — Guide to Part 3-6

Guide to Division 200

200-1 What this Division is about

This Division provides an overview of the imputation system.

Table of sections

200-5 The imputation system

200-10 Franking a distribution

200-15 The franking account

200-20 How a distribution is franked

200-25 A corporate tax entity must not give its members credit for more tax than the entity has paid

200-30 Benchmark rule

200-35 Effect of receiving a franked distribution

200-40 An Australian corporate tax entity can pass the benefit of having received a franked distribution on to its members

200-45 Special rules for franking by some entities

200-5 The imputation system

The imputation system partially integrates the income tax liabilities of an Australian corporate tax entity and its members by:

allowing the entity, when distributing profits to its members, to pass to those members credit for income tax paid by the entity on those profits; and

allowing the entity’s Australian members to claim a tax offset for that credit; and

allowing the entity’s Australian members to claim a refund if they are unable to fully utilise the tax offset in reducing their income tax.

200-10 Franking a distribution

When an Australian corporate tax entity distributes profits to its members, the entity has the option of passing to those members credit for income tax paid by the entity on the profits. This is done by franking the distribution.

200-15 The franking account

A franking account is used to keep track of income tax paid by the entity, so that the entity can pass to its members the benefit of having paid that tax when a distribution is made.

Each corporate tax entity has a franking account.

Typically, a corporate tax entity receives a credit in the account if the entity pays income tax or receives a franked distribution. A credit in the franking account is called a franking credit.

Typically, a corporate tax entity receives a debit in the account if the entity receives a refund of tax or franks a distribution to its members. A debit in the franking account is called a franking debit.

200-20 How a distribution is franked

A corporate tax entity franks a distribution by allocating a franking credit to it.

The amount of the franking credit on the distribution is the amount specified in a statement that accompanies the distribution.

Only some kinds of distribution can be franked. These are called frankable distributions.

200-25 A corporate tax entity must not give its members credit for more tax than the entity has paid

A corporate tax entity must not frank a distribution from profits with a franking credit that exceeds the maximum amount of income tax that could have been paid, at the entity’s corporate tax rate for imputation purposes for the income year in which the distribution is made, on the profits distributed.

If a distribution is franked in excess of this limit, the entity will be taken to have franked the distribution with the maximum franking credit for the distribution.

200-30 Benchmark rule

All frankable distributions made within a particular period must be franked to the same extent. This is the benchmark rule.

It is designed to ensure that one member of a corporate tax entity is not preferred over another by the manner in which distributions are franked.

200-35 Effect of receiving a franked distribution

Under Division 207, if an Australian member of a corporate tax entity receives a franked distribution, the member can usually offset, against the member’s own income tax liability, income tax paid by the entity on the profits underlying the distribution.

The tax offset to which the member is entitled is equal to the franking credit on the distribution.

Note 1: A member may be entitled to a refund under Division 67 if the sum of the tax offset and certain other tax offsets exceeds the amount of income tax that the member would have to pay if the member had not got those tax offsets.

Note 2: If the member is not a resident, the tax effects of receiving a distribution will be dealt with under Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, and Subdivision 207-D of this Part.

200-40 An Australian corporate tax entity can pass the benefit of having received a franked distribution on to its members

If an Australian corporate tax entity receives a franked distribution, it can pass the benefit of having received a franking credit on the distribution to its own members by franking distributions to those members.

200-45 Special rules for franking by some entities

There are special rules to deal with:

venture capital franking by a pooled development fund; and

franking by life insurance companies; and

franking by exempting companies and former exempting companies; and

franking by co-operative companies; and

franking by companies that are NZ residents or members of the same wholly-owned group as one or more companies that are NZ residents.

Division 201 — Objects and application of Part 3-6

Table of sections

201-1 Objects

201-5 Application of this Part

201-1 Objects

The main object of this Part is to allow certain *corporate tax entities to pass to their *members the benefit of having paid income tax on the profits underlying certain *distributions.

The other objects of this Part are to ensure that:

the imputation system is not used to give the benefit of income tax paid by a corporate tax entity to *members who do not have a sufficient economic interest in the entity; and

the imputation system is not used to prefer some members over others when passing on the benefits of having paid income tax; and

the *membership of a corporate tax entity is not manipulated to create either of the outcomes mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b).

201-5 Application of this Part

Subject to the rules on the application of this Part set out in the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997, this Part applies to events that occur on or after 1 July 2002.

Division 202 — Franking a distribution

Table of Subdivisions

202-A Franking a distribution

202-B Who can frank a distribution?

202-C Which distributions can be franked?

202-D Amount of the franking credit on a distribution

202-E Distribution statements

Subdivision 202-A — Franking a distribution

Guide to Subdivision 202-A

202-1 What this Subdivision is about

An entity can only frank a distribution if certain conditions are met. These conditions are set out in this Subdivision.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

202-5 Franking a distribution

Operative provisions

202-5 Franking a distribution

An entity franks a *distribution if:

the entity is a franking entity that satisfies the *residency requirement when the distribution is made; and

the distribution is a frankable distribution; and

the entity allocates a franking credit to the distribution.

Note 1: Division 205 deals with a corporate tax entity’s franking account and sets out when credits, known as franking credits, and debits, known as franking debits, arise in that account.

Note 2: The mechanism by which an entity allocates a franking credit to a distribution (for example, whether it is done by resolution or some other means) is determined by the entity.

Subdivision 202-B — Who can frank a distribution?

Guide to Subdivision 202-B

202-10 What this Subdivision is about

Generally, a corporate tax entity that is an Australian resident at the time a distribution is made, can frank the distribution.

There are some exceptions.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

202-15 Franking entities

202-20 Residency requirement when making a distribution

Operative provisions

202-15 Franking entities

An entity is a franking entity at a particular time if:

it is a corporate tax entity at that time; and

it is not a life insurance company that is a mutual insurance company at that time; and

in a case where the entity is a company that is a trustee of a trust—it is not acting in its capacity as trustee of the trust at that time.

202-20 Residency requirement when making a distribution

An entity satisfies the residency requirement when making a *distribution if:

in the case of a company—the company is an Australian resident at that time; and

in the case of a corporate limited partnership—the corporate limited partnership is an Australian resident at that time; and

in the case of a public trading trust—the public trading trust is a resident unit trust for the income year in which that time occurs.

Subdivision 202-C — Which distributions can be franked?

Guide to Subdivision 202-C

202-25 What this Subdivision is about

Generally, distributions that are made out of realised profits can be franked.

Those distributions that are not frankable are identified.

Table of sections

202-30 Frankable distributions

Operative provisions

202-35 Object

202-40 Frankable distributions

202-45 Unfrankable distributions

202-47 Distributions of certain ADI profits following restructure

202-30 Frankable distributions

Distributions and non-share dividends are frankable unless it is specified that they are unfrankable.

Operative provisions

202-35 Object

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that only distributions equivalent to realised taxed profits can be franked.

202-40 Frankable distributions

(1) A *distribution is a frankable distribution, to the extent that it is not unfrankable under section 202-45.

(2) A *non-share dividend is a frankable distribution, to the extent that it is not unfrankable under section 202-45.

202-45 Unfrankable distributions

The following are unfrankable:

(c) where the purchase price on the buy-back of a *share by a *company from one of its *members is taken to be a dividend under section 159GZZZP of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936—so much of that purchase price as exceeds what would be the market value (as normally understood) of the share at the time of the buy-back if the buy-back did not take place and were never proposed to take place;

a *distribution in respect of a non-equity share;

a distribution that is sourced, directly or indirectly, from a company’s share capital account;

a distribution or a part of a distribution to which subsection 207-159(1) of this Act applies (distributions funded by capital raising);

an amount that is taken to be an unfrankable distribution under section 215-10 or 215-15 of this Act;

an amount that is taken to be a dividend for any purpose under any of the following provisions:

(i) unless subsection 109RB(6) or 109RC(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to the amount—Division 7A of Part III of that Act (distributions to entities connected with a *private company);

section 109 of that Act (excessive payments to shareholders, directors and associates);

section 47A of that Act (distribution benefits—CFCs);

an amount that is taken to be an unfranked dividend for any purpose:

(i) under section 45 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (streaming bonus shares and unfranked dividends);

because of a determination of the Commissioner under section 45C of that Act (streaming dividends and capital benefits);

a demerger dividend;

a distribution that section 152-125 or 220-105 of this Act says is unfrankable;

(k) a distribution by a *listed public company that is consideration for the cancellation of a *membership interest in the company as part of a selective reduction of capital, including a selective reduction within the meaning of section 256B of the Corporations Act 2001.

202-47 Distributions of certain ADI profits following restructure

This section applies to an amount paid by a body corporate if:

(a) the body corporate is a non-operating holding company within the meaning of the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999; and

a restructure instrument under Part 4A of that Act is in force in relation to the body; and

because of the restructure to which the instrument relates, an *ADI becomes a subsidiary (within the meaning of that Act) of the body; and

the amount is sourced, directly or indirectly, from the profits of the ADI before the restructure instrument came into force; and

the amount would have been a frankable distribution if it had been distributed by the ADI before the restructure instrument came into force.

The amount:

(a) is taken to be a dividend paid by the body, for the purposes of this Act (and so is a *distribution by the body); and

(b) is not taken to be an *unfrankable distribution by the body just because of paragraph 202-45(e) (which makes distributions from *share capital accounts unfrankable).

Subdivision 202-D — Amount of the franking credit on a distribution

Guide to Subdivision 202-D

202-50 What this Subdivision is about

The amount of the franking credit on a distribution is that stated in the distribution statement, unless the amount stated exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution.

In that case, the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is taken to be the maximum franking credit for the distribution, worked out under this Subdivision.

Table of sections

202-55 What is the maximum franking credit for a frankable distribution?

Operative provisions

202-60 Amount of the franking credit on a distribution

202-65 Where the franking credit stated in the distribution statement exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution

202-55 What is the maximum franking credit for a frankable distribution?

The maximum franking credit for a distribution is equivalent to the maximum amount of income tax that the entity making the distribution could have paid, at the entity’s corporate tax rate for imputation purposes for the income year in which the distribution is made, on the profits underlying the distribution.

Operative provisions

202-60 Amount of the franking credit on a distribution

The amount of the franking credit on a *distribution is that stated in the distribution statement for the distribution, unless that amount exceeds the *maximum franking credit for the distribution.

(2) The maximum franking credit for a *distribution is worked out using the formula:

where:

applicable gross-up rate means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.

202-65 Where the franking credit stated in the distribution statement exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution

If the amount of a franking credit stated in a distribution statement for a *distribution exceeds the *maximum franking credit for the distribution, the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is taken to be the amount of the maximum franking credit for the distribution, and not the amount stated in the distribution statement.

Subdivision 202-E — Distribution statements

Guide to Subdivision 202-E

202-70 What this Subdivision is about

An entity that makes a frankable distribution must give the recipient a statement setting out details of the distribution.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

202-75 Obligation to give a distribution statement

202-80 Distribution statement

202-85 Changing the franking credit on a distribution by amending the distribution statement

Operative provisions

202-75 Obligation to give a distribution statement

An entity that makes a frankable distribution must give the recipient a distribution statement.

The statement must be given on or before the day on which the *distribution is made, unless the entity is allowed to give the statement at a later time under subsection (3).

If the entity is a private company for the income year in which the *distribution is made, the statement must be given:

before the end of 4 months after the end of the income year in which the distribution is made; or

before the time determined by the Commissioner under subsection (5);

whichever is later.

However, the entity is not allowed to give the statement at a later time under subsection (3) if the statement indicates that a franking credit has been allocated to the *distribution and the franking credit would, either alone or when added to other franking credits allocated to other distributions made by the entity during the income year, result in the entity having a liability for franking deficit tax, or an increased liability for franking deficit tax, at the end of the income year.

Note: The combined effect of subsections (3) and (4) is that a private company can retrospectively frank a distribution, but not so as to create or increase a liability for franking deficit tax.

The Commissioner may determine in writing that a private company may give the statement before a time specified in the determination.

202-80 Distribution statement

(1) A distribution statement is a statement made in accordance with this section.

The statement must be in the approved form.

The statement must:

identify the entity making the distribution; and

state the date on which the distribution is made; and

state the amount of the distribution; and

(d) state that there is a *franking credit of an amount specified on the distribution; and

state the franking percentage for the distribution; and

state the amount of any withholding tax that has been deducted from the distribution by the entity; and

include any other information required by the approved form that is relevant to imputation generally or the distribution.

Note: Under the Taxation Administration Act 1953 it is an offence to fail to give a statement required under this Subdivision, or make a misleading statement in connection with a distribution (whether franked or not).

202-85 Changing the franking credit on a distribution by amending the distribution statement

Changing the franking credit on a specified distribution

The Commissioner may, on application by an entity, determine in writing that the entity may change the franking credit on a specified *distribution by amending the distribution statement for the distribution.

In deciding whether to make a determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must have regard to:

whether the date for lodgment of an income tax return by the recipient of the specified *distribution for the income year in which the distribution was made has passed; and

whether, if the franking credit on the specified distribution were changed in accordance with the entity’s application, there would be any difference in the withholding tax liability of the recipient; and

whether amending the distribution statement as requested by the entity would lead to a breach of the *benchmark rule, or any of the rules in Division 204 (the anti-streaming rules); and

whether amending the distribution statement as requested by the entity would lead to a new benchmark franking percentage being set for the entity for the franking period in which the distribution was made; and

any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

Changing the franking credits on a specified class of distributions

The Commissioner may, on application by an entity, determine in writing that the entity may change the *franking credits on *distributions of a specified class by amending the *distribution statements for the distributions.

In deciding whether to make a determination under subsection (3), the Commissioner must have regard to:

the number of recipients to whom an amended distribution statement would be made; and

whether the date for lodgment of income tax returns by recipients of *distributions of the specified class for the income year in which the distributions were made has passed; and

whether, if the franking credit on the specified distributions were changed in accordance with the entity’s application, there would be any difference in the withholding tax liability of the recipients; and

whether amending the distribution statements as requested by the entity would lead to a breach of the *benchmark rule, or any of the rules in Division 204 (the anti-streaming rules); and

whether amending the distribution statements as requested by the entity would lead to a new benchmark franking percentage being set for the entity for the franking period in which the distributions were made; and

any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

Applying to the Commissioner

The entity must:

make its application under this section in writing; and

include in the application all information relevant to the matters to which the Commissioner must have regard under:

subsection (2), if the application relates to a *distribution; or

subsection (4), if the application relates to a class of distributions.

Review

(6) If the entity or a *member of the entity is dissatisfied with a determination under subsection (3), the entity or member may object to it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 203 — Benchmark rule

Guide to Division 203

203-1 What this Division is about

Distributions within a particular period must all be franked to the same extent.

Table of sections

203-5 Benchmark rule

203-10 Benchmark franking percentage

Operative provisions

203-15 Object

203-20 Application of the benchmark rule

203-25 Benchmark rule

203-30 Setting a benchmark franking percentage

203-35 Franking percentage

203-40 Franking periods—where the entity is not a private company

203-45 Franking period—private companies

203-50 Consequences of breaching the benchmark rule

203-55 Commissioner’s powers to permit a departure from the benchmark rule

203-5 Benchmark rule

A corporate tax entity must frank all frankable distributions made within a particular period at a franking percentage set as the benchmark for that period. This is the benchmark rule.

The benchmark rule does not apply to some corporate tax entities. Those entities are identified in section 203-20.

203-10 Benchmark franking percentage

The benchmark franking percentage for an entity is set by reference to the franking percentage for the first frankable distribution made by the entity during the relevant period.

An entity has a benchmark franking percentage, even if it is not subject to the benchmark rule.

Operative provisions

203-15 Object

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that one *member of a corporate tax entity is not preferred over another when the entity *franks *distributions.

203-20 Application of the benchmark rule

The *benchmark rule does not apply to a company in a franking period if either:

the company satisfies each of the following criteria:

at all times during the franking period, the company is a listed public company;

the company cannot make a *distribution on one *membership interest during the franking period without making a distribution under the same resolution on all other membership interests;

the company cannot *frank a distribution made on one membership interest during the franking period without franking distributions made on all other membership interests under the same resolution with a franking credit worked out using the same franking percentage; or

the entity is a *100% subsidiary of a company that satisfies the criteria set out in paragraph (a).

The following are examples of cases in which a company satisfies the criteria set out in paragraph (1)(a):

the company is a listed public company with a single *class of *membership interest at all times during the relevant franking period;

the company is a listed public company that, under its constituent documents, must not:

make a *distribution on one membership interest during the relevant franking period without making a distribution under the same resolution on all other membership interests; or

*frank a distribution made on one membership interest during the relevant franking period without franking distributions made on all other membership interests under the same resolution with a franking credit worked out using the same franking percentage;

the company is a listed public company with more than one class of membership interest, but the rights in relation to distributions and the franking of distributions are the same for each class of membership interest.

This is not an exhaustive list.

For the purposes of subsection (1), ignore *membership interests that do not carry a right to receive *distributions (other than distributions on the winding up of the company).

203-25 Benchmark rule

An entity must not make a *frankable distribution whose *franking percentage differs from the entity’s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the distribution is made. This is the benchmark rule.

Note: If a corporate tax entity franks a distribution in breach of this rule, the distribution will still be a franked distribution, although consequences will flow under section 203-50.

203-30 Setting a benchmark franking percentage

The benchmark franking percentage for an entity for a *franking period is the same as the *franking percentage for the first *frankable distribution made by the entity within the period.

Note: If no frankable distribution is made during the period, there is no benchmark franking percentage for the period.

203-35 Franking percentage

(1) Subject to subsection (2), the franking percentage for a *frankable distribution is worked out using the formula:

If the franking percentage for a frankable distribution would exceed 100% if it were worked out under subsection (1), it is taken to be 100%.

203-40 Franking periods—where the entity is not a private company

Use this section to work out the franking periods for an entity in an income year where the entity is not a private company for the income year.

(2) If the entity’s income year is a period of 12 months, each of the following is a franking period for the entity in that year:

the period of 6 months beginning at the start of the entity’s income year;

the remainder of the income year.

(3) If the entity’s income year is a period of 6 months or less, the franking period for the entity in that year is the same as the income year.

(4) If the entity’s income year is a period of more than 6 months and less than 12 months, each of the following is a franking period for the entity in that year:

the period of 6 months beginning at the start of the entity’s income year;

the remainder of the income year.

(5) If the entity’s income year is a period of more than 12 months, each of the following is a franking period for the entity in that year:

(a) the period of 6 months beginning at the start of the entity’s income year (the first franking period);

the period of 6 months beginning immediately after the end of the first franking period;

the remainder of the income year.

203-45 Franking period—private companies

The franking period for an entity that is a *private company for an income year is the same as the income year.

203-50 Consequences of breaching the benchmark rule

If an entity makes a frankable distribution in breach of the *benchmark rule:

(a) the entity is liable to pay over-franking tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Over-franking Tax) Act 2002 if the *franking percentage for the *distribution exceeds the entity’s *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the distribution is made; and

a franking debit arises in the entity’s franking account if the franking percentage for the distribution is less than the entity’s benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the distribution is made.

Use the following formula to work out:

in a case dealt with under paragraph (1)(a)—the amount of the over-franking tax; and

in a case dealt with under paragraph (1)(b)—the amount of the franking debit:

where:

applicable gross-up rate means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.

franking % differential is the difference between:

the franking percentage for the frankable distribution; and

either:

if subparagraph (ii) does not apply—the entity’s benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the *distribution is made; or

if the Commissioner in the exercise of the Commissioner’s powers under subsection 203-55(1), permits the entity to frank the distribution at a different franking percentage—that percentage.

Example: An entity makes 3 successive frankable distributions in a franking period. Each of those distributions is represented in the following diagram. The franking percentage for the first distribution is 40%, and so the entity’s benchmark franking percentage for the period is 40%.

Note: Distribution 2 is under-franked to the extent of the franking % differential. This is used to work out the amount of the under-franking debit under subsection (2).

Distribution 3 is over-franked to the extent of the franking % differential. This is used to work out the amount of over-franking tax on the distribution under the New Business Tax System (Over-franking Tax) Act 2002. The amount of the tax is calculated using the same formula as that set out in subsection (2).

A franking debit arising under paragraph (1)(b) is in addition to any franking debit that would otherwise arise for the entity because of the *distribution.

The franking debit arises on the day on which the frankable distribution is made.

203-55 Commissioner’s powers to permit a departure from the benchmark rule

Powers of the Commissioner

The Commissioner may, on application by an entity, make a determination in writing permitting the entity to *frank a *distribution at a franking percentage that differs from the entity’s benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the distribution is made.

Because the *benchmark rule is an integral part of the imputation system, the Commissioner’s powers under this section may only be exercised in extraordinary circumstances.

Matters to which the Commissioner must have regard in exercising the power

In deciding whether there are extraordinary circumstances justifying the exercise of the Commissioner’s power to make a determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must have regard to:

the entity’s reasons for departing, or proposing to depart, from the *benchmark rule; and

the extent of the departure, or proposed departure, from the benchmark rule; and

if the circumstances that give rise to the entity’s application are within the entity’s control, the extent to which the entity has sought the exercise of the Commissioner’s powers under this section in the past; and

whether a *member of the entity has been or will be disadvantaged as a result of the departure, or proposed departure, from the benchmark rule; and

whether a *member of the entity will receive greater *imputation benefits than another member of the entity because a distribution *franked at a franking percentage that differs from the benchmark franking percentage for the franking period is made to one of them; and

any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

When may the powers be exercised?

The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (1) either before or after the frankable distribution is made.

Consequence of the Commissioner exercising the power under this section

An allocation of a franking credit at a percentage specified by the Commissioner in a determination under subsection (1) is taken to comply with the *benchmark rule.

Applying to the Commissioner

The entity must:

make its application under this section in writing; and

include in the application all information relevant to the matters to which the Commissioner must have regard under subsection (3).

Review

(7) If the entity or a *member of the entity is dissatisfied with the determination under subsection (1), the entity or member may object to it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 204 — Anti-streaming rules

Table of Subdivisions

204-A Objects and application

204-B Linked distributions

204-C Substituting tax-exempt bonus share for franked distributions

204-D Streaming distributions

204-E Disclosure requirements

Subdivision 204-A — Objects and application

Table of sections

204-1 Objects

204-5 Application to non-share dividends

204-1 Objects

The objects of this Division are to ensure that:

an entity and its *members cannot avoid the effect of the *benchmark rule by exploiting the benchmark franking percentage of another entity; and

an entity does not stream *franked distributions and *tax-exempt bonus shares; and

an entity does not stream *distributions to members of the entity who *derive a *greater benefit from franking credits than other members.

204-5 Application

The rules in this Division will apply to an entity even if it is not subject to the benchmark rule.

This Division applies to non-share dividends in the same way as it applies to distributions.

Subdivision 204-B — Linked distributions

Guide to Subdivision 204-B

204-10 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision prevents the exploitation of a corporate tax entity’s benchmark franking percentage by another corporate tax entity, or that other entity’s members, by imposing a franking debit where there is exploitation.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

204-15 Linked distributions

Operative provisions

204-15 Linked distributions

Franking debit arises where a distribution by one entity is substituted for a distribution by another

This section gives rise to a franking debit if:

(a) the exercise of a choice or selection by a *member of an entity (the first entity); or

the member’s failure to exercise a choice or selection;

has the effect of determining (to any extent) that another entity makes to one of its members a *distribution (the linked distribution) that is:

in substitution (in whole or in part) for a distribution by the first entity to that member or any other member of the first entity; and

unfranked, or *franked at a franking percentage that differs from the first entity’s benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the linked distribution is made.

Note: Division 205 deals with a corporate tax entity’s franking account and sets out when a debit, known as a franking debit, arises in that account.

Franking account in which the debit arises

The debit arises in the franking account of the entity with the higher benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the linked distribution is made.

Amount of the debit

The debit is equal to the one that would arise in that franking account if the entity had made a *franked distribution, equal to the linked distribution, with a franking percentage equal to the benchmark franking percentage for that entity.

When does the debit arise

The debit arises on the day on which the linked distribution is made.

Debit is in addition to any other franking debit arising because of the linked distribution

The debit is in addition to any other debit that arises in an entity’s franking account because of the linked distribution.

Where an entity has no benchmark franking percentage

(6) If an entity has no *benchmark franking percentage for the *franking period in which the linked distribution is made, this section applies as if:

in a case where the linked distribution has a franking percentage of less than 50%—the entity had a benchmark franking percentage of 100% for that period; and

in a case where the linked distribution has a franking percentage equal to or greater than 50%—the entity had a benchmark franking percentage of 0% for that period.

Subdivision 204-C — Substituting tax-exempt bonus share for franked distributions

Guide to Subdivision 204-C

204-20 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision prevents the substitution of a tax-exempt bonus share for a franked distribution by imposing a franking debit on the issue of the share as if it were a franked distribution.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

204-25 Substituting tax-exempt bonus shares for franked distributions

Operative provisions

204-25 Substituting tax-exempt bonus shares for franked distributions

Franking debit arises if tax-exempt bonus shares are issued in substitution for a franked distribution

This section gives rise to a franking debit in an entity’s franking account if:

the exercise of a choice or selection by a *member of the entity; or

the member’s failure to exercise a choice or selection;

has the effect of determining (to any extent) that the entity issues one or more *tax-exempt bonus shares, to that member or another member of the entity, in substitution (in whole or in part) for one or more *franked distributions by the entity to that member or another member.

Amount of the debit

The debit is equal to the one that would arise in the entity’s franking account if the entity made a *distribution, equal to the *franked distributions referred to in subsection (1), franked at the entity’s benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the shares are issued.

When does the debit arise

The debit arises on the day when the shares are issued.

Meaning of tax-exempt bonus share

(4) For a company whose *shares have no par value, tax-exempt bonus share means a share issued by the company in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 6BA(6) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(5) For any other company, tax-exempt bonus share means a *share issued by the company to a *shareholder in the company where:

the amount or value of the share is debited against an amount standing to the credit of a share premium account of the company; and

no part of the paid-up value of the share is a dividend; and

the share is issued:

as a bonus share; or

(ii) in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 6BA(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, as in force immediately before 1 July 1998.

Where a company has no benchmark franking percentage for the franking period

If a company has no benchmark franking percentage for the franking period in which the tax-exempt bonus share is issued, this section applies as if the entity had a benchmark franking percentage of 100% for that period.

Subdivision 204-D — Streaming distributions

Guide to Subdivision 204-D

204-26 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision prevents the streaming of imputation benefits to one member of a corporate tax entity in preference to another by either imposing a franking debit or denying an imputation benefit where there is streaming.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

204-30 Streaming distributions

204-35 When does a franking debit arise if the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(a)

204-40 Amount of the franking debit

204-41 Amount of the exempting debit

204-45 Effect of a determination about distributions to favoured members

204-50 Assessment and notice of determination

204-55 Right to review where a determination made

Operative provisions

204-30 Streaming distributions

Commissioner’s power to make a determination when distributions or distributions and other benefits are streamed

This section empowers the Commissioner to make determinations if an entity streams one or more *distributions (or one or more distributions and the giving of other benefits), whether in a single franking period or in a number of franking periods, in such a way that:

an imputation benefit is, or apart from this section would be, received by a *member of the entity as a result of the distribution or distributions; and

the member would *derive a *greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity; and

the other member of the entity will receive lesser imputation benefits, or will not receive any imputation benefits, whether or not the other member receives other benefits.

The member that derives the greater benefit from franking credits is the favoured member. The member that receives the lesser imputation benefits is the disadvantaged member.

Examples of other benefits

These are examples of the giving of other benefits:

issuing bonus *shares;

returning *paid-up share capital;

*forgiving a debt;

the entity or another entity making a payment of any kind, or giving any property, to a *member or to another person on a member’s behalf.

Nature of the determination that the Commissioner may make

The Commissioner may make one or more of these determinations:

that a specified franking debit arises in the franking account of the entity, for a specified *distribution or other benefit to a disadvantaged member;

that a specified exempting debit arises in the exempting account of the entity, for a specified *distribution or other benefit to a disadvantaged member;

that no imputation benefit is to arise in respect of a distribution that is made to a favoured member and specified in the determination.

A determination must be in writing.

The Commissioner may:

specify the franking debit under paragraph (3)(a) by specifying the franking percentage to be used in working out the amount of the debit; and

specify the exempting debit under paragraph (3)(b) by specifying the exempting percentage to be used in working out the amount of the debit.

The Commissioner may specify the *distribution under paragraph (3)(a), (b) or (c) by specifying:

the date on which the distribution was made, or the period during which the distribution was made; and

the member, or class of members, to whom the distribution was made.

What is an imputation benefit?

(6) A *member of an entity receives an imputation benefit as a result of a distribution if:

the member is entitled to a tax offset under Division 207 as a result of the distribution; or

an amount would be included in the member’s assessable income as a result of the distribution because of the operation of section 207-35; or

a franking credit would arise in the franking account of the member as a result of the distribution; or

an exempting credit would arise in the exempting account of the member as a result of the distribution; or

(e) the member would not be liable to pay *withholding tax on the distribution, because of the operation of paragraph 128B(3)(ga) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

the member is entitled to a tax offset under section 210-170 as a result of the distribution.

When does a favoured member derive greater benefit from franking credits?

(7) The following subsection lists some of the cases in which a *member of an entity *derives a greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity. It is not an exhaustive list.

(8) A *member of an entity *derives a greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity if any of the following circumstances exist in relation to the other member in the income year in which the distribution giving rise to the benefit is made, and not in relation to the first member:

the other member is a foreign resident;

the other member would not be entitled to any tax offset under Division 207 because of the distribution;

the amount of income tax that, apart from this Division, would be payable by the other member because of the distribution is less than the tax offset to which the other member would be entitled;

the other member is a corporate tax entity at the time the distribution is made, but no franking credit arises for the entity as a result of the distribution;

the other member is a corporate tax entity at the time the distribution is made, but cannot use *franking credits received on the distribution to *frank distributions to its own members because:

it is not a franking entity; or

it is unable to make *frankable distributions;

the other member is an exempting entity.

(9) A *member of an entity *derives a greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity if any of the following circumstances exist in relation to the first member in the income year in which the *distribution giving rise to the benefit is made, and not in relation to the other member:

a franking credit arises for the first member under item 5, 6 or 7 of the table in section 208-130 (distributions by *exempting entities to exempting entities);

a franking credit or exempting credit arises for the first member because the distribution is *franked with an exempting credit;

the first member is entitled to a tax offset because:

the distribution is a *franked distribution made by an exempting entity; or

the distribution is *franked with an exempting credit.

(10) A *member of an entity *derives a greater benefit from franking credits than another member if the first member is entitled to a *tax offset under section 210-170 as a result of the *distribution, and the other member is not.

204-35 When does a franking debit arise if the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(a)

If the Commissioner makes a determination giving rise to a franking debit in the franking account of an entity under paragraph 204-30(3)(a), the debit arises in the franking account of the entity on the day on which the notice of determination is given to the entity in accordance with section 204-50.

If the Commissioner makes a determination giving rise to an exempting debit in the exempting account of an entity under paragraph 204-30(3)(b), the debit arises in the exempting account of the entity on the day on which the notice of determination is given to the entity in accordance with section 204-50.

204-40 Amount of the franking debit

The amount of the franking debit arising because of a determination by the Commissioner under paragraph 204-30(3)(a) must not exceed:

if the specified *distribution has been *franked—the difference between the amount of the franking credit on the distribution and an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or

if the specified distribution, although *frankable, has not been franked—an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or

if the specified distribution is unfrankable—an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or

if the specified benefit is the issue of bonus shares from a share premium account—an amount worked out by multiplying the amount debited to the share premium account in respect of the bonus shares by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or

if some other benefit is specified—an amount worked out by multiplying the value of the benefit by the highest franking percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked.

In specifying the franking debit, the Commissioner must have regard to:

any franking debit already arising in the franking account of the entity under paragraph 203-50(1)(b) because the entity franked the specified *distribution in breach of the *benchmark rule; and

any franking debit already arising in the franking account of the entity, because of the specified distribution or benefit, under section 204-15 (about linked distributions) or section 204-25 (about substituting *tax-exempt bonus shares for *franked distributions).

204-41 Amount of the exempting debit

The amount of the exempting debit arising because of a determination by the Commissioner under paragraph 204-30(3)(b) must not exceed:

if the specified *distribution has been *franked with an exempting credit—the difference between the amount of the exempting credit on the distribution and an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or

if the specified distribution, although *frankable, has not been franked with an exempting credit—an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or

if the specified distribution is unfrankable—an amount worked out by multiplying the amount of the distribution by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or

if the specified benefit is the issue of bonus shares from a share premium account—an amount worked out by multiplying the amount debited to the share premium account in respect of the bonus shares by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked; or

if some other benefit is specified—an amount worked out by multiplying the value of the benefit by the highest exempting percentage at which a distribution to a favoured member is franked.

204-45 Effect of a determination about distributions to favoured members

If the Commissioner makes a determination denying an imputation benefit under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) (about distributions to favoured members), the determination has effect according to its terms.

204-50 Assessment and notice of determination

A determination under subsection 204-30(3) does not form part of an assessment.

The Commissioner must give notice in writing of the determination:

in a case where the Commissioner determines that a franking debit is to arise in the franking account of an entity under paragraph 204-30(3)(a)—to the entity; and

in a case where the Commissioner determines that an exempting debit is to arise in the exempting account of an entity under paragraph 204-30(3)(b)—to the entity; and

in a case where a favoured member is denied an imputation benefit under paragraph 204-30(3)(c)—to the favoured member.

If the Commissioner makes a determination denying an imputation benefit under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) on a *distribution made by a listed public company, the Commissioner is taken to have served notice in writing of the determination on the favoured member if the Commissioner causes a notice to be published in a manner that results in the notice being accessible to the public and reasonably prominent. The notice is taken to have been served on the day on which the publication takes place.

204-55 Right to review where a determination made

If a taxpayer to whom a determination relates is dissatisfied with the determination, the taxpayer may object to it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 204-E — Disclosure requirements

Guide to Subdivision 204-E

204-65 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision requires an entity to notify the Commissioner where there is a significant difference in its benchmark franking percentage over time, so that the Commissioner can assess whether there is streaming.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

204-70 Application of this Subdivision

204-75 Notice to the Commissioner

204-80 Commissioner may require information where the Commissioner suspects streaming

Operative provisions

204-70 Application of this Subdivision

This Subdivision applies to an entity if the difference between:

(a) the *benchmark franking percentage for the entity for a *franking period (the current franking period); and

(b) the benchmark franking percentage for the entity for the last franking period in which a *frankable distribution was made (the last relevant franking period);

is more than the amount worked out using the following formula (whether the percentage for the current franking period is more than or less than the percentage for the last relevant franking period):

However, this Subdivision does not apply to an entity to which the benchmark rule does not apply.

Note: Section 203-20 identifies the entities to which the benchmark rule does not apply.

204-75 Notice to the Commissioner

The entity must notify the Commissioner in writing of the difference.

The notice must also state:

the benchmark franking percentage for the current franking period; and

the benchmark franking percentage for the last relevant franking period.

The notice must be in the approved form and must be given to the Commissioner:

if the entity is required to give the Commissioner a franking return for the income year in which the current franking period occurs—with that return; or

otherwise—within one month after the end of the income year in which the current franking period occurs.

Note: See Subdivision 214-A for requirements to give the Commissioner franking returns.

204-80 Commissioner may require information where the Commissioner suspects streaming

The Commissioner may request the entity to give the Commissioner the following information:

the entity’s reasons for setting a benchmark franking percentage for the current franking period that differs significantly from the benchmark franking percentage for the last relevant franking period; and

the *franking percentages for all *frankable distributions made in the current franking period and the last relevant franking period; and

details of any other benefits given to the entity’s *members, either by the entity or an associate of the entity, during the period beginning at the beginning of the last relevant franking period and ending at the end of the current franking period; and

whether any member of the entity has *derived, or will derive, a *greater benefit from franking credits than another member of the entity as a result of the variation in the benchmark franking percentage between the current franking period and the last relevant franking period; and

any other information required by the approved form that is relevant in determining whether the entity is streaming *distributions.

The entity must comply with the Commissioner’s request.

Division 205 — Franking accounts, franking deficit tax liabilities and the related tax offset

Guide to Division 205

205-1 What this Division is about

This Division:

• creates a franking account for each entity that is, or has been, a corporate tax entity; and

• identifies when franking credits and debits arise in those accounts and the amount of those credits and debits; and

• identifies when there is a franking surplus or deficit in the account; and

• creates a liability to pay franking deficit tax if the account is in deficit at certain times; and

• creates a tax offset for that liability.

Table of sections

205-5 Franking accounts, franking deficit tax liabilities and the related tax offset

Operative provisions

205-10 Each entity that is or has been a corporate tax entity has a franking account

205-15 Franking credits

205-20 Paying a PAYG instalment, income tax, diverted profits tax or Australian DMT tax

205-25 Residency requirement for an event giving rise to a franking credit or franking debit

205-30 Franking debits

205-35 Refund of income tax, diverted profits tax or Australian DMT tax

205-40 Franking surplus and deficit

205-45 Franking deficit tax

205-50 Deferring franking deficit

205-70 Tax offset arising from franking deficit tax liabilities

205-5 Franking accounts, franking deficit tax liabilities and the related tax offset

Each entity that is, or has ever been, a corporate tax entity has a franking account.

The payment of a PAYG instalment or income tax will generate a franking credit in that account. The amount of the credit is equal to the amount of tax paid. The receipt of a franked distribution by an entity from another corporate tax entity will also generate a franking credit. There are other circumstances in which a franking credit arises.

(3) The receipt of a refund of income tax or the payment of a franked distribution by a corporate tax entity will generate a franking debit. There are, however, other cases where a franking debit arises. For example, a franking debit might arise under a determination by the Commissioner because distributions have been streamed.

An entity must be a franking entity at certain times and satisfy certain residency requirements before a franking credit or debit arises in its account.

Franking deficit tax is payable if the franking account of an entity is in deficit at the end of the entity’s income year, or when the entity ceases to be a franking entity.

A tax offset is available to an entity that has incurred a liability to pay franking deficit tax.

Operative provisions

205-10 Each entity that is or has been a corporate tax entity has a franking account

There is a franking account for each entity that is, or has at any time been, a *corporate tax entity.

Note: The balance in the franking account on 1 July 2002 will either be nil or, if the entity had a franking surplus or deficit immediately before 1 July 2002 under the imputation scheme existing at that time, an amount calculated under the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

205-15 Franking credits

(1) The following table sets out when a credit arises in the *franking account of an entity and the amount of the credit. The credit is called a franking credit.

A franking credit covered by item 4 of the table arises at the end of the income year:

that is an income year of the last partnership or trust interposed between:

the entity; and

the corporate tax entity that made the distribution; and

during which the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity.

Despite item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection (1), no credit arises on that part of the payment that is attributable to a payment of income tax in relation to an RSA component.

An entity’s franking credit for a payment mentioned in item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection (1) is reduced by the amount (if any) worked out as follows, but not below zero.

Method statement

Step 1. Identify any income years ending before the payment was made for which the entity has *received a refund of income tax.

Step 2. Add up the part (if any) of each of those refunds that is attributable to a tax offset that is subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-30 (about R&D).

Step 3. Subtract any reduction under this subsection of a franking credit for any earlier payment by the entity. (For this purpose, assume a credit reduced to zero is still a franking credit.)

(5) The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) divided by 40%.

205-20 Paying a PAYG instalment, income tax, diverted profits tax or Australian DMT tax

(1) An entity pays a PAYG instalment if and only if:

the entity has a liability to pay the instalment; and

either:

the entity makes a payment to satisfy the liability (in whole or in part); or

a credit, or an RBA surplus, is applied to discharge or reduce the liability.

Note: The requirement in paragraph (a) means that the entity cannot generate franking credits by making a “voluntary” payment of income tax (that is, paying an amount on account of income tax for which the entity is not liable at the time when the payment is made).

If an entity:

is liable to pay a PAYG instalment; and

has a PAYG instalment variation credit;

the PAYG instalment variation credit must be fully applied to reduce the liability for the PAYG instalment before any other credit or payment can be applied to reduce that liability.

(3) An entity pays income tax if and only if:

the entity has a liability to pay the income tax; and

either:

the entity makes a payment to satisfy the liability (in whole or in part); or

a credit, or an RBA surplus, is applied to discharge or reduce the liability.

Note: The requirement in paragraph (a) means that the entity cannot generate franking credits by making a “voluntary” payment of income tax (that is, paying an amount on account of income tax for which the entity is not liable at the time when the payment is made).

(3A) An entity pays diverted profits tax if and only if:

the entity has a liability to pay the diverted profits tax; and

either:

the entity makes a payment to satisfy the liability (in whole or in part); or

a credit, or an RBA surplus, is applied to discharge or reduce the liability.

(3B) An entity pays Australian DMT tax if and only if:

the entity has a liability to pay the Australian DMT tax; and

either:

the entity makes a payment to satisfy the liability (in whole or in part); or

a credit, or an RBA surplus, is applied to discharge or reduce the liability.

(4) Subparagraphs (1)(b)(ii), (3)(b)(ii) and (3A)(b)(ii) do not apply to the application of a credit allowable under or by virtue of section 45-30 or 45-215 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (these sections deal with credits for *PAYG instalments payable and credit on using a varied rate in certain cases).

(5) The amount of the *PAYG instalment or income tax paid is equal to:

the amount of the liability, if it is satisfied in full; or

the amount by which the liability is reduced, if it is not satisfied in full.

If:

a surplus in an RBA of an entity is applied to satisfy a liability of the entity to *pay a PAYG instalment in respect of an income year; and

(b) a credit allowable under section 45-30 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in respect of that income year is included in the RBA; and

the RBA does not include the liability to pay the PAYG instalment; and

the amount of the credit exceeds the income tax assessed to the entity in respect of that income year;

the amount of the PAYG instalment paid by virtue of the application of the surplus is reduced by the amount of the excess mentioned in paragraph (d).

205-25 Residency requirement for an event giving rise to a franking credit or franking debit

(1) An entity satisfies the residency requirement for an income year in which, or in relation to which, an event specified in a relevant table occurs if:

the entity is a company, or a corporate limited partnership, to which at least one of the following subparagraphs applies:

the entity is an Australian resident for more than one half of the 12 months immediately preceding the event if the event occurs before the end of the income year;

the entity is an Australian resident at all times during the income year when the entity exists if the event occurs at or after the end of the income year;

the entity is an Australian resident for more than one half of the income year (whether or not the event occurs before the end of the income year); or

the entity is a public trading trust for the income year.

The tables in sections 205-15 and 205-30 are relevant for the purposes of subsection (1).

205-30 Franking debits

(1) The following table sets out when a debit arises in the *franking account of an entity and the amount of the debit. The debit is called a franking debit.

Note: For completeness, the table refers to some franking debits that arise under other sections of the Act. This does not mean that separate franking debits arise both under the relevant section and this table.

Despite item 2 of the table in subsection (1), no debit arises on that part of the refund that is attributable to any of the following:

a payment of income tax in relation to an RSA component;

a tax offset that is subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-30 (about R&D).

(3) The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) divided by 40%.

205-35 Refund of income tax, diverted profits tax or Australian DMT tax

(1) An entity receives a refund of income tax if and only if:

either:

the entity receives an amount as a refund; or

the Commissioner applies a credit, or an RBA surplus, against a liability or liabilities of the entity; and

the refund of the amount, or the application of the credit, represents in whole or in part:

a return to the entity of an amount paid or applied to satisfy the entity’s liability to pay income tax; or

the amount remaining after applying a loss carry back tax offset, or a tax offset that is subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-30 (about R&D), against the entity’s basic income tax liability.

(1A) An entity receives a refund of diverted profits tax if and only if:

either:

the entity receives an amount as a refund; or

the Commissioner applies a credit, or an RBA surplus, against a liability or liabilities of the entity; and

the refund of the amount, or the application of the credit, represents in whole or in part a return to the entity of an amount paid or applied to satisfy the entity’s liability to pay diverted profits tax.

(1B) An entity receives a refund of Australian DMT tax if and only if:

either:

the entity receives an amount as a refund; or

the Commissioner applies a credit, or an RBA surplus, against a liability or liabilities of the entity; and

the refund of the amount, or the application of the credit, represents in whole or in part a return to the entity of an amount paid or applied to satisfy the entity’s liability to pay Australian DMT tax.

The amount of the refund is so much of the amount refunded or applied as represents the return, or amount remaining, referred to in paragraph (1)(b), (1A)(b) or (1B)(b).

205-40 Franking surplus and deficit

(1) An entity’s *franking account is in surplus at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *franking credits in the account exceeds the sum of the *franking debits in the account. The amount of the franking surplus is the amount of the excess.

(2) An entity’s *franking account is in deficit at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *franking debits in the account exceeds the sum of the *franking credits in the account. The amount of the franking deficit is the amount of the excess.

205-45 Franking deficit tax

Object

While recognising that an entity may anticipate *franking credits when *franking *distributions, the object of this section is to prevent those credits from being anticipated indefinitely by requiring the entity to reconcile its franking account at certain times and levying tax if the account is in *deficit.

Franking deficit at end of income year

(2) An entity is liable to pay franking deficit tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Franking Deficit Tax) Act 2002 if its *franking account is in *deficit at the end of an income year.

Corporate tax entity ceases to be a franking entity

(3) An entity is liable to pay *franking deficit tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Franking Deficit Tax) Act 2002 if:

it ceases to be a franking entity; and

immediately before it ceases to be a franking entity, its franking account is in *deficit.

Note: The tax is imposed in the New Business Tax System (Franking Deficit Tax) Act 2002 and the amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

205-50 Deferring franking deficit

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that an entity does not avoid franking deficit tax by deferring the time at which a franking debit occurs in its franking account.

End of year deficit deferred

An entity is taken to have *received a refund of income tax for an income year immediately before the end of that year for the purposes of subsection 205-45(2) if:

the refund is paid within 3 months after the end of that year; and

the franking account of the entity would have been in *deficit, or in deficit to a greater extent, at the end of that year if the refund had been received in that year.

Deficit on ceasing to be a franking entity deferred

If an entity ceases to be a franking entity during an income year, the entity is taken to have *received a refund of income tax immediately before it ceased to be a franking entity for the purposes of subsection 205-45(3) if:

the refund is attributable to a period in the year during which the entity was a franking entity; and

the refund is paid within 3 months after the entity ceases to be a franking entity; and

the franking account of the entity would have been in *deficit, or in deficit to a greater extent, immediately before it ceased to be a franking entity if the refund had been received before it ceased to be a franking entity.

205-70 Tax offset arising from franking deficit tax liabilities

When does the tax offset arise?

(1) A *corporate tax entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year for which it satisfies the *residency requirement (the relevant year) if at least one of the following applies:

the entity has incurred a liability to pay franking deficit tax in the relevant year;

the entity incurred such a liability in a previous income year for which it did not satisfy the residency requirement, and that liability has not been taken into account in working out a tax offset under this section;

when the entity was last entitled to a tax offset under this section for a previous income year, some of the offset remained after applying section 63-10 (tax offset priority rules).

The amount of the tax offset

Work out the amount of the tax offset for the relevant year as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the total amount of franking deficit tax that is covered by paragraph (1)(a).

Then, subject to subsections (5) and (6), reduce so much of it as is attributable to *franking debits to which subsection (8) applies by 30% if that part exceeds 10% of the total amount of *franking credits that arose in the entity’s franking account for the relevant year.

Step 2. Work out the total amount of franking deficit tax that is covered by paragraph (1)(b) for a previous income year.

Then, subject to subsections (5) and (6), reduce so much of it as is attributable to *franking debits to which subsection (8) applies by 30% if that part exceeds 10% of the total amount of *franking credits that arose in the entity’s franking account for that previous income year.

Step 3. Add up the results of step 2 for all the previous income years covered by paragraph (1)(b).

Step 4. Work out the remaining amount of a tax offset covered by paragraph (1)(c).

Step 5. Add up the results of steps 1, 3 and 4. The result is the tax offset to which the entity is entitled under this section for the relevant year.

• the entity’s income tax liability for that year would be $100,000 if its tax offsets were disregarded;

• for that year, the entity has a tax offset of $60,000 under this section (the franking deficit offset) and a tax offset of $80,000 in respect of foreign income tax paid by the entity (the foreign income tax offset).

Under section 63-10 (about tax offset priority rules), the foreign income tax offset must be applied before the franking deficit offset is applied. As a result, that offset and $20,000 of the franking deficit offset combine to reduce the entity’s income tax liability to nil. The remaining $40,000 of the franking deficit offset will be included in a franking deficit offset for the next income year for which the entity satisfies the residency requirement.

Residency requirement

Note: This method statement is modified for certain late balancing entities: see section 205-70 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Example: The following apply to a corporate tax entity that satisfies the residency requirement for an income year:

To determine whether the entity satisfies the *residency requirement for the relevant year, section 205-25 has effect as if each of the following were an event specified in a relevant table for the purposes of that section:

the entity incurring a liability to pay franking deficit tax in the relevant year;

the assessment of the entity’s income tax liability for the relevant year that is made on the *assessment day for that year.

30% reduction will generally not apply to private company’s first year of tax liability

The 30% reductions in steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in subsection (2) do not apply in working out the amount of the tax offset to which the entity is entitled for the relevant year if:

the entity is a private company for the relevant year; and

if the company did not have the tax offset (but had all its other tax offsets) it would have had an income tax liability for the relevant year; and

the company has not had an income tax liability for any income year before the relevant year; and

the amount of the liability referred to in paragraph (b) is at least 90% of the amount of the *deficit in the company’s franking account at the end of the relevant year.

Commissioner’s discretion

The 30% reductions in steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in subsection (2) do not apply in working out the amount of the tax offset to which the entity is entitled for the relevant year if the Commissioner determines in writing, on application by the entity in the approved form, that the excess referred to in those steps was due to events outside the control of the entity.

A determination under subsection (6) is not a legislative instrument.

Applicable franking debits

This subsection applies to *franking debits in the franking account of an entity:

that arise under table item 1, 3, 5 or 6 in section 205-30 for an income year; and

if the entity has franking debits covered by paragraph (a) for that income year—that arise under table item 2 in that section for that income year.

Division 207 — Effect of receiving a franked distribution

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 207

207-A Effect of receiving a franked distribution generally

207-B Franked distribution received through certain partnerships and trustees

207-C Residency requirements for the general rule

207-D No gross-up or tax offset where distribution would not be taxed

207-E Exceptions to the rules in Subdivision 207-D

207-F No gross-up or tax offset where the imputation system has been manipulated

Guide to Division 207

Table of sections

207-5 Overview

207-5 Overview

If a corporate tax entity makes a franked distribution to one of its members, then, as a general rule:

an amount equal to the franking credit on the distribution is included in the member’s assessable income; and

the member is entitled to a tax offset equal to the same amount.

In some cases a residency requirement must be satisfied for the general rule to apply.

If a franked distribution is made to a member that is a partnership or the trustee of a trust, an amount equal to the franking credit on the distribution is also included in the member’s assessable income as mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

However, a tax offset in relation to that distribution is only available to an entity (who may be a partner, beneficiary or a trustee) if the distribution flows indirectly to it and does not flow indirectly through it to another entity. The tax offset is equal to its share of the franking credit on the distribution.

Note: That share is a notional amount and the entity can have that share without actually receiving any of that franking credit or distribution.

There are exceptions to both the general rule mentioned in subsection (1) and the special rule mentioned in subsection (4). Basically, these exceptions are created:

where the relevant entity would not have paid tax on the distribution or a share of the distribution (see Subdivisions 207-D and 207-E); and

where there is a manipulation of the imputation system in a manner that is not permitted under the income tax law (see Subdivision 207-F).

Subdivision 207-A — Effect of receiving a franked distribution generally

Guide to Subdivision 207-A

207-10 What this Subdivision is about

As a general rule, if a member of an entity receives a franked distribution:

• an amount equal to the franking credit on the distribution is included in the member’s assessable income; and

• the member is entitled to a tax offset equal to the franking credit on the distribution.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

207-15 Applying the general rule

207-20 General rule—gross-up and tax offset

Operative provisions

207-15 Applying the general rule

This Subdivision sets out, as a general rule, the tax effect of receiving a *franked distribution.

This Subdivision does not apply to:

a partnership or trustee to whom a *franked distribution is made (except a partnership or trustee that is a corporate tax entity, or a trustee of a trust that is a *complying superannuation entity, when the distribution is made); or

an entity to whom a franked distribution *flows indirectly.

Note: Subject to the other provisions in this Division, Subdivision 207-B applies to an entity excluded from the application of this Subdivision because of this subsection.

This Subdivision applies subject to Subdivisions 207-C, 207-D, 207-E and 207-F.

Note 1: Subdivision 207-C sets out the residency requirements that must be satisfied by an individual or a corporate tax entity that receives a franked distribution.

Note 2: Subdivision 207-D sets out the cases in which the gross-up and tax offset rules in this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-B will not apply because the franked distribution (or a share of it) would not have been taxed in any case.

Note 3: Subdivision 207-E sets out the exceptions to the rules in Subdivision 207-D.

Note 4: Subdivision 207-F sets out the cases in which the gross-up and tax offset rules in this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-B will not apply because the imputation system has been manipulated in a way that is not permitted under the income tax law.

207-20 General rule—gross-up and tax offset

If an entity makes a *franked distribution to another entity, the assessable income of the receiving entity, for the income year in which the distribution is made, includes the amount of the franking credit on the distribution. This is in addition to any other amount included in the receiving entity’s assessable income in relation to the distribution under any other provision of this Act.

The receiving entity is entitled to a tax offset for the income year in which the distribution is made. The tax offset is equal to the franking credit on the distribution.

Subdivision 207-B — Franked distribution received through certain partnerships and trustees

Guide to Subdivision 207-B

207-25 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision deals with an entity that receives a benefit of a franked distribution where:

the distribution is made to a partnership or the trustee of a trust; and

the benefit is received either directly or through other interposed partnerships or trusts.

The distribution is regarded as flowing indirectly to the entity under this Subdivision.

On the basis of a notional amount of the entity’s share of the distribution, the entity may be entitled to have an amount included in its assessable income and/or a tax offset under this Subdivision.

Table of sections

Gross-up and tax offset

207-30 Applying this Subdivision

207-35 Gross-up—distribution made to, or flows indirectly through, a partnership or trustee

207-37 Attributable franked distribution—trusts

207-45 Tax offset—distribution flows indirectly to an entity

Key concepts

207-50 When a franked distribution flows indirectly to or through an entity

207-55 Share of a franked distribution

207-57 Share of the franking credit on a franked distribution

207-58 Specifically entitled to an amount of a franked distribution

207-59 Franked distributions within class treated as single franked distribution

Gross-up and tax offset

207-30 Applying this Subdivision

This Subdivision applies subject to Subdivisions 207-D, 207-E and 207-F.

Note 1: Subdivision 207-D sets out the cases in which the gross-up and tax offset rules in this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-A will not apply because the franked distribution (or a share of it) would not have been taxed in any case.

Note 2: Subdivision 207-E sets out the exceptions to the rules in Subdivision 207-D.

Note 3: Subdivision 207-F sets out the cases in which the gross-up and tax offset rules in this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-A will not apply because the imputation system has been manipulated in a way that is not permitted under the income tax law.

207-35 Gross-up—distribution made to, or flows indirectly through, a partnership or trustee

Additional amount of assessable income

If:

a *franked distribution is made in an income year to an entity that is a partnership or the trustee of a trust; and

the entity is not a corporate tax entity when the distribution is made; and

if the entity is the trustee of a trust—the trust is not a *complying superannuation entity when the distribution is made;

the assessable income of the partnership or trust for that income year includes the amount of the franking credit on the distribution.

The amount is in addition to any other amount included in that assessable income in relation to the distribution under any other provision of this Act.

Note: The amount will affect the income tax liability of a partner in the partnership, or a beneficiary or the trustee of the trust: see Divisions 5 and 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subsection (4) applies if:

a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly, to a partnership or the trustee of a trust in an income year; and

(b) the assessable income of the partnership or trust for that year includes an amount (the franking credit amount) that is all or a part of the additional amount of assessable income included under subsection (1) in relation to the distribution; and

the distribution flows indirectly to an entity that is a partner in the partnership, or a beneficiary or the trustee of the trust; and

(d) disregarding Division 6E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the entity has an amount of assessable income for that year that is attributable to all or a part of the distribution.

(4) Despite any provisions in Divisions 5 and 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the entity’s assessable income for that year also includes:

in the case of an entity that is a partner in a partnership—so much of the franking credit amount as is equal to the entity’s *share of the franking credit on the distribution; and

in the case of an entity that is a beneficiary of a trust:

so much of the franking credit amount as is equal to the entity’s share of the franking credit on the distribution; and

the amount mentioned in section 207-37.

Example: A franked distribution of $70 is made to the trustee of a trust in an income year. The trust also has $100 of assessable income from other sources. Under subsection (1), the trust’s assessable income includes an additional amount of $30 (which is the franking credit on the distribution). The trust has a net income of $200 for that income year.

There are 2 beneficiaries of the trust, P and Q, who are presently entitled to the trust’s income. Under the trust deed, P is entitled to all of the franked distribution and Q is entitled to all other income.

The distribution flows indirectly to P (as P has a share of the trust’s net income that is covered by paragraph 97(1)(a) and has a share of the distribution under section 207-55 equal to 100% of the distribution).

Under this subsection, P’s assessable income includes $70 (the amount mentioned in section 207-37 (attributable franked distribution)) and also includes the full amount of the franking credit (as P’s share of the franking credit on the distribution is $30 under section 207-57). Q’s assessable income does not include any of the amount of the franked distribution or the franking credit.

Subsection (6) applies if:

a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly, to the trustee of a trust in an income year; and

(b) the assessable income of the trust for that year includes an amount (the franking credit amount) that is all or a part of the additional amount of assessable income included under subsection (1) in relation to the distribution; and

(c) disregarding Division 6E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the trustee of the trust is liable to be assessed (and pay tax) in respect of an amount (the assessable amount) under section 98, 99 or 99A of that Act in relation to the trust.

(6) Despite any provisions in Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, for the purposes of that Division, increase the assessable amount by so much of the franking credit amount as is equal to:

if the trustee of the trust is liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 98 of that Act—the sum of:

the trustee’s *share of the franking credit on the distribution in respect of the beneficiary; and

the amount mentioned in section 207-37; or

if the trustee of the trust is liable to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 99 or 99A of that Act—the sum of:

the trustee’s share of the franking credit on the distribution; and

the amount mentioned in section 207-37.

207-37 Attributable franked distribution—trusts

The amount is the product of:

the amount of the *franked distribution (to the extent that an amount of the franked distribution remained after reducing it by deductions that were directly relevant to it); and

the beneficiary’s or the trustee’s (as the case requires) *share of the franked distribution (see section 207-55), divided by the amount of the franked distribution.

Subsection (3) applies if the net income of the trust estate (disregarding the amount of any *franking credits) for the relevant income year falls short of the sum of:

the net capital gain (if any) of the trust estate for the income year; and

the total of all *franked distributions (if any) included in the assessable income of the trust estate for the income year (to the extent that an amount of the franked distributions remained after reducing them by deductions that were directly relevant to them).

For the purposes of subsection (1), replace paragraph (a) of that subsection with the following paragraph:

the product of:

the amount of the *franked distribution (to the extent that an amount of the franked distribution remained after reducing it by deductions that were directly relevant to it); and

the *net income of the trust estate for that income year (disregarding the amount of any *franking credits), divided by the sum mentioned in subsection (2); and

207-45 Tax offset—distribution flows indirectly to an entity

An entity to whom a *franked distribution *flows indirectly in an income year is entitled to a tax offset for that income year that is equal to its *share of the franking credit on the distribution, if it is:

an individual; or

a corporate tax entity when the distribution flows indirectly to it; or

(c) the trustee of a trust that is liable to be assessed on a share of, or all or a part of, the trust’s *net income under section 98, 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for that income year; or

the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity, a non-complying superannuation fund or a non-complying approved deposit fund in relation to that income year.

Note: The entities covered by this section are the ultimate recipients of the distribution because the distribution does not flow indirectly through them to other entities. As a result they are also the ultimate taxpayers in respect of the distribution and are given the tax offset to acknowledge the income tax that has already been paid on the profits underlying the distribution.

Key concepts

207-50 When a franked distribution flows indirectly to or through an entity

For the purposes of this Subdivision, this section sets out the only circumstances in which a *franked distribution:

(a) flows indirectly to an entity (subsection (2), (3) or (4)); or

(b) flows indirectly through an entity (subsection (5)).

Partners

(2) A *franked distribution flows indirectly to a partner in a partnership in an income year if, and only if:

during that income year, the distribution is made to the partnership, or *flows indirectly to the partnership as a beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (3); and

the partner has an individual interest:

(i) in the partnership’s *net income for that income year that is covered by paragraph 92(1)(a) or (b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

in a partnership loss of the partnership for that income year that is covered by paragraph 92(2)(a) or (b) of that Act;

(whether or not that individual interest becomes assessable income in the hands of the partner); and

the partner’s *share of the distribution under section 207-55 is a positive amount (whether or not the partner actually receives any of that share).

Beneficiaries

(3) A *franked distribution flows indirectly to a beneficiary of a trust in an income year if, and only if:

during that income year, the distribution is made to the trustee of the trust, or *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner or beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (2) or this subsection; and

(b) the beneficiary has this amount for that income year (the share amount):

(i) a share of the trust’s *net income for that income year that is covered by paragraph 97(1)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

an individual interest in the trust’s net income for that income year that is covered by section 98A or 100 of that Act;

(whether or not the share amount becomes assessable income in the hands of the beneficiary); and

the beneficiary’s *share of the distribution under section 207-55 is a positive amount (whether or not the beneficiary actually receives any of that share).

Trustees

(4) A *franked distribution flows indirectly to the trustee of a trust in an income year if, and only if:

during that income year, the distribution is made to the trustee, or *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner or beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (2) or (3); and

(b) the trustee is liable or, but for another provision in this Act, would be liable, to be assessed in respect of an amount (the share amount) that is:

(i) a share of the trust’s *net income for that income year under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

all or a part of the trust’s net income for that income year under section 99 or 99A of that Act;

(whether or not the share amount becomes assessable income in the hands of the trustee); and

the trustee’s *share of the distribution under section 207-55 is a positive amount (whether or not the trustee actually receives any of that share).

Note: A trustee to whom a franked distribution flows indirectly under this subsection is entitled to a tax offset under section 207-45 and the distribution does not flow indirectly through the trustee to another entity.

(5) A *franked distribution flows indirectly through an entity (the first entity) to another entity if, and only if:

the other entity is the focal entity in an item of the table in section 207-55 in relation to the distribution; and

that focal entity’s *share of the distribution is based on the first entity’s share of the distribution as an intermediary entity in that or another item of the table.

Example: A franked distribution of $140 is made to a partnership. An amount equal to the franking credit on the distribution ($60) is included in the partnership’s assessable income under section 207-35. Because the partnership has losses of $300 from other sources, it has a partnership loss of $100 for the income year.

The partnership has 2 equal partners. One partner is the trustee of a trust and the other partner is an individual. The distribution flows indirectly to each partner under subsection (2). Each partner has a share of the partnership loss ($50), a share of the distribution under sections 207-55 ($70) and a share of the franking credit under section 207-57 ($30).

The individual partner is allowed a tax offset of $30 under section 207-45.

Because the trust has $100 of income from other sources, it has a net income of $50 for that income year ($100 minus the share of the partnership loss of $50).

The trust has one individual as a beneficiary, to whom the distribution flows indirectly under subsection (3). The beneficiary’s share of the franked distribution is therefore $70 under sections 207-55 and its share of the franking credit is $30 under section 207-57. The beneficiary is also allowed a tax offset of $30 under section 207-45.

207-55 Share of a franked distribution

Object of section

The object of this section is to ensure that:

the amount of a *franked distribution made to a partnership or the trustee of a trust is allocated notionally amongst entities who *derive benefits from that distribution; and

that allocation corresponds with the way in which those benefits were derived.

Note: An entity can derive a benefit from the distribution (and therefore has a share of the distribution) without actually receiving any of the distribution: see subsection (2) of this section and the example at the end of section 207-50.

(2) An entity’s share of a *franked distribution is an amount notionally allocated to the entity as its share of the distribution, whether or not the entity actually receives any of that distribution.

(3) That amount is equal to the entity’s share of the distribution as the focal entity in column 3 of an item of the table.

Note: An entity’s share of the distribution is based on the share of the distribution of each preceding intermediary entity through which the distribution flows, starting from the intermediary entity to whom the distribution is made.

This means that in some cases (see items 2 and 4), more than one item of the table will need to be applied to work out the share of the distribution of an ultimate recipient of the distribution.

Note: In item 3 or 4, the trustee of a trust can be both the intermediary entity and the focal entity in the same item.

For the purposes of column 3 of item 3 of the table in subsection (3), the amount is the sum of:

so much of the amount worked out under column 2 of item 3 of the table in subsection (3) to which:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—the focal entity is *specifically entitled; or

(ii) if the focal entity is the trustee and has the share amount because of the operation of section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a beneficiary (see subparagraph 207-50(4)(b)(i))—the beneficiary is specifically entitled; and

if there is an amount of the *franked distribution to which no beneficiary is specifically entitled—that amount multiplied by:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—the focal entity’s *adjusted Division 6 percentage of the income of the trust for the relevant income year; or

(ii) if the focal entity is the trustee and has the share amount because of the operation of section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a beneficiary (see subparagraph 207-50(4)(b)(i))—the beneficiary’s adjusted Division 6 percentage of the income of the trust for the relevant income year.

207-57 Share of the franking credit on a franked distribution

(1) An entity’s share of a *franking credit on a *franked distribution is an amount notionally allocated to the entity as its share of that credit, whether or not the entity actually receives any of that credit or distribution.

Work out that amount as follows:

207-58 Specifically entitled to an amount of a franked distribution

(1) A beneficiary of a trust estate is specifically entitled to an amount of a *franked distribution made to the trust estate in an income year equal to the amount calculated under the following formula:

where:

net financial benefit means an amount equal to the *financial benefit that is referable to the *franked distribution (after any application by the trustee of expenses that are directly relevant to the franked distribution).

share of net financial benefit means an amount equal to the *financial benefit that, in accordance with the terms of the trust:

the beneficiary has received, or can be reasonably expected to receive; and

is referable to the *franked distribution (after application by the trustee of any expenses that are directly relevant to the franked distribution); and

is recorded, in its character as referable to the franked distribution, in the accounts or records of the trust no later than the end of the income year.

To avoid doubt, for the purposes of subsection (1), something is done in accordance with the terms of the trust if it is done in accordance with:

the exercise of a power conferred by the terms of the trust; or

the terms of the trust deed (if any), and the terms applicable to the trust because of the operation of legislation, the common law or the rules of equity.

207-59 Franked distributions within class treated as single franked distribution

Subsection (2) applies if:

a trust receives 2 or more *franked distributions in an income year; and

all of the franked distributions that the trust receives in the income year are, in accordance with the terms of the trust, to the extent that they are distributed in that income year, distributed within a single class.

(2) For the purposes of this Subdivision and Division 6E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, treat all of the *franked distributions that the trust receives in the income year as one single franked distribution.

To avoid doubt, for the purposes of subsection (1), something is done in accordance with the terms of the trust if it is done in accordance with:

the exercise of a power conferred by the terms of the trust; or

the terms of the trust deed (if any), and the terms applicable to the trust because of the operation of legislation, the common law or the rules of equity.

Subdivision 207-C — Residency requirements for the general rule

Guide to Subdivision 207-C

207-60 What this Subdivision is about

Some recipients of a franked distribution must satisfy a residency requirement if their assessable income is to include the franking credit on the distribution, and they are to be entitled to a tax offset, under the general rule.

Table of sections

207-65 Satisfying the residency requirement

Operative provisions

207-70 Gross-up and tax offset under section 207-20

207-75 Residency requirement

207-65 Satisfying the residency requirement

This Subdivision sets out the residency requirements that must be satisfied by an individual or a corporate tax entity that receives a franked distribution, if the franking credit on the distribution is to be included in that entity’s assessable income, or the entity is to be entitled to a tax offset, under the general rule.

It does not impose a residency requirement on other entities, because the significance of residency for those entities is dealt with elsewhere in this Act.

(3) It does not impose a residency requirement where a distribution flows indirectly to an entity. This is also because the significance of residency is dealt with elsewhere, for the most part in Divisions 5 and 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Operative provisions

207-70 Gross-up and tax offset under section 207-20

If an entity makes a *franked distribution to an individual or a corporate tax entity:

no amount is included in the receiving entity’s assessable income under subsection 207-20(1); and

the receiving entity is not entitled to a tax offset under subsection 207-20(2);

unless the receiving entity satisfies the *residency requirement at the time the distribution is made.

207-75 Residency requirement

(1) An entity that receives a *distribution satisfies the residency requirement at the time the distribution is made if:

in the case of an individual—the individual is an Australian resident at that time; and

in the case of a company—the company is an Australian resident at that time; and

in the case of a corporate limited partnership—the corporate limited partnership is an Australian resident at that time; and

in the case of a public trading trust—the public trading trust is a resident unit trust for the income year in which that time occurs.

(2) An entity that receives a *distribution also satisfies the residency requirement at the time the distribution is made if the entity at that time:

is a company or an individual; and

is a foreign resident; and

carries on business in Australia at or through a permanent establishment of the entity in Australia, being a permanent establishment within the meaning of:

(i) a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that relates to a foreign country and affects the entity; or

subsection 6(1) of that Act, if there is no such agreement;

and the distribution is attributable to the permanent establishment.

Subdivision 207-D — No gross-up or tax offset where distribution would not be taxed

Guide to Subdivision 207-D

207-80 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision creates the appropriate adjustment to cancel the effect of the gross-up and tax offset rules where a franked distribution (or a share of it) is, or would be, exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income in the relevant entity’s hands (and therefore would not be taxed in any case).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

207-85 Applying this Subdivision

207-90 Distribution that is made to an entity

207-95 Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity

Operative provisions

207-85 Applying this Subdivision

This Subdivision applies subject to Subdivisions 207-E and 207-F.

Note 1: Subdivision 207-E sets out exceptions to the rules in this Subdivision.

Note 2: Where both this Subdivision and Subdivision 207-F apply to an entity, the application of this Subdivision is subject to the rules in Subdivision 207-F: see subsections 207-145(3) and 207-150(7) and (8).

207-90 Distribution that is made to an entity

Whole of distribution not assessable

If:

a *franked distribution is made to an entity; and

the distribution does not *flow indirectly through the entity to another entity; and

the distribution is exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income in the hands of the entity;

then, for the purposes of this Act:

the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is not included in the assessable income of the entity under section 207-20; and

the entity is not entitled to a tax offset under this Division because of the distribution.

Part of distribution not assessable

If:

a *franked distribution is made to an entity; and

the distribution does not *flow indirectly through the entity to another entity; and

(c) a part of the distribution (the relevant part) is *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income in the hands of the entity;

then, for the purposes of this Act:

the amount of the distribution is taken to have been reduced by the relevant part; and

the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is to be worked out as follows:

207-95 Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity

Whole of share of distribution not assessable

If:

a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to an entity in an income year; and

the entity’s *share of the distribution would, in its hands, be exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income (whether or not it had actually received that share);

then, for the purposes of this Act:

subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as appropriate) applies to the entity in relation to that income year; and

the entity is not entitled to a tax offset under this Division because of the distribution; and

if the distribution flows indirectly through the entity to another entity—subsection 207-35(3) and section 207-45 do not apply to that other entity.

Note: This section can therefore apply, for example, where the entity is a partner in a partnership that has a partnership loss and the entity does not actually receive any of the distribution.

Partner

If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a partner in a partnership under subsection 207-50(2), the entity can deduct an amount for that income year that is equal to its *share of the franking credit on the distribution.

Beneficiary

If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a beneficiary of a trust under subsection 207-50(3), the entity can deduct an amount for that income year that is equal to the lesser of:

its share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection; and

its *share of the franking credit on the distribution.

Trustee

If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as the trustee of a trust under subsection 207-50(4), the entity’s share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection is to be reduced by the lesser of:

that share amount; and

(b) its *share of the *franking credit on the distribution.

Example: A franked distribution of $70 is made to a partnership.

Under section 207-35, an additional amount of $30 is included in the partnership’s assessable income because of the distribution.

The partnership has 2 equal partners, X and Y. X is a foreign resident individual whose share of partnership’s net income for the income year is $50 (share of distribution of $35 and share of franking credit of $15). That share of distribution is not assessable income and not exempt income under section 128D of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

X’s assessable income of $15 (share of franking credit) is reduced to nil because of the deduction of $15 under subsection (2). Because of subsection (1), X is not entitled to a tax offset under section 207-45.

Part of share of distribution not assessable

If:

a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to an entity in an income year; and

(b) a part of the entity’s *share of the distribution (the relevant part) would, in its hands, be *exempt income or *non-assessable non-exempt income(whether or not it had actually received that part);

then, subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as appropriate) applies to the entity on the basis that the amount of its *share of the franking credit on the distribution is worked out as follows:

In addition, the following apply to an entity covered by subsection (5):

if the distribution would otherwise *flow indirectly through the entity—the entity’s *share of the distribution for the purposes of this Act (other than subsection (2), (3) or (4)) is to be reduced by the relevant part mentioned in subsection (5);

if the entity would otherwise be entitled to a tax offset under this Division because of the distribution—the amount of the tax offset is to be worked out as follows:

Subdivision 207-E — Exceptions to the rules in Subdivision 207-D

Guide to Subdivision 207-E

207-105 What this Subdivision is about

Subdivision 207-D does not apply to certain exempt institutions, trusts and life insurance companies as set out in this Subdivision. Such an entity may be entitled to a tax offset under this Subdivision in relation to a franked distribution.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

207-110 Effect of non-assessable income on gross up and tax offset

Exempt institutions

207-115 Which exempt institutions are eligible for a refund?

207-117 Residency requirement

207-119 Entity not treated as exempt institution eligible for refund in certain circumstances

207-120 Entity may be ineligible because of a distribution event

207-122 Entity may be ineligible if distribution is in the form of property other than money

207-124 Entity may be ineligible if other money or property also acquired

207-126 Entity may be ineligible if distributions do not match trust share amounts

207-128 Reinvestment choice

207-130 Controller’s liability

207-132 Treatment of benefits provided by an entity to a controller

207-134 Entity’s present entitlement disregarded in certain circumstances

207-136 Review of certain decisions

Operative provisions

207-110 Effect of non-assessable income on gross up and tax offset

This section applies to an entity to whom a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly, in any of the following circumstances:

the entity is an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund and the distribution does not flow indirectly to the entity as a partner in a partnership under subsection 207-50(2);

the distribution is, or the entity’s *share of the distribution would have been, this kind of income in its hands:

exempt income under section 295-385 (about income from assets set aside to meet current pension liabilities), section 295-390 (about income from other assets used to meet current pension liabilities) or section 295-400 (about income of a PST attributable to current pension liabilities); or

non-assessable non-exempt income under paragraph 320-37(1)(a) (segregated exempt assets of a life insurance company) or paragraph 320-37(1)(d) (certain amounts received by a friendly society) of this Act.

The following have effect in relation to the entity:

section 207-90 or 207-95 (as appropriate) does not apply to the entity;

if the entity would, apart from section 207-90 or 207-95, be entitled to a tax offset under section 207-20 or 207-45 in relation to the distribution—the entity is entitled to that tax offset;

if the entity would not be entitled to such a tax offset, the entity is entitled to a tax offset under this section that is equal to:

if the distribution is made to the entity—the franking credit on the distribution; or

if the distribution *flows indirectly to the entity—the entity’s *share of the franking credit on the distribution;

if the distribution flows indirectly through the entity to another entity—subsection 207-35(3) and section 207-45 do not apply to that other entity.

Note: Paragraph (2)(c) only applies to an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund and that is not entitled to a tax offset under section 207-20 or 207-45. An entity covered by paragraph (1)(b) will, in all cases, be entitled to a tax offset under section 207-20 or 207-45.

Exempt institutions

207-115 Which exempt institutions are eligible for a refund?

(1) This section sets out the only circumstances in which an entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund.

Income tax exempt charities

(2) An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if it:

is covered by item 1.1 of the table in section 50-5; and

is endorsed as exempt from income tax under Subdivision 50-B; and

satisfies the *residency requirement.

Income tax exempt deductible gift recipients

(3) An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if it:

is endorsed under paragraph 30-120(a); and

satisfies the *residency requirement.

Income tax exempt specified deductible gift recipients

(4) An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if:

the entity’s name is specified in a table in a section in Subdivision 30-B; and

it has an ABN; and

it satisfies the *residency requirement.

Income tax exempt subsidiaries of the Future Fund Board

(5A) An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if it is covered by item 5.4 of the table in section 50-25.

Prescribed income tax exempt entities

(6) An entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if the entity is prescribed as an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund by the regulations.

This section has effect subject to sections 207-119 to 207-136.

207-117 Residency requirement

An entity satisfies the residency requirement for the purposes of determining whether, at the time a *franked distribution is made, the entity is an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund if:

the entity has a physical presence in Australia; and

to that extent, incurs its expenditure and pursues its objectives principally in Australia;

at all times during the income year in which the distribution is made.

207-119 Entity not treated as exempt institution eligible for refund in certain circumstances

For the purposes of this Act:

an entity must not be treated as an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund in relation to a *franked distribution if section 207-120, 207-122 or 207-124 applies to the entity in relation to the distribution; and

a beneficiary of a trust must not be treated as an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund in relation to a franked distribution made in an income year if section 207-126 applies to the beneficiary in relation to that income year.

207-120 Entity may be ineligible because of a distribution event

(1) This section applies to an entity (the ineligible entity) if:

a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly under subsection 207-50(3) or (4), to the entity; and

subsection (2) of this section applies because of a distribution event in relation to the distribution.

Subject to subsection (3) and to section 207-128, this subsection applies if, because of a distribution event in relation to the *franked distribution:

the ineligible entity or another entity:

makes, becomes liable to make, or may reasonably be expected to make or to become liable to make, a payment to any entity; or

transfers, becomes liable to transfer, or may reasonably be expected to transfer or to become liable to transfer, any property to any entity; or

incurs, becomes liable to incur, or may reasonably be expected to incur or to become liable to incur, any other detriment, disadvantage, liability or obligation; or

if the distribution is made to the ineligible entity—the amount or value of the benefit *derived by the ineligible entity from the distribution is, will be, or may reasonably be expected to be, less than the amount or value of the distribution as at the time the distribution is made; or

if the distribution *flows indirectly to the ineligible entity—the amount or value of the benefit derived by the ineligible entity from the ineligible entity’s trust share amount in relation to the distribution is, will be, or may reasonably be expected to be, less than the amount or value of the ineligible entity’s trust share amount in relation to the distribution as at the time when that amount arises; or

any of the following entities has obtained, will obtain or may reasonably be expected to obtain, a benefit, advantage, right or privilege:

the entity making the distribution;

(ii) an entity through which the distribution flows indirectly to the ineligible entity;

an associate of any of those entities.

Note: For when paragraph (d) is satisfied, see also subsection 207-132(2).

Exception to paragraph (2)(b) or (c)

Paragraph (2)(b) or (c) does not apply if:

that paragraph would otherwise apply only because of expenses the ineligible entity has incurred, will incur, or may reasonably be expected to incur, for the purpose of obtaining the *franked distribution or trust share amount mentioned in that paragraph; and

the Commissioner considers the expenses to be reasonable.

Trust share amount

(4) An entity’s trust share amount in relation to a *franked distribution that *flows indirectly to the entity under subsection 207-50(3) or (4) is the entity’s share amount that is mentioned in that subsection.

Distribution event

(5) A distribution event in relation to a *franked distribution is an act, transaction or circumstance that has happened, will happen, or may reasonably be expected to happen, as part of, in relation to or as a result of:

the payment or receipt of the distribution; or

if the distribution *flows indirectly to an entity under subsection 207-50(3) or (4)—the arising of, or the distribution or receipt of, the entity’s trust share amount in relation to the distribution; or

an arrangement entered into in association with a matter mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b).

207-122 Entity may be ineligible if distribution is in the form of property other than money

This section applies to an entity (the ineligible entity) to whom a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly under subsection 207-50(3) or (4), if:

one of the following is in the form of property other than money:

if the distribution is made to the ineligible entity—all or part of the distribution;

(ii) if the distribution flows indirectly to the ineligible entity through the trustee of a trust under subsection 207-50(3) or (4)—all or a part of a distribution (the trust distribution) made by the trustee of the trust that relates to the ineligible entity’s *trust share amount in relation to the franked distribution; and

the terms and conditions on which the franked distribution or trust distribution is made are such that the ineligible entity:

does not receive immediate custody and control of the property; or

does not have the unconditional right to retain custody and control of the property in perpetuity; or

does not obtain an immediate, indefeasible and unencumbered legal and equitable title to the property.

207-124 Entity may be ineligible if other money or property also acquired

Subject to section 207-128, this section applies to an entity (the ineligible entity) to whom a *franked distribution is made, or *flows indirectly under subsection 207-50(3) or (4), if:

the ineligible entity or another entity has entered into an arrangement as part of, or in association with:

the distribution; or

if the distribution flows indirectly to the ineligible entity—the ineligible entity’s trust share amount in relation to the distribution; and

because of the arrangement, the ineligible entity or another entity has acquired or will acquire (whether directly or indirectly) money or property, other than money or property comprising the distribution or the ineligible entity’s trust share amount, from:

the entity making the distribution; or

(ii) an entity through which the distribution flows indirectly to the ineligible entity; or

an associate of any of those entities (other than the ineligible entity).

207-126 Entity may be ineligible if distributions do not match trust share amounts

This section applies to a beneficiary of a trust in relation to an income year if:

the sum of the distributions:

made to the beneficiary during the income year by the trustee of the trust; and

that relate to the beneficiary’s trust share amount in relation to a *franked distribution made during the income year;

is less than:

that trust share amount.

Commissioner’s power to treat trust share amount as having been distributed during the income year

Subsection (1) does not apply if the Commissioner, having regard to all the circumstances, considers that it would be reasonable to treat the trust share amount as having been distributed to the beneficiary in the income year.

207-128 Reinvestment choice

(1) If, apart from this section, paragraph 207-120(2)(a) or (d) or section 207-124 would apply to an entity (the receiving entity) to whom a *franked distribution is made or *flows indirectly, that paragraph or section is taken not to apply to the receiving entity if:

instead of receiving the distribution, or the trust share amount concerned, by a payment of money, the receiving entity chooses to be issued with:

if the distribution is made to the receiving entity—*shares in the corporate tax entity making the distribution; or

if the distribution flows indirectly to the receiving entity—a fixed interest in the trust in relation to which the trust share amount arises; and

the choice is genuine and furthers the purpose for which the entity was established; and

the choice is not made for the purpose, or purposes that include the purpose, of benefiting the corporate tax entity, trust or any of their *associates (other than the receiving entity); and

any benefit *derived by the corporate tax entity, trust or any of their associates (other than the receiving entity) because of that choice is one which is an ordinary incident of issuing the shares or interests to the receiving entity or of the receiving entity’s holding of those shares or interests; and

the parties that were involved in the distribution event or arrangement concerned deal with one another on an *arm’s length basis in relation to the event or arrangement.

A vested and indefeasible interest constitutes a fixed interest

The receiving entity’s interest in a trust is a fixed interest if the interest is a vested and indefeasible interest in the trust’s capital.

Special rule about whether interests in unit trusts are defeasible

If:

the trust is a unit trust and the receiving entity holds units in the unit trust; and

the units are redeemable or further units are able to be issued; and

the units held by the receiving entity will be redeemed, or any further units will be issued:

if units in the unit trust are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange—for the price at which other units of the same kind in the unit trust are offered for sale on the exchange at the time of the redemption or issue; or

if the units are not listed as mentioned in subparagraph (i)—for their *market value at the time of the redemption or issue;

then the mere fact that the units are redeemable, or that the further units are able to be issued, does not mean that the receiving entity’s interest, as a unit holder, in the trust’s capital is defeasible.

Commissioner’s power to treat an interest in a trust as being a fixed interest

If:

the receiving entity has an interest in the trust’s capital; and

apart from this subsection, the interest would not be a vested or indefeasible interest; and

the Commissioner considers that the interest should be treated as being vested and indefeasible, having regard to:

the circumstances in which the interest is capable of not vesting, or the defeasance can happen; and

the likelihood of the interest not vesting or the defeasance happening; and

the nature of the trust; and

any other matter the Commissioner thinks relevant;

the Commissioner may determine that the interest is to be taken to be vested and indefeasible.

A determination made under subsection (4) has effect according to its terms.

207-130 Controller’s liability

(1) A *controller (for imputation purposes) of an entity (the controlled entity) is liable to pay an amount under this section in respect of a refund paid to the controlled entity under Division 67 if:

the controlled entity claimed the refund wholly or partly on the basis that:

the controlled entity was entitled to a tax offset under section 207-20, 207-45 or 207-110 in relation to a *franked distribution; and

the controlled entity was an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund; and

because of the operation of section 207-120, 207-122, 207-124 or 207-126 in respect of a distribution event or an arrangement in relation to the distribution, the controlled entity is not entitled to the tax offset; and

the controller or an associate of the controller benefited from that event or arrangement; and

some or all of the amount that the controlled entity is liable to pay in respect of the refund remains unpaid after the day on which the amount becomes due and payable; and

the Commissioner gives the controller written notice:

stating that the controller is liable to pay an amount under this section; and

specifying that amount.

Except as provided for in subsection (5), this subsection does not affect any liability the controlled entity has in relation to the refund.

Note 1: Section 207-134 also provides that the controlled entity’s present entitlement to a trust share amount is disregarded for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: For when paragraph (c) is satisfied, see also subsection 207-132(3).

The amount that the *controller (for imputation purposes) is liable to pay under subsection (1):

is the amount specified under subparagraph (1)(e)(ii); and

becomes due and payable at the end of the period of 14 days that starts on the day on which the notice mentioned in paragraph (1)(e) is given.

The amount that the *controller (for imputation purposes) is liable to pay under subsection (1) must not exceed the total amount or value of the benefit that the controller and its *associates obtained from the distribution event or arrangement.

The total of:

the amounts that the Commissioner recovers under subsection (1) in relation to the refund from all of the controlled entity’s *controllers (for imputation purposes); and

the amounts that the Commissioner recovers in relation to the refund from the controlled entity;

must not exceed the amount that the controlled entity was liable to pay as mentioned in paragraph (1)(d).

Controller of a company

(5) An entity is a controller (for imputation purposes) of a company if the entity is a *controller of the company (for CGT purposes).

Controller of an entity other than a company—basic meaning

(6) Subject to subsections (7) and (8), an entity is a controller (for imputation purposes) of an entity other than a company (the controlled entity) if:

a group in relation to the entity has the power, by means of the exercise of a power of appointment or revocation or otherwise, to obtain beneficial enjoyment (directly or indirectly) of the capital or income of the controlled entity; or

a group in relation to the entity is able (directly or indirectly) to control the application of the capital or income of the controlled entity; or

a group in relation to the entity is capable, under a *scheme, of gaining the beneficial enjoyment mentioned in paragraph (a) or the control mentioned in paragraph (b); or

the controlled entity or, if the controlled entity is a trust, the trustee of the trust:

is accustomed; or

is under an obligation; or

might reasonably be expected;

to act in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of a group in relation to the entity; or

if the controlled entity is a trust—a group in relation to the entity is able (directly or indirectly) to remove or appoint the trustee of the trust; or

a group in relation to the entity has *more than a 50% stake in the income or capital of the controlled entity; or

entities in a group in relation to the entity are the only entities that, under the terms of:

the constitution of the controlled entity or the terms on which the controlled entity is established; or

if the controlled entity is a trust—the terms of the trust;

can obtain the beneficial enjoyment of the income or capital of the controlled entity.

Group in relation to an entity

(7) For the purposes of subsection (6), each of the following constitutes a group in relation to an entity:

the entity acting alone;

an associate of the entity acting alone;

the entity and one or more associates of the entity acting together;

2 or more associates of the entity acting together.

Commissioner’s power to take an entity not to be a controller (for imputation purposes)

If:

(a) at a particular time, an entity (the first entity) would, but for this subsection, be a *controller (for imputation purposes) of an entity other than a company (the second entity); and

the Commissioner, having regard to all relevant circumstances, considers that it is reasonable that the first entity be taken not to be such a controller of the second entity at the particular time;

the first entity is taken not to be a controller (for imputation purposes) of the second entity at the particular time.

Without limiting paragraph (8)(b), if the second entity is a trust, the Commissioner may have regard under that paragraph to the identity of the beneficiaries of the trust at any time (whether before or after the first entity began to be a *controller (for imputation purposes) of the second entity).

207-132 Treatment of benefits provided by an entity to a controller

(1) This section applies in relation to a benefit (the relevant benefit) given by an entity to a *controller (for imputation purposes) of the entity, or to an *associate of such a controller, if:

the controller or associate:

makes a *franked distribution to the entity; or

is the trustee of the trust in relation to which a trust share amount of the entity arises in relation to a franked distribution that *flows indirectly to the entity; and

the benefit is, or was, given to the controller or associate at any time during the period that starts 3 years before, and ends 3 years after, the distribution is made or the trust share amount arises (as appropriate).

For the purposes of paragraph 207-120(2)(d), the controller or associate is taken to have obtained the relevant benefit because of a distribution event in relation to the *franked distribution or trust share amount.

For the purposes of paragraph 207-130(1)(c), and at least to the extent of the relevant benefit, the controller or associate is taken to have benefited from a distribution event or arrangement that caused section 207-120 to apply in relation to the *franked distribution or trust share amount.

Commissioner’s power not to apply subsection (2) or (3)

Subsection (2) or (3) does not apply in relation to a benefit if the Commissioner is satisfied, having regard to all the circumstances, that it would be unreasonable to apply that subsection.

207-134 Entity’s present entitlement disregarded in certain circumstances

The present entitlement of a beneficiary of a trust to a share of trust income is disregarded for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:

the beneficiary has claimed a tax offset under section 207-45 or 207-110 of this Act on the basis that the beneficiary was an *exempt institution that was eligible for a refund in relation to a trust share amount that is that share of trust income; but

the beneficiary was not entitled to that tax offset because of the operation of section 207-120, 207-122, 207-124 or 207-126 in respect of a distribution event, or an arrangement, to which the trust share amount is related.

Note: This means that the trustee of the trust is liable to pay income tax on that share of the trust income.

207-136 Review of certain decisions

An entity that is dissatisfied with a decision of the Commissioner under any of the following provisions may object against it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953:

paragraph 207-120(3)(b);

subsection 207-126(2);

subsection 207-128(4);

paragraph 207-130(1)(e);

paragraph 207-130(8)(b);

subsection 207-132(4).

Subdivision 207-F — No gross-up or tax offset where the imputation system has been manipulated

Guide to Subdivision 207-F

207-140 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision creates the appropriate adjustment to cancel the effect of the gross-up and tax offset rules where the entity concerned has manipulated the imputation system in a manner that is not permitted under the income tax law.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

207-145 Distribution that is made to an entity

207-150 Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity

207-155 When is a distribution made as part of a dividend stripping operation?

207-157 Distribution washing

207-158 Distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction

207-159 Distributions funded by capital raising

207-160 Distribution that is treated as an interest payment

Operative provisions

207-145 Distribution that is made to an entity

Whole of distribution manipulated

If a *franked distribution is made to an entity in one or more of the following circumstances:

(a) the entity is not a qualified person in relation to the distribution for the purposes of Division 1A of former Part IIIAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of that Act that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of the distribution for the entity;

the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) of this Act that no imputation benefit is to arise in respect of the distribution for the entity;

the distribution is made as part of a dividend stripping operation;

the distribution is one to which section 207-157 (which is about distribution washing) applies;

the distribution is one to which section 207-158 (which is about foreign income tax deductions) applies;

then, for the purposes of this Act:

the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is not included in the assessable income of the entity under section 207-20 or 207-35; and

the entity is not entitled to a tax offset under this Division because of the distribution; and

if the distribution *flows indirectly through the entity to another entity—subsection 207-35(3) and section 207-45 do not apply to that other entity.

Part of share of distribution manipulated

If:

a *franked distribution is made to an entity; and

(b) the Commissioner makes a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part of the distribution (the specified part) for the entity;

then, for the purposes of this Act:

the amount of the distribution is taken to have been reduced by the specified part; and

the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is to be worked out as follows:

Example: A franked distribution of $70 is made to the trustee of a trust. Apart from this section, the franking credit on the distribution ($30) would be included in the assessable income of the trust under section 207-35.

The Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise for the trustee in respect of $49 of the distribution.

Under this subsection, the amount included in the assessable income of the trust under section 207-35 because of the distribution is reduced from $30 to $9.

If there is a beneficiary of the trust that is presently entitled to the trust’s income, the amount of the distribution that flows indirectly to the beneficiary is reduced from $70 to $21 under this subsection.

What happens if both subsection 207-90(2) and subsection (2) of this section would apply

If, apart from this subsection, both subsection 207-90(2) and subsection (2) of this section would apply to an entity in relation to a *franked distribution, then:

apply subsection 207-90(2) first; and

apply subsection (2) of this section on the basis that the amount of the *franked distribution had been reduced under subsection 207-90(2).

207-150 Distribution that flows indirectly to an entity

Whole of share of distribution manipulated

If a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to an entity in an income year in one or more of the following circumstances:

(a) the entity is not a qualified person in relation to the distribution for the purposes of Division 1A of former Part IIIAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of that Act that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of the distribution for the entity;

the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) of this Act that no imputation benefit is to arise in respect of the distribution for the entity;

the distribution is treated as an interest payment for the entity under section 207-160 of this Act;

the distribution is made as part of a dividend stripping operation;

the distribution is one to which section 207-157 (which is about distribution washing) applies;

the distribution is one to which section 207-158 (which is about foreign income tax deductions) applies;

then, for the purposes of this Act:

subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as appropriate) applies to the entity in relation to that income year; and

the entity is not entitled to a tax offset under this Division because of the distribution; and

if the distribution *flows indirectly through the entity to another entity—subsection 207-35(3) and section 207-45 do not apply to that other entity.

Partner

If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a partner in a partnership under subsection 207-50(2), the entity can deduct an amount for that income year that is equal to its *share of the franking credit on the distribution.

Beneficiary

If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a beneficiary of a trust under subsection 207-50(3), the entity can deduct an amount for that income year that is equal to the lesser of:

its share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection; and

its *share of the franking credit on the distribution.

Trustee

If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as the trustee of a trust under subsection 207-50(4), the entity’s share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection is to be reduced by the lesser of:

that share amount; and

its *share of the franking credit on the distribution.

Part of share of distribution manipulated

If:

a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to an entity in an income year; and

(b) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of a specified part of the distribution (the specified part) for the entity;

then, subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as appropriate) applies to the entity on the basis that the amount of its *share of the franking credit on the distribution is worked out as follows:

In addition, the following apply to an entity covered by subsection (5):

if the distribution would otherwise *flow indirectly through the entity—the entity’s *share of the distribution for the purposes of this Act (other than subsection (2), (3) or (4)) is to be reduced by the specified part mentioned in subsection (5);

if the entity would otherwise be entitled to a tax offset under this Division because of the distribution—the amount of the tax offset is to be worked out as follows:

Example: X is a partner in a partnership to which a franked distribution of $140 is made. The franking credit on the distribution ($60) is included in the assessable income of the partnership under section 207-35. X’s share of the distribution is $70 and its share of the franking credit on the distribution is $30.

The Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no imputation benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise for X in respect of $42 of the distribution.

Under subsection (5), X will be allowed a deduction of $18.

X is the trustee of a trust and the distribution will flow indirectly through X to beneficiaries of the trust. For the purposes of working out a beneficiary’s share of the distribution and its share of the franking credit, X’s share of the franked distribution is reduced to $28 under this subsection.

What happens if both subsection 207-95(1) and subsection (1) of this section would apply

If, apart from this subsection, both subsection 207-95(1) and subsection (1) of this section would apply to an entity in relation to a *franked distribution, then:

subsection (1) of this section applies to the entity; but

subsection 207-95(1) does not apply to the entity.

What happens if both subsection 207-95(5) and subsection (5) of this section would apply

If, apart from this subsection, both subsection 207-95(5) and subsection (5) of this section would apply to an entity in relation to a *franked distribution, then:

apply subsections 207-95(5) and (6) first; and

apply subsections (5) and (6) of this section on the basis that:

the amount of the entity’s *share of the franking credit on the distribution had been reduced under subsection 207-95(5); and

the amount of the entity’s *share of the distribution had been reduced under subsection 207-95(6).

207-155 When is a distribution made as part of a dividend stripping operation?

A distribution made to a *member of a *corporate tax entity is taken to be made as part of a dividend stripping operation if, and only if, the making of the distribution arose out of, or was made in the course of, a *scheme that:

was by way of, or in the nature of, dividend stripping; or

had substantially the effect of a scheme by way of, or in the nature of, dividend stripping.

207-157 Distribution washing

(1) This section applies to a *franked distribution received by a *member of a *corporate tax entity on a *membership interest (the washed interest) if:

the washed interest was acquired after the member, or a *connected entity of the member, disposed of a substantially identical membership interest; and

a corresponding franked distribution is made to the member, or the connected entity, on the substantially identical interest.

Further requirement for connected entities

However, if the entity that disposed of the substantially identical interest was a *connected entity of the member, this section does not apply to the *franked distribution unless:

it would be concluded that the disposal took place wholly or partly because there was an expectation that the acquisition would, or would be likely to, take place; or

it would be concluded that the acquisition took place wholly or partly because there was a belief that the disposal had taken place.

Substantially identical interests

Without limiting paragraph (1)(a), for the purpose of that paragraph a *membership interest is substantially identical to the washed interest if it is any one or more of the following:

fungible with, or economically equivalent to, the washed interest;

a membership interest in the same corporate tax entity as the washed interest and of a class that is the same as, or not materially different from, the washed interest;

a membership interest in the same corporate tax entity as the washed interest and of a class that is exchangeable at a fixed rate for an interest of the same class as the washed interest;

a membership interest in another corporate tax entity that holds predominantly membership interests that are covered by any of the preceding paragraphs;

a membership interest in another corporate tax entity that is exchangeable at a fixed rate for interests that are covered by any one or more of paragraphs (a) to (c).

Exception for individuals who are small holders

Despite subsection (1), this section does not apply to a *franked distribution made to an individual in an income year if the sum of the *tax offsets to which the individual would be entitled, worked out on the basis mentioned in subsection (5), is $5000 or less.

Work out the sum of the *tax offsets:

disregarding this Subdivision, to the extent it applies to the individual; and

not disregarding this Subdivision, to the extent it applies to any other entity through which a *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the individual.

207-158 Distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction

This section applies to a *franked distribution if all or part of the distribution gives rise to a foreign income tax deduction.

Exception for distributions made under certain regulatory capital instruments

However, this section does not apply to a distribution made in respect of an *equity interest if the interest forms part of Additional Tier 1 capital for the purposes of:

applicable prudential standards; or

(b) applicable prudential standards determined by *APRA and in force under section 32 of the Insurance Act 1973; or

(c) applicable prudential standards determined by APRA and in force under section 230A of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

207-159 Distributions funded by capital raising

(1) This subsection applies to a distribution (the relevant distribution) of a kind, or a part (the relevant part) of a distribution (also a relevant distribution) of a kind, made by an entity if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

either:

the entity has a practice of making distributions of that kind on a regular basis and the relevant distribution is not made in accordance with that practice; or

the entity does not have a practice of making distributions of that kind on a regular basis;

there is an issue of *equity interests in the entity or any other entity (whether before, at or after the time at which the relevant distribution was made);

it is reasonable to conclude having regard to all relevant circumstances that:

the principal effect of the issue of any of the equity interests was the direct or indirect funding of a substantial part of the relevant distribution or the relevant part; and

any entity that issued, or facilitated the issue of, any of the equity interests did so for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) of funding a substantial part of the relevant distribution or the relevant part;

the issue of the equity interests was not a direct response in order to meet a requirement, direction or recommendation from APRA or ASIC.

When an entity has a practice of making distributions of a certain kind on a regular basis

In considering whether the condition in paragraph (1)(a) is satisfied, take the following matters into account:

the nature of distributions made by the entity before the time at which the relevant distribution was made (including the extent to which such distributions were a return on capital);

the timing of such distributions;

the amount of such distributions;

any explanations given by the entity for making such distributions;

the amount of the *franking credits on, and the *franking percentages for, such distributions;

any other relevant consideration.

Distributions funded by issuing equity interests are to be disregarded in determining past practice

In considering whether the condition in paragraph (1)(a) is satisfied, disregard a distribution if:

the distribution:

is a *franked distribution; or

would be a franked distribution if subsection (1) did not apply to it; and

subsection (1) would apply to all or any part of the distribution if paragraph (1)(a) were omitted.

When issue of equity interests has the effect or purpose of funding all or part of a distribution

In considering whether the condition in paragraph (1)(c) is satisfied, take the following matters into account:

the extent to which the time (or times) at which any of the *equity interests mentioned in that paragraph were issued differs (or differ) from the time at which the relevant distribution was made;

the extent to which the amount of the funds from the issue of any of those equity interests differs from the amount of the relevant distribution or the relevant part (as the case may be);

the extent to which the financial position of any of the following entities changed as a result of the relevant distribution (or any part of the relevant distribution) and the issue of any of those equity interests:

the entity that made the relevant distribution;

an entity that, before, at or after the time at which the relevant distribution was made, was a *connected entity of that entity;

if the entity in which those equity interests were issued is not the entity that made the relevant distribution—the entity in which those equity interests were issued;

the use of the funds from the issue of any of those equity interests;

whether there are any reasons for the issue of any of those equity interests other than the funding of the relevant distribution (or any part of the relevant distribution);

the extent to which the issue of any of those equity interests was underwritten (whether formally or informally);

how the history of the amounts of franking surplus or franking deficit for the franking account of the entity that made the relevant distribution compares to:

the history of profits and or loss of that entity; and

the history of the balance of the share capital account of that entity;

if the entity that made the relevant distribution is not the entity in which those equity interests were issued—the nature and extent of the relationship between those entities;

the extent to which:

the entity to which the relevant distribution was made; and

other entities to which analogous distributions were made;

(iii) other entities to which analogous distributions were not made, but which were entitled to analogous distributions;

are the same as the entities to which those equity interests were issued;

other distributions (if any) made by the entity that made the relevant distribution (whether before, at or after the time at which the relevant distribution was made);

any other relevant consideration.

207-160 Distribution that is treated as an interest payment

(1) For the purposes of this Subdivision, a *franked distribution is treated as an interest payment for an entity to whom the distribution *flows indirectly if:

all or a part of the entity’s individual interest or share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in subsection 207-50(2), (3) or (4) could reasonably be regarded as the payment of interest on a loan, having regard to:

the way in which that individual interest or share amount was calculated; and

the conditions applying to the payment or application of that individual interest or share amount; and

any other relevant matters; and

the entity’s interest in the last intermediary entity (see subsection (2)):

was acquired, or was acquired for a period that was extended, at or after 7.30 pm by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory on 13 May 1997; or

was acquired as part of a financing arrangement for the entity (including an arrangement extending to an earlier arrangement) that was entered into at or after that time.

The entity’s interest in the last intermediary entity is:

if the distribution *flows indirectly to the entity as a partner in a partnership under subsection 207-50(2)—the entity’s interest in the partnership; or

if the distribution flows indirectly to the entity as a beneficiary of a trust under subsection 207-50(3)—the entity’s interest in the trust; or

if the distribution flows indirectly to the entity as the trustee of a trust under subsection 207-50(4)—the entity’s interest in the trust in respect of which the entity is liable to be assessed.

Division 208 — Exempting entities and former exempting entities

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 208

208-A What are exempting entities and former exempting entities?

208-B Franking with an exempting credit

208-C Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution

208-D Distribution statements

208-E Distributions to be franked with exempting credits to the same extent

208-F Exempting accounts and franking accounts of exempting entities and former exempting entities

208-G Tax effects of distributions by exempting entities

208-H Tax effect of a distribution franked with an exempting credit

Guide to Division 208

Table of sections

208-5 What is an exempting entity?

208-10 Former exempting entities

208-15 Distributions by exempting entities and former exempting entities

208-5 What is an exempting entity?

An exempting entity is a corporate tax entity that is effectively owned by entities that, either because they are not Australian residents or because they receive distributions as exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income, would not be able to fully utilise franking credits on distributions by the corporate tax entity.

In deciding whether a corporate tax entity is effectively owned by such entities, these rules:

look at the membership interests in the entity that involve the holder of the interest in bearing the risks and accruing the opportunities of ownership of the entity; and

ask whether at least 95% of those membership interests, and 95% of any interests in those membership interests, are held by Australian residents or entities that receive distributions as exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

208-10 Former exempting entities

When an entity ceases to be an exempting entity, it becomes a former exempting entity.

208-15 Distributions by exempting entities and former exempting entities

To ensure that franking credits accumulated by an exempting entity are not the target of franking credit trading, these rules:

limit the circumstances in which a distribution franked with those credits can give rise to benefits under the imputation system; and

quarantine those credits by moving them into a separate account, called the exempting account, when the entity ceases to be an exempting entity; and

deny a recipient of a distribution franked with a credit from that account any benefit under the imputation system as a result of that distribution, unless the recipient was a member of the entity immediately before it became a former exempting entity.

Subdivision 208-A — What are exempting entities and former exempting entities?

Table of sections

208-20 Exempting entities

208-25 Effective ownership of entity by prescribed persons

208-30 Accountable membership interests

208-35 Accountable partial interests

208-40 Prescribed persons

208-45 Persons who are taken to be prescribed persons

208-50 Former exempting companies

208-20 Exempting entities

A *corporate tax entity is an exempting entity at a particular time if, at that time, the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons.

Note: Prescribed persons are identified in sections 208-40 and 208-45.

208-25 Effective ownership of entity by prescribed persons

(1) An entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons at a particular time if:

at that time:

not less than 95% of the *accountable membership interests in the entity; or

not less than 95% of the *accountable partial interests in the entity;

are held by, or held indirectly for the benefit of, prescribed persons; or

paragraph (a) does not apply but it would nevertheless be reasonable to conclude that, at that time, the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in the entity that are not held by, or directly or indirectly for the benefit of, prescribed persons are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, prescribed persons.

In deciding whether it would be reasonable to conclude as mentioned in paragraph (1)(b):

have regard to any arrangement in respect of *membership interests (including unissued membership interests), or in respect of *partial interests, in the entity (including any derivatives held or issued in connection with those membership interests or partial interests) of which the entity is aware; but

do not have regard to risks involved in the ownership of membership interests, or partial interests, in the entity that are substantially borne by any person in the person’s capacity as a secured creditor.

(3) An entity has a partial interest in a *corporate tax entity if it has an interest in a *membership interest in the corporate tax entity.

208-30 Accountable membership interests

The purpose of this section is to identify which *membership interests in an entity are relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons.

(2) A *membership interest in an entity is an accountable membership interest if it is not an excluded membership interest.

(3) A *membership interest in an entity is an excluded membership interest if, having regard to:

the purposes for which the membership interest was issued; and

any special or limited rights connected with, arising from, or attached to:

the membership interest; or

other membership interests in the entity held by the holder of the membership interest; or

membership interests in the entity held by persons other than the holder of the membership interest; or

interests in any of the above;

including rights that are conferred or exercisable only if the holder of the membership interest or interests concerned is, or is not, a prescribed person; and

the extent to which any such special or limited rights are similar to or differ from the rights that are normally attached to the ownership of *ordinary membership interests in *corporate tax entities; and

the relationship between the value of the membership interest and the value of the entity; and

any relationship or connection (whether of a personal or business nature) between holders of membership interests in the entity of which the entity is aware; and

any arrangement in respect of membership interests (including unissued membership interests) in the entity, or interests in membership interests in the entity, of which the entity is aware;

it would be reasonable to conclude that the membership interest is not relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons because holding the membership interest does not involve the holder bearing the risks, or result in the accrual to the holder of the opportunities, of ownership of the entity that ordinarily arise from, or are ordinarily attached to, the holding of ordinary membership interests in an entity.

In applying subsection (3), the fact that a person is a trustee is to be disregarded.

(5) Without limiting subsection (3), a *membership interest in an entity held by a person who is not a prescribed person is an excluded membership interest if:

it is a finance membership interest; or

it is a distribution access membership interest; or

it does not carry the right to receive distributions; or

it was issued, transferred or acquired for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) of ensuring that the entity is not effectively owned by prescribed persons.

(6) A *membership interest is a finance membership interest if:

the membership interest is a non-equity share in the entity; or

having regard to the rights attached to the membership interest and to any arrangement with respect to the membership interest of which the entity is aware, the membership interest is equivalent to a debt owed by the entity to the holder of the membership interest.

(7) A *membership interest to which subsection (6) does not apply is a finance membership interest if:

the manner in which the *distributions payable in respect of the membership interest are calculated, and the conditions applying to the payment of such distributions, indicate that the distributions paid are equivalent to the receipt by the person to whom they are paid of interest or an amount in the nature of or similar to interest; or

the capital invested by the holder of the membership interest will be redeemed or, because of an arrangement between the holder and the entity or an associate of the entity, it is reasonable for the holder to expect that the capital will be redeemed, for an amount that is not less than, or for property (including other membership interests in the entity) the value of which is not less than, the amount paid for the membership interest; or

the membership interest is redeemable by the entity by payment of a lump sum or by the transfer of property, or the membership interest has a preferred right to a repayment of capital on a winding up, where the amount of the lump sum or the value of the property, or the amount of the capital to be repaid, as the case may be, is to be calculated by reference to an implicit interest rate.

(8) A *membership interest in an entity is a distribution access membership interest if, having regard to:

the terms of the issue of the membership interest, including any guarantee of payment of distributions; and

the amounts of the *distributions paid on the membership interest relative to the issue price of the membership interest; and

whether there is any guaranteed rate at which *franked distributions are to be paid on the membership interest; and

the duration of the period within which the membership interest was issued; and

the rights attached to other membership interests in the entity; and

any other relevant matters;

it could be concluded that the membership interest was issued only for the purpose of paying distributions to the holder of the membership interest.

208-35 Accountable partial interests

The purpose of this section is to identify which *partial interests in an entity are relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons.

(2) A *partial interest in an entity is an accountable partial interest if it is not an excluded partial interest.

(3) A *partial interest in an entity is an excluded partial interest if, having regard to:

the purposes for which the interest was granted; and

the nature of the interest; and

any special or limited rights connected with or arising from:

the interest; or

other *membership interests, or partial interests, in the entity held by the holder of the interest; or

membership interests, or partial interests, in the entity held by persons other than the holder of the interest;

including rights that are conferred or exercisable only if the holder of the membership interests or partial interests concerned is, or is not, a prescribed person; and

the extent to which the interest is similar to or differs from beneficial ownership; and

the relationship between the value of the interest and the value of the entity; and

any relationship or connection (whether of a personal or business nature) between holders of partial interests in the entity, and the holders of membership interests in the entity, of which the entity is aware; and

any arrangement in respect of membership interests (including unissued membership interests) in the entity, or partial interests in the entity, of which the entity is aware;

it would be reasonable to conclude that the partial interest is not relevant in determining whether the entity is effectively owned by prescribed persons because holding the membership interest to which the partial interest relates does not involve the holder bearing the risks, or result in the accrual to the holder of the opportunities, of ownership of the entity that ordinarily arise from, or are ordinarily attached to, the holding of *ordinary membership interests in an entity.

In applying subsection (3), the fact that a person is a trustee is to be disregarded.

(5) Without limiting subsection (3), a *partial interest in an entity is also an excluded partial interest if it was granted or otherwise created, or was transferred or acquired, for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) of ensuring that the entity is not effectively owned by prescribed persons.

208-40 Prescribed persons

(1) A company is a prescribed person in relation to another *corporate tax entity if:

the company is a foreign resident; or

were the company to receive a *distribution made by the other corporate tax entity, the distribution would be exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income of the company.

(2) A trustee is a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity if:

all the beneficiaries in the trust are prescribed persons under other provisions of this section; or

were the trustee to receive a *distribution made by the corporate tax entity, the distribution would be exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust estate.

(3) A partnership is a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity if:

all the partners are prescribed persons under other provisions of this section; or

were the partnership to receive a *distribution made by the corporate tax entity, the distribution would be exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income of the partnership.

An individual (other than a trustee) is a prescribed person in relation to a corporate tax entity if:

he or she is a foreign resident; or

were he or she to receive a *distribution made by the corporate tax entity, the distribution would be exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income of the individual.

The Commonwealth, each of the States, the Australian Capital Territory, the Northern Territory and Norfolk Island are prescribed persons in relation to any corporate tax entity.

(6) An *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund cannot be a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity under this section.

208-45 Persons who are taken to be prescribed persons

This section applies to a person that:

(a) is a company, a trustee, or a partnership, that holds *membership interests (whether *accountable membership interests or excluded membership interests), or *partial interests (whether *accountable partial interests or excluded partial interests), in a *corporate tax entity (the relevant entity); and

is not a prescribed person under section 208-40.

(2) A company that holds *membership interests, or *partial interests, in the relevant entity is taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed persons.

(3) A trustee of a trust who holds *membership interests, or *partial interests, in the relevant entity is taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed persons.

(4) A trustee of a trust who holds *membership interests, or *partial interests, in the relevant entity is taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity if:

unless subsection (7) applies, the trust is controlled by one or more persons who are prescribed persons; or

all the beneficiaries who are presently entitled to, or during the relevant income year become presently entitled to, income from the trust are prescribed persons.

In determining whether subsection (3) or (4) applies in respect of a trust that is controlled by a person, have regard to the way in which the person, or any associate of the person, exercises powers in relation to the trust.

(6) A person controls a trust if:

the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, to control the application of the income, or the distribution of the property, of the trust; or

the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one or more entities, to appoint or remove the trustee of the trust; or

the person has the power, either directly, or indirectly through one or more entities, to appoint or remove beneficiaries of the trust; or

the trustee of the trust is accustomed or under an obligation, whether formal or informal, to act according to the directions, instructions or wishes of the person or of an associate of the person.

Paragraph (4)(a) does not apply in relation to a trust if some of the beneficiaries receiving income from the trust are not prescribed persons and the Commissioner considers that it is reasonable to conclude that the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the *membership interests or *partial interests in the relevant entity are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more persons who are not prescribed persons.

(8) A partnership that holds *membership interests, or *partial interests, in the relevant entity is taken to be a prescribed person in relation to the relevant entity if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding the membership interests or partial interests are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more prescribed persons.

If any of the prescribed persons referred to in subsection (2), (3), (4) or (8) is a corporate tax entity, that subsection applies even if the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding any of the *membership interests, or *partial interests, in that entity are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, as the case may be, one or more persons who are not prescribed persons.

(10) An *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund cannot be taken to be a prescribed person in relation to a *corporate tax entity under this section.

208-50 Former exempting companies

(1) Subject to subsection (2), a *corporate tax entity is a former exempting entity if it has, at any time, ceased to be an *exempting entity and is not again an exempting entity.

If an entity that, at any time, becomes effectively owned by prescribed persons ceases to be so effectively owned within 12 months after that time, the entity is not taken, by so ceasing, to become a former exempting entity.

Subdivision 208-B — Franking with an exempting credit

Guide to Subdivision 208-B

208-55 What this Subdivision is about

If a former exempting entity makes a distribution in circumstances where it could be franked, the entity can frank the distribution with an exempting credit.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

208-60 Franking with an exempting credit

Operative provisions

208-60 Franking with an exempting credit

An entity franks a *distribution with an exempting credit if:

the entity is a former exempting entity when the distribution is made; and

the entity is a franking entity that satisfies the *residency requirement when the distribution is made; and

(c) the distribution is a *frankable distribution; and

the entity allocates an exempting credit to the distribution.

Note: The residency requirement for an entity making a distribution is set out in section 202-20.

Subdivision 208-C — Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution

Guide to Subdivision 208-C

208-65 What this Subdivision is about

The amount of the exempting credit on a distribution is that stated in the distribution statement, unless the amount stated exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution. In that case, it is nil.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

208-70 Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution

Operative provisions

208-70 Amount of the exempting credit on a distribution

Subject to subsection (2), the amount of the exempting credit on a *distribution is that stated in the distribution statement for the distribution.

If the sum of the franking credit and the exempting credit stated in the distribution statement for a *distribution exceeds the *maximum franking credit for the distribution, the amount of the exempting credit on the distribution is taken to be nil.

Note: If the franking credit stated in the distribution statement exceeds the maximum franking credit for the distribution, the amount of the franking credit on the distribution is taken to equal that maximum under section 202-65.

Subdivision 208-D — Distribution statements

Guide to Subdivision 208-D

208-75 Guide to Subdivision 208-D

Former exempting entities and exempting entities that make certain distributions must provide additional information in the distribution statement given to the recipient.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

208-80 Additional information to be included by a former exempting entity or exempting entity

Operative provisions

208-80 Additional information to be included by a former exempting entity or exempting entity

A former exempting entity that makes a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit must include in the distribution statement given to the recipient, a statement that there is an exempting credit of a specified amount on the distribution.

An exempting entity that makes a frankable distribution to a *member must include in the distribution statement given to the member, a statement to the effect that members who are Australian residents are not entitled to a tax offset or franking credit as a result of the distribution, except for certain *corporate tax entities, and employees who receive the distribution in connection with certain *employee share schemes.

If, under subsection (1) or (2), a statement must be included in a distribution statement, the distribution statement is taken not to have been given unless the statement is included.

Subdivision 208-E — Distributions to be franked with exempting credits to the same extent

Guide to Subdivision 208-E

208-85 What this Subdivision is about

All frankable distributions made within a franking period must be franked to the same extent with an exempting credit.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

208-90 All frankable distributions made within a franking period must be franked to the same extent with an exempting credit

208-95 Exempting percentage

208-100 Consequences of breaching the rule in section 208-90

Operative provisions

208-90 All frankable distributions made within a franking period must be franked to the same extent with an exempting credit

If an entity *franks a *distribution with an exempting credit, it must frank each other frankable distribution made within the same franking period with an exempting credit worked out at the same exempting percentage.

(2) If an entity is not a *former exempting entity for the whole of a *franking period (the longer period), then, for the purposes of subsection (1), each period within that longer period during which the entity is a former exempting entity is taken to be a franking period.

208-95 Exempting percentage

The exempting percentage for a *frankable distribution is worked out using the formula:

208-100 Consequences of breaching the rule in section 208-90

If an entity *franks a *distribution with an exempting credit in breach of section 208-90:

that distribution is taken not to have been franked with an exempting credit; and

each other frankable distribution made by the entity within the relevant franking period is taken not to have been franked with an exempting credit.

Subdivision 208-F — Exempting accounts and franking accounts of exempting entities and former exempting entities

Guide to Subdivision 208-F

208-105 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision:

• creates an exempting account for each former exempting entity; and

• identifies when exempting credits and debits arise in those accounts and the amount of those credits and debits; and

• identifies when there is an exempting surplus or deficit in the account; and

• identifies when franking credits and debits arise in the franking account of an entity because it is an exempting entity, or former exempting entity.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

208-110 Exempting account

208-115 Exempting credits

208-120 Exempting debits

208-125 Exempting surplus and deficit

208-130 Franking credits arising because of status as exempting entity or former exempting entity

208-135 Relationships that will give rise to a franking credit under item 5 of the table in section 208-130

208-140 Membership of the same effectively wholly-owned group

208-145 Franking debits arising because of status as exempting entity or former exempting entity

208-150 Residency requirement

208-155 Eligible continuing substantial member

208-160 Distributions that are affected by a manipulation of the imputation system

208-165 Amount of the exempting credit or franking credit arising because of a distribution franked with an exempting credit

208-170 Where a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 affects part of the distribution

208-175 When does a distribution franked with an exempting credit flow indirectly to an entity?

208-180 What is an entity’s share of the exempting credit on a distribution?

208-185 Minister may convert exempting surplus to franking credit of former exempting entity previously owned by the Commonwealth

Operative provisions

208-110 Exempting account

Each *former exempting entity has an exempting account.

208-115 Exempting credits

(1) The following table sets out when a credit arises in the *exempting account of a *former exempting entity. A credit in the former exempting entity’s account is called an exempting credit.

(2) The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) divided by 40%.

208-120 Exempting debits

(1) The following table sets out when a debit arises in the *exempting account of the *former exempting entity. A debit in the *former exempting entity's exempting account is called an exempting debit.

(2) The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) divided by 40%.

208-125 Exempting surplus and deficit

(1) An entity’s *exempting account is in surplus at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *exempting credits in the account exceeds the sum of the *exempting debits in the account. The amount of the exempting surplus is the amount of the excess.

(2) An entity’s *exempting account is in deficit at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *exempting debits in the account exceeds the sum of the *exempting credits in the account. The amount of the exempting deficit is the amount of the excess.

208-130 Franking credits arising because of status as exempting entity or former exempting entity

The following table sets out when a credit arises in the franking account of an entity because of its status as an exempting entity or former exempting entity.

Note: Item 9 is designed to reverse out franking debits that arise in relation to a period during which the entity is an exempting entity. The entity will receive an exempting debit instead.

208-135 Relationships that will give rise to a franking credit under item 5 of the table in section 208-130

A relationship between an entity making a *franked distribution and the recipient of the distribution is of a type that gives rise to a franking credit under item 5 or 6 of the table in section 208-130 if either:

both entities are members of the same effectively wholly-owned group; or

the recipient holds more than 5% of the *membership interests in the entity making the distribution (other than finance membership interests or distribution access membership interests within the meaning of section 208-30 or membership interests that do not carry the right to receive distributions) and it would be reasonable to conclude that the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding those membership interests are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, the recipient.

In deciding whether it would be reasonable to make the conclusion mentioned in paragraph (1)(b):

have regard to any arrangement in respect of the *membership interests (including unissued membership interests) in the entity making the distribution (including derivatives held or issued in connection with those membership interests); and

do not have regard to risks involved in the ownership of membership interests in the entity making the distribution that are substantially borne by any person in the person’s capacity as a secured creditor.

208-140 Membership of the same effectively wholly-owned group

(1) Two *corporate tax entities are members of the same effectively wholly-owned group of entities on a particular day if:

throughout that day, not less than 95% of the *accountable membership interests in each of the entities, and not less than 95% of the *accountable partial interests in each of the entities, are held by, or are held indirectly for the benefit of, the same persons; or

paragraph (a) does not apply but it would nevertheless be reasonable to conclude, having regard to the matters mentioned in subsection (2), that, throughout that day, the risks involved in, and the opportunities resulting from, holding accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities are substantially borne by, or substantially accrue to, the same persons.

The matters to which regard is to be had as mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) are:

any special or limited rights attaching to *accountable membership interests, or *accountable partial interests, in each of the entities held by persons other than the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their *associates; and

any special rights attaching only to accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates; and

the respective proportions:

that accountable membership interests in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and other accountable membership interests in the entity concerned, bear to all the accountable membership interests in that entity; and

that accountable partial interests in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and other accountable partial interests in the entity concerned, bear to all the accountable partial interests in that entity; and

the respective proportions that:

the total value of accountable membership interests in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and the total value of other accountable membership interests in the entity concerned, bear to the total value of all the accountable membership interests in that entity; and

the total value of accountable partial interests in each of the entities held by the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates, and the total value of other accountable partial interests in the entity concerned, bear to the total value of all the accountable partial interests in that entity; and

the purposes for which accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities were issued or granted to persons other than the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates; and

any arrangement in respect of accountable membership interests, or accountable partial interests, in each of the entities held by persons other than the persons mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) or their associates (including any derivatives held or issued in connection with those membership interests or interests) of which the entity concerned is aware.

208-145 Franking debits arising because of status as exempting entity or former exempting entity

The following table sets out when a debit arises in the franking account of an entity because of its status as an exempting entity or former exempting entity.

Note 1: Item 3 of the table is designed to reverse out franking credits that arise in relation to a period during which the entity is an exempting entity. The entity will receive an exempting credit instead.

Note 2: Item 5 of the table is designed to reverse out franking credits that arise under the core rules because an entity receives a franked distribution from an exempting entity. Only a recipient who is itself an exempting entity is entitled to a franking credit in these circumstances.

208-150 Residency requirement

The tables in sections 208-115, 208-120, 208-130 and 208-145 are relevant for the purposes of subsection 205-25(1).

Note 1: Subsection 205-25(1) sets out the residency requirement for an income year in which, or in relation to which, an event specified in one of the tables occurs.

Note 2: Section 207-75 sets out the residency requirement that must be satisfied by the entity receiving a distribution when the distribution is made.

208-155 Eligible continuing substantial member

(1) A *member of a *former exempting entity is an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to a *distribution made by the entity if the following provisions apply.

At both the time when the *distribution was made, and the time immediately before the entity ceased to be an exempting entity, the *member was entitled to not less than 5% of:

where the entity is a company:

(i) if the voting shares (as defined in the Corporations Act 2001) in the relevant former exempting entity are not divided into classes—those voting shares; or

if the voting shares (as so defined) in the relevant former exempting entity are divided into 2 or more classes—the shares in one of those classes; and

where the entity is a public trading trust—the units in the trust; and

where the entity is a corporate limited partnership—the income of the partnership.

At both the time when the *distribution was made, and the time immediately before the entity ceased to be an exempting entity, the *member was a person referred to in one or more of the following paragraphs:

a person who is a foreign resident;

a life insurance company;

an exempting entity;

a former exempting entity;

a trustee of a trust in which an interest was held by a person referred to in any of paragraphs (a) to (d);

a partnership in which an interest was held by a person referred to in any of paragraphs (a) to (d).

If the assumptions set out in subsection (5) are made:

if the *member was a person referred to in any of paragraphs (3)(a) to (d)—the member; or

if the member was a trustee of a trust or a partnership, being a trust or partnership in which a person referred to in any of those paragraphs held an interest—the holder of the interest;

would (if a foreign resident) be exempt from withholding tax on the distribution or (if an Australian resident) be entitled to a franking credit or a tax offset in respect of the distribution.

The assumptions referred to in subsection (4) are that:

the relevant former exempting entity was an exempting entity at the time it made the *distribution; and

the distribution was a *franked distribution made to the member; and

if the *member was a former exempting entity—the member was an exempting entity; and

if the member was a trustee of a trust or partnership in which a former exempting entity had an interest—the former exempting entity was an exempting entity.

A person is taken to hold an interest in a trust, for the purposes of paragraph (3)(e), if:

the person is a beneficiary under the trust; or

the person *derives, or will derive, income indirectly, through interposed trusts or partnerships, from *distributions received by the trustee.

A person is taken to hold an interest in a partnership, for the purposes of paragraph (3)(f), if:

the person is a partner in the partnership; or

the person *derives, or will derive, income indirectly, through interposed trusts or partnerships, from *distributions received by the partnership.

208-160 Distributions that are affected by a manipulation of the imputation system

For the purposes of item 2 of the table in section 208-115 and items 2 and 5 of the table in section 208-130, a *distribution to an entity is affected by a manipulation of the imputation system if:

the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) that no imputation benefit is to arise for the entity in respect of the distribution; or

(b) the Commissioner has made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 that no franking credit benefit (within the meaning of that section) is to arise in respect of the distribution to the entity; or

the distribution is part of a dividend stripping operation.

208-165 Amount of the exempting credit or franking credit arising because of a distribution franked with an exempting credit

Use the following formula to work out:

the amount of an exempting credit arising under item 2 of the table in section 208-115 because a former exempting entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit; or

the amount of a franking credit arising under item 2 of the table in section 208-130 because an exempting entity receives a distribution franked with an exempting credit;

Use the following formula to work out the amount of a franking credit arising under item 5 of the table in section 208-130 because an exempting entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit:

208-170 Where a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 affects part of the distribution

Use the following formula to work out:

the amount of an exempting credit arising under item 3 of the table in section 208-115 because a former exempting entity receives a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit; or

the amount of a franking credit arising under item 3 of the table in section 208-130 because an exempting entity receives a distribution franked with an exempting credit;

Use the following formula to work out the amount of a franking credit arising under item 6 of the table in section 208-130 because an exempting entity receives *a distribution *franked with an exempting credit:

208-175 When does a distribution franked with an exempting credit flow indirectly to an entity?

A *distribution *franked with an exempting credit is taken to flow indirectly to an entity if, had it been a *franked distribution, it would have been taken to have flowed indirectly to the entity under section 207-50.

208-180 What is an entity’s share of the exempting credit on a distribution?

To work out an entity’s share of the *exempting credit on a *distribution *franked with that credit, use sections 207-55 and 207-57 to work out what the entity’s share of the credit would be it if were a *franking credit on a *franked distribution. The entity’s share of the exempting credit is equal to that amount.

208-185 Minister may convert exempting surplus to franking credit of former exempting entity previously owned by the Commonwealth

The Minister may make a determination or determinations under this section if:

(a) at a particular time, a *corporate tax entity is an *exempting entity; and

at that time all of the *membership interests in the entity are owned by the Commonwealth; and

the Commonwealth has offered for sale or sold, or proposes to offer for sale, some or all of the membership interests; and

the Minister is satisfied, having regard to the matters mentioned in subsection (2), that it is desirable to make a determination or determinations under this section in relation to the entity.

The matters to which the Minister must have regard under paragraph (1)(d) are:

whether the making of the determination or determinations is necessary to enable the entity to make *distributions *franked at a franking percentage of 100% after the sale; and

the extent to which the success of the sale or proposed sale depended or will depend upon the ability of the entity to make *franked distributions; and

the extent to which the reduction in receipts of income tax resulting from the making of the determination or determinations would be offset by the receipt of increased proceeds from the sale; and

any other matters that the Minister thinks relevant.

The following provisions of this section apply after the exempting entity becomes a former exempting entity.

If the former exempting entity would, apart from this section, have an exempting surplus at the end of an income year, the Minister may, in writing, determine that:

an exempting debit of the entity (not exceeding the exempting surplus) specified in the determination is taken to have arisen immediately before the end of that income year; and

a franking credit of the entity equal to the amount of the exempting debit is taken to have arisen immediately before the end of that income year.

A determination under this section may be expressed to be subject to compliance by the former exempting entity with such conditions as are specified in the determination.

If a condition specified in a determination is not complied with, the Minister may revoke the determination and, if the Minister thinks it appropriate, make a further determination under subsection (4).

A determination, unless it is revoked, has effect according to its terms.

Subdivision 208-G — Tax effects of distributions by exempting entities

Guide to Subdivision 208-G

208-190 What this Subdivision is about

Generally, a franked distribution from an exempting entity will only generate a tax effect for the recipient under Division 207 if the recipient is also an exempting entity.

A concession is made to employees of the entity who receive a franked distribution because they hold shares acquired under an eligible employee share scheme.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

208-195 Division 207 does not generally apply

208-200 Distributions to exempting entities

208-205 Distributions to employees acquiring shares under eligible employee share schemes

208-215 Eligible employee share schemes

Operative provisions

208-195 Division 207 does not generally apply

Division 207 does not apply to a *distribution by an exempting entity, unless expressly applied under this Subdivision.

208-200 Distributions to exempting entities

Division 207 applies to a *franked distribution made by an exempting entity to another exempting entity if the distribution gives rise to a franking credit for the other exempting entity under item 5 or 6 of the table in section 208-130.

Division 207 applies to a *franked distribution that is made by an exempting entity and *flows indirectly to another exempting entity if the distribution gives rise to a franking credit for that other entity under item 7 of the table in section 208-130.

208-205 Distributions to employees acquiring shares under eligible employee share schemes

Division 207 also applies to a *franked distribution made by an exempting entity if:

the distribution is made to an individual who, at the time the distribution is made, is an employee of:

the exempting entity; or

a *subsidiary of the exempting entity; and

the employee acquired a beneficial interest in the *share on which the distribution is made:

under an employee share scheme; and

in circumstances specified as relevant in section 208-215; and

the employee does not hold that beneficial interest as a trustee.

208-215 Eligible employee share schemes

An individual acquires a beneficial interest in a *share in a company under an employee share scheme in circumstances that are relevant for the purposes of paragraphs 208-205(b) and 208-235(b) if:

all the *ESS interests available for acquisition under the scheme relate to:

ordinary shares; or

preference shares to which are attached substantially the same rights as are attached to ordinary shares; and

immediately after the individual acquires the interest:

he or she does not hold a beneficial interest in more than 10% of the shares in the company; and

he or she is not in a position to control, or to control the casting of, more than 10% of the maximum number of votes that might be cast at a general meeting of the company; and

the share is not a non-equity share.

An individual also acquires a beneficial interest in a *share in a company under an employee share scheme in circumstances that are relevant for the purposes of paragraphs 208-205(b) and 208-235(b) if:

the share is part of a stapled security; and

Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the beneficial interest in the stapled security.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), you are taken to:

hold a beneficial interest in any *shares in the company that you can acquire under an *ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right to acquire a beneficial interest in such shares; and

be in a position to cast votes as a result of holding that interest in those shares.

Subdivision 208-H — Tax effect of a distribution franked with an exempting credit

Guide to Subdivision 208-H

208-220 What this Subdivision is about

Generally, a distribution franked with an exempting credit will only generate a tax effect for the recipient under Division 207 if a tax effect would have been generated for the recipient had the recipient received a franked distribution when the distributing entity was an exempting entity.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

208-225 Division 207 does not generally apply

208-230 Distributions to exempting entities and former exempting entities

208-235 Distributions to employees acquiring shares under eligible employee share schemes

208-240 Distributions to certain individuals

Operative provisions

208-225 Division 207 does not generally apply

Division 207 does not apply to a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit, unless the Division is expressly applied to the distribution under this Subdivision.

208-230 Distributions to exempting entities and former exempting entities

Division 207 applies to a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit by a former exempting entity as if it were a *franked distribution if:

the recipient of the distribution is a former exempting entity and the distribution gives rise to an exempting credit for the recipient; or

the recipient of the distribution is an exempting entity and the distribution gives rise to a franking credit for the recipient; or

the distribution *flows indirectly to a former exempting entity and gives rise to an exempting credit for that entity; or

the distribution flows indirectly to an exempting entity and gives rise to a franking credit for that entity.

208-235 Distributions to employees acquiring shares under eligible employee share schemes

Division 207 also applies to a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit made by a former exempting entity as if it were a *franked distribution if:

the distribution is made to an individual who, at the time the distribution is made, is an employee of:

the former exempting entity; or

a *subsidiary of the former exempting entity; and

the employee acquired a beneficial interest in the *share on which the distribution is made:

under an employee share scheme; and

in circumstances specified as relevant in section 208-215; and

the employee does not hold that beneficial interest as a trustee.

208-240 Distributions to certain individuals

Division 207 also applies to a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit made by a former exempting entity as if it were a *franked distribution if:

a corporate tax entity other than a former exempting entity became an exempting entity; and

immediately before the entity became an exempting entity all the accountable membership interests and accountable partial interests were beneficially owned (whether directly or indirectly) by individuals who were Australian residents; and

the entity became an exempting entity because some or all of the individuals ceased to be Australian residents; and

the entity becomes a former exempting entity because all of the individuals are or have become Australian residents; and

an amount attributable to a distribution *franked with an exempting credit made by the entity is included in the assessable income of such an individual; and

all the accountable membership interests or accountable partial interests in the entity were, throughout the period beginning when the entity became an exempting entity and ending when the amount was received by the individual mentioned in paragraph (e), beneficially owned (directly or indirectly) by that individual; and

the individual is an eligible continuing substantial member in relation to the distribution.

Division 210 — Venture capital franking

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 210

210-A Franking a distribution with a venture capital credit

210-B Participating PDFs

210-C Distributions that are frankable with a venture capital credit

210-D Amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution

210-E Distribution statements

210-F Rules affecting the allocation of venture capital credits

210-G Venture capital sub-account

210-H Effect of receiving a distribution franked with a venture capital credit

Guide to Division 210

Table of sections

210-1 Purpose of venture capital franking

210-5 How is this achieved?

210-10 What is a venture capital credit?

210-15 What does the PDF have to do to distribute the credits?

210-20 Limits on venture capital franking

210-1 Purpose of venture capital franking

The purpose of these rules is to encourage venture capital investment by superannuation funds and other entities that deal with superannuation.

210-5 How is this achieved?

This is done by giving tax benefits to those entities when they invest in PDFs, which are the vehicles for venture capital investment. If the PDF makes a distribution franked with a venture capital credit, the relevant venture capital investor receives a certain part of a distribution from the PDF as exempt income and, in addition, is entitled to a tax offset equal to the venture capital credit.

210-10 What is a venture capital credit?

There is a venture capital franking sub-account in the franking account of each PDF.

Venture capital credits arise in the sub-account if the PDF pays income tax that is reasonably attributable to capital gains from venture capital investments.

210-15 What does the PDF have to do to distribute the credits?

Only a participating PDF can distribute venture capital credits. A PDF elects to participate by keeping a record of its venture capital sub-account.

210-20 Limits on venture capital franking

The venture capital credit on a distribution cannot exceed the franking credit on the distribution. It is, in this sense, a species of franking credit.

A PDF can only distribute venture capital credits if it does it so that all members of the PDF receive venture capital credits in proportion to their holdings.

If a PDF has a venture capital surplus when it makes a distribution, it must frank the distribution with venture capital credits.

There are measures to ensure that a PDF does not maintain a venture capital deficit over a prolonged period.

Subdivision 210-A — Franking a distribution with a venture capital credit

Guide to Subdivision 210-A

210-25 What this Subdivision is about

A PDF can only frank a distribution with a venture capital credit if certain conditions are met. These conditions are set out in this Subdivision.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

210-30 Franking a distribution with a venture capital credit

Operative provisions

210-30 Franking a distribution with a venture capital credit

An entity franks a *distribution with a venture capital credit if:

the entity is a participating PDF at the time the distribution is made; and

the distribution is frankable with a venture capital credit; and

the entity allocates a venture capital credit to the distribution.

Subdivision 210-B — Participating PDFs

Guide to Subdivision 210-B

210-35 What this Subdivision is about

A PDF may participate if it elects to keep a record of its venture capital sub-account.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

210-40 What is a participating PDF

Operative provisions

210-40 What is a participating PDF

A *PDF is a participating PDF at a particular time if it keeps a record of its *venture capital sub-account at that time.

Subdivision 210-C — Distributions that are frankable with a venture capital credit

Guide to Subdivision 210-C

210-45 What this Subdivision is about

A distribution can only be franked with a venture capital credit if all members of the PDF receive distributions in proportion to their holdings.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

210-50 Which distributions can be franked with a venture capital credit?

Operative provisions

210-50 Which distributions can be franked with a venture capital credit?

A *distribution by a *participating PDF is frankable with a venture capital credit if:

the distribution is a *franked distribution; and

the distribution is made under a resolution under which:

distributions are made to all members of the PDF; and

the amount of the distribution per *membership interest is the same for each of those distributions.

Subdivision 210-D — Amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution

Guide to Subdivision 210-D

210-55 What this Subdivision is about

The amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution is that stated in the distribution statement, unless the amount exceeds the franking credit on the distribution.

In that case, the amount of the venture capital credit on the distribution is taken to be the same as the franking credit.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

210-60 Amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution

Operative provisions

210-60 Amount of the venture capital credit on a distribution

The amount of the venture capital credit on a *distribution is that stated in the distribution statement for the distribution, unless that amount exceeds the franking credit on the distribution.

If the amount of the venture capital credit stated in the distribution statement for a *distribution exceeds the franking credit on the distribution, the amount of the venture capital credit is taken to be the same as the amount of the franking credit, and not the amount stated in the distribution statement.

Subdivision 210-E — Distribution statements

Guide to Subdivision 210-E

210-65 What this Subdivision is about

A participating PDF that makes a distribution franked with a venture capital credit must provide additional information in the distribution statement given to the recipient.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

210-70 Additional information to be included when a distribution is franked with a venture capital credit

Operative provisions

210-70 Additional information to be included when a distribution is franked with a venture capital credit

A participating PDF that makes a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit must include in the distribution statement given to the recipient:

a statement that there is a venture capital credit of a specified amount on the distribution; and

a statement to the effect that the venture capital credit is only relevant for a taxpayer who is:

the trustee of an entity that is a *complying superannuation entity in relation to the income year in which the distribution is made and is not a self managed superannuation fund; or

(iv) a *life insurance company.

If, under subsection (1), a statement must be included in a distribution statement, the distribution statement is taken not to have been given unless the statement is included.

Subdivision 210-F — Rules affecting the allocation of venture capital credits

Guide to Subdivision 210-F

210-75 What this Subdivision is about

If a PDF has a venture capital surplus when it makes a distribution frankable with venture capital credits, it must frank the distribution with venture capital credits.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

210-80 Draining the venture capital surplus when a distribution frankable with venture capital credits is made

210-81 Distributions to be franked with venture capital credits to the same extent

210-82 Consequences of breaching the rule in section 210-81

Operative provisions

210-80 Draining the venture capital surplus when a distribution frankable with venture capital credits is made

If a participating PDF would otherwise have a venture capital surplus at the time a *distribution that is frankable with a venture capital credit is made, the PDF must either:

allocate a venture capital credit to the distribution that is equal to the franking credit on the distribution; or

allocate a venture capital credit to the distribution that either alone or when added to venture capital credits allocated to other distributions made under the resolution of the PDF under which the distribution in question is made, reduces the surplus to nil, or creates a venture capital deficit.

A venture capital debit arises for a participating PDF when a *distribution is made if the PDF does not allocate a venture capital credit in accordance with subsection (1). The amount of the debit is:

where:

actual franked amount is the amount of the *venture capital credit that is allocated to the *distribution by the PDF (this may be nil).

subsection (1) franked amount is the amount of the *venture capital credit that would have been allocated to the *distribution if the PDF had made the smallest allocation needed to satisfy subsection (1).

210-81 Distributions to be franked with venture capital credits to the same extent

If a *PDF *franks a *distribution with a venture capital credit, it must frank each other distribution made under the same resolution with a venture capital credit worked out using the same venture capital percentage.

(2) The venture capital percentage for a *distribution is worked out using the formula:

210-82 Consequences of breaching the rule in section 210-81

If a *PDF *franks a *distribution with a venture capital credit in breach of section 210-81:

the distribution is taken not to have been franked with a venture capital credit; and

each other distribution made under the same resolution is taken not to have been franked with a venture capital credit.

Subdivision 210-G — Venture capital sub-account

Guide to Subdivision 210-G

210-85 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision:

• creates a venture capital sub-account for each PDF; and

• identifies when venture capital credits and debits arise in the sub-account and the amount of those credits and debits; and

• identifies when there is a venture capital surplus or deficit in the sub-account; and

• creates a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax if the account is in deficit at certain times.

Table of sections

210-90 The venture capital sub-account

210-95 Venture capital deficit tax

Operative provisions

210-100 Venture capital sub-account

210-105 Venture capital credits

210-110 Determining the extent to which a franking credit is reasonably attributable to a particular payment of tax

210-115 Participating PDF may elect to have venture capital credits arise on its assessment day

210-120 Venture capital debits

210-125 Venture capital debit where CGT limit is exceeded

210-130 Venture capital surplus and deficit

210-135 Venture capital deficit tax

210-140 Effect of a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax on franking deficit tax

210-145 Effect of a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax on the franking account

210-150 Deferring venture capital deficit

210-90 The venture capital sub-account

Each PDF has a venture capital sub-account in its franking account. The sub-account exists even if the PDF does not elect to become a participating PDF by keeping a record of it.

To the extent that income tax is reasonably attributable to capital gains from venture capital investments, it generates a venture capital credit in the sub-account. There are other circumstances in which a venture capital credit arises.

If a PDF receives a refund of that tax, a venture capital debit will arise for the PDF. There are other circumstances in which a venture capital debit will arise, such as on the payment of a distribution franked with a venture capital credit.

210-95 Venture capital deficit tax

Venture capital deficit tax is payable if a PDF’s venture capital sub-account is in deficit at the end of the PDF’s income year, or immediately before it ceases to be a PDF.

A PDF’s venture capital sub-account may be in deficit, even if its franking account is not. This can happen because only income tax on income of a particular kind (capital gains on venture capital investments) gives rise to venture capital credits. This means that when a PDF anticipates a venture capital credit, it is not only anticipating that income tax will be paid, but that income tax on income of that kind will be paid. Although income tax may, in fact, later be paid, it will not necessarily be income of the kind that would give rise to a venture capital credit. This results in franking credits arising even while the venture capital sub-account remains in deficit.

The discrepancy between the franking account balance and the venture capital sub-account balance can also arise because venture capital credits do not necessarily arise at the same time as the relevant franking credits and debits (see item 1 of the table in section 210-105 and item 2 of the table in section 210-120).

Operative provisions

210-100 Venture capital sub-account

Each *PDF has a venture capital sub-account within its *franking account.

Note: The balance in the venture capital sub-account on 1 July 2002 will be either nil or, if the entity has a venture capital surplus or deficit immediately before 1 July 2002 under the imputation scheme existing at that time, an amount calculated under the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

210-105 Venture capital credits

The table sets out when a credit arises in the *venture capital sub-account of a *PDF. A credit in a PDF’s venture capital sub-account is called a venture capital credit.

210-110 Determining the extent to which a franking credit is reasonably attributable to a particular payment of tax

In determining the extent to which a franking credit is reasonably attributable to a CGT event in relation to a qualifying SME investment of the *PDF, have regard to:

the extent to which the credit can reasonably be attributed to the *payment of a PAYG instalment or the payment of income tax by the PDF in relation to its *section 124ZZB SME assessable income for an income year; and

the extent to which the section 124ZZB SME assessable income can reasonably be attributed to the CGT event.

210-115 Participating PDF may elect to have venture capital credits arise on its assessment day

Before a *PDF’s assessment day for an income year, the PDF may elect to have the *venture capital credits that arise because of the *payment of PAYG instalments and income tax during that income year arise on the assessment day.

(2) The *PDF’s assessment day for an income year is the earlier of:

the day on which the PDF furnishes its income tax return for the income year; or

(b) the day on which the Commissioner makes an assessment of the amount of the PDF’s taxable income for that year under section 166 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

210-120 Venture capital debits

The table sets out when a debit arises in the *venture capital sub-account of a *PDF. A debit in a PDF’s venture capital sub-account is called a venture capital debit.

210-125 Venture capital debit where CGT limit is exceeded

A venture capital debit arises for a *PDF where the PDF’s net venture capital credits for the income year exceed whichever is the lesser of:

the PDF’s CGT limit for that income year; and

the tax paid by the PDF on its SME income component for that income year.

Net venture capital credits

(2) The *PDF’s net venture capital credits for the income year is:

where:

venture capital credits is the total *venture capital credits of the *PDF that relate to tax in relation to taxable income of that income year.

venture capital debits is the total *venture capital debits of the *PDF that relate to tax in relation to taxable income of that income year.

CGT limit

(3) The *PDF’s CGT limit for the income year is worked out using the formula:

where:

ordinary capital gains from all SME CGT events means the total of the *ordinary capital gains for the income year for *CGT events in relation to *SME investments of the *PDF.

ordinary capital gains from venture capital CGT events means the total of *ordinary capital gains for the income year for *CGT events in relation to shares in companies that are *qualifying SME investments.

SME tax rate is the tax rate applicable to the *SME income component of the *PDF for the income year.

Tax paid by the PDF on its SME income component

(4) The tax paid by the PDF on its SME income component for the income year is the tax paid by the *PDF on its *SME income component after allowing *tax offsets referred to in section 4-10.

210-130 Venture capital surplus and deficit

(1) A *PDF’s *venture capital sub-account is in surplus at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *venture capital credits in the account exceeds the sum of the *venture capital debits in the account. The amount of the venture capital surplus is the amount of the excess.

(2) A *PDF’s *venture capital sub-account is in deficit at a particular time if, at that time, the sum of the *venture capital debits in the account exceeds the sum of the *venture capital credits in the account. The amount of the venture capital deficit is the amount of the excess.

A *PDF’s venture capital sub-account may be in *deficit even though its franking account as a whole is in *surplus. Similarly, a PDF’s venture capital sub-account may be in surplus even though its franking account as a whole is in deficit.

210-135 Venture capital deficit tax

While recognising that an entity may anticipate *venture capital credits when *franking *distributions, the object of this section is to prevent those credits from being anticipated indefinitely by requiring the entity to reconcile its venture capital sub-account at certain times and levying tax if the account is in *deficit.

(2) An entity is liable to pay *venture capital deficit tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Venture Capital Deficit Tax) Act 2003 if its *venture capital sub-account is in *deficit at the end of an income year.

(3) An entity is liable to pay *venture capital deficit tax imposed by the New Business Tax System (Venture Capital Deficit Tax) Act 2003 if:

it ceases to be a *PDF; and

immediately before it ceases to be a PDF, its venture capital sub-account is in *deficit.

210-140 Effect of a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax on franking deficit tax

If an entity is liable to pay venture capital deficit tax under subsection 210-135(2) because its venture capital sub-account is in *deficit at the end of an income year, the amount (if any) of franking deficit tax that the entity would otherwise be liable to pay under subsection 205-45(2) because its franking account is in *deficit at that time is reduced by the amount of the liability for venture capital deficit tax.

If an entity is liable to pay venture capital deficit tax under subsection 210-135(3) because it ceases to be a *PDF during an income year, the amount (if any) of franking deficit tax that the entity would otherwise be liable to pay under subsection 205-45(3) because it ceases to be a franking entity at that time is reduced by the amount of the liability for venture capital deficit tax.

210-145 Effect of a liability to pay venture capital deficit tax on the franking account

(1) If an entity incurs a liability to pay *venture capital deficit tax, a *franking credit arises for the entity immediately after the liability arises (the relevant day).

The amount of the franking credit is equal to:

if no liability to pay franking deficit tax arises on the relevant day—the amount of the venture capital deficit tax; or

if a liability to pay franking deficit tax also arises on the relevant day—the amount of the venture capital deficit tax reduced by the amount of the franking deficit tax.

210-150 Deferring venture capital deficit

The object of this section is to ensure that an entity does not avoid venture capital deficit tax by deferring the time at which a venture capital debit occurs.

An entity is taken to have *received a refund of income tax for an income year immediately before the end of that year for the purposes of subsection 210-135(2) if:

the refund is paid within 3 months after the end of that year; and

the entity’s venture capital sub-account would have been in *deficit, or in deficit to a greater extent, at the end of the previous income year if the refund had been received in the previous income year.

If an entity ceases to be a *PDF during an income year, it is taken to have *received a refund of income tax immediately before it ceased to be a PDF for the purposes of subsection 210-135(3) if:

the refund is attributable to a period in the year during which the entity was a PDF; and

the refund is paid within 3 months after the entity ceases to be a PDF; and

the venture capital sub-account of the entity would have been in *deficit, or in deficit to a greater extent, immediately before it ceased to be a PDF if the refund had been received before it ceased to be a PDF.

Subdivision 210-H — Effect of receiving a distribution franked with a venture capital credit

Guide to Subdivision 210-H

210-155 What this Subdivision is about

A superannuation fund or other entity that deals with superannuation that receives a distribution franked with a venture capital credit is entitled to a tax offset equal to the credit.

Table of sections

210-160 The significance of a venture capital credit

210-165 Recipients for whom the venture capital credit is not significant

Operative provisions

210-170 Tax offset for certain recipients of distributions franked with venture capital credits

210-175 Amount of the tax offset

210-180 Application of Division 207 where the recipient is entitled to a tax offset under section 210-170

210-160 The significance of a venture capital credit

The venture capital credit on a distribution is only significant in the hands of a relevant venture capital investor (basically a superannuation fund or other entity that deals with superannuation).

(2) That investor receives a tax offset. In most cases, this will be equal to the venture capital credit.

(3) Under section 124ZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, that part of the distribution that is franked with a venture capital credit is also treated as exempt income in the hands of the entity.

210-165 Recipients for whom the venture capital credit is not significant

For other entities, the fact that all or part of the franking credit on a distribution is also a venture capital credit can be ignored.

(2) The franking credit will either generate a gross-up of the entity’s assessable income and a corresponding tax offset under Division 207 or, if the right to make an election under section 124ZM of the Income Tax Assessment 1936 is exercised, the franked part of the distribution will be treated as exempt income.

(3) The unfranked part of the distribution is treated as exempt income under section 124ZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Operative provisions

210-170 Tax offset for certain recipients of distributions franked with venture capital credits

The recipient of a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit is entitled to a tax offset for the income year in which the distribution is made if:

the recipient is a relevant venture capital investor; and

the recipient is not:

a partnership; or

a trustee (other than the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity, a non-complying superannuation fund or a non-complying approved deposit fund); and

the recipient satisfies the *residency requirement for an entity receiving a distribution; and

(d) the distribution is not *exempt income of the recipient (ignoring section 124ZM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

(e) the recipient is a qualified person in relation to the distribution for the purposes of Division 1A of former Part IIIAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the distribution is not part of a dividend stripping operation; and

the Commissioner has not made a determination under paragraph 204-30(3)(c) that no imputation benefit is to arise for the receiving entity in respect of the distribution; and

the Commissioner has not made a determination under paragraph 177EA(5)(b) that no imputation benefit is to arise in respect of the distribution to the recipient.

Relevant venture capital investors

(2) The following entities are relevant venture capital investors:

the trustee of an entity that is a *complying superannuation entity in relation to the income year in which the *distribution is made and is not a self managed superannuation fund;

(d) a *life insurance company.

210-175 Amount of the tax offset

Where the recipient is not a life insurance company

If the entity receiving the *distribution is not a life insurance company, the tax offset is equal to the venture capital credit on the distribution.

Where the recipient is a life insurance company

If the entity receiving the *distribution is a life insurance company, the tax offset is worked out using the formula:

where:

complying superannuation class of taxable income means the *complying superannuation class of taxable income of the company for the income year in which the *distribution is made.

tax offset to which the entity would otherwise be entitled is the *tax offset that the company would be entitled to under subsection (1) if the entity were not a life insurance company.

total income is the company’s assessable income for the income year.

210-180 Application of Division 207 where the recipient is entitled to a tax offset under section 210-170

If the recipient of a *distribution *franked with a venture capital credit is entitled to a tax offset under section 210-170, Division 207 does not apply to that *part of the distribution that is venture capital franked.

Division 214 — Administering the imputation system

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 214

214-A Franking returns

214-B Franking assessments

214-C Amending franking assessments

214-D Collection and recovery

214-E Records

Guide to Division 214

Table of sections

214-1 Purpose of the system

214-5 Key features

214-1 Purpose of the system

These provisions:

allow the Commissioner to gather sufficient information to determine whether tax is payable by a corporate tax entity under the imputation system; and

provide for the Commissioner to assess the amount of tax that is payable; and

specify when the tax is payable; and

establish systems to support the assessment and collection of the tax.

214-5 Key features

Initial information about a corporate tax entity’s franking activities is provided by means of a return, called a franking return, given by the entity to the Commissioner.

The Commissioner is able to make a legislative instrument requiring corporate tax entities to give a franking return for an income year.

The Commissioner is also able to require a particular corporate tax entity to give a franking return for one or more income years. The Commissioner might do this, for example, if the Commissioner wishes to audit the corporate tax entity’s franking activities over a number of years.

The Commissioner may assess whether tax is payable under the imputation system and the amount of that tax.

In most cases, this is done by treating the first franking return of a corporate tax entity for an income year as an assessment by the Commissioner. To this extent, there is self-assessment.

(6) An assessment by the Commissioner is conclusive evidence of a corporate tax entity’s tax liabilities under the imputation system, except for the purposes of objection, review and appeal processes under Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (see section 350-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953).

Assessments can be amended by the Commissioner within certain time limits.

Subdivision 214-A — Franking returns

Guide to Subdivision 214-A

214-10 What this Subdivision is about

A franking return for an income year provides the Commissioner with information about a corporate tax entity’s franking activities during that year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

214-15 Requirement to give franking return—general

214-20 Notice to a specific corporate tax entity

214-25 Content and form of a franking return

214-30 Franking account balance

214-35 Venture capital sub-account balance

214-40 Meaning of franking tax

214-45 Effect of a refund on franking returns

Operative provisions

214-15 Requirement to give franking return—general

The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, require each corporate tax entity to which the instrument applies to give the Commissioner a franking return for a specified income year.

An entity to which the instrument applies must comply with the requirement within the time specified in the instrument.

Note: The Commissioner may defer the time for giving the return: see section 388-55 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

214-20 Notice to a specific corporate tax entity

The Commissioner may give a corporate tax entity a written notice requiring the entity to give the Commissioner a franking return for an income year specified in the notice.

The entity must comply with the requirement within the time specified in the notice, or within any further time allowed by the Commissioner.

The entity must comply with the requirement regardless of whether the entity has given, or has been required to give, the Commissioner a franking return.

214-25 Content and form of a franking return

A corporate tax entity must include the following information in its franking return for an income year:

if the entity is a franking entity at the end of the income year—its franking account balance at the end of the income year; and

if the entity ceased to be a franking entity during the income year—its franking account balance immediately before it ceased to be a franking entity; and

if the entity is a *PDF at the end of the income year—its venture capital sub-account balance at the end of the income year; and

if the entity ceased to be a PDF during the income year—its venture capital sub-account balance immediately before it ceased to be a PDF; and

the amounts (if any) of franking tax which the entity is liable to pay because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during the income year; and

any other information required by the Commissioner for the purposes of administering this Part.

The return must be in the approved form.

214-30 Franking account balance

A *corporate tax entity’s franking account balance at a particular time is:

if the entity has a franking surplus or a franking deficit at that time—the amount of the surplus or deficit; or

if the entity does not have a franking surplus or a franking deficit at that time—nil.

214-35 Venture capital sub-account balance

A *PDF’s venture capital sub-account balance at a particular time is:

if the PDF has a venture capital surplus or a venture capital deficit at that time—the amount of the surplus or deficit; or

if the entity does not have a venture capital surplus or a venture capital deficit at that time—nil.

214-40 Meaning of franking tax

Each of the following is a franking tax:

franking deficit tax;

over-franking tax;

venture capital deficit tax.

214-45 Effect of a refund on franking returns

If no franking return is outstanding

If:

a corporate tax entity receives a refund of income tax or receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and

the receipt of the refund gives rise to a liability, or an increased liability, to pay franking deficit tax because of the operation of subsection 205-50(2) or (3); and

when the refund is received, the entity does not have a franking return that is *outstanding for the income year in which the liability arose;

the entity must give the Commissioner a franking return for the income year within 14 days after the refund is received.

Refund received within 14 days before an outstanding franking return is due

If:

an entity receives a refund of income tax or receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and

the receipt of the refund gives rise to a liability, or an increased liability, to pay franking deficit tax because of the operation of subsection 205-50(2) or (3); and

when the refund is received, the entity has a franking return that is *outstanding for the income year in which the liability arose; and

the entity receives the refund within the period of 14 days ending on the day by which the outstanding return must be given to the Commissioner;

the entity may, instead of accounting for the liability, or increased liability, in the outstanding return, account for it in a further return given to the Commissioner within 14 days after the refund is received.

Meaning of outstanding

(3) A *franking return for an income year is outstanding at a particular time if each of the following is true at that time:

the corporate tax entity has been required to give a franking return for the income year;

the time within which the franking return must be given has not yet passed;

the franking return has not yet been given.

Subdivision 214-B — Franking assessments

Guide to Subdivision 214-B

214-55 What this Subdivision is about

The Commissioner may make an assessment of a corporate tax entity’s liability to pay franking tax, and the franking account balance and the venture capital sub-account balance on which that liability is based. An entity’s first franking return for an income year is treated as an assessment by the Commissioner. To this extent, there is self-assessment.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

214-60 Commissioner may make a franking assessment

214-65 Commissioner taken to have made a franking assessment on first return

214-70 Part-year assessment

214-75 Validity of assessment

214-80 Objections

Operative provisions

214-60 Commissioner may make a franking assessment

The Commissioner may make an assessment of:

if a corporate tax entity is a franking entity at the end of the income year—its franking account balance at the end of the income year; and

if a corporate tax entity ceased to be a franking entity during the income year—its franking account balance immediately before it ceased to be a franking entity; and

if a corporate tax entity is a *PDF at the end of the income year—its venture capital sub-account balance at the end of the income year; and

if a corporate tax entity ceased to be a PDF during the income year—its venture capital sub-account balance immediately before it ceased to be a PDF; and

the amounts (if any) of franking tax which the entity is liable to pay because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during the income year.

This is a franking assessment for the entity for the income year.

However, the Commissioner must not make an assessment under subsection (1) for an entity for an income year if:

the entity is not required under Subdivision 214-A to give the Commissioner a franking return for the income year; and

(b) the entity is not required under Division 214 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 to give the Commissioner a franking return for the balancing period ending within the income year; and

the entity was required to lodge an income tax return for the income year by a particular time; and

the entity has lodged that income tax return; and

3 years have passed since the later of the following:

the time mentioned in paragraph (c);

the time when the entity lodged that income tax return.

The Commissioner must give the entity notice of the assessment as soon as practicable after making the assessment.

214-65 Commissioner taken to have made a franking assessment on first return

If:

(a) a *corporate tax entity gives the Commissioner a *franking return for an income year on a particular day (the return day); and

the return is the first franking return given by the entity for the year; and

the Commissioner has not already made a franking assessment for the entity for the year;

the Commissioner is taken to have made a franking assessment for the entity for the year on the return day, and to have assessed:

the entity’s franking account balance at a particular time as that stated in the return as the balance at that time; and

the entity’s venture capital sub-account balance (if any) at a particular time as that stated in the return as the balance at that time; and

the amounts (if any) of franking tax payable by the entity because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during that income year as those stated in the return.

The return is taken to be notice of the assessment signed by the Commissioner and given to the entity on the return day.

214-70 Part-year assessment

The Commissioner may, at any time during an income year, make a franking assessment for a corporate tax entity for a particular period within that year as if the beginning and end of that period were the beginning and end of an income year.

This Part applies, for the purposes of that assessment, as if the beginning and end of the period were the beginning and end of an income year.

214-75 Validity of assessment

The validity of a franking assessment is not affected because any of the provisions of this Act have not been complied with.

214-80 Objections

If a *corporate tax entity is dissatisfied with a *franking assessment made in relation to the entity, the entity may object against the assessment in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 214-C — Amending franking assessments

Guide to Subdivision 214-C

214-90 What this Subdivision is about

The Commissioner may amend franking assessments within certain time limits.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

214-95 Amendments within 3 years of the original assessment

214-100 Amended assessments are treated as franking assessments

214-105 Further return as a result of a refund affecting a franking deficit tax liability

214-110 Later amendments—on request

214-115 Later amendments—failure to make proper disclosure

214-120 Later amendments—fraud or evasion

214-125 Further amendment of an amended particular

214-135 Amendment on review etc.

214-140 Notice of amendments

Operative provisions

214-95 Amendments within 3 years of the original assessment

The Commissioner may amend a franking assessment for a corporate tax entity for an income year at any time during the period of 3 years after the original franking assessment day for the entity for that year.

(2) The original franking assessment day for a *corporate tax entity for an income year is the day on which the first *franking assessment for the entity for the income year is made.

214-100 Amended assessments are treated as franking assessments

Once an amended *franking assessment for a corporate tax entity for an income year is made, it is taken to be a franking assessment for the entity for the year.

214-105 Further return as a result of a refund affecting a franking deficit tax liability

If:

a franking assessment for a corporate tax entity for an income year has been made; and

(b) on a particular day (the further return day) the entity gives the Commissioner a further *franking return for the income year under subsection 214-45(1) (because the entity has *received a refund of income tax that affects its liability to pay *franking deficit tax);

the Commissioner is taken to have amended the entity’s franking assessment on the further return day, and to have assessed:

the entity’s franking account balance at a particular time as that stated in the further return as the balance at that time; and

the entity’s venture capital sub-account balance (if any) at a particular time as that stated in the further return as the balance at that time; and

the amounts (if any) of franking tax payable by the entity because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during that income year as those stated in the further return.

The further return is taken to be notice of the amended assessment signed by the Commissioner and given to the entity on the further return day.

214-110 Later amendments—on request

The Commissioner may amend a franking assessment for a corporate tax entity for an income year after the end of the period of 3 years after the original franking assessment day for the entity for the year if, within that 3 year period:

the entity applies for the amendment; and

the entity gives the Commissioner all the information necessary for making the amendment.

214-115 Later amendments—failure to make proper disclosure

If:

a corporate tax entity does not make a full and true disclosure to the Commissioner of the information necessary for a franking assessment for the entity for an income year; and

in making the assessment, the Commissioner makes an *under-assessment; and

the Commissioner is not of the opinion that the under-assessment is due to fraud or evasion;

the Commissioner may amend the assessment at any time during the period of 6 years after the original franking assessment day for the entity for the year.

(2) The Commissioner makes an under-assessment in a *franking assessment (the earlier assessment) if, in amending the earlier assessment, the Commissioner would have to do one or more of the following for the amended assessment to be correct:

reduce the franking surplus (including to a nil balance);

increase the franking deficit (including from a nil balance);

increase franking tax payable.

214-120 Later amendments—fraud or evasion

If:

a corporate tax entity does not make a full and true disclosure to the Commissioner of the information necessary for a franking assessment for the entity for an income year; and

in making the assessment, the Commissioner makes an *under-assessment; and

the Commissioner is of the opinion that the under-assessment is due to fraud or evasion;

the Commissioner may amend the assessment at any time.

214-125 Further amendment of an amended particular

If:

(a) a *franking assessment has been amended (the first amendment) in any particular; and

the Commissioner is of the opinion that it would be just to further amend the assessment in that particular so as to *reduce the assessment;

the Commissioner may do so within a period of 3 years after the first amendment.

(2) The Commissioner reduces a franking assessment if the Commissioner amends the assessment by doing one or more of the following:

increasing the franking surplus (including from a nil balance);

decreasing the franking deficit (including to a nil balance);

decreasing franking tax payable.

214-135 Amendment on review etc.

Nothing in this Subdivision prevents the amendment of a franking assessment:

to give effect to a decision on a review or appeal; or

to *reduce the assessment as a result of an objection made under this Act or pending an appeal or review.

214-140 Notice of amendments

If the Commissioner amends an entity’s franking assessment, the Commissioner must give the entity notice of the amendment as soon as practicable after making the amendment.

Subdivision 214-D — Collection and recovery

Guide to Subdivision 214-D

214-145 What this Subdivision is about

Franking tax is due and payable at certain times and the general interest charge applies to unpaid amounts.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

214-150 Due date for payment of franking tax

214-155 General interest charge

214-160 Refunds of amounts overpaid

Operative provisions

214-150 Due date for payment of franking tax

General rule

Unless this section provides otherwise, franking tax assessed for a corporate tax entity because of events that have occurred, or are taken to have occurred, during an income year is due and payable on the last day of the month immediately following the end of the income year.

Part-year assessments

*Franking tax payable because of an assessment under section 214-70 (a part-year assessment) is due and payable on the day specified in the notice of assessment as the day on which it is due and payable.

Amended assessments—other than because of deficit deferral

If:

(a) the Commissioner amends a *franking assessment (the earlier assessment) other than because of the operation of section 214-105 (an amendment because of a refund of tax that affects *franking deficit tax liability); and

the amount of franking tax of a particular type payable under the amended assessment exceeds the amount of franking tax of that type payable under the earlier assessment;

the excess amount is due and payable one month after the day on which the assessment was amended.

Tax payable because of deficit deferral

If:

a corporate tax entity receives a refund of income tax or receives a refund of diverted profits tax; and

the receipt of the refund gives rise to a liability, or an increased liability, to pay franking deficit tax because of the operation of subsection 205-50(2) or (3);

the franking deficit tax or, if there is an increase in an existing liability to pay franking deficit tax, the difference between the original liability and the increased liability, is due and payable on:

if the entity accounts for the liability, or increased liability, in a franking return that is *outstanding for the income year in which the liability arose—the day on which the outstanding return is required to be given to the Commissioner; or

in any other case—14 days after the day on which the refund was received.

214-155 General interest charge

If:

franking tax of a particular type payable by a corporate tax entity remains unpaid after the time by which it is due and payable; and

the Commissioner has not allocated the unpaid amount to an RBA;

the entity is liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

starts at the beginning of the day on which the franking tax was due to be paid; and

ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the franking tax;

general interest charge on any of the franking tax.

Note: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

214-160 Refunds of amounts overpaid

Section 172 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Part as if references in that section to tax included references to *franking tax.

Subdivision 214-E — Records

Guide to Subdivision 214-E

214-170 What this Subdivision is about

Generally applicable provisions to do with record keeping apply for the purposes of the imputation system.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

214-175 Record keeping

Operative provisions

214-175 Record keeping

(1) Section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Part as if:

the reference in that section to a person carrying on a business were a reference to a corporate tax entity; and

the reference in paragraph (2)(a) of that section to the person’s income and expenditure were a reference to:

the entity’s franking account balance; and

the entity’s liability to pay franking tax; and

paragraph (5)(a) of that section were omitted.

(2) A *PDF does not need to maintain records under section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to a *venture capital sub-account if the *PDF does not elect to be a *participating PDF.

Division 215 — Consequences of the debt/equity rules

Subdivision 215-A — Application of the imputation system to non-share equity interests

215-1 Application of the imputation system to non-share equity interests

The imputation system applies to a *non-share equity interest in the same way as it applies to a *membership interest.

The imputation system applies to an equity holder in an entity who is not a member of the entity in the same way as it applies to a member of the entity.

Subdivision 215-B — Non-share dividends that are unfrankable to some extent

Guide to Subdivision 215-B

215-5 What this Subdivision is about

While non-share dividends are, as a general rule, frankable, all or part of some non-share dividends are taken to be unfrankable by virtue of these rules.

Table of sections

215-10 Certain non-share dividends by ADIs unfrankable

215-15 Non-share dividends are unfrankable if profits are unavailable

215-20 Working out the available frankable profits

215-25 Anticipating available frankable profits

215-10 Certain non-share dividends by ADIs unfrankable

(1) A *non-share dividend paid by an ADI (an authorised deposit-taking institution) for the purposes of the Banking Act 1959 is unfrankable if:

the ADI is an Australian resident; and

the non-share dividend is paid in respect of a *non-share equity interest that:

by itself; or

in combination with one or more *schemes that are *related schemes to the scheme under which the interest arises;

forms part of the ADI’s Tier 1 capital either on a solo or consolidated basis (within the meaning of the prudential standards); and

the non-share equity interest is issued at or through a permanent establishment of the ADI in a listed country; and

(d) the funds from the issue of the non-share equity interest are raised and applied solely for one or more purposes permitted under subsection (2) in relation to the non-share equity interest.

(2) The permitted purposes in relation to the *non-share equity interest (the relevant interest) are the following:

the purpose of the business of the ADI carried on at or through the permanent establishment other than the transfer of funds directly or indirectly to:

the Australian head office of the permanent establishment; or

any *connected entity of the ADI that is an Australian resident; or

a permanent establishment of the ADI, or of a connected entity of the ADI, located in Australia;

the purpose of redeeming:

a *debt interest; or

a non-share equity interest;

that is issued, before the relevant interest is issued, at or through the permanent establishment and is held by a connected entity of the ADI that is an Australian resident;

the purpose of returning funds to:

the Australian head office of the permanent establishment; or

a permanent establishment of the ADI or of a connected entity of the ADI, located in Australia;

if the funds are contributed, before the relevant interest is issued, for use in the business of the ADI carried on at or through the permanent establishment.

215-15 Non-share dividends are unfrankable if profits are unavailable

If:

a corporate tax entity pays a non-share dividend; and

immediately before the payment, the amount of the available frankable profits of the entity is nil, or less than nil;

the non-share dividend is unfrankable.

If:

a corporate tax entity pays a non-share dividend that is not one of a number of non-share dividends paid at the same time; and

immediately before the payment, the amount of the available frankable profits of the entity, although greater than nil, are less than the amount of the non-share dividend;

the entity is taken to have made a frankable distribution equal to the amount of the available frankable profits. The remainder of the dividend is taken to be an unfrankable distribution.

If:

a corporate tax entity pays a non-share dividend that is one of a number paid at the same time; and

immediately before the payment, the amount of the available frankable profits of the entity, although greater than nil are less than the sum of the amounts of the non-share dividends;

the entity is taken to have made a frankable distribution equal to the amount worked out using the formula:

The remainder of the dividend is taken to be an unfrankable distribution.

215-20 Working out the available frankable profits

(1) Use the following formula to work out the amount of a *corporate tax entity’s available frankable profits at a particular time:

where:

committed share dividends means the sum of:

the amounts of any *distributions that are not *non-share dividends and are paid by the entity at that time; and

if the entity has announced that it will pay distributions that are not non-share dividends at a later time, or is committed or has resolved (formally or informally) to paying such distributions at a later time—the amounts of those distributions.

maximum frankable amount means the maximum amount of *frankable *distributions (other than *non-share dividends) that the *corporate tax entity could pay at that time having regard to its available profits at that time.

undebited non-share dividends means the sum of the amounts of the franked parts of the *non-share dividends (worked out under subsection (2)) that:

were not debited to available profits; and

were paid within the preceding 2 income years or were paid under the same *scheme under which the entity pays the non-share dividend.

(2) The amount of the franked part of a *non-share dividend is worked out using the following formula:

where:

applicable gross-up rate means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.

215-25 Anticipating available frankable profits

A corporate tax entity that pays a non-share dividend may anticipate available frankable profits if:

the entity:

has announced the payment of; or

is committed or has resolved (formally or informally) to pay;

*distributions other than non-share dividends (the committed distributions) after payment of the non-share dividend; and

but for this subsection, section 215-15 would apply to the non-share dividend; and

the entity’s available frankable profits would be greater than nil at the relevant time if the committed distributions were ignored; and

it is reasonable to expect that available profits will arise after payment of the non-share dividend and before payment of the committed distributions; and

it is reasonable to expect that, having regard to the available profits mentioned in paragraph (d), the amount of the entity’s adjusted available frankable profits immediately after each of the committed distributions is paid will be greater than nil.

The available frankable profits immediately before the entity pays the non-share dividend is then the smallest of the amounts of the adjusted available frankable profits mentioned in paragraph (e).

(2) The entity’s adjusted available frankable profits immediately after a committed distribution is paid is the amount that would be its *available frankable profits at that time if all committed distributions to be paid after that time, and the *non-share dividend, were ignored.

A franking debit arises for the entity if:

the entity anticipatesavailable frankable profits under subsection (1); and

the available frankable profits of the entity are less than nil:

immediately after the last of the committed distributions is made; or

immediately before the end of the income year following the income year in which the non-share dividend is paid;

whichever is earlier.

The franking debit is equal to the lesser of:

the amount by which the available frankable profits is below nil; and

the amount of the franked part of the non-share dividend (worked out using subsection 215-20(2)) or, if more than one non-share dividend is made at the relevant time, the sum of the amounts of the franked parts of those non-share dividends.

In working out the entity’s available frankable profits for the purposes of subsection (3) or (4), disregard:

any *distributions that:

the entity announces, or becomes committed to or resolves (formally or informally) to pay after the payment of the non-share dividend; and

have not been paid; and

any estimate made by the entity under subsection (1) after the non-share dividend is paid.

Division 216 — Cum dividend sales and securities lending arrangements

Table of Subdivisions

216-A Circumstances where a distribution to a member of a corporate tax entity is treated as having been made to someone else

216-B Statements to be made where there is a cum dividend sale or securities lending arrangement

Subdivision 216-A — Circumstances where a distribution to a member of a corporate tax entity is treated as having been made to someone else

Table of sections

216-1 When a distribution made to a member of a corporate tax entity is treated as having been made to someone else

216-5 First situation (cum dividend sales)

216-10 Second situation (securities lending arrangements)

216-15 Distribution closing time

216-1 When a distribution made to a member of a corporate tax entity is treated as having been made to someone else

There are 2 situations in which a *franked distribution, or a distribution *franked with an exempting credit, that is made to a *member of a corporate tax entity is taken to have been made to another entity.

216-5 First situation (cum dividend sales)

The first situation is one in which:

the corporate tax entity makes a *franked distribution, or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit, to a *member of the entity in respect of a *membership interest in the entity; and

at the *distribution closing time, the member is under an obligation to transfer the membership interest to another person under a contract for the sale of the membership interest; and

the contract:

requires that the distribution be paid on to the other person; and

is entered into in the ordinary course of trading on an approved stock exchange in Australia or elsewhere.

The *distribution is taken to have been made to the other person as a *member of the entity (and not to the member).

Note: As the other person is the entity receiving the distribution, there may be tax effects for the other person under Division 207 or 208.

The *distribution referred to in paragraph (1)(a) includes a distribution that is taken to be made as a result of one or more previous applications of this section or section 216-10.

216-10 Second situation (securities lending arrangements)

The second situation is one in which:

the corporate tax entity makes a *franked distribution, or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit, to a *member of the entity in respect of a *membership interest in the entity; and

at the time the distribution was made, the member was under an obligation to pay the distribution to another person under a securities lending arrangement; and

the obligation was incurred in the member’s capacity as the borrower under the securities lending arrangement; and

the *distribution closing time occurred during the borrowing period.

The *distribution is taken to have been made to the other person as a *member of the entity (and not to the member).

Note: As the other person is the entity receiving the distribution, there may be tax effects for the other person under Division 207 or 208.

The distribution referred to in paragraph (1)(a) includes a distribution that is taken to be made as a result of one or more previous applications of this section or section 216-5.

216-15 Distribution closing time

If *distributions by a *corporate tax entity are made to those *members who were members as at a particular time at or before the distribution is made, that time is the distribution closing time in relation to those distributions.

Subdivision 216-B — Statements to be made where there is a cum dividend sale or securities lending arrangement

Table of sections

216-20 Cum dividend sale—statement by securities dealer

216-25 Cum dividend sale—statement by party

216-30 Securities lending arrangements—statement by borrower

216-20 Cum dividend sale—statement by securities dealer

If:

section 216-5 applies in relation to a *franked distribution or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit (cum dividend sales); and

a securities dealer has acted for a particular party to the contract concerned;

the securities dealer must, as soon as practicable after the making of the distribution, give to the other party to the contract a statement in the approved form setting out such information in relation to the distribution as is required by the approved form.

216-25 Cum dividend sale—statement by party

If:

section 216-5 applies in relation to a *franked distribution or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit (cum dividend sales); and

a particular party to the contract concerned has not had a securities dealer acting for him or her;

that party must, as soon as practicable after the making of the distribution, give to the other party to the contract a statement in the approved form setting out such information in relation to the distribution as is required by the approved form.

216-30 Securities lending arrangements—statement by borrower

If section 216-10 (securities lending arrangements) applies in relation to a *franked distribution, or a *distribution franked with an exempting credit, the borrower must, as soon as practicable after the making of the distribution, give to the lender a statement in the approved form setting out such information in relation to the distribution as is required by the approved form.

Division 218 — Application of imputation rules to co-operative companies

218-5 Application of imputation rules to co-operative companies

The imputation system applies to a co-operative company in the same way as it applies to any other company but with the modifications set out in this section.

(2) Each reference to a *distribution is taken to include a reference to an amount distributed as mentioned in paragraph 120(1)(a) or (b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Despite subsection 202-75(1) (about giving distribution statements), a co-operative company does not have to give the recipient of a frankable distribution a distribution statement unless the franking percentage for the distribution is greater than zero.

Division 219 — Imputation for life insurance companies

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 219

219-A Application of imputation rules to life insurance companies

219-B Franking accounts of life insurance companies

Guide to Division 219

219-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out how the imputation rules are applied to a life insurance company.

Subdivision 219-A — Application of imputation rules to life insurance companies

Table of sections

219-10 Application of imputation rules to life insurance companies

219-10 Application of imputation rules to life insurance companies

This Part (except this Division) applies to a life insurance company in the same way as it applies to any other company.

However, that application is subject to the modifications set out in this Division.

Subdivision 219-B — Franking accounts of life insurance companies

Table of sections

219-15 Franking credits

219-30 Franking debits

219-40 Residency requirement

219-45 Assessment day

219-50 Amount attributable to shareholders’ share of income tax liability

219-55 Adjustment resulting from an amended assessment

219-70 Tax offset under section 205-70

219-75 Working out franking credits and franking debits where a tax offset under section 205-70 is applied

219-15 Franking credits

The table in section 205-15 does not apply to a life insurance company.

The following table sets out when a franking credit arises under this section in the franking account of a life insurance company.

Note 1: On the assessment day, a franking credit that arose under item 1 of the table:

• is reversed by a franking debit that arises under item 1 of the table in section 219-30; and

• is replaced with a franking credit that arises under item 2 of the table in this section.

Note 2: Section 219-50 tells you how to work out the part of an amount that is attributable to the shareholders’ share of the income tax liability of the company for the income year.

Note 3: To find out whether a tax offset under Division 207 is subject to the refundable tax offset rules: see section 67-25.

A franking credit covered by item 6 of the table arises at the end of the income year:

that is an income year of the last partnership or trust interposed between:

the life insurance company; and

the corporate tax entity that made the distribution; and

during which the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the life insurance company.

(4) The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) divided by 40%.

219-30 Franking debits

The table in section 205-30 (except items 2 and 2A) applies to a life insurance company in the same way as it applies to any other company.

The following table sets out when a franking debit arises under this section in the franking account of a life insurance company.

Note 1: On the assessment day, a franking debit that arises under item 1 of this table reverses the effect of a franking credit that arose under item 1 of the table in section 219-15.

Note 2: Section 219-50 tells you how to work out the part of an amount that is attributable to the shareholders’ share of the income tax liability of the company for the income year.

(3) The proportion is the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) divided by 40%.

219-40 Residency requirement

The tables in sections 219-15 and 219-30 are relevant for the purposes of subsection 205-25(1) (about the residency requirement).

219-45 Assessment day

A *life insurance company’s assessment day for an income year is the earlier of:

the day on which the company furnishes its income tax return for that income year; or

(b) the day on which the Commissioner makes an assessment of the amount of the company’s taxable income for that income year under section 166 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

219-50 Amount attributable to shareholders’ share of income tax liability

Subsection (2) applies to a life insurance company in relation to the payment or refund mentioned in an item of a table in this Subdivision (except item 1 of the table in section 219-15).

Note: The operation of this section is affected by section 219-75 if a tax offset under section 205-70 is applied to work out the company’s income tax liability.

For the purposes of this Part, the part of the payment or refund that is attributable to the *shareholders’ share of the income tax liability of the company for an income year must be worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the part of the company’s total income tax liability for the income year that is attributable to the company’s shareholders.

The result of this step is the shareholders’ share of the income tax liability of the company for the income year.

Step 2. Divide the step 1 result by that total income tax liability.

The result of this step is the shareholders’ ratio for the income year.

Step 3. Multiply the amount of the payment or refund by the *shareholders’ ratio.

The result of this step is the part of the payment or refund that is attributable to the *shareholders’ share of the income tax liability of the company for the income year.

For the purposes of this Part, the estimate mentioned in item 1 of the table in section 219-15 (the part of a payment estimated to be attributable to the *shareholders’ share of a company’s income tax liability for an income year) must be worked out on the basis of:

subject to paragraph (b), the method statement in subsection (2); and

the company’s reasonable estimate of the amounts that, on the company’s *assessment day for the income year, will be:

its total income tax liability for the income year; and

the part of that total income tax liability that is attributable to its shareholders.

In working out the part of the income tax liability of a life insurance company that is attributable to the shareholders of the company for the purposes of this section, regard is to be had to the accounting records of the company.

219-55 Adjustment resulting from an amended assessment

This section applies in relation to the franking account of a life insurance company if:

(a) the assessment of the company’s *income tax liability for an income year is amended on a particular day (the adjustment day); and

(b) the *shareholders’ ratio (the new ratio) based on the amended assessment is different from the shareholders’ ratio used previously in relation to that income year to work out a *franking credit or *franking debit for the company; and

the franking account would have a different balance on the adjustment day if the new ratio had been used to work out all the franking credits and franking debits covered by paragraph (b).

Note: The operation of this section is affected by section 219-75 if a tax offset under section 205-70 is, or has been, applied to work out the company’s income tax liability.

On the adjustment day, a franking credit or franking debit (as appropriate) of the amount worked out under subsection (3) arises in the franking account.

The amount is an adjustment that will bring the franking account to the balance that it would have on the adjustment day if the new ratio had been used to work out all the *franking credits and *franking debits covered by paragraph (1)(b).

Example: On the basis of a shareholders’ ratio of 60% for the income year, franking credits of the amounts of $6,000, $6,000, $6,000 and $6,000 arose under item 2 of the table in section 219-15 for Company X.

An amended assessment results in a new shareholders’ ratio of 70%. Under this section, a franking credit of $4,000 arises on the day of the amended assessment to bring the balance of the franking account from $24,000 to $28,000, which would be the account’s balance if the new shareholders’ ratio had been used.

219-70 Tax offset under section 205-70

For the purposes of paragraph 205-70(1)(c), if a life insurance company was entitled to a tax offset under section 205-70 for a previous income year, assume section 63-10 applied to the part of the company’s basic income tax liability for that previous income year that was attributable to its shareholders.

In working out the part of the company’s basic income tax liability that was attributable to its shareholders, have regard to the company’s accounting records.

Example: The following apply to a life insurance company that satisfies the residency requirement for an income year:

the company has a tax offset of $60,000 under section 205-70 (the franking deficit offset) for that year;

the company’s basic income tax liability for that year would be $100,000 if the franking deficit offset were disregarded;

20% of the $100,000 is attributable to the company’s shareholders (the shareholders’ part).

As a result of applying $20,000 of the franking deficit offset to reduce the shareholders’ part to nil, the company’s basic income tax liability becomes $80,000. The remaining $40,000 of the offset will be included in a franking deficit tax offset for the next income year for which the company satisfies the residency requirement.

219-75 Working out franking credits and franking debits where a tax offset under section 205-70 is applied

Revised shareholders’ ratio—modification of section 219-50

Subsection (2) applies to a life insurance company if a tax offset under section 205-70 is applied to work out the company’s income tax liability for an income year.

Note: This means subsection (2) applies if the tax offset is applied to reduce the part of the company’s basic income tax liability mentioned in subsection 219-70(1) in relation to the income year.

For the purposes of working out the amount of a franking credit or franking debit for the company in relation to the income year (other than a franking credit covered by item 1 of the table in section 219-15), section 219-50 has effect as if:

steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in section 219-50 were omitted; and

(b) the reference in step 3 of that method statement to the *shareholders’ ratio were a reference to the revised shareholders’ ratio worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the remainder (if any) of the part of the company’s basic income tax liability mentioned in subsection 219-70(1) after the tax offset is applied to reduce that part.

Step 2. Divide the step 1 result by the company’s total *income tax liability for the income year (after applying the *tax offset).

The result (which can be nil) is the company’s revised shareholders’ ratio for the income year.

X Co’s income tax liability after applying the tax offset is $332,000 ($400,000 minus $68,000). The revised shareholders’ ratio is therefore 3/83 ($12,000 divided by $332,000).

For that income year, the company paid $249,000 of PAYG instalments before the assessment day and $83,000 of income tax one month after that day.

On the assessment day, a franking credit of $9,000 arises under item 2 of the table in section 219-15 ($249,000 multiplied by 3/83). On the day the additional amount of tax is paid, another franking credit of $3,000 arises under item 4 of that table ($83,000 multiplied by 3/83).

Adjustment resulting from amended assessment—modification of section 219-55

Note: The part mentioned in that subsection is the part of an amount of the company’s income tax liability for the income year that is attributable to its shareholders.

Example: For the 2002-2003 income year X Co (which is a life insurance company) has a tax offset of $68,000 under section 205-70. Its income tax liability for that year would have been $400,000 on the assessment day (1 February 2004) if the tax offset were disregarded. Of that liability, $80,000 is attributable to the shareholders. The step 1 result is therefore $12,000 ($80,000 minus $68,000).

Subsection (4) applies to a life insurance company if:

(a) the assessment of the company’s *income tax liability for an income year (the previous assessment) is amended; and

at least one of the following applies:

a tax offset under section 205-70 is applied in making that amended assessment;

a tax offset under section 205-70 was applied in making the previous assessment.

Section 219-55 has effect in relation to the company as if:

if subparagraph (3)(b)(i) of this section applies—a reference in that section to the new ratio were a reference to the revised shareholders’ ratio that is based on the amended assessment; and

if subparagraph (3)(b)(ii) of this section applies—the reference in paragraph (1)(b) of that section to the *shareholders’ ratio used previously were a reference to the revised shareholders’ ratio that is based on the previous assessment.

Example: Continuing the example in subsection (2), the assessment of X Co for the 2002-2003 income year is amended on 31 March 2004. Under the amended assessment, X Co’s income tax liability would be $300,000 if the tax offset were disregarded.

Of that liability, $60,000 is attributable to the shareholders. That amount is reduced by the tax offset of $68,000 to nil.

X Co’s liability to pay income tax is therefore reduced to $240,000 ($300,000 minus $60,000) and it will receive a refund of $92,000 ($332,000 minus $240,000). As the revised shareholders’ ratio has become nil, no franking debit arises from the refund.

The franking credits that previously arose from the payments of PAYG instalments and income tax would not have arisen if the new revised shareholders’ ratio had been used. Section 219-55 (as applied by subsection (4) of this section) therefore operates to create an adjustment to cancel those franking credits. The adjustment is a franking debit of $12,000 that arises on the day of the amendment of the assessment.

Division 220 — Imputation for NZ resident companies and related companies

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 220

220-A Objects of this Division

220-B NZ company treated as Australian resident for imputation system if company chooses

220-C Modifications of other Divisions of this Part

Guide to Division 220

220-1 What this Division is about

A company resident in New Zealand may choose that the imputation system apply in relation to it. If it does, the rest of this Part applies in relation to it as if it were an Australian resident company, but with modifications. Some of the modifications also affect:

other companies that are members of the same wholly-owned group; or

entities that receive distributions from the company resident in New Zealand.

Subdivision 220-A — Objects of this Division

Table of sections

220-15 Objects

220-20 What is an NZ resident?

220-15 Objects

The main objects of this Division are:

to allow a company that is an NZ resident to choose that the imputation system apply in relation to it; and

if the company makes that choice, to apply the rest of this Part in relation to the company generally as if it were an Australian resident.

Another object of this Division is to prevent the benefits of the imputation system from being inappropriately made available to or through a *member of a company that is a foreign resident, by modifying the way in which the rest of this Part applies to:

a company that has chosen that the system apply in relation to it; and

other companies that are members of the same wholly-owned group as that company; and

other entities that receive (directly or indirectly) *distributions from that company.

220-20 What is an NZ resident?

Company

(1) A company is an NZ resident if:

the company is incorporated in New Zealand; or

the company is not incorporated in New Zealand but carries on business there and either:

has its central management and control there; or

has its voting power controlled by *members who are NZ residents.

Natural person

(2) A natural person is an NZ resident if he or she resides in New Zealand.

(3) A natural person is also an NZ resident if his or her domicile is in New Zealand, unless the Commissioner is satisfied that the person’s permanent place of abode is outside New Zealand.

(4) A natural person is also an NZ resident if he or she has actually been in New Zealand, continuously or intermittently, during more than half of the income year, unless the Commissioner is satisfied that:

the person’s usual place of abode is outside New Zealand; and

the person does not intend to take up residence in New Zealand.

Not an NZ resident if an Australian resident

(5) A person is not an NZ resident if the person is an Australian resident. This has effect despite subsections (1), (2), (3) and (4).

Subdivision 220-B — NZ company treated as Australian resident for imputation system if company chooses

Table of sections

220-25 Application of provisions of Part 3-6 outside this Division

220-30 What is an NZ franking company?

220-35 Making an NZ franking choice

220-40 When is an NZ franking choice in force?

220-45 Revoking an NZ franking choice

220-50 Cancelling an NZ franking choice

220-25 Application of provisions of Part 3-6 outside this Division

The provisions of Part 3-6 outside this Division apply in relation to a company that is an NZ franking company at a time as if it were an Australian resident at that time.

They apply with the modifications made by the other sections of this Division.

220-30 What is an NZ franking company?

A company is an NZ franking company at a time if, at the time, the company is an *NZ resident and has an *NZ franking choice in force.

220-35 Making an NZ franking choice

A company that is an *NZ resident may, by notice in the *approved form given to the Commissioner, choose that the *imputation system is to apply in relation to the company. The choice is an NZ franking choice.

220-40 When is an NZ franking choice in force?

A company’s NZ franking choice comes into force:

at the start of the company’s income year in which the notice was given to the Commissioner; or

at the start of a later income year specified in the notice.

The NZ franking choice continues in force until it is revoked by the company or cancelled by the Commissioner.

220-45 Revoking an NZ franking choice

A company may revoke its NZ franking choice by notice in the approved form given to the Commissioner.

To avoid doubt, the revocation takes effect when the notice is given to the Commissioner.

220-50 Cancelling an NZ franking choice

The Commissioner may cancel a company’s NZ franking choice by written notice given to the company, but only if the Commissioner is satisfied that either:

the company was liable to pay franking deficit tax or over-franking tax (whether or not because of section 220-800 (about joint and several liability for the tax)) and the company did not pay the tax by the day on which it was due and payable; or

the company has not complied with subsection 214-15(2) or 214-20(2) (about giving the Commissioner a franking return).

To avoid doubt, the cancellation takes effect when the notice is given to the company.

Review of cancellation

(3) If the company is dissatisfied with the cancellation of the choice, it may object against the cancellation in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note: That Part provides for review of the cancellation objected against.

Effect of cancelling a choice on making another choice in future

If the company makes another NZ franking choice, it does not come into force unless the Commissioner consents in writing to the choice coming into force.

In consenting, the Commissioner may specify when the choice is to come into force. The consent has effect according to its terms, despite section 220-40.

The Commissioner must give a copy of the consent to the company.

Subdivision 220-C — Modifications of other Divisions of this Part

Table of sections

Franking NZ franking companies’ distributions

220-100 Residency requirement for franking

220-105 Unfrankable distributions by NZ franking companies

220-110 Maximum franking credit under section 202-60

NZ franking companies’ franking accounts etc.

220-205 Franking credit for payment of NZ franking company’s withholding tax liability

220-210 Effect of franked distribution to NZ franking company or flowing indirectly to NZ franking company

220-215 Effect on franking account if NZ franking choice ceases to be in force

Franking accounts of NZ franking company and some of its 100% subsidiaries

220-300 NZ franking company’s franking account affected by franking accounts of some of its 100% subsidiaries

Effect of NZ franking company making distribution that is non-assessable and non-exempt

220-350 Providing for a franking credit to arise

Effects of supplementary dividend from NZ franking company

220-400 Gross-up and tax offset for distribution from NZ franking company reduced by supplementary dividend

220-405 Franked distribution and supplementary dividend flowing indirectly

220-410 Franking credit reduced if tax offset reduced

Rules about exempting entities

220-500 Publicly listed post-choice NZ franking company and its 100% subsidiaries are not exempting entities

220-505 Post-choice NZ franking company is not automatically prescribed person

220-510 Parent company’s status as prescribed person sets status of all other members of same wholly-owned group

NZ franking companies’ exempting accounts

220-605 Effect on exempting account if NZ franking choice ceases to be in force

Tax effect of distribution franked by NZ franking company with an exempting credit

220-700 Tax effect of distribution franked by NZ franking company with an exempting credit

Joint and several liability for NZ resident company’s unmet franking liabilities

220-800 Joint and several liability for NZ resident company’s franking tax etc.

Franking NZ franking companies’ distributions

220-100 Residency requirement for franking

(1) An *NZ franking company satisfies the residency requirement when making a *distribution only if the distribution is made at least one month after the notice constituting the company’s *NZ franking choice was given to the Commissioner.

Note: This section is relevant to both section 202-5 and section 208-60, which let a company frank a distribution, or frank a distribution with an exempting credit, only if the company satisfies the residency requirement when making the distribution.

Section 202-20, as applying because of section 220-25, has effect subject to this section.

Note: Section 202-20 sets out how a company satisfies the residency requirement when making a distribution.

220-105 Unfrankable distributions by NZ franking companies

These *distributions by an NZ franking company are unfrankable:

a conduit tax relief additional dividend (as defined in section OB1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 of New Zealand);

a supplementary dividend (as defined in that section).

This section does not limit section 202-45 (about unfrankable distributions).

220-110 Maximum franking credit under section 202-60

For the purposes of working out the *maximum franking credit for a frankable distribution made by an NZ franking company in a foreign currency, translate the amount of the distribution into Australian currency at the exchange rate applicable at the time of the decision to make the *distribution.

NZ franking companies’ franking accounts etc.

220-205 Franking credit for payment of NZ franking company’s withholding tax liability

(1) A *franking credit arises in the *franking account of a company on the day a payment is made of *withholding tax that the company is liable under section 128B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 to pay, if:

because of section 220-25, the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year in which it *derived the income on which it was liable to pay the withholding tax; and

the company is a franking entity for the whole or part of that income year.

The amount of the credit equals the amount of the payment.

For the purposes of determining whether the company satisfies the *residency requirement for the income year described in paragraph (1)(a), section 205-25 has effect as if the derivation of the income described in that paragraph were an event specified in a relevant table for the purposes of that section.

220-210 Effect of franked distribution to NZ franking company or flowing indirectly to NZ franking company

No tax offset for NZ franking company

An NZ franking company to which a *franked distribution is made or *flows indirectly is not entitled under Division 207 to a tax offset for the *distribution. That Division has effect subject to this section.

Denial of tax offset does not stop franking credit or debit arising

However, subsection (1) does not prevent a franking credit or franking debit from arising in the NZ franking company’s franking account under Division 205 or 208. To avoid doubt, the amount of the credit or debit, and the time at which it arises, are the same as they would be apart from subsection (1).

Note: This has the effect that the amount and timing of the credit or debit are worked out as if the NZ franking company had been entitled to the tax offset that subsection (1) prevents the company from being entitled to.

220-215 Effect on franking account if NZ franking choice ceases to be in force

This section has effect if:

a company has made an NZ franking choice; and

(b) the choice is revoked or cancelled at a time (the end time); and

immediately before the end time the company is a foreign resident.

Franking debit if franking surplus just before end time

A franking debit arises in the company’s franking account on the day during which the end time occurs if the account was in *surplus immediately before that time. The amount of the debit equals the franking surplus.

Franking deficit tax if franking deficit just before end time

If the company’s franking account was in *deficit immediately before the end time, subsection 205-45(3) applies in relation to the company as if it ceased to be a franking entity at the end time.

Note: Subsection 205-45(3) makes an entity liable to pay franking deficit tax if the entity ceases to be a franking entity and had a franking deficit immediately before ceasing to be a franking entity.

Subsection (3) does not limit the effect of subsection 205-45(3).

Take account of franking debit arising under section 220-605

Take account of any franking debit arising under section 220-605 because of the revocation or cancellation in working out for the purposes of this section whether the company’s franking account is in *surplus or *deficit immediately before the end time.

Note: Section 220-605 provides for a franking debit to arise in the company’s franking account immediately before the end time if, immediately before the end time, the company was a former exempting entity and its exempting account was in deficit.

Franking accounts of NZ franking company and some of its 100% subsidiaries

220-300 NZ franking company’s franking account affected by franking accounts of some of its 100% subsidiaries

(1) This section has effect if all these conditions are met in relation to a company (the franking donor company) at a time:

the franking donor company is at the time:

an Australian resident or a post-choice NZ franking company; and

(ii) a *100% subsidiary of a post-choice NZ franking company (the parent company) that is not a 100% subsidiary of another company that is a member of the same *wholly-owned group as the parent company;

(b) the franking donor company is at the time a 100% subsidiary of a post-choice NZ franking company (the NZ recipient company) in relation to which these requirements are met:

there must be no companies that are *NZ residents and 100% subsidiaries of the NZ recipient company interposed between it and the franking donor company;

the NZ recipient company must be either the parent company or a 100% subsidiary of the parent company;

there are interposed between the NZ recipient company and the franking donor company at the time one or more companies, each of which:

is a 100% subsidiary of the NZ recipient company; and

is neither an Australian resident nor an NZ resident.

What is a post-choice NZ franking company?

(2) A company is a post-choice NZ franking company at a time if:

at the time, the company is an NZ franking company; and

the notice constituting the NZ franking choice that makes the company an NZ franking company at the time was given to the Commissioner at or before the time.

Franking donor company’s franking surplus when conditions met

If the franking donor company’s franking account is in *surplus at the first time all the conditions in subsection (1) are met:

a franking debit equal to the surplus arises in the franking donor company’s franking account immediately after that time; and

a franking credit equal to the surplus arises in the NZ recipient company’s franking account immediately after that time.

Franking donor company’s franking deficit when conditions met

If the franking donor company’s franking account is in *deficit at the first time all the conditions in subsection (1) are met, subsection 205-45(3) applies in relation to the franking donor company as if:

it ceased to be a franking entity at that time; and

its franking account had been in deficit to the same extent immediately before that cessation.

Note: Subsection 205-45(3) makes an entity liable to pay franking deficit tax if the entity ceases to be a franking entity and had a franking deficit immediately before ceasing to be a franking entity.

NZ recipient company’s franking account after conditions are met

(5) If, apart from paragraph (a), a *franking credit or *franking debit would arise in the franking donor company’s *franking account at a time (the accounting time) that is a time when all the conditions in subsection (1) are met but after the first time at which all those conditions are met in relation to the franking donor company:

the credit or debit does not arise in the franking donor company’s franking account; and

a credit or debit of the same amount arises at the accounting time in the NZ recipient company’s franking account instead.

However, subsection (5) does not apply in relation to:

a franking debit arising in the franking donor company’s franking account under subsection (3); or

a franking credit arising in that account because of item 5 of the table in section 205-15 in conjunction with subsection (4) of this section; or

a franking debit arising in that account under paragraph 220-605(3)(a).

Note 1: Item 5 of the table in section 205-15 gives rise to a franking credit immediately after a liability to franking deficit tax arises. Subsection (4) of this section causes such a liability to arise under section 205-45.

Note 2: Paragraph 220-605(3)(a) gives rise to a franking debit if the NZ franking choice of a company that is a former exempting entity is revoked or cancelled and the company’s exempting account is in deficit immediately before the revocation or cancellation.

Franking donor company’s benchmark franking percentage

Subsection (5) does not affect the franking donor company’s benchmark franking percentage.

Special rules if franking donor company is former exempting entity

If the franking donor company becomes a former exempting entity at the first time all the conditions in subsection (1) are met:

subsections (3) and (4) do not apply; and

subsection (5) does not apply in relation to:

a franking credit arising in the franking donor company’s franking account under item 1 of the table in section 208-130 immediately after that time; or

a franking debit arising in the franking donor company’s franking account under item 1 of the table in section 208-145 immediately after that time.

Note: Subsection (8) ensures that the franking donor company’s franking account has a nil balance immediately after the company becomes a former exempting entity and that there is an appropriate balance in the company’s exempting account that is not made available for use by the NZ recipient company in franking distributions.

Effect of NZ franking company making distribution that is non-assessable and non-exempt

220-350 Providing for a franking credit to arise

This section has effect if:

(a) an *NZ franking company makes a *franked distribution to a company (the receiving company); and

the distribution does not *flow indirectly through the receiving company to another entity; and

(c) because of section 768-5, or section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

all of the distribution is exempt income, or is non-assessable non-exempt income, in the hands of the receiving company; or

part of the distribution is exempt income, or is non-assessable non-exempt income, in the hands of the receiving company.

A franking credit arises in the receiving company’s franking account on the day on which the distribution is made.

Note: If only part of the distribution is exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income:

a franking credit in relation to the distribution will arise under this section in relation to the part of the distribution that is exempt income, or that is non-assessable non-exempt income; and

another franking credit in relation to the distribution will arise under item 3 of the table in subsection 205-15(1) in relation to the part of the distribution that is not exempt income, or that is not non-assessable non-exempt income (see also subsection 207-90(2)).

The amount of the franking credit that so arises is:

if subparagraph (1)(c)(i) applies—the amount of the franking credit on the distribution made by the NZ franking company; or

if subparagraph (1)(c)(ii) applies—so much of the franking credit on the distribution made by the NZ franking company as is attributable to the part of the distribution referred to in that subparagraph.

The table in subsection 205-15(1) has effect subject to this section.

Effects of supplementary dividend from NZ franking company

220-400 Gross-up and tax offset for distribution from NZ franking company reduced by supplementary dividend

This section has effect if:

an NZ franking company:

(i) makes a *franked distribution to an entity (the recipient) in an income year; and

pays a supplementary dividend (as defined in section OB1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 of New Zealand) to the recipient in connection with the franked distribution; and

an amount is included in the recipient’s assessable income for the income year under section 207-20, and the recipient is entitled to a tax offset for the income year under that section or section 207-110; and

the recipient is entitled to a tax offset under Division 770 because of the inclusion of the *distribution in the recipient’s assessable income for the income year.

Reduced gross-up

The amount included in the recipient’s assessable income under section 207-20 is reduced by the amount of the supplementary dividend (but not below zero).

Reduced tax offset

The amount of the tax offset under section 207-20 is reduced by the amount of the supplementary dividend (but not below zero).

What happens if certain provisions apply

Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply to the recipient in relation to the *franked distribution if one or more of the following provisions also apply to the recipient in relation to the distribution:

subsection 207-90(1);

subsection 207-90(2);

subsection 207-145(1);

subsection 207-145(2).

If subsection 207-90(2) or 207-145(2) would also apply to the recipient in relation to the *franked distribution, apply that subsection on the basis that:

the amount of the franking credit on the distribution;

had been reduced by:

so much of the supplementary dividend as does not exceed that amount of the franking credit.

Relationship with sections 207-20, 207-90 and 207-145

Sections 207-20, 207-90 and 207-145 have effect subject to this section.

220-405 Franked distribution and supplementary dividend flowing indirectly

This section has effect if:

an NZ franking company:

makes a *franked distribution; and

pays a supplementary dividend (as defined in section OB1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 of New Zealand) in connection with the franked distribution; and

(b) the franked distribution and the supplementary dividend *flow indirectly to an entity (the recipient) in an income year because the recipient is a partner in a partnership or a beneficiary or trustee of a trust; and

the recipient is entitled under section 207-45 to a tax offset in connection with the *distribution; and

the recipient is entitled to a tax offset under Division 770 for the income year because of the distribution.

Recipient that is a partner or beneficiary

If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the recipient under subsection 207-50(2) or (3), then:

the recipient can deduct an amount for the income year that is equal to so much of its share of the supplementary dividend as does not exceed:

if the distribution flows indirectly to the recipient under subsection 207-50(2)—the recipient’s individual interest in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection; or

if the distribution flows indirectly to the recipient under subsection 207-50(3)—the recipient’s share amount in relation to the distribution that is mentioned in that subsection; and

the recipient’s tax offset under section 207-45 is reduced by so much of the deduction under paragraph (a) as does not exceed its *share of the franking credit on the distribution.

Recipient that is a trustee

If the *franked distribution *flows indirectly to the recipient under subsection 207-50(4), then:

the share amount mentioned in that subsection in relation to the distribution is reduced by so much of the recipient’s share of the supplementary dividend as does not exceed that share amount; and

the recipient’s tax offset under section 207-45 is reduced by so much of the reduction under paragraph (a) as does not exceed its *share of the franking credit on the distribution.

What happens if certain provisions apply

Subsection (2) or (3) (as appropriate) does not apply to the recipient in relation to the *franked distribution if one or more of the following provisions also apply to the recipient in relation to the distribution:

subsection 207-95(1);

subsection 207-95(5);

subsection 207-150(1);

subsection 207-150(5).

If subsection 207-90(5) or 207-150(5) would also apply to the recipient in relation to the *franked distribution, apply that subsection on the basis that:

the amount of the recipient’s *share of the franking credit on the distribution;

had been reduced by:

so much of the recipient’s share of the supplementary dividend as does not exceed the amount of that share of the franking credit.

When does a supplementary dividend flow to an entity?

(6) A supplementary dividend flows indirectly to an entity if it would have *flowed indirectly to the entity under subsection 207-50(2), (3) or (4), if:

the dividend had been a *franked distribution; and

a reference in that subsection to the entity’s *share of the franked distribution had been a reference to the entity’s share of the supplementary dividend.

Share of supplementary dividend

(7) The entity’s share of the supplementary dividend is worked out as follows:

Nothing in this section has the effect of including in the entity’s assessable income its share of the supplementary dividend.

Relationship with Subdivisions 207-B, 207-D, 207-E and 207-F

Subdivisions 207-B, 207-D, 207-E and 207-F have effect subject to this section.

220-410 Franking credit reduced if tax offset reduced

(1) If, under section 220-400 or 220-405, a *corporate tax entity’s *tax offset (the reduced tax offset) for the *franked distribution described in that section is less than it would be apart from that section, the *franking credit arising in that entity’s *franking account because of the *distribution is equal to the reduced tax offset.

The following provisions have effect subject to this section:

items 3 and 4 of the table in section 205-15;

items 5 and 6 of the table in section 219-15.

Note: Each of those items gives rise to a franking credit for a franked distribution if the recipient is entitled under Division 207 to a tax offset for the distribution. Those items provide that the amount of the credit equals the amount of that offset.

Rules about exempting entities

220-500 Publicly listed post-choice NZ franking company and its 100% subsidiaries are not exempting entities

A company is not an exempting entity at a particular time if:

it is a post-choice NZ franking company at the time; and

the company is a listed public company at the time.

(2) A company (the non-exempting company) is not an *exempting entity at a particular time if at the time:

(a) the non-exempting company is a *100% subsidiary of a company (the listed company) that is not an exempting entity because of subsection (1); and

the non-exempting company is an Australian resident or a post-choice NZ franking company; and

if:

there are one or more companies interposed between the non-exempting company and the listed company; and

one or more of the interposed companies are *NZ residents;

all of the interposed companies that are NZ residents are post-choice NZ franking companies.

This section has effect despite section 208-20 (about an entity being an exempting entity).

220-505 Post-choice NZ franking company is not automatically prescribed person

A post-choice NZ franking company is not a prescribed person under section 208-40 for the purposes of working out whether another corporate tax entity is an exempting entity at a particular time because it is effectively owned by prescribed persons within the meaning of section 208-25.

However, this section does not prevent the company from being taken under section 208-45 to be a prescribed person for those purposes.

220-510 Parent company’s status as prescribed person sets status of all other members of same wholly-owned group

This section has effect for the purposes of working out whether a company is an exempting entity at a particular time because it is effectively owned by prescribed persons within the meaning of section 208-25, if:

(a) at the time the company is a *100% subsidiary of another company (the parent company) that is not a 100% subsidiary of another member of the same *wholly-owned group; and

at the time the parent company is a post-choice NZ franking company; and

(c) there is at least one company (the non-Tasman company) that meets all these conditions:

the non-Tasman company is neither an Australian resident nor an NZ resident at the time;

the non-Tasman company is a member of the same wholly-owned group at the time;

the non-Tasman company is interposed between the parent company and a company that, at the time, is an Australian resident or a post-choice NZ franking company.

At the time, each company that is a *100% subsidiary of the parent company is a prescribed person if the parent company is a prescribed person at the time for those purposes because of section 208-40 or 208-45 (taking account of section 220-505, if relevant).

(3) At the time, each company that is a *100% subsidiary of the parent company is not a prescribed person if the parent company is not a prescribed person for those purposes because of section 208-40 or 208-45 (taking account of section 220-505, if relevant).

This section has effect despite sections 208-40, 208-45 and 220-505 so far as those sections apply in relation to a *100% subsidiary of the parent company.

NZ franking companies’ exempting accounts

220-605 Effect on exempting account if NZ franking choice ceases to be in force

This section has effect if:

a company has made an NZ franking choice; and

(b) the choice is revoked or cancelled at a time (the end time); and

immediately before the end time:

the company is a foreign resident; and

the company is a former exempting entity.

Exempting debit if exempting surplus just before end time

An exempting debit arises in the company’s exempting account at the end time if the account was in *surplus immediately before that time. The amount of the debit equals the exempting surplus.

If exempting deficit just before end time

If the company’s exempting account was in *deficit immediately before the end time:

a franking debit equal to that deficit arises in the company’s franking account immediately before the end time; and

an exempting credit equal to that deficit arises in the company’s exempting account at the end time.

Tax effect of distribution franked by NZ franking company with an exempting credit

220-700 Tax effect of distribution franked by NZ franking company with an exempting credit

This section has effect if an NZ franking company franks with an exempting credit a *distribution the company makes when it is a former exempting entity.

If, under Subdivision 208-H, Division 207 applies in relation to the *distribution, it applies subject to the provisions of this Division that modify the effect of that Division.

Note 1: Subdivision 208-H provides in some cases for the tax effect of a distribution franked with an exempting credit by applying Division 207 as if the distribution were a franked distribution.

Note 2: Sections 220-400 and 220-405 modify the effect of Division 207 so far as it relates to the tax effect of distributions by NZ franking companies that pay supplementary dividends in connection with the distributions.

Subdivision 208-H has effect subject to this section.

Joint and several liability for NZ resident company’s unmet franking liabilities

220-800 Joint and several liability for NZ resident company’s franking tax etc.

This section has effect if:

(a) a company (the defaulter) became liable under another section to pay an amount described in subsection (2) because the company was an *NZ franking company; and

(b) the amount was unpaid by the time (the defaulter’s due time) it was due and payable by the defaulter; and

(c) at any time during the period for the amount (see subsection (2)), the defaulter was a member of the same *wholly-owned group as one or more other companies (each of which is a contributor).

For the purposes of subsection (1), the amount and period are shown in the table:

Just after the defaulter’s due time, these companies become jointly and severally liable to pay the unpaid amount:

the defaulter;

each contributor, other than one that, at that time:

is neither an Australian resident nor an NZ resident; or

is prohibited by an Australian law or a law of New Zealand from entering into an arrangement that would make the contributor jointly or severally liable for the unpaid amount.

The joint and several liability of a particular contributor becomes due and payable by the contributor 14 days after the Commissioner gives it written notice of the liability.

Note 1: Two or more contributors will have different due and payable dates for the same liability if the Commissioner gives them notice of their liability on different days.

Note 2: This section does not affect the time at which the liability for the unpaid amount arose for, or became due and payable by, the defaulter.

If:

(a) the unpaid amount (the first interest amount) is *general interest charge for a day in relation to another unpaid amount (the primary liability) that consists of *franking deficit tax or *over-franking tax; and

on a day the Commissioner gives a particular contributor written notice under subsection (4) of the contributor’s liability for the first interest amount; and

general interest charge arises:

(i) for a day (the later day) after the days mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b); and

in relation to the primary liability; and

the general interest charge for the later day has not been paid or otherwise discharged in full by the time it became due and payable;

the Commissioner is taken to have given the contributor written notice under subsection (4) of the general interest charge for the later day on that later day.

(6) Section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to the contributors’ liability as if it were a liability for tax.

Note: Section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 deals with the payment of tax by agents and trustees.

Part 3-10 — Financial transactions

Division 230 — Taxation of financial arrangements

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 230

230-A Core rules

230-B The accruals/realisation methods

230-C Fair value method

230-D Foreign exchange retranslation method

230-E Hedging financial arrangements method

230-F Reliance on financial reports

230-G Balancing adjustment on ceasing to have a financial arrangement

230-H Exceptions

230-I Other provisions

230-J Additional operation of Division

Guide to Division 230

230-1 What this Division is about

This Division is about the tax treatment of gains and losses from your financial arrangements.

You recognise the gains and losses, as appropriate, over the life of a financial arrangement and ignore distinctions between income and capital unless specific rules apply.

If it is sufficiently certain that you will make a gain or loss, you use a compounding accruals method to recognise the gain or loss. Otherwise you use a realisation method. Instead of either, you may be able to choose to use a fair value or hedging method or to rely on your financial reports. You may also be able to choose to recognise foreign exchange gains and losses using a retranslation method.

230-5 Scope of this Division

You have a financial arrangement if you have one or more cash settlable legal or equitable rights and/or obligations to receive or provide a financial benefit.

This Division does not apply to all financial arrangements. The main exceptions are if:

you are:

an individual; or

a superannuation entity or fund, managed investment scheme or an entity substantially similar to a managed investment scheme under foreign law with assets of less than $100 million; or

an ADI, securitisation vehicle or other financial sector entity with an aggregated turnover of less than $20 million; or

another entity with an aggregated turnover of less than $100 million, financial assets of less than $100 million and assets of less than $300 million;

and either:

the arrangement is to end not more than 12 months after you start to have it; or

the arrangement is not a qualifying security; or

the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc.) and neither a fair value election, a hedging financial arrangement election nor an election to rely on financial reports applies to the arrangement.

Note: Section 230-455 provides for the exceptions referred to in paragraph (a).

Subdivision 230-A — Core rules

Table of sections

Objects

230-10 Objects of this Division

Tax treatment of gains and losses from financial arrangements

230-15 Gains are assessable and losses deductible

230-20 Gain or loss to be taken into account only once under this Act

230-25 Associated financial benefits to be taken into account only once under this Act

230-30 Treatment of gains and losses related to exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income

230-35 Treatment of gains and losses of private or domestic nature

Method to be applied to take account of gain or loss

230-40 Methods for taking gain or loss into account

Financial arrangement concept

230-45 Financial arrangement

230-50 Financial arrangement (equity interest or right or obligation in relation to equity interest)

230-55 Rights, obligations and arrangements (grouping and disaggregation rules)

General rules

230-60 When financial benefit provided or received under financial arrangement

230-65 Amount of financial benefit relating to more than one financial arrangement etc.

230-70 Apportionment when financial benefit received or right ceases

230-75 Apportionment when financial benefit provided or obligation ceases

230-80 Consistency in working out gains or losses (integrity measure)

230-85 Rights and obligations include contingent rights and obligations

Objects

230-10 Objects of this Division

The objects of this Division are:

to minimise the extent to which the tax treatment of gains and losses from your *financial arrangements distorts, by providing inappropriate impediments and stimulation, your trading, financing and investment decisions and your risk taking and risk management; and

to do so by aligning more closely the tax and commercial recognition of gains and losses from your financial arrangements in the following ways:

by allocating the gains and losses to income years throughout the life of your financial arrangements on a reasonable basis;

by generally recognising gains and losses on revenue rather than capital account; and

to appropriately take account of, and minimise, your compliance costs.

Tax treatment of gains and losses from financial arrangements

230-15 Gains are assessable and losses deductible

Gains

Your assessable income includes a gain you make from a financial arrangement.

Note: This Division does not apply to gains that are subject to exceptions under Subdivision 230-H.

Losses

You can deduct a loss you make from a financial arrangement, but only to the extent that:

you make it in gaining or producing your assessable income; or

you necessarily make it in carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income.

Note: This Division does not apply to losses that are subject to exceptions under Subdivision 230-H.

You can also deduct a loss you make from a financial arrangement if:

you are an Australian entity; and

you make the loss in deriving income from a foreign source; and

(c) the income is *non-assessable non-exempt income under section 768-5, or section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the loss is, in whole or in part, a cost that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a).

You can deduct the loss only to the extent to which it is a cost that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a).

Note: This Division does not apply to losses that are subject to exceptions under Subdivision 230-H.

If the financial arrangement is a *debt interest, the loss is not prevented from being deductible for an income year under subsection (2) merely because of either or both of the following:

one or more of the *financial benefits that are taken into account in working out the amount of the loss are contingent on aspects of the economic performance (whether past, current or future) of:

you or a part of your activities; or

a *connected entity of yours or a part of the activities of a connected entity of yours;

one or more of the financial benefits that are taken into account in working out the amount of the loss secure a permanent or enduring benefit for you or a connected entity of yours.

A dividend on a *debt interest is a loss you can deduct to the extent to which it would have been a deductible loss under subsection (2) if:

the payment of the amount of the dividend were the incurring of a liability to pay the same amount as interest; and

that interest were incurred in respect of the finance raised by you and in respect of which the dividend was paid or provided; and

the debt interest retained its character as a debt interest for the purposes of subsection (4).

Subject to subsection (6), subsection (4) does not apply to the loss to the extent to which the annually compounded internal rate of return on the *debt interest exceeds the *benchmark rate of return for the debt interest increased by 150 basis points.

If:

regulations made for the purposes of subsection 25-85(6) provide that a specified number of basis points is to apply for the purposes of applying subsection 25-85(5) in particular circumstances; and

those circumstances exist in relation to the *debt interest;

subsection (5) applies as if the reference in that subsection to 150 basis points were a reference to the number of basis points specified in the regulations.

Division does not affect foreign residence rules

Nothing in this Division affects the operation of the provisions of Division 6 that provide for the significance of foreign residence for the assessability of ordinary and statutory income.

Note 1: Gains that you make under this Division may be ordinary or statutory income for the purposes of Division 6.

Note 2: For the effect of a change of residence during an income year, see sections 230-485 and 230-490.

230-20 Gain or loss to be taken into account only once under this Act

Application of section

This section applies to the following:

a gain that is included in your assessable income for an income year under this Division;

a loss that is allowable as a deduction to you for an income year under this Division;

a gain or a loss that is dealt with in accordance with subsection 230-310(4) in relation to an income year.

Purpose of this section

The purpose of this section is to ensure that your gains and losses, and *financial benefits, to which this section applies are taken into account only once under this Act in working out your taxable income.

Gain or loss to be taken into account only once

A gain or loss to which this section applies is not to be (to any extent):

included in your assessable income; or

allowable as a deduction to you; or

dealt with in accordance with subsection 230-310(4);

again under this Division for the same or any other income year.

A gain or loss to which this section applies is not to be (to any extent):

included in your assessable income; or

allowable as a deduction to you;

under any provisions of this Act outside this Division for the same or any other income year.

Section does not give rise to exempt income

A gain is not to be treated as exempt income merely because it is not included in your assessable income under this section.

230-25 Associated financial benefits to be taken into account only once under this Act

Application of section

This section applies to a financial benefit whose amount or value is taken into account in working out whether you make, or the amount of, a gain or loss to which paragraph 230-20(1)(a), (b) or (c) applies.

Associated financial benefit to be taken into account only once

A financial benefit to which this section applies is not to be (to any extent):

included in your assessable income; or

allowable as a deduction to you;

under any provision of this Act outside this Division for the same or any other income year.

Exception for certain bad debts

If:

a financial benefit has been included in your assessable income under a provision of this Act outside this Division; and

a bad debt deduction would have been allowed under section 25-35 in relation to the financial benefit;

subsection (2) does not prevent that bad debt deduction from being allowed under section 25-35 in relation to the financial benefit as if the debt were still outstanding.

Section does not give rise to exempt income

A financial benefit is not to be treated as exempt income merely because it is not included in your assessable income under this section.

230-30 Treatment of gains and losses related to exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income

Despite section 230-15, a gain that you make from a financial arrangement:

to the extent that it reflects an amount that would be treated, or would reasonably expected to be treated, as exempt income under a provision of this Act if this Division were disregarded—is exempt income; and

to the extent that it reflects an amount that would be treated or would reasonably expected to be treated, as non-assessable non-exempt income under a provision of this Act if this Division were disregarded—is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Despite section 230-15, a gain that you make from a financial arrangement:

to the extent that, if it had been a loss, you would have made it in gaining or producing exempt income—is exempt income; and

to the extent to which, if it had been a loss, you would have made it in gaining or producing non-assessable non-exempt income—is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

(3) A loss you make from a *financial arrangement is not allowable as a deduction to you under any provision of this Act (other than subsection 230-15(3)) to the extent that you make it in gaining or producing your:

exempt income; or

non-assessable non-exempt income.

230-35 Treatment of gains and losses of private or domestic nature

Borrowings etc. used for private or domestic purpose

Subsections (2) and (3) apply if:

a borrowing is made by you, or credit is provided to you, under a financial arrangement; and

you use some or all of the funds borrowed or the credit provided for a private or domestic purpose.

This Division does not apply to a gain you make from the arrangement to the extent that you use the funds raised or the credit provided for a private or domestic purpose.

(3) A loss you make from the arrangement is not allowable as a deduction to you under any provision of this Act to the extent that you use the funds raised or the credit provided for a private or domestic purpose.

Derivative financial arrangement held for private or domestic purpose

Subsections (5) and (6) apply if:

you are an individual; and

you make a gain or loss from a derivative financial arrangement; and

the arrangement is held, wholly or in part, for a private or domestic purpose.

This Division does not apply to a gain you make from the arrangement to the extent that the arrangement is held or used for a private or domestic purpose.

(6) A loss you make from the arrangement is not allowable as a deduction to you under any provision of this Act to the extent that the arrangement is held or used for a private or domestic purpose.

Method to be applied to take account of gain or loss

230-40 Methods for taking gain or loss into account

Methods available

The methods that can be applied to take account of a gain or loss you make from a financial arrangement are:

the accruals and realisation methods provided for in Subdivision 230-B; or

the fair value method provided for in Subdivision 230-C; or

the foreign exchange retranslation method provided for in Subdivision 230-D; or

the hedging financial arrangement method provided for in Subdivision 230-E; or

the method of relying on your financial reports provided for in Subdivision 230-F; or

a balancing adjustment provided for in Subdivision 230-G.

Note: The methods referred to in paragraphs (b) to (e) only apply if you make an election under the relevant Subdivision and you must meet certain requirements before you can make such an election.

A gain or loss is not taken into account under any of the methods referred to in paragraphs (1)(a), (b), (c) and (e) to the extent to which it is taken into account under the method referred to in paragraph (1)(f) (balancing adjustment).

A gain or loss is not taken into account under the method referred to in paragraph (1)(f) (balancing adjustment) to the extent to which it is taken into account under the method referred to in paragraph (1)(d) (hedging financial arrangement method).

Note: The hedging financial arrangement method may take some account of the gain or loss by reference to the balancing adjustment method (see subsection 230-300(5)).

Elections override accruals and realisation methods

Subdivision 230-B (accruals and realisation method) does not apply to a gain or loss you make from a financial arrangement:

to the extent that Subdivision 230-C (fair value method) applies to the gain or loss; or

Note: See subsection (5) of this section and subsection 230-230(4).

to the extent that Subdivision 230-D (foreign exchange retranslation method) applies to the gain or loss; or

to the extent that Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement; or

if Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) applies to the arrangement; or

if the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc.).

Priorities among election methods

Subdivision 230-C (fair value method) does not apply to a gain or loss you make from a financial arrangement:

to the extent that Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement; or

if Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) applies to the arrangement.

Subdivision 230-D (foreign exchange retranslation method) does not apply to a gain or loss you make from a financial arrangement:

if Subdivision 230-C (fair value method) applies to the arrangement; or

to the extent that Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement; or

if Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) applies to the arrangement.

Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) does not apply to a gain or loss you make from a financial arrangement to the extent that Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement.

Financial arrangement concept

230-45 Financial arrangement

(1) You have a financial arrangement if you have, under an *arrangement:

a cash settlable legal or equitable right to receive a financial benefit; or

a cash settlable legal or equitable obligation to provide a financial benefit; or

a combination of one or more such rights and/or one or more such obligations;

unless:

you also have under the arrangement one or more legal or equitable rights to receive something and/or one or more legal or equitable obligations to provide something; and

for one or more of the rights and/or obligations covered by paragraph (d):

the thing that you have the right to receive, or the obligation to provide, is not a financial benefit; or

the right or obligation is not cash settlable; and

the one or more rights and/or obligations covered by paragraph (e) are not insignificant in comparison with the right, obligation or combination covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (c).

The right, obligation or combination covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (c) constitutes the financial arrangement.

Note 1: Whether your rights and/or obligations under an arrangement constitute a financial arrangement can change over time depending on changes either to the terms of the arrangement or external circumstances (such as particular rights or obligations under the arrangement being satisfied by the parties). For example, a contract may provide for the transfer of a boat in 6 months time and payment of the contract price at the end of 2 years. Until the boat is delivered, there is no financial arrangement because of the operation of paragraphs (d), (e) and (f) above. Once the boat is delivered, there is a financial arrangement because those paragraphs are no longer applicable.

Note 2: The operative provisions of this Division do not apply to all financial arrangements, and only apply partially to some: see the exceptions in Subdivision 230-H.

Note 3: There are some rules in this Division that tell you what happens if an arrangement ceases to be a financial arrangement (see Subdivision 230-G and section 230-505).

(2) A right you have to receive, or an obligation you have to provide, a *financial benefit is cash settlable if, and only if:

the benefit is money or a *money equivalent; or

in the case of a right—you intend to satisfy or settle it by receiving money or a money equivalent or by starting to have, or ceasing to have, another financial arrangement; or

in the case of an obligation—you intend to satisfy or settle it by providing money or a money equivalent or by starting to have, or ceasing to have, another financial arrangement; or

you have a practice of satisfying or settling similar rights or obligations as mentioned in paragraph (b) or (c) (whether or not you intend to satisfy or settle the right or obligation in that way); or

you deal with the right or obligation, or with similar rights or obligations, in order to generate a profit from short-term fluctuations in price, from a dealer’s margin, or from both; or

none of paragraphs (a) to (e) applies but you satisfy subsection (3); or

you are able to settle the right or obligation as mentioned in paragraph (b) or (c) (whether or not you intend to satisfy or settle the right or obligation in that way) and you do not have, as your sole or dominant purpose for entering into the arrangement under which you are to receive or provide the financial benefit, the purpose of receiving or delivering the financial benefit as part of your expected purchase, sale or usage requirements.

A reference in paragraph (b) or (c) to a financial arrangement does not include a reference to something that is a financial arrangement under section 230-50.

Note: Examples of dealing of the kind covered by paragraph (e) are:

dealing with the right or obligation, or similar rights or obligations, on a frequent basis, a short-term basis or on a frequent and short-term basis; and

acquiring the right or obligation, or similar rights or obligations, and managing the resulting risk by entering into offsetting arrangements that provide a profit margin.

You satisfy this subsection if:

the financial benefit is readily convertible into money or a *money equivalent; and

there is a market for the financial benefit that has a high degree of liquidity; and

subsection (4) or (5) is satisfied.

This subsection is satisfied if, for the recipient of the financial benefit, the amount of the money or *money equivalent referred to in paragraph (3)(a) is not subject to a substantial risk of substantial decrease in value.

This subsection is satisfied if your purpose, or one of your purposes, for entering into the arrangement under which you are to receive or provide the financial benefit, is to receive or deliver the financial benefit:

to raise or provide finance; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply—so that it may be converted or liquidated into money or a money equivalent (other than as part of your expected purchase, sale or usage requirements).

230-50 Financial arrangement (equity interest or right or obligation in relation to equity interest)

(1) You also have a financial arrangement if you have an *equity interest. The equity interest constitutes the financial arrangement.

(2) You also have a financial arrangement if:

you have, under an arrangement:

a legal or equitable right to receive something that is a financial arrangement under this section; or

a legal or equitable obligation to provide something that is a financial arrangement under this section; or

a combination of one or more such rights and/or obligations; and

the right, obligation or combination does not constitute, or form part of, a financial arrangement under subsection 230-45(1).

The right, obligation or combination referred to in paragraph (a) constitutes the financial arrangement.

Note 1: Paragraph 230-40(4)(e) prevents the accruals method or the realisation method being applied to something that is a financial arrangement under this section.

Note 2: Subsection 230-270(1) prevents the retranslation method being applied to something that is a financial arrangement under this section.

Note 3: Subsection 230-330(1) prevents the hedging method being applied to something that is a financial arrangement under this section.

230-55 Rights, obligations and arrangements (grouping and disaggregation rules)

Single right or obligation or multiple rights or obligations?

If you have a right to receive 2 or more *financial benefits, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have a separate right to receive each of those financial benefits.

If you have an obligation to provide 2 or more *financial benefits, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have a separate obligation to provide each of those financial benefits.

Subsections (1) and (2) apply for the avoidance of doubt.

Matters relevant to determining what rights and/or obligations constitute particular arrangements

For the purposes of this Division, whether a number of rights and/or obligations are themselves an arrangement or are 2 or more separate arrangements is a question of fact and degree that you determine having regard to the following:

the nature of the rights and/or obligations;

their terms and conditions (including those relating to any payment or other consideration for them);

the circumstances surrounding their creation and their proposed exercise or performance (including what can reasonably be seen as the purposes of one or more of the entities involved);

whether they can be dealt with separately or must be dealt with together;

normal commercial understandings and practices in relation to them (including whether they are regarded commercially as separate things or as a group or series that forms a whole);

the objects of this Division.

In applying this subsection, have regard to the matters referred to in paragraphs (a) to (f) both in relation to the rights and/or obligations separately and in relation to the rights and/or obligations in combination with each other.

General rules

Example 1: Your rights and obligations under a typical convertible note, including the right to convert the note into a share or shares, would constitute one arrangement.

Example 2: Your rights and obligations under a typical price-linked or index-linked bond would constitute one arrangement.

Note 1: If you raised funds by means of a contract that you would not have entered into without entering into another contract, and neither contract could be assigned to a third party without the other also being assigned, this would tend to indicate that your rights and obligations under the 2 contracts together constitute one arrangement.

Note 2: If the commercial effect of your individual rights and/or obligations in a group or series cannot be understood without reference to the group or series as a whole, this would tend to indicate that all of your rights and/or obligations in the group or series together constitute one arrangement.

230-60 When financial benefit provided or received under financial arrangement

Financial benefit provided under financial arrangement

You are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have (or to have had) an obligation to provide a financial benefit under a financial arrangement if:

you have (or had) an obligation to provide the financial benefit in relation to the arrangement; and

the financial benefit would not otherwise be treated as one that you have (or had) an obligation to provide under the arrangement; and

the financial benefit plays an integral role in determining:

whether you make a gain or loss from the arrangement; or

the amount of such a gain or loss.

Paragraph (a) applies even if the entity to which you provide the financial benefit is not a party to the arrangement.

Financial benefit received under financial arrangement

Note: This means that the financial benefits you provide to acquire the financial arrangement (whether to the issuer, a previous holder or a third party) are taken to be financial benefits you provide under the arrangement. The financial benefits you provide may include, for example, fees paid or the forgoing of rights to receive a financial benefit.

You are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have (or to have had) a right to receive a financial benefit under a financial arrangement if:

you have (or had) a right to receive the financial benefit in relation to the arrangement; and

the financial benefit would not otherwise be treated as one that you have (or had) a right to receive under the arrangement; and

the financial benefit plays an integral role in determining:

whether you make a gain or loss from the arrangement; or

the amount of such a gain or loss.

Paragraph (a) applies even if the entity that provides the financial benefit is not a party to the arrangement.

Note: The financial benefits you receive may include, for example, the waiving of an obligation you have to provide a financial benefit.

230-65 Amount of financial benefit relating to more than one financial arrangement etc.

This section applies if:

a financial benefit plays the integral role mentioned in paragraph 230-60(1)(c) or (2)(c) in relation to a financial arrangement; and

either or both of the following apply:

the financial benefit plays that role in relation to one or more other financial arrangements;

(ii) the financial benefit is provided or received for one or more other things that are not financial arrangements.

For the purposes of this Division, determine the amount of the financial benefit that plays that role in relation to a particular financial arrangement by apportioning the actual amount of the financial benefit, on a reasonable basis, between:

that financial arrangement; and

each other financial arrangement (if any) in relation to which the benefit plays that role; and

each other thing (if any) mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(ii).

230-70 Apportionment when financial benefit received or right ceases

Apply subsection (2) in working out whether you make, or will make, a gain or loss (and the amount of the gain or loss) at a time when:

you receive a particular financial benefit under a financial arrangement; or

one of your rights under a financial arrangement ceases.

The gain or loss is to be calculated in nominal (and not *present value) terms.

You must have regard to the extent to which the *financial benefits that you have provided, or are to provide or might provide, under the financial arrangement are reasonably attributable, at the time mentioned in subsection (1), to the benefit or right referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or (b).

Any attribution made under subsection (2) must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles that properly take into account:

the nature of the rights and obligations under the financial arrangement; and

the risks associated with each financial benefit, right and obligation under the arrangement; and

the time value of money.

Note: Generally, no financial benefit you have provided, or are to provide or might provide, under a financial arrangement is reasonably attributable to an amount you receive that is in the nature of interest.

230-75 Apportionment when financial benefit provided or obligation ceases

Apply subsection (2) in working out whether you make, or will make, a gain or loss (and the amount of the gain or loss) at a time when:

you provide a particular financial benefit under the financial arrangement; or

one of your obligations under a financial arrangement ceases.

The gain or loss is to be calculated in nominal (and not *present value) terms.

You must have regard to the extent to which the *financial benefits that you have received, or are to receive or might receive, under the financial arrangement are reasonably attributable, at the time mentioned in subsection (1), to the benefit or obligation referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or (b).

Any attribution made under subsection (2) must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles that properly take into account:

the nature of the rights and obligations under the financial arrangement; and

the risks associated with each financial benefit, right and obligation under the arrangement; and

the time value of money.

Note: Generally, no financial benefit you have received, or are to receive or might receive, under a financial arrangement is reasonably attributable to an amount you provide that is in the nature of interest.

230-80 Consistency in working out gains or losses (integrity measure)

Object of section

The object of this section is to stop you obtaining an inappropriate tax benefit from not working out your gains and losses in a consistent manner.

Consistent treatment for particular financial arrangement

If:

this Division provides that a particular method applies to gains or losses you have from a financial arrangement; and

that method allows you to choose the particular manner in which you apply that method;

you must use that manner consistently for the arrangement for all income years.

Consistent treatment for financial arrangements of essentially the same nature

If:

this Division provides that a particular method applies to gains or losses you have from 2 or more *financial arrangements; and

that method allows you to choose the particular manner in which you apply that method;

you must use that same manner consistently for all of those financial arrangements that are essentially of the same nature.

Subsection (3) does not require you to use that same manner consistently for:

a financial arrangement that you start to have on or after the time a Commonwealth law that amends the method is made; and

a financial arrangement that you start to have before that time;

if:

the Commonwealth law allows you to choose to apply the method in a particular manner (being a manner in which you are not, apart from the Commonwealth law, allowed to apply the method); and

the inconsistency is entirely due to you choosing to apply the method in that manner to the financial arrangement mentioned in paragraph (a).

230-85 Rights and obligations include contingent rights and obligations

To avoid doubt:

a right is treated as a right for the purposes of this Division even if it is subject to a contingency; and

an obligation is treated as an obligation for the purposes of this Division even if it is subject to a contingency.

Subdivision 230-B — The accruals/realisation methods

Table of sections

Guide to Subdivision 230-B

230-90 What this Subdivision is about

Objects of Subdivision

230-95 Objects of this Subdivision

When accruals method or realisation method applies

230-100 When accruals method or realisation method applies

230-105 Sufficiently certain overall gain or loss

230-110 Sufficiently certain gain or loss from particular event

230-115 Sufficiently certain financial benefits

230-120 Financial arrangements with notional principal

The accruals method

230-125 Overview of the accruals method

230-130 Applying accruals method to work out period over which gain or loss is to be spread

230-135 How gain or loss is spread

230-140 Method of spreading gain or loss—effective interest method

230-145 Application of effective interest method where differing income and accounting years

230-150 Election for portfolio treatment of fees

230-155 Election for portfolio treatment of fees where differing income and accounting years

230-160 Portfolio treatment of fees

230-165 Portfolio treatment of premiums and discounts for acquiring portfolio

230-170 Allocating gain or loss to income years

230-172 Applying accruals method to loss resulting from impairment

230-175 Running balancing adjustments

Realisation method

230-180 Realisation method

Reassessment and re-estimation

230-185 Reassessment

230-190 Re-estimation

230-192 Re-estimation—impairments and reversals

230-195 Balancing adjustment if rate of return maintained on re-estimation

230-200 Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal

Guide to Subdivision 230-B

230-90 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision applies the accruals method to determine the amount and timing of gains and losses from a financial arrangement if they are sufficiently certain for such accrual to be done.

This Subdivision applies the realisation method to determine the amount and timing of gains and losses if they are not sufficiently certain to be dealt with under the accruals method.

If the accruals method is applied to a gain or loss on the basis of an estimate of a financial benefit and the benefit when received or provided is more or less than the estimate, a balancing adjustment is made to correct for the underestimate or overestimate.

If the accruals method is being applied to gains and losses from the arrangement and there is a material change to the arrangement, or the circumstances in which it operates, a reassessment is made of whether the accruals method or the realisation method should apply to gains and losses from the arrangement.

A change in circumstances may also cause a re-estimation of gains and losses that the accruals method is being applied to.

Objects of Subdivision

230-95 Objects of this Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are:

to properly recognise gains and losses from *financial arrangements by allocating them to appropriate periods of time; and

to reduce compliance costs by reflecting commercial accounting concepts where appropriate; and

to minimise tax deferral.

When accruals method or realisation method applies

230-100 When accruals method or realisation method applies

When accruals method applies and when realisation method applies

This section tells you when to apply the accruals method and when to apply the realisation method if this Subdivision applies to gains and losses from a financial arrangement.

Accruals method—sufficiently certain overall gain or loss at start time

The accruals method provided for in this Subdivision applies to a gain or loss you have from a financial arrangement if:

the gain or loss is an overall gain or loss from the arrangement; and

the gain or loss is sufficiently certain at the time when you start to have the arrangement; and

you choose to apply the accruals method to the gain or loss, or subsection (4) applies to the gain or loss.

Note: Subsection 230-105(1) tells you when you have a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss.

Accruals method—sufficiently certain particular gain or loss

The accruals method provided for in this Subdivision also applies to a gain or loss you have from a financial arrangement if:

the gain or loss arises from a financial benefit that you are to receive or are to provide under the arrangement; and

the gain or loss:

is sufficiently certain before or at the time when you start to have the arrangement and before you are to receive or provide the benefit; or

becomes sufficiently certain after the time when you start to have the arrangement and before you are to receive or provide the benefit; and

the benefit has not already been taken into account in applying:

the accruals method provided for in this Subdivision; or

the realisation method provided for in this Subdivision;

to another gain or loss from the arrangement.

This subsection has effect subject to subsection (4).

Accruals method—particular gain or loss becomes sufficiently certain

Note: Subsection 230-110(1) tells you when you have a sufficiently certain gain or loss at a particular time.

The accruals method provided for in this Subdivision also applies to a gain or loss you have from a financial arrangement if:

the gain or loss arises from a financial benefit that you are to receive or are to provide under the arrangement; and

the gain or loss becomes sufficiently certain at the time you receive or provide the benefit; and

at least part of the period over which the gain or loss would be spread under that method (assuming that method applied) occurs after the time you receive or provide the benefit.

This subsection has effect subject to subsection (4).

Accruals method—particular gain or loss from qualifying security

Note 1: Subsection 230-110(1) tells you when you have a sufficiently certain gain or loss at a particular time.

Note 2: For the period over which the gain or loss would be spread, see subsections 230-130(3) to (5).

Subsection (3) or (3A) does not apply to a gain or loss that you have from a financial arrangement if:

you are:

an individual; or

an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2), (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

the arrangement is a qualifying security; and

you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7).

Realisation method—gain or loss not sufficiently certain

The realisation method provided for in this Subdivision applies to a gain or loss that you have from a financial arrangement if the accruals method provided for in this Subdivision does not apply to that gain or loss.

Note: Section 230-180 tells you how to apply the realisation method to the gain or loss.

230-105 Sufficiently certain overall gain or loss

You have a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss from a financial arrangement at the time when you start to have the arrangement only if it is sufficiently certain at that time that you will make an overall gain or loss from the arrangement of:

a particular amount; or

at least a particular amount.

The amount of the gain or loss is the amount referred to in paragraph (a) or (b).

Note: Sections 230-70 and 230-75 (about apportionment of financial benefits) only apply in working out whether you make, or will make, a gain or loss (and the amount of the gain or loss) when particular events happen. They do not apply in working out, at the time when you start to have a financial arrangement, whether it is sufficiently certain that you will make an overall gain or loss from the arrangement.

In applying subsection (1), you must:

assume that you will continue to have the financial arrangement for the rest of its life; and

have regard to the extent of the risk that a financial benefit that you are not sufficiently certain to provide or receive under the arrangement may reduce the amount of the gain or loss.

230-110 Sufficiently certain gain or loss from particular event

You have a sufficiently certain gain or loss from a financial arrangement at a particular time if it is sufficiently certain at that time that you make, or will make, a gain or loss from the arrangement of:

a particular amount; or

at least a particular amount;

when one of the following occurs:

you receive a particular financial benefit under the arrangement or one of your rights under the arrangement ceases;

you provide a particular financial benefit under the arrangement or one of your obligations under the arrangement ceases.

The amount of the gain or loss is the amount referred to in paragraph (a) or (b).

In applying subsection (1) to work out whether you have a sufficiently certain gain or loss at a particular time:

have regard to the extent of the risk that a financial benefit that you are not sufficiently certain to provide or receive under the arrangement may reduce the amount of the gain or loss, and the extent to which such a financial benefit is, for the purposes of subsection 230-70(2) or 230-75(2), reasonably attributable to the benefit, right or obligation mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) or (d) of this section at the time mentioned in subsection (1); and

disregard any financial benefit that has already been taken into account, under subsection 230-105(1), in working out, at the time when you started to have the arrangement, the amount of a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which the accruals method applies; and

disregard any financial benefit (or that part of any financial benefit) that has already been taken into account in working out the amount of a sufficiently certain gain or loss from the financial arrangement under subsection (1).

Note: Sections 230-70 and 230-75 allow you to apportion financial benefits provided and financial benefits received in working out the amount of a gain or loss.

230-115 Sufficiently certain financial benefits

In deciding for the purposes of this Subdivision whether it is sufficiently certain at a particular time that you make, or will make, a gain or loss from a financial arrangement:

have regard only to:

*financial benefits that you are sufficiently certain to receive; and

financial benefits that you are sufficiently certain to provide; and

have regard to those financial benefits only to the extent that the amount or value of the benefits is, at that time, fixed or determinable with reasonable accuracy.

Note: The particular time may be the time at which you start to have the arrangement.

A financial benefit that you are to receive or provide is to be treated as one that you are sufficiently certain to receive or to provide only if:

it is reasonably expected that you will receive or provide the financial benefit (assuming that you will continue to have the financial arrangement for the rest of its life); and

at least some of the amount or value of the benefit is, at that time, fixed or determinable with reasonable accuracy.

In applying subsection (2) to the financial benefit:

you must have regard to:

the terms and conditions of the financial arrangement; and

accepted pricing and valuation techniques; and

the economic or commercial substance and effect of the arrangement; and

the contingencies that attach to the other financial benefits that are to be provided or received under the arrangement; and

you must treat the financial benefit as if it were not contingent if it is appropriate to do so having regard to the contingencies that attach to the other financial benefits that are to be received or provided under the arrangement.

(4) In applying paragraph (2)(b) at a particular time (the reference time) to a *financial benefit that depends on a variable that is based on:

an interest rate; or

a rate that solely or primarily reflects the time value of money; or

a rate that solely or primarily reflects a consumer price index; or

a rate that solely or primarily reflects an index prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph;

you must assume that that variable will continue to have the value it has at the reference time.

Despite subsection (4), in applying paragraph (2)(b) at a particular time to a financial benefit that depends on a rate of change to a variable that is based on:

a rate that solely or primarily reflects a consumer price index; or

a rate that solely or primarily reflects an index prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph;

you must assume that the rate of change to that variable will continue to be the rate of change that is current at that time.

If subsection (4) or (5) applies to a gain or loss and you are determining the amount of the gain or loss at a particular time, you must also assume that that variable will continue to have the value that it has at that time.

Subsections (4) and (5) do not limit paragraph (2)(b).

If all of the *financial benefits provided and received under the financial arrangement are denominated in a particular foreign currency, those financial benefits are not to be translated into:

your applicable functional currency; or

if you do not have an applicable functional currency—Australian currency;

for the purposes of applying subsection (2) to the arrangement.

To avoid doubt:

a financial benefit that you have already provided at a particular time is taken to be one that it is, at that time, a financial benefit that you are sufficiently certain to provide; and

a financial benefit that you have already received at a particular time is taken to be one that it is, at that time, a financial benefit that you are sufficiently certain to receive.

230-120 Financial arrangements with notional principal

This section applies to a financial arrangement that you have if, in substance or effect, and having regard to the pricing, terms and conditions of the arrangement:

the arrangement consists of these things:

a leg, the *financial benefits to be provided or received in respect of which are calculated by reference to, or are reasonably related to, a notional principal;

another leg, the financial benefits to be provided or received in respect of which also are calculated by reference to, or are reasonably related to, a notional principal;

if the arrangement includes one or more other things—those things; and

when you start to have the arrangement, the value of the notional principal in relation to one leg is equal to the value of the notional principal in relation to the other leg; and

all or part of the notional principal in relation to each leg is provided or received at a time, regardless of whether that time is different in relation to each leg.

Example: A swap contract.

To avoid doubt, the *financial benefits mentioned in subparagraphs (1)(a)(i) and (ii), and the notional principal in relation to each leg, need not actually be provided or received.

In applying this Subdivision to the financial arrangement:

work out the *financial benefits from the arrangement as follows:

work out the financial benefits from each thing of which the arrangement consists separately from the financial benefits from each other thing of which the arrangement consists;

ensure that results under subparagraph (i) are consistent with the timing and amount of financial benefits to be actually provided or received under the arrangement; and

work out your gains and losses from the arrangement as follows:

work out the gains and losses from each thing of which the arrangement consists separately from the gains and losses from each other thing of which the arrangement consists;

treat the gains and losses mentioned in subparagraph (i) for all of those things as your gains and losses from the arrangement; and

in working out a gain or loss from a thing for the purposes of subparagraph (b)(i), and, if the accruals method applies to the gain or loss, how it is to be spread and allocated:

if the thing is a leg—take into account the amount of the notional principal at a time and in a manner that properly reflects the way in which the financial benefits in respect of that leg are calculated; and

(ii) if the thing is not a leg—take into account an amount relevant to the thing at a time and in a manner that properly reflects the way in which the financial benefits in respect of that thing are calculated.

The accruals method

230-125 Overview of the accruals method

If the accruals method applies to a gain or loss you have from a financial arrangement:

you use section 230-130 to work out the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread; and

you use section 230-135 to work out how to allocate the gain or loss to particular intervals within the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread; and

if an interval to which part of the gain or loss is allocated straddles 2 income years, you use section 230-170 to work out how to allocate that part of the gain or loss allocated between those 2 income years.

230-130 Applying accruals method to work out period over which gain or loss is to be spread

Period over which overall gain or loss is to be spread

If you have a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss from a financial arrangement under subsection 230-105(1), the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread is the period that:

starts when you start to have the arrangement; and

ends when you will cease to have the arrangement.

In applying paragraph (b), you must assume that you will continue to have the arrangement for the rest of its life.

Period over which particular gain or loss is to be spread

If you have a sufficiently certain gain or loss from a financial arrangement under subsection 230-110(1), the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread is the period to which the gain or loss relates. Have regard to the pricing, terms and conditions of the arrangement in working out the period to which the gain or loss relates. This subsection has effect subject to subsections (4) and (5).

The start of the period over which a gain or loss to which subsection (3) applies is to be spread must:

not start earlier than the time when you start to have the financial arrangement; and

other than in the case of a gain or loss to which subsection 230-100(3A) or subsection (4A) of this section applies—not start earlier than the start of the income year during which it becomes sufficiently certain that you will make the gain or loss.

This subsection applies to a gain or loss to which subsection (3) applies, if:

there is an impairment (within the meaning of the *accounting principles) of:

the financial arrangement; or

a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of the arrangement; and

because of the impairment, you make a reassessment under section 230-185 in relation to the arrangement; and

you determine on the reassessment that the gain or loss is not sufficiently certain (whether or not the gain or loss was sufficiently certain before the reassessment); and

there is a reversal of the impairment loss (within the meaning of the accounting principles) that resulted from the impairment; and

because of the reversal, you make a reassessment under section 230-185 in relation to the arrangement; and

you determine on the reassessment that the gain or loss has become sufficiently certain.

Note: For the income years to which the gain or loss is allocated, see section 230-170.

The end of the period over which a gain or loss to which subsection (3) applies is to be spread must not end later than the time when you will cease to have the financial arrangement.

230-135 How gain or loss is spread

How to spread gain or loss

This section tells you how to spread a gain or loss to which the accruals method applies.

Compounding accruals or approximation

The gain or loss is to be spread using:

compounding accruals; or

a method whose results approximate those obtained using the method referred to in paragraph (a) (having regard to the length of the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread).

The following subsections of this section clarify the way in which the gain or loss is to be spread in accordance with paragraph (2)(a).

Intervals to which parts of gain or loss allocated

The intervals to which parts of the gain or loss are allocated must:

not exceed 12 months; and

all be of the same length.

Paragraph (b) does not apply to the first and last intervals. These may be shorter than the other intervals.

Fixing of amount and rate for interval

For each interval:

determine a rate of return; and

determine an amount to which you apply the rate of return.

For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), in determining the amount to which you apply the rate of return for an interval, have regard to:

the amount or value; and

the timing;

of *financial benefits that are to be taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss, and were provided or received by you during the interval.

However, if there is only one financial benefit that is to be taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss, then, for the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), in determining the amount to which you apply the rate of return, have regard to a notional principal:

by reference to which the financial benefit is calculated; or

which is reasonably related to the financial benefit.

Assumption of continuing to hold arrangement for rest of its life

The gain or loss is to be spread assuming that you will continue to have the financial arrangement for the rest of its life.

Regard to be had to financial benefits provided or received in interval

In allocating the gain or loss to intervals, have regard to the *financial benefits to be provided or received in each of those intervals.

230-140 Method of spreading gain or loss—effective interest method

This section clarifies that the method mentioned in subsection (2) of spreading gains and losses is a method covered by paragraph 230-135(2)(b) (methods approximating compounding accruals).

The method is the effective interest method mentioned in *accounting standard AASB 139 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection).

However, this section applies to a particular financial arrangement you have only if:

in a case where there is a discount or premium under the arrangement—when you start to have the arrangement, the annually compounded rate of return applicable to the discount or premium does not exceed 1%; and

when you start to have the arrangement, neither the maximum life of the arrangement (as determined under the terms and conditions of the arrangement) nor the expected life of the arrangement exceeds:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—30 years; or

if the regulations prescribe a different period for the purposes of this subparagraph—that period; and

each financial benefit that you have an obligation to provide or a right to receive under the arrangement, and that gives rise to a gain or loss from the arrangement (other than a gain or loss that is attributable to any discount or premium):

relates to a period not exceeding 12 months; and

is to be provided or received in the period to which it relates; and

Note: Different financial benefits may relate to different periods.

you prepare a financial report for the year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

that financial report is:

prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(a); and

audited in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(b); and

all gains and losses from the arrangement to which the accrual method applies are spread in a way that is consistent with that financial report.

For the purposes of paragraph (3)(a), assume that you will continue to have the arrangement for the rest of its expected life.

230-145 Application of effective interest method where differing income and accounting years

This section applies if:

(a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year); and

(b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year); and

your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and

both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:

prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(a); and

audited in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(b); and

the auditor’s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

For the purposes of paragraph 230-140(3)(d), treat yourself as having prepared a financial report for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement.

Work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the income year as follows:

firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with paragraph 230-140(3)(f) (treating the first year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with paragraph 230-140(3)(f) (treating the second year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next:

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains—add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses—add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain—subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:

using a methodology that is reasonable; and

using the same methodology for the first and second years.

230-150 Election for portfolio treatment of fees

You may make an election for an income year under this section if:

you prepare a financial report for the income year in accordance with:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting made under a foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and

the financial report is audited in accordance with:

the *auditing principles; or

if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report—comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law.

An election under this section is irrevocable.

230-155 Election for portfolio treatment of fees where differing income and accounting years

This section applies if:

(a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year); and

(b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year); and

your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and

both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:

prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-150(1)(a); and

audited in accordance with paragraph 230-150(1)(b); and

the auditor’s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-150(1).

Work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the income year as follows:

firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with subsections 230-160(3) and (4) or 230-165(3) and (4) (treating the first year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with subsections 230-160(3) and (4) or 230-165(3) and (4) (treating the second year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next:

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains—add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses—add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain—subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:

using a methodology that is reasonable; and

using the same methodology for the first and second years.

230-160 Portfolio treatment of fees

This section applies in relation to a financial arrangement if:

you have made an election under section 230-150 in an income year; and

you start to have the financial arrangement in that income year or a later income year; and

the financial arrangement is part of a portfolio of similar financial arrangements; and

a gain or loss to which subsection 230-130(3) applies arises in part from fees in respect of the financial arrangement; and

the fees play an integral role in determining the amount of the gain or loss; and

(f) the net amount of the fees is not expected to be significant relative to an overall gain or loss from the arrangement.

For the purposes of this Division, split the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (1)(d) as follows:

(a) to the extent that it arises from the fees, treat it as a gain or loss from the *financial arrangement (the fees gain or loss) to which subsection 230-130(3) applies;

to the extent that it does not arise from the fees, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which subsection 230-130(3) applies.

Note: The separate gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (b) may itself be split under subsection 230-165(2) (premium/discount gain or loss).

Determination of period for fees gain or loss

The period over which the fees gain or loss is to be spread is the period that you determine to be the expected life of the portfolio, if:

the basis on which you determine the period accords with the spreading of the fees gain or loss for the purposes of the profit or loss statement of the financial report mentioned in paragraph 230-150(1)(a); and

the basis on which you determine the period is set and recorded before any fees in respect of the financial arrangement fall due; and

the period can be justified objectively; and

the period is reasonable in the circumstances.

Spreading the fees gain or loss

The method by which the fees gain or loss is to be spread is the method that you determine, if:

the basis on which you determine the method accords with the spreading of the fees gain or loss for the purposes of the profit or loss statement of the financial report mentioned in paragraph 230-150(1)(a); and

the method is determined before any fees in respect of the financial arrangement fall due; and

the method can be justified objectively; and

the method is reasonable in the circumstances.

To avoid doubt, subsections (3) and (4) apply despite sections 230-130 and 230-135.

230-165 Portfolio treatment of premiums and discounts for acquiring portfolio

This section applies in relation to a financial arrangement if:

you have made an election under section 230-150 in an income year; and

you start to have the financial arrangement in that income year or a later income year; and

the financial arrangement is part of a portfolio of similar financial arrangements; and

a gain or loss to which subsection 230-130(3) applies arises in part from a premium or discount in starting to have the portfolio; and

(e) the gain or loss is not expected to be significant relative to the amount of the gain or loss on the portfolio.

For the purposes of this Division, split the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (1)(d) as follows:

(a) to the extent that it arises from the premium or discount, treat it as a gain or loss from the *financial arrangement (the premium/discount gain or loss) to which subsection 230-130(3) applies;

to the extent that it does not arise from the premium or discount, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which subsection 230-130(3) applies.

Note: The separate gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (b) may itself be split under subsection 230-160(2) (portfolio fees gain or loss).

Determination of period for premium/discount gain or loss

The period over which the premium/discount gain or loss is to be spread is the period that you determine to be the expected life of the portfolio, if:

the basis on which you determine the period accords with the spreading of the premium/discount gain or loss for the purposes of the profit or loss statement of the financial report mentioned in paragraph 230-150(1)(a); and

(b) the basis on which you determine the period is set and recorded before you start to have the *financial arrangement; and

the period can be justified objectively; and

the period is reasonable in the circumstances.

Spreading the premium/discount gain or loss

The method by which the premium/discount gain or loss is to be spread is the method that you determine, if:

the basis on which you determine the method accords with the spreading of the premium/discount gain or loss for the purposes of the profit or loss statement of the financial report mentioned in paragraph 230-150(1)(a); and

the method is determined before you start to have the financial arrangement; and

the method can be justified objectively; and

the method is reasonable in the circumstances.

To avoid doubt, subsections (3) and (4) apply despite sections 230-130 and 230-135.

230-170 Allocating gain or loss to income years

You are taken, for the purposes of section 230-15, to make, for an income year, a gain or loss equal to a part of a gain or loss if:

that part of the gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 230-135; and

that interval falls wholly within that income year.

If:

a part of a gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 230-135; and

that interval straddles 2 income years;

you are taken, for purposes of section 230-15, to make a gain or loss equal to so much of that part of the gain or loss as is allocated between those income years on a reasonable basis.

Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a part of a gain or loss if:

subsection 230-100(3A) or 230-130(4A) applies to the gain or loss; and

that part of the gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 230-135; and

that interval ends before or during the income year during which the gain or loss becomes sufficiently certain (as mentioned in paragraph 230-100(3A)(b) or 230-130(4A)(f), whichever is applicable).

Instead, you are taken, for the purposes of section 230-15, to make, for that income year, a gain or loss equal to that part of that gain or loss.

If:

a *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group has a financial arrangement; and

(b) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time); and

immediately after the leaving time, the head company no longer has the arrangement because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group;

an income year of the group is taken, for the purposes of applying this section to the group and the arrangement, to end at the leaving time.

230-172 Applying accruals method to loss resulting from impairment

This section applies if:

there is an impairment (within the meaning of the *accounting principles) of:

a financial arrangement; or

a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of a financial arrangement; and

you make a loss from the financial arrangement as a result of the impairment; and

the accruals method applies to the loss.

You cannot deduct a loss you make for an income year under section 230-15, to the extent that the loss results from the impairment (including as affected by any later reversal of the impairment loss (within the meaning of the *accounting principles) that resulted from the impairment).

Disregard subsection (2) for the purposes of paragraph (c) of step 1 of the method statement in subsection 230-445(1).

230-175 Running balancing adjustments

Overestimate of financial benefit to be received

You are taken for the purposes of this Division to make a loss from a financial arrangement if:

a provision of this Subdivision has applied on the basis that you were sufficiently certain, at a particular time, to receive a financial benefit of, or of at least, a particular amount under the arrangement; and

when you receive the benefit (or the time comes for you to receive the benefit), the amount you receive (or are to receive) is nil or is less than the amount estimated.

The amount of the loss is equal to the difference between the amount estimated and the amount you receive (or are to receive). You are taken to have made the loss for the income year in which you receive the benefit (or in which the time comes for you to receive the benefit).

Subsection (1) does not apply to the extent that the difference results from:

an impairment (within the meaning of the *accounting principles) of:

the financial arrangement; or

a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of the arrangement; or

you writing off, as a bad debt, a right to a financial benefit (or a part of a financial benefit).

Underestimate of financial benefit to be received

You are taken for the purposes of this Division to make a gain from a financial arrangement if:

a provision of this Subdivision has applied on the basis that you were sufficiently certain at a particular time to receive a financial benefit of, or of at least, a particular amount under the arrangement; and

when you receive the benefit, or the time comes for you to receive the benefit, the amount you receive, or are to receive, is more than the amount estimated.

The amount of the gain is equal to the difference between the amount estimated and the amount you receive or are to receive. You are taken to have made that gain in the income year in which you receive the benefit or in which the time comes for you to receive the benefit.

Subsection (2) does not apply to the extent that the difference results from the reversal of an impairment loss (within the meaning of the *accounting principles) that resulted from an impairment (within the meaning of the accounting principles) of:

the financial arrangement; or

a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of the arrangement.

Overestimate of financial benefit to be provided

You are taken for the purposes of this Division to make a gain from a financial arrangement if:

a provision of this Subdivision has applied on the basis that you were sufficiently certain at a particular time to provide a financial benefit of, or of at least, a particular amount under the arrangement; and

when you provide the benefit, or the time comes for you to provide the benefit, the amount you provide, or are to provide, is nil or is less than the amount estimated.

The amount of the gain is equal to the difference between the amount estimated and the amount you provide or are to provide. You are taken to have made that gain in the income year in which you provide the benefit or in which the time comes for you to provide the benefit.

Underestimate of financial benefit to be provided

You are taken for the purposes of this Division to make a loss from a financial arrangement if:

a provision of this Subdivision has applied on the basis that you were sufficiently certain at a particular time to provide a financial benefit of, or of at least, a particular amount under the arrangement; and

when you provide the benefit, or the time comes for you to provide the benefit, the amount you are to provide is more than the estimated amount referred to in paragraph (a).

The amount of the loss is equal to the difference between the amount estimated and the amount you are to provide. You are taken to have made that loss in the income year in which you provide the benefit or in which the time comes for you to provide the benefit.

Realisation method

230-180 Realisation method

If a gain or loss is to be taken into account using the realisation method, you are taken, for the purposes of section 230-15, to make the gain or loss for the income year in which the gain or loss occurs.

Note: Sections 230-70 and 230-75 allow you to apportion financial benefits provided and financial benefits received in working out the amount of the gain or loss.

For the purposes of subsection (1), a gain or loss from a financial arrangement is taken to occur at:

if the last of the *financial benefits, rights and obligations taken into account in determining the amount of the gain or loss is a financial benefit—the time the financial benefit:

is provided; or

if the financial benefit is not provided at the time when it is due to be provided under the arrangement and it is reasonable to expect that the financial benefit will be provided—is due to be provided; or

if the last of the financial benefits, rights and obligations taken into account in determining the amount of the gain or loss is a right to receive a financial benefit or an obligation to provide a financial benefit—the time:

if the right or obligation ceases before the financial benefit is provided—the right or obligation ceases; or

otherwise—the financial benefit is provided.

This subsection has effect subject to subsection (3).

For the purposes of subsection (1), you make a loss from a financial arrangement from writing off, as a bad debt, a right to a financial benefit (or a part of a financial benefit) if:

the financial benefit was taken into account in working out the amount of a gain from the arrangement and the gain has been included in your assessable income under this Division; or

the right is one in respect of money that you lent in the ordinary course of your business of lending money; or

the right is one that you bought in the ordinary course of your business of lending money.

The loss referred to in subsection (3) occurs when you write off the right to the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit) as a bad debt.

The amount of the loss referred to in subsection (3) is:

if paragraph (3)(a) applies—so much of the gain referred to in that paragraph as is reasonably attributable to the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit); or

if paragraph (3)(b) applies—the amount of the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit); or

if paragraph (3)(c) applies—the amount of the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit) but only up to the value of the financial benefit you provided to acquire the right to the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit).

For the purposes of this Act, a deduction for the loss referred to in subsection (3) is to be treated as a deduction of a bad debt.

Note: Various provisions in this Act and the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 restrict the availability of deductions for bad debts and make provision in relation to the recoupment of amounts in relation to bad debts that have been written off. These provisions are set out in subsection 25-35(5).

Reassessment and re-estimation

230-185 Reassessment

You must make a fresh assessment of which gains and losses from a financial arrangement the accruals method should apply to, and which gains and losses from that arrangement the realisation method should apply to, if:

the accruals method, or the realisation method, provided for in this Subdivision applies to gains and losses from the arrangement; and

there is a material change to:

the terms and conditions of the arrangement; or

circumstances that affect the arrangement.

Without limiting subsection (1), the following changes are material changes to the terms and conditions of, or circumstances that affect, the financial arrangement:

a change to the terms or conditions of the arrangement in a way that alters the essential nature of the arrangement (for example, by altering it from a *debt interest to an *equity interest or from an equity interest to a debt interest);

a change to the terms or conditions of the arrangement in a way that materially affects the contingencies on which significant obligations and rights under the arrangement are dependent (for example, by introducing such a contingency or removing such a contingency);

a change in circumstances that makes something that:

materially affects significant obligations and rights under the arrangement; and

was previously dependent on a contingency;

no longer dependent on a contingency (because, for example, only one of a number of previously possible contingencies is realised);

a change to:

the terms on which credit is to be provided to an entity that is not a party to the arrangement; or

the credit rating of an entity that is not a party to the arrangement;

if a significant obligation or right under the arrangement is dependent on that credit being provided or that rating being maintained;

if the arrangement is, or includes, a financial asset or financial liability and you prepare your financial reports in accordance with:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting made under a foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

a change to the terms or conditions of, or circumstances that affect, the arrangement that are sufficient for the financial asset or financial liability to be treated as impaired for the purposes of those principles or standards.

You do not need to make a reassessment under this section merely because of a change in the fair value of the financial arrangement.

230-190 Re-estimation

When re-estimation necessary

You re-estimate a gain or loss from a financial arrangement under subsection (5) if:

the accruals method applies to the gain or loss; and

circumstances arise that materially affect:

the amount or value; or

the timing;

of *financial benefits that were taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss; and

the circumstances do not give rise to a re-estimation under section 230-200.

You must re-estimate the gain or loss as soon as reasonably practicable after you become aware of the circumstances referred to in paragraph (1)(b), if subsection (1) applies.

Without limiting subsection (1), the following are circumstances of the kind referred to in paragraph (1)(b):

a material change in market conditions that are relevant to the amount or value of the *financial benefits to be received or provided under the financial arrangement;

cash flows that were previously estimated becoming known and the difference between the cash flows that become known and the cash flows that were previously estimates is not insignificant;

a right to, or a part of a right to, a financial benefit under the arrangement is written off as a bad debt;

you have made a reassessment under section 230-185 in relation to gains or losses under the arrangement and you have determined on the reassessment under that section that the accruals method should continue to apply to those gains or losses.

You also re-estimate a gain or loss from a financial arrangement under subsection (5) if:

the gain or loss is spread using the method referred to in paragraph 230-135(2)(b) in accordance with section 230-140 (effective interest method); and

you recalculate the effective interest rate in accordance with that method; and

the terms and conditions of the arrangement provide for reset dates to occur no more than 12 months apart; and

the maximum life of the arrangement (as determined under the terms and conditions of the arrangement) is more than 12 months.

You must re-estimate the gain or loss at the relevant reset date if subsection (3A) applies.

You do not re-estimate the gain or loss from a financial arrangement under subsection (5) merely because of a change in the credit rating, or the creditworthiness, of a party or parties to the arrangement.

Nature of re-estimation

Making a re-estimation in relation to a gain or loss under this subsection involves:

a fresh determination of the amount of the gain or loss; and

a reapplication of the accruals method to the redetermined gain or loss to make a fresh allocation of the part of the redetermined gain or loss that has not already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made to intervals ending after the re-estimation is made.

Basis for re-estimation

You may make the fresh allocation of the gain or loss under subsection (5) on these bases:

if you satisfy subsection (7) in relation to the financial arrangement—by maintaining the rate of return being used and adjusting the amount to which you apply the rate of return to the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the maintained rate of return;

in any case—by adjusting the rate of return and maintaining the amount to which the adjusted rate of return is to be applied.

The object to be achieved by both bases is to allow you to bring the remainder of the gain or loss based on the new estimates properly to account over the remainder of the period over which you spread the gain or loss.

Note: The amount referred to in paragraph (b) is the amount to which the previous rate of return was being applied immediately before the re-estimation.

You satisfy this subsection in relation to a financial arrangement if every re-estimation you make under subsection (5) in relation to a gain or loss from the arrangement is made in accordance with:

financial reports of the kind referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) that are audited as referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(b) (regardless of whether Subdivision 230-F (reliance on financial reports method) is to apply to a particular financial arrangement); and

*accounting standard AASB 139 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph).

230-192 Re-estimation—impairments and reversals

This section applies if the re-estimation mentioned in section 230-190 arises because of:

an impairment (within the meaning of the *accounting principles) of:

the financial arrangement; or

a financial asset or financial liability that forms part of the arrangement; or

a reversal of an impairment loss (within the meaning of the accounting principles) that resulted from such an impairment.

Despite paragraph 230-190(6)(a), you must make the fresh allocation in accordance with paragraph 230-190(6)(b).

Losses non-deductible

You cannot deduct a loss you make for an income year under section 230-15, to the extent that the loss results from:

the impairment (including as affected by any later reversal of the impairment loss that resulted from the impairment); or

the operation of subsection (7).

Disregard subsection (3) for the purposes of paragraph (c) of step 1 of the method statement in subsection 230-445(1).

Reversals

Subsections (7) and (8) apply to the part of the gain or loss that is to be reallocated in accordance with paragraph 230-190(6)(b), if:

the fresh determination under paragraph 230-190(5)(a) that arose because of the reversal resulted in that part being a gain; and

there are losses that:

resulted from the impairment; and

you could have deducted apart from subsection 230-172(2) or subsection (3) of this section.

Paragraph (5)(b) does not apply to a loss to the extent that:

the loss reflects the amount of a loss you make under paragraph 230-195(1)(b) or (c); and

the loss you make under paragraph 230-195(1)(b) or (c) relates to you writing off, as a bad debt, a right to receive a financial benefit (or a part of a financial benefit).

Treat the fresh determination as having resulted in that part being a loss, if the total of the losses mentioned in paragraph (5)(b) of this section exceeds the amount of the gain mentioned in paragraph (5)(a). The amount of the loss is equal to the amount of the excess.

Otherwise, reduce the amount of that gain by the total of those losses.

230-195 Balancing adjustment if rate of return maintained on re-estimation

If you make a fresh allocation of the gain or loss on the basis referred to in paragraph 230-190(6)(a), you must make the following balancing adjustment:

if you re-estimate a gain and the amount to which you apply the rate of return increases—you make a gain from the financial arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the increase;

if you re-estimate a gain and the amount to which you apply the rate of return decreases—you make a loss from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the decrease;

if you re-estimate a loss and the amount to which you apply the rate of return increases—you make a loss from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the increase;

if you re-estimate a loss and the amount to which you apply the rate of return decreases—you make a gain from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the decrease.

Subsection (3) applies if:

the re-estimation is made wholly or partly on the basis that you have written off, as a bad debt, a right to receive a financial benefit (or a part of a financial benefit); and

the right:

is not one in respect of money that you lent in the ordinary course of your business of lending money; and

is not one that you bought in the ordinary course of your business of lending money.

The balancing adjustment to be made under paragraph (1)(b), to the extent that it relates to the writing off of the bad debt, must not exceed so much of the gain in relation to the financial arrangement as:

has been assessed under this Division; and

is reasonably attributable to the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit).

Subsection (5) applies if:

the re-estimation is made wholly or partly on the basis that you have written off, as a bad debt, a right to receive a financial benefit; and

the right is one that you bought in the ordinary course of your business of lending money.

The balancing adjustment to be made under paragraph (1)(b), to the extent that it relates to the writing off of the bad debt, must not exceed the value of the financial benefit you provided to acquire the right to the financial benefit (or the part of the financial benefit).

For the purposes of this Act, a deduction for the balancing adjustment referred to in subsection (3) is to be treated as a deduction of a bad debt.

Note: Various provisions in this Act and the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 restrict the availability of deductions for bad debts and make provision in relation to the recoupment of amounts in relation to bad debts that have been written off. These provisions are set out in subsection 25-35(5).

230-200 Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal

Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal

You also re-estimate a gain or loss from a financial arrangement under subsection (2) if:

the accruals method applies to the gain or loss; and

a balancing adjustment is made in relation to the arrangement under Subdivision 230-G because you transfer to another entity:

a proportionate share of all of your rights and/or obligations under the arrangement; or

a right or obligation that you have under the arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit; or

a proportionate share of a right or obligation that you have under the arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit.

You must re-estimate the gain or loss as soon as reasonably practicable after the transfer occurs.

Nature of re-estimation

Making a re-estimation in relation to a gain or loss under this subsection involves:

a fresh determination of the amount of the gain or loss disregarding:

*financial benefits; and

amounts of the gain or loss that have already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made;

to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the proportionate share, or the right or obligation, referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and

a reapplication of the accruals method to the redetermined gain or loss to make a fresh allocation of the part of that gain or loss that has not already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made to intervals ending after the re-estimation is made.

Basis for re-estimation

You make the fresh allocation of the gain or loss under subsection (2) by maintaining the rate of return being used and adjusting the amount to which you apply the rate of return to the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the maintained rate of return. The object to be achieved by the fresh allocation is to allow you to bring the redetermined gain or loss properly to account over the remainder of the period over which you spread the gain or loss.

Subdivision 230-C — Fair value method

Table of sections

230-205 Objects of this Subdivision

230-210 Fair value election

230-215 Fair value election where differing income and accounting years

230-220 Financial arrangements to which fair value election applies

230-225 Financial arrangements to which election does not apply

230-230 Applying fair value method to gains and losses

230-235 Splitting financial arrangements into 2 financial arrangements

230-240 When election ceases to apply

230-245 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply

230-205 Objects of this Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are:

to allow you to align the tax treatment of gains and losses from *financial arrangements with the accounting treatment that applies where assets and liabilities are classified or designated as at fair value through profit or loss; and

to facilitate efficient price-making; and

to achieve the above objects without allowing you to obtain an inappropriate tax benefit.

230-210 Fair value election

Election

(1) You may make a fair value election under this section if you are eligible under subsection (2) to make the election for the income year in which you make the election.

Eligibility to make fair value election for an income year

(2) You are eligible to make a fair value election for an income year if:

you prepare a financial report for that income year in accordance with:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting made under a foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and

the financial report is audited in accordance with:

the *auditing principles; or

if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report—comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law.

Note: Section 230-500 allows regulations to be made specifying particular foreign accounting and auditing standards as ones that are to be treated as comparable with Australian accounting and auditing principles for the purposes of this Division.

Election irrevocable

A fair value election is irrevocable.

Note: The election may cease to have effect, or cease to apply to a particular financial arrangement, under section 230-240.

230-215 Fair value election where differing income and accounting years

This section applies if:

(a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year); and

(b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year); and

your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and

both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:

prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(a); and

audited in accordance with paragraph 230-210(2)(b); and

the auditor’s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-210(2).

Work out the gain or loss you make from the financial arrangement for the income year as follows:

firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with section 230-230 (treating the first year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with section 230-230 (treating the second year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next:

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains—add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses—add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain—subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:

using a methodology that is reasonable; and

using the same methodology for the first and second years.

(5) For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), treat a methodology that attributes the gain or loss on a pro-rata basis as not being reasonable.

230-220 Financial arrangements to which fair value election applies

A fair value election applies in relation to *financial arrangements that:

are *Division 230 financial arrangements; and

are recognised in financial reports of the kind referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) that are audited, or required to be audited, as referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(b); and

are assets or liabilities that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

to classify, designate or (in whole or in part) otherwise treat, in the financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss; and

you start to have in the income year in which you make the election or in a later income year.

This subsection has effect subject to section 230-225.

If, but for this subsection, paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would not be satisfied in relation to a financial arrangement because the arrangement is an intra-group transaction for the purposes of:

*accounting standard AASB 127 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph); or

if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report—a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.

Note: Financial arrangements between members of a consolidated group or MEC group are not covered by this subsection because the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) operates to treat them as not being financial arrangements for the purposes of this Division.

If:

the financial arrangement would not be a financial arrangement if the following provisions were disregarded:

(i) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with offshore banking units);

(ii) Part IIIB of that Act (which deals with Australian branches of foreign banks etc.); and

paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities; and

the fair value election is made by:

(i) if section 121EB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies—the OBU mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section); or

if section 160ZZW of that Act applies—the bank mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section);

paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.

230-225 Financial arrangements to which election does not apply

A fair value election does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

the arrangement is an *equity interest; and

you are the issuer of the equity interest.

A fair value election does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

you are:

an individual; or

an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2), (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

the arrangement is a qualifying security; and

you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7).

A fair value election does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

the election is made by the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

the election specifies that the election is not to apply to financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and

the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

A fair value election does not apply to a financial arrangement if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

230-230 Applying fair value method to gains and losses

You make a gain or loss for an income year from a financial arrangement to which a fair value election applies if:

the principles or standards mentioned in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) require you to recognise a gain or loss in profit or loss for the income year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c); or

in the case of an arrangement to which subsection 230-220(2) applies—the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) would have required you to recognise a gain or loss in profit or loss for the year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-220(2)(b); or

in the case of an arrangement to which subsection 230-220(3) applies—the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) would have required you to recognise a gain or loss in profit or loss for the year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities.

Note: Subsection 230-40(7) provides that an election under Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) or Subdivision 230-F (method of relying on financial reports) may override a fair value election.

The gain or loss you make is the gain or loss the principles or standards require, or would have required, you to recognise in profit or loss as mentioned in subsection (1).

Subsection (3) applies if:

a *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group has a financial arrangement; and

a fair value election applies to the arrangement; and

(c) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time); and

immediately after the leaving time, the head company no longer has the arrangement because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group.

The gain or loss the group makes from the arrangement for the income year in which the leaving time occurs is taken to be the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) would require the group to recognise as at fair value through profit or loss for the income year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c) if:

the circumstances that existed in relation to the arrangement (including its value) immediately before the leaving time had continued to exist until the end of the income year; and

any circumstances that arise in relation to the financial arrangement after the leaving time were disregarded.

Subdivision does not apply to extent gains or losses not recognised as at fair value

This Subdivision does not apply to a gain or loss you make from the financial arrangement, to the extent:

you are required, as mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c), to otherwise treat as at fair value through profit and loss the assets or liabilities that the financial arrangement is; and

the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) do not require you to recognise the gain or loss as at fair value through profit or loss.

Note: See also subsection 230-40(5).

230-235 Splitting financial arrangements into 2 financial arrangements

If:

a financial arrangement is constituted only in part by an asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c); and

a fair value election would apply to the arrangement if it were constituted solely by that asset or liability;

the provisions of this Division (other than this section) apply to the arrangement as if it were instead 2 separate financial arrangements.

The 2 separate *financial arrangements are:

one consisting of the part referred to in paragraph (1)(a); and

one consisting of the remaining part.

230-240 When election ceases to apply

A fair value election ceases to have effect from the start of an income year if you cease to be eligible under subsection 230-210(2) to make the fair value election for that income year.

Subsection (1) does not prevent you from making a new fair value election at a later time if you become, at that later time, eligible under subsection 230-210(2) to make a fair value election for an income year.

Note: The new election will only apply to financial arrangements you start to have after the start of the income year in which the new election is made.

A fair value election ceases to apply to a particular financial arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of paragraph 230-220(1)(b) or (c) during that income year.

If the election ceases to apply to a particular financial arrangement under subsection (3), the election cannot subsequently reapply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of paragraphs 230-220(1)(b) and (c) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

230-245 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply

You must make balancing adjustments under subsection (2) if a fair value election ceases to have effect under subsection 230-240(1).

The balancing adjustments under this subsection are the balancing adjustments you would make under Subdivision 230-G for each of the *financial arrangements to which the election applied if you disposed of the arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to have effect.

You must make a balancing adjustment under subsection (4) if a fair value election ceases to apply to a particular financial arrangement under subsection 230-240(3).

The balancing adjustment under this subsection is the balancing adjustment you would make under Subdivision 230-G if you disposed of the financial arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to apply to the arrangement.

If a balancing adjustment is made under subsection (2) or (4) in relation to a financial arrangement, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceased to have effect or ceased to apply to the arrangement.

In determining, for the purposes of the balancing adjustment under subsection (2) or (4) or for the purposes of subsection (5), the fair value of the financial arrangement at a time, disregard any changes in the fair value to the extent that:

you are required, as mentioned in paragraph 230-220(1)(c), to otherwise treat the financial arrangement as at fair value through profit and loss; and

the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-210(2)(a) do not require you to recognise the changes as at fair value through profit or loss.

Subdivision 230-D — Foreign exchange retranslation method

Table of sections

230-250 Objects of this Subdivision

230-255 Foreign exchange retranslation election

230-260 Foreign exchange retranslation election where differing income and accounting years

230-265 Financial arrangements to which general election applies

230-270 Financial arrangements to which general election does not apply

230-275 Balancing adjustment for election in relation to qualifying forex accounts

230-280 Applying foreign exchange retranslation method to gains and losses

230-285 When election ceases to apply

230-290 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply

230-250 Objects of this Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are:

to allow you to align the tax treatment of gains and losses from foreign exchange rate changes with the accounting treatment of profits and losses from such changes; and

to achieve this without allowing you to obtain an inappropriate tax benefit.

230-255 Foreign exchange retranslation election

General election

(1) You may make a foreign exchange retranslation election under this subsection if you are eligible under subsection (2) to make the election for the income year in which you make the election.

Eligibility to make election

You are eligible to make a foreign exchange retranslation election for an income year if:

you prepare a financial report for that income year in accordance with:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting made under a foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and

the financial report is audited in accordance with:

the *auditing principles; or

if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report—comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law.

Note: Section 230-500 allows regulations to be made specifying particular foreign accounting and auditing standards as ones that are to be treated as comparable with Australian accounting and auditing principles for the purposes of this Division.

Election in relation to qualifying forex accounts

(3) You may make a foreign exchange retranslation election under this subsection in relation to a *financial arrangement if:

the arrangement is a qualifying forex account; and

you have not made a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection (1) that applies to the account.

You may make the election even if you start to have the arrangement before you make the election.

Financial arrangements to which election in relation to qualifying forex accounts applies

The election under subsection (3) applies to the financial arrangement:

from the time when you start to have the arrangement if the election is made before you start to have the arrangement; or

from the start of the income year in which the election is made if you make the election after you start to have the arrangement.

Election irrevocable

A foreign exchange retranslation election is irrevocable.

Note: The election may cease to apply under section 230-285.

230-260 Foreign exchange retranslation election where differing income and accounting years

This section applies if:

(a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year); and

(b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year); and

your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and

both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:

prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-255(2)(a); and

audited in accordance with paragraph 230-255(2)(b); and

the auditor’s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-255(2).

Work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the income year as follows:

firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with section 230-280 (treating the first year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with section 230-280 (treating the second year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next:

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains—add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses—add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain—subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:

using a methodology that is reasonable; and

using the same methodology for the first and second years.

(5) For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), treat a methodology that attributes the gain or loss on a pro-rata basis as not being reasonable.

230-265 Financial arrangements to which general election applies

A foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) applies to each of your *financial arrangements:

that are *Division 230 financial arrangements; and

that are recognised in financial reports of a kind referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(a) that are audited, or required to be audited, as referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(b); and

in relation to which you are required by:

*accounting standard AASB 121 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph); or

if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report—a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

to recognise, in the financial reports, amounts in profit or loss (if any) that are attributable to changes in currency exchange rates; and

that you start to have in the income year in which you make the election or in a later income year.

This subsection has effect subject to section 230-270.

Note: The election also has consequences under Subdivision 775-F for arrangements that are not Division 230 financial arrangements.

If, but for this subsection, paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would not be satisfied in relation to a financial arrangement because the arrangement is an intra-group transaction for the purposes of:

*accounting standard AASB 127 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph); or

if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report—a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.

Note: Financial arrangements between members of a consolidated group or MEC group are not covered by this subsection because the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) operates to treat them as not being financial arrangements for the purposes of this Division.

If:

the financial arrangement would not be a financial arrangement if the following provisions were disregarded:

(i) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with offshore banking units);

(ii) Part IIIB of that Act (which deals with Australian branches of foreign banks etc.); and

paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities; and

the foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) is made by:

(i) if section 121EB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies—the OBU mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section); or

if section 160ZZW of that Act applies—the bank mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section);

paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.

230-270 Financial arrangements to which general election does not apply

For the purposes of this Division, a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) does not apply to a financial arrangement if the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc.).

For the purposes of this Division, a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

you are:

an individual; or

an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2), (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

the arrangement is a qualifying security; and

you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7).

A foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

the election is made by the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

the election specifies that the election is not to apply to financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and

the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

A foreign exchange retranslation election does not apply to a financial arrangement if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

230-275 Balancing adjustment for election in relation to qualifying forex accounts

If you make a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(3) in relation to a financial arrangement after you start to have the arrangement, you must make a balancing adjustment under subsection (2).

The balancing adjustment under this subsection is the balancing adjustment you would make under Subdivision 230-G if you ceased to have the arrangement for its fair value at the time when the election started to apply to the arrangement (but only to the extent to which the balancing adjustment is reasonably attributable to a currency exchange rate effect).

230-280 Applying foreign exchange retranslation method to gains and losses

General election

You make a gain or loss from a financial arrangement for an income year if:

a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) applies to the arrangement; and

any of the following subparagraphs apply:

the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) requires you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year;

if subsection 230-265(2) applies to the arrangement—the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) would have required you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(2)(b);

if subsection 230-265(3) applies to the arrangement—the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) would have required you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss for the year that is attributable to currency exchange rates mentioned in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities.

The amount of the gain or loss is the amount the standard requires, or would have required, you to recognise.

Election in relation to qualifying forex accounts

Note: See subsection 230-40(6).

You make a gain or loss from a financial arrangement for an income year if:

a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(3) applies to the arrangement; and

the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c):

requires you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year; or

would require you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year if that standard applied to the arrangement; or

would require you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(2)(b); or

would require you to recognise a particular amount in profit or loss in relation to that arrangement for that income year if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(2)(b) and if that standard applied to the arrangement.

The amount of the gain or loss is the amount the standard requires, or would require, you to recognise.

Subsidiary leaving group

Subsection (4) applies if:

a *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group has a financial arrangement; and

a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) or (3) applies to the arrangement; and

(c) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time); and

immediately after the leaving time, the head company no longer has the arrangement because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group.

The gain or loss the group makes from the financial arrangement for the income year in which the leaving time occurs is taken to be the gain or loss that the standard referred to in paragraph 230-265(1)(c) would require the group to recognise in profit or loss in relation to the arrangement for that income year if:

the circumstances that existed in relation to the arrangement (including its value) immediately before the leaving time had continued to exist until the end of the income year; and

any circumstances that arise in relation to the arrangement after the leaving time were disregarded.

230-285 When election ceases to apply

General election

A foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) ceases to have effect from the start of an income year if you cease to be eligible under subsection 230-255(2) to make a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) for that income year.

Subsection (1) does not prevent you from making a new foreign exchange retranslation election at a later time if you become, at that later time, eligible under subsection 230-255(2), to make a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) for that income year.

Note: The new election will only apply to financial arrangements you start to have after the start of the income year in which the new election is made.

A foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) ceases to apply to a financial arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of paragraph 230-265(1)(b) or (c) during that income year.

If the election ceases to apply to a particular financial arrangement under subsection (3), the election cannot subsequently reapply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of paragraphs 230-265(1)(b) and (c) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

Election in relation to qualifying forex accounts

A foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(3) ceases to apply to a financial arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of subsection 230-255(3) during that income year.

If the election ceases to apply to a particular financial arrangement under subsection (5), the election cannot subsequently reapply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of subsection 230-255(3) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

230-290 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply

You must make balancing adjustments under subsection (2) if a foreign exchange retranslation election ceases to have effect under subsection 230-285(1).

The balancing adjustments under this subsection are the balancing adjustments you would make under Subdivision 230-G for each of the *financial arrangements to which the election applied if you disposed of the arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to have effect (but only to the extent to which the balancing adjustment is reasonably attributable to a currency exchange rate effect).

You must make a balancing adjustment under this section if a foreign exchange retranslation election ceases to apply to a particular financial arrangement under subsection 230-285(3) or (5).

The balancing adjustment under this subsection is the balancing adjustment you would make under Subdivision 230-G if you disposed of the financial arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to apply to the arrangement (but only to the extent to which the balancing adjustment is reasonably attributable to a currency exchange rate effect).

If a balancing adjustment is made under subsection (2) or (4) in relation to a financial arrangement, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceased to have effect or ceased to apply to the arrangement.

Subdivision 230-E — Hedging financial arrangements method

Table of sections

230-295 Objects of this Subdivision

230-300 Applying hedging financial arrangement method to gains and losses

230-305 Table of events and allocation rules

230-310 Aligning tax classification of gain or loss from hedging financial arrangement with tax classification of hedged item

230-315 Hedging financial arrangement election

230-320 Hedging financial arrangement election where differing income and accounting years

230-325 Hedging financial arrangements to which election applies

230-330 Hedging financial arrangements to which election does not apply

230-335 Hedging financial arrangement and hedged item

230-340 Generally whole arrangement must be hedging financial arrangement

230-345 Requirements not satisfied because of honest mistake or inadvertence

230-350 Derivative financial arrangement and foreign currency hedge

230-355 Recording requirements

230-360 Determining basis for allocating gain or loss

230-365 Effectiveness of the hedge

230-370 When election ceases to apply

230-375 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply

230-380 Commissioner may determine that requirement met

230-385 Consequences of failure to meet requirements

230-295 Objects of this Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are:

to facilitate the efficient management of financial risk by reducing after-tax mismatches and better aligning tax treatment where hedging takes place; and

to minimise tax deferral and tax motivated practices (including tax deferral arising from such practices as tax advantaged selection from among possible hedges and inappropriate selection of tax treatment).

230-300 Applying hedging financial arrangement method to gains and losses

If you have a hedging financial arrangement to which a hedging financial arrangement election applies, the gain or loss you make for an income year from the arrangement is worked out under this section and section 230-310 instead of under Subdivision 230-B, 230-C, 230-D, 230-F or 230-G.

Except where subsection (5) applies, the gain or loss you make from the hedging financial arrangement is equal to the overall gain or loss you make from the arrangement.

The gain or loss you make from the hedging financial arrangement is allocated over income years according to the determination referred to in subsection 230-360(1).

Note 1: The allocation is capable of extending to income years after you cease to have the hedging financial arrangement (see subsection 230-360(3)).

Note 2: The determination must be included in the record made under section 230-355.

If the hedging financial arrangement is a foreign currency hedge and is a *debt interest, split a gain or loss you make from the arrangement as follows:

to the extent to which the gain or loss represents a currency exchange rate effect attributable to the outstanding balance in relation to the debt interest, treat it as a separate gain or loss to which subsections (1) and (2) apply;

to the extent that it does not represent that effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement that is allocated under Subdivision 230-B, 230-F or 230-G.

If an event listed in the table in subsection 230-305(1) occurs:

the gain or loss you make from the hedging financial arrangement is equal to any gain or loss that you would have made:

while the arrangement was hedging the hedged item or items; and

on ceasing to have the arrangement;

if you ceased to have the arrangement for its fair value at the time of the event; and

this Division further applies as if, just after the event, you had acquired the arrangement for its fair value at the time of the event.

Despite subsection (3), the gain or loss referred to in paragraph (a) is allocated over income years according to the table.

Subsection (8) applies if the hedging financial arrangement:

is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc.); and

is a foreign currency hedge; and

is one that you issue.

Split a gain or loss you make from the arrangement as follows:

to the extent to which the gain or loss represents a currency exchange rate effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss to which subsections (1) and (2) apply;

to the extent that it does not represent that effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which this Division does not apply.

Subsections (10) and (11) apply if:

a *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group has a hedging financial arrangement; and

a hedging financial arrangement election applies to the arrangement; and

(c) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time); and

immediately after the leaving time:

the head company no longer has the arrangement because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group; and

the head company no longer has the hedged item (or all of the hedged items) because the subsidiary member ceased to be a member of the group.

The gain or loss the group makes from the arrangement for the income year in which the leaving time occurs is taken to be the gain or loss that would be allocated to the group in accordance with this section (disregarding subsection (5)) if:

the circumstances that existed in relation to the arrangement (including its value) immediately before the leaving time had continued to exist until the end of the income year; and

any circumstances that arise in relation to the financial arrangement after the leaving time were disregarded.

For the purposes of applying paragraph (5)(a) to the *head company of the group at the leaving time, disregard item 2 of the table in subsection 230-305(1).

230-305 Table of events and allocation rules

For the purposes of paragraph 230-300(5)(a), the following table lists events and their consequences:

For the purposes of item 2A of the table in subsection (1), determine the extent to which the gain or loss is reasonably attributable to a particular hedged item having regard to the following:

(a) the fair value of the hedged item;

the length of the period over which you have held the hedged item;

commercially accepted valuation principles;

any other relevant factors.

230-310 Aligning tax classification of gain or loss from hedging financial arrangement with tax classification of hedged item

The object of this section is to better align, in particular circumstances, the tax classification of a gain or loss you make from a hedging financial arrangement with the tax classification of the hedged item.

This section applies if:

you make a gain or loss from a hedging financial arrangement for an income year; and

a hedging financial arrangement election applies to the arrangement.

Subject to subsection (4):

if you make a gain from the arrangement—your assessable income includes the gain in accordance with subsection 230-15(1); and

if you make a loss from the arrangement—you may deduct the loss in accordance with subsections 230-15(2) and (3).

Note: Section 230-300 tells you how to allocate the gain or loss to an income year or years.

A gain or loss you make from a hedging financial arrangement, to the extent to which it is reasonably attributable to a hedged item referred to in the following table, is dealt with in the way indicated in that item:

Subsection (6) applies if:

a hedged item is your net investment in a foreign operation (within the meaning of the *accounting principles); and

the foreign operation is carried on through:

a company in which you hold *shares; or

(ii) a company that is a subsidiary of yours (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001).

The table in subsection (4) has effect as if:

to the extent that the hedging financial arrangement hedges a risk or risks in relation to *shares you hold in the company—the reference in that table to the hedged item were a reference to your interest in those shares; and

to the extent that the hedging financial arrangement hedges a risk or risks in relation to another interest you have in the company—the reference in that table to the hedged item were a reference to that interest.

230-315 Hedging financial arrangement election

Election

(1) You can make a hedging financial arrangement election if you are eligible under subsection (2) to make the election for the income year in which you make the election.

Eligibility to make hedging financial arrangement election for an income year

(2) You are eligible to make a hedging financial arrangement election for an income year if:

you prepare a financial report for that income year in accordance with:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting made under a foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and

the financial report is audited in accordance with:

the *auditing principles; or

if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report—comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law.

Note: Section 230-500 allows regulations to be made specifying particular foreign accounting and auditing standards as ones that are to be treated as comparable with Australian accounting and auditing principles for the purposes of this Division.

Election irrevocable

The hedging financial arrangement election is irrevocable.

Note: The election may cease to apply under section 230-385.

230-320 Hedging financial arrangement election where differing income and accounting years

This section applies if:

(a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year); and

(b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year); and

your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and

both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:

prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-315(2)(a); and

audited in accordance with paragraph 230-315(2)(b); and

the auditor’s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-315(2).

230-325 Hedging financial arrangements to which election applies

A hedging financial arrangement election applies to a hedging financial arrangement:

that you start to have in the income year in which you make the election or in a later income year; and

that is not excluded from the application of the election by section 230-330.

Note: Subject to a determination by the Commissioner, the hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a financial arrangement you start to have after you fail to comply with the requirements in sections 230-355 and 230-360 and paragraph 230-365(c) in relation to a hedging financial arrangement to which the election does apply: see section 230-385. See also subsection 230-305(1).

230-330 Hedging financial arrangements to which election does not apply

A hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a financial arrangement if the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc.).

Subsection (1) does not apply to a hedging financial arrangement if:

the hedging financial arrangement is a foreign currency hedge; and

you issue the hedging financial arrangement.

A hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

you are:

an individual; or

an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2), (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

the arrangement is a qualifying security; and

you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7).

A hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

the election is made by the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

the election specifies that the election is not to apply to financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and

the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

A hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a financial arrangement if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

230-335 Hedging financial arrangement and hedged item

Hedging financial arrangement

(1) A *financial arrangement that you have that is a *derivative financial arrangement, or is not a derivative financial arrangement but is a *foreign currency hedge, is a hedging financial arrangement if:

you create, acquire or apply the arrangement for the purpose of hedging a risk or risks in relation to a hedged item or items; and

at the time you create, acquire or apply the arrangement, the arrangement satisfies the requirements of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) to be a hedging instrument; and

the arrangement is recorded as a hedging instrument in:

your financial report (including documents and records on which the report is based); or

if the arrangement hedges a risk in relation to foreign currency—your financial report or the financial report of a consolidated entity in which you are included (including documents and records on which the report is based);

for the income year in which the rights and/or obligations are created, acquired or applied.

Note: For document and record, see section 2B of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901.

If:

the financial arrangement would not be a financial arrangement if the following provisions were disregarded:

(i) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with offshore banking units);

(ii) Part IIIB of that Act (which deals with Australian branches of foreign banks etc.); and

paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) would be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities;

paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.

(3) A *financial arrangement that is a *derivative financial arrangement, or is not a derivative financial arrangement but is a *foreign currency hedge, is a hedging financial arrangement if:

you create, acquire or apply the arrangement for the purpose of hedging a risk or risks in relation to something; and

one or more of subsections (4), (5), (6) or (7) is satisfied; and

the requirements of paragraphs (1)(b) or (c) are not able to be satisfied:

because of the requirements of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a); and

not because of any act or omission on your part to deliberately fail to satisfy those requirements; and

in a case in which none of subsections (5), (6) and (7) are satisfied—you satisfy the additional recording requirements of subsection 230-355(5); and

in any case—you satisfy the requirements (if any) prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

Disregard paragraph (3)(d) if subsection (4) is satisfied and:

a hedging financial arrangement election applies to the financial arrangement (because you previously satisfied the additional recording requirements mentioned in that paragraph at a time when the election applied); or

all of the following subparagraphs apply:

a hedging financial arrangement election would apply to the financial arrangement if you satisfied the additional recording requirements mentioned in paragraph (3)(d);

the election and subsection (3) apply to another financial arrangement;

subsection (4) is or was satisfied in relation to that other arrangement at a time when the election applied to that other arrangement.

This subsection is satisfied if:

the financial arrangement hedges a foreign currency risk in relation to an anticipated foreign equity distribution from a *connected entity; and

the distribution is non-assessable non-exempt income under section 768-5.

This subsection is satisfied if:

you enter into a financial arrangement with a *connected entity; and

the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) require that a consolidated financial report be prepared that deals with both your affairs and the affairs of the connected entity; and

the report properly reflects your affairs; and

the arrangement satisfies the requirements of paragraph (1)(a); and

the arrangement would satisfy the requirements of paragraph (1)(b) or (c) but for the fact that the consolidated report disregards the arrangement.

This subsection is satisfied if:

the period for which the risk or risks are hedged does not straddle 2 or more income years; and

the financial arrangement satisfies the requirements of paragraph (1)(a); and

the arrangement would satisfy the requirements of paragraph (1)(c) if the period for which the risk or risks that are hedged did straddle 2 or more income years.

This subsection is satisfied if the requirements prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection are satisfied.

Financial arrangement hedging more than one type of risk

(8) A *financial arrangement that hedges more than one type of risk may only be a hedging financial arrangement if the principles or standards referred to in paragraph (1)(b) allow the arrangement to be designated as a hedge of those risks.

More than one financial arrangement hedging the same risk or risks

(9) If 2 or more *financial arrangements hedge the same risk or risks, each of the arrangements may only be a hedging financial arrangement if the principles or standards referred to in paragraph (1)(b) allow those arrangements to be viewed in combination and jointly designated as hedging that risk or those risks.

Hedged item

If a financial arrangement that you have hedges a risk in relation to:

an asset or a part of an asset; or

a liability or a part of a liability; or

a firm commitment (within the meaning of the *accounting principles) or a part of such a commitment; or

a highly probable forecast transaction (within the meaning of the accounting principles) or a part of such a transaction; or

a net investment in a foreign operation (within the meaning of the accounting principles) or a part of such an investment; or

something prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph;

the asset (or that part of the asset), the liability (or that part of the liability), the commitment (or that part of the commitment), the transaction (or that part of the transaction) or the investment (or that part of the investment) is a hedged item for the arrangement.

(11) If a *financial arrangement is a *hedging financial arrangement because of paragraph (4)(a), the anticipated dividend referred to in that subparagraph is a hedged item for the arrangement even if subsection (10) is not satisfied in relation to the anticipated dividend.

230-340 Generally whole arrangement must be hedging financial arrangement

(1) Subject to subsections (2), (3) and (4), the whole of a *financial arrangement must satisfy the requirements of subsection 230-335(1) or (3) for the arrangement to be a hedging financial arrangement.

Partial hedges

If a financial arrangement:

is an options contract; and

hedges risk only in part by reference to changes in the intrinsic value of the options contract;

the arrangement may be treated as a hedging financial arrangement to the extent to which the part of the arrangement referred to in paragraph (b) satisfies the requirements of subsection 230-335(1) or (3).

If a financial arrangement:

is a forward contract; and

has a spot price element and an interest element;

the arrangement may be treated as a hedging financial arrangement to the extent to which the spot price element satisfies the requirements of subsection 230-335(1) or (3).

Proportionate hedges

(4) A specified proportion of a *financial arrangement may be treated as a hedging financial arrangement to the extent to which that proportion of the arrangement satisfies the requirements of subsection 230-335(1) or (3).

Separate financial arrangements if partial or proportionate hedge

If a part (or parts), or a proportion (or proportions), of a financial arrangement is (or are) treated as a hedging financial arrangement under subsection (2), (3) or (4):

the part (or each of the parts), or the proportion (or each of the proportions), of the arrangement that is (or are) treated as a hedging financial arrangement is taken to be a separate financial arrangement for the purposes of this Division; and

the remaining part or proportion (if any) of the arrangement is taken to be a separate financial arrangement for the purposes of this Division.

Subsection (5) has effect even if there would not be separate *arrangements under subsection 230-55(4).

230-345 Requirements not satisfied because of honest mistake or inadvertence

If a *derivative financial arrangement, or a *foreign currency hedge, that you have would not be a *hedging financial arrangement only because the requirements of paragraph 230-335(1)(b) or (c), or both, are not satisfied because of an honest mistake or inadvertence, it is nevertheless a hedging financial arrangement if the Commissioner considers this appropriate having regard to:

your documented risk management practices and policies; and

your record keeping practices; and

your accounting systems and controls; and

your internal governance processes; and

the circumstances surrounding the mistake or inadvertence (including the steps (if any) taken to correct or address the mistake or inadvertence and the steps (if any) taken to prevent a recurrence); and

the extent to which the requirements of paragraphs 230-335(1)(b) and (c) have been met; and

the objects of this Subdivision.

230-350 Derivative financial arrangement and foreign currency hedge

Derivative financial arrangement

(1) A derivative financial arrangement is a *financial arrangement that you have where:

its value changes in response to changes in a specified variable or variables; and

there is no requirement for a net investment, or there is such a requirement but the net investment is smaller than would be required for other types of financial arrangement that would be expected to have a similar response to changes in market factors.

Note: Paragraph (a)—a specified variable includes an interest rate, foreign exchange rate, credit rating, index or commodity or financial instrument price.

Foreign currency hedge

(2) A foreign currency hedge is a *financial arrangement that you have if:

paragraph (1)(a) is satisfied but paragraph (1)(b) is not; and

the arrangement hedges a risk in relation to movements in currency exchange rates.

230-355 Recording requirements

The requirement of this section is that you must make, or have in place, a record that:

contains a description of the following:

the hedging financial arrangement in relation to which the election is made;

the nature of the risk or risks being hedged;

the hedged item or items;

how you will assess the effectiveness of hedging the risk in reducing your exposure to changes in the fair value of the hedged item or items or cash flows or foreign currency exposure attributable to them;

the risk management objective for, and the risk management strategy to be followed in, acquiring, creating or applying the arrangement; and

contains any further details that the *accounting principles require, by way of documentation, for an arrangement to be recorded in a financial report as a hedging instrument; and

sets out the terms of the determinations you make under section 230-360.

To avoid doubt, paragraph (b) applies even if the arrangement is not recorded in your financial report as a hedging instrument.

To avoid doubt, the record may consist of a single document or 2 or more documents.

The record must be made or in place:

at, or soon after, the time when you create, acquire or apply the hedging financial arrangement; or

at such other time as is provided for in the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

The description must be sufficiently precise and detailed that the following are clear:

that the risk in respect of the particular hedged item or items was the one hedged by the hedging financial arrangement;

the extent to which the risk was hedged;

that the rights and/or obligations comprising the hedging financial arrangement were in fact those created, acquired or applied for the purpose of hedging the risk.

If a financial arrangement is a hedging financial arrangement under subsection 230-335(2) or (3), the following requirements must be met in addition to the requirements of subsections (1), (3) and (4):

you must make or have in place, at, or soon before or soon after, the time when you create, acquire or apply the arrangement, a record that sets out:

a statement of why, and the way in which, the arrangement operates commercially or economically as a hedge of the hedged item or items; and

the reasons why the arrangement does not satisfy the requirements of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a) to be a hedging instrument;

you must, at the end of each income year during which you have the arrangement, make a record of the accumulated gains and/or losses (whether realised or unrealised) as at the end of that income year from the arrangement or arrangements relating to the hedged item or items that are yet to be included in your assessable income or allowed to you as deductions;

you must have, at the time when you create, acquire or apply the arrangement, a record that sets out your risk management policies and practices;

you must have in place, at the time when you create, acquire or apply the arrangement, internal risk management systems and controls that record the arrangement and the hedged item or items.

For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), you must assume that:

all the gains from the financial arrangement would be assessable income; and

all the losses from the financial arrangement would be allowed to you as deductions.

230-360 Determining basis for allocating gain or loss

A requirement of this section is that you must determine the basis on which your gain or loss from the hedging financial arrangement is to be allocated to an income year, or over 2 or more income years, for the purposes of this Division.

It is also a requirement of this section that the basis that you determine must:

fairly and reasonably correspond with the basis on which gains, losses or other amounts in relation to the hedged item or items are recognised or allocated under this Act; and

be objective; and

be sufficiently precise and detailed that, when your gain, loss or other amount from the hedged item or items is taken into account for the purposes of this Act, the following will be clear from the record made under section 230-355:

the time at which the gain or loss from the hedging financial arrangement is to be taken into account for the purposes of this Division;

the way in which that gain or loss will be dealt with under section 230-310.

Note: Paragraph (a) refers to an amount in relation to the hedged item or items being recognised or allocated under this Act. This would include an amount being allowed as a deduction or an amount being included in assessable income. If the hedged item were an asset, an amount referable to a part of the cost of the asset might, for example, be allowed as a deduction for a particular income year.

To avoid doubt, the income years over which your gain or loss is to be allocated may include an income year that starts after you cease to have the hedging financial arrangement.

230-365 Effectiveness of the hedge

The requirement of this section is that:

hedging the risk must be expected to be effective (within the meaning of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a)), for the period for which you expect to have the hedging financial arrangement, in reducing your exposure to changes in the fair value of the hedged item or items or cash flows attributable to your hedged risk; and

the fair value of the hedged item or items or cash flows relating to them and the fair value of the arrangement must be able to be reliably measured; and

you must assess the hedging of the risk by the arrangement:

on a regular basis in accordance with the *accounting principles; and

at least once in each 12 month period; and

your assessment must be that the hedging of the risk will be effective (within the meaning of the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-315(2)(a)) in reducing your exposure to changes in the fair value of the hedged item or items or cash flows attributable to the hedged risk throughout the remainder of the period for which you expect to have the arrangement.

230-370 When election ceases to apply

A hedging financial arrangement election ceases to have effect from the start of an income year if you cease to be eligible under subsection 230-315(2) to make the election for that income year.

Subsection (1) does not prevent you from making a new hedging financial arrangement election at a later time if you become, at that later time, eligible under subsection 230-315(2) to make an election for an income year.

Note: The new election will only apply to financial arrangements you start to have after the start of the income year in which the new election is made.

230-375 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply

This section applies if a hedging financial arrangement election ceases to have effect under subsection 230-370(1).

You are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have:

disposed of each hedging financial arrangement to which the election applies for its fair value immediately before the election ceases to have effect; and

reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceases to have effect.

To avoid doubt, this Subdivision applies, for the purposes of working out the consequences of the disposal referred to in paragraph (2)(a), as if the hedging financial arrangement were one to which the hedging financial arrangement election applied at the time of the disposal.

230-380 Commissioner may determine that requirement met

Commissioner may determine that requirement met

If (apart from this section) the requirements of sections 230-355 to 230-365 are not met in relation to a hedging financial arrangement that you have, treat those requirements as having been so met if the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (1A) in relation to the arrangement.

The Commissioner may make the determination if the Commissioner considers that this is appropriate, having regard to:

the respects in which the arrangement does not meet those requirements; and

the extent to which it does not meet those requirements; and

the reasons why it does not meet those requirements; and

if the Commissioner is considering whether to impose conditions under subsection (2)—the likelihood that you will comply with those conditions; and

the objects of this Subdivision.

Commissioner may impose additional record keeping requirements

The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (1A) conditional on your keeping records in addition to those required by section 230-355.

A determination under subsection (1A) ceases to have effect if you breach a condition imposed under subsection (2).

Subsection (3) ceases to apply to you if the Commissioner determines that that subsection ceases to apply to you. The determination takes effect from the date specified in the determination.

In deciding whether to make the determination under subsection (4), the Commissioner must have regard to:

your record keeping practices; and

your compliance history; and

any changes that have been made to:

your accounting systems and controls; and

your internal governance processes;

to ensure that breaches of the kind referred to in subsection (3) do not happen again; and

any other relevant matter.

Commissioner may determine matter under section 230-360

If:

the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (1A) in relation to a hedging financial arrangement; and

either or both of the following applies:

you fail to determine a matter in relation to the arrangement under section 230-360;

you determine a matter in relation to the arrangement under section 230-360 but the determination does not satisfy the requirements of subsection 230-360(2);

the Commissioner may determine that matter, in a way that satisfies the requirements of section 230-360. The Commissioner’s determination has effect as if you had made the determination and recorded it under that section.

230-385 Consequences of failure to meet requirements

When this section applies

This section applies if:

your hedging financial arrangement election applies to a hedging financial arrangement; and

you do not meet a requirement of section 230-355 or 230-360 or paragraph 230-365(c) in relation to the arrangement.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), treat the requirement in paragraph 230-365(c) as being met even if you do not assess the hedging of the risk mentioned in that paragraph, but you can demonstrate that you intend to do so.

Commissioner may determine matter under section 230-360

If:

you fail to determine a matter in relation to the hedging financial arrangement under section 230-360; or

you determine a matter in relation to the arrangement under section 230-360 but the determination does not satisfy the requirements of subsection 230-360(2);

the Commissioner may determine that matter, in a way that satisfies the requirements of section 230-360. A reference in this Division to a determination made under that section is treated as including a reference to a determination under this subsection.

Election does not apply to hedging financial arrangements you start to have after failing to comply with requirements

Your hedging financial arrangement election does not apply to a hedging financial arrangement you start to have:

after you fail to meet the requirement mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) in relation to the arrangement mentioned in that paragraph; and

before a date (if any) determined by the Commissioner.

The Commissioner may make a determination under paragraph (4)(b) only if satisfied that you are unlikely to fail again to meet a requirement of section 230-355 or 230-360 or paragraph 230-365(c) in relation to a hedging financial arrangement.

In deciding whether to make a determination under paragraph (4)(b), the Commissioner must have regard to:

your record keeping practices; and

your compliance history; and

any changes that have been made to:

your accounting systems and controls; and

your internal governance processes;

to ensure that failures of the kind mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) do not happen again; and

any other relevant matter.

Commissioner may still exercise powers under section 230-380

This section does not prevent the Commissioner from exercising the Commissioner’s powers under section 230-380 in relation to the hedging financial arrangement mentioned in subsection (1).

Subdivision 230-F — Reliance on financial reports

Table of sections

230-390 Objects of this Subdivision

230-395 Election to rely on financial reports

230-400 Financial reports election where differing income and accounting years

230-405 Commissioner discretion to waive requirements in paragraphs 230-395(2)(c) and (e)

230-410 Financial arrangements to which the election applies

230-415 Financial arrangements not covered by election

230-420 Effect of election to rely on financial reports

230-425 When election ceases to apply

230-430 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply

230-390 Objects of this Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are:

to reduce administration and compliance costs by allowing you to align the tax treatment of your gains and losses from a financial arrangement with the accounting treatment that applies to the arrangement; and

to achieve those objects without your obtaining inappropriate tax benefits.

230-395 Election to rely on financial reports

Election

(1) You may make an election to rely on financial reports if you are eligible under subsection (2) to make the election for the income year in which you make the election.

Eligibility to make election

You are eligible to make an election to rely on financial reports for an income year if:

you prepare a financial report for that income year in accordance with:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting made under a foreign law that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law; and

the financial report is audited in accordance with:

the *auditing principles; or

if the auditing principles do not apply to the auditing of the financial report—comparable standards for auditing made under a foreign law; and

your auditor has not qualified the auditor’s report on your financial report for that income year or any of the last 4 financial years in a respect that is relevant to the taxation treatment of *financial arrangements; and

your accounting systems and controls and your internal governance processes are reliable; and

no report of an audit or review conducted in the income year, or any of the preceding 4 income years, has included an adverse assessment of your accounting systems in a respect that is relevant to the taxation treatment of financial arrangements.

Note 1: Paragraph (b)—section 230-500 allows regulations to be made specifying particular foreign accounting and auditing standards as ones that are to be treated as comparable with Australian accounting and auditing principles for the purposes of this Division.

Note 2: For the purposes of paragraphs (c) and (e), a qualification or assessment may be relevant to the taxation treatment of financial arrangements even though it does not deal with the amount or timing of recognition of gains or losses (but relates, for example, to the reliability of the accounting systems through which information about financial arrangements is recorded).

Paragraph (2)(e) does not apply to a report of:

an internal audit or review that you conduct; or

an audit or review of a kind prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

Election irrevocable

An election under subsection (1) is irrevocable.

Note: The election may cease to apply under section 230-425.

230-400 Financial reports election where differing income and accounting years

This section applies if:

(a) you prepare a financial report for a year (the first year); and

(b) you prepare a financial report for the subsequent year (the second year); and

your income year starts in the first year and ends in the second year; and

both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year are:

prepared in accordance with paragraph 230-395(2)(a); and

audited in accordance with paragraph 230-395(2)(b); and

the auditor’s reports are unqualified for both the financial report for the first year and the financial report for the second year.

Treat yourself as eligible to make an election for the income year under subsection 230-395(2).

Work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the income year as follows:

firstly, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the first year in accordance with section 230-420 (treating the first year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (a) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next, work out the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for the second year in accordance with section 230-420 (treating the second year as an income year);

next, work out how much of the gain or loss mentioned in paragraph (c) is attributable to the income year in accordance with subsection (4);

next:

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both gains—add them together to work out the gain from the arrangement for the income year; or

if the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) are both losses—add them together to work out the loss from the arrangement for the income year; or

if one of the amounts worked out under paragraphs (b) and (d) is a loss and the other is a gain—subtract the loss from the gain. If the result is positive, this is the gain from the arrangement for the income year. If the result is negative, this is the loss from the arrangement for the income year.

For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (d), work out how much of the gain or loss is attributable to the income year by:

using a methodology that is reasonable; and

using the same methodology for the first and second years.

(5) For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), treat a methodology that attributes the gain or loss on a pro-rata basis as not being reasonable.

230-405 Commissioner discretion to waive requirements in paragraphs 230-395(2)(c) and (e)

Paragraph 230-395(2)(c) or (e) does not apply in relation to your election to rely on financial reports for a particular income year or income years if the Commissioner determines that the paragraph does not apply to the election for that income year or those income years.

In deciding whether to make the determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must have regard to:

the reasons for the non-compliance with the principles or standards concerned; and

the remedial action (if any) that you have undertaken to ensure that non-compliance with those principles or standards does not occur in future (such as changes to your accounting systems and controls or to your internal governance structures); and

if you, or your activities, are subject to regulatory oversight or review—any opinions expressed by the regulator about the adequacy of remedial action of the kind referred to in paragraph (b); and

any other relevant matter.

230-410 Financial arrangements to which the election applies

An election to rely on financial reports applies in relation to a financial arrangement that you have if:

the arrangement is a *Division 230 financial arrangement; and

you start to have the arrangement in the income year in which you make the election or in a later income year; and

the arrangement is recognised in financial reports of the kind referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) that are audited as referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(b); and

if the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50—the arrangement is an asset or liability that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

to classify or designate, in the financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss; and

it is reasonably expected that the following is, or will be, the same:

the amount of the overall gain or loss you make from the arrangement (as determined in accordance with the financial reports);

the amount of the overall gain or loss you make from the arrangement (as determined in accordance with the provisions of this Division if the election under this subsection did not apply to the arrangement); and

the differences between the results of the following methods would reasonably be expected not to be substantial:

the method used in your financial reports to work out the amounts of the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for each income year;

the method that would be applied by this Division to work out the amounts of those gains or losses if the election did not apply to the arrangement.

This subsection has effect subject to section 230-415.

In applying paragraph (1)(f) at the time when you start to have the financial arrangement, disregard any differences between the results of the methods referred to in subparagraphs (1)(f)(i) and (ii) that are attributable solely to the provision for the possible impairment of debts required by the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a).

Subsections (4), (5) and (6) apply if, but for this subsection, paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) would not be satisfied in relation to a financial arrangement because the arrangement is an intra-group transaction for the purposes of:

*accounting standard AASB 127 (or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph); or

if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report—a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law.

Note: Financial arrangements between members of a consolidated group or MEC group are not covered by this subsection because the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) operates to treat them as not being financial arrangements for the purposes of this Division.

Paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement.

Paragraph (1)(e) applies as if the reference in subparagraph (1)(e)(i) to the amount of the overall gain or loss you make from the financial arrangement (as determined in accordance with the financial reports) were a reference to the amount of that overall gain or loss (as would be determined in accordance with the financial reports if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in subsection (3)).

Paragraph (1)(f) applies as if the reference in subparagraph (1)(f)(i) to the method used in your financial reports to work out the amounts of the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for each income year were a reference to the method that would be used in your financial reports to work out those amounts if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in subsection (3).

For the purposes of applying subparagraphs (1)(e)(ii) and (f)(ii) to a financial arrangement, assume that you had made any election that:

you could make under Subdivision 230-C or 230-D; and

could apply to the arrangement.

If:

the financial arrangement would not be a financial arrangement if the following provisions were disregarded:

(i) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with offshore banking units);

(ii) Part IIIB of that Act (which deals with Australian branches of foreign banks etc.); and

paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) would be satisfied in relation to the financial arrangement if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities; and

the election to rely on financial reports is made by:

(i) if section 121EB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies—the OBU mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section); or

if section 160ZZW of that Act applies—the bank mentioned in that section (disregarding the operation of that section);

paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the arrangement.

230-415 Financial arrangements not covered by election

An election to rely on financial reports does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

the arrangement is an *equity interest; and

you are the issuer of the equity interest.

An election to rely on financial reports does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

you are:

an individual; or

an entity (other than an individual) that satisfies subsection 230-455(2), (3) or (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

the arrangement is a qualifying security; and

you have not made an election under subsection 230-455(7).

An election to rely on financial reports does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

the election is made by the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

the election specifies that the election is not to apply to financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and

the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

An election to rely on financial reports does not apply to a financial arrangement if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

230-420 Effect of election to rely on financial reports

If an election to rely on financial reports applies to a financial arrangement, the gain or loss you make from the arrangement for an income year is:

the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) require you to recognise in profit or loss from that arrangement for that income year; or

if subsection 230-410(3) applies to the arrangement—the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) would have required you to recognise in profit or loss from that arrangement for that income year if the arrangement had not been an intra-group transaction for the purposes of the standard referred to in paragraph 230-410(3)(b); or

if subsection 230-410(8) applies to the arrangement—the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-410(1)(d) would have required you to recognise in profit or loss for the year from the asset or liability mentioned in paragraph 230-410(1)(d) if the arrangement had been between 2 separate entities.

Note: Subsection 230-40(7) provides that this Subdivision does not apply to a gain or loss from a financial arrangement to the extent to which Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies to the arrangement.

Subsection (3) applies if:

a *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group has a financial arrangement; and

an election to rely on financial reports applies to the arrangement; and

(c) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the leaving time); and

immediately after the leaving time, the subsidiary member has the arrangement.

The gain or loss the group makes from the financial arrangement for the income year in which the leaving time occurs is taken to be the gain or loss that the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) would require the group to recognise in profit or loss from the arrangement for that income year if:

the circumstances that existed in relation to the arrangement (including its value) immediately before the leaving time had continued to exist until the end of the income year; and

any circumstances that arise in relation to the arrangement after the leaving time were disregarded.

230-425 When election ceases to apply

An election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to have effect from the start of an income year if you cease to be eligible to make an election to rely on financial reports for that income year.

Subsection (1) does not prevent you from making a new election under subsection 230-395(1) at a later time if you become, at that later time, eligible to make an election to rely on financial reports for an income year.

Note: The new election will only apply to financial arrangements you start to have after the start of the income year in which the new election is made.

An election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to apply to a financial arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of paragraph 230-410(1)(c), (d), (e) or (f) during that income year.

If the election ceases to apply to a particular financial arrangement under subsection (3), the election cannot subsequently apply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of paragraphs 230-410(1)(c), (d), (e) and (f) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

230-430 Balancing adjustment if election ceases to apply

You must make balancing adjustments under subsection (2) if an election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to have effect under subsection 230-425(1).

The balancing adjustments under this subsection are the balancing adjustments you would make under Subdivision 230-G in relation to each of the *financial arrangements to which the election applied if you disposed of the arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to have effect.

You must make balancing adjustments under subsection (5) if an election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to apply to a particular financial arrangement under subsection 230-425(3).

Subsection (3) does not apply to a financial arrangement if:

the arrangement is not one that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by the principles or standards referred to in paragraph 230-395(2)(a) to classify or designate, in your financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss; and

the election under subsection 230-395(1) ceases to apply to the arrangement because the arrangement fails to satisfy the requirements of paragraph 230-410(1)(e) or (f); and

the arrangement ceases to satisfy the requirements of that paragraph because the arrangement becomes impaired for the purposes of those principles or standards.

The balancing adjustment under this subsection is the balancing adjustment you would make under Subdivision 230-G if you disposed of the financial arrangement for its fair value when the election ceases to apply to the arrangement.

If a balancing adjustment is made under subsection (2) or (5) in relation to a financial arrangement, you are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceased to have effect or ceased to apply to the arrangement.

Subdivision 230-G — Balancing adjustment on ceasing to have a financial arrangement

Table of sections

230-435 When balancing adjustment made

230-440 Exceptions

230-445 Balancing adjustment

230-435 When balancing adjustment made

When balancing adjustment made

A balancing adjustment is made under this Subdivision if:

you transfer to another entity all of your rights and/or obligations under a financial arrangement; or

all of your rights and/or obligations under a financial arrangement otherwise cease; or

you transfer to another entity:

a proportionate share of all of your rights and/or obligations under a financial arrangement; or

a right or obligation that you have under a financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit; or

a proportionate share of a right or obligation that you have under a financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit; or

an arrangement that is a *Division 230 financial arrangement ceases to be a financial arrangement.

Paragraphs (1)(a), (b) and (c) do not apply to a right or obligation under a financial arrangement unless that right or obligation is one of the rights or obligations that constitute the financial arrangement.

Note: See subsections 230-45(1) and 230-50(1) and (2) for the rights and/or obligations that constitute a financial arrangement.

Modifications for arrangements that are assets

If the financial arrangement is an asset of yours at the time the event referred to in subsection (1) occurs, paragraphs (1)(a) and (c) do not apply unless the effect of the transfer is to transfer to the other entity substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the interest transferred.

If a financial arrangement is an asset of yours, for the purposes of applying this Subdivision to the arrangement, you are treated as transferring a right under the arrangement to another entity if:

you retain the right but assume a new obligation; and

your assumption of the new obligation has the same effect, in substance, as transferring the right to another entity; and

the new obligation arises only to the extent to which the right to *financial benefits under the arrangement is satisfied; and

you cannot sell or pledge the right (other than as security in relation to the new obligation); and

you must, under the new obligation, provide financial benefits you receive in relation to the right to the entity to which you owe the new obligation without delay.

Historic rate rollover of derivative financial arrangement

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), all of your rights and/or obligations under a financial arrangement that is a derivative financial arrangement are taken to cease if there is an historic rate rollover of the arrangement.

230-440 Exceptions

Equity interests etc.

A balancing adjustment is not made under this Subdivision in relation to a financial arrangement at a time if:

the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-50 (equity interests etc.); and

neither Subdivision 230-C nor Subdivision 230-F apply to the arrangement immediately before that time.

Financial arrangements to which hedging financial arrangement elections apply

Balancing adjustments are not made under this Subdivision in relation to a financial arrangement in relation to which a hedging financial arrangement election applies.

Bad debts, margining and conversion into, or exchange for, ordinary shares

A balancing adjustment is not made under this Subdivision in relation to the following events:

a financial arrangement being written off in whole or part as a bad debt;

a financial arrangement that is a derivative financial arrangement being settled or closed out for margining purposes;

the ceasing of obligations or rights under a financial arrangement that is a traditional security if:

the ceasing occurs because the traditional security is converted into ordinary shares in, or transferred to, a company that is the issuer of the traditional security or a *connected entity; and

the traditional security was issued on the basis that it will or may convert into ordinary shares in, or be transferred to, the issuer of the traditional security or the connected entity;

the ceasing of obligations or rights under a financial arrangement that is a traditional security if:

the ceasing occurs because the traditional security is exchanged for ordinary shares in a company that is neither the issuer of the traditional security nor a connected entity; and

if the ceasing of the obligations or rights occurs because of a disposal—the disposal is to the issuer of the traditional security or a connected entity; and

the traditional security was issued on the basis that it will or may be exchanged for ordinary shares in the company.

Note: Paragraph (a)—for the treatment of bad debts, see paragraph 230-190(3)(c).

Subsidiary member leaving consolidated group or MEC group

A balancing adjustment is not made under this Subdivision in relation to a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group that has a financial arrangement ceasing to be a member of the group.

230-445 Balancing adjustment

Complete cessation or transfer

Use the following method statement to make the balancing adjustment if paragraph 230-435(1)(a), (b) or (d) applies:

Method statement for balancing adjustment

Step 1. Add up the following:

the total of all the *financial benefits you have received under the financial arrangement;

Note: This would include financial benefits you receive in relation to the transfer or cessation (see paragraph 230-60(2)(c)).

the total of the amounts that have been allowed to you as deductions, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, for losses from the arrangement;

the total of the other amounts that would have been allowed to you as deductions, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, for losses from the arrangement if all your losses from the arrangement were allowable as deductions;

Note: The losses from the arrangement here include losses made in gaining or producing exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

(d) the total of the amounts that will be allowed to you as deductions after the transfer or cessation because of a balancing adjustment under subitems 104(12) to (18) of the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009 to the extent to which those amounts are attributable to the arrangement;

(e) the total of the amounts that will be allowed to you as deductions after the transfer or cessation because of sections 230-160 and 230-165 to the extent to which those amounts are attributable to the arrangement.

Step 2. Add up the following:

the total of all the *financial benefits you have provided under the financial arrangement;

Note: This would include financial benefits you provide in relation to the transfer or cessation (see paragraph 230-60(1)(c)).

the total of the amounts that have been included in your assessable income, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, as gains from the arrangement;

the total of the other amounts that would have been included in your assessable income, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, as gains from the arrangement if all your gains from the arrangement were assessable;

Note: The gains from the arrangement here include amounts of exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

(d) the total of the amounts that will be included in your assessable income after the transfer or cessation because of a balancing adjustment under subitems 104(12) to (18) of the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009 to the extent to which those amounts are attributable to the arrangement.

(e) the total of the amounts that will be included in your assessable income after the transfer or cessation because of sections 230-160 and 230-165 to the extent to which those amounts are attributable to the arrangement.

Step 3. Compare the amount obtained under step 1 (the step 1 amount) with the amount obtained under step 2 (the step 2 amount). If the step 1 amount exceeds the step 2 amount, an amount equal to the excess is taken, as a balancing adjustment, to be a gain you make from the *financial arrangement for the purposes of this Division. If the step 2 amount exceeds the step 1 amount, an amount equal to the excess is taken, as a balancing adjustment, to be a loss that you make from the arrangement. If the step 1 amount and the step 2 amount are equal, no balancing adjustment is made.

Proportionate transfer of all rights and/or obligations under financial arrangement

If subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(i) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement in subsection (1) but reduce:

the amounts referred to in step 1; and

the amounts referred to in step 2;

by applying the proportion referred to in subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(i) to them.

Transfer of specifically identified right or obligation under financial arrangement

If subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(ii) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement in subsection (1) as if the references to:

the amounts referred to in step 1; and

the amounts referred to in step 2;

were references to those amounts to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the right or obligation referred to in subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(ii).

Proportionate transfer of specifically identified right or obligation under financial arrangement

If subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(iii) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement:

as if the references to:

the amounts referred to in step 1; and

the amounts referred to in step 2;

were references to those amounts to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the right or obligation referred to in subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(iii); and

by reducing those amounts by applying the proportion referred to in subparagraph 230-435(1)(c)(iii) to them.

Attribution must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles

Any attribution made under subsection (3) or paragraph (4)(a) must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles that properly take into account:

the nature of the rights and obligations under the financial arrangement; and

the risks associated with each financial benefit, right and obligation under the arrangement; and

the time value of money.

Income year for which gain or loss is made

The gain or loss you are taken to make under subsection (1), (2), (3) or (4) is a gain or loss for the income year in which the event referred to in subsection 230-435(1) occurs.

Treatment of bad debts in relation to financial arrangements

For the purposes of applying paragraph (b) of step 1 of the method statement in subsection (1) to a financial arrangement, a bad debt deduction in relation to the arrangement to which subsection 230-25(3) applies is taken to be a deduction for a loss from the arrangement.

Subdivision 230-H — Exceptions

Table of sections

230-450 Short-term arrangements where non-money amount involved

230-455 Certain taxpayers where no significant deferral

230-460 Various rights and/or obligations

230-465 Ceasing to have a financial arrangement in certain circumstances

230-470 Forgiveness of commercial debts

230-475 Clarifying exceptions

230-480 Treatment of gains in form of franked distribution etc.

230-481 Registered emissions units

230-450 Short-term arrangements where non-money amount involved

This Division does not apply in relation to your gains and losses from a financial arrangement if:

the arrangement is a financial arrangement under section 230-45; and

either:

you acquired goods or other property (other than goods that are, or property that is, money or a *money equivalent) or services (other than services that are a money equivalent) from another entity and the *financial benefits you are to provide under the arrangement are consideration for those goods, that property or those services; or

you provided goods or other property (other than goods that are, or other property that is, money or a money equivalent) or services (other than services that are a money equivalent) to another entity and the financial benefits you are to receive under the arrangement are consideration for those goods, that property or those services; and

the period between the following is not more than 12 months:

the time when you are to provide or receive the consideration (or a substantial proportion of it);

the time when you acquired or provided the property, goods or services (or a substantial proportion of them); and

the arrangement is not a derivative financial arrangement for any income year; and

a fair value election does not apply to the arrangement.

230-455 Certain taxpayers where no significant deferral

This Division does not apply in relation to your gains or losses from a financial arrangement for any income year if:

you are:

an individual; or

(ii) a superannuation entity (within the meaning of section 10 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993), a *superannuation fund that is not such an entity, a managed investment scheme (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) or an entity with a similar status to such a scheme under a *foreign law relating to corporate regulation; or

(iii) an *ADI, a *securitisation vehicle, an entity that is required to register under the Financial Sector (Collection of Data) Act 2001 or an entity that would be required to register under that Act if it were a corporation; or

an entity other than an entity of a kind mentioned in subparagraph (i), (ii) or (iii); and

where subparagraph (a)(ii) applies—you satisfy subsection (2) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

where subparagraph (a)(iii) applies—you satisfy subsection (3) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

where subparagraph (a)(iv) applies—you satisfy subsection (4) for the income year in which you start to have the arrangement; and

either:

the arrangement is to end not more than 12 months after you start to have it; or

the arrangement is not a qualifying security.

An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if:

(a) the value of the entity’s assets (see subsection (5)) for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or

the value of the entity’s assets for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence.

An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if:

the entity’s aggregated turnover for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $20 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or

the entity’s aggregated turnover for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $20 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence.

An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if:

either:

the entity’s aggregated turnover for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or

the entity’s aggregated turnover for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence; and

either:

(i) the value of the entity’s financial assets (see subsection (5)) for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or

the value of the entity’s financial assets for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $100 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence; and

either:

(i) the value of the entity’s assets (see subsection (5)) for the income year (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $300 million if the income year is the one in which the entity comes into existence; or

the value of the entity’s assets for the immediately preceding income year (worked out at the end of that immediately preceding income year) is less than $300 million if the income year is an income year after the one in which the entity comes into existence.

For the purposes of subsections (2) and (4), the value of the entity’s assets or financial assets is to be determined in accordance with:

if the entity applies *accounting standard AAS 25 in preparation of its financial reports—that accounting standard or another accounting standard prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply and the entity prepares its financial reports in accordance with the *accounting principles—the entity’s financial reports; or

if paragraphs (a) and (b) do not apply and the entity prepares its financial reports in accordance with an accounting standard comparable to accounting standard AAS 25 under a foreign law—that comparable standard; or

if paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) do not apply—commercially accepted valuation principles.

Subsection (1) does not apply to your gains or losses from a financial arrangement for an income year if:

you have made an election under subsection (7) in that income year or an earlier income year; and

you start to have the arrangement after the beginning of the income year in which you make the election.

An election under this subsection is an election to have this Division apply to all of the *financial arrangements that you start to have in the income year in which the election is made or a later income year.

An election under subsection (7) is irrevocable.

This section does not apply in relation to your gains or losses from a financial arrangement that you start to have after a time if you are not an individual and you failed to satisfy subsection (2), (3) or (4) (as the case may be) for an income year ending before that time.

230-460 Various rights and/or obligations

Rights and/or obligations subject to an exception

This Division does not apply to your gains and losses from a financial arrangement for any income year to the extent that your rights and/or obligations under the arrangement are the subject of an exception under any of the following subsections.

Note: Further exceptions are also provided for in section 230-475.

Leasing or property arrangement

A right or obligation arising under:

an arrangement to which Division 242 (about luxury car leases) applies; or

an arrangement to which Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan) applies; or

an arrangement that relates to an asset to which Division 250 (about assets put to tax preferred use) applies; or

an arrangement that, in substance or effect, depends on the use of a specific asset that is:

real property; or

goods or a personal chattel (other than money or a *money equivalent); or

intellectual property;

and gives a right to control the use of the asset; or

an arrangement that is a licence to use:

real property; or

goods or a personal chattel (other than money or a money equivalent); or

intellectual property;

is the subject of an exception.

Interest in partnership or trust

A right carried by an interest in a partnership or a trust, or an obligation that corresponds to such a right, is the subject of an exception if:

there is only one class of interest in the partnership or trust; or

the interest is an *equity interest in the partnership or trust; or

(c) for a right or obligation relating to a trust—the trust is managed by a funds manager or custodian, or a responsible entity (as defined in the Corporations Act 2001) of a registered scheme (as so defined).

Subsection (3) does not apply if, assuming that the financial arrangement were a *Division 230 financial arrangement, a fair value election, or an election to rely on financial reports, would apply to it.

Certain insurance policies

A right or obligation under a *life insurance policy is the subject of an exception unless:

you are not a life insurance company that is the insurer under the policy; and

the policy is an annuity that is a qualifying security.

A right or obligation under a general insurance policy is the subject of an exception unless:

you are not a general insurance company; and

the policy is a derivative financial arrangement.

Certain workers’ compensation arrangements

A right or obligation in relation to a liability for workers’ compensation claims to which Subdivision 321-C applies is the subject of an exception.

Certain guarantees and indemnities

A right or obligation under a guarantee or indemnity is the subject of an exception unless:

assuming that the financial arrangement were a *Division 230 financial arrangement, it would be the subject of a fair value election or an election to rely on financial reports; or

the financial arrangement is a derivative financial arrangement; or

the guarantee or indemnity is given in relation to a financial arrangement.

Personal arrangements and personal injury

The following rights and obligations are the subject of an exception:

a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, consideration for providing personal services;

a right, or obligation, arising from the administration of a deceased person’s estate;

a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, a gift under a deed;

a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, a financial benefit by way of maintenance:

to an individual who is or has been the *spouse of the person liable to provide the benefit; or

to or for the benefit of an individual who is or has been a child of the person liable to provide the benefit; or

to or for the benefit of an individual who is or has been a child of an individual who is or has been a spouse of the person liable to provide the benefit;

a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, a financial benefit in relation to personal injury to an individual;

a right to receive, or an obligation to provide, a financial benefit in relation to an injury to an individual’s reputation.

Without limiting paragraph (9)(e), that paragraph applies:

even if the person to whom the financial benefit is to be provided is not the individual who was injured; and

even if the personal injury to the individual takes the form of:

a wrong to the individual; or

illness of the individual.

Note: The person referred to in paragraph (a) may, for example, be a relative of the individual who was injured.

Superannuation and pension benefits

A right to receive, or an obligation to provide, *financial benefits is the subject of an exception if the right or obligation arises from a person’s membership of a superannuation or pension scheme, including:

a right of a dependant of a member to receive financial benefits or an obligation to provide financial benefits to a dependant of a member; and

a right or obligation arising from an interest in:

a *complying superannuation entity; or

a non-complying superannuation fund or non-complying approved deposit fund; or

an RSA.

Interest in controlled foreign companies

A right or obligation that arises under a direct participation interest of an attributable taxpayer in a controlled foreign company is the subject of an exception.

Proceeds from certain business sales

A right to receive, or an obligation to provide, *financial benefits arising from the sale of:

a business; or

shares in a company that operates a business; or

interests in a trust that operates a business;

is the subject of an exception if the amounts, or the values, of those benefits are only contingent on aspects of the economic performance of the business after the sale.

Farm management deposits

A right to receive, or an obligation to provide, *financial benefits is the subject of an exception if:

the right or obligation is the right or obligation of an owner of a *farm management deposit; and

the right or obligation relates to the deposit.

Rights and obligations to which section 121EK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies

(16) A right or obligation that arises because of a payment of an amount to which section 121EK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies is the subject of an exception.

Forestry managed investment scheme interests

A right or obligation under a forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme in relation to which you can claim deductions under Division 394 is the subject of an exception.

Exploration benefits

A right or obligation that arises because of the provision of an exploration benefit under a farm-in farm-out arrangement is the subject of an exception.

Regulations may provide for exceptions

A right or obligation of a kind specified in the regulations for the purposes of this subsection is the subject of an exception.

230-465 Ceasing to have a financial arrangement in certain circumstances

This section applies if:

you cease to have a financial arrangement (or part of a financial arrangement); and

you make a loss from ceasing to have the arrangement (or that part of the arrangement); and

(c) if the arrangement is a marketable security (within the meaning of section 70B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936):

you did not acquire the arrangement in the ordinary course of trading on a securities market (within the meaning of that section); and

at the time you acquired the arrangement, it was not open to you to acquire an identical financial arrangement in the ordinary course of trading on a securities market; and

if the arrangement is a marketable security—you did not dispose of the arrangement in the course of trading on a securities market; and

it would be concluded that you ceased to have the arrangement wholly or partly because there was an apprehension or belief that the other party or other parties to the arrangement were, or would be likely to be, unable or unwilling to discharge all their liabilities to pay amounts under the arrangement.

The amount of the loss is reduced by so much of that amount as is a loss of capital or a loss of a capital nature.

Note: However, the amount by which the loss is reduced is a capital loss.

In applying paragraph (1)(e), you must have regard to:

the financial position of the other party or parties to the financial arrangement; and

the perceptions of the financial position of the other party or parties to the arrangement; and

other relevant matters.

230-470 Forgiveness of commercial debts

If a gain that you make from a financial arrangement arises from the *forgiveness of a debt to which Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G apply, the gain is reduced by:

if section 245-90 (about agreements to forgo capital losses or deductions) applies—the debt’s provisional net forgiven amount mentioned in that section; or

if that section does not apply—the debt’s *net forgiven amount.

Note: Section 51AAA (about a net capital gains limit) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 also has the effect of preventing you from deducting losses.

230-475 Clarifying exceptions

Exceptions

To avoid doubt, this Division does not apply to your gains and losses from a financial arrangement for any income year to the extent that your rights and/or obligations are the subject of an exception under any of the following subsections.

(2) This section is not intended to limit, expand or otherwise affect the operation of sections 230-45 to 230-55 (which tell you what is covered by the concept of financial arrangement) in relation to rights and/or obligations other than those dealt with in this section.

Retirement village and residential or specialist care arrangements

The following rights and obligations are the subject of an exception:

a right or obligation arising under a retirement village residence contract;

a right or obligation arising under a retirement village services contract;

a right or obligation arising under an arrangement under which *funded aged care services are provided at an approved residential care home or under a specialist aged care program.

For the purposes of subsection (3):

(a) a retirement village residence contract is a contract that gives rise to a right to occupy *residential premises in a *retirement village; and

(b) a retirement village services contract is a contract under which a resident of a retirement village is provided with general or personal services in the retirement village.

230-480 Treatment of gains in form of franked distribution etc.

This section applies if a gain you make from a financial arrangement is in the form of:

a *franked distribution (including a franked distribution that *flows indirectly to you); or

a right to receive a franked distribution (including a franked distribution that will flow indirectly to you).

This Division does not apply to the gain to the extent that the *franked distribution has a *franked part.

230-481 Registered emissions units

A registered emissions unit is exempt from this Division.

Subdivision 230-I — Other provisions

Table of sections

230-485 Effect of change of residence—rules for particular methods

230-490 Effect of change of residence—disposal and reacquisition etc. after ceasing to be Australian resident where no further recognised gains or losses from arrangement

230-495 Effect of change of accounting principles or standards

230-500 Comparable foreign accounting and auditing standards

230-505 Financial arrangement as consideration for provision or acquisition of a thing

230-510 Non-arm’s length dealings in relation to financial arrangement

230-515 Arm’s length dealings in relation to financial arrangement—adjustment to gain or loss in certain situations

230-520 Disregard gains or losses covered by value shifting regime

230-522 Adjusting a gain or loss that gives rise to a hybrid mismatch

230-525 Consolidated financial reports

230-527 Elections—reporting documents of foreign ADIs

230-485 Effect of change of residence—rules for particular methods

The object of this section is to deal with your gains and losses for an income year in which you change residence by:

allocating the gains and losses to your periods of Australian and foreign residence in that income year; and

determining the assessability of the gains and the deductibility of the losses according to:

your residency in each period; and

the sources of the gains and the connection of the losses with your assessable income.

This section applies if:

(a) you are a foreign resident for part of an income year (the foreign residency period) and an Australian resident for the other part of the income year (the Australian residency period); and

section 230-490 does not apply in respect of the change of residence.

Note: See section 230-490 if you change residence, and after the change the gains and losses you make from the arrangement are not assessable or deductible under this Division.

Realisation method

Subsection (4) applies if:

(a) you have a *financial arrangement at the time (the residence change time):

you cease to be an Australian resident; or

you become an Australian resident; and

you apply the realisation method to determine the amount of a gain or loss you make from the arrangement.

You are taken for the purposes of this Division:

to have disposed of the arrangement just before the residence change time for its fair value just before that time; and

to have acquired the arrangement again at the residence change time for its fair value at that time.

Accruals and hedging financial arrangement methods

Subsection (6) applies if:

assuming that you disregarded this section and subsection 230-40(2), you would apply the accruals or hedging financial arrangement method to determine the amount of:

a gain included in your assessable income under section 230-15 for the income year; or

a loss you can deduct under section 230-15 for the income year; and

subsection (4) does not apply in relation to any gain or loss under the arrangement.

Apply that method by apportioning the gain or loss on a reasonable basis between those periods so as to work out:

a gain or loss from the arrangement for the foreign residency period; and

a gain or loss from the arrangement for the Australian residency period.

Fair value, foreign exchange retranslation and financial reports methods

Subsection (8) applies if:

assuming that you disregarded this section and subsection 230-40(2), you would apply the fair value or foreign exchange retranslation method or the method of relying on your financial reports to determine the amount of:

a gain included in your assessable income under section 230-15 for the income year; or

a loss you can deduct under section 230-15 for the income year; and

subsection (4) does not apply in relation to any gain or loss under the arrangement.

Apply that method to work out:

a gain or loss from the arrangement for the foreign residency period; and

a gain or loss from the arrangement for the Australian residency period.

230-490 Effect of change of residence—disposal and reacquisition etc. after ceasing to be Australian resident where no further recognised gains or losses from arrangement

This section applies if:

(a) you cease to be an Australian resident at a particular time (the residence change time); and

you have a financial arrangement at the residence change time; and

at the residence change time you expect that any gains and losses you make from the arrangement after that time will not be assessable or deductible under this Division.

You are taken for the purposes of this Division:

to have disposed of the arrangement just before that time for its fair value just before that time; and

to have acquired the arrangement again at the residence change time for its fair value at that time.

230-495 Effect of change of accounting principles or standards

This section applies if:

one of these methods apply to take account of a gain or loss you make from a financial arrangement:

the fair value method provided for in Subdivision 230-C; or

the foreign exchange retranslation method provided for in Subdivision 230-D; or

the method of relying on your financial reports provided for in Subdivision 230-F; and

there is a change in, or in the application of, the relevant principles or standards (as mentioned in section 230-230 (fair value method), 230-280 (foreign exchange retranslation method) or 230-420 (method of relying on financial reports)) that apply in relation to the arrangement; and

that change applies to a particular income year and later years; and

(d) as a result of the change, those principles or standards require you to recognise in your statement of financial position an amount (the equity amount), in order to avoid the need to increase or decrease gains or losses recognised in profit or loss from the financial arrangement in respect of previous income years.

If the equity amount is positive, include in your assessable income for the particular income year mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) so much of it as relates to the financial arrangement mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

If the equity amount is negative, you are entitled to a deduction for the particular income year mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) equal to so much of it as relates to the financial arrangement mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

230-500 Comparable foreign accounting and auditing standards

The regulations may:

specify that particular standards that apply under a foreign law are to be taken for the purposes of this Division to be comparable to the *accounting principles; and

specify that particular standards that apply under a foreign law are to be taken for the purposes of this Division to be comparable to the *auditing principles.

230-505 Financial arrangement as consideration for provision or acquisition of a thing

This section applies if you start or cease to have a *Division 230 financial arrangement as consideration for the provision or acquisition of a thing.

Work out the *market value of the thing at the time at which you (in fact) provide or acquire it. For the purposes of applying this Act to you, treat the amount:

you obtain for providing the thing; or

you provide for acquiring the thing;

as being that market value.

Note 1: The amount may be relevant, for example, for the purposes of applying the provisions of this Act dealing with capital gains, capital allowances or trading stock to the thing.

Note 2: This subsection does not affect the financial benefits received or provided under the financial arrangement from you starting or ceasing to have it (except in the circumstances described in Note 3). However:

the market value of the thing will be, or form part of, those financial benefits for the purposes of section 230-445; and

in the case of a non arm’s length transaction, the amount of those financial benefits may be affected by section 230-510.

Note 3: If the thing is itself a Division 230 financial arrangement and subsection (3) does not apply, this subsection will determine the financial benefits received or provided under the financial arrangement from you starting or ceasing to have it.

Subsection (2) does not apply if:

(a) you start or cease to have the *financial arrangement as mentioned in subsection (1) under an arrangement (the starting or ceasing arrangement); and

the thing is itself a *Division 230 financial arrangement; and

(c) the starting or ceasing arrangement is not itself a Division 230 financial arrangement.

Example: An arrangement for exchanging a share subject to Subdivision 230-C for another share subject to Subdivision 230-C, where the arrangement itself is not a Division 230 financial arrangement.

For the purposes of this section:

treat yourself as providing a thing to another entity if:

you have provided, or are to provide, the thing to the other entity; or

you cease to have, have ceased to have or are to cease to have, the thing; or

the other entity starts to have, has started having or is to start to have, the thing; and

treat yourself as acquiring a thing if:

another entity has provided, or is to provide, the thing to you; or

another entity ceases to have, has ceased to have or is to cease to have, the thing; or

you start to have, have started to have or are to start to have, the thing.

For the purposes of this section, treat part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement as a Division 230 financial arrangement.

Without limiting subsection (1), the thing provided, or the thing acquired, need not be a tangible thing and may take the form of services, conferring a right, incurring an obligation or extinguishing or varying a right or obligation.

To avoid doubt, this section applies even if your starting or ceasing to have the financial arrangement mentioned in subsection (1) is only part of the consideration for the provision or acquisition of the thing.

For the purposes of this section, treat your starting or ceasing to have the financial arrangement mentioned in subsection (1) as consideration for the provision or acquisition of the thing if that starting or ceasing is, in substance or effect, done for the provision or acquisition of the thing.

Example: Starting to have a financial arrangement in satisfaction of an obligation, where the obligation itself was incurred as consideration for the thing.

230-510 Non-arm’s length dealings in relation to financial arrangement

This section applies if:

a balancing adjustment is made under Subdivision 230-G in relation to a *Division 230 financial arrangement you have; and

if the balancing adjustment was made because of paragraph 230-435(1)(b) or (d) (cessations without transfer)—the arrangement is not a *debt interest or loan.

Non-arm’s length transaction resulting in you starting to have the arrangement

(2) Subsection (3) applies if the parties to the dealing that resulted in you starting to have the arrangement were not dealing at *arm’s length in relation to the dealing.

For the purposes of this Division:

disregard the amount of the financial benefit (if any) that you provided or received in relation to you starting to have the arrangement; and

(b) instead, treat yourself as having provided or received a financial benefit in relation to you starting to have the arrangement that is equal to the amount of the financial benefit that you would have provided or received if the parties to the dealing mentioned in subsection (2) were dealing at *arm’s length in relation to the dealing.

Non-arm’s length transaction resulting in change of an amount of a financial benefit that you provided or received under the financial arrangement

Subsection (5) applies if the parties to a dealing that resulted in a change of an amount of a financial benefit that you provide or receive under the financial arrangement were not dealing at *arm’s length in relation to the dealing.

For the purposes of this Division:

disregard the amount of the financial benefit (if any) that you provide or receive under the financial arrangement as a result of the dealing; and

instead, treat yourself as providing or receiving a financial benefit under the financial arrangement as a result of the dealing that is equal to the amount of the financial benefit that you would have provided or received if the parties to the dealing were dealing at *arm’s length in relation to the dealing.

Non-arm’s length transaction resulting in balancing adjustment

Subsection (7) applies if the parties to the dealing that resulted in the balancing adjustment mentioned in subsection (1) being made were not dealing at *arm’s length in relation to the dealing.

For the purposes of this Division:

disregard the amount of the financial benefit (if any) that you provide or receive in relation to the balancing adjustment; and

(b) instead, treat yourself as providing or receiving a financial benefit in relation to the balancing adjustment that is equal to the amount of the financial benefit that you would have provided or received if the parties to the dealing mentioned in subsection (6) were dealing at *arm’s length in relation to the dealing.

230-515 Arm’s length dealings in relation to financial arrangement—adjustment to gain or loss in certain situations

This section applies if:

(a) disregarding this Division, a provision mentioned in subsection (2) makes an adjustment to an amount (including a nil amount) (the relevant amount); and

the relevant amount is relevant in determining the amount of a gain or loss you make from a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

The provisions are as follows:

(a) section 52A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

(c) Division 16J of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

(d) Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

item 3 of the table in subsection 245-65(1) of this Act;

section 775-40 of this Act.

In determining the amount of the gain or loss, treat the relevant amount as having been adjusted by the provision mentioned in subsection (2).

However, if the circumstances that give rise to the adjustment result in section 230-510 having the effect of altering the amount of the gain or loss, do not treat the relevant amount as having been adjusted under subsection (3) to the extent of that alteration.

230-520 Disregard gains or losses covered by value shifting regime

Disregard a gain or loss under this Division from a financial arrangement to the extent that it is attributable to:

a shifting of value that has consequences under Division 723; or

a direct value shift that has consequences under Division 725; or

an indirect value shift that has consequences under Division 727; or

(d) a shifting of value that has consequences analogous to those under Division 725 or 727 under a repealed provision of this Act or of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Determine whether a shifting of value has the consequences mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) on the assumption that a realisation event in respect of all or part of the financial arrangement happens in the income year for the gain or loss.

230-522 Adjusting a gain or loss that gives rise to a hybrid mismatch

(1) This section applies if a provision of Division 832 would, apart from section 832-785, apply to make not allowable an amount (the relevant amount) that is all or a part of the deduction for:

a loss from a *Division 230 financial arrangement; or

an amount treated under section 832-790 as a separate loss from a Division 230 financial arrangement.

The following have effect:

if (disregarding section 832-790) you made a loss from the financial arrangement, and the relevant amount does not exceed the amount of the loss—the amount of the loss you made is reduced by the relevant amount;

if (disregarding section 832-790) you made a loss from the financial arrangement, and the relevant amount exceeds the amount of the loss:

you do not make a loss from the financial arrangement; and

instead, you make a gain from the financial arrangement equal to the amount of the excess;

if (disregarding section 832-790) you made a gain from the financial arrangement—the amount of the gain is increased by the relevant amount.

The effect of subsection (2) is to be disregarded for the purposes of paragraph (c) of step 1 and paragraph (c) of step 2 of subsection 230-445(1) (about balancing adjustments).

230-525 Consolidated financial reports

For the purposes of this Division, treat a financial report prepared by another entity as being prepared by you if:

the other entity is a *connected entity of yours; and

the report is a consolidated financial report that deals with both your affairs and the affairs of the connected entity; and

the report properly reflects your affairs.

230-527 Elections—reporting documents of foreign ADIs

(1) So much of a Statement of Financial Performance and a Statement of Financial Position, given to *APRA by a foreign ADI (within the meaning of the Banking Act 1959) as required under section 13 of the Financial Sector (Collection of Data) Act 2001, as:

cover the activities of an *Australian permanent establishment of the foreign ADI for the year; and

are prepared in accordance with the recognition and measurement standards under the *accounting principles; and

are audited in accordance with the *auditing principles;

are treated, for the purposes of the provisions mentioned in subsection (2), as being a financial report for a year:

prepared by the foreign ADI in accordance with the accounting principles; and

audited in accordance with the auditing principles.

The provisions are as follows:

sections 230-150 to 230-165 (election for portfolio treatment of fees);

sections 230-210 to 230-220 (fair value election);

sections 230-255 to 230-265 (foreign exchange retranslation election);

sections 230-315 to 230-335 (hedging financial arrangement election);

sections 230-395, 230-400, 230-410 and 230-430 (election to rely on financial reports).

Subdivision 230-J — Additional operation of Division

Table of sections

230-530 Additional operation of Division

230-530 Additional operation of Division

Foreign currency

This Division also applies to foreign currency as if the currency were a right that constituted a financial arrangement.

Non-equity shares

This Division also applies to a non-equity share in a company as if the share were a right that constituted a financial arrangement.

Commodities held by traders

This Division also applies to a commodity that you hold as if the commodity were a right that constituted a financial arrangement if:

you are an entity that trades or deals both in:

that commodity; and

financial arrangements whose values change in response to changes in the price or value of that commodity; and

you hold that commodity for the purposes of dealing in the commodity; and

a fair value election or an election to rely on financial reports applies to financial arrangements that you start to have when you start to have the commodity; and

the commodity is an asset that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

to classify or designate, in your financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss.

Offsetting commodity contracts held by traders

(4) This Division also applies to a contract to which you are a party as if the contract were a *financial arrangement if:

you have a right to receive or an obligation to provide a commodity under the contract; and

you have a practice of dealing in the commodity through the performance of offsetting contracts to receive and provide the commodity; and

you do not have, as your sole or dominant purpose for entering into the contract, the purpose of receiving or delivering the commodity as part of your expected purchase, sale or usage requirements; and

a fair value election or an election to rely on financial reports applies to financial arrangements that you start to have when you enter into the contract; and

(e) the contract is an asset or liability that you are required (whether or not as a result of a choice you make) by:

the *accounting principles; or

if the accounting principles do not apply to the preparation of the financial report—comparable standards for accounting that apply to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

to classify or designate, in your financial reports, as at fair value through profit or loss.

Division 235 — Particular financial transactions

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 235

235-I Instalment trusts

Guide to Division 235

235-1 What this Division is about

This Division is about the tax treatment of particular kinds of financial transactions.

Subdivision 235-I — Instalment trusts

Guide to Subdivision 235-I

235-805 What this Subdivision is about

An entity that invests in an asset through an instalment warrant, instalment receipt, or other similar arrangement, is treated for most income tax purposes as if it had invested in the asset directly.

A regulated superannuation fund that invests in an asset through a limited recourse borrowing is treated in the same way.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

235-810 Object of this Subdivision

235-815 Application of Subdivision

235-820 Look-through treatment for instalment trusts

235-825 Meaning of instalment trust and instalment trust asset

235-830 What trusts are covered—instalment trust arrangements

235-835 Requirement for underlying investments to be listed or widely held

235-840 What trusts are covered—limited recourse borrowings by regulated superannuation funds

235-845 Interactions with other provisions

Operative provisions

235-810 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that, for most income tax purposes, the consequences of ownership of an instalment trust asset flow to the entity that has the beneficial interest in the asset, instead of to the trustee.

235-815 Application of Subdivision

This Subdivision applies to:

the entity that has the beneficial interest in an instalment trust asset as the beneficiary of an instalment trust; and

the trustee of the instalment trust.

This Subdivision applies for the purposes of this Act, apart from:

(a) Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which is about tax file numbers); and

(b) Subdivisions 12-E, 12-F and 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (which are about PAYG withholding).

Joint investments

This Subdivision applies in relation to 2 or more entities that hold an interest in a trust as joint tenants, or as tenants in common, in the same way it applies in relation to a single entity that holds such an interest.

Note: Each investor that is treated by this Subdivision as jointly owning an instalment trust asset is treated for CGT purposes as owning a separate asset: see section 108-7.

235-820 Look-through treatment for instalment trusts

(1) If an entity (the investor) has a beneficial interest in an *instalment trust asset under an *instalment trust, the asset is treated as being the investor’s asset (instead of being an asset of the trust).

Example: A dividend in respect of the asset is paid to the trustee. It is treated (but not for the purposes of the PAYG withholding provisions mentioned in paragraph 235-815(2)(b)) as if it had been paid directly to the investor.

An act done in relation to an instalment trust asset of an instalment trust by the trustee of the trust is treated as if the act had been done by the investor (instead of by the trustee).

Example: A trustee disposes of the asset. Any capital gain or loss is made by the investor, not by the trustee.

The investor is treated as having the instalment trust asset in the same circumstances as the investor actually has the interest in the instalment trust.

Without limiting subsection (3), the circumstances include:

whether the interest is held on capital account or on revenue account; and

whether the interest is held as a joint tenant or tenant in common.

Any consequence arising under the GST Act for the trustee of the instalment trust, as a result of anything done in relation to the instalment trust asset, is treated as if it had arisen for the investor (instead of for the trustee), even if that consequence would not have arisen had the thing been done by or to the investor.

Example: If the trustee has a net input tax credit under the GST Act, the investor must apply the credit to reduce the investor’s cost base for the instalment trust asset (even if the investor is not registered or required to be registered for GST purposes): see section 103-30.

235-825 Meaning of instalment trust and instalment trust asset

(1) A trust is an instalment trust if:

the trust is covered by section 235-830 (about instalment trust arrangements) and satisfies the requirements in section 235-835 (about requirements for underlying investments to be listed or widely held); or

the trust is covered by section 235-840 (about limited recourse borrowings by *regulated superannuation funds).

(2) An instalment trust asset is an asset that is, or is part of, the underlying investment of an *instalment trust (as mentioned in section 235-830 or 235-840, as the case requires).

235-830 What trusts are covered—instalment trust arrangements

This section covers a trust if, under an arrangement:

(a) an entity (the investor) makes a *borrowing, or is provided with credit; and

(b) to secure the borrowing or provision of credit, the trustee of the trust acquires an asset or assets (the underlying investment); and

the investor has a beneficial interest in the underlying investment as the sole beneficiary of the trust; and

for a provision of credit—the credit was provided to the investor to acquire the asset, or one of the assets, that comprises the underlying investment; and

the investor is entitled to the benefit of all income from the underlying investment; and

the investor is entitled to acquire legal ownership of the underlying investment on discharging its obligations relating to the borrowing or provision of credit.

Note: For paragraph (c), the sole beneficiary of the trust may be 2 or more entities that have an interest in the trust as joint tenants or tenants in common: see subsection 235-815(3).

However, this section does not cover a trust if the investor is a trustee of a regulated superannuation fund and the arrangement includes a borrowing.

This section does not cover a trust if the underlying investment is subject to any charge, security or other encumbrance (apart from any charge securing the obligations relating to the borrowing or provision of credit).

235-835 Requirement for underlying investments to be listed or widely held

A trust satisfies the requirements in this section if:

each asset that is, or is part of, the underlying investment is:

a *share, a unit in a unit trust or a stapled security; or

an interest in an entity that holds an interest in a share, a unit in a unit trust or a stapled security either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities; and

each such share, unit or stapled security:

is listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; or

meets the widely held requirement set out in the applicable item of the following table.

A *share, unit in a unit trust or a stapled security that fails the widely held requirement set out in the table in subsection (1) is treated as satisfying that requirement if the failure:

is of a temporary nature only; and

is caused by circumstances outside the investor’s control.

In applying subsection (1), disregard an asset, or the cash proceeds from disposing of an asset, if:

the trustee became entitled to the asset in respect of a *share, unit or stapled security that was, or was part of, the underlying investment just before the entitlement arose; and

the asset is not a *share, unit in a unit trust, or stapled security; and

if the asset is an interest in an entity, or a right, option or similar interest that gives the holder an entitlement to acquire an interest in an entity:

an interest in the entity is listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; or

the entity meets a widely held requirement set out in column 2 of item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection (1); and

the underlying investment comprises one or more other assets that are not disregarded under this subsection.

Example: Examples of the types of assets disregarded by this subsection are:

assets that represent distributions and capital payments in respect of the underlying investment; and

bonus rights issued in respect of the underlying investment.

Despite subsections (1) to (3), the underlying investment does not satisfy the requirement in this section if an asset that is, or is part of, the underlying investment is an *ESS interest to which Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies.

235-840 What trusts are covered—limited recourse borrowings by regulated superannuation funds

This section covers a trust if:

(a) under an *arrangement, an asset or assets (the underlying investment) is acquired by the trustee of the trust for the benefit of a trustee of a *regulated superannuation fund to secure a *borrowing; and

until the borrowing is repaid, the arrangement is covered by:

(i) the exception in subsection 67A(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (which is about limited recourse borrowing arrangements); or

the exception in former subsection 67(4A) of that Act (which was about instalment warrants).

235-845 Interactions with other provisions

Section 106-50 (about absolutely entitled beneficiaries) does not apply to an instalment trust asset.

Section 106-60 (about securities, charges and encumbrances) does not apply to an instalment trust asset.

Nothing in this Subdivision limits Division 247 (which is about capital protected borrowings).

Note: Division 247 may apply to an arrangement to which this Subdivision applies.

Division 240 — Arrangements treated as a sale and loan

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 240

240-A Application and scope of Division

240-B The notional sale and notional loan

240-C Amounts to be included in notional seller’s assessable income

240-D Deductions allowable to notional buyer

240-E Notional interest and arrangement payments

240-F The end of the arrangement

240-G Adjustments if total amount assessed to notional seller differs from amount of interest

240-H Application of Division 16E to certain arrangements

240-I Provisions applying to hire purchase agreements

Guide to Division 240

240-1 What this Division is about

For income tax purposes, some arrangements (such as hire purchase agreements) are recharacterised as a sale of property, combined with a loan, by the notional seller to the notional buyer, to finance the purchase price.

240-3 How the recharacterisation affects the notional seller

Effect of notional sale

The consideration for the notional sale is either the price stated as the cost or value of the property or its arm’s length value. If the notional seller is disposing of the property as trading stock, the normal consequences of disposing of trading stock follow. In particular, the notional seller will be assessed on the sale price.

Where the property is not trading stock the notional seller’s assessable income will include any profit made by the notional seller on the notional sale or on the sale of the property after a notional re-acquisition.

Effect of notional loan

The notional seller’s assessable income will include notional interest over the period of the loan.

Other effects

These effects displace the income tax consequences that would otherwise arise from the arrangement. For example, the actual payments to the notional seller are not included in its assessable income. Also, the notional seller loses the right to deduct amounts under Division 40 (about capital allowances).

240-7 How the recharacterisation affects the notional buyer

Effect of notional purchase

The cost of the acquisition is either the price stated as the cost or value of the property or its arm’s length value. If the notional buyer is acquiring the property as trading stock, the normal consequences of acquiring trading stock follow. In particular, the notional buyer can usually deduct the purchase price.

If the property is not trading stock, the notional buyer may be able to deduct amounts for the expenditure under Division 40 (about capital allowances).

Effect of notional loan

The notional buyer may be able to deduct notional interest payments over the period of the loan.

Other effects

These effects displace the income tax consequences that would otherwise arise from the arrangement. For example, the notional buyer cannot deduct the actual payments to the notional seller.

Subdivision 240-A — Application and scope of Division

Table of sections

Operative provisions

240-10 Application of this Division

240-15 Scope of Division

Operative provisions

240-10 Application of this Division

An arrangement is treated as a notional sale and notional loan if:

the arrangement is listed in the table below; and

the arrangement relates to the kind of property listed in the table; and

any conditions listed in the table are satisfied.

Special provisions that apply to particular arrangements are also listed in the table.

240-15 Scope of Division

This Division has effect for the purposes of this Act and for the purposes of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 other than:

Parts 3-1 and 3-3 of this Act (capital gains tax); and

(b) Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (certain payments to non-residents etc.).

Subdivision 240-B — The notional sale and notional loan

Table of sections

Operative provisions

240-17 Who is the notional seller and the notional buyer?

240-20 Notional sale of property by notional seller and notional acquisition of property by notional buyer

240-25 Notional loan by notional seller to notional buyer

Operative provisions

240-17 Who is the notional seller and the notional buyer?

(1) An entity is the notional seller if it is a party to the *arrangement and:

actually owns the property; or

is the owner of the property because of a previous operation of this Division.

(2) An entity is the notional buyer if it is a party to the *arrangement and, under the arrangement, has the *right to use the property.

Example: If the arrangement is a hire purchase agreement, the finance provider will be the notional seller and the hirer will be the notional buyer.

240-20 Notional sale of property by notional seller and notional acquisition of property by notional buyer

The notional seller is taken to have disposed of the property by way of sale to the notional buyer, and the notional buyer is taken to have acquired it, at the start of the arrangement.

The notional buyer is taken to own the property until:

the arrangement ends; or

the notional buyer becomes the notional seller under a later arrangement to which this Division applies.

240-25 Notional loan by notional seller to notional buyer

(1) On entering into the *arrangement, the *notional seller is taken to have made a loan (the notional loan) to the *notional buyer.

The notional loan is for a period:

starting at the start of the arrangement; and

ending on the day on which the arrangement is to cease to have effect or, if the arrangement is of indefinite duration, on the day on which it would be reasonable to conclude, having regard to the terms and conditions of the arrangement, that the arrangement will cease to have effect.

(3) The notional loan is of an amount (the notional loan principal) equal to the consideration for the sale of the property less any amount paid, or credited by the *notional seller as having been paid, by the *notional buyer to the notional seller, at or before the start of the *arrangement, for the cost of the property.

Note: Section 240-80 affects the amount of the notional loan principal where the arrangement is an extension or renewal of another arrangement.

The notional loan is subject to payment of interest.

The consideration for the sale of the property by the notional seller, and the cost of the acquisition of the property by the notional buyer, are each taken to have been:

if an amount is stated to be the cost or value of the property for the purposes of the arrangement and the notional seller and the notional buyer were dealing with each other at *arm’s length in connection with the arrangement—the amount so stated; or

otherwise—the amount that could reasonably have been expected to have been paid by the notional buyer for the purchase of the property if:

the notional seller had actually sold the property to the notional buyer at the start of the arrangement; and

the notional seller and the notional buyer were dealing with each other at arm’s length in connection with the sale.

The notional loan principal is taken to be repaid, and the interest is taken to be paid, by the making of the payments under the arrangement.

Subdivision 240-C — Amounts to be included in notional seller’s assessable income

Guide to Subdivision 240-C

240-30 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides for the inclusion in the notional seller’s assessable income of:

amounts (notional interest) on account of the interest for the notional loan that the notional seller is taken to have made to the notional buyer; and

any profit made by the notional seller:

on the notional sale of the property to the notional buyer; or

on a sale of the property after any notional re-acquisition of the property by the notional seller.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

240-35 Amounts to be included in notional seller’s assessable income

240-40 Arrangement payments not to be included in notional seller’s assessable income

Operative provisions

240-35 Amounts to be included in notional seller’s assessable income

Notional interest

The notional seller’s assessable income of an income year includes the notional interest for arrangement payment periods, and parts of arrangement payment periods, in the income year.

Profit on notional sale

If the property is not trading stock of the notional seller and the consideration for the notional sale of the property exceeds the cost of the acquisition of the property by the notional seller, the excess is included in the notional seller’s assessable income of the income year of the notional sale.

Profit on actual sale after notional re-acquisition

If:

the notional seller is taken under this Division to have re-acquired the property from the notional buyer; and

the notional seller afterwards sells the property; and

the consideration for the sale exceeds the cost of the re-acquisition;

the excess is included in the notional seller’s assessable income of the income year in which the sale occurred.

240-40 Arrangement payments not to be included in notional seller’s assessable income

The arrangement payments that the notional seller receives, or is entitled to receive, under the arrangement:

are not to be included in the notional seller’s assessable income of any income year; but

are not taken to be exempt income of the notional seller.

However, those arrangement payments are taken into account in calculating notional interest that is included in the notional seller’s assessable income under section 240-35.

A loss or outgoing incurred by the notional seller in deriving any such arrangement payments is not taken to be a loss or outgoing incurred by the notional seller in relation to gaining or producing exempt income.

Subdivision 240-D — Deductions allowable to notional buyer

Guide to Subdivision 240-D

240-45 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides that the notional buyer may, in certain circumstances, be entitled to deductions for the notional interest for the notional loan that the notional seller is taken to have made to the notional buyer.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

240-50 Extent to which deductions are allowable to notional buyer

240-55 Arrangement payments not to be deductions

Operative provisions

240-50 Extent to which deductions are allowable to notional buyer

The notional buyer is only entitled to deduct notional interest for an income year to the extent that the notional buyer would, apart from this Division, have been entitled to deduct arrangement payments for that income year if no part of those payments were capital in nature.

The notional buyer is entitled to deduct notional interest for arrangement payment periods, and parts of arrangement payment periods, in the income year.

240-55 Arrangement payments not to be deductions

The notional buyer is not entitled to deduct arrangement payments that the notional buyer makes under the arrangement, but those payments are taken into account in calculating notional interest that may be deducted under section 240-50.

Subdivision 240-E — Notional interest and arrangement payments

Table of sections

Operative provisions

240-60 Notional interest

240-65 Arrangement payments

240-70 Arrangement payment periods

Operative provisions

240-60 Notional interest

(1) The *notional interest for an *arrangement payment period is worked out as follows:

Calculating notional interest

Step 1. Add the notional interest from previous arrangement payment periods to the notional loan principal.

Step 2. Subtract any *arrangement payments that have already been made or that are due but that have not been made. The result is the outstanding notional loan principal as at the start of the *arrangement payment period.

Step 3. Work out the implicit interest rate for the *arrangement payment period, taking into account the *arrangement payments payable by the *notional buyer under the *arrangement and any *termination amounts.

Step 4. Multiply the outstanding notional loan principal by the implicit interest rate. The result is the notional interest for the *arrangement payment period.

If only part of an arrangement payment period occurs during an income year, the notional interest for that part of the arrangement payment period is so much of the notional interest for that arrangement payment period as may appropriately be related to that income year in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

In calculating the implicit interest rate, if any of the relevant amounts are not known at the start of the arrangement, a reasonable estimate of the amount is to be made and is to be used for the purposes of calculating the implicit interest rate for each income year of the notional seller.

If a reasonable estimate cannot be made at that time, an estimate of the amount is to be made at the end of each income year of the notional seller for the purposes of calculating the implicit interest rate for each income year of the notional seller.

240-65 Arrangement payments

An arrangement payment is an amount that the *notional buyer is required to pay under the *arrangement but does not include:

an amount in the nature of a penalty payable for failure to make a payment on time; or

a termination amount.

240-70 Arrangement payment periods

(1) An *arrangement payment period is a period for which a payment under the *arrangement is allocated or expressed to be payable.

However, if a period exceeds 6 months, the period is not an arrangement payment period but each of the following parts of the period is a separate arrangement payment period:

the part of the period beginning at the start of that period and ending 6 months later;

each part of the period:

beginning immediately after a part of the period that is an arrangement payment period under paragraph (a) or under a previous application of this paragraph; and

ending 6 months after the start of that later part or at the end of the period, whichever first occurs.

Subdivision 240-F — The end of the arrangement

Table of sections

Operative provisions

240-75 When is the end of the arrangement?

240-80 What happens if the arrangement is extended or renewed

240-85 What happens if an amount is paid by or on behalf of the notional buyer to acquire the property

240-90 What happens if the notional buyer ceases to have the right to use the property

Operative provisions

240-75 When is the end of the arrangement?

If the arrangement is stated to cease to have effect at a particular time, it is taken for the purposes of this Division to end (even if it is extended or renewed) at the earlier of:

that time; or

the time at which the arrangement ceases to have effect (whether because the arrangement is terminated or for any other reason).

Note: Section 240-80 deals with extensions and renewals.

An arrangement is taken to have ended if it is extended or renewed.

If the arrangement is of indefinite duration, it ends at the time at which the arrangement ceases to have effect even if the arrangement is renewed.

Note: Section 240-80 deals with extensions and renewals.

An arrangement is taken to have ended if it is reasonable to conclude, having regard to the terms and conditions of the arrangement, that the arrangement has ceased to have effect.

An arrangement is also taken to have ended if the property has been lost or destroyed.

240-80 What happens if the arrangement is extended or renewed

This section sets out what happens if, after the end of the arrangement, the notional buyer and notional seller extend or renew the arrangement.

(2) This Division applies as if the original *arrangement has ended and the extended arrangement or renewed arrangement is a separate arrangement (the new arrangement).

There is not, however, taken to be any disposal or acquisition as a result of the original arrangement ending or of the new arrangement starting and the notional buyer does not cease to own the property.

Also, the notional loan principal for the new loan is:

if the arrangement as extended or renewed states an amount as the cost or value of the property for the purposes of the extension or renewal and the notional seller and the notional buyer were dealing with each other at *arm’s length in connection with the extension or renewal—the amount so stated; or

otherwise—the amount that could reasonably have been expected to have been paid by the notional buyer for the purchase of the property if:

the notional seller had actually sold the property to the notional buyer when the arrangement was extended or renewed; and

the notional seller and notional buyer were dealing with each other at arm’s length in connection with the sale.

Subdivision 240-G applies to the notional loan for the original arrangement. For that purpose, the notional loan principal for the new arrangement is taken to be a termination amount paid to the notional seller under the original arrangement.

240-85 What happens if an amount is paid by or on behalf of the notional buyer to acquire the property

If, at or after the end of the arrangement, an amount is paid to the notional seller by, or on behalf of, the notional buyer to acquire the property, the following provisions have effect:

the amount paid is not included in the notional seller’s assessable income;

the notional buyer cannot deduct the payment;

the notional buyer is taken to continue to own the property;

the transfer to the notional buyer of legal title to the property is not taken to be a disposal of the property by the notional seller.

240-90 What happens if the notional buyer ceases to have the right to use the property

This section applies if, at the end of the arrangement:

the arrangement is not extended or renewed in the way mentioned in subsection 240-80(1); and

no amount is paid to the notional seller by, or on behalf of, the notional buyer to acquire the property; and

the property is not lost or destroyed.

The property is taken to have been disposed of by the notional buyer by way of sale back to the notional seller, and to have been acquired by the notional seller, at the end of the arrangement.

The consideration for the sale of the property by the notional buyer, and the cost of the acquisition of the property by the notional seller, are each taken to be equal to the *market value of the property at the end of the arrangement.

Subsection (5) applies where the property is a car and if it:

had been bought from the notional seller, when this Division first applied to an arrangement in respect of the car, by the notional buyer for a price equal to the notional loan principal; and

had been first used by the notional buyer for any purpose in the financial year in which that time occurred;

the cost of the car, for the purpose of working out its decline in value for that person under Division 40, would have been limited by section 40-230.

Where an associate of the notional buyer acquires the car, the *cost of the car for the purposes of the application of Division 40 to the associate is taken to be whichever is the lesser of:

the sum of:

the amount that would have been the *adjustable value of the car at that time for the purposes of the application of that Division to the notional buyer if the notional buyer were not taken under this Division to have disposed of the car; and

any amount that is included in the notional buyer’s assessable income under section 40-285 because the notional buyer is taken to have disposed of the car; or

the cost of the acquisition of the car by the associate.

Subdivision 240-G — Adjustments if total amount assessed to notional seller differs from amount of interest

Guide to Subdivision 240-G

240-100 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides for adjustments if the sum of the amounts included in the notional seller’s assessable income are greater or less than the interest, worked out at the end of the arrangement, for the notional loan.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

240-105 Adjustments for notional seller

240-110 Adjustments for notional buyer

Operative provisions

240-105 Adjustments for notional seller

This section applies at the end of the arrangement.

If the sum of:

all amounts (other than *termination amounts) that were paid or payable to the notional seller under the arrangement; and

any termination amounts paid or payable to the notional seller;

exceeds the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (4), the excess is included in the notional seller’s assessable income of the income year in which the arrangement ends.

Note: Subsection 240-80(5) provides that the amount of a notional loan that is taken to be made by an extended or renewed arrangement is a termination amount paid under the previous arrangement.

If the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (4) exceeds:

all amounts (other than *termination amounts) that were paid or payable to the notional seller under the arrangement; and

any termination amounts paid or payable to the notional seller;

the notional seller is entitled to deduct the excess in the income year in which the arrangement ends.

Note: Subsection 240-80(5) provides that the amount of a notional loan that is taken to be made by an extended or renewed arrangement is a termination amount paid under the previous arrangement.

The formula for the purposes of subsections (2) and (3) is:

where:

assessed notional interest means the *notional interest that has been or is to be included in the *notional seller’s assessable income of any income year.

240-110 Adjustments for notional buyer

If:

an amount is included in the notional seller’s assessable income of an income year under subsection 240-105(2); or

an amount would have been so included if the notional seller had been subject to tax on assessable income;

the notional buyer is entitled to deduct a corresponding amount in the notional buyer’s income year.

If:

the notional seller is entitled to deduct an amount for an income year under subsection 240-105(3); or

the notional seller would have been so entitled if the notional seller had been subject to tax on assessable income;

a corresponding amount is included in the notional buyer’s assessable income for the notional buyer’s income year.

The notional buyer is entitled to a deduction, and is required to include an amount in his or her assessable income only to the extent (if any) that the notional buyer would, apart from this Division, have been entitled to deduct arrangement payments if no part of those payments were capital in nature.

Subdivision 240-H — Application of Division 16E to certain arrangements

240-112 Division 16E applies to certain arrangements

(1) Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to an arrangement (the assignment arrangement) between the notional seller and another person (the holder) to transfer the right to payments (the Division 240 payments) under an arrangement that is treated as a sale and loan by this Division (the sale and loan arrangement).

In applying Division 16E, the following assumptions are to be made:

the assignment arrangement is the qualifying security;

the notional seller is the issuer;

the qualifying security is issued when the assignment arrangement is entered into;

the issue price is consideration provided to the notional seller under the assignment arrangement;

the Division 240 payments are payments made by the notional seller under the assignment arrangement;

no part of the payments represent periodic interest.

This Subdivision does not apply if the assignment arrangement gives rise to a termination of the sale and loan arrangement for the purposes of this Division.

(4) To avoid doubt, Division 6A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply to an assignment arrangement to which this Subdivision applies.

Subdivision 240-I — Provisions applying to hire purchase agreements

Table of sections

Operative provisions

240-115 Another person, or no person taken to own property in certain cases

Operative provisions

240-115 Another person, or no person taken to own property in certain cases

This section sets out special modifications of the effect of this Division that apply in relation to a *hire purchase agreement unless:

the notional buyer would have been the owner or the *quasi-owner of the property if the arrangement had been a sale of the property; and

it is reasonably likely that the right, obligation or contingent obligation to acquire the property will be exercised by, or in respect of, the notional buyer.

Note: An example of a contingent obligation is a put option.

The modifications also apply if the notional buyer:

disposes of his or her interest in the property; or

enters into a lease covered by Division 242 (about luxury car leases) under which he or she leases the property to another person.

Modifications

For the purpose of the capital allowance provisions, if, apart from the operation of this Division, an entity other than the notional seller would own the property that is the subject of an agreement covered by this section, that entity is taken to be the owner of the property.

For the purpose of the capital allowance provisions, if, apart from the operation of this Division, the notional seller would own the property that is the subject of an agreement covered by this section, no entity is taken to be the owner of the property.

Division 242 — Leases of luxury cars

Guide to Division 242

242-A Notional sale and loan

242-B Amount to be included in lessor’s assessable income

242-C Deductions allowable to lessee

242-D Adjustments if total amount assessed to lessor differs from amount of interest

242-E Extension, renewal and final ending of the lease

Guide to Division 242

242-1 What this Division is about

A luxury car is one whose market value exceeds the car limit set for a car’s capital allowance deductions by section 40-230.

If the lessor of a luxury car is tax exempt, or taxed at a lower rate than the lessee, the lease could be structured to give both parties a better after-tax outcome than if the lessee had bought the car. The lessee could fully deduct the lease payments, thereby avoiding the capital allowance limit for luxury cars, and the lessor would receive higher lease payments.

This Division removes the tax benefit for the lessee by putting both parties in the same position as if the lessor had sold the car to the lessee and lent the lessee the purchase price.

Subdivision 242-A — Notional sale and loan

Guide to Subdivision 242-A

242-5 What this Subdivision is about

A leased luxury car is treated for income tax purposes as if it had been sold by the lessor to the lessee for the car’s market value. The lessor is treated as having lent the lessee the money to buy the car, and the lease payments are treated as payments of the principal and interest on that notional loan.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

242-10 Application

242-15 Notional sale and acquisition

242-20 Consideration for notional sale, and cost, of car

242-25 Notional loan by lessor to lessee

Operative provisions

242-10 Application

This Division applies to a car that:

is leased (but not under a *short-term hire agreement or a *hire purchase agreement) for consideration; and

was a *luxury car when the lessor first leased it; and

is not trading stock of the lessee; and

is not a car covered by subsection 40-230(2) (about cars modified to carry individuals with a disability).

(2) The provisions of this Division do not have effect for the purposes of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about withholding tax on dividends, interest and royalties).

Note: This subsection prevents interest on the notional loan that this Division creates being subject to withholding tax under Division 11A.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the question whether an agreement is a *short-term hire agreement is determined on the basis that an employee or employer of an entity is an associate of the entity.

Note: Under the definition of short-term hire agreement in subsection 995-1(1), successive agreements for the hire of the same asset to an entity or its associates are not short-term hire agreements if they result in substantial continuity of hiring.

242-15 Notional sale and acquisition

This Act has effect as if:

(a) the *car had been disposed of (the notional sale) by the lessor to the lessee; and

the car had been acquired by the lessee;

at the start of the term of the lease.

Note: This Act will apply as it would have if the lessor had actually disposed of the car to the lessee. For example, if the lessor had been deducting an amount for the car’s decline in value, the notional disposal will activate the balancing adjustment rules in Subdivision 40-D because the lessor would be treated as no longer holding the car.

This Act also has effect as if the lessee owns the car until:

the lease (not including any extension or renewal of the lease) ends; or

the lessee enters into a sublease of the car and this Division applies to the car in relation to the sublease.

Note 1: This means that the lessee (and not the lessor) may be able to deduct amounts for the decline in value of the car under Division 40.

Note 2: The lessee will be treated as continuing to own the car until the end of any extension or renewal: see section 242-80.

242-20 Consideration for notional sale, and cost, of car

The consideration for the notional sale by the lessor, and the first element of the *cost of the car for the lessee, are the car’s *market value at the start of the term of the lease.

If:

the lease is a sublease; and

the lessee is one or more of the following:

an associate of the lessor;

an employer of the lessor;

an employee of the lessor;

the first element of the *cost of the car to the lessee is the sum of:

the amount that would have been the car’s *adjustable value at the start of the term of the lease for the purposes of applying this Act to the lessor if the lessor were not taken under this Division to have disposed of the car; and

any amount that is included in the lessor’s assessable income under section 40-285 as a balancing adjustment because the lessor is treated as having disposed of the car.

Note: Section 242-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 extends paragraph (2)(d) to cover amounts included in assessable income under former provisions corresponding to section 40-285.

242-25 Notional loan by lessor to lessee

(1) This Act has effect as if, on the grant of the lease, the lessor had made a loan (the notional loan) to the lessee:

for a period equal to the term of the lease (not including the term of any extension or renewal); and

(b) of an amount (the notional loan principal) equal to the consideration for the notional sale of the *car less any amount paid, or credited by the lessor as having been paid, by the lessee to the lessor, at or before the start of the term of the lease, for the first element of the *cost of the car to the lessee; and

subject to payment of interest.

Note: There is a further notional loan if the lease is extended or renewed: see section 242-80.

This Act has effect as if the notional loan principal were repaid, and the interest were paid, by the making of the *luxury car lease payments.

Subdivision 242-B — Amount to be included in lessor’s assessable income

Guide to Subdivision 242-B

242-30 What this Subdivision is about

The lessor’s assessable income includes the interest on the notional loan.

The lease payments to the lessor are non-assessable non-exempt income.

There would be a similar result if the lessor is treated as having reacquired the car and then sells the car for more than the cost of reacquisition.

Note: If the consideration for a notional sale of a car exceeds the adjustable value of the car to the lessor, the excess will be included in the lessor’s assessable income under section 40-285.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

242-35 Amount to be included in lessor’s assessable income

242-40 Treatment of lease payments

Operative provisions

242-35 Amount to be included in lessor’s assessable income

Accrual amounts

The lessor’s assessable income for an income year includes:

(a) if a *luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a *car occurs wholly during that income year—the amount (an accrual amount) worked out under subsection (2) for that luxury car lease payment period; and

(b) if part of a luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a car occurs during that income year—so much of the amount (also an accrual amount) worked out under subsection (2) for that luxury car lease payment period as may appropriately be related to that income year in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

The amount is:

where:

implicit interest rate is the implicit interest rate under the lease for the *luxury car lease payment period, taking into account the payments to be made by the lessee under the lease and any *termination amounts.

outstanding notional loan principal at the start of the lease payment period is:

the sum of the notional loan principal and the accrual amounts for earlier *luxury car lease payment periods; less

the sum of the *luxury car lease payments that the lessee was required to make before the start of the relevant luxury car lease payment period.

Excessive periods

If, apart from this subsection, a luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a car would exceed 6 months, this Division applies as if each of the following were a separate luxury car lease payment period:

the first 6 months of the original luxury car lease payment period;

if the original luxury car lease payment period was not longer than 12 months—the remaining part of the original luxury car lease payment period;

if the original luxury car lease payment period was longer than 12 months—each successive 6 month period in the original luxury car lease payment period;

the period (if any) after the end of the last of the periods to which paragraph (c) applies.

242-40 Treatment of lease payments

The *luxury car lease payments under the lease are not assessable income and are not exempt income of the lessor.

Note: Those lease payments are instead taken into account in calculating accrual amounts that are included in the lessor’s assessable income under section 242-35.

In working out the amounts the lessor can deduct for any income year, ignore the fact that subsection (1) makes the *luxury car lease payments non-assessable non-exempt income.

Note: This allows the lessor to continue to deduct amounts related to earning the lease payments (such as interest on an amount the lessor borrowed to acquire the car), just as if the amounts related to earning interest on the notional loan to the lessee.

Subdivision 242-C — Deductions allowable to lessee

Guide to Subdivision 242-C

242-45 What this Subdivision is about

The lessee is entitled to deduct the interest on the notional loan to the same extent that the lessee would have been able to deduct the lease payments apart from this Division.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

242-50 Extent to which deductions are allowable to lessee

242-55 Lease payments not deductible

Operative provisions

242-50 Extent to which deductions are allowable to lessee

If a luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a car occurs wholly during an income year of the lessee, the lessee can deduct the accrual amount for that period for that income year.

Note 1: If a luxury car lease payment period would otherwise be longer than 6 months, subsection 242-35(3) divides the original period into periods of no longer than 6 months.

Note 2: For accrual amount, see subsection 242-35(1).

If part of a luxury car lease payment period for the lease of a car occurs during an income year of the lessee, the lessee can deduct so much of the accrual amount for that period as may appropriately be related to that income year in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

The lessee can deduct an accrual amount, or part of an accrual amount, for a luxury car lease payment period under subsection (1) or (2) for an income year only to the extent that the lessee could deduct the luxury car lease payments made for that year apart from this Division.

242-55 Lease payments not deductible

The lessee cannot deduct the *luxury car lease payments that the lessee makes under the lease for any income year.

Note: Those payments are instead taken into account in calculating accrual amounts that are deductible under section 242-50.

Subdivision 242-D — Adjustments if total amount assessed to lessor differs from amount of interest

Guide to Subdivision 242-D

242-60 What this Subdivision is about

When a luxury car lease is extended, renewed or ends, the overall nominal gain to the lessor is compared to the nominal interest so far paid under the lease.

If the overall nominal gain is greater, the difference is assessable income of the lessor, and the lessee may be able to deduct it.

If the overall nominal gain is less, the lessor can deduct the difference, which may also be assessable income of the lessee.

This process ensures that the right amount has been taxed over the term of the lease.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

242-65 Adjustments for lessor

242-70 Adjustments for lessee

Operative provisions

242-65 Adjustments for lessor

This section applies at the following times:

if the term of the lease is extended—when the extension takes effect;

if the lease is renewed—when the renewal takes effect;

when the lease (including any extension or renewal of the lease) ends.

If the sum of all amounts (whether *luxury car lease payments, a termination amount or any other payments) that were paid or payable to the lessor under the lease exceeds the amount worked out under subsection (4), the excess is included in the lessor’s assessable income for the income year in which the relevant time occurs.

Note: Subsection 242-80(8) treats the amount of a notional loan that is taken to be made by an extended or renewed lease to be a termination amount paid under the previous lease.

If the sum of all amounts (whether *luxury car lease payments, a termination amount or any other payments) that were paid or payable to the lessor under the lease is less than the amount worked out under subsection (4), the lessor can deduct the difference for the income year in which the relevant time occurs.

The amount for the purposes of subsections (2) and (3) is the sum of:

the notional loan principal; and

the sum of the accrual amounts that have been or are to be included in the lessor’s assessable income of any income year.

Note: For accrual amount, see subsection 242-35(1).

242-70 Adjustments for lessee

If:

an amount is included in the lessor’s assessable income for an income year under subsection 242-65(2); or

an amount would have been so included if the lessor had been subject to tax on assessable income;

the lessee can deduct a corresponding amount for the same income year.

If:

the lessor can deduct an amount for an income year under subsection 242-65(3); or

the lessor could have deducted an amount under that subsection if the lessor had been subject to tax on assessable income;

a corresponding amount is included in the lessee’s assessable income for the same income year.

The lessee cannot deduct an amount for any income year under subsection (1), and an amount is not included in the lessee’s assessable income of any income year under subsection (2), except to the extent (if any) that the lessee could deduct the *luxury car lease payments made apart from this Division.

Subdivision 242-E — Extension, renewal and final ending of the lease

Guide to Subdivision 242-E

242-75 What this Subdivision is about

When a luxury car lease ends (whether it expires or is terminated before its expiry date), one of 3 things will happen:

if the lease is extended or renewed—the original notional loan is treated as having been repaid and the lessor is treated as having made a new loan to the lessee; or

if the lessee acquires the car from the lessor—the lessee continues to own the car for tax purposes, and the actual transfer and the termination payment to acquire the car are ignored for tax purposes; or

if the lessee’s right to use the car ends—the lessee is treated as having sold the car back to the lessor.

In each case, there may be adjustments under Subdivision 242-D to ensure that the right amount has been taxed over the term of the lease.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

242-80 What happens if the term of the lease is extended or the lease is renewed

242-85 What happens if an amount is paid by the lessee to acquire the car

242-90 What happens if the lessee stops having the right to use the car

Operative provisions

242-80 What happens if the term of the lease is extended or the lease is renewed

The rules in this section have effect if, after the end of the lease (or the end of any extension of the lease term or renewal of the lease), the lessee continues to have the right to use the car because the term of the lease is extended (or further extended) or the lease is renewed (or further renewed).

This Act has effect as if the lessee continued to be the owner of the car until the end of the lease as extended or renewed.

However, this Act has effect as if the lessee stopped being the owner of the car if:

the lessee enters into a sublease in respect of the car; and

this Division applies to the car in respect of that sublease.

This Act has effect as if the notional loan that arose because of the grant of the lease, or because of the previous extension or renewal, had been repaid.

Note: Also, Subdivision 242-D (about balancing adjustments) will apply to the ending, extension or renewal.

(5) This Act has effect as if, on the grant of the extension or renewal, the lessor had made a new loan (the notional loan) to the lessee:

for the period of the extension of the term of the lease or the period of the renewed lease, as the case may be; and

(b) of an amount (the notional loan principal) equal to the *car’s *market value when the extension or renewal is granted; and

subject to the payment of interest.

This Act has effect as if the notional loan principal were repaid, and the interest were paid, by the making of the *luxury car lease payments under the lease as extended or renewed (or further extended or renewed).

In determining whether subsection (1) applies to the lessee, disregard any period after the end of the lease (or the end of any extension of the lease term or renewal of the lease) and before the extension or renewal (or further extension or renewal) is granted and during which the lessee did not have the right to use the car if the extension or renewal (or further extension or renewal):

has effect from the time immediately after the end of that term, extension or renewal; or

otherwise results in substantial continuity of the leasing of the car to the lessee.

The amount of the notional loan is treated, for the purposes of section 242-65 (about the lessor’s balancing adjustments), as a termination amount paid to the lessor under the lease or under the previous extension or renewal.

242-85 What happens if an amount is paid by the lessee to acquire the car

If, at the end of the lease or, if it is extended or renewed, at the end of any extension or renewal (the end time), an amount is paid to the lessor by, or on behalf of, the lessee to acquire the *car, the following provisions have effect:

the amount paid is not included in the lessor’s assessable income;

the lessee cannot deduct the payment;

this Act has effect as if:

the lessee continued to be the owner of the car until the lessee disposes of it; and

the transfer to the lessee of legal title to the car were not a disposal of the car by the lessor.

242-90 What happens if the lessee stops having the right to use the car

If, at the end time:

the lessee stops having the right to use the car; and

no amount is paid to the lessor by, or on behalf of, the lessee to acquire the car;

the following provisions have effect.

Note: For end time, see section 242-85.

This Act has effect as if the car:

were sold by the lessee to the lessor; and

were acquired by the lessor;

at the end time.

The consideration for the sale of the car by the lessee, and the first element of the *cost of the car to the lessor, are the *market value of the car at the end time.

If the car is afterwards acquired by an associate of the lessee or an employer or employee of the lessee, this Act has effect as if the first element of the *cost of the car as a depreciating asset were the lesser of:

the sum of:

the amount that would have been the *adjustable value of the car at that time for the purposes of applying this Act to the lessee if the lessee were not treated under this Division as having disposed of the car; and

(ii) any amount that is included in the lessee’s assessable income under section 40-285 as a balancing adjustment because the lessee is treated as having disposed of the car; and

the cost of the acquisition of the car by the associate, employer or employee.

Note: Section 242-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 extends subparagraph (a)(ii) to cover amounts included in assessable income under former provisions corresponding to section 40-285.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the lessee is not treated as having stopped to have the right to use the car if:

the term of the lease is extended (or further extended), or the lease is renewed (or further renewed), at a time after, but not immediately after, the end of that term, extension or renewal with effect from the time immediately after that end; or

the extension or renewal (or further extension or renewal) otherwise results in substantial continuity of the leasing of the car to the lessee.

Division 243 — Limited recourse debt

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 243

243-A Circumstances in which Division operates

243-B Working out the excessive deductions

243-C Amounts included in assessable income and deductions

243-D Special provisions

Guide to Division 243

243-10 What this Division is about

This Division tells you when you must include an additional amount in your assessable income at the termination of a limited recourse debt arrangement. It also tells you what the additional amount is.

Basically, the Division applies where the capital allowance deductions that have been obtained for expenditure that is funded by the debt and the deductions are excessive having regard to the amount of the debt that was repaid.

The reason for the adjustment is to ensure that, where you have not been fully at risk in relation to an amount of expenditure, you do not get a net deduction if you fail to pay that amount.

Subdivision 243-A — Circumstances in which Division operates

Table of sections

Operative provisions

243-15 When does this Division apply?

243-20 What is limited recourse debt?

243-25 When is a debt arrangement terminated?

243-30 What is the financed property and the debt property?

Operative provisions

243-15 When does this Division apply?

This Division applies if:

limited recourse debt has been used to wholly or partly finance or refinance expenditure; and

at the time that the debt arrangement is terminated, the debt has not been paid in full by the debtor; and

the debtor can deduct an amount as a capital allowance for the income year in which the termination occurs, or has deducted or can deduct an amount for an earlier income year, in respect of the expenditure or the financed property.

Note: This Division does not apply to certain limited recourse debts that are used to refinance limited recourse debt to which this Division has applied (see subsection 243-50(4)).

However, unless the net capital allowance deductions have been excessive having regard to the amount of the debt that remains unpaid (see section 243-35), no amount is included in the debtor’s assessable income under this Division although future deductions may be reduced.

In working out if the debt has been paid in full, and in working out the unpaid amount of the debt, the following amounts are to be treated as if they were not payments in respect of the debt:

any reduction in the debt as a result of the financed property being surrendered or returned to the creditor at the termination of the debt;

any payment to reduce the debt that is funded directly or indirectly by *non-arm’s length limited recourse debt or by proceeds from the disposal of the debtor’s interest in the financed property.

However, any amounts accrued that are interest, notional interest or in the nature of interest are taken not to be unpaid.

In working out if the debt has been paid in full, and in working out the unpaid amount of the debt, payments are to be attributed first to the payment of any accrued amounts that are interest, notional interest or in the nature of interest.

A notional loan arising because of Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan) is taken to be a debt that has been used to wholly or partly finance or refinance expenditure.

243-20 What is limited recourse debt?

(1) A limited recourse debt is an obligation imposed by law on an entity (the debtor) to pay an amount to another entity (the creditor) where the rights of the creditor as against the debtor in the event of default in payment of the debt or of interest are limited wholly or predominantly to any or all of the following:

rights (including the right to money payable) in relation to any or all of the following:

the debt property or the use of the debt property;

goods produced, supplied, carried, transmitted or delivered, or services provided, by means of the debt property;

the loss or disposal of the whole or a part of the debt property or of the debtor’s interest in the debt property;

rights in respect of a mortgage or other security over the debt property or other property;

rights that arise out of any arrangement relating to the financial obligations of an end-user of the financed property towards the debtor, and are financial obligations in relation to the financed property.

(2) An obligation imposed by law on an entity (the debtor) to pay an amount to another entity (the creditor) is also a limited recourse debt if it is reasonable to conclude that the rights of the creditor as against the debtor in the event of default in payment of the debt or of interest:

are capable of being limited in the way mentioned in subsection (1); or

are in substance or effect limited wholly or predominantly to rights (including the right to money payable) in relation to any or all of the following:

the debt property or the use of the debt property;

goods produced, supplied, carried, transmitted or delivered, or services provided, by means of the debt property;

the loss or disposal of the whole or a part of the debt property or of the debtor’s interest in the debt property.

Note: Paragraph (b) could apply to a special purpose entity. For example, an entity’s only significant asset is one that it financed by way of a bank loan. The bank’s rights to recover the debt (if the entity defaults) are not contractually limited, however they are in effect limited to rights in relation to the asset.

(3) An obligation imposed by law on an entity (the debtor) to pay an amount to another entity (the creditor) is also a limited recourse debt if there is no *debt property and it is reasonable to conclude that the rights of the creditor as against the debtor in the event of default in payment of the debt or of interest are capable of being limited.

In reaching a conclusion for the purposes of subsection (2) or (3), have regard to the following:

the debtor’s assets (other than assets that are indemnities or guarantees provided in relation to the debt);

any arrangement to which the debtor is a party;

except for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b)—whether all of the debtor’s assets would be available for the purpose of discharging the debt (other than assets that are security for other debts of the debtor or any other entity);

whether the debtor and creditor are dealing at *arm’s length in relation to the debt.

(4) A notional loan arising because of Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan) under a *hire purchase agreement is also a limited recourse debt.

However, an obligation that is covered by subsection (1) is not a limited recourse debt if the creditor’s recourse is not in practice limited due to the creditor’s rights in respect of a mortgage or other security over property of the debtor (other than the financed property) the value of which exceeds, or is likely to exceed, the amount of the debt.

Also, an obligation that is covered by subsection (1), (2) or (3) is not a limited recourse debt if, having regard to all relevant circumstances, it would be unreasonable for the obligation to be treated as limited recourse debt.

(7) A *limited recourse debt is a non-arm’s length limited recourse debt if the debtor and creditor do not deal with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the debt.

243-25 When is a debt arrangement terminated?

A debt arrangement is taken to have terminated if:

it is actually terminated; or

the debtor’s obligation to repay the debt is waived, novated or otherwise varied so as to reduce, transfer or extinguish the debt; or

an agreement is entered into to waive, novate or otherwise vary the debtor’s obligation to repay the debt so as to reduce, transfer or extinguish the debt; or

the creditor ceases to have an entitlement to recover the debt from the debtor (other than as a result of an *arm’s length assignment of some or all of the creditor’s rights under the debt arrangement); or

the debtor ceases to be the owner or the *quasi-owner of some or all of the debt property because that property is surrendered to the creditor because of the debtor’s failure to pay the whole or a part of the debt; or

the debtor ceases to be the owner of a beneficial interest in some or all of the debt property because the interest is surrendered to the creditor because of the debtor’s failure to pay the whole or a part of the debt; or

the debt becomes a bad debt.

However, a debt arrangement that is a notional loan arising because of Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan) is not taken to have terminated merely because it has been renewed or extended.

Note: Under Division 240, notional loans are taken to have ended if the relevant arrangement is renewed or extended.

Where a debt is terminated under paragraph (1)(b) or (c) as a result of the debt being reduced, the remaining debt is taken to be a new debt to which section 243-15 applies.

243-30 What is the financed property and the debt property?

(1) Property is the financed property if the expenditure referred to in paragraph 243-15(1)(a) is on the property, is on the acquisition of the property, results in the creation of the property or is otherwise connected with the property.

(2) If the debt agreement is a notional loan arising under Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan), the property that is the subject of the agreement is the financed property.

(3) Property is the debt property if:

it is the financed property; or

the property is provided as security for the debt.

Subdivision 243-B — Working out the excessive deductions

Table of sections

Operative provisions

243-35 Working out the excessive deductions

Operative provisions

243-35 Working out the excessive deductions

The capital allowance deductions have been excessive having regard to the amount of the debt that remains unpaid if the amount worked out under subsection (2) exceeds the amount worked out under subsection (4).

This is how to work out the total net capital allowance deductions:

Working out the total net capital allowance deductions

Step 1. Add up all of the debtor’s capital allowance deductions in respect of the expenditure or the financed property (including deductions because of balancing adjustments) for the income year in which the termination occurs or an earlier income year.

Step 2. Deduct from that any amount that is included in the assessable income of the debtor of any income year by virtue of a provision of this Act (other than this Division) as a result of the disposal of the financed property the effect of which is to reverse a deduction covered by Step 1.

Step 3. Deduct from the result an amount equal to the sum of any amounts included in the entity’s assessable income as a result of an earlier application of this Division to the debt.

Step 4. Add to the result an amount equal to the sum of any deductions to which the entity is entitled under section 243-45 (repayments of the original debt after termination) or 243-50 (repayments of the replacement debt) because of payments in respect of the debt.

Note: The amount of a capital allowance deduction may be reduced under section 707-415.

(3) The reference in step 2 of the method statement in subsection (2) to an amount that is included in the assessable income of a taxpayer as a result of the disposal of the *financed property includes a reference to an amount that is included under section 26AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as a result of the disposal of the financed property.

Note: Division 20 deals with amounts included to reverse the effect of past deductions.

This is how to work out the total net capital allowance deductions that would otherwise be allowable taking into account the amount of the debt that is unpaid:

Working out the total net capital allowance deductions that would otherwise be allowable

Work out the amount that would be worked out under subsection (2) if the deductions and the amounts included in assessable income had been calculated using the following assumptions:

The original expenditure in respect of which deductions were calculated was reduced by the amount of the debt that was unpaid by the debtor when the debt was terminated. (In calculating the amount unpaid the following are to be disregarded:

any reduction in the amount as a result of the financed property being surrendered or returned to the creditor at the termination of the debt;

any reduction in the amount to the extent that it is funded directly or indirectly by *non-arm’s length limited recourse debt or by the consideration for the disposal of the debtor’s interest in the financed property.)

Deductions for income years after the income year in which the termination occurred were also taken into account.

The original expenditure in respect of which deductions were calculated was increased by any amount that is paid by the debtor as consideration for another person assuming a liability under the debt. (This assumption does not apply to the extent that the consideration is funded directly or indirectly by *non-arm’s length limited recourse debt or by the consideration for the disposal of the debtor’s interest in the financed property.)

Step 2 were omitted from subsection (2).

Subdivision 243-C — Amounts included in assessable income and deductions

Table of sections

Operative provisions

243-40 Amount included in debtor’s assessable income

243-45 Deduction for later payments in respect of debt

243-50 Deduction for payments for replacement debt

243-55 Effect of Division on later capital allowance deductions

243-57 Effect of Division on later capital allowance balancing adjustments

243-58 Adjustment where debt only partially used for expenditure

Operative provisions

243-40 Amount included in debtor’s assessable income

The debtor’s assessable income for the income year in which the termination occurs is to include the excess referred to in subsection 243-35(1).

Note: Section 243-60 applies in relation to certain partnership debts.

243-45 Deduction for later payments in respect of debt

This section applies if:

an amount was included in the debtor’s assessable income under section 243-40 or a deduction was reduced under section 243-55; and

the debtor makes a payment to the creditor, after the termination of the debt arrangement, in respect of the debt (other than an amount to the extent to which it is a payment of interest, of notional interest or in the nature of interest).

This is how to work out the amount of the deduction:

Working out the amount of the deduction

Step 1. Work out the amount that would be worked out under subsection 243-35(2) if the debt were terminated immediately before the payment.

Step 2. Work out the amount that would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(4) at that time if the payment had been taken into account.

Step 3. The amount of the deduction is the amount (if any) by which the amount worked out under Step 2 exceeds the amount worked out under Step 1.

The amount can be deducted for the income year in which the payment is made.

Limit on deductions

The total amounts deducted under this section in respect of a debt, and under section 243-50 in respect of a replacement debt, cannot exceed the sum of:

any amounts included in the debtor’s assessable income under this Division in respect of the original debt; and

any amount by which deductions in respect of the original debt were reduced under section 243-55.

243-50 Deduction for payments for replacement debt

Payments where debt refinanced

This section applies if:

an amount was included in the debtor’s assessable income under section 243-40 or a deduction was reduced under section 243-55; and

(b) an amount funded by a *non-arm’s length limited recourse debt (the replacement debt) was disregarded in calculations under subsection 243-35(4); and

the debtor makes a payment, after the termination of the original debt arrangement, in respect of the replacement debt (other than to the extent to which it is a payment of interest, of notional interest or in the nature of interest).

This is how to work out the amount of the deduction:

Working out the amount of the deduction

Step 1. Work out the amount that would be worked out under subsection 243-35(2) if the replacement debt were terminated immediately before the payment.

Step 2. Work out the amount that would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(4) at that time if the payment had been made in respect of the original debt and it had been taken into account.

Step 3. The amount of the deduction is the amount (if any) by which the amount worked out under Step 2 exceeds the amount worked out under Step 1.

The amount can be deducted for the income year in which the payment is made.

Division not to apply to termination of replacement debt

This Division does not apply to termination of the replacement debt referred to in paragraph (1)(b).

Limit on deductions

The total amounts deducted under section 243-45 in respect of the original debt, or under this section in respect of the replacement debt, cannot exceed the sum of:

any amounts included in the debtor’s assessable income under this Division in respect of the original debt; and

any amount by which deductions in respect of the original debt were reduced under section 243-55.

243-55 Effect of Division on later capital allowance deductions

This section applies where this Division (other than section 243-65) has applied in relation to a debt and the debtor is entitled to a capital allowance deduction in respect of the expenditure or the financed property in relation to a time or period after the termination of the debt.

The capital allowance deduction is reduced if the amount that would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(2) would have exceeded the amount worked out under subsection 243-35(4) if the following assumptions were applied in both subsections:

Assumptions to be applied

That the debt was terminated at the time, or at the end of the period, referred to in subsection (1) of this section.

That the amount unpaid at the time, or at the end of the period, is reduced by any amounts paid under a replacement debt.

The debtor’s capital allowance deductions in respect of the expenditure or the financed property were increased by the amount of the capital allowance deduction referred to in subsection (1) of this section.

The deduction is to be reduced by the amount of the excess.

243-57 Effect of Division on later capital allowance balancing adjustments

This section applies where this Division (other than section 243-65) has applied in relation to a debt and an amount is later included in the assessable income of an entity by virtue of a provision of this Act (other than this Division) as a result of the disposal of the financed property the effect of which is to reverse a deduction covered by Step 1 in subsection 243-35(2).

Any amount that would be included in the debtor’s assessable income is reduced if the amount that would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(4) would have exceeded the amount worked out under subsection 243-35(2) if the following assumptions were applied in both subsections:

Assumptions to be applied

That the debt was terminated at the time of the disposal of the financed property, referred to in subsection (1) of this section.

The amount in Step 2 in subsection 243-35(2) were increased by the amount that would otherwise be included in the debtor’s assessable income.

The amount worked out under subsection 243-35(4) were reduced by any amount by which:

the amount arising as a result of the disposal that is taken into account for the purposes of the provision mentioned in subsection (1);

exceeds:

the unpaid amount of the debt immediately before the time of the disposal of the financed property, referred to in subsection (1).

The amount is to be reduced by the amount of the excess.

243-58 Adjustment where debt only partially used for expenditure

If the debt is only partially used to finance the expenditure, or the property, in respect of which the capital allowance deductions referred to in Step 1 in subsection 243-35(2) are allowed, the amount of any deduction, any reduction in a deduction or any amount included in assessable income is to be so much as is reasonable taking into account the proportion of the debt that is used for that purpose.

Subdivision 243-D — Special provisions

Table of sections

Operative provisions

243-60 Application of Division to partnerships

243-65 Application where partner reduces liability

243-70 Application of Division to companies ceasing to be 100% subsidiary

243-75 Application of Division where debt forgiveness rules also apply

Operative provisions

243-60 Application of Division to partnerships

This Division applies to a partnership in respect of the partnership’s debts and in respect of debts of a partner, and references to a debtor include a reference to a partnership.

243-65 Application where partner reduces liability

This section applies to a debt in relation to a partner in a partnership if:

in connection with an arrangement, the partner’s liability to pay the debt is reduced or eliminated and the partner’s interest in the partnership ceases or is varied or transferred; and

an excess would have been worked out under subsection 243-35(1) if, at the time when the debt is reduced or eliminated, the debt had been terminated and remained unpaid and this section had not applied.

If this section applies to a debt in relation to a partner in a partnership, an amount is to be included in his or her assessable income.

This is how to work out the amount to be included:

Working out the amount included

Step 1. Work out which income years the partner was a member of the partnership and the partnership was entitled to a capital allowance deduction in respect of the expenditure or the financed property (including deductions because of balancing adjustments).

Step 2. For each of those income years, work out the proportion of net income of the partnership or the partnership loss (as the case requires) that was included in the assessable income of the partner or which the partner could deduct.

Step 3. For each of those income years, multiply the capital allowance deductions in respect of the expenditure or the financed property (including deductions because of balancing adjustments) of the partnership by the corresponding proportion worked out under Step 2. Sum all of the amounts.

Step 4. Divide the sum by the total of the capital allowance deductions in respect of the expenditure or the financed property (including deductions because of balancing adjustments) of the partnership for all of those income years.

Step 5. Work out the amount that would have been included in the partnership’s assessable income under section 243-40 if the debt had been terminated and remained unpaid and this section had not applied.

Step 6. Multiply the amount worked out in Step 5 by the factor worked out in Step 4. The result is the amount to be included in the partner’s assessable income.

243-70 Application of Division to companies ceasing to be 100% subsidiary

This section applies to a company if:

the company ceases to be a *100% subsidiary in relation to at least one other company; and

at that time, the company is the debtor for a limited recourse debt that has not been paid in full by the company; and

the creditor’s rights under the debt are transferred or assigned to another entity.

If this section applies, this Division applies as if the debt were terminated, and refinanced with *non-arm’s length limited recourse debt, at the time the company ceased to be a *100% subsidiary of that other company.

243-75 Application of Division where debt forgiveness rules also apply

This section is to remove doubt about how this Division and Division 245 apply where both apply to the same debt.

Where both apply:

this Division is to be applied first and is to be applied disregarding any operation of Division 245; and

any amounts included in assessable income under this Division are taken into account under paragraph 245-85(1)(a).

Division 245 — Forgiveness of commercial debts

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 245

245-A Debts to which operative rules apply

245-B What constitutes forgiveness of a debt

245-C Calculation of gross forgiven amount of a debt

245-D Calculation of net forgiven amount of a debt

245-E Application of net forgiven amounts

245-F Special rules relating to partnerships

245-G Record keeping

Guide to Division 245

245-1 What this Division is about

When a creditor forgives a commercial debt you owe, you make a gain. This is usually not included in your assessable income. Instead, this Division offsets the forgiven amount against amounts that could otherwise reduce your taxable income in the same or a later income year. Those amounts are:

your tax losses and net capital losses; and

capital allowances and some similar deductions; and

the cost bases of your CGT assets.

245-2 Simplified outline of this Division

This Division applies to any commercial debt (or part of a commercial debt) you owe that is forgiven.

Note: This Division does not apply if:

the debt is waived and the waiver constitutes a fringe benefit; or

the amount of the debt has been, or will be, included in your assessable income in any income year; or

the debt is forgiven under an Act relating to bankruptcy; or

the debt is forgiven by will; or

the debt is forgiven for reasons of natural love and affection; or

the debt is a tax-related liability.

(2) The net forgiven amount of a debt is worked out by reducing the value of your forgiven debt by:

any consideration you provided for the forgiveness; and

any amounts that this Act already brings to account because of the forgiveness.

The net forgiven amounts of all your forgiven debts in an income year are added up. This total net forgiven amount is applied to reduce the following amounts (in the following order):

your tax losses from previous income years;

your net capital losses from previous income years;

the deductions you would otherwise get in the income year, or in a later year, because of expenditure from a previous year (e.g. the capital allowance deductions you would get for the cost of a depreciating asset);

the cost bases of your CGT assets.

Any unapplied total net forgiven amount is disregarded.

Special rules apply to debts of partnerships.

Subdivision 245-A — Debts to which operative rules apply

Guide to Subdivision 245-A

245-5 What this Subdivision is about

This Division applies to a debt if you can deduct interest payable on the debt.

Table of sections

Application of Division

245-10 Commercial debts

245-15 Non-equity shares

245-20 Parts of debts

Application of Division

245-10 Commercial debts

Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G apply to a debt of yours if:

the whole or any part of interest, or of an amount in the nature of interest, paid or payable by you in respect of the debt has been deducted, or can be deducted, by you; or

interest, or an amount in the nature of interest, is not payable by you in respect of the debt but, had interest or such an amount been payable, the whole or any part of the interest or amount could have been deducted by you; or

interest or an amount mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b) could have been deducted by you apart from the operation of a provision of this Act (other than paragraphs 8-1(2)(a), (b) and (c)) that has the effect of preventing a deduction.

Note: Paragraphs 8-1(2)(a), (b) and (c) prevent deductions for capital, private or domestic outgoings and for outgoings relating to exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

245-15 Non-equity shares

This Division applies to a non-equity share issued by a company as if it were a debt to which section 245-10 applies that is owed by the company to the relevant shareholder.

245-20 Parts of debts

This Division applies to part of a debt in the same way as it applies to a whole debt.

Note: This Division treats interest, or an amount in the nature of interest, payable on a debt as being a separate debt if the interest or amount has accrued but has not been paid.

Subdivision 245-B — What constitutes forgiveness of a debt

Guide to Subdivision 245-B

245-30 What this Subdivision is about

A debt is forgiven if you no longer have to pay it.

However, this Division does not apply to some cases of forgiveness, such as bankruptcy.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

245-35 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt

245-36 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if the debt is assigned

245-37 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if a subscription for shares enables payment of the debt

245-40 Forgivenesses to which operative rules do not apply

245-45 Application of operative rules if forgiveness involves an arrangement

Operative provisions

245-35 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt

A debt is forgiven if and when:

the debtor’s obligation to pay the debt is released or waived, or is otherwise extinguished other than by repaying the debt in full; or

the period within which the creditor is entitled to sue for the recovery of the debt ends, because of the operation of a statute of limitations, without the debt having been paid.

245-36 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if the debt is assigned

A debt is forgiven if and when the creditor assigns the right to receive payment of the debt to another entity (the new creditor) and the following conditions are met:

either the new creditor is the debtor’s associate or the assignment occurred under an arrangement to which the new creditor and debtor were parties;

(b) the right to receive payment of the debt was not acquired by the new creditor in the ordinary course of *trading on a market, exchange or other place on which, or facility by means of which, offers to sell, buy or exchange securities (within the meaning of Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) are made or accepted.

Note 1: Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 brings to account gains and losses on some securities on an accruals basis.

Note 2: This Division also applies if an assigned debt is subsequently forgiven by the new creditor. Section 245-61 tells you how to work out the value of the debt in that case.

245-37 What constitutes forgiveness of a debt if a subscription for shares enables payment of the debt

If an entity subscribes for *shares in a company to enable the company to make a payment in or towards discharge of a debt it owes to the entity, the debt is forgiven when, and to the extent that, the company applies any of the money subscribed in or towards payment of the debt.

245-40 Forgivenesses to which operative rules do not apply

Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G do not apply to a *forgiveness of a debt if:

the debt is waived and the waiver constitutes a *fringe benefit; or

Note: The waiver by an employer of a debt owed by an employee is usually a fringe benefit: see section 14 of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

(b) the amount of the debt has been, or will be, included in the assessable income of the debtor in any income year; or

the forgiveness is effected under an Act relating to bankruptcy; or

the forgiveness is effected by will; or

the forgiveness is for reasons of natural love and affection; or

(f) the debt is a *tax-related liability or a civil penalty under Division 290 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about penalties for promoters and implementers of tax avoidance schemes).

Note: If the forgiveness of your debt involved an arrangement which was entered into before 28 June 1996, see section 245-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

245-45 Application of operative rules if forgiveness involves an arrangement

If:

the debtor and the creditor in relation to a debt enter into an arrangement; and

under the arrangement, the debtor’s obligation to pay the debt is to cease at a particular future time; and

(c) the cessation of the obligation is to occur without the debtor incurring any financial or other obligation (other than an obligation that, having regard to the debtor’s circumstances, is of a nominal or insignificant amount or kind);

Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G apply as if the debt were *forgiven when the arrangement is entered into.

If, after the arrangement is entered into, the debt is forgiven, the later forgiveness is disregarded for the purposes of those Subdivisions.

Subdivision 245-C — Calculation of gross forgiven amount of a debt

Guide to Subdivision 245-C

245-48 What this Subdivision is about

The amount of forgiveness (called the gross forgiven amount) for the debtor reflects the loss that the creditor makes for tax purposes. It is worked out in 2 steps:

the value of the debt when it was forgiven is worked out on the basis that you were solvent both then and when you incurred the debt; and

the value of the debt is then offset by any consideration given for the forgiveness of the debt.

The difference between the value of the debt and the amount offset is the gross forgiven amount.

If the debt was owed by several debtors, the gross forgiven amount is divided between them equally.

Table of sections

Working out the value of a debt

245-50 Extent of forgiveness if consideration is given

245-55 General rule for working out the value of a debt

245-60 Special rule for working out the value of a non-recourse debt

245-61 Special rule for working out the value of a previously assigned debt

Working out if an amount is offset against the value of the debt

245-65 Amount offset against amount of debt

Working out the gross forgiven amount

245-75 Gross forgiven amount of a debt

245-77 Gross forgiven amount shared between debtors

Working out the value of a debt

245-50 Extent of forgiveness if consideration is given

If any consideration is paid or given in respect of the *forgiveness of a debt, the debt that is forgiven is:

the obligation that existed before the forgiveness to pay so much of the debt as is expressed, or is taken, to be forgiven; and

the obligation that existed before the forgiveness to pay any part of the debt to which paragraph (a) does not apply but which ceases to be payable as a result of the payment or giving of the consideration.

Example: Daniel owes Samara $100. Samara agrees to accept $60 in full payment of the debt.

If their agreement specifies that Samara forgives the whole debt in return for $60, paragraph (a) provides that the forgiven debt is $100.

If their agreement instead requires Daniel to repay $60 and specifies that Samara forgives the remaining $40, paragraph (a) would deal with the $40 and paragraph (b) would add the remaining $60, again producing a forgiven amount of $100.

In either case, the $60 Daniel pays is offset against the forgiven amount of $100 in working out the gross forgiven amount of the debt: see sections 245-65 and 245-75.

245-55 General rule for working out the value of a debt

(1) The value of your debt at the time (the forgiveness time) when it is *forgiven is the amount that would have been its *market value (considered as an asset of the creditor) at the forgiveness time, assuming that:

when you incurred the debt, you were able to pay all your debts (including that one) as and when they fell due; and

your capacity to pay the debt is the same at the forgiveness time as when you incurred it.

However, the value of the debt at the forgiveness time is the sum of the following amounts, if that sum is less than the amount applicable under subsection (1):

what would have been the amount applicable under subsection (1) if there had been no change, from the time the debt was incurred until the forgiveness time, in any rate of interest, or rate of exchange between currencies, that affects the *market value of the debt;

each amount:

that you have deducted or can deduct as a result of the *forgiveness of the debt; and

that is attributable to such a change.

Paragraph (1)(a) does not apply to the debt if:

either:

the creditor was an Australian resident at the forgiveness time; or

the *forgiveness of the debt was a CGT event involving a CGT asset that was taxable Australian property; and

you and the creditor were not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in respect of you incurring the debt; and

the debt was not a moneylending debt.

Note: This subsection reduces your gross forgiven amount to reflect the reduction in the creditor’s loss on the forgiven debt under the capital gains tax regime.

This section has effect subject to sections 245-60 and 245-61 (about non-recourse and assigned debts).

245-60 Special rule for working out the value of a non-recourse debt

(1) The value of a debt when it is *forgiven is the lesser of:

the amount of the debt outstanding at that time; and

the *market value at that time of the creditor’s rights mentioned in paragraph (2)(b).

Subsection (1) applies to a debt if:

you incurred the debt directly in respect of financing:

the acquisition of property by you; or

the construction or development of property by you;

(but not including the manufacture of goods); and

the creditor’s rights against you in the event of default in the payment of the debt or interest were, just before the debt was forgiven, limited to all or any of the following:

rights (including the right to money payable) in relation to all or any of the matters mentioned in subsection (3);

rights in respect of a mortgage or other security over the property;

rights arising out of any arrangement relating to the financial obligations, in relation to the property, of the *end user of the property to you.

For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(b)(i), the matters are as follows:

the property or the use of the property;

goods produced, supplied, carried, transmitted or delivered by means of the property;

services provided by means of the property;

the loss or *disposal of the whole or a part of the property or of your interest in the property.

245-61 Special rule for working out the value of a previously assigned debt

If your debt has been assigned as mentioned in section 245-36 and is later *forgiven by the new creditor, the value of that debt when it is later forgiven is:

if the debt was not a moneylending debt and the creditor and the new creditor were not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in connection with the assignment—the *market value of the debt at the time of the assignment; or

in any other case—the sum of:

the amount or market value of the consideration (if any) you paid or gave, or are required to pay or give, to the creditor in respect of the assignment; and

the amount or market value of the consideration (if any) the new creditor paid or gave in respect of the assignment.

Working out if an amount is offset against the value of the debt

245-65 Amount offset against amount of debt

The table explains how to work out the amount (if any) that is offset against the value of a debt when it is forgiven (calculated under section 245-55, 245-60 or 245-61) in working out the gross forgiven amount of the debt.

The conditions for the purposes of item 3 of the table in subsection (1) are:

at least one of the following is satisfied:

at the time when the debt was *forgiven, the creditor was an Australian resident;

the forgiveness of the debt was a CGT event involving a CGT asset that was taxable Australian property; and

at least one of the following is satisfied:

there is no amount, and no property, covered by column 2 of item 2 of the table;

the amount worked out under item 2 of the table is greater or less than the *market value of the debt at the time of the forgiveness and the debtor and creditor did not deal with each other at *arm’s length in connection with the forgiveness.

The formula for the purposes of item 6 of the table in subsection (1) is:

where:

amount applied means the amount applied by the company as mentioned in section 245-37.

amount subscribed means the amount subscribed as mentioned in section 245-37.

market value of shares subscribed for means the *market value of all the shares in the company that were subscribed for as mentioned in section 245-37, immediately after those shares were issued.

Working out the gross forgiven amount

245-75 Gross forgiven amount of a debt

(1) The gross forgiven amount of a debt is:

if section 245-65 does not apply to the debt—the value of the debt when it was *forgiven (worked out under section 245-55, 245-60 or 245-61); or

if the value of the debt when it was forgiven exceeds the amount offset under section 245-65 in relation to the debt—the excess.

If the value of the debt when it was *forgiven is equal to or less than the amount offset:

(a) there is no gross forgiven amount in respect of the debt; and

Subdivisions 245-D to 245-F (about how to work out the net forgiven amount of a debt and how to treat it) do not apply in respect of the debt.

245-77 Gross forgiven amount shared between debtors

If 2 or more entities were liable (except as partners in a partnership) to pay a debt, whether their liability was joint or several, or joint and several, this Subdivision applies as if each entity had a gross forgiven amount worked out using the formula:

Subdivision 245-D — Calculation of net forgiven amount of a debt

Guide to Subdivision 245-D

245-80 What this Subdivision is about

The net forgiven amount of a debt is worked out by subtracting, from the gross forgiven amount of the debt, any amount that this Act already takes into account for the debtor because the debt was forgiven (for example, if some part of the forgiven amount is treated as the debtor’s ordinary income).

If the debtor and creditor were companies under common ownership, they may agree to transfer some of the net forgiven amount from the debtor to the creditor. The creditor must apply that amount to reduce the capital loss or deduction it has because of the forgiveness.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

245-85 Reduction of gross forgiven amount

245-90 Agreement between companies under common ownership for creditor to forgo capital loss or deduction

Operative provisions

245-85 Reduction of gross forgiven amount

The gross forgiven amount of your debt is reduced by the sum of the following amounts:

any amount that, under a provision of this Act other than this Division, has been, or will be, included in your assessable income for any income year as a result of the *forgiveness of the debt;

any amount by which, under a provision of this Act other than this Division, an amount you could otherwise have deducted for any income year has been, or will be, reduced as a result of the forgiveness of the debt (except a reduction under Division 727 (about indirect value shifting));

any amount by which the *cost base of any of your *CGT assets has been, or will be, reduced under Part 3-1 or 3-3 as a result of the forgiveness of the debt.

Note: Paragraph (1)(c) does not cover a reduction under Division 727 (indirect value shifting) because that Division is not in Part 3-1 or 3-3.

(2) Subject to section 245-90, the amount remaining after reducing the *gross forgiven amount under subsection (1) is the net forgiven amount of the debt.

245-90 Agreement between companies under common ownership for creditor to forgo capital loss or deduction

This section applies if:

a debt owed by a company to another company is *forgiven; and

from the time when the debt was incurred until the time when the debt is forgiven, the companies were *under common ownership.

If, apart from this subsection, the creditor would have made a *capital loss as a result of the *forgiveness of the debt:

(a) the debtor and creditor may agree that the creditor is to forgo so much of the loss as is stated in the agreement and does not exceed the amount that would be the net forgiven amount of the debt apart from this section (the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt); and

if such an agreement is made:

the creditor’s capital loss is reduced by the agreed amount; and

the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt is also reduced by the agreed amount; and

(iii) the amount remaining after the reduction of the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt under subparagraph (ii) is the net forgiven amount of the debt.

If, apart from this subsection, the creditor could deduct an amount in respect of the debt under section 8-1 (about general deductions) or section 25-35 (about bad debts) for the forgiveness income year:

(a) the debtor and creditor may agree that the creditor is to forgo so much of the deduction as is stated in the agreement and does not exceed the amount that would be the net forgiven amount of the debt apart from this section (the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt); and

if such an agreement is made:

the amount the creditor can deduct is reduced by the agreed amount; and

the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt is also reduced by the agreed amount; and

(iii) the amount remaining after the reduction of the provisional net forgiven amount of the debt under subparagraph (ii) is the net forgiven amount of the debt.

Neither subsection (2) nor (3) applies in relation to an agreement unless the agreement:

is in writing and signed by the public officer of each company; and

is made before:

the first of those companies lodges its income tax return for the forgiveness income year; or

any later day that the Commissioner determines in writing.

A determination made under subparagraph (4)(b)(ii) is not a legislative instrument.

Subdivision 245-E — Application of net forgiven amounts

Guide to Subdivision 245-E

245-95 What this Subdivision is about

The total of the net forgiven amounts of all your debts forgiven in an income year is applied to reduce 4 classes of amounts that could otherwise reduce your taxable income in the same or a later income year. It is applied in the following order:

to your tax losses from previous income years;

to your net capital losses from previous income years;

to the deductions you would otherwise get in the income year, or in a later income year, because of expenditure from a previous year (for example, the capital allowance deductions you would get for expenditure on acquiring a depreciating asset);

to the cost bases of your CGT assets.

You can choose the order in which the net forgiven amounts reduce the amounts within each class.

If all the amounts in the 4 classes are reduced to nil, any remaining net forgiven amounts are disregarded.

Table of sections

General operative provisions

245-100 Subdivision not to apply to calculation of attributable income

245-105 How total net forgiven amount is applied

Reduction of tax losses

245-115 Total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of tax losses

245-120 Allocation of total net forgiven amount in respect of tax losses

Reduction of net capital losses

245-130 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of net capital losses

245-135 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of net capital losses

Reduction of expenditure

245-145 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of expenditure

245-150 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of expenditures

245-155 How expenditure is reduced—straight line deductions

245-157 How expenditure is reduced—diminishing balance deductions

245-160 Amount applied in reduction of expenditure included in assessable income in certain circumstances

Reduction of cost bases of assets

245-175 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of cost bases of CGT assets

245-180 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount among relevant cost bases of CGT assets

245-185 Relevant cost bases of investments in associated entities are reduced last

245-190 Reduction of the relevant cost bases of a CGT asset

Unapplied total net forgiven amount

245-195 No further consequences if there is any remaining unapplied total net forgiven amount

General operative provisions

245-100 Subdivision not to apply to calculation of attributable income

This Subdivision does not apply to the calculation of:

(a) attributable income of a non-resident trust estate within the meaning of section 102AAB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

(b) *attributable income of a *CFC.

245-105 How total net forgiven amount is applied

(1) Your total net forgiven amount for the *forgiveness income year is the total of the *net forgiven amounts of all your debts that are *forgiven in that year.

Note 1: The total net forgiven amount may be reduced under section 707-415.

Note 2: The total net forgiven amount of a partner in a partnership is affected by section 245-215.

Your total net forgiven amount is applied, in accordance with sections 245-115 to 245-195, for the forgiveness income year.

Reduction of tax losses

245-115 Total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of tax losses

The total net forgiven amount is applied first, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction, in accordance with section 245-120, of your *tax losses (if any) for any income years, if the tax losses could, if you had enough assessable income, be deducted in:

the forgiveness income year; or

a later income year.

245-120 Allocation of total net forgiven amount in respect of tax losses

You may choose:

(a) the order in which your *tax losses are reduced; and

the amount applied to reduce each of those losses;

so long as the total net forgiven amount is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of those losses.

If you do not make a choice for the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may make the choice on your behalf in a reasonable way.

Reduction of net capital losses

245-130 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of net capital losses

The total net forgiven amount (if any) remaining after being applied under section 245-115 is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction, in accordance with section 245-135, of your *net capital losses (if any) specified in subsection (2).

Those *net capital losses are your net capital losses for income years before the forgiveness income year that you could apply in working out your net capital gain for the forgiveness income year if you had enough capital gains.

245-135 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of net capital losses

You may choose:

the order in which your *net capital losses are reduced; and

the amount applied in reduction of each of those losses;

so long as the total net forgiven amount remaining is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of those losses.

If you do not make a choice for the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may make the choice on your behalf in a reasonable way.

Reduction of expenditure

245-145 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of expenditure

The total net forgiven amount (if any) remaining after being applied under sections 245-115 and 245-130 is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction, in accordance with sections 245-150, 245-155 and 245-157, of your expenditure that:

is mentioned in the following table (other than expenditure covered by subsection (2)) and was incurred by you before the forgiveness income year; and

apart from this Subdivision, could be deducted by you for the forgiveness income year or a later income year if no event or circumstance (other than a recoupment of the expenditure by you in the forgiveness income year) occurred that would affect its deductibility.

Note: If the asset to which the expenditure relates was disposed of, lost or destroyed before 28 June 1996 or the expenditure was recouped before 28 June 1996, see section 245-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Expenditure is covered by this subsection if:

it was incurred in respect of an asset you *disposed of to an entity that you dealt with at *arm’s length in respect of the disposal; and

the disposal occurred during the forgiveness income year before the *forgiveness of any debt owed by you, and the forgiveness resulted in a *net forgiven amount; and

no provision of this Act includes an amount in your assessable income, or allows you a deduction, as a result of the disposal.

245-150 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount in respect of expenditures

You may choose:

the order in which your expenditures are reduced; and

the amount applied in reduction of each of those expenditures;

so long as that the total net forgiven amount remaining is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of your expenditures.

If you do not make a choice for the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may make the choice on your behalf in a reasonable way.

245-155 How expenditure is reduced—straight line deductions

This section applies in respect of the reduction under section 245-145 of an expenditure of yours, if:

(a) the amount that you could deduct, apart from this Subdivision, in respect of the expenditure is a percentage, fraction or proportion of an amount (the base amount); and

the base amount is worked out without regard to any amount or amounts you previously deducted in respect of that expenditure.

The amount of the reduction of the expenditure must not exceed:

the base amount; less

the amount of that part of the expenditure in respect of which you have deducted (disregarding subsection (4)), or can deduct, an amount for any income year before the forgiveness income year.

For the purpose of working out your deductions for the forgiveness income year and later income years, any amount that is applied in reduction of your expenditure is taken to reduce the base amount.

You are taken to have deducted the amount of the reduction in respect of the expenditure:

before the forgiveness income year; and

for the purposes of any provision of this Act that includes an amount in your assessable income or allows you a deduction:

because of the *disposal, loss or destruction of the asset in respect of which the expenditure was incurred; or

because of the recoupment of any of the expenditure; or

because use of the asset for a particular purpose has been otherwise terminated; or

because a balancing adjustment event occurs for that asset.

The amount of that part of the expenditure in respect of which you have deducted (disregarding subsection (4), or can deduct, an amount for all income years (including income years before the forgiveness income year) must not exceed the base amount as reduced under subsection (3).

245-157 How expenditure is reduced—diminishing balance deductions

Any amount applied in reduction under section 245-145 of an expenditure of yours is taken to have been deducted by you in respect of the expenditure before the forgiveness income year, if the amount you could deduct, apart from this Subdivision, in respect of the expenditure is a percentage, fraction or proportion of an amount that is worked out after taking into account any amount previously deducted by you in respect of the expenditure.

245-160 Amount applied in reduction of expenditure included in assessable income in certain circumstances

If:

after the forgiveness income year you *recoup an amount of expenditure that is subject to reduction under section 245-145; and

as a result of the recoupment, this Act applies to disallow any amount you have deducted in respect of the expenditure;

an amount equal to the amount, or the sum of the amounts, applied under this Subdivision in reduction of the expenditure is included in your assessable income in the income year in which the expenditure is recouped.

Reduction of cost bases of assets

245-175 Remaining total net forgiven amount is applied in reduction of cost bases of CGT assets

The total net forgiven amount (if any) remaining after being applied under sections 245-115, 245-130 and 245-145 is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction, in accordance with sections 245-180 to 245-190, of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of your *CGT assets.

Subsection (1) does not apply to the following *CGT assets:

a pre-CGT asset;

a CGT asset you *acquire after the start of the forgiveness income year;

a personal use asset;

a dwelling that was your main residence at any time before the forgiveness income year;

goodwill;

a right of yours covered by section 118-305 (which exempts from CGT certain rights relating to a superannuation fund or approved deposit fund);

a CGT asset that, throughout the period before the forgiveness income year when it was owned by you, was your trading stock;

a CGT asset if:

expenditure by you (of a kind which is subject to reduction under section 245-145) relates to the asset; and

a CGT event in relation to the asset would result in an amount being included in your assessable income, or in you being able to deduct an amount;

if you are a foreign resident at the beginning of the forgiveness income year—an asset of yours that is not taxable Australian property.

245-180 Allocation of remaining total net forgiven amount among relevant cost bases of CGT assets

Subject to section 245-185, you may choose:

your *CGT assets whose *cost base and *reduced cost base are subject to reduction under section 245-175; and

the amount applied in reduction of the cost base and reduced cost base of each of those assets;

so long as the total net forgiven amount remaining is applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of the cost base and reduced cost base of such assets.

If you do not make a choice for the purposes of subsection (1), the Commissioner may make the choice on your behalf in a reasonable way.

245-185 Relevant cost bases of investments in associated entities are reduced last

If your *CGT assets that are subject to reduction under section 245-175 include investments in, or in relation to, an associate of yours (including *membership interests, or *debt interests, in your associate), the:

*cost base; and

*reduced cost base;

of those assets are not subject to reduction under section 245-175 until the total net forgiven amount (if any) remaining has been applied, to the maximum extent possible, in reduction of the cost bases of your other CGT assets.

245-190 Reduction of the relevant cost bases of a CGT asset

Subject to subsection (3), if you choose to apply an amount in reduction of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a particular CGT asset, the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset, as at any time on or after the beginning of the forgiveness income year, are reduced by that amount.

The reduction by a particular amount of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a particular CGT asset is, for the purpose of working out the amount by which the total net forgiven amount remaining is applied, taken to be a reduction by the particular amount (and not by the sum of the amounts by which those cost bases are reduced).

The maximum amount by which the *cost base and reduced cost base of a *CGT asset may be reduced is the amount that, apart from sections 245-175 to 245-185, would be the reduced cost base of the asset calculated as if a CGT event had happened to the asset:

subject to paragraph (b), on the first day of the forgiveness income year; or

if, after the beginning of that income year, an event occurred that would cause the reduced cost base of the asset to be reduced—on the day on which the event occurred;

and the asset had been *disposed of at its *market value on the day concerned.

Unapplied total net forgiven amount

245-195 No further consequences if there is any remaining unapplied total net forgiven amount

If any part of the total net forgiven amount remains after the application of that amount in making reductions under the preceding provisions of this Subdivision, the remaining part is disregarded.

This section has effect subject to section 245-215 (about partnerships and transferring the remaining part to the partners).

Subdivision 245-F — Special rules relating to partnerships

Guide to Subdivision 245-F

245-200 What this Subdivision is about

Any part of a partnership’s total net forgiven amount left over after applying it under Subdivision 245-E is divided between the partners. Each partner treats the partner’s share as a net forgiven amount the partner has for the income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

245-215 Unapplied total net forgiven amount of a partnership is transferred to partners

Operative provisions

245-215 Unapplied total net forgiven amount of a partnership is transferred to partners

(1) This section applies if any part (the residual amount) of the *total net forgiven amount in relation to a partnership in respect of the *forgiveness income year remains after the total net forgiven amount has been applied in accordance with Subdivision 245-E.

If there is a *net income in relation to the partnership in respect of the forgiveness income year:

each partner is taken to have had a debt *forgiven during the forgiveness income year; and

there is taken to be, in respect of the debt of each partner, a *net forgiven amount worked out in accordance with the following formula:

where:

partner’s share of net income means the part of the net income of the partnership for the forgiveness income year that is included in the partner’s assessable income.

If there is a partnership loss in relation to the partnership in respect of the forgiveness income year:

each partner is taken to have had a debt *forgiven during the forgiveness income year; and

there is taken to be, in respect of the debt of each partner, a *net forgiven amount worked out in accordance with the following formula:

where:

partner’s share of partnership loss means the part of the partnership loss that the partner has deducted or can deduct.

The total net forgiven amount of a partner for the forgiveness income year as worked out under subsection 245-105(1) includes the *net forgiven amount worked out in relation to the partner under this section.

This section has effect in relation to a partnership irrespective of any agreement between the partners as to the operation of this section.

Subdivision 245-G — Record keeping

245-265 Keeping and retaining records

If you incur a debt, you must keep any records that are necessary to enable the following matters to be readily found out:

the date on which you incurred the debt;

the identity of the creditor;

the amount of the debt;

the terms of repayment of the debt;

if the debt is not a moneylending debt and you and the creditor were not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in respect of the incurring of the debt—your capacity at the time when the debt was incurred to pay the debt when it falls due;

if your debt is *forgiven—the date of the forgiveness and the amount offset under section 245-65 (if any) in respect of the debt.

Note: There is an administrative penalty if you do not keep or retain records as required by this section: see section 288-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

If a company and another company that are *under common ownership cease to be under common ownership, each company must keep any records that are necessary to enable the following matters to be readily found out:

the date on which the companies ceased to be under common ownership;

the identity of each entity that was a *controller (for CGT purposes) of the company immediately before the companies ceased to be under common ownership;

the identity of each entity that was a controller (for CGT purposes) of the company immediately after the companies ceased to be under common ownership.

You must keep the records required by subsection (1) or (2) in writing in the English language or so as to enable them to be readily accessible and convertible into writing in the English language.

Subject to subsection (5), you must keep the records required by subsection (1) until:

if paragraph (b) does not apply—the end of 5 years after the debt was *forgiven; or

(b) if the period within which the Commissioner may, under section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, amend your assessment for the income year to which the records relate, or in which a transaction or act to which the records relate was completed, is extended under subsection 170(7) of that Act—the later of:

the end of the assessment period as so extended; and

the end of the period of 5 years mentioned in paragraph (a).

Subsection (4) does not require you to keep records after the debt is paid.

Subject to subsection (7), each company that keeps any records required by subsection (2) must retain the records until the end of the second income year after the income year in which the companies ceased to be *under common ownership.

If a debt of one of the companies mentioned in subsection (2) was *forgiven at any time after the companies ceased to be *under common ownership and before the end of the second income year after the income year in which the cessation occurred, each company that keeps records required by that subsection must retain the records until the time specified in subsection (4).

You commit an offence if you fail to comply with a provision of this section.

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

An offence against subsection (8) is an offence of strict liability.

Note: For strict liability, see section 6.1 of the Criminal Code.

This section does not limit the application of any other provision of this Act relating to the keeping or retention of records.

Division 247 — Capital protected borrowings

Guide to Division 247

247-1 What this Division is about

Capital protection provided under a relevant capital protected borrowing to the extent that it is not provided by an explicit put option is treated (for the borrower) as if it were a put option.

An amount attributable to capital protection under any relevant capital protected borrowing is treated (for the borrower) as a payment for a put option.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

247-5 Object of Division

247-10 What capital protected borrowing and capital protection are

247-15 Application of this Division

247-20 Treating capital protection as a put option

247-25 Number of put options

247-30 Exercise or expiry of option

Operative provisions

247-5 Object of Division

The object of this Division is to ensure that amounts for capital protection under all relevant *capital protected borrowings are treated (for the borrower) under this Act as a payment for a put option.

247-10 What capital protected borrowing and capital protection are

(1) An *arrangement under which a *borrowing is made, or credit is provided, is a capital protected borrowing if the borrower is wholly or partly protected against a fall in the *market value of a thing (the protected thing) to the extent that:

the borrower uses the amount borrowed or credit provided to acquire the protected thing; or

the borrower uses the protected thing as security for the borrowing or provision of credit.

(2) That protection is called capital protection.

247-15 Application of this Division

This Division applies to a capital protected borrowing only if the protected thing is a beneficial interest in:

a *share, a unit in a unit trust or a stapled security; or

an entity that holds a beneficial interest in a share, unit in a unit trust or stapled security either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities.

This Division applies only to borrowers under *capital protected borrowings.

This Division does not apply to a capital protected borrowing if:

an *ESS interest is acquired under the borrowing; and

Subdivision 83A-B or 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the ESS interest.

This Division does not apply to a capital protected borrowing entered into before 1 July 2007 (except to the extent that it is extended on or after that day) unless the *share, unit in a unit trust or stapled security is listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange.

This Division does not apply to a capital protected borrowing entered into on or after 1 July 2007 if:

the protected thing is a beneficial interest in:

a *share, unit or stapled security that is not listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; or

an entity that holds a beneficial interest in a share, unit in a unit trust or stapled security either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, that is not so listed; and

one of these conditions is satisfied:

for a non-listed share—the company is not a *widely held company;

(ii) for a non-listed unit—the trust is not a widely held unit trust as defined in section 272-105 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

for a non-listed stapled security—any company involved is not a widely held company and any trust involved is not such a widely held unit trust.

247-20 Treating capital protection as a put option

This section applies to a borrower if:

the borrower has an excess using the method statement in subsection (3) for:

(i) a *capital protected borrowing entered into after 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 2008 (the 2008 Budget time); or

an extension of the capital protected borrowing; or

the borrower has an amount that is reasonably attributable to the capital protection as mentioned in subsection (2) for a capital protected borrowing entered into or extended on or after 1 July 2007 and at or before the 2008 Budget time; or

the borrower has an amount that is reasonably attributable to the capital protection as mentioned in subsection (2) for a capital protected borrowing entered into or extended at or after 9.30 am, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 16 April 2003 and before 1 July 2007.

Note: If a capital protected borrowing covered by paragraph (1)(a) or (b) is extended or otherwise changed after the 2008 Budget time, section 247-85 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applies to the capital protected borrowing.

(2) For paragraphs (1)(a) and (b), the amount that is reasonably attributable to the *capital protection is worked out under Division 247 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

This is the method statement.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the total amount incurred by the borrower under or in respect of the *capital protected borrowing for the income year, ignoring amounts that are not in substance for *capital protection or interest.

Step 2. Work out the total interest that would have been incurred for the income year on a *borrowing or provision of credit of the same amount as under the *capital protected borrowing at the rate applicable under either or both of subsections (4) and (5A).

Step 3. If the step 1 amount exceeds the step 2 amount, the excess is reasonably attributable to the capital protection for the income year.

Example: Amounts that would be ignored under step 1 include amounts that are in substance the repayment of a loan or credit, the payment of an application fee or brokerage commission and the payment of stamp duty or other tax.

If:

the capital protected borrowing is at a fixed rate for all or part of the term of the capital protected borrowing; and

that fixed rate is applicable to the capital protected borrowing for all or part of the income year;

use the rate worked out under subsection (5) at the first time an amount covered by step 1 of the method statement in subsection (3) was incurred, in any income year, during the term of the capital protected borrowing or that part of the term.

(5) The rate (the adjusted loan rate), at a particular time, is the sum of:

the Reserve Bank of Australia’s Indicator Lending Rate for Standard Variable Housing Loans at that time; and

100 basis points.

If:

the capital protected borrowing is at a variable rate for all or part of the term of the capital protected borrowing; and

a variable rate is applicable to the capital protected borrowing for all or part of the income year;

use the average of the adjusted loan rates applicable during those parts of the income year when the capital protected borrowing is at a variable rate.

If this section applies to a borrower, this Act applies as if:

the borrower’s excess from the method statement in subsection (3); or

the amount that is reasonably attributable to capital protection as mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) or (b);

(reduced by any amount the borrower incurred under or in respect of the capital protected borrowing for an explicit put option) were incurred only for a put option granted by the lender or by another entity under the arrangement.

247-25 Number of put options

If a capital protected borrowing specifies more than one occasion on which the capital protection can be invoked, this Act applies as if there were a separate put option for each of those occasions. So much of the amount to which subsection 247-20(6) applies as is reasonably attributable to each option is taken to have been incurred for that option.

However, if a borrower may invoke the capital protection under a capital protected borrowing at any time up to the end of a period, or only at the end of a period, for which there is capital protection, this Act applies as if there were a single put option for that period.

247-30 Exercise or expiry of option

If the capital protection under a capital protected borrowing is invoked:

the borrower is taken to have exercised the put option; and

any interest in a *share, unit in a unit trust or stapled security that is acquired by the lender or another entity under the arrangement as a result of that capital protection being invoked is taken to have been disposed of by the borrower as a result of the exercise of the option.

If the capital protection under a capital protected borrowing is not invoked on or before the last occasion on which it could have been, the put option is taken to have expired.

Note: If a borrower under a capital protected borrowing holds the protected things on capital account, the exercise or expiry of the put option may give rise to a capital gain or capital loss: see sections 104-25 (CGT event C2) and 134-1 (exercise of options).

Division 250 — Assets put to tax preferred use

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 250

250-A Objects

250-B When this Division applies to you and an asset

250-C Denial of, or reduction in, capital allowance deductions

250-D Deemed loan treatment of financial benefits provided for tax preferred use

250-E Taxation of deemed loan

250-F Treatment of asset when Division ceases to apply to the asset

250-G Objections against determinations and decisions by the Commissioner

Guide to Division 250

250-1 What this Division is about

This Division denies or reduces certain capital allowance deductions that would otherwise be available to you in relation to an asset if the asset is put to a tax preferred use in certain circumstances.

If the capital allowance deductions are denied or reduced, certain financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset are assessed only to the extent of a notional gain component. This component is worked out on the basis of treating the arrangements under which the asset is put to a tax preferred use, and financial benefits are provided in relation to that tax preferred use, as a loan. Subdivision 250-E then applies to determine the amounts that are to be assessed.

Subdivision 250-A — Objects

Table of sections

250-5 Main objects

250-5 Main objects

The main objects of this Division are:

to deny or reduce your capital allowance deductions in respect of an asset if the asset is put to a *tax preferred use and you have insufficient economic interest in the asset; and

if your capital allowance deductions are denied or reduced, to treat the arrangement for the tax preferred use of the asset as a loan that is taxed as a financial arrangement (on a compounding accruals basis).

Subdivision 250-B — When this Division applies to you and an asset

Table of sections

Overall test

250-10 When this Division applies to you and an asset

250-15 General test

250-20 First exclusion—small business entities

250-25 Second exclusion—financial benefits under minimum value limit

250-30 Third exclusion—certain short term or low value arrangements

250-35 Exceptions to section 250-30

250-40 Fourth exclusion—sum of present values of financial benefits less that amount otherwise assessable

250-45 Fifth exclusion—Commissioner determination

Tax preferred use of asset

250-50 End user of an asset

250-55 Tax preferred end user

250-60 Tax preferred use of an asset

250-65 Arrangement period for tax preferred use

250-70 New tax preferred use at end of arrangement period if tax preferred use continues

250-75 What constitutes a separate asset for the purposes of this Division

250-80 Treatment of particular arrangements in the same way as leases

Financial benefits in relation to tax preferred use

250-85 Financial benefits in relation to tax preferred use of an asset

250-90 Financial benefit provided directly or indirectly

250-95 Expected financial benefits in relation to an asset put to tax preferred use

250-100 Present value of financial benefit that has already been provided

Discount rate to be used in working out present values

250-105 Discount rate to be used in working out present values

Predominant economic interest

250-110 Predominant economic interest

250-115 Limited recourse debt test

250-120 Right to acquire asset test

250-125 Effectively non-cancellable, long term arrangement test

250-130 Meaning of effectively non-cancellable arrangement

250-135 Level of expected financial benefits test

250-140 When to retest predominant economic interest under section 250-135

Overall test

250-10 When this Division applies to you and an asset

This Division applies to you and an asset at a particular time if:

the general test in section 250-15 is satisfied in relation to you and the asset; and

none of the exclusions in sections 250-20, 250-25, 250-30, 250-40 and 250-45 apply.

250-15 General test

This Division applies to you and an asset at a particular time if:

the asset is being *put to a tax preferred use; and

the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset is greater than 12 months; and

*financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset have been, will be or can reasonably be expected to be, *provided to you (or a *connected entity) by:

a tax preferred end user (or a connected entity); or

any *tax preferred entity (or a connected entity); or

any entity that is a foreign resident; and

disregarding this Division, you would be entitled to a capital allowance in relation to:

a decline in the value of the asset; or

expenditure in relation to the asset; and

you lack a *predominant economic interest in the asset at that time.

250-20 First exclusion—small business entities

This Division does not apply to you and an asset if:

you are a small business entity for the income year in which the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset starts; and

you choose to deduct amounts under Subdivision 328-D for the asset for that income year.

250-25 Second exclusion—financial benefits under minimum value limit

This Division does not apply to you and an asset that is being *put to a tax preferred use under a particular arrangement if, at the start of the arrangement period, the total of the nominal values of all the *financial benefits that have been, or will be or can reasonably be expected to be, provided to you (or a *connected entity):

by *members of the tax preferred sector; and

in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset or any other asset that is being, or is to be, put to a tax preferred use under the arrangement;

does not exceed $5 million.

The amount referred to in subsection (1) is indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.

250-30 Third exclusion—certain short term or low value arrangements

Certain short term or low value arrangements generally excluded

This Division does not apply to you and an asset that is being *put to a tax preferred use under a particular arrangement if:

the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset does not exceed:

5 years if the asset is real property and the tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; or

3 years in any other case; or

at the start of the arrangement period, the total of the nominal values of all the *financial benefits that have been, will be or can reasonably be expected to be, provided to you (or a *connected entity):

by *members of the tax preferred sector; and

in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset or any other asset that is being, or is to be, put to a tax preferred use under the arrangement;

does not exceed:

$50 million if the asset is real property and the tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; or

$30 million in any other case; or

at the start of the arrangement period, the total of the values of all the assets that are put to a tax preferred use under the arrangement does not exceed:

$40 million if the asset is real property and the tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; or

$20 million in any other case.

This subsection has effect subject to section 250-35.

The amounts referred to in paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) are indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.

250-35 Exceptions to section 250-30

Debt interests

Section 250-30 does not apply if the arrangement (either alone or together with any arrangement in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset or the provision of *financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset) is a *debt interest.

In applying subsection (1), disregard subsection 974-130(4).

Member of tax preferred sector having certain rights in relation to the asset

Section 250-30 does not apply if:

a member of the tax preferred sector has:

a right, obligation or contingent obligation to purchase or acquire the asset or a legal or equitable interest in the asset; or

a right to require the transfer of the asset or a legal or equitable interest in the asset; or

a residual or reversionary interest in the asset that will arise or become exercisable at or after the end of the arrangement period; and

the consideration for the purchase, acquisition or transfer of the right, obligation or interest is not fixed as the *market value of the asset at the time of the purchase, acquisition or transfer.

To avoid doubt, this subsection does not apply to the asset merely because your interest in the asset is one that ceases to exist after the passage of a particular period of time.

Member of tax preferred sector providing financing

Section 250-30 does not apply if a member of the tax preferred sector provides financing, or support for financing, in relation to your interest in the asset (including by way of a loan, a guarantee, an indemnity, a security, hedging or undertaking to provide *financial benefits in the event of the termination of an arrangement).

Finance leases, non-cancellable operating leases, service concessions and similar arrangements

Section 250-30 does not apply if an arrangement in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset, or the provision of *financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset, is or involves:

a finance lease; or

a non-cancellable operating lease; or

a service concession or similar arrangement;

that generally accepted accounting principles, as in force at the start of the arrangement period, require to be included as an asset or a liability in your balance sheet.

Financial benefits irregular, not based on comparable market-based rates or not reflecting value of tax preferred use of asset

Section 250-30 does not apply if the *financial benefits that have been, or are to be provided, to you (or a *connected entity) by *members of the tax preferred sector in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset:

are not provided on a regular periodic basis (and at least annually); or

are not based on comparable market-based rates; or

do not reflect the value of the tax preferred use of the asset.

Special rules if tax preferred use is a lease or hire of the asset

If the *tax preferred use of the asset is a lease or hire of the asset (or the use of the asset under a lease or hire arrangement), section 250-30 does not apply if:

the asset is so specialised that the *end user could not carry out one or more of its functions effectively without the asset; and

you would be unlikely to be able to re-lease, re-hire or resell the asset to another person who is not a member of the tax preferred end user group.

Note: For particular arrangements that are treated as leases, see section 250-80.

Special rules if tax preferred use is not a lease or hire of the asset

If the *tax preferred use of the asset is not the lease or hire of the asset (or the use of the asset under a lease or hire arrangement), section 250-30 does not apply if:

a member of the tax preferred sector has a right, if particular circumstances occur, to manage, or to assume control over, the asset (other than temporarily for the purpose of ensuring public health or safety, protecting the environment or continuing the supply of an essential service); or

the asset is so specialised that it is unlikely that it could effectively be put to any use other than the tax preferred use; or

neither you (nor a *connected entity) has effective day to day control and physical possession of the asset.

Note: For particular arrangements that are treated as leases, see section 250-80.

250-40 Fourth exclusion—sum of present values of financial benefits less than amount otherwise assessable

This Division does not apply to you and an asset that is being *put to a tax preferred use under a particular arrangement if, when that *tax preferred use of the asset starts, the Division 250 assessable amount is less than the alternative assessable amount.

(2) For the purposes of subsection (1), the Division 250 assessable amount is the sum of the present values of all the amounts that would be likely to be included in your assessable income under this Division in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset if this Division applied to you and the asset.

(3) This is how to work out the alternative assessable amount for the purposes of subsection (1):

Method statement

Step 1. Add up the present values of the amounts that would be included in your assessable income in relation to the *financial benefits *provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset during the arrangement period if this Division did not apply to you and the asset.

Step 2. Add up the present values of the amounts that you would be able to deduct in relation to the asset, or expenditure in relation to the asset, under Division 40 or Division 43 in relation to the arrangement period if this Division did not apply to you and the asset.

Step 3. Deduct the amount obtained in Step 2 from the amount obtained in Step 1. The result is the alternative assessable amount.

To avoid doubt, the amounts referred to in subsections (2) and (3) are all the amounts that would be likely to be included in your assessable income, or deducted, for all the income years during the whole, or a part, of which the asset is *put to the tax preferred use.

The point in time to be used in determining, for the purposes of this section:

the present value of an amount that is included in your assessable income for an income year; or

the present value of an amount that you would be able to deduct for an income year;

is the end of the income year.

250-45 Fifth exclusion—Commissioner determination

This Division does not apply to you and an asset at a particular time if:

you request the Commissioner to make a determination under this subsection; and

the Commissioner determines that it is unreasonable that the Division should apply to you and the asset at that time, having regard to:

the circumstances because of which this Division would apply to you and the asset; and

any other relevant circumstances.

Tax preferred use of asset

250-50 End user of an asset

(1) An entity (other than you) is an end user of an asset if the entity (or a *connected entity):

uses, or effectively controls the use of, the asset; or

will use, or effectively control the use of, the asset; or

is able to use, or effectively control the use of, the asset; or

will be able to use, or effectively control the use of, the asset.

The control referred to in subsection (1) may be direct or indirect.

For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard any temporary control of the asset that is for the purpose of ensuring public health or safety, protecting the environment or continuing the supply of an essential service.

(4) To avoid doubt, an entity is taken to be an end user of an asset if the entity (or a *connected entity) holds rights as a lessee under a lease of the asset.

Note: For particular arrangements that are treated as leases, see section 250-80.

250-55 Tax preferred end user

An *end user of an asset is a tax preferred end user if:

the end user (or a *connected entity) is a *tax preferred entity; or

the end user is:

an entity that is a foreign resident; or

an entity that is an Australian resident, to the extent that the entity carries on business in a foreign country at or through a permanent establishment of the entity in that country.

250-60 Tax preferred use of an asset

(1) An asset is put to a tax preferred use at a particular time if:

an *end user (or a *connected entity) holds, at that time, rights as lessee under a lease of the asset; and

either or both of the following subparagraphs is satisfied at that time:

the asset is, or is to be, used by or on behalf of an end user who is a tax preferred end user because of paragraph 250-55(a) (tax preferred entity);

the asset is, or is to be, used wholly or principally outside Australia and an end user of the asset is a tax preferred end user because of paragraph 250-55(b) (foreign resident or business).

If this subsection applies, the tax preferred use of the asset is the lease referred to in paragraph (a).

Note: For particular arrangements that are treated as leases, see section 250-80.

(2) An asset is also put to a tax preferred use at a particular time if:

at that time the asset is, or is to be, used (whether or not by you) wholly or partly in connection with:

the production, supply, carriage, transmission or delivery of goods; or

the provision of services or facilities; and

either or both of the following subparagraphs is satisfied at that time:

some or all of the goods, services or facilities are, or are to be, produced for or supplied, carried, transmitted or delivered to or for an *end user who is a tax preferred end user because of paragraph 250-55(a) (tax preferred entity) but is not an *exempt foreign government agency;

the asset is, or is to be, used wholly or principally outside Australia and an end user of the asset is a tax preferred end user because of paragraph 250-55(b) (foreign resident or business).

If this subsection applies, the tax preferred use of the asset is the production, supply, carriage, transmission, delivery or provision referred to in paragraph (a).

To avoid doubt, the facilities referred to in subsection (2) include:

hospital or medical facilities; or

prison facilities; or

educational facilities; or

transport facilities; or

the supply of water, gas or electricity; or

housing or accommodation; or

premises from which to operate a business or other undertaking.

If the asset is being *put to a tax preferred use:

(a) the members of the tax preferred end user group are:

the tax preferred end user; and

the *connected entities of the tax preferred end user; and

(b) the members of the tax preferred sector are:

the tax preferred end user (and connected entities); and

any *tax preferred entity (or a connected entity); and

any entity that is a foreign resident.

250-65 Arrangement period for tax preferred use

Start of the arrangement period

(1) The arrangement period for a particular *tax preferred use of an asset starts when that tax preferred use of the asset starts.

End of the arrangement period

(2) Subject to subsection (3), the arrangement period for a particular *tax preferred use of an asset is taken to end on the day that is the date on which the tax preferred use of the asset may reasonably be expected, or is likely, to end.

(3) The arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends when this Division ceases to apply to you and the asset if that happens before the day referred to in subsection (2).

In determining when a particular tax preferred use of an asset is likely to end:

regard must be had to:

the terms of, and any other circumstances relating to, any arrangement dealing with that tax preferred use of the asset; and

the terms of, and any other circumstances relating to, any arrangement dealing with the *provision of *financial benefits in relation to that tax preferred use of the asset; and

it must be assumed that any right that an entity has to renew or extend such an arrangement will not be exercised (unless it is reasonable to assume that the right will be exercised because of the commercial consequences for the entity (or a *connected entity) of not exercising the right).

Tax preferred uses of asset by entity and connected entity

For the purposes of this section:

the tax preferred use of an asset by an entity; and

the tax preferred use of the asset by a *connected entity of that entity;

are taken to constitute a single tax preferred use of the asset.

250-70 New tax preferred use at end of arrangement period if tax preferred use continues

If:

this Division applies to you and an asset because the asset is *put to a tax preferred use; and

(b) the *arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends on a particular date (the termination date); and

the asset continues to be put to the tax preferred use after the termination date;

the tax preferred use of the asset after the termination date is taken to be a separate and distinct tax preferred use of the asset from the tax preferred use of the asset before the termination date.

Note: This means, among other things, that there is a new arrangement period for the tax preferred use after the termination date and that the arrangement is retested under section 250-15 against circumstances as they stand immediately after the termination date.

250-75 What constitutes a separate asset for the purposes of this Division

This Division applies to:

an improvement to land; or

a fixture on land;

whether the improvement or fixture is removable or not, as if it were an asset separate from the land.

Whether a particular composite item is itself an asset or whether its components are separate assets is a question of fact and degree which can only be determined in the light of all the circumstances of the particular case.

Example 1: A car is made up of many separate components, but usually the car is an asset rather than each component.

Example 2: A floating restaurant consists of many separate components (like the ship itself, stoves, fridges, furniture, crockery and cutlery), but usually these components are treated as separate assets.

This Division applies to a renewal or extension of an asset that is a right as if the renewal or extension were a continuation of the original right.

(4) This Division applies to an asset (the underlying asset) in which:

you have an interest; and

one or more other entities also have an interest;

as if your interest in the underlying asset were itself the underlying asset.

250-80 Treatment of particular arrangements in the same way as leases

This Division applies to an arrangement that:

in substance or effect, depends on the use of a specific asset that is:

real property; or

goods or a personal chattel (other than money or a money equivalent); and

gives a right to control the use of the asset (other than temporarily for the purpose of ensuring public health or safety, protecting the environment or continuing the supply of an essential service); and

is not a lease;

in the same way as it applies to a lease.

Financial benefits in relation to tax preferred use

Note: Even if this section applies to treat an arrangement in relation to an asset as a lease, the requirements in section 250-50 still need to be satisfied before an entity can be an end user of the asset.

250-85 Financial benefits in relation to tax preferred use of an asset

(1) For the purposes of this Division, the *financial benefits provided in relation to a tax preferred use of an asset include (but are not limited to):

a financial benefit provided in relation to:

bringing the asset into a state, condition or location in which it can be *put to the tax preferred use; or

the start of the *tax preferred use of the asset; and

a financial benefit provided in relation to the end of the tax preferred use of the asset; and

a financial benefit provided in relation to the termination or expiration of an arrangement that deals with:

the tax preferred use of the asset; or

the provision of financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset; and

a financial benefit provided in relation to the purchase or acquisition of the asset by, or transfer of the asset to, the tax preferred end user (or a *connected entity).

Without limiting paragraph (1)(b), if the asset has a *guaranteed residual value:

(a) the amount of the guaranteed residual value is taken to be a *financial benefit provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset; and

that financial benefit is taken to be provided when the relevant payment is made in relation to the guaranteed residual value.

(3) The asset has a guaranteed residual value if there is an *arrangement that provides to the effect that if:

on or after the end of the arrangement period, you (or a *connected entity) sell or otherwise dispose of the asset to any person; and

you (or a connected entity) receives in respect of the sale or disposal:

no consideration; or

(ii) consideration that is less than an amount (the guaranteed amount) specified in, or ascertainable under, the provision;

a member of the tax preferred sector will pay to you (or a connected entity), or to someone else for your benefit (or for the benefit of a connected entity), an amount equal to:

the guaranteed amount if subparagraph (b)(i) applies; or

the amount by which the guaranteed amount exceeds the consideration if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies.

The amount of the guaranteed residual value is taken to be the guaranteed amount.

If:

an asset is *put to a tax preferred use; and

an entity is an *end user of the asset because the entity manages the asset or the use to which the asset is put;

any *financial benefit that the entity (or a *connected entity) provides that is calculated by reference to the receipts, revenue or income generated by the use of the asset is also taken to be a financial benefit provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset.

(5) For the purposes of this Division (other than this subsection), a *financial benefit provided by a *member of the tax preferred sector is taken not to be provided in relation to the tax preferred use of an asset to the extent to which the financial benefit merely passes on, or represents:

financial benefits provided in relation to the use of the asset; or

something derived from the use of the asset;

by someone who is not a member of the tax preferred sector.

For the purposes of this Division, disregard a financial benefit *provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset to the extent to which it consists solely of routine maintenance of the asset.

For the purposes of this Division, if a financial benefit is provided in relation to the use of a number of assets, a separate financial benefit of an amount or value that is reasonably attributable to each asset is taken to be provided in relation to each asset.

(8) To avoid doubt, a *financial benefit may be provided in relation to a tax preferred use of an asset even though it is provided before the *tax preferred use of the asset starts.

For the purposes of this Division:

a financial benefit that is not an amount:

is taken to become due and payable when the entity providing the financial benefit becomes liable to provide the financial benefit; and

is taken to be paid when it is provided; and

a financial benefit that is paid without becoming due and payable is taken to have become due and payable on the day on which it was paid.

250-90 Financial benefit provided directly or indirectly

For the purposes of this Division, a person (the provider) is taken to provide a *financial benefit to a person (the recipient) in relation to a *tax preferred use of an asset whether the financial benefit is provided to the recipient:

directly; or

indirectly (including indirectly through an entity that is not a *connected entity of the recipient and is not a connected entity of the provider).

250-95 Expected financial benefits in relation to an asset put to tax preferred use

For the purposes this Division, the expected financial benefits at a particular time in relation to an asset that is *put to a tax preferred use are the *financial benefits that, at that time:

have been; or

will, assuming normal operating conditions, be; or

can, assuming normal operating conditions, reasonably be expected to be;

*provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset by a member of the tax preferred sector to someone who is not a member of the tax preferred sector.

Note: Paragraphs 250-85(1)(b), (c) and (d) provide for certain benefits provided in relation to the end of the tax preferred use of the asset or in relation to the purchase, disposal or transfer of the asset to be treated as financial benefits provided in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset.

250-100 Present value of financial benefit that has already been provided

For the purposes of this Division, the present value of a *financial benefit at a particular time is the nominal amount or value of the financial benefit if the financial benefit has been provided before that time.

Discount rate to be used in working out present values

250-105 Discount rate to be used in working out present values

For the purposes of section 250-40, the discount rate to be used in working out the present value of a future amount is the *long term bond rate for the financial year in which the relevant arrangement period starts.

For the purposes of section 250-135 and Subdivisions 250-C and 250-D, the discount rate to be used in working out the present value of a future amount is a rate that reflects a constant periodic rate of return (worked out on a compounding basis) on the investment in:

the asset referred to in subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) if that subparagraph applies; or

the expenditure referred to in paragraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies;

that is implicit in the *arrangements under which the asset is *put to a tax preferred use and *financial benefits are *provided in relation to that tax preferred use.

Predominant economic interest

250-110 Predominant economic interest

You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time only if one or more of the following sections apply to you and the asset at that time:

section 250-115 (limited recourse debt test);

section 250-120 (right to acquire asset test);

section 250-125 (effectively non-cancellable, long term arrangement test);

section 250-135 (level of expected financial benefits test).

250-115 Limited recourse debt test

(1) You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if more than the allowable percentage of the cost of your acquiring or constructing the asset is financed (directly or indirectly) by a *limited recourse debt or debts.

For the purposes of subsection (1):

the amount of a limited recourse debt is to be reduced by the value of any * debt property (other than the financed property) that is provided as security for the debt; and

if the limited recourse debt finances the acquisition or construction of 2 or more assets, only the amount of the debt that is reasonably attributable to the asset referred to in subsection (1) is to be taken into account.

For the purposes of subsection (1), the allowable percentage is:

80% if the asset is taken to be *put to a tax preferred use because of subparagraph 250-60(1)(b)(i) or (2)(b)(i) (end use by *tax preferred entities); or

55% if the asset is taken to be put to a tax preferred use because of subparagraph 250-60(1)(b)(ii) or (2)(b)(ii) (end use by foreign residents or businesses).

This section does not apply to the asset if:

you are a corporate tax entity; and

the *tax preferred use of the asset is not the lease or hire of the asset (and is not the use of the asset under a lease or hire arrangement); and

the asset is *put to the tax preferred use wholly or principally in Australia; and

no member of the tax preferred sector provides financing, or support for financing, in relation to your interest in the asset (including by way of a loan, a guarantee, an indemnity, a security, hedging or undertaking to provide *financial benefits in the event of the termination of an arrangement).

Paragraph (4)(b) does not apply if:

the asset is real property (or an interest in real property); and

the *tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; and

the space within the property that is occupied by tenants who are *members of the tax preferred sector is less than half of the total space within the property that is either occupied by tenants or available to be occupied by tenants.

This section also does not apply to the asset if:

you hold the asset as a trustee; and

the asset is real property (or an interest in real property); and

the *tax preferred use of the asset is a lease; and

the space within the property that is occupied by tenants who are *members of the tax preferred sector is less than half of the total space within the property that is either occupied by tenants or available to be occupied by tenants; and

the asset is *put to the tax preferred use wholly or principally in Australia; and

no member of the tax preferred sector provides financing, or support for financing, in relation to your interest in the asset (including by way of a loan, a guarantee, an indemnity, a security, hedging or undertaking to provide *financial benefits in the event of the termination of an arrangement).

250-120 Right to acquire asset test

(1) You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if, at that time:

the asset is to be transferred to a member of the tax preferred sector after the end of the arrangement period; and

the consideration for the transfer is not fixed as the *market value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

(2) You also lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if, at that time:

a member of the tax preferred end user group has, or will have:

a right, obligation or contingent obligation to purchase or acquire the asset or a legal or equitable interest in the asset; or

a right to require the transfer of the asset or a legal or equitable interest in the asset; and

the consideration for the purchase, acquisition or transfer is not fixed as the *market value of the asset at the time of the purchase, acquisition or transfer.

To avoid doubt, this section does not apply to the asset merely because your interest in the asset is one that ceases to exist after the passage of a particular period of time.

250-125 Effectively non-cancellable, long term arrangement test

(1) You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if:

any arrangement that relates to:

the *tax preferred use of the asset; or

the *financial benefits to be *provided by the *members of the tax preferred sector in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset;

is effectively non-cancellable (see section 250-130); and

the arrangement period for the tax preferred use of the asset is:

greater than 30 years; or

if the arrangement period is less than or equal to 30 years—75% or more of that part of the asset’s *effective life that remains when the tax preferred use of the asset starts.

Disregard section 40-102 in working out the asset’s *effective life for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii).

250-130 Meaning of effectively non-cancellable arrangement

(1) An *arrangement that relates to *financial benefits to be *provided by a *member of the tax preferred sector in relation to the tax preferred use of an asset is effectively non-cancellable if:

the arrangement can be cancelled only with:

your permission; or

the permission of a *connected entity of yours; or

an agent or entity acting on your behalf (or on behalf of a connected entity of yours); or

the arrangement can be cancelled without the permission of an entity referred to in paragraph (a) but, if the arrangement were cancelled, the member of the tax preferred sector or another member of the tax preferred sector:

would be required to enter into a new arrangement for the *provision of financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset; or

would incur a penalty and the magnitude of the penalty would be such as to discourage cancellation.

For these purposes, if a member of the tax preferred sector defaults under an arrangement and the arrangement is cancelled, the arrangement is to be taken to have been cancelled without the permission of an entity referred to in paragraph (1)(a).

250-135 Level of expected financial benefits test

Effective guarantee or indemnity for value of asset

(1) You lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if the asset has a *guaranteed residual value at that time.

Likely financial benefits exceeding 70% limit

(2) You also lack a predominant economic interest in an asset at a particular time if, at that time:

the arrangement under which the asset is *put to the tax preferred use (either alone or together with any other arrangement in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset or the *provision of *financial benefits in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset) is a *debt interest; or

the sum of the present values of the expected financial benefits that *members of the tax preferred sector have provided, or are or are reasonably likely to provide, to you (or a *connected entity) in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset exceeds 70% of:

the *market value of the asset if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

so much of the market value of the asset as is attributable to the expenditure referred to subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies.

250-140 When to retest predominant economic interest under section 250-135

Purpose for applying section

This section applies for the purposes of working out whether this Division applies to you and to an asset that is *put to a tax preferred use.

No need to keep retesting if section 250-135 does not apply at start of tax preferred use of asset

If section 250-135 does not apply to you and the asset at the time when the *tax preferred use of the asset starts, that section is taken, subject to subsection (4), to continue not to apply to you and the asset.

Note: This subsection means that if section 250-135 does not apply to the arrangement when the tax preferred use of the asset starts, the arrangement does not need to be retested against section 250-135 until a change of the kind referred to in subsection (4) occurs.

No need to keep retesting if section 250-135 does not apply when you do something to increase value of expected financial benefits

If:

you (or a *connected entity), or a member of the tax preferred sector, do something, or omit to do something, at a particular time that increases the value of the expected financial benefits in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset; and

section 250-135 does not apply to the asset at that time;

that section is taken, subject to subsection (4), to continue not to apply to you and the asset.

Retesting when you do something to increase the value of expected financial benefits

Note: This subsection means that if the arrangement is retested against section 250-135 at a particular time and section 250-135 does not apply to the arrangement on that retesting, the arrangement does not need to be again retested against section 250-135 until a change of the kind referred to in subsection (4) occurs.

Subsection (2) or (3) ceases to apply to you and the asset if you (or a *connected entity), or a member of the tax preferred sector, do something, or omit to do something, that increases the value of the expected financial benefits in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset.

Certain financial benefits ignored when retesting

For the purposes of reapplying section 250-135 to the asset, disregard *financial benefits provided before subsection (2) or (3) of this section ceased to apply to the asset.

Note: If:

subsection (2) or (3) ceases to apply to the asset at a particular time under this subsection; and

the asset is retested at that time against section 250-135; and

on the retesting, that section is found to apply to the asset at that time;

subsection (3) will start to apply to the asset again from that time because paragraph (3)(b) will have been satisfied.

Clarification that retesting only required if you do something to increase value of expected benefits

To avoid doubt, subsection (2) or (3) does not cease to apply merely because the value of the expected financial benefits in relation to the asset increase because of something other than action taken, or an omission made, by you (or a *connected entity) or a member of the tax preferred sector.

Note: This subsection means that retesting under subsection (4) is not triggered by an increase in the value of expected financial benefits that happens because of external circumstances (circumstances external to activities and omissions of yours, your connected entities and members of the tax preferred sector).

Subdivision 250-C — Denial of, or reduction in, capital allowance deductions

Table of sections

250-145 Denial of capital allowance deductions

250-150 Apportionment rule

250-145 Denial of capital allowance deductions

If this Division applies to you and an asset at a particular time, any condition that needs to be satisfied for you to be able to deduct an amount under a capital allowance provision in relation to:

a decline in the value of the asset; or

expenditure in relation to the asset;

is taken not to be satisfied at that time.

This section has effect subject to section 250-150.

250-150 Apportionment rule

This section applies if:

this Division applies to you and an asset that is *put to a tax preferred use; and

it is reasonable to expect that, during the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset, particular *financial benefits will be provided to you (or a *connected entity); and

it is reasonable to expect that those financial benefits:

will be provided in relation to a use of the asset that is not that tax preferred use and is not a private use; or

will be *provided in relation to that tax preferred use of the asset but will not be attributable, directly or indirectly, to financial benefits that are provided by *members of the tax preferred sector; and

the amount or value of those financial benefits is known or can reasonably be estimated; and

you choose to have this section apply to the asset.

In applying paragraph (c), disregard financial benefits that are provided under an arrangement that is a *debt interest.

A choice under paragraph (1)(e) in relation to an asset:

must be made before the due date for you to lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset starts; and

must be made for the whole of the arrangement period for the tax preferred use of the asset; and

must extend to all assets that are, or are to be, *put to a tax preferred use under the arrangement under which the asset is put to that use; and

is irrevocable.

The choice may extend to an asset referred to in paragraph (c) even if it is likely that paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) will not apply to that asset.

If this section applies, section 250-145 applies to you and the asset only to the extent of the disallowed capital allowance percentage.

(4) Subject to subsection (6), the disallowed capital allowance percentage is the following ratio (expressed as a percentage):

The Commissioner may, before the due date for you to lodge your income tax return for the income year to which the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset starts, approve an alternative method for working out the disallowed capital allowance percentage for you and the asset.

(6) If the Commissioner approves an alternative method under subsection (5), the disallowed capital allowance percentage is the percentage worked out in accordance with that alternative method.

Subdivision 250-D — Deemed loan treatment of financial benefits provided for tax preferred use

Table of sections

250-155 Arrangement treated as loan

250-160 Financial benefits that are subject to deemed loan treatment

250-180 End value of asset

250-185 Financial benefits subject to deemed loan treatment not assessed

250-155 Arrangement treated as loan

Loan with characteristics provided for in this section taken to exist

If this Division applies to you and an asset at a particular time in an income year, a financial arrangement in the form of a loan (with the characteristics provided for in this section) is taken to exist at that time for the purposes of working out your taxable income for that income year.

Note: See Subdivision 250-E for the taxation treatment of the financial arrangement.

Lender

You are taken to be the lender in relation to the loan.

Amount lent and unpaid at the start of the arrangement period

The amount worked out under subsection (4) is taken to be the amount that you have lent, and that the borrower has not repaid, at the start of the arrangement period.

The amount is worked out by taking:

the amount that, at the start of the arrangement period, is:

the *adjustable value of the asset if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

the amount worked out under subsection (5) if subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) applies; or

if section 250-150 applies—the amount that, at the start of the arrangement period, is the disallowed capital allowance percentage of:

the adjustable value of the asset if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

the amount worked out under subsection (5) if subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) applies;

and deducting the sum of all *financial benefits that are *subject to deemed loan treatment and that have become due and payable before the start of the arrangement period.

If subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) applies, the amount worked out under this subsection for the purposes of subsection (4) is:

Amounts paid to you by borrower under the loan

Any financial benefit that:

a person provides; and

is *subject to deemed loan treatment;

is taken to be an amount that the borrower pays you under the loan.

Period of the loan

Note 1: Section 250-160 tells you which financial benefits are subject to the deemed loan treatment.

Note 2: These benefits may be ones that are provided either to you or to a connected entity.

The arrangement period is taken to be the period of the loan.

Applying Subdivision 250-E to the loan

For the purposes of applying Subdivision 250-E to the loan:

you are taken to have an overall gain from the loan and that overall gain is taken to be sufficiently certain at the time when you start to have the loan; and

the amount of that overall gain is taken to be the sum of the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment less the amount worked out under subsection (4); and

you are taken:

to start to have the loan at the start of the arrangement period; and

to cease to have the loan at the end of the arrangement period; and

any right that you (or a connected entity) have to a financial benefit that is subject to deemed loan treatment is taken to be a right that you have under the loan; and

if a *connected entity transfers to another person a right to a financial benefit subject to deemed loan treatment:

you are taken to transfer the right to that other person; and

any consideration that the connected entity receives in relation to the transfer is taken to be consideration that you receive in relation to the transfer; and

if a right that a connected entity has to a financial benefit subject to deemed loan treatment ceases and the connected entity receives consideration in relation to that cessation—you are taken to receive that consideration in relation to the cessation; and

you are taken to start to have the loan, or to cease to have the loan, as consideration for something if you start to have the rights to the financial benefits that are subject to deemed loan treatment, or cease to have those rights, as consideration for that thing; and

in applying sections 250-265 to 250-275:

the amount that you are taken, under subsections (3), (4) and (5), to have lent are the only financial benefits that you provide under the loan; and

the financial benefits you have received under the loan are taken to include financial benefits that are subject to deemed loan treatment that a person is, at the end of the arrangement period, liable to provide to you.

If, under subsection 250-160(2), a particular percentage of a reasonable estimate of the *end value of the asset was taken to be a financial benefit that is *subject to the deemed loan treatment, subsection 250-275(1) applies to the loan at the end of the arrangement period as if you had received under the loan a financial benefit equal to the relevant percentage of the end value of the asset.

250-160 Financial benefits that are subject to deemed loan treatment

General rule

(1) Subject to subsections (3) and (4), a *financial benefit is subject to deemed loan treatment if:

the financial benefit:

has been; or

will, assuming normal operating conditions, be; or

can, assuming normal operating conditions, reasonably be expected to be;

provided to you (or a *connected entity); and

the financial benefit has been, will be or can reasonably be expected to be *provided directly or indirectly by a member of the tax preferred sector in relation to the *tax preferred use of the asset; and

the right to receive, or the obligation to provide, the financial benefit is cash settlable; and

the financial benefit has not been, will not be or can be expected not to be provided by one of your connected entities.

Note: Paragraph (d) stops a financial benefit passing between you and any of your connected entities from being counted twice.

End value also taken to be financial benefit subject to deemed loan treatment

(2) The relevant percentage of a reasonable estimate of the *end value of the asset is also taken to be a *financial benefit that is subject to deemed loan treatment if:

the asset is not to be purchased or acquired by, or transferred to, a member of the tax preferred sector at the end of the arrangement period under a legally enforceable arrangement; or

the asset:

is, or is to become, a privatised asset; or

would be, or would become, a privatised asset if it were a depreciating asset; or

would be a privatised asset if the asset were a depreciating asset and paragraphs 58-5(2)(a) and 58-5(4)(a) were not limited to acquisitions of depreciating assets that occurred on or after 1 July 2001.

The relevant percentage is the disallowed capital allowance percentage if section 250-150 applies. Otherwise it is 100%.

Financial benefits only subject to deemed loan treatment to the extent to which they represent a return on investment

Note: See section 250-180 for how to work out the end value of the asset.

(3) The *financial benefit is subject to deemed loan treatment only to the extent to which it reasonably represents a return of, or on, an investment in the asset (as distinct, for example, from representing consideration for the provision of services or the recovery of production costs), having regard to:

the *market value of the asset; and

the discount rate applicable under subsection 250-105(2); and

your costs in relation to funding your interest in the asset; and

any other relevant matter.

The regulations may provide rules to be applied in determining the extent to which a financial benefit reasonably represents a return of or on an investment in the asset.

Only financial benefits provided after Division starts applying to you and the asset

(4) If the *tax preferred use of the asset starts before this Division starts applying to you and the asset, only *financial benefits provided after this Division starts applying to you and the asset are subject to deemed loan treatment.

250-180 End value of asset

(1) The end value of an asset is worked out in accordance with this section.

(2) If the asset has a *guaranteed residual value, the end value of the asset is:

the amount of the guaranteed residual amount if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

so much of the amount referred to in paragraph (a) as is attributable to the expenditure referred to in subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies.

(3) If the asset does not have a *guaranteed residual value and is a *depreciating asset, the end value of the asset is:

if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies—the amount that would have been the *adjustable value of the asset at the end of the arrangement period if:

this Division had not applied to you and the asset; and

the decline in the asset’s value were worked out on the basis of the asset’s *effective life and using the prime cost method; or

if subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) applies—so much of the amount referred to in paragraph (a) as is attributable to the expenditure referred to in that subparagraph.

Disregard section 40-102 in working out the asset’s *effective life for the purposes of subparagraph (3)(a)(ii).

(5) If neither subsection (2) nor subsection (3) applies and an estimate of the value of the asset is recognised for accounting purposes, the end value of the asset is:

the value of the relevant asset at the end of the arrangement period that would be recognised for accounting purposes if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

so much of the value of referred to in paragraph (a) as is attributable to the expenditure referred to subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies.

The end value must not, however, exceed the amount worked out under subsections 250-155(4) and (5) (amount taken to have been lent).

(6) If none of subsections (2), (3) and (5) apply to the asset, the end value of the asset is:

a reasonable estimate of the *market value of the asset at the end of the arrangement period if subparagraph 250-15(d)(i) applies; or

so much of the estimate referred to in paragraph (a) as is attributable to the expenditure referred to in subparagraph 250-15(d)(ii) if that subparagraph applies.

The end value must not, however, exceed the amount worked out under subsections 250-155(4) and (5) (amount taken to have been lent).

250-185 Financial benefits subject to deemed loan treatment not assessed

A financial benefit is not included in your assessable income if the financial benefit:

is *provided to you in relation to the tax preferred use of the asset; and

is provided directly or indirectly by a member of the tax preferred sector; and

is *subject to deemed loan treatment.

The financial benefit is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Subdivision 250-E — Taxation of deemed loan

Table of sections

Guide to Subdivision 250-E

250-190 What this Subdivision is about

Application and objects of Subdivision

250-195 Application of Subdivision

250-200 Objects of this Subdivision

Tax treatment of gains and losses from financial arrangements

250-205 Gains are assessable and losses deductible

250-210 Gain or loss to be taken into account only once under this Act

Method to be applied to take account of gain or loss

250-215 Methods for taking gain or loss into account

General rules

250-220 Consistency in working out gains or losses (integrity measure)

250-225 Rights and obligations include contingent rights and obligations

The accruals method

250-230 Application of accruals method

250-235 Overview of the accruals method

250-240 Applying accruals method to work out period over which gain or loss is to be spread

250-245 How gain or loss is spread

250-250 Allocating gain or loss to income years

250-255 When to re-estimate

250-260 Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal

Balancing adjustment

250-265 When balancing adjustment made

250-270 Exception for subsidiary member leaving consolidated group

250-275 Balancing adjustment

Other provisions

250-280 Financial arrangement received or provided as consideration

Guide to Subdivision 250-E

250-190 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision is about the tax treatment of gains and losses from the financial arrangement that you are taken to have under section 250-155.

You recognise gains and losses from the financial arrangement, as appropriate, over the life of the financial arrangement and ignore distinctions between income and capital. You use a compounding accruals method to recognise the gain or loss.

A change in circumstances may cause a re-estimation of gains and losses that the accruals method is being applied to.

A balancing adjustment is made if you transfer particular rights or obligations or particular rights or obligations cease.

Application and objects of Subdivision

250-195 Application of Subdivision

This Subdivision applies for the purposes of working out the amount of the gain or loss that is to be included in your assessable income or allowed as a deduction in relation to the financial arrangement that is taken to exist under section 250-155.

250-200 Objects of this Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are:

to properly recognise gains and losses from the financial arrangement by allocating them to appropriate periods of time; and

to minimise tax deferral.

Tax treatment of gains and losses from financial arrangements

250-205 Gains are assessable and losses deductible

Gains

Your assessable income includes a gain you make from the financial arrangement.

Losses

You can deduct a loss you make from the financial arrangement, but only to the extent that:

you make it in gaining or producing your assessable income; or

you necessarily make it in carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing your assessable income.

250-210 Gain or loss to be taken into account only once under this Act

Purpose of this section

The purpose of this section is to ensure that your gains that are assessable under this Subdivision, and your losses that are deductible under this Subdivision, are taken into account only once under this Act in working out your taxable income.

Gain or loss

If a gain or loss is, or is to be, included in your assessable income or allowable as a deduction to you for an income year under this Subdivision, the gain or loss is not to be (to any extent):

included in your assessable income; or

allowable as a deduction to you;

under any other provisions of this Act for the same or any other income year.

Associated financial benefits

If the amount or value of a financial benefit is taken into account in working out whether you make, or the amount of, a gain or loss that is, or is to be, included in your assessable income or allowable as a deduction for you for an income year under this Subdivision, the benefit is not to be (to any extent):

included in your assessable income; or

allowable as a deduction to you;

under any other provision of this Act for the same or any other income year.

Method to be applied to take account of gain or loss

250-215 Methods for taking gain or loss into account

The methods that can be applied to take account of a gain or loss you make from the financial arrangement you have are:

the accruals method provided for in sections 250-235 to 250-255; or

a balancing adjustment provided for in sections 250-265 to 250-275.

A gain or loss is not taken into account under the method referred to in paragraph (a) to the extent to which the gain or loss is taken into account under sections 250-265 to 250-275.

General rules

250-220 Consistency in working out gains or losses (integrity measure)

Object of section

The object of this section is to stop you obtaining an inappropriate tax benefit from not working out your gains and losses in a consistent manner.

Consistent treatment for particular financial arrangement

If:

this Subdivision provides that a particular method applies to gains or losses you make from the financial arrangement; and

that method allows you to choose the particular manner in which you apply that method;

you must use that manner consistently for the arrangement for all income years.

Consistent treatment for financial arrangements of essentially the same nature

If:

this Subdivision provides that a particular method applies to gains or losses you make from 2 or more *financial arrangements; and

that method allows you to choose the particular manner in which you apply that method;

you must use that same manner consistently for all of those financial arrangements that are essentially of the same nature.

250-225 Rights and obligations include contingent rights and obligations

To avoid doubt:

a right is treated as a right for the purposes of this Division even it is subject to a contingency; and

an obligation is treated as an obligation for the purpose of this Division even if it is subject to a contingency.

The accruals method

250-230 Application of accruals method

The accruals method provided for in sections 250-235 to 250-255 applies to a gain or loss you make from the financial arrangement if:

the gain or loss is an overall gain or loss from the arrangement; and

the gain or loss is sufficiently certain at the time when you start to have the arrangement.

250-235 Overview of the accruals method

If the accruals method applies to a gain or loss you make from the financial arrangement:

you use section 250-240 to work out the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread; and

you use section 250-245 to work out how to allocate the gain or loss to particular intervals within the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread; and

if an interval to which part of the gain or loss is allocated straddles 2 income years, you use section 250-250 to work out how to allocate that part of the gain or loss allocated between those 2 income years.

250-240 Applying accruals method to work out period over which gain or loss is to be spread

If you have a sufficiently certain overall gain or loss from the financial arrangement, the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread is the period that:

starts when you start to have the arrangement; and

ends when you will cease to have the arrangement.

In applying paragraph (b), you must assume that you will continue to have the arrangement for the rest of its life.

250-245 How gain or loss is spread

How to spread gain or loss

This section tells you how to spread a gain or loss to which the accruals method applies.

Compounding accruals or approximation

The gain or loss is to be spread using:

compounding accruals (with the intervals to which parts of the gain or loss are allocated complying with subsection (3)); or

a method whose results approximate those obtained using the method referred to in paragraph (a) (having regard to the length of the period over which the gain or loss is to be spread).

Intervals to which parts of gain or loss allocated

The intervals to which parts of the gain or loss are allocated must:

not exceed 12 months; and

all be of the same length.

Paragraph (b) does not apply to the first and last intervals. These may be shorter than the other intervals.

Assumption of continuing hold arrangement for the rest of its life

The gain or loss is to be spread assuming that you will continue to have the financial arrangement for the rest of its life.

250-250 Allocating gain or loss to income years

You are taken, for the purposes of section 250-205, to make, for an income year, a gain or loss equal to a part of a gain or loss if:

that part of the gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 250-245; and

that interval falls wholly within that income year.

If:

a part of a gain or loss is allocated to an interval under section 250-245; and

that interval straddles 2 income years;

you are taken, for purposes of section 250-205, to make a gain or loss equal to so much of that part of the gain or loss as is allocated between those income years on a reasonable basis.

If:

a consolidated group or MEC group has a financial arrangement; and

(b) a subsidiary member of the group ceases to be a member of the group at a particular time (the exit time); and

immediately after the exit time, the subsidiary member has the financial arrangement;

an income year of the group is taken, for the purposes of applying this section to the group and the financial arrangement, to end at the exit time.

250-255 When to re-estimate

When re-estimation necessary

You re-estimate a gain or loss from the financial arrangement under subsection (4) if circumstances arise that materially affect:

the amount or value; or

the timing;

of *financial benefits that were taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss. You must re-estimate the gain or loss as soon as reasonably practicable after you become aware of the circumstances referred to in paragraph (b).

Without limiting subsection (1), the following are circumstances of the kind referred to in paragraph (1)(b):

a material change in market conditions that are relevant to the amount or value of the *financial benefits to be received or provided under the financial arrangement;

cash flows that were previously estimated becoming known and the difference between the cash flows that become known and the cash flows that were previously estimated is not insignificant;

a right to, or a part of a right to, a financial benefit under the arrangement is written off as a bad debt.

You do not re-estimate a gain or loss from a financial arrangement under subsection (4) merely because of any one or more of the following:

a change in the credit rating, or the creditworthiness, of a party or parties to the financial arrangement;

the impairment (within the meaning of the accounting standards) of the arrangement or a debt that forms part of the arrangement.

Nature of re-estimation

Making a re-estimation in relation to a gain or loss under this subsection involves:

a fresh determination of the amount of the gain or loss; and

a reapplication of the accruals method to the redetermined gain or loss to make a fresh allocation of the part of the redetermined gain or loss that has not already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made to intervals ending after the re-estimation is made.

Basis for re-estimation

You may make the fresh allocation of the gain or loss under subsection (4) on either of the following bases:

by maintaining the rate of return being used and adjusting the amount to which you apply the rate of return to the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the maintained rate of return;

adjusting the rate of return and maintaining the amount to which you apply the rate of return.

The object to be achieved by both bases is allow you to bring the remainder of the gain or loss based on the new estimates properly to account over the remainder of the period over which you spread the gain or loss.

If you adopt a particular basis under subsection (5) for a gain or loss from the financial arrangement, you must use the same basis for all the re-estimations you make under this section in relation to your gains and losses from all your financial arrangements.

Balancing adjustment if rate of return maintained

If you make a fresh allocation of the gain or loss on the basis referred to in paragraph (5)(a), you must make the following balancing adjustment:

if you re-estimate a gain and the amount to which you apply the rate of return increases—you make a gain from the financial arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the increase;

if you re-estimate a gain and the amount to which you apply the rate of return decreases—you make a loss from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the decrease;

if you re-estimate a loss and the amount to which you apply the rate of return increases—you make a loss from the arrangement, for the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the increase;

if you re-estimate a loss and the amount to which you apply the rate of return decreases—you make a gain from the arrangement, the income year in which you make the re-estimation, equal to the amount of the decrease.

250-260 Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal

Re-estimation if balancing adjustment on partial disposal

You also re-estimate a gain or loss from a financial arrangement under subsection (2) if a balancing adjustment is made in relation to the financial arrangement under sections 250-265 to 250-275 because you transfer to another person:

a proportionate share of all of your rights and/or obligations under a financial arrangement; or

a right or obligation that you have under a financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit; or

a proportionate share of a right or obligation that you have under a financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit.

You must re-estimate the gain or loss as soon as reasonably practicable after the transfer occurs.

Nature of re-estimation

Making a re-estimation in relation to a gain or loss under this subsection involves:

a fresh determination of the amount of the gain or loss disregarding:

*financial benefits; and

amounts of the gain or loss that have already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made;

to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the proportionate share, or the right or obligation, referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and

a reapplication of the accruals method to the redetermined gain or loss to make a fresh allocation of the part of that gain or loss that has not already been allocated to intervals ending before the re-estimation is made to intervals ending after the re-estimation is made.

Basis for re-estimation

You make the fresh allocation of the gain or loss under subsection (2) by maintaining the rate of return being used and adjusting the amount to which you apply the rate of return to the present value of the estimated future cash flows discounted at the maintained rate of return. The object to be achieved by the fresh allocation is allow you to bring the remainder of the redetermined gain or loss properly to account over the remainder of the period over which you spread the gain or loss.

Balancing adjustment

250-265 When balancing adjustment made

When balancing adjustment made

A balancing adjustment is made under section 250-275 if:

you transfer to another person all of your rights and/or obligations under the financial arrangement; or

all of your rights and/or obligations under the financial arrangement otherwise substantially cease; or

you transfer to another person:

a proportionate share of all of your rights and/or obligations under the financial arrangement; or

a right or obligation that you have under the financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit; or

a proportionate share of a right or obligation that you have under the financial arrangement to a specifically identified financial benefit.

Modifications for arrangements that are assets

The following modifications are made if the financial arrangement is an asset of yours at the time the event referred to in subsection (1) occurs:

paragraphs (1)(a) and (c) do not apply unless the effect of the transfer is to transfer to the other person substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the interest transferred;

for the purposes of applying section 250-275 to the arrangement, you are treated as transferring a right under the arrangement to another person if:

you retain the right but assume a new obligation; and

your assumption of the new obligation has the same effect, in substance, as transferring the right to another person; and

the new obligation arises only to the extent to which the right to *financial benefits under the financial arrangement is satisfied; and

you cannot sell or pledge the right (other than as security in relation to the new obligation); and

you must, under the new obligation, provide financial benefits you receive in relation to the right to the person to whom you owe the new obligation without delay.

250-270 Exception for subsidiary member leaving consolidated group

A balancing adjustment is not made under section 250-275 in relation to a subsidiary member of aconsolidated group or a MEC group that has the financial arrangement ceasing to be a member of the group.

250-275 Balancing adjustment

Complete cessation or transfer

Use the following method statement to make the balancing adjustment if paragraph 250-265(1)(a) or (b) applies:

Method statement for balancing adjustment

Step 1. Add up the following:

the total of all the *financial benefits provided to you under the financial arrangement;

the amount or value of any other consideration you receive in relation to the transfer or cessation referred to in subsection 250-265(1);

the total of the amounts that have been allowed to you as deductions, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, for losses from the arrangement;

the total of the other amounts that would have been allowed to you as deductions, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, for losses from the arrangement if all your losses from the arrangement were allowable as deductions.

Step 2. Add up the following:

the total of all the *financial benefits you have provided under the financial arrangement;

the amount or value of any other consideration you provide in relation to the transfer or cessation referred to in subsection 250-265(1);

the total of the amounts that have been included in your assessable income, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, as gains from the arrangement;

the total of the other amounts that would have been included in your assessable income, because of circumstances that have occurred before the transfer or cessation, as gains from the arrangement if all your gains from the arrangement were assessable.

Step 3. Compare the amount obtained under Step 1 (the Step 1 amount) with the amount obtained under Step 2 (the Step 2 amount). If the Step 1 amount exceeds the Step 2 amount, an amount equal to the excess is taken, as a balancing adjustment, to be a gain you make from the *financial arrangement for the purposes of this Subdivision. If the Step 2 amount exceeds the Step 1 amount, an amount equal to the excess is taken, as a balancing adjustment, to be a loss that you make from the arrangement. If the Step 1 amount and the Step 2 amount are equal, no balancing adjustment is made.

Proportionate transfer of all rights and/or obligations under financial arrangement

If subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(i) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement in subsection (1) but reduce:

the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 1; and

the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 2;

by applying the proportion referred to in subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(i) to them.

Transfer of specifically identified right or obligation under financial arrangement

If subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(ii) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement in subsection (1) as if the references to:

the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 1; and

the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 2;

were references to those amounts to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the right or obligation referred to in subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(ii).

Proportionate transfer of specifically identified right or obligation under financial arrangement

If subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(iii) applies, you make the balancing adjustment by applying the method statement:

as if the references to:

the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 1; and

the amounts referred to in paragraphs (a), (c) and (d) in step 2;

were references to those amounts to the extent to which they are reasonably attributable to the right or obligation referred to in subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(iii); and

by reducing those amounts by applying the proportion referred to in subparagraph 250-265(1)(c)(iii) to them.

Attribution must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles

Any attribution made under subsection (3) or paragraph (4)(a) must reflect appropriate and commercially accepted valuation principles that properly take into account:

the nature of the rights and obligations under the financial arrangement; and

the risks associated with each financial benefit, right and obligation under the arrangement; and

the time value of money.

Income year for which gain or loss is made

The gain or loss you are taken to make under subsection (1), (2), (3) or (4) is a gain or loss for the income year in which the event referred to in subsection 250-265(1) occurs.

Other provisions

250-280 Financial arrangement received or provided as consideration

If:

this Subdivision applies in relation to your gains and losses from the financial arrangement; and

you start to have the financial arrangement (or a part of the financial arrangement) as consideration (or as part of the consideration) for:

(i) something (the thing provided) that you provided, or are to provide, to someone else; or

(ii) something (the thing acquired) that someone else has provided, or is to provide, to you; and

the thing provided or the thing acquired is not money;

the amount of the benefit (or that part of the benefit) that you obtained for the thing provided, or gave for the thing acquired, is taken, for the purposes of applying this Act to you, to be the *market value of the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement) at the time when you start to have the financial arrangement.

Note 1: This amount may be relevant, for example, for the purposes of applying the provisions of this Act dealing with capital gains, capital allowances or trading stock to the thing provided or the thing acquired.

Note 2: The market value is to be used instead of the nominal value of the financial benefits to be provided under the financial arrangement.

If subsection (1) applies, you are taken to have received, or provided, as consideration for starting to have the financial arrangement (or the part of the financial arrangement), *financial benefits whose value is equal to the market value of the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement) at the time when you started to have the financial arrangement.

If, but for this subsection:

subsection (2) would apply to your starting to have a financial arrangement; and

subsection (1) or (4) would also apply to your starting to have the financial arrangement;

subsection (2) applies to your starting to have the financial arrangement and subsection (1) or (4) does not.

If:

this Subdivision applies in relation to your gains and losses from the financial arrangement; and

you cease to have the financial arrangement (or a part of the financial arrangement) as consideration (or as part of the consideration) for:

(i) something (the thing acquired) that someone else provides, or is to provide, to you; or

(ii) something (the thing provided) that you provided, or are to provide, to someone else; and

the thing acquired or the thing provided is not money;

the amount of the benefit (or that part of the benefit) that you provided for the thing acquired, or obtained for the thing provided, is taken, for the purposes of applying this Act to you, to be the *market value of the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement) at the time when you cease to have the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement).

Note 1: This amount may be relevant, for example, for the purposes of applying the provisions of this Act dealing with capital gains, capital allowances or trading stock to the thing acquired or the thing provided.

Note 2: The market value is to be used instead of the nominal value of the financial benefits to be provided under the financial arrangement.

If subsection (4) applies, you are taken to have provided, or received, as consideration for ceasing to have the financial arrangement (or the part of the financial arrangement), *financial benefits whose value is equal to the market value of the financial arrangement (or that part of the financial arrangement) at the time when you ceased to have the financial arrangement.

If, but for this subsection:

subsection (5) would apply to your ceasing to have a financial arrangement; and

subsection (1) or (4) would also apply to your ceasing to have the financial arrangement;

subsection (5) applies to your ceasing to have the financial arrangement and subsection (1) or (4) does not.

Without limiting subsections (1) and (4), the thing provided, or the thing acquired, need not be a tangible thing and may take the form of services, conferring a right, incurring an obligation or extinguishing or varying a right or obligation.

Subdivision 250-F — Treatment of asset when Division ceases to apply to the asset

Table of sections

250-285 Treatment of asset after Division ceases to apply to the asset

250-290 Balancing adjustment under Subdivision 40-D in some circumstances

250-285 Treatment of asset after Division ceases to apply to the asset

For the purposes of Division 40, if:

this Division applies to you and an asset; and

the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends at a particular time; and

the asset would have had an *adjustable value at that time, for the purposes of Division 40, if this Division had never applied to the asset;

the adjustable value of the asset, immediately after the end of the arrangement period, is taken to be equal to the amount worked out using the following method statement:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out whether section 250-150 applies.

Step 2. If section 250-150 does not apply, the amount is the *end value of the asset at the end of the arrangement period.

Step 3. If section 250-150 does apply, the amount is worked out by:

multiplying the *end value of the asset at the end of the arrangement period by the *disallowed capital percentage; and

then multiplying the adjustable value of the asset at the end of the arrangement period (worked out under section 40-85) by 100% minus the disallowed capital percentage); and

then adding the amount obtained under paragraph (a) and the amount obtained under paragraph (b).

If:

this Division applies to you and an asset; and

the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends; and

a net amount is included in your assessable income in relation to the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment (taking into account the adjustments under Subdivision 250-E in relation to the financial benefits that are subject to the deemed loan treatment);

the *cost base, and the *reduced cost base, of the asset are each taken to be reduced at the end of the arrangement period by an amount equal to the difference between:

the total amounts or values of the financial benefits that were subject to deemed loan treatment; and

the net amount referred to in paragraph (c).

Note: See subsection (6) in relation to the application of paragraph (d).

If:

this Division applies to you and an asset; and

the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends; and

a net amount is allowed to you as a deduction in relation to the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment (taking into account the adjustments under Subdivision 250-E in relation to the financial benefits that are subject to the deemed loan treatment);

the *cost base, and the *reduced cost base, of the asset are each taken to be reduced at the end of the arrangement period by an amount equal to the sum of:

the total amounts or values of the financial benefits that were subject to deemed loan treatment; and

the net amount referred to in paragraph (c).

Note: See subsection (6) in relation to the application of paragraph (d).

If:

this Division applies to you and an asset; and

the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends; and

a net amount is included in your assessable income in relation to the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment (taking into account the adjustments under Subdivision 250-E in relation to the financial benefits that are subject to the deemed loan treatment);

then, in determining the profit or loss on the sale of the asset, a deduction equal to the difference between the following is taken to have been allowed for expenditure by you in connection with the asset:

the total amounts or values of the financial benefits that were subject to deemed loan treatment; and

the net amount referred to in paragraph (c).

Note: See subsection (6) in relation to the application of paragraph (d).

If:

this Division applies to you and an asset; and

the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends; and

a net amount is allowed to you as a deduction in relation to the *financial benefits that are *subject to the deemed loan treatment (taking into account the adjustments under Subdivision 250-E in relation to the financial benefits that are subject to the deemed loan treatment);

then, in determining the profit or loss on the sale of the asset, a deduction equal to the sum of the following is taken to have been allowed for expenditure by you in connection with the asset:

the total amounts or values of the financial benefits that were subject to deemed loan treatment; and

the net amount referred to in paragraph (c).

Note: See subsection (6) in relation to the application of paragraph (d).

In applying paragraphs (2)(d), (3)(d), (4)(d) and (5)(d), disregard subsection 250-160(2) (reasonable estimate of end value treated as financial benefit subject to deemed loan treatment).

250-290 Balancing adjustment under Subdivision 40-D in some circumstances

This section applies if:

this Division applies to you and an asset; and

the arrangement period for the *tax preferred use of the asset ends because a particular event happens; and

the event would have been a balancing adjustment event for the asset for the purposes of Subdivision 40-D if this Division had not applied to you and the asset when the event happened.

A balancing adjustment is made under Subdivision 40-D as if:

the event were a balancing adjustment event for the asset; and

the *adjustable value of the asset, just before the event happened, were the adjustable value worked out under subsection 250-285(1); and

sections 40-290, 40-291, 40-292 and 40-293 did not apply.

Subdivision 250-G — Objections against determinations and decisions by the Commissioner

Table of sections

250-295 Objections against determinations and decisions by the Commissioner

250-295 Objections against determinations and decisions by the Commissioner

This section applies to a determination by the Commissioner under section 250-45.

This section also applies to a decision by the Commissioner under subsection 250-150(5).

(3) A person who is dissatisfied with a determination or decision to which this section applies may object against the determination or decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 253 — Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs

Table of Subdivisions

253-A Tax treatment of entitlements under financial claims scheme

Subdivision 253-A — Tax treatment of entitlements under financial claims scheme

Guide to Subdivision 253-A

253-1 What this Subdivision is about

This Act applies to a payment of an entitlement under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 as if the payment were made by the ADI under the agreement for the account concerned.

Special rules prevent the arising and payment of such an entitlement from creating inappropriate capital gains or losses affecting assessable income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

253-5 Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from ADI

253-10 Disposal of rights against ADI to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects

253-15 Cost base of financial claims scheme entitlement and any remaining part of account that gave rise to entitlement

Operative provisions

253-5 Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from ADI

(1) This Act applies to you as if an amount paid to you, or applied for your benefit, to meet your entitlement under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 connected with an account with an *ADI had been paid to you by the ADI under the terms and conditions of the agreement for keeping the account.

Note: This section has effect subject to more detailed provisions about:

entitlements relating to retirement savings accounts (see section 306-25); and

entitlements relating to farm management deposits (see Subdivision 393-C).

(2) To avoid doubt, subsection (1) does not affect the operation of Part 2-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note: Division 21 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains special provisions about how Part 2-5 in that Schedule operates in relation to the meeting of entitlements under Division 2AA of Part II of the Banking Act 1959.

253-10 Disposal of rights against ADI to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make:

(a) because of the operation of section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959; or

because your entitlement under Subdivision C of Division 2AA of Part II of that Act is met.

Note: Section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959 reduces the right of an account-holder who has a protected account with a declared ADI to be paid an amount by the ADI, by the account-holder’s entitlement under Subdivision C of Division 2AA of Part II of that Act to be paid an amount by APRA in connection with the account.

253-15 Cost base of financial claims scheme entitlement and any remaining part of account that gave rise to entitlement

(1) This section applies if an entitlement arises under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 in connection with an account-holder’s account with an *ADI.

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the CGT asset consisting of the entitlement are each the amount of the entitlement.

(3) The *cost base of the *CGT asset representing the part (if any) of the account-holder’s right to be paid an amount by the *ADI in connection with the account that remains after the reduction of that right by section 16AI of the Banking Act 1959 (by the amount of the entitlement) is the difference (if any) between:

the cost base of the right as it was immediately before the reduction; and

the amount of the entitlement.

The *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

This section has effect despite:

Division 110 (Cost base and reduced cost base); and

subsections 112-30(2), (3), (4) and (5) (which are about apportioning a *cost base if a CGT event happens to only part of a CGT asset).

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 3—Specialist liability rules 1

Part 3-25—Particular kinds of trusts 1

Division 275—Australian managed investment trusts: general 1

Guide to Division 275 1

275-1 What this Division is about 1

Subdivision 275-A—Meaning of managed investment trust 2

Guide to Subdivision 275-A 2

275-5 What this Subdivision is about 2

Operative provisions 2

275-10 Meaning of managed investment trust 2

275-15 Trusts with wholesale membership 6

275-20 Widely-held requirements—ordinary case 7

275-25 Widely-held requirements for registered MIT—special case for entities covered by subsection 275-20(4) 10

275-30 Closely-held restrictions 11

275-35 Licensing requirements for unregistered MIS 12

275-40 MIT participation interest 13

275-45 Meaning of managed investment trust—every member of trust is a managed investment trust etc. 14

275-50 Extended definition of managed investment trust—no fund payment made in relation to the income year 14

275-55 Extended definition of managed investment trust—temporary circumstances outside the control of the trustee 15

Subdivision 275-B—Choice for capital treatment of managed investment trust gains and losses 15

275-100 Consequences of making choice—CGT to be primary code for calculating MIT gains or losses 16

275-105 Covered assets 19

275-110 MIT not to be trading trust 19

275-115 MIT CGT choices 20

275-120 Consequences of not making choice—revenue account treatment 21

Subdivision 275-C—Carried interests in managed investment trusts 22

275-200 Gains and losses etc. from carried interests in managed investment trusts reflected in assessable income or deduction 22

Subdivision 275-L—Modification for non-arm’s length income 24

Guide to Subdivision 275-L 24

275-600 What this Subdivision is about 24

Operative provisions 25

275-605 Trustee taxed on amount of non-arm’s length income of managed investment trust 25

275-610 Non-arm’s length income 26

275-615 Commissioner’s determination in relation to amount of non-arm’s length income 28

Division 276—Australian managed investment trusts: attribution managed investment trusts 30

Guide to Division 276 30

276-1 What this Division is about 30

Subdivision 276-A—What is an attribution managed investment trust? 31

Guide to Subdivision 276-A 31

276-5 What this Subdivision is about 31

Operative provisions 32

276-10 Meaning of attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT) 32

276-15 Clearly defined interests 33

276-20 Trust with classes of membership interests—each class treated as separate AMIT 33

Subdivision 276-B—Member’s vested and indefeasible interest in share of income and capital of AMIT 34

Guide to Subdivision 276-B 34

276-50 What this Subdivision is about 34

Operative provisions 35

276-55 AMIT taken to be fixed trust and member taken to have vested and indefeasible interest in income and capital 35

Subdivision 276-C—Taxation etc. of member components 35

Guide to Subdivision 276-C 35

276-75 What this Subdivision is about 35

Taxation etc. of member on determined member components 36

276-80 Member’s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components—general rules 36

276-85 Member’s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components—specific rules 38

276-90 Commissioner’s determination as to status of member as qualified person 39

276-95 Relationship between section 276-80 and withholding rules 40

276-100 Relationship between section 276-80 and other charging provisions in this Act 41

Foreign resident members—taxation of trustee and corresponding tax offset for members 42

276-105 Trustee taxed on foreign resident’s determined member components 42

276-110 Refundable tax offset for foreign resident member—member that is not a trustee 44

Special rule for interposed custodian 44

276-115 Custodian interposed between AMIT and member 44

Subdivision 276-D—Member components 45

Guide to Subdivision 276-D 45

276-200 What this Subdivision is about 45

Member-level concepts 46

276-205 Meaning of determined member component 46

276-210 Meaning of member component 48

Subdivision 276-E—Trust components 50

Guide to Subdivision 276-E 50

276-250 What this Subdivision is about 50

Trust-level concepts 50

276-255 Meaning of determined trust component 50

276-260 Meaning of trust component 51

276-265 Rules for working out trust components—general rules 52

276-270 Rules for working out trust components—allocation of deductions 52

Subdivision 276-F—Unders and overs 53

Guide to Subdivision 276-F 53

276-300 What this Subdivision is about 53

Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs etc. 54

276-305 Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs 54

276-310 Rounding adjustment deficit increases trust component 55

276-315 Rounding adjustment surplus decreases trust component 55

276-320 Meaning of trust component deficit 56

276-325 Trust component of character relating to assessable income—adjustment for cross-character allocation amount, carry-forward trust component deficit and FITO allocation amount 56

276-330 Meaning of cross-character allocation amount and carry-forward trust component deficit 57

276-335 Meaning of FITO allocation amount 58

276-340 Trust component character relating to tax offset—taxation of trust component deficit 59

Unders and overs 59

276-345 Meaning of under and over of a character 59

276-350 Limited discovery period for unders and overs 60

Subdivision 276-G—Shortfall and excess taxation 61

Guide to Subdivision 276-G 61

276-400 What this Subdivision is about 61

Ensuring determined trust components are properly taxed 62

276-405 Trustee taxed on shortfall in determined member component (character relating to assessable income) 62

276-410 Trustee taxed on excess in determined member component (character relating to tax offset) 62

276-415 Trustee taxed on amounts of determined trust component that are not reflected in determined member components 63

Ensuring unders and overs are properly taxed 64

276-420 Trustee taxed on amounts of under of character relating to assessable income not properly carried forward 64

276-425 Trustee taxed on amounts of over of character relating to tax offset not properly carried forward 65

Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision 67

276-430 Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision 67

Subdivision 276-H—AMMA statements 67

Guide to Subdivision 276-H 67

276-450 What this Subdivision is about 67

Operative provisions 67

276-455 Obligation to give an AMMA statement 67

276-460 AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement) 68

Subdivision 276-J—Debt-like trust instruments 69

Guide to Subdivision 276-J 69

276-500 What this Subdivision is about 69

Operative provisions 69

276-505 Meaning of debt-like trust instrument 69

276-510 Debt-like trust instruments treated as debt interests etc. 70

276-515 Distribution on debt-like trust instrument could be deductible in working out trust components 71

Subdivision 276-K—Ceasing to be an AMIT 71

Guide to Subdivision 276-K 71

276-800 What this Subdivision is about 71

Operative provisions 72

276-805 Application of Subdivision to former AMIT 72

276-810 Continue to work out trust components, unders, overs etc. 72

276-815 Effect of increase 72

276-820 Effect of decrease 73

Part 3-30—Superannuation 76

Division 280—Guide to the superannuation provisions 76

280-1 Effect of this Division 76

280-5 Overview 77

Contributions phase 77

280-10 Contributions phase—deductibility 77

280-15 Contributions phase—limits on superannuation tax concessions 78

Investment phase 79

280-20 Investment phase 79

Benefits phase 79

280-25 Benefits phase—different types of superannuation benefit 79

280-30 Benefits phase—taxation varies with age of recipient and type of benefit 79

280-35 Benefits phase—roll-overs 80

The regulatory scheme outside this Act 80

280-40 Other relevant legislative schemes 80

Division 285—General concepts relating to superannuation 82

285-5 Transfers of property 82

Division 290—Contributions to superannuation funds 83

Guide to Division 290 83

290-1 What this Division is about 83

Subdivision 290-A—General rules 83

290-5 Non-application to roll-over superannuation benefits etc. 83

290-10 No deductions other than under this Division 84

Subdivision 290-B—Deduction of employer contributions and other employment-connected contributions 84

Deducting employer contributions 85

290-60 Employer contributions deductible 85

290-65 Application to employees etc. 85

Conditions for deducting an employer contribution 86

290-70 Employment activity conditions 86

290-75 Complying fund conditions 86

290-80 Age related conditions 87

Other employment-connected deductions 89

290-85 Contributions for former employees etc. 89

290-90 Controlling interest deductions 92

Returned contributions 93

290-100 Returned contributions assessable 93

Subdivision 290-C—Deducting personal contributions 94

290-150 Personal contributions deductible 94

Conditions for deducting a personal contribution 95

290-155 Complying superannuation fund condition 95

290-165 Age-related conditions 96

290-167 Contribution must not be a downsizer contribution 97

290-168 Contribution must not be a re-contribution under the first home super saver scheme 97

290-169 Contribution must not be a COVID-19 re-contribution 97

290-170 Notice of intent to deduct conditions 97

290-175 Deduction limited by amount specified in notice 100

290-180 Notice may be varied but not revoked or withdrawn 100

Subdivision 290-D—Tax offsets for spouse contributions 101

290-230 Offset for spouse contribution 101

290-235 Limit on amount of tax offsets 103

290-240 Tax file number 103

Division 291—Excess concessional contributions 104

Guide to Division 291 104

291-1 What this Division is about 104

Subdivision 291-A—Object of this Division 105

291-5 Object of this Division 105

Subdivision 291-B—Excess concessional contributions 105

Guide to Subdivision 291-B 105

291-10 What this Subdivision is about 105

Operative provisions 106

291-15 Excess concessional contributions—assessable income, 15% tax offset 106

291-20 Your excess concessional contributions for a financial year 106

291-25 Your concessional contributions for a financial year 107

Subdivision 291-C—Modifications for defined benefit interests 109

Guide to Subdivision 291-C 109

291-155 What this Subdivision is about 109

Operative provisions 109

291-160 Application 109

291-165 Concessional contributions—special rules for defined benefit interests 109

291-170 Notional taxed contributions 110

291-175 Defined benefit interest 111

Subdivision 291-CA—Contributions that do not result in excess contributions 112

Guide to Subdivision 291-CA 112

291-365 What this Subdivision is about 112

Operative provisions 112

291-370 Contributions that do not result in excess contributions 112

Subdivision 291-D—Other provisions 113

Guide to Subdivision 291-D 113

291-460 What this Subdivision is about 113

Operative provisions 114

291-465 Commissioner’s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year 114

Division 292—Excess non-concessional contributions 117

Guide to Division 292 117

292-1 What this Division is about 117

Subdivision 292-A—Object of this Division 118

292-5 Object of this Division 118

Subdivision 292-B—Assessable income and tax offset 118

292-15 What this Subdivision is about 118

292-20 Amount in assessable income, and tax offset, relating to your non-concessional contributions 119

292-25 Amount included in assessable income 119

292-30 Amount of the tax offset 120

Subdivision 292-C—Excess non-concessional contributions tax 120

292-75 What this Subdivision is about 120

Operative provisions 121

292-80 Liability for excess non-concessional contributions tax 121

292-85 Your excess non-concessional contributions for a financial year 121

292-90 Your non-concessional contributions for a financial year 124

292-95 Contributions arising from structured settlements or orders for personal injuries 126

292-100 Contribution relating to some CGT small business concessions 129

292-102 Downsizer contributions 132

292-103 COVID-19 re-contributions 136

292-105 CGT cap amount 137

Subdivision 292-E—Excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments 138

Guide to Subdivision 292-E 138

292-225 What this Subdivision is about 138

Operative provisions 139

292-230 Commissioner must make an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment 139

292-240 Validity of assessment 139

292-245 Objections 139

Subdivision 292-F—Amending excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments 140

Guide to Subdivision 292-F 140

292-300 What this Subdivision is about 140

Operative provisions 140

292-305 Amendments within 4 years of the original assessment 140

292-310 Amended assessments are treated as excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments 141

292-315 Later amendments—on request 141

292-320 Later amendments—fraud or evasion 141

292-325 Further amendment of an amended particular 142

292-330 Amendment on review etc. 142

Subdivision 292-G—Collection and recovery 143

Guide to Subdivision 292-G 143

292-380 What this Subdivision is about 143

Operative provisions 143

292-385 Due date for payment of excess non-concessional contributions tax 143

292-390 General interest charge 143

292-395 Refunds of amounts overpaid 144

Subdivision 292-H—Other provisions 144

292-465 Commissioner’s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year 144

292-467 Direction that the value of superannuation interests is nil 146

Division 293—Sustaining the superannuation contribution concession 148

Guide to Division 293 148

293-1 What this Division is about 148

Subdivision 293-A—Object of this Division 149

Operative provisions 149

293-5 Object of this Division 149

Subdivision 293-B—Sustaining the superannuation contribution concession 149

Guide to Subdivision 293-B 149

293-10 What this Subdivision is about 149

Liability for tax 150

293-15 Liability for tax 150

293-20 Your taxable contributions 150

Low tax contributions 151

293-25 Your low tax contributions 151

293-30 Low tax contributed amounts 151

Subdivision 293-C—When tax is payable 153

Guide to Subdivision 293-C 153

293-60 What this Subdivision is about 153

Operative provisions 153

293-65 When tax is payable—original assessments 153

293-70 When tax is payable—amended assessments 154

293-75 General interest charge 154

Subdivision 293-D—Modifications for defined benefit interests 155

Guide to Subdivision 293-D 155

293-100 What this Subdivision is about 155

Operative provisions 155

293-105 Low tax contributions—modification for defined benefit interests 155

293-115 Defined benefit contributions 156

Subdivision 293-E—Modifications for constitutionally protected State higher level office holders 157

Guide to Subdivision 293-E 157

293-140 What this Subdivision is about 157

Operative provisions 157

293-145 Who this Subdivision applies to 157

293-150 Low tax contributions—modification for CPFs 158

293-155 High income threshold—effect of modification 159

293-160 Salary packaged contributions 159

Subdivision 293-F—Modifications for Commonwealth justices 160

Guide to Subdivision 293-F 160

293-185 What this Subdivision is about 160

Operative provisions 160

293-190 Who this Subdivision applies to 160

293-195 Defined benefit contributions—modified treatment of contributions under the Judges’ Pensions Act 1968 161

293-200 High income threshold—effect of modification 161

Subdivision 293-G—Modifications for temporary residents who depart Australia 162

Guide to Subdivision 293-G 162

293-225 What this Subdivision is about 162

Operative provisions 162

293-230 Who is entitled to a refund 162

293-235 Amount of the refund 163

293-240 Entitlement to refund stops all Division 293 tax liabilities 163

Subdivision 293-H—Other provisions 164

Guide to Subdivision 293-H 164

293-245 What this Subdivision is about 164

Operative provisions 164

293-250 Interaction with the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988 164

Division 294—Transfer balance cap 165

Guide to Division 294 165

294-1 What this Division is about 165

Subdivision 294-A—Object of this Division 166

Operative provisions 166

294-5 Object of this Division 166

Subdivision 294-B—Transfer balance account 166

Guide to Subdivision 294-B 166

294-10 What this Subdivision is about 166

Operative provisions 167

294-15 When you have a transfer balance account 167

294-20 Meaning of retirement phase recipient 167

294-25 Transfer balance credits 168

294-30 Excess transfer balance 170

294-35 Your transfer balance cap 170

294-40 Proportionally indexed transfer balance cap 171

294-45 Transfer balance account ends 172

294-50 Assumptions about income streams 172

294-55 Repayment of limited recourse borrowing arrangement 173

Subdivision 294-C—Transfer balance debits 173

Guide to Subdivision 294-C 173

294-75 What this Subdivision is about 173

Operative provisions 174

294-80 Transfer balance debits 174

294-85 Certain events that result in reduced superannuation 177

294-90 Payment splits 178

294-95 Payment splits—no double debiting 179

Subdivision 294-D—Modifications for certain defined benefit income streams 179

Guide to Subdivision 294-D 179

294-120 What this Subdivision is about 179

Operative provisions 180

294-125 When this Subdivision applies 180

294-130 Meaning of capped defined benefit income stream 180

294-135 Transfer balance credit—special rule for capped defined benefit income streams 181

294-140 Excess transfer balance—special rule for capped defined benefit income streams 183

294-145 Transfer balance debits—special rules for capped defined benefit income streams 183

Subdivision 294-E—Modifications for death benefits dependants who are children 188

Guide to Subdivision 294-E 188

294-170 What this Subdivision is about 188

Operative provisions 189

294-175 When this Subdivision applies 189

294-180 Transfer balance account ends 189

294-185 Transfer balance cap—special rule for child recipient 190

294-190 Cap increment—child recipient just before 1 July 2017 190

294-195 Cap increment—child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had no transfer balance account 191

294-200 Cap increment—child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had transfer balance account 191

Subdivision 294-F—Excess transfer balance tax 194

Guide to Subdivision 294-F 194

294-225 What this Subdivision is about 194

Operative provisions 194

294-230 Excess transfer balance tax 194

294-235 Your excess transfer balance earnings 195

294-240 When tax is payable—original assessments 195

294-245 When tax is payable—amended assessments 195

294-250 General interest charge 196

Division 295—Taxation of superannuation entities 197

Guide to Division 295 197

295-1 What this Division is about 197

Subdivision 295-A—Provisions of general operation 198

295-5 Entities to which Division applies 198

295-10 How to work out the tax payable by superannuation entities 199

295-15 Division does not impose a tax on property of a State 200

295-20 Exempting laws ineffective 201

295-25 Assessments on basis of anticipated SIS Act notice 201

295-30 Effect of revocation etc. of SIS Act notices 201

295-35 Acronyms used in tables 201

Subdivision 295-B—Modifications of provisions of this Act 202

295-85 CGT to be primary code for calculating gains or losses 202

295-90 CGT rules for pre-30 June 1988 assets 204

295-95 Deductions related to contributions 204

295-100 Deductions for investing in PSTs and life policies 206

295-105 Distributions to PST unitholders 206

Subdivision 295-C—Contributions included 207

Guide to Subdivision 295-C 207

295-155 What this Subdivision is about 207

Contributions and payments 208

295-160 Contributions and payments 208

295-165 Exception—spouse contributions 209

295-170 Exception—Government co-contributions and contributions for a child 209

295-173 Exception—trustee contributions 210

295-175 Exception—payments by a member spouse 210

295-180 Exception—choice to exclude certain contributions 210

295-185 Exception—temporary residents 211

Personal contributions and roll-over amounts 211

295-190 Personal contributions and roll-over amounts 211

295-195 Exclusion of personal contributions—contributions 213

295-197 Exclusion of personal contributions—successor funds 214

Transfers from foreign funds 215

295-200 Transfers from foreign superannuation funds 215

Application of tables to RSA providers 216

295-205 Application of tables to RSA providers 216

Former constitutionally protected funds 216

295-210 Former constitutionally protected funds 216

Subdivision 295-D—Contributions excluded 217

295-260 Transfer of liability to investment vehicle 217

295-265 Application of pre-1 July 88 funding credits 218

295-270 Anticipated funding credits 221

Subdivision 295-E—Other income amounts 222

Amounts included 222

295-320 Other amounts included in assessable income 222

295-325 Previously complying funds 223

295-330 Previously foreign funds 224

Amounts excluded 224

295-335 Amounts excluded from assessable income 224

Subdivision 295-F—Exempt income 225

295-385 Income from assets set aside to meet current pension liabilities 225

295-387 Disregarded small fund assets 227

295-390 Income from other assets used to meet current pension liabilities 228

295-395 Meaning of segregated non-current assets 230

295-400 Income of a PST attributable to current pension liabilities 231

295-405 Other exempt income 232

295-407 Covered superannuation income streams—RSAs 232

295-410 Amount credited to RSA 232

Subdivision 295-G—Deductions 233

Death or disability benefits 233

295-460 Benefits for which deductions are available 233

295-465 Complying funds—deductions for insurance premiums 234

295-470 Complying funds—deductions for future liability to pay benefits 237

295-475 RSA providers—deductions for insurance premiums 238

295-480 Meaning of whole of life policy and endowment policy 238

Other deductions 239

295-490 Other deductions 239

Certain amounts cannot be deducted 243

295-495 Amounts that cannot be deducted 243

Subdivision 295-H—Components of taxable income 243

295-545 Components of taxable income—complying superannuation funds, complying ADFs and PSTs 244

295-550 Meaning of non-arm’s length income 245

295-555 Components of taxable income—RSA providers 248

Subdivision 295-I—No-TFN contributions 249

295-605 Liability for tax on no-TFN contributions income 250

295-610 No-TFN contributions income 250

295-615 Meaning of quoted (for superannuation purposes) 251

295-620 No reduction under Subdivision 295-D 251

295-625 Assessments 252

Subdivision 295-J—Tax offset for no-TFN contributions income (TFN quoted within 5 years) 253

295-675 Entitlement to a tax offset 253

295-680 Amount of the tax offset 255

Division 296—Better targeted superannuation concessions 256

Guide to Division 296 256

296-1 What this Division is about 256

Subdivision 296-A—Object of this Division 256

Operative provisions 257

296-5 Object of this Division 257

Subdivision 296-B—Better targeted superannuation concessions 257

Guide to Subdivision 296-B 257

296-10 What this Subdivision is about 257

Liability for tax 258

296-15 Liability for tax 258

296-20 Exception—child recipients of superannuation income streams 258

296-25 Exception—structured settlement contributions 258

Large superannuation balance threshold and very large superannuation balance threshold 259

296-30 Large superannuation balance threshold 259

296-35 Very large superannuation balance threshold 259

Taxable superannuation earnings and related concepts 259

296-40 Your taxable superannuation earnings 259

296-45 Your very large superannuation balance earnings component 260

296-50 Total superannuation balance taken to be nil after death 261

296-55 Your total superannuation earnings 261

296-60 Division 296 fund earnings 264

296-65 Your relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest—general rule 269

296-70 Your relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest—certain defined benefit and other interests 270

296-75 Modifications 271

Subdivision 296-C—When tax is payable 272

Guide to Subdivision 296-C 272

296-125 What this Subdivision is about 272

Operative provisions 272

296-130 When tax is payable—original assessments 272

296-135 When tax is payable—amended assessments 273

296-140 General interest charge 273

Subdivision 296-E—Modifications for temporary residents who depart Australia 274

Guide to Subdivision 296-E 274

296-190 What this Subdivision is about 274

Operative provisions 275

296-195 Who is entitled to a refund 275

296-200 Amount of the refund 275

296-205 Entitlement to refund stops all Division 296 tax liabilities 276

Subdivision 296-G—Other provisions 276

Guide to Subdivision 296-G 276

296-255 What this Subdivision is about 276

Operative provisions 277

296-260 Disregard LRBA amounts in working out total superannuation balance 277

296-265 Interaction with the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988 277

Division 301—Superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans etc. 278

Guide to Division 301 278

301-1 What this Division is about 278

Subdivision 301-A—Application 278

301-5 Division applies to superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans etc. 278

Subdivision 301-B—Member benefits: general rules 279

Member benefits—recipient aged 60 or above 280

301-10 All superannuation benefits are tax free 280

Member benefits—recipient aged over preservation age and under 60 280

301-15 Tax free status of tax free component 280

301-20 Superannuation lump sum—taxable component taxed at 0% up to low rate cap amount, 15% on remainder 280

301-25 Superannuation income stream—taxable component attracts 15% offset 281

Member benefits—recipient aged under preservation age 282

301-30 Tax free status of tax free component 282

301-35 Superannuation lump sum—taxable component taxed at 20% 282

301-40 Superannuation income stream—taxable component is assessable income, 15% offset for disability benefit 282

Subdivision 301-C—Member benefits: elements untaxed in fund 283

301-90 Tax free component and element taxed in fund dealt with under Subdivision 301-B, but element untaxed in the fund dealt with under this Subdivision 284

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged 60 or above 284

301-95 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 15% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder 284

301-100 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund attracts 10% offset 285

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged over preservation age and under 60 285

301-105 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 15% up to low rate cap amount, 30% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder 285

301-110 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund is assessable income 286

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged under preservation age 286

301-115 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 30% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder 286

301-120 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund is assessable income 287

Miscellaneous 287

301-125 Unclaimed money payments by the Commissioner 287

Subdivision 301-D—Departing Australia superannuation payments 287

301-170 Departing Australia superannuation payments 287

301-175 Treatment of departing Australia superannuation benefits 289

Subdivision 301-E—Superannuation lump sum member benefits less than $200 289

301-225 Superannuation lump sum member benefits less than $200 are tax free 289

Subdivision 301-F—Veterans’ superannuation (invalidity pension) tax offset 290

301-275 Veterans’ superannuation (invalidity pension) tax offset 290

Division 302—Superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans etc. 292

Guide to Division 302 292

302-1 What this Division is about 292

Subdivision 302-A—Application 292

302-5 Division applies to superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans etc. 292

302-10 Superannuation death benefits paid to trustee of deceased estate 293

Subdivision 302-B—Death benefits to dependant 294

Lump sum death benefits to dependants are tax free 294

302-60 All of superannuation lump sum is tax free 294

Superannuation income stream—either deceased died aged 60 or above or dependant aged 60 or above 295

302-65 Superannuation income stream benefits are tax free 295

Superannuation income stream—deceased died aged under 60 and dependant aged under 60 295

302-70 Superannuation income stream—tax free status of tax free component 295

302-75 Superannuation income stream—taxable component attracts 15% offset 295

Death benefits to dependant—elements untaxed in fund 296

302-80 Treatment of element untaxed in the fund of superannuation income stream death benefit to dependant 296

302-85 Deceased died aged 60 or above or dependant aged 60 years or above—superannuation income stream: element untaxed in fund attracts 10% offset 296

302-90 Deceased died aged under 60 and dependant aged under 60—superannuation income stream: element untaxed in fund is assessable income 297

Subdivision 302-C—Death benefits to non-dependant 297

Superannuation lump sum 297

302-140 Superannuation lump sum—tax free status of tax free component 297

302-145 Superannuation lump sum—element taxed in the fund taxed at 15%, element untaxed in the fund taxed at 30% 298

Subdivision 302-D—Definitions relating to dependants 298

302-195 Meaning of death benefits dependant 298

302-200 What is an interdependency relationship? 299

Division 303—Superannuation benefits paid in special circumstances 301

Guide to Division 303 301

303-1 What this Division is about 301

Subdivision 303-A—Modifications for defined benefit income 301

Operative provisions 302

303-2 Effect of exceeding defined benefit income cap on assessable income 302

303-3 Effect of exceeding defined benefit income cap on tax offsets 302

303-4 Meaning of defined benefit income cap 303

Subdivision 303-B—Other special circumstances 304

303-5 Commutation of income stream if you are under 25 etc. 304

303-10 Superannuation lump sum member benefit paid to member having a terminal medical condition 304

303-15 Payments from release authorities—general 305

303-20 Payments from release authorities—paying debt account discharge liability or Division 296 debt account discharge liability 305

Division 304—Superannuation benefits in breach of legislative requirements etc. 306

Guide to Division 304 306

304-1 What this Division is about 306

Operative provisions 306

304-5 Application 306

304-10 Superannuation benefits in breach of legislative requirements etc. 306

304-20 Excess payments from release authorities—paying debt account discharge liability or Division 296 debt account discharge liability 308

Division 305—Superannuation benefits paid from non-complying superannuation plans 309

Guide to Division 305 309

305-1 What this Division is about 309

Subdivision 305-A—Superannuation benefits from Australian non-complying superannuation funds 309

305-5 Tax treatment of superannuation benefits from certain Australian non-complying superannuation funds 309

Subdivision 305-B—Superannuation benefits from foreign superannuation funds 310

Application of Subdivision 310

305-55 Restriction to lump sums received from certain foreign superannuation funds 310

Lump sums received within 6 months after Australian residency or termination of foreign employment etc. 311

305-60 Lump sums tax free—foreign resident period 311

305-65 Lump sums tax free—Australian resident period 312

Lump sums to which sections 305-60 and 305-65 do not apply 313

305-70 Lump sums received more than 6 months after Australian residency or termination of foreign employment etc. 313

305-75 Lump sums—applicable fund earnings 314

305-80 Lump sums paid into complying superannuation plans—choice 316

Division 306—Roll-overs etc. 317

Guide to Division 306 317

306-1 What this Division is about 317

Operative provisions 317

306-5 Effect of a roll-over superannuation benefit 317

306-10 Roll-over superannuation benefit 317

306-12 Involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit 318

306-15 Tax on excess untaxed roll-over amounts 319

306-20 Effect of payment to government of unclaimed superannuation money 320

306-25 Payments connected with financial claims scheme to RSAs 320

Division 307—Key concepts relating to superannuation benefits 323

Guide to Division 307 323

307-1 What this Division is about 323

Subdivision 307-A—Superannuation benefits generally 324

307-5 What is a superannuation benefit? 324

307-10 Payments that are not superannuation benefits 329

307-15 Payments for your benefit or at your direction or request 330

Subdivision 307-B—Superannuation lump sums and superannuation income stream benefits 330

307-65 Meaning of superannuation lump sum 330

307-70 Meaning of superannuation income stream and superannuation income stream benefit 331

307-75 Meaning of retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit 331

307-80 When a superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase 332

Subdivision 307-C—Components of a superannuation benefit 333

307-120 Components of superannuation benefit 334

307-125 Proportioning rule 335

307-130 Superannuation guarantee payment consists entirely of taxable component 337

307-133 PPL superannuation contribution payment 337

307-135 Superannuation co-contribution benefit payment consists entirely of tax free component 337

307-140 Contributions-splitting superannuation benefit consists entirely of taxable component 337

307-142 Components of certain unclaimed money payments 338

307-143 Components of a superannuation benefit that is a repayment when an entitlement to a credit ceases for a release authority relating to an FHSS determination 343

307-145 Modification for disability benefits 343

307-150 Modification in respect of superannuation lump sum with element untaxed in fund 344

Subdivision 307-D—Superannuation interests 345

307-200 Regulations relating to meaning of superannuation interests 346

307-205 Value of superannuation interest 347

307-210 Tax free component of superannuation interest 347

307-215 Taxable component of superannuation interest 347

307-220 What is the contributions segment? 347

307-225 What is the crystallised segment? 349

307-230 Total superannuation balance 350

307-230A Total superannuation balance value 352

307-231 Limited recourse borrowing arrangements 353

Subdivision 307-E—Elements taxed and untaxed in the fund of the taxable component of superannuation benefit 355

307-275 Element taxed in the fund and element untaxed in the fund of superannuation benefits 355

307-280 Superannuation benefits from constitutionally protected funds etc. 356

307-285 Trustee can choose to convert element taxed in the fund to element untaxed in the fund 356

307-290 Taxed and untaxed elements of death benefit superannuation lump sums 357

307-295 Superannuation benefits from public sector superannuation schemes may include untaxed element 358

307-297 Public sector superannuation schemes—elements set by regulations 359

307-300 Certain unclaimed money payments 359

Subdivision 307-F—Low rate cap and untaxed plan cap amounts 364

307-345 Low rate cap amount 364

307-350 Untaxed plan cap amount 365

Subdivision 307-G—Other concepts 367

307-400 Meaning of service period for a superannuation lump sum 367

Division 310—Loss relief for merging superannuation funds 369

Guide to Division 310 369

310-1 What this Division is about 369

Operative provisions 370

Subdivision 310-A—Object of this Division 370

310-5 Object 370

Subdivision 310-B—Choice to transfer losses 370

310-10 Original fund’s assets extend beyond life insurance policies and units in pooled superannuation trusts 370

310-15 Original fund’s assets include a complying superannuation life insurance policy 372

310-20 Original fund’s assets include units in a pooled superannuation trust 374

Subdivision 310-C—Consequences of choosing to transfer losses 375

310-25 Who losses can be transferred to 376

310-30 Losses that can be transferred 376

310-35 Effect of transferring a net capital loss 377

310-40 Effect of transferring a tax loss 378

Subdivision 310-D—Choice for assets roll-over 379

310-45 Choosing the assets roll-over 379

310-50 Choosing the form of the assets roll-over 381

Subdivision 310-E—Consequences of choosing assets roll-over 381

310-55 CGT assets—if global asset approach chosen 382

310-60 CGT assets—individual asset approach 382

310-65 Revenue assets—if global asset approach chosen 383

310-70 Revenue assets—individual asset approach 384

310-75 Further consequences for roll-overs involving life insurance companies 384

Subdivision 310-F—Choices 385

310-85 Choices 385

Division 312—Trans-Tasman portability of retirement savings 386

Guide to Division 312 386

312-1 What this Division is about 386

Subdivision 312-A—Preliminary 386

312-5 Division implements Arrangement with New Zealand 386

Subdivision 312-B—Amounts contributed to complying superannuation funds from KiwiSaver schemes 387

312-10 Amounts contributed to complying superannuation funds from KiwiSaver schemes 387

Subdivision 312-C—Superannuation benefits paid to KiwiSaver scheme providers 389

312-15 Superannuation benefits paid from complying superannuation funds to KiwiSaver schemes 389

312-20 Superannuation benefits paid by Commissioner to KiwiSaver schemes 389

Division 313—First home super saver scheme 390

Guide to Division 313 390

313-1 What this Division is about 390

Subdivision 313-A—Preliminary 390

Operative provisions 391

313-5 Object of this Division 391

313-10 Application of this Division 391

Subdivision 313-B—Assessable income and tax offset 391

Guide to Subdivision 313-B 391

313-15 What this Subdivision is about 391

Operative provisions 392

313-20 Amount included in assessable income 392

313-25 Amount of the tax offset 393

Subdivision 313-C—Purchasing or constructing a residential premises 393

Guide to Subdivision 313-C 393

313-30 What this Subdivision is about 393

Operative provisions 393

313-35 Purchasing or constructing a residential premises 393

313-40 Notifying Commissioner 395

Subdivision 313-D—Contributing amounts to superannuation 395

Guide to Subdivision 313-D 395

313-45 What this Subdivision is about 395

Operative provisions 396

313-50 Contributing amounts to superannuation 396

Subdivision 313-E—First home super saver tax 397

Guide to Subdivision 313-E 397

313-55 What this Subdivision is about 397

Operative provisions 397

313-60 First home super saver tax 397

313-65 When tax is payable—original assessments 398

313-70 When tax is payable—amended assessments 398

313-75 General interest charge 398

Subdivision 313-F—Review of decisions 399

Guide to Subdivision 313-F 399

313-80 What this Subdivision is about 399

Operative provisions 399

313-85 Review rights for decisions made under this Division 399

Chapter 3 — Specialist liability rules

Part 3-25 — Particular kinds of trusts

Division 275 — Australian managed investment trusts: general

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 275

275-A Meaning of managed investment trust

275-B Choice for capital treatment of managed investment trust gains and losses

275-C Carried interests in managed investment trusts

275-L Modification for non-arm’s length income

Guide to Division 275

275-1 What this Division is about

The trustee of certain Australian managed investment trusts may make a choice that certain assets of the trust be dealt with under CGT rules. If the trustee does not make such a choice, those assets will be treated as revenue assets (see Subdivision 275-B).

Gains and profits from carried interests held in entities that are or were Australian managed investment trusts (or certain other trusts) are included in the assessable income of the holder of the interests. The holder is entitled to a deduction from losses from such interests (see Subdivision 275-C).

Subdivision 275-A — Meaning of managed investment trust

Guide to Subdivision 275-A

275-5 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the requirements for a trust to be a managed investment trust in relation to an income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

275-10 Meaning of managed investment trust

275-15 Trusts with wholesale membership

275-20 Widely-held requirements—ordinary case

275-25 Widely-held requirements for registered MIT—special case for entities covered by subsection 275-20(4)

275-30 Closely-held restrictions

275-35 Licensing requirements for unregistered MIS

275-40 MIT participation interest

275-45 Meaning of managed investment trust—every member of trust is a managed investment trust etc.

275-50 Extended definition of managed investment trust—no fund payment made in relation to the income year

275-55 Extended definition of managed investment trust—temporary circumstances outside the control of the trustee

Operative provisions

275-10 Meaning of managed investment trust

(1) A trust is a managed investment trust in relation to an income year if any of the following requirements are met:

the trust is covered under subsection (3) of this section in relation to the income year (ordinary case);

the trust is covered under section 275-45 in relation to the income year (only members of trust are managed investment trusts etc.).

(2) A trust is also a managed investment trust in relation to an income year if any of the following requirements are met:

the trust is covered under section 275-50 in relation to the income year (no fund payment made in relation to the income year);

the trust is covered under section 275-55 in relation to the income year (temporary circumstances outside the control of the trustee).

A trust is covered under this subsection in relation to an income year if:

at the time the trustee of the trust makes the first fund payment in relation to the income year, or at an earlier time in the income year:

the trustee of the trust was an Australian resident; or

the central management and control of the trust was in Australia; and

the trust is not a trust covered by subsection (4) (trading trust etc.) in relation to the income year; and

(c) at the time the payment is made, the trust is a managed investment scheme (within the meaning of section 9 of the Corporations Act 2001); and

at the time the payment is made:

the trust is covered by section 275-15 (trusts with wholesale membership); or

(ii) if the trust is not covered by section 275-15—the trust is registered under section 601EB of the Corporations Act 2001; and

the trust satisfies, in relation to the income year:

(i) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is registered under section 601EB of the Corporations Act 2001 and is covered by section 275-15—either or both of the widely-held requirements in subsections 275-20(1) and 275-25(1); or

(ii) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is so registered and is not covered by section 275-15—either or both of the widely-held requirements in subsections 275-20(2) and 275-25(1); or

(iii) if, at the time the payment is made, the trust is not so registered and is covered by section 275-15—the widely-held requirements in subsection 275-20(1); and

the trust satisfies the closely-held restrictions in subsection 275-30(1) in relation to the income year; and

if the trust is covered by section 275-15 at the time the payment is made—it satisfies the licensing requirements in section 275-35 in relation to the income year.

Trading unit trust or other trust carrying on trading business etc. cannot be managed investment trust

A trust is covered by this subsection in relation to an income year if:

(a) in the case of a unit trust—the trust is a trading trust for the purposes of Division 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the income year; or

(b) in any other case—the trust at any time in the income year:

carried on a trading business (within the meaning of that Division); or

controlled, or was able to control, directly or indirectly, the affairs or operations of another person in respect of the carrying on by that other person of a trading business (within the meaning of that Division).

In determining whether a trust is covered by subsection (4), disregard any interest that the trust has in an AFOF, an ESVCLP or a VCLP unless:

the trust is a general partner of the AFOF, ESVCLP or VCLP; or

the trust has *committed capital in the partnership that, taken together with the sum of the amounts of committed capital in the partnership of any of that partner’s *associates (other than associates to whom subsection (4B) applies), exceeds 30% of the partnership’s committed capital.

This subsection applies to:

an *ADI; or

a life insurance company; or

a public authority:

that is constituted by a law of a State or internal Territory; and

(ii) that carries on life insurance business within the meaning of section 11 of the Life Insurance Act 1995; or

(d) a widely-held complying superannuation fund within the meaning of section 4A of the Pooled Development Funds Act 1992; or

a widely held foreign venture capital fund of funds.

Crown entities etc.

(5) For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(d) and (e), treat an entity as registered under section 601EB of the Corporations Act 2001 at the time the payment is made if at that time the trust is operated by:

an entity that would, but for subsection 5A(4) of that Act (about the Crown not being bound by Chapter 6CA or 7 of that Act), be required under that Act to be a financial services licensee (within the meaning of that Act) whose licence would cover operating such a managed investment scheme; or

an entity that:

is a wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity of a kind mentioned in paragraph (a); and

would, but for any instrument issued by ASIC under that Act that has effect in relation to the entity and operation of the scheme mentioned in paragraph (3)(c), be required under that Act to be a financial services licensee (within the meaning of that Act) whose licence would cover operating such a managed investment scheme.

Start-up and wind-down phases

Treat the requirements in paragraphs (3)(e) and (f) as being satisfied if:

the trust is created during the period:

starting 12 months before the start of the income year; and

ending at the end of the income year; or

the trust ceases to exist during the income year, and was a managed investment trust (disregarding paragraph (a) of this section) in relation to the previous income year.

275-15 Trusts with wholesale membership

A trust is covered by this section at a time if, at that time:

(a) the trust is not required to be registered in accordance with section 601ED of the Corporations Act 2001 (whether or not it is actually so registered) because of subsection 601ED(2) of that Act (no product disclosure statement required) or because it is operated or managed by an entity covered by subsection 275-35(2) (Crown entities); and

(b) the total number of entities that had become a *member of the trust because a financial product or a financial service was provided to, or acquired by, the entity as a retail client (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) is no more than 20; and

the entities mentioned in paragraph (b) have a total MIT participation interest in the trust of no more than 10%.

275-20 Widely-held requirements—ordinary case

The trust satisfies the requirements in this subsection in relation to the income year if, at the time the payment mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is made, the trust has at least 25 *members.

The trust satisfies the requirements in this subsection in relation to the income year if, at the time the payment mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is made:

units in the trust are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange in Australia; or

the trust has at least 50 *members (ignoring objects of a trust).

For the purposes of subsection (1) and paragraph (2)(b), determine the number of *members of the trust as follows:

first, by applying the rules in subsection (5), identify:

the members of the trust that are not entities covered by subsection (4); and

the members of the trust that are entities covered by subsection (4);

next, work out the number of members mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i);

next:

work out the MIT participation interest in the trust of each entity mentioned in subparagraph (a)(ii); and

for each of those entities, multiply the total of its MIT participation interest in the trust by 50 and round the result upwards to the nearest whole number; and

work out the total of the results of subparagraph (ii) for all of those entities;

next, work out the total of the results of paragraphs (b) and (c).

This subsection covers the following kinds of entity:

a life insurance company;

a foreign life insurance company that is regulated under a foreign law;

a complying superannuation fund, a complying approved deposit fund or a *foreign superannuation fund, being a fund that has at least 50 *members;

a pooled superannuation trust that has at least one member that is a complying superannuation fund that has at least 50 members;

a managed investment trust in relation to the income year;

an entity:

that is recognised under a foreign law as being used for collective investment by pooling the contributions of its members as consideration to acquire rights to benefits produced by the entity; and

that has at least 50 members; and

the contributing members of which do not have day-to-day control over the entity’s operation;

an entity, the principal purpose of which is to fund pensions (including disability and similar benefits) for the citizens or other contributors of a foreign country, if:

the entity is a fund established by an *exempt foreign government agency; or

the entity is established under a foreign law for an exempt foreign government agency; or

the entity is a wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity mentioned in subparagraph (i) or (ii);

an investment entity that satisfies all of these requirements:

the entity is wholly-owned by one or more *foreign government agencies, or is a wholly-owned subsidiary of one or more foreign government agencies;

the entity is established using only the public money or public property of the foreign government concerned;

all economic benefits obtained by the entity have passed, or are expected to pass, to the foreign government concerned;

an entity established and wholly-owned by an *Australian government agency, if the capital of the entity, and returns from the investment of that capital, are used for the primary purpose of meeting statutory government liabilities or obligations (such as superannuation liabilities and liabilities arising from compensation or workcover claims);

the Future Fund Board;

a *limited partnership, if, throughout the income year:

at least 95% of the *membership interests in the limited partnership are owned by entities mentioned in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection, or by entities that are wholly-owned by entities so mentioned; and

the remaining membership interests (if any) in the limited partnership are owned by a general partner of the limited partnership that habitually exercises the management power of the limited partnership;

an entity, all the membership interests in which are owned by any of the following:

entities mentioned in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection;

entities that are wholly-owned by entities mentioned in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection;

entities that are covered under this subsection because of a previous operation of this paragraph;

an entity of a kind similar to an entity mentioned in the preceding paragraphs of this subsection as specified in the regulations.

(4A) Any financial assets (within the meaning of the Future Fund Act 2006) held by the *Future Fund Board are taken, for the purposes of subparagraph (4)(k)(ii), to be held by the Future Fund Board in its own right.

The rules are as follows:

if an entity that is not a trust holds interests in the trust indirectly, through a chain of trusts:

treat the entity as a member of the trust; and

do not treat a trust in the chain of trusts as a member of the trust;

do not treat an object of the trust as a member of the trust;

(c) if the trust is mentioned in subparagraph 275-10(3)(d)(i) (trusts with wholesale membership)—do not treat an individual as a member of the trust (other than an individual who became a member of the trust because a financial product or a financial service was provided to, or acquired by, the individual as a wholesale client (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001));

the rules in subsection (7).

For the purposes of paragraph (5)(a), treat an entity covered by subsection (4) as an entity that is not a trust.

The rules are as follows:

treat the following entities as together being one entity:

an individual;

each of his or her *relatives;

each entity acting in the capacity of nominee of an individual mentioned in subparagraph (i) or (ii);

(b) treat the following entities as together being one entity (the notional entity):

an entity that is not an individual;

each entity acting in the capacity of nominee of the entity mentioned in subparagraph (i).

For the purposes of subsection (5), if the entity mentioned in subparagraph (7)(b)(i) is an entity covered by subsection (4), treat the notional entity as an entity covered by subsection (4).

275-25 Widely-held requirements for registered MIT—special case for entities covered by subsection 275-20(4)

The trust satisfies the requirements in this subsection in relation to the income year if:

one or more entities covered by subsection 275-20(4) have a total MIT participation interest in the trust of more than 25% at the time the payment mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is made; and

(b) at no time in the income year does an entity (other than an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4)) have a MIT participation interest in the trust of more than 60%.

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (b):

if:

(i) an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) has a *MIT participation interest (the first interest) in the trust; and

(ii) another entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) also has a MIT participation interest (the second interest) in the trust;

disregard the second interest to the extent that it arises through the existence of the first interest; and

if an entity that is not a trust has a MIT participation interest in the trust because it holds interests in the trust indirectly, through a chain of trusts—do not treat a trust in the chain of trusts as having a MIT participation interest in the trust.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), treat an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) as an entity that is not a trust.

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (b), apply the rules in subsection 275-20(7).

275-30 Closely-held restrictions

The trust satisfies the requirements in this subsection in relation to the income year unless, at any time in the income year, any of the following situations exist:

for a trust mentioned in subparagraph 275-10(3)(d)(i) (trusts with wholesale membership)—10 or fewer persons have a total MIT participation interest in the trust of 75% or more;

if paragraph (a) does not apply—20 or fewer persons have a total MIT participation interest in the trust of 75% or more;

a foreign resident individual has a MIT participation interest in the trust of 10% or more.

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (b):

(a) if an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) has a *MIT participation interest in the trust—treat that entity as not having a MIT participation interest in the trust; and

if an entity that is not a trust has a MIT participation interest in the trust because it holds interests in the trust indirectly, through a chain of trusts:

if the entity is covered by subsection 275-20(4)—do not treat it as having a MIT participation interest in the trust; and

do not treat a trust in the chain of trusts as having a MIT participation interest in the trust.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), treat an entity covered by subsection 275-20(4) as an entity that is not a trust.

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (b), apply the rules in subsection 275-20(7).

275-35 Licensing requirements for unregistered MIS

The trust satisfies the requirements in this section in relation to the income year if, at the time the payment mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is made (the time of the first fund payment for the income year):

the trust is operated or managed by:

(i) a financial services licensee (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) holding an Australian financial services licence whose licence covers it providing financial services (within the meaning of that Act) to wholesale clients (within the meaning of that Act); or

an authorised representative (within the meaning of that Act) of such a financial services licensee; or

the trust is operated or managed by an entity covered by subsection (2); or

the trust is operated or managed by an entity that:

is a wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity covered by subsection (2); and

is an entity covered by subsection (3).

(2) An entity is covered by this subsection if it would, but for subsection 5A(4) of the Corporations Act 2001 (about the Crown not being bound by Chapter 6CA or 7 of that Act), be required under that Act to be a financial services licensee (within the meaning of that Act).

(3) An entity is covered by this subsection if it would, but for any instrument issued by ASIC under the Corporations Act 2001 that has effect in relation to the entity and the operation of the scheme mentioned in paragraph 275-10(3)(c), be required under that Act to be a financial services licensee (within the meaning of that Act).

275-40 MIT participation interest

(1) An entity has a MIT participation interest in a trust if the entity, directly or indirectly:

holds, or has the right to *acquire, interests representing a percentage of the value of the interests in the trust; or

has the control of, or the ability to control, a percentage of the rights attaching to *membership interests in the trust; or

has the right to receive a percentage of any distribution of income that the trust may make.

(2) The MIT participation interest of the entity in the trust is the greatest of the percentages mentioned in paragraphs (1)(a), (b) and (c).

275-45 Meaning of managed investment trust—every member of trust is a managed investment trust etc.

A trust is covered under this section in relation to an income year if:

the condition in paragraph 275-10(3)(a) is satisfied; and

the condition in paragraph 275-10(3)(b) is satisfied; and

either:

the only *members of the trust are entities that are covered by subsection 275-20(4) (other than entities mentioned in paragraph 275-20(4)(f)); or

the only members of the trust are entities that are *managed investment trusts in relation to the income year because of subsection 275-10(2); and

the trust satisfies the licensing requirements in section 275-35 in relation to the income year.

A requirement in paragraph (1)(a) is satisfied if, and only if, it is satisfied:

at the time the trustee of the trust makes the first fund payment in relation to the income year; or

if the trustee does not make such a payment in relation to the income year—at both the start and the end of the income year.

275-50 Extended definition of managed investment trust—no fund payment made in relation to the income year

A trust is covered under this section in relation to an income year if:

the trustee of the trust does not make a fund payment in relation to the income year; and

the trust would be a managed investment trust in relation to the income year if the trustee of the trust had made the first fund payment in relation to the income year on the first day of the income year when it was in existence; and

the trust would be a managed investment trust in relation to the income year if the trustee of the trust had made the first fund payment in relation to the income year on the last day of the income year on which it was in existence.

275-55 Extended definition of managed investment trust—temporary circumstances outside the control of the trustee

A trust is covered under this section in relation to an income year if:

apart from a particular circumstance, the trust would be a managed investment trust in relation to the income year; and

the circumstance is temporary; and

the circumstance arose outside the control of the trustee of the trust; and

it is fair and reasonable to treat the trust as a managed investment trust in relation to the income year, having regard to the following matters:

the matters in paragraphs (a) and (b);

the nature of the circumstance;

the actions (if any) taken by the trustee of the trust to address or remove the circumstance, and the speed with which such actions are taken;

the extent to which treating the trust as a managed investment trust in relation to the income year would increase or reduce the amount of tax otherwise payable by the trustee, the *members of the trust or any other entity;

any other relevant matter.

Subdivision 275-B — Choice for capital treatment of managed investment trust gains and losses

Table of sections

275-100 Consequences of making choice—CGT to be primary code for calculating MIT gains or losses

275-105 Covered assets

275-110 MIT not to be trading trust

275-115 MIT CGT choices

275-120 Consequences of not making choice—revenue account treatment

275-100 Consequences of making choice—CGT to be primary code for calculating MIT gains or losses

The modifications in subsection (2) apply if:

a CGT event happens at a time involving a CGT asset; and

the CGT asset is owned at that time by an entity that is a managed investment trust in relation to the income year in which the time occurs; and

the CGT event happens because the managed investment trust *disposes of, ceases to own or otherwise realises the asset; and

the asset is covered by section 275-105; and

the entity meets the requirement in section 275-110 at the time; and

a choice under section 275-115 covering the entity is in force for the income year in which the time occurs.

Without limiting paragraph (1)(b), if:

a VCLP or an ESVCLP owns a CGT asset at the time referred to in that paragraph; and

at that time, the managed investment trust has an interest in the asset as a limited partner of the VCLP or ESVCLP;

for the purposes of that paragraph, the managed investment trust is taken to own the asset to the extent of that interest.

These provisions do not apply to the CGT event:

sections 6-5 (about ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), and 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans);

(b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes);

section 118-20 (about reducing capital gains if amount otherwise assessable);

Division 70 and section 118-25 (about trading stock).

General exceptions

The provisions referred to in subsection (2) can apply to the CGT event if a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event is disregarded because of one of the provisions in this table:

Trading stock and profit-making undertakings or plans involving land etc.

The provisions referred to in subsection (2) can also apply to the CGT event if:

where the CGT asset is land (including an interest in land), or a right or option to *acquire or *dispose of land (including an interest in land):

the CGT asset is trading stock; or

the circumstances existing at the time of the event would, disregarding this Subdivision, give rise to an amount being included in the assessable income of the entity under section 15-15 or to a deduction for the entity under section 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans); or

where paragraph (a) does not apply:

the managed investment trust acquired the CGT asset in an income year for which the choice mentioned in paragraph (1)(f) was not in force; and

the CGT asset was treated as trading stock in the managed investment trust’s financial report for the most recent income year ending before the start of the income year in which that choice first came into force; and

the CGT asset was treated as trading stock in the income tax return for the managed investment trust for the most recent income year ending before the start of the income year in which that choice first came into force; and

the CGT asset was treated as trading stock in the managed investment trust’s financial report for the most recent income year ending before the time of the event; and

the CGT asset was treated as trading stock in the income tax return for the managed investment trust for the most recent income year ending before the time of the event.

Treatment of outgoings to acquire trading stock

The modifications in subsection (6) apply if:

an entity that is a managed investment trust in relation to the income year *acquires a CGT asset at a time in that income year; and

the CGT asset is an item of trading stock; and

(c) the CGT asset is not land (including an interest in land), or a right or option to acquire or *dispose of land (including an interest in land); and

the entity incurs an outgoing in connection with acquiring the asset; and

the asset is covered by section 275-105; and

the entity meets the requirement in section 275-110 at the time; and

a choice under section 275-115 covering the entity is in force for the income year in which the time occurs.

The modifications are as follows:

section 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct) does not apply to the *acquisition;

Division 70 (about trading stock) does not apply in relation to the asset in respect of:

the income year in which the time occurs; and

any later income year in relation to which the entity is a managed investment trust and throughout which the entity meets the requirement in section 275-110.

275-105 Covered assets

An asset is covered by this section if it is any of the following:

a *share in a company (including a share in a foreign hybrid company);

a non-share equity interest in a company;

a unit in a unit trust;

land (including an interest in land);

a right or option to *acquire or *dispose of an asset of a kind mentioned in paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d).

(2) However, the asset is not covered by this section if it is any of the following:

a *Division 230 financial arrangement;

a *debt interest.

275-110 MIT not to be trading trust

(1) An entity that is a trust meets the requirement in this section at a time if the entity is not, at that time, a trading trust for the purposes of Division 6C of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to that income year.

If, apart from a particular circumstance, a trust would meet the requirement in subsection (1) at a time, the trust also meets the requirement in this section at a time if:

the circumstance is temporary; and

the circumstance arose outside the control of the trustee of the trust; and

(c) the trustee of the trust is not liable to pay income tax on the net income of the trust under section 102S of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the income year in which the time occurs; and

it is fair and reasonable to treat the trust as meeting the requirement in this section at that time, having regard to the following matters:

the matters in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c);

the nature of the circumstance;

the actions (if any) taken by the trustee of the trust to address or remove the circumstance, and the speed with which such actions are taken;

the extent to which treating the trust as meeting the requirement in this section at that time would increase or reduce the amount of tax otherwise payable by the trustee, the beneficiaries of the trust or any other entity;

any other relevant matter.

275-115 MIT CGT choices

The trustee of an entity that is a managed investment trust may make a choice under this section that covers the managed investment trust.

The choice must be made in the approved form.

The choice can be made only:

(a) if the entity became a *managed investment trust in the 2009-10 income year or a later income year (whether or not the entity existed before it became a managed investment trust)—on or before the latest of the following days:

the day it is required to lodge its income tax return for the income year in which it became a managed investment trust;

if the Commissioner allows a later day for the managed investment trust—that later day; or

(b) otherwise—on or before the latest of the following days:

the last day in the 3 month period starting on the day on which this section commences;

the last day of the 2009-10 income year;

if the Commissioner allows a later day for the managed investment trust—that later day.

The choice, once made, cannot be revoked.

The choice is in force:

in the circumstances mentioned in paragraph (3)(a)—for the income year in which the entity became a managed investment trust (whether or not the entity existed before it became a managed investment trust) and later income years; or

in the circumstances mentioned in paragraph (3)(b)—for the 2008-09 income year and later income years.

275-120 Consequences of not making choice—revenue account treatment

This section applies if:

the requirements in subsection 275-100(1) are met in relation to a CGT asset held by a managed investment trust, apart from the requirement in paragraph 275-100(1)(f); and

the CGT asset is not:

land (including an interest in land); or

a right or option to *acquire or *dispose of land (including an interest in land); and

the managed investment trust disposes of, ceases to own or otherwise realises the asset; and

disregarding this section:

the net proceeds (if any) from the disposal, cessation or realisation would not be reflected in an amount being included in the assessable income of the managed investment trust (other than under Part 3-1 or 3-3); and

the gain or profit (if any) on the disposal, cessation or realisation would not be reflected in an amount being included in the assessable income of the managed investment trust (other than under Part 3-1 or 3-3); and

the loss (if any) on the disposal, cessation or realisation would not be reflected in an amount being deductible by the managed investment trust.

For the purposes of this Act, treat the disposal, cessation of ownership of or realisation of the asset in the same way as the disposal, cessation of ownership of or realisation of a revenue asset.

Subdivision 275-C — Carried interests in managed investment trusts

Table of sections

275-200 Gains and losses etc. from carried interests in managed investment trusts reflected in assessable income or deduction

275-200 Gains and losses etc. from carried interests in managed investment trusts reflected in assessable income or deduction

This section applies if:

you hold a CGT asset in an income year that carries an entitlement to a distribution from an entity; and

the entitlement to such a distribution is contingent upon the attainment of profits by the entity; and

the entity satisfies any of these requirements:

it is a managed investment trust in relation to the income year;

it was a managed investment trust in relation to a previous income year; and

you acquired the asset because of services you or your associate provided, or will provide, to the entity; and

you or your associate provided, or will provide, those services:

as a manager of the entity; or

as an associate of a manager of the entity; or

as an employee of a manager of the entity; or

as an associate of an employee of a manager of the entity; and

any of the following apply:

you become entitled in the income year to such a distribution (regardless of whether the distribution is made immediately, or is to be made in the future);

a CGT event happens in relation to the asset in the income year.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), in determining whether the entity satisfies any of the requirements mentioned in that paragraph:

disregard paragraph 275-10(3)(b) (requirement of not being a trading trust etc.); and

(b) disregard subsection 102T(16) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (exclusion of public trading trust etc.).

Include in your assessable income for the income year:

the amount of the distribution (except to the extent that it represents a return of capital that you or your associate contributed in order for you to *acquire the asset); or

the amount of your gain or profit (if any) on the CGT event.

Subsection (2) does not apply to the extent that the amount is included in your assessable income as:

ordinary income under section 6-5; or

statutory income under a section of this Act, other than a provision in Part 3-1 or 3-3.

An amount to which subsection (2) applies is taken, for the purposes of the income tax laws, to have a source in Australia. For the purposes of this subsection, disregard subsection (3).

You are entitled to a deduction for the income year for the amount of your loss (if any) on the CGT event.

Subsection (5) does not apply to the extent that you can deduct the amount under another provision of this Act.

Subdivision 115-C does not apply to the amount of a distribution mentioned in subparagraph (1)(f)(i) if:

that amount is included in your assessable income under subsection (2); or

(b) an amount referable to that amount is included in your assessable income under Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 275-L — Modification for non-arm’s length income

Guide to Subdivision 275-L

275-600 What this Subdivision is about

The trustee of a managed investment trust in relation to an income year is taxed on amounts related to the managed investment trust’s non-arm’s length income for the income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

275-605 Trustee taxed on amount of non-arm’s length income of managed investment trust

275-610 Non-arm’s length income

275-615 Commissioner’s determination in relation to amount of non-arm’s length income

Operative provisions

275-605 Trustee taxed on amount of non-arm’s length income of managed investment trust

Subsections (2), (3) and (4) apply if the Commissioner has made a determination under section 275-615 that specifies an amount of *non-arm’s length income for a specified managed investment trust in relation to a specified income year.

Excess amount to be taxed

The trustee of the managed investment trust is liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount mentioned in subsection (5).

Note: The rate is set out in subsection 12(10) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

Excess amount to be adjusted

If the trust is an *AMIT for the income year:

if paragraph (b) does not apply—treat the trust as having an *over in the income year in which the determination is made, for the specified income year, of a character relating to ordinary income, or statutory income, from an *Australian source, equal to the amount mentioned in subsection (5); or

if the trust already has such an over in the income year in which the determination is made, for the specified income year—increase the amount of that over by the amount mentioned in subsection (5).

(4) If the trust is not an *AMIT for the income year, reduce the trust’s *net income for the income year in which the determination is made by the amount mentioned in subsection (5), to the extent that the net income is attributable to that amount.

Excess amount

The amount is the excess mentioned in paragraph 275-610(1)(b) in respect of the *non-arm’s length income, reduced by deductions (if any) that:

are reflected in:

if the trust is an *AMIT for the income year—the amounts of its *trust components for the income year (disregarding subsection (3)); or

otherwise—its *net income for the income year (disregarding subsection (4)); and

are attributable only to the amount of non-arm’s length income.

275-610 Non-arm’s length income

(1) An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is non-arm’s length income of a *managed investment trust if:

it is derived from a *scheme the parties to which were not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the scheme; and

that amount exceeds the amount that the entity might have been expected to derive if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme; and

the amount is none of the following:

a distribution from a corporate tax entity;

(ii) a distribution from a trust that is not a party to the scheme mentioned in paragraph (a);

a *return covered by subsection (2).

Disregard subparagraph (1)(c)(ii) if the amount of ordinary income or statutory income is excepted MIT CSA income.

This subsection covers a *return that an entity pays or provides on a *debt interest, if the rate (expressed on an annual basis) of the return does not exceed the greater of:

the *benchmark rate of return for the interest; and

the base interest rate for the day on which the return is paid or provided, plus 3 percentage points.

Subsection (4) applies if:

an amount would be *non-arm’s length income of the managed investment trust (disregarding that subsection); and

the amount is a distribution from a trust, or a share of the *net income of a trust, if the trust is a party to the scheme mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

The amount is *non-arm’s length income of the managed investment trust only to the extent that the distribution or share of *net income is attributable to non-arm’s length income of the trust mentioned in paragraph (3)(b) (on that assumption that the trust were a managed investment trust) because of another operation of this section.

Subsection (6) applies if:

(a) an amount (the first amount) of *ordinary income or *statutory income of the *managed investment trust that would be *non-arm’s length income of the managed investment trust (disregarding that subsection) is:

a distribution from a trust that is a party to the scheme mentioned in paragraph (1)(a); or

a share of the *net income of a trust that is a party to that scheme; and

(b) another amount (the second amount) of ordinary income or statutory income of the managed investment trust is:

a distribution from another trust (whether or not the other trust is a party to that scheme); or

a share of the net income of another trust (whether or not the other trust is a party to that scheme); and

it is reasonable to conclude that the second amount would have been higher but for the first amount.

(6) The first amount is not *non-arm’s length income of the *managed investment trust to the extent that the second amount would have been higher as mentioned in paragraph (5)(c).

275-615 Commissioner’s determination in relation to amount of non-arm’s length income

The Commissioner may make a determination in writing that specifies an amount of *non-arm’s length income for a specified managed investment trust in relation to a specified income year if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

the amount of non-arm’s length income for the managed investment trust in relation to the income year is reflected in:

if the trust is an *AMIT for the income year—one or more of its *trust components for the income year; or

otherwise—its *net income for the income year; and

the managed investment trust is a party to the *scheme mentioned in paragraph 275-610(1)(a) at a time in the income year in which the amount is derived; and

(c) at least one of the parties to that scheme is not a managed investment trust in relation to the income year.

Disregard paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) if the amount of *non-arm’s length income is excepted MIT CSA income.

Determination does not form part of assessment

A determination under subsection (1) does not form part of an assessment.

Notice by Commissioner of determination

If the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must give a copy of the determination to the managed investment trust concerned.

Evidence of determination

The production of:

a notice of a determination; or

a document signed by the Commissioner, a Second Commissioner or a Deputy Commissioner purporting to be a copy of a determination;

is:

conclusive evidence of the due making of the determination; and

(d) conclusive evidence that the determination is correct (except in proceedings under Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 on an appeal or review relating to the determination).

Objections

(5) If an entity to whom a determination relates is dissatisfied with the determination, the entity may object against it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 276 — Australian managed investment trusts: attribution managed investment trusts

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 276

276-A What is an attribution managed investment trust?

276-B Member’s vested and indefeasible interest in share of income and capital of AMIT

276-C Taxation etc. of member components

276-D Member components

276-E Trust components

276-F Unders and overs

276-G Shortfall and excess taxation

276-H AMMA statements

276-J Debt-like trust instruments

276-K Ceasing to be an AMIT

Guide to Division 276

276-1 What this Division is about

A managed investment trust in relation to an income year is an attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT) for the income year if certain criteria are satisfied. In particular, for the trust to be an AMIT, the interests of the members of the trust need to be clearly defined at all times during which the trust is in existence in the income year (see Subdivision 276-A).

An AMIT for an income year is treated as a fixed trust. A member of the AMIT in respect of the income year is treated as having a vested and indefeasible interest in a share of the income and capital of the AMIT throughout the income year (see Subdivision 276-B).

Amounts related to income and tax offsets of an AMIT, determined by the trustee to be of a particular tax character, are attributed to members, generally retaining that tax character (see Subdivision 276-C).

Underestimates and overestimates of amounts at the trust level are carried forward and dealt with in later years. This is done on a character-by-character basis. An underestimate in an income year of a particular character results in an under of that character. An overestimate results in an over of that character. Unders and overs arise, and are dealt with, in the income year in which they are discovered (see Subdivision 276-F).

The trustee of an AMIT is liable to pay income tax on certain amounts reflecting under-attribution of income or over-attribution of tax offsets (see Subdivision 276-G).

Special rules apply to a trust that ceases to be an AMIT (see Subdivision 276-K).

Subdivision 276-A — What is an attribution managed investment trust?

Guide to Subdivision 276-A

276-5 What this Subdivision is about

A managed investment trust in relation to an income year is an attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT) for the income year if certain criteria are satisfied. In particular:

the interests of the members of the trust need to be clearly defined at all times when the trust is in existence in the income year; and

the trustee of the trust needs to have made a choice for the trust to be an AMIT in respect of that income year or an earlier income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

276-10 Meaning of attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT)

276-15 Clearly defined interests

276-20 Trust with classes of membership interests—each class treated as separate AMIT

Operative provisions

276-10 Meaning of attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT)

(1) A trust is an attribution managed investment trust (or AMIT) for an income year if:

the trust is a managed investment trust in relation to the income year; and

the rights to income and capital arising from each of the *membership interests in the trust are clearly defined (see section 276-15) at all times when the trust is in existence in the income year; and

if the regulations specify criteria for the purposes of this paragraph—those criteria are satisfied in relation to the trust; and

either:

the trustee of the trust has made a choice for the purposes of this subparagraph in respect of that income year; or

the trust was an AMIT for an earlier income year.

A choice for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(e)(i) cannot be revoked.

276-15 Clearly defined interests

Without limiting the circumstances in which the rights to income and capital arising from the *membership interests in a trust are clearly defined for the purposes of paragraph 276-10(1)(b), treat such rights as being clearly defined at a particular time for those purposes if any of the following conditions are satisfied at that time:

(a) the trust is registered under section 601EB of the Corporations Act 2001;

the rights to income and capital arising from each of the membership interests in the trust are the same.

For the purposes of working out whether the condition in paragraph (1)(b) is satisfied, disregard the following:

fees or charges imposed by the trustee on the *members of the trust;

issue and redemption prices of *membership interests in the trust;

exposure of the membership interests in the trust to foreign exchange gains and losses.

276-20 Trust with classes of membership interests—each class treated as separate AMIT

Subsections (2) and (3) apply if:

the *membership interests in an *AMIT for an income year are divided into classes; and

the rights arising from each of those membership interests in a particular class are the same as the rights arising from every other of those membership interests in that class; and

each of those membership interests in a particular class is distinct from each of those membership interests in another class; and

the trustee of the AMIT has made a choice for the purposes of this paragraph that applies to the income year.

For the purposes of this Division (other than this Subdivision), treat each class of those *membership interests in the *AMIT as being a separate AMIT for that income year.

For the purposes of this Division, allocate assessable income, exempt income, non-assessable non-exempt income, *tax losses, *net capital losses and other similar amounts in respect of the *AMIT between each of the separate classes mentioned in subsection (1) on a fair and reasonable basis.

Making of choice by trustee

A choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(d) applies to the income year for which it is made and every subsequent income year.

A choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(d) cannot be revoked.

Subdivision 276-B — Member’s vested and indefeasible interest in share of income and capital of AMIT

Guide to Subdivision 276-B

276-50 What this Subdivision is about

An AMIT for an income year is treated as a fixed trust. A member of the AMIT in respect of the income year is treated as having a vested and indefeasible interest in a share of the income and capital of the AMIT throughout the income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

276-55 AMIT taken to be fixed trust and member taken to have vested and indefeasible interest in income and capital

Operative provisions

276-55 AMIT taken to be fixed trust and member taken to have vested and indefeasible interest in income and capital

For the purposes of this Act:

treat an *AMIT for an income year as a *fixed trust; and

(b) treat an entity that is a *member of the AMIT in respect of the income year as having a vested and indefeasible interest in a share of the income and capital of the AMIT throughout the income year.

Subdivision 276-C — Taxation etc. of member components

Guide to Subdivision 276-C

276-75 What this Subdivision is about

Amounts related to income and tax offsets of an AMIT, of a particular tax character, are attributed to members of the AMIT on the basis of their determined member components of that tax character.

This attribution does not apply to the extent that amounts have been withheld etc. in relation to those components under Subdivision 12-F, 12-H or 12A-C in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

The trustee of an AMIT that is not a withholding MIT may be liable to pay income tax in respect of a determined member component of a foreign resident member (including where that member is acting in the capacity of a trustee). As a result, the member may be entitled to a tax offset.

Table of sections

Taxation etc. of member on determined member components

276-80 Member’s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components—general rules

276-85 Member’s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components—specific rules

276-90 Commissioner’s determination as to status of member as qualified person

276-95 Relationship between section 276-80 and withholding rules

276-100 Relationship between section 276-80 and other charging provisions in this Act

Foreign resident members—taxation of trustee and corresponding tax offset for members

276-105 Trustee taxed on foreign resident’s determined member components

276-110 Refundable tax offset for foreign resident member—member that is not a trustee

Special rule for interposed custodian

276-115 Custodian interposed between AMIT and member

Taxation etc. of member on determined member components

276-80 Member’s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components—general rules

Components of income character

Subsection (2) applies if a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year has, for the income year, a determined member component of:

a character relating to assessable income; or

a character relating to exempt income; or

a character relating to non-assessable non-exempt income.

For the purpose of working out the effects mentioned in subsection (3) for the *member, treat the member as having derived, received or made the amount reflected in the determined member component:

in the member’s own right (rather than as a member of a trust); and

in the same circumstances as the *AMIT derived, received or made that amount, to the extent that those circumstances gave rise to the particular character of that component.

The effects are as follows:

including an amount in the assessable income of the *member;

including an amount in the exempt income of the member;

including an amount in the non-assessable non-exempt income of the member;

determining whether the member has made a *capital gain from a CGT event;

determining the extent to which the member’s net capital loss has been *utilised.

Components of tax offset character

Subsection (5) applies if a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year has, for the income year, a determined member component of a character relating to a tax offset.

For the purpose of working out the effects mentioned in subsection (6) for the *member, treat the member as having paid or received the amount reflected in the determined member component:

in the member’s own right (rather than as a member of a trust); and

in the same circumstances as the *AMIT paid or received that amount.

The effects are as follows:

entitling the member to a tax offset;

(b) entitling the member to a credit under Division 18 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

276-85 Member’s assessable income or tax offsets for determined member components—specific rules

This section makes clarifications and modifications of the operation of section 276-80 in respect of a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year.

For the purposes of this Act, if an amount is included in the *member’s assessable income because of the operation of this section, treat that amount as being so included because of the operation of subsection 276-80(2).

Discount capital gains

Subsection (4) applies if the *member has, for the income year, a determined member component of the character of:

a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property; or

(b) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

For the purposes of section 276-80 and this section, treat the amount of the component as being double what it would be apart from this subsection.

Franking credit gross-up

(5) Subsection (6) applies if the *member has, for the income year, a *determined member component (the franking credit gross-up component) of the character of assessable income under subsection 207-20(1) (franking credit gross-up).

For the purposes of subsection 207-20(1) (franking credit gross-up), treat the reference in that subsection to the amount of the franking credit on the distribution as instead being a reference to the amount of the franking credit gross-up component.

Limitation on circumstances in paragraph 276-80(2)(b)

The circumstances mentioned in paragraph 276-80(2)(b) or (5)(b) do not include the following:

the residence of the trustee of the *AMIT;

the place of the central management and control of the AMIT.

276-90 Commissioner’s determination as to status of member as qualified person

Subsection (2) applies to a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year if:

the AMIT is specified in a determination under subsection (3); and

the income year is specified in the determination; and

the member:

is specified in the determination; or

is included in a class of members specified in the determination.

(2) Treat the *member as not being a qualified person in relation to a distribution in relation to the *AMIT for the income year, for the purposes of Division 1A of former Part IIIAA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

For the purposes of this section, the Commissioner may make a determination in writing that identifies any of the following:

a specified *member of a specified *AMIT;

a specified class of members of a specified AMIT.

The determination may specify one or more income years.

In deciding whether to make a determination under subsection (3), the Commissioner may have regard to any of the following:

arrangements (if any) entered into by the *member that directly or indirectly reduce the economic exposure of the member to changes in the value of the *membership interests held by the member in the *AMIT;

the lack of such arrangements;

the length of time that the member has been a member of the AMIT;

any other matter that the Commissioner considers relevant.

A determination under subsection (3) is not a legislative instrument.

(7) If an entity to whom a determination relates is dissatisfied with the determination, the entity may object against it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

276-95 Relationship between section 276-80 and withholding rules

(1) Subsection 276-80(2) does not apply to the extent that the *determined member component is reflected in an *AMIT DIR payment or a *fund payment, if an amount in respect of the payment:

(a) has been withheld from the payment under Subdivision 12-F or 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; or

would be so withheld apart from an exemption from a requirement to withhold under Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule; or

has been paid under Division 12A in that Schedule; or

would be so paid apart from an exemption from a requirement to withhold under Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule.

However, if the determined member component is reflected in a fund payment, subsection (1) applies only to the extent to which an amount attributable to the fund payment is treated under section 840-815 as not assessable income and not exempt income.

Subsection 276-80(2) does not affect the operation of the following:

(a) Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

Subdivision 840-M of this Act;

(c) Division 12 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note: See Division 12A in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for provisions about withholding tax that apply specifically to AMITs.

276-100 Relationship between section 276-80 and other charging provisions in this Act

This section applies if:

an amount is included in the assessable income of a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year in respect of the member’s interest in the AMIT; and

that amount is so included otherwise than because of the operation of subsection 276-80(2).

Reduce the amount included in the assessable income of the *member as mentioned in subsection (1) to the extent (if any) that a corresponding amount is included in the assessable income of the member in respect of the member’s interest in the *AMIT because of the operation of subsection 276-80(2).

To avoid doubt, this section is subject to section 230-20 (financial arrangements).

Foreign resident members—taxation of trustee and corresponding tax offset for members

276-105 Trustee taxed on foreign resident’s determined member components

This section applies if:

a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year has, for the income year, a determined member component of a character relating to assessable income in respect of the AMIT; and

either:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—the member is a foreign resident at the end of the income year; or

if the member is, in respect of that determined member component, a beneficiary in the capacity of a trustee of another trust—a trustee of the other trust is a foreign resident at the end of the income year; and

the AMIT is not a withholding MIT.

The trustee of the *AMIT is to be assessed and is liable to pay income tax:

(a) if subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies and the *member is not a company—in respect of the amount mentioned in subsection (3) as if it were the income of an individual and were not subject to any deduction; or

if subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies and the member is a company—in respect of the amount mentioned in subsection (3) at the rate declared by the Parliament for the purposes of this paragraph; or

if subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) applies—in respect of the amount mentioned in subsection (4) or (5) at the rate declared by the Parliament for the purposes of this paragraph.

Note: The rates are set out in the following provisions:

(a) for paragraph (a)—subsection 12(6A) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 and Schedule 10A to that Act;

for paragraph (b)—paragraph 28A(a) of that Act;

for paragraph (c)—paragraph 28A(b) of that Act.

The amount is the determined member component, to the extent that the component:

is attributable to a period when the *member was an Australian resident; or

is attributable to a period when the member was not an Australian resident and is attributable to sources in Australia.

The amount is the determined member component, to the extent that the component is attributable to sources in Australia.

For the purposes of subsection (4), treat the entire amount of the determined member component as not being attributable to sources in Australia if it is of the character of:

a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property; or

a *capital gain (other than a discount capital gain) from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

Exception for component reflected in AMIT DIR payment or fund payment

(6) Subsection (2) does not apply to the extent that the *determined member component is reflected in an *AMIT DIR payment or a *fund payment, if an amount in respect of the payment:

(a) has been withheld from the payment under Subdivision 12-F or 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; or

would be so withheld apart from an exemption from a requirement to withhold under Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule; or

has been paid under Division 12A in that Schedule; or

would be so paid apart from an exemption from a requirement to withhold under Subdivision 12-F in that Schedule.

Gross-up for discount capital gain

Subsection (8) applies if a determined member component is of the character of:

a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property; or

(b) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

For the purposes of this section, treat the amount of the component as being double what it would be apart from this subsection.

276-110 Refundable tax offset for foreign resident member—member that is not a trustee

This section applies if a trustee is assessed and liable to pay income tax under section 276-105 in respect of a *member because of paragraph 276-105(2)(a) or (b).

The *member is entitled to a tax offset for the income year equal to the tax paid by the trustee in accordance with subsection 276-105(2).

Note: The tax offset is subject to the refundable tax offset rules: see section 67-23.

Special rule for interposed custodian

276-115 Custodian interposed between AMIT and member

This section applies if:

a trust that is a custodian is a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year; and

the custodian has, for the income year, a determined member component of a particular character for the AMIT; and

(c) the custodian is interposed between the AMIT and another entity (the subsequent recipient); and

the subsequent recipient:

starts to have, at a time in the income year, an entitlement to an amount that is reasonably attributable to all or part of the determined member component; or

would start to have, at a time in the income year, such an entitlement if the determined member component were an actual payment of an amount.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, reduce the custodian’s determined member component by the amount of the entitlement mentioned in subparagraph (1)(d)(i) or (ii).

Note: This subsection may operate to reduce the amount of the determined member component multiple times if there is more than one subsequent recipient in respect of which the requirements in paragraphs (1)(c) and (d) are satisfied.

For the purposes of this Subdivision:

treat the subsequent recipient as being a *member of the *AMIT in respect of the income year; and

treat the subsequent recipient as having, for the income year, a determined member component for the AMIT that:

is of the character mentioned in paragraph (1)(b); and

is equal to the amount of the entitlement mentioned in subparagraph (1)(d)(i) or (ii).

Subdivision 276-D — Member components

Guide to Subdivision 276-D

276-200 What this Subdivision is about

A member’s member component of a particular character is so much of an AMIT’s determined trust component of that character (see Subdivision 276-E) as is attributable to membership interests held by the member, worked out in accordance with certain requirements.

A member’s determined member component of a particular character is the amount stated to be the member’s member component of that character in an AMMA statement (see Subdivision 276-H).

Table of sections

Member-level concepts

276-205 Meaning of determined member component

276-210 Meaning of member component

Member-level concepts

276-205 Meaning of determined member component

(1) The determined member component of a particular character for an income year of a *member of an *AMIT in respect of the income year is the amount of the member’s *member component of that character as reflected in the AMIT’s latest *AMMA statement for the member for the income year.

Subsection (3) applies if:

the *member makes a choice for the purposes of this paragraph that complies with subsection (5); and

the member gives a copy of the choice to the Commissioner within 4 months after:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—the end of the member’s income year; or

if the *AMIT gives the member a revised *AMMA statement for the income year at a time after the end of that income year—that time; and

the member gives a notice of the choice, in accordance with subsection (7), to the trustee of the AMIT within those 4 months.

(3) Despite subsection (1), if the *determined member component of that character for the income year (disregarding this subsection) does not accord with subsections 276-210(2), (3) and (4), that determined member component is instead the member’s *member component of that character for the income year.

For the purposes of subsection (3), in working out the member’s member component of that character for the income year, if the *trust component of that character differs from the determined trust component of that character, treat the references in section 276-210 to determined trust component as instead being references to trust component.

Example: The determined trust component exceeds the trust component because of an unintentional mistake by the trustee of the AMIT. As a result, a member’s corresponding determined member component under subsection (1) exceeds what it would have been if the trustee had not made the mistake.

If the member makes a choice under subsection (2), the amount of the determined member component will be determined according to the amount of the trust component.

The choice must:

be in writing; and

state the following matters:

the income year to which the choice relates;

what the *member considers to be the member’s member component of that character for the income year;

(iii) the reason why the member considers that the *determined member component of that character for the income year does not accord with subsections 276-210(2), (3) and (4).

The way the *member’s income tax return is prepared is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

The notice must:

be in writing; and

state the matters mentioned in paragraph (5)(b).

276-210 Meaning of member component

This section applies to a *member of an *AMIT in respect of an income year and sets out how to work out the member’s *member components for the year.

Meaning of member component

(2) The *member’s member component of a character is so much of the *AMIT’s *determined trust component of that character as is attributable to the *membership interests in the AMIT held by the member, worked out in accordance with the requirements in subsections (3) and (4).

Attribution must be fair and reasonable and accord with constituent documents

The attribution must be worked out on a fair and reasonable basis, in accordance with the constituent documents of the *AMIT. This requirement is subject to the requirement in subsection (4).

Attribution must not involve streaming of character amounts

(4) The attribution must not attribute any part of a *determined trust component of a particular character to a *member’s *membership interests because of the tax characteristics of the member.

Safe harbour rules

Without limiting the scope of the requirements in subsection (3) and (4), an amount does not fail to be worked out in accordance with those requirements as mentioned in subsection (2) merely because the amount reflects the fact that:

the constituent documents of the *AMIT give the trustee of the AMIT the power to direct an amount arising from the sale of an asset to a particular *member, if:

the member redeems one or more *membership interests in the AMIT; and

the direction of the amount is made to fund the redemption; and

the trustee exercises that power.

Without limiting the scope of the requirements in subsection (3) and (4), an amount does not fail to be worked out in accordance with those requirements as mentioned in subsection (2) merely because the amount reflects the fact that:

either:

an amount of an *under, relating to a base year (as mentioned in subsection 276-345(1)) increases a *trust component of the *AMIT for a later income year under section 276-305; or

an amount of an *over, relating to a base year (as mentioned in subsection 276-345(1)) decreases a trust component of the AMIT for a later income year under section 276-305; and

(b) an entity is a *member of the AMIT at a time in the later income year, but was not a member of the AMIT in respect of the base year.

Without limiting the scope of the requirements in subsection (3) and (4), an amount does not fail to be worked out in accordance with those requirements as mentioned in subsection (2) merely because the amount reflects the fact that:

the trustee made a *capital gain or *capital loss in an income year (for the purposes of working out the amount of a *trust component of the *AMIT for an income year in accordance with the rules in section 276-265); and

(b) an entity was a *member of the AMIT in respect of the income year, but was not a member of the AMIT at the time the capital gain or capital loss was made.

Subdivision 276-E — Trust components

Guide to Subdivision 276-E

276-250 What this Subdivision is about

An AMIT’s trust component of a particular character is worked out on the basis of the AMIT’s assessable income, exempt income, non-assessable non-exempt income and tax offsets (on the assumption that the AMIT were an Australian resident liable to pay tax).

An AMIT’s determined trust component of a particular character is the amount stated to be its trust component of that character in a document that meets certain requirements.

Table of sections

Trust-level concepts

276-255 Meaning of determined trust component

276-260 Meaning of trust component

276-265 Rules for working out trust components—general rules

276-270 Rules for working out trust components—allocation of deductions

Trust-level concepts

276-255 Meaning of determined trust component

(1) An *AMIT’s determined trust component of a particular character for an income year is the amount stated to be its *trust component of that character in a document that meets the requirements in subsection (2).

The requirements are as follows:

the document was created by the *AMIT;

the document states expressly the amount of the *trust component;

at a time after the document was created, the AMIT sent *AMMA statements for the income year to entities that were *members of the AMIT in respect of the income year;

the amount of the trust component stated in the document reflects the amount of the *determined member components reflected in those AMMA statements.

If, apart from this subsection, there are 2 or more documents that meet the requirements in subsection (2), treat the most recently created of those documents as being the only document that meets those requirements.

Example: The income year for the AMIT ends on 30 June. The trustee creates a document stating the amount for the income year on 1 July. It sends all AMMA statements on 10 July. The trustee creates another document stating a different amount for the income year on 1 September. It sends revised AMMA statements reflecting that amount on 10 September. The document created on 1 September is the only document that meets the requirements in this section in respect of the amount for the income year.

276-260 Meaning of trust component

The object of this section is to ensure that an *AMIT’s amounts of assessable income, exempt income, non-assessable non-exempt income and *tax offsets for an income year are allocated, according to their character, into separate components for the purposes of this Act.

(2) An *AMIT’s trust component for an income year:

of a character relating to assessable income; or

of a character relating to exempt income; or

of a character relating to non-assessable non-exempt income; or

of a character relating to a tax offset;

is the amount of that character for the income year worked out for the AMIT in accordance with the rules in sections 276-265 and 276-270.

This section is subject to Subdivision 276-F (which deals with the effect of *unders and *overs).

The rules in sections 276-265 and 276-270 apply only for the purposes of determining the amounts of *trust components.

276-265 Rules for working out trust components—general rules

General taxability and residence assumptions to be made

Work out the amount of the *trust component of each character in relation to the *AMIT assuming that the AMIT’s trustee:

was liable to pay *tax; and

was an Australian resident.

Trust components of assessable income character are net of deductions

The sum of all of the *trust components of a character relating to assessable income of the *AMIT for the income year equals the total assessable income of the AMIT for the income year, reduced by all deductions of the AMIT for the year. To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this subsection, apply subsection (1).

However, if that total assessable income does not exceed those deductions, the amount of each *trust component of a character relating to assessable income of the *AMIT for the income year is nil.

276-270 Rules for working out trust components—allocation of deductions

An amount of a deduction that relates directly only to one or more amounts of assessable income can be deducted only against that amount or those amounts of assessable income. If there are 2 or more such amounts of assessable income, the amount of the deduction is allocated against those amounts on a reasonable basis.

If an amount of a deduction remains after applying the rules in subsection (1), the remainder can be deducted against other amounts of assessable income. The amount of the remainder is allocated against those amounts on a reasonable basis.

For the purposes of this section, determine whether a deduction relates directly to an amount of assessable income on a reasonable basis.

Subdivision 276-F — Unders and overs

Guide to Subdivision 276-F

276-300 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out how underestimates and overestimates of amounts at the trust level are carried forward and dealt with in later years. This is generally done on a character-by-character basis.

An underestimate in an income year of a particular character results in an under of that character. An overestimate results in an over of that character.

Unders and overs arise, and are dealt with, in the income year in which they are discovered.

Table of sections

Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs etc.

276-305 Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs

276-310 Rounding adjustment deficit increases trust component

276-315 Rounding adjustment surplus decreases trust component

276-320 Meaning of trust component deficit

276-325 Trust component of character relating to assessable income—adjustment for cross-character allocation amount, carry-forward trust component deficit and FITO allocation amount

276-330 Meaning of cross-character allocation amount and carry-forward trust component deficit

276-335 Meaning of FITO allocation amount

276-340 Trust component character relating to tax offset—taxation of trust component deficit

Unders and overs

276-345 Meaning of under and over of a character

276-350 Limited discovery period for unders and overs

Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs etc.

276-305 Adjustment of trust component for unders and overs

Object

The object of this section is to adjust an *AMIT’s *trust component of a particular character for an income year to take account of any *unders or *overs of that character that the AMIT has in the income year.

Unders increase trust component

If the *AMIT has an *under of that character in the income year (relating to any earlier income year), increase the amount of the *trust component by that under.

Note: Those earlier income years are referred to in section 276-345 as base years.

Overs decrease trust component

If the *AMIT has an *over of that character in the income year (relating to any earlier income year), decrease the amount of the *trust component by that over.

Note: Those earlier income years are referred to in section 276-345 as base years.

276-310 Rounding adjustment deficit increases trust component

If the *AMIT has a rounding adjustment deficit of that character for the income year, increase the amount of the *trust component by the amount of that rounding adjustment deficit.

(2) The *AMIT has a rounding adjustment deficit of a particular character for an income year if:

the AMIT has a shortfall for the previous income year under subsection 276-415(1); and

the shortfall results wholly or partly from the trustee of the AMIT rounding down amounts in working out *determined member components for the previous income year.

The amount of the rounding adjustment deficit is the amount of the shortfall, to the extent that it results from that rounding down.

276-315 Rounding adjustment surplus decreases trust component

If the *AMIT has a rounding adjustment surplus of that character for the income year, decrease the amount of the *trust component by the amount of that rounding adjustment surplus.

(2) The *AMIT has a rounding adjustment surplus of a particular character for an income year if:

the AMIT has an excess for the previous income year under subsection (3); and

the excess results wholly or partly from the trustee of the AMIT rounding up amounts in working out *determined member components for the previous income year.

The amount of the rounding adjustment surplus is the amount of the excess, to the extent that it results from that rounding up.

The *AMIT has an excess under this subsection for an income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the sum of all the *determined member components of all the *members of the AMIT of a particular character relating to assessable income, exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income for the income year;

exceeds:

the determined trust component of that character of the AMIT for the income year.

276-320 Meaning of trust component deficit

If the amount of the *trust component, worked out after applying sections 276-305, 276-310 and 276-315 (and, if applicable, section 276-325), falls short of nil:

despite those provisions, the *trust component of that character is nil; and

(b) the shortfall is the *AMIT’s trust component deficit of that character for the income year.

276-325 Trust component of character relating to assessable income—adjustment for cross-character allocation amount, carry-forward trust component deficit and FITO allocation amount

Section applies to trust component of assessable income character

This section applies if the *trust component is of a character relating to assessable income.

Cross-character allocation amount decreases trust component

If the *AMIT has a *cross-character allocation amount of that character for the income year, decrease the amount of the *trust component by that amount.

Note: A cross-character allocation amount of a character for the income year is allocated from a trust component deficit of another character for the income year in accordance with subsections 276-330(2), (3) and (4).

Carry-forward trust component deficit decreases trust component

If the *AMIT has a *carry-forward trust component deficit of that character for the income year, decrease the amount of the *trust component by the amount of that deficit.

Note: A carry-forward trust component deficit for the income year is worked out in respect of the previous income year under subsection 276-330(5).

FITO allocation amount increases trust component with the character of foreign source income

If:

(a) the character of the *trust component is a character relating to *ordinary income, or *statutory income, from a source other than an *Australian source; and

the *AMIT has a *FITO allocation amount for the income year;

increase the amount of the trust component by that FITO allocation amount.

Note: A FITO allocation amount for the income year is worked out in accordance with section 276-335.

276-330 Meaning of cross-character allocation amount and carry-forward trust component deficit

Section applies to trust component of assessable income character

This section applies if the *trust component is of a character relating to assessable income.

Cross-character allocation amount

(2) The trustee may, in accordance with subsection (3), allocate a *trust component deficit (if any) of that character for the income year against the *AMIT’s other trust components for that income year that are also of a character relating to assessable income.

For the trustee to make an allocation under subsection (2) the trustee:

must allocate that *trust component deficit between those other *trust components on a reasonable basis; and

cannot allocate more to a trust component than the amount of that trust component.

(4) If the trustee allocates an amount under subsection (2) to a *trust component of a character for that income year, the amount allocated is a cross-character allocation amount of that character for that income year.

Carry-forward trust component deficit

(5) If there is an amount of that *trust component deficit remaining after allocating it in accordance with subsection (2), the remaining amount is the *AMIT’s carry-forward trust component deficit of the character mentioned in subsection (1) for the next income year.

276-335 Meaning of FITO allocation amount

This section applies if:

the *AMIT has a *trust component of the character of foreign income tax paid that counts towards a tax offset under Division 770; and

the AMIT has a *trust component deficit for the income year of that character.

(2) The *AMIT has a FITO allocation amount for the income year equal to the sum of:

that *trust component deficit; and

the product of:

that trust component deficit; and

the *corporate tax gross-up rate.

276-340 Trust component character relating to tax offset—taxation of trust component deficit

This section applies if:

the *AMIT has a *trust component of a character relating to a tax offset; and

(b) the character of the trust component is not the character of *foreign income tax paid that counts towards a tax offset under Division 770; and

the AMIT has a *trust component deficit for the income year of that character.

Offset trust component deficit (other than FITO character) taxed

The trustee of the *AMIT is liable to pay tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount of the *trust component deficit.

Note: The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Attribution Managed Investment Trusts—Offsets) Act 2016 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.

Unders and overs

276-345 Meaning of under and over of a character

(1) This section sets out how to work out the amount (if any) of an *AMIT’s *under or *over of a particular character for an income year (the base year) in a later income year (the discovery year).

(2) The time (the discovery time) at which this is worked out for the discovery year is just before the trustee works out the *determined trust component of that character for the discovery year.

Note: This allows unders and overs to be included in the determined trust component for the discovery year: see section 276-305.

Compare the following amounts:

(a) the *AMIT’s *trust component of that character for the base year, worked out on the basis of the trustee’s knowledge at the discovery time (the discovery year amount);

(b) this amount (the base year running balance):

if the discovery year is the first income year after the base year—the AMIT’s determined trust component of that character for the base year; or

otherwise—the discovery year amount worked out under a previous operation of this section for the most recent income year before the discovery year.

A shortfall is an under

(4) If the base year running balance falls short of the discovery year amount, the amount of the shortfall is an under of that character, for the base year, that the *AMIT has in the discovery year.

An excess is an over

(5) If the base year running balance exceeds the discovery year amount, the amount of the excess is an over of that character, for the base year, that the *AMIT has in the discovery year.

276-350 Limited discovery period for unders and overs

Despite section 276-345, an *AMIT does not have an *under or an *over of a particular character for an income year (the base year) if:

assuming the Commissioner made an assessment of the *trust component of that character on the day on which the document stating the AMIT’s determined trust component of that character for the base year was created; and

assuming the assessment had not been amended at the discovery time mentioned in subsection 276-345(2) for the under or over;

section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 would prevent the assessment from being amended to take account of the under or over.

Note: Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 specifies the usual period within which assessments may be amended.

Subdivision 276-G — Shortfall and excess taxation

Guide to Subdivision 276-G

276-400 What this Subdivision is about

The trustee of an AMIT is liable to pay income tax on certain amounts reflecting under-attribution of income or over-attribution of tax offsets.

Table of sections

Ensuring determined trust components are properly taxed

276-405 Trustee taxed on shortfall in determined member component (character relating to assessable income)

276-410 Trustee taxed on excess in determined member component (character relating to tax offset)

276-415 Trustee taxed on amounts of determined trust component that are not reflected in determined member components

Ensuring unders and overs are properly taxed

276-420 Trustee taxed on amounts of under of character relating to assessable income not properly carried forward

276-425 Trustee taxed on amounts of over of character relating to tax offset not properly carried forward

Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision

276-430 Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision

Ensuring determined trust components are properly taxed

276-405 Trustee taxed on shortfall in determined member component (character relating to assessable income)

Income character shortfall

An *AMIT has a shortfall under this subsection for an income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the determined member component of a *member of the AMIT of a character relating to assessable income for the income year;

falls short of:

the member component of the member of that character for the income year.

Liability to tax

The trustee is liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount that is the sum of each shortfall of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year.

Note: The rate is set out in subsection 12(11) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

276-410 Trustee taxed on excess in determined member component (character relating to tax offset)

An *AMIT has an excess under this subsection for an income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the determined member component of a *member of the AMIT of a character relating to a tax offset for the income year;

exceeds:

the member component of the member of that character for the income year.

Liability to tax

The trustee is liable to pay tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount that is the sum of each excess of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year.

Note: The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Attribution Managed Investment Trusts—Offsets) Act 2016 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.

276-415 Trustee taxed on amounts of determined trust component that are not reflected in determined member components

An *AMIT has a shortfall under this subsection for an income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the sum of all the *determined member components of all the *members of the AMIT of a particular character relating to assessable income, exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income for the income year;

falls short of:

the determined trust component of that character of the AMIT for the income year.

Liability to tax

The trustee is liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount worked out as follows:

first, work out the sum of each shortfall of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year;

next, work out the extent (if any) to which each of those shortfalls gives rise to a rounding adjustment deficit (see subsection 276-310(2));

next, subtract the result of paragraph (b) from the result of paragraph (a);

next, work out the extent (if any) to which the result of paragraph (c) is referable to one or more shortfalls under subsection 276-405(1);

next, subtract the result of paragraph (d) from the result of paragraph (c).

Note: The rate is set out in subsection 12(12) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

Gross-up for discount capital gain

Subsection (4) applies if a determined member component is of the character of:

a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property; or

(b) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

For the purposes of subsection (2), treat the amount of the shortfall under subsection (1) relating to the component as being double what it would be apart from this subsection.

Ensuring unders and overs are properly taxed

276-420 Trustee taxed on amounts of under of character relating to assessable income not properly carried forward

An *AMIT for an income year has a shortfall under this subsection for the income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:

(a) an *under of the AMIT of a character relating to assessable income in the income year for an earlier income year (the base year) (as worked out by the trustee on the basis of the trustee’s knowledge at the discovery time mentioned in subsection 276-345(2));

falls short of:

what the under would have been if it had been worked out on the basis of what the trustee should have known at that time.

Liability to tax

The trustee is liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount that is the sum of each shortfall of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year.

Note: The rate is set out in subsection 12(13) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

Adjustment for later unders relating to the same base year

If there is a shortfall under subsection (1) for a particular character for an income year, for the purposes of applying paragraph 276-345(3)(b) (base year running balance) to a later income year, increase the amount mentioned in subparagraph 276-345(3)(b)(ii) (previous discovery year amount) for that character by the amount of the shortfall.

Subsection (5) applies if:

there is a shortfall under subsection (1) for a particular character for an income year; and

the *AMIT has an *under of that character in a later income year for the base year mentioned in subsection (1); and

the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) is reflected (in whole or in part) in the amount of the under.

Reduce the shortfall by the extent to which the *under in the later income year reflects the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

276-425 Trustee taxed on amounts of over of character relating to tax offset not properly carried forward

An *AMIT for an income year has a shortfall under this subsection for the income year equal to the amount (if any) by which:

(a) an *over of the AMIT of a character relating to a *tax offset in the income year relating to an earlier income year (the base year) (as worked out by the trustee on the basis of the trustee’s knowledge at the discovery time mentioned in subsection 276-345(2));

falls short of:

what the over would have been if it had been worked out on the basis of what the trustee should have known at that time.

Liability to tax

The trustee is liable to pay tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount that is the sum of each shortfall of the *AMIT under subsection (1) for the income year.

Note: The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Attribution Managed Investment Trusts—Offsets) Act 2016 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.

Adjustment for later overs relating to the same base year

If there is a shortfall under subsection (1) for a particular character for an income year, for the purposes of applying paragraph 276-345(3)(b) (base year running balance) to a later income year, decrease the amount mentioned in subparagraph 276-345(3)(b)(ii) (previous discovery year amount) for that character by the amount of the shortfall.

Subsection (5) applies if:

there is a shortfall under subsection (1) of a particular character relating to a tax offset for an income year; and

the *AMIT has an *over of that character in a later income year relating to the base year mentioned in subsection (1); and

the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) is reflected (in whole or in part) in the amount of the over.

Reduce the shortfall by the extent to which the *over in the later income year reflects the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision

276-430 Commissioner may remit tax under this Subdivision

The Commissioner may remit the whole or any part of income tax for which a liability arises under this Subdivision if the Commissioner is satisfied that doing so does not result in a detriment to the revenue.

Subdivision 276-H — AMMA statements

Guide to Subdivision 276-H

276-450 What this Subdivision is about

An AMIT for an income year must give each member of the AMIT in respect of the income year an AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement) for the income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

276-455 Obligation to give an AMMA statement

276-460 AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement)

Operative provisions

276-455 Obligation to give an AMMA statement

An *AMIT for an income year must give each *member of the AMIT in respect of the income year an *AMMA statement for the income year.

Note: Section 286-75 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 provides an administrative penalty for breach of this subsection.

The statement must be given no later than 3 months after the end of the income year.

However, the *AMIT need not give an *AMMA statement under subsection (1) to a *member if:

all of the member’s *determined member components for the AMIT for the income year are nil; and

all of the member’s *membership interests in the AMIT have an AMIT cost base net amount for the income year of nil.

To avoid doubt, the *AMIT does not fail to comply with subsection (1) merely because:

the AMIT gives *AMMA statements for the income year to *members in accordance with subsection (1) by the time required under subsection (2); and

after that time, the AMIT gives those members further AMMA statements for the income year that replace the AMMA statements mentioned in paragraph (a).

276-460 AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement)

(1) An AMIT member annual statement (or AMMA statement) is a statement made by an *AMIT for an income year in accordance with this section.

The statement must:

include information that reflects the amount and character of each member component of the *member for the income year; and

state what the trustee reasonably estimates to be the amount of the excess or shortfall mentioned in section 104-107C (AMIT cost base net amount) for the income year in respect of the CGT asset that is the member’s unit or interest in the *AMIT.

(3) The statement is not an AMMA statement if the *AMIT fails to give it to the *member to whom it is addressed within 4 years after the end of the income year.

Note: The AMIT must give each member an AMMA statement for the income year no later than 3 months after the end of the income year (see section 276-455).

Subdivision 276-J — Debt-like trust instruments

Guide to Subdivision 276-J

276-500 What this Subdivision is about

A debt-like trust instrument in an AMIT is treated as a debt interest in the AMIT. A distribution in relation to the instrument is treated as interest for the purposes of provisions relating to interest withholding tax, and may be treated as a deduction in working out the trust components of the AMIT.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

276-505 Meaning of debt-like trust instrument

276-510 Debt-like trust instruments treated as debt interests etc.

276-515 Distribution on debt-like trust instrument could be deductible in working out trust components

Operative provisions

276-505 Meaning of debt-like trust instrument

(1) An instrument that gives rise to an interest in a trust is a debt-like trust instrument in relation to the trust if:

the amount of any distribution relating to the interest is fixed, at the time the interest is created, by reference to the amount subscribed for the interest; and

any distribution relating to the interest is made solely at the discretion of the trustee of the trust; and

rights to distributions of capital or profits arising from all interests in the trust that are in the same *class as the interest, rank above all such rights arising from other interests in the trust (other than those covered under subsection (2)) if:

the trust ceases to exist; or

where the trust is a managed investment scheme—the scheme is under administration or is being wound up; and

(d) in a case where, in relation to a particular period, the trustee of the trust does not make a distribution relating to the interest—making a distribution of any of the following kinds, in relation to that period, is prohibited by the constituent documents of the trust:

a distribution relating to any membership interest in the trust;

a distribution relating to a membership interest in another entity, if that interest is stapled together with a membership interest in the trust.

This subsection covers an interest in the trust that:

(a) is not a *membership interest in the trust; or

satisfies the requirements in paragraphs (1)(a) and (b).

276-510 Debt-like trust instruments treated as debt interests etc.

For the purposes of this Act:

treat a debt-like trust instrument in relation to an *AMIT as a *debt interest in the AMIT; and

treat a distribution on a debt-like trust instrument in relation to an AMIT as a cost incurred by the AMIT in relation to a debt interest issued by the AMIT.

If a trust is an *AMIT for an income year (disregarding this subsection), paragraph (1)(a) applies for the purposes of:

determining whether the trust is a managed investment trust in relation to the income year; and

determining whether the trust is an AMIT for the income year.

(3) For the purposes of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, if an entity is the holder of a *debt-like trust instrument in an *AMIT, treat a distribution to the entity in accordance with the instrument as interest.

276-515 Distribution on debt-like trust instrument could be deductible in working out trust components

If an entity is the holder of a debt-like trust instrument in relation to an *AMIT, for the purposes of sections 276-265 and 276-270, treat a distribution to the entity in accordance with the instrument as a *return that the AMIT pays or provides on a *debt interest.

For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard the distribution to the extent (if any) that it is referable to any of the following:

exempt income of the *AMIT;

non-assessable non-exempt income of the AMIT.

Subdivision 276-K — Ceasing to be an AMIT

Guide to Subdivision 276-K

276-800 What this Subdivision is about

If a trust ceases to be an AMIT, and discovers an under or over from an income year when it was an AMIT, the under or over will have taxation consequences for the trust in the discovery year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

276-805 Application of Subdivision to former AMIT

276-810 Continue to work out trust components, unders, overs etc.

276-815 Effect of increase

276-820 Effect of decrease

Operative provisions

276-805 Application of Subdivision to former AMIT

This Subdivision applies if:

a trust was an *AMIT for an income year; and

(b) the trust is not an AMIT for a later income year (the discovery year).

276-810 Continue to work out trust components, unders, overs etc.

For the purposes of this section, assume that the trust is an *AMIT for the discovery year.

If the trust has an *under or *over of a character in the discovery year for an earlier income year when the trust was an *AMIT, work out the extent to which the under or over:

increases the amount of the AMIT’s *trust component of that character for the discovery year; or

decreases the amount of the AMIT’s trust component of that character for the discovery year.

276-815 Effect of increase

This section applies if there is an increase as mentioned in paragraph 276-810(2)(a).

If the character mentioned in subsection 276-810(2) relates to assessable income, treat the amount of the increase as assessable income of the trust for the discovery year.

Subsection (4) applies if the character mentioned in subsection 276-810(2) is the character of:

a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property; or

(b) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

For the purposes of subsection (2), treat the amount of the increase as being double what it would be apart from this subsection.

If that character relates to exempt income, treat the amount of the increase as exempt income of the trust for the discovery year.

If that character relates to non-assessable non-exempt income, treat the amount of the increase as non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust for the discovery year.

If that character relates to a tax offset, treat the amount of the increase as a tax offset of the trust for the discovery year of a kind corresponding to that character (in addition to any other tax offsets of that kind that the trust may have for the discovery year).

276-820 Effect of decrease

This section applies if there is a decrease as mentioned in paragraph 276-810(2)(b).

If the character mentioned in subsection 276-810(2) relates to assessable income:

in the case of a character of:

a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property; or

(ii) a discount capital gain from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property;

treat half the amount of the decrease as a *capital loss of the trust for the discovery year; or

in the case of a character of:

a *capital gain (other than a discount capital gain) from a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property; or

(ii) a capital gain (other than a discount capital gain) from a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property;

treat the amount of the decrease as a capital loss of the trust for the discovery year; or

in any other case—treat the amount of the decrease as a deduction of the trust for the discovery year.

If that character relates to exempt income, treat the amount of the decrease as reducing the exempt income of the trust for the discovery year.

If that character relates to non-assessable non-exempt income, treat the amount of the decrease as reducing the non-assessable non-exempt income of the trust for the discovery year.

(5) If that character relates to a *tax offset, treat the amount of the decrease as reducing the tax offset or offsets (the existing offset or offsets) of the trust for the discovery year of a kind corresponding to that character.

If that character relates to a tax offset and exceeds the total of the existing offset or offsets (before the reduction under subsection (5)):

unless paragraph (b) applies—the trustee is liable to pay tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the excess; or

Note: The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Attribution Managed Investment Trusts—Offsets) Act 2016 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.

if that character is the character of foreign income tax paid that counts towards a tax offset under Division 770—subsection (7) applies.

Increase the trust’s assessable income for the discovery year by the sum of:

the excess mentioned in subsection (6); and

the product of:

that excess; and

the *corporate tax gross-up rate.

Treat the amount of that increase as assessable income from a source other than an *Australian source.

Part 3-30 — Superannuation

Division 280 — Guide to the superannuation provisions

Table of sections

280-1 Effect of this Division

280-5 Overview

Contributions phase

280-10 Contributions phase—deductibility

280-15 Contributions phase—limits on superannuation tax concessions

Investment phase

280-20 Investment phase

Benefits phase

280-25 Benefits phase—different types of superannuation benefit

280-30 Benefits phase—taxation varies with age of recipient and type of benefit

280-35 Benefits phase—roll-overs

The regulatory scheme outside this Act

280-40 Other relevant legislative schemes

280-1 Effect of this Division

This Division is a Guide.

Tax concessions in this Part are intended to encourage Australians to save in order to make provision for their retirement, recognising that superannuation investments, and the income from them, are quarantined for retirement.

280-5 Overview

There are 3 phases in the tax treatment of superannuation, as follows:

the contributions phase;

the investment phase;

the benefits phase.

In the contributions phase, contributions are made to a superannuation plan in respect of a member of the plan.

In the investment phase, these contributions are invested by the superannuation provider.

In the benefits phase, these contributions, plus earnings from investing them, are usually paid as benefits to the member when he or she retires after reaching preservation age. In the event of death, the benefits are usually paid to the member’s dependants.

There is also a regulatory scheme outside this Act that is relevant to the taxation treatment of superannuation. For example, other Acts set out prudential and operating standards for superannuation providers.

Contributions phase

280-10 Contributions phase—deductibility

Contributions that can be deducted

Employers can usually deduct contributions they make in respect of their employees. Individuals can usually deduct contributions they make in respect of themselves to most complying superannuation funds.

Other contributions cannot be deducted

Other contributions cannot be deducted. These include contributions made by others in respect of individuals (such as contributions by a spouse or family member, or Government co-contributions).

280-15 Contributions phase—limits on superannuation tax concessions

There is a limit to contributions that can be made in respect of an individual in a year that receive favourable tax treatment.

If concessional contributions exceed an indexed cap, the excess is included in the individual’s assessable income and gives rise to a tax offset. The individual can release the excess concessional contributions from his or her superannuation interests. Unused cap can be carried forward for 5 years.

If non-concessional contributions exceed an indexed cap, the individual can request the release of either:

nothing; or

an amount equal to the sum of that excess and 85% of the associated earnings on that excess;

from the individual’s superannuation interests. Whether or not such a request is made, an amount relating to those associated earnings may be included in the individual’s assessable income and may give rise to a tax offset.

In the absence of such a request, the Commissioner may require the relevant superannuation fund to release the amount described in paragraph (3)(b).

Note: This can be done under subsection 131-15(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

The individual is taxed:

on any shortfall between the amount released as described in subsection (3) or (4) and the excess referred to in subsection (3); or

on that excess, if the individual requested that nothing be released from the individual’s superannuation interests.

The Commissioner may require the release of an amount equal to this tax liability from the individual’s superannuation interests.

Note: This can be done under subsection 131-15(3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Investment phase

280-20 Investment phase

Contributions that can be deducted are assessable income of the superannuation provider. Contributions that cannot be deducted are not assessable income of the superannuation provider. (There are some exceptions.)

Earnings on the investment of amounts in a superannuation plan are assessable income of the superannuation provider.

The superannuation provider’s taxable income is generally taxed at the concessional rate of 15%.

However, superannuation providers pay no tax on earnings from the assets that support the payment of benefits in the form of income streams, once the income streams have commenced.

Benefits phase

280-25 Benefits phase—different types of superannuation benefit

Superannuation benefits can be drawn down as lump sums, income streams (such as pensions or annuities), or combinations of both. Different tax treatment may apply depending on whether a lump sum or income stream is paid.

280-30 Benefits phase—taxation varies with age of recipient and type of benefit

The taxation of superannuation benefits depends primarily on the age of the member.

If the member is aged 60 or over, superannuation benefits (both lump sums and income streams) are tax free if the benefits have already been subject to tax in the fund (that is, where the benefits comprise a taxed element). This covers the great majority of superannuation members.

Where a superannuation benefit contains an amount that has not been subject to tax in the fund (an untaxed element), this element is subject to tax for those aged 60 or over, though at concessional rates. This is relevant generally to those people (for example, public servants), who are members of a superannuation fund established by the Australian Government or a state government.

If the member is less than 60, superannuation benefits may receive concessional taxation treatment, though the treatment is less concessional than for those aged 60 and over.

Superannuation benefits may also include a “tax free component”; this component of the benefit is always paid tax free.

Additional tax concessions may apply when superannuation benefits are paid after a member’s death.

280-35 Benefits phase—roll-overs

A member can “roll over” their superannuation benefits from one complying superannuation plan to another, or between different interests in the same plan. This is usually done to keep the benefits invested in the superannuation system, or to convert a lump sum to a superannuation income stream. No tax is generally payable until the benefits are finally drawn down.

The regulatory scheme outside this Act

280-40 Other relevant legislative schemes

(1) The Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 and the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 regulate the prudential and operating standards for superannuation providers. Concessional tax treatment is generally available only if providers comply with these standards.

Other legislative schemes relevant to superannuation include the following:

(a) the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992, which requires that employers provide a minimum level of superannuation contributions for each of their eligible employees;

(b) the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003, which provides for Government co-contributions to low income earners’ superannuation;

(c) the Small Superannuation Accounts Act 1995, which provides a facility to accept payments of superannuation guarantee shortfalls;

(d) the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999, which provides for the payment of unclaimed superannuation money, and the maintenance of a register of lost members.

Division 285 — General concepts relating to superannuation

285-5 Transfers of property

Any of the following payments covered by this Part can be or include a transfer of property:

a contribution;

a superannuation lump sum.

The amount of the payment is or includes the *market value of the property.

The *market value is reduced by the value of any consideration given for the transfer of the property.

Division 290 — Contributions to superannuation funds

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 290

290-A General rules

290-B Deduction of employer contributions and other employment-connected contributions

290-C Deducting personal contributions

290-D Tax offsets for spouse contributions

Guide to Division 290

290-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the rules for deductions and tax offsets for superannuation contributions.

Subdivision 290-A — General rules

Table of sections

290-5 Non-application to roll-over superannuation benefits etc.

290-10 No deductions other than under this Division

290-5 Non-application to roll-over superannuation benefits etc.

This Division does not apply to a contribution that is any of the following:

a roll-over superannuation benefit;

a superannuation lump sum that is paid from a *foreign superannuation fund;

an amount transferred to a complying superannuation fund or an RSA from a scheme for the payment of benefits in the nature of superannuation upon retirement or death that:

is not, and never has been, an Australian superannuation fund or a *foreign superannuation fund; and

was not established in Australia; and

is not centrally managed or controlled in Australia.

290-10 No deductions other than under this Division

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount you pay as a contribution to a complying superannuation fund or RSA, except as provided by this Division.

You cannot deduct under this Act an amount you pay as a contribution to a non-complying superannuation fund, except as provided by this Division.

Note: Under Subdivision 290-B (Deduction of employer contributions and other employment-connected contributions), you may be able to deduct contributions you make to a non-complying fund that you believe to be a complying fund.

Subdivision 290-B — Deduction of employer contributions and other employment-connected contributions

Table of sections

Deducting employer contributions

290-60 Employer contributions deductible

290-65 Application to employees etc.

Conditions for deducting an employer contribution

290-70 Employment activity conditions

290-75 Complying fund conditions

290-80 Age related conditions

Other employment-connected deductions

290-85 Contributions for former employees etc.

290-90 Controlling interest deductions

Returned contributions

290-100 Returned contributions assessable

Deducting employer contributions

290-60 Employer contributions deductible

You can deduct a contribution you make to a superannuation fund, or an RSA, for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for another person who is your employee when the contribution is made (regardless whether the benefits are payable to a SIS dependant of the employee if the employee dies before or after becoming entitled to receive the benefits).

Note: Other provisions of this Act and the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 may reduce, increase or deny the deduction in certain circumstances. For example, see sections 85-25 and 86-75 of this Act.

However, the conditions in sections 290-70, 290-75 and 290-80 must also be satisfied for you to deduct the contribution.

You can deduct the contribution only for the income year in which you made the contribution.

(4) You cannot deduct the contribution if it is an amount paid by you, as mentioned in regulations under the Family Law Act 1975, to a *regulated superannuation fund, or to an *RSA, to be held for the benefit of your *non-member spouse in satisfaction of his or her entitlement in respect of the *superannuation interest concerned.

290-65 Application to employees etc.

(1) At a time when an individual is an employee of an entity within the expanded meaning of employee given by section 12 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992, this Subdivision applies as if the individual were an employee of the entity.

For the purposes of this Subdivision:

in relation to a contribution by a partnership in respect of an employee of the partnership—treat the employee as an employee of the partnership; and

in relation to a contribution by a partner in a partnership in respect of an employee of the partnership—treat the employee as an employee of the partner.

Conditions for deducting an employer contribution

290-70 Employment activity conditions

To deduct the contribution, the employee must be:

(aa) your employee (within the expanded meaning of employee given by section 12 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992); or

engaged in producing your assessable income; or

an Australian resident who is engaged in your business.

290-75 Complying fund conditions

If the contribution was made to a superannuation fund, at least one of these conditions must be satisfied:

the fund was a complying superannuation fund for the income year of the fund in which you made the contribution;

at the time you made the contribution, you had reasonable grounds to believe that the fund was a complying superannuation fund for that income year;

at or before the time you made the contribution, you obtained a written statement (given by or on behalf of the trustee of the fund) that the fund:

(i) was a resident regulated superannuation fund (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993); and

was not subject to a direction under section 63 of that Act (which prevents a fund from accepting employer contributions).

However, the condition in paragraph (1)(b) or (c) cannot be satisfied if, when the contribution was made:

you were:

the trustee or the manager of the fund; or

an associate of the trustee or the manager of the fund; and

you had reasonable grounds to believe that:

(i) the fund was not a resident regulated superannuation fund (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993); or

the fund was operating in contravention of a regulatory provision (within the meaning of section 38A of that Act).

(3) For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(b)(ii), a contravention of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 or regulations made under it is to be ignored unless the contravention is:

an offence; or

a contravention of a civil penalty provision of that Act or those regulations.

For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(b)(ii), it is sufficient if a contravention is established on the balance of probabilities.

290-80 Age related conditions

To deduct the contribution:

you must have made the contribution on or before the day that is 28 days after the end of the month in which the employee turns 75; or

(b) you must have been required to make the contribution by an industrial award, determination or notional agreement preserving State awards (within the meaning of the Fair Work (Transitional Provisions and Consequential Amendments) Act 2009) that is in force under an *Australian law; or

the contribution must result in you having a lower individual final superannuation guarantee shortfall for the employee and one or more *QE days than what you would have otherwise.

If only paragraph (1)(b) applies, you can deduct only the amount of the contribution that is required by the industrial award, determination or notional agreement preserving State awards.

Note: An industrial agreement, such as an enterprise agreement within the meaning of the Fair Work Act 2009, or a similar agreement made under a State law, is not an award or determination.

If only paragraph (1)(c) applies, you can deduct only the amount of the contribution that causes the result described in that paragraph.

If both paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) apply and paragraph (1)(a) does not apply, you can deduct only the greater of the following amounts (or only one of them if they are equal):

the amount of the contribution that is required by the industrial award, determination or notional agreement preserving State awards;

the amount of the contribution that causes the result described in paragraph (1)(c).

Note: If paragraph (1)(a) applies, you can deduct the whole of the contribution (whether or not paragraph (1)(b) or (1)(c) also applies).

(3) For the purposes of this section, a reference to a determination does not include a reference to a workplace determination made under the Fair Work Act 2009 or the Workplace Relations Act 1996.

Other employment-connected deductions

290-85 Contributions for former employees etc.

Section 290-60 applies as modified by this section if a contribution you make in respect of another person:

(a) results in you having a lower *individual final superannuation guarantee shortfall for the other person and one or more *QE days than what you would have otherwise because of section 15B of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992; or

is a one-off payment in lieu of qualifying earnings (within the meaning of that Act) that relate to a period of service during which the other person was your employee.

(1AA) Section 290-60 also applies as modified by this section if:

a contribution you make in respect of another person relates to a period of service during which the other person was your employee; and

you make the contribution within 4 months after the person stops being your employee; and

you would have been entitled to a deduction in relation to the contribution if:

you had made it at a time when the other person was your employee; and

the law that applied to your entitlement to the deduction at that time had been the same as it was at the time you actually made the contribution.

(1AB) Section 290-60 also applies as modified by this section if:

a contribution you make in respect of another person relates to a period of service during which the other person was your employee; and

the contribution relates to a defined benefit interest of the other person; and

you are at *arm’s length with the other person in relation to the contribution; and

you obtain an actuary’s certificate that:

complies with the requirements (if any) specified by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph; and

is to the effect that the contribution does not exceed the amount required by the relevant superannuation fund to meet the fund’s liabilities in connection with defined benefit interests; and

you would have been entitled to a deduction in relation to the contribution if:

you had made it at a time when the other person was your employee; and

the law that applied to your entitlement to the deduction at that time had been the same as it was at the time you actually made the contribution.

Section 290-60 also applies as modified by this section if:

you make a contribution in respect of another person at a time; and

the other person had been employed by a company or other entity before that time; and

section 290-90 would apply in relation to the contribution if the other person were employed by the company or entity at that time; and

the contribution:

(i) results in the company or entity having a lower *individual final superannuation guarantee shortfall for the other person and one or more *QE days than what it would have otherwise because of section 15B of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992; or

is a one-off payment in lieu of salary or wages that relate to a period of service during which the other person was the company’s or entity’s employee; or

if subsection (1B) or (1C) applies—relates to a period of service during which the other person was the company’s or entity’s employee.

This subsection applies if:

you make the contribution within 4 months after the person stops being the company’s or entity’s employee; and

you would have been entitled to a deduction in relation to the contribution if you had made it while the other person was the company’s or entity’s employee.

This subsection applies if:

the contribution relates to a defined benefit interest of the other person; and

you and the company are at *arm’s length with the other person in relation to the contribution; and

you obtain an actuary’s certificate that:

complies with the requirements (if any) specified by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph; and

is to the effect that the contribution does not exceed the amount required by the relevant superannuation fund or RSA to meet the fund’s or RSA’s liabilities in connection with defined benefit interests; and

you would have been entitled to a deduction in respect of the contribution if you had made it while the other person was the company’s or entity’s employee.

Treat the other person as your employee for the purposes of subsection 290-60(1).

Despite subsection 290-60(2):

if subsection (1) or (1AA) applies—the condition in section 290-70 must be satisfied at the most recent time when the other person was your employee (apart from subsection (2) of this section); or

if subsection (1A) applies:

the condition in section 290-70 need not be satisfied; and

instead, the condition in subsection 290-90(4) must be satisfied at the most recent time when the other person was the company’s or entity’s employee.

290-90 Controlling interest deductions

Section 290-60 applies as modified by this section if you make a contribution in respect of another person at a time, and at that time:

the other person is an employee of a company in which you have a controlling interest; or

you are connected to the other person in the circumstances set out in subsection (5); or

you are a company connected to the other person in the circumstances described in subsection (6).

Treat the other person as your employee at that time for the purposes of subsection 290-60(1).

Note 1: A deduction may be denied by section 85-25 if the employee is your associate.

Note 2: Section 86-60 (read together with section 86-75) limits the extent to which superannuation contributions by personal service entities are deductions.

Despite subsection 290-60(2), for you to deduct the contribution the condition in subsection (4) needs to be satisfied instead of the condition in section 290-70.

The other person must be:

(aa) an employee (within the expanded meaning of employee given by section 12 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992) of the other person’s employer; or

engaged in producing the assessable income of the other person’s employer; or

an Australian resident engaged in the business of the other person’s employer.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), the circumstances are:

you are the beneficial owner of shares in a company of which the other person is an employee, but you do not have a controlling interest in the company; and

you are at *arm’s length with the other person in relation to the contribution; and

neither the other person, nor a *relative of the other person:

has set apart an amount as a fund, or has made a contribution to a fund, for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for you or a relative of yours; or

has made an arrangement under which the other person or relative will or may do so.

Company controlling interest deductions

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), the circumstances are:

the other person is an employee of an entity that has a controlling interest in the company; or

an entity that has a controlling interest in the company also has a controlling interest in a company of which the other person is an employee.

Returned contributions

290-100 Returned contributions assessable

Your assessable income includes a payment, or the value of a benefit, you receive in the income year so far as it reasonably represents the direct or indirect return of:

a contribution for which you or another entity have deducted or can deduct an amount for any income year; or

earnings on a contribution of that kind.

Note: An example of an indirect return of a contribution is if the fund to which it was made transfers to another fund assets that include the contribution, and the other fund returns the contribution to the person who made it.

Subsection (1) does not apply if you receive the payment, or the value of the benefit, as a superannuation benefit.

Subdivision 290-C — Deducting personal contributions

Table of sections

290-150 Personal contributions deductible

Conditions for deducting a personal contribution

290-155 Complying superannuation fund condition

290-165 Age-related conditions

290-167 Contribution must not be a downsizer contribution

290-168 Contribution must not be a re-contribution under the first home super saver scheme

290-169 Contribution must not be a COVID-19 re-contribution

290-170 Notice of intent to deduct conditions

290-175 Deduction limited by amount specified in notice

290-180 Notice may be varied but not revoked or withdrawn

290-150 Personal contributions deductible

You can deduct a contribution you make to a superannuation fund, or an RSA, for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for yourself (regardless whether the benefits are payable to your *SIS dependants if you die before or after becoming entitled to receive the benefits).

Note: Other provisions of this Act and the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 may reduce, increase or deny the deduction in certain circumstances. For example, see section 26-55 of this Act.

However, the conditions in sections 290-155, 290-165, 290-167, 290-168, 290-169 and 290-170 must also be satisfied for you to deduct the contribution.

You can deduct the contribution only for the income year in which you made the contribution.

If the contribution is attributable in whole or part to a *capital gain from a CGT event:

if you disregarded all or part of the capital gain from the CGT event under subsection 152-305(1) and you were under 55 just before you made the choice mentioned in that subsection—you cannot deduct the contribution to the extent that it is attributable to the capital gain; or

if a company or trust disregarded all or part of the capital gain from the CGT event under subsection 152-305(2) and you were under 55 just before the contribution was made—you cannot deduct the contribution to the extent that it is attributable to the capital gain.

Conditions for deducting a personal contribution

290-155 Complying superannuation fund condition

If the contribution is made to a superannuation fund:

the fund must be a complying superannuation fund, for the income year of the fund in which you made the contribution, that is not:

a Commonwealth public sector superannuation scheme in which you have a defined benefit interest; or

a superannuation fund that would not include the contribution in its assessable income under section 295-190; or

a superannuation fund of a kind prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subparagraph; and

the contribution must not be a contribution of a kind prescribed by the regulations that is made to a superannuation fund of a kind prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

In determining for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(a)(ii) whether section 295-190 would apply in relation to a contribution, disregard Subdivision 295-D.

The Commissioner may publish, in such manner as the Commissioner thinks fit, lists of:

the *superannuation funds to which subparagraph (1)(a)(i), (ii) or (iii) applies for an income year; and

the kinds of contributions to which paragraph (1)(b) applies for an income year, and the superannuation funds to which those contributions have been or would be made.

290-165 Age-related conditions

Condition if you are under 18

If you were under the age of 18 at the end of the income year in which you made the contribution, you must have *derived income in the income year:

from the carrying on of a business; or

(b) attributable to activities, or circumstances, that result in you being treated as an employee for the purposes of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 (assuming that subsection 12(11) of that Act had not been enacted).

Work test condition for ages 67 to 75

If you made the contribution during the period starting on the day you turn 67 and ending on the day that is 28 days after the end of the month in which you turn 75:

you must have been gainfully employed for at least 40 hours in any period of 30 consecutive days during the income year in which the contribution was made; or

if you do not satisfy paragraph (a)—you must satisfy the following requirements:

(i) you were gainfully employed for at least 40 hours in any period of 30 consecutive days during the income year (the previous income year) ending before the income year in which the contribution was made;

you had a total superannuation balance of less than $300,000 at the end of the previous income year;

you have not deducted a contribution in the previous income year or any earlier income years on the basis of satisfying the requirements in this paragraph;

(iv) no contribution made by you, or in respect of you, in the previous income year or any earlier income years, was accepted by a *superannuation fund or an *RSA under a prescribed provision of regulations made for the purposes of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 or the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997.

Maximum age condition

You cannot deduct the contribution if it is made after the day that is 28 days after the end of the month in which you turn 75.

290-167 Contribution must not be a downsizer contribution

You cannot deduct the contribution if it is a contribution that is covered under section 292-102 (about downsizer contributions).

290-168 Contribution must not be a re-contribution under the first home super saver scheme

You cannot deduct the contribution if you notified the Commissioner about the contribution under section 313-50 (about contributing amounts to superannuation that were previously released under the first home super saver scheme).

290-169 Contribution must not be a COVID-19 re-contribution

You cannot deduct the contribution if it is a contribution that is covered under section 292-103 (about COVID-19 re-contributions).

290-170 Notice of intent to deduct conditions

Deductibility of contributions

To deduct the contribution, or a part of the contribution:

(a) you must give to the trustee of the fund or the *RSA provider a valid notice, in the *approved form, of your intention to claim the deduction; and

the notice must be given before:

if you have lodged your income tax return for the income year in which the contribution was made on a day before the end of the next income year—the end of that day; or

otherwise—the end of the next income year; and

the trustee or provider must have given you an acknowledgment of receipt of the notice.

Validity of notices

The notice is not valid if at least one of these conditions is satisfied:

the notice is not in respect of the contribution;

the notice includes all or a part of an amount covered by a previous notice;

when you gave the notice:

you were not a member of the fund or the holder of the RSA; or

the trustee or RSA provider no longer holds the contribution; or

the trustee or RSA provider has begun to pay a superannuation income stream based in whole or part on the contribution;

before you gave the notice:

you had made a contributions-splitting application (within the meaning given by the regulations) in relation to the contribution; and

the trustee or RSA provider to which you made the application had not rejected the application;

if the contribution is made to a superannuation fund—the condition in section 290-155 is not satisfied in relation to the fund and the contribution.

Acknowledgment of notice

The trustee or provider must, without delay, give you an acknowledgment of a valid notice, subject to subsection (4).

The trustee or provider may refuse to give you an acknowledgment of receipt of a valid notice if the *value of the *superannuation interest to which the notice relates, at the end of the day on which the trustee or RSA provider received the notice, is less than the tax that would be payable in respect of your contribution (or part of the contribution) if the trustee or provider were to acknowledge receipt of the notice.

Application to successor funds

Subsections (1) to (4) and section 290-180 apply as if:

references in those provisions to the fund or RSA were references to a *successor fund; and

references in those provisions to the trustee or RSA provider were references to the trustee or RSA provider of the successor fund;

if:

after making your contribution, all of the *superannuation interest to which the notice relates is transferred to the successor fund; and

you have not previously given a valid notice under this section to any *superannuation provider in relation to the contribution.

290-175 Deduction limited by amount specified in notice

You cannot deduct more for the contribution (or a part of the contribution) than the amount stated in the notice.

290-180 Notice may be varied but not revoked or withdrawn

You cannot revoke or withdraw a valid notice in relation to the contribution (or a part of the contribution).

You can vary a valid notice, but only so as to reduce the amount stated in relation to the contribution (including to nil). You do so by giving notice to the trustee or the RSA provider in the approved form.

However, you cannot vary a valid notice after:

if you have lodged your income tax return for the income year in which the contribution was made on a day before the end of the next income year—the end of that day; or

otherwise—the end of the next income year.

The variation is not effective if, when you make it:

you were not a member of the fund or the holder of the RSA; or

the trustee or RSA provider no longer holds the contribution; or

the trustee or RSA provider has begun to pay a superannuation income stream based in whole or part on the contribution.

Subsection (3) does not apply to a variation if:

you claimed a deduction for the contribution (or a part of the contribution); and

the deduction is not allowable (in whole or in part); and

the variation reduces the amount stated in relation to the contribution by the amount not allowable as a deduction.

Application to successor funds

Subsections (2) and (3A) apply as if:

the reference in subsection (3A) to the fund or RSA were a reference to a *successor fund; and

references in those subsections to the trustee or RSA provider were references to the trustee or RSA provider of the successor fund;

if, after a valid notice is given under section 290-170 in relation to the contribution, all of the *superannuation interest to which the notice relates is transferred to the successor fund.

Subdivision 290-D — Tax offsets for spouse contributions

Table of sections

290-230 Offset for spouse contribution

290-235 Limit on amount of tax offsets

290-240 Tax file number

290-230 Offset for spouse contribution

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year for a contribution you make in the income year to a superannuation fund, or an RSA, for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for your *spouse (regardless whether the benefits are payable to your spouse’s *SIS dependants if your spouse dies before or after becoming entitled to receive the benefits).

You are entitled to the tax offset only if:

he or she was your *spouse when you made the contribution; and

both you and your spouse were Australian residents when you made the contribution; and

the total of your spouse’s:

assessable income, disregarding your spouse’s *assessable FHSS released amount for the income year; and

reportable fringe benefits total; and

*reportable employer superannuation contributions;

for the income year is less than $40,000; and

you have not deducted and cannot deduct an amount for the contribution under section 290-60 (employer contributions); and

if the contribution is made to a superannuation fund—it is a complying superannuation fund for the income year of the fund in which you make the contribution.

(3) You are not entitled to the *tax offset if, when you make the contribution, you are living separately and apart from your *spouse on a permanent basis.

(4) You are not entitled to the *tax offset for an amount paid by you, as mentioned in regulations under the Family Law Act 1975, to a *regulated superannuation fund, or to an *RSA, to be held for the benefit of your *non-member spouse in satisfaction of his or her entitlement in respect of the *superannuation interest concerned.

(4A) You are not entitled to the *tax offset for an income year if:

your *spouse’s non-concessional contributions for the financial year corresponding to the income year exceed your spouse’s non-concessional contributions cap for the financial year; or

immediately before the start of the financial year, your spouse’s total superannuation balance equals or exceeds the general transfer balance cap for the financial year.

For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(c)(iii), reduce (but not below zero) the *reportable employer superannuation contributions by the amount of any excess concessional contributions your *spouse has for the financial year corresponding to the income year.

290-235 Limit on amount of tax offsets

The total of the amounts of tax offset to which you are entitled for contributions you make for an income year cannot exceed 18% of the lesser of the following:

$3,000 reduced by the amount (if any) by which the total mentioned in paragraph 290-230(2)(c) for the income year exceeds $37,000;

the sum of the *spouse contributions you make in the income year.

The maximum tax offset to which you are entitled for an income year is $540, even if you are entitled to a tax offset for more than 1 *spouse.

290-240 Tax file number

If you are entitled to the tax offset for the contribution, you may, with your *spouse’s consent, quote your spouse’s tax file number to the trustee (or RSA provider) of the superannuation fund (or RSA) to which the contribution is made.

Division 291 — Excess concessional contributions

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 291

291-A Object of this Division

291-B Excess concessional contributions

291-C Modifications for defined benefit interests

291-CA Contributions that do not result in excess contributions

291-D Other provisions

Guide to Division 291

291-1 What this Division is about

There is a cap on the amount of superannuation contributions that may receive concessional tax treatment for an individual in a financial year.

You can carry forward unused concessional contributions cap from the previous 5 financial years and use it to increase your cap in a later financial year (unless your total superannuation balance equals or exceeds $500,000).

Superannuation contributions that exceed your concessional contributions cap are included in your assessable income for the corresponding income year.

A tax offset compensates for the tax that generally applies to the contributions in the superannuation fund.

Note: Part 2-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains rules about releasing the excess concessional contributions from superannuation.

Subdivision 291-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

291-5 Object of this Division

291-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to ensure, in relation to concessional contributions to superannuation, that the amount of concessionally taxed *superannuation benefits that an individual receives results from contributions that have been made gradually over the course of the individual’s life.

Note: Division 292 has the same object, in relation to non-concessional contributions.

Subdivision 291-B — Excess concessional contributions

Guide to Subdivision 291-B

291-10 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision includes excess concessional contributions in your assessable income and provides a tax offset.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

291-15 Excess concessional contributions—assessable income, 15% tax offset

291-20 Your excess concessional contributions for a financial year

291-25 Your concessional contributions for a financial year

Operative provisions

291-15 Excess concessional contributions—assessable income, 15% tax offset

If you have excess concessional contributions for a financial year:

an amount equal to the excess concessional contributions is included in your assessable income for your corresponding income year; and

you are entitled to a tax offset for that income year equal to 15% of the excess concessional contributions.

Note 1: This offset cannot be refunded, transferred or carried forward: see item 20 of the table in subsection 63-10(1).

Note 3: You can request the release of excess concessional contributions from superannuation: see Division 131 in that Schedule.

291-20 Your excess concessional contributions for a financial year

(1) You have excess concessional contributions for a *financial year if the amount of your *concessional contributions for the year exceeds your *concessional contributions cap for the year. The amount of the excess concessional contributions is the amount of the excess.

(2) Your concessional contributions cap is:

for the 2017-2018 financial year—$25,000; or

for the 2018-2019 financial year or a later financial year—the amount worked out by indexing annually the amount mentioned in paragraph (a).

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the amount of the cap: see section 960-285.

Five year carry forward of unused concessional contributions cap

(3) However, your concessional contributions cap for the *financial year is increased in accordance with subsection (4) if:

your concessional contributions for the year would otherwise exceed your concessional contributions cap for the year; and

your total superannuation balance just before the start of the financial year is less than $500,000; and

you have previously unapplied unused concessional contributions cap for one or more of the previous 5 financial years.

(4) Apply your unapplied *unused concessional contributions cap for each of the previous 5 *financial years to increase your *concessional contributions cap (but not by more than the excess from paragraph (3)(a)).

For the purposes of increasing your concessional contributions cap under subsection (4), apply amounts of unused concessional contributions cap for previous *financial years in order from the earliest year to the most recent year.

Your unused concessional contributions cap

(6) You have unused concessional contributions cap for a *financial year if the amount of your *concessional contributions for the year falls short of your *concessional contributions cap for the year. The amount of the unused concessional contributions cap is the amount of the shortfall.

(7) However, you do not have unused concessional contributions cap for a *financial year earlier than the 2018-2019 financial year.

291-25 Your concessional contributions for a financial year

(1) The amount of your concessional contributions for a *financial year is the sum of:

each contribution covered under subsection (2); and

each amount covered under subsection (3).

Note: For rules about defined benefit interests, see Subdivision 291-C.

A contribution is covered under this subsection if:

it is made in the financial year to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you; and

it is included in the assessable income of the *superannuation provider in relation to the plan, or, by way of a roll-over superannuation benefit, in the assessable income of a complying superannuation fund or RSA provider in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 290-170(5) (about successor funds); and

(c) it is not an amount mentioned in subsection 295-200(2); and

(d) it is not an amount mentioned in item 2 of the table in subsection 295-190(1); and

(e) it is not an amount mentioned in subsection 99G(6) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 that is refunded in accordance with that subsection.

An amount in a *complying superannuation plan is covered under this subsection if it is allocated by the *superannuation provider in relation to the plan for you for the year in accordance with conditions specified in the regulations.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), disregard:

table item 5.3 in section 50-25 (about income tax exemption for constitutionally protected funds); and

Subdivision 295-D (about excluded contributions).

Subdivision 291-C — Modifications for defined benefit interests

Guide to Subdivision 291-C

291-155 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision modifies the meaning of concessional contributions relating to defined benefits interests.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

291-160 Application

291-165 Concessional contributions—special rules for defined benefit interests

291-170 Notional taxed contributions

291-175 Defined benefit interest

Operative provisions

291-160 Application

This Subdivision applies if, in a financial year, you have:

a *superannuation interest that is or includes a defined benefit interest; or

more than one superannuation interest that is or includes a defined benefit interest.

291-165 Concessional contributions—special rules for defined benefit interests

(1) Despite section 291-25, the amount of your concessional contributions for the *financial year is the sum of:

(a) the contributions covered by subsection 291-25(2), and the amounts covered by subsection 291-25(3), to the extent to which they do not relate to the *defined benefit interest or interests; and

your notional taxed contributions for the financial year in respect of the defined benefit interest or interests; and

the amount (if any) by which your defined benefit contributions for the financial year in respect of the defined benefit interest or interests exceed those notional taxed contributions.

Note: Section 291-370 prevents some contributions from causing your concessional contributions for a financial year to exceed the concessional contributions cap.

In working out your defined benefit contributions for the financial year for the purposes of paragraph (1)(c):

if Subdivision 293-E applies to you for the income year corresponding to the financial year—disregard subsection 293-150(3); and

if Subdivision 293-F applies to you—disregard subsection 293-195(2).

Note: Section 291-370 prevents some contributions from causing your concessional contributions for a financial year to exceed the concessional contributions cap.

291-170 Notional taxed contributions

(1) Your notional taxed contributions for a *financial year in respect of a *defined benefit interest has the meaning given by the regulations.

Note: For transitional provisions about notional taxed contributions that were previously in former subsections 292-170(6) to (9), see Subdivision 291-C of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

(2) Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (1) may provide for a method of determining the amount of the notional taxed contributions.

Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (1) may define the notional taxed contributions, and the amount of notional taxed contributions, in different ways depending on any of the following matters:

the individual who has the *superannuation interest that is or includes the defined benefit interest;

the *superannuation plan in which the superannuation interest exists;

the *superannuation provider in relation to the superannuation plan;

any other matter.

Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (1) may specify circumstances in which the amount of notional taxed contributions for a financial year is nil.

Subsections (2), (3) and (4) do not limit the regulations that may be made for the purposes of this section.

291-175 Defined benefit interest

(1) An individual’s *superannuation interest is a defined benefit interest to the extent that it defines the individual’s entitlement to *superannuation benefits payable from the interest by reference to one or more of the following matters:

the individual’s salary, or allowance in the nature of salary, at a particular date or averaged over a period;

another individual’s salary, or allowance in the nature of salary, at a particular date or averaged over a period;

a specified amount;

specified conversion factors.

(2) However, an individual’s *superannuation interest is not a defined benefit interest if it defines that entitlement solely by reference to one or more of the following:

*disability superannuation benefits;

*superannuation death benefits;

payments of amounts mentioned in paragraph 307-10(a) (temporary disability payments).

Subdivision 291-CA — Contributions that do not result in excess contributions

Guide to Subdivision 291-CA

291-365 What this Subdivision is about

Some contributions and other amounts are treated as always being within your concessional contributions cap, and therefore cannot be excess concessional contributions.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

291-370 Contributions that do not result in excess contributions

Operative provisions

291-370 Contributions that do not result in excess contributions

In working out your concessional contributions for a financial year, treat the sum of the following as an amount equal to your concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(2) for the financial year:

contributions made in respect of you for the financial year to a constitutionally protected fund that would (disregarding this section) be concessional contributions;

if any of your notional taxed contributions for the financial year:

(i) are worked out under section 291-170 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997; or

are not worked out under that section, but only because those notional taxed contributions did not meet the requirements of paragraph 291-170(2)(b) or (4)(b) of that Act;

the amount of those notional taxed contributions;

if your defined benefit contributions for the financial year (worked out excluding contributions and amounts covered by paragraph (a)) exceed your notional taxed contributions for the financial year (also worked out excluding contributions and amounts covered by paragraph (a))—the amount of that excess;

if that sum would otherwise exceed your concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(2) for the financial year.

Note: This subsection does not take into account any increase in your concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(4).

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), treat any amounts covered by subsection 291-25(3) or paragraph 291-165(1)(b) or (c) for the financial year that relate to a *superannuation interest of yours in the fund as if they were contributions made in respect of you for the financial year to the fund.

(3) This section has effect despite sections 291-25 and 291-165 of this Act and section 291-170 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Subdivision 291-D — Other provisions

Guide to Subdivision 291-D

291-460 What this Subdivision is about

The Commissioner has a discretion to disregard concessional contributions or allocate them to a different financial year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

291-465 Commissioner’s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year

Operative provisions

291-465 Commissioner’s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year

The Commissioner may make a written determination that, for the purposes of working out the amount of your excess concessional contributions for a financial year, all or part of your concessional contributions for a financial year is to be:

disregarded; or

allocated instead for the purposes of another financial year specified in the determination.

Conditions for making of determination

The Commissioner may make the determination only if:

you apply for the determination in accordance with this section; and

the Commissioner considers that:

there are special circumstances; and

making the determination is consistent with the object of this Division and Division 292.

Paragraph (2)(a) does not apply if:

(a) the determination relates to a contribution that is an amount the Commissioner pays for your benefit under Part 8 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992; and

the amount represents an amount of a charge payment (within the meaning of section 63A of that Act) paid as a result of a disclosure to which paragraph 74(1)(a) of that Act applies; and

the entity making the disclosure qualified, under section 74 of that Act, for an amnesty in relation to the superannuation guarantee shortfall to which the charge payment relates.

Matters to which regard may be had

In making the determination the Commissioner may have regard to the following:

whether a contribution made in the relevant financial year would more appropriately be allocated towards another financial year instead;

whether it was reasonably foreseeable, when a relevant contribution was made, that you would have excess concessional contributions or excess non-concessional contributions for the relevant financial year, and in particular:

if the relevant contribution is made in respect of you by another individual—the terms of any agreement or arrangement between you and that individual as to the amount and timing of the contribution; and

the extent to which you had control over the making of the contribution;

any other relevant matters.

Requirements for application

The application:

must be in the approved form; and

can only be made after all of the contributions sought to be disregarded or reallocated have been made; and

if you receive an excess concessional contributions determination for the financial year—must be given to the Commissioner within:

60 days after receiving the determination; or

a further period allowed by the Commissioner.

Notification

The Commissioner must give you:

a copy of the determination; or

if the Commissioner decides not to make a determination—notice of that decision.

Review

If you are dissatisfied with:

a determination made under this section in relation to you; or

a decision the Commissioner makes not to make such a determination;

you may object against the determination, or the decision, as the case requires, in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

To avoid doubt:

(a) subject to subsection 14ZVB(3) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, you may also object, on the ground that you are dissatisfied with such a determination or decision, relating to all or part of your *concessional contributions for a *financial year:

(i) under section 175A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 against an assessment made in relation to you for the corresponding income year; or

(ii) under section 97-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 against an *excess concessional contributions determination made in relation to you for the financial year; and

(b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977, the making of a determination under this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.

Division 292 — Excess non-concessional contributions

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 292

292-A Object of this Division

292-B Assessable income and tax offset

292-C Excess non-concessional contributions tax

292-E Excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments

292-F Amending excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments

292-G Collection and recovery

292-H Other provisions

Guide to Division 292

292-1 What this Division is about

This Division limits the superannuation contributions made in a financial year that receive concessional tax treatment.

You become liable for tax if:

your non-concessional contributions exceed an indexed cap; and

a corresponding amount is not released from your superannuation interests.

An amount may be included in your assessable income, and you may become entitled to a tax offset, if your non-concessional contributions exceed that indexed cap.

Subdivision 292-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

292-5 Object of this Division

292-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to ensure, in relation to non-concessional contributions to superannuation, that the amount of concessionally taxed *superannuation benefits that an individual receives results from contributions that have been made gradually over the course of the individual’s life.

Note: Division 291 has the same object, in relation to concessional contributions.

Subdivision 292-B — Assessable income and tax offset

292-15 What this Subdivision is about

An amount is included in your assessable income, and you are entitled to a tax offset, if:

your non-concessional contributions exceed an indexed cap; and

you are not liable to pay excess non-concessional contributions tax for the financial year on the full amount of the excess.

This amount included in your assessable income relates to:

your associated earnings on those excess contributions; and

any amounts that have been released from your superannuation interests.

Table of sections

292-20 Amount in assessable income, and tax offset, relating to your non-concessional contributions

292-25 Amount included in assessable income

292-30 Amount of the tax offset

292-20 Amount in assessable income, and tax offset, relating to your non-concessional contributions

Your assessable income for an income year includes an amount, and you are entitled to a tax offset for the income year, if:

you receive one or more excess non-concessional contributions determinations for a financial year that corresponds to the income year; and

you are not liable to pay excess non-concessional contributions tax for the financial year on the full amount of the excess stated in the most recent of those determinations.

292-25 Amount included in assessable income

The amount included in your assessable income for the income year is equal to the amount of associated earnings stated in the most recent of those determinations.

However, if:

(a) the sum of any amounts paid in response to release authorities issued in relation to those determinations (the total amount) is less than the amount of the excess stated in the most recent of those determinations; and

section 292-467 does not apply to you for the financial year;

the amount included in your assessable income for the income year is equal to the amount of associated earnings that would have been stated in that most recent determination if the total amount had been the amount of the excess stated in that determination.

Note 1: The release authorities are issued under Division 131, or former Division 96, in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: Any amounts paid in response to the release authorities are non-assessable non-exempt income (see section 303-15 or former sections 303-15 and 303-17).

292-30 Amount of the tax offset

The tax offset is equal to 15% of the amount included in your assessable income for the income year under section 292-25.

Note 1: This tax offset compensates for any tax liability of the superannuation provider on earnings from investments made with the contributions making up the excess amount stated in the most recent determination.

Note 2: This offset cannot be refunded, transferred or carried forward (see item 20 of the table in subsection 63-10(1)).

Subdivision 292-C — Excess non-concessional contributions tax

292-75 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision defines non-concessional contributions and excess non-concessional contributions, and sets liability to pay excess non-concessional contributions tax.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

292-80 Liability for excess non-concessional contributions tax

292-85 Your excess non-concessional contributions for a financial year

292-90 Your non-concessional contributions for a financial year

292-95 Contributions arising from structured settlements or orders for personal injuries

292-100 Contribution relating to some CGT small business concessions

292-102 Downsizer contributions

292-103 COVID-19 re-contributions

292-105 CGT cap amount

Operative provisions

292-80 Liability for excess non-concessional contributions tax

You are liable to pay *excess non-concessional contributions tax imposed by the Superannuation (Excess Non-concessional Contributions Tax) Act 2007 if you have *excess non-concessional contributions for a *financial year.

Note: The amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

292-85 Your excess non-concessional contributions for a financial year

Your excess non-concessional contributions

(1) You have excess non-concessional contributions for a *financial year if:

you receive one or more excess non-concessional contributions determinations for the financial year; and

the excess amount stated in the most recent of those determinations exceeds the sum of any amounts paid in response to release authorities issued in relation to those determinations; and

section 292-467 of this Act does not apply to you for the financial year.

Note: The release authorities are issued under Division 131, or former Division 96, in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

(1A) The amount of your excess non-concessional contributions is:

if no amounts were paid as described in paragraph (1)(b)—the excess amount stated in that most recent determination; or

otherwise—the amount of the excess worked out under paragraph (1)(b).

Note: Any excess non-concessional contributions determination you receive after the first one for a financial year is an amended determination.

Your non-concessional contributions cap—general rule

(2) Your non-concessional contributions cap for a *financial year is:

(a) unless paragraph (b) applies—the amount (the general non-concessional contributions cap for the year) that is 4 times your *concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(2) for the year; or

if, immediately before the start of the year, your total superannuation balance equals or exceeds the general transfer balance cap for the year—nil.

Note: This subsection does not take into account any increase in your concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(4).

When you can bring forward your non-concessional contributions cap

(3) Despite subsection (2), work out your non-concessional contributions cap for a *financial year (the first year) under subsection (5), and your non-concessional contributions caps for the following 2 financial years (the second year and third year) under subsections (6) and (7), if:

your non-concessional contributions for the first year exceed the general non-concessional contributions cap for that year; and

paragraph (2)(b) does not apply to you in relation to the first year; and

you are under 75 years at any time in the first year; and

a previous operation of subsection (6) or (7) does not determine your non-concessional contributions cap for the first year; and

(e) the difference (the first year cap space) between the *general transfer balance cap for the first year and your *total superannuation balance immediately before the start of the first year exceeds the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year.

However, do not work out your non-concessional contributions cap for the third year under subsection (7) if the first year cap space does not exceed an amount equal to twice the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year.

Note: If this subsection applies, your non-concessional contributions cap for the third year will be worked out under subsection (2) (unless the third year becomes a new first year under a further application of subsection (3)).

First year of bring forward

(5) Your non-concessional contributions cap for the first year is an amount equal to:

if the first year cap space does not exceed an amount equal to twice the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year—twice the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year; or

otherwise—3 times the general non-concessional contributions cap for the first year.

Second year of bring forward

(6) Your non-concessional contributions cap for the second year is:

if:

your total superannuation balance immediately before the start of the second year is less than the general transfer balance cap for the second year; and

your non-concessional contributions for the first year fall short of your cap for the first year (worked out under subsection (5));

that shortfall; or

otherwise—nil.

Third year of bring forward

(7) Your non-concessional contributions cap for the third year is:

if:

your total superannuation balance immediately before the start of the third year is less than the general transfer balance cap for the third year; and

your non-concessional contributions for the second year fall short of your cap for the second year (worked out under subsection (6));

that shortfall; or

if:

your total superannuation balance immediately before the start of the third year is less than the general transfer balance cap for the third year; and

your cap for the second year is nil; and

your non-concessional contributions for the first year fall short of your cap for the first year (worked out under subsection (5));

that shortfall; or

otherwise—nil.

292-90 Your non-concessional contributions for a financial year

(1) The amount of your non-concessional contributions for a *financial year is the sum of:

each contribution covered under subsection (2); and

each amount covered under subsection (4); and

the amount of your excess concessional contributions (if any) for the financial year.

Modification for released excess concessional contributions

However, if:

(a) you make a valid request under section 131-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to *excess concessional contributions you have for the *financial year; and

a *superannuation provider pays an amount in relation to the release authority issued under section 131-15 in that Schedule in relation to that request;

the amount paid is first increased, by dividing it by 85%, and the increased amount is applied to reduce the amount of excess concessional contributions mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) of this section.

Non-concessional contributions and amounts

A contribution is covered under this subsection if:

it is made in the financial year to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you; and

(b) it is not included in the assessable income of the *superannuation provider in relation to the *superannuation plan, or, by way of a *roll-over superannuation benefit, in the assessable income of any *complying superannuation fund or *RSA provider in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 290-170(5) (about successor funds); and

(c) it is not any of the following:

(i) a Government co-contribution made under the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003;

a contribution covered under section 292-95 (payments that relate to structured settlements or orders for personal injuries);

a contribution covered under section 292-100 (certain CGT-related payments), to the extent that it does not exceed your CGT cap amount when it is made;

a contribution covered under section 292-102 (downsizer contributions);

a contribution covered by section 292-103 (COVID-19 re-contributions);

a contribution made to a constitutionally protected fund (other than a contribution included in the contributions segment of your *superannuation interest in the fund);

contributions not included in the assessable income of the superannuation provider in relation to the superannuation plan because of a choice made under section 295-180;

a contribution that is a roll-over superannuation benefit.

Disregard Subdivision 295-D for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b).

An amount is covered under this subsection if it is any of the following:

an amount in a *complying superannuation plan that is allocated by the *superannuation provider in relation to that plan for you for the year in accordance with conditions specified in the regulations;

the amount of any contribution made to that plan in respect of you in the year that is covered by a valid and acknowledged notice under section 290-170, to the extent that it is not allowable as a deduction for the person making the contribution;

the sum of each contribution made to that plan in respect of you at a time on or after 10 May 2006 when that plan was not a complying superannuation plan (other than a contribution covered under this paragraph in relation to a previous financial year).

292-95 Contributions arising from structured settlements or orders for personal injuries

A contribution is covered under this section if:

the contribution arises from:

the settlement of a claim that satisfies the conditions in subsection (3); or

the settlement of a claim in relation to a personal injury suffered by you under a law of the Commonwealth or of a State or Territory relating to workers compensation; or

the order of a court that satisfies the conditions in subsection (4); and

the contribution is made within 90 days, or such longer period as the Commissioner allows, after the later of the following:

the day of receipt of the payment from which the contribution is made; or

in relation to subparagraph (a)(i) or (iii)—the day mentioned in subsection (2); and

2 legally qualified medical practitioners have certified that, because of the personal injury, it is unlikely that you can ever be gainfully employed in a capacity for which you are reasonably qualified because of education, experience or training; and

no later than the time the contribution is made to a *superannuation plan, you or your *legal personal representative notify the *superannuation provider in relation to the plan, in the approved form, that this section is to apply to the contribution.

For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii), the day is:

for a settlement mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i):

the day on which the agreement mentioned in paragraph (3)(c) was entered into; or

if that agreement depends, for its effectiveness, on being approved (however described) by an order of a court, or on being embodied in a consent order made by a court—the day on which that order was made; or

for an order mentioned in subparagraph (1)(a)(iii)—the day on which the order was made.

For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(a)(i), the conditions are as follows:

the claim:

is for compensation or damages for, or in respect of, personal injury suffered by you; and

is made by you or your *legal personal representative;

the claim is based on the commission of a wrong, or on a right created by statute;

the settlement takes the form of a written agreement between the parties to the claim (whether or not that agreement is approved by an order of a court, or is embodied in a consent order made by a court).

For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(a)(iii), the conditions are as follows:

the order is made in respect of a claim that:

is for compensation or damages for, or in respect of, personal injury suffered by you; and

is made by you or your *legal personal representative;

the claim is based on the commission of a wrong, or on a right created by statute;

the order is not an order approving or endorsing an agreement as mentioned in paragraph (3)(c).

If a claim is both:

for compensation or damages for personal injury suffered by you; and

for some other remedy (for example, compensation or damages for loss of, or damage to, property);

subsections (3) and (4) apply to the claim, but only to the extent that it relates to the compensation or damages referred to in paragraph (a), and only to amounts that, in the settlement agreement, or in the order, are identified as being solely in payment of that compensation or those damages.

If:

you requested the Commissioner to allow a longer period under paragraph (1)(b); and

you are dissatisfied with:

a decision under that paragraph allowing a longer period; or

a decision the Commissioner makes not to allow a longer period;

you may object against the decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

To avoid doubt:

(a) subject to subsection 14ZVC(3) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, you may also object, on the ground that you are dissatisfied with such a decision, relating to all or part of your contributions for a *financial year:

(i) under section 175A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 against an assessment made in relation to you for the corresponding income year; or

(ii) under section 97-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 against an *excess non-concessional contributions determination made in relation to you for the financial year; and

(b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977, the making of a decision under paragraph (1)(b) of this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.

292-100 Contribution relating to some CGT small business concessions

A contribution is covered under this section if:

the contribution is made by you to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you in a financial year; and

the requirement in subsection (2), (4), (7) or (8) is met; and

you choose, in accordance with subsection (9), to apply this section to an amount that is all or part of the contribution.

The requirement in this subsection is met if:

the contribution is equal to all or part of the capital proceeds from a CGT event for which you can disregard any *capital gain under section 152-105 (or would be able to do so, assuming that a capital gain arose from the event); and

the contribution is made on or before the later of the following days:

the day you are required to lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the CGT event happened;

30 days after the day you receive the capital proceeds.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), ignore the requirement in paragraph 152-105(b) if you are permanently incapacitated at the time of the CGT event but were not permanently incapacitated at the time the relevant CGT asset was acquired.

The requirement in this subsection is met if:

just before a CGT event, you were a CGT concession stakeholder of an entity that could, under section 152-110, disregard any *capital gain arising from the CGT event (or would be able to do so, assuming that a capital gain arose from the event); and

the entity makes a payment to you before the later of:

2 years after the CGT event; and

if the CGT event happened because the entity *disposed of the relevant CGT asset—6 months after the latest time a possible financial benefit becomes or could become due under a look-through earnout right relating to that CGT asset and the disposal; and

the contribution is equal to all or part of your stakeholder’s participation percentage (within the meaning of subsection 152-125(2)) of the capital proceeds from the CGT event (but not exceeding the amount of the payment mentioned in paragraph (b)); and

the contribution is made within 30 days after the payment mentioned in paragraph (b).

In determining whether the conditions in subsection (2) or (4) are satisfied for a CGT event in relation to a pre-CGT asset, treat the asset as a post-CGT asset.

For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), ignore the requirement in paragraph 152-110(1)(b) if a significant individual was permanently incapacitated at the time of the CGT event but was not permanently incapacitated when the relevant CGT asset was acquired.

The requirement in this subsection is met if:

the contribution is equal to all or part of the *capital gain from a CGT event that you disregarded under subsection 152-305(1); and

the contribution is made on or before the later of the following days:

the day you are required to lodge your income tax return for the income year in which the CGT event happened;

30 days after the day you receive the capital proceeds from the CGT event.

The requirement in this subsection is met if:

just before a CGT event, you were a CGT concession stakeholder of an entity that could, under subsection 152-305(2), disregard all or part of a *capital gain arising from the CGT event; and

the entity makes a payment to you that satisfies the conditions in section 152-325; and

the contribution is equal to all or part of the capital gain arising from the CGT event (but not exceeding the amount of the payment mentioned in paragraph (b)); and

the contribution is made within 30 days after the payment mentioned in paragraph (b).

To make a choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), you must:

make the choice in the approved form; and

give it to the *superannuation provider in relation to the *complying superannuation plan on or before the time when the contribution is made.

292-102 Downsizer contributions

Criteria for a downsizer contribution

A contribution is covered under this section if:

the contribution is made to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you when you are aged 55 years or over; and

(b) the contribution is an amount equal to all or part of the *capital proceeds received from the *disposal of an *ownership interest (the old interest) in a *dwelling; and

you or your *spouse held the old interest just before the disposal; and

any *capital gain or *capital loss from the disposal of the old interest:

for the case where you held it just before the disposal—is wholly or partially disregarded under Subdivision 118-B (or would have been if you had *acquired it on or after 20 September 1985); or

otherwise—would have been wholly or partially disregarded under Subdivision 118-B had you *acquired the old interest on or after 20 September 1985 and held it for a period before the disposal; and

the condition in subsection (2) is met for the disposal; and

the dwelling is located in *Australia, and is not a caravan, houseboat or other mobile home; and

the contribution is made within 90 days, or such longer period as the Commissioner allows, after the time the change of ownership occurs as a result of the disposal; and

you choose, in accordance with subsection (8), to apply this section to the contribution; and

there is not already a contribution covered under this section, and made to a complying superannuation plan in respect of you, from an earlier choice you made in relation to the disposal of:

another ownership interest in the dwelling that was not a related spousal interest to the old interest; or

an ownership interest in another dwelling.

Note 1: Subparagraph (i)(i) does not prevent another contribution, made for you from the capital proceeds from the disposal of the same interest, from also being a contribution covered under this section.

Note 2: That subparagraph also does not prevent another contribution, made for you from the capital proceeds from the disposal of a related spousal interest, from being a contribution covered under this section.

10-year ownership condition

The condition in this subsection is met for the *disposal of the old interest if either or both of the following paragraphs applies:

at all times during the 10 years ending just before the disposal:

the old interest was held by you, your *spouse or your former spouse; or

an *ownership interest in the land on which the dwelling is situated was held by you, your spouse or your former spouse;

if subsection 118-147(1):

applies because the old interest was a substitute property interest (within the meaning of that subsection) for an old dwelling referred to in paragraph 118-147(1)(a); or

(ii) would have applied as described in subparagraph (i) if paragraph 118-147(1)(a) were modified to refer to a dwelling (the old dwelling) that was your main residence;

you, your spouse or your former spouse *acquired an ownership interest in that old dwelling at least 10 years before the disposal.

Cap on the amount of a downsizer contribution

Note: Section 118-147 deals with a dwelling replacing an earlier dwelling that was compulsorily acquired or destroyed etc.

Despite subsection (1), the contribution is covered under this section only to the extent that it does not exceed the lesser of:

$300,000, less any other contribution that is already covered under this section and made to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you; and

the sum of the capital proceeds from the disposals of:

the old interest; and

any related spousal interest to the old interest;

less the sum of all other contributions that are already covered under this section, in relation to the disposal of the old interest or any related spousal interest to the old interest, and made to complying superannuation plans in respect of you or your *spouse.

Market value substitution rule

In working out capital proceeds for the purposes of paragraph (1)(b) or (3)(b), disregard section 116-30 to the extent that it has the effect of increasing those capital proceeds.

Meaning of related spousal interest

(4) A related spousal interest, to an *ownership interest in a *dwelling, is another ownership interest in the dwelling if:

both ownership interests are *disposed of under the same contract; and

just before the disposal, you *held one of the ownership interests and your *spouse held the other.

When interest held by trustee of deceased estate

For the purposes of determining whether an individual held an interest at a particular time, if the interest was held at the particular time by the trustee of the deceased estate of an individual who was your *spouse when the individual died, the interest is taken to be held at the particular time by that individual.

Review of the period for making the contribution

If:

you requested the Commissioner to allow a longer period under paragraph (1)(g); and

you are dissatisfied with:

a decision under that paragraph allowing a longer period; or

a decision the Commissioner makes not to allow a longer period;

you may object against the decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

To avoid doubt:

(a) subject to subsection 14ZVC(3) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, you may also object, on the ground that you are dissatisfied with such a decision, relating to all or part of your contributions for a *financial year:

(i) under section 175A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 against an assessment made in relation to you for the corresponding income year; or

(ii) under section 97-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 against an *excess non-concessional contributions determination made in relation to you for the financial year; and

(b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977, the making of a decision under paragraph (1)(g) of this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.

Requirements for choices

To make a choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(h), you must:

make the choice in the approved form; and

give it to the *superannuation provider in relation to the *complying superannuation plan at or before the time when the contribution is made.

Commissioner to notify providers if contributions are not downsizer contributions

The Commissioner must, in writing, notify a *superannuation provider that all, or a specified part, of a contribution is not covered under this section if:

the Commissioner is aware that a choice referred to in subsection (8) has been given to the superannuation provider for the contribution; and

the Commissioner is satisfied that the contribution, or that part of the contribution, (as applicable) is not covered under this section.

The Commissioner may give a copy of the notification to APRA.

292-103 COVID-19 re-contributions

A contribution is covered by this section if:

the contribution is made by you to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you in a financial year; and

the contribution is made in the financial year beginning on 1 July 2021, or a later financial year ending on or before 30 June 2030; and

(c) one or more amounts (the COVID-19 early release amounts) have been paid to you from a complying superannuation plan, in either or both of the financial years beginning on 1 July 2019 or 1 July 2020, because you satisfied:

(i) a condition of release specified in item 107A or 207AA of the table in Schedule 1 to the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994; or

(ii) a condition of release specified in item 109AA of the table in Schedule 2 to the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997; and

the amount of the contribution is not more than the total of your COVID-19 early release amounts; and

if you made one or more previous contributions covered by this section—the sum of:

the amount of the contribution; and

the amounts of those previous contributions;

is not more than the total of your COVID-19 early release amounts; and

you choose, in accordance with subsection (2), to apply this section to the contribution.

To make a choice for the purposes of paragraph (1)(f), you must:

make the choice in the approved form; and

give it to the *superannuation provider in relation to the *complying superannuation plan on or before the time when the contribution is made.

292-105 CGT cap amount

(1) Your CGT cap amount at the start of the 2007-2008 *financial year is $1,000,000.

Note: For transitional rules about contributions made in the period from 10 May 2006 to 30 June 2007, see section 292-80 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Reductions and increases

(2) If a contribution covered by section 292-100 is made in respect of you at a time, reduce your CGT cap amount just after that time:

if the contribution falls short of your CGT cap amount at that time—by the amount of the contribution; or

otherwise—to nil.

(3) At the start of each *financial year after the 2007-2008 financial year, increase your CGT cap amount by the amount (if any) by which the index amount for that financial year exceeds the index amount for the previous financial year.

For the purposes of subsection (3), the index amount for the 2007-2008 financial year is $1,000,000. The index amount is then indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the index amount: see section 960-285.

Subdivision 292-E — Excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments

Guide to Subdivision 292-E

292-225 What this Subdivision is about

The Commissioner may make an assessment of a person’s liability to pay excess non-concessional contributions tax, and the excess non-concessional contributions on which that liability is based.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

292-230 Commissioner must make an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment

292-240 Validity of assessment

292-245 Objections

Operative provisions

292-230 Commissioner must make an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment

(1) The Commissioner must make an assessment (an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment) of:

if a person has excess non-concessional contributions for a financial year—the amount of the excess non-concessional contributions; and

the amount (if any) of excess non-concessional contributions tax which the person is liable to pay in relation to the financial year.

The Commissioner must give the person notice in writing of an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment as soon as practicable after making the assessment.

292-240 Validity of assessment

The validity of an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment is not affected because any of the provisions of this Act have not been complied with.

292-245 Objections

If a person is dissatisfied with an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment made in relation to the person, the person may object against the assessment in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 292-F — Amending excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments

Guide to Subdivision 292-F

292-300 What this Subdivision is about

The Commissioner may amend excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments within certain time limits.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

292-305 Amendments within 4 years of the original assessment

292-310 Amended assessments are treated as excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments

292-315 Later amendments—on request

292-320 Later amendments—fraud or evasion

292-325 Further amendment of an amended particular

292-330 Amendment on review etc.

Operative provisions

292-305 Amendments within 4 years of the original assessment

The Commissioner may amend an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for a person for a financial year at any time during the period of 4 years after the *original excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment day for the person for that year.

(2) The original excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment day for a person for a *financial year is the day on which the Commissioner gives the first *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment to the person for the financial year.

292-310 Amended assessments are treated as excess non-concessional contributions tax assessments

(1) Once an amended *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for a person for a *financial year is made, it is taken to be an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for the person for the year.

If the Commissioner amends a person’s excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment, the Commissioner must give the person notice in writing of the amendment as soon as practicable after making the amendment.

292-315 Later amendments—on request

The Commissioner may amend an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for a person for a financial year after the end of the period of 4 years after the *original excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment day for the person for the year if, within that 4 year period:

the person applies for the amendment in the approved form; and

the person gives the Commissioner all the information necessary for making the amendment.

292-320 Later amendments—fraud or evasion

If:

a person (or a *superannuation provider covered under subsection (2)) does not make a full and true disclosure to the Commissioner of the information necessary for an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment for the person for a financial year; and

in making the assessment, the Commissioner makes an under-assessment; and

the Commissioner is of the opinion that the under-assessment is due to fraud or evasion;

the Commissioner may amend the assessment at any time.

A *superannuation provider is covered under this subsection if any of the following conditions are satisfied:

contributions have been made to a *superannuation plan of the provider on behalf of the person in the financial year;

an amount is included in the person’s concessional contributions for the financial year under subsection 291-25(3) because the superannuation provider allocated it to the person;

notional taxed contributions are included in the person’s concessional contributions for the financial year under section 291-165 because of the person’s defined benefit interest in a superannuation plan of the provider.

292-325 Further amendment of an amended particular

If:

(a) an *excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment has been amended (the earlier amendment) in any particular; and

the Commissioner is of the opinion that it would be just to further amend the assessment in that particular;

the Commissioner may do so within a period of 4 years after the earlier amendment.

292-330 Amendment on review etc.

Nothing in this Subdivision prevents the amendment of an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment:

to give effect to a decision on a review or appeal; or

as a result of an objection or pending an appeal or review.

Note: If a person is dissatisfied with a statement given to the Commissioner by a superannuation provider under section 390-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, the person may make a complaint under the AFCA scheme (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001).

Subdivision 292-G — Collection and recovery

Guide to Subdivision 292-G

292-380 What this Subdivision is about

Excess non-concessional contributions tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after notice of assessment and the general interest charge applies to unpaid amounts. Money may be released from a superannuation plan to pay the tax.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

292-385 Due date for payment of excess non-concessional contributions tax

292-390 General interest charge

292-395 Refunds of amounts overpaid

Operative provisions

292-385 Due date for payment of excess non-concessional contributions tax

*Excess non-concessional contributions tax assessed for a person for a financial year is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives the person notice of the excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment.

292-390 General interest charge

If excess non-concessional contributions tax or shortfall interest charge payable by a person remains unpaid after the time by which it is due and payable, the person is liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

starts at the beginning of the day on which the excess non-concessional contributions tax or shortfall interest charge was due to be paid; and

ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the excess non-concessional contributions tax or shortfall interest charge;

general interest charge on any of the excess non-concessional contributions tax or shortfall interest charge.

Note: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

292-395 Refunds of amounts overpaid

Section 172 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Part as if references in that section to tax included references to *excess non-concessional contributions tax.

Subdivision 292-H — Other provisions

Table of sections

292-465 Commissioner’s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year

292-467 Direction that the value of superannuation interests is nil

292-465 Commissioner’s discretion to disregard contributions etc. in relation to a financial year

(1) If you make an application in accordance with subsection (2), the Commissioner may make a written determination that, for the purposes of this Division and Subdivision 97-B in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, all or part of your *non-concessional contributions for a *financial year is to be:

disregarded; or

allocated instead for the purposes of another financial year specified in the determination.

You may apply to the Commissioner in the approved form for a determination under subsection (1). The application can only be made:

after all of the contributions sought to be disregarded or reallocated have been made; and

if you receive one or more excess non-concessional contributions determinations for the financial year—before the end of:

the period of 60 days starting on the day you receive the most recent of those determinations; or

a longer period allowed by the Commissioner.

The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (1) only if he or she considers that:

there are special circumstances; and

making the determination is consistent with the object of this Division.

In making a determination under subsection (1) the Commissioner may have regard to the matters in subsections (5) and (6) and any other relevant matters.

The Commissioner may have regard to whether a contribution made in the relevant financial year would more appropriately be allocated towards another financial year instead.

The Commissioner may have regard to whether it was reasonably foreseeable, when a relevant contribution was made, that you would have excess concessional contributions or excess non-concessional contributions for the relevant financial year, and in particular:

if the relevant contribution is made in respect of you by another person—the terms of any agreement or arrangement between you and that person as to the amount and timing of the contribution; and

the extent to which you had control over the making of the contribution.

The Commissioner must give you a copy of a determination made under subsection (1).

Review

If you are dissatisfied with:

a determination made under this section in relation to you; or

a decision the Commissioner makes not to make such a determination;

you may object against the determination, or the decision, as the case requires, in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

To avoid doubt:

(a) subject to subsection 14ZVC(3) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, you may also object, on the ground that you are dissatisfied with such a determination or decision, relating to all or part of your *non-concessional contributions for a *financial year:

(i) under section 175A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 against an assessment made in relation to you for the corresponding income year; or

(ii) under section 97-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 against an *excess non-concessional contributions determination made in relation to you for the financial year; and

(b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977, the making of a determination under this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.

292-467 Direction that the value of superannuation interests is nil

The Commissioner must, by writing, direct that this section applies to you for a financial year if:

you receive one or more excess non-concessional contributions determinations for the financial year; and

the sum of any amounts paid in response to release authorities issued in relation to those determinations is less than the excess amount stated in the most recent of those determinations; and

the Commissioner is satisfied that the *value of all of your remaining *superannuation interests is nil.

Note 1: The direction means you have no excess non-concessional contributions for the financial year (see paragraph 292-85(1)(c)), even though not all of the excess amount has been released in response to release authorities issued under Division 131, or former Division 96, in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: The direction does not prevent an amount from being included in your assessable income (see Subdivision 292-B).

Note 3: Any excess non-concessional contributions determination you receive after the first one for a financial year is an amended determination.

The Commissioner must give you a copy of the direction.

To avoid doubt:

you may object under section 292-245 against an excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment made in relation to you on the ground that a direction was not made under this section; and

(b) for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977, not making a direction under this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax under this Act.

Division 293 — Sustaining the superannuation contribution concession

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 293

293-A Object of this Division

293-B Sustaining the superannuation contribution concession

293-C When tax is payable

293-D Modifications for defined benefit interests

293-E Modifications for constitutionally protected State higher level office holders

293-F Modifications for Commonwealth justices

293-G Modifications for temporary residents who depart Australia

293-H Other provisions

Guide to Division 293

293-1 What this Division is about

This Division reduces the concessional tax treatment of certain superannuation contributions made for high income individuals.

The high income threshold is $250,000.

There are special rules for defined benefit interests, constitutionally protected State higher level office holders, certain Commonwealth justices and temporary residents who depart Australia.

Note: Part 3-20 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains rules about the administration of the Division 293 tax.

Subdivision 293-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

Operative provisions

293-5 Object of this Division

Operative provisions

293-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to reduce the concessional tax treatment of superannuation contributions for high income individuals.

Subdivision 293-B — Sustaining the superannuation contribution concession

Guide to Subdivision 293-B

293-10 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision reduces the superannuation tax concession for high income earners.

An individual’s income is added to certain superannuation contributions and compared to the high income threshold of $250,000. A tax is payable on the excess, or on the superannuation contributions (whichever is less).

The tax is not payable in respect of excess concessional contributions.

Table of sections

Liability for tax

293-15 Liability for tax

293-20 Your taxable contributions

Low tax contributions

293-25 Your low tax contributions

293-30 Low tax contributed amounts

Liability for tax

293-15 Liability for tax

You are liable to pay Division 293 tax if you have taxable contributions for an income year.

Note: The amount of the tax is set out in the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013.

293-20 Your taxable contributions

If the sum of:

your *income for surcharge purposes for an income year (disregarding your *reportable superannuation contributions); and

your low tax contributions for the corresponding financial year;

exceeds $250,000, you have taxable contributions for the income year equal to the lesser of the low tax contributions and the amount of the excess.

(2) However, you do not have taxable contributions for an income year if the amount of your *low tax contributions is nil.

Low tax contributions

293-25 Your low tax contributions

The amount of your low tax contributions for a *financial year is:

the low tax contributed amounts covered by section 293-30 for the financial year; less

your excess concessional contributions for the financial year (if any).

Note 1: Low tax contributions are modified for defined benefit interests (see Subdivision 293-D).

Note 2: Modifications in Subdivision 293-E (about constitutionally protected State higher level office holders) and Subdivision 293-F (about Commonwealth justices) affect the amount of low tax contributions.

293-30 Low tax contributed amounts

The low tax contributed amounts covered by this section for a financial year are the sum of the contributions covered by subsection (2) and the amounts covered by subsection (5) for the financial year.

Note: Low tax contributed amounts covered by this section are modified for State higher level office holders (see Subdivision 293-E).

Contributions to complying superannuation plans

A contribution is covered under this section for a financial year if:

it is made in the financial year to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you; and

it is included:

in the assessable income of the *superannuation provider in relation to the plan; or

by way of a roll-over superannuation benefit, in the assessable income of a complying superannuation fund or RSA provider in the circumstances mentioned in subsection 290-170(5) (about successor funds).

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), disregard:

table item 5.3 in section 50-25 (about income tax exemption for constitutionally protected funds); and

Subdivision 295-D (about excluded contributions).

Exceptions

Despite subsection (2), a contribution is not covered under this section if it is any of the following:

an amount mentioned in subsection 295-200(2) (about amounts transferred from foreign superannuation funds);

an amount mentioned in item 2 of the table in subsection 295-190(1) (about certain roll-over superannuation benefits);

(c) an amount that the Commissioner pays for your benefit under Part 8 of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992, if:

the amount represents an amount of a charge payment (within the meaning of section 63A of that Act) paid as a result of a disclosure to which paragraph 74(1)(a) of that Act applies; and

the entity making the disclosure qualified, under section 74 of that Act, for an amnesty in relation to the superannuation guarantee shortfall to which the charge payment relates.

Amounts allocated in relation to a complying superannuation plan

An amount in a *complying superannuation plan is covered under this section if it is allocated by the *superannuation provider in relation to the plan for you for the financial year in accordance with conditions specified by a regulation made for the purposes of subsection 291-25(3).

Subdivision 293-C — When tax is payable

Guide to Subdivision 293-C

293-60 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision has rules about payment of Division 293 tax.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

293-65 When tax is payable—original assessments

293-70 When tax is payable—amended assessments

293-75 General interest charge

Operative provisions

293-65 When tax is payable—original assessments

Your assessed Division 293 tax for an income year is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives you notice of the assessment of the amount of the Division 293 tax.

Exception for tax deferred to a debt account

However, subsection (1) does not apply to an amount of assessed Division 293 tax that is *deferred to a debt account for a *superannuation interest.

Note 1: For assessments of Division 293 tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: For deferred to a debt account, see Division 133 in that Schedule.

Note 3: For release of money from a superannuation plan to pay these amounts, see Division 131 in that Schedule.

293-70 When tax is payable—amended assessments

If the Commissioner amends your assessment, any extra assessed Division 293 tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 21 days after the day the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

Exception for tax deferred to a debt account

However, subsection (1) does not apply to an amount of extra assessed Division 293 tax that is *deferred to a debt account for a *superannuation interest.

Note 1: For deferred to a debt account, see Division 133 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: For release of money from a superannuation plan to pay these amounts, see Division 131 in that Schedule.

293-75 General interest charge

If an amount of assessed Division 293 tax or shortfall interest charge on assessed Division 293 tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

begins on the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and

ends on the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the assessed Division 293 tax or the shortfall interest charge;

general interest charge on any of the assessed Division 293 tax or the shortfall interest charge.

Note 1: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: Shortfall interest charge is worked out under Division 280 in Schedule 1 to that Act.

Note 3: See section 5-10 of this Act for when the amount of shortfall interest charge becomes due and payable.

Subdivision 293-D — Modifications for defined benefit interests

Guide to Subdivision 293-D

293-100 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision modifies the meaning of low tax contributions for individuals who have a defined benefit interest or interests in a financial year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

293-105 Low tax contributions—modification for defined benefit interests

293-115 Defined benefit contributions

Operative provisions

293-105 Low tax contributions—modification for defined benefit interests

Despite section 293-25, if you have a *defined benefit interest or interests in a *financial year, the amount of your low tax contributions for the financial year is worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Start with the low tax contributed amounts covered by section 293-30 for the *financial year, to the extent to which they do not relate to the *defined benefit interest or interests.

Step 2. Subtract your excess concessional contributions for the financial year (if any).

Step 3. Add your defined benefit contributions for the financial year in respect of the defined benefit interest or interests.

The result (but not less than nil) is the amount of your low tax contributions for the financial year.

Note: The result of step 2 could be nil, or a negative amount.

Note: Modifications in Subdivision 293-E (about constitutionally protected State higher level office holders) and Subdivision 293-F (about Commonwealth justices) affect the amount of low tax contributions.

293-115 Defined benefit contributions

(1) Your defined benefit contributions, for a *financial year in respect of a *defined benefit interest, has the meaning given by regulation.

Note: There are modifications in sections 293-150 (about constitutionally protected State higher level office holders) and 293-195 (about Commonwealth justices).

(2) A regulation made for the purposes of subsection (1) may provide for a method of determining the amount of the defined benefit contributions.

A regulation made for the purposes of subsection (1) may define the defined benefit contributions, and the amount of defined benefit contributions, in different ways depending on any of the following matters:

the person who has the *superannuation interest that is or includes the defined benefit interest;

the *superannuation plan in which the superannuation interest exists;

the *superannuation provider in relation to the superannuation plan;

any other matter.

A regulation made for the purposes of subsection (1) may specify circumstances in which the amount of defined benefit contributions for a financial year is nil.

Subsections (2), (3) and (4) do not limit a regulation that may be made for the purposes of this section.

Subdivision 293-E — Modifications for constitutionally protected State higher level office holders

Guide to Subdivision 293-E

293-140 What this Subdivision is about

Constitutionally protected State higher level office holders do not pay Division 293 tax in respect of contributions to constitutionally protected funds, unless the contributions are made as part of a salary package.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

293-145 Who this Subdivision applies to

293-150 Low tax contributions—modification for CPFs

293-155 High income threshold—effect of modification

293-160 Salary packaged contributions

Operative provisions

293-145 Who this Subdivision applies to

This Subdivision applies to an individual for an income year if:

the individual has a *superannuation interest in a constitutionally protected fund in the corresponding financial year; and

at any time in the income year, the individual is declared by regulation to be an individual to whom this Subdivision applies.

(3) Nothing in this Subdivision limits section 6 of the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013.

Note: Section 6 of the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013 provides that Division 293 tax is not imposed in relation to a person if the imposition would exceed the legislative power of the Commonwealth.

293-150 Low tax contributions—modification for CPFs

This section applies for the purpose of working out under section 293-25 or 293-105 the amount of the individual’s low tax contributions for the financial year corresponding to the income year.

Modified low tax contributed amounts in CPFs

Despite section 293-30, the low tax contributed amounts covered by that section for the financial year do not include any contributions to a constitutionally protected fund, other than contributions covered by section 293-160 (about salary packaged contributions).

Modified defined benefit contributions in CPFs

(3) Despite section 293-115, the individual’s defined benefit contributions for the *financial year in respect of a *defined benefit interest in a *constitutionally protected fund are equal to:

unless paragraph (b) applies—nil; or

if, having regard to subsection (2) of this section, the low tax contributed amounts covered by section 293-30 for the year include contributions in respect of the defined benefit interest—the amount of those contributions.

293-155 High income threshold—effect of modification

For the purpose of working out the extent (if any) to which the sum mentioned in subsection 293-20(1) for the individual exceeds the $250,000 threshold mentioned in that subsection, disregard section 293-150.

To avoid doubt, the effect of subsection (1) is that the amount of the individual’s taxable contributions for an income year is the lesser of:

the excess (if any) mentioned in subsection 293-20(1) (worked out disregarding section 293-150) for the income year; and

the individual’s low tax contributions for the corresponding financial year (worked out having regard to section 293-150).

293-160 Salary packaged contributions

A contribution made to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of an individual is covered by this section if it is made because the individual agreed with an entity, or an associate of an entity:

for the contribution to be made; and

in return, for the *withholding payments covered by subsection (2) that are to be made to the individual by the entity to be reduced (including to nil).

(2) This subsection covers a *withholding payment covered by any of the provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 listed in the table.

Subdivision 293-F — Modifications for Commonwealth justices

Guide to Subdivision 293-F

293-185 What this Subdivision is about

Division 293 tax is not payable by Commonwealth justices and judges in respect of contributions to a defined benefit interest established under the Judges’ Pensions Act 1968.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

293-190 Who this Subdivision applies to

293-195 Defined benefit contributions—modified treatment of contributions under the Judges’ Pensions Act 1968

293-200 High income threshold—effect of modification

Operative provisions

293-190 Who this Subdivision applies to

This Subdivision applies to an individual if the individual is a Justice of the High Court, or a justice or judge of a court created by the Parliament, at any time on or after the start of the individual’s 2012-13 income year.

(2) Nothing in this Subdivision limits section 6 of the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013.

Note: Section 6 of the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013 provides that Division 293 tax is not imposed in relation to a person if the imposition would exceed the legislative power of the Commonwealth.

293-195 Defined benefit contributions—modified treatment of contributions under the Judges’ Pensions Act 1968

This section applies for the purpose of working out under section 293-105 the amount of the individual’s low tax contributions for any financial year.

(2) Despite section 293-115 and subsection 293-150(3), the individual’s defined benefit contributions for a *financial year for a *defined benefit interest in a *superannuation fund established under the Judges’ Pensions Act 1968 are nil.

293-200 High income threshold—effect of modification

For the purpose of working out the extent (if any) to which the sum mentioned in subsection 293-20(1) for the individual exceeds the $250,000 threshold mentioned in that subsection, disregard section 293-195.

To avoid doubt, the effect of subsection (1) is that the amount of the individual’s taxable contributions for an income year is the lesser of:

the excess (if any) mentioned in subsection 293-20(1) (worked out disregarding section 293-195) for the income year; and

the individual’s low tax contributions for the corresponding financial year (worked out having regard to section 293-195).

Subdivision 293-G — Modifications for temporary residents who depart Australia

Guide to Subdivision 293-G

293-225 What this Subdivision is about

If you receive a departing Australia superannuation payment, you are entitled to a refund of any Division 293 tax you have paid.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

293-230 Who is entitled to a refund

293-235 Amount of the refund

293-240 Entitlement to refund stops all Division 293 tax liabilities

Operative provisions

293-230 Who is entitled to a refund

You are entitled to a refund if:

you have made payments of any of the following:

assessed Division 293 tax;

(ii) a voluntary payment made under section 133-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for the purpose of reducing the amount by which a debt account for a *superannuation interest is in debit;

debt account discharge liability; and

you receive a departing Australia superannuation payment; and

you apply to the Commissioner in the approved form for the refund.

Note: How the refund is applied is set out in Part IIB of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

293-235 Amount of the refund

The amount of the refund to which you are entitled is the sum of the payments mentioned in paragraph 293-230(a) that you have made.

However, the amount of the refund is reduced by the amount of any refunds to which you are entitled under a previous application of this Subdivision.

Exception—Division 293 tax attributable to period when you are an Australian resident

Despite subsection (1), if:

at any time in your 2012-13 income year, or a later income year, you are an Australian resident (but not a *temporary resident); and

a payment mentioned in paragraph 293-230(a) that you have made relates, or is reasonably attributable, to that income year;

the payment is to be disregarded in working out under subsection (1) of this section the amount of the refund to which you are entitled.

293-240 Entitlement to refund stops all Division 293 tax liabilities

The Commissioner may decide to release you from any existing or future liability to pay Division 293 tax or debt account discharge liability if:

you become entitled to a refund under section 293-230; or

you would become entitled to such a refund, if you were to pay the liability and paragraph 293-230(c) were disregarded.

The Commissioner may take such action as is necessary to give effect to a decision under subsection (1).

Subdivision 293-H — Other provisions

Guide to Subdivision 293-H

293-245 What this Subdivision is about

This Division has effect despite subsection 73(3A) of the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

293-250 Interaction with the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988

Operative provisions

293-250 Interaction with the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988

This Division has effect despite subsection 73(3A) of the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988.

Note: That subsection relates to the remuneration of judges and magistrates of the Australian Capital Territory.

Division 294 — Transfer balance cap

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 294

294-A Object of this Division

294-B Transfer balance account

294-C Transfer balance debits

294-D Modifications for certain defined benefit income streams

294-E Modifications for death benefits dependants who are children

294-F Excess transfer balance tax

Guide to Division 294

294-1 What this Division is about

There is a cap on the total amount you can transfer into the retirement phase of superannuation (where earnings are exempt from taxation).

Credits are added to a transfer balance account when you transfer amounts.

If the balance in your account exceeds the cap, you will be required to remove the excess from the retirement phase, and you will be liable to pay excess transfer balance tax.

Note: Division 136 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains rules about excess transfer balance determinations and commutation authorities.

Subdivision 294-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

Operative provisions

294-5 Object of this Division

Operative provisions

294-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to limit the total amount of an individual’s *superannuation income streams that receive an earnings tax exemption.

Subdivision 294-B — Transfer balance account

Guide to Subdivision 294-B

294-10 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision creates a transfer balance account for you, and credits it, if you have a superannuation income stream in the retirement phase.

It also provides for a transfer balance cap and identifies when you have excess transfer balance.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

294-15 When you have a transfer balance account

294-20 Meaning of retirement phase recipient

294-25 Transfer balance credits

294-30 Excess transfer balance

294-35 Your transfer balance cap

294-40 Proportionally indexed transfer balance cap

294-45 Transfer balance account ends

294-50 Assumptions about income streams

294-55 Repayment of limited recourse borrowing arrangement

Operative provisions

294-15 When you have a transfer balance account

(1) You have a transfer balance account if you are, or have at any time been, the *retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream.

You start to have the transfer balance account on the later of:

1 July 2017; and

the day you first start to be a retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream.

294-20 Meaning of retirement phase recipient

(1) You are the retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream at a time if:

the superannuation income stream is in the *retirement phase at that time; and

a superannuation income stream benefit from the superannuation income stream is payable to you at that time.

(2) You are also the retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream at a time if:

the superannuation income stream is in the *retirement phase at that time; and

the superannuation income stream is a deferred superannuation income stream; and

a superannuation income stream benefit from the superannuation income stream will be payable to you after that time.

294-25 Transfer balance credits

(1) The following table sets out when a credit arises in your *transfer balance account and the amount of the credit. The credit is called a transfer balance credit.

Note 1: The amount of the transfer balance credit is modified for certain capped defined benefit income streams: see Subdivision 294-D.

Note 2: For the meaning of excess transfer balance earnings, see section 294-235.

Note 3: If a payment split applies to payments from the superannuation income stream, a debit arises under section 294-90.

No crediting of earnings if determination issued

Despite item 3 of the table in subsection (1), no credit arises in your transfer balance account under that item because of excess transfer balance at the end of a day if the day is in the period:

starting on the day the Commissioner makes an excess transfer balance determination in respect of you; and

ending on:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—the first day on which the sum of all transfer balance debits arising in your transfer balance account since the determination was issued equals or exceeds the crystallised reduction amount; or

if a transfer balance credit arises in your transfer balance account before the day mentioned in subparagraph (i)—the day on which that credit arises.

Note: For provisions about excess transfer balance determinations, see Division 136 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Regulations may provide for exceptions

The regulations may provide that an item of the table in subsection (1) does not apply to a class of *superannuation income streams specified in the regulations.

294-30 Excess transfer balance

(1) You have excess transfer balance at a particular time if, at that time, the *transfer balance in your *transfer balance account exceeds your *transfer balance cap at that time. The amount of the excess transfer balance is the amount of the excess.

Note: There is a modification for certain capped defined benefit income streams: see Subdivision 294-D.

(2) The transfer balance in your *transfer balance account at a time equals:

the sum of the transfer balance credits in the account at that time; less

the sum of the transfer balance debits (if any) in the account at that time.

Note 1: For transfer balance debits, see Subdivision 294-C.

Note 2: There is no consequence for having a negative transfer balance.

294-35 Your transfer balance cap

(1) Your transfer balance cap for the *financial year in which you first start to have a *transfer balance account is equal to the *general transfer balance cap for that financial year.

Note: The amount of the transfer balance cap is modified for child recipients: see Subdivision 294-E.

(2) Your transfer balance cap for a later *financial year is equal to your transfer balance cap for the previous year, subject to section 294-40 (which is about proportional indexation).

(3) The general transfer balance cap is:

for the 2017-2018 financial year—$1,600,000; or

for the 2018-2019 financial year or a later financial year—the amount worked out by indexing annually the amount mentioned in paragraph (a).

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the amount of the cap: see section 960-285.

294-40 Proportionally indexed transfer balance cap

(1) This section applies to increase your transfer balance cap for a *financial year (other than the financial year in which you first start to have a *transfer balance account) if:

the general transfer balance cap is increased as a result of indexation for the financial year; and

at no time before the start of that financial year has the transfer balance in your transfer balance account at the end of a day exceeded your transfer balance cap.

(2) Your transfer balance cap is increased for the *financial year by the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

indexation increase means the amount by which the *general transfer balance cap for the *financial year increased as a result of indexation.

unused cap percentage is worked out by:

identifying the highest transfer balance in your transfer balance account at the end of any day up to the end of the previous financial year; and

identifying the day on which the transfer balance account had that transfer balance at the end of the day, or, if your transfer balance account had that transfer balance at the end of more than one day, the earliest of those days; and

expressing the transfer balance identified in paragraph (a) as a percentage (rounded down to the nearest whole number) of your transfer balance cap on the day identified in paragraph (b); and

subtracting the result of paragraph (c) from 100%.

(3) However, if the highest *transfer balance mentioned in paragraph (a) of the definition of unused cap percentage in subsection (2) is less than nil, that unused cap percentage is taken to be 100%.

294-45 Transfer balance account ends

The transfer balance account ceases when the *retirement phase recipient dies.

294-50 Assumptions about income streams

Subsections (2) and (3) apply for the purposes of working out the following matters at a time:

whether you have a transfer balance account;

the transfer balance in your transfer balance account.

(2) In working out whether there is a superannuation income stream at a time:

have regard only to facts and circumstances that exist at that time; and

assume a requirement will be met, to the extent (if any) that:

the requirement arises under a provision of the *taxation law or under any rules or standards under which a benefit is, or is purported to be, provided; and

meeting the requirement is a condition for there to be a superannuation income stream at that time; and

it is not possible to determine, having regard only to facts and circumstances that exist at that time, whether or not the requirement has been met.

(3) In working out whether a *superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase at a time, disregard the operation of subsection 307-80(4), if the time is before the end of the 60-day period mentioned in paragraph (c) of that subsection.

294-55 Repayment of limited recourse borrowing arrangement

A transfer balance credit arises in your transfer balance account if:

(a) a *superannuation provider makes a payment in respect of a *borrowing under an *arrangement that is covered by the exception in subsection 67A(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (which is about limited recourse borrowing arrangements); and

as a result, there is an increase in the *value of a *superannuation interest that supports a superannuation income stream of which you are the *retirement phase recipient; and

the superannuation interest is in a small superannuation fund at the time of the payment.

The amount of the credit is the amount of the increase in *value.

The credit arises at the time of the payment.

Subdivision 294-C — Transfer balance debits

Guide to Subdivision 294-C

294-75 What this Subdivision is about

A debit arises in your transfer balance account when superannuation income streams that were previously credited (because they receive the earnings tax exemption) are reduced (other than by draw-downs or investment losses) or lose the earnings tax exemption.

A debit also arises in your transfer balance account when you make a contribution relating to a structured settlement or personal injury, or where certain events occur that result in you having reduced superannuation.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

294-80 Transfer balance debits

294-85 Certain events that result in reduced superannuation

294-90 Payment splits

294-95 Payment splits—no double debiting

Operative provisions

294-80 Transfer balance debits

(1) The following table sets out when a debit arises in your *transfer balance account and the amount of the debit. The debit is called a transfer balance debit.

Structured settlement contributions

(2) Each of the following is a structured settlement contribution in respect of you:

a contribution to a *complying superannuation plan in respect of you that is covered under section 292-95 (about structured settlements or orders for personal injuries);

a contribution to a complying superannuation plan in respect of you that would be covered under section 292-95 if:

the section applied to contributions made before 10 May 2006; and

paragraphs 292-95(1)(b) and (d) were disregarded.

Regulations may provide for exceptions

The regulations may provide that an item of the table in subsection (1) does not apply to a class of *superannuation income streams specified in the regulations.

294-85 Certain events that result in reduced superannuation

A transfer balance debit arises in your transfer balance account if:

subsection (2) or (5) provides that the debit arises; and

you notify the Commissioner in the approved form that the debit has arisen.

Fraud or dishonesty

A debit arises if:

a loss is suffered by a superannuation income stream provider; and

as a result, the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports a superannuation income stream of which you are the *retirement phase recipient is reduced; and

the loss is a result of fraud or dishonesty; and

an individual has been convicted of an offence involving that fraud or dishonesty.

(3) The amount of the debit equals the amount by which the *value of the *superannuation interest is reduced as a result of the loss.

The debit arises at the time of the loss.

Payments under section 139ZQ of the Bankruptcy Act 1966

A debit arises if:

(a) an amount is paid in compliance with a notice given under section 139ZQ of the Bankruptcy Act 1966; and

as a result, the *value of a *superannuation interest that supports a superannuation income stream of which you are the *retirement phase recipient is reduced.

The amount of the debit is the amount paid to the trustee in bankruptcy.

The debit arises at the time of the payment.

294-90 Payment splits

A transfer balance debit arises in your transfer balance account if:

subsection (2) provides that the debit arises; and

the Commissioner is notified in the approved form that the debit has arisen.

Payment splits

A debit arises if:

a *superannuation interest is subject to a payment split but remains an interest of the member spouse; and

the superannuation interest supports a superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase; and

as a result of the payment split, a proportion of all superannuation income stream benefits from the income stream is to be paid to a non-member spouse; and

as a result, the member spouse and the non-member spouse are both *retirement phase recipients of the superannuation income stream.

The amount of the debit is:

if you are the member spouse—the proportion mentioned in paragraph (2)(c); and

if you are the non-member spouse—the remaining proportion;

of the *value, on the day the debit arises, of the *superannuation interest that supports the superannuation income stream affected by the payment split.

The debit arises at the later of:

(a) the operative time (within the meaning of Part VIIIB or VIIIC (as the case may be) of the Family Law Act 1975) for the *payment split; and

at the start of the day you first start to have a transfer balance account.

294-95 Payment splits—no double debiting

If a transfer balance debit, worked out by reference to a particular proportion, arises in your transfer balance account because a *superannuation interest is subject to a payment split, each of the following debits arising in your account at a later time in respect of the same interest is to be reduced by the same proportion:

a debit that arises under item 1 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) (about commutations), but only if the commuted income stream is a capped defined benefit income stream;

a debit that arises under item 3 of that table (about events that result in reduced superannuation);

a debit that arises under item 5 or 6 of that table (about income streams that stop being in the retirement phase).

Subdivision 294-D — Modifications for certain defined benefit income streams

Guide to Subdivision 294-D

294-120 What this Subdivision is about

Certain defined benefit lifetime pensions that are subject to commutation restrictions cannot result in excess transfer balance (instead, Subdivision 303-A applies to the superannuation income stream benefits).

Certain commutation-restricted income streams started before 1 July 2017 are covered by the same modification.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

294-125 When this Subdivision applies

294-130 Meaning of capped defined benefit income stream

294-135 Transfer balance credit—special rule for capped defined benefit income streams

294-140 Excess transfer balance—special rule for capped defined benefit income streams

294-145 Transfer balance debits—special rules for capped defined benefit income streams

Operative provisions

294-125 When this Subdivision applies

This Subdivision applies to you if you are the *retirement phase recipient of a capped defined benefit income stream.

294-130 Meaning of capped defined benefit income stream

(1) A *superannuation income stream is a capped defined benefit income stream if it is:

covered by an item of the following table; and

if it is covered by any of items 2 to 7 of that table—it is in the *retirement phase just before 1 July 2017.

(2) A *superannuation income stream is also a capped defined benefit income stream if the income stream is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection.

294-135 Transfer balance credit—special rule for capped defined benefit income streams

Section 294-25 applies in relation to a capped defined benefit income stream as if a reference in that section to the *value of a *superannuation interest were a reference to the *special value of the superannuation interest.

Meaning of special value—lifetime products

(2) The special value, at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 294-130(1), is the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

annual entitlement is worked out by:

dividing the amount of the first superannuation income stream benefit you are entitled to receive from the income stream just after that time by the number of whole days to which that benefit relates; and

multiplying the result by 365.

Meaning of special value—life expectancy and market linked products

(3) The special value, at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream covered by any of items 3 to 7 of the table in subsection 294-130(1), is the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

annual entitlement has the same meaning as in subsection (2) of this section.

remaining term means the number of years remaining at that time in the period throughout which *superannuation income stream benefits are payable under the income stream, rounded up to the next whole number.

Regulations

(4) The regulations may specify a method for determining the special value of a *superannuation interest that supports a *superannuation income stream prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of subsection 294-130(2).

294-140 Excess transfer balance—special rule for capped defined benefit income streams

(1) Despite section 294-30, you have excess transfer balance at a particular time if, at that time, the *transfer balance in your *transfer balance account:

exceeds your transfer balance cap at that time; and

exceeds your capped defined benefit balance from subsection (3) of this section at that time.

(2) The amount of the excess transfer balance is the lesser of the 2 excesses.

Note: For modifications of the tax treatment of benefits paid from capped defined benefit income streams, see Subdivision 303-A.

Your capped defined benefit balance

(3) You have an amount under this subsection (a capped defined benefit balance) at a time equal to:

the sum of the transfer balance credits in your transfer balance account at that time in respect of *capped defined benefit income streams; less

the sum of the transfer balance debits (if any) in your transfer balance account at that time in respect of capped defined benefit income streams.

294-145 Transfer balance debits—special rules for capped defined benefit income streams

Debit for commutation

Item 1 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) applies in relation to a capped defined benefit income stream as if the reference in column 2 of that item to the amount of the superannuation lump sum were a reference to:

in a case where the commutation mentioned in column 1 of that item is a commutation in full—the *debit value, just before the commutation takes place, of the *superannuation interest that supports the capped defined benefit income stream; or

in a case where that commutation is a commutation in part:

if the capped defined benefit income stream is, or was at any time, covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 294-130(1)—the debit value mentioned in paragraph (a), multiplied by the fraction mentioned in subsection (1A); or

if the capped defined benefit income stream is, or was at any time, covered by any of items 3 to 7 of the table in subsection 294-130(1)—the amount mentioned in subsection (1B).

For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(i), the fraction is:

where:

SV just after commutation means the *special value, just after the commutation takes place, of the *superannuation interest that supports the *capped defined benefit income stream.

SV just before commutation means the *special value, just before the commutation takes place, of the *superannuation interest that supports the *capped defined benefit income stream.

For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii), the amount is the lesser of the following:

the *debit value mentioned in paragraph (1)(a);

the amount (disregarding this section) of the superannuation lump sum you received because of the commutation (as mentioned in item 1 of the table in subsection 294-80(1)).

Debit for events that result in reduced superannuation

Item 3 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) (about events that result in reduced superannuation) applies in relation to a capped defined benefit income stream as if the amount of the debit provided for in section 294-85 was the *debit value, just before the loss or payment reduces the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports the capped defined benefit income stream, multiplied by the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

SV just after event means the *special value, worked out just after the loss or payment reduces the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports the *capped defined benefit income stream.

SV just before event means the *special value, worked out just before the loss or payment reduces the *value of the *superannuation interest that supports the *capped defined benefit income stream.

Debit for payment split

Item 4 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) (about a debit for a payment split) applies in relation to a capped defined benefit income stream as if the reference in section 294-90 to the *value of the *superannuation interest were a reference to the *debit value of the superannuation interest.

Debits for loss of earnings exemption

Items 5 and 6 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) apply in relation to an income stream that is, or was, a capped defined benefit income stream as if the reference in the item to the *value of a *superannuation interest were a reference to the *debit value of the superannuation interest.

Meaning of debit value

(5) The debit value, at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream covered by item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 294-130(1), is:

the amount of the transfer balance credit that arose in your transfer balance account in respect of the income stream; less

the amount of any transfer balance debits (apart from debits arising under item 4 of the table in subsection 294-80(1)) that have arisen in your transfer balance account in respect of the income stream before that time.

(6) The debit value, at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream covered by any of items 3 to 7 of the table in subsection 294-130(1) is:

the amount of the transfer balance credit that arose in your transfer balance account in respect of the income stream; less

the sum of the following:

the amount of any transfer balance debits (apart from debits arising under item 4 of the table in subsection 294-80(1)) that have arisen in your transfer balance account in respect of the income stream before that time;

if item 1 of the table in subsection 294-80(1) applies in relation to the income stream because the income stream is commuted—the amount worked out under subsection (6A).

The amount is the sum of the following:

(a) the total amount of *superannuation income stream benefits that you were entitled to receive from the income stream before the start of the financial year in which the commutation takes place;

(b) if regulation 1.07B of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 applies to the income stream—the greater of the following:

the minimum amount under subregulation 1.07B(4) of those regulations for the income stream for that financial year;

the total amount of superannuation income stream benefits that you received from the income stream in that financial year (other than superannuation income stream benefits that you were entitled to receive from the income stream before the start of that financial year);

(c) if regulation 1.07C of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 applies to the income stream—the greater of the following:

the minimum amount under subregulation 1.07C(3) of those regulations for the income stream for that financial year;

the total amount of superannuation income stream benefits that you received from the income stream in that financial year (other than superannuation income stream benefits that you were entitled to receive from the income stream before the start of that financial year);

(d) if regulation 1.08 of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 applies to the income stream—the greater of the following:

the minimum amount under regulation 1.08 of those regulations for the income stream for that financial year;

the total amount of superannuation income stream benefits that you received from the income stream in that financial year (other than superannuation income stream benefits that you were entitled to receive from the income stream before the start of that financial year).

Regulations

(7) The regulations may specify a method for determining the debit value of a *superannuation interest that supports a *superannuation income stream prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of subsection 294-130(2).

Subdivision 294-E — Modifications for death benefits dependants who are children

Guide to Subdivision 294-E

294-170 What this Subdivision is about

If you are a death benefits dependant, and a child, you are not required to use your retirement transfer balance cap to receive a death benefits income stream.

However, there is a cap on the total amount of your death benefits income streams that receives the earnings tax exemption.

This cap is based on the deceased’s superannuation interests in the retirement phase, or, if the deceased did not have any superannuation interests in the retirement phase, on the transfer balance cap.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

294-175 When this Subdivision applies

294-180 Transfer balance account ends

294-185 Transfer balance cap—special rule for child recipient

294-190 Cap increment—child recipient just before 1 July 2017

294-195 Cap increment—child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had no transfer balance account

294-200 Cap increment—child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had transfer balance account

Operative provisions

294-175 When this Subdivision applies

This Subdivision applies to you if you are a child recipient of a *superannuation income stream.

(2) You are a child recipient of a *superannuation income stream if:

because of the death of a person, you are a *retirement phase recipient of the superannuation income stream; and

you are a *child, and a death benefits dependant, of the deceased; and

(c) you are covered by paragraph 6.21(2A)(b) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994 or paragraph 4.24(3A)(b) of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997 (which are about children who are under age 18, or under age 25 and financially dependent or who have a disability).

294-180 Transfer balance account ends

Despite sections 294-15 and 294-45, your transfer balance account ceases at a time if:

just before that time, you were a *child recipient of one or more *superannuation income streams; and

just after that time, you are no longer a child recipient of any superannuation income stream; and

no transfer balance credits arose in the transfer balance account in respect of a superannuation income stream of which you were a *retirement phase recipient, but not a child recipient.

If you again start to have a transfer balance account at a later time, this Division applies in relation to that later transfer balance account as if it were the only transfer balance account you have had.

294-185 Transfer balance cap—special rule for child recipient

(1) Despite section 294-35, your transfer balance cap on a day is the sum of the cap increments that have arisen under this Subdivision on and before that day.

Note: Your transfer balance cap is not worked out on a financial year basis and it is not indexed.

(2) However, if there are one or more *superannuation income streams of which you are, on that day, a *retirement phase recipient but not a *child recipient, your transfer balance cap on that day is the sum of:

the sum of the cap increments that have arisen under this Subdivision on and before that day; and

your transfer balance cap for the financial year in which the day falls, worked out disregarding:

any cap increments that arise under this Subdivision; and

any transfer balance credits or transfer balance debits that have arisen in your transfer balance account in respect of superannuation income streams of which you are a child recipient.

Note: Paragraph (b) is the transfer balance cap you would have if you were not a child recipient of any income stream. Disregarding credits, debits and cap increments allows this cap to be indexed appropriately under section 294-40 (which is about proportional indexation).

294-190 Cap increment—child recipient just before 1 July 2017

A cap increment arises if, just before 1 July 2017, you are the child recipient of a *superannuation income stream.

The amount of the cap increment is the general transfer balance cap.

The cap increment arises on 1 July 2017.

294-195 Cap increment—child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had no transfer balance account

A cap increment arises if:

(a) on a day (the starting day) on or after 1 July 2017, you start to be the *child recipient of a *superannuation income stream; and

the deceased did not have a transfer balance account just before death.

The amount of the cap increment is:

the general transfer balance cap, unless paragraph (b) applies; or

(b) if you are not the only person to receive a *superannuation death benefit because of the death of the person—the proportion of the general transfer balance cap that corresponds to your share of the deceased’s *superannuation interests.

The cap increment arises on the starting day.

294-200 Cap increment—child recipient on or after 1 July 2017, deceased had transfer balance account

A cap increment arises if:

(a) on a day (the starting day) on or after 1 July 2017, you start to be the *child recipient of a *superannuation income stream; and

the deceased had a transfer balance account just before death.

Income stream fully funded by deceased’s retirement phase interests

If the *superannuation interest that supports the superannuation income stream is wholly attributable to one or more superannuation interests of the deceased that were in the *retirement phase, the amount of the cap increment equals the amount of the transfer balance credit that arises in your transfer balance account in respect of the superannuation income stream.

Income stream fully funded by deceased’s accumulation phase interests

(3) If the *superannuation interest that supports the *superannuation income stream is wholly attributable to one or more superannuation interests of the deceased that were not in the *retirement phase, the amount of the cap increment is nil.

Note: A superannuation income stream covered by this subsection will generally result in excess transfer balance. The exceptions are: where you have additional cap increments under section 294-190 or 294-195, or where you have a higher cap under subsection 294-185(2) because you also receive a non-death benefit income stream.

Income stream partly funded by deceased’s accumulation interests

If the *superannuation interest that supports the superannuation income stream is:

(a) in part (the retirement phase part) attributable to a superannuation interest of the deceased that was in the *retirement phase; and

(b) in part attributable to a superannuation interest of the deceased that was not in the retirement phase;

the amount of the cap increment is so much of the transfer balance credit that arises in your transfer balance account in respect of the superannuation income stream as represents the retirement phase part.

Reduced increment for excess transfer balance

Note: A superannuation income stream covered by this subsection will generally result in excess transfer balance. The exceptions are: where you have additional cap increments under section 294-190 or 294-195, or where you have a higher cap under subsection 294-185(2) because you also receive a non-death benefit income stream.

Despite subsections (2) and (4), the cap increment is reduced if there was excess transfer balance in the deceased’s transfer balance account just before death. The amount of the reduction is:

the proportion of the excess transfer balance that corresponds to your share of the deceased’s *superannuation interests that were in the *retirement phase; less

the amount of any superannuation lump sum paid to you, because of the death of the person from a superannuation interest of the deceased that was in the retirement phase.

When cap increment arises

The cap increment arises:

on the starting day, unless paragraph (b) applies; or

if you are a reversionary beneficiary—at the end of the period of 12 months beginning on the starting day.

Treatment of investment earnings after death

For the purposes of working out under this section the extent to which a *superannuation interest is attributable to another superannuation interest, if:

a superannuation interest of the deceased was in the *retirement phase; and

on or after the death of the deceased, an amount of investment earnings is added to the superannuation interest;

the superannuation interest is taken to include that amount of investment earnings, except to the extent that the amount of investment earnings includes an amount paid under a policy of insurance on the life of the deceased or an amount arising from self-insurance.

Subdivision 294-F — Excess transfer balance tax

Guide to Subdivision 294-F

294-225 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision neutralises the earnings tax exemption on retirement phase income streams that result in excess transfer balance.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

294-230 Excess transfer balance tax

294-235 Your excess transfer balance earnings

294-240 When tax is payable—original assessments

294-245 When tax is payable—amended assessments

294-250 General interest charge

Operative provisions

294-230 Excess transfer balance tax

(1) If there is an *excess transfer balance period for your *transfer balance account, you are liable to pay *excess transfer balance tax imposed by the Superannuation (Excess Transfer Balance Tax) Imposition Act 2016 for the period.

Note: The amount of the tax is set out in the Superannuation (Excess Transfer Balance Tax) Imposition Act 2016.

(2) An excess transfer balance period for a *transfer balance account is a continuous period of one or more days during which, at the end of each day, there is *excess transfer balance in the account.

Your excess transfer balance tax is worked out by reference to the sum of:

your excess transfer balance earnings for each day in the excess transfer balance period; and

(b) for each day in the excess transfer balance period that is also a day in the period mentioned in subsection 294-25(2) (the determination period)—the amount worked out by multiplying the rate mentioned in subsection 294-235(2) for the day by the sum of your excess transfer balance earnings for each previous day in the determination period.

294-235 Your excess transfer balance earnings

(1) Your excess transfer balance earnings for a day is worked out by multiplying the rate mentioned in subsection (2) for that day by the amount of your *excess transfer balance at the end of that day.

The rate is the lower of:

(a) the rate worked out under subsection 8AAD(1) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for the day; and

a rate determined under subsection (3) for the day.

The Minister may, by legislative instrument, determine a rate for a day.

294-240 When tax is payable—original assessments

Your assessed excess transfer balance tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives you notice of the assessment of the amount of the excess transfer balance tax.

Note: For assessments of excess transfer balance tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

294-245 When tax is payable—amended assessments

If the Commissioner amends your assessment, any extra assessed excess transfer balance tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 21 days after the day the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

294-250 General interest charge

If an amount of assessed excess transfer balance tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

begins on the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and

ends on the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the assessed excess transfer balance tax;

general interest charge on any of the assessed excess transfer balance tax.

Note: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 295 — Taxation of superannuation entities

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 295

295-A Provisions of general operation

295-B Modifications of provisions of this Act

295-C Contributions included

295-D Contributions excluded

295-E Other income amounts

295-F Exempt income

295-G Deductions

295-H Components of taxable income

295-I No-TFN contributions

295-J Tax offset for no-TFN contributions income (TFN quoted within 5 years)

Guide to Division 295

295-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out special rules about the taxation of superannuation entities.

It sets out how to calculate the taxable income of those entities and to identify the components of that taxable income for the purpose of applying the appropriate tax rate.

It sets out how to calculate the no-TFN contributions income of relevant entities for an income year for the purpose of applying the appropriate tax rate.

Subdivision 295-A — Provisions of general operation

Table of sections

295-5 Entities to which Division applies

295-10 How to work out the tax payable by superannuation entities

295-15 Division does not impose a tax on property of a State

295-20 Exempting laws ineffective

295-25 Assessments on basis of anticipated SIS Act notice

295-30 Effect of revocation etc. of SIS Act notices

295-35 Acronyms used in tables

295-5 Entities to which Division applies

This Division applies to these entities:

a complying superannuation fund;

a non-complying superannuation fund;

a complying approved deposit fund;

a non-complying approved deposit fund;

a pooled superannuation trust;

whether they are established by an Australian law, by a public authority constituted by or under such a law or in some other way.

The *superannuation provider in relation to an entity referred to in paragraph (1)(a) to (d) is liable to pay tax on the taxable income of the entity.

Note: A superannuation provider in relation to an entity referred to in paragraphs (1)(a) and (b) or in relation to an RSA is liable to pay tax on the no-TFN contributions income of the entity: see section 295-605.

The trustee of a pooled superannuation trust is liable to pay tax on the taxable income of the trust.

This Division also applies to an RSA provider that is not a life insurance company.

Note 1: Division 320 deals with RSA providers that are life insurance companies.

Note 2: However, Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to RSA providers that are life insurance companies: see section 320-155.

295-10 How to work out the tax payable by superannuation entities

Use this method for *superannuation funds, *approved deposit funds and *pooled superannuation trusts:

Method statement

Step 1. For a *superannuation fund, work out the *no-TFN contributions income. Apply the applicable rates as set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to that income.

Step 2. Work out the entity’s assessable income and deductions taking account of the special rules in this Division. The special rules modify some provisions of this Act. They also include amounts in assessable income, allow deductions and exempt amounts from income tax.

Step 3. Work out the entity’s taxable income as if its trustee:

were an Australian resident (except where paragraph (b) applies); or

for a non-complying superannuation fund that is a *foreign superannuation fund for the income year—were not an Australian resident.

Step 4. For a *complying superannuation entity, work out the low tax component and *non-arm’s length component of the entity’s taxable income.

Step 5. Apply the applicable rates as set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to:

if step 4 applies to the entity—the components worked out under that step; or

otherwise—the entity’s taxable income.

Step 6. Subtract the entity’s *tax offsets from the step 5 amount or, for a superannuation fund, from the sum of the fund’s step 1 and step 5 amounts.

Use this method for RSA providers:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the entity’s *no-TFN contributions income. Apply the applicable rates as set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to that income.

Step 2. Work out the entity’s assessable income and deductions taking account of the special rules in this Division.

Step 3. Work out the RSA component and standard component of the entity’s taxable income.

Step 5. Apply the applicable rates as set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to the components. The *RSA component is taxed at a concessional rate.

Step 6. Subtract the entity’s *tax offsets from the sum of the entity’s step 1 and step 5 amounts.

295-15 Division does not impose a tax on property of a State

This Division does not impose a tax on property of any kind belonging to a State (within the meaning of section 114 of the Constitution).

295-20 Exempting laws ineffective

A Commonwealth law (other than this Act) does not have the effect of exempting the trustee of an entity to which this Division applies from the liability to pay tax unless it does so expressly.

295-25 Assessments on basis of anticipated SIS Act notice

(1) The Commissioner may make an assessment for a fund or trust that is not a *complying superannuation entity for the income year as if it were such an entity if the Commissioner considers it likely that a notice will be given under section 40 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 having the effect that it will become such an entity.

However, the grounds for making an assessment under subsection (1) are taken never to have existed if:

the Commissioner becomes satisfied that the notice will not be given; or

(b) *APRA does not receive the documents referred to in subsection 36(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 about the fund or trust before the end of 12 months after the assessment is made.

295-30 Effect of revocation etc. of SIS Act notices

This Division has effect as if a notice given under section 342 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (about pre-1 July 88 funding credits) or under regulations made for the purposes of that section had never been given if:

the notice is revoked; or

the decision to give the notice is set aside.

295-35 Acronyms used in tables

In tables in this Division, these acronyms are used for these entities:

Subdivision 295-B — Modifications of provisions of this Act

Table of sections

295-85 CGT to be primary code for calculating gains or losses

295-90 CGT rules for pre-30 June 1988 assets

295-95 Deductions related to contributions

295-100 Deductions for investing in PSTs and life policies

295-105 Distributions to PST unitholders

295-85 CGT to be primary code for calculating gains or losses

The modifications in subsection (2) apply if a CGT event happens involving a CGT asset that was owned by a *complying superannuation entity just before the time of the event.

These provisions do not apply to the CGT event:

sections 6-5 (about ordinary income), 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct), and 15-15 and 25-40 (about profit-making undertakings or plans);

section 230-15 (about financial arrangements);

(b) sections 25A and 52 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about profit-making undertakings or schemes).

Exceptions

The provisions referred to in subsection (2) can apply to the CGT event if:

any *capital gain or *capital loss from the event is attributable to currency exchange rate fluctuations; or

the CGT asset is one of these:

debenture stock, a bond, *debenture, certificate of entitlement, bill of exchange, promissory note or other security;

a deposit with a bank, building society or other financial institution;

a loan (secured or not);

some other contract under which an entity is liable to pay an amount (whether the liability is secured or not).

The provisions referred to in subsection (2) can also apply to the CGT event if a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event is disregarded because of one of the provisions in this table:

Note: For item 5, certain assets (particularly shares, units in a unit trust, and land) are not trading stock when owned by the entity (see paragraph 70-10(2)(b)).

295-90 CGT rules for pre-30 June 1988 assets

This section applies to the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity.

Parts 3-1 and 3-3 (about capital gains and losses) apply to a CGT asset that:

the trustee or a former trustee owned at the end of 30 June 1988; and

the trustee owned at the commencement of this section;

as if the trustee had *acquired the asset on 30 June 1988.

Subsection (2) does not affect how to work out the asset’s *cost base or *reduced cost base.

Note: See Subdivision 295-B of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 for rules about cost base.

Subsection 104-30(5) applies to an option granted by the trustee as if the reference in that subsection to 20 September 1985 were a reference to 1 July 1988.

295-95 Deductions related to contributions

Provisions of this Act about deducting amounts apply to these entities as if all contributions made to them were included in their assessable income:

*complying superannuation funds;

*non-complying superannuation funds that are *Australian superannuation funds;

*complying approved deposit funds;

*non-complying approved deposit funds;

RSA providers.

Note 1: This means that the entities can deduct amounts incurred in obtaining the contributions.

Note 2: Examples of contributions that are not assessable are:

• contributions which the contributor cannot deduct;

• contributions excluded from assessable income under Subdivision 295-D.

(2) A *superannuation fund is an Australian superannuation fund at a time, and for the income year in which that time occurs, if:

the fund was established in Australia, or any asset of the fund is situated in Australia at that time; and

at that time, the central management and control of the fund is ordinarily in Australia; and

(c) at that time either the fund had no member covered by subsection (3) (an active member) or at least 50% of:

the total *market value of the fund’s assets attributable to *superannuation interests held by active members; or

the sum of the amounts that would be payable to or in respect of active members if they voluntarily ceased to be members;

is attributable to superannuation interests held by active members who are Australian residents.

A member is covered by this subsection at a time if the member is:

a contributor to the fund at that time; or

an individual on whose behalf contributions have been made, other than an individual:

who is a foreign resident; and

who is not a contributor at that time; and

for whom contributions made to the fund on the individual’s behalf after the individual became a foreign resident are only payments in respect of a time when the individual was an Australian resident.

To avoid doubt, the central management and control of a superannuation fund is ordinarily in Australia at a time even if that central management and control is temporarily outside Australia for a period of not more than 2 years.

295-100 Deductions for investing in PSTs and life policies

Provisions of this Act about deducting amounts apply to *complying superannuation funds and *complying approved deposit funds as if ordinary income and statutory income received from these investments were included in their assessable income:

units in a pooled superannuation trust;

*life insurance policies issued by a life insurance company;

an interest in a trust whose assets consist only of life insurance policies issued by a life insurance company.

Note: Income from these investments is not assessable: see for example sections 295-105 and 118-350.

A complying superannuation fund cannot deduct an amount (otherwise than under section 295-465) for fees or charges incurred for:

*complying superannuation life insurance policies; or

*exempt life insurance policies; or

units in a pooled superannuation trust that are segregated current pension assets of the fund.

295-105 Distributions to PST unitholders

The assessable income of a *complying superannuation entity does not include amounts *derived by the entity because it holds units in a pooled superannuation trust.

Note: The entity will not be subject to any tax liability when it disposes of the units: see subsection 295-85(2) and section 118-350.

Subdivision 295-C — Contributions included

Guide to Subdivision 295-C

295-155 What this Subdivision is about

There are basically 3 types of assessable contributions:

those made by a contributor (for example, an employer) on behalf of someone else (for example, an employee); and

those made on the contributor’s own behalf for which the contributor is entitled to a deduction; and

those transferred from a foreign superannuation fund to an Australian superannuation fund.

There are some additions and exceptions.

Table of sections

Contributions and payments

295-160 Contributions and payments

295-165 Exception—spouse contributions

295-170 Exception—Government co-contributions and contributions for a child

295-173 Exception—trustee contributions

295-175 Exception—payments by a member spouse

295-180 Exception—choice to exclude certain contributions

295-185 Exception—temporary residents

Personal contributions and roll-over amounts

295-190 Personal contributions and roll-over amounts

295-195 Exclusion of personal contributions—contributions

295-197 Exclusion of personal contributions—successor funds

Transfers from foreign funds

295-200 Transfers from foreign superannuation funds

Application of tables to RSA providers

295-205 Application of tables to RSA providers

Former constitutionally protected funds

295-210 Former constitutionally protected funds

Contributions and payments

295-160 Contributions and payments

The assessable income of an entity includes contributions or payments as set out in this table for the income year in which the contributions or payments are received.

Note: For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35.

295-165 Exception—spouse contributions

Item 1 of the table in section 295-160 does not include in assessable income a contribution made by an individual to a complying superannuation fund or an RSA:

to provide *superannuation benefits for the individual’s *spouse (regardless whether the benefits are payable to the individual’s spouse’s *SIS dependants if the individual’s spouse dies before or after becoming entitled to receive the benefits); and

that the individual cannot deduct under Subdivision 290-B.

Paragraph (1)(a) does not apply to *superannuation benefits for a *spouse living permanently separately and apart from the individual.

295-170 Exception—Government co-contributions and contributions for a child

Item 1 of the table in section 295-160 does not include in assessable income a contribution:

(a) that is a Government co-contribution made under the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003; or

for the benefit of a person under 18 that is not made by or on behalf of the person’s employer.

(2) Item 4 of the table in section 295-160 does not include in assessable income a payment to the extent to which it represents a Government co-contribution or co-contributions made under the Superannuation (Government Co-contribution for Low Income Earners) Act 2003.

295-173 Exception—trustee contributions

Item 1 of the table in section 295-160 does not include in assessable income:

a contribution made by an entity that was, when the contribution was made, the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity; or

a contribution made out of the *complying superannuation assets, or out of the *segregated exempt assets, of a life insurance company.

295-175 Exception—payments by a member spouse

Contributions are not included in assessable income under section 295-160 if they are an amount paid by a member spouse, as mentioned in regulations under the Family Law Act 1975, to a *regulated superannuation fund, or to an *RSA provider, to be held for the benefit of the *non-member spouse in satisfaction of the non-member spouse’s entitlement in respect of the *superannuation interest concerned.

295-180 Exception—choice to exclude certain contributions

Item 1 of the table in section 295-160 does not include an amount in the assessable income of a public sector superannuation scheme for an income year to the extent that the trustee chooses that it not be included.

The entity that made the contributions must consent to the choice.

Note: Making this choice effectively shifts the liability for tax on the contributions to the recipient of the benefit. The benefit is treated as an element untaxed in the fund: see Subdivision 301-C.

However, the choice cannot be made for an income year for an amount that exceeds the sum of amounts covered by notices given by the trustee under section 307-285 for *superannuation benefits paid in the income year.

A choice under this section cannot be revoked or withdrawn.

A choice under this section cannot be made in relation to a public sector superannuation scheme that comes into operation after 5 September 2006.

295-185 Exception—temporary residents

Item 2 of the table in section 295-160 does not include a contribution in the assessable income of an entity if the individual (for whom it was made) is a *temporary resident at the end of the income year to which the contribution relates.

Personal contributions and roll-over amounts

295-190 Personal contributions and roll-over amounts

The assessable income of an entity includes amounts as set out in this table.

Note: For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35.

(1A) Items 2 and 2A of the table in subsection (1) do not apply to a *roll-over superannuation benefit that is a *departing Australia superannuation payment made under subsection 20H(2), (2AA) or (2A) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

Income years in which amounts are included in assessable income

A contribution referred to in item 1 is included in the income year in which it is received if the notice is received by the *superannuation provider by the day the provider lodges its income tax return for that income year.

Otherwise it is included in the income year in which the notice is received.

A payment referred to in item 2 or 3 is included in the income year in which it is received by the *superannuation provider.

A benefit referred to in item 2A is included in the income year in which it is received if the notice is received by the *superannuation provider by the day the provider lodges its income tax return for that income year.

Otherwise it is included in the income year in which the notice is received.

295-195 Exclusion of personal contributions—contributions

Variation notice received before return lodged

A contribution is not included in the assessable income of a complying superannuation fund or RSA provider under item 1 of the table in subsection 295-190(1) to the extent that it has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180 if the notice is received by the *superannuation provider before it has lodged its income tax return for the income year in which the contribution was made.

Variation notice received after return lodged

A contribution is not included in the assessable income of a complying superannuation fund or RSA provider under item 1 of the table in subsection 295-190(1) for the income year in which the contribution was made to the extent that it has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180 if:

the notice is received by the *superannuation provider after it has lodged its income tax return for the income year; and

the provider exercises the option mentioned in subsection (3).

An amount referred to in subsection (2) may, at the option of the provider, be excluded from the assessable income of the fund or RSA provider for the income year referred to in subsection (2) if excluding it would result in a greater reduction in tax for that year than the reduction that would occur for the income year in which the notice is received if a deduction were allowed under item 2 of the table in subsection 295-490(1).

Note: The exclusion is an alternative to the fund deducting the amount under item 2 of the table in subsection 295-490(1).

295-197 Exclusion of personal contributions—successor funds

Scope

(1) This section applies to the *superannuation provider (the successor provider) of a *complying superannuation fund or *RSA if, apart from this section, a *roll-over superannuation benefit would be included in the assessable income of the fund or *RSA provider under item 2A of the table in subsection 295-190(1).

Variation notice received before return lodged

The benefit is not so included, to the extent that the relevant contribution has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180, if the notice is received by the successor provider before the successor provider has lodged its income tax return for the income year in which the benefit was transferred.

Variation notice received after return lodged

The benefit is not so included in the assessable income for the income year in which the benefit was transferred, to the extent that the relevant contribution has been reduced by a notice under section 290-180, if:

the notice is received by the successor provider after the successor provider has lodged its income tax return for the income year; and

the successor provider exercises the option mentioned in subsection (4).

An amount referred to in subsection (3) may, at the option of the successor provider, be excluded from the assessable income of the fund or RSA provider for the income year referred to in subsection (3) if excluding it would result in a greater reduction in tax for that year than the reduction that would occur for the income year in which the notice is received if a deduction were allowed under item 2B of the table in subsection 295-490(1).

Note: The exclusion is an alternative to the fund deducting the amount under item 2B of the table in subsection 295-490(1).

Transfers from foreign funds

295-200 Transfers from foreign superannuation funds

The assessable income of a fund that is an Australian superannuation fund for the income year includes an amount transferred to the fund from a fund that was a *foreign superannuation fund for the income year in relation to a member of the foreign fund to the extent that the amount transferred exceeds amounts vested in the member at the time of the transfer.

The assessable income of a fund that is a complying superannuation fund for the income year includes so much of an amount transferred to the fund from a fund that was a *foreign superannuation fund for the income year as is specified in a choice made by a former member of the foreign fund under section 305-80.

The amount is included in the income year in which the transfer happens.

This section also applies to an amount transferred from a scheme for the payment of benefits in the nature of superannuation upon retirement or death that:

is not, and never has been, an Australian superannuation fund or a *foreign superannuation fund; and

was not established in Australia; and

is not centrally managed or controlled in Australia.

Application of tables to RSA providers

295-205 Application of tables to RSA providers

The tables in this Subdivision apply to RSA providers only to the extent that amounts are paid to *RSAs they provide.

Former constitutionally protected funds

295-210 Former constitutionally protected funds

This section applies to a complying superannuation fund for an income year if the fund ceased to be a constitutionally protected fund during the year or at the end of the previous year.

The assessable income of the fund for the income year includes the sum of the *roll-over superannuation benefits to the extent that they consist of the element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component that would be included in that assessable income if all contributions and earnings accumulated in the fund when the fund ceased to be a constitutionally protected fund:

had been paid out of the fund immediately before it ceased to be a constitutionally protected fund; and

were paid to the fund as roll-over superannuation benefits immediately after that time.

Subdivision 295-D — Contributions excluded

Table of sections

295-260 Transfer of liability to investment vehicle

295-265 Application of pre-1 July 88 funding credits

295-270 Anticipated funding credits

295-260 Transfer of liability to investment vehicle

(1) The *superannuation provider in relation to a *complying superannuation fund or a *complying approved deposit fund (the transferor) may reduce the amount that would otherwise be included in the fund’s assessable income for an income year under Subdivision 295-C by agreement with another entity (the transferee) in which it holds investments.

What the transferee must be

The transferee must be a life insurance company or a pooled superannuation trust.

Note: Amounts transferred are included in the transferee’s assessable income: see section 295-320 (for PSTs) and paragraph 320-15(1)(i) (for life insurance companies).

Agreement requirements

The transferor may make one agreement only for an income year with a particular transferee.

An agreement:

must be in writing, and must be signed by or for the transferor and transferee; and

must be made by the day the transferor lodges its income tax return for its income year to which the agreement relates; and

cannot be revoked.

Limits on transfer

The total amount covered by the agreements cannot exceed the amount that would otherwise be included in the transferor’s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C for that income year.

The amount covered by an agreement with a particular transferee cannot exceed this amount:

where:

greatest equity value is the greatest of these amounts during the transferor’s income year:

if the transferee is a pooled superannuation trust—the *market value of the transferor’s investment in units in the trust;

if not—the market value of the transferor’s investment in:

*life insurance policies issued by the transferee; or

a trust whose assets consist only of life insurance policies issued by the transferee.

transferor’s low tax component tax rate is the rate of tax imposed on the *low tax component of the fund’s taxable income for the income year.

295-265 Application of pre-1 July 88 funding credits

Choice to reduce contributions included in assessable income

The *superannuation provider in relation to a complying superannuation fund can choose to reduce the amount of contributions that would otherwise be included in the fund’s assessable income for an income year under item 1 of the table in section 295-160 if it has pre-1 July 88 funding credits available for the income year.

When funding credits are available

Use this method to work out whether a fund has pre-1 July 88 funding credits available for an income year:

Method statement

Step 1. Identify the amount of pre-1 July 88 funding credits unused at the end of the previous income year.

Step 2. Index that amount.

Step 3. Add any pre-1 July 88 funding credits transferred to the fund in the income year under regulations made for the purposes of subsection 342(7) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

Step 4. Deduct from the step 3 amount:

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows you how to index amounts.

pre-1 July 88 funding credits transferred from the fund in the income year under regulations made for the purposes of subsection 342(7) of that Act; and

amounts specified in a notice given to the *superannuation provider in relation to the fund under subsection 342(6) of that Act for the income year.

Step 5. The result is the pre-1 July 88 funding credits available to the fund for the income year.

That amount, reduced by any amount specified in a choice made under subsection (1) for the income year, is the amount of pre-1 July 88 funding credits unused at the end of the income year.

Note 1: Regulations under subsection 342(7) of the SIS Act allow APRA to approve transfers of pre-1 July 88 funding credits between funds.

Note 2: Subsection 342(6) of that Act covers the situation where the fund’s rules are changed to produce a reduction in pre-1 July 88 funding credits and the trustee notifies APRA of the change.

(3) If a notice is given to the *superannuation provider in relation to the fund under subsection 342(2) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 granting the trustee a pre-1 July 88 funding credit, this section applies as if the pre-1 July 88 funding credit had arisen at the beginning of the income year in which 1 July 1988 occurred.

(4) However, if a notice is given to the *superannuation provider in relation to the fund under subsection 342(4) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 for the income year, the fund has no pre-1 July 88 funding credits.

Note: Subsection 342(4) of that Act covers the situation where the fund’s rules are changed to produce a reduction in pre-1 July 88 funding credits and the provider fails to notify APRA of the change.

Limit on choice

The total amount covered by the choice cannot exceed the pre-1 July 88 funding credits available to the fund for the income year.

The total amount covered by the choice also cannot exceed the amount of contributions that would otherwise be included in the fund’s assessable income for the income year under item 1 of the table in section 295-160 that are used to fund liabilities that accrued before 1 July 1988.

The regulations may prescribe either or both of the following:

the manner in which the *superannuation provider in relation to a superannuation fund is to work out the amount applicable to the fund under subsection (6) for an income year;

methods (other than the method specified in subsection (6)) of working out how the provider of a superannuation fund can apply pre-1 July 88 funding credits.

Methods prescribed under paragraph (7)(b) may be applicable to particular *superannuation funds or to a class or classes of superannuation funds.

295-270 Anticipated funding credits

(1) Subsection (2) has effect if the *superannuation provider in relation to a *complying superannuation fund expects a notice to be given under subsection 342(2) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 or under regulations made for the purposes of subsection 342(7) of that Act to the effect that pre-1 July 88 funding credits of a particular amount will be available to the fund for the income year.

Section 295-265 applies to the fund as if pre-1 July 88 funding credits of the anticipated amount were available to the fund for the income year (in addition to any other pre-1 July 88 funding credits available to the fund for the year).

However, section 295-265 applies to the fund for the income year as if pre-1 July 88 funding credits of the anticipated amount were not available to the fund for the income year if:

it becomes clear that the expected notice will not be given or that the specified amount of pre-1 July 88 funding credits will not be available; or

(b) *APRA does not receive the things referred to in subsection 342(3) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (for a notice expected under subsection 342(2) of that Act) or the things required to be given under regulations made for the purposes of subsection 342(7) of that Act (for a notice under those regulations) before the earlier of:

the end of 12 months after the fund’s assessment is made for the income year; and

the time the things are required to be given by the regulations.

Subdivision 295-E — Other income amounts

Table of sections

Amounts included

295-320 Other amounts included in assessable income

295-325 Previously complying funds

295-330 Previously foreign funds

Amounts excluded

295-335 Amounts excluded from assessable income

Amounts included

295-320 Other amounts included in assessable income

The assessable income of an entity includes the amounts as set out in this table.

Note: For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35.

295-325 Previously complying funds

The amount of ordinary income and statutory income from previous years included in the assessable income of a fund in an income year under item 2 of the table in section 295-320 is:

295-330 Previously foreign funds

The amount of ordinary income and statutory income from previous years included in the assessable income of a fund in an income year under item 3 of the table in section 295-320 is:

Amounts excluded

295-335 Amounts excluded from assessable income

The assessable income of an entity does not include the amounts set out in this table.

Note: For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35.

Subdivision 295-F — Exempt income

Table of sections

295-385 Income from assets set aside to meet current pension liabilities

295-387 Disregarded small fund assets

295-390 Income from other assets used to meet current pension liabilities

295-395 Meaning of segregated non-current assets

295-400 Income of a PST attributable to current pension liabilities

295-405 Other exempt income

295-407 Covered superannuation income streams—RSAs

295-410 Amount credited to RSA

295-385 Income from assets set aside to meet current pension liabilities

The ordinary income and statutory income of a complying superannuation fund for an income year is exempt from income tax to the extent that:

it would otherwise be assessable income; and

it is from segregated current pension assets.

Exception

Subsection (1) does not apply to:

*non-arm’s length income; or

amounts included in assessable income under Subdivision 295-C.

Meaning of segregated current pension assets

(3) Assets of a *complying superannuation fund are segregated current pension assets at a time if:

the assets are invested, held in reserve or otherwise dealt with at that time solely to enable the fund to discharge all or part of its liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at that time; and

the trustee of the fund obtains an actuary’s certificate before the date for lodgment of the fund’s income tax return for the income year to the effect that the assets and the earnings that the actuary expects will be made from them would provide the amount required to discharge in full those liabilities, or that part of those liabilities, as they fall due.

(4) Assets of a *complying superannuation fund are also segregated current pension assets of the fund at a time if the assets are invested, held in reserve or otherwise being dealt with at that time for the sole purpose of enabling the fund to discharge all or part of its liabilities (contingent or not), as they become due, in respect of *superannuation income stream benefits:

that are *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at that time; and

prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this section.

Subsection (4) does not apply unless, at all times during the income year, the liabilities of the fund (contingent or not) to pay *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund were liabilities in respect of superannuation income stream benefits that are prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this section.

(6) However, assets of a *complying superannuation fund that are supporting a *superannuation income stream benefit that is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this section are not segregated current pension assets to the extent that the *market value of the assets exceeds the account balance supporting the benefit.

Also, disregarded small fund assets are not segregated current pension assets.

Meaning of segregated current pension assets—trustee choice

(8) Despite subsections (3) to (6), none of the assets of a *complying superannuation fund are segregated current pension assets of the fund at any time in an income year if the trustee of the fund chooses under subsection (9) to treat all of the assets as not being segregated current pension assets for the year.

The trustee of a complying superannuation fund may choose to treat all of the assets of the fund as not being segregated current pension assets of the fund for an income year if, at one or more times in the year, all *superannuation interests in the fund are in the *retirement phase.

Subsections (8) and (9) do not apply if:

at all times in the year, all *superannuation interests in the fund are in the *retirement phase; or

the assets of the fund are disregarded small fund assets at all times in the year.

295-387 Disregarded small fund assets

(1) The assets of a *complying superannuation fund are disregarded small fund assets at all times in an income year if the fund is covered by subsection (2) for the income year.

A complying superannuation fund is covered by this subsection for an income year if:

the fund is a small superannuation fund at a time during the income year; and

at a time during the income year, there is at least one *superannuation interest in the fund that is in the *retirement phase; and

just before the start of the income year:

a person has a total superannuation balance that exceeds $1.6 million; and

the person is the retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream (whether or not the fund is the superannuation income stream provider for the superannuation income stream); and

at a time during the income year, the person has a superannuation interest in the fund (whether or not the superannuation interest is the superannuation interest mentioned in paragraph (b)).

However, the fund is not covered by subsection (2) for an income year if, at all times during the income year, all of the assets of the superannuation fund would, apart from subsection 295-385(7), be segregated current pension assets.

295-390 Income from other assets used to meet current pension liabilities

A proportion of the ordinary income and statutory income of a complying superannuation fund that would otherwise be assessable income is exempt from income tax under this section. The proportion is worked out under subsection (3).

Exception

Subsection (1) does not apply to:

*non-arm’s length income; or

amounts included in assessable income under Subdivision 295-C; or

income *derived from segregated non-current assets; or

income that is exempt from income tax under section 295-385.

Formula

The proportion is:

where:

average value of current pension liabilities is the average value for the income year of the fund’s current liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at any time in that year. This does not include liabilities for which *segregated current pension assets are held.

average value of superannuation liabilities is the average value for the income year of the fund’s current and future liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *superannuation benefits in respect of which contributions have, or were liable to have, been made. This does not include liabilities for which *segregated current pension assets or *segregated non-current assets are held.

Actuary’s certificate

The value of particular liabilities of the fund at a particular time is the amount of the fund’s assets, together with future contributions in respect of the benefits concerned and expected earnings on the assets and contributions after that time, that would provide the amount required to discharge those liabilities as they fall due. This must be specified in an actuary’s certificate obtained by the trustee of the fund before the date for lodgment of the fund’s income tax return for the income year.

The expected earnings are worked out at the rate the actuary expects will be the rate of the fund’s earnings on its assets (except segregated current pension assets or segregated non-current assets).

Superannuation liabilities where no current certificate

The superannuation liabilities do not have to be valued by an actuary for the income year if the fund has no segregated current pension assets or segregated non-current assets for the income year. Instead, the value can be worked out using this formula:

where:

current value of assets is the value of all of the fund’s assets at a time in the income year, as specified in an *actuary’s certificate obtained by the trustee of the fund before the date for lodgment of the fund’s *income tax return for the income year.

last value of assets is the most recent value of all of the fund’s assets specified in an *actuary’s certificate.

last value of superannuation liabilities is the value, at the time of that most recent valuation, of the fund’s superannuation liabilities specified in an *actuary’s certificate.

Note: This allows a fund to avoid the expense of an actuarial valuation of its superannuation liabilities, except in those years that a valuation is required by the SIS Act in order for the fund to continue to be complying.

Subsections (4), (5) and (6) do not apply in working out the amounts to be used in the formula in subsection (3) if, at all times during the income year, the liabilities of the fund in respect of *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at those times were liabilities in respect of superannuation income stream benefits that are prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection.

295-395 Meaning of segregated non-current assets

(1) Assets of a *complying superannuation fund are segregated non-current assets at a time in an income year if:

the assets are invested, held in reserve or otherwise dealt with at that time solely to enable the fund to discharge all or part of its current and future liabilities (contingent or not) to pay benefits in respect of which contributions have, or were liable to have, been made; and

the trustee of the fund obtains an actuary’s certificate before the date for lodgment of the fund’s income tax return for the income year to the effect that the amount of the assets, together with any future contributions, and the earnings that the actuary expects will be made from them will provide the amount required to discharge in full those liabilities, or that part of those liabilities, as they fall due.

The liabilities referred to in paragraph (1)(a) do not include liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund at that time.

However, disregarded small fund assets are not segregated non-current assets.

295-400 Income of a PST attributable to current pension liabilities

This proportion of the ordinary income and statutory income that would otherwise be assessable income of a pooled superannuation trust is exempt income:

Exceptions

Subsection (1) does not apply to:

*non-arm’s length income; or

amounts included in assessable income under item 1 of the table in section 295-320.

Alternative exemption

However, the trustee of the pooled superannuation trust can choose that a different amount be exempt income of the trust under this section if a percentage of the assessable income of the trust would have been exempt income under section 295-385 or 295-390 if it had been *derived instead by the unitholders in the trust in proportion to their holdings.

That percentage of the trust’s ordinary income and statutory income is then exempt income.

295-405 Other exempt income

The ordinary income or statutory income of an entity is exempt from income tax as set out in this table.

Note: For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35.

295-407 Covered superannuation income streams—RSAs

A superannuation income stream is covered by this section if:

(a) it is a pension (within the meaning of the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997); and

it is in the *retirement phase.

295-410 Amount credited to RSA

For item 3 of the table in section 295-405, the part of the amount credited to the RSA that is exempt income is worked out by:

multiplying the amount by the number of days in the income year for which the pension covered by section 295-407 was paid; and

dividing the result by the number of days in the income year that the RSA existed.

Subdivision 295-G — Deductions

Table of sections

Death or disability benefits

295-460 Benefits for which deductions are available

295-465 Complying funds—deductions for insurance premiums

295-470 Complying funds—deductions for future liability to pay benefits

295-475 RSA providers—deductions for insurance premiums

295-480 Meaning of whole of life policy and endowment policy

Other deductions

295-490 Other deductions

Certain amounts cannot be deducted

295-495 Amounts that cannot be deducted

Death or disability benefits

295-460 Benefits for which deductions are available

Sections 295-465 (about deductions for complying funds for insurance premiums), 295-470 (about deductions for complying funds for future liability to pay benefits) and 295-475 (about deductions for RSA providers for insurance premiums) apply to these benefits:

a superannuation death benefit;

a benefit consisting of an amount payable to an individual because a terminal medical condition exists in relation to the individual;

a disability superannuation benefit;

a benefit consisting of an amount payable to an individual under an income stream because of the individual’s temporary inability to engage in *gainful employment, that is payable for no longer than:

2 years; or

(ii) if an approval under section 62 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 is in force for benefits of that kind and the approval specifies a longer maximum period—that longer period; or

if there is no such approval in force—a longer period allowed by the Commissioner.

Note 1: The fund can deduct amounts in relation to these benefits under either section 295-465 or 295-470, but not both.

Note 2: The taxable component of the superannuation lump sums will contain an element untaxed in the fund: see section 307-290.

295-465 Complying funds—deductions for insurance premiums

Deductions for insurance premiums

A complying superannuation fund can deduct the proportions specified in this table of premiums it pays for insurance policies that are (wholly or partly) for current or contingent liabilities of the fund to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460 for its members. It can deduct the amounts for the income year in which the premiums are paid.

Note: If the fund receives a rebate or refund of an insurance premium, the amount may be included in its assessable income: see table item 4 in section 295-320.

If item 5 of the table applies to part, but not all, of an insurance policy premium, item 6 of the table applies to the rest of the premium as if item 5 did not apply to the premium.

For the purposes of item 6 of the table, the regulations may provide that a specified proportion of a specified insurance policy premium may be treated as being attributable to the complying superannuation fund’s liability to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460.

Note: The fund may deduct a proportion other than that specified in the regulations for the premium, but must obtain an actuary’s certificate in accordance with subsection (3) in order to do so. The same applies if the insurance policy premium is not specified in the regulations.

Deductions for self-insurance

A complying superannuation fund can also deduct the amount it could reasonably be expected to pay in an *arm’s length transaction to obtain an insurance policy to cover it for that part of its current or contingent liabilities to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460 for which it does not have insurance coverage. It can deduct the amount for the income year when it has the liability.

For the purposes of subsection (2), the regulations may provide that a specified proportion of an amount mentioned in subsection (2B) may be treated as being the amount the fund could reasonably be expected to pay in an *arm’s length transaction to obtain an insurance policy to cover it for its current or contingent liabilities to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460.

Example: If:

an actuary certifies the amount a fund could reasonably be expected to pay in an arm’s length transaction to obtain an insurance policy; and

the insurance policy covers liabilities of the fund to provide a class of total and permanent disability benefits broader than that covered by section 295-460; and

the insurance policy is specified in the regulations; and

the fund does not have insurance coverage for the liabilities;

the fund may deduct, under subsection (2), so much of that certified amount as is specified in the regulations.

The amount is the amount a complying superannuation fund could reasonably be expected to pay in an *arm’s length transaction to obtain an insurance policy specified in the regulations.

Actuary’s certificate

The trustee must obtain an actuary’s certificate before the date for lodgment of the fund’s income tax return for the income year in order to deduct an amount referred to in item 6 of the table or in subsection (2).

Subsection (3) does not apply to an amount referred to in item 6 of the table in relation to an insurance policy premium, if the trustee deducts, under that item, only the proportion (if any) of the premium specified in the regulations made for the purposes of subsection (1B).

Choice not to deduct amounts under this section

The trustee may choose not to deduct amounts under this section for an income year and to deduct instead (under section 295-470) amounts based on the fund’s future liability to pay the benefits.

The choice applies also to future income years unless the Commissioner decides that it should not.

295-470 Complying funds—deductions for future liability to pay benefits

A complying superannuation fund can deduct an amount under this section for an income year if:

the trustee of the fund makes a choice under subsection 295-465(4) and the choice applies to the income year; and

the trustee pays:

a benefit referred to in paragraph 295-460(a), (aa) or (b) for the income year in consequence of the termination of a member’s employment; or

a benefit referred to in paragraph 295-460(c).

The amount the fund can deduct is:

where:

benefit amount is:

for a benefit that is a superannuation lump sum—the amount of the lump sum; or

for a benefit that is a superannuation income stream—the *value of the *superannuation interest supporting the income stream; or

for a benefit referred to in paragraph 295-460(c)—the total of the amounts paid during the income year.

future service days is the number of days in the period starting when:

the termination happened; or

for a benefit referred to in paragraph 295-460(c)—the member became unable to engage in *gainful employment;

and ending on the member’s *last retirement day.

total service days is the sum of future service days and the number of days in:

for a benefit that is a superannuation lump sum—the service period for the superannuation lump sum; or

for another benefit—the period ending on the first day of the period to which the first payment of the benefit relates and starting on the earliest of:

the day on which the member joined the relevant superannuation fund; and

the first day of the period of employment to which the benefit relates (including a qualifying period before the member could join the fund and any period when the member was not a member of the fund); and

the day applicable under subsection (3).

The applicable day is the first day of the service period for a superannuation lump sum that is a roll-over superannuation benefit if all or part of the *value of the other benefit is attributable to the roll-over superannuation benefit.

295-475 RSA providers—deductions for insurance premiums

An RSA provider can deduct premiums it pays for insurance policies that are wholly for its liability to provide benefits referred to in section 295-460 for its RSA holders. It can deduct the amounts for the income year in which the premiums are paid.

Note: If the RSA provider receives a rebate or refund of an insurance premium, the amount may be included in its assessable income: see table item 5 in section 295-320.

295-480 Meaning of whole of life policy and endowment policy

(1) A whole of life policy is an insurance policy:

that includes an investment component; and

the premiums for which are not dissected; and

where the sum insured (and any bonuses) are payable on:

the death of the individual insured; or

the earlier of the death of the individual insured and the individual attaining the age specified in the policy (being at least the age of 85).

(2) An endowment policy is an insurance policy:

that includes an investment component; and

the premiums for which are not dissected; and

where the sum insured (and any bonuses) are payable on:

a day specified in, or worked out under, the policy; or

the death of the individual insured if that happens before that day;

but does not include a whole of life policy.

Other deductions

295-490 Other deductions

An entity can deduct amounts as set out in this table.

Note: For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35.

(2) A fund cannot deduct an amount under item 3 of the table for a levy imposed by regulations under section 6 of the Superannuation (Financial Assistance Funding) Levy Act 1993 to the extent that:

the levy is remitted; or

there is a refund or other application of an overpayment of the levy.

No other provision of this Act affects a fund’s income tax liability in relation to the levy.

Certain amounts cannot be deducted

295-495 Amounts that cannot be deducted

These entities cannot deduct anything for these amounts:

Note: For an explanation of the acronyms used, see section 295-35.

Subdivision 295-H — Components of taxable income

Table of sections

295-545 Components of taxable income—complying superannuation funds, complying ADFs and PSTs

295-550 Meaning of non-arm’s length income

295-555 Components of taxable income—RSA providers

295-545 Components of taxable income—complying superannuation funds, complying ADFs and PSTs

The taxable income of a *complying superannuation entity is split into a *non-arm’s length component and a low tax component.

Note: A concessional rate applies to the low tax component, while the non-arm’s length component is taxed at the highest marginal rate. The rates are set out in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

(2) If an entity is not of a kind referred to in paragraph 295-550(8)(a) (about certain small entities), the non-arm’s length component for an income year is the entity’s *non-arm’s length income for that year less any deductions to the extent that they are attributable to that income.

(2A) If the entity is of a kind referred to in paragraph 295-550(8)(a) (about certain small entities), the non-arm’s length component for an income year is the lesser of:

the sum of:

each amount of the entity’s *non-arm’s length income under subsection 295-550(1), (2), (4) or (5) for that year less any deductions to the extent that they are attributable to that income; and

each amount of the entity’s non-arm’s length income under subsection 295-550(8) or (9) for that year; and

the entity’s taxable income for the income year:

less the contributions that are included in the entity’s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C for the income year; and

plus any deductions to the extent that they are attributable to those contributions.

(3) The low tax component is any remaining part of the entity’s taxable income for the income year.

295-550 Meaning of non-arm’s length income

(1) An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is non-arm’s length income of a *complying superannuation entity if, as a result of a *scheme the parties to which were not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the scheme, one or more of the following applies:

the amount of the income is more than the amount that the entity might have been expected to derive if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme;

if the entity is of a kind referred to in paragraph (8)(a) (about certain small entities):

in gaining or producing the income, the entity incurs a loss, outgoing or expenditure of an amount that is less than the amount of a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme; and

subsection (8) does not apply to the loss, outgoing or expenditure;

if the entity is of a kind referred to in paragraph (8)(a) (about certain small entities):

in gaining or producing the income, the entity does not incur a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme; and

subsection (9) does not apply to the loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur.

This subsection does not apply to an amount to which subsection (2) applies or an amount *derived by the entity in the capacity of beneficiary of a trust.

(2) An amount of *ordinary income or *statutory income is also non-arm’s length income of the entity if it is:

a dividend paid to the entity by a private company; or

ordinary income or statutory income that is reasonably attributable to such a dividend;

unless the amount is consistent with an *arm’s length dealing.

In deciding whether an amount is consistent with an *arm’s length dealing under subsection (2), have regard to:

the value of *shares in the company that are assets of the entity; and

the cost to the entity of the shares on which the dividend was paid; and

the rate of that dividend; and

whether the company has paid a dividend on other shares in the company and, if so, the rate of that dividend; and

whether the company has issued any shares to the entity in satisfaction of a dividend paid by the company (or part of it) and, if so, the circumstances of the issue; and

any other relevant matters.

(4) Income *derived by the entity as a beneficiary of a trust, other than because of holding a fixed entitlement to the income, is non-arm’s length income of the entity.

(5) Other income *derived by the entity as a beneficiary of a trust through holding a fixed entitlement to the income of the trust is non-arm’s length income of the entity if, as a result of a *scheme the parties to which were not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the scheme, one or more of the following applies:

the amount of the income is more than the amount that the entity might have been expected to derive if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme;

if the entity is of a kind referred to in paragraph (8)(a) (about certain small entities)—in acquiring the entitlement or in gaining or producing the income, the entity incurs a loss, outgoing or expenditure of an amount that is less than the amount of a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme;

if the entity is of a kind referred to in paragraph (8)(a) (about certain small entities)—in acquiring the entitlement or in gaining or producing the income, the entity does not incur a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme.

This section:

applies to a *non-share equity interest in the same way as it applies to a *share; and

applies to an equity holder in a company in the same way as it applies to a shareholder in the company; and

applies to a non-share dividend in the same way as it applies to a dividend.

Paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) and (5)(b) and (c) apply to a loss, outgoing or expenditure whether or not it is of capital or of a capital nature.

Certain small entities—general expenses

If:

a *complying superannuation entity is:

a regulated superannuation fund with no more than 6 members; or

a self managed superannuation fund; and

as a result of a *scheme the parties to which were not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the scheme:

in gaining or producing the ordinary income and statutory income of the entity (but not in gaining or producing income in relation to any particular asset or assets of the entity), the entity incurs a loss, outgoing or expenditure of an amount; and

the amount is less than the amount of a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme;

an amount of the entity’s ordinary income and statutory income equal to twice the difference between the amount that the entity did incur and the amount that the entity might have been expected to incur is non-arm’s length income of the entity.

If:

a *complying superannuation entity is of a kind referred to in paragraph (8)(a) (about certain small entities); and

as a result of a *scheme the parties to which were not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the scheme, in gaining or producing the ordinary income and statutory income of the entity (but not in gaining or producing income in relation to any particular asset or assets of the entity), the entity does not incur a loss, outgoing or expenditure that the entity might have been expected to incur if those parties had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the scheme;

an amount of the entity’s ordinary income and statutory income equal to twice the amount that the entity might have been expected to incur is non-arm’s length income of the entity.

295-555 Components of taxable income—RSA providers

The taxable income of an RSA provider is split into:

an RSA component; and

a standard component.

Note: The RSA component is taxed at the same concessional rate that applies to the low tax component of complying superannuation entities (see section 23 of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986). The standard component is taxed at the standard company rate.

(2) The RSA component for an income year is worked out in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Add these amounts included in the provider’s assessable income for the income year:

amounts included under Subdivision 295-C; and

other amounts credited during the year to *RSAs that it provides.

Step 2. Subtract from the step 1 amount amounts paid from those *RSAs (except benefits for the RSA holders or tax).

Step 3. The result is the RSA component.

However, if the RSA component is more than the RSA provider’s taxable income:

the provider’s taxable income is equal to that sum; and

this Act applies to the provider as if it had a *tax loss for the income year of an amount that would have been that loss if the RSA component were not ordinary income or statutory income.

(4) The standard component is the remaining part (if any) of the *RSA provider’s taxable income for the income year after subtracting the *RSA component.

Subdivision 295-I — No-TFN contributions

Table of sections

295-605 Liability for tax on no-TFN contributions income

295-610 No-TFN contributions income

295-615 Meaning of quoted (for superannuation purposes)

295-620 No reduction under Subdivision 295-D

295-625 Assessments

295-605 Liability for tax on no-TFN contributions income

A *superannuation provider in relation to a complying superannuation fund is liable to pay tax on the no-TFN contributions income of the fund for an income year.

A *superannuation provider in relation to a non-complying superannuation fund is liable to pay tax on the no-TFN contributions income of the fund for an income year.

An RSA provider is liable to pay tax on its no-TFN contributions income for an income year.

Note 1: The tax is imposed by the Income Tax Act 1986.

Note 2: The no-TFN contributions income is subject to a special rate of tax under the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

Note 3: The Commissioner may make an assessment of the amount of income tax on the no-TFN contributions income: see section 169 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

295-610 No-TFN contributions income

(1) An amount included by Subdivision 295-C in the assessable income of a *complying superannuation fund, a *non-complying superannuation fund or an *RSA provider for an income year is no-TFN contributions income for the year if:

it is included by that Subdivision in the assessable income of the income year of the fund or RSA provider in which 1 July 2007 occurs, or a later income year; and

it is a contribution made to the fund or RSA on or after 1 July 2007 to provide *superannuation benefits for an individual; and

(c) by the end of the income year, the individual has not *quoted (for superannuation purposes) his or her *tax file number to the *superannuation provider.

Exception

(2) However, an amount is not no-TFN contributions income if:

the contribution was made in relation to a *superannuation interest or an RSA of the individual that existed prior to 1 July 2007; and

the total contributions made in relation to the superannuation interest or RSA for the income year that are included in assessable income under Subdivision 295-C did not exceed $1,000.

295-615 Meaning of quoted (for superannuation purposes)

(1) An individual has quoted (for superannuation purposes) a *tax file number to an entity at a time if the individual:

quotes his or her tax file number to the entity at that time; or

(b) is taken by the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993, the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 or this Act to quote his or her tax file number to the entity at that time;

in connection with the operation or the possible future operation of one or more of the following Acts:

(c) the Superannuation Acts (within the meaning of Part 25A of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993);

(d) the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997.

(2) An individual is taken to have quoted (for superannuation purposes) a *tax file number to an entity at a time if the Commissioner gives notice of the individual’s tax file number to the entity at that time.

295-620 No reduction under Subdivision 295-D

There is no reduction of the amount of no-TFN contributions income by Subdivision 295-D.

Note: Subdivision 295-D can reduce an amount that would otherwise be included in assessable income. It does not reduce the amount of no-TFN contributions income. An amount is still no-TFN contributions income even if, because of Subdivision 295-D, the amount (or part of it) is not included in assessable income.

295-625 Assessments

If the conditions in subsection (3) are met, the Commissioner is taken to have made an assessment of a kind set out in subsection (4).

The conditions are:

(a) one of the following gives the Commissioner an *income tax return for an income year on a particular day (the return day):

a *superannuation provider in relation to a complying superannuation fund;

a superannuation provider in relation to a non-complying superannuation fund;

an RSA provider; and

the return is the first income tax return given by the provider for the year; and

the Commissioner has not already made an assessment of a kind set out in subsection (4) for the provider for the year.

The assessment is taken to have been made for the provider for the income year on the return day, and to be an assessment, in accordance with the information stated in the return, of the amount of income tax payable on the no-TFN contributions income (if any) of the provider (or to be an assessment that no tax is payable).

The return is taken to be notice of the assessment signed by the Commissioner and given to the provider on the return day.

Note: The return may also be taken to be a notice of another assessment: see section 166A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 295-J — Tax offset for no-TFN contributions income (TFN quoted within 5 years)

Table of sections

295-675 Entitlement to a tax offset

295-680 Amount of the tax offset

295-675 Entitlement to a tax offset

(1) A *superannuation provider in relation to a *superannuation fund or an *RSA provider is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year of the provider (the current year) commencing on or after 1 July 2007 for amounts of tax that count towards the offset for the provider for the current year.

Note: In certain circumstances the superannuation provider or RSA provider can get a refund of the tax offset under Division 67.

An amount of tax counts towards the offset for the provider for the current year if subsection (3), (4) or (5) applies for the provider and the tax.

Superannuation providers and RSA providers—main case

This subsection applies for the provider and the tax if:

the tax was payable by the provider in one of the most recent 3 income years of the provider ending before the current year; and

the tax was payable on an amount of no-TFN contributions income of the fund or RSA provider; and

the amount of no-TFN contributions income was a contribution made to the fund or provider to provide *superannuation benefits for an individual who, in the current year, has *quoted (for superannuation purposes) the individual’s tax file number to the provider for the first time.

Superannuation providers of successor funds

(4) This subsection applies for the provider (the current provider) and the tax if:

the tax was payable on an amount of no-TFN contributions income that:

(i) was no-TFN contributions income of another *superannuation fund (the previous fund); and

was a contribution made to the previous fund to provide *superannuation benefits for an individual; and

(b) the tax was so payable by the *superannuation provider (the previous provider) of the previous fund; and

the tax was so payable in:

one of the most recent 3 income years of the previous provider ending before the current year; or

an income year of the previous provider ending or starting in the current year; and

the current provider is the superannuation provider of a *successor fund in relation to the individual and the previous fund; and

the individual:

never *quoted (for superannuation purposes) the individual’s tax file number to the previous provider; but

has, in the current year, done so to the current provider for the first time.

RSA providers of successor funds

(5) This subsection applies for the provider (the current provider) and the tax if:

the tax was payable on an amount of no-TFN contributions income that:

(i) was no-TFN contributions income of another *RSA provider (the previous provider); and

was a contribution made to the previous provider to provide *superannuation benefits for an individual; and

the tax was so payable by the previous provider; and

the tax was so payable in:

one of the most recent 3 income years of the previous provider ending before the current year; or

an income year of the previous provider ending or starting in the current year; and

the current provider is the *superannuation provider of a *successor fund in relation to the individual and an RSA of the previous provider; and

the individual:

never *quoted (for superannuation purposes) the individual’s tax file number to the previous provider but

has, in the current year, done so to the current provider for the first time.

295-680 Amount of the tax offset

The amount of the tax offset is the sum of each amount of tax that counts towards the offset for the provider for the current year.

Division 296 — Better targeted superannuation concessions

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 296

296-A Object of this Division

296-B Better targeted superannuation concessions

296-C When tax is payable

296-D Modifications for temporary residents who depart Australia

296-E Other provisions

Guide to Division 296

296-1 What this Division is about

This Division reduces the concessional tax treatment of superannuation earnings for individuals with total superannuation balances that, just before the start of an income year or at the end of the year, are greater than the large superannuation balance threshold for the year.

There are special rules for foreign superannuation funds, constitutionally protected State higher level office holders, certain justices of the Commonwealth, the Australian Capital Territory and the Northern Territory, non-complying superannuation plans and temporary residents who depart Australia.

Note: Part 3-20 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains rules about the administration of the Division 296 tax.

Subdivision 296-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

Operative provisions

296-5 Object of this Division

Operative provisions

296-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to reduce the concessional tax treatment of superannuation earnings for individuals with *total superannuation balances that, just before the start of an income year or at the end of the year, are greater than the large superannuation balance threshold for the year.

Subdivision 296-B — Better targeted superannuation concessions

Guide to Subdivision 296-B

296-10 What this Subdivision is about

Subject to certain exceptions, a tax is payable on a proportion of your earnings in relation to superannuation interests if your total superannuation balance just before the start of the year or at the end of the year exceeds the large superannuation balance threshold for the year. A higher amount of tax is payable to the extent that the total superannuation balance exceeds the very large superannuation balance threshold for the year.

Table of sections

Liability for tax

296-15 Liability for tax

296-20 Exception—child recipients of superannuation income streams

296-25 Exception—structured settlement contributions

Large superannuation balance threshold and very large superannuation balance threshold

296-30 Large superannuation balance threshold

296-35 Very large superannuation balance threshold

Taxable superannuation earnings and related concepts

296-40 Your taxable superannuation earnings

296-45 Your very large superannuation balance earnings component

296-50 Total superannuation balance taken to be nil after death

296-55 Your total superannuation earnings

296-60 Division 296 fund earnings

296-65 Your relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest—general rule

296-70 Your relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest—certain defined benefit and other interests

296-75 Modifications

Liability for tax

296-15 Liability for tax

Subject to sections 296-20 and 296-25, you are liable to pay Division 296 tax for an income year if you have taxable superannuation earnings for the year.

Note: The amount of the tax is set out in the Superannuation (Building a Stronger and Fairer Super System) Imposition Act 2026.

296-20 Exception—child recipients of superannuation income streams

You are not liable to pay Division 296 tax for an income year if you are a child recipient of a *superannuation income stream at any time in the year.

296-25 Exception—structured settlement contributions

You are not liable to pay Division 296 tax for an income year if a structured settlement contribution is made in respect of you in that year or in any earlier income year.

Large superannuation balance threshold and very large superannuation balance threshold

296-30 Large superannuation balance threshold

The large superannuation balance threshold is:

for the 2026-27 income year—$3,000,000; or

for the 2027-28 income year or a later income year—the amount worked out by indexing annually the amount mentioned in paragraph (a).

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the amount of the threshold: see section 960-285.

296-35 Very large superannuation balance threshold

The very large superannuation balance threshold is:

for the 2026-27 income year—$10,000,000; or

for the 2027-28 income year or a later income year—the amount worked out by indexing annually the amount mentioned in paragraph (a).

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the amount of the threshold: see section 960-285.

Taxable superannuation earnings and related concepts

296-40 Your taxable superannuation earnings

(1) You have taxable superannuation earnings for an income year of the amount worked out using the following formula if:

your total superannuation balance just before the start of the year, or at the end of the year, is greater than the large superannuation balance threshold for the year; and

the amount of your total superannuation earnings for the year is greater than nil:

For the purposes of the formula in subsection (1), the percentage is the amount (expressed as a percentage) worked out using the following formula:

where:

your total superannuation balance reference amount is the greater of:

your total superannuation balance (if any) just before the start of the year; and

your total superannuation balance (if any) at the end of the year.

The result of the formula in subsection (2) must be rounded to 2 decimal places (rounding up if the third decimal place is 5 or more).

296-45 Your very large superannuation balance earnings component

(1) You have a very large superannuation balance earnings component for an income year of the amount worked out using the following formula if your *total superannuation balance just before the start of the year, or at the end of the year, is greater than the *very large superannuation balance threshold for the year:

For the purposes of the formula in subsection (1), the percentage is the amount (expressed as a percentage) worked out using the following formula:

where:

your total superannuation balance reference amount is the greater of:

your total superannuation balance (if any) just before the start of the year; and

your total superannuation balance (if any) at the end of the year.

The result of the formula in subsection (2) must be rounded to 2 decimal places (rounding up if the third decimal place is 5 or more).

296-50 Total superannuation balance taken to be nil after death

For the purposes of sections 296-40 and 296-45, your total superannuation balance at a particular time is taken to be nil if, as at that time, you have died.

296-55 Your total superannuation earnings

(1) The amount of your total superannuation earnings for an income year is the total of your *relevant superannuation earnings for the year for:

each *superannuation interest of yours that you have at any time in the year; and

each superannuation interest that supports a superannuation income stream of which you are a *retirement phase recipient at any time in the year because of the death of another person.

For the purposes of working out that total, the following are taken to be nil:

your relevant superannuation earnings for a *superannuation interest in a *superannuation plan that is a *foreign superannuation fund for the year;

your relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest that is a Division 296 excluded interest in relation to the year;

an amount prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

(3) A *superannuation interest mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) or (b) is a Division 296 excluded interest in relation to the year if:

column 1 of an item of the following table applies to you for the year; and

the interest is specified in column 2 of the item.

(4) Nothing in subsection (2) or (3) limits section 6 of the Superannuation (Building a Stronger and Fairer Super System) Imposition Act 2026.

Note: Section 6 of the Superannuation (Building a Stronger and Fairer Super System) Imposition Act 2026 provides that Division 296 tax is not imposed in relation to a person if the imposition would exceed the legislative power of the Commonwealth.

296-60 Division 296 fund earnings

Superannuation entities (not including RSA providers or pooled superannuation trusts)

(1) The Division 296 fund earnings for an income year for an entity to which Division 295 (about taxation of superannuation entities) applies is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

assessable contributions is the total of the contributions that are included in the entity’s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C for the year.

net exempt current pension income is the result of:

working out the total amount of the entity’s exempt income under sections 295-385 and 295-390 for the year; and

subtracting the total deductions the entity could make if the exempt income were assessable income, to the extent attributable to the exempt income.

Note 1: Sections 295-385 and 295-390 are about income from assets set aside or otherwise used to meet current pension liabilities.

Note 2: Sections 296-50, 296-60 and 296-65 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997, which provide for certain adjustments relating to CGT for the purposes of working out Division 296 fund earnings, may be relevant to working out net exempt current pension income under this subsection in some circumstances.

pooled superannuation trust component is the total of any amounts for the year the entity has under subsection (2).

relevant taxable income or loss is:

the entity’s taxable income for the year; or

for an income year that is a loss year—the amount of the entity’s *tax loss for the year, expressed as a negative amount.

Note 1: Adjustments may apply in relation to the cost base or reduced cost base of a CGT asset that is an asset of a small superannuation fund at the end of 30 June 2026: see section 296-50 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 2: Adjustments apply in relation to net capital gains of complying superannuation funds if relevant to working out a person’s relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest for the 2026-27 income year to the 2029-30 income year: see section 296-60 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 3: Deferred notional gains are disregarded for the purposes of working out the entity’s relevant taxable income or loss under this subsection: see subsection 296-65(1) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 4: Certain matters are to be disregarded in working out the entity’s relevant taxable income or loss: see subsection (3) of this section.

(2) For the purposes of the definition of pooled superannuation trust component in subsection (1), the entity has an amount under this subsection equal to the amount worked out using the following formula if it holds any units in a *pooled superannuation trust at any time during the trust’s income year (the relevant year):

that is the same period as the entity’s income year mentioned in subsection (1); or

that, of the trust’s income years, covers the most of the entity’s income year:

where:

entity’s average units is the average number of units in the trust during the relevant year as attributable to the holdings of the entity.

total average units is the average number of units in the trust during the relevant year.

In working out the entity’s relevant taxable income or loss in relation to an income year for the purposes of subsection (1):

disregard paragraph 295-100(2)(c); and

(b) disregard paragraph 70B(2A)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

in determining any net capital gain or net capital loss for the year, or any deductions to the extent they are attributable to a net capital gain for the year, disregard the following (except in determining any previously unapplied net capital losses from earlier income years):

section 118-12 (about assets used to produce exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income) of this Act, to the extent it applies to a *capital gain or *capital loss that a *complying superannuation entity makes from a *segregated current pension asset;

section 118-320 (about segregated current pension assets of a complying superannuation entity).

Note 1: Paragraph 295-100(2)(c) is about deductions for fees and charges for units in a pooled superannuation trust that are segregated current pension assets.

Note 2: Paragraph 70B(2A)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is about deductions for a loss on the disposal or redemption of certain securities that are segregated current pension assets.

Note 3: The provisions mentioned in paragraph (c) of this subsection still apply for the purposes of working out the entity’s net exempt current pension income under subsection (1) of this section.

Pooled superannuation trusts

(4) Despite subsection (1), the Division 296 fund earnings for an income year for a *pooled superannuation trust is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

assessable transferred contributions is the total of the amounts included in the assessable income of the trust under item 1 of the table in section 295-320 (about certain amounts included in assessable income) for the year.

net exempt current pension income is the result of:

working out the total amount of the trust’s exempt income under section 295-400 for the year; and

subtracting the total deductions the entity could make if the exempt income were assessable income, to the extent attributable to the exempt income.

Note 1: Section 295-400 is about income of a pooled superannuation trust attributable to current pension liabilities.

Note 2: Sections 296-50, 296-60 and 296-65 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997, which provide for certain adjustments relating to CGT for the purposes of working out Division 296 fund earnings, may be relevant to working out net exempt current pension income under this subsection in some circumstances.

relevant taxable income or loss is:

the trust’s taxable income for the year; or

for an income year that is a loss year—the amount of the trust’s *tax loss for the year, expressed as a negative amount.

Note 1: A person will not have relevant superannuation earnings in relation to a pooled superannuation trust. However, Division 296 fund earnings of pooled superannuation trusts are included in the Division 296 fund earnings of certain entities under subsection (1) of this section.

Note 2: Adjustments apply in relation to net capital gains of pooled superannuation trusts if relevant to working out a person’s relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest for the 2026-27 income year to the 2029-30 income year: see section 296-60 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 3: Deferred notional gains are disregarded for the purposes of working out the trust’s relevant taxable income or loss under this subsection: see subsection 296-65(2) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

RSA providers that are not life insurance companies

(5) Despite subsection (1) of this section, the Division 296 fund earnings for an income year for an *RSA provider that is not a *life insurance company is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

assessable contributions is the total of the contributions that are included in the *RSA provider’s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C for the year.

relevant exempt income is the total amount of the *RSA provider’s *exempt income under items 2 and 3 of the table in section 295-405 (about other exempt income) for the year.

RSA providers that are life insurance companies

(6) The Division 296 fund earnings for an income year for an *RSA provider that is a *life insurance company is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

relevant annuity income is the total of the amounts of the *RSA provider’s assessable income mentioned in paragraphs 320-137(3)(d) and (e) (about amounts credited to *RSAs from which *annuities are paid) for the year.

relevant taxable income is the total of the amounts included in the assessable income of the *RSA provider under paragraph 320-137(2)(f) (about amounts credited and debited to *RSAs) for the year.

Other matters

(7) The Division 296 fund earnings for an income year for an entity is nil if, apart from this subsection, it would be negative.

296-65 Your relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest—general rule

(1) Your relevant superannuation earnings for an income year (your year) for a *superannuation interest is the amount attributable to the interest under this section, of the *Division 296 fund earnings for:

the entity that is:

for an interest in a superannuation fund—the superannuation fund; or

for an interest in an approved deposit fund—the approved deposit fund; or

for an RSA—the RSA provider; and

the income year of that entity that is the same period as your year (or that, of the income years of the entity, covers the most of your year).

Subsection (1) does not apply in relation to:

a *superannuation interest that, at any time in your year:

is or includes a defined benefit interest; and

is not in the *retirement phase; or

a superannuation interest that is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

Note: See section 296-70 in relation to superannuation interests mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this subsection.

General attribution requirement

The amount attributable to the *superannuation interest must be determined on a fair and reasonable basis, having regard to the matters prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection.

Specific requirements for interests in small superannuation funds and prescribed interests

Subsection (3) does not apply if the *superannuation interest is:

a superannuation interest in a small superannuation fund; or

a superannuation interest prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

The amount attributable to such a *superannuation interest must instead be determined in accordance with the regulations.

Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (5):

may provide for the amount attributable to the interest to be determined wholly or partly by reference to an actuary’s certificate; and

may specify circumstances in which a nil amount is attributable to the interest.

296-70 Your relevant superannuation earnings for a superannuation interest—certain defined benefit and other interests

(1) Your relevant superannuation earnings for an income year for a *superannuation interest mentioned in subsection 296-65(2) is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

prescribed factor is the value prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this definition.

your contributions total is the amount (which may be a nil amount) determined in accordance with regulations made for the purposes of this definition.

your withdrawals total is the amount (which may be a nil amount) determined in accordance with regulations made for the purposes of this definition.

For the purposes of subsection (1), if the interest does not exist at the end of the year, or just before the start of the year, the total superannuation balance value of the interest at that time is taken to be nil.

296-75 Modifications

Section 296-65 or 296-70 has effect in relation to an individual subject to any modifications prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection.

Without limiting subsection (1), regulations made for the purposes of that subsection may modify section 296-65 or 296-70 in relation to an individual in different ways depending on any of the following matters:

the individual to whom the modification relates;

whether a *superannuation interest of the individual is in the *retirement phase;

whether a superannuation interest of the individual is or includes a defined benefit interest;

a superannuation income stream (if any) of which the individual is a *retirement phase recipient;

the rules of a superannuation fund or approved deposit fund, or the terms and conditions of an RSA, of which the individual is a member;

the *superannuation provider in relation to a *superannuation plan of which the individual is a member;

whether a superannuation interest of the individual is subject to a payment split;

whether the individual is treated as having a superannuation interest under subsection 307-230(3);

whether the individual dies during an income year;

any other matter.

Without limiting subsection (1), in modifying section 296-65 or 296-70 in relation to an individual’s relevant superannuation earnings for an income year, the regulations may deal with income or other amounts relating to that income year or to any earlier or later period.

Subdivision 296-C — When tax is payable

Guide to Subdivision 296-C

296-125 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision has rules about payment of Division 296 tax.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

296-130 When tax is payable—original assessments

296-135 When tax is payable—amended assessments

296-140 General interest charge

Operative provisions

296-130 When tax is payable—original assessments

Your assessed Division 296 tax for an income year is due and payable at the end of 84 days after the Commissioner gives you notice of the assessment of the amount of the Division 296 tax.

Exception for tax deferred to a Division 296 debt account

However, subsection (1) does not apply to an amount of assessed Division 296 tax that is *deferred to a Division 296 debt account for a *superannuation interest.

Note 1: For assessments of Division 296 tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: For deferred to a Division 296 debt account, see Division 134 in that Schedule.

Note 3: For release of money from a superannuation plan to pay these amounts, see Division 131 in that Schedule.

296-135 When tax is payable—amended assessments

If the Commissioner amends your assessment, any extra assessed Division 296 tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 84 days after the day the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

Exception for tax deferred to a Division 296 debt account

However, subsection (1) does not apply to an amount of extra assessed Division 296 tax that is *deferred to a Division 296 debt account for a *superannuation interest.

Note 1: For deferred to a Division 296 debt account, see Division 134 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: For release of money from a superannuation plan to pay these amounts, see Division 131 in that Schedule.

296-140 General interest charge

If an amount of assessed Division 296 tax or shortfall interest charge on assessed Division 296 tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

begins on the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and

ends on the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the assessed Division 296 tax or the shortfall interest charge;

general interest charge on any of the assessed Division 296 tax or the shortfall interest charge.

Note 1: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953. For the rate of general interest charge payable under this section, see subsection 8AAC(2A) of that Act.

Note 2: Shortfall interest charge is worked out under Division 280 in Schedule 1 to that Act.

Note 3: See section 5-10 of this Act for when the amount of shortfall interest charge becomes due and payable.

Subdivision 296-E — Modifications for temporary residents who depart Australia

Guide to Subdivision 296-E

296-190 What this Subdivision is about

If you receive a departing Australia superannuation payment, you are entitled to a refund of any Division 296 tax you have paid.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

296-195 Who is entitled to a refund

296-200 Amount of the refund

296-205 Entitlement to refund stops all Division 296 tax liabilities

Operative provisions

296-195 Who is entitled to a refund

You are entitled to a refund if:

you have made payments of any of the following:

assessed Division 296 tax;

(ii) a voluntary payment made under section 134-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for the purpose of reducing the amount by which a *Division 296 debt account for a *superannuation interest is in debit;

Division 296 debt account discharge liability; and

you receive a departing Australia superannuation payment; and

you apply to the Commissioner in the approved form for the refund.

Note: How the refund is applied is set out in Part IIB of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

296-200 Amount of the refund

The amount of the refund to which you are entitled is the sum of the payments mentioned in paragraph 296-195(a) that you have made.

However, the amount of the refund is reduced by the amount of any refunds to which you are entitled under a previous application of this Subdivision.

Exception—Division 296 tax attributable to period when you are an Australian resident

Despite subsection (1), if:

at any time in your 2026-27 income year, or a later income year, you are an Australian resident (but not a *temporary resident); and

a payment mentioned in paragraph 296-195(a) that you have made relates, or is reasonably attributable, to that income year;

the payment is to be disregarded in working out under subsection (1) of this section the amount of the refund to which you are entitled.

296-205 Entitlement to refund stops all Division 296 tax liabilities

The Commissioner may decide to release you from any existing or future liability to pay Division 296 tax or Division 296 debt account discharge liability if:

you become entitled to a refund under section 296-195; or

you would become entitled to such a refund, if you were to pay the liability and paragraph 296-195(c) were disregarded.

The Commissioner may take such action as is necessary to give effect to a decision under subsection (1).

Subdivision 296-G — Other provisions

Guide to Subdivision 296-G

296-255 What this Subdivision is about

Disregard LRBA amounts in working out your total superannuation balance for the purposes of this Division.

This Division has effect despite subsection 73(3A) of the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

296-260 Disregard LRBA amounts in working out total superannuation balance

296-265 Interaction with the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988

Operative provisions

296-260 Disregard LRBA amounts in working out total superannuation balance

For the purposes of this Division, disregard paragraph 307-230(1)(d).

Note: If you have an LRBA amount under section 307-231 (about limited recourse borrowing arrangements), paragraph 307-230(1)(d) includes the amount in your total superannuation balance.

296-265 Interaction with the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988

This Division has effect despite subsection 73(3A) of the Australian Capital Territory (Self-Government) Act 1988.

Note: That subsection relates to the remuneration of judges and magistrates of the Australian Capital Territory.

Division 301 — Superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans etc.

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 301

301-A Application

301-B Member benefits: general rules

301-C Member benefits: elements untaxed in fund

301-D Departing Australia superannuation payments

301-E Superannuation lump sum member benefits less than $200

301-F Veterans’ superannuation (invalidity pension) tax offset

Guide to Division 301

301-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the tax treatment of superannuation benefits received by members of complying plans etc. This treatment varies depending on the age of the member when they receive the benefit. This Division also sets out the tax treatment of departing Australia superannuation payments and certain payments less than $200.

Subdivision 301-A — Application

Table of sections

301-5 Division applies to superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans etc.

301-5 Division applies to superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans etc.

This Division applies to:

*superannuation member benefits that are paid from a *complying superannuation plan; and

*superannuation guarantee payments; and

small superannuation account payments; and

*unclaimed money payments; and

*superannuation co-contribution benefit payments; and

superannuation annuity payments.

Note: For the tax treatment of superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans, see Division 302. Superannuation benefits paid from superannuation plans that are not complying superannuation plans are dealt with in Division 305.

Subdivision 301-B — Member benefits: general rules

Table of sections

Member benefits—recipient aged 60 or above

301-10 All superannuation benefits are tax free

Member benefits—recipient aged over preservation age and under 60

301-15 Tax free status of tax free component

301-20 Superannuation lump sum—taxable component taxed at 0% up to low rate cap amount, 15% on remainder

301-25 Superannuation income stream—taxable component attracts 15% offset

Member benefits—recipient aged under preservation age

301-30 Tax free status of tax free component

301-35 Superannuation lump sum—taxable component taxed at 20%

301-40 Superannuation income stream—taxable component is assessable income, 15% offset for disability benefit

Member benefits—recipient aged 60 or above

301-10 All superannuation benefits are tax free

If you are 60 years or over when you receive a superannuation benefit, the benefit is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Member benefits—recipient aged over preservation age and under 60

Note 1: Your superannuation benefit may be a superannuation lump sum or a superannuation income stream benefit: see sections 307-65 and 307-70.

Note 2: If your superannuation benefit includes an element untaxed in the fund, see Subdivision 301-C.

Note 3: If your superannuation benefit is a superannuation income stream benefit that is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A.

301-15 Tax free status of tax free component

If you are under 60 years but have reached your preservation age when you receive a superannuation benefit, the *tax free component of the benefit is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Note 1: Your superannuation benefit may be a superannuation lump sum or a superannuation income stream benefit: see sections 307-65 and 307-70).

Note 2: For tax free component, see Subdivision 307-C.

301-20 Superannuation lump sum—taxable component taxed at 0% up to low rate cap amount, 15% on remainder

If you are under 60 years but have reached your preservation age when you receive a superannuation lump sum, the *taxable component of the lump sum is assessable income.

Note 1: For taxable component, see Subdivision 307-C.

Note 2: If your lump sum includes an element untaxed in the fund, see Subdivision 301-C.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (3) does not exceed 0%.

The amount is so much of the total of the *taxable components included in your assessable income for the income year under subsection (1) as does not exceed your low rate cap amount (see section 307-345) for the income year.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (5) does not exceed 15%.

(5) The amount is so much of the total of the *taxable components included in your assessable income for an income year under subsection (1) as exceeds your *low rate cap amount for the income year.

Note: This amount will be nil if the total of the taxable components falls short of your low rate cap amount for the income year.

301-25 Superannuation income stream—taxable component attracts 15% offset

If you are under 60 years but have reached your preservation age when you receive a superannuation income stream benefit, the *taxable component of the benefit is assessable income.

You are entitled to a tax offset equal to 15% of the *taxable component of the benefit.

Note 1: For taxable component, see Subdivision 307-C.

Note 2: If your superannuation income stream benefit includes an element untaxed in the fund, see Subdivision 301-C.

Member benefits—recipient aged under preservation age

301-30 Tax free status of tax free component

If you are under your preservation age when you receive a superannuation benefit, the *tax free component of the benefit is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Note 1: Your superannuation benefit may be a superannuation lump sum or a superannuation income stream benefit: see sections 307-65 and 307-70.

Note 2: For tax free component, see Subdivision 307-C.

301-35 Superannuation lump sum—taxable component taxed at 20%

If you are under your preservation age when you receive a superannuation lump sum, the *taxable component of the lump sum is assessable income.

Note: For taxable component, see Subdivision 307-C.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the *taxable component of the lump sum does not exceed 20%.

Note: If your lump sum includes an element untaxed in the fund, see Subdivision 301-C.

301-40 Superannuation income stream—taxable component is assessable income, 15% offset for disability benefit

If you are under your preservation age when you receive a superannuation income stream benefit, the *taxable component of the benefit is assessable income.

Note: For taxable component, see Subdivision 307-C.

Offset for disability benefit

If the benefit is a superannuation income stream benefit and a disability superannuation benefit, you are entitled to a tax offset equal to 15% of the *taxable component of the benefit.

Subdivision 301-C — Member benefits: elements untaxed in fund

Table of sections

301-90 Tax free component and element taxed in fund dealt with under Subdivision 301-B, but element untaxed in the fund dealt with under this Subdivision

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged 60 or above

301-95 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 15% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder

301-100 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund attracts 10% offset

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged over preservation age and under 60

301-105 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 15% up to low rate cap amount, 30% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder

301-110 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund is assessable income

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged under preservation age

301-115 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 30% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder

301-120 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund is assessable income

Miscellaneous

301-125 Unclaimed money payments by the Commissioner

301-90 Tax free component and element taxed in fund dealt with under Subdivision 301-B, but element untaxed in the fund dealt with under this Subdivision

If you receive a superannuation benefit that includes an element untaxed in the fund:

the *tax free component (if any) of the benefit is treated in the same way as the tax free component of a superannuation benefit under Subdivision 301-B; and

the element taxed in the fund (if any) included in the benefit is treated in the same way as the taxable component of a superannuation benefit under Subdivision 301-B; and

the element untaxed in the fund is treated in accordance with this Subdivision.

Note: If your superannuation benefit is a superannuation income stream benefit that is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A.

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged 60 or above

301-95 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 15% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder

If you are 60 years or over when you receive a superannuation lump sum from a *superannuation plan, the element untaxed in the fund of the lump sum is assessable income.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (3) does not exceed 15%.

Note: The remainder of the element untaxed in the fund is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

The amount is so much of the element untaxed in the fund as does not exceed your *untaxed plan cap amount for the *superannuation plan at the time you receive the benefit.

301-100 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund attracts 10% offset

If you are 60 years or over when you receive a superannuation income stream benefit, the element untaxed in the fund of the benefit is assessable income.

You are entitled to a tax offset equal to 10% of the element untaxed in the fund of the benefit.

Note: If your superannuation income stream benefit is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A.

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged over preservation age and under 60

301-105 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 15% up to low rate cap amount, 30% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder

If you are under 60 years but have reached your preservation age when you receive a superannuation lump sum from a *superannuation plan, the element untaxed in the fund of the lump sum is assessable income.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount worked out under subsection (3) does not exceed 30%.

The amount is so much of the element untaxed in the fund as does not exceed your *untaxed plan cap amount for the *superannuation plan at the time you receive the benefit.

Note: To the extent that the element untaxed in the fund exceeds the amount worked out under this subsection, it is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

If you are entitled to one or more *tax offsets under subsection (2) for *superannuation benefits that you receive in an income year, you are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount worked out under subsection (5) does not exceed 15%.

The amount is so much of the total of the one or more amounts worked out under subsection (3) as does not exceed your low rate cap amount for the income year.

If you are also entitled to a tax offset under subsection 301-20(2) for the income year, reduce your low rate cap amount for the purposes of subsection (5) of this section for the income year by the amount mentioned in subsection 301-20(3).

301-110 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund is assessable income

If you are under 60 years but have reached your preservation age when you receive a superannuation income stream benefit, the element untaxed in the fund of the benefit is assessable income.

Member benefits (element untaxed in fund)—recipient aged under preservation age

301-115 Superannuation lump sum—element untaxed in fund taxed at 30% up to untaxed plan cap amount, top rate on remainder

If you are under your preservation age when you receive a superannuation lump sum from a *superannuation plan, the element untaxed in the fund of the lump sum is assessable income.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the amount mentioned in subsection (3) does not exceed 30%.

Note: The remainder of the element untaxed in the fund is taxed at the top marginal rate in accordance with the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

The amount is so much of the element untaxed in the fund as does not exceed your *untaxed plan cap amount for the *superannuation plan at the time you receive the benefit.

301-120 Superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund is assessable income

If you are under your preservation age when you receive a superannuation income stream benefit, the element untaxed in the fund of the benefit is assessable income.

Miscellaneous

301-125 Unclaimed money payments by the Commissioner

For the purposes of this Subdivision, treat a *superannuation lump sum paid by the Commissioner under subsection 17(2), 20H(2), (2AA), (2A) or (3), 20QF(2), 21E(2), 22B(2) or 24G(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 as if it were paid from a *superannuation plan.

Subdivision 301-D — Departing Australia superannuation payments

Table of sections

301-170 Departing Australia superannuation payments

301-175 Treatment of departing Australia superannuation benefits

301-170 Departing Australia superannuation payments

(1) A *superannuation lump sum is a departing Australia superannuation payment if it:

is paid to a person who has departed Australia; and

is paid:

(i) in accordance with regulations under the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 or the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997 that are specified in regulations made for the purposes of this definition; or

(ii) in accordance with section 67A of the Small Superannuation Accounts Act 1995; or

(iii) by an exempt public sector superannuation scheme (within the meaning of section 10 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993) and is made in accordance with rules of the fund that are substantially similar to the regulations specified as mentioned in subparagraph (i).

(2) Also, a *superannuation lump sum is a departing Australia superannuation payment if it is paid under subsection 20H(2), (2AA), (2A) or (3) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

(3) Despite subsection (2), a *superannuation lump sum paid under subsection 20H(2), (2AA), (2A) or (3) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 because a person has been identified in a notice under section 20C of that Act is not a departing Australia superannuation payment if, when it is paid, the Commissioner is satisfied that:

(a) the person has not been, under the Migration Act 1958, the holder of a temporary visa that ceased to be in effect at least 6 months ago; or

the person has been the holder of such a visa but has not left Australia (within the meaning of that Act) at least 6 months ago but after starting to be the holder of the visa.

(4) Despite subsection (2), a *superannuation lump sum that is paid under subsection 20H(2), (2AA), (2A) or (3) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 and is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subsection is not a departing Australia superannuation payment.

301-175 Treatment of departing Australia superannuation benefits

Despite anything else in this Division, if you receive a superannuation benefit that is a departing Australia superannuation payment, the benefit is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

However, you are liable to pay income tax on that payment at the rate declared by the Parliament in respect of *departing Australia superannuation payments.

Note 1: The tax is imposed in the Superannuation (Departing Australia Superannuation Payments Tax) Act 2007 and the amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

Note 2: See the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for provisions dealing with the payment of the tax.

Subdivision 301-E — Superannuation lump sum member benefits less than $200

Table of sections

301-225 Superannuation lump sum member benefits less than $200 are tax free

301-225 Superannuation lump sum member benefits less than $200 are tax free

Despite anything else in this Division (apart from Subdivision 301-D), a superannuation member benefit that you receive is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the benefit is a superannuation lump sum; and

the amount of the benefit is less than $200; and

the *value of the *superannuation interest from which the benefit is paid is nil just after the benefit is paid; and

the requirements (if any) specified in the regulations in relation to the benefit are satisfied.

Despite anything else in this Division (apart from Subdivision 301-D), a superannuation member benefit that you receive is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the benefit is a superannuation lump sum; and

the benefit is paid to you:

(i) under subsection 20QF(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 in a case covered by paragraph (d) of that subsection; or

under subsection 21E(2) of that Act in a case covered by paragraph (d) of that subsection; or

under subsection 22B(2) of that Act in a case covered by paragraph (d) of that subsection; or

under subsection 24G(2) of that Act in a case covered by paragraph (d) of that subsection; and

the amount of the benefit is less than $200.

Subdivision 301-F — Veterans’ superannuation (invalidity pension) tax offset

Table of sections

301-275 Veterans’ superannuation (invalidity pension) tax offset

301-275 Veterans’ superannuation (invalidity pension) tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

you are an individual; and

during the income year, you receive one or more *superannuation lump sums that are payments of:

(i) invalidity pay within the meaning of the Defence Force Retirement and Death Benefits Act 1973; or

(ii) an invalidity pension under the superannuation scheme established under the Military Superannuation and Benefits Act 1991; or

(iii) a pension mentioned in a paragraph of subsection 307-70.02(1A) of the Income Tax Assessment (1997 Act) Regulations 2021.

The amount of your tax offset is worked out as follows:

first, work out the amount by which your basic income tax liability exceeds the total of the amount of your tax offsets (if any) for the income year under:

this Division (other than this Subdivision); and

(ii) Subdivision AB of Division 17 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

next, work out the total of:

the amount worked out under paragraph (a); and

the amounts (if any) of Medicare levy and Medicare levy (fringe benefits) surcharge you are liable to pay for the income year;

next, work out the total of:

the amount worked out under paragraph (a); and

the amounts (if any) of Medicare levy and Medicare levy (fringe benefits) surcharge you are liable to pay for the income year;

on the assumptions mentioned in subsection (3);

next, work out the amount (if any) by which the total worked out under paragraph (b) exceeds the total worked out under paragraph (c).

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(c), the assumptions are that:

each superannuation lump sum mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) were a superannuation income stream benefit; and

for the purposes of section 307-125 (proportioning rule), the invalidity pay, invalidity pension or pension mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) of this section were a superannuation income stream.

Division 302 — Superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans etc.

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 302

302-A Application

302-B Death benefits to dependant

302-C Death benefits to non-dependant

302-D Definitions relating to dependants

Guide to Division 302

302-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the tax treatment of superannuation death benefits received by members of complying plans etc. This treatment varies depending on the age of the deceased when they died (and in some cases on the age of the recipient of the benefit).

Subdivision 302-A — Application

Table of sections

302-5 Division applies to superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans etc.

302-10 Superannuation death benefits paid to trustee of deceased estate

302-5 Division applies to superannuation death benefits paid from complying plans etc.

This Division applies to *superannuation death benefits that:

are paid from a *complying superannuation plan; or

are *superannuation guarantee payments, small superannuation account payments, *unclaimed money payments, *superannuation co-contribution benefit payments or superannuation annuity payments.

Note: For the tax treatment of superannuation member benefits paid from complying plans, see Division 301. Superannuation benefits paid from superannuation plans that are not complying superannuation plans are dealt with in Division 305.

302-10 Superannuation death benefits paid to trustee of deceased estate

This section applies to you if:

you are the trustee of a deceased estate; and

you receive a superannuation death benefit in your capacity as trustee.

To the extent that 1 or more beneficiaries of the estate who were *death benefits dependants of the deceased have benefited, or may be expected to benefit, from the superannuation death benefit:

the benefit is treated as if it had been paid to you as a person who was a death benefits dependant of the deceased; and

the benefit is taken to be income to which no beneficiary is presently entitled.

(3) To the extent that 1 or more beneficiaries of the estate who were not *death benefits dependants of the deceased have benefited, or may be expected to benefit, from the *superannuation death benefit:

(a) the benefit is treated as if it had been paid to you as a person who was not a death benefits dependant of the deceased; and

the benefit is taken to be income to which no beneficiary is presently entitled.

Subdivision 302-B — Death benefits to dependant

Table of sections

Lump sum death benefits to dependants are tax free

302-60 All of superannuation lump sum is tax free

Superannuation income stream—either deceased died aged 60 or above or dependant aged 60 or above

302-65 Superannuation income stream benefits are tax free

Superannuation income stream—deceased died aged under 60 and dependant aged under 60

302-70 Superannuation income stream—tax free status of tax free component

302-75 Superannuation income stream—taxable component attracts 15% offset

Death benefits to dependant—elements untaxed in fund

302-80 Treatment of element untaxed in the fund of superannuation income stream death benefit to dependant

302-85 Deceased died aged 60 or above or dependant aged 60 years or above—superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund attracts 10% offset

302-90 Deceased died aged under 60 and dependant aged under 60—superannuation income stream—element untaxed in fund is assessable income

Lump sum death benefits to dependants are tax free

302-60 All of superannuation lump sum is tax free

A superannuation lump sum that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Superannuation income stream—either deceased died aged 60 or above or dependant aged 60 or above

302-65 Superannuation income stream benefits are tax free

A superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not exempt income in either or both of the following cases:

you are 60 years or over when you receive the benefit;

the deceased died aged 60 or over.

Note 1: If your superannuation income stream benefit includes an element untaxed in the fund, see section 302-85.

Note 2: If your superannuation income stream benefit is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A.

Superannuation income stream—deceased died aged under 60 and dependant aged under 60

302-70 Superannuation income stream—tax free status of tax free component

The *tax free component of a superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

you are under 60 when you receive the benefit; and

the deceased died aged under 60.

Note: For tax free component, see Subdivision 307-C.

302-75 Superannuation income stream—taxable component attracts 15% offset

The *taxable component of a superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant is assessable income if:

you are under 60 when you receive the benefit; and

the deceased died aged under 60.

Note: For taxable component, see Subdivision 307-C.

You are entitled to a tax offset equal to 15% of the *taxable component of the benefit.

Death benefits to dependant—elements untaxed in fund

302-80 Treatment of element untaxed in the fund of superannuation income stream death benefit to dependant

If a superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant includes an element untaxed in the fund:

the *tax free component (if any) of the benefit is treated in the same way as the tax free component of a superannuation income stream benefit under section 302-65 or 302-70; and

the element taxed in the fund (if any) of the benefit is treated in the same way as the *taxable component of a superannuation income stream benefit under section 302-65 or 302-75; and

the element untaxed in the fund is treated in accordance with section 302-85 or 302-90.

Note: If your superannuation income stream benefit is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A.

302-85 Deceased died aged 60 or above or dependant aged 60 years or above—superannuation income stream: element untaxed in fund attracts 10% offset

The element untaxed in the fund of a superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant is assessable income in either or both of the following cases:

you are 60 years or over when you receive the benefit;

the deceased died aged 60 or above.

You are entitled to a tax offset equal to 10% of the element untaxed in the fund of the benefit.

Note: If your superannuation income stream benefit is defined benefit income, see Subdivision 303-A.

302-90 Deceased died aged under 60 and dependant aged under 60—superannuation income stream: element untaxed in fund is assessable income

The element untaxed in the fund of a superannuation income stream benefit that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant is assessable income if:

you are aged under 60 when you receive the benefit; and

the deceased died aged under 60.

Subdivision 302-C — Death benefits to non-dependant

Table of sections

Superannuation lump sum

302-140 Superannuation lump sum—tax free status of tax free component

302-145 Superannuation lump sum—element taxed in the fund taxed at 15%, element untaxed in the fund taxed at 30%

Superannuation lump sum

302-140 Superannuation lump sum—tax free status of tax free component

The *tax free component of a *superannuation lump sum that you receive because of the death of a person of whom you are not a *death benefits dependant is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

Note: For tax free component, see Subdivision 307-C.

302-145 Superannuation lump sum—element taxed in the fund taxed at 15%, element untaxed in the fund taxed at 30%

(1) If you receive a *superannuation lump sum because of the death of a person of whom you are not a *death benefits dependant, the *taxable component of the lump sum is assessable income.

Note: For taxable component, see Subdivision 307-C.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the element taxed in the fund of the lump sum does not exceed 15%.

You are entitled to a tax offset that ensures that the rate of income tax on the element untaxed in the fund of the lump sum does not exceed 30%.

Subdivision 302-D — Definitions relating to dependants

Table of sections

302-195 Meaning of death benefits dependant

302-200 What is an interdependency relationship?

302-195 Meaning of death benefits dependant

(1) A death benefits dependant, of a person who has died, is:

the deceased person’s *spouse or former spouse; or

the deceased person’s *child, aged less than 18; or

any other person with whom the deceased person had an interdependency relationship under section 302-200 just before he or she died; or

any other person who was a dependant of the deceased person just before he or she died.

(2) For the purposes of this Division, treat an individual who receives a *superannuation lump sum because of the death of another person as a death benefits dependant of the deceased person in relation to the lump sum if the deceased person *died in the line of duty (see subsection (3)) as:

a member of the Defence Force; or

a member of the Australian Federal Police or the police force of a State or Territory; or

(c) a protective service officer (within the meaning of the Australian Federal Police Act 1979).

(3) For the purposes of subsection (2), a person died in the line of duty if the person died in the circumstances specified in the regulations.

302-200 What is an interdependency relationship?

(1) Two persons (whether or not related by family) have an interdependency relationship under this section if:

they have a close personal relationship; and

they live together; and

one or each of them provides the other with financial support; and

one or each of them provides the other with domestic support and personal care.

(2) In addition, 2 persons (whether or not related by family) also have an interdependency relationship under this section if:

they have a close personal relationship; and

they do not satisfy one or more of the requirements of an interdependency relationship mentioned in paragraphs (1)(b), (c) and (d); and

the reason they do not satisfy those requirements is that either or both of them suffer from a physical, intellectual or psychiatric disability.

The regulations may specify:

(a) matters that are, or are not, to be taken into account in determining under subsection (1) or (2) whether 2 persons have an interdependency relationship under this section; and

(b) circumstances in which 2 persons have, or do not have, an interdependency relationship under this section.

Division 303 — Superannuation benefits paid in special circumstances

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 303

303-A Modifications for defined benefit income

303-B Other special circumstances

Guide to Division 303

303-1 What this Division is about

Under Subdivision 303-A, the tax treatment of superannuation income stream benefits that are defined benefit income can be less favourable to you if that income exceeds your defined benefit income cap.

Subdivision 303-B sets out special circumstances in which superannuation benefits are neither assessable income nor exempt income.

Subdivision 303-A — Modifications for defined benefit income

Table of sections

Operative provisions

303-2 Effect of exceeding defined benefit income cap on assessable income

303-3 Effect of exceeding defined benefit income cap on tax offsets

303-4 Meaning of defined benefit income cap

Operative provisions

303-2 Effect of exceeding defined benefit income cap on assessable income

Despite sections 301-10 and 302-65, if:

during a financial year, you receive one or more superannuation income stream benefits:

that are defined benefit income; and

to which either section 301-10 or 302-65 applies; and

the sum of all of those benefits (other than any *elements untaxed in the fund of those benefits) exceeds your defined benefit income cap for the financial year;

50% of that excess is assessable income.

(2) Defined benefit income is a *superannuation income stream benefit that is paid from a *capped defined benefit income stream.

303-3 Effect of exceeding defined benefit income cap on tax offsets

Despite sections 301-100 and 302-85, if:

during a financial year, you receive one or more superannuation income stream benefits:

that are defined benefit income; and

in relation to which you are entitled, or apart from this section you would be entitled, to one or more *tax offsets under section 301-100 or 302-85; and

the sum of all of the superannuation income stream benefits you receive during the financial year:

that are defined benefit income; and

to which section 301-10, 301-100, 302-65 or 302-85 applies;

exceeds your defined benefit income cap for the financial year;

the sum of those tax offsets is reduced (but not below zero) by an amount equal to 10% of that excess.

303-4 Meaning of defined benefit income cap

(1) Your defined benefit income cap for a *financial year is the following amount (rounded up to the nearest dollar):

Despite subsection (1) of this section, if a particular day in a financial year is the first day in relation to which section 301-10, 301-100, 302-65 or 302-85:

applies to you in respect of an amount of defined benefit income; or

would apart from this Subdivision apply to you in respect of an amount of defined benefit income;

your defined benefit income cap for the financial year is the following amount (rounded up to the nearest dollar):

Despite subsections (1) and (2) of this section, if:

in a case where subsection (1) applies—during the financial year, you receive any amounts of defined benefit income to which none of sections 301-10, 301-100, 302-65 and 302-85 apply; or

in a case where subsection (2) applies—during the financial year, you receive after the day mentioned in that subsection any amounts of defined benefit income to which none of sections 301-10, 301-100, 302-65 and 302-85 apply;

your defined benefit income cap for the financial year under subsection (1) or (2) (as the case requires) is reduced by the sum of those amounts.

Subdivision 303-B — Other special circumstances

Table of sections

303-5 Commutation of income stream if you are under 25 etc.

303-10 Superannuation lump sum member benefit paid to member having a terminal medical condition

303-15 Payments from release authorities—general

303-20 Payments from release authorities—paying debt account discharge liability or Division 296 debt account discharge liability

303-5 Commutation of income stream if you are under 25 etc.

A superannuation lump sum that you receive from a *complying superannuation plan is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the superannuation lump sum arises from the commutation of a superannuation income stream; and

any of these conditions are satisfied:

you are under 25 when you receive the superannuation lump sum;

the commutation takes place because you turn 25;

you are permanently disabled when you receive the superannuation lump sum; and

you had received one or more superannuation income stream benefits from the superannuation income stream before the commutation because of the death of a person of whom you are a death benefits dependant.

Subsection (1) applies despite Divisions 301 and 302.

303-10 Superannuation lump sum member benefit paid to member having a terminal medical condition

This section applies to a superannuation member benefit that:

is a superannuation lump sum; and

is:

paid from a *complying superannuation plan; or

a superannuation guarantee payment, a small superannuation account payment, an unclaimed money payment, a superannuation co-contribution benefit payment or a superannuation annuity payment.

The lump sum is not assessable income and is not exempt income if a terminal medical condition exists in relation to you when you receive the lump sum or within 90 days after you receive it.

Note: For a lump sum you receive in the 2007-08 financial year, the period of 90 days may be extended until 30 June 2008: see section 303-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

303-15 Payments from release authorities—general

A *superannuation benefit that you receive (or are taken to receive) is not assessable income and is not *exempt income if it is paid in response to a release authority issued under section 131-15 or 139-115 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to you.

Note: In some cases, a related amount may still be included in your assessable income (see Subdivision 292-B and sections 304-20 and 313-20).

303-20 Payments from release authorities—paying debt account discharge liability or Division 296 debt account discharge liability

A *superannuation benefit that you receive (or are taken to receive), paid in relation to a release authority issued to you in respect of a *release entitlement you have, is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

Note: However, payments that exceed the release entitlement are assessable: see section 304-20.

Division 304 — Superannuation benefits in breach of legislative requirements etc.

Guide to Division 304

304-1 What this Division is about

This Division overrides the tax treatment in Divisions 301 and 302 if payments from complying superannuation plans etc. are in breach of payment and other rules.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

304-5 Application

304-10 Superannuation benefits in breach of legislative requirements etc.

304-20 Excess payments from release authorities—paying debt account discharge liability or Division 296 debt account discharge liability

Operative provisions

304-5 Application

This Division applies despite Divisions 301, 302 and 303.

304-10 Superannuation benefits in breach of legislative requirements etc.

Include in your assessable income the amount of a superannuation benefit if:

any of the following applies:

you received the benefit from a complying superannuation fund or from a superannuation fund that was previously a complying superannuation fund;

the benefit is attributable to the assets of a complying superannuation fund or from a superannuation fund that was previously a complying superannuation fund; and

any of the following applies:

(i) the fund was not (when you received the benefit) maintained as required by section 62 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993;

(ii) you received the benefit otherwise than in accordance with payment standards prescribed under subsection 31(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

Include in your assessable income the amount of a superannuation benefit if:

any of the following applies:

you received the benefit from a complying approved deposit fund or from an approved deposit fund that was previously a complying approved deposit fund;

the benefit is attributable to the assets of a complying approved deposit fund or from an approved deposit fund that was previously a complying approved deposit fund; and

(b) you received the benefit otherwise than in accordance with payment standards prescribed under subsection 32(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

(3) Include in your assessable income the amount of a *superannuation benefit you receive from an *RSA in breach of the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997, regulations under that Act or payment standards prescribed under subsection 38(2) of that Act.

However, you do not have to include the amount in your assessable income to the extent that the Commissioner is satisfied that it is unreasonable that it be included having regard to:

for subsection (1) or (2)—the nature of the fund; and

any other matters that the Commissioner considers relevant.

For the purposes of this section, treat your receipt of a benefit (other than a superannuation benefit) out of, or attributable to, the assets of a *superannuation plan as your receipt of a superannuation benefit.

304-20 Excess payments from release authorities—paying debt account discharge liability or Division 296 debt account discharge liability

(1) Despite section 303-20, a *superannuation benefit that you receive (or are taken to receive), paid in relation to a release authority issued to you in respect of a *release entitlement you have, is assessable income to the extent (if any) that it exceeds the amount mentioned in subsection (2).

Note: Section 303-20 makes superannuation benefits received under a release authority non-assessable non-exempt income.

The amount is the amount of the release entitlement, reduced (but not below zero) by the amount of any superannuation benefit that was not assessable income and not exempt income under a previous operation of section 303-20 of this Act in relation to that release entitlement.

Division 305 — Superannuation benefits paid from non-complying superannuation plans

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 305

305-A Superannuation benefits from Australian non-complying superannuation funds

305-B Superannuation benefits from foreign superannuation funds

Guide to Division 305

305-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the tax treatment of superannuation benefits received by members of non-complying plans (including foreign superannuation funds).

Subdivision 305-A — Superannuation benefits from Australian non-complying superannuation funds

Table of sections

305-5 Tax treatment of superannuation benefits from certain Australian non-complying superannuation funds

305-5 Tax treatment of superannuation benefits from certain Australian non-complying superannuation funds

A superannuation benefit that you receive from a non-complying superannuation fund that is an Australian superannuation fund (for the income year in which the benefit is paid) is exempt income if:

the fund:

has never been a complying superannuation fund; or

last stopped being a complying superannuation fund for the income year in which 1 July 1995 occurred or a later income year; and

the fund:

has never been a *foreign superannuation fund; or

last stopped being a foreign superannuation fund for the income year in which 1 July 1995 occurred or a later income year.

Subdivision 305-B — Superannuation benefits from foreign superannuation funds

Table of sections

Application of Subdivision

305-55 Restriction to lump sums received from certain foreign superannuation funds

Lump sums received within 6 months after Australian residency or termination of foreign employment etc.

305-60 Lump sums tax free—foreign resident period

305-65 Lump sums tax free—Australian resident period

Lump sums to which sections 305-60 and 305-65 do not apply

305-70 Lump sums received more than 6 months after Australian residency or termination of foreign employment etc.

305-75 Lump sums—applicable fund earnings

305-80 Lump sums paid into complying superannuation plans—choice

Application of Subdivision

305-55 Restriction to lump sums received from certain foreign superannuation funds

This Subdivision applies if:

you receive a superannuation lump sum from a *foreign superannuation fund; and

the fund is an entity mentioned in item 4 of the table in subsection 295-490(1) (which deals with deductions for superannuation entities).

This Subdivision also applies if you receive a payment, other than a pension payment, from a scheme for the payment of benefits in the nature of superannuation upon retirement or death that:

is not, and never has been, an Australian superannuation fund or a *foreign superannuation fund; and

was not established in Australia; and

is not centrally managed or controlled in Australia.

(3) This Subdivision applies to a payment mentioned in subsection (2) from a scheme mentioned in that subsection in the same way as it applies to a *superannuation lump sum from a *foreign superannuation fund.

Lump sums received within 6 months after Australian residency or termination of foreign employment etc.

305-60 Lump sums tax free—foreign resident period

A superannuation lump sum you receive from a *foreign superannuation fund is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

(a) you receive it within 6 months after you become an Australian resident; and

it relates only to a period:

when you were not an Australian resident; or

starting after you became an Australian resident and ending before you receive the payment; and

it does not exceed the amount in the fund that was vested in you when you received the payment.

Note: If you received the lump sum after that period of 6 months, or the lump sum exceeds the vested amount, the payment will fall within section 305-70.

305-65 Lump sums tax free—Australian resident period

A superannuation lump sum you receive is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

you receive it in consequence of:

the termination of your employment as an employee, or as the holder of an office, in a foreign country; or

(ii) the termination of your engagement on qualifying service on an approved project (within the meaning of section 23AF of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936), in relation to a foreign country; and

it relates only to the period of that employment, holding of office, or engagement; and

you were an Australian resident during the period of the employment, holding of office or engagement; and

you receive the lump sum within 6 months after the termination; and

the lump sum is not exempt from taxation under the law of the foreign country; and

(f) for a period of employment or holding an office—your foreign earnings from the employment or office are exempt from income tax under section 23AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

for a period of engagement on qualifying service on an approved project—your eligible foreign remuneration from the service is exempt from income tax under section 23AF of that Act.

Note: If you received the lump sum after that period of 6 months, the lump sum will fall within section 305-70.

For the purposes of subsection (1), treat the termination of employment, holding of office, or engagement as including:

retirement from the employment, office or engagement; and

cessation of the employment, office or engagement because of death.

Lump sums to which sections 305-60 and 305-65 do not apply

305-70 Lump sums received more than 6 months after Australian residency or termination of foreign employment etc.

Superannuation lump sums to which section applies

This section applies to a superannuation lump sum you receive from a *foreign superannuation fund if:

you are an Australian resident when you receive the lump sum; and

sections 305-60 and 305-65 do not apply to the lump sum.

Assessable part

Include in your assessable income so much of the lump sum (excluding any amount mentioned in subsection (4)) as equals:

your applicable fund earnings (worked out under section 305-75); or

if you have made a choice under section 305-80—your applicable fund earnings, less the amount covered by the choice.

Note: Under section 305-80, if your lump sum is paid into a complying superannuation plan, you can choose to have some or all of the applicable fund earnings excluded from your assessable income. The amount you choose is included in the assessable income of the plan: see section 295-200.

Non-assessable, non-exempt part

The remainder of the lump sum is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Amount paid into another foreign superannuation fund

(4) Any part of the lump sum that is paid into another *foreign superannuation fund is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

Note: However, your applicable fund earnings under section 305-75 in relation to a later lump sum payment out of the other foreign superannuation fund may include an amount (previously exempt fund earnings) attributable to the lump sum.

305-75 Lump sums—applicable fund earnings

(1) This section applies if you need to work out an amount (your applicable fund earnings) in relation to a *superannuation lump sum to which section 305-70 applies that you receive from a *foreign superannuation fund.

If you were an Australian resident at all times

(2) If you were an Australian resident at all times during the period to which the lump sum relates, the amount of your applicable fund earnings is the amount (not less than zero) worked out as follows:

work out the total of the following amounts:

(i) the part of the lump sum that is attributable to contributions made by or in respect of you on or after the day when you became a member of the fund (the start day);

the part of the lump sum (if any) that is attributable to amounts transferred into the fund from any other *foreign superannuation fund during the period;

subtract that total amount from the amount in the fund that was vested in you when the lump sum was paid (before any deduction for foreign income tax);

add the total of all your previously exempt fund earnings (if any) covered by subsections (5) and (6).

If you were not an Australian resident at all times

(3) If you become an Australian resident after the start of the period to which the lump sum relates (but before you received it) the amount of your applicable fund earnings is the amount (not less than zero) worked out as follows:

work out the total of the following amounts:

(i) the amount in the fund that was vested in you just before the day (the start day) you first became an Australian resident during the period;

the part of the payment that is attributable to contributions to the fund made by or in respect of you during the remainder of the period;

the part of the payment (if any) that is attributable to amounts transferred into the fund from any other *foreign superannuation fund during the remainder of the period;

subtract that total amount from the amount in the fund that was vested in you when the lump sum was paid (before any deduction for foreign income tax);

multiply the resulting amount by the proportion of the total days during the period when you were an Australian resident;

add the total of all previously exempt fund earnings (if any) covered by subsections (5) and (6).

Previous lump sums from the fund

(4) If the lump sum is not the first lump sum from the fund you have received to which this section applies, for subsections (2) and (3) the start day is the day after you received the most recent such lump sum.

Previously exempt fund earnings

(5) You have an amount of previously exempt fund earnings in respect of the lump sum if:

part or all of the amount in the fund that was vested in you when the lump sum was paid (before any deduction for foreign income tax) is attributable to the amount; and

the amount is attributable to a payment received from a *foreign superannuation fund; and

the amount would have been included in your assessable income under subsection 305-70(2) by the application of this section, but for the payment having been received by another foreign superannuation fund.

(6) The amount of your previously exempt fund earnings is the amount mentioned in paragraph (5)(c) (disregarding the addition of previously exempt fund earnings under subsection (2) or (3) of this section).

305-80 Lump sums paid into complying superannuation plans—choice

This section applies if:

section 305-70 applies to a superannuation lump sum that is paid from a *foreign superannuation fund; and

you are taken to receive the lump sum under section 307-15; and

all of the lump sum is paid into a complying superannuation fund; and

immediately after the lump sum is paid into the complying superannuation fund, you no longer have a *superannuation interest in the foreign superannuation fund.

You may choose for all or part of your applicable fund earnings worked out under section 305-75 (but not exceeding the amount of the lump sum) to be included in the assessable income of the *complying superannuation plan.

Note: Section 295-200 provides for the amount specified in the choice to be included in the assessable income of the complying superannuation plan.

Your choice:

must be in writing; and

must comply with the requirements (if any) specified in the regulations.

Division 306 — Roll-overs etc.

Guide to Division 306

306-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the tax treatment of payments made from one superannuation plan to another superannuation plan, and of similar payments.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

306-5 Effect of a roll-over superannuation benefit

306-10 Roll-over superannuation benefit

306-12 Involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit

306-15 Tax on excess untaxed roll-over amounts

306-20 Effect of payment to government of unclaimed superannuation money

306-25 Payments connected with financial claims scheme to RSAs

Operative provisions

306-5 Effect of a roll-over superannuation benefit

A roll-over superannuation benefit that you are taken to receive under section 307-15 is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Note: Roll-over superannuation benefits are paid into a complying superannuation plan or are used to purchase a superannuation annuity on your behalf. However, you are taken to receive the benefit under subsection 307-15(1).

306-10 Roll-over superannuation benefit

A *superannuation benefit is a roll-over superannuation benefit if:

the benefit is a superannuation lump sum and a superannuation benefit; and

(b) the benefit is not a superannuation benefit of a kind specified in the regulations; and

the benefit satisfies any of the following conditions:

it is paid from a *complying superannuation plan;

it is an unclaimed money payment;

it arises from the commutation of a superannuation annuity;

(iv) it is a payment under subsection 131-80(1) or (3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; and

the benefit satisfies any of the following conditions:

it is paid to a complying superannuation plan;

it is paid to an entity to purchase a superannuation annuity from the entity.

Note 1: A superannuation benefit may be paid from one superannuation plan of a superannuation provider to another superannuation plan of the same provider.

Note 2: For the treatment of amounts transferred within a superannuation plan, see subsection 307-5(8).

Note 3: Subparagraph (c)(iv) relates to payments when an entitlement to a credit ceases for a release authority relating to an FHSS determination.

306-12 Involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit

A *roll-over superannuation benefit is an involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit if it is:

a payment transferring a *superannuation interest of:

a member of a superannuation fund; or

a depositor with an approved deposit fund; or

a holder of an RSA;

to a *successor fund (other than a self managed superannuation fund) without the consent of the member, depositor or holder; or

(b) a payment transferring an *accrued default amount of a member (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993) of a *complying superannuation fund to another complying superannuation fund:

as a result of an election under paragraph 29SAA(1)(b) of that Act; or

under section 388 of that Act;

if:

that member becomes a member (within the meaning of that Act) of the other fund immediately after the transfer; and

the transfer happens during the period beginning on 1 July 2015 and ending on 1 July 2017; or

(c) a payment of consideration for the issue to a person of a beneficial interest in an eligible rollover fund (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993) in accordance with an application on behalf of that person under section 243 of that Act.

306-15 Tax on excess untaxed roll-over amounts

This section applies to a superannuation benefit if:

it is a roll-over superannuation benefit that is paid into a *superannuation plan; and

you are taken to receive the benefit under section 307-15; and

the benefit consists of, or includes, an amount that is an element untaxed in the fund; and

the amount mentioned in paragraph (c) exceeds your *untaxed plan cap amount (see section 307-350), for the superannuation plan from which the benefit is paid, just before you are taken to receive the benefit.

Note: To work out your untaxed plan cap amount in relation to an unclaimed money payment from the Commissioner, see subsection 307-350(2B).

However, this section does not apply to a roll-over superannuation benefit that is transferred from one *superannuation interest in a *superannuation plan to another superannuation interest in the same plan.

Note 1: A superannuation benefit may be paid from one superannuation plan of a superannuation provider to another superannuation plan of the same provider. Such a benefit may be a roll-over superannuation benefit: see section 306-10.

Note 2: For the treatment of amounts transferred within the same superannuation plan, see subsection 307-5(8).

(2) The excess untaxed roll-over amount is the amount of the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(d).

You are liable to pay income tax on the excess untaxed roll-over amount at the rate declared by the Parliament in respect of such amounts.

Note 1: The tax is imposed in the Superannuation (Excess Untaxed Roll-over Amounts Tax) Act 2007, and the amount of tax is set out in that Act.

Note 2: See the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for provisions dealing with the payment of the tax.

306-20 Effect of payment to government of unclaimed superannuation money

An *unclaimed money payment that you are taken to receive under section 307-15 because it is paid in accordance with the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999, or because it is paid as mentioned in subsection 18(4) of that Act, to the Commissioner or a State or Territory authority (within the meaning of that Act) is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

306-25 Payments connected with financial claims scheme to RSAs

This section applies if:

(a) a person is the holder of an *RSA (the old RSA) of which an *ADI is the *RSA provider; and

(b) an entitlement of the person arises under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 in connection with the old RSA; and

either:

(i) the entitlement, so far as it relates to the old RSA, is met wholly or partly by the making of a payment to another RSA (the new RSA) that the person is the holder of (whether or not the new RSA was established under section 16AH of the Banking Act 1959); or

(ii) a liquidator of the ADI pays a distribution from the liquidation of the ADI, so far as the distribution is attributable to the old RSA, to another RSA (also the new RSA) that the person is the holder of (whether or not the new RSA was established under section 16AR of the Banking Act 1959).

This Part (except this section), and the other provisions of this Act (except this section) so far as they relate to this Part, apply in relation to the payment to the new RSA as if:

the payment were made from the old RSA to the new RSA; and

the entity that made the payment (rather than the *ADI) were the RSA provider of the old RSA.

Note: The effects of this include:

the payment is a superannuation member benefit of the person (because of sections 307-5 and 307-15); and

the payment is a superannuation lump sum under Subdivision 307-B (unless regulations prevent this); and

the payment is a roll-over superannuation benefit under section 306-10 (unless regulations prevent this); and

(d) reporting obligations (such as those in section 390-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953) apply to the entity that made the payment as if it were the RSA provider of the old RSA.

However, for the purposes of section 307-125, determine the *value of the *superannuation interest, and the amount of each of the *tax free component and the *taxable component of the interest:

when the entitlement arose; or

if a superannuation income stream benefit had been paid from the old RSA before that time—at the time the relevant superannuation income stream commenced.

Subsection (3) has effect despite:

subsection 307-125(3) (as it applies because of subsection (2) of this section); and

(b) paragraph 307-125(3)(a) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

This section has effect despite:

Division 253; and

(b) Division 21 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 307 — Key concepts relating to superannuation benefits

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 307

307-A Superannuation benefits generally

307-B Superannuation lump sums and superannuation income stream benefits

307-C Components of a superannuation benefit

307-D Superannuation interests

307-E Elements taxed and untaxed in the fund of the taxable component of superannuation benefit

307-F Low rate cap and untaxed plan cap amounts

307-G Other concepts

Guide to Division 307

307-1 What this Division is about

This Division defines concepts used in Divisions 301 to 306, such as superannuation benefit, and the tax free component and taxable component of such benefits. To work out those components, it is often necessary to work out the corresponding components of the superannuation interest from which the benefit is paid (see Subdivision 307-D).

This Division also defines the element taxed in the fund and the element untaxed in the fund of superannuation benefits, which are relevant to superannuation benefits paid from untaxed funds etc. (see Subdivision 307-D).

Subdivision 307-F defines the concessional limits used in Division 301 known as the low rate cap amount and untaxed plan cap amount.

Subdivision 307-A — Superannuation benefits generally

Table of sections

307-5 What is a superannuation benefit?

307-10 Payments that are not superannuation benefits

307-15 Payments for your benefit or at your direction or request

307-5 What is a superannuation benefit?

(1) A superannuation benefit is a payment described in the table or in subsection (1A).

(1A) A payment (a PPL superannuation contribution payment) to you under paragraph 115F(1)(c) or paragraph 115K(4)(c) of the Paid Parental Leave Act 2010.

(1B) For the purposes of subsection (1A), disregard any amount recovered in relation to the payment under item 3 of the table in subsection 115P(3) of the Paid Parental Leave Act 2010.

(2) A superannuation member benefit is a payment described in column 2 of the table.

(4) A superannuation death benefit is a payment described in column 3 of the table or in subsection (1A).

Subsection (6) applies if a contributions-splitting superannuation benefit or a family law superannuation payment is paid to you because another person is a member of a superannuation fund, holder of an RSA or depositor with an approved deposit fund, or the annuitant under a superannuation annuity.

For the purposes of this section (and despite section 307-15):

treat yourself as a member of the fund, holder of the RSA, depositor with the fund or annuitant under the superannuation annuity; and

do not treat the other person as a member of the fund, holder of the RSA, depositor with the fund or annuitant under the superannuation annuity.

Note: This means that the benefit is a superannuation benefit for you but not for the other person.

(7) A family law superannuation payment is a payment that:

is a payment of any of the following kinds:

(i) a payment in accordance with Part VIIIB or VIIIC of the Family Law Act 1975;

(ii) a payment in accordance with prescribed regulations made under the Family Law Act 1975;

(iii) a payment in accordance with Part 7A of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994;

(iv) a payment in accordance with Part 4A of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997;

a payment specified in the regulations; and

satisfies the requirements (if any) specified in the regulations.

Treatment of amounts transferred within a superannuation plan

If an amount is transferred from one *superannuation interest in a *superannuation plan to another superannuation interest in the same plan, treat the transfer as a payment in determining whether the transfer of the amount is a superannuation benefit or a roll-over superannuation benefit.

307-10 Payments that are not superannuation benefits

A payment of any of the following kinds is not a superannuation benefit:

an amount payable to a person under an income stream because of the person’s temporary inability to engage in *gainful employment;

(aa) a benefit to which subsection 26AF(1) or 26AFA(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies;

(ab) an amount required by the Bankruptcy Act 1966 to be paid to a trustee;

an amount:

received by you, or to which you are entitled, as the result of the commutation of a pension payable from a constitutionally protected fund; and

(ii) wholly applied in paying any superannuation contributions surcharge (as defined in section 38 of the Superannuation Contributions Tax (Members of Constitutionally Protected Superannuation Funds) Assessment and Collection Act 1997);

an amount:

(i) received by you, or to which you are entitled, as the result of the commutation of a pension payable by a superannuation provider (within the meaning of the Superannuation Contributions Tax (Assessment and Collection) Act 1997); and

wholly applied in paying any superannuation contributions surcharge (as defined in section 43 of that Act);

a payment of a pension or an *annuity from a *foreign superannuation fund;

a payment that:

is paid by the *superannuation provider of a superannuation fund at your direction or request; and

(ii) relates directly to personal advice (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) provided to you in relation to your interest in the fund.

307-15 Payments for your benefit or at your direction or request

(1) This section applies for the purposes of:

(a) determining whether a payment is a superannuation benefit; and

determining whether a superannuation benefit is made to you, or received by you.

A payment is treated as being made to you, or received by you, if it is made:

for your benefit; or

(b) to another person or to an entity at your direction or request.

Note 1: Paragraph (a) would cover, for example, the reduction of a debt you have.

Note 2: Paragraph (b) would cover, for example, a direction by you that a payment be rolled over from your original superannuation fund into another superannuation fund.

Subdivision 307-B — Superannuation lump sums and superannuation income stream benefits

Table of sections

307-65 Meaning of superannuation lump sum

307-70 Meaning of superannuation income stream and superannuation income stream benefit

307-75 Meaning of retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit

307-80 When a superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase

307-65 Meaning of superannuation lump sum

(1) A superannuation lump sum is a *superannuation benefit that is not a *superannuation income stream benefit (see section 307-70).

(2) Treat a lump sum payment arising from a partial commutation of a *superannuation income stream as a superannuation lump sum for the purposes of this Act (other than Subdivision 295-F).

307-70 Meaning of superannuation income stream and superannuation income stream benefit

(1) A superannuation income stream benefit is a *superannuation benefit specified in the regulations that is paid from a *superannuation income stream.

(2) A superannuation income stream has the meaning given by the regulations.

Note: For the purposes of the transfer balance cap, the meaning of superannuation income stream is affected by subsection 294-50(2).

307-75 Meaning of retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit

(1) A *superannuation income stream benefit is a retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit (or RP superannuation income stream benefit) of a *superannuation fund at a time if it is payable by the fund at that time from a *superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase at that time.

(2) A *superannuation income stream benefit is also a retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit (or RP superannuation income stream benefit) of a *superannuation fund at a time if it is payable by the fund after that time from a *superannuation income stream that:

is a deferred superannuation income stream; and

is in the *retirement phase at that time.

307-80 When a superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase

(1) A *superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase at a time if a *superannuation income stream benefit is payable from it at that time.

(2) A *superannuation income stream is also in the retirement phase at a time if:

it is a deferred superannuation income stream; and

a superannuation income stream benefit will be payable from it to a person after that time; and

(c) the person has satisfied (whether at or before that time) a condition of release specified in any of the following items of the table in Schedule 1 to the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994:

101 (retirement);

102A (terminal medical condition);

103 (permanent incapacity);

106 (attaining age 65).

(3) However, a *superannuation income stream from which a*superannuation income stream benefit is payable is not in the retirement phase at a time if:

the superannuation income stream is any of the following:

(i) a transition to retirement income stream (within the meaning of Part 6 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994);

a non-commutable allocated annuity (within the meaning of those regulations);

a non-commutable allocated pension (within the meaning of those regulations);

(iv) a transition to retirement pension (within the meaning of Part 4 of the Retirement Savings Accounts Regulations 1997);

a non-commutable allocated pension (within the meaning of those regulations); and

the person to whom the benefit is payable is not a reversionary beneficiary; and

at or before that time, the person to whom the benefit is payable:

has not satisfied a condition of release specified in paragraph (2)(c); or

has satisfied a condition of release specified in subparagraph (2)(c)(i), (ii) or (iii), but has not notified the superannuation income stream provider for the superannuation income stream of that fact.

(4) A *superannuation income stream is also not in the retirement phase in an income year if:

(a) the superannuation income stream is specified in a commutation authority issued by the Commissioner under Subdivision 136-B in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 to a *superannuation income stream provider; and

the superannuation income stream provider is required by section 136-80 in that Schedule to pay a superannuation lump sum but fails to do so within the 60-day period mentioned in that section; and

the income year is the income year in which the 60-day period ended, or a later income year.

Note: The operation of this subsection in relation to the part of the income year before the end of the 60-day period is modified for the purposes of the transfer balance cap: see section 294-50.

Subdivision 307-C — Components of a superannuation benefit

Table of sections

307-120 Components of superannuation benefit

307-125 Proportioning rule

307-130 Superannuation guarantee payment consists entirely of taxable component

307-133 PPL superannuation contribution payment

307-135 Superannuation co-contribution benefit payment consists entirely of tax free component

307-140 Contributions-splitting superannuation benefit consists entirely of taxable component

307-142 Components of certain unclaimed money payments

307-143 Components of a superannuation benefit that is a repayment when an entitlement to a credit ceases for a release authority relating to an FHSS determination

307-145 Modification for disability benefits

307-150 Modification in respect of superannuation lump sum with element untaxed in fund

307-120 Components of superannuation benefit

Work out the following components of a superannuation benefit under this Subdivision:

(a) the tax free component;

(b) the taxable component.

Work out those components under:

if the benefit is not mentioned in paragraph (b), (c), (d), (e) or (f)—section 307-125; or

if the benefit is a superannuation guarantee payment—section 307-130; or

if the benefit is a superannuation co-contribution benefit payment—section 307-135; or

if the benefit is a contributions-splitting superannuation benefit—section 307-140; or

(e) if the benefit is a payment under subsection 17(2), (2AB) or (2AC), 20H(2), (2AA), (2A) or (3), 20QF(2), (5) or (6), 21E(2), (5) or (6), 22B(2), (5) or (6), 24G(2), (3A) or (3B) or 24NA(2), (3) or (4) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999—section 307-142; or

(f) if the benefit is a payment by the Commissioner under subsection 131-80(1) or (3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953—section 307-143.

Those components may be modified under sections 307-145 (which deals with certain disability benefits) and 307-150 (which deals with certain *elements untaxed in fund).

307-125 Proportioning rule

The object of this section is to ensure that the *tax free component and *taxable component of a superannuation benefit are calculated by:

first, determining the proportions of the *value of the *superannuation interest that those components represent; and

next, applying those proportions to the benefit.

(2) The *superannuation benefit is taken to be paid in a way such that each of those components of the benefit bears the same proportion to the amount of the benefit that the corresponding component of the *superannuation interest bears to the *value of the superannuation interest.

Example: The amount of a superannuation lump sum is $100. Just before the benefit is paid, the value of the superannuation interest was $1000 (of which $200 was the tax free component and $800 was the taxable component). For the lump sum, the tax free component is $20 and the taxable component is $80.

For the purposes of subsection (2), determine the *value of the *superannuation interest, and the amount of each of those components of the interest, at whichever of the following times is applicable:

if the superannuation benefit is a superannuation income stream benefit—when the relevant superannuation income stream commenced;

if the superannuation benefit is a superannuation lump sum—just before the benefit is paid;

despite paragraphs (a) and (b), if the superannuation benefit arises from the commutation of a superannuation income stream:

if subparagraph (ii) does not apply—when the relevant superannuation income stream commenced; or

if the superannuation income stream is a deferred superannuation income stream that had not commenced before the time the commutation happened—just before the time the commutation happened;

despite paragraphs (a) and (b), if:

the superannuation benefit is an involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit paid from a superannuation interest; and

that interest was supporting a superannuation income stream immediately before that benefit was paid;

when that superannuation income stream commenced.

Subsection (2) does not apply to a superannuation benefit if any of the following applies:

the regulations specify an alternative method for determining those components of the benefit;

a determination under subsection (5) specifies an alternative method for determining those components of the benefit;

the Commissioner consents in writing to the use of another method for determining those components of the benefit.

If so, use that method to determine those components of the benefit.

For the purposes of paragraph (4)(b), the Commissioner may determine, by legislative instrument, one or more alternative methods for determining those components of a superannuation benefit.

If the superannuation benefit is an unclaimed money payment or a small superannuation account payment, for the purposes of this section:

treat the benefit as a superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation interest; and

treat the amount of the benefit as the *value of that superannuation interest just before the time the benefit is paid.

307-130 Superannuation guarantee payment consists entirely of taxable component

The components of a superannuation benefit that is a superannuation guarantee payment are as follows:

the *tax free component is nil;

the *taxable component is the amount of the benefit.

307-133 PPL superannuation contribution payment

The components of a superannuation benefit that is a PPL superannuation contribution payment are as follows:

the *tax free component is nil;

the *taxable component is the amount of the benefit.

307-135 Superannuation co-contribution benefit payment consists entirely of tax free component

The components of a superannuation benefit that is a superannuation co-contribution benefit payment are as follows:

the *tax free component is the amount of the benefit;

the *taxable component is nil.

307-140 Contributions-splitting superannuation benefit consists entirely of taxable component

The components of a superannuation benefit that is a contributions-splitting superannuation benefit are as follows:

the *tax free component is nil;

the *taxable component is the amount of the benefit.

307-142 Components of certain unclaimed money payments

Preliminary

(1) This section explains how to work out the *tax free component, and the *taxable component, of a *superannuation benefit that is a payment by the Commissioner under subsection 17(2), (2AB) or (2AC), 20H(2), (2AA), (2A) or (3), 20QF(2), (5) or (6), 21E(2), (5) or (6), 22B(2), (5) or (6), 24G(2), (3A) or (3B) or 24NA(2), (3) or (4) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999, or by a State or Territory authority as mentioned in subsection 18(5) of that Act, in respect of a person.

Tax free component

Work out the *tax free component as follows (unless subsection (3B) or (3C) applies):

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the amount (the unclaimed amount) (or amounts), set out in column 1 of the table in subsection (3), to which the *superannuation benefit is attributable.

A payment under subsection 20H(2) or (3) of that Act may be attributable to more than one unclaimed amount.

A payment under subsection 20QF(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3A of the table.

A payment under subsection 21E(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3B of the table.

A payment under subsection 22B(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3C of the table.

A payment made under subsection 24G(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 4 of the table.

A payment under subsection 24NA(2) or (3) of that Act may be attributable to more than one unclaimed amount.

Step 2. Assume that the unclaimed amount (or each unclaimed amount), instead of being paid to the Commissioner, had been paid to the person as the payment (the claimed equivalent) set out in column 2 of the table.

Step 3. The *tax free component of the superannuation benefit consists of so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to the amount set out in column 3 of the table for the claimed equivalent (or as is attributable to the amounts set out in that column for the claimed equivalents).

Note: A payment made under subsection 17(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 1 or 2 of the table.

This is the table mentioned in subsection (2):

Note 1: Section 65AA of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 requires certain shortfall components to be treated as amounts paid to the Commissioner under subsection 20F(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

The effect of excluding such shortfall components from item 3 of the table in this subsection is that the taxable component includes so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to such a shortfall component.

The effect of this is that the taxable component includes so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to such interest.

Note 2: The table in this subsection does not cover interest paid by the Commissioner under subsection 20H(2A) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

Treat the amount set out in column 3 of an item of the table in subsection (3) as being nil, if:

(a) the unclaimed amount set out in column 1 of the item is an amount paid to the Commissioner by a State or Territory authority (within the meaning of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999) in the circumstances mentioned in section 18AA, 20JA, 20QH or 24HA of that Act; and

the Commissioner does not have sufficient information to work out the amount set out in column 3 of the item.

(3B) The *tax free component is the amount of the benefit, if the *superannuation benefit is paid under subsection 17(2AB) or (2AC), 20H(2AA), 20QF(5) or (6), 21E(5) or (6), 22B(5) or (6), 24G(3A) or (3B) or 24NA(4) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 (interest).

(3C) Despite subsection (3B), the *tax free component is nil, if the *superannuation benefit is paid under subsection 20H(2AA) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 (interest) in respect of a person who:

is a former temporary resident (within the meaning of that Act) when the payment is made; or

if the person died before the payment is made—was a former temporary resident just before dying.

Taxable component

The *taxable component is so much (if any) of the superannuation benefit as is not the *tax free component.

307-143 Components of a superannuation benefit that is a repayment when an entitlement to a credit ceases for a release authority relating to an FHSS determination

Preliminary

This section explains how to work out the *tax free component, and the *taxable component, of your superannuation benefit that:

(a) is a repayment by the Commissioner under subsection 131-80(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 of an amount (the released amount) paid to the Commissioner in relation to you; or

(b) is a payment by the Commissioner under subsection 131-80(3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 of an equivalent amount to an amount (the released amount) paid to the Commissioner in relation to you.

Tax free component

The *tax free component of your superannuation benefit is equal to the total amount that the released amount reduced the tax free components of your *superannuation interests.

Taxable component

The *taxable component of your superannuation benefit is equal to the total amount that the released amount reduced the taxable components of your *superannuation interests.

307-145 Modification for disability benefits

(1) Work out the tax free component of the *superannuation benefit under subsection (2) if the benefit is a *superannuation lump sum and a *disability superannuation benefit.

Note: This section does not apply to an unclaimed money payment.

(2) The tax free component is the sum of:

the *tax free component of the benefit worked out apart from this section; and

the amount worked out under subsection (3).

However, the tax free component cannot exceed the amount of the benefit.

Work out the amount by applying the following formula:

where:

days to retirement is the number of days from the day on which the person stopped being capable of being *gainfully employed to his or her *last retirement day.

service days is the number of days in the *service period for the lump sum.

(4) The balance of the *superannuation benefit is the taxable component of the benefit.

307-150 Modification in respect of superannuation lump sum with element untaxed in fund

This section applies to a superannuation lump sum if:

it is not a roll-over superannuation benefit; or

it is a roll-over superannuation benefit that includes an element untaxed in the fund, all or part of which will be included in the assessable income of the *superannuation provider in relation to the superannuation fund into which the benefit is paid.

However, this section applies to the superannuation lump sum only to the extent that it is attributable to a *superannuation interest that existed just before 1 July 2007.

If the superannuation lump sum includes an element untaxed in the fund:

increase the *tax free component of the benefit by the amount that is the lesser of these amounts:

the amount worked out under subsection (4); and

the amount of the element untaxed in the fund (apart from this section); and

(b) reduce the element untaxed in the fund by the lesser of those amounts.

Work out the amount by applying the following formula:

where:

original tax free component and untaxed element is the sum of:

the *tax free component of the superannuation benefit (apart from this section); and

the element untaxed in the fund of the superannuation benefit (apart from this section).

If the benefit is in part attributable to a crystallised pre-July 83 amount, in working out the *tax free component of the superannuation benefit (apart from this section) for the purposes of subsection (4), disregard the amount of the benefit that is attributable to the crystallised segment of the *superannuation interest from which the benefit is paid.

Subdivision 307-D — Superannuation interests

Table of sections

307-200 Regulations relating to meaning of superannuation interests

307-205 Value of superannuation interest

307-210 Tax free component of superannuation interest

307-215 Taxable component of superannuation interest

307-220 What is the contributions segment?

307-225 What is the crystallised segment?

307-230 Total superannuation balance

307-230A Total superannuation balance value

307-231 Limited recourse borrowing arrangements

307-200 Regulations relating to meaning of superannuation interests

(1) In the circumstances specified in the regulations, treat a superannuation interest as two or more superannuation interests in the way specified in the regulations.

(2) In the circumstances specified in the regulations, treat 2 or more superannuation interests as one superannuation interest in the way specified in the regulations.

Regulations for the purposes of this section may specify a way of treating a *superannuation interest in relation to one or more of the following aspects of the interest:

the *tax free component (and the contributions segment and crystallised segment relating to that component);

the *taxable component;

the element taxed in the fund of the taxable component;

the element untaxed in the fund of the taxable component.

Regulations for the purposes of subsection (1) may specify a way of allocating an amount relating to a *superannuation interest treated as two or more superannuation interests in accordance with those regulations to those interests.

Subsections (3) and (4) do not limit the regulations that may be made for the purposes of this section.

307-205 Value of superannuation interest

The value of a *superannuation interest at a particular time is:

if the regulations specify a method for determining the value of the superannuation interest—that value; or

otherwise—the total amount of all the *superannuation lump sums that could be payable from the interest at that time.

307-210 Tax free component of superannuation interest

(1) The tax free component of a *superannuation interest is so much of the *value of the interest as consists of:

the contributions segment of the interest; and

the crystallised segment of the interest.

Tax free component reduces if a benefit is paid

If a superannuation benefit is paid from the *superannuation interest:

the crystallised segment of the interest is reduced (but not below zero) by an amount equal to the *tax free component of the benefit; and

if any of that amount remains, the contributions segment of the interest is reduced (but not below zero) by that remaining amount.

Note: This has the effect of reducing the interest’s tax free component by the amount of the benefit’s tax free component.

307-215 Taxable component of superannuation interest

The taxable component of a *superannuation interest is the *value of the interest less the *tax free component of the interest.

307-220 What is the contributions segment?

(1) The contributions segment of a *superannuation interest is the total amount of the contributions to the interest:

that were made after 30 June 2007; and

to the extent that they have not been and will not be included in the assessable income of the *superannuation provider in relation to the *superannuation plan in which the interest is held.

This section has effect subject to subsection 307-210(2).

Note: This segment may be reduced if a superannuation benefit is paid from the superannuation interest: see subsection 307-210(2).

For the purposes of this section:

in determining whether contributions are included in the contributions segment under subsection (1):

disregard the *taxable component of a roll-over superannuation benefit paid into the interest; and

(ia) disregard the *tax free component of an *involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit paid into the interest from another superannuation interest (the earlier interest) (other than an earlier interest that was supporting a *superannuation income stream immediately before that benefit was paid); and

if subparagraph (ia) applies—include as a contribution an amount equal to the amount referred to in subsection (5); and

for a *superannuation plan that is a constitutionally protected fund—treat the superannuation plan as if it were not a constitutionally protected fund; and

disregard section 295-180 and Subdivision 295-D.

For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(a)(i), treat the excess untaxed roll-over amount (if any) of the roll-over superannuation benefit as part of the *tax free component of the benefit instead of the *taxable component of the benefit.

(4) Subparagraph (2)(a)(i) does not apply to a *roll-over superannuation benefit that is a *departing Australia superannuation payment made under subsection 20H(2), (2AA) or (2A) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

Note 1: The whole departing Australia superannuation payment is included in the contributions segment of the superannuation interest, as none of the payment has been or will be included in the superannuation provider’s assessable income.

Note 2: Including the whole payment in that segment, and thus the tax free component, of the superannuation interest ensures that the amount of the payment, which is taxed by the Superannuation (Departing Australia Superannuation Payments Tax) Act 2007, does not attract more tax when paid as a superannuation benefit from the interest.

For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(a)(ib), the amount is:

if the involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit is covered by paragraph 306-12(a) or (c)—the sum of the contributions segment, and crystallised segment, of the earlier interest immediately before the benefit was paid; or

if the benefit is covered by paragraph 306-12(b)—the proportion of that sum that the benefit was to the *value of the earlier interest immediately before the benefit was paid.

307-225 What is the crystallised segment?

(1) To work out the crystallised segment of a *superannuation interest, first assume that:

an eligible termination payment had been made in respect of the holder of the interest just before 1 July 2007; and

the amount of the eligible termination payment had been equal to the *value of the interest at that time.

(2) The crystallised segment of the *superannuation interest is the total amount of the following components of the eligible termination payment:

the concessional component;

the post-June 1994 invalidity component;

the undeducted contributions;

the CGT exempt component;

the pre-July 83 component.

This section has effect subject to subsection 307-210(2).

Note: This segment may be reduced if a superannuation benefit is paid from the superannuation interest: see subsection 307-210(2).

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(e), disregard the *value of the interest just before 1 July 2007 to the extent that it would consist, apart from this subsection, of the element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component of a superannuation benefit constituted by the eligible termination payment.

(4) In this section, the following terms have the same meaning as in subsection 27A(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (as in force just before 1 July 2007):

(a) concessional component;

(b) post-June 1994 invalidity component;

(c) undeducted contributions;

(d) CGT exempt component;

(e) pre-July 83 component;

(f) eligible termination payment.

307-230 Total superannuation balance

(1) Your total superannuation balance, at a particular time, is the sum of the following:

the total superannuation balance value, at that time, of each of the following *superannuation interests (other than an interest in a *superannuation plan that, at that time, is a *foreign superannuation fund):

a superannuation interest of yours;

a superannuation interest that supports a superannuation income stream of which you are a *retirement phase recipient because of the death of another person;

the amount of each roll-over superannuation benefit:

paid at or before that time; and

received by the *complying superannuation plan, or the entity from which the superannuation annuity is being purchased, after that time; and

not reflected in the value in paragraph (a);

if you have an LRBA amount under section 307-231 (about limited recourse borrowing arrangements) in relation to one or more *regulated superannuation funds—the LRBA amounts for each such regulated superannuation fund.

Modification for structured settlement contributions

(2) However, if a *structured settlement contribution is made at or before a time in respect of you, your total superannuation balance at that time is modified by reducing the sum worked out under subsection (1) by the sum of any such structured settlement contributions.

Family law splits

For the purposes of the provisions mentioned in subsection (5), you are treated as having a *superannuation interest in a *superannuation plan if:

you are a non-member spouse in relation to a superannuation interest that:

is an interest in that superannuation plan; and

is subject to a payment split but remains an interest of the member spouse; and

circumstances prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph exist.

For the purposes of the provisions mentioned in subsection (5), the regulations must specify whether the *superannuation interest that you are treated as having is to be treated as being a defined benefit interest.

Note: Regulations made for the purposes of paragraph 307-230A(1)(a) may specify the total superannuation balance value of the interest.

The provisions are the following:

subsection (1) of this section;

section 307-230A;

the Division 296 tax law.

307-230A Total superannuation balance value

(1) The total superannuation balance value, at a particular time, of a *superannuation interest is:

if the regulations specify a value, or a method for determining a value, for the purposes of this paragraph—the specified value, or the value determined in accordance with the specified method; or

otherwise—the total amount of the *superannuation benefits that would become payable if:

the individual to whom the superannuation interest relates had the right to cause the superannuation interest to cease at that time; and

the individual voluntarily caused the superannuation interest to cease at that time.

Regulations made for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) may specify a value or method in different ways depending on any of the following matters:

the individual to whom the *superannuation interest relates;

whether the superannuation interest is in the *retirement phase;

whether the superannuation interest is or includes a defined benefit interest;

the superannuation income stream (if any) supported by the superannuation interest;

if the superannuation interest is an interest in a superannuation fund or approved deposit fund—the rules of the fund;

if the superannuation interest is an interest in an RSA—the terms and conditions of the RSA;

the *superannuation provider in relation to the *superannuation plan in which the individual holds the superannuation interest;

whether the superannuation interest is subject to a payment split;

whether the individual is treated as having the superannuation interest under subsection 307-230(3);

the death of the individual;

any other matter.

Regulations made for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) may provide for a value to be determined wholly or partly by reference to:

methods or factors that are approved by legislative instrument by a Minister:

for the purposes of the regulations; or

for the purposes of another Act or legislative instrument; or

an actuary’s certificate.

Regulations made for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) may specify circumstances in which a total superannuation balance value is nil.

Subsections (2), (3) and (4) do not limit the regulations that may be made for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a).

307-231 Limited recourse borrowing arrangements

(1) You have an amount under this section (an LRBA amount), in relation to a *regulated superannuation fund in which you have one or more *superannuation interests, if:

(a) the *superannuation provider in relation to the fund has a *borrowing under an *arrangement that is covered by the exception in subsection 67A(1) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993 (which is about limited recourse borrowing arrangements); and

the borrowing has not been repaid at the time of working out your total superannuation balance; and

at that time, the asset or assets that secure the borrowing support, to an extent, a superannuation interest of yours; and

the fund is a small superannuation fund at that time; and

either:

you have satisfied (whether at or before that time) a condition of release specified in paragraph 307-80(2)(c); or

the lender is an associate of the superannuation provider.

Note: Subsection 318(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 sets out when an entity is an associate of a trustee.

The amount of your LRBA amount in relation to the regulated superannuation fund is the sum of the amounts worked out under subsection (3) for:

if subparagraph (1)(e)(i) applies—each borrowing that satisfies paragraphs (1)(a), (b) and (c); or

if subparagraph (1)(e)(i) does not apply—each borrowing that satisfies paragraphs (1)(a), (b) and (c) and subparagraph (1)(e)(ii).

The amount under this subsection, in respect of a borrowing, is worked out using the following formula:

where:

outstanding balance means the outstanding balance on the *borrowing at the time of working out your *total superannuation balance.

value of all supported super interests means the sum of the *values at that time of all *superannuation interests in the *regulated superannuation fund that are supported by the asset or assets that secure the *borrowing.

value of your supported super interests means the sum of the *values at that time of each *superannuation interest of yours that is supported by the asset or assets that secure the *borrowing.

Subdivision 307-E — Elements taxed and untaxed in the fund of the taxable component of superannuation benefit

Table of sections

307-275 Element taxed in the fund and element untaxed in the fund of superannuation benefits

307-280 Superannuation benefits from constitutionally protected funds etc.

307-285 Trustee can choose to convert element taxed in the fund to element untaxed in the fund

307-290 Taxed and untaxed elements of death benefit superannuation lump sums

307-295 Superannuation benefits from public sector superannuation schemes may include untaxed element

307-297 Public sector superannuation schemes—elements set by regulations

307-300 Certain unclaimed money payments

307-275 Element taxed in the fund and element untaxed in the fund of superannuation benefits

(1) The *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit consists of an element taxed in the fund or an element untaxed in the fund, or both.

(2) The *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit consists wholly of an element taxed in the fund except as provided in a later section of this Subdivision.

(3) Despite subsection (2), the *taxable component of any of the following kinds of *superannuation benefit consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund:

a small superannuation account payment;

a superannuation guarantee payment.

307-280 Superannuation benefits from constitutionally protected funds etc.

(1) The *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit paid from a *superannuation fund that is a *constitutionally protected fund consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund.

Despite subsection (1), if:

the benefit is a superannuation lump sum; and

the benefit is attributable to one or more *roll-over superannuation benefits that consisted of, or included, an element taxed in the fund;

the *taxable component of the benefit has an element taxed in the fund equal to the total of those elements taxed in the fund.

(3) The *taxable component of a *superannuation income stream benefit consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund if it is paid from a *superannuation fund that was a *constitutionally protected fund on the first day of the period to which the *superannuation income stream relates.

307-285 Trustee can choose to convert element taxed in the fund to element untaxed in the fund

If:

you receive a superannuation benefit from a public sector superannuation scheme; and

the trustee of the scheme gives you written notice specifying an amount as the element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component of the benefit; and

the notice is given within the time and in the manner approved by the Commissioner in writing; and

the scheme came into operation on or before 5 September 2006;

the taxable component consists of an element untaxed in the fund equal to the specified amount.

The trustee of the scheme can give only one notice under subsection (1) in relation to a particular superannuation lump sum.

307-290 Taxed and untaxed elements of death benefit superannuation lump sums

This section applies to a superannuation death benefit that is a superannuation lump sum, in relation to which a deduction has been, or is to be, claimed under section 295-465 or 295-470.

Note 1: Those sections allow deductions for insurance premiums that have been paid, and for liability for future benefits.

Note 2: Deductions made under former section 279 or 279B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are treated for the purposes of this section as having been made under section 295-465 or 295-470 (see section 307-290 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

(2) The *taxable component of the *superannuation lump sum includes an element taxed in the fund worked out as follows:

first, work out the amount under the formula in subsection (3);

next, reduce that amount (but not below zero) by the *tax free component (if any) of the superannuation lump sum.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), the formula is:

where:

days to retirement is the number of days from the day on which the deceased died to the deceased’s *last retirement day.

service days is the number of days in the *service period for the lump sum.

(4) The element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component is the balance of the taxable component.

307-295 Superannuation benefits from public sector superannuation schemes may include untaxed element

This section applies to a superannuation benefit that is paid from a public sector superannuation scheme that is not a constitutionally protected fund.

(2) If the *superannuation benefit paid is not sourced to any extent from contributions made into a *superannuation fund or earnings on such contributions, the *taxable component of the superannuation benefit consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund.

(3) If the benefit is a *superannuation lump sum that is partly sourced from contributions made into a *superannuation fund or earnings on such contributions, the element taxed in the fund and the element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component of the benefit are worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Subdivide the *taxable component of the *superannuation lump sum (the original benefit) into 2 notional superannuation lump sums as follows:

(a) the amount sourced from contributions made into a *superannuation fund or earnings on such contributions (the fund benefit);

(b) the remainder of the taxable component of the lump sum (the non-fund benefit).

Step 2. The fund benefit consists of an element taxed in the fund, an element untaxed in the fund, or both, as worked out under this Subdivision.

Step 3. The non-fund benefit consists wholly of an element untaxed in the fund.

Step 4. The element taxed in the fund of the original benefit equals the element taxed in the fund of the fund benefit.

Step 5. The element untaxed in the fund of the original benefit is the sum of the elements untaxed in the fund worked out under steps 2 and 3.

307-297 Public sector superannuation schemes—elements set by regulations

This section applies to a superannuation benefit that is paid from a public sector superannuation scheme that is not a constitutionally protected fund.

(2) Despite any other provision of this Subdivision, the *taxable component of the *superannuation benefit consists of an element untaxed in the fund equal to the amount (if any) specified by the regulations in relation to the benefit for the purposes of this section.

The amount specified must not be less than the amount that would be the element untaxed in the fund under the other provisions of this Subdivision.

307-300 Certain unclaimed money payments

Preliminary

(1) This section explains how to work out the *element taxed in the fund, and the *element untaxed in the fund, of the *taxable component of a *superannuation benefit that is a payment by the Commissioner under subsection 17(2), 20H(2), (2AA), (2A) or (3), 20QF(2), 21E(2), 22B(2), 24G(2) or 24NA(2) or (3) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

Element taxed in the fund

(2) Work out the element taxed in the fund as follows (unless subsection (3A) applies):

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the amount (the unclaimed amount) (or amounts), set out in column 1 of the table in subsection (3), to which the *taxable component is attributable.

A payment under subsection 20H(2) or (3) of that Act may be attributable to more than one unclaimed amount.

A payment under subsection 20QF(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3A of the table.

A payment under subsection 21E(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3B of the table.

A payment under subsection 22B(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 3C of the table.

A payment made under subsection 24G(2) of that Act is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 4 of the table.

A payment under subsection 24NA(2) or (3) of that Act may be attributable to more than one unclaimed amount.

Step 2. Assume that the unclaimed amount (or each unclaimed amount), instead of being paid to the Commissioner, had been paid to the person as the payment (the claimed equivalent) set out in column 2 of the table.

Step 3. The element taxed in the fund of the *taxable component consists of so much of the taxable component as is attributable to the amount set out in column 3 of the table for the claimed equivalent (or as is attributable to the amounts set out in that column for the claimed equivalents).

Note: A payment made under subsection 17(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 is attributable to a single unclaimed amount set out in item 1 or 2 of the table.

This is the table mentioned in subsection (2):

Note 1: Section 65AA of the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992 requires certain shortfall components to be treated as amounts paid to the Commissioner under subsection 20F(1) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

The effect of excluding such shortfall components from item 3 of the table in this subsection is that the element untaxed in the fund includes so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to such a shortfall component.

The effect of this is that the element untaxed in the fund of the taxable component includes so much of the superannuation benefit as is attributable to such interest.

Note 2: The table in this subsection does not cover interest paid by the Commissioner under subsection 20H(2A) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

(3A) The element taxed in the fund is nil, if the *superannuation benefit is paid under subsection 20H(2AA) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 (interest).

Note: The taxable component of a superannuation benefit paid by the Commissioner under subsection 17(2AB) or (2AC), 20QF(5) or (6), 21E(5) or (6), 22B(5) or (6) or 24G(3A) or (3B) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999, or under subsection 20H(2AA) in respect of a person who is not a former temporary resident, is nil: see subsections 307-142(3B) and (4) of this Act.

Element untaxed in the fund

(4) The element untaxed in the fund of the *taxable component is so much (if any) of the taxable component as is not the element taxed in the fund.

Subdivision 307-F — Low rate cap and untaxed plan cap amounts

Table of sections

307-345 Low rate cap amount

307-350 Untaxed plan cap amount

307-345 Low rate cap amount

Starting amount

(1) Your low rate cap amount for the 2007-2008 income year is $140,000.

Note: However, if you became entitled to a rebate under the corresponding provision of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, see section 307-345 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Reductions and increases

(2) If you receive one or more *superannuation member benefits that are *superannuation lump sums in an income year, reduce your low rate cap amount for the next income year (but not below zero) by the total of the amounts that:

are included in your assessable income for the first year in respect of those lump sums; and

are counted towards your entitlement to a tax offset under subsection 301-20(2) or 301-105(4) for the first year.

(3) At the start of each income year after the 2007-2008 income year, increase your low rate cap amount by the amount (if any) by which the index amount for that income year exceeds the index amount for the previous income year.

For the purposes of subsection (3), the index amount for the 2007-2008 income year is $140,000. The index amount is then indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the index amount: see section 960-285.

307-350 Untaxed plan cap amount

(1) Your untaxed plan cap amount for a *superannuation plan at the start of the 2007-2008 income year is $1,000,000.

Reductions and increases

Subsection (2) applies if:

you receive one or more *superannuation member benefits from a *superannuation plan at a time; and

the benefit, or one or more of the benefits:

is a superannuation lump sum; and

includes an element untaxed in the fund.

(2) Reduce your untaxed plan cap amount just after that time:

if the total of the *elements untaxed in the fund of the *superannuation member benefits to which paragraph (1A)(b) applies falls short of your untaxed plan cap amount at that time—by that total; or

otherwise—to nil.

For the purposes of subsections (1A) and (2), disregard subsection 307-5(8).

(2B) For the purposes of the application of this section in relation to *superannuation lump sums paid by the Commissioner under subsections 17(2), 20H(2), (2AA), (2A) and (3), 20QF(2), 21E(2), 22B(2) and 24G(2) of the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999, treat all such lump sums as if they were paid from a single *superannuation plan.

(3) At the start of each income year after the 2007-2008 income year, increase your untaxed plan cap amount for the *superannuation plan by the amount (if any) by which the index amount for that income year exceeds the index amount for the previous income year.

For the purposes of subsection (3), the index amount for the 2007-2008 income year is $1,000,000. The index amount is then indexed annually.

Note: Subdivision 960-M shows how to index amounts. However, annual indexation does not necessarily increase the index amount: see section 960-285.

Subdivision 307-G — Other concepts

Table of sections

307-400 Meaning of service period for a superannuation lump sum

307-400 Meaning of service period for a superannuation lump sum

(1) The service period for a *superannuation lump sum consists of each day that is in the period worked out under the table or a period covered by subsection (2).

(2) The service period for the *superannuation lump sum (the later lump sum) also includes each day that is in the *service period for an earlier superannuation lump sum if some or all of the later lump sum is attributable, directly or indirectly, to some or all of the earlier lump sum through the payment of one or more *roll-over superannuation benefits.

Division 310 — Loss relief for merging superannuation funds

Guide to Division 310

310-A Object of this Division

310-B Choice to transfer losses

310-C Consequences of choosing to transfer losses

310-D Choice for assets roll-over

310-E Consequences of choosing assets roll-over

310-F Choices

Guide to Division 310

310-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out special rules for certain merging superannuation funds. These rules relate to the transfer of losses, the treatment of CGT events related to the merger and the treatment of assets related to the merger.

Operative provisions

Note: This Division applies to mergers happening between 24 December 2008 and 30 June 2011 (or, in certain cases, 30 September 2011), or mergers happening on or after 1 October 2011 (see Part 3 of Schedule 2 to the Tax Laws Amendment (2009 Measures No. 6) Act 2010).

Subdivision 310-A — Object of this Division

310-5 Object

The main object of this Division is to facilitate the consolidation of the superannuation industry by allowing certain merging *superannuation funds to retain the value, for income tax purposes, of certain losses that might otherwise cease to be able to be utilised as a result of the merger.

Subdivision 310-B — Choice to transfer losses

310-10 Original fund’s assets extend beyond life insurance policies and units in pooled superannuation trusts

310-15 Original fund’s assets include a complying superannuation life insurance policy

310-20 Original fund’s assets include units in a pooled superannuation trust

310-10 Original fund’s assets extend beyond life insurance policies and units in pooled superannuation trusts

A trustee of:

(a) a *complying superannuation fund (other than a *self managed superannuation fund) (the transferring entity or the original fund); or

(b) a *complying approved deposit fund (the transferring entity or the original fund);

can choose to transfer losses if an arrangement is made for which the conditions in this section are satisfied.

Transferring entity’s assets include other assets

The first condition is satisfied if, just before the arrangement was made, the transferring entity’s assets included assets other than:

a complying superannuation life insurance policy; or

units in a pooled superannuation trust.

Note: Other entities may also choose under this Subdivision to transfer losses, for the same arrangement, if the transferring entity holds a complying superannuation life insurance policy or units in a pooled superannuation trust.

Original fund’s members transfer to a continuing fund

The second condition is satisfied if, under the arrangement:

(a) the transferring entity ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993) at a particular time (the completion time); and

(b) the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of the transferring entity become members (within the meaning of that Act) of one or more *complying superannuation funds (the continuing funds).

Continuing funds will usually not be able to be small funds

The third condition is satisfied if either:

none of the continuing funds was a small superannuation fund, and all existed, just before the arrangement was made; or

the following subparagraphs apply:

only one of the continuing funds either was a small superannuation fund, or did not exist, just before the arrangement was made;

(ii) under the arrangement, a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund, other than the original fund, ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993);

under the arrangement, the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of that other fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of the continuing fund;

either the other fund or the original fund was not a small superannuation fund just before the arrangement was made;

the continuing fund is not a small superannuation fund just after the earliest time when both the other fund and the original fund cease to have any members (within the meaning of that Act).

Ignore members who cannot transfer to a continuing fund

For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), ignore an individual who remains a member of a complying superannuation fund or complying approved deposit fund because of circumstances beyond the control of the trustee of that fund.

310-15 Original fund’s assets include a complying superannuation life insurance policy

(1) A *life insurance company (the transferring entity) can choose to transfer losses if an *arrangement is made for which the conditions in this section are satisfied.

Original fund holds a complying superannuation life insurance policy

The first condition is satisfied if, just before the arrangement was made, a complying superannuation life insurance policy issued by the transferring entity was held by:

(a) a *complying superannuation fund (the original fund); or

(b) a *complying approved deposit fund (the original fund).

Note: Other entities may also choose under this Subdivision to transfer losses, for the same arrangement, if the original fund holds other assets.

Original fund’s members transfer to a continuing fund

The second condition is satisfied if, under the arrangement:

(a) the original fund ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993) at a particular time (the completion time); and

(b) the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of the original fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of one or more *complying superannuation funds (the continuing funds).

Continuing funds will usually not be able to be small funds

The third condition is satisfied if either:

none of the continuing funds was a small superannuation fund, and all existed, just before the arrangement was made; or

the following subparagraphs apply:

only one of the continuing funds either was a small superannuation fund, or did not exist, just before the arrangement was made;

(ii) under the arrangement, a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund, other than the original fund, ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993);

under the arrangement, the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of that other fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of the continuing fund;

either the other fund or the original fund was not a small superannuation fund just before the arrangement was made;

the continuing fund is not a small superannuation fund just after the earliest time when both the other fund and the original fund cease to have any members (within the meaning of that Act).

Ignore members who cannot transfer to a continuing fund

For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), ignore an individual who remains a member of a complying superannuation fund or complying approved deposit fund because of circumstances beyond the control of the trustee of that fund.

310-20 Original fund’s assets include units in a pooled superannuation trust

(1) A trustee of a *pooled superannuation trust (the transferring entity) can choose to transfer losses if an *arrangement is made for which the conditions in this section are satisfied.

Units in the trust were held by the original fund

The first condition is satisfied if, just before the arrangement was made, units in the transferring entity were held by:

(a) a *complying superannuation fund (the original fund); or

(b) a *complying approved deposit fund (the original fund).

Note: Other entities may also choose under this Subdivision to transfer losses, for the same arrangement, if the original fund holds other assets.

Original fund’s members transfer to a continuing fund

The second condition is satisfied if, under the arrangement:

(a) the original fund ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993) at a particular time (the completion time); and

(b) the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of the original fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of one or more *complying superannuation funds (the continuing funds).

Continuing funds will usually not be able to be small funds

The third condition is satisfied if either:

none of the continuing funds was a small superannuation fund, and all existed, just before the arrangement was made; or

the following subparagraphs apply:

only one of the continuing funds either was a small superannuation fund, or did not exist, just before the arrangement was made;

(ii) under the arrangement, a *complying superannuation fund or *complying approved deposit fund, other than the original fund, ceases to have any members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993);

under the arrangement, the individuals who cease to be members (within the meaning of that Act) of that other fund become members (within the meaning of that Act) of the continuing fund;

either the other fund or the original fund was not a small superannuation fund just before the arrangement was made;

the continuing fund is not a small superannuation fund just after the earliest time when both the other fund and the original fund cease to have any members (within the meaning of that Act).

Ignore members who cannot transfer to a continuing fund

For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), ignore an individual who remains a member of a complying superannuation fund or complying approved deposit fund because of circumstances beyond the control of the trustee of that fund.

Subdivision 310-C — Consequences of choosing to transfer losses

310-25 Who losses can be transferred to

310-30 Losses that can be transferred

310-35 Effect of transferring a net capital loss

310-40 Effect of transferring a tax loss

310-25 Who losses can be transferred to

An entity choosing under Subdivision 310-B to transfer losses can choose to transfer any or all of the transferring entity’s losses set out in section 310-30, in whole or in part, to one or more of the following entities (a receiving entity):

a continuing fund for the choice;

a pooled superannuation trust in which units are held by a continuing fund for the choice just after the completion time;

a life insurance company with which a complying superannuation life insurance policy is held by a continuing fund for the choice just after the completion time.

310-30 Losses that can be transferred

The transferring entity’s losses that can be transferred are:

(a) any of its *net capital losses for income years earlier than the income year for the transferring entity that includes the completion time (the transfer year), to the extent that it was not *utilised before the completion time (an earlier year net capital loss); and

(b) any net capital loss it would have made for the transfer year were the transfer year to have ended at the completion time (a transfer year net capital loss); and

(c) any of its *tax losses for income years earlier than the transfer year, to the extent that it was not utilised before the completion time (an earlier year tax loss); and

(d) any tax loss it would have incurred for the transfer year were the transfer year to have ended at the completion time (a transfer year tax loss);

worked out subject to the modifications set out in this section.

Note: If the entity choosing to transfer losses also chooses an asset roll-over under Subdivision 310-D for the same arrangement, none of the transfer events for the roll-over will contribute towards a loss transferred under this Subdivision (see subsections 310-55(1), 310-60(3), 310-65(1) and 310-70(1)).

For a choice under section 310-15 (life insurance companies), work out those losses by only considering the following to the extent that they relate to assets reasonably attributable to a complying superannuation life insurance policy issued by the transferring entity and held by the original fund:

*capital gains from *complying superannuation assets;

*capital losses from complying superannuation assets;

assessable income covered by subsection 320-137(2) (about complying superannuation assets);

deductions covered by subsection 320-137(4) (about complying superannuation assets).

For a choice under section 310-20 (pooled superannuation trusts), work out those losses by only considering *capital gains, *capital losses, assessable income and deductions to the extent that they relate to assets reasonably attributable to units in the transferring entity held by the original fund.

310-35 Effect of transferring a net capital loss

To the extent that an earlier year net capital loss is transferred to a receiving entity:

the transferring entity is taken not to have made the loss for that earlier income year; and

an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be:

if the receiving entity is a life insurance company—a *capital loss from *complying superannuation assets made by the receiving entity for the transfer year; and

otherwise—a capital loss made by the receiving entity for the transfer year.

To the extent that a transfer year net capital loss is transferred to a receiving entity:

if the transferring entity is a life insurance company—the sum of the transferring entity’s *capital losses from *complying superannuation assets for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to the transferred amount; and

if the transferring entity is not a life insurance company—the sum of the transferring entity’s capital losses for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to the transferred amount; and

if the receiving entity is a life insurance company—an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be a capital loss from complying superannuation assets made by the receiving entity for the transfer year; and

if the receiving entity is not a life insurance company—an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be a capital loss made by the receiving entity for the transfer year.

310-40 Effect of transferring a tax loss

To the extent that an earlier year tax loss is transferred to a receiving entity:

the transferring entity is taken not to have incurred the loss for that earlier income year; and

for the purposes of section 36-15, an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be:

if the receiving entity is a life insurance company—a *tax loss of the *complying superannuation class incurred by the receiving entity for the income year immediately prior to the transfer year; and

otherwise—a tax loss incurred by the receiving entity for the income year immediately prior to the transfer year; and

for all other purposes of this Act, an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be:

if the receiving entity is a life insurance company—a tax loss of the complying superannuation class incurred by the receiving entity for the transfer year; and

otherwise—a tax loss incurred by the receiving entity for the transfer year.

To the extent that a transfer year tax loss is transferred to a receiving entity:

if the transferring entity is a life insurance company—the sum of the transferring entity’s deductions covered by subsection 320-137(4) (about complying superannuation assets) for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to the transferred amount; and

if the transferring entity is not a life insurance company—the sum of the transferring entity’s deductions for the transfer year is reduced by an amount equal to the transferred amount; and

if the receiving entity is a life insurance company—an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be a *tax loss of the *complying superannuation class incurred by the receiving entity for the transfer year; and

if the receiving entity is not a life insurance company—an amount equal to the transferred amount is taken to be a tax loss incurred by the receiving entity for the transfer year.

Subdivision 310-D — Choice for assets roll-over

310-45 Choosing the assets roll-over

310-50 Choosing the form of the assets roll-over

310-45 Choosing the assets roll-over

An entity can choose a roll-over under this Subdivision if:

(a) the entity makes or could make a choice under Subdivision 310-B (the losses choice) to transfer the losses of an entity (the transferring entity); and

the conditions in this section are satisfied for the arrangement to which the losses choice relates.

(2) The first condition is that, under the *arrangement, one or more *CGT events (the transfer events) happen in relation to the following assets (the original assets) of the transferring entity with the result that it ceases to own those assets:

for a losses choice under section 310-10 (original funds)—all of its *CGT assets;

for a losses choice under section 310-15 (life insurance companies)—all of its CGT assets reasonably attributable to the complying superannuation life insurance policy held by the original fund for the losses choice just before the arrangement was made;

for a losses choice under section 310-20 (pooled superannuation trusts)—all of its CGT assets reasonably attributable to the units in that entity held by the original fund for the losses choice just before the arrangement was made.

(3) The second condition is that the transfer events all happen in the income year (the transfer year) for the transferring entity that includes the completion time for the losses choice.

(4) The third condition is that, for each transfer event, an asset (the received asset) becomes an asset of one of the following (the receiving entity) as a result of the event:

a continuing fund for the losses choice;

a pooled superannuation trust in which units are held by a continuing fund for the losses choice just after the completion time;

a life insurance company with which a complying superannuation life insurance policy is held by a continuing fund for the losses choice just after the completion time.

For the purposes of subsection (2), ignore any *CGT assets retained by the transferring entity:

to pay its existing or expected debts relating to the arrangement; or

(b) to meet its liabilities relating to individuals who have remained members (within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993) of the original fund because of circumstances beyond the control of the trustee of that fund.

310-50 Choosing the form of the assets roll-over

An entity that chooses a roll-over under this Subdivision must choose the form of the roll-over that applies to each of the following:

the original assets that are not *revenue assets;

the original assets that are revenue assets.

In respect of original assets that are not *revenue assets, the entity choosing the roll-over must choose either section 310-55 (global asset approach) or 310-60 (individual asset approach) to apply to the original assets and the corresponding received assets.

In respect of original assets that are *revenue assets, the entity choosing the roll-over must choose either section 310-65 (global asset approach) or 310-70 (individual asset approach) to apply to the original assets and the corresponding received assets.

Note: The entity choosing the form of the roll-over may choose different forms of roll-over for its CGT assets and revenue assets.

Subdivision 310-E — Consequences of choosing assets roll-over

310-55 CGT assets—if global asset approach chosen

310-60 CGT assets—individual asset approach

310-65 Revenue assets—if global asset approach chosen

310-70 Revenue assets—individual asset approach

310-75 Further consequences for roll-overs involving life insurance companies

310-55 CGT assets—if global asset approach chosen

Consequences for transferring entity

For each of the original assets to which this section applies, the transferring entity’s capital proceeds from the relevant transfer event are taken to be an amount equal to:

if, apart from this subsection, the event would result in a *capital gain—the asset’s *cost base just before the event; or

if, apart from this subsection, the event would result in a *capital loss—the asset’s *reduced cost base just before the event.

Note: This section only applies if it is chosen to apply under subsection 310-50(2).

Consequences for receiving entity

For each of the received assets to which this section applies, the first element of the *cost base of the asset (in the hands of the receiving entity) is taken to be an amount equal to the cost base of the corresponding original asset just before the relevant transfer event.

For each of the received assets to which this section applies, the first element of the *reduced cost base of the asset (in the hands of the receiving entity) is taken to be an amount equal to the reduced cost base of the corresponding original asset just before the relevant transfer event.

310-60 CGT assets—individual asset approach

Consequences for transferring entity

The transferring entity may disregard any *capital gain or *capital loss for a transfer event relating to an original asset to which this section applies.

Note: This section only applies if it is chosen to apply under subsection 310-50(2).

Subsections (3), (4) and (5) apply if under subsection (1) the transferring entity disregards a *capital gain or *capital loss for a transfer event relating to an original asset.

The transferring entity’s capital proceeds from the transfer event are taken to be an amount equal to:

if, apart from this subsection, the event would result in a *capital gain—the asset’s *cost base just before the event; or

if, apart from this subsection, the event would result in a *capital loss—the asset’s *reduced cost base just before the event.

Consequences for receiving entity

The first element of the *cost base of the corresponding received asset (in the hands of the receiving entity) is taken to be an amount equal to the cost base of the original asset just before the event.

The first element of the *reduced cost base of the corresponding received asset (in the hands of the receiving entity) is taken to be an amount equal to the reduced cost base of the original asset just before the event.

310-65 Revenue assets—if global asset approach chosen

Consequences for transferring entity

(1) For each of the original assets to which this section applies, the transferring entity’s gross proceeds for the relevant transfer event are taken to be the amount (the deemed proceeds) the transferring entity would need to have received in order to have a nil profit and nil loss for the event.

Note: This section only applies if it is chosen to apply under subsection 310-50(3).

Consequences for receiving entity

For each of the received assets to which this section applies, the receiving entity is taken, for the purposes of this Act, to have paid an amount for that asset at the time of the transfer event that is equal to the deemed proceeds for the corresponding original asset.

310-70 Revenue assets—individual asset approach

Consequences for transferring entity

(1) If the transferring entity derives assessable income (other than a *capital gain) or incurs a *tax loss for a transfer event relating to an original asset to which this section applies, the entity choosing the roll-over can choose for the transferring entity’s gross proceeds for the event to be taken to be the amount (the deemed proceeds) the transferring entity would need to have received in order to have a nil profit and nil loss for the event.

Note: This section only applies if it is chosen to apply under subsection 310-50(3).

Consequences for receiving entity

If a choice is made under subsection (1), the receiving entity is taken to have paid an amount for the corresponding received asset at the time of the transfer event that is equal to the deemed proceeds for the event.

310-75 Further consequences for roll-overs involving life insurance companies

Section 320-200 (about consequences of transferring assets to or from a complying superannuation asset pool) does not apply for a transfer event for the roll-over if either the transferring entity or the receiving entity is a life insurance company.

If the receiving entity for the roll-over is a life insurance company, each received asset of that entity is taken:

to be a complying superannuation asset of that entity; and

not to be, in whole or in part, a life insurance premium.

Subdivision 310-F — Choices

310-85 Choices

310-85 Choices

A choice under this Division must be made:

by the day the transferring entity’s income tax return is lodged for the transfer year for the entity; or

within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

The way the transferring entity’s income tax return is prepared is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

Division 312 — Trans-Tasman portability of retirement savings

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 312

312-A Preliminary

312-B Amounts contributed to complying superannuation funds from KiwiSaver schemes

312-C Superannuation benefits paid to KiwiSaver scheme providers

Guide to Division 312

312-1 What this Division is about

This Division deals with amounts transferred between KiwiSaver schemes and complying superannuation funds. This Division also deals with amounts paid by the Commissioner to KiwiSaver schemes.

Subdivision 312-A — Preliminary

Table of sections

312-5 Division implements Arrangement with New Zealand

312-5 Division implements Arrangement with New Zealand

This Division, together with the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 and regulations made under the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993, implement the Arrangement between the Government of Australia and the Government of New Zealand on Trans-Tasman Retirement Savings Portability, signed at Brisbane on 16 July 2009.

Subdivision 312-B — Amounts contributed to complying superannuation funds from KiwiSaver schemes

Table of sections

312-10 Amounts contributed to complying superannuation funds from KiwiSaver schemes

312-10 Amounts contributed to complying superannuation funds from KiwiSaver schemes

Treat amount as a contribution

An amount transferred from a KiwiSaver scheme to a complying superannuation fund in relation to you is treated as being a contribution you made to the complying superannuation fund for the purpose of providing *superannuation benefits for yourself.

Note 1: The contribution will not be included in the assessable income of the trustee of the complying superannuation fund: see Division 295.

Note 2: The contribution is not included in your concessional contributions: see section 291-25. Some of the contribution may be included in your non-concessional contributions: see subsection (3) of this section.

Division 290 (Contributions to superannuation funds), section 295-200 (Transfers from foreign superannuation funds) and Subdivision 305-B (Superannuation benefits from foreign superannuation funds) do not apply to the contribution.

Australian-sourced amount and returning New Zealand-sourced amount not non-concessional

For the purposes of Subdivision 292-C (Excess non-concessional contributions tax), disregard so much of the contribution as you or the KiwiSaver scheme provider informs, in accordance with the regulations mentioned in section 312-5, the trustee of the complying superannuation fund is:

an Australian-sourced amount; or

a returning New Zealand-sourced amount.

Note: The effect of subsection (3) is that the amounts mentioned in paragraphs (3)(a) and (b) are not included in your non-concessional contributions. The rest of the contribution is included in your non-concessional contributions: see subsection 292-90(2).

Assessable income and capital gains

The contribution is not assessable income of yours and is not exempt income of yours.

Section 118-305 (capital gain or capital loss disregarded) applies in relation to the amount transferred as if the KiwiSaver scheme were a superannuation fund.

Tax free and taxable components of superannuation interest

Section 307-220 (Contributions segment) only applies to so much (if any) of the contribution as you or the KiwiSaver scheme provider inform, in accordance with the regulations mentioned in section 312-5, the trustee of the complying superannuation fund is:

a New Zealand-sourced amount; or

the *tax free component of an Australian-sourced amount.

Note: So much of the value of an interest in the fund as consists of the amounts mentioned in paragraphs (6)(a) and (b) is included in the contributions segment and tax free component of the interest. So much of the value of that interest as consists of the rest of the contribution is not included in the contributions segment of the interest and is included in the taxable component of the interest. (The value of the interest may also consist of amounts other than the contribution.)

Subdivision 312-C — Superannuation benefits paid to KiwiSaver scheme providers

Table of sections

312-15 Superannuation benefits paid from complying superannuation funds to KiwiSaver schemes

312-20 Superannuation benefits paid by Commissioner to KiwiSaver schemes

312-15 Superannuation benefits paid from complying superannuation funds to KiwiSaver schemes

A superannuation benefit paid to a KiwiSaver scheme provider by the trustee of a complying superannuation fund in respect of you is not assessable income of yours and is not exempt income of yours.

312-20 Superannuation benefits paid by Commissioner to KiwiSaver schemes

An *unclaimed money payment that you are taken to receive under section 307-15 because it is paid to a KiwiSaver scheme provider by the Commissioner in accordance with the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999 is not assessable income and is not *exempt income.

Division 313 — First home super saver scheme

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 313

313-A Preliminary

313-B Assessable income and tax offset

313-C Purchasing or constructing a residential premises

313-D Contributing amounts to superannuation

313-E First home super saver tax

313-F Review of decisions

Guide to Division 313

313-1 What this Division is about

If an amount is released from your superannuation interests under the first home super saver scheme, an amount may be included in your assessable income and you may become entitled to a tax offset.

You also have a limited period within which to enter into a contract to purchase or construct a residential premises or re-contribute an amount to your superannuation. If you do not notify the Commissioner that you have done one of those things, you become liable for tax.

Subdivision 313-A — Preliminary

Table of sections

Operative provisions

313-5 Object of this Division

313-10 Application of this Division

Operative provisions

313-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to provide an individual with concessional tax treatment for amounts released from superannuation for the purposes of purchasing or constructing the individual’s first home.

313-10 Application of this Division

This Division applies to you for one or more amounts (the FHSS released amounts) if:

(a) those amounts are paid in response to a release authority issued under Division 131 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to a *first home super saver determination made in relation to you; and

your entitlements under section 131-65 in that Schedule to credits relating to those amounts have not ceased under subsection 131-30(4) or 138-13(3) in that Schedule.

Subdivision 313-B — Assessable income and tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 313-B

313-15 What this Subdivision is about

An amount is included in your assessable income, and you are entitled to a tax offset, if:

an amount is paid in response to a release authority issued in respect of you; and

your entitlement to a credit relating to that amount has not ceased.

The amount included in your assessable income relates to the concessional contributions and total associated earnings that are stated in the relevant first home super saver determination.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

313-20 Amount included in assessable income

313-25 Amount of the tax offset

Operative provisions

313-20 Amount included in assessable income

Your assessable income, for the income year that corresponds to the financial year for which you requested the release authority, includes an amount that is equal to the sum of the following amounts stated in the first home super saver determination:

your concessional contributions;

your associated earnings.

However, if the sum of the FHSS released amounts is less than the FHSS maximum release amount stated in the determination, the amount included in your assessable income for the income year is:

the amount worked out under subsection (1); less

the difference between the FHSS maximum release amount and the sum of the FHSS released amounts.

If the amount worked out under subsection (2) is negative, the amount included in your assessable income for the income year is nil.

Note 1: The release authorities are issued under Division 131 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: Any amounts paid in response to the release authorities are non-assessable non-exempt income (see section 303-15).

313-25 Amount of the tax offset

You are entitled, for the income year mentioned in section 313-20, to a tax offset that is equal to 30% of your *assessable FHSS released amount for the income year.

Note: This offset cannot be refunded, transferred or carried forward (see item 20 of the table in subsection 63-10(1)).

Subdivision 313-C — Purchasing or constructing a residential premises

Guide to Subdivision 313-C

313-30 What this Subdivision is about

If an amount is released from your superannuation interests under the first home super saver scheme, and you enter into a contract within a particular period to purchase or construct a residential premises, you must notify the Commissioner of that contract.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

313-35 Purchasing or constructing a residential premises

313-40 Notifying Commissioner

Operative provisions

313-35 Purchasing or constructing a residential premises

Section 313-40 applies to you if:

a first home super saver determination is made in relation to you; and

(b) you make a valid request (the current request) under section 131-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for a release authority in relation to that determination; and

that current request is your first such request, or one of the following subparagraphs applies for each of your previous valid requests for such a release authority:

you have withdrawn the request;

the Commissioner has revoked the release authority issued in relation to the request (whether or not the release authority had previously been varied);

after one or more amendments of the request, you have withdrawn the latest of those amended requests;

the Commissioner has revoked the release authority issued in relation to the latest of one or more amendments of the request (whether or not the release authority had previously been varied); and

you enter into a contract to purchase or construct a CGT asset that is a residential premises in Australia within the period:

beginning 90 days before the day you make the first of the valid requests referred to in paragraph (ba); and

ending 12 months (or if extended under subsection (2), that longer period) after the day you make the current request; and

the price for the purchase or construction of the premises is at least equal to the total amount to be released that is stated in the current request; and

you have occupied the premises, or intend to occupy the premises as soon as practicable; and

you intend to occupy the premises for at least 6 months of the first 12 months after it is practicable to occupy the premises.

The Commissioner may extend the period for entering into a contract by up to 12 months.

Note: If you request an extension of the period, you may object against a decision of the Commissioner under this section (see section 313-85).

313-40 Notifying Commissioner

You must notify the Commissioner in the approved form of the matters set out in paragraphs 313-35(1)(a) to (f).

The notification must be made within the 90-day period, or such longer period as the Commissioner allows, after the day you enter into the contract to purchase or construct the residential premises.

Note: If you request an extension of the period, you may object against a decision of the Commissioner under this subsection (see section 313-85).

Subsection (1) does not limit the information that the approved form may require the notification to contain.

Subdivision 313-D — Contributing amounts to superannuation

Guide to Subdivision 313-D

313-45 What this Subdivision is about

If an amount is released from your superannuation interests under the first home super saver scheme, and you do not enter into a contract within a particular period to purchase or construct a residential premises, you may make one or more non-concessional contributions. If you do not notify the Commissioner that you have made the contributions, you may be liable for tax under Subdivision 313-E.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

313-50 Contributing amounts to superannuation

Operative provisions

313-50 Contributing amounts to superannuation

This section applies to you if:

you do not notify the Commissioner in accordance with section 313-40 (about purchasing or constructing a residential premises); and

(b) you make one or more *non-concessional contributions the sum of which is at least equal to:

your *assessable FHSS released amount for an income year; less

(ii) the amount withheld by the Commissioner from your *FHSS released amounts under section 12-460 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; and

you make the contributions within the period mentioned in paragraph 313-35(1)(c).

Note: Paragraph 313-35(1)(c) sets out the period in which you must have entered into a contract to purchase or construct a residential premises.

You may notify the Commissioner in the approved form that you have made the contributions mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

Note 1: If you notify the Commissioner, you cannot deduct the contribution (see section 290-168).

Note 2: If you do not notify the Commissioner, you may be liable for tax (see Subdivision 313-E).

The notification must be made within the period mentioned in paragraph 313-35(1)(c) or such longer period as the Commissioner allows under this subsection.

Note: If you request an extension of the period, you may object against a decision of the Commissioner under this subsection (see section 313-85).

Subsection (2) does not limit the information that the approved form may require the notification to contain.

Subdivision 313-E — First home super saver tax

Guide to Subdivision 313-E

313-55 What this Subdivision is about

If an amount is released from your superannuation interests under the first home super saver scheme, you are liable for tax if you do not, within a particular period, do either of the following:

enter into a contract to purchase or construct a residential premises, and notify the Commissioner of that contract;

make one or more non-concessional contributions, and notify the Commissioner of the contributions.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

313-60 First home super saver tax

313-65 When tax is payable—original assessments

313-70 When tax is payable—amended assessments

313-75 General interest charge

Operative provisions

313-60 First home super saver tax

You are liable to pay first home super saver tax if:

neither of section 313-40 or 313-50 applies to you; or

section 313-40 applies to you and you do not notify the Commissioner in accordance with that section; or

section 313-50 applies to you and you do not notify the Commissioner in accordance with that section.

Note 1: The amount of the tax is set out in the First Home Super Saver Tax Act 2017.

Note 2: Section 313-40 is about purchasing or constructing a residential premises. Section 313-50 is about making one or more non-concessional contributions.

313-65 When tax is payable—original assessments

Your assessed first home super saver tax is due and payable at the end of 21 days after the Commissioner gives you notice of the assessment of the amount of the first home super saver tax.

Note: For assessments of first home super saver tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

313-70 When tax is payable—amended assessments

If the Commissioner amends your assessment, any extra assessed first home super saver tax resulting from the amendment is due and payable 21 days after the day the Commissioner gives you notice of the amended assessment.

313-75 General interest charge

If an amount of assessed first home super saver tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

begins on the day on which the amount was due to be paid; and

ends on the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the assessed first home super saver tax;

general interest charge on any of the assessed first home super saver tax.

Note: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 313-F — Review of decisions

Guide to Subdivision 313-F

313-80 What this Subdivision is about

You may object against particular decisions made under this Division.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

313-85 Review rights for decisions made under this Division

Operative provisions

313-85 Review rights for decisions made under this Division

If:

you requested the Commissioner to allow a longer period under:

subsection 313-35(2) (for entering into a contract to purchase or construct a residential premises); or

subsection 313-40(2) or 313-50(3) (for notifying the Commissioner of matters); and

you are dissatisfied with:

a decision under that subsection allowing a longer period; or

a decision the Commissioner makes not to allow a longer period;

you may object against the decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

(2) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of paragraph (e) of Schedule 1 to the Administrative Decisions (Judicial Review) Act 1977, the making of a decision under a subsection mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) of this section is a decision forming part of the process of making an assessment of tax, and making a calculation of charge, under this Act.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 3—Specialist liability rules 1

Part 3-32—Co-operatives and mutual entities 1

Division 315—Demutualisation of private health insurers 1

Guide to Division 315 1

315-1 What this Division is about 1

Subdivision 315-A—Capital gains and losses connected with a demutualisation of a private health insurer to be disregarded 2

Rules for policy holders 3

315-5 Policy holders to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation of private health insurer 3

315-10 Effect on the legal personal representative or beneficiary 3

315-15 Demutualisations to which this Division applies 3

315-20 What assets are covered 4

Rules for demutualising health insurer 4

315-25 Demutualising health insurers to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation 4

Rules for other entities 5

315-30 Other entities to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation 5

Subdivision 315-B—Cost base of certain shares and rights in private health insurers 5

315-80 Cost base and acquisition time of demutualisation assets 6

315-85 Demutualisation asset 6

315-90 Participating policy holders 7

Subdivision 315-C—Lost policy holders trust 8

315-140 Lost policy holders trust 8

315-145 CGT treatment of demutualisation assets in lost policy holders trust 9

315-150 Roll-over where assets transferred to lost policy holder 9

315-155 Trustee assessed if assets dealt with not for benefit of lost policy holder 10

315-160 Subdivision 126-E does not apply to lost policy holders trust 10

Subdivision 315-D—Special cost base rules for certain shares and rights in holding companies 10

315-210 Cost base for shares and rights in certain holding companies 11

Subdivision 315-E—Special CGT rule for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries 12

315-260 Special CGT rule for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries 13

Subdivision 315-F—Non-CGT consequences of demutualisation 13

315-310 General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc. 14

Division 316—Demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurers 15

Guide to Division 316 15

316-1 What this Division is about 15

Subdivision 316-A—Application 15

316-5 Application of this Division 15

Subdivision 316-B—Capital gains and losses connected with the demutualisation 16

Guide to Subdivision 316-B 16

316-50 What this Subdivision is about 16

Gains and losses of members, insured entities and successors 17

316-55 Disregarding capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money 17

316-60 Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money 18

316-65 Valuation factor for sections 316-60, 316-105 and 316-165 19

316-70 Value of the friendly society 20

Friendly society’s gains and losses 22

316-75 Disregarding friendly society’s capital gains and losses 22

Other entities’ gains and losses 22

316-80 Disregarding other entities’ capital gains and losses 22

Subdivision 316-C—Cost base of shares and rights issued under the demutualisation 23

Guide to Subdivision 316-C 23

316-100 What this Subdivision is about 23

316-105 Cost base and time of acquisition of shares and certain rights issued under demutualisation 23

316-110 Demutualisation assets 24

316-115 Entities to which section 316-105 applies 25

Subdivision 316-D—Lost policy holders trust 25

Guide to Subdivision 316-D 25

316-150 What this Subdivision is about 25

Application 26

316-155 Lost policy holders trust 26

Effects of CGT events happening to interests and assets in trust 28

316-160 Disregarding beneficiaries’ capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money 28

316-165 Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money by beneficiaries 28

316-170 Roll-over where shares or rights to acquire shares transferred to beneficiary of lost policy holders trust 29

316-175 Trustee assessed if shares or rights dealt with not for benefit of beneficiary of lost policy holders trust 30

316-180 Subdivision 126-E does not apply 30

Subdivision 316-E—Special CGT rules for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries 30

316-200 Demutualisation assets not owned by deceased but passing to beneficiary in deceased estate 31

316-205 Interest in lost policy holders trust not owned by deceased but passing to beneficiary in deceased estate 31

Subdivision 316-F—Non-CGT consequences of the demutualisation 32

Guide to Subdivision 316-F 32

316-250 What this Subdivision is about 32

316-255 General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc. 33

316-260 Franking debits to stop the friendly society and its subsidiaries having franking surpluses 34

316-265 Franking debits to negate franking credits from some distributions to friendly society and subsidiaries 34

316-270 Franking debits to negate franking credits from post-demutualisation payments of pre-demutualisation tax 35

316-275 Franking credits to negate franking debits from refunds of tax paid before demutualisation 35

Part 3-35—Insurance business 36

Division 320—Life insurance companies 36

Guide to Division 320 36

320-1 What this Division is about 36

Operative provisions 38

Subdivision 320-A—Preliminary 38

320-5 Object of Division 38

Subdivision 320-B—What is included in a life insurance company’s assessable income 39

Guide to Subdivision 320-B 39

320-10 What this Subdivision is about 39

Operative provisions 39

320-15 Assessable income—various amounts 39

320-30 Assessable income—special provision for certain income years 42

320-35 Exempt income 42

320-37 Non-assessable non-exempt income 43

320-45 Tax treatment of gains or losses from CGT events in relation to complying superannuation assets 45

Subdivision 320-C—Deductions and capital losses 46

Guide to Subdivision 320-C 46

320-50 What this Subdivision is about 46

Operative provisions 47

320-55 Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from complying superannuation assets 47

320-60 Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from segregated exempt assets 48

320-65 Deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of life insurance policies that provide for participating or discretionary benefits 48

320-70 No deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of certain life insurance policies payable only on death or disability 48

320-75 Deduction for ordinary investment policies 48

320-80 Deduction for certain claims paid under life insurance policies 49

320-85 Deduction for increase in value of liabilities under net risk components of life insurance policies 50

320-87 Deduction for assets transferred from or to complying superannuation asset pool 51

320-100 Deduction for life insurance premiums paid under certain contracts of reinsurance 52

320-105 Deduction for assets transferred to segregated exempt assets 52

320-110 Deduction for interest credited to income bonds 52

320-111 Deduction for funeral policy payout 53

320-112 Deduction for scholarship plan payout 53

320-115 No deduction for amounts credited to RSAs 54

320-120 Capital losses from assets other than complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets 54

320-125 Capital losses from complying superannuation assets 54

Subdivision 320-D—Income tax, taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies 55

Guide to Subdivision 320-D 55

320-130 What this Subdivision is about 55

320-131 Overview of Subdivision 55

General rules 57

320-133 Object of Subdivision 57

320-134 Income tax of a life insurance company 58

320-135 Taxable income and tax loss of each of the 2 classes 59

Taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies 59

320-137 Taxable income—complying superannuation class 59

320-139 Taxable income—ordinary class 62

320-141 Tax loss—complying superannuation class 62

320-143 Tax loss—ordinary class 63

320-149 Provisions that apply only in relation to the ordinary class 64

Subdivision 320-E—No-TFN contributions of life insurance companies that are RSA providers 65

Guide to Subdivision 320-E 65

320-150 What this Subdivision is about 65

Operative provisions 65

320-155 Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to companies that are RSA providers 65

Subdivision 320-F—Complying superannuation asset pool 66

Guide to Subdivision 320-F 66

320-165 What this Subdivision is about 66

Operative provisions 67

320-170 Establishment of complying superannuation asset pool 67

320-175 Valuations of complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities for each valuation time 68

320-180 Consequences of a valuation under section 320-175 69

320-185 Transfer of assets to complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175 70

320-190 Complying superannuation liabilities 71

320-195 Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from a complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175 72

320-200 Consequences of transfer of assets to or from complying superannuation asset pool 73

Subdivision 320-H—Segregation of assets to discharge exempt life insurance policy liabilities 75

Guide to Subdivision 320-H 75

320-220 What this Subdivision is about 75

Operative provisions 76

320-225 Segregation of assets for purpose of discharging exempt life insurance policy liabilities 76

320-230 Valuations of segregated exempt assets and exempt life insurance policy liabilities for each valuation time 77

320-235 Consequences of a valuation under section 320-230 78

320-240 Transfer of assets to segregated exempt assets otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-230 79

320-245 Exempt life insurance policy liabilities 80

320-246 Exempt life insurance policy 81

320-247 Policy split into an exempt life insurance policy and another life insurance policy 84

320-250 Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from segregated exempt assets otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-230 85

320-255 Consequences of transfer of assets to or from segregated exempt assets 86

Subdivision 320-I—Transfers of business 90

Guide to Subdivision 320-I 90

320-300 What this Subdivision is about 90

Operative provisions 91

320-305 When this Subdivision applies 91

320-310 Special deductions and amounts of assessable income 91

320-315 Complying superannuation asset pool and segregated exempt assets 92

320-320 Certain amounts treated as life insurance premiums 92

320-325 Friendly societies 92

320-330 Immediate annuities 93

320-335 Parts of assets treated as separate assets 93

320-340 Continuous disability policies 93

320-345 Exemption of management fees 95

Division 321—General insurance companies and companies that self-insure in respect of workers’ compensation liabilities 96

Subdivision 321-A—Provision for, and payment of, claims by general insurance companies 96

321-10 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in adjusted liability for incurred claims 96

321-15 Deduction for increase in adjusted liability for incurred claims 97

321-20 How the value of adjusted liability for incurred claims is worked out 97

321-25 Deduction for claims paid during current year 98

Subdivision 321-B—Premium income of general insurance companies 98

321-45 Assessable income to include gross premiums 98

321-50 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in adjusted liability for remaining coverage 98

321-55 Deduction for increase in adjusted liability for remaining coverage 99

321-60 How the value of adjusted liability for remaining coverage is worked out 99

Subdivision 321-C—Companies that self-insure in respect of workers’ compensation liabilities 100

321-80 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in outstanding claims liability 100

321-85 Deduction for outstanding claims liability 101

321-90 How value of outstanding claims liability is worked out 101

321-95 Deductions for claims paid during current year 102

Division 322—Assistance for policyholders with insolvent general insurers 103

Guide to Division 322 103

322-1 What this Division is about 103

Subdivision 322-A—HIH rescue package 103

322-5 Rescue payments treated as insurance payments by HIH 103

322-10 HIH Trust exempt from tax 104

322-15 Certain capital gains and capital losses disregarded 104

Subdivision 322-B—Tax treatment of entitlements under financial claims scheme 104

Guide to Subdivision 322-B 104

322-20 What this Subdivision is about 104

Operative provisions 105

322-25 Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from insurer 105

322-30 Disposal of rights against insurer to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects 105

Part 3-45—Rules for particular industries and occupations 107

Division 328—Small business entities 107

Guide to Division 328 107

328-5 What this Division is about 107

328-10 Concessions available to small business entities 108

Subdivision 328-B—Objects of this Division 110

328-50 Objects of this Division 110

Subdivision 328-C—What is a small business entity 110

Guide to Subdivision 328-C 110

328-105 What this Subdivision is about 110

Operative provisions 111

328-110 Meaning of small business entity 111

328-115 Meaning of aggregated turnover 113

328-120 Meaning of annual turnover 114

328-125 Meaning of connected with an entity 115

328-130 Meaning of affiliate 118

Subdivision 328-D—Capital allowances for small business entities 119

Guide to Subdivision 328-D 119

328-170 What this Subdivision is about 119

Operative provisions 120

328-175 Calculations for depreciating assets 120

328-180 Assets costing less than $1,000 123

328-185 Pooling 125

328-190 Calculation 126

328-195 Opening pool balance 127

328-200 Closing pool balance 128

328-205 Estimate of taxable use 129

328-210 Low pool value 131

328-215 Disposal etc. of depreciating assets 132

328-220 What happens if you are not a small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision for an income year 133

328-225 Change in business use 133

328-230 Estimate where deduction denied 136

328-235 Interaction with Divisions 85 and 86 137

Special rules about roll-overs 137

328-243 Roll-over relief 137

328-245 Consequences of roll-over 138

328-247 Pool deductions 138

328-250 Deductions for assets first used in BAE year 139

328-253 Deductions for cost addition amounts 141

328-255 Closing pool balance etc. below zero 142

328-257 Taxable use 143

Subdivision 328-E—Trading stock for small and medium business entities 144

Guide to Subdivision 328-E 144

328-280 What this Subdivision is about 144

Operative provisions 144

328-285 Trading stock for small and medium business entities 144

328-295 Value of trading stock on hand 145

Subdivision 328-F—Small business income tax offset 146

Guide to Subdivision 328-F 146

328-350 What this Subdivision is about 146

Operative provisions 147

328-355 Entitlement to the small business income tax offset 147

328-357 Special meaning of small business entity for the purposes of this Subdivision—$5 million turnover threshold 148

328-360 Amount of your tax offset 148

328-365 Net small business income 149

328-370 Relevant attributable deductions 149

328-375 Modification if you are under 18 years old 149

Subdivision 328-G—Restructures of small businesses 150

Guide to Subdivision 328-G 150

328-420 What this Subdivision is about 150

Object of this Subdivision 151

328-425 Object of this Subdivision 151

Requirements for a roll-over under this Subdivision 151

328-430 When a roll-over is available 151

328-435 Genuine restructures—safe harbour rule 153

328-440 Ultimate economic ownership—discretionary trusts 153

328-445 Residency requirement 154

Consequences of a roll-over under this Subdivision 154

328-450 Small business transfers not to affect income tax positions 154

328-455 Effect of small business restructures on transferred cost of assets 155

328-460 Effect of small business restructures on acquisition times of pre-CGT assets 155

328-465 New membership interests as consideration for transfer of assets 156

328-470 Membership interests affected by transfers of assets 156

328-475 Small business restructures involving assets already subject to small business roll-over 157

Division 355—Research and Development 158

Guide to Division 355 158

355-1 What this Division is about 158

Subdivision 355-A—Object 159

355-5 Object 159

Subdivision 355-B—Meaning of R&D activities and other terms 159

355-20 R&D activities 160

355-25 Core R&D activities 160

355-30 Supporting R&D activities 163

355-35 R&D entities 164

Subdivision 355-C—Entitlement to tax offset 164

355-100 Entitlement to tax offset 165

355-105 Deductions under this Division are notional only 167

355-110 Notional deductions include prepaid expenditure 168

355-115 Working out an R&D entity’s total expenses 169

Subdivision 355-D—Notional deductions for R&D expenditure 170

355-200 What this Subdivision is about 170

355-205 When notional deductions for R&D expenditure arise 170

355-210 Conditions for R&D activities 171

355-215 R&D activities conducted by a permanent establishment for other parts of the body corporate 172

355-220 R&D activities conducted for a foreign entity 173

355-225 Expenditure that cannot be notionally deducted 174

Subdivision 355-E—Notional deductions etc. for decline in value of depreciating assets used for R&D activities 175

355-300 What this Subdivision is about 176

355-305 When notional deductions for decline in value arise 176

355-310 Notional application of Division 40 177

355-315 Balancing adjustments—assets only used for R&D activities 178

Subdivision 355-F—Integrity Rules 179

355-400 Expenditure incurred while not at arm’s length 180

355-405 Expenditure not at risk 180

355-410 Disposal of R&D results 181

355-415 Reducing deductions to reflect mark-ups within groups 183

Subdivision 355-G—Clawback of R&D recoupments, feedstock adjustments and balancing adjustments 184

Guide to Subdivision 355-G 184

355-430 What this Subdivision is about 184

Operative provisions 185

355-435 When this Subdivision applies 185

355-440 R&D recoupments 186

355-445 Feedstock adjustments 187

355-446 Balancing adjustments for assets only used for R&D activities 189

355-447 Balancing adjustments for assets partially used for R&D activities 190

355-448 Balancing adjustments for R&D partnership assets only used for R&D activities 191

355-449 Balancing adjustments for R&D partnership assets partially used for R&D activities 192

355-450 Amount to be included in assessable income 193

Subdivision 355-H—Catch up deductions for balancing adjustment events for assets used for R&D activities 194

Guide to Subdivision 355-H 194

355-455 What this Subdivision is about 194

Operative provisions 195

355-460 When this Subdivision applies 195

355-465 Assets only used for R&D activities 195

355-466 Assets partially used for R&D activities 196

355-467 R&D partnership assets only used for R&D activities 197

355-468 R&D partnership assets partially used for R&D activities 198

355-475 Amount that can be deducted 199

Subdivision 355-I—Application to earlier income year R&D expenditure incurred to associates 200

355-480 Notional deductions for expenditure incurred to associate in earlier income years 200

Subdivision 355-J—Application to R&D partnerships 202

355-500 What this Subdivision is about 202

355-505 Meaning of R&D partnership and partner’s proportion 203

355-510 R&D partnership expenditure on R&D activities 203

355-515 R&D activities conducted by or for an R&D partnership 204

355-520 When notional deductions arise for decline in value of depreciating assets of R&D partnerships 204

355-525 Balancing adjustments for R&D partnership assets only used for R&D activities 206

355-530 Implications for partner’s aggregated turnover 207

355-535 Disposal of R&D results for R&D partnerships 208

355-540 Application of recoupment rules 208

355-545 Relevance for net income, and losses, of the R&D partnership 209

Subdivision 355-K—Application to Cooperative Research Centres 210

355-580 When notional deductions for CRC contributions arise 210

Subdivision 355-W—Other matters 211

355-705 Effect of findings by Industry Innovation and Science Australia 211

355-710 Amendment of assessments 213

355-715 Implications for other deductions and tax offsets 214

Division 360—Early stage investors in innovation companies 216

Subdivision 360-A—Tax incentives for early stage investors in innovation companies 216

Guide to Subdivision 360-A 216

360-5 What this Subdivision is about 216

Operative provisions 217

360-10 Object of this Subdivision 217

360-15 Entitlement to the tax offset 217

360-20 Limited entitlement for certain kinds of investors 218

360-25 Amount of the tax offset—general case 219

360-30 Amount of the tax offset—members of trusts or partnerships 219

360-35 Amount of the tax offset—trustees 221

360-40 Early stage innovation companies 221

360-45 100 point innovation test 223

360-50 Modified CGT treatment 225

360-55 Modified CGT treatment—partnerships 226

360-60 Modified CGT treatment—not affected by certain roll-overs 227

360-65 Separate modified CGT treatment for roll-overs about wholly-owned companies or scrip for scrip roll-overs 228

Division 376—Films generally (tax offsets for Australian production expenditure) 230

Subdivision 376-A—Guide to Division 376 230

376-1 What this Division is about 230

376-2 Key features of the tax offsets for Australian production expenditure on films 230

376-5 Structure of this Division 231

Subdivision 376-B—Tax offsets for Australian expenditure in making a film 232

Refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making a film (location offset) 233

376-10 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making a film (location offset) 233

376-15 Amount of the location offset 234

376-20 Minister must issue certificate for a film for the location offset 234

376-25 Meaning of documentary 238

376-27 Minimum training expenditure requirement 239

376-28 Minimum training expenditure exemption—permanent film infrastructure 242

376-29 Minimum training expenditure exemption—training programs 243

376-30 Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the location offset 244

376-32 Minister may require information 244

Refundable tax offset for post, digital and visual effects production for a film (PDV offset) 245

376-35 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for post, digital and visual effects production for a film (PDV offset) 245

376-40 Amount of the PDV offset 247

376-45 Minister must issue certificate for a film for the PDV offset 247

376-50 Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the PDV offset 249

Refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (producer offset) 250

376-55 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (producer offset) 250

376-60 Amount of the producer offset 252

376-65 Film authority must issue certificate for an Australian film for the producer offset 252

376-70 Determination of content of film 259

376-75 Film authority to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the producer offset 259

Subdivision 376-C—Production expenditure and qualifying Australian production expenditure 260

Production expenditure—common rules 261

376-125 Production expenditure—general test 261

376-130 Production expenditure—special qualifying Australian production expenditure 263

376-135 Production expenditure—specific exclusions 263

Production expenditure—special rules for the location offset 266

376-140 Production expenditure—special rules for the location offset 266

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—common rules 266

376-145 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—general test 266

376-150 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—specific inclusions 266

376-155 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—specific exclusions 268

376-160 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—treatment of services embodied in goods 269

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the location offset and the PDV offset 269

376-165 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the location offset and the PDV offset 269

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the producer offset 271

376-170 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the producer offset 271

Expenditure generally—common rules 275

376-175 Expenditure to be worked out on an arm’s length basis 275

376-180 Expenditure incurred by prior production companies 276

376-185 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST 277

Subdivision 376-D—Certificates for films and other matters 277

376-230 Production company may apply for certificate 278

376-235 Notice of refusal to issue certificate 279

376-240 Issue of certificate 279

376-245 Revocation of certificate 281

376-247 Delegation by Arts Minister 282

376-250 Notice of decision or determination 282

376-255 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal 283

376-260 Minister may make rules about the location offset and the PDV offset 284

376-265 Film authority may make rules about the producer offset 285

376-270 Amendment of assessments 285

376-275 Review in relation to certain production levels 286

Division 378—Digital games (tax offset for Australian expenditure on digital games) 287

Guide to Division 378 287

378-1 What this Division is about 287

Subdivision 378-A—Tax offset for Australian expenditure in developing digital games 288

378-10 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure incurred in developing digital games 288

378-15 Amount of digital games tax offset 289

378-20 Meaning of digital game 290

378-25 Arts Minister must issue certificate for the digital games tax offset 291

378-30 Arts Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure for the digital games tax offset 295

Subdivision 378-B—Qualifying Australian development expenditure 296

378-35 Development expenditure 296

378-40 Qualifying Australian development expenditure 300

378-45 Expenditure incurred by prior companies in completing or porting a digital game 301

378-50 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST 303

Subdivision 378-C—Certificates for digital games tax offset 304

378-55 Single company or head company may apply for certificate 304

378-60 Notice of refusal to issue certificate 305

378-65 Issue of certificate 305

378-70 Revocation of certificate 306

378-75 Amendment of certificate 307

378-80 Amendment of assessments 308

Subdivision 378-D—Review and other matters 309

378-85 Notice of decision or determination 309

378-90 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal 310

378-95 Copy of digital game to be made available to the National Film and Sound Archive of Australia 310

378-100 Arts Minister may make rules about the digital games tax offset 310

378-105 Arts Minister may make rules establishing a Digital Games Tax Offset Advisory Board 311

378-110 Delegation by Arts Minister 312

378-115 Review of operation of this Division 312

Division 380—National Rental Affordability Scheme 313

Guide to Division 380 313

380-1 What this Division is about 313

Subdivision 380-A—National Rental Affordability Scheme Tax Offset 313

NRAS certificates issued to individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds 314

380-5 Claims by individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds 314

NRAS certificates issued to NRAS approved participants 315

380-10 Members of NRAS consortiums—individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds 315

380-11 Elections by NRAS approved participants 316

380-12 Elections by NRAS approved participants—tax offsets 317

380-13 Elections by NRAS approved participants—special rule for partnerships and trustees 318

380-14 Members of NRAS consortiums—partnerships and trustees 319

NRAS certificates issued to partnerships and trustees 320

380-15 Entities to whom NRAS rent flows indirectly 320

380-16 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees 321

380-17 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees—tax offsets 322

380-18 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees—special rule for partnerships and trustees 324

380-20 Trustee of a trust that does not have net income for an income year 325

380-25 When NRAS rent flows indirectly to or through an entity 326

380-30 Share of NRAS rent 328

Miscellaneous 331

380-32 Amended certificates 331

Subdivision 380-B—Payments made in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme etc. 332

380-35 Payments made and non-cash benefits provided in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme 332

Division 385—Primary production 333

Guide to Division 385 333

385-1 What this Division is about 333

385-5 Where to find some other rules relevant to primary producers 333

Subdivision 385-E—Primary producer can elect to spread or defer tax on profit from forced disposal or death of live stock 334

Guide to Subdivision 385-E 334

385-90 What this Subdivision is about 334

385-95 Basic principles for elections under this Subdivision 335

Operative provisions 335

385-100 Cases where you can make an election 335

385-105 Election to spread tax profit over 5 years 337

385-110 Alternative election to defer tax profit and reduce cost of replacement live stock 337

385-115 Your assessable income includes an amount for replacement live stock you breed 338

385-120 Purchase price of replacement live stock is reduced 339

385-125 Alternative election because of bovine tuberculosis has effect over 10 years not 5 340

Subdivision 385-F—Insurance for loss of live stock or trees 340

385-130 Insurance for loss of live stock or trees 340

Subdivision 385-G—Double wool clips 340

385-135 Election to defer including profit on second wool clip 340

Subdivision 385-H—Rules that apply to all elections made under Subdivisions 385-E, 385-F and 385-G 341

385-145 Partnerships and trusts 342

385-150 Time for making election 342

385-155 Amounts are assessable income from carrying on the primary production business 342

385-160 Effect of certain events on election 343

385-163 Disentitling events 343

385-165 New partnership can elect to be treated as same entity as old partnership 345

385-170 New partnership can elect to take advantage of election made by former owner of the business 345

Division 392—Long-term averaging of primary producers’ tax liability 347

Guide to Division 392 347

392-1 What this Division is about 347

392-5 Overview of averaging process 347

Subdivision 392-A—Is your income tax affected by averaging? 350

392-10 Individuals who carry on a primary production business 350

392-15 Meaning of basic taxable income 351

392-20 Trust beneficiaries taken to be carrying on primary production business 352

392-22 Trustee may choose that a beneficiary is a chosen beneficiary of the trust 354

392-25 Choosing not to have your income tax averaged 354

Subdivision 392-B—What kind of averaging adjustment must you make? 355

Guide to Subdivision 392-B 355

392-30 What this Subdivision is about 355

Tax offset or extra income tax 355

392-35 Will you get a tax offset or have to pay extra income tax? 355

How to work out the comparison rate 358

392-40 Identify income years for averaging your basic taxable income 358

392-45 Work out your average income for those years 358

392-50 Work out the income tax on your average income at basic rates 359

392-55 Work out the comparison rate 359

Subdivision 392-C—How big is your averaging adjustment? 359

Guide to Subdivision 392-C 359

392-60 What this Subdivision is about 359

392-65 What your averaging adjustment reflects 360

Your gross averaging amount 361

392-70 Working out your gross averaging amount 361

Your averaging adjustment 361

392-75 Working out your averaging adjustment 361

How to work out your averaging component 362

392-80 Work out your taxable primary production income 362

392-85 Work out your taxable non-primary production income 364

392-90 Work out your averaging component 365

Subdivision 392-D—Effect of permanent reduction of your basic taxable income 367

392-95 You are treated as if you had not carried on business before 367

Division 393—Farm management deposits 369

Guide to Division 393 369

393-1 What this Division is about 369

Subdivision 393-A—Tax consequences of farm management deposits 370

393-5 Deduction for making farm management deposit 370

393-10 Assessability on repayment of deposit 371

393-15 Transactions to which the deduction, assessment and 12 month rules have modified application 374

393-16 Consolidation of farm management deposits 375

393-17 Tax consequences of liabilities reducing because of farm management deposits 376

Subdivision 393-B—Meaning of farm management deposit and owner 377

393-20 Farm management deposits 377

393-25 Owners of farm management deposits 379

393-27 Trustee may choose that a beneficiary is a chosen beneficiary of the trust 380

393-28 Application of Division to beneficiary no longer under legal disability 381

393-30 Effect of contravening requirements 381

393-35 Requirements of agreement for a farm management deposit 382

393-37 Agreements for a farm management deposit may allow for some offsets of a depositor’s liabilities 384

393-40 Repayment of deposit within first 12 months 384

393-45 Partly repaid farm management deposits 387

Subdivision 393-C—Special rules relating to financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs 387

Guide to Subdivision 393-C 387

393-50 What this Subdivision is about 387

Operative provisions 388

393-55 Farm management deposits arising from farm management deposits with ADIs subject to financial claims scheme 388

393-60 Repayment if owner of farm management deposit with insolvent ADI dies, is bankrupt or ceases to be a primary producer 390

Division 394—Forestry managed investment schemes 392

Guide to Division 394 392

394-1 What this Division is about 392

394-5 Object of this Division 392

394-10 Deduction for amounts paid under forestry managed investment schemes 393

394-15 Forestry managed investment schemes and related concepts 394

394-20 Payments on behalf of participant in forestry managed investment scheme 395

394-25 CGT event in relation to forestry interest in forestry managed investment scheme—initial participant 395

394-30 CGT event in relation to forestry interest in forestry managed investment scheme—subsequent participant 396

394-35 70% DFE rule 398

394-40 Payments under forestry managed investment scheme 399

394-45 Direct forestry expenditure 400

Division 405—Above-average special professional income of authors, inventors, performing artists, production associates and sportspersons 402

Guide to Division 405 402

405-1 What this Division is about 402

405-5 Special rate of income tax on your above-average special professional income 403

405-10 Overview of the Division 404

Subdivision 405-A—Above-average special professional income 406

405-15 When do you have above-average special professional income? 406

Subdivision 405-B—Assessable professional income 407

405-20 What you count as assessable professional income 407

405-25 Meaning of special professional, performing artist, production associate, sportsperson and sporting competition 409

405-30 What you cannot count as assessable professional income 411

405-35 Limits on counting amounts as assessable professional income 412

405-40 Joint author or inventor treated as sole author or inventor 413

Subdivision 405-C—Taxable professional income and average taxable professional income 413

405-45 Working out your taxable professional income 414

405-50 Working out your average taxable professional income 414

Division 410—Copyright and resale royalty collecting societies 417

Guide to Division 410 417

410-1 What this Division is about 417

Subdivision 410-A—Notice of payments 417

410-5 Copyright collecting society must give notice to member of society 417

410-50 Resale royalty collecting society must give notice to holder of resale royalty right 418

Division 415—Designated infrastructure projects 419

Guide to Division 415 419

415-1 What this Division is about 419

Subdivision 415-A—Object of this Division 419

415-5 Object of this Division 419

Subdivision 415-B—Tax losses and bad debts 420

Guide to Subdivision 415-B 420

415-10 What this Subdivision is about 420

Uplift of tax losses 421

415-15 Uplift of tax losses of designated infrastructure project entities 421

415-20 Designated infrastructure project entity 423

Change of ownership of trusts and companies 425

415-25 Tax losses of trusts 425

415-30 Bad debts written off etc. by trusts 426

415-35 Tax losses of companies 427

415-40 Bad debts written off by companies 428

Consolidated groups 430

415-45 Losses transferred to head companies of consolidated groups 430

Subdivision 415-C—Designating infrastructure projects 430

Guide to Subdivision 415-C 430

415-50 What this Subdivision is about 430

Designating infrastructure projects 431

415-55 Applications for designation 431

415-60 Dealing with applications 432

415-65 Provisional designation 433

415-70 Designation 435

Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap 437

415-75 Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap 437

415-80 Acceptance of estimates of infrastructure project capital expenditure 438

Miscellaneous 440

415-85 Review of decisions 440

415-90 Information to be made public 440

415-95 Delegation 440

415-100 Infrastructure project designation rules 440

Division 417—Timor Sea petroleum 442

Guide to Division 417 442

417-1 What this Division is about 442

Subdivision 417-A—Introduction 442

417-5 Object 442

417-10 Meaning of transitioned petroleum activities 443

Subdivision 417-B—Capital allowances 443

417-25 Deducting amounts for depreciating assets 444

417-30 Balancing adjustments 445

417-35 Allocating assets to a project pool 446

417-40 Deduction for expenditure on mining site rehabilitation 447

417-45 Capital expenditure 447

417-50 Transferring entitlement to deductions relating to a project pool 448

Subdivision 417-C—Capital gains tax 450

417-65 CGT events not created by Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entering into force 450

417-70 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred entitlement to deductions or tax loss 450

417-75 Membership interests affected by transfer of entitlement to deductions or tax loss 451

Subdivision 417-D—Transferring or applying tax losses 452

417-90 Tax losses from transitioned petroleum activities 452

417-95 How choices are made 454

417-100 The effect of choosing to transfer losses 454

417-105 The effect of choosing to apply losses to earlier income years 455

417-110 Continuity of ownership and business continuity tests 455

Subdivision 417-E—Foreign income tax offset 456

417-125 Foreign income tax offset 456

Subdivision 417-F—Transfer pricing 456

417-140 Transfer pricing benefits relating to transitioned petroleum activities 456

Division 418—Exploration for minerals 458

Guide to Division 418 458

418-1 What this Division is about 458

Subdivision 418-A—Object of this Division 460

418-5 Object of this Division 460

Subdivision 418-B—Junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset 460

Entitlement to junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset 460

418-10 Who is entitled to the tax offset—ordinary case 460

418-15 Who is entitled to the tax offset—life insurance company 461

418-20 Entitlement of member of a trust or partnership to a share of exploration credits 462

Amount of junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset 464

418-25 The amount of the tax offset 464

418-30 Reduced amount of the tax offset for certain trusts 464

Subdivision 418-C—Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit 465

418-50 Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit—ordinary case 465

418-55 Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit—life insurance company 466

Subdivision 418-D—Creating exploration credits 467

418-70 Entities that may create exploration credits 467

418-75 Meaning of greenfields minerals explorer 468

418-80 Meaning of greenfields minerals expenditure 468

418-81 Meaning of exploration credits allocation for an income year 470

418-82 When does an entity have an unused allocation of exploration credits from an income year 471

418-85 Exploration credits must not exceed maximum exploration credit amount 472

418-95 Effect on tax losses of creating exploration credits 474

Subdivision 418-DA—Exploration credits allocation 474

418-100 Applying for an exploration credits allocation 474

418-101 Determination by the Commissioner 475

418-102 General allocation rules 476

418-103 Meaning of annual exploration cap 477

418-104 Failure to comply with this Subdivision does not affect allocation 478

Subdivision 418-E—Issuing exploration credits 478

418-110 Issuing exploration credits 478

418-111 Working out whether an exploration investment has been made in an income year 479

418-115 Who may receive an exploration credit and what is the pool from which the credit may be issued 479

418-116 Exploration credits issued must be in proportion to exploration investment 482

418-120 The total of all exploration credits issued in relation to exploration investment 483

418-125 Expiry of exploration credits 483

418-130 Notifying the Commissioner of issuing or expiry of exploration credits 483

418-135 Notifying the Commissioner if no exploration investment in income year for which credits allocated 484

Subdivision 418-F—Excess exploration credits 484

418-150 Excess exploration credit tax 485

418-151 Complying exploration credit amount 485

418-155 Due date for payment of excess exploration credit tax 486

418-160 Returns 486

418-165 When shortfall interest charge is payable 486

418-170 General interest charge 486

418-175 Refunds of amounts overpaid 487

418-180 Record keeping 487

418-185 Determining an entity not to be a greenfields minerals explorer 488

Subdivision 418-G—Other matters 488

418-190 Annual impact assessments of this Division 488

Division 419—Critical minerals (tax offset for Australian production expenditure) 490

Guide to Division 419 490

419-1 What this Division is about 490

Subdivision 419-A—Tax offset for expenditure for producing critical minerals in Australia 491

419-5 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for expenditure incurred in producing critical minerals in Australia 491

419-10 Amount of CMPTI tax offset 492

419-15 Meaning of critical mineral 492

419-20 Meaning of CMPTI processing activity 494

Subdivision 419-B—CMPTI expenditure 495

419-25 Meaning of CMPTI expenditure 495

419-30 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST 497

Subdivision 419-C—Registering activities and facilities for the CMPTI tax offset 497

419-35 Meaning of registered CMPTI processing activity 498

419-40 Notice of decision about an application for registration 499

419-45 Annual report about a registered CMPTI processing activity 499

419-50 A registration is in force for up to 10 income years 500

419-55 Transferring a registration 502

419-60 Varying a registration 504

419-65 Automatic suspension of a registration for failing to give an annual report or requested further information 505

419-70 Revoking a registration 506

419-75 Effect of revocations 508

419-80 Industry Secretary may request further information 509

419-85 Advising the Commissioner about a registration 510

419-90 Amendment of assessments 510

Subdivision 419-D—Integrity rules 511

419-95 Expenditure incurred while not at arm’s length 511

419-100 Reducing a company’s CMPTI expenditure to reflect mark-ups within the company’s group 511

419-105 Disregarding registration of an activity that a company is paid to carry on 512

Subdivision 419-E—Review of certain decisions 513

419-110 Reviewable decisions 513

419-115 Notice of reviewable decision and internal review rights, and requesting statement of reasons 513

419-120 Applications for internal review of reviewable decisions 514

419-125 Internal review of reviewable decisions 514

419-130 Matters relevant to internal review decisions 516

419-135 External review by ART of internal review decisions 516

Subdivision 419-F—Other matters 516

419-140 Information sharing 517

419-145 CMPTI community benefit rules 517

419-150 Forms approved by the Industry Secretary 518

419-155 Delegation by the Industry Secretary 518

Part 3-50—Climate change 519

Division 420—Registered emissions units 519

Guide to Division 420 519

420-1 What this Division is about 519

420-5 The 4 key features of tax accounting for registered emissions units 520

Subdivision 420-A—Registered emissions units 520

420-10 Meaning of registered emissions unit 520

420-12 Meaning of hold a registered emissions unit 521

420-13 Meaning of primary producer registered emissions unit 521

Subdivision 420-B—Acquiring registered emissions units 522

420-15 What you can deduct 522

420-20 Non-arm’s length transactions and transactions with associates 523

420-21 Incoming international transfers of emissions units 524

420-22 Becoming taxable in Australia on the proceeds of sale of registered emissions units 527

Subdivision 420-C—Disposing of registered emissions units etc. 528

420-25 Assessable income on disposal of registered emissions units 528

420-30 Non-arm’s length transactions and transactions with associates 528

420-35 Outgoing international transfers of emissions units 529

420-40 Disposal of registered emissions units for a purpose other than gaining assessable income 530

420-41 Ceasing to be taxable in Australia on the proceeds of sale of registered emissions units 532

420-42 Deduction for expenses incurred in ceasing to hold a registered emissions unit 533

Subdivision 420-D—Accounting for registered emissions units you hold at the start or end of the income year 533

420-45 You include the value of your registered emissions units in working out your assessable income and deductions 534

420-50 Value of registered emissions units at start of income year 535

420-51 Valuation methods 535

420-52 FIFO cost method of working out the value of units 535

420-53 Actual cost method of working out the value of units 536

420-54 Market value method of working out the value of units 536

420-55 Valuation method for first income year at the end of which you held registered emissions units 536

420-57 Valuation method for later income years at the end of which you held registered emissions units 537

420-60 Cost of registered emissions units 539

420-62 Primary producer registered emissions units 539

Subdivision 420-E—Exclusivity of Division 540

420-65 Exclusivity of deductions etc. 540

420-70 Exclusivity of assessable income etc. 541

Division 421—Hydrogen production tax incentive 543

Guide to Division 421 543

421-1 What this Division is about 543

Subdivision 421-A—Tax offset for hydrogen produced in Australia 544

421-5 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for hydrogen produced in Australia 544

421-10 Amount of hydrogen production tax offset 546

421-15 When hydrogen is produced 546

421-20 Production emissions intensity 547

421-25 Grid matching requirements 547

421-30 Offset period 548

421-35 Initial reconciliation period for registered PGO certificate 550

421-40 Correction notice for registered PGO certificate 551

421-45 HPTO community benefit rules 553

Subdivision 421-B—Certification of production profiles 554

421-50 Application for certification 554

421-55 Certification of production profile 555

421-60 Capacity of facility to produce hydrogen 558

421-65 Revocation of certification 559

421-70 Requests for further information etc. 561

Subdivision 421-C—Other matters 562

421-75 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal 562

421-80 Information sharing 563

421-85 Period for amending assessments 563

Chapter 3 — Specialist liability rules

Part 3-32 — Co-operatives and mutual entities

Division 315 — Demutualisation of private health insurers

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 315

315-A Capital gains and losses connected with a demutualisation of a private health insurer to be disregarded

315-B Cost base of certain shares and rights in private health insurers

315-C Lost policy holders trust

315-D Special cost base rules for certain shares and rights in holding companies

315-E Special CGT rule for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries

315-F Non-CGT consequences of demutualisation

Guide to Division 315

315-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the taxation consequences of the demutualisation of private health insurers.

Policy holders, demutualising health insurers and certain other entities can disregard capital gains and losses arising under a demutualisation (see Subdivision 315-A).

Shares and rights issued under the demutualisation are given a cost base based on the market value of the demutualising health insurer at the time of issue (see Subdivisions 315-B and 315-D).

Assets held by a lost policy holders trust are given roll-over relief if transferred to the lost policy holder, or if the lost policy holder becomes absolutely entitled to them. Otherwise the trustee of the lost policy holders trust is taxed on any capital gains (see Subdivision 315-C).

A legal personal representative can disregard capital gains and losses made when passing an asset to a beneficiary of a policy holder’s estate (see Subdivision 315-E).

Shares, rights or cash received under a demutualisation are not assessable income and not exempt income (see Subdivision 315-F).

Subdivision 315-A — Capital gains and losses connected with a demutualisation of a private health insurer to be disregarded

Table of sections

Rules for policy holders

315-5 Policy holders to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation of private health insurer

315-10 Effect on the legal personal representative or beneficiary

315-15 Demutualisations to which this Division applies

315-20 What assets are covered

Rules for demutualising health insurer

315-25 Demutualising health insurers to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation

Rules for other entities

315-30 Other entities to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation

Rules for policy holders

315-5 Policy holders to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation of private health insurer

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an individual from a CGT event that happens in relation to a CGT asset if:

the CGT event happens under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and

(b) the individual is, or has been, a policy holder (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015) of, or another person insured through, the demutualising entity (the demutualising health insurer); and

the CGT asset is covered by section 315-20.

315-10 Effect on the legal personal representative or beneficiary

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an entity from a CGT event that happens in relation to a CGT asset if:

the CGT asset forms part of the estate of a deceased individual who is mentioned in paragraph 315-5(b); and

the entity is the deceased individual’s *legal personal representative or a beneficiary in the deceased individual’s estate; and

the CGT asset devolves to the entity or *passes to the entity; and

the CGT event happens under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and

the CGT asset is covered by section 315-20.

315-15 Demutualisations to which this Division applies

This Division applies to a demutualisation of an entity if:

the entity:

is an entity to which item 6.3 of the table in section 50-30 applies; and

(ii) is not registered under Part 3 of the Life Insurance Act 1995; and

is not an entity to whose demutualisation Division 316 applies; and

does not have capital divided into shares; and

Note: Item 6.3 of the table in section 50-30 applies to a private health insurer within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 that is not carried on for the profit or gain of its individual members.

(b) an application by the entity to convert to being registered as a for profit insurer (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015) is approved under subsection 20(5) of that Act; and

(c) consistently with the conversion scheme mentioned in paragraph 20(2)(a) of that Act, the entity becomes registered as a for profit insurer (within the meaning of that Act).

315-20 What assets are covered

These *CGT assets are covered:

an interest in the demutualising health insurer as a policy holder;

a membership interest in the demutualising health insurer;

a right or interest of another kind in the demutualising health insurer;

a right or interest of another kind that arises under the demutualisation.

Rules for demutualising health insurer

315-25 Demutualising health insurers to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an entity from a CGT event if:

the CGT event happened under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and

the entity is the demutualising health insurer.

Rules for other entities

315-30 Other entities to disregard capital gains and losses related to demutualisation

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an entity from a CGT event if:

the entity is established solely for the purpose of participating in a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and

the entity is not a trust covered by Subdivision 315-C (about lost policy holders); and

the CGT event:

happened under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and

happened before or at the same time as the allocation or distribution (in the form of shares or cash) of the accumulated surplus of the demutualising health insurer; and

was connected to that allocation or distribution.

Note: The allocation or distribution of the accumulated surplus could happen through an arrangement involving more than one transaction.

Subdivision 315-B — Cost base of certain shares and rights in private health insurers

Table of sections

315-80 Cost base and acquisition time of demutualisation assets

315-85 Demutualisation asset

315-90 Participating policy holders

315-80 Cost base and acquisition time of demutualisation assets

Cost base adjustment

The first element of the *cost base and reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is its *market value on the day it is issued if:

(a) the asset is covered by section 315-85 (a demutualisation asset); and

(b) the asset is issued to an entity (a participating policy holder) covered by section 315-90.

Note: There is an exception to this rule in Subdivision 315-D where the asset is a share or right in a holding company with other assets.

Acquisition rule

The participating policy holder is taken to have *acquired the demutualisation asset at the time it is issued.

315-85 Demutualisation asset

This section covers an asset if:

the asset is:

a share in the demutualising health insurer; or

a right to *acquire a share in the demutualising health insurer; or

a share in an entity that owns all of the shares in the demutualising health insurer; or

a right to acquire a share in an entity mentioned in subparagraph (iii); and

the share or right is issued under a demutualisation to which this Division applies; and

the share or right is issued in connection with:

the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of a CGT asset covered by section 315-20; or

the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of such a CGT asset.

Exclusion for rights with an exercise price

Despite subsection (1), this section does not cover a right to *acquire a share in an entity if the holder of the right must pay an amount to exercise the right.

Exclusion where assets not issued simultaneously

Despite subsection (1), an asset is not covered by this section unless all of the assets covered by subsection (1) for the demutualisation in question are issued:

at the same time; and

to an entity that is either:

a participating policy holder (see section 315-90); or

the trustee of a trust covered by Subdivision 315-C (about the lost policy holders trust).

315-90 Participating policy holders

This section covers an individual who:

(a) is, or has been, a policy holder (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015) of, or another person insured through, the demutualising health insurer; and

is entitled, under the demutualisation, to an allocation of demutualisation assets.

This section also covers an entity who became entitled to an allocation of demutualisation assets because of the death of an individual mentioned in subsection (1).

Subdivision 315-C — Lost policy holders trust

Table of sections

315-140 Lost policy holders trust

315-145 CGT treatment of demutualisation assets in lost policy holders trust

315-150 Roll-over where assets transferred to lost policy holder

315-155 Trustee assessed if assets dealt with not for benefit of lost policy holder

315-160 Subdivision 126-E does not apply to lost policy holders trust

315-140 Lost policy holders trust

This Subdivision covers a trust (a lost policy holders trust) in relation to a demutualisation to which this Division applies if:

(a) the conversion scheme mentioned in paragraph 20(2)(a) of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015 for the demutualisation provides for the trust; and

under the demutualisation, demutualisation assets (see section 315-85) are issued to the trustee of the trust; and

the trust exists solely for the purpose of holding shares or rights to *acquire shares on behalf of:

(i) individuals (lost policy holders) who are, or have been, policy holders (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015) of, or other persons insured through, the demutualising health insurer; or

if the lost policy holder has died—the *legal personal representative of the lost policy holder or a beneficiary in the estate of the lost policy holder.

Example: An example of an individual on whose behalf the trust might hold assets would be an individual who has not completed a formal step required for them to be issued with demutualisation assets directly. Another example might be an individual living overseas.

315-145 CGT treatment of demutualisation assets in lost policy holders trust

Cost base adjustment

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a demutualisation asset issued to the trustee of a lost policy holders trust is its *market value on the day it is issued.

Note: There is an exception to this rule in Subdivision 315-D where the asset is a share or right in a holding company with other assets.

Acquisition rule

The trustee is taken to have *acquired the demutualisation asset at the time it is issued.

315-150 Roll-over where assets transferred to lost policy holder

This section applies in relation to a CGT event if:

the CGT event happens in relation to an asset held by the trustee of a lost policy holders trust on behalf of a lost policy holder; and

the CGT event happens because the lost policy holder (or, if the lost policy holder has died, the *legal personal representative of the lost policy holder or a beneficiary in the estate of the lost policy holder) either:

is transferred the asset by the trustee; or

becomes absolutely entitled to the asset.

Note: The asset may be a demutualisation asset, or some other asset.

Consequence for trustee

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes from the CGT event.

Consequence for lost policy holder

The *cost base of the asset in the hands of the trustee of the lost policy holders trust just before the CGT event becomes the first element of the cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the lost policy holder, *legal personal representative or beneficiary.

The lost policy holder, *legal personal representative or beneficiary is taken to have *acquired the asset when the trustee of the lost policy holders trust acquired it.

315-155 Trustee assessed if assets dealt with not for benefit of lost policy holder

This section applies in relation to a *capital gain from a CGT event if:

the CGT event happens in relation to an asset held by the trustee of a lost policy holders trust; and

section 315-150 does not apply to the CGT event.

If this section applies:

sections 115-215 and 115-220 do not apply in relation to the *capital gain; and

for the purposes of this Act, the trustee is taken to be *specifically entitled to all of the capital gain.

315-160 Subdivision 126-E does not apply to lost policy holders trust

Subdivision 126-E does not apply in relation to a demutualisation to which this Division applies.

Subdivision 315-D — Special cost base rules for certain shares and rights in holding companies

Table of sections

315-210 Cost base for shares and rights in certain holding companies

315-210 Cost base for shares and rights in certain holding companies

This section applies in relation to a CGT asset that is a demutualisation asset if:

the demutualisation asset is:

a share in an entity mentioned in subparagraph 315-85(1)(a)(iii); or

a right to *acquire a share in an entity mentioned in that subparagraph; and

the entity owns other assets in addition to the shares in the demutualising health insurer; and

the share or right is issued to a participating policy holder or the trustee of a lost policy holders trust.

This section applies despite sections 315-80 and 315-145.

Cost base adjustment

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the CGT asset is worked out under the method statement.

Method statement

Step 1. Start with the *market value of the demutualising health insurer on the day the asset is issued.

Step 2. Divide the result of step 1 by the sum of:

the number of shares in the entity that are issued under the demutualisation; and

the number of shares in the entity that can be *acquired under rights that are demutualisation assets issued under the demutualisation.

Step 3. The result of step 2 is the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset, unless the asset is a right.

Step 4. If the asset is a right, multiply the result of step 2 by the number of shares that can be *acquired under the right. The result is the first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset.

A total of 800 million shares can be acquired in Healthiness under rights issued under the demutualisation. Each right allows the holder to acquire 50 shares. No shares in Healthiness are issued.

Under the method statement, the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of each right is worked out by dividing the market value of Wellbeing Health (step 1) by the number of shares in Healthiness that can be acquired under the demutualisation (step 2) and multiplying the result by the number of shares that can be acquired under the right (step 4):

Example: Wellbeing Health demutualises on 1 April 2008 and has a market value of $400 million on that day. It distributes its accumulated mutual surplus in the form of rights to acquire shares in its holding company Healthiness Insurance Ltd (Healthiness). The rights do not have an exercise price.

Acquisition rule

The participating policy holder or trustee is taken to have *acquired the CGT asset at the time it is issued.

Subdivision 315-E — Special CGT rule for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries

Table of sections

315-260 Special CGT rule for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries

315-260 Special CGT rule for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries

This section sets out what happens if a CGT asset:

is a demutualisation asset; and

forms part of the estate of a participating policy holder mentioned in subsection 315-90(1) who has died, but was not owned by the policy holder just before dying; and

*passes to a beneficiary in the policy holder’s estate because the asset is transferred to the beneficiary by the policy holder’s *legal personal representative.

Note: Division 128 deals with the effect of death in relation to CGT assets a person owns just before dying.

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the *legal personal representative makes if the asset *passes to a beneficiary in the policy holder’s estate.

Consequence for beneficiary

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the *legal personal representative just before the asset *passes to the beneficiary becomes the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the beneficiary.

The beneficiary is taken to have *acquired the asset when the *legal personal representative acquired it.

Subdivision 315-F — Non-CGT consequences of demutualisation

Table of sections

315-310 General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc.

315-310 General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc.

An amount of ordinary income or statutory income of an entity to which subsection (2) applies is not assessable and not exempt income if:

the amount would otherwise be included in the ordinary income or statutory income of the entity only because a demutualisation asset was issued to the entity; or

the amount is a payment made to the entity, under a demutualisation to which this Division applies, in connection with:

the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of a CGT asset covered by section 315-20; or

the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of such a CGT asset.

This subsection applies to an entity that:

(a) is, or has been, a policy holder (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015) of, or another person insured through, the demutualising health insurer; or

is issued with the demutualisation asset, or receives the payment, because of the death of a policy holder mentioned in paragraph (a).

Division 316 — Demutualisation of friendly society health or life insurers

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 316

316-A Application

316-B Capital gains and losses connected with the demutualisation

316-C Cost base of shares and rights issued under the demutualisation

316-D Lost policy holders trust

316-E Special CGT rules for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries

316-F Non-CGT consequences of the demutualisation

Guide to Division 316

316-1 What this Division is about

Special tax consequences follow the demutualisation of a friendly society that provides health insurance or life insurance, or has a wholly-owned subsidiary that does.

Subdivision 316-A — Application

Table of sections

316-5 Application of this Division

316-5 Application of this Division

This Division applies in relation to a demutualisation of a *friendly society if:

(a) the society is, or has a *wholly-owned subsidiary (a health/life insurance subsidiary) that is:

(i) a private health insurer as defined in the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015; or

(ii) a company registered under section 21 of the Life Insurance Act 1995; and

the society does not have capital divided into *shares held by its *members; and

after the demutualisation the society is to be carried on for the object of securing a profit or pecuniary gain for its *members.

Subdivision 316-B — Capital gains and losses connected with the demutualisation

Guide to Subdivision 316-B

316-50 What this Subdivision is about

Disregard capital gains and losses made by any entity from a CGT event happening under the demutualisation, unless the entity:

is or has been a member of the friendly society or insured through the society or any of its wholly-owned subsidiaries; and

receives money for the event.

Table of sections

Gains and losses of members, insured entities and successors

316-55 Disregarding capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money

316-60 Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money

316-65 Valuation factor for sections 316-60, 316-105 and 316-165

316-70 Value of the friendly society

Friendly society’s gains and losses

316-75 Disregarding friendly society’s capital gains and losses

Other entities’ gains and losses

316-80 Disregarding other entities’ capital gains and losses

Gains and losses of members, insured entities and successors

316-55 Disregarding capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money

Disregard an entity’s *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event that happens under the demutualisation to a CGT asset if:

the entity:

is or has been a *member of the *friendly society; or

is or has been insured through the friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; and

(b) the CGT asset is one of these (an interest affected by demutualisation):

an interest in the friendly society as the owner or holder of a policy of insurance with the friendly society or health/life insurance subsidiary;

a *membership interest in the friendly society;

a right or interest of another kind in the friendly society;

a right or interest of another kind that arises under the demutualisation, except an interest in a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155).

Note: Subdivision 316-D deals with the effects of CGT events happening to interests in lost policy holders trusts.

(2) Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of an entity (the successor) from a *CGT event that happens under the demutualisation to a *CGT asset if:

the successor is the *legal personal representative, or beneficiary in the estate, of a deceased individual who was:

a *member of the *friendly society; or

insured through the friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; and

the CGT asset:

forms part of the deceased individual’s estate; and

devolves or *passes to the successor; and

is an interest affected by demutualisation (see paragraph (1)(b)).

316-60 Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money

This section applies if:

a CGT event happens under the demutualisation to an entity’s interest affected by demutualisation (see section 316-55); and

the event involves:

the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of the interest; or

the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of the interest; and

either:

the entity is one described in paragraph 316-55(1)(a); or

the entity is one described in paragraph 316-55(2)(a) and the interest is a CGT asset described in paragraph 316-55(2)(b); and

the capital proceeds from the event include or consist of money received by the entity.

Work out whether the entity makes a *capital gain or *capital loss from the CGT event, and the amount of the gain or loss, assuming that:

the capital proceeds from the CGT event were the amount they would be if they did not include any *market value of property other than money; and

the *cost base and *reduced cost base for the interest were the amount worked out using the formula:

Example: Assume the entity receives $50 in money and 10 shares with a market value of $4 each in respect of CGT event C2 happening, and that the valuation factor worked out under section 316-65 is 0.9. The entity makes a capital gain from the event of $5, worked out as follows:

This ignores the market value of the shares because they are property other than money.

Note: Division 114 (Indexation of cost base) is not relevant, because this section provides exhaustively for working out the amount of the cost base.

The *capital gain or *capital loss is not to be disregarded, despite:

section 316-55; and

any provision of this Act for disregarding the *capital gain or *capital loss because the interest affected by demutualisation was *acquired before 20 September 1985.

Note: The capital gain is not a discount capital gain: see section 115-55.

316-65 Valuation factor for sections 316-60, 316-105 and 316-165

For the purposes of sections 316-60, 316-105 and 316-165, the valuation factor is the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

embedded value of the friendly society’s other business (if any) means the amount that would be the value of the *friendly society worked out under section 316-70 assuming that neither the friendly society, nor any health/life insurance subsidiary of it, carried on any health insurance business within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015.

market value of the friendly society’s health insurance business (if any) means the total *market value of every health insurance business, within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015, carried on by either or both of the *friendly society and its health/life insurance subsidiaries (if any), taking account of any consideration paid to the society or subsidiary for disposal or control of that business.

Disregard paragraph 316-60(2)(a) for the purposes of the formula in subsection (1) of this section.

316-70 Value of the friendly society

(1) The value of the *friendly society is the sum, worked out in accordance with this section, of the friendly society’s existing business value and its adjusted net worth on the day (the applicable accounting day) identified under subsection (3).

Eligible actuary and Australian actuarial practice

The sum is to be worked out, according to Australian actuarial practice, by an actuary who is not an employee of:

the *friendly society; or

a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; or

an entity of which the friendly society is to become a *wholly-owned subsidiary under the demutualisation.

Applicable accounting day

The applicable accounting day is:

(a) if an accounting period of the *friendly society ends on the day (the demutualisation resolution day) identified under subsection (4)—that day; or

in any other case—the last day of the most recent accounting period of the friendly society ending before the demutualisation resolution day.

Demutualisation resolution day

The demutualisation resolution day is:

the day on which the resolution to proceed with the demutualisation is passed; or

if, under the demutualisation, the whole of the *life insurance business of the *friendly society or of a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society is transferred to another company under a scheme confirmed by the Federal Court of Australia—the day (or the last day) on which the transfer takes place.

Adjustment for changes after applicable accounting day

In a case covered by paragraph (3)(b), if any significant change in the amount of the existing business value or adjusted net worth occurs between the applicable accounting day and the demutualisation resolution day, the amount is to be adjusted to take account of the change.

Continued business assumption

In working out the existing business value or the adjusted net worth, assume:

that after the applicable accounting day the *friendly society, and any health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society, will continue to conduct business and any other activity in the same way as before that day, and will not conduct any different business or other activity; and

that the demutualisation will not occur; and

that any health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society will continue to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the friendly society.

Expenditure assumption

In working out the existing business value, assume that expenditure that the *friendly society and any of its health/life insurance subsidiaries will incur, in conducting business, on recurring items after the demutualisation resolution day will be of the same kinds and amounts (increased to take account of any inflation) as it incurred in the accounting period, or part of an accounting period, ending on the demutualisation resolution day.

Friendly society’s gains and losses

316-75 Disregarding friendly society’s capital gains and losses

Disregard the *friendly society’s *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event that happens under the demutualisation.

Other entities’ gains and losses

316-80 Disregarding other entities’ capital gains and losses

Disregard an entity’s *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event that happens under the demutualisation if:

the entity is established solely for the purpose of participating in the demutualisation and is not a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155); and

the CGT event:

happens before or at the same time as the allocation or distribution of the accumulated surplus of the *friendly society; and

is connected to that allocation or distribution.

Note: The allocation or distribution of the accumulated surplus could happen through an arrangement involving more than one transaction.

Subdivision 316-C — Cost base of shares and rights issued under the demutualisation

Guide to Subdivision 316-C

316-100 What this Subdivision is about

The value of the friendly society and its business affects cost bases of shares and certain rights issued under the demutualisation to:

entities that are or were members of the friendly society; or

entities insured through the society or its subsidiaries; or

successors of such entities; or

the trustee of the lost policy holders trust.

Table of sections

316-105 Cost base and time of acquisition of shares and certain rights issued under demutualisation

316-110 Demutualisation assets

316-115 Entities to which section 316-105 applies

316-105 Cost base and time of acquisition of shares and certain rights issued under demutualisation

First element of cost base

The first element of the *cost base and reduced cost base of a *CGT asset is the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (2) if:

(a) the asset is a CGT asset (a demutualisation asset) covered by section 316-110; and

the asset is issued to an entity covered by section 316-115.

The formula is:

Time of acquisition

The entity is taken to have *acquired the CGT asset at the time it is issued.

316-110 Demutualisation assets

This section covers a CGT asset that:

is:

a *share in the *friendly society; or

a right to *acquire a share in the friendly society; or

a share in an entity that owns all of the shares in the friendly society; or

a right to acquire a share in an entity mentioned in subparagraph (iii); and

is issued under the demutualisation; and

is issued in connection with:

the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of an interest affected by demutualisation (see paragraph 316-55(1)(b)); or

the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of an interest affected by demutualisation.

Exclusion for rights with an exercise price

Despite subsection (1), this section does not cover a right to *acquire a *share in an entity if the holder of the right must pay an amount to exercise the right.

Exclusion where assets not issued simultaneously

Despite subsection (1), a CGT asset is not covered by this section unless all of the CGT assets covered by subsection (1) for the demutualisation are issued:

at the same time; and

to entities that are covered by section 316-115.

316-115 Entities to which section 316-105 applies

This section covers an entity that:

either:

is or has been a *member of the *friendly society; or

is or has been insured through the friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; and

is entitled under the demutualisation to an allocation of demutualisation assets.

This section also covers an entity that has become entitled to an allocation of demutualisation assets because of the death of an individual who was an entity described in subsection (1).

This section also covers the trustee of a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155).

Subdivision 316-D — Lost policy holders trust

Guide to Subdivision 316-D

316-150 What this Subdivision is about

If the demutualisation creates a trust just to hold shares, rights to acquire shares or money for entities that were members of the friendly society or insured through the society or its subsidiary, or are successors of such entities, then:

capital gains or losses from CGT events happening to beneficiaries’ interests in the trust are disregarded, except where the capital proceeds include money; and

when a CGT event happens involving the transfer of the shares or rights to a beneficiary, or a beneficiary’s absolute entitlement to them, the trustee’s capital gain or loss is disregarded and the beneficiary has the same cost base and time of acquisition as the trustee; and

the trustee is assessed on any capital gains from other CGT events happening to the shares or rights.

Table of sections

Application

316-155 Lost policy holders trust

Effects of CGT events happening to interests and assets in trust

316-160 Disregarding beneficiaries’ capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money

316-165 Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money by beneficiaries

316-170 Roll-over where shares or rights to acquire shares transferred to beneficiary of lost policy holders trust

316-175 Trustee assessed if shares or rights dealt with not for benefit of beneficiary of lost policy holders trust

316-180 Subdivision 126-E does not apply

Application

316-155 Lost policy holders trust

This Subdivision applies if the conditions in subsections (2) and (5) are met.

First condition

(2) The first condition is that, under the demutualisation, a trust (the lost policy holders trust) exists solely for one or both of the purposes that are described in subsection (3) in relation to persons (beneficiaries of the lost policy holders trust) covered by subsection (4).

The purposes are as follows:

holding demutualisation assets (see section 316-110) that are *shares or rights to *acquire shares, or proceeds from disposal of those assets, on behalf of one or more beneficiaries of the lost policy holders trust and transferring those assets or proceeds to those beneficiaries;

holding on behalf of one or more beneficiaries of the lost policy holders trust, and paying to them, money payable to them for:

the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of the beneficiaries’ interests affected by demutualisation (see paragraph 316-55(1)(b)); or

the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of those interests.

This subsection covers:

a person who is or has been a *member of the friendly society or is or has been insured through the *friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; and

a *legal personal representative, or beneficiary in the estate, of such a person who has died.

Second condition

The second condition is that, under the demutualisation, the trustee of the lost policy holders trust is:

issued with demutualisation assets that are *shares, or rights to *acquire shares; or

paid money described in paragraph (3)(b) to hold and pay to beneficiaries of the lost policy holders trust.

Effects of CGT events happening to interests and assets in trust

316-160 Disregarding beneficiaries’ capital gains and losses, except some involving receipt of money

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss of a beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust from a CGT event that happens to the beneficiary’s interest in the trust.

316-165 Taking account of some capital gains and losses involving receipt of money by beneficiaries

This section applies if:

a CGT event happens to an interest of a beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust in that trust; and

the capital proceeds from the event include or consist of money received by the beneficiary.

Work out whether the beneficiary makes a *capital gain or *capital loss from the CGT event, and the amount of the gain or loss, assuming that:

the capital proceeds from the CGT event were the amount they would be if they did not include any *market value of property other than money; and

the *cost base and *reduced cost base for the interest were the amount worked out using the formula:

Example: Assume that the beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust is paid $50 in money by the trustee to satisfy the beneficiary’s interest in the trust so that a CGT event happens, and that the valuation factor worked out under section 316-65 is 0.9. The beneficiary makes a capital gain from the event of $5, worked out as follows:

Note: Division 114 (Indexation of cost base) is not relevant, because this section provides exhaustively for working out the amount of the cost base.

The *capital gain or *capital loss is not to be disregarded, despite sections 316-55 and 316-160.

Note: The capital gain is not a discount capital gain: see section 115-55.

316-170 Roll-over where shares or rights to acquire shares transferred to beneficiary of lost policy holders trust

This section applies in relation to a CGT event if:

the CGT event happens in relation to an asset that:

is a *share or a right to *acquire one or more shares; and

is held by the trustee of the lost policy holders trust on behalf of a beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust; and

the CGT event happens because the beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust either:

is transferred the asset by the trustee; or

becomes absolutely entitled to the asset.

Consequence for trustee

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the trustee makes from the CGT event.

Consequences for beneficiary

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the trustee of the lost policy holders trust just before the CGT event becomes the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust.

Note: Section 316-105 affects the cost base of the asset in the hands of the trustee of the lost policy holders trust if the asset is covered by section 316-110.

The beneficiary of the lost policy holders trust is taken to have *acquired the asset when the trustee acquired it.

316-175 Trustee assessed if shares or rights dealt with not for benefit of beneficiary of lost policy holders trust

This section applies in relation to a *capital gain from a CGT event if:

the CGT event happens in relation to a demutualisation asset that:

is a *share or a right to *acquire a share; and

is held by the trustee of a lost policy holders trust; and

section 316-170 does not apply to the CGT event.

If this section applies:

sections 115-215 and 115-220 do not apply in relation to the *capital gain; and

for the purposes of this Act, the trustee is taken to be *specifically entitled to all of the capital gain.

316-180 Subdivision 126-E does not apply

Subdivision 126-E does not apply in relation to the demutualisation.

Note: Subdivision 126-E is about an entitlement to shares after demutualisation and scrip for scrip roll-over.

Subdivision 316-E — Special CGT rules for legal personal representatives and beneficiaries

Table of sections

316-200 Demutualisation assets not owned by deceased but passing to beneficiary in deceased estate

316-205 Interest in lost policy holders trust not owned by deceased but passing to beneficiary in deceased estate

316-200 Demutualisation assets not owned by deceased but passing to beneficiary in deceased estate

This section sets out what happens if a CGT asset:

is a demutualisation asset (see section 316-110); and

forms part of the estate of an individual who is an entity described in subsection 316-115(1) and has died; and

was not owned by the individual just before dying; and

*passes to a beneficiary in the individual’s estate because the asset is transferred to the beneficiary by the individual’s *legal personal representative.

Note: Division 128 deals with the effect of death in relation to CGT assets a person owns just before dying.

Consequence for legal personal representative

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the *legal personal representative makes because the asset *passes to the beneficiary.

Consequence for beneficiary

The *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the *legal personal representative just before the asset *passes to the beneficiary becomes the first element of the cost base and reduced cost base of the asset in the hands of the beneficiary.

The beneficiary is taken to have *acquired the asset when the *legal personal representative acquired it.

316-205 Interest in lost policy holders trust not owned by deceased but passing to beneficiary in deceased estate

This section sets out what happens if a CGT asset:

is an interest in a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155); and

forms part of the estate of an individual who is an entity described in subsection 316-115(1) and has died; and

was not owned by the individual just before dying; and

*passes to a beneficiary in the individual’s estate because the asset is transferred to the beneficiary by the individual’s *legal personal representative.

Note: Division 128 deals with the effect of death in relation to CGT assets a person owns just before dying.

Consequence for legal personal representative

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss the *legal personal representative makes because the asset *passes to the beneficiary.

Subdivision 316-F — Non-CGT consequences of the demutualisation

Guide to Subdivision 316-F

316-250 What this Subdivision is about

In many cases, income from demutualisation is assessed through the CGT provisions rather than as ordinary income or other statutory income.

Franking debits arise for the friendly society and its subsidiaries to ensure they do not enjoy a franking surplus. Franking debits and credits arise to negate credits and debits from things attributable to the time before demutualisation.

Table of sections

316-255 General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc.

316-260 Franking debits to stop the friendly society and its subsidiaries having franking surpluses

316-265 Franking debits to negate franking credits from some distributions to friendly society and subsidiaries

316-270 Franking debits to negate franking credits from post-demutualisation payments of pre-demutualisation tax

316-275 Franking credits to negate franking debits from refunds of tax paid before demutualisation

316-255 General taxation consequences of issue of demutualisation assets etc.

An amount of ordinary income or statutory income (other than a net capital gain) of an entity covered by subsection (2) is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the amount would otherwise be included in the ordinary income or statutory income of the entity only because a demutualisation asset (see section 316-110) was issued to the entity; or

the amount is a payment made to the entity, under the demutualisation, in connection with:

the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of an interest affected by demutualisation (see paragraph 316-55(1)(b)); or

the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of an interest affected by demutualisation; or

the amount would otherwise be included in the ordinary income or statutory income of the entity only because a *share or a right to *acquire one or more shares was transferred to the entity by the trustee of a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155); or

the amount is a payment made to the entity from a lost policy holders trust in connection with:

the variation or abrogation of rights attaching to or consisting of an interest affected by demutualisation; or

the conversion, cancellation, extinguishment or redemption of an interest affected by demutualisation.

This subsection covers an entity that:

is or has been a *member of the *friendly society; or

is or has been insured through the friendly society or a health/life insurance subsidiary of the friendly society; or

is issued with the demutualisation asset, or receives the payment, because of the death of a person covered by paragraph (a) or (b); or

is a beneficiary of a lost policy holders trust (see section 316-155).

316-260 Franking debits to stop the friendly society and its subsidiaries having franking surpluses

A franking debit arises in the franking account of the *friendly society or a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the society if the account is in *surplus immediately before the demutualisation resolution day identified under subsection 316-70(4).

The amount of the franking debit equals the *surplus.

The franking debit arises at the start of that day.

316-265 Franking debits to negate franking credits from some distributions to friendly society and subsidiaries

This section applies if a franking credit arises in the franking account of the *friendly society or a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the society because a *distribution declared before the demutualisation resolution day identified under subsection 316-70(4) is made to the society or subsidiary on or after that day.

A franking debit arises in that account.

The amount of the franking debit equals the amount of the franking credit.

The franking debit arises at the same time as the franking credit arises.

316-270 Franking debits to negate franking credits from post-demutualisation payments of pre-demutualisation tax

This section applies if a franking credit arises in the franking account of the *friendly society or a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the society because, on or after the demutualisation resolution day identified under subsection 316-70(4), the society or subsidiary pays a PAYG instalment, or pays income tax, that is wholly or partly attributable to a period before that day.

A franking debit arises in that account.

The amount of the franking debit is so much of the franking credit as is attributable to the period before that day.

The franking debit arises at the same time as the franking credit arises.

316-275 Franking credits to negate franking debits from refunds of tax paid before demutualisation

This section applies if a franking debit arises in the franking account of the *friendly society or a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the society because, on or after the demutualisation resolution day identified under subsection 316-70(4), the society or subsidiary receives a refund of income tax that is wholly or partly attributable to a period before that day.

A franking credit arises in that account.

The amount of the franking credit is so much of the franking debit as is attributable to the period before that day.

The franking credit arises at the same time as the franking debit arises.

Part 3-35 — Insurance business

Division 320 — Life insurance companies

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 320

320-A Preliminary

320-B What is included in a life insurance company’s assessable income

320-C Deductions and capital losses

320-D Income tax, taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies

320-E No-TFN contributions of life insurance companies that are RSA providers

320-F Complying superannuation asset pool

320-H Segregation of assets to discharge exempt life insurance policy liabilities

320-I Transfers of business

Guide to Division 320

320-1 What this Division is about

This Division provides for the taxation of life insurance companies in a broadly comparable way to other entities that derive similar kinds of income.

Because of the nature of the business of life insurance companies, the Division contains special rules for working out their taxable income.

Those rules:

• include certain amounts in assessable income;

• identify certain amounts of exempt income and non-assessable non-exempt income;

• identify specific deductions.

Life insurance companies can have one or both of these taxable incomes for any income year for the purposes of working out their income tax for that year:

• a taxable income of the complying superannuation class, which consists of taxable income that relates to complying superannuation business, and is taxed at the rate of tax that applies to complying superannuation funds;

• a taxable income of the ordinary class, which consists of taxable income that relates to other businesses and is taxed at the corporate tax rate.

Life insurance companies can also have tax losses that correspond to those 2 classes. The Division provides that tax losses of a particular class can be deducted only from incomes in respect of that class.

The Division ensures that the income tax worked out on the basis of these taxable incomes and tax losses is a single amount of income tax on one taxable income.

The Division also contains rules for segregating the assets of life insurance companies into:

• assets that relate to complying superannuation business;

• assets that relate to immediate annuity and other exempt business.

This Division also ensures that life insurance companies that are RSA providers are liable to pay tax on no-TFN contributions income.

Operative provisions

Subdivision 320-A — Preliminary

320-5 Object of Division

The object of this Division is to provide for the taxation of *life insurance companies in a broadly comparable way to other entities that *derive similar kinds of income.

To achieve this object, the Division:

identifies certain amounts that are included in the assessable income, or are exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income, of a life insurance company; and

identifies certain amounts that a life insurance company can deduct; and

enables a life insurance company to have taxable incomes and *tax losses of the following classes for the purposes of working out its income tax for an income year:

the *complying superannuation class;

the *ordinary class; and

contains other provisions necessary to enable the income tax on the taxable income of a life insurance company to be worked out.

Note: Section 320-5 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides that the tax consequences of certain transfers of assets of a life insurance company that is a friendly society to a complying superannuation fund are to be disregarded.

Subdivision 320-B — What is included in a life insurance company’s assessable income

Guide to Subdivision 320-B

320-10 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides for certain amounts to be included in a life insurance company’s assessable income and for certain other amounts to be exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

320-15 Assessable income—various amounts

320-30 Assessable income—special provision for certain income years

320-35 Exempt income

320-37 Non-assessable non-exempt income

320-45 Tax treatment of gains or losses from CGT events in relation to complying superannuation assets

Operative provisions

320-15 Assessable income—various amounts

A life insurance company’s assessable income includes:

the total amount of the *life insurance premiums paid to the company in the income year; and

(b) amounts received or recovered under *contracts of reinsurance (except amounts that relate to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies) to the extent to which they relate to the *risk components of claims paid under *life insurance policies; and

(c) any amount received or recovered that is a refund, or in the nature of a refund, of the life insurance premium paid under a contract of reinsurance (except any amount that relates to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies); and

(ca) any reinsurance commission received or recovered by the company in respect of a contract of reinsurance (except any commission that relates to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies); and

any amount received under a profit-sharing arrangement contained in, or entered into in relation to, a contract of reinsurance; and

the *transfer values of assets transferred by the company from a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(3); and

the transfer values of assets transferred by the company to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(3) or 320-185(1); and

if an asset (other than money) is transferred from or to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or (3), to a complying superannuation asset pool under section 320-185 or from a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-195(2) or (3)—the amount (if any) that is included in the company’s assessable income of the income year in which the asset was transferred because of section 320-200; and

the transfer values of assets transferred by the company from the company’s *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(1) or 320-250(2); and

if an asset (other than money) is transferred to the company’s segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(3) or section 320-240—the amount (if any) that is included in the company’s assessable income because of section 320-255; and

subject to subsection (2), if the *value, at the end of the income year, of the company’s liabilities under the *net risk components of life insurance policies is less than the value, at the end of the previous income year, of those liabilities—an amount equal to the difference; and

Note: Where the value at the end of the income year exceeds the value at the end of the previous income year, the excess can be deducted: see section 320-85.

amounts specified in agreements under section 295-260; and

*specified roll-over amounts paid to the company; and

amounts imposed by the company in respect of risk riders for *ordinary investment policies in an income year in which the company did not receive any life insurance premiums for those policies; and

fees and charges (not otherwise included in, or taken into account in working out, the company’s assessable income) imposed by the company in respect of life insurance policies; and

if the company is an RSA provider—contributions made to *RSAs provided by the company that would be included in the company’s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C if that Subdivision applied to the company.

Paragraph (1)(h) does not cover any liabilities under:

a *life insurance policy that provides for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits; or

an exempt life insurance policy; or

a funeral policy.

An amount included in assessable income under paragraph (1)(i) is included for the income year of the life insurance company that includes the last day of the transferor’s income year to which the agreement referred to in section 295-260 relates.

320-30 Assessable income—special provision for certain income years

(1) This section applies to a *life insurance company for each of the following income years (each a relevant income year):

the income year in which 1 July 2000 occurs;

the 4 following income years.

Note: The effect of this section is modified when the life insurance business of a life insurance company is transferred to another life insurance company: see section 320-340.

If:

the *value of the company’s liabilities at the end of 30 June 2000 under its *continuous disability policies (being the value used by the company for the purposes of its income tax return);

exceeds

the value of the company’s liabilities at the end of 30 June 2000 under the *net risk components of its continuous disability policies as calculated under subsection 320-85(4);

the company’s assessable income for each relevant income year includes an amount equal to one-fifth of the excess.

However, if a life insurance company ceases in a relevant income year to carry on *life insurance business or to have any liabilities under the *net risk components of *continuous disability policies, subsection (2) does not apply for that income year or any future income years but the company’s assessable income for that income year includes so much of the excess referred to in subsection (2) as has not been included in the company’s assessable income for any previous relevant income years.

320-35 Exempt income

These amounts *derived by a life insurance company are exempt from income tax:

amounts of ordinary income and statutory income accrued before 1 July 1988 that were derived from assets that have become *complying superannuation assets;

if the company is an RSA provider—any amounts that are disregarded because of paragraph 320-137(3)(d) or (e) in working out the company’s taxable income of the *complying superannuation class.

320-37 Non-assessable non-exempt income

These amounts *derived by a life insurance company are not assessable income and are not exempt income:

amounts of ordinary income and statutory income derived from *segregated exempt assets, being income that relates to the period during which the assets were segregated exempt assets;

amounts of ordinary income and statutory income derived from the *disposal of units in a pooled superannuation trust;

if an *Australian/overseas fund or an overseas fund established by the company derived foreign establishment amounts—the foreign resident proportion of the foreign establishment amounts;

if the company is a *friendly society:

amounts derived before 1 July 2001 that are exempt from income tax under section 50-1; and

amounts derived on or after 1 July 2001 but before 1 January 2003, that are attributable to *income bonds, *funeral policies or *sickness policies; and

amounts derived on or after 1 July 2001 but before 1 January 2003, that are attributable to *scholarship plans and would have been exempt from income tax under section 50-1 if they had been received before 1 July 2001; and

amounts derived on or after 1 January 2003 that are attributable to income bonds, funeral policies or *sickness policies, that were issued before 1 January 2003; and

amounts derived on or after 1 January 2003 that are attributable to scholarship plans issued before 1 January 2003 and that would have been exempt from income tax if they had been received before 1 July 2001.

Note: The effect of this section is modified when the life insurance business of a life insurance company is transferred to another life insurance company: see section 320-325.

(1A) For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), foreign establishment amounts for the *life insurance company means the total amount of assessable income that was *derived in the income year:

in the course of the carrying on by the company of a business in a foreign country at or through a permanent establishment of the company in that country; and

from sources in that or any other foreign country; and

from assets that:

are attributable to the permanent establishment; and

(ii) are held to meet the liabilities under the *life insurance policies issued by the company at or through the permanent establishment.

(2) For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), the foreign resident proportion of the *foreign establishment amounts is the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

all foreign establishment policy liabilities means the average value for the income year (as calculated by an *actuary) of the policy liabilities (as defined in the *Valuation Standard) for all *life insurance policies that:

were included in the class of *life insurance business to which the company’s *Australian/overseas fund or overseas fund relates; and

(b) were issued by the company at or through the *permanent establishment to which the foreign establishment amounts relate.

foreign resident foreign establishment policy liabilities means the average value for the income year (as calculated by an *actuary) of the policy liabilities (as defined in the *Valuation Standard) for all *life insurance policies that:

are foreign resident life insurance policies; and

(b) were issued by the company at or through the *permanent establishment to which the foreign establishment amounts relate.

320-45 Tax treatment of gains or losses from CGT events in relation to complying superannuation assets

If a CGT event happens in respect of a CGT asset that is a complying superannuation asset of a life insurance company, section 295-85 and 295-90 applies for the purpose of working out the amount of any *capital gain or *capital loss that arises from the event.

Note: See Subdivision 295-B of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 for rules about cost base for assets owned by superannuation entities at the end of 30 June 1988.

Subsection (1) has effect despite anything in Division 230.

Subdivision 320-C — Deductions and capital losses

Guide to Subdivision 320-C

320-50 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision specifies particular deductions that are available to a life insurance company, specifies particular amounts that a life insurance company cannot deduct and contains provisions relating to a life insurance company’s capital losses.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

320-55 Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from complying superannuation assets

320-60 Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from segregated exempt assets

320-65 Deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of life insurance policies that provide for participating or discretionary benefits

320-70 No deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of certain life insurance policies payable only on death or disability

320-75 Deduction for ordinary investment policies

320-80 Deduction for certain claims paid under life insurance policies

320-85 Deduction for increase in value of liabilities under net risk components of life insurance policies

320-87 Deduction for assets transferred from or to complying superannuation asset pool

320-100 Deduction for life insurance premiums paid under certain contracts of reinsurance

320-105 Deduction for assets transferred to segregated exempt assets

320-110 Deduction for interest credited to income bonds

320-111 Deduction for funeral policy payout

320-112 Deduction for scholarship plan payout

320-115 No deduction for amounts credited to RSAs

320-120 Capital losses from assets other than complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets

320-125 Capital losses from complying superannuation assets

Operative provisions

320-55 Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from complying superannuation assets

This section applies to a life insurance company in respect of *life insurance policies where the company’s liabilities under the policies are to be discharged out of *complying superannuation assets.

The company can deduct:

the amounts of the *life insurance premiums received in respect of the policies that are transferred to its *complying superannuation assets in the income year;

less:

so much of those amounts as relate to the company’s liability to pay amounts on the death or disability of a person.

(3) For the purposes of subsection (2) only, the amount of a *life insurance premium that relates to the company’s liability to pay amounts on the death or disability of a person is:

if the policy provides for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits—nil; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply and the policy states that the whole or a specified part of the premium is payable in respect of such a liability—the whole or that part of the premium, as appropriate; or

if neither paragraph (a) nor (b) applies:

if the policy is an endowment policy—10% of the premium; or

if the policy is a whole of life policy—30% of the premium; or

otherwise—so much of the premium as an actuary determines to be attributable to such a liability.

320-60 Deduction for life insurance premiums where liabilities under life insurance policies are to be discharged from segregated exempt assets

A life insurance company can deduct the amounts of *life insurance premiums transferred in the income year to its *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-240(3).

320-65 Deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of life insurance policies that provide for participating or discretionary benefits

A life insurance company can deduct the amounts of *net premiums received in respect of *life insurance policies (other than *complying superannuation life insurance policies or *exempt life insurance policies) that provide for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits.

320-70 No deduction for life insurance premiums in respect of certain life insurance policies payable only on death or disability

A life insurance company cannot deduct any part of the amounts of *life insurance premiums received in respect of *life insurance policies under which amounts are to be paid only on the death or disability of a person.

This section does not apply to:

*life insurance policies that provide for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits; or

funeral policies.

320-75 Deduction for ordinary investment policies

This section applies to a life insurance company in respect of *ordinary investment policies issued by the company.

The company can deduct, in respect of *life insurance premiums received in the income year for those policies:

the sum of the *net premiums;

less:

so much of the net premiums as an actuary determines to be attributable to fees and charges charged in that income year.

In making a determination under subsection (2), an actuary is to have regard to:

the changes over the income year in the sum of the *net current termination values of the policies; and

the movements in those values during the income year.

In addition, if an actuary determines that:

(a) there has been a reduction in the income year (the current year) of exit fees that were imposed in respect of those policies in a previous income year; and

the reduction (or a part of it) has not been taken into account in a determination under subsection (2) for the current year;

the company can deduct so much of that reduction as has not been so taken into account.

320-80 Deduction for certain claims paid under life insurance policies

A life insurance company can deduct the amounts paid in respect of the *risk components of claims paid under *life insurance policies during the income year.

(2) The risk component of a claim paid under a *life insurance policy is:

if:

the policy does not provide for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits; and

the policy is neither an exempt life insurance policy nor a funeral policy; and

an amount is payable under the policy only on the death or disability of the insured person;

the amount paid under the policy as a result of the occurrence of that event; or

if the policy provides for participating benefits or discretionary benefits or is an exempt life insurance policy or a funeral policy—nil; or

(c) otherwise—the amount paid under the policy as a result of the death or disability of the insured person less the *current termination value of the policy (calculated by an *actuary) immediately before the death, or the occurrence of the disability, of the person.

Except as provided by subsection (1), a life insurance company cannot deduct amounts paid in respect of claims under *life insurance policies.

320-85 Deduction for increase in value of liabilities under net risk components of life insurance policies

A life insurance company can deduct the amount (if any) by which the *value, at the end of the income year, of its liabilities under the *net risk components of *life insurance policies exceeds the value, at the end of the previous income year, of those liabilities.

Note 1: Where the value at the end of the income year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year, the difference is included in assessable income: see paragraph 320-15(1)(h).

Note 2: Section 320-85 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 makes special provision in respect of the calculation of the value of a life insurance company’s liabilities under the net risk components of life insurance policies at the end of the income year immediately preceding the income year in which 1 July 2000 occurs.

Subsection (1) does not cover any liabilities under:

a *life insurance policy that provides for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits; or

an exempt life insurance policy; or

a funeral policy.

(3) If a *life insurance policy is a *disability policy (other than a *continuous disability policy), the value at a particular time of the liabilities of the *life insurance company under the *net risk component of the policy is the *current termination value of the component at that time (calculated by an *actuary).

(4) In the case of *life insurance policies other than policies to which subsection (3) applies, the value at a particular time of the liabilities of the *life insurance company under the *net risk components of the policies is the amount calculated by an *actuary to be:

the sum of the policy liabilities (as defined in the Valuation Standard) in respect of the net risk components of the policies at that time;

less

the sum of any cumulative losses (as defined in the Valuation Standard) for the net risk components of the policies at that time.

320-87 Deduction for assets transferred from or to complying superannuation asset pool

A life insurance company can deduct the *transfer values of assets that are transferred by the company in the income year from a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(3).

A life insurance company can deduct the *transfer values of assets that are transferred by the company in the income year to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(3) or 320-185(1).

If an asset (other than money) is transferred by a life insurance company:

from a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(2) or (3); or

to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(3) or section 320-185;

the company can deduct the amount (if any) that it can deduct because of section 320-200.

320-100 Deduction for life insurance premiums paid under certain contracts of reinsurance

A life insurance company can deduct amounts that:

were paid by the company in the income year as *life insurance premiums under *contracts of reinsurance; and

(b) do not relate to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies.

320-105 Deduction for assets transferred to segregated exempt assets

A life insurance company can deduct the *transfer values of assets transferred in the income year to the company’s *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(3) or 320-240(1).

If an asset (other than money) is transferred to a life insurance company’s *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(3) or section 320-240, the company can deduct the amount (if any) that it can deduct because of section 320-255.

320-110 Deduction for interest credited to income bonds

A life insurance company that is a *friendly society can deduct interest credited in the income year to the holders of *income bonds issued after 31 December 2002 where the interest accrued on or after 1 January 2003.

This section has effect despite subsection 320-80(3).

320-111 Deduction for funeral policy payout

A life insurance company that is a *friendly society can deduct the amount of a benefit provided in the income year by the company under a funeral policy issued after 31 December 2002, reduced by so much of the sum of the amounts deducted or deductible by the company under section 320-75 for any income year as is reasonably related to the benefit.

This section has effect despite subsection 320-80(3).

320-112 Deduction for scholarship plan payout

A life insurance company that is a *friendly society can deduct the amount of a benefit it provides in the income year and on or after 1 January 2003:

under a scholarship plan covered by subsection (2) or (3); and

to, or on behalf of, a person nominated in the plan as a beneficiary whose education is to be helped by the benefit;

reduced by so much of the sum of the amounts deducted or deductible by the company under section 320-75 for any income year as is reasonably related to the benefit.

This subsection covers a scholarship plan issued by the life insurance company after 31 December 2002.

This subsection covers a scholarship plan if:

the plan was issued by the life insurance company before 1 January 2003; and

no amount received by the company on or after 1 January 2003 and attributable to the plan is non-assessable non-exempt income of the company under paragraph 320-37(1)(d).

This section has effect despite subsection 320-80(3).

320-115 No deduction for amounts credited to RSAs

A life insurance company that is an RSA provider cannot deduct amounts credited to *RSAs.

320-120 Capital losses from assets other than complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets

(1) This section applies to assets (ordinary assets) of a *life insurance company other than:

*complying superannuation assets; or

*segregated exempt assets.

In working out a life insurance company’s net capital gain or net capital loss for the income year, *capital losses from ordinary assets can be used only to reduce *capital gains from ordinary assets.

If some or all of a *capital loss from an ordinary asset cannot be applied in an income year, the unapplied amount can be applied in the next income year in which the company’s *capital gains from ordinary assets exceed the company’s capital losses (if any) from ordinary assets.

If the company has 2 or more unapplied *net capital losses from ordinary assets, the company must apply them in the order in which they were made.

Note: This section affects the amount of assessable income that is to be taken into account in working out a taxable income or tax loss of the ordinary class: see sections 320-139 and 320-143.

320-125 Capital losses from complying superannuation assets

In working out a life insurance company’s net capital gain or net capital loss for the income year, *capital losses from *complying superannuation assets can be used only to reduce *capital gains from complying superannuation assets.

If some or all of a *capital loss from a complying superannuation asset cannot be applied in an income year, the unapplied amount can be applied in the next income year in which the company’s *capital gains from *complying superannuation assets exceed the company’s capital losses (if any) from complying superannuation assets.

If the company has 2 or more unapplied *net capital losses from *complying superannuation assets, the company must apply them in the order in which they were made.

Note: This section affects the amount of assessable income that is to be taken into account in working out a taxable income or tax loss of the complying superannuation class: see sections 320-137 and 320-141.

Subdivision 320-D — Income tax, taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies

Guide to Subdivision 320-D

320-130 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision explains how a life insurance company’s income tax is worked out.

For that purpose, this Subdivision enables a life insurance company to have taxable incomes and tax losses of the following classes:

• the complying superannuation class;

• the ordinary class.

320-131 Overview of Subdivision

Working out the income tax

In any income year, a life insurance company can have:

a taxable income of the complying superannuation class and/or a taxable income of the ordinary class; or

a tax loss of the complying superannuation class and/or a tax loss of the ordinary class; or

a taxable income of one class and a tax loss of the other class.

Note: The taxable incomes mentioned in paragraph (a) are taxed at different rates: see section 23A of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

Taxable incomes and tax losses of both classes are taken into account in working out the amount of income tax that the company has to pay for the income year (see section 320-134). That amount is then taken to be the income tax on the company’s taxable income for that income year.

Working out taxable income and tax loss of each class

In general, the rules in this Act about working out a company’s taxable income or tax loss, or deducting a company’s tax loss, apply to a life insurance company in relation to:

working out a taxable income or tax loss of a particular class; or

deducting a tax loss of a particular class.

However, that general rule is subject to the following:

sections 320-137 to 320-143, which allocate amounts of incomes and deductions for the purposes of working out a taxable income or tax loss of a particular class;

subsections 320-141(2) and 320-143(2), which provide that tax losses of a particular class can be deducted only from incomes in respect of that class;

section 320-149, which sets out the provisions in this Act that have effect only in relation to a taxable income or tax loss of the ordinary class.

Table of sections

General rules

320-133 Object of Subdivision

320-134 Income tax of a life insurance company

320-135 Taxable income and tax loss of each of the 2 classes

Taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies

320-137 Taxable income—complying superannuation class

320-139 Taxable income—ordinary class

320-141 Tax loss—complying superannuation class

320-143 Tax loss—ordinary class

320-149 Provisions that apply only in relation to the ordinary class

General rules

320-133 Object of Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that:

for the purposes of working out the amount of a life insurance company’s income tax for an income year:

the company’s taxable income or *tax loss of one *class is worked out separately from its taxable income or tax loss of the other class; and

the company’s tax losses of a particular class can be deducted only from its incomes in respect of that class; and

for the purposes of this Act, that amount of income tax is treated as the company’s income tax on its taxable income for that income year.

(2) In subsection (1), a class means the *complying superannuation class or the *ordinary class.

320-134 Income tax of a life insurance company

Working out the income tax

Work out a life insurance company’s income tax for an income year under section 4-10 as follows:

apply steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in subsection 4-10(3) to work out separately the amount that would be the company’s basic income tax liability for its taxable income of each *class for that year;

treat the sum of these amounts as the company’s basic income tax liability for that year and apply step 4 of the method statement to subtract its *tax offsets from that sum.

For the purposes of this Act:

the income tax worked out in accordance with subsection (1) is taken to be the company’s income tax on its taxable income for the income year; and

except as provided by subsection (1) of this section and sections 320-135 to 320-149, the company’s taxable income for that year is taken to be equal to the sum of the company’s taxable incomes of the 2 *classes for that year.

Note: This means that there is only one assessment in respect of the company’s taxable income for the income year and that the income tax constitutes only one debt to the Commonwealth.

Working out the income tax on certain assumptions

Subsection (1) also has effect in relation to working out an amount that would be the company’s income tax if certain assumptions were made. It has that effect in the same way as it has effect in relation to working out the company’s income tax under section 4-10 (except in regard to those assumptions).

Note: This means, for example, subsection (1) also has effect in relation to working out the amount of a life insurance company’s income tax on the basis of the tax offset priority rules in Division 63.

320-135 Taxable income and tax loss of each of the 2 classes

Subject to the other provisions in this Subdivision:

this Act has effect for a life insurance company in relation to working out a taxable income of a particular *class in the same way as it has effect in relation to working out a taxable income of any other company; and

this Act has effect for a life insurance company in relation to working out or deducting a *tax loss of a particular class in the same way as it has effect in relation to working out or deducting a tax loss of any other company.

Sections 320-137 to 320-143 have effect in addition to other provisions in this Act that relate to working out a taxable income or *tax loss, or deducting a tax loss (as appropriate).

Nothing in this Subdivision prevents a life insurance company from:

having taxable incomes, or *tax losses, of both *classes for the same income year; or

having a taxable income of one class and a tax loss of the other class for the same income year.

Note: In certain circumstances, a life insurance company can have a taxable income and a tax loss of the same class in an income year (see Subdivision 165-B as it has effect under this Subdivision).

Taxable income and tax loss of life insurance companies

320-137 Taxable income—complying superannuation class

(1) A *life insurance company’s taxable income of the complying superannuation class is a taxable income worked out under this Act on the basis of only:

assessable income of the company that is covered by subsection (2); and

deductions of the company that are covered by subsection (4); and

*tax losses of the company that are of the *complying superannuation class.

Note: For the usual way of working out a taxable income: see subsection 4-15(1). For other ways of working out a taxable income: see subsection 4-15(2).

Relevant assessable income

This subsection covers the following assessable income of a life insurance company:

assessable income *derived by the company from the investment of its *complying superannuation assets in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets;

so much of the amount that is included in the company’s assessable income because of paragraph 320-15(1)(a) as is equal to the total *transfer value of assets transferred in the income year by the company to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-185(3);

if an asset (other than money) is transferred by the company from a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(2) or (3)—amounts that are included in the company’s assessable income because of section 320-200;

amounts that are included in the company’s assessable income because of paragraph 320-15(1)(db), (i) or (j);

amounts that are included in the company’s assessable income under subsection 115-280(4);

subject to subsection (3), so much of the company’s assessable income for the income year as is:

the total amount credited during that year to the *RSAs provided by the company; less

the total amount debited during that year from the RSAs.

Amounts disregarded for RSAs

In working out the amount mentioned in paragraph (2)(f), disregard the following amounts:

contributions credited to the *RSAs that would not be included in the company’s assessable income under Subdivision 295-C if that Subdivision applied to the company;

amounts debited from the RSAs that are benefits paid to, or in respect of, the holders of the RSAs;

income tax debited from the RSAs;

if an *annuity covered by subsection (3A) was paid from an RSA in respect of the whole of the income year, or the whole of the part of the income year in which the RSA existed, the total amount credited to the RSA during the income year;

if an annuity covered by subsection (3A) was paid from an RSA in respect of a part, but not the whole, of the portion of the income year in which the RSA existed, so much of the total amount credited to the RSA during the income year as is equal to the amount worked out using the following formula:

An *annuity is covered by this subsection if it is a superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase.

Relevant deductions

This subsection covers the following deductions of a life insurance company:

amounts that the company can deduct under section 320-55;

amounts that the company can deduct (other than any *tax losses) in respect of the investment of the company’s *complying superannuation assets in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets;

amounts that the company can deduct under section 320-87 because of subsection (1) or paragraph (3)(a) of that section;

amounts that the company can deduct under subsection 115-280(1).

320-139 Taxable income—ordinary class

A *life insurance company’s taxable income of the ordinary class is a taxable income worked out under this Act on the basis of only:

assessable income of the company that is not covered by subsection 320-137(2); and

amounts (other than *tax losses) that the company can deduct and are not covered by subsection 320-137(4); and

tax losses of the company that are of the *ordinary class.

Note: For the usual way of working out a taxable income: see subsection 4-15(1). For other ways of working out a taxable income: see subsection 4-15(2).

320-141 Tax loss—complying superannuation class

Working out a tax loss of the complying superannuation class

(1) A *life insurance company’s *tax loss of the complying superannuation class is a tax loss worked out under this Act on the basis of only:

assessable income of the company that is covered by subsection 320-137(2); and

deductions of the company that are covered by subsection 320-137(4); and

net exempt income of the company that is attributable to exempt income *derived:

from the company’s *complying superannuation assets; and

in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets.

Note: For the usual way of working out a tax loss: see section 36-10. For other ways of working out a tax loss: see section 36-25.

Deducting a tax loss of the complying superannuation class

(2) A *life insurance company’s *tax loss of the complying superannuation class can be deducted under this Act only from:

net exempt income of the company that is attributable to exempt income *derived:

from the company’s *complying superannuation assets; and

in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets; and

assessable income of the company that is covered by subsection 320-137(2), reduced by deductions of the company that are covered by subsection 320-137(4).

Note: For the usual way of deducting a tax loss: see section 36-17. For other ways of deducting a tax loss: see section 36-25.

320-143 Tax loss—ordinary class

Working out a tax loss of the ordinary class

(1) A *life insurance company’s *tax loss of the ordinary class is a tax loss worked out under this Act on the basis of only:

assessable income of the company that is not covered by subsection 320-137(2); and

amounts (other than tax losses) that the company can deduct and are not covered by subsection 320-137(4); and

net exempt income of the company that is not attributable to exempt income *derived:

from the company’s *complying superannuation assets; and

in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets.

Note: For the usual way of working out a tax loss: see section 36-10. For other ways of working out a tax loss: see section 36-25.

Deducting a tax loss of the ordinary class

(2) A *life insurance company’s *tax loss of the ordinary class can be deducted under this Act only from:

net exempt income of the company that is not attributable to exempt income *derived:

from the company’s *complying superannuation assets; and

in relation to the period during which those assets were complying superannuation assets; and

assessable income of the company that is not covered by subsection 320-137(2), reduced by amounts (other than tax losses) that the company can deduct and are not covered by subsection 320-137(4).

Note: For the usual way of deducting a tax loss: see section 36-17. For other ways of deducting a tax loss: see section 36-25.

320-149 Provisions that apply only in relation to the ordinary class

The provisions covered by subsection (2):

have effect as provided by section 320-135 in relation to a life insurance company’s taxable income, or *tax loss, of the *ordinary class; but

have no effect in relation to the company’s taxable income, or tax loss, of the *complying superannuation class.

This subsection covers these provisions:

section 36-55;

Division 160 (Corporate loss carry back tax offset for 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 for businesses with turnover under $5 billion);

Division 165 (except Subdivision 165-CD).

Example 1: A life insurance company that has an amount of excess franking offsets will need to recalculate its tax loss of the ordinary class under section 36-55. But its tax loss of the complying superannuation class is unaffected by that section.

Example 2: A life insurance company that fails to meet the relevant tests of Division 165 will need to recalculate the ordinary class of its taxable income and tax loss under Subdivision 165-B. But the complying superannuation class of its taxable income and tax loss are unaffected by that Subdivision.

Subdivision 320-E — No-TFN contributions of life insurance companies that are RSA providers

Guide to Subdivision 320-E

320-150 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision makes Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to life insurance companies that are RSA providers.

The consequence is that those life insurance companies are liable to pay tax on no-TFN contributions income under Subdivision 295-I. They may also be entitled to a tax offset under Subdivision 295-J.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

320-155 Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to companies that are RSA providers

Operative provisions

320-155 Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to companies that are RSA providers

Despite subsection 295-5(4), Subdivisions 295-I and 295-J apply to a life insurance company that is an RSA provider.

For the purposes of the application of those Subdivisions to a life insurance company, a contribution included in the assessable income of the company under paragraph 320-15(1)(l) is taken to have been included under Subdivision 295-C.

Subdivision 320-F — Complying superannuation asset pool

Guide to Subdivision 320-F

320-165 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision explains how a life insurance company can segregate assets (to be known as a complying superannuation asset pool) to be used for the sole purpose of discharging its complying superannuation liabilities.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

320-170 Establishment of complying superannuation asset pool

320-175 Valuations of complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities for each valuation time

320-180 Consequences of a valuation under section 320-175

320-185 Transfer of assets to complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175

320-190 Complying superannuation liabilities

320-195 Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from a complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175

320-200 Consequences of transfer of assets to or from complying superannuation asset pool

Operative provisions

320-170 Establishment of complying superannuation asset pool

A life insurance company may, on or after 1 July 2000, segregate in accordance with subsections (2) and (3) any of its assets for the sole purpose of discharging its *complying superannuation liabilities out of those assets.

(1A) Except as provided by section 320-170 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997, an asset is taken not to be included in the *complying superannuation assets unless the whole of the asset is included among those assets.

The assets segregated must, at the time of the segregation, be a representative sample of all the company’s assets that support its *complying superannuation liabilities immediately before the segregation.

The assets segregated must have, as at the time of the segregation, a total *transfer value that does not exceed the sum of:

the company’s *complying superannuation liabilities as at that time; and

any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of the assets segregated.

A life insurance company that segregates assets as mentioned in subsections (1) to (3) at a time after 1 July 2000 but before 1 October 2000 is taken to have segregated those assets in accordance with those subsections on 1 July 2000.

If a segregation of assets is made in accordance with the above subsections, the company must use the segregated assets, and any other assets afterwards included among the segregated assets, only for the purpose of discharging its *complying superannuation liabilities.

(6) The assets from time to time segregated are together to be known as the complying superannuation asset pool and each asset from time to time included among those assets is to be known as a complying superannuation asset.

In this Subdivision:

a reference to the transfer of an asset to, or from, the complying superannuation asset pool:

is a reference to the inclusion of the asset among the segregated assets, or the exclusion of an asset from the segregated assets, as the case may be; and

includes a reference to the transfer of money to, or from, the complying superannuation asset pool, as the case may be; and

if an asset transferred to or from the complying superannuation asset pool is money, a reference to the *transfer value of the asset transferred is a reference to the amount of the money.

320-175 Valuations of complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities for each valuation time

A life insurance company that has established a complying superannuation asset pool must cause the following amounts to be calculated within the period of 60 days starting immediately after each *valuation time:

the total *transfer value of the company’s *complying superannuation assets as at the valuation time;

the company’s *complying superannuation liabilities as at the valuation time.

Note: The time when a life insurance company joins or leaves a consolidated group is also a valuation time: see section 713-525.

(2) These are the valuation times:

the end of the income year in which the complying superannuation asset pool was established;

the end of each later income year.

Note 1: The time when a life insurance company joins or leaves a consolidated group is also a valuation time: see sections 713-525 and 713-585.

Note 2: A life insurance company that fails to comply with this section is liable to an administrative penalty: see section 288-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

320-180 Consequences of a valuation under section 320-175

Transfer from the complying superannuation asset pool

If the total *transfer value of the company’s *complying superannuation assets as at a *valuation time exceeds the sum of:

the company’s *complying superannuation liabilities as at that time; and

any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of those assets;

the company must transfer, from the complying superannuation asset pool, assets of any kind having a total transfer value equal to the excess.

A transfer under subsection (1) must be made within the period of 30 days starting immediately after:

the day on which the total *transfer value and the *complying superannuation liabilities (as at the *valuation time) were calculated; or

if those amounts were calculated on different days—the later of those days.

The transfer, once made, is taken to have been made at the valuation time (whether or not the transfer is made within those 30 days).

Transfer to the complying superannuation asset pool

Note: A life insurance company that fails to comply with subsections (1) and (2) is liable to an administrative penalty: see section 288-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

If the total *transfer value of the company’s *complying superannuation assets as at a *valuation time is less than the sum of:

the company’s *complying superannuation liabilities as at that time; and

any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of those assets;

the company can transfer, to the complying superannuation asset pool, assets of any kind having a total transfer value not exceeding the difference.

A transfer under subsection (3) is taken to have been made at the *valuation time if it is made within the period of 30 days starting immediately after:

the day on which the total *transfer value and the *complying superannuation liabilities (as at the valuation time) were calculated; or

if those amounts were calculated on different days—the later of those days.

320-185 Transfer of assets to complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175

If a life insurance company determines, at a time other than a *valuation time, that the total *transfer value of the company’s *complying superannuation assets as at that time is less than the sum of:

the company’s *complying superannuation liabilities as at that time; and

any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of those assets;

the company can transfer, to the complying superannuation asset pool, assets of any kind having a total transfer value not exceeding the difference.

A life insurance company can at any time transfer an asset of any kind to a complying superannuation asset pool in exchange for an amount of money equal to the *transfer value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

A life insurance company can transfer to a complying superannuation asset pool in an income year assets of any kind having a total *transfer value not exceeding the total amount of the *life insurance premiums paid to the company in that income year for the purchase of *complying superannuation life insurance policies.

Except as provided by this section and subsections 320-180(3) and 320-250(1A), a life insurance company cannot transfer an asset to a complying superannuation asset pool.

320-190 Complying superannuation liabilities

The amount of the *complying superannuation liabilities of a life insurance company is to be worked out in accordance with subsection (2) in respect only of *life insurance policies issued by the company:

that are *complying superannuation life insurance policies; and

the liabilities under which are to be discharged out of the company’s *complying superannuation assets.

(2) The amount of the complying superannuation liabilities of a *life insurance company at a particular time is the sum of the following amounts at that time, as calculated by an *actuary:

for policies providing for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits:

the values of supporting assets, as defined in the Valuation Standard; and

the *policy owners’ retained profits;

for other policies—the *current termination values.

320-195 Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from a complying superannuation asset pool otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-175

If:

a *life insurance policy issued by a life insurance company becomes an exempt life insurance policy; and

immediately before the policy became an exempt life insurance policy, the policy was a policy referred to in subsection 320-190(1);

the company can transfer from a complying superannuation asset pool, to its *segregated exempt assets, assets of any kind whose total *transfer value does not exceed the company’s liabilities in respect of the policy.

A life insurance company can at any time transfer an asset from a complying superannuation asset pool in exchange for an amount of money equal to the *transfer value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

If a life insurance company:

imposes any fees or charges in respect of *complying superannuation assets; or

imposes any fees or charges in respect of *complying superannuation life insurance policies other than policies:

that provide *superannuation death benefits, *disability superannuation benefits or temporary disability benefits of a kind referred to in paragraph 295-460(c), that are *participating benefits; and

the liabilities under which are to be discharged out of the company’s complying superannuation asset pool; or

determines, at a time other than a *valuation time, that the total *transfer value of the company’s complying superannuation assets as at that time exceeds the sum of:

the company’s *complying superannuation liabilities at that time; and

any reasonable provision made by the company at that time in its accounts for liability for income tax in respect of those assets;

the company must, when the fees or charges are imposed or the excess is determined, as the case may be, transfer, from the complying superannuation asset pool, assets having a total transfer value equal to the fees, charges or excess, as the case may be.

If:

any liabilities arise for the discharge of which a life insurance company’s complying superannuation asset pool is established; or

any expenses are incurred by a life insurance company directly in respect of *complying superannuation assets in relation to a period during which the assets are complying superannuation assets; or

any liabilities to pay *PAYG instalments, or income tax, that are attributable to the company’s *complying superannuation assets;

the life insurance company must pay, from the complying superannuation asset pool, any amounts required to discharge the liabilities, or amounts equal to the expenses (as appropriate).

320-200 Consequences of transfer of assets to or from complying superannuation asset pool

This section applies if:

an asset (other than money) is transferred from a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(1) or 320-195(2) or (3); or

an asset (other than money) is transferred to a complying superannuation asset pool under subsection 320-180(3) or section 320-185.

In determining:

for the purposes of this Act (other than Parts 3-1 and 3-3) whether an amount is included in, or can be deducted from, the assessable income of a life insurance company in respect of the transfer of the asset; or

for the purposes of Parts 3-1 and 3-3:

whether the company made a *capital gain in respect of the transfer of the asset; or

whether the company made a *capital loss in respect of the transfer of the asset;

the company is taken:

to have sold, immediately before the transfer, the asset transferred for a consideration equal to its *market value; and

to have purchased the asset again at the time of the transfer for a consideration equal to its market value.

Without limiting subsection (2), where the asset transferred is a depreciating asset, Division 40 has effect for the company as if:

in relation to the sale of the asset that is taken to have occurred under paragraph (2)(c):

the sale were a balancing adjustment event; and

the termination value of the asset for that event were equal to the consideration for the sale under that paragraph; and

the company had stopped *holding the asset at the time of the sale; and

in relation to the purchase of the asset that is taken to have occurred under paragraph (2)(d):

the company had only begun to hold the asset after the purchase; and

the first element of the asset’s *cost were equal to the consideration for the purchase under that paragraph; and

the company had acquired the asset from an associate of the company.

Note: This means that, amongst other things, as a result of the transfer:

the asset’s cost for the purposes of working out a deduction under Division 40 is reset; and

the company’s assessable income might be adjusted under section 40-285.

If, apart from this subsection and section 320-55, a life insurance company could deduct an amount or make a *capital loss as a result of a transfer of an asset to or from its complying superannuation asset pool, the deduction or capital loss is disregarded until:

the asset ceases to exist; or

the asset, or a greater than 50% interest in it, is *acquired by an entity other than an entity that is an associate of the company immediately after the transfer.

Subsection (3) does not apply in relation to an amount that the company can deduct under a provision in Division 40.

Subdivision 320-H — Segregation of assets to discharge exempt life insurance policy liabilities

Guide to Subdivision 320-H

320-220 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision explains how a life insurance company can segregate assets to be used for the sole purpose of discharging its liabilities under life insurance policies where the income derived by the company from those policies is exempt from income tax.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

320-225 Segregation of assets for purpose of discharging exempt life insurance policy liabilities

320-230 Valuations of segregated exempt assets and exempt life insurance policy liabilities for each valuation time

320-235 Consequences of a valuation under section 320-230

320-240 Transfer of assets to segregated exempt assets otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-230

320-245 Exempt life insurance policy liabilities

320-246 Exempt life insurance policy

320-247 Policy split into an exempt life insurance policy and another life insurance policy

320-250 Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from segregated exempt assets otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-230

320-255 Consequences of transfer of assets to or from segregated exempt assets

Operative provisions

320-225 Segregation of assets for purpose of discharging exempt life insurance policy liabilities

A life insurance company may, on or after 1 July 2000, segregate in accordance with subsections (2) and (3) any of its assets for the sole purpose of discharging its exempt life insurance policy liabilities out of those assets.

Note: Section 320-225 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides that a life insurance company may transfer a part of an asset to its segregated exempt assets before 1 October 2000.

(1A) Except as provided by section 320-225 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997, an asset is taken not to be included in the segregated assets under this Subdivision unless the whole of the asset is included among the segregated assets.

The assets segregated must, at the time of the segregation, be a representative sample of all the company’s assets that support its exempt life insurance policy liabilities immediately before the segregation.

The assets segregated must have, as at the time of the segregation, a total *transfer value that does not exceed the amount of the company’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time.

A life insurance company that segregates assets as mentioned in subsections (1) to (3) at a time after 1 July 2000 but before 1 October 2000 is taken to have segregated those assets in accordance with those subsections on 1 July 2000.

If a segregation of assets is made in accordance with the above subsections, the company must use the *segregated exempt assets, and any other assets afterwards included among the segregated assets, only for the purpose of discharging its exempt life insurance policy liabilities.

In this Subdivision:

a reference to the transfer of an asset to, or from, a life insurance company’s *segregated exempt assets:

is a reference to the inclusion of an asset among the segregated exempt assets, or the exclusion of an asset from the segregated exempt assets, as the case may be; and

includes a reference to the transfer of money to, or from, those assets, as the case may be; and

if an asset transferred to or from those assets is money, a reference to the *transfer value of the asset transferred is a reference to the amount of the money.

320-230 Valuations of segregated exempt assets and exempt life insurance policy liabilities for each valuation time

A life insurance company that has segregated any of its assets in accordance with section 320-225 must cause the following amounts to be calculated within the period of 60 days starting immediately after each *valuation time:

the total *transfer value of the company’s *segregated exempt assets as at the valuation time;

the amount of the company’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at the valuation time.

Note: The time when a life insurance company joins or leaves a consolidated group is also a valuation time: see section 713-525.

(2) These are the valuation times:

the end of the income year in which the segregation occurred;

the end of each later income year.

Note 1: The time when a life insurance company joins or leaves a consolidated group is also a valuation time: see sections 713-525 and 713-585.

Note 2: A life insurance company that fails to comply with this section is liable to an administrative penalty: see section 288-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

320-235 Consequences of a valuation under section 320-230

Transfer from the segregated exempt assets

If:

the total *transfer value of the company’s *segregated exempt assets as at a *valuation time;

exceeds

the amount of the company’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time;

the company must transfer, from the segregated exempt assets, assets of any kind having a total transfer value equal to the excess.

A transfer under subsection (1) must be made within the period of 30 days starting immediately after:

the day on which the total *transfer value and the exempt life insurance policy liabilities (as at the *valuation time) were calculated; or

if those amounts were calculated on different days—the later of those days.

The transfer, once made, is taken to have been made at the valuation time (whether or not the transfer is made within those 30 days).

Transfer to the segregated exempt assets

Note: A life insurance company that fails to comply with subsections (1) and (2) is liable to an administrative penalty: see section 288-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

If:

the total *transfer value of the company’s *segregated exempt assets as at a *valuation time;

is less than

the amount of the company’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time;

the company can transfer, to the segregated exempt assets, assets of any kind having a total transfer value not exceeding the difference.

A transfer under subsection (3) is taken to have been made at the *valuation time if it is made within the period of 30 days starting immediately after:

the day on which the total *transfer value and the exempt life insurance policy liabilities (as at the valuation time) were calculated; or

if those amounts were calculated on different days—the later of those days.

320-240 Transfer of assets to segregated exempt assets otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-230

If a life insurance company determines, at a time other than a *valuation time, that:

the total *transfer value of the company’s *segregated exempt assets as at that time;

is less than

the company’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time;

the company can transfer, to the segregated exempt assets, assets of any kind having a total transfer value not exceeding the difference.

A life insurance company can at any time transfer an asset of any kind to its *segregated exempt assets in exchange for an amount of money equal to the *transfer value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

A life insurance company can transfer, to its *segregated exempt assets in an income year, assets of any kind having a total *transfer value not exceeding the total amount of the *life insurance premiums paid to the company in that income year for the purchase of *exempt life insurance policies.

Except as provided by this section and subsections 320-195(1) and 320-235(3), a life insurance company cannot transfer an asset to its *segregated exempt assets.

320-245 Exempt life insurance policy liabilities

The amount of the exempt life insurance policy liabilities of a life insurance company is to be worked out in accordance with subsection (2) in respect only of *life insurance policies issued by the company:

that are *exempt life insurance policies; and

the liabilities under which are to be discharged out of the company’s *segregated exempt assets.

(2) The amount of the exempt life insurance policy liabilities of a *life insurance company at a particular time is the sum of the following amounts at that time, as calculated by an *actuary:

for policies providing for allocated benefits (other than *participating benefits or discretionary benefits)—the *current termination values;

for policies providing for participating benefits or discretionary benefits:

the values of supporting assets, as defined in the Valuation Standard; and

the *policy owner’s retained profits;

for other policies—the policy liabilities, as defined in the Valuation Standard.

(3) An *exempt life insurance policy provides for allocated benefits if:

the policy:

is held by the trustee of a complying superannuation fund; and

provides for an allocated pension; or

the policy:

is held by a life insurance company other than the life insurance company that issued the policy; and

is a *segregated exempt asset of the life insurance company that issued the policy; and

provides for an allocated pension; or

the policy provides for an allocated annuity.

320-246 Exempt life insurance policy

(1) An exempt life insurance policy is a *life insurance policy (other than an *RSA):

that is held by the trustee of a complying superannuation fund and provides solely for the discharge of the fund’s liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of superannuation income stream benefits that are currently *RP superannuation income stream benefits of the fund; or

that is held by the trustee of a pooled superannuation trust, where:

the policy provides solely for the discharge of the liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of superannuation income stream benefits that are currently *RP superannuation income stream benefits of complying superannuation funds; and

the funds are unit holders of the trust; or

that is held by another life insurance company and is a *segregated exempt asset of that other company; or

that is held by the trustee of a constitutionally protected fund; or

that provides for an immediate annuity that:

was purchased on or before 9 December 1987; or

is a superannuation income stream that is in the *retirement phase; or

satisfies whichever of the conditions in subsection (3) are applicable; or

that provides for an *annuity that:

(i) is not an *immediate annuity; and

is a superannuation income stream that is in the retirement phase; or

that provides for either or both of the following:

a personal injury annuity, payments of which are exempt from income tax under Division 54;

a personal injury lump sum, payment of which is exempt from income tax under Division 54.

Note: A part of a life insurance policy may be taken to be an exempt life insurance policy under section 320-247.

The following table sets out the conditions mentioned in subparagraph (1)(e)(iii):

320-247 Policy split into an exempt life insurance policy and another life insurance policy

When is a part of a policy taken to be an exempt life insurance policy?

(1) A part of a *life insurance policy (the original policy) is taken to be an *exempt life insurance policy for the purposes of this Act if:

the part provides solely for the discharge of the liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of superannuation income stream benefits that are currently *RP superannuation income stream benefits of a complying superannuation fund; and

the trustee of the fund holds the original policy.

(2) A part of a *life insurance policy (the original policy) is taken to be an *exempt life insurance policy for the purposes of this Act if:

the part provides solely for the discharge of liabilities that are attributable to the liabilities (contingent or not) in respect of superannuation income stream benefits that are currently *RP superannuation income stream benefits of *complying superannuation funds; and

the trustee of a pooled superannuation trust holds the original policy; and

the funds are unit holders of the trust.

What happens to the rest of the policy?

(3) If a part of a policy (the original policy) is taken to be an *exempt life insurance policy under subsection (1) or (2), the rest of the original policy is taken to be another *life insurance policy for the purposes of this Act.

320-250 Transfer of assets and payment of amounts from segregated exempt assets otherwise than as a result of a valuation under section 320-230

If:

a *life insurance policy issued by a life insurance company becomes a policy referred to in subsection 320-190(1); and

immediately before the policy became a policy referred to in subsection 320-190(1), the policy was an exempt life insurance policy;

the company can transfer from its *segregated exempt assets, to a complying superannuation asset pool, assets of any kind whose total *transfer value does not exceed the company’s liabilities in respect of the policy.

A life insurance company can at any time transfer an asset from its*segregated exempt assets in exchange for an amount of money equal to the *transfer value of the asset at the time of the transfer.

If a life insurance company:

imposes any fees or charges in respect of *segregated exempt assets; or

imposes any fees or charges in respect of *exempt life insurance policies where the liabilities under the policies are to be discharged out of the company’s segregated exempt assets; or

determines, at a time other than a *valuation time, that the total *transfer value of the company’s segregated exempt assets as at that time exceeds the amount of the company’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities as at that time;

the company must, when the fees or charges are imposed or the excess is determined, as the case may be, transfer from the segregated exempt assets, assets having a total transfer value equal to the fees, charges or excess, as the case may be.

If:

any liabilities arise for the discharge of which a life insurance company has *segregated exempt assets; or

any expenses are incurred by a life insurance company directly in respect of segregated exempt assets in relation to a period during which the assets are segregated exempt assets;

the life insurance company must pay from the segregated exempt assets any amounts required to discharge the liabilities or amounts equal to the expenses, as the case may be.

320-255 Consequences of transfer of assets to or from segregated exempt assets

This section applies if:

an asset (other than money) is transferred from the company’s *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(1) or 320-250(1A), (1) or (2); or

an asset (other than money) is transferred to the company’s *segregated exempt assets under subsection 320-235(3) or section 320-240.

In determining:

for the purposes of this Act (other than Division 40 and Parts 3-1 and 3-3) whether an amount is included in, or can be deducted from, the assessable income of a life insurance company in respect of the transfer of the asset; or

for the purposes of Parts 3-1 and 3-3:

whether the company made a *capital gain in respect of the transfer; or

whether the company made a *capital loss in respect of the transfer;

the company is taken:

to have sold, immediately before the transfer, the asset transferred for a consideration equal to its *market value; and

to have purchased the asset again at the time of the transfer for a consideration equal to its market value.

If, apart from this subsection, section 320-60 and subsection 320-105(1), a life insurance company could deduct an amount or apply a *capital loss as a result of the transfer of an asset to its *segregated exempt assets, the deduction or capital loss is disregarded until:

the asset ceases to exist; or

the asset, or a greater than 50% interest in it, is *acquired by an entity other than an entity that is an associate of the company, immediately after the acquisition.

Subsection (3) does not apply in relation to an amount that the company can deduct under a provision in Division 40.

A life insurance company cannot deduct an amount or apply a *capital loss as a result of the transfer of an asset from its *segregated exempt assets.

If a depreciating asset is transferred to the segregated exempt assets of a *life insurance company, then, in determining for the purposes of Division 40 whether an amount is included in, or can be deducted from, the company’s assessable income as a result of the transfer, the company is taken:

to have, at the time immediately before the transfer, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its *market value at that time; and

to have, at the time of the transfer, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its market value at that time.

If a depreciating asset that has been included in the segregated exempt assets of a *life insurance company since the asset was acquired by the company or the initial segregation of those assets took place is transferred from those assets, then the company must assume for the purposes of Division 40 that:

if the asset’s *market value at the time of the transfer is greater than its *adjustable value at that time, the company:

had, at the time immediately before the transfer, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its adjustable value at that time; and

had, at the time of the transfer, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its adjustable value at that time; or

if the asset’s market value at the time of the transfer is equal to or less than its adjustable value at that time, the company:

had, at the time immediately before the transfer, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its market value at that time; and

had, at the time of the transfer, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its market value at that time.

If a depreciating asset that was previously transferred to the segregated exempt assets of a *life insurance company is transferred from those assets, then, the company must assume, for the purposes of Division 40 that:

if the asset’s *market value at the time of its transfer from those assets is greater than its market value at the time when it was transferred to those assets, the company:

had, at the time immediately before the transfer from those assets, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its market value at the time when it was transferred to those assets; and

had, at the time of the transfer from those assets, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its market value at the time when it was transferred to those assets; or

if the asset’s market value at the time of its transfer from those assets is equal to or less than its market value at the time when it was transferred to those assets, the company:

had, at the time immediately before the transfer from those assets, sold the asset for a consideration equal to its market value at that time; and

had, at the time of the transfer from those assets, purchased the asset again for a consideration equal to its market value at that time.

Division 40 has effect in relation to an asset covered by subsection (6), (7) or (8) as if:

in relation to the sale of the asset that is taken to have occurred under that subsection:

the sale were a balancing adjustment event; and

the termination value of the asset for that event were equal to the consideration for the sale under that subsection; and

the company had stopped *holding the asset at the time of the sale; and

in relation to the purchase of the asset that is taken to have occurred under that subsection:

the company had only begun to hold the asset after the purchase; and

the first element of the asset’s *cost were equal to the consideration for the purchase under that subsection; and

the company had acquired the asset from an associate of the company.

Note: This means that, amongst other things, as a result of the transfer:

the asset’s cost for the purposes of working out a deduction under Division 40 is reset; and

the company’s assessable income might be adjusted under section 40-285 if the transfer is a transfer to the company’s segregated exempt assets.

Subdivision 320-I — Transfers of business

Guide to Subdivision 320-I

320-300 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision contains special rules that apply when all or part of the life insurance business of a life insurance company is transferred to another life insurance company under the Life Insurance Act 1995 or the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

320-305 When this Subdivision applies

320-310 Special deductions and amounts of assessable income

320-315 Complying superannuation asset pool and segregated exempt assets

320-320 Certain amounts treated as life insurance premiums

320-325 Friendly societies

320-330 Immediate annuities

320-335 Parts of assets treated as separate assets

320-340 Continuous disability policies

320-345 Exemption of management fees

Operative provisions

320-305 When this Subdivision applies

The rules in this Subdivision have effect if all or part of the *life insurance business of a *life insurance company (the originating company) is transferred to another life insurance company (the recipient company):

(a) in accordance with a scheme confirmed by the Federal Court of Australia under Part 9 of the Life Insurance Act 1995; or

(b) under the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999.

320-310 Special deductions and amounts of assessable income

Deduction for originating company

If the originating company pays an amount to the recipient company in respect of liabilities under the *net risk components of *life insurance policies transferred to the recipient company, the originating company can deduct that amount for the income year in which the transfer took place.

Amount included in originating company’s assessable income

If the originating company receives an amount from the recipient company in respect of liabilities under the *net risk components of *life insurance policies transferred to the recipient company, that amount is included in the assessable income of the originating company for the income year in which the transfer took place.

Deduction for recipient company

If the recipient company pays an amount to the originating company in respect of liabilities under the *net risk components of *life insurance policies transferred to the recipient company, the recipient company can deduct that amount for the income year in which the transfer took place.

320-315 Complying superannuation asset pool and segregated exempt assets

Assets that were *complying superannuation assets of the originating company just before the transfer took place and that are transferred to the recipient company become complying superannuation assets of the recipient company.

Assets that were *segregated exempt assets of the originating company just before the transfer took place and that are transferred to the recipient company become segregated exempt assets of the recipient company.

320-320 Certain amounts treated as life insurance premiums

This Division applies to the recipient company as if the amount or value of any consideration received by the recipient company in respect of liabilities under *life insurance policies transferred to the company were *life insurance premiums paid to the company at the time the transfer took place.

However, subsection (1) does not apply to consideration:

that relates to liabilities that, just before the transfer took place, were discharged out of the originating company’s *complying superannuation assets or *segregated exempt assets; or

(b) that relates to the part of a *life insurance policy that has been reinsured under a *contract of reinsurance (except consideration that relates to a risk, or part of a risk, in relation to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies).

320-325 Friendly societies

This section has effect if the originating company and the recipient company were *friendly societies just before the transfer took place.

(2) For the purposes of paragraph 320-37(1)(d), an *income bond, *funeral policy, *sickness policy or *scholarship plan issued by the recipient company in substitution for an income bond, funeral policy, sickness policy or scholarship plan (the original policy) transferred from the originating company is taken to have been issued at the time the original policy was issued if the terms of the substituted policy are not materially different from those of the original policy.

320-330 Immediate annuities

For the purposes of section 320-246, a *life insurance policy that provides for an *immediate annuity issued by the recipient company in substitution for a policy (also the original policy) transferred from the originating company is taken to have been issued at the time the original policy was issued if the terms of the substituted policy are not materially different from those of the original policy.

320-335 Parts of assets treated as separate assets

If:

an asset is transferred to the recipient company from the originating company; and

(b) parts of that asset were, under section 320-170 or 320-225 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997, treated as separate assets of the originating company just before the transfer took place;

those parts of that asset are also treated as separate assets of the recipient company.

320-340 Continuous disability policies

This section has effect if:

the originating company and the recipient company were members of the same wholly-owned group just before the transfer took place; and

all of the liabilities under the *continuous disability policies of the originating company are transferred to the recipient company; and

the transfer took place before the income year in which 1 July 2005 occurs; and

(d) an amount (the section 320-30 amount) would have been included in the assessable income of the originating company under section 320-30 for the income year in which the transfer took place if the transfer had not taken place.

Section 320-30 does not apply to the originating company for the income year in which the transfer took place or a later income year.

The amount worked out using this formula is included in the assessable income of the originating company for the income year in which the transfer took place:

where:

continuous disability policy days means the number of days during the income year in which the transfer took place that the originating company held *continuous disability policies.

The section 320-30 amount, reduced by the amount included in the assessable income of the originating company under subsection (3), is included in the assessable income of the recipient company for the income year in which the transfer took place.

For each income year after the year in which the transfer took place and that is a relevant income year for the purposes of section 320-30, the recipient company’s assessable income includes the amount that would have been included in the originating company’s assessable income under that section for that year if the transfer had not taken place.

320-345 Exemption of management fees

This section has effect if:

the originating company and the recipient company were members of the same wholly-owned group just before the transfer took place; and

(b) a *life insurance policy (also the original policy):

is constituted by a contract made with the originating company before 1 July 2000; and

is transferred to the recipient company before 1 July 2005.

For the purposes of section 320-40, a *life insurance policy issued by the recipient company in substitution for the original policy is taken to have been constituted by a contract made with the recipient company before 1 July 2000 if the terms of the substituted policy are not materially different from those of the original policy.

Subsection 320-40(4) applies to so much of the sum of the amounts applicable in respect of the substituted policy under subsections 320-40(5), (6) and (7) as does not exceed any fees or charges made by the recipient company that the originating company would have been entitled to make under the terms of the original policy as applying just before 1 July 2000.

Division 321 — General insurance companies and companies that self-insure in respect of workers’ compensation liabilities

Table of Subdivisions

321-A Provision for, and payment of, claims by general insurance companies

321-B Premium income of general insurance companies

321-C Companies that self-insure in respect of workers’ compensation liabilities

Subdivision 321-A — Provision for, and payment of, claims by general insurance companies

Table of sections

321-10 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in adjusted liability for incurred claims

321-15 Deduction for increase in adjusted liability for incurred claims

321-20 How the value of adjusted liability for incurred claims is worked out

321-25 Deduction for claims paid during current year

321-10 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in adjusted liability for incurred claims

A general insurance company’s assessable income for the current year includes an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the value, at the end of the previous income year, of the company’s adjusted liability for incurred claims under *general insurance policies; exceeds

the value, at the end of the current year, of that liability.

Note: Those values are worked out under section 321-20.

321-15 Deduction for increase in adjusted liability for incurred claims

A general insurance company can deduct for the current year an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the value, at the end of the current year, of the company’s adjusted liability for incurred claims under *general insurance policies; exceeds

the value, at the end of the previous income year, of that liability.

Note: Those values are worked out under section 321-20.

321-20 How the value of adjusted liability for incurred claims is worked out

Work out the value, at the end of an income year, of a general insurance company’s adjusted liability for incurred claims under *general insurance policies in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Use the *applicable insurance contracts accounting standard to measure, at the end of the income year, the company’s liability for incurred claims under *general insurance policies, but when doing so disregard any claims handling costs that are neither attached to, nor directly attributable to, a particular claim.

Step 2. Using that standard, reduce the result from step 1 by so much of that result as the company expects at the end of the income year to recover under a reinsurance contract:

within the meaning of that standard; but

(b) that is not one to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about reinsurance with non-residents) applies.

321-25 Deduction for claims paid during current year

A general insurance company can deduct for the current year amounts paid during that year in respect of claims under *general insurance policies.

Subdivision 321-B — Premium income of general insurance companies

Table of sections

321-45 Assessable income to include gross premiums

321-50 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in adjusted liability for remaining coverage

321-55 Deduction for increase in adjusted liability for remaining coverage

321-60 How the value of adjusted liability for remaining coverage is worked out

321-45 Assessable income to include gross premiums

A general insurance company’s assessable income for the current year includes the gross premiums received by the company during the current year in respect of *general insurance policies.

321-50 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in adjusted liability for remaining coverage

A general insurance company’s assessable income for the current year includes an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the value, at the end of the previous income year, of the company’s adjusted liability for remaining coverage under *general insurance policies; exceeds

the value, at the end of the current year, of that liability.

Note: Those values are worked out under section 321-60.

321-55 Deduction for increase in adjusted liability for remaining coverage

A general insurance company can deduct for the current year an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the value, at the end of the current year, of the company’s adjusted liability for remaining coverage under *general insurance policies; exceeds

the value, at the end of the previous income year, of that liability.

Note: Those values are worked out under section 321-60.

321-60 How the value of adjusted liability for remaining coverage is worked out

Work out the value, at the end of an income year, of a general insurance company’s adjusted liability for remaining coverage under *general insurance policies in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Use the *applicable insurance contracts accounting standard to measure, at the end of the income year, the company’s liability for remaining coverage under *general insurance policies, but when doing so disregard that standard’s treatment of loss components and loss-recovery components of onerous contracts (within the meaning of that standard).

Step 2. Using that standard, reduce the result from step 1 by any asset for insurance acquisition cash flows.

Step 3. Using that standard, reduce the result from step 2 by any premiums paid or payable by the company, in that or an earlier income year, for the reinsurance of risks covered by those *general insurance policies in respect of later income years, except:

(a) reinsurance premiums that the company cannot deduct because of subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about reinsurance with non-residents); and

reinsurance premiums that were paid or payable in respect of a particular class of insurance business if, under the reinsurance contract (within the meaning of that standard), the reinsurer agreed to pay, in respect of a loss incurred by the company that is covered by the relevant policy, some or all of the excess over an agreed amount.

Step 4. Using that standard, add to the result from step 3 any reinsurance commissions received or receivable by the company that relate to reinsurance premiums counted under step 3.

Subdivision 321-C — Companies that self-insure in respect of workers’ compensation liabilities

Table of sections

321-80 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in outstanding claims liability

321-85 Deduction for outstanding claims liability

321-90 How value of outstanding claims liability is worked out

321-95 Deductions for claims paid during current year

321-80 Assessable income to include amount for reduction in outstanding claims liability

The assessable income for the current year of a company that is not required by law to insure, and does not insure, against liability for workers’ compensation claims includes an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the value, at the end of the previous income year, of the company’s liability for such claims that:

arose from events that occurred in that or an earlier income year; and

were not paid in full before the end of the previous income year; exceeds

the value, at the end of the current year, of that liability.

Note: Those values are worked out under section 321-90.

321-85 Deduction for outstanding claims liability

A company that is not required by law to insure, and does not insure, against liability for workers’ compensation claims can deduct for the current year an amount equal to the amount (if any) by which:

the value, at the end of the current year, of the company’s liability for such claims that:

arose from events that occurred in the current or an earlier income year; and

were not paid in full before the end of the current year; exceeds

the value, at the end of the previous income year, of that liability.

Note: Those values are worked out under section 321-90.

321-90 How value of outstanding claims liability is worked out

Work out the value, at the end of an income year, of a company’s liability for claims covered by section 321-80 or 321-85 by adding up the amounts that, at the end of that income year, the company determines, based on proper and reasonable estimates, to be appropriate to set aside and invest in order to meet:

liabilities for those claims; and

direct settlement costs associated with those claims.

321-95 Deductions for claims paid during current year

A company that is not required by law to insure, and does not insure, against liability for workers’ compensation claims can deduct for the current year amounts paid during that year in respect of such claims.

Division 322 — Assistance for policyholders with insolvent general insurers

Guide to Division 322

322-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out special measures to assist in the rescue package provided in response to the collapse of the HIH group and deals with the tax treatment of entitlements under Part VC (Financial claims scheme for policyholders with insolvent general insurers) of the Insurance Act 1973.

Table of sections

322-5 Rescue payments treated as insurance payments by HIH

322-10 HIH Trust exempt from tax

322-15 Certain capital gains and capital losses disregarded

Subdivision 322-A — HIH rescue package

322-5 Rescue payments treated as insurance payments by HIH

This Act applies to you as if a payment you receive from the Commonwealth, the HIH Trust or a prescribed entity for assignment of your rights under or in relation to a general insurance policy you held with an HIH company:

had been made by the HIH company; and

had been made under the terms and conditions of the general insurance policy you held with the HIH company.

(2) The HIH Trust is the HIH Claims Support Trust (established on 6 July 2001).

(3) An HIH company is:

CIC Insurance Limited; or

FAI General Insurance Company Limited; or

FAI Reinsurances Pty Limited; or

FAI Traders Insurance Company Pty Limited; or

HIH Casualty and General Insurance Limited; or

HIH Underwriting and Insurance (Australia) Pty Limited; or

World Marine and General Insurances Pty Limited; or

another related company specified in writing by the Commissioner.

322-10 HIH Trust exempt from tax

The total ordinary income and statutory income of:

the HIH Trust; and

an entity prescribed for the purposes of this Division;

is exempt from income tax.

322-15 Certain capital gains and capital losses disregarded

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make because you assign a right under or in relation to a general insurance policy you held with an HIH company to the Commonwealth, the trustee of the HIH Trust or a prescribed entity is disregarded.

Subdivision 322-B — Tax treatment of entitlements under financial claims scheme

Guide to Subdivision 322-B

322-20 What this Subdivision is about

This Act applies to a payment of an entitlement under Part VC (Financial claims scheme for policyholders with insolvent general insurers) of the Insurance Act 1973 as if the payment were made by the insurer under the insurance policy concerned.

Disregard a capital gain or loss from:

the disposal to APRA under that Part of rights against the insurer under an insurance policy; or

the payment of an entitlement under that Part.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

322-25 Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from insurer

322-30 Disposal of rights against insurer to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects

Operative provisions

322-25 Payment of entitlement under financial claims scheme treated as payment from insurer

(1) This Act applies to you as if an amount paid to you, or applied for your benefit, to meet your entitlement under Part VC (Financial claims scheme for policyholders with insolvent general insurers) of the Insurance Act 1973 relating to a *general insurance policy issued by a *general insurance company had been paid to you by the company under the terms and conditions of the policy.

(2) To avoid doubt, subsection (1) does not affect the operation of Part 2-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note: Division 21 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 contains special provisions about how Part 2-5 in that Schedule operates in relation to the meeting of entitlements under Part VC of the Insurance Act 1973.

322-30 Disposal of rights against insurer to APRA and meeting of financial claims scheme entitlement have no CGT effects

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make because:

(a) under section 62ZZL of the Insurance Act 1973, you *dispose of a *CGT asset consisting of your rights against a *general insurance company to *APRA; or

your entitlement under section 62ZZF, 62ZZFA, 62ZZG or 62ZZGA of that Act is met.

Note 1: Section 62ZZL of the Insurance Act 1973 causes you to cease to be the owner, and APRA to become the owner, of rights against a general insurance company relating to a general insurance policy when your entitlement arises under Part VC of that Act in relation to the policy.

Note 2: Sections 62ZZF, 62ZZFA, 62ZZG and 62ZZGA of the Insurance Act 1973 entitle persons with valid claims based on general insurance policies issued by certain general insurance companies that have since become insolvent to be paid the amount of those claims by APRA.

Part 3-45 — Rules for particular industries and occupations

Division 328 — Small business entities

Table of Subdivisions

328-B Objects of this Division

328-C What is a small business entity

328-D Capital allowances for small business entities

328-E Trading stock for small and medium business entities

328-F Small business income tax offset

328-G Restructures of small businesses

Guide to Division 328

328-5 What this Division is about

This Division explains the meaning of the terms small business entity, annual turnover, aggregated turnover and related concepts (Subdivision 328-C).

If you are a small business entity, this Division allows you to change the way the income tax law applies to you in these ways:

you can choose to put your depreciating assets into a general pool and treat the pool as a single asset (Subdivision 328-D);

you can choose not to account for annual changes in trading stock value that are not more than $5,000 (Subdivision 328-E).

In usual circumstances, these changes will simplify the working out of your taxable income, and so reduce your compliance costs.

You may be entitled to a tax offset for any small business income included in your assessable income, if you are an individual (Subdivision 328-F).

Table of sections

328-10 Concessions available to small business entities

328-10 Concessions available to small business entities

If you are a small business entity for an income year, you can choose to take advantage of the concessions set out in the following table. Some of the concessions have additional, specific conditions that must also be satisfied.

Note 1: The CGT concessions mentioned in items 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the table apply only if you are a CGT small business entity (see section 152-10).

Note 2: The small business income tax offset mentioned in item 6A of the table applies only if you are a small business entity as defined for the purposes of Subdivision 328-F (see section 328-357).

Note 3: Some of these concessions are also available to medium businesses (for example, see subsection 328-285(2)).

(2) Also, if you are a small business entity for an income year, the standard 2-year period for amending your assessment applies to you (section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

Subdivision 328-B — Objects of this Division

328-50 Objects of this Division

The main object of this Division is to offer eligible small businesses the choice of a new platform to deal with their tax. The platform is designed to benefit those businesses in one or more of these ways:

• reducing their tax;

• providing simpler rules for determining their income and deductions;

• providing simpler capital allowances and trading stock requirements;

• reducing their compliance costs.

This Division also provides rules that are intended to prevent other businesses from taking advantage of those benefits.

Subdivision 328-C — What is a small business entity

Guide to Subdivision 328-C

328-105 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision explains the meaning of the terms small business entity, annual turnover, aggregated turnover and related concepts.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

328-110 Meaning of small business entity

328-115 Meaning of aggregated turnover

328-120 Meaning of annual turnover

328-125 Meaning of connected with an entity

328-130 Meaning of affiliate

Operative provisions

328-110 Meaning of small business entity

General rule: based on aggregated turnover worked out as at the beginning of the current income year

(1) You are a small business entity for an income year (the current year) if:

you carry on a business in the current year; and

one or both of the following applies:

(i) you carried on a business in the income year (the previous year) before the current year and your *aggregated turnover for the previous year was less than $10 million;

your aggregated turnover for the current year is likely to be less than $10 million.

Note 1: The $10 million thresholds in this subsection and in subsections (3) and (4) have been increased to $50 million for certain concessions (for example, see subsection 328-285(2)).

Note 2: If you are or would (if the $10 million thresholds in this subsection and subsection (3) were increased to $50 million) be a small business entity for an income year, you may apply for permission:

(a) under section 61C of the Excise Act 1901 to deliver goods for home consumption (without entering them for that purpose) in respect of a calendar month or a quarter; or

(b) under section 69 of the Customs Act 1901 to deliver like customable goods or excise-equivalent goods into home consumption (without entering them for that purpose) in respect of a calendar month or, for excise-equivalent goods, a quarter.

You work out your aggregated turnover for the current year for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii):

as at the first day of the current year; or

if you start to carry on a business during the current year—as at the day you start to carry on the business.

Note: Subsection 328-120(5) provides for how to work out your annual turnover (which is relevant to working out your aggregated turnover) if you do not carry on a business for the whole of an income year.

Exception: aggregated turnover for 2 previous income years was $10 million or more

(3) However, you are not a small business entity for an income year (the current year) because of subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) if:

you carried on a business in each of the 2 income years before the current year; and

your aggregated turnover for each of those income years was $10 million or more.

Note: Section 328-110 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 affects the operation of this subsection in relation to the 2007-08 and 2008-09 income years.

Additional rule: based on aggregated turnover worked out as at the end of the current income year

(4) You are also a small business entity for an income year (the current year) if:

you carry on a business in the current year; and

your aggregated turnover for the current year, worked out as at the end of that year, is less than $10 million.

Note: If you are a small business entity only because of subsection (4), you cannot choose any of the following concessions:

(a) paying PAYG instalments based on GDP-adjusted notional tax: see section 45-130 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953;

accounting for GST on a cash basis: see section 29-40 of the GST Act;

making an annual apportionment of input tax credits for acquisitions and importations that are partly creditable: see section 131-5 of the GST Act;

paying GST by quarterly instalments: see section 162-5 of the GST Act;

(e) applying for permission under the Excise Act 1901 to deliver goods for home consumption (without entering them for that purpose) in respect of a calendar month or a quarter: see section 61C of that Act;

(f) applying for permission under the Customs Act 1901 to deliver like customable goods or excise-equivalent goods for home consumption (without entering them for that purpose) in respect of a calendar month or, for excise-equivalent goods, a quarter: see section 69 of that Act.

Winding up a business previously carried on

This Subdivision applies to you as if you carried on a business in an income year if:

in that year you were winding up a business you previously carried on; and

you were a small business entity for the income year in which you stopped carrying on that business.

Note 1: Subsection 328-120(5) provides for how to work out your annual turnover (which is relevant to working out your aggregated turnover) if you do not carry on a business for the whole of an income year.

Note 2: A special rule applies if you were an STS taxpayer under this Division (as in force immediately before the commencement of this section) in the income year in which you stopped carrying on the business: see section 328-111 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Partners in a partnership

(6) A person who is a partner in a partnership in an income year is not, in his or her capacity as a partner, a small business entity for the income year.

328-115 Meaning of aggregated turnover

(1) Your aggregated turnover for an income year is the sum of the relevant annual turnovers (see subsection (2)) excluding any amounts covered by subsection (3).

Note: For small business CGT relief purposes, additional entities may be treated as being connected with you or your affiliate under sections 152-48 and 152-78.

(2) The relevant annual turnovers are:

your annual turnover for the income year; and

(b) the annual turnover for the income year of any entity (a relevant entity) that is *connected with you at any time during the income year; and

(c) the annual turnover for the income year of any entity (a relevant entity) that is an *affiliate of yours at any time during the income year.

(3) Your aggregated turnover for an income year does not include the following amounts:

amounts *derived in the income year by you or a relevant entity from dealings between you and the relevant entity while the relevant entity is *connected with you or is your affiliate;

amounts derived in the income year by a relevant entity from dealings between the relevant entity and another relevant entity while each relevant entity is connected with you or is your affiliate;

amounts derived in the income year by a relevant entity while the relevant entity is not connected with you and is not your affiliate.

328-120 Meaning of annual turnover

General rule

(1) An entity’s annual turnover for an income year is the total *ordinary income that the entity *derives in the income year in the ordinary course of carrying on a *business.

Exclusion of amounts relating to GST

In working out an entity’s annual turnover for an income year, do not include any amount that is non-assessable non-exempt income under section 17-5 (which is about GST).

Exclusion of amounts derived from sales of retail fuel

In working out an entity’s annual turnover for an income year, do not include any amounts of ordinary income the entity *derives from sales of retail fuel.

Amounts derived from dealings with associates

In working out an entity’s annual turnover for an income year, the amount of ordinary income the entity *derives from any dealing with an associate of the entity is the amount of ordinary income the entity would derive from the dealing if it were at *arm’s length.

Note: Amounts derived in an income year from any dealings between an entity and an associate that is a relevant entity within the meaning of section 328-115 are not included in the entity’s aggregated turnover for that year: see subsection 328-115(3).

Business carried on for part of income year only

If an entity does not carry on a business for the whole of an income year, the entity’s annual turnover for the income year must be worked out using a reasonable estimate of what the entity’s annual turnover for the income year would be if the entity carried on a business for the whole of the income year.

Regulations may provide for different calculation of annual turnover

The regulations may provide that an entity’s annual turnover for an income year is to be calculated in a different way, but only so that it would be less than the amount worked out under this section.

328-125 Meaning of connected with an entity

(1) An entity is connected with another entity if:

either entity controls the other entity in a way described in this section; or

both entities are controlled in a way described in this section by the same third entity.

Note 1: See Subdivision 106-B if a CGT asset of yours is vested in a trustee in bankruptcy or a liquidator.

Note 2: See Subdivision 106-C if you are absolutely entitled to a CGT asset as against the trustee of a trust.

Note 3: See Subdivision 106-D if you provided security over an asset to another entity.

Direct control of an entity other than a discretionary trust

(2) An entity (the first entity) controls another entity if the first entity, its *affiliates, or the first entity together with its affiliates:

(a) except if the other entity is a discretionary trust—own, or have the right to acquire the ownership of, interests in the other entity that carry between them the right to receive a percentage (the control percentage) that is at least 40% of:

any distribution of income by the other entity; or

if the other entity is a partnership—the net income of the partnership; or

any distribution of capital by the other entity; or

(b) if the other entity is a company—own, or have the right to acquire the ownership of, *equity interests in the company that carry between them the right to exercise, or control the exercise of, a percentage (the control percentage) that is at least 40% of the voting power in the company.

Direct control of a discretionary trust

(3) An entity (the first entity) controls a discretionary trust if a trustee of the trust acts, or could reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with the directions or wishes of the first entity, its *affiliates, or the first entity together with its affiliates.

(4) An entity (the first entity) controls a discretionary trust for an income year if, for any of the 4 income years before that year:

the trustee of the trust paid to, or applied for the benefit of:

the first entity; or

any of the first entity’s *affiliates; or

the first entity and any of its affiliates;

any of the income or capital of the trust; and

(b) the percentage (the control percentage) of the income or capital paid or applied is at least 40% of the total amount of income or capital paid or applied by the trustee for that year.

Note: Section 328-112 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 affects the operation of this subsection in relation to the 2007-08, 2008-09, 2009-10 and 2010-11 income years.

An entity does not control a discretionary trust because of subsection (4) if the entity is:

an *exempt entity; or

a deductible gift recipient.

Commissioner may determine that an entity does not control another entity

If the control percentage referred to in subsection (2) or (4) is at least 40%, but less than 50%, the Commissioner may determine that the first entity does not control the other entity if the Commissioner thinks that the other entity is controlled by an entity other than, or by entities that do not include, the first entity or any of its *affiliates.

Indirect control of an entity

(7) This section applies to an entity (the first entity) that directly controls another entity (the second entity) as if the first entity also controlled any other entity that is directly, or indirectly by any other application or applications of this section, controlled by the second entity.

However, subsection (7) does not apply if the second entity is an entity of any of the following kinds:

a company *shares in which (except shares that carry the right to a fixed rate of dividend) are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange;

a publicly traded unit trust;

a mutual insurance company;

a mutual affiliate company;

a company (other than one covered by paragraph (a)) all the shares in which are owned by one or more of the following:

a company covered by paragraph (a);

a publicly traded unit trust;

a mutual insurance company;

a mutual affiliate company.

328-130 Meaning of affiliate

(1) An individual or a company is an affiliate of yours if the individual or company acts, or could reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with your directions or wishes, or in concert with you, in relation to the affairs of the *business of the individual or company.

(2) However, an individual or a company is not your affiliate merely because of the nature of the business relationship you and the individual or company share.

Note: For small business relief purposes, a spouse or a child under 18 years may also be an affiliate under section 152-47.

Example: A partner in a partnership would not be an affiliate of another partner merely because the first partner acts, or could reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with the directions or wishes of the second partner, or in concert with the second partner, in relation to the affairs of the partnership.

Directors of the same company, or the company and a director of that company, would be in a similar position.

Subdivision 328-D — Capital allowances for small business entities

Guide to Subdivision 328-D

328-170 What this Subdivision is about

If you are a small business entity, you can choose to deduct amounts for most of your depreciating assets on a diminishing value basis using a pool that is treated as a single depreciating asset.

Broadly, the pool is made up of the costs of the depreciating assets that are allocated to it or, in some cases, a proportion of those costs.

The pool rate is 30%.

There is a deduction for assets whose cost is less than $1,000 in the income year in which you start to use the asset or have it installed ready for use.

This Subdivision sets out how to calculate the pool deductions, and also sets out the consequences of:

disposal of depreciating assets; and

not choosing to use this Subdivision for an income year after having chosen to do so for an earlier income year; and

changing the business use of depreciating assets.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

328-175 Calculations for depreciating assets

328-180 Assets costing less than $1,000

328-185 Pooling

328-190 Calculation

328-195 Opening pool balance

328-200 Closing pool balance

328-205 Estimate of taxable use

328-210 Low pool value

328-215 Disposal etc. of depreciating assets

328-220 What happens if you are not a small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision for an income year

328-225 Change in business use

328-230 Estimate where deduction denied

328-235 Interaction with Divisions 85 and 86

Special rules about roll-overs

328-243 Roll-over relief

328-245 Consequences of roll-over

328-247 Pool deductions

328-250 Deductions for assets first used in BAE year

328-253 Deductions for cost addition amounts

328-255 Closing pool balance etc. below zero

328-257 Taxable use

Operative provisions

328-175 Calculations for depreciating assets

You can choose to calculate your deductions and some amounts of assessable income under this Subdivision instead of under Division 40 for an income year for all the *depreciating assets that you *hold if:

you are a small business entity for the income year; and

you started to use the assets or have them installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during or before that income year.

This subsection has effect subject to subsections (2) to (10).

Exception: assets to which Division 40 does not apply

Note: If you choose to use this Subdivision for an income year, you continue to use this Subdivision for your general small business pool for a later income year even if you are not a small business entity, or do not choose to use this Subdivision, for the later year: see section 328-220.

This Subdivision does not apply to a depreciating asset to which Division 40 does not apply because of section 40-45.

Exception: primary production

If you are a small business entity for the income year, for each depreciating asset you use to carry on a *primary production business and for which you could deduct amounts under Subdivision 40-F (about primary production depreciating assets) or Subdivision 40-G (about capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders) apart from subsection (1), you can choose:

to deduct amounts for it under Subdivision 40-F or 40-G; or

to calculate your deductions for it under this Subdivision.

Note: A choice made by a transferor under this subsection for an asset applies also to the transferee if roll-over relief under subsection 40-340(1) or (3) is chosen: see section 328-245.

You must make the choice under subsection (3) for each depreciating asset of the kind referred to in that subsection for the later of:

the first income year for which you are, or last were, a small business entity; or

the income year in which you started to use the asset, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose.

Once you have made the choice for an asset, you cannot change it.

Exception: horticultural plants

You cannot deduct amounts for *horticultural plants (including grapevines) under this Subdivision.

Exception: asset let on depreciating asset lease

You cannot deduct amounts for a depreciating asset under this Subdivision if the asset is being or might reasonably be expected to be let predominantly on a depreciating asset lease.

Exception: assets in a low-value or software development pool

You cannot deduct amounts for a depreciating asset under this Subdivision if:

the asset was allocated to your low-value pool under Subdivision 40-E, or to your pool under the former Subdivision 42-L, during an income year for which you were not a small business entity or had not chosen to use this Subdivision; or

the asset is *in-house software and expenditure on the asset is allocated to a software development pool under that Subdivision.

Note: You will have to continue deducting amounts for these assets under Division 40.

A depreciating asset referred to in subsection (7) is not allocated to your general small business pool under this Subdivision and does not qualify for a deduction under section 328-180.

Exception: assets for which previously entitled to a tax offset under the R&D provisions

You cannot deduct amounts for a depreciating asset for any period under this Subdivision if you are entitled under section 355-100 to a tax offset for a deduction under section 355-305 for the asset for the same or an earlier period.

Exception: second-hand assets used in residential property

You cannot deduct amounts for a depreciating asset under this Subdivision to the extent that section 40-27 prevents you from deducting amounts under subsection 40-25(1) for the asset.

Exception: restriction on choosing to use this Subdivision

If:

you choose to use this Subdivision to deduct amounts for your *depreciating assets for an income year; and

you do not choose to use this Subdivision for a later income year for which you satisfy the conditions to make this choice (see subsection (1));

you cannot choose to use this Subdivision until at least 5 years after the first later income year for which you satisfied the conditions to make this choice but did not do so.

Note 1: Your ability to choose to use this Subdivision may also be restricted by section 328-440 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 2: If you choose to use this Subdivision for an income year, you continue to use it for assets that have been allocated to your general small business pool for a later income year even if you are not a small business entity, or do not choose to use this Subdivision, for the later year: see section 328-220.

Note 3: Subsections 328-180(2) and (3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 affect the operation of this subsection in relation to income years ending on or after 12 May 2015.

328-180 Assets costing less than $1,000

You deduct the taxable purpose proportion of the *adjustable value of a depreciating asset for the income year in which you start to use the asset, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose if:

you were a small business entity for that year and the year in which you started to *hold it; and

you chose to use this Subdivision for each of those years; and

the asset is a depreciating asset whose *cost as at the end of the income year in which you start to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose is less than $1,000.

Note: This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

You can also deduct, for an income year for which you are a small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision, the taxable purpose proportion of an amount included in the second element of the *cost of an asset for which you have deducted an amount under subsection (1) if:

the amount so included is less than $1,000; and

Note: This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

you started to use the asset, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an earlier income year.

Note: Paragraph (b) may not apply for costs included after 31 December 2020 for assets you first acquire between 12 May 2015 and 31 December 2020: see subsection 328-180(5A) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

An asset for which you have deducted an amount under this section is allocated to your general small business pool if:

an amount of $1,000 or more is included in the second element of the asset’s *cost; or

Note: This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

any amount is included in the second element of the asset’s cost and you have deducted or can deduct an amount under subsection (2) for an amount previously included in the second element of the asset’s cost.

This Division applies to the asset as if its *adjustable value were the amount included in the second element of its *cost as mentioned in subsection (3).

Subsection (3) applies even if the amount is included in the second element of the asset’s *cost during an income year for which you are not a small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision.

328-185 Pooling

If you are a small business entity for an income year and you have chosen to use this Subdivision for that year, you deduct amounts for your *depreciating assets (except assets for which you have deducted or can deduct an amount under section 328-180) through a pool, which allows you to deduct amounts for them as if they were a single asset, thereby simplifying your calculations. You use one rate for the pool.

(2) There is a general small business pool to which *depreciating assets are allocated.

Allocating assets to a pool

A depreciating asset:

that you *hold just before, and at the start of, the first income year for which you are, or last were, a small business entity; and

for which you calculate your deductions under this Subdivision instead of under Division 40; and

that has not previously been allocated to your general small business pool; and

that you have started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose;

is automatically allocated to your general small business pool.

A depreciating asset that you start to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you are a small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision is allocated to the general small business pool at the end of that year.

Note: The allocation happens even if you no longer hold the asset at the end of that income year.

Exception for assets used or installed before 1 July 2001

You can choose not to have a depreciating asset allocated to the general small business pool if you started to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose before 1 July 2001.

Note: If you make this choice, you would continue to deduct amounts for the asset under Division 40.

You must make that choice for the first income year for which you are a small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision. Once you have made the choice for an asset, you cannot change it.

No re-allocation

Once a depreciating asset is allocated to your general small business pool, it is not re-allocated, even if you are not a small business entity for a later income year or you do not choose to use this Subdivision for that later year.

Note: If you chose to use this Subdivision for an income year, you continue to use it for your general small business pool for a later income year even if you are not a small business entity, or do not choose to use this Subdivision, for the later year: see section 328-220.

328-190 Calculation

You calculate your deduction for your general small business pool for an income year using this formula:

Note: You use section 328-210 instead if the pool has a low pool value.

Your deduction for each depreciating asset that you start to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you are a small business entity and choose to use this Subdivision is 15% of the taxable purpose proportion of its *adjustable value.

(3) You can also deduct for an income year for which you are a *small business entity and choose to use this Subdivision the amount worked out under subsection (4) for an amount (the cost addition amount) included in the second element of the *cost of a *depreciating asset for that year if you started to use the asset, or have it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose during an earlier income year.

Note: The second element of cost is worked out under section 40-190.

The amount you can deduct is 15% of the taxable purpose proportion of the cost addition amount.

Note: The amounts that a transferor and transferee can deduct under this section are modified if roll-over relief under section 40-340 is chosen: see sections 328-243 and 328-247.

328-195 Opening pool balance

(1) For the first income year for which you are a *small business entity and choose to use this Subdivision, the opening pool balance of your *general small business pool is the sum of the *taxable purpose proportions of the *adjustable values of *depreciating assets allocated to the pool under subsection 328-185(3).

(2) For a later income year, the opening pool balance of your *general small business pool is that pool’s *closing pool balance for the previous income year, reduced or increased by any adjustment required under section 328-225 (about change in the business use of an asset).

Note: You continue to deduct amounts using your general small business pool even if you are not a small business entity, or do not choose to use this Subdivision, for a later income year: see section 328-220.

However, if:

you are not a small business entity for an income year or you do not choose to use this Subdivision for that year; but

you are a small business entity for a later income year and you choose to use this Subdivision for the later year;

the opening pool balance of your *general small business pool includes the sum of the *taxable purpose proportions of the *adjustable values of *depreciating assets allocated to the pool under subsection 328-185(3) for that year.

328-200 Closing pool balance

You work out the closing pool balance of your *general small business pool for an income year in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Add to the opening pool balance of the pool for the income year:

the sum of the taxable purpose proportions of the *adjustable values of *depreciating assets you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during the income year and that are allocated to the pool; and

the taxable purpose proportion of any cost addition amounts (see subsection 328-190(3)) for the income year for assets allocated to the pool.

Step 2. Subtract from the step 1 amount:

the taxable purpose proportions of the *termination values of *depreciating assets allocated to the pool and for which a balancing adjustment event occurred during the income year; and

your deduction under subsection 328-190(1) for the pool for the income year; and

your deductions under subsection 328-190(2) for *depreciating assets you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during the income year and that are allocated to the pool; and

your deductions under subsection 328-190(3) for the income year for cost addition amounts for assets allocated to the pool.

Step 3. The result is the closing pool balance of the pool for the income year.

Note: A transferor does not subtract anything for certain balancing adjustment events under paragraph (a) of step 2 if roll-over relief under section 40-340 is chosen: see sections 328-243 and 328-245.

328-205 Estimate of taxable use

You must, for the first income year for which you are, or last were, a small business entity, make a reasonable estimate for that year of the proportion you will use, or have installed ready for use, each depreciating asset that you *held just before, and at the start of, that year for a taxable purpose if:

the asset has not previously been allocated to your general small business pool; and

you have started to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose; and

you have chosen to calculate your deductions for it under this Subdivision.

Note 1: That proportion will be 100% for an asset that you expect to use, or have installed ready for use, solely for a taxable purpose.

Note 2: Your estimate will be zero for an income year if another provision of this Act denies a deduction for that year: see section 328-230.

Note 3: This subsection does not apply to a transferee for certain assets if roll-over relief under section 40-340 is chosen: see sections 328-243 and 328-257.

You must also make this estimate for each depreciating asset that you *hold and start to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you are a small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision. You must make the estimate for the income year in which you start to use it, or have it installed ready for use, for such a purpose.

(3) The taxable purpose proportion of a *depreciating asset’s *adjustable value, or of an amount included in the second element of its *cost, is that part of that amount that represents:

the proportion you estimated under subsection (1) or (2); or

if you have had to make an adjustment under section 328-225 for the asset—the proportion most recently applicable to the asset under that section.

Note: An amount included in the second element of the cost of a depreciating asset is referred to in this Division as a cost addition amount: see subsection 328-190(3).

(4) The taxable purpose proportion of a *depreciating asset’s *termination value is that part of that amount that represents:

if you have not had to make an adjustment under section 328-225 for the asset—the proportion you estimated under subsection (1) or (2); or

if you have had to make at least one such adjustment—the average of:

the proportion you estimated under subsection (1) or (2); and

the proportion applicable to the asset for each of the 3 income years you *held the asset after the one in which the asset was allocated to the pool.

Example: When Bria’s computer was allocated to her general small business pool for the 2012-13 income year, she estimated that it would be used 50% for her florist business. Due to increasing business, Bria estimates the computer’s use to be 70% for the 2013-14 year, and 90% for the 2014-15 year. She makes an adjustment under section 328-225 for both those years.

Bria sells the computer for $1,000 at the start of the 2016-17 income year. She must now average the business use estimates for the computer for the year it was allocated to the pool and the next 3 years to work out the taxable purpose proportion of its termination value. The average is worked out as follows:

50% (original estimate); plus

70% (2013-14 estimate); plus

90% (2014-15 estimate); plus

90% (no change on previous year);

=300% ÷ 4 = 75%

The taxable purpose proportion of the computer’s termination value is, therefore:

75% of $1,000 = $750

328-210 Low pool value

Your deduction for a general small business pool for an income year is the amount worked out under subsection (2) (instead of an amount calculated under section 328-190) if that amount is less than $1,000 but more than zero.

Note 1: See section 328-215 for the result when the amount is less than zero.

Note 2: This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

The amount is the sum of:

the pool’s opening pool balance for the income year; and

the taxable purpose proportion of the *adjustable value of each depreciating asset you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during the income year and that is allocated to the pool; and

the taxable purpose proportion of any cost addition amounts (see subsection 328-190(3)) for the income year for assets allocated to the pool;

less the sum of the taxable purpose proportion of the *termination values of depreciating assets allocated to the pool and for which a balancing adjustment event occurred during the income year.

In that case, the *closing pool balance of the pool for that income year then becomes zero.

Example: Amanda’s Graphics is a small business entity for the 2014-15 income year and chooses to use this Subdivision for that year. The business has an opening pool balance of $8,500 for its general small business pool for that year.

During that year, Amanda acquired a new computer for $2,000. The taxable purpose proportion of its adjustable value is:

$2,000 x 80% business use estimate = $1,600

Amanda also sold her business car for $9,600 during that year. The car was used 100% in the business.

To work out whether she can deduct an amount under this section, Amanda uses this calculation:

$8,500 + $1,600 - $9,600 = $500

Because the result is less than $1,000, Amanda can deduct the $500 for the income year. The pool’s closing balance for the year is zero.

328-215 Disposal etc. of depreciating assets

This section sets out adjustments you may have to make if a balancing adjustment event occurs for a depreciating asset for which you calculate your deductions under this Subdivision.

If the asset is allocated to your general small business pool and:

the *closing pool balance of the pool for the income year in which the event occurred is less than zero; or

the amount worked out under subsection 328-210(2) for that income year is less than zero;

the amount by which that balance or amount is less than zero is included in your assessable income for that year.

In that case, the *closing pool balance of the pool for that income year then becomes zero.

If the asset was one for which you deducted an amount under section 328-180 (about assets costing less than $1,000), you include the taxable purpose proportion of the asset’s termination value in your assessable income.

328-220 What happens if you are not a small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision for an income year

If you are not a small business entity for an income year or you do not choose to use this Subdivision for that year, this Subdivision continues to apply to your general small business pool for that year and later income years.

However, *depreciating assets you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you are not a small business entity or do not choose to use this Subdivision cannot be allocated to your general small business pool under this Subdivision until an income year for which you are a small business entity and you choose to use this Subdivision.

This section applies to a transferee referred to in subsection 328-243(1) or (1A) who:

was not a small business entity for the income year in which the relevant *balancing adjustment events occurred; or

did not choose to use this Subdivision for that year;

as if the transferee had been a small business entity for an earlier income year and had chosen to use this Subdivision for the earlier year. This rule applies even if roll-over relief is not chosen.

328-225 Change in business use

(1) You must, for each income year (the present year) after the year in which a *depreciating asset is allocated to a pool, make a reasonable estimate of the proportion you use the asset, or have it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose in that year.

Note: This section is modified in its application to a transferee for certain assets if roll-over relief under section 40-340 is chosen: see sections 328-243 and 328-257.

You must make an adjustment for the present year if your estimate for that year under subsection (1) is different by more than 10 percentage points from:

your original estimate (see section 328-205); or

if you have made an adjustment under this section—the most recent estimate you made under subsection (1) that resulted in an adjustment under this section.

The adjustment is made to the opening pool balance of the general small business pool to which the asset was allocated, and it must be made before you calculate your deduction under this Subdivision for the present year.

Note: The opening pool balance will be reduced if the adjustment worked out under subsection (3) is a negative amount. It will be increased if the adjustment is positive.

The adjustment is:

where:

asset value is:

for a depreciating asset you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were a small business entity and chose to use this Subdivision—the asset’s *adjustable value at that time; or

for an asset you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were not a small business entity or did not choose to use this Subdivision—its adjustable value at the start of the income year for which it was allocated to a general small business pool;

increased by any amounts included in the second element of the asset’s *cost from the time mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b) until the beginning of the income year for which you are making the adjustment.

last estimate is:

your original estimate of the proportion you use, or have installed ready for use, a depreciating asset for a taxable purpose (see section 328-205); or

if you have made an adjustment under this section—the latest estimate taken into account under this section.

present year estimate is your reasonable estimate of the proportion you use the asset, or have it *installed ready for use, for a *taxable purpose during the present year.

reduction factor is the number worked out under subsection (4).

(4) The reduction factor in the formula in subsection (3) is:

for a depreciating asset you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were a small business entity and chose to use this Subdivision:

for an asset you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were not a small business entity or did not choose to use this Subdivision:

where:

n is the number of income years (counting part of an income year as a whole year) before the present year for which you have deducted or can deduct an amount for the *depreciating asset under this Subdivision.

rate is the rate applicable to the pool to which the asset is allocated.

Note: The reduction factor for a depreciating asset in your general small business pool which you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were not a small business entity or did not choose to use this Subdivision is:

0.7 for the income year after it is allocated to the pool; and

0.49 for the income year after that; and

0.343 for the income year after that.

The reduction factor for a depreciating asset in your general small business pool which you started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during an income year for which you were a small business entity and chose to use this Subdivision is:

0.85 for the income year after it is allocated to the pool; and

0.595 for the income year after that; and

0.417 for the income year after that.

Exceptions

However:

you do not need to make an estimate or an adjustment under this section for a depreciating asset for an income year that is at least 3 income years after the income year in which the asset was allocated; and

you cannot make an adjustment for a depreciating asset if your reasonable estimate of the proportion you use a depreciating asset, or have it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose changes in a later income year by the 10 percentage points mentioned in subsection (1) or less.

328-230 Estimate where deduction denied

This Subdivision applies to you as if you had estimated that you will not use, or have installed ready for use, a depreciating asset at all for a taxable purpose during an income year if a provision of this Act outside this Division denies a deduction for the asset for that year.

328-235 Interaction with Divisions 85 and 86

Despite sections 85-10 and 86-60, if you are a small business entity for an income year you can deduct amounts for *depreciating assets under this Subdivision.

However, you cannot deduct an amount for a car under this Subdivision if, had you not been a small business entity and chosen to use this Subdivision, sections 86-60 and 86-70 would have prevented you deducting an amount for it.

Special rules about roll-overs

328-243 Roll-over relief

There is roll-over relief under subsection 40-340(1) (as affected by subsection 40-340(2)) if:

(a) *balancing adjustment events occur for *depreciating assets on a day (the BAE day) because an entity (the transferor) disposes of the assets in an income year to another entity (the transferee); and

the disposal involves a CGT event; and

the conditions in item 1, 2, 3 or 8 of the table in subsection 40-340(1) are satisfied; and

deductions for the assets are calculated under this Subdivision; and

the transferor and the transferee jointly choose the roll-over relief; and

the condition in subsection (2) is met.

Roll-over relief can be chosen under subsection 40-340(3) if:

(a) *balancing adjustment events occur for *depreciating assets on a day (the BAE day) because of subsection 40-295(2); and

deductions for the assets are calculated under this Subdivision; and

(c) the entity or entities that had an interest in the assets just before the balancing adjustment events occurred (the transferor) and the entity or entities that have an interest in the assets just after the events occurred (the transferee) jointly choose the roll-over relief; and

the condition in subsection (2) is met.

All of the *depreciating assets that, just before the *balancing adjustment events occurred, were:

*held by the transferor; and

allocated to the transferor’s general small business pool;

must be held by the transferee just after those events occurred.

328-245 Consequences of roll-over

The transferor does not subtract anything for the *balancing adjustment events under:

paragraph (a) of step 2 in the method statement in section 328-200; or

subsection 328-210(2).

Subsection 328-215(4) does not apply to the *balancing adjustment events for the transferor.

A choice made by the transferor for a depreciating asset under subsection 328-175(3) (about primary production assets) applies to the transferee as if it had been made by the transferee.

Sections 328-247 to 328-257 have effect.

328-247 Pool deductions

(1) The amount that can be deducted for the transferor’s *general small business pool for the income year (the BAE year) in which the *balancing adjustment events occurred under subsection 328-190(1) or section 328-210 for the BAE year is split equally between:

the transferor and the transferee; or

if there are 2 or more occurrences of balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence—the entities concerned.

Example: John and Dave operate a dry cleaning business in partnership (the transferor). The transferor is a small business entity for the relevant income year and has chosen to use this Subdivision for that year. On the 90th day of an income year, Jonathan joins the partnership. The new partnership (the transferee) is a small business entity for the income year and chooses to use this Subdivision for that year. Had there been no partnership change, a deduction of $6,600 would have been available for the transferor’s general small business pool. The transferor and transferee jointly choose the roll-over.

The deduction available to the transferor and the transferee for the pool under section 328-210 is $3,300 each.

The transferor cannot deduct any amount for the transferor’s general small business pool for an income year after the BAE year.

328-250 Deductions for assets first used in BAE year

This section applies in working out the amount that the transferor or transferee can deduct for the BAE year under subsection 328-180(1) (assets costing less than $1,000) or subsection 328-190(2) (assets that will be pooled) for a depreciating asset that the transferor or transferee started to use, or have installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose during the BAE year.

Note: This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Asset first used by transferor

If the asset was first used or installed ready for use by the transferor, the amount that can be deducted under subsection 328-180(1) or 328-190(2) for the asset for the BAE year is split equally between:

the transferor and the transferee; or

if there are 2 or more occurrences of *balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence—the entities concerned.

Asset first used by transferee

If the asset was first used or installed ready for use by the transferee:

the transferor cannot deduct anything for the asset for the BAE year; and

the amount that can be deducted under subsection 328-180(1) or 328-190(2) for the asset for the BAE year is:

deductible by the transferee; or

if there are 2 or more occurrences of *balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence—split equally between the entities concerned (except ones that did not use the asset or have it installed ready for use).

Example: To continue the example from section 328-247, the transferee buys an asset on the 150th day of the BAE year for $800.

On the 250th day of the year, Evan joins the transferee partnership. The new transferee partnership is a small business entity for the BAE year, and chooses to use this Subdivision for that year, and a further roll-over is chosen.

The original transferor cannot deduct anything for the asset. The original transferee (now a transferor) and the new transferee can deduct $400 each.

Special rule for assets costing less than $1,000

Subsection (5) applies if:

the transferor started to use, or have installed ready for use, an asset of a kind mentioned in paragraph 328-180(1)(b) during the BAE year; and

a balancing adjustment event occurs for that asset before the BAE day.

Note: This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

The transferee cannot deduct anything for the asset for the BAE year, and subsection 328-215(4) does not apply to the transferee in relation to the asset.

328-253 Deductions for cost addition amounts

This section applies in working out the amount that the transferor or transferee can deduct for the BAE year under subsection 328-180(2) or 328-190(3) for expenditure incurred by the transferor or transferee during the BAE year that is included in the second element of the *cost of a depreciating asset.

Expenditure incurred by transferor

If the expenditure was incurred by the transferor, the amount that can be deducted under subsection 328-180(2) or 328-190(3) for the BAE year is split equally between:

the transferor and the transferee; or

if there are 2 or more occurrences of *balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence—the entities concerned.

Expenditure incurred by transferee

If the expenditure was incurred by the transferee:

the transferor cannot deduct anything for the expenditure for the BAE year; and

the amount that can be deducted under subsection 328-180(2) or 328-190(3) for the expenditure for the BAE year is:

deductible by the transferee; or

if there are 2 or more occurrences of *balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence—split equally between the entities concerned.

Special rule for expenditure on assets costing less than $1,000

Subsection (5) applies if:

the transferor incurred the expenditure in relation to an asset of a kind mentioned in paragraph 328-180(1)(b); and

a balancing adjustment event occurs for that asset before the BAE day.

Note: This threshold may be affected by section 328-180 (about temporary increased access to accelerated depreciation) or 328-181 (about temporary full expensing) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

The transferee cannot deduct anything for the expenditure for the BAE year, and subsection 328-215(4) does not apply to the transferee in relation to the asset.

328-255 Closing pool balance etc. below zero

This section applies if:

the *closing pool balance of the transferor’s general small business pool for the BAE year is less than zero; or

the amount worked out under subsection 328-210(2) for the pool for the BAE year is less than zero;

because a balancing adjustment event occurred for an asset allocated to that pool during that year.

The amount included in assessable income under subsection 328-215(2) is split equally between:

the transferor and transferee; or

if there are 2 or more occurrences of *balancing adjustment events for relevant entities for the BAE year and a roll-over is chosen for each occurrence—the entities concerned.

328-257 Taxable use

(1) This section applies to *depreciating assets (the previously held assets) that were *held by the transferor just before the *balancing adjustment events occurred.

Subsection 328-205(1) (about estimates of taxable use) does not apply to previously held assets in the hands of the transferee for the BAE year. Instead, the transferee uses for the BAE year:

the estimate made by the transferor under that subsection for the asset; or

if the transferor had made one or more estimates for the asset under subsection 328-225(1) that resulted in an adjustment under section 328-225 (about change in business use)—that estimate or the most recent of those estimates.

Section 328-225 applies to the transferee for each previously held asset for income years after the BAE year as if:

the transferee had *held the asset during the period that the transferor held it; and

estimates applicable to the transferor for the asset under that section were also applicable to the transferee.

Subdivision 328-E — Trading stock for small and medium business entities

Guide to Subdivision 328-E

328-280 What this Subdivision is about

Small and medium business entities can choose not to account for their trading stock in some circumstances. This Subdivision modifies the rules in Division 70 about trading stock for those entities.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

328-285 Trading stock for small and medium business entities

328-295 Value of trading stock on hand

Operative provisions

328-285 Trading stock for small and medium business entities

You can choose not to account for changes in the *value of your trading stock for an income year if:

you are a small business entity, or an entity covered by subsection (2), for that year; and

the difference between the value of all your trading stock on hand at the start of that year and the value you reasonably estimate of all your trading stock on hand at the end of that year is not more than $5,000.

Note 1: As a result, sections 70-35 and 70-45 (about comparing the value of each item of trading stock on hand at the start and end of an income year) will not apply to you for the income year.

Note 2: When making a reasonable estimate of the value of trading stock on hand:

special valuation rules may be used, for example, obsolete stock, natural increase of live stock, horse breeding stock; and

the estimated value disregards an amount equal to the amount of input tax credits (if any) to which you would be entitled for an item if the acquisition of the item had been solely for a creditable purpose: see subsection 70-45(1A).

Note 3: If you choose to account for changes in the value of your trading stock for an income year, you will have to do a stocktake and account for the change in the value of all your trading stock: see Subdivision 70-C.

An entity is covered by this subsection for an income year if:

the entity is not a small business entity for the income year; and

the entity would be a small business entity for the income year if:

each reference in Subdivision 328-C (about what is a small business entity) to $10 million were instead a reference to $50 million; and

the reference in paragraph 328-110(5)(b) to a small business entity were instead a reference to an entity covered by this subsection.

328-295 Value of trading stock on hand

If you make a choice under section 328-285 for an income year, the *value of all your trading stock on hand at the start of the income year is:

the same amount as was taken into account under this Act at the end of the previous income year; or

zero if no item of trading stock was taken into account under this Act at the end of the previous income year.

Note: The amount taken into account at the end of the previous income year is worked out under either section 70-45 or subsection (2) of this section.

If you make a choice under section 328-285 for an income year, this Act applies to you as if the *value of all your trading stock on hand at the end of the year were equal to the value of all your trading stock on hand at the start of the year.

Note: If you do not make a choice under section 328-285, the value of trading stock on hand at the end of the year is worked out using section 70-45.

Example: Angela operates a riding school, and also sells riding gear. Her business is a small business entity for the 2008-09 income year and makes a choice under section 328-285 for that year.

At the start of the 2008-09 income year, the opening value of Angela’s trading stock is $30,000. Using her reliable inventory system, she estimates the closing value to be $34,000.

The closing value for the 2008-09 income year, and the opening value for the 2009-10 income year, will be $30,000.

Subdivision 328-F — Small business income tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 328-F

328-350 What this Subdivision is about

You may be entitled to a tax offset if you are an individual:

who is a small business entity; or

whose assessable income includes a share of the net small business income of an unincorporated small business entity; or

whose assessable income includes an amount because you are a partner in a partnership, or a beneficiary in a trust, that is a small business entity.

In working out whether you are or another entity is a small business entity, a special $5 million turnover threshold applies (see section 328-357).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

328-355 Entitlement to the small business income tax offset

328-357 Special meaning of small business entity for the purposes of this Subdivision—$5 million turnover threshold

328-360 Amount of your tax offset

328-365 Net small business income

328-370 Relevant attributable deductions

328-375 Modification if you are under 18 years old

Operative provisions

328-355 Entitlement to the small business income tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year if you are an individual:

who is a small business entity for the income year; or

whose assessable income for the income year includes an amount that is a share of the *net small business income, for the income year, of a small business entity that is not a corporate tax entity; or

whose assessable income for the income year includes an amount that:

would not have been so included if you had not been a partner in a partnership, or a beneficiary in a trust, that is a small business entity for the income year; and

is not included in the partnership’s or trust’s assessable income for an income year; and

would have formed part of the partnership’s or trust’s net small business income for an income year if the amount were included in the partnership’s or trust’s assessable income for an income year.

Note: This section does not apply to an individual in his or her capacity as the trustee of a trust (see subsection 960-100(4)).

328-357 Special meaning of small business entity for the purposes of this Subdivision—$5 million turnover threshold

For the purposes of this Subdivision, in working out whether you are a small business entity for an income year, assume that each reference in section 328-110 to $10 million were a reference to $5 million.

328-360 Amount of your tax offset

The amount of your tax offset is equal to 16% of the following:

where:

your total net small business income for the income year means so much of the sum of the following as does not exceed your taxable income for the income year:

your *net small business income for the income year, if you are a small business entity for the income year;

an amount referred to in paragraph 328-355(b) or (c) that is included in your assessable income for the income year, reduced (but not below zero) by your deductions to the extent that they are attributable to that amount and covered by section 328-370.

Note: If you are under 18 years old, your total net small business income will probably be worked out under section 328-375.

However, the amount of your tax offset is $1,000 if the amount worked out under subsection (1) exceeds $1,000.

Note: Your tax offset is capped at $1,000 regardless of the number of small business entities that cause you to be entitled to the tax offset for the income year.

328-365 Net small business income

(1) A *small business entity’s net small business income for an income year is the result of:

working out the entity’s assessable income for the income year to the extent that it relates to the entity carrying on a business, but disregarding:

any net capital gain; and

any personal services income not produced from conducting a *personal services business; and

subtracting the entity’s deductions to the extent that they are attributable to that assessable income and covered by section 328-370.

(2) However, the entity’s net small business income for the income year is zero if that result is less than zero.

328-370 Relevant attributable deductions

For the purposes of this Subdivision, this section covers all attributable deductions other than any under:

section 25-5 (about tax-related expenses); or

Division 30 (about gifts or contributions); or

Subdivision 290-C (about personal superannuation contributions).

328-375 Modification if you are under 18 years old

(1) Despite subsection 328-360(1), your total net small business income for the income year is worked out under this section if you are a prescribed person (within the meaning of section 102AC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) for the income year.

(2) Your total net small business income for the income year is the result of:

working out your business income (within the meaning of subsection 102AE(5) of that Act) for the income year to the extent that it relates to you carrying on:

a business as a small business entity for the income year; or

a business as a partner in a partnership, if the partnership is a small business entity for the income year; and

subtracting your deductions, and each partnership’s deductions, to the extent that they are attributable to that business income and covered by section 328-370.

(3) However, your total net small business income for the income year is:

zero if that result is less than zero; or

equal to your taxable income for the income year if that result exceeds that taxable income.

Subdivision 328-G — Restructures of small businesses

Guide to Subdivision 328-G

328-420 What this Subdivision is about

There are tax-neutral consequences for a small business entity that restructures the ownership of the assets of the business, without changing the ultimate economic ownership of the assets.

Table of sections

Object of this Subdivision

328-425 Object of this Subdivision

Requirements for a roll-over under this Subdivision

328-430 When a roll-over is available

328-435 Genuine restructures—safe harbour rule

328-440 Ultimate economic ownership—discretionary trusts

328-445 Residency requirement

Consequences of a roll-over under this Subdivision

328-450 Small business transfers not to affect income tax positions

328-455 Effect of small business restructures on transferred cost of assets

328-460 Effect of small business restructures on acquisition times of pre-CGT assets

328-465 New membership interests as consideration for transfer of assets

328-470 Membership interests affected by transfers of assets

328-475 Small business restructures involving assets already subject to small business roll-over

Object of this Subdivision

328-425 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to facilitate flexibility for owners of small business entities to restructure their businesses, and the way their business assets are held, while disregarding tax gains and losses that would otherwise arise.

Requirements for a roll-over under this Subdivision

328-430 When a roll-over is available

(1) A roll-over under this Subdivision is available in relation to an asset that, under a transaction, an entity (the transferor) transfers to one or more other entities (transferees) if:

the transaction is, or is a part of, a genuine restructure of an ongoing business; and

each party to the transfer is an entity to which any one or more of the following applies:

it is a small business entity for the income year during which the transfer occurred;

it has an affiliate that is a small business entity for that income year;

it is *connected with an entity that is a small business entity for that income year;

it is a partner in a partnership that is a small business entity for that income year; and

the transaction does not have the effect of materially changing:

which individual has, or which individuals have, the ultimate economic ownership of the asset; and

if there is more than one such individual—each such individual’s share of that ultimate economic ownership; and

the asset is a CGT asset (other than a depreciating asset) that is, at the time the transfer takes effect:

if subparagraph (b)(i) applies—an active asset; or

if subparagraph (b)(ii) or (iii) applies—an active asset in relation to which subsection 152-10(1A) is satisfied in that income year, or would be satisfied in that income year if paragraph 152-10(1AA)(b) were disregarded; or

if subparagraph (b)(iv) applies—an active asset and an interest in an asset of the partnership referred to in that subparagraph; and

the transferor and each transferee meet the residency requirement in section 328-445 for an entity; and

the transferor and each transferee choose to apply a roll-over under this Subdivision in relation to the assets transferred under the transaction.

Note: The roll-over of a depreciating asset transferred in the restructuring of a small business is addressed in item 8 of the table in subsection 40-340(1).

However, a roll-over under this Subdivision is not available if the transferor, or any transferee, is either an *exempt entity or a *complying superannuation entity.

328-435 Genuine restructures—safe harbour rule

For the purposes of paragraph 328-430(1)(a) (but without limiting that paragraph), a transaction is, or is a part of, a genuine restructure of an ongoing business if, in the 3 year period after the transaction takes effect:

there is no change in ultimate economic ownership of any of the significant assets of the business (other than trading stock) that were transferred under the transaction; and

those significant assets continue to be *active assets; and

there is no significant or material use of those significant assets for private purposes.

328-440 Ultimate economic ownership—discretionary trusts

For the purposes of paragraph 328-430(1)(c), a transaction does not have the effect of changing the ultimate economic ownership of an asset, or any individual’s share of that ultimate economic ownership, if:

either or both of the following applies:

just before the transaction took effect, the asset was included in the property of a non-fixed trust that was a family trust;

just after the transaction takes effect, the asset is included in the property of a non-fixed trust that is a family trust; and

(b) every individual who, just before the transfer took effect, had the ultimate economic ownership of the asset was a member of the family group (within the meaning of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) relating to the trust or trusts referred to in paragraph (a); and

every individual who, just after the transfer takes effect, has the ultimate economic ownership of the asset is a member of that family group.

328-445 Residency requirement

For the purposes of paragraph 328-430(1)(e), the residency requirement for an entity is that:

if the entity is an individual or a company—the entity is an Australian resident; or

if the entity is a trust—it is a *resident trust for CGT purposes; or

if the entity is a partnership (other than a corporate limited partnership)—at least one of the partners is an Australian resident; or

(d) if the entity is a corporate limited partnership—it is, under section 94T of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, a resident for the purposes of the *income tax law.

Consequences of a roll-over under this Subdivision

328-450 Small business transfers not to affect income tax positions

Except as provided by this Subdivision, a transfer of an asset has no direct consequences under the income tax law if:

the transfer occurs under a transaction in relation to which section 328-430 applies; and

a roll-over under this Subdivision is available under that section in relation to the asset.

Example: If the transfer were a transfer of the asset from a company to a shareholder, it would not be treated as a payment of a dividend under Division 7A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

To avoid doubt, this section does not affect the application of the income tax law in relation to:

anything that happens in relation to the asset that does not directly relate to the transfer; or

the ownership of the asset at any time.

328-455 Effect of small business restructures on transferred cost of assets

The income tax law applies to an entity in relation to the transfer of an asset by the entity, or to the entity, as if the transfer takes place for the asset’s roll-over cost if:

the transfer occurs under a transaction in relation to which section 328-430 applies; and

a roll-over under this Subdivision is available under that section in relation to the asset.

(2) The asset’s roll-over cost is whichever of the following amounts is applicable in relation to the transfer:

in relation to the application of subsection (1) to the asset as a CGT asset (other than trading stock, a revenue asset or a depreciating asset)—the transferor’s *cost base for the asset just before the transfer takes effect;

in relation to the application of subsection (1) to the asset as trading stock—the amount equal to:

the *cost of the item for the transferor; or

if the transferor held the item as trading stock at the start of the income year—the *value of the item for the transferor then;

in relation to the application of subsection (1) to the asset as a revenue asset—the amount that would give rise to the transferor not making a profit or a loss on the transfer.

328-460 Effect of small business restructures on acquisition times of pre-CGT assets

For the purposes of applying subsection 328-455(1) to the asset as a CGT asset (other than a revenue asset) that is a pre-CGT asset, a transferee is taken to have *acquired the asset before 20 September 1985.

328-465 New membership interests as consideration for transfer of assets

If:

section 328-455 applies in relation to the transfer of an asset under a transaction; and

the transaction provides for *membership interests to be issued; and

(c) the membership interests constitute all or part of the consideration provided for the transfer of assets (transferred assets) under the transaction;

then:

the first element of the membership interests’ *cost base is the sum of:

the *roll-over costs of the transferred assets that are neither *depreciating assets nor *pre-CGT assets; and

the *adjustable values of the transferred assets that are depreciating assets;

(less any liabilities that a transferee of any of the transferred assets undertakes to discharge in respect of the transferred assets) divided by the number of membership interests; and

the first element of the membership interests’ *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.

However, if the *membership interests constituted only a part of the total consideration provided for the transfer of the transferred assets, reduce accordingly the amounts worked out under paragraphs (1)(d) and (e).

328-470 Membership interests affected by transfers of assets

If:

section 328-455 applies in relation to the transfer of an asset under a transaction; and

an entity holds, either directly or indirectly:

a *membership interest in the transferor or a transferee; or

a membership interest that was issued as provided for by the transaction;

disregard a *capital loss from a CGT event that arises in relation to the membership interest after the transaction takes effect, except to the extent that the entity can demonstrate that the loss is attributable to a matter other than the transaction.

328-475 Small business restructures involving assets already subject to small business roll-over

If:

(a) section 328-455 applies in relation to the transfer of an asset (the transferred asset) of the transferor’s business to one or more transferees; and

the transferor has previously chosen a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E for a CGT event that happened in relation to a CGT asset for which the transferred asset is a replacement asset (within the meaning of sections 104-185, 104-190, 104-197 and 104-198);

sections 104-185, 104-190, 104-197 and 104-198 apply to each transferee (to the extent of the transferee’s interest in the asset) as if the transferee, and not the transferor, made that choice.

Note: Sections 104-185, 104-190, 104-197 and 104-198 provide for capital gains to arise under CGT events J2, J5 and J6, after the choice of a small business roll-over under Subdivision 152-E has deferred the making of a capital gain.

Division 355 — Research and Development

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 355

355-A Object

355-B Meaning of R&D activities and other terms

355-C Entitlement to tax offset

355-D Notional deductions for R&D expenditure

355-E Notional deductions etc. for decline in value of depreciating assets used for R&D activities

355-F Integrity Rules

355-G Clawback of R&D recoupments, feedstock adjustments and balancing adjustments

355-H Catch up deductions for balancing adjustment events for assets used for R&D activities

355-I Application to earlier income year R&D expenditure incurred to associates

355-J Application to R&D partnerships

355-K Application to Cooperative Research Centres

355-W Other matters

Guide to Division 355

355-1 What this Division is about

An R&D entity may be entitled to a tax offset for R&D activities. The tax offset may be a refundable tax offset if the R&D entity’s aggregated turnover is less than $20 million.

To be entitled to the tax offset, the R&D entity needs one or more notional deductions under this Division.

There are 2 main kinds of notional deductions. One is for expenditure on R&D activities. The other is for the decline in value of tangible depreciating assets used for R&D activities.

Note: All of these notional deductions require the R&D entity to be registered for the R&D activities under Part III of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986.

Subdivision 355-A — Object

355-5 Object

The object of this Division is to encourage industry to conduct research and development activities that might otherwise not be conducted because of an uncertain return from the activities, in cases where the knowledge gained is likely to benefit the wider Australian economy.

This object is to be achieved by providing a tax incentive for industry to conduct, in a scientific way, experimental activities for the purpose of generating new knowledge or information in either a general or applied form (including new knowledge in the form of new or improved materials, products, devices, processes or services).

Subdivision 355-B — Meaning of R&D activities and other terms

355-20 R&D activities

R&D activities are *core R&D activities or *supporting R&D activities.

355-25 Core R&D activities

Core R&D activities

(1) Core R&D activities are experimental activities:

whose outcome cannot be known or determined in advance on the basis of current knowledge, information or experience, but can only be determined by applying a systematic progression of work that:

is based on principles of established science; and

proceeds from hypothesis to experiment, observation and evaluation, and leads to logical conclusions; and

that are conducted for the purpose of generating new knowledge (including new knowledge in the form of new or improved materials, products, devices, processes or services).

Activities that are not core R&D activities

(2) However, none of the following activities are core R&D activities:

market research, market testing or market development, or sales promotion (including consumer surveys);

prospecting, exploring or drilling for minerals or petroleum for the purposes of one or more of the following:

discovering deposits;

determining more precisely the location of deposits;

determining the size or quality of deposits;

management studies or efficiency surveys;

research in social sciences, arts or humanities;

commercial, legal and administrative aspects of patenting, licensing or other activities;

activities associated with complying with statutory requirements or standards, including one or more of the following:

maintaining national standards;

calibrating secondary standards;

routine testing and analysis of materials, components, products, processes, soils, atmospheres and other things;

any activity related to the reproduction of a commercial product or process:

by a physical examination of an existing system; or

from plans, blueprints, detailed specifications or publicly available information;

developing, modifying or customising computer software for the dominant purpose of use by any of the following entities for their internal administration (including the internal administration of their business functions):

(i) the entity (the developer) for which the software is developed, modified or customised;

an entity *connected with the developer;

an affiliate of the developer, or an entity of which the developer is an affiliate;

an activity that relates to any of the following, unless the activity is covered by subsection (3) (harm minimisation purpose):

(i) a gambling service (within the meaning of the Interactive Gambling Act 2001);

gambling;

a gambling-like practice;

an activity that relates to any of the following, unless the activity is covered by subsection (4) (harm minimisation purpose):

tobacco (see subsections (5) and (6));

(ii) a tobacco product (as defined in section 9 of the Public Health (Tobacco and Other Products) Act 2023);

(iii) a tobacco product accessory (as defined in section 10 of the Public Health (Tobacco and Other Products) Act 2023);

(iv) a vaping good (as defined in section 41P of the Therapeutic Goods Act 1989);

tobacco extract;

goods where tobacco or tobacco extract is used or added during the manufacturing or processing of the goods (whether or not tobacco or tobacco extract remains in the goods);

(vii) goods containing nicotine that are intended for use or consumption by humans, other than food in which the only nicotine is naturally occurring.

Harm minimisation purpose

(3) An activity is covered by this subsection if the activity is conducted solely for the purpose of generating new knowledge about minimising harm from gambling services (within the meaning of the Interactive Gambling Act 2001), gambling or gambling-like practices, in relation to a person or the Australian community.

An activity is covered by this subsection if the activity is conducted solely for the purpose of:

(a) generating new knowledge about the therapeutic use (within the meaning of the Therapeutic Goods Act 1989) of therapeutic goods (within the meaning of that Act) for minimising harm from a thing mentioned in any of subparagraphs (2)(j)(i) to (vii); or

generating new knowledge about ceasing the ingestion or transfer of nicotine into the human body.

Things treated as tobacco

For the purposes of this section, treat as tobacco any thing (including moisture) added to the tobacco leaf during manufacturing or processing.

To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this section:

treat tobacco seed, tobacco plant (whether or not in the ground) and tobacco leaf as tobacco; and

treat cigars, cigarettes and snuff as tobacco.

355-30 Supporting R&D activities

(1) Supporting R&D activities are activities directly related to *core R&D activities.

However, if an activity:

is an activity referred to in subsection 355-25(2); or

produces goods or services; or

is directly related to producing goods or services;

the activity is a supporting R&D activity only if it is undertaken for the dominant purpose of supporting *core R&D activities.

Gambling and tobacco related activities etc.

If an activity relates to a matter or thing referred to in any of subparagraphs 355-25(2)(i)(i) to (iii) (which deal with gambling etc.):

subsection (2) does not apply to the activity; and

(b) despite subsection (1), the activity is a supporting R&D activity only if it is covered by subsection 355-25(3) (harm minimisation purpose).

If an activity relates to a thing referred to in any of subparagraphs 355-25(2)(j)(i) to (vii) (which deal with tobacco and vaping goods etc.):

subsection (2) does not apply to the activity; and

(b) despite subsection (1), the activity is a supporting R&D activity only if it is covered by subsection 355-25(4) (harm minimisation purpose).

355-35 R&D entities

(1) Each of the following is an R&D entity:

a body corporate incorporated under an Australian law;

a body corporate incorporated under a foreign law that is an Australian resident.

Note: Each of the above paragraphs extends to a body corporate acting in its capacity as trustee of a public trading trust (see subsection 102T(9) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

A body corporate incorporated under a foreign law that:

is a resident of a foreign country for the purposes of an agreement in force between that country and Australia that:

(i) is a double tax agreement (as defined in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

(ii) includes a definition of permanent establishment; and

carries on business in Australia through a permanent establishment (within the meaning of that definition) of the body corporate in Australia;

is an R&D entity to the extent that it carries on business through that permanent establishment.

(3) However, an *exempt entity cannot be an R&D entity.

Subdivision 355-C — Entitlement to tax offset

355-100 Entitlement to tax offset

If notional deductions are between $20,000 and $150 million

An *R&D entity is entitled to a tax offset for an income year equal to the percentage, set out in the table, of the total of the amounts (if any) that the entity can deduct for the income year under any or all of the following provisions:

section 355-205 (R&D expenditure);

section 355-305 (decline in value of R&D assets);

section 355-480 (earlier year associate R&D expenditure);

section 355-520 (decline in value of R&D partnership assets);

section 355-580 (CRC contributions).

Note 1: The tax offset will be a refundable tax offset if item 1 of the table applies (see section 67-30).

Note 2: The tax offset is increased under subsection (1A) of this section if item 2 or 3 of the table applies.

R&D premium

If item 2 or 3 of the table in subsection (1) applies to the *R&D entity, the amount of the tax offset for the income year is increased by the sum of the amounts (if any) worked out for each item of the following table for that entity:

If notional deductions are less than $20,000

However, if the total amount mentioned in subsection (1) is less than $20,000, the *R&D entity is instead entitled to a tax offset for the income year, worked out in accordance with subsections (1) and (1A), as if that amount were instead the total of the following kinds of expenditure (if any):

If notional deductions exceed $150 million

Despite subsections (1) and (1A), if the total amount mentioned in subsection (1) exceeds $150 million, the *R&D entity is instead entitled to a tax offset for the income year equal to the sum of:

the amount worked out in accordance with those subsections as if that amount were $150 million; and

the product of the excess and the R&D entity’s *corporate tax rate for the income year.

355-105 Deductions under this Division are notional only

(1) An amount (the notional amount) that an *R&D entity can deduct under this Division is disregarded except for the purposes of:

working out whether the R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to a tax offset; and

a provision (of this Act or any other Act) that refers to an entitlement of the R&D entity under section 355-100 to a tax offset; and

a provision (of this Act or any other Act) that:

prevents some or all of the notional amount from being deducted; or

changes the income year for which some or all of the notional amount can be deducted; and

Note: Examples are Divisions 26 and 27 of this Act, Subdivision H of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 and Part IVA of that Act.

a provision (of this Act or any other Act) that includes an amount in assessable income wholly or partly because of the notional amount; and

Note: An example is Subdivision 20-A, which may include in assessable income a recoupment of a loss or outgoing if the entity can deduct an amount for the loss or outgoing.

a provision (of this Act or any other Act) that excludes expenditure from:

the *cost base or reduced cost base of a *CGT asset; or

an element of that cost base or reduced cost base.

Note: An example is section 110-45, which may exclude deductible expenditure from elements of the cost base of an asset.

Subsection (1) does not apply to amounts that the *R&D entity can deduct under the following:

subsection 355-315(2);

subsection 355-475(1);

subsection 355-525(2).

355-110 Notional deductions include prepaid expenditure

For the purposes of this Division, if:

(a) apart from Subdivision H (prepaid expenditure) of Division 3 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, an *R&D entity can deduct an amount under section 355-205 or 355-480 for an income year (the present year) or an earlier income year; and

that Subdivision applies to the calculation of that amount; and

the entity can deduct an amount, as a result of that application of that Subdivision, for the present year;

the entity is taken to be able to deduct under section 355-205 or 355-480 (as appropriate) the amount referred to in paragraph (c) for the present year.

Note: Section 355-205 is about deductions for R&D expenditure. Section 355-480 is about deductions for earlier year associate R&D expenditure.

355-115 Working out an R&D entity’s total expenses

For the purposes of subsection 355-100(1A), an *R&D entity’s total expenses for an income year is the sum of the amounts covered by subsection (2).

The following amounts are covered by this subsection:

the *R&D entity’s total expenses for the income year worked out in accordance with:

the *accounting principles; or

if accounting principles do not apply in relation to the R&D entity—commercially accepted principles relating to accounting;

any amount the R&D entity can deduct for the income year as mentioned in subsection 355-100(1), to the extent the amount is not covered by paragraph (a) for the income year.

Amounts counted once only

For the purposes of subsection (2):

disregard an amount to which paragraph (2)(a) otherwise applies if paragraph (2)(b) has previously applied in relation to the amount; and

disregard an amount to which paragraph (2)(b) otherwise applies if paragraph (2)(a) has previously applied in relation to the amount.

Subdivision 355-D — Notional deductions for R&D expenditure

355-200 What this Subdivision is about

An R&D entity can notionally deduct its expenditure on registered R&D activities for which certain conditions are met.

There are special conditions for R&D activities conducted for foreign residents.

355-205 When notional deductions for R&D expenditure arise

(1) An *R&D entity can deduct for an income year (the present year) expenditure it incurs during that year to the extent that the expenditure:

is incurred on one or more *R&D activities:

(i) for which the R&D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for an income year; and

that are activities to which section 355-210 (conditions for R&D activities) applies; and

if the expenditure is incurred to the R&D entity’s associate—is paid to that associate during the present year.

Note 1: If the matters in subparagraphs (a)(i) and (ii) are not satisfied until a later income year, the R&D entity will need to wait until then before it can deduct the expenditure for the present year.

Note 2: The R&D activities will need to be conducted during the income year the R&D entity is registered for those activities (see sections 27A and 27J of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986).

Note 3: The entity may also be able to deduct expenditure incurred to an associate in an earlier income year (see section 355-480).

Note 4: Expenditure incurred in income years starting on or after 1 July 2011 may be deductible for activities registered for income years starting before 1 July 2011 (see section 355-200 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

This section has effect subject to section 355-225 (excluded expenditure), Subdivision 355-F (integrity rules) and subsection 355-580(3) (CRC contributions).

355-210 Conditions for R&D activities

An *R&D activity covered by one or more of the following paragraphs is an activity to which this section applies:

the R&D activity is conducted for the *R&D entity solely within Australia;

if the R&D entity is a body corporate carrying on business through a permanent establishment (as described in subsection 355-35(2))—the R&D activity is conducted:

for the body corporate; but

not for the purposes of that permanent establishment;

and the conditions in section 355-215 (activities conducted for a body corporate by its permanent establishment) are met for the R&D activity;

the R&D activity is conducted for one or more foreign residents who are each:

incorporated under a foreign law; and

a resident of a foreign country for the purposes of an agreement of a kind described in subsection 355-35(2);

and the conditions in section 355-220 (activities conducted for a foreign entity) are met for the R&D activity;

the R&D activity is:

conducted for the R&D entity solely outside Australia; and

(ii) covered by a finding in force under paragraph 28C(1)(a) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986;

the R&D activity consists of several parts, with:

some parts being conducted for the R&D entity solely within Australia; and

(ii) the other parts being conducted for the R&D entity outside Australia while covered by a finding in force under paragraph 28C(1)(a) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986.

Note: An activity can be covered by a finding under paragraph 28C(1)(a) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 if the activity cannot be conducted in Australia.

However, an *R&D activity is not an activity to which this section applies if the activity is conducted, to a significant extent, for one or more other entities not covered by any paragraph of subsection (1).

Note: An entity would not be covered by, for example, paragraph (1)(c) if the conditions in section 355-220 were not met for the R&D activity in relation to that entity.

355-215 R&D activities conducted by a permanent establishment for other parts of the body corporate

For the purposes of paragraph 355-210(1)(b), the conditions for an *R&D activity are as follows:

the R&D activity is conducted solely within Australia;

if the R&D activity is a *supporting R&D activity, each corresponding *core R&D activity must be:

an activity conducted, or to be conducted, solely within Australia; and

(ii) an activity for which the *R&D entity is or has been registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986, or could be registered for an income year if that core R&D activity were conducted during the income year;

there is written evidence that the R&D activity is conducted for the body corporate but not for the purposes of that permanent establishment.

Note: The body corporate is the R&D entity to the extent that it carries on business through that permanent establishment (see subsection 355-35(2)).

355-220 R&D activities conducted for a foreign entity

For the purposes of paragraph 355-210(1)(c), the conditions for an *R&D activity conducted for one or more foreign residents are as follows:

the R&D activity is conducted solely within Australia;

if the R&D activity is a *supporting R&D activity, each corresponding *core R&D activity must be:

an activity conducted, or to be conducted, solely within Australia; and

(ii) an activity for which the *R&D entity is or has been registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986, or could be registered for an income year if that core R&D activity were conducted during the income year;

when the R&D activity is conducted:

each foreign resident is *connected with the R&D entity; or

for each foreign resident—either the foreign resident is an affiliate of the R&D entity or the R&D entity is an affiliate of the foreign resident;

the R&D activity is conducted:

in accordance with a written agreement binding on only the R&D entity and each foreign resident; and

either directly by the R&D entity, or indirectly by another entity under an agreement binding on the R&D entity;

the R&D activity is not conducted in connection with an agreement covered by subsection (2).

Note: An example of conducting an R&D activity indirectly under a contract is conducting the R&D activity under a subcontract, or one of a chain of subcontracts, under the contract.

An agreement is covered by this subsection if:

(a) the agreement is binding on the R&D entity (the first entity) and an R&D entity that:

is *connected with the first entity; or

has the first entity as an affiliate, or is an affiliate of the first entity;

while the *R&D activity is conducted; and

the R&D activity is to be conducted under the agreement by the first entity or by an entity:

who is not bound by the agreement; and

who is to conduct the R&D activity directly or indirectly under another agreement to which the first entity is, or will become, bound.

Note: One effect of this subsection is that, even if the R&D entity has an agreement with the foreign resident for conducting the R&D activity, the R&D entity cannot deduct expenditure incurred:

for conducting the R&D activity as a subcontractor under a subcontract with an affiliated R&D entity; or

if the R&D entity is a subcontractor to an affiliated R&D entity—for further subcontracting the conducting of the R&D activity.

355-225 Expenditure that cannot be notionally deducted

Expenditure on buildings, certain assets and interest

Sections 355-205 (deductions for R&D expenditure) and 355-480 (deductions for earlier year associate R&D expenditure) do not apply to the following expenditure:

expenditure incurred to acquire or construct:

a building or a part of a building; or

an extension, alteration or improvement to a building;

expenditure included in the *cost of a tangible depreciating asset for the purposes of Division 40 (as that Division applies as described in section 355-310 or otherwise);

(c) expenditure incurred for interest (within the meaning of Division 11A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) payable to an entity.

Note 1: Expenditure covered by paragraph (a) may be deductible under Division 43 (capital works).

Note 2: The decline in value of an asset covered by paragraph (b) may be notionally deductible under section 355-305.

Note 3: Expenditure covered by paragraph (c) may be deductible under section 8-1.

Expenditure on core technology

Sections 355-205 (deductions for R&D expenditure) and 355-480 (deductions for earlier year associate R&D expenditure) do not apply to expenditure incurred in acquiring, or in acquiring the right to use, technology wholly or partly for the purposes of one or more *R&D activities if:

a purpose of the R&D activities was or is:

to obtain new knowledge based on that technology; or

to create new or improved materials, products, devices, processes, techniques or services to be based on that technology; or

the R&D activities were or are an extension, continuation, development or completion of the activities that produced that technology.

Subdivision 355-E — Notional deductions etc. for decline in value of depreciating assets used for R&D activities

355-300 What this Subdivision is about

An R&D entity can notionally deduct the decline in value of a tangible depreciating asset used for R&D activities.

If a balancing adjustment event later happens for the asset, the R&D entity may be able to actually deduct a further amount. Alternatively, an amount may be included in the R&D entity’s assessable income.

355-305 When notional deductions for decline in value arise

If:

(a) an *R&D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for an income year (the present year) for one or more *R&D activities that are activities to which section 355-210 (conditions for R&D activities) applies; and

while a tangible depreciating asset is *held by the R&D entity during the present year, the asset is used for the purpose of conducting one or more of those R&D activities; and

the R&D entity could deduct an amount under section 40-25 for the asset for the present year if Division 40 applied with the changes described in section 355-310; and

the R&D entity cannot deduct an amount for the asset for:

an earlier income year under Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities); or

an earlier income year under Division 40 (as that Division applies apart from this Division), in a case where section 40-440 (low-value pools) applied;

the R&D entity can deduct the amount referred to in paragraph (c) for the present year.

This section has effect subject to subsection 355-580(4) (CRC contributions).

355-310 Notional application of Division 40

In addition to its application apart from this section, Division 40 also applies with the changes set out in this section for the purposes of:

paragraph 355-225(1)(b) (excluded expenditure); and

paragraph 355-305(1)(c); and

section 355-315 (balancing adjustments).

Firstly, substitute the following for references to a taxable purpose in Subdivisions 40-A to 40-D (other than for the purposes of sections 40-100, 40-105 and 40-110):

Note: Sections 40-100, 40-105 and 40-110 are about working out an asset’s effective life. Those sections already refer to the use of the asset for R&D activities.

(3) Secondly, assume that Division 40 does not apply to a building, nor to an extension, alteration or improvement to a building, (the building works) for which the *R&D entity:

can deduct amounts under Division 43 (capital works); or

could deduct amounts under Division 43:

apart from expenditure being incurred, or the building works being started, before a particular day; or

had the R&D entity used the building works for a purpose relevant to those building works under section 43-140 (using an area in a deductible way).

Finally, assume that the following provisions had not been enacted:

subsection 40-25(7) (meaning of taxable purpose);

subsection 40-45(2) (assets to which Division 40 does not apply);

section 40-425 (low-value pools);

Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities).

Note: Subsection (3) and paragraph (4)(b) mean that deductions under section 355-305 may be available for capital works other than building works.

355-315 Balancing adjustments—assets only used for R&D activities

This section applies to an *R&D entity if:

(a) a *balancing adjustment event happens in an income year (the event year) for an asset *held by the R&D entity; and

the R&D entity cannot deduct an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from:

this Division; and

(ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

for the asset for an income year; and

(c) the R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R&D deductions) under section 355-305 for the asset; and

(d) the entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R&D activities for the event year; and

if Division 40 applied with the changes described in section 355-310:

the entity could deduct for the event year an amount under subsection 40-285(2) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event; or

an amount would be included in the entity’s assessable income for the event year under subsection 40-285(1) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

Note 1: This section applies in a modified way if the entity also has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-320 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Note 2: Section 40-292 applies if the entity can deduct an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

If the *R&D entity could deduct for the event year an amount under subsection 40-285(2) for the asset and the event if Division 40 applied as described in paragraph (1)(e), the R&D entity can deduct that amount for the event year.

Note 1: A deduction under this subsection is not a notional deduction (see subsection 355-105(2)).

Note 2: A deduction under this subsection results in a catch up amount for the R&D entity (see section 355-465).

If an amount would be included in the *R&D entity’s assessable income for the event year under subsection 40-285(1) for the asset and the event if Division 40 applied as described in paragraph (1)(e), that amount is included in the R&D entity’s assessable income for the event year.

Note: Some or all of the amount included in the R&D entity’s assessable income may result in a clawback amount for the R&D entity (see section 355-446).

Subdivision 355-F — Integrity Rules

355-400 Expenditure incurred while not at arm’s length

If:

an *R&D entity incurs expenditure to another entity on all or part of an *R&D activity; and

either:

when the R&D entity incurs the expenditure, the R&D entity and the other entity do not deal with each other at *arm’s length; or

the other entity is the R&D entity’s associate; and

the expenditure exceeds the *market value of the relevant R&D activity or part (as appropriate);

for the purposes of this Division, the R&D entity is treated as if the amount of expenditure it incurred on the relevant R&D activity or part (as appropriate) were equal to that market value.

Note: For the purposes of a deduction under section 355-305 or 355-520 for an asset’s decline in value, the arm’s length rules in Division 40 apply as part of the notional application of that Division under that section.

355-405 Expenditure not at risk

An *R&D entity cannot deduct expenditure under section 355-205 or 355-480 if:

when it incurs the expenditure, the R&D entity or its associate had received, or could reasonably be expected to receive, consideration:

as a direct or indirect result of the expenditure being incurred; and

regardless of the results of the activities on which the expenditure is incurred; and

that consideration is equal to or greater than the expenditure.

Note: Section 355-205 is about deductions for R&D expenditure. Section 355-480 is about deductions for earlier year associate R&D expenditure.

If:

when an *R&D entity incurs expenditure, the R&D entity or its associate had received, or could reasonably be expected to receive, consideration:

as a direct or indirect result of the expenditure being incurred; and

regardless of the results of the activities on which the expenditure is incurred; and

that consideration is less than the expenditure;

the R&D entity cannot deduct under section 355-205 or 355-480 so much of the expenditure as is equal to the consideration.

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(a) and (2)(a), have regard to:

anything that happened or existed before or at the time the expenditure is incurred; and

anything that is likely to happen or exist after that time.

This section does not apply to expenditure incurred on *R&D activities covered by paragraph 355-210(1)(b) or (c).

Note: Those paragraphs cover R&D activities conducted for foreign residents.

355-410 Disposal of R&D results

This section applies to an *R&D entity if:

the R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to a tax offset because it can:

deduct under section 355-205 or 355-480 expenditure incurred on *R&D activities; or

(ii) deduct under section 355-305 or 355-520 an amount for an asset (the R&D asset) used for the purpose of conducting one or more R&D activities; and

(b) the R&D entity receives or becomes entitled to receive one or more of the following amounts (the results amounts) in an income year (the results year):

an amount for the results of any of the R&D activities;

an amount from granting access to, or the right to use, any of those results;

an amount attributable to the R&D entity having incurred the expenditure, including an amount it is entitled to receive regardless of the results of the R&D activities;

an amount attributable to the R&D asset being used for the purpose mentioned in subparagraph (a)(ii), including an amount the R&D entity is entitled to receive regardless of the results of the R&D activities;

an amount from *disposing of a CGT asset, or from granting a right to occupy or use a CGT asset, where the disposal or grant resulted in another person acquiring a right to access or use any of those results.

Note: This section also applies with changes to the partners of an R&D partnership (see section 355-535).

For each results amount, the following amount is included in the *R&D entity’s assessable income for the results year:

if the results amount is only a results amount because of subparagraph (1)(b)(v), and the asset referred to in that subparagraph is a depreciating asset—an amount equal to the extent (if any) that the results amount exceeds the asset’s *cost just before the disposal or grant;

if the results amount is only a results amount because of subparagraph (1)(b)(v), and the asset referred to in that subparagraph is not a depreciating asset—an amount equal to the extent (if any) that the results amount exceeds the asset’s *cost base just before the disposal or grant;

otherwise—the results amount.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), assume that subsection 40-45(2) did not, except in the case of buildings and extensions, alterations and improvements to buildings, prevent Division 40 from applying to certain capital works.

355-415 Reducing deductions to reflect mark-ups within groups

This section applies to an *R&D entity if:

the R&D entity can deduct an amount under section 355-205 or 355-480 for an income year for one or more *R&D activities; and

(b) one or more other entities (the grouped entities) incurred expenditure during the income year, or an earlier income year, on one or more of those *R&D activities; and

when each grouped entity incurred the expenditure:

the grouped entity was *connected with the R&D entity; or

the grouped entity was an affiliate of the R&D entity or the R&D entity was an affiliate of the grouped entity.

Note: Section 355-205 is about deductions for R&D expenditure. Section 355-480 is about deductions for earlier year associate R&D expenditure.

Reducing deductions by group mark-ups

(2) The amount the *R&D entity can deduct, apart from this section, under section 355-205 or 355-480 for the income year is reduced by the amount (the reduction amount) worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. For each grouped entity, work out the sum of the amounts derived during the income year, or an earlier income year, by the grouped entity for goods or services relating to one or more of the *R&D activities while:

the grouped entity was *connected with the *R&D entity; or

the grouped entity was an affiliate of the R&D entity or the R&D entity was an affiliate of the grouped entity.

Step 2. From the sum of those amounts, subtract the actual cost to each grouped entity of providing the goods or services that correspond to those amounts.

If R&D entity has deductions for both R&D expenditure and earlier year associate R&D expenditure

However, if the *R&D entity can deduct amounts under both sections 355-205 and 355-480 for the income year, those amounts are reduced as follows:

apply the reduction amount to reduce the amount otherwise deductible under section 355-205 (but not below zero); and

then apply any remainder of the reduction amount to reduce the amount otherwise deductible under section 355-480 (but not below zero).

Disregard mark-ups already taken into account

For the purposes of step 1 of the method statement in subsection (2), disregard any of the amounts from that step that have already been taken into account under this section for the *R&D entity and the *R&D activities for an earlier income year.

Subdivision 355-G — Clawback of R&D recoupments, feedstock adjustments and balancing adjustments

Guide to Subdivision 355-G

355-430 What this Subdivision is about

An amount is included in an R&D entity’s assessable income if:

the R&D entity receives a recoupment from government of expenditure on R&D activities for which it has obtained tax offsets under this Division; or

the R&D entity can deduct under this Division expenditure on goods, materials or energy used during R&D activities to produce marketable products or products applied to the R&D entity’s own use; or

a balancing adjustment event happens for an asset held by the R&D entity (or an R&D partnership in which the R&D entity is a partner) for which tax offsets have been obtained under this Division and for which an amount is otherwise included in the R&D entity’s (or R&D partnership’s) assessable income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

355-435 When this Subdivision applies

355-440 R&D recoupments

355-445 Feedstock adjustments

355-446 Balancing adjustments for assets only used for R&D activities

355-447 Balancing adjustments for assets partially used for R&D activities

355-448 Balancing adjustments for R&D partnership assets only used for R&D activities

355-449 Balancing adjustments for R&D partnership assets partially used for R&D activities

355-450 Amount to be included in assessable income

Operative provisions

355-435 When this Subdivision applies

This Subdivision applies to an *R&D entity for an income year (the present year) if:

(a) the R&D entity has an amount (a clawback amount) under section 355-440, 355-445, 355-446, 355-447, 355-448 or 355-449 for the present year; and

(b) the R&D entity has received, or is entitled to receive, a *tax offset under section 355-100 for one or more income years (each an offset year) in relation to that clawback amount.

355-440 R&D recoupments

The *R&D entity has an amount under this section if:

the entity, or another entity mentioned in subsection (5), receives or becomes entitled to receive a recoupment from either of the following (otherwise than under the CRC program):

an *Australian government agency;

(ii) an STB (within the meaning of Division 1AB of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

the recoupment is received, or the entitlement to receive the recoupment arises, during the present year; and

either:

the recoupment is of expenditure incurred on or in relation to certain activities; or

(ii) the recoupment requires expenditure (the project expenditure) to have been incurred, or to be incurred, on certain activities.

Note: Paragraph (c) includes expenditure incurred in purchasing a tangible depreciating asset to be used when conducting R&D activities.

The amount is equal to the sum of:

so much of the expenditure referred to in subsection (1) that is deducted under this Division; and

for each asset (if any) for which expenditure referred to in subsection (1) is included in the asset’s *cost—each amount (if any) equal to the asset’s decline in value that is deducted under this Division;

that is taken into account in working out *tax offsets under section 355-100 obtained by the *R&D entity for one or more income years.

Amount is reduced by any repayments of the recoupment

Note: Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this subsection refer to amounts notionally deducted under this Division (see section 355-105).

For the purposes of subsection (2), reduce the expenditure referred to in subparagraph (1)(c)(i) by any repayments of the recoupment during an income year.

Cap on extra income tax if recoupment relates to a project

Despite subsection (2), if the recoupment is covered by subparagraph (1)(c)(ii), the amount mentioned in subsection (2) for the present year cannot exceed the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

net amount of the recoupment means the total amount of the *recoupment, less any repayments of the recoupment during an income year.

R&D expenditure means the amount mentioned in subsection (2), disregarding subsection (3).

Related entities

The other entities for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) are as follows:

an entity *connected with the *R&D entity;

an affiliate of the R&D entity or an entity of which the R&D entity is an affiliate.

355-445 Feedstock adjustments

The *R&D entity has an amount under this section if:

(a) it incurs expenditure in one or more income years in acquiring or producing goods, or materials, (the feedstock inputs) transformed or processed during *R&D activities in producing one or more tangible products (the feedstock outputs); and

(b) it obtains under section 355-100 *tax offsets for one or more income years (each an offset year) for deductions under this Division:

for the expenditure; or

for expenditure it incurs on any energy input directly into the transformation or processing; or

for the decline in value of assets used in acquiring or producing the feedstock inputs; and

(c) during the present year, a feedstock output, or a transformed feedstock output, (the marketable product), is:

*supplied by the R&D entity to another entity; or

applied by the R&D entity to the R&D entity’s own use, other than use for the purpose of transforming that product for supply.

The amount is equal to the lesser of:

the feedstock revenue for the feedstock output; and

so much of the total of the amounts deducted as described in paragraph (1)(b) as is reasonably attributable to the production of the feedstock output.

Subsection (2) does not apply to the feedstock output if:

it becomes, or is transformed into, a feedstock input; or

that subsection already applies to the feedstock output because of the application of paragraph (1)(c) to:

an earlier time during the present year; or

an earlier income year.

(4) The feedstock revenue, for the feedstock output, is worked out using the following formula:

where:

market value of the marketable product means the marketable product’s *market value at the time it is:

*supplied by the *R&D entity to the other entity; or

first applied by the R&D entity to the R&D entity’s own use, other than use for the purpose of transforming that product for supply.

This section applies to a supply or use of the marketable product by:

an entity *connected with the *R&D entity; or

an affiliate of the R&D entity or an entity of which the R&D entity is an affiliate;

as if it were by the R&D entity.

355-446 Balancing adjustments for assets only used for R&D activities

The *R&D entity has an amount under this section if:

a balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R&D entity; and

the R&D entity cannot deduct, for the asset for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 as that section applies apart from:

this Division; and

(ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-305 for the asset; and

(d) the R&D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R&D activities for the present year; and

(e) an amount (the section 40-285 amount) is included in the R&D entity’s assessable income for the present year under subsection 355-315(3) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

Note 1: This section applies in a modified way if the entity also has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-320 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Note 2: Section 40-292 applies if the entity can deduct an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The amount is so much of an amount equal to the section 40-285 amount as does not exceed the difference between:

the asset’s *cost; and

the asset’s *adjustable value, worked out under Division 40 as if that Division applied with the changes described in section 355-310.

355-447 Balancing adjustments for assets partially used for R&D activities

The *R&D entity has an amount under this section if:

a balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R&D entity and for which:

(i) the R&D entity can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

the R&D entity could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if the R&D entity had used the asset; and

(b) the R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R&D deductions) under section 355-305 for the asset; and

(c) an amount (the section 40-285 amount) is included in the R&D entity’s assessable income for the asset under section 40-285 (after applying subsection 40-292(2)) for the present year.

Note: This section applies in a modified way if you have deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-292 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

The amount is worked out as follows:

where:

adjusted section 40-285 amount means so much of an amount equal to the section 40-285 amount as does not exceed the total decline in value.

total decline in value means the *cost of the asset less its *adjustable value.

355-448 Balancing adjustments for R&D partnership assets only used for R&D activities

(1) The *R&D entity (the partner) has an amount under this section if:

the partner is a partner in an *R&D partnership; and

a balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R&D partnership; and

the R&D partnership cannot deduct, for the asset for an income year, an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from:

this Division; and

(ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the partner is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-520 for the asset; and

(e) the partner is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R&D activities for the present year; and

(f) an amount (the section 40-285 amount) would, as mentioned in subsection 355-525(3), be included in the R&D partnership’s assessable income for the present year for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

Note 1: This section applies in a modified way if the partner has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-325 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Note 2: Section 40-293 applies if the R&D partnership can deduct an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The amount is the partner’s proportion of the amount that is so much of an amount equal to the section 40-285 amount as does not exceed the difference between:

the asset’s *cost; and

the asset’s *adjustable value, worked out under Division 40 as if that Division applied with the changes described in section 355-310.

355-449 Balancing adjustments for R&D partnership assets partially used for R&D activities

(1) The *R&D entity (the partner) has an amount under this section if:

(a) the partner is a partner in an *R&D partnership; and

a balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for a depreciating asset *held by the R&D partnership and for which:

(i) the R&D partnership can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

the R&D partnership could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if it had used the asset; and

one or more partners (including the partner) in the R&D partnership are entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-520 for the asset; and

(d) an amount (the section 40-285 amount) is included in the R&D partnership’s assessable income for the asset under section 40-285 (after applying subsection 40-293(2)) for the present year.

The amount is the partner’s proportion of the amount worked out as follows:

where:

adjusted section 40-285 amount means so much of an amount equal to the section 40-285 amount as does not exceed the total decline in value.

total decline in value means the *cost of the asset less its *adjustable value.

total R&D deductions means the sum of each partner’s deductions mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) of this section.

355-450 Amount to be included in assessable income

The *R&D entity must include, in the entity’s assessable income for the present year, the sum of the following amounts for each offset year relating to the clawback amount:

where:

adjusted offset means the *tax offset the R&D entity would have received under section 355-100 for the offset year if the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) for that tax offset were reduced by the portion of the clawback amount that is attributable to the offset year.

deduction amount means the portion of the clawback amount that is attributable to the offset year, multiplied by the R&D entity’s *corporate tax rate for the offset year.

starting offset means the amount of the *tax offset the R&D entity has received, or is entitled to receive, under section 355-100 for the offset year.

However, if this section, or section 355-475, has previously applied (whether in the present year or an earlier income year) in relation to another clawback amount, or catch up amount, the *R&D entity has that relates to the offset year, subsection (1) of this section applies as if:

the starting offset were the tax offset the R&D entity would have received under section 355-100 for the offset year if the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) were:

decreased by the sum of the portions of any such other clawback amounts that are attributable to the offset year; and

increased by the sum of the portions of any such other catch up amounts that are attributable to the offset year; and

(b) the reference to the “total amount” in the definition of adjusted offset were a reference to that amount as so adjusted.

Subdivision 355-H — Catch up deductions for balancing adjustment events for assets used for R&D activities

Guide to Subdivision 355-H

355-455 What this Subdivision is about

An R&D entity can deduct an amount under this Subdivision if:

a balancing adjustment event happens for an asset held by the R&D entity (or an R&D partnership in which the R&D entity is a partner); and

tax offsets have been obtained under this Division for deductions for the asset; and

the R&D entity (or the R&D partnership) can otherwise deduct an amount for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

355-460 When this Subdivision applies

355-465 Assets only used for R&D activities

355-466 Assets partially used for R&D activities

355-467 R&D partnership assets only used for R&D activities

355-468 R&D partnership assets partially used for R&D activities

355-475 Amount that can be deducted

Operative provisions

355-460 When this Subdivision applies

This Subdivision applies to an *R&D entity for an income year (the present year) if:

(a) the R&D entity has an amount (a catch up amount) under section 355-465, 355-466, 355-467 or 355-468 for an asset for the present year; and

(b) the R&D entity has received, or is entitled to receive, a *tax offset under section 355-100 for one or more income years (each an offset year) in relation to the asset.

355-465 Assets only used for R&D activities

The *R&D entity has an amount under this section if:

a balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R&D entity; and

the R&D entity cannot deduct, for the asset for an income year, an amount under section 40-25 as that section applies apart from:

this Division; and

(ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-305 for the asset; and

(d) the R&D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R&D activities for the present year; and

the R&D entity can deduct, for the present year, an amount under subsection 355-315(2) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

Note 1: This section applies in a modified way if the entity also has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-320 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Note 2: Section 40-292 applies if the entity can deduct an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The amount is an amount equal to the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(e).

355-466 Assets partially used for R&D activities

The *R&D entity has an amount under this section if:

a balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the R&D entity for which:

(i) the R&D entity can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

the R&D entity could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if the R&D entity had used the asset; and

(b) the R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R&D deductions) under section 355-305 for the asset; and

(c) the R&D entity can deduct an amount (the section 40-285 amount) for the asset under section 40-285 (after applying subsection 40-292(2)) for the present year.

Note: This section applies in a modified way if you have deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-292 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

The amount is worked out as follows:

where:

total decline in value means the *cost of the asset less its *adjustable value.

355-467 R&D partnership assets only used for R&D activities

(1) The *R&D entity (the partner) has an amount under this section if:

the partner is a partner in an *R&D partnership; and

a balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for an asset *held by the *R&D partnership; and

the R&D partnership cannot deduct, for the asset for an income year, an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from:

this Division; and

(ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the partner is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-520 for the asset; and

(e) the partner is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R&D activities for the present year; and

the partner can deduct an amount under subsection 355-525(2) for the present year for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

The amount is an amount equal to the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(f).

355-468 R&D partnership assets partially used for R&D activities

(1) The *R&D entity (the partner) has an amount under this section if:

the partner is a partner in an *R&D partnership; and

a balancing adjustment event happens in the present year for a depreciating asset *held by the R&D partnership and for which:

(i) the R&D partnership can deduct, for an income year, an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from Division 355 and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

the R&D partnership could have deducted, for an income year, an amount as described in subparagraph (i) if it had used the asset; and

one or more partners (including the partner) in the R&D partnership are entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions under section 355-520 for the asset; and

(d) the R&D partnership can deduct an amount (the section 40-285 amount) for the asset under section 40-285 (after applying subsection 40-293(2)) for the present year.

Note: This section applies in a modified way if the partners have deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 40-293 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

The amount is the partner’s proportion of the amount worked out as follows:

where:

total decline in value means the *cost of the asset less its *adjustable value.

total R&D deductions means the sum of each partner’s deductions mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) of this section.

355-475 Amount that can be deducted

The *R&D entity can deduct, for the present year, the sum of the following amounts for each offset year relating to the catch up amount:

where:

adjusted offset means the *tax offset the R&D entity would have received under section 355-100 for the offset year if the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) for that tax offset were increased by the portion of the catch up amount that is attributable to the offset year.

deduction amount means the portion of the catch up amount that is attributable to the offset year, multiplied by the R&D entity’s *corporate tax rate for the offset year.

starting offset means the amount of the *tax offset the R&D entity has received, or is entitled to receive, under section 355-100 for the offset year.

Note: A deduction under this subsection is not a notional deduction: see subsection 355-105(2).

However, if this section, or section 355-450, has previously applied (whether in the present year or an earlier income year) in relation to another catch up amount, or clawback amount, the *R&D entity has that relates to the offset year, subsection (1) of this section applies as if:

the starting offset were the tax offset the R&D entity would have received under section 355-100 for the offset year if the total amount mentioned in subsection 355-100(1) were:

increased by the sum of the portions of any such other catch up amounts that are attributable to the offset year; and

decreased by the sum of the portions of any such other clawback amounts that are attributable to the offset year; and

(b) the reference to the “total amount” in the definition of adjusted offset were a reference to that amount as so adjusted.

Subdivision 355-I — Application to earlier income year R&D expenditure incurred to associates

355-480 Notional deductions for expenditure incurred to associate in earlier income years

Notional deductions for earlier year associate expenditure

(1) An *R&D entity can deduct for an income year (the present year) expenditure it incurred to its *associate during an earlier income year to the extent that:

the expenditure was incurred on one or more *R&D activities:

(i) for which the R&D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for an income year; and

that are activities to which section 355-210 (conditions for R&D activities) applies; and

the expenditure is paid to that associate during the present year; and

subsection (2) applies to the expenditure.

Note 1: This section applies in a modified way to R&D partnership expenditure (see sections 355-510 and 355-515).

Note 2: Expenditure paid in income years starting on or after 1 July 2011 may be deductible for activities registered for income years starting before 1 July 2011 (see section 355-200 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Expenditure cannot have been otherwise deducted etc.

This subsection applies to the expenditure if:

the *R&D entity can deduct the expenditure, or is entitled to a tax offset for the expenditure, under any other Division of this Act for an earlier income year; and

by the time of lodging its income tax return for the most recent income year before the present year, the R&D entity had neither:

deducted the expenditure; nor

obtained a tax offset for the expenditure;

as described in paragraph (a).

The entitlement to the deduction, or tax offset, described in paragraph (2)(a) ceases to the extent that subsection (2) applies to the expenditure.

Example: If, by the time mentioned in paragraph (2)(b), an R&D entity chose to deduct only a third of the expenditure it could have deducted under another Division, then the remaining 2 thirds of that expenditure:

can be deducted under this section; but

can no longer be deducted under the other Division.

Notional deduction is subject to integrity rules etc.

This section has effect subject to section 355-225 (excluded expenditure), Subdivision 355-F (integrity rules) and subsection 355-580(3) (CRC contributions).

Subdivision 355-J — Application to R&D partnerships

355-500 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision modifies the rules in this Division for partners of R&D partnerships.

In particular, the rules about deducting R&D expenditure are modified to allow a partner to deduct the partner’s proportion of the R&D partnership’s expenditure on R&D activities.

A partner of an R&D partnership may also be able to deduct under this Subdivision the decline in value of partnership assets used for R&D activities.

355-505 Meaning of R&D partnership and partner’s proportion

(1) A partnership is an R&D partnership at a particular time if, at that time, each of the partners is an *R&D entity.

(2) For an amount attributable to an *R&D partnership for an income year, each partner of the R&D partnership is taken to bear or be entitled to (as appropriate) this proportion (the partner’s proportion) of the amount:

the proportion the partners agreed the partner should bear or be entitled to (as appropriate); or

if there is no such agreement—the proportion of the partner’s interest in the *net income or partnership loss of the R&D partnership for the income year.

355-510 R&D partnership expenditure on R&D activities

If an *R&D partnership incurs expenditure on one or more R&D activities during an income year, this Division applies in relation to each *R&D entity that is a partner of the R&D partnership at some time during the income year as if:

the partner incurred the partner’s proportion of that expenditure when the R&D partnership incurred that expenditure; and

neither the R&D partnership, nor any other partner of the R&D partnership, incurred expenditure during the income year on the R&D activities; and

such other changes were made to this Division as are appropriate having regard to that partner’s proportion of amounts attributable to the R&D partnership.

Note: This section and section 355-515 may result in:

the partner being able to deduct the partner’s proportion of the partnership expenditure under section 355-205 (R&D expenditure) or 355-480 (earlier year associate R&D expenditure) for the R&D activities; and

the partner being affected by the integrity rules in Subdivisions 355-F, 355-G and 355-H.

355-515 R&D activities conducted by or for an R&D partnership

If one or more *R&D activities are conducted by or for an *R&D partnership during an income year, this Division applies in relation to each *R&D entity that is a partner of the R&D partnership at some time during the income year as if:

the R&D activities were conducted by or for the partner in a corresponding way to the way the R&D activities were conducted by or for the R&D partnership; and

the partner had relationships with other entities in relation to the R&D activities that corresponded to the relationships the R&D partnership had with those other entities in relation to the R&D activities; and

a thing done by, or in relation to, the R&D partnership in relation to the R&D activities were a thing done by, or in relation to, the partner; and

the R&D activities were neither:

conducted by or for the R&D partnership; nor

conducted by or for any other partner of the R&D partnership; and

such other changes were made to this Division as are appropriate having regard to that partner’s proportion of amounts attributable to the R&D partnership.

Note 1: For the purposes of this Division, entities that are associates or affiliates of, or connected with, the R&D partnership are taken to be associates or affiliates of, or connected with, the partner (see paragraph (b)).

Note 2: For the purposes of this Division, payments and agreements made by the R&D partnership for the R&D activities are taken to be made by the partner (see paragraph (c)).

355-520 When notional deductions arise for decline in value of depreciating assets of R&D partnerships

When notional deductions arise

If:

(a) an *R&D entity is a partner of an *R&D partnership at some time during an income year (the present year); and

(b) the partner is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for the present year for one or more *R&D activities that are activities to which section 355-210 (conditions for R&D activities) applies; and

Note: Section 355-210 applies with changes for this paragraph (see section 355-515).

while a tangible depreciating asset is *held by the R&D partnership during the present year, the asset is used for the purpose of conducting one or more of those R&D activities; and

the R&D partnership could deduct an amount under section 40-25 for the asset for the present year if Division 40 applied with the changes described in section 355-310; and

Note: Section 355-310 applies with changes for this paragraph (see subsection (2) of this section).

the R&D partnership cannot deduct an amount for the asset for:

an earlier income year under Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities); or

an earlier income year under Division 40 (as that Division applies apart from this Division), in a case where section 40-440 (low-value pools) applied;

the partner can deduct the partner’s proportion of the amount referred to in paragraph (d) for the present year.

Changed application of Division 40 for this Subdivision

For the purposes of this Subdivision, section 355-310 applies as if the following changes were made:

Disregard certain assets held because of CRC contributions

This section has effect subject to subsection 355-580(4) (CRC contributions).

355-525 Balancing adjustments for R&D partnership assets only used for R&D activities

(1) This section applies to an *R&D entity (the partner) if:

(a) a *balancing adjustment event happens in an income year (the event year) for an asset *held by an *R&D partnership; and

the R&D partnership cannot deduct an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from:

this Division; and

(ii) former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

for the asset for an income year; and

(c) the partner is entitled under section 355-100 to *tax offsets for one or more income years for deductions (the R&D deductions) under section 355-520 for the asset; and

(d) the partner is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for one or more *R&D activities for the event year; and

if Division 40 applied with the changes described in section 355-310 (as affected by subsection 355-520(2)):

the R&D partnership could deduct for the event year an amount under subsection 40-285(2) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event; or

an amount would be included in the R&D partnership’s assessable income for the event year under subsection 40-285(1) for the asset and the balancing adjustment event.

Note 1: This section applies in a modified way if the partner has deductions for the asset under former section 73BA or 73BH of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (see section 355-325 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Note 2: Section 40-293 applies if the R&D partnership can deduct an amount under section 40-25, as that section applies apart from this Division and former section 73BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

If the *R&D partnership could deduct for the event year an amount under subsection 40-285(2) for the asset and the event if Division 40 applied as described in paragraph (1)(e), the partner can deduct the partner’s proportion of that amount for the event year.

Note 1: A deduction under this subsection is not a notional deduction (see subsection 355-105(2)).

Note 2: A deduction under this subsection will result in a catch up amount for the partner (see section 355-467).

If an amount would be included in the *R&D partnership’s assessable income for the event year under subsection 40-285(1) for the asset and the event if Division 40 applied as described in paragraph (1)(e), the partner’s proportion of that amount is included in the partner’s assessable income for the event year.

Note: Some or all of the amount included in the partner’s assessable income may result in a clawback amount for the partner (see section 355-448).

355-530 Implications for partner’s aggregated turnover

For the purposes of section 355-100 (tax offsets for R&D), if:

an *R&D entity is a partner of an *R&D partnership at some time during an income year; and

the partner’s aggregated turnover for the income year does not include the R&D partnership’s annual turnover for the income year;

the partner’s aggregated turnover for the income year includes the *partner’s proportion of the R&D partnership’s annual turnover for the income year.

355-535 Disposal of R&D results for R&D partnerships

In addition to its application apart from this section, section 355-410 (disposal of R&D results) also applies to each partner of an *R&D partnership with such changes as are appropriate having regard to:

(a) amounts (the results amounts) of a kind set out in subparagraphs 355-410(1)(b)(i) to (v) that the R&D partnership receives or becomes entitled to receive in an income year; and

the principle that any amount to be included in the partner’s assessable income for the income year for a results amount should be the partner’s proportion of the amount arising under subsection 355-410(2) for the results amount.

Note: The ordinary application of section 355-410 will apply to any of the partner’s deductions under this Division that do not relate to the R&D partnership.

355-540 Application of recoupment rules

If:

(a) an *R&D partnership incurs expenditure (the partnership expenditure) on *R&D activities; and

(b) an *R&D entity (the partner) is entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset because it can, under section 355-205 or 355-480, deduct some or all of that expenditure; and

the R&D partnership receives an amount as a recoupment of any or all of the partnership expenditure;

the partner is taken, for the purposes of Subdivisions 20-A and 355-G:

to have incurred the partner’s proportion of the partnership expenditure when the R&D partnership incurred that expenditure; and

to have received the partner’s proportion of the recoupment when the R&D partnership received the recoupment.

If:

(a) an *R&D entity (the partner) is entitled under section 355-100 to a *tax offset because it can, under section 355-520, deduct an amount for an income year for an asset; and

the applicable *R&D partnership receives an amount as a recoupment of any or all of the R&D partnership’s expenditure included in the *cost of the asset for the purposes of the application of Division 40 as described in paragraph 355-520(1)(d);

the partner is taken, for the purposes of Subdivisions 20-A and 355-G:

to have incurred the partner’s proportion of that expenditure when the R&D partnership incurred that expenditure; and

to have received the partner’s proportion of the recoupment when the R&D partnership received the recoupment.

355-545 Relevance for net income, and losses, of the R&D partnership

For an *R&D entity that is a partner of an *R&D partnership, none of the following:

any expenditure the R&D entity is taken to have incurred because of this Subdivision;

any amount the R&D entity can deduct under this Subdivision;

any recoupment the R&D entity is taken to have received because of this Subdivision;

are to be taken into account in determining the *net income of the R&D partnership, or any partnership loss of the R&D partnership, for an income year.

Subdivision 355-K — Application to Cooperative Research Centres

355-580 When notional deductions for CRC contributions arise

Monetary contributions are deductible

An *R&D entity can deduct for an income year expenditure it incurs during that year to the extent that:

the expenditure is in the form of monetary contributions under the CRC program; and

(b) the contributions have been or will be spent under the CRC program on one or more *R&D activities for which the R&D entity is registered under section 27A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 for an income year.

Note 1: The R&D activities will need to be conducted during the income year the R&D entity is registered for those activities (see sections 27A and 27J of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986).

Note 2: Expenditure incurred in income years starting on or after 1 July 2011 may be deductible for activities registered for income years starting before 1 July 2011 (see section 355-200 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997).

Subsection (1) does not apply to expenditure to the extent that it is incurred out of Commonwealth funding.

No other deductions arise for monetary contributions etc.

Neither:

a contribution an *R&D entity can deduct under subsection (1); nor

expenditure incurred under the CRC program, to the extent that the expenditure is incurred out of:

a contribution an R&D entity can deduct under subsection (1); or

Commonwealth funding;

can be deducted by any R&D entity under any other provision of this Division for any income year.

If an asset’s *cost includes expenditure incurred under the CRC program out of:

a contribution an *R&D entity can deduct under subsection (1); or

Commonwealth funding;

an amount equal to the asset’s decline in value cannot be deducted under this Division by any R&D entity for any income year.

Subdivision 355-W — Other matters

355-705 Effect of findings by Industry Innovation and Science Australia

Findings about registration or core technology

If:

(a) a certificate given to the Commissioner under the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 sets out:

a finding under section 27B of that Act about an *R&D entity’s application for registration under section 27A of that Act for an income year; or

a finding under section 27J of that Act about an R&D entity’s registration under section 27A of that Act for an income year; or

a finding under section 28E of that Act about an R&D entity and one or more *R&D activities conducted or to be conducted during one or more income years; and

the finding was made within 4 years after the end of the income year or the last of the income years (as appropriate);

the finding binds the Commissioner for the purposes of assessments of the R&D entity for the income year or years (as appropriate).

Advance findings about activities yet to be completed

Note: Section 28E of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 deals with findings that technology is core technology for particular R&D activities. Expenditure incurred in acquiring such technology is not deductible under this Division (see subsection 355-225(2)).

If:

an activity is being conducted, or is yet to be conducted, in an income year; and

(b) an *R&D entity applies in the income year for a finding under section 28A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 about the activity; and

Industry Innovation and Science Australia makes the finding and gives the Commissioner a certificate under that Act setting out the finding;

the finding binds the Commissioner for the purposes of assessments of the R&D entity for the income year and the next 2 income years.

Advance findings about completed activities

However, if:

an activity is completed during an income year; and

(b) an *R&D entity applies in the income year for a finding under section 28A of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 about the activity; and

Industry Innovation and Science Australia makes the finding and gives the Commissioner a certificate under that Act setting out the finding;

the finding binds the Commissioner for the purposes of assessments of the R&D entity for the income year.

355-710 Amendment of assessments

Dealing with findings of Industry Innovation and Science Australia

If:

(a) a certificate given to the Commissioner under the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 sets out:

a finding under section 27B of that Act about an *R&D entity’s application for registration under section 27A of that Act for an income year; or

a finding under section 27J of that Act about an R&D entity’s registration under section 27A of that Act for an income year; or

a finding under section 28A or 28C of that Act made on application by an R&D entity during an income year; or

a finding under section 28E of that Act about an R&D entity and one or more R&D activities conducted or to be conducted during one or more income years; and

the finding was made within 4 years after the end of the income year or the last of the income years (as appropriate);

despite section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the Commissioner may amend the R&D entity’s assessment for an income year affected by the finding at any time for the purposes of giving effect to the finding.

However, the Commissioner may only do so within 2 years after the Commissioner is given the certificate if giving effect to the finding would increase the R&D entity’s liability.

Dealing with key decisions of Industry Innovation and Science Australia and others

If:

(a) an internal review decision (the key decision) under subsection 30D(2) of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 relates to an *R&D entity; or

(b) a decision (also the key decision) under the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024:

varies a decision covered by paragraph (a); or

sets aside a decision covered by paragraph (a), whether or not that key decision also includes a decision made in substitution for the decision covered by paragraph (a); or

(c) a decision (also the key decision) of a court is about:

(i) a decision under Part III of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986 relating to an R&D entity; or

a decision covered by paragraph (b);

despite section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the Commissioner may amend the R&D entity’s assessment for an income year affected by the key decision at any time for the purposes of giving effect to that decision.

(4) For the purposes of subsection (3), paragraph (3)(b) applies as if a reference to a decision under the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024 that varies or sets aside a decision covered by paragraph (3)(a) included a reference to a decision of that kind made under the Administrative Appeals Tribunal Act 1975.

355-715 Implications for other deductions and tax offsets

If an *R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to a tax offset for an income year for expenditure it can deduct under section 355-205, 355-480 or 355-580, that expenditure:

cannot be taken into account by any entity in working out a deduction under any other Division of this Act for any income year; and

cannot be taken into account by any entity in working out a tax offset under any other Division of this Act for any income year.

Note: Section 355-205 is about R&D expenditure, section 355-480 is about earlier year associate R&D expenditure, and section 355-580 is about CRC contributions.

If an *R&D entity is entitled under section 355-100 to a tax offset for an income year for a deduction under section 355-305 or 355-520 of an amount equal to the decline in value of an asset, that decline in value:

cannot be taken into account by any entity in working out a deduction under any other Division of this Act (other than section 40-292 or 40-293) for any income year; and

cannot be taken into account by any entity in working out a tax offset under any other Division of this Act for any income year;

to the extent that the decline in value is attributable to the use of the asset for the purpose of conducting one or more of the *R&D activities to which the deduction relates.

Note 1: A deduction may be available under section 40-25 to the extent that the asset’s decline in value is attributable to another purpose. If so, that deduction under section 40-25 will not take into account the asset’s decline in value to the extent that it is attributable to the R&D activities (see also subsection 40-25(2)).

Note 2: Section 355-305 is about the decline in value of R&D assets and section 355-520 is about the decline in value of R&D partnership assets.

Note 3: Sections 40-292 and 40-293 deal with balancing adjustments when deductions have been available for the asset’s decline in value both under this Division and section 40-25.

Division 360 — Early stage investors in innovation companies

Table of Subdivisions

360-A Tax incentives for early stage investors in innovation companies

Subdivision 360-A — Tax incentives for early stage investors in innovation companies

Guide to Subdivision 360-A

360-5 What this Subdivision is about

You may be entitled to a tax offset if you are, or a trust or partnership of which you are a member is, issued with certain kinds of equity interests in a small Australian company with high-growth potential that is engaging in innovative activities.

A modified CGT treatment may also apply to those equity interests.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

360-10 Object of this Subdivision

360-15 Entitlement to the tax offset

360-20 Limited entitlement for certain kinds of investors

360-25 Amount of the tax offset—general case

360-30 Amount of the tax offset—members of trusts or partnerships

360-35 Amount of the tax offset—trustees

360-40 Early stage innovation companies

360-45 100 point innovation test

360-50 Modified CGT treatment

360-55 Modified CGT treatment—partnerships

360-60 Modified CGT treatment—not affected by certain roll-overs

360-65 Separate modified CGT treatment for roll-overs about wholly-owned companies or scrip for scrip roll-overs

Operative provisions

360-10 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to encourage new investment in small Australian innovation companies with high-growth potential by providing qualifying investors with a tax offset and a modified CGT treatment.

360-15 Entitlement to the tax offset

General case

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

you are none of the following:

a trust or a partnership;

an ESVCLP;

a *widely held company or a *100% subsidiary of a widely held company; and

at a particular time during the income year, a company issues you with *equity interests that are *shares in the company; and

subsection 360-40(1) (about early stage innovation companies) applies to the company immediately after that time; and

neither you nor the company is an affiliate of each other at that time; and

the issue of those shares is not an *acquisition of *ESS interests under an employee share scheme; and

immediately after the issue of those shares, you do not hold equity interests in the company, or in an entity *connected with the company, that carry the right to:

receive more than 30% of any distribution of income by the company or the entity; or

receive more than 30% of any distribution of capital by the company or the entity; or

exercise, or control the exercise of, more than 30% of the total voting power in the company or the entity.

Members of trusts or partnerships

A *member of a trust or partnership (other than a partnership that is an ESVCLP) at the end of an income year is entitled to a tax offset for the income year if:

the trust or partnership would be entitled to a tax offset, under this section, for the income year if the trust or partnership were an individual; and

the member is not a *widely held company or a *100% subsidiary of a widely held company.

Trustees

A trustee of a trust is entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

the trustee would be entitled to a tax offset, under subsection (1), for the income year if the trustee were an individual; and

(b) the trustee is liable to be assessed or has been assessed, and is liable to pay *tax, on a share of, or all or a part of, the trust’s *net income under section 98, 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the income year.

360-20 Limited entitlement for certain kinds of investors

You do not satisfy paragraph 360-15(1)(b) if:

(a) for each offer resulting in *equity interests that are *shares in the company being issued to you during the income year, none of subsections 708(8), (10) or (11) of the Corporations Act 2001 removed the need for a disclosure document; and

a total of more than $50,000 was paid for the issue to you of the shares resulting from all of those offers.

(2) For the purposes of this section, assume that Chapter 6D of the Corporations Act 2001 applies to those offers.

360-25 Amount of the tax offset—general case

If subsection 360-15(1) applies, the amount of your tax offset is 20% of the sum of the following:

an amount equal to any money received, or entitled to be received, by the company referred to in paragraph 360-15(1)(b) for the issue to you of the *shares as described in that paragraph;

an amount equal to the *market value of any *non-cash benefit received, or entitled to be received, by the company referred to in paragraph 360-15(1)(b) for the issue to you of the shares as described in that paragraph, as at the time the shares were issued to you.

However, reduce this amount to the extent necessary to ensure that the sum of the following does not exceed $200,000:

the sum of the *tax offsets under this Subdivision for the income year for which you and your *affiliates (if any) are entitled;

the sum of the tax offsets under this Subdivision that you and your affiliates (if any) carry forward to the income year.

360-30 Amount of the tax offset—members of trusts or partnerships

If subsection 360-15(2) applies, the amount of the *member’s tax offset for the income year is as follows:

where:

determined share of notional tax offset is the percentage determined under subsection (2) for the *member.

notional tax offset amount is what would, under section 360-25, have been the amount of the trust’s or partnership’s *tax offset (the notional tax offset) if the trust or partnership had been an individual.

However, reduce the amount worked out under subsection (1) to the extent necessary to ensure that the sum of the following does not exceed $200,000:

the sum of the *tax offsets under this Subdivision for the income year for which the member and the member’s *affiliates (if any) are entitled;

the sum of the tax offsets under this Subdivision that the member and the member’s affiliates (if any) carry forward to the income year.

The trustee or partnership may determine the percentage of the notional tax offset that is the *member’s share of the notional tax offset.

If, under the terms and conditions under which the trust or partnership operates, the *member would be entitled to a fixed proportion of any *capital gain from a *disposal:

relating to the trust or partnership; and

of the *shares that gave rise to the notional tax offset; and

happening at the end of the income year to which the notional tax offset relates;

the percentage determined under subsection (2) must be equivalent to that fixed proportion, and a determination of any other percentage has no effect.

The trustee or partnership must give the *member written notice of the determination. The notice:

must enable the member to work out the amount of the member’s tax offset by including enough information to enable the member to work out the member’s share of the notional tax offset; and

must be given to the member within 3 months after the end of the income year, or within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

The sum of all the percentages determined under subsection (2) in relation to the *members of the trust or partnership must not exceed 100%.

360-35 Amount of the tax offset—trustees

If subsection 360-15(3) applies, the amount of the tax offset is the difference between:

what would, under section 360-25, have been the amount of the tax offset to which the trustee would have been entitled if the trustee had been an individual; and

if *members of the trust are entitled to tax offsets under subsection 360-15(2) arising from the same *shares to which the trustee’s entitlement arises under subsection 360-15(3)—the sum of the amounts worked out under section 360-30 (disregarding any reductions under subsection 360-30(1A)) for those tax offsets.

360-40 Early stage innovation companies

(1) This subsection applies to a company at a particular time (the test time) in an income year (the current year) if:

the company was:

incorporated in Australia within the last 3 income years (the latest being the current year); or

incorporated in Australia within the last 6 income years (the latest being the current year), and across the last 3 of those income years before the current year it and its *100% subsidiaries (if any) incurred total expenses of $1 million or less; or

registered in the Australian Business Register within the last 3 income years (the latest being the current year); and

the company and its 100% subsidiaries (if any) incurred total expenses of $1 million or less in the income year before the current year; and

the company and its 100% subsidiaries (if any) had a total assessable income of $200,000 or less in the income year before the current year; and

at the test time, none of the company’s *equity interests are listed for quotation in the official list of any stock exchange in Australia or a foreign country; and

at the test time, the company has at least 100 points under section 360-45, or:

the company is genuinely focussed on developing for commercialisation one or more new, or significantly improved, products, processes, services or marketing or organisational methods; and

the business relating to those products, processes, services or methods has a high growth potential; and

the company can demonstrate that it has the potential to be able to successfully scale that business; and

the company can demonstrate that it has the potential to be able to address a broader than local market, including global markets, through that business; and

the company can demonstrate that it has the potential to be able to have competitive advantages for that business; and

(f) at the test time, the company is not a foreign company (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001).

Note: For the purposes of paragraph (e), one way a company can demonstrate something is by engaging the services of another entity.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), disregard any of the following:

an Accelerating Commercialisation Grant under the program administered by the Commonwealth known as the Entrepreneurs’ Programme;

an amount required to be included in the company’s assessable income under subsection 355-450(1).

Subparagraphs (1)(e)(i) to (v) cannot be satisfied for:

a product, process, service or method; or

an improvement to a product, process, service or method;

that is of a kind prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

Subsection (1) does not apply to a company if, before the test time, the company engaged in an activity of a kind prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection.

360-45 100 point innovation test

(1) At a particular time (the test time) in an income year (the current year), a company has the points mentioned in an item of the following table if that item applies to the company at that time.

At the test time, the company also has the points prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of this subsection if the prescribed innovation criteria for those points apply to the company at that time.

360-50 Modified CGT treatment

This section applies if the issuing of a *share to an entity gives rise to an entitlement to a tax offset under this Subdivision.

Note: This section applies to any share that gives rise to the entitlement, regardless of whether subsection 360-25(2) reduces the amount of the tax offset.

The entity is taken to hold the *share on capital account.

The entity must disregard any *capital loss it makes from any CGT event happening in relation to the *share if:

the entity has continuously held the share since its issue; and

the CGT event happens before the tenth anniversary of the issue of the share.

The entity may disregard any *capital gain it makes from any CGT event happening in relation to the *share if:

the entity has continuously held the share since its issue; and

the CGT event happens on or after the first anniversary, but before the tenth anniversary, of the issue of the share.

If the entity has continuously held the *share since its issue, the *first element of its *cost base and *reduced cost base becomes, on the tenth anniversary of its issue, its *market value on that anniversary.

360-55 Modified CGT treatment—partnerships

The purpose of this section is to ensure that the modifications made by section 360-50 apply to each partner in a partnership in a case where the partnership is the entity that is issued with the *share mentioned in subsection 360-50(1).

In such a case, subsections 360-50(2) to (4) apply as if:

the first reference in those subsections to the entity were a reference to each partner in the partnership; and

the first reference in those subsections to the *share were a reference to the partner’s interest in the share.

Note: The references to the entity and the share in the paragraphs of subsections 360-50(3) and (4) continue to apply unchanged.

In such a case, treat subsection 360-50(5) as if it read as follows:

“If the partnership has continuously held the *share since its issue, on the tenth anniversary of its issue:

the *first element of the *cost base for a partner’s interest in the share becomes so much of the share’s *market value on that anniversary as is calculated by reference to the partnership agreement, or partnership law if there is no agreement; and

the *first element of the *reduced cost base is worked out similarly.”.

360-60 Modified CGT treatment—not affected by certain roll-overs

The purpose of this section is to ensure that the modifications made by section 360-50 are not affected merely because of one or more *same-asset roll-overs or *replacement-asset roll-overs (other than roll-overs under Division 122 or Subdivision 124-M).

(2) If, apart from those roll-overs, the entity (the original entity) mentioned in subsection 360-50(1) would continue to hold the *share (the original share) mentioned in that subsection, then subsections 360-50(2) to (5) apply as if:

the following asset were the original share:

if the last roll-over is a *same-asset roll-over—the asset for the roll-over;

if the last roll-over is a *replacement-asset roll-over—the replacement asset for the roll-over; and

Note: The asset for subparagraph (i) will be the original share unless a replacement-asset roll-over happened beforehand.

that asset was issued when the original share was issued; and

the entity that *acquired that asset for the roll-over had continuously held that asset since the original share was issued; and

that entity were the original entity; and

in a case where that entity is a partnership—paragraphs (a) to (d) modify subsections 360-50(2) to (5) as they apply with the modifications in section 360-55; and

in a case where that entity is not a partnership but the entity that owned the original asset for the roll-over is—paragraphs (a) to (d) modify subsections 360-50(2) to (5) as they apply without the modifications in section 360-55.

Note: A roll-over under Division 122 (about wholly-owned companies) or Subdivision 124-M (about scrip for scrip roll-overs) will stop the modified CGT treatment under section 360-50 from continuing to apply.

360-65 Separate modified CGT treatment for roll-overs about wholly-owned companies or scrip for scrip roll-overs

If:

a *share mentioned in subsection 360-50(1) has been continuously held by the entity mentioned in that subsection; and

then:

the share, or interests in the share, are *disposed of in a way that gives rise to a trigger event (see section 122-15 or 122-125) for a roll-over under Division 122; or

the share becomes the original interest (see paragraph 124-780(1)(a)) for a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M; and

the roll-over happens on or after the first anniversary, but before the tenth anniversary, of the issue of the share;

the *first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the share just before the roll-over is taken to be its *market value at that time.

Note: This subsection is a separate modified CGT treatment, and not a continuation of the modifications made by section 360-50.

If:

an asset mentioned in paragraph 360-60(2)(a) for a roll-over has been continuously held by the entity that *acquired that asset for that roll-over; and

then:

that asset, or interests in that asset, are *disposed of in a way that gives rise to a trigger event (see section 122-15 or 122-125) for a roll-over under Division 122; or

that asset becomes the original interest (see paragraph 124-780(1)(a)) for a roll-over under Subdivision 124-M; and

the later roll-over happens on or after the first anniversary, but before the tenth anniversary, of the issue of the original share (see subsection 360-60(2) for the earlier roll-over;

the *first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of that asset just before the later roll-over is taken to be its *market value at that time.

Note: This subsection is a separate modified CGT treatment, and not a continuation of the modifications made by section 360-50.

Division 376 — Films generally (tax offsets for Australian production expenditure)

Table of Subdivisions

376-A Guide to Division 376

376-B Tax offsets for Australian expenditure in making a film

376-C Production expenditure and qualifying Australian production expenditure

376-D Certificates for films and other matters

Subdivision 376-A — Guide to Division 376

376-1 What this Division is about

Companies may be entitled to 1 of 3 refundable tax offsets in relation to Australian expenditure incurred in making films. The offsets are designed to support and develop the Australian screen industry by providing concessional tax treatment for Australian expenditure.

Table of sections

376-2 Key features of the tax offsets for Australian production expenditure on films

376-5 Structure of this Division

376-2 Key features of the tax offsets for Australian production expenditure on films

The 3 tax offsets are:

a refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (the producer offset); and

a refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making any film (the location offset); and

a refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure on post, digital and visual effects production for any film (the PDV offset).

A company is only entitled to one of these offsets in relation to a film.

The amount of the offset is determined as a percentage of certain Australian expenditure incurred by a company in producing the film:

the amount of the producer offset is:

if the film is a feature film that was produced for commercial exhibition to the public in cinemas—40% of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film; and

otherwise—30% of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film; and

the amount of the location offset is 30% of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film; and

the amount of the PDV offset is 30% of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film that relates to post, digital and visual effects production for the film.

One of the requirements for entitlement to these offsets is that a company must be issued with a certificate for the film. The certificate will state the amount of Australian expenditure on which the offset will be determined.

The offset is claimed by a company in its income tax return.

376-5 Structure of this Division

Subdivision 376-B tells you about the different tax offsets available for films, who can get each offset and what conditions must be met to get each offset. It also tells you how to work out the amount of each offset.

Subdivision 376-C explains what is meant by:

production expenditure on a film; and

qualifying Australian production expenditure on a film.

It also contains some rules for quantifying expenditure.

Subdivision 376-D deals with a number of administrative matters:

applying for a certificate for a film; and

the issue and revocation of a certificate for a film; and

the making of rules by the Arts Minister (including rules for the establishment of the Film Certification Advisory Board) and the film authority; and

review of decisions of the Arts Minister and the film authority; and

amendment of assessments following the revocation of a certificate for a film.

Subdivision 376-B — Tax offsets for Australian expenditure in making a film

Table of sections

Refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making a film (location offset)

376-10 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making a film (location offset)

376-15 Amount of the location offset

376-20 Minister must issue certificate for a film for the location offset

376-25 Meaning of documentary

376-27 Minimum training expenditure requirement

376-28 Minimum training expenditure exemption—permanent film infrastructure

376-29 Minimum training expenditure exemption—training programs

376-30 Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the location offset

376-32 Minister may require information

Refundable tax offset for post, digital and visual effects production for a film (PDV offset)

376-35 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for post, digital and visual effects production for a film (PDV offset)

376-40 Amount of the PDV offset

376-45 Minister must issue certificate for a film for the PDV offset

376-50 Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the PDV offset

Refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (producer offset)

376-55 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (producer offset)

376-60 Amount of the producer offset

376-65 Film authority must issue certificate for an Australian film for the producer offset

376-70 Determination of content of film

376-75 Film authority to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the producer offset

Refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making a film (location offset)

376-10 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making a film (location offset)

(1) A company is entitled to a *tax offset under this section (the location offset) for an income year in respect of a *film if:

the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film ceased being incurred in the income year; and

the Arts Minister has issued a certificate to the company for the film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset); and

the company claims the offset in its income tax return for the income year; and

the company:

is an Australian resident; or

is a foreign resident but does have a permanent establishment in Australia and does have an ABN;

when the company lodges the income tax return and when the tax offset is due to be credited to the company.

The claim referred to in paragraph (d) is irrevocable.

Note: The location offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23.

The company is not entitled to the location offset if:

(a) the company or someone else claims a deduction in relation to a unit of industrial property that relates to copyright in the *film under former Division 10B of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

(b) a final certificate for the film has been issued at any time under former Division 10BA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force).

376-15 Amount of the location offset

The amount of the location offset is 30% of the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film (as determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-30).

376-20 Minister must issue certificate for a film for the location offset

The Arts Minister must issue a certificate to a company for a film in relation to the location offset if the Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsections (2), (3), (5), (7) and (8) are met.

Note: The Minister may require the company to provide information to the Minister before issuing the certificate: see section 376-32.

Type of film

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the film was produced for:

(i) exhibition to the public in cinemas or by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992); or

distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and

the film is:

a feature film or a film of a like nature; or

a mini-series of television drama; or

a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (i) or (ii); and

the film is not, or is not to a substantial extent:

if the film is covered by subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii)—a documentary; or

a film for exhibition as an advertising program or a commercial; or

a film for exhibition as a discussion program, a quiz program, game show, a panel program, a variety program or a program of a like nature; or

a film of a public event; or

if the film is covered by subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii)—a film forming part of a drama program series that is, or is intended to be, of a continuing nature; or

a training film; or

(vii) a computer game (within the meaning of the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995).

Television series

The conditions in this subsection are that:

if the film is a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii), it is made up of 2 or more episodes that:

are produced wholly or principally for exhibition to the public on television under a single title; and

contain a common theme or themes; and

contain dramatic elements that form a narrative structure; and

(iv) are produced wholly or principally for exhibition together, for a national market or national markets; and

Note: A documentary can be a television series.

if the film is a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii):

for a television series that is predominantly a digital animation or other animation—the *making of the television series (other than a pilot episode, if any, or activities mentioned in paragraph 376-125(3)(a)) takes place within a period of not longer than 36 months; or

otherwise—all principal photography for the television series (other than a pilot episode, if any) takes place within a period of not longer than 12 months; and

if the film is a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii)—the amount worked out for the film under subsection (6) is at least $1.5 million.

To avoid doubt, and without limiting subparagraph (3)(a)(iii), a film satisfies the requirement in that subparagraph if:

the sole or dominant purpose of the film is to depict actual events, people or situations; and

the film depicts those events, people or situations in a dramatic or entertaining way, with a heavy emphasis on dramatic impact or entertainment value.

Conditions relating to expenditure thresholds

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film (as determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-30) is at least $20 million; and

the company either carried out, or made the arrangements for the carrying out of, all the activities in Australia that were necessary for the making of the film.

Note: The operation of paragraph (c) is affected by paragraph 376-180(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the making of a film from another company).

For the purposes of paragraph (3)(c), the amount for a film is worked out by using the formula:

where:

duration of film in hours means the total length of the *film, measured in hours.

total QAPE means the total of the company’s *qualifying Australian production expenditure on the *film (as determined by the *Arts Minister under section 376-30).

Use of resident entities for post, digital and visual effects production

The condition in this subsection is that:

the company has entered into a contract for the provision of some or all of the *post, digital and visual effects production for the film with an entity that:

is an Australian resident; or

is a foreign resident but does have a permanent establishment in Australia and does have an ABN; and

(b) all or part of the post, digital and visual effects production (the contracted post, digital and visual effects production) to which that contract relates has, under the contract, been provided by the entity to the company; and

(c) if the entity is a foreign resident—all or part of the contracted post, digital and visual effects production that has been provided by the entity to the company was provided at or through the entity’s permanent establishment in Australia; and

all or part of the company’s expenditure on the contracted post, digital and visual effects production is qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on the film.

Minimum training expenditure requirement

The condition in this subsection is that the company:

satisfies the minimum training expenditure requirement for the film under subsection 376-27(1); or

is exempt from that requirement for the film under:

section 376-28 (the permanent film infrastructure exemption); or

section 376-29 (the training programs exemption).

376-25 Meaning of documentary

Meaning of documentary

(1) A *film is a documentary if the film is a creative treatment of actuality, having regard to:

the extent and purpose of any contrived situation featured in the film; and

the extent to which the film explores an idea or a theme; and

the extent to which the film has an overall narrative structure; and

any other relevant matters.

Exclusion of infotainment or lifestyle programs and magazine programs

(2) However, a *film is not a documentary if it is:

(a) an infotainment or lifestyle program (within the meaning of Schedule 6 to the Broadcasting Services Act 1992); or

a film that:

presents factual information; and

has 2 or more discrete parts, each dealing with a different subject or a different aspect of the same subject; and

does not contain an over-arching narrative structure or thesis.

376-27 Minimum training expenditure requirement

(1) A company satisfies the minimum training expenditure requirement for a *film under this subsection if the company incurs expenditure (the training expenditure) that satisfies the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (5).

The amount of the training expenditure must be at least the minimum training expenditure amount for the film.

Each part of the training expenditure must be:

expenditure that is both:

qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on the film; and

incurred for, or reasonably attributable to, eligible training that is provided to an individual that has worked on, or is working on, the *making of the film; or

expenditure that consists of payments made (for any purpose) to an eligible provider (other than an eligible provider that is an associate of the company):

after the production commencement day for the film; and

before either the making of the film ceases or the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film ceases being incurred (whichever is earlier).

To avoid doubt, the expenditure referred to in paragraph (3)(b) need not be qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on the film.

The amount of the training expenditure that is qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on the film must be at least 50% of the minimum training expenditure amount for the film.

Meaning of minimum training expenditure amount

(6) The minimum training expenditure amount is:

for a film with a production commencement day that is on or after 1 July 2024 but before 1 July 2025—either:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—the lesser of $250,000 and 0.5% of the company’s total QAPE on the film; or

if regulations have been made for the purposes of subsection (7)—the lesser of the prescribed monetary amount and the prescribed percentage of the company’s total QAPE on the film; or

for a film with a production commencement day that is on or after 1 July 2025—either:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—the lesser of $500,000 and 1% of the company’s total QAPE on the film; or

if regulations have been made for the purposes of subsection (7)—the lesser of the prescribed monetary amount and the prescribed percentage of the company’s total QAPE on the film.

Prescribed amount and prescribed percentage

Subject to subsection (8), regulations made for the purposes of this subsection may prescribe:

(a) a monetary amount (the prescribed monetary amount) not exceeding $750,000; and

(b) a percentage (the prescribed percentage) not exceeding 1%.

If the regulations prescribe a monetary amount or a percentage, the regulations must prescribe both a monetary amount and a percentage.

Definitions

In this section:

eligible provider means an entity that either:

offers *tertiary courses; or

(b) is an NVR registered training organisation (within the meaning of the National Vocational Education and Training Regulator Act 2011) that offers VET accredited courses (within the meaning of that Act);

provided that one or more of those courses include eligible training.

eligible training means training or education provided in Australia that contributes to the knowledge, skills or experience of an individual in relation to the *making of *films.

prescribed monetary amount: see paragraph (7)(a).

prescribed percentage: see paragraph (7)(b).

production commencement day, for a *film, means the day that the following commenced:

for a film that is predominantly a digital animation or other animation—the *making of the film;

otherwise—the principal photography for the film.

total QAPE, of a company on a *film, means the total of the company’s *qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film (as determined by the *Arts Minister under section 376-30).

376-28 Minimum training expenditure exemption—permanent film infrastructure

A company is exempt under this section from the minimum training expenditure requirement (see subsection 376-20(8) and section 376-27) for a film if:

the company has materially contributed to the establishment or upgrading of a piece of film infrastructure in Australia (whether or not the establishment or upgrading is complete); and

the film infrastructure is or will be, or the upgrades are or will be:

permanent; and

reasonable in scale and cost, having regard to the scale and cost of the film; and

reasonably located, having regard to the needs of the Australian screen industry; and

the establishment or upgrading of the film infrastructure occurs wholly or partly after the commencement of:

for a film that is predominantly a digital animation or other animation—the *making of the film; or

otherwise—the principal photography for the film; and

if the establishment or upgrading of the film infrastructure is not complete—the establishment or upgrading will be completed within a reasonable period of time; and

(e) the film infrastructure has, or the upgrades have, materially contributed to alleviating capacity constraints in the Australian screen industry.

(2) In this section, film infrastructure means buildings or other physical structures that can be used in the *making of *films.

376-29 Minimum training expenditure exemption—training programs

(1) A company is exempt under this section from the minimum training expenditure requirement (see subsection 376-20(8) and section 376-27) for a *film (the relevant film) if:

(a) an individual (the trainee) that has worked on the *making of the relevant film has undertaken training under a training program; and

all or part of that training was undertaken by the trainee during the period when the trainee worked on the making of the relevant film; and

the company or an associate of the company has incurred expenditure that is for, or that is reasonably attributable to, the training undertaken by the trainee; and

(d) the training program has materially contributed to the making of the relevant film; and

the training program has materially contributed, or will materially contribute, to the making of at least 2 films, each of which satisfies or will satisfy subsection (2) (and one of which may be the relevant film); and

(f) the training program has materially contributed to alleviating capacity constraints in the Australian screen industry.

A film satisfies this subsection if a substantial proportion of the activities involved in the *making of the film take place in Australia.

In determining whether a training program has contributed to a thing mentioned in paragraph (1)(f), the matters to which consideration may be given include, but are not limited to, the following:

mentoring, industry partnerships and work experience placements facilitated by the training program;

skills shortages in the Australian screen industry that are addressed by the training program;

activities connected with the training program that contribute to improving health and safety, and diversity and inclusion, in the Australian screen industry;

any matters specified in rules made under subsection (4).

Subject to subsection (5), the Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules specifying matters for the purposes of paragraph (3)(d), including matters of a kind referred to in any of paragraphs (3)(a) to (c).

Before making rules under subsection (4), the Arts Minister must consult the Minister.

376-30 Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the location offset

If a company applies to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate to the company for a film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset), the Arts Minister must, as soon as practicable after receiving the application, determine in writing the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film for the purposes of the location offset.

In making a determination under subsection (1), the Arts Minister must have regard to the matters in Subdivision 376-C.

The Arts Minister must give the company written notice of the determination.

A determination made under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

376-32 Minister may require information

Either:

before determining a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on a film under subsection 376-30(1) for the purposes of the location offset; or

before issuing a certificate to the company for the film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset);

the Arts Minister may, by written notice given to the company, require that the company provide to the Arts Minister information specified in the notice.

The information specified in the notice must be information that the Arts Minister considers relevant to:

determining the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure or issuing the certificate to the company; or

assessing the benefit of the film to the Australian screen industry.

The notice must specify the time by which the information is to be provided (which must be at least 30 business days after the notice is given).

The Arts Minister may, on request by the company, extend the time by written notice given to the company.

If the information is not provided by the specified time (including any extensions), the Arts Minister may refuse to determine the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure or issue the certificate to the company.

Refundable tax offset for post, digital and visual effects production for a film (PDV offset)

376-35 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for post, digital and visual effects production for a film (PDV offset)

(1) A company is entitled to a *tax offset under this section (the PDV offset) for an income year in respect of a *film if:

the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, to the extent that it relates to *post, digital and visual effects production for the film, ceased being incurred in the income year; and

the Arts Minister has issued a certificate to the company for the post, digital and visual effects production for the film under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset); and

the company claims the offset in its income tax return for the income year; and

the company:

is an Australian resident; or

is a foreign resident but does have a permanent establishment in Australia and does have an ABN;

when the company lodges the income tax return and when the tax offset is due to be credited to the company.

The claim referred to in paragraph (c) is irrevocable.

Note: The PDV offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23.

(2) Post, digital and visual effects production for a *film means:

the creation of audio or visual elements (other than principal photography, pick ups or the creation of physical elements such as sets, props or costumes) for the film; and

the manipulation of audio or visual elements (other than pick ups or physical elements such as sets, props or costumes) for the film; and

activities that are necessarily related to the activities mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b).

Note: 3D animation, digital compositing and music composition and recording are examples of post, digital and visual effects production.

The company is not entitled to the PDV offset if:

(a) the company or someone else claims a deduction in relation to a unit of industrial property that relates to copyright in the *film under former Division 10B of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

(b) a final certificate for the film has been issued at any time under former Division 10BA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force).

376-40 Amount of the PDV offset

The amount of the PDV offset is 30% of the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure (as determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-50) on a film, to the extent that it relates to *post, digital and visual effects production for the film.

376-45 Minister must issue certificate for a film for the PDV offset

The Arts Minister must issue a certificate to a company for the *post, digital and visual effects production for a film in relation to the PDV offset if the Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsections (2), (3) and (5) are met.

Type of film

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the film was produced for:

(i) exhibition to the public in cinemas or by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992); or

distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and

the film is:

a feature film or a film of a like nature; or

a mini-series of television drama; or

a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (i) or (ii); and

the film is not, or is not to a substantial extent:

if the film is covered by subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii)—a documentary; or

a film for exhibition as an advertising program or a commercial; or

a film for exhibition as a discussion program, a quiz program, game show, a panel program, a variety program or a program of a like nature; or

a film of a public event; or

if the film is covered by subparagraph (b)(i) or (ii)—a film forming part of a drama program series that is, or is intended to be, of a continuing nature; or

a training film; or

(vii) a computer game (within the meaning of the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995).

Television series

The condition in this subsection is that, if the film is a television series that is not covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii), it is made up of 2 or more episodes that:

are produced wholly or principally for exhibition to the public on television under a single title; and

contain a common theme or themes; and

contain dramatic elements that form a narrative structure; and

are produced wholly or principally for exhibition together, for a national market or national markets.

Note: A documentary can be a television series.

To avoid doubt, and without limiting paragraph (3)(c), a film satisfies the requirement in that paragraph if:

the sole or dominant purpose of the film is to depict actual events, people or situations; and

the film depicts those events, people or situations in a dramatic or entertaining way, with a heavy emphasis on dramatic impact or entertainment value.

Conditions relating to expenditure thresholds

The conditions of this subsection are that:

the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film (as determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-50), to the extent that it relates to *post, digital and visual effects production for the film, is at least $500,000; and

the company either carried out, or made the arrangements for the carrying out of, all the activities in Australia that were necessary for the post, digital and visual effects production for the film.

Note: The operation of paragraph (b) is affected by paragraph 376-180(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the making of a film from another company).

376-50 Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the PDV offset

If a company applies to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate to the company for the *post, digital and visual effects production for a film under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset), the Arts Minister must, as soon as practicable after receiving the application, determine in writing the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure, to the extent that it relates to post, digital and visual effects production for the film, for the purposes of the PDV offset.

In making a determination under subsection (1), the Arts Minister must have regard to the matters in Subdivision 376-C.

The Arts Minister must give the company written notice of the determination.

A determination made under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

Refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (producer offset)

376-55 Film production company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure in making an Australian film (producer offset)

(1) A company is entitled to a *tax offset under this section (the producer offset) for an income year in respect of a *film if:

the film was *completed in the income year; and

the film authority has issued a certificate to the company under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) for the film; and

the company claims the offset in its income tax return for the income year; and

the company:

is an Australian resident; or

is a foreign resident but does have a permanent establishment in Australia and does have an ABN;

when the company lodges the income tax return and when the tax offset is due to be credited to the company.

The claim referred to in paragraph (c) is irrevocable.

Note: The producer offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23.

(2) A *film is completed:

for a film that is not covered by paragraph (b) or (c)—when it is first in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be distributed, broadcast or exhibited to the general public; or

for a series other than a drama series—at the earlier of:

the time when the episode in which the 65th commercial hour is reached is first in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be distributed, broadcast or exhibited to the general public; and

the time when the series is first in such a state; and

for a season of a series other than a drama series—at the earlier of:

the time when the episode in which the 65th commercial hour is reached is first in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be distributed, broadcast or exhibited to the general public; and

the time when the season is first in such a state.

(3) Film authority means Screen Australia.

The company is not entitled to the producer offset if:

(a) the company or someone else claims a deduction in relation to a unit of industrial property that relates to copyright in the *film under former Division 10B of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

(b) a final certificate for the film has been issued at any time under former Division 10BA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

a certificate for the film has been issued at any time under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) (whether or not the certificate is still in force); or

production assistance (other than *development assistance) for the film has been received by the company or anyone else before 1 July 2007 from any of the following bodies:

the Film Finance Corporation Australia Limited;

Film Australia Limited;

the Australian Film Commission;

the Australian Film, Television and Radio School; or

the film authority’s Producer Equity Program has provided financial assistance to the company or anyone else for the making of the film.

(5) Development assistance for a *film means financial assistance provided to assist with meeting the development costs for the film, and includes assistance to the extent to which it is provided in relation to any of the following:

location surveys and other activities undertaken to assess locations for possible use in the film;

storyboarding for the film;

scriptwriting for the film;

research for the film;

casting actors for the film;

developing a budget for the film;

developing a shooting schedule for the film.

376-60 Amount of the producer offset

The amount of the producer offset is:

if the film is a feature film that was produced for commercial exhibition to the public in cinemas—40%; or

otherwise—30%;

of the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film (as determined by the film authority under section 376-75).

376-65 Film authority must issue certificate for an Australian film for the producer offset

The film authority must issue a certificate to a company for a film in relation to the producer offset if the film authority is satisfied that:

the company either carried out, or made the arrangements for the carrying out of, all the activities that were necessary for the *making of the film; and

the conditions in subsections (2) to (6) are met.

Note: The operation of paragraph (a) is affected by paragraph 376-180(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the making of a film from another company).

Type of film

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the film:

has a significant Australian content (see section 376-70); or

has been made under an arrangement entered into between the Commonwealth or an authority of the Commonwealth and a foreign country or an authority of the foreign country; and

the film was produced for:

(i) exhibition to the public in cinemas or by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992); or

distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and

the film is:

a feature film; or

a single episode program; or

a series; or

a season of a series; or

a short form animated film that is not covered by subparagraph (i), (ii), (iii) or (iv); and

the film is not, or is not to a substantial extent:

a film for exhibition as an advertising program or a commercial; or

a film for exhibition as a discussion program, a quiz program, game show, a panel program, a variety program or a program of a like nature; or

a film of a public event (other than a documentary); or

a training film; or

(v) a computer game (within the meaning of the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995); or

a news or current affairs program; or

a reality program (other than a documentary).

Single episode programs

The conditions in this subsection are that, if the film is a single episode program, it:

is of a like nature to a feature film; and

is produced for:

(i) exhibition to the public by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992); or

distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and

if the program is a documentary—is of at least one half of a commercial hour in duration; and

if the program is not a documentary—is of at least one commercial hour in duration.

Short form animated film

The conditions in this subsection are that, if the film is a short form animated film, it:

is a program comprising one or more episodes which are produced wholly or principally for exhibition together, for a national market or national markets under a single title; and

is predominantly made using cell, stop motion, digital or other animation; and

contains a common theme or themes; and

is of at least one quarter of a commercial hour in duration.

Series and seasons of series

The conditions in this subsection are that:

if the application for the certificate is for a film that is a series and not for a film that is a season of that series:

the series is made up of at least 2 episodes; and

each episode of the series is at least one half of a commercial hour in duration, except where the film is predominantly made using cell, stop motion, digital or other animation, in which case each episode is at least one quarter of a commercial hour in duration; and

in the case of a series other than a drama series—the series has a new creative concept (see section 376-70); and

if the application for the certificate is for a film that is a season of a series:

the season is made up of at least 2 episodes; and

each episode of the series is at least one half of a commercial hour in duration, except where the film is predominantly made using cell, stop motion, digital or other animation, in which case each episode is at least one quarter of a commercial hour in duration; and

in the case of a series other than a drama series—the series has a new creative concept (see section 376-70).

Expenditure thresholds

Subject to subsection (6A), the conditions in this subsection are as set out in the table.

A film that is both of the type referred to in item 7, and of the type referred to in item 7A, of the table in subsection (6) meets the conditions in that subsection if the film meets the conditions set out in one or both of those items.

The conditions in this subsection are that:

the season is made up of 2 or more episodes that are produced wholly or principally for exhibition together under a single title; and

the season is produced for:

(i) exhibition to the public by way of television broadcasting (including broadcasting by way of the delivery of a television program by a broadcasting service within the meaning of the Broadcasting Services Act 1992); or

distribution to the public as a video recording (whether on video tapes, digital video disks or otherwise); and

either:

for a season that is predominantly a digital animation or other animation—the *making of the season (other than a pilot episode, if any) takes place within a period of not longer than 36 months; or

otherwise—all principal photography for the season (other than a pilot episode, if any) takes place within a period of not longer than 12 months.

The amount worked out for a film under this subsection is the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

duration of film in hours means the total length of the *film, measured in hours.

total QAPE means the total of the company’s *qualifying Australian production expenditure on the *film (as determined by the *film authority under section 376-75).

376-70 Determination of content of film

In determining for the purposes of section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) whether a film has a significant Australian content, the film authority must have regard to the following:

the subject matter of the film;

the place where the film was made;

the nationalities and places of residence of the persons who took part in the *making of the film;

the details of the production expenditure incurred in respect of the film;

any other matters that the film authority considers to be relevant.

In determining for the purposes of section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) whether a film that is a series has a new creative concept, the film authority must have regard to the following:

the title of the series;

whether the series has substantially different characters, settings, production locations and individuals involved in the *making of the series than any other series;

any other matters that the film authority considers to be relevant.

376-75 Film authority to determine a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the producer offset

If a company applies to the film authority for the issue of a certificate to the company for a film under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset), the film authority must, as soon as practicable after receiving the application, determine in writing the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film for the purposes of the producer offset.

In making a determination under subsection (1), the film authority must have regard to the matters in Subdivision 376-C.

The film authority must give the company written notice of the determination.

A determination made under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

Subdivision 376-C — Production expenditure and qualifying Australian production expenditure

Table of sections

Production expenditure—common rules

376-125 Production expenditure—general test

376-130 Production expenditure—special qualifying Australian production expenditure

376-135 Production expenditure—specific exclusions

Production expenditure—special rules for the location offset

376-140 Production expenditure—special rules for the location offset

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—common rules

376-145 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—general test

376-150 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—specific inclusions

376-155 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—specific exclusions

376-160 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—treatment of services embodied in goods

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the location offset and the PDV offset

376-165 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the location offset and the PDV offset

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the producer offset

376-170 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the producer offset

Expenditure generally—common rules

376-175 Expenditure to be worked out on an arm’s length basis

376-180 Expenditure incurred by prior production companies

376-185 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST

Production expenditure—common rules

376-125 Production expenditure—general test

(1) A company’s production expenditure on a *film is expenditure that the company incurs to the extent to which it:

is incurred in, or in relation to, the *making of the film; or

is reasonably attributable to:

the use of equipment or other facilities for; or

activities undertaken in;

the making of the film.

(2) The making of a *film means the doing of the things necessary for the production of the first copy of the film.

(3) The making of a *film includes:

pre-production activities in relation to the film; and

post-production activities in relation to the film; and

any other activities undertaken to bring the film up to the state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be distributed, broadcast or exhibited to the general public.

(4) The making of a *film does not include:

developing the proposal for the *making of the film; or

arranging or obtaining finance for the film; or

distributing the film (other than the activities listed in paragraphs (a) to (e) of item 7 of the table in subsection 376-170(2)); or

promoting the film.

(5) Without limiting subsection (1), a company’s production expenditure on a *film:

may be expenditure that is incurred in the income year for which the tax offset is sought or in an earlier income year; and

may be expenditure of either a capital or a revenue nature; and

may be expenditure that gives rise to a deduction.

Paragraph (c) has effect subject to item 10 of the table in section 376-135 (which deals with capital allowances).

If:

a company:

*holds a depreciating asset; and

uses the asset, while held, in the *making of a film; and

deductions in relation to the asset are available under Division 40 (which deals with capital allowances);

the production expenditure of the company on the film includes an amount equal to the decline in the value of the asset to the extent to which that decline is reasonably attributable to the use of the asset in the making of the film (the film proportion). The decline in value of the asset is to be worked out using Division 40.

Note: Under item 10 of the table in section 376-135, expenditure that sets or increases the cost of the asset does not count as production expenditure.

(7) If a *balancing adjustment event occurs for the asset before the film is *completed:

(a) if the asset’s *termination value is more than its *adjustable value just before the event occurred—the production expenditure of the company on the film is reduced by the film proportion of the difference; or

(b) if the asset’s termination value is less than its adjustable value just before the event occurred—the production expenditure of the company on the film includes the film proportion of the difference.

376-130 Production expenditure—special qualifying Australian production expenditure

Expenditure of a company is also production expenditure of the company on a *film if it is *qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on the film under section 376-150 or 376-165.

Note: This means that the special qualifying Australian production expenditure in sections 376-150 and 376-165 is taken into account both in working out the total amount of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure and in working out the total amount of all the company’s production expenditure on the film.

376-135 Production expenditure—specific exclusions

Despite sections 376-125 and 376-130, the following expenditure of a company is not production expenditure of the company on a *film, except to the extent, if any, as mentioned in column 3 of the table:

Production expenditure—special rules for the location offset

376-140 Production expenditure—special rules for the location offset

Despite sections 376-125 and 376-130, the expenditure of a company is not production expenditure of the company on a *film in relation to the location offset if:

the film is a television series that is not a feature film or a mini-series of television drama; and

the expenditure is reasonably attributable to the production of a pilot episode to the television series; and

the expenditure, apart from this subsection, would be production expenditure that was not qualifying Australian production expenditure.

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—common rules

376-145 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—general test

A company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on a *film is the company’s *production expenditure on the film to the extent to which it is incurred for, or is reasonably attributable to:

goods and services provided in Australia; or

the use of land located in Australia; or

the use of goods that are located in Australia at the time they are used in the *making of the film.

376-150 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—specific inclusions

(1) The following expenditure of a company is also qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on a *film:

Legal costs are covered by item 1 of the table in subsection (1) only if they relate to:

writers’ contracts; or

chain of title and other copyright issues.

376-155 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—specific exclusions

Despite sections 376-145, 376-150, 376-165 and 376-170, the following expenditure of a company is not qualifying Australian production expenditure of a company on a *film:

expenditure that is incurred when:

the company is a foreign resident; and

the company does not have both a permanent establishment in Australia and an ABN;

expenditure in relation to:

remuneration and other benefits provided to an individual for the individual’s services in relation to the *making of the film; or

travel and other costs associated with the services an individual provides in relation to the making of the film;

if the individual:

is not a member of the cast; and

enters Australia to work on the film for less than 2 consecutive calendar weeks;

expenditure prescribed by the regulations.

376-160 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—treatment of services embodied in goods

If:

a company incurs expenditure for the provision of what is essentially a service; and

the results of the service are provided to the company by being embodied in goods that are delivered to the company; and

the service that is embodied in the goods was predominantly performed outside Australia;

the service is not provided to the company in Australia merely because the goods are delivered to the company in Australia.

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the location offset and the PDV offset

Note: Paragraph (b)—a document, for example, might set out legal or other professional advice or a computer disk might contain a program that has been made or data that has been compiled.

376-165 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the location offset and the PDV offset

(1) For the purposes of the location offset and the PDV offset, the following expenditure of a company is also qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on a *film:

General business overheads of the company are covered by item 1 of the table in subsection (1) only to the extent to which they do not exceed the lesser of:

2% of the total of all the company’s production expenditure on the film; and

$500,000.

Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the producer offset

376-170 Qualifying Australian production expenditure—special rules for the producer offset

Expenditure that is qualifying Australian production expenditure

(1) For the purposes of subsections 376-65(6) and (7), expenditure on a *film incurred in a foreign country is qualifying Australian production expenditure of a company on the film if:

the expenditure is incurred by the company claiming the offset, or by another entity that is involved in the *making of the film; and

the expenditure would be qualifying Australian production expenditure if it had been incurred for, or reasonably attributable to:

goods and services provided in Australia; or

the use of land located in Australia; or

the use of goods that are located in Australia at the time they are used in the *making of the film; and

the film is made under an arrangement entered into between the Commonwealth or an authority of the Commonwealth and the foreign country or an authority of the foreign country.

Note: This means that such expenditure is taken into account for the purposes of determining whether to issue a certificate for the producer offset to the company under section 376-65. It is not taken into account in working out the amount of the producer offset to which the company is entitled.

(2) For the purposes of the producer offset, the following expenditure of a company is also qualifying Australian production expenditure of the company on a *film:

General business overheads of the company are covered by item 1 of the table in subsection (2) only to the extent to which they do not exceed the lesser of:

5% of the total of all the company’s total film expenditure on the film; and

$500,000.

Expenditure incurred for the purchase of services is not covered by item 4 of the table in subsection (2) if the services are, to any extent, performed by an individual who is not an Australian resident.

Expenditure that is not qualifying Australian production expenditure

(4) For the purposes of the producer offset, the following expenditure of a company is not qualifying Australian production expenditure of a company on a *film:

expenditure on the film that is paid for with *development assistance received from any of the following bodies:

Film Australia Limited;

the Australian Film Commission;

the Australian Film, Television and Radio School;

Screen Australia;

unless the amount or value of the assistance has been repaid;

subject to subsection (4A), the following expenditure:

*development expenditure on the film;

remuneration provided to the principal director, producers and principal cast associated with the film;

to the extent that such expenditure comprises greater than 20% of the company’s total film expenditure on the film;

for a series other than a drama series, or a season of a series other than a drama series—expenditure on an episode beyond the episode in which the 65th commercial hour of the series is reached.

Paragraph (4)(b) does not apply to a film that is a documentary.

In applying paragraph (4)(c), episodes completed before 1 July 2011 count towards the limit in that paragraph.

(6) Total film expenditure on a film means:

expenditure covered by sections 376-125, 376-130, 376-150 and 376-170; and

expenditure mentioned in column 2 of the table in section 376-135, to the extent that it is not covered by paragraph (a).

Expenditure generally—common rules

376-175 Expenditure to be worked out on an arm’s length basis

For the purposes of this Division, if any 2 or more parties to:

an arrangement under which a company incurs expenditure in relation to a film; or

any act or transaction directly or indirectly connected with expenditure that a company incurs in relation to a film;

do not deal with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the arrangement, or in relation to the act or transaction, the expenditure is taken to be only so much (if any) of the expenditure as would have been incurred if they had been dealing with each other at arm’s length in relation to the arrangement, or in relation to the act or transaction.

376-180 Expenditure incurred by prior production companies

(1) For the purposes of this Division, if a company (the incoming company) takes over the *making of a *film from another company (the outgoing company):

expenditure incurred in relation to the film by the outgoing company is taken to have been incurred in relation to the film by the incoming company; and

for the purposes of determining the extent to which that expenditure is qualifying Australian production expenditure of the incoming company, the incoming company is taken:

to have been an Australian resident at any time when the outgoing company was an Australian resident; and

to have had a permanent establishment in Australia at any time when the outgoing company had a permanent establishment in Australia; and

to have had an ABN at any time when the outgoing company had an ABN; and

expenditure that the incoming company incurs in order to be able to take over the making of the film is to be disregarded for the purposes of this Division; and

any activities carried out, and arrangements made, by the outgoing company in relation to the film are taken, for the purposes of paragraphs 376-20(5)(c), 376-45(5)(b) and 376-65(1)(a), to have been carried out or made by the incoming company in relation to the film.

For the purposes of subsection (1):

expenditure incurred on the film by the outgoing company includes expenditure that the outgoing company is itself taken to have incurred on the film because of the operation of subsection (1); and

the outgoing company is taken:

to have been an Australian resident at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have been an Australian resident because of the operation of subsection (1); and

to have had a permanent establishment in Australia at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have had a permanent establishment in Australia because of the operation of subsection (1); and

to have had an ABN at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have had an ABN because of the operation of subsection (1); and

activities carried out by the outgoing company in relation to the film include activities that the outgoing company is taken to have carried out in relation to the film because of the operation of subsection (1); and

arrangements made by the outgoing company for the carrying out of activities in relation to the film include arrangements that the outgoing company is taken to have made because of the operation of subsection (1).

Example: If Uncle Carty Ltd starts out making a film and then Mr Grouble Ltd takes over the making of the film, Mr Grouble Ltd is taken to have incurred the expenditure that Uncle Carty Ltd incurred on the film. If Lousie Ltd subsequently takes over the making of the film from Mr Grouble Ltd, Lousie Ltd is taken to have incurred the expenditure that Mr Grouble Ltd incurred on the film (including the expenditure of Uncle Carty Ltd that is attributed to Mr Grouble Ltd).

376-185 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST

In determining an amount of expenditure for the purpose of this Division, the expenditure is taken to exclude GST.

Subdivision 376-D — Certificates for films and other matters

Table of sections

376-230 Production company may apply for certificate

376-235 Notice of refusal to issue certificate

376-240 Issue of certificate

376-245 Revocation of certificate

376-247 Delegation by Arts Minister

376-250 Notice of decision or determination

376-255 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal

376-260 Minister may make rules about the location offset and the PDV offset

376-265 Film authority may make rules about the producer offset

376-270 Amendment of assessments

376-275 Review in relation to certain production levels

376-230 Production company may apply for certificate

A company may apply to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate to the company for a film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) when all of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure for the film has been incurred.

Application for PDV offset certificate

Once all of a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on a film, to the extent that it relates to *post, digital and visual effects production for the film, has been incurred, the company may apply to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate to the company for the film under section 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset).

Application for producer offset certificate

Once a film is *completed, a company may apply to the film authority for the issue of a certificate to the company for the film under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset).

Form of application

An application under subsection (1) or (2) must be made in accordance with the rules determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-260 so far as they relate to the requirements for applications.

An application under subsection (3) must be made in accordance with the rules determined by the film authority under section 376-265 so far as they relate to the requirements for applications.

376-235 Notice of refusal to issue certificate

If the Arts Minister decides not to issue a certificate under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) for a film, the Minister must give the applicant written notice of the decision (including reasons for the decision).

If the film authority decides not to issue a certificate under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) for a film, the authority must give the applicant written notice of the decision (including reasons for the decision).

376-240 Issue of certificate

A certificate issued to a company under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset), 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) or 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) must:

be in writing; and

specify the company’s ABN; and

specify the date of issue of the certificate; and

if the certificate is issued under section 376-20—specify the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, as determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-30; and

if the certificate is issued under section 376-45—specify the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, to the extent that it relates to *post, digital and visual effects production for the film, as determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-50; and

if the certificate is issued under section 376-65—specify the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, as determined by the film authority under section 376-75.

If the certificate is issued under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset), the Arts Minister must give the Commissioner notice of the issue of a certificate for a film within 30 days after issuing the certificate.

The notice under subsection (2) must specify:

the company’s name; and

the company’s address; and

the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, as determined by the Arts Minister under section 376-30 or 376-50, as the case may be; and

other matters agreed to between the Arts Minister and the Commissioner.

The notice must be accompanied by a copy of the certificate.

If the certificate is issued under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset), the film authority must give the Commissioner notice of the issue of a certificate for a film within 30 days after issuing the certificate.

The notice under subsection (4) must specify:

the company’s name; and

the company’s address; and

the total of the company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure on the film, as determined by the film authority under section 376-75; and

other matters agreed to between the film authority and the Commissioner.

The notice must be accompanied by a copy of the certificate.

376-245 Revocation of certificate

The Arts Minister may revoke a certificate issued to a company for a film under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset) if:

the Minister is satisfied that the issue of the certificate was obtained by fraud or serious misrepresentation; or

the company does not provide a copy of the film to the Minister within 30 days of when the film is *completed.

If the Arts Minister revokes a certificate under subsection (1), the Minister must give the company to whom the certificate was issued written notice of the revocation (including reasons for the decision to revoke the certificate).

The film authority may revoke a certificate issued to a company for a film under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset) if the authority is satisfied that the issue of the certificate was obtained by fraud or serious misrepresentation.

If the film authority revokes a certificate under subsection (3), the authority must give the company to whom the certificate was issued written notice of the revocation (including reasons for the decision to revoke the certificate).

If a certificate is revoked under subsection (1) or (3), it is taken, for the purposes of this Division, never to have been issued.

Note: This means that if an assessment of a company’s income tax is issued on the basis that the company is entitled to a tax offset for a film and the certificate for the film is then revoked, the assessment will be amended to take account of the fact that the company was never entitled to the tax offset: see section 376-270.

Subsection (5) does not apply for the purposes of:

the operation of this section or section 376-250; or

a review by a court or the ART of the decision to revoke the certificate.

376-247 Delegation by Arts Minister

The Arts Minister may, in writing, delegate all or any of the Arts Minister’s powers under the provisions mentioned in subsection (2) to:

the Arts Secretary; or

an SES employee, or acting SES employee, in the Department administered by the Arts Minister.

For the purposes of subsection (1), the provisions are as follows:

section 376-20 (issue of certificate for location offset);

section 376-30 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for location offset);

section 376-32 (power to require information for the purposes of the location offset);

section 376-45 (issue of certificate for PDV offset);

section 376-50 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for PDV offset);

section 376-235 (notice of refusal to issue certificate for location offset or PDV offset);

section 376-245 (revocation of certificate for location offset or PDV offset).

In exercising powers under a delegation, the delegate must comply with any directions of the Arts Minister.

376-250 Notice of decision or determination

This section applies to a notice of a decision given under section 376-235 (refusal to issue a certificate) or 376-245 (revocation of a certificate), and to a notice of a determination given under section 376-30 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for location offset), 376-50 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for PDV offset) or 376-75 (determination of qualifying Australian production expenditure for producer offset).

The notice of the decision or determination is to include the statements set out in subsections (3) and (4).

(3) There must be a statement to the effect that, subject to the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024, an application may be made to the *ART, by (or on behalf of) any entity whose interests are affected by the decision or determination, for review of the decision or determination.

There must also be a statement to the effect that a request may be made under section 268 of that Act by (or on behalf of) such an entity for a statement of reasons.

If the Arts Minister or the film authority fails to comply with subsection (3) or (4), that failure does not affect the validity of the decision or determination.

376-255 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal

Applications may be made to the ART for review of:

a decision made by the Arts Minister to refuse an application for a certificate under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset); or

a decision made by the Arts Minister under section 376-245 to revoke a certificate; or

a decision made by the film authority to refuse an application for a certificate under section 376-65 (certificate for the producer offset); or

a decision made by the film authority under section 376-245 to revoke a certificate; or

a determination by the Arts Minister in relation to the total of a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure under section 376-30 or 376-50; or

a determination by the film authority in relation to the total of a company’s qualifying Australian production expenditure under section 376-75.

376-260 Minister may make rules about the location offset and the PDV offset

Rules establishing the Film Certification Advisory Board

The Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules:

establishing a Film Certification Advisory Board to:

consider applications under subsection 376-230(1) (application for a certificate for the location offset) or (2) (application for a certificate for the PDV offset) and advise the Minister on whether to issue certificates under section 376-20 (certificate for the location offset) or 376-45 (certificate for the PDV offset); and

perform such other functions in relation to the operation of this Division as are specified in the rules; and

specifying the membership of the Board and the terms and conditions of appointment to the Board; and

specifying procedures to be followed by the Board in performing its functions.

Rules providing for provisional certificates in relation to location offset and the PDV offset

The Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules providing for the issue of provisional certificates in relation to the location offset or the PDV offset.

Rules about applications for certificates in relation to the location offset and the PDV offset

The Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules specifying how applications for certificates (including provisional certificates) in relation to the location offset or the PDV offset are to be made, including:

the form in which applications are to be made; and

the information to be provided in applications; and

methods for verifying such information; and

procedures for providing, at the Minister’s request, additional information in support of an application.

Rules under paragraph (3)(c) can include rules requiring reports by auditors or independent line producers.

376-265 Film authority may make rules about the producer offset

Rules providing for provisional certificates in relation to the producer offset

The film authority may, by legislative instrument, make rules providing for the issue of provisional certificates in relation to the producer offset.

Rules about applications for certificates in relation to the producer offset

The film authority may, by legislative instrument, make rules specifying how applications for certificates (including provisional certificates) in relation to the producer offset are to be made, including:

the form in which applications are to be made; and

the information to be provided in applications; and

methods for verifying such information; and

procedures for providing, at the authority’s request, additional information in support of an application.

Rules under paragraph (2)(c) can include rules requiring reports by auditors or independent line producers.

376-270 Amendment of assessments

Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this Division for an income year if:

a certificate issued to a company for a film is revoked under section 376-245 after the time the company lodged its income tax return for an income year; and

the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after the revocation of the certificate.

Note: Section 170 of that Act specifies the periods within which assessments may be amended.

376-275 Review in relation to certain production levels

The Minister must, before the end of 12 months after the commencement of this Division, initiate a review of the effect of this Division in relation to levels of production by the Australian independent production sector compared to levels of production by Australian television broadcasters.

Division 378 — Digital games (tax offset for Australian expenditure on digital games)

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 378

378-A Tax offset for Australian expenditure in developing digital games

378-B Qualifying Australian development expenditure

378-C Certificates for digital games tax offset

378-D Review and other matters

Guide to Division 378

378-1 What this Division is about

Companies may be entitled to a refundable tax offset in relation to qualifying Australian development expenditure incurred in completing or porting a digital game, or carrying on ongoing development of digital games in an income year.

This offset is designed to support the growth of the digital games industry in Australia by providing concessional tax treatment for Australian expenditure.

One of the requirements for entitlement to the digital games tax offset is that the company must be issued with a certificate in respect of the completion, porting or ongoing development of a digital game. The certificate specifies the amount of qualifying Australian development expenditure determined by the Arts Minister in respect of the completion, porting or ongoing development of the digital game.

The amount of the refundable tax offset for an income year for a company is up to 30% of the sum of the determined totals of qualifying Australian development expenditure specified in certificates issued to the company for the income year.

Subdivision 378-A — Tax offset for Australian expenditure in developing digital games

Table of sections

378-10 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure incurred in developing digital games

378-15 Amount of digital games tax offset

378-20 Meaning of digital game

378-25 Arts Minister must issue certificate for the digital games tax offset

378-30 Arts Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure for the digital games tax offset

378-10 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for Australian expenditure incurred in developing digital games

(1) A company is entitled to a *tax offset under this section (the digital games tax offset) for an income year if:

the Arts Minister has issued one or more certificates to the company for the income year under section 378-25 (certificate for the digital games tax offset); and

the company claims the offset in its income tax return for the income year; and

the company:

is an Australian resident that has an ABN; or

is a foreign resident that has a permanent establishment in Australia and an ABN;

when the company lodges the income tax return and when the tax offset is due to be credited to the company.

Note: The digital games tax offset is a refundable tax offset: see section 67-23.

The claim referred to in paragraph (1)(b) may be varied to take account of a variation under subsection 378-15(5) of a notice given under subsection 378-15(3) by the company in relation to the income year. Otherwise, the claim is irrevocable.

378-15 Amount of digital games tax offset

Subject to subsection (2), the amount of the digital games tax offset for a company for an income year is the lower of:

30% of the sum of all the amounts determined by the Arts Minister under section 378-30 that are specified in certificates issued to the company for the income year under section 378-25; and

$20,000,000.

If the sum of the amounts of the digital games tax offset for an income year worked out under subsection (1) for:

the company; and

(b) each other company (each of which is a related company) that is *connected with or is an *affiliate of the company;

is greater than $20,000,000, the amount of the digital games tax offset for the company is:

if the requirements of subsections (3) and (4) are satisfied—the amount specified in the notice given by the company under subsection (3); or

otherwise—nil.

The requirements of this subsection are:

the company gives the Commissioner a notice in the approved form specifying an amount that is not more than 30% of the sum of all the amounts determined by the Arts Minister under section 378-25 that are specified in certificates issued to the company for the income year under section 378-30; and

one or more of the related companies also give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form specifying an amount that is not more than 30% of the sum of all the amounts determined by the Arts Minister under section 378-25 that are specified in certificates issued to the related company for the income year under section 378-30; and

the sum of all the amounts specified in the notices given by the company and those related companies does not exceed $20,000,000.

Example: Bilby Co is primarily responsible for developing a digital game. Wombat Co, a company connected with Bilby Co, is also primarily responsible for developing a digital game. The amount worked out under subsection (1) is $15,000,000 for the income year for each company. Since the sum of these amounts exceeds $20,000,000, the companies must coordinate with one another to ensure that the amount collectively claimed stays under the $20,000,000 cap. Bilby Co and Wombat Co agree that for the income year, they will each give the Commissioner a notice specifying $10,000,000 in notices. If they both do so, each will receive an offset of $10,000,000 for the income year.

A notice given under subsection (3) by a company in relation to an income year must be given at the same time as the company claims the digital games tax offset in its income tax return for the income year.

A company may vary the amount specified in a notice given under subsection (3) in relation to an income year if:

in specifying the amount in the notice:

the company made an inadvertent error in determining whether another company is a related company; and

as a result the company did not take account of the amount of the digital games tax offset for the other company for the income year; and

the company gives the Commissioner a notice in the approved form specifying the varied amount.

Otherwise, the notice is irrevocable.

378-20 Meaning of digital game

(1) A digital game is a game in electronic form that is capable of generating a display on:

a portable electronic device; or

a computer monitor, television screen, liquid crystal display or similar medium;

that allows for the playing of an interactive game.

A component of a digital game is taken to be a digital game if:

a company that:

is a foreign resident that does not have a permanent establishment in Australia; and

owns or controls the rights to develop the digital game;

engages another company (the Australian developer) to develop the component of the digital game; and

the Australian developer:

is an Australian resident that has an ABN, or is a foreign resident that has a permanent establishment in Australia and an ABN; and

is primarily responsible for undertaking activities necessary for the development of the digital game in Australia.

378-25 Arts Minister must issue certificate for the digital games tax offset

Completion certificate

(1) The *Arts Minister must issue a certificate (a completion certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to a *digital game if:

the game is *completed in the income year; and

the company has made an application for a completion certificate in relation to the game; and

the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in completing the game is at least $500,000; and

the Arts Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsection (7) (about the type of game) are met for the game; and

the Arts Minister is satisfied that the company:

has developed the game as an original game; and

is primarily responsible for undertaking activities necessary for the development of the game in Australia.

Note: The operation of paragraph (e) is affected by paragraph 378-45(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the development of a digital game from another company).

(2) A *digital game is completed on the earlier of:

when the game is first released to the general public (other than for testing purposes); or

if the game is developed by a company under a contract entered into at *arm’s length with another entity—when the company first provides a version of the game to the entity in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be released to the general public.

Porting certificate

(3) The *Arts Minister must issue a certificate (a porting certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to a *digital game if:

the game is *ported in the income year; and

the company has made an application for a porting certificate in relation to the game; and

the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in porting the game is at least $500,000; and

the Arts Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsection (7) (about the type of game) are met for the game; and

the Arts Minister is satisfied that the company:

either owns or controls the rights to develop the game or has been engaged to develop the game by the entity who owns or controls the rights to develop the game; and

is primarily responsible for undertaking activities necessary for the development of the game in Australia.

Note: The operation of subparagraph (e)(ii) is affected by paragraph 378-45(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the development of a digital game from another company).

(4) A *digital game that has been *completed is ported on the earlier of:

when the game is first made available to the general public (other than for testing purposes) on a new platform; or

if the company developed the game under a contract entered into at *arm’s length with another entity—when the company first provides a version of the game to the entity in a state where it could reasonably be regarded as ready to be made available to the general public on a new platform.

Ongoing development certificate

(5) The *Arts Minister must issue a certificate (an ongoing development certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to one or more *digital games if:

*ongoing development on the games occurs in the income year; and

the company has made an application for the ongoing development certificate; and

the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the games incurred in the income year on the ongoing development of the games in the income year is at least $500,000; and

the Arts Minister is satisfied that the conditions in subsection (7) (about the type of game) are met for each of the games; and

the Arts Minister is satisfied that the company:

either owns or controls the rights to develop each of the games or has been engaged to develop the games by the entities who own or control the rights to develop the games; and

is primarily responsible for undertaking activities necessary for the development of each of the games in Australia.

Note: The operation of subparagraph (e)(ii) is affected by paragraph 378-45(1)(d) (which deals with the situation where one company takes over the development of a digital game from another company).

(6) Ongoing development on a *digital game means activities undertaken to update, improve or maintain the game after it has been *completed.

Type of digital game

The conditions in this subsection that must be met for a digital game are:

the game is primarily developed to be made available to the general public for entertainment or educational purposes; and

any of the following apply to the game:

the game is made available for use over the internet;

the game is primarily played through the internet;

the game operates only when a player is connected to the internet; and

(c) the game is not any of the following:

(i) a game that is a gambling service (within the meaning of the Interactive Gambling Act 2001), or is substantially comprised of gambling or gambling-like practices;

(ii) a game that contains material likely to lead to the game being refused classification under the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995;

a game that is primarily developed for industrial, corporate or institutional purposes;

a game that is primarily developed to advertise or promote a product, entity or service.

Example 1: A slot machine simulator game would fail to satisfy the condition that the digital game must not be a gambling service or substantially comprise of gambling or gambling-like practices, even if the game did not involve any real money or money equivalent. However, an adventure game in which a player may advance to a higher level by winning a game of poker could still meet this condition.

Example 2: An interactive corporate training program would fail to satisfy the condition that the digital game must not be primarily developed for corporate purposes.

378-30 Arts Minister to determine a company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure for the digital games tax offset

The Arts Minister must, as soon as practicable after deciding to issue a certificate under section 378-25 to a company, determine for the purposes of the digital games tax offset:

if the certificate is to be issued under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate) to the company for an income year in relation to a digital game—the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in *completing the game, whether incurred in that income year or in an earlier income year; or

if the certificate is to be issued under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate) to the company for an income year in relation to a digital game—the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in *porting the game, whether incurred in that income year or in an earlier income year; or

if the certificate is to be issued under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate) to the company for an income year in relation to one or more digital games—the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the games incurred in the income year on the *ongoing development of the games in the income year.

The determination must be in writing, but is not a legislative instrument.

In making the determination, the Arts Minister must have regard to the matters in Subdivision 378-B.

The Arts Minister must give the company written notice of the determination (including reasons for the determination).

Subdivision 378-B — Qualifying Australian development expenditure

Table of sections

378-35 Development expenditure

378-40 Qualifying Australian development expenditure

378-45 Expenditure incurred by prior companies in completing or porting a digital game

378-50 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST

378-35 Development expenditure

(1) A company’s development expenditure on a *digital game is expenditure that the company incurs in, or in relation to, the development of the game.

Specific inclusions

(2) Without limiting subsection (1), the following expenditure of the company in relation to the *digital game is development expenditure on the game:

remuneration provided to persons (including independent contractors but excluding persons of a kind referred to in subsection (5)) who perform work or services directly for the company that are attributable to the development of the game, including the following:

project managers and artistic, creative and design directors;

game designers;

software developers and programmers;

engineers (including for audio, graphics, physics and software);

user experience designers and testers;

behaviour analysts;

quality assurance testers;

writers;

artists, animators and performers (for music, voice and motion capture);

songwriters, composers, musicians and sound designers;

persons performing roles that are broadly similar to those described in subparagraphs (i) to (x);

expenditure on research for the game;

expenditure on prototyping for the game;

expenditure on underlying game infrastructure (for example, game engines and anti-cheating controls);

expenditure on user testing, debugging and collecting user data for the game;

expenditure on updating the game;

(g) expenditure on obtaining or maintaining a classification under the Classification (Publications, Films and Computer Games) Act 1995;

expenditure on adapting the game for use on particular platforms.

Specific exclusions

(3) Despite subsections (1) and (2), the following expenditure of the company in relation to the *digital game is not development expenditure on the game:

the company’s general business overheads including, for example:

expenditure incurred in relation to insurance, audit services, accounting services, human resources, recruitment services and legal services; and

expenditure on travel, accommodation, catering, entertaining or hospitality; and

expenditure on visas or work permits; and

expenditure incurred by way of, or in relation to, the financing of the game or company;

expenditure on, or in connection with, the following persons:

employees and independent contractors whose roles are not related to, or are incidental and not directly attributable to, the development of the game (including for example, administrative employees, social media managers, sales and marketing professionals, community managers and forum administrators and moderators);

employees and independent contractors who were not Australian residents at the time the expenditure was incurred;

expenditure on the use of land or premises;

expenditure on computer hardware or servers, or the rights to access computer hardware or servers;

expenditure on acquiring or licensing software;

expenditure on marketing, advertising, publicity or promotion for the game or company;

expenditure on activities that are incidental to, but not directly attributable to, the development of the game (including, for example, expenditure on externally provided training, conferences, hiring equipment, release events and trade show demonstrations);

expenditure incurred to acquire copyright or a trade mark, or a licence in relation to copyright or a trade mark (other than in relation to acquiring a licence for employees or contractors);

expenditure on obtaining permission to use the image, likeness or name of a person or entity, or obtaining an endorsement by a person or entity;

expenditure on distributing the game;

expenditure on acquiring users for the game;

any expenditure claimed for the purposes of another tax offset, including for the purposes of section 355-100 (tax offsets for R&D);

expenditure that gives rise to notional deductions for the purposes of section 355-205 (deductions for R&D expenditure);

expenditure funded directly or indirectly by:

a Commonwealth grant or subsidy to which Australian businesses are generally eligible; or

a State or Territory grant or subsidy to which Australian business in that State or Territory are generally eligible.

Expenditure incurred in relation to another entity

(4) Despite subsections (1) and (2), the following expenditure of the company in relation to the *digital game is not development expenditure on the game:

(a) expenditure on contracting another entity (the first contractor) to perform work or services for the company where the first contractor contracts for another entity (the second contractor) to perform the work or services and either:

the second contractor is not a natural person (including an independent contractor); or

the second contractor contracts for another entity to perform the work or services;

expenditure incurred in relation to an entity that is an associate of the company, other than an associate of a kind referred to in subsection (5);

expenditure incurred in connection with a transaction in which the company and another party to the transaction did not deal with each other at *arm’s length.

Remuneration of influential employees

(5) If a natural person (an influential employee):

(a) is an *associate of the company because of subparagraph 318(2)(d)(i) or (ii) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

performs work or services directly for the company that are attributable to the development of the digital game in an income year;

then, despite subsection (1), only the first $65,000 of remuneration provided by the company to the influential employee for the income year is development expenditure on the digital game.

Decline in value not development expenditure

Note: A minor voting interest is not sufficient for a person to be an associate of the company.

(6) To avoid doubt, the decline in the value of a *depreciating asset is not development expenditure on a *digital game.

378-40 Qualifying Australian development expenditure

(1) A company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on a *digital game is the company’s *development expenditure on the game to the extent to which the expenditure:

satisfies subsection (2); and

is incurred for, or is reasonably attributable to, goods and services provided or acquired in Australia.

The relevance test

An item of a company’s *development expenditure on a digital game:

if the item of expenditure is substantially attributable to developing the game—satisfies this subsection in full; and

if the item of expenditure is not substantially attributable to developing the game—satisfies this subsection to the extent that the expenditure is attributable to developing the game.

Expenditure that does not qualify

(3) For the purposes of a *digital game in respect of which a company applies for a certificate under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate), an item of the company’s *development expenditure on the game is not qualifying Australian development expenditure to the extent it is incurred after the earliest of the following:

the day on which the game is *completed;

the day on which the company applies for the certificate;

the day on which the game has been available to the general public for the purposes of conducting testing for one year.

(4) For the purposes of a *digital game in respect of which a company applies for a certificate under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate), an item of the company’s *development expenditure on the game is not qualifying Australian development expenditure to the extent it is incurred after the earlier of the following:

the day on which the game is *ported;

the day on which the company applies for the certificate.

You cannot count the same expenditure as qualifying Australian development expenditure for the purposes of more than one certificate under section 378-25.

Example: Expenditure on porting a digital game that is claimed as qualifying Australian development expenditure for the purposes of a certificate under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate) cannot be claimed for the purposes of a certificate under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate).

378-45 Expenditure incurred by prior companies in completing or porting a digital game

Expenditure incurred by outgoing company attributed to incoming company

(1) For the purposes of this Division, if a company (the incoming company) takes over the development of a *digital game from another company (the outgoing company):

expenditure incurred by the outgoing company in relation to *completing or *porting the game is taken to have been incurred by the incoming company; and

for the purposes of determining the extent to which that expenditure is qualifying Australian development expenditure of the incoming company, the incoming company is taken:

to have been an Australian resident at any time when the outgoing company was an Australian resident; and

to have been a foreign resident at any time when the outgoing company was a foreign resident; and

to have had a permanent establishment in Australia at any time when the outgoing company had a permanent establishment in Australia; and

to have had an ABN at any time when the outgoing company had an ABN; and

expenditure that the incoming company incurs in order to be able to take over the development of the game is to be disregarded for the purposes of this Division; and

any activities carried out by the outgoing company in relation to the game are taken, for the purposes of paragraph 378-25(1)(e) and subparagraphs 378-25(3)(e)(ii) and (5)(e)(ii), to have been carried out by the incoming company in relation to the game.

Expenditure previously attributed to outgoing company attributed to incoming company

For the purposes of subsection (1):

expenditure incurred by the outgoing company in relation to *completing or *porting the digital game includes expenditure that the outgoing company is itself taken to have incurred on the digital game because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

the outgoing company is taken:

to have been an Australian resident at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have been an Australian resident because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

to have been a foreign resident at any time when the outgoing company was a foreign resident because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

to have had a permanent establishment in Australia at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have had a permanent establishment in Australia because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

to have had an ABN at any time when the outgoing company is taken to have had an ABN because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection; and

activities carried out by the outgoing company in relation to the digital game include activities that the outgoing company is taken to have carried out in relation to the digital game because of the operation of subsection (1) or a previous operation of that subsection.

Example: If Uncle Carty Ltd starts out developing a digital game and then Mr Grouble Ltd takes over the development of the digital game, Mr Grouble Ltd is taken to have incurred the expenditure that Uncle Carty Ltd incurred on the digital game. If Lousie Ltd subsequently takes over the development of the digital game from Mr Grouble Ltd, Lousie Ltd is taken to have incurred the expenditure that Mr Grouble Ltd incurred on the digital game (including the expenditure of Uncle Carty Ltd that is attributed to Mr Grouble Ltd).

378-50 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST

In determining an amount of expenditure for the purpose of this Division, the expenditure is taken to exclude GST.

Subdivision 378-C — Certificates for digital games tax offset

Table of sections

378-55 Single company or head company may apply for certificate

378-60 Notice of refusal to issue certificate

378-65 Issue of certificate

378-70 Revocation of certificate

378-75 Amendment of certificate

378-80 Amendment of assessments

378-55 Single company or head company may apply for certificate

A company or, if the company is a *member of a consolidated group or a MEC group, the *head company of the consolidated group or MEC group may:

if all the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on a digital game has been incurred in *completing the game—apply to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate) in relation to the game; or

if all the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on a digital game has been incurred in *porting the game—apply to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate) in relation to the game; or

if all the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on a digital game or games has been incurred in an income year on the *ongoing development of the games in the income year—apply to the Arts Minister for the issue of a certificate under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate) in relation to the games for the income year.

The application must:

specify which certificate is sought; and

specify the company’s ABN; and

specify whether the company is an Australian resident or a foreign resident with a permanent establishment in Australia; and

contain sufficient detail to enable the Arts Minister to determine whether an item of expenditure incurred by the company is qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game or on the games in the income year; and

be made in accordance with the rules made under section 378-100 by the Arts Minister, so far as they relate to the requirements for applications.

378-60 Notice of refusal to issue certificate

If:

an application is made under subsection 378-55(1) for the issue of a certificate; and

the Arts Minister decides under section 378-25 not to issue the certificate;

the Arts Minister must give the applicant written notice of the decision (including reasons for the decision).

378-65 Issue of certificate

A certificate issued to a company under section 378-25 must:

be in writing; and

specify the company’s ABN; and

specify the date of issue of the certificate; and

specify the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the relevant digital game or games, as determined by the Arts Minister under section 378-30; and

if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate) or (3) (porting certificate)—specify:

the name of the digital game to which the certificate relates; and

the income year in which the digital game was *completed or *ported (as applicable); and

if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate)—specify:

the name of the digital game, or digital games, to which the certificate relates; and

the income year for which the digital games tax offset is being sought.

The Arts Minister must give the Commissioner notice of the issue of the certificate within 30 days after issuing the certificate.

The notice under subsection (2) must specify:

the company’s name; and

the company’s address; and

the amount specified under paragraph (1)(d) in the certificate; and

other matters agreed to between the Arts Minister and the Commissioner.

378-70 Revocation of certificate

The Arts Minister may revoke a certificate issued under section 378-25 if the Arts Minister is satisfied that:

the issue of the certificate was based on inaccurate information; or

the certificate was obtained by fraud or serious misrepresentation; or

if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(1) (completion certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to a digital game—the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in *completing the game is less than $500,000; or

if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(3) (porting certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to a digital game—the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the game incurred in *porting the game is less than $500,000; or

if the certificate is issued under subsection 378-25(5) (ongoing development certificate) to a company for an income year in relation to one or more digital games—the total of the company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure on the games incurred in the income year on the *ongoing development of the games in the income year is less than $500,000.

If the Arts Minister revokes a certificate under subsection (1), the Arts Minister must, within 30 days after the date of revocation, give written notice of the revocation to:

the company to whom the certificate was issued, including reasons for the decision to revoke the certificate; and

the Commissioner.

If a certificate is revoked under subsection (1), it is taken, for the purposes of this Division, never to have been issued.

Note: This means that if an assessment of a company’s income tax is issued on the basis that the company is entitled to the digital games tax offset and a certificate on which the entitlement is based is then revoked, the assessment will be amended to take account of the fact that the company was never entitled to the offset or was entitled to the offset to a lesser amount: see section 378-80.

Subsection (3) does not apply for the purposes of:

the operation of this section or section 378-85; or

a review by a court or the ART of the decision to revoke the certificate.

378-75 Amendment of certificate

The Arts Minister may amend a certificate issued under section 378-25 at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after the certificate is issued if:

the company to whom the certificate is issued requests, in writing, an amendment to the certificate; or

the Arts Minister decides to amend the certificate on the Arts Minister’s own initiative.

In deciding whether to amend a certificate under subsection (1), the Arts Minister:

must have regard to the matters prescribed by the regulations; and

may have regard to any other matter that the Arts Minister considers relevant.

If the Arts Minister amends a certificate under subsection (1), the Arts Minister must, within 30 days after the date of amendment, give written notice of the amendment (including reasons for the decision) to:

the company to whom the certificate was issued; and

(b) the Commissioner.

If the Arts Minister refuses to amend a certificate upon a request by a company under paragraph (1)(a), the Arts Minister must give the company written notice of the decision (including reasons for the decision).

378-80 Amendment of assessments

Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment given to a company for the purposes of giving effect to this Division for an income year if:

after the Commissioner gave notice of the assessment to the company, a certificate issued under section 378-25 of this Act to the company is either:

amended under section 378-75 of this Act; or

revoked under section 378-70 of this Act; and

the amendment of the assessment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after the amendment or revocation of the certificate.

Note: Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 specifies the periods within which assessments may be amended.

Subdivision 378-D — Review and other matters

Table of sections

378-85 Notice of decision or determination

378-90 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal

378-95 Copy of digital game to be made available to the National Film and Sound Archive of Australia

378-100 Arts Minister may make rules about the digital games tax offset

378-105 Arts Minister may make rules establishing a Digital Games Tax Offset Advisory Board

378-110 Delegation by Arts Minister

378-115 Review of operation of this Division

378-85 Notice of decision or determination

This section applies to:

a notice given under section 378-60 (refusal to issue a certificate); and

a notice of a determination given under section 378-30 (determination of qualifying Australian development expenditure); and

a notice given under section 378-70 (revocation of a certificate); and

a notice given under section 378-75 (amendment or refusal to amend a certificate).

The notice of the decision or determination is to include the statements set out in subsections (3) and (4).

(3) There must be a statement to the effect that, subject to the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024, an application may be made to the *ART, by (or on behalf of) any entity whose interests are affected by the decision or determination, for review of the decision or determination.

There must also be a statement to the effect that a request may be made under section 268 of that Act by (or on behalf of) such an entity for a statement of reasons.

If the Arts Minister fails to comply with subsection (3) or (4), that failure does not affect the validity of the decision or determination.

378-90 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal

Applications may be made to the ART for review of:

a decision made by the Arts Minister under section 378-25 to refuse an application for a certificate; or

a determination made by the Arts Minister under section 378-30 (total of a company’s qualifying Australian development expenditure); or

a decision made by the Arts Minister under section 378-70 to revoke a certificate; or

a decision made by the Arts Minister under section 378-75 to amend or refuse to amend a certificate.

378-95 Copy of digital game to be made available to the National Film and Sound Archive of Australia

The company to whom a certificate is issued under section 378-25 must make available to the National Film and Sound Archive of Australia:

a copy of each digital game named in the certificate; and

a copy of any materials provided to the general public in connection with each of those games.

378-100 Arts Minister may make rules about the digital games tax offset

The Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules:

specifying how applications for certificates in relation to the digital games tax offset are to be made, including:

the form in which applications are to be made; and

the information to be provided in applications; and

methods for verifying such information; and

procedures for providing, at the Arts Minister’s request, additional information in support of an application; and

specifying the form and contents of certificates in relation to the digital games tax offset; and

specifying how amendments of certificates in relation to the digital games tax offset are to be made, including:

the form in which the request for an amendment may be made; and

circumstances in which an amendment may be requested, or made on the Arts Minister’s own initiative; and

the information to be provided in a request for an amendment; and

methods for verifying such information; and

procedures for providing, at the Arts Minister’s request, additional information in support of a request for an amendment; and

providing for provisional certificates (including in relation to a matter referred to in paragraph (a), (b) or (c)).

378-105 Arts Minister may make rules establishing a Digital Games Tax Offset Advisory Board

The Arts Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules:

establishing a Digital Games Tax Offset Advisory Board to:

consider applications under subsection 378-55(1) for certificates under section 378-25; and

advise the Arts Minister on whether to issue certificates under section 378-25; and

perform other functions in relation to the operation of this Division (including the operation of rules made under section 378-100) as are specified in rules made under this section; and

specifying the membership of the Board and the terms and conditions of appointment to the Board; and

specifying procedures to be followed by the Board in performing its functions.

378-110 Delegation by Arts Minister

The Arts Minister may, in writing, delegate all or any of the Arts Minister’s powers under this Division, other than under section 378-100 or section 378-105, to:

the Arts Secretary; or

an SES employee, or acting SES employee, in the Department administered by the Arts Minister.

In exercising powers under a delegation, the delegate must comply with any directions of the Arts Minister.

378-115 Review of operation of this Division

The Arts Minister must cause a review of the operation of this Division to be undertaken as soon as possible after the end of 5 years after the commencement of this Division.

The review must include:

the effectiveness of this Division in supporting the growth of the digital games industry in Australia; and

the fiscal sustainability of the concessional tax treatment provided by this Division.

A written report of the review must be given to the Arts Minister. The report must not include information that is commercially sensitive.

The Arts Minister must cause a copy of the report of the review to be tabled in each House of the Parliament within 15 sitting days of that House after the report is given to the Arts Minister.

Division 380 — National Rental Affordability Scheme

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 380

380-A National Rental Affordability Scheme Tax Offset

380-B Payments made in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme etc.

Guide to Division 380

380-1 What this Division is about

This Division provides a tax offset to certain entities as a result of certificates issued under the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008.

It also ensures that payments made, and non-cash benefits provided, by a State or Territory governmental body in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme are not assessable income and not exempt income.

Subdivision 380-A — National Rental Affordability Scheme Tax Offset

Table of sections

NRAS certificates issued to individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds

380-5 Claims by individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds

NRAS certificates issued to NRAS approved participants

380-10 Members of NRAS consortiums—individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds

380-11 Elections by NRAS approved participants

380-12 Elections by NRAS approved participants—tax offsets

380-13 Elections by NRAS approved participants—special rule for partnerships and trustees

380-14 Members of NRAS consortiums—partnerships and trustees

NRAS certificates issued to partnerships and trustees

380-15 Entities to whom NRAS rent flows indirectly

380-16 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees

380-17 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees—tax offsets

380-18 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees—special rule for partnerships and trustees

380-20 Trustee of a trust that does not have net income for an income year

380-25 When NRAS rent flows indirectly to or through an entity

380-30 Share of NRAS rent

Miscellaneous

380-32 Amended certificates

NRAS certificates issued to individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds

380-5 Claims by individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds

Entitlement

An entity is entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

the Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an NRAS year to the entity (other than in the entity’s capacity (if any) as the *NRAS approved participant of an *NRAS consortium); and

the income year begins in the NRAS year; and

the entity is an individual, a corporate tax entity or a superannuation fund.

Amount

The amount of the entity’s tax offset is the amount stated in the *NRAS certificate.

NRAS certificates issued to NRAS approved participants

380-10 Members of NRAS consortiums—individuals, corporate tax entities and superannuation funds

Entitlement

A *member of an *NRAS consortium is entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

the Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an NRAS year to the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium; and

the income year commences in the NRAS year; and

the member is an individual, a corporate tax entity or a superannuation fund.

Amount

The amount of the tax offset is the total of the amounts worked out using the following formula for each *NRAS dwelling:

covered by the *NRAS certificate; and

from which the *member *derives *NRAS rent during the NRAS year:

Treat the references in subsection (2) to the NRAS year as being references to a period that occurs during the NRAS year, if the *NRAS certificate is apportioned for the period.

380-11 Elections by NRAS approved participants

Scope

This section and sections 380-12 and 380-13 apply if:

(a) a *member (the electing member) of an *NRAS consortium would, apart from subsection 380-12(3), be entitled to a *tax offset under section 380-10 for an income year because of:

an *NRAS certificate in relation to an NRAS year; and

an *NRAS dwelling covered by the NRAS certificate; and

the electing member was the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium at any time during the NRAS year; and

the electing member elects to have this section apply to the NRAS certificate and NRAS dwelling for the income year.

Requirements for an election

The election must be made:

in the approved form; and

within 30 days after the day the Housing Secretary issues the *NRAS certificate.

The Commissioner may require a copy or copies of the election to be given, within the 30 day period mentioned in paragraph (2)(b):

to the Commissioner; or

to each *member of the *NRAS consortium who may be entitled to a tax offset under section 380-12 as a result of the election; or

both to the Commissioner and to each such member.

The election may not be revoked.

380-12 Elections by NRAS approved participants—tax offsets

Entitlement to tax offset

A *member of the *NRAS consortium (other than the electing member) is entitled to a tax offset for the income year if the member is an individual, a corporate tax entity or a superannuation fund.

Amount of tax offset

The amount of the tax offset is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

member’s rent means:

if *NRAS rent was payable for the *NRAS dwelling in relation to the whole of the NRAS year—the rent *derived by the *member from the NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year; or

if NRAS rent was payable for the NRAS dwelling in relation to only part of the NRAS year—the rent derived by the member from the NRAS dwelling during that part of the NRAS year.

total rent means:

if *NRAS rent was payable for the *NRAS dwelling in relation to the whole of the NRAS year—the rent *derived from the NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year; or

if NRAS rent was payable for the NRAS dwelling in relation to only part of the NRAS year—the rent derived from the NRAS dwelling during that part of the NRAS year.

The tax offset to which the electing member would otherwise be entitled under section 380-10 for the income year because of the *NRAS certificate and the *NRAS dwelling is reduced by the same amount.

Treat the references in subsection (2) to the NRAS year as being references to a period that occurs during the NRAS year, if the *NRAS certificate is apportioned for the period.

Amount of tax offset—rent that passes through NRAS approved participant

For the purposes of the references in the definitions in subsection (2) to rent *derived from the *NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year, disregard *NRAS rent derived by a *member of the *NRAS consortium from the NRAS dwelling during a period in the NRAS year, to the extent that another member derives rent from the NRAS dwelling during the period because:

the first member is the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium throughout the period; and

the first member, in accordance with the contractual *arrangements that established the NRAS consortium, passes the NRAS rent on to the other member.

Note: There may be more than one NRAS approved participant during an NRAS year. The electing member may be the NRAS approved participant for only part of the NRAS year.

For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), treat any *NRAS rent retained by the first *member under the *arrangements as management fees or commission as having been passed on to the other member.

380-13 Elections by NRAS approved participants—special rule for partnerships and trustees

For the purposes of sections 380-14 to 380-30 (which apply if a partnership or the trustee of a trust derives NRAS rent), for each *NRAS dwelling:

from which the electing member *derived *NRAS rent during the NRAS year; and

that is covered by the *NRAS certificate; and

from which a partnership, or the trustee of a trust, that is a *member of the *NRAS consortium derived rent during the NRAS year;

treat the following proportion of the NRAS rent as being NRAS rent derived during the NRAS year by the member mentioned in paragraph (c):

where:

member’s rent has the same meaning as in subsection 380-12(2).

total rent has the same meaning as in subsection 380-12(2).

380-14 Members of NRAS consortiums—partnerships and trustees

This section applies if:

the Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an NRAS year to the *NRAS approved participant of an *NRAS consortium; and

the NRAS certificate covers one or more *NRAS dwellings; and

a *member of the NRAS consortium, other than the NRAS approved participant, *derives *NRAS rent during the NRAS year from any of those NRAS dwellings; and

the member is a partnership or a trustee of a trust.

For the purposes of sections 380-15 to 380-20, assume that:

the *member has been issued with an *NRAS certificate in relation to the NRAS year; and

the NRAS certificate covers each *NRAS dwelling:

covered by the NRAS certificate mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) of this section; and

from which the member *derives *NRAS rent during the NRAS year; and

the amount stated in the NRAS certificate for each of those NRAS dwellings is the amount worked out using the formula in subsection 380-10(2) in relation to the NRAS dwelling for the NRAS year for the member.

NRAS certificates issued to partnerships and trustees

380-15 Entities to whom NRAS rent flows indirectly

(1) An entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year (the offset year) if:

the Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an NRAS year to a partnership or a trustee of a trust; and

*NRAS rent *derived:

from any of the *NRAS dwellings covered by the NRAS certificate; and

during the NRAS year;

*flows indirectly to the entity in any income year; and

the offset year of the partnership or trustee begins in the NRAS year; and

the entity is:

an individual; or

a corporate tax entity when the NRAS rent flows indirectly to it; or

(iii) the trustee of a trust that is liable to be assessed on a share of, or all or a part of, the trust’s *net income under section 98, 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the offset year; or

a superannuation fund, an approved deposit fund or a pooled superannuation trust.

Note: The entities covered by this section are the ultimate recipients of the NRAS rent because the NRAS rent does not flow indirectly through them to other entities.

The amount of the tax offset is the sum of the amounts worked out using the following formula for each *NRAS dwelling from which there is *NRAS rent covered by paragraph (1)(b):

Treat the references in subsection (2) to the NRAS year as being references to a period that occurs during the NRAS year, if the *NRAS certificate is apportioned for the period.

380-16 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees

Scope

This section and sections 380-17 and 380-18 apply if:

(a) an entity (the indirect entity) is entitled to a *tax offset under section 380-15 or 380-20 for an income year because *NRAS rent *derived:

(i) from any of the *NRAS dwellings covered by an *NRAS certificate issued by the *Housing Secretary in relation to an *NRAS year to a *member (the electing member) of an *NRAS consortium; and

during the NRAS year;

*flows indirectly to the indirect entity in any income year (or would otherwise flow indirectly to the indirect entity, as mentioned in paragraph 380-20(1)(d)); and

the electing member was the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium at any time during the NRAS year; and

the electing member elects to have this section apply to the NRAS certificate and NRAS dwelling for the income year.

Requirements for an election

The election must be made:

in the approved form; and

within 30 days after the day the Housing Secretary issues the *NRAS certificate.

The Commissioner may require a copy or copies of the election to be given, within the 30 day period mentioned in paragraph (2)(b):

to the Commissioner; or

to each *member of the *NRAS consortium who may be entitled to a tax offset under section 380-17 as a result of the election; or

both to the Commissioner and to each such member.

The election may not be revoked.

380-17 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees—tax offsets

Entitlement to tax offset

A *member of the *NRAS consortium (other than the electing member) is entitled to a tax offset for the income year if the member is an individual, a corporate tax entity or a superannuation fund.

Amount of tax offset

The amount of the tax offset is the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

member’s rent means:

if *NRAS rent was payable for the *NRAS dwelling in relation to the whole of the NRAS year—the rent *derived by the *member from the NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year; or

if NRAS rent was payable for the NRAS dwelling in relation to only part of the NRAS year—the rent derived by the member from the NRAS dwelling during that part of the NRAS year.

total rent means:

if *NRAS rent was payable for the *NRAS dwelling in relation to the whole of the NRAS year—the rent *derived from the NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year; or

if NRAS rent was payable for the NRAS dwelling in relation to only part of the NRAS year—the rent derived from the NRAS dwelling during that part of the NRAS year.

total tax offsets means the total of the *tax offsets to which entities would be entitled under section 380-15 or 380-20 because of *NRAS rent *derived:

from any of the *NRAS dwellings covered by the *NRAS certificate; and

during the NRAS year;

that *flows indirectly to them from the electing member (or would otherwise flow indirectly to them from the electing member, as mentioned in paragraph 380-20(1)(d)).

The tax offset to which the indirect entity would otherwise be entitled under section 380-15 for the income year because of the *NRAS certificate and the *NRAS dwelling is reduced by the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

total tax offsets has the same meaning as in subsection (2).

Treat the references in subsection (2) to the NRAS year as being references to a period that occurs during the NRAS year, if the *NRAS certificate is apportioned for the period.

Amount of tax offset—rent that passes through NRAS approved participant

For the purposes of the references in the definitions in subsection (2) to rent *derived from the *NRAS dwelling during the NRAS year, disregard *NRAS rent derived by a *member of the *NRAS consortium from the NRAS dwelling during a period in the NRAS year, to the extent that another member derives rent from the NRAS dwelling during the period because:

the first member is the *NRAS approved participant of the NRAS consortium throughout the period; and

the first member, in accordance with the contractual *arrangements that established the NRAS consortium, passes the NRAS rent on to the other member.

Note: There may be more than one NRAS approved participant during an NRAS year. The electing member may be the NRAS approved participant for only part of the NRAS year.

For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b), treat any *NRAS rent retained by the first *member under the *arrangements as management fees or commission as having been passed on to the other member.

380-18 Elections by NRAS approved participants that are partnerships or trustees—special rule for partnerships and trustees

For the purposes of sections 380-15 and 380-20 to 380-30 (which apply if a partnership or the trustee of a trust derives NRAS rent), for each *NRAS dwelling:

from which the electing member *derived *NRAS rent during the NRAS year; and

that is covered by the *NRAS certificate; and

from which a partnership or trust that is a *member of the *NRAS consortium derived rent during the NRAS year;

treat the following proportion of the NRAS rent as being NRAS rent derived during the NRAS year by the member mentioned in paragraph (c):

where:

member’s rent has the same meaning as in subsection 380-14B(2).

total rent has the same meaning as in subsection 380-14B(2).

380-20 Trustee of a trust that does not have net income for an income year

(1) An entity is entitled to a *tax offset for an income year (the offset year) if:

the Housing Secretary issues an *NRAS certificate in relation to an NRAS year to a partnership or a trustee of a trust; and

the entity is a trustee of a trust; and

the trust mentioned in paragraph (b) does not have a *net income for an income year; and

*NRAS rent *derived during the NRAS year from an *NRAS dwelling covered by the NRAS certificate would otherwise *flow indirectly to the entity in the income year mentioned in paragraph (c) as if:

the trust did have a net income for the income year; and

for the purposes of paragraph 380-25(4)(b), the entity has a share amount, being the net income referred to in subparagraph (i) of this paragraph; and

the entity’s *share of the NRAS rent under section 380-30 was a positive amount; and

the offset year of the partnership or trustee begins in the NRAS year.

The amount of the tax offset is the amount worked out in accordance with subsection 380-15(2), as if the reference in the formula to the *NRAS certificate were a reference to the NRAS certificate mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) of this section.

For the purposes of working out the entity’s *share of *NRAS rent for an *NRAS dwelling, assume subparagraphs (1)(d)(i), (ii) and (iii) of this section apply.

If the trustee of a trust is entitled to a tax offset under this section:

a beneficiary of the trust; or

a subsequent entity to whom *NRAS rent for an *NRAS dwelling mentioned in paragraph (1)(d) *flows indirectly;

is not entitled to a tax offset under this Subdivision in relation to the NRAS rent *derived during the NRAS year from for the NRAS dwelling.

380-25 When NRAS rent flows indirectly to or through an entity

This section sets out the circumstances in which *NRAS rent:

(a) flows indirectly to an entity (subsection (2), (3) or (4)); or

(b) flows indirectly through an entity (subsection (5)).

Partners

(2) *NRAS rent flows indirectly to a partner in a partnership in an income year if, and only if:

during that income year, the NRAS rent is *derived by the partnership, or *flows indirectly to the partnership as a beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (3); and

the partner has an individual interest:

(i) in the partnership’s *net income for that income year that is covered by paragraph 92(1)(a) or (b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

in a partnership loss of the partnership for that income year that is covered by paragraph 92(2)(a) or (b) of that Act;

(whether or not that individual interest becomes assessable income in the hands of the partner); and

the partner’s *share of the NRAS rent under section 380-30 is a positive amount (whether or not the partner actually receives any of that share).

Beneficiaries

(3) *NRAS rent flows indirectly to a beneficiary of a trust in an income year if, and only if:

during that income year, the NRAS rent is *derived by the trustee of the trust, or *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner or beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (2) or this subsection; and

(b) the beneficiary has this amount for that income year (the share amount):

(i) a share of the trust’s *net income for that income year that is covered by paragraph 97(1)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

an individual interest in the trust’s net income for that income year that is covered by section 98A or 100 of that Act;

(whether or not the share amount becomes assessable income in the hands of the beneficiary); and

the beneficiary’s *share of the NRAS rent under section 380-30 is a positive amount (whether or not the beneficiary actually receives any of that share).

Trustees

(4) *NRAS rent flows indirectly to the trustee of a trust in an income year if, and only if:

during that income year, the NRAS rent is *derived by the trustee, or *flows indirectly to the trustee as a partner or beneficiary because of a previous application of subsection (2) or (3); and

(b) the trustee is liable or, but for another provision in this Act, would be liable, to be assessed in respect of an amount (the share amount) that is:

(i) a share of the trust’s *net income for that income year under section 98 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

all or a part of the trust’s net income for that income year under section 99 or 99A of that Act;

(whether or not the share amount becomes assessable income in the hands of the trustee); and

the trustee’s *share of the NRAS rent under section 380-30 is a positive amount (whether or not the trustee actually receives any of that share).

Note: A trustee to whom NRAS rent flows indirectly under this subsection is entitled to a tax offset under section 380-15 and the NRAS rent does not flow indirectly through the trustee to another entity.

(5) *NRAS rent flows indirectly through an entity (the first entity) to another entity if, and only if:

the other entity is the focal entity in an item of the table in section 380-30 in relation to the NRAS rent; and

that focal entity’s *share of the NRAS rent is based on the first entity’s share of the NRAS rent as an intermediary entity in that or another item of the table.

380-30 Share of NRAS rent

Object of section

The object of this section is to ensure that:

*NRAS rent derived by a partnership or the trustee of a trust is allocated notionally amongst entities who *derive benefits from that NRAS rent; and

that allocation corresponds with the way in which those benefits were derived.

(2) An entity’s share of *NRAS rent is an amount notionally allocated to the entity as its share of the NRAS rent, whether or not the entity actually receives any of that NRAS rent.

(3) That amount is equal to the entity’s share of the *NRAS rent as the focal entity in column 3 of an item of the table.

Note: An entity’s share of the NRAS rent is based on the share of the NRAS rent of each preceding intermediary entity through which the NRAS rent flows, starting from the intermediary entity to whom the NRAS rent is paid.

This means that in some cases (see items 2 and 4 of the table), more than one item of the table will need to be applied to work out the share of the NRAS rent of an ultimate recipient of the NRAS rent.

Note: In item 3 or 4 of the table, the trustee of a trust can be both the intermediary entity and the focal entity in the same item.

Miscellaneous

380-32 Amended certificates

A reference in this Subdivision to an *NRAS certificate in relation to an NRAS year is to be treated as a reference to an amended NRAS certificate in relation to the NRAS year, if the Housing Secretary issues such an amended certificate.

Subdivision 380-B — Payments made in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme etc.

Table of sections

380-35 Payments made and non-cash benefits provided in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme

380-35 Payments made and non-cash benefits provided in relation to the National Rental Affordability Scheme

A payment made to you, or a *non-cash benefit provided to you, (whether directly or indirectly, such as through an *NRAS consortium of which you are a *member) by:

a Department of a State or Territory; or

a body (whether incorporated or not) established for a public purpose by or under a law of a State or Territory;

in relation to your participation in the National Rental Affordability Scheme is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

Division 385 — Primary production

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 385

385-E Primary producer can elect to spread or defer tax on profit from forced disposal or death of live stock

385-F Insurance for loss of live stock or trees

385-G Double wool clips

385-H Rules that apply to all elections made under Subdivisions 385-E, 385-F and 385-G

Guide to Division 385

385-1 What this Division is about

This Division contains rules that are specific to primary producers.

Table of sections

385-5 Where to find some other rules relevant to primary producers

385-5 Where to find some other rules relevant to primary producers

Subdivision 385-E — Primary producer can elect to spread or defer tax on profit from forced disposal or death of live stock

Guide to Subdivision 385-E

385-90 What this Subdivision is about

You can elect to exclude from your assessable income the profit on a forced disposal or death of live stock that you held as assets of a primary production business you carry on in Australia.

The excluded profit is then brought into your assessable income over a 5 year period in one of 2 ways.

Table of sections

385-95 Basic principles for elections under this Subdivision

Operative provisions

385-100 Cases where you can make an election

385-105 Election to spread tax profit over 5 years

385-110 Alternative election to defer tax profit and reduce cost of replacement live stock

385-115 Your assessable income includes an amount for replacement live stock you breed

385-120 Purchase price of replacement live stock is reduced

385-125 Alternative election because of bovine tuberculosis has effect over 10 years not 5

385-95 Basic principles for elections under this Subdivision

You can elect:

to spread the profit on the disposal or death over the income year of the disposal or death and the next 4 income years (election to spread); or

to defer including the profit in your assessable income, if you will use the proceeds of the disposal or death mainly to replace the live stock (election to defer).

If you make an election to defer, the profit is “used” over the next 5 income years:

by reducing the amount for which you are taken to have bought replacement stock (as a result, your tax profit on the disposal of the replacement stock is increased); and

by including in your assessable income amounts for replacement stock that you breed.

Any unused part of the profit is included in your assessable income for the fifth income year.

Operative provisions

385-100 Cases where you can make an election

You can make an election if:

you dispose of *live stock, or they die, because:

land is compulsorily acquired or resumed under an Act; or

a State or Territory leases land for a cattle tick eradication campaign; or

pasture or fodder is destroyed by fire, drought or flood and you will use the proceeds of the disposal or death mainly to buy replacement stock or to maintain breeding stock for the purpose of replacing the live stock; or

they are compulsorily destroyed under an Australian law for the control of a disease or they die of such a disease; or

you receive an official notification under an Australian law dealing with contamination of property; and

you held the live stock as assets of a *primary production business you carry on in Australia; and

apart from this Subdivision, your assessable income for any income year would include the proceeds of the disposal or death.

(2) The proceeds of the disposal or death are:

if you dispose of the *live stock or their carcases in the ordinary course of business—the total of:

any amount you receive as payment for the live stock or carcases; and

any compensation you receive for the death or destruction, or a reduction in *market value, of the live stock or their carcases from an *Australian government agency; or

if you dispose of the *live stock or their carcases outside the ordinary course of business—the total of:

the market value of the live stock or their carcases, at the time of disposal; and

any compensation you receive for the death or destruction, or a reduction in market value, of the live stock or their carcases from an *Australian government agency; or

if the *live stock die, and you do not dispose of their carcases to someone else—any compensation you receive for their death or destruction from an *Australian government agency.

385-105 Election to spread tax profit over 5 years

You can elect:

to include in your assessable income for the disposal year the proceeds of the disposal or death, reduced by the tax profit on the disposal or death; and

to include 20% of the tax profit on the disposal or death in your assessable income for the disposal year; and

to include 20% of the tax profit on the disposal or death in your assessable income for each of the next 4 income years.

For rules about the making and effect of an election, see Subdivision 385-H.

(2) The disposal year is the income year in which you dispose of the *live stock, or they die, as mentioned in subsection 385-100(1).

(3) The tax profit on the disposal or death is any amount remaining after subtracting from the *proceeds of the disposal or death the sum of:

the amount paid or payable for the purchase of as many of the *live stock as you purchased during the income year; and

the *value of the rest of the live stock as trading stock on hand at the start of the income year.

385-110 Alternative election to defer tax profit and reduce cost of replacement live stock

Alternatively, you can elect:

to include in your assessable income for the disposal year the proceeds of the disposal or death, reduced by the tax profit on the disposal or death; and

to reduce the cost of replacement *live stock you buy in the disposal year (or any of the next 5 income years) by amounts totalling not more than the tax profit on the disposal or death; and

to include in your assessable income for the last of the 5 income years following the disposal year any unused tax profit on the disposal or death on the last day of that year.

Note: If the election is made because of bovine tuberculosis, it has effect over 10 income years instead of 5: see section 385-125.

For rules about the making and effect of an election, see Subdivision 385-H

However, you can only make this election if you will use the proceeds of the disposal or death mainly to buy replacement *live stock, or to maintain breeding stock for the purpose of replacing the live stock that were disposed of or died.

(3) The unused tax profit on the disposal or death is the *tax profit on the disposal or death less the total of:

the amounts included in your assessable income under section 385-115 for replacement animals you breed; and

the amounts by which the amount paid or payable for the purchase of replacement animals is reduced under section 385-120.

385-115 Your assessable income includes an amount for replacement live stock you breed

If you make the election in section 385-110, then for the disposal year and each of the next 5 income years, your assessable income includes any amount you choose for each replacement animal you breed during that income year. (However, you can choose not to include an amount.)

385-120 Purchase price of replacement live stock is reduced

If you make the election in section 385-110, then the amount paid or payable for the purchase of each replacement animal you buy in the disposal year, or in the next 5 income years, is treated as if it were reduced by the reduction amount.

Meaning of reduction amount

(2) The reduction amount is:

so much of the tax profit on the disposal or death as is attributable to live stock of the species you are replacing;

divided by:

the number of animals of that species that you disposed of or that died.

However, if:

you purchase a replacement animal of a different species from the *live stock it replaces; and

you pay substantially more for it than you could have paid for a replacement animal of the same species;

the reduction amount for the animal is any reasonable amount at least equal to the amount worked out under subsection (2).

Exception to avoid reducing unused tax profit to less than nil

However, if applying subsection (1) to a particular purchase would reduce the unused tax profit on the disposal or death to less than nil, instead reduce the amount paid or payable for the purchase of each replacement animal in that purchase by:

the unused tax profit on the disposal or death;

divided by:

the number of animals in the purchase.

385-125 Alternative election because of bovine tuberculosis has effect over 10 years not 5

If you can make an election under this Subdivision because:

*live stock are compulsorily destroyed under an Australian law for the control of bovine tuberculosis; or

*live stock die of that disease;

sections 385-110 to 385-120 apply as if they referred to 10 income years instead of 5 years.

Subdivision 385-F — Insurance for loss of live stock or trees

Table of sections

385-130 Insurance for loss of live stock or trees

385-130 Insurance for loss of live stock or trees

If your assessable income for an income year would otherwise include an insurance recovery for a loss of *live stock, or for a loss by fire of trees, that you hold as assets of a *primary production business you carry on in Australia, you can elect:

to include only 20% of the insurance recovery in your assessable income for that income year; and

to include 20% of the insurance recovery in your assessable income for each of the next 4 income years.

For rules about the making and effect of an election, see Subdivision 385-H.

Subdivision 385-G — Double wool clips

Table of sections

385-135 Election to defer including profit on second wool clip

385-135 Election to defer including profit on second wool clip

(1) If your assessable income for an income year would otherwise include the *proceeds of the sale of 2 wool clips because fire, drought or flood causes you to shear your sheep earlier than normal, you can elect to include in your assessable income for the next income year the *profit on the sale of the earlier than normal wool clip.

For rules about the making and effect of an election, see Subdivision 385-H.

However, at the time the wool was shorn, the sheep must have been assets of a *primary production business you carried on in Australia. Also, the fire, drought or flood must have been in an area of Australia where you carried on that business at that time.

(3) The proceeds of the sale of 2 wool clips are:

the proceeds of the sale of the earlier than normal wool clip; and

an amount covered by one or more of the following:

proceeds of the sale of another wool clip in the income year;

proceeds of the sale of wool shorn in the previous income year that you hold at the start of the income year and that you took into account at cost in working out the *value of your trading stock under Division 60 at the end of the previous income year;

an amount for wool shorn in the previous income year that is included in your assessable income of the income year because of a previous election under this section.

(4) The profit on the sale of the earlier than normal wool clip is the proceeds of the sale of the wool clip that would otherwise be included in your assessable income for the income year, less the expenses you incur in the income year that are directly attributable to the earlier shearing and sale.

Subdivision 385-H — Rules that apply to all elections made under Subdivisions 385-E, 385-F and 385-G

Table of sections

385-145 Partnerships and trusts

385-150 Time for making election

385-155 Amounts are assessable income from carrying on the primary production business

385-160 Effect of certain events on election

385-163 Disentitling events

385-165 New partnership can elect to be treated as same entity as old partnership

385-170 New partnership can elect to take advantage of election made by former owner of the business

385-145 Partnerships and trusts

If a partnership or trustee carries on a *primary production business, only the partnership or trustee can make an election under Subdivision 385-E, 385-F or 385-G.

385-150 Time for making election

You can only make an election under Subdivision 385-E, 385-F or 385-G before you lodge your income tax return for the last income year for which your assessable income would (apart from the election) include any of:

the proceeds of the disposal or death of *live stock; or

the insurance recovery for the loss of *live stock or trees; or

the *proceeds of the sale of the 2 wool clips.

The Commissioner may allow you further time to make the election.

385-155 Amounts are assessable income from carrying on the primary production business

The following are taken to be assessable income from carrying on a *primary production business in Australia:

an amount included in your assessable income because of an election under Subdivision 385-E, 385-F or 385-G; or

an amount included in your assessable income because of section 385-160 (Effect of certain events on election).

385-160 Effect of certain events on election

You cannot make an election under Subdivision 385-E, 385-F or 385-G after a disentitling event happens.

(2) If a *disentitling event happens after you make an election under Subdivision 385-E, 385-F or 385-G, your assessable income for the income year in which the event happens includes:

the proceeds of the disposal or death of *live stock; or

the insurance recovery for the loss of *live stock or trees; or

the proceeds of the sale of 2 wool clips;

reduced by each amount that, because of the election, is included in your assessable income for that or an earlier income year.

(3) However, if a *disentitling event happens after you make an election under section 385-110 (Alternative election to defer tax profit and reduce cost of replacement live stock), your assessable income for the income year in which the event happens includes any *unused tax profit on the disposal or death on the last day of that income year.

385-163 Disentitling events

(1) A disentitling event happens when:

you die; or

you become bankrupt, insolvent, commence to be wound up, apply to take the benefit of a law for the relief of bankrupt or insolvent debtors, compound with creditors, or make an assignment of any property for the benefit of creditors; or

you leave Australia permanently, or it appears to the Commissioner that you are about to do so; or

you cease to carry on the *primary production business to which the election relates.

(2) In the case of a partnership, a disentitling event happens when:

a partner in the partnership becomes bankrupt, insolvent, commences to be wound up, applies to take the benefit of a law for the relief of bankrupt or insolvent debtors, compounds with creditors, or makes an assignment of any property for the benefit of creditors; or

a partner leaves Australia permanently, or it appears to the Commissioner that a partner is about to do so; or

the partnership ceases to carry on the *primary production business to which the election relates; or

there is a variation in the constitution of the partnership or the interests of the partners.

(3) In the case of a trust, a disentitling event happens when:

an order for the administration of the trust estate is made under a law relating to bankruptcy; or

a beneficiary becomes bankrupt, insolvent, commences to be wound up, applies to take the benefit of a law for the relief of bankrupt or insolvent debtors, compounds with creditors, or makes an assignment of any property for the benefit of creditors; or

the trustee or a beneficiary leaves Australia permanently, or it appears to the Commissioner that the trustee or a beneficiary is about to do so; or

the trustee ceases to carry on the *primary production business to which the election relates.

(4) However, in the case of a trust, a disentitling event does not happen if:

either:

the disentitling event is covered by paragraph 3(c); or

the disentitling event is covered by paragraph 3(d) and a beneficiary leaves Australia permanently, or it appears to the Commissioner that a beneficiary is about to do so; and

the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (5).

The Commissioner may make a determination for the purpose of subsection (4) if it is fair and reasonable to do so having regard to:

the nature of the disentitling event to which subsection (3) applies; and

any relevant circumstances relating to the beneficiary mentioned in paragraph (3)(c) or (d); and

any other relevant circumstances relating to the trust; and

any other matters the Commissioner considers relevant.

A determination made under subsection (5) must be made in writing.

The Commissioner must give the trustee of the trust a copy of the determination.

385-165 New partnership can elect to be treated as same entity as old partnership

Under Subdivision 385-E, 385-F or 385-G a new partnership can elect to be treated as a continuation of an old partnership that would otherwise cease to exist if:

it immediately takes over the relevant *primary production business of the old partnership; and

partners, together entitled to at least 25% of the income of the new partnership, were also partners in the old partnership.

The new partnership must make this election before it lodges its income tax return for the income year in which it takes over the business.

385-170 New partnership can elect to take advantage of election made by former owner of the business

If an entity (except a partnership):

has made an election under Subdivision 385-E, 385-F or 385-G; and

transfers the relevant *primary production business to a partnership; and

is entitled to at least 25% of the income of that partnership;

the partnership may elect to apply the Subdivision under which the entity made the election to all future events as if it were that entity.

The partnership must make this election before it lodges its income tax return for the income year in which the business is transferred to it.

Division 392 — Long-term averaging of primary producers’ tax liability

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 392

392-A Is your income tax affected by averaging?

392-B What kind of averaging adjustment must you make?

392-C How big is your averaging adjustment?

392-D Effect of permanent reduction of your basic taxable income

Guide to Division 392

392-1 What this Division is about

If you are a primary producer for 2 or more years in a row, this Division evens out your income tax liability from year to year. (It does so by reducing the effect that fluctuations in your taxable income have on the marginal rates of tax that apply to you from year to year.)

Table of sections

392-5 Overview of averaging process

392-5 Overview of averaging process

How averaging adjustments work

This Division reduces or increases your income tax liability to bring it closer to what it would have been if worked out using a special rate of income tax. That rate (the comparison rate) is based on the income tax that you would pay for the current year on the average of your taxable income for up to the last 5 income years.

Example: The graph shows how averaging taxable income reduces the effect of variations in taxable income (giving a fairly steady comparison rate from year to year).

Tax offset as averaging adjustment

(2) You may be entitled to a tax offset if the income tax you would pay on your basic taxable income for the current year at the comparison rate is less than the income tax you would pay on that income (apart from this Division and certain other provisions).

See the examples of years 5, 6, 7 and 9 in the graph in subsection (4).

Extra income tax as averaging adjustment

(3) You may be liable to extra income tax on some or all of your basic taxable income for the current year if the income tax you would pay on your basic taxable income for the current year at the comparison rate is more than the income tax on that income (apart from this Division and certain other provisions).

See the examples of years 8 and 10 in the graph in subsection (4).

Example of the effect of averaging

The graph shows an example of the effect of averaging, using the same income figures as the graph in the example in subsection (1).

Note: The example assumes that all the basic taxable income was from a primary production business.

Effect of non-primary production income on averaging adjustment

Your income from sources other than your primary production business may affect the adjustment of your income tax. If more than $5,000 of your basic taxable income is attributable to those sources, your averaging adjustment will be reduced to reflect the proportion of your basic taxable income attributable to primary production. (There are special shading-out arrangements if your taxable income from other sources is between $5,000 and $10,000.)

No adjustment in certain cases

Your income tax will not be adjusted under this Division in certain cases. In particular, you can choose not to have your income tax adjusted under this Division for 10 income years.

Subdivision 392-A — Is your income tax affected by averaging?

Table of sections

392-10 Individuals who carry on a primary production business

392-15 Meaning of basic taxable income

392-20 Trust beneficiaries taken to be carrying on primary production business

392-22 Trustee may choose that a beneficiary is a chosen beneficiary of the trust

392-25 Choosing not to have your income tax averaged

392-10 Individuals who carry on a primary production business

This Division applies to your assessment for the current year if:

you are an individual; and

you have carried on a *primary production business in Australia for 2 or more income years in a row (the last of which is the current year); and

for at least one of those income years your basic taxable income is less than or equal to your basic taxable income for the next of those income years.

Note 1: It follows that this Division does not apply if your basic taxable income has decreased every income year since you started carrying on a primary production business.

Note 2: In working out whether this Division applies to your assessment for an income year, you may need to take account of income years before the 1998-99 income year: see section 392-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Continued application of this Division after you stop carrying on a primary production business

This Division also applies to your assessment for the current year if:

this Division applied to your assessment for an earlier income year during which you carried on a *primary production business in Australia; and

you do not carry on that business during the current year; and

at least one of the following conditions is met for each income year (including the current year) after the income year in which you stopped carrying on that business:

your assessable income for the income year included assessable income that was *derived from, or resulted from, your having carried on that business;

you carried on a *primary production business in Australia during the income year.

Note: In working out whether this Division applies to your assessment for an income year, you may need to take account of income years before the 1998-99 income year. See section 392-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

This section applies as if you did not carry on a *primary production business during a particular income year if, because you made a choice under section 392-25, this Division did not apply to your assessment for that income year.

Note: A choice that you make under section 392-25 has the effect that this Division does not apply to your assessments for 10 income years. None of these income years can be taken into account in applying this section after the 10 year opt-out period.

392-15 Meaning of basic taxable income

(1) Work out your basic taxable income for an income year as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out what would have been your taxable income for the income year if your assessable income for the income year:

(a) had not included any amount under section 82-65, 82-70 or 302-145 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (certain superannuation benefits and employment termination payments); and

Note: This means that certain deductions will also be excluded.

(b) had not included any *net capital gain for the income year.

Step 2. Subtract from the Step 1 amount any above-average special professional income included in your taxable income for the income year under Division 405.

(2) However, your basic taxable income for an income year is nil if:

you do not have a taxable income for the income year; or

(b) the amount worked out under subsection (1) for the income year is less than nil.

392-20 Trust beneficiaries taken to be carrying on primary production business

You are taken to carry on a *primary production business carried on by a trust during an income year if you satisfy the requirements in subsection (2), (3) or (4).

Primary production business carried on by a trust with beneficiary presently entitled to income of the trust

You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if:

you are a beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (1); and

you are presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust for the income year; and

if you are presently entitled to less than $1,040 of the income of the trust for the income year—the Commissioner is satisfied that your interest in the trust was not acquired or granted wholly or primarily to enable your income tax to be adjusted under this Division.

Primary production business carried on by a fixed trust with no income of the trust

You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if:

you are a beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (1); and

at all times during the income year, the manner or extent to which each beneficiary of the trust can benefit from the trust is not capable of being significantly affected by the exercise, or non-exercise, of a power; and

the trust does not have any income of the trust for the income year to which a beneficiary of the trust could be presently entitled; and

if the trust had income of the trust for the income year, you would have been presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust.

Primary production business carried on by a non-fixed trust with no income of the trust

You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if you do not satisfy the requirements in subsection (3) and you are a chosen beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (1) for the purposes of section 392-22 for the income year.

Public trading trusts

(5) You are not taken to carry on a *primary production business carried on by the trustee of a public trading trust (as defined in section 102R of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, which deals with public trading trusts).

392-22 Trustee may choose that a beneficiary is a chosen beneficiary of the trust

The trustee of a trust may choose that a beneficiary of the trust is a chosen beneficiary of the trust for an income year if the trust does not have income of the trust for the income year to which a beneficiary of the trust could be presently entitled.

The maximum number of choices that the trustee may make in respect of the trust for an income year is the higher of:

the number of individuals that were taken to be carrying on a *primary production business carried on by the trust under subsection 392-20(1) in the income year immediately before the current income year; and

12.

A choice made under subsection (1) must be:

in writing; and

signed by the trustee and the person chosen.

The trustee can make the choice no later than the time it lodges the trust’s income tax return for the income year to which the choice relates. However, the Commissioner can allow the trustee to make a choice at a later time.

A choice cannot be revoked or varied.

392-25 Choosing not to have your income tax averaged

You can choose that this Division (except this section) not apply to your assessment for an income year. If you make this choice, this Division (except this section) does not apply to your assessment for the income year or any of the next 9 income years.

Your choice must not cover any income year that a previous choice of yours has already covered.

You must make your choice in writing and give it to the Commissioner by the time you lodge your income tax return for the income year to which your choice relates. However, the Commissioner may allow you to give the choice later.

Your choice cannot be revoked after it is given to the Commissioner.

Subdivision 392-B — What kind of averaging adjustment must you make?

Guide to Subdivision 392-B

392-30 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision explains how to work out whether you are entitled to a tax offset for the current year or whether you must pay extra income tax for the current year.

Table of sections

Tax offset or extra income tax

392-35 Will you get a tax offset or have to pay extra income tax?

How to work out the comparison rate

392-40 Identify income years for averaging your basic taxable income

392-45 Work out your average income for those years

392-50 Work out the income tax on your average income at basic rates

392-55 Work out the comparison rate

Tax offset or extra income tax

392-35 Will you get a tax offset or have to pay extra income tax?

Compare:

(a) the amount (the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate) worked out using the formula:

the amount of income tax that you would pay on your basic taxable income for the current year at basic rates.

Note: You must disregard some provisions of this Act in working out amounts of income tax for the purposes of this subsection: see subsection (5).

Tax offset

(2) You are entitled to a *tax offset equal to the *averaging adjustment worked out under Subdivision 392-C if the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate is less than the amount of income tax you would pay at *basic rates.

Extra income tax

(3) You must pay extra income tax on the *averaging component of your *basic taxable income if the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate is more than the amount of income tax you would pay at *basic rates.

Note 1: Section 12A of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 sets the rate at which you must pay extra income tax on the averaging component of your basic taxable income.

Note 2: It does so in such a way that, generally, the extra income tax you must pay equals the averaging adjustment worked out under Subdivision 392-C.

Meaning of basic rates

(4) The basic rates at which you would pay income tax are:

(a) if you are a resident taxpayer as defined in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986—the rates of income tax in paragraph (1)(b) of Part I of Schedule 7 to that Act, taking into account the way it would apply with any changes to your tax-free threshold under section 20 of that Act; or

(b) if you are a non-resident taxpayer as defined in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986—the rates of income tax in paragraph 1(b) of Part II of Schedule 7 to that Act.

Disregard certain provisions in working out amounts

Work out the amount of income tax mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) as if:

the following provisions did not apply:

this Division;

(ii) section 94 (Partner not having control and disposal of share in partnership income) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

(iii) Division 6AA (Income of certain children) of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

(iv) Part VIIB (Medicare levy) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

(b) you were not entitled to any rebate or credit under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or to any *tax offset under this Act.

No adjustment

This Division does not affect your income tax for the current year if the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate equals the amount of income tax you would pay at basic rates.

Note: The 2 amounts will be equal if:

your basic taxable income and your average income are both below the tax-free threshold; or

your average income equals your basic taxable income for the current year.

How to work out the comparison rate

392-40 Identify income years for averaging your basic taxable income

The income years over which you must average your basic taxable income are:

if this Division has applied to your assessment for at least 4 income years in a row (including the current year)—the current year and the 4 previous income years; or

if this Division has applied to your assessment for less than 4 income years in a row (including the current year)—those income years and the last income year before them.

Note: You may need to average your basic taxable income for one or more income years before the 1998-99 income year. See section 392-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

392-45 Work out your average income for those years

(1) Work out your average income in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Add up your basic taxable income for each of the income years over which you must average your basic taxable income.

Step 2. Divide the sum by the number of those income years.

Step 3. Round the result down to the nearest whole dollar if the result is not already a number of whole dollars.

(2) Your basic assessable income for an income year is your assessable income for the income year, less:

any amount included in your assessable income under section 82-65, 82-70 or 302-145 (certain employment termination payments and superannuation benefits); and

any net capital gain included in your assessable income under Division 102.

392-50 Work out the income tax on your average income at basic rates

Work out the amount of income tax that you would pay on your *average income for the current year at basic rates.

392-55 Work out the comparison rate

Work out the comparison rate using the formula:

Subdivision 392-C — How big is your averaging adjustment?

Guide to Subdivision 392-C

392-60 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision explains how to work out the amount of the averaging adjustment of your income tax for the current year (whether it is a tax offset or is used by the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 to set the rate at which you must pay extra income tax).

Table of sections

392-65 What your averaging adjustment reflects

Your gross averaging amount

392-70 Working out your gross averaging amount

Your averaging adjustment

392-75 Working out your averaging adjustment

How to work out your averaging component

392-80 Work out your taxable primary production income

392-85 Work out your taxable non-primary production income

392-90 Work out your averaging component

392-65 What your averaging adjustment reflects

Your averaging adjustment is a proportion of your gross averaging amount, taking account of:

your taxable primary production income (the part of your basic taxable income from your primary production business); and

your taxable non-primary production income (the part of your basic taxable income from other sources).

Your averaging component is the means of taking into account the different parts of your basic taxable income in working out your averaging adjustment.

If your taxable non-primary production income is less than or equal to $5,000, your averaging component equals the whole of your basic taxable income. (In other words, your averaging component includes all of your taxable primary production income and all of your taxable non-primary production income.)

If your taxable non-primary production income is between $5,000 and $10,000, a shading-out system applies so that your averaging component includes some of your taxable non-primary production income as well as all of your taxable primary production income.

If your taxable non-primary production income is $10,000 or more, your averaging component equals your taxable primary production income. Your averaging component does not include any of your taxable non-primary production income.

The following diagram shows examples of these relationships.

The second and third columns show that as taxable non-primary production income increases above $5,000 (up to a maximum of $10,000), less of it is counted in the averaging component.

Your gross averaging amount

392-70 Working out your gross averaging amount

Your gross averaging amount is the amount of the difference between the following amounts worked out under section 392-35:

the income tax you would pay at the comparison rate;

the amount of income tax that you would pay on your basic taxable income for the current year at basic rates.

Your averaging adjustment

392-75 Working out your averaging adjustment

Work out your averaging adjustment for the *current year using the formula:

How to work out your averaging component

392-80 Work out your taxable primary production income

(1) Work out your taxable primary production income for the *current year in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Compare your assessable primary production income for the current year with your primary production deductions for the current year.

Step 2. If your assessable primary production income is larger than your primary production deductions, your taxable primary production income is the difference between them.

Step 3. If your primary production deductions are larger than (or equal to) your assessable primary production income, your taxable primary production income is nil.

Assessable primary production income

(2) Your assessable primary production income for the *current year is the sum of:

any amount of your basic assessable income for the current year that was *derived from, or resulted from, your carrying on a *primary production business; and

any amount included in your assessable income under section 420-25 for the current year because you cease to *hold a primary producer registered emissions unit; and

any amount of your basic assessable income for the current year to the extent that:

you are a beneficiary of a trust that is carrying on a primary production business; and

the amount is your share of the trust’s *net income that is attributable to, or resulted from, an amount being included in the trust’s assessable income under section 420-25 because the trust ceases to hold an Australian carbon credit unit; and

the unit would have been a primary producer registered emissions unit if you had started to hold, held and ceased to hold the unit instead of the trust; and

any amount of your basic assessable income for the current year to the extent that:

you are a partner in a partnership that is carrying on a primary production business; and

(ii) the amount is your share of the partnership’s net income that is attributable to, or resulted from, an amount being included in the partnership’s assessable income under section 420-25 because a partner (the holding partner) in the partnership ceases to hold a primary producer registered emissions unit; and

the unit would still have been a primary producer registered emissions unit if each other partner in the partnership had started to hold, held and ceased to hold the unit instead of the holding partner; and

any amount of your basic assessable income for the current year that was derived from, or resulted from, an arrangement with a carbon service provider to the extent that:

the arrangement relates to the provider starting to hold, holding or ceasing to hold an Australian carbon credit unit; and

the unit would have been a primary producer registered emissions unit if you were starting to hold, holding or ceasing to hold the unit (as applicable) instead of the provider; and

the amount does not relate to you giving the provider a *quasi-ownership right over land.

Primary production deductions

(3) Your primary production deductions for the *current year are:

all amounts you can deduct that relate exclusively to the amount referred to in paragraph (2)(a); and

so much of any other amounts you can deduct (other than *apportionable deductions) to the extent that they reasonably relate to the amount referred to in paragraph (2)(a); and

so much of any other amounts you can deduct for the current year in relation to expenditure you incur in:

starting to *hold a primary producer registered emissions unit; or

holding such a unit; or

ceasing to hold such a unit; and

so much of any other amounts you can deduct for the current year in relation to expenditure you incur under an arrangement with a carbon service provider to the extent that:

the arrangement relates to the provider starting to hold, holding or ceasing to hold an Australian carbon credit unit; and

the unit would have been a primary producer registered emissions unit if you were starting to hold, holding or ceasing to hold the unit (as applicable) instead of the provider; and

the expenditure does not relate to you giving the provider a *quasi-ownership right over land.

Note 1: For the expenditure covered by subparagraph (c)(i), see subsections 420-15(1) and (4) and 420-65(4).

Note 2: For the expenditure covered by subparagraph (c)(iii), see subsection 420-42(1).

392-85 Work out your taxable non-primary production income

(1) Work out your taxable non-primary production income for the *current year in this way:

Method statement

Step 1. Compare your assessable non-primary production income for the current year with your non-primary production deductions for the current year.

Step 2. If your assessable non-primary production income is larger than your non-primary production deductions, your taxable non-primary production income is the difference between them.

Step 3. If your non-primary production deductions are larger than (or equal to) your assessable non-primary production income, your taxable non-primary production income is nil.

Assessable non-primary production income

(2) Your assessable non-primary production income for the *current year is the difference between:

your basic assessable income for the current year; and

your assessable primary production income for the current year.

Non-primary production deductions

(3) Your non-primary production deductions for the *current year are the difference between:

the sum of your deductions for the current year; and

your primary production deductions for the current year.

392-90 Work out your averaging component

(1) Work out your averaging component for the *current year using the following table, taking into account:

your taxable primary production income for the current year; and

your taxable non-primary production income for the current year.

Note: Subsections (2) and (3) explain how to work out your non-primary production shade-out amount if your taxable non-primary production income is between $5,000 and $10,000.

Non-primary production shade-out amount if your taxable primary production income is more than nil

(2) If your *taxable primary production income is more than nil, your non-primary production shade-out amount is the amount worked out using the formula:

Non-primary production shade-out amount if your taxable primary production income is nil

(3) If your *taxable primary production income is nil, your non-primary production shade-out amount is the amount worked out using the formula:

However, if that amount is less than nil, your non-primary production shade-out amount is nil.

In this section:

Assessable PP income means your *assessable primary production income for the *current year.

PP deductions means your *primary production deductions for the *current year.

Taxable non-PP income your *taxable non-primary production income for the *current year.

Subdivision 392-D — Effect of permanent reduction of your basic taxable income

Table of sections

392-95 You are treated as if you had not carried on business before

392-95 You are treated as if you had not carried on business before

Choosing to discontinue and restart averaging

(1) You can choose that this Division not affect your *income tax liability for an income year (the reduction year) if you show the Commissioner that, because of retirement from your occupation or from any other cause, your *basic taxable income for the reduction year is permanently reduced during that year to less than two thirds of your *average income for that year.

You must make the choice by notifying the Commissioner in writing by the day you lodge your income tax return for the reduction year. However, the Commissioner can allow you to make it later.

If you make a choice under subsection (1), this Division applies to assessments for later income years as if you had never carried on a *primary production business before the reduction year.

Working out the extent of the permanent reduction

(2) In working out the extent of the permanent reduction, you must work out your *average income for the reduction year on the basis that your *basic assessable income for an income year taken into account in working out your average income did not include any assessable income from sources from which you do not usually receive assessable income.

In working out the extent of the permanent reduction, disregard a reduction in basic taxable income to the extent that it results from a change of assets from which assessable income was *derived into assets from which you derive income that is not assessable income.

Division 393 — Farm management deposits

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 393

393-A Tax consequences of farm management deposits

393-B Meaning of farm management deposit and owner

393-C Special rules relating to financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs

Guide to Division 393

393-1 What this Division is about

You can deduct a farm management deposit you make, if:

you are an individual carrying on a primary production business (including a primary production business you carry on as a partner in a partnership or as a beneficiary of a trust); and

you hold the deposit for at least 12 months; and

you meet some other tests.

The amount of the deposit withdrawn is included in your assessable income in the income year in which it is repaid. Special rules apply if the deposit is repaid in the event of a severe drought or an applicable natural disaster.

Farm management deposits allow you to carry over income from years of good cash flow and to draw down on that income in years when you need the cash. This enables you to defer the income tax on your taxable primary production income from the income year in which you make the deposit until the income year in which the deposit is repaid.

Note: An FMD provider must, every calendar month, give certain information to the Agriculture Secretary about farm management deposits: see section 398-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 393-A — Tax consequences of farm management deposits

Table of sections

393-5 Deduction for making farm management deposit

393-10 Assessability on repayment of deposit

393-15 Transactions to which the deduction, assessment and 12 month rules have modified application

393-16 Consolidation of farm management deposits

393-17 Tax consequences of liabilities reducing because of farm management deposits

393-5 Deduction for making farm management deposit

Entitlement to deduction

You can deduct the amount of a farm management deposit for an income year if:

you are the *owner of the deposit; and

the deposit is made at a time during the year when you are an individual carrying on a *primary production business in Australia; and

if during the year, at a time after the deposit was made, you stopped carrying on a primary production business in Australia—you started carrying on such a business again within 120 days (whether or not during the year); and

your taxable non-primary production income for the year is not more than $100,000; and

you do not die or become bankrupt during the year.

Note 1: This section does not apply if a deposit is reinvested, the term of a deposit is extended, or a deposit is transferred at the depositor’s request: see sections 393-15 and 393-16.

Note 2: This Division applies to certain partners and beneficiaries as if they were individuals who carried on a primary production business: see subsections 393-25(2), (3), (4), (5) and (6).

Sum of deductions not to exceed taxable primary production income

(2) The sum of the deductions that you would otherwise be entitled to under this section for *farm management deposits made in the income year must not exceed your *taxable primary production income for the income year.

Amounts to be deducted in order of deposits

If you are entitled to deduct amounts in respect of 2 or more deposits, deduct the amounts in the order in which the deposits were made (until you reach the limit imposed by subsection (2)).

393-10 Assessability on repayment of deposit

Amount assessable

Your assessable income for an income year includes the amount worked out using the following formula, if:

you are the owner of a *farm management deposit; and

the deposit is repaid in full or in part in the year; and

the amount worked out using the formula is greater than nil:

Note 1: This subsection does not apply if the deposit is reinvested, the term of the deposit is extended, or the deposit is transferred at the depositor’s request: see sections 393-15 and 393-16.

Note 2: In a case where not all of the deposit is deductible under section 393-5, repayment of the non-deductible amount can take place without the amount being assessable. Once that amount is repaid, the remainder is assessable when it is repaid, so that the deduction is recouped.

Example: Matt makes a farm management deposit of $120,000 on 1 April 2011. His taxable primary production income for the 2010—11 income year is $50,000; therefore, the deposit is only partly deductible in the year because it exceeds his taxable primary production income. Matt makes the following withdrawals from the deposit: $45,000 on 1 May 2013, $40,000 on 1 March 2014 and $35,000 on 1 September 2015.

The unrecouped FMD deduction immediately before the first repayment of $45,000 is $50,000. No amount is included in his assessable income for the 2012-2013 income year because the difference between the unrecouped FMD deduction ($50,000) and the amount of the deposit remaining after the repayment ($75,000) is less than nil.

The unrecouped FMD deduction immediately before the second repayment of $40,000 is $50,000. $15,000 is included in Matt’s assessable income for the 2013-2014 income year because the difference between the unrecouped FMD deduction ($50,000) and the amount of the deposit remaining after the second repayment ($35,000) is $15,000, which is greater than nil.

The unrecouped FMD deduction immediately before the third repayment of $35,000 is $35,000; that is, $50,000 less $15,000. $35,000 is included in Matt’s assessable income for the 2015-2016 income year; that is, the difference between the unrecouped FMD deduction ($35,000) and the amount of the deposit remaining after the third repayment ($0).

Unrecouped FMD deduction

(2) The unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of a *farm management deposit at a particular time is:

if no part of the deposit has been repaid before that time—the amount of the deduction under section 393-5 for making the deposit; or

if one or more parts of the deposit have been repaid before that time—the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the deposit just before the most recent such repayment, reduced by any amount included in the *owner’s assessable income under this section as a result of that repayment.

Example: Mia makes a deposit of $3,000, all of which is deductible. The deposit’s unrecouped FMD deduction just before a first repayment of $1,000 is the amount of the deduction (that is, $3,000—see paragraph (2)(a)). The deposit’s unrecouped FMD deduction just before a second repayment is $2,000 (that is, according to paragraph (2)(b), the unrecouped FMD deduction immediately before the first repayment ($3,000) reduced by the $1,000 included in Mia’s assessable income as a result of the first repayment).

Note 1: If the deposit was originally an income equalisation deposit, see section 393-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 1A: Subsection 393-16(3) affects the unrecouped FMD deduction of a consolidated farm management deposit.

Note 2: Section 393-55 affects the unrecouped FMD deduction of a new deposit linked to an old deposit affected by Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959.

Application of Division to transfer, reinvestment or other dealing

This Division applies to a transfer, reinvestment or other dealing with a farm management deposit as if it were a repayment of the deposit, if:

you are the depositor; and

the transfer, reinvestment or other dealing is on your behalf or at your request.

Note: Section 393-15 modifies the application of the deduction, assessment and 12 month rules to certain transfers, reinvestments and other dealings.

Deemed repayment because of death, bankruptcy etc.

This section applies as if a farm management deposit had been repaid when it became repayable, rather than when it is actually repaid, if the deposit became repayable because of the requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 11 of the table in section 393-35 (death, bankruptcy etc.).

Note 1: This means that the amount of the deposit is included in your assessable income for the income year when the death, bankruptcy etc. occurs, rather than for any later year in which the deposit might be repaid.

Note 2: This also means that, under subsection 45-120(5) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about Pay as you go (PAYG) instalments), the amount of the deposit is included in your instalment income for the period in which the death, bankruptcy etc. occurs.

However, under section 12-140 in that Schedule, an amount may also be required to be withheld from the actual payment if you do not quote your tax file number or ABN to the relevant FMD provider.

Note 3: Section 393-60 of this Act may limit the operation of subsection (4) if the farm management deposit is with an ADI that becomes a declared ADI under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959.

393-15 Transactions to which the deduction, assessment and 12 month rules have modified application

The provisions mentioned in subsection (2) do not apply in relation to the following transactions:

the immediate reinvestment of a farm management deposit as a farm management deposit with the same *FMD provider;

the extension of the term of a farm management deposit (even if other terms such as those relating to interest payable are also varied);

the transfer of a farm management deposit in accordance with a requirement of the relevant agreement as set out in item 13 of the table in section 393-35 (which allows for transfers of deposits at the request of the depositor).

Note: This means that these transactions:

will not result in assessable income for the owner; and

will not give rise to a deduction; and

will not, if the transaction occurs within 12 months after the end of the day the deposit is made, result in the deposit losing its status as a farm management deposit.

The provisions are:

section 393-5 (about deductions for making a farm management deposit); and

subsection 393-10(1) (about assessability of the repayment of a farm management deposit); and

subsections 393-40(1) and (2) (about repayment of a farm management deposit within the first 12 months); and

subsection 393-40(3) (about repayment of a farm management deposit in the event of severe drought); and

subsections 393-40(3A) and (4) (about repayment of a farm management deposit in the event of an applicable natural disaster).

For the purposes of working out the *unrecouped FMD deduction for a deposit that is subject to a transaction mentioned in subsection (1), the transaction does not cause the deposit to be a different deposit.

Note: This ensures that the unrecouped FMD deduction (which affects how much income tax is assessed in the event of a repayment) equals the deduction for the original deposit, less any amount included in your assessable income because of a previous repayment of the deposit.

393-16 Consolidation of farm management deposits

(1) The provisions mentioned in subsection (2) do not apply in relation to the immediate reinvestment of 2 or more *farm management deposits (original deposits) if:

just before the reinvestment occurs the balance of each of the original deposits is equal to the *unrecouped FMD deduction for the deposit; and

the original deposits are immediately reinvested as a single farm management deposit with the same *FMD provider, or with a different FMD provider; and

just before the reinvestment occurs the original deposits have each been held for a period of at least 12 months.

Note: This means that the reinvestment:

will not result in assessable income for the owner; and

will not give rise to a deduction.

The provisions are:

section 393-5 (about deductions for making a farm management deposit); and

subsection 393-10(1) (about assessability of the repayment of a farm management deposit).

(3) Despite paragraph 393-10(2)(a), the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the *farm management deposit at a time before any part of the deposit has been repaid is the sum of the unrecouped FMD deductions in respect of each of the original deposits just before the reinvestment occurred.

Section 393-40 (about the repayment of farm management deposits within 12 months) applies as if the new farm management deposit was made on the same day that the most recent of the original deposits was made.

393-17 Tax consequences of liabilities reducing because of farm management deposits

To avoid doubt, if amounts of interest payable by the owner of a *farm management deposit, or by a partnership of which the owner is a partner, to the *FMD provider in respect of loans or other debts of the owner or partnership fall short of what they otherwise would be because the owner holds the farm management deposit, then:

any income of the owner or partnership comprising the shortfall is neither assessable income nor exempt income of the owner or partnership; and

any amount that any person:

is not liable to pay because of the shortfall; and

could have, apart from this section, deducted under this Act;

is not deductible.

However, this section applies only to the extent that the loans or other debts relate to a *primary production business that the *owner or partnership carries on.

Subdivision 393-B — Meaning of farm management deposit and owner

Table of sections

393-20 Farm management deposits

393-25 Owners of farm management deposits

393-27 Trustee may choose that a beneficiary is a chosen beneficiary of the trust

393-28 Application of Division to beneficiary no longer under legal disability

393-30 Effect of contravening requirements

393-35 Requirements of agreement for a farm management deposit

393-37 Agreements for a farm management deposit may allow for some offsets of a depositor’s liabilities

393-40 Repayment of deposit within first 12 months

393-45 Partly repaid farm management deposits

393-20 Farm management deposits

Meaning of farm management deposit

(1) A deposit with an *FMD provider is a farm management deposit if:

the depositor applies to make the deposit in accordance with subsection (2); and

the deposit is made under an agreement between the FMD provider and the depositor that:

describes the deposit as a farm management deposit; and

at all times while the deposit is with the FMD provider, contains requirements to the effect set out in the table in section 393-35.

The agreement may also contain additional requirements that are not inconsistent with those set out in that table.

Depositor to provide information in application form

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the depositor must apply to the *FMD provider to make the deposit by completing and signing a form that:

permits the depositor to state the *owner’s tax file number in the form; and

requires the depositor to provide any other information required by regulations for the purposes of this paragraph; and

contains any statements, required by regulations for the purposes of this paragraph, that are to be read by the depositor when completing the form.

Note 1: A depositor who makes a false or misleading statement in such a form commits an offence against section 8K or 8N of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: If the owner does not quote his or her tax file number or ABN to the FMD provider, the Pay as you go (PAYG) withholding required under section 12-140 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 from a repayment of the deposit is at the highest marginal tax rate.

Note 3: Division 4A of Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 sets out rules for quoting tax file numbers in connection with farm management deposits.

Meaning of FMD provider

In this Act:

FMD provider means an entity that:

is an *ADI; or

carries on in Australia the business of banking, so long as the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory guarantees the repayment of any deposit taken in the course of that business; or

carries on in Australia a business that consists of or includes taking money on deposit, so long as the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory guarantees the repayment of any deposit taken in the course of that business.

393-25 Owners of farm management deposits

Meaning of owner

(1) The owner of a *farm management deposit is:

if paragraph (b) does not apply—the individual who made or is making the deposit; or

in the case of a deposit made or being made by the trustee of a trust on behalf of a beneficiary who is an individual—the beneficiary.

Primary production business carried on by a partnership

This Division applies to you as if you were an individual who is carrying on a *primary production business that is actually carried on by a partnership, if you are an individual who is a partner in the partnership.

Primary production business carried on by a trust

(3) This Division (other than subsection 393-17(2) and paragraph 393-37(b)), and section 97A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about beneficiaries who are owners of farm management deposits), apply to you as if you were an individual who is carrying on a *primary production business that is actually carried on by a trust, if you satisfy the requirements in subsection (4), (5) or (6).

Primary production business carried on by a trust with beneficiary presently entitled to income of the trust

You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if:

you are an individual and a beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (3); and

you are presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust for the income year.

Primary production business carried on by a fixed trust with no income of the trust

You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if:

you are an individual and a beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (3); and

at all times during the income year, the manner or extent to which each beneficiary of the trust can benefit from the trust is not capable of being significantly affected by the exercise, or non-exercise, of a power; and

the trust does not have any income of the trust for the income year to which a beneficiary of the trust could be presently entitled; and

if the trust had income of the trust for the income year, you would have been presently entitled to a share of the income of the trust.

Primary production business carried on by a non-fixed trust with no income of the trust

You satisfy the requirements in this subsection if you do not satisfy the requirements in subsection (5) and you are an individual and a chosen beneficiary of the trust referred to in subsection (3) for the purposes of section 393-27 for the income year.

393-27 Trustee may choose that a beneficiary is a chosen beneficiary of the trust

The trustee of a trust may choose that a beneficiary of the trust is a chosen beneficiary of the trust for an income year if the trust does not have any income of the trust for the income year to which a beneficiary of the trust could be presently entitled.

The maximum number of choices that the trustee may make in respect of the trust for an income year is the higher of:

the number of individuals to which subsection 393-25(3) applied in the income year immediately before the current income year; and

12.

A choice made under subsection (1) must be:

in writing; and

signed by the trustee and the person chosen.

The trustee can make the choice no later than the time it lodges the trust’s income tax return for the income year to which the choice relates. However, the Commissioner can allow the trustee to make a choice at a later time.

A choice cannot be revoked or varied.

393-28 Application of Division to beneficiary no longer under legal disability

If:

a farm management deposit was made by a trustee on behalf of a beneficiary of a trust; and

the beneficiary was under a legal disability when the deposit was made; and

the beneficiary is no longer under a legal disability;

then this Division, and Division 4A of Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, apply as if the beneficiary had made the deposit.

Note: Division 4A of Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is about quotation of tax file numbers in connection with farm management deposits.

393-30 Effect of contravening requirements

(1) A deposit is not a farm management deposit if, when the deposit was accepted, a requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in items 1 to 6 of the table in section 393-35 was contravened.

(2) A deposit is not, and is taken never to have been, a farm management deposit if a requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in items 7 and 9 of the table in section 393-35 is contravened at any time in relation to the deposit.

(3) So much of a deposit as causes a requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 10 of the table in section 393-35 to be contravened is not a farm management deposit.

Note: There is an administrative penalty if a requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 8 of the table in section 393-35 is contravened: see section 288-120 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

393-35 Requirements of agreement for a farm management deposit

An agreement mentioned in paragraph 393-20(1)(b) must contain requirements to the effect of those set out in the following table:

393-37 Agreements for a farm management deposit may allow for some offsets of a depositor’s liabilities

An agreement mentioned in paragraph 393-20(1)(b) does not contravene the requirements of item 8 of the table in section 393-35 to the extent that:

it provides for amounts of interest to be payable to the *FMD provider in respect of a loan or other debt of the *owner of the farm management deposit, or of a partnership of which the owner is a partner, to be reduced; and

that loan or other debt relates to a *primary production business that the owner or partnership carries on.

393-40 Repayment of deposit within first 12 months

Partial repayment within first 12 months

(1) Any part of a deposit repaid before the last day of the 12 months after the day the deposit is made is not, and is taken never to have been, part of a farm management deposit.

Note 1: A repayment covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (5) is disregarded in applying this subsection. The normal rules in sections 393-5 (about deductions for making a farm management deposit) and 393-10 (about assessability of the repayment of a farm management deposit) apply instead.

Note 2: This subsection does not apply if a deposit is reinvested, the term of a deposit is extended, or a deposit is transferred at the depositor’s request: see section 393-15.

Deposit not to be reduced to less than $1,000 within first 12 months

(2) A deposit is not, and is taken never to have been, a farm management deposit if the amount of the deposit is reduced to less than $1,000 because of one or more repayments before the last day of the 12 months after the day the deposit is made.

Note 1: A repayment covered by subsection (3), (3A) or (5) is disregarded in applying this subsection.

Note 2: This subsection does not apply if a deposit is reinvested, the term of a deposit is extended, or a deposit is transferred at the depositor’s request: see section 393-15.

Repayment in the event of severe drought

Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a repayment of the whole or a part of a farm management deposit if:

(a) the *owner of the deposit carries on a *primary production business that satisfies one or more of paragraphs (a), (b), (c) and (f) of the definition of primary production business in subsection 995-1(1); and

any of the land on which the owner of the deposit carries on any primary production business that satisfies one or more of those paragraphs has, for the period specified in subsection (3AA), had rainfall that:

is deficient to an extent prescribed by the regulations; or

if there are no such regulations—is within the lowest 5% of rainfall for that land according to records held by the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology; and

for the period specified in subsection (3AA):

the owner of the deposit has carried on, on that land, a primary production business that satisfies one or more of those paragraphs; and

the amount of the repayment has been held in that farm management deposit.

(3AA) For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(b) and (c), the period is:

a period prescribed by the regulations; or

if there are no such regulations—the most recent period of 6 consecutive months:

that precede the repayment; and

for which rainfall records held by the Commonwealth Bureau of Meteorology are publicly available at the time of the repayment.

Repayment in the event of an applicable natural disaster

Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a repayment of the whole or a part of a farm management deposit if:

natural disaster relief and recovery arrangements made by or on behalf of the Commonwealth apply, in a way specified in regulations made for the purposes of this subsection, to a *primary production business of the *owner of the deposit; and

all of the other circumstances specified in those regulations are satisfied.

Any later deposit not a farm management deposit

(4) If subsection (3) or (3A) applies to an *owner and a repayment, any later deposit that is made by, or on behalf of, the owner in the income year in which the repayment is made is not, and is taken never to have been, a farm management deposit.

Repayment in the case of death, bankruptcy or ceasing to carry on a primary production business

Subsections (1) and (2) do not apply to a repayment of a farm management deposit because of the requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 11 of the table in section 393-35 (death, bankruptcy etc.).

Certain transactions do not affect the day the deposit was made

Subsections (1) to (4) apply as if a farm management deposit that:

is made as a result of a transaction mentioned in subsection 393-15(1) (about reinvesting a deposit, extending the term of a deposit and transferring a deposit at the depositor’s request); or

is affected by such a transaction;

were made on the day on which the original deposit was made.

Example: A farm management deposit is made on 1 July 2010 for a term of 6 months, but is extended in December 2010 for another 6 months. For the purposes of subsections (1) to (4), the day the extended deposit was made remains as 1 July 2010.

Note: Section 393-40 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides for a special rule for deposits transferred under the repealed Loan (Income Equalization Deposits) Act 1976.

393-45 Partly repaid farm management deposits

A reference to a farm management deposit is a reference to so much of the deposit as has not been repaid.

Subdivision 393-C — Special rules relating to financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs

Guide to Subdivision 393-C

393-50 What this Subdivision is about

A deposit (the new deposit) arising from:

(a) an entitlement under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 relating to a farm management deposit (the old deposit); or

(b) a distribution from liquidation of an ADI that is attributable to a farm management deposit (also the old deposit);

is treated as a transfer of the old deposit and does not give rise to new assessable income or deductions.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

393-55 Farm management deposits arising from farm management deposits with ADIs subject to financial claims scheme

393-60 Repayment if owner of farm management deposit with insolvent ADI dies, is bankrupt or ceases to be a primary producer

Operative provisions

393-55 Farm management deposits arising from farm management deposits with ADIs subject to financial claims scheme

Application

(1) This section applies if an entitlement arises under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959 in connection with an account containing a *farm management deposit (the old deposit) with an *ADI (the old ADI) and either:

(a) an amount (the new deposit) is deposited into either of the following to meet, in whole or part, so much of the entitlement as relates to the old deposit:

an existing account for a farm management deposit;

an account established under section 16AH of that Act for the purposes of meeting (in whole or part) the entitlement; or

(b) an amount (also the new deposit) is deposited by a liquidator of the old ADI into either of the following as so much of a distribution from the liquidation of the old ADI as relates to the old deposit:

an existing account for a farm management deposit;

an account established under section 16AR of that Act for the payment of the distribution.

Note: If an amount is deposited in connection with an account with the old ADI containing 2 or more old deposits, the amount is to be apportioned between each old deposit, so that so much of the amount as is attributable to a particular old deposit is regarded as a distinct new deposit relating to that old deposit.

New deposit is a farm management deposit

This Division (except this section) applies to the new deposit as if the new deposit were a transfer of the old deposit in accordance with a requirement contained in the relevant agreement for the old deposit as set out in item 13 of the table in section 393-35 (which allows for transfers of deposits at the request of the depositor). To avoid doubt, this Division applies in that way as if the amount transferred were the amount of the new deposit, even if that is more or less than the amount of the old deposit.

Note 1: The effects of this include the following:

section 393-5 (about deductions for making a farm management deposit) does not apply in relation to the making of the new deposit (see paragraphs 393-15(1)(c) and (2)(a));

subsection 393-10(1) (about assessability of the repayment of a farm management deposit) can only apply to the extent of any difference between the amount transferred and the amount of the old deposit (see paragraphs 393-15(1)(c) and (2)(b));

subsections 393-40(1), (2) and (4) (about repayment of a farm management deposit within the first 12 months) can only apply to the extent of any difference between the amount transferred and the amount of the old deposit (see paragraphs 393-15(1)(c) and (2)(c) and (d));

the day the old deposit was made, for the purposes of subsections 393-40(1) and (2) (about repayment of a farm management deposit within the first 12 months) and (3A) and (4) (about repayment in the event of an applicable natural disaster), is maintained for the new deposit (see subsection 393-40(6)).

Note 2: Also, the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the new deposit is the same as the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the old deposit (see subsection 393-15(3)), unless subsection (6) or (7) of this section applies because the new deposit is less than the old deposit.

In determining whether either of the following is a farm management deposit, disregard a requirement contained in an agreement as set out in item 4 of the table in section 393-35 (requiring the deposit to be $1,000 or more):

the new deposit;

a deposit made later directly by the transfer of the new deposit in accordance with a requirement of the relevant agreement for the new deposit as mentioned in item 13 of that table.

Unrecouped FMD deduction for new deposit less than old deposit

(6) Despite subsection (2) and subsection 393-15(3), if the new deposit is less than the old deposit at the time (the declaration time) the old ADI became a declared ADI under the Banking Act 1959, the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the new deposit is the amount worked out using the following formula:

Note: The new deposit could be less than the old deposit if the entitlement is paid in instalments (each of which will be a separate new deposit).

However, if the amount worked out under subsection (6) is more than the difference (if any) between:

the *unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the old deposit just before the declaration time; and

the total of the amounts worked out under all previous applications of subsection (6) in relation to that old deposit;

the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the new deposit is equal to the difference (if any).

Relationship with other provisions

Note: This ensures that when new deposits linked to the old deposit are repaid, the total amount included in assessable income will not exceed the unrecouped FMD deduction in respect of the old deposit.

This section has effect despite Division 253 (about tax treatment of entitlements under the financial claims scheme for insolvent ADIs).

393-60 Repayment if owner of farm management deposit with insolvent ADI dies, is bankrupt or ceases to be a primary producer

Subsection 393-10(4) does not apply in relation to so much of a farm management deposit with an *ADI as is equal to the sum of the amounts described in subparagraphs (d)(i) and (ii) of this section if:

you are the *owner of the deposit; and

the deposit becomes repayable during an income year because of the requirement contained in the relevant agreement as set out in item 11 of the table in section 393-35 (death, bankruptcy etc.); and

(c) during the income year, the ADI becomes a declared ADI under Division 2AA (Financial claims scheme for account-holders with insolvent ADIs) of Part II of the Banking Act 1959; and

at the end of the income year, you have either or both of the following:

an unmet entitlement under that Division connected with the account for the farm management deposit;

an unmet claim against the ADI, or an unpaid debt owed to you by the ADI, in the winding up of the ADI connected with the account for the deposit.

Note: Subsection 393-10(4) makes the repayment of a farm management deposit assessable in the income year when the death, bankruptcy etc. occurs, rather than in any later year in which it might be repaid.

Division 394 — Forestry managed investment schemes

Guide to Division 394

394-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out rules about deductions for contributions to forestry managed investment schemes. It also sets out the tax treatment of proceeds from the sale of interests in such schemes, and of proceeds from harvesting trees under such schemes.

Table of sections

394-5 Object of this Division

394-10 Deduction for amounts paid under forestry managed investment schemes

394-15 Forestry managed investment schemes and related concepts

394-20 Payments on behalf of participant in forestry managed investment scheme

394-25 CGT event in relation to forestry interest in forestry managed investment scheme—initial participant

394-30 CGT event in relation to forestry interest in forestry managed investment scheme—subsequent participant

394-35 70% DFE rule

394-40 Payments under forestry managed investment scheme

394-45 Direct forestry expenditure

394-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to encourage the expansion of commercial plantation forestry in Australia through the establishment and tending of new plantations for felling. This is achieved by:

permitting investors to deduct amounts paid under a forestry scheme in the year of payment, if certain conditions are met (for example, that it is reasonable to expect that the manager of the scheme will spend at least 70% of investors’ contributions, on a market value basis, on activities that establish, tend, fell and harvest trees); and

allowing secondary market trading of interests in such schemes, while minimising tax arbitrage and providing tax certainty for investors.

394-10 Deduction for amounts paid under forestry managed investment schemes

You can deduct an amount if:

you hold a forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme; and

you pay the amount under the scheme; and

the scheme satisfies the *70% DFE rule (see section 394-35) on 30 June in the income year in which a *participant in the scheme first pays an amount under the scheme; and

you do not have day to day control over the operation of the scheme (whether or not you have the right to be consulted or give directions); and

at least one of these conditions is satisfied:

there is more than one participant in the scheme;

the *forestry manager of the scheme, or an associate of the forestry manager, manages, arranges or promotes similar schemes; and

the condition in subsection (4) is satisfied.

You deduct the amount for the income year in which you pay it.

(3) For the purposes of this Division, do not treat an amount as being paid under a *forestry managed investment scheme if:

you pay the amount in connection with a CGT event in relation to a *forestry interest in the scheme; and

as a result of the CGT event:

another *participant in the scheme no longer holds the forestry interest; and

you start to hold the forestry interest.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(f), the condition in this subsection is satisfied unless:

18 months have elapsed since the end of the income year in which an amount is first paid under the forestry managed investment scheme by a *participant in the scheme; and

the trees intended to be established in accordance with the scheme have not all been established before the end of those 18 months.

You cannot deduct an amount under subsection (1) if:

you hold the *forestry interest mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) as an *initial participant; and

a CGT event happens in relation to the forestry interest within 4 years after the end of the income year in which you first pay an amount under the scheme.

If you have already deducted it, your assessment may be amended to disallow the deduction.

Paragraph (5)(b) does not apply to a CGT event if:

the CGT event happens because of circumstances outside your control; and

Example: The forestry interest is compulsorily acquired.

when you acquired the *forestry interest, you could not reasonably have foreseen the CGT event happening.

(6) Despite section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the Commissioner may amend your assessment at any time within 2 years after the *CGT event, for the purpose of giving effect to subsection (5).

(7) Sections 82KZMD and 82KZMF of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 do not affect the timing of a deduction under this section.

394-15 Forestry managed investment schemes and related concepts

(1) A *scheme is a forestry managed investment scheme if the purpose of the scheme is for establishing and tending trees for felling in Australia.

(2) The entity that manages, arranges or promotes a *forestry managed investment scheme is the forestry manager of the scheme.

(3) A forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme is a right to benefits produced by the scheme (whether the right is actual, prospective or contingent and whether it is enforceable or not).

(4) An entity that holds a *forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme (other than the *forestry manager of the scheme) is a participant in the scheme.

(5) A *participant in a *forestry managed investment scheme holds a *forestry interest in the scheme as an initial participant if:

the participant obtains the forestry interest from the *forestry manager of the scheme; and

the payment by the participant to obtain the forestry interest results in the establishment of trees.

394-20 Payments on behalf of participant in forestry managed investment scheme

For the purposes of this Division, treat a payment to the *forestry manager of a *forestry managed investment on behalf of a *participant in the scheme as a payment by the participant to the forestry manager.

394-25 CGT event in relation to forestry interest in forestry managed investment scheme—initial participant

This section applies if:

you hold a forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme as an *initial participant in the scheme; and

at least one of these conditions is satisfied:

you can deduct or have deducted an amount for an income year under section 394-10 in relation to the forestry interest;

the condition in subparagraph (i) would be satisfied if subsection 394-10(5) were disregarded; and

a CGT event happens in relation to the forestry interest, other than a CGT event that happens in respect of thinning.

Your assessable income for the income year in which the CGT event happens includes:

if, as a result of the CGT event, you no longer hold the *forestry interest—the *market value of the forestry interest (worked out as at the time of the event); or

otherwise—the decrease (if any) in the market value of the forestry interest as a result of the CGT event.

Any amount that you actually receive because of the CGT event is not included in your assessable income (nor is it exempt income).

394-30 CGT event in relation to forestry interest in forestry managed investment scheme—subsequent participant

This section applies if:

you hold a forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme otherwise than as an *initial participant in the scheme; and

at least one of these conditions is satisfied:

you can deduct or have deducted an amount for an income year under section 394-10 in relation to the forestry interest;

you could deduct an amount for an income year under section 394-10 if you had paid the amount under the scheme in that year; and

a CGT event happens in relation to the forestry interest, other than a CGT event that happens in respect of thinning.

Your assessable income for the income year in which the CGT event happens includes the lesser of the following:

the *market value of the forestry interest (worked out as at the time of the event);

the amount (if any) by which the total forestry scheme deductions in relation to the forestry interest exceeds the incidental forestry scheme receipts in relation to the forestry interest.

(3) The total forestry scheme deductions in relation to the *forestry interest is the total of each amount that you can deduct or have deducted under section 394-10 for each income year in relation to the forestry interest.

(4) The incidental forestry scheme receipts in relation to the *forestry interest is the total of each amount that you have received under the scheme in each income year in relation to the forestry interest for a reason otherwise than because of the *CGT event.

However, if you still hold the forestry interest despite the CGT event, work out the amount included in your assessable income under subsection (2) using this formula (instead of using the amount worked out under subsection (2)):

If this section has operated previously in relation to the *forestry interest, disregard an amount for the purposes of subsections (3) and (4) to the extent that it has already been reflected in your assessable income under that previous operation in relation to the forestry interest.

These provisions do not apply to the CGT event:

section 6-5 (about ordinary income);

any other provision that includes an amount in assessable income, other than the following:

a provision in Part 3-1 or 3-3;

subsection (2) of this section;

section 8-1 (about amounts you can deduct);

any other provision that allows you to deduct an amount from your assessable income;

section 118-20.

However, the provisions referred to in subsection (7) can apply to the CGT event if a *capital gain or *capital loss from the event is disregarded because of section 118-25.

Just before the CGT event, increase the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *forestry interest by the amount included in your assessable income under subsection (2).

394-35 70% DFE rule

(1) A *forestry managed investment scheme satisfies the 70% DFE rule on 30 June in an income year if it is reasonable to expect on that 30 June that the amount of DFE under the scheme (see subsection (2)) is no less than 70% of the amount of the payments under the scheme (see subsection (3)).

The amount of DFE under the scheme is the amount of the net present value (on that 30 June) of all direct forestry expenditure under the scheme that the *forestry manager of the scheme has paid or will pay under the scheme.

The amount of payments under the scheme is the amount of the net present value (on that 30 June) of all amounts that all current and future *participants in the scheme have paid or will pay under the scheme.

In working out the net present value of an amount paid before that 30 June:

unless paragraph (b) applies—treat the amount as having been paid on that 30 June; or

if the amount was paid in an income year ending before that 30 June—treat the amount as having been paid on the 30 June in that income year.

In working out the net present value of an amount expected to be paid after that 30 June, treat the amount as having been paid on 1 January in the income year in which it is expected to be paid.

Reduce an amount worked out under subsection (2) or (3) to the extent (if any) to which that amount can reasonably be expected to be recouped.

In working out the net present value of an amount for the purposes of this section, use the yield on Australian Government Treasury Bonds with the maturity closest to 10 years (as published by the Reserve Bank of Australia).

For the purposes of subsection (2), if:

the *forestry manager of the scheme has paid or will pay an amount under the scheme in a transaction; and

the forestry manager and at least one other party to the transaction did not or will not deal at *arm’s length in relation to the transaction; and

the amount is or will be more or less than the *market value of what it is for;

treat the amount as that market value.

394-40 Payments under forestry managed investment scheme

For the purposes of this Division, do not treat the following payments as payments under a *forestry managed investment scheme by a *participant in the scheme:

payments for borrowing money;

payments of interest and payments in the nature of interest;

payments of stamp duty;

payments of GST;

payments that relate to one or more of the matters mentioned in paragraphs 394-45(4)(a), (b) or (c).

394-45 Direct forestry expenditure

(1) Direct forestry expenditure under a *forestry managed investment scheme means:

an amount paid under the scheme that is attributable to establishing, tending, felling and harvesting trees; and

notional amounts reflecting the *market value of goods, services or the use of land, provided by the *forestry manager of the scheme, for establishing, tending, felling and harvesting trees.

Example 1: Notional amounts reflecting the value of the use of land owned by the forestry manager that is provided for establishing, tending, felling and harvesting trees.

Example 2: Notional amounts reflecting the value of tree felling services provided by the forestry manager.

Treat direct forestry expenditure covered by paragraph (1)(b) as paid annually for each income year of the *forestry manager of the scheme based on the *market value of the goods, services, or the use of the land. Treat the day on which it is paid as:

unless paragraph (b) or (c) applies—1 January in the income year; or

if the first time an amount is paid under the scheme is later than the first day of the income year—the last day of the income year; or

if the scheme comes to an end on a day before the end of the income year—that day.

Exclusions—general

(3) However, direct forestry expenditure under the scheme does not include amounts paid under the scheme to the extent that they relate to any of the following:

marketing of the scheme;

Example: Advertising, sales, sponsorship and entertainment.

insurance, contingency funds or provisions (other than provisions for employee entitlements);

financing;

lobbying;

general business overheads (but not overheads directly related to forestry);

subscriptions to industry bodies;

commissions for financial planners or financial advisers;

compliance with requirements related to the structure and operations of the *forestry manager of the scheme;

Example: Product design and preparation of product disclosure statements.

supervision and auditing of contracts, other than direct supervision of direct forestry activities (such as establishing trees for felling);

legal fees relating to any matter mentioned in this subsection.

Exclusions—expenditure after harvest etc.

(4) Also, direct forestry expenditure under the scheme does not include amounts paid under the scheme to the extent that they relate to any of the following:

transportation and handling of felled trees that happens after the earliest of the following:

sale of the trees;

arrival of the trees at the mill door;

arrival of the trees at the port;

arrival of the trees at the place of processing (other than where processing happens in-field);

processing;

stockpiling (other than in-field stockpiling);

marketing and sale of forestry produce.

Division 405 — Above-average special professional income of authors, inventors, performing artists, production associates and sportspersons

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 405

405-A Above-average special professional income

405-B Assessable professional income

405-C Taxable professional income and average taxable professional income

Guide to Division 405

405-1 What this Division is about

Significant fluctuations can occur in the professional incomes of authors, inventors, performing artists, production associates and sportspersons.

To lessen the impact of these fluctuations on your marginal tax rates, special tax rates apply if your professional income is above your average.

This Division explains how the scheme works and sets out the rules for working out your above-average special professional income.

Table of sections

405-5 Special rate of income tax on your above-average special professional income

405-10 Overview of the Division

405-5 Special rate of income tax on your above-average special professional income

(1) If you have above-average special professional income, the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 generally sets a special rate so that the amount of income tax you pay on the top 4/5 of your above-average special professional income is effectively 4 times what you would pay on the bottom 1/5 of that income at basic rates.

Note : Your overall income tax will be less only if 2 marginal rates of income tax would apply to your above-average special professional income if it were treated as the top slice of your taxable income.

The following diagram illustrates how the special rate works.

405-10 Overview of the Division

For which income years do you have above-average special professional income?

The first income year for which you have above-average special professional income is the first income year (professional year 1):

for which your taxable professional income is more than $2,500; and

during all or part of which you are an Australian resident.

After professional year 1, you have above-average special professional income for any income year for all or part of which you are an Australian resident.

Note: You need not have been an Australian resident for every income year since professional year 1.

What is above-average special professional income?

(3) Your above-average special professional income for the current year is the amount (if any) by which your taxable professional income exceeds your average taxable professional income.

See Subdivision 405-A.

What is taxable professional income?

Your taxable professional income depends on your assessable professional income.

See section 405-45.

Your assessable professional income is assessable income from your work as an author, inventor, performing artist, production associate or sportsperson.

See Subdivision 405-B.

How do you work out your average taxable professional income?

Generally, your average taxable professional income for the current year is the average of your taxable professional income for the last 4 income years.

See section 405-50.

However, special phasing-in arrangements apply to work out your average taxable professional income for an income year that is less than 4 income years after professional year 1.

These arrangements favour people who were Australian residents for at least part of the income year before professional year 1.

See section 405-50.

Subdivision 405-A — Above-average special professional income

Table of sections

405-15 When do you have above-average special professional income?

405-15 When do you have above-average special professional income?

(1) Your taxable income for the *current year includes above-average special professional income if and only if:

you are an individual; and

you have been an Australian resident for all or part of the current year; and

your taxable professional income for the current year exceeds your average taxable professional income for the current year; and

either:

your taxable professional income for the current year is more than $2,500; or

your taxable professional income for an earlier income year was more than $2,500 and you were an Australian resident for all or part of that income year.

How much above-average special professional income do you have?

The amount of above-average special professional income in your taxable income for the current year is the difference between:

your taxable professional income for the current year; and

your average taxable professional income for the current year.

Subdivision 405-B — Assessable professional income

Table of sections

405-20 What you count as assessable professional income

405-25 Meaning of special professional, performing artist, production associate, sportsperson and sporting competition

405-30 What you cannot count as assessable professional income

405-35 Limits on counting amounts as assessable professional income

405-40 Joint author or inventor treated as sole author or inventor

405-20 What you count as assessable professional income

(1) Work out your assessable professional income for an income year by adding up all your assessable income for the income year that you count under this Subdivision.

Note 1: Section 405-30 may stop you counting an amount.

Note 2: Subsection 405-35(1) stops you counting an amount more than once, even if it is described in more than one subsection of this section.

Note 3: Subsection 405-35(2) may affect the amount you count.

Assessable income from professional services

You count any assessable income that you *derive as a reward for providing services relating to your activities as a special professional.

Assessable income from prizes

You also count any assessable income that you *derive as a prize for your activities as a special professional.

Assessable income from promotions and commentary

You also count any assessable income that you *derive, because you are or were a special professional, for:

endorsing or promoting goods or services; or

appearing or participating in an advertisement; or

appearing or participating in an interview; or

providing services as a commentator; or

providing similar services.

Assessable income from assigning copyright or granting a licence

You also count any assessable income that you *derive:

as consideration for:

assigning all or part of the copyright in a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work of which you are the author; or

granting an interest in the copyright in such a work by granting a licence; or

as an advance on account of royalties relating to such a copyright.

Assessable income from assigning or granting patent rights

You also count any assessable income that you *derive:

as consideration for:

assigning all or part of the patent for an invention that you invented; or

granting an interest in the patent for such an invention by granting a licence; or

assigning the right to apply for a patent for such an invention; or

as an advance on account of royalties relating to such a patent.

Other assessable income from works or inventions

You also count any assessable income that you *derive (as *royalties or otherwise):

for a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work of which you are the author; or

in relation to copyright in such a work; or

for an invention that you invented; or

in relation to a patent for such an invention.

405-25 Meaning of special professional, performing artist, production associate, sportsperson and sporting competition

Special professional

(1) You are a special professional if you are:

the author of a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work; or

Note: The expression “author” is a technical term from copyright law. In general, the “author” of a musical work is its composer and the “author” of an artistic work is the artist, sculptor or photographer who created it.

the inventor of an invention; or

a performing artist; or

a production associate; or

a sportsperson.

Performing artist

(2) You are a performing artist if you exercise intellectual, artistic, musical, physical or other personal skills in the presence of an audience by performing or presenting:

music; or

a play; or

dance; or

an entertainment; or

an address; or

a display; or

a promotional activity; or

an exhibition; or

any similar activity.

(3) You are also a performing artist if you perform or appear in or on a *film, tape, disc or television or radio broadcast.

Production associate

(4) You are a production associate if you provide *artistic support for:

an activity described in subsection (2); or

the activity of making a film, tape, disc or television or radio broadcast.

(5) You provide artistic support for an activity if:

you provide services relating to the activity as:

an art director; or

a choreographer; or

a costume designer; or

a director; or

a director of photography; or

a film editor; or

a lighting designer; or

a musical director; or

a producer; or

a production designer; or

a set designer; or

you provide similar services relating to the activity.

Sportsperson

(6) You are a sportsperson if you compete in a *sporting competition.

(7) A sporting competition is a sporting activity to the extent that:

human beings are the only competitors in it, or it is one in which human beings:

compete by riding animals or exercising other skills in relation to animals; or

compete by driving, piloting or crewing *motor vehicles, boats, aircraft or other forms of transport; or

compete with natural obstacles or natural forces, or by overcoming them; and

participation in it by human competitors involves primarily their exercising physical prowess, physical strength or physical stamina.

However, the participation:

of a navigator in the activity of car rallying; or

of a coxswain in the activity of rowing; or

of a competitor in a similar role in some other activity;

need not involve primarily exercising physical prowess, physical strength or physical stamina for the activity to be a sporting competition.

405-30 What you cannot count as assessable professional income

Assessable income from continuous service as author or inventor

You cannot count as assessable professional income any assessable income you *derive for meeting your obligations under a *scheme to provide services to another person by engaging in activities as the author of a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work, or as the inventor of an invention, unless:

the scheme was entered into solely to require you to provide services by:

making one or more specified literary, dramatic, musical or artistic works; or

inventing one or more specified inventions; and

you have not been providing services, and may not reasonably be expected to provide services, to that person or his or her *associates under successive *schemes that result in substantial continuity of your providing services.

Assessable income from certain activities

You cannot count as assessable professional income any assessable income that you *derive for:

coaching or training *sportspersons; or

umpiring or refereeing a sporting competition; or

administering a sporting competition; or

being a member of the pit crew in motor sport; or

being a theatrical or sports entrepreneur; or

owning or training animals.

Payments at end of employment, and capital gains

You cannot count as assessable professional income:

a superannuation lump sum or an employment termination payment; or

an unused annual leave payment or an unused long service leave payment; or

a net capital gain.

This section prevails over section 405-20

You cannot count particular assessable income as assessable professional income if this section says you cannot, even if section 405-20 says you count it.

405-35 Limits on counting amounts as assessable professional income

No double-counting

You cannot count the same amount as assessable professional income more than once, even if it is described in more than one subsection of section 405-20.

Amounts that are partly assessable professional income

If:

you *derive assessable income under or as a result of a *scheme; and

the assessable income consists of a part that is counted as assessable professional income and another part that cannot be; and

one component is unreasonably large and the other component is unreasonably small, for reasons that are directly or indirectly related to one another;

you must work out your assessable professional income as if the unreasonably large component were reduced by a reasonable amount and the unreasonably small component were increased by the same amount.

Subsection (2) affects your assessable professional income:

whether you *derived the assessable income directly or indirectly under or as a result of the *scheme; and

whether or not a reason mentioned in paragraph (2)(c) is the only reason why a component is unreasonably large or small.

405-40 Joint author or inventor treated as sole author or inventor

If you are a joint author of a literary, dramatic, musical or artistic work, work out your assessable professional income as if you were the author of that work.

Note: This section means that you are treated as a special professional, even if you have never been the sole author of a work.

If you are a joint inventor of an invention, work out your assessable professional income as if you were the inventor of that invention.

Note: This section means that you are treated as a special professional, even if you have never been the sole inventor of an invention.

Subdivision 405-C — Taxable professional income and average taxable professional income

Table of sections

405-45 Working out your taxable professional income

405-50 Working out your average taxable professional income

405-45 Working out your taxable professional income

Your taxable professional income for an income year is the amount (if any) by which your *assessable professional income for that year exceeds the amount of your deductions for that year worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Add up any amounts you can deduct for that year (except *apportionable deductions), so far as they reasonably relate to your assessable professional income for the year.

Step 2. Work out the amount using the formula:

Note: The result may be greater than the apportionable deductions. Also, it may be negative.

Step 3. Add the sum from Step 1 to the result from Step 2. If the result is more than nil, it is the amount of your deductions to be subtracted from your assessable professional income.

405-50 Working out your average taxable professional income

It is generally a 4-year average

(1) Work out your average taxable professional income for the *current year by:

adding up your taxable professional income for each of the last 4 income years before the current year; and

dividing the total by 4.

Phasing-in arrangements for new professionals

(2) However, if the *current year is less than 4 income years after *professional year 1, work out your average taxable professional income using the table in subsection (5).

(3) Professional year 1 is the first income year:

during which you were an Australian resident (for all or part of the income year); and

for which your taxable professional income was more than $2,500.

(4) Professional year 2, professional year 3 and professional year 4 are respectively the next 3 income years after *professional year 1.

The table is as follows:

Note: If you were a foreign resident for any part of the income year immediately before professional year 1, the effect of item 1 of the table is that your taxable income for professional year 1 will not include above-average special professional income.

Division 410 — Copyright and resale royalty collecting societies

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 410

410-A Notice of payments

Guide to Division 410

410-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out rules that apply whenever:

a copyright collecting society to which section 51-43 applies makes a payment to a member of the society; or

the resale royalty collecting society pays a resale royalty.

Subdivision 410-A — Notice of payments

Table of sections

410-5 Copyright collecting society must give notice to member of society

410-50 Resale royalty collecting society must give notice to holder of resale royalty right

410-5 Copyright collecting society must give notice to member of society

A copyright collecting society must give a *member of the society notice of any payment it makes to the member, if section 51-43 applies to the society.

The society must give the notice at the time of the payment.

The notice must be in the approved form.

Note: Under section 288-75 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 a society is liable to an administrative penalty for failing to give a notice required under this section.

410-50 Resale royalty collecting society must give notice to holder of resale royalty right

(1) The *resale royalty collecting society must give an entity notice of any payment it makes to the entity under section 26 of the Resale Royalty Right for Visual Artists Act 2009, if section 51-45 of this Act applies to the society.

The society must give the notice at the time of the payment.

The notice must be in the approved form.

Note: Under section 288-75 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 the society is liable to an administrative penalty for failing to give a notice required under this section.

Division 415 — Designated infrastructure projects

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 415

415-A Object of this Division

415-B Tax losses and bad debts

415-C Designating infrastructure projects

Guide to Division 415

415-1 What this Division is about

This Division provides for special treatment for tax losses and bad debts for certain entities (called “designated infrastructure project entities”) that carry on infrastructure projects that the Infrastructure CEO designates under Subdivision 415-C.

Subdivision 415-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

415-5 Object of this Division

415-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to reduce the disincentives for private expenditure on nationally significant infrastructure that result from the long lead times between incurring deductions for, and earning assessable income from, such expenditure.

Subdivision 415-B — Tax losses and bad debts

Guide to Subdivision 415-B

415-10 What this Subdivision is about

The unutilised amounts of a designated infrastructure project entity’s tax losses are increased each year by the long term bond rate. A designated infrastructure project entity is a fixed trust or company that:

carries on an infrastructure project designated under Subdivision 415-C; and

only engages, and has only ever engaged, in activities for the purposes of carrying on that designated infrastructure project.

The tests that apply in relation to tax losses and bad debts if there is a change of ownership of an entity are modified so that periods during which the entity is a designated infrastructure project entity are not tested.

The loss utilisation rules in Subdivision 707-C do not apply if the head company of a consolidated group is a designated infrastructure project entity after another designated infrastructure project entity joins the group.

Table of sections

Uplift of tax losses

415-15 Uplift of tax losses of designated infrastructure project entities

415-20 Designated infrastructure project entity

Change of ownership of trusts and companies

415-25 Tax losses of trusts

415-30 Bad debts written off etc. by trusts

415-35 Tax losses of companies

415-40 Bad debts written off by companies

Consolidated groups

415-45 Losses transferred to head companies of consolidated groups

Uplift of tax losses

Note: The transfer rules in subsection 707-120(1A) do not apply if a designated infrastructure project entity joins a consolidated group: see subsection 707-120(5).

415-15 Uplift of tax losses of designated infrastructure project entities

The amount of a *tax loss of a loss year of an entity is increased, at the end of each later income year (and before any *utilisation of the tax loss by the entity in the later income year), by the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

eligible portion of the later income year means the amount worked out using the following formula:

This subsection applies to the entity on a day in the later income year if:

the entity is a designated infrastructure project entity on that day; and

on the day mentioned in subsection (3), the entity has notified the Commissioner (whether before, during or after the later income year) in the approved form that the entity was, at any time, a designated infrastructure project entity.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), the day is the day after the latest of the following days:

the day before which the entity:

is required to lodge its income tax return for the later income year with the Commissioner; or

if the entity is not required to lodge an income tax return for the later income year—would be required to lodge its income tax return for the later income year were the entity required to lodge such a return;

the 28th day after the first day the entity carries on the infrastructure project mentioned in paragraph 415-20(1)(b);

the 28th day after the day the Infrastructure CEO designates the infrastructure project under section 415-70;

a later day allowed by the Commissioner.

Note: The increase under this section can occur at the end of an income year even if, at the end of the year, the entity does not know the entity is a designated infrastructure project entity (e.g. because the Infrastructure CEO has not yet designated the infrastructure project that the entity carries on, but the Infrastructure CEO does so later).

Consolidated groups

(4) Disregard paragraph 701-30(3)(a) for the purposes of the denominator in the formula in the definition of eligible portion of the later income year in subsection (1) of this section.

Note: Paragraph 701-30(3)(a) applies if the entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group during the later income year.

For the purposes of applying this section to a *tax loss the *head company of a consolidated group makes as mentioned in subsection 707-140(1):

the head company is treated as having made the loss in the income year before the income year in which the transfer mentioned in that subsection occurs; and

subsection (2) of this section is treated as not applying to the head company on or before the day the transfer occurs;

unless the transferred loss was a non-membership period loss (within the meaning of subsection 701-30(3)) in relation to the group.

Note: Subsection 707-140(1) treats the head company of a consolidated group as having made a loss in an income year in which a loss is transferred to the head company from an entity that joins the group.

415-20 Designated infrastructure project entity

Designated infrastructure project entity

(1) An entity is a designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the relevant time) if:

at the relevant time, the entity is a *fixed trust or a company; and

at or after the relevant time, the entity carries on a single designated infrastructure project; and

the entity does not, at or before the relevant time, carry on any other designated infrastructure project; and

the only activities in which the entity engages at the relevant time, or engaged before the relevant time, are or were for the purposes of the entity carrying on the single designated infrastructure project.

For the purposes of this section:

an enterprise that becomes a designated infrastructure project at a time is treated as having been a designated infrastructure project at all earlier times; and

if the entity carries on (whether or not at the same time) one or more parts, but not the whole, of a single designated infrastructure project—the parts are treated as being a single designated infrastructure project; and

in any case—the following are treated as being a single designated infrastructure project:

(i) a single designated infrastructure project (the listed infrastructure project) that is included on an Infrastructure Priority List;

any designated infrastructure projects that the entity carries on (whether or not at the same time) and that are part of the listed infrastructure project; and

Note: For Infrastructure Priority Lists, see paragraph 5(b) of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008.

in any case—any designated infrastructure projects that the entity carries on (whether or not at the same time) and that are part of a single infrastructure project that:

is included on an Infrastructure Priority List; and

is not a designated infrastructure project;

are treated as being a single designated infrastructure project.

Partnerships

Subsection (4) applies to an entity if:

the entity is a *fixed trust or a company; and

the person that is the trustee of the trust, or the person that is the company, is a partner in a partnership.

For the purposes of subsections (1) and (2), the entity:

is treated as carrying on any designated infrastructure project carried on by the partnership; and

is treated as engaging in any activity engaged in by the partnership; and

if the partnership engages in an activity for the purpose of the partnership carrying on a designated infrastructure project—is treated as engaging in that activity for the purpose of the entity carrying on that designated infrastructure project.

Consolidated groups

For the purposes of working out whether the *head company of a consolidated group was a designated infrastructure project entity at a time (whether before or after the group consolidates), section 701-5 (Entry history rule) is treated as not applying to the head company in relation to an entity that was not a *member of the consolidated group at that time.

For the purposes of working out whether an entity is a designated infrastructure project entity at a time after the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, section 701-40 (Exit history rule) is treated as not applying to the entity in relation to the group.

Change of ownership of trusts and companies

415-25 Tax losses of trusts

Scope

(1) This section applies to a *tax loss of a *trust if the trust is a *designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the status time) in the *loss year.

Modifications of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

(2) Despite paragraph 266-25(1)(b), 266-30(a), 266-75(1)(b) or (2)(b), 266-80(1)(a) or (2)(a), 266-110(1)(b), 266-115(a), 266-150(2)(a), 266-155(2)(a), 267-20(1)(b) or 267-60(a) in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, for the purposes of sections 266-40 and 266-45, section 266-90, subsections 266-125(1) and (2), subsections 266-165(1) and (2), sections 267-40 and 267-45 or sections 267-70 and 267-75 in that Schedule (whichever are applicable), the test period starts at the first time:

that occurs after the status time; and

at which the trust is not a designated infrastructure project entity;

if, apart from this subsection, the test period would start earlier.

For the purposes of section 267-30 in that Schedule, disregard any part of an income year during which the trust is a designated infrastructure project entity.

For the purposes of working out, under subsection 268-10(3), 268-15(3) or 268-20(3) in that Schedule, the end of the first period, disregard any part of the income year mentioned in that subsection during which the trust is a designated infrastructure project entity.

Note: A trust does not calculate its net income and tax loss under Division 268 in that Schedule if the trust was a designated infrastructure project entity during the whole of the income year: see paragraphs 266-30(c), 266-80(1)(d) and (2)(c), 266-115(b), 266-155(2)(b), 267-60(b) and 272-100(f) in that Schedule.

For the purposes paragraph 268-20(4)(b) in that Schedule, disregard any part of the first of the successive periods during which the trust is a designated infrastructure project entity.

415-30 Bad debts written off etc. by trusts

Scope

(1) This section applies to a debt to which paragraph 266-35(1)(a), 266-85(1)(a) or (2)(a), 266-120(1)(a), 266-160(1)(a) or (b), 267-25(1)(a) or 267-65(1)(a) in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies, if the trust is a *designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the status time) in the income year in which the debt was incurred.

Modifications of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

Despite paragraph 266-35(1)(b), 266-85(1)(b) or (2)(b), 266-120(1)(b), 266-160(2)(a), 267-25(1)(b) or 267-65(1)(a) in that Schedule, for the purposes of sections 266-40 and 266-45, section 266-90, subsections 266-125(1) and (2), subsections 266-165(1) and (2), sections 267-40 and 267-45 or sections 267-70 and 267-75 in that Schedule (whichever are applicable), the test period starts at the first time:

that occurs after the status time; and

at which the trust is not a designated infrastructure project entity.

For the purposes of section 267-30 in that Schedule, disregard any part of an income year during which the trust is a designated infrastructure project entity.

415-35 Tax losses of companies

Scope

(1) This section applies to a *tax loss of a company if the company is a *designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the status time) in the *loss year.

Modifications of Divisions 165 and 166

Despite subsection 165-12(1), 166-5(2) or 166-20(1), the ownership test period or test period under that subsection starts at the earlier of:

the first time:

that occurs after the status time; and

at which the company is not a designated infrastructure project entity; and

the end of the income year referred to in that subsection as the income year.

In a case to which paragraph (2)(b) applies, the company is treated as meeting the conditions in section 165-12.

Despite subsection 165-13(2), 166-5(5), 165-15(2) or 166-20(4), the business continuity test period under that subsection starts at the start of the ownership test period or test period (whichever is applicable) if, apart from this subsection, the business continuity test period would start earlier.

Despite subsection 165-13(2), 165-15(3), 166-5(6) or 166-20(4), the *test time under that subsection occurs just after the start of the ownership test period or test period (whichever is applicable) if, apart from this subsection, the test time would occur earlier.

A reference in subsection 165-15(1) to the loss year is treated as being a reference to the period:

starting at the start of the ownership test period; and

ending at the end of the income year in which the ownership test period starts.

For the purposes of working out, under paragraph 165-45(3)(a) or (b) or subsection 165-45(4), the end of the first period, disregard any part of the income year mentioned in section 165-45 during which the company is a designated infrastructure project entity.

Note: A company does not calculate its taxable income and tax loss under Subdivision 165-B if the company was a designated infrastructure project entity during the whole of the income year: see paragraph 165-35(c).

Exceptions

Disregard this section for the purposes of Subdivisions 165-CA and 165-CB (about net capital losses) and 175-A and 175-CA (about tax benefits).

415-40 Bad debts written off by companies

Scope

(1) This section applies to a debt that a company writes off as bad, if the company is a *designated infrastructure project entity at a time (the status time) in the income year in which the debt was incurred.

Modifications of Divisions 165 and 166

Despite subsection 165-123(1) or 166-40(2), the ownership test period or test period under that subsection starts at the earlier of:

the first time that occurs after the status time and on or after:

in the case of subsection 165-123(1)—the start of the first continuity period; or

in the case of subsection 166-40(2)—the time the company chooses under that subsection;

and at which the company is not a designated infrastructure project entity; and

the end of the second continuity period.

In a case to which paragraph (2)(b) applies, the company is treated as meeting the conditions in section 165-123.

Despite subsection 165-126(2), 165-129(2), 165-132(1) or 166-40(5), the business continuity test period under that subsection starts at the start of the ownership test period or test period (whichever is applicable) if, apart from this subsection, the business continuity test period would start earlier.

Despite subsection 165-126(2), 165-129(3) or 166-40(6), the *test time under that subsection occurs just after the start of the ownership test period or test period (whichever is applicable) if, apart from this subsection, the test time would occur earlier.

A reference in subsection 165-129(1) to the first continuity period is treated as being a reference to the period:

starting at the start of the ownership test period; and

ending at the end of the income year in which the ownership test period starts.

Exception

Disregard this section for the purposes of Subdivision 175-C (about tax benefits).

Consolidated groups

415-45 Losses transferred to head companies of consolidated groups

Subdivision 707-C (Amount of transferred losses that can be utilised) does not apply to a loss transferred under Subdivision 707-A (Transfer of previously unutilised losses to head company), if:

just before the transfer, the transferor of the loss was a designated infrastructure project entity; and

just after the transfer, the transferee of the loss is a designated infrastructure project entity.

Subdivision 415-C — Designating infrastructure projects

Guide to Subdivision 415-C

415-50 What this Subdivision is about

To receive the special treatment for tax losses and bad debts under Subdivision 415-B, an entity must only engage in activities for the purposes of carrying on an infrastructure project designated by the Infrastructure CEO under this Subdivision.

Designation is dependent on:

criteria prescribed by the Minister; and

a cap on the total estimated private capital expenditure that would be incurred for all provisionally designated and designated infrastructure projects.

Table of sections

Designating infrastructure projects

415-55 Applications for designation

415-60 Dealing with applications

415-65 Provisional designation

415-70 Designation

Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap

415-75 Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap

415-80 Acceptance of estimates of infrastructure project capital expenditure

Miscellaneous

415-85 Review of decisions

415-90 Information to be made public

415-95 Delegation

415-100 Infrastructure project designation rules

Designating infrastructure projects

415-55 Applications for designation

(1) An entity may apply to the *Infrastructure CEO to have the Infrastructure CEO designate an *enterprise (the infrastructure project) that is a proposed investment in, or enhancement to, infrastructure as being an infrastructure project in relation to which Subdivision 415-B applies.

Note: The Infrastructure CEO holds office under the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008.

The application must include an estimate of the infrastructure project capital expenditure that would be incurred for the purpose of the infrastructure project.

Subsection (2) does not apply to infrastructure project capital expenditure to the extent that the infrastructure project capital expenditure would be:

incurred by an *Australian government agency; or

funded by a grant from an Australian government agency.

The application must:

be in a form (if any) approved by the Infrastructure CEO; and

be accompanied by the fee (if any) prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules.

A fee prescribed as mentioned in paragraph (4)(b) is payable to the Infrastructure CEO, on behalf of the Commonwealth.

415-60 Dealing with applications

Dealing with applications

The Infrastructure CEO must deal with applications made under this Division:

in accordance with the requirements prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules; or

if the infrastructure project designation rules do not prescribe any requirements—in the order in which the applications are made.

Without limiting paragraph (1)(a), the requirements the infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that paragraph include:

requirements relating to the time at which or by which the Infrastructure CEO must deal with an application; and

requirements relating to applications that, in the opinion of the Infrastructure CEO, are incomplete or do not contain sufficient information for the Infrastructure CEO to deal with the applications.

For the purposes of subsection (1), the Infrastructure CEO deals with an application by:

designating the infrastructure project provisionally under section 415-65, or deciding not to designate the infrastructure project provisionally under that section; or

designating the infrastructure project under section 415-70 or deciding not to designate the infrastructure project under that section (whether or not the Infrastructure CEO has previously dealt with the application by designating the infrastructure project provisionally under section 415-65).

Paragraph (1)(b) does not apply to the Infrastructure CEO deciding whether to designate a provisionally designated infrastructure project under section 415-70.

No designation after 30 June 2017 or later prescribed day

Despite anything else in this Subdivision, the Infrastructure CEO must not provisionally designate the infrastructure project under section 415-65, or designate the infrastructure project under section 415-70, after:

30 June 2017; or

a later day (if any) prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules.

415-65 Provisional designation

Provisional designation

The Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, designate the infrastructure project provisionally for the purposes of this Division if:

the entity applies to have the Infrastructure CEO designate the infrastructure project in accordance with section 415-55; and

the Infrastructure CEO accepts the estimate of the infrastructure project capital expenditure under section 415-80; and

the provisional designation would not breach the infrastructure project capital expenditure cap under section 415-75; and

the following conditions are satisfied:

the conditions prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules;

(ii) if the infrastructure project designation rules do not prescribe any conditions—in the opinion of the Infrastructure CEO, the infrastructure is nationally significant infrastructure (within the meaning of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008); and

the infrastructure project is not a designated infrastructure project.

The instrument of provisional designation must contain any details prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules.

Amendment of instruments of provisional designation

The Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, amend the instrument of provisional designation in accordance with any requirements prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules. The Infrastructure CEO must not amend the instrument in any other circumstances.

Without limiting subsection (3), the requirements the infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that subsection include requirements relating to when an amendment must take effect, which may be a time before the amendment is made.

Revocation of instruments of provisional designation

The Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, revoke the instrument of provisional designation:

if the Infrastructure CEO has designated the project under section 415-70, or decides not to designate the project; or

if the Infrastructure CEO has revoked the instrument of acceptance of the estimate under section 415-80; or

in the circumstances (if any) prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules.

The Infrastructure CEO must not revoke the instrument in any other circumstances.

Without limiting paragraph (5)(c), the circumstances the infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that paragraph include:

circumstances involving a failure by a prescribed entity to give prescribed information to the Infrastructure CEO; and

circumstances involving a breach of conditions set by the Infrastructure CEO for the provisionally designated infrastructure project to remain provisionally designated.

The infrastructure project designation rules must prescribe matters to which the Infrastructure CEO must have regard in setting conditions for a provisionally designated infrastructure project to remain provisionally designated, if the infrastructure project designation rules provide for the Infrastructure CEO to set such conditions, as mentioned in paragraph (6)(b).

415-70 Designation

Designation

The Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, designate the infrastructure project for the purposes of this Division if:

the entity applies to have the Infrastructure CEO designate the infrastructure project in accordance with section 415-55; and

the Infrastructure CEO accepts the estimate of the infrastructure project capital expenditure under section 415-80; and

the designation would not breach the infrastructure project capital expenditure cap under section 415-75; and

the following conditions are satisfied:

the conditions prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules;

if the infrastructure project designation rules do not prescribe any conditions—the conditions mentioned in subsection (2);

(whether or not the infrastructure project is a provisionally designated infrastructure project).

For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(d)(ii), the following are the conditions:

(a) in the opinion of the *Infrastructure CEO, the infrastructure is nationally significant infrastructure (within the meaning of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008);

in the opinion of the Infrastructure CEO, financial close on the infrastructure project has occurred or is imminent.

The instrument of designation must contain any details prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules.

Amendment of instruments of designation

The Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, amend the instrument of designation in accordance with any requirements prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules. The Infrastructure CEO must not amend the instrument in any other circumstances.

Without limiting subsection (4), the requirements the infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that subsection include requirements relating to when an amendment must take effect, which may be a time before the amendment is made.

Revocation of instruments of designation

The Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, revoke the instrument of designation in the circumstances prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules. The Infrastructure CEO must not revoke the instrument in any other circumstances.

Without limiting subsection (6), the circumstances the infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that subsection include:

circumstances involving a failure by a prescribed entity to give prescribed information to the Infrastructure CEO; and

circumstances involving a breach of conditions set by the Infrastructure CEO for the designated infrastructure project to remain designated.

The infrastructure project designation rules must prescribe matters to which the Infrastructure CEO must have regard in setting conditions for a designated infrastructure project to remain designated, if the infrastructure project designation rules provide for the Infrastructure CEO to set such conditions, as mentioned in paragraph (7)(b).

Infrastructure CEO must notify Commissioner

The Infrastructure CEO must notify the Commissioner of a decision made by the Infrastructure CEO:

to designate the infrastructure project; or

to amend or to revoke the instrument of designation;

within 28 days after making the decision.

Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap

415-75 Infrastructure project capital expenditure cap

Provisional designation, or designation, of the infrastructure project would breach the infrastructure project capital expenditure cap under this section if, were the provisional designation or designation to occur, the total of the estimates accepted under section 415-80 for each infrastructure project that, just after the provisional designation or designation, would be:

a provisionally designated infrastructure project; or

a designated infrastructure project;

would exceed the amount mentioned in subsection (2).

The amount is:

$25 billion; or

if the infrastructure project designation rules prescribe a greater amount—that prescribed amount.

(3) For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard so much of the amount of an estimate for an infrastructure project (the listed infrastructure project) as relates to a part of the listed infrastructure project, if:

that part of the listed project is (or would be, were the provisional designation or designation mentioned in that subsection to occur):

a provisionally designated infrastructure project; or

a designated infrastructure project; and

the listed infrastructure project is included on an Infrastructure Priority List.

Note: For Infrastructure Priority Lists, see paragraph 5(b) of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008.

In this Act:

infrastructure project capital expenditure:

has the meaning given by the infrastructure project designation rules; or

(b) if the infrastructure project designation rules do not give infrastructure project capital expenditure a meaning—means capital expenditure.

415-80 Acceptance of estimates of infrastructure project capital expenditure

Acceptance of estimates

The Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, accept the estimate of infrastructure project capital expenditure if the following conditions are satisfied:

the conditions prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules;

if the infrastructure project designation rules do not prescribe any conditions—in the opinion of the Infrastructure CEO, the estimate is acceptable.

Revocation of instruments of acceptance

The Infrastructure CEO must not revoke the instrument of acceptance if the infrastructure project is a designated infrastructure project.

Subject to subsection (2), the Infrastructure CEO must, by instrument in writing, revoke the instrument of acceptance in the circumstances prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules. The Infrastructure CEO must not revoke the instrument in any other circumstances.

Without limiting subsection (3), the circumstances the infrastructure project designation rules may prescribe for the purposes of that subsection include:

circumstances involving a failure by a prescribed entity to give prescribed information to the Infrastructure CEO; and

circumstances involving a failure by the applicant to amend the estimate in accordance with a request made by the Infrastructure CEO.

The infrastructure project designation rules must prescribe matters to which the Infrastructure CEO must have regard in requesting the applicant to amend the estimate, if the infrastructure project designation rules provide for the Infrastructure CEO to make such requests as mentioned in paragraph (4)(b).

If:

the infrastructure project designation rules provide for the Infrastructure CEO to request the applicant to amend the estimate; and

the applicant amends the estimate in accordance with such a request;

the acceptance is treated, from the time the amendment is made, as being an acceptance of the amended estimate.

Miscellaneous

415-85 Review of decisions

Applications may be made to the ART for review of the following decisions of the Infrastructure CEO:

a decision not to designate the infrastructure project provisionally under section 415-65;

a decision to amend or revoke the instrument of provisional designation under section 415-65;

a decision not to designate the infrastructure project under section 415-70;

a decision to amend or revoke the instrument of designation under section 415-70.

415-90 Information to be made public

The Infrastructure CEO must comply with any requirements prescribed by the infrastructure project designation rules in relation to the publication of information about:

*provisionally designated infrastructure projects and *designated infrastructure projects; and

the infrastructure project capital expenditure cap under section 415-75.

415-95 Delegation

The *Infrastructure CEO may, by instrument in writing, delegate any of the Infrastructure CEO’s powers or functions under this Subdivision to an SES employee, or acting SES employee, referred to in paragraph 39(1)(a) or 39A(1)(a) of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008.

415-100 Infrastructure project designation rules

(1) The Minister may, by legislative instrument, make rules (the infrastructure project designation rules) prescribing matters:

required or permitted by this Subdivision to be prescribed by the rules; or

necessary or convenient to be prescribed for carrying out or giving effect to this Subdivision.

(2) Despite subsection 14(2) of the Legislation Act 2003, the *infrastructure project designation rules may make provision in relation to a matter by applying, adopting or incorporating any matter contained in an instrument, or other writing, made by Infrastructure Australia as in force or existing from time to time.

Division 417 — Timor Sea petroleum

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 417

417-A Introduction

417-B Capital allowances

417-C Capital gains tax

417-D Transferring or applying tax losses

417-E Foreign income tax offset

417-F Transfer pricing

Guide to Division 417

417-1 What this Division is about

This Division alters the operation of this Act on several topics (outlined in the table of Subdivisions above) to address how the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty could affect the tax treatment, under Australian income tax law, of entities that undertake petroleum activities in the affected area.

Subdivision 417-A — Introduction

417-5 Object

The object of this Division is to give effect to Australia’s obligations under the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty to provide, in relation to transitioned petroleum activities, equivalent tax treatment to the tax treatment previously applying in relation to those activities.

417-10 Meaning of transitioned petroleum activities

(1) Transitioned petroleum activities are petroleum activities (within the meaning of the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty) that are undertaken:

pursuant to the terms of any of the following *production sharing contracts:

Production Sharing Contract JPDA 03-12;

Production Sharing Contract JPDA 03-13;

Production Sharing Contract JPDA 06-105;

Production Sharing Contract JPDA 11-106; or

pursuant to the terms of a production sharing contract that:

comes into force after, or when, that treaty entered into force; and

has the effect of replacing, and relates to the same area as, a production sharing contract mentioned in paragraph (a); or

in a part of the Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P permit area that, as a result of that treaty entering into force, ceased to be within the continental shelf of Australia.

Note: This part of the Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P permit area includes the Buffalo Oil Field.

(2) The Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P permit area is the area that, just before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, was the subject of Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P, granted under Part 2.2 of the Offshore Petroleum and Greenhouse Gas Storage Act 2006 on 27 May 2016.

Subdivision 417-B — Capital allowances

417-25 Deducting amounts for depreciating assets

If:

you use a depreciating asset, or you have it installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking transitioned petroleum activities; and

before the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, you or another entity used the asset, or you or another entity had it installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking transitioned petroleum activities;

to the extent that you use the asset, or you have it installed ready for use, for that purpose, you are taken to use the asset, or to have it installed ready for use, entirely for a taxable purpose.

For the purposes of subsection 40-25(2), if:

you can deduct an amount for a decline in value of the asset; and

apart from subsection (1), you would not be able to deduct an amount, or would only be able to deduct a lesser amount, for that decline in value; and

the transitioned petroleum activities are wholly or partly undertaken, or to be undertaken, in relation to the *JPDA;

to the extent that the activities are so undertaken, or so to be undertaken, the part of the asset’s decline in value that is attributable to your use of the asset, or your having it installed ready for use, for a taxable purpose is reduced to 10% of what it would be apart from this subsection.

For the purposes of Subdivision 40-C, if:

you can deduct an amount for a decline in value of the asset; and

apart from subsection (1), you would not be able to deduct an amount, or would only be able to deduct a lesser amount, for that decline in value;

in working out the second element of the *cost of the asset, disregard any amount that you pay, and any expenditure that you incur, on or after the day on which the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force.

417-30 Balancing adjustments

If:

before the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, you *held a depreciating asset that you used, or had installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking transitioned petroleum activities; and

you stopped holding the asset when that treaty entered into force, because the asset ceased to exist at that time; and

the cessation occurred in connection with the entry into force of that treaty;

the cessation is taken, for the purposes of this Act, not to be a balancing adjustment event.

Section 40-285 does not apply in relation to a depreciating asset you *held if:

(a) before the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, you or another entity used the asset, or you or another entity had it *installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities; and

on or after the day on which that treaty entered into force, a balancing adjustment event occurs for the asset.

Note: The effect of this subsection is to prevent an amount being included in your assessable income, or a deduction arising, because of a balancing adjustment event. The balancing adjustment event still occurs, so the operation of a section such as section 118-24 is unaffected.

(3) It does not matter, for the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), whether the asset is also used, or *installed ready for use, for a purpose other than the purpose of undertaking *transitioned petroleum activities.

If, as a result of the balancing adjustment event mentioned in paragraph (2)(b), another entity *holds the asset, the *cost of the asset to the other entity is taken to be the asset’s *adjustable value to you just before the balancing adjustment event occurs.

417-35 Allocating assets to a project pool

(1) You may choose to allocate to a project pool all the *depreciating assets (the pooled assets) that:

you *held when the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force; and

before that treaty entered into force, you used, or had installed ready for use, for a purpose of undertaking transitioned petroleum activities.

(2) You must choose by the day you lodge your *income tax return for the income year (the initial income year) in which that treaty entered into force.

The choice is irrevocable.

If you make the choice, for the purposes of Division 40 and section 417-30:

the pooled assets are taken to be a single depreciating asset that you *hold; and

the single asset is taken to be used, or installed ready for use, for the same purpose as the purpose for which the pooled assets were used, or installed ready for use, when the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force; and

the *cost of the single asset is taken to be an amount equal to the sum of the *adjustable values of all of the pooled assets when that treaty entered into force; and

the decline in value of the single asset is taken to be:

for the initial income year—40% of its cost; and

for the next income year—40% of its cost; and

for the income year after that next income year—20% of its cost; and

a balancing adjustment event cannot occur for the single asset; and

a CGT event cannot occur for the single asset; and

amounts are not deductible, by you or any other entity, for declines in value of any of the assets allocated to the pool for:

the part of the initial income year occurring on or after the entry into force of that treaty; or

any subsequent income year.

The transfer of a pooled asset to another entity does not affect the operation of subsection (4) in relation to the single asset.

417-40 Deduction for expenditure on mining site rehabilitation

You can deduct, for an income year, 10% of expenditure on mining site rehabilitation that you incur in that year if the rehabilitation relates to the undertaking (by you or another entity) of transitioned petroleum activities in relation to the *JPDA.

However, expenditure on these things is not deductible under this section:

acquiring land or an interest in land or a right, power or privilege to do with land;

a bond or security, however described, for performing mining site rehabilitation;

*housing and welfare.

417-45 Capital expenditure

For the purposes of section 40-835, if:

a project amount was allocated to a project pool before the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force; and

the project amount was expenditure for a purpose of undertaking transitioned petroleum activities in relation to the *JPDA;

to the extent that the operation of the project in an income year relates to that expenditure, 10% of the project is taken to operate, in the year, for a taxable purpose.

For the purposes of section 40-835, if:

a project amount was allocated to a project pool before the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force; and

the project amount was expenditure for a purpose of undertaking transitioned petroleum activities otherwise than in relation to the *JPDA;

to the extent that the operation of the project in an income year relates to that expenditure, the project is taken to operate, in the year, for a taxable purpose.

(3) If subsection (1) or (2) applies to one or more *project amounts allocated to a project pool, for the income year (the initial income year) in which the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force or a later income year, calculate your deduction under section 40-830 or 40-832 for the project pool as follows:

calculate the amount of the deduction as if none of those project amounts had been allocated to the project pool;

add to that amount the following:

for the initial income year—40% of the sum of those project amounts;

for the next income year—40% of that sum;

for the income year after that next income year—20% of that sum.

417-50 Transferring entitlement to deductions relating to a project pool

You may choose to transfer, to a corporate tax entity, either or both of the following:

all or part of your entitlement to deductions under Division 40 in relation to the declines in value of the single asset mentioned in subsection 417-35(4) (including future declines in value but not including declines in value that have already been deducted under that Division);

all or part of so much of your entitlement to deductions under section 40-830 or 40-832 as arises because of the operation of section 417-45.

The choice:

must be in the approved form; and

must be made no later than the day you lodge your income tax return for the first income year for which all or part of your entitlement is to be transferred.

The choice cannot be revoked.

Only one choice can be made under this section in relation to the same part of the entitlement.

If you choose under this section to transfer to another entity all or part of your entitlement:

the other entity can make deductions arising from that entitlement or part; and

at the time of the choice, a franking credit arises in the franking account of the other entity; and

you can no longer make deductions arising from that entitlement or part.

(6) The amount of the *franking credit under paragraph (5)(b) is an amount equal to the amount of the deduction transferred multiplied by the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

Subdivision 417-C — Capital gains tax

417-65 CGT events not created by Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entering into force

If:

before the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, you owned an intangible CGT asset connected with undertaking transitioned petroleum activities; and

your ownership of the asset ended when that treaty entered into force; and

the ending of your ownership occurred in connection with the entry into force of that treaty;

the ending of your ownership is not a CGT event.

417-70 Tax treatment of consideration for transferred entitlement to deductions or tax loss

If:

you choose to transfer to another entity:

under section 417-50, an entitlement to deductions; or

under Subdivision 417-D, an amount of a *tax loss for an income year; and

you receive any consideration from the other entity for the entitlement to deductions or for the amount of the tax loss;

then:

so much of the consideration as is given for the entitlement to deductions or for the amount of the tax loss is not included in your assessable income or your exempt income; and

a *capital gain does not accrue to you because of the receipt of the consideration.

If:

you choose to transfer to another entity:

under section 417-50, an entitlement to deductions; or

under Subdivision 417-D, an amount of a *tax loss for an income year; and

the other entity gives you any consideration for the entitlement to deductions or for the amount of the tax loss;

then:

the other entity cannot deduct the amount or value of the consideration; and

the other entity does not incur a *capital loss because of the giving of the consideration.

417-75 Membership interests affected by transfer of entitlement to deductions or tax loss

If:

an entity chooses to transfer:

under section 417-50, an entitlement to deductions; or

under Subdivision 417-D, an amount of a *tax loss for an income year; and

another entity *holds, either directly or indirectly, a *membership interest in that entity;

disregard a *capital loss from a CGT event that arises in relation to the membership interest after the transfer takes effect, except to the extent that the entity can demonstrate that the loss is attributable to a matter other than the transfer.

Subdivision 417-D — Transferring or applying tax losses

417-90 Tax losses from transitioned petroleum activities

Transferring tax losses attributable to activities undertaken before the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force

If:

you have a *tax loss for the income year in which the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty entered into force, or for an earlier income year; and

some or all of the tax loss is attributable to you undertaking transitioned petroleum activities before that treaty entered into force;

you may, for that income year or a later income year, choose to transfer all or any part of the amount of the tax loss that is so attributable to a *corporate tax entity (the transferee) that is your *associate and either is an Australian resident or has a *permanent establishment in Australia.

Transferring or applying other tax losses

If:

(a) you have a *tax loss for an income year (the loss year); and

some or all of the tax loss is attributable to you undertaking transitioned petroleum activities; and

paragraph (1)(b) does not apply to those activities;

you may, for that income year or a later income year:

(d) choose to transfer all or any part of the amount of the tax loss that is so attributable to a *corporate tax entity (the transferee) that either is an Australian resident or has a *permanent establishment in Australia; or

choose to apply all or any part of the amount of the tax loss that is so attributable as a deduction from your assessable income for any of the 4 income years preceding the income year for which you make the choice.

However:

the total amount chosen to be transferred or applied under subsection (2) for an income year must not exceed 10% of the total amount:

on which your liability for foreign income tax under the law of Timor-Leste is required to be worked out; and

that relates to undertaking those transitioned petroleum activities during that year; and

you cannot make a choice under paragraph (2)(e) for an income year if you do not have a franking surplus at the end of that year; and

the total amount chosen to be applied under paragraph (2)(e) for an income year must not exceed the sum of:

the amount of your franking surplus at the end of that year; and

the product of the amount of that surplus and the *corporate tax gross-up rate.

In working out for the purposes of paragraph (3)(a) the total amount chosen to be transferred or applied under subsection (2) for an income year, disregard:

any part of the *tax loss attributable to deductions for assets allocated to a project pool under section 417-35; and

any part of the *tax loss attributable to deductions for assets allocated to a project pool under Subdivision 40-I, to the extent that the deductions relate to *project amounts to which subsection 417-45(1) or (2) applies.

In working out for the purposes of paragraph (3)(a) the total amount on which your liability for foreign income tax under the law of Timor-Leste is required to be worked out, disregard the amounts of any deductions for tax paid under the law of Timor-Leste.

Paragraphs (3)(b) and (c) do not apply if you were a foreign resident (other than a NZ franking company) for more than half of the income year for which the choice was made.

417-95 How choices are made

A choice under section 417-90:

must be in the approved form; and

must be made no later than:

the day you lodge your income tax return for the income year for which the choice is made; or

a later time allowed by the Commissioner; and

must be given to the Commissioner within 30 days after you make the choice.

The choice cannot be revoked.

Only one choice can be made under this Subdivision in relation to the same part of a *tax loss.

417-100 The effect of choosing to transfer losses

(1) If you choose under this Subdivision to transfer an amount of a *tax loss for an income year (the loss year):

the amount is taken to be a tax loss incurred by the transferee in the loss year; and

the transferee can deduct the amount in accordance with section 36-17 (which is about how to deduct a tax loss); and

at the time of the choice, a franking credit arises in the franking account of the transferee; and

you can no longer *utilise the amount, and you are taken not to have incurred the tax loss to the extent of the amount.

Despite paragraph (1)(a), if the loss year is the same as the income year of the transfer, the transferee is taken to have incurred the *tax loss in the income year before the loss year.

Note: This rule is needed because Division 36 allows a tax loss to be deducted only if it was incurred in an earlier income year.

(3) The amount of the *franking credit under paragraph (1)(c) is an amount equal to the amount of the *tax loss transferred multiplied by the standard corporate tax rate (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

Paragraph (1)(c) does not apply if you are not, and have never been, a corporate tax entity.

417-105 The effect of choosing to apply losses to earlier income years

If you choose under this Subdivision to apply an amount of a *tax loss for an income year as a deduction from your assessable income for an earlier income year:

you can deduct the amount from your assessable income for the earlier income year; and

you can no longer *utilise the amount, and you are taken not to have incurred the tax loss to the extent of the amount.

417-110 Continuity of ownership and business continuity tests

Section 165-10 does not apply to a *tax loss that meets the requirements of:

paragraphs 417-90(1)(a) and (b); or

paragraphs 417-90(2)(a) and (b).

Subdivision 417-E — Foreign income tax offset

417-125 Foreign income tax offset

If:

you are entitled to a tax offset under Subdivision 770-A for an income year for foreign income tax; and

the foreign income tax is payable on income you earned as an employee in relation to transitioned petroleum activities undertaken, or to be undertaken, in relation to the *JPDA;

the amount of the offset is to be worked out in accordance with the Taxation Code in Annex G under Article 13(b) of the Treaty (within the meaning of that Act), as if that Taxation Code applied in relation to the income.

Subdivision 770-B does not apply in relation to the amount of the offset.

Subdivision 417-F — Transfer pricing

417-140 Transfer pricing benefits relating to transitioned petroleum activities

Acquisitions of Timor Sea petroleum

An entity is taken, for the purposes of Division 815, not to get a transfer pricing benefit from conditions that operate between the entity and another entity in connection with their commercial or financial relations just because the entity acquires petroleum (within the meaning of the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty) from the other entity if:

the petroleum was produced by undertaking transitioned petroleum activities in the Bayu-Undan Gas Field (within the meaning of that treaty); and

the price for the acquisition is the price that is used by, or agreed with, a *foreign government agency of Timor-Leste in relation to the acquisition for the purposes of administering the law of Timor-Leste relating to taxation.

Supplies of goods and services

An entity is taken, for the purposes of Division 815, not to get a transfer pricing benefit from conditions that operate between the entity and another entity in connection with their commercial or financial relations just because the entity supplies goods or services to the other entity if:

the supply occurred pursuant to the terms of an arrangement, connected with undertaking transitioned petroleum activities, that:

was in force just before the Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty was made; or

is substantially similar to an arrangement that was in force just before that time; and

the price for the supply is the price that is used by, or agreed with, a *foreign government agency of Timor-Leste in relation to the supply for the purposes of administering the law of Timor-Leste relating to taxation.

Division 418 — Exploration for minerals

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 418

418-A Object of this Division

418-B Junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset

418-C Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit

418-D Creating exploration credits

418-DA Exploration credits allocation

418-E Issuing exploration credits

418-F Excess exploration credits

418-G Other matters

Guide to Division 418

418-1 What this Division is about

Generally, you are entitled to a tax offset for an income year for exploration credits issued to you for the income year.

A greenfields minerals explorer can create exploration credits for an income year. Before creating exploration credits, the explorer must obtain an allocation of exploration credits from the Commissioner for the year. Exploration credits cannot be created for the 2025-26 income year or later income years.

The exploration credits created for an income year cannot exceed an amount based on the explorer’s greenfields minerals expenditure or tax loss for the year. If the explorer’s exploration credits allocation for the year is smaller than that amount, the amount of exploration credits that the explorer can create will be reduced to sit within the allocation. However, any unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year generally would be carried over and so would increase the amount of exploration credits that the explorer can create.

An exploration credit created by a greenfields minerals explorer can be issued to you if you have invested in the explorer. While the tax offset you receive for the exploration credit issued to you for an income year will apply to that income year generally, the investment that gives rise to that offset may have been made in that or the preceding income year.

There are rules to ensure that exploration credits are not streamed to some investors rather than others. There are also rules to ensure that the total of the exploration credits you receive because of an investment (whether those credits are issued to you for the year in which you invest or the subsequent year) do not exceed the corporate tax that might be paid by the greenfields minerals explorer on that investment.

The explorer is liable to pay excess exploration credit tax if the explorer issues exploration credits in breach of these rules.

There is a cap on total allocations made by the Commissioner for each income year, but if part of the cap from the preceding year is unallocated it generally will be carried over. Allocations are made in the order in which applications for an allocation are made.

If an exploration credit is issued to a corporate tax entity, it will give rise to a franking credit (rather than a tax offset).

Note: Excess exploration credit tax is imposed by the Excess Exploration Credit Tax Act 2015, and the amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

Subdivision 418-A — Object of this Division

Table of sections

418-5 Object of this Division

418-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to encourage investment in minerals exploration in Australia by allowing the benefit of losses from minerals exploration to flow to shareholders who share in the risk of the exploration.

Subdivision 418-B — Junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset

Table of sections

Entitlement to junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset

418-10 Who is entitled to the tax offset—ordinary case

418-15 Who is entitled to the tax offset—life insurance company

418-20 Entitlement of member of a trust or partnership to a share of exploration credits

Amount of junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset

418-25 The amount of the tax offset

418-30 Reduced amount of the tax offset for certain trusts

Entitlement to junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset

418-10 Who is entitled to the tax offset—ordinary case

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

an exploration credit is issued to you under Subdivision 418-E for the income year; and

you are not:

a corporate tax entity; or

(ii) a trust (other than a trust in relation to which some or all of the liability of the trustee to tax is provided under subsection 98(1) or (2) or 99(2) or (3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

a partnership; or

an *exempt entity (other than an *exempt institution that is eligible for a refund); and

you are an Australian resident during the whole of that income year.

418-15 Who is entitled to the tax offset—life insurance company

An entity is entitled to a tax offset for an income year if:

the entity is a life insurance company; and

an exploration credit is issued to the entity under Subdivision 418-E for the income year; and

the entity is an Australian resident during the whole of that income year; and

were the exploration credit to be a *franked distribution made:

by the same entity that issued the credit; and

in the same circumstances in which the credit was issued;

the exploration credit would give rise to a tax offset for the entity that would be subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of paragraph 67-25(1C)(b) or (1D)(b).

If:

an exploration credit is issued to a life insurance company; and

paragraph (1)(d) applies in relation to only part of the exploration credit;

this Division applies as if that part of the exploration credit, and the part of the exploration credit in relation to which that paragraph does not apply, were 2 separate exploration credits issued to the life insurance company.

418-20 Entitlement of member of a trust or partnership to a share of exploration credits

Members taken to be issued with exploration credits

If:

you are a *member of a trust or partnership during the income year; and

an exploration credit is issued to the trust or partnership under Subdivision 418-E for the income year; and

the trust or partnership is not a corporate tax entity; and

the trustee of the trust, or the partnership, determines that you are entitled to a share of the exploration credits issued to the trust or partnership for the income year; and

the trustee of the trust, or the partnership, gives you a statement, in accordance with subsection (4), informing you of that entitlement;

you are taken, for the purposes of this Subdivision, to have been issued with an exploration credit under Subdivision 418-E, for the income year, of an amount equal to your share of the exploration credits issued to the trust or partnership for the income year.

Effect of restrictions on distributions

Despite subsection (1), you are not taken, under that subsection, to have been issued with an exploration credit under Subdivision 418-E to the extent that, if the exploration credit referred to in paragraph (1)(b) were a *franked distribution of the same amount made:

at the time of the determination referred to in paragraph (1)(d); and

in relation to the interest, held by the trust or partnership, in relation to which the exploration credit referred to in paragraph (1)(b) is issued to the trust or partnership during the income year;

the terms and conditions under which the trust or partnership operates would not permit you to be paid the amount, or the proportion, of the franked distribution that would reflect your entitlement referred to in paragraph (1)(d).

Anti-avoidance

Despite subsection (1), you are not taken, under that subsection, to have been issued with an exploration credit under Subdivision 418-E to the extent that, if the exploration credit were a distribution to you, from the trust or partnership, of a *franked distribution that:

was of the same amount as the amount of your share, referred to in paragraph (1)(d), of the exploration credit referred to in paragraph (1)(b); and

was made:

by the same entity that issued that exploration credit; and

in relation to the same interest in that entity; and

in the same circumstances in which that exploration credit was issued; and

*flowed indirectly through one or more trusts or partnerships that were the same as the one or more trusts or partnerships that, apart from subparagraphs 418-10(b)(ii) and (iii), would have been entitled to a tax offset under this Subdivision in relation to:

that exploration credit; or

another exploration credit from which that exploration credit is directly or indirectly derived;

you would not be entitled to a tax offset under Division 207 in relation to the franked distribution.

Statements to members

A statement referred to in paragraph (1)(e) must:

be in the approved form; and

be given to you on or before the due date:

if the trust or partnership is an *investment body for *Part VA investments—for giving to the Commissioner an annual investment income report in respect of the financial year corresponding to the income year; or

otherwise—for the trust or partnership to lodge its income tax return for the income year.

Reports to the Commissioner

A trust or partnership that has given one or more statements under paragraph (1)(e) relating to *exploration credits for an income year must give to the Commissioner, on or before the due date referred to in paragraph (4)(b) in relation to that income year, a report that:

relates to all the statements that the trust or partnership has given under paragraph (1)(e) relating to exploration credits for that income year; and

is in the approved form.

Amount of junior minerals exploration incentive tax offset

418-25 The amount of the tax offset

The amount of your tax offset under this Subdivision for an income year is the sum of:

all the *exploration credits issued to you under Subdivision 418-E; and

all the exploration credits taken under section 418-20 to have been issued to you;

for the income year.

418-30 Reduced amount of the tax offset for certain trusts

(1) If an entity is a trust in relation to which some, but not all, of the liability of the trustee to tax is provided under subsection 98(1) or (2) or 99(2) or (3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the amount of the entity’s *tax offset under this Subdivision for an income year is:

where:

income taxed under subsection 98(1) or (2) or 99(2) or (3) is the amount of the *net income of the trust, for the income year, in relation to which the trustee is liable to tax under subsection 98(1) or (2) or 99(2) or (3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

If:

an entity is a trust; and

one or more *members of the trust are taken under section 418-20 to have been issued with one or more *exploration credits for an income year;

the amount of the entity’s tax offset, under section 418-25 or subsection (1) of this section, for the income year is reduced by the sum of amounts of the exploration credits taken to be issued to those members.

Subdivision 418-C — Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit

Table of sections

418-50 Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit—ordinary case

418-55 Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit—life insurance company

418-50 Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit—ordinary case

A franking credit arises in the franking account of a corporate tax entity (other than a life insurance company) if:

an exploration credit is issued to the entity under Subdivision 418-E during an income year; and

if the entity were not a corporate tax entity, the entity would be entitled to a tax offset under Subdivision 418-B in relation to the exploration credit.

The amount of the franking credit is the amount of the tax offset to which the entity would be entitled under Subdivision 418-B if:

the entity were not a corporate tax entity; and

no other *exploration credits were issued to the entity during the income year.

The franking credit arises at the same time the exploration credit is issued.

418-55 Junior minerals exploration incentive franking credit—life insurance company

A franking credit arises in the franking account of a life insurance company if:

an exploration credit is issued to the life insurance company under Subdivision 418-E during an income year; and

paragraph 418-15(1)(d) does not apply in relation to the exploration credit; and

if that paragraph were to apply in relation to the credit, the life insurance company would be entitled to a tax offset under Subdivision 418-B in relation to the exploration credit.

The amount of the franking credit is the amount of the tax offset to which the life insurance company would be entitled under Subdivision 418-B if no other *exploration credits were issued to the life insurance company during the income year.

The franking credit arises at the same time the exploration credit is issued.

Subdivision 418-D — Creating exploration credits

Table of sections

418-70 Entities that may create exploration credits

418-75 Meaning of greenfields minerals explorer

418-80 Meaning of greenfields minerals expenditure

418-81 Meaning of exploration credits allocation for an income year

418-82 When does an entity have an unused allocation of exploration credits from an income year

418-85 Exploration credits must not exceed maximum exploration credit amount

418-95 Effect on tax losses of creating exploration credits

418-70 Entities that may create exploration credits

(1) An entity may create exploration credits for an income year if:

the entity was a greenfields minerals explorer in the income year; and

the entity has an *exploration credits allocation for the income year or an *unused allocation of exploration credits from the immediately preceding income year.

Note: The entity cannot have an unused allocation of exploration credits from the 2020-21 income year: see subsection 418-82(3A).

The entity cannot create *exploration credits for an income year before income tax is assessed for the entity for the year.

The entity cannot create *exploration credits for the 2025-26 income year or a later income year.

A failure to comply with subsection (1) or (2) does not invalidate the creation of an exploration credit.

An exploration credit is to be expressed as an amount.

The entity cannot make more than one decision to create *exploration credits for an income year, and the decision is final and irrevocable.

418-75 Meaning of greenfields minerals explorer

(1) An entity is a greenfields minerals explorer in an income year if:

the entity has greenfields minerals expenditure for the income year; and

(b) during the income year, the entity is a disclosing entity (within the meaning of section 111AC of the Corporations Act 2001); and

during the income year, the entity is a *constitutional corporation; and

during the income year, and during the immediately preceding income year, neither:

the entity; nor

any other entity that is *connected with or is an affiliate of the entity;

carried on any mining operations on a mining property for extracting *minerals (except petroleum) from their natural site, for the *purpose of producing assessable income.

(2) However, an entity is not a greenfields minerals explorer in an income year in which either or both of the following happens, or in any subsequent income year:

the entity fails to comply with a request of the Commissioner under subsection 418-80(5);

a determination under section 418-185 has effect.

Note 1: Under subsection 418-80(5), the Commissioner may request a report on an area in relation to which an entity has greenfields minerals expenditure.

Note 2: Under section 418-185, the Commissioner may determine that an entity that is, or has been, liable to excess exploration credit tax is not to be treated as a greenfields minerals explorer.

418-80 Meaning of greenfields minerals expenditure

(1) An entity’s greenfields minerals expenditure for an income year is the sum of:

the amounts of any deductions to which the entity is entitled under section 40-25 for that income year in relation to declines in value that:

are declines in value of *depreciating assets used for *exploration or prospecting for *minerals in an area to which subsection (3) of this section applies; and

are worked out under subsection 40-80(1); and

the amounts of any deductions for that income year to which the entity is entitled in relation to expenditure:

that is of a kind referred to in subsection 40-730(1); and

in relation to which the entity satisfies one or more of paragraphs 40-730(1)(a) to (c); and

that is expenditure on exploration or prospecting for minerals in an area to which subsection (3) of this section applies.

For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard a deduction to the extent that it relates to:

matters other than:

declines in value of *depreciating assets used for; or

expenditure on;

*exploration or prospecting for *minerals in an area to which subsection (3) of this section applies; or

exploration or prospecting for petroleum or oil shale; or

activities (such as feasibility studies) undertaken to identify the viability of a mineral resource rather than its existence.

This subsection applies to an area:

that is in Australia; and

in relation to which the entity *holds a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right at the time of incurring the expenditure, or is the transferee under a farm-in farm-out arrangement; and

that has not been identified as containing a mineral resource that is at least inferred in a report prepared in accordance with the requirements of:

unless subparagraph (ii) applies—the document that is known as the Australasian Code for Reporting of Exploration Results, Minerals Resources and Ore Reserves and that took effect on 20 December 2012; or

Note: This document is commonly referred to as the JORC Code (2012 Edition).

such other document as the regulations prescribe; and

that is not, and is not in, any of the following:

(i) the coastal sea of Australia (within the meaning of subsection 15B(4) of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901);

an area referred to in subsection 960-505(2).

For the purposes of paragraph (3)(c), disregard any mineral resource, identified in a report of a kind referred to in that paragraph, that does not include *minerals the *exploration or prospecting for which involved:

use of assets referred to in paragraph (1)(a); or

expenditure referred to in paragraph (1)(b).

The Commissioner may request an entity that is a greenfields minerals explorer in an income year to prepare, within the period specified in the request, a report that:

is of the kind referred to in paragraph (3)(c); and

relates to an area in relation to which the entity has greenfields minerals expenditure for the income year.

The request may specify the manner in which, and the form in which, the report is to be prepared.

418-81 Meaning of exploration credits allocation for an income year

(1) An entity has an exploration credits allocation for an income year if the Commissioner makes a determination under section 418-101 allocating the entity *exploration credits for the income year.

(2) The amount of the entity’s exploration credits allocation for the income year is the amount of *exploration credits allocated to the entity under the determination.

(2A) However, if no *exploration investment is made in the entity in the income year, the amount of the entity’s exploration credits allocation for the income year is nil.

Note: The entity must notify the Commissioner if no exploration investment is made in the entity in the income year: see section 418-135.

(3) If no determination is made allocating *exploration credits to the entity for the income year, the amount of the entity’s exploration credits allocation for the year is nil.

418-82 When does an entity have an unused allocation of exploration credits from an income year

(1) An entity has an unused allocation of exploration credits from an income year if each of the following:

the entity’s *exploration credits allocation for the income year;

the total credits issue for investment in the entity for the income year;

exceeds the total amount of all *exploration credits created by the entity for the income year.

(2) The amount of the unused allocation of exploration credits from the income year is the lesser of:

the amount by which the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) exceeds the total amount of all *exploration credits created by the entity for the income year; and

the amount by which the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) exceeds the total amount of all *exploration credits created by the entity for the income year.

(3) If neither the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) nor (1)(b) exceeds the total amount of all *exploration credits created by the entity for the income year, there is no unused allocation of exploration credits from the income year, and the amount of any unused allocation of exploration credits from the income year is nil.

(3A) Despite subsections (1) and (2), the entity cannot have an unused allocation of exploration credits from the 2020-21 income year.

In this section:

total credits issue for investment in the entity (the minerals explorer) for an income year means the total of all *exploration credits that may be issued by the minerals explorer to all other entities in relation to *exploration investment made by those other entities in the minerals explorer in the income year if section 418-120 is complied with.

418-85 Exploration credits must not exceed maximum exploration credit amount

An entity must not create *exploration credits for an income year of a total amount that exceeds the entity’s *maximum exploration credit amount for the income year.

(2) An entity’s maximum exploration credit amount for an income year (the credit year) is the smallest of the following amounts:

the entity’s greenfields minerals expenditure for the credit year multiplied by the entity’s *corporate tax rate for the credit year;

the entity’s *tax loss for the credit year multiplied by the entity’s corporate tax rate for the credit year;

the sum of:

the entity’s *exploration credits allocation for the credit year; and

the entity’s *unused allocation of exploration credits from the income year immediately preceding the credit year.

Note: The entity cannot have an unused allocation of exploration credits from the 2020-21 income year: see subsection 418-82(3A).

In working out the entity’s greenfields minerals expenditure for the credit year for the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), reduce that greenfields minerals expenditure by the sum of:

all *recoupments that the entity receives in relation to the entity’s greenfields minerals expenditure for the credit year; and

if:

an amount has been included in the entity’s assessable income because a balancing adjustment event occurs for a depreciating asset; and

all or part of the amount of the deduction to which the entity is entitled under section 40-25 for the credit year in relation to the decline in value of the asset is included in the entity’s greenfields minerals expenditure for that year;

so much of the amount of that deduction as was included in that greenfields minerals expenditure.

In working out the entity’s *tax loss for the credit year for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), reduce that tax loss by the sum of:

all *recoupments that the entity receives in relation to the entity’s greenfields minerals expenditure for the credit year; and

any part of the entity’s tax loss for the credit year that would not be deductible in the income year immediately following the credit year; and

if:

an amount has been included in the entity’s assessable income because a balancing adjustment event occurs for a depreciating asset; and

all or part of the amount of the deduction to which the entity is entitled under section 40-25 for the credit year in relation to the decline in value of the asset is included in the entity’s greenfields minerals expenditure for that year;

so much of the amount of that deduction as was included in that greenfields minerals expenditure.

For the purposes of paragraph (4)(b), assume that the entity’s assessable income for the income year immediately following the credit year is sufficient to allow the entity to utilise the whole of that *tax loss in relation to the credit year.

A failure to comply with this section does not invalidate the creation of an exploration credit.

418-95 Effect on tax losses of creating exploration credits

If an entity creates any *exploration credits for a loss year, the amount of the entity’s *tax loss for the loss year is reduced by the amount worked out as follows:

However, if the amount worked out under subsection (1) equals or exceeds what would (apart from this section) be the entity’s *tax loss for the loss year, that tax loss is taken to be nil.

Subdivision 418-DA — Exploration credits allocation

Table of sections

418-100 Applying for an exploration credits allocation

418-101 Determination by the Commissioner

418-102 General allocation rules

418-103 Meaning of annual exploration cap

418-104 Failure to comply with this Subdivision does not affect allocation

418-100 Applying for an exploration credits allocation

An entity may apply to the Commissioner for a determination under section 418-101 allocating *exploration credits to the entity for an income year.

The application must be made within 1 month before the start of the financial year corresponding to the income year for which the allocation is sought.

The application must:

be *lodged electronically; and

be in the approved form; and

include an estimate of:

the entity’s greenfields minerals expenditure for the income year; and

the entity’s *tax loss for the income year; and

the entity’s *corporate tax rate for the income year.

The Commissioner must give the entity:

if the Commissioner makes a determination under section 418-101—a copy of the determination; or

if the Commissioner decides to refuse the application—notice of that decision.

418-101 Determination by the Commissioner

Determination allocating exploration credits

The Commissioner may make a written determination allocating *exploration credits of an amount specified in the determination to an entity for an income year.

Circumstances in which the Commissioner must not make a determination

The Commissioner must not make a determination allocating *exploration credits to an entity for an income year if the Commissioner is not satisfied that:

there is a reasonable possibility that the entity will have:

greenfields minerals expenditure of the amount estimated by the entity in the application, or greater; and

a *tax loss of the amount estimated by the entity in the application, or greater; and

the *corporate tax rate estimated by the entity in the application; and

the entity meets any other requirement prescribed under the regulations.

Amount of the exploration credits allocated

The amount of the *exploration credits specified in the determination must be the smallest of the following amounts:

the entity’s estimated greenfields minerals expenditure for the income year multiplied by the entity’s estimated *corporate tax rate for the income year;

the entity’s estimated *tax loss for the income year multiplied by the entity’s estimated corporate tax rate for the income year;

either:

5% of an amount equal to the *annual exploration cap for the income year; or

if another amount, or a method for working out another amount, is prescribed—the other amount.

Determination not a legislative instrument

A determination made under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

418-102 General allocation rules

The total amount of *exploration credits allocated to entities for an income year by the Commissioner must not exceed the *annual exploration cap for the year.

The Commissioner must consider applications for *exploration credits from entities for an income year in the order in which the Commissioner receives the applications.

If the Commissioner receives more than one application at the same time, the Commissioner may decide the order in which the Commissioner considers the applications.

If the Commissioner would contravene this section by allocating *exploration credits to an entity for an income year of an amount worked out under subsection 418-101(3) then, despite that subsection, the amount of exploration credits allocated to that entity for the income year is to be the difference between the *annual exploration cap for the year and the total amount of exploration credits already allocated to other entities for the year.

418-103 Meaning of annual exploration cap

(1) The annual exploration cap for an income year is the following amount:

for the 2017-18 income year—$15 million;

for the 2018-19 income year—$25 million, plus the *exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year;

for the 2019-20 income year—$30 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year and any other amount prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph;

for the 2020-21 income year—$30 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year and any other amount prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph;

for the 2021-22 income year—$25 million;

for the 2022-23 income year—$25 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year;

for the 2023-24 income year—$25 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year and any other amount prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph;

for the 2024-25 income year—$25 million, plus the exploration credits remainder for the immediately preceding income year and any other amount prescribed for the purposes of this paragraph.

(2) If the total amount of *exploration credits allocated by the Commissioner for an income year is less than the *annual exploration cap for the year, the difference is the exploration credits remainder for the income year.

418-104 Failure to comply with this Subdivision does not affect allocation

A failure by the Commissioner to comply with this Subdivision does not invalidate a determination allocating *exploration credits to an entity for an income year.

Subdivision 418-E — Issuing exploration credits

Table of sections

418-110 Issuing exploration credits

418-111 Working out whether an exploration investment has been made in an income year

418-115 Who may receive an exploration credit and what is the pool from which the credit may be issued

418-116 Exploration credits issued must be in proportion to exploration investment

418-120 The total of all exploration credits issued in relation to exploration investment

418-125 Expiry of exploration credits

418-130 Notifying the Commissioner of issuing or expiry of exploration credits

418-135 Notifying the Commissioner if no exploration investment in income year for which credits allocated

418-110 Issuing exploration credits

(1) An entity that has created *exploration credits for an income year (the minerals explorer) may issue an exploration credit for that income year to another entity (the investor).

The exploration credit issued to the investor for the income year may relate to:

exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in the income year; or

exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in the immediately preceding income year.

However, this rule is subject to the limitations imposed under sections 418-115, 418-116 and 418-120.

An exploration credit is issued to an entity by giving the entity a statement in the approved form.

418-111 Working out whether an exploration investment has been made in an income year

(1) An entity (the investor) makes an exploration investment in another entity (the minerals explorer) in an income year if:

*shares in the minerals explorer are issued to the investor by the minerals explorer:

on or after the day on which the Commissioner makes a determination under section 418-101 allocating *exploration credits to the minerals explorer for the income year; and

before the end of the income year; and

those shares are *equity interests.

(2) The amount of the exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in the income year is equal to the total amount paid up by the investor on the shares during the period mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

418-115 Who may receive an exploration credit and what is the pool from which the credit may be issued

(1) If *exploration credits are to be issued by an entity (the minerals explorer) for an income year (the credit year), work out each of the following by identifying whether scenario 1, 2 or 3 applies, and applying the rules for that scenario:

whether the minerals explorer can issue an exploration credit to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year;

(b) whether the minerals explorer can issue an exploration credit to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the income year immediately preceding the credit year (the preceding year);

(c) the pool of exploration credits from which an exploration credit may be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year (this is called the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the credit year);

(d) the pool of exploration credits from which an exploration credit may be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the preceding year (this is called the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the preceding year).

Scenario 1—no unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year

If there is no *unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year:

*exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year; and

no exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the preceding year.

In this scenario:

(a) the issue pool for *exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the credit year is equal to the total amount of *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year; and

(b) the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the preceding year is nil.

Scenario 2—exploration credits for the credit year exceed unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year

If the amount of the *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year is more than the *unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year:

exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year; and

exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the preceding year.

In this scenario:

(a) the issue pool for *exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the credit year is equal to the difference between the *unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year and the total amount of *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year; and

(b) the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the preceding year is equal to the unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year.

However, no exploration credit can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year unless the *issue pool for exploration investment in the preceding year is exhausted.

Scenario 3—exploration credits for the credit year are equal to or less than the unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year

If the amount of the *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year is equal to or less than the *unused allocation of exploration credits from the preceding year:

no exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the entity in the minerals explorer in the credit year; and

exploration credits can be issued to another entity in relation to exploration investment made by the other entity in the minerals explorer in the preceding year.

In this scenario:

(a) the issue pool for *exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the credit year is nil; and

(b) the issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the preceding year is equal to the total amount of *exploration credits created by the minerals explorer for the credit year.

418-116 Exploration credits issued must be in proportion to exploration investment

If an *exploration credit is issued by an entity (the minerals explorer) for an income year to another entity (the investor) in relation to *exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in an income year (the investment year):

the proportion of the *issue pool for exploration investment made in the minerals explorer in the investment year that is issued to the investor as an exploration credit must be the same as the proportion of the total exploration investment in the minerals explorer in the investment year that is represented by the investor’s exploration investment in the minerals explorer in the investment year; and

the minerals explorer must issue an exploration credit to every entity who made an exploration investment in the minerals explorer in the investment year.

418-120 The total of all exploration credits issued in relation to exploration investment

The total amount of all *exploration credits issued by an entity (the minerals explorer) to another entity (the investor) in relation to *exploration investment made by the investor in the minerals explorer in an income year (the investment year) must not exceed the amount worked out using the following formula:

418-125 Expiry of exploration credits

An *exploration credit created by an entity for an income year (the credit year) expires if the entity does not issue the credit under this Subdivision on or before 30 June in the financial year that corresponds to the income year that immediately follows the credit year.

418-130 Notifying the Commissioner of issuing or expiry of exploration credits

(1) An entity that has created *exploration credits for an income year (the credit year) must notify the Commissioner of the issuing or expiry of the credits.

The notice must:

be in the approved form; and

be given to the Commissioner on or before the due date:

if the entity is an *investment body for *Part VA investments—for giving to the Commissioner an annual investment income report in respect of the financial year corresponding to the year immediately following the credit year; or

otherwise—for the entity to lodge its income tax return for the income year that immediately follows the credit year.

418-135 Notifying the Commissioner if no exploration investment in income year for which credits allocated

An entity must notify the Commissioner if:

the Commissioner has made a determination under section 418-101 allocating the entity *exploration credits for an income year; and

no exploration investment is made in the entity in the income year.

The notice must:

be in the approved form; and

be given to the Commissioner within 30 days after the end of the income year.

Subdivision 418-F — Excess exploration credits

Table of sections

418-150 Excess exploration credit tax

418-151 Complying exploration credit amount

418-155 Due date for payment of excess exploration credit tax

418-160 Returns

418-165 When shortfall interest charge is payable

418-170 General interest charge

418-175 Refunds of amounts overpaid

418-180 Record keeping

418-185 Determining an entity not to be a greenfields minerals explorer

418-150 Excess exploration credit tax

An entity is liable to pay *excess exploration credit tax for an income year if the sum of the *exploration credits it issues for the income year exceeds the amount worked out under section 418-151 for the income year (the complying exploration credit amount).

Note: The tax is imposed by the Excess Exploration Credit Tax Act 2014, and the amount of the tax is set out in that Act.

418-151 Complying exploration credit amount

The complying exploration credit amount (which may be nil) for an income year is worked out by:

starting with the sum of the *exploration credits the entity issues for the income year; and

subtracting from the result of paragraph (a) the sum of any of those exploration credits covered by subsection (2); and

if the result of paragraph (b) exceeds the entity’s *maximum exploration credit amount for the income year—subtracting from that result the amount of the excess.

Note: The complying exploration credit amount is the sum of issued exploration credits that were issued (and created) in compliance with this Division. A liability arises under section 418-150 if the sum of all issued exploration credits exceeds this amount.

This subsection covers an exploration credit to the extent to which either or both of the following apply to the credit:

the credit was issued in contravention of a requirement in this Division;

the credit was created in contravention of a requirement in Subdivision 418-D (other than section 418-85).

Note: Because the maximum exploration credit amount from section 418-85 is taken into account in paragraph (1)(c) of this section, it is disregarded here.

418-155 Due date for payment of excess exploration credit tax

An entity’s *excess exploration credit tax for an income year, as assessed under Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, is due and payable at the end of the day by which the entity is required under section 418-160 to give the return relating to the income year.

Note: For assessments of excess exploration credit tax, see Division 155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

418-160 Returns

An entity that is liable to pay *excess exploration credit tax for an income year (the credit year) must give the Commissioner a return relating to excess exploration credit tax, in the *approved form, within 21 days after the end of the *financial year corresponding to the income year that immediately follows the credit year.

418-165 When shortfall interest charge is payable

An amount of shortfall interest charge that an entity is liable to pay is due and payable 21 days after the day on which the Commissioner gives the entity notice of the charge.

Note: Shortfall interest charge is imposed if the Commissioner amends an assessment and the amended assessment results in an increase in some tax payable. For provisions about liability for shortfall interest charge, see Division 280 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

418-170 General interest charge

If:

excess exploration credit tax or shortfall interest charge payable by an entity remains unpaid after the time by which it is due and payable; and

the Commissioner has not allocated the unpaid amount to an RBA;

the entity is liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

starts at the beginning of the day on which the excess exploration credit tax or shortfall interest charge was due to be paid; and

ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the excess exploration credit tax or shortfall interest charge;

general interest charge on any of the excess exploration credit tax or shortfall interest charge.

Note: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

418-175 Refunds of amounts overpaid

Section 172 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Division as if references in that section to tax included references to *excess exploration credit tax.

418-180 Record keeping

Section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies for the purposes of this Division as if:

the reference in that section to a person carrying on a business were a reference to a corporate tax entity; and

the reference in paragraph (2)(a) of that section to the person’s income and expenditure were a reference to the entity’s liability to pay excess exploration credit tax; and

paragraph (5)(a) of that section were omitted.

418-185 Determining an entity not to be a greenfields minerals explorer

The Commissioner may determine, by written notice given to an entity that is, or has been, liable to pay excess exploration credit tax for an income year, that the entity is no longer to be treated as a greenfields minerals explorer.

The determination takes effect from:

(a) if, at the time the notice is given, the entity has not issued any *exploration credits for the income year (the credit year) immediately preceding the income year in which the notice is given—the credit year; or

otherwise—the next income year.

(3) If the entity or a *member of the entity is dissatisfied with a determination under subsection (1), the entity or member may object to it in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 418-G — Other matters

Table of sections

418-190 Annual impact assessments of this Division

418-190 Annual impact assessments of this Division

As soon as practicable after the end of each income year referred to in subsection (2), the Minister must cause to be conducted an impact assessment of the operation of this Division during that income year. The objective of the impact assessment should be to measure the additional *exploration or prospecting attributable to the Division.

The income years are as follows:

the 2017-2018 income year;

the 2018-2019 income year;

the 2019-2020 income year;

the 2020-2021 income year.

Each impact assessment must make provision for public consultation, including consultation with the industry.

(4) The Minister must cause to be prepared a report of each impact assessment. The report must include any information made publicly available by the Commissioner under section 3F of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in relation to *exploration credits allocated for the income year.

The Minister must cause a copy of a report of an impact assessment to be published on the Australian Taxation Office website as soon as practicable after the completion of the preparation of the report.

Division 419 — Critical minerals (tax offset for Australian production expenditure)

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 419

419-A Tax offset for expenditure for producing critical minerals in Australia

419-B CMPTI expenditure

419-C Registering activities and facilities for the CMPTI tax offset

419-D Integrity rules

419-E Review of certain decisions

419-F Other matters

Guide to Division 419

419-1 What this Division is about

Companies may be entitled to a refundable tax offset for expenditure incurred in carrying on processing activities at facilities in Australia that substantially transform feedstock containing critical minerals into purer or more refined forms of the critical minerals that are chemically distinct from the feedstock.

This offset is designed to support the growth of these processing activities in Australia.

One of the requirements for entitlement to the tax offset is for a company to hold a registration certificate for these processing activities and for the Australian facilities where the activities are to be carried on. The Industry Secretary will decide whether to issue the certificates. A registration can be in force for 10 income years during the period starting on 1 July 2027 and ending on 30 June 2040.

The amount of the tax offset is 10% of the company’s expenditure on these processing activities.

Subdivision 419-A — Tax offset for expenditure for producing critical minerals in Australia

Table of sections

419-5 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for expenditure incurred in producing critical minerals in Australia

419-10 Amount of CMPTI tax offset

419-15 Meaning of critical mineral

419-20 Meaning of CMPTI processing activity

419-5 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for expenditure incurred in producing critical minerals in Australia

Entitlement to the tax offset

(1) A company is entitled to a *tax offset under this section (the CMPTI tax offset) for an income year if:

the company is a *constitutional corporation; and

the income year:

starts on or after 1 July 2027; and

ends on or before 30 June 2040; and

there are one or more *registered CMPTI processing activities for the company and the income year; and

the company incurs CMPTI expenditure for the income year in carrying on any of those activities; and

the company is not an *exempt entity; and

if CMPTI community benefit rules under paragraph 419-145(1)(a) apply to the company for the income year—the company meets the conditions specified in those rules; and

the company satisfies the residency requirements in subsection (2) for the income year.

Note: The CMPTI tax offset is a refundable tax offset (see section 67-23).

Residency requirements

The company satisfies the residency requirements in this subsection for the income year if, at all times during the income year in which any of the activities covered by paragraph (1)(c) are carried on:

the company:

is an Australian resident and has an ABN; and

is carrying on the activity; or

the company:

is a foreign resident that has a permanent establishment in Australia and has an ABN; and

is carrying on the activity through that permanent establishment.

419-10 Amount of CMPTI tax offset

The amount of the CMPTI tax offset for the income year is equal to 10% of the company’s total CMPTI expenditure referred to in paragraph 419-5(1)(d).

However, if:

CMPTI community benefit rules under paragraph 419-145(1)(b) apply to the company for the income year; and

circumstances specified in those rules exist for the company;

the amount of the CMPTI tax offset is reduced by the proportion specified in those rules for those circumstances.

419-15 Meaning of critical mineral

(1) Each of the following is a critical mineral:

antimony;

arsenic;

beryllium;

bismuth;

chromium;

cobalt;

fluorine;

gallium;

germanium;

graphite;

hafnium;

high purity alumina;

indium;

lithium;

magnesium;

manganese;

molybdenum;

nickel;

niobium;

each of the following platinum-group elements:

iridium;

osmium;

palladium;

platinum;

rhodium;

ruthenium;

each of the following rare-earth elements:

cerium;

dysprosium;

erbium;

europium;

gadolinium;

holmium;

lanthanum;

lutetium;

neodymium;

praseodymium;

promethium;

samarium;

terbium;

thulium;

ytterbium;

yttrium;

rhenium;

scandium;

selenium;

silicon;

tantalum;

tellurium;

titanium;

tungsten;

vanadium;

zirconium;

a thing prescribed by the regulations.

The regulations must not prescribe uranium for the purposes of paragraph (1)(zf).

419-20 Meaning of CMPTI processing activity

(1) A CMPTI processing activity is a processing activity carried on at one or more facilities in Australia that:

involves substantially transforming a feedstock containing a critical mineral through extractive metallurgical processing into a purer or more refined form of the critical mineral that is chemically distinct from the feedstock; or

is a processing activity that:

relates to one or more critical minerals; and

is of a kind prescribed by the regulations; and

produces an outcome of a kind prescribed by the regulations;

if a substantial purpose for carrying on the activity is to achieve the transformation mentioned in paragraph (a) or the outcome mentioned in paragraph (b) (as applicable).

Note: To be relevant for the tax offset, the activity will need to be:

registered (see paragraph 419-5(1)(c)); and

carried on at one or more of the facilities specified in the certificate of registration for the activity (see paragraph 419-25(1)(a)).

(2) However, none of the following activities is a CMPTI processing activity:

mining;

beneficiation (including the grinding, crushing, floating and other mechanical processing of ores), except to the extent that such an activity is prescribed for the purposes of paragraph (1)(b);

manufacturing, except to the extent that such an activity is prescribed for the purposes of paragraph (1)(b);

an activity that is contrary to an Australian law;

an activity of a kind prescribed by the regulations.

Note: Since subsection (1) is subject to this subsection, an activity that could be covered by both paragraphs (1)(b) and (2)(e) will not be a CMPTI processing activity.

Subdivision 419-B — CMPTI expenditure

Table of sections

419-25 Meaning of CMPTI expenditure

419-30 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST

419-25 Meaning of CMPTI expenditure

(1) CMPTI expenditure, of a company for an income year, is expenditure the company incurs during the income year to the extent that:

the expenditure is incurred in carrying on one or more of the company’s *registered CMPTI processing activities for the income year at facilities specified in the certificates of registration for those activities; and

the expenditure is paid during the income year, if at the time the expenditure is incurred:

the company, and the entity to which the expenditure is incurred, are not dealing with each other at *arm’s length; or

the entity to which the expenditure is incurred is the company’s associate.

Excluded expenditure

(2) Despite subsection (1), CMPTI expenditure does not include any expenditure the company incurs to the extent that the expenditure:

is capital, or is of a capital nature; or

is taken into account when calculating the decline in value of an asset for the purposes of a *taxation law; or

is incurred by way of, or in relation to, the financing of *registered CMPTI processing activities; or

is on feedstock, whether raw materials (such as ores or mineral concentrates) or intermediate outputs from a previous processing step; or

would result in more than 10% of the company’s CMPTI expenditure for the income year being incurred on or in relation to *intellectual property; or

is of a kind prescribed by the regulations.

Note: Similarly, subsection (1) means CMPTI expenditure does not include expenditure to the extent that the expenditure is incurred in carrying on:

a registered CMPTI processing activity at a facility not specified in the certificate of registration for the activity; or

an activity that is not a registered CMPTI processing activity.

Despite subsection (1), if carrying on one or more of the company’s *registered CMPTI processing activities results in an output that:

would, if the output were the only output of the activities, mean the activities are not *CMPTI processing activities; and

is disposed of, or is used to produce another output that is disposed of, in a way that:

is for value; or

involves the company and another entity not dealing with each other at *arm’s length; or

is to an associate of the company;

CMPTI expenditure does not include so much of the company’s expenditure incurred in carrying on those activities as is reasonably attributable to the first-mentioned output.

419-30 Expenditure to be worked out excluding GST

In determining an amount of expenditure for the purpose of this Division, the expenditure is taken to exclude GST.

Subdivision 419-C — Registering activities and facilities for the CMPTI tax offset

Table of sections

419-35 Meaning of registered CMPTI processing activity

419-40 Notice of decision about an application for registration

419-45 Annual report about a registered CMPTI processing activity

419-50 A registration is in force for up to 10 income years

419-55 Transferring a registration

419-60 Varying a registration

419-65 Automatic suspension of a registration for failing to give an annual report or requested further information

419-70 Revoking a registration

419-75 Effect of revocations

419-80 Industry Secretary may request further information

419-85 Advising the Commissioner about a registration

419-90 Amendment of assessments

419-35 Meaning of registered CMPTI processing activity

(1) A company has a registered CMPTI processing activity for an income year if:

the activity is registered for the company under subsection (2); or

a registration of the activity is transferred to the company under subsection 419-55(2);

and the registration is in force for the company and the income year.

Note: For when the registration is in force, see section 419-50. The registration will not be in force if:

it has already expired (see section 419-50); or

it is suspended or has been revoked (see section 419-65 or 419-70).

Initial registration

The Industry Secretary must register an activity for a company if:

the company applies to the Industry Secretary for the activity to be registered under this subsection; and

the application identifies:

the activity and each facility where the activity is to be carried on; and

the basis on which the company considers it will satisfy the requirements to be entitled to a CMPTI tax offset in relation to the activity; and

the application states that the company is the legal entity that is or will be carrying on the activity at those facilities; and

the application is in a form approved under subsection 419-150(1); and

the Industry Secretary is satisfied that the activity is a CMPTI processing activity; and

the Industry Secretary has no reason to believe that:

the information provided by the company is not true, correct and complete; or

the company will not satisfy the requirements to be entitled to a CMPTI tax offset in relation to the activity; and

the company has paid the application fee (if any) prescribed by the regulations.

Note: Any revocation of the registration does not prevent the company from applying under this subsection to re-register the activity. Any re-registration will not re-start the maximum 10-year period that the activity can be registered (see subsections 419-50(4) and (5)).

419-40 Notice of decision about an application for registration

The Industry Secretary must give written notice of a decision under subsection 419-35(2) about an application (of a company) to the company and the Commissioner.

Certificates of registration

If the decision is to register an activity for the company, the notice must include a certificate of registration that includes the following:

the company’s name and ABN;

the day the certificate is issued;

a description of the activity;

a description of each facility where the activity is to be carried on;

the matters (if any) prescribed by the regulations.

419-45 Annual report about a registered CMPTI processing activity

Content of the annual report

A company that has a registered CMPTI processing activity for an income year must prepare a written report that is in a form approved under subsection 419-150(1).

Without limiting subsection 419-150(1), an instrument under that subsection may require the report to contain information about:

the outputs for the activity for the income year; and

the expected outputs for the activity for the next income year; and

any significant events that arose during the income year, or that are expected for the next income year, that could affect the company’s:

entitlement to the CMPTI tax offset; or

registration of the activity.

Despite subsection 419-150(1), an instrument under that subsection must require the report to contain information about any matters prescribed by the regulations.

Giving the annual report

The company must give the report to the Industry Secretary within the period determined under subsection (5) that starts at the end of the income year.

The Industry Secretary may, by legislative instrument, determine a period of at least 30 days for giving reports under this section that starts at the end of each income year.

The Industry Secretary must give the Commissioner a copy of each report given under this section.

419-50 A registration is in force for up to 10 income years

Usual case

The registration of a company’s registered CMPTI processing activity is in force for the 10-year period starting at the start of the income year chosen under subsection (2).

The company may choose:

the income year in which the Industry Secretary receives the company’s application for registration of the activity under subsection 419-35(2); or

a later income year.

The way the company prepares its income tax returns is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

A choice under subsection (2) is irrevocable.

If the registration is a transfer or re-registration

Despite subsection (1), if the registration of a company’s registered CMPTI processing activity:

results from a transfer under subsection 419-55(2) of a registration that has already come into force; or

will not be the first registration of the activity under subsection 419-35(2) that has come into force for any company;

the registration of the company’s registered CMPTI processing activity comes into force at the start of the income year that includes the day the Industry Secretary receives the application that results in that registration.

The registration ceases to be in force at the same time that the first registration of the activity:

under subsection 419-35(2); and

that came into force for any company;

would have ceased to be in force if that first registration had continued in force for its full 10-year period.

If the activity is similar to another registered activity

Despite subsections (1), (4) and (5), if the Industry Secretary decides that:

(a) the company’s *registered CMPTI processing activity (the current activity) is similar to another activity that is or was a registered CMPTI processing activity of any company; and

the registration of the other activity is the first to have come into force;

then:

unless paragraph (d) applies—the registration of the current activity ceases to be in force at the same time that the registration of the other activity ceases to be in force; or

if the registration of the other activity has already ceased to be in force—the current activity is taken, for the purposes of this Division, never to have been registered for the company and any income year.

The Industry Secretary must take the following into account in deciding under subsection (6) whether an activity is similar to another activity:

the extent to which the assets and facilities used in carrying on one activity are used in carrying on the other activity;

the extent to which the processes and operations undertaken as part of one activity are the same as those undertaken as part of the other activity;

the extent of similarity between the inputs to and outputs of the activities;

if the activities are carried on by different companies, the nature of any arrangements between those companies in respect of the activities;

it is irrelevant if the other activity is no longer being carried on;

any other criteria prescribed by the regulations.

The 10-year registration period is subject to revocation

Nothing in this section prevents a company’s registration from being revoked under section 419-70.

419-55 Transferring a registration

(1) This section applies if a *constitutional corporation (the acquirer):

(a) acquires one or more of the facilities used in carrying on an activity that is a *registered CMPTI processing activity for another company (the disposer); and

the acquirer commences carrying on the activity at those facilities at or after:

the time the disposer ceases carrying on the activity at those facilities; and

the time the disposer’s registration of the activity comes into force (see section 419-50); and

the acquirer seeks a transfer of the registration of the activity after the day of the acquisition.

Note 1: Transferring the registration will not re-start the maximum 10-year period that the activity can be registered (see subsections 419-50(4) and (5)).

Note 2: If the disposer’s registration of the activity has not come into force (for example, by the disposer not having made a choice under subsection 419-50(2)), the acquirer should instead apply to register the activity under subsection 419-35(2).

The Industry Secretary must transfer the registration of the activity to the acquirer if:

the acquirer requests the transfer by applying to the Industry Secretary before the end of the period determined under subsection (3) that starts on the day of the acquisition; and

the application identifies:

the activity and each facility where the activity is to be carried on; and

the basis on which the acquirer considers it will satisfy the requirements to be entitled to a CMPTI tax offset in relation to the activity; and

the application states:

that the acquirer is the legal entity that is or will be carrying on the activity at those facilities (after the disposer ceases to do so); and

the time the acquirer is to commence carrying on the activity at those facilities, and the time the disposer is to cease to do so; and

the application is in a form approved under subsection 419-150(1); and

the Industry Secretary has no reason to believe that:

the information provided by the acquirer is not true, correct and complete; or

the acquirer will not satisfy the requirements to be entitled to a CMPTI tax offset in relation to the activity; and

the acquirer has paid the application fee (if any) prescribed by the regulations.

The Industry Secretary may, by legislative instrument, determine a period of at least 30 days for requesting transfers under this section. For each such request, the period starts on the day of the relevant acquisition.

The Industry Secretary must give written notice of a decision under subsection (2) to the acquirer, the disposer and the Commissioner.

If the decision is to transfer the registration, the notice must include a certificate of registration that reflects the transfer.

419-60 Varying a registration

Variations on application

The Industry Secretary must decide whether to vary the registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity of a company if:

the company applies to the Industry Secretary for a variation of the registration; and

the application is in a form approved under subsection 419-150(1); and

the company has paid the application fee (if any) prescribed by the regulations.

Variations on the Industry Secretary’s own initiative

The Industry Secretary may, on the Industry Secretary’s own initiative, vary the registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity of a company.

Matters relevant to such a decision

In deciding under subsection (1) or (2) whether to vary the registration of an activity, the Industry Secretary:

in the case of an application under subsection (1)—must consider if there is any reason to believe that the information provided by the company is not true, correct and complete; and

in every case:

must have regard to any proposed changes relating to the activity; and

must have regard to the matters prescribed by the regulations; and

may have regard to any other matter that the Industry Secretary considers relevant.

Notice of such a decision

The Industry Secretary must give written notice of a decision under subsection (1) or (2) to:

the company to whom the certificate of registration was issued; and

the Commissioner.

If the decision is to vary the registration, the notice must include the varied certificate of registration.

419-65 Automatic suspension of a registration for failing to give an annual report or requested further information

The registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity of a company is suspended if (and while) the company fails to:

give a report under section 419-45 during an income year about the activity; or

comply with a request, given under subsection 419-80(2) during an income year, for further information about the registration.

Note 1: The registration may be automatically revoked if the report or requested information is not given before the end of an extended period (see subsections 419-70(1) to (3)).

Note 2: Suspending the registration will not suspend the maximum 10-year period that the registration of the activity can be in force (see section 419-50).

For the purposes of this Division (other than this section), the activity is taken:

during the period of the suspension, never to have been registered for the company and the income year mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) or (b); but

if that period ends, to have been registered during that period for the company and the income year.

Paragraph (b) of this subsection is subject to the registration being revoked under section 419-70.

Note: This means that if an assessment of a company’s income tax for the income year is made on the basis that the company is entitled to the CMPTI tax offset for the activity, during the suspension the assessment may be amended to take account of the fact that the company was never entitled to the offset for the activity (see section 419-90).

419-70 Revoking a registration

Automatic revocation if annual report or requested information is not given before the end of an extended period

The registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity of a company is revoked at the start of an income year if the company:

is required during the income year to give a report under section 419-45 about the activity (for the previous income year); and

fails to do so before the end of the income year.

The registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity of a company is revoked at the start of an income year if the company:

is required to comply with a request, given under subsection 419-80(2) during the income year, for further information about the registration; and

fails to do so before the end of the 60-day period starting at the end of the period mentioned in that subsection for complying with the request.

However, subsection (1) or (2) is taken never to have applied for a failure mentioned in that subsection if:

the company eventually gives the Industry Secretary:

for subsection (1)—a report about the activity for the previous income year that complies with subsections 419-45(1) to (3); or

for subsection (2)—the requested further information in a way that complies with subsection 419-80(4); and

(b) the company applies to the Industry Secretary for the late report or information (the late material) to be accepted; and

the application is in a form approved under subsection 419-150(1); and

the Industry Secretary decides to accept the late material because the Industry Secretary is satisfied that the delay in giving the late material was due to exceptional circumstances beyond the company’s control; and

the company has paid the application fee (if any) prescribed by the regulations.

Revocation on other grounds

The Industry Secretary may decide to revoke all registrations of a registered CMPTI processing activity if the Industry Secretary:

is satisfied that the first registration of the activity under subsection 419-35(2) for any company:

was based on untrue, incorrect or incomplete information; or

was obtained by fraud or serious misrepresentation; or

is satisfied that no company ever satisfied the requirements to be entitled to a CMPTI tax offset in relation to the activity.

Note: This subsection can apply to a registration a company used to hold before it was transferred to the current holder.

The Industry Secretary may decide to revoke the registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity of a company if the Industry Secretary:

becomes satisfied that information provided by the company to the Industry Secretary during an income year in relation to the registration involved fraud or serious misrepresentation by or on behalf of the company; or

reasonably believes:

that, for an income year, the registration is not based on true, correct and complete information; or

that the company does not satisfy the requirements to be entitled to a CMPTI tax offset in relation to the activity and an income year.

Notice of decisions

The Industry Secretary must, within 30 days after making a decision under paragraph (3)(d) or subsection (4) or (5), give written notice of the decision to:

the company, or each company, that holds or held a registration affected by the decision; and

the Commissioner.

419-75 Effect of revocations

If the registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity of a company is revoked under subsection 419-70(4), the activity is taken, for the purposes of this Division, never to have been registered for the company and any income year.

Note: This means that if an assessment of a company’s income tax for an income year is made on the basis that the company is entitled to the CMPTI tax offset for the activity, the assessment will be amended to take account of the fact that the company was never entitled to the offset for the activity (see section 419-90).

If the registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity of a company is revoked under subsection 419-70(1), (2) or (5), the revocation applies in relation to the income year referred to in that subsection and each later income year.

Subsection (1), or subsection (2) to the extent that it relates to a revocation under subsection 419-70(5), does not apply for the purposes of:

the operation of section 419-70, this section or Subdivision 419-E; or

a review by a court or the ART of the decision to revoke the registration.

419-80 Industry Secretary may request further information

The Industry Secretary may request an applicant under:

subsection 419-35(2) (about registrations); or

subsection 419-55(2) (about transfers); or

subsection 419-60(1) (about variations); or

subsection 419-70(3) (about late material);

to give specified information, or specified kinds of information, to the Industry Secretary about the application.

The Industry Secretary may request a company that has a registered CMPTI processing activity to give specified information, or specified kinds of information, to the Industry Secretary about the registration within:

the 30-day period starting when the request is given; or

such longer period as the Industry Secretary allows.

The request must mention that the registration will be suspended and then revoked if the request is not complied with.

The Industry Secretary need not consider an application while waiting for information requested under subsection (1) about the application.

A request under subsection (1) or (2) may be for the information or kinds of information to be given in a form approved under subsection 419-150(1).

419-85 Advising the Commissioner about a registration

Based on all information the Industry Secretary has about a company’s registration of a registered CMPTI processing activity for an income year, the Industry Secretary must advise the Commissioner:

whether the activity is being carried on in accordance with the registration; and

whether the company is carrying on any *CMPTI processing activities during the income year that are not registered CMPTI processing activities; and

whether the company is carrying on any other activities during the income year that the Industry Secretary believes may be relevant to the Commissioner’s administration of this Division.

Note: Such advice could be based on information from sources including:

applications under sections 419-35, 419-55 and 419-60; and

annual reports given under section 419-45; and

requests made under section 419-80.

419-90 Amendment of assessments

Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment given to a company for the purposes of giving effect to this Division for an income year if the registration of a *registered CMPTI processing activity for the company is transferred, varied, suspended or revoked.

Note: Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 specifies the periods within which assessments may be amended.

Subdivision 419-D — Integrity rules

Table of sections

419-95 Expenditure incurred while not at arm’s length

419-100 Reducing a company’s CMPTI expenditure to reflect mark-ups within the company’s group

419-105 Disregarding registration of an activity that a company is paid to carry on

419-95 Expenditure incurred while not at arm’s length

If:

a company incurs CMPTI expenditure to another entity in carrying on all or part of a registered CMPTI processing activity; and

either:

when the company incurs the expenditure, the company and the other entity do not deal with each other at *arm’s length; or

the other entity is the company’s associate; and

the expenditure exceeds the *market value of the relevant activity or part (as appropriate);

for the purposes of this Division (other than this section), the company is treated as if the amount of expenditure it incurred in carrying on the relevant activity or part (as appropriate) were equal to that market value.

419-100 Reducing a company’s CMPTI expenditure to reflect mark-ups within the company’s group

This section applies to a company if:

the company is entitled to a CMPTI tax offset for CMPTI expenditure in carrying on one or more of the company’s *registered CMPTI processing activities; and

(b) some or all of that expenditure (the group expenditure) is incurred to another entity (the group entity) for goods or services provided in relation to those activities when:

the group entity is *connected with the company; or

the group entity is an affiliate of the company or the company is an affiliate of the group entity.

Reducing the company’s CMPTI expenditure by group mark-ups

For the purposes of this Division (other than this section), disregard so much of the company’s group expenditure as exceeds the actual cost to the group entity of providing those goods or services.

Note: This section can apply more than once if the company incurs CMPTI expenditure to more than one group entity.

419-105 Disregarding registration of an activity that a company is paid to carry on

If:

a company is or will be paid by another entity for carrying on an activity during an income year that is a registered CMPTI processing activity for the company and the income year; and

the activity is or could be a registered CMPTI processing activity for any of the following for the income year:

the other entity;

a *constitutional corporation *connected with the other entity;

a constitutional corporation that is an affiliate of the other entity;

a constitutional corporation of which the other entity is an affiliate;

for the purposes of section 419-5 (about entitlement to the CMPTI tax offset), disregard that registration of the activity for the company and the income year.

Subdivision 419-E — Review of certain decisions

Table of sections

419-110 Reviewable decisions

419-115 Notice of reviewable decision and internal review rights, and requesting statement of reasons

419-120 Applications for internal review of reviewable decisions

419-125 Internal review of reviewable decisions

419-130 Matters relevant to internal review decisions

419-135 External review by ART of internal review decisions

419-110 Reviewable decisions

Each of the following decisions of the *Industry Secretary is reviewable under this Subdivision (a reviewable decision):

a decision under subsection 419-35(2) (about registering an activity);

a decision under subsection 419-50(6) (about whether an activity is similar to another activity);

a decision under subsection 419-55(2) (about transferring the registration of an activity);

a decision under subsection 419-60(1) or (2) (about varying the registration of an activity);

a decision under paragraph 419-70(3)(d) (about refusing to accept late material);

a decision under subsection 419-70(4) or (5) (about revoking the registration of an activity);

a decision under subsection 419-120(3) (about refusing to allow a further period to apply for review).

419-115 Notice of reviewable decision and internal review rights, and requesting statement of reasons

When making a reviewable decision affecting a company, the Industry Secretary must give written notice to the company of the following things:

the making of the decision;

the company’s right to have the decision reviewed under this Subdivision.

If written notice of either of these things is given to the company under another provision of this Division, notice of the thing does not have to be given twice.

The company or the Commissioner may request, in writing, the Industry Secretary to give a statement of reasons for the decision. The Industry Secretary must comply with the request.

A failure to comply with this section does not affect the validity of the decision.

419-120 Applications for internal review of reviewable decisions

Applications by affected companies

An application for review of a reviewable decision affecting a company may be made by or on behalf of the company.

The application must be in a form approved under subsection 419-150(1).

The application must be made within:

28 days after the company is notified of the decision under this Division; or

such further period as the Industry Secretary allows.

Applications by Commissioner

The Commissioner may, at any time, apply to the Industry Secretary for review of a reviewable decision.

419-125 Internal review of reviewable decisions

After receiving an application for review of a reviewable decision, the Industry Secretary must review the decision.

The Industry Secretary may request the applicant to give specified information, or specified kinds of information, to the Industry Secretary about the application.

Making internal review decisions

(3) After reviewing the reviewable decision, the *Industry Secretary must make a decision (an internal review decision):

confirming the reviewable decision; or

varying the reviewable decision; or

setting aside the reviewable decision and substituting a new decision.

Note: An internal review decision is reviewable by the ART (see section 419-135). Under the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024, notice of the internal review decision must be given to any person whose interests are affected by the decision.

Deemed internal review decisions

If the Industry Secretary does not make a decision under subsection (3) before the end of the 60-day period that:

starts on the day the Industry Secretary receives the application for review; and

pauses while the Industry Secretary waits for any information requested under subsection (2) about the application for review;

the Industry Secretary is taken, at the end of that period, to have made a decision (also an internal review decision) confirming the reviewable decision.

(5) However, an internal review decision (the deemed decision) is taken not to have been made under subsection (4) if:

after the end of the period referred to in that subsection, the Industry Secretary makes a decision under subsection (3) about the applicable reviewable decision; and

an application has yet to be made under section 419-135 to the ART for review of the deemed decision.

419-130 Matters relevant to internal review decisions

For the purposes of this Act, an internal review decision takes effect on the day the relevant reviewable decision took effect.

The Industry Secretary must give the Commissioner written notice of the making of an internal review decision.

The applicant or the Commissioner may request, in writing, the Industry Secretary to give a statement of reasons for the internal review decision. The Industry Secretary must comply with the request.

A failure to comply with this section does not affect the validity of the internal review decision.

419-135 External review by ART of internal review decisions

An application may be made to the ART for review of an internal review decision of the Industry Secretary.

(2) Subsections 108(2) and (4) of the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024 have effect for the purposes of this Act for:

(a) an internal review decision as varied by the *ART under section 105 of the Administrative Review Tribunal Act 2024; or

a decision made by the ART under that section in substitution for an internal review decision.

Note: This means that the varied or substituted decision takes effect from the day on which the reviewable decision took effect (see subsection 419-130(1) of this Act).

Subdivision 419-F — Other matters

Table of sections

419-140 Information sharing

419-145 CMPTI community benefit rules

419-150 Forms approved by the Industry Secretary

419-155 Delegation by the Industry Secretary

419-140 Information sharing

Each of the following regulators:

the Industry Secretary;

the Commissioner;

may request the other regulator to provide them with information held by the other regulator that is reasonably necessary or convenient for the requesting regulator’s administration of this Division.

The other regulator must comply with the request.

Note 1: The request could be an ad hoc or standing request, and the information requested could be general or specific.

Note 2: A disclosure enabling the Commissioner to comply with such a request is within an exception to the confidentiality provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (see section 355-50 in that Schedule).

419-145 CMPTI community benefit rules

(1) The Minister may, by legislative instrument, make the following rules (the CMPTI community benefit rules):

rules that:

apply to companies within a specified class for an income year; and

specify conditions that must be met for such a company to be entitled to a CMPTI tax offset for the income year;

rules that:

apply to companies within a specified class for an income year; and

specify circumstances that, if they exist for such a company, will reduce the amount of the company’s CMPTI tax offset for the income year by a specified proportion.

Note: For subparagraph (b)(ii), different proportions may be specified for different circumstances (see subsection 33(3A) of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901).

(2) In making the CMPTI community benefit rules, the Minister must have regard to the community benefit principles (within the meaning of subsection 10(3) of the Future Made in Australia Act 2024).

When doing so, the Minister is to treat this Division as if it were Future Made in Australia support (within the meaning of that Act).

(4) This section does not apply if the Future Made in Australia Act 2024 has not commenced.

419-150 Forms approved by the Industry Secretary

The Industry Secretary may, by notifiable instrument, approve a form for the purposes of a specified provision of this Division.

Note: An instrument may approve different forms for the purposes of different provisions of this Division (see subsection 33(3A) of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901).

Without limiting subsection (1), the instrument may require the form to be accompanied by specified kinds of information, documents or other materials.

419-155 Delegation by the Industry Secretary

The Industry Secretary may, in writing, delegate all or any of the Industry Secretary’s powers under this Division to an SES employee, or acting SES employee, in the Industry Department.

In exercising powers under a delegation, the delegate must comply with any directions of the Industry Secretary.

Part 3-50 — Climate change

Division 420 — Registered emissions units

Guide to Division 420

420-A Registered emissions units

420-B Acquiring registered emissions units

420-C Disposing of registered emissions units etc.

420-D Accounting for registered emissions units you hold at the start or end of the income year

420-E Exclusivity of Division

Guide to Division 420

420-1 What this Division is about

This Division deals with amounts you can deduct, and amounts included in your assessable income, because of these situations:

• you acquire a registered emissions unit;

• you hold a registered emissions unit at the start or the end of the income year;

• you dispose of a registered emissions unit.

Table of sections

420-5 The 4 key features of tax accounting for registered emissions units

420-5 The 4 key features of tax accounting for registered emissions units

The purpose of income tax accounting for registered emissions units is to produce the same tax treatment, irrespective of your purpose in acquiring or holding the registered emissions units.

There are 4 key features:

You bring your gross expenditure and gross proceeds to account, not your net profits and losses on disposal of a registered emissions unit.

The gross expenditure is deductible.

The gross proceeds are assessable income.

You must bring to account any difference between the value of your registered emissions units held at the start and at the end of the income year. This is done in such a way that:

any increase in value is included in assessable income; and

any decrease in value is a deduction.

Subdivision 420-A — Registered emissions units

Table of sections

420-10 Meaning of registered emissions unit

420-12 Meaning of hold a registered emissions unit

420-13 Meaning of primary producer registered emissions unit

420-10 Meaning of registered emissions unit

A registered emissions unit is:

a Kyoto unit; or

an Australian carbon credit unit; or

a safeguard mechanism credit unit;

for which there is an entry in a Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011).

420-12 Meaning of hold a registered emissions unit

(1) You hold a *registered emissions unit if you are the entity in whose Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) there is an entry for the unit.

(2) However, if the entity (the nominee entity) in whose Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) there is an entry for a *registered emissions unit holds the unit as nominee for another entity:

(a) the other entity is taken to hold the unit; and

the nominee entity is taken not to hold the unit.

420-13 Meaning of primary producer registered emissions unit

A *registered emissions unit you start to *hold, hold or cease to hold is a primary producer registered emissions unit if:

the unit is an Australian carbon credit unit; and

you are an individual; and

your holding of the unit starts on or after 1 July 2022 because the unit:

(i) is issued to you under the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 in relation to an eligible offsets project (within the meaning of that Act); or

is transferred to you by a carbon service provider that was holding the unit because the unit was issued to the provider on or after 1 July 2022 under that Act in relation to such a project; and

at all times while the project is carried on, a *primary production business is carried on:

in the same area as the project; or

in an area connected to an area in which the project is carried on; and

at all times while the project is carried on, you are:

carrying on a primary production business covered by paragraph (d); or

a beneficiary of a trust that is carrying on a primary production business covered by paragraph (d); or

a partner in a partnership that is carrying on a primary production business covered by paragraph (d).

Note 1: If you cease to hold the registered emissions unit, the unit is not a primary producer registered emissions unit for any new holder of the unit (see paragraph (c)).

Note 2: A consequence of paragraph (c) is that the unit will not be a primary producer registered emissions unit for you for a subsequent holding of it. That is, if after disposing of the unit you later reacquire it.

Note 3: Different subparagraphs of paragraph (e) may apply to you at different times.

Subdivision 420-B — Acquiring registered emissions units

Table of sections

420-15 What you can deduct

420-20 Non-arm’s length transactions and transactions with associates

420-21 Incoming international transfers of emissions units

420-22 Becoming taxable in Australia on the proceeds of sale of registered emissions units

420-15 What you can deduct

You can deduct expenditure to the extent that you incur it in becoming the *holder of a registered emissions unit.

Timing

You deduct the expenditure in the income year in which you start to *hold the registered emissions unit.

Australian carbon credit units

(4) You cannot deduct under this section expenditure you incur in becoming the *holder of an *Australian carbon credit unit issued to you in accordance with the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 unless you incur the expenditure in preparing or lodging:

an application for a certificate of entitlement (within the meaning of that Act); or

an offsets report (within the meaning of that Act).

No deduction if sale proceeds would not be assessable

You cannot deduct under this section expenditure you incur in becoming the *holder of a registered emissions unit if, assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately after you started to *hold the unit, the proceeds of the sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25.

Note: Under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953, for some foreign residents, the proceeds of the sale of a registered emissions unit are not assessable income in Australia.

420-20 Non-arm’s length transactions and transactions with associates

If:

an entity becomes the *holder of a registered emissions unit; and

either:

the entity and the previous holder of the unit did not deal with each other at *arm’s length; or

the previous holder is the entity’s associate; and

the entity did not pay or give consideration equal to the *market value of the unit for becoming the holder of the unit;

the entity is treated as if:

the entity had incurred expenditure in becoming the holder of the unit; and

the amount of the expenditure were equal to that market value.

This section does not apply if a registered emissions unit *held by an individual just before the individual’s death:

devolves to the individual’s *legal personal representative; or

*passes to a beneficiary in the individual’s estate.

(3) This section does not apply to the issue of an *Australian carbon credit unit under the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011.

420-21 Incoming international transfers of emissions units

Unit held as trading stock or as a revenue asset

If:

any of the following conditions is satisfied:

(iii) a *Kyoto unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

(iv) a Kyoto unit is transferred from your nominee’s foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

(v) an *Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011);

(vi) an Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your nominee’s foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011); and

as a result of the transfer, you start to *hold the unit as a registered emissions unit; and

just before the transfer, the unit was your trading stock or revenue asset;

you are treated as if:

just before the transfer, you had sold the unit to someone else for its *cost; and

you had, immediately after the sale, bought it back as a registered emissions unit for the same amount.

Example: An Australian resident company carries on a business of trading in emissions units. The units are trading stock. The company owns 10,000 emission reduction units (a type of Kyoto unit) that are registered in New Zealand. 5,000 of those emission reduction units are transferred from the company’s New Zealand registry account to the company’s Australian registry account.

The company is treated as having sold each unit to someone else at its cost just before it became a registered emissions unit. As the unit was previously held as trading stock, the unit ceases to be trading stock (section 70-12). The cost of the unit just before it became a registered emissions unit is included in the company’s assessable income.

The company is also treated as having bought 5,000 registered emissions units for the same amount. The company is entitled to a deduction for that amount (section 420-15).

Unit held otherwise than as trading stock or as a revenue asset

If:

any of the following conditions is satisfied:

(iii) a *Kyoto unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

(iv) a Kyoto unit is transferred from your nominee’s foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of that Act) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of that Act);

(v) an *Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011);

(vi) an Australian carbon credit unit is transferred from your nominee’s foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011) to your Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) or your nominee’s Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011); and

as a result of the transfer, you start to *hold the unit as a registered emissions unit; and

just before the transfer, the unit was neither your trading stock nor your revenue asset;

you are treated as if:

just before the transfer, you had sold the unit to someone else for its *market value just before the transfer; and

you had, immediately after the sale, bought it back as a registered emissions unit for the same amount.

420-22 Becoming taxable in Australia on the proceeds of sale of registered emissions units

If:

you start to *hold a registered emissions unit at a particular time; and

assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately after you started to hold the unit, the proceeds of the sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25; and

(c) you hold the unit until a later time (the taxable status commencement time), where the following conditions are satisfied:

assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately before the taxable status commencement time, the proceeds of the sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25;

assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else at the taxable status commencement time, the proceeds of the sale would have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25;

you are treated as if:

immediately after the taxable status commencement time, you had bought the unit from someone else for its *market value; and

you had started to hold the unit immediately after the taxable status commencement time instead of at the time mentioned in paragraph (a).

Note: Under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953, for some foreign residents, the proceeds of the sale of a registered emissions unit are not assessable income in Australia.

Subdivision 420-C — Disposing of registered emissions units etc.

Table of sections

420-25 Assessable income on disposal of registered emissions units

420-30 Non-arm’s length transactions and transactions with associates

420-35 Outgoing international transfers of emissions units

420-40 Disposal of registered emissions units for a purpose other than gaining assessable income

420-41 Ceasing to be taxable in Australia on the proceeds of sale of registered emissions units

420-42 Deduction for expenses incurred in ceasing to hold a registered emissions unit

420-25 Assessable income on disposal of registered emissions units

Your assessable income includes an amount that you are entitled to receive because you cease to *hold a registered emissions unit.

Timing

The amount is included in your assessable income for the income year in which you cease to *hold the unit.

Source

An amount included in your assessable income under subsection (1) is taken, for the purposes of the income tax laws, to have a source in Australia.

420-30 Non-arm’s length transactions and transactions with associates

If:

(a) an entity (the transferor) ceases to *hold a *registered emissions unit; and

the cessation is because of the transfer of the unit to:

(i) a Registry account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011); or

a foreign account (within the meaning of that Act);

kept by another entity (the transferee); and

either:

the transferor and the transferee did not deal with each other at *arm’s length; or

the transferee is the transferor’s associate; and

the transferee did not pay or give consideration equal to the *market value of the unit for the transfer of the unit;

the transferor is treated as if the transferor were entitled to receive an amount equal to that market value because the transferor ceased to be the holder of the unit.

420-35 Outgoing international transfers of emissions units

If:

you stop *holding a registered emissions unit; and

you do so as a result of the transfer of the unit to:

(ii) if the unit is a *Kyoto unit—your foreign account (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011) or your nominee’s foreign account (within the meaning of that Act); or

(iii) if the unit is an *Australian carbon credit unit—your foreign account (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011) or your nominee’s foreign account (within the meaning of that Act);

you are treated as if:

just before the transfer, you had sold the unit to someone else for its *market value just before the transfer; and

you had, immediately after the sale, bought it back for the same amount.

Example: An Australian resident company carries on a business of trading in emission units. The company owns 10,000 emission reduction units (a type of Kyoto unit) that are registered in Australia. 5,000 of those units are transferred from the company’s Australian registry account to the company’s New Zealand registry account.

The company is treated as having sold each unit to someone else at its market value just before it stopped being a registered emissions unit. As the unit was a registered emissions unit, the market value is included in the company’s assessable income (section 420-25).

The company is also treated as having bought 5,000 emission reduction units for the same amount. As those units are trading stock, the company may be able to deduct that amount under section 8-1.

420-40 Disposal of registered emissions units for a purpose other than gaining assessable income

If:

(a) an entity (the first entity) incurs expenditure in:

becoming the *holder of a registered emissions unit; or

ceasing to hold a registered emissions unit; and

the first entity has deducted or can deduct the expenditure under section 420-15 or 420-42; and

the first entity ceases to hold the unit in a particular income year; and

the cessation is neither:

in gaining or producing the first entity’s assessable income; nor

in carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing the first entity’s assessable income; and

section 420-30 (non-arm’s length transactions and transactions with associates) did not apply to the first entity ceasing to hold the unit;

the first entity’s assessable income for that income year includes an amount equal to the amount the first entity has deducted or can deduct.

Death

If:

the first entity is an individual; and

the cessation is because of the first entity’s death; and

the registered emissions unit devolves to the first entity’s *legal personal representative;

then:

the first entity’s legal personal representative is treated as having bought the unit for the amount included in the first entity’s assessable income under subsection (1); and

if the unit *passes to a beneficiary in the first entity’s estate:

the first entity’s legal personal representative is treated as having disposed of the unit for the amount included in the first entity’s assessable income under subsection (1); and

the beneficiary is treated as having bought the unit for the amount included in the first entity’s assessable income under subsection (1).

If:

the first entity is an individual; and

the cessation is because of the first entity’s death; and

the registered emissions unit *passes to a beneficiary in the first entity’s estate without devolving to the first entity’s *legal personal representative;

the beneficiary is treated as having bought the unit for the amount included in the first entity’s assessable income under subsection (1).

Transfer—treatment of acquirer

If:

the cessation is because of the transfer of the unit to another entity; and

neither subsection (2) nor (3) applies;

the other entity is treated as having bought the unit for the amount included in the first entity’s assessable income under subsection (1).

If subsection (4) applies to the transfer of the unit to another entity:

the first entity must inform the other entity that, as a result of subsection (4) applying, the other entity is treated as having bought the unit for a particular amount; and

the first entity must do so:

at, or as soon as practicable after, the time of the transfer; or

by a later time allowed by the Commissioner.

Source

An amount included in the first entity’s assessable income under subsection (1) is taken, for the purposes of the income tax laws, to have a source in Australia.

420-41 Ceasing to be taxable in Australia on the proceeds of sale of registered emissions units

If:

you start to *hold a registered emissions unit; and

assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately after you started to hold the unit, the proceeds of sale would have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25; and

(c) you hold the unit until a later time (the taxable status cessation time), where the following conditions are satisfied:

assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately before the taxable status cessation time, the proceeds of the sale would have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25;

assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else at the taxable status cessation time, the proceeds of sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25;

you are treated as if:

just before the taxable status cessation time, you had sold the unit to someone else for its *market value; and

you had, at the taxable status cessation time, bought it back for the same amount.

Note: Under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953, for some foreign residents, the proceeds of the sale of a registered emissions unit are not assessable income in Australia.

420-42 Deduction for expenses incurred in ceasing to hold a registered emissions unit

You can deduct expenditure to the extent that you incur it in ceasing to *hold a registered emissions unit.

Timing

You deduct the expenditure in the income year in which you cease to *hold the registered emissions unit.

Subdivision 420-D — Accounting for registered emissions units you hold at the start or end of the income year

Table of sections

420-45 You include the value of your registered emissions units in working out your assessable income and deductions

420-50 Value of registered emissions units at start of income year

420-51 Valuation methods

420-52 FIFO cost method of working out the value of units

420-53 Actual cost method of working out the value of units

420-54 Market value method of working out the value of units

420-55 Valuation method for first income year at the end of which you held registered emissions units

420-57 Valuation method for later income years at the end of which you held registered emissions units

420-60 Cost of registered emissions units

420-62 Primary producer registered emissions units

420-45 You include the value of your registered emissions units in working out your assessable income and deductions

You compare:

the *value of all *registered emissions units you *held at the start of the income year; and

the value of all registered emissions units you held at the end of the income year.

Increase in value is included in assessable income

Your assessable income includes any excess of the *value at the end of the income year over the value at the start of the income year.

Decrease in value is a deduction

On the other hand, you can deduct any excess of the *value at the start of the income year over the value at the end of the income year.

Source

An amount included in your assessable income under subsection (2) is taken, for the purposes of the income tax laws, to have a source in Australia.

Disregard value of unit if sale proceeds would not be assessable

For the purposes of this Subdivision, disregard the *value of a registered emissions unit you *held at the end of the income year if, assuming that you had sold the unit to someone else immediately after you started to hold the unit, the proceeds of the sale would not have been included in your assessable income under section 420-25.

Note: Under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953, for some foreign residents, the proceeds of the sale of a registered emissions unit are not assessable income in Australia.

420-50 Value of registered emissions units at start of income year

(1) The value of a *registered emissions unit you *held at the start of an income year is the same amount at which it was taken into account under this Subdivision at the end of the last income year.

(2) The value of the unit is a nil amount if the unit was not taken into account under this Subdivision at the end of the last income year.

420-51 Valuation methods

The value of a *registered emissions unit you *held at the end of an income year is worked out using one of the following methods:

the *FIFO cost method;

the *actual cost method;

the *market value method.

Sections 420-55 and 420-57 tell you which method applies.

420-52 FIFO cost method of working out the value of units

The FIFO cost method for working out the *value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of an income year means that the value of the units is the *cost of the registered emissions units, and, for the purposes of the application of this Subdivision to you for the income year:

if any of the registered emissions units are:

(ii) eligible international emissions units (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011); or

*Australian carbon credit units; or

*safeguard mechanism credit units;

you must account for those units on a first-in first-out basis; and

(c) if any of the registered emissions units are *Kyoto units that are not eligible international emissions units (within the meaning of the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011)—you must account for those units on a first-in first-out basis.

420-53 Actual cost method of working out the value of units

The actual cost method for working out the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the income year means that the value of the units is the *cost of the units, and, for the purposes of the application of this Subdivision to you for the income year, you must not account for any of those units on a first-in first-out basis.

420-54 Market value method of working out the value of units

The market value method for working out the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the income year means that the value of the units is the *market value of the units at the end of the income year.

420-55 Valuation method for first income year at the end of which you held registered emissions units

Scope

This section applies if:

you *held one or more *registered emissions units at the end of an income year; and

the income year is the first income year at the end of which you held one or more registered emissions units.

Choice of method

You may choose one of the following methods:

the *FIFO cost method;

the *actual cost method;

the *market value method;

for working out the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the income year.

FIFO cost method applies if no choice made

(3) If you do not make a choice under subsection (2) for the income year, the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the income year is worked out using the *FIFO cost method.

Time for making choice

You must make a choice under subsection (2) before you lodge your income tax return for the income year for which you make the choice.

No revocation of choice

A choice made under subsection (2) cannot be revoked.

420-57 Valuation method for later income years at the end of which you held registered emissions units

Scope

This section applies if:

(a) you *held one or more *registered emissions units at the end of an income year (the current income year); and

the current income year is not the first income year at the end of which you held one or more registered emissions units.

Choice of method

You may choose one of the following methods:

the *FIFO cost method;

the *actual cost method;

the *market value method;

for working out the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the current income year.

Previous method applies if no choice made

(3) If you do not make a choice under subsection (2) for the current income year, the value of the *registered emissions units you *held at the end of the current income year is worked out using the method that applied to the most recent income year at the end of which you held one or more registered emissions units.

Limitation on choice—before 2015-16 income year

If the current income year is before the 2015-16 income year, you must not make a choice under subsection (2) for the current income year if you have previously made a choice under that subsection for an earlier income year.

Limitation on choice—2015-16 income year or a later income year

If the current income year is:

the 2015-16 income year; or

a later income year;

you must not make a choice under subsection (2) for the current income year unless:

the same method applied for each of the 4 most recent income years at the end of which you *held one or more *registered emissions units; and

the method mentioned in paragraph (c) is different from the method to which your choice for the current income year relates.

Limitation on choice—change from FIFO cost method to actual cost method

You must not choose under subsection (2) the *actual cost method for the current income year if the *FIFO cost method applied for the most recent income year at the end of which you *held one or more *registered emissions units.

Time for making choice

You must make a choice under subsection (2) before you lodge your income tax return for the income year for which you make the choice.

No revocation of choice

A choice made under subsection (2) cannot be revoked.

420-60 Cost of registered emissions units

Australian carbon credit units

(3) If an *Australian carbon credit unit was issued to you under the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011, the cost of the unit is its *market value immediately after you began to *hold the unit.

Other registered emissions units

(4) The cost of a *registered emissions unit (other than an *Australian carbon credit unit to which subsection (3) applies) is the total of the expenditure that you:

incurred in becoming the *holder of the unit; and

can deduct under section 420-15.

420-62 Primary producer registered emissions units

This Subdivision (other than section 420-60) does not apply to you in relation to a primary producer registered emissions unit.

Subdivision 420-E — Exclusivity of Division

Table of sections

420-65 Exclusivity of deductions etc.

420-70 Exclusivity of assessable income etc.

420-65 Exclusivity of deductions etc.

Expenditure incurred in becoming the holder of a registered emissions unit

You cannot deduct under any provision of this Act outside this Division any expenditure to the extent that you incur it in becoming the *holder of a registered emissions unit.

To the extent you incur expenditure in becoming the *holder of a registered emissions unit, the expenditure is not to be taken into account in working out:

an amount you can deduct; or

an amount included in your assessable income;

under any provision of this Act outside this Division.

Australian carbon credit units

(4) Subsections (1) and (2) do not affect the application of a provision of this Act outside this Division to expenditure you incur in becoming the *holder of an *Australian carbon credit unit issued to you in accordance with the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011 if you do not incur the expenditure in preparing or lodging:

an application for a certificate of entitlement (within the meaning of that Act); or

an offsets report (within the meaning of that Act).

Subsections (1) and (2) do not affect the operation of Division 30 (deductions for gifts and contributions).

Note: If you make a gift or contribution, Division 30 applies in the normal way to determine whether you can deduct the amount of the gift or contribution.

Expenditure incurred in ceasing to hold a registered emissions unit

You cannot deduct under any provision of this Act outside this Division any expenditure to the extent that you incur it in ceasing to *hold a registered emissions unit.

Primary producer registered emissions units

Subsections (1), (2) and (6) do not affect the application of:

Division 392 (long-term averaging of primary producers’ tax liability); or

Division 393 (farm management deposits);

to expenditure to the extent that you incur it in becoming the *holder of, or ceasing to hold, a primary producer registered emissions unit.

420-70 Exclusivity of assessable income etc.

An amount that you are entitled to receive because you ceased to *hold a registered emissions unit is not to be:

included in your assessable income; or

taken into account in working out your assessable income; or

taken into account in working out an amount you can deduct;

under any provision of this Act outside this Division.

Subsection (1) does not affect the operation of Division 6 so far as that Division provides for the significance of residence or source for the assessability of ordinary and statutory income.

Note: An amount included in your assessable income under this Division may be ordinary or statutory income for the purposes of Division 6.

Subsections (1) and (4) do not affect the application of:

Division 392 (long-term averaging of primary producers’ tax liability); or

Division 393 (farm management deposits);

to an amount that you are entitled to receive because you ceased to *hold a primary producer registered emissions unit.

Australian carbon credit units

(4) An amount is not to be included in your assessable income under any provision of this Act outside this Division because an *Australian carbon credit unit was issued to you in accordance with the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011.

Note 1: A capital gain or capital loss you make from a registered emissions unit is disregarded (subsection 118-15(1)).

Note 2: A capital gain or capital loss you make from a right to receive an Australian carbon credit unit is disregarded (subsection 118-15(3)).

Division 421 — Hydrogen production tax incentive

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 421

421-A Tax offset for hydrogen produced in Australia

421-B Certification of production profiles

421-C Other matters

Guide to Division 421

421-1 What this Division is about

A company may be entitled to a refundable tax offset in respect of hydrogen produced in Australia between the start of 1 July 2027 and the end of 30 June 2040.

One requirement for entitlement to the offset is that the company must have created a certificate (called a PGO certificate) that relates to the hydrogen. The certificate is created under the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024 and it must be registered under that Act.

Another requirement is that the facility at which the hydrogen is produced, and the production pathway for the hydrogen, must be specified in a production profile that is certified by the Clean Energy Regulator under this Division. The hydrogen must also have been produced during a particular period (which is called an offset period, and which cannot be longer than 10 years) that is associated with production at the facility in accordance with the production pathway.

The amount of the tax offset is $2 per whole kilogram of hydrogen (though this may be reduced in certain circumstances).

Subdivision 421-A — Tax offset for hydrogen produced in Australia

Table of sections

421-5 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for hydrogen produced in Australia

421-10 Amount of hydrogen production tax offset

421-15 When hydrogen is produced

421-20 Production emissions intensity

421-25 Grid matching requirements

421-30 Offset period

421-35 Initial reconciliation period for registered PGO certificate

421-40 Correction notice for registered PGO certificate

421-45 HPTO community benefit rules

421-5 Company entitled to refundable tax offset for hydrogen produced in Australia

(1) A company is entitled to a *tax offset under this section (the hydrogen production tax offset) for an income year in respect of a kilogram of hydrogen produced in Australia during the income year if:

the income year:

starts on or after 1 July 2027; and

ends before 1 July 2040; and

there is a *registered PGO certificate that relates to the kilogram of hydrogen and which states:

that the kilogram of hydrogen was produced at a particular facility that is specified in a production profile, in accordance with a particular production pathway that is specified in that production profile; and

that the kilogram of hydrogen has a production emissions intensity that is less than or equal to 0.6 kilograms of carbon dioxide per 1 kilogram of hydrogen (see section 421-20); and

if the facility is connected to an electricity grid—that the electricity (if any) that the facility obtained from the grid and used to produce the kilogram of hydrogen satisfies the grid matching requirements (see section 421-25); and

at the time when the kilogram of hydrogen was produced, the production profile mentioned in subparagraph (b)(i) of this subsection was certified in relation to the facility and the production pathway under Subdivision 421-B; and

the kilogram of hydrogen was produced during the offset period for the facility and the production pathway (see section 421-30); and

the *initial reconciliation period for the PGO certificate has ended (see section 421-35); and

no *correction notice for the PGO certificate is in force (see section 421-40); and

the company satisfies the requirements in subsection (2) of this section.

Note 1: For paragraph (c), when a production profile is certified, or a certification of a production profile is revoked, under Subdivision 421-B, the certification or revocation may have retrospective effect.

Note 2: The hydrogen production tax offset is a refundable tax offset (see section 67-23).

The company satisfies the requirements in this subsection if:

the company is a *constitutional corporation; and

(b) the company was the person who created the *registered PGO certificate under the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024; and

the company created the PGO certificate in the course of carrying on an enterprise in the indirect tax zone; and

at each time when the company carries on that enterprise in the indirect tax zone during the income year, either:

the company is an Australian resident and has an ABN; or

the company is a foreign resident and has a permanent establishment in Australia and an ABN; and

the company is not an *exempt entity; and

if *HPTO community benefit rules under paragraph 421-45(1)(a) of this Act apply to the company for the income year—the company meets the conditions specified in those rules.

(3) In subsection (2), carried on in the indirect tax zone and indirect tax zone have the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

421-10 Amount of hydrogen production tax offset

If a company is entitled to the *hydrogen production tax offset for an income year in respect of one or more kilograms of hydrogen, the amount of the offset for the income year is $2 in respect of each whole kilogram of hydrogen.

However, if:

*HPTO community benefit rules under paragraph 421-45(1)(b) apply to the company for the income year; and

circumstances specified in those rules exist for the company;

then the amount of the *hydrogen production tax offset is reduced by the proportion specified in those rules for those circumstances.

421-15 When hydrogen is produced

(1) For the purposes of this Division, a kilogram of hydrogen is taken to be produced at a facility at the time when the last part of the batch of hydrogen that contains the kilogram leaves the production gate (within the meaning of the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024) for hydrogen at the facility.

However, if:

the production of the batch of hydrogen commenced before 1 July 2027; and

the last part of the batch of hydrogen leaves the production gate for hydrogen at the facility on or after 1 July 2027;

then, for the purposes of this Division, each kilogram of hydrogen contained in the batch is taken to be produced at the facility before 1 July 2027.

Note: A company is not entitled to the hydrogen production tax offset in respect of hydrogen produced before 1 July 2027: see paragraph 421-5(1)(a).

421-20 Production emissions intensity

This section applies if there is a *registered PGO certificate that:

relates to a particular quantity of hydrogen (for example, a particular kilogram of hydrogen); and

states that the quantity of hydrogen was produced at a particular facility in accordance with a particular production pathway.

(2) The production emissions intensity of the quantity of hydrogen is the emissions intensity of that quantity of hydrogen taking into account all, and only, greenhouse gases emitted in relation to that quantity of hydrogen from production emissions sources for the *production pathway.

(3) In subsection (2), emissions intensity, greenhouse gas and production emissions source have the same meaning as in the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024.

421-25 Grid matching requirements

The grid matching requirements are the requirements prescribed by the Minister by legislative instrument for the purposes of this section.

421-30 Offset period

Notice of offset start date

(1) The *holder of a *registered production profile may, by notice given to the Commissioner in the *approved form, specify for the purposes of this section a date (the offset start date) in relation to the production of hydrogen:

at a particular facility specified in the profile; and

in accordance with a particular production pathway specified in the profile.

The offset start date specified in the notice:

must be the first day of an income year for the *holder of the *registered production profile; and

must not be earlier than the first day of the income year for the holder of the registered production profile in which the notice is given; and

must be:

on or after 1 July 2027; and

before 1 July 2040.

A notice given under subsection (1) cannot be varied or revoked.

If a notice has been given under subsection (1) in relation to a facility and a production pathway, then no further notice may be given under that subsection in relation to the facility and the production pathway.

Offset period

(5) If a notice has been given under subsection (1) in relation to a facility and a *production pathway, the offset period for the facility and the production pathway is the period that:

starts at the beginning of the offset start date specified in the notice; and

ends at the earlier of the following:

the end of the period of 10 years starting on the offset start date;

the end of 30 June 2040.

Exception—where production pathways at same facility are not substantially different

However, if:

two or more notices are given under subsection (1) in relation to the same facility (whether the notices are given at the same time or at different times); and

the Clean Energy Regulator determines under subsection (7) that a group consisting of 2 or more of those notices should be treated together for the purposes of subsection (5);

then subsection (5) applies in relation to each notice in the group as if the offset start date specified in the notice was the earliest of the offset start dates specified in any of the notices in the group.

Determination by Clean Energy Regulator

Note: If this subsection applies, the effect is that there will be a single, common offset period for the facility and each of the production pathways specified in the notices in the group.

If 2 or more notices are given as mentioned in paragraph (6)(a), the Clean Energy Regulator may, in writing, determine that a group consisting of 2 or more of those notices should be treated together for the purposes of subsection (5).

The Clean Energy Regulator may do so only if it is satisfied that production at the facility in accordance with the production pathway specified in any one of the notices in the group is not substantially different from production at the facility in accordance with a production pathway specified in any other notice in the group.

In deciding whether to make a determination under subsection (7), the Clean Energy Regulator may have regard to any matters that the Clean Energy Regulator considers relevant, including:

the nature of the facility; and

the nature of the *production pathways specified in the notices; and

if some of the notices are given at different times—the nature of any changes to the facility made between those times.

421-35 Initial reconciliation period for registered PGO certificate

(1) The initial reconciliation period for a *registered PGO certificate is the period that:

(a) starts immediately after the end of the financial year (the registration year for the certificate) in which the certificate was registered; and

ends at the time specified by subsection (2) or (3), whichever is later.

If:

(a) a person is given a statement under section 60 of the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin Act) 2024; and

the statement relates to PGO certificate activity (within the meaning of that Act) in connection with the *registered PGO certificate in the registration year for the certificate;

then the time specified by this subsection is the latest time by which such person is required, under section 61 of that Act, to give the Clean Energy Regulator a declaration in relation to such a statement.

Note: If more than one person is given such a statement, different people may be required to give the Clean Energy Regulator declarations by different times. The time specified by this subsection is the latest of those times.

If:

(a) a person is given a statement under section 60 of the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin Act) 2024 (the Guarantee of Origin Act); and

the statement relates to PGO certificate activity (within the meaning of the Guarantee of Origin Act) in connection with the *registered PGO certificate in the registration year for the certificate; and

after the end of the registration year, and at or before the time specified by subsection (2) of this section, the person gives the Clean Energy Regulator declarations and information of the kind mentioned in paragraph 61(b) of the Guarantee of Origin Act; and

the declarations include a declaration that particular information stated in the registered PGO certificate is not accurate or complete;

then the time specified by this subsection is the latest time at which the Clean Energy Regulator may decide, under section 62 of the Guarantee of the Origin Act, to correct the registered PGO certificate in response to declarations and information given by a person as mentioned in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this subsection.

Note: If more than one person gives the Clean Energy Regulator declarations and information as mentioned in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this subsection then, for each such set of declarations and information, there will be a last time at which the Clean Energy Regulator may correct the PGO certificate in response to that set of declarations and information. The time specified by this subsection is the latest of those last times.

421-40 Correction notice for registered PGO certificate

(1) The Clean Energy Regulator must issue a notice (a correction notice) for a *registered PGO certificate that relates to a kilogram of hydrogen if:

(a) the *initial reconciliation period for the PGO certificate has ended; and

the PGO certificate states:

that the kilogram of hydrogen has a production emissions intensity that is less than or equal to 0.6 kilograms of carbon dioxide per 1 kilogram of hydrogen; and

if the facility that produced the hydrogen is connected to an electricity grid—that the electricity (if any) that the facility obtained from the grid and used to produce the kilogram of hydrogen satisfies the grid matching requirements; and

the Clean Energy Regulator is satisfied that one or both of the conditions in subparagraphs (b)(i) and (ii) are not met.

The *correction notice must state that the Clean Energy Regulator is satisfied that one or both of the conditions in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i) and (ii) are not met.

The *correction notice is in force until it is revoked under subsection (4).

Revocation of correction notice

The Clean Energy Regulator may, in writing, revoke a *correction notice for a *registered PGO certificate that relates to a kilogram of hydrogen if the Clean Energy Regulator is satisfied that:

the *initial reconciliation period for the PGO certificate had not ended at the time when the correction notice was issued, and that period has still not ended; or

the PGO certificate does not state that the conditions in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i) and (ii) are met in relation to the kilogram of hydrogen; or

the conditions in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i) and (ii) are met in relation to the kilogram of hydrogen.

Copies of correction notice and revocation

If the Clean Energy Regulator:

issues a *correction notice under subsection (1) for a *registered PGO certificate that relates to a kilogram of hydrogen; or

revokes such a correction notice under subsection (4);

then the Clean Energy Regulator must give copies of the correction notice or the revocation to the following:

each person who is, at the time the correction notice is issued or revoked, the *holder of a *registered production profile that specifies the facility at which the hydrogen was produced;

the Commissioner.

Other matters

Subsection (1) and paragraph (4)(c) do not impose a duty on the Clean Energy Regulator to:

seek information about whether the conditions in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i) and (ii) are met; or

consider whether the Clean Energy Regulator is satisfied that those conditions are, or are not, met.

(7) The issuing of a *correction notice for a *registered PGO certificate does not have any effect on the content or status of the PGO certificate under the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin Act) 2024.

421-45 HPTO community benefit rules

(1) The Minister may, by legislative instrument, make the following rules (the HPTO community benefit rules):

rules that:

apply to companies within a specified class for an income year; and

specify conditions that must be met for such a company to be entitled to a *hydrogen production tax offset for the income year;

rules that:

apply to companies within a specified class for an income year; and

specify circumstances that, if they exist for such a company, will reduce the amount of the company’s hydrogen production tax offset for the income year by a specified proportion.

Note: For subparagraph (b)(ii), different proportions may be specified for different circumstances (see subsection 33(3A) of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901).

(2) In making the *HPTO community benefit rules, the Minister must have regard to the community benefit principles (within the meaning of subsection 10(3) of the Future Made in Australia Act 2024).

(3) When having regard to those principles, the Minister is to treat the *hydrogen production tax offset as if it were Future Made in Australia support (within the meaning of the Future Made in Australia Act 2024).

(4) This section does not apply if the Future Made in Australia Act 2024 has not commenced.

Subdivision 421-B — Certification of production profiles

Table of sections

421-50 Application for certification

421-55 Certification of production profile

421-60 Capacity of facility to produce hydrogen

421-65 Revocation of certification

421-70 Requests for further information etc.

421-50 Application for certification

The *holder of a *registered production profile for hydrogen may apply to the Clean Energy Regulator for the profile to be certified:

in relation to a particular facility, and a particular production pathway, specified in the profile; and

from a particular time.

The time specified in the application, as mentioned in paragraph (1)(b), must not be later than the start of the day when the application is made (and may be any time before the start of that day).

The application is taken not to be made unless:

it is in a form (if any) prescribed under subsection (5); and

it is accompanied by any information, documents or other materials prescribed under subsection (5); and

without limiting paragraphs (a) and (b) of this subsection—it is accompanied by an eligibility statement for the *registered production profile that relates to the facility and the production pathway.

(4) For the purposes of paragraph (3)(c), an eligibility statement for the *registered production profile that relates to the facility and the *production pathway is a statement by the *holder of the profile to the effect that there are reasonable grounds to believe that, if the profile is certified, a company will be entitled to the *hydrogen production tax offset for an income year in respect of one or more kilograms of hydrogen produced at the facility in accordance with the production pathway.

The Clean Energy Regulator may, by notifiable instrument, do any of the following:

prescribe a form for the purposes of paragraph (3)(a);

prescribe information, documents or other materials for the purposes of paragraph (3)(b).

421-55 Certification of production profile

Certification

If:

(a) the Clean Energy Regulator receives an application for a *registered production profile to be certified in relation to a facility and a *production pathway from a particular time (the start time); and

the Clean Energy Regulator is satisfied that:

the condition in subsection (3) was met at the start time, and has continued to be met since that time; and

the conditions in subsections (5) (if applicable) and (7) are met;

then:

Clean Energy Regulator must, in writing, certify the registered production profile in relation to the facility and the production pathway; and

the instrument of certification must state that the certification has effect from the start time.

Exception—failure to provide information etc.

However, the Clean Energy Regulator may refuse to certify a *registered production profile under subsection (1) if:

the Clean Energy Regulator has given the *holder of the production profile a notice under section 421-70(1) that relates to the application for certification, requesting that the holder give the Clean Energy Regulator specified information, documents or other materials before a specified time; and

the holder of the production profile does not comply with the request before the specified time.

Condition relating to facility and production pathway

The condition in this subsection is that:

the facility is located on a single site in Australia; and

the facility has a capacity to produce hydrogen, in accordance with the production pathway, that is at least equal to that of an electrolyser with a nameplate capacity of 10 megawatts; and

the production pathway does not involve producing hydrogen using any of the following:

coal gasification;

(ii) steam reformation of natural gas (within the meaning of the National Greenhouse and Energy Reporting Act 2007);

a process prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subparagraph.

Note: The Clean Energy Regulator may prescribe circumstances in which a facility is taken to have the capacity mentioned in paragraph (b) (see section 421-60).

Condition relating to early investment

Subsection (5) applies if the start time for the certification (see subsection (1)) is on or after 1 July 2030.

The condition in this subsection is that a final investment decision was made before 1 July 2030 to:

construct the facility with a capacity to produce hydrogen, in accordance with the production pathway, that is at least equal to the nominal capacity of the facility to produce hydrogen in accordance with the production pathway; or

upgrade the facility so that it has a capacity to produce hydrogen, in accordance with the production pathway, that is at least equal to that nominal capacity.

(6) For the purposes of subsection (5), the nominal capacity of the facility to produce hydrogen in accordance with the *production pathway is the capacity of the facility, at the start time, to produce hydrogen in accordance with the production pathway.

Note: The Clean Energy Regulator may prescribe how the capacity of a facility to produce hydrogen is to be determined (see section 421-60).

Condition relating to eligibility statement

The condition in this subsection is that, on the basis of information that the Clean Energy Regulator possesses at the time when the instrument of certification is made, it would not be reasonable for the Clean Energy Regulator to believe that the eligibility statement for the *registered production profile that accompanied the application for certification (see paragraph 421-50(3)(c)) is incorrect.

Note: The Clean Energy Regulator does not have a duty to seek information about whether the eligibility statement is correct (see subsection (9)).

Notification of certification

(8) If the Clean Energy Regulator certifies a *registered production profile with effect from a particular time (the start time), the Clean Energy Regulator must notify the following of the certification:

the person who applied under section 421-50 for the certification;

the person who was the *holder of the production profile at the start time;

each person who was a holder of the production profile at any time between:

the start time; and

the time when the instrument of certification is made;

the Commissioner.

No duty to seek information about eligibility statement

This section does not impose a duty on the Clean Energy Regulator to seek information relevant to assessing whether the eligibility statement for the *registered production profile is incorrect that goes beyond:

information possessed by the Clean Energy Regulator at the time when the Clean Energy Regulator received the application for certification of the registered production profile; and

information that was contained in, or that accompanied, that application.

421-60 Capacity of facility to produce hydrogen

The Clean Energy Regulator may, by legislative instrument, prescribe any of the following:

how the capacity of a facility to produce hydrogen is to be expressed for the purposes of section 421-55;

how the capacity of a facility to produce hydrogen is to be determined for the purposes of section 421-55;

without limiting paragraph (a) or (b) of this section—circumstances in which a facility is taken, for the purposes of subsection 421-55(3), to have a capacity to produce hydrogen that is at least equal to that of an electrolyser with a nameplate capacity of 10 megawatts.

421-65 Revocation of certification

(1) This section applies if a *production profile has been certified in relation to a facility and a *production pathway with effect from a particular time (the original start time).

Revocation—substantive grounds

The Clean Energy Regulator may, in writing, revoke the certification if:

(a) on or after the original start time, the registration of the *production profile is suspended, cancelled or surrendered under the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024; or

there is a time, on or after the original start time, when the condition in subsection 421-55(3) of this Act (condition relating to facility and production pathway) is not met in relation to the facility and the production pathway; or

(c) at the time when the instrument of revocation made, the Clean Energy Regulator reasonably believes that the eligibility statement for the production profile that accompanied the application for certification (see paragraph 421-50(3)(c)) is incorrect.

(3) A revocation under subsection (2) has effect from the time (the new end time for the certification) specified in the instrument of revocation, which must be:

if the certification is revoked under paragraph (2)(a)—the time when the registration of the production profile was suspended, cancelled or surrendered; or

if the certification is revoked under paragraph (2)(b)—the earliest time, on or after the original start time, when the condition in subsection 421-55(3) is not met in relation to the facility and the production pathway; or

if the certification is revoked under paragraph (2)(c)—no earlier than the time when the instrument of revocation is made.

Note: If the certification is revoked under paragraph (2)(a) or (b), the revocation will have retrospective effect.

Revocation—failure to provide information etc.

In addition, the Clean Energy Regulator may, in writing, revoke the certification if:

the Clean Energy Regulator has given the *holder of the production profile a notice under section 421-70(2) that relates to the certification, requesting that the holder give the Clean Energy Regulator specified information, documents or other materials before a specified time; and

the holder of the production profile does not comply with the request before the specified time.

(5) A revocation under subsection (4) has effect from the time (also the new end time for the certification) specified in the instrument of revocation, which must not be before the time specified in the notice mentioned in paragraph (4)(a).

Note: A revocation under subsection (4) may be given retrospective effect.

Consequences of revocation

If the new end time for the certification is the same as the original start time, then the certification is taken never to have been in effect.

If the new end time for the certification is later than the original start time, then:

the certification is taken to have been in effect for the period that:

begins at the original start time; and

ends at the new end time; and

the certification is taken not to have been in effect after the new end time.

Note: The operation of subsections (6) and (7) may affect whether paragraph 421-5(1)(c) (which sets out a condition for entitlement to the hydrogen production tax offset) is satisfied in a particular case.

If a certification of a production profile that relates to a particular facility and production pathway is revoked, that does not prevent:

an application later being made for a new certification of the production profile, including a certification that relates to the same facility and production pathway; or

the Clean Energy Regulator subsequently issuing such a new certification of the production profile.

Notification of revocation

If the Clean Energy Regulator revokes a certification of a production profile, the Clean Energy Regulator must notify the following of the revocation:

the person who was the *holder of the production profile at the original start time for the certification;

each person who was a holder of the production profile at any time between:

the original start time for the certification; and

the time when the instrument of revocation is made;

the Commissioner.

421-70 Requests for further information etc.

Request before certification

If the Clean Energy Regulator has received an application for a *registered production profile to be certified, the Clean Energy Regulator may, before making a decision about whether to certify the profile under section 421-55, give a written notice to the *holder of the profile:

requesting that the holder give the Clean Energy Regulator, before a specified time, specified information, documents or other materials that are relevant to making that decision; and

stating that, if the request is not complied with before the specified time, the Clean Energy Regulator may refuse to certify the production profile.

Request after certification

If the Clean Energy Regulator has certified a *registered production profile under section 421-55, the Clean Energy Regulator may give a written notice to the *holder of the profile:

requesting that the holder give the Clean Energy Regulator, before a specified time, specified information, documents or other materials that are relevant to deciding whether to revoke the certification under subsection 421-65(2) (revocation on substantive grounds); and

stating that, if the request is not complied with before the specified time, the Clean Energy Regulator may revoke the certification.

Subdivision 421-C — Other matters

Table of sections

421-75 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal

421-80 Information sharing

421-85 Period for amending assessments

421-75 Review of decisions by the Administrative Review Tribunal

Applications may be made to the ART for review of the following decisions made by the Clean Energy Regulator:

a decision under subsection 421-30(7) to make a determination;

a decision under subsection 421-40(1) to issue a *correction notice;

a decision under subsection 421-40(4) to revoke a correction notice;

a decision under section 421-55 to certify a *registered production profile;

a decision under section 421-55 not to certify a registered production profile (after an application to certify the profile has been made under section 421-50);

a decision under section 421-65 to revoke a certification of a production profile.

421-80 Information sharing

Each of the following regulators:

the Clean Energy Regulator;

the Commissioner;

may request the other regulator to provide them with information held by the other regulator that is reasonably necessary or convenient for the requesting regulator’s administration of this Division.

The other regulator must comply with the request.

Note: The request could be an ad hoc or standing request, and the information requested could be general or specific.

421-85 Period for amending assessments

Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an entity’s assessment for the purposes of giving effect to this Division for an income year if:

the Clean Energy Regulator:

issues, or revokes, a *correction notice under section 421-40; or

makes an instrument under section 421-65 revoking a certification of a production profile, with effect from a specified time (which may be different from the time when the instrument is made); and

as a result, there is a change to:

whether the entity is entitled to a *hydrogen production tax offset for the income year; or

the amount of hydrogen production tax offset that the entity is entitled to for the income year; and

the amendment of the entity’s assessment is made during the period of 4 years starting on the day when the Clean Energy Regulator issues or revokes the correction notice, or makes the instrument revoking the certification of the production profile (whichever applies).

Note: Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 specifies the periods within which assessments may be amended.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 3—Specialist liability rules 1

Part 3-80—Roll-overs applying to assets generally 1

Division 615—Roll-overs for business restructures 1

Guide to Division 615 1

615-1 What this Division is about 1

Subdivision 615-A—Choosing to obtain roll-overs 1

615-5 Disposing of interests in one entity for shares in a company 1

615-10 Redeeming or cancelling interests in one entity for shares in a company 2

Subdivision 615-B—Further requirements for choosing to obtain roll-overs 3

615-15 Interposed company must own all the original interests 4

615-20 Requirements relating to your interests in the original entity 4

615-25 Requirements relating to the interposed company 5

615-30 Interposed company must make a particular choice 6

615-35 ADI restructures—disregard certain preference shares 6

Subdivision 615-C—Consequences of roll-overs 7

615-40 CGT consequences 7

615-45 Additional consequences—deferral of profit or loss 8

615-50 Trading stock 8

615-55 Revenue assets 9

615-60 Disregard CGT exemption for trading stock 10

Subdivision 615-D—Consequences for the interposed company 10

615-65 Consequences for the interposed company 10

Division 620—Assets of wound-up corporation passing to corporation with not significantly different ownership 12

Subdivision 620-A—Corporations covered by Subdivision 124-I 12

Guide to Subdivision 620-A 12

620-5 What this Subdivision is about 12

Application and object of this Subdivision 13

620-10 Application 13

620-15 Object 13

CGT consequences 13

620-20 Disregard body’s capital gains and losses from CGT assets 13

620-25 Cost base and pre-CGT status of CGT asset for company 14

Consequences for depreciating assets 14

620-30 Roll-over relief for balancing adjustment events 14

Consequences for trading stock 15

620-40 Body taken to have sold trading stock to company 15

Consequences for revenue assets 15

620-50 Body taken to have sold revenue assets to company 15

Part 3-90—Consolidated groups 17

Division 700—Guide and objects 17

Guide 17

700-1 What this Part is about 17

700-5 Overview of this Part 18

Objects 19

700-10 Objects of this Part 19

Division 701—Core rules 20

Common rule 21

701-1 Single entity rule 21

Head company rules 22

701-5 Entry history rule 22

701-10 Cost to head company of assets of joining entity 23

701-15 Cost to head company of membership interests in entity that leaves group 24

701-20 Cost to head company of assets consisting of certain liabilities owed by entity that leaves group 25

701-25 Tax-neutral consequence for head company of ceasing to hold assets when entity leaves group 26

Entity rules 28

701-30 Where entity not subsidiary member for whole of income year 28

701-35 Tax-neutral consequence for entity of ceasing to hold assets when it joins group 31

701-40 Exit history rule 32

701-45 Cost of assets consisting of liabilities owed to entity by members of the group 33

701-50 Cost of certain membership interests of which entity becomes holder on leaving group 34

Supporting provisions 35

701-55 Setting the tax cost of an asset 35

701-56 Application of subsection 701-55(6) 39

701-58 Effect of setting the tax cost of an asset that the head company does not hold under the single entity rule 40

701-60 Tax cost setting amount 40

701-60A Tax cost setting amount for asset emerging when entity leaves group 41

701-61 Assets in relation to Division 230 financial arrangement—head company’s assessable income or deduction 43

701-63 Right to future income and WIP amount asset 43

701-65 Net income and losses for trusts and partnerships 44

701-67 Assets in this Part are CGT assets, etc. 45

Exceptions 45

701-70 Adjustments to taxable income where identities of parties to arrangement merge on joining group 45

701-75 Adjustments to taxable income where identities of parties to arrangement re-emerge on leaving group 49

701-80 Accelerated depreciation 51

701-85 Other exceptions etc. to the rules 52

Division 703—Consolidated groups and their members 54

Guide to Division 703 54

703-1 What this Division is about 54

Basic concepts 55

703-5 What is a consolidated group? 55

703-10 What is a consolidatable group? 56

703-15 Members of a consolidated group or consolidatable group 56

703-20 Certain entities that cannot be members of a consolidated group or consolidatable group 59

703-25 Australian residence requirements for trusts 60

703-30 When is one entity a wholly-owned subsidiary of another? 61

703-33 Transfer time for sale of shares in company 62

703-35 Treating entities as wholly-owned subsidiaries by disregarding employee shares 63

703-37 Disregarding certain preference shares following an ADI restructure 64

703-40 Treating entities held through non-fixed trusts as wholly-owned subsidiaries 65

703-45 Subsidiary members or nominees interposed between the head company and a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a consolidatable group 66

Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group 66

703-50 Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group 66

Consolidated group created when MEC group ceases to exist 68

703-55 Creating consolidated groups from certain MEC groups 68

Notice of events affecting consolidated group 68

703-58 Notice of choice to consolidate 68

703-60 Notice of events affecting consolidated group 69

Effects of choice to continue group after shelf company becomes new head company 71

703-65 Application 71

703-70 Consolidated group continues in existence with interposed company as head company and original entity as a subsidiary member 72

703-75 Interposed company treated as substituted for original entity at all times before the completion time 72

703-80 Effects on the original entity’s tax position 74

Division 705—Tax cost setting amount for assets where entities become subsidiary members of consolidated groups 75

Guide to Division 705 75

705-1 What this Division is about 75

Subdivision 705-A—Basic case: a single entity joining an existing consolidated group 75

Guide to Subdivision 705-A 75

705-5 What this Subdivision is about 75

Application and object 77

705-10 Application and object of this Subdivision 77

705-15 Cases where this Subdivision does not have effect 78

Tax cost setting amount for assets that joining entity brings into joined group 79

705-20 Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Subdivision 79

705-25 Tax cost setting amount for retained cost base assets 79

705-27 Reduction in tax cost setting amount that exceeds market value of certain retained cost base assets 81

705-30 What is the joining entity’s terminating value for an asset? 83

705-35 Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets 85

705-40 Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets held on revenue account etc. 86

705-45 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for accelerated depreciation assets 87

705-47 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for some privatised assets 88

705-55 Order of application of sections 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47 91

705-56 Modification for tax cost setting in relation to leases 91

705-57 Adjustment to tax cost setting amount where loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in joining entity 93

705-58 Assets and liabilities not set off against each other 96

705-59 Exception: treatment of linked assets and liabilities 96

How to work out the allocable cost amount 101

705-60 What is the joined group’s allocable cost amount for the joining entity? 101

705-62 No double counting of amounts in allocable cost amount 104

705-65 Cost of membership interests in the joining entity—step 1 in working out allocable cost amount 105

705-70 Liabilities of the joining entity—step 2 in working out allocable cost amount 109

705-75 Liabilities of the joining entity—reductions for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount 112

705-76 Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets 114

705-80 Liabilities of the joining entity—reductions/increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount 115

705-85 Liabilities of the joining entity—increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount 116

705-90 Undistributed, taxed profits accruing to joined group before joining time—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount 118

705-93 If pre-joining time roll-over from foreign resident company or head company—step 3A in working out allocable cost amount 122

705-95 Pre-joining time distributions out of certain profits—step 4 in working out allocable cost amount 123

705-100 Losses accruing to joined group before joining time—step 5 in working out allocable cost amount 124

705-102 FRT disallowed amounts accruing to joined group before joining time—step 5A in working out allocable cost amount 124

705-105 Continuity of holding membership interests—steps 3 to 5A in working out allocable cost amount 125

705-110 If joining entity transfers a loss to the head company—step 6 in working out allocable cost amount 125

705-112 If joining entity transfers a FRT disallowed amount to the head company—step 6A in working out allocable cost amount 126

705-115 If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions—step 7 in working out allocable cost amount 126

How to work out a pre-CGT factor for assets of joining entity 128

705-125 Pre-CGT proportion for joining entity 128

Subdivision 705-B—Case of group formation 129

Guide to Subdivision 705-B 129

705-130 What this Subdivision is about 129

Application and object 130

705-135 Application and object of this Subdivision 130

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A 130

705-140 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications 130

705-145 Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be worked out where subsidiary members have membership interests in other subsidiary members 131

705-147 Adjustment in working out step 3A of allocable cost amount to take account of membership interests held by subsidiary members in other such members 132

705-155 Adjustments to restrict step 4 reduction of allocable cost amount to effective distributions to head company in respect of direct membership interests 134

705-160 Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned profits or losses of certain entities that become subsidiary members 137

705-163 Modified application of section 705-57 140

Subdivision 705-C—Case where a consolidated group is acquired by another 143

Guide to Subdivision 705-C 143

705-170 What this Subdivision is about 143

Application and object 144

705-175 Application and object of this Subdivision 144

Modified application of Division 701 in relation to acquired group etc. 144

705-180 Modifications of Division 701 144

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A in relation to acquiring group 146

705-185 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications 146

Modifications of Subdivision 705-A for the purposes of this Subdivision 147

705-195 Modified application of subsection 705-65(6) 147

705-200 Modified application of section 705-85 147

Subdivision 705-D—Where multiple entities are linked by membership interests 148

Guide to Subdivision 705-D 148

705-210 What this Subdivision is about 148

Application and object 149

705-215 Application and object of this Subdivision 149

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A 150

705-220 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications 150

705-225 Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be worked out where linked entities have membership interests in other linked entities 150

705-227 Adjustment in working out step 3A of allocable cost amount to take account of membership interests held by linked entities in other linked entities 152

705-230 Adjustments to restrict step 4 reduction of allocable cost amount to effective distributions to head company in respect of direct membership interests 154

705-235 Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned profits or losses of certain linked entities 154

705-240 Modified application of section 705-57 157

Subdivision 705-E—Adjustments for errors etc. 159

Guide to Subdivision 705-E 159

705-300 What this Subdivision is about 159

Operative provisions 160

705-305 Object of this Subdivision 160

705-310 Operation of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 160

705-315 Errors that attract special adjustment action 160

705-320 Tax cost setting amounts taken to be correct 162

Division 707—Losses for head companies when entities become members etc. 163

Subdivision 707-A—Transfer of losses to head company 163

Guide to Subdivision 707-A 163

707-100 What this Subdivision is about 163

707-105 Who can utilise the loss? 164

Objects 165

707-110 Objects of this Subdivision 165

Application 165

707-115 What losses this Subdivision applies to 165

Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company 166

707-120 Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company 166

707-125 Modified business continuity test for companies’ post-1999 losses 167

707-130 Modified pattern of distributions test 169

707-135 Transferring loss transferred to joining entity because business continuity test was satisfied 171

Effect of transfer of loss 171

707-140 Effect of transfer of loss 171

Cancelling the transfer of the loss 172

707-145 Cancelling the transfer of the loss 172

What happens if the loss is not transferred? 173

707-150 Loss cannot be utilised for income year ending after the joining time 173

Subdivision 707-B—Can a transferred loss be utilised? 173

Guide to Subdivision 707-B 173

707-200 What this Subdivision is about 173

Operative provisions 173

707-205 Modified period for test for maintaining same ownership 173

707-210 Utilisation of certain losses transferred from a company depends on company that made the losses earlier 174

Subdivision 707-C—Amount of transferred losses that can be utilised 177

Guide to Subdivision 707-C 177

707-300 What this Subdivision is about 177

Object 178

707-305 Object of this Subdivision 178

How much of a transferred loss can be utilised? 179

707-310 How much of a transferred loss can be utilised? 179

707-315 What is a bundle of losses? 182

707-320 What is the available fraction for a bundle of losses? 183

707-325 Modified market value of an entity becoming a member of a consolidated group 186

707-330 Losses transferred from former head company 188

707-335 Limit on utilising transferred losses if circumstances change during income year 189

707-340 Utilising transferred losses while exempt income remains 190

707-345 Other provisions are subject to this Subdivision 191

Subdivision 707-D—Special rules about losses 191

707-400 Head company’s business before and after consolidation not compared 191

707-410 Exit history rule does not treat entity as having made a loss 192

707-415 Application of losses with nil available fraction for certain purposes 192

Division 709—Other rules applying when entities become subsidiary members etc. 196

Subdivision 709-A—Franking accounts 196

Guide to Subdivision 709-A 196

709-50 What this Subdivision is about 196

Object 197

709-55 Object of this Subdivision 197

Treatment of franking accounts at joining time 198

709-60 Nil balance franking account for joining entity 198

Treatment of subsidiary member’s franking account 198

709-65 Subsidiary member’s franking account does not operate 198

Treatment of head company’s franking account 199

709-70 Credits arising in head company’s franking account 199

709-75 Debits arising in head company’s franking account 199

Franking distributions by subsidiary member 200

709-80 Subsidiary member’s distributions on employee shares and certain preference shares taken to be distributions by the head company 200

709-85 Non-share distributions by subsidiary members taken to be distributions by head company 201

709-90 Subsidiary member’s distributions to foreign resident taken to be distributions by head company 201

Payment of group liability by former subsidiary member 201

709-95 Payment of group liability by former subsidiary member 201

709-100 Refund of income tax to former subsidiary member 202

Subdivision 709-B—Imputation issues 203

Guide to Subdivision 709-B 203

709-150 What this Subdivision is about 203

Operative provisions 203

709-155 Testing consolidated groups 203

709-160 Subsidiary member is exempting entity 204

709-165 Subsidiary member is former exempting entity 205

709-170 Head company and subsidiary are exempting entities 206

709-175 Head company is former exempting entity 207

Subdivision 709-C—Treatment of excess franking deficit tax offsets when entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group 209

Guide to Subdivision 709-C 209

709-180 What this Subdivision is about 209

709-185 Joining entity’s excess franking deficit tax offsets transferred to head company 210

709-190 Exit history rule not to treat leaving entity as having a franking deficit tax offset excess 211

Subdivision 709-D—Deducting bad debts 211

Guide to Subdivision 709-D 211

709-200 What this Subdivision is about 211

Application and object 212

709-205 Application of this Subdivision 212

709-210 Object of this Subdivision 213

Limit on deduction of bad debt 214

709-215 Limit on deduction of bad debt 214

Extension of Subdivision to debt/equity swap loss 220

709-220 Limit on deduction of swap loss 220

Division 711—Tax cost setting amount for membership interests where entities cease to be subsidiary members of consolidated groups 221

Guide to Division 711 221

711-1 What this Division is about 221

Application and object of this Division 222

711-5 Application and object of this Division 222

Tax cost setting amount for membership interests etc. 223

711-10 Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Division 223

711-15 Tax cost setting amount where no multiple exit 223

711-20 What is the old group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity? 224

711-25 Terminating values of the leaving entity’s assets—step 1 in working out allocable cost amount 226

711-30 What is the head company’s terminating value for an asset? 227

711-35 If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions—step 2 in working out allocable cost amount 228

711-40 Liabilities owed to the leaving entity by members of the old group—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount 228

711-45 Liabilities etc. owed by the leaving entity—step 4 in working out allocable cost amount 229

711-46 Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets 234

711-55 Tax cost setting amount for membership interests where multiple exit 235

711-65 Membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 237

711-70 Additional integrity rule if membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 under section 711-65—application of Division 149 to head company 238

711-75 Additional integrity rule if membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 under section 711-65—application of CGT event K6 240

Division 713—Rules for particular kinds of entities 242

Subdivision 713-A—Trusts 242

Working out a joined group’s allocable cost amount for a joining trust 242

713-20 Increasing the step 1 amount for settled capital that could be distributed tax free in respect of discretionary interests 242

713-25 Undistributed, realised profits that accrue to joined group before joining time and could be distributed tax free—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount 246

Determining destination of distribution by non-fixed trust 247

713-50 Factors to consider 247

Subdivision 713-C—Some unit trusts treated like head companies of consolidated groups 247

Guide to Subdivision 713-C 247

713-120 What this Subdivision is about 247

Object of this Subdivision 248

713-125 Object of this Subdivision 248

Choice to form a consolidated group 249

713-130 Choosing to form a consolidated group 249

Effects of choice 249

713-135 Effects of choice 249

713-140 Modifications of the applied law 251

Subdivision 713-E—Partnerships 253

Guide to Subdivision 713-E 253

713-200 What this Subdivision is about 253

Objects 254

713-205 Objects of this Subdivision 254

Partnership cost setting interests etc. 255

713-210 Partnership cost setting interests 255

713-215 Terminating value for partnership cost setting interest 256

Setting tax cost of partnership cost setting interests 256

713-220 Set tax cost of partnership cost setting interests if partner joins consolidated group 256

713-225 Tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interest 257

Special rules where partnership joins consolidated group 259

713-235 Partnership joins group—set tax cost of partnership assets 259

713-240 Partnership joins group—tax cost setting amount for partnership asset 260

Special rules where partnership leaves consolidated group 262

713-250 Partnership leaves group—standard provisions modified 262

713-255 Partnership leaves group—tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interests 262

713-260 Partnership leaves group—tax cost setting amount for assets consisting of being owed certain liabilities 264

713-265 Partnership leaves group—adjustments to allocable cost amount of partner who also leaves group 264

Subdivision 713-L—Life insurance companies 265

Guide to Subdivision 713-L 265

713-500 What this Subdivision is about 265

General modifications for life insurance companies 267

713-505 Head company treated as a life insurance company 267

713-510 Certain subsidiaries of life insurance companies cannot be members of consolidated group 267

713-510A Disregard single entity rule in working out certain amounts in respect of life insurance company 268

Life insurance companies’ liabilities on joining consolidated group 270

713-511 Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company joins consolidated group 270

Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group 271

713-515 Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where life insurance company joins group 271

713-520 Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company joins group 272

713-525 Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at joining time 273

Losses of life insurance companies joining consolidated group 273

713-530 Treatment of certain losses of life insurance company 273

Losses of life insurance companies’ subsidiaries joining consolidated group 274

713-535 Losses of entities whose membership interests are complying superannuation assets of life insurance company 274

713-540 Losses of entities whose membership interests are segregated exempt assets of life insurance company 275

Imputation rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group 276

713-545 Treatment of franking surplus in franking account of life insurance subsidiary joining group 276

713-550 Treatment of head company’s franking account after joining 278

Liabilities for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group 278

713-565 Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company leaves consolidated group 278

Losses for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group 279

713-570 Certain losses transferred to leaving company 279

Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group 280

713-575 Terminating value of certain assets where life insurance company leaves group 280

713-580 Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company leaves group 281

713-585 Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at leaving time 282

Subdivision 713-M—General insurance companies 282

Guide to Subdivision 713-M 282

713-700 What this Subdivision is about 282

Tax cost setting rules for general insurance companies joining consolidated group 283

713-705 Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where general insurance company joins group 283

Liabilities and reserves of general insurance companies joining and leaving consolidated groups 284

713-710 Treatment of liabilities and reserves for income year when general insurance company joins or leaves group 284

713-715 If general insurance company joins consolidated group 285

713-720 If general insurance company leaves consolidated group 285

713-725 Treatment of certain assets and liabilities of general insurance companies 286

Division 715—Interactions between this Part and other areas of the income tax law 288

Subdivision 715-A—Treatment of unrealised losses existing when ownership or control of a company changes before or during consolidation 289

Object 290

715-15 Object of this Subdivision 290

Effect on Subdivision 165-CC of a company becoming a member of a consolidated group 292

715-25 Subdivision 165-CC stops applying to earlier changeover time 292

715-30 Meaning of 165-CC tagged asset 292

715-35 Meaning of final RUNL 293

165-CC tagged assets that affect tax cost setting amounts 293

715-50 Step 1 amount is reduced if membership interest in subsidiary member is 165-CC tagged asset and business continuity test is failed 293

715-55 Step 2 amount is affected if liability of subsidiary member is 165-CC tagged asset of another group member and business continuity test is failed 295

165-CC tagged assets that form loss denial pools of head company when consolidated group is formed 296

715-60 Assets that the head company already owns 296

715-70 Assets of subsidiary member that become those of head company 297

How Subdivision 165-CC applies to consolidated groups 299

715-75 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule 299

Effect on Subdivision 165-CC of entity leaving consolidated group 300

715-80 Application of sections 715-85 to 715-110 300

715-85 First changeover time for leaving company at or after leaving time 300

715-90 How business continuity test applies if leaving time is changeover time for leaving company 300

715-95 If ownership and control of leaving entity have not changed since head company’s last changeover time 301

715-100 First choice: adjustable values of leaving assets reduced to nil 302

715-105 Second choice: head company’s final RUNL applied in reducing adjustable values of leaving assets that are loss assets 302

715-110 Third choice: loss denial pool of leaving entity created 303

Effect of assets in loss denial pool of head company becoming assets of leaving entity 304

715-120 What happens 304

715-125 First choice: adjustable values of leaving assets reduced to nil 305

715-130 Second choice: pool’s loss denial balance applied in reducing adjustable values of leaving assets that are loss assets 305

715-135 Third choice: loss denial pool of leaving entity created 306

Effect of first and second choices on various kinds of assets 307

715-145 Effect of choice on adjustable value of leaving asset 307

General provisions about loss denial pools 308

715-155 When asset leaves pool 308

715-160 How loss denial balance is applied to losses realised on assets in pool 308

715-165 When pool ceases to exist 309

Choices under this Subdivision 309

715-175 When choice must be made 309

715-180 Head company to notify leaving entity of choice 310

715-185 Leaving entity may choose to cancel loss denial pool by reducing adjustable values of assets in the pool 310

Subdivision 715-B—How Subdivision 165-CD applies to consolidated groups and leaving entities 311

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to consolidated groups 311

715-215 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule 311

715-225 Working out adjusted unrealised loss using individual asset method 312

715-230 No reductions or other consequences for interests subject to loss cancellation under Subdivision 715-H 313

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to leaving entity that is a company 313

715-240 Application of sections 715-245 to 715-260 313

715-245 If ownership or control of leaving entity has altered since head company’s last alteration time or formation of group 314

715-250 If head company has had an alteration time but ownership and control of leaving entity have not altered since 315

715-255 Consequences if leaving entity is a loss company at the leaving time 316

715-260 If neither of sections 715-245 and 715-250 applies 317

715-265 Head company does not have relevant equity or debt interest in a loss company if widely held top company does not have such an interest 318

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to leaving entity that is a trust 319

715-270 Subdivision 165-CD applies 319

Subdivision 715-C—Common rules for the purposes of Subdivisions 715-A and 715-B 321

715-290 Additional assumptions to be made when using reference time 321

Subdivision 715-D—Treatment of company’s deferred losses under Subdivision 170-D on joining a consolidated group 321

Key terminology 322

715-310 What is a 170-D deferred loss, and when it revives 322

Deferred loss on 165-CC tagged asset 322

715-355 Head company’s own deferred losses at formation time 322

715-360 Deferred losses brought in by subsidiary member 323

715-365 How loss denial balance is applied when 170-D deferred loss revives 325

Subdivision 715-E—Interactions with Division 775 (Foreign currency gains and losses) 325

715-370 Cost setting—reference time for determining currency exchange rate effect 325

Subdivision 715-F—Interactions with Division 230 (financial arrangements) 326

715-375 Cost setting on joining—amount of liability that is Division 230 financial arrangement 327

715-378 Cost setting on joining—head company’s right to receive or obligation to provide payment 328

715-379 Cost setting on leaving—amount of intragroup liability that is Division 230 financial arrangement 328

715-379A Cost setting on leaving—head company’s or leaving entity’s right to receive or obligation to provide payment 330

715-380 Exit history rule not to affect certain matters related to Division 230 financial arrangements 331

715-385 Exit history rule and elective methods applying to Division 230 financial arrangements 332

Subdivision 715-G—How value shifting rules apply to a consolidated group 333

715-410 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule 333

715-450 No reductions or other consequences for interests subject to loss cancellation under Subdivision 715-H 334

Subdivision 715-H—Cancelling loss on realisation event for direct or indirect interest in a member of a consolidated group 334

715-610 Cancellation of loss 334

715-615 Exception for interests in entity leaving consolidated group 336

715-620 Exception if loss attributable to certain matters 337

Subdivision 715-J—Entry history rule and choices 337

Head company’s choice overriding entry history rule 338

715-660 Head company’s choice overriding entry history rule 338

Choices head company can make ignoring entry history rule to override inconsistencies 341

715-665 Head company’s choice to override inconsistency 341

Choices with ongoing effect 345

715-670 Ongoing effect of choices made by entities before joining group 345

715-675 Head company adopting choice with ongoing effect 346

Subdivision 715-K—Exit history rule and choices 347

Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule 347

715-700 Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule 347

Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule to overcome inconsistencies 349

715-705 Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule to overcome inconsistencies 349

Subdivision 715-U—Effect on conduit foreign income 352

715-875 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule 352

715-880 No CFI for leaving entity 352

Subdivision 715-V—Entity ceasing to be exempt from income tax on becoming subsidiary member of consolidated group 353

715-900 Transition time taken to be just before joining time 353

Subdivision 715-W—Effect on arrangements where CGT roll-overs are obtained 353

715-910 Effect on restructures—original entity becomes a subsidiary member 354

715-915 Effect on restructures—original entity is a head company 355

715-920 Effect on restructures—original entity is a head company that becomes a subsidiary member of another group 355

715-925 Effect on restructures—original entity ceases being a subsidiary member 357

Division 716—Miscellaneous special rules 358

Subdivision 716-A—Assessable income and deductions spread over several membership or non-membership periods 358

Guide to Subdivision 716-A 358

716-1 What this Division is about 358

Operative provisions 359

716-15 Assessable income spread over 2 or more income years 359

716-25 Deductions spread over 2 or more income years 361

716-70 Capital expenditure that is fully deductible in one income year 364

Assessable income and deductions arising from share of net income of a partnership or trust, or from share of partnership loss 366

716-75 Application 366

716-80 Head company’s assessable income and deductions 366

716-85 Entity’s assessable income and deductions for a non-membership period 368

716-90 Entity’s share of assessable income or deductions of partnership or trust 369

716-95 Special rule if not all partnership or trust’s assessable income or deductions taken into account in working out amount 369

716-100 Spreading period 370

Subdivision 716-E—Tax cost setting for exploration and prospecting assets 370

716-300 Prime cost method of working out decline in value 370

Subdivision 716-G—Low-value and software development pools 371

Assets in joining entity’s low-value pool 372

716-330 Head company’s deductions for decline in value of assets in joining entity’s low-value pool 372

Entity leaving group with asset allocated to head company’s low-value pool 375

716-335 Entity leaving group with asset allocated to head company’s low-value pool 375

Depreciating assets arising from expenditure in joining entity’s software development pool 377

716-340 Depreciating assets arising from expenditure in joining entity’s software development pool 377

Software development pools if entity leaves consolidated group 380

716-345 Head company taken not to have incurred expenditure 380

Subdivision 716-S—Miscellaneous consequences of tax cost setting 380

716-400 Tax cost setting and bad debts 381

716-440 Membership interests in joining entity not subject to CGT under Division 855—foreign entity ceasing to hold interests 382

Subdivision 716-V—Research and Development 384

716-500 Head company bound by agreements binding on subsidiary members 384

716-505 History for entitlement to tax offset: joining entity 384

716-510 History for entitlement to tax offset: leaving entity 385

Subdivision 716-Z—Other 385

716-800 Allocating amounts to periods if head company and subsidiary member have different income years 386

716-850 Grossing up threshold amounts for periods of less than 365 days 386

716-855 Working out the cost base or reduced cost base of a pre-CGT asset after certain roll-overs 387

716-860 CGT event straddling joining or leaving time 388

Division 717—International tax rules 390

Subdivision 717-A—Foreign income tax offsets 390

717-1 What this Subdivision is about 390

Object 391

717-5 Object of this Subdivision 391

Foreign income tax on amounts in head company’s assessable income 391

717-10 Head company taken to be liable for subsidiary member’s foreign income tax 391

Subdivision 717-D—Transfer of certain surpluses under CFC provisions and former FIF and FLP provisions: entry rules 392

Guide to Subdivision 717-D 392

717-200 What this Subdivision is about 392

Object 392

717-205 Object of this Subdivision 392

Transfers 393

717-210 Attribution surpluses 393

717-220 FIF surpluses 393

717-227 Deferred attribution credits 395

Subdivision 717-E—Transfer of certain surpluses under CFC provisions and former FIF and FLP provisions: exit rules 395

Guide to Subdivision 717-E 395

717-235 What this Subdivision is about 395

Object 396

717-240 Object of this Subdivision 396

Transfers 396

717-245 Attribution surpluses 396

717-255 FIF surpluses 397

717-262 Deferred attribution credits 399

Subdivision 717-O—Offshore banking units 400

Guide to Subdivision 717-O 400

717-700 What this Subdivision is about 400

717-705 Object of this Subdivision 401

717-710 Head company treated as OBU 401

Division 719—MEC groups 402

Subdivision 719-A—Modified application of Part 3-90 to MEC groups 402

719-2 Modified application of Part 3-90 to MEC groups 402

Subdivision 719-B—MEC groups and their members 402

719-4 What this Subdivision is about 402

Basic concepts 404

719-5 What is a MEC group? 404

719-10 What is a potential MEC group? 407

719-15 What is an eligible tier-1 company? 410

719-20 What is a top company and a tier-1 company? 411

719-25 Head company, subsidiary members and members of a MEC group 413

719-30 Treating entities as wholly-owned subsidiaries by disregarding employee shares 413

719-35 Treating entities held through non-fixed trusts as wholly-owned subsidiaries 414

719-40 Special conversion event—potential MEC group 414

719-45 Application of sections 703-20 and 703-25 416

Choice to consolidate a potential MEC group 416

719-50 Eligible tier-1 companies may choose to consolidate a potential MEC group 416

719-55 When choice starts to have effect 418

Provisional head company 418

719-60 Appointment of provisional head company 418

719-65 Qualifications for the provisional head company of a MEC group 420

719-70 Income year of new provisional head company to be the same as that of former provisional head company 421

Head company 422

719-75 Head company 422

Notice of events affecting group 423

719-76 Notice of choice to consolidate 423

719-77 Notice in relation to new eligible tier-1 members etc. 424

719-78 Notice of special conversion event 425

719-79 Notice of appointment of provisional head company after formation of group 426

719-80 Notice of events affecting MEC group 426

Effects of change of head company 428

719-85 Application 428

719-90 New head company treated as substituted for old head company at all times before the transition time 428

719-95 No consequences of old head company becoming, and new head company ceasing to be, subsidiary member of the group 429

Subdivision 719-BA—Group conversions involving MEC groups 430

719-120 Application 430

719-125 Head company of new group retains history of head company of old group 431

719-130 Provisions of this Part not to apply to conversion 432

719-135 Provisions of this Part applying to conversion despite section 719-130 433

719-140 Other provisions of this Part not applying to conversion 433

Subdivision 719-C—MEC group cost setting rules: joining cases 434

Guide to Subdivision 719-C 434

719-150 What this Subdivision is about 434

Application and object 435

719-155 Object of this Subdivision 435

Modified application of tax cost setting rules for joining 435

719-160 Tax cost setting rules for joining have effect with modifications 435

719-165 Trading stock value and registered emissions unit value not set for assets of eligible tier-1 companies 436

719-170 Modified effect of subsections 705-175(1) and 705-185(1) 436

Subdivision 719-F—Losses 437

Guide to Subdivision 719-F 437

719-250 What this Subdivision is about 437

Maintaining the same ownership to be able to utilise loss 439

719-255 Special rules 439

719-260 Special test for utilising a loss because a company maintains the same owners 439

719-265 What is the test company? 441

719-270 Assumptions about the test company having made the loss for an income year 445

719-275 Assumptions about nothing happening to affect direct and indirect ownership of the test company 448

719-280 Assumptions about the test company failing to meet the conditions in section 165-12 450

Business continuity test and change of head company 451

719-285 Business continuity test and change of head company 451

Bundles of losses and their available fractions 451

719-300 Application 451

719-305 Subdivision 707-C affects utilisation of losses made by ongoing head company while it was head company 452

719-310 Adjustment of available fractions for bundles of losses previously transferred to ongoing head company 454

719-315 Further adjustment of available fractions for all bundles 454

719-320 Limit on utilising losses other than the prior group losses 455

719-325 Cancellation of all losses in a bundle 456

Subdivision 719-H—Imputation issues 457

719-425 Guide to Subdivision 719-H 457

Operative provisions 457

719-430 Transfer of franking account balance on cessation event 457

719-435 Distributions by subsidiary members of MEC group taken to be distributions by head company 458

Subdivision 719-I—Bad debts 459

Guide to Subdivision 719-I 459

719-450 What this Subdivision is about 459

Maintaining the same ownership to be able to deduct bad debt 459

719-455 Special test for deducting a bad debt because a company maintains the same owners 459

719-460 Assumptions about nothing happening to affect direct and indirect ownership of the test company 461

719-465 Assumptions about the test company failing to meet the conditions in section 165-123 462

Subdivision 719-J—MEC group cost setting rules: leaving cases 463

Guide to Subdivision 719-J 463

719-500 What this Subdivision is about 463

719-505 Application and object of this Subdivision 463

719-510 Modified operation of paragraphs 711-15(1)(b) and (c) 464

Subdivision 719-K—MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases 464

Guide to Subdivision 719-K 464

719-550 What this Subdivision is about 464

719-555 Application and object of this Subdivision 465

719-560 Pooled interests 465

719-565 Setting cost of reset interests 466

719-570 Cost setting amount 467

Subdivision 719-T—Interactions between this Part and other areas of the income tax law: special rules for MEC groups 468

How Subdivision 165-CC applies to MEC groups 469

719-700 Changeover times under section 165-115C or 165-115D 469

719-705 Additional changeover times for head company of MEC group 470

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to MEC groups 470

719-720 Alteration times under section 165-115L or 165-115M 470

719-725 Additional alteration times for head company of MEC group 471

719-730 Some alteration times only affect interests in top company 472

719-735 Some alteration times affect only pooled interests 473

719-740 Head company does not have relevant equity or debt interest in a loss company if widely held top company does not have such an interest 474

How indirect value shifting rules apply to a MEC group 474

719-755 Effect on MEC group cost setting rules if head company is losing entity or gaining entity for indirect value shift 474

Cancelling loss on realisation event for direct or indirect interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group 475

719-775 Cancellation of loss 475

719-780 Exception for pooled interests in eligible tier-1 companies 477

719-785 Exception for interests in top company 477

719-790 Exception for interests in entity leaving MEC group 477

719-795 Exception if loss attributable to certain matters 478

Division 721—Liability for payment of tax where head company fails to pay on time 479

Guide to Division 721 479

721-1 What this Division is about 479

Object 480

721-5 Object of this Division 480

When this Division operates 480

721-10 When this Division operates 480

Joint and several liability of contributing member 484

721-15 Head company and contributing members jointly and severally liable to pay group liability 484

721-17 Notice of joint and several liability for general interest charge 486

721-20 Limit on liability where group first comes into existence 486

Tax sharing agreements 486

721-25 When a group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement 486

721-30 TSA contributing members liable for contribution amounts 488

721-32 Notice of general interest charge liability under TSA 489

721-35 When a TSA contributing member has left the group clear of the group liability 490

721-40 TSA liability and group liability are linked 490

Chapter 3 — Specialist liability rules

Part 3-80 — Roll-overs applying to assets generally

Division 615 — Roll-overs for business restructures

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 615

615-1 What this Division is about

You can choose for transactions under a scheme to restructure a company’s or unit trust’s business to be tax neutral if, under the scheme:

you cease to own shares in the company or units in the trust; and

in exchange, you become the owner of new shares in another company.

Subdivision 615-A — Choosing to obtain roll-overs

Table of sections

615-5 Disposing of interests in one entity for shares in a company

You can choose to obtain a roll-over if:

(a) you are a *member of a company or a unit trust (the original entity); and

(b) you and at least one other entity (the exchanging members) own all the *shares or units in it; and

(c) under a *scheme for reorganising its affairs, the exchanging members *dispose of all their shares or units in it to a company (the interposed company) in exchange for shares in the interposed company (and nothing else); and

the requirements in Subdivision 615-B are satisfied.

Note 1: For paragraph (c), see section 124-20 if an exchanging member uses a share sale facility.

Note 2: After the completion of the scheme, later dealings between the interposed company and the original entity may be subject to the rules for consolidated groups (see Part 3-90).

You are taken to have chosen to obtain the roll-over if:

immediately before the completion time (see section 615-15), the original entity is the *head company of a consolidated group; and

immediately after the completion time, the interposed company is the head company of the group.

Note: The consolidated group continues in existence because of section 703-70.

615-10 Redeeming or cancelling interests in one entity for shares in a company

(1) You can choose to obtain a roll-over if you are a *member of a company or a unit trust (the original entity), and under a *scheme for reorganising its affairs:

(a) a company (the interposed company) *acquires one or more, but not all, of the *shares or units in the original entity; and

these are the first shares or units that the interposed company acquires in the original entity; and

(c) you and at least one other entity (the exchanging members) own all the remaining shares or units in the original entity; and

those remaining shares or units are redeemed or cancelled; and

each exchanging member receives shares (and nothing else) in the interposed company in return for their shares or units in the original entity being redeemed or cancelled;

and the requirements in Subdivision 615-B are satisfied.

Note: For paragraph (e), see section 124-20 if an exchanging member uses a share sale facility.

You are taken to have chosen to obtain the roll-over if:

immediately before the completion time (see section 615-15), the original entity is the *head company of a consolidated group; and

immediately after the completion time, the interposed company is the head company of the group.

Note: The consolidated group continues in existence because of section 703-70.

The original entity, or its trustee if it is a unit trust, can issue other *shares or units to the interposed company as part of the *scheme.

Note: Some of the interposed company’s shares or units in the original entity may be taken to be acquired before 20 September 1985: see section 615-65.

Subdivision 615-B — Further requirements for choosing to obtain roll-overs

Table of sections

615-15 Interposed company must own all the original interests

The interposed company must own all the *shares or units in the original entity immediately after the time (the completion time) all the exchanging members have had their shares or units in the original entity disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the *scheme.

615-20 Requirements relating to your interests in the original entity

(1) Immediately after the completion time, each exchanging member must own:

a whole number of *shares in the interposed company; and

a percentage of the shares in the interposed company that were issued to all the exchanging members that is equal to the percentage of the shares or units in the original entity that were:

owned by the member; and

disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the *scheme.

The following ratios must be equal:

the ratio of:

the *market value of each exchanging member’s *shares in the interposed company; to

the market value of the shares in the interposed company issued to all the exchanging members (worked out immediately after the completion time);

the ratio of:

the market value of that member’s shares or units in the original entity that were disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the *scheme; to

the market value of all the shares or units in the original entity that were disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the scheme (worked out immediately before the first disposal, redemption or cancellation).

Example 1: There are 100 shares in A Pty Ltd (the original entity), all having the same rights. B Pty Ltd (the interposed company) acquires all the shares in A by issuing each shareholder in A 10 shares in itself for each share they have in A. All shares in B have the same rights. Bill owned 15 shares in A and received 150 shares in B in exchange.

Example 2: There are 1,000 units in the A unit trust (the original entity), all having the same rights. 2 new units in A are issued to B Pty Ltd (the interposed company), and all other units in A are cancelled. Each unitholder in A is issued 10 shares in B for each 100 units they have in A. All shares in B have the same rights. Alison owned 200 units in A and received 20 shares in B in exchange.

Either:

you are an Australian resident at the time your *shares or units in the original entity are disposed of, redeemed or cancelled under the *scheme; or

if you are a foreign resident at that time:

your shares or units in the original entity were taxable Australian property immediately before that time; and

your shares in the interposed company are taxable Australian property immediately after the completion time.

615-25 Requirements relating to the interposed company

The *shares issued in the interposed company must not be *redeemable shares.

Each exchanging member who is issued *shares in the interposed company must own the shares from the time they are issued until at least the completion time.

Immediately after the completion time:

the exchanging members must own all the *shares in the interposed company; or

entities other than those members must own no more than 5 shares in the interposed company, and the *market value of those shares expressed as a percentage of the market value of all the shares in the interposed company must be such that it is reasonable to treat the exchanging members as owning all the shares.

615-30 Interposed company must make a particular choice

Unless subsection (2) applies, the interposed company must choose that section 615-65 applies.

The interposed company must choose that a consolidated group continues in existence at and after the completion time with the interposed company as its *head company, if:

(a) immediately before the completion time, the consolidated group consisted of the original entity as head company and one or more other members (the other group members); and

immediately after the completion time, the interposed company is the head company of a consolidatable group consisting only of itself and the other group members.

Note: Sections 703-65 to 703-80 deal with the effects of the choice for the consolidated group.

A choice under subsection (1) or (2) must be made:

within 2 months after the completion time, if the choice is under subsection (1); or

within 28 days after the completion time, if the choice is under subsection (2); or

within such further time as the Commissioner allows.

The choice cannot be revoked.

The way the interposed company prepares its income tax returns is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

615-35 ADI restructures—disregard certain preference shares

For the purposes of this Division, disregard any *shares in the original entity that can be disregarded under subsection 703-37(4) if:

(a) the interposed company is a non-operating holding company within the meaning of the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999; and

a restructure instrument under Part 4A of that Act is in force in relation to the interposed company; and

because of the restructure to which the instrument relates, an *ADI becomes a subsidiary (within the meaning of that Act) of the interposed company; and

the original entity is:

the ADI; or

part of an extended licensed entity (within the meaning of the prudential standards) that includes the ADI.

Subdivision 615-C — Consequences of roll-overs

Table of sections

615-40 CGT consequences

The consequences set out in Subdivision 124-A also apply to a roll-over under this Division as if that roll-over were a roll-over covered by Division 124 (about replacement-asset roll-overs).

Note: Those consequences generally involve:

disregarding a capital gain or capital loss you make from the disposal, redemption or cancellation of your shares or units in the original entity; and

working out the first element of the cost base of each of your new shares in the interposed entity by reference to the cost bases of your shares or units in the original entity.

615-45 Additional consequences—deferral of profit or loss

The additional consequences in sections 615-50 and 615-55 apply if:

under this Division:

you are taken to have chosen to obtain the roll-over; or

you otherwise choose to obtain the roll-over; and

if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies to you, you choose for these additional consequences to apply; and

some or all of your *shares or units in the original entity at the time immediately before they were:

disposed of as described in paragraph 615-5(1)(c); or

redeemed or cancelled as described in paragraph 615-10(1)(d);

had the character of being your trading stock or *revenue assets; and

the shares in the interposed company that you acquired in return for those shares or units have the same character.

Note 1: Apply this section separately for assets of each character.

Note 2: The CGT exemption for trading stock does not prevent you obtaining the roll-over (see section 615-60).

615-50 Trading stock

The amount included in your assessable income because of the disposal, redemption or cancellation of each of your *shares or units described in paragraph 615-45(c) that was your trading stock at the time mentioned in that paragraph is equal to:

if the share or unit had been your trading stock ever since the start of the income year that included that time—the total of:

its *value as trading stock at the start of the income year; and

the amount (if any) by which its cost had increased since the start of the income year; or

otherwise—its cost at that time.

For each of the *shares that you acquired as described in paragraph 615-45(d) that is your trading stock, you are taken to have paid:

For the purposes of Division 70 (about trading stock), you, the original entity and the interposed company are taken to have dealt with each other in the ordinary course of business and at *arm’s length for each of the transactions referred to in paragraph 615-5(1)(c) or 615-10(1)(d) or (e).

615-55 Revenue assets

For each of your *shares or units that:

is described in paragraph 615-45(c); and

was a revenue asset immediately before its disposal, redemption or cancellation;

your gross proceeds for that disposal, redemption or cancellation are taken to be the amount you would have needed to have received in order to have a nil profit and nil loss for that disposal, redemption or cancellation.

For the purpose of calculating any profit or loss on a future disposal, cessation of ownership, or other realisation of a *share that:

you acquired as described in paragraph 615-45(d); and

is a revenue asset;

you are taken to have paid the following for your acquisition of that share:

615-60 Disregard CGT exemption for trading stock

For the purposes of this Division, disregard section 118-25 (which gives a CGT exemption for trading stock).

Subdivision 615-D — Consequences for the interposed company

Table of sections

615-65 Consequences for the interposed company

This section applies if the interposed company so chooses under subsection 615-30(1).

A number of the *shares or units that the interposed company owns in the original entity (immediately after the completion time) are taken to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 if any of the original entity’s assets as at the completion time were acquired by it before that day.

Note: Generally, a capital gain or capital loss you make from a CGT asset that you acquired before 20 September 1985 can be disregarded: see Division 104.

That number (worked out as at the completion time) is the greatest possible whole number that (when expressed as a percentage of all the *shares or units) does not exceed:

the *market value of the original entity’s assets that it *acquired before 20 September 1985; less

its liabilities (if any) in respect of those assets;

expressed as a percentage of the market value of all the original entity’s assets less all of its liabilities.

(4) The first element of the *cost base of the interposed company’s *shares or units in the original entity that are not taken to have been *acquired before 20 September 1985 is:

the total of the cost bases (as at the completion time) of the original entity’s assets that it acquired on or after that day; less

its liabilities (if any) in respect of those assets.

The first element of the *reduced cost base of those shares or units is worked out similarly.

A liability of the original entity that is not a liability in respect of a specific asset or assets of the original entity is taken to be a liability in respect of all the assets of the original entity.

Note: An example is a bank overdraft.

If a liability is in respect of 2 or more assets, the proportion of the liability that is in respect of any one of those assets is equal to:

Division 620 — Assets of wound-up corporation passing to corporation with not significantly different ownership

Table of Subdivisions

620-A Corporations covered by Subdivision 124-I

Subdivision 620-A — Corporations covered by Subdivision 124-I

Guide to Subdivision 620-A

620-5 What this Subdivision is about

There are tax-neutral consequences of a body, that is incorporated under one law and ceases to exist, disposing of an asset to a company incorporated under another law, if the ownership of the company is not significantly different from the ownership of the body.

Table of sections

Application and object of this Subdivision

620-10 Application

620-15 Object

CGT consequences

620-20 Disregard body’s capital gains and losses from CGT assets

620-25 Cost base and pre-CGT status of CGT asset for company

Consequences for depreciating assets

620-30 Roll-over relief for balancing adjustment events

Consequences for trading stock

620-40 Body taken to have sold trading stock to company

Consequences for revenue assets

620-50 Body taken to have sold revenue assets to company

Application and object of this Subdivision

620-10 Application

This Subdivision applies to a body that is incorporated under one law and ceases to exist, and to a company incorporated under another law, if section 124-525 applies in relation to the body and the company.

Note: That section applies if the ownership of the company is not significantly different from the ownership of the body and rights relating to the body.

620-15 Object

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure tax-neutral consequences when the body ceases to hold an asset and also if the asset becomes held by the company.

CGT consequences

620-20 Disregard body’s capital gains and losses from CGT assets

This section applies if:

the body *disposes of a CGT asset to the company because the body ceases to exist; or

another CGT event happens to a CGT asset of the body because the body ceases to exist.

A *capital gain or a *capital loss the body makes from the CGT asset is disregarded.

620-25 Cost base and pre-CGT status of CGT asset for company

This section applies to a CGT asset if the body *disposes of it to the company because the body ceases to exist.

The first element of the CGT asset’s *cost base for the company is equal to the asset’s cost base for the body in connection with the *disposal.

The first element of the CGT asset’s *reduced cost base for the company is worked out similarly.

If the body *acquired the CGT asset before 20 September 1985, the company is taken to have acquired the CGT asset before that day.

Consequences for depreciating assets

620-30 Roll-over relief for balancing adjustment events

This section applies if:

there is a balancing adjustment event because the body disposes of a depreciating asset in an income year to the company because the body ceases to exist; and

the disposal involves a CGT event.

This Act applies as if:

there were roll-over relief under subsection 40-340(1) for the balancing adjustment event; and

the body were the transferor mentioned in that subsection and subsection 328-243(1A); and

the company were the transferee mentioned in that subsection and subsection 328-243(1A).

Note: Some effects of this are as follows:

the balancing adjustment event does not affect the body’s assessable income or deductions (see subsection 40-345(1));

the company can deduct for the decline in value of the asset on the same basis as the body did (see subsection 40-345(2));

Division 45 (Disposal of leases and leased plant) applies to the company as if it had done the things the body did (see subsection 40-350(1)).

Disregard paragraph 328-243(1A)(c) in determining whether subsection 328-243(1A) applies.

Consequences for trading stock

620-40 Body taken to have sold trading stock to company

This subsection applies to each item of trading stock that the body disposes of to the company because the body ceases to exist.

The body is taken to have sold, and the company is taken to have bought, the item (in the ordinary course of business and dealing with each other at *arm’s length), at the time of the disposal (or just before that time if the disposal occurred when the body ceased to exist), for:

the *cost of the item for the body; or

if the body held the item as trading stock at the start of the income year, the *value of the item for the body then.

The company is taken to have held the item as trading stock when it bought the item.

Consequences for revenue assets

620-50 Body taken to have sold revenue assets to company

Disposal

Subsections (2) and (3) apply to a CGT asset:

that the body *disposes of to the company because the body ceases to exist; and

that is a revenue asset of the body just before the disposal.

Note: Trading stock and depreciating assets are not revenue assets. See section 977-50.

The body is taken to have disposed of the revenue asset to the company for an amount such that the body would not make a profit or a loss on the disposal.

For the purpose of calculating any profit or loss on a future disposal of, cessation of owning, or other realisation of, the revenue asset, the company is taken to have paid the body that amount for the disposal of the revenue asset to the company.

Ceasing to own or other realising

Subsection (5) applies to a CGT asset:

that the body ceases to own, or otherwise realises, because the body ceases to exist; and

that is a revenue asset of the body just before the cessation or realisation.

Note: Trading stock and depreciating assets are not revenue assets. See section 977-50.

The body is taken to have disposed of the revenue asset for an amount such that the body would not make a profit or a loss on the disposal.

Part 3-90 — Consolidated groups

Division 700 — Guide and objects

Table of sections

Guide

700-1 What this Part is about

700-5 Overview of this Part

Objects

700-10 Objects of this Part

Guide

700-1 What this Part is about

This Part allows certain groups of entities to be treated as single entities for income tax purposes.

Following a choice to consolidate, subsidiary members are treated as part of the head company of the group rather than as separate income tax identities. The head company inherits their income tax history when they become subsidiary members of the group. On ceasing to be subsidiary members, they take with them an income tax history that recognises that they are different from when they became subsidiary members.

This is supported by rules that:

set the cost for income tax purposes of assets that subsidiary members bring into the group; and

determine the income tax history that is taken into account when entities become, or cease to be, subsidiary members of the group; and

deal with the transfer of tax attributes such as losses and franking credits to the head company when entities become subsidiary members of the group.

700-5 Overview of this Part

The single entity rule determines how the income tax liability of a consolidated group will be ascertained. The basic principle is contained in the Core Rules in Division 701.

Essentially, a consolidated group consists of an Australian resident head company and all of its Australian resident wholly-owned subsidiaries (which may be companies, trusts or partnerships). Special rules apply to foreign-owned groups with no single Australian resident head company.

An eligible wholly-owned group becomes a consolidated group after notice of a choice to consolidate is given to the Commissioner.

This Part also contains rules which set the cost for income tax purposes of assets of entities when they become subsidiary members of a consolidated group and of membership interests in those entities when they cease to be subsidiary members of the group.

Certain tax attributes (such as losses and franking credits) of entities that become subsidiary members of a consolidated group are transferred under this Part to the head company of the group. These tax attributes remain with the group after an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member.

Objects

700-10 Objects of this Part

The objects of this Part are:

to prevent double taxation of the same economic gain realised by a consolidated group; and

to prevent a double tax benefit being obtained from an economic loss realised by a consolidated group; and

to provide a systematic solution to the prevention of such double taxation and double tax benefits that will:

reduce the cost of complying with this Act; and

improve business efficiency by removing complexities and promoting simplicity in the taxation of wholly-owned groups.

Division 701 — Core rules

Table of sections

Common rule

701-1 Single entity rule

Head company rules

701-5 Entry history rule

701-10 Cost to head company of assets of joining entity

701-15 Cost to head company of membership interests in entity that leaves group

701-20 Cost to head company of assets consisting of certain liabilities owed by entity that leaves group

701-25 Tax-neutral consequence for head company of ceasing to hold assets when entity leaves group

Entity rules

701-30 Where entity not subsidiary member for whole of income year

701-35 Tax-neutral consequence for entity of ceasing to hold assets when it joins group

701-40 Exit history rule

701-45 Cost of assets consisting of liabilities owed to entity by members of the group

701-50 Cost of certain membership interests of which entity becomes holder on leaving group

Supporting provisions

701-55 Setting the tax cost of an asset

701-56 Application of subsection 701-55(6)

701-58 Effect of setting the tax cost of an asset that the head company does not hold under the single entity rule

701-60 Tax cost setting amount

701-60A Tax cost setting amount for asset emerging when entity leaves group

701-61 Assets in relation to Division 230 financial arrangement—head company’s assessable income or deduction

701-63 Right to future income and WIP amount asset

701-65 Net income and losses for trusts and partnerships

701-67 Assets in this Part are CGT assets, etc.

Exceptions

701-70 Adjustments to taxable income where identities of parties to arrangement merge on joining group

701-75 Adjustments to taxable income where identities of parties to arrangement re-emerge on leaving group

701-80 Accelerated depreciation

701-85 Other exceptions etc. to the rules

Common rule

701-1 Single entity rule

If an entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group for any period, it and any other subsidiary member of the group are taken for the purposes covered by subsections (2) and (3) to be parts of the *head company of the group, rather than separate entities, during that period.

Head company core purposes

(2) The purposes covered by this subsection (the head company core purposes) are:

working out the amount of the *head company’s liability (if any) for income tax calculated by reference to any income year in which any of the period occurs or any later income year; and

working out the amount of the head company’s loss (if any) of a particular *sort for any such income year.

Note: The single entity rule would affect the head company’s income tax liability calculated by reference to income years after the entity ceased to be a member of the group if, for example, assets that the entity held when it became a subsidiary member remained with the head company after the entity ceased to be a subsidiary member.

Entity core purposes

(3) The purposes covered by this subsection (the entity core purposes) are:

working out the amount of the entity’s liability (if any) for income tax calculated by reference to any income year in which any of the period occurs or any later income year; and

working out the amount of the entity’s loss (if any) of a particular *sort for any such income year.

Note: An assessment of the entity’s liability calculated by reference to income tax for a period when it was not a subsidiary member of the group may be made, and that tax recovered from it, even while it is a subsidiary member.

What is a sort of loss?

(4) Each of these paragraphs identifies a sort of loss:

*tax loss;

film loss;

net capital loss.

This subsection lists all the sorts of loss.

Head company rules

701-5 Entry history rule

For the head company core purposes in relation to the period after the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group, everything that happened in relation to it before it became a subsidiary member is taken to have happened in relation to the *head company.

Note 1: Other provisions of this Part may affect the tax history that is inherited (e.g. asset cost base history is affected by section 701-10 and tax loss history is affected by Division 707).

Note 3: Section 165-212E overrides this rule for the purposes of the business continuity test.

701-10 Cost to head company of assets of joining entity

This section has effect for the head company core purposes when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

Assets to which section applies

This section applies in relation to each asset that would be an asset of the entity at the time it becomes a *subsidiary member of the group, assuming that subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) did not apply.

Note: See subsection 705-35(3) for the treatment of a goodwill asset resulting from the head company’s ownership and control of the joining entity.

Object

The object of this section (and Division 705 which relates to it) is to recognise the cost to the *head company of such assets as an amount reflecting the group’s cost of acquiring the entity.

Setting tax cost of assets

Each asset’s tax cost is set at the time the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at the asset’s tax cost setting amount.

Multiple setting of tax cost for same trading stock or registered emissions unit

However, if:

the asset is trading stock or a registered emissions unit; and

(b) the asset’s *tax cost is set by this section at more than one time (each of which is a setting time) for the same income year;

then, except where subsection (6) applies, only the amount at which the tax cost is set at the last of the setting times is to be taken into account.

If:

the *head company’s terminating value for the asset; or

the *value of the asset at the start of the income year;

is required to be worked out for one or more occasions when an entity (whether or not the same entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group in the income year, then the amount at which the asset’s tax cost is set by this section at a particular setting time is only taken into account in working out the head company’s terminating value for a particular occasion if:

the setting time occurs before the occasion; and

there is no intervening setting time or occasion.

701-15 Cost to head company of membership interests in entity that leaves group

If the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the head company core purposes, so far as they relate to the income year in which the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member or any later income year.

Note: This section could have effect, for example, if an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group because:

it ceases to satisfy the requirements to be a subsidiary member; or

the head company ceases to satisfy the requirements to be a head company (thereby bringing the group to an end).

Object

The object of this section is to preserve the alignment of the *head company’s costs for *membership interests in each entity and its assets by recognising, when an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, the cost of those interests as an amount equal to the cost of the entity’s assets at that time reduced by the amount of its liabilities.

Note: The head company’s costs for membership interests in entities was aligned with the costs of their assets when the entities became subsidiary members of the group.

Setting tax cost of membership interests

For each *membership interest that the *head company of the group holds in an entity that ceases to be a *subsidiary member, the interest’s tax cost is set just before the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member at the interest’s tax cost setting amount.

Note 1: The membership interests would include those that are actually held by subsidiary members of the group, but which are treated as those of the head company under the single entity rule.

Note 2: If the entity is a partnership, Subdivision 713-E sets the tax cost of interests in partnership assets, rather than membership interests in the partnership.

701-20 Cost to head company of assets consisting of certain liabilities owed by entity that leaves group

If the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the head company core purposes, so far as they relate to the income year in which the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member or any later income year.

Assets to which section applies

This section applies in relation to each asset, consisting of a liability owed by the entity, that becomes an asset of the *head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity when it ceases to be a *subsidiary member. This is a liability that, ignoring that subsection, is owed to a *member of the group.

Object

The object of this section is to set a cost for the asset to enable income tax consequences for the *head company in respect of the asset to be determined.

Setting tax cost of assets

The asset’s tax cost is set at the time the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group at the asset’s tax cost setting amount.

Note: If the entity is a partnership, Subdivision 713-E sets the tax cost of assets consisting of a partner’s share of a liability owed by the partnership to a member of the group.

701-25 Tax-neutral consequence for head company of ceasing to hold assets when entity leaves group

If the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the head company core purposes, so far as they relate to the income year in which the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member or any later income year.

Assets to which section applies

This section applies in relation to an asset if:

either:

the asset is trading stock of the *head company; or

the asset is a registered emissions unit and an asset of the head company; and

the asset becomes an asset of the entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity when it ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group; and

the asset is not again an asset of the head company at or before the end of the income year.

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that there is no income tax consequence for the *head company in respect of the asset.

Note: In the case of assets other than trading stock or registered emissions units, the fact that the head company ceases to hold them when the single entity rules ceases to apply to them would not constitute a disposal or other event having tax consequences for the head company.

Setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount

If subparagraph (2)(a)(i) applies, the asset is taken to be trading stock of the *head company at the end of the income year (but not at the start of the next income year) and its *value at that time is taken to be equal to:

if the asset was trading stock of the head company at the start of the income year (including as a result of its tax cost being set)—the asset’s value at that time; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply and the asset is *live stock that was acquired by natural increase—the *cost of the asset; or

in any other case—the amount of the outgoing incurred by the head company in connection with the acquisition of the asset;

increased by the amount of any outgoing forming part of the cost of the asset that was incurred by the head company during its current holding of the asset.

Setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount

Note: As a consequence of fixing the trading stock’s value at the end of the income year under this subsection, no election would be available under section 70-45 to value the trading stock at that time.

If subparagraph (2)(a)(ii) applies, the asset is taken to be an asset of the *head company at the end of the income year (but not at the start of the next income year) and the head company’s *value for the asset at that time is taken to be equal to:

if the asset was *held by the head company at the start of the income year—the value of the asset at the start of the income year; or

otherwise—the expenditure incurred by the head company in becoming the holder of the asset.

Entity rules

701-30 Where entity not subsidiary member for whole of income year

Object

The object of this section is to provide for a method of working out how the entity core rules apply to the entity for periods in the income year when the entity is not part of the group. The method involves treating each period separately with no netting off between them.

When section has effect

This section has effect for the entity core purposes if:

the entity is a *subsidiary member of the group for some but not all of an income year; and

(b) there are one or more periods in the income year (each of which is a non-membership period) during which the entity is not a subsidiary member of any *consolidated group.

Tax position of each non-membership period to be worked out

(3) For every non-membership period, work out the entity’s taxable income (if any) for the period, the income tax (if any) payable on that taxable income and the entity’s loss (if any) (a non-membership period loss) of each *sort for the period. Work them out:

as if the start and end of the period were the start and end of the income year; and

ignoring the operation of this section in relation to each other non-membership period (if any); and

so that each relevant item is either:

allocated to only one of the non-membership periods or to a period that is all or part of the rest of the income year; or

apportioned among such periods (for example, by Subdivision 716-A (see note to this subsection)).

Note: Other provisions of this Part are to be applied in working out the taxable income or loss, for example:

• section 701-40 (Exit history rule); and

• Subdivision 716-A (about assessable income and deductions spread over several membership or non-membership periods); and

• section 716-850 (about grossing up threshold amounts for periods of less than 365 days).

Subdivision 716 also affects the tax position of the head company of a group of which the entity has been a subsidiary member for some but not all of the income year.

For the purposes of working out the entity’s taxable income (if any) for the non-membership period, determine:

whether the entity can *utilise a loss of any *sort transferred to the entity in the period; and

if the period started at the start of the income year—whether the entity can utilise a loss of any sort:

made by the entity, without a transfer, for an earlier income year; or

transferred to the entity in an earlier income year;

as if the time just after the end of the period were the end of the income year and the entity carried on at that time the same business that it carried on just before that time. Paragraph (3)(a) has effect subject to this subsection.

Income tax for the financial year

Note: This means that things that happen in relation to the entity at the time it becomes a subsidiary member of the group are taken into account in determining whether the entity can utilise such a loss to affect its taxable income for the non-membership period.

The entity’s income tax (if any) for the financial year concerned is the total of every amount of income tax worked out for the entity under subsection (3).

Taxable income for the income year

The entity’s taxable income for the income year is the total of every amount of taxable income worked out for the entity under subsection (3).

The entity’s income tax worked out under subsection (4) is taken to be payable on the entity’s taxable income for the income year worked out under subsection (5), even if the amount of the tax differs from the amount that would be worked out by reference to that taxable income apart from subsection (5).

Loss for the income year

The entity has a loss of a particular *sort for the income year if and only if it has a non-membership period loss of that sort for the non-membership period (if any) ending at the end of the income year. The amount of the loss for the income year is the amount of the non-membership period loss.

Utilisation and transfer of non-membership period loss

However, the provisions of this Act relating to transfer or *utilisation of a loss of any *sort have effect in relation to a non-membership period loss of that sort for any non-membership period as if the non-membership period loss were the entity’s loss for an income year that:

started at the start of the period; and

ended at the end of the period.

Subsection (8) has effect not only for the entity core purposes, but also (despite subsection (2)) for other purposes.

Excess franking deficit tax offset for the income year

(10) For the purposes of applying section 205-70 in relation to an income year after the income year (the current income year) to which this section applies, the entity has an excess mentioned in paragraph 205-70(1)(c) (about excess franking deficit tax offsets) for the current income year only if it has such an excess for the non-membership period (if any) ending at the end of the current income year. The amount of the excess for the current income year is the amount of the excess for the non-membership period.

701-35 Tax-neutral consequence for entity of ceasing to hold assets when it joins group

When the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the entity core purposes.

Assets to which section applies

This section applies in relation to an asset if:

the asset is trading stock of the entity just before it becomes a *subsidiary member of the group; or

the asset is:

a registered emissions unit; and

an asset of the entity;

just before it becomes a subsidiary member of the group.

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that there is no income tax consequence for the entity in respect of the asset.

Note: In the case of assets other than trading stock or registered emissions units, the fact that the entity ceases to hold them when the single entity rule begins to apply to them would not constitute a disposal or other event having tax consequences for the entity.

Setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount

If paragraph (2)(a) applies, the *value of the trading stock at the end of the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, of the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member is taken to be equal to:

if the asset was trading stock of the entity at the start of the income year—the asset’s value at that time; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply and the asset is *live stock that was acquired by natural increase—the *cost of the asset; or

in any other case—the amount of the outgoing incurred by the entity in connection with the acquisition of the asset;

increased by the amount of any outgoing forming part of the cost of the asset that was incurred by the entity during its current holding of the asset.

Setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount

Note: As a consequence of fixing the trading stock’s value at the end of the income year under this subsection, no election would be available under section 70-45 to value the trading stock at that time.

If paragraph (2)(b) applies, the *value of the registered emissions unit at the end of the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, of the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member is taken to be equal to:

if the unit was *held by the joining entity at the start of the income year—the value of the unit at the start of the income year; or

otherwise—the expenditure incurred by the joining entity in becoming the holder of the unit.

Note: See also section 701A-7 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

701-40 Exit history rule

(1) If the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the entity core purposes, so far as they relate to any thing covered by subsection (2) (an eligible asset etc.) after it becomes that of the entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity.

Assets, liabilities and businesses covered

This subsection covers the following:

any asset;

any liability or other thing that, in accordance with *accounting principles, is a liability;

any business;

that becomes that of the entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity when it ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group.

Head company history inherited

Everything that happened in relation to any eligible asset etc. while it was that of the *head company, including because of any application of section 701-5 (the entry history rule), is taken to have happened in relation to it as if it had been an eligible asset etc. of the entity.

Note 1: If the eligible asset etc. was brought into the group when an entity became a subsidiary member, section 701-5 (the entry history rule) would have had the effect that things happening to the eligible asset etc. while it was that of the entity would be taken to have happened as if it was that of the head company. Such things will in turn be taken by this subsection to have happened in relation to the eligible asset etc. as if it were that of the entity that takes the asset out of the group.

Note 2: Other provisions of this Part may affect the tax history that is inherited (e.g. asset cost base history is affected by section 701-45).

701-45 Cost of assets consisting of liabilities owed to entity by members of the group

If the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, this section has effect for the entity core purposes, so far as they relate to the income year in which the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member or any later income year.

Assets to which section applies

This section applies in relation to an asset if:

it becomes an asset of the entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity when it ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group; and

the asset consists of a liability owed to the entity by a *member of the group.

Object

The object of this section is to set the cost of the asset to enable income tax consequences for the entity in respect of the asset to be determined.

Note: In the case of other assets, the fact that the entity inherits their history under section 701-40 when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group means that the assets would be treated as having the same cost as they would for the head company at that time. However, assets consisting of liabilities do not have such a history because they are only recognised when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member and the single entity rule ceases to apply.

Setting the asset’s tax cost

The asset’s tax cost is set at the time the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group at the asset’s tax cost setting amount.

Note 1: If section 701-30 (Where entity not subsidiary member for whole of income year) applies, the time the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member will be treated as the start of an income year.

Note 2: If the entity is a partnership, Subdivision 713-E sets the tax cost of a partner’s interest in an asset consisting of a liability that a member of the group owes to the partnership.

701-50 Cost of certain membership interests of which entity becomes holder on leaving group

If:

the entity and one or more other entities cease to be *subsidiary members of the group at the same time because of an event happening in relation to one of them; and

when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member, it holds an asset consisting of a *membership interest in any of the other entities;

this section has effect for the entity core purposes.

Object

The cost of any *membership interest that one of the entities holds in another is to be treated in the same way as membership interests held by the *head company. In both cases the object is to preserve the alignment of costs for membership interests and assets (that was established when each entity became a *subsidiary member) by recognising the cost of those interests, when it ceases to be a subsidiary member, as an amount equal to the cost of the entity’s assets at that time reduced by the amount of its liabilities.

Setting tax cost of membership interests

The asset’s tax cost is set just before the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group at the asset’s tax cost setting amount.

Note: If the asset consists of a membership interest in a partnership, Subdivision 713-E sets the tax cost of interests in partnership assets, rather than membership interests in the partnership.

Supporting provisions

701-55 Setting the tax cost of an asset

(1) This section states the meaning of the expression an asset’s tax cost is set at a particular time at the asset’s *tax cost setting amount.

Depreciating asset provisions

If any of Subdivisions 40-A to 40-D, sections 40-425 to 40-445 and Subdivisions 328-D and 355-E is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the provisions apply as if:

the asset were *acquired at the particular time for a payment equal to its tax cost setting amount; and

at that time the same method of working out the decline in value were chosen for the asset as applied to it just before that time; and

where just before that time the prime cost method applied for working out the asset’s decline in value and the asset’s tax cost setting amount does not exceed the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset—at that time an *effective life were chosen for the asset equal to the remainder of the effective life of the asset just before that time; and

where just before that time the prime cost method applied for working out the asset’s decline in value and the asset’s tax cost setting amount exceeds the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset—either:

the *head company were required to choose at that time an effective life for the asset in accordance with subsections 40-95(1) and (3), and any choice of an effective life determined by the Commissioner were limited to one in force at that time; or

an effective life for the asset were worked out under subsection 40-95(7), (8), (9) or (10) at that time; and

where neither paragraph (c) nor (d) applies—at that time an effective life were chosen for the asset equal to the asset’s effective life just before that time.

Trading stock provisions

If Division 70 (other than Subdivision 70-E) is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Division applies as if the asset were trading stock at the start of the income year in which the particular time occurs and its *value at that time were equal to its tax cost setting amount.

Registered emissions unit provisions

If Division 420 is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Division applies as if the asset were a registered emissions unit at the start of the income year in which the particular time occurs, and its *value at that time were equal to the asset’s tax cost setting amount.

Qualifying security provisions

(4) If Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Division applies as if the asset were acquired at the particular time for a payment equal to the asset’s *tax cost setting amount.

Capital gain and loss provisions

If Part 3-1 or 3-3 is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Part applies as if the asset’s *cost base or *reduced cost base were increased or reduced so that the cost base or reduced cost base at the particular time equals the asset’s tax cost setting amount.

Division 230 (financial arrangements)

If Division 230 is to apply in relation to the asset, the expression means that the Division applies as if the asset were acquired at the particular time for a payment equal to:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the asset’s tax cost setting amount; or

if the asset’s tax cost is set because an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, and Subdivision 230-C (fair value method), Subdivision 230-D (foreign exchange retranslation method) or Subdivision 230-F (reliance on financial reports method) is to apply in relation to the asset—the asset’s *Division 230 starting value at the particular time.

To avoid doubt, for the purposes of paragraph (5A)(b), determine the asset’s *Division 230 starting value by reference to the relevant standards (as mentioned in section 230-230, 230-280 or 230-420) that apply in relation to the *head company’s financial report for the income year in which the entity becomes a subsidiary member of the group.

WIP amount assets

If:

the asset’s tax cost is set because an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group at the particular time; and

the asset is a WIP amount asset;

the expression means that section 25-95 applies as if the *head company had paid a work in progress amount for the income year in which the particular time occurs equal to the tax cost setting amount of the asset.

Consumable stores

If:

the asset’s tax cost is set because an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group at the particular time; and

the asset is consumable stores;

the expression means that, for the purposes of section 8-1, the *head company of the group is taken to have incurred an outgoing at the particular time in acquiring the asset equal to the asset’s tax cost setting amount.

Other provisions

If any provision of this Act that is not mentioned above is to apply in relation to the asset by including an amount in assessable income, or by allowing an amount as a deduction, in a way that brings into account (directly or indirectly) any of the following amounts:

the cost of the asset;

outgoings incurred, or amounts paid, in respect of the asset;

expenditure in respect of the asset;

an amount of a similar kind in respect of the asset;

the expression means that the provision applies, for the purpose of determining the amount included in assessable income or the amount of the deduction, as if the cost, outgoing, expenditure or other amount had been incurred or paid to acquire the asset at the particular time for an amount equal to its tax cost setting amount.

Note 2: For specific clarifications of the operation of this subsection in relation to bad debts, see Subdivision 716-S.

701-56 Application of subsection 701-55(6)

(1) Subsection (2) applies in relation to each asset that would be an asset of an entity at the time (the joining time) it becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group, assuming that subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) did not apply.

Subsection (2) applies only to the extent necessary for the purposes of subsection 701-55(6) to determine whether a provision of this Act is to apply in relation to each of those assets on and after the joining time.

Subsection (2) applies despite section 701-5 (the entry history rule).

Treat the *head company as having acquired each of those assets at the joining time as part of acquiring the business of the joining entity as a going concern.

Certain depreciating assets etc.

Subsection 701-55(6) does not apply in relation to an asset if any of the following provisions are to apply in relation to the asset:

Subdivision 40-F (Primary production depreciating assets);

Subdivision 40-G (Capital expenditure of primary producers and other landholders);

Subdivision 40-H (Capital expenditure that is immediately deductible);

Subdivision 40-I (Capital expenditure that is deductible over time);

Subdivision 40-J (Capital expenditure for the establishment of trees in carbon sink forests);

Division 41 (Additional deduction for certain new business investment);

Division 43 (Deductions for capital works).

701-58 Effect of setting the tax cost of an asset that the head company does not hold under the single entity rule

This section applies if:

(a) the *tax cost of an asset was set at the time (the joining time) an entity became a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group, at the asset’s *tax cost setting amount; and

ignoring the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the entity held the asset at the joining time; and

(c) taking into account the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the *head company of the group did not hold the asset at the joining time.

Example: A debt owed by a member of the group to the joining entity at the joining time.

To avoid doubt, the asset’s tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) is not to be taken into account in applying the provisions mentioned in subsections 701-55(2), (3) (3A),, (4), (5), (5A), (5C), (5D) and (6) in relation to the asset at and after the joining time.

701-60 Tax cost setting amount

The asset’s tax cost setting amount is worked out using this table.

Note 1: The tax cost setting amount of certain interests in partnership assets is worked out under Subdivision 713-E.

Note 2: The tax cost setting amount of certain assets of a life insurance company is worked out under Subdivision 713-L.

701-60A Tax cost setting amount for asset emerging when entity leaves group

This section applies for the purpose of working out the tax cost setting amount of an asset if:

(a) an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the old group) at a time (the leaving time); and

(b) the asset’s tax cost is set under section 701-45 because it consists of a liability (the corresponding liability) owed to the leaving entity.

The tax cost setting amount is:

unless subsection (3) or (4) applies—the *market value of the asset at the leaving time; or

if subsection (3) applies—nil; or

if subsection (4) applies—the least of the following amounts:

the tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph (4)(c);

if the *head company of the old group was entitled to a deduction in respect of the asset for an income year ending on or before the leaving time—the tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph (4)(c) reduced by the amount of the deduction;

the market value of the asset at the leaving time.

This subsection applies if:

(a) the corresponding liability is not a debt; and

either:

at the time the corresponding liability arose, the entity to whom the corresponding liability was owed and the entity owing the corresponding liability were both *members of the old group; or

if subparagraph (i) does not apply—after the time the corresponding liability arose, a member of the old group *acquired the asset or started to have the corresponding liability.

This subsection applies if:

(a) the corresponding liability is not a debt; and

(b) at the time the corresponding liability arose, the entity to whom the corresponding liability was owed and the entity owing the corresponding liability were not both members of the old group; and

the tax cost of the asset was set under section 701-10 at the time an entity became a *subsidiary member of the old group, at the asset’s tax cost setting amount (whether or not section 701-58 applied in relation to the setting of that tax cost).

701-61 Assets in relation to Division 230 financial arrangement—head company’s assessable income or deduction

This section applies if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group; and

paragraph 701-55(5A)(b) applies in relation to one or more assets of the joining entity.

Work out if the total of the *Division 230 starting values for those assets exceeds or falls short of the total of their tax cost setting amounts.

If there is an excess, an amount equal to 25% of that excess is included in the *head company’s assessable income for:

the income year in which the particular time mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A) occurs; and

each of the 3 subsequent income years.

If there is a shortfall, the *head company is entitled to a deduction equal to 25% of that shortfall for:

the income year in which the particular time mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A) occurs; and

each of the 3 subsequent income years.

701-63 Right to future income and WIP amount asset

(5) A right to future income is a valuable right (including a contingent right) to receive an amount if:

the valuable right forms part of a contract or agreement; and

the *market value of the valuable right (taking into account all the obligations and conditions relating to the right) is greater than nil; and

the valuable right is neither a *Division 230 financial arrangement nor a part of a Division 230 financial arrangement; and

it is reasonable to expect that an amount attributable to the right will be included in the assessable income of any entity at a later time.

(6) WIP amount asset means an asset that is in respect of work (but not goods) that has been partially performed by a recipient mentioned in paragraph 25-95(3)(b) for a third entity but not yet completed to the stage where a recoverable debt has arisen in respect of the completion or partial completion of the work.

701-65 Net income and losses for trusts and partnerships

Net income of partnerships and trusts

If:

another provision of this Division applies for the purpose of:

working out the amount of the entity’s liability (if any) for income tax calculated by reference to an income year; or

working out the amount of the entity’s taxable income for an income year; and

the entity is a trust or partnership;

the provision instead applies in a corresponding way for the purpose of working out the amount of the entity’s net income, as defined in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, (if any) for the income year.

Partnership losses

Note: Subsection 701-30(3) requires non-membership periods mentioned in that subsection to be treated as the start and end of an income year. This section would therefore also apply to those periods.

If:

another provision of this Division applies for the purpose of working out the amount of the entity’s loss (if any) of a particular *sort for an income year; and

the entity is a partnership;

the provision instead applies in a corresponding way for the purpose of working out the amount of an entity’s partnership loss, as defined in section 90 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, (if any) for the income year.

Note: The provision applies normally to a trust, as it can have a loss of any sort worked out in the same way as a loss of the same sort for an entity of another kind.

701-67 Assets in this Part are CGT assets, etc.

This Part applies to an asset only if the asset is one or more of the following:

a CGT asset;

a revenue asset;

a depreciating asset;

trading stock;

a thing that is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

Exceptions

701-70 Adjustments to taxable income where identities of parties to arrangement merge on joining group

Section applies to certain arrangements

(1) This section applies for the head company core purposes and the entity core purposes if, just before the time (the joining time) when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group, an *arrangement is in force under which:

expenditure is to be, or has been, incurred in return for the doing of some thing; and

(b) the persons incurring the expenditure and *deriving the corresponding amount (each of which is a combining entity) are the entity and either:

another entity that became a subsidiary member at the same time; or

the *head company.

Note 1: If expenditure incurred under an arrangement consists of a payment of loan interest or a payment of a similar kind, the expenditure would be incurred in return for the making available or continued making available of the loan principal, or other amount of a similar kind, under the arrangement.

Note 2: If expenditure incurred under an arrangement consists of a payment of rent, a lease payment or a payment of a similar kind, the expenditure would be incurred in return for the making available or continued making available of the thing rented or leased, or other thing of a similar kind, under the arrangement.

Note 3: If expenditure incurred under an arrangement consists of a payment of an insurance premium or a payment of a similar kind, the expenditure would be incurred in return for the provision or continued provision of insurance against the risk concerned, or of a thing of a similar kind, under the arrangement.

Object

The object of this section is to align the income tax position of the combining entities at the joining time, because after that time they lose their separate tax identities under the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) and this would preserve any imbalance.

Adjustment for disproportionate deductibility

If the total of a combining entity’s deductions that are allowable for:

(a) the following income year (the joining adjustment year):

if the combining entity is the *head company and the joining time occurs at the start of an income year—the income year before that income year;

if the combining entity is the head company and subparagraph (i) does not apply—the income year in which the joining time occurs;

in any other case—the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time; and

all earlier income years;

is not equal to the amount worked out under subsection (4), then:

if the total is less—the entity is entitled to deduct the difference for the joining adjustment year; and

if it is more—the entity’s assessable income for the joining adjustment year includes the difference.

Pre-joining time proportion of total arrangement deductions

The amount is worked out using the formula:

where:

pre-joining time services proportion means the proportion of all things to be done under the arrangement in return for the incurring of the expenditure represented by those things that were done before the joining time.

total arrangement deductions means the total of the deductions that, ignoring this Part (other than subsection (7) of this section), would be allowable for expenditure incurred by the combining entity under the arrangement for all income years.

Adjustment for disproportionate assessability

If the total of the amounts included in a combining entity’s assessable income in respect of amounts *derived under the arrangement for the joining adjustment year and all earlier income years is not equal to the amount worked out under subsection (6):

if the total is less—the entity’s assessable income for the joining adjustment year includes the difference; and

if it is more—the entity is entitled to deduct the difference for the joining adjustment year.

Pre-joining time proportion of total arrangement assessable income

The amount is worked out using the formula:

where:

pre-joining time services proportion has the same meaning as in subsection (4).

total arrangement assessable income means the total of the amounts that, ignoring this Part (other than subsection (7) of this section), would be included in the combining entity’s assessable income for amounts *derived by it under the arrangement for all income years.

Modified application of section if combining entities previously members of same group

If the combining entities were *members of the same consolidated group (whether or not the group to which this section applies) on one or more previous occasions, this section applies in relation to the entities as if:

the only things to be done under the arrangement in return for the incurring of the expenditure were those things to be done after the entities ceased to be members of the same group on the previous occasion or the last of the previous occasions; and

the only deductions allowable to an entity for expenditure incurred by it under the arrangement, and the only amounts included in an entity’s assessable income in respect of amounts *derived under the arrangement, were:

if the entity was the *head company of the consolidated group of which the combining entities were members on the previous occasion or last of the previous occasions—those for the income year, in which the previous occasion or the last of the previous occasions occurred, that are attributable to the period after that occasion and those for all later income years; and

in any other case—those for the income year that started, or, if section 701-30 applies, the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to have started, when the entity ceased to be a *subsidiary member of the group on the previous occasion or the last of the previous occasions and those for all later income years.

701-75 Adjustments to taxable income where identities of parties to arrangement re-emerge on leaving group

Section applies to certain arrangements

(1) This section applies for the head company core purposes and the entity core purposes if the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group and, just before the time (the leaving time) when it does so, an *arrangement is in force under which:

expenditure is to be, or has been, incurred in return for the doing of some thing; and

(b) the persons incurring the expenditure and *deriving the corresponding amount (each of which is a separating entity) are the entity and either:

another entity that ceases to be a subsidiary member at the same time; or

the *head company.

Note: The notes to subsection 701-70(1) on the application of that subsection to expenditure under certain kinds of arrangements are equally applicable for the purposes of this subsection.

Object

The object of this section is to align the income tax position of the separating entities at the leaving time, because from that time they have separate tax identities as a result of the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1) ceasing to apply, and this may create an imbalance.

Adjustment for disproportionate deductibility

If the total of the deductions that are or will be allowable for expenditure incurred by the separating entity under the arrangement for:

(a) the following income year (the leaving adjustment year):

if the separating entity is the *head company—the income year in which the leaving time occurs;

in any other case—the income year that starts, or, if section 701-30 applies, the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to start, at the leaving time; and

all later income years;

is not equal to the amount worked out under subsection (4), the deductions are adjusted so that they do equal the amount.

Post-leaving time proportion of total arrangement deductions

The amount is worked out using the formula:

where:

post-leaving time services proportion means the proportion of all things to be done under the arrangement in return for the incurring of the expenditure represented by those things that are to be done after the leaving time.

total arrangement deductions means the total of the deductions that, ignoring this Part, would be allowable for expenditure incurred by the separating entity under the arrangement for all income years.

Adjustment for disproportionate assessability

If the total of the amounts that are or will be included in its assessable income in respect of amounts *derived under the arrangement for the leaving adjustment year and all later income years is not equal to the amount worked out under subsection (6), the amounts that are or will be included in its assessable income are adjusted so that they do equal the amount worked out under subsection (6).

Post-leaving time proportion of total arrangement assessable income

The amount is worked out using the formula:

where:

post-leaving time services proportion has the same meaning as in subsection (4).

total arrangement assessable income means the total of the amounts that, ignoring this Part, would be included in the separating entity’s assessable income for amounts *derived by it under the arrangement for all income years.

701-80 Accelerated depreciation

This section has effect for the head company core purposes when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

Object

The object of this section is to preserve any entitlement to accelerated depreciation for assets that become those of the *head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group. This is only to apply where the asset’s tax cost setting amount is not more than the entity’s terminating value for the asset.

Section applies to certain depreciating assets

This section applies if:

a depreciating asset to which Division 40 applies becomes that of the *head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group; and

(b) just before the entity became a subsidiary member, subsection 40-10(3) or 40-12(3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applied for the purpose of the entity working out the asset’s decline in value under Division 40; and

Note: The effect of those subsections was to preserve an entitlement to accelerated depreciation.

the tax cost setting amount that applies in relation to the asset for the purposes of section 701-10 when it becomes an asset of the head company is not more than the entity’s terminating value for the asset.

Preservation of accelerated depreciation

(4) While the asset is held by the *head company under subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the decline in its value under Division 40 is worked out by replacing the component in the formula in subsection 40-70(1) or 40-75(1) that includes the asset’s *effective life with the rate that would apply under subsection 42-160(1) or 42-165(1) of this Act if it had not been amended by the New Business Tax System (Capital Allowances) Act 2001.

701-85 Other exceptions etc. to the rules

The operation of each provision of this Division is subject to any provision of this Act that so requires, either expressly or impliedly.

Note: An example of such a provision is Division 707 (about the transfer of certain losses to the head company of a consolidated group). That Division modifies the effect that the inheritance of history rule in section 701-5 would otherwise have.

Division 703 — Consolidated groups and their members

Guide to Division 703

703-1 What this Division is about

A consolidated group and a consolidatable group each consists of a head company and all the companies, trusts and partnerships that:

are resident in Australia; and

are wholly-owned subsidiaries of the head company (either directly or through other companies, trusts and partnerships).

A consolidatable group becomes consolidated at a time chosen by the company that was the head company at the time.

Table of sections

Basic concepts

703-5 What is a consolidated group?

703-10 What is a consolidatable group?

703-15 Members of a consolidated group or consolidatable group

703-20 Certain entities that cannot be members of a consolidated group or consolidatable group

703-25 Australian residence requirements for trusts

703-30 When is one entity a wholly-owned subsidiary of another?

703-33 Transfer time for sale of shares in company

703-35 Treating entities as wholly-owned subsidiaries by disregarding employee shares

703-37 Disregarding certain preference shares following an ADI restructure

703-40 Treating entities held through non-fixed trusts as wholly-owned subsidiaries

703-45 Subsidiary members or nominees interposed between the head company and a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a consolidatable group

Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group

703-50 Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group

Consolidated group created when MEC group ceases to exist

703-55 Creating consolidated groups from certain MEC groups

Notice of events affecting consolidated group

703-58 Notice of choice to consolidate

703-60 Notice of events affecting consolidated group

Effects of choice to continue group after shelf company becomes new head company

703-65 Application

703-70 Consolidated group continues in existence with interposed company as head company and original entity as a subsidiary member

703-75 Interposed company treated as substituted for original entity at all times before the completion time

703-80 Effects on the original entity’s tax position

Basic concepts

703-5 What is a consolidated group?

(1) A consolidated group comes into existence:

on the day specified in a choice by a company under section 703-50 as the day on and after which a consolidatable group is taken to be consolidated; or

as described in section 703-55 (about creating a consolidated group from a MEC group).

Note: The day specified in a choice under section 703-50 as the day on and after which a consolidatable group is taken to be consolidated may be a day before the choice is made.

(2) The consolidated group continues to exist until the *head company of the group:

ceases to be a head company; or

becomes a member of a MEC group.

The consolidated group ceases to exist when one of those events happens to the head company.

Note: The group does not cease to exist in some cases where a shelf company is interposed between the head company and its former members: see subsection 615-30(2) and section 703-70.

(3) At any time while it is in existence, the consolidated group consists of the *head company and all of the *subsidiary members (if any) of the group at the time.

Note: A consolidated group continues to exist despite one or more entities ceasing to be subsidiary members of the group or becoming subsidiaries of the group, as long as the events described in subsection (2) do not happen to the head company. Thus a consolidated group may come to consist of a head company alone at various times.

703-10 What is a consolidatable group?

(1) A consolidatable group consists of:

a single *head company; and

all the *subsidiary members of the group.

(2) To avoid doubt, a consolidatable group cannot consist of a *head company alone.

703-15 Members of a consolidated group or consolidatable group

(1) An entity is a member of a *consolidated group or *consolidatable group while the entity is:

the *head company of the group; or

a *subsidiary member of the group.

At a particular time in an income year, an entity is:

(a) a head company if all the requirements in item 1 of the table are met in relation to the entity; or

(b) a subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *consolidatable group if all the requirements in item 2 of the table are met in relation to the entity:

703-20 Certain entities that cannot be members of a consolidated group or consolidatable group

(1) The object of this section is to specify certain entities that cannot be *members of a *consolidated group because of the way their income is treated for income tax purposes.

An entity of a kind specified in an item of the table cannot be a *member of a consolidated group or a consolidatable group at a time in an income year if the conditions specified in the item exist:

Note: A subsidiary of a life insurance company cannot be a member of a consolidated group or consolidatable group in certain circumstances: see section 713-510.

Item 8 of the table in subsection (2) of this section has effect despite section 713-130 (which enables a public trading trust to form a consolidated group).

703-25 Australian residence requirements for trusts

A trust described in an item of the table must meet the requirements specified in the item to be able to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a consolidatable group at a time in an income year:

703-30 When is one entity a wholly-owned subsidiary of another?

(1) One entity (the subsidiary entity) is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity (the holding entity) if all the *membership interests in the subsidiary entity are beneficially owned by:

the holding entity; or

one or more wholly-owned subsidiaries of the holding entity; or

the holding entity and one or more wholly-owned subsidiaries of the holding entity.

(2) An entity (other than the subsidiary entity) is a wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding entity if, and only if:

it is a wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding entity; or

it is a wholly-owned subsidiary of a wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding entity;

because of any other application or applications of this section.

Note: This Part also operates in some cases as if an entity were a wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity, even though the entity is not covered by the definition in this section because of:

ownership of shares under certain arrangements for employee shareholding (see section 703-35); or

ownership of certain preference shares following an ADI restructure (see section 703-37); or

interposed trusts that are not fixed trusts (see section 703-40).

(3) For the purposes of this section, one entity is not prevented from being the beneficial owner of a *membership interest in another entity merely because the first entity is or becomes:

(a) a Chapter 5 body corporate within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001; or

(b) an entity with a status under a *foreign law similar to the status of a Chapter 5 body corporate under the Corporations Act 2001.

703-33 Transfer time for sale of shares in company

This section applies if:

under a contract:

(i) a person (the seller) stops being entitled to be registered as the holder of a *share in a company at a time (the transfer time); and

(ii) another person (the buyer) becomes entitled to be registered as the holder of the share in the company at the transfer time; and

as a result of the contract, the seller stops being the beneficial owner of the share, and the buyer becomes the beneficial owner of the share; and

the seller and the buyer dealt with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the contract; and

the seller and the buyer were not *associates of one another at any time during the period:

starting when the contract was entered into; and

ending at the transfer time.

For the purposes of subsection 703-30(1):

the seller is taken to have stopped being the beneficial owner of the share at the transfer time; and

the buyer is taken to have become the beneficial owner of the share at the transfer time.

703-35 Treating entities as wholly-owned subsidiaries by disregarding employee shares

(1) The object of this section is to ensure that an entity (the first entity) is not prevented from being a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *consolidatable group just because there are minor holdings of *membership interests in an entity (the employee share scheme entity) issued under *arrangements for employee shareholdings. (It does not matter whether the employee share scheme entity is the first entity or is interposed between the first entity and a *member of the group.)

Note: A company that is prevented from being a subsidiary member of a consolidated group may be a head company (so there could be 2 consolidated or consolidatable groups, instead of the one that this section ensures exists).

(2) This Part (except Division 719) operates as if an entity that meets the requirement of subsection (3) at a particular time were a *wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity (the holding entity) at the time.

The entity must be one that would be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding entity at the time if the *membership interests in the entity that are to be disregarded under subsection (4) did not exist.

Disregard:

each of the *shares described in subsection (5) if the total number of those shares is not more than 1% of the number of ordinary shares in the company; and

each of the *membership interests in an entity described in subsection (5) if the total number of those membership interests is not more than 1% of the number of membership interests of that kind in the entity.

A *share or *membership interest in a company may be disregarded under subsection (4) if:

the entity who holds the beneficial interest in the share or membership interest acquired that beneficial interest:

under an employee share scheme; or

by exercising a right, a beneficial interest in which was acquired under an employee share scheme; and

paragraphs 83A-105(1)(a) and (b) and subsection 83A-105(2) apply to the beneficial interest acquired under the scheme; and

in the case of a membership interest—the interest is part of a stapled security.

703-37 Disregarding certain preference shares following an ADI restructure

(1) The object of this section is to ensure that, following an *ADI restructure to which Part 4A of the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999 applies, a body corporate is not prevented from being a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *consolidatable group just because the body (or another body corporate) has issued, or issues, certain preference *shares.

(2) This Part (except Division 719) operates as if a body corporate that meets the requirement of subsection (3) at a particular time were a *wholly-owned subsidiary of another body corporate (the holding body) at the time.

(3) The body corporate (the preference-share issuing body) must be one that would be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the holding body at the time if the *shares in the preference share-issuing body that are to be disregarded under subsection (4) did not exist.

Disregard a *share in the preference-share issuing body if:

(a) a restructure instrument under Part 4A of the Financial Sector (Transfer and Restructure) Act 1999 is in force in relation to a non-operating holding company within the meaning of that Act; and

because of the restructure to which the instrument relates, an *ADI becomes a subsidiary (within the meaning of that Act) of the non-operating holding company; and

the preference share-issuing body is:

the ADI; or

part of an extended licensed entity (within the meaning of the prudential standards) that includes the ADI; and

the shares are covered by subsection (5).

A *share is covered by this subsection if:

the share is a preference share; and

any *return on the share is fixed at the time of issue by reference to the amount subscribed; and

the share is not a *voting share; and

either:

(i) the share is Tier 1 capital (within the meaning of the *prudential standards); or

the share would be Tier 1 capital (within the meaning of the prudential standards) were it not for a limit, imposed by those standards, on the proportion of Tier 1 capital that can be made up of such shares.

Paragraph (5)(a) covers a preference share if it is issued:

by itself; or

in combination with one or more *schemes that are *related schemes in relation to a scheme under which a preference share is issued.

If subsection (5) has covered a *share, but would (apart from this subsection) stop covering the share from a particular time, then for a period of 180 days after that time the subsection is taken to continue to cover the share.

703-40 Treating entities held through non-fixed trusts as wholly-owned subsidiaries

(1) This section operates to ensure that an entity (the test entity) is not prevented from being a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *consolidatable group just because there is a trust that is not a *fixed trust interposed between the test entity and the *head company of the group.

This Part (except Division 719) operates as if the test entity were a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company if the test entity would have been a wholly-owned subsidiary of the head company had the interposed trust been a *fixed trust and all its objects been beneficiaries.

703-45 Subsidiary members or nominees interposed between the head company and a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or a consolidatable group

(1) This section describes, for the purposes of item 2, column 4 of the table in subsection 703-15(2), a set of requirements that must be met for an entity (the test entity) to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or a *consolidatable group at a particular time (the test time).

At the test time, each of the interposed entities must either:

be a *subsidiary member of the group; or

hold *membership interests in:

the test entity; or

a subsidiary member of the group interposed between the *head company of the group and the test entity;

only as a nominee of one or more entities each of which is a *member of the group.

Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group

703-50 Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group

A company may make a choice in writing that a consolidatable group is taken to be consolidated on and after a day that is specified in the choice and is after 30 June 2002, if the company was the *head company of the group on the day specified.

Note: The head company of the group must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing information about the group (see sections 703-58 and 703-60).

Choice is irrevocable

The choice cannot be revoked, and the specification of the day cannot be amended, after the choice is made under subsection (1).

The choice can be made no later than:

if the company is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which the specified day mentioned in subsection (1) occurs—the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

Choice has no effect after consolidated group ceases to exist

The choice does not have effect after the consolidated group that came into existence because of the choice ceases to exist. To avoid doubt, this subsection does not prevent the choice from:

being made by the company at a time when it is not a head company; or

having effect in relation to a time before the consolidated group ceased to exist, even if that time is before the choice is made.

Choice does not have effect if company is a member of a MEC group

(7) The choice does not have effect (and is taken not to have had effect) if, on the day specified, the company was a member of a *MEC group.

Consolidated group created when MEC group ceases to exist

703-55 Creating consolidated groups from certain MEC groups

A consolidated group comes into existence at the time a MEC group ceases to exist if:

the MEC group included only one eligible tier-1 company just before the time; and

the MEC group ceases to exist only because the company ceases to be an eligible tier-1 company; and

the company is a *head company as defined in section 703-15 at the time.

To avoid doubt, the consolidated group consists at the time of:

the company (as the *head company of the consolidated group); and

every entity (if any) that was a *subsidiary member of the MEC group just before that time (as a subsidiary member of the consolidated group).

Notice of events affecting consolidated group

703-58 Notice of choice to consolidate

If a consolidated group comes into existence on the day specified in a choice under section 703-50, the *head company of the group must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing the following information:

the identity of the head company;

the day specified in the choice on which the consolidatable group is taken to be consolidated;

the identity of each *subsidiary member of the group on that day;

(d) the identity of each entity that was a subsidiary member of the group on that day but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;

(e) the identity of each entity that was not a subsidiary member of the group on that day but was such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;

(f) the identity of each entity that became a subsidiary member of the group after that day but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given.

The notice must be given no later than:

if the *head company is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs—the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the head company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

703-60 Notice of events affecting consolidated group

Within 28 days of an event described in an item of the table, the entity described in column 3 of the item must give the Commissioner notice in the approved form of the event.

Despite subsection (1), if:

an event described in subsection (1) happens in relation to a consolidated group that comes into existence on the day specified in a choice under section 703-50; and

the event happens before the relevant notice is given to the Commissioner under section 703-58 (notice of choice to consolidate);

the *head company of the consolidated group must give the Commissioner notice in the approved form of the event.

The notice must be given no later than:

if the *head company is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs—the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the head company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

Despite subsection (1), if:

an event described in subsection (1) happens in relation to a consolidated group that comes into existence at a time under subsection 703-55(1) because a MEC group ceased to exist at that time; and

the MEC group came into existence under paragraph 719-5(1)(a) because a choice under section 719-50 is made after that time; and

the event happens before the relevant notice is given to the Commissioner under section 719-76 (notice of choice to consolidate);

the *head company of the consolidated group must give the Commissioner notice in the approved form of the event.

The notice must be given no later than:

if the *head company is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs—the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the head company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

Effects of choice to continue group after shelf company becomes new head company

703-65 Application

Sections 703-70 to 703-80 set out the effects if a company (the interposed company) chooses under subsection 615-30(2) that a *consolidated group is to continue in existence at and after the time referred to in that subsection as the completion time.

Note: The choice is one of the conditions for a compulsory roll-over under Division 615 on an exchange of shares in the head company of a consolidated group for shares in the interposed company.

703-70 Consolidated group continues in existence with interposed company as head company and original entity as a subsidiary member

(1) The *consolidated group is taken not to have ceased to exist under subsection 703-5(2) because the company referred to in subsection 615-30(2) as the original entity ceases to be the *head company of the group.

To avoid doubt, the interposed company is taken to have become the *head company of the consolidated group at the completion time, and the original entity is taken to have ceased to be the head company at that time.

Note: A further result is that the original entity is taken to have become a subsidiary member of the group at that time. Section 703-80 deals with the original entity’s tax position for the income year that includes the completion time.

(3) A provision of this Part that applies on an entity becoming a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group does not apply to an entity being taken to have become such a member as a result of this section, unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

Note: An example of the effect of this subsection is that there is no resetting under section 701-10 of the tax cost of assets of the original entity that become assets of the interposed company because of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

To avoid doubt, subsection (3) does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

703-75 Interposed company treated as substituted for original entity at all times before the completion time

Everything that happened in relation to the original entity before the completion time:

is taken to have happened in relation to the interposed company instead of in relation to the original entity; and

is taken to have happened in relation to the interposed company instead of what would (apart from this section) be taken to have happened in relation to the interposed company before that time;

just as if, at all times before the completion time:

the interposed company had been the original entity; and

the original entity had been the interposed company.

Note: This section treats the original entity and the interposed company as having in effect exchanged identities throughout the period before the completion time, but without affecting any of the original entity’s other attributes.

To avoid doubt, subsection (1) also covers everything that, immediately before the completion time, was taken, because of:

section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or

section 701-5 (Entry history rule); or

one or more previous applications of this section; or

section 719-90 (about the effects of a change of head company of a MEC group); or

section 719-125 (about the effects of a group conversion involving a MEC group);

to have happened in relation to the original entity.

Subsections (1) and (2) have effect:

for the head company core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the completion time; and

for the entity core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the completion time; and

for the purposes of determining the respective balances of the *franking accounts of the original entity and the interposed company at and after the completion time.

Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to:

section 701-40 (Exit history rule); and

a provision of this Act to which section 701-40 is subject because of section 701-85 (about exceptions to the core rules in Division 701).

Note: An example of provisions covered by paragraph (b) of this subsection is Subdivision 717-E (about transferring to a company leaving a consolidated group various surpluses under the CFC rules in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

703-80 Effects on the original entity’s tax position

In applying section 701-30 to the original entity for the income year that includes the completion time, disregard a non-membership period that starts before the completion time.

Because of section 703-75 and this section, the only tax payable by the original entity for the income year arises because of the application of section 701-30 to non-membership periods in the income year after the completion time.

Note 1: Section 701-30 is about working out an entity’s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group. Its application can also affect the entity’s tax position in later income years.

Note 2: Under section 703-75 the interposed company inherits the original entity’s tax position for the part of the income year that ends before the completion time, with the consequence that the original entity’s taxable income, income tax payable, and losses of any sort, for that part are each nil.

Division 705 — Tax cost setting amount for assets where entities become subsidiary members of consolidated groups

Guide to Division 705

705-1 What this Division is about

When an entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, the tax cost of its assets is set at a tax cost setting amount that is worked out in accordance with this Division.

Table of Subdivisions

705-A Basic case: a single entity joining an existing consolidated group

705-B Case of group formation

705-C Case where a consolidated group is acquired by another

705-D Where multiple entities are linked by membership interests

705-E Adjustments for errors etc.

Subdivision 705-A — Basic case: a single entity joining an existing consolidated group

Guide to Subdivision 705-A

705-5 What this Subdivision is about

When an entity becomes a subsidiary member of an existing consolidated group, the tax cost setting amount for its assets reflects the cost to the group of acquiring the entity.

Table of sections

Application and object

705-10 Application and object of this Subdivision

705-15 Cases where this Subdivision does not have effect

Tax cost setting amount for assets that joining entity brings into joined group

705-20 Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Subdivision

705-25 Tax cost setting amount for retained cost base assets

705-27 Reduction in tax cost setting amount that exceeds market value of certain retained cost base assets

705-30 What is the joining entity’s terminating value for an asset?

705-35 Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets

705-40 Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets held on revenue account etc.

705-45 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for accelerated depreciation assets

705-47 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for some privatised assets

705-55 Order of application of sections 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47

705-56 Modification for tax cost setting in relation to leases

705-57 Adjustment to tax cost setting amount where loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in joining entity

705-58 Assets and liabilities not set off against each other

705-59 Exception: treatment of linked assets and liabilities

How to work out the allocable cost amount

705-60 What is the joined group’s allocable cost amount for the joining entity?

705-62 No double counting of amounts in allocable cost amount

705-65 Cost of membership interests in the joining entity—step 1 in working out allocable cost amount

705-70 Liabilities of the joining entity—step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

705-75 Liabilities of the joining entity—reductions for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

705-76 Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets

705-80 Liabilities of the joining entity—reductions/increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

705-85 Liabilities of the joining entity—increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

705-90 Undistributed, taxed profits accruing to joined group before joining time—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount

705-93 If pre-joining time roll-over from foreign resident company or head company—step 3A in working out allocable cost amount

705-95 Pre-joining time distributions out of certain profits—step 4 in working out allocable cost amount

705-100 Losses accruing to joined group before joining time—step 5 in working out allocable cost amount

705-102 FRT disallowed amounts accruing to joined group before joining time—step 5A in working out allocable cost amount

705-105 Continuity of holding membership interests—steps 3 to 5A in working out allocable cost amount

705-110 If joining entity transfers a loss to the head company—step 6 in working out allocable cost amount

705-112 If joining entity transfers a FRT disallowed amount to the head company—step 6A in working out allocable cost amount

705-115 If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions—step 7 in working out allocable cost amount

How to work out a pre-CGT factor for assets of joining entity

705-125 Pre-CGT proportion for joining entity

Application and object

705-10 Application and object of this Subdivision

Application

(1) This Subdivision has effect, subject to section 705-15, for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) if an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the joined group) at a particular time (the joining time).

Object

The object of this Subdivision is to recognise the *head company’s cost of becoming the holder of the joining entity’s assets as an amount reflecting the group’s cost of acquiring the entity. That amount consists of the cost of the group’s *membership interests in the joining entity, increased by the joining entity’s liabilities and adjusted to take account of the joining entity’s retained profits, distributions of profits, deductions and losses.

The reason for recognising the *head company’s cost in this way is to align the costs of assets with the costs of *membership interests, and to allow for the preservation of this alignment until the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member, in order to:

prevent double taxation of gains and duplication of losses; and

remove the need to adjust costs of membership interests in response to transactions that shift value between them, as the required adjustments occur automatically.

Note: Under Division 711, the alignment is preserved by recognising the head company’s cost of membership interests in the entity if it ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group as the cost of its assets reduced by its liabilities.

705-15 Cases where this Subdivision does not have effect

This Subdivision does not have effect if any of the following exceptions applies:

the first exception is where the joining entity becomes a *member of the joined group because it is a member of that group at the time it comes into existence as a consolidated group;

Note: See Subdivision 705-B for rules about the treatment of assets if entities become members in circumstances covered by this exception.

the second exception is where all of the members of another consolidated group become members of the joined group as a result of the *acquisition of *membership interests in the *head company of the joining group;

Note: See Subdivision 705-C for rules about the treatment of assets if entities become members in circumstances covered by this exception.

the third exception is where:

the joining entity and one or more other entities become members of the joined group at the same time as a result of an event that happens in relation to one of them; and

the case is not covered by the second exception;

Note: See Subdivision 705-D for rules about the treatment of assets if entities become members in circumstances covered by this exception.

Tax cost setting amount for assets that joining entity brings into joined group

705-20 Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Subdivision

If this Subdivision has effect, for the purposes of item 1 in the table in section 701-60 (Tax cost setting amount) the tax cost setting amount for an asset whose tax cost is set at the time the joining entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the joined group is worked out under this Subdivision.

705-25 Tax cost setting amount for retained cost base assets

This section states what the tax cost setting amount is for a retained cost base asset.

Australian currency

If the retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (ba) of the definition of that expression and is not covered by another subsection of this section, its tax cost setting amount is equal to the amount of the Australian currency concerned.

Qualifying securities

(3) If the *retained cost base asset is a qualifying security (within the meaning of Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936), the *tax cost setting amount for the qualifying security is instead equal to the joining entity’s *terminating value for the asset.

Entitlements to pre-paid services etc.

If the retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (c) of the definition of that expression, its tax cost setting amount is equal to the amount of the deductions to which the *head company is entitled under section 701-5 (the entry history rule) in respect of the expenditure that gave rise to the entitlement.

Note: If the total amount to be treated as tax cost setting amounts for retained cost base assets exceeds the joined group’s allocable cost amount for the joining entity, the head company makes a capital gain equal to the excess: see CGT event L3.

Financial arrangements to which Subdivision 250-E applies

The tax cost setting amount is instead equal to the joining entity’s terminating value for the retained cost base asset if the asset is a financial arrangement to which Subdivision 250-E applies immediately before the joining time.

Rights to payments in respect of uncompleted work etc.

If the retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (d) or (e) of the definition of that expression, its tax cost setting amount is equal to the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset.

Retained cost base asset

(5) A retained cost base asset is:

Australian currency, other than trading stock or *collectables of the joining entity; or

(b) a right to receive a specified amount of such Australian currency, other than a right that is a marketable security within the meaning of section 70B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

Example: A debt or a bank deposit.

a unit in a cash management trust, if:

the redemption value of the unit is expressed in Australian dollars; and

the redemption value of the unit cannot increase; or

a right to have something done under an arrangement under which:

expenditure has been incurred in return for the doing of the thing; and

the thing is required or permitted to be done, or to cease being done, after the expenditure is incurred; or

a right to future income (other than a WIP amount asset); or

a depreciating asset that the joining entity *holds as a result of a balancing adjustment event mentioned in paragraph 417-30(2)(b).

Note 1: There are some additional retained cost base assets for a joining entity that is a life insurance company: see Subdivision 713-L. The tax cost setting amount for those assets is worked out under that Subdivision.

Note 2: The joining entity’s right to receive lease payments under a lease is treated as a retained cost base asset in some circumstances (see paragraph 705-56(3)(b)).

705-27 Reduction in tax cost setting amount that exceeds market value of certain retained cost base assets

If:

a retained cost base asset of the joining entity is a right to receive a specified amount of such Australian currency, covered by paragraph 705-25(5)(b); and

the *market value of the asset is less than the tax cost setting amount of the asset; and

the head company makes a *capital gain under CGT event L3 (disregarding this subsection) as a result of the joining entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the group;

reduce the tax cost setting amount of the asset by the amount of the gain (but not below zero).

Note: Reducing the tax cost setting amount of the asset will also reduce the amount of the capital gain (see paragraph 104-510(1)(b)). The amount of the capital gain might be reduced to nil.

If:

the requirements in subsection 701-58(1) (intra-group assets) are satisfied in relation to the asset; and

the joining entity has been entitled to a deduction for an income year ending on or before the joining time because of the *market value of the asset being less than the specified amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a); and

(c) the accounting liability that corresponds to the asset has not been reduced under subsection 705-75(2);

reduce the amount of the reduction under subsection (1) by the amount of the deduction (but not below zero).

If the tax cost setting amount of 2 or more of the joining entity’s assets could be reduced in accordance with subsections (1) and (2):

subsections (1) and (2) apply sequentially to each of those assets; and

the *head company may choose the sequence of assets to which subsections (1) and (2) apply; and

if the head company does not make such a choice—subsections (1) and (2) apply sequentially to each of those assets according to the time at which they were created, from earliest to latest.

Note: Once the amount of the capital gain is reduced to nil as a result of the application of subsections (1) and (2), no further reductions of tax cost setting amount can be made under those subsections.

A choice the *head company can make under paragraph (3)(b) must be made:

by the day the head company lodges its income tax return for the income year in which the CGT event happened; or

within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

The way the *head company prepares its income tax return is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

705-30 What is the joining entity’s terminating value for an asset?

Trading stock

(1) If an asset of the joining entity is *trading stock, the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset is:

if the asset was on hand at the start of the income year in which the joining time occurs (including because of the operation of Division 701)—its *value at that time; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply and the asset is *live stock that was acquired by natural increase—the *cost of the asset; or

in any other case—the amount of the outgoing incurred by the joining entity in connection with the acquisition of the asset;

increased by the amount of any outgoing forming part of the cost of the asset that is incurred by the joining entity during its current holding of the asset.

Registered emissions units

(1A) If an asset of the joining entity is a *registered emissions unit, the joining entity’s terminating value for the unit is equal to:

if the unit was *held by the joining entity at the start of the income year—the *value of the unit at the start of the income year; or

otherwise—the expenditure incurred by the joining entity in becoming the holder of the unit.

Qualifying securities

(2) If an asset of the joining entity is a qualifying security (within the meaning of Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that is not *trading stock, the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset is equal to the amount of consideration that the joining entity would need to receive, if it were to dispose of the asset just before the joining time, without an amount being assessable income of, or deductible to, the joining entity under section 159GS of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Depreciating assets

(3) If an asset of the joining entity is a *depreciating asset to which Division 40 applies, the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset is equal to the asset’s *adjustable value just before the joining time.

Financial arrangements to which Subdivision 250-E applies

(3A) If an asset of the joining entity is a *financial arrangement to which Subdivision 250-E applies, the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset is equal to the amount of consideration that the joining entity would need to receive, if it were to dispose of the asset just before the joining time, without an amount being assessable income of, or deductible to, the joining entity under Subdivision 250-E.

Division 230 financial arrangements

If an asset of the joining entity is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement, the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset is equal to the amount of consideration that the joining entity would need to receive, if it were to dispose of the asset just before the joining time, without an amount being assessable income of, or deductible to, the joining entity under Division 230.

Other CGT assets

(4) If an asset of the joining entity is a *CGT asset that is not covered by any of the above subsections, the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset is equal to the asset’s *cost base just before the joining time.

Other assets

(5) The joining entity’s terminating value for any other asset that it holds is the amount that would be the asset’s *cost base just before the joining time if it were an asset covered by subsection (4).

705-35 Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets

(1) For each asset of the joining entity (a reset cost base asset) that is not a *retained cost base asset, the asset’s *tax cost setting amount is worked out by:

first working out the joined group’s allocable cost amount for the joining entity in accordance with section 705-60; and

then reducing that amount by the total of the tax cost setting amounts for each retained cost base asset (but not below zero); and

finally, allocating the result to each of the joining entity’s reset cost base assets in proportion to their *market values.

Note 1: For an asset consisting of an entitlement to receive an amount that will be included in assessable income, the market value of the asset would take into account the tax payable on the amount.

Note 1A: If a set of linked assets and liabilities includes one or more reset cost base assets, section 705-59 may affect how this section applies. In particular, that section may exclude the application of paragraph 705-35(1)(b) to retained cost base assets in the set; this in turn may affect the application of CGT event L3.

Note 2: If there are no reset cost base assets, the result is instead treated as a capital loss of the head company: see CGT event L4.

Goodwill resulting from ownership and control of the joining entity

If, just after the joining time, the *head company has, because of its ownership and control of the joining entity, a goodwill asset associated with assets or businesses of the joined group:

for the head company core purposes, the asset’s tax cost is set at the joining time at its tax cost setting amount; and

for the purpose of doing so:

the asset is taken to be an asset of the joining entity that becomes an asset of the head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies; and

it is taken to have a *market value just before the joining time of an amount equal to its market value just after the joining time.

705-40 Tax cost setting amount for reset cost base assets held on revenue account etc.

The tax cost setting amount for a reset cost base asset that is trading stock, a depreciating asset, a registered emissions unit or a revenue asset must not exceed the greater of:

the asset’s *market value; and

the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset.

(2) If subsection (1) reduces the asset’s *tax cost setting amount, the amount of the reduction is allocated among the other reset cost base assets (including other *trading stock, *depreciating assets, *registered emissions units and *revenue assets), so as to increase their tax cost setting amounts, in accordance with the principles set out in subsection (3).

Note: If any of the amount of the reduction cannot be allocated, it is instead treated as a capital loss of the head company: see CGT event L8.

These are the principles:

the allocation is to be in proportion to the *market values of the assets;

the amount allocated to an item of trading stock, to a depreciating asset, to a registered emissions unit or to a revenue asset must not cause its tax cost setting amount to contravene subsection (1);

any of the amount that cannot be allocated is to be reallocated, to the maximum extent possible, among the remaining reset cost base assets by applying this subsection a further one or more times.

705-45 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for accelerated depreciation assets

If:

an asset of the joining entity is a depreciating asset to which Division 40 applies; and

(aa) just before the entity became a subsidiary member, subsection 40-10(3) or 40-12(3) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applied for the purposes of the joining entity working out the asset’s decline in value under Division 40; and

Note: The effect of those subsections was to preserve an entitlement to accelerated depreciation.

the asset’s tax cost setting amount would be greater than the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset; and

the *head company chooses to apply this section to the asset;

the asset’s tax cost setting amount is reduced so that it equals the terminating value.

Note 1: A consequence of the choice is that accelerated depreciation will apply to the asset: see section 701-80.

Note 2: Unlike the position with a reduction in tax cost setting amount under section 705-40, the amount of the reduction is not re-allocated among other assets.

If:

an asset of the joining entity is a depreciating asset to which Division 40 applies; and

any of the following has applied before the joining entity became a *subsidiary member for the purposes of working out the asset’s decline in value under Division 40:

section 40-82;

(ii) Subdivision 40-BA of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997;

Subdivision 40-BB of that Act; and

the asset’s tax cost setting amount would be greater than the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset;

the asset’s tax cost setting amount is reduced so that it equals the terminating value.

Note 1: The provisions referred to in paragraph (b) provide for an accelerated decline in value of certain assets.

Note 2: Unlike the position with a reduction in tax cost setting amount under section 705-40, the amount of the reduction is not re-allocated among other assets.

705-47 Reduction in tax cost setting amount for some privatised assets

Object

The object of this section is to limit appropriately the amount the *head company of the joined group can deduct for a depreciating asset it starts to *hold because the joining entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group, by reference to the direct or indirect effect of the following provisions on the amount the joining entity could deduct for the asset:

(a) former section 61A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about depreciation deductions for tax-exempt entities that become taxable);

(b) former Subdivision 57-I, and Subdivision 57-J, in Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about depreciation and capital allowance deductions);

Division 58 of this Act (as that Division applies to a transition time or acquisition time mentioned in that Division before, on or after 1 July 2001).

Reduction of tax cost setting amount

The tax cost setting amount for a depreciating asset is reduced to the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset if:

at a time before the joining entity became a *subsidiary member of the joined group, the asset was *held by an entity (whether the joining entity or another entity) that, at that time, was:

an *exempt Australian government agency; or

another entity whose ordinary income and statutory income were exempt from income tax; and

any of the following provisions directly or indirectly affected the amount the joining entity could deduct for the asset:

(i) former section 61A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about depreciation deductions for tax-exempt entities that become taxable);

(ii) former Subdivision 57-I, and Subdivision 57-J, in Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about depreciation and *capital allowance deductions);

Division 58 of this Act (as that Division applies to a transition time or acquisition time mentioned in that Division before, on or after 1 July 2001); and

(c) apart from this section, the tax cost setting amount for the asset would exceed the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset.

Note 1: Unlike the position with a reduction in tax cost setting amount under section 705-40, the amount of the reduction is not re-allocated among other assets.

Note 2: Former section 61A of, or former Subdivision 57-I or Subdivision 57-J in Schedule 2D to, the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or Division 58 of this Act may, for example, have indirectly affected the amount the joining entity could deduct for the asset because:

that section, Subdivision or Division affected the amount that could be deducted by an entity that held the asset before the joining entity and that effect extended to the joining entity because of a previous application of this subsection, roll-over relief or section 701-40 (the exit history rule); or

this subsection affected the amount the joining entity could deduct for the asset (either directly or because of section 701-40).

Note 3: Subsection (2) has effect even if, just before the joining time, the joining entity was:

an exempt Australian government agency; or

another entity whose ordinary income and statutory income were exempt from income tax.

This is because section 715-900 causes Division 58 to apply as if, just before the joining time, the joining entity’s ordinary income or statutory income had become assessable income to some extent.

Exception to reduction of tax cost setting amount

Subsection (2) does not apply if:

just before the joining time, the joining entity was neither an *exempt Australian government agency nor another entity whose ordinary income and statutory income were exempt from income tax; and

(b) a condition in subsection (4) or (5) is met in relation to the period (the pre-joining taxable period) between the last time for which the condition in paragraph (2)(a) is met and the joining time.

One condition for subsection (2) not to apply is that an amount was included in an entity’s assessable income, or an entity could deduct an amount, because of a balancing adjustment event that occurred for the asset during the pre-joining taxable period.

Another condition for subsection (2) not to apply is that:

(a) for at least some of the pre-joining taxable period, the asset was *held by the *head company of a *consolidated group (the earlier group) for the period (the earlier group period):

starting when (and because) an entity that had previously held the asset became a *subsidiary member of the earlier group or when the asset started to be held by that company because of an asset sale situation described in subsection 58-5(4) involving a *member of the earlier group as the purchaser mentioned in that subsection; and

ending when (and because) an entity ceased to be a subsidiary member of the earlier group or when the earlier group ceased to exist; and

(b) the company that was the head company of the earlier group just before the end of the earlier group period was not:

an associate of the head company of the joined group just before the joining time; or

the same company as the head company of the joined group; and

the earlier group period was at least 24 months.

705-55 Order of application of sections 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47

If more than one of sections 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47 apply:

the *head company may choose the order in which the sections are to apply; and

if it does not, the order is as follows:

first, section 705-40;

second, section 705-45;

third, section 705-47.

705-56 Modification for tax cost setting in relation to leases

Application of this section

(1) This section applies if, just before the joining time, the joining entity is the lessor or lessee under a lease of a *depreciating asset (the underlying asset) to which Division 40 applies.

Joining entity is lessor

If the joining entity is the lessor under the lease and *holds the underlying asset just before the joining time, subsection (5) applies, in relation to the joining entity, to the asset that is the joining entity’s right to receive lease payments.

Note: In this situation, the underlying asset will have its tax cost set at the joining time because it would be an asset of the joining entity at that time if the single entity rule did not apply (see section 701-10).

(3) If the joining entity is the lessor under the lease and does not *hold the underlying asset just before the joining time:

subsection (5) applies to the underlying asset in relation to the joining entity; and

for the purposes of this Division:

the joining entity’s right to receive lease payments is taken to be a retained cost base asset; and

the tax cost setting amount of that retained cost base asset is taken to be equal to its *market value just before the joining time.

Note: In this situation, the asset that is the joining entity’s right to receive lease payments will have its tax cost set at the joining time because it would be an asset of the joining entity at that time if the single entity rule did not apply (see section 701-10).

Joining entity is lessee

(4) If the joining entity is the lessee under the lease and does not *hold the underlying asset just before the joining time:

subsection (5) applies to the underlying asset in relation to the joining entity; and

(b) the liability that is the lessee’s obligation to make lease payments is not taken into account under subsection 705-70(1).

Note: If the joining entity is the lessee under the lease and holds the underlying asset just before the joining time:

(a) the underlying asset will have its tax cost set at the joining time because it would be an asset of the joining entity at that time if the single entity rule did not apply (see section 701-10); and

the liability that is the lessee’s obligation to make lease payments is taken into account under subsection 705-70(1).

Tax cost of certain assets set at nil

If this subsection applies to an asset, in relation to the joining entity:

(a) the asset is not taken into account under paragraph 705-35(1)(b) or (c); and

the asset’s tax cost setting amount is taken to be nil.

705-57 Adjustment to tax cost setting amount where loss of pre-CGT status of membership interests in joining entity

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that provisions that cause *membership interests in the joining entity to stop being *pre-CGT assets, with a resultant increase in their *cost base and *reduced cost base, do not increase tax cost setting amounts for trading stock, *depreciating assets, *registered emissions units or *revenue assets of the joining entity, where those amounts are above the joining entity’s *terminating values for the assets.

When section applies

This section applies if:

a *membership interest that a *member of the joined group holds in the joining entity at the joining time had previously stopped being a pre-CGT asset in the circumstances covered by any of subsections (3) to (5); and

(b) the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the membership interest just after it stopped being a pre-CGT asset exceeded (the excess being the loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amount) its cost base or reduced cost base just before it stopped being a pre-CGT asset; and

(c) an asset (a revenue etc. asset) that is *trading stock, a *depreciating asset, a *registered emissions unit or a *revenue asset becomes that of the *head company of the joined group because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies when the joining entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group; and

the revenue etc. asset’s tax cost setting amount (after any application of section 705-40, 705-45 or 705-47) exceeds the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset.

Loss of pre-CGT status because Division 149 etc. applied while interest held by member

(3) The first circumstance for the purpose of paragraph (2)(a) is where Division 149 of this Act, former subsection 160ZZS(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or Subdivision C of Division 20 of former Part IIIA of that Act applied to cause the *membership interest to stop being a *pre-CGT asset while the *member held the membership interest.

Loss of pre-CGT status because Division 149 etc. applied before current holding by member

The second circumstance for the purpose of paragraph (2)(a) is where:

either:

the *member *acquired the *membership interest directly from another entity; or

the member acquired the membership interest indirectly from another entity or from itself as a result of 2 or more acquisitions; and

(b) Division 149 of this Act, former subsection 160ZZS(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or Subdivision C of Division 20 of former Part IIIA of that Act applied to cause the membership interest to stop being a *pre-CGT asset while the other entity held the membership interest or while the member held the membership interest on the previous occasion; and

if subparagraph (a)(i) applies—at the time of the acquisition, the member *controlled (for value shifting purposes) the other entity, or vice versa, or a third entity controlled (for value shifting purposes) the member and the other entity; and

if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies—the same entity:

was a party to each acquisition and at the time of the acquisition controlled (for value shifting purposes) the other party; or

was a party to each acquisition and at the time of the acquisition was controlled (for value shifting purposes) by the other party; or

was not a party to each acquisition but, at the time of the acquisition, controlled (for value shifting purposes) the parties to the acquisition;

or any combination of subparagraphs (i) to (iii) occurred in relation to different acquisitions.

Loss of pre-CGT status because of acquisition from another entity

The third circumstance for the purpose of paragraph (2)(a) is where:

either:

the *member acquired the *membership interest after 16 May 2002 directly from another entity; or

the member acquired the membership interest indirectly from another entity or from itself as a result of 2 or more acquisitions, all of which took place after 16 May 2002; and

the membership interest stopped being a pre-CGT asset because of the acquisition from the other entity or from the member while the member held the membership interest on a previous occasion; and

if subparagraph (a)(i) applies—at the time of the acquisition, the member *controlled (for value shifting purposes) the other entity, or vice versa, or a third entity controlled (for value shifting purposes) the member and the other entity; and

if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies—the same entity:

was a party to each acquisition and at the time of the acquisition controlled (for value shifting purposes) the other parties; or

was a party to each acquisition and at the time of the acquisition was controlled (for value shifting purposes) by the other party; or

was not a party to each acquisition but, at the time of the acquisition, controlled (for value shifting purposes) the parties to the acquisition;

or any combination of subparagraphs (i) to (iii) occurred in relation to different acquisitions.

Reduction in revenue etc. asset’s tax cost setting amount

The revenue etc. asset’s tax cost setting amount (after any application of section 705-40, 705-45 or 705-47) is instead the amount that would apply if, in working out the step 1 amount in the table in section 705-60, the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the *membership interest were reduced by the sum of the loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amounts for the membership interest and all other membership interests that have loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amounts.

Limit on reduction

However, the reduction only takes place to the extent that it does not result in the asset’s tax cost setting amount being less than the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset.

Note: The reduction under this section is converted into a capital loss available over a period of 5 income years starting with the income year in which the joining time occurs: see CGT event L1.

705-58 Assets and liabilities not set off against each other

This Part applies separately to each asset and liability even if, in accordance with *accounting principles, they are required to be set off against each other.

This section has effect subject to section 705-59.

705-59 Exception: treatment of linked assets and liabilities

This section applies to each set of linked assets and liabilities that the joining entity has immediately before the joining time.

(2) One or more assets, and one or more liabilities, that an entity has constitute a set of linked assets and liabilities of the entity if, and only if, in accordance with the entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting:

the total of the one or more assets is to be set off against the total of the one or more liabilities in preparing statements of the entity’s financial position; and

the net amount after the set-off is to be recognised in those statements.

If the set consists only of one reset cost base asset for the purposes of section 705-35, and one or more liabilities:

(a) first, work out the total (the available amount) that, apart from this section and the accounting requirement referred to in subsection (2) of this section, would be taken into account under subsection 705-70(1) (about step 2 in working out the allocable cost amount) for the one or more liabilities; and

next, work out the consequences under this table.

Note: Paragraph 705-35(1)(c) allocates the allocable cost amount (as reduced by the tax cost setting amounts of retained cost base assets) among the joining entity’s reset cost base assets.

If the set consists only of one or more *retained cost base assets and one or more liabilities, this section does not affect their treatment.

Note: This is because the tax cost setting amount for a retained cost base asset is worked out without regard to the allocable cost amount.

In any other case:

first, work out the available amount under paragraph (3)(a); and

next, work out the consequences under this table.

Note 1: Paragraph 705-35(1)(b) reduces the allocable cost amount by the tax cost setting amounts of retained cost base assets. Item 4 of the table in this subsection excludes the application of paragraph 705-35(1)(b) to retained cost base assets in the set; this in turn may affect the application of CGT event L3.

Note 2: Paragraph 705-35(1)(c) then allocates the reduced allocable cost amount among the joining entity’s reset cost base assets.

In applying subsections (3), (4) and (5) of this section, disregard an asset covered by subsection 705-35(2) (assets that do not have a tax cost setting amount).

This section does not affect the application of sections 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47 (which adjust the tax cost setting amount for a reset cost base asset).

How to work out the allocable cost amount

705-60 What is the joined group’s allocable cost amount for the joining entity?

Work out the joined group’s allocable cost amount for the joining entity in this way:

Note: The head company may be taken to have made a capital gain, depending on the amount remaining after applying step 3A: see CGT event L2.

705-62 No double counting of amounts in allocable cost amount

The object of this section is to prevent a particular amount from being taken into account more than once in calculating the allocable cost amount for the joining entity, in order to promote the object of this Subdivision set out in section 705-10.

Subsection (3) applies if, apart from this section, 2 or more provisions of this Act operate with the result of altering:

the allocable cost amount for the joining entity; or

the allocable cost amount for another entity that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at the joining time;

because of a particular economic attribute of the joining entity (see subsection (6)).

Only one of those alterations is to be made, as follows:

if the *head company of the group makes a choice in accordance with subsections (4) and (5)—the alteration specified in the choice is to be made;

otherwise—the alteration that is most appropriate (in the light of the object of this Subdivision) is to be made.

A choice mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) must be made:

by the day the *head company of the group lodges its income tax return for the income year in which the joining time occurs; or

within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

A choice mentioned in paragraph (3)(a) must be made in writing.

(6) The economic attributes of the joining entity mentioned in subsection (2) include the following:

the joining entity’s retained profits;

the joining entity’s distributions of profits to other entities;

the joining entity’s realised and unrealised losses;

the joining entity’s deductions;

the joining entity’s accounting liabilities (within the meaning of subsection 705-70(1));

consideration received by the joining entity for issuing *membership interests in itself.

705-65 Cost of membership interests in the joining entity—step 1 in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 1 in the table in section 705-60, the step 1 amount is the sum of the following amounts for each *membership interest that *members of the joined group hold in the joining entity at the joining time:

Note: If the joining entity is a trust, the step 1 amount may be increased by section 713-20 for settled capital that could be distributed tax free in respect of discretionary interests in the trust.

Note: Under section 716-855, if membership interests are pre-CGT assets that have been subject to certain roll-overs, the cost base and reduced cost base are worked out in the same way as if they were post-CGT assets.

No indexation of cost base of pre-CGT membership interests

If the *membership interest is a pre-CGT asset, in working out its *cost base for the purposes of subsection (1) no element is indexed.

Adjustment if value shifting or loss transfer provision could apply

(3) If, on the assumption that a *CGT event had happened just before the joining time in relation to the *membership interest, the *cost base or the *reduced cost base of the membership interest would have been changed by a provision of this Act, then the cost base or reduced cost base of the membership interest that is to be used in subsection (1) of this section is instead:

the cost base as it would have been so changed; or

(b) the reduced cost base, as it would have been so changed, but ignoring the amount of any reduction resulting from the application of former subsection 160ZK(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: For example, a change in the cost base or reduced cost base may be required under provisions that apply where a loss transfer or value shift involving the joining entity has occurred.

(3AA) If, on the assumption that:

the *members of the joined group had, just before the joining time, *disposed of their *membership interest in the joining entity; and

the consideration received by the members for the disposal were equal to the *market value of the membership interest at that time;

they would have made a *capital loss that section 727-615 would have reduced (because of an indirect value shift), then the *reduced cost base of the membership interest that is to be used in subsection (1) of this section is reduced by the amount of that reduction.

Reduction if section 165-115ZD could apply

If, on the assumption that:

the *members of the joined group had, just before the joining time, *disposed of their *membership interest in the joining entity; and

the consideration received by the members for the disposal were equal to the *market value of the membership interest at that time;

the *reduced cost base of the membership interest would have been reduced as a result of the operation of section 165-115ZD of this Act or the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997, then the reduced cost base of the membership interest that is to be used in subsection (1) of this section is reduced by the amount of that reduction.

Certain provisions not to apply after joining time

Also, if a provision mentioned in subsection (3), (3AA) or (3A) would, because of events that happened before the joining time, apply to a CGT event or a realisation event that happens after the joining time in relation to the *members’ *membership interests in the joining entity, the provision does not so apply.

Reduction in cost base under subsection 110-55(7) to be added back

If, in working out the *reduced cost base of the *membership interest for the purposes of subsection (1), a reduction has taken place under subsection 110-55(7) (about certain distributions of pre-acquisition profits), the reduced cost base is increased by the amount of that reduction.

Reduction in reduced cost base under subsection 165-115ZA(3) to be added back

If:

in working out the *reduced cost base of the *membership interest for the purposes of subsection (1), a reduction has taken place under subsection 165-115ZA(3) (about alterations in ownership or control of loss companies); and

the reduction is to some extent attributable to so much of an amount that was taken into account both in working out the amount of the reduction and in working out:

the step 5 amount under section 705-100; or

the step 5A amount under section 705-102; or

the step 6 amount under section 705-110; or

the step 6A amount under section 705-112;

the reduced cost base is, to the extent mentioned in paragraph (b), increased by:

if subparagraph (b)(i) or (ia) applies—the amount of that reduction; or

if subparagraph (b)(ii) or (iii) applies—the amount of that reduction multiplied by the *corporate tax rate.

For the purposes of working out the *cost base or *reduced cost base of a *membership interest under subsection (1), if:

either or both of the following things happen after the joining time:

money is paid, or becomes required to be paid, in respect of *acquiring the membership interest;

property is given, or becomes required to be given, in respect of acquiring the membership interest; and

because the thing happened after the joining time, it was not taken into account in working out the first element of the cost base or reduced cost base of the membership interest;

Note: This would be the case if the money was only to be paid etc. if a contingency happened after the joining time.

the thing is nevertheless so taken into account, and taken always to have been so taken into account.

Non-membership equity interests

For the purposes of this section, if at the joining time a *member of the joined group holds a *non-membership equity interest in the joining entity, that non-membership equity interest is treated as if it were a *membership interest in the joining entity.

705-70 Liabilities of the joining entity—step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

(1) For the purposes of step 2 in the table in section 705-60, the step 2 amount is worked out by adding up the amounts of each thing (an accounting liability) that, in accordance with the joining entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, is a liability of the joining entity at the joining time.

Note: Certain liabilities of a life insurance company are worked out under Subdivision 713-L: see section 713-520.

Exclusion for deferred tax liability

An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that is an amount recorded in a deferred tax liability account in accordance with the joining entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting.

Subsection (1B) does not apply to an accounting liability that relates to an asset mentioned in paragraph 713-515(1)(a) or (b) (certain assets of life insurance company).

Exclusion for deductible liability

(1AA) Subsection (1AB) applies if:

the accounting liability is covered by subsection (1AC); and

assuming that the *head company had made a payment to discharge the accounting liability to the extent that it is covered under that subsection just after the joining time, that payment would result in an amount equal to all or part of the accounting liability being a deduction to the head company of the group.

(1AB) An amount is not to be added for the accounting liability under subsection (1) to the extent of that deduction.

(1AC) A liability is covered by this subsection except to the extent that:

any of the following provisions apply in relation to the liability:

section 713-520 (certain liabilities etc. of life insurance company that joins a consolidated group);

section 715-375 (accounting liabilities that are, or are part of, a Division 230 financial arrangement held by an entity that joins a consolidated group); or

section 713-515 (certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where life insurance company joins a consolidated group) applies in relation to an asset to which the liability relates; or

the liability is either of the following:

(i) the *liability for incurred claims of a *general insurance company or of a private health insurer (within the meaning of the Private Health Insurance (Prudential Supervision) Act 2015) under *general insurance policies;

the liability for remaining coverage of a general insurance company or of a private health insurer (within the meaning of that Act) under general insurance policies; or

the liability arises under any of the following:

a retirement village residence contract;

a retirement village services contract.

(1AD) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of paragraph (1AC)(c), section 713-710 (certain liabilities, reserves, costs etc. of general insurance company that joins or leaves a consolidated group) does not affect the amount of the liability.

Exclusion where transfer of accounting liability

An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that arises because of the joining entity’s ownership of an asset if, on *disposal of the asset, the accounting liability will transfer to the new owner.

Example: A liability to rehabilitate a mine site, where, under legislation or a licence, the liability will be transferred to the new owner on disposal of the mine.

Note: Adjustments reducing or increasing the amount under this section are made by sections 705-75 to 705-85.

Joining entity’s accounting principles for tax cost setting

(3) The joining entity’s accounting principles for tax cost setting are the *accounting principles that the entity would use if it were to prepare its financial statements just before the joining time.

Exclusion of amounts for certain securitisation liabilities

An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability of the joining entity under subsection (1) if the accounting liability is covered under section 705-76 (securitisation liabilities).

705-75 Liabilities of the joining entity—reductions for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

Reduction for future deduction

Subsection (1) applies to an accounting liability to the extent that it is a liability of a kind described in:

paragraph 705-70(1AC)(c); or

paragraph 705-70(1AC)(d).

If some or all of an accounting liability will result in a deduction to the *head company, the amount to be added for the accounting liability under subsection 705-70(1) is reduced by the following amount:

where:

double-counting adjustment means the amount of any reduction that has already occurred in the accounting liability under subsection 705-70(1) to take account of the future availability of the deduction.

Reduction for intra-group liabilities

If the amount of an accounting liability of the joining entity that is owed to a *member of the joined group is more than the amount applicable under the following table, the amount to be added for the accounting liability under subsection 705-70(1) instead equals the amount applicable under the table.

Application of subsections 705-65(2), (3), (3AA) and (3A)

Subsections 705-65(2), (3), (3AA) and (3A) apply in relation to references in subsection (2) of this section to an asset’s *cost base or *reduced cost base in a corresponding way to that in which they apply in relation to references in the table in subsection 705-65(1) to a *membership interest’s cost base or reduced cost base.

Application of subsection 705-65(4)

Subsection 705-65(4) applies in relation to assets mentioned in subsection (2) of this section in a corresponding way to that in which it applies in relation to members’ *membership interests.

Reduction in reduced cost base under subsection 165-115ZA(3) to be added back

If:

in working out the *reduced cost base of a *member’s asset for the purposes of subsection (2), a reduction has taken place under subsection 165-115ZA(3) (about alterations in ownership or control of loss companies); and

the reduction is to some extent attributable to so much of an amount that was taken into account both in working out the amount of the reduction and in working out:

the step 5 amount under section 705-100; or

the step 5A amount under section 705-102; or

the step 6 amount under section 705-110; or

the step 6A amount under section 705-112;

the reduced cost base is, to the extent mentioned in paragraph (b), increased by:

if subparagraph (b)(i) applies—the amount of that reduction; or

if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies—the amount of that reduction multiplied by the *corporate tax rate.

705-76 Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets

This section covers an accounting liability (the securitisation liability) if the following circumstances exist:

in working out the step 2 amount mentioned in subsection 705-70(1) in relation to the joining entity, an amount would be added under that subsection for the securitisation liability (disregarding subsection 705-70(4));

(c) the joining entity transferred or equitably assigned one or more assets (the underlying securitised assets) to another entity before the joining time;

the securitisation liability:

arose from the transfer or equitable assignment of the underlying securitised assets; and

is a liability of the joining entity at the joining time (according to the joining entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting);

the other entity was established for the purpose of securitising assets;

the underlying securitised assets were securitised in accordance with that purpose before the joining time;

at the joining time the *market value of the joining entity’s interest in the underlying securitised assets is nil, or is substantially less than the amount of the securitisation liability.

705-80 Liabilities of the joining entity—reductions/increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

Application

This section applies to an accounting liability to the extent that it is a liability of a kind described in:

paragraph 705-70(1AC)(c); or

paragraph 705-70(1AC)(d).

Adjustment for unrealised gains and losses

If:

for income tax purposes, an accounting liability, or a change in the amount of an accounting liability, (other than one owed to a *member of the joined group) is taken into account at a later time than is the case in accordance with the joining entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting; and

assuming that, for income tax purposes the accounting liability or change were taken into account at the same time as is the case in accordance with those standards or statements, the joined group’s allocable cost amount would be different;

Note: The difference would arise because subsection 705-70(1) includes income tax liabilities and steps 3 and 5 of the table in section 705-60 are affected by the time at which changes in liabilities are taken into account for income tax purposes.

then the amount to be added under subsection 705-70(1) for the accounting liability is:

if the difference is an increase—increased by the amount of the increase; and

if the difference is a decrease—decreased by the amount of the decrease.

Use of reliable estimate

In working out for the purposes of subsection (1) an amount at a particular time or in respect of a particular period, use the most reliable basis for estimation that is available.

Example: The amount of a change in liability for employee leave entitlements over a period.

705-85 Liabilities of the joining entity—increases for purposes of step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

Increase in step 2 amount for employee share interests

(1) If any *membership interest (an employee share interest) in the joining entity needed to be disregarded under section 703-35 in order for the joining entity to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company at the joining time, the step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70 is increased by the sum of the *market values of those interests, reduced in each case by the reduction amount (if any) worked out under subsection (2) of this section.

Reduction amount

(2) There is a reduction amount if the *market value of the employee share interest at the time it was *acquired by the employee is more than the consideration paid or given for its acquisition. The reduction amount is worked out by multiplying the market value of the employee share interest at that time by the factor worked out using the formula:

where:

market value of all membership interests means the *market value of all *membership interests in the joining entity just before the employee share interest was *acquired.

market value of head company’s membership interests means the *market value, just before the employee share interest was *acquired, of any *membership interests that the *head company held, directly or indirectly in the joining entity, continuously from that time until the joining time.

Increase to cover certain non-membership equity interests and certain equity interests

The step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70 is increased by:

the amount that would be the balance of the joining entity’s non-share capital account, assuming that:

if the joining entity is not a company—the joining entity were a company; and

each *non-membership equity interest (if any) in the joining entity held at the joining time by a person other than a *member of the joined group were a *non-share equity interest in the joining entity; and

the non-share equity interests (if any) mentioned in subparagraph (ii) were the only non-share equity interests in the joining entity; and

the *market value of each thing that, in accordance with the joining entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, is equity in the joining entity at the joining time, where the thing is also a *debt interest.

Increase to cover ADI restructure preference share interests

If any *share in the joining entity needed to be disregarded under section 703-37 in order for the joining entity to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company at the joining time, the step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70 is increased by the sum of the *market values of those shares.

705-90 Undistributed, taxed profits accruing to joined group before joining time—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount

(1) For the purposes of step 3 in the table in section 705-60, the step 3 amount is worked out in accordance with this section unless the joining entity is a trust that is not a *corporate tax entity at the joining time.

Note: If the joining entity is such a trust, the step 3 amount is instead worked out in accordance with section 713-25.

Undistributed profits

First work out the undistributed profits of the joining entity at the joining time. These are the amounts that, in accordance with the joining entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, are retained profits of the joining entity.

However, if a loss that did not accrue to the joined group before the joining time (subsection (8) states what it means for a loss to accrue to the joined group before the joining time) would be taken into account in working out the undistributed profits, the loss is not so taken into account.

Also, if an amount is not added under subsection 705-70(1) for an accounting liability to an extent because of subsection 705-70(1AB), the accounting liability is not to be taken into account, to that extent, in working out the undistributed profits.

Extent to which tax paid on undistributed profits

Then work out how much of the undistributed profits does not exceed the amount worked out using the following formula as at the joining time:

where:

applicable gross-up rate means the joining entity’s *corporate tax gross-up rate for the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, for the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time.

Assumptions for purposes of subsection (3)

The assumptions are that the joining entity’s franking account balance at the end of the income year that ends, or, if section 701-30 applies, of the income year that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time had been adjusted to take account of franking credits or franking debits that would arise if the following were paid just before the joining time:

the income tax, or refund of income tax, on the joining entity’s taxable income for that income year; and

any income tax, or refund of income tax, that has not yet been paid (regardless of whether it has become payable or due for payment) on the joining entity’s taxable income for any earlier income year, other than one excluded by subsection (5).

Exclusion of certain income years where previous membership of a consolidated group

If the joining entity was previously a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, any income year earlier than the one that started, or, if section 701-30 applies, the one that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to have started, when the joining entity ceased to be a subsidiary member of that group is excluded for the purposes of paragraph (4)(b) of this section.

Undistributed profits must have accrued to joined group

Next, work out the extent to which the undistributed profits that satisfy the requirements of subsection (3) accrued to the joined group before the joining time (subsection (7) states what it means for a profit to accrue to the joined group before the joining time). The result is the step 3 amount.

Profit accruing to the joined group before the joining time

A profit accrued to the joined group before the joining time if, on the following assumptions:

that it was distributed to holders of *membership interests as it accrued; and

that entities interposed between the *head company and the joining entity successively distributed any of it immediately after receiving it;

it would have been received by the entity that is the head company at the joining time, in respect of membership interests that it held continuously until that time either directly or indirectly through interposed entities.

Loss accruing to the joined group before the joining time

Note: If an entity interposed between the head company and the joining entity is a non-fixed trust, this subsection may involve determining how a power of appointment would have been exercised. Section 713-50 lists matters to have regard to in determining this.

A loss accrued to the joined group before the joining time if and to the extent that, assuming that as it arose it were instead a profit that was accruing, a distribution of that profit would have been a distribution made to the joined group out of profits that accrued to the joined group before the joining time.

Use of reliable estimates

In working out:

for the purposes of subsection (4), the amount of income tax, or refund of income tax, on the joining entity’s taxable income for a particular income year and the extent to which it has not yet been paid; or

for the purposes of subsection (7), the amount of a profit that accrued to the joined group during a particular period; or

for the purposes of subsection (8), the amount of a loss that accrued to the joined group during a particular period;

use the most reliable basis for estimation that is available.

Without limiting paragraph (9)(b), a way in which, for the purposes of subsection (7), the amount of a profit that accrued to the joined group during a particular period may be worked out is by:

assuming that profits of income years were distributed in order from the most recent to the earliest; and

assuming that, for any income year for which distributions were paid out of profits in accordance with paragraph (a), they were, to the extent they were not *franked distributions, paid out of profits of that income year that were not subject to income tax before they were paid out of such profits that were subject to income tax.

705-93 If pre-joining time roll-over from foreign resident company or head company—step 3A in working out allocable cost amount

When there is a step 3A amount

For the purposes of step 3A in the table in section 705-60, there is a step 3A amount if:

before the joining time:

(i) there was a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B (a Subdivision 126-B roll-over) in relation to a *CGT event that happened in relation to an asset (the roll-over asset); or

(ii) former section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied in relation to a disposal (a section 160ZZO roll-over) of an asset (also the roll-over asset); and

at the joining time, as a result of the Subdivision 126-B roll-over or the section 160ZZO roll-over, the roll-over asset has:

a *deferred roll-over gain; or

a *deferred roll-over loss; and

the originating company in relation to the Subdivision 126-B roll-over, or the transferor in relation to the section 160ZZO roll-over:

was a foreign resident; or

is the *head company in relation to the joined group; and

the recipient company in relation to the Subdivision 126-B roll-over, or the transferee in relation to the section 160ZZO roll-over:

was an Australian resident; and

is a spread entity in relation to the joined group; and

(d) if the recipient company was previously a *subsidiary member of another consolidated group—the conditions in section 104-182 were not satisfied at any time in relation to the other group between the Subdivision 126-B roll-over, or the section 160ZZO roll-over, and the joining time; and

the roll-over asset is not a pre-CGT asset at the joining time; and

the roll-over asset becomes that of the head company of the joined group because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies when the joining entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group.

The step 3A amount is the amount of the *deferred roll-over gain or the *deferred roll-over loss mentioned in paragraph (1)(aa).

705-95 Pre-joining time distributions out of certain profits—step 4 in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 4 in the table in section 705-60, the step 4 amount is the sum of all distributions made by the joining entity before the joining time that:

the *head company receives directly, or would receive indirectly if entities interposed between the head company and the joining entity successively distributed any distribution they received immediately after receiving it; and

were made out of profits:

(i) that did not accrue to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection 705-90(7)); or

that accrued to the joined group before the joining time and recouped losses of any *sort that accrued to the joined group before that time (see subsection 705-90(8)).

Note: As well as subsection 705-90(7), paragraph 705-90(9)(b) and subsection 705-90(10) are relevant to working out whether or not profits accrued to the joined group before the joining time.

705-100 Losses accruing to joined group before joining time—step 5 in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 5 in the table in section 705-60, the step 5 amount is the sum of all losses of any *sort of the joining entity that:

had not been *utilised by the joining entity for the income year in which the joining time occurred or any earlier income year; and

accrued to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection 705-90(8)).

However, a loss is not to be taken into account under subsection (1) to the extent that it reduced the undistributed profits comprising the step 3 amount in the table in section 705-60.

705-102 FRT disallowed amounts accruing to joined group before joining time—step 5A in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 5A in the table in section 705-60, the step 5A amount is the sum of all *FRT disallowed amounts of the joining entity that:

had not been applied by the joining entity under paragraph 820-56(2)(b) for the income year in which the joining time occurred or any earlier income year; and

accrued to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection (2) of this section).

For the purposes of subsection (1), a *FRT disallowed amount accrued to the joined group before the joining time if and to the extent that, assuming that as it arose it were instead a profit that was accruing, a distribution of that profit would have been a distribution made to the joined group out of profits that accrued to the joined group before the joining time.

However, a *FRT disallowed amount is not to be taken into account under subsection (1) to the extent that it reduced the undistributed profits comprising the step 3 amount in the table in section 705-60.

705-105 Continuity of holding membership interests—steps 3 to 5A in working out allocable cost amount

If:

(a) a *membership interest that a *member of the joined group held in the joining entity at the joining time was taken under this Act to have been *acquired by the member for its *market value at a particular time (the market value time); or

(b) the *cost base and *reduced cost base of a membership interest that a member of the joined group held in the joining entity at the joining time were, before that time, changed on one or more occasions by this Act so that they equalled the market value of the membership interest at a particular time (the last of which times is also the market value time);

then, for the purpose of sections 705-90, 705-95, 705-100, 705-102 and 713-25, the *head company is taken not to have held that membership interest, either directly or indirectly, before the market value time.

705-110 If joining entity transfers a loss to the head company—step 6 in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 6 in the table in section 705-60, the step 6 amount is worked out by multiplying the sum of the losses mentioned in subsection (2) by the *corporate tax rate.

The losses are the joining entity’s losses of any *sort that:

were not *utilised by the joining entity for the income year in which the joining time occurred or any earlier income year; and

did not accrue to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection 705-90(8)); and

are transferred to the *head company under Subdivision 707-A; and

are not cancelled under section 707-145.

705-112 If joining entity transfers a FRT disallowed amount to the head company—step 6A in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 6A in the table in section 705-60, the step 6A amount is worked out by multiplying the sum of the *FRT disallowed amounts mentioned in subsection (2) by the *corporate tax rate.

The *FRT disallowed amounts are the joining entity’s FRT disallowed amounts that:

did not accrue to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection (3)); and

are transferred to the *head company under section 820-590; and

are not cancelled under section 820-592;

to the extent that they were not applied by the joining entity under paragraph 820-56(2)(b) in respect of the income year in which the joining time occurred or any earlier income year.

For the purposes of subsection (2), a *FRT disallowed amount accrued to the joined group before the joining time if and to the extent that, assuming that as it arose it were instead a profit that was accruing, a distribution of that profit would have been a distribution made to the joined group out of profits that accrued to the joined group before the joining time.

705-115 If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions—step 7 in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 7 in the table in section 705-60, the step 7 amount is worked out using the following formula:

where:

acquired deductions means all deductions covered by subsection (2) that are not owned deductions.

owned deductions means the sum of all deductions for which the following requirements are satisfied:

the deduction is covered by subsection (2);

assuming the expenditure that gave rise to the deduction were instead a profit that accrued at the time the expenditure was incurred, a distribution of that profit would have been a distribution made to the joined group out of profits that accrued to the joined group before the joining time (see subsection 705-90(7)).

This subsection covers any deduction to which the *head company becomes entitled under section 701-5 as a result of the joining entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the joined group, other than a deduction for expenditure:

that is, forms part of or reduces, the cost of an asset of the joining entity that becomes an asset of the head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies; or

to which section 110-40 (about expenditure on assets acquired before on 13 May 1997) applies; or

to the extent that the expenditure reduced the undistributed profits comprising the step 3 amount in the table in section 705-60.

(3) Subsection (2) does not cover a deduction under section 43-15 (which relates to *undeducted construction expenditure) if the joining entity *acquired the asset to which the deduction relates at or before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997.

How to work out a pre-CGT factor for assets of joining entity

705-125 Pre-CGT proportion for joining entity

Object

Because intra-group *membership interests in the joining entity are disregarded under subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the object of this section is to provide a mechanism to ensure that the benefit of the pre-CGT status of those interests is not lost. That mechanism involves:

working out the proportion (measured by market value) of the membership interests in the joining entity that have pre-CGT status; and

if the joining entity later ceases being a member of the group, attaching pre-CGT status to that proportion of membership interests in it (see section 711-65), subject to integrity rules (see section 711-70).

How to work out pre-CGT proportion

(2) The pre-CGT proportion is the amount worked out by dividing:

the sum of the *market value of each *membership interest in the joining entity that is:

held by a *member of the group at the joining time; and

is a pre-CGT asset;

by:

the sum of the market value of each membership interest in the joining entity that is held by a member of the group at the joining time.

Modification if joining entity is a trust

If the joining entity is a trust, a *membership interest in it is not taken into account under subsection (2) unless the membership interest is either a unit or an interest in the trust.

Subdivision 705-B — Case of group formation

Guide to Subdivision 705-B

705-130 What this Subdivision is about

When a consolidated group comes into existence, the tax cost setting amount for the assets of each entity that becomes a subsidiary member is worked out by modifying the rules in Subdivision 705-A, so that the amount reflects the cost to the group of acquiring the entity.

Table of sections

Application and object

705-135 Application and object of this Subdivision

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A

705-140 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications

705-145 Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be worked out where subsidiary members have membership interests in other subsidiary members

705-147 Adjustment in working out step 3A of allocable cost amount to take account of membership interests held by subsidiary members in other such members

705-155 Adjustments to restrict step 4 reduction of allocable cost amount to effective distributions to head company in respect of direct membership interests

705-160 Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned profits or losses of certain entities that become subsidiary members

705-163 Modified application of section 705-57

Application and object

705-135 Application and object of this Subdivision

Application

(1) This Subdivision has effect for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) if one or more entities become *subsidiary members of a *consolidated group at the time (the formation time) it comes into existence as a consolidated group.

Note: This is the first exception to Subdivision 705-A: see paragraph 705-15(a).

Object

The object of this Subdivision is to modify the rules in Subdivision 705-A (which basically determine the tax cost setting amount for assets of an entity joining an existing consolidated group) so that they have effect, and take account of different circumstances that apply, when a consolidated group comes into existence.

Note: The main circumstance is where one of the entities has membership interests in another. In such a case, the order in which the rules in Subdivision 705-A are applied will affect the tax cost setting amounts for the assets of the entities.

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A

705-140 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications

Subdivision 705-A has effect in relation to each entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the consolidated group at the formation time in the same way as that Subdivision has effect in relation to an entity becoming a subsidiary member of a consolidated group in circumstances covered by that Subdivision.

However, that effect of Subdivision 705-A is subject to modifications set out in this Subdivision.

705-145 Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be worked out where subsidiary members have membership interests in other subsidiary members

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that where, on becoming *subsidiary members, entities hold assets consisting of *membership interests in other subsidiary members, the *head company’s cost of becoming the holder of the assets of all of the entities that become subsidiary members correctly reflects the group’s cost of acquiring the entities.

Tax cost setting amounts to be worked out from top down

If, on becoming *subsidiary members, entities hold *membership interests in any other entities that become subsidiary members, the tax cost setting amounts for the assets of entities holding membership interests must be worked out before the tax cost setting amounts for the assets of the entities in which the membership interests are held.

Note: The tax cost setting amount in respect of assets of any subsidiary member in which the head company, but no other subsidiary member, holds membership interests can be worked out in any order in relation to the calculations for other subsidiary members.

Tax cost setting amount for higher entity’s membership interests to be used in working out lower entity’s tax cost setting amount

The tax cost setting amount worked out for assets of an entity mentioned in subsection (2) consisting of *membership interests in another such entity is to be used as the amount for those interests under subsection 705-65(1) (step 1 of allocable cost amount) in working out the tax cost setting amount for assets of that other entity.

Note 1: Subsection 705-65(1) adds together amounts worked out in accordance with section 705-65 representing the cost of the membership interests that each member of the group holds in the entity. If any of those membership interests is held by another subsidiary member, subsection (3) above will replace the amount otherwise applicable with the tax cost setting amount that will have been worked out for the interests in accordance with subsection (2) above.

Note 2: The tax cost setting amount worked out for the membership interests has no relevance other than for the purpose mentioned in subsection (3). This is because, under the single entity principle, intra group membership interests are ignored while entities are members of the group. If an entity ceases to be a member, section 701-15 and Division 711 set the tax cost of membership interests in the entity at that time.

Value shifting etc. provisions not to apply to later CGT events involving membership interests

However, despite subsection (3), subsection 705-65(4) (which prevents the later operation of value shifting etc. provisions) still applies to the *membership interests.

Non-membership equity interests

For the purposes of this section, if, on becoming a *subsidiary member, an entity holds a *non-membership equity interest in another entity that becomes a subsidiary member at the same time, that non-membership equity interest is treated as if it were a *membership interest in that other entity.

705-147 Adjustment in working out step 3A of allocable cost amount to take account of membership interests held by subsidiary members in other such members

Object

The object of this section is to modify the effect that section 705-93 (step 3A of allocable cost amount) has in accordance with this Subdivision so that it takes account of *membership interests that entities that become *subsidiary members hold in other such entities.

Apportionment of step 3A amount among first level interposed entities

If:

(a) under section 705-93, in its application in accordance with this Subdivision, there is a step 3A amount for the purpose of working out the group’s *allocable cost amount for an entity (the subject entity) that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and

(b) at that time one or more entities (the first level entities), that become subsidiary members of the group and in which the *head company holds *membership interests, are interposed between the head company and the subject entity;

then the step 3A amount is apportioned among the first level entities and the subject entity on the following basis:

each first level entity has the following proportion of the step 3A amount:

where:

market value of all membership interests in subject entity means the *market value, at the formation time, of all *membership interests in the subject entity that are held by entities that become *members of the group at that time.

market value of first level entity’s direct and indirect membership interests in subject entity means so much of the *market value of all membership interests in the subject entity (as defined above) as is attributable to *membership interests that the first level entity holds directly, or indirectly through other interposed entities that become *subsidiary members of the group at the formation time; and

the subject entity has the remainder of the step 3A amount.

Membership interests in subsidiary members of group

In applying section 705-93 for the purposes of this Subdivision, disregard paragraph 705-93(1)(f) if:

the rollover asset mentioned in that section is a membership interest in an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member at the formation time; and

(b) the rollover asset is not held at that time by the entity that becomes the *head company of the group.

Note: The step 3A amount is worked out under section 705-93.

705-155 Adjustments to restrict step 4 reduction of allocable cost amount to effective distributions to head company in respect of direct membership interests

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for entities that become *subsidiary members of the group at the formation time, the reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 (about pre-formation time distributions out of certain profits) is made only for profits that have been effectively distributed to the *head company in respect of its direct *membership interests in the entities. This ensures consistency with the ordering rule in section 705-145.

When section applies

(2) This section applies to a distribution (the subject distribution) to the extent that the following conditions are satisfied:

(a) the distribution is made by an entity (the subject entity) that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at the formation time;

in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the subject entity there would, apart from this section, be a reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 for the distribution.

Step 4 reduction only if subject distribution is made to head company etc.

There is no reduction as mentioned in paragraph (2)(b) for the subject distribution unless:

the subject distribution is made to the *head company of the group; or

the reduction is in accordance with subsection (5).

Step 4 reduction for effective distribution to head company

If:

at the formation time, the *head company of the group has a direct *membership interest in the subject entity; and

the head company acquired the membership interest directly from another entity, or indirectly as a result of one or more acquisitions from other entities, where:

(i) former section 160ZZ0 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied to each acquisition; or

there was a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B for each acquisition;

or a combination of these happened; and

(c) while it held the membership interest, the entity, or one of the entities, mentioned in paragraph (b) (the recipient of the further distribution) received a distribution (the further distribution) of some of the subject distribution from the subject entity;

the consequences in subsections (5) and (6) apply.

Reduction for further distribution that remains with recipient

If:

the following happen:

(i) by the formation time, any of the further distribution (the eligible reduction amount) had not again been distributed by the recipient of the further distribution;

the recipient of the further distribution does not become a *subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; or

the following happen:

(i) by the formation time, any of the further distribution (the eligible reduction amount) had been distributed by the recipient of the further distribution to another entity directly, or indirectly though successive distributions by interposed entities;

that other entity does not become a subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; or

both of the above paragraphs apply;

then, in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the subject entity, the reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 for the subject distribution only takes place to the extent that it equals the sum of all eligible reduction amounts.

Step 1 reduced cost base adjustment to reverse effect of reduction for further distribution

(6) Also, if former subsection 160ZK(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or subsection 110-55(7) of this Act applied to the further distribution, then for the purposes of step 1 in the table in section 705-60 in working out the group’s *allocable cost amount for the subject entity:

(a) the reference in subsection 705-65(3) to a reduction resulting from the application of former subsection 160ZK(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the reference in subsection 705-65(5) to a reduction that has taken place under subsection 110-55(7);

include a reference to the reduction in the *reduced cost base of the membership interest in the subject entity resulting from the application of former subsection 160ZK(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, or subsection 110-55(7) of this Act, to the further distribution.

705-160 Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned profits or losses of certain entities that become subsidiary members

Object

The object of this section is to prevent a distortion under section 705-35 in the allocation of allocable cost amount to an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group where that entity has direct or indirect *membership interests in another entity that has certain profits or tax losses when it becomes a subsidiary member.

Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount where direct interest in entity with profits/losses

If:

an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and

the entity has *membership interests in a second entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at that time; and

in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the second entity:

(i) an amount is required to be added (the second entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 3 in the table in section 705-60 (about profits accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

(ii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the second entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

(iii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the second entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 5A in the table in section 705-60 (about *FRT disallowed amounts accruing to a joined group before the joining time);

then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first entity, the *market value of the first entity’s membership interests in the second entity is reduced (in a subparagraph (c)(i) case) or increased (in a subparagraph (c)(ii) or (iii) case) by the first entity’s interest in the second entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount (see subsection (3)).

First entity’s interest in second entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount

The first entity’s interest in the second entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount is worked out using the formula:

Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount for indirect interest in entity with profits/losses

If:

an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and

the entity has *membership interests in a second entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at that time; and

the second entity has, directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities that become subsidiary members of the group at the formation time, membership interests in a third entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at that time; and

in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the third entity:

(i) an amount is required to be added (the third entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 3 in the table in section 705-60 (about profits accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

(ii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the third entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

(iii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the third entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 5A in the table in section 705-60 (about *FRT disallowed amounts accruing to a joined group before the joining time);

then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first entity, the *market value of the first entity’s membership interests in the second entity is reduced (in a subparagraph (d)(i) case) or increased (in a subparagraph (d)(ii) or (iii) case) by the first entity’s interest in the third entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount (see subsection (5)).

First entity’s interest in third entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount

The first entity’s interest in the third entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount is worked out using the formula:

where:

market value of first entity’s membership interests in third entity held through second entity means the *market value of all *membership interests in the third entity that the first entity holds indirectly through the second entity (including through that entity and one or more other entities that become *subsidiary members of the group and are interposed between the second entity and the third entity).

705-163 Modified application of section 705-57

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out tax cost setting amounts for trading stock, *depreciating assets, *registered emissions units or *revenue assets of entities that become *subsidiary members of the group at the formation time, section 705-57 (about loss of pre-CGT status of certain *membership interests) only applies if the *membership interests held directly by the *head company of the group are affected.

Modified application of section 705-57—basic modification

For the purposes of applying section 705-57 in accordance with this Subdivision, a reference in that section to a *membership interest that a *member of the joined group holds in the joining entity at the joining time is taken to be a reference to a *membership interest that the *head company of the consolidated group holds directly in an entity becoming a *subsidiary member at the formation time.

Modified application of section 705-57—additional modifications where section 705-145 applies

(3) Also, if an entity (the first entity) that becomes a *subsidiary member holds a *membership interest (the subject membership interest) in another entity (the second entity) that becomes a subsidiary member, section 705-57 (as modified in accordance with subsection (2)) is to be applied in relation to the subject membership interest as follows.

(4) First work out whether there would be a reduction under that section in the *tax cost setting amount for the subject membership interest that is used as mentioned in subsection 705-145(3) (the subsection 705-145(3) tax cost setting amount) if:

the subject membership interest, if it is not a revenue etc. asset of the first entity, were taken to be such an asset; and

paragraphs 705-57(2)(c) and (d) and subsection 705-57(7) did not apply to the subject membership interest.

(5) Next, if there would be such a reduction (whose amount is the notional section 705-57 reduction amount):

apply section 705-57 to reduce the tax cost setting amount for any revenue etc. asset of the second entity; and

if the second entity holds a *membership interest in another entity that becomes a *subsidiary member—apply section 705-57 in relation to that interest in accordance with subsection (3) of this section;

and for those purposes:

the subject membership interest is taken to be a membership interest that the *head company of the group holds directly in the second entity at the formation time; and

the requirements of paragraphs 705-57(2)(a) and (b) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the subject membership interest; and

the subject membership interest is taken to have a *cost base and *reduced cost base equal to the subsection 705-145(3) tax cost setting amount; and

the subject membership interest is taken to have a loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amount equal to the notional section 705-57 reduction amount.

Note: If the head company actually held any membership interests in the second entity, or if other entities becoming subsidiary members held membership interests in the second entity to which this subsection also applied, those membership interests would also be taken into account in working out the reduction under paragraph (a) and in applying paragraph (b).

Section 705-57 not to apply where membership interests effectively acquired on normal market basis

If:

(a) apart from this subsection, subsection 705-57(6) would apply in accordance with this Subdivision to the revenue etc. assets of an entity (the subject entity) that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at the formation time; and

at the formation time, the *head company of the group holds all of the *membership interests in the subject entity; and

subsection 705-57(6) would apply because a circumstance covered by subsection 705-57(4) (about loss of pre-CGT status because Division 149 etc. applied) existed; and

(d) the application of Division 149 of this Act, or the provision of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, as mentioned in paragraph 705-57(4)(b) of this Act happened because the entity that became the *head company of the group (the potential head entity) *acquired all of the *membership interests in the other entity mentioned in that paragraph directly or indirectly from another entity (the vendor); and

at the time of the acquisition, the potential head entity did not control (for value shifting purposes) the vendor, and vice-versa, and another entity did not control (for value shifting purposes) the potential head entity and the vendor; and

(f) the acquisition, or each of the acquisitions, mentioned in subsection 705-57(4) was a *same asset roll-over or was one to which any of former sections 160ZZN to 160ZZOC, 160ZZPA and 160ZZPJ of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied;

then subsection 705-57(6) does not apply as mentioned in paragraph (a) of this subsection.

Subdivision 705-C — Case where a consolidated group is acquired by another

Guide to Subdivision 705-C

705-170 What this Subdivision is about

When a consolidated group is acquired by another consolidated group, modifications are made to the operation of Division 701 (the core rules) and Subdivision 705-A (tax cost setting amount where a single entity joins a consolidated group) basically to ensure that the tax cost setting amount for assets of the acquired group that become those of the acquiring group reflects the cost to the latter group of acquiring the former.

Table of sections

Application and object

705-175 Application and object of this Subdivision

Modified application of Division 701 in relation to acquired group etc.

705-180 Modifications of Division 701

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A in relation to acquiring group

705-185 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications

Modifications of Subdivision 705-A for the purposes of this Subdivision

705-195 Modified application of subsection 705-65(6)

705-200 Modified application of section 705-85

Application and object

705-175 Application and object of this Subdivision

Application

(1) This Subdivision applies if all of the *members of a *consolidated group (the acquired group) become members of another consolidated group (the acquiring group) at a particular time (the acquisition time) as a result of the *acquisition of *membership interests in the *head company of the acquired group.

Object

The object of this Subdivision is:

to modify the rules in Division 701 (the core rules) to complement the treatment of the acquired group as a single entity that applied before the acquisition time; and

to modify Subdivision 705-A (which basically determines the tax cost setting amount for assets of an entity joining a consolidated group) to ensure that the tax cost setting amount for assets of the acquired group that become those of the acquiring group reflects the cost to the latter group of acquiring the former.

Modified application of Division 701 in relation to acquired group etc.

705-180 Modifications of Division 701

Certain provisions of Division 701 not to apply

If, because an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the acquired group when this Subdivision applies, a provision of Division 701 (other than section 701-25) would otherwise apply, in relation to the acquired group for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) or for the entity core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(3), the provision does not so apply.

Modified application of section 701-5

Section 701-5 (the entry history rule) applies in relation to the acquiring group for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) as if entities that are or have been the *subsidiary members of the acquired group were or had been parts of the *head company of the acquired group.

Modified application of section 701-25

The application of section 701-25 (which ensures tax-neutral consequences for a head company ceasing to hold assets when an entity leaves a group), in relation to the acquired group for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) and for the entity core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(3), is modified as follows:

the reference in subsection (4) of that section to the end of the income year is taken to be a reference to the end of the income year that ends or, if subsection 701-30(3) as modified by subsection (4) of this section applies, of the income year that is taken to end, when the entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the acquired group;

the section applies (as modified by paragraph (a) of this subsection) to the entity that is the *head company of the acquired group ceasing to be a *member of that group in the same way as it applies to an entity that is a subsidiary member of that group ceasing to be a subsidiary member.

Modified application of section 701-30

If the acquired group only exists for part of the income year, section 701-30 (about an entity not being a subsidiary member of a group for a whole income year) applies in relation to the acquired group for the head company core purposes in the same way as it applies to work out the taxable income, tax payable on that taxable income and loss of each *sort for an entity for a non-membership period.

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A in relation to acquiring group

705-185 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications

Subdivision 705-A has effect in relation to the acquiring group for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) as if:

the only *member of the acquired group that is a joining entity of the acquiring group were the entity that, just before the acquisition time, was the *head company of the acquired group; and

(b) the operation of this Part for the head company core purposes in relation to the head company and the entities that were *subsidiary members of the acquired group continued to have effect for the purposes of Subdivision 705-A.

Note 1: This means that for Subdivision 705-A purposes the subsidiary members of the acquired group are treated as part of the head company of that group, and as a result their assets (other than e.g. internal membership interests) have their tax costs set at the acquisition time.

Note 2: It also means e.g. that for Subdivision 705-A purposes the terminating values of the assets of those subsidiary members are worked out as if the assets were those of the head company at the acquisition time, and hence will be based (if applicable) on the tax cost setting amounts for assets that were set at the time entities became subsidiary members of the acquired group.

However, that effect of Subdivision 705-A is subject to modifications set out in this Subdivision.

Note: The modifications of Subdivision 705-A made in this Subdivision constitute the second exception to Subdivision 705-A: see paragraph 705-15(b).

Modifications of Subdivision 705-A for the purposes of this Subdivision

705-195 Modified application of subsection 705-65(6)

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that certain *non-membership equity interests held by *members of the acquiring group that are part of the cost of acquiring the acquired group are taken into account in working out the acquiring group’s allocable cost amount for the acquired group.

Non-membership equity interests

Subsection 705-65(6) has effect as if it also treated as a *membership interest in the *head company of the acquired group a *non-membership equity interest in a *subsidiary member of the acquired group, where that interest was held at the acquisition time by a *member of the acquiring group.

705-200 Modified application of section 705-85

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that if any of the following are not held by *members of either group:

certain employee share interests in *subsidiary members of the acquired group;

certain *non-membership equity interests in subsidiary members of the acquired group;

certain preference share interests in subsidiary members of the acquired group;

and are therefore part of the cost of acquiring the acquired group, they increase the acquiring group’s allocable cost amount for the acquired group.

Increase for certain membership interests in subsidiary members of acquired group

Subsections 705-85(1), (2) and (4) have effect as if a *membership interest in a *subsidiary member of the acquired group were a membership interest in the *head company of that group.

Non-membership equity interests

Paragraph 705-85(3)(a) has effect as if it also increased the step 2 amount worked out under section 705-70 by the amount that would be the sum of the balances of the *non-share capital accounts of the *subsidiary members of the acquired group, assuming that:

for a subsidiary member that is not a company—the subsidiary member were a company; and

each *non-membership equity interest (if any) in a subsidiary member held at the acquisition time by a person other than a *member of the acquiring group or acquired group were a *non-share equity interest in the subsidiary member; and

the non-share equity interests (if any) mentioned in paragraph (b) were the only non-share equity interests in the subsidiary member.

Subdivision 705-D — Where multiple entities are linked by membership interests

Guide to Subdivision 705-D

705-210 What this Subdivision is about

When entities that are linked by membership interests join a consolidated group, the tax cost setting amount for the assets of each entity that becomes a subsidiary member is worked out by modifying the rules in Subdivision 705-A, so that the amount reflects the cost to the group of acquiring the entities.

Table of sections

Application and object

705-215 Application and object of this Subdivision

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A

705-220 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications

705-225 Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be worked out where linked entities have membership interests in other linked entities

705-227 Adjustment in working out step 3A of allocable cost amount to take account of membership interests held by linked entities in other linked entities

705-230 Adjustments to restrict step 4 reduction of allocable cost amount to effective distributions to head company in respect of direct membership interests

705-235 Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned profits or losses of certain linked entities

705-240 Modified application of section 705-57

Application and object

705-215 Application and object of this Subdivision

Application

This Subdivision has effect for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2) if:

(a) 2 or more entities (each of which is a linked entity) become members of a *consolidated group at the same time as a result of an event that happens in relation to one of them; and

the case is not covered by Subdivision 705-C.

Note: This is the third exception to Subdivision 705-A: see paragraph 705-15(c). In order for this Subdivision to have effect, one of the entities would need to hold directly or indirectly, just before the joining time, membership interests in all of the other entities.

Example: Entities A and B are not members of a consolidated group, but members of such a group, together with entity A, jointly hold all the membership interests in entity B. Members of the group then acquire all the membership interests in entity A and as a result of this event both entities, which are linked by the membership interests that one holds in the other, become members of the group.

Object

The object of this Subdivision is to modify the rules in Subdivision 705-A (which basically determine the tax cost setting amount for assets of an entity joining an existing consolidated group) so that they take account of the different circumstances that apply where linked entities join.

Modified application of Subdivision 705-A

705-220 Subdivision 705-A has effect with modifications

Subdivision 705-A has effect in relation to each linked entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the consolidated group in the same way as that Subdivision operates in relation to an entity becoming a subsidiary member of a consolidated group in circumstances covered by that Subdivision.

However, that effect of Subdivision 705-A is subject to modifications set out in this Subdivision.

705-225 Order in which tax cost setting amounts are to be worked out where linked entities have membership interests in other linked entities

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that where, on becoming *subsidiary members, linked entities hold assets consisting of *membership interests in other linked entities, the *head company’s cost of becoming the holder of the assets of all of the linked entities correctly reflects the group’s cost of acquiring the linked entities.

Tax cost setting amounts to be worked out from top down

The tax cost setting amounts for the assets of linked entities holding *membership interests must be worked out before the tax cost setting amounts for the assets of the linked entities in which the membership interests are held.

Note: The tax cost setting amount in respect of assets of any linked entity in which members of the group, but no linked entity, hold membership interests can be worked out in any order in relation to the calculations for other linked entities.

Tax cost setting amount for higher linked entity’s membership interests to be used in working out lower linked entity’s tax cost setting amount

The tax cost setting amount worked out for assets of a linked entity mentioned in subsection (2) consisting of *membership interests in another such entity is to be used as the amount for those interests under subsection 705-65(1) (step 1 of allocable cost amount) in working out the tax cost setting amount for assets of that other linked entity.

Note 1: Subsection 705-65(1) adds together amounts worked out in accordance with section 705-65 representing the cost of the membership interests that each member of the group holds in the linked entity. If any of those membership interests is held by another linked entity, subsection (3) of this section will replace the amount otherwise applicable with the tax cost setting amount that will have been worked out for the interests in accordance with subsection (2) of this section.

Note 2: The tax cost setting amount worked out for the membership interests has no relevance other than for the purpose mentioned in subsection (3) of this subsection. This is because, under the single entity principle, intra group membership interests are ignored while entities are members of the group. If an entity ceases to be a member, section 701-15 and Division 711 set the tax cost of membership interests in the entity at that time.

Value shifting etc. provisions not to apply to later CGT events involving membership interests

However, despite subsection (3), subsection 705-65(4) (which prevents the later operation of value shifting etc. provisions) still applies to the *membership interests.

Non-membership equity interests

For the purposes of this section, if, on becoming a *subsidiary member, a linked entity holds a *non-membership equity interest in another linked entity, that interest is treated as if it were a *membership interest in that other linked entity.

705-227 Adjustment in working out step 3A of allocable cost amount to take account of membership interests held by linked entities in other linked entities

Object

(1) The object of this section is to modify the effect that section 705-93 (step 3A of allocable cost amount) has in accordance with this Subdivision so that it takes account of *membership interests that linked entities hold in other linked entities at the time (the linked entity joining time) when the linked entities become *subsidiary members of the group.

Apportionment of step 3A amount among first level interposed entities

If:

(a) under section 705-93, in its application in accordance with this Subdivision, there is a step 3A amount for the purpose of working out the group’s *allocable cost amount for a particular linked entity (the subject entity); and

(b) at the linked entity joining time, one or more of the linked entities (the first level entities) in which the *head company holds *membership interests are interposed between the head company and the subject entity;

then the step 3A amount is apportioned among the first level entities and the subject entity on the following basis:

each first level entity has the following proportion of the step 3A amount:

where:

market value of all membership interests in subject entity means the *market value, at the linked entity joining time, of all *membership interests in the subject entity that are held by entities that become *members of the group at that time.

market value of first level entity’s direct and indirect membership interests in subject entity means so much of the *market value of all membership interests in the subject entity (as defined above) as is attributable to *membership interests that the first level entity holds directly, or indirectly through other linked entities; and

the subject entity has the remainder of the step 3A amount.

Membership interests in subsidiary members of group

In applying section 705-93 for the purposes of this Subdivision, disregard paragraph 705-93(1)(f) if:

the rollover asset mentioned in that section is a membership interest in an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member at the linked entity joining time; and

(b) the rollover asset is not held at that time by the entity that becomes the *head company of the group.

Note: The step 3A amount is worked out under section 705-93.

705-230 Adjustments to restrict step 4 reduction of allocable cost amount to effective distributions to head company in respect of direct membership interests

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the linked entities, the reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 (about pre-formation time distributions out of certain profits) is made only for profits that have been effectively distributed to the *head company in respect of its direct *membership interests in the entities. This ensures consistency with the ordering rule in section 705-225.

When section applies

This section applies to a distribution to the extent that the following conditions are satisfied:

the distribution is made by a linked entity;

in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the linked entity there would, apart from this section, be a reduction under step 4 in the table in section 705-60 for the distribution.

Step 4 reduction only if subject distribution is made to head company

There is no reduction as mentioned in subsection (2) for the distribution unless it is made to the *head company of the group.

705-235 Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount to take account of owned profits or losses of certain linked entities

Object

The object of this section is to prevent a distortion under section 705-35 in the allocation of allocable cost amount to a linked entity where that entity has direct or indirect *membership interests in another linked entity that has certain profits or tax losses.

Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount where direct interest in linked entity with profits/losses

If:

a linked entity has *membership interests in a second linked entity; and

in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the second linked entity:

(i) an amount is required to be added (the second linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 3 in the table in section 705-60 (about profits accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

(ii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the second linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

(iii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the second linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 5A in the table in section 705-60 (about *FRT disallowed amounts accruing to a joined group before the joining time);

then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first linked entity, the *market value of the first linked entity’s membership interests in the second linked entity is reduced (in a subparagraph (b)(i) case) or increased (in a subparagraph (b)(ii) or (iii) case) by the first linked entity’s interest in the second linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount (see subsection (3)).

First linked entity’s interest in second linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount

The first linked entity’s interest in the second linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount is worked out using the formula:

Adjustment to allocation of allocable cost amount for indirect interest in linked entity with profits/losses

If:

a linked entity has *membership interests in a second linked entity; and

the second linked entity has, directly or indirectly through one or more interposed linked entities, membership interests in a third linked entity; and

in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for the third linked entity:

(i) an amount is required to be added (the third linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 3 in the table in section 705-60 (about profits accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

(ii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the third linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 5 in the table in section 705-60 (about losses accruing before becoming a subsidiary member of the group); or

(iii) an amount is required to be subtracted (also the third linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount) under step 5A in the table in section 705-60 (about *FRT disallowed amounts accruing to a joined group before the joining time);

then, for the purposes of working out under section 705-35 the tax cost setting amount for the assets of the first linked entity, the *market value of the first linked entity’s membership interests in the second linked entity is reduced (in a subparagraph (c)(i) case) or increased (in a subparagraph (c)(ii) or (iii) case) by the first linked entity’s interest in the third linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount (see subsection (5)).

First linked entity’s interest in third linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount

The first linked entity’s interest in the third linked entity’s profit/loss adjustment amount is worked out using the formula:

where:

market value of first linked entity’s membership interests in third linked entity held through second linked entity means the *market value of all *membership interests in the third linked entity that the first linked entity holds indirectly through the second linked entity (including through that entity and one or more other linked entities that are interposed between the second linked entity and the third linked entity).

705-240 Modified application of section 705-57

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that, in working out tax cost setting amounts for trading stock, *depreciating assets, *registered emissions units or *revenue assets of the linked entities, section 705-57 (about loss of pre-CGT status of certain membership interests) only applies if the *membership interests held directly by the *head company of the group are affected.

Modified application of section 705-57—basic modification

For the purposes of applying section 705-57 in accordance with this Subdivision, a reference in that section to a *membership interest that a *member of the joined group holds in the joining entity at the joining time is taken to be a reference to a membership interest that the *head company of the consolidated group holds directly in a linked entity at the time the linked entity becomes a *subsidiary member.

Modified application of section 705-57—additional modifications where section 705-225 applies

(3) Also, if a linked entity (the first linked entity) holds a *membership interest (the subject membership interest) in another linked entity (the second linked entity), section 705-57 (as modified in accordance with subsection (2)) is to be applied in relation to the subject membership interest as follows.

(4) First work out whether there would be a reduction under that section in the *tax cost setting amount for the subject membership interest that is used as mentioned in subsection 705-225(3) (the subsection 705-225(3) tax cost setting amount) if:

the subject membership interest, if it is not a revenue etc. asset of the first linked entity, were taken to be such an asset; and

paragraphs 705-57(2)(c) and (d) and subsection 705-57(7) did not apply to the subject membership interest.

(5) Next, if there would be such a reduction (whose amount is the notional section 705-57 reduction amount):

apply section 705-57 to reduce the tax cost setting amount for any revenue etc. asset of the second linked entity; and

if the second linked entity holds a *membership interest in another linked entity—apply section 705-57 in relation to that interest in accordance with subsection (3) of this section;

and for those purposes:

the subject membership interest is taken to be a membership interest that the *head company of the group holds directly in the second linked entity; and

the requirements of paragraphs 705-57(2)(a) and (b) are taken to be satisfied in relation to the subject membership interest; and

the subject membership interest is taken to have a *cost base and *reduced cost base equal to the subsection 705-225(3) tax cost setting amount; and

the subject membership interest is taken to have a loss of pre-CGT status adjustment amount equal to the notional section 705-57 reduction amount.

Note: If the head company actually held any membership interests in the second linked entity, or if other linked entities held membership interests in the second linked entity to which this subsection also applied, those membership interests would also be taken into account in working out the reduction under paragraph (a) and in applying paragraph (b).

Subdivision 705-E — Adjustments for errors etc.

Guide to Subdivision 705-E

705-300 What this Subdivision is about

Errors in making tax cost setting amount calculations are reversed by means of an immediate capital gain or loss if it would be unreasonable to require the calculations to be re-done.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

705-305 Object of this Subdivision

705-310 Operation of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

705-315 Errors that attract special adjustment action

705-320 Tax cost setting amounts taken to be correct

Operative provisions

705-305 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to avoid the time and expense involved in correcting errors affecting tax cost setting amount calculations. This is done by providing for *capital gains or *capital losses to reverse the errors.

705-310 Operation of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

To avoid doubt, this Subdivision does not limit the operation of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

705-315 Errors that attract special adjustment action

Section 705-320 (about later adjustments to correct tax cost setting amount calculation errors) applies if the conditions in this section are satisfied.

Tax cost setting amount taken into account

The first condition is that the *head company of a consolidated group worked out a tax cost setting amount, in purported compliance with this Division, for an asset of an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group that is an asset of a kind referred to in section 705-35 as a reset cost base asset.

Error in calculation

The second condition is that:

the *head company made one or more errors in working out the tax cost setting amount; and

those errors caused the tax cost setting amount to differ from its correct amount.

If the errors caused the tax cost setting amount to be more, the difference is an overstated amount. If the errors caused the tax cost setting amount to be less, the difference is an understated amount.

Unreasonable to require recalculation

The third condition is that, having regard to the following factors:

the net size of the errors compared to the size of the allocable cost amount for the joining entity;

the number of tax cost setting amounts that would have to be recalculated, and the difficulty of making the recalculations;

the number of adjustments, in assessments that could be amended and in future income tax returns, that would be necessary to correct the errors;

the difficulty in obtaining any necessary information;

it is not reasonable to require a recalculation of the amounts involved.

Exception where error due to fraud or evasion

(5) However, the conditions in this section are not satisfied if the errors were to any extent due to fraud or evasion.

Requirement to notify

The *head company of the consolidated group must, as soon as practicable after becoming aware that it made one or more errors in working out the tax cost setting amount, notify the Commissioner in the approved form:

that it had made the errors; and

of the amount of the overstated amount or understated amount.

705-320 Tax cost setting amounts taken to be correct

(1) For the purposes of this Act (other than this Subdivision) and for the purposes of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, any *tax cost setting amounts that were worked out by the *head company, so far as they were due to the errors, are taken to have been correct if the conditions in section 705-315 are satisfied.

Note 1: If the conditions in section 705-315 are satisfied, CGT event L6 happens (see section 104-525).

Note 2: Subsection (1) means that the Commissioner cannot amend any assessments necessary to correct the errors, and that (except as mentioned in subsection (2)) no offences or administrative penalties arise in respect of the errors.

(2) Subsection (1) does not apply for the purposes of determining whether there is an offence against section 8N of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, or an administrative penalty under section 284-75 or 284-145 in Schedule 1 to that Act, in relation to statements made before the Commissioner became aware of the errors.

Note 1: Section 8N of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 deals with false or misleading statements. Sections 284-75 and 284-145 in Schedule 1 to that Act set out the circumstances in which an entity is liable for an administrative penalty.

Note 2: The offence and administrative penalty provisions however apply on a modified basis—see subsection 8W(1C) of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, and subsections 284-80(2) and 284-150(2) in Schedule 1 to that Act.

Division 707 — Losses for head companies when entities become members etc.

Table of Subdivisions

707-A Transfer of losses to head company

707-B Can a transferred loss be utilised?

707-C Amount of transferred losses that can be utilised

707-D Special rules about losses

Subdivision 707-A — Transfer of losses to head company

Guide to Subdivision 707-A

707-100 What this Subdivision is about

A loss made by an entity before the time it becomes a member of a consolidated group is transferred to the head company of the group at that time if the entity could have utilised the loss had the entity not become a member of the group.

Table of sections

707-105 Who can utilise the loss?

Objects

707-110 Objects of this Subdivision

Application

707-115 What losses this Subdivision applies to

Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company

707-120 Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company

707-125 Modified business continuity test for companies’ post-1999 losses

707-130 Modified pattern of distributions test

707-135 Transferring loss transferred to joining entity because business continuity test was satisfied

Effect of transfer of loss

707-140 Effect of transfer of loss

Cancelling the transfer of the loss

707-145 Cancelling the transfer of the loss

What happens if the loss is not transferred?

707-150 Loss cannot be utilised for income year ending after the joining time

707-105 Who can utilise the loss?

If the loss is transferred, the head company is treated for income years ending after the transfer as having made the loss, so the head company can utilise the loss for those income years to the extent permitted by:

the general rules (outside this Part) about an entity utilising a loss it has made; and

the special rules about transferred losses in the other Subdivisions of this Division that supplement and modify those general rules.

Note: If the entity from which the loss was transferred became a subsidiary member of the consolidated group, the entity cannot utilise the loss for those income years because of section 701-1 (single entity rule) and section 707-140.

(2) If the loss is not transferred, then, for an income year ending after the time the entity became a member of the consolidated group, the loss cannot be utilised by any entity.

Note: The loss will not be transferred if the entity would not have been able to utilise it or if the transfer is cancelled under section 707-145.

Objects

707-110 Objects of this Subdivision

The main objects of this Subdivision are:

(a) to provide for the transfer of a loss from an entity (the joining entity) becoming a *member of a *consolidated group to the *head company of the group (so the head company may be able to *utilise it), if the joining entity could have utilised the loss if it had not become a member of the group; and

to prevent the utilisation by any entity of a loss made by the joining entity, if the joining entity could not have utilised the loss if it had not become a member of the group.

Application

707-115 What losses this Subdivision applies to

This Subdivision applies to a loss of any *sort if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *member of a *consolidated group (the joined group) at a time (the joining time) in an income year (the joining year); and

the loss was made by the joining entity for an income year ending before the joining time.

Note 1: If the joining entity had a loss transferred to it by a previous operation of this Subdivision (when the entity was the head company of a consolidated group), this Subdivision operates later as if the joining entity had made the loss. See section 707-140.

Note 2: Section 707-405 may affect the income year for which the joining entity is treated as having made the loss, if the joining entity made the loss and the loss is referable to part of an income year.

Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company

707-120 Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company

Transfer of loss from joining entity to head company

Subject to subsection (1A), the loss is transferred at the joining time from the joining entity to the *head company of the joined group (even if they are the same entity).

The loss is transferred under subsection (1) only to the extent (if any) that the loss could have been *utilised by the joining entity for an income year consisting of the trial year if:

at the joining time, the joining entity had not become a *member of the joined group (but had been a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company if the joining entity is not the head company); and

the amount of the loss that could be utilised for the trial year were not limited by the joining entity’s income or gains for the trial year.

What is the trial year?

(2) The trial year is the period:

(a) starting at the latest of these times:

the time 12 months before the joining time;

the time the joining entity came into existence;

the time the joining entity last ceased to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, if the joining entity had been a member of a consolidated group before the joining time but was not a *member of a consolidated group just before the joining time; and

ending just after the joining time.

Business continuity test involving trial year

When working out whether the joining entity carried on, throughout the trial year (or a period including the trial year):

the same business as the business it carried on at a particular time; or

a similar business to the business it carried on at that time;

assume that the entity carried on at and just after the joining time the same business that it carried on just before the joining time.

Transfer of loss for income year overlapping trial year

If the loss was made by the joining entity for an income year all or part of which occurs in the trial year, the transfer of the loss under subsection (1) is not prevented by the fact that the loss was made for that income year.

Designated infrastructure project entities

Despite subsection (1A), the loss is transferred under subsection (1) to the full extent if:

the loss is a *tax loss; and

the joining entity is a designated infrastructure project entity:

at a time in the loss year; and

just before the joining time.

707-125 Modified business continuity test for companies’ post-1999 losses

This section operates if:

the joining entity made the loss for an income year starting after 30 June 1999; and

(b) section 165-13 or subsection 165-15(2) or (3) or 166-5(5) or (6) is relevant to working out (under section 707-120) whether the loss is transferred from the joining entity.

Work out whether the loss is transferred on the basis that section 165-13 required the joining entity to satisfy the business continuity test for:

(a) the period (the business continuity test period) consisting of:

the trial year; and

the income year that included the *test time worked out for section 165-13 for the joining entity (disregarding paragraph (b) of this subsection), if that income year started before the trial year; and

(b) the time (the test time) just before the end of the income year for which the loss was made by the joining entity.

Work out whether the loss is transferred on the basis that:

(a) subsection 165-15(2) specified that the period (the business continuity test period) for the *business continuity test consisted of:

the trial year; and

the income year in which the person began to control, or became able to control, the voting power in the company, if that income year started before the trial year; and

(b) subsection 165-15(3) required the business continuity test to be applied to the company’s business immediately before the time (the test time) just before the end of the income year for which the loss was made by the joining entity.

If Subdivision 166-A would apply to the joining entity for an income year consisting of the trial year, work out whether the loss is transferred on the basis that:

(a) subsection 166-5(5) treated the joining entity as having satisfied the condition in section 165-13 if the joining entity satisfied the *business continuity test for the period (the business continuity test period) consisting of:

the trial year; and

the income year described in subsection (5) of this section, if that income year started before the trial year; and

(b) subsection 166-5(6) required the business continuity test to be applied to the *business that the joining entity carried on at the time (the test time) just before the end of the income year for which the loss was made by the joining entity.

Note: Subdivision 166-A applies to widely held companies and eligible Division 166 companies unless they choose that Subdivision 165-A apply to them without the modifications made by Subdivision 166-A.

For the purposes of subparagraph (4)(a)(ii), the income year is:

the income year in which occurred the first time mentioned in subsection 166-5(6); or

the income year of the joining entity containing the time at which the joining entity is taken under subsection 707-210(5) to fail to meet the condition in section 165-12, if that subsection is relevant to working out whether the joining entity can *utilise the loss.

Note 1: Section 707-205 affects the start of the test period if the joining entity made the loss under a previous operation of this Subdivision.

Note 2: Section 707-210 is about whether a company can utilise certain losses transferred to it under this Subdivision from a company.

Subsection (4) of this section has effect despite subsection 707-210(6).

Note: Subsection 707-210(6) modifies section 166-5 for working out whether a company can utilise certain losses transferred to it under this Subdivision from a company.

707-130 Modified pattern of distributions test

(1) This section operates for the purpose of working out (under section 707-120) whether the loss is transferred from the joining entity, if section 267-20 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is relevant for that purpose.

Note 1: That section is relevant if the joining entity has been a non-fixed trust at any time in the period from the start of the income year in which the entity made the loss until the time it became a subsidiary member of the joined group (and was not an excepted trust at all times in the period).

Note 2: That section prevents an entity from utilising a tax loss unless the entity meets the conditions in subsection 267-30(2) (if applicable) and section 267-35 in that Schedule by passing the pattern of distributions test for certain income years.

Section 267-30 in that Schedule has effect as if the income year mentioned in that section were the joining year, and not the trial year.

Note: Section 267-30 in that Schedule requires the joining entity to pass the pattern of distributions test for the income year mentioned in that section if that entity distributed income or capital in that income year or within 2 months after the end of that income year.

Section 267-35 in that Schedule has effect as if the reference in that section to an earlier income year were to an income year earlier than the joining year.

Disregard each distribution (if any) of income or capital (within the meaning of that Schedule) made by the joining entity after the joining time, so far as it was made from an amount of the entity’s income or capital attributable to a time after the joining time, in working out:

whether section 267-30 in that Schedule requires the joining entity to pass the pattern of distributions test (as defined in that Schedule); and

whether the joining entity passes that test as required by section 267-30 or 267-35 in that Schedule.

Note: Disregarding that percentage of a distribution may affect a test year distribution of income or a test year distribution of capital, as those terms are defined in section 269-65 in that Schedule, and thus affect whether the joining entity passes the pattern of distributions test under section 269-60 in that Schedule.

707-135 Transferring loss transferred to joining entity because business continuity test was satisfied

(1) This section operates if the loss had been transferred to the joining entity (by a previous operation of this Subdivision) because the entity from which the loss was transferred carried on during a particular period:

the same business as it carried on at a particular time; or

if section 165-211 applies in relation to the loss—a business similar to the business it carried on at a particular time.

Note: Section 165-211 enables an entity to satisfy the business continuity test by carrying on a similar business.

(2) The loss is not transferred from the joining entity to the *head company of the joined group (despite section 707-120), unless the joining entity satisfies the *business continuity test for:

(a) the *trial year (the business continuity test period); and

(b) the time (the test time) just before the end of the income year in which the loss was transferred to the joining entity.

Effect of transfer of loss

707-140 Effect of transfer of loss

To the extent that the loss is transferred under section 707-120 from the joining entity to the *head company of the joined group, this Act operates (except so far as the contrary intention appears) for the purposes of income years ending after the transfer as if:

the head company had made the loss for the income year in which the transfer occurs; and

the joining entity had not made the loss for the income year for which the joining entity actually made the loss.

However, subsection (1) does not affect the operation of paragraph 165-211(1)(a) or (c).

Note: This subsection ensures that the head company can only apply the version of the business continuity test in section 165-211 if the loss of the joining entity was incurred on or after 1 July 2015.

Head company may utilise loss for income year of transfer

The *head company is not prevented from *utilising the loss for the income year in which the transfer occurs merely because this Act operates as if the head company had made the loss (to the extent of the transfer) for that year.

Debt forgiveness in income year for which loss is made

If a debt of the *head company of the joined group is *forgiven in the income year in which the transfer occurs, sections 245-115 and 245-130 operate as if the head company had made the loss for an earlier income year.

Note: This subsection has the effect that the loss may be reduced in accordance with one of those subsections by applying the total net forgiven amount for the income year in which the transfer occurs.

Cancelling the transfer of the loss

707-145 Cancelling the transfer of the loss

The *head company of the joined group may choose to cancel the transfer of the loss.

If the *head company of the joined group does so, this Act (except this section) operates for all income years ending after the transfer as if it had not occurred under section 707-120.

The choice cannot be revoked.

What happens if the loss is not transferred?

707-150 Loss cannot be utilised for income year ending after the joining time

To the extent that the loss is not transferred under section 707-120 from the joining entity to the *head company of the joined group, the loss cannot be *utilised by any entity for an income year ending after the joining time.

Subdivision 707-B — Can a transferred loss be utilised?

Guide to Subdivision 707-B

707-200 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision modifies rules about a company maintaining the same ownership to be able to utilise a loss transferred to it under Subdivision 707-A, and specifies what things happening before the transfer are to be taken into account in working out whether the company can utilise the loss.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

707-205 Modified period for test for maintaining same ownership

707-210 Utilisation of certain losses transferred from a company depends on company that made the losses earlier

Operative provisions

707-205 Modified period for test for maintaining same ownership

This section modifies Divisions 165, 166 and 167 for the purposes of working out whether a company can *utilise a loss of any *sort that it made because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A.

Subdivision 165-A and Divisions 166 and 167 operate for those purposes as if the loss year started at the time of the transfer.

Note 1: This means that the ownership test period defined by subsection 165-12(1) and the test period defined by subsection 166-5(2) start at the time of the transfer.

Note 2: Without this section, those periods would start at the start of the income year in which the transfer occurred, so events occurring before the transfer (such as changes in holdings of voting power, rights to dividends or rights to capital) could affect whether the company could utilise the tax loss or net capital loss.

707-210 Utilisation of certain losses transferred from a company depends on company that made the losses earlier

(1) This section has effect for the purposes of working out whether a company (the latest transferee) can *utilise for an income year a loss it made because of a *COT transfer from a company (the latest transferor).

(1A) A transfer of a loss under Subdivision 707-A from a company to a company is a COT transfer of the loss if the transfer occurs because:

the transferor meets the conditions in section 165-12; and

the conditions in one or more of paragraphs 165-15(1)(a), (b) and (c) do not exist in relation to the transferor.

Meeting conditions in section 165-12

(2) The latest transferee is taken to meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the income year in relation to the loss if and only if the company (the test company) described in subsection (3) would have met those conditions for the income year had the circumstances described in subsection (4) existed.

Note 1: The latest transferee and the test company may be the same company.

Note 2: Section 707-405 may affect the income year for which the test company is treated as having made the loss, if the loss is referable to part of an income year.

The test company is the first company to make the loss. However, if:

the loss was made by the latest transferor because of one or more earlier transfers of the loss under Subdivision 707-A from a company to a company; and

(b) one or more of those earlier transfers was not a *COT transfer;

the test company is the company to which the loss was transferred in the most recent transfer described in paragraph (b).

The circumstances are that:

(a) the test company was not treated by Subdivision 707-A for the income year as not having made the loss; and

(b) if the test company made the loss apart from that Subdivision and transferred the loss to itself under that Subdivision—the test company was not treated by that Subdivision for the income year as having made the loss for the income year in which the transfer occurred; and

nothing happened, after the time the loss was transferred from the test company to the *head company of a consolidated group, to *membership interests or voting power:

in an entity that was at that time a *subsidiary member of the group; or

in an entity that was at that time interposed between the test company and the head company;

that would affect whether the test company would meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the income year; and

if the loss has later been transferred under that Subdivision to the head company of another consolidated group—nothing happened, after the time of the later transfer, to membership interests or voting power:

in the later transferor; or

in an entity that was at that time interposed between the later transferor and the head company;

that would affect whether the test company would meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the income year.

Failing to meet conditions in section 165-12

The latest transferee is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-12 only at:

the first time the test company would have failed to meet the condition had the circumstances described in subsection (4) existed; or

the test time described in subsection 166-5(6) for the test company, if Division 166 is relevant to working out whether the test company could have *utilised the loss had the circumstances described in subsection (4) existed.

Business continuity test applying to latest transferee under Division 166

If subsection 166-5(5) affects whether the latest transferee can *utilise the loss for the income year because the latest transferee is a *widely held company or an eligible Division 166 company, or both, during the year, subsection 166-5(6) operates as if it required the business continuity test to be applied to the business the latest transferee carried on just before the time described in subsection (5) of this section.

If the test company made the loss because of a transfer

If the test company made the loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A from another entity, Divisions 165 and 166 operate in relation to the test company for the purposes of subsection (2) as if the test company’s loss year started at the time of the transfer.

Subdivision 707-C — Amount of transferred losses that can be utilised

Guide to Subdivision 707-C

707-300 What this Subdivision is about

Losses transferred to the head company of a consolidated group under Subdivision 707-A can be utilised for an income year only against a fraction of the income or gains remaining after the company has utilised other losses and deductions.

Table of sections

Object

707-305 Object of this Subdivision

How much of a transferred loss can be utilised?

707-310 How much of a transferred loss can be utilised?

707-315 What is a bundle of losses?

707-320 What is the available fraction for a bundle of losses?

707-325 Modified market value of an entity becoming a member of a consolidated group

707-330 Losses transferred from former head company

707-335 Limit on utilising transferred losses if circumstances change during income year

707-340 Utilising transferred losses while exempt income remains

707-345 Other provisions are subject to this Subdivision

Object

Note: This Subdivision does not apply if the joining entity is a designated infrastructure project entity just before the transfer and the head company is a designated infrastructure project entity just after the transfer: see section 415-45.

707-305 Object of this Subdivision

The main object of this Subdivision is to limit, in a way that gives effect to the principles in subsections (2) and (3), the amount of losses transferred under Subdivision 707-A that can be *utilised for an income year by the transferee.

One principle is that the transferee is to *utilise the transferred losses for an income year only to the extent to which it has income or gains for the income year remaining after reduction by its other losses and deductions.

(3) The other principle is that the amount of a transferred loss that the transferee can *utilise is to reflect the amount of the loss that the transferor could have *utilised for the income year if the transferor of the loss (whether the original maker of the loss or not) had not become a *member of a *consolidated group at the time of the transfer.

To give effect to those principles, this Subdivision operates on the assumption that, if each transferor of a loss to the transferee had not become a *member of a consolidated group at the time of the transfer:

all the transferors of transferred losses to the transferee would have made income or gains for the year whose total did not exceed the transferee’s income or gains for the year remaining after reduction by its other losses and deductions; and

a particular transferor’s income or gains for the year would have equalled a fraction of the transferee’s income or gains for the year remaining after reduction by its other losses and deductions.

The fraction is worked out by reference to the transferor’s *market value at the time of the transfer (on the assumption that market value reflects capacity to generate income or gains in future).

How much of a transferred loss can be utilised?

707-310 How much of a transferred loss can be utilised?

This section limits the amount of losses in a particular bundle of losses transferred under Subdivision 707-A that can be *utilised by the transferee. The limit is set by reference to the *available fraction for the bundle.

Note: Section 707-335 of this Act and section 707-350 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 set different limits on utilising losses in a bundle of losses in certain circumstances.

Basic rule

The transferee cannot *utilise more of the losses in the *bundle than the transferee would have been able to utilise (apart from this section) under the conditions in subsections (3), (4) and (5).

The first condition is that the only amount of the transferee’s ordinary income, statutory income or gains (if any) of a kind described in column 1 of an item of the table for the income year is the *available fraction of the amount worked out as described in column 2 of the item having regard to:

the transferee’s ordinary income, statutory income or gains for the income year apart from this section; and

(b) the transferee’s deductions for the income year and losses, except losses transferred to the transferee under Subdivision 707-A.

For the purposes of subsection (3):

(a) the transferee’s *tax losses to which paragraph (b) of, or the table in, that subsection applies are to be worked out on the assumption that the transferee chooses to deduct under subsection 36-17(2) all of the tax losses and that subsection 36-17(5) does not apply to that choice; and

except as mentioned in paragraph (a) of this subsection, amounts worked out as described in column 2 of an item of the table in subsection (3) are to be worked out making the same choices as the transferee actually makes in working out its taxable income as stated in its income tax return for the income year; and

the transferee’s grossed-up franking offset amount mentioned in column 2 of item 6 in the table is the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

franking offsets means the total amount of *tax offsets to which the transferee is entitled for the income year under Division 207 and Subdivision 210-H (except those that are subject to the refundable tax offset rules because of section 67-25).

(4) The second condition is that once the amounts of the transferee’s income or gains have been worked out under subsection (3) they are not reduced by:

deductions, or losses, other than losses in the *bundle; or

taxes or expenses described in subsection 375-805(4) (which is about *net exempt film income).

Note: One of the effects of subsection (4) is that, for working out how much of a film loss in the bundle can be deducted from the transferee’s net exempt film income or net assessable film income:

the transferee’s net exempt film income will be the same as its exempt film income worked out under subsection (3); and

the transferee’s net assessable film income will be the same as its assessable film income worked out under subsection (3).

The third condition is that once the amounts of the transferee’s exempt income have been worked out under subsection (3), assume that the transferee had no losses, outgoings or taxes described in subsection 36-20(1) (which is about net exempt income), in working out how much of a *tax loss in the *bundle can be deducted from the transferee’s net exempt income.

707-315 What is a bundle of losses?

(1) A bundle of losses comes into existence at the time (the initial transfer time) a loss of any *sort that has not previously been transferred under Subdivision 707-A is transferred under that Subdivision from an entity (the real loss-maker) to the *head company of a *consolidated group (the joined group).

(2) At the initial transfer time, the bundle consists of every loss (regardless of its *sort) that:

is transferred at that time under that Subdivision from the real loss-maker to the *head company of the joined group; and

has not been transferred under that Subdivision before that time.

Note: For certain purposes, section 707-327 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 treats the bundle as including certain other losses too.

(3) The bundle still exists at a later time if it includes at that later time at least one loss of any *sort that could be *utilised or otherwise reduced by an entity for an income year ending after that time (even if one or more losses have ceased to be included in the bundle before that later time).

Note: A bundle continues to exist even if the losses in it are transferred again under Subdivision 707-A after the initial transfer time.

A loss ceases to be included in a *bundle at the first time for which it is true that the loss cannot be *utilised or otherwise reduced by any entity for an income year ending after that time.

If, had a loss been made by a company as assumed under a provision of Division 170, the loss would have been transferred under Subdivision 707-A, this Subdivision and other provisions that relate to or may affect the *available fractions for one or more *bundles of losses (including sections 707-140 and 719-325) operate as if the transfer had occurred.

Note: Section 707-140 provides for a choice to cancel a transfer under Subdivision 707-A. Section 719-325 provides for a choice to cancel all losses in certain bundles of losses. A choice under one of those sections may result in a bundle not coming into existence, or not being in existence after a certain time.

To avoid doubt, a choice under section 707-145 or 719-325, as it operates because of subsection (5) of this section, relating to the loss does not affect or prevent:

a transfer of the loss that would have occurred under Subdivision 707-A as described in another application of that subsection involving a different company; or

*utilisation of the loss by the company that actually made the loss and is different from the company assumed under Division 170 to have made the loss.

Note: Therefore a choice under section 707-145 or 719-325, as operating because of subsection (5) of this section, will be able to cause only one bundle not to exist, and will not affect the existence of other bundles that are treated as existing because of other operations of that subsection.

707-320 What is the available fraction for a bundle of losses?

(1) The available fraction for a *bundle of losses at a time is:

where:

transferee’s adjusted market value at the initial transfer time means the amount that would be the *market value, at the initial transfer time, of the transferee to which the losses in the *bundle were transferred at that time if:

the transferee did not have a loss of any *sort for an income year ending before that time; and

the balance of the transferee’s franking account were nil at that time.

Note: The value for the transferee will be worked out on the basis that subsidiary members of the consolidated group headed by the transferee are part of the transferee, because of section 701-1 (the single entity rule).

(2) However, if an event described in an item of the table happens, the available fraction for the *bundle is reduced or maintained just after the event by multiplying it by the factor identified in the item:

If the transfer under Subdivision 707-A of one or more losses in a *bundle causes events described in 2 or more items of the table in subsection (2) to happen and require calculations of the available fraction for that bundle and for one or more other bundles:

make the calculations required by those items in the order in which the items appear in the table; and

take account of the results of a calculation under an earlier item in making a calculation under a later item.

For a bundle of losses:

(a) subject to paragraph (b)—the available fraction is worked out to 3 decimal places, rounding up if the fourth decimal place is 5 or more; or

(b) if the available fraction worked out under paragraph (a) is 0.000 and, if it were worked out to more decimal places, it would include one or more non-zero digits—the available fraction is worked out to the number of decimal places that includes the first or only such digit, rounding up if the next decimal place is 5 or more.

Examples: For 0.000328, the available fraction is 0.0003. For 0.000086, the available fraction is 0.00009.

Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to subsection (4).

(5) If, apart from this subsection, the available fraction for a *bundle of losses would need to be worked out by dividing a number by 0, work out the available fraction by dividing the number by 1.

(6) The available fraction for a *bundle of losses is 0 if, apart from this subsection, it would be negative.

707-325 Modified market value of an entity becoming a member of a consolidated group

Basic rule

(1) The modified market value of an entity that becomes a *member of a *consolidated group at a particular time is the amount that would be the *market value of the entity at that time if:

the entity had no loss of any *sort for any income year, and the balance of its franking account at that time were nil; and

the *subsidiary members of the group at that time were separate entities and not just parts of the *head company of the group; and

(c) the entity’s market value did not include an amount attributable (directly or indirectly) to a *membership interest in a member of the group (other than the entity):

that is a corporate tax entity; or

that transferred a loss under Subdivision 707-A to the head company of the group at or before that time; and

(d) the contribution to the entity’s market value made by a trust (other than one that is a member described in paragraph (c)) were limited to the amount attributable to the entity’s *fixed entitlements (if any) at that time to income or capital of the trust that is not attributable (directly or indirectly) to a membership interest in such a member.

Note 1: Section 707-330 affects the modified market value of an entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the consolidated group, if the entity was the head company of another consolidated group just beforehand.

Note 2: Section 707-325 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides for an entity’s modified market value to be increased in certain circumstances for the purposes of working out the available fraction for a bundle of losses transferred from the entity.

Rule to prevent inflation of modified market value

However, if:

one or more of the events described in subsection (4) occurred in the 4 years before the time; and

(b) the amount worked out under subsection (1) exceeds what it would have been if none of those events had occurred;

the modified market value of the entity at the time is the amount worked out under subsection (1), reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (3).

(3) The amount of the reduction is the lesser of:

the excess described in paragraph (2)(b); and

the total increase in the *market value of the entity that occurred immediately after each event mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) because of the event.

These are the events:

an injection of capital into the entity or an entity that was an associate of the entity (or of the trustee of the entity, if the entity is a trust) at the time of the injection;

a transaction that:

did not take place at *arm’s length; and

involved the entity or an entity that was an associate of the entity (or of the trustee of the entity, if the entity is a trust) at the time of the transaction.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(a), disregard an injection of capital if, and only if, it is made:

into a listed public company through a dividend reinvestment *scheme involving the issue of a *share in the company to an entity that held a share in the company before the injection; or

in association with the acquisition of a *share in a company in relation to which the conditions in subsection 703-35(5) are met; or

in association with the acquisition of a *share, in a body corporate, in relation to which the conditions in subsection 703-37(4) are met.

Note 1: Section 703-35 of this Act deals with shares acquired under arrangements for employee shareholdings.

Note 2: Section 703-37 of this Act deals with certain preference shares following an ADI restructure.

707-330 Losses transferred from former head company

This section has effect for working out the available fraction for a *bundle of losses if:

(a) an entity (the ex-head company) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the bigger group) at a time (the joining time); and

(b) just before the joining time the ex-head company was the *head company of another consolidated group (the old group); and

at the joining time the losses are transferred under Subdivision 707-A from the ex-head company to the head company of the bigger group.

Work out the ex-head company’s *modified market value or *market value as if each *member of the bigger group that had been a *subsidiary member of the old group just before the joining time were a part of the ex-head company, and not a separate member of the bigger group, when the transfer occurred.

Also, work out the ex-head company’s *modified market value as if each *subsidiary member of the old group had been a part of the ex-head company while it was a subsidiary member of the old group.

707-335 Limit on utilising transferred losses if circumstances change during income year

This section limits the amount of losses in a particular bundle of losses transferred under Subdivision 707-A that can be *utilised by the transferee for an income year if:

the losses in the bundle are transferred to the transferee after the start of the income year; or

(b) the value of the *available fraction for the bundle changes at a time within the period (the transferee’s loss-holding period) described in subsection (2).

The transferee’s loss-holding period:

starts at the start of the income year or, if the losses in the *bundle were transferred to the transferee from another entity during the income year, at the time of the transfer; and

ends when one of these events occurs:

the income year ends;

the transferee becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group.

The transferee cannot *utilise for the income year more of the losses than is reasonable having regard to:

the method in section 707-310 for working out the maximum amount of the losses the transferee could utilise for the income year (apart from this section); and

the number of days in the transferee’s loss-holding period; and

the value or values of the *available fraction for the *bundle during the transferee’s loss-holding period; and

the number of days in the transferee’s loss-holding period for which the available fraction for the bundle has a particular value; and

the principle that, if the transferee transferred the losses to itself under Subdivision 707-A after the start of the income year, the amount of the losses it can utilise for the income year should be worked out as if:

the losses had been included in the bundle from the start of the income year; and

the available fraction for the bundle had been 1 from the start of the income year until the time of the transfer; and

any other relevant matters.

Section 707-310 has effect subject to this section.

707-340 Utilising transferred losses while exempt income remains

Transferred film losses and net exempt film income

If:

the transferee of film losses in a bundle of losses has deducted from its *net exempt film income for an income year an amount of those losses that:

is equal to the amount of *exempt film income worked out under subsection 707-310(3) for the transferee and the bundle; or

if section 707-335 affects the transferee’s utilisation of losses in the bundle—is reasonable, having regard to that section; and

the transferee still has net exempt film income for the year and film losses remaining in the bundle;

the fact the transferee still has net exempt film income does not stop it deducting film losses remaining in the bundle from its *net assessable film income for the year.

Transferred tax losses and net exempt income

If:

the transferee of *tax losses (other than film losses) in a bundle of losses has deducted from its net exempt income for an income year an amount of its tax losses (other than film losses) in the bundle that:

is equal to the amount of exempt income worked out under subsection 707-310(3) for the transferee and the bundle; or

if section 707-335 affects the transferee’s utilisation of losses in the bundle—is reasonable, having regard to that section; and

the transferee still has net exempt income for the year and tax losses (other than film losses) remaining in the bundle;

the fact the transferee still has net exempt income does not stop it deducting tax losses (other than film losses) remaining in the bundle from its assessable income for the year.

Limit on deduction

This section does not allow the deduction for an income year of an amount of losses in a *bundle so as to exceed the limit set by section 707-310 or 707-335 on *utilisation for the year of losses of that *sort in the bundle.

707-345 Other provisions are subject to this Subdivision

The rules in this Subdivision are additional to the provisions of this Act about *utilising losses that are outside this Subdivision. Those provisions have effect subject to this Subdivision.

Subdivision 707-D — Special rules about losses

Table of sections

707-400 Head company’s business before and after consolidation not compared

707-410 Exit history rule does not treat entity as having made a loss

707-415 Application of losses with nil available fraction for certain purposes

707-400 Head company’s business before and after consolidation not compared

If:

the business continuity test applies to a company that becomes a *head company of a consolidated group at a time; and

apart from this section, the business continuity test period would start before that time and end after it;

the business continuity test period starts at that time (and ends when it would end apart from this section), for the purposes of that application of the business continuity test.

Subsection (1) does not apply for the purposes of working out whether the company can transfer to itself a loss under section 707-120.

707-410 Exit history rule does not treat entity as having made a loss

(1) To avoid doubt, if the *head company of a *consolidated group makes a loss of a particular *sort and an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, the entity is not taken because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule):

to have made the loss; or

to have made another loss of the same sort because of the circumstances that caused the head company to make the loss.

It does not matter whether the *head company makes the loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A (whether from the entity or another entity) or because of another provision.

707-415 Application of losses with nil available fraction for certain purposes

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) a *tax loss or a *net capital loss was transferred from the joining entity to the *head company of the group at the joining time under Subdivision 707-A; and

that loss is included in a bundle of losses for which the *available fraction is 0.

The *head company can choose to apply the loss as shown in the table:

Limits on application of loss

The loss can be applied under subsection (2) in relation to an income year only to the extent that it could be *utilised by the *head company for the income year, on the assumption that the *available fraction for the bundle of losses was 1.

The amount of the loss that may be applied in accordance with item 1 of the table in subsection (2) cannot exceed the gross forgiven amount of the debt to which the loss is attributable.

The amount of the loss that may be applied in accordance with item 2 of the table in subsection (2) cannot exceed the amount of the loss that is attributable to the deduction mentioned in that item.

For the purposes of item 3 of the table in subsection (2), if:

assuming that the joining entity ceased to be a *subsidiary member of the consolidated group just after the joining time, the *head company of the group would make a *capital gain because of CGT event L5; and

the sum of the losses in the bundle of losses mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) exceeds the amount of the capital gain;

the total amount of those losses that may be applied in accordance with that item cannot exceed the amount of the capital gain.

To avoid doubt, a loss can be applied under this section only to the extent that it has not already been applied.

Division 709 — Other rules applying when entities become subsidiary members etc.

Table of Subdivisions

709-A Franking accounts

709-B Imputation issues

709-C Treatment of excess franking deficit tax offsets when entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group

709-D Deducting bad debts

Subdivision 709-A — Franking accounts

Guide to Subdivision 709-A

709-50 What this Subdivision is about

Only the head company of a consolidated group has an operating franking account. The subsidiary members’ franking accounts do not operate while they are subsidiary members. Debits or credits that would otherwise arise in subsidiary members’ franking accounts arise instead in the head company’s franking account.

Table of sections

Object

709-55 Object of this Subdivision

Treatment of franking accounts at joining time

709-60 Nil balance franking account for joining entity

Treatment of subsidiary member’s franking account

709-65 Subsidiary member’s franking account does not operate

Treatment of head company’s franking account

709-70 Credits arising in head company’s franking account

709-75 Debits arising in head company’s franking account

Franking distributions by subsidiary member

709-80 Subsidiary member’s distributions on employee shares and certain preference shares taken to be distributions by the head company

709-85 Non-share distributions by subsidiary members taken to be distributions by head company

709-90 Subsidiary member’s distributions to foreign resident taken to be distributions by head company

Payment of group liability by former subsidiary member

709-95 Payment of group liability by former subsidiary member

709-100 Refund of income tax to former subsidiary member

Object

709-55 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is for each consolidated group to operate what is in substance a single franking account, by ensuring that:

there is a nil balance in the franking accounts of entities becoming *subsidiary members of the group; and

the franking accounts of those subsidiary members do not operate while they are subsidiary members; and

debits or credits that would otherwise arise in the franking accounts of the subsidiary members arise instead in the franking account of the *head company of the group; and

the head company is the only *member of the group that can frank distributions.

Treatment of franking accounts at joining time

709-60 Nil balance franking account for joining entity

(1) This section operates if an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time).

If the joining entity’s franking account is in surplus just before the joining time:

a debit equal to the franking surplus arises at the joining time in the joining entity’s franking account; and

a credit equal to the franking surplus arises at the joining time in the franking account of the *head company of the group.

If the joining entity’s franking account is in deficit just before the joining time:

a credit equal to the franking deficit arises at the joining time in the joining entity’s franking account; and

the joining entity is liable to pay franking deficit tax as if the joining entity’s income year had ended just before the joining time; and

despite item 5 of the table in section 205-15, a credit does not arise under that item in the joining entity’s franking account because of that liability.

Treatment of subsidiary member’s franking account

709-65 Subsidiary member’s franking account does not operate

The franking account of an entity that is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group does not operate during the period:

beginning just after the entity becomes a subsidiary member of the group; and

ending when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group.

Treatment of head company’s franking account

709-70 Credits arising in head company’s franking account

(1) This section operates if a credit would arise in the *franking account of a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the crediting time) apart from section 709-65.

A credit arises in the franking account of the *head company of the group at the crediting time.

Note: A credit can also arise in the head company’s franking account at any time under section 205-15.

The amount of the credit is the same as the amount of the credit that would arise in the franking account of the *subsidiary member.

This section does not apply to a credit arising in the *subsidiary member’s franking account under paragraph 709-60(3)(a).

Note: Such a credit arises if the entity that became the subsidiary member had a deficit in its franking account just before the time it became the subsidiary member. The credit equals the deficit, creating a nil balance in the account from that time.

709-75 Debits arising in head company’s franking account

(1) This section operates if a debit would arise in the *franking account of a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the debiting time) apart from section 709-65.

A debit arises in the franking account of the *head company of the group at the debiting time.

Note: A debit can also arise in the head company’s franking account at any time under section 205-30.

The amount of the debit is the same as the amount of the debit that would arise in the franking account of the *subsidiary member.

This section does not apply to a debit arising in the *subsidiary member’s franking account under paragraph 709-60(2)(a).

Note: Such a debit arises if the entity that became the subsidiary member had a surplus in its franking account just before the time it became the subsidiary member. The debit equals the surplus, creating a nil balance in the account from that time.

Franking distributions by subsidiary member

709-80 Subsidiary member’s distributions on employee shares and certain preference shares taken to be distributions by the head company

This section operates if:

a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group makes a frankable distribution; and

(b) the distribution is made because an entity (the shareholder) owns a *share in the subsidiary member; and

the share must be disregarded under subsection 703-35(4) or 703-37(4); and

the distribution is made to the shareholder, or to another entity because the shareholder owns the share; and

the entity to which the distribution is made is not a *member of the group.

Note 1: Subsection 703-35(4) requires certain shares acquired under employee share schemes to be disregarded.

Note 2: Subsection 703-37(4) requires certain preference shares to be disregarded following an ADI restructure.

Part 3-6 operates as if the *distribution were a frankable distribution made by the *head company of the group to a *member of the head company.

Note: Part 3-6 deals with imputation.

709-85 Non-share distributions by subsidiary members taken to be distributions by head company

This section operates if:

an entity holds a *non-share equity interest in a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

the subsidiary member makes a non-share distribution to the entity as holder of the interest; and

the distribution is a frankable distribution; and

the entity to which the distribution is made is not a *member of the group.

Part 3-6 operates as if the *distribution were a frankable distribution made by the *head company of the group to a *member of the head company.

Note: Part 3-6 deals with imputation.

709-90 Subsidiary member’s distributions to foreign resident taken to be distributions by head company

Part 3-6 operates as if a *frankable distribution made by a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the foreign-held subsidiary) were a frankable distribution made by the *head company of the group to a *member of the head company if:

(a) the foreign-held subsidiary meets the set of requirements in section 703-45, section 701C-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 or section 701C-15 of that Act; and

the frankable distribution is made to a foreign resident.

Note: Part 3-6 deals with imputation.

Payment of group liability by former subsidiary member

709-95 Payment of group liability by former subsidiary member

This section operates if:

(a) an entity (the former subsidiary) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the old group) at a particular time (the leaving time); and

at or after the leaving time, the former subsidiary:

pays a PAYG instalment for which it was jointly and severally liable under subsection 721-15(1) because it was a subsidiary member of the old group; or

pays income tax for which it was jointly and severally liable under that subsection because it was a subsidiary member of the old group; and

(c) apart from this section, a *franking credit would arise under section 205-15 in the *franking account of the former subsidiary at a time (the crediting time) because of that payment.

The credit:

does not arise at the crediting time in the franking account of the former subsidiary; and

instead, arises at the crediting time in the franking account of the entity that was the *head company of the old group at the leaving time.

709-100 Refund of income tax to former subsidiary member

This section operates if:

(a) an entity (the former subsidiary) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the old group) at a particular time (the leaving time); and

at or after the leaving time, the former subsidiary receives a refund of income tax or receives a refund of diverted profits tax, for which it was jointly and severally liable under subsection 721-15(1) because it was a subsidiary member of the old group; and

(c) apart from this section, a *franking debit would arise under section 205-30 in the *franking account of the former subsidiary at a time (the debiting time) because of that payment.

The debit:

does not arise at the debiting time in the franking account of the former subsidiary; and

instead, arises at the debiting time in the franking account of the entity that was the *head company of the old group at the leaving time.

Subdivision 709-B — Imputation issues

Guide to Subdivision 709-B

709-150 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision modifies the way Division 208 (exempting entities and former exempting entities) operates in relation to consolidated groups.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

709-155 Testing consolidated groups

709-160 Subsidiary member is exempting entity

709-165 Subsidiary member is former exempting entity

709-170 Head company and subsidiary are exempting entities

709-175 Head company is former exempting entity

Operative provisions

709-155 Testing consolidated groups

To determine whether a consolidated group is an exempting entity or former exempting entity, the tests in Division 208 are applied to the *head company of the group.

However, there are some additional rules that can alter the way that Division 208 applies to a consolidated group. These are set out in sections 709-160 to 709-175.

In applying those rules to an entity that is a *member of a consolidated group:

Division 208 is to be applied before those rules; and

that Division is to be applied just after the entity became a member of the group but, for a *subsidiary member, it is to be applied on the assumption that the subsidiary was not a member of the group at that time.

Except as mentioned in paragraph (3)(b), Division 208 has no application to a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group.

709-160 Subsidiary member is exempting entity

This section operates if:

the *head company of a consolidated group is neither an exempting entity nor a former exempting entity; and

(b) a *corporate tax entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at a time (the joining time); and

the entity is an exempting entity at the joining time.

These rules apply to the consolidated group.

Note 1: If the subsidiary’s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3).

Note 2: The subsidiary’s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65.

709-165 Subsidiary member is former exempting entity

This section operates if:

the *head company of a consolidated group is neither an exempting entity nor a former exempting entity; and

(b) a *corporate tax entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at a time (also the joining time); and

the entity is a former exempting entity at the joining time.

These rules apply to the consolidated group.

Note 1: Any surplus in the subsidiary’s franking account will be transferred to the head company’s franking account: see subsection 709-60(2).

Note 2: If the subsidiary’s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3). This deficit may be increased by item 4 in the table in subsection (2).

Note 3: The subsidiary’s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65.

709-170 Head company and subsidiary are exempting entities

There is no change to the status of the *head company of a consolidated group if:

the head company is an exempting entity; and

(b) a *corporate tax entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at a time (also the joining time); and

the entity is an exempting entity at the joining time.

Note 1: If the subsidiary’s franking account is in surplus, that surplus will be transferred to the head company’s franking account: see subsection 709-60(2).

Note 2: If the subsidiary’s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3).

Note 3: The subsidiary’s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65.

709-175 Head company is former exempting entity

Subsection (2) operates if:

the *head company of a consolidated group is a former exempting entity; and

(b) a *corporate tax entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at a time (also the joining time); and

the entity is an exempting entity at the joining time.

These rules apply to the consolidated group.

Note 1: If the subsidiary’s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3).

Note 2: The subsidiary’s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65.

Subsection (4) operates if:

the *head company of a consolidated group is a former exempting entity; and

(b) a *corporate tax entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at a time (also the joining time); and

the entity is a former exempting entity at the joining time.

These rules apply to the consolidated group.

Note 1: If the subsidiary’s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3). This deficit may be increased by item 3 in the table in subsection (4).

Note 2: The subsidiary’s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65.

There is no change to the status of the *head company of a consolidated group if:

the head company is a former exempting entity; and

a corporate tax entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the group; and

the entity is neither an exempting entity nor a former exempting entity at the joining time.

Note 1: If the subsidiary’s franking account is in surplus, that surplus will be transferred to the head company’s franking account: see subsection 709-60(2).

Note 2: If the subsidiary’s franking account is in deficit, it will be liable for franking deficit tax: see subsection 709-60(3).

Note 3: The subsidiary’s franking account does not operate while it is a member of the group: see section 709-65.

Subdivision 709-C — Treatment of excess franking deficit tax offsets when entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group

Guide to Subdivision 709-C

709-180 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides that any excess in the tax offset arising from a franking deficit tax liability of an entity that becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group is transferred to the head company of the group.

Table of sections

709-185 Joining entity’s excess franking deficit tax offsets transferred to head company

709-190 Exit history rule not to treat leaving entity as having a franking deficit tax offset excess

709-185 Joining entity’s excess franking deficit tax offsets transferred to head company

This section operates if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

the joining entity is entitled to a tax offset under section 205-70 for the income year that ends or, if subsection 701-30(3) applies, that is taken by subsection (3) of that section to end, at the joining time; and

(c) an amount (the joining entity’s excess) of the offset remains after applying section 63-10 (about the tax offset priority rules) to the joining entity’s basic income tax liability for that income year.

Transfer of excess to head company

For the purpose of applying subsection 205-70(1) to the *head company of the consolidated group for the income year in which the joining time occurs:

if, as described in paragraph 205-70(1)(c), an amount of a tax offset remains after applying section 63-10—that amount is taken to be increased by the amount of the joining entity’s excess; or

otherwise:

paragraph 205-70(1)(c) is taken to apply to the head company; and

the remaining amount of a tax offset covered by that paragraph is taken to be the amount of the joining entity’s excess.

Note: Paragraph 205-70(1)(c) refers to tax offsets under section 205-70.

In working out whether paragraph (2)(a) applies, take into account any application of this section to any other entity that became a *subsidiary member of the group before the joining time.

Joining entity prevented from utilising excess in later income years

For the purpose of applying subsection 205-70(1) to the joining entity for any income year after that in which the joining time occurs, the joining entity’s excess is disregarded.

709-190 Exit history rule not to treat leaving entity as having a franking deficit tax offset excess

To avoid doubt, if:

the *head company of a consolidated group is entitled to a tax offset under section 205-70 for an income year; and

(b) an amount (the excess) of the offset remains after applying section 63-10 (about the tax offset priority rules) to the head company’s basic income tax liability for that income year; and

an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group in the income year;

the entity is not taken because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule):

to have the excess; or

to have another excess of that kind because of the circumstances that caused the head company to have the excess.

Subdivision 709-D — Deducting bad debts

Guide to Subdivision 709-D

709-200 What this Subdivision is about

An entity can deduct a bad debt that:

has for a period been owed to a member of a consolidated group; and

has for another period been owed to an entity that was not a member of that group;

only if each entity that has been owed the debt for such a period could have deducted the debt had it been written off as bad at the end of the period. This applies even if the debt is owed to the same entity for different periods.

Table of sections

Application and object

709-205 Application of this Subdivision

709-210 Object of this Subdivision

Limit on deduction of bad debt

709-215 Limit on deduction of bad debt

Extension of Subdivision to debt/equity swap loss

709-220 Limit on deduction of swap loss

Application and object

709-205 Application of this Subdivision

(1) This Subdivision affects whether an entity (the claimant) that is or has been a *member of a *consolidated group and writes off a debt, or part of a debt, as bad may deduct the debt or part if the conditions in subsection (2) exist.

Note: This Subdivision affects similarly whether an entity that is or has been a member of a consolidated group and extinguishes a debt as part of a debt/equity swap may deduct a loss resulting from the swap. See section 709-220.

The conditions are that, in the time starting when the debt was incurred (whether to the claimant or another entity) and ending when the claimant wrote off the debt or part:

(a) the debt was owed to an entity (whether the claimant or another entity) for a period (a debt test period) when the entity was a *member of a *consolidated group; and

(b) the debt was owed to an entity (whether the claimant or another entity) for a period (also a debt test period) when the entity was a not a member of that group.

Note 1: The debt must have been owed to the claimant for at least one of the debt test periods for the claimant to have been able to write it off.

Note 2: One effect of section 701-1 (Single entity rule) is that a debt is taken to be owed to the head company of a consolidated group while the debt is owed to a subsidiary member of the group.

Ignore section 701-5 (Entry history rule) and section 701-40 (Exit history rule) in identifying a debt test period.

Note: Subsection (3) does not affect sections 701-5 and 701-40 so far as they operate to treat the debt, or part of the debt, as having been included in the claimant’s assessable income. That inclusion is generally a condition under section 25-35 for the claimant to be able to deduct the debt.

This Subdivision does not apply in relation to a debt merely because it is assigned:

from an entity that is a *member of a consolidated group to an entity that is not a member of that group; or

from an entity that is not a member of a consolidated group to an entity that is a member of a consolidated group; or

from an entity that is a member of a consolidated group to an entity that is a member of another consolidated group.

This subsection has effect despite subsections (1) and (2).

Note: There is not an assignment of a debt from one entity to another merely because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) starts or ceases to apply in relation to the entities so that the debt ceases to be a debt owed to one entity and becomes a debt owed to the other entity.

709-210 Object of this Subdivision

The main object of this Subdivision is to ensure that the claimant can deduct the debt, or part of it, only if each entity that was owed the debt for a debt test period could have deducted the debt if it had been written off as bad at the end of the period.

Limit on deduction of bad debt

709-215 Limit on deduction of bad debt

The claimant can deduct the debt, or part of the debt, if, and only if:

section 8-1 or 25-35 permits the deduction (ignoring subsection 25-35(5) and the provisions mentioned in that subsection); and

the condition in subsection (2) is met for each debt test period.

(2) The condition is that the entity that was owed the debt for the debt test period could have deducted the debt for an income year (the debt test income year) starting and ending at the times identified in subsection (3) if:

the entity had written off the debt as bad at the end of the period; and

(b) these provisions (the modified provisions) had effect as described in this section:

sections 165-123 and 165-126 (which are about conditions that must be met for a company to be able to deduct a bad debt);

(ii) sections 266-35, 266-85, 266-120, 266-160 and 267-25 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which are about conditions that must be met for certain kinds of trusts to be able to deduct a bad debt);

other provisions of this Act so far as they relate to a section listed in subparagraph (i) or (ii); and

these provisions did not apply:

subsections 165-120(2) and (3);

(ii) section 63G of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

section 267-65 in Schedule 2F to that Act.

Note 1: Some of the other provisions of this Act that relate to a section listed in subparagraph (2)(b)(i) are sections 165-120, 165-129 and 165-132 and Subdivision 166-C.

Note 2: Some of the other provisions of this Act that relate to a section listed in subparagraph (2)(b)(ii) are sections 266-40, 266-45, 266-90, 266-125, 266-165, 267-30, 267-35, 267-40 and 267-45 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Debt test income year

The table shows when the debt test income year starts and ends.

Continuity periods, ownership test periods and test periods

For the purposes of subsection (2), the modified provisions have effect as if:

the first continuity period started at the start time shown in the table and ended at the start of the debt test income year; and

the second continuity period were the debt test income year or, for the purposes of section 165-123 and Subdivision 166-C defining periods by reference to the second continuity period, the period:

starting at the start of the debt test income year; and

ending at the end time shown in the table; and

each section listed in subparagraph (2)(b)(ii) specified that the test period identified in the section:

started at the start time shown in the table; and

ended at the end time shown in the table.

(5) For the purposes of subsection (2), the modified provisions have effect as if section 267-25 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied in relation to debts whether they were incurred in the income year or an earlier income year.

Test time for business continuity test under section 165-126

For the purposes of subsection (2), the modified provisions have effect as if subsection 165-126(2) specified that the test time were the later of these times (or either of them if they are the same):

the first time at which it is not practicable to show that the company will meet the conditions in section 165-123 (as modified by this section);

the time just after the start of the debt test period.

Business at and just after the end of the debt test period

If:

the debt test period ends when the entity that was owed the debt for the period becomes a *member of a consolidated group; and

under the modified provisions, the business that the entity carried on at or just after the end of the period is relevant to the question whether the entity could have deducted the debt as described in subsection (2);

those provisions have effect for the purposes of that subsection as if the entity carried on at those times the business it carried on just before the end of the period.

Extension of Subdivision to debt/equity swap loss

709-220 Limit on deduction of swap loss

Object

(1) The object of this section is to limit the circumstances in which an entity can deduct a swap loss (as defined in section 63E of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) resulting from a debt/equity swap (as defined in that section) to circumstances similar to those in which this Subdivision lets an entity deduct a debt it writes off as bad.

Modified operation of sections 709-205, 709-210 and 709-215

Sections 709-205, 709-210 and 709-215 (except subsection 709-215(2)) apply in relation to the extinction (however described) of a debt as part of a debt/equity swap in the same way as they apply in relation to the writing off of a debt as bad.

Subsection 709-215(1):

applies in relation to a swap loss from a debt/equity swap in the same way as it applies in relation to a debt, or part of a debt; and

(b) applies as if paragraph 709-215(1)(a) referred to subsection 63E(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 instead of sections 8-1 and 25-35.

(4) This section has effect despite subsection 63E(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Division 711 — Tax cost setting amount for membership interests where entities cease to be subsidiary members of consolidated groups

Guide to Division 711

711-1 What this Division is about

If an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, the tax cost setting amount for the group’s membership interests in the entity reflects the group’s cost for the entity’s net assets.

Table of sections

Application and object of this Division

711-5 Application and object of this Division

Tax cost setting amount for membership interests etc.

711-10 Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Division

711-15 Tax cost setting amount where no multiple exit

711-20 What is the old group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity?

711-25 Terminating values of the leaving entity’s assets—step 1 in working out allocable cost amount

711-30 What is the head company’s terminating value for an asset?

711-35 If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions—step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

711-40 Liabilities owed to the leaving entity by members of the old group—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount

711-45 Liabilities etc. owed by the leaving entity—step 4 in working out allocable cost amount

711-46 Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets

711-55 Tax cost setting amount for membership interests where multiple exit

711-65 Membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985

711-70 Additional integrity rule if membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 under section 711-65—application of Division 149 to head company

711-75 Additional integrity rule if membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 under section 711-65—application of CGT event K6

Application and object of this Division

711-5 Application and object of this Division

Application

This Division has effect:

for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2); and

for the entity core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(3);

if an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group (the old group) at a particular time (the leaving time).

Object

The object of this Division is, when entities cease to be *subsidiary members, to preserve the alignment of the *head company’s costs for *membership interests in entities and their assets that is established when entities become subsidiary members.

Note: The reasons for preserving this alignment are set out in subsection 705-10(3).

This is achieved by recognising the *head company’s cost for those interests, just before the leaving time, as an amount equal to the cost of the leaving entity’s assets at the leaving time reduced by the amount of its liabilities.

If multiple entities cease to be *subsidiary members at the same time, the cost of any *membership interests that one holds in another is treated in a similar way.

Tax cost setting amount for membership interests etc.

711-10 Tax cost setting amount worked out under this Division

If this Division applies, the amount of the following is worked out under the Division:

the tax cost setting amount for the purposes of item 2 in the table in section 701-60 for each *membership interest in the leaving entity that *members of the old group held; and

if 2 or more entities cease to be *subsidiary members of the group at the same time because of an event happening in relation to one of them—the tax cost setting amount for the purposes of item 4 in the table in that section for each membership interest that the leaving entity holds in any of the other entities.

711-15 Tax cost setting amount where no multiple exit

The tax cost setting amount for each *membership interest in the leaving entity that *members of the old group held, where paragraph 711-10(b) does not apply, is worked out by:

first, working out the old group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity in accordance with section 711-20; and

next, if there is more than one class of membership interests in the leaving entity—allocating the allocable cost amount to each class in proportion to the *market value of all of the membership interests in the class; and

next, allocating the result under paragraph (a) or (b) to each of the membership interests, or membership interests in the class, by dividing the result by the number of those membership interests; and

finally, if the leaving entity is a trust—for each membership interest in the trust that satisfies these conditions:

it is neither a unit nor an interest in the trust;

the member of the old group that held it began to hold it only because money or property was settled on the trust;

it either had no *cost base or it had a cost base of nil;

reducing the result under paragraph (c) to nil.

Non-membership equity interests

Note: Compare the treatment of such interests when an entity joins a group: see section 713-20.

For the purposes of this section, if at the leaving time a *member of the old group holds a *non-membership equity interest in the leaving entity, that non-membership equity interest is treated as if:

it were a *membership interest in the leaving entity; and

it were of a different class than any other membership interest in the leaving entity.

711-20 What is the old group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity?

(1) Work out the old group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity in this way:

Note: If the amount remaining after step 4 is negative, the head company is taken to have made a capital gain equal to the amount: see CGT event L5.

Recalculation in order to work out amount of capital loss

(2) If it is necessary to work out whether the *head company makes a capital loss for a *CGT event that happens at or after the leaving time in relation to any of the *membership interests, the old group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity is instead worked out as if the head company’s *terminating value for any asset covered by subsection 705-30(4) (as it applies for the purposes of section 711-30) were instead equal to the asset’s *reduced cost base just before the leaving time.

711-25 Terminating values of the leaving entity’s assets—step 1 in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 1 in the table in subsection 711-20(1), the step 1 amount is worked out by adding up the *head company’s *terminating values of all the assets that the head company holds at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) to be a part of the head company.

Goodwill

If loss of control and ownership of the leaving entity by the *head company would decrease the *market value of the goodwill associated with assets or businesses of the old group (other than those of the leaving entity), the head company’s *cost base of the asset consisting of goodwill that it holds at the leaving time because of its control and ownership of the leaving entity is added to the step 1 amount.

Note: If the asset arose because the head company acquired control and ownership of a joining entity, subsection 705-35(3) would have applied in relation to the joining entity. The asset could also have arisen e.g. because the head company acquired a business from an entity without acquiring the entity.

Increase in step 1 amount for certain former privatised assets

If:

the *head company of the old group *holds a depreciating asset at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) to be a part of the head company; and

the asset’s tax cost was set at the tax cost setting amount when an entity (whether the leaving entity or another entity) became a *subsidiary member of the old group; and

the tax cost setting amount for the asset was reduced because of section 705-47 (which is about certain assets that were *privatised assets);

the amount of the reduction is added to the step 1 amount.

Increase in step 1 amount for certain privatised assets

If:

the *head company of the old group *holds a depreciating asset at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) to be a part of the head company; and

the first element of the *cost of the asset was worked out by reference to subsection 58-70(5) because a *member of the old group acquired the asset as described in subsection 58-5(4) on or after 1 July 2002; and

(c) the amount of the first element of the cost of the asset is less than the amount it would have been apart from item 11 of the table in subsection 40-180(2) (which makes subsection 58-70(5) relevant to working out that element);

the difference between the amounts is added to the step 1 amount.

711-30 What is the head company’s terminating value for an asset?

(1) The *head company’s terminating value for an asset that it holds at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) to be a part of the head company is worked out as follows.

The amount is worked out by applying section 705-30 in a corresponding way to the way that section applies to work out the terminating value for an asset that a joining entity holds at the joining time.

However, that amount is the asset’s *market value at the leaving time if:

the asset is a right to receive lease payments under a lease; and

the asset’s tax cost was set when an entity (whether the leaving entity or another entity) became a *subsidiary member of the old group; and

the asset was taken to be a retained cost base asset for the purposes of Division 705 when its tax cost was set, because of paragraph 705-56(3)(b).

711-35 If head company becomes entitled to certain deductions—step 2 in working out allocable cost amount

Work out the step 2 amount for the purposes of the table in subsection 711-20(1) by multiplying all deductions covered by subsection (2) by the *corporate tax rate.

This subsection covers any deduction to which the leaving entity becomes entitled under section 701-40 as a result of the leaving entity ceasing to be a *subsidiary member of the old group, other than a deduction for expenditure:

that is, forms part of or reduces, the cost of an asset that becomes an asset of the leaving entity because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply; or

to which section 110-40 (about expenditure on assets acquired before on 13 May 1997) applies.

(3) Subsection (2) does not cover a deduction under section 43-15 (which relates to *undeducted construction expenditure) if, because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule), the leaving entity is taken to have *acquired the asset to which the deduction relates at or before 7.30 pm, by legal time in the Australian Capital Territory, on 13 May 1997.

711-40 Liabilities owed to the leaving entity by members of the old group—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 3 in the table in subsection 711-20(1), the step 3 amount is the total, for all liabilities owed by *members of the old group to the leaving entity at the leaving time, of the tax cost setting amounts of the corresponding assets of the leaving entity.

Note: The tax cost of a corresponding asset of the leaving entity is set under section 701-45. The tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset is determined under section 701-60A.

711-45 Liabilities etc. owed by the leaving entity—step 4 in working out allocable cost amount

(1) For the purposes of step 4 in the table in subsection 711-20(1), the step 4 amount is worked out by adding up the amounts of each thing (an accounting liability) that, in accordance with the leaving entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, is a liability of the leaving entity just before the leaving time.

Leaving entity’s accounting principles for tax cost setting

(1A) The leaving entity’s accounting principles for tax cost setting are the *accounting principles that the group would use if it were to prepare its financial statements just before the leaving time (disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)).

Exclusion for deferred tax liability

An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that is an amount recorded in a deferred tax liability account in accordance with the leaving entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting.

Subsection (1B) does not apply to an accounting liability that relates to an asset mentioned in paragraph 713-575(2)(a) or (b) (certain assets of life insurance company).

Exclusion where transfer of accounting liability

An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that arises because of the leaving entity’s ownership of an asset if, on *disposal of the asset, the accounting liability will transfer to the new owner.

Example: A liability to rehabilitate a mine site, where, under legislation or a licence, the liability will be transferred to the new owner on disposal of the mine.

Exclusion where liability is obligation to make lease payments

An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability that is the leaving entity’s obligation as lessee to make lease payments under a lease, if:

subsection 705-56(4) applied in relation to the liability, at a time when an entity (whether the leaving entity or another entity) became a *subsidiary member of the old group; and

(b) the liability was not taken into account under subsection 705-70(1) at that time, because of paragraph 705-56(4)(b).

Reduction for future deduction

If some or all of an accounting liability will result in a deduction to the leaving entity, the amount to be added for the accounting liability is reduced by the following amount:

where:

double-counting adjustment means the amount of any reduction that has already occurred in the accounting liability under subsection (1) to take account of the future availability of the deduction.

Amount for intra-group liabilities

If an accounting liability of the leaving entity is owed to a *member of the old group, the amount to be added for the liability is the tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset of the member.

Adjustment for unrealised gains and losses

If, for income tax purposes, an accounting liability, or a change in the amount of an accounting liability, (other than one owed to a *member of the old group) is taken into account at a later time than is the case in accordance with the leaving entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, the amount to be added for the accounting liability is equal to the payment that would be necessary to discharge the liability just before the leaving time without an amount being included in the assessable income of, or allowable as a deduction to, the *head company.

Note: An example is accrued employee leave entitlements or foreign exchange gains and losses.

Increase in step 4 amount for employee share interests

(6) If any *membership interest (an employee share interest) in the leaving entity needed to be disregarded under section 703-35 in order for the leaving entity to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company at the leaving time, the step 4 amount is increased by the sum of the *market values of those interests.

Increase to cover ADI restructure preference share interests

If any *share in the leaving entity needed to be disregarded under section 703-37 in order for the leaving entity to be a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company at the leaving time, the step 4 amount is increased by the sum of the *market values of those shares.

Increase for non-share capital account balance

The step 4 amount is increased by the amount that would be the balance of the leaving entity’s non-share capital account, assuming that:

if the leaving entity is not a company—the leaving entity were a company; and

each *non-membership equity interest (if any) in the leaving entity held at just before the leaving time by a person other than a *member of the old group were a *non-share equity interest in the leaving entity; and

the non-share equity interests (if any) mentioned in paragraph (b) were the only non-share equity interests in the leaving entity.

Increase to cover certain equity interests

The step 4 amount is increased by the *market value of each thing that, in accordance with the leaving entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting, is equity in the leaving entity at the leaving time, where the thing is also a *debt interest.

Adjustment where amount of liability differed for purpose of calculating allocable cost amount on entry

Subsection (10) applies if:

either:

(i) an amount (the exit liability amount) was added for a particular liability under subsection (5); or

(ii) a particular liability is covered by subsection (5), but no amount was added for it under that subsection (in which case the exit liability amount is zero); and

(b) the liability was taken into account in working out the *allocable cost amount (the original entry ACA) for a *subsidiary member (whether or not the leaving entity) of the old group in accordance with Division 705; and

(c) the exit liability amount is not the same as the amount (the entry liability amount) of the liability that was taken into account in working out the original entry ACA, after any adjustments made under:

section 705-70, 705-75 or 705-80; and

subsection (9) of this section; and

if the liability is a provision for annual leave or long service leave, or a provision for a liability contingent on a future event:

in the case of a liability that was, in accordance with the *accounting principles that the entity would have used if it had prepared its financial statements just before the time it became a subsidiary member of the group, a current liability of the entity at that time—the leaving time occurs less than 1 year after that time; or

otherwise—the leaving time occurs less than 4 years after that time.

Make these adjustments to the entry liability amount if, at a time when the leaving entity was a *subsidiary member of the old group, the *head company of the group paid an amount that reduced the liability:

reduce the entry liability amount by the amount of the reduction; and

if the payment gave rise to an amount being included in the assessable income of the head company—after making the reduction in paragraph (a), further reduce the entry liability amount by the product of:

the amount included in assessable income; and

the *corporate tax rate; and

if the payment gave rise to a deduction for the head company—after making the reduction in paragraph (a), increase the entry liability amount by the product of:

the amount deducted; and

the corporate tax rate.

The step 4 amount is altered by:

if the entry liability amount exceeds the exit liability amount—increasing the step 4 amount by the excess; or

if the entry liability amount falls short of the exit liability amount—decreasing the step 4 amount by the shortfall.

Exclusion of amounts for certain securitisation liabilities

An amount is not to be added for an accounting liability of the leaving entity if the accounting liability is covered under section 711-46 (securitisation liabilities).

711-46 Liability arising from transfer or assignment of securitised assets

This section covers an accounting liability (the securitisation liability) if the following circumstances exist:

in working out the step 4 amount mentioned in subsection 711-45(1) in relation to the leaving entity, an amount would be added under that subsection for the securitisation liability (disregarding subsection 711-45(11));

(c) a member of the old group transferred or equitably assigned one or more assets (the underlying securitised assets) to another entity before the leaving time;

the securitisation liability:

arose from the transfer or equitable assignment of the underlying securitised assets; and

is a liability of the leaving entity at the leaving time (according to the leaving entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting);

the other entity was established for the purpose of securitising assets;

the underlying securitised assets were securitised in accordance with that purpose before the leaving time;

at the leaving time the *market value of the leaving entity’s interest in the underlying securitised assets is nil, or is substantially less than the amount of the securitisation liability.

711-55 Tax cost setting amount for membership interests where multiple exit

If 2 or more entities cease to be *subsidiary members of the old group at the same time because of an event happening in relation to one of them, the tax cost setting amount for each *membership interest mentioned in paragraphs 711-10(a) and (b) is worked out in accordance with this section.

Object

The object of this section is to ensure that the tax cost setting amount for *membership interests that each entity holds in another entity reflects a proportion of the other entity’s cost for its net assets.

Tax cost setting amounts to be worked out for certain membership interests in all of the entities

(3) A *tax cost setting amount must be worked out for each *membership interest (the subject interest) that one of the entities holds in another of the entities just before the leaving time, and this must be done:

by applying section 711-15 to the subject interest as if:

a reference in that section, or any provision of this Division that relates to it, to any membership interest that *members of the old group hold in the leaving entity were a reference to the subject interest; and

a reference in that section, or any provision of this Division that relates to it, to liabilities owed by members of the old group included a reference to liabilities owed by any of the entities that cease to be *subsidiary members of the old group at the leaving time; and

by working out the tax cost setting amount for membership interests in entities that are held by other entities before working out the tax cost setting amount for membership interests in those other entities.

Tax cost setting amount for membership interests acquired by head company

Then work out the tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph 711-10(a) for the *membership interests held by the *head company in the same way as under section 711-15.

Note: In doing so, tax cost setting amounts worked out under subsection (3) of this section for membership interests held by the leaving entity in other entities will be taken into account in working out the allocable cost amount for the leaving entity. Those tax cost setting amounts will in turn have been affected by any other tax cost setting amounts worked out under subsection (3) for membership interests in other entities.

Tax cost setting amount for membership interests acquired by leaving entity

The tax cost setting amount mentioned in paragraph 711-10(b) for *membership interests of which the leaving entity becomes the holder will be one of the tax cost setting amounts worked out under subsection (3) of this section.

Example: Companies A, B, C, D and E are all subsidiary members that leave the old group at the same time. Just before the leaving time, company A owned shares in company B and company C, and company B owned shares in companies D and E.

First, work out company A’s tax cost setting amount for membership interests in company C and company B’s tax cost setting amount for membership interests in companies D and E by applying section 711-15 in accordance with paragraph (3)(a) above.

Next, work out company A’s tax cost setting amount for membership interests in company B under that section as so applied, taking into account the tax cost setting amount just worked out for company B’s assets consisting of shares in companies D and E.

Finally, work out the head company’s tax cost setting amount for membership interests in company A under section 711-15 in accordance with subsection (4) above, taking into account the tax cost setting amounts worked out for companies B and C.

711-65 Membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985

When this section applies

This section applies unless:

Subdivision 705-C (about one group joining another consolidated group) applies in relation to the old group; and

the leaving entity is a *subsidiary member of the old group.

To avoid doubt, this section applies regardless of whether the leaving entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the old group at the leaving time because another entity also ceases to be a subsidiary member of the old group at the leaving time.

Interests treated as if purchased before 20 September 1985

If this section applies, a number of the *membership interests in the leaving entity that *members of the old group hold are taken to have been acquired before 20 September 1985.

Number of pre-CGT membership interests

The number is the result of the formula in subsection (4), rounded down to:

the nearest whole number if the result is not already a whole number; or

zero if the result is a number more than zero but less than one.

Formula

The formula is:

where:

leaving entity’s pre-CGT proportion is the amount worked out under section 705-125.

Dealing with classes of membership interests

If there are 2 or more classes of *membership interests in the leaving entity, this section operates separately in relation to each class as if the interests in that class were all the interests in the entity.

Allocation of the number to particular membership interests

The *head company must choose which particular *membership interests comprise the number worked out under subsection (2).

Modification if leaving entity is a trust

If the leaving entity is a trust, a *membership interest in it is not taken into account under this section unless the membership interest is either a unit or an interest in the trust.

711-70 Additional integrity rule if membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 under section 711-65—application of Division 149 to head company

This section applies if:

the leaving entity held assets at the time it became a *subsidiary member of the old group (disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)); and

some or all of the assets:

(i) stopped being *pre-CGT assets under Division 149 at a time (the Division 149 time) when the *head company of the group held them under subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule); or

(ii) would have stopped being pre-CGT assets under Division 149 at a time (also the Division 149 time) when the head company of the group held them under subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) if they had been pre-CGT assets just before that time; and

the leaving entity was a subsidiary member of the group at that time.

The pre-CGT proportion of the leaving entity at the leaving time is taken to be nil.

Adjust the old group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity as follows:

if the amount under subsection (4) exceeds the amount under subsection (6)—increase the allocable cost amount by the excess;

if the amount under subsection (4) falls short of the amount under subsection (6)—reduce the allocable cost amount by the shortfall.

Subject to subsection (5), the amount under this subsection is:

if Subdivision 705-A applied in relation to the leaving entity at the time it became a *subsidiary member of the old group—the total of the amounts that were taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) for *membership interests in the leaving entity at that time; or

otherwise—assuming that Subdivision 705-A had applied in relation to the leaving entity at the time it became a subsidiary member of the old group, the total of the amounts that would have been taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) for membership interests in the leaving entity at that time.

For the purposes of subsection (4), if a *membership interest in the leaving entity was covered under paragraph 705-125(2)(a) (pre-CGT interests) when it became a *subsidiary member of the old group, treat the amount that was taken into account for the membership interest under subsection 705-65(1) as the interest’s *market value just after the Division 149 time.

The amount under this subsection is the old group’s allocable cost amount for the leaving entity, worked out on the assumption that the leaving entity ceased to be a *subsidiary member of the old group just after the Division 149 time.

711-75 Additional integrity rule if membership interests treated as having been acquired before 20 September 1985 under section 711-65—application of CGT event K6

This section applies if the leaving entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the old group because of a situation giving rise to CGT event A1, C2, E1, E2 or E8 in relation to one or more *membership interests in the leaving entity.

For the purposes of applying subsections 104-230(2) and (8) in relation to those *membership interests:

disregard subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in working out the *net value of the leaving entity; and

treat the reference in subsection 104-230(2) to “Just before the other event happened” as a reference to “Just before the leaving time”.

Note 1: The single entity rule will continue to apply in determining whether the property mentioned in subsection 104-230(2) for the leaving entity was acquired on or after 20 September 1985.

Note 2: However, in a case of multiple exit from a consolidated group (see section 711-55), the property mentioned in subsection 104-230(2) for the leaving entity may include membership interests in another entity leaving the group at the leaving time. To determine which of those membership interests were acquired on or after 20 September 1985 for the purposes of applying subsection 104-230(2) to the leaving entity, see section 711-65.

In determining the sum of the *cost bases of the property mentioned in subsection 104-230(6), treat the cost base of an asset that is included in that property as:

if the asset has its tax cost set at the leaving time under section 701-50—its tax cost setting amount; or

if the terminating value of the asset is taken into account in working out the step 1 amount under section 711-25 for the leaving entity—that terminating value; or

if the asset is taken into account in working out the step 3 amount under section 711-40 for the leaving entity—the value of the asset that is so taken into account.

Division 713 — Rules for particular kinds of entities

Table of Subdivisions

713-A Trusts

713-C Some unit trusts treated like head companies of consolidated groups

713-E Partnerships

713-L Life insurance companies

713-M General insurance companies

Subdivision 713-A — Trusts

Table of sections

Working out a joined group’s allocable cost amount for a joining trust

713-20 Increasing the step 1 amount for settled capital that could be distributed tax free in respect of discretionary interests

713-25 Undistributed, realised profits that accrue to joined group before joining time and could be distributed tax free—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount

Determining destination of distribution by non-fixed trust

713-50 Factors to consider

Working out a joined group’s allocable cost amount for a joining trust

713-20 Increasing the step 1 amount for settled capital that could be distributed tax free in respect of discretionary interests

The object of this section is to increase the step 1 amount worked out under section 705-65 (for the purpose of working out the joined group’s allocable cost amount) if:

the joining entity is a trust; and

some or all of the *membership interests in the trust are neither units nor interests in the trust; and

some or all of the trust capital is settled capital that could be distributed tax free at the joining time.

The increase in the step 1 amount takes account of the settled capital that could be distributed tax free.

Note 1: As a result, the settled capital that could be distributed tax free is treated in a way that is analogous to the group’s cost of acquiring the trust: see subsection 705-10(2).

Note 2: Paragraph (1)(b) reflects the position that a distribution in respect of a unit or interest in the trust is generally covered by CGT event E4 and so is not tax-free: see section 104-70.

(2) The step 1 amount worked out under section 705-65 is increased by the amount worked out under the following method statement if, at the joining time, there are *membership interests (the discretionary interests) in the trust each of which satisfies these conditions:

it is neither a unit nor an interest in the trust;

the entity that owned it at the joining time began to own it only because money or property was settled on the trust;

it either has no *cost base or it has a cost base of nil.

Note: If a membership interest has a cost base greater than nil, the cost base is already taken into account in working out the step 1 amount under section 705-65.

Method statement

Step 1. Add up:

each amount settled on the trust before or at the joining time; and

the *market value of each item of property settled on the trust before or at the joining time, worked out as at when the item was settled;

except to the extent that that amount or market value forms part of the *cost base of a *membership interest in the trust that was taken into account in working out the step 1 amount under section 705-65.

Step 2. Work out how much of the step 1 amount would have been paid in respect of the discretionary interests if, at the joining time:

the entire trust capital and trust income had been realised and distributed; and

the trust had ended.

Note: This may involve determining how a power of appointment would have been exercised. Section 713-50 lists matters to have regard to in determining this.

Step 3. Reduce the step 2 amount by so much of it as:

would have been included in the assessable income of any *member of the trust who owned any of the discretionary interests at the joining time; or

would have been taken into account in working out a *capital gain or *capital loss made by such a member.

Step 4. Work out how much of the step 1 amount consists of one or more of these:

an amount settled on the trust directly by the *head company of the consolidated group (whether or not the group was in existence when the amount or item was settled on the trust);

(b) an amount settled on the trust directly by any other entity not excluded by subsection (3) (which covers entities that are not independent and unconnected donors to the trust);

the *market value of an item of property settled on the trust directly by the head company;

(d) the market value of an item of property settled on the trust directly by any other entity not excluded by subsection (3).

Step 5. The step 1 amount worked out under section 705-65 is increased by the lesser of:

the step 3 amount worked out under this method statement; and

the step 4 amount worked out under this method statement.

This subsection excludes these entities for the purposes of step 4 of the method statement in subsection (2):

713-25 Undistributed, realised profits that accrue to joined group before joining time and could be distributed tax free—step 3 in working out allocable cost amount

For the purposes of step 3 in the table in section 705-60, if the joining entity is a trust, the step 3 amount is the sum of the trust’s realised profits, to the extent that:

they accrued to the joined group before the joining time (as defined in subsection 705-90(7)); and

as at the joining time, they have not been distributed to *members of the trust; and

if each of them were distributed as mentioned in paragraphs 705-90(7)(a) and (b):

(i) they would be distributed otherwise than in respect of a unit or an interest in the trust; or

their non-assessable parts for the purposes of section 104-70 would be disregarded in working out whether or not a *capital gain had been made because of CGT event E4;

except to the extent that they recouped losses of any *sort that accrued to the joined group before the joining time (as defined in subsection 705-90(8)).

Trusts not covered

Note: If the joining entity, or an entity interposed between the head company and the joining entity, is a non-fixed trust, this section may involve determining how a power of appointment would have been exercised. Section 713-50 lists matters to have regard to in determining this.

Subsection (1) does not apply to a trust that is a corporate tax entity at the joining time.

Note: This excludes corporate unit trusts and public trading trusts, which are covered by the imputation system.

Determining destination of distribution by non-fixed trust

713-50 Factors to consider

In working out, for the purposes of this Part, how much of something a non-fixed trust would have distributed to an entity, or in respect of a *membership interest in the trust, have regard to all relevant factors, including:

the pattern of any previous distributions by the trust; and

by whom the trust has from time to time been *controlled (for value shifting purposes).

Subdivision 713-C — Some unit trusts treated like head companies of consolidated groups

Guide to Subdivision 713-C

713-120 What this Subdivision is about

A public trading trust can sometimes choose to form a consolidated group and be treated like a company and head company of the group. The treatment affects the trust, the trustee and other entities connected with the trust (such as members of the trust and entities the trustee holds membership interests in).

Table of sections

Object of this Subdivision

713-125 Object of this Subdivision

Choice to form a consolidated group

713-130 Choosing to form a consolidated group

Effects of choice

713-135 Effects of choice

713-140 Modifications of the applied law

Object of this Subdivision

713-125 Object of this Subdivision

The main object of this Subdivision is to provide, by the means described in subsections (2) and (3), for certain unit trusts to be treated like companies, and therefore like *head companies of *consolidated groups, with consequent effects on other entities including:

the trustees; and

*members of the trusts; and

entities the trustees hold *membership interests in.

The first means is letting a public trading trust, that could become the *head company of a consolidated group if the trust were a company, choose to form such a group (with other entities as *subsidiary members).

The second means is changing the way in which the law relating to income tax applies on and after the time the choice takes effect, so that law (with some modifications) applies in relation to the trust or the trustee (as appropriate) in a way corresponding to the way in which that law applies in relation to a company.

Note: The law relating to income tax includes legislation relating to associated imposts (such as those connected with the imputation system).

Choice to form a consolidated group

713-130 Choosing to form a consolidated group

A trust may make a choice under section 703-50 (Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group), as if the trust were a company (the assumed company), but only if:

the assumed company could make the choice, if it beneficially owned the *membership interests in other entities that are legally owned by the trustee; and

the day specified in the choice is the first day of an income year for which the trust is a public trading trust.

Note: Assuming that a trust is a company also involves assuming:

that the company has characteristics of the trust, such as the location of the central management and control (which is relevant to residence), the business of the trust, not being incorporated etc.; and

that membership interests in the trust are membership interests in the company (owned by the same persons and in the same way as membership interests in the trust are owned); and

that the company’s taxable income is taxed at the same rate as the trust’s net income.

Effects of choice

713-135 Effects of choice

(1) If the trust makes the choice, the law (the applied law) described in subsection (2) applies in relation to the trust in a way corresponding to the way in which that law applies to a company. The applied law applies in that way in relation to the trust or trustee (as appropriate):

with the appropriate modifications (including those described in section 713-140, so far as they are appropriate); and

in relation to all times at or after the start of the day specified in the choice; and

so far as it is relevant to the operation of the applied law in relation to the trust and a time at or after the start of that day—in relation to a time when the trust existed before the start of that day.

Note 1: The application of the applied law in this way affects not only the trust and the trustee but also other entities connected with the trust, such as members of the trust and entities in which the trustee holds membership interests. Some examples of that effect are that:

a consolidated group comes into existence on the day specified in the choice; and

there may be a scrip for scrip roll-over for an entity exchanging its shares in a company for membership interests in the trust.

Note 2: The application of the applied law in this way involves treatment of characteristics, things and persons relating to the trust corresponding to the treatment by the applied law of analogous characteristics, things and persons relating to a company (as envisaged in the note to section 713-130). These are some examples of analogous things and analogous persons:

units in the trust and shares in a company;

unitholders in the trust and shareholders in a company;

trust voting interests and voting shares in a company.

The applied law is:

this Act (other than this Subdivision); and

an Act that imposes any impost payable under this Act; and

(c) the Income Tax Rates Act 1986; and

(d) the Taxation Administration Act 1953, so far as it relates to an Act covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (c); and

any other Act, so far as it relates to an Act covered by paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d); and

regulations and other legislative instruments under an Act covered by any of the preceding paragraphs.

Subsection (1) does not make an entity liable to a criminal, civil or administrative penalty.

Note: An entity is liable to such a penalty under the applied law only if that law, as it applies apart from subsection (1), makes the entity liable.

713-140 Modifications of the applied law

Overview

This section describes modifications of the applied law in its application in relation to a trust or trustee under section 713-135, but does not limit the modifications of that law that are appropriate for the purposes of that section.

General modifications

A reference in the applied law to a thing or person described in column 2 of an item of the table includes a reference to a thing or person described in column 3 of the item.

Note: An expression in column 2 of an item of the table has the meaning that the expression has in the provision of the applied law containing the reference.

The trust is not covered by a reference in the applied law to a trust.

Note: Subsections (3) and (4) of this section do not affect an entity’s liability for criminal, civil and administrative penalties under the applied law, as those subsections modify (so far as appropriate) the applied law as it applies because of subsection 713-135(1), and that subsection does not affect liability for such penalties (see subsection 713-135(3)).

(4) The trustee is not covered by a reference in the applied law to a trustee (except a reference in section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

Note: Section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 deals with obligations and liabilities of trustees.

Modifications of specific provisions

A provision of an Act identified in an item of the table is modified as set out in the item.

Subdivision 713-E — Partnerships

Guide to Subdivision 713-E

713-200 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision modifies tax cost setting rules in Divisions 701, 705 and 711 so that they take account of the special characteristics of partnerships. The modifications apply in these situations:

an entity that is a partner in a partnership becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group;

a partnership becomes, or ceases to be, a subsidiary member of a consolidated group.

Table of sections

Objects

713-205 Objects of this Subdivision

Partnership cost setting interests etc.

713-210 Partnership cost setting interests

713-215 Terminating value for partnership cost setting interest

Setting tax cost of partnership cost setting interests

713-220 Set tax cost of partnership cost setting interests if partner joins consolidated group

713-225 Tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interest

Special rules where partnership joins consolidated group

713-235 Partnership joins group—set tax cost of partnership assets

713-240 Partnership joins group—tax cost setting amount for partnership asset

Special rules where partnership leaves consolidated group

713-250 Partnership leaves group—standard provisions modified

713-255 Partnership leaves group—tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interests

713-260 Partnership leaves group—tax cost setting amount for assets consisting of being owed certain liabilities

713-265 Partnership leaves group—adjustments to allocable cost amount of partner who also leaves group

Objects

713-205 Objects of this Subdivision

The first object of this Subdivision is to ensure that if:

an entity that is a partner in a partnership becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

the partnership does not become a *subsidiary member of the group;

the provisions mentioned in subsection (3) operate as if the *partnership cost setting interests of the entity in the partnership were the entity’s only assets relating to the partnership.

Note: In general, the head company of the consolidated group is treated as a partner in the partnership, in accordance with section 701-1 (the single entity rule).

The second object of this Subdivision is to ensure that where a partnership becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, the provisions mentioned in subsection (3) operate:

as if the group became the holder of the assets of the partnership; and

to set the tax cost of the assets of the partnership at an appropriate amount, taking into account the taxation treatment of partnerships.

Note: While the partnership is a subsidiary member of the group, it loses its separate tax identity (under the single entity rule in subsection 701-1(1)). Therefore, in general, the assets of the partnership are treated as assets of the head company of the group and partnership cost setting interests in the partnership are ignored.

The provisions are:

section 701-10 (about setting the tax cost of assets of an entity joining a group); and

Subdivision 705-A; and

any other provision of this Act giving Subdivision 705-A a modified effect in circumstances other than those covered by that Subdivision.

Note: An example of provisions covered by paragraph (c) are the provisions of Subdivision 705-B giving Subdivision 705-A a modified effect when a consolidated group is formed.

The third object of this Subdivision is to ensure that, where a partnership ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, the provisions mentioned in subsection (5) operate:

as if the group’s *partnership cost setting interests were the group’s only assets relating to the partnership; and

to set the tax cost of those interests at an appropriate amount, taking into account the fact that the group ceases to be the holder of the assets of the partnership.

The provisions are:

sections 701-15 and 701-50 (about setting the tax cost of membership interests in an entity that leaves the group); and

sections 701-20 and 701-45 (about the cost of assets consisting of certain liabilities owed by or to an entity that leaves the group); and

Division 711.

Partnership cost setting interests etc.

713-210 Partnership cost setting interests

A partnership cost setting interest in a partnership is the asset that is comprised of:

an interest in an asset of the partnership; or

an interest in the partnership that is not covered by paragraph (a);

but does not include an asset that is comprised of a *membership interest in the partnership.

Note 1: A partner may have more than one partnership cost setting interest that relates to an asset of the partnership (see section 106-5).

Note 2: A partnership cost setting interest may relate to an asset of the partnership, but the asset of the partnership is not a partnership cost setting interest in the partnership.

713-215 Terminating value for partnership cost setting interest

This section modifies the way in which the terminating value of a *partnership cost setting interest in a partnership is worked out under section 705-30.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, the terminating value of the *partnership cost setting interest at a time is:

if the interest relates to an asset of the partnership—the interest’s individual share of the terminating value of that asset (worked out in accordance with subsection (3)) at that time; or

otherwise—the terminating value of the interest at that time worked out under section 705-30.

To work out the amount of the terminating value of the asset of the partnership mentioned in paragraph (2)(a), apply section 705-30 as if:

the time mentioned in subsection (2) were the joining time mentioned in that section; and

the partnership were, at the time mentioned in subsection (2), the joining entity mentioned in that section.

Setting tax cost of partnership cost setting interests

713-220 Set tax cost of partnership cost setting interests if partner joins consolidated group

(1) This section applies if an entity (the joining entity) that is a partner in a partnership becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time).

Note: If the partnership becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the joining time, the application of this section is affected by section 713-235.

In applying the provisions mentioned in subsection 713-205(3) in relation to the joining entity:

work out the tax cost setting amount for each *partnership cost setting interest in the partnership that the joining entity holds at the joining time, in accordance with section 713-225; and

except for the purposes of section 713-235 (which applies only if the partnership joins the group), do not work out tax cost setting amounts for the assets of the partnership; and

do not work out tax cost setting amounts for the *membership interests in the partnership held by the joining entity.

Note 1: Because of paragraphs (b) and (c), no amount of allocable cost amount for the joining entity is allocated to the assets of the partnership, or to membership interests in the partnership held by the joining entity.

Note 2: If assets of the partnership are held on revenue account, the related partnership cost setting interests held by the joining entity have their tax cost set at the joining time. However, that tax cost does not alter calculations of the net income or exempt income of the partnership, or of a partnership loss, for the purposes of section 92 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

713-225 Tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interest

This section modifies the way in which the tax cost setting amounts are worked out under Division 705 for the *partnership cost setting interests mentioned in paragraph 713-220(2)(a).

Partnership cost setting interest takes character of partnership asset—general

(2) Work out the *tax cost setting amounts for those *partnership cost setting interests as if any partnership cost setting interest that relates to an asset (the underlying partnership asset) of the partnership were an asset of the same kind as the underlying partnership asset.

Note: The kinds of assets mentioned in subsection (2) include the following:

retained cost base assets;

reset cost base assets that are held on revenue account (however, if such assets are trading stock or depreciating assets, the special rule in subsection (4) will apply) or on capital account;

excluded assets (see subsection (3));

current assets (within the meaning of subsection 705-125(2)).

Example: The partnership has an asset that is Australian currency (which is a retained cost base asset). A partnership cost setting interest of the joining entity in that asset is treated as a retained cost base asset for the purpose of working out the tax cost setting amounts for the joining entity’s partnership cost setting interests in the partnership.

Partnership cost setting interest takes character of partnership asset—excluded assets

If:

tax cost setting amounts were to be worked out for the assets of the partnership under Division 705; and

in working out those amounts, the underlying partnership asset mentioned in subsection (2) would be an excluded asset for the purposes of section 705-35;

then subsection (2) operates so that the tax cost setting amounts for those *partnership cost setting interests are worked out as if any partnership cost setting interest that relates to the underlying partnership asset were an excluded asset for the purposes of section 705-35.

Special character of partnership cost setting interest in partnership asset that is trading stock, a depreciating asset or a registered emissions unit

Despite subsection (2), if an asset of the partnership is trading stock, a depreciating asset or a registered emissions unit, work out the tax cost setting amounts for those *partnership cost setting interests as if:

a partnership cost setting interest relating to that asset were a retained cost base asset; and

the tax cost setting amount for that partnership cost setting interest were equal to its terminating value (worked out in accordance with section 713-215).

Partnership liabilities—working out allocable cost amount

If:

(a) in accordance with the *accounting principles that the partnership would use if it were to prepare its financial statements just before the joining time, a thing (the partnership liability) is a liability of the partnership at the joining time; and

for that reason, the partnership liability is not an accounting liability of the joining entity at the joining time for the purposes of section 705-70;

then sections 705-70, 705-75 and 705-80 operate as if the partnership liability were an accounting liability of the joining entity at the joining time, to the extent of the joining entity’s individual share of the partnership liability.

Partnership deductions—working out allocable cost amount

Section 705-115 operates as if:

(a) a deduction to which the partnership is entitled (the partnership deduction) were a deduction to which the joining entity was entitled, to the extent of the joining entity’s individual share of the partnership deduction; and

the deduction to which the joining entity was entitled were of the same kind as the partnership deduction.

Note: These kinds of deductions include acquired deductions and owned deductions (within the meaning of section 705-115).

Special rules where partnership joins consolidated group

713-235 Partnership joins group—set tax cost of partnership assets

(1) This section applies if a partnership becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time).

In applying the provisions mentioned in subsection 713-205(3) in relation to the partnership:

do not work out an allocable cost amount for the partnership; and

(b) work out the *tax cost setting amount for each asset of the partnership covered by subsection (3), in accordance with section 713-240.

Note: If a partner in the partnership becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the joining time, tax cost setting amounts are worked out for the assets of the partner (including partnership cost setting interests) before tax cost setting amounts are worked out for the assets of the partnership.

An asset of the partnership at the joining time is covered by this subsection, unless it would be an excluded asset for the purposes of section 705-35 on the assumption that tax cost setting amounts were worked out for the assets of the partnership under Division 705 (instead of section 713-240).

713-240 Partnership joins group—tax cost setting amount for partnership asset

Work out the tax cost setting amounts for the assets covered by subsection 713-235(3) as follows:

(a) firstly, add up the subsection (2) amounts for all the partnership cost setting interests in the partnership at the joining time (the result is the partnership cost pool);

Note 1: Partnership cost setting interests held by a partner that becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the joining time are included in the calculation in paragraph (a). The operation of the cost setting rules in relation to that partner at the joining time may affect the subsection (2) amounts for those interests.

Note 2: Partnership cost setting interests are included in the calculation in paragraph (a), even if the cost setting rules have not applied in relation to the interests (for example, if the interests were acquired directly by the head company).

secondly, work out the tax cost setting amounts for the assets covered by subsection 713-235(3) that are *retained cost base assets, in accordance with section 705-25;

thirdly, work out the tax cost setting amounts for the rest of the assets covered by subsection 713-235(3), in accordance with subsection (3).

Subsection (2) amount for a partnership cost setting interest

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the subsection (2) amount for a *partnership cost setting interest is the amount specified in the following table:

Allocating partnership cost pool to partnership assets that are not retained cost base assets

(3) Work out the *tax cost setting amounts for the assets mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) by applying sections 705-35, 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47 to those assets, as if:

the partnership were, at the joining time, the joining entity mentioned in those sections; and

the assets of the partnership were the assets covered by subsection 713-235(3); and

the allocable cost amount mentioned in paragraph 705-35(1)(a) were the partnership cost pool.

For the purposes of this section, section 104-510 (CGT event L3) applies as if the group’s allocable cost amount for the entity mentioned in that section were the partnership cost pool.

Special rules where partnership leaves consolidated group

713-250 Partnership leaves group—standard provisions modified

(1) This section applies if a partnership ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time).

Note: The section applies whether or not any partner that is a subsidiary member of the group also ceases to be a subsidiary member at the leaving time.

Apply the provisions mentioned in subsection 713-205(5) subject to the modifications in the provisions that follow under this group heading.

713-255 Partnership leaves group—tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interests

Overview

Instead of working out tax cost setting amounts for *membership interests in the partnership, a special rule requires *partnership cost setting interests in the partnership to be worked out. Where other entities cease to be *subsidiary members at the same time, the normal tax cost setting amount rules are applied for membership interests in the other entities, but the special rule is applied for partnership cost setting interests in the partnership.

Tax cost setting amounts for membership interests in partnership not to be worked out

Do not work out tax cost setting amounts for *membership interests in the partnership.

Partnership is only entity that exits—tax cost setting amount for partnership cost setting interests

Except where the partnership ceases to be a *subsidiary member in circumstances covered by subsection (5), work out in accordance with subsection (4) the tax cost setting amount just before the leaving time for each *partnership cost setting interest in the partnership held by a partner that is a *member of the group just before the leaving time.

Tax cost setting amount

The tax cost setting amount is equal to the partner’s individual share of the terminating value of the partnership asset to which the *partnership cost setting interest relates.

Note: For income tax purposes there is no disposal by the head company of any assets of the partnership when it ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group.

Multiple exit case—tax cost setting amounts for both partnership cost setting interests in partnership and membership interests in other entities

If the partnership is one of 2 or more entities that cease to be *subsidiary members of the old group at the same time because of an event happening in relation to one of them, apply section 711-55 as if:

except in paragraph 711-55(3)(a), a reference to *membership interests in an entity, or to the tax cost setting amount for such interests, where the entity is the partnership, were a reference to *partnership cost setting interests in the partnership, or to the tax cost setting amount for such interests; and

paragraph 711-55(3)(a) were replaced by a requirement that, where the entity in which the membership interests mentioned in subsection 711-55(3) are held is the partnership, subsection (4) of this section is to be applied in working out the tax cost setting amount of the partnership cost setting interests in the partnership.

713-260 Partnership leaves group—tax cost setting amount for assets consisting of being owed certain liabilities

This section applies if:

when the partnership ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, a partner remains a *member of the group; and

an asset becomes an asset of the *head company because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the partnership when it ceases to be a subsidiary member; and

the asset is, ignoring that subsection:

the partner’s interest in an asset of the partnership consisting of a liability of a member of the group owed to the partnership; or

the partner’s share of a liability of the partnership owed to a member of the group.

The asset’s tax cost is set at the leaving time at a tax cost setting amount equal to the *market value of the asset.

713-265 Partnership leaves group—adjustments to allocable cost amount of partner who also leaves group

This section has effect in working out the group’s allocable cost amount for a partner in the partnership, if the partner ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group at the leaving time.

Section 711-35 operates as if:

(a) a deduction to which the partnership becomes entitled (the partnership deduction) were a deduction to which the partner becomes entitled, to the extent of the partner’s individual share of the partnership deduction; and

the deduction to which the partner becomes entitled were of the same kind as the partnership deduction.

Note: These kinds of deductions include acquired deductions and owned deductions (within the meaning of section 711-35).

Section 711-40 operates as if a liability owed by *members of the group to the partnership at the leaving time were a liability owed by members of the group to the partner at that time, to the extent of the partner’s individual share of the liability.

If:

(a) in accordance with the *accounting principles that the partnership would use if it were to prepare its financial statements just before the leaving time (disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)), a thing (the partnership liability) is a liability of the partnership just before the leaving time; and

for that reason, the partnership liability is not an accounting liability of the partner just before the leaving time for the purposes of section 711-45;

then section 711-45 operates as if the partnership liability were an accounting liability of the partner just before the leaving time, to the extent of the partner’s individual share of the partnership liability.

Subdivision 713-L — Life insurance companies

Guide to Subdivision 713-L

713-500 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out special rules for:

a life insurance company that becomes, or ceases to be, a member of a consolidated group; and

the head company of a consolidated group where a life insurance company is a subsidiary member of the group.

Table of sections

General modifications for life insurance companies

713-505 Head company treated as a life insurance company

713-510 Certain subsidiaries of life insurance companies cannot be members of consolidated group

713-510A Disregard single entity rule in working out certain amounts in respect of life insurance company

Life insurance companies’ liabilities on joining consolidated group

713-511 Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company joins consolidated group

Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group

713-515 Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where life insurance company joins group

713-520 Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company joins group

713-525 Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at joining time

Losses of life insurance companies joining consolidated group

713-530 Treatment of certain losses of life insurance company

Losses of life insurance companies’ subsidiaries joining consolidated group

713-535 Losses of entities whose membership interests are complying superannuation assets of life insurance company

713-540 Losses of entities whose membership interests are segregated exempt assets of life insurance company

Imputation rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group

713-545 Treatment of franking surplus in franking account of life insurance subsidiary joining group

713-550 Treatment of head company’s franking account after joining

Liabilities for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

713-565 Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company leaves consolidated group

Losses for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

713-570 Certain losses transferred to leaving company

Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

713-575 Terminating value of certain assets where life insurance company leaves group

713-580 Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company leaves group

713-585 Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at leaving time

General modifications for life insurance companies

713-505 Head company treated as a life insurance company

This Act, and the Income Tax Rates Act 1986, apply to the *head company of a *consolidated group as if it were a *life insurance company for an income year if one or more life insurance companies are *subsidiary members of the group at any time during that year.

713-510 Certain subsidiaries of life insurance companies cannot be members of consolidated group

An entity cannot be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or consolidatable group of which a life insurance company is a *member if:

the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, all the *membership interests in the entity and either:

(i) some, but not all, of the membership interests described in subsection (3) (the key interests) are *complying superannuation assets of the life insurance company; or

some, but not all, of the key interests are *segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company; or

the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, only some of the membership interests in the entity and any of the key interests are complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company.

Note: The entity could, however, be a member of another consolidated group or consolidatable group.

An entity cannot continue to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group of which a life insurance company is a *member if:

the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, all the *membership interests in the entity and, had the entity not been a subsidiary member of the group, either:

(i) some, but not all, of the membership interests described in subsection (3) (the key interests) would be *complying superannuation assets of the life insurance company; or

some, but not all, of the key interests would be *segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company; or

the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, only some of the membership interests in the entity and, had the entity not been a subsidiary member of the group, any of the key interests would be complying superannuation assets or segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company.

The key interests are the *membership interests the life insurance company owns directly in:

the entity; or

an interposed entity.

713-510A Disregard single entity rule in working out certain amounts in respect of life insurance company

This section applies if a life insurance company is a *member of a consolidated group.

However, if the life insurance company is a *subsidiary member of the group, this section does not apply:

for the purposes of working out the tax cost setting amount of an asset of the life insurance company when it becomes a subsidiary member of the group; and

for the purposes of working out the tax cost setting amount of a *membership interest in the life insurance company if it ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group.

Disregard section 701-1 (the single entity rule) in working out any of the following for the purposes of Division 320 in relation to the life insurance company:

amounts of the *head company’s ordinary income and statutory income derived from *segregated exempt assets that are not assessable income and are not exempt income under paragraph 320-37(1)(a);

the head company’s taxable income of the *complying superannuation class (see section 320-137);

the head company’s *tax loss of the complying superannuation class (see section 320-141);

the total *transfer value of the head company’s *complying superannuation assets (see paragraph 320-175(1)(a));

the amount of the head company’s *complying superannuation liabilities (see paragraph 320-175(1)(b));

the total transfer value of the head company’s segregated exempt assets (see paragraph 320-230(1)(a));

the amount of the head company’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities (see paragraph 320-230(1)(b)).

Life insurance companies’ liabilities on joining consolidated group

713-511 Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company joins consolidated group

This section affects how paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 apply if:

(a) a *life insurance company becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

just before the joining time, the life insurance company had one or more liabilities under the *net risk components of life insurance policies.

Note: Paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 both operate on the basis of a comparison of the value of the company’s liabilities under the net risk components of life insurance policies at the end of the current year with the value of those liabilities at the end of the previous year, so that:

that paragraph includes an amount in the company’s assessable income for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year; and

that section allows a deduction for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is more than the value at the end of the previous income year.

The object of this section is to ensure that the *head company of the consolidated group bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in *value of the liabilities only after the joining time.

Note: The life insurance company bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in value of the liabilities before the joining time, because section 701-30 ensures that paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 apply in relation to a part of the income year before that time when the company was not a subsidiary member of a consolidated group as if that part were an income year.

Paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 apply for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) as if the *value of the liabilities at the end of the last income year ending before the joining time were the value of the liabilities (for the life insurance company) just before the joining time.

Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group

713-515 Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where life insurance company joins group

(1) If an entity that becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time) is a *life insurance company, these assets are retained cost base assets:

a complying superannuation asset, or a *segregated exempt asset, of the company; and

another asset of the company that is held by the company for the purpose of discharging its liabilities under the net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies (except policies that provide for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits under *life insurance business carried on in Australia); and

(c) for a life insurance company that has demutualised under Division 9AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 where, in the period starting just after the company demutualises and ending at the joining time, all of the *membership interests in the company were owned by the same group—a goodwill asset of the company.

If the retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (1)(a) or (b), its tax cost setting amount is:

for the purposes of working out the tax cost setting amounts for reset cost base assets (see section 705-35)—the asset’s *transfer value just before the joining time; and

for all other purposes—the asset’s terminating value.

(3) If the *retained cost base asset is covered by paragraph (1)(c), its *tax cost setting amount is the embedded value (see subsection 121AM(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) on the applicable accounting day (see subsection 121AM(3) of that Act) of the *life insurance company concerned reduced by the net value of shareholders’ assets held by the company on that day.

(4) The net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies is the component of *life insurance policies (except *exempt life insurance policies and *complying superannuation life insurance policies) that:

is the component in respect of the part of those policies that has not been reinsured under a *contract of reinsurance; and

is not the *net risk component of those policies.

713-520 Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company joins group

Despite section 705-70, if the joining entity mentioned in step 2 in the table in section 705-60 is a life insurance company, the joining entity’s liabilities mentioned in this section are to be valued as mentioned in this section.

The value of the joining entity’s *complying superannuation liabilities (if any) is the amount worked out under section 320-190 at the joining time.

The value of the joining entity’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities (if any) is the amount worked out under section 320-245 at the joining time.

Subsection (5) applies to a liability of the joining entity if:

the liability is under the net risk component of a *life insurance policy; and

the joining entity could deduct under section 320-80 an amount for the *risk component of claims paid under the policy had it not become a *member of the consolidated group.

The value of that liability is the *current termination value of the *net risk component of the *life insurance policy at the joining time (calculated by an actuary).

The value of the joining entity’s liabilities under the net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies is the amount worked out for those liabilities under subsection 320-190(2) as if those liabilities were *complying superannuation liabilities.

713-525 Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at joining time

Division 320 has effect as if the time when a life insurance company becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group were a *valuation time for the purposes of sections 320-175 and 320-230.

Losses of life insurance companies joining consolidated group

Note: This means that there must be a valuation of the complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities under section 320-175 (with the consequences set out in section 320-180), and a valuation of the segregated exempt assets and exempt life insurance policy liabilities under section 320-230 (with the consequences set out in section 320-235), as at that time.

713-530 Treatment of certain losses of life insurance company

This section applies if:

(a) a *life insurance company becomes a *member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

just before the joining time, the life insurance company had either:

a *tax loss of the *complying superannuation class; or

a net capital loss from *complying superannuation assets.

This Act operates (except so far as the contrary intention appears) for the purposes of income years ending after the joining time as if:

the *head company of the consolidated group had made the loss for the income year in which the joining time occurs; and

the life insurance company had not made the loss for the income year for which it made the loss.

The *head company is not prevented from *utilising the loss for the income year in which the joining time occurs merely because this Act operates as if the head company had made the loss for that year.

Division 707 does not apply in relation to the net capital loss or the *tax loss at the joining time.

Losses of life insurance companies’ subsidiaries joining consolidated group

713-535 Losses of entities whose membership interests are complying superannuation assets of life insurance company

This section applies if:

(a) a *life insurance company becomes a *member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) at the joining time, the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, all the *membership interests in yet another entity (the life insurance subsidiary) that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at that time; and

all the following membership interests are *complying superannuation assets of the life insurance company:

the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the life insurance subsidiary;

the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the interposed entities; and

the *head company of the group makes a *tax loss or net capital loss under Subdivision 707-A because of a transfer from the life insurance subsidiary.

This Act operates for the purposes of income years ending after the transfer as if:

the *tax loss were of the *complying superannuation class; or

the net capital loss were from *complying superannuation assets.

Subdivisions 707-B, 707-C and 707-D do not affect the *utilisation of the loss by the *head company of the consolidated group.

713-540 Losses of entities whose membership interests are segregated exempt assets of life insurance company

This section applies if:

(a) a *life insurance company becomes a *member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) at the joining time, the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, all the *membership interests in yet another entity (the life insurance subsidiary) that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at that time; and

all the following membership interests are *segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company:

the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the life insurance subsidiary;

the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the interposed entities.

A *tax loss or net capital loss of the life insurance subsidiary for an income year ending before the joining time cannot be *utilised by the life insurance subsidiary for an income year ending after that time.

Note: This prevents the loss from being transferred to the head company of the consolidated group under Subdivision 707-A (because it means the life insurance subsidiary could not have utilised the loss for the trial year). As a result, section 707-150 prevents any other entity from utilising the loss for an income year ending after the joining time.

Imputation rules for life insurance companies joining consolidated group

713-545 Treatment of franking surplus in franking account of life insurance subsidiary joining group

This section applies if:

(a) a *life insurance company becomes a *member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) at the joining time, the life insurance company owns, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, *membership interests in yet another entity (the life insurance subsidiary) that becomes a *subsidiary member of the group at that time; and

the life insurance subsidiary’s franking account is in surplus just before the joining time.

Paragraph 709-60(2)(b) does not apply in relation to the life insurance subsidiary.

A franking credit arises at the joining time in the franking account of the *head company of the group. The amount of the credit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

The amount is equal to the amount of the franking credit that would arise in the life insurance company’s franking account just before the joining time under item 5 of the table in subsection 219-15(2) if:

the life insurance subsidiary made a *franked distribution to the life insurance company just before the joining time; and

the amount of the franking credit on the distribution were equal to the surplus mentioned in paragraph (1)(c).

The *head company of the group is entitled to a tax offset for the income year in which the joining time occurs. The amount of the tax offset is:

if all the *membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the life insurance subsidiary, and all the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in interposed entities, are *segregated exempt assets of the life insurance company—the surplus mentioned in paragraph (1)(c), reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (4); or

if all the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in the life insurance subsidiary, and all the membership interests (if any) that the life insurance company owns directly in interposed entities, are *complying superannuation assets of the life insurance company—the amount worked out under subsection (6); or

otherwise—nil.

The amount is worked out using the following formula (or is nil if it would otherwise be negative):

where:

complying superannuation class tax rate means the rate of tax in respect of the *complying superannuation class of the taxable income of a *life insurance company for the income year in which the joining time occurs (see paragraph 23A(b) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986).

ordinary class tax rate means the rate of tax in respect of the *ordinary class of the taxable income of a life insurance company for the income year in which the joining time occurs (see paragraph 23A(a) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986).

713-550 Treatment of head company’s franking account after joining

Sections 709-70 and 709-75 do not apply in relation to a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group if:

the subsidiary member is a life insurance company; or

a life insurance company that is a *member of the group owns *membership interests, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, in the subsidiary member.

Liabilities for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

713-565 Treatment of certain liabilities for income year when life insurance company leaves consolidated group

This section affects how paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 apply if:

(a) a *life insurance company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

at the leaving time, the life insurance company has one or more liabilities under the *net risk components of life insurance policies.

Note: Paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 both operate on the basis of a comparison of the value of a life insurance company’s liabilities under the net risk components of life insurance policies at the end of the current year with the value of those liabilities at the end of the previous year, so that:

that paragraph includes an amount in the company’s assessable income for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year; and

that section allows a deduction for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is more than the value at the end of the previous income year.

The object of this section is to ensure that:

the *head company of the consolidated group bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in *value of the liabilities before the leaving time; and

the life insurance company bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in value of the liabilities after the leaving time.

Head company’s income or deduction from liabilities

For the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to the income year in which the leaving time occurs (but not later income years), paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 have effect as if:

the *head company of the consolidated group had the liabilities at the end of that income year; and

the *value of the liabilities at the end of that income year had been the amount that was actually the value of the liabilities (for the life insurance company) at the leaving time.

Life insurance company’s income or deduction from liabilities

For the entity core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to the life insurance company and the income year in which the leaving time occurs, paragraph 320-15(1)(h) and section 320-85 have effect as if the *value of the liabilities at the end of the previous income year had been the amount that was actually the value of the liabilities (for the life insurance company) at the leaving time.

Losses for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

713-570 Certain losses transferred to leaving company

This section applies if:

(a) a *life insurance company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

ignoring section 713-505, at the leaving time, no other *member of the group is a life insurance company that has a complying superannuation asset pool; and

at the leaving time, the *head company has either:

a *tax loss of the *complying superannuation class; or

a net capital loss from *complying superannuation assets.

This Act operates (except so far as the contrary intention appears) for the purposes of income years ending after the leaving time as if:

the life insurance company had made the loss for the income year in which the leaving time occurs; and

the *head company had not made the loss for the income year for which it made the loss.

Note: Section 707-410 (Exit history rule does not treat entity as having made a loss) does not prevent the life insurance company from having the loss under this section, because that section merely states that the company is not taken under section 701-40 (Exit history rule) to have made a loss.

The life insurance company is not prevented from *utilising the loss for the income year in which the leaving time occurs merely because this Act operates as if the life insurance company had made the loss for that year.

Tax cost setting rules for life insurance companies leaving consolidated group

713-575 Terminating value of certain assets where life insurance company leaves group

(1) This section applies if a *life insurance company (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time).

(2) For the purposes of applying section 711-25 in relation to the leaving entity, the *head company’s terminating value for an asset that it holds at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) to be a part of the head company is the *transfer value of the asset at the leaving time, if the asset is:

a complying superannuation asset, or a *segregated exempt asset, of the head company; or

held by the head company for the purpose of discharging its liabilities under the net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies (except policies that provide for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits under *life insurance business carried on in Australia).

713-580 Valuing certain liabilities where life insurance company leaves group

Despite section 711-45, if the leaving entity mentioned in step 4 in the table in section 711-20 is a life insurance company, the leaving entity’s liabilities mentioned in this section are to be valued as mentioned in this section.

To avoid doubt, those liabilities are the liabilities that become those of the leaving entity because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) ceases to apply to the leaving entity when it ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group.

The value of the leaving entity’s *complying superannuation liabilities (if any) is the amount worked out under section 320-190 at the leaving time.

The value of the leaving entity’s exempt life insurance policy liabilities (if any) is the amount worked out under section 320-245 at the leaving time.

Subsection (6) applies to a liability of the leaving entity if:

the liability is under the net risk component of a *life insurance policy; and

the leaving entity could deduct under section 320-80 an amount for the *risk component of claims paid under the policy on or after the time it ceased to be a *member of the consolidated group.

The value of that liability is the *current termination value of the *net risk component of the *life insurance policy at the leaving time (calculated by an actuary).

The value of the leaving entity’s liabilities under the net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies is the amount worked out for those liabilities under subsection 320-190(2) as if those liabilities were *complying superannuation liabilities.

713-585 Obligation to value certain assets and liabilities at leaving time

Division 320 has effect as if the time when a life insurance company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group were a *valuation time for the purposes of sections 320-175 and 320-230.

Note: This means that there must be a valuation of the complying superannuation assets and complying superannuation liabilities under section 320-175 (with the consequences set out in section 320-180), and a valuation of the segregated exempt assets and exempt life insurance policy liabilities under section 320-230 (with the consequences set out in section 320-235), as at that time.

Subdivision 713-M — General insurance companies

Guide to Subdivision 713-M

713-700 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out special rules for a general insurance company becoming or ceasing to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group.

Table of sections

Tax cost setting rules for general insurance companies joining consolidated group

713-705 Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where general insurance company joins group

Liabilities and reserves of general insurance companies joining and leaving consolidated groups

713-710 Treatment of liabilities and reserves for income year when general insurance company joins or leaves group

713-715 If general insurance company joins consolidated group

713-720 If general insurance company leaves consolidated group

713-725 Treatment of certain assets and liabilities of general insurance companies

Tax cost setting rules for general insurance companies joining consolidated group

713-705 Certain assets taken to be retained cost base assets where general insurance company joins group

This section applies if:

(a) a *general insurance company becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) that company has demutualised under Division 9AA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

in the period starting just after the company demutualises and ending at the joining time, all of the *membership interests in the company were owned by the same group.

(2) A goodwill asset of the company just before the joining time is a retained cost base asset.

(3) The goodwill asset’s *tax cost setting amount is its amount (worked out in accordance with subsection 121AN(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) on the applicable accounting day (see subsection 121AN(4) of that Act).

Liabilities and reserves of general insurance companies joining and leaving consolidated groups

713-710 Treatment of liabilities and reserves for income year when general insurance company joins or leaves group

Sections 713-715 and 713-720 affect how sections 321-10, 321-15, 321-50 and 321-55 (the affected sections) apply in relation to these values (the affected values):

the value of a general insurance company’s adjusted liability for incurred claims under *general insurance policies that is worked out under section 321-20;

the value of a general insurance company’s adjusted liability for remaining coverage under general insurance policies that is worked out under section 321-60.

Note 1: Sections 321-10 and 321-15 both operate on the basis of a comparison of the value of a general insurance company’s adjusted liability for incurred claims at the end of the current year with the value of that liability at the end of the previous income year, so that:

section 321-10 includes an amount in the company’s assessable income for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year; and

section 321-15 allows a deduction for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is more than the value at the end of the previous income year.

Note 2: Sections 321-50 and 321-55 both operate on the basis of a comparison of the value of a general insurance company’s adjusted liability for remaining coverage at the end of the current year with the value of that reserve at the end of the previous income year, so that:

section 321-50 includes an amount in the company’s assessable income for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is less than the value at the end of the previous income year; and

section 321-55 allows a deduction for the current year if the value at the end of the current year is more than the value at the end of the previous income year.

713-715 If general insurance company joins consolidated group

(1) This section applies if a *general insurance company becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time).

The object of this section is to ensure that the *head company of the consolidated group bears the income tax consequences relating to changes after the joining time in the affected values.

Note: The general insurance company bears the income tax consequences relating to a change in the affected values before the joining time, because section 701-30 ensures that the affected sections apply in relation to a part of the income year before that time when the company was not a subsidiary member of a consolidated group as if that part were an income year.

The affected sections apply for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) as if each of the affected values at the end of the last income year ending before the joining time were the amount that would have been that value had that income year ended just before the joining time.

713-720 If general insurance company leaves consolidated group

(1) This section applies if a *general insurance company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time) in an income year (the leaving year).

The object of this section is to ensure that:

the *head company of the consolidated group bears the income tax consequences relating to changes before the leaving time in the affected values; and

the general insurance company bears the income tax consequences relating to changes after the leaving time in the affected values.

Head company’s income or deduction

For the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to the leaving year (but not later income years), the affected sections have effect as if each of the affected values at the end of the leaving year for the *head company of the consolidated group were increased by the relevant value for the general insurance company at the end of the previous income year worked out under subsection (5).

General insurance company’s income or deduction

For the entity core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to the general insurance company and the leaving year, the affected sections have effect as if each of the affected values for the general insurance company at the end of the previous income year were worked out under subsection (5).

Working out affected values at the end of the previous income year

Work out each of the affected values for the general insurance company at the end of the previous income year as if it had ended at the leaving time.

713-725 Treatment of certain assets and liabilities of general insurance companies

This section applies if a general insurance company becomes or ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group.

If the general insurance company becomes a *subsidiary member of the group:

in working out the step 2 amount for the purposes of the table in section 705-60, reduce that amount by the sum of the amount of each thing mentioned in subsection (4); and

in working out the tax cost setting amount of a thing mentioned in subsection (4) for the purposes of section 705-35, treat the *market value of the thing as zero.

If the general insurance company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group:

in working out the step 4 amount for the purposes of the table in section 711-20, reduce that amount by the sum of the amount of each thing mentioned in subsection (4); and

for the purposes of section 711-25, treat the terminating value of a thing mentioned in subsection (4) as zero.

The things are the general insurance company’s:

*assets for insurance acquisition cash flows to the extent that they are used to measure the company’s adjusted liability for remaining coverage; and

deferred reinsurance expenses to the extent that they are used to measure the company’s adjusted liability for remaining coverage; and

recoveries receivable, or potential recoveries, measured under the *applicable insurance contracts standard to the extent that they relate to insurance contracts or reinsurance contracts; and

claims handling costs that are neither attached to, nor directly attributable to, a particular claim, to the extent that these costs are used to measure the company’s adjusted liability for incurred claims; and

loss components and loss-recovery components of onerous contracts to the extent that they are used to measure the company’s adjusted liability for remaining coverage.

Division 715 — Interactions between this Part and other areas of the income tax law

Table of Subdivisions

715-A Treatment of unrealised losses existing when ownership or control of a company changes before or during consolidation

715-B How Subdivision 165-CD applies to consolidated groups and leaving entities

715-C Common rules for the purposes of Subdivisions 715-A and 715-B

715-D Treatment of company’s deferred losses under Subdivision 170-D on joining a consolidated group

715-E Interactions with Division 775 (Foreign currency gains and losses)

715-F Interactions with Division 230 (financial arrangements)

715-G How value shifting rules apply to a consolidated group

715-H Cancelling loss on realisation event for direct or indirect interest in a member of a consolidated group

715-J Entry history rule and choices

715-K Exit history rule and choices

715-U Effect on conduit foreign income

715-V Entity ceasing to be exempt from income tax on becoming subsidiary member of consolidated group

715-W Effect on arrangements where CGT roll-overs are obtained

Subdivision 715-A — Treatment of unrealised losses existing when ownership or control of a company changes before or during consolidation

Table of sections

Object

715-15 Object of this Subdivision

Effect on Subdivision 165-CC of a company becoming a member of a consolidated group

715-25 Subdivision 165-CC stops applying to earlier changeover time

715-30 Meaning of 165-CC tagged asset

715-35 Meaning of final RUNL

165-CC tagged assets that affect tax cost setting amounts

715-50 Step 1 amount is reduced if membership interest in subsidiary member is 165-CC tagged asset and business continuity test is failed

715-55 Step 2 amount is affected if liability of subsidiary member is 165-CC tagged asset of another group member and business continuity test is failed

165-CC tagged assets that form loss denial pools of head company when consolidated group is formed

715-60 Assets that the head company already owns

715-70 Assets of subsidiary member that become those of head company

How Subdivision 165-CC applies to consolidated groups

715-75 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule

Effect on Subdivision 165-CC of entity leaving consolidated group

715-80 Application of sections 715-85 to 715-110

715-85 First changeover time for leaving company at or after leaving time

715-90 How business continuity test applies if leaving time is changeover time for leaving company

715-95 If ownership and control of leaving entity have not changed since head company’s last changeover time

715-100 First choice: adjustable values of leaving assets reduced to nil

715-105 Second choice: head company’s final RUNL applied in reducing adjustable values of leaving assets that are loss assets

715-110 Third choice: loss denial pool of leaving entity created

Effect of assets in loss denial pool of head company becoming assets of leaving entity

715-120 What happens

715-125 First choice: adjustable values of leaving assets reduced to nil

715-130 Second choice: pool’s loss denial balance applied in reducing adjustable values of leaving assets that are loss assets

715-135 Third choice: loss denial pool of leaving entity created

Effect of first and second choices on various kinds of assets

715-145 Effect of choice on adjustable value of leaving asset

General provisions about loss denial pools

715-155 When asset leaves pool

715-160 How loss denial balance is applied to losses realised on assets in pool

715-165 When pool ceases to exist

Choices under this Subdivision

715-175 When choice must be made

715-180 Head company to notify leaving entity of choice

715-185 Leaving entity may choose to cancel loss denial pool by reducing adjustable values of assets in the pool

Object

715-15 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to give effect to the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss) in these cases:

on formation of a consolidated group, a CGT asset held directly by the *head company is affected by that Subdivision, and the business continuity test is failed;

on an entity becoming a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, an asset consisting of:

(i) a *membership interest that a *member of the group (including a chosen transitional entity under Division 701 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997) holds in the entity; or

a liability that the entity owes to such a member;

is affected by that Subdivision, and the business continuity test is failed;

on a company becoming a subsidiary member:

a CGT asset of the company that becomes an asset of the head company is affected by that Subdivision; and

because the company is a chosen transitional entity, the asset does not have its tax cost reset; and

the business continuity test is failed;

on an entity ceasing to be a subsidiary member, a CGT asset of the head company that becomes an asset of the entity is affected by that Subdivision, and the business continuity test is failed.

Note: Subdivision 165-CC also affects an entity that has deferred losses under Subdivision 170-D on assets that it formerly owned. Subdivision 715-D gives effect to the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC if such an entity becomes a member of a consolidated group.

This Subdivision achieves its object by supplementing and modifying the application of Subdivision 165-CC to take account of how the rest of this Part treats *members of a consolidated group (in particular the provisions about entities becoming or ceasing to be members).

Effect on Subdivision 165-CC of a company becoming a member of a consolidated group

715-25 Subdivision 165-CC stops applying to earlier changeover time

(1) At and after the time (the membership time) when a company becomes a *member of a *consolidated group, Subdivision 165-CC does not apply to the company in relation to a *changeover time that happened before the membership time, except for the purposes of section 715-30 (which defines 165-CC tagged asset).

Note 1: Subdivision 165-CC is about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss.

Note 2: If the company has 165-CC tagged assets at the membership time, there are further consequences under this Subdivision and Subdivision 715-D.

Also, Subdivision 165-CC can apply to the head company of the group in relation to a changeover time that happens for it at or after the membership time. See section 715-75.

Subsection (1) continues to have effect even if the company later stops being a *member of the group.

715-30 Meaning of 165-CC tagged asset

A *CGT asset is a 165-CC tagged asset of a company at a particular time if, and only if:

that time is at or after the most recent *changeover time (if any) for the company; and

at that changeover time, the company had an unrealised net loss under section 165-115E; and

the asset is covered by subsection 165-115A(1A) as applying to that changeover time; and

the company would not, at that changeover time, satisfy the maximum net asset value test under section 152-15; and

if the company has chosen under subsection 165-115A(1B) in relation to that changeover time—the company *acquired the asset for $10,000 or more.

715-35 Meaning of final RUNL

A company’s final RUNL at a particular time (the test time) is the amount that would have been the company’s *residual unrealised net loss at the time of:

if no event that subsection 165-115BB(2) refers to as a relevant event actually happens at the test time—a notional event of that kind happening at the test time; or

(b) otherwise—a notional event of that kind that happens at the test time, and that the company determines under paragraph 165-115BB(1)(b) to have happened later than each event that actually happened at that time.

Note: This Subdivision reduces a company’s final RUNL as amounts of it are applied for various purposes.

165-CC tagged assets that affect tax cost setting amounts

715-50 Step 1 amount is reduced if membership interest in subsidiary member is 165-CC tagged asset and business continuity test is failed

The amount taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) (about the cost of membership interests in the joining entity) for a *membership interest that a *member of the joined group holds in the joining entity at the joining time is reduced if:

apart from this section, the amount would be the membership interest’s *reduced cost base (if appropriate, as modified by a later provision of section 705-65); and

the membership interest is at that time a *165-CC tagged asset of that member, and that member owned it at the *changeover time for that member; and

that member’s final RUNL just before the joining time was greater than nil; and

(d) that member does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:

(i) the period (the business continuity test period) consisting of the *head company’s *trial year; and

(ii) the time (the test time) just before the *changeover time.

If at the joining time that *member holds:

2 or *more membership interests in the joining entity; or

at least one membership interest in the joining entity, and at least one membership interest in another member of the joined group;

this section applies to each such membership interest in whichever order that member determines.

Amount of reduction

The amount taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) is reduced to the *membership interest’s *market value at the joining time.

(4) However, if that member’s *final RUNL (as reduced by any previous reductions under this section) is less than the difference between:

the *reduced cost base referred to in paragraph (1)(a); and

the *market value referred to in subsection (3);

the amount taken into account under subsection 705-65(1) is instead reduced by that final RUNL.

That final RUNL is reduced by the amount of the reduction under subsection (3) or (4).

Non-membership equity interests

Subsection 705-65(6) (which treats *non-membership equity interests as *membership interests) also applies for the purposes of this section.

715-55 Step 2 amount is affected if liability of subsidiary member is 165-CC tagged asset of another group member and business continuity test is failed

(1) The amount (the comparison amount) applicable under the table in subsection 705-75(2) (about reduction of the step 2 amount) for an accounting liability of the joining entity that is owed to a *member of the joined group at the joining time is reduced if:

apart from this section, the comparison amount would be the *reduced cost base (if appropriate, as modified by a later provision of section 705-75) of the asset of that member that is constituted by the accounting liability; and

the asset is at that time a *165-CC tagged asset of that member, and that member owned it at the *changeover time; and

that member’s final RUNL just before the joining time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50) was greater than nil; and

(d) that member does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:

(i) the period (the business continuity test period) consisting of the *head company’s *trial year; and

(ii) the time (the test time) just before the *changeover time.

Note: Paragraph (1)(c) has the effect that if both this section and section 715-50 apply to the same member of the joined group, section 715-50 is applied before this section.

If at the joining time that *member holds:

2 or *more assets constituted by accounting liabilities of the joining entity; or

at least one asset constituted by an accounting liability of the joining entity, and at least one asset constituted by an accounting liability of another member of the group;

this section applies to each such asset in whichever order that member determines.

Amount of reduction

The comparison amount is reduced to the asset’s *market value at the joining time.

(4) However, if that member’s *final RUNL (as reduced by any previous reductions under section 715-50 or this section) is less than the difference between:

the *reduced cost base referred to in paragraph (1)(a); and

the asset’s *market value at the joining time;

the comparison amount is instead reduced by that final RUNL.

That final RUNL is reduced by the amount of the reduction under subsection (3) or (4).

165-CC tagged assets that form loss denial pools of head company when consolidated group is formed

715-60 Assets that the head company already owns

(1) At the time (the formation time) when a *consolidated group comes into existence under paragraph 703-5(1)(a), a loss denial pool of the *head company is created if:

(a) the formation time is not a *changeover time for the head company; and

at the formation time, the head company owns a CGT asset:

that is a *165-CC tagged asset of the head company at that time; and

that it owned at the *changeover time; and

that is not a *membership interest in a *member of the group; and

that is not a right or option (including a contingent right or option), created or issued by a member of the group, to acquire such a membership interest; and

that is not constituted by a liability owed to the head company by a member of the group;

or 2 or more such assets; and

the head company’s final RUNL just before the formation time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 or 715-55) was greater than nil; and

(d) the head company does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:

(i) the period (the business continuity test period) consisting of the head company’s *trial year; and

(ii) the time (the test time) just before the *changeover time.

Note: Paragraph (1)(c) has the effect that if the head company has 165-CC tagged assets that are affected by section 715-50 or 715-55 (because they are membership interests in, or accounting liabilities owed by, another group member), those sections are applied before this section.

(2) When it is created, the pool consists of the one or more *CGT assets referred to in paragraph (1)(b), and its loss denial balance is equal to the *final RUNL referred to in paragraph (1)(c).

Note 1: The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the head company, for example, one created at the formation time under section 715-70.

Note 2: 170-D deferred losses on 165-CC tagged assets of the head company may be added to the pool by subsection 715-355(1).

715-70 Assets of subsidiary member that become those of head company

(1) At the time (the formation time) when an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group, a loss denial pool of the *head company of the group is created if:

(a) the formation time is not a *changeover time for the head company; and

(b) the entity is a chosen transitional entity under Division 701 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997; and

subsection (2) or (4) of this section is satisfied.

Note 1: If the entity is a chosen transitional entity, section 701-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 prevents:

• section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity); and

• subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount);

of this Act from applying to the entity’s assets in relation to the formation time.

Joining entity has 165-CC tagged assets

Note 2: The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the head company, for example, one created under this section because another entity becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the formation time.

This subsection is satisfied if:

a CGT asset of the entity, or each of 2 or more CGT assets of the entity:

is a *165-CC tagged asset of the entity at the formation time; and

was owned by the entity at the *changeover time; and

is not a *membership interest in a *member of the group; and

is not a right or option (including a contingent right or option), created or issued by a member of the group, to acquire such a membership interest; and

is not constituted by a liability owed to the entity by a member of the group at the formation time; and

the entity’s final RUNL just before the formation time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 or 715-55) was greater than nil; and

(c) the entity does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:

(i) the period (the business continuity test period) consisting of the entity’s *trial year; and

(ii) the time (the test time) just before the *changeover time.

Note: Paragraph (2)(b) has the effect that if the entity has 165-CC tagged assets that are affected by section 715-50 or 715-55 (because they are membership interests in, or accounting liabilities owed by, another group member), those sections are applied before this section.

(3) When it is created because of subsection (2), the pool consists of the one or more *CGT assets referred to in paragraph (2)(a), and its loss denial balance is equal to the *final RUNL referred to in paragraph (2)(b).

Note: 170-D deferred losses on 165-CC tagged assets of the head company may be added to the pool by subsection 715-355(2).

Entity has loss denial pool

This subsection is satisfied if, just before the formation time, the entity had a *loss denial pool.

When it is created because of subsection (4), the *head company’s loss denial pool:

consists of the one or more *CGT assets of which the entity’s loss *denial pool consisted; and

(b) has a loss denial balance equal to the *loss denial balance of the entity’s loss denial pool;

just before the formation time.

How Subdivision 165-CC applies to consolidated groups

715-75 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule

Subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) and section 701-5 (Entry history rule) also have effect for all the purposes of Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss).

Note: One consequence of this is that the head company is the only member of a consolidated group that can have a changeover time and be subject to consequences under Subdivision 165-CC. The head company is treated as owning all CGT assets owned by group members, and as making relevant losses.

This section is not intended to limit the effect that subsection 701-1(1) and section 701-5 have apart from this section.

Effect on Subdivision 165-CC of entity leaving consolidated group

715-80 Application of sections 715-85 to 715-110

Sections 715-85 to 715-110 apply if, at a particular time (the leaving time), an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group.

This is because the head company can no longer make a capital loss, or become entitled to a deduction, in respect of a CGT event happening to any of those assets.

Note 1: If a changeover time happened to the head company at or after the group came into existence and before the leaving time, Subdivision 165-CC does not apply to the head company at and after the leaving time, in respect of assets that leave with the leaving entity, in relation to the changeover time.

Note 2: If, just before the leaving time, the head company had a loss denial pool, see section 715-120.

715-85 First changeover time for leaving company at or after leaving time

If the leaving entity is a company, its first *changeover time at or after the leaving time is determined:

(a) on the basis that the reference time under subsection 165-115A(2A) is the one that would be used in determining whether the leaving time was a changeover time for the head company; and

making the additional assumptions in section 715-290.

Note: If the leaving entity is a trust, it cannot have a changeover time (because Subdivision 165-CC applies only to companies), so section 715-95 applies to it instead: see subsection 715-95(2).

715-90 How business continuity test applies if leaving time is changeover time for leaving company

This section applies if:

the leaving entity is a company; and

the leaving time is a *changeover time for the leaving entity.

(2) In applying to the leaving entity for the *changeover time that is the leaving time, subsection 165-115B(3) and paragraph 165-115BA(5)(c) have effect as if they provided that the time just after the changeover time were the test time for applying section 165-13 to the company.

Note: This ensures that the business continuity test is applied to the business that the leaving entity carries on at the leaving time.

715-95 If ownership and control of leaving entity have not changed since head company’s last changeover time

This section applies if:

the leaving entity is a company; and

(b) the leaving time is not a *changeover time for the leaving entity; and

just before the leaving time, the *head company owned at least one CGT asset:

that was a *165-CC tagged asset just before the leaving time; and

that it owned at the latest changeover time for the head company at or after the group came into existence and before the leaving time; and

(d) at least one asset covered by paragraph (c) is an asset (a leaving asset) that becomes an asset of the leaving entity at the leaving time because subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity; and

the head company’s final RUNL at the leaving time is greater than nil.

This section also applies if the leaving entity is a trust.

(3) If the *head company does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:

(a) the period (the business continuity test period) starting at the earlier of:

the time 12 months before the leaving time; and

when the head company came into existence;

and ending just before the leaving time; and

(b) the time (the test time) just before the *changeover time;

the head company must make one of the choices for which sections 715-100, 715-105 and 715-110 provide.

Note: For provisions about making one of these choices, see sections 715-175 to 715-185.

715-100 First choice: adjustable values of leaving assets reduced to nil

The first choice is to reduce the *adjustable value of each leaving asset to nil. The choice has effect accordingly, just before the leaving time. The *head company’s *final RUNL is not reduced because of it.

Note: The consequences of the choice are worked out under section 715-145.

715-105 Second choice: head company’s final RUNL applied in reducing adjustable values of leaving assets that are loss assets

(1) The second choice is to reduce under this section the *adjustable value of each leaving asset (a loss asset) for which the *head company would have had a notional capital loss, or notional revenue loss, under section 165-115F at the time (the test time) just before the leaving time if the test time had been a *changeover time for the head company. The choice has effect accordingly.

Note: The consequences of the choice are worked out under this section and section 715-145.

If:

2 or more entities cease to be *subsidiary members of the consolidated group at the leaving time; and

2 or more of them make the second choice;

the choices have effect in whichever order the *head company determines.

This section applies to each of the loss assets in order, according to their respective *adjustable values (apart from this section) at the test time: from largest to smallest. (If an asset has more than one such adjustable value, use the greater or greatest of them.)

At the test time, the *adjustable value of the loss asset is reduced to the asset’s *market value at that time.

(5) However, if the *head company’s *final RUNL at the leaving time (as reduced by any previous reductions under this section) is less than the difference between:

the *adjustable value of the loss asset (apart from this section) at the test time; and

the asset’s *market value at the test time;

the adjustable value is instead reduced at the test time by that final RUNL.

That final RUNL is reduced by the amount of the reduction under subsection (4) or (5). If 2 or more such reductions are made for the same asset (because it has 2 or more different characters), that final RUNL is reduced by the greater or greatest of the reductions.

715-110 Third choice: loss denial pool of leaving entity created

(1) The third choice can be made only if every asset covered by paragraph 715-95(1)(c) is a leaving asset. The choice is to have a loss denial pool of the leaving entity created at the leaving time, consisting of every leaving asset. (To avoid doubt, the choice can be made even if the leaving entity is not a company.)

A choice under this section has effect accordingly. The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the leaving entity.

(3) When the pool is created, its loss denial balance is equal to the *head company’s *final RUNL at the leaving time.

Note: If the head company makes this choice, the leaving entity can choose to cancel the loss denial pool by reducing reduced cost bases of assets in the pool: see section 715-185.

Effect of assets in loss denial pool of head company becoming assets of leaving entity

715-120 What happens

This section applies if:

(a) at a particular time (the leaving time), an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group; and

just before the leaving time, the *head company had a *loss denial pool; and

(c) at the leaving time, at least one *CGT asset (a leaving asset) that was in the pool just before that time becomes a CGT asset of the leaving entity because subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity;

Each leaving asset leaves the *loss denial pool at the leaving time.

If:

(a) the leaving entity is a company and the leaving time is not a *changeover time for the leaving entity; or

the leaving entity is a trust;

the *head company must make one of the choices for which sections 715-125, 715-130 and 715-135 provide.

For provisions about making one of these choices, see sections 715-175 to 715-185.

715-125 First choice: adjustable values of leaving assets reduced to nil

The first choice is to reduce the *adjustable value of each leaving asset to nil. The choice has effect accordingly, just before the leaving time. The *loss denial balance of the *head company’s *loss denial pool is not reduced because of it.

Note: The consequences of the choice are worked out under section 715-145.

715-130 Second choice: pool’s loss denial balance applied in reducing adjustable values of leaving assets that are loss assets

(1) The second choice is to reduce under this section the *adjustable value of each leaving asset (a loss asset) for which the *head company would have had a notional capital loss, or notional revenue loss, under section 165-115F at the time (the test time) just before the leaving time if the test time had been a *changeover time for the head company. The choice has effect accordingly.

Note: The consequences of the choice are worked out under this section and section 715-145.

If:

2 or more entities cease to be *subsidiary members of the consolidated group; and

2 or more of them make the second choice;

the choices have effect in the same order as the entities cease being subsidiary members. If 2 or more of the entities ceased at the same time, their choices have effect in whichever order the *head company determines.

This section applies to each of the loss assets in order, according to their respective *adjustable values (apart from this section) at the test time: from largest to smallest. (If an asset has more than one such adjustable value, use the greater or greatest of them.)

At the test time, the *adjustable value of the loss asset is reduced to the asset’s *market value at that time.

(5) However, if the *loss denial balance (as reduced by any previous reductions under this section or section 715-160) of the *head company’s *loss denial pool is less than the difference between:

the *adjustable value of the loss asset (apart from this section) at the test time; and

the asset’s *market value at the test time;

the adjustable value is instead reduced at the test time by that loss denial balance.

That *loss denial balance is reduced at the leaving time by the amount of the reduction under subsection (3) or (4). If 2 or more such reductions are made for the same asset (because it has 2 or more different characters), that loss denial balance is reduced by the greater or greatest of the reductions.

715-135 Third choice: loss denial pool of leaving entity created

(1) The third choice can be made only if every asset that was in the *loss denial pool just before the leaving time is a leaving asset. The choice is to have a loss denial pool of the leaving entity created at the leaving time, consisting of every leaving asset. (To avoid doubt, the choice can be made even if the leaving entity is not a company.)

A choice under this section has effect accordingly. The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the leaving entity.

(3) When the leaving entity’s loss denial pool is created, its loss denial balance equals the loss denial balance of the head company’s loss denial pool (as reduced by any previous reductions under section 715-130 or 715-160).

Note: If the head company makes this choice, the leaving entity can choose to cancel the loss denial pool by reducing reduced cost bases of assets in the pool: see section 715-185.

The head company’s *loss denial pool ceases to exist when the leaving entity’s loss denial pool is created.

Effect of first and second choices on various kinds of assets

715-145 Effect of choice on adjustable value of leaving asset

(1) This section has effect for the purposes of determining the consequences of a choice under any of sections 715-100, 715-105, 715-125, 715-130 and 715-185 (the choice provisions) for a leaving asset.

(2) The asset’s adjustable value at the time (the test time) just before the leaving time is worked out under this table. (If the asset is covered by 2 or more items, there are consequences for it under the choice provisions and this section in respect of each of the items.)

If any of the choice provisions reduces at the test time the asset’s *adjustable value, the thing identified for the asset under the table in subsection (2) of this section is reduced by the same amount.

Subsection (3) has effect for the purposes of working out under section 711-30 the *head company’s terminating value for the asset at the leaving time.

General provisions about loss denial pools

715-155 When asset leaves pool

A CGT asset leaves a *loss denial pool:

just after a realisation event happens to the asset, unless the realisation event is the ending of an income year (in the case of an item of trading stock); or

as mentioned in subsection 715-120(2) (when it becomes an asset of the leaving entity).

715-160 How loss denial balance is applied to losses realised on assets in pool

If, apart from this section, a loss would be *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to a CGT asset when it is in a loss denial pool of an entity, the loss is reduced by the lesser of:

the amount of the loss; and

the pool’s *loss denial balance (as reduced by any previous reductions under section 715-130 or this subsection);

and the loss denial balance is reduced by the same amount.

Subsection (1) applies to *realisation events in the order in which they happen. If 2 or more happen at the same time, it applies to them in whichever order the entity determines.

(3) Subsection (1) reduces a *loss denial balance after section 715-130 does, unless the *realisation event happens before the leaving time referred to in that section.

715-165 When pool ceases to exist

A *loss denial pool of a company ceases to exist when there is a *changeover time for the company.

Note: The CGT assets in the pool then become subject to the application of Subdivision 165-CC (about change of ownership or control of a company that has an unrealised net loss).

A *loss denial pool of any entity ceases to exist:

when there are no *CGT assets, and no *170-D deferred losses, in the pool; or

just after the *loss denial balance becomes nil; or

when the entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; or

as mentioned in subsection 715-135(4).

Choices under this Subdivision

715-175 When choice must be made

A choice under section 715-95 or 715-120 must be made within 6 months after the leaving time, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner.

After that 6 months, or that further period, the head company is taken to have made the first choice under section 715-100 or 715-125 unless it is established that the head company made a different choice within that 6 months or further period.

715-180 Head company to notify leaving entity of choice

Within one month after making a choice under section 715-95 or 715-120, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner, the head company must give the leaving entity written notice of the choice.

If the choice is to have a *loss denial pool of the leaving entity created at the leaving time, the notice must also specify the pool’s *loss denial balance at that time.

715-185 Leaving entity may choose to cancel loss denial pool by reducing adjustable values of assets in the pool

Within 6 months after a *loss denial pool is created under section 715-110 or 715-135, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner, the leaving entity may choose to be treated as if the *head company had instead made:

the first choice under section 715-100 or 715-125; or

the second choice under section 715-105 or 715-130;

as specified by the leaving entity in its choice.

If the leaving entity makes a choice under subsection (1):

the *loss denial pool ceases to exist just after the leaving time; and

at the leaving time, the *adjustable value of each CGT asset in the pool is reduced to what it would have been at that time if the head company had instead made the choice specified by the leaving entity in its choice.

The choice by the leaving entity does not affect how subsection 715-135(4) applies to the *head company.

Note: This means that the head company’s loss denial pool still ceases to exist.

Subdivision 715-B — How Subdivision 165-CD applies to consolidated groups and leaving entities

Table of sections

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to consolidated groups

715-215 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule

715-225 Working out adjusted unrealised loss using individual asset method

715-230 No reductions or other consequences for interests subject to loss cancellation under Subdivision 715-H

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to leaving entity that is a company

715-240 Application of sections 715-245 to 715-260

715-245 If ownership or control of leaving entity has altered since head company’s last alteration time or formation of group

715-250 If head company has had an alteration time but ownership and control of leaving entity have not altered since

715-255 Consequences if leaving entity is a loss company at the leaving time

715-260 If neither of sections 715-245 and 715-250 applies

715-265 Head company does not have relevant equity or debt interest in a loss company if widely held top company does not have such an interest

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to leaving entity that is a trust

715-270 Subdivision 165-CD applies

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to consolidated groups

715-215 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule

Subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) and section 701-5 (Entry history rule) also have effect for all the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD (about reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company).

Note: One consequence of this is that the head company is the only member of a consolidated group that can have an alteration time and be subject to reductions or other consequences under Subdivision 165-CD. The head company is treated as owning all CGT assets owned by group members, and as making relevant losses.

Another consequence is for working out who has a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest in a company that has an alteration time at which it is a loss company but not a member of a consolidated group. Interests in the loss company that are owned by subsidiary members of the group are treated as being owned by the head company.

This section is not intended to limit the effect that subsection 701-1(1) and section 701-5 have apart from this section.

715-225 Working out adjusted unrealised loss using individual asset method

For the purposes of:

using the individual asset method to work out whether the *head company of a consolidated group has an adjusted unrealised loss under section 165-115U at an *alteration time; or

working out under section 165-115W whether the head company of a consolidated group has a trading stock decrease at an alteration time;

step 1 of the method statement in subsection 165-115U(1), or step 2 of the method statement in subsection 165-115W(1), does not apply to an amount that was counted in respect of a *CGT asset at an earlier time if:

(c) at the time (the joining time) when an entity became a *subsidiary member of the group, the asset became an asset of the head company because of subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule); and

the earlier time is an *alteration time that happened in respect of the entity before the joining time;

unless the entity is a chosen transitional entity under Division 701 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

• section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity); and

• subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount);

of this Act from applying to the assets of the joining entity in relation to the joining time.

If the joining entity is not a chosen transitional entity, it is assumed that the process of resetting the tax costs of its assets will bring their tax costs into closer alignment to their market values, and so remove the need to consider unrealised losses on those assets that existed before the joining time.

Note: If the joining entity is a chosen transitional entity, section 701-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 prevents:

This section has effect despite section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

715-230 No reductions or other consequences for interests subject to loss cancellation under Subdivision 715-H

If section 715-610 reduces a loss that would otherwise be *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to an interest in, or a debt owed by, a company, sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB do not apply (and are taken never to have applied) to the interest or debt, in relation to an *alteration time that happened for the company during the ownership period referred to in subsection 715-610(2).

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to leaving entity that is a company

Note 1: Section 715-610 is about cancelling a loss on a realisation event for certain kinds of interests in a member of a consolidated group.

Note 2: Sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB are about the consequences that an alteration time for a loss company has for relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests in the company.

715-240 Application of sections 715-245 to 715-260

Sections 715-245 to 715-260 affect how Subdivision 165-CD (about reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company) applies to a company (the leaving entity) at and after the time (the leaving time) when it ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group that came into existence at a particular time (the formation time).

Note: If a trust ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group: see section 715-270.

715-245 If ownership or control of leaving entity has altered since head company’s last alteration time or formation of group

This section applies if the leaving time would be an *alteration time for the leaving entity if:

the reference time under subsection 165-115L(2) or 165-115M(2) were:

if at least one alteration time has occurred in relation to the *head company of the consolidated group since the formation time and before the leaving time—the time just after the most recent such alteration time; or

otherwise—the formation time; and

the additional assumptions in section 715-290 were made.

(2) The leaving time is an alteration time for the leaving entity.

Note: One consequence of this is that the reference time for working out the leaving entity’s next alteration time is the time just after the leaving time.

(3) The leaving entity is a loss company at that *alteration time if, and only if, it has an *adjusted unrealised loss at that time. If so, that adjusted unrealised loss is the leaving entity’s overall loss at that time.

Note 1: Subsection (4) affects how the leaving entity works out its adjusted unrealised loss at the leaving time in some cases.

Note 2: If the leaving entity is a loss company at the leaving time, section 715-255 provides for the consequences.

If the leaving entity uses the individual asset method of working out its *adjusted unrealised loss at that *alteration time, then for the purposes of:

step 1 of the method statement in subsection 165-115U(1); and

the method statement in subsection 165-115W(1);

the leaving entity is taken to have had no earlier alteration time.

715-250 If head company has had an alteration time but ownership and control of leaving entity have not altered since

This section applies if:

at least one *alteration time has occurred in relation to the *head company of the consolidated group since the formation time and before the leaving time; and

(b) the leaving time is not an *alteration time for the leaving entity under subsection 715-245(2).

(2) The leaving time is an alteration time for the leaving entity.

(3) However, for the purposes of determining when the leaving entity’s next *alteration time happens, the reference time under subsection 165-115L(2) or 165-115M(2) is the time just after the most recent alteration time for the *head company before the leaving time.

(4) The leaving entity is a loss company at the leaving time if, and only if, the *head company would have had an *adjusted unrealised loss at the most recent *alteration time (the head company alteration time) for the head company before the leaving time if that adjusted unrealised loss (if any) were worked out on the basis that:

the head company chooses whether the individual asset method or the *global method is used; and

a CGT asset is taken into account only if:

the head company owned it at the head company alteration time; and

it becomes a CGT asset of the leaving entity at the leaving time because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the entity; and

if the individual asset method is used, then for the purposes of:

step 1 of the method statement in subsection 165-115U(1); and

the method statement in subsection 165-115W(1);

the head company had no earlier alteration time.

(5) If the leaving entity is a *loss company at the leaving time, its overall loss at that time is the *adjusted unrealised loss worked out under subsection (4).

715-255 Consequences if leaving entity is a loss company at the leaving time

If:

section 715-245 or 715-250 applies; and

the leaving entity is a *loss company at the leaving time; and

the *head company has a relevant equity interest under section 165-115X in the leaving entity at the leaving time;

the head company must choose whether subsection (2) or (3) of this section has effect for the purposes of applying, to each *membership interest in the leaving entity, in relation to the time just before the leaving time, whichever of these provisions is appropriate:

subsection 701-55(3) (about trading stock);

subsection 701-55(5), but only so far as it relates to working out the *reduced cost base of a *membership interest that was *acquired on or after 20 September 1985;

subsection 701-55(6) (about revenue assets).

Note: Section 701-55 is about setting the tax cost of an asset.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(ba), in determining whether the *head company has the relevant equity interest, disregard the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in applying subsections 165-115X(2C) and 165-115X(4).

If the *head company chooses this subsection, the interest’s tax cost setting amount (apart from this section) just before the leaving time is reduced to nil.

If the *head company chooses this subsection, the interest’s tax cost setting amount (apart from this section) just before the leaving time is reduced by the adjustment amount under section 165-115ZB, which is calculated on the basis that:

just before the leaving time, all the *membership interests in the leaving entity constituted a single relevant equity interest under section 165-115X that the head company had in the leaving entity; and

the adjustment amount is worked out and applied in accordance with subsection 165-115ZB(6), but disregarding the paragraphs of that subsection except paragraphs 165-115ZB(6)(a) and (d).

The *head company’s choice must be made within 6 months after the leaving time, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner.

After that 6 months, or that further period, the head company is taken to have chosen subsection (2) unless it is established that the head company made a different choice within that 6 months or further period.

Non-membership equity interests

Subsection 711-15(2) (which treats *non-membership equity interests as *membership interests) also applies for the purposes of this section, on the basis that the consolidated group referred to in section 715-240 is the old group referred to in that subsection.

715-260 If neither of sections 715-245 and 715-250 applies

This section applies if:

no *alteration time has occurred in relation to the *head company of the consolidated group since the formation time and before the leaving time; and

(b) the leaving time is not an *alteration time for the leaving entity under subsection 715-245(2).

The leaving entity’s first *alteration time after the leaving time is determined:

on the basis that the reference time under subsection 165-115L(2) or 165-115M(2) is the time just after the formation time; and

making the additional assumptions in section 715-290.

If the leaving entity uses the individual asset method of working out its *adjusted unrealised loss at that first *alteration time, then for the purposes of:

step 1 of the method statement in subsection 165-115U(1); and

the method statement in subsection 165-115W(1);

the leaving entity is taken to have had no earlier alteration time.

715-265 Head company does not have relevant equity or debt interest in a loss company if widely held top company does not have such an interest

(1) For the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD, treat the *head company of a *consolidated group as not having a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:

the head company is an eligible tier-1 company of a top company at that time; and

the top company is a *widely held company at that time; and

because of subsections 165-115X(2A), (2B) and (2C), the top company does not have a relevant equity interest under section 165-115X in the loss company at that time.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), disregard the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in determining whether subsection 165-115X(2C) has the effect that the top company has the relevant equity interest mentioned in that paragraph.

(3) For the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD, treat the *head company of a *consolidated group as not having a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:

the head company is an eligible tier-1 company of a top company at that time; and

the top company is a *widely held company at that time; and

because of subsections 165-115Y(3A), (3B) and (3C), the top company does not have a relevant debt interest under section 165-115Y in the loss company at that time.

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to leaving entity that is a trust

715-270 Subdivision 165-CD applies

(1) At and after the time (the leaving time) when a trust ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group, Subdivision 165-CD (about reductions after alterations in ownership or control of loss company) applies to the trust on the basis set out in this section.

The trust is taken to be a company.

(3) The leaving time is the only alteration time in respect of the trust.

(4) The trust is a loss company at that time if, and only if, it has an *adjusted unrealised loss at that time. If so, that adjusted unrealised loss is its overall loss at that time.

If the trust is a *loss company at the leaving time and the *head company has a relevant equity interest under section 165-115X in the leaving entity at the leaving time, the head company must choose whether subsection (6) or (7) of this section has effect for the purposes of applying, to each *membership interest in the trust, in relation to the time just before the leaving time, whichever of these provisions is appropriate:

subsection 701-55(3) (about trading stock);

subsection 701-55(5), but only so far as it relates to working out the *reduced cost base of a *membership interest that was *acquired on or after 20 September 1985;

subsection 701-55(6) (about revenue assets).

Note: Section 701-55 is about setting the tax cost of an asset.

For the purposes of subsection (5), in determining whether the *head company has the relevant equity interest, disregard the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in applying subsections 165-115X(2C) and 165-115X(4).

If the *head company chooses this subsection, the interest’s tax cost setting amount (apart from this section) just before the leaving time is reduced to nil.

If the *head company chooses this subsection, the interest’s tax cost setting amount (apart from this section) just before the leaving time is reduced by the adjustment amount under section 165-115ZB, which is calculated on the basis that:

just before the leaving time:

all the *membership interests in the leaving entity constituted a single relevant equity interest under section 165-115X that the *head company had in the leaving entity; and

each of those interests was an equity under section 165-115X that the *head company had in the leaving entity; and

the adjustment amount is worked out and applied in accordance with subsection 165-115ZB(6), but disregarding the paragraphs of that subsection except paragraphs 165-115ZB(6)(a) and (d).

The *head company’s choice must be made within 6 months after the leaving time, or within a further period allowed by the Commissioner.

After that 6 months, or that further period, the head company is taken to have chosen subsection (6) unless it is established that the head company made a different choice within that 6 months or further period.

Non-membership equity interests

Subsection 711-15(2) (which treats *non-membership equity interests as *membership interests) also applies for the purposes of this section, on the basis that the consolidated group is the old group referred to in that subsection.

Subdivision 715-C — Common rules for the purposes of Subdivisions 715-A and 715-B

715-290 Additional assumptions to be made when using reference time

The additional assumptions to be made are that, throughout the period starting at the reference time and ending just before the leaving time:

the leaving entity was in existence; and

the *head company held and beneficially owned all the *membership interests in the leaving entity (instead of whoever actually did); and

those membership interests remained the same; and

the head company directly controlled the voting power in the leaving entity.

Subdivision 715-D — Treatment of company’s deferred losses under Subdivision 170-D on joining a consolidated group

Table of sections

Key terminology

715-310 What is a 170-D deferred loss, and when it revives

Deferred loss on 165-CC tagged asset

715-355 Head company’s own deferred losses at formation time

715-360 Deferred losses brought in by subsidiary member

715-365 How loss denial balance is applied when 170-D deferred loss revives

Key terminology

715-310 What is a 170-D deferred loss, and when it revives

(1) A *capital loss, deduction, or partner’s share of a deduction, that section 170-270 (about transactions within linked groups) requires to be disregarded is a 170-D deferred loss made:

by the company that paragraph 170-255(1)(a) refers to as the originating company; and

at the time of the event that paragraph refers to as the deferral event; and

on the CGT asset *acquired by the other entity referred to in that paragraph.

(2) The *170-D deferred loss revives at the time when section 170-275 (as applying in relation to the deferral event) treats the originating company as having made a *capital loss, or having become entitled to a deduction, in respect of that asset.

Deferred loss on 165-CC tagged asset

715-355 Head company’s own deferred losses at formation time

(1) This section applies if, at the time (the formation time) when a *consolidated group comes into existence, the *head company has (otherwise than because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule)) a *170-D deferred loss that:

it made on a CGT asset that is a *165-CC tagged asset of the head company because of paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b) (which covers CGT assets on which it has 170-D deferred losses); and

has not *revived.

If a *loss denial pool of the *head company is created under section 715-60 at the formation time, each *170-D deferred loss of that kind that the head company has at that time is added to the loss denial pool at that time.

(3) Otherwise, a loss denial pool of the *head company is created at the formation time if:

(a) the formation time is not a *changeover time for the head company; and

the head company’s final RUNL just before the formation time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 or 715-55) was greater than nil; and

(c) the head company does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:

(i) the period (the business continuity test period) consisting of the head company’s *trial year; and

(ii) the time (the test time) just before the *changeover time.

Note: Paragraph (3)(b) has the effect that if the head company has 165-CC tagged assets that are affected by section 715-50 or 715-55 (because they are membership interests in, or accounting liabilities owed by, another group member), those sections are applied before this section.

(4) When it is created because of subsection (3), the pool consists of each *170-D deferred loss covered by subsection (2), and its loss denial balance is equal to the *final RUNL referred to in paragraph (3)(b).

Note: The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the head company, for example, one created at the formation time under section 715-360.

715-360 Deferred losses brought in by subsidiary member

(1) This section applies if, just before the time (the membership time) when a company (the deferred loss company) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group, it had a *170-D deferred loss that:

it made on a CGT asset that is a *165-CC tagged asset of the company at the membership time because of paragraph 165-115A(1A)(b) (which covers CGT assets on which it has 170-D deferred losses); and

as at the membership time has not *revived.

If a *loss denial pool of the *head company is created under subsection 715-70(2) because of the deferred loss company becoming a *subsidiary member of the group, each *170-D deferred loss of that kind that the deferred loss company had just before the membership time is added to the loss denial pool at that time.

(3) Otherwise, a loss denial pool of the *head company is created at the membership time if:

(a) the membership time is not a *changeover time for the head company; and

the deferred loss company’s final RUNL just before the membership time (as reduced by any reductions under section 715-50 or 715-55) was greater than nil; and

(c) the deferred loss company does not satisfy the *business continuity test for:

(i) the period (the business continuity test period) consisting of the deferred loss company’s *trial year; and

(ii) the time (the test time) just before the *changeover time.

Note 1: The 170-D deferred losses become those of the head company at the formation time because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

Note 2: Paragraph (3)(b) has the effect that if the deferred loss company has other 165-CC tagged assets affected by section 715-50 or 715-55 (because the membership time is when the group comes into existence, and the other 165-CC tagged assets are membership interests in, or accounting liabilities owed by, another group member), those sections are applied before this section.

(4) When it is created because of subsection (3), the pool consists of each 170-D deferred loss covered by subsection (2), and its loss denial balance is equal to the *final RUNL referred to in paragraph (3)(b).

Note: The pool is distinct from any other loss denial pool of the head company, for example, one created under this section because another entity becomes a subsidiary member of the group at the membership time.

715-365 How loss denial balance is applied when 170-D deferred loss revives

If a *170-D deferred loss on a CGT asset is in a loss denial pool of an entity when the loss *revives, the *capital loss or deduction that section 170-275 would, apart from this section, treat the entity as having made or become entitled to at that time in respect of the asset is reduced by the lesser of:

the amount of the capital loss or deduction; and

the pool’s *loss denial balance (as reduced by any previous reductions under section 715-130, subsection 715-160(1) or this subsection);

and the loss denial balance is reduced by the same amount.

Subsection (1) applies to *170-D deferred losses in the order in which they *revive. If 2 or more revive at the same time, it applies to them in whichever order the entity determines.

(3) Subsection (1) reduces a *loss denial balance before section 715-130 does, unless the *realisation event happens after the leaving time referred to in that section.

Subdivision 715-E — Interactions with Division 775 (Foreign currency gains and losses)

Table of sections

715-370 Cost setting—reference time for determining currency exchange rate effect

715-370 Cost setting—reference time for determining currency exchange rate effect

This section applies if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

taking into account the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the *head company of the group held an asset at the joining time because the joining entity became a subsidiary member of the group; and

the asset is a reset cost base asset at the joining time (within the meaning of section 705-35); and

in working out the asset’s tax cost setting amount, the currency exchange rate of a particular foreign currency is taken into account in determining the *market value of the asset.

For the purposes of Division 775, determine the extent of any currency exchange rate effect after the joining time in relation to the asset, by reference to the currency exchange rate for the foreign currency at the joining time.

Subdivision 715-F — Interactions with Division 230 (financial arrangements)

Table of sections

715-375 Cost setting on joining—amount of liability that is Division 230 financial arrangement

715-378 Cost setting on joining—head company’s right to receive or obligation to provide payment

715-379 Cost setting on leaving—amount of intragroup liability that is Division 230 financial arrangement

715-379A Cost setting on leaving—head company’s or leaving entity’s right to receive or obligation to provide payment

715-380 Exit history rule not to affect certain matters related to Division 230 financial arrangements

715-385 Exit history rule and elective methods applying to Division 230 financial arrangements

715-375 Cost setting on joining—amount of liability that is Division 230 financial arrangement

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) a thing (the accounting liability) is, in accordance with *accounting standards, or statements of accounting concepts made by the Australian Accounting Standards Board, a liability of the joining entity at the joining time (disregarding subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)) that can or must be recognised in the entity’s statement of financial position; and

the accounting liability is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement of the head company at the joining time (because of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)).

(2) For the purposes of Division 230 and Schedule 1 to the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009, treat the *head company of the group as starting to have the accounting liability at the joining time for receiving a payment equal to:

if the liability is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement of the head company at the joining time (because of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule)):

to which Subdivision 230-B (accruals method or realisation method) applies; or

to which Subdivision 230-E (hedging financial arrangements method) applies;

the amount of the liability, as determined in accordance with:

the joining entity’s *accounting principles for tax cost setting; or

(iv) if the amount of the liability cannot be determined in accordance with the joining entity’s accounting principles for tax cost setting—comparable standards for accounting made under a *foreign law; or

otherwise—the liability’s *Division 230 starting value at the joining time.

715-378 Cost setting on joining—head company’s right to receive or obligation to provide payment

This section applies in relation to an asset or a liability if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

the asset or liability becomes that of the head company of the group because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) applies at the joining time; and

in the case of an asset—subsection 701-55(5A) applies in relation to the asset at the joining time; and

in the case of a liability—subsection 715-375(2) applies in relation to the liability at the joining time.

In the case of an asset, for the purposes of section 230-60, assume that the *head company of the group acquired the asset at the joining time (as mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A)) in return for the head company starting to have an obligation to provide the payment mentioned in that subsection.

In the case of a liability, for the purposes of section 230-60, assume that the *head company of the group started to have the liability at the joining time (as mentioned in subsection 715-375(2)) in return for the head company starting to have a right to receive the payment mentioned in that subsection.

715-379 Cost setting on leaving—amount of intragroup liability that is Division 230 financial arrangement

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

(b) a thing (the accounting liability) is, in accordance with *accounting standards, or statements of accounting concepts made by the Australian Accounting Standards Board:

a liability of the leaving entity at the leaving time that can or must be recognised in the entity’s statement of financial position; or

a liability of the *head company of the group at the leaving time that can or must be recognised in the head company’s statement of financial position; and

because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the leaving entity at the leaving time:

(i) if subparagraph (b)(i) applies—the accounting liability becomes a liability of the leaving entity, and an asset (the corresponding asset) that consists of the liability becomes an asset of the head company; or

(ii) if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies—the accounting liability becomes a liability of the head company, and an asset (the corresponding asset) that consists of the liability becomes an asset of the leaving entity; and

the corresponding asset’s tax cost is set at the leaving time under:

if subparagraph (b)(i) applies—section 701-20; or

if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies—section 701-45; and

the accounting liability is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

(2) For the purposes of Division 230 of this Act and Schedule 1 to the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009:

if subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies—treat the leaving entity as starting to have the accounting liability at the leaving time for receiving a payment equal to the tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset; or

if subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) applies—treat the *head company as starting to have the accounting liability at the leaving time for receiving a payment equal to the tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset.

Note: The tax cost setting amount of the corresponding asset is determined under sections 701-60 and 701-60A.

715-379A Cost setting on leaving—head company’s or leaving entity’s right to receive or obligation to provide payment

This section applies in relation to an asset or a liability if:

(a) an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceases to apply to the leaving entity at the leaving time, the asset or liability becomes the asset or liability of:

the leaving entity; or

the *head company of the group; and

if subparagraph (b)(i) applies:

in the case of an asset—subsection 701-55(5A) applies in relation to the asset at the leaving time because of section 701-45; or

in the case of a liability—subsection 715-379(2) applies in relation to the liability at the leaving time; and

if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies:

in the case of an asset—subsection 701-55(5A) applies in relation to the asset at the leaving time because of section 701-20; and

in the case of a liability—subsection 715-379(2) applies in relation to the liability at the leaving time; and

the asset or liability is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement.

If subparagraph (1)(b)(i) applies:

in the case of an asset—for the purposes of section 230-60, assume that the leaving entity acquired the asset (as mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A)) at the leaving time in return for the leaving entity starting to have an obligation to provide the payment mentioned in that subsection; and

in the case of a liability—for the purposes of section 230-60, assume that the leaving entity started to have the liability at the leaving time in return for the leaving entity starting to have a right to receive the payment mentioned in subsection 715-379(2).

If subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) applies:

in the case of an asset—for the purposes of section 230-60, assume that the head company acquired the asset (as mentioned in subsection 701-55(5A)) at the leaving time in return for the head company starting to have an obligation to provide the payment mentioned in that subsection; and

in the case of a liability—for the purposes of section 230-60, assume that the head company started to have the liability at the leaving time in return for the head company starting to have a right to receive the payment mentioned in subsection 715-379(2).

715-380 Exit history rule not to affect certain matters related to Division 230 financial arrangements

Spreading fees gain or loss

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

but for the cessation of membership and section 701-40 (the exit history rule), the *head company of the group would spread a fees gain or loss mentioned in section 230-160 over a period that ended after the leaving time.

Despite section 701-40 (the exit history rule), the *head company of the consolidated group continues to spread the fees gain or loss over that period, in accordance with section 230-160.

Assessable income and deductions under section 701-61

Subsection (4) applies if:

(a) an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

but for the cessation of membership and section 701-40 (the exit history rule):

an amount would be included in the assessable income of the *head company of the group under section 701-61 for an income year ending after the leaving time; or

the head company of the group would be entitled to a deduction under section 701-61 for an income year ending after the leaving time.

Despite section 701-40 (the exit history rule), the amount is included in the assessable income of the *head company for the income year, or the head company is entitled to the deduction for the income year.

715-385 Exit history rule and elective methods applying to Division 230 financial arrangements

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

the *head company of the group has a *Division 230 financial arrangement at the leaving time because the leaving entity is taken by subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) to be a part of the head company; and

after the leaving time, the leaving entity makes an election of a kind mentioned in section 230-220 (fair value method), 230-265 (foreign exchange retranslation method), 230-325 (hedging method) or 230-410 (reliance on financial reports method).

For the purposes of determining whether the election applies to the financial arrangement, disregard paragraphs 230-220(1)(d), 230-265(1)(d), 230-325(a) and 230-410(1)(b)).

Subdivision 715-G — How value shifting rules apply to a consolidated group

Table of sections

715-410 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule

715-450 No reductions or other consequences for interests subject to loss cancellation under Subdivision 715-H

715-410 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule

Subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) and section 701-5 (Entry history rule) also have effect for all the purposes of Part 3-95 (Value shifting).

Note: One consequence of this for the operation of Division 727 (about indirect value shifting affecting interests in companies and trusts, and arising from non-arm’s length dealings) is that economic benefits provided by or to a subsidiary member of a consolidated group are treated as provided by or to the head company of the group. As a result:

• the head company is the only group member that can be a losing entity or gaining entity for an indirect value shift; and

• economic benefits provided by one group member to another are treated as provided by the head company to itself, and so have no relevance to Division 727.

Another consequence is that the head company is treated as owning all interests owned by group members in a losing entity or gaining entity that is not a group member.

This section is not intended to limit the effect that subsection 701-1(1) and section 701-5 have apart from this section.

715-450 No reductions or other consequences for interests subject to loss cancellation under Subdivision 715-H

If section 715-610 reduces a loss that would otherwise be *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to an equity or loan interest in an entity:

the loss is not subject to reduction under Division 723 (Direct value shifting by creating right over non-depreciating asset) or 727 (Indirect value shifting); and

the interest’s *adjustable value is not, and is taken never to have been, reduced under Division 725 because of a direct value shift during the ownership period referred to in subsection 715-610(2); and

the interest’s *adjustable value is not, and is taken never to have been, reduced under Division 727 because of an indirect value shift during that period.

Note: Section 715-610 is about cancelling a loss on a realisation event for certain kinds of interests in a member of a consolidated group.

Subdivision 715-H — Cancelling loss on realisation event for direct or indirect interest in a member of a consolidated group

Table of sections

715-610 Cancellation of loss

715-615 Exception for interests in entity leaving consolidated group

715-620 Exception if loss attributable to certain matters

715-610 Cancellation of loss

(1) This section reduces to nil a loss that would otherwise be *realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event that happens to an *equity or loan interest (the realised interest) in an entity (the first entity) when it is owned by another entity (the owner), if the conditions in subsections (2) and (4) are met.

(2) The first condition is that, at some time during the period (the ownership period) when the owner owned the realised interest:

(a) the first entity was a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group, and the owner was not a *member of the group; or

the realised interest was an *external indirect equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a consolidated group; or

the realised interest was an equity or loan interest in an entity that, at that time:

owned an equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

(ii) was not a member of the group; or

the realised interest was an equity or loan interest in an entity that owned at that time an external indirect equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a consolidated group; or

all of these conditions are satisfied at that time:

the realised interest was an equity or loan interest, an indirect equity or loan interest or an external indirect equity or loan interest, in the *head company of a consolidated group;

(ii) the owner was not a member of the group;

the head company was an eligible tier-1 company of a top company.

(3) An *equity or loan interest in an entity (the test entity) is an external indirect equity or loan interest in a member of a *consolidated group if, and only if, neither the owner of the interest nor the test entity is a member of the group and:

the test entity owns an equity or loan interest in the member; or

the test entity owns an equity or loan interest that is an external indirect equity or loan interest in the member because of one or more other applications of this subsection.

The second condition is that, at the same or a different time during the ownership period:

the owner was, or *controlled (for value shifting purposes), the *head company of a consolidated group because of which the first condition is satisfied; or

the owner was an associate of an entity that, at the same or a different time during the ownership period, was, or controlled (for value shifting purposes), the head company of such a consolidated group.

715-615 Exception for interests in entity leaving consolidated group

Membership interests in leaving entity

If:

the realised interest is a *membership interest; and

during the ownership period the first entity ceased to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group;

the first condition in section 715-610 cannot be satisfied, because of that consolidated group, at a time when the first entity was a member of the group, unless the interest needed to be disregarded under section 703-35 (about employee shares), or section 703-37 (about ADI restructures), in order for the first entity to be a member of the group at that time.

Liabilities owed by leaving entity

If the realised interest:

consists of a liability owed by the first entity to the owner; and

became an asset of the owner because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceased to apply to the first entity when it ceased to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group;

the first condition in section 715-610 cannot be satisfied, because of that consolidated group, at a time when the first entity was a member of the group.

715-620 Exception if loss attributable to certain matters

The loss is not reduced if all of it can be shown to be attributable to things other than these:

(a) something that would be reflected in what would, apart from this Part, be an overall loss under section 165-115R or 165-115S, of a *member of a *consolidated group (an excluded group) because of which the first condition in section 715-610 is satisfied, at an *alteration time for that member;

an indirect value shift for which, apart from this Part, a member of an excluded group would be the *losing entity or the *gaining entity.

If only part of the loss can be shown to be attributable to things other than the ones listed in subsection (1), the loss is reduced to the amount of that part.

Subdivision 715-J — Entry history rule and choices

Table of sections

Head company’s choice overriding entry history rule

715-660 Head company’s choice overriding entry history rule

Choices head company can make ignoring entry history rule to override inconsistencies

715-665 Head company’s choice to override inconsistency

Choices with ongoing effect

715-670 Ongoing effect of choices made by entities before joining group

715-675 Head company adopting choice with ongoing effect

Head company’s choice overriding entry history rule

715-660 Head company’s choice overriding entry history rule

Application

(1) This section has effect if an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time) and either:

(a) the question whether the entity had made a choice (however described) under a provision (the choice provision) listed in the table was relevant to working out the entity’s liability (if any) for income tax, or the entity’s loss (if any) of a particular *sort, calculated by reference to an income year starting before the joining time; or

before the joining time, the entity made a choice that:

is described in paragraph (a); and

would, if the entity had not become a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, have started to have effect for working out the entity’s liability (if any) for income tax, or the entity’s loss (if any) of a particular *sort, calculated by reference to the first income year starting after the joining time.

Note: Declarations, elections and selections made under the choice provision by the entity are all examples of choices under that provision (even though the provision does not call them choices), because the entity has chosen to make them.

Objects

The main objects of this section are:

to override section 701-5 (Entry history rule) in relation to a choice (however described) by the entity under the choice provision or the absence of such a choice; and

to extend, in some cases, the time for the *head company of the consolidated group to make a choice (however described) under the choice provision after the joining time; and

to modify, in some cases, the time at which such a choice by the head company starts to have effect.

Overriding the entry history rule

For the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule), ignore a choice (however described) made by the entity under the choice provision or the absence of such a choice.

Extension of time for head company to make choice

If:

because of:

the fact that the entity became a *subsidiary member of the consolidated group; and

section 701-1 (Single entity rule);

the question whether the *head company of the group has made a choice (however described) under the choice provision becomes relevant for the head company core purposes set out in that section; and

there is a limit (outside this section) on the period within which the head company may make such a choice;

the head company has until the later of these times to make such a choice:

the last time the head company may make the choice (apart from this subsection);

the end of 90 days after the Commissioner is given notice under Division 703 that the entity has become a *member of the group or, if the Commissioner allows a later time for the purposes of this paragraph, that later time.

When head company’s choice starts to have effect

If the *head company of the consolidated group makes a choice (however described) under the choice provision as a result of becoming able to make the choice because the entity became a *subsidiary member of the group at the joining time, the choice starts to have effect:

at the joining time; or

if the choice relates (explicitly or implicitly) to one or more whole income years—for the income year in which the joining time occurs.

Note: Subsection (5) has effect whether or not subsection (4) contributed to the head company becoming able to make the choice.

Relationship with other provisions

Section 701-5 (Entry history rule) and the choice provision have effect subject to this section.

Choices head company can make ignoring entry history rule to override inconsistencies

715-665 Head company’s choice to override inconsistency

Application

This section has effect if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) for each of the following entities, the question whether the entity had made a choice (however described) under a provision (the choice provision) listed in the table was relevant to working out the entity’s liability (if any) for income tax, or the entity’s loss (if any) of a particular *sort, calculated by reference to an income year starting before the joining time:

the joining entity;

another entity that was a *member of the group at the joining time; and

there was an inconsistency because, just before the joining time, such a choice had effect for one of the entities but not for the other.

Note 1: The other entity mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) may have become a member of the group either before or at the joining time. That other entity may be either another subsidiary member of the group or the head company of the group.

Note 2: An election by an entity under section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is an example of a choice under that provision (even though that section does not call the election a choice) because the entity has chosen to make the election.

Object

The main objects of this section are:

to override the inconsistency; and

to displace section 701-5 (Entry history rule), so far as it relates to the inconsistency; and

to allow the *head company of the consolidated group to make a choice (however described) under the choice provision.

Overriding the inconsistency

Neither of these things relating to an entity that becomes a *member of the consolidated group at the joining time has effect for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule):

a choice (however described) by the entity having effect under the choice provision before that time;

the absence of such a choice.

Note: This affects all entities that become members of the consolidated group at the joining time, including the head company if the joining time is the time at which the group comes into existence.

(4) However, if the choice provision is section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (Reinsurance with non-residents):

subsection (3) of this section does not apply in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before the joining time (but does apply in relation to reinsurance under contracts made at or after that time); and

(b) that section applies for the head company core purposes in relation to reinsurance under a contract made before the joining time by an entity (the contracting party) that became a *member of the *consolidated group at or before the joining time:

as if the *head company of the consolidated group had made an election under that section, if the contracting party had made such an election that was relevant to working out the party’s liability (if any) for income tax, or the party’s *tax loss (if any), for an income year in connection with the contract; or

as if the head company had not made such an election, if the contracting party had not made such an election that was relevant to working out the party’s liability (if any) for income tax, or the party’s tax loss (if any), for an income year in connection with the contract.

Choice replacing inconsistency

If:

the question whether the *head company of the consolidated group has made a choice (however described) under the choice provision is relevant for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule); and

there is a limit (outside this section) on the period within which the head company may make such a choice;

the head company has until the later of these times to make such a choice:

the last time the head company may make the choice (apart from this subsection);

the end of 90 days after the Commissioner is given notice under Division 703 that the joining entity has become a *member of the group or, if the Commissioner allows a later time for the purposes of this paragraph, that later time.

Note: If the joining time is when the consolidated group is formed, the Commissioner should be given notice under Division 703 that the joining entity has become a member of the group when the approved form of the choice to form the group is given to the Commissioner.

When head company’s choice starts to have effect

If the *head company of the consolidated group makes a choice (however described) under the choice provision as a result of becoming able to make the choice because the joining entity became a *member of the group, the choice starts to have effect:

at the joining time; or

if the choice relates (explicitly or implicitly) to one or more whole income years—for the income year in which the joining time occurs.

However, if:

the *head company of the consolidated group makes a choice as described in subsection (6); and

(b) the choice is an election under section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (Reinsurance with non-residents);

the election has effect only for the purposes of that section applying in relation to reinsurance under contracts made after the joining time and in an income year for which the election applies under that section.

Relationship with other provisions

Note: Subsection (4) explains how section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before the joining time.

Section 701-5 (Entry history rule) and the choice provision have effect subject to this section.

Choices with ongoing effect

715-670 Ongoing effect of choices made by entities before joining group

This section has effect if the question whether the *head company of a consolidated group has made a choice (however described) under a provision listed in the table is relevant for the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) because of something happening in relation to a thing:

that is an asset, right, liability or obligation of the head company; and

(b) that the head company started to have, at the time (the joining time) an entity (the joining entity) became a *subsidiary member of the group, because of that section and the fact that (ignoring that section) the entity had the thing at the joining time.

The *head company is taken to have made such a choice if the joining entity had one in effect before the joining time.

The *head company is taken not to have made the choice if the joining entity did not have one in effect before the joining time.

715-675 Head company adopting choice with ongoing effect

This section has effect, despite section 715-670, if:

(a) an entity that becomes a *member of a *consolidated group had a choice (however described) in effect under a provision (the choice provision) listed in that section before becoming a member of the group; and

the time at which the entity becomes a member of the group is the first time at which an entity that had a choice (however described) in effect under the choice provision before becoming a member of the group became a member of the group; and

the *head company of the group chooses in writing, before:

the end of 90 days after the Commissioner is given notice under Division 703 that the entity has become a member of the group; or

a later time allowed by the Commissioner;

to be treated as if the head company had made a choice under the choice provision.

The *head company is taken to have made a choice under the choice provision for these purposes:

the head company core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule);

the purposes of the application of section 715-670 and paragraph (1)(a) in relation to another consolidated group of which the company later becomes a *subsidiary member.

Subdivision 715-K — Exit history rule and choices

Table of sections

Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule

715-700 Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule

Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule to overcome inconsistencies

715-705 Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule to overcome inconsistencies

Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule

715-700 Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule

Application

This section has effect if:

(a) an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

(b) the question whether the *head company of the group had made a choice (however described) under a provision (the choice provision) listed in the table in subsection 715-660(1) was relevant to working out that company’s liability (if any) for income tax, or the entity’s loss (if any) of a particular *sort, calculated by reference to an income year starting before the leaving time.

Note: Declarations, elections and selections made under the choice provision at the option of a company are all examples of choices under that provision (even though it does not call them choices) because the company has chosen to make them.

Objects

The main objects of this section are:

to override section 701-40 (Exit history rule) and let the entity make a choice (however described) under the choice provision with effect after the leaving time; and

to extend, in some cases, the time for the entity to make such a choice after the leaving time; and

to modify, in some cases, the rules about when such a choice by the entity starts to have effect.

Overriding the exit history rule

For the entity core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to income years ending after the leaving time, ignore a choice (however described) made by the *head company of the consolidated group under the choice provision or the absence of such a choice.

Fresh choice by the entity

The entity may make a choice (however described) under the provision if the question whether the entity has made such a choice is relevant to working out the entity’s liability (if any) for income tax, or loss (if any) of a particular *sort, calculated by reference to an income year ending after the leaving time.

Extension of time for fresh choice by the entity

If there is a time limit (apart from this subsection) on the entity making such a choice, the entity has until the later of these times to make the choice:

the last time it may make the choice under the provision (apart from this section);

the end of 90 days after the leaving time or, if the Commissioner allows a later time for the purposes of this paragraph, that later time.

Start of effect of choice

If the entity makes a choice because of this section, the choice starts to have effect:

at the leaving time; or

if the choice relates (explicitly or implicitly) to one or more whole income years—for the income year in which the leaving time occurs.

Relationship with other provisions

Section 701-40 (Exit history rule) and the choice provision have effect subject to this section.

Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule to overcome inconsistencies

715-705 Choices leaving entity can make ignoring exit history rule to overcome inconsistencies

Application

(1) This section has effect if an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time) and there is an inconsistency because either:

both of these conditions are met:

(i) a choice (however described) under a provision (the choice provision) listed in the table in subsection 715-665(1) by the entity had effect just before the entity became a *member of the group;

there was not such a choice by the *head company of the group having effect just before the leaving time; or

both of these conditions are met:

there was not a choice (however described) under the choice provision by the entity having effect just before the entity became a member of the group;

such a choice by the head company had effect just before the leaving time.

Note: An election by the entity or head company under the choice provision is an example of a choice under that provision (even though the provision does not call the election a choice) because the entity or company has chosen to make the election.

Object

The main objects of this section are:

to displace section 701-40 (Exit history rule), so far as it relates to the inconsistency; and

to allow the entity to make a choice (however described) under the choice provision with effect after the leaving time.

Displacing the exit history rule

For the entity core purposes set out in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) relating to income years ending after the leaving time, ignore a choice (however described) made by the *head company of the consolidated group under the choice provision or the absence of such a choice.

(4) However, if the choice provision is section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (Reinsurance with non-residents):

subsection (3) of this section does not apply in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before the leaving time (but does apply in relation to reinsurance under contracts made at or after that time); and

that section applies, for the entity core purposes relating to income years ending after the leaving time, in relation to reinsurance under a contract made before the leaving time:

as if the entity had made an election under that section, if the *head company of the consolidated group made, or was treated as having made, such an election that was relevant to working out that company’s liability (if any) for income tax, or that company’s *tax loss (if any), for an income year in connection with the contract; or

as if the entity had not made such an election, if the head company had not made, and was not treated as having made, such an election that was relevant to working out that company’s liability (if any) for income tax, or that company’s tax loss (if any), for an income year in connection with the contract.

Note: In some cases, subsection 715-665(4) treats the head company of a consolidated group as having made an election under section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before an entity becomes a member of the group.

Fresh choice by the entity

The entity may make a choice (however described) under the choice provision if the question whether the entity has made such a choice is relevant to working out the entity’s liability (if any) for income tax, or loss (if any) of a particular *sort, calculated by reference to an income year ending after the leaving time.

Extension of time for fresh choice by the entity

If there is a time limit (apart from this subsection) on the entity making such a choice, the entity has until the later of these times to make the choice:

the last time it may make the choice under the choice provision (apart from this section);

the end of 90 days after the leaving time or, if the Commissioner allows a later time for the purposes of this paragraph, that later time.

Start of effect of choice

If the entity makes a choice because of this section, the choice starts to have effect:

at the leaving time; or

if the choice relates (explicitly or implicitly) to one or more whole income years—for the income year in which the leaving time occurs.

However, if:

the entity makes a choice because of this section; and

(b) the choice is an election under section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (Reinsurance with non-residents);

the election has effect only for the purposes of that section applying in relation to reinsurance under contracts made at or after the leaving time and in an income year for which the election applies under that section.

Relationship with other provisions

Note: Subsection (4) explains how section 148 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to reinsurance under contracts made before the joining time.

Section 701-40 (Exit history rule) and the choice provision have effect subject to this section.

Subdivision 715-U — Effect on conduit foreign income

Table of sections

715-875 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule

715-880 No CFI for leaving entity

715-875 Extension of single entity rule and entry history rule

Subsection 701-1(1) (Single entity rule) and section 701-5 (Entry history rule) also have effect for all the purposes of Subdivision 802-A (about conduit foreign income).

This section is not intended to limit the effect that subsection 701-1(1) and section 701-5 have apart from this section.

715-880 No CFI for leaving entity

Despite section 701-40 (the exit history rule), an entity that ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group at a time has no conduit foreign income at that time.

Subdivision 715-V — Entity ceasing to be exempt from income tax on becoming subsidiary member of consolidated group

Table of sections

715-900 Transition time taken to be just before joining time

715-900 Transition time taken to be just before joining time

This section has effect if:

(a) an entity becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

the entity’s ordinary income and statutory income were not (to any extent) assessable income just before the joining time.

(2) Division 57 in Schedule 2D to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 and Division 58 of this Act have effect as if the entity’s *ordinary income or *statutory income had become to some extent assessable income just before the joining time.

Note 1: Those Divisions deal with entities whose ordinary income and statutory income were previously exempt from income tax.

Note 2: The operation of Division 58 just before the joining time can affect the basis on which the tax cost is set for a depreciating asset that becomes an asset of the head company of the consolidated group at the joining time because of section 701-1 (the single entity rule). That Division provides the basis for working out under Division 40 the asset’s adjustable value. This is the entity’s terminating value for the asset, which in turn can affect the tax cost setting amount for the asset under sections 705-40, 705-45 and 705-47.

Subdivision 715-W — Effect on arrangements where CGT roll-overs are obtained

Table of sections

715-910 Effect on restructures—original entity becomes a subsidiary member

715-915 Effect on restructures—original entity is a head company

715-920 Effect on restructures—original entity is a head company that becomes a subsidiary member of another group

715-925 Effect on restructures—original entity ceases being a subsidiary member

715-910 Effect on restructures—original entity becomes a subsidiary member

This section applies if:

as a result of an arrangement to which section 124-784A applies, an original entity (within the meaning of that section) becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

section 715-920 does not apply.

Note 1: Section 715-920 applies if the original entity was the head company of another consolidated group before the arrangement was completed.

Note 2: Sections 124-784A and 124-784B apply to arrangements for restructures.

For the purposes of section 124-784B:

the completion time (within the meaning of that section) for the arrangement is taken to be the time the original entity becomes a member of the group; and

disregard Division 701 (Core rules) in relation to the original entity becoming a member of the group.

The *head company of the group may choose for:

section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity); and

subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount); and

subsection 701-35(5) (setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount);

not to apply to the original entity’s assets in respect of the original entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the group.

Note: This subsection does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

715-915 Effect on restructures—original entity is a head company

If:

section 124-784A applies in relation to an arrangement; and

the original entity (within the meaning of that section) for the arrangement is the *head company of a consolidated group just before the arrangement was completed; and

section 715-920 does not apply;

then, for the purposes of section 124-784B, subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) and section 701-5 (the entry history rule) apply in respect of the group.

Note 1: This section does not otherwise affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) or section 701-5.

Note 2: Sections 124-784A and 124-784B apply to arrangements for restructures.

715-920 Effect on restructures—original entity is a head company that becomes a subsidiary member of another group

This section applies if:

section 124-784A applies in relation to an arrangement; and

(b) the original entity (within the meaning of that section) for the arrangement is the *head company of a *consolidated group (the acquired group) just before the arrangement was completed; and

as a result of the arrangement:

the original entity; and

the *subsidiary members of the acquired group just before the arrangement was completed;

become subsidiary members of another consolidated group.

Note: Sections 124-784A and 124-784B apply to arrangements for restructures.

For the purposes of section 124-784B:

the original entity is taken to be the *head company of the acquired group at the completion time (within the meaning of that section) for the arrangement; and

the operation of this Part for the head company core purposes (mentioned in subsection 701-1(2)) in relation to:

the original entity; and

the entities that were *subsidiary members of the acquired group just before the arrangement was completed;

continue to have effect at the completion time for the arrangement; and

the completion time for the arrangement is taken to be the time the original entity becomes a member of the other group; and

disregard Division 701 (Core rules) in relation to the original entity becoming a member of the other group.

Note: Paragraph (b) means that, for the purposes of section 124-784B, the subsidiary members of the acquired group are treated as part of the original entity.

The *head company of the other group may choose for:

section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity); and

subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount); and

subsection 701-35(5) (setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount);

not to apply to the original entity’s assets in respect of the original entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the other group.

Note: This subsection does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

715-925 Effect on restructures—original entity ceases being a subsidiary member

If, as a result of an arrangement to which section 124-784A applies, an original entity (within the meaning of that section):

ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group after the completion time (within the meaning of that section) for the arrangement; and

does not become a member of another consolidated group;

then, for the purposes of section 124-784B, the completion time for the arrangement is taken to happen at the time of the cessation.

Note: Sections 124-784A and 124-784B apply to arrangements for restructures.

Division 716 — Miscellaneous special rules

Table of Subdivisions

716-A Assessable income and deductions spread over several membership or non-membership periods

716-E Tax cost setting for exploration and prospecting assets

716-G Low-value and software development pools

716-S Miscellaneous consequences of tax cost setting

716-V Research and Development

716-Z Other

Subdivision 716-A — Assessable income and deductions spread over several membership or non-membership periods

Guide to Subdivision 716-A

716-1 What this Division is about

Some items of assessable income, and some deductions, are in effect spread over 2 or more income years. This Division apportions the assessable income or deduction for each of those income years among periods within the income year when an entity is, or is not, a subsidiary member of a consolidated group.

This Division also apportions in a similar way some items of assessable income, and some deductions, for a single income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

716-15 Assessable income spread over 2 or more income years

716-25 Deductions spread over 2 or more income years

716-70 Capital expenditure that is fully deductible in one income year

Assessable income and deductions arising from share of net income of a partnership or trust, or from share of partnership loss

716-75 Application

716-80 Head company’s assessable income and deductions

716-85 Entity’s assessable income and deductions for a non-membership period

716-90 Entity’s share of assessable income or deductions of partnership or trust

716-95 Special rule if not all partnership or trust’s assessable income or deductions taken into account in working out amount

716-100 Spreading period

Operative provisions

716-15 Assessable income spread over 2 or more income years

(1) This section applies if, apart from this Part, a provision of this Act would spread an amount (the original amount) over 2 or more income years (whether or not because of a choice) by including part of the original amount in the same entity’s assessable income for each of those income years.

Head company’s assessable income

If:

for some but not all of an income year, an entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

a part of the original amount:

would have been included in the assessable income of the *head company of the group for that income year if the entity had been a subsidiary member of the group throughout that income year; but

would have been included in the entity’s assessable income for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any consolidated group;

the head company’s assessable income for that income year includes a proportion of that part.

• the head company is the entity referred to in subsection (1), but its connection with the original amount passes to the entity when the entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of the group (see section 701-40 (Exit history rule));

• the entity is the entity referred to in subsection (1) but joins a consolidated group part way through the income year, so that its connection with the original amount passes to the head company of the group (see section 701-5 (Entry history rule)).

• because the head company is the entity referred to in subsection (1); or

• because of section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or

• because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

Note 1: Examples of when paragraph (2)(b) could be satisfied are:

Note 2: If the entity is a subsidiary member of the group throughout the income year, the part of the original amount will be included in the head company’s assessable income for the income year, either:

The proportion is worked out by multiplying that part of the original amount by:

• the number of days that are in both the income year and the *spreading period, and on which the entity was a *subsidiary member of the group;

divided by:

• the number of days that are in both the income year and the spreading period.

Entity’s assessable income for a non-membership period

If:

for some but not all of an income year, an entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

(b) a part of the original amount would have been included in the entity’s assessable income for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any *consolidated group;

the assessable income of the entity for a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30 includes a proportion of that part.

• because the entity is the entity referred to in subsection (1); or

• because of section 701-40 (Exit history rule).

Note 1: Section 701-30 is about working out an entity’s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

Note 2: If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group, this section does not affect the part of the original amount that is assessable income of the entity for the income year either:

The proportion is worked out by multiplying that part of the original amount by:

• the number of days that are in both the non-membership period and the *spreading period;

divided by:

• the number of days that are in both the income year and the spreading period.

Spreading period

(6) The spreading period for the original amount is the period by reference to which the respective parts of the original amount that, apart from this Part, would be included in an entity’s assessable income for the 2 or more income years are worked out.

716-25 Deductions spread over 2 or more income years

(1) This section applies if, apart from this Part, a provision of this Act would spread an amount (the original amount) over 2 or more income years (whether or not because of a choice) by entitling the same entity to deduct part of the original amount for each of those income years.

However, this section does not apply if the deductions would be for the decline in value of a depreciating asset.

Note: Such deductions arise under Division 40 (Capital allowances) and Division 328 (Small business entities).

Head company’s deduction

If for some but not all of an income year an entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, and:

the *head company of the group could have deducted for that income year a part of the original amount if the entity had been a subsidiary member of the group throughout that income year; but

the entity could have deducted that part for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any consolidated group;

the head company can deduct for that income year a proportion of that part.

• because the head company is the entity referred to in subsection (1) of this section; or

• because of section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or

• because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

Note 1: Examples of when paragraphs (3)(a) and (b) could be satisfied are set out in note 1 to subsection 716-15(2).

Note 2: If the entity is a subsidiary member of the group throughout the income year, the head company can deduct that part for the income year, either:

The proportion is worked out by multiplying that part of the original amount by:

• the number of days that are in both the income year and the *spreading period, and on which the entity was a *subsidiary member of the group;

divided by:

• the number of days that are in both the income year and the spreading period.

Entity’s deduction for a non-membership period

If:

for some but not all of an income year, an entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

(b) the entity could have deducted for that income year a part of the original amount if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any *consolidated group;

the entity can deduct a proportion of that part for a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30.

• because the entity is the entity referred to in subsection (1); or

• because of section 701-40 (Exit history rule).

Note 1: Section 701-30 is about working out an entity’s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

Note 2: If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group, this section does not affect the part of the original amount that the entity can deduct for the income year either:

The proportion is worked out by multiplying that part of the original amount by:

• the number of days that are in both the non-membership period and the *spreading period;

divided by:

• the number of days that are in both the income year and the spreading period.

Spreading period

(7) The spreading period for the original amount is the period by reference to which the respective parts of the original amount that, apart from this Part, an entity could deduct for the 2 or more income years are worked out.

Note: For example, under section 82KZMD of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 an item of expenditure on something is spread over the period over which that thing is to be provided, which is called the eligible service period. Deductions for the item for a sequence of income years are worked out by reference to how much of that period falls within each of those income years.

716-70 Capital expenditure that is fully deductible in one income year

(1) This section applies if, apart from this Part, an entity could deduct for a single income year the whole of an amount (the original amount) of capital expenditure by the entity.

If for some but not all of an income year an entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group, and:

the *head company of the group could have deducted the original amount for that income year if the entity had been a subsidiary member of the group throughout that income year; but

(b) the entity could have deducted the original amount for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group;

the head company can deduct for that income year a proportion of the original amount.

• because the head company is the entity referred to in subsection (1) of this section; or

• because of section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or

• because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule).

Note 1: Examples of when paragraphs (2)(a) and (b) could be satisfied are set out in note 1 to subsection 716-15(2).

Note 2: If the entity is a subsidiary member of the group throughout the income year, the head company can deduct the original amount for the income year, either:

The proportion is worked out by multiplying the original amount by:

• the number of days that are in the *spreading period, and on which the entity was a *subsidiary member of the group;

divided by:

• the number of days that are in the spreading period.

Entity’s deduction for a non-membership period

If:

for some but not all of an income year, an entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

(b) the entity could have deducted the original amount for that income year if throughout that income year the entity had not been a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group;

the entity can deduct a proportion of the original amount for a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30.

• because the entity is the entity referred to in subsection (1); or

• because of section 701-40 (Exit history rule).

Note 1: Section 701-30 is about working out an entity’s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

Note 2: If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group, this section does not affect the entity’s ability to deduct the original amount for the income year either:

The proportion is worked out by multiplying the original amount by:

• the number of days that are in both the non-membership period and the *spreading period;

divided by:

• the number of days that are in the spreading period.

Spreading period

(6) The spreading period for the original amount:

starts when, apart from this Part, an entity would become entitled to deduct the amount for an income year; and

ends at the end of the income year.

Assessable income and deductions arising from share of net income of a partnership or trust, or from share of partnership loss

716-75 Application

Sections 716-80 to 716-100 apply if, apart from this Part:

(a) an amount would be included in an entity’s assessable income for an income year under section 92 (about income and deductions of partner) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a partnership; or

an entity could deduct an amount for an income year under section 92 of that Act in respect of a partnership; or

an amount would be included in an entity’s assessable income for an income year under section 97 (Beneficiary of a trust estate who is not under a legal disability) of that Act in respect of a trust; or

an amount would be included in an entity’s assessable income for an income year under section 98A (Non-resident beneficiaries assessable in respect of certain income) of that Act in respect of a trust.

716-80 Head company’s assessable income and deductions

If for some but not all of the income year the entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group:

the assessable income for that income year of the head company of the group includes the entity’s share (worked out under section 716-90) of each of these:

(i) the total assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as it is reasonably attributable to a period, during the income year, throughout which the entity was a *subsidiary member of the group but the partnership or trust was not;

(ii) a proportion (worked under subsection (2) of this section) of the total assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as it is not reasonably attributable to a particular period within the income year; and

the head company of the group can deduct for that income year the entity’s share (worked out under section 716-90) of each of these:

the total deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as they are reasonably attributable to a period covered by subparagraph (a)(i) of this subsection;

(ii) a proportion (worked under subsection (2) of this section) of the total deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as they are not reasonably attributable to a particular period within the income year.

Note 1: If the entity is a subsidiary member of the group throughout the income year, the amount referred to in section 716-75 will be included in the head company’s assessable income, or the head company can deduct that amount, for the income year because of section 701-1 (Single entity rule).

Note 2: While the entity, and the partnership or trust, are both subsidiary members of the group, section 701-1 (Single entity rule) attributes to the head company all assessable income and deductions giving rise to the amount referred to in section 716-75.

The proportion is worked out by multiplying the amount concerned by:

• the number of days that are in the *spreading period, and on which the entity was a *subsidiary member of the group but the partnership or trust was not;

divided by:

• the number of days that are in the spreading period.

716-85 Entity’s assessable income and deductions for a non-membership period

The assessable income of the entity for a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30 includes the entity’s share (worked out under section 716-90) of each of these:

the total assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as it is reasonably attributable to the non-membership period;

(b) a proportion (worked under subsection (3) of this section) of the total assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as it is not reasonably attributable to a particular period within the income year.

Note 1: Section 701-30 is about working out an entity’s tax position for a period when it is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

Note 2: If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group, this section does not affect the amount referred to in section 716-75 being assessable income of the entity for the income year.

For a part of the income year that is a non-membership period for the purposes of section 701-30, the entity can deduct the entity’s share (worked out under section 716-90) of each of these:

the total deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as they are reasonably attributable to the non-membership period;

(b) a proportion (worked under subsection (3) of this section) of the total deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year so far as they are not reasonably attributable to a particular period within the income year.

Note: If throughout the income year the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group or MEC group, this section does not affect the entity’s ability to deduct for the income year the amount referred to in section 716-75.

The proportion is worked out by multiplying the amount concerned by:

• the number of days that are in both the non-membership period and the *spreading period;

divided by:

• the number of days that are in the spreading period.

716-90 Entity’s share of assessable income or deductions of partnership or trust

If paragraph 716-75(a) or (b) applies, the entity’s share is worked out by dividing:

• the entity’s individual interest as a partner in the net income of the partnership or in the partnership loss;

by:

• the amount of that net income or partnership loss;

and expressing the result as a percentage.

If paragraph 716-75(c) or (d) applies, the entity’s share is worked out by dividing:

• the share of the income of the trust to which the entity is presently entitled;

by:

• the amount of that income;

and expressing the result as a percentage.

716-95 Special rule if not all partnership or trust’s assessable income or deductions taken into account in working out amount

(1) To the extent that the assessable income of the partnership or trust for the income year was not taken into account in working out the amount referred to in section 716-75, it is disregarded in applying paragraph 716-80(1)(a) or subsection 716-85(1).

Note: For example, if a trust’s net income for an income year must be worked out under section 268-45 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the trust’s assessable income attributed to a period (in the income year) for which it has a notional loss under section 268-30 of that Act is not taken into account.

(2) To the extent that the deductions of the partnership or trust for the income year were not taken into account in working out the amount referred to in section 716-75, they are disregarded in applying paragraph 716-80(1)(b) or subsection 716-85(2).

Note: For example, in the case described in the note to subsection (1) of this section, the trust’s deductions attributed to that period are not taken into account in working out the trust’s net income for the income year.

716-100 Spreading period

The spreading period for the amount referred to in section 716-75 is made up of each period:

that is all or part of the income year; and

throughout which the entity is a partner in the partnership or a beneficiary of the trust, as appropriate.

Subdivision 716-E — Tax cost setting for exploration and prospecting assets

Table of sections

716-300 Prime cost method of working out decline in value

716-300 Prime cost method of working out decline in value

This section has effect if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

because of subsection 40-80(1), the joining entity could (or did) deduct for a period before the joining time the *cost of a depreciating asset that became an asset of the *head company of the group at the joining time because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) applied to the joining entity; and

the joining entity could not deduct an amount under Subdivision 40-B (except because of subsection 40-80(1)) for the income year that includes the joining time for that cost.

Note: Subdivision 40-B allows deductions for the decline in value of depreciating assets. Subsection 40-80(1), which is in that Subdivision, provides that the decline in value of certain assets used for exploration and prospecting equals their cost.

Subsection 701-55(2) has effect as if the prime cost method for working out the decline in value of the depreciating asset applied just before the joining time.

Note: This may affect both the method of working out the decline in value of the asset and the asset’s effective life.

Subdivision 716-G — Low-value and software development pools

Table of sections

Assets in joining entity’s low-value pool

716-330 Head company’s deductions for decline in value of assets in joining entity’s low-value pool

Entity leaving group with asset allocated to head company’s low-value pool

716-335 Entity leaving group with asset allocated to head company’s low-value pool

Depreciating assets arising from expenditure in joining entity’s software development pool

716-340 Depreciating assets arising from expenditure in joining entity’s software development pool

Software development pools if entity leaves consolidated group

716-345 Head company taken not to have incurred expenditure

Assets in joining entity’s low-value pool

716-330 Head company’s deductions for decline in value of assets in joining entity’s low-value pool

This section modifies the operation of sections 40-430, 40-435, 40-440, 40-445, 701-10 and 701-60 and Division 705 for the head company core purposes mentioned in section 701-1 if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) there are one or more *depreciating assets (the previous pool assets) that:

were allocated to the joining entity’s low-value pool; and

become assets of the *head company of the group at the joining time because section 701-1 applies to the joining entity; and

(c) none of the previous pool assets was an asset to which Division 58 applied to affect the joining entity’s deductions relating to the asset.

Note 1: Sections 40-430, 40-435 and 40-440 are relevant to allocating depreciating assets to a low-value pool and to working out the decline in value of assets allocated to a low-value pool. Section 40-445 affects the closing pool balance, and may give rise to assessable income, if a balancing adjustment event happens to such an asset.

Note 2: Section 701-10 provides that, for each asset the joining entity has at the joining time, the asset’s tax cost is set at the joining time at the asset’s tax cost setting amount, which is defined by section 701-60 as the amount worked out under Division 705.

Note 3: Division 58 is about capital allowances for depreciating assets previously owned by an exempt entity.

Objects

The main objects of this section are:

to clarify how sections 40-430, 40-435 and 40-440 operate in relation to the previous pool assets; and

to reduce compliance costs by providing that the tax cost is set for all the previous pool assets in one operation, rather than individually for each such asset.

Time of allocation of assets to head company’s low-value pool

Sections 40-430, 40-435, 40-440 and 40-445 operate as if the *head company of the consolidated group allocated the previous pool assets to a low-value pool for the income year that includes the joining time. Section 701-5 has effect subject to this subsection.

Note 1: Under section 40-435, the head company must make a reasonable estimate of the taxable use percentage for each asset.

Note 2: This subsection affects the percentages and amounts to be taken into account for working out under section 40-440 the decline in value of assets in the pool and the closing pool balance.

Allocating other low-cost assets to head company’s low-value pool

Subsection 40-430(1) operates as if the previous pool assets were *low-cost assets.

Note: This has the effect that the head company must allocate to the low-value pool each low-cost asset it starts to hold in the income year that includes the joining time or a later income year, whether or not the head company starts to hold the asset because of section 701-1.

If joining time was in first day of joining entity’s income year

If the joining time was in the first day of the joining entity’s income year, section 40-440 operates as if:

all the previous pool assets were *low-value assets; and

the sum of the previous pool assets’ *opening adjustable values for the income year that includes the joining time equalled the tax cost setting amount for the hypothetical asset worked out on the basis described in subsections (7), (8) and (9) of this section.

If joining time was not in first day of joining entity’s income year

(6) If the joining time was not in the first day of the joining entity’s income year, section 40-440 operates as if:

all the previous pool assets were *low-cost assets; and

the sum of the previous pool assets’ *costs equalled the total of:

the tax cost setting amount for the hypothetical asset worked out on the basis described in subsections (7), (8) and (9) of this section; and

the expenditure (if any) that was incurred after the joining time (but in the income year that includes that time) and included in the second element of the costs (ignoring this paragraph) of the previous pool assets.

Tax cost is set for assets collectively not individually

(7) Sections 701-10 and 701-60 and Division 705 operate as if all the previous pool assets formed a single *depreciating asset (the hypothetical asset), and were not separate assets.

Modified operation of Division 705 for hypothetical asset

Sections 705-40 and 705-57 operate as if the joining entity’s terminating value for the hypothetical asset were the amount worked out using the table:

Note: Sections 705-40 and 705-57 are about reduction of an asset’s tax cost setting amount to an amount that may be affected by the joining entity’s terminating value for the asset.

Entity leaving group with asset allocated to head company’s low-value pool

716-335 Entity leaving group with asset allocated to head company’s low-value pool

(1) This section sets out rules affecting the *head company of a *consolidated group and an entity (the leaving entity) that ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group at a time (the leaving time) in an income year (the leaving year), if:

a depreciating asset becomes an asset of the leaving entity at the leaving time because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) ceases to apply to the leaving entity; and

the asset was in the head company’s low-value pool.

Note: Section 701-40 (Exit history rule) treats the asset as having been allocated to the leaving entity’s low-value pool, with the taxable use percentage estimated by the head company, for the income year for which the head company allocated the asset to the head company’s low-value pool.

Objects

The main objects of this section are:

to ensure that the decline in value of assets in the *head company’s low-value pool and the decline in value of assets in the leaving entity’s low-value pool are worked out so that:

(i) for the leaving year, the *depreciating asset is taken into account in working out the decline in value of assets in the head company’s low-value pool only; and

(ii) for later income years, the depreciating asset is taken into account in working out the decline in value of assets in the leaving entity’s low-value pool only; and

to specify the *adjustable value of the depreciating asset just before and at the leaving time.

Reduced decline in value for leaving entity for leaving year

The decline in value worked out for the leaving year under subsection 40-440(1) for assets in the leaving entity’s low-value pool is reduced by such amount as is reasonable to prevent duplication of deductions for the leaving year in respect of the depreciating asset by the *head company and the leaving entity.

Reduced closing pool balance for head company’s pool for leaving year

The *closing pool balance of the *head company’s low-value pool for the leaving year is reduced by so much of the balance as reasonably relates to the depreciating asset.

Cost of head company’s membership interests in leaving entity etc.

Sections 701-15, 701-40 and 701-60 and Division 711 have effect as if the *adjustable value of the depreciating asset for the *head company just before and at the leaving time were such amount as is reasonable, having regard to:

the reduction described in subsection (4) of this section; and

the taxable use percentage estimated for the depreciating asset by the head company under section 40-435.

Note 1: Section 701-15 provides that, for each membership interest the head company holds in the leaving entity, the interest’s tax cost is set just before the leaving time at the interest’s tax cost setting amount, which is defined by section 701-60 as the amount worked out under certain sections of Division 711.

Note 2: Division 711 sets the interest’s tax cost setting amount by reference to the head company’s terminating value of the asset, which is to be worked out under section 711-30 by reference to the adjustable value of the asset for the head company just before the leaving time.

Note 3: Section 701-40 has the effect that the adjustable value of the asset for the leaving entity at the leaving time is the same as the adjustable value of the asset for the head company then.

Depreciating assets arising from expenditure in joining entity’s software development pool

716-340 Depreciating assets arising from expenditure in joining entity’s software development pool

This section modifies the basis on which Subdivision 40-B and sections 40-455, 701-10, 701-55 and 701-60 and Division 705 operate if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

the joining entity had incurred before the joining time expenditure that it allocated to a software development pool; and

some or all of the expenditure is reasonably related to *in-house software that:

is a depreciating asset; and

became an asset of the *head company of the consolidated group at the joining time because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) applied to the joining entity.

Note 1: Subdivision 40-B allows deductions for the decline in value of a depreciating asset, but only if expenditure on the asset has not been allocated to a software development pool. Section 40-455 provides for deduction of expenditure allocated to such a pool. Section 701-5 (Entry history rule) treats the head company as having incurred the expenditure that was allocated to the pool.

Note 2: Section 701-10 provides that, for each asset the joining entity has at the joining time, the asset’s tax cost is set at the joining time at the asset’s tax cost setting amount, which is defined by section 701-60 as the amount worked out under Division 705, which in turn depends on the adjustable value of the asset worked out under section 40-85.

Note 3: Section 701-55 affects matters relevant to working out the head company’s deductions for the decline in value of depreciating assets that became assets of the head company at the joining time because section 701-1 (Single entity rule) applied to the joining entity.

Note 4: This section operates whether or not the joining entity’s deductions under section 40-455 for the period before the joining time for expenditure allocated to the pool total 100% of the expenditure allocated to the pool.

Object

The main object of this section is to ensure that:

the *head company’s deductions for the *in-house software:

(i) are not worked out under section 40-455 on the basis of section 701-5 (Entry history rule) treating the expenditure relating to the software as being the head company’s expenditure; and

are instead worked out under Subdivision 40-B, using the prime cost method with the *effective life given by subsection 40-95(7) and taking account of the tax cost setting amount for the software; and

the tax cost setting amount is worked out in a way that takes account of deductions for the period before the joining time for the expenditure reasonably related to the in-house software.

Joining entity taken not to have incurred certain expenditure

Subdivision 40-B and section 40-455 operate for the head company core purposes mentioned in section 701-1 (Single entity rule) as if the expenditure reasonably related to the *in-house software had not been incurred by the joining entity.

Note 1: This has the effects that:

subsection 40-50(2) does not apply because of section 701-5 (Entry history rule) to deny the head company deductions under Subdivision 40-B for the decline in value of the software; and

the head company cannot deduct the expenditure under section 40-455 as it operates because of section 701-5.

Note 2: This does not prevent the head company from deducting under section 40-455 expenditure that is not reasonably related to the in-house software and that the head company is treated by section 701-5 as having incurred and allocated to a software development pool because the joining entity did.

Prime cost method of working out decline in value of software

Subsection 701-55(2) operates as if the prime cost method of working out the decline in value of the *in-house software applied just before the joining time.

Note: This affects the method of working out the decline in value of the software for the head company of the consolidated group.

Effective life of software

Subdivision 40-B operates as if the *effective life of the *in-house software were the period specified for in-house software in subsection 40-95(7). Subsection 701-55(2) is subject to this subsection.

Cost of in-house software

Sections 701-10 and 701-60 and Division 705 (and section 40-85, so far as it affects that Division) operate as if the *cost of the *in-house software were the total amount of the joining entity’s expenditure that reasonably related to the software and was allocated to a software development pool.

Earlier decline in value of the in-house software

Sections 701-10 and 701-60 and Division 705 (and section 40-85, so far as it affects that Division) operate as if the decline in value, and deductions for the decline in value, of the *in-house software for a period before the joining time were the amount worked out under subsection (8).

Work out the amount by:

working out, for each software development pool to which expenditure relating to the *in-house software was allocated, the amount of the joining entity’s deductions under section 40-455 that reasonably relates to the software; and

adding up each of those amounts if there are 2 or more such pools.

Note: Subsections (6), (7) and (8) can affect the working out of the tax cost setting amount for the in-house software, by affecting the joining entity’s terminating value for the software, which section 705-30 defines as being the adjustable value of the software just before the joining time, and which is relevant to sections 705-40 and 705-57 (which may reduce the tax cost setting amount for the software).

Software development pools if entity leaves consolidated group

716-345 Head company taken not to have incurred expenditure

This section has effect if:

(a) an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time in an income year (the leaving year); and

under section 701-40 (Exit history rule), expenditure is taken to have been allocated by the leaving entity to a software development pool.

Note: Section 701-40 treats expenditure incurred by the head company of the consolidated group and allocated by that company to a software development pool as having been incurred by the leaving entity and allocated by it to a software development pool.

Work out deductions of the *head company of the consolidated group for income years after the leaving year as if the head company had not incurred the expenditure.

The leaving entity cannot deduct an amount for the leaving year for the expenditure it is taken to have allocated to the software development pool.

Subdivision 716-S — Miscellaneous consequences of tax cost setting

Table of sections

716-400 Tax cost setting and bad debts

716-440 Membership interests in joining entity not subject to CGT under Division 855—foreign entity ceasing to hold interests

716-400 Tax cost setting and bad debts

The object of this section is to clarify the effect of section 701-5 (entry history rule) and subsection 701-55(6) in relation to an asset that may give rise to a bad debt. It achieves this object by clarifying that certain things are taken to have happened in relation to the asset through the operation of section 701-5 and subsection 701-55(6).

This section applies if:

(a) the tax cost of an asset was set at the time (the joining time) an entity (the joining entity) became a subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at the asset’s tax cost setting amount; and

the asset is a debt; and

any of the following apply:

the debt was included in the joining entity’s assessable income before the joining time;

the debt was in respect of money that the joining entity lent before the joining time in the ordinary course of a business of lending money;

the joining entity bought the debt before the joining time in the ordinary course of a business of lending money; and

(d) the requirements in subsection 701-58(1) (intra-group assets) are not satisfied in relation to the asset.

To avoid doubt, in determining the extent to which the *head company of the group can deduct an amount under section 25-35 (bad debts) in relation to the asset, section 701-5 (entry history rule) and subsection 701-55(6) have the effect that, before the joining time:

in a case covered by subparagraph (2)(c)(i)—the head company included an amount equal to the tax cost setting amount in its assessable income in respect of the debt; or

in a case covered by subparagraph (2)(c)(ii)—the head company lent an amount of money in respect of the debt equal to the tax cost setting amount in the ordinary course of a business of lending money; or

in a case covered by subparagraph (2)(c)(iii)—the head company incurred expenditure equal to the tax cost setting amount in buying the debt in the ordinary course of a business of lending money.

716-440 Membership interests in joining entity not subject to CGT under Division 855—foreign entity ceasing to hold interests

Subsection (3) applies if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) another entity (the disposing entity) ceased to hold *membership interests in the joining entity during the period that:

started 12 months before the joining time; and

ended immediately after the joining time; and

a CGT event happened because the disposing entity ceased to hold the membership interests; and

either:

a *capital gain or *capital loss of the disposing entity from the CGT event was disregarded because of the operation of Division 855; or

if there had been a capital gain or capital loss of the disposing entity from the CGT event, the capital gain or capital loss would have been disregarded because of the operation of Division 855; and

section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity) applies to the joining entity’s assets in respect of the joining entity becoming a subsidiary member of the group (disregarding subsection (3) of this section); and

(f) it is reasonable to conclude that, throughout the period mentioned in paragraph (b), the sum of the *total participation interests held by an entity (the control entity) and its *associates in the joining entity was 50% or more; and

(g) in a case where the control entity is not the disposing entity—it is reasonable to conclude that the sum of the total participation interests held by the control entity and its associates in the disposing entity was 50% or more at the time the CGT event happened.

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(f) and (g), in working out the sum of the *total participation interests held by the control entity and its *associates in another entity, take into account:

a particular direct participation interest; or

a particular indirect participation interest;

held in the other entity only once if it would otherwise be counted more than once because the entity holding it is an associate of the control entity.

The following provisions do not apply to the joining entity’s assets in respect of the joining entity becoming a *subsidiary member of the group:

section 701-10 (cost to head company of assets of joining entity);

subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount);

subsection 701-35(5) (setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount).

Note: This subsection does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

Subsection (5) applies if:

(a) an entity (the higher level entity) holds *membership interests in the joining entity (whether directly or through one or more interposed entities) at a time during the period mentioned in paragraph (1)(b); and

the higher level entity becomes a *subsidiary member of the consolidated group at the joining time; and

the requirement in paragraph (1)(b) is not satisfied (disregarding subsection (5)); and

the requirement in paragraph (1)(b) would be satisfied if the reference in paragraph (1)(b) to membership interests in the joining entity included a reference to membership interests in the higher level entity.

Treat the reference in paragraph (1)(b) to *membership interests in the joining entity as including a reference to membership interests in the higher level entity.

Subdivision 716-V — Research and Development

716-500 Head company bound by agreements binding on subsidiary members

Section 355-220 (about R&D activities conducted for a foreign entity) applies to the *head company of a consolidated group as if the head company were bound by an agreement during any period that a *subsidiary member of the group is bound by the agreement.

716-505 History for entitlement to tax offset: joining entity

If:

a company becomes a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

apart from this section, things happening in relation to the company before it became a subsidiary member would, because of section 701-5 (the entry history rule), be taken into account as things happening in relation to the *head company for working out the head company’s aggregated turnover for the purposes of section 355-100 (tax offsets for R&D);

the things happening are not to be taken into account as mentioned in paragraph (b).

716-510 History for entitlement to tax offset: leaving entity

If:

a company ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

while the company was a subsidiary member, things happened in relation to an entity which, if section 701-1 (the single entity rule) were disregarded:

would be *connected with the company; or

would be an affiliate of the company; or

would have the company as an affiliate; and

those things would, if section 701-1 were disregarded, have been taken into account in working out the company’s aggregated turnover for the purposes of section 355-100 (tax offsets for R&D); and

the things are not also things that, because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule), are taken into account as things happening in relation to an eligible asset etc. (within the meaning of that section) of the company in working out for the entity core purposes the company’s aggregated turnover for the purposes of section 355-100;

the things are to be taken into account in working out the company’s aggregated turnover for the purposes of section 355-100.

Subdivision 716-Z — Other

Table of sections

716-800 Allocating amounts to periods if head company and subsidiary member have different income years

716-850 Grossing up threshold amounts for periods of less than 365 days

716-855 Working out the cost base or reduced cost base of a pre-CGT asset after certain roll-overs

716-860 CGT event straddling joining or leaving time

716-800 Allocating amounts to periods if head company and subsidiary member have different income years

The principles in this section apply if:

an entity becomes, or stops being, a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group; and

the entity has an income year that starts and ends at a different time from when the income year of the *head company of the group starts and ends.

Items are to be allocated to, or apportioned among, periods (whether consisting of all or part of an income year of the entity or *head company):

in the most appropriate way having regard to the objects of this Part, and of particular provisions of this Part; and

in particular, so as to ensure that what is in substance the same item is recognised only once for what is in substance the same purpose.

716-850 Grossing up threshold amounts for periods of less than 365 days

Under some provisions of this Act, something that is relevant to working out:

an entity’s taxable income (if any); or

the income tax (if any) payable on an entity’s taxable income; or

an entity’s loss (if any) of a particular *sort;

is determined on the basis of a comparison between an amount worked out for an income year, or an amount *derived from 2 or more such amounts, and another amount.

Note: The other amount assumes an income year of 365 days.

(2) This section affects how such a provision (the threshold provision) operates for the purposes of subsection 701-30(3), which requires each thing covered by paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c) of this section to be worked out for an entity for a non-membership period (under section 701-30) during an income year.

Note: A non-membership period is a period (of less than an income year) when the entity is not a subsidiary member of any consolidated group.

An amount that would otherwise be worked out for the non-membership period, for the purposes of the comparison under the threshold provision, is instead:

(a) to be worked out by reference to the period (the reference period) starting at the start of the income year and ending at the end of the non-membership period; and

then to be grossed up by multiplying it by this fraction:

716-855 Working out the cost base or reduced cost base of a pre-CGT asset after certain roll-overs

If:

it is necessary for the purposes of this Part to work out the *cost base or *reduced cost base of a pre-CGT asset owned at a particular time; and

before that time:

the owner was the recipient company involved in a roll-over under Subdivision 126-B in relation to a CGT event that happened in relation to the CGT asset; or

(ii) the owner was the transferee in relation to a disposal of the CGT asset to which former section 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applied;

the cost base or reduced cost base is worked out as if, in applying Subdivision 126-B or former section 160ZZO in relation to the CGT event or the disposal, the provisions of that Subdivision or section applying to CGT assets *acquired on or after 20 September 1985 replaced those that applied to CGT assets acquired on or before that date.

Note: The effect is that the owner’s cost base or reduced cost base will be the same as that of the originating company or transferor, as is the case with post-CGT assets.

716-860 CGT event straddling joining or leaving time

This section applies if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a particular time (the joining time); and

disregarding the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the joining entity held a CGT asset at the joining time; and

taking into account the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the *head company of the group held the CGT asset at the joining time; and

a CGT event happened in relation to the asset at a time before the joining time (disregarding this section), but the circumstances that gave rise to the CGT event first existed at a time on or after the joining time.

This section also applies if:

(a) an entity (the leaving entity) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a particular time (the leaving time); and

taking into account the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the *head company of the group held a CGT asset at the leaving time; and

disregarding the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule), the leaving entity held the CGT asset at the leaving time; and

a CGT event happened in relation to the asset at a time before the leaving time (disregarding this section), but the circumstances that gave rise to the CGT event first existed at a time on or after the leaving time.

For the purposes of this Act, treat the CGT event as happening at the time when the circumstances that gave rise to the CGT event first existed.

Division 717 — International tax rules

Table of Subdivisions

717-A Foreign income tax offsets

717-D Transfer of certain surpluses under CFC provisions and former FIF and FLP provisions: entry rules

717-E Transfer of certain surpluses under CFC provisions and former FIF and FLP provisions: exit rules

717-O Offshore banking units

Subdivision 717-A — Foreign income tax offsets

717-1 What this Subdivision is about

If an entity becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group, the head company receives any tax offsets under section 770-10 that arise because the entity pays foreign income tax while it is a subsidiary member of the group.

Table of sections

Object

717-5 Object of this Subdivision

Foreign income tax on amounts in head company’s assessable income

717-10 Head company taken to be liable for subsidiary member’s foreign income tax

Object

717-5 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to allow the *head company of a consolidated group to get the benefit of foreign income tax paid in respect of amounts included in the head company’s assessable income because another entity is or was a *subsidiary member of the group.

Foreign income tax on amounts in head company’s assessable income

717-10 Head company taken to be liable for subsidiary member’s foreign income tax

This section operates if:

an entity was a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group for all or part of an income year; and

an amount was included in the ordinary income or statutory income of the *head company of the group for that income year; and

the entity paid foreign income tax (except credit absorption tax, unitary tax, foreign IIR tax or foreign UTPR tax) in respect of the amount.

Division 770 operates as if:

the *head company had paid the foreign income tax; and

the entity had not paid the foreign income tax.

Note: Division 770 provides a tax offset for foreign income tax paid.

This section does not limit the operation of Division 770.

Subdivision 717-D — Transfer of certain surpluses under CFC provisions and former FIF and FLP provisions: entry rules

Guide to Subdivision 717-D

717-200 What this Subdivision is about

Each attribution surplus and post FIF abolition surplus relating to a company that becomes a subsidiary member of a consolidated group is transferred to the head company of the group.

Table of sections

Object

717-205 Object of this Subdivision

Transfers

717-210 Attribution surpluses

717-220 FIF surpluses

717-227 Deferred attribution credits

Object

717-205 Object of this Subdivision

The main object of this Subdivision is to avoid double taxation by transferring from a company (the joining company) that becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time) to the *head company of the group the benefit of each of these:

(a) the attribution surplus (if any) for an attribution account entity (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) in relation to the joining company just before the joining time;

(b) the post FIF abolition surplus (if any) (within the meaning of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) for a FIF attribution account entity (within the meaning of former Part XI of that Act) in relation to the joining company just before the joining time.

Transfers

717-210 Attribution surpluses

(1) This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:

(a) a company (the joining company) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

just before the joining time there was an attribution surplus for an attribution account entity in relation to the joining company for the purposes of that Part; and

just before the joining time the joining company’s attribution account percentage in relation to the attribution account entity for the purposes of that Part was more than nil.

Credit in relation to the head company

An attribution credit arises at the joining time for the attribution account entity in relation to the *head company of the group. The credit is equal to the attribution surplus.

Debit in relation to the joining company

An attribution debit arises at the joining time for the attribution account entity in relation to the joining company. The debit is equal to the attribution surplus.

717-220 FIF surpluses

(1) This section operates for the purposes of sections 23AK and 23B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:

(a) a company (the joining company) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

just before the joining time there was a post FIF abolition surplus for a FIF attribution account entity in relation to the joining company for the purposes of those sections; and

just before the joining time, the joining company’s FIF attribution account percentage in relation to the FIF attribution account entity for the purposes of those sections was more than nil.

Credit in relation to the head company

A post FIF abolition credit arises at the joining time for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the *head company of the group. The credit is equal to the post FIF abolition surplus.

Debit in relation to the joining company

A post FIF abolition debit arises at the joining time for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the joining company. The debit is equal to the post FIF abolition surplus.

Definitions

In this section:

FIF attribution account entity has the same meaning as in former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

FIF attribution account percentage has the same meaning as in former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

post FIF abolition credit has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

post FIF abolition debit has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

post FIF abolition surplus has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

717-227 Deferred attribution credits

(1) This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:

(a) a company (the joining company) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the joining time); and

(b) assuming the joining company had not done so, an attribution credit would have arisen under subsection 371(8) of that Act at a later time for an attribution account entity in relation to the joining company for the purposes of that Part.

Credit in relation to the head company

The attribution credit arises instead at the later time for the attribution account entity in relation to the *head company of the group.

Subdivision 717-E — Transfer of certain surpluses under CFC provisions and former FIF and FLP provisions: exit rules

Guide to Subdivision 717-E

717-235 What this Subdivision is about

Each attribution surplus and post FIF abolition surplus relating to a company that ceases to be a subsidiary member of a consolidated group is transferred to that company from the head company of the group.

Table of sections

Object

717-240 Object of this Subdivision

Transfers

717-245 Attribution surpluses

717-255 FIF surpluses

717-262 Deferred attribution credits

Object

717-240 Object of this Subdivision

The main object of this Subdivision is to avoid double taxation by transferring from the *head company of a *consolidated group to a company (the leaving company) that ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group at a time (the leaving time) the benefit of each of these surpluses (to the extent that each surplus can be attributed to the leaving company):

(a) the attribution surplus (if any) for an attribution account entity (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) in relation to the head company just before the leaving time;

(b) the post FIF abolition surplus (if any) (within the meaning of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) for a FIF attribution account entity (within the meaning of former Part XI of that Act) in relation to the head company just before the leaving time.

Transfers

717-245 Attribution surpluses

(1) This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:

(a) a company (the leaving company) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

just before the leaving time there was, for the purposes of that Part, an attribution surplus for an attribution account entity in relation to the *head company of the group; and

at the leaving time the leaving company’s attribution account percentage in relation to the attribution account entity for the purposes of that Part is more than nil.

Credit in relation to leaving company

An attribution credit arises at the leaving time for the attribution account entity in relation to the leaving company. The credit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

Debit in relation to head company

An attribution debit arises at the leaving time for the attribution account entity in relation to the company that was the *head company of the group just before the leaving time. The debit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

Amount of credit and debit

The amount of the credit and debit is worked out using the formula:

717-255 FIF surpluses

(1) This section operates for the purposes of sections 23AK and 23B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (the 1936 Act) if:

(a) a company (the leaving company) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

just before the leaving time, there was a post FIF abolition surplus for a FIF attribution account entity in relation to the *head company of the group for the purposes of those sections; and

at the leaving time, the leaving company’s FIF attribution account percentage in relation to the FIF attribution account entity for the purposes of those sections is more than nil.

Credit in relation to the leaving company

A post FIF abolition credit arises at the leaving time for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the leaving company. The credit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

Debit in relation to head company

A post FIF abolition debit arises at the leaving time for the FIF attribution account entity in relation to the company that was the *head company of the group just before the leaving time. The debit is the amount worked out under subsection (4).

Amount of credit and debit

The amount of the credit and debit is worked out using the formula:

Definitions

In this section:

FIF attribution account entity has the same meaning as in former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

FIF attribution account percentage has the same meaning as in former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

post FIF abolition credit has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

post FIF abolition debit has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

post FIF abolition surplus has the same meaning as in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

717-262 Deferred attribution credits

(1) This section operates for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if:

(a) a company (the leaving company) ceases to be a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group at a time (the leaving time); and

(b) disregarding this section, an attribution credit (the original credit) will arise under subsection 371(8) of that Act at a later time for an attribution account entity in relation to the *head company of the group (including because of the operation of section 717-227) for the purposes of that Part; and

at the leaving time the leaving company’s attribution account percentage in relation to the attribution account entity for the purposes of that Part is more than nil.

Credit in relation to the leaving company

An attribution credit arises at the later time for the attribution account entity in relation to the leaving company. The credit is the amount worked out under subsection (3).

Amount of credit

The amount of the credit is worked out using the formula:

Reduction in credit in relation to the head company

The attribution credit that arises at the later time for the attribution account entity in relation to the *head company is reduced by the amount of the attribution credit that arises under subsection (2) in relation to the leaving company.

Subdivision 717-O — Offshore banking units

Guide to Subdivision 717-O

717-700 What this Subdivision is about

The head company of a consolidated group is treated for certain purposes as an offshore banking unit at a time when a subsidiary member of the group is an offshore banking unit.

Table of sections

717-705 Object of this Subdivision

717-710 Head company treated as OBU

717-705 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that certain rules in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 relating to offshore banking units interact properly with the consolidation regime in this Part.

717-710 Head company treated as OBU

(1) Division 9A of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the *head company of a *consolidated group as if the head company were an OBU (within the meaning of that Division) at a time when a *subsidiary member of the group is an OBU (within the meaning of that Division).

(2) Subsection (1) operates for the head company core purposes mentioned in subsection 701-1(2).

Division 719 — MEC groups

Subdivision 719-A — Modified application of Part 3-90 to MEC groups

719-2 Modified application of Part 3-90 to MEC groups

This Part (other than Division 703 and this Division) has effect in relation to a MEC group in the same way in which it has effect in relation to a consolidated group.

Note: A provision in this Part (other than in Division 703 or in this Division) mentioning 2 separate consolidated groups will, under subsection (1), have an additional operation when the groups are both MEC groups or when one is a MEC group and the other is a consolidated group.

However, that effect is subject to the modifications set out in this Division.

For the purposes of subsection (1), a reference in this Part (other than in Division 703 or this Division) to a provision in Division 703 applies as if it referred instead to that provision or the corresponding provision in Subdivision 719-B (as appropriate).

Subdivision 719-B — MEC groups and their members

719-4 What this Subdivision is about

A MEC group and a potential MEC group each consist of certain Australian-resident entities that are wholly-owned subsidiaries of a foreign top company.

A company that is a first-tier subsidiary of the top company is a tier-1 company.

A MEC group cannot be formed unless there are at least 2 tier-1 companies of the top company that are eligible to be members of the group.

A MEC group becomes consolidated at a time chosen by the eligible tier-1 companies.

One of the eligible tier-1 companies becomes the head company of the group.

The remaining members of the group are the subsidiary members.

Table of sections

Basic concepts

719-5 What is a MEC group?

719-10 What is a potential MEC group?

719-15 What is an eligible tier-1 company?

719-20 What is a top company and a tier-1 company?

719-25 Head company, subsidiary members and members of a MEC group

719-30 Treating entities as wholly-owned subsidiaries by disregarding employee shares

719-35 Treating entities held through non-fixed trusts as wholly-owned subsidiaries

719-40 Special conversion event—potential MEC group

719-45 Application of sections 703-20 and 703-25

Choice to consolidate a potential MEC group

719-50 Eligible tier-1 companies may choose to consolidate a potential MEC group

719-55 When choice starts to have effect

Provisional head company

719-60 Appointment of provisional head company

719-65 Qualifications for the provisional head company of a MEC group

719-70 Income year of new provisional head company to be the same as that of former provisional head company

Head company

719-75 Head company

Notice of events affecting group

719-76 Notice of choice to consolidate

719-77 Notice in relation to new eligible tier-1 members etc.

719-78 Notice of special conversion event

719-79 Notice of appointment of provisional head company after formation of group

719-80 Notice of events affecting MEC group

Effects of change of head company

719-85 Application

719-90 New head company treated as substituted for old head company at all times before the transition time

719-95 No consequences of old head company becoming, and new head company ceasing to be, subsidiary member of the group

Basic concepts

719-5 What is a MEC group?

When MEC group comes into existence

(1) A MEC (multiple entry consolidated) group comes into existence when:

a choice, by 2 or more *eligible tier-1 companies of a top company, that the potential MEC group derived from those companies be consolidated starts to have effect under section 719-55; or

a *special conversion event happens to a potential MEC group derived from an eligible tier-1 company of a top company.

Original members of a MEC group that results from a choice

A MEC group that results from a choice by 2 or more companies under section 719-50 consists of the potential MEC group derived from time to time from whichever one or more of those companies continue to be eligible tier-1 companies of the top company. This subsection has effect subject to subsection (4) (which deals with new eligible tier-1 members).

Original members of a MEC group that results from a special conversion event

A MEC group that results from a special conversion event consists of the potential MEC group derived from time to time from whichever one or more of the following companies continue to be eligible tier-1 companies of the top company:

the company mentioned in paragraph 719-40(1)(b);

the companies specified in the notice under paragraph 719-40(1)(e).

This subsection has effect subject to subsection (4) (which deals with new eligible tier-1 members).

New eligible tier-1 members of a MEC group

If:

a MEC group consists of the members of a potential MEC group derived from one or more eligible tier-1 companies of a top company; and

at a particular time after the MEC group came into existence, one or more other companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company; and

the *provisional head company of the MEC group makes a choice in writing no later than the day mentioned in subsection (6):

specifying one or more of the companies mentioned in paragraph (b); and

stating that the specified companies are to become members of the MEC group with effect from that time; and

if:

a company specified in the choice was a member of another MEC group immediately before that time; and

all of the eligible tier-1 companies in that other MEC group became eligible tier-1 companies of the top company at that time;

each eligible tier-1 company in that other MEC group is specified in the choice;

then, with effect from that time, the MEC group mentioned in paragraph (a) is taken to consist of the potential MEC group derived from time to time from whichever one or more of the following companies continue to be eligible tier-1 companies of the top company:

the companies mentioned in paragraph (a);

the companies specified in the choice.

Note: The provisional head company of the group must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing information about each entity that becomes a subsidiary member of the group on that day because of the choice (see sections 719-77 and 719-80).

To avoid doubt, paragraph (4)(a) applies to a MEC group even if the composition of the group has been worked out because of one or more previous applications of subsection (4).

The day mentioned in paragraph (4)(c) is:

if the company mentioned in subsection (6A) is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which the time mentioned in paragraph (4)(b) occurs—the day on which that company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which that company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

The company is:

in a case where subsection 719-75(1) or (2) applies—the company that will be the *head company of the group as at the end of the income year; and

in a case where subsection 719-75(3) applies—the company that will be the head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist.

Continued existence of MEC group

(7) If a MEC group (the first MEC group) consists of the members of a potential MEC group derived from one or more eligible tier-1 companies of a top company, the first MEC group continues to exist until:

the potential MEC group ceases to exist; or

there is a change in the identity of the top company, and the eligible tier-1 companies that were members of the first MEC group immediately before the change become members of another MEC group immediately after the change; or

there ceases to be a provisional head company of the first MEC group.

The first MEC group ceases to exist when one of those events happens.

Note: Subsection 719-10(7) sets out the circumstances in which the potential MEC group ceases to exist.

719-10 What is a potential MEC group?

(1) A potential MEC group derived from one or more *eligible tier-1 companies of a *top company consists of the following members:

those eligible tier-1 companies;

all of the other entities (if any) which:

meet the requirements of the table; or

(ii) are entities for which the requirements in section 701C-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 are met; or

(iii) are entities for which the requirements in section 701C-15 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 are met.

(2) For the purposes of column 3 of the table, if there are one or more entities interposed between an entity (the test entity) and an eligible tier-1 company, the test entity can be a wholly-owned subsidiary of the eligible tier-1 company only if each of the interposed entities:

meets the conditions in columns 1 and 2 of the table; or

holds membership interests only as a nominee of one or more entities each of which is:

an eligible tier-1 company of the top company; or

a wholly-owned subsidiary of an eligible tier-1 company of the top company, being a subsidiary that meets the conditions in columns 1 and 2 of the table.

For the purposes of subparagraph (2)(b)(ii), in determining whether an entity is a wholly-owned subsidiary of an eligible tier-1 company of the top company, assume that all of the *membership interests that are beneficially owned by eligible tier-1 companies of the top company were owned by a single eligible tier-1 company of the top company.

Only one eligible tier-1 company in a potential MEC group

To avoid doubt, if:

there is only one eligible tier-1 company of a top company; and

there are no entities which meet the requirements of the table in subsection (1); and

there are no entities for which the requirements mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(ii) are met; and

there are no entities for which the requirements mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(iii) are met;

the potential MEC group derived from the eligible tier-1 company consists of the eligible tier-1 company alone.

When potential MEC group ceases to exist

If a potential MEC group is derived from one or more *eligible tier-1 companies of a top company, the potential MEC group ceases to exist when:

none of those companies are eligible tier-1 companies of the top company; or

there is a change in the identity of the top company, and the eligible tier-1 companies that were members of the group immediately before the change are not the same as the eligible tier-1 companies that are members of the group immediately after the change.

Continuity of potential MEC group

If:

a potential MEC group is derived from one or more *eligible tier-1 companies of a top company; and

there is a change in the identity of the top company in relation to the potential MEC group; and

the eligible tier-1 companies that were members of the group immediately before the change are the same as the eligible tier-1 companies that are members of the group immediately after the change;

the change does not affect the continuity of:

the group; or

the status of any of those companies as eligible tier-1 companies of the top company.

719-15 What is an eligible tier-1 company?

(1) A *tier-1 company of a *top company is an eligible tier-1 company if subsection (2) does not apply to the tier-1 company.

This subsection applies to a tier-1 company if:

there are one or more entities interposed between the tier-1 company and the top company; and

the conditions in subsection (3) are satisfied in relation to at least one of those interposed entities.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), the conditions are as follows:

the interposed entity must be one of the following:

a company that is a foreign resident;

a prescribed dual resident;

a trust that does not meet the conditions in item 1, 2 or 3 of the table in section 703-25;

a trust that meets the conditions in item 1, 2 or 3 of the table in section 703-25 and is not a *wholly-owned subsidiary of another tier-1 company of the top company;

an entity covered by an item in the table in section 703-20;

a company that is an Australian resident, where no part of its taxable income (if any) would be taxable at a rate that is or equals the *general company rate;

(vii) a non-profit company (as defined in the Income Tax Rates Act 1986) that is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another tier-1 company of the top company;

the interposed entity must not hold *membership interests only as nominee of one or more entities each of which is:

another tier-1 company of the top company; or

an entity that is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another tier-1 company of the top company;

at least one of the following entities must hold a membership interest in the interposed entity:

another tier-1 company of the top company;

a wholly-owned subsidiary of another tier-1 company of the top company;

an entity that holds membership interests only as a nominee of one or more entities each of which is mentioned in subparagraph (i) or (ii).

For the purposes of subparagraphs (3)(a)(iv) and (vii) and paragraphs (3)(b) and (c), in determining whether an entity is a wholly-owned subsidiary of another tier-1 company of the top company, assume that all of the *membership interests that are beneficially owned by tier-1 companies of the top company were owned by a single tier-1 company of the top company.

719-20 What is a top company and a tier-1 company?

At a particular time, a company is:

(a) a top company if the requirements in item 1 of the table are met; or

(b) a tier-1 company of the top company if the requirements in item 2 of the table are met.

For the purposes of paragraph (b) of column 4 of item 2 of the table, in determining whether a company (the test company) is a tier-1 company, if 2 or more other companies beneficially own all of the *membership interests in the test company, and each of those other companies:

is a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the top company; and

meets the conditions in columns 2 and 3 of item 2 of the table;

the test company is taken to be a wholly-owned subsidiary of one of those other companies.

719-25 Head company, subsidiary members and members of a MEC group

(1) The head company of a *MEC group is worked out under section 719-75.

(2) The remaining members of the group are the subsidiary members of the group.

(3) The members of a *MEC group are the *head company of the group and the *subsidiary members of the group.

719-30 Treating entities as wholly-owned subsidiaries by disregarding employee shares

The object of this section is to ensure that an entity is not prevented from being a *wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity, just because there are minor holdings of *membership interests in an entity issued under *arrangements for employee shareholdings.

For the purposes of this Division, in determining whether an entity is a *wholly-owned subsidiary of another entity, disregard:

particular *shares in a company if the shares are covered by subsection (3) and the total number of those shares is not more than 1% of the number of ordinary shares in the company; and

particular *membership interests in an entity if the membership interests are covered by subsection (5) and the total number of those membership interests is not more than 1% of the number of membership interests of that kind in the entity.

A *share or *membership interest in a company is covered by this subsection if:

the entity who holds the beneficial interest in the share or membership interest acquired that beneficial interest:

under an employee share scheme; or

by exercising a right, a beneficial interest in which was acquired under an employee share scheme; and

paragraphs 83A-105(1)(a) and (b) and subsection 83A-105(2) apply to the beneficial interest acquired under the scheme; and

in the case of a membership interest—the interest is part of a stapled security.

719-35 Treating entities held through non-fixed trusts as wholly-owned subsidiaries

(1) This section operates to ensure that an entity (the test entity) is not prevented from being a *wholly-owned subsidiary of a company, just because there is a trust that is not a *fixed trust interposed between the test entity and the company.

For the purposes of this Division, in determining whether the test entity is a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the company, assume that the interposed trust is a *fixed trust and all its objects are beneficiaries.

719-40 Special conversion event—potential MEC group

(1) A special conversion event happens at a particular time to a *potential MEC group derived from an *eligible tier-1 company of a *top company if:

at that time, the group is not a MEC group as a result of a choice under section 719-50; and

immediately before that time, a company is:

that eligible tier-1 company; and

the *head company of a consolidated group; and

at that time, one or more other companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company; and

immediately after that time, no *membership interests in the company mentioned in paragraph (b) are beneficially owned by another member of the potential MEC group derived from:

the company mentioned in paragraph (b); and

the companies mentioned in paragraph (c); and

the company mentioned in paragraph (b) makes a choice in writing no later than the day mentioned in subsection (2):

specifying one or more of the companies mentioned in paragraph (c); and

stating that a MEC group is to come into existence at that time as a result of the specified companies becoming eligible tier-1 companies of the top company; and

if:

a company specified in the choice was a member of another MEC group immediately before that time; and

all of the eligible tier-1 companies in that other MEC group became eligible tier-1 companies of the top company at that time;

each eligible tier-1 company in that other MEC group is specified in the choice.

Note: The company mentioned in paragraph (b) must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing information about the special conversion event (see sections 719-78 and 719-80).

The day mentioned in paragraph (1)(e) is:

if the company is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which that time occurs—the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

719-45 Application of sections 703-20 and 703-25

For the purposes of this Division, if an item in section 703-20 refers to an income year, an entity is covered by that item at a particular time if, and only if, that time is in that income year.

For the purposes of this Division, if a condition in item 1, 2 or 3 of the table in section 703-25 refers to an income year, an entity meets that condition at a particular time if, and only if, that time is in that income year.

Choice to consolidate a potential MEC group

719-50 Eligible tier-1 companies may choose to consolidate a potential MEC group

Making a choice to consolidate

If:

(a) a *potential MEC group (the first group) derived from 2 or more *eligible tier-1 companies of a *top company is in existence at the start of a particular day; and

that day is after 30 June 2002; and

none of those eligible tier-1 companies is already a member of a MEC group or a consolidated group;

those eligible tier-1 companies, jointly, may make a choice in writing that the first group be consolidated on and after that day. If they do so, the choice must specify that day.

Choice cannot be revoked or specified day amended

Note: The provisional head company must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing information about the group (see sections 719-76 and 719-80).

A choice cannot be revoked and the specification of the day cannot be amended.

A choice can be made no later than:

if the company mentioned in subsection (3A) is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs—the day on which that company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which that company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

The company is:

in a case where subsection 719-75(1) or (2) applies—the company that will be the *head company of the group as at the end of the income year; and

in a case where subsection 719-75(3) applies—the company that will be the head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist.

Company ceases to be an eligible tier-1 company before choice is given to the Commissioner

If:

as a result of a choice:

subsection 719-75(1), (2) or (3) would apply to the MEC group concerned in relation to the *income year of a company in which the specified day occurred; and

in a case where subsection 719-75(1) or (2) applies—the company will be the *head company of the group as at the end of the income year; and

in a case where subsection 719-75(3) applies—the company will be the *head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist; and

(b) another company (the other company) that was an eligible tier-1 company at the start of the specified day ceased to exist at a time before:

the day on which the company mentioned in paragraph (a) gives the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which the day specified in the choice occurs; or

the last day in the period within which the company mentioned in paragraph (a) would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return; and

having regard to all relevant circumstances, it would be reasonable to conclude that the other company would have been a party to the choice if the other company had continued to exist;

the other company is taken to have authorised the company that will be the head company as mentioned in subparagraph (a)(ii) or (iii):

to make the choice on behalf of the other company; and

to do, on behalf of the other company, anything else under:

subsection (1) of this section; or

subsection 719-60(1) or (3).

719-55 When choice starts to have effect

A choice under section 719-50 is taken to have started to have effect on the day specified in the choice.

Provisional head company

719-60 Appointment of provisional head company

Appointment on formation of group—choice

If companies make a choice under section 719-50, the choice must include an appointment, made jointly by the companies, of one of those companies to be the provisional head company of the MEC group concerned. The appointment comes, or is taken to have come, into force at the time when the choice starts or started to have effect.

Appointment on formation of group—special conversion event

If a *special conversion event happens to a potential MEC group, the *eligible tier-1 companies that were the members of the MEC group that resulted from the event are taken to have appointed the company mentioned in paragraph 719-40(1)(b) as the provisional head company of the MEC group. The appointment is taken to have come into force when the event happened.

Appointment after formation of group

If a *cessation event happens to the provisional head company of a *MEC group, the *eligible tier-1 companies that are or were members of the MEC group immediately after the cessation event may make a choice in writing, jointly appointing one of those companies to be the provisional head company of the group. The appointment is taken to have come into force immediately after the cessation event.

Qualifications for provisional head company

An appointment of a company under subsection (1) or (3) as the provisional head company of a *MEC group has no effect unless, at the time the appointment comes into force, the company is qualified to be the *provisional head company of the MEC group under section 719-65.

Appointment remains in force until cessation event

The appointment of a company as the provisional head company of a *MEC group remains in force until a *cessation event happens to the company.

What is a cessation event?

(6) A cessation event happens to a *provisional head company of a *MEC group if:

the company ceases to be qualified to be the *provisional head company of the group under section 719-65; or

the company ceases to exist.

719-65 Qualifications for the provisional head company of a MEC group

Qualifications for the provisional head company

A company is qualified to be the provisional head company of a *MEC group if:

the company is an eligible tier-1 company of the top company; and

no *membership interests in the company are beneficially owned by another member of the group.

Subsection (1) has effect subject to subsection (3).

Period during which new provisional head company must have been a member of the group

If:

(a) a company (the new company) is to be appointed as the *provisional head company of a *MEC group under subsection 719-60(3); and

the appointment will come into force immediately after a *cessation event happens to the former provisional head company of the group; and

(c) a company (the original company) (which may be the former provisional head company) was appointed as the provisional head company of the group under subsection 719-60(1) or (2);

the new company is not qualified to be the provisional head company of the group unless the new company has been a member of the group at all times during the period:

beginning at whichever of the following times is applicable:

if the cessation event happened in the income year of the original company in which the group came into existence—the time when the group came into existence;

in any other case—the start of the income year of the former provisional head company in which the cessation event happened; and

ending when the cessation event happened.

719-70 Income year of new provisional head company to be the same as that of former provisional head company

If:

(a) a company (the new company) is appointed as the *provisional head company of a *MEC group under subsection 719-60(3); and

the appointment comes into force immediately after a *cessation event happens to the former provisional head company of the group;

then:

if, for the income year in which the cessation event happened, the former provisional head company had not adopted an accounting period in place of the financial year concerned—the new company is taken not to have adopted an accounting period in place of that financial year; or

if, for the income year in which the cessation event happened, the former provisional head company had adopted an accounting period in place of the financial year concerned—the new company is taken to have adopted an accounting period in place of that financial year that is the same as the accounting period adopted by the former provisional head company.

Head company

719-75 Head company

Group in existence throughout income year

If:

a company is the provisional head company of a *MEC group at the end of the income year of the company; and

the group was in existence throughout the income year;

the company is the head company of the group at all times during the income year.

Group comes into existence in income year

If:

a company is the provisional head company of a *MEC group at the end of the income year of the company; and

the group is in existence at the end of the income year; and

the group came into existence in the income year;

that company is the head company of the group at all times during the period:

beginning when the group came into existence; and

ending at the end of the income year.

Group ceases to exist in income year

If:

a MEC group ceases to exist in an income year of a company; and

the company was the *provisional head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist;

that company is the head company of the group at all times during the period:

beginning at whichever is the later of:

the start of the income year; and

the time the group came into existence; and

ending at the time when the group ceased to exist.

Notice of events affecting group

719-76 Notice of choice to consolidate

This section applies if:

a MEC group comes into existence on the day specified in a choice under section 719-50; and

subsection 719-75(1), (2) or (3) would apply to the MEC group in relation to the *income year of a company in which the specified day occurred; and

in a case where subsection 719-75(1) or (2) applies—the company will be the *head company of the group as at the end of the income year; and

in a case where subsection 719-75(3) applies—the company will be the head company of the group immediately before the group ceased to exist.

The company must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing the following information:

the identity of the company;

the day specified in the choice on which the MEC group comes into existence;

the identity of each eligible tier-1 company of the top company in relation to the MEC group on that day;

the identity of each *subsidiary member of the group on that day;

(e) the identity of each entity that was a subsidiary member of the group on that day but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;

(f) the identity of each entity that was not a subsidiary member of the group on that day but was such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;

(g) the identity of each entity that became a subsidiary member of the group after that day but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given.

The notice must be given no later than:

if the company is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which that day occurs—the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

719-77 Notice in relation to new eligible tier-1 members etc.

This section applies if:

a MEC group consists of the members of a potential MEC group derived from one or more *eligible tier-1 companies of a top company; and

one or more other companies become eligible tier-1 companies of the top company at a time because of a choice under subsection 719-5(4).

The *head company of the MEC group must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing the following information:

(a) the identity of the head company;

the time mentioned in paragraph (1)(b);

the identity of each entity that became an eligible tier-1 company of the top company in relation to the MEC group at that time because of the choice;

the identity of each entity that became a *subsidiary member of the group at that time because of the choice;

the identity of each entity that was a subsidiary member of the group at that time but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given.

The notice must be given no later than:

if the *head company is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which that time occurs—the day on which the head company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the head company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

719-78 Notice of special conversion event

This section applies if a MEC group comes into existence at the time because of a choice under paragraph 719-40(e).

The company mentioned in paragraph 719-40(b) must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing the following information:

the identity of the company;

the time at which the MEC group comes into existence;

the identity of each eligible tier-1 company of the top company in relation to the MEC group on that day;

the identity of each *subsidiary member of the group at that time;

(e) the identity of each entity that was a subsidiary member of the group at that time but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;

(f) the identity of each entity that was not a subsidiary member of the group at that time but was such a subsidiary member when the notice is given;

(g) the identity of each entity that became a subsidiary member of the group after that time but was not such a subsidiary member when the notice is given.

The notice must be given no later than:

if the company is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which that time occurs—the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the company would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

719-79 Notice of appointment of provisional head company after formation of group

This section applies if an entity is appointed to be the provisional head company of a *MEC group because of a choice under subsection 719-60(3).

The *provisional head company must give the Commissioner a notice in the approved form containing the following information:

the identity of the provisional head company;

the day on which the choice was made;

the day on which the *cessation event mentioned in subsection 719-60(3) occurs.

The notice must be given no later than:

if:

the group came into existence because of a choice under section 719-50; and

the event happens more than 28 days before a notice under section 719-76 in relation to the choice is given;

the day on which the notice mentioned in subparagraph (ii) is given; or

in any other case—28 days after the *cessation event.

719-80 Notice of events affecting MEC group

(1) If an event (the notifiable event) described in column 2 of an item of the table happens in relation to a *MEC group, the entity described in column 3 of the item must give the Commissioner notice in the *approved form of the notifiable event.

The entity described in column 3 of the relevant item must give notice of the notifiable event:

if:

the group came into existence because of a choice under section 719-50; and

the notifiable event happens before the relevant notice is given to the Commissioner under section 719-76 (notice of choice to consolidate);

no later than the day mentioned in subsection (3); or

if:

the group results from a *special conversion event; and

a choice under section 703-50 is made in relation to the consolidated group mentioned in paragraph 719-40(1)(b); and

the notifiable event happens before the relevant notice is given to the Commissioner under section 703-58 (notice of choice to consolidate);

no later than the day mentioned in subsection (3); or

in any other case—within 28 days after the notifiable event.

The day is:

if the entity is required to give the Commissioner its income tax return for the income year during which the notifiable event happens—the day on which the company gives the Commissioner that income tax return; or

otherwise—the last day in the period within which the entity would be required to give the Commissioner such a return if it were required to give the Commissioner such a return.

Effects of change of head company

719-85 Application

Sections 719-90 to 719-95 set out the effects if:

(a) a company (the old head company) is the *head company of a *MEC group at the end of an income year; and

(b) a different company (the new head company) is the head company of the group at the start of the next income year (the transition time).

Note: This case can arise from the operation of section 719-75, which treats an entity that is the provisional head company of the group at a certain time in the income year as being the group’s head company at all times in the income year when the group is in existence.

The old head company is also taken to become a subsidiary member of the group at the transition time, and the new head company is taken to cease being a subsidiary member at that time. Section 719-95 ensures that these results do not change the tax position of the group.

719-90 New head company treated as substituted for old head company at all times before the transition time

Everything that happened in relation to the old head company before the transition time is taken to have happened in relation to the new head company instead, just as if the new head company had been the old head company at all times before the transition time.

Note: This section treats the new head company as having in effect assumed the identity of the old head company throughout the period before the transition time, but without affecting any of the other attributes of the old head company.

To avoid doubt, subsection (1) also covers everything that, immediately before the transition time, was taken, because of:

section 701-1 (Single entity rule); or

section 701-5 (Entry history rule); or

section 703-75 (about the effects of choice to continue consolidated group after shelf company becomes new head company); or

section 719-125 (about the effects of a group conversion involving a MEC group); or

one or more previous applications of this section;

to have happened in relation to the old head company.

Subsections (1) and (2) have effect:

for the head company core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the transition time; and

for the entity core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the transition time.

Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to:

section 701-40 (Exit history rule); and

a provision of this Act to which section 701-40 is subject because of section 701-85 (about exceptions to the core rules in Division 701).

Note: An example of provisions covered by paragraph (b) of this subsection is section 707-410, which ensures that section 701-40 (Exit history rule) does not result in a leaving entity inheriting a loss of any sort.

719-95 No consequences of old head company becoming, and new head company ceasing to be, subsidiary member of the group

(1) A provision of this Part that applies on an entity becoming a *subsidiary member of a *MEC group does not apply to an entity being taken to have become such a member because the entity stopped being the *head company of the group as mentioned in section 719-85, unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

Note: An example of the effect of this subsection is that section 701-5 (Entry history rule) does not apply. See instead section 719-90.

To avoid doubt, subsection (1) does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

(3) A provision of this Part that applies on an entity ceasing to be a *subsidiary member of a *MEC group does not apply to an entity being taken to cease being such a member because the entity became the *head company of the group as mentioned in section 719-85, unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

Note: An example of the effect of this subsection is that section 701-40 (Exit history rule) does not apply. See instead section 719-90.

Subdivision 719-BA — Group conversions involving MEC groups

Table of sections

719-120 Application

719-125 Head company of new group retains history of head company of old group

719-130 Provisions of this Part not to apply to conversion

719-135 Provisions of this Part applying to conversion despite section 719-130

719-140 Other provisions of this Part not applying to conversion

719-120 Application

(1) This Subdivision applies if, at a particular time (the conversion time):

(a) a *consolidated group (the new group) is *created from a *MEC group (the old group); or

(b) a MEC group (the new group) is created from a consolidated group (the old group).

However, sections 719-130 and 719-135 apply only in relation to entities that:

were *members of the old group just before the conversion time; and

are members of the new group at that time.

719-125 Head company of new group retains history of head company of old group

Everything that happened in relation to the *head company of the old group before the conversion time is taken instead to have happened in relation to:

if the head company of the old group is the same entity as the head company of the new group—that entity in its role as head company of the new group; or

otherwise—the head company of the new group (just as if the head company of the new group had been the head company of the old group at all times before the conversion time).

To avoid doubt, subsection (1) also covers everything that, immediately before the conversion time, was taken to have happened in relation to the *head company of the old group because of:

section 701-1 (the single entity rule); or

section 701-5 (the entry history rule); or

section 703-75 (about the effects of choice to continue consolidated group after shelf company becomes new head company); or

section 719-90 (about the effects of a change of head company of a MEC group); or

one or more previous applications of this Division.

Subsections (1) and (2) have effect:

for the *head company core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the conversion time; and

for the entity core purposes in relation to an income year ending after the conversion time; and

for the purposes of determining the balance of the franking account of the head company of the new group at and after the conversion time.

Subsections (1) and (2) have effect subject to:

section 701-40 (Exit history rule); and

a provision of this Act to which section 701-40 is subject because of section 701-85 (about exceptions to the core rules in Division 701).

Note: An example of provisions covered by paragraph (b) of this subsection is Subdivision 717-E (about transferring to a company leaving a consolidated group various surpluses under the CFC rules in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

719-130 Provisions of this Part not to apply to conversion

(1) A provision mentioned in subsection (5) that applies on an entity becoming a *member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group does not apply to an entity becoming such a member because of a situation described in subsection 719-120(1), unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

Note 1: An example of the effect of this subsection is that section 701-5 (entry history rule) does not apply. See instead section 719-125.

Note 2: Further examples of the effect of this subsection are that Division 705 (cost setting on entry) and Division 707 (losses) do not apply.

Subsection (1) does not affect the application of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule).

(3) A provision mentioned in subsection (5) that applies on an entity ceasing to be a *member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group does not apply to an entity ceasing being such a member because of a situation described in subsection 719-120(1), unless the provision is expressed to apply despite this subsection.

Note 1: An example of the effect of this subsection is that section 701-40 (Exit history rule) does not apply. See instead section 719-125.

Note 2: Another example of the effect of this subsection is that Division 711 (cost setting on exit) does not apply.

Subsection (3) does not apply if:

the old group mentioned in subsection 719-120(1) is a consolidated group; and

the new group mentioned in subsection 719-120(1) is a MEC group; and

the entity ceasing to be a *member of the old group becomes an eligible tier-1 company in respect of the new group.

The provisions are as follows:

Subdivision 104-L;

section 165-212E;

this Part (other than this Subdivision);

(d) Part 3-90 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

719-135 Provisions of this Part applying to conversion despite section 719-130

This section applies despite subsections 719-130(1) and (3).

If the new group is a consolidated group, the following provisions may apply on an entity ceasing to be a *member of the old group:

Subdivision 719-K;

any other provision of this Part, to the extent that the application of the provision is necessary for the application of Subdivision 719-K.

719-140 Other provisions of this Part not applying to conversion

If the new group is a consolidated group, the following provisions do not apply merely because the old group ceases to exist at the conversion time (or merely because the potential MEC group of which the old group consisted ceases to exist at that time):

section 719-280;

section 719-465;

section 719-705;

section 719-725;

any other provision of this Part, to the extent that the application of the provision is necessary for the application of any of those sections.

Subdivision 719-C — MEC group cost setting rules: joining cases

Guide to Subdivision 719-C

719-150 What this Subdivision is about

When an entity (other than an eligible tier-1 company) becomes a subsidiary member of a MEC group, the tax cost of its assets is set at a tax cost setting amount that is worked out in accordance with Divisions 701 and 705 as modified by this Subdivision. Assets of eligible tier-1 companies becoming members of a MEC group do not have their tax cost set.

Table of sections

Application and object

719-155 Object of this Subdivision

Modified application of tax cost setting rules for joining

719-160 Tax cost setting rules for joining have effect with modifications

719-165 Trading stock value and registered emissions unit value not set for assets of eligible tier-1 companies

719-170 Modified effect of subsections 705-175(1) and 705-185(1)

Application and object

719-155 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to modify the tax cost setting rules in Divisions 701 and 705 so that they take account of the special characteristics of *MEC groups.

Modified application of tax cost setting rules for joining

719-160 Tax cost setting rules for joining have effect with modifications

(1A) This section applies if an entity (the MEC joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *MEC group at a time (the MEC joining time).

This section has effect for the head company core purposes set out in subsection 701-1(2).

General modifying rule

The provisions mentioned in subsection (3) operate, for the purposes of setting the tax cost of an asset of the MEC joining entity, as if each *subsidiary member of the group (including the MEC joining entity) that is an eligible tier-1 company at the MEC joining time were a part of the *head company of the group, rather than a separate entity.

Note 1: This subsection means that references in those provisions to matters internal to the group operate as if eligible tier-1 companies in the group were parts of the head company of the group. For example:

provisions operating if the head company holds (whether directly or indirectly) membership interests in another entity operate even if an eligible tier-1 company actually holds those interests; and

provisions operating if the head company owns or controls another entity operate even if one or more eligible tier-1 companies actually own or control that other entity; and

provisions operating if an entity is interposed between the head company and another entity operate even if the first entity is actually interposed between an eligible tier-1 company and the other entity.

Note 2: If the MEC joining entity is an eligible tier-1 company, this subsection means the assets of the entity do not have their tax cost reset at the MEC joining time. This is because Subdivision 705-A (and related provisions) reset the tax cost of assets of subsidiary members of a group, but not assets of the head company.

The provisions are:

section 701-10 (about setting the tax cost of assets of an entity joining a group); and

Subdivision 705-A; and

any other provision of this Act giving Subdivision 705-A a modified effect in circumstances other than those covered by that Subdivision.

Note: An example of provisions covered by paragraph (c) are the provisions of Subdivision 705-B giving Subdivision 705-A a modified effect when a consolidated group is formed.

719-165 Trading stock value and registered emissions unit value not set for assets of eligible tier-1 companies

(1) This section applies if an entity (the MEC joining entity) becomes a *subsidiary member of a *MEC group at a time (the MEC joining time).

Subsection 701-35(4) (setting value of trading stock at tax-neutral amount) does not apply to the assets of the MEC joining entity if it is an eligible tier-1 company at the MEC joining time.

Subsection 701-35(5) (setting value of registered emissions unit at tax-neutral amount) does not apply to the assets of the MEC joining entity if it is an eligible tier-1 company at the MEC joining time.

719-170 Modified effect of subsections 705-175(1) and 705-185(1)

(1) This section applies if all of the *members of a *MEC group (the acquired group) become members of another MEC group, or of a *consolidated group, at a particular time (the acquisition time) as a result of the *acquisition of *membership interests in:

the *head company of the acquired group; and

other entities that were *eligible tier-1 companies of the acquired group just before the acquisition time.

Subsections 705-175(1) and 705-185(1) have effect as if a membership interest in an entity mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) of this section were a membership interest in the *head company of the acquired group.

Note 1: If the acquiring group is a MEC group, and the head company of the acquired group becomes an eligible tier-1 company of the acquiring group, the assets of the members of the acquired group do not have their tax cost reset at the acquisition time. This is because:

(a) section 719-160 treats an entity becoming an eligible tier-1 company of the acquiring group as if it were a part of the head company of that group; and

section 705-185 treats the subsidiary members of the acquired group as part of the head company of the acquired group.

Note 2: If:

(a) the acquiring group is a MEC group, but the head company of the acquired group does not become an eligible tier-1 company of the acquiring group; or

(b) the acquiring group is a consolidated group and the acquired group is a MEC group;

the assets of the members of the acquired group have their tax cost reset at the acquisition time (section 719-160 does not preclude tax cost resetting in these cases). For the purposes of resetting the tax cost of those assets, section 705-185 treats the subsidiary members of the acquired group as part of the head company of the acquired group.

Subdivision 719-F — Losses

Guide to Subdivision 719-F

719-250 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision modifies the rules about transferring and utilising losses so the rules operate appropriately in relation to MEC groups, taking account of the special characteristics of those groups. The modifications mainly affect:

rules about maintaining the same ownership to be able to utilise a loss; and

rules for working out how much of a loss can be utilised by reference to bundles of losses and their available fractions.

Table of sections

Maintaining the same ownership to be able to utilise loss

719-255 Special rules

719-260 Special test for utilising a loss because a company maintains the same owners

719-265 What is the test company?

719-270 Assumptions about the test company having made the loss for an income year

719-275 Assumptions about nothing happening to affect direct and indirect ownership of the test company

719-280 Assumptions about the test company failing to meet the conditions in section 165-12

Business continuity test and change of head company

719-285 Business continuity test and change of head company

Bundles of losses and their available fractions

719-300 Application

719-305 Subdivision 707-C affects utilisation of losses made by ongoing head company while it was head company

719-310 Adjustment of available fractions for bundles of losses previously transferred to ongoing head company

719-315 Further adjustment of available fractions for all bundles

719-320 Limit on utilising losses other than the prior group losses

719-325 Cancellation of all losses in a bundle

Maintaining the same ownership to be able to utilise loss

719-255 Special rules

(1) This section and section 719-260 have effect for the purposes of working out whether a loss can be *utilised for an income year (the claim year) by a company (the focal company) that made the loss if:

section 165-12 is relevant to the question whether the focal company can utilise the loss; and

the focal company is the *head company of a MEC group at any time in its ownership test period for the loss (as affected by section 707-205, if relevant).

Note: If the focal company made the loss because of a transfer under Subdivision 707-A, section 707-205 has the effect that the ownership test period starts for the focal company at the time of the transfer.

Section 707-210 does not have effect

Section 707-210 does not have effect for the purposes of working out whether the focal company can *utilise the loss for the claim year.

Note: Section 707-210 is about whether a company can utilise a loss it made because the loss was transferred to it under Subdivision 707-A because the transferor met the conditions in section 165-12.

719-260 Special test for utilising a loss because a company maintains the same owners

Meeting the conditions in section 165-12

(1) The focal company is taken to meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the claim year and the loss if and only if the company (the test company) identified in relation to the focal company in accordance with section 719-265 would have met those conditions for that year on the relevant assumptions in:

section 719-270 (which is about assuming the test company made the loss for a particular income year); and

section 719-275 (which is about assuming that nothing happened in relation to certain things that would affect whether the test company would meet those conditions); and

section 719-280 (which is about assuming that the test company would have failed to meet those conditions in certain circumstances).

Focal company’s failure to meet conditions in section 165-12

The focal company is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-12 only at:

the first time the test company would have failed to meet the condition on the relevant assumptions mentioned in subsection (1); or

the *test time described in subsection 166-5(6) for the test company, if:

Division 166 is relevant to working out whether the test company could have *utilised the loss for the claim year on the relevant assumptions mentioned in paragraphs (1)(a) and (b); and

the test company is not assumed under section 719-280 to fail to meet the condition before the test time.

Note: If the focal company is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-12, the focal company will not be able to utilise the loss for the claim year unless the focal company meets the condition in section 165-13 by satisfying the business continuity test. That test applies to the focal company (and not the test company).

Business continuity test for focal company under Division 166

If subsection 166-5(5) affects whether the focal company can *utilise the loss for the claim year because the focal company is a *widely held company or an eligible Division 166 company, or both, during the year, subsection 166-5(6) operates as if it required the business continuity test to be applied to the business the focal company carried on just before the time described in subsection (2) of this section.

Business continuity test for focal company to transfer loss

If subsection 707-125(4) is relevant to working out whether the focal company can transfer the loss to a company under Subdivision 707-A, that subsection:

has effect as if subsection 707-125(5) described the focal company’s income year containing the time at which the focal company is taken under subsection (2) of this section to fail to meet a condition in section 165-12; and

has effect despite subsection (3) of this section.

Note: For working out whether certain losses can be transferred under Subdivision 707-A, subsection 707-125(4) modifies the operation of subsection 166-5(6) by extending the business continuity test period to include the income year described in subsection 707-125(5).

719-265 What is the test company?

To identify for the purposes of section 719-260 the company that is the test company for the focal company for the loss:

first, identify the test company for the focal company by applying whichever one of subsections (2), (3), (3A), (4) and (6) is relevant; and

then, if the condition in column 1 of an item of the table is met, apply this section again to identify the test company as if the company described in column 2 of the item were the focal company, taking account only of things that happened before the event described in column 3 of the item.

Note: More than 2 applications of this section may be needed to identify the test company for the focal company.

COT transfer of loss to focal company

The test company for the focal company is the company described in column 2 of the relevant item of the table if the focal company made the loss because of a *COT transfer to the focal company.

Loss transferred because business continuity test satisfied

The test company for the focal company is the company described in column 2 of the relevant item of the table if the focal company made the loss because the loss was transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the focal company from a company because it satisfied the business continuity test for:

the business continuity test period; and

the *test time specified in Division 165 or 166 or section 707-125.

Transfer of tax loss from designated infrastructure project entity

If:

the focal company made the loss because the loss was transferred under Subdivision 707-A to the focal company as the *head company of a MEC group; and

subsection 707-120(5) (about designated infrastructure project entities joining consolidated groups) applies to the transfer;

the test company for the focal company is the company that was the top company for the MEC group at the time of a transfer.

Loss not transferred from a company

(4) The test company for the focal company is the company described in column 2 of the relevant item of the table if the focal company made the loss apart from a transfer of the loss under Subdivision 707-A from a company.

Relationship between subsections (2), (3) and (4)

(5) Subsection (2) or (3), and not subsection (4), is relevant for identifying the test company for the focal company if the focal company made the loss apart from a transfer under Subdivision 707-A, and later transferred the loss to itself under that Subdivision.

Change of head company

If, under section 719-90, the focal company is taken to have made the loss because:

(a) a company (the first head company) other than the focal company made the loss apart from that section and either:

was the *head company of a MEC group at any time during the income year for which it made the loss; or

became the head company of a MEC group after that income year (without having been a *subsidiary member of the group before becoming the head company); and

the focal company was later the head company of the MEC group;

the test company for the focal company is the company that is the test company for the first head company.

Note: Section 719-90 applies if there is a change in the head company of a MEC group, treating the later head company as if what had happened to the earlier head company had happened to the later head company.

Subsections (2), (3), (3A) and (4) and section 719-90 have effect subject to subsection (6) of this section.

719-270 Assumptions about the test company having made the loss for an income year

If test company was top company for focal company’s MEC group

If the test company was the top company for a MEC group and the focal company is or was the *head company of that MEC group, assume that the test company made the loss for an income year starting at the relevant time shown in the table.

Note: Subsection (1) applies even if the test company is still the top company for the MEC group at the end of the claim year.

If test company is focal company or first head company

If the test company is:

the focal company; or

the first head company identified in subsection 719-265(6) by reference to the focal company;

assume that the test company made the loss for an income year starting at the relevant time shown in the table.

If the test company is the first head company, disregard section 719-90 for the purposes of working out the relevant time using the table in subsection (2) of this section.

Note: This ensures that section 719-90 does not make the items in the table inapplicable by treating the test company as if another company had made the loss instead of the test company.

If subsections (1) and (2) do not apply

If neither subsection (1) nor subsection (2) applies, assume that the test company made the loss for an income year starting at the relevant time shown in the table.

Note: Subsection (4) applies if the focal company made the loss because of a COT transfer of the loss to the focal company from another company.

Disregard section 719-90 for the purposes of items 1 and 2 of the table in subsection (4) of this section if the test company was identified using subsection 719-265(6).

Note: This ensures that section 719-90 does not make those items inapplicable by treating the test company as if another company had made the loss instead of the test company.

Other events do not override assumption

If the test company transferred the loss to itself or another company under Subdivision 707-A, assume that the transfer did not affect, for income years ending after the transfer:

the fact that the test company made the loss; or

the income year for which the test company is assumed (under subsection (1), (2) or (4)) to have made the loss.

719-275 Assumptions about nothing happening to affect direct and indirect ownership of the test company

This section sets out an assumption that must be made whenever an event described in subsection (2) occurs:

after the time assumed under section 719-270 to be the start of the income year for which the test company made the loss; and

before the end of the claim year;

(whether or not the test company or the focal company is one of the companies mentioned in the description of the event).

Assume that, after an event described in an item of the table, nothing happens in relation to *membership interests or voting power in an entity described in the item that would affect whether the test company would meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the claim year and the loss.

For the purposes of this section, a company is taken to make a loss:

(a) at the start of the income year for which the company makes the loss, if it makes the loss apart from a transfer under Subdivision 707-A (even if the company later transfers the loss to itself under that Subdivision); or

at the time the loss is transferred to the company under that Subdivision, if the company makes the loss because of that transfer.

Disregard section 719-90 for the purposes of making an assumption on the basis of item 1 of the table in subsection (2) of this section if (apart from that section):

the *COT transfer mentioned in that item was from the *head company of the MEC group to itself; and

for an income year starting after the transfer, another company was the head company of the group.

719-280 Assumptions about the test company failing to meet the conditions in section 165-12

Assume that the test company fails to meet the conditions in section 165-12 at the time an event described in subsection (2), (3) or (4) happens after the start of the ownership test period for the focal company in relation to:

the MEC group whose *head company was the focal company; or

the potential MEC group whose membership was the same as the membership of that MEC group.

Note: If the test company is assumed to fail to meet the conditions in section 165-12 for the claim year and the loss, the focal company is taken (under section 719-260) to have failed to meet those conditions.

One event is the potential MEC group ceasing to exist.

Another event is something happening that meets these conditions:

the thing happens at a time in relation to *membership interests in one or more of these entities:

a company that was just before that time a *member of the MEC group and an eligible tier-1 company of the top company for the MEC group;

an entity interposed between a company described in subparagraph (i) and the company that was the top company for the group just before that time;

the thing does not cause the potential MEC group to cease to exist but does cause a change in the identity of the top company for the potential MEC group.

Another event is the MEC group ceasing to exist because there ceases to be a *provisional head company of the group.

Other causes of failure to meet conditions in section 165-12

To avoid doubt, this section does not limit the circumstances in which the test company would have failed to meet the conditions in section 165-12 on the relevant assumptions set out in sections 719-270 and 719-275.

Business continuity test and change of head company

719-285 Business continuity test and change of head company

In working out whether the business continuity test is satisfied by a company that, after the *test time, became the *head company of a MEC group that existed before that time, disregard what happened in relation to the company before it became a *member of the group. Section 719-90 has effect subject to this section.

Bundles of losses and their available fractions

Note 1: The business continuity test is to be applied on the basis that the company’s business at the test time was the business that section 719-90 treats the company as having carried on at that time, except to the extent that section 719-90 attributes to the company its actual history before it became a member of the MEC group.

Note 2: Section 719-90 applies if there is a change in the head company of a MEC group, treating the later head company as if what had happened to the earlier head company had happened to the later head company.

719-300 Application

Sections 719-305, 719-310, 719-315, 719-320 and 719-325 operate only if:

(a) a company (the ongoing head company) is the *head company of a *MEC group for an income year or a period in an income year; and

(b) an event (the application event) described in subsection (2) or (3) happens at a time in the income year in relation to the group.

(2) One application event is that another company (the new tier-1 member) becomes both a *member of the *MEC group and an *eligible tier-1 company of the *top company for the group.

The other application event is that the MEC group comes into existence as a result of a *special conversion event happening to the potential MEC group derived from the ongoing head company.

Note: This application event happens only if the ongoing head company was the head company of a consolidated group just before the special conversion event.

Exceptions for events involving subsidiary members of group

Those sections do not operate because of the event described in subsection (2) if the new tier-1 member was a *subsidiary member of the MEC group immediately before the event.

Those sections do not operate because of the event described in subsection (3) if all the other companies that are described in paragraph 719-40(1)(c) and are involved in the *special conversion event were *subsidiary members of the consolidated group just before the event.

Subsections (4) and (5) have effect despite subsection (1).

719-305 Subdivision 707-C affects utilisation of losses made by ongoing head company while it was head company

(1) For income years ending after the application event happened, Subdivision 707-C affects the *utilisation of all losses (the prior group losses) of any *sort that the ongoing head company made (apart from Subdivision 707-A) for an income year that:

was an income year during which the MEC group was in existence (or, if the application event involved the MEC group coming into existence because of a *special conversion event involving a consolidated group, the consolidated group was in existence); and

was before the income year in which the event happened.

Prior group losses taken to have been transferred at time of event

The ongoing head company is taken to have transferred the prior group losses to itself under Subdivision 707-A at the time of the application event, for the purposes of:

the application of Subdivision 707-C in relation to the *utilisation of the prior group losses and other losses; and

future applications of this section and section 719-310.

Available fraction for bundle of losses

For the purpose of working out the *available fraction for the *bundle of the prior group losses at the time of the transfer, work out the ongoing head company’s *modified market value at the time of the application event as if:

the ongoing head company had become a *member of a consolidated group at the time; and

each *subsidiary member of the MEC group or consolidated group of which the ongoing head company was the *head company just before the event were a part of the ongoing head company (and not a separate entity) at the time of the event; and

each subsidiary member of that group at an earlier time had been a part of the ongoing head company (and not a separate entity) at the earlier time.

Deemed transfer does not affect year of loss

Subdivision 707-C affects the *utilisation as if each of the prior group losses had been made by the ongoing head company for the income year for which the company actually made the loss (and not the income year in which the application event happened). Subsection (2) has effect subject to this subsection.

719-310 Adjustment of available fractions for bundles of losses previously transferred to ongoing head company

This section affects the *available fraction for each bundle of losses that were transferred to the ongoing head company under Subdivision 707-A before the application event.

(2) The available fraction for the *bundle is reduced or maintained just after the event by multiplying it by this fraction:

Note: The market value of the ongoing head company at the time just before or just after the application event will be worked out on the basis that subsidiary members of the MEC group or consolidated group headed by the ongoing head company at that time are part of the ongoing head company, because of section 701-1 (the single entity rule).

(3) Item 3 of the table in subsection 707-320(2) does not apply to affect the *available fraction for the *bundle because of:

the transfer mentioned in section 719-305; or

the transfer (if any) to the ongoing head company of a loss of any *sort under Subdivision 707-A at the time of the application event from an entity that became a *subsidiary member of the MEC group as a result of the event.

719-315 Further adjustment of available fractions for all bundles

If, because of the application event:

there is under section 719-305 an *available fraction for the *bundle of prior group losses; and

section 719-310 affects the available fraction for one or more other bundles of losses;

this section affects the available fraction for every one of those bundles.

(2) The available fraction (as affected by section 719-305 or 719-310) is reduced by multiplying it by this fraction:

For the purposes of working out the fraction in subsection (2), use the value of an available fraction for a *bundle of losses apart from:

this section; and

if item 5 of the table in subsection 707-320(2) would apply as a result of the calculation of the available fraction in accordance with section 719-305 or 719-310—that item.

719-320 Limit on utilising losses other than the prior group losses

This section has effect for the purposes of working out how much of the losses, other than prior group losses, in a *bundle the ongoing head company can *utilise for the income year in which the application event happens.

(2) For the purposes of subsection 707-310(3), the prior group losses are to be treated as if they had not been transferred under Subdivision 707-A, to the extent to which the ongoing head company can *utilise them for the income year because they are treated as being included in a *bundle whose available fraction was 1 from the start of the income year until the time of the application event.

This section is a matter that is relevant for the purposes of paragraph 707-335(3)(f), if section 707-335 applies to the ongoing head company’s *utilisation of the losses in the *bundle for the income year.

Note: That section applies to a company’s utilisation for an income year of losses in a bundle if the losses are transferred under Subdivision 707-A after the start of the year or if the value of the available fraction for the bundle changes during the year while the company is treated as having made the losses because of that Subdivision.

Section 719-305 has effect subject to this section.

719-325 Cancellation of all losses in a bundle

The ongoing head company:

may choose to cancel all the losses in the *bundle of prior group losses; and

may choose to cancel all the losses in a bundle of losses to which section 719-310 applies.

If the ongoing head company chooses to cancel all the losses in a *bundle, subsections (3), (4), (5), (6) and (7) operate.

The ongoing head company cannot *utilise for the income year in which the application event happened more of the losses than it would have been able to utilise under Subdivision 707-C assuming:

if the losses are prior group losses:

the losses were in a *bundle for the income year; and

the *available fraction for the bundle were 1 for the period from the start of the income year until the event happened; and

in any case—the available fraction for the bundle including the losses were 0 from the time of the event until the end of the income year.

Note: Section 707-335 is relevant to working out how much of the losses could be utilised, because the value of the available fraction for the bundle changes during the period described in that section.

The ongoing head company cannot:

transfer the losses to another company under Division 170 for an income year ending after the application event; or

transfer the losses to another company under Subdivision 707-A after the application event.

This subsection has effect despite subsection (3).

Disregard the existence of the *bundle at and after the time of the application event for the purposes of working out the *available fraction for another bundle of losses.

The losses cannot be *utilised by any entity for an income year starting after the application event.

The choice cannot be revoked.

Subdivision 719-H — Imputation issues

719-425 Guide to Subdivision 719-H

This Subdivision deals with some imputation issues in relation to MEC groups.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

719-430 Transfer of franking account balance on cessation event

719-435 Distributions by subsidiary members of MEC group taken to be distributions by head company

Operative provisions

719-430 Transfer of franking account balance on cessation event

This section operates if:

(a) a *cessation event happens to the *provisional head company of a *MEC group (the former head company); and

(b) another company (the new head company) is appointed as the provisional head company of the group under subsection 719-60(3).

When the new head company is appointed:

the franking account of the former head company ceases to operate; and

the new head company has a franking account; and

any franking surplus or franking deficit in the franking account of the former head company just before the *cessation event happened becomes that of the new head company.

719-435 Distributions by subsidiary members of MEC group taken to be distributions by head company

Part 3-6 operates as if a frankable distribution made by an eligible tier-1 company that:

is a member of a MEC group; and

is not the *provisional head company of the group;

had been made by the provisional head company of the group to a *member of the provisional head company.

Note: Part 3-6 deals with imputation.

(2) Part 3-6 operates as if a *frankable distribution made by a *subsidiary member of a *MEC group (the foreign-held subsidiary) that is not an *eligible tier-1 company were a frankable distribution made by the *head company of the group to a *member of the head company if:

(a) the foreign-held subsidiary meets the set of requirements in section 703-45, section 701C-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 or section 701C-15 of that Act; and

the frankable distribution is made to a foreign resident.

Subdivision 719-I — Bad debts

Guide to Subdivision 719-I

719-450 What this Subdivision is about

The head company of a MEC group is taken to meet the conditions in section 165-123 (about maintaining the same ownership in an ownership test period to be able to deduct a bad debt) if and only if the top company for the group at the start of the period meets those conditions for the period.

Table of sections

Maintaining the same ownership to be able to deduct bad debt

719-455 Special test for deducting a bad debt because a company maintains the same owners

719-460 Assumptions about nothing happening to affect direct and indirect ownership of the test company

719-465 Assumptions about the test company failing to meet the conditions in section 165-123

Maintaining the same ownership to be able to deduct bad debt

719-455 Special test for deducting a bad debt because a company maintains the same owners

This section has effect for the purposes of working out whether the *head company of a MEC group:

can deduct a debt it writes off as bad; or

could have deducted a debt as described in subsection 709-215(2).

Note: Whether the head company of the MEC group could have deducted a debt as described in subsection 709-215(2) is relevant under Subdivision 709-D to:

the question whether the head company can deduct the debt it writes off as bad, or the swap loss it makes in extinguishing the debt as part of a debt/equity swap, after the debt was owed to an entity while the entity was not a member of the MEC group; and

the question whether an entity that was owed the debt after it was owed to the head company can deduct the amount of the debt the entity writes off as bad or the swap loss the entity makes in extinguishing the debt as part of a debt/equity swap.

(2) The *head company is taken to meet the conditions in section 165-123 (about the company maintaining the same owners) for the *ownership test period if and only if the company (the test company) that was the *top company for the *MEC group at the start of the same period would have met those conditions for that period on the assumptions in the following sections (if applicable):

section 719-460 (which is about assuming that nothing happened in relation to certain things that would affect whether the test company would meet those conditions);

section 719-465 (which is about assuming that the test company would have failed to meet those conditions in certain circumstances).

Note 1: Even though subsection (2) of this section raises the issue whether the test company meets the conditions in section 165-123, that is determined by reference to:

the ownership test period for the head company of the MEC group; and

the debt owed to the head company.

Note 2: If this section is applying for the purposes of working out whether the head company could have deducted a debt as described in subsection 709-215(2), section 709-215 affects what is the ownership test period for the purposes of section 165-123 as it applies for those purposes.

Head company’s failure to meet conditions in section 165-123

The *head company is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-123 only at:

the first time the test company would have failed to meet the condition on the relevant assumptions mentioned in subsection (2); or

the *test time described in section 166-40 for the test company, if:

Division 166 is relevant to working out whether the test company met the conditions in section 165-123 on the relevant assumption mentioned in paragraph (2)(a); and

the test company is not assumed under section 719-465 to fail to meet the condition before the test time.

Note 1: If the head company is taken to fail to meet a condition in section 165-123, the head company will not be able to deduct the debt unless that company meets the condition in section 165-126 by satisfying the business continuity test. That test applies to the head company (and not the test company).

Note 2: Section 719-285 may affect whether the head company satisfies the business continuity test if there has been a change in the identity of the head company of the group during the ownership test period.

Business continuity test for head company under Division 166

If section 166-40 directly affects whether the *head company can deduct the debt, the subsection of that section that requires the business continuity test to be applied to a particular business operates as if it required that test to be applied to the business the head company carried on just before the time described in subsection (3) of this section.

Note: Section 166-40 has an indirect effect on whether the head company can deduct the debt so far as that section affects whether the test company meets the conditions in section 165-123 and therefore whether the head company is taken to meet those conditions.

719-460 Assumptions about nothing happening to affect direct and indirect ownership of the test company

This section sets out an assumption that must be made whenever there is a change in the identity of the top company for the MEC group during the ownership test period.

Assume that after the change nothing happens in relation to *membership interests or voting power in the following entities that would affect whether the test company would meet the conditions in section 165-123:

the company that was the top company for the MEC group before the change;

an entity (if any) that at the time of the change was interposed between:

the company that was the top company for the MEC group before the change; and

the company that became the top company for the MEC group as part of the change.

719-465 Assumptions about the test company failing to meet the conditions in section 165-123

Assume that the test company fails to meet the conditions in section 165-123 at the time an event described in subsection (2), (3) or (4) happens after the start of the ownership test period in relation to:

the MEC group; or

the potential MEC group whose membership was the same as the membership of the MEC group.

Note: If the test company is assumed to fail to meet the conditions in section 165-123, the head company of the MEC group is taken (under section 719-455) to have failed to meet those conditions.

One event is the potential MEC group ceasing to exist.

Another event is something happening that meets these conditions:

the thing happens at a time in relation to *membership interests in one or more of these entities:

a company that was just before that time a *member of the MEC group and an eligible tier-1 company of the top company for the MEC group;

an entity interposed between a company described in subparagraph (i) and the company that was the top company for the group just before that time;

the thing does not cause the potential MEC group to cease to exist but does cause a change in the identity of the top company for the potential MEC group.

Another event is the MEC group ceasing to exist because there ceases to be a *provisional head company of the group.

Other causes of failure to meet conditions in section 165-123

To avoid doubt, this section does not limit the circumstances in which the test company would have failed to meet the conditions in section 165-123.

Subdivision 719-J — MEC group cost setting rules: leaving cases

Guide to Subdivision 719-J

719-500 What this Subdivision is about

When an entity ceases to be a subsidiary member of a MEC group, the tax cost setting amount for the group’s membership interests in the entity is worked out in accordance with Division 711 as modified by this Division.

Table of sections

719-505 Application and object of this Subdivision

719-510 Modified operation of paragraphs 711-15(1)(b) and (c)

719-505 Application and object of this Subdivision

Application

This Subdivision applies if the old group mentioned in subsection 711-5(1) is a MEC group.

Object

The object of this Subdivision is to modify the rules in Division 711 so that they take account of the special characteristics of *MEC groups.

719-510 Modified operation of paragraphs 711-15(1)(b) and (c)

This section applies if the leaving entity mentioned in subsection 711-15(1) is a *subsidiary member of the old group that is an eligible tier-1 company.

Paragraphs 711-15(1)(b) and (c) apply as if the membership interests mentioned in those paragraphs included *pooled interests in the eligible tier-1 company.

Note: This subsection means that, in working out tax cost setting amounts for internal interests in the eligible tier-1 company, section 711-15 will allocate part of the old group’s allocable cost amount for the eligible tier-1 company to the pooled interests in the company. However, the tax cost of the pooled interests is not set according to section 711-15. Subdivision 719-K contains rules that set the cost of the pooled interests.

Subdivision 719-K — MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases

Guide to Subdivision 719-K

719-550 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision contains cost setting rules for membership interests in eligible tier-1 companies that are members of a MEC group, where those interests are not held by members of the group.

Table of sections

719-555 Application and object of this Subdivision

719-560 Pooled interests

719-565 Setting cost of reset interests

719-570 Cost setting amount

719-555 Application and object of this Subdivision

Application

This Subdivision applies if:

(a) one or more entities hold *pooled interests (the reset interests) in *eligible tier-1 companies that are members of a *MEC group, just before a particular time (the trigger time); and

(b) at the trigger time, either or both of these things happen to one or more of those eligible tier-1 companies (the trigger companies):

the company ceases to be a member of the group;

a CGT event happens in relation to one or more reset interests in the company; and

the *market value of the reset interests as a whole (including the market value of synergies arising from the combination of those interests) just before the trigger time is more than nil.

Object

The object of this Subdivision is to set the cost of all reset interests:

first, by allocating to each reset interest held in a trigger company so much of the total cost of all reset interests held in members of the group that the *market value of the interest bears to the group’s market value; and

then, by allocating the remainder of that total cost to all reset interests held in other *eligible tier-1 companies, by dividing that remainder by the number of those interests.

719-560 Pooled interests

(1) A pooled interest in an *eligible tier-1 company that is a member of a *MEC group is a *membership interest in the eligible tier-1 company that is held by an entity that is not a member of the group.

Note: A membership interest in the head company of a MEC group can be a pooled interest.

(2) Despite subsection (1), a *membership interest is not a pooled interest if it is:

a *share that is disregarded under subsection 719-30(2); or

(b) held by an entity only as a nominee of one or more other entities each of which is a member of the group.

719-565 Setting cost of reset interests

CGT provisions—cost base

(1) If Part 3.1 or 3.3 is to apply in relation to a reset interest, the Part applies as if the interest’s *cost base were increased or reduced so that the cost base just before the trigger time equals the cost setting amount worked out under section 719-570.

CGT provisions—reduced cost base

If Part 3.1 or 3.3 is to apply in relation to a reset interest, the Part applies as if the interest’s *reduced cost base were increased or reduced so that the reduced cost base just before the trigger time equals the cost setting amount worked out under section 719-570.

Other provisions

(3) If a provision of this Act (other than Part 3.1 or 3.3) is to apply in relation to a reset interest, the provision applies as if the interest’s cost just before the trigger time were equal to the cost setting amount worked out under section 719-570.

719-570 Cost setting amount

Reset interests held in trigger companies—cost setting amount for cost base etc.

Work out the cost setting amount for the purposes of subsections 719-565(1) and (3) for a reset interest in a trigger company using the formula:

where:

market value of the group is:

if every eligible tier-1 company that is a member of the group just before the trigger time is a trigger company—the sum of the *market value (just before the trigger time) of all reset interests in each of those companies; or

otherwise—the amount mentioned in paragraph 719-555(1)(c).

market value of the reset interest is the *market value (just before the trigger time) of all reset interests in that trigger company, in the same class as the interest, divided by the number of reset interests in that company in that class.

pooled cost amount is the sum of the *cost bases (just before the trigger time) of all reset interests.

Reset interests held in other eligible tier-1 companies—cost setting amount for cost base etc.

(2) Work out the cost setting amount for the purposes of subsections 719-565(1) and (3) for a reset interest that is not in a trigger company, using the formula:

where:

amount allocated to trigger company interests is the sum of all cost setting amounts worked out under subsection (1) for the reset interests covered by that subsection.

number of non-trigger company interests is the number of reset interests, other than those covered by subsection (1).

pooled cost amount has the same meaning as in subsection (1).

Cost setting amount for reduced cost base

Work out the cost setting amount for the purposes of subsection 719-565(2) for a reset interest by applying subsections (1) and (2) of this section in relation to the interest, as if every reference in those subsections to *cost base were a reference to *reduced cost base.

Subdivision 719-T — Interactions between this Part and other areas of the income tax law: special rules for MEC groups

Table of sections

How Subdivision 165-CC applies to MEC groups

719-700 Changeover times under section 165-115C or 165-115D

719-705 Additional changeover times for head company of MEC group

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to MEC groups

719-720 Alteration times under section 165-115L or 165-115M

719-725 Additional alteration times for head company of MEC group

719-730 Some alteration times only affect interests in top company

719-735 Some alteration times affect only pooled interests

719-740 Head company does not have relevant equity or debt interest in a loss company if widely held top company does not have such an interest

How indirect value shifting rules apply to a MEC group

719-755 Effect on MEC group cost setting rules if head company is losing entity or gaining entity for indirect value shift

Cancelling loss on realisation event for direct or indirect interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group

719-775 Cancellation of loss

719-780 Exception for pooled interests in eligible tier-1 companies

719-785 Exception for interests in top company

719-790 Exception for interests in entity leaving MEC group

719-795 Exception if loss attributable to certain matters

How Subdivision 165-CC applies to MEC groups

719-700 Changeover times under section 165-115C or 165-115D

(1) This section has effect for the purposes of determining whether a time (the test time) is a *changeover time under section 165-115C (about changes in ownership) or 165-115D (about changes in control) in respect of the *head company of a *MEC group.

Modified meaning of reference time

(2) The reference time is:

if no *changeover time has occurred in respect of the head company since the group came into existence and before the test time—when the group came into existence; or

otherwise—the time just after the last such changeover time.

Subsection (2) of this section has effect despite subsection 165-115A(2A).

Assumptions to make

Assume that, while the MEC group exists:

the top company for the group holds and beneficially owns all the *membership interests in the *head company (instead of whoever actually does); and

those membership interests remain the same; and

the top company directly controls the voting power in the head company.

719-705 Additional changeover times for head company of MEC group

(1) The time when a *potential MEC group ceases to exist is a changeover time in respect of the *head company of a *MEC group if, just before that time, the potential MEC group’s membership was the same as the membership of the MEC group.

Note: The changeover times in subsections (1), (2) and (3) are based on the events described in subsections 719-280(2), (3) and (4), each of which causes the test company referred to in section 719-280 to be assumed to fail the continuity of ownership test in section 165-12.

If something:

happens at a time in relation to *membership interests in one or more of these entities:

a company that was just before that time a *member of a MEC group and an eligible tier-1 company of the top company for the MEC group;

an entity interposed between a company described in subparagraph (i) and the company that was the top company for the group just before that time; and

does not cause the potential MEC group whose membership is the same as the membership of the MEC group to cease to exist, but does cause a change in the identity of the top company for the potential MEC group;

that time is a changeover time in respect of the *head company of the *MEC group.

(3) The time when a *MEC group ceases to exist because there ceases to be a *provisional head company of the group is a changeover time in respect of the *head company of the *MEC group.

How Subdivision 165-CD applies to MEC groups

719-720 Alteration times under section 165-115L or 165-115M

(1) This section has effect for the purposes of determining whether a time (the test time) is an *alteration time under section 165-115L (about alterations in ownership) or 165-115M (about alterations in control) in respect of the *head company of a *MEC group.

Modified meaning of reference time

(2) The reference time is:

if no *alteration time has occurred in respect of the head company since the group came into existence and before the test time—when the group came into existence; or

otherwise—the time just after the last such alteration time.

In applying subsection (2), disregard an *alteration time arising under subsection 719-725(4).

Subsection (2) of this section has effect despite subsections 165-115L(2) and 165-115M(2).

Assumptions to make

Assume that, while the MEC group exists:

the top company for the group holds and beneficially owns all the *membership interests in the *head company (instead of whoever actually does); and

those membership interests remain the same; and

the top company directly controls the voting power in the head company.

719-725 Additional alteration times for head company of MEC group

Additional alteration times based on section 719-280

(1) The time when a *potential MEC group ceases to exist is an alteration time in respect of the *head company of a *MEC group if, just before that time, the potential MEC group’s membership was the same as the membership of the MEC group.

Note: The alteration times in subsections (1), (2) and (3) are based on the events described in subsections 719-280(2), (3) and (4), each of which causes the test company referred to in section 719-280 to be assumed to fail the continuity of ownership test in section 165-12.

If something:

happens at a time in relation to *membership interests in one or more of these entities:

a company that was just before that time a *member of a MEC group and an eligible tier-1 company of the top company for the MEC group;

an entity interposed between a company described in subparagraph (i) and the company that was the top company for the group just before that time; and

does not cause the potential MEC group whose membership is the same as the membership of the MEC group to cease to exist, but does cause a change in the identity of the top company for the potential MEC group;

that time is an alteration time in respect of the *head company of the *MEC group.

(3) The time when a *MEC group ceases to exist because there ceases to be a *provisional head company of the group is an alteration time in respect of the *head company of the *MEC group.

Additional alteration times based on Subdivision 719-K

(4) If Subdivision 719-K (MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases) applies, the time just before the trigger time referred to in paragraph 719-555(1)(a) is an alteration time in respect of the *head company of the *MEC group.

719-730 Some alteration times only affect interests in top company

This section applies if an *alteration time (except one arising under subsection 719-725(4)) happens for the *head company of a MEC group.

(2) Sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB apply, in relation to the alteration time, to an interest or debt that is, or is part of, a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest that an entity has in the *head company just before the *alteration time, only if the interest or debt is:

an equity or loan interest in the top company for the MEC group; or

an indirect equity or loan interest in the top company.

Note: Sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB are about the consequences that an alteration time for a loss company has for relevant equity interests and relevant debt interests in the company.

In determining what is a relevant equity interest or relevant debt interest that an entity has in the *head company just before the *alteration time, make the assumptions in subsection 719-720(5).

719-735 Some alteration times affect only pooled interests

Sections 165-115ZA and 165-115ZB do not apply in relation to an *alteration time that happens for the *head company of a MEC group because of subsection 719-725(4) (trigger time for MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases).

Instead, Subdivision 719-K applies to the MEC group, in relation to the trigger time, on the basis that:

what would, apart from this section, be the pooled cost amount for the purposes of the formulas in subsections 719-570(1) and (2) is reduced by the amount of the *head company’s overall loss under section 165-115R or 165-115S at that alteration time; but

(b) paragraph (a) of this subsection only affects the application of those formulas because of subsection 719-570(3) (to work out the *reduced cost base of a *membership interest).

719-740 Head company does not have relevant equity or debt interest in a loss company if widely held top company does not have such an interest

(1) For the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD, treat the *head company of a *MEC group as not having a relevant equity interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:

the top company of the group is a *widely held company at that time; and

because of subsections 165-115X(2A), (2B) and (2C), the top company does not have a relevant equity interest under section 165-115X in the loss company at that time.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), disregard the operation of subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) in determining whether subsection 165-115X(2C) has the effect that the top company has the relevant equity interest mentioned in that paragraph.

(3) For the purposes of Subdivision 165-CD, treat the *head company of a *MEC group as not having a relevant debt interest in a *loss company at a particular time if:

the top company of the group is a *widely held company at that time; and

because of subsections 165-115Y(3A), (3B) and (3C), the top company does not have a relevant debt interest under section 165-115Y in the loss company at that time.

How indirect value shifting rules apply to a MEC group

719-755 Effect on MEC group cost setting rules if head company is losing entity or gaining entity for indirect value shift

This section has effect for the purposes of working out the consequences (if any) of an indirect value shift if the *losing entity or *gaining entity is the *head company of a MEC group. (Subsection (3) has effect in addition to section 727-455.)

An equity or loan interest can be an *affected interest in the *head company only if it is:

an equity or loan interest in the top company for the MEC group; or

an indirect equity or loan interest in the top company.

Subdivision 719-K (MEC group cost setting rules: pooling cases) applies to the MEC group, in relation to the first time referred to in that Subdivision as a trigger time that happens at or after the IVS time, on the basis that:

what would, apart from this section, be the pooled cost amount for the purposes of the formulas in subsections 719-570(1) and (2) is:

if the *head company is the *losing entity—reduced; or

if the head company is the gaining entity—increased;

by the amount of the indirect value shift; and

paragraph (a) of this subsection also affects the application of those formulas because of subsection 719-570(3) (to work out the *reduced cost base of a *membership interest).

Cancelling loss on realisation event for direct or indirect interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group

719-775 Cancellation of loss

(1) This section reduces to nil a loss that would otherwise be *realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event that happens to an *equity or loan interest (the realised interest) in an entity (the first entity) when it is owned by another entity (the owner), if the conditions in subsections (2) and (4) are met.

(2) The first condition is that, at some time during the period (the ownership period) when the owner owned the realised interest:

(a) the first entity was a *subsidiary member of a *MEC group (except an *eligible tier-1 company), and the owner was not a *member of the group; or

the realised interest was an *external indirect equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group (except an eligible tier-1 company); or

the realised interest was an equity or loan interest in an entity that, at that time:

owned an equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group (except an eligible tier-1 company); and

(ii) was not a member of the group; or

the realised interest was an equity or loan interest in an entity that owned at that time an external indirect equity or loan interest in a subsidiary member of a MEC group (except an eligible tier-1 company); or

the realised interest was an equity or loan interest, or an indirect equity or loan interest, in an eligible tier-1 company that was a member of a MEC group at that time.

(3) An *equity or loan interest in an entity (the test entity) is an external indirect equity or loan interest in a *subsidiary member of a *MEC group if, and only if, neither the owner of the interest nor the test entity is a member of the group and:

the test entity owns an equity or loan interest in the subsidiary member; or

the test entity owns an equity or loan interest that is an external indirect equity or loan interest in the subsidiary member because of one or more other applications of this subsection.

The second condition is that, at the same or a different time during the ownership period:

the owner was, or *controlled (for value shifting purposes), the *head company of a MEC group because of which the first condition is satisfied; or

the owner was an associate of an entity that, at the same or a different time during the ownership period, was, or controlled (for value shifting purposes), the head company of such a MEC group.

719-780 Exception for pooled interests in eligible tier-1 companies

The first condition in section 719-775 cannot be satisfied, because of a MEC group, at a time when the realised interest was a *pooled interest in an eligible tier-1 company that is a member of the group.

719-785 Exception for interests in top company

The first condition in section 719-775 cannot be satisfied, because of a MEC group, at a time when:

the first entity was the top company for the MEC group; or

the realised interest was an indirect equity or loan interest in the top company for the MEC group.

719-790 Exception for interests in entity leaving MEC group

Membership interests in leaving entity

If:

the realised interest is a *membership interest; and

during the ownership period the first entity ceased to be a *subsidiary member of a MEC group;

the first condition in section 719-775 cannot be satisfied, because of that MEC group, at a time when the first entity was a member of the group, unless the interest needed to be disregarded under section 719-30 (about employee shares) in order for the first entity to be a member of the group at that time.

Liabilities owed by leaving entity

If the realised interest:

consists of a liability owed by the first entity to the owner; and

became an asset of the owner because subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) ceased to apply to the first entity when it ceased to be a *subsidiary member of a MEC group;

the first condition in section 719-775 cannot be satisfied, because of that MEC group, at a time when the first entity was a member of the group.

719-795 Exception if loss attributable to certain matters

The loss is not reduced if all of it can be shown to be attributable to things other than these:

(a) something that would be reflected in what would, apart from this Part, be an overall loss under section 165-115R or 165-115S, of a *member of a *MEC group (an excluded group) because of which the first condition in section 719-775 is satisfied, at an *alteration time for that member;

an indirect value shift for which, apart from this Part, a member of an excluded group would be the *losing entity or the *gaining entity.

If only part of the loss can be shown to be attributable to things other than the ones listed in subsection (1), the loss is reduced to the amount of that part.

Division 721 — Liability for payment of tax where head company fails to pay on time

Guide to Division 721

721-1 What this Division is about

If the head company of a consolidated group fails to meet an income tax related liability by the time it becomes due and payable, entities that were subsidiary members of the group during the period to which the liability relates can also be responsible for all or part of the liability.

Table of sections

Object

721-5 Object of this Division

When this Division operates

721-10 When this Division operates

Joint and several liability of contributing member

721-15 Head company and contributing members jointly and severally liable to pay group liability

721-17 Notice of joint and several liability for general interest charge

721-20 Limit on liability where group first comes into existence

Tax sharing agreements

721-25 When a group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement

721-30 TSA contributing members liable for contribution amounts

721-32 Notice of general interest charge liability under TSA

721-35 When a TSA contributing member has left the group clear of the group liability

721-40 TSA liability and group liability are linked

Object

721-5 Object of this Division

The object of this Division is to secure the payment of certain tax liabilities of the *head company of a *consolidated group where the head company fails to meet all of those liabilities by the time they become due and payable. Accordingly:

(a) if a relevant liability is not covered by a tax sharing agreement—this Division provides for a process to make certain entities that were *subsidiary members of the group for at least part of the period to which each tax liability relates jointly and severally liable with the head company for those liabilities; or

if a relevant liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement—this Division:

provides for a process to make each of those entities liable for the amount determined under the agreement in relation to the liability; but

exempts an entity from a liability determined under the agreement if it leaves the group in certain circumstances.

When this Division operates

721-10 When this Division operates

This Division operates if:

(a) a *tax-related liability mentioned in subsection (2) (a group liability) of the *head company of a *consolidated group was not paid or otherwise discharged in full by the time the liability became due and payable (the head company’s due time); and

(b) one or more entities (the contributing members) were *subsidiary members of the group for at least part of the period to which the group liability relates.

Note: This Division operates even if some or all of the contributing members were no longer members of the group at the head company’s due time.

The following table lists the *tax-related liabilities for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a) and the periods to which each of those liabilities relate:

Note: The other amounts referred to in item 3 of the table are interest payable under section 102AAM of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (distributions from certain non-resident trust estates).

Item 30 of the table in subsection (2) is taken not to include a PAYG instalment of the *head company if the Commissioner gave the head company its *initial head company instalment rate after the end of the instalment quarter of the head company to which the PAYG instalment relates.

Item 32 of the table in subsection (2) is taken not to include a PAYG instalment of the *head company if the Commissioner gave the head company its *initial head company instalment rate on or after the start of the instalment month of the head company to which the PAYG instalment relates.

Joint and several liability of contributing member

721-15 Head company and contributing members jointly and severally liable to pay group liability

The following are jointly and severally liable to pay the group liability:

the *head company; and

each contributing member (other than a contributing member excluded by subsection (2)).

Note: A group liability is a tax-related liability in relation to the head company and each contributing member. For rights of contribution in respect of such a liability, see subsection 265-45(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), a contributing member is excluded by this subsection if it is, at the head company’s due time, prohibited according to the effect of an Australian law from entering into any arrangement under which the entity becomes subject to a liability referred to in subsection (1).

Subsection (1) does not operate if the group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement (see section 721-25).

Subsection (1) is taken never to have made a particular contributing member jointly and severally liable to pay the group liability if:

(a) the group liability was taken never to have been covered by the tax sharing agreement because of subsection 721-25(3); and

Note: Subsection 721-25(3) provides for this to happen if the Commissioner did not receive a copy of the tax sharing agreement within 14 days after the Commissioner gave the head company the notice under that subsection.

the Commissioner gave the contributing member written notice of the group liability under subsection (5); and

apart from the operation of subsection 721-25(3), the contributing member left the group clear of the group liability in accordance with section 721-35; and

the contributing member gave the Commissioner a copy of the tax sharing agreement (that is, the relevant agreement mentioned in paragraph 721-25(1)(a)) in the approved form; and

if the Commissioner gave the contributing member written notice of the group liability under subsection (5) (ignoring subsection 721-17(2))—the contributing member gave that copy of the agreement to the Commissioner within 14 days after that notice was given.

The joint and several liability of the contributing members under subsection (1) arises just after the *head company’s due time.

The joint and several liability of a particular contributing member under subsection (1) becomes due and payable by the member 14 days after the Commissioner gives the member written notice under this subsection of the liability.

Note 1: If the Commissioner gives this notice to one contributing member, and gives this notice to another contributing member on another day, the 2 contributing members will have different due and payable dates for the same liability.

Note 2: This section does not affect the time at which the group liability arose for, or became due and payable by, the head company.

Despite subsection (5), if the group liability is general interest charge for a day, the joint and several liability of a particular contributing member under subsection (1) becomes due and payable by the member at the end of the day on which the Commissioner gives the member written notice of the liability under subsection (5).

(6) To the extent that the contributing members’ liability under subsection (1) is not a liability for income tax, that liability is to be treated as a liability for income tax for the purposes of section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

721-17 Notice of joint and several liability for general interest charge

This section operates if:

(a) the group liability is *general interest charge for a day in relation to another liability (the primary liability); and

the Commissioner gives a particular contributing member written notice under subsection 721-15(5) of the group liability; and

general interest charge arises for a subsequent day in relation to the primary liability; and

the general interest charge for the subsequent day has not been paid or otherwise discharged in full by the time it became due and payable.

The Commissioner is taken to have given the contributing member written notice under subsection 721-15(5) of the general interest charge for the subsequent day. The notice is taken to have been given on that day.

721-20 Limit on liability where group first comes into existence

This section operates if the group came into existence during the period to which a group liability relates.

The contributing members’ liability under subsection 721-15(1) to pay the group liability is limited to the proportion of the group liability that is reasonably attributable to the period:

beginning at the time the group came into existence; and

ending at the time when the period to which the group liability relates ends.

Tax sharing agreements

721-25 When a group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement

For the purposes of this Division, a group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement if, just before the head company’s due time:

(a) an agreement existed between the *head company of the group and one or more of the contributing members (the TSA contributing members); and

(b) a particular amount (the contribution amount) could be determined under the agreement for each TSA contributing member in relation to the group liability; and

the contribution amounts for each of the TSA contributing members in relation to the group liability, as determined under the agreement, represented a reasonable allocation of the total amount of the group liability among the head company and the TSA contributing members; and

the agreement complied with the requirements (if any) set out in the regulations.

The requirement in paragraph (1)(c) is taken to be satisfied if:

the group liability is a tax-related liability mentioned in item 3 of the table in subsection 721-10(2) in relation to an income year; and

before, at or after the head company’s due time, the *head company of the group became entitled to either or both of the following:

(i) a credit under section 45-30 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for that income year;

a credit under section 45-865 in Schedule 1 to that Act for that income year; and

just before the head company’s due time, the contribution amounts for each of the TSA contributing members in relation to the group liability, as determined under the agreement, represented a reasonable allocation among the head company and the TSA contributing members of the difference between:

the total amount of the group liability; and

the amount of the credit, or the sum of the credits, mentioned in paragraph (b).

(1B) Despite subsections (1)and (1A), the group liability is not covered by a tax sharing agreement for the purposes of this Division if, apart from this subsection, the requirements in those subsections in relation to the group liability would be satisfied in relation to 2 or more agreements.

(2) Despite subsections (1)and (1A), the group liability is not covered by a tax sharing agreement for the purposes of this Division if:

the agreement mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) was entered into as part of an arrangement; and

a purpose of the arrangement was to prejudice the recovery by the Commissioner of some or all of the amount of the group liability or liabilities of that kind.

(3) Despite subsections (1)and (1A), the group liability is taken never to have been covered by a tax sharing agreement for the purposes of this Division if:

the Commissioner gives the *head company of the group written notice under this subsection (whether before, at or after the head company’s due time) in relation to the group liability; and

the notice requires the head company to give the Commissioner a copy of the agreement mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) in the approved form within 14 days after the notice is given; and

the Commissioner does not receive a copy of the agreement by the time required.

Note: If this subsection operates, joint and several liability can arise under section 721-15 in relation to the group liability.

721-30 TSA contributing members liable for contribution amounts

This section operates if a group liability is covered by a tax sharing agreement.

Each TSA contributing member is liable to pay to the Commonwealth an amount equal to the contribution amount for that member in relation to the group liability.

Despite subsection (2), a TSA contributing member is not liable under that subsection if the member left the group clear of the group liability (see section 721-35).

The liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection (2) arises just after the *head company’s due time.

The liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection (2) becomes due and payable by the member 14 days after the Commissioner gives the member written notice under this subsection of the liability.

Note: This section does not affect the time at which the group liability arose for, or became due and payable by, the head company.

Despite subsection (5), if the group liability is general interest charge for a day, the liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection (2) becomes due and payable by the member at the end of the day on which the Commissioner gives the member written notice of the liability under subsection (5).

(6) The liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection (2) is to be treated as a liability for income tax for the purposes of section 254 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

721-32 Notice of general interest charge liability under TSA

This section operates if:

(a) the group liability is *general interest charge for a day in relation to another liability (the primary liability); and

the Commissioner gives a particular TSA contributing member written notice under subsection 721-30(5) of its liability under subsection 721-30(2) in relation to the general interest charge for that day; and

general interest charge arises for a subsequent day in relation to the primary liability; and

the TSA contributing member is liable under subsection 721-30(2) for an amount in relation to the general interest charge for the subsequent day.

The Commissioner is taken to have given the TSA contributing member written notice under subsection 721-30(5) of the amount in relation to the general interest charge for the subsequent day. The notice is taken to have been given on that day.

721-35 When a TSA contributing member has left the group clear of the group liability

For the purposes of subsection 721-30(3), a TSA contributing member left the group clear of the group liability if:

(a) the TSA contributing member ceased to be a member of the group at a time (the leaving time) before the *head company’s due time; and

the cessation of membership was not part of an arrangement, a purpose of which was to prejudice the recovery by the Commissioner of some or all of the amount of the group liability or liabilities of that kind; and

before the leaving time, the TSA contributing member had paid to the head company:

if the contribution amount for that member in relation to the group liability could be determined before the leaving time—an amount equal and attributable to that amount; or

otherwise—an amount that is a reasonable estimate of, and attributable to, that amount.

721-40 TSA liability and group liability are linked

(1) The liability of a TSA contributing member under subsection 721-30(2) (the TSA liability) is separate and distinct for all purposes from the group liability to which it relates (the linked group liability). For example, the Commissioner may take proceedings to recover the unpaid amount of the TSA liability, proceedings to recover the unpaid amount of the linked group liability, or both.

Note: The TSA contributing member will not be jointly and severally liable for the linked group liability under section 721-15 (see subsection 721-15(3)). However, the head company of the group remains liable for the linked group liability.

Payment or discharge of TSA liability

If an amount is paid or applied at a particular time towards discharging the TSA liability, the linked group liability is discharged at that time to the extent of the same amount.

Payment or discharge of linked group liability

If:

an amount is paid or applied at a particular time towards discharging the linked group liability; and

as a result, the amount unpaid on the TSA liability at that time (apart from this section) exceeds the amount unpaid on the linked group liability at that time;

the TSA liability is discharged at that time to the extent of the excess.

(4) Subsections (2) and (3) operate in relation to a liability under a judgment (the judgment liability):

if the judgment liability is for the entire amount unpaid on the TSA liability—as if the judgment liability were the TSA liability; and

if the judgment liability is for the entire amount unpaid on the linked group liability—as if the judgment liability were the linked group liability.

This section does not discharge a liability to a greater extent than the amount of the liability.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 3—Specialist liability rules 1

Part 3-95—Value shifting 1

Division 723—Direct value shifting by creating right over non-depreciating asset 1

Subdivision 723-A—Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset 1

723-1 Object 1

723-10 Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset over which right has been created 2

723-15 Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset at the same time as right is created over it 4

723-20 Exceptions 5

723-25 Realisation event that is only a partial realisation 6

723-35 Multiple rights created to take advantage of the $50,000 threshold 7

723-40 Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock or revenue asset 7

723-50 Effects if right created over underlying asset is also trading stock or a revenue asset 7

Subdivision 723-B—Reducing reduced cost base of interests in entity that acquires non-depreciating asset under roll-over 8

723-105 Reduced cost base of interest reduced when interest realised at a loss 8

723-110 Direct and indirect roll-over replacement for underlying asset 10

Division 725—Direct value shifting affecting interests in companies and trusts 11

Guide to Division 725 11

725-1 What this Division is about 11

Subdivision 725-A—Scope of the direct value shifting rules 12

725-45 Main object 12

725-50 When a direct value shift has consequences under this Division 13

725-55 Controlling entity test 13

725-65 Cause of the value shift 13

725-70 Consequences for down interest only if there is a material decrease in its market value 15

725-80 Who is an affected owner of a down interest? 15

725-85 Who is an affected owner of an up interest? 15

725-90 Direct value shift that will be reversed 16

725-95 Direct value shift resulting from reversal 17

Subdivision 725-B—What is a direct value shift 17

725-145 When there is a direct value shift 17

725-150 Issue of equity or loan interests at a discount 18

725-155 Meaning of down interests, decrease time, up interests and increase time 20

725-160 What is the nature of a direct value shift? 20

725-165 If market value decrease or increase is only partly attributable to the scheme 20

Subdivision 725-C—Consequences of a direct value shift 21

General 21

725-205 Consequences depend on character of down interests and up interests 21

725-210 Consequences for down interests depend on pre-shift gains and losses 22

Special cases 22

725-220 Neutral direct value shifts 22

725-225 Issue of bonus shares or units 23

725-230 Off-market buy-backs 24

Subdivision 725-D—Consequences for down interest or up interest as CGT asset 25

725-240 CGT consequences; meaning of adjustable value 25

725-245 Table of taxing events generating a gain for interests as CGT assets 27

725-250 Table of consequences for adjustable values of interests as CGT assets 28

725-255 Multiple CGT consequences for the same down interest or up interest 31

Subdivision 725-E—Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock or a revenue asset 32

725-310 Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock 32

725-315 Adjustable value of trading stock 33

725-320 Consequences for down interest or up interest as a revenue asset 34

725-325 Adjustable value of revenue asset 35

725-335 How to work out those consequences 36

725-340 Multiple trading stock or revenue asset consequences for the same down interest or up interest 39

Subdivision 725-F—Value adjustments and taxed gains 40

725-365 Decreases in adjustable values of down interests (with pre-shift gains), and taxing events generating a gain 40

725-370 Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under certain table items 42

725-375 Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under other table items 43

725-380 Decreases in adjustable value of down interests (with pre-shift losses) 45

Division 727—Indirect value shifting affecting interests in companies and trusts, and arising from non-arm’s length dealings 47

Guide to Division 727 47

727-1 What this Division is about 47

727-5 What is an indirect value shift? 48

727-10 How does this Division deal with indirect value shifts? 50

727-15 When does an indirect value shift have consequences under this Division? 50

727-25 Effect of this Division on realisations at a loss that occur before the nature or extent of an indirect value shift can be fully determined 51

Subdivision 727-A—Scope of the indirect value shifting rules 51

727-95 Main object 51

727-100 When an indirect value shift has consequences under this Division 52

727-105 Ultimate controller test 53

727-110 Common-ownership nexus test (if both losing and gaining entities are closely held) 53

727-125 No consequences if losing entity is a complying superannuation entity etc. 54

Subdivision 727-B—What is an indirect value shift 54

727-150 How to determine whether a scheme results in an indirect value shift 54

727-155 Providing economic benefits 56

727-160 When an economic benefit is provided in connection with a scheme 57

727-165 Preventing double-counting of economic benefits 57

Subdivision 727-C—Exclusions 58

Guide to Subdivision 727-C 58

727-200 What this Subdivision is about 58

General 59

727-215 Amount does not exceed $50,000 59

727-220 Disposal of asset at cost, or at undervalue if full value is not reflected in adjustable values of equity or loan interests in the losing entity 60

Indirect value shifts involving services 61

727-230 Services provided by losing entity to gaining entity for at least their direct cost 61

727-235 Services provided by gaining entity to losing entity for no more than a commercially realistic price 61

727-240 What services certain provisions apply to 63

727-245 How to work out certain amounts for the purposes of sections 727-230 and 727-235 63

Anti-overlap provisions 64

727-250 Distribution by an entity to a member or beneficiary 64

Miscellaneous 66

727-260 Shift down a wholly-owned chain of entities 66

Subdivision 727-D—Working out the market value of economic benefits 66

727-300 What the rules in this Subdivision are for 67

727-315 Transfer, for its adjustable value, of depreciating asset acquired for less than $1,500,000 67

Subdivision 727-E—Key concepts 68

Ultimate controller 69

727-350 Ultimate controller 69

727-355 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a company 69

727-360 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a fixed trust 70

727-365 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a non-fixed trust 71

727-370 Preventing double counting for percentage stake tests 72

727-375 Tests in this Subdivision are exhaustive 72

Common-ownership nexus and ultimate stake of a particular percentage 73

727-400 When 2 entities have a common-ownership nexus within a period 73

727-405 Ultimate stake of a particular percentage in a company 75

727-410 Ultimate stake of a particular percentage in a fixed trust 76

727-415 Rules for tracing 76

Subdivision 727-F—Consequences of an indirect value shift 78

Guide to Subdivision 727-F 78

727-450 What this Subdivision is about 78

Operative provisions 79

727-455 Consequences of the indirect value shift 79

Affected interests 79

727-460 Affected interests in the losing entity 79

727-465 Affected interests in the gaining entity 79

727-470 Exceptions 80

727-520 Equity or loan interest and related terms 81

727-525 Indirect equity or loan interest 82

Affected owners 82

727-530 Who are the affected owners 82

Choices about method to be used 84

727-550 Choosing the adjustable value method 84

727-555 Giving other affected owners information about the choice 86

Subdivision 727-G—The realisation time method 86

727-600 What this Subdivision is about 86

Operative provisions 88

727-610 Consequences of indirect value shift 88

727-615 Reduction of loss on realisation event for affected interest in losing entity 89

727-620 Reduction of gain on realisation event for affected interest in gaining entity 90

727-625 Total gain reductions not to exceed total loss reductions 90

727-630 How cap in section 727-625 applies if affected interest is also trading stock or a revenue asset 91

727-635 Splitting an equity or loan interest 93

727-640 Merging equity or loan interests 93

727-645 Effect of CGT roll-over 94

Further exclusion for certain 95% services indirect value shifts if realisation time method must be used 95

727-700 When 95% services indirect value shift is excluded 95

95% services indirect value shifts that are not excluded 96

727-705 Another provision of the income tax law affects amount related to services by at least $100,000 96

727-710 Ongoing or recent service arrangement reduces value of losing entity by at least $100,000 97

727-715 Service arrangements reduce value of losing entity that is a group service provider by at least $500,000 98

727-720 Abnormal service arrangement reduces value of losing entity that is not a group service provider by at least $500,000 100

727-725 Meaning of predominantly-services indirect value shift 102

Subdivision 727-H—The adjustable value method 102

Guide to Subdivision 727-H 102

727-750 What this Subdivision is about 102

727-755 Consequences of indirect value shift 103

Reductions of adjustable value 104

727-770 Reduction under the adjustable value method 104

727-775 Has there been a disaggregated attributable decrease? 104

727-780 Working out the reduction on a loss-focussed basis 105

Uplifts of adjustable value 106

727-800 Uplift under the attributable increase method 106

727-805 Has there been a disaggregated attributable increase? 109

727-810 Scaling-down formula 110

Consequences of the method for various kinds of assets 111

727-830 CGT assets 111

727-835 Trading stock 112

727-840 Revenue assets 114

Subdivision 727-K—Reduction of loss on equity or loan interests realised before the IVS time 115

727-850 Consequences of scheme under this Subdivision 115

727-855 Presumed indirect value shift 117

727-860 Conditions about the prospective gaining entity 118

727-865 How other provisions of this Division apply to support this Subdivision 119

727-870 Effect of CGT roll-over 121

727-875 Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock or revenue asset 122

Subdivision 727-L—Indirect value shift resulting from a direct value shift 122

727-905 How this Subdivision affects the rest of this Division 122

727-910 Treatment of value shifted under the direct value shift 123

Chapter 4—International aspects of income tax 126

Part 4-5—General 126

Division 764—Source rules 126

Guide to Division 764 126

764-1 What this Division is about 126

Subdivision 764-A—Source rules 126

764-5 Source rule for international tax agreements 126

Division 768—Foreign non-assessable income and gains 128

Subdivision 768-A—Returns on foreign investment 128

Guide to Subdivision 768-A 128

768-1 What this Subdivision is about 128

Foreign equity distributions on participation interests 129

768-5 Foreign equity distributions on participation interests 129

768-7 Foreign equity distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction 130

768-10 Meaning of foreign equity distribution 131

768-15 Participation test—minimum 10% participation 131

Subdivision 768-B—Some items of income that are exempt from income tax 131

768-100 Foreign government officials in Australia 132

768-105 Compensation arising out of Second World War 134

768-110 Foreign residents deriving income from certain activities in Australia’s exclusive economic zone or on or above Australia’s continental shelf 135

Subdivision 768-G—Reduction in capital gains and losses arising from CGT events in relation to certain voting interests in active foreign companies 136

Guide to Subdivision 768-G 136

768-500 What this Subdivision is about 136

Operative provisions 137

768-505 Reducing a capital gain or loss from certain CGT events in relation to certain voting interests 137

Active foreign business asset percentage 138

768-510 Active foreign business asset percentage 138

768-515 Choices to apply market value method or book value method 139

768-520 Market value method—choice made under subsection 768-515(1) 140

768-525 Book value method—choice made under subsection 768-515(2) 142

768-530 Active foreign business asset percentage—modifications for foreign life insurance companies and foreign general insurance companies 146

768-533 Foreign company that is a FIF using CFC calculation method—treatment as AFI subsidiary under this Subdivision 149

768-535 Modified rules for foreign wholly-owned groups 149

Types of assets of a foreign company 151

768-540 Active foreign business assets of a foreign company 151

768-545 Assets included in the total assets of a foreign company 153

Voting percentages in a company 155

768-550 Direct voting percentage in a company 155

768-555 Indirect voting percentage in a company 155

768-560 Total voting percentage in a company 156

Subdivision 768-R—Temporary residents 156

Guide to Subdivision 768-R 156

768-900 What this Subdivision is about 156

Operative provisions 157

768-905 Objects 157

768-910 Income derived by temporary resident 157

768-915 Certain capital gains and capital losses of temporary resident to be disregarded 159

768-950 Individual becoming an Australian resident 159

768-955 Temporary resident who ceases to be temporary resident but remains an Australian resident 159

768-960 Temporary resident not attributable taxpayer for purposes of controlled foreign companies rules 160

768-970 Modification of rules for accruals system of taxation of certain non-resident trust estates 160

768-980 Interest paid by temporary resident 160

Division 770—Foreign income tax offsets 162

Guide to Division 770 162

770-1 What this Division is about 162

770-5 Object 162

Subdivision 770-A—Entitlement rules for foreign income tax offsets 163

Basic entitlement rule for foreign income tax offset 163

770-10 Entitlement to foreign income tax offset 163

770-15 Meaning of foreign income tax, credit absorption tax and unitary tax 165

Subdivision 770-B—Amount of foreign income tax offset 166

Guide to Subdivision 770-B 166

770-65 What this Subdivision is about 166

Operative provisions 167

770-70 Amount of foreign income tax offset 167

770-75 Foreign income tax offset limit 167

770-80 Increase in offset limit for tax paid on amounts to which section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 apply 169

Subdivision 770-C—Rules about payment of foreign income tax 169

Rules about when foreign tax is paid 169

770-130 When foreign income tax is considered paid—taxes paid by someone else 169

770-135 Foreign income tax paid by CFCs on attributed amounts 170

Rules about when foreign tax is considered not paid 173

770-140 When foreign income tax is considered not paid—anti-avoidance rule 173

770-145 When foreign income tax is considered not paid—foreign DMT tax reduced by amount of benefit 173

770-150 Meaning of foreign DMT tax 174

Subdivision 770-D—Administration 175

770-190 Amendment of assessments 175

Division 775—Foreign currency gains and losses 177

Guide to Division 775 177

775-5 What this Division is about 177

Subdivision 775-A—Objects of this Division 178

775-10 Objects of this Division 178

Subdivision 775-B—Realisation of forex gains or losses 179

775-15 Forex realisation gains are assessable 180

775-20 Certain forex realisation gains are exempt income 182

775-25 Certain forex realisation gains are non-assessable non-exempt income 182

775-27 Certain forex realisation gains are non-assessable non-exempt income 182

775-30 Forex realisation losses are deductible 182

775-35 Certain forex realisation losses are disregarded 184

775-40 Disposal of foreign currency or right to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 1 184

775-45 Ceasing to have a right to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 2 186

775-50 Ceasing to have an obligation to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 3 190

775-55 Ceasing to have an obligation to pay foreign currency—forex realisation event 4 192

775-60 Ceasing to have a right to pay foreign currency—forex realisation event 5 198

775-65 Only one forex realisation event to be counted 200

775-70 Tax consequences of certain short-term forex realisation gains 202

775-75 Tax consequences of certain short-term forex realisation losses 207

775-80 You may choose not to have sections 775-70 and 775-75 apply to you 210

775-85 Forex cost base of a right to receive foreign currency 211

775-90 Forex entitlement base of a right to pay foreign currency 211

775-95 Proceeds of assuming an obligation to pay foreign currency 212

775-100 Net costs of assuming an obligation to receive foreign currency 213

775-105 Currency exchange rate effect 214

775-110 Constructive receipts and payments 214

775-115 Economic set-off to be treated as legal set-off 215

775-120 Non-arm’s length transactions 215

775-125 CGT consequences of the acquisition of foreign currency as a result of forex realisation event 2 or 3 216

775-130 Certain deductions not allowable 216

775-135 Right to receive or pay foreign currency 216

775-140 Obligation to pay or receive foreign currency 217

775-145 Application of forex realisation events to currency and fungible rights and obligations 218

775-150 Transitional election 218

775-155 Applicable commencement date 219

775-160 Exception—event happens before the applicable commencement date 219

775-165 Exception—currency or right acquired, or obligation incurred, before the applicable commencement date 219

775-168 Exception—disposal or redemption of traditional securities 222

775-175 Application to things happening before commencement 222

Subdivision 775-C—Roll-over relief for facility agreements 222

Guide to Subdivision 775-C 222

775-180 What this Subdivision is about 222

Operative provisions 223

775-185 What is a facility agreement? 223

775-190 What is an eligible security? 224

775-195 You may choose roll-over relief for a facility agreement 224

775-200 Forex realisation event 4 does not apply 225

775-205 What is a roll-over? 226

775-210 Notional loan 226

775-215 Discharge of obligation to pay the principal amount of a notional loan under a facility agreement—forex realisation event 6 230

775-220 Material variation of a facility agreement—forex realisation event 7 232

Subdivision 775-D—Qualifying forex accounts that pass the limited balance test 235

Guide to Subdivision 775-D 235

775-225 What this Subdivision is about 235

Operative provisions 236

775-230 Election to have this Subdivision apply to one or more qualifying forex accounts 236

775-235 Variation of election 237

775-240 Withdrawal of election 237

775-245 When does a qualifying forex account pass the limited balance test? 237

775-250 Tax consequences of passing the limited balance test 242

775-255 Notional realisation when qualifying forex account starts to pass the limited balance test 242

775-260 Modification of tax recognition time 243

Subdivision 775-E—Retranslation for qualifying forex accounts 244

Guide to Subdivision 775-E 244

775-265 What this Subdivision is about 244

Operative provisions 245

775-270 You may choose retranslation for a qualifying forex account 245

775-275 Withdrawal of choice 246

775-280 Tax consequences of choosing retranslation for an account 246

775-285 Retranslation of gains and losses relating to a qualifying forex account—forex realisation event 8 247

Subdivision 775-F—Retranslation under foreign exchange retranslation election under Subdivision 230-D 249

Guide to Subdivision 775-F 249

775-290 What this Subdivision is about 249

775-295 When this Subdivision applies 250

775-300 Tax consequences of choosing retranslation for arrangement 251

775-305 Retranslation of gains and losses relating to arrangement to which foreign exchange retranslation election applies—forex realisation event 9 252

775-310 When election ceases to apply to arrangement 253

775-315 Balancing adjustment when election ceases to apply to arrangement 253

Division 802—Foreign residents’ income with an underlying foreign source 255

Subdivision 802-A—Conduit foreign income 255

Guide to Subdivision 802-A 255

802-5 What this Subdivision is about 255

Operative provisions 256

802-10 Objects 256

802-15 Foreign residents—exempting CFI from Australian tax 256

802-17 Trust estates and foreign resident beneficiaries—exempting CFI from Australian tax 257

802-20 Distributions between Australian corporate tax entities—non-assessable non-exempt income 258

802-25 Conduit foreign income of an Australian corporate tax entity 260

802-30 Foreign source income amounts 260

802-35 Capital gains and losses 262

802-40 Effect of foreign income tax offset on conduit foreign income 262

802-45 Previous declarations of conduit foreign income 263

802-50 Receipt of an unfranked distribution from another Australian corporate tax entity 263

802-55 No double benefits 263

802-60 No streaming of distributions 264

Division 815—Cross-border transfer pricing 266

Subdivision 815-A—Treaty-equivalent cross-border transfer pricing rules 266

Guide to Subdivision 815-A 266

815-1 What this Subdivision is about 266

Operative provisions 267

815-5 Object 267

815-10 Transfer pricing benefit may be negated 267

815-15 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit 268

815-20 Cross-border transfer pricing guidance 270

815-25 Modified transfer pricing benefit for thin capitalisation 271

815-30 Determinations negating transfer pricing benefit 271

815-35 Consequential adjustments 272

815-40 No double taxation 275

Subdivision 815-B—Arm’s length principle for cross-border conditions between entities 275

Guide to Subdivision 815-B 275

815-101 What this Subdivision is about 275

Operative provisions 276

815-105 Object 276

815-110 Operation of Subdivision 277

815-115 Substitution of arm’s length conditions 277

815-120 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit 278

815-125 Meaning of arm’s length conditions 280

815-130 Relevance of actual commercial or financial relations 281

815-135 Guidance 282

815-140 Modification for thin capitalisation 283

815-145 Consequential adjustments 284

815-150 Amendment of assessments 285

Subdivision 815-C—Arm’s length principle for permanent establishments 286

Guide to Subdivision 815-C 286

815-201 What this Subdivision is about 286

Operative provisions 286

815-205 Object 286

815-210 Operation of Subdivision 287

815-215 Substitution of arm’s length profits 287

815-220 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit 288

815-225 Meaning of arm’s length profits 288

815-230 Source rules for certain arm’s length profits 289

815-235 Guidance 289

815-240 Amendment of assessments 290

Subdivision 815-D—Special rules for trusts and partnerships 291

Guide to Subdivision 815-D 291

815-301 What this Subdivision is about 291

Operative provisions 291

815-305 Special rule for trusts 291

815-310 Special rules for partnerships 291

Subdivision 815-E—Reporting obligations for country by country reporting entities 292

Guide to Subdivision 815-E 292

815-350 What this Subdivision is about 292

Operative provisions 292

815-355 Requirement to give statements 292

815-360 Replacement reporting periods 294

815-365 Exemptions 294

815-370 Meaning of country by country reporting entity (or CBC reporting entity) 295

815-375 Meaning of country by country reporting parent (or CBC reporting parent) 295

815-380 Meaning of country by country reporting group (or CBC reporting group) 295

Division 820—Thin capitalisation rules 298

Guide to Division 820 299

820-1 What this Division is about 299

820-10 Map of Division 300

Subdivision 820-A—Preliminary 302

820-30 Object of Division 302

820-31 Order of application of Subdivisions 303

820-32 Exemption for private or domestic assets and non-debt liabilities 303

820-35 Application—$2 million threshold 304

820-37 Application—assets threshold 304

820-39 Exemption of certain special purpose entities 306

820-40 Meaning of debt deduction 307

Subdivision 820-AA—Thin capitalisation rules for general class investors 309

Guide to Subdivision 820-AA 309

820-45 What this Subdivision is about 309

Operative provisions 310

820-46 Thin capitalisation rule for general class investors 310

820-47 Choices under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) 312

820-48 Where entity is taken to make third party debt test choice 313

820-49 Meaning of obligor group etc. 315

820-50 Amount of debt deduction disallowed 315

820-51 Meaning of fixed ratio earnings limit and group ratio earnings limit 317

820-52 Meaning of tax EBITDA 317

820-53 Meaning of group ratio, GR group, GR group parent and GR group member 322

820-54 Meaning of GR group net third party interest expense, financial statement net third party interest expense and adjusted net third party interest expense 323

820-55 Meaning of entity EBITDA and GR group EBITDA 326

820-56 Special deduction for previously FRT disallowed amounts—fixed ratio test 327

820-57 Meaning of FRT disallowed amount 328

820-58 FRT disallowed amount is treated as zero where subsequent choice means fixed ratio test does not apply 328

820-59 When FRT disallowed amount is treated as zero for companies and trusts 328

820-60 Excess tax EBITDA amount 329

Subdivision 820-B—Thin capitalisation rules for outward investing financial entities (non-ADI) 334

Guide to Subdivision 820-B 334

820-65 What this Subdivision is about 334

Operative provisions 335

820-85 Thin capitalisation rule for outward investing financial entities (non-ADI) 335

820-90 Maximum allowable debt 338

820-100 Safe harbour debt amount—outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) 340

820-110 Worldwide gearing debt amount—outward investor that is not also an inward investment vehicle 343

820-111 Worldwide gearing debt amount—outward investor that is also an inward investment vehicle 345

820-115 Amount of debt deduction disallowed 346

820-120 Application to part year periods 347

Subdivision 820-C—Thin capitalisation rules for inward investing financial entities (non-ADI) 349

Guide to Subdivision 820-C 349

820-180 What this Subdivision is about 349

Operative provisions 350

820-185 Thin capitalisation rule for inward investing financial entities (non-ADI) 350

820-190 Maximum allowable debt 354

820-200 Safe harbour debt amount—inward investment vehicle (financial) 355

820-210 Safe harbour debt amount—inward investor (financial) 358

820-217 Worldwide gearing debt amount—inward investment vehicle (financial) 362

820-219 Worldwide gearing debt amount—inward investor (financial) 363

820-220 Amount of debt deduction disallowed 364

820-225 Application to part year periods 365

Subdivision 820-D—Thin capitalisation rules for outward investing entities (ADI) 367

Guide to Subdivision 820-D 367

820-295 What this Subdivision is about 367

Operative provisions 368

820-300 Thin capitalisation rule for outward investing entities (ADI) 368

820-305 Minimum capital amount 370

820-310 Safe harbour capital amount 370

820-315 Arm’s length capital amount 372

820-320 Worldwide capital amount 375

820-325 Amount of debt deduction disallowed 377

820-330 Application to part year periods 377

Subdivision 820-E—Thin capitalisation rules for inward investing entities (ADI) 379

Guide to Subdivision 820-E 379

820-390 What this Subdivision is about 379

Operative provisions 380

820-395 Thin capitalisation rule for inward investing entities (ADI) 380

820-400 Minimum capital amount 381

820-405 Safe harbour capital amount 382

820-410 Arm’s length capital amount 382

820-415 Amount of debt deduction disallowed 385

820-420 Application to part year periods 385

Subdivision 820-EAA—Debt deduction limitation rules for debt deduction creation (all relevant entities) 387

Guide to Subdivision 820-EAA 387

820-423 What this Subdivision is about 387

Operative provisions 388

820-423A Debt deduction limitation rule for debt deduction creation (all relevant entities) 388

820-423AA Exceptions for acquisition of certain CGT assets 392

820-423B Amount of debt deduction disallowed 394

820-423C This Subdivision does not limit reduction of debt deductions under other provisions 394

820-423D Schemes relating to this Subdivision 394

820-423E Modified meaning of associate pair 395

820-423F Modified meaning of Australian entity 397

Subdivision 820-EAB—Third party debt concepts 398

Guide to Subdivision 820-EAB 398

820-427 What this Subdivision is about 398

Operative provisions 398

820-427A Meaning of third party earnings limit and third party debt conditions 398

820-427B Modified third party debt conditions for conduit financing 401

820-427C Conduit financing conditions 402

820-427D Modified meaning of associate entity 405

820-427E Modified meaning of Australian entity 406

Subdivision 820-EA—Some financial entities may choose to be treated as ADIs 406

820-430 When choice can be made, and what effect it has 406

820-435 Conditions 408

820-440 Revocation of choice 410

820-445 How this Subdivision interacts with Subdivision 820-FA 410

Subdivision 820-FA—How the thin capitalisation rules apply to consolidated groups and MEC groups 411

Guide to Subdivision 820-FA 411

820-579 What this Subdivision is about 411

Operative provisions 412

820-581 How this Division applies to head company for income year in which group comes into existence or ceases to exist 412

820-583 Classification of head company 412

820-584 Exempt special purpose entities treated as not being member of group 414

820-585 Exemption for consolidated group headed by foreign-controlled Australian ADI or its holding company 414

820-587 Additional application of Subdivision 820-D to MEC group that includes foreign-controlled Australian ADI 415

820-588 Choice to treat specialist credit card institutions as being financial entities and not ADIs 416

820-589 How Subdivision 820-D applies to a MEC group 417

820-590 Treatment of FRT disallowed amounts—joining case 418

820-591 Effect of transfer of FRT disallowed amount 420

820-592 Cancelling the transfer of FRT disallowed amount 420

820-593 FRT disallowed amount cannot be applied for income year ending after the joining time 420

820-594 Treatment of FRT disallowed amounts—leaving case 421

Subdivision 820-FB—Grouping branches of foreign banks and foreign financial entities with a consolidated group, MEC group or single Australian resident company 421

Guide to Subdivision 820-FB 421

820-595 What this Subdivision is about 421

Choice to group with branches of foreign banks and foreign financial entities 422

820-597 Choice by head company of consolidated group or MEC group 422

820-599 Choice by Australian resident company outside consolidatable group and MEC group 423

Effect of choice 424

820-601 Application 424

820-603 General 424

820-605 Effect on establishment entity if certain debt deductions disallowed 426

820-607 Effect on test periods under this Division 427

820-609 Effect on classification of head company or single company 428

820-610 Choice not to be outward investing entity (ADI) or inward investing entity (ADI) 430

820-611 Values to be based on what would be in consolidated accounts for group 431

820-613 How Subdivision 820-D applies 431

820-615 How Subdivision 820-E applies 433

Subdivision 820-G—Calculating the average values 434

Guide to Subdivision 820-G 434

820-625 What this Subdivision is about 434

How to calculate the average values 435

820-630 Methods of calculating average values 435

820-635 The opening and closing balances method 436

820-640 The 3 measurement days method 437

820-645 The frequent measurement method 438

Special rules about values and valuation 441

820-675 Amount to be expressed in Australian currency 441

820-680 Valuation of assets, liabilities and equity capital 441

820-682 Recognition of assets and liabilities—modifying application of accounting standards 442

820-685 Valuation of debt capital 443

820-690 Commissioner’s power 443

Subdivision 820-H—Control of entities 444

Guide to Subdivision 820-H 444

820-740 What this Subdivision is about 444

Australian controller of a foreign entity 445

820-745 What is an Australian controlled foreign entity? 445

820-750 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign company? 446

820-755 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign trust? 446

820-760 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign corporate limited partnership? 447

Foreign controlled Australian entity 447

820-780 What is a foreign controlled Australian entity? 447

820-785 What is a foreign controlled Australian company? 448

820-790 What is a foreign controlled Australian trust? 449

820-795 What is a foreign controlled Australian partnership? 451

Thin capitalisation control interest 453

820-815 General rule about thin capitalisation control interest in a company, trust or partnership 453

820-820 Special rules about calculating TC control interest held by an entity 454

820-825 Special rules about calculating TC control interests held by a group of entities 455

820-830 Special rules about determining percentage of TC control interest 455

820-835 Commissioner’s power 456

TC direct control interest, TC indirect control interest and TC control tracing interest 456

820-855 TC direct control interest in a company 456

820-860 TC direct control interest in a trust 457

820-865 TC direct control interest in a partnership 458

820-870 TC indirect control interest in a company, trust or partnership 459

820-875 TC control tracing interest in a company, trust or partnership 462

Subdivision 820-HA—Controlled foreign entity debt and controlled foreign entity equity 463

Guide to Subdivision 820-HA 463

820-880 What this Subdivision is about 463

820-881 Application 463

820-885 What is controlled foreign entity debt? 464

820-890 What is controlled foreign entity equity? 464

Subdivision 820-I—Associate entities 465

Guide to Subdivision 820-I 465

820-900 What this Subdivision is about 465

820-905 Associate entity 465

820-910 Associate entity debt 471

820-915 Associate entity equity 473

820-920 Associate entity excess amount 474

Subdivision 820-J—Equity interest in a trust or partnership 478

Guide to Subdivision 820-J 478

820-925 What this Subdivision is about 478

820-930 Equity interest in a trust or partnership 479

Subdivision 820-JA—Worldwide debt and equity concepts 482

Guide to Subdivision 820-JA 482

820-931 What this Subdivision is about 482

Operative provisions 482

820-932 Worldwide debt and worldwide equity 482

820-933 Statement worldwide debt, statement worldwide equity and statement worldwide assets 483

820-935 Meaning of audited consolidated financial statements 484

Subdivision 820-K—Zero-capital amount 486

Guide to Subdivision 820-K 486

820-940 What this Subdivision is about 486

820-942 How to work out the zero-capital amount 486

Subdivision 820-KA—Cost-free debt capital and excluded equity interests 491

Guide to Subdivision 820-KA 491

820-945 What this Subdivision is about 491

820-946 Cost-free debt capital and excluded equity interest 491

Subdivision 820-L—Record keeping requirements 494

Guide to Subdivision 820-L 494

820-950 What this Subdivision is about 494

Records about Australian permanent establishments 494

820-960 Records about Australian permanent establishments 494

820-962 Records about Australian permanent establishments—exemptions from Australian accounting standards 497

820-965 Review of Commissioner’s decision 498

Records about arm’s length amounts 499

820-980 Records about arm’s length capital amount 499

820-985 Records about group ratio 499

Offences committed by certain entities 500

820-990 Offences—treatment of partnerships 500

820-995 Offences—treatment of unincorporated companies 501

Division 830—Foreign hybrids 503

Guide to Division 830 503

830-1 What this Division is about 503

Subdivision 830-A—Meaning of “foreign hybrid” 503

830-5 Foreign hybrid 504

830-10 Foreign hybrid limited partnership 504

830-15 Foreign hybrid company 505

830-17 References to foreign income tax in section 830-10 or 830-15 do not include certain taxes 508

Subdivision 830-B—Extension of normal partnership provisions to foreign hybrid companies 508

830-20 Treatment of company as a partnership 509

830-25 Partners are the shareholders in the company 509

830-30 Individual interest of a partner in net income etc. equals percentage of notional distribution of company’s profits 509

830-35 Partner’s interest in assets 509

830-40 Control and disposal of share in partnership income 510

Subdivision 830-C—Special rules applicable while an entity is a foreign hybrid 510

830-45 Partner’s revenue and net capital losses from foreign hybrid not to exceed partner’s loss exposure amount 511

830-50 Deduction etc. where partner’s foreign hybrid revenue loss amount and foreign hybrid net capital loss amount are less than partner’s loss exposure amount 512

830-55 Meaning of foreign hybrid net capital loss amount 513

830-60 Meaning of loss exposure amount 513

830-65 Meaning of outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amount 515

830-70 Meaning of outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amount 516

830-75 Extended meaning of subject to foreign tax 516

Subdivision 830-D—Special rules applicable when an entity becomes or ceases to be a foreign hybrid 519

830-80 Setting the tax cost of partners’ interests in the assets of an entity that becomes a foreign hybrid 519

830-85 Setting the tax cost of assets of an entity when it ceases to be a foreign hybrid 520

830-90 What the expression tax cost is set means 520

830-95 What the expression tax cost setting amount means 522

830-100 What the expression tax cost means 525

830-105 What the expression asset-based income tax regime means 526

830-110 No disposal of assets etc. on entity becoming or ceasing to be a foreign hybrid 526

830-115 Tax losses cannot be transferred to a foreign hybrid 527

830-120 End of CFC’s last statutory accounting period 527

830-125 How long interest in asset, or asset, held 528

Division 832—Hybrid mismatch rules 529

Guide to Division 832 529

832-1 What this Division is about 529

Subdivision 832-A—Preliminary 530

Guide to Subdivision 832-A 530

832-5 What this Subdivision is about 530

Operative provisions 530

832-10 Entitlement to receive payment 530

832-15 Entitlement to receive non-cash benefits 531

832-20 Losses that arise from payments or parts of payments 531

832-25 Recipients and payers of a payment 532

832-30 How this Division applies to entities 533

832-35 Single entity rule otherwise not disregarded 534

832-40 Schemes outside Australia 534

832-45 Relationship between this Division and other charging provisions in this Act 535

832-50 Relationship between this Division and Division 820 535

832-55 Division does not affect foreign residence rules 535

832-60 Valuation of trading stock affected by hybrid mismatch rules 536

Subdivision 832-B—Concepts relating to mismatches 536

Guide to Subdivision 832-B 536

832-100 What this Subdivision is about 536

Operative provisions 537

832-105 When a payment gives rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch 537

832-110 When a payment gives rise to a deduction/deduction mismatch 538

832-115 Disregard effect of Division in determining deductions 540

832-120 Meaning of foreign income tax deduction 540

832-125 Meaning of subject to Australian income tax 541

832-130 Meaning of subject to foreign income tax 541

832-135 Safe harbour for translation rates 544

Subdivision 832-C—Hybrid financial instrument mismatch 544

Guide to Subdivision 832-C 544

832-175 What this Subdivision is about 544

Operative provisions 545

832-180 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response 545

832-185 Inclusion in assessable income—Australian secondary response 546

832-190 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement 547

832-195 When a hybrid financial instrument mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch 547

832-200 When a payment gives rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch 548

832-205 Meaning of Division 832 control group 549

832-210 Meaning of structured arrangement 549

832-215 Hybrid mismatch 550

832-220 Hybrid requirement—payments under financial instruments 551

832-225 Hybrid requirement—payments under transfers of certain financial instruments 552

832-230 Hybrid mismatch—integrity rule for substitute payments 552

832-235 Extended operation of this Subdivision in relation to concessional foreign taxes 553

832-240 Adjustment if hybrid financial instrument payment is income in a later year 554

Subdivision 832-D—Hybrid payer mismatch 555

Guide to Subdivision 832-D 555

832-280 What this Subdivision is about 555

Operative provisions 556

832-285 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response 556

832-290 Inclusion in assessable income—Australian secondary response 557

832-295 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement 558

832-300 When a hybrid payer mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch 558

832-305 When a payment gives rise to a hybrid payer mismatch 558

832-310 Hybrid mismatch 559

832-315 Hybrid requirement—assume payment was made to same recipient but by an ungrouped payer 560

832-320 Hybrid payer 561

832-325 Meaning of liable entity 562

832-330 Neutralising amount 564

832-335 Adjustment if hybrid payer has dual inclusion income in a later year 566

Subdivision 832-E—Reverse hybrid mismatch 567

Guide to Subdivision 832-E 567

832-375 What this Subdivision is about 567

Operative provisions 568

832-380 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response 568

832-385 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement 568

832-390 When a reverse hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch 568

832-395 When a payment gives rise to a reverse hybrid mismatch 569

832-400 Hybrid mismatch 570

832-405 Hybrid requirement—assume payment was made to an investor 570

832-410 Reverse hybrid 572

Subdivision 832-F—Branch hybrid mismatch 573

Guide to Subdivision 832-F 573

832-450 What this Subdivision is about 573

Operative provisions 574

832-455 Deduction not allowable 574

832-460 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement 574

832-465 When a branch hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch 574

832-470 Branch hybrid mismatch 575

832-475 Hybrid mismatch 576

832-480 Hybrid requirement—payment made directly or indirectly to a branch hybrid 576

832-485 Branch hybrid 578

Subdivision 832-G—Deducting hybrid mismatch 580

Guide to Subdivision 832-G 580

832-525 What this Subdivision is about 580

Operative provisions 581

832-530 Deduction not allowable 581

832-535 Additional requirements for secondary response 581

832-540 When a deducting hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch 582

832-545 When an amount gives rise to a deducting hybrid mismatch 583

832-550 Deducting hybrid 583

832-555 Identifying a secondary response country 584

832-560 Neutralising amount 587

832-565 Adjustment if deducting hybrid has dual inclusion income in a later year 588

Subdivision 832-H—Imported hybrid mismatch 589

Guide to Subdivision 832-H 589

832-605 What this Subdivision is about 589

Operative provisions 590

832-610 Deduction not allowable 590

832-615 When a payment gives rise to an imported hybrid mismatch 590

832-620 Hybrid mismatch 592

832-625 Meaning of importing payment 592

832-630 Working out the amount of the imported hybrid mismatch 594

832-635 Carry forward of residual offshore hybrid mismatches 595

Subdivision 832-I—Dual inclusion income 596

Guide to Subdivision 832-I 596

832-675 What this Subdivision is about 596

Operative provisions 597

832-680 Dual inclusion income, and when an entity is eligible to apply it 597

Subdivision 832-J—Integrity rule 600

832-720 What this Subdivision is about 600

Operative provisions 601

832-725 Payments made to interposed foreign entity (integrity measure)—denial of deduction 601

832-730 Back to back arrangements, etc. 604

832-735 Determination may specify kinds of scheme and circumstances where no denial of deduction 604

Subdivision 832-K—Modifications for Division 230 (about taxation of financial arrangements) 605

Guide to Subdivision 832-K 605

832-775 What this Subdivision is about 605

Operative provisions 605

832-780 Section 832-20 applies to Division 230 losses 605

832-785 Adjusting Division 230 loss 606

832-790 Modifications relating to Division 230 gains and losses 606

Division 840—Withholding taxes 608

Guide to Division 840 608

840-1 What this Division is about 608

Subdivision 840-M—Managed investment trust withholding tax 608

Guide to Subdivision 840-M 608

840-800 What this Subdivision is about 608

Operative provisions 609

840-805 Liability for managed investment trust withholding tax 609

840-810 When managed investment trust withholding tax is payable 614

840-815 Certain income is non-assessable non-exempt income 615

840-820 Agency rules 615

Subdivision 840-S—Labour mobility program withholding tax 616

Guide to Subdivision 840-S 616

840-900 What this Subdivision is about 616

Operative provisions 616

840-905 Liability for labour mobility program withholding tax 616

840-906 Covered labour mobility programs 617

840-910 When labour mobility program withholding tax is payable 617

840-915 Certain income is non-assessable non-exempt income 618

840-920 Overpayment of labour mobility program withholding tax 618

Division 842—Exempt Australian source income and gains of foreign residents 619

Subdivision 842-B—Some items of Australian source income of foreign residents that are exempt from income tax 619

Guide to Subdivision 842-B 619

842-100 What this Subdivision is about 619

842-105 Amounts of Australian source ordinary income and statutory income that are exempt 619

Subdivision 842-I—Investment manager regime 622

Guide to Subdivision 842-I 622

842-200 What this Subdivision is about 622

Object of this Subdivision 623

842-205 Object of this Subdivision 623

IMR concessions 624

842-210 IMR concessions apply only to foreign residents etc. 624

842-215 IMR concessions 624

842-220 Meaning of IMR entity 628

842-225 Meaning of IMR financial arrangement 628

IMR widely held entities 628

842-230 Meaning of IMR widely held entity 628

842-235 Rules for determining total participation interests for the purposes of the widely held test 629

842-240 Extended meaning of IMR widely held entity—temporary circumstances outside entity’s control 631

Independent Australian fund managers 632

842-245 Meaning of independent Australian fund manager 632

842-250 Reductions in IMR concessions if independent Australian fund manager entitled to substantial share of IMR entity’s income 632

Division 855—Capital gains and foreign residents 637

Guide to Division 855 637

855-1 What this Division is about 637

Subdivision 855-A—Disregarding a capital gain or loss by foreign residents 637

855-5 Objects of this Subdivision 638

855-10 Disregarding a capital gain or loss from CGT events 638

855-15 When an asset is taxable Australian property 639

855-16 Meaning of permanent establishment article 640

855-20 Taxable Australian real property 640

855-25 Indirect Australian real property interests 640

855-30 Principal asset test 641

855-32 Disregard market value of duplicated non-TARP assets 644

855-35 Reducing a capital gain or loss from a business asset—Australian permanent establishments 645

855-40 Capital gains and losses of foreign residents through fixed trusts 645

Subdivision 855-B—Becoming an Australian resident 647

855-45 Individual or company becomes an Australian resident 647

855-50 Trust becomes a resident trust 648

855-55 CFC becomes an Australian resident 648

Division 880—Sovereign entities and activities 650

Subdivision 880-A—Basic concepts 650

Guide to Subdivision 880-A 650

880-10 What this Subdivision is about 650

Operative provisions 650

880-15 Meaning of sovereign entity 650

880-20 Meaning of sovereign entity group 651

Subdivision 880-B—Basic tax treatment of sovereign entities 652

Guide to Subdivision 880-B 652

880-50 What this Subdivision is about 652

Operative provisions 652

880-55 Sovereign entity liable to pay tax 652

880-60 Bodies politic of foreign countries and foreign government agencies treated as foreign residents 652

Subdivision 880-C—Sovereign immunity 653

Guide to Subdivision 880-C 653

880-100 What this Subdivision is about 653

Operative provisions 654

880-105 Sovereign entity’s income from membership interest etc. in trust or company—non-assessable non-exempt income 654

880-110 Sovereign entity’s deduction from membership interest etc.—loss not deductible 656

880-115 Sovereign entity’s capital gain from membership interest etc.—gain disregarded 657

880-120 Sovereign entity’s capital loss from membership interest etc. in trust or company—loss disregarded 657

880-125 Covered sovereign entities 658

880-130 Meaning of public non-financial entity and public financial entity 658

Subdivision 880-D—Consular activities 659

Guide to Subdivision 880-D 659

880-200 What this Subdivision is about 659

Operative provisions 659

880-205 Income from consular functions—non-assessable non-exempt income 659

Chapter 3 — Specialist liability rules

Part 3-95 — Value shifting

Division 723 — Direct value shifting by creating right over non-depreciating asset

Table of Subdivisions

723-A Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset

723-B Reducing reduced cost base of interests in entity that acquires non-depreciating asset under roll-over

Subdivision 723-A — Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset

Table of sections

723-1 Object

723-10 Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset over which right has been created

723-15 Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset at the same time as right is created over it

723-20 Exceptions

723-25 Realisation event that is only a partial realisation

723-35 Multiple rights created to take advantage of the $50,000 threshold

723-40 Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock or revenue asset

723-50 Effects if right created over underlying asset is also trading stock or a revenue asset

723-1 Object

The purpose of this Division is to reduce a loss that would otherwise be *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event happening to an asset (except a depreciating asset), to the extent that:

value has been shifted out of the asset by the owner creating in an associate a right over the asset; and

the value shifted was not brought to tax when the right was created and has not since been brought to tax on a realisation of the right.

723-10 Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset over which right has been created

A loss that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event is reduced by the amount worked out under subsections (3) and (4) if:

(a) the event happens to a *CGT asset (the underlying asset) you own that, at the time of the event (the realisation time):

(i) is not a *depreciating asset; or

is an item of your trading stock; or

is a revenue asset of yours; and

before the realisation time:

you created in an associate of yours; or

an entity covered by subsection (2) (about previous owners of the underlying asset) created in an associate of the entity;

a right in respect of the underlying asset; and

immediately before the realisation time, the right is still in existence and is owned by an associate of yours; and

a decrease in the underlying asset’s *market value is reasonably attributable to the creating of the right; and

creating the right involved a CGT event:

(i) whose *capital proceeds are less than the market value of the right when created (the difference between those capital proceeds and that market value is called the shortfall on creating the right); and

(ii) that is not a CGT event that happens to some part of the underlying asset but not to the remainder of it; and

the shortfall on creating the right is more than $50,000; and

(g) the market value of the underlying asset at the realisation time is less than it would have been if the right no longer existed at that time (the difference is called the deficit on realisation).

Note: If subparagraph (1)(e)(ii) applies, the cost base and reduced cost base of the underlying asset is apportioned under section 112-30, so there is no need for this section to apply to the right.

This subsection covers an entity if:

the entity *acquired the underlying asset before you did; and

there has been a roll-over for each CGT event (if any) as a result of which an entity (including you) acquired the asset after the first entity acquired it, and before the realisation time; and

for each such CGT event (if any), the entity (including you) that acquired the underlying asset as a result of the event was, immediately after the event, an associate of the entity that last acquired the asset before the event.

The amount by which this section reduces the loss is the lesser of:

the shortfall on creating the right; and

the deficit on realisation.

However, that amount is reduced by each gain that:

is *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to the right:

before or at the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your associate immediately before the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

is not disregarded.

Note: To work out a gain realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to the right, see sections 977-15, 977-35, 977-40 and 977-55. If more than one of those sections applies to the right, see section 723-50.

For each gain that:

is *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to the right:

within 4 years after the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your associate immediately before the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

is not disregarded;

the amount worked out under subsection (3) is taken to have been reduced by the amount of that gain.

Note: This subsection may result in amendment of an assessment for the income year in which the realisation time happens.

723-15 Reduction in loss from realising non-depreciating asset at the same time as right is created over it

A loss that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event is reduced by the amount worked out under subsections (2) and (3) if:

(a) the event happens to a *CGT asset (the underlying asset) you own that, at the time of the event (the realisation time):

(i) is not a *depreciating asset; or

is an item of your trading stock;

is a revenue asset of yours; and

at the realisation time, you create in an associate of yours a right in respect of the underlying asset; and

creating the right involves a CGT event:

(i) whose *capital proceeds are less than the *market value of the right when created (the difference between those capital proceeds and that market value is called the shortfall on creating the right); and

(ii) that is not a CGT event that happens to some part of the underlying asset but not to the remainder of it; and

the shortfall on creating the right is more than $50,000; and

(e) the market value of the underlying asset at the realisation time is less than it would have been if the right had not been created (the difference is called the deficit on realisation).

Note: If subparagraph (1)(c)(ii) applies, the cost base and reduced cost base of the underlying asset is apportioned under section 112-30, so there is no need for this section to apply to the right.

The amount by which this section reduces the loss is the lesser of:

the shortfall on creating the right; and

the deficit on realisation.

For each gain that:

is *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to the right:

within 4 years after the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

at a time when the right is owned by an entity that is your associate immediately before the realisation time for the underlying asset; and

is not disregarded;

the amount worked out under subsection (2) is taken to have been reduced by the amount of that gain.

Note 1: To work out a gain realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to the right, see sections 977-15, 977-35, 977-40 and 977-55. If more than one of those sections applies to the right, see section 723-50.

Note 2: This subsection may require amendment of an assessment for the income year in which the realisation time happens.

723-20 Exceptions

Conservation covenant over land

Section 723-10 or 723-15 does not reduce a loss if:

the underlying asset is land; and

the right referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(b) or 723-15(1)(b) is a conservation covenant over the land.

Right created on death of owner

Section 723-10 or 723-15 does not reduce a loss if the right referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(b) or 723-15(1)(b) is created by:

a will or codicil; or

an order of a court varying or modifying a will or codicil; or

a total or partial intestacy; or

an order of a court varying or modifying the application of the law about distributing the estate of someone who dies intestate.

723-25 Realisation event that is only a partial realisation

Section 723-10 or 723-15 applies differently if:

(a) a *realisation event happens to some part of a *CGT asset (the underlying asset) you own that, at the time of the event:

(i) is not a *depreciating asset; or

is an item of your trading stock; or

is a revenue asset of yours;

but not to the remainder of the underlying asset; or

(b) a realisation event consists of creating an interest in a CGT asset (also the underlying asset) you own that, at the time of the event, is covered by subparagraph (a)(i), (ii) or (iii).

The section applies on the basis that:

the realisation event happens to the underlying asset; and

the shortfall on creating the right referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(e) or 723-15(1)(c); and

the deficit on realisation referred to in paragraph 723-10(1)(g) or 723-15(1)(e);

are each reduced by multiplying its amount by this fraction:

For the purposes of the formula in subsection (2):

market value of part means the *market value, at the time of the *realisation event, of the part referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or the interest referred to in paragraph (1)(b), as appropriate.

market value of underlying asset means the *market value, immediately before the *realisation event, of the underlying asset.

723-35 Multiple rights created to take advantage of the $50,000 threshold

Sections 723-10 and 723-15 apply differently if, having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why a right was created as a different right from one or more other rights created in respect of the same thing was so that paragraph 723-10(1)(f) or 723-15(1)(d) would not be satisfied for one or more of the rights mentioned in this subsection.

Those sections:

apply to that thing, in relation to each of the rights mentioned in subsection (1) of this section, as if paragraphs 723-10(1)(f) and 723-15(1)(d) were omitted; and

are taken always to have so applied.

723-40 Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock or revenue asset

If a CGT asset you own is also an item of your trading stock or a revenue asset, this Division applies to the asset once in its character as a CGT asset and again in its character as trading stock or a revenue asset.

723-50 Effects if right created over underlying asset is also trading stock or a revenue asset

Subsection 723-10(3) or (4) or 723-15(3) applies differently if the right created in respect of the underlying asset is also trading stock or a revenue asset at the time of a realisation event that happens to the right.

The gain that is taken into account for the purposes of that subsection is:

if the right is also trading stock—worked out under section 977-35 or 977-40 (about realisation events for trading stock); or

if the right is also a revenue asset—the greater of:

the gain worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation events for CGT assets); and

the gain worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation events for revenue assets).

Subdivision 723-B — Reducing reduced cost base of interests in entity that acquires non-depreciating asset under roll-over

Table of sections

723-105 Reduced cost base of interest reduced when interest realised at a loss

723-110 Direct and indirect roll-over replacement for underlying asset

723-105 Reduced cost base of interest reduced when interest realised at a loss

The *reduced cost base of a *primary equity interest, secondary equity interest, or indirect primary equity interest, in a company or trust is reduced just before a realisation event that is a CGT event happens to the interest if:

apart from this Division, a loss would be *realised for income tax purposes by the CGT event; and

(b) apart from this Division, a loss would have been *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event if the event had happened, just before the CGT event, to a *CGT asset (the underlying asset) that the company or trust then owned and that:

(i) was not then a *depreciating asset; or

was then an item of trading stock of the company or trust; or

was then a revenue asset of the company or trust; and

(c) the loss referred to in paragraph (b) would have been reduced under Subdivision 723-A by an amount (the underlying asset loss reduction); and

(d) for the entity (the transferor) that owned the interest just before the CGT event, the interest was a *direct roll-over replacement or *indirect roll-over replacement for the underlying asset.

If the interest was a direct roll-over replacement, its *reduced cost base is reduced by the amount worked out using this formula, unless that amount does not appropriately reflect the matters referred to in subsection (4):

For the purposes of the formula in subsection (2):

RCB of interest means the interest’s *reduced cost base when the transferor *acquired it.

total of RCBs of direct roll-over replacements means the total of the *reduced cost bases of all *direct roll-over replacements for the underlying asset when the transferor *acquired them.

If:

the interest was an indirect roll-over replacement; or

the amount worked out under subsection (2) does not appropriately reflect the matters referred to in this subsection;

the interest’s *reduced cost base is reduced by an amount that is appropriate having regard to these matters:

the underlying asset loss reduction; and

the quantum of the interest relative to all *direct roll-over replacements and indirect roll-over replacements that the transferor owns or has previously owned.

723-110 Direct and indirect roll-over replacement for underlying asset

(1) For an entity (the transferor) that owns a *CGT asset, the CGT asset is a direct roll-over replacement for something (the underlying asset) that another entity owns if, and only if:

a CGT event happened to the underlying asset while the transferor owned it; and

the other entity *acquired the underlying asset as a result of that CGT event; and

there was a *replacement-asset roll-over for the CGT event; and

the transferor received the CGT asset (or CGT assets including it) in respect of the CGT event as the replacement asset (or the replacement assets).

(2) For an entity (the transferor) that owns a *CGT asset, the CGT asset is an indirect roll-over replacement for something (the underlying asset) that another entity owns if, and only if:

a CGT event happened to another CGT asset at a time when the transferor owned it and the other entity already owned the underlying asset; and

for the transferor, the other CGT asset was at that time:

a direct roll-over replacement for the underlying asset; or

an indirect roll-over replacement for the underlying asset because of any other application or applications of this subsection; and

there was a *replacement-asset roll-over for the CGT event; and

the transferor received the first CGT asset (or CGT assets including it) in respect of the CGT event as the replacement asset (or the replacement assets).

Division 725 — Direct value shifting affecting interests in companies and trusts

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 725

725-A Scope of the direct value shifting rules

725-B What is a direct value shift

725-C Consequences of a direct value shift

725-D Consequences for down interest or up interest as CGT asset

725-E Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock or a revenue asset

725-F Value adjustments and taxed gains

Guide to Division 725

725-1 What this Division is about

If, under a scheme, value is shifted from equity or loan interests in a company or trust to other equity or loan interests in the same company or trust (including interests issued at a discount), this Division:

adjusts the value of those interests for income tax purposes to take account of material changes in market value that are attributable to the value shift; and

treats the value shift as a partial realisation to the extent that value is shifted between interests held by different owners, and in some other cases.

However, it does so only for interests that are owned by entities involved in the value shift.

Subdivision 725-A — Scope of the direct value shifting rules

Table of sections

725-45 Main object

725-50 When a direct value shift has consequences under this Division

725-55 Controlling entity test

725-65 Cause of the value shift

725-70 Consequences for down interest only if there is a material decrease in its market value

725-80 Who is an affected owner of a down interest?

725-85 Who is an affected owner of an up interest?

725-90 Direct value shift that will be reversed

725-95 Direct value shift resulting from reversal

725-45 Main object

The main object of this Division is:

to prevent inappropriate losses from arising on the realisation of *equity or loan interests from which value has been shifted to other equity or loan interests in the same entity; and

to prevent inappropriate gains from arising on the realisation of equity or loan interests in the same entity to which the value has been shifted;

so far as those interests are owned by entities involved in the value shift.

This is done by:

adjusting the value of those interests for income tax purposes to take account of changes in *market value that are attributable to the value shift; and

treating the value shift as a partial realisation to the extent that value is shifted:

between interests held by different owners; or

in the case of interests in their character as CGT assets—from post-CGT assets to pre-CGT assets; or

between interests of different characters.

725-50 When a direct value shift has consequences under this Division

A *direct value shift under a *scheme involving *equity or loan interests in an entity (the target entity) has consequences for you under this Division if, and only if:

the target entity is a company or trust at some time during the *scheme period; and

section 725-55 (Controlling entity test) is satisfied; and

section 725-65 (Cause of the value shift) is satisfied; and

you are an *affected owner of a down interest, or an *affected owner of an up interest, or both; and

neither of sections 725-90 and 725-95 (about direct value shifts that are reversed) applies.

Note: For a down interest of which you are an affected owner, the direct value shift has consequences under this Division only if section 725-70 (about material decrease in market value) is satisfied.

725-55 Controlling entity test

An entity (the controller) must *control (for value shifting purposes) the target entity at some time during the period starting when the *scheme is entered into and ending when it has been carried out. (That period is the scheme period.)

For the concept of control (for value shifting purposes), see sections 727-355 to 727-375.

725-65 Cause of the value shift

It must be the case that one or more of the following:

the target entity;

the controller;

an entity that was an associate of the controller at some time during or after the *scheme period;

an *active participant in the *scheme;

(either alone or together with one or more other entities) did under the scheme the one or more things:

to which the decrease in the *market value of the *down interests is reasonably attributable; and

to which the increase in the market value of the *up interests, or the issue of up interests at a *discount, is reasonably attributable, or that is or include the issue of up interests at a *discount.

Active participants (if target entity is closely held)

(2) An entity (the first entity) is an active participant in the *scheme if, and only if:

at some time during the *scheme period, the target entity has fewer than 300 members (in the case of a company) or fewer than 300 beneficiaries (in the case of a trust); and

the first entity has actively participated in, or directly facilitated, the entering into or carrying out of the *scheme (whether or not it did so at the direction of some other entity); and

the first entity:

owns a down interest at the *decrease time; or

owns an up interest at the *increase time or has an up interest issued to it at a *discount because of the direct value shift.

When an entity has 300 or more members or beneficiaries

Section 124-810 (under which certain companies and trusts are not regarded as having 300 or more members or beneficiaries) also applies for the purposes of this Division.

In addition, this Division applies to a non-fixed trust as if it did not have 300 or more beneficiaries.

725-70 Consequences for down interest only if there is a material decrease in its market value

For a down interest of which you are an *affected owner, the direct value shift has consequences under this Division only if the sum of the decreases in the *market value of all down interests because of direct value shifts under the same *scheme as the direct value shift is at least $150,000.

Note: In working out the sum of the decreases in market value of all down interests, it will be necessary to include decreases not only in your down interests, but also in those of other affected owners and of entities that are not affected owners.

However, if, having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why a direct value shift happened under a different scheme from one or more other direct value shifts was so that subsection (1) would not be satisfied for one or more of the direct value shifts mentioned in this subsection, subsection (1) does not apply (and is taken never to have applied) to any of the direct value shifts.

725-80 Who is an affected owner of a down interest?

An entity is an affected owner of a *down interest if, and only if, the entity owns the down interest at the *decrease time and at least one of these paragraphs is satisfied:

the entity is the controller;

the entity was an associate of the controller at some time during or after the *scheme period;

the entity is an *active participant in the *scheme.

725-85 Who is an affected owner of an up interest?

An entity is an affected owner of an *up interest if, and only if:

there is at least one *affected owner of *down interests; and

the entity owns the up interest at the *increase time, or the interest is an up interest because it was issued to the entity at a *discount;

and at least one of these paragraphs is satisfied:

the entity is the controller;

the entity was an associate of the controller at some time during or after the *scheme period;

at some time during or after the scheme period, the entity was an associate of an entity that is an affected owner of down interests because it was an associate of the controller at some time during or after that period;

the entity is an *active participant in the *scheme.

725-90 Direct value shift that will be reversed

(1) The *direct value shift does not have consequences for you under this Division if:

the one or more things referred to in paragraph 725-145(1)(b) brought about a state of affairs, but for which the direct value shift would not have happened; and

as at the time referred to in that paragraph, it is more likely than not that, because of the *scheme, that state of affairs will cease to exist within 4 years after that time.

Example: Under a scheme, the voting rights attached to a class of shares in a company are changed. As a result, the market value of shares in that class decreases, and the market value of other classes of shares in the company increases. The company’s constitution provides that the change is to last for only 3 years.

However, this section stops applying if the state of affairs referred to in paragraph (1)(a) still exists:

at the end of those 4 years; or

when a realisation event happens to *down interests or *up interests of which you are, or any other entity is, an *affected owner;

whichever happens sooner.

(3) If this section stops applying, it is taken never to have applied to the *direct value shift.

Note: This may result in an assessment for an earlier income year having to be amended to give effect to the consequences that the direct value shift would have had for you under this Division if this section hadn’t applied.

725-95 Direct value shift resulting from reversal

A direct value shift does not have consequences for any entity under this Division if:

section 725-90 applies, and the state of affairs referred to in paragraph 725-90(1)(a) ceases to exist; and

the direct value shift would not have happened but for that state of affairs ceasing to exist.

(2) However, if section 725-90 stops applying, this section is taken never to have applied to the later direct value shift.

Subdivision 725-B — What is a direct value shift

Table of sections

725-145 When there is a direct value shift

725-150 Issue of equity or loan interests at a discount

725-155 Meaning of down interests, decrease time, up interests and increase time

725-160 What is the nature of a direct value shift?

725-165 If market value decrease or increase is only partly attributable to the scheme

725-145 When there is a direct value shift

(1) There is a direct value shift under a *scheme involving *equity or loan interests in an entity (the target entity) if:

there is a decrease in the *market value of one or more equity or loan interests in the target entity; and

the decrease is reasonably attributable to one or more things done under the scheme, and occurs at or after the time when that thing, or the first of those things, is done; and

either or both of subsections (2) and (3) are satisfied.

Examples of something done under a scheme are issuing new shares at a *discount, buying back shares or changing the voting rights attached to shares.

One or more *equity or loan interests in the target entity must be issued at a *discount. The issue must be, or must be reasonably attributable to, the thing, or one or more of the things, referred to in paragraph (1)(b). It must also occur at or after the time referred to in that paragraph.

Example: A company runs a family business. There are 2 shares originally issued for $2 each. They are owned by husband and wife. The market value of the shares is much greater (represented by the value of the assets of the company less its liabilities). The company issues one more share for $2 to their son.

Caution is needed in such a situation. The example would result in a large CGT liability for the husband and wife under this Division, because they have shifted 1/3 of the value of their own shares to their son. No such liability would arise if the share had been issued for its market value.

Or, there must be an increase in the *market value of one or more *equity or loan interests in the target entity. The increase must be reasonably attributable to the thing, or to one or more of the things, referred to in paragraph (1)(b). It must also occur at or after the time referred to in that paragraph.

725-150 Issue of equity or loan interests at a discount

(1) An *equity or loan interest is issued at a discount if, and only if, the *market value of the interest when issued exceeds the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives. The excess is the amount of the discount.

The payment that the issuing entity receives can include property. If it does, use the *market value of the property in working out the amount of the payment.

Amounts for which bonus equities are treated as being issued

If:

a *primary equity interest is issued as mentioned in subsection 130-20(1) (about bonus equities issued in relation to original equities); and

(b) subsection 130-20(3) does not apply (about bonus equities that are a dividend or otherwise assessable income);

subsection (1) of this section applies to the interest as if the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives were equal to the *cost base of the interest when issued (as worked out under section 130-20).

If:

(a) a *primary equity interest is issued as mentioned in subsection 6BA(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about bonus shares issued in relation to original shares); and

subsection 6BA(2) of that Act applies (about bonus shares that are a dividend);

subsection (1) of this section applies to the interest as if the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives were equal to the consideration worked out under subsection 6BA(2) of that Act.

If both of subsections (3) and (4) apply to the issue of the same *primary equity interest, subsection (1) of this section applies to the interest as if the amount of the payment that the issuing entity receives were equal to the greater of the amounts worked out under subsections (3) and (4).

Application of subsections (3), (4) and (5)

(6) Subsection (3) does not apply if, for the income year in which the interest is issued, the issuing entity is a public trading trust within the meaning of section 102R of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subsections (3), (4) and (5) have effect only for the purposes of working out whether a direct value shift has happened and, if so, its consequences (if any) under this Division.

725-155 Meaning of down interests, decrease time, up interests and increase time

(1) An *equity or loan interest in the target entity is a down interest if a decrease in its *market value is reasonably attributable to the one or more things referred to in paragraph 725-145(1)(b), and occurs at or after the time referred to in that paragraph. The time when the decrease happens is called the decrease time for that interest.

(2) An *equity or loan interest in the target entity is an up interest if subsection 725-145(2) or (3) is satisfied for the interest. The time when the interest is issued at a *discount, or the increase in *market value happens, is called the increase time for that interest.

725-160 What is the nature of a direct value shift?

The direct value shift has 2 aspects.

Overall, it consists of:

the decreases in *market value of the down interests; and

the issue at a *discount of the up interests covered by subsection 725-145(2); and

the increases in market value of the up interests covered by subsection 725-145(3).

(3) This Division also proceeds on the basis that the *direct value shift is from each of the *down interests to each of the *up interests.

725-165 If market value decrease or increase is only partly attributable to the scheme

If it is reasonable to conclude that an increase or decrease in *market value, or the issuing of an equity or loan interest at a *discount, is only partly caused by the doing of the one or more things under the *scheme, this Division applies to the increase, decrease, or issue at a discount, to that extent only.

Subdivision 725-C — Consequences of a direct value shift

Table of sections

General

725-205 Consequences depend on character of down interests and up interests

725-210 Consequences for down interests depend on pre-shift gains and losses

Special cases

725-220 Neutral direct value shifts

725-225 Issue of bonus shares or units

725-230 Off-market buy-backs

General

725-205 Consequences depend on character of down interests and up interests

The consequences for you of the direct value shift depend on the character of the *down interests and *up interests of which you are an *affected owner.

There are consequences for all your *down interests and *up interests in their character as *CGT assets. However, some of them may also be trading stock or *revenue assets. There are additional consequences for those interests in their character as trading stock or revenue assets.

Note: For example, you may own a down interest that is a CGT asset and a revenue asset.

Sections 725-240 to 725-255 set out the consequences for you of a shift in value from that interest in its character as a CGT asset. The cost base of the asset will be decreased, which will affect the calculation of a capital gain when a CGT event happens to the interest.

Section 725-320 sets out the consequences for you of a shift in value from that interest in its character as a revenue asset. The adjustment made under that section will affect the calculation of any profit on the sale of the interest.

Any overlap between the capital gain and the profit realised on the sale of the interest is then dealt with under section 118-20.

In some instances, the direct value shift may result in a taxing event generating a gain for you in the income year in which the shift happens. That gain will be both a capital gain (because the down interest can be characterised as a CGT asset) and an increase in your assessable income (because the down interest can be characterised as a revenue asset). Again, any overlap is dealt with under section 118-20.

725-210 Consequences for down interests depend on pre-shift gains and losses

The consequences for a down interest also depend on whether it has a pre-shift gain or a pre-shift loss.

(2) It has a pre-shift gain if, immediately before the *decrease time, its *market value was greater than its *adjustable value.

(3) It has a pre-shift loss if, immediately before the *decrease time, its *market value was equal to or less than its *adjustable value.

Special cases

725-220 Neutral direct value shifts

The consequences are different if the total decrease in *market value of your *down interests is equal to the sum of:

the total increase in market value of your *up interests; and

(b) the total *discounts given to you on the issue of your up interests.

In that case, this Subdivision and Subdivisions 725-D to 725-F apply to you as if the direct value shift:

consisted only of:

the decreases in *market value of your *down interests; and

the issue at a *discount of your *up interests covered by subsection 725-145(2); and

the increases in market value of your up interests covered by subsection 725-145(3); and

were from each of your down interests to each of your up interests.

This section has effect despite section 725-160.

725-225 Issue of bonus shares or units

(1) The consequences are different if you are an *affected owner of *up interests (the bonus interests) that the target entity issues to you, at a *discount, under the *scheme, in relation to *down interests (the original interests) of which you are an affected owner.

Effect of treatment under subsection 130-20(3)

(2) To the extent that the *direct value shift is to the bonus interests from original interests in relation to which the target entity issued bonus interests to which:

subsection 130-20(3) applies (because none of them is a dividend or otherwise assessable income); and

item 1 of the table in that subsection applies (because the original interests are post-CGT assets);

these paragraphs apply:

the respective *cost bases and *reduced cost bases of those original interests are not reduced;

the bonus interests referred to in subsection (1) do not give rise to a taxing event generating a gain for you under the table in section 725-245 on any of those original interests.

(3) To the extent that the *direct value shift is from the original interests to bonus interests to which subsection 130-20(3) applies (because none of them is a dividend or otherwise assessable income) and:

item 1 of the table in that subsection applies (because the original interests are post-CGT assets); or

item 2 of that table applies (because the original interests are pre-CGT assets and an amount has been paid for the bonus interests that you were required to pay);

the respective *cost bases and *reduced cost bases of those bonus interests are not uplifted.

Effect of treatment under subsection 6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936

(4) To the extent that the *direct value shift is to the bonus interests from original interests in relation to which the target entity issued bonus interests to which subsection 6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies (either because they are shares issued for no consideration and none of them is a dividend or because they qualify for the intercorporate dividend rebate):

the respective *adjustable values of those original interests, in their character as trading stock or *revenue assets, are not reduced; and

the bonus interests referred to in subsection (1) do not give rise to a taxing event generating a gain for you under the table in section 725-335 on any of those original interests.

(5) To the extent that the *direct value shift is from the original interests to bonus interests to which subsection 6BA(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies, the respective *adjustable values of those bonus interests of which you are an affected owner, in their character as *trading stock or *revenue assets, are not uplifted.

725-230 Off-market buy-backs

The consequences are different if:

a decrease in the *market value of a down interest of which you are an *affected owner is reasonably attributable to the target entity proposing to buy back that interest for less than its market value; and

the target entity does buy back that down interest; and

(c) subsection 159GZZZQ(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 treats you as having received the down interest’s market value worked out as if the buy-back had not occurred and was never proposed to occur.

The *adjustable value of the down interest is not reduced, and there is no taxing event generating a gain.

Note: The down interest is not dealt with here because it is already dealt with in Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Also, to the extent that the direct value shift is from the down interest to *up interests of which you are an *affected owner, uplifts in the *adjustable value of the up interests are worked out under either or both of:

item 8 of the table in subsection 725-250(2); and

item 9 of the table in subsection 725-335(3);

as if the down interest were one owned by another affected owner.

Subdivision 725-D — Consequences for down interest or up interest as CGT asset

Table of sections

725-240 CGT consequences; meaning of adjustable value

725-245 Table of taxing events generating a gain for interests as CGT assets

725-250 Table of consequences for adjustable values of interests as CGT assets

725-255 Multiple CGT consequences for the same down interest or up interest

725-240 CGT consequences; meaning of adjustable value

The CGT consequences for you of a direct value shift are of one or more of these 3 kinds:

there are one or more *taxing events generating a gain for *down interests of which you are an affected owner (see subsection (2));

the *cost base and *reduced cost base of down interests of which you are an *affected owner are reduced (see subsection (3));

the cost base and reduced cost base of *up interests of which you are an affected owner are uplifted (see subsection (4)).

Note: If there is a taxing event generating a gain, CGT event K8 happens. See section 104-250.

Taxing event generating a gain

To work out:

whether under the table in section 725-245 there is a taxing event generating a gain for you on a down interest; and

if so, the amount of the gain;

assume that the adjustable value from time to time of that or any other *equity or loan interest in the *target entity is its *cost base.

Reduction or uplift of cost base and reduced cost base

Note: For example, for that purpose the question whether the interest has a pre-shift gain or a pre-shift loss is determined on the basis that the interest’s adjustable value is its cost base.

The *cost base and the *reduced cost base of a down interest are reduced at the *decrease time to the extent that section 725-250 provides for the *adjustable value of the interest to be reduced.

The *cost base and the *reduced cost base of an up interest are uplifted at the *increase time to the extent that section 725-250 provides for the *adjustable value of the interest to be uplifted.

(5) However, the *cost base or *reduced cost base is uplifted only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the *market value of the interest when a later *CGT event happens to the interest.

To work out:

whether the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the interest is reduced or uplifted; and

if so, by how much;

assume that:

(c) the adjustable value from time to time of that or any other *equity or loan interest in the *target entity is its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate; and

(d) if the interest is an *up interest because it was issued at a *discount—the adjustable value of the interest immediately before it was issued was its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate, when it was issued.

Note: For example, for that purpose the question whether the interest has a pre-shift gain or a pre-shift loss is determined on the basis that the interest’s adjustable value is its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate.

Reductions and uplifts also apply to pre-CGT assets

A reduction or uplift occurs regardless of whether the entity that owns the interest *acquired it before, on or after 20 September 1985.

725-245 Table of taxing events generating a gain for interests as CGT assets

To the extent that the *direct value shift is from *down interests of which you are an *affected owner, and that are specified in an item in the table, to *up interests specified in that item, those up interests give rise to a taxing event generating a gain for you on each of those down interests. The gain is worked out under section 725-365.

Note: If there is a taxing event generating a gain on a down interest, CGT event K8 happens: see section 104-250. However, a capital gain you make under CGT event K8 is disregarded if the down interest:

• is your trading stock (see section 118-25); or

• is a pre-CGT asset (see subsection 104-250(5)).

725-250 Table of consequences for adjustable values of interests as CGT assets

The table in subsection (2) sets out consequences of the direct value shift for the *adjustable values of *down interests and *up interests of which you are an *affected owner, in their character as *CGT assets.

To the extent that the direct value shift is from *down interests specified in an item in the table to *up interests specified in that item:

the *adjustable value of each of those down interests is decreased by the amount worked out under the section (if any) specified for the down interests in the last column of that item; and

the adjustable value of each of those *up interests is uplifted by the amount worked out under the section (if any) specified for the up interests in that column.

Reducing uplift to prevent double increase in cost base etc.

However, if, apart from paragraph (2)(b), an amount is included in the *cost base or *reduced cost base of an up interest as a result of the *scheme under which the direct value shift happens, the uplift in the *adjustable value of the interest under that paragraph is reduced by that amount.

725-255 Multiple CGT consequences for the same down interest or up interest

A down interest or up interest of which you are an *affected owner may be covered by 2 or more items in the table in subsection 725-250(2).

If the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the same down interest or up interest is decreased or uplifted under 2 or more items, it is decreased or uplifted by the total of the amounts worked out under those items.

Note: If subsection 725-250(3) is relevant, it will affect all the uplifts worked out under all those items.

If for a particular down interest there is a taxing event generating a gain under an item in the table in section 725-245, that taxing event is in addition to:

each taxing event generating a gain for that interest under any other item in that table; and

each decrease in the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the interest under an item in the table in subsection 725-250(2).

Subdivision 725-E — Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock or a revenue asset

Table of sections

725-310 Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock

725-315 Adjustable value of trading stock

725-320 Consequences for down interest or up interest as a revenue asset

725-325 Adjustable value of revenue asset

725-335 How to work out those consequences

725-340 Multiple trading stock or revenue asset consequences for the same down interest or up interest

725-310 Consequences for down interest or up interest as trading stock

The consequences of the direct value shift for your trading stock are of one or more of these 3 kinds:

the *adjustable values of *down interests of which you are an *affected owner are reduced (see subsection (2));

the adjustable values of *up interests of which you are an affected owner are uplifted (see subsection (3));

there are one or more *taxing events generating a gain for down interests of which you are an affected owner (see subsection (5)).

Effect of reduction or uplift of adjustable value

If the *adjustable value of a down interest that is your trading stock is reduced under section 725-335, you are treated as if:

*immediately before the *decrease time, you had sold the interest to someone else (at *arm’s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its *adjustable value immediately before the decrease time; and

immediately after the decrease time, you had bought the interest back for the reduced adjustable value.

If the *adjustable value of an up interest that is your trading stock is uplifted under section 725-335, you are treated as if:

*immediately before the *increase time, you had sold the interest to someone else (at *arm’s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its *adjustable value immediately before the increase time; and

immediately after the increase time, you had bought the interest back for the uplifted adjustable value.

However, the increase in the cost of an up interest because of paragraph (3)(b) is taken into account from time to time only to the extent that the amount of the increase is still reflected in the *market value of the interest.

Note: The situations where the increase in cost would be taken into account include:

• in working out your deductions for the cost of trading stock acquired during the income year in which the increase time happens; and

• the end of an income year if the interest’s closing value as trading stock is worked out on the basis of its cost; and

• the start of the income year in which the interest is disposed of, if that happens in a later income year and the interest’s closing value as trading stock at the end of the previous income year was worked out on the basis of its cost.

If the interest stops being trading stock, section 70-110 treats you as having disposed of it.

Taxing event generating a gain

For each taxing event generating a gain under an item in the table in subsection 725-335(3), the gain is included in your assessable income for the income year in which the *decrease time happens.

725-315 Adjustable value of trading stock

If a *down interest or *up interest is your *trading stock, its adjustable value at a particular time is:

if the interest has been trading stock of yours ever since the start of the income year in which that time occurs—its *value as trading stock at the start of the income year; or

otherwise—its cost.

Note 1: If an interest has been affected by an earlier direct value shift during the same income year, it will be treated as having already been sold and repurchased (because of an earlier application of section 725-310). As a result, the cost on repurchase becomes its adjustable value immediately before the decrease time or increase time for the later direct value shift.

Note 2: The adjustable value of an interest that is an up interest because it was issued at a discount is worked out under paragraph (b).

725-320 Consequences for down interest or up interest as a revenue asset

The consequences of the direct value shift for your *revenue assets are of one or more of these 3 kinds:

the *adjustable values of *down interests of which you are an *affected owner are reduced (see subsection (2));

the adjustable values of *up interests of which you are an affected owner are uplifted (see subsection (3));

one or more *taxing events generating a gain for down interests of which you are an affected owner (see subsection (5)).

Effect of reduction or uplift of adjustable value

If the *adjustable value of a down interest that is your revenue asset is decreased under section 725-335, you are treated as if:

*immediately before the *decrease time, you had sold the interest to someone else for its *adjustable value immediately before the decrease time; and

immediately afterwards, you had bought the interest back for the reduced adjustable value; and

from the time when you bought it back, the interest continued to be a revenue asset, for the same reasons as it was a revenue asset before you sold it.

If the *adjustable value of an up interest that is your revenue asset is uplifted under section 725-335, you are treated as if:

*immediately before the *increase time, you had sold the interest to someone else for its *adjustable value immediately before the increase time; and

immediately afterwards, you had bought the interest back for the uplifted adjustable value; and

from the time when you bought it back, the interest continued to be a revenue asset, for the same reasons as it was a revenue asset before you sold it.

However, the uplift in *adjustable value is taken into account only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the *market value of the interest when it is disposed of or otherwise realised.

Taxing event generating a gain

For each taxing event generating a gain under an item in the table in subsection 725-335(3), the gain is included in your assessable income for the income year in which the *decrease time happens.

725-325 Adjustable value of revenue asset

(1) If a *down interest is your *revenue asset, its adjustable value immediately before the *decrease time is the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the interest if you disposed of it immediately before the decrease time.

(2) If an *up interest is your *revenue asset and it increases in *market value because of the *direct value shift, its adjustable value immediately before the *increase time is the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the interest if you disposed of it immediately before the increase time.

(3) If an *up interest is your *revenue asset and it is issued at a *discount, it is taken to have an adjustable value immediately before it is issued equal to the consideration paid or given by you for the interest.

Note: If an interest has been affected by an earlier direct value shift during the same income year, it will be treated as having already been sold and repurchased (because of an earlier application of section 725-320). As a result, the cost on repurchase becomes its adjustable value immediately before the decrease time or increase time for the later direct value shift.

725-335 How to work out those consequences

This section sets out the consequences of the direct value shift for a down interest or up interest as trading stock or a revenue asset.

If you have both trading stock and *revenue assets, items 1 and 2 of the table in subsection (3) can apply once to the trading stock and again to the revenue assets. The other items apply (if at all) to the trading stock and revenue assets together.

Decreases and uplifts in adjustable value

To the extent that the direct value shift is from *down interests specified in an item in the table to *up interests specified in that item:

the *adjustable value of each of those down interests is decreased by the amount worked out under the section (if any) specified for the down interests in the last column of that item; and

the adjustable value of each of those *up interests is uplifted by the amount worked out under the section (if any) specified for the up interests in that column.

Reducing uplift to prevent double increase in adjustable value

However, if, apart from paragraph (3)(b), an amount is included, as a result of the *scheme under which the direct value shift happens, in the *adjustable value of an up interest that is your trading stock or revenue asset, the uplift in the adjustable value of the interest under that paragraph is reduced by that amount.

Taxing events generating a gain

To the extent that the direct value shift is from *down interests:

of which you are an *affected owner; and

that are specified in item 2, 4 or 7 in the table in subsection (3);

to *up interests specified in that item, those up interests give rise to a taxing event generating a gain for you under that item on each of those down interests. The gain is worked out under section 725-365.

725-340 Multiple trading stock or revenue asset consequences for the same down interest or up interest

A down interest or up interest of which you are an *affected owner may be covered by 2 or more items in the table in subsection 725-335(3).

If the *adjustable value of the same down interest or up interest is decreased or uplifted under 2 or more items, it is decreased or uplifted by the total of the amounts worked out under those items.

Note: If subsection 725-335(3A) is relevant, it will affect all the uplifts worked out under all those items.

If for a particular down interest there is a taxing event generating a gain under an item, that taxing event is in addition to:

each taxing event generating a gain for that interest under any other item in the table; and

each decrease in the *adjustable value of the interest under that or any other item in the table.

Subdivision 725-F — Value adjustments and taxed gains

Table of sections

725-365 Decreases in adjustable values of down interests (with pre-shift gains), and taxing events generating a gain

725-370 Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under certain table items

725-375 Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under other table items

725-380 Decreases in adjustable value of down interests (with pre-shift losses)

725-365 Decreases in adjustable values of down interests (with pre-shift gains), and taxing events generating a gain

Use the following method statement:

to work out the amount of the gain for a taxing event generating a gain under:

section 725-245; or

item 2, 4 or 7 of the table in subsection 725-335(3); and

to work out the decrease in *adjustable value of a down interest under:

item 1, 2, 3, 4 or 6 of the table in subsection 725-250(2); or

item 1, 2, 4 or 7 of the table in subsection 725-335(3).

Method statement

Step 1. Group together all *down interests that:

are of the kind referred to in the relevant item; and

immediately before the *decrease time, had the same *adjustable value as the down interest; and

immediately before that time had the same *market value as the down interest; and

sustained the same decrease in market value as the down interest because of the direct value shift.

Step 2. Work out the value shifted from that group of *down interests to the *up interests referred to in the relevant item using the following formula:

Step 3. Work out the notional adjustable value of the value shifted from that group of *down interests to those *up interests using the formula:

Step 4. The decrease in the *adjustable value of the *down interest under the relevant item is equal to:

Step 5. For a *taxing event generating a gain under the relevant item, the amount of the gain is equal to:

725-370 Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under certain table items

Use the following method statement to work out the uplift in *adjustable value of an up interest under:

item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 725-250(2); or

item 1 of the table in subsection 725-335(3).

Method statement

Step 1. If the *market value of the up interest increases because of the direct value shift, group together all up interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that:

immediately before the *increase time, had the same *adjustable value as the up interest; and

sustained the same increase in market value as the up interest because of the direct value shift.

If the up interest is issued at a *discount, group together all *up interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that:

immediately before the *increase time, had the same *adjustable value as the up interest; and

because of the direct value shift, are issued at the same discount as the up interest.

Step 2. The notional adjustable value of the value shifted from the *down interests referred to in the relevant item to all the *up interests referred to in that item has already been worked out under one or more applications of step 3 of the method statement in section 725-365.

Step 3. Use the following formula to work out how much of that notional adjustable value is attributable to the value shifted to the group of *up interests referred to in step 1 of this method statement:

Step 4. The uplift in the *adjustable value of the *up interest under the relevant item is equal to:

725-375 Uplifts in adjustable values of up interests under other table items

Use the following method statement to work out the uplift in *adjustable value of an up interest under:

item 3, 4, 5 or 8 of the table in subsection 725-250(2); or

item 2, 3, 6 or 9 of the table in subsection 725-335(3).

Method statement

Step 1. If the *market value of the up interest increases because of the direct value shift, group together all *up interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that sustained the same increase in market value as the up interest because of the direct value shift.

If the up interest is issued at a discount, group together all up interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that are issued at a discount of the same amount as the up interest because of the direct value shift.

Step 2. The value shifted to that group of *up interests from the *down interests referred to in the relevant item is the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

sum of the group increases or discounts means (as appropriate):

the sum of the increases in *market value of all *up interests in the group because of the direct value shift; or

the sum of the *discounts at which all *up interests in the group were issued because of the direct value shift.

total value of the direct value shift means:

if the sum of the decreases in *market value of all *down interests because of the direct value shift is equal to or greater than the sum of the increases in market value of all *up interests and all *discounts given because of the shift—the sum of the decreases; or

if the sum of the decreases in market value of all down interests because of the direct value shift is less than the sum of the increases in market value of all up interests and all discounts given because of the shift—the sum of the increases and discounts.

Step 3. The uplift in the *adjustable value of the *up interest under the relevant item is equal to:

725-380 Decreases in adjustable value of down interests (with pre-shift losses)

Use the following method statement to work out the decrease in *adjustable value of a down interest under:

item 5 or 7 of the table in subsection 725-250(2); or

item 3, 5 or 8 of the table in subsection 725-335(3).

Method statement

Step 1. Group together all *down interests of the kind referred to in the relevant item that:

immediately before the *decrease time, had the same *adjustable value as the down interest; and

immediately before that time had the same *market value as the down interest; and

sustained the same decrease in market value as the down interest because of the direct value shift.

Step 2. Work out the value shifted from that group of *down interests to the *up interests referred to in the relevant item using the formula:

Step 3. The decrease in *adjustable value of the down interest under the relevant item is equal to:

Division 727 — Indirect value shifting affecting interests in companies and trusts, and arising from non-arm’s length dealings

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 727

727-A Scope of the indirect value shifting rules

727-B What is an indirect value shift

727-C Exclusions

727-D Working out the market value of economic benefits

727-E Key concepts

727-F Consequences of an indirect value shift

727-G The realisation time method

727-H The adjustable value method

727-K Reduction of loss on equity or loan interests realised before the IVS time

727-L Indirect value shift resulting from a direct value shift

Guide to Division 727

727-1 What this Division is about

If there is a net shift of value between 2 related entities because of a non-arm’s length dealing, this Division:

prevents losses from arising, because of the value shift, on realisation of direct or indirect equity or loan interests in the losing entity; and

within limits, prevents gains from arising, because of the value shift, on realisation of direct or indirect equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.

However, it does so only for interests that are owned by entities involved in the value shift.

Table of sections

727-5 What is an indirect value shift?

727-10 How does this Division deal with indirect value shifts?

727-15 When does an indirect value shift have consequences under this Division?

727-25 Effect of this Division on realisations at a loss that occur before the nature or extent of an indirect value shift can be fully determined

727-5 What is an indirect value shift?

An indirect value shift arises when there is a net shift of value from one entity to another.

Example: Company A transfers property to company B in return for a cash payment. If the market value of the property is $180 million but the cash payment is only $50 million, there is a net shift of value from company A to company B of $130 million.

(2) It is called indirect because the transaction will have the indirect effect of shifting value from equity or loan interests in the losing entity to equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.

This is because the net shift in value between the entities will usually decrease the market value of interests in the losing entity and increase the market value of interests in the gaining entity.

Example: Assume that company C owns all the shares in company A and company D owns all the shares in company B. The net shift of value from company A to company B will reduce the value of company C’s shares in company A and increase the value of company D’s shares in company B.

It will also produce corresponding effects further up a chain of entities.

Example: Assume that company E owns all the shares in company C and company D. The net shift of value from company A to company B will also reduce the value of company E’s shares in company C and increase the value of its shares in company D.

(4) This Division is not concerned with the tax treatment of the net shift in value between the entities at the bottom of the chains. Instead, it deals with the effects on the market value of interests (both direct and indirect) in those entities.

An indirect value shift distorts the relationship between the market value of an equity or loan interest and its value for income tax purposes. When the interest is realised, this can produce an inappropriate loss for income tax purposes, or an inappropriate gain.

Example: If company E sold its shares in company C, the indirect value shift could (apart from this Division) result in a loss for income tax purposes. Company E could defer the corresponding gain on its shares in company D by not selling these.

727-10 How does this Division deal with indirect value shifts?

To prevent an inappropriate loss or gain from arising on realisation of an interest, this Division reduces the amount of the loss or gain (realisation time method). However, a choice can be made to adjust the interest’s value for income tax purposes in a way that takes account of the indirect value shift (adjustable value method).

(2) This Division does not create taxing events giving rise to gains or losses.

727-15 When does an indirect value shift have consequences under this Division?

Indirect value shift is defined very broadly, but the application of this Division is limited in various ways.

The losing entity must be a company or trust (except a superannuation entity). However, the gaining entity can be any kind of entity, including an individual.

(3) This Division does not apply if entities deal with each other at arm’s length, or provide economic benefits in return for full market value.

(4) The losing entity and the gaining entity must be connected by having had the same ultimate controller. In the case of closely held entities, they may instead be connected by having had a high level of common ownership.

The only interests affected are those owned by entities involved in the indirect value shift or by their associates.

There are a range of exclusions, such as:

exclusions for minor indirect value shifts; and

a series of rules designed to provide safe harbour treatment for common transactions relating to services; and

anti-overlap provisions to prevent double-counting.

Rules of thumb are included to make it easier to determine the market value of some kinds of economic benefits.

To reduce compliance costs for:

*small business entities; and

entities that meet the CGT small business net asset threshold ($6 million);

interests owned by those entities are not affected by this Division.

727-25 Effect of this Division on realisations at a loss that occur before the nature or extent of an indirect value shift can be fully determined

To determine whether a scheme gives rise to an indirect value shift, it must be possible to identify all the economic benefits under the scheme, and the providers and recipients of those benefits.

Before then, interests that might be affected by the scheme may be realised at a loss. Subdivision 727-K contains special rules that apply if that happens.

Subdivision 727-A — Scope of the indirect value shifting rules

Table of sections

727-95 Main object

727-100 When an indirect value shift has consequences under this Division

727-105 Ultimate controller test

727-110 Common-ownership nexus test (if both losing and gaining entities are closely held)

727-125 No consequences if losing entity is a complying superannuation entity etc.

727-95 Main object

The main object of this Division is:

to prevent inappropriate losses from arising on the realisation of direct or indirect equity or loan interests in an entity from which there has been a net shift of value because of a dealing that is not at *arm’s length; and

to prevent inappropriate gains from arising on the realisation of *direct equity interests or *indirect equity interests in the entity to which that value has been shifted;

in cases where the 2 entities are related as set out in this Division.

727-100 When an indirect value shift has consequences under this Division

An indirect value shift (see Subdivision 727-B) has consequences under this Division if, and only if:

the *losing entity is at the time of the indirect value shift a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)); and

in relation to either or both of the following:

the losing entity *providing one or more economic benefits to the gaining entity *in connection with the *scheme from which the indirect value shift results;

the gaining entity providing one or more economic benefits to the losing entity in connection with the scheme;

the 2 entities are not dealing with each other at *arm’s length; and

either or both of sections 727-105 and 727-110 are satisfied; and

no exclusion in Subdivision 727-C applies.

Note 1: The consequences for direct and indirect interests in the losing entity or in the gaining entity are set out in Subdivision 727-F. If those consequences are to be worked out using the realisation time method (under Subdivision 727-G), there are further exclusions for certain 95% services indirect value shifts: see section 727-700.

Note 2: An indirect value shift does not have consequences for interests in the losing entity or gaining entity owned immediately before the IVS time by an entity that:

• is a small business entity for each income year that includes any of the IVS period; or

• would satisfy the maximum net asset value test in section 152-15 throughout the IVS period.

See subsection 727-470(2).

727-105 Ultimate controller test

It must be the case that, at some time during the IVS period:

the *losing entity and the *gaining entity have the same ultimate controller; or

the ultimate controller of the losing entity is the same entity that was the ultimate controller of the gaining entity at a different time during that period; or

the gaining entity is the ultimate controller of the losing entity; or

the losing entity is the ultimate controller of the gaining entity.

For the concept of IVS period, see section 727-150.

For the concept of ultimate controller, see section 727-350.

727-110 Common-ownership nexus test (if both losing and gaining entities are closely held)

Or, it must be the case that:

at some time during the IVS period, neither the *losing entity nor the *gaining entity has 300 or more members (in the case of a company) or 300 or more beneficiaries (in the case of a trust); and

the losing entity and the gaining entity have a *common-ownership nexus within the IVS period.

For the concept of IVS period, see section 727-150.

For the concept of common-ownership nexus, see section 727-400.

Section 124-810 (under which certain companies and trusts are not regarded as having 300 or more members or beneficiaries) also applies for the purposes of this Division.

In addition, this Division applies to a non-fixed trust as if it did not have 300 or more beneficiaries.

727-125 No consequences if losing entity is a complying superannuation entity etc.

An indirect value shift has no consequences under this Division if the *losing entity is one of the following in relation to the income year in which the indirect value shift happens:

a *complying superannuation entity;

a non-complying superannuation fund;

a non-complying approved deposit fund.

Subdivision 727-B — What is an indirect value shift

Table of sections

727-150 How to determine whether a scheme results in an indirect value shift

727-155 Providing economic benefits

727-160 When an economic benefit is provided in connection with a scheme

727-165 Preventing double-counting of economic benefits

727-150 How to determine whether a scheme results in an indirect value shift

A *scheme can result in one or more *indirect value shifts only if one or more economic benefits have been, are being, or are to be, *provided *in connection with the scheme.

The question whether the *scheme has that result must be determined by reference to the facts and circumstances that exist at the earliest time (either when the scheme is entered into or later) when it is reasonable to conclude that:

all the economic benefits that have been, are being, or are to be, *provided *in connection with the scheme can be identified; and

for each of those economic benefits:

the entity that has provided, is providing, or is to provide, the economic benefit can be identified; and

the entity to which the economic benefit has been, is being, or is to be, provided can be identified; and

if the economic benefit is to be provided—those entities are in existence, and the providing of the economic benefit is not contingent; and

there are no other economic benefits that are to be provided in connection with the scheme if some contingency is met.

That time is called the IVS time for the scheme.

• direct or indirect interests in a company or trust are realised at a loss when the IVS time for the scheme has not yet happened (even if it never happens); and

• the company or trust has provided, is providing, is to provide, or might provide, economic benefits in connection with the scheme;

there may be consequences for those interests similar to those of an indirect value shift resulting from the scheme. See Subdivision 727-K.

Note: In most cases, the IVS time will be at or soon after the scheme is entered into. However, if:

(3) The *scheme results in an indirect value shift from one entity (the losing entity) to another entity (the gaining entity) if the total *market value of the one or more economic benefits (the greater benefits) that the losing entity has *provided, is providing, or is to provide, to the gaining entity *in connection with the scheme exceeds:

(a) the total market value of the one or more economic benefits (lesser benefits) that the gaining entity has provided, is providing, or is to provide, to the losing entity in connection with the scheme; or

if there are no economic benefits covered by paragraph (a)—nil.

That excess is the amount of the indirect value shift.

The *market value of an economic benefit is to be determined as at the earliest time when it is reasonable to conclude that:

the economic benefit can be identified; and

paragraph (2)(b) is satisfied for that benefit.

For more rules affecting how the market value of an economic benefit is determined, see Subdivision 727-D.

Neither the *losing entity nor the *gaining entity needs to be a party to the *scheme. A benefit can be provided by act or omission.

The indirect value shift happens at the IVS time.

(7) The IVS period for a *scheme starts immediately before the scheme is entered into and ends at the *IVS time.

A contingency that is artificial, or is virtually certain to be met, is treated under this Division as if it had been met.

727-155 Providing economic benefits

Examples

These are some examples of an entity providing an economic benefit to another entity:

the first entity pays an amount to the other entity (in this case the *market value of the benefit is the amount of the payment);

the first entity provides an asset or services to the other entity;

the first entity does something that creates an asset in the hands of the other entity (for example, a company issues shares to its members);

the first entity incurs a liability to the other entity, or increases a liability it already owes to the other entity;

the first entity terminates all or part of a liability owed by the other entity;

the first entity does something that increases the market value of an asset that the other entity holds.

These examples are not intended to limit the meaning of providing an economic benefit.

Things treated as economic benefits

This Division applies as if the ending of:

a *primary equity interest or secondary equity interest in an entity; or

a right that the owner of a *primary equity interest or secondary equity interest in an entity has because of owning the interest;

were an economic benefit that the owner of the interest provides to that entity.

727-160 When an economic benefit is provided in connection with a scheme

(1) An economic benefit has been, is being, is to be, or might be, *provided by an entity to another entity in connection with a *scheme if, and only if:

the benefit has been, is being, is to be, or might be, provided under the scheme; or

the providing of the benefit is reasonably attributable to:

something that has been, is being, is to be, or might be, done or omitted under the scheme (whether before, at the time of, or after, the providing of the benefit) by an entity that is either of those entities or a third entity; or

2 or more such things.

An entity referred to in paragraph (1)(b) need not be a party to the *scheme. A benefit can be provided by act or omission.

727-165 Preventing double-counting of economic benefits

Rights to have economic benefits provided

If an economic benefit that has been, is being, is to be, or might be, *provided as mentioned in subsection 727-150(3) or 727-855(1) consists of a right to have economic benefits provided, that subsection applies to the right but does not also apply to those economic benefits.

Example: Acme Ltd enters into an agreement with Paragon Pty Ltd under which Acme is to provide services to Paragon over a 5 year period in return for payments.

Paragon’s rights under the agreement are economic benefits that Acme provides to Paragon when the agreement is made. The services are economic benefits that Acme is to provide to Paragon.

Because of this subsection, the market value of the rights is taken into account in working out whether there has been an indirect value shift, but the market value of the services is not.

Effect of an economic benefit on interests in the entity to which it is provided

If an economic benefit has been, is being, or is to be, *provided to an entity, then, for the purposes of subsection 727-150(3) or 727-855(1), disregard an economic benefit to the extent that:

it consists of an increase in the *market value of:

an equity or loan interest in the entity; or

an indirect equity or loan interest in the entity; and

the increase is reasonably attributable to the first-mentioned benefit.

Subdivision 727-C — Exclusions

Guide to Subdivision 727-C

727-200 What this Subdivision is about

Some indirect value shifts do not have consequences under this Division.

Table of sections

General

727-215 Amount does not exceed $50,000

727-220 Disposal of asset at cost, or at undervalue if full value is not reflected in adjustable values of equity or loan interests in the losing entity

Indirect value shifts involving services

727-230 Services provided by losing entity to gaining entity for at least their direct cost

727-235 Services provided by gaining entity to losing entity for no more than a commercially realistic price

727-240 What services certain provisions apply to

727-245 How to work out certain amounts for the purposes of sections 727-230 and 727-235

Anti-overlap provisions

727-250 Distribution by an entity to a member or beneficiary

Miscellaneous

727-260 Shift down a wholly-owned chain of entities

General

Note 1: If the consequences of an indirect value shift are to be worked out using the realisation time method (under Subdivision 727-G), there are further exclusions for certain 95% services indirect value shifts: see section 727-700.

Note 2: For cases where there may be both a direct value shift and an indirect value shift, see Subdivision 727-L.

727-215 Amount does not exceed $50,000

An indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if the amount of it does not exceed $50,000.

However, subsection (1) does not apply to an indirect value shift (and is taken never to have applied to it) if:

before, at the same time as, or after it, another indirect value shift happens for which the same entity is the losing entity as for the first indirect value shift; and

having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why one of the indirect value shifts happened under a different *scheme from the other was so that its amount would not exceed $50,000.

727-220 Disposal of asset at cost, or at undervalue if full value is not reflected in adjustable values of equity or loan interests in the losing entity

An indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if the conditions in this section are met.

The *greater benefits must consist entirely of:

the *losing entity transferring a CGT asset to the *gaining entity; or

a right to have the losing entity transfer an asset to the gaining entity.

There must be *lesser benefits and, as at the IVS time, the total *market value of the lesser benefits must not be less than the greatest of these amounts:

the asset’s *cost base at that time;

the asset’s cost;

the asset’s market value immediately before the most recent time (if any), since the *losing entity *acquired the asset, when an *affected owner has acquired:

a *primary equity interest in the losing entity; or

an indirect primary equity interest in the losing entity.

(4) A *primary equity interest in an entity is an indirect primary equity interest in another entity if, and only if:

the first entity owns a primary equity interest in the other entity; or

the first entity owns a primary equity interest that is an indirect primary equity interest in the other entity because of one or more other applications of this subsection.

Indirect value shifts involving services

727-230 Services provided by losing entity to gaining entity for at least their direct cost

An indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if:

to the extent of at least 95% of their total *market value, the *greater benefits consist entirely of:

a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240 provided directly by the losing entity to the gaining entity; or

services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are being, or are to be, so provided;

or both; and

there are *lesser benefits and, as at the IVS time, the total market value of the lesser benefits is not less than the total of:

the present value of the direct cost to the losing entity of providing the services; and

the present value of a reasonable allocation of the total direct cost to the losing entity of providing services that include the first-mentioned services (so far as it is not already covered by subparagraph (i)).

To work out the costs and present values referred to in paragraph (b), see section 727-245.

727-235 Services provided by gaining entity to losing entity for no more than a commercially realistic price

An indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if:

there are *lesser benefits and, to the extent of at least 95% of their total *market value, the lesser benefits consist entirely of:

a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240 provided directly by the gaining entity to the losing entity; or

services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are being, or are to be, so provided;

or both; and

as at the IVS time, the total market value of the greater benefits is not more than the total of:

the present value of the direct cost to the gaining entity of providing the services; and

the present value of a reasonable allocation of the total direct cost to the gaining entity of providing services that include the first-mentioned services (so far as it is not already covered by subparagraph (i)); and

the present value of a reasonable allocation of the indirect cost to the gaining entity of providing the first-mentioned services; and

the mark-up worked out under subsection (2) or (3) of this section.

To work out the costs and present values referred to in paragraph (1)(b), see section 727-245.

If it is reasonable to estimate that an entity providing the same quantity of services of the same kind in the same market would charge for them on the basis of a particular percentage mark-up, or on the basis of a percentage mark-up within a particular range, the mark-up for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(iv) is:

• the total of the respective present values of the costs mentioned in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i), (ii) and (iii);

multiplied by:

• that percentage mark-up, or the highest percentage in that range.

Otherwise, the mark-up for the purposes of subparagraph (1)(b)(iv) is 10% of the total of the respective present values of the costs mentioned in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i), (ii) and (iii).

727-240 What services certain provisions apply to

Sections 727-230, 727-235, 727-700 and 727-725 apply only to services consisting of:

doing work (including professional work and giving professional advice or any other kind of advice); or

Note: Examples include accounting or legal services; advertising services and financial management services.

providing (including allowing use of) facilities for entertainment, recreation or instruction; or

leasing, renting, hiring, or allowing the use of, any asset; or

packaging, transporting or storing any property; or

providing insurance; or

services provided, by a banker to a customer, in the course of the banker carrying on the business of banking; or

lending money or providing any other form of financial accommodation.

It does not matter whether services covered by paragraph (1)(a) also involve supplying property.

727-245 How to work out certain amounts for the purposes of sections 727-230 and 727-235

The costs mentioned in paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b) are to be worked out:

in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices; and

to the extent that the services are to be provided in the future, on the basis of a reasonable estimate of those costs.

(2) To avoid doubt, the direct cost or indirect cost mentioned in paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b) does not include:

to the extent that the services consist of or include lending money or providing any other form of financial accommodation—the amount of the loan or other accommodation; or

to the extent that the services consist of or include leasing, renting, hiring, or allowing the use of, any asset:

the cost of acquiring the asset; or

the cost of acquiring an interest in, or right in respect of, the asset in order to provide the services.

Example: Acme Ltd is the holding company of Group Financier Pty Ltd. Group Financier Pty Ltd borrows $20 million at 7% per annum, and on lends it to other subsidiaries of Acme Ltd at 8% per annum.

The $20 million does not form part of Group Financier Pty Ltd’s direct cost of the services it provides to the other subsidiaries in the form of the on lending. However, the 7% interest that Group Financier Pty Ltd pays on the $20 million does form part of that direct cost.

(3) The present values mentioned in paragraph 727-230(b) or 727-235(1)(b) are to be worked out using a discount rate equal to the rate that, for the purposes of section 109N of Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, is the benchmark interest rate for the income year in which the *IVS time occurs.

Note: That section is about distributions to entities connected with a private company.

Anti-overlap provisions

727-250 Distribution by an entity to a member or beneficiary

An indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if:

the *greater benefits consist entirely of:

a distribution of income or capital that the *losing entity makes to the *gaining entity; or

a right to a distribution of income or capital that the losing entity is to make to the gaining entity;

because the gaining entity holds *primary equity interests in the losing entity; and

either:

an amount covered by one or more of subsections (2), (3) and (4); or

the total of 2 or more such amounts;

equals or exceeds the amount of the distribution.

Conditions

This subsection covers an amount that the assessable income, exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income of the gaining entity for any income year includes because of the distribution or right.

This subsection covers an amount by which the *cost base or *reduced cost base (or both) of some or all of the *primary equity interests referred to in subsection (1) changes because of the distribution or right.

This subsection covers an amount that, because of the distribution or right, is taken into account:

under section 116-20 in working out the capital proceeds of a CGT event that happens during any income year to some or all of the *primary equity interests referred to in subsection (1); or

in working out a *capital gain that an entity makes from CGT event E4 or G1 happening during any income year to some or all of those primary equity interests; or

in working out whether a loss or gain is *realised for income tax purposes by a realisation event that happens to some or all of those primary equity interests (in their character as trading stock or *revenue assets).

Application of section to deemed dividend

If a corporate tax entity makes a *distribution that is not otherwise a distribution of income or capital, this section applies as if the distribution were a distribution of income or capital the entity made.

Note: Subsection (5) extends this section to cover something that is taken to be a dividend paid by a company. Compare item 1 of the table in subsection 960-120(1).

Miscellaneous

727-260 Shift down a wholly-owned chain of entities

An indirect value shift does not have consequences under this Division if the *gaining entity is a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *losing entity throughout the IVS period.

Exception: impact on market value of primary loan interest

However, subsection (1) does not apply if the indirect value shift has produced a *disaggregated attributable decrease, in the *market value of an *affected interest in the *losing entity that is also a primary loan interest in an entity covered by subsection (3), for the owner of the interest.

This subsection covers:

the *losing entity; and

an entity that owns *primary equity interests in an entity that this subsection covers because of one or more previous applications of it.

Subdivision 727-D — Working out the market value of economic benefits

Table of sections

727-300 What the rules in this Subdivision are for

727-315 Transfer, for its adjustable value, of depreciating asset acquired for less than $1,500,000

727-300 What the rules in this Subdivision are for

This Subdivision is used in determining whether there has been an indirect value shift and, if so:

whether it has consequences under this Division; and

if it does, the amount of it.

727-315 Transfer, for its adjustable value, of depreciating asset acquired for less than $1,500,000

This Division applies to an economic benefit consisting of:

an entity transferring to another entity a depreciating asset (except a building or structure) for which the transferring entity has deducted or can deduct an amount under Division 40; or

a right to have an entity transfer such a depreciating asset to another entity;

as if the economic benefit’s *market value were equal to the greater (the residual value) of:

the asset’s *adjustable value at the time when the economic benefit was or is *provided; and

the value assigned to the asset at that time in the transferring entity’s books;

but only if:

as at that time, the *cost of the unit to the transferring entity is less than $1,500,000; and

it is reasonable for the transferring entity to conclude that the unit’s actual market value at that time was, is, or will be, not less than 80%, and not more than 120%, of the residual value; and

both the transferring entity and the other entity choose to have the market value of that economic benefit treated as being equal to the residual value.

If:

each of 2 or more economic benefits of the kind mentioned in subsection (1) has been, is being, is to be, or might be, provided by the same transferring entity, to the same other entity, *in connection with the same *scheme; and

it is reasonable for the transferring entity to conclude that the total of the *depreciating assets’ actual *market values at the respective times when the economic benefits were or are *provided was, is, or will be, not less than 80%, and not more than 120%, of the total of their respective residual values under subsection (1);

paragraph (1)(f) is taken to be satisfied for each of the economic benefits.

Subdivision 727-E — Key concepts

Table of sections

Ultimate controller

727-350 Ultimate controller

727-355 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a company

727-360 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a fixed trust

727-365 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a non-fixed trust

727-370 Preventing double counting for percentage stake tests

727-375 Tests in this Subdivision are exhaustive

Common-ownership nexus and ultimate stake of a particular percentage

727-400 When 2 entities have a common-ownership nexus within a period

727-405 Ultimate stake of a particular percentage in a company

727-410 Ultimate stake of a particular percentage in a fixed trust

727-415 Rules for tracing

Ultimate controller

727-350 Ultimate controller

An entity is an ultimate controller of another entity if, and only if:

the first entity *controls (for value shifting purposes) the other entity; and

there is no entity that controls (for value shifting purposes) both the first entity and the other entity.

727-355 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a company

50% stake test

(1) An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a company if the entity, or the entity and its *associates between them:

can exercise, or can control the exercise of, at least 50% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or

have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or

have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 50% of any distribution of capital of the company.

40% stake test

(2) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a company if the entity, or the entity and its *associates between them:

can exercise, or can control the exercise of, at least 40% of the voting power in the company (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or

have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any dividends that the company may pay; or

have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any distribution of capital of the company;

unless an entity (other than the first entity and its associates) either alone or together with its associates in fact controls the company.

Actual control test

(3) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a company if the entity, either alone or together with its *associates, in fact controls the company.

727-360 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a fixed trust

40% stake test

(1) An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a *fixed trust if the entity, or the entity and its *associates between them, have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any distribution of trust income, or trust capital, to beneficiaries of the trust.

Other tests

(2) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a *fixed trust if:

(a) the entity, or an *associate of the entity, whether alone or with other associates (the relevant entity), has the power to obtain the beneficial enjoyment of the trust’s capital or income (whether or not by exercising its power of appointment or revocation, and whether with or without another entity’s consent); or

the relevant entity is able to control the application of the trust’s capital or income in any manner (whether directly or indirectly); or

the relevant entity is able to do a thing mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b) under a *scheme; or

a trustee of the trust is accustomed or is under an obligation (whether formally or informally), or might reasonably be expected, to act in accordance with the relevant entity’s directions, instructions or wishes; or

the relevant entity is able to remove or appoint a trustee of the trust.

727-365 Control (for value shifting purposes) of a non-fixed trust

Trustee tests

(1) An entity controls (for value shifting purposes) a *non-fixed trust if:

the entity or an associate of the entity is a trustee of the trust; or

the entity, or the entity and its *associates between them, can remove or appoint the trustee, or one or more of the trustees, of the trust; or

a trustee of the trust is accustomed to act, is under an obligation (whether formally or informally) to act, or might reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of:

the entity or an associate of the entity; or

2 or more entities, at least one of which is the entity or an associate of the entity.

Tests based on control of the trust income or capital

(2) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a *non-fixed trust if the entity, or the entity and its *associates between them:

have the power to obtain the beneficial enjoyment of trust income or capital; or

can control in any way at all, whether directly or indirectly, the application of trust income or capital; or

can, under a *scheme, gain the enjoyment or control referred to in paragraph (a) or (b).

(3) An entity also controls (for value shifting purposes) a *non-fixed trust if:

the entity, or any of its *associates, can benefit under the trust otherwise than because of a *fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the trust; or

if the entity, or the entity and its *associates between them, have the right to receive (either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) at least 40% of any distribution of trust income, or trust capital.

727-370 Preventing double counting for percentage stake tests

If an interest giving an entity, or an entity and its *associates:

the ability to exercise, or control the exercise of, any of the voting power in a company; or

the right to receive dividends that a company may pay; or

the right to receive a distribution of capital of a company; or

the right to receive a distribution of trust income or trust capital;

is both direct and indirect, and (apart from this section) would be counted more than once in applying subsection 727-355(1) or (2) or section 727-360, only the direct interest is to be counted.

727-375 Tests in this Subdivision are exhaustive

An entity does not control (for value shifting purposes) a company or trust except as provided in this Subdivision.

Common-ownership nexus and ultimate stake of a particular percentage

727-400 When 2 entities have a common-ownership nexus within a period

(1) 2 entities have a common-ownership nexus within a period if, and only if, they satisfy the test in any of the one or more items in the table applicable to them.

Additional condition about profile of percentage ultimate stakes held by 2 or more ultimate owners

In order to satisfy the test in item 1, 2 or 3 in the table in subsection (1), at least one of subsections (3), (4) and (5) must be satisfied.

For at least one of the *ultimate owners referred to in that item, the percentage of the *ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in paragraph (a) in the last column of that item must be at least 40%, and so must the percentage of the ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in paragraph (b) in the last column of that item.

(4) Alternatively, for each of those *ultimate owners, the percentage of the *ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in that paragraph (a) must be the same as the percentage of the ultimate stake that owner has as mentioned in that paragraph (b).

Alternatively, the number of those *ultimate owners must not exceed 16.

727-405 Ultimate stake of a particular percentage in a company

(1) This section sets out 3 tests of whether an entity has an ultimate stake of a particular percentage (the test percentage) in a company.

Note: In applying the tests, follow the rules in section 727-415.

Voting power

The first test is that, after tracing, to the *ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the direct and indirect ownership of all *shares in the company that carry the right to exercise voting power in the company, that ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of that voting power.

Dividends

The second test is that, after tracing, to the *ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the direct and indirect ownership of all *shares in the company that carry the right to receive any dividends that the company may pay, that ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of those dividends.

Capital distributions

The third test is that, after tracing, to the *ultimate owners who ultimately hold it, the direct and indirect ownership of all *shares in the company that carry the right to receive any distribution of capital of the company, that ownership is held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of the distribution.

Certain shares ignored

In tracing the ownership of *shares in a company, ignore *shares whose *dividends can reasonably be regarded as being equivalent to the payment of interest on a loan having regard to:

how the dividends are calculated; and

the conditions applying to the payment of the dividends; and

any other relevant matters.

727-410 Ultimate stake of a particular percentage in a fixed trust

(1) This section sets out 2 tests of whether an entity has an ultimate stake of a particular percentage (the test percentage) in a *fixed trust.

Note: In applying the tests, follow the rules in section 727-415.

Income distributions

The first test is that, after tracing, to the *ultimate owners who ultimately hold them, the direct and indirect rights to receive distributions of trust income, those rights are held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of each such distribution.

Capital distributions

The second test is that, after tracing, to the *ultimate owners who ultimately hold them, the direct and indirect rights to receive distributions of trust capital, those rights are held by the entity to the extent of the test percentage of each such distribution.

727-415 Rules for tracing

In applying sections 727-400, 727-405 and 727-410, follow the rules in this section.

Interposed entities

Tracing is to be done through any interposed entities.

Ownership or rights held jointly

If some of the ownership or rights of a particular kind in relation to a company or trust are held by 2 or more entities jointly or in common, each of the entities is treated as holding a proportion of the ownership or rights so held. The proportion is to be worked out on a reasonable basis, so that the total of the proportions equals the total of the ownership or rights so held.

Ownership or rights held by associate

If, at a particular time:

an ultimate owner is an associate of another ultimate owner; and

the associate ultimately holds some of the ownership or rights of a particular kind in relation to a company or trust;

then, in determining whether the other ultimate owner is one of 2 or more ultimate owners because of whom the conditions in an item in the table in section 727-400 are satisfied, the ownership or rights of that kind in relation to the company or trust held by the associate at that time:

to the extent of a particular percentage, may be treated as being instead held by the other ultimate owner; and

to the extent so treated, cannot be treated as being instead held by any other ultimate owner of whom the first ultimate owner is an associate.

If one or more applications of subsection (4) are necessary to establish that an ultimate owner is one of 2 or more ultimate owners because of whom the conditions in an item in the table in section 727-400 are satisfied, that subsection must be applied accordingly.

Subdivision 727-F — Consequences of an indirect value shift

Guide to Subdivision 727-F

727-450 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you:

• which method to use to work out the consequences of an indirect value shift for equity or loan interests, and indirect equity or loan interests, in the losing entity and in the gaining entity; and

• which interests, and which owners, are affected.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

727-455 Consequences of the indirect value shift

Affected interests

727-460 Affected interests in the losing entity

727-465 Affected interests in the gaining entity

727-470 Exceptions

727-520 Equity or loan interest and related terms

727-525 Indirect equity or loan interest

Affected owners

727-530 Who are the affected owners

Choices about method to be used

727-550 Choosing the adjustable value method

727-555 Giving other affected owners information about the choice

Operative provisions

727-455 Consequences of the indirect value shift

The consequences (if any) of an indirect value shift must be worked out using the *realisation time method unless the adjustable value method is chosen in accordance with section 727-550.

Affected interests

Note: Later provisions of this Subdivision set out the interests to which those consequences apply (see sections 727-460 to 727-525), which are in turn determined by who are the affected owners (see section 727-530).

727-460 Affected interests in the losing entity

These are the affected interests in the *losing entity:

each equity or loan interest that an *affected owner owns in the losing entity immediately before the IVS time; and

each equity or loan interest that:

an affected owner owns in another affected owner immediately before the IVS time; and

is an indirect equity or loan interest in the losing entity;

(except one covered by an exception in section 727-470).

727-465 Affected interests in the gaining entity

If immediately before the *IVS time the *gaining entity is a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)), these are the affected interests in the gaining entity:

each equity or loan interest that an *affected owner owns in the gaining entity immediately before the IVS time; and

each equity or loan interest that:

an affected owner owns in another affected owner immediately before the IVS time; and

is an indirect equity or loan interest in the gaining entity;

(except one covered by an exception in section 727-470).

727-470 Exceptions

Mere active participants

An equity or loan interest that an *active participant in the *scheme owns in another active participant immediately before the IVS time is not an *affected interest in the *losing entity or in the *gaining entity unless one of the active participants is also covered by 1, 2, 3 or 4 in the table in subsection 727-530(1) (about who is an affected owner).

Entity that is a small business entity, or satisfies the maximum net asset value test for small business relief

(2) An *equity or loan interest that an entity (the owner) owns immediately before the *IVS time is not an *affected interest in the *losing entity or in the *gaining entity if the owner:

is a small business entity for each income year that includes any of the IVS period; or

would satisfy the maximum net asset value test in section 152-15 throughout the IVS period.

If the owner is not in existence for part of the IVS period, disregard that part in applying subsection (2).

Interests in superannuation entities not covered

An equity or loan interest in an *affected owner is not an *affected interest in the *losing entity or in the *gaining entity if the affected owner is an entity listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities) in relation to the income year in which the IVS time happens.

727-520 Equity or loan interest and related terms

(1) An equity or loan interest in an entity is a *primary interest, or a *secondary interest, in the entity.

(2) A primary interest in an entity is a *primary equity interest, or a *primary loan interest, in the entity.

(3) The meaning of primary equity interest in an entity is set out in the table.

(4) A primary loan interest in an entity is:

a loan to the entity; or

an interest as joint owner (including as tenant in common) of a loan to the entity.

(5) A secondary interest in an entity is a *secondary equity interest, or a *secondary loan interest, in the entity.

(6) A secondary equity interest in an entity is a right or option:

to *acquire an existing *primary equity interest in the entity; or

to have the entity issue a new primary equity interest.

(7) A secondary loan interest in an entity is a right or option:

to *acquire an existing *primary loan interest in the entity; or

to have the entity issue a new primary loan interest.

727-525 Indirect equity or loan interest

An *equity or loan interest in an entity is an indirect equity or loan interest in another entity if, and only if:

the first entity owns an equity or loan interest in the other entity; or

the first entity owns an equity or loan interest that is an indirect equity or loan interest in the other entity because of one or more other applications of this section.

Affected owners

727-530 Who are the affected owners

(1) The table sets out the affected owners for the *indirect value shift.

(2) An entity is an intermediate controller of another entity if, and only if:

the first entity *controls (for value shifting purposes) the other entity; and

the first entity is *controlled (for value shifting purposes) by an ultimate controller of the other entity.

Active participants (if both losing and gaining entities are closely held)

(3) An entity (the first entity) is an active participant in the *scheme if:

at some time during the IVS period, neither the losing entity nor the gaining entity has 300 or more members (in the case of a company) or 300 or more beneficiaries (in the case of a trust); and

the first entity:

actively participated in, or directly facilitated, the entering into of the *scheme; or

at some time during the IVS period actively participated in, or directly facilitated, the carrying out of the scheme;

(whether or not it did so at the direction of some other entity); and

at some time during the IVS period, the first entity owned:

an equity or loan interest in the losing entity or in the gaining entity; or

an indirect equity or loan interest in the losing entity or in the gaining entity; and

the first entity is neither the losing entity nor the gaining entity.

Note: Subsections 727-110(2) and (3) contain rules about when an entity is treated as having or not having 300 or more members or beneficiaries.

Choices about method to be used

727-550 Choosing the adjustable value method

This section sets out rules for:

choosing to use the adjustable value method to work out the consequences of an indirect value shift; or

(b) choosing (when using the adjustable value method) not to work out on a *loss-focussed basis the reductions in the *adjustable values of *affected interests.

Who makes the choice

The choice must be made in accordance with the table.

When choice must be made

(3) The choice must be made within 2 years after the first *realisation event that happens to an *affected interest at or after the IVS time.

Choice binds all affected owners

The choice binds all *affected owners for the indirect value shift.

727-555 Giving other affected owners information about the choice

An entity that makes a choice under section 727-550 (including a choice made jointly with one or more other entities) must inform all entities that it knows to be *affected owners for the indirect value shift about the content of the choice. The entity must do so in writing within one month after making the choice.

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

If:

a choice under section 727-550 is made jointly by 2 or more entities; and

one of the entities complies with subsection (1);

no other entity need comply with that subsection in relation to that choice.

If an *affected owner for an indirect value shift has reason to believe that an entity may have made a choice under section 727-550 (including a choice made jointly with one or more other entities), the affected owner may give the entity a written notice asking whether the entity has made such a choice.

Within one month after receiving a notice under subsection (3), an entity must inform the *affected owner in writing whether the entity has made a choice under section 727-550 and, if so, about the content of the choice.

Penalty: 30 penalty units.

The Commissioner may extend the period for complying with a provision of this section.

Subdivision 727-G — The realisation time method

727-600 What this Subdivision is about

Under the realisation time method:

• losses on realisation of affected interests in the losing entity are reduced; and

• gains on realisation of affected interests in the gaining entity are reduced, within limits worked out by reference to the reductions in losses on affected interests in the losing entity; and

• certain 95% services indirect value shifts are disregarded.

This Subdivision also explains how its reduction of a loss or gain affects CGT assets, trading stock and revenue assets.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

727-610 Consequences of indirect value shift

727-615 Reduction of loss on realisation event for affected interest in losing entity

727-620 Reduction of gain on realisation event for affected interest in gaining entity

727-625 Total gain reductions not to exceed total loss reductions

727-630 How cap in section 727-625 applies if affected interest is also trading stock or a revenue asset

727-635 Splitting an equity or loan interest

727-640 Merging equity or loan interests

727-645 Effect of CGT roll-over

Further exclusion for certain 95% services indirect value shifts if realisation time method must be used

727-700 When 95% services indirect value shift is excluded

95% services indirect value shifts that are not excluded

727-705 Another provision of the income tax law affects amount related to services by at least $100,000

727-710 Ongoing or recent service arrangement reduces value of losing entity by at least $100,000

727-715 Service arrangements reduce value of losing entity that is a group service provider by at least $500,000

727-720 Abnormal service arrangement reduces value of losing entity that is not a group service provider by at least $500,000

727-725 Meaning of predominantly-services indirect value shift

Operative provisions

727-610 Consequences of indirect value shift

(1) This Subdivision sets out the realisation time method of working out the consequences (if any) of an *indirect value shift.

If those consequences are to be worked out using that method, this Subdivision applies to each realisation event:

by which a loss would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes; and

that happens to an *affected interest in the *losing entity; and

that is the first realisation event that happens to that interest at or after the IVS time; and

that happens:

if the amount of the indirect value shift is $500,000 or more—at any time after the IVS time; or

otherwise—within 4 years after the IVS time.

If:

those consequences are to be worked out using that method; and

the *gaining entity is a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)) immediately before the IVS time;

this Subdivision applies to each realisation event:

by which a gain would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes; and

that happens to an *affected interest in the *gaining entity; and

that is the first realisation event that happens to that interest at or after the IVS time.

The consequences for the *affected interest depend on its character. There are consequences for the interest in its character as a CGT asset. However, if the interest is also trading stock or a revenue asset, there are additional consequences for it in that character.

In working out the consequences for an *affected interest in the *losing entity or *gaining entity, in the interest’s character as trading stock, a realisation event is disregarded for the purposes of identifying under paragraph (2)(c) or (3)(e) the first realisation event that happens to that interest at or after the IVS time, if:

the realisation event consists of the ending of an income year; and

the *value of the interest as trading stock on hand of an entity at the end of the income year is the interest’s *cost; and

the interest became part of the entity’s trading stock on hand during that income year, or the value of the interest as trading stock of the entity on hand at the start of the income year was also the interest’s cost.

727-615 Reduction of loss on realisation event for affected interest in losing entity

If this Subdivision applies to a realisation event that happens to an *affected interest in the *losing entity, a loss that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard to:

a reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the indirect value shift has reduced the interest’s *market value; and

if the interest is also an affected interest in the *gaining entity—a reasonable estimate of the extent (if any) to which the interest’s market value at the time of the realisation event still reflects the effect of the indirect value shift on the market value of *equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.

727-620 Reduction of gain on realisation event for affected interest in gaining entity

If this Subdivision applies to a realisation event that happens to an *affected interest in the *gaining entity, a gain that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard to:

a reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the indirect value shift has increased the interest’s *market value; and

a reasonable estimate of the extent (if any) to which the interest’s market value at the time of the realisation event still reflects the effect of the indirect value shift on the market value of *equity or loan interests in the gaining entity.

727-625 Total gain reductions not to exceed total loss reductions

(1) This section ensures that the total (total gain reductions) of the amounts by which section 727-620 reduces gains *realised for income tax purposes by *realisation events happening at the same time does not exceed the total (total loss reductions) of:

the amounts by which section 727-615 reduces losses that:

would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by *realisation events happening before or at that time; and

have not already been taken into account in a previous application of this section; and

the amounts by which section 727-850 (as applying to the *scheme from which the indirect value shift results) reduces losses that:

would, apart from this Division, be realised for income tax purposes by realisation events happening before the IVS time to *equity or loan interests, or *indirect equity or loan interests, in the *losing entity; and

have not already been taken into account in a previous application of this section.

If, apart from this section, the total gain reductions would exceed the total loss reductions, the amount by which section 727-620 reduces each of the gains is itself reduced by the amount worked out using this formula:

For the purposes of the formula:

number of interests means the number of *affected interests in the *gaining entity to which *realisation events happened at that time.

727-630 How cap in section 727-625 applies if affected interest is also trading stock or a revenue asset

This section affects how to work out the total gain reductions and the total loss reductions for the purposes of section 727-625 if:

a realisation event covered by that section happens to an equity or loan interest, or to an indirect equity or loan interest, in the *losing entity or in the *gaining entity; and

the interest is also trading stock or a revenue asset at the time of the event.

Trading stock

In the case of an equity or loan interest, or an indirect equity or loan interest, in the *losing entity that is trading stock at that time:

the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a loss worked out under section 977-25 or 977-30 (about realisation events for trading stock) that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event is taken into account; and

(b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a loss worked out under section 977-10 (about realisation events for CGT assets) that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event is not taken into account;

in working out the total loss reductions.

In the case of an *affected interest in the *gaining entity that is trading stock at that time:

the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain worked out under section 977-35 or 977-40 (about realisation events for trading stock) that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event is taken into account; and

(b) the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation events for CGT assets) that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event is not taken into account;

in working out the total gain reductions.

Revenue asset

In the case of an equity or loan interest, or an indirect equity or loan interest, in the *losing entity that is a revenue asset at that time, the greater of the following is taken into account in working out the total loss reductions:

the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a loss worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation events for revenue assets) that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event;

the amount (if any) by which section 727-615 or 727-850 reduces a loss worked out under section 977-10 (about realisation events for CGT assets) that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event.

In the case of an *affected interest in the *gaining entity that is a revenue asset at that time, the greater of the following amounts is taken into account in working out the total gain reductions:

the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain worked out under section 977-55 (about realisation events for revenue assets) that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event;

the amount (if any) by which section 727-620 reduces a gain worked out under section 977-15 (about realisation events for CGT assets) that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event.

727-635 Splitting an equity or loan interest

If an equity or loan interest in the *losing entity or in the *gaining entity is split into 2 or more equity or loan interests at or after the IVS time:

each of the 2 or more interests inherits whatever characteristics would have been relevant to applying this Subdivision to the first interest if the split had not happened; and

those characteristics include characteristics the first interest has inherited because of any other application or applications of this section or section 727-640; and

if a characteristic of the first interest involves an amount or quantity, the amount or quantity for that characteristic as inherited by each of the 2 or more interests is a reasonable proportion of the amount or quantity for that characteristic of the first interest.

727-640 Merging equity or loan interests

If 2 or more *equity or loan interests (the original interests) in the *losing entity or in the *gaining entity are merged into 1 or more *equity or loan interests (the new interests) at or after the *IVS time:

each of the new interests inherits whatever characteristics would have been relevant to applying this Subdivision to the original interests if the merging had not happened; and

those characteristics include characteristics inherited by any of the original interests because of any other application or applications of this section or section 727-635; and

if a characteristic of any of the original interests involves an amount or quantity, the amount or quantity for that characteristic as inherited by any of the new interests is a reasonable proportion of the amount or quantity for that characteristic of the original interest.

727-645 Effect of CGT roll-over

If:

this Subdivision applies to a realisation event that is a CGT event that happens to an *affected interest in the *losing entity; and

section 727-615 reduces a loss that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the CGT event; and

there is a roll-over for the CGT event;

the interest’s *reduced cost base at the time of the CGT event is taken to have been reduced by the amount by which section 727-615 reduces that loss, but is so taken only for the purposes of working out:

the interest’s reduced cost base, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that *acquired the interest because of the CGT event; and

in the case of a *replacement-asset roll-over—the reduced cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that *disposed of the interest.

Note: Because of the roll-over, the loss reduction under section 727-615 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the loss reduction is passed on, through the reduction in reduced cost base, to prevent or reduce a loss arising on a later CGT event.

If:

this Subdivision applies to a realisation event that is a CGT event that happens to an *affected interest in the *gaining entity; and

section 727-620 reduces a gain that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the CGT event; and

there is a roll-over for the CGT event;

the interest’s *cost base at the time of the CGT event is taken to have been uplifted by the amount by which section 727-620 reduces that gain, but is so taken only for the purposes of working out:

the interest’s cost base, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that *acquired the interest because of the CGT event; and

in the case of a *replacement-asset roll-over—the cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that *disposed of the interest.

Note: Because of the roll-over, the gain reduction under section 727-620 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the gain reduction is passed on, through the uplift in cost base, to prevent or reduce a gain arising on a later CGT event.

Further exclusion for certain 95% services indirect value shifts if realisation time method must be used

727-700 When 95% services indirect value shift is excluded

If the indirect value shift is a *95% services indirect value shift, this Subdivision does not apply to a realisation event that:

(a) happens to an *affected interest in the *losing entity that is owned by an entity (the owner); and

is covered by subsection 727-610(2);

unless:

the conditions in section 727-705 are met for the indirect value shift; or

the conditions in section 727-710, 727-715 or 727-720 are met for the indirect value shift and for that realisation event.

(2) An *indirect value shift is a 95% services indirect value shift if, and only if, to the extent of at least 95% of their total *market value, the *greater benefits consist entirely of:

a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240 provided directly by the *losing entity to the *gaining entity; or

services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are being, or are to be, so provided;

or both.

This section does not limit any other exclusion in this Subdivision or in Subdivision 727-C.

95% services indirect value shifts that are not excluded

727-705 Another provision of the income tax law affects amount related to services by at least $100,000

The conditions in this section are met if:

the *losing entity or the *gaining entity lodges an income tax return for an income year during some or all of which the owner owned the interest; and

a provision of this Act:

reduces or excludes an amount that is included in the return; or

increases an amount that is so included; or

includes an amount not included in the return;

for the purposes of working out the taxable income, a *tax loss, or a net capital loss, of that entity for that income year; and

the amount is related to the right mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a), or to some or all of the services mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a) or (b), from the point of view of the losing entity providing the services or of the gaining entity receiving them; and

if the amount is so reduced or increased—the reduction or increase is at least $100,000; and

if the amount is so excluded or included—the amount is at least $100,000; and

at some time after the return is lodged, the entity that lodged it is aware, or ought reasonably to be aware, of the reduction, exclusion, increase or inclusion.

Example: If the Commissioner has notified an entity affected by a determination under Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the entity ought reasonably to be aware of the effect of the determination.

727-710 Ongoing or recent service arrangement reduces value of losing entity by at least $100,000

Either or both of these must be true:

when the realisation event mentioned in subsection 727-700(1) happens, some or all of the services mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a) or (b) have not yet been provided; or

some or all of those services have been provided in the income year (of the *losing entity) in which the realisation event happens, or in the previous income year.

(2) It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total market value) of the *market values, immediately before the *realisation event, of *primary interests in the *losing entity then owned by *affected owners is less than it would have been if none of the following had happened:

the *95% services indirect value shift; and

all other *predominantly-services indirect value shifts that satisfy subsection (1) (or that would satisfy it if they were *95% services indirect value shifts).

It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total *market value is less than it would have been by at least:

$100,000, if the total of the *adjustable values, immediately before the realisation event, of the *primary interests referred to in subsection (2) is less than or equal to $2,000,000; or

5% of the total of those *adjustable values, if that total is greater than $2,000,000 and less than or equal to $10,000,000; or

$500,000, if that total is greater than $10,000,000.

For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), disregard an indirect value shift referred to in paragraph (2)(a) or (b) if services are provided directly by the *losing entity to the *gaining entity under the *scheme before the income year (of the losing entity) before the one in which the realisation event happened.

727-715 Service arrangements reduce value of losing entity that is a group service provider by at least $500,000

(1) At some time during the period (the ownership period) when the owner owned the interest, the sole or dominant activity of the *losing entity must consist of providing services directly to one or more entities (the group entities) each of which is covered by one or more of the following paragraphs:

the *gaining entity;

an *affected owner;

an entity that has at that time the same ultimate controller as the losing entity or the gaining entity;

if the conditions in section 727-110 (common-ownership nexus test) are satisfied for the indirect value shift—an entity that has with the losing entity or with the gaining entity a *common-ownership nexus within that period.

(2) It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total market value) of the *market values, immediately before the *realisation event, of *primary interests in the *losing entity then owned by *affected owners is less than it would have been if none of the following had happened:

the *95% services indirect value shift; and

each predominantly-services indirect value shift for which the same entity is the losing entity as for the 95% services indirect value shift, and that happened:

if the amount of the indirect value shift is $500,000 or more—at any time during the ownership period; or

otherwise—during the ownership period but within 4 years before the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation event.

Thresholds for reduction of the total market value

It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total *market value is less than it would have been by at least $500,000, and by at least the lesser of:

5% of the total of the *adjustable values of *primary interests in the *losing entity owned by *affected owners at:

if subsection (4) applies—the time determined under that subsection; or

otherwise—the start of the income year in which the realisation event happens; and

the amount worked out under the table.

If at the time referred to in subsection (3) a *primary interest covered by that subsection was trading stock or a revenue asset, its *adjustable value taken into account under that subsection is the greater of its adjustable value as a CGT asset and its adjustable value as trading stock or a revenue asset.

If the owner of the interest is an *affected owner because of item 1, 2, 3 or 4 in the table in subsection 727-530(1) (about who is an affected owner), the time for the purposes of subparagraph (3)(a)(i) of this section is the latest of:

the start of the income year in which the realisation event happens; and

the start of the most recent period (if any):

that ended before or at the time of the realisation event; and

throughout which at least one of the group entities had the same ultimate controller as the losing entity or the gaining entity; and

the start of the most recent period (if any):

that ended before or at the time of the realisation event; and

within which at least one of the group entities has with the losing entity or with the gaining entity a *common-ownership nexus.

727-720 Abnormal service arrangement reduces value of losing entity that is not a group service provider by at least $500,000

(1) It must be the case that at no time during the period when the owner owned the interest did the sole or dominant activity of the *losing entity consist of providing services as mentioned in subsection 727-715(1).

(2) It must be reasonable to conclude that the total (the total market value) of the *market values, immediately before the *realisation event, of *primary interests in the *losing entity then owned by *affected owners is less than it would have been if none of the following had happened:

the *95% services indirect value shift;

each predominantly-services indirect value shift that meets either of these conditions:

its amount was less than $500,000 and it happened within 4 years before the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation event;

its amount was $500,000 or more and it happened at any time before the realisation event, or at the same time as the realisation event;

and that meets all of these conditions:

the same entity is the losing entity for it as for the 95% services indirect value shift;

it happened under a different *scheme from the 95% services indirect value shift; and

having regard to all relevant circumstances, it is reasonable to conclude that the sole or main reason why it happened under a different scheme was to prevent the conditions in section 727-705, 727-710, 727-715 or this section from being met.

It must also be reasonable to conclude that the total *market value is less than it would have been by at least:

$500,000, if the total of the *adjustable values, immediately before the realisation event, of the *primary interests referred to in subsection (2) is less than or equal to $10,000,000; or

5% of the total of those *adjustable values, if that total is greater than $10,000,000 and less than or equal to $100,000,000; or

$5,000,000, if that total is greater than $100,000,000.

(4) The providing of the services mentioned in paragraph 727-700(2)(a) or (b) by the losing entity must not be in the ordinary course of its business.

727-725 Meaning of predominantly-services indirect value shift

An *indirect value shift is a predominantly-services indirect value shift if, and only if, the *greater benefits consist entirely or predominantly of:

a right to have services that are covered by section 727-240 provided directly by the *losing entity to the *gaining entity; or

services that are covered by section 727-240 and have been, are being, or are to be, so provided;

or both.

Subdivision 727-H — The adjustable value method

Guide to Subdivision 727-H

727-750 What this Subdivision is about

Under the adjustable value method:

• the adjustable values of affected interests in the losing entity are reduced; and

• the adjustable values of affected interests in the gaining entity are uplifted, within limits worked out by references to the reductions in the adjustable values of affected interests in the losing entity.

The consequences of that are:

• the cost base and reduced cost base of the interests are reduced or uplifted (or both); and

• if the interests are also trading stock or revenue assets, there are further consequences for them in their character as such.

Table of sections

727-755 Consequences of indirect value shift

Reductions of adjustable value

727-770 Reduction under the adjustable value method

727-775 Has there been a disaggregated attributable decrease?

727-780 Working out the reduction on a loss-focussed basis

Uplifts of adjustable value

727-800 Uplift under the attributable increase method

727-805 Has there been a disaggregated attributable increase?

727-810 Scaling-down formula

Consequences of the method for various kinds of assets

727-830 CGT assets

727-835 Trading stock

727-840 Revenue assets

727-755 Consequences of indirect value shift

(1) This Subdivision sets out the adjustable value method of working out the consequences (if any) of an *indirect value shift.

If those consequences are to be worked out using that method:

the *adjustable value of each *affected interest in the *losing entity is reduced as provided in this Subdivision; and

if the *gaining entity is a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)) immediately before the IVS time, the *adjustable value of each *affected interest in the *gaining entity is uplifted as provided in this Subdivision.

The consequences for the *affected interest depend on its character. There are consequences for the interest in its character as a CGT asset. However, if the interest is also trading stock or a revenue asset, there are additional consequences for it in that character.

Reductions of adjustable value

727-770 Reduction under the adjustable value method

This section sets out how to work out the amount (if any) by which the *adjustable value of an *affected interest in the *losing entity is reduced.

First, work out under section 727-775 whether the indirect value shift has produced for the owner of the interest a *disaggregated attributable decrease in the *market value of the interest.

(3) If it has not, the interest’s *adjustable value is not reduced because of the *indirect value shift.

If it has, the amount (if any) by which the interest’s *adjustable value is reduced is worked out on a loss-focussed basis under section 727-780.

(5) However, if a choice is made in accordance with section 727-550 for the reduction not to be worked out on a *loss-focussed basis, the reduction is equal to the *disaggregated attributable decrease.

Reduction not to exceed reasonable amount

If the reduction worked out as provided in subsection (4) or (5) is not reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to the objects of this Division, the interest’s *adjustable value is instead reduced by so much of that reduction as is reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to those objects.

Note: The main object of this Division is set out in section 727-95.

727-775 Has there been a disaggregated attributable decrease?

(1) This section sets out how to determine whether an *indirect value shift has produced, for the owner of an *equity or loan interest, a disaggregated attributable decrease in the *market value of the interest and, if so, the amount of it.

Work out the *market value of the interest at the IVS time, but disregarding:

all effects on the market value of the interest during the IVS period, except effects that are reasonably attributable to the indirect value shift; and

the effects (if any) of the indirect value shift on the market value of *equity or loan interests, or *indirect equity or loan interests, in the gaining entity.

(This result is called the notional resulting market value.)

In such a case, the reduction in adjustable value under this Division will usually be offset by an uplift under this Division.

Note: Paragraph (2)(b) is necessary because the market value of the interest may also have been affected by the increase in the market value of interests in the gaining entity, because the entity in which the interest is held had direct or indirect interests in both the losing entity and the gaining entity.

(3) If the notional resulting *market value is less than the market value (the old market value) of the interest:

at the start of the IVS period; or

if the owner last began to own the interest during that period—when the owner last began to own the interest;

the difference is the disaggregated attributable decrease.

(4) The *indirect value shift has not produced a disaggregated attributable decrease for the owner of the interest if the notional resulting *market value is greater than or equal to the old market value.

The *market value of the interest at a particular time may be worked out under subsection (2) or (3) by making a reasonable estimate of that market value.

727-780 Working out the reduction on a loss-focussed basis

(1) Use the table in subsection (2) of this section to work out on a loss-focussed basis the amount (if any) by which the interest’s *adjustable value is reduced.

(2) This involves comparing the old *market value, and the notional resulting market value, with the interest’s *adjustable value (the old adjustable value) immediately before the *IVS time.

Note 1: Because of item 1, the indirect value shift cannot cause a loss to arise on disposal of the interest.

Note 2: Because of item 3 the loss already embedded in the interest is preserved, but the indirect value shift does not increase it.

Uplifts of adjustable value

727-800 Uplift under the attributable increase method

This section sets out how to work out the amount (if any) by which the *adjustable value of an *affected interest in the *gaining entity is uplifted.

First, work out under section 727-805 whether the indirect value shift has produced for the owner of the interest a *disaggregated attributable increase in the *market value of the interest.

(3) If it has not, the interest’s *adjustable value is not uplifted because of the *indirect value shift.

If it has, the *adjustable value is uplifted by the amount worked out using the scaling-down formula in section 727-810, subject to the rest of this section.

Note: The uplift will be less than or equal to the disaggregated attributable increase.

Cap if interest has both a disaggregated attributable increase and a disaggregated attributable decrease

If the indirect value shift has also produced for the owner of the interest a *disaggregated attributable decrease in the *market value of the interest, the interest’s *adjustable value:

(a) is not uplifted if it is not also reduced under this Division because of the indirect value shift; and

if it is also reduced under this Division because of the indirect value shift—is not uplifted by more than the reduction.

Cap based on notional distribution by gaining entity of dividends or capital equal to total reductions in adjustable value of affected interests in losing entity

However, the interest’s *adjustable value is not uplifted by more than the greater of these amounts:

the amount (if any) that the *affected owner of the interest would receive (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) in respect of the interest if:

(i) the *gaining entity were to pay as *dividends, at the time (the payment time) immediately before the *IVS time, an amount (the total reduction amount) equal to the total of the amounts by which the *adjustable values of *equity or loan interests in the *losing entity are reduced under this Subdivision because of the *indirect value shift; and

those dividends were successively paid or distributed at the payment time by each entity interposed between the gaining entity and that affected owner; and

the amount (if any) that the *affected owner of the interest would receive (directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities) in respect of the interest if:

the gaining entity were to pay the total reduction amount at the payment time as a distribution of capital; and

that capital was successively paid or distributed at the payment time by each entity interposed between the gaining entity and that affected owner.

The reduction of *adjustable value that is to be taken into account under subparagraph (6)(a)(i) for an equity or loan interest in the *losing entity is:

if the interest is trading stock immediately before the IVS time—the one worked out on the basis of the interest’s adjustable value under subsection 727-835(2); or

otherwise—the greater or greatest of these:

the reduction of the interest’s *cost base;

the reduction of the interest’s *reduced cost base;

the reduction (if any) worked out on the basis of the interest’s adjustable value under subsection 727-840(2) (about revenue assets).

Uplift not to exceed reasonable amount

If the uplift worked out as provided in subsections (4), (5) and (6) is not reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to the objects of this Division, the interest’s *adjustable value is instead uplifted by an amount that is reasonable in the circumstances, having regard to those objects.

Note: The main object of this Division is set out in section 727-95.

727-805 Has there been a disaggregated attributable increase?

(1) This section sets out how to determine whether an *indirect value shift has produced, for the owner of an *equity or loan interest, a disaggregated attributable increase in the *market value of the interest and, if so, the amount of it.

Make a reasonable estimate of the *market value of the interest at the IVS time, but disregarding:

all effects on the market value of the interest during the IVS period, except effects that are reasonably attributable to the indirect value shift; and

the effects (if any) of the indirect value shift on the market value of *equity or loan interests, or *indirect equity or loan interests, in the losing entity.

(This result is called the notional resulting market value.)

In such a case, the increase in adjustable value under this Division will usually be offset by a reduction under this Division.

Note: Paragraph (2)(b) is necessary because the market value of the interest may also have been affected by the decrease in the market value of interests in the losing entity, because the entity in which the interest is held had direct or indirect interests in both the losing entity and the gaining entity.

(3) If the notional resulting market value is greater than a reasonable estimate of the *market value (the old market value) of the interest:

at the start of the IVS period; or

if the owner last began to own the interest during that period—when the owner last began to own the interest;

the difference is the disaggregated attributable increase.

(4) The *indirect value shift has not produced a disaggregated attributable increase for the owner of the interest if the notional resulting market value is less than or equal to the old market value.

727-810 Scaling-down formula

The scaling-down formula for the purposes of section 727-800 is:

Note: The numerator in the fraction can never exceed the denominator. This means that the fraction can never exceed 1, so the uplift will never exceed the disaggregated attributable increase.

For the purposes of the formula:

total disaggregated attributable decreases means the total of:

all *disaggregated attributable decreases that the indirect value shift has produced, in the *market values of *affected interests in the *losing entity, for the entities that owned those interests immediately before the IVS time; and

if:

section 727-850 (as applying to the *scheme from which the indirect value shift results) reduces losses that are *realised for income tax purposes by *realisation events happening before the IVS time to *equity or loan interests, or to *indirect equity or loan interests, in the losing entity; and

the indirect value shift is the only indirect value shift, or is the greater or greatest of 2 or more indirect value shifts, that results from the scheme and for which the losing entity is the losing entity;

for each of those realisation events, the amounts that would, if:

the presumed indirect value shift were an indirect value shift; and

the IVS time for the presumed indirect value shift were the time of that realisation event;

be the disaggregated attributable decreases that the presumed indirect value shift has produced, in the market value of the equity or loan interests to which that realisation event happened, for the entities that owned those interests immediately before the time of that realisation event.

total reductions for affected interests means the total of:

all reductions under this Division, because of the indirect value shift, of *adjustable values of affected interests in the losing entity; and

(b) if paragraph (b) of the definition of total disaggregated attributable decreases applies—the amounts by which section 727-850 reduces the losses (if any) referred to in that paragraph.

Consequences of the method for various kinds of assets

727-830 CGT assets

The *cost base of an equity or loan interest is reduced or uplifted immediately before the IVS time to the extent that this Division provides for the *adjustable value of the interest to be reduced or uplifted.

The *reduced cost base of an equity or loan interest is reduced or uplifted immediately before the IVS time to the extent that this Division provides for the *adjustable value of the interest to be reduced or uplifted.

(3) However, the *cost base or *reduced cost base is uplifted only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the *market value of the interest when a later *CGT event happens to the interest.

To work out:

whether the *cost base or *reduced cost base of the interest is reduced or uplifted; and

if so, by how much;

assume that the adjustable value from time to time of that or any other *equity or loan interest is its cost base or reduced cost base, as appropriate.

(5) If this Division provides for the *adjustable value of an *equity or loan interest to be both reduced and uplifted:

the reduction and uplift for which subsection (1) or (2) of this section provides offset each other to the extent of whichever of them is the lesser; but

if subsection (3) of this section cancels or reduces the uplift, this subsection is taken always to have applied on that basis.

Reductions and uplifts also apply to pre-CGT assets

A reduction or uplift occurs regardless of whether the entity that owns the interest *acquired it before, on or after 20 September 1985.

727-835 Trading stock

This section deals with:

(a) how this Division applies to an *equity or loan interest that is *trading stock of an entity at the time (the adjustment time) immediately before the *IVS time; and

the income tax consequences of this Division reducing or uplifting the *adjustable value of the interest.

(2) The interest’s adjustable value at a particular time is:

if the interest has been trading stock of the entity ever since the start of the income year of the entity in which that time occurs—its *value as trading stock at the start of the income year; or

otherwise—its cost.

If this Division reduces or uplifts the interest’s *adjustable value, the entity is treated as if:

immediately before the adjustment time, the entity had sold the interest to someone else (at *arm’s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its *adjustable value immediately before that time; and

immediately after the adjustment time, the entity had bought the interest back for the reduced or uplifted adjustable value.

Note: The notional sale and repurchase are separated in time. As a result, if this section is applied to another indirect value shift that happens later in the same income year, the interest’s adjustable value will be the cost on the notional repurchase: see paragraph (2)(b).

However, the increase in the cost of an interest because of paragraph (3)(b) is taken into account from time to time only to the extent that the amount of the increase is still reflected in the *market value of the interest.

Note: The situations where the increase in cost would be taken into account include:

• in working out your deductions for the cost of trading stock acquired during the income year in which the increase happens; and

• the end of an income year if the interest’s closing value as trading stock is worked out on the basis of its cost; and

• the start of the income year in which the interest is disposed of, if that happens in a later income year and the interest’s closing value as trading stock at the end of the previous income year was worked out on the basis of its cost.

(5) If this Division provides for the *adjustable value of the interest to be both reduced and uplifted:

the reduction and uplift offset each other to the extent of whichever of them is the lesser, and subsection (3) of this section applies accordingly; but

to the extent that the amount of the uplift is no longer reflected in the *market value of the interest, this section is taken always to have applied on the basis that the amount of the uplift was reduced to the same extent.

727-840 Revenue assets

This section deals with:

(a) how this Division applies to an *equity or loan interest that is a *revenue asset of an entity at the time (the adjustment time) immediately before the *IVS time; and

the income tax consequences of this Division reducing or uplifting the *adjustable value of the interest.

(2) The interest’s adjustable value at a particular time is the total of the amounts that would be subtracted from the gross disposal proceeds in calculating any profit or loss on disposal of the interest if the entity disposed of it at that time.

If this Division reduces or uplifts the interest’s *adjustable value, the entity is treated as if:

immediately before the adjustment time, the entity had sold the interest to someone else (at *arm’s length and in the ordinary course of business) for its adjustable value immediately before that time; and

immediately after the adjustment time, the entity had bought the interest back for the reduced or uplifted adjustable value.

Note: The notional sale and repurchase are separated in time. As a result, if this section is applied to another indirect value shift that happens later in the same income year, the interest’s adjustable value will be based on the cost on the notional repurchase: see subsection (2).

However, an uplift in the *adjustable value of the interest is taken into account only to the extent that the amount of the uplift is still reflected in the *market value of the interest when it is disposed of or otherwise realised.

(5) If this Division provides for the *adjustable value of the interest to be both reduced and uplifted:

the reduction and uplift offset each other to the extent of whichever of them is the lesser, and subsection (3) of this section applies accordingly; but

to the extent that the amount of the uplift is no longer reflected in the *market value of the interest, this section is taken always to have applied on the basis that the amount of the uplift was reduced to the same extent.

Subdivision 727-K — Reduction of loss on equity or loan interests realised before the IVS time

Table of sections

727-850 Consequences of scheme under this Subdivision

727-855 Presumed indirect value shift

727-860 Conditions about the prospective gaining entity

727-865 How other provisions of this Division apply to support this Subdivision

727-870 Effect of CGT roll-over

727-875 Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock or revenue asset

727-850 Consequences of scheme under this Subdivision

If:

(a) as at the time when a *scheme is entered into, or a later time, an entity (the prospective losing entity) has *provided, is providing, is to provide, or might provide, one or more economic benefits *in connection with the scheme; and

the prospective losing entity is a company or trust (except one listed in section 727-125 (about superannuation entities)); and

a realisation event happens to an equity or loan interest, or to an indirect equity or loan interest, in the prospective losing entity at a time when no IVS time for the scheme has yet happened (whether or not one happens later); and

apart from this Division, a loss would be *realised for income tax purposes by the realisation event; and

because of section 727-855, the scheme results in a presumed indirect value shift affecting the realisation event; and

section 727-860 (about prospective gaining entities) is satisfied; and

no exclusion in Subdivision 727-C applies to the presumed indirect value shift because of section 727-865; and

on the assumptions set out in subsection 727-865(3), the interest would be an *affected interest in the prospective losing entity;

the loss is reduced by an amount that is reasonable having regard to a reasonable estimate of the amount (if any) by which the scheme has reduced the interest’s *market value during the period that ends at the time of the realisation event and started at the later of:

when the scheme was entered into; and

the time of the last realisation event that happened to the interest.

Note 1: This Subdivision does not reduce gains from realisation events, but loss reductions under this Subdivision are taken into account in working out:

• gain reductions under Subdivision 727-G for interests in a gaining entity that are realised after the IVS time for the scheme (see section 727-625); or

• uplifts under Subdivision 727-H in the adjustable values of interests in a gaining entity (see section 727-810).

Further exclusion for certain 95% services indirect value shifts

Note 2: Section 727-865 provides for how other provisions of this Division apply for the purposes of this Subdivision.

The loss is not reduced if the presumed indirect value shift is a *95% services indirect value shift because of subsection 727-865(2), unless:

the conditions in section 727-705 (as applying because of that subsection) are met for the presumed indirect value shift; or

the conditions in section 727-710, 727-715 or 727-720 (as applying because of that subsection) are met for the presumed indirect value shift and for the realisation event.

727-855 Presumed indirect value shift

(1) The *scheme results in a presumed indirect value shift affecting the *realisation event if, and only if, as at the time of the realisation event, it is reasonable to conclude that the total *market value of the economic benefits (the greater benefits) that:

the *prospective losing entity has *provided, is providing, is to provide, or might provide, *in connection with the *scheme, to another entity, or to each of 2 or more other entities; and

can be identified (even if the other entity or entities cannot be identified or are not all in existence, or the provision of some or all of the economic benefits is contingent);

exceeds:

(c) the total market value of the economic benefits (the lesser benefits) that:

(i) have been, are being, are to be, or might be, provided to the prospective losing entity in connection with the scheme; and

can be identified (even if the entity or entities providing the benefits cannot be identified or are not all in existence, or the provision of some or all of the economic benefits is contingent); or

if there are no economic benefits covered by paragraph (c)—nil.

That excess is the amount of the presumed indirect value shift, which happens at the time of the realisation event.

The *market value of an economic benefit is to be determined as at the earliest time when it is reasonable to conclude that:

the economic benefit can be identified; and

paragraph 727-150(2)(b) is satisfied for that benefit;

if that time is before the realisation event.

Otherwise, the *market value of the economic benefit is to be determined as at the time immediately before the realisation event, taking account of any contingency to which provision of the benefit is subject at that time.

For more rules affecting how the market value of an economic benefit is determined, see Subdivision 727-D (as applying because of subsection 727-865(1)).

An entity referred to in paragraph (1)(a) need not be a party to the *scheme. A benefit can be provided by act or omission.

727-860 Conditions about the prospective gaining entity

By the deadline set out in subsection (5), the conditions in subsections (2) and (3) must be satisfied for at least one of these entities:

the entity or entities referred to in paragraph 727-855(1)(a);

if at the time of the realisation event it is reasonable to conclude that the entity, or at least one of the entities, referred to in paragraph 727-855(1)(a) will be one of 2 or more entities, but it cannot be determined which—those 2 or more entities.

Enough must be known about the identity of an entity covered by subsection (1) for it to be reasonable to conclude that, if:

the presumed indirect value shift were an indirect value shift resulting from the *scheme; and

the IVS period for the scheme ended at the time of the realisation event; and

that entity were the *gaining entity for the indirect value shift;

the *prospective losing entity were the *losing entity for the indirect value shift; and

either or both of these would be satisfied for the indirect value shift:

section 727-105 (Ultimate controller test); and

section 727-110 (Common-ownership nexus test).

Enough must be known about the identity of the entity referred to in subsection (2) for it also to be reasonable to conclude that, in relation to either or both of the following:

the *prospective losing entity *providing one or more economic benefits to that entity *in connection with the *scheme; or

that entity providing one or more economic benefits to the prospective losing entity in connection with the scheme;

that entity and the prospective losing entity were not, are not, will not be, or would not be, dealing with each other at *arm’s length.

(4) Each entity that is covered by subsection (1), and for which subsections (2) and (3) are satisfied, is called a prospective gaining entity for the *scheme.

The deadline is:

if the entity that owned the equity or loan interest immediately before the realisation event must lodge an income tax return for the income year in which the event happens—the time by which the return must be lodged; or

otherwise—the end of the 6 months immediately after that income year.

727-865 How other provisions of this Division apply to support this Subdivision

To avoid doubt, these provisions apply for the purposes of working out whether there has been a presumed indirect value shift and, if so, the amount of it:

sections 727-155, 727-160 and 727-165 (about economic benefits);

section 727-315 (Transfer, for its adjustable value, of depreciating asset acquired for less than $1,500,000).

For the purposes of section 727-850, these provisions:

Subdivision 727-C (Exclusions), except section 727-260 (about a shift down a wholly-owned chain of entities);

sections 727-700 to 727-725 (about 95% services indirect value shifts), except subsection 727-700(1);

apply to the presumed indirect value shift on the assumptions set out in subsection (3).

The assumptions are:

the presumed indirect value shift is an indirect value shift resulting from the *scheme; and

the *prospective losing entity for the scheme is the *losing entity for that indirect value shift; and

each *prospective gaining entity for the scheme is the *gaining entity for that indirect value shift; and

the *greater benefits under the presumed indirect value shift are the greater benefits under that indirect value shift; and

the *lesser benefits (if any) under the presumed indirect value shift are the lesser benefits under that indirect value shift; and

the time of the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) is the IVS time for the scheme; and

the IVS period for the scheme ends at the time of the realisation event; and

section 727-105 (Ultimate controller test) is satisfied for that indirect value shift according to what it is reasonable to conclude under subsection 727-860(2) as applying to the presumed indirect value shift; and

section 727-110 (Common-ownership nexus test) is satisfied for that indirect value shift according to what it is reasonable to conclude under subsection 727-860(2) as applying to the presumed indirect value shift; and

a reference to the realisation event mentioned in subsection 727-700(1) were a reference to the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c); and

the interest to which the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) happens were the interest referred to in paragraph 727-700(1)(a); and

a reference in any of sections 727-700 to 727-725 (about 95% services indirect value shifts), except subsection 727-700(1), to the owner were a reference to the entity that, at the time of the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c), owns the interest to which the event happens.

Sections 727-635 and 727-640 affect how this Subdivision applies to *equity or loan interests, and *indirect equity or loan interests, in the *prospective losing entity that are split or merged during the period:

starting when the *scheme is entered into; and

ending at the time of the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c);

in the same way as those sections affect how Subdivision 727-G would apply to those interests on the assumptions set out in subsection (3) of this section.

The application of a provision because of this section is additional to, and is not intended to limit, any other application of the provision.

727-870 Effect of CGT roll-over

If:

the realisation event mentioned in paragraph 727-850(1)(c) is a CGT event; and

section 727-850 reduces a loss that would, apart from this Division, be *realised for income tax purposes by the CGT event; and

there is a roll-over for the CGT event;

the interest’s *reduced cost base at the time of the CGT event is taken to have been reduced by the amount by which section 727-850 reduces that loss, but is so taken only for the purposes of working out:

the interest’s reduced cost base, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that *acquired the interest because of the CGT event; and

in the case of a *replacement-asset roll-over—the reduced cost base of the replacement CGT asset, from time to time after the roll-over, for the entity that *disposed of the interest.

Note: Because of the roll-over, the loss reduction under section 727-850 will have no tax effect. This subsection ensures that the loss reduction is passed on, through the reduction in reduced cost base, to prevent or reduce a loss arising on a later CGT event.

727-875 Application to CGT asset that is also trading stock or revenue asset

If an equity or loan interest is also an item of trading stock or a revenue asset, this Subdivision applies to the interest once in its character as a CGT asset and again in its character as trading stock or a revenue asset.

Subdivision 727-L — Indirect value shift resulting from a direct value shift

Table of sections

727-905 How this Subdivision affects the rest of this Division

727-910 Treatment of value shifted under the direct value shift

727-905 How this Subdivision affects the rest of this Division

(1) This Subdivision affects how the rest of this Division applies to a *scheme (the IVS scheme) that is or includes a scheme (the DVS scheme) under which there is a *direct value shift.

If the direct value shift:

has consequences under Division 725 for an entity as an *affected owner of *down interests (or would do so apart from section 725-90 (about direct value shifts that will be reversed)); and

also has consequences under that Division for another entity as an affected owner of *up interests (or would do so apart from section 725-90);

the rest of this Subdivision has effect, for the purposes of Subdivisions 727-A to 727-K, in order to determine:

whether the IVS scheme results in an indirect value shift, from the first entity to the other entity, that has consequences under this Division; and

whether the IVS scheme has consequences under Subdivision 727-K because it results in a presumed indirect value shift affecting a realisation event happening to *equity or loan interests, or to *indirect equity or loan interests, in the first entity; and

those consequences.

Note: Section 725-50 sets out when a direct value shift has consequences under Division 725.

If:

the IVS scheme is the DVS scheme; and

subsection 725-145(2) is satisfied for the direct value shift (because one or more equity or loan interests in the target entity are issued at a discount); but

subsection 725-145(3) (about an increase in the market value of one or more equity or loan interests in the target entity) is not satisfied for the direct value shift;

Subdivisions 727-A to 727-K apply to the IVS scheme only as provided in this section.

Otherwise, those Subdivisions apply to the IVS scheme as provided in this section in addition to any other application they have to the scheme.

727-910 Treatment of value shifted under the direct value shift

The first entity is treated as *providing economic benefits to the other entity, *in connection with the IVS scheme, at the time of a decrease (or future decrease) in the *market value of any of the *down interests, to the extent that the decrease is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-155(1).

Despite subsections 727-150(4) and 727-855(2) and (3), the *market value of all economic benefits that subsection (1) of this section treats the first entity as providing to the other entity:

is to be determined as at the time immediately before the IVS time, or immediately before the realisation event, as appropriate; and

is equal to the total value shifted from the *down interests to the *up interests, as worked out under one or more applications of step 2 of the method statement in section 725-365 or 725-380.

The 2 entities are treated as not dealing with each other at *arm’s length in relation to the providing of those benefits.

None of those benefits is treated as consisting of, or including, services provided or a right to have services provided.

Note: This means that the exclusions in Subdivisions 727-C and 727-G for indirect value shifts involving services will not apply.

Except as provided in this section, none of the following is treated as the *providing of economic benefits *in connection with the IVS scheme:

a decrease (or future decrease) in the *market value of *down interests owned by the first entity or the other entity, to the extent that the decrease is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-155(1);

an increase (or future increase) in the market value of *up interests owned by the first entity or the other entity, to the extent that the increase is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-145(3);

an issue of *up interests at a *discount to the first entity or the other entity, to the extent that the issue is (or will be) covered by subsection 725-145(2).

Note: Value shifted from down interests owned by the other entity to up interests owned by the first entity are dealt with by a separate application of this Subdivision to those interests (because of paragraphs 727-905(2)(a) and (b).

Chapter 4 — International aspects of income tax

Part 4-5 — General

Division 764 — Source rules

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 764

764-A Source rules

Guide to Division 764

764-1 What this Division is about

This Division contains a source rule for certain international tax agreements.

Subdivision 764-A — Source rules

Table of sections

764-5 Source rule for international tax agreements

764-5 Source rule for international tax agreements

For the purposes of this Act, income, profits or gains have a source in Australia if:

for the purposes of an international tax agreement, the income, profits or gains are those of a person who is a resident of a foreign country or foreign territory; and

the effect of the agreement is that the income, profits or gains may be taxed in Australia.

Subsection (1) applies in relation to *international tax agreements made on or after 28 March 2019.

Note: An international tax agreement not covered by this section may be subject to specific source rules contained in the International Tax Agreements Act 1953 or in the international tax agreement itself.

(3) This section has effect despite any other provision of this Act (other than Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

Division 768 — Foreign non-assessable income and gains

Table of Subdivisions

768-A Returns on foreign investment

768-B Some items of income that are exempt from income tax

768-G Reduction in capital gains and losses arising from CGT events in relation to certain voting interests in active foreign companies

768-R Temporary residents

Subdivision 768-A — Returns on foreign investment

Guide to Subdivision 768-A

768-1 What this Subdivision is about

If:

an Australian corporate tax entity receives a foreign equity distribution from a foreign company, either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed trusts or partnerships; and

the Australian corporate tax entity holds a participation interest of at least 10% in the foreign company;

the distribution is non-assessable non-exempt income for the Australian corporate tax entity.

Table of sections

Foreign equity distributions on participation interests

768-5 Foreign equity distributions on participation interests

768-7 Foreign equity distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction

768-10 Meaning of foreign equity distribution

768-15 Participation test—minimum 10% participation

Foreign equity distributions on participation interests

768-5 Foreign equity distributions on participation interests

Foreign equity distributions received directly

A foreign equity distribution is not assessable income, and is not exempt income, of the entity to which it is made if:

the entity is an Australian resident and a corporate tax entity; and

at the time the distribution is made, the entity satisfies the participation test in section 768-15 in relation to the company that made the distribution; and

the entity:

does not receive the distribution in the capacity of a trustee; or

receives the distribution in the capacity of a trustee of a public trading trust; and

the distribution is not one to which section 768-7 (which is about foreign income tax deductions) applies.

Foreign equity distributions received through interposed trusts and partnerships

An amount is not assessable income, and is not exempt income, of an entity if:

the entity is a beneficiary of a trust or a partner in a partnership, an Australian resident and a corporate tax entity; and

the amount is all or part of the *net income of the trust or partnership that would, apart from this subsection, be included in the entity’s assessable income because of:

Division 276; or

(ii) Division 5 or 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

the amount can be attributed (either directly or indirectly through one or more interposed trusts or partnerships that are not *corporate tax entities) to a foreign equity distribution; and

at the time the distribution is made, the entity satisfies the participation test in section 768-15 in relation to the company that made the distribution; and

the entity:

does not receive the distribution in the capacity of a trustee; or

receives the distribution in the capacity of a trustee of a public trading trust; and

the distribution is not one to which section 768-7 (which is about foreign income tax deductions) applies.

An amount that is non-assessable non-exempt income under subsection (2) is taken, for the purpose of section 25-90 (about deductions relating to foreign non-assessable non-exempt income) to be derived from the same source as the foreign equity distribution.

768-7 Foreign equity distributions entitled to a foreign income tax deduction

This section applies to a foreign equity distribution if:

all or part of the distribution gives rise to a foreign income tax deduction; and

the exception in subsection (2) does not apply to the distribution.

Exception for foreign corporate collective investment vehicles

This subsection applies to a foreign equity distribution if:

the foreign income tax deduction arises because the company that made the distribution is recognised under the law of the foreign country in which the deduction arises as being used for collective investment; and

foreign income tax or a withholding-type tax was payable in respect of the distribution.

768-10 Meaning of foreign equity distribution

A foreign equity distribution is a *distribution or *non-share dividend made by a company that is not a Part X Australian resident (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) in respect of an *equity interest in the company.

768-15 Participation test—minimum 10% participation

An entity satisfies the participation test in this section in relation to another entity at a time if, at that time, the sum of the following is at least 10%:

the direct participation interest the entity would have in the other entity if rights on winding-up were disregarded;

the indirect participation interest the entity would have in the other entity if:

rights on winding-up were disregarded; and

section 960-185 only applied to intermediate entities that are not *corporate tax entities.

Subdivision 768-B — Some items of income that are exempt from income tax

Table of sections

768-100 Foreign government officials in Australia

768-105 Compensation arising out of Second World War

768-110 Foreign residents deriving income from certain activities in Australia’s exclusive economic zone or on or above Australia’s continental shelf

768-100 Foreign government officials in Australia

The amounts of ordinary income and statutory income covered by the table are exempt from income tax. In some cases, the exemption is subject to exceptions or special conditions, or both.

Note 1: Ordinary and statutory income that is exempt from income tax is called exempt income: see section 6-20. The note to subsection 6-15(2) describes some of the other consequences of it being exempt income.

Note 2: Even if an exempt payment is made to you, the Commissioner can still require you to lodge an income tax return or information under section 161 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

The Conventions are:

(a) the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations, as having the force of law because of the Diplomatic Privileges and Immunities Act 1967;

(b) the Vienna Convention on Consular Relations, as having the force of law because of the Consular Privileges and Immunities Act 1972.

Note: Those Conventions have the force of law in Australia because of those Acts and achieve substantially the same effect as item 1 of the table: see Article 34 of the Vienna Convention on Diplomatic Relations and Article 49 of the Vienna Convention on Consular Relations.

768-105 Compensation arising out of Second World War

A payment to you is exempt from income tax if:

you are an Australian resident at the time when it would otherwise be included in your assessable income; and

the payment is from a source in a foreign country; and

the payment is in connection with:

any wrong or injury; or

any loss of, or damage to, property; or

any other detriment;

suffered by you or another individual as a result of:

persecution by the National Socialist regime of Germany during the National Socialist period; or

persecution during the Second World War by any other enemy of the Commonwealth or by a regime covered by subsection (3); or

flight from persecution mentioned in subparagraph (iv) or (v); or

participation in a resistance movement during the Second World War against forces of the National Socialist regime of Germany or against forces of any other enemy of the Commonwealth; and

the payment is not directly or indirectly from any of your *associates.

Note: An example of a detriment covered by subparagraph (c)(iii) is if you lost the opportunity to qualify for a pension because your period of contribution was cut short because you had to flee persecution by the National Socialist regime.

Duration of Second World War

Subsection (1) applies to:

the period immediately before the Second World War; and

the period immediately after the Second World War;

in the same way as it applies to the period of the Second World War.

Regimes associated with an enemy of the Commonwealth

This subsection covers a regime that was:

in alliance with; or

occupied by; or

effectively controlled by; or

under duress from; or

surrounded by;

either or both of the following:

the National Socialist regime of Germany;

any other enemy of the Commonwealth.

Legal personal representative

Subsection (1) applies to a payment to:

your *legal personal representative; or

a trust established by your will;

in a corresponding way to the way in which it would have applied if:

the payment had been to you; and

if the payment is made after your death—you were still alive.

768-110 Foreign residents deriving income from certain activities in Australia’s exclusive economic zone or on or above Australia’s continental shelf

The object of this section is to ensure Australia’s compliance with certain provisions of the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea.

Note: The text of the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea is in Australian Treaty Series 1994 No. 31 ([1994] ATS 31) and could in 2014 be viewed in the Australian Treaties Library on the AustLII website (http://www.austlii.edu.au).

If you are a foreign resident, your ordinary income and statutory income is neither assessable income, nor exempt income, to the extent that:

the income is from an activity carried on in an area that is:

part of Australia’s exclusive economic zone; or

part of, or above, Australia’s continental shelf; and

the activity is specified by regulation to be a prescribed activity for the purpose of this section.

Subdivision 768-G — Reduction in capital gains and losses arising from CGT events in relation to certain voting interests in active foreign companies

Guide to Subdivision 768-G

768-500 What this Subdivision is about

If:

a company has a capital gain or capital loss arising from a CGT event that happens in relation to a share in a foreign company; and

the company holds a direct voting percentage of 10% or more in the foreign company for a certain period before the CGT event happens;

the gain or loss is reduced by a percentage that reflects the degree to which the assets of the foreign company are used in an active business.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

768-505 Reducing a capital gain or loss from certain CGT events in relation to certain voting interests

Active foreign business asset percentage

768-510 Active foreign business asset percentage

768-515 Choices to apply market value method or book value method

768-520 Market value method—choice made under subsection 768-515(1)

768-525 Book value method—choice made under subsection 768-515(2)

768-530 Active foreign business asset percentage—modifications for foreign life insurance companies and foreign general insurance companies

768-533 Foreign company that is a FIF using CFC calculation method—treatment as AFI subsidiary under this Subdivision

768-535 Modified rules for foreign wholly-owned groups

Types of assets of a foreign company

768-540 Active foreign business assets of a foreign company

768-545 Assets included in the total assets of a foreign company

Voting percentages in a company

768-550 Direct voting percentage in a company

768-555 Indirect voting percentage in a company

768-560 Total voting percentage in a company

Operative provisions

768-505 Reducing a capital gain or loss from certain CGT events in relation to certain voting interests

(1) The *capital gain or *capital loss a company (the holding company) that is an Australian resident makes from a *CGT event that happened at a particular time (the time of the CGT event) to a *share in a company (the foreign disposal company) that is a foreign resident is reduced if:

the holding company held a *direct voting percentage of 10% or more in the foreign disposal company throughout a 12 month period that:

began no earlier than 24 months before the time of the CGT event; and

ended no later than that time; and

(b) the share is not:

(i) an eligible finance share (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

a widely distributed finance share (within the meaning of that Part); and

the CGT event is CGT event A1, B1, C2, E1, E2, G3, J1, K4, K6, K10 or K11.

The gain or loss is reduced by the *active foreign business asset percentage (see sections 768-510, 768-530 and 768-535) of the foreign disposal company in relation to the holding company at the time of the CGT event.

Active foreign business asset percentage

768-510 Active foreign business asset percentage

(1) The active foreign business asset percentage of a company (the foreign company) that is a foreign resident, in relation to the holding company mentioned in section 768-505, at the time of the CGT event mentioned in that section, is worked out in accordance with this section.

Market value method

Work out that percentage under section 768-520 if:

the holding company has made a choice under subsection 768-515(1) in relation to the foreign company for that time; and

there is sufficient evidence of the *market value at that time of:

all *assets included in the total assets of the foreign company at that time; and

all *active foreign business assets of the foreign company at that time.

Book value method

Work out that percentage under section 768-525 if:

the holding company has made a choice under subsection 768-515(2) in relation to the foreign company for that time; and

there are *recognised company accounts of the foreign company for a period that ends no later than that time, but no more than 12 months before that time; and

if the foreign company was in existence before the start of the period mentioned in paragraph (b)—there are recognised company accounts of the foreign company for a period that ends at least 6 months, but no more than 18 months, before the end of the period mentioned in paragraph (b).

Default method

Otherwise, that percentage is:

100% (if this section is being applied for the purposes of section 768-505 to reduce a *capital loss of the holding company); or

zero (in any other case).

768-515 Choices to apply market value method or book value method

Choice for market value method

The holding company may choose to work out the *active foreign business asset percentage of the foreign company for the time of the CGT event under section 768-520.

Choice for book value method

The holding company may choose to work out the *active foreign business asset percentage of the foreign company for the time of the CGT event under section 768-525.

Method of making choice

The way an entity making a choice under subsection (1) or (2) prepares its income tax return is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

Note: If an entity does not make a choice under subsection (1) or (2), it will work out the active foreign business asset percentage of the foreign company in accordance with the default method in subsection 768-510(4).

768-520 Market value method—choice made under subsection 768-515(1)

(1) The active foreign business asset percentage of the foreign company in relation to the holding company, at the time of the CGT event, is worked out under this section in this way.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the *market value at that time of all *assets included in the total assets of the foreign company at that time.

Step 2. Work out the *market value (see subsection (2)) at that time of all *active foreign business assets of the foreign company at that time.

Step 3. Divide the result of step 2 by the result of step 1.

Step 4. Express the result of step 3 as a percentage, and round that percentage to the nearest whole percentage point (rounding a number ending in .5 upwards).

Step 5. The active foreign business asset percentage is:

if the result of step 4 is less than 10%—zero; or

if the result of step 4 is 10% or more, but less than 90%—that result; or

if the result of step 4 is 90% or more—100%.

Note 1: If the foreign company is a foreign life insurance company or a foreign general insurance company, the result of step 2 is modified under section 768-530.

Note 2: If the foreign company is a member of a wholly-owned group, section 768-535 may modify the way in which this section operates.

(2) If, at the time of the CGT event:

(a) an *active foreign business asset of the foreign company is a *share in another company (the subsidiary company); and

the subsidiary company is a foreign resident;

then, in working out the *market value of all *active foreign business assets of the foreign company at that time for the purposes of step 2 of the method statement in subsection (1), treat the *market value of the share at that time according to the following table.

Note: For the purposes of item 1 of the table, it is necessary to work out the active foreign business asset percentage of the subsidiary company before working out the active foreign business asset percentage of the foreign company.

768-525 Book value method—choice made under subsection 768-515(2)

(1) The active foreign business asset percentage of the foreign company in relation to the holding company, at the time of the CGT event, is worked out under this section in this way.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the foreign company’s average value of total assets at that time under subsection (2).

Step 2. Work out the foreign company’s average value of active foreign business assets at that time under subsection (3).

Step 3. Divide the result of step 2 by the result of step 1.

Step 4. Express the result of step 3 as a percentage, and round that percentage to the nearest whole percentage point (rounding a number ending in .5 upwards).

Step 5. The active foreign business asset percentage is:

if the result of step 4 is less than 10%—zero; or

if the result of step 4 is 10% or more, but less than 90%—that result; or

if the result of step 4 is 90% or more—100%.

Note: If the foreign company is a member of a wholly-owned group, section 768-535 may modify the way in which this section operates.

(2) The foreign company’s average value of total assets at the time of the CGT event is worked out in this way.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the sum of the values (see subsection (5)) of every *asset included in the total assets of the foreign company at the end of the most recent period:

that ends no later than that time, but no more than 12 months before that time; and

for which the foreign company has *recognised company accounts.

Step 2. Work out the sum of the values (see subsection (5)) of every *asset included in the total assets of the foreign company at the end of the most recent period:

that ends at least 6 months, but no more than 18 months, before the end of the period mentioned in step 1; and

for which the foreign company has *recognised company accounts.

Note: See subsection (6) if the foreign company does not have recognised company accounts for a period mentioned in this step.

Step 3. Work out the sum of the results of steps 1 and 2, and divide that sum by 2.

(3) The foreign company’s average value of active foreign business assets at that time is worked out in this way.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the sum of the values (see subsections (4) and (5)) of every *active foreign business asset of the foreign company at the end of the most recent period:

that ends no later than that time, but no more than 12 months before that time; and

for which the foreign company has *recognised company accounts.

Step 2. Work out the sum of the values (see subsections (4) and (5)) of every *active foreign business asset of the foreign company at the end of the most recent period:

that ends at least 6 months, but no more than 18 months, before the end of the period mentioned in step 1; and

for which the foreign company has *recognised company accounts.

Note: See subsection (6) if the foreign company does not have recognised company accounts for a period mentioned in this step.

Step 3. Work out the sum of the results of steps 1 and 2, and divide that sum by 2.

Note: If the foreign company is a foreign life insurance company or a foreign general insurance company, the results of steps 1 and 2 are modified under section 768-530.

(4) If an *active foreign business asset of the foreign company is a *share in another company (the subsidiary company) that is a foreign resident, then, for the purposes of steps 1 and 2 of the method statement in subsection (3), treat the value of the share at a particular time according to the following table.

Note: For the purposes of item 1 of the table, it is necessary to work out the active foreign business asset percentage of the subsidiary company before working out the active foreign business asset percentage of the foreign company.

For the purposes of this section, the value of an asset of a foreign company at the end of a period is taken to be:

the value of the asset as shown in the *recognised company accounts of the foreign company for that period; or

(b) if the value of the asset is not shown in the recognised company accounts of the foreign company for that period—zero.

The result of:

step 2 of the method statement in subsection (2); and

step 2 of the method statement in subsection (3);

is taken to be zero if the foreign company does not have *recognised company accounts for a period mentioned in those steps.

Note: This will only be the case if the foreign company was not in existence before the start of the period mentioned in step 1 of those method statements (see paragraph 768-510(3)(c)).

768-530 Active foreign business asset percentage—modifications for foreign life insurance companies and foreign general insurance companies

If the foreign company is a foreign life insurance company or a foreign general insurance company, work out its *active foreign business asset percentage according to section 768-510, but with the modifications set out in subsections (2) and (3).

Treat a reference in the following provisions to a period as a reference to a statutory accounting period of the foreign company:

paragraphs 768-510(3)(b) and (c);

section 768-525.

Apply the modifications set out in the following table.

The amount applicable under this subsection for a statutory accounting period of the foreign company is worked out using the following formula:

where:

active insurance amount means:

(a) if the foreign company is a *foreign life insurance company—the untainted policy liabilities (within the meaning of subsection 446(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of the foreign company for the statutory accounting period; or

if the foreign company is a foreign general insurance company—the active general insurance amount worked out under subsection (5) for the statutory accounting period.

total insurance assets means:

(a) if the foreign company is a *foreign life insurance company—the total assets (within the meaning of subsection 446(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of the foreign company for the statutory accounting period; or

if the foreign company is a foreign general insurance company—the total assets (within the meaning of subsection 446(4) of that Act) of the foreign company for the statutory accounting period.

value of non-active foreign business assets means:

for the purposes of item 1 of the table in subsection (3)—the difference between:

the result of step 1 of the method statement in subsection 768-520(1); and

the result of step 2 of that method statement (apart from this section); or

for the purposes of item 2 of the table in subsection (3)—the difference between:

the result of step 1 of the method statement in subsection 768-525(2); and

the result of step 1 of the method statement in subsection 768-525(3) (apart from this section); or

for the purposes of item 3 of the table in subsection (3)—the difference between:

the result of step 2 of the method statement in subsection 768-525(2); and

the result of step 2 of the method statement in subsection 768-525(3) (apart from this section).

Active insurance amount for foreign general insurance company

The active general insurance amount under this subsection for a statutory accounting period of the foreign company is worked out using the following formula:

where:

net assets means the net assets (within the meaning of subsection 446(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of the foreign company for the statutory accounting period.

solvency amount means the solvency amount (within the meaning of subsection 446(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of the foreign company for the statutory accounting period.

tainted outstanding claims means the tainted outstanding claims (within the meaning of subsection 446(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of the foreign company for the statutory accounting period.

total general insurance assets means the total assets (within the meaning of subsection 446(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of the foreign company for the statutory accounting period.

768-533 Foreign company that is a FIF using CFC calculation method—treatment as AFI subsidiary under this Subdivision

This section applies if:

(a) the foreign company is a FIF (within the meaning of former section 481 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

(b) the holding company has made a choice under former subsection 559A(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in relation to the foreign company in respect of a notional accounting period (within the meaning of former section 486 of that Act) of the foreign company that ends in the 2009-10 income year; and

because of the choice, the foreign company has been treated under former paragraph 559A(3)(c) of that Act as an AFI subsidiary (within the meaning of that Act) in relation to that holding company; and

the holding company makes a choice under subsection (1A) in relation to the foreign company; and

the holding company has not failed to make a choice under that subsection for the 2010-11 income year or any later income year.

(1A) A holding company may make a choice under this subsection in relation to a foreign company if the holding company could have made a choice in relation to the foreign company under former section 559A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 if it had not been repealed by item 37 of Schedule 1 to the Tax Laws Amendment (Foreign Source Income Deferral) Act (No. 1) 2010.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, treat the foreign company as an AFI subsidiary in relation to that holding company at that time.

768-535 Modified rules for foreign wholly-owned groups

This section applies if:

(a) for the purposes of section 768-505, it is necessary to work out the *active foreign business asset percentage of a company (the top foreign company) in relation to the holding company mentioned in that section, at the time of the CGT event mentioned in that section; and

(b) the top foreign company is not:

(i) an AFI subsidiary (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

(ii) a *foreign life insurance company; or

a foreign general insurance company; and

for the purposes of section 768-505, it is also necessary (apart from this section) to work out the active foreign business asset percentage at that time of 1 or more other companies in relation to the holding company, at that time, where:

(i) the top foreign company and 1 or more of those other companies (the subsidiary foreign companies) are members of a *wholly-owned group; and

each of the subsidiary foreign companies is a *100% subsidiary of the top foreign company.

The holding company may choose to work out the *active foreign business asset percentage of the top foreign company in accordance with subsections (4) and (6).

The way an entity making a choice under subsection (2) prepares its income tax return is sufficient evidence of the making of the choice.

If the holding company has made a choice under subsection (2), the provisions mentioned in subsection (5) operate, for the purposes of section 768-505, as if each subsidiary foreign company were a part of the top foreign company, rather than a separate entity.

Note 1: This subsection means that certain assets are not treated as active foreign business assets, or as assets included in the total assets, of any of the subsidiary foreign companies or of the top foreign company. For example:

a share owned by one of those companies in another of those companies; and

a debt owed by one of those companies to another of those companies.

Note 2: If an asset (other than an asset mentioned in Note 1) is actually an active foreign business asset, or an asset included in the total assets, of a subsidiary foreign company, it is treated under this subsection as an active foreign business asset, or as an asset included in the total assets, of the top foreign company.

For the purposes of subsection (4), the provisions are:

section 768-540 (active foreign business assets of a foreign company); and

section 768-545 (assets included in the total assets of a foreign company).

If the holding company has made a choice under subsection (2), then for the purposes of sections 768-510 and 768-525, treat the *recognised consolidated accounts of the top foreign company and all of the subsidiary foreign companies as the *recognised company accounts of the top foreign company.

Types of assets of a foreign company

768-540 Active foreign business assets of a foreign company

(1) An asset is, at a particular time, an active foreign business asset of a company (the foreign company) that is a foreign resident if, at that time:

the asset is an *asset included in the total assets of the company; and

the asset satisfies any of these conditions:

the asset is used, or held ready for use, by the company in the course of carrying on a business;

the asset is goodwill;

the asset is a *share; and

(c) the asset is not any of the following:

taxable Australian property;

a *membership interest in a company that is an Australian resident;

a membership interest in a *resident trust for CGT purposes;

an option or right to acquire a membership interest mentioned in subparagraph (ii) or (iii); and

(d) the asset is not covered by subsection (2); and

(e) if the foreign company is an AFI subsidiary (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) whose sole or principal business is financial intermediary business—the asset is not covered under subsection (4).

An asset is covered by this subsection if it is:

a financial instrument (other than a *share or a trade debt); or

either:

(i) an eligible finance share (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

a widely distributed finance share (within the meaning of that Part); or

an interest in a trust or *partnership; or

a *life insurance policy; or

a right or option in respect of:

a financial instrument; or

an interest in a company, trust or partnership; or

a life insurance policy; or

cash or cash equivalent; or

an asset whose main use in the course of carrying on the business mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(i) is to *derive interest, an *annuity, rent, *royalties or foreign exchange gains unless:

the asset is an intangible asset and has been substantially developed, altered or improved by the foreign company so that its *market value has been substantially enhanced; or

its main use for deriving rent was only temporary.

(3) If, at the time mentioned in subsection (1), the foreign company is an AFI subsidiary (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) whose sole or principal business is financial intermediary business (within the meaning of that Part), subsection (2) operates as if:

paragraphs (2)(a) and (f) were omitted; and

paragraph (2)(g) did not contain a reference to interest, an *annuity or foreign exchange gains; and

subparagraph (2)(e)(i) were omitted and the following subparagraph were substituted:

(i) a financial instrument, other than an asset mentioned in paragraph 450(1)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

The asset is covered under this subsection if:

all of these conditions are satisfied:

(i) the asset is an asset mentioned in subparagraph 450(4)(b)(i) or (ii) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

the asset was acquired from another entity;

(iii) either of the conditions mentioned in subparagraph 450(6)(c)(i) and (ii) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 were satisfied in relation to the other entity at the time of the acquisition; or

both of these conditions are satisfied:

(i) the asset relates to a debt to which factoring income (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) of the foreign company relates;

(ii) the condition in paragraph 450(8)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 is satisfied in relation to the debt.

768-545 Assets included in the total assets of a foreign company

(1) At a particular time, an asset is an asset included in the total assets of a company (the foreign company) that is a foreign resident if:

the asset is a CGT asset at that time; and

the foreign company owns the asset at that time; and

(c) if at that time the foreign company is not an AFI subsidiary (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) whose sole or principal business is financial intermediary business (within the meaning of that Part)—the asset is not a foreign company derivative asset covered by subsection (2).

An asset is a foreign company derivative asset covered by this subsection if:

(a) the asset is an *arrangement covered by subsection (3), unless the regulations declare the asset not to be a foreign company derivative asset covered by this subsection; or

the regulations declare the asset to be a foreign company derivative asset covered by this subsection.

An arrangement is covered by this subsection if:

under the arrangement, a party to the arrangement must, or may be required to, provide at some future time consideration of a particular kind or kinds to someone; and

(b) that future time is not less than the number of days, prescribed by regulations made for the purposes of paragraph 761D(1)(b) of the Corporations Act 2001, after the day on which the arrangement is entered into; and

the amount of the consideration, or the value of the arrangement, is ultimately determined, *derived from or varies by reference to (wholly or in part) the value or amount of something else (of any nature whatsoever and whether or not deliverable), including, for example, one or more of the following:

an asset;

a rate (including an interest rate or exchange rate);

an index;

a commodity; and

subsection (4) does not apply in relation to the arrangement.

An arrangement under which one person has an obligation to buy, and another person has an obligation to sell, property is not an arrangement covered by subsection (3) merely because the arrangement provides for the consideration to be varied by reference to a general inflation index such as the Consumer Price Index.

Voting percentages in a company

768-550 Direct voting percentage in a company

(1) An entity’s direct voting percentage at a particular time in a company is:

(a) if the entity has a voting interest (within the meaning of section 334A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) in the foreign company at that time amounting to a percentage of the voting power of the company—that percentage; or

otherwise—zero.

(2) In applying section 334A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the purposes of subsection (1) of this section, assume that:

the entity is a company; and

the entity is not the beneficial owner of a *share in the company if a trust or partnership is interposed between the entity and the company.

768-555 Indirect voting percentage in a company

(1) An entity’s indirect voting percentage at a particular time in a company (the subsidiary company) is worked out by multiplying:

(a) the entity’s *direct voting percentage (if any) in another company (the intermediate company) at that time;

by:

the sum of:

the intermediate company’s direct voting percentage (if any) in the subsidiary company at that time; and

the intermediate company’s indirect voting percentage (if any) in the subsidiary company at that time (as worked out under one or more other applications of this section).

(2) If there is more than one intermediate company to which subsection (1) applies at that time, the entity’s indirect voting percentage is the sum of the percentages worked out under subsection (1) in relation to each of those intermediate companies.

768-560 Total voting percentage in a company

An entity’s total voting percentage at a particular time in a company is the sum of:

the entity’s *direct voting percentage in the company at that time; and

the entity’s *indirect voting percentage in the company at that time.

Subdivision 768-R — Temporary residents

Guide to Subdivision 768-R

768-900 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision modifies the general tax rules for people in Australia who are temporary residents, whether Australian residents or foreign residents.

Generally foreign income derived by temporary residents is non-assessable non-exempt income and capital gains and losses they make are also disregarded for CGT purposes. There are some exceptions for employment-related income and capital gains on shares and rights acquired under employee share schemes.

Temporary residents are also partly relieved of record-keeping obligations in relation to the controlled foreign company rules.

Interest paid by temporary residents is not subject to withholding tax and may be non-assessable non-exempt income for a foreign resident.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

768-905 Objects

768-910 Income derived by temporary resident

768-915 Certain capital gains and capital losses of temporary resident to be disregarded

768-950 Individual becoming an Australian resident

768-955 Temporary resident who ceases to be temporary resident but remains an Australian resident

768-960 Temporary resident not attributable taxpayer for purposes of controlled foreign companies rules

768-970 Modification of rules for accruals system of taxation of certain non-resident trust estates

768-980 Interest paid by temporary resident

Operative provisions

768-905 Objects

The objects of this Subdivision are to:

provide *temporary residents with tax relief on most foreign source income and capital gains; and

relieve the burdens associated with complying with certain record-keeping obligations and interest withholding tax obligations.

768-910 Income derived by temporary resident

The following are non-assessable non-exempt income:

the ordinary income you *derive directly or indirectly from a source other than an *Australian source if you are a *temporary resident when you derive it;

your statutory income (other than a net capital gain) from a source other than an Australian source if you are a temporary resident when you derive it.

This subsection has effect subject to subsections (3) and (5).

Note: A capital gain or loss you make may be disregarded under section 768-915.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b):

if you have statutory income because a particular circumstance occurs, you derive the statutory income at the time when the circumstance occurs; and

if you have statutory income because a number of circumstances occur, you derive the statutory income at the time when the last of those circumstances occurs.

Exception to subsection (1)

However, the following are not non-assessable non-exempt income under subsection (1):

the ordinary income you *derive directly or indirectly from a source other than an *Australian source to the extent that it is remuneration, for employment undertaken, or services provided, while you are a *temporary resident;

your statutory income (other than a net capital gain) from a source other than an Australian source to the extent that it relates to employment undertaken, or services provided, while you are a temporary resident;

an amount included in your assessable income under Division 86.

Note: This subsection only makes an amount not non-assessable non-exempt income under subsection (1). It does not prevent that amount from being non-assessable non-exempt income under some other provision of this Act or the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

768-915 Certain capital gains and capital losses of temporary resident to be disregarded

A *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event is disregarded if:

you are a *temporary resident when, or immediately before, the CGT event happens; and

you would not make a capital gain or loss from the CGT event, or the capital gain or loss from the CGT event would have been disregarded under Division 855, if you were a foreign resident when, or immediately before, the CGT event happens.

Subsection (1) does not apply in relation to CGT event I1 if:

the CGT event happens in relation to an *ESS interest that is a beneficial interest in a right (or to a *share acquired by exercising such a right); and

the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-33(1)(a) to (c) (about start ups) apply to the ESS interest.

768-950 Individual becoming an Australian resident

Section 855-45 does not apply to your becoming an Australian resident if you are a *temporary resident immediately after you become an Australian resident.

768-955 Temporary resident who ceases to be temporary resident but remains an Australian resident

If you are a *temporary resident and you then cease to be a temporary resident (but remain, at that time, an Australian resident), there are rules relevant to each CGT asset that:

you owned just before you ceased to be a temporary resident; and

is not taxable Australian property; and

you *acquired on or after 20 September 1985.

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset (at the time you cease to be a *temporary resident) is its *market value at that time.

Also, Parts 3-1 and 3-3 apply to the asset as if you had *acquired it at the time you ceased to be a *temporary resident.

This section does not apply to an *ESS interest if:

Subdivision 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the interest, and the *ESS deferred taxing point for the interest has not yet occurred; or

the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-33(1)(a) to (c) (about start ups) apply to the ESS interest.

768-960 Temporary resident not attributable taxpayer for purposes of controlled foreign companies rules

For the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (which deals with the attribution of income in respect of controlled foreign companies), you are taken not to be an *attributable taxpayer in relation to a *CFC or *CFT at any time you are a *temporary resident.

768-970 Modification of rules for accruals system of taxation of certain non-resident trust estates

At any time when you are a *temporary resident, you are taken not to be a resident for the purposes of section 102AAZD of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

768-980 Interest paid by temporary resident

Interest that is paid by a *temporary resident:

(a) is an amount to which section 128B (liability to withholding tax) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply; and

is non-assessable non-exempt income if the interest is:

*derived by a foreign resident; and

is not derived from carrying on business in Australia at or through a permanent establishment in Australia.

Division 770 — Foreign income tax offsets

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 770

770-A Entitlement rules for foreign income tax offsets

770-B Amount of foreign income tax offset

770-C Rules about payment of foreign income tax

770-D Administration

Guide to Division 770

770-1 What this Division is about

You may get a non-refundable tax offset for foreign income tax paid on your assessable income.

There is a limit on the amount of the tax offset.

A resident of a foreign country does not get the offset for some foreign income taxes.

You may also get the offset for foreign income tax paid on some amounts that are not taxed in Australia.

770-5 Object

The object of this Division is to relieve double taxation where:

you have paid foreign income tax on amounts included in your assessable income; and

you would, apart from this Division, pay Australian income tax on the same amounts.

To achieve this object, this Division gives you a tax offset to reduce or eliminate Australian income tax otherwise payable on those amounts.

Note 1: This Division applies in relation to Medicare levy and Medicare levy (fringe benefits) surcharge in the same way as it applies to Australian income tax. See section 90-1 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Note 2: The tax offset under this Division can be applied against your Medicare levy and Medicare levy (fringe benefits) surcharge liability for the year, if an amount of it remains after you apply it against your basic income tax liability. See item 22 of the table in subsection 63-10(1).

Subdivision 770-A — Entitlement rules for foreign income tax offsets

Table of sections

Basic entitlement rule for foreign income tax offset

770-10 Entitlement to foreign income tax offset

770-15 Meaning of foreign income tax, credit absorption tax and unitary tax

Basic entitlement rule for foreign income tax offset

770-10 Entitlement to foreign income tax offset

You are entitled to a tax offset for an income year for foreign income tax. An amount of foreign income tax counts towards the tax offset for the year if you paid it in respect of an amount that is all or part of an amount included in your assessable income for the year.

Note 1: The offset is for the income year in which your assessable income included an amount in respect of which you paid foreign income tax—even if you paid the foreign income tax in another income year.

Note 2: If the foreign income tax has been paid on an amount that is part non-assessable non-exempt income and part assessable income for you for the income year, only a proportionate share of the foreign income tax (the share that corresponds to the part that is assessable income) will count towards the tax offset (excluding the operation of subsection (2)).

Taxes paid on section 23AI or 23AK amounts

(2) An amount of *foreign income tax counts towards the *tax offset for you for the year if you paid it in respect of an amount that is your *non-assessable non-exempt income under either section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 for the year.

Note 1: Sections 23AI and 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 provide that amounts paid out of income previously attributed from a controlled foreign company or a foreign investment fund are non-assessable non-exempt income.

Note 2: Foreign income taxes covered by this subsection are direct taxes (for example, a withholding tax on a dividend payment) and not underlying taxes, only some of which are covered by section 770-135.

Exception for certain residence-based foreign income taxes

An amount of foreign income tax you paid does not count towards the tax offset for the year if you paid it:

to a foreign country because you are a resident of that country for the purposes of a law relating to the foreign income tax; and

in respect of an amount derived from a source outside that country.

Exception for previously complying funds and previously foreign funds

An amount of foreign income tax paid by a *superannuation provider in relation to a superannuation fund does not count towards the tax offset for the year if:

the tax was paid in respect of an amount included in the fund’s assessable income under table item 2 or 3 in section 295-320; and

the provider paid the tax before the start of the income year.

Note: Table items 2 and 3 in section 295-320 include additional amounts in the assessable income of superannuation funds that change their status from complying to non-complying or from foreign to Australian.

Exception for credit absorption tax and unitary tax

An amount of credit absorption tax or unitary tax you paid does not count towards the tax offset for the year.

Exception for foreign GloBE taxes

An amount you paid of any of the following does not count towards the tax offset for the year:

foreign IIR tax;

foreign UTPR tax.

Note: For rules relating to foreign DMT tax, see section 770-145.

770-15 Meaning of foreign income tax, credit absorption tax and unitary tax

(1) Foreign income tax means tax that:

is imposed by a law other than an Australian law; and

is:

tax on income; or

tax on profits or gains, whether of an income or capital nature; or

(iii) any other tax, being a tax that is subject to an agreement having the force of law under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953.

Note: Foreign income tax includes only that which has been correctly imposed in accordance with the relevant foreign law or, where the foreign jurisdiction has a tax treaty with Australia (having the force of law under the International Tax Agreements Act 1953), has been correctly imposed in accordance with that tax treaty.

(2) Credit absorption tax means a tax imposed by a law of a foreign country, or of any part of, or place in, a foreign country to the extent that the tax would not have been payable if the entity concerned or another entity had not been entitled to an offset in respect of the tax under this Division.

(3) Unitary tax means a tax imposed by a law of a foreign country, or of any part of, or place in, a foreign country, being a law which, for the purposes of taxing income, profits or gains of a company derived from sources within that country, takes into account, or is entitled to take into account, income, losses, outgoings or assets of the company (or of a company that for the purposes of that law is treated as being associated with the company) derived, incurred or situated outside that country, but does not include tax imposed by that law if that law only takes those matters into account:

if such an associated company is a resident of the foreign country for the purposes of the law of the foreign country; or

for the purposes of granting any form of relief in relation to tax imposed on dividends received by one company from another company.

Subdivision 770-B — Amount of foreign income tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 770-B

770-65 What this Subdivision is about

The amount of your tax offset is based on the amount of foreign income tax you have paid.

However, there is a limit on the maximum amount of your offset. The limit is the greater of $1,000 and an amount worked out under this Subdivision. This amount is based on a comparison between your tax liability and the tax liability you would have if certain foreign-taxed and foreign-sourced income and related deductions were disregarded.

You may choose to use the limit of $1,000 and not work out this amount.

There is an increase in the limit to ensure foreign income tax paid on some amounts that are not taxed always forms part of the offset.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

770-70 Amount of foreign income tax offset

770-75 Foreign income tax offset limit

770-80 Increase in offset limit for tax paid on amounts to which section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 apply

Operative provisions

770-70 Amount of foreign income tax offset

The amount of your tax offset for the year is the sum of the foreign income tax you paid that counts towards the offset for the year.

Note 1: The amount of foreign income tax you paid may be affected by Subdivision 770-C.

Note 2: The amount of the offset might be increased under section 770-230 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997, if you have pre-commencement excess foreign income tax.

770-75 Foreign income tax offset limit

(1) There is a limit (the offset limit) on the amount of your *tax offset for a year. If your tax offset exceeds the offset limit, reduce the offset by the amount of the excess.

Your offset limit is the greater of:

$1,000; and

this amount:

(i) the amount of income tax payable by you for the income year; less

the amount of income tax that would be payable by you for the income year if the assumptions in subsection (4) were made.

Note 1: If you do not intend to claim a foreign income tax offset of more than $1,000 for the year, you do not need to work out the amount under paragraph (b).

Note 2: The amount of the offset limit might be increased under section 770-80.

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), work out the amount of income tax payable by you, or that would be payable by you, disregarding any *tax offsets.

Assume that:

your assessable income did not include:

so much of any amount included in your assessable income as represents an amount in respect of which you paid foreign income tax that counts towards the tax offset for the year; and

any other amounts of ordinary income or statutory income from a source other than an *Australian source; and

you were not entitled to any deductions that:

are *debt deductions that are attributable to an *overseas permanent establishment of yours; or

are deductions (other than debt deductions) that are reasonably related to amounts covered by paragraph (a) for that year.

Note: You must also assume you were not entitled to any deductions for certain converted foreign losses: see section 770-35 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Example: If an entity has paid foreign income tax on a capital gain that comprises part of its net capital gain, only that capital gain on which foreign income tax has been paid is disregarded.

770-80 Increase in offset limit for tax paid on amounts to which section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 apply

Your offset limit under subsection 770-75(2) is increased by any amounts of foreign income tax that count towards the tax offset for you for the year because of subsection 770-10(2).

Subdivision 770-C — Rules about payment of foreign income tax

Table of sections

Rules about when foreign tax is paid

770-130 When foreign income tax is considered paid—taxes paid by someone else

770-135 Foreign income tax paid by CFCs on attributed amounts

Rules about when foreign tax is considered not paid

770-140 When foreign income tax is considered not paid—anti-avoidance rule

770-145 When foreign income tax is considered not paid—foreign DMT tax reduced by amount of benefit

770-150 Meaning of foreign DMT tax

Rules about when foreign tax is paid

770-130 When foreign income tax is considered paid—taxes paid by someone else

(1) This Act applies to you as if you had paid an amount of *foreign income tax in respect of an amount (a taxed amount) that is all or part of an amount included in your *ordinary income or *statutory income if you are covered by subsection (2) or (3) for an amount of foreign income tax paid in respect of the taxed amount.

You are covered by this subsection for an amount of foreign income tax paid in respect of a taxed amount if that foreign income tax has been paid in respect of the taxed amount by another entity under an arrangement with you or under the law relating to the foreign income tax.

Example: You are a partner in a partnership and the partnership pays foreign income tax on the partnership income.

You are covered by this subsection for an amount of foreign income tax paid in respect of the taxed amount to the extent that:

(a) the taxed amount is taken, because of section 6B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (the 1936 Act), to be attributable to another amount of income of a particular kind or source; and

foreign income tax has been paid in respect of the other amount of income; and

the taxed amount is less than it would have been if that tax had not been paid.

Example: Aust Co (an Australian resident) is the sole beneficiary of an Australian resident trust H and is presently entitled to all the income of trust H. Trust H owns shares in For Co (a foreign company). For Co pays a dividend to trust H and the dividend is subject to withholding tax in For Co’s country of residence.

Trust H allocates to Aust Co, the dividend, as well as other Australian source income trust H earned in the year (none of which was subject to foreign income tax). Aust Co is treated as having paid the foreign income tax paid by For Co under subsection 770-130(3). The foreign income tax is treated as paid in respect of the amount included in Aust Co’s assessable income that is attributable to the dividend.

770-135 Foreign income tax paid by CFCs on attributed amounts

This Division applies to an entity (other than a CFC) as if it had paid an amount of foreign income tax worked out under subsection (7) in respect of an amount included in its assessable income if:

the amount is included in its assessable income as described in subsection (2); and

the conditions in subsections (3) and (5) are satisfied.

An amount is included in an entity’s assessable income as described in this subsection if the entity is a company and the amount is included under:

(a) section 456 (a section 456 case) of the 1936 Act in relation to a *CFC and a statutory accounting period; or

(b) section 457 (a section 457 case) of that Act in relation to a CFC.

Note: Section 456 of the 1936 Act includes, in the assessable income of certain Australian shareholders, amounts that are attributable to the profits of an Australian-controlled foreign company.

Section 457 does likewise when a controlled foreign company changes residence from an unlisted to a listed country or to Australia.

Tax paid condition

(3) An amount of *foreign income tax, income tax or *withholding tax (the tax amount) must have been paid:

for a section 456 case—by the CFC in respect of an amount included in the notional assessable income of the CFC for the statutory accounting period; or

for a section 457 case—by the CFC.

Note: Section 770-130 deems foreign income tax to have been paid in certain circumstances.

For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(a) and (b), the tax amount does not include an amount of foreign IIR tax or foreign UTPR tax that is treated as not being foreign tax under subsection 393(2) of the 1936 Act.

For the purposes of paragraphs (3)(a) and (b), the tax amount includes an amount that is taken to have been paid by the CFC under subsection 393(4) of the 1936 Act (about tax paid on reinsurance premiums).

Association condition

If the entity is a company, it must have an *attribution percentage of 10% or more:

for a section 456 case—in relation to the CFC at the end of the statutory accounting period; or

for a section 457 case—in relation to the CFC at the residence-change time (within the meaning of section 457 of the 1936 Act).

Amount of foreign income tax

The amount worked out under this subsection is:

for a section 456 case—the sum of all the tax amounts for the statutory accounting period multiplied by the company’s *attribution percentage in relation to the CFC at the time mentioned in paragraph (5)(a); or

for a section 457 case—the sum of all the tax amounts to the extent they are attributable to the amount included in the company’s assessable income under section 457 of the 1936 Act.

Grossing-up of attributed amount

For the purposes of this Act except this section and section 371 of the 1936 Act (for a section 456 case or a section 457 case), the amount included in the entity’s assessable income as described in subsection (2) is taken to be increased by the amount of tax worked out under subsection (7).

Note: Section 371 of the 1936 Act records an amount in an attribution account when the amount is included in the assessable income of an attributable taxpayer in relation to a CFC.

Rules about when foreign tax is considered not paid

770-140 When foreign income tax is considered not paid—anti-avoidance rule

Despite anything else in this Division, this Act applies to you as if you had not paid an amount of *foreign income tax to the extent that you or any other entity become entitled to:

a refund of the foreign income tax; or

any other benefit worked out by reference to the amount of the foreign income tax (other than a reduction in the amount of the foreign income tax).

770-145 When foreign income tax is considered not paid—foreign DMT tax reduced by amount of benefit

This section applies if:

an entity is:

a *Group Entity of an *Applicable MNE Group; or

a GloBE Joint Venture of an Applicable MNE Group; or

a GloBE JV Subsidiary of a GloBE Joint Venture of an Applicable MNE Group; and

the entity pays an amount of foreign income tax imposed by a tax law of a foreign country; and

the foreign income tax is foreign DMT tax; and

the entity, or another entity of a kind mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i), (ii) or (iii), is entitled to an amount of any of the following benefits in respect of the entity:

a refundable tax credit (whether by way of cash or cash equivalent, or through an offset of unrelated, existing liabilities), to the extent that the tax credit is computed as an excess over the entity’s income tax liability;

consideration received for the transfer of a transferable tax credit to which the entity was entitled in respect of foreign income tax of the foreign country;

cash or cash equivalent amounts recognised as government grants under *accounting standard AASB 120 (or, if that standard does not apply to the entity, a comparable accounting standard that applies to the entity under a foreign law);

if the foreign country is specified in a determination under subsection (3)—a benefit of a kind specified in the determination in respect of the foreign country; and

both of the following are in relation to the same *foreign tax period in relation to the entity:

the foreign income tax;

the benefits.

Despite anything else in this Division, this Act applies to the entity as if the amount of foreign DMT tax were reduced by the amount of the benefit (but not below zero).

The Minister may, by legislative instrument, make a determination specifying a benefit in respect of a specified foreign country.

In making the determination, the Minister must have regard to the following:

the extent (if any) to which the benefit has been designed to be available to *Applicable MNE Groups;

the extent (if any) to which the benefit could increase the amount of foreign DMT tax payable in the foreign country;

the extent (if any) to which the benefit could increase the amount of a tax offset under this Division;

the nature of any other benefit specified in the determination.

A reference in this section to a *Group Entity does not include a reference to a GloBE Excluded Entity.

770-150 Meaning of foreign DMT tax

(1) A tax is a foreign DMT tax if it is any of the following:

tax that is payable under a foreign law and is a *Qualified Domestic Minimum Top-up Tax;

(b) tax that is payable under a foreign law and would be a Qualified Domestic Minimum Top-up Tax if paragraph (c) of the definition of Qualified Domestic Minimum Top-up Tax in the *GloBE Rules were disregarded;

tax that is payable under a foreign law specified by regulations made for the purposes of this paragraph.

(2) If regulations made for the purposes of this subsection specify a provision of this Act and a tax that is payable under a foreign law, for the purposes of that provision, that tax is also a foreign DMT tax.

Subdivision 770-D — Administration

Table of sections

770-190 Amendment of assessments

770-190 Amendment of assessments

(1) Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment for the purpose of giving effect to this Division for an income year if:

(a) an event described in subsection (2) (an amendment event) happens after the time you lodged your *income tax return for that year; and

the amendment is made at any time during the period of 4 years starting immediately after the amendment event.

Note: Section 170 of that Act specifies the periods within which assessments may be amended.

The following are amendment events:

you pay an amount of foreign income tax that counts towards your tax offset for the year;

there is an increase in an amount of foreign income tax you paid that counts towards your offset for the year;

there is a reduction in an amount of foreign income tax you paid that counts towards your offset for the year.

Division 775 — Foreign currency gains and losses

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 775

775-A Objects of this Division

775-B Realisation of forex gains or losses

775-C Roll-over relief for facility agreements

775-D Qualifying forex accounts that pass the limited balance test

775-E Retranslation for qualifying forex accounts

775-F Retranslation under foreign exchange retranslation election under Subdivision 230-D

Guide to Division 775

775-5 What this Division is about

Your assessable income includes a forex realisation gain you make as a result of a forex realisation event.

You can deduct a forex realisation loss that you make as a result of a forex realisation event.

There are 5 main types of forex realisation events:

forex realisation event 1 happens if you dispose of foreign currency, or a right to receive foreign currency, to another entity;

forex realisation event 2 happens if you cease to have a right to receive foreign currency (otherwise than because you disposed of the right to another entity);

forex realisation event 3 happens if you cease to have an obligation to receive foreign currency;

forex realisation event 4 happens if you cease to have an obligation to pay foreign currency;

forex realisation event 5 happens if you cease to have a right to pay foreign currency.

There are special rules for certain short-term forex realisation gains and losses.

You may choose roll-over relief for certain facility agreements.

You may elect to receive concessional tax treatment for a qualifying forex account that passes the limited balance test.

You may choose retranslation for a qualifying forex account.

Subdivision 775-A — Objects of this Division

Table of sections

775-10 Objects of this Division

775-10 Objects of this Division

The objects of this Division are as follows:

to recognise foreign currency gains and losses for income tax purposes;

to quantify those gains and losses by reference to the change in the Australian dollar value of rights and obligations;

to treat certain foreign currency denominated financing facilities that are the economic equivalent of a loan as if the relevant facility were a loan;

to reduce compliance costs by not requiring the recognition of certain low-value foreign currency gains and losses that involve substantial calculations.

Subdivision 775-B — Realisation of forex gains or losses

Table of sections

775-15 Forex realisation gains are assessable

775-20 Certain forex realisation gains are exempt income

775-25 Certain forex realisation gains are non-assessable non-exempt income

775-27 Certain forex realisation gains are non-assessable non-exempt income

775-30 Forex realisation losses are deductible

775-35 Certain forex realisation losses are disregarded

775-40 Disposal of foreign currency or right to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 1

775-45 Ceasing to have a right to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 2

775-50 Ceasing to have an obligation to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 3

775-55 Ceasing to have an obligation to pay foreign currency—forex realisation event 4

775-60 Ceasing to have a right to pay foreign currency—forex realisation event 5

775-65 Only one forex realisation event to be counted

775-70 Tax consequences of certain short-term forex realisation gains

775-75 Tax consequences of certain short-term forex realisation losses

775-80 You may choose not to have sections 775-70 and 775-75 apply to you

775-85 Forex cost base of a right to receive foreign currency

775-90 Forex entitlement base of a right to pay foreign currency

775-95 Proceeds of assuming an obligation to pay foreign currency

775-100 Net costs of assuming an obligation to receive foreign currency

775-105 Currency exchange rate effect

775-110 Constructive receipts and payments

775-115 Economic set-off to be treated as legal set-off

775-120 Non-arm’s length transactions

775-125 CGT consequences of the acquisition of foreign currency as a result of forex realisation event 2 or 3

775-130 Certain deductions not allowable

775-135 Right to receive or pay foreign currency

775-140 Obligation to pay or receive foreign currency

775-145 Application of forex realisation events to currency and fungible rights and obligations

775-150 Transitional election

775-155 Applicable commencement date

775-160 Exception—event happens before the applicable commencement date

775-165 Exception—currency or right acquired, or obligation incurred, before the applicable commencement date

775-168 Exception—disposal or redemption of traditional securities

775-175 Application to things happening before commencement

775-15 Forex realisation gains are assessable

Basic rule

Your assessable income for an income year includes a *forex realisation gain you make as a result of a forex realisation event that happens during that year.

Exceptions

However, your assessable income does not include a *forex realisation gain to the extent that it:

is a gain of a private or domestic nature; and

is not covered by an item of the table:

Note: Parts 3-1 and 3-3 deal with capital gains and losses.

Section 775-70 provides for additional exceptions.

Note: Section 775-70 is about the tax consequences of certain short-term forex realisation gains.

No double taxation

To the extent that a *forex realisation gain would be included in your assessable income under this section and another provision of this Act, the gain is only included in your assessable income under this section.

Note: Under section 230-20, foreign exchange gains from a Division 230 financial arrangement are dealt with under Division 230 and not under this Division.

775-20 Certain forex realisation gains are exempt income

A *forex realisation gain you make is exempt income to the extent that, if it had been a *forex realisation loss, it would have been made in gaining or producing exempt income.

775-25 Certain forex realisation gains are non-assessable non-exempt income

A *forex realisation gain you make is non-assessable non-exempt income to the extent that, if it had been a *forex realisation loss, it would have been made in gaining or producing non-assessable non-exempt income.

775-27 Certain forex realisation gains are non-assessable non-exempt income

Sections 775-20 and 775-25 apply to a *forex realisation gain only if, had it been a *forex realisation loss, it would have been disregarded under section 775-35.

775-30 Forex realisation losses are deductible

Basic rule

You can deduct from your assessable income for an income year a *forex realisation loss that you make as a result of a forex realisation event that happens during that year.

Exceptions

However, you cannot deduct a *forex realisation loss under this section to the extent that it:

is a loss of a private or domestic nature; and

is not covered by an item of the table:

Note: Parts 3-1 and 3-3 deal with capital gains and losses.

Section 775-75 provides for additional exceptions.

Note: Section 775-75 is about the tax consequences of certain short-term forex realisation losses.

No double deductions

To the extent that this section and another provision of this Act would allow you a deduction for a *forex realisation loss, you can only deduct the loss under this section.

Note: Under section 230-20, foreign exchange losses from a Division 230 financial arrangement are dealt with under Division 230 and not under this Division.

775-35 Certain forex realisation losses are disregarded

A *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 1, 2 or 5 is disregarded to the extent that it is made in gaining or producing exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income.

A *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 3, 4 or 6 is disregarded to the extent that:

it is made in gaining or producing exempt income or non-assessable non-exempt income; and

the obligation, or the part of the obligation, does not give rise to a deduction.

775-40 Disposal of foreign currency or right to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 1

Forex realisation event 1

(1) Forex realisation event 1 is *CGT event A1 that happens if you dispose of:

foreign currency; or

a right, or a part of a right, to receive foreign currency.

Note: For extended meaning of right to receive foreign currency, see section 775-135.

Disposal

For the purposes of this section, use subsection 104-10(2) to work out whether you have disposed of:

foreign currency; or

a right, or a part of a right, to receive foreign currency.

Note: Under subsection 104-10(2), a disposal requires a change of ownership.

Time of event

For the purposes of this section, subsection 104-10(3) is modified so that the time of the event is when:

the foreign currency is disposed of; or

the right, or the part of the right, is disposed of.

Forex realisation gain

(4) You make a forex realisation gain if:

you make a *capital gain from the event; and

some or all of the capital gain is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is so much of the capital gain as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Note: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

For the purposes of paragraph (4)(a), Part 3-1 is modified so that section 118-20 is disregarded in working out the *capital gain.

Note: Section 118-20 deals with reducing capital gains if an amount is otherwise assessable.

Forex realisation loss

(6) You make a forex realisation loss if:

you make a *capital loss from the event; and

some or all of the capital loss is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is so much of the capital loss as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

No indexation of cost base

Note: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

For the purposes of this section, disregard Division 114.

Note: Division 114 deals with indexation of the cost base.

Foreign currency hedging gains and losses

For the purposes of this section, disregard section 118-55.

Note: Section 118-55 deals with foreign currency hedging gains and losses.

Capital proceeds

For the purposes of this section, if the capital proceeds from the event are more or less than the *market value of:

the foreign currency; or

the right, or the part of the right;

the capital proceeds from the event are taken to be the market value. (The market value is worked out as at the time of the event.)

775-45 Ceasing to have a right to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 2

Forex realisation event 2

(1) Forex realisation event 2 happens if:

you cease to have a right, or a part of a right, to receive foreign currency; and

the right, or the part of the right, is one of the following:

a right, or a part of a right, to receive, or that represents, ordinary income or statutory income (other than statutory income that is assessable under this Division or Division 102);

a right, or a part of a right, created or acquired in return for your ceasing to *hold a depreciating asset;

a right, or a part of a right, created or acquired in return for your paying, or agreeing to pay, an amount of Australian currency or foreign currency;

a right, or a part of a right, created or acquired in return for the occurrence of a realisation event in relation to a CGT asset you own, and none of subparagraphs (i), (ii) and (iii) applies; and

you did not cease to have the right, or the part of the right, because you disposed of the right or the part of the right (within the meaning of section 775-40).

Note 1: Disposals are dealt with by section 775-40 (forex realisation event 1).

Note 2: For extended meaning of right to receive foreign currency, see section 775-135.

Time of event

The time of the event is when you cease to have the right or the part of the right.

Forex realisation gain

(3) You make a forex realisation gain if:

the amount you receive in respect of the event happening exceeds the forex cost base of the right or the part of the right (the forex cost base is worked out as at the tax recognition time); and

some or all of the excess is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is so much of the excess as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Forex realisation loss

Note 1: For forex cost base, see section 775-85.

Note 2: For tax recognition time, see subsection (7).

Note 3: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

(4) You make a forex realisation loss if:

the amount you receive in respect of the event happening falls short of the forex cost base of the right or the part of the right (the forex cost base is worked out as at the tax recognition time); and

some or all of the shortfall is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is so much of the shortfall as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Note 1: For forex cost base, see section 775-85.

Note 2: For tax recognition time, see subsection (7).

Note 3: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

(5) You make a forex realisation loss if:

the event happens because an option to buy foreign currency expires without having been exercised, or is cancelled, released or abandoned; and

you were capable of exercising the option immediately before the event happened.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is the amount you paid in return for the grant or acquisition of the option.

Non-cash benefit

The amount you receive in respect of the event happening can include a *non-cash benefit. Use the *market value of the benefit to work out the amount you receive.

Tax recognition time

(7) For the purposes of this section, the tax recognition time is worked out using the table:

Note: Subsection 775-260(1) modifies the tax recognition time if forex realisation event 2 happens in relation to a qualifying forex account that has ceased to pass the limited balance test.

775-50 Ceasing to have an obligation to receive foreign currency—forex realisation event 3

Forex realisation event 3

(1) Forex realisation event 3 happens if:

you cease to have an obligation, or a part of an obligation, to receive foreign currency; and

the obligation, or the part of the obligation, is one of the following:

an obligation, or a part of the obligation, incurred in return for the creation or acquisition of a right to pay foreign currency;

an obligation, or a part of the obligation, incurred in return for the creation or acquisition of a right to pay Australian currency;

an obligation, or a part of an obligation, under an option to sell foreign currency.

Note 1: For extended meaning of obligation to receive foreign currency, see section 775-140.

Note 2: For extended meaning of right to pay foreign currency, see section 775-135.

Time of event

The time of the event is when you cease to have the obligation or the part of the obligation.

Forex realisation gain

(3) You make a forex realisation gain if:

the amount you receive in respect of the event happening exceeds the net costs of assuming the obligation or the part of the obligation (the net costs are worked out as at the tax recognition time); and

some or all of the excess is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is so much of the excess as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Note 1: For net costs of assuming the obligation, see section 775-100.

Note 2: For tax recognition time, see subsection (7).

Note 3: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

(4) You make a forex realisation gain if:

the event happens because an option to sell foreign currency expires without having been exercised, or is cancelled, released or abandoned; and

if the option had been exercised immediately before the event, you would have been obliged to buy the foreign currency.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is the amount you received in return for granting or assuming obligations under the option.

Forex realisation loss

(5) You make a forex realisation loss if:

the amount you receive in respect of the event happening falls short of the net costs of assuming the obligation or the part of the obligation (the net costs are worked out as at the tax recognition time); and

some or all of the shortfall is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is so much of the shortfall as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Non-cash benefit

Note 1: For net costs of assuming the obligation, see section 775-100.

Note 2: For tax recognition time, see subsection (7).

Note 3: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

The amount you receive in respect of the event happening can include a *non-cash benefit. Use the *market value of the benefit to work out the amount you receive.

Tax recognition time

(7) For the purposes of this section, the tax recognition time is the time when you received an amount in respect of the event happening.

Right to pay Australian currency

(8) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this section, a right to pay Australian currency includes a right to pay Australian currency, where the right is subject to a contingency.

775-55 Ceasing to have an obligation to pay foreign currency—forex realisation event 4

Forex realisation event 4

(1) Forex realisation event 4 happens if:

you cease to have an obligation, or a part of an obligation, to pay foreign currency; and

any of the following applies:

the obligation, or the part of the obligation, is an expense or outgoing that you deduct;

(ii) the obligation, or the part of the obligation, is an element in the calculation of a net amount included in your assessable income (other than under this Division or Division 102 of this Act or Division 5 or 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936);

(iii) the obligation, or the part of the obligation, is an element in the calculation of a net amount that is deductible (other than under Division 5 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936);

you incurred the obligation, or the part of the obligation, in return for the acquisition of a CGT asset;

you incurred the obligation, or the part of the obligation, as the second, third, fourth or fifth element of the *cost base of a CGT asset;

you incurred the obligation, or the part of the obligation, in return for your starting to hold a depreciating asset, and you deduct an amount under Division 40 or 328 for the depreciating asset;

you incurred the obligation, or the part of the obligation, as the second element of the *cost of a depreciating asset, and you deduct an amount under Division 40 or 328 for the depreciating asset;

you incurred the obligation, or the part of the obligation, as a project amount;

you incurred the obligation, or the part of the obligation, in return for receiving an amount of Australian currency or foreign currency;

you incurred the obligation, or the part of the obligation, in return for the creation or acquisition of a right to receive an amount of Australian currency or foreign currency;

the obligation, or the part of the obligation, is under an option to buy foreign currency.

Note: For extended meaning of obligation to pay foreign currency, see section 775-140.

Time of event

The time of the event is when you cease to have the obligation or the part of the obligation.

Forex realisation gain

(3) You make a forex realisation gain if:

the amount you paid in respect of the event happening falls short of the proceeds of assuming the obligation or the part of the obligation (the proceeds are worked out as at the tax recognition time); and

some or all of the shortfall is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is so much of the shortfall as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Note 1: For proceeds of assuming the obligation, see section 775-95.

Note 2: For tax recognition time, see subsection (7).

Note 3: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

(4) You make a forex realisation gain if:

the event happens because an option to buy foreign currency expires without having been exercised, or is cancelled, released or abandoned; and

if the option had been exercised immediately before the event, you would have been obliged to sell the foreign currency.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is the amount you received in return for granting or assuming obligations under the option.

Forex realisation loss

(5) You make a forex realisation loss if:

the amount you paid in respect of the event happening exceeds the proceeds of assuming the obligation or the part of the obligation (the proceeds are worked out as at the tax recognition time); and

some or all of the excess is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is so much of the excess as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Non-cash benefit

Note 1: For proceeds of assuming the obligation, see section 775-95.

Note 2: For tax recognition time, see subsection (7).

Note 3: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

The amount you paid in respect of the event happening can include a *non-cash benefit. Use the *market value of the benefit to work out the amount you paid.

Tax recognition time

(7) For the purposes of this section, the tax recognition time is worked out using the table:

Note 1: Foreign currency is a CGT asset. If you acquire foreign currency as the borrower under a loan, item 8 will apply to your obligation to repay the foreign currency borrowed under the loan.

Note 2: If you have made a choice for roll-over relief for a facility agreement, and forex realisation event 7 (material variation of a facility agreement) happens, subsection 775-220(6) modifies the tax recognition time for an obligation under a security that was in existence under the agreement at the time of that event.

Note 3: Subsection 775-260(2) modifies the tax recognition time if forex realisation event 4 happens in relation to a qualifying forex account that has ceased to pass the limited balance test.

Note 4: If you have made a choice for roll-over relief for a facility agreement, a forex realisation gain or forex realisation loss you make under the agreement as a result of forex realisation event 4 is disregarded—see section 775-200.

775-60 Ceasing to have a right to pay foreign currency—forex realisation event 5

Forex realisation event 5

(1) Forex realisation event 5 happens if:

you cease to have a right, or a part of a right, to pay foreign currency; and

the right, or the part of the right, is one of the following:

a right, or a part of a right, created or acquired in return for the assumption of an obligation to pay foreign currency;

a right, or a part of a right, created or acquired in return for the assumption of an obligation to pay Australian currency;

a right, or a part of a right, under an option to sell foreign currency.

Note 1: For extended meaning of right to pay foreign currency, see section 775-135.

Note 2: For extended meaning of obligation to pay foreign currency, see section 775-140.

Time of event

The time of the event is when you cease to have the right or the part of the right.

Forex realisation gain

(3) You make a forex realisation gain if:

the amount you pay in respect of the event happening falls short of the forex entitlement base of the right or the part of the right (the forex entitlement base is worked out as at the tax recognition time); and

some or all of the shortfall is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is so much of the shortfall as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Forex realisation loss

Note 1: For forex entitlement base, see section 775-90.

Note 2: For tax recognition time, see subsection (7).

Note 3: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

(4) You make a forex realisation loss if:

the amount you pay in respect of the event happening exceeds the forex entitlement base of the right or the part of the right (the forex entitlement base is worked out as at the tax recognition time); and

some or all of the excess is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is so much of the excess as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Note 1: For forex entitlement base, see section 775-90.

Note 2: For tax recognition time, see subsection (7).

Note 3: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

(5) You make a forex realisation loss if:

the event happens because an option to sell foreign currency expires without having been exercised, or is cancelled, released or abandoned; and

you were capable of exercising the option immediately before the event happened.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is the amount you paid in return for the grant or acquisition of the option.

Non-cash benefit

The amount you pay in respect of the event happening can include a *non-cash benefit. Use the *market value of the benefit to work out the amount you pay.

Tax recognition time

(7) For the purposes of this section, the tax recognition time is the time when you pay an amount in respect of the event happening.

Obligation to pay Australian currency

(8) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this section, an obligation to pay Australian currency includes an obligation to pay Australian currency, where the obligation is subject to a contingency.

775-65 Only one forex realisation event to be counted

Option to buy foreign currency

The following table applies to an option to buy a particular foreign currency if the exercise price is payable in another foreign currency:

Option to sell foreign currency

The following table applies to an option to sell a particular foreign currency if the exercise price is payable in another foreign currency:

Forward contracts

The following table applies to a contract to buy a particular foreign currency in return for another foreign currency:

Residual rule

If:

2 or more of forex realisation events 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 happen to you at the same time in relation to the same rights and/or obligations; and

none of the above subsections applies;

apply the forex realisation event that is most appropriate, and ignore the remaining event or events.

775-70 Tax consequences of certain short-term forex realisation gains

The following table has effect unless you have made a choice under section 775-80:

Additional result where forex realisation gain exceeds cost etc.

The following table has effect:

To the extent that a *forex realisation gain:

would have been included in your assessable income under section 775-15 if this section had not been enacted; and

would, apart from this subsection, be included in your assessable income under another provision of this Act;

the gain is not included in your assessable income under that other provision.

775-75 Tax consequences of certain short-term forex realisation losses

The following table has effect unless you have made a choice under section 775-80:

To the extent that:

section 775-30 would have allowed you a deduction for a *forex realisation loss if this section had not been enacted; and

apart from this subsection, another provision of this Act would allow you a deduction for the loss;

you cannot deduct the loss under that other provision.

775-80 You may choose not to have sections 775-70 and 775-75 apply to you

You may choose not to have sections 775-70 and 775-75 apply to you.

A choice must be in writing.

A choice must be made:

if you were in existence at the start of the applicable commencement date:

within 90 days after the applicable commencement date; or

within 30 days after the commencement of this subsection; or

if you came into existence within 90 days after the start of the applicable commencement date:

within 90 days after you came into existence; or

within 30 days after the commencement of this subsection; or

if the Commissioner allows a longer period—within that longer period.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

A choice has effect from the start of the applicable commencement date.

A choice may not be revoked.

775-85 Forex cost base of a right to receive foreign currency

The forex cost base of a right, or a part of a right, to receive *foreign currency is the total of:

the money you:

paid; or

are required to pay; or

would be required to pay in the event of the exercise of an option;

in respect of acquiring the right or part of the right; and

the *market value of any *non-cash benefit you:

provided; or

are required to provide; or

would be required to provide in the event of the exercise of an option;

in respect of acquiring the right or part of the right;

reduced by any amounts that are deductible under a provision of this Act other than this Division.

775-90 Forex entitlement base of a right to pay foreign currency

The forex entitlement base of a right, or a part of a right, to pay *foreign currency is the total of:

the money you:

are entitled to receive; or

would be entitled to receive in the event of the exercise of an option;

in respect of the discharge or satisfaction of the right or the part of the right; and

the *market value of any *non-cash benefit you:

are entitled to acquire or obtain; or

would be entitled to acquire or obtain in the event of the exercise of an option;

in respect of the discharge or satisfaction of the right or the part of the right;

reduced by:

any amounts that you paid to acquire the right or the part of the right, where the amounts are not deductible under a provision of this Act other than this Division; and

the market value of any non-cash benefit that you provided to acquire the right or the part of the right, where the market value is not deductible under a provision of this Act other than this Division.

775-95 Proceeds of assuming an obligation to pay foreign currency

For the purposes of this Division, the proceeds of assuming an obligation, or a part of an obligation, to pay *foreign currency are the total of:

the money you:

received; or

are entitled to receive; or

would be entitled to receive in the event of the exercise of an option;

in return for incurring the obligation or the part of the obligation; and

the *market value of any *non-cash benefit you:

acquired or obtained; or

are entitled to acquire or obtain; or

would be entitled to acquire or obtain in the event of the exercise of an option;

in return for incurring the obligation or the part of the obligation;

reduced by any amounts that are included in assessable income under a provision of this Act other than this Division.

775-100 Net costs of assuming an obligation to receive foreign currency

(1) For the purposes of this Division, the net costs of assuming an obligation, or a part of an obligation, to receive *foreign currency are the total of:

the money you:

are required to pay; or

would be required to pay in the event of the exercise of an option;

in respect of the fulfilment of the obligation or the part of the obligation; and

the *market value of any *non-cash benefit you:

are required to provide; or

would be required to provide in the event of the exercise of an option;

in respect of the fulfilment of the obligation or the part of the obligation;

reduced by the amount worked out under subsection (2).

The amount worked out under this subsection is the total of:

the money you:

received; or

are entitled to receive;

because you incurred the obligation or the part of the obligation; and

the *market value of any *non-cash benefit you:

received or obtained; or

are entitled to receive or obtain;

because you incurred the obligation or the part of the obligation;

reduced by any amounts that are included in assessable income under a provision of this Act other than this Division.

To avoid doubt, paragraphs (2)(a) and (b) do not apply to money or a *non-cash benefit that you:

received or obtained; or

are entitled to receive or obtain;

because of the fulfilment of the obligation or the part of the obligation.

775-105 Currency exchange rate effect

(1) A currency exchange rate effect is:

any currency exchange rate fluctuations; or

a difference between:

an expressly or implicitly agreed currency exchange rate for a future date or time; and

the applicable currency exchange rate at that date or time.

To work out whether there is a currency exchange rate effect and (if so), the extent of that effect, use whichever of the following translation rules is applicable to you:

the translation rules in section 960-50 (the standard rules);

the translation rules in section 960-80 (the functional currency rules).

775-110 Constructive receipts and payments

For the purposes of this Subdivision, if an entity (the payer) did not actually pay an amount to another entity (the recipient), but the amount was applied or dealt with in any way on the recipient’s behalf or as the recipient directs (including by discharging all or a part of an obligation owed by the recipient), then:

the payer is taken to have paid the amount as soon as it is applied or dealt with; and

the recipient is taken to have received the amount as soon as it is applied or dealt with.

Note: The set-off of an obligation to pay an amount against a right to receive an amount is an example of how this section would operate.

775-115 Economic set-off to be treated as legal set-off

If the economic effect of an arrangement is to provide for the set-off, in whole or in part, of one or more amounts against one or more other amounts, this Subdivision applies as if:

the parties to the arrangement had the respective rights and obligations that they would have had if the provision for economic set-off were structured as a provision for legal set-off of rights and obligations; and

if the economic set-off happens—the parties were taken, under section 775-110, to have paid and received the respective amounts that they would have paid and received if the economic set-off were structured as a legal set-off of rights and obligations.

775-120 Non-arm’s length transactions

If:

you and another entity did not deal with each other at *arm’s length in connection with a transaction that is relevant to working out:

whether you make a *forex realisation gain or a *forex realisation loss; or

the amount of any *forex realisation gain or a *forex realisation loss made by you; and

apart from this section, a particular amount is more or less than it would have been if you and the other entity had been dealing with each other at arm’s length;

this Subdivision applies to you as if that amount were the amount it would have been if you and the other entity had been dealing with each other at arm’s length.

775-125 CGT consequences of the acquisition of foreign currency as a result of forex realisation event 2 or 3

If you acquire foreign currency as a result of forex realisation event 2 or 3:

the first element of the foreign currency’s *cost base is replaced by the foreign currency’s *market value at the time you received the foreign currency; and

the first element of the foreign currency’s *reduced cost base is replaced by the foreign currency’s market value at the time you received the foreign currency.

775-130 Certain deductions not allowable

If:

an amount is included in your assessable income under this Division; and

if this Division had not been enacted, the amount would not have been included in your assessable income under any other provision of this Act (other than Division 102); and

(c) if this section had not been enacted, a deduction would be allowable to you under a provision listed in the table in subsection 51AAA(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

if the amount had not been included in your assessable income under this Division, the deduction would not be allowable;

the deduction is not allowable.

775-135 Right to receive or pay foreign currency

Extended meaning of right to receive foreign currency

(1) For the purposes of this Division, a right to receive foreign currency includes a right to receive an amount calculated by reference to a currency exchange rate effect, even if that amount is not an amount of *foreign currency.

(2) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this Division, a right to receive foreign currency includes a right to receive *foreign currency, where the right is subject to a contingency.

Extended meaning of right to pay foreign currency

(3) For the purposes of this Division, a right to pay foreign currency includes a right to pay an amount calculated by reference to a currency exchange rate effect, even if that amount is not an amount of *foreign currency.

(4) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this Division, a right to pay foreign currency includes a right to pay *foreign currency, where the right is subject to a contingency.

775-140 Obligation to pay or receive foreign currency

Extended meaning of obligation to pay foreign currency

(1) For the purposes of this Division, an obligation to pay foreign currency includes an obligation to pay an amount calculated by reference to a currency exchange rate effect, even if that amount is not an amount of *foreign currency.

(2) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this Division, an obligation to pay foreign currency includes an obligation to pay *foreign currency, where the obligation is subject to a contingency.

Extended meaning of obligation to receive foreign currency

(3) For the purposes of this Division, an obligation to receive foreign currency includes an obligation to receive an amount calculated by reference to a currency exchange rate effect, even if that amount is not an amount of *foreign currency.

(4) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this Division, an obligation to receive foreign currency includes an obligation to receive *foreign currency, where the obligation is subject to a contingency.

775-145 Application of forex realisation events to currency and fungible rights and obligations

Forex realisation event 1, 2 or 4 applies in relation to:

foreign currency; or

a fungible right, or a part of a fungible right, to receive foreign currency; or

a fungible obligation, or a part of a fungible obligation, to pay foreign currency;

on a first-in first-out basis.

The regulations may provide that any or all of forex realisation events 1, 2 and 4 apply, or apply in specified circumstances, to:

foreign currency; or

a fungible right, or a part of a fungible right, to receive foreign currency; or

a fungible obligation, or a part of a fungible obligation, to pay foreign currency;

on a weighted average basis (despite subsection (1)).

The circumstances that may be specified for the purposes of subsection (2) include the circumstance that you have made an election to use a weighted average basis.

Subsection (3) does not limit subsection (2).

775-150 Transitional election

You may elect to have this section apply to you.

Note: For the consequences of an election, see sections 775-160 and 775-165.

An election must be in writing.

An election must be made:

within 60 days after the applicable commencement date; or

within 30 days after the commencement of this subsection.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

An election may not be revoked.

775-155 Applicable commencement date

For the purposes of this Division, your applicable commencement date is:

the first day of the 2003-04 income year; or

if that day is earlier than 1 July 2003—the first day of the 2004-05 income year.

775-160 Exception—event happens before the applicable commencement date

A *forex realisation gain or *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 is disregarded if the event happened before the applicable commencement date.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

Subsection (1) does not apply if:

you have made an election under section 775-150; and

the Commissioner is satisfied that the event happened under, or as a result of, an arrangement that was entered into or carried out for the purpose, or for purposes that included the purpose, of obtaining the benefit of the operation of subsection (1).

775-165 Exception—currency or right acquired, or obligation incurred, before the applicable commencement date

Exception—foreign currency acquired before the applicable commencement date

A *forex realisation gain or *forex realisation loss you make on the disposal of foreign currency as a result of forex realisation event 1 is disregarded if:

the foreign currency was acquired before the applicable commencement date; and

you have not made an election under section 775-150.

For the purposes of paragraph (a), the time of acquisition is worked out under Division 109.

Exception—right acquired before the applicable commencement date

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

A *forex realisation gain or *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 1, 2 or 5 happening to a right or a part of a right is disregarded if:

the right, or the part of the right;

was acquired before the applicable commencement date; or

(ii) arose under an eligible contract (within the meaning of the former Division 3B of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that was entered into before the applicable commencement date; and

you have not made an election under section 775-150.

For the purposes of subparagraph (a)(i), the time of acquisition is worked out under Division 109.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

If:

(a) at a particular time (the extension time) on or after the applicable commencement date and under a contract that was entered into before the applicable commencement date, the period for which money has been lent is extended; and

either:

the contract is separate from the original loan contract; or

the extension amounts to a variation of the original loan contract;

subparagraph (2)(a)(ii) does not apply to a right, or a part of a right, that arises after the extension time and relates to the loan.

Exception—obligation incurred before the applicable commencement date

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

A *forex realisation gain or *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 3 or 4 happening to an obligation or a part of an obligation is disregarded if:

either:

you incurred the obligation, or the part of the obligation, before the applicable commencement date; or

(ii) the obligation, or the part of the obligation, arose under an eligible contract (within the meaning of the former Division 3B of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that was entered into before the applicable commencement date; and

you have not made an election under section 775-150.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

If:

(a) at a particular time (the extension time) on or after the applicable commencement date and under a contract that was entered into before the applicable commencement date, the period for which money has been lent is extended; and

either:

the contract is separate from the original loan contract; or

the extension amounts to a variation of the original loan contract;

subparagraph (4)(a)(ii) does not apply to an obligation, or a part of an obligation, that arises after the extension time and relates to the loan.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

775-168 Exception—disposal or redemption of traditional securities

A *forex realisation gain or *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 2 is disregarded if the event happened because of a disposal or redemption covered by:

(a) subsection 26BB(4) or (5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

subsection 70B(2B) or (2C) of that Act.

775-175 Application to things happening before commencement

The use of the present tense in a provision of this Division does not imply that the provision does not apply to things happening before the commencement of this Division.

Subdivision 775-C — Roll-over relief for facility agreements

Guide to Subdivision 775-C

775-180 What this Subdivision is about

A facility agreement is an agreement where:

you have a right to issue eligible securities and another entity or entities must acquire the securities; and

the economic effect of the agreement is to enable you to obtain finance in a particular foreign currency.

If you choose roll-over relief for a facility agreement:

a forex realisation gain or a forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 4 is disregarded if the event happens because you discharge your obligation under an eligible security issued by you under the agreement; and

(b) if you issue an eligible security under the agreement otherwise than as a result of a roll-over—you are taken to have been given a loan (the notional loan); and

if an eligible security is rolled-over under the agreement—the period of the notional loan is extended by the term of the new security; and

forex realisation event 6 happens if you discharge your obligation under the notional loan; and

forex realisation event 7 happens if a material variation is made to the agreement.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

775-185 What is a facility agreement?

775-190 What is an eligible security?

775-195 You may choose roll-over relief for a facility agreement

775-200 Forex realisation event 4 does not apply

775-205 What is a roll-over?

775-210 Notional loan

775-215 Discharge of obligation to pay the principal amount of a notional loan under a facility agreement—forex realisation event 6

775-220 Material variation of a facility agreement—forex realisation event 7

Operative provisions

775-185 What is a facility agreement?

A facility agreement is an agreement between an entity (the first entity) and another entity or entities under which:

the first entity has a right to issue *eligible securities; and

an entity or entities must acquire the securities;

where the economic effect of the agreement is to enable the first entity to obtain finance in a particular foreign currency:

up to the foreign currency amount specified in the agreement; and

during the term of the agreement.

775-190 What is an eligible security?

An eligible security is:

a bill of exchange, or a promissory note, that is:

non-interest bearing; and

issued at a discount to face value; and

denominated in a particular foreign currency; and

for a fixed term; or

a security that is:

specified in the regulations; and

denominated in a foreign currency; and

for a fixed term.

775-195 You may choose roll-over relief for a facility agreement

You may choose roll-over relief for a facility agreement if:

you have entered into the agreement; and

you have a right to issue *eligible securities under the agreement; and

the economic effect of the agreement is to enable you to obtain finance in a particular foreign currency:

up to the foreign currency amount specified in the agreement; and

during the term of the agreement.

A choice must be made:

within 90 days after the first time you issue an eligible security under the facility agreement; or

within 90 days after the applicable commencement date; or

within 30 days after the commencement of this subsection.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

If you make a choice within 90 days after the first time you issue an eligible security under the facility agreement, the choice is taken to have been in effect throughout the period that began immediately before the first time you issued an eligible security under the facility agreement.

If:

you make a choice:

within 90 days after the applicable commencement date; or

within 30 days after the commencement of this subsection; and

subsection (3) does not apply;

the choice is taken to have been in effect throughout the period that began at whichever is the later of the following times:

the start of the applicable commencement date;

the first time you issued an eligible security under the facility agreement.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

A choice must be in writing.

A choice continues to apply until the facility agreement ends.

Note: If forex realisation event 7 happens (material variation of facility agreement), subsection 775-220(5) terminates your choice.

A choice may not be revoked.

775-200 Forex realisation event 4 does not apply

A *forex realisation gain or a *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 4 or 9 is disregarded to the extent to which the event happens because:

you discharge your obligation under an eligible security issued by you under a facility agreement; and

you have made a choice for roll-over relief for the facility agreement, and that choice is in effect.

775-205 What is a roll-over?

A roll-over happens under a *facility agreement if:

(a) you discharge your obligation under an *eligible security issued by you under the agreement (the rolled-over security); and

(b) at the same time, you issue a new eligible security (the new security) under the agreement; and

the issue of the new security is related to the discharge of your obligation under the rolled-over security in one of the following ways:

your obligation under the rolled-over security is wholly or partly set off against your right to receive the foreign currency issue price of the new security;

your obligation under the rolled-over security is wholly or partly satisfied by the issue of the new security; and

you have made a choice for roll-over relief for the agreement, and that choice is in effect; and

the new security is issued on or after the applicable commencement date; and

if you have not made an election under section 775-150—the rolled-over security is issued on or after the applicable commencement date.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

775-210 Notional loan

The rules in this section have effect only for the purposes of this Subdivision.

Notional loan

(2) If you issue an *eligible security under a *facility agreement otherwise than as a result of a roll-over, you are taken to have been given a loan (the notional loan):

of a foreign currency principal amount equal to the foreign currency face value of the security; and

for a period equal to the term of the security; and

that is taken to be attached to the security; and

(d) the start time of which is the time when you issued the security.

Note 1: The period of the notional loan may be extended as the result of a later roll-over—see subsection (3).

Note 2: The notional loan may become attached to a later security as the result of a roll-over—see subsection (3).

Note 3: The foreign currency principal amount of the notional loan may remain the same, or may fall (but not rise), as a result of a later roll-over—see subsection (3).

Note 4: If, at a later time, the security is rolled-over, and the foreign currency face value of the new security exceeds the foreign currency face value of the rolled-over security, you are taken to have been given an additional notional loan of a foreign currency principal amount equal to the excess—see subsection (3).

Effect of roll-over

The table has effect if an eligible security is rolled-over under a facility agreement:

Consequences if security is not rolled-over

If:

you discharge your obligation under an eligible security issued under a facility agreement; and

the security is not rolled-over at the time of discharge; and

you have made a choice for roll-over relief for the facility agreement, and that choice is in effect;

then, for each notional loan attached to the security, you are taken to have paid a foreign currency amount equal to the foreign currency principal amount of the notional loan in order to discharge your obligation to pay the foreign currency principal amount of the notional loan.

Foreign currency

(5) For the purposes of the application of this section to a particular *facility agreement that provides for the issue of *eligible securities, foreign currency is the *foreign currency in which the securities are denominated.

Note: Section 960-50 (Australian currency translation rule) does not affect the operation of this section—see subsection 960-50(10). You translate to Australian currency when you apply section 775-215 (forex realisation event 6).

775-215 Discharge of obligation to pay the principal amount of a notional loan under a facility agreement—forex realisation event 6

Forex realisation event 6

(1) Forex realisation event 6 happens if:

you discharge an obligation, or a part of an obligation, to pay the foreign currency principal amount of a notional loan attached to an eligible security issued by you under a facility agreement; and

you have made a choice for roll-over relief for the agreement, and that choice is in effect.

Time of event

The time of the event is when you discharge the obligation or the part of the obligation.

Forex realisation gain

(3) You make a forex realisation gain if:

the amount of the obligation, or the part of the obligation, at the start time of the notional loan, exceeds the amount you paid in order to discharge the obligation or the part of the obligation; and

some or all of the excess is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is so much of the excess as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Forex realisation loss

Note: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

(4) You make a forex realisation loss if:

the amount of the obligation, or the part of the obligation, at the start time of the notional loan, falls short of the amount you paid in order to discharge the obligation or the part of the obligation; and

some or all of the shortfall is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is so much of the shortfall as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Exempt income etc.

Note: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

For the purposes of the application of sections 775-20, 775-25 and 775-35 to the event, assume that the notional loan had been an actual loan.

775-220 Material variation of a facility agreement—forex realisation event 7

Forex realisation event 7

(1) Forex realisation event 7 happens if:

a material variation is made to the terms or conditions of a facility agreement; or

a material variation is made to the effect of a facility agreement; or

a material variation is made to the type or types of security that can be issued under a facility agreement;

so long as you have made a choice for roll-over relief for the facility agreement, and that choice is in effect.

Time of the event

Note: See also subsections (7) and (8).

The time of the event is when the material variation happens.

Forex realisation gain

(3) You make a forex realisation gain if:

the total of the forex realisation gains that you would have made as a result of forex realisation event 6 if you had, at the time of forex realisation event 7:

discharged your liabilities under each of the notional loans to which the agreement relates; and

not rolled-over any eligible security;

exceeds:

the total of the forex realisation losses that you would have made as a result of forex realisation event 6 if you had, at the time of forex realisation event 7:

discharged your liabilities under each of the notional loans to which the agreement relates; and

not rolled-over any eligible security.

The amount of the forex realisation gain is the amount of the excess.

Forex realisation loss

Note: See also subsection (9).

(4) You make a forex realisation loss if:

the total of the forex realisation losses that you would have made as a result of forex realisation event 6 if you had, at the time of forex realisation event 7:

discharged your liabilities under each of the notional loans to which the agreement relates; and

not rolled-over any eligible security;

exceeds:

the total of the forex realisation gains that you would have made as a result of forex realisation event 6 if you had, at the time of forex realisation event 7:

discharged your liabilities under each of the notional loans to which the agreement relates; and

not rolled-over any eligible security.

The amount of the forex realisation loss is the amount of the excess.

Termination of choice

Note: See also subsection (9).

If forex realisation event 7 happens in relation to a facility agreement:

your choice for roll-over relief for the facility agreement ceases to have effect immediately after the event; and

you are not entitled to make a fresh choice for roll-over relief for the facility agreement.

Modification of tax recognition time

If:

forex realisation event 7 happens in relation to a facility agreement; and

an eligible security issued by you under the facility agreement was in existence at the time of that event; and

at a later time, forex realisation event 4 happens because you cease to have an obligation, or a part of an obligation, to pay foreign currency under the security;

section 775-55 applies to you as if the tax recognition time for the obligation, or the part of the obligation, were the time of forex realisation event 7 (despite subsection 775-55(7)).

Material variation

To avoid doubt, if a variation to:

the terms or conditions of a facility agreement; or

the effect of a facility agreement;

results in the agreement ceasing to be a facility agreement, the variation is taken to be a material variation for the purposes of subsection (1).

The regulations may provide that a specified kind of variation is taken to be a material variation for the purposes of subsection (1).

Total amount

To avoid doubt, the total amount referred to in paragraph (3)(b) or (4)(b) may be zero.

Subdivision 775-D — Qualifying forex accounts that pass the limited balance test

Guide to Subdivision 775-D

775-225 What this Subdivision is about

You may elect to have this Subdivision apply to one or more qualifying forex accounts held by you.

If you elect to have this Subdivision apply to an account, a forex realisation gain or a forex realisation loss you make in relation to the account as a result of forex realisation event 2 or 4 is disregarded if the account passes the limited balance test.

For an account to pass the limited balance test, the combined balance of all the accounts covered by your election must not be more than the foreign currency equivalent of $250,000.

The limited balance test includes a buffer provision which allows the combined balance to be more than the foreign currency equivalent of $250,000, but not more than the foreign currency equivalent of $500,000, for not more than 2 15-day periods in any income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

775-230 Election to have this Subdivision apply to one or more qualifying forex accounts

775-235 Variation of election

775-240 Withdrawal of election

775-245 When does a qualifying forex account pass the limited balance test?

775-250 Tax consequences of passing the limited balance test

775-255 Notional realisation when qualifying forex account starts to pass the limited balance test

775-260 Modification of tax recognition time

Operative provisions

775-230 Election to have this Subdivision apply to one or more qualifying forex accounts

You may elect to have this Subdivision apply to one or more *qualifying forex accounts held by you.

An election must be in writing.

If:

you make an election within 30 days after the commencement of this subsection; and

the election is expressed to have come into effect on a specified day; and

the specified day is included in the period:

beginning on 1 July 2003; and

ending on the day on which the election is made;

the election is taken to have come into effect on the specified day.

An election continues in effect, in relation to a particular account, until:

you cease to hold the account; or

the account ceases to be a qualifying forex account; or

the election is varied by removing the account; or

a withdrawal of the election takes effect;

whichever happens first.

Note 1: For variation of election, see section 775-235.

Note 2: For withdrawal of election, see section 775-240.

If an election made by you under this section is in effect, you are not entitled to make another election under this section.

An *ADI or a non-ADI financial institution is not entitled to make an election under this section.

775-235 Variation of election

If you have made an election under section 775-230, you may vary your election by:

adding one or more *qualifying forex accounts; or

removing one or more qualifying forex accounts.

A variation must be in writing.

Removing an account does not prevent you from adding the account in a future variation.

775-240 Withdrawal of election

If you have made an election under section 775-230, you may withdraw your election.

A withdrawal must be in writing.

Withdrawing an election does not prevent you from making a fresh election under section 775-230 in relation to any or all of the same accounts.

775-245 When does a qualifying forex account pass the limited balance test?

Basic rule

(1) For the purposes of this Subdivision, a *qualifying forex account that you hold passes the limited balance test at a particular time if, at that time:

an election made by you under section 775-230 has effect in relation to:

the account; or

the account and one or more other *qualifying forex accounts; and

the total of the credit balances of the account and each of those other accounts (if any) is not more than the foreign currency equivalent of $250,000; and

the total of the debit balances of the account and each of those other accounts (if any) is not more than the foreign currency equivalent of $250,000.

Note: For buffering during an increased balance period, see subsections (2) and (3).

Buffering during first and second increased balance period

(2) For the purposes of this section, an increased balance period is a continuous period consisting of:

an income year; or

a particular part of an income year;

where, at each time during the period, either or both of the following conditions is satisfied:

the total of the credit balances of the account or accounts covered by your section 775-230 election is more than the foreign currency equivalent of $250,000, but not more than the foreign currency equivalent of $500,000;

the total of the debit balances of the account or accounts covered by your section 775-230 election is more than the foreign currency equivalent of $250,000, but not more than the foreign currency equivalent of $500,000.

The table has effect:

Translation of foreign currency

For the purposes of the application of section 960-50 to this section, work out the foreign currency equivalent of an amount of Australian currency as at a particular time in an income year by translating the foreign currency to Australian currency at the average exchange rate for the third month that preceded the income year.

Debit balances

For the purposes of this section, a debit balance is to be expressed as a positive amount.

Note: For example, if you owe $1,100 on a credit card account, the debit balance of that account is $1,100.

775-250 Tax consequences of passing the limited balance test

A *forex realisation gain or a *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 2 or 4 is disregarded if the event happens in relation to a qualifying forex account that:

you hold at the time of the event; and

passes the limited balance test at the time of the event.

If CGT event C1 or C2 happens in relation to a qualifying forex account that:

you hold at the time of the event; and

passes the limited balance test at the time of the event;

disregard so much of any *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of the event as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Note: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

775-255 Notional realisation when qualifying forex account starts to pass the limited balance test

Credit balance

For the purposes of this Division, if:

you hold a qualifying forex account; and

at a particular time:

the account starts to pass the limited balance test; and

the account has a credit balance; and

you have one or more rights to receive a total amount of foreign currency represented by the credit balance of the account;

you are treated as:

having ceased to have those rights at that time; and

having re-acquired those rights immediately after that time.

Note: This means that forex realisation event 2 will happen when the account starts to pass the limited balance test.

Debit balance

For the purposes of this Division, if:

you hold a qualifying forex account; and

at a particular time:

the account starts to pass the limited balance test; and

the account has a debit balance; and

you have one or more obligations to pay a total amount of foreign currency represented by the debit balance of the account;

you are treated as:

having ceased to have those obligations at that time; and

having started to again owe those obligations immediately after that time.

Note: This means that forex realisation event 4 will happen when the account starts to pass the limited balance test.

775-260 Modification of tax recognition time

Forex realisation event 2

If:

forex realisation event 2 happens in relation to a qualifying forex account that:

you hold at the time of the event; and

does not pass the limited balance test at the time of the event; and

apart from this subsection, the tax recognition time, worked out using the table in subsection 775-45(7), happened at a time when the account passed the limited balance test;

section 775-45 applies to you as if the tax recognition time were the most recent time before the forex realisation event when the account ceased to pass the limited balance test (despite subsection 775-45(7)).

Forex realisation event 4

If:

forex realisation event 4 happens in relation to a qualifying forex account that:

you hold at the time of the event; and

does not pass the limited balance test at the time of the event; and

apart from this subsection, the tax recognition time, worked out using the table in subsection 775-55(7), happened at a time when the account passed the limited balance test;

section 775-55 applies to you as if the tax recognition time were the most recent time before the forex realisation event when the account ceased to pass the limited balance test (despite subsection 775-55(7)).

Subdivision 775-E — Retranslation for qualifying forex accounts

Guide to Subdivision 775-E

775-265 What this Subdivision is about

If you choose retranslation for a qualifying forex account:

a forex realisation gain or a forex realisation loss you make in relation to the account as a result of forex realisation event 2 or 4 is disregarded; and

forex realisation event 8 enables any gains or losses to be worked out on a retranslation basis.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

775-270 You may choose retranslation for a qualifying forex account

775-275 Withdrawal of choice

775-280 Tax consequences of choosing retranslation for an account

775-285 Retranslation of gains and losses relating to a qualifying forex account—forex realisation event 8

Operative provisions

775-270 You may choose retranslation for a qualifying forex account

You may choose retranslation for a qualifying forex account held by you.

A choice under subsection (1) does not apply to a qualifying forex account held by you if a foreign exchange retranslation election by you is in effect in relation to the account under Subdivision 230-D.

A choice must be in writing.

If:

either:

(i) you make a choice within 30 days after the commencement of the New Business Tax System (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act (No. 1) 2003; or

(ii) you make a choice within 90 days after the commencement of Part 1 of Schedule 1 to the Tax Laws Amendment (Taxation of Financial Arrangements) Act 2009; and

the choice is expressed to have come into effect on a specified day; and

the specified day is included in the period:

beginning on 1 July 2003; and

ending on the day on which the choice is made;

the choice is taken to have come into effect on the specified day.

A choice continues in effect until:

you cease to hold the account; or

the account ceases to be a qualifying forex account; or

a withdrawal of the choice takes effect;

whichever happens first.

Note: For withdrawal of choice, see section 775-275.

775-275 Withdrawal of choice

If you have made a choice for retranslation for a qualifying forex account held by you, you may withdraw your choice.

A withdrawal must be in writing.

Withdrawing a choice does not prevent you from making a fresh choice under section 775-270.

775-280 Tax consequences of choosing retranslation for an account

A *forex realisation gain or *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 2 or 4 is disregarded if:

the event happens in relation to a qualifying forex account that you hold; and

you have made a choice for retranslation for the account; and

the choice is in effect when the event happens.

If:

CGT event C1 or C2 happens in relation to a qualifying forex account that you hold at the time of the event; and

you have made a choice for retranslation for the account; and

the choice is in effect when the event happens;

disregard so much of any *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of the event as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Note: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

775-285 Retranslation of gains and losses relating to a qualifying forex account—forex realisation event 8

Forex realisation event 8

(1) Forex realisation event 8 happens if:

you have made a choice for retranslation for a qualifying forex account held by you; and

(b) that choice was in effect throughout a continuous period (the retranslation period) consisting of:

an income year; or

a particular part of an income year; and

either:

there is a positive retranslation amount for the account for the retranslation period (worked out under subsection (2)); or

there is a negative retranslation amount for the account for the retranslation period (worked out under subsection (3)).

Retranslation amount

(2) If the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (4) is a positive amount, that amount is a positive retranslation amount for the account for the retranslation period.

(3) If the amount worked out using the formula in subsection (4) is a negative amount, that amount is a negative retranslation amount for the account for the retranslation period.

Work out an amount for the account for the retranslation period using the formula:

Forex realisation gain

(6) You make a forex realisation gain if there is a positive retranslation amount for the account for the retranslation period. The amount of the forex realisation gain is the positive retranslation amount.

Forex realisation loss

(7) You make a forex realisation loss if there is a negative retranslation amount for the account for the retranslation period. The amount of the forex realisation loss is the negative retranslation amount.

Translation of foreign currency

For the purposes of the application of section 960-50 to this section:

if a retranslation period for an account did not begin immediately after the end of another retranslation period for the account—the opening balance of the account for the first-mentioned retranslation period is to be translated to Australian currency at the exchange rate applicable at the start of the first-mentioned retranslation period; and

if a retranslation period for an account began immediately after the end of another retranslation period for the account—the opening balance of the account for the first-mentioned retranslation period is to be translated to Australian currency at the exchange rate applicable at the end of the other retranslation period; and

the closing balance of an account for a retranslation period is to be translated to Australian currency at the exchange rate applicable at the end of the retranslation period; and

each deposit is to be translated to Australian currency at the exchange rate applicable at the time of the deposit; and

each withdrawal is to be translated to Australian currency at the exchange rate applicable at the time of the withdrawal.

Deposits

(10) For the purposes of this section, a deposit includes any amount paid or transferred into the account.

Withdrawals

(11) For the purposes of this section, a withdrawal includes any amount paid, advanced, drawn or transferred out of the account.

Subdivision 775-F — Retranslation under foreign exchange retranslation election under Subdivision 230-D

Guide to Subdivision 775-F

775-290 What this Subdivision is about

If you have made a foreign exchange retranslation election under Subdivision 230-D:

a forex realisation gain or a forex realisation loss you make in relation to an arrangement that is not a Division 230 financial arrangement as a result of forex realisation event 1 to 5 or 8 is disregarded; and

forex realisation event 9 enables any gains or losses to be worked out on a retranslation basis.

Table of sections

775-295 When this Subdivision applies

775-300 Tax consequences of choosing retranslation for arrangement

775-305 Retranslation of gains and losses relating to arrangement to which foreign exchange retranslation election applies—forex realisation event 9

775-310 When election ceases to apply to arrangement

775-315 Balancing adjustment when election ceases to apply to arrangement

775-295 When this Subdivision applies

A foreign exchange retranslation election applies to an arrangement for the purposes of this Subdivision if:

you start to have the arrangement after the start of the income year in which the election is made; and

the arrangement is recognised in financial reports of a kind referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(a) that are audited, or required to be audited, as referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(b); and

the arrangement is one in relation to which you are required by:

*accounting standard AASB 121 (or another accounting standard prescribed for the purposes of paragraph 230-265(1)(c)); or

if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report—a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

to recognise, in the financial reports referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(a), amounts in profit or loss (if any) that are attributable to changes in currency exchange rates.

The foreign exchange retranslation election does not apply to an arrangement for the purposes of this Subdivision if:

the election is made by the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

the election specifies that the election is not to apply to *financial arrangements in relation to *life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group; and

the arrangement is one that relates to the life insurance business carried on by a member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

The foreign exchange retranslation election does not apply to an arrangement for the purposes of this Subdivision if the arrangement is associated with a business of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of subsection 230-270(4).

775-300 Tax consequences of choosing retranslation for arrangement

A *forex realisation gain or *forex realisation loss you make as a result of forex realisation event 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 8 is disregarded if:

the event happens in relation to an arrangement that you hold; and

you have made a foreign exchange retranslation election that applies to the arrangement; and

the election is in effect when the event happens.

If:

CGT event C1 or C2 happens in relation to an arrangement that you hold at the time of the event; and

you have made a foreign exchange retranslation election that applies to the arrangement; and

the election is in effect when the event happens;

disregard so much of any *capital gain or *capital loss you make as a result of the event as is attributable to a currency exchange rate effect.

Note: For currency exchange rate effect, see section 775-105.

775-305 Retranslation of gains and losses relating to arrangement to which foreign exchange retranslation election applies—forex realisation event 9

Forex realisation event 9

(1) Forex realisation event 9 happens in relation to an *arrangement during an income year if:

you have made a foreign exchange retranslation election that applies to the arrangement; and

you are required by:

*accounting standard AASB 121 (or another accounting standard prescribed for the purposes of paragraph 230-265(1)(c)); or

if that standard does not apply to the preparation of the financial report—a comparable accounting standard that applies to the preparation of the financial report under a foreign law;

to recognise, in the financial report referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(a) for that income year, amounts in profit or loss (if any) in relation to the arrangement that are attributable to changes in currency exchange rates.

The forex realisation event 9 is taken to have happened in the income year.

Forex realisation gain

(2) You make a forex realisation gain if the standard referred to in paragraph (1)(b) requires you to recognise an amount of gain in profit or loss in relation to the *arrangement. That amount of the forex realisation gain is the amount the standard requires you to recognise.

Forex realisation loss

(3) You make a forex realisation loss if the *accounting standard referred to in paragraph (1)(b) requires you to recognise an amount of loss in profit or loss in relation to the *arrangement. That amount of the forex realisation loss is the amount that the accounting standard requires you to recognise.

Section does not apply to amounts previously recognised in equity

Subsections (1), (2) and (3) do not apply to amounts that have previously been required by the standards referred to in paragraph 230-255(2)(a) to be recognised in equity.

775-310 When election ceases to apply to arrangement

For the purposes of this Division, a foreign exchange retranslation election under subsection 230-255(1) ceases to apply to an arrangement from the start of an income year if the arrangement ceases to satisfy a requirement of paragraph 775-295(1)(b) or (c) during that income year.

If the election ceases to apply to an arrangement under subsection (1), the election cannot subsequently reapply to that arrangement (even if the requirements of paragraphs 775-295(1)(b) and (c) are satisfied once more in relation to the arrangement).

775-315 Balancing adjustment when election ceases to apply to arrangement

This section applies if:

you make a foreign exchange retranslation election; and

the election ceases to have effect or ceases to apply to an arrangement.

You are taken, for the purposes of this Division, to have:

disposed of the arrangement for its fair value immediately before the election ceases to have effect or ceases to apply to the arrangement; and

reacquired the arrangement at its fair value immediately after the election ceases to have effect or ceases to apply to the arrangement.

Note: Paragraph (a) means that there would be a forex realisation event 9 in relation to the arrangement.

Division 802 — Foreign residents’ income with an underlying foreign source

Table of Subdivisions

802-A Conduit foreign income

Subdivision 802-A — Conduit foreign income

Guide to Subdivision 802-A

802-5 What this Subdivision is about

A distribution that an Australian corporate tax entity makes to a foreign resident is not subject to dividend withholding tax, and is not assessable income, to the extent that the entity declares it to be conduit foreign income.

An Australian corporate tax entity has an amount that is non-assessable non-exempt income if it receives a distribution including conduit foreign income from another such entity and it makes a distribution including conduit foreign income.

This Subdivision sets out the method of working out an entity’s conduit foreign income.

It also discourages streaming of distributions to entities that can take advantage of the receipt of conduit foreign income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

802-10 Objects

802-15 Foreign residents—exempting CFI from Australian tax

802-17 Trust estates and foreign resident beneficiaries—exempting CFI from Australian tax

802-20 Distributions between Australian corporate tax entities—non-assessable non-exempt income

802-25 Conduit foreign income of an Australian corporate tax entity

802-30 Foreign source income amounts

802-35 Capital gains and losses

802-40 Effect of foreign income tax offset on conduit foreign income

802-45 Previous declarations of conduit foreign income

802-50 Receipt of an unfranked distribution from another Australian corporate tax entity

802-55 No double benefits

802-60 No streaming of distributions

Operative provisions

802-10 Objects

The objects of this Subdivision are:

to encourage the establishment in Australia of regional holding companies for foreign groups; and

to improve Australia’s attractiveness as a continuing base for its multinational companies;

by providing relief from tax on *distributions by *Australian corporate tax entities to *members who are foreign residents or other Australian corporate tax entities if those distributions relate to conduit foreign income.

802-15 Foreign residents—exempting CFI from Australian tax

So much of the *unfranked part of a frankable distribution made by an *Australian corporate tax entity that the entity declares, in its distribution statement, to be conduit foreign income:

is not assessable income and is not exempt income of a foreign resident; and

(b) is an amount to which section 128B (Liability to withholding tax) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply.

The declaration must be made on or before the day on which the *distribution is made.

Note: For a private company, this rule may bring forward the time at which the company is required to make its distribution statement: see section 202-75.

802-17 Trust estates and foreign resident beneficiaries—exempting CFI from Australian tax

Foreign resident beneficiaries

So much of a share of the net income of a trust as is reasonably attributable to the whole or a part of the *unfranked part of a frankable distribution made by an *Australian corporate tax entity that the entity declares, in its distribution statement, to be conduit foreign income:

is not assessable income and is not exempt income of a beneficiary of the trust who:

is a foreign resident; and

is presently entitled to the share of the income of the trust; and

(b) is an amount to which section 128B (Liability to withholding tax) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply.

Note: A frankable distribution to which a part of the net income of a trust is reasonably attributable may be made by the Australian corporate tax entity to the trust directly, or to the trust indirectly through one or more interposed trusts.

The declaration must be made on or before the day on which the *distribution is made.

Note: For a private company, this rule may bring forward the time at which the company is required to make its distribution statement: see section 202-75.

Trusts

(3) The trustee of a trust is not to be assessed (and pay tax) under section 98, 99 or 99A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of so much of the net income of the trust as is *non-assessable non-exempt income of a beneficiary of the trust under subsection (1).

802-20 Distributions between Australian corporate tax entities—non-assessable non-exempt income

(1) An *Australian corporate tax entity (the receiving entity) has an amount that is not assessable income and is not *exempt income for an income year if:

it receives from another Australian corporate tax entity a frankable distribution that has an *unfranked part; and

(b) the *distribution statement for the *distribution declares an amount (a received CFI amount) of the unfranked part to be *conduit foreign income; and

the receiving entity, after the start of the income year but before the due day for lodging its income tax return for that income year:

makes a frankable distribution that has an unfranked part; and

(ii) declares an amount (a declared CFI amount) of the unfranked part to be conduit foreign income.

The amount that is not assessable income and is not exempt income is the lesser of:

(a) the sum of the received CFI amounts that the receiving entity receives during the income year (the total received CFI amounts); and

the amount worked out using this formula:

where:

related expenses means the receiving entity’s expenses that are reasonably related to the total received CFI amounts.

total declared CFI amounts means the sum of the declared CFI amounts in distributions made by the receiving entity before the due day for lodging its *income tax return for the income year.

AusCo 1 pays an unfranked dividend of $80 to AusCo 2. AusCo 1 declares all of the $80 to be its conduit foreign income (so the $80 is a received CFI amount).

AusCo 2 has $5 of deductible expenses relating to the $80 dividend.

AusCo 2 pays an unfranked dividend of $30. AusCo 2 declares $15 of the $30 to be conduit foreign income (so the $15 is a declared CFI amount).

The amount that is not assessable income and is not exempt income for AusCo 2 (assuming there are no other received CFI amounts or declared CFI amounts) is:

Example: AusCo 1 and AusCo 2 are both Australian corporate tax entities.

The remaining $64 is included in AusCo 2’s assessable income and it can deduct $4 (the part of the expenses related to the $64).

If the receiving entity’s expenses that are reasonably related to the total received CFI amounts equal or exceed the total received CFI amounts for an income year, the total received CFI amounts is not assessable income and is not exempt income of the receiving entity for the income year.

If a declared CFI amount is taken into account in working out an amount of non-assessable non-exempt income of an entity for an income year, that amount cannot be taken into account for the entity for a later income year.

Work out how much conduit foreign income in a frankable distribution flows through a trust or a partnership in the same way that you work out the *share of a franking credit on a *franked distribution that flows through a trust or a partnership. That amount is treated as a received CFI amount under this section.

Note: See sections 207-50, 207-55 and 207-57 for the share of a franking credit on a franked distribution that flows through a trust or a partnership.

802-25 Conduit foreign income of an Australian corporate tax entity

An *Australian corporate tax entity’s conduit foreign income at a particular time (the relevant time) is worked out by applying sections 802-30 to 802-55.

Note: Subdivision 715-U modifies the single entity and the entry history rule for the purposes of working out conduit foreign income for consolidated groups and MEC groups.

802-30 Foreign source income amounts

Work out the amount of the entity’s ordinary income and statutory income derived by the entity that has been, is or will be included in an income statement or similar statement of the entity or of another entity and that would not be included in the entity’s assessable income if the entity:

for a company or a corporate limited partnership—were a foreign resident at the relevant time; or

for a public trading trust—were not a resident unit trust for the income year in which the relevant time occurs.

Note: Income statements are prepared under the Framework for the Preparation and Presentation of Financial Statements (which is referred to in the Australian Accounting Standards).

Reduce the subsection (1) amount by any part of that amount that is or will be included in the entity’s assessable income (apart from section 802-20).

Add to the amount remaining after subsection (2) these amounts:

if the entity receives from another *Australian corporate tax entity a frankable distribution that has an *unfranked part—any amount declared in the distribution statement for that *distribution to be conduit foreign income;

an amount that is treated as a received CFI amount for the purposes of section 802-20 because of subsection 802-20(5);

(c) an amount that is *non-assessable non-exempt income under section 768-5 and that would be not be included under subsection (1).

Reduce the amount remaining after subsection (3) by these amounts:

(a) an amount that is *non-assessable non-exempt income under section 23AI or 23AK of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

an amount that is not included in the entity’s assessable income because of the operation of paragraph 99B(2)(e) of that Act;

the amount worked out using the formula:

where:

available franking credit means any part of the amount remaining after subsection (3) to the extent to which a *franking credit arises or will arise for the entity.

Reduce the amount remaining after subsection (4) by any of the entity’s expenses that are reasonably related to that amount, except expenses the entity has deducted or can deduct under this Act. In applying this subsection to an amount covered by paragraph (3)(a), assume that amount is non-assessable non-exempt income.

(6) The result is an amount included in the entity’s conduit foreign income.

This section applies to an entity as if it had derived an amount if the amount has been applied for its benefit (including by discharging all or part of a debt it owes) or as it directs.

802-35 Capital gains and losses

Capital gains

(1) The entity’s conduit foreign income includes these amounts:

the amount by which a *capital gain of the entity is reduced because of the operation of section 768-505;

(b) a capital gain that is disregarded because of the operation of subsection 23AH(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

the amount of a capital gain that is disregarded as a result of the operation of an *international tax sharing treaty.

Capital losses

(2) The entity’s conduit foreign income is reduced by these amounts:

the amount by which a *capital loss of the entity is reduced because of the operation of section 768-505;

(b) a capital loss that is disregarded because of the operation of subsection 23AH(4) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

the amount of a capital loss that is disregarded as a result of the operation of an *international tax sharing treaty.

Timing rule

The adjustments are made under this section at the end of the income year in which the CGT event occurred.

802-40 Effect of foreign income tax offset on conduit foreign income

The entity’s conduit foreign income includes an amount if a tax offset arose for the entity under Division 770 for the income year immediately before the one in which the relevant time occurs. The amount is worked out using the formula:

802-45 Previous declarations of conduit foreign income

The entity’s conduit foreign income is reduced if:

the entity makes a frankable distribution that has an *unfranked part; and

the entity declares an amount of the unfranked part to be conduit foreign income.

The amount of the reduction is the amount so declared.

Note: If the amount declared is less than the amount available for declaration, the difference is available for a later declaration.

802-50 Receipt of an unfranked distribution from another Australian corporate tax entity

(1) The entity’s conduit foreign income is reduced if:

(a) the entity (the receiving entity) receives from another *Australian corporate tax entity a *frankable distribution that has an *unfranked part; and

(b) the *distribution statement for the *distribution declares an amount (the declared amount) of the unfranked part to be conduit foreign income; and

some or all of the declared amount is not non-assessable non-exempt income under section 802-20.

The amount of the reduction is the amount that is not non-assessable non-exempt income under section 802-20 less any expenses reasonably related to that amount.

802-55 No double benefits

An amount cannot be both:

(a) an unfranked non-portfolio dividend credit for an entity under section 46FB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

counted towards:

the entity’s conduit foreign income; and

the entity’s non-assessable non-exempt income under section 802-20.

802-60 No streaming of distributions

Subsection (2) has effect if:

an *Australian corporate tax entity makes one or more *frankable distributions in a franking period; and

at least one of the *distributions has an *unfranked part; and

the entity declares an amount of the unfranked part to be conduit foreign income.

If the entity does not, for that franking period, declare the same proportion of conduit foreign income for all *membership interests and *non-share equity interests then, instead of the amount that it declared to be conduit foreign income on those *distributions, it is taken to have declared under section 802-45 the greater amount that it would have declared had it declared that same proportion on all those distributions.

Note: Breaching subsection (2) may make the entity subject to a penalty under section 288-80 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (about over declaring conduit foreign income).

Example: There are 10,000 membership interests in AusCo Limited, 7,500 held by foreign residents and 2,500 held by Australian residents. It has $1,800 of conduit foreign income.

AusCo makes an unfranked distribution of 50 cents per membership interest to all of its members. It declares $1,500 of the distribution to be conduit foreign income for its 7,500 foreign membership interests (20 cents per membership interest or 40% of each distribution) and none for its Australian membership interests.

AusCo is taken to have declared the same proportion (40% of each distribution) of conduit foreign income for its Australian membership interests (which amounts to $500 of conduit foreign income). It is therefore taken to have declared $2,000 of conduit foreign income. This is an over-declaration of $200 and a penalty under section 288-80 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 will apply.

For the purposes of subsection (2), ignore *membership interests and *non-share equity interests that do not carry a right to receive *distributions (other than distributions on winding up).

Despite subsection (2), an entity that receives a frankable distribution that has an *unfranked part is entitled to rely on the distribution statement made by the entity that made the distribution.

Division 815 — Cross-border transfer pricing

Table of Subdivisions

815-A Treaty-equivalent cross-border transfer pricing rules

815-B Arm’s length principle for cross-border conditions between entities

815-C Arm’s length principle for permanent establishments

815-D Special rules for trusts and partnerships

815-E Reporting obligations for country by country reporting entities

Subdivision 815-A — Treaty-equivalent cross-border transfer pricing rules

Guide to Subdivision 815-A

815-1 What this Subdivision is about

The cross-border transfer pricing rules in this Subdivision are equivalent to, but independent of, the transfer pricing rules in Australia’s double tax agreements.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

815-5 Object

815-10 Transfer pricing benefit may be negated

815-15 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit

815-20 Cross-border transfer pricing guidance

815-25 Modified transfer pricing benefit for thin capitalisation

815-30 Determinations negating transfer pricing benefit

815-35 Consequential adjustments

815-40 No double taxation

Operative provisions

815-5 Object

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure the following amounts are appropriately brought to tax in Australia, consistent with the arm’s length principle:

profits which would have accrued to an Australian entity if it had been dealing at *arm’s length, but, by reason of non-arm’s length conditions operating between the entity and its foreign associated entities, have not so accrued;

profits which an Australian permanent establishment (within the meaning of the relevant international tax agreement) of a foreign entity might have been expected to make if it were a distinct and separate entity engaged in the same or similar activities under the same or similar conditions, but dealing wholly independently.

815-10 Transfer pricing benefit may be negated

The Commissioner may make a determination mentioned in subsection 815-30(1), in writing, for the purpose of negating a transfer pricing benefit an entity gets.

Treaty requirement

However, this section only applies to an entity if:

the entity gets the transfer pricing benefit under subsection 815-15(1) at a time when an international tax agreement containing an associated enterprises article applies to the entity; or

the entity gets the transfer pricing benefit under subsection 815-15(2) at a time when an international tax agreement containing a business profits article applies to the entity.

Note: This Subdivision does not apply to income years to which Subdivisions 815-B and 815-C apply: see section 815-1 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

815-15 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit

Transfer pricing benefit—associated enterprises

(1) An entity gets a transfer pricing benefit if:

the entity is an Australian resident; and

the requirements in the associated enterprises article for the application of that article to the entity are met; and

an amount of profits which, but for the conditions mentioned in the article, might have been expected to accrue to the entity, has, by reason of those conditions, not so accrued; and

had that amount of profits so accrued to the entity:

(i) the amount of the taxable income of the entity for an income year would be greater than its actual amount; or

(ii) the amount of a tax loss of the entity for an income year would be less than its actual amount; or

(iii) the amount of a *net capital loss of the entity for an income year would be less than its actual amount.

The amount of the transfer pricing benefit is the difference between the amounts mentioned in subparagraph (d)(i), (ii) or (iii) (as the case requires).

Transfer pricing benefit—business profits

(2) A foreign resident entity gets a transfer pricing benefit if:

the entity has a permanent establishment (within the meaning of the international tax agreement) in Australia; and

the amount of profits attributed to the permanent establishment falls short of the amount of profits the permanent establishment might be expected to make if it were a distinct and separate entity engaged, and dealing, in the manner mentioned in the business profits article; and

had the profits attributed to the permanent establishment included that shortfall:

(i) the amount of the taxable income of the entity for an income year would be greater than its actual amount; or

(ii) the amount of a tax loss of the entity for an income year would be less than its actual amount; or

(iii) the amount of a *net capital loss of the entity for an income year would be less than its actual amount.

The amount of the transfer pricing benefit is the difference between the amounts mentioned in subparagraph (c)(i), (ii) or (iii) (as the case requires).

Nil amounts

For the purposes of working out whether an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit, and of negating that benefit under subsection 815-30(1):

treat an entity that has no taxable income for an income year as having a taxable income for the year of a nil amount; and

treat an entity that has no tax loss for an income year as having a tax loss for the year of a nil amount; and

treat an entity that has no net capital loss for an income year as having a net capital loss for the year of a nil amount.

Multiple transfer pricing benefits

To avoid doubt, an entity may get 2 or more *transfer pricing benefits, in one or more income years, in relation to one amount of profits, or one shortfall of profits.

Meaning of associated enterprises article

(5) An associated enterprises article is:

(a) Article 9 of the United Kingdom convention (within the meaning of the International Tax Agreements Act 1953); or

a corresponding provision of another international tax agreement.

Meaning of business profits article

(6) A business profits article is:

(a) Article 7 of the United Kingdom convention (within the meaning of the International Tax Agreements Act 1953); or

a corresponding provision of another international tax agreement.

815-20 Cross-border transfer pricing guidance

For the purpose of determining the effect this Subdivision has in relation to an entity:

work out whether an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit consistently with the documents covered by this section, to the extent the documents are relevant; and

interpret a provision of an international tax agreement consistently with those documents, to the extent they are relevant.

The documents covered by this section are as follows:

the Model Tax Convention on Income and on Capital, and its Commentaries, as adopted by the Council of the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development and last amended on 22 July 2010;

the Transfer Pricing Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises and Tax Administrations, as approved by that Council and last amended on 22 July 2010;

a document, or part of a document, prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

However, a document, or a part of a document, mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) or (b) is not covered by this section if the regulations so prescribe.

Regulations made for the purposes of paragraph (2)(c) or subsection (3) may prescribe different documents or parts of documents for different circumstances.

815-25 Modified transfer pricing benefit for thin capitalisation

This section modifies the transfer pricing benefit an entity gets, or apart from this section would get, in an income year if:

Division 820 (about thin capitalisation) applies to the entity for the income year; and

the transfer pricing benefit relates to profits, or a shortfall of profits, referable to costs that are *debt deductions of the entity for the income year.

If working out what those costs might have been, or might be expected to be, involves applying a rate to a *debt interest:

work out the rate by applying section 815-15, having regard to section 815-20; but

apply the rate to the debt interest the entity actually issued.

Note: Division 820 may apply to further reduce debt deductions.

815-30 Determinations negating transfer pricing benefit

The determinations the Commissioner may make are as follows:

a determination of an amount by which the taxable income of the entity for an income year is increased;

a determination of an amount by which the tax loss of the entity for an income year is decreased;

a determination of an amount by which the net capital loss of the entity for an income year is decreased.

If the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (1), the determination is taken to be attributable, to the relevant extent, to such of the following as the Commissioner may determine:

an increase of a particular amount in assessable income of the entity for an income year under a particular provision of this Act;

a decrease of a particular amount in particular deductions of the entity for an income year;

an increase of a particular amount in particular capital gains of the entity for an income year;

a decrease of a particular amount in particular capital losses of the entity for an income year.

If the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (1), the Commissioner must make a determination under subsection (2), unless it is not possible or practicable for the Commissioner to do so.

Example: If section 815-25 is relevant in working out the transfer pricing benefit an entity gets, this subsection requires the Commissioner to make a determination relating to the debt deductions of the entity.

Nothing done under subsection (2) affects the validity of a determination made under subsection (1).

The Commissioner may take such action as the Commissioner considers necessary to give effect to a determination under this section.

The Commissioner must give a copy of a determination under this section to the entity.

A failure to comply with subsection (6) does not affect the validity of the determination.

815-35 Consequential adjustments

Consequential adjustment—associated enterprises

(1) The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (4) in relation to an entity (the disadvantaged entity) if:

the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection 815-30(1) in relation to a transfer pricing benefit an entity gets under subsection 815-15(1); and

the Commissioner considers that, but for the conditions mentioned in the associated enterprises article:

(i) the amount of the taxable income of the disadvantaged entity for an income year might have been expected to be less than its actual amount; or

(ii) the amount of a *tax loss of the disadvantaged entity for an income year might have been expected to be greater than its actual amount; or

(iii) the amount of a *net capital loss of the disadvantaged entity for an income year might have been expected to be greater than its actual amount; or

(iv) an amount of *withholding tax payable in respect of interest or royalties by the disadvantaged entity might have been expected to be less than its actual amount; and

the Commissioner considers that it is fair and reasonable that the actual amount mentioned in subparagraph (b)(i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) (as the case requires) be adjusted accordingly.

Consequential adjustment—business profits

(2) The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (4) in relation to an entity (the disadvantaged entity) if:

the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection 815-30(1) in relation to a transfer pricing benefit an entity gets under subsection 815-15(2); and

the Commissioner considers that, if the permanent establishment were a distinct and separate entity engaged, and dealing, in the manner mentioned in the business profits article:

(i) the amount of the taxable income of the disadvantaged entity for an income year might have been expected to be less than its actual amount; or

(ii) the amount of a *tax loss of the disadvantaged entity for an income year might have been expected to be greater than its actual amount; or

(iii) the amount of a *net capital loss of the disadvantaged entity for an income year might have been expected to be greater than its actual amount; or

(iv) an amount of *withholding tax payable in respect of interest or royalties by the disadvantaged entity might have been expected to be less than its actual amount; and

the Commissioner considers that it is fair and reasonable that the actual amount mentioned in subparagraph (b)(i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) (as the case requires) be adjusted accordingly.

Nil amounts

For the purposes of this section:

treat an entity that has no taxable income for an income year as having a taxable income for the year of a nil amount; and

treat an entity that has no tax loss for an income year as having a tax loss for the year of a nil amount; and

treat an entity that has no net capital loss for an income year as having a net capital loss for the year of a nil amount.

Consequential adjustment—determinations

The Commissioner may make one or more of the following determinations, in writing, for the purpose of adjusting an amount as mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) or (2)(c):

a determination of an amount by which the taxable income of the disadvantaged entity for an income year is decreased;

a determination of an amount by which the tax loss of the disadvantaged entity for an income year is increased;

a determination of an amount by which the net capital loss of the disadvantaged entity for an income year is increased;

a determination of an amount by which the withholding tax payable by the disadvantaged entity in respect of interest or royalties is decreased.

The Commissioner may take such action as the Commissioner considers necessary to give effect to a determination under this section.

The Commissioner must give a copy of a determination under this section to the disadvantaged entity.

A failure to comply with subsection (6) does not affect the validity of the determination.

An entity may give the Commissioner a written request to make a determination under this section relating to the entity. The Commissioner must decide whether or not to grant the request, and give the entity notice of the Commissioner’s decision.

(10) If the entity is dissatisfied with the Commissioner’s decision, the entity may object, in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, against that decision.

815-40 No double taxation

The amount of a transfer pricing benefit that is negated under this Subdivision for an entity is not to be taken into account again under another provision of this Act to increase the entity’s assessable income, reduce the entity’s deductions or reduce a net capital loss of the entity.

(2) Subsection (1) has effect despite former section 136AB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Nothing in this Subdivision limits Division 820 (about thin capitalisation) in its application to further reduce *debt deductions of an entity.

Subdivision 815-B — Arm’s length principle for cross-border conditions between entities

Guide to Subdivision 815-B

815-101 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision applies if an entity would otherwise get a tax advantage in Australia from cross-border conditions that are inconsistent with the internationally accepted arm’s length principle.

The entity is treated for income tax and withholding tax purposes as if arm’s length conditions had operated.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

815-105 Object

815-110 Operation of Subdivision

815-115 Substitution of arm’s length conditions

815-120 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit

815-125 Meaning of arm’s length conditions

815-130 Relevance of actual commercial or financial relations

815-135 Guidance

815-140 Modification for thin capitalisation

815-145 Consequential adjustments

815-150 Amendment of assessments

Operative provisions

815-105 Object

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that the amount brought to tax in Australia from cross-border conditions between entities is not less than it would be if those conditions reflected:

the arm’s length contribution made by Australian operations through functions performed, assets used and risks assumed; and

the conditions that might be expected to operate between entities dealing at *arm’s length.

The Subdivision does this by specifying that, where an entity would otherwise get a tax advantage from actual conditions that differ from *arm’s length conditions, the arm’s length conditions are taken to operate for income tax and withholding tax purposes.

815-110 Operation of Subdivision

Nothing in the provisions of this Act other than this Subdivision limits the operation of this Subdivision.

Nothing in this Subdivision limits Division 820 (about thin capitalisation) in its application to reduce, or further reduce, *debt deductions of an entity.

815-115 Substitution of arm’s length conditions

For the purposes covered by subsection (2), if an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit from conditions that operate between the entity and another entity in connection with their commercial or financial relations:

those conditions are taken not to operate; and

instead, the *arm’s length conditions are taken to operate.

Note 1: The conditions that operate include, but are not limited to, such things as price, gross margin, net profit, and the division of profit between the entities.

Note 2: There are special rules about documentation that affect when an entity has a reasonably arguable position about the application (or non-application) of this Subdivision: see Subdivision 284-E in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

The purposes covered by this subsection are:

if the transfer pricing benefit arises under subparagraph 815-120(1)(c)(i)—working out the amount (if any) of the entity’s taxable income for the income year; and

if the transfer pricing benefit arises under subparagraph 815-120(1)(c)(ii)—working out the amount (if any) of the entity’s loss of a particular *sort for the income year; and

if the transfer pricing benefit arises under subparagraph 815-120(1)(c)(iii)—working out the amount (if any) of the entity’s *tax offsets for the income year; and

if the transfer pricing benefit arises under subparagraph 815-120(1)(c)(iv)—working out the amount (if any) of withholding tax payable by the entity in respect of interest or royalties.

815-120 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit

(1) An entity gets a transfer pricing benefit from conditions that operate between the entity and another entity in connection with their commercial or financial relations if:

(a) those conditions (the actual conditions) differ from the *arm’s length conditions; and

the actual conditions satisfy the cross-border test in subsection (3) for the entity; and

had the arm’s length conditions operated, instead of the actual conditions, one or more of the following would, apart from this Subdivision, apply:

(i) the amount of the entity’s taxable income for an income year would be greater;

(ii) the amount of the entity’s loss of a particular *sort for an income year would be less;

(iii) the amount of the entity’s *tax offsets for an income year would be less;

(iv) an amount of *withholding tax payable in respect of interest or royalties by the entity would be greater.

Absence of condition

For the purposes of subsection (1), there is taken to be a difference between the actual conditions and the *arm’s length conditions if:

an actual condition exists that is not one of the arm’s length conditions; or

a condition does not exist in the actual conditions but is one of the arm’s length conditions.

Cross-border test

Conditions that operate between an entity and another entity in connection with their commercial or financial relations satisfy the cross-border test if:

the conditions meet the overseas requirement in the following table for either or both of the entities; or

the conditions operate in connection with a business that the entity carries on in an *area covered by an international tax sharing treaty.

For the purposes of the table in subsection (3), treat any entity that is an Australian resident as not being an Australian resident if:

the entity is also a resident in a country that has entered into an international tax agreement with Australia containing a residence article; and

under that residence article, the entity is taken, for the purposes of the agreement, to be a resident only of that other country.

Nil amounts

For the purposes of this section and section 815-145:

treat an entity that has no taxable income for an income year as having a taxable income for the year of a nil amount; and

treat an entity that has no loss of a particular *sort for an income year as having a loss of that sort for the year of a nil amount; and

treat an entity that has no *tax offsets for an income year as having tax offsets for the year of a nil amount.

Meaning of residence article

(6) A residence article is:

(a) Article 4 of the United Kingdom convention (within the meaning of the International Tax Agreements Act 1953); or

a corresponding provision of another international tax agreement.

815-125 Meaning of arm’s length conditions

(1) The arm’s length conditions, in relation to conditions that operate between an entity and another entity, are the conditions that might be expected to operate between independent entities dealing wholly independently with one another in comparable circumstances.

Most appropriate and reliable method to be used

In identifying the *arm’s length conditions, use the method, or the combination of methods, that is the most appropriate and reliable, having regard to all relevant factors, including the following:

the respective strengths and weaknesses of the possible methods in their application to the actual conditions;

the circumstances, including the functions performed, assets used and risks borne by the entities;

the availability of reliable information required to apply a particular method;

the degree of comparability between the actual circumstances and the comparable circumstances, including the reliability of any adjustments to eliminate the effect of material differences between those circumstances.

Note: The possible methods include the methods set out in the documents mentioned in section 815-135 (about relevant guidance material).

Comparability of circumstances

In identifying comparable circumstances for the purpose of this section, regard must be had to all relevant factors, including the following:

the functions performed, assets used and risks borne by the entities;

the characteristics of any property or services transferred;

the terms of any relevant contracts between the entities;

the economic circumstances;

the business strategies of the entities.

For the purposes of this section, circumstances are comparable to actual circumstances if, to the extent (if any) that the circumstances differ from the actual circumstances:

the difference does not materially affect a condition that is relevant to the method; or

a reasonably accurate adjustment can be made to eliminate the effect of the difference on a condition that is relevant to the method.

815-130 Relevance of actual commercial or financial relations

Basic rule

The identification of the *arm’s length conditions must:

be based on the commercial or financial relations in connection with which the actual conditions operate; and

have regard to both the form and substance of those relations.

Exceptions

Despite paragraph (1)(b), disregard the form of the actual commercial or financial relations to the extent (if any) that it is inconsistent with the substance of those relations.

Despite subsection (1), if:

independent entities dealing wholly independently with one another in comparable circumstances would not have entered into the actual commercial or financial relations; and

independent entities dealing wholly independently with one another in comparable circumstances would have entered into other commercial or financial relations; and

those other commercial or financial relations differ in substance from the actual commercial or financial relations;

the identification of the *arm’s length conditions must be based on those other commercial or financial relations.

Despite subsection (1), if independent entities dealing wholly independently with one another in comparable circumstances would not have entered into commercial or financial relations, the identification of the *arm’s length conditions is to be based on that absence of commercial or financial relations.

Subsections 815-125(3) and (4) (about comparability of circumstances) apply for the purposes of this section.

815-135 Guidance

For the purpose of determining the effect this Subdivision has in relation to an entity, identify *arm’s length conditions so as best to achieve consistency with the documents covered by this section.

The documents covered by this section are as follows:

the Transfer Pricing Guidelines for Multinational Enterprises and Tax Administrations, as approved by the Council of the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development and last amended on 20 January 2022;

a document, or part of a document, prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

However, the document mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) is not covered by this section if the regulations so prescribe.

Regulations made for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b) or subsection (3) may prescribe different documents or parts of documents for different circumstances.

815-140 Modification for thin capitalisation

This section modifies the way an entity to which section 815-115 applies works out its taxable income, or its loss of a particular *sort, for an income year, if:

Division 820 (about thin capitalisation) applies to the entity for the income year; and

the entity:

(i) is not a *general class investor in relation to the income year; and

(ii) has not made a choice under subsection 820-85(2C) or 820-185(2C) in relation to the income year; and

the *arm’s length conditions affect costs that are *debt deductions of the entity for the income year.

If working out what those costs would be if the *arm’s length conditions had operated involves applying a rate to a *debt interest:

work out the rate as if the arm’s length conditions had operated; but

apply the rate to the debt interest the entity actually issued.

Note: Division 820 may apply to reduce or further reduce debt deductions.

815-145 Consequential adjustments

(1) The Commissioner may make a determination under subsection (2) in relation to an entity (the disadvantaged entity) if:

*arm’s length conditions are taken by section 815-115 to operate; and

the Commissioner considers that, if the arm’s length conditions, instead of the actual conditions, had operated:

(i) the amount of the disadvantaged entity’s taxable income for an income year might have been expected to be less than its actual amount; or

(ii) the amount of the disadvantaged entity’s loss of a particular *sort for an income year might have been expected to be greater than its actual amount; or

(iii) the amount of the disadvantaged entity’s *tax offsets for an income year might have been expected to be greater than their actual amount; or

(iv) an amount of *withholding tax payable in respect of interest or royalties by the disadvantaged entity might have been expected to be less than its actual amount; and

the Commissioner considers that it is fair and reasonable that the actual amount mentioned in subparagraph (b)(i), (ii), (iii) or (iv) (as the case requires) be adjusted accordingly.

For the purpose of adjusting an amount as mentioned in paragraph (1)(c), the Commissioner may make a determination stating the amount that is (and has been at all times) the amount of the disadvantaged entity’s:

taxable income for the income year; or

loss of a particular *sort for the income year; or

*tax offsets, or tax offset of a particular kind, for the income year; or

withholding tax payable in respect of interest or royalties.

The Commissioner may take such action as the Commissioner considers necessary to give effect to a determination under this section.

The Commissioner must give a copy of a determination under this section to the disadvantaged entity.

A failure to comply with subsection (4) does not affect the validity of the determination.

An entity may give the Commissioner a written request to make a determination under this section relating to the entity. The Commissioner must decide whether or not to grant the request, and give the entity notice of the Commissioner’s decision.

(8) If the entity is dissatisfied with the Commissioner’s decision, the entity may object, in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, against that decision.

815-150 Amendment of assessments

(1) Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment of an entity for an income year if:

the amendment is made within 7 years after the day on which the Commissioner gives notice of the assessment to the entity; and

the amendment is made for the purpose of giving effect to section 815-115.

(2) Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment at any time for the purpose of giving effect to section 815-145.

Subdivision 815-C — Arm’s length principle for permanent establishments

Guide to Subdivision 815-C

815-201 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision applies the internationally accepted arm’s length principle in the context of permanent establishments (PEs).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

815-205 Object

815-210 Operation of Subdivision

815-215 Substitution of arm’s length profits

815-220 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit

815-225 Meaning of arm’s length profits

815-230 Source rules for certain arm’s length profits

815-235 Guidance

815-240 Amendment of assessments

Operative provisions

815-205 Object

The object of this Subdivision is to ensure that the amount brought to tax in Australia by entities operating *permanent establishments is not less than it would be if the permanent establishment were a distinct and separate entity engaged in the same or comparable activities under the same or comparable circumstances, but dealing wholly independently with the other part of the entity.

815-210 Operation of Subdivision

Nothing in the provisions of this Act other than this Subdivision limits the operation of this Subdivision.

Nothing in this Subdivision limits Division 820 (about thin capitalisation) in its application to reduce, or further reduce, *debt deductions of an entity.

(3) For the purposes of this Subdivision, a branch to which subsection 160ZZW(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about certain Australian branches of foreign banks) applies is taken not to be, and not to have been at any time since its establishment, a *permanent establishment in Australia of the bank.

815-215 Substitution of arm’s length profits

For the purposes covered by subsection (2), if an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit from the attribution of profits to a *PE of the entity:

the amount of profits actually attributed to the PE is taken not to have been so attributed; and

instead, the *arm’s length profits are taken to have been attributed to the PE.

Note: There are special rules about documentation that affect when an entity has a reasonably arguable position about the application (or non-application) of this Subdivision: see Subdivision 284-E in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

The purposes covered by this subsection are:

if the transfer pricing benefit arises under subparagraph 815-220(1)(b)(i)—working out the amount (if any) of the entity’s taxable income for the income year; and

if the transfer pricing benefit arises under subparagraph 815-220(1)(b)(ii)—working out the amount (if any) of a loss of a particular *sort for the income year; and

if the transfer pricing benefit arises under subparagraph 815-220(1)(b)(iii)—working out the amount (if any) of the entity’s *tax offsets for the income year.

815-220 When an entity gets a transfer pricing benefit

(1) An entity gets a transfer pricing benefit from the attribution of profits to a *PE of the entity if:

(a) the amount of profits (the actual profits) attributed to the PE differs from the *arm’s length profits for the PE; and

had the arm’s length profits, instead of the actual profits, been attributed to the PE, one or more of the following would, apart from this Subdivision, apply:

(i) the amount of the entity’s taxable income for an income year would be greater;

(ii) the amount of the entity’s loss of a particular *sort for an income year would be less;

(iii) the amount of the entity’s *tax offsets for an income year would be less.

Nil amounts

For the purposes of this section:

treat an entity that has no taxable income for an income year as having a taxable income for the year of a nil amount; and

treat an entity that has no loss of a particular *sort for an income year as having a loss of that sort for the year of a nil amount; and

treat an entity that has no *tax offsets for an income year as having tax offsets for the year of a nil amount.

815-225 Meaning of arm’s length profits

(1) The arm’s length profits for a *PE of an entity are worked out by allocating the actual expenditure and income of the entity between the PE and the entity so that the profits attributed to the PE equal the profits the PE might be expected to make if:

the PE were a distinct and separate entity; and

the activities and circumstances of the PE, including the functions performed, assets used and risks borne by the PE, were those of that separate entity; and

the conditions that operated between that separate entity and the entity of which it is a PE were the *arm’s length conditions.

The conditions to which the *arm’s length conditions mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) relate are the conditions that would operate between the separate entity and the entity of which it is a *PE if the assumptions in paragraphs (1)(a) and (b) were made.

For the purposes of subsection (1):

the actual expenditure of an entity is taken to include losses and outgoings; and

the actual income of an entity is taken to include any amount that is, or is to be, included in the entity’s assessable income.

815-230 Source rules for certain arm’s length profits

The *arm’s length profits for a *PE in Australia are taken, for the purposes of this Act, to be attributable to sources in Australia.

The *arm’s length profits for a *PE in an *area covered by an international tax sharing treaty are taken, for the purposes of this Act, to be attributable to sources in that area.

815-235 Guidance

For the purpose of determining the effect this Subdivision has in relation to an entity, work out *arm’s length profits, and identify *arm’s length conditions, so as best to achieve consistency with:

the documents covered by this section; and

subject to paragraph (a), the documents covered by section 815-135.

The documents covered by this section are as follows:

the Model Tax Convention on Income and on Capital, and its Commentaries, as adopted by the Council of the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development and last amended on 22 July 2010, to the extent that document extracts the text of Article 7 and its Commentary as they read before 22 July 2010;

a document, or part of a document, prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

However, the document mentioned in paragraph (2)(a) is not covered by this section if the regulations so prescribe.

A document covered by section 815-135 is to be disregarded for the purposes of this section if the regulations so prescribe.

Regulations made for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), subsection (3) or subsection (4) may prescribe different documents or parts of documents for different circumstances.

815-240 Amendment of assessments

Section 170 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not prevent the amendment of an assessment of an entity for an income year if:

the amendment is made within 7 years after the day on which the Commissioner gives notice of the assessment to the entity; and

the amendment is made for the purpose of giving effect to section 815-215.

Subdivision 815-D — Special rules for trusts and partnerships

Guide to Subdivision 815-D

815-301 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides special rules about the way Subdivisions 815-B and 815-C apply to trusts and partnerships.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

815-305 Special rule for trusts

815-310 Special rules for partnerships

Operative provisions

815-305 Special rule for trusts

Subdivisions 815-B and 815-C apply in relation to the *net income of a trust in the same way those Subdivisions apply in relation to the taxable income of an entity other than a trust.

815-310 Special rules for partnerships

Subdivisions 815-B and 815-C apply in relation to the *net income of a partnership in the same way those Subdivisions apply in relation to the taxable income of an entity other than a partnership.

Subdivisions 815-B and 815-C apply in relation to a partnership loss of a partnership in the same way those Subdivisions apply in relation to a *tax loss of an entity other than a partnership.

Subdivision 815-E — Reporting obligations for country by country reporting entities

Guide to Subdivision 815-E

815-350 What this Subdivision is about

CBC reporting entities must give the Commissioner statements under this Subdivision.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

815-355 Requirement to give statements

815-360 Replacement reporting periods

815-365 Exemptions

815-370 Meaning of country by country reporting entity (or CBC reporting entity)

815-375 Meaning of country by country reporting parent (or CBC reporting parent)

815-380 Meaning of country by country reporting group (or CBC reporting group)

Operative provisions

Note: This Subdivision enables the implementation of measures issued by the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development relating to transfer pricing documentation and country-by-country reporting (including Action 13 of the Action Plan on Base Erosion and Profit Shifting of the G20 and the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development)

815-355 Requirement to give statements

You must give to the Commissioner a statement of each of the kinds referred to in subsection (3), in the approved form, in relation to an income year if:

you were a *CBC reporting entity for a period that includes the whole or a part of the income year that preceded that income year; and

you are, during that income year, any of the following:

an Australian resident;

(ii) a resident trust estate for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

a partnership that has at least one partner who is an Australian resident;

(iv) a foreign resident who operates an Australian permanent establishment (within the meaning of Part IVA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936);

(v) a non-resident trust estate (within the meaning of section 102AAB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that operates an Australian permanent establishment (within the meaning of Part IVA of that Act);

a partnership that operates an Australian permanent establishment (within the meaning of that Part); and

you are not exempted under section 815-365 from giving the statement; and

you are not included in a class of entities prescribed by the regulations.

Note: Under section 815-360, the Commissioner may allow you to give statements in relation to a 12 month period other than an income year.

You must give the statement within 12 months after the end of the period to which it relates.

Note: Section 388-55 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 allows the Commissioner to defer the time for giving the statement.

The statements are to be of the following kinds:

a statement relating to the global operations and activities, and the pricing policies relevant to transfer pricing, of:

you; and

if you are a *member of a *CBC reporting group during the income year—the other members of that group;

a statement relating to your operations, activities, dealings and transactions;

a statement relating to the allocation between countries of the income and activities of, and taxes paid by:

you; and

if subparagraph (a)(ii) applies—the other members of that group.

Note: These statements correspond to the following in Annexes I, II and III to Chapter V set out in the Guidance on Transfer Pricing Documentation and Country-by-country Reporting of the Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development and the G20:

a statement under paragraph (a) corresponds to the master file (see Annexe I);

a statement under paragraph (b) corresponds to the local file (see Annexe II);

a statement under paragraph (c) corresponds to the country-by-country report (see Annexe III).

815-360 Replacement reporting periods

The Commissioner may, by notice in writing, allow you to give all statements, or specified kinds of statements, under section 815-355 in relation to a 12 month period other than an income year.

A notice under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

815-365 Exemptions

Exemptions for particular entities

The Commissioner may, by notice in writing, exempt an entity from:

giving statements under section 815-355; or

giving statements of a particular kind under that section.

A notice under subsection (1) is not a legislative instrument.

General exemptions

The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, determine that section 815-355 does not apply to a specified class of entity.

815-370 Meaning of country by country reporting entity (or CBC reporting entity)

An entity is a country by country reporting entity (or CBC reporting entity) for a period if:

the entity is a *CBC reporting parent for the period; or

the entity is a *member of a *CBC reporting group during the period and another member of that group is a CBC reporting parent for the period.

815-375 Meaning of country by country reporting parent (or CBC reporting parent)

(1) An entity is a country by country reporting parent (or CBC reporting parent) for a period if:

(a) the entity is not an individual; and

if the entity is a *member of a *CBC reporting group at the end of the period—it is an entity that, according to:

*accounting principles; or

if accounting principles do not apply in relation to the entity—commercially accepted principles related to accounting;

is not controlled by any other member of the CBC reporting group at the end of the period; and

the entity’s annual global income for the period is $1 billion or more.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), in working out the entity’s annual global income for the period, treat the reference in paragraph 960-565(1)(aa) to notional listed company group as instead being a reference to *CBC reporting group.

815-380 Meaning of country by country reporting group (or CBC reporting group)

(1) A group of entities is a country by country reporting group (or CBC reporting group) if:

none of the entities is an individual; and

any of the following requirements are satisfied:

the group is consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group;

the group is a notional listed company group.

(2) Each entity in the group is a member of the *CBC reporting group.

Subsection (5) applies if:

(a) all the members of a group that is consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group (the smaller group) are members of:

another such group; or

a notional listed company group; and

at least one entity is a member of the group mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii) but is not a member of the smaller group.

Subsection (5) also applies if:

(a) all the *members of a notional listed company group (the smaller group) are members of:

another such group; or

a group that is consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group; and

at least one entity is a member of the group mentioned in subparagraph (a)(i) or (ii) but is not a member of the smaller group.

For the purposes of subsection (1), treat the smaller group as not being any of the following:

a group that is consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group;

a notional listed company group.

For the purposes of this section, assume that paragraph 960-575(4)(a) were disregarded:

in determining whether a notional listed company group exists; and

in identifying the *members of a notional listed company group.

Note: The effect of that assumption is that certain exceptions in accounting or other principles to requirements to consolidate for accounting purposes are taken into account in working out the membership of the country by country reporting group. Where such exceptions apply, a country by country reporting group may have fewer members than the equivalent notional listed company group.

Division 820 — Thin capitalisation rules

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 820

820-A Preliminary

820-AA Thin capitalisation rules for general class investors

820-B Thin capitalisation rules for outward investing financial entities (non-ADI)

820-C Thin capitalisation rules for inward investing financial entities (non-ADI)

820-D Thin capitalisation rules for outward investing entities (ADI)

820-E Thin capitalisation rules for inward investing entities (ADI)

820-EAA Debt deduction limitation rules for debt deduction creation (all relevant entities)

820-EAB Third party debt concepts

820-EA Some financial entities may choose to be treated as ADIs

820-FA How the thin capitalisation rules apply to consolidated groups and MEC groups

820-FB Grouping branches of foreign banks and foreign financial entities with a consolidated group, MEC group or single Australian resident company

820-G Calculating the average values

820-H Control of entities

820-HA Controlled foreign entity debt and controlled foreign entity equity

820-I Associate entities

820-J Equity interest in a trust or partnership

820-JA Worldwide debt and equity concepts

820-K Zero-capital amount

820-KA Cost-free debt capital and excluded equity interests

820-L Record keeping requirements

Guide to Division 820

820-1 What this Division is about

This Division applies to foreign controlled Australian entities, Australian entities that operate internationally and foreign entities that operate in Australia.

Financing expenses that an entity can otherwise deduct from its assessable income may be disallowed under this Division where the entity is “thinly capitalised”.

Table of sections

820-10 Map of Division

820-10 Map of Division

The following table sets out a map of this Division.

Subdivision 820-A — Preliminary

Table of sections

820-30 Object of Division

820-31 Order of application of Subdivisions

820-32 Exemption for private or domestic assets and non-debt liabilities

820-35 Application—$2 million threshold

820-37 Application—assets threshold

820-39 Exemption of certain special purpose entities

820-40 Meaning of debt deduction

820-30 Object of Division

The Object of this Division is to ensure that the following entities do not reduce their tax liabilities by using an excessive amount of *debt deductions, in financing their Australian operations:

*Australian entities that operate internationally;

Australian entities that are foreign controlled;

*foreign entities that operate in Australia.

Note: This Division applies in relation to debt deductions of an entity as reduced, if required, in accordance with Division 815 (about cross-border transfer pricing).

820-31 Order of application of Subdivisions

First, work out if a debt deduction of an entity for an income year is disallowed under Subdivision 820-EAA (debt deduction limitation rules for debt deduction creation).

To the extent that all or part of a debt deduction is disallowed under that Subdivision, disregard the debt deduction in applying the following provisions in relation to the entity for the income year:

Subdivision 820-AA;

Subdivision 820-B;

Subdivision 820-C.

Note: The provisions mentioned in paragraphs (2)(a) to (c) may further disallow debt deductions of the entity.

820-32 Exemption for private or domestic assets and non-debt liabilities

This Division does not apply to:

an asset that is used (or held for use) wholly or principally for private or domestic purposes; or

a *non-debt liability that is wholly or principally of a private or domestic nature.

Subsection (1) does not apply in relation to the following:

Subdivision 820-EAA;

any other provision in this Division, to the extent that it relates to that Subdivision.

820-35 Application—$2 million threshold

Subdivision 820-AA, 820-B, 820-C, 820-D, 820-E or 820-EAA does not apply to disallow any debt deduction of an entity for an income year if the total debt deductions of that entity and all its associate entities for that year are $2 million or less.

820-37 Application—assets threshold

Subdivision 820-AA, 820-B, 820-C, 820-D or 820-E does not apply to disallow any debt deduction of an entity for an income year if:

either:

the entity is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or an *outward investing entity (ADI) for a period that is all or any part of that year (and is not a general class investor for that year); or

(ii) assuming that the entity were a *financial entity for all of that year, it would be, for all of that year, an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) and not an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI); and

the entity is not also an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or an *inward investing entity (ADI) for all or any part of that year; and

the result of applying the following formula is equal to or greater than 0.9:

where:

average Australian assets:

of an Australian entity—is the average value, for that year, of all the assets of the entity, other than:

any assets attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments; or

any *debt interests held by the entity, to the extent to which any value of the interests is all or a part of the controlled foreign entity debt of the entity; or

any *equity interests or debt interests held by the entity, to the extent to which any value of the interests is all or a part of the controlled foreign entity equity of the entity; or

any debt interests that are *issued by *associates of the entity, that are *on issue, and that are held by the entity; or

any equity interests that the entity holds in associates of the entity; and

of a foreign entity—is the average value, for that year, of all the assets of the entity that are:

located in Australia; or

attributable to the entity’s *Australian permanent establishments; or

debt interests held by the entity, to the extent to which the interests are covered by subsection (2); or

equity interests held by the entity, to the extent to which the interests are covered by subsection (3);

other than:

any debt interests that are issued by associates of the entity, that are on issue, and that are held by the entity; or

any equity interests that the entity holds in associates of the entity.

average total assets of an entity is the average value, for that year, of all the assets of the entity, other than:

any *debt interests that are *issued by *associates of the entity, that are *on issue, and that are held by the entity; or

any *equity interests that the entity holds in associates of the entity.

Foreign entity—debt interest issued by an Australian entity

If a foreign entity holds a *debt interest that:

was *issued by an Australian entity; and

is *on issue;

this subsection covers the interest to the extent to which the interest is not attributable to any *overseas permanent establishments of the Australian entity.

Foreign entity—equity interest in an Australian entity

If a foreign entity holds an *equity interest in an Australian entity, this subsection covers the interest to the extent to which the interest is not attributable to any *overseas permanent establishments of the Australian entity.

820-39 Exemption of certain special purpose entities

Subdivision 820-AA, 820-B, 820-C, 820-D, 820-E or 820-EAA does not apply to disallow any debt deduction of an entity for an income year if the entity meets the conditions in subsection (3) throughout the income year.

Subdivision 820-AA, 820-B, 820-C, 820-D, 820-E or 820-EAA does not apply to disallow any debt deduction of an entity for an income year that is an amount incurred by the entity during a part of that year, if the entity meets the conditions in subsection (3) throughout that part.

The conditions are:

the entity is one established for the purposes of managing some or all of the economic risk associated with assets, liabilities or investments (whether the entity assumes the risk from another entity or creates the risk itself); and

the total value of *debt interests in the entity is at least 50% of the total value of the entity’s assets; and

the entity is an insolvency-remote special purpose entity according to criteria of an internationally recognised rating agency that are applicable to the entity’s circumstances.

The condition in paragraph (3)(c) can be met without the rating agency determining that the entity meets those criteria.

Note 1: While an entity meets the conditions in subsection (3), it is treated for the purposes of this Division as not being a member of a consolidated group or MEC group (see section 820-584).

Note 2: An entity that does not qualify for the exemption in this section may still be a securitisation vehicle under subsection 820-942(2), in which case the value of its securitised assets will count towards its zero-capital amount under Subdivision 820-K.

Multi-tier special purpose entities

An entity is taken to meet the conditions in subsection (3) throughout a period that is all or part of an income year, if the entity is one of 2 or more entities that together satisfy the condition that, assuming:

(a) each of the entities had been a division or part of the same entity (the notional entity), rather than a separate entity, throughout that period; and

the notional entity had consisted only of those divisions and parts throughout that period;

the notional entity would meet the conditions in subsection (3) throughout that period.

820-40 Meaning of debt deduction

(1) Debt deduction, of an entity and for an income year, is a cost incurred by the entity to the extent to which:

the cost is:

interest, an amount in the nature of interest, or any other amount that is economically equivalent to interest; or

the difference between the *financial benefits received, or to be received, by the entity under a *scheme giving rise to a *debt interest and the financial benefits provided, or to be provided, under that scheme; or

any amount directly incurred in obtaining or maintaining the financial benefits received, or to be received, by the entity under a scheme giving rise to a debt interest; or

any other expense incurred by the entity that is specified in the regulations made for the purposes of this subparagraph; and

the entity can, apart from this Division, deduct the cost from its assessable income for that year;

A cost covered by paragraph (1)(a) includes, but is not limited to, any of the following:

an amount in substitution for interest;

a discount in respect of a security;

a fee or charge in respect of a debt, including application fees, line fees, service fees, brokerage and stamp duty in respect of document registration or security for a *debt interest;

an amount that is taken under an income tax law to be an amount of interest in respect of a lease, a hire purchase arrangement or any other arrangement specified in that law;

any loss in respect of:

a reciprocal purchase agreement (otherwise known as a repurchase agreement);

a sell-buyback arrangement;

a securities loan arrangement;

any amount covered by paragraph (1)(a) that has been assigned or is dealt with in any way on behalf of the party who would otherwise be entitled to that amount.

To avoid doubt, the following amounts that are incurred by an entity in relation to a *debt interest issued by the entity are not covered by paragraph (1)(a):

(b) losses incurred by the entity in relation to which the following apply:

the losses would otherwise be a cost covered by subparagraph (1)(a)(ii); but

the benefits mentioned in that subparagraph are measured in a foreign currency or a unit of account other than Australian currency (for example, ounces of gold) and the losses have arisen only because of changes in the rate of converting that foreign currency or that unit of account into Australian currency;

salary or wages;

rental expenses for a lease if the lease is not a debt interest;

an expense specified in the regulations made for the purposes of this paragraph.

Subdivision 820-AA — Thin capitalisation rules for general class investors

Guide to Subdivision 820-AA

820-45 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the thin capitalisation rules that apply to general class investors (that is, entities that are not dealt with in rules set out in Subdivisions 820-B, 820-C, 820-D or 820-E). These rules deal with the following matters:

• how all or a part of the debt deductions claimed by the entity may be disallowed under one of three tests (the fixed ratio test, the group ratio test or the third party debt test);

• how the entity can choose to apply which one of these tests applies;

• where the fixed ratio test applies, whether the entity can claim a special deduction in respect of amounts previously disallowed under the fixed ratio test.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-46 Thin capitalisation rule for general class investors

820-47 Choices under subsection 820-46(3) or (4)

820-48 Where entity is taken to make third party debt test choice

820-49 Meaning of obligor group etc.

820-50 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

820-51 Meaning of fixed ratio earnings limit and group ratio earnings limit

820-52 Meaning of tax EBITDA

820-53 Meaning of group ratio, GR group, GR group parent and GR group member

820-54 Meaning of GR group net third party interest expense, financial statement net third party interest expense and adjusted net third party interest expense

820-55 Meaning of entity EBITDA and GR group EBITDA

820-56 Special deduction for previously FRT disallowed amounts—fixed ratio test

820-57 Meaning of FRT disallowed amount

820-58 FRT disallowed amount is treated as zero where subsequent choice means fixed ratio test does not apply

820-59 When FRT disallowed amount is treated as zero for companies and trusts

820-60 Excess tax EBITDA amount

Operative provisions

820-46 Thin capitalisation rule for general class investors

Thin capitalisation rule

This subsection disallows all or part of an entity’s *debt deductions for an income year if, for that year:

the entity is a general class investor (see subsection (2)); and

the entity:

(i) has not made a choice under subsection (3) or (4) (fixed ratio test applies); or

has made a choice under subsection (3) (group ratio test applies); or

has made a choice under subsection (4) (third party debt test applies).

Note 1: This Subdivision does not apply if the total debt deductions of that entity and all its associate entities for that year are $2 million or less, see section 820-35.

Note 2: To work out the amount to be disallowed, see section 820-50.

Note 3: A consolidated group or MEC group may be a general class investor to which this Subdivision applies: see Subdivisions 820-FA and 820-FB.

General class investor

(2) The entity is a general class investor for an income year if, and only if:

(a) for a period that is all or part of the income year, the entity is not any of the following:

an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI);

an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI);

an *outward investing entity (ADI);

an *inward investing entity (ADI); and

assuming that the entity were a *financial entity for all of the income year, it would be, for the income year, any of the following:

an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI);

an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI).

An entity that is a general class investor for an income year may make a choice under this subsection to apply the group ratio test in relation to that income year if:

the entity is a GR group member for the period corresponding to the income year of a GR group for the period; and

the GR group EBITDA for the period of the GR group is greater than zero.

An entity that is a general class investor for an income year may make a choice under this subsection to apply the third party debt test in relation to that income year.

An entity that is a general class investor for an income year is taken to have made a choice under subsection (4) in relation to that income year if section 820-48 applies to the entity in relation to that income year.

Subsection (5) applies despite subsection 820-47(1).

820-47 Choices under subsection 820-46(3) or (4)

A choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) can only be made in the approved form.

A choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) can only be made:

on or before the earlier of the following days:

the day the entity lodges its income tax return for the income year;

the day the entity is required to lodge its income tax return for the income year; or

a later day allowed by the Commissioner.

Subject to subsections (4) and (4A) of this section, a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) cannot be revoked.

An entity that makes a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) (other than a choice that is taken to have been made under subsection 820-46(5)) may revoke the choice if the Commissioner makes a decision to that effect under subsection (6).

If, under subsection 820-46(5), an entity is taken to have made a choice to apply the third party debt test in relation to an income year:

(a) the entity may not make a choice under subsection 820-46(3) (group ratio test applies) in relation to that income year; and

any choice previously made under subsection 820-46(3) by the entity in relation to that income year is revoked and taken never to have been made.

For the purposes of this Division (other than this section), if a choice is revoked under subsection (4) or (4A) of this section, the entity is taken to have never made the choice.

The Commissioner can decide, in writing, that a specified entity can revoke a specified choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) (other than a choice that is taken to have been made under subsection 820-46(5)) in relation to an income year, if the Commissioner is satisfied that all of the following conditions are satisfied:

the entity made the choice;

the entity has applied to the Commissioner, in the approved form, to revoke the choice before the earlier of the following days:

the day that is 4 years after the day the entity lodged its income tax return for the income year;

the day that is 4 years after the day the entity was required to lodge its income tax return for the income year;

it is fair and reasonable, having regard to matters the Commissioner considers relevant, to allow the entity to revoke the choice.

If the Commissioner makes a decision under subsection (6), the Commissioner must give a copy of the decision to the entity as soon as practicable.

820-48 Where entity is taken to make third party debt test choice

(1) For the purposes of subsection 820-46(5), this section applies to an entity (the first entity) in relation to an income year if:

the first entity is a *member of an obligor group in relation to a *debt interest; and

the entity that issued the debt interest:

has made a choice under subsection 820-46(4) in relation to that income year (including a choice that is taken to be made under subsection 820-46(5) in relation to a different obligor group); and

is required to lodge an income tax return for the income year; and

the first entity:

is an associate entity of the entity mentioned in paragraph (b) of this subsection; and

is required to lodge an income tax return for the income year.

(2) For the purposes of subparagraph (1)(c)(i), in determining whether an entity is an associate entity of another entity:

disregard the requirement in subsections 820-905(1) and (2A) that the entity is an associate of the other entity, unless only paragraph 820-905(1)(b) applies; and

treat the references in paragraphs 820-905(1)(a) and 820-905(2A)(a) to “an associate interest of 50% or more” as instead being a reference to “a TC control interest of 20% or more”; and

treat subsection 820-860(3) as applying for the purposes of determining whether the entity is an associate entity of the other entity (as a result of paragraph (a) of this subsection); and

treat the purposes mentioned in subparagraphs 820-870(1)(b)(i) and (ii) as including the purposes of determining whether the entity is an associate entity of the other entity (as a result of paragraph (a) of this subsection).

For the purposes of subsection 820-46(5), this section also applies to the entity mentioned in that subsection in relation to an income year if:

the entity has entered into a cross staple arrangement with one or more other entities; and

one or more of those other entities has made a choice under subsection 820-46(4) in relation to that income year (including a choice that is taken to be made under subsection 820-46(5)).

820-49 Meaning of obligor group etc.

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) an entity (the borrower) has issued a *debt interest to another entity (the creditor); and

(b) the creditor has recourse for payment of the debt to which the debt interest relates to assets of one or more other entities (each of which is an obligor entity).

(2) Each obligor entity and the borrower is a member of an obligor group in relation to the *debt interest.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), disregard assets that are *membership interests in the borrower.

820-50 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

(1) The amount (the total disallowed amount) disallowed under subsection 820-46(1) of the *debt deductions of an entity for an income year is:

(a) if the entity has not made a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) in relation to the income year (fixed ratio test applies)—the amount by which the entity’s *net debt deductions for the income year exceed the entity’s *fixed ratio earnings limit for the income year (see section 820-51); or

if the entity has made a choice under subsection 820-46(3) in relation to the income year (group ratio test applies)—the amount by which the entity’s net debt deductions for the income year exceed the entity’s group ratio earnings limit for the income year (see section 820-51); or

if the entity has made a choice under subsection 820-46(4) in relation to the income year (third party debt test applies)—the amount by which the entity’s debt deductions for the income year exceed the entity’s third party earnings limit for the income year (see section 820-427A).

Note 1: The disallowed amount also does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset. See section 110-54.

Note 2: The entity’s net debt deductions for the income year can be a negative amount.

The amount by which a particular debt deduction is disallowed as a result of subsection (1) is worked out as follows:

first, divide the total disallowed amount by the *debt deductions of the entity for the income year;

next, multiply the amount of the particular debt deduction by the result of paragraph (a).

(3) An entity’s net debt deductions for an income year is worked out as follows:

first, work out the sum of the entity’s *debt deductions (disregarding this Division other than Subdivision 820-EAA) for the income year;

next, work out the sum of each amount included in the entity’s assessable income for that year that is:

interest, an amount in the nature of interest, or any other amount that is economically equivalent to interest; or

any amount directly incurred by another entity in obtaining or maintaining the financial benefits received, or to be received, by the other entity under a *scheme giving rise to a *debt interest; or

any other expense that is incurred by another entity and that is specified in the regulations made for the purposes of this subparagraph;

next, subtract the result of paragraph (b) from the result of paragraph (a).

(4) To avoid doubt, an entity’s net debt deductions for an income year can be a negative amount.

820-51 Meaning of fixed ratio earnings limit and group ratio earnings limit

(1) An entity’s fixed ratio earnings limit for an income year is 30% of its *tax EBITDA for the income year.

(2) An entity’s group ratio earnings limit for an income year is its *group ratio for the income year multiplied by its *tax EBITDA for the income year.

820-52 Meaning of tax EBITDA

(1) An entity’s tax EBITDA for an income year is worked out as follows:

first, work out the entity’s taxable income or *tax loss for the income year (disregarding the operation of this Division (other than Subdivision 820-EAA) and treating a tax loss as a negative amount);

next, add the entity’s net debt deductions for the income year;

next, add the sum of the entity’s deductions (if any) from its assessable income for the income year that are any of the following:

*general deductions that relate to forestry establishment and preparation costs unless those costs relate to the clearing of native forests;

deductions under Divisions 40 and 43 (other than deductions for the entire amount of an expense incurred by the entity);

deductions under section 70-120;

next, if the entity is an entity to which subsection 820-60(1) applies—add the excess tax EBITDA amount (if any) worked out under that section for the income year;

next, make adjustments to the result of paragraph (c) or (ca), as the case requires, in accordance with regulations (if any) made for the purposes of this paragraph.

If the result of paragraph (d) is less than zero, treat it as being zero.

Tax losses from earlier income years

Note: The entity’s net debt deductions for the income year can be a negative amount.

In working out the taxable income or *tax loss of a corporate tax entity for an income year for the purposes of subsection (1), assume that:

the entity chooses to deduct, under subsection 36-17(2) or (3), all of the entity’s tax losses for *loss years occurring before the income year; and

(b) subsection 36-17(5) does not apply to that choice.

Franked distributions

For the purposes of this section, disregard Division 207, to the extent that Division results in an amount of, or a *share of, a franking credit being included in the entity’s assessable income for the income year.

Dividends etc.

(3) In working out the taxable income or *tax loss of an entity for the purposes of subsection (1), disregard any *dividend or *non-share dividend paid to the entity by an *associate entity and included in the entity’s assessable income under section 44 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Trusts other than AMITs

If the entity is a trust other than an *AMIT:

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s taxable income as being a reference to the *net income of the entity; and

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s net debt deductions as being a reference to the entity’s net debt deductions taken into account in working out that net income; and

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s deductions as being a reference to the entity’s deductions taken into account in working out that net income; and

treat the references in subsection (1) to the entity’s assessable income as being a reference to the entity’s assessable income taken into account in working out that net income.

(5) To avoid doubt, for the purposes of references in subsection (4) to net income, do not make the assumption in subsection 102UX(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Beneficiaries of trusts other than AMITs

In working out the taxable income or *tax loss of an entity for the purposes of subsection (1), if the entity is a beneficiary of a trust other than an *AMIT, and is an associate entity of the trust:

disregard the operation of the following provisions in relation to the trust:

Subdivision 115-C;

(ii) Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

disregard distributions from the trust to the entity.

Attribution managed investment trusts

If the entity is an *AMIT:

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s taxable income as being a reference to the *net income of the entity; and

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s net debt deductions as being a reference to the entity’s net debt deductions taken into account in working out that net income; and

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s deductions as being a reference to the entity’s deductions taken into account in working out that net income; and

treat the references in subsection (1) to the entity’s assessable income as being a reference to the entity’s assessable income taken into account in working out that net income.

Members of AMITs

In working out the taxable income or *tax loss of an entity for the purposes of subsection (1), if the entity is a member of an *AMIT, and is an associate entity of the AMIT:

disregard the operation of Division 276 in relation to the AMIT; and

disregard distributions from the AMIT to the entity.

Partnerships

If the entity is a partnership:

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s taxable income as being a reference to the *net income of the entity; and

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s net debt deductions as being a reference to the entity’s net debt deductions taken into account in working out that net income.

treat the reference in subsection (1) to the entity’s deductions as being a reference to the entity’s deductions taken into account in working out that net income; and

treat the references in subsection (1) to the entity’s assessable income as being a reference to the entity’s assessable income taken into account in working out that net income.

Partners in partnerships

(8) In working out the taxable income or *tax loss of an entity for the purposes of subsection (1), if the entity is a partner in a partnership, and is an *associate entity of the partnership, disregard the operation of Division 5 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Associate entity test—TC control interest of 10% or more

(9) For the purposes of subsections (3), (6), (6B) and (8), in determining whether an entity is an associate entity of another entity:

disregard the requirement in subsections 820-905(1) and (2A) that the entity is an associate of the other entity, unless only paragraph 820-905(1)(b) applies; and

treat the references in paragraphs 820-905(1)(a) and 820-905(2A)(a) to “an associate interest of 50% or more” as instead being a reference to “a TC control interest of 10% or more”; and

treat subsection 820-860(3) as applying for the purposes of determining whether the entity is an associate entity of the other entity (as a result of paragraph (a) of this subsection); and

treat the purposes mentioned in subparagraphs 820-870(1)(b)(i) and (ii) as including the purposes of determining whether the entity is an associate entity of the other entity (as a result of paragraph (a) of this subsection).

Notional deductions of R&D entities

In working out the taxable income or *tax loss of an entity for the purposes of subsection (1), if the entity is an *R&D entity that is entitled to a notional deduction for an income year under Division 355 in relation to *R&D activities of the R&D entity, subtract an amount equivalent to the amount of the notional deduction.

820-53 Meaning of group ratio, GR group, GR group parent and GR group member

(1) If an entity is a *GR group member for a period of a *GR group for the period, the entity’s group ratio for the income year corresponding to the period is worked out as follows:

first, work out the GR group net third party interest expense, for that period, of the GR group;

next, work out the GR group EBITDA for that period of the GR group;

next, divide the result of paragraph (a) by the result of paragraph (b).

If the result of paragraph (b) is zero, the entity’s group ratio for the income year is zero.

Note: The entity must keep records in accordance with section 820-985 if the entity works out a group ratio under this section.

(2) A GR group, for a period, is:

if *audited consolidated financial statements for the period have been prepared for a worldwide parent entity (as described in subsection 820-935(6))—the group comprised of all of the following:

the worldwide parent entity;

each other entity that is fully consolidated on a line-by-line basis in those audited consolidated financial statements; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply, and global financial statements have been prepared for the period for a global parent entity—the group comprised of all of the following:

the global parent entity;

each other entity that is fully consolidated on a line-by-line basis in those global financial statements.

If paragraph (2)(a) applies:

(a) the GR group parent for the period of the *GR group is the worldwide parent entity mentioned in that paragraph; and

(b) each of the entities mentioned in that paragraph is a GR group member for the period of the *GR group.

If paragraph (2)(b) applies:

(a) the GR group parent for the period of the *GR group is the *global parent entity mentioned in that paragraph; and

(b) each of the entities mentioned in that paragraph is a GR group member for the period of the *GR group.

820-54 Meaning of GR group net third party interest expense, financial statement net third party interest expense and adjusted net third party interest expense

(1) The GR group net third party interest expense, for a period, of a *GR group for the period, is the amount that would be the group’s *financial statement net third party interest expense for the period, if:

where paragraph 820-53(2)(a) applies—the *audited consolidated financial statements for the period for the GR group parent for the period of the group were prepared on the basis that the following were treated as interest:

an amount in the nature of interest;

any other amount that is economically equivalent to interest; or

where paragraph 820-53(2)(b) applies—the global financial statements for the period for the GR group parent for the period of the group were prepared on the basis that the following were treated as interest:

an amount in the nature of interest;

any other amount that is economically equivalent to interest.

(2) The financial statement net third party interest expense, for a period, of a *GR group for the period, is:

the amount of the GR group’s net third party interest expense for the period, as disclosed in the following statements:

if paragraph 820-53(2)(a) applies—the *audited consolidated financial statements for the GR group parent for the period for the GR group;

if paragraph 820-53(2)(b) applies—the global financial statements for the GR group parent for the period for the GR group;

reduced by the amount of each payment (if any) covered by subsection (3), to the extent that it was a factor in working out that net third party interest expense; or

if those statements do not disclose that net third party interest expense—the amount worked out as follows:

first, identify the amount of the group’s third party interest expenses for the period disclosed in those statements;

next, reduce the result of subparagraph (i) by the amount of each payment (if any) covered by subsection (3), to the extent that it was a factor in working out those third party interest expenses;

next, reduce the result of subparagraph (ii) by the amount of the group’s third party interest income for the period disclosed in those statements;

next, increase the result of subparagraph (iii) by the amount of each payment (if any) covered by subsection (3), to the extent that it was a factor in working out that third party interest income.

For the purposes of subsection (2), this subsection covers a payment if:

the payment is made by an entity to an associate entity of the entity; and

either:

(i) the entity is a *GR group member for the period of the *GR group and the associate entity is not such a GR group member; or

the entity is not a GR group member for the period of the GR group and the associate entity is such a GR group member.

(4) The adjusted net third party interest expense, for a period, of an entity or a *GR group is:

for an entity—the amount that would be the entity’s net interest expense for the period if the following payments were disregarded:

a payment that is made by the entity to an associate entity of the entity;

a payment that is made by an associate entity of the entity to the entity; or

for a GR group—the amount that would be the GR group’s net interest expense for the period if the following payments were disregarded:

a payment that is made by a GR group member of the GR group to an associate entity of any GR group member of the GR group;

a payment that is made by an associate entity of a GR group member of the GR group to any GR group member of the GR group.

(5) For the purposes of subsections (3) and (4), in determining whether an entity is an associate entity of another entity:

disregard the requirement in subsections 820-905(1) and (2A) that the entity is an associate of the other entity, unless only paragraph 820-905(1)(b) applies; and

treat the references in paragraphs 820-905(1)(a) and 820-905(2A)(a) to “an associate interest of 50% or more” as instead being a reference to “a TC control interest of 20% or more”; and

treat subsection 820-860(3) as applying for the purposes of determining whether the entity is an associate entity of the other entity (as a result of paragraph (a) of this subsection); and

treat the purposes mentioned in subparagraphs 820-870(1)(b)(i) and (ii) as including the purposes of determining whether the entity is an associate entity of the other entity (as a result of paragraph (a) of this subsection).

820-55 Meaning of entity EBITDA and GR group EBITDA

(1) The entity EBITDA of an entity, for a period, is the sum of the following for the entity for the period:

the entity’s net profit (disregarding tax expenses);

the entity’s adjusted net third party interest expense;

the entity’s depreciation and amortisation expenses.

(2) The GR group EBITDA, for a period, of a *GR group for the period, is the sum of the following:

the GR group’s net profit (disregarding tax expenses);

the GR group’s adjusted net third party interest expense;

the GR group’s depreciation and amortisation expenses;

as disclosed in:

if paragraph 820-53(2)(a) applies—the *audited consolidated financial statements for the GR group parent for the period for the GR group; or

if paragraph 820-53(2)(b) applies—the global financial statements for the GR group parent for the period for the GR group.

For the purposes of subsection (2), in working out the GR group’s GR group EBITDA for the period, if a GR group member for the period of the GR group has an entity EBITDA for the period of less than zero, disregard that entity EBITDA.

To avoid doubt, for the purposes of this section, an entity’s, or a GR group’s, net profit (disregarding tax expenses) can be a negative amount.

820-56 Special deduction for previously FRT disallowed amounts—fixed ratio test

An entity can deduct the amount worked out under subsection (2) from its assessable income for the income year if:

(a) the entity has not made a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) in relation to the income year (fixed ratio test applies); and

the entity’s fixed ratio earnings limit for the income year exceeds the sum of the entity’s net debt deductions for the income year.

Note: The entity’s net debt deductions for the income year can be a negative amount.

Work out the amount of the deduction as follows:

first, work out the amount of the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(b);

next, apply against that excess each of the entity’s *FRT disallowed amounts for the previous 15 income years (to the extent that they have not already been applied under this paragraph in respect of any of those previous income years).

The amount of the deduction is the total amount applied under paragraph (b).

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b):

apply *FRT disallowed amounts in sequence, where a FRT disallowed amount for an earlier income year is applied before a FRT disallowed amount from a later income year; and

apply FRT disallowed amounts up to, but not beyond, the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

Note: As a result of paragraph (3)(b), part of a FRT disallowed amount may be applied against the excess mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

820-57 Meaning of FRT disallowed amount

An entity has a fixed ratio test disallowed amount (or FRT disallowed amount) for an income year equal to:

if *debt deductions of the entity for the income year are disallowed under subsection 820-46(1) and the amount disallowed is worked out in accordance with paragraph 820-50(1)(a) (fixed ratio test applies)—the amount disallowed; or

otherwise—zero.

820-58 FRT disallowed amount is treated as zero where subsequent choice means fixed ratio test does not apply

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) an entity has not made a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) in relation to an income year; and

the entity makes a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) in relation to a subsequent income year.

Despite section 820-57, for the purpose of applying section 820-56 in respect of that subsequent income year and later income years, treat the entity as having a *FRT disallowed amount of zero for every income year before that subsequent income year.

820-59 When FRT disallowed amount is treated as zero for companies and trusts

This section applies if an entity is a company or a trust.

(2) This section applies for the purposes of applying a *FRT disallowed amount of the entity for an income year (the disallowance year) under paragraph 820-56(2)(b), in order to work out the amount of a deduction from its assessable income for another income year (the deduction year) under subsection 820-56(1).

Despite section 820-57, treat the *FRT disallowed amount for the disallowance year as being zero unless:

if the entity is a company—subsection (4) applies; or

if the entity is a trust—subsection (5) applies.

Rules for companies

This subsection applies if, assuming that:

the *FRT disallowed amount were a *tax loss; and

the disallowance year were the loss year; and

the following provisions were disregarded:

subsection 165-115B(3);

subsection 165-115BA(5);

section 415-35;

Divisions 165, 166 and 167 would not prevent the company from deducting the entire amount of that tax loss in the deduction year.

Rules for trusts

This subsection applies if, assuming that:

(a) the *FRT disallowed amount were a tax loss (within the meaning of Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

the disallowance year were a loss year (within the meaning of that Schedule);

that Schedule would not prevent the entity from deducting the entire amount of that tax loss in the deduction year.

820-60 Excess tax EBITDA amount

Scope

(1) This section applies to an entity (the controlling entity) if:

the controlling entity is, for a period that is all or part of an income year, one of the following entities:

a company that is an Australian entity;

a unit trust that is a *resident trust for CGT purposes;

a managed investment trust;

a partnership that is an Australian entity; and

the controlling entity is a general class investor for all or part of the income year; and

the controlling entity has not made a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) in relation to the income year; and

(d) one or more other entities (each of which is a controlled entity) satisfy the conditions in subsection (2) of this section in relation to the controlling entity for the income year.

(2) An entity (the test entity) satisfies the conditions in this subsection in relation to the controlling entity for an income year if:

the controlling entity has a *TC direct control interest of 50% or more in the test entity at any time during the income year; and

the test entity is, for a period that is all or part of the income year, one of the following entities:

a company that is an Australian entity;

a unit trust that is a *resident trust for CGT purposes;

a managed investment trust;

a partnership that is an Australian entity; and

the test entity is a general class investor for all or part of the income year; and

the test entity has not made a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4) in relation to the income year.

Excess tax EBITDA amount

(3) The controlling entity’s excess tax EBITDA amount for the income year is the amount worked out using the following method statement.

Method statement

Step 1. For each controlled entity, work out the amount (if any) by which the *fixed ratio earnings limit of the controlled entity for the income year exceeds the sum of the following:

the controlled entity’s net debt deductions for the income year (for the purposes of this paragraph, treat a negative amount of net debt deductions as nil);

the total of the controlled entity’s *FRT disallowed amounts for the 15 income years ending immediately before the income year (to the extent those amounts have not been applied under section 820-56).

Step 2. For each controlled entity:

work out the controlling entity’s *TC direct control interest for each day in the income year; and

for each day on which the amount was 50% or greater, add the amounts; and

divide the result of paragraph (b) by the number of days in the income year during which the controlled entity was in existence. Express the result as a percentage.

Step 3. For each controlled entity, multiply the result of step 1 by the percentage worked out under step 2. If the amount worked out under step 1 for a controlled entity is nil, the result for that controlled entity under this step will be nil.

Step 4. Add up the amounts worked out under step 3.

Step 5. Divide the result of step 4 by 0.3. The result of this step is the excess tax EBITDA amount.

Modification of TC direct control interest—companies

(4) For the purposes of this section, in working out whether the controlling entity holds a *TC direct control interest in a company, apply subsection 820-855(2) as if it instead included the modifications of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 set out in the following table.

Modification of TC direct control interest—trusts

(5) For the purposes of this section, in working out whether the controlling entity holds a *TC direct control interest in a trust, apply subsection 820-860(2) as if it also included the modifications of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 set out in the following table.

Modification of TC direct control interest—partnerships

For the purposes of this section, in working out whether the controlling entity holds a *TC direct control interest in a partnership, apply section 820-865 as if:

the reference to “greatest” were a reference to “least”; and

paragraph 820-865(b) were omitted.

Modified meaning of Australian entity

For the purposes of this section, in determining whether an entity is an Australian entity (including for the purposes of determining whether another entity is a foreign entity) at a particular time:

(a) for the purposes of paragraph 336(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, treat a partnership as being an Australian entity if, at that time, a *direct participation interest of 50% or more is held in the partnership by one or more of the following:

an Australian resident;

an Australian trust; and

disregard section 337 of that Act.

Subdivision 820-B — Thin capitalisation rules for outward investing financial entities (non-ADI)

Guide to Subdivision 820-B

820-65 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the thin capitalisation rules that apply to an entity that is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for all of an income year. These rules deal with the following matters:

• how to work out the entity’s maximum allowable debt for an income year;

• how all or a part of the debt deductions claimed by the entity may be disallowed if the maximum allowable debt is exceeded;

• how to apply these rules to a period that is less than an income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-85 Thin capitalisation rule for outward investing financial entities (non-ADI)

820-90 Maximum allowable debt

820-100 Safe harbour debt amount—outward investing financial entity (non-ADI)

820-110 Worldwide gearing debt amount—outward investor that is not also an inward investment vehicle

820-111 Worldwide gearing debt amount—outward investor that is also an inward investment vehicle

820-115 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

820-120 Application to part year periods

Operative provisions

820-85 Thin capitalisation rule for outward investing financial entities (non-ADI)

Thin capitalisation rule

Subsection (1) applies if:

an entity is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) (see subsection (2)) for all of an income year; and

either:

the entity has made a choice under subsection (2C) in relation to the income year; or

otherwise—the entity’s adjusted average debt (see subsection (3)) for the income year exceeds its *maximum allowable debt (see section 820-90) for the income year.

Note: This Subdivision does not apply if the total debt deductions of that entity and all its associate entities for that year are $2 million or less, see section 820-35.

This subsection disallows:

if paragraph (1A)(b)(i) applies—all or part of the entity’s *debt deductions for the income year (to the extent that they are not attributable to an *overseas permanent establishment of the entity); or

if paragraph (1A)(b)(ii) applies—all or a part of each debt deduction of the entity for the income year (to the extent that it is not attributable to an overseas permanent establishment of the entity).

Note 1: To work out the amount to be disallowed, see section 820-115.

Note 2: For the rules that apply to an entity that is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for only a part of an income year, see section 820-120 in conjunction with subsection (2) of this section.

Note 3: A consolidated group or MEC group may be an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) to which this Subdivision applies: see Subdivisions 820-FA and 820-FB.

Outward investing financial entity (non-ADI)

(2) The entity is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year if, and only if, it is an *outward investor (financial) for that period (according to the items of the following table).

Note: To determine whether an entity is an Australian controller of an Australian controlled foreign entity, see Subdivision 820-H.

(2A) However, the entity is not an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year if it is a *general class investor for that year.

(2B) Subsection (2A) does not apply for the purposes of subsection 820-46(2) (definition of general class investor).

(2BA) For the purposes of item 2 of the table in subsection (2) of this section, assume that the other Australian entity is a *financial entity for all of the income year.

An entity that is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or part of an income year may make a choice under this subsection to apply the third party debt test in relation to that income year.

Section 820-47 applies in relation to a choice under subsection (2C) in the same way that it applies in relation to a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4).

Adjusted average debt

(3) The entity’s adjusted average debt for an income year is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection. In applying the method statement, disregard any amount that is attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for that year (the relevant year), of all the *debt capital of the entity that gives rise to *debt deductions of the entity for that or any other income year.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for the relevant year, of all the *associate entity debt of the entity.

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 2 by the average value, for the relevant year, of all the *controlled foreign entity debt of the entity.

Step 4. If the entity is a *financial entity throughout the relevant year, add to the result of step 3 the average value, for the relevant year, of the entity’s *borrowed securities amount.

Step 5. Add to the result of step 4 the average value, for the relevant year, of the *cost-free debt capital of the entity. The result of this step is the adjusted average debt.

Note: To calculate an average value for the purposes of this Division, see Subdivision 820-G.

The entity’s adjusted average debt does not exceed its *maximum allowable debt if the adjusted average debt is nil or a negative amount.

820-90 Maximum allowable debt

Entity is not also an inward investment vehicle (financial)

(1) The entity’s maximum allowable debt for an income year is the greatest of the following amounts if the entity is not also an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for all or any part of that year:

the *safe harbour debt amount;

unless the entity has *worldwide equity of nil or a negative amount—the *worldwide gearing debt amount.

Entity is also an inward investment vehicle (financial)

(2) The entity’s maximum allowable debt for an income year is the greatest of the following amounts if the entity is also an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for all or any part of that year:

the *safe harbour debt amount;

unless subsection (3) applies to the entity—the *worldwide gearing debt amount.

Inward investment vehicles that are not eligible for the worldwide gearing debt amount

This subsection applies to an entity, if:

the entity has *statement worldwide equity, or *statement worldwide assets, of nil or a negative amount; or

*audited consolidated financial statements for the entity for the income year do not exist; or

the result of applying the following formula is greater than 0.5:

where:

average Australian assets of an entity is the average value, for the statement period mentioned in subsection (4), of all the assets of the entity, other than:

any assets attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments; or

any *debt interests held by the entity, to the extent to which any value of the interests is all or a part of the controlled foreign entity debt of the entity; or

any *equity interests or debt interests held by the entity, to the extent to which any value of the interests is all or a part of the controlled foreign entity equity of the entity.

(4) For the purposes of the definition of average Australian assets in subsection (3) the statement period is the period for which the *audited consolidated financial statements for the entity for the income year have been prepared.

For the purposes of the formula in paragraph (3)(c), if:

an amount is included in *statement worldwide assets in respect of an asset; and

the asset was acquired, held or otherwise dealt with by an entity for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) that included ensuring that subsection (3) does not apply to an entity; and

as a result of the acquisition, holding or dealing with of the asset, the amount included in statement worldwide assets exceeds the amount (including nil) that would otherwise be so included;

apply the amount of the excess to reduce statement worldwide assets (or statement worldwide assets as reduced by a previous application of this subsection).

820-100 Safe harbour debt amount—outward investing financial entity (non-ADI)

(1) If the entity is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for the income year, the safe harbour debt amount is the lesser of the following amounts:

the total debt amount (worked out under subsection (2));

the adjusted on-lent amount (worked out under subsection (3)).

However, if the 2 amounts are equal, it is the total debt amount.

Total debt amount

(2) The total debt amount is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection. In applying the method statement, disregard any amount that is attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of all the assets of the entity.

Step 1A. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for that year, of all the *excluded equity interests in the entity.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1A by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity debt of the entity.

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 2 by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity equity of the entity.

Step 4. Reduce the result of step 3 by the average value, for that year, of all the controlled foreign entity debt of the entity.

Step 5. Reduce the result of step 4 by the average value, for that year, of all the *controlled foreign entity equity of the entity.

Step 6. Reduce the result of step 5 by the average value, for that year, of all the *non-debt liabilities of the entity.

Step 7. Reduce the result of step 6 by the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *zero-capital amount. If the result of this step is a negative amount, it is taken to be nil.

Step 8. Multiply the result of step 7 by 15/16.

Step 9. Add to the result of step 8 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *zero-capital amount.

Step 10. Add to the result of step 9 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the total debt amount.

The average values of its relevant excluded equity interests, associate entity debt, associate entity equity, controlled foreign entity debt, controlled foreign entity equity, non-debt liabilities and zero-capital amount are $5 million, $5 million, $5 million, $9 million, $6 million, $5 million and $4 million respectively. Deducting these amounts from the result of step 1 (through applying steps 1A to 7) leaves $121 million. Multiplying $121 million by 15/16 results in $113.4375 million. Adding the average zero-capital amount of $4 million results in $117.4375 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the total debt amount is therefore $117.4375 million.

Adjusted on-lent amount

Example: GLM Limited, a company that is an Australian entity, has an average value of assets (other than assets attributable to its overseas permanent establishments) of $160 million.

(3) The adjusted on-lent amount is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection. In applying the method statement, disregard any amount that is attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of all the assets of the entity.

Step 1A. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for that year, of all the *excluded equity interests in the entity.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1A by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity equity of the entity.

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 2 by the average value, for that year, of all the controlled foreign entity debt of the entity.

Step 4. Reduce the result of step 3 by the average value, for that year, of all the *controlled foreign entity equity of the entity.

Step 5. Reduce the result of step 4 by the average value, for that year, of all the *non-debt liabilities of the entity.

Step 6. Reduce the result of step 5 by the amount (the average on-lent amount) which is the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *on-lent amount (other than *controlled foreign entity debt of the entity). If the result of this step is a negative amount, it is taken to be nil.

Step 7. Multiply the result of step 6 by 3/5.

Step 8. Add to the result of step 7 the average on-lent amount.

Step 9. Reduce the result of step 8 by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity debt of the entity.

Step 10. Add to the result of step 9 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the adjusted on-lent amount.

The average values of its relevant excluded equity interests, associate entity equity, controlled foreign entity debt, controlled foreign entity equity, non-debt liabilities and on-lent amount are $5 million, $5 million, $9 million, $6 million, $5 million and $35 million respectively. Deducting these amounts from the result of step 1 (through applying steps 1A to 6) leaves $95 million. Multiplying $95 million by 3/5 results in $57 million. Adding the average on-lent amount of $35 million results in $92 million. Reducing the result of step 8 by the associate entity debt amount of $5 million equals $87 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the adjusted on-lent amount is therefore $87 million.

Example: GLM Limited, a company that is an Australian entity, has an average value of assets (other than assets attributable to its overseas permanent establishments) of $160 million.

820-110 Worldwide gearing debt amount—outward investor that is not also an inward investment vehicle

Outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) that is not also an inward investment vehicle (financial)

If the entity is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for that year, and not also an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for all or any part of that year, the worldwide gearing debt amount is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Divide the average value of all the entity’s *worldwide debt for the income year by the average value of all the entity’s *worldwide equity for that year.

Step 3. Add 1 to the result of step 1.

Step 4. Divide the result of step 1 by the result of step 3.

Step 5. Multiply the result of step 4 in this method statement by the result of step 7 in the method statement in subsection 820-100(2).

Step 6. Add to the result of step 5 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *zero-capital amount (other than any zero-capital amount that is attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments).

Step 7. Add to the result of step 6 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the worldwide gearing debt amount.

Example: GLM Limited, a company that is an Australian entity, has an average value of worldwide debt of $120 million and an average value of worldwide equity of $40 million. The result of applying step 1 is therefore 3. Dividing 3 by 4 (through applying steps 3 and 4) and multiplying the result by $121 million (which is the result of step 7 of the method statement in subsection 820-100(2)) equals $90.75 million. The average value of zero-capital amount (see step 7 of the method statement in subsection 820-100(2)) is $4 million. Adding that amount to $90.75 million results in $94.75 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the worldwide gearing debt amount is therefore $94.75 million.

820-111 Worldwide gearing debt amount—outward investor that is also an inward investment vehicle

Outward investing financial entity (non-ADI)

If the entity is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for the income year, and is also an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for all or any part of that year, the worldwide gearing debt amount is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Divide the entity’s *statement worldwide debt for the income year by the entity’s *statement worldwide equity for that year.

Step 2. Add 1 to the result of step 1.

Step 3. Divide the result of step 1 by the result of step 2.

Step 4. Multiply the result of step 3 in this method statement by the result of step 7 in the method statement in subsection 820-100(2).

Step 5. Add to the result of step 4 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s zero-capital amount (other than any zero-capital amount that is attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments).

Step 6. Add to the result of step 5 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the worldwide gearing debt amount.

Example: TRR Limited, a company that is an Australian entity, has a worldwide parent entity in the United States of America. TRR Limited also has permanent establishments in Malaysia. TRR Limited has statement worldwide debt of $90 million and statement worldwide equity of $30 million. The result of applying step 1 is therefore 3. Dividing 3 by 4 (through applying steps 2 and 3) and multiplying the result by $100 million (which is the result of step 7 of the method statement in subsection 820-100(2)) equals $75 million. The zero capital amount is $5 million. Adding that amount to $75 million results in $80 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the worldwide gearing debt amount is therefore $80 million.

820-115 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

(1) If subparagraph 820-85(1A)(b)(i) applies, the amount (the total disallowed amount) disallowed under subsection 820-85(1) of the *debt deductions of an entity for an income year is the amount by which those debt deductions (to the extent that they are not attributable to an *overseas permanent establishment of the entity) exceed the entity’s *third party earnings limit for the income year (see section 820-427A).

Note: The disallowed amount also does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset. See section 110-54.

The amount by which a particular debt deduction is disallowed as a result of subsection (1) is worked out as follows:

first, divide the total disallowed amount by the *debt deductions of the entity for the income year;

next, multiply the amount of the particular debt deduction by the result of paragraph (a).

If subparagraph 820-85(1A)(b)(ii) applies, the amount of a debt deduction of an entity for an income year disallowed under subsection 820-85(1) is worked out using the following formula:

where:

average debt means the sum of:

the average value, for the income year, of the entity’s *debt capital that is covered by step 1 of the method statement in subsection 820-85(3); and

the average value, for that year, of the entity’s cost-free debt capital that is covered by step 5 of that method statement;

(disregarding any amount that is attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments in working out the average values).

debt deduction means each *debt deduction covered by subsection 820-85(1).

excess debt means the amount by which the entity’s *adjusted average debt for that year (see subsection 820-85(3)) exceeds its *maximum allowable debt for that year.

Note: The disallowed amount also does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset. See section 110-54.

820-120 Application to part year periods

This subsection disallows all or a part of each debt deduction of an entity for an income year that is an amount incurred by the entity during a period that is a part of that year (to the extent that it is not attributable to an *overseas permanent establishment of the entity), if:

the entity is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for that period; and

the entity’s adjusted average debt for that period exceeds the entity’s *maximum allowable debt for that period.

Note: To determine whether an entity is an outward investing entity (non-ADI) for that period, see subsection 820-85(2).

(2) The entity’s adjusted average debt for that period is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection. In applying the method statement, disregard any amount that is attributable to the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for that period, of all the *debt capital of the entity that gives rise to *debt deductions of the entity for that or any other income year.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for that period, of all the *associate entity debt of the entity.

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 2 by the average value, for that period, of all the *controlled foreign entity debt of the entity.

Step 4. If the entity is a *financial entity throughout that period, add to the result of step 3 the average value, for that period, of the entity’s *borrowed securities amount.

Step 5. Add to the result of step 4 the average value, for that period, of the *cost-free debt capital of the entity. The result of this step is the adjusted average debt.

The entity’s adjusted average debt does not exceed its *maximum allowable debt if the adjusted average debt is nil or a negative amount.

For the purposes of determining:

the *maximum allowable debt for the period mentioned in subsection (1); and

the amount of each debt deduction to be disallowed;

sections 820-90 to 820-115 apply in relation to that entity and that period with the modifications set out in the following table:

Subdivision 820-C — Thin capitalisation rules for inward investing financial entities (non-ADI)

Guide to Subdivision 820-C

820-180 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the thin capitalisation rules that apply to an entity that is an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for all of an income year (but not an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for all or any part of that year). These rules deal with the following matters:

• how to work out the entity’s maximum allowable debt for an income year;

• how all or a part of the debt deductions claimed by the entity may be disallowed if the maximum allowable debt is exceeded;

• how to apply these rules to a period that is less than an income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-185 Thin capitalisation rule for inward investing financial entities (non-ADI)

820-190 Maximum allowable debt

820-200 Safe harbour debt amount—inward investment vehicle (financial)

820-210 Safe harbour debt amount—inward investor (financial)

820-217 Worldwide gearing debt amount—inward investment vehicle (financial)

820-219 Worldwide gearing debt amount—inward investor (financial)

820-220 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

820-225 Application to part year periods

Operative provisions

820-185 Thin capitalisation rule for inward investing financial entities (non-ADI)

Thin capitalisation rule

Subsection (1) applies if:

an entity is an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) (see subsection (2)) for all of an income year, but is not also an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) (see section 820-85) for all or any part of that year; and

either:

the entity has made a choice under subsection (2C) in relation to the income year; or

otherwise—the entity’s adjusted average debt (see subsection (3)) for the income year exceeds its *maximum allowable debt (see section 820-190) for the income year.

Note: This Subdivision does not apply if the total debt deductions of that entity and all its associate entities for that year are $2 million or less, see section 820-35.

This subsection disallows:

if paragraph (1A)(b)(i) applies—all or part of the entity’s *debt deductions for the income year; or

if paragraph (1A)(b)(ii) applies—all or a part of each debt deduction of the entity for the income year.

Note 1: To work out the amount to be disallowed, see section 820-220.

Note 2: For the rules that apply to an entity that is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) as well as an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI), see Subdivision 820-B.

Note 3: For the rules that apply to an entity that is an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for only a part of an income year, see section 820-225 in conjunction with subsection (2) of this section.

Note 4: To calculate an average value for the purposes of this Division, see Subdivision 820-G.

Note 5: A consolidated group or MEC group may be an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) to which this Subdivision applies: see Subdivisions 820-FA and 820-FB.

Inward investing financial entity (non-ADI)

(2) The entity is an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year if, and only if, it is:

an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for that period (as set out in item 1 of the following table); or

an *inward investor (financial) for that period (as set out in item 2 of that table).

Note 1: To determine whether an entity is a foreign controlled Australian entity, see Subdivision 820-H.

Note 2: An entity covered by item 2 of the table may be required to keep certain records, see Subdivision 820-L.

(2A) However, the entity is not an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year if it is a *general class investor for that year.

(2B) Subsection (2A) does not apply for the purposes of subsection 820-46(2) (definition of general class investor).

An entity that is an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or part of an income year may make a choice under this subsection to apply the third party debt test in relation to that income year.

Section 820-47 applies in relation to a choice under subsection (2C) in the same way that it applies in relation to a choice under subsection 820-46(3) or (4).

Adjusted average debt

(3) The entity’s adjusted average debt for an income year is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for that year (the relevant year), of all the *debt capital of the entity that gives rise to *debt deductions of the entity for that or any other income year.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for the relevant year, of:

if the entity is an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for that year—all the associate entity debt of the entity; or

if the entity is an *inward investor (financial) for that year—all the associate entity debt of the entity, to the extent that it is attributable to the entity’s *Australian permanent establishments.

Step 3. If the entity is a *financial entity throughout the relevant year, add to the result of step 2 the average value, for the relevant year, of the entity’s *borrowed securities amount.

Step 4. Add to the result of step 3 the average value, for the relevant year, of the *cost-free debt capital of the entity. The result of this step is the adjusted average debt.

Note: To calculate an average value for the purposes of this Division, see Subdivision 820-G.

The entity’s adjusted average debt does not exceed its *maximum allowable debt if the adjusted average debt is nil or a negative amount.

820-190 Maximum allowable debt

(1) The entity’s maximum allowable debt for an income year is the greatest of the following amounts:

the *safe harbour debt amount;

unless subsection (2) applies to the entity—the *worldwide gearing debt amount.

Entities that are not eligible for the worldwide gearing debt amount

This subsection applies to an entity, if:

the entity has *statement worldwide equity, or *statement worldwide assets, of nil or a negative amount; or

*audited consolidated financial statements for the entity for the income year do not exist; or

the result of applying the following formula is greater than 0.5:

where:

average Australian assets:

of an Australian entity—is the average value, for the statement period mentioned in subsection (3), of all the assets of the entity, other than:

any *debt interests held by the entity, to the extent to which any value of the interests is all or a part of the controlled foreign entity debt of the entity; or

any *equity interests or debt interests held by the entity, to the extent to which any value of the interests is all or a part of the controlled foreign entity equity of the entity; and

of a foreign entity—is the average value, for the statement period mentioned in subsection (3), of all the assets of the entity that are:

located in Australia; or

attributable to the entity’s *Australian permanent establishments; or

debt interests held by the entity, that were *issued by an Australian entity and are *on issue;

equity interests held by the entity in an Australian entity.

(3) For the purposes of the definition of average Australian assets in subsection (2) the statement period is the period for which the *audited consolidated financial statements for the entity for the income year have been prepared.

For the purposes of the formula in paragraph (2)(c), if:

an amount is included in *statement worldwide assets in respect of an asset; and

the asset was acquired, held or otherwise dealt with by an entity for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) that included ensuring that subsection (2) does not apply to an entity; and

as a result of the acquisition, holding or dealing with of the asset, the amount included in statement worldwide assets exceeds the amount (including nil) that would otherwise be so included;

apply the amount of the excess to reduce statement worldwide assets (or statement worldwide assets as reduced by a previous application of this subsection).

820-200 Safe harbour debt amount—inward investment vehicle (financial)

(1) If the entity is an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for the income year, the safe harbour debt amount is the lesser of the following amounts:

the total debt amount (worked out under subsection (2));

the adjusted on-lent amount (worked out under subsection (3)).

However, if the 2 amounts are equal, it is the total debt amount.

Total debt amount

(2) The total debt amount is the result of the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of all the assets of the entity.

Step 1A. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for that year, of all the *excluded equity interests in the entity.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1A by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity debt of the entity.

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 2 by the average value, for that year, of all the associate entity equity of the entity.

Step 4. Reduce the result of step 3 by the average value, for that year, of all the *non-debt liabilities of the entity.

Step 5. Reduce the result of step 4 by the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *zero-capital amount. If the result of this step is a negative amount, it is taken to be nil.

Step 6. Multiply the result of step 5 by 15/16.

Step 7. Add to the result of step 6 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *zero-capital amount.

Step 8. Add to the result of step 7 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the total debt amount.

The average values of its excluded equity interests, associate entity debt, associate entity equity, its non-debt liabilities and its zero-capital amount are $5 million, $5 million, $3 million, $2 million and $5 million respectively. Deducting these amounts from the result of step 1 (through applying steps 1A to 5) leaves $100 million. Multiplying $100 million by 15/16 results in $93.75 million. Adding the zero-capital amount of $5 million to $93.75 million results in $98.75 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the total debt amount is therefore $98.75 million.

Adjusted on-lent amount

Example: KJW Finance Pty Ltd, a company that is an Australian entity, has an average value of assets of $120 million.

(3) The adjusted on-lent amount is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of all the assets of the entity.

Step 1A. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for that year, of all the *excluded equity interests in the entity.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1A by the average value, for that year, of all the associate entity equity of the entity.

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 2 by the average value, for that year, of all the *non-debt liabilities of the entity.

Step 4. Reduce the result of step 3 by the amount (the average on-lent amount) which is the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *on-lent amount. If the result of this step is a negative amount, it is taken to be nil.

Step 5. Multiply the result of step 4 by 3/5.

Step 6. Add to the result of step 5 the average on-lent amount.

Step 7. Reduce the result of step 6 by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity debt of the entity.

Step 8. Add to the result of step 7 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the adjusted on-lent amount.

The average values of its excluded equity interests, associate entity equity, non-debt liabilities and on-lent amount are $5 million, $3 million, $2 million and $35 million respectively. Deducting these amounts from the result of step 1 (through applying steps 1A to 4) leaves $75 million. Multiplying $75 million by 3/5 results in $45 million. Adding the average on-lent amount of $35 million results in $80 million. Reducing $80 million by the associate entity debt amount of $5 million results in $75 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the adjusted on-lent amount is therefore $75 million.

Example: KJW Finance Pty Ltd, a company that is an Australian entity, has an average value of assets of $120 million.

820-210 Safe harbour debt amount—inward investor (financial)

(1) If the entity is an *inward investor (financial) for that year, the safe harbour debt amount is the lesser of the following amounts:

the total debt amount (worked out under subsection (2));

the adjusted on-lent amount (worked out under subsection (3)).

However, if the 2 amounts are equal, it is the total debt amount.

Total debt amount

(2) The total debt amount is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of all of the following assets of the entity (the Australian investments):

assets that are attributable to the entity’s *Australian permanent establishments;

other assets that are held for the purposes of producing the entity’s assessable income.

Step 1A. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for that year, of all the *excluded equity interests in the entity.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1A by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity debt of the entity that has arisen because of the Australian investments.

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 2 by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity equity of the entity that has arisen because of the Australian investments.

Step 4. Reduce the result of step 3 by the average value, for that year, of all the *non-debt liabilities of the entity that have arisen because of the Australian investments.

Step 5. Reduce the result of step 4 by the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *zero-capital amount that has arisen because of the Australian investments. If the result of this step is a negative amount, it is taken to be nil.

Step 6. Multiply the result of step 5 by 15/16.

Step 7. Add to the result of step 6 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *zero-capital amount that has arisen because of the Australian investments.

Step 8. Add to the result of step 7 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the total debt amount.

The average value of its relevant excluded equity interests, associate entity debt, associate entity equity, non-debt liabilities and zero-capital amount are $5 million, $5 million, $2 million, $3 million and $5 million respectively. Deducting those amounts from the result of step 1 (through applying steps 1A to 5) leaves $100 million. Multiplying $100 million by 15/16 results in $93.75 million. Adding the average zero-capital amount of $5 million results in $98.75 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the total debt amount is therefore $98.75 million.

Adjusted on-lent amount

Example: FXS Financial SA is a company that is not an Australian entity. The average value of its Australian investments is $120 million.

(3) The adjusted on-lent amount is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of all of the following assets of the entity (the Australian investments):

assets that are attributable to the entity’s *Australian permanent establishments;

other assets that are held for the purposes of producing the entity’s assessable income.

Step 1A. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for that year, of all the *excluded equity interests in the entity.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1A by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity equity of the entity that has arisen because of the Australian investments.

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 2 by the average value, for that year, of all the *non-debt liabilities of the entity that has arisen because of the Australian investments.

Step 4. Reduce the result of step 3 by the amount (the average on-lent amount) which is the average value, for that year, of the *on-lent amount of the entity (to the extent that it is the value of all or a part of the Australian investments). If the result of this step is a negative amount, it is taken to be nil.

Step 5. Multiply the result of step 4 by 3/5.

Step 6. Add to the result of step 5 the average on-lent amount.

Step 7. Reduce the result of step 6 by the average value, for that year, of all the *associate entity debt of the entity that has arisen because of the Australian investments. If the result of this step is a negative amount, it is taken to be nil.

Step 8. Add to the result of step 7 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the adjusted on-lent amount.

The average value of its relevant excluded equity interests, associate entity equity, non-debt liabilities and on-lent amount are $5 million, $2 million, $3 million and $35 million respectively. Deducting those amounts from the result of step 1 (through applying steps 1A to 4) leaves $75 million. Multiplying $75 million by 3/5 results in $45 million. Adding the average on-lent amount of $35 million results in $80 million. Reducing the result of step 6 by the associate entity debt amount of $5 million results in $75 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the adjusted on-lent amount is therefore $75 million.

Example: FXS Financial SA is a company that is not an Australian entity. The average value of its Australian investments is $120 million.

820-217 Worldwide gearing debt amount—inward investment vehicle (financial)

If the entity is an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for the income year, and is not also an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for all or any part of that year, the worldwide gearing debt amount is the result of applying the method statement in this section.

Method statement

Step 1. Divide the entity’s *statement worldwide debt for the income year by the entity’s *statement worldwide equity for that year.

Step 2. Add 1 to the result of step 1.

Step 3. Divide the result of step 1 by the result of step 2.

Step 4. Multiply the result of step 3 in this method statement by the result of step 5 in the method statement in subsection 820-200(2).

Step 5. Add to the result of step 4 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s zero-capital amount.

Step 6. Add to the result of step 5 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the worldwide gearing debt amount.

Example: RGR Limited, a company that is an Australian entity, has a worldwide parent entity in France. RGR Limited has statement worldwide debt of $90 million and statement worldwide equity of $30 million. The result of applying step 1 is therefore 3. Dividing 3 by 4 (through applying steps 2 and 3) and multiplying the result by $100 million (which is the result of step 5 of the method statement in subsection 820-200(2)) equals $75 million. The zero capital amount is $5 million. Adding that amount to $75 million results in $80 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the worldwide gearing debt amount is therefore $80 million.

820-219 Worldwide gearing debt amount—inward investor (financial)

If the entity is an *inward investor (financial) for the income year, the worldwide gearing debt amount is the result of applying the method statement in this section.

Method statement

Step 1. Divide the entity’s *statement worldwide debt for the income year by the entity’s *statement worldwide equity for that year.

Step 2. Add 1 to the result of step 1.

Step 3. Divide the result of step 1 by the result of step 2.

Step 4. Multiply the result of step 3 in this method statement by the result of step 5 in the method statement in subsection 820-210(2).

Step 5. Add to the result of step 4 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s zero-capital amount that has arisen because of the Australian investments mentioned in step 1 of the method statement in subsection 820-210(2).

Step 6. Add to the result of step 5 the average value, for that year, of the entity’s *associate entity excess amount. The result of this step is the worldwide gearing debt amount.

Example: MSR Limited, a company that is not an Australian entity, has investments in Australia. MSR Limited has statement worldwide debt of $90 million and statement worldwide equity of $30 million. The result of applying step 1 is therefore 3. Dividing 3 by 4 (through applying steps 2 and 3) and multiplying the result by $100 million (which is the result of step 5 of the method statement in subsection 820-210(2)) equals $75 million. The zero-capital amount is $5 million. Adding that amount to $75 million results in $80 million. As the company does not have any associate entity excess amount, the worldwide gearing debt amount is therefore $80 million.

820-220 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

(1) If subparagraph 820-185(1A)(b)(i) applies, the amount (the total disallowed amount) disallowed under subsection 820-185(1) of the *debt deductions of an entity for an income year is the amount by which those debt deductions exceed the entity’s *third party earnings limit for the income year (see section 820-427A).

Note: The disallowed amount also does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset. See section 110-54.

The amount by which a particular debt deduction is disallowed as a result of subsection (1) is worked out as follows:

first, divide the total disallowed amount by the *debt deductions of the entity for the income year;

next, multiply the amount of the particular debt deduction by the result of paragraph (a).

If subparagraph 820-185(1A)(b)(ii) applies, the amount of a debt deduction of an entity for an income year disallowed under subsection 820-185(1) is worked out using the following formula:

where:

average debt means the sum of:

the average value, for the income year, of the entity’s *debt capital that is covered by step 1 of the method statement in subsection 820-185(3); and

the average value, for that year, of the entity’s cost-free debt capital that is covered by step 4 of that method statement.

debt deduction means each *debt deduction of the entity for that year.

excess debt means the amount by which the *adjusted average debt (see subsection 820-185(3)) exceeds the entity’s *maximum allowable debt for that year.

Note: The disallowed amount also does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset. See section 110-54.

820-225 Application to part year periods

This subsection disallows all or a part of each debt deduction of an entity for an income year that is an amount incurred by the entity during a period that is a part of that year, if:

the entity is an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for that period, but is not also an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for all or any part of that period; and

the entity’s adjusted average debt for that period exceeds the entity’s *maximum allowable debt for that period.

Note: To determine whether an entity is an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period, see subsection 820-185(2).

(2) The entity’s adjusted average debt for that period is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for that period, of all the *debt capital of the entity that gives rise to *debt deductions of the entity for that or any other income year.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1 by the average value, for that period, of:

if the entity is an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for that period—all the associate entity debt of the entity; or

if the entity is an *inward investor (financial) for that period—all the associate entity debt of the entity, to the extent that it is attributable to the entity’s *Australian permanent establishments.

Step 3. If the entity is a *financial entity throughout that period, add to the result of step 2 the average value, for that period, of the entity’s *borrowed securities amount.

Step 4. Add to the result of step 3 the average value, for that period, of the *cost-free debt capital of the entity. The result of this step is the adjusted average debt.

Note: To calculate an average value for the purposes of this Division, see Subdivision 820-G.

The entity’s adjusted average debt does not exceed its *maximum allowable debt if the adjusted average debt is nil or a negative amount.

For the purposes of determining:

the *maximum allowable debt for the period mentioned in subsection (1); and

the amount of each debt deduction to be disallowed;

sections 820-190 to 820-220 apply in relation to that entity and that period with the modifications set out in the following table:

Subdivision 820-D — Thin capitalisation rules for outward investing entities (ADI)

Guide to Subdivision 820-D

820-295 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the thin capitalisation rules that apply to an entity that is both an authorised deposit-taking institution (an ADI) and an Australian entity that has certain types of overseas investments. These rules deal with the following matters:

• how to work out the entity’s minimum capital amount for an income year;

• how all or a part of the debt deductions claimed by the entity may be disallowed if the minimum capital amount is not reached;

• how to apply these rules to a period that is less than an income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-300 Thin capitalisation rule for outward investing entities (ADI)

820-305 Minimum capital amount

820-310 Safe harbour capital amount

820-315 Arm’s length capital amount

820-320 Worldwide capital amount

820-325 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

820-330 Application to part year periods

Operative provisions

820-300 Thin capitalisation rule for outward investing entities (ADI)

Thin capitalisation rule

This subsection disallows all or a part of each debt deduction of an entity for an income year (to the extent that it is not attributable to an *overseas permanent establishment of the entity) if, for that year:

the entity is an *outward investing entity (ADI) (see subsection (2)); and

the entity’s adjusted average equity capital (see subsection (3)) is less than the entity’s *minimum capital amount (see section 820-305).

Note 1: This Subdivision does not apply if the total debt deductions of that entity and all its associate entities for that year are $2 million or less, see section 820-35.

Note 2: To work out the amount to be disallowed, see section 820-325.

Note 3: For the rules that apply to an entity that is an outward investing entity (ADI) for only part of an income year, see section 820-330 in conjunction with subsection (2) of this section.

Note 4: A consolidated group or MEC group may be an outward investing entity (ADI) to which this Subdivision applies: see Subdivisions 820-FA and 820-FB.

Outward investing entity (ADI)

(2) The entity is an outward investing entity (ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year if, and only if, throughout that period, the entity is an *ADI to which at least one of the following paragraphs applies:

the entity is an *Australian controller of at least one Australian controlled foreign entity (not necessarily the same Australian controlled foreign entity throughout that period);

the entity is an Australian entity that carries on a business at or through at least one *overseas permanent establishment (not necessarily the same permanent establishment throughout that period);

the entity is:

an Australian entity; and

(ii) an *associate entity of another entity (a related investor) to which subsection (2AA) applies for that period.

Note: To determine whether an entity is an Australian controller of an Australian controlled foreign entity, see Subdivision 820-H.

(2AA) This subsection applies to a related investor for a period if at all times during the period:

it is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI); or

it is an *outward investing entity (ADI); or

both:

it is a general class investor; and

assuming that it were a *financial entity, it would be an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI).

(2A) However, the entity is not an outward investing entity (ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year if it is a *general class investor for that year.

(2B) Subsection (2A) does not apply for the purposes of subsection 820-46(2) (definition of general class investor).

Adjusted average equity capital

(3) The entity’s adjusted average equity capital for an income year is:

the average value, for that year, of all the *ADI equity capital of the entity (other than ADI equity capital attributable to its *overseas permanent establishments); minus

the average value, for that year, of all the controlled foreign entity equity of the entity (other than controlled foreign entity equity attributable to its overseas permanent establishments).

Note: To calculate an average value for the purposes of this Division, see Subdivision 820-G.

For the purposes of paragraph (3)(a), treat treasury shares (within the meaning of *accounting standard AASB 132) in the entity as included in the *ADI equity capital of the entity, to the extent that those shares are part of the entity’s eligible tier 1 capital (within the meaning of the prudential standards).

820-305 Minimum capital amount

The entity’s minimum capital amount for an income year is the least of the following amounts:

the *safe harbour capital amount;

the *arm’s length capital amount;

the *worldwide capital amount.

Note: The entity cannot use the worldwide capital amount if the entity is also a foreign controlled Australian entity throughout that year, see section 820-320.

820-310 Safe harbour capital amount

(1) The safe harbour capital amount is the result of applying the method statement in this section.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of all the entity’s:

*risk-weighted assets; and

intangible assets comprising capitalised software expenses;

that are attributable to none of the following:

the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments;

assets comprised by the controlled foreign entity equity of the entity (other than controlled foreign entity equity attributable to the entity’s overseas permanent establishments);

assets for which *prudential capital deductions must be made by the entity (other than prudential capital deductions attributable to the entity’s overseas permanent establishments).

Step 2. Multiply the result of step 1 by 6%.

Step 3. Add to the result of step 2 the average value, for that year, of all the *tier 1 prudential capital deductions for the entity, to the extent that they are not attributable to:

any of the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments; or

any *Australian controlled foreign entities of which the entity is an *Australian controller; or

any of the entity’s goodwill or intangible assets which relate to the excess mentioned in paragraph 5.3 of *accounting standard AASB 1038, as issued on 17 November 1998, to the extent that the excess is referrable to *VBIF; or

Note: Paragraph 5.3 of that accounting standard applies to any excess of the net market values of an interest in a subsidiary over the net amount of that subsidiary’s assets and liabilities.

any of the entity’s intangible assets comprising capitalised software expenses.

The result of this step is the safe harbour capital amount.

Example: The Southern Cross Bank is an Australian bank that carries on its banking business through its overseas permanent establishments and through foreign entities that it controls. For the income year, its average value of risk-weighted assets and intangible assets comprising capitalised software expenses is $150 million (having discounted those assets that are excluded by step 1) and the average value of its relevant tier 1 prudential capital deductions is $2 million. Multiplying $150 million by 6% equals $9 million, which is the result of step 2. Adding $2 million to $9 million equals $11 million, which is the safe harbour capital amount.

(2) VBIF is the value of business in force at the time of acquisition of the relevant subsidiary (within the meaning of paragraph 5.3 of *accounting standard AASB 1038, as issued on 17 November 1998) of the entity.

*VBIF is taken to be nil at all times unless the value of VBIF at the time of acquisition of the relevant subsidiary was worked out by an actuary according to Australian actuarial practice.

820-315 Arm’s length capital amount

(1) The arm’s length capital amount is a notional amount that, having regard to:

the factual assumptions set out in subsection (2); and

the relevant factors mentioned in subsection (3);

would represent the minimum amount of *equity capital that the entity would reasonably be expected to have in carrying on the Australian business mentioned in subsection (2) throughout the income year if, throughout that year:

the part of the entity carrying on that business had operated as if it were a separate entity; and

that separate entity had been dealing at *arm’s length with:

the other part of the entity; and

all the *Australian controlled foreign entities of which the entity is an *Australian controller.

Note: The entity must keep records in accordance with section 820-980 if the entity works out an amount under this section.

Factual assumptions

Irrespective of what actually happened during that year, the following assumptions must be made in working out that minimum amount:

(a) the entity’s commercial activities in connection with Australia (the Australian business) during that year do not include:

any business carried on by the entity at or through its *overseas permanent establishments; or

the holding of any controlled foreign entity equity;

the entity had carried on the Australian business that it actually carried on during that year;

the nature of the entity’s assets and liabilities (to the extent that they are attributable to the Australian business) had been as they were during that year;

except as mentioned in subsection (1), the entity had carried on the Australian business in the same circumstances as what actually existed during that year.

Relevant factors

On the basis of the factual assumptions set out in subsection (2), the following factors must be taken into account in determining that minimum amount:

the functions performed, the assets used, and the risks assumed, throughout that year, by:

the entity; and

the entity in relation to the Australian business;

the credit rating of the entity throughout that year, including the effect of that credit rating on all of the following:

the entity’s ability to borrow in relation to the Australian business;

the interest rate at which the entity borrowed in relation to that business;

the entity’s gross profit margin in relation to that business;

the capital ratios of the following throughout that year:

the entity;

the entity in relation to the Australian business;

each of the entity’s associate entities that engage in commercial activities similar to the Australian business;

the purposes for which *schemes for *debt capital and for *equity capital had been actually entered into, throughout that year, by:

the entity; and

the entity in relation to the Australian business;

the profit (within the meaning of the accounting standards), and the return on capital, whether during that year or at any other time, of:

the entity; and

the entity in relation to the Australian business;

the commercial practices adopted by independent parties dealing with each other at *arm’s length in the industry in which the entity carries on the Australian business throughout that year (whether in Australia or in comparable markets elsewhere);

the way in which the entity financed its business (other than the Australian business) throughout that year;

the general state of the Australian economy throughout that year;

any other factors which are specified in the regulations made for the purposes of this section.

Commissioner’s power

If the Commissioner considers an amount worked out by the entity under this section does not appropriately take into account the factual assumptions and the relevant factors, the Commissioner may substitute another amount that the Commissioner considers better reflects those assumptions and factors.

820-320 Worldwide capital amount

This section only applies if the entity is not also a foreign controlled Australian entity throughout the income year.

(2) The worldwide capital amount is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of all the *risk-weighted assets of the entity, other than risk-weighted assets attributable to any of the following:

the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments;

assets comprised by the controlled foreign entity equity of the entity;

assets for which *prudential capital deductions must be made by the entity.

Step 3. Multiply the result of step 1 by the entity’s worldwide group capital ratio for that year (see subsection (3)).

Step 4. Add to the result of step 3 the average value, for that year, of all the *tier 1 prudential capital deductions for the entity (to the extent that they are not attributable to any of the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments or to any *Australian controlled foreign entities of which the entity is an *Australian controller). The result of this step is the worldwide capital amount.

Worldwide group capital ratio

Example: Southern Cross Bank has an average value of risk-weighted assets of $150 million (having discounted those risk-weighted assets that are excluded by step 1) and the average value of its relevant tier 1 prudential capital deductions is $2 million. The entity’s worldwide group capital ratio is 0.0875. Multiplying $150 million by 0.0875 equals $13.125 million, which is the result of step 3. Adding that amount to the average value of the relevant tier 1 prudential capital deductions equals $15.125 million, which is the worldwide capital amount.

(3) The entity’s worldwide group capital ratio for the income year is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of the tier 1 capital (within the meaning of the prudential standards) of the consolidated group of which the entity is a member (within the meaning of those standards) in accordance with those standards.

Step 2. Divide the result of step 1 by the average value, for that year, of the *risk-weighted assets of that group in accordance with the *prudential standards. The result is the worldwide group capital ratio.

Example: For the Southern Cross Bank, the average value of the tier 1 capital for the relevant consolidated group is $14 million. Dividing $14 million by the group’s risk weighted assets of $160 million equals 0.0875, which is the worldwide group capital ratio.

820-325 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

The amount of debt deduction disallowed under subsection 820-300(1) is worked out using the following formula:

where:

average debt means the average value, for the income year, of all the *debt capital of the entity that gives rise to *debt deductions of the entity for that or any other income year (other than any debt capital that is attributable to any of the entity’s *overseas permanent establishments).

capital shortfall means the amount by which the *adjusted average equity capital of the entity for that year (see subsection 820-300(3)) is less than the entity’s *minimum capital amount for that year.

debt deduction means each *debt deduction covered by subsection 820-300(1).

Note: The disallowed amount also does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset. See section 110-54.

820-330 Application to part year periods

This subsection disallows all or a part of each debt deduction of an entity for an income year that is an amount incurred by the entity during a period that is a part of that year (to the extent that it is not attributable to an *overseas permanent establishment of the entity) if, for that period:

the entity is an *outward investing entity (ADI); and

the adjusted average equity capital of the entity is less than the entity’s *minimum capital amount.

Note: To determine whether an entity is an outward investing entity (ADI) for that period, see subsection 820-300(2).

(2) The entity’s adjusted average equity capital for that period is:

the average value, for that period, of all the *ADI equity capital of the entity (other than ADI equity capital attributable to any of its *overseas permanent establishments); minus

the average value, for that period, of all the controlled foreign entity equity of the entity (other than controlled foreign entity equity attributable to any of its overseas permanent establishments).

For the purposes of determining:

the entity’s *minimum capital amount for that period; and

the amount of each debt deduction to be disallowed;

sections 820-305 to 820-325 apply in relation to that entity and that period with the modifications set out in the following table:

Subdivision 820-E — Thin capitalisation rules for inward investing entities (ADI)

Guide to Subdivision 820-E

820-390 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision applies to a foreign entity that is an authorised deposit-taking institution (an ADI). These rules deal with the following matters:

• how to work out the entity’s minimum capital amount for an income year;

• how all or a part of the debt deductions claimed by the entity may be disallowed if the minimum capital amount is not reached;

• how to apply these rules to a period that is less than an income year.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-395 Thin capitalisation rule for inward investing entities (ADI)

820-400 Minimum capital amount

820-405 Safe harbour capital amount

820-410 Arm’s length capital amount

820-415 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

820-420 Application to part year periods

Operative provisions

820-395 Thin capitalisation rule for inward investing entities (ADI)

Thin capitalisation rule

This subsection disallows all or a part of each debt deduction of an entity for an income year if, for that year:

the entity is an *inward investing entity (ADI) (see subsection (2)); and

the entity’s average equity capital (see subsection (3)) is less than its *minimum capital amount (see section 820-400);

to the extent that the debt deduction:

is attributable to an *Australian permanent establishment of the entity at or through which it carries on its banking business; and

is not an allowable OB deduction.

Note 1: This Subdivision does not apply if the total debt deductions of that entity and all its associate entities for that year are $2 million or less, see section 820-35.

Note 2: To work out the amount to be disallowed, see section 820-415.

Note 3: For the rules that apply to an entity that is an inward investing entity (ADI) for part of an income year, see section 820-420 in conjunction with subsection (2) of this section.

Note 4: A consolidated group or MEC group may be an inward investing entity (ADI) to which this Subdivision applies: see Subdivision 820-FB.

Inward investing entity (ADI)

(2) The entity is an inward investing entity (ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year if, and only if, throughout that period, the entity is a *foreign bank that carries on its banking business in Australia at or through one or more of its *Australian permanent establishments.

Note: The entity is required to keep certain records, see Subdivision 820-L.

(2A) However, the entity is not an inward investing entity (ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year if it is a *general class investor for that year.

(2B) Subsection (2A) does not apply for the purposes of subsection 820-46(2) (definition of general class investor).

Average equity capital

(3) The entity’s average equity capital for an income year is the sum of the following:

the average value, for that year, of the *ADI equity capital of the entity that:

is attributable to the *Australian permanent establishments at or through which it carries on its banking business in Australia; but

has not been allocated to the *OB activities of the Australian permanent establishments;

the average value, for that year, of the total amounts that:

are made available by the entity to the Australian permanent establishments of the entity as loans to the Australian permanent establishments; and

do not give rise to any *debt deductions of the entity for that or any other income year.

Note: To calculate an average value for the purposes of this Division, see Subdivision 820-G.

820-400 Minimum capital amount

The entity’s minimum capital amount for an income year is the lesser of the following amounts:

the *safe harbour capital amount;

the *arm’s length capital amount.

820-405 Safe harbour capital amount

The entity’s safe harbour capital amount for the income year is the result of applying the method statement in this section.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the income year, of that part of the *risk-weighted assets of the entity that:

is attributable to the *Australian permanent establishments at or through which it carries on its banking business in Australia; but

is not attributable to the *OB activities of the Australian permanent establishments.

Step 2. Multiply the result of step 1 by 6%. The result of this step is the safe harbour capital amount.

Example: The Global Bank is a foreign bank that carries on its banking business in Australia through a permanent establishment. The average value of its relevant risk-weighted assets is $140 million. Multiplying that amount by 6% results in $8.4 million, which is the safe harbour capital amount.

820-410 Arm’s length capital amount

(1) The arm’s length capital amount is a notional amount that, having regard to:

the factual assumptions set out in subsection (2); and

the relevant factors mentioned in subsection (3);

would represent the minimum amount of *equity capital that the entity would reasonably be expected to have in carrying on the Australian business mentioned in subsection (2) throughout the income year if, throughout that year:

the part of the entity carrying on that business had operated as if it were a separate entity; and

that separate entity had been dealing at *arm’s length with the other part of the entity.

Note: The entity must keep records in accordance with section 820-980 if the entity works out an amount under this section.

Factual assumptions

Irrespective of what actually happened during that year, the following assumptions must be made in working out that minimum amount:

(a) the entity’s commercial activities in connection with Australia (the Australian business) during that year consist only of banking business attributable to its *Australian permanent establishments (other than its *OB activities);

the entity had carried on the Australian business that it actually carried on during that year;

the nature of the entity’s assets and liabilities (to the extent that they are attributable to the Australian business) had been as they were during that year;

except as mentioned in subsection (1), the entity had carried on the Australian business in the same circumstances as what actually happened during that year.

Relevant factors

On the basis of the factual assumptions set out in subsection (2), the following factors must be taken into account in determining that minimum amount:

the functions performed, the assets used, and the risks assumed, throughout that year, by:

the entity; and

the entity in relation to the Australian business;

the credit rating of the entity throughout that year, including the effect of that credit rating on all of the following:

the entity’s ability to borrow in relation to the Australian business;

the interest rate at which the entity borrowed in relation to that business;

the entity’s gross profit margin in relation to that business;

the capital ratios of the following throughout that year:

the entity;

the entity in relation to the Australian business;

each of the entity’s associate entities that engage in commercial activities similar to the Australian business;

the purposes for which *schemes for *debt capital and for *equity capital had been actually entered into, throughout that year, by:

the entity; and

the entity in relation to the Australian business;

the profit (within the meaning of the accounting standards or any other accounting standards that would otherwise apply to the entity), and the return on capital, whether during that year or at any other time, of:

the entity; and

the entity in relation to the Australian business;

the commercial practices adopted by independent parties dealing with each other at *arm’s length in the industry in which the entity carries on the Australian business throughout that year (whether in Australia or in comparable markets elsewhere);

the general state of the Australian economy throughout that year;

any other factors which are specified in the regulations made for the purposes of this section.

Commissioner’s power

If the Commissioner considers an amount worked out by the entity under this section does not appropriately take into account the factual assumptions and the relevant factors, the Commissioner may substitute another amount that the Commissioner considers better reflects those assumptions and factors.

820-415 Amount of debt deduction disallowed

The amount of debt deduction disallowed under subsection 820-395(1) is worked out using the following formula:

where:

average debt means the average value, for the income year, of all the *debt capital of the entity that gives rise to *debt deductions of the entity (other than *allowable OB deductions) for that or any other income year.

capital shortfall means the amount by which the entity’s *average equity capital for that year (see subsection 820-395(3)) is less than the entity’s *minimum capital amount for that year.

debt deduction means each *debt deduction of the entity (other than *allowable OB deduction) for the income year.

Note: The disallowed amount also does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset. See section 110-54.

820-420 Application to part year periods

This subsection disallows all or a part of each debt deduction of an entity for an income year that is an amount incurred by the entity during a period that is a part of that year if, for that period:

the entity is an *inward investing entity (ADI); and

the entity’s average equity capital is less than its *minimum capital amount;

to the extent that the debt deduction:

is attributable to an *Australian permanent establishment of the entity at or through which it carries on its banking business; and

is not an allowable OB deduction.

Note: To determine whether an entity is an inward investing entity (ADI) for that period, see subsection 820-395(2).

(2) The entity’s average equity capital for that period is the sum of the following:

the average value, for that period, of the *equity capital of the entity that:

is attributable to its *Australian permanent establishments at or through which it carries on its banking business in Australia; but

has not been allocated to the *OB activities of the Australian permanent establishments;

the average value, for that period, of the total amounts that:

are made available by the entity to the Australian permanent establishments of the entity as loans to the Australian permanent establishments; and

do not give rise to any *debt deductions of the entity for that or any other income year.

For the purposes of determining:

the entity’s *minimum capital amount for that period; and

the amount of each debt deduction to be disallowed;

sections 820-400 to 820-415 apply in relation to that entity and that period with the modifications set out in the following table:

Subdivision 820-EAA — Debt deduction limitation rules for debt deduction creation (all relevant entities)

Guide to Subdivision 820-EAA

820-423 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out debt deduction limitation rules that apply to entities that are dealt with in rules set out in Subdivisions 820-AA, 820-B, 820-C, 820-D or 820-E. These rules deal with:

debt deductions in relation to the acquisition of CGT assets, or legal or equitable obligations, from associate pairs of the acquirer; and

debt deductions in relation to a financial arrangement that is entered into by an entity to fund etc. certain payments or distributions to one or more associate pairs of the entity.

The rules in this Subdivision are applied before the rules set out in Subdivisions 820-AA, 820-B and 820-C. If a debt deduction of an entity is disallowed under this Subdivision, the debt deduction is disregarded for the purpose of applying those other Subdivisions (see section 820-31).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-423A Debt deduction limitation rule for debt deduction creation (all relevant entities)

820-423AA Exceptions for acquisition of certain CGT assets

820-423B Amount of debt deduction disallowed

820-423C This Subdivision does not limit reduction of debt deductions other provisions

820-423D Schemes relating to this Subdivision

820-423E Modified meaning of associate pair

820-423F Modified meaning of Australian entity

Operative provisions

820-423A Debt deduction limitation rule for debt deduction creation (all relevant entities)

Debt deduction limitation rule

This subsection disallows all or part of a debt deduction of an entity for an income year if, for that year:

the entity is any of the following for that year:

a general class investor;

an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI);

an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI); and

(aa) the entity is not a *securitisation vehicle; and

subsection (2) or (5) applies.

Note 1: This Subdivision does not apply if the total debt deductions of that entity and all its associate entities for that year are $2 million or less: see section 820-35.

Note 1A: This Subdivision does not apply to certain special purpose entities: see section 820-39.

Note 2: To work out the amount to be disallowed, see section 820-423B.

Acquisition of CGT asset, or legal or equitable obligation

This subsection applies if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

(a) an entity (the acquirer) *acquires a *CGT asset, or a legal or equitable obligation, either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, from one or more other entities (each of which is a disposer);

(b) one or more of the disposers (each of which is an associate disposer) is an *associate pair of the acquirer;

(c) the entity mentioned in subsection (1) (the relevant entity) is:

the acquirer; or

an associate pair of the acquirer; or

an associate pair of an associate disposer;

the relevant entity’s debt deduction mentioned in subsection (1) is, wholly or partly, in relation to any of the following:

the acquisition mentioned in paragraph (a) of this subsection;

the acquirer’s holding of the CGT asset, or legal or equitable obligation;

the relevant entity’s debt deduction mentioned in subsection (1) is referable to an amount paid or payable, either directly or indirectly, to any of the following:

an associate pair of the relevant entity;

an associate pair of the acquirer;

an associate pair of an associate disposer;

the acquisition mentioned in paragraph (a) of this subsection is not covered by section 820-423AA (which is about exceptions);

(g) the relevant entity has not made a choice under subsection 820-46(4) to use the third party debt test for the income year mentioned in subsection (1) of this section.

To avoid doubt, subsection (2) may apply more than once in relation to the *acquisition of a CGT asset, or a legal or equitable obligation.

For the purposes of subsection (2):

that subsection may apply in relation to an indirect *acquisition by an entity through one or more interposed entities even if an acquisition in the series is covered by section 820-423AA (which is about exceptions); and

in determining whether an acquisition occurs indirectly through one or more interposed entities:

it is sufficient if acquisitions exist between each entity; and

it is not necessary to demonstrate that each acquisition in a series of acquisitions happened before the next acquisition.

Example: Entity A acquires a membership interest in Entity B that is covered by the exception in subsection 820-423AA(1). Entity B later acquires, from Entity C, a CGT asset that is not covered by an exception in that section. There may be an indirect acquisition of the CGT asset by Entity A.

For the purposes of subsections (2), (3) and (3A), disregard paragraph (b) of the definition of “acquire” in subsection 995-1(1).

Financial arrangements involving associate pairs

This subsection applies if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

(a) an entity (the payer) enters into, or has a *financial arrangement with another entity;

the payer uses the financial arrangement to:

fund; or

facilitate the funding of;

one or more payments or distributions, of which one or more is a payment or distribution that, to an extent:

(iii) the payer makes to an entity (an associate recipient) that is an *associate pair of the payer; and

is covered by subsection (5A) (which is about types of payments or distributions);

(c) the entity mentioned in subsection (1) (the relevant entity) is any of the following:

the payer;

an associate pair of the payer;

an associate pair of an associate recipient;

the relevant entity’s debt deduction mentioned in subsection (1) is, wholly or partly, in relation to the financial arrangement mentioned in paragraph (a) of this subsection;

the relevant entity’s debt deduction is referable to an amount paid or payable, either directly or indirectly, to any of the following:

an associate pair of the relevant entity;

an associate pair of the payer;

an associate pair of an associate recipient;

(f) the relevant entity has not made a choice under subsection 820-46(4) to use the third party debt test for the income year mentioned in subsection (1) of this section.

This subsection covers the following:

a dividend, *distribution or non-share distribution;

(b) a distribution by a trustee or partnership;

a return of capital, including a return of capital made by a distribution or payment made by a trustee or partnership;

a payment or distribution in respect of the cancellation or redemption of a membership interest in an entity;

a royalty, or a similar payment or distribution for the use of, or right to use, an asset;

a payment or distribution that is wholly or partly referable to the repayment of principal under a *debt interest if:

the debt interest is issued by the payer; and

the debt interest is a financial arrangement that satisfies paragraphs (5)(a), (b) and (c);

a payment or distribution of a kind similar to a payment or distribution mentioned in the preceding paragraphs;

a payment or distribution prescribed by the regulations.

For the purposes of paragraph (5)(b):

the payments or distributions mentioned in that paragraph may be made:

directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities (see subsection (7)); and

before, at or after the time the payer enters into or has the financial arrangement mentioned in paragraph (5)(a); and

a recipient may be the entity with whom the payer enters into or has the financial arrangement, or another entity.

For the purposes of subparagraph (6)(a)(i), in determining whether a payment or distribution is made indirectly through one or more interposed entities:

it is sufficient if payments exist between each interposed entity; and

it is not necessary to demonstrate that each payment in a series of payments funds the next payment, or is made after the previous payment.

820-423AA Exceptions for acquisition of certain CGT assets

Acquisition of new membership interests in entities

For the purposes of paragraph 820-423A(2)(f), the acquisition of a CGT asset is covered by this section if:

the CGT asset is a *membership interest in:

an Australian entity; or

a foreign entity that is a company; and

the membership interest has not previously been held by any entity.

Acquisition of certain new depreciating assets

For the purposes of paragraph 820-423A(2)(f), the acquisition of a CGT asset is covered by this section if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

the CGT asset is a depreciating asset other than an intangible asset;

(b) an entity (the acquirer) holds the CGT asset immediately after its acquisition;

at the time of the acquisition, it is reasonable to conclude that the acquirer expects to use the CGT asset:

for a taxable purpose; and

within Australia; and

within 12 months;

at the time of the acquisition, the CGT asset has not been installed ready for use, or previously used for a taxable purpose, by any of the following:

the acquirer;

an associate disposer of the acquirer;

an associate pair of the acquirer.

Acquisition of certain debt interests

For the purposes of paragraph 820-423A(2)(f), the acquisition of a CGT asset is covered by this section if all of the following conditions are satisfied:

the CGT asset is a *debt interest;

(b) an entity (the acquirer) holds the debt interest immediately after its acquisition;

the debt interest is issued by an associate pair of the acquirer;

the debt interest has not previously been held by any entity.

820-423B Amount of debt deduction disallowed

Acquisition of CGT asset, or legal or equitable obligation

If the condition in subsection 820-423A(2) is met, the amount of the debt deduction disallowed under subsection 820-423A(1) is the amount of the debt deduction, to the extent that the relevant entity mentioned in subsection 820-423A(2) incurred it in relation to any of the following:

the acquisition mentioned in subparagraph 820-423A(2)(d)(i);

the holding mentioned in subparagraph 820-423A(2)(d)(ii).

Financial arrangements involving associate pairs

If the conditions in subsection 820-423A(5) are met, then under subsection 820-423A(1) the debt deduction is disallowed to the same extent as the extent to which the payer mentioned in paragraph 820-423A(5)(a) uses the financial arrangement in a manner that satisfies paragraph 820-423A(5)(b).

820-423C This Subdivision does not limit reduction of debt deductions under other provisions

Nothing in this Subdivision limits other provisions of this Division in their application to reduce, or further reduce, *debt deductions of an entity.

820-423D Schemes relating to this Subdivision

Subsection (2) applies if the Commissioner is satisfied that:

(a) it is reasonable to conclude that one or more entities (each of which is a participant) entered into or carried out a *scheme for the principal purpose of, or for more than one principal purpose that included the purpose of, achieving any of the following results:

subsection 820-423A(2) does not apply in relation to a debt deduction;

subsection 820-423A(5) does not apply in relation to a debt deduction;

(whether or not the debt deduction is a debt deduction of any of the participants and whether or not any of them carried out the scheme or any part of the scheme); and

the scheme has achieved, or apart from this section would achieve, that purpose.

The Commissioner may determine that this Act has, and is taken always to have had, effect as if:

subsection 820-423A(2) applies in relation to the debt deduction; or

subsection 820-423A(5) applies in relation to the debt deduction.

A determination under subsection (2) has effect accordingly.

This section applies whether or not the scheme has been or is entered into or carried out in Australia or outside Australia, or partly in Australia and partly outside Australia.

A determination under subsection (2) is not a legislative instrument.

(6) An entity who is dissatisfied with a determination under subsection (2) made in relation to the entity may object against the determination in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

820-423E Modified meaning of associate pair

This section applies for the purposes of determining whether, for the purposes of this Subdivision, an entity that is a unit trust is an associate pair of another entity.

Treating certain unit trusts as companies

Subsection (3) applies if any of the following *CGT events are capable of applying to all of the units and interests in the trust:

CGT event E4;

CGT event E10.

(3) For the purposes of determining, under section 318 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, whether:

the trust is an associate of another entity; or

another entity is an associate of the trust;

treat the trust as if it were a company.

Application of sufficient influence test

(4) In determining whether the trust is sufficiently influenced by another entity for the purposes of subsection 318(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, as applied by subsection (3) of this section:

treat the trust as sufficiently influenced by another entity or other entities if the trust is accustomed or under an obligation (whether formal or informal), or might reasonably be expected, to act in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of the other entity or other entities (whether those directions, instructions or wishes are, or might reasonably be expected to be, communicated directly or through interposed companies, partnerships or trusts); and

another entity or other entities are taken to hold a majority voting interest in the trust if either of the following percentages is not less than 50%:

the percentage of the income of the trust represented by the share of the income to which the other entity or other entities are entitled, or that the other entity or other entities are entitled to acquire;

the percentage of the corpus of the trust represented by the share of the corpus to which the other entity or other entities are entitled, or that the other entity or other entities are entitled to acquire; and

disregard the operation that paragraphs 318(6)(b) and (c) of that Act would otherwise have by reason only of subsection (3) of this section.

Subsection (6) applies in determining whether the trust:

(a) is sufficiently influenced by another entity for the purposes of section 318 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

sufficiently influences another entity for the purposes of that section.

If:

there is any breach by any entity of the terms of a *debt interest issued by, or held by, the trust; and

there are reasonable grounds to believe that the breach occurred only to protect the interests of secured creditors in relation to the debt interest;

sufficient influence is not taken to exist in relation to the trust merely because of the breach.

820-423F Modified meaning of Australian entity

For the purposes of this Subdivision, in determining whether an entity is an Australian entity (including for the purposes of determining whether another entity is a foreign entity) at a particular time:

(a) for the purposes of paragraph 336(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, treat a partnership as being an Australian entity if, at that time, a *direct participation interest of 50% or more is held in the partnership by one or more of the following:

an Australian resident;

an Australian trust; and

disregard section 337 of that Act.

Subdivision 820-EAB — Third party debt concepts

Guide to Subdivision 820-EAB

820-427 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out concepts concerning third party debt. These concepts are relevant to entities that choose to apply the third party debt test, that is:

general class investors that make a choice, or that are taken to have made a choice, under subsection 820-46(4); and

outward investing financial entities (non-ADI) that make a choice under subsection 820-85(2C); and

inward investing financial entities (non-ADI) that make a choice under subsection 820-185(2C).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-427A Meaning of third party earnings limit and third party debt conditions

820-427B Modified third party debt conditions for conduit financing

820-427C Conduit financing conditions

820-427D Modified meaning of associate entity

820-427E Modified meaning of Australian entity

Operative provisions

820-427A Meaning of third party earnings limit and third party debt conditions

(1) An entity’s third party earnings limit for an income year is the sum of each *debt deduction of the entity for the income year (disregarding this Division) that is attributable to a *debt interest issued by the entity that satisfies the *third party debt conditions in relation to the income year.

For the purposes of subsection (1), treat a debt deduction of an entity as being attributable to a *debt interest issued by the entity to the extent that:

the debt deduction is directly associated with hedging or managing the interest rate risk in respect of the debt interest; and

the debt deduction is not referable to an amount paid or payable, directly or indirectly, to an associate entity (see section 820-427D) of the entity.

(3) A *debt interest issued by an entity satisfies the third party debt conditions in relation to an income year if the following conditions are satisfied:

the entity issued the debt interest to an entity that is not an associate entity (see section 820-427D) of the entity;

the debt interest is not held at any time in the income year by an entity that is an associate entity of the entity;

disregarding recourse to minor or insignificant assets, the holder of the debt interest has recourse for payment of the debt to which the debt interest relates only to Australian assets that:

are covered by subsection (4); and

are not rights covered by subsection (5) (about credit support rights);

the entity uses all, or substantially all, of the proceeds of issuing the debt interest to fund its commercial activities in connection with Australia that do not include:

any business carried on by the entity at or through its *overseas permanent establishments; and

the holding by the entity of any associate entity debt, controlled foreign entity debt or controlled foreign entity equity;

the entity is an Australian entity (see section 820-427E).

This subsection covers Australian assets that:

are held by the entity; or

are *membership interests in the entity (unless the entity has a legal or equitable interest, whether directly or indirectly, in an asset that is not an Australian asset); or

are held by an Australian entity that is a *member of the obligor group in relation to the *debt interest.

This subsection covers a right under or in relation to a guarantee, security or other form of credit support, other than a right that:

is any of the following:

a right that provides recourse, directly or indirectly, only to one or more Australian assets covered by subsection (4) that are not rights covered by this subsection;

a right that, assuming that the holder of the right exercised the right, would not reasonably be expected to allow, directly or indirectly, the holder or another entity to have recourse for payment of the debt mentioned in paragraph (3)(c) against an associate entity (see section 820-427D) of the entity that issued that debt interest;

a right that relates wholly to the creation or development of a CGT asset that is, or is reasonably expected to be, land situated in Australia (including an interest in land, if the land is situated in Australia);

a right that relates wholly to the creation or development of a CGT asset that is, or is reasonably expected to be, moveable property situated, or to be situated, on land of a kind mentioned in subparagraph (iii), where that moveable property is, or is reasonably expected to be, relevant to the income producing use of the land and situated on the land for the majority of its useful life;

(v) a right that relates wholly to the creation or development of a CGT asset that is, or is reasonably expected to be, offshore renewable energy infrastructure (within the meaning of the Offshore Electricity Infrastructure Act 2021) situated, or to be situated, in a declared area (within the meaning of that Act) for the majority of its useful life;

(vi) a right that relates wholly to the creation or development of a CGT asset that is, or is reasonably expected to be, offshore electricity transmission infrastructure (within the meaning of the Offshore Electricity Infrastructure Act 2021) that is directly related to offshore renewable energy infrastructure covered by subparagraph (v); and

(b) assuming that the holder of the right exercised the right, the right would not reasonably be expected to allow, directly or indirectly, the holder or another entity to have recourse for payment of the debt mentioned in paragraph (3)(c) of this section against a *foreign entity that is an *associate entity of the entity that issued the *debt interest.

For the purposes of subparagraphs (5)(a)(iii), (iv), (v) and (vi), in determining whether a right relates wholly to the creation or development of a CGT asset of a kind mentioned in the relevant subparagraph, disregard the extent (if any) to which the right relates incidentally to another matter.

820-427B Modified third party debt conditions for conduit financing

If a *debt interest satisfies the conditions in subsection 820-427C(1) in relation to an income year, then this section applies in relation to:

(a) that debt interest (the relevant debt interest); and

the debt interest that is the ultimate debt interest mentioned in subsection 820-427C(1) in relation to the relevant debt interest.

Special rules for third party debt conditions—ultimate debt interest and relevant debt interest

In applying section 820-427A in relation to the income year, in relation to the relevant debt interest and the ultimate debt interest:

treat the reference in subparagraph 820-427A(3)(d)(ii) to associate entity debt as being a reference to associate entity debt other than:

a debt interest that satisfies the conditions in subsection 820-427C(1) in relation to the ultimate debt interest; or

a debt interest issued by an entity that is an Australian entity and that has made a choice under subsection 820-46(4) to use the third party debt test for the income year; and

treat references in paragraphs 820-427A(4)(a) and (b) to the entity as including the conduit financer mentioned in paragraph 820-427C(1)(a) and each entity that issues a debt interest that satisfies the conditions in subsection 820-427C(1) in relation to the ultimate debt interest.

Special rules for third party debt conditions—relevant debt interest

In applying subsection 820-427A(3) in relation to the income year, in relation to the relevant debt interest, in addition to applying subsection (2) of this section:

treat the conditions in paragraphs 820-427A(3)(a) and (b) as being satisfied; and

treat subsection 820-427A(3) as also including the condition that the ultimate debt interest satisfies the third party debt conditions (having regard to subsection (2) of this section) in relation to the income year.

820-427C Conduit financing conditions

If, in relation to an income year:

(a) an entity (the conduit financer) issues a *debt interest (the ultimate debt interest) to an entity (the ultimate lender) that is not an *associate entity (see section 820-427D) of the conduit financer; and

(b) an entity (the borrower) that is an associate entity of the conduit financer issues another debt interest (the relevant debt interest) to:

the conduit financer; or

(ii) another entity (the conduit borrower) that is an associate entity of the conduit financer and the borrower; and

the amount loaned under the relevant debt interest:

if subparagraph (b)(i) applies—was financed by the conduit financer only with proceeds from the ultimate debt interest; or

if subparagraph (b)(ii) applies—was financed by the conduit borrower only with proceeds from another debt interest that is also a debt interest that satisfies the conditions in this subsection in relation to the ultimate debt interest because of a previous operation of this subsection; and

the terms of the relevant debt interest, to the extent that those terms relate to costs incurred by the borrower in relation to the relevant debt interest, are the same as the terms of the ultimate debt interest, to the extent that those terms relate to such costs incurred by the conduit financer in relation to the ultimate debt interest; and

the conduit financer, the borrower and each conduit borrower (if any) are *Australian entities (see section 820-427E); and

it is not the case that subparagraph 820-46(1)(b)(i) or (ii) applies (fixed ratio test or group ratio test applies) to the conduit financer, the borrower or any conduit borrowers;

then the relevant debt interest satisfies the conditions in this subsection in relation to the income year.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(d):

disregard the terms of a *debt interest that is:

a relevant debt interest; or

the ultimate debt interest;

to the extent that those terms relate to the amount of the debt to which the debt interest relates; and

disregard the terms (if any) of the ultimate debt interest that have the effect of allowing (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed borrowers) the recovery of reasonable administrative costs that relate directly to the ultimate debt interest; and

disregard the terms (if any) of a relevant debt interest issued to the conduit financer that have the effect of allowing (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed borrowers) the recovery of reasonable administrative costs of the conduit financer that relate directly to the relevant debt interest; and

disregard the terms (if any) of a relevant debt interest, to the extent that those terms have the effect of allowing (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed borrowers) the recovery of costs of the conduit financer that:

are a debt deduction for the income year of the conduit financer; and

are a debt deduction that is treated as being attributable to the ultimate debt interest under subsection 820-427A(2) because it is directly associated with hedging or managing the interest rate risk in respect of the ultimate debt interest; and

disregard the terms (if any) of a relevant debt interest, to the extent that those terms have the effect of allowing (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed borrowers) the recovery of costs of a borrower that:

are a debt deduction for the income year of the borrower; and

are a debt deduction that is treated as being attributable to another debt interest under subsection 820-427A(2) because it is directly associated with hedging or managing the interest rate risk in respect of that other debt interest.

820-427D Modified meaning of associate entity

(1) For the purposes of this Subdivision, in determining whether an entity is an associate entity of another entity:

treat the references in paragraphs 820-905(1)(a) and 820-905(2A)(a) to “an associate interest of 50% or more” as instead being:

for the purposes of paragraph 820-427A(5)(b)—a reference to “a TC control interest of 50% or more”; or

for the purposes of any other provision in this Subdivision—a reference to “a TC control interest of 20% or more”; and

disregard the requirement in subsections 820-905(1) and (2A) that the entity is an associate of the other entity, unless only paragraph 820-905(1)(b) applies; and

treat subsection 820-860(3) as applying for the purposes of determining whether the entity is an associate entity of the other entity (as a result of paragraph (a) of this subsection); and

treat the purposes mentioned in subparagraphs 820-870(1)(b)(i) and (ii) as including the purposes of determining whether the entity is an associate entity of the other entity (as a result of paragraph (a) of this subsection).

For the purposes of this Subdivision:

(a) treat an entity (the first entity) that has entered into a *cross-staple arrangement with another entity as an associate entity of that other entity; and

(b) if that other entity is itself an associate entity of a conduit financer mentioned in section 820-427C (whether because of another operation of this subsection or otherwise)—treat the first entity as an associate entity of the conduit financer.

820-427E Modified meaning of Australian entity

For the purposes of this Subdivision, in determining whether an entity is an Australian entity at a particular time:

(a) for the purposes of paragraph 336(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, treat a partnership as being an Australian entity if, at that time, a *direct participation interest of 50% or more is held in the partnership by one or more of the following:

an Australian resident;

an Australian trust; and

disregard section 337 of that Act.

Subdivision 820-EA — Some financial entities may choose to be treated as ADIs

Table of sections

820-430 When choice can be made, and what effect it has

820-435 Conditions

820-440 Revocation of choice

820-445 How this Subdivision interacts with Subdivision 820-FA

820-430 When choice can be made, and what effect it has

An entity may choose to be treated, for the purposes of this Division (except this Subdivision), as set out in the table. However, the entity can make the choice only if subsection (5) is satisfied.

The choice:

has effect accordingly, except as provided in subsection (4); and

ceases to have effect only as provided in this Subdivision; and

covers each period:

that started on or after a day specified in the choice (or on the day the choice is made if no day is specified); and

that is all or part of an income year.

Subdivision 820-E applies to the entity, in relation to a period for which this section treats it as an *inward investing entity (ADI), as if all the entity’s business were banking business of the entity.

The choice does not have effect for the purposes of determining whether the entity is covered by paragraph 820-910(2)(a) (about working out the associate entity debt of another entity).

Conditions for making the choice

For the income year that is or includes the first period for which the entity would be treated in accordance with the choice, the entity must satisfy:

subsection 820-435(1); or

subsections 820-435(2) and (3).

Also, the entity must not have made a previous choice under this section that has ceased to have effect.

Conditions are retested every 3 years

(6) The choice ceases to have effect, or is taken to have ceased to have effect, as appropriate, at the end of an income year covered by subsection (7) of this section, unless the entity:

satisfies subsection 820-435(1) for that income year; or

satisfies subsections 820-435(2) and (3) for that income year.

This subsection covers every third income year after the one referred to in subsection (5).

820-435 Conditions

An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if the average value, for that income year, of the entity’s *on-lent amount is at least 80% of the average value, for that income year, of all the entity’s assets.

An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if the first period that is all or part of that income year, and for which the entity would be treated in accordance with a choice under section 820-430, consists of one or more periods, each of which is either or both of these:

(a) a period throughout which the entity is a *financial entity because of paragraph (d) of the definition of financial entity in subsection 995-1(1) (which covers licensed (or exempt) dealers in derivatives);

a period throughout which:

the entity is the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

at least one *member of the group is a financial entity because of that paragraph.

An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if it satisfies subsection (2) and the amount worked out using this formula is greater than or equal to 0.8:

where:

on-lent amount means the average value, for that income year, of the entity’s *on-lent amount.

total assets means the average value, for that income year, of all the entity’s assets.

UG on derivatives means the average value, for that income year, of the entity’s assets consisting of unrealised gains on trading derivatives within the meaning of Chapter 7 of the Corporations Act 2001.

UL on derivatives means the lesser of:

(a) the average value, for that income year, of the entity’s liabilities consisting of unrealised losses on trading derivatives within the meaning of Chapter 7 of the Corporations Act 2001; and

the average value, for that income year, of the entity’s assets consisting of unrealised gains on trading derivatives within the meaning of Chapter 7 of that Act.

On-lent amount increased for financial entity whose assets include precious metals

In working out whether an entity satisfies subsection (1) or (3) for an income year, the average value, for that income year, of the entity’s *on-lent amount is increased by the average value, for that income year, of the entity’s assets that consist of *precious metals, but only if the entity satisfies subsection (5) for that income year.

An entity satisfies this subsection for an income year if the first period that is all or part of that income year, and for which the entity would be treated in accordance with a choice under section 820-430, consists of one or more periods, each of which is either or both of these:

a period throughout which the entity is a *financial entity;

a period throughout which:

the entity is the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

at least one *member of the group is a financial entity.

820-440 Revocation of choice

A choice under section 820-430 can be revoked only with the written approval of the Commissioner. The Commissioner may approve a revocation only if satisfied that the entity’s circumstances have changed significantly since the choice was made.

If revoked, the choice does not have effect for a period that starts on or after the day on which the Commissioner’s approval is given, unless the revocation is expressed to take effect on an earlier day. In that case, it does not have effect for a period that starts on or after the earlier day.

820-445 How this Subdivision interacts with Subdivision 820-FA

A choice under section 820-430 does not have effect for so much of a period as happens while the entity is a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group.

Note: If the head company of the group makes a choice under that section, that choice will have effect instead.

Subdivision 820-FA — How the thin capitalisation rules apply to consolidated groups and MEC groups

Guide to Subdivision 820-FA

820-579 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you:

• how to classify the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group (in terms of which Subdivision of this Division to apply to the head company); and

• how to apply this Division to the head company (including how the application is modified).

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-581 How this Division applies to head company for income year in which group comes into existence or ceases to exist

820-583 Classification of head company

820-584 Exempt special purpose entities treated as not being member of group

820-585 Exemption for consolidated group headed by foreign-controlled Australian ADI or its holding company

820-587 Additional application of Subdivision 820-D to MEC group that includes foreign-controlled Australian ADI

820-588 Choice to treat specialist credit card institutions as being financial entities and not ADIs

820-589 How Subdivision 820-D applies to a MEC group

820-590 Treatment of FRT disallowed amounts—joining case

820-591 Effect of transfer of FRT disallowed amount

820-592 Cancelling the transfer of FRT disallowed amount

820-593 FRT disallowed amount cannot be applied for income year ending after the joining time

820-594 Treatment of FRT disallowed amounts—leaving case

Operative provisions

820-581 How this Division applies to head company for income year in which group comes into existence or ceases to exist

If a consolidated group or MEC group:

comes into existence at a time during an income year that is not the start of the income year; or

ceases to exist at a time during an income year that is not the end of the income year;

then, for each of the following periods during that income year:

a period throughout which a company is the *head company of that group; or

a period throughout which that company is the head company of a different consolidated group or MEC group; or

a period throughout which that company is a *member of no consolidated group or MEC group;

this Division (except this section) is to have either:

a single application in relation to the whole of the period; or

2 or more applications, each in relation to a part of that period.

820-583 Classification of head company

General class investor

(1) The *head company of a *consolidated group or of a *MEC group is a general class investor for a period that is all or part of an income year if:

for that period, the head company satisfies the requirement in subsection 820-46(2); and

no *member of the group is a *financial entity or *ADI at any time during that period.

Outward investing financial entity (non-ADI)

(3) The *head company of a *consolidated group or of a *MEC group is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or part of an income year if:

for that period, the head company satisfies the condition in the second column of item 1 or 2 of the table in subsection 820-85(2); and

throughout that period, there is at least one *member of the group that is a *financial entity; and

no *member of the group is an *ADI at any time during that period.

Inward investing financial entity (non-ADI)

(4) The *head company of a *consolidated group or of a *MEC group is an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or part of an income year if, and only if, it is an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for that period (because of subsection (6)).

Inward investment vehicle (financial)

(6) The *head company of a *consolidated group or of a *MEC group is an inward investment vehicle (financial) for a period that is all or part of an income year if:

throughout that period, the head company is a foreign controlled Australian entity; and

throughout that period, there is at least one *member of the group that is a *financial entity; and

no member of the group is an *ADI at any time during that period.

Outward investing entity (ADI)

(7) The *head company of a *consolidated group or of a *MEC group is an outward investing entity (ADI) for a period that is all or part of an income year if, and only if:

apart from Part 3-90 (about consolidation of groups) and this Subdivision, at least one *member of the group would be an *outward investing entity (ADI) for that period; or

these conditions are met:

at least one member of the group would, apart from that Part and this Subdivision, be an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for that period; and

at least one member of the group is an *ADI throughout that period.

820-584 Exempt special purpose entities treated as not being member of group

While an entity meets the conditions in subsection 820-39(3) (about insolvency-remote special purpose entities established to manage economic risk), the entity is treated for the purposes of this Division (except this section) as not being a *member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group of which it is a member.

Note: This section has the effect that the circumstances of the entity are not taken into account in applying this Division to the head company of the group. The entity itself is exempt from this Division because of section 820-39.

820-585 Exemption for consolidated group headed by foreign-controlled Australian ADI or its holding company

This Division does not disallow any of a debt deduction for an income year if:

the debt deduction is of the *head company of a consolidated group and the head company satisfies subsection (2) for that income year; or

the debt deduction is an amount incurred by the head company of a consolidated group during a period that is part of that income year, and the head company satisfies subsection (2) for that period.

The *head company satisfies this subsection for a period that is all or part of an income year if, throughout that period:

the head company is both a foreign controlled Australian company and an *ADI (and would also be an ADI apart from Part 3-90 (about consolidation of groups)); or

the head company:

is a foreign controlled Australian company; and

beneficially owns all the *membership interests in a *member of the group that is both a foreign controlled Australian entity and an *ADI throughout that period; and

would, apart from Part 3-90 (about consolidation of groups), have no other assets and no *debt capital;

unless at least one member of the group would, apart from that Part and this Subdivision, be an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or *outward investing entity (ADI) for all or part of that period.

Subsection (1) does not apply if, at each time in the period mentioned in subsection (2), all the *ADIs that are *members of the group then are *specialist credit card institutions.

820-587 Additional application of Subdivision 820-D to MEC group that includes foreign-controlled Australian ADI

Subdivision 820-D applies to the *head company of a MEC group as if it were an *outward investing entity (ADI) for a period that is all or part of an income year if:

(a) the head company is not an outward investing entity (ADI) for that period; and

throughout that period, at least one *member of the group is both a foreign controlled Australian entity and an *ADI; and

throughout that period, there is at least one eligible tier-1 company of the top company for the group that:

is a member of the group; and

(ii) is not an ADI; and

has no *wholly-owned subsidiary that is an ADI.

820-588 Choice to treat specialist credit card institutions as being financial entities and not ADIs

If the conditions in subsection (2) are met in relation to a consolidated group or MEC group and a period that is all or part of an income year, this Division (except this section) has effect as if:

none of the *members of the group were an *ADI at any time in the period; and

each member of the group that is an ADI (ignoring paragraph (a)) at any time in the period were a financial entity at that time.

Note 1: One result of this Division having effect in that way is that Subdivision 820-D (and related provisions, such as section 820-589) will not apply in relation to the head company, because:

the head company of the group will not be classified under section 820-583 as an outward investing entity (ADI); and

section 820-587 will not apply that Subdivision.

Note 2: Another result of this Division having effect in that way is that Subdivision 820-B or 820-C may apply in relation to the head company, because it may be classified under section 820-583 as either:

an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI); or

an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) and an inward investment vehicle (financial).

The conditions are that:

at all times in the period at least one *member of the consolidated group or MEC group is an *ADI; and

each ADI that is a member of the group at any time in the period is a specialist credit card institution at that time; and

the *head company of the group for the period chooses, before lodging its income tax return for the income year, that this Division should have effect in that way in relation to the group and every period for which the conditions in paragraphs (a) and (b) are met in the income year.

(3) An *ADI is a specialist credit card institution at a time if, at that time, the ADI’s authority under section 9 of the Banking Act 1959 to carry on banking business (as defined in that Act) authorises the ADI to carry on only banking business that:

(a) is participation in a payment system (as defined in the Payment Systems (Regulation) Act 1998) that is a credit card scheme and is designated under section 11 or 11B of that Act; and

is either or both of the following:

(i) credit card acquiring (as defined in regulations made for the purposes of the Banking Act 1959);

credit card issuing (as defined in those regulations).

To avoid doubt, a choice for the purposes of paragraph (2)(c) cannot be revoked.

820-589 How Subdivision 820-D applies to a MEC group

(1) This section has effect for the purposes of working out the *adjusted average equity capital of the *head company of a *MEC group for a period (the test period) that is all or part of an income year if Subdivision 820-D applies to the head company in relation to that period.

Note: Section 820-587 extends the application of Subdivision 820-D.

The *head company’s *ADI equity capital at a particular time during the test period is to be worked out:

(a) taking into account an *equity interest or *debt interest in the head company only if it is held at that time by an entity that is not a member of the group; and

(b) on the basis that an equity interest or debt interest in an *eligible tier-1 company (other than the head company) that is a member of the group at that time is treated as an equity interest or debt interest (as appropriate) in the head company, but only if it is held at that time by an entity that is not a member of the group; and

on the basis of the information that would be contained in a set of consolidated accounts:

prepared, in accordance with the *accounting standard on consolidated accounts, as at that time; and

covering the members of the group as at that time.

820-590 Treatment of FRT disallowed amounts—joining case

This section applies if:

(a) an entity (the joining entity) becomes a *member of a *consolidated group (the joined group) at a time (the joining time) in an income year (the joining year); and

the joining entity had a *FRT disallowed amount for an income year ending before the joining time.

Subject to subsection (4), the *FRT disallowed amount is transferred at the joining time from the joining entity to the *head company of the joined group (even if they are the same entity).

To avoid doubt, the result of the transfer under subsection (2) is that the *head company of the joined group has the *FRT disallowed amount for the income year mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

(4) The *FRT disallowed amount is transferred under subsection (2) only to the extent (if any) that the FRT disallowed amount could have been applied by the joining entity under paragraph 820-56(2)(b) in respect of an income year (the trial year) consisting of the period described in subsection (5) if:

at the joining time, the joining entity had not become a *member of the joined group (but had been a *wholly-owned subsidiary of the *head company if the joining entity is not the head company); and

the amount applied by the joining entity under paragraph 820-56(2)(b) in respect of the trial year were not limited by the joining entity’s excess mentioned in that paragraph in respect of the trial year.

For the purposes of subsection (4), the period is the period:

starting at the latest of the following times:

the time 12 months before the joining time;

the time the joining entity came into existence;

the time the joining entity last ceased to be a *subsidiary member of a consolidated group, if the joining entity had been a member of a consolidated group before the joining time but was not a *member of a consolidated group just before the joining time; and

ending just after the joining time.

When working out, for the purposes of subsection (4), whether the joining entity carried on, throughout the trial year (or a period including the trial year):

the same business as the business it carried on at a particular time; or

a similar business to the business it carried on at that time;

assume that the entity carried on at and just after the joining time the same business that it carried on just before the joining time.

If the *FRT disallowed amount was for an income year all or part of which occurs in the trial year, the transfer of the FRT disallowed amount under subsection (2) is not prevented by the fact that the FRT disallowed amount was for that income year.

(8) If, apart from this subsection, the *head company of the joined group would have 2 or more *FRT disallowed amounts (the transferred FRT disallowed amounts) for a particular income year as a result of the operation of subsection (2):

treat it as having only one FRT disallowed amount for the income year; and

treat that one FRT disallowed amount as being equal to the sum of the transferred FRT disallowed amounts.

820-591 Effect of transfer of FRT disallowed amount

This section applies if an *FRT disallowed amount is transferred under section 820-590 from the joining entity to the *head company of the joined group.

For the purposes of subsection 820-59(4), this Act operates (except so far as the contrary intention appears) for the purposes of income years ending after the joining time as if the head company had the *FRT disallowed amount for the income year in which the joining time occurs.

For the purposes of applying subsection 820-59(4) in relation to the *FRT disallowed amount, treat the disallowance year mentioned in paragraph 820-59(4)(b) as starting at the time of the transfer.

820-592 Cancelling the transfer of FRT disallowed amount

The *head company of the joined group may choose to cancel the transfer of the FRT disallowed amount under section 820-590.

If the *head company of the joined group does so, this Act (except this section) operates for all income years ending after the transfer as if it had not occurred under section 820-590.

The choice cannot be revoked.

820-593 FRT disallowed amount cannot be applied for income year ending after the joining time

To the extent that the *FRT disallowed amount is not transferred under section 820-590 from the joining entity to the *head company of the joined group, the FRT disallowed amount cannot be applied under paragraph 820-56(2)(b) by any entity in respect of an income year ending after the joining time.

820-594 Treatment of FRT disallowed amounts—leaving case

To avoid doubt, if the *head company of a consolidated group has a *FRT disallowed amount and an entity ceases to be a *subsidiary member of the group, the entity is not taken because of section 701-40 (the exit history rule) to have the FRT disallowed amount.

Subdivision 820-FB — Grouping branches of foreign banks and foreign financial entities with a consolidated group, MEC group or single Australian resident company

Guide to Subdivision 820-FB

820-595 What this Subdivision is about

If:

the head company of a consolidated group or MEC group; or

an Australian company that cannot consolidate;

is a member of the same wholly-owned group as a foreign bank or foreign financial entity, the company can choose to treat as part of itself the Australian branches of the foreign bank or foreign financial entity, affecting how the rest of this Division applies.

Table of sections

Choice to group with branches of foreign banks and foreign financial entities

820-597 Choice by head company of consolidated group or MEC group

820-599 Choice by Australian resident company outside consolidatable group and MEC group

Effect of choice

820-601 Application

820-603 General

820-605 Effect on establishment entity if certain debt deductions disallowed

820-607 Effect on test periods under this Division

820-609 Effect on classification of head company or single company

820-610 Choice not to be outward investing entity (ADI) or inward investing entity (ADI)

820-611 Values to be based on what would be in consolidated accounts for group

820-613 How Subdivision 820-D applies

820-615 How Subdivision 820-E applies

Choice to group with branches of foreign banks and foreign financial entities

820-597 Choice by head company of consolidated group or MEC group

(1) This section applies if there is a period (the grouping period) for which all these conditions are met:

the period was all or part of an income year of the *head company of a consolidated group or MEC group;

the consolidated group or MEC group existed throughout the period;

(c) the head company and an entity (the establishment entity) covered by one of the following subparagraphs are both members of the same *wholly-owned group throughout the period:

a foreign bank that carried on its banking business in Australia through at least one *Australian permanent establishment at each time in the period;

a foreign entity that was a *financial entity and had at least one Australian permanent establishment at each time in the period;

there is not a longer period in the income year for which the conditions in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) are met in relation to the head company and the establishment entity.

Note: It does not matter whether the income year ended on the same day for the head company and the establishment entity.

The *head company may choose to have all of the *Australian permanent establishments of the establishment entity treated as part of the head company for the grouping period for the purposes of this Division.

If the conditions in subsection (1) are met in relation to the *head company and more than one other establishment entity, the head company may make a different choice in relation to each of the other establishment entities.

820-599 Choice by Australian resident company outside consolidatable group and MEC group

(1) This section applies if there is a period (also the grouping period) for which all these conditions are met:

(a) the period was all or part of an income year of a company (the single company);

throughout the period the single company:

was an Australian entity; and

was not a prescribed dual resident; and

was not a *member of a consolidatable group; and

was not a member of a consolidated group; and

was not a member of a MEC group;

(c) the single company and an entity (the establishment entity) covered by one of the following subparagraphs are both members of the same *wholly-owned group throughout the period:

a foreign bank that carried on its banking business in Australia through at least one *Australian permanent establishment at each time in the period;

a foreign entity that was a *financial entity and had at least one Australian permanent establishment at each time in the period;

there is not a longer period in the income year for which the conditions in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) are met in relation to the single company and the establishment entity.

Note: It does not matter whether the income year ended on the same day for the single company and the establishment entity.

The single company may choose to have all of the *Australian permanent establishments of the establishment entity treated as part of the single company for the grouping period for the purposes of this Division.

If the conditions in subsection (1) are met in relation to the single company and more than one other establishment entity, the single company may make a different choice in relation to each of the other establishment entities.

Effect of choice

820-601 Application

Sections 820-603 to 820-615 apply if a choice is made under section 820-597 or 820-599.

820-603 General

The choice cannot be revoked in relation to the grouping period. It binds the *head company or the single company, as appropriate, and the establishment entity.

The rest of this section applies:

to each *Australian permanent establishment that:

was an Australian permanent establishment of the establishment entity; and

if the establishment entity was a foreign bank—was an Australian permanent establishment through which the entity carried on banking business in Australia at any time in the grouping period; and

(b) in relation to each time (the test time) that was in the grouping period and was when the Australian permanent establishment:

was an Australian permanent establishment of the establishment entity; and

if the establishment entity was a foreign bank—was an Australian permanent establishment through which the entity carried on banking business in Australia.

In the case of a choice under section 820-597, this Division (except Subdivision 820-FA, this Subdivision and Subdivision 820-L) applies as if, at the test time, the *Australian permanent establishment:

had been part of the *head company; and

(b) had not been part of the establishment entity; and

were a *subsidiary member of the consolidated group or MEC group.

In the case of a choice under section 820-599, this Division (except Subdivision 820-FA, this Subdivision and Subdivision 820-L) applies as if, at the test time:

(a) the *Australian permanent establishment had been part of the single company and had not been part of the establishment entity; and

the single company were a consolidated group of which the single company was the *head company and the Australian permanent establishment was a *subsidiary member.

In either case, without limiting subsection (3) or (4), this Division (except Subdivision 820-FA, this Subdivision and Subdivision 820-L) applies as if:

the *Australian permanent establishment were an entity at that time; and

each asset and liability of the establishment entity at the test time that is attributable to the Australian permanent establishment were an asset or liability of the Australian permanent establishment at that time; and

without limiting paragraph (b) of this subsection, each cost that:

is a debt deduction of the establishment entity incurred at the test time; and

is attributable to the Australian permanent establishment;

were a cost incurred by the Australian permanent establishment at that time;

For the effects of disallowing debt deductions, see section 820-605.

However, the application of this Division because of this section is subject to the modifications set out in sections 820-607 to 820-615.

For the purposes of this Division (as applying because of this Subdivision), this Act (except this Division) applies as if the matters referred to in subsections (3), (4) and (5) of this section were the case.

Note: For example, this means that a head company is treated for the purposes of this Division as if it had debt deductions based on the actual costs incurred by an Australian permanent establishment while it is treated as part of the head company because of this section.

820-605 Effect on establishment entity if certain debt deductions disallowed

If:

apart from this Division, a debt deduction would be a deduction of the establishment entity for an income year; and

this Division (as applying because of this Subdivision) disallows all or part of the deduction (treated as a deduction of the *head company or single company);

this section disallows the deduction of the establishment entity, or that part of it, as appropriate.

• attributable to an Australian permanent establishment covered by the choice under section 820-597 or 820-599; and

• paid or owed to the head company or single company.

The cost is not a debt deduction of the head company or single company for the purposes of this Division as applying because of this Subdivision. This is because subsection 820-603(3) or (4) treats the Australian permanent establishment as being part of the head company or single company, so the cost is treated as being paid or owed by the head company or single company to itself.

Because subsection 820-603(3) or (4) also treats the Australian permanent establishment as not being part of the establishment entity, the cost is not a debt deduction of the establishment entity, so it is not disallowed by this Division as applying to the establishment entity.

• paid or owed to the establishment entity; and

• is attributable to an Australian permanent establishment covered by the choice under section 820-597 or 820-599.

The cost is not a debt deduction of the head company or single company for the purposes of this Division as applying because of this Subdivision. This is because subsection 820-603(3) or (4) treats the Australian permanent establishment as being part of the head company or single company, so the cost is treated as being paid or owed by the head company or single company to itself.

Note 1A: The disallowed amount also does not form part of the cost base of a CGT asset. See section 110-54.

Note 1: This Division does not disallow a debt deduction that the establishment entity incurs during the grouping period and that consists of a cost that is:

Note 2: This Division also does not disallow a debt deduction that the head company or single company incurs during the grouping period and that consists of a cost that is:

820-607 Effect on test periods under this Division

If, apart from this section, this Division (except this Subdivision) would have a single application to the *head company or single company, or to the establishment entity, in relation to a period (the test period) that:

is all or part of an income year of that entity; and

overlaps the grouping period;

this Division (except this section) is to have separate applications to that entity as follows:

a single application in relation to the period of overlap; and

a single application in relation to the part (if any) of the test period that is before the period of overlap; and

a single application in relation to the part (if any) of the test period that is after the period of overlap.

820-609 Effect on classification of head company or single company

(1) The *head company or single company is an outward investing entity (ADI) for a period (the trial period) that is all or part of the grouping period if:

apart from this Subdivision, the head company or single company would be an *outward investing entity (ADI) for the trial period; or

apart from this Subdivision, the head company or single company:

would be an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for the trial period; and

at least one of the *Australian permanent establishments is a permanent establishment through which a foreign bank carries on banking business in Australia.

(2) The *head company is also an outward investing entity (ADI) for the trial period if, apart from this Subdivision:

section 820-585 would prevent the disallowance of a debt deduction for the income year including the trial period; or

section 820-587 would apply Subdivision 820-D to the head company as if it were an *outward investing entity (ADI) for the trial period.

(3) The single company is also an outward investing entity (ADI) for the trial period if it is both a *foreign controlled Australian company and an *ADI for that period.

(4) The *head company or single company is an inward investing entity (ADI) for the trial period if:

apart from this Subdivision, it would be an *inward investment vehicle (financial), and not an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI), for the trial period; and

at least one of the *Australian permanent establishments is a permanent establishment through which a foreign bank carries on banking business in Australia.

(5) The *head company or single company is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for the trial period if, apart from this Subdivision:

it would be an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for that period; and

at least one of the *Australian permanent establishments is a permanent establishment of a foreign entity that is a *financial entity; and

none of the Australian permanent establishments is a permanent establishment through which a foreign bank carries on banking business in Australia.

(6) The *head company or single company is an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) and an inward investment vehicle (financial) for the trial period if, apart from this Subdivision:

it would be an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) and an *inward investment vehicle (financial) for that period; and

it would not be an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for that period; and

at least one of the *Australian permanent establishments is a permanent establishment of a foreign entity that is a *financial entity; and

none of the Australian permanent establishments is a permanent establishment through which a foreign bank carries on banking business in Australia.

This section has effect despite any other provision of this Division, except Subdivision 820-EA and section 820-610.

Note: If the head company or single company is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or inward investment vehicle (financial) under this section and satisfies subsection 820-430(5), it may choose under Subdivision 820-EA to be treated as an outward investing entity (ADI). Section 820-603 affects whether the company satisfies that subsection, by treating as part of the company each relevant foreign financial entity’s Australian permanent establishment.

820-610 Choice not to be outward investing entity (ADI) or inward investing entity (ADI)

This section applies if:

apart from this section, the *head company or single company would, under section 820-609, be an *outward investing entity (ADI) or an *inward investing entity (ADI) for the trial period; and

at all times in the trial period, each of the following entities that is an *ADI is a specialist credit card institution:

the head company or single company;

an establishment entity whose *Australian permanent establishments the head company or single company has chosen under section 820-597 or 820-599 to have treated as part of the company for the period.

(2) The *head company or single company is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for the trial period if:

apart from this section, the company would, under section 820-609, be an *outward investing entity (ADI) for the trial period; and

the company chooses, before lodging its income tax return for the income year including the trial period, to be an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for that period.

(3) The *head company or single company is an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) and an inward investment vehicle (financial) for the trial period if:

apart from this section, the company would, under section 820-609, be an *inward investing entity (ADI) for the trial period; and

the company chooses, before lodging its income tax return for the income year including the trial period, to be an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) and an inward investment vehicle (financial) for that period.

This section has effect despite sections 820-85, 820-185 and 820-609.

820-611 Values to be based on what would be in consolidated accounts for group

For the purposes of this Division as applying because of this Subdivision, the value or amount of a particular matter as at a particular time during the grouping period is to be worked out, so far as practicable, on the basis of the information that would be contained in a set of consolidated accounts:

prepared, in accordance with the *accounting standard on consolidated accounts, as at that time; and

covering the consolidated group, MEC group or single company, as appropriate, and each *Australian permanent establishment that section 820-603 treats as part of the *head company or single company at that time.

Note: This subsection does not depend on whether such a set of consolidated accounts was prepared, or had to be prepared, for other purposes.

To avoid doubt, subsection (1) also applies to working out the value or amount, as at a particular time, of a matter mentioned in any of sections 820-613 to 820-615.

820-613 How Subdivision 820-D applies

(1) This section has effect for the purposes of applying Subdivision 820-D to the *head company or single company in relation to a period (the test period) that is all or part of the grouping period.

Note: Subdivision 820-D applies to the head company or single company if it is classified as an outward investing entity (ADI) because of section 820-609, either alone or in conjunction with a choice made by the company under section 820-430.

Adjusted average equity capital

The adjusted average equity capital of the *head company or single company for the test period is increased by the average value, for the period, of the amount worked out under subsection (3).

Note 1: In the case of a choice under section 820-599, paragraph 820-603(4)(b) treats the single company and the relevant Australian permanent establishments as a consolidated group.

Note 2: To calculate an average value for the purposes of this Division, see Subdivision 820-G.

The amount worked out under this subsection as at a particular day is the total of the amounts worked out under the following paragraphs for each of the establishment entity’s *Australian permanent establishments that section 820-603 treats as part of the *head company or single company on that day:

so much of the establishment entity’s *ADI equity capital, at the end of the day, as:

is attributable to that Australian permanent establishment; and

has not been allocated to the *OB activities of the entity;

the amounts that, as at the end of that day:

are made available by the establishment entity to the Australian permanent establishment as loans to it; and

do not give rise to any *debt deductions of the entity for the income year or any other income year.

Note: The amounts are to be worked out, so far as practicable, on the basis of the information that would be contained in a set of consolidated accounts. See section 820-611.

Risk-weighted assets

For each of the establishment entity’s *Australian permanent establishments that is covered by the choice, the *risk-weighted assets of the *head company or single company include that part of the entity’s risk-weighted assets that:

is attributable to that Australian permanent establishment; and

is not attributable to the entity’s *OB activities.

820-615 How Subdivision 820-E applies

(1) This section has effect for the purposes of applying Subdivision 820-E to the *head company or single company in relation to a period (the test period) that is all or part of the grouping period.

Note: Subdivision 820-E applies to the head company or single company if it is classified as an inward investing entity (ADI) because of section 820-609.

Average equity capital

(2) The average equity capital of the *head company or single company for the test period is:

the average value, for that period, of all the *ADI equity capital of the company; plus

the average value, for that period, of the amount worked out under subsection 820-613(3).

Note 1: In the case of a choice under section 820-599, paragraph 820-603(4)(b) treats the single company and the relevant Australian permanent establishments as a consolidated group.

Note 2: To calculate an average value for the purposes of this Division, see Subdivision 820-G.

Safe harbour capital amount

(3) The safe harbour capital amount of the *head company or single company for the test period is worked out using the following method statement.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the average value, for the test period, of the *head company’s or single company’s *risk-weighted assets.

Step 2. Multiply the result of step 1 by 6%. The result of this step is the safe harbour capital amount.

Risk-weighted assets

For each of the establishment entity’s *Australian permanent establishments covered by the choice, the *risk-weighted assets of the *head company or single company include that part of the entity’s risk-weighted assets that:

is attributable to that Australian permanent establishment; and

is not attributable to the entity’s *OB activities.

Subdivision 820-G — Calculating the average values

Guide to Subdivision 820-G

820-625 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the methods of calculating the average values for the purposes of this Division. It also includes special rules about values and valuation that are relevant to that calculation.

Table of sections

How to calculate the average values

820-630 Methods of calculating average values

820-635 The opening and closing balances method

820-640 The 3 measurement days method

820-645 The frequent measurement method

Special rules about values and valuation

820-675 Amount to be expressed in Australian currency

820-680 Valuation of assets, liabilities and equity capital

820-682 Recognition of assets and liabilities—modifying application of accounting standards

820-685 Valuation of debt capital

820-690 Commissioner’s power

How to calculate the average values

Note: Section 820-25 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 provides for a transitional rule that affects the operation of this Subdivision in relation to an income year that begins before 1 July 2002 and ends before 30 June 2003.

820-630 Methods of calculating average values

Methods of calculation for entities that are not ADIs

An entity to which Subdivision 820-B or 820-C applies for a period that is all or a part of an income year must use one of the following methods to calculate the average value of a matter mentioned in that Subdivision for the purposes of that application:

(a) the method set out in section 820-635 (the opening and closing balances method);

(b) the method set out in section 820-640 (the 3 measurement days method);

(c) the method set out in section 820-645 (the frequent measurement method).

Note 1: This subsection therefore applies only to an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI).

Note 2: An entity cannot apply the 3 measurement days method if it is unable to meet the requirements in subsection 820-640(1). An entity’s ability to apply that method may therefore be limited.

The entity must use the same method to calculate all such average values for that period for the purposes of that application.

Commissioner’s power

If the entity fails to comply with subsection (2), the Commissioner may, irrespective of the methods used by the entity, recalculate all the average values for the entity and that period by using the opening and closing balances method.

Method of calculation for ADIs

An entity to which Subdivision 820-D or 820-E applies for a period that is all or a part of an income year must use the frequent measurement method to calculate the average value of a matter mentioned in that Subdivision for the purposes of that application.

Note: This subsection therefore applies only to an outward investing entity (ADI) or an inward investing entity (ADI).

820-635 The opening and closing balances method

An entity that uses the opening and closing balances method for a period must apply the following method statement to calculate the average value of a matter for that period.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the value of the particular matter as at the first day of that period.

Step 2. Work out the value of the particular matter as at the last day of that period.

Step 3. Add the results of steps 1 and 2.

Step 4. Divide the result of step 3 by 2. The result of this step is the average value.

Example: ALWZ Corporation, a company that is an Australian entity, held assets valued at $95 million on the first day of an income year. It held assets valued at $105 million at the end of that year. Adding those amounts and dividing the result by 2 gives the average value of its assets for that year, which is $100 million.

820-640 The 3 measurement days method

Application

An entity must not use the 3 measurement days method for a period that is a part of an income year unless the following days occur during that period:

the last day of the first half of the income year;

one or both of the following days:

the first day of that year;

the last day of that year.

Method statement

An entity that uses the 3 measurement days method for a period must apply the following method statement to calculate the average value of a matter for that period.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the value of the particular matter as at the first measurement day (see subsection (3)).

Step 2. Work out the value of the particular matter as at the second measurement day (see subsection (3)).

Step 3. Work out the value of the particular matter as at the third measurement day (see subsection (3)).

Step 4. Add the results of steps 1, 2 and 3.

Step 5. Divide the result of step 4 by 3. The result of this step is the average value.

Measurement days

Example: RJ Corporation held assets valued at $115 million on the first day of an income year. It held assets valued at $105 million on the last day of the first half of that year, and $80 million on the last day of that year. Adding these amounts and dividing the result by 3 gives the average value of its assets for that year, which is $100 million.

(3) The following are the first, second and third measurement days:

(a) the first measurement day is the first day of the income year if it occurs during that period, otherwise it is the first day of that period;

(b) the second measurement day is the last day of the first half of that year;

(c) the third measurement day is the last day of that year if it occurs during that period, otherwise it is the last day of that period.

820-645 The frequent measurement method

(1) An entity that uses the frequent measurement method for a period (the measurement period) must calculate the average value of a matter for that period by applying:

the method statement in subsection (2) (generally based on quarterly periods); or

the method statement in subsection (4) (generally based on regular intervals).

This section does not prevent the entity from applying the method statement in subsection (2) for one matter and the method statement in subsection (4) for another matter in relation to that period.

This is the method statement for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a).

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the value of the particular matter as at each of the following measurement days:

the first day of the measurement period;

the last day of each quarterly period of that income year (see subsection (3)) that occurs during the measurement period (if any);

the last day of the measurement period if it is not a day covered by paragraph (b).

Step 2. Add up those values.

Step 3. Divide the result of step 2 by the number of measurement days. The result of this step is the average value.

Quarterly period

Example: KJW Finance Corporation, a company that is an Australian entity, held assets valued at $130 million on the first day of an income year. On the last day of each quarterly period for that year it held assets valued at $140 million, $120 million, $110 million and $100 million respectively. Adding these amounts and dividing the result by 5 gives the average value of its assets for that year, which is $120 million.

(3) The quarterly periods of the income year are:

the period consisting of the first, second and third months of that year; and

each successive period of 3 months that occurs after that period during that year.

This is the method statement for the purposes of paragraph (1)(b):

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the value of the particular matter as at each of the following measurement days:

the first day of the measurement period;

the last day of each regular interval for the measurement period (see subsection (5));

the last day of the measurement period if it is not a day mentioned in paragraph (b).

Step 2. Add up those values.

Step 3. Divide the result of step 2 by the number of measurement days. The result of this step is the average value.

Regular intervals

Example: TW Corporation, a company that is an Australian entity, adopts a weekly interval for the purposes of this subsection. The measurement period is a period of 12 weeks. On the first day of that period it had $70 million of debt capital. Its debt capital was $80 million on the last day of each of the first 7 weeks, and $95 million on the last day of the remaining 5 weeks. Adding these amounts and dividing the result by 13 (the number of measurement days) gives the average value of its debt capital for that period, which is $85 million.

(5) The regular intervals for the measurement period are:

a period which consists of a fixed number of days or months (not less than one day and not more than 3 months) adopted by the entity and begins at the start of the first day of the measurement period; and

each successive period of the same duration that occurs during the measurement period.

Note: Examples of a regular interval therefore include a daily, weekly, fortnightly, monthly or quarterly interval.

The entity must use the same regular intervals when calculating the average values of different matters under subsection (4) for that period.

Special rules about values and valuation

820-675 Amount to be expressed in Australian currency

For the purposes of this Division, an amount (including a value used in a calculation under this Division) is to be expressed in Australian currency.

An entity must comply with the accounting standards in converting an amount into Australian currency.

Subsection (2) has effect whether the *accounting standard would otherwise apply to the entity or not.

820-680 Valuation of assets, liabilities and equity capital

For the purposes of this Division, an entity must comply with the accounting standards in determining what are its assets and liabilities and in calculating:

the value of its assets; and

the value of its liabilities (including its *debt capital); and

the value of its *equity capital.

Note: This requirement to comply with the accounting standards is modified in certain cases (see sections 820-310 and 820-682).

In particular, for the purposes of this Division, the entity has an asset or liability at a particular time if, and only if, according to the accounting standards, the asset or liability can or must be recognised at that time.

Note: This application of the accounting standards is modified in certain cases (see section 820-682).

If:

an entity is required by an Australian law to prepare financial statements for a period in accordance with the accounting standards; and

a matter mentioned in subsection (1) is determined or calculated in accordance with the accounting standards for the purposes of the financial statements in relation to the period;

then, for the purposes of this Division, the matter is to be determined or calculated in relation to the period, or any part of the period, in the same way as it is determined or calculated in the financial statements.

If:

(a) a period in relation to which a matter mentioned in subsection (1) is determined or calculated (the current period) is not the same as a period in relation to which paragraphs (2)(a) and (b) are satisfied; and

the current period overlaps with one or more periods in relation to which paragraphs (2)(a) and (b) are satisfied;

then, for the purposes of this Division, the matter is to be determined or calculated in relation to the current period in the same way as it is determined or calculated in the financial statements for the most recent of the overlapping periods.

Accounting standards need not otherwise apply to the entity

Subsection (1) has effect whether the *accounting standard would otherwise apply to the entity or not.

820-682 Recognition of assets and liabilities—modifying application of accounting standards

Deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities

Despite subsections 820-680(1), (1A) and (2), an entity must not recognise:

a deferred tax liability (within the meaning of the accounting standards) as a liability for the purposes of this Division; or

a deferred tax asset (within the meaning of the accounting standards) as an asset for the purposes of this Division.

Note: Subsections 820-680(1) and (1A) require compliance with accounting standards.

Surpluses and deficits in defined benefit superannuation plans

Despite subsections 820-680(1), (1A) and (2), an entity must not recognise an amount relating to a defined benefit plan (within the meaning of the accounting standards) as:

a liability for the purposes of this Division; or

an asset for the purposes of this Division.

Note: Subsections 820-680(1) and (1A) require compliance with accounting standards.

Not applicable to ADIs

This section does not apply in relation to an entity for a period if, for the period, the entity is an *outward investing entity (ADI) or an *inward investing entity (ADI).

Not applicable to records about Australian permanent establishments

This section does not apply for the purposes of section 820-960.

820-685 Valuation of debt capital

For the purposes of this Division, the regulations may make additional provisions for the valuation of the *debt capital of an entity.

820-690 Commissioner’s power

If the Commissioner considers that, in relation to a calculation under this Division, an entity has:

overvalued its assets; or

undervalued its liabilities (including its *debt capital);

the Commissioner may, having regard to the accounting standards and this Subdivision, substitute a value that the Commissioner considers is appropriate.

Subdivision 820-H — Control of entities

Guide to Subdivision 820-H

820-740 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out rules about the following:

• the meaning of an Australian controller of a foreign entity (for the purpose of determining whether or not an entity is an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or outward investing entity (ADI));

• the meaning of a foreign controlled Australian entity (for the purpose of determining whether or not an entity is an inward investing financial entity (non-ADI));

• the method of working out the extent to which one entity is controlled by another entity for those purposes.

Table of sections

Australian controller of a foreign entity

820-745 What is an Australian controlled foreign entity?

820-750 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign company?

820-755 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign trust?

820-760 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign corporate limited partnership?

Foreign controlled Australian entity

820-780 What is a foreign controlled Australian entity?

820-785 What is a foreign controlled Australian company?

820-790 What is a foreign controlled Australian trust?

820-795 What is a foreign controlled Australian partnership?

Thin capitalisation control interest

820-815 General rule about thin capitalisation control interest in a company, trust or partnership

820-820 Special rules about calculating TC control interest held by an entity

820-825 Special rules about calculating TC control interests held by a group of entities

820-830 Special rules about determining percentage of TC control interest

820-835 Commissioner’s power

TC direct control interest, TC indirect control interest and TC control tracing interest

820-855 TC direct control interest in a company

820-860 TC direct control interest in a trust

820-865 TC direct control interest in a partnership

820-870 TC indirect control interest in a company, trust or partnership

820-875 TC control tracing interest in a company, trust or partnership

Australian controller of a foreign entity

820-745 What is an Australian controlled foreign entity?

An Australian controlled foreign entity, in relation to a particular time, is an entity that is any of the following at that time:

a controlled foreign company (except a corporate limited partnership);

a controlled foreign trust;

a controlled foreign corporate limited partnership.

820-750 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign company?

An entity is an Australian controller of a *controlled foreign company mentioned in paragraph 820-745(a) at a particular time if, and only if, at that time:

that entity is an Australian entity holding a TC control interest in the controlled foreign company that is 10% or more; or

all of the following subparagraphs apply:

(i) the controlled foreign company is such a company because of paragraph 340(c) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

not more than 5 Australian entities, including that entity, control that controlled foreign company (either alone or together with associate entities and whether or not any associate entity is also an Australian entity);

that entity holds a TC control interest in the controlled foreign company that is at least 1%.

Note: A corporate limited partnership that is a foreign entity may be a controlled foreign corporate limited partnership, see section 820-760.

820-755 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign trust?

An entity is an Australian controller of a *controlled foreign trust at a particular time if, and only if, at that time, the entity is an *Australian entity holding a *TC control interest in the trust that is 10% or more.

820-760 What is an Australian controller of a controlled foreign corporate limited partnership?

Australian controller of a controlled foreign corporate limited partnership

(1) An entity is an Australian controller of a *controlled foreign corporate limited partnership at a particular time if, and only if, at least one of the following paragraphs applies to the entity at that time:

the entity is an Australian entity that is a general partner of the partnership;

the entity is an Australian entity holding a TC control interest in the partnership that is 10% or more.

Controlled foreign corporate limited partnership

(2) A *corporate limited partnership is a controlled foreign corporate limited partnership at a particular time if, and only if, at that time:

it is not an Australian entity; and

at least one of the following subparagraphs applies to it:

at least one general partner of the partnership is an Australian entity or an Australian controlled foreign entity;

not more than 5 Australian entities (each of which holds a TC control interest in the partnership that is at least 1%) hold a total of TC control interests in the partnership that is 50% or more.

Foreign controlled Australian entity

820-780 What is a foreign controlled Australian entity?

A foreign controlled Australian entity, in relation to a particular time, is an entity that is any of the following at that time:

a foreign controlled Australian company;

a foreign controlled Australian trust;

a foreign controlled Australian partnership.

820-785 What is a foreign controlled Australian company?

(1) A company (except a *corporate limited partnership) is a foreign controlled Australian company (or an FCAC) at a particular time if, and only if, at that time, it is an *Australian entity to which at least one of the following paragraphs applies:

not more than 5 *foreign entities (each of which holds a TC control interest in the company that is at least 1%) hold a total of TC control interests in the company that is 50% or more;

a foreign entity holds a TC control interest in the company that is 40% or more, and no other entity or entities (except an associate entity of the foreign entity or entities including the foreign entity or its associate entities) control the company;

not more than 5 foreign entities control the company (whether or not with associate entities and whether or not any associate entity is a foreign entity).

Note: A corporate limited partnership that is an Australian entity may be a foreign controlled Australian partnership, see section 820-795.

Exception

Despite subsection (1), a company is not an FCAC at a particular time if, at that time:

the company would, apart from this subsection, be an FCAC only because of paragraph (1)(a) or (b); but

the total of the following interests would be less than 20% if paragraphs 820-875(2)(a) and (b) were disregarded:

the *TC direct control interest in the company held by the foreign entity or entities mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) or (b);

the TC indirect control interest in the company held by the foreign entity or entities;

the TC direct control interests in the company held by any associate entities of the foreign entity or entities (other than any TC direct control interests that have been taken into account in calculating the interest mentioned in subparagraph (ii));

the TC indirect control interests in the company held by the entity’s associate entities (other than any TC indirect control interests that have been taken into account in calculating the interest mentioned in subparagraph (ii)).

Note: Paragraphs 820-875(2)(a) and (b) set out special rules under which an entity is taken to hold a TC control tracing interest in another entity that is equal to 100%, which could then be taken into account in calculating a TC indirect control interest.

820-790 What is a foreign controlled Australian trust?

(1) A trust is a foreign controlled Australian trust (or an FCAT) at a particular time if, and only if, at that time, it is an *Australian trust to which at least one of the following paragraphs applies:

not more than 5 *foreign entities (each of which holds a TC control interest in the trust that is at least 1%) hold a total of TC control interests in the trust that is 50% or more;

a foreign entity holds a TC control interest in the trust that is 40% or more, and no other entity or entities (except an associate entity of the foreign entity or entities including the foreign entity or its associate entities) control the trust;

all of the following subparagraphs apply to the trust:

at least one of the objects or beneficiaries of the trust is a foreign entity;

there has been at least one distribution of income or capital of the trust made to such an object or beneficiary (whether directly or indirectly) during the income year in which that particular time occurs, or during the preceding 2 income years;

the total TC control interests in the trust that are held by all its beneficiaries that are *Australian entities do not exceed 50%;

a foreign entity is in a position to control the trust (see subsection (2)).

A foreign entity is in a position to control a trust if, and only if:

(a) the entity, or an *associate entity of the entity, whether alone or with other associate entities (the relevant entity), has the power to obtain the beneficial enjoyment of the trust’s capital or income (whether or not by exercising its power of appointment or revocation, and whether with or without another entity’s consent); or

the relevant entity is able to control the application of the trust’s capital or income in any manner (whether directly or indirectly); or

the relevant entity is able to do a thing mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b) under a *scheme; or

a trustee of the trust is accustomed or is under an obligation (whether formally or informally), or might reasonably be expected, to act in accordance with the relevant entity’s directions, instructions or wishes; or

the relevant entity is able to remove or appoint a trustee of the trust.

Exception

Despite subsection (1), a trust is not an FCAT at a particular time if, at that time:

the trust would, apart from this subsection, be an FCAT only because of paragraph (1)(a) or (b); but

the total of the following interests would be less than 20% if paragraphs 820-875(2)(a) and (b) were disregarded:

the *TC direct control interest in the trust held by the foreign entity or entities mentioned in paragraph (1)(a), (b) or (c);

the TC indirect control interest in the trust held by the foreign entity or entities;

the TC direct control interests in the trust held by any associate entities of the foreign entity or entities (other than any TC direct control interests that have been taken into account in calculating the interest mentioned in subparagraph (ii));

the TC indirect control interests in the trust held by the entity’s associate entities (other than any TC indirect control interests that have been taken into account in calculating the interest mentioned in subparagraph (ii)).

Note: Paragraphs 820-875(2)(a) and (b) set out special rules under which an entity is taken to hold a TC control tracing interest in another entity that is equal to 100%, which could then be taken into account in calculating a TC indirect control interest.

820-795 What is a foreign controlled Australian partnership?

Corporate limited partnership

(1) A *corporate limited partnership is a foreign controlled Australian partnership (or an FCAP) at a particular time if, and only if, at that time:

it is an Australian entity; and

at least one of the following subparagraphs applies to it:

not more than 5 *foreign entities (each of which holds a TC control interest in the partnership that is at least 1%) hold a total of TC control interests in the partnership that are 50% or more;

at least one general partner of the partnership is a foreign entity or a foreign controlled Australian entity.

Partnership that is not a corporate limited partnership

(2) A partnership other than a *corporate limited partnership is a foreign controlled Australian partnership (or an FCAP) at a particular time if, and only if, at that time:

at least one of the partners is an Australian entity; and

at least one of the following subparagraphs applies to it:

not more than 5 *foreign entities (each of which holds a TC control interest in the partnership that is at least 1%) hold a total of TC control interests in the partnership that is 50% or more;

a foreign entity holds a TC control interest in the partnership that is 40% or more, and no other entity or entities (except an associate entity of the foreign entity or entities including the foreign entity or its associate entities) control the partnership.

Exception

Despite subsections (1) and (2), a partnership is not an FCAP at a particular time if, at that time:

the partnership would, apart from this subsection, be an FCAP only because of subparagraph (1)(b)(i), (2)(b)(i) or (ii); but

the total of the following interests would be less than 20% if paragraphs 820-875(2)(a) and (b) were disregarded:

the *TC direct control interest in the partnership held by the foreign entity or entities mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(i), (2)(b)(i) or (ii);

the TC indirect control interest in the partnership held by the foreign entity or entities;

the TC direct control interests in the partnership held by any associate entities of the foreign entity or entities (other than any TC direct control interests that have been taken into account in calculating the interest mentioned in subparagraph (ii));

the TC indirect control interests in the partnership held by the entity’s associate entities (other than any TC indirect control interests that have been taken into account in calculating the interest mentioned in subparagraph (ii)).

Note: Paragraphs 820-875(2)(a) and (b) set out special rules under which an entity is taken to hold a TC control tracing interest in another entity that is equal to 100%, which could then be taken into account in calculating a TC indirect control interest.

Thin capitalisation control interest

820-815 General rule about thin capitalisation control interest in a company, trust or partnership

Meaning of TC control interest

(1) The thin capitalisation control interest (or TC control interest) that an entity holds in a company, trust or partnership at a particular time is the total of the following interests:

the *TC direct control interest (if any) held by the entity in the company, trust or partnership at that time;

the TC indirect control interest (if any) held by the entity in the company, trust or partnership at that time;

the TC direct control interests (if any) held by the entity’s associate entities in the company, trust or partnership at that time;

the TC indirect control interests (if any) held by the entity’s associate entities in the company, trust or partnership at that time.

This section has effect subject to sections 820-820 to 820-835 (which set out special rules to avoid double counting).

Note: For the rules about a TC direct control interest, see sections 820-855 to 820-865. For the rules about a TC indirect control interest, see sections 820-870 to 820-875.

This section does not apply to an associate entity of the entity if:

the associate entity is a foreign entity and the associate entity is such an associate entity only because of subsection 820-905(3A); or

the associate entity is such an associate entity only because of subsection 820-905(3B).

820-820 Special rules about calculating TC control interest held by an entity

This section applies for the purposes of calculating the TC control interest that an entity holds in a company, trust or partnership.

Disregard a TC indirect control interest held by the entity to the extent to which it is calculated by reference to:

a *TC direct control interest taken into account under paragraph 820-815(c); or

a TC indirect control interest taken into account under paragraph 820-815(d).

Disregard a TC indirect control interest held by an associate entity of the entity to the extent to which it is calculated by reference to:

a *TC direct control interest taken into account under paragraph 820-815(a) or (c); or

a TC indirect control interest taken into account under paragraph 820-815(b) or (d).

Subsection (3) does not apply to an associate entity of the entity if:

the associate entity is a foreign entity and the associate entity is such an associate entity only because of subsection 820-905(3A); or

the associate entity is such an associate entity only because of subsection 820-905(3B).

Take into account only one of the following things if both would otherwise be counted in calculating the TC control interest:

the holding of a *TC direct control interest by the entity or any other entity;

an entitlement to acquire that TC direct control interest.

The operation of this section in relation to an entity does not prevent the operation of section 820-825 in relation to a group of entities that includes that entity.

820-825 Special rules about calculating TC control interests held by a group of entities

This section applies for the purposes of calculating the total *TC control interests that a group of entities holds in a company, trust or partnership.

Take into account a particular *TC direct control interest or TC indirect control interest only once if it would otherwise be counted more than once because the entity holding it is an associate entity of one or more entities in the group.

Subsection (2) does not apply to an associate entity of one or more entities in the group if:

the associate entity is a foreign entity and the associate entity is such an associate entity only because of subsection 820-905(3A); or

the associate entity is such an associate entity only because of subsection 820-905(3B).

Take into account only one of the following things if both of them would otherwise be counted in calculating the total *TC control interests:

the holding of a *TC direct control interest by an entity;

an entitlement to acquire that TC direct control interest.

The operation of this section in relation to a group of entities does not prevent the operation of section 820-820 in relation to an entity that is a member of that group.

820-830 Special rules about determining percentage of TC control interest

This section applies for the purposes of determining whether an entity, or a group of entities, holds at least a particular percentage of *TC control interests for the purposes of a provision in this Subdivision.

(2) If, apart from this subsection, an entity, or each of 2 or more entities, would hold a *TC direct control interest equal to 100%, or a *TC control tracing interest equal to 100%, in another entity (the controlled entity):

only the entity, or one of the 2 or more entities, is to be taken to hold that particular interest in the controlled entity equal to 100%; and

another entity is not to be taken to hold that particular interest in the controlled entity (whether or not it would, apart from this subsection, hold that interest in the controlled entity equal to 100%).

820-835 Commissioner’s power

For the purposes of this Subdivision, the Commissioner may decide:

which one of 2 things is to be taken into account for the purposes of subsection 820-820(4) or subsection 820-825(3); or

which one of 2 or more entities is to be chosen for the purposes of paragraph 820-830(2)(a).

TC direct control interest, TC indirect control interest and TC control tracing interest

820-855 TC direct control interest in a company

(1) A thin capitalisation direct control interest (or a TC direct control interest) that an entity holds in a company (except a *corporate limited partnership) at a particular time is the percentage of the direct control interest (if any) that the entity holds in the company at that time under the provisions applied by subsection (2).

Note: For the TC direct control interest that an entity holds in a corporate limited partnership, see section 820-865.

(2) For the purposes of subsection (1), provisions of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are applied with the modifications set out in the following table.

820-860 TC direct control interest in a trust

(1) A thin capitalisation direct control interest (or a TC direct control interest) that an entity holds in a trust at a particular time is the percentage of the direct control interest (if any) that the entity holds in the trust at that time under the provisions applied by subsection (2).

(2) For the purposes of subsection (1), provisions of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are applied with the modifications set out in the following table.

In addition, for the purposes of determining whether or not an entity (other than a trust mentioned in paragraph (a) or (b)) is a foreign controlled Australian entity:

if a trust is covered by paragraph 820-790(1)(c)—a foreign entity that is an object of the trust at a particular time is taken to hold, at that time, a TC direct control interest in the trust that is equal to 100%; and

if a trust is covered by paragraph 820-790(1)(d)—a foreign entity that is in a position to control the trust at a particular time is taken to hold, at that time, a *TC direct control interest in the trust that is equal to 100%.

Note: The foreign entity therefore holds a TC control tracing interest in the trust (see section 820-875). That interest may then be taken into account in calculating any TC indirect control interest that the foreign entity holds in another entity in relation to which the trust is an interposed entity (see section 820-870). As a result, that other entity may become a foreign controlled Australian entity.

820-865 TC direct control interest in a partnership

A thin capitalisation direct control interest (or a TC direct control interest) that an entity holds in a partnership at a particular time is whichever of the following percentages is applicable, and if there are 2 or more such percentages, the greatest of them:

in the case of a corporate limited partnership—100% if the entity is a general partner of the partnership;

in the case of a partnership that is not a corporate limited partnership—the percentage of the control of voting power in the partnership that the entity has at that time;

in any case—the percentage that the entity holds, or is entitled to acquire, at that time, of any of the following:

the total amount of assets or capital contributed to the partnership;

the total rights of partners to distributions of capital, assets or profits on the dissolution of the partnership;

the total rights of partners to distributions of capital, assets or profits otherwise than on the dissolution of the partnership.

820-870 TC indirect control interest in a company, trust or partnership

What is a TC indirect control interest?

(1) An entity holds a thin capitalisation indirect control interest (or a TC indirect control interest) in a company, trust or partnership at a particular time if, and only if:

there is an interposed entity, or a continuous series of at least 2 interposed entities, between that entity and the company, trust or partnership; and

the interposed entity, or each of the interposed entities, is:

a foreign controlled Australian entity if this section is used for the purposes of determining whether or not an entity is a foreign controlled Australian entity; or

an Australian controlled foreign entity if this section is used for the purposes of determining whether or not an entity is an Australian controlled foreign entity or an *Australian controller of such an entity.

Note: In the case of a continuous series of interposed entities between an entity and a company, trust or partnership, the entity must hold a TC control tracing interest in the first interposed entity (see subsection (2)). In addition, under subsection (2), each interposed entity in the series must hold a TC control tracing interest in the next interposed entity (except in the case of the last one, which holds a TC control tracing interest in the company, trust or partnership).

What is an interposed entity?

(2) For the purposes of this section, an entity (the middle entity) is interposed between 2 other entities at a particular time if, and only if, at that time:

the first of those 2 entities holds a TC control tracing interest in the middle entity; and

the middle entity holds a TC control tracing interest in the second of those 2 entities.

Note: For the rules about a TC control tracing interest, see section 820-875.

How to calculate a TC indirect control interest

(3) The *TC indirect control interest that an entity (the top entity) holds in a company, trust or partnership at a particular time is calculated in accordance with subsection (4), (5) or (6) (as appropriate).

One interposed entity only

The TC indirect control interest is the result of applying the following method statement if there is only one interposed entity between the top entity and the company, trust or partnership at that time.

Method statement

Step 1. Calculate the TC control tracing interest that the top entity holds in the interposed entity at that time.

Step 2. Multiply the result of step 1 by the TC control tracing interest that the interposed entity holds in the company, trust or partnership at that time.

2 interposed entities

The TC indirect control interest is the result of applying the following method statement if there are 2 interposed entities between the top entity and the company, trust or partnership at that time.

Method statement

Step 1. Calculate the TC control tracing interest that the top entity holds in the first of those interposed entities at that time.

Step 2. Multiply the result of step 1 by the *TC control tracing interest that the first interposed entity holds in the next interposed entity (the second interposed entity) at that time.

Step 3. Multiply the result of step 2 by the TC control tracing interest that the second interposed entity holds in the company, trust or partnership at that time.

More than 2 interposed entities

The TC indirect control interest is the result of applying the following method statement if there are more than 2 interposed entities between the top entity and the company, trust or partnership at that time.

Method statement

Step 1. Calculate the TC control tracing interest that the top entity holds in the first of those interposed entities at that time.

Step 2. Multiply the result of step 1 by the *TC control tracing interest that the first interposed entity holds in the next interposed entity (the second interposed entity) at that time.

Step 3. Multiply the result of step 2 by the TC control tracing interest that the second interposed entity holds in the next interposed entity at that time.

Step 4. Continue this pattern of multiplying the result of the last multiplication by the TC control tracing interest in the next interposed entity held by the preceding entity, ending with a multiplication by the TC control tracing interest held by the last interposed entity in the company, trust or partnership.

820-875 TC control tracing interest in a company, trust or partnership

(1) A thin capitalisation control tracing interest (or a TC control tracing interest) that an entity holds in a company, trust or a partnership at a particular time is equal to the *TC direct control interest in the company, trust or partnership that the entity holds at that time.

Despite subsection (1), an entity is taken to hold a TC control tracing interest in a company, trust or partnership that is equal to 100% at a particular time if, at that time:

the entity and its associate entities hold a total of *TC direct control interests in the company, trust or partnership that is 50% or more; or

the following subparagraphs apply:

(i) the entity (the controlling entity) and its associate entities hold a total of TC direct control interests that is 40% or more in the company, trust or partnership;

no other entity or entities (except the controlling entity, its associate entities or entities including the controlling entity or its associate entities) control the company, trust or partnership; or

the entity (whether or not together with associate entities) controls the company, trust or partnership.

Paragraph (2)(b) does not apply if the *TC direct control interests mentioned in subparagraph (2)(b)(i) are held in a corporate limited partnership.

Subdivision 820-HA — Controlled foreign entity debt and controlled foreign entity equity

Guide to Subdivision 820-HA

820-880 What this Subdivision is about

Controlled foreign entity debt and controlled foreign entity equity are concepts used in this Division. This Subdivision sets out the meaning of each of these concepts.

Table of sections

820-881 Application

820-885 What is controlled foreign entity debt?

820-890 What is controlled foreign entity equity?

820-881 Application

This Subdivision applies to:

(a) an entity (the relevant entity) that is a *general class investor, an *outward investing entity (non-ADI), or an *outward investing entity (ADI), for a period (the relevant period) that is all or a part of an income year; and

(b) each entity (controlled entity of the relevant entity) that is an *Australian controlled foreign entity of which:

the relevant entity is an *Australian controller; or

an associate entity of the relevant entity is an Australian controller.

820-885 What is controlled foreign entity debt?

(1) The relevant entity’s controlled foreign entity debt at a particular time during the relevant period is the total value of all the *debt interests held by the relevant entity at that time that satisfy all of the following:

the interests are *on issue at that time;

each of the interests was *issued by an entity that is a controlled entity of the relevant entity at that time;

each of the interests gives rise to a cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a).

(2) For the purposes of subsection (1), take into account the value of a *debt interest issued by a controlled entity of the relevant entity only to the extent that the interest is not attributable to any of the following assets that are held by the controlled entity throughout the relevant period:

assets attributable to the controlled entity’s *Australian permanent establishments;

other assets that are held by the controlled entity for the purposes of producing assessable income of the controlled entity.

820-890 What is controlled foreign entity equity?

(1) The relevant entity’s controlled foreign entity equity at a particular time during the relevant period is the total value of:

all the *equity interests that the entity holds, at that time, in entities that are controlled entities of the relevant entity at that time; and

all the *debt interests *on issue and held by the entity at that time that satisfy both of the following:

the interests were *issued by entities that are controlled entities of the relevant entity at that time;

none of the interests gives rise to any cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a).

(2) For the purposes of subsection (1), take into account the value of an *equity interest in, or a *debt interest issued by, a controlled entity of the relevant entity only to the extent that the interest is not attributable to any of the following assets that are held by the controlled entity throughout the relevant period:

assets attributable to the controlled entity’s *Australian permanent establishments;

other assets that are held by the controlled entity for the purposes of producing assessable income of the controlled entity.

Subdivision 820-I — Associate entities

Guide to Subdivision 820-I

820-900 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the meaning of various concepts about associate entities for the purposes of this Division.

Table of sections

820-905 Associate entity

820-910 Associate entity debt

820-915 Associate entity equity

820-920 Associate entity excess amount

820-905 Associate entity

Meaning of associate entity

(1) An entity (the first entity) that is not an individual is an associate entity of another entity at a particular time if, at that time, the first entity is an *associate of that other entity and at least one of the following paragraphs applies:

that other entity holds an associate interest of 50% or more in the first entity (see subsections (4) to (8));

the first entity is accustomed or under an obligation (whether formal or informal), or might reasonably be expected, to act in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of that other entity in relation to:

the distribution or retention of the first entity’s profits; or

the financial policies relating to the first entity’s assets, *debt capital or *equity capital;

whether those directions, instructions or wishes are, or might reasonably be expected to be, communicated directly or through interposed entities.

However, this subsection does not apply to the first entity in its capacity as the *responsible entity of a registered scheme (see subsection (2A)).

Subsection (1) does not apply if the other entity is any of the following:

a trustee of a *complying superannuation entity (other than a self managed superannuation fund);

*wholly-owned subsidiary of a complying superannuation entity (other than a self managed superannuation fund).

(2) An entity (the first entity) that is an individual is an associate entity of another entity at a particular time if, at that time:

the first entity is an associate of that other entity; and

the first entity:

is accustomed or under an obligation (whether formal or informal); or

might reasonably be expected;

to act in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of that other entity in relation to the first entity’s financial affairs, whether those directions, instructions or wishes are, or might reasonably be expected to be, communicated directly or through interposed entities.

(2A) An entity (the first entity), in its capacity as the *responsible entity of a *registered scheme at a particular time, is an associate entity of another entity at that time if the first entity, in that capacity, is an *associate of that other entity at that time and at least one of the following paragraphs applies at that time:

that other entity holds an associate interest of 50% or more in the registered scheme (see subsections (4) to (8));

that other entity holds an associate interest of 20% or more in the registered scheme and the first entity, in that capacity, is accustomed or under an obligation (whether formal or informal), or might reasonably be expected, to act in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of that other entity in relation to:

the distribution or retention of the profits of the registered scheme; or

the financial policies relating to the assets, *debt capital or *equity capital of the registered scheme;

whether those directions, instructions or wishes are, or might reasonably be expected to be, communicated directly or through interposed entities.

Note: The first entity, in another capacity, may also be an associate entity of an entity under another provision of this section (see also section 960-100).

For the purposes of Subdivision 820-AA, and of sections 820-910, 820-915 and 820-920, if the first entity mentioned in subsection (1) or (2A) is a trust (other than a public trading trust) or a partnership:

treat the reference in paragraph (1)(a) or (2A)(a) to 50% as instead being a reference to 10%; and

if subsection (2C) applies—treat the other entity mentioned in subsection (1) or (2A) as holding an associate interest in the first entity mentioned in that subsection of 10%; and

(c) disregard subsection 318(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

if subsection (2D) applies—in determining whether an entity is an associate of another entity, treat the benefiting entity mentioned in that subsection as being a partner in the partnership.

This subsection applies if:

the other entity mentioned in subsection (1) or (2A) holds an associate interest in the first entity mentioned in that subsection of less than 10%; and

it is reasonable to conclude that the entity, or one of the entities, who created the circumstance described in paragraph (a) of this subsection did so for the principal purpose of, or for more than one principal purpose that included the purpose of, ensuring that the first entity will not be an associate entity of the other entity.

This subsection applies if:

a trust (other than a public trading trust) is a partner in a partnership; and

(b) another entity (the benefiting entity) benefits under the trust (as determined in accordance with paragraph 318(6)(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

Subsection (1) or (2A) also has effect as if the first entity satisfies paragraph (b) of that subsection at a particular time if any of the following is expected to act in the manner mentioned in that paragraph at that time:

a director of the first entity if it is a company;

a partner of the first entity if it is a partnership;

the general partner of the first entity if it is a corporate limited partnership;

the trustee of the first entity if it is a trust;

a member of the first entity’s committee of management if it is an unincorporated association or body.

If:

(a) an entity (the first entity) is an *associate entity of another entity (the head entity) under subsection (1), (2), (2A) or (3) at a particular time; and

a third entity is also an associate entity of the head entity under subsection (1), (2), (2A) or (3) at that time;

the first entity is an associate entity of the third entity at that time.

(3B) If an entity (the first entity) is an *associate entity of another entity under subsection (1), (2), (2A), (3) or (3A) at a particular time, that other entity is also an associate entity of the first entity at that time.

(3C) However, an entity in its capacity as the *responsible entity of a *registered scheme (the responsible entity) is not an *associate entity of another entity under subsection (3B) at a particular time if, at that time, the responsible entity:

would be an associate entity of that other entity under subsection (3B) (apart from the effect of this subsection); but

is not an associate entity of that other entity under subsection (2A).

Associate interest in a company (except a corporate limited partnership)

(4) An associate interest that an entity holds in a company (except a *corporate limited partnership) at a particular time is the percentage of the direct control interest (if any) that the entity holds in the company at that time under the provisions applied by subsection (5).

(5) For the purposes of subsection (4), provisions of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are applied with the modifications set out in the following table:

Associate interest in a trust

(6) An associate interest that an entity holds in a trust at a particular time is the percentage of the direct control interest (if any) that the entity holds in the trust at that time under the provisions applied by subsection (7).

(7) For the purposes of subsection (6), provisions of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 are applied with the modifications set out in the following table:

Associate interest in a partnership

(8) An associate interest that an entity holds in a partnership at a particular time is whichever of the following percentages is applicable, and if there are 2 or more such percentages, the greatest of them:

in the case of a corporate limited partnership—100% if the entity is a general partner of the partnership;

in the case of a partnership that is not a corporate limited partnership—the percentage of the control of voting power in the partnership that the entity has at that time;

in any other case—the percentage that the entity holds, or is entitled to acquire, at that time, of any of the following:

the total amount of assets or capital contributed to the partnership;

the total rights of partners to distributions of capital, assets or profits on the dissolution of the partnership;

the total rights of partners to distributions of capital, assets or profits otherwise than on the dissolution of the partnership.

820-910 Associate entity debt

(1) This section applies to an entity (the relevant entity) that is a *general class investor, an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI), or an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI), for a period (the relevant period) that is all or a part of an income year.

(2) This section also applies, for the relevant entity, to an *associate entity (a relevant associate entity) of the relevant entity, if:

either:

the associate entity is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or an *inward investment vehicle (financial), for the relevant period; or

the associate entity is an *inward investor (financial) for the relevant period, and the condition in subsection (2A) of this section is satisfied; and

neither section 820-35 ($2 million debt deductions threshold) nor section 820-37 (exemption for entity with 90% Australian assets) prevents Subdivision 820-B, 820-C, 820-D or 820-E from disallowing any debt deduction of the relevant associate entity for the income year; and

(c) for some or all of the relevant period, the relevant associate entity does not meet the conditions in subsection 820-39(3) (about exemption of certain special purpose entities); and

the relevant associate entity is not an *exempt entity for the income year.

The condition referred to in subparagraph (2)(a)(ii) is that the relevant period consists of one or more periods each of which is either or both of these:

a period throughout which the associate entity carries on its business in Australia at or through one or more of its *Australian permanent establishments;

a period throughout which the associate entity holds any of the following assets:

assets that are attributable to the associate entity’s Australian permanent establishments;

other assets that are held for the purposes of producing the associate entity’s assessable income.

(3) The relevant entity’s associate entity debt at a particular time during the relevant period is the total value of all the *debt interests held by the relevant entity at that time that satisfy all of the following:

the interests are *on issue at that time;

each of the interests was *issued by a relevant associate entity;

each of the interests gives rise to costs:

that are *debt deductions, for an income year, of the relevant associate entity that issued the interest; and

to the extent that the costs are not amounts mentioned in paragraph 820-40(2)(c) and are costs ordinarily payable to an entity other than the relevant entity—that are assessable income of the relevant entity for an income year;

the terms and conditions for each of the interests are those that would apply if the relevant entity and the relevant associate entity that issued the interest were dealing at *arm’s length with each other.

For the purposes of subsection (3), take into account the value of a *debt interest issued by a foreign entity only to the extent that the interest is attributable to any of the following assets that are held by the foreign entity throughout the relevant period:

assets that are attributable to the foreign entity’s *Australian permanent establishments;

other assets held by the foreign entity for the purposes of producing the foreign entity’s assessable income.

820-915 Associate entity equity

(1) This section applies to an entity (the relevant entity) that is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period (the relevant period) that is all or a part of an income year.

(2) This section also applies, for the relevant entity, to each entity (relevant associate entity) that is an *associate entity of the relevant entity and that is:

an Australian entity; or

a foreign entity that, throughout the relevant period, holds any of the following assets:

assets that are attributable to the foreign entity’s *Australian permanent establishments;

other assets that are held for the purposes of producing the foreign entity’s assessable income.

(3) The relevant entity’s associate entity equity at a particular time during the relevant period is the total value of:

all the *equity interests that the entity holds, at that time, in relevant associate entities; and

(b) all the *debt interests *on issue and held by the relevant entity at that time that satisfy all of the following:

the interests were *issued by relevant associate entities;

neither the value of each of the interests, nor any part of that value, is all or a part of any cost-free debt capital of the issuer of the interest at that time;

none of the interests gives rise to any cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a); and

(c) all the debt interests on issue and held by the relevant entity at that time that satisfy both of the following:

the interests were issued by relevant associate entities;

each of the interests gives rise to a cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a), but the cost is not deductible from the assessable income of the issuer of the interest for any income year.

For the purposes of subsection (3), take into account the value of an *equity interest in, or a *debt interest issued by, a foreign entity only to the extent that the interest is attributable to assets covered by subparagraph (2)(b)(i) or (ii) that are held by the foreign entity throughout the relevant period.

820-920 Associate entity excess amount

(1) This section applies to an entity (the relevant entity) that is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for a period that is all or a part of an income year.

(2) The relevant entity’s associate entity excess amount at a particular time during that period is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the premium excess amount (see subsection (3)), as at that particular time, for an *associate entity of the relevant entity that is the issuer of an *equity interest or a *debt interest any value of which is all or a part of the relevant entity’s *associate entity equity at that time.

Step 2. Add to the result of step 1 the attributable safe harbour excess amount (see subsection (4)) for that *associate entity as at that time.

Step 3. Apply steps 1 and 2 to all such *associate entities of the relevant entity and add all the results that are positive amounts. The result of this step is the associate entity excess amount.

(3) An *associate entity’s premium excess amount at a particular time during that period is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection. In applying the method statement, disregard any amount that is attributable to an entity’s *overseas permanent establishments if it is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) at that time.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the value, as at that particular time, of all the *associate entity equity of the relevant entity that is attributable to the *associate entity (disregarding the value of any *debt interest *issued by the associate entity that is held by the relevant entity at that time).

Step 2. Work out the value, as at that time, of all the *equity capital of the *associate entity that is attributable to *equity interests that the relevant entity holds in the associate entity at that time (except equity interests whose value is all or a part of the relevant entity’s *controlled foreign entity equity at that time).

Step 3. Reduce the result of step 1 by the result of step 2. However, if the result of step 2 is a negative amount, the result of step 2 is taken to be nil for the purpose of this step.

Step 4. Multiply the result of step 3 by:

15/16 if the associate entity excess amount is applied for the purpose of working out the total debt amount of the relevant entity for that period under subsection 820-100(2), 820-200(2) or 820-210(2); or

3/5 if the associate entity excess amount is applied for the purpose of working out the adjusted on-lent amount of the relevant entity for that period under subsection 820-100(3), 820-200(3) or 820-210(3); or

the result of step 4 of the method statement in subsection 820-110(2) if the associate entity excess amount is applied for the purpose of working out the *worldwide gearing debt amount of the relevant entity for that period.

The result of this step is the premium excess amount.

(4) The *associate entity’s attributable safe harbour excess amount at a particular time during that period is the result of applying the method statement in this subsection. In applying the method statement, disregard any amount that is attributable to an entity’s *overseas permanent establishments if it is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) at that time.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the *safe harbour debt amount of the associate entity for the day during which that particular time occurs, as if the associate entity were an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI), as appropriate, for the period consisting only of that day.

Step 2. Reduce the result of step 1 by the value of the adjusted average debt of the associate entity for that day as if it had been the kind of entity that it is taken to be under step 1 for that day. If the result of this step is a negative amount, it is taken to be nil.

Step 3. Multiply the result of step 2 by the sum of:

the value, as at that time, of all the *equity capital of the associate entity that is attributable to the relevant entity at that time; and

the value, as at that time, of all the *debt interests *issued by the associate entity that are covered by subsection (5), and held by the relevant entity, at that time; and

the value, as at that time, of all the debt interests issued by the associate entity that are covered by subsection (6), and held by the relevant entity, at that time.

Step 4. Divide the result of step 3 by the sum of:

the value, as at that time, of all the *equity capital of the associate entity; and

the value, as at that time, of all the *debt interests *issued by the associate entity that are covered by subsection (5) at that time; and

the value, as at that time, of all the debt interests issued by the associate entity that are covered by subsection (6) at that time.

For the purposes of the method statement in subsection (4), this subsection covers a *debt interest at a particular time if the interest satisfies all of the following:

the interest is *on issue at that time;

neither the value of the interest, nor any part of that value, is all or a part of any cost-free debt capital of the issuer of the interest at that time;

the interest does not give rise to any cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a).

For the purposes of the method statement in subsection (4), this subsection covers a *debt interest at a particular time if the interest satisfies both of the following:

the interest is *on issue at that time;

the interest gives rise to a cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a), but the cost is not deductible from the assessable income of the issuer of the interest for any income year.

Subdivision 820-J — Equity interest in a trust or partnership

Guide to Subdivision 820-J

820-925 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides for the meanings of an equity interest in a trust or partnership for the purposes of this Division.

Table of sections

820-930 Equity interest in a trust or partnership

820-930 Equity interest in a trust or partnership

Application of provisions

(1) For the purposes of this Division and Division 230, an equity interest in an entity that is a trust or partnership has the meaning given by the provisions in Division 974 that are applied with the following modifications:

Note: An interest that satisfies both the equity test and the debt test set out in Subdivision 974-B is treated as a debt interest and not an equity interest (see that Subdivision in conjunction with the provisions applied by subsection (1)).

Equity tests

A *scheme satisfies the equity test in this subsection in relation to an entity that is a trust or partnership if the scheme gives rise to an interest set out in the following table:

This subsection has effect subject to subsection (3) (requirement for financing arrangement).

Financing arrangement

Note: Section 974-90 as applied by subsection (1) allows regulations to be made clarifying when a right or return is taken to be at the discretion of an entity or an associate.

A *scheme that would otherwise give rise to an *equity interest in an entity that is a trust or partnership because of an item in the table in subsection (2) (other than item 1) does not give rise to an equity interest in the entity unless the scheme is a financing arrangement (see section 974-130 as applied by this section) for the trust or partnership.

Form interest may take

The interest referred to in item 2, 3 or 4 in the table in subsection (2) may take the form of a proprietary right, a chose in action or any other form.

Regulations

Subject to regulations made under subsection (6), the regulations made under Subdivisions 974-C, 974-D and 974-F are applied for the purposes of this section as if they were regulations made under the provisions applied by subsection (1).

Regulations may be made under the provisions applied by subsection (1) specifically in relation to:

an *equity interest in a trust; or

an equity interest in a partnership.

Subdivision 820-JA — Worldwide debt and equity concepts

Guide to Subdivision 820-JA

820-931 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides for the meanings of worldwide debt, worldwide equity, statement worldwide debt, statement worldwide equity and statement worldwide assets.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

820-932 Worldwide debt and worldwide equity

820-933 Statement worldwide debt, statement worldwide equity and statement worldwide assets

820-935 Meaning of audited consolidated financial statements

Operative provisions

820-932 Worldwide debt and worldwide equity

Worldwide debt

(1) An entity’s worldwide debt at a particular time, means the total of the following amounts:

all the *debt interests issued by the entity:

(i) to entities other than any *Australian controlled foreign entities (the controlled entities) of which the entity is an *Australian controller at that time; and

that are still *on issue at that time;

all the debt interests issued by the controlled entities:

to entities other than the entity or other controlled entities; and

that are still on issue at that time.

Worldwide equity

(2) An entity’s worldwide equity at a particular time, means the total of the following amounts:

(a) all the *equity capital of the entity as at that time, but worked out disregarding *equity interests in the entity held at that time by *Australian controlled foreign entities (the controlled entities) of which the entity is an *Australian controller at that time;

all the equity capital of the controlled entities as at that time, but worked out disregarding equity interests in the controlled entities held at that time by:

the entity; or

other controlled entities.

820-933 Statement worldwide debt, statement worldwide equity and statement worldwide assets

Statement worldwide debt

(1) An entity’s statement worldwide debt for a period is the amount (see subsection (4)) of liabilities for the entity for the period, reduced (but not below zero) by the sum of the following amounts (see subsection (4)) for the entity for the period:

provisions;

liabilities in relation to distributions to equity participants;

trade payables;

deferred tax liabilities;

liabilities relating to employee benefits;

current tax liabilities;

deferred revenue;

liabilities relating to insurance;

any other amount specified in a legislative instrument under subsection (5).

Statement worldwide equity

(2) An entity’s statement worldwide equity for a period means the amount (see subsection (4)) of net assets for the entity for the period.

Statement worldwide assets

(3) An entity’s statement worldwide assets for a period means the amount (see subsection (4)) of assets for the entity for the period.

Amounts from audited consolidated financial statements to be used

For the purposes of this section:

an amount for an entity for a period is taken to be that amount as shown in the *audited consolidated financial statements for the entity for the period; and

sections 820-680 and 820-682 do not apply.

Other amounts

The Minister may, by legislative instrument, specify one or more amounts for the purposes of paragraph (1)(i).

820-935 Meaning of audited consolidated financial statements

(1) Audited consolidated financial statements for an entity for a period are:

the financial statements that meet the requirements in subsection (2) for the entity for the period; or

if more than one set of financial statements meet the requirements in subsection (2) for the entity for the period—whichever of those sets of financial statements the entity chooses.

(2) Financial statements meet the requirements in this subsection for an entity for a period (the relevant period) if:

(a) the statements have been prepared on a consolidated basis in relation to the entity and one or more other entities in accordance with standards covered by subsection (3) or (4) (the recognised overseas accounting standards); and

one of the entities is a worldwide parent entity mentioned in subsection (6); and

the statements show the amounts mentioned in subsections 820-933(1), (2) and (3) (however described) on that consolidated basis and in accordance with those standards; and

the statements have been audited (and the auditor’s report is unqualified) in accordance with a requirement in the law of:

a foreign jurisdiction mentioned in subsection (3) of this section; or

another jurisdiction that has adopted the standards mentioned in subsection (4); and

the statements are for the most recent period ending:

no later than the end of the relevant period; and

no earlier than 12 months before the start of the relevant period.

Recognised overseas accounting standards

(3) This subsection covers the standards (however described) that apply to the preparation of financial statements and are made, or adopted, by the responsible body in any of the following (a foreign jurisdiction):

the European Union;

the United Kingdom;

the United States of America;

Canada;

Japan;

New Zealand;

a jurisdiction specified in an instrument under subsection (5).

This subsection covers the international financial reporting standards that are made or adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board.

The Minister may, by legislative instrument, specify one or more jurisdictions for the purposes of paragraph (3)(f).

Worldwide parent entity

For the purposes of paragraph (2)(b), an entity in relation to which financial statements have been prepared is a worldwide parent entity if, for the purposes of the standards in accordance with which the statements were prepared, the entity is not controlled by another entity.

Subdivision 820-K — Zero-capital amount

Guide to Subdivision 820-K

820-940 What this Subdivision is about

The zero-capital amount represents the value of certain assets that receive special treatment in working out the maximum allowable debt of a financial entity. This Subdivision sets out the rules about the calculation of this amount.

Table of sections

820-942 How to work out the zero-capital amount

820-942 How to work out the zero-capital amount

(1) An entity’s zero-capital amount at a particular time is the result of the method statement in this subsection.

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the total value, as at that particular time, of all the assets of the entity that represent *debt interests that:

are of a kind commonly dealt in by entities that carry on a business of dealing in securities; and

the entity has sold under a reciprocal purchase agreement (otherwise known as a repurchase agreement), sell-buyback arrangement or securities loan arrangement; and

the entity has not yet repurchased under the agreement or arrangement.

Step 2. Add to the result of step 1 the total value, as at that time, of all the *debt interests issued to the entity to which the following paragraphs apply at that time:

the debt interests remain *on issue;

each of the debt interests is a loan of money for which no fees, charges or other consideration for the purpose of enhancing the credit rating of the issuer of the interest has been paid or is payable to the entity, any of the entity’s *associates or another entity that is a foreign entity;

each of the entities issuing the interests has the required credit rating for the interests concerned in accordance with subsections (4) and (5).

Step 3. Add to the result of step 2 the total value, as at that time, of all the *debt interests that are assets of the entity (whether they are debt interests issued to the entity or not) and to which the following paragraphs apply at that time:

the risk weight of each of the debt interests is either 0% or 20% under the prudential standards;

the debt interests do not satisfy all of the paragraphs in step 2.

Step 3A. Add to the result of step 3 the total value, as at that time, of all the assets of the entity, to the extent that they:

consist of rights to the return of assets covered by subsection (2A); and

are covered by none of steps 1, 2 and 3.

Step 4. Add to the result of step 3A the total value, as at that time, of all the *securitised assets that the entity has at that time if the entity is a *securitisation vehicle at that time (see subsections (2) and (3)). The result is the zero-capital amount.

This subsection covers an asset that:

the entity provided as security for the performance of its obligations in relation to securities it acquired under a reciprocal purchase agreement (otherwise known as a repurchase agreement), sell-buyback arrangement or securities loan arrangement; and

does not consist of *shares.

Securitisation vehicle

(2) An entity is a securitisation vehicle if:

it is an entity established for the purposes of acquiring, funding and holding *securitised assets (see subsection (3)); and

(b) it has acquired the securitised assets from another entity (the originator); and

the acquisition of the securitised assets is wholly funded by the issuing of *debt interests by the entity; and

in issuing the debt interests, the entity does not receive any guarantee, security or other form of credit support from any of its associate entities, the originator or any associate entity of the originator; and

the entity has not issued debt interests for any purpose other than for the purpose of funding the acquisition of the securitised assets; and

there are no debt interests issued to the entity by any of the entity’s associate entities, the originator or any associate entity of the originator; and

any *arrangements the entity has with any of its associate entities, the originator or any associate entity of the originator are those that would reasonably be expected to have been entered into by parties dealing at *arm’s length with each other.

Note: An entity that does not qualify as a securitisation vehicle may be exempt from the thin capitalisation rules under section 820-39.

Securitised assets

(3) An asset of an entity is a securitised asset if:

the entity is a securitisation vehicle; and

the asset consists of:

*debt interests issued by an entity other than the originator in relation to the securitisation vehicle that is mentioned in paragraph (2)(b); or

(ii) a lease for the hire of goods that would be a lease covered by paragraph (b) of the definition of on-lent amount if a reference to an entity in that definition were a reference to that originator; or

a *scheme that, apart from the operation of paragraph 974-25(1)(b), would have given rise to a debt interest covered by subparagraph (i); and

the asset provides security for the issuing of debt interests that funded the acquisition of the asset by the securitisation vehicle (see paragraph (2)(c)).

What is the required credit rating?

For the purposes of step 2 of the method statement in subsection (1), the required credit rating for an entity issuing a *debt interest is:

if the interest is a subordinated debt interest—a long-term foreign currency corporate credit rating of at least A (or equivalent) given to the entity by an internationally recognised rating agency; or

if the interest is a not a subordinated debt interest—a long-term foreign currency corporate credit rating of at least BBB (or equivalent) given to the entity by an internationally recognised rating agency.

When must an entity have the required credit rating

The entity must have the required credit rating as specified in any of the following paragraphs:

the entity had the required credit rating for the *debt interest when the interest was issued;

the following subparagraphs apply:

the entity did not have any long-term foreign currency corporate credit rating given to it by an internationally recognised rating agency when the debt interest was issued; but

the entity had the required credit rating for that interest at any time during the period of 6 months immediately before the interest was issued;

the following subparagraphs apply:

when the debt interest was issued, and throughout the period of 6 months immediately before the interest was issued, the entity did not have any long-term foreign currency corporate credit rating given to it by an internationally recognised rating agency; but

the entity has the required credit rating for that interest at any time during the period of 6 months immediately after the interest was issued.

Subdivision 820-KA — Cost-free debt capital and excluded equity interests

Guide to Subdivision 820-KA

820-945 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out the meaning of cost-free debt capital, and excluded equity interest, for the purposes of this Division.

Table of sections

820-946 Cost-free debt capital and excluded equity interest

820-946 Cost-free debt capital and excluded equity interest

(1) This subsection applies to an entity for a period (the relevant period) that is all or a part of an income year if the entity satisfies all of the following:

the entity is an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) or *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) for that period;

if the entity is a foreign entity—the entity holds any of the following assets throughout that period:

assets that are attributable to the entity’s *Australian permanent establishments;

other assets that are held for the purposes of producing the entity’s assessable income;

neither section 820-35 ($2 million debt deductions threshold) nor section 820-37 (exemption for entity with 90% Australian assets) prevents Subdivision 820-B, 820-C, 820-D or 820-E from disallowing any debt deduction of the entity for the income year;

(da) for some or all of that period, the entity does not meet the conditions in subsection 820-39(3) (about exemption of certain special purpose entities);

the entity is not an *exempt entity for the income year.

Note: Paragraph (c) corresponds to the threshold tests for this Division set out in sections 820-35 and 820-37.

(2) The cost-free debt capital of the entity at a particular time during the relevant period is the total value of all the *debt interests *issued by the entity that satisfy all of the following:

the interests are *on issue at that time;

none of the interests gives rise to any cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a);

each of the interests is covered by subsection (3) or (4) of this section at that time.

(2A) An *equity interest in the entity is an excluded equity interest at a particular time during the relevant period if, and only if:

if subsection (1) does not apply to the holder of the interest for all or part of the relevant period:

the entity is an associate of the holder; and

at that time, the interest has been *on issue for a period of less than 180 days; or

if subsection (1) applies to the holder for all or part of the relevant period:

the entity is an associate of the holder; and

at that time, the interest has been on issue for a period of less than 180 days; and

the interest is covered by subsection (3) at that time.

However, the interest is taken not to have been an excluded equity interest at the time if the total period for which the interest remains on issue is 180 days or more.

(3) This subsection covers a *debt interest or *equity interest held by an entity (the holder) at the particular time mentioned in subsection (2) or (2A) if:

(a) subsection (1) also applies to the holder for a period (the overlapped period) that is, or includes, all or a part of the relevant period; and

(b) for the purposes of applying this Division to both the holder and the issuer of the interest (the issuer), and in relation to only that part of the overlapped period that falls within the relevant period, either or both of the following apply:

the *valuation days used to calculate the average value of the holder’s assets are different from the valuation days used to calculate the issuer’s adjusted average debt;

the number of valuation days used to calculate the average value of the holder’s assets are different from the number of valuation days used to calculate the issuer’s adjusted average debt.

(4) This subsection covers a *debt interest held by an entity (the holder) at the particular time mentioned in subsection (2) if:

subsection (1) does not apply to the holder for a period that is, or includes, all or a part of the relevant period; and

at that time, the debt interest has been *on issue for a period of less than 180 days.

However, if the total period for which the interest remains on issue is 180 days or more, this subsection is taken not to have covered the interest at that time.

For the purposes of subsection (2), take into account the value of a *debt interest issued by a foreign entity only to the extent that the interest is attributable to assets covered by subparagraph (1)(b)(i) or (ii) that are held by the foreign entity throughout the relevant period.

Subdivision 820-L — Record keeping requirements

Guide to Subdivision 820-L

820-950 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out special record keeping requirements and related provisions about the following:

an entity that carries on its business at or through its Australian permanent establishments;

an arm’s length debt amount or arm’s length capital amount worked out under this Division.

Table of sections

Records about Australian permanent establishments

820-960 Records about Australian permanent establishments

820-962 Records about Australian permanent establishments—exemptions from Australian accounting standards

820-965 Review of Commissioner’s decision

Records about arm’s length amounts

820-980 Records about arm’s length capital amount

820-985 Records about group ratio

Offences committed by certain entities

820-990 Offences—treatment of partnerships

820-995 Offences—treatment of unincorporated companies

Records about Australian permanent establishments

820-960 Records about Australian permanent establishments

If an entity:

is an *inward investor (financial) or *inward investing entity (ADI), for all or a part of an income year; and

carries on its business at or through one or more of its *Australian permanent establishments throughout that year; and

has total revenues attributable to those Australian permanent establishments for that year that are at least $2,000,000;

the entity must keep for that year the records for which subsection (1A) or (1B) provides.

Australian accounting standards

Note: A person must comply with the requirements in section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 about the keeping of these records (see subsections (2AA) and (3) of that section).

If the entity chooses this subsection, it must keep the following records for the *Australian permanent establishments:

(a) a statement of financial position (within the meaning of the *accounting standards);

(b) a statement of financial performance (within the meaning of those standards).

The statements must:

be prepared in accordance with the accounting standards (in particular, but not limited to, accounting standards AASB 1001, AASB 1018 and AASB 1040); and

include all the notes required to accompany them under the standards.

Note: For exemptions, see section 820-962.

Overseas and international accounting standards

(1B) If the entity chooses this subsection, it must keep for the *Australian permanent establishments the statements (however described) that, under standards covered by subsection (1C) or (1D) (the overseas or international accounting standards), correspond to the statements referred to in subsection (1A). The statements must:

be prepared in accordance with those standards; and

include all the notes required to accompany them under those standards.

This subsection covers the standards (however described) that correspond to the accounting standards and are made by the responsible body in:

the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland; or

the United States of America; or

Canada; or

New Zealand; or

Japan; or

the French Republic; or

the Federal Republic of Germany.

This subsection covers the international accounting standards made or adopted by the International Accounting Standards Board.

Requirements for the records under subsection (1A) or (1B)

The entity must prepare the records for which subsection (1A) or (1B) provides:

before the time by which the entity must lodge its income tax return for the income year; and

as if:

(i) the *Australian permanent establishments were an entity (the notional entity) for which those records would be required to be prepared under the *accounting standards or the overseas or international accounting standards, as appropriate; and

for the purposes of the statement of financial position or the corresponding statement, as appropriate—the assets, liabilities (including *debt capital) and *equity capital that are attributable to the Australian permanent establishments for that income year were assets, liabilities and equity of the notional entity for that year; and

for the purposes of the statement of financial performance or the corresponding statement, as appropriate—the revenues and expenses that are attributable to the Australian permanent establishments for that year were the revenues and expenses of the notional entity for that year; and

the accounting standards, or the overseas or international accounting standards, as appropriate, referred to income years instead of financial years or the corresponding term in the overseas or international accounting standards.

Excluding Australian permanent establishments not covered by applicable double tax treaty

An entity need not comply with this section for an income year in relation to an *Australian permanent establishment if:

(a) throughout that year, the entity was, for the purposes of a double tax agreement (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) in relation to a foreign country, a resident of that foreign country (even if the entity was also an Australian resident or a resident of another foreign country); and

(b) throughout the period during that year when the entity was carrying on its *business at or through that Australian permanent establishment, the Australian permanent establishment was not a permanent establishment within the meaning of that double tax agreement.

820-962 Records about Australian permanent establishments—exemptions from Australian accounting standards

General exemption

The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, exempt, for the purposes of subsection 820-960(1A), a specified class of entities from the requirement to comply with all or part of the accounting standards for one or more income years if the Commissioner is satisfied that it would be unreasonable for the entities in that class be required to so comply.

Note: The Commissioner’s power under this subsection does not extend to the overseas or international accounting standards.

Application for specific exemption

(2) An entity (the applicant) may apply to the Commissioner, in the *approved form, for an exemption from the requirement to comply with all or part of the *accounting standards for one or more income years for the purposes of subsection 820-960(1A).

The Commissioner may grant the exemption in whole or in part if the Commissioner is satisfied that it would be unreasonable for the applicant to be required to so comply.

Note: The Commissioner’s power under this subsection does not extend to the overseas or international accounting standards.

The Commissioner must give the applicant written notice if the Commissioner:

grants the exemption; or

refuses to grant the exemption.

The Commissioner is taken to have refused to grant the exemption if the Commissioner fails to give the applicant a notice under subsection (4) within 60 days after the application is made.

A notice under subsection (4) is not a legislative instrument.

820-965 Review of Commissioner’s decision

A person who is dissatisfied with a decision of the Commissioner under subsection 820-962(3) may object against the decision in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Records about arm’s length amounts

820-980 Records about arm’s length capital amount

An entity must keep records under this section for an *arm’s length capital amount that the entity worked out for the purposes of this Division.

The records must contain particulars about the factual assumptions and relevant factors mentioned in section 820-315 or 820-410 (as appropriate) that have been taken into account in working out that amount.

The entity must prepare the records before the time by which the entity must lodge its income tax return for the income year in relation to all or a part of which the amount is worked out.

Note: A person must comply with the requirements in section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 about the keeping of these records (see subsections (2AA) and (3) of that section).

820-985 Records about group ratio

An entity must keep records under this section for a group ratio that the entity worked out for the purposes of this Division.

The records must:

contain particulars that have been taken into account in working out the group ratio; and

be sufficient for a reasonable person to understand how the group ratio has been worked out.

The entity must prepare the records before the earlier of the following times:

the time by which the entity must lodge its income tax return for the income year in relation to all or a part of which the amount is worked out;

the time at which the entity lodges its income tax return for that income year.

Note: A person must comply with the requirements in section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 about the keeping of these records (see subsections (2AA) and (3) of that section).

Offences committed by certain entities

820-990 Offences—treatment of partnerships

(1) The provisions set out in the following paragraphs (the relevant provisions) apply, in relation to records required to be kept under this Subdivision, to a partnership as if it were a person, but with the modifications set out in this section:

sections 820-960, 820-962, 820-980 and 820-985;

(b) section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

(c) Part III of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

If the relevant provisions would otherwise require or permit something to be done by the partnership, the thing may be done by one or more of the partners on behalf of the partnership.

An obligation that would otherwise be imposed on the partnership by the relevant provisions:

is imposed on each partner instead; but

may be discharged by any of the partners.

The partners are jointly and severally liable to pay an amount that would otherwise be payable by the partnership under the relevant provisions.

An offence against any of the relevant provisions that would otherwise be committed by the partnership is taken to have been committed by each partner who:

did the relevant act or made the relevant omission; or

aided, abetted, counselled or procured the relevant act or omission; or

was in any way knowingly concerned in, or party to, the relevant act or omission (whether directly or indirectly or whether by any act or omission of the partner).

For the purposes of subsection (5):

to establish that a partnership engaged in a particular conduct, it is sufficient to show that the conduct was engaged in by a partner:

in the ordinary course of the business of the partnership; or

within the scope of the actual or apparent authority of the partner; and

to establish that a partnership had a particular state of mind when it engaged in that conduct, it is sufficient to show that the partner had the relevant state of mind.

For the purposes of the relevant provisions, a change in the composition of a partnership does not affect the continuity of the partnership.

820-995 Offences—treatment of unincorporated companies

(1) The provisions set out in the following paragraphs (the relevant provisions) apply, in relation to records required to be kept under this Subdivision, to an unincorporated company as if it were a person, but with the modifications set out in this section:

sections 820-960, 820-962, 820-980 and 820-985;

(b) section 262A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

(c) Part III of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

(2) If the relevant provisions would otherwise require or permit something to be done by the company, the thing may be done by one or more members of the company’s committee of management (the members) on behalf of the company.

An obligation that would otherwise be imposed on the company by the relevant provisions:

is imposed on each member instead; but

may be discharged by any of the members.

The members are jointly and severally liable to pay an amount that would otherwise be payable by the company under the relevant provisions.

An offence against any of the relevant provisions that would otherwise be committed by the company is taken to have been committed by each member who:

did the relevant act or made the relevant omission; or

aided, abetted, counselled or procured the relevant act or omission; or

was in any way knowingly concerned in, or party to, the relevant act or omission (whether directly or indirectly or whether by any act or omission of the member).

For the purposes of subsection (5), to establish that the company had a particular state of mind when it engaged in a particular conduct, it is sufficient to show that a member had the relevant state of mind.

Division 830 — Foreign hybrids

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 830

830-A Meaning of “foreign hybrid”

830-B Extension of normal partnership provisions to foreign hybrid companies

830-C Special rules applicable while an entity is a foreign hybrid

830-D Special rules applicable when an entity becomes or ceases to be a foreign hybrid

Guide to Division 830

830-1 What this Division is about

This Division:

provides for certain entities (called foreign hybrids) that are treated as partnerships for the purposes of foreign income tax, but as companies for the purposes of tax within the meaning of this Act, to be treated as partnerships for the purposes of this Act; and

applies special rules to the entities in addition to those that normally apply to partnerships.

Subdivision 830-A — Meaning of “foreign hybrid”

Table of sections

830-5 Foreign hybrid

830-10 Foreign hybrid limited partnership

830-15 Foreign hybrid company

830-17 References to foreign income tax in section 830-10 or 830-15 do not include certain taxes

830-5 Foreign hybrid

The expression foreign hybrid means:

a foreign hybrid limited partnership; or

a foreign hybrid company.

830-10 Foreign hybrid limited partnership

(1) Subject to subsection (2), a *limited partnership is a foreign hybrid limited partnership in relation to an income year if:

it was formed in a foreign country; and

foreign income tax is imposed under the law of the foreign country on the partners, not the limited partnership, in respect of the income or profits of the partnership for the income year; and

at no time during the income year is the limited partnership, for the purposes of a law of any foreign country that imposes foreign income tax on entities because they are residents of the foreign country, a resident of that country; and

(d) disregarding subsection 94D(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, at no time during the income year is it an Australian resident; and

disregarding that subsection, in relation to the same income year of another taxpayer:

the limited partnership is a CFC at the end of a statutory accounting period that ends in the income year; and

at the end of the statutory accounting period, the taxpayer is an attributable taxpayer in relation to the CFC with an *attribution percentage greater than nil.

(2) If a partner is not an *attributable taxpayer in relation to a *limited partnership, then, for the purposes of applying the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 and this Act in relation to the partner’s interest in the limited partnership, the limited partnership is a foreign hybrid limited partnership in relation to an income year for the partner if, and only if, the partner:

(a) has made an election under former subsection 485AA(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

makes an election under this paragraph;

in relation to the partner’s interest in the partnership.

(3) For the purposes of subsection (2), the limited partnership is a foreign hybrid limited partnership in relation to any income year during which an election referred to in paragraph (2)(a) or (2)(b) is in force.

An election can only be made under paragraph (2)(b) if:

(a) disregarding subsection 94D(6) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

at the end of the income year in which the election is made, the partner has an interest in a FIF (within the meaning of former Part XI of that Act) that is a corporate limited partnership; and

the interest consists of a *share in the FIF; and

the limited partnership satisfies paragraphs (1)(a) to (d) in relation to the income year in which the election is made.

An election under paragraph (2)(b) must be made:

on or before the day on which the partner lodges the partner’s income tax return for the income year; or

within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

The election:

is in force during the income year and all later income years; and

is irrevocable.

830-15 Foreign hybrid company

(1) Subject to subsection (5), a company is a foreign hybrid company in relation to an income year if:

at all times during the income year when the company is in existence, the partnership treatment requirements for the income year in subsection (2) or (3) are satisfied; and

at no time during the income year is the company, for the purposes of a law of any foreign country that imposes foreign income tax on entities because they are residents of the foreign country, a resident of that country; and

at no time during the income year is the company an Australian resident; and

disregarding this Division, in relation to the same income year of another taxpayer:

the company is a CFC at the end of a statutory accounting period that ends in the income year; and

at the end of the statutory accounting period, the taxpayer is an attributable taxpayer in relation to the CFC with an *attribution percentage greater than nil.

Partnership treatment requirements specific to USA

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the partnership treatment requirements are satisfied if:

the company was formed in the United States of America; and

for the purposes of the law of that country relating to foreign income tax imposed by that country, the company is a limited liability company that:

is treated as a partnership; or

is an eligible entity that is disregarded as an entity separate from its owner.

Partnership treatment requirements relating to any foreign country

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the partnership treatment requirements are also satisfied if:

the company was formed in a foreign country (which may be the United States of America); and

for the purposes of the law of that country relating to foreign income tax imposed by that country, the company is treated as a partnership; and

regulations are in force setting out requirements to be satisfied by a company in relation to the income year for the purposes of this paragraph, and the company satisfies those requirements.

Regulations for the purposes of paragraph (3)(c) cannot set out requirements in relation to any income year before the one in which the regulations are made.

(5) If a shareholder is not an *attributable taxpayer in relation to a company, then, for the purposes of applying the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 and this Act in relation to the shareholder’s *share or shares in the company, the company is a foreign hybrid company in relation to an income year for the shareholder if, and only if, the shareholder:

(a) has made an election under former subsection 485AA(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

makes an election under this paragraph;

in relation to the shareholder’s share or shares in the company.

(6) For the purposes of subsection (5), the company is a foreign hybrid company in relation to any income year during which the election referred to in paragraph (5)(a) or (5)(b) is in force.

An election can only be made under paragraph (5)(b) if:

in relation to the income year in which the election is made, the company:

(i) is a FIF (within the meaning of former Part XI of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

satisfies paragraphs (1)(a) to (c); and

at the end of the income year in which the election is made, the shareholder’s interest in the FIF consists of one or more *shares in the FIF.

An election under paragraph (5)(b) must be made:

on or before the day on which the shareholder lodges the shareholder’s income tax return for the income year; or

within a further time allowed by the Commissioner.

The election:

is in force during the income year and all later income years; and

is irrevocable.

830-17 References to foreign income tax in section 830-10 or 830-15 do not include certain taxes

Treat a reference in section 830-10 or 830-15 to foreign income tax as not including any of the following:

credit absorption tax;

unitary tax;

*foreign GloBE tax or other foreign minimum tax.

(2) Foreign minimum tax mentioned in paragraph (1)(c) includes a tax specified in regulations made for the purposes of paragraph 393(2)(c) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 830-B — Extension of normal partnership provisions to foreign hybrid companies

Table of sections

830-20 Treatment of company as a partnership

830-25 Partners are the shareholders in the company

830-30 Individual interest of a partner in net income etc. equals percentage of notional distribution of company’s profits

830-35 Partner’s interest in assets

830-40 Control and disposal of share in partnership income

830-20 Treatment of company as a partnership

If a company is a foreign hybrid company in relation to an income year, the foreign hybrid tax provisions apply as if the company were a partnership, and for that purpose the following provisions of this Subdivision have effect.

830-25 Partners are the shareholders in the company

The partners in the partnership are the *shareholders in the company.

830-30 Individual interest of a partner in net income etc. equals percentage of notional distribution of company’s profits

The individual interest of a partner in the *net income or partnership loss of the partnership of the income year is equal to the percentage that, if the profits of the company for the income year were distributed at the end of the income year to its *shareholders:

if paragraph (b) does not apply—as dividends; or

if the company’s *constitution or other rules provide for the distribution of profits other than as dividends—in accordance with the constitution or those rules;

the partner, as a shareholder, could reasonably be expected to receive of the total distribution.

830-35 Partner’s interest in assets

The interest that each partner has in the assets of the partnership, under the partnership agreement, is equal to the percentage in subsection (2).

The percentage is the percentage that, if the capital of the company were distributed to its *shareholders on a winding-up of the company at the end of the income year, the partner, as a shareholder, could reasonably be expected to receive of the total distribution.

830-40 Control and disposal of share in partnership income

(1) This section applies for the purposes of determining under section 94 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 whether the partnership is so constituted or controlled, or its operations are so conducted, that a partner does not have the real and effective control and disposal of the partner’s share, or a part of the partner’s share, in the *net income of the partnership of an income year.

The reference to the partner’s share, or a part of the partner’s share, in the *net income is a reference to any rights that the *shareholder has under the *constitution or other rules of the company that were taken into account under section 830-30 in working out the individual interest of the partner in the partnership’s net income or partnership loss of the income year.

Subdivision 830-C — Special rules applicable while an entity is a foreign hybrid

Table of sections

830-45 Partner’s revenue and net capital losses from foreign hybrid not to exceed partner’s loss exposure amount

830-50 Deduction etc. where partner’s foreign hybrid revenue loss amount and foreign hybrid net capital loss amount are less than partner’s loss exposure amount

830-55 Meaning of foreign hybrid net capital loss amount

830-60 Meaning of loss exposure amount

830-65 Meaning of outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amount

830-70 Meaning of outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amount

830-75 Extended meaning of subject to foreign tax

830-45 Partner’s revenue and net capital losses from foreign hybrid not to exceed partner’s loss exposure amount

This section applies to a limited partner in a foreign hybrid in relation to an income year if the sum of the following amounts:

(a) any amount (a foreign hybrid revenue loss amount) allowable to the partner as a deduction under subsection 92(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in respect of a *partnership loss of the foreign hybrid for the income year;

any foreign hybrid net capital loss amount of the partner in respect of the foreign hybrid for the income year;

exceeds the partner’s loss exposure amount for the income year.

Reduction in foreign hybrid revenue loss amount or foreign hybrid net capital loss amount

If this section applies, the amount mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) or (b), or each of the amounts mentioned in those paragraphs, is reduced so that in total they equal the partner’s loss exposure amount. The partner must choose how much of the reduction is applied to each of the amounts.

Effect of reducing foreign hybrid net capital loss amount

If the partner’s foreign hybrid net capital loss amount in respect of the foreign hybrid for the income year is reduced under subsection (2), the partner’s net capital gain or net capital loss for the income year is worked out by assuming that the *capital gains and *capital losses taken into account in working out the partner’s foreign hybrid net capital loss amount were instead a capital loss equal to the foreign hybrid net capital loss amount after the reduction.

830-50 Deduction etc. where partner’s foreign hybrid revenue loss amount and foreign hybrid net capital loss amount are less than partner’s loss exposure amount

This section applies if:

(a) the sum of a partner’s *foreign hybrid revenue loss amount and *foreign hybrid net capital loss amount for a *foreign hybrid for an income year does not exceed the partner’s *loss exposure amount for the foreign hybrid for the income year (the difference being the partner’s available loss exposure amount); and

the partner has one or more *outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts or one or more *outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts, or both, in respect of the foreign hybrid for the income year.

Where sum of outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts and outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts does not exceed available loss exposure amount

If the sum of the *outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts and the *outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts does not exceed the available loss exposure amount:

a deduction is allowable to the partner for the income year equal to the sum of the outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts; and

the partner makes a *capital loss for the income year under section 104-270 equal to the sum of the outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts.

Where sum of outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts and outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts exceeds available loss exposure amount

If the sum of the *outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts and the *outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts exceeds the available loss exposure amount, then either or both of the following apply:

a deduction is allowable to the partner for the income year equal to some or all of the outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts;

the partner makes a *capital loss under section 104-270 equal to some or all of the outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts;

such that the sum of the deduction and the capital loss equals the available loss exposure amount.

Partner to choose how to apply subsection (3)

The partner must choose:

which of paragraphs (3)(a) and (b) is to apply or whether both are to apply; and

the amount of the deduction or *capital loss, or the amounts of both; and

the particular outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts or outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts, or both, to which they relate.

830-55 Meaning of foreign hybrid net capital loss amount

If:

the sum of a partner’s *capital losses from *CGT events happening during an income year in relation to a foreign hybrid or *CGT assets of a foreign hybrid;

exceeds:

the sum of the partner’s *capital gains from CGT events happening during the income year in relation to the foreign hybrid or CGT assets of the foreign hybrid;

the partner has a foreign hybrid net capital loss amount in respect of the foreign hybrid for the income year equal to the excess.

830-60 Meaning of loss exposure amount

(1) The loss exposure amount of a partner in a *foreign hybrid for an income year is worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out the sum of the amounts or *market values of the contributions made by the partner to the *foreign hybrid that, as at the end of the income year:

have not been repaid or returned to the partner; and

have been contributed for at least 180 days, or are intended by the partner to remain contributed for at least 180 days.

Step 2. Subtract the sum of the amounts of:

all *limited recourse debts owed by the partner at the end of the income year, to the extent that the *borrowings concerned were for the purpose of enabling the partner to make contributions to the foreign hybrid and the debts were secured by the partner’s interest in the foreign hybrid; and

all the partner’s foreign hybrid revenue loss amounts in respect of the foreign hybrid for previous income years, after any reduction under subsection 830-45(2); and

all the partner’s foreign hybrid net capital loss amounts in relation to the partnership for previous income years, after any reduction under subsection 830-45(2); and

all deductions allowed to the partner under subsection 830-50(2) or (3) in respect of the foreign hybrid for previous income years; and

all *capital losses that, as a result of subsection 830-50(2) or (3), the partner made in respect of CGT event K12 in respect of the foreign hybrid for previous income years.

Contribution in case of foreign hybrid company

For the purposes of step 1 in the method statement in subsection (1), if:

the foreign hybrid is a foreign hybrid company; and

the partner *acquired its *shares in the company from another shareholder; and

the payment or other consideration for the acquisition of the shares did not constitute the making of a contribution by the partner to the foreign hybrid;

the payment or other consideration is taken:

to be a contribution by the partner to the foreign hybrid; and

to be so contributed for as long as the partner holds the shares; and

to have been repaid to the partner to the extent of any payment that:

the foreign hybrid makes to the partner in respect of the share; and

the foreign hybrid describes as a return of capital; and

is attributable to the period during which the partner has held the shares.

830-65 Meaning of outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amount

(1) This section applies if a *foreign hybrid revenue loss amount of a partner in a *foreign hybrid in relation to an income year (the reduction year) is reduced under subsection 830-45(2).

(2) The partner has, for each later income year, an outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amount equal to the amount of the reduction, less the sum of any deductions allowable to the partner under subsection 830-50(2) or (3) in respect of the outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amount for income years between the reduction year and the later income year.

Outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amount not to form part of tax loss

To avoid doubt, a partner’s outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amount for an income year cannot form part of a *tax loss for the purposes of Division 36 or 160.

830-70 Meaning of outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amount

(1) This section applies if a *foreign hybrid net capital loss amount of a partner in a *foreign hybrid in relation to an income year (the reduction year) is reduced under subsection 830-45(2).

(2) The partner has, for each later income year, an outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amount equal to the amount of the reduction, less the sum of any *capital losses that, as a result of subsection 830-50(2) or (3), the partner makes in respect of *CGT event K12 in respect of the outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amount for income years between the reduction year and the later income year.

830-75 Extended meaning of subject to foreign tax

Where entity becomes a partner

If:

(a) an entity becomes a partner (the first partner) in a *foreign hybrid in relation to an income year; and

a gain or profit of a capital nature accrues to another partner as a result of the disposal of the whole or part of that other partner’s interest in an asset of the foreign hybrid that happens when the first partner becomes a partner; and

apart from this subsection, the gain or profit is not *subject to foreign tax in a listed country in any tax accounting period; and

if the foreign hybrid had disposed of the whole or an equivalent part of the asset at the time of the disposal of the whole or the part of the interest, any gain or profit of a capital nature that accrued to the foreign hybrid in respect of the disposal would have been subject to foreign tax in a listed country in a tax accounting period;

then, for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the gain or profit mentioned in paragraph (b) is taken to be subject to foreign tax in the listed country, and in the tax accounting period, mentioned in paragraph (d).

Where partner increases its interest

If:

(a) an entity is a partner (the first partner) that increases its interest in a *foreign hybrid in relation to an income year; and

a gain or profit of a capital nature accrues to another partner as a result of the disposal of the whole or part of that other partner’s interest in an asset of the foreign hybrid that happens when the first partner increases its interest in the foreign hybrid; and

apart from this subsection, the gain or profit is not *subject to foreign tax in a listed country in any tax accounting period; and

if the foreign hybrid had disposed of the whole or an equivalent part of the asset at the time of the disposal of the whole or the part of the interest, any gain or profit of a capital nature that accrued to the foreign hybrid in respect of the disposal would have been subject to foreign tax in a listed country in a tax accounting period;

then, for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the gain or profit mentioned in paragraph (b) is taken to be subject to foreign tax in the listed country, and in the tax accounting period, mentioned in paragraph (d).

Where entity ceases to be a partner

If:

an entity ceases to be a partner in a foreign hybrid in relation to an income year; and

a gain or profit of a capital nature accrues to the entity as a result of the disposal of its interest in an asset of the foreign hybrid that happens when the entity ceases to be a partner; and

apart from this subsection, the gain or profit is not *subject to foreign tax in a listed country in any tax accounting period; and

any gain or profit of a capital nature that accrues to the entity as a result of the disposal of its interest in the foreign hybrid that happens when the entity ceases to be a partner is subject to foreign tax in a listed country in a tax accounting period;

then, for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the gain or profit mentioned in paragraph (b) is taken to be subject to foreign tax in the listed country, and in the tax accounting period, mentioned in paragraph (d).

Where partner disposes of part of its interest

If:

an entity is a partner that disposes of part of its interest in a foreign hybrid in relation to an income year; and

a gain or profit of a capital nature accrues to the entity as a result of the disposal of part of its interest in an asset of the foreign hybrid that happens when the entity disposes of the part of its interest in the foreign hybrid; and

apart from this subsection, the gain or profit is not *subject to foreign tax in a listed country in any tax accounting period; and

any gain or profit of a capital nature that accrues to the entity as a result of the disposal of the part of its interest in the foreign hybrid is subject to foreign tax in a listed country in a tax accounting period;

then, for the purposes of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, the gain or profit mentioned in paragraph (b) is taken to be subject to foreign tax in the listed country, and in the tax accounting period, mentioned in paragraph (d).

Subdivision 830-D — Special rules applicable when an entity becomes or ceases to be a foreign hybrid

Table of sections

830-80 Setting the tax cost of partners’ interests in the assets of an entity that becomes a foreign hybrid

830-85 Setting the tax cost of assets of an entity when it ceases to be a foreign hybrid

830-90 What the expression tax cost is set means

830-95 What the expression tax cost setting amount means

830-100 What the expression tax cost means

830-105 What the expression asset-based income tax regime means

830-110 No disposal of assets etc. on entity becoming or ceasing to be a foreign hybrid

830-115 Tax losses cannot be transferred to a foreign hybrid

830-120 End of CFC’s last statutory accounting period

830-125 How long interest in asset, or asset, held

830-80 Setting the tax cost of partners’ interests in the assets of an entity that becomes a foreign hybrid

This section applies if:

(a) an entity is a *foreign hybrid in relation to an income year (the hybrid year); and

the entity was in existence at the end of the preceding income year (which may be the income year before this Division first applies to the entity); and

the entity was not a foreign hybrid in relation to that preceding income year.

For the purposes of applying an asset-based income tax regime for the hybrid year and each later income year in relation to which the entity continues to be a foreign hybrid, the tax cost is set at the start of the hybrid year, for each asset of the foreign hybrid in which each partner has an interest at that time.

830-85 Setting the tax cost of assets of an entity when it ceases to be a foreign hybrid

This section applies if:

an entity is a foreign hybrid in relation to an income year; and

the entity is in existence at the start of the next income year; and

(c) the entity is not a foreign hybrid in relation to that income year (the post-hybrid year).

For the purposes of applying an asset-based income tax regime for the post-hybrid year and each later income year in relation to which the entity continues not to be a foreign hybrid, the tax cost is set at the start of the post-hybrid year, for each asset of the entity at that time.

830-90 What the expression tax cost is set means

The following table explains what the expression tax cost is set at the start of the hybrid year or the post-hybrid year means, in relation to an asset in which a partner has an interest or in relation to an asset of the entity, for the purposes of each *asset-based income tax regime:

830-95 What the expression tax cost setting amount means

(1) A partner’s tax cost setting amount for an interest of the partner in an asset at the start of the hybrid year, in relation to an *asset-based income tax regime, is worked out as follows:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out what would have been the entity’s tax cost of the asset for the purposes of applying the asset-based income tax regime as at the start of the hybrid year if it were not a foreign hybrid in relation to the hybrid year.

Step 2. Multiply the result of step 1 by:

if the entity is a foreign hybrid company in relation to the hybrid year—the percentage applicable to the partner under subsection 830-35(2); or

if the entity is a foreign hybrid limited partnership in relation to the hybrid year—the individual interest of the partner in the asset, expressed as a percentage of the interests of all of the partners in the asset.

Step 3. If the partner paid a premium in respect of the *acquisition of its interest in the asset (see subsection (2)), add the amount of the premium to the result of step 2. If the partner received a discount in respect of the acquisition (see subsection (2)), subtract the amount of the discount from the result of step 2, but not to the extent that this would result in a negative amount.

The result of step 3 is the partner’s tax cost setting amount in respect of the asset.

Work out whether the partner paid a premium or received a discount for its interest in the asset using the following method statement:

Method Statement

Step 1. Add up all the amounts paid by the partner before the start of the hybrid year for its *shares in the entity (if the entity was a company), or for its interests in the assets of the entity and in the entity (if the entity was a *limited partnership), that it held at the start of the hybrid year, and subtract all amounts received by the partner in respect of those shares or interests by way of reduction in capital of the entity.

Step 2. Work out the amount that, if the capital of the entity had been distributed to its *shareholders on a winding-up or to its partners on a dissolution, at the end of the income year before the hybrid year, the partner could reasonably be expected to have received of the total distribution.

Step 3. If the result of step 1 exceeds the result of step 2, the partner paid a premium for its interest in the asset. If the result of step 2 exceeds the result of step 1, the partner received a discount for its interest in the asset.

Step 4. Work out the amount of the premium or discount using the formula:

(3) The entity’s tax cost setting amount for an asset at the start of the post-hybrid year in relation to an *asset-based income tax regime is equal to the sum of what the partners’ *tax costs for their interests in the asset would be at that time for the purpose of applying the asset-based income tax regime if the entity had continued to be a *foreign hybrid in relation to that income year.

830-100 What the expression tax cost means

The tax cost of a partner’s interest in an asset or of an asset of the entity for the purposes of applying an *asset-based income tax regime at the start of the post-hybrid year or the hybrid year is worked out using the following table:

830-105 What the expression asset-based income tax regime means

The provisions listed in the first column in relation to each item in the table in section 830-100 are an asset-based income tax regime.

830-110 No disposal of assets etc. on entity becoming or ceasing to be a foreign hybrid

To avoid doubt, the fact that an entity becomes or ceases to be a foreign hybrid in relation to an income year does not cause:

a CGT event to happen to any CGT asset consisting of:

any *share or interest in the entity; or

any interest in an asset of the entity; or

a disposal or any other event to happen to any other asset consisting of such a share or interest.

830-115 Tax losses cannot be transferred to a foreign hybrid

If an entity is a foreign hybrid in relation to an income year, it cannot deduct in that income year a *tax loss for a loss year in relation to which it was not a foreign hybrid.

Former foreign hybrid can deduct tax losses for income years before it became a foreign hybrid

This section does not prevent an entity that:

(a) is not a *foreign hybrid in relation to an income year (the post-hybrid year); and

was a foreign hybrid in relation to a previous income year; and

(c) was not a foreign hybrid in relation to an income year (the pre-hybrid year) before the previous year;

from deducting, in the post-hybrid year, a *tax loss for the pre-hybrid year.

830-120 End of CFC’s last statutory accounting period

If:

a taxpayer is a partner in an entity that becomes a foreign hybrid in relation to an income year; and

the entity was a CFC at the end of the taxpayer’s preceding income year; and

the last statutory accounting period of the CFC did not end at the end of the taxpayer’s preceding income year; and

if it had so ended, the taxpayer would have been an attributable taxpayer in relation to the CFC;

for the purposes of working out the attributable income of the CFC for the taxpayer in respect of the last statutory accounting period of the CFC, that statutory accounting period ends at the end of the taxpayer’s preceding income year.

830-125 How long interest in asset, or asset, held

Partner’s interest in asset when entity becomes a foreign hybrid

If an entity becomes a foreign hybrid company in relation to an income year, the interest that a partner has in an asset as mentioned in section 830-35 is taken to have been held by the partner (except for the purposes of having the tax cost of the interest set) from the later of the following times:

when the entity *acquired the asset;

when the partner acquired its *shares in the entity.

Entity’s asset when it ceases to be a foreign hybrid company

If:

(a) an entity is not a *foreign hybrid company in relation to an income year (the post-hybrid year); and

the entity was a foreign hybrid company in relation to the preceding income year; and

during:

that preceding income year; or

any earlier income year in relation to which the entity was also a foreign hybrid;

but not at the start of the first income year in relation to which the entity was a foreign hybrid company, the partners in the foreign hybrid company *acquired an interest in an asset that is an asset of the entity at the start of the post-hybrid year;

the asset is taken to have been held by the entity (except for the purposes of having the tax cost of the asset set) from the time the partners acquired their interests in the asset.

Division 832 — Hybrid mismatch rules

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 832

832-A Preliminary

832-B Concepts relating to mismatches

832-C Hybrid financial instrument mismatch

832-D Hybrid payer mismatch

832-E Reverse hybrid mismatch

832-F Branch hybrid mismatch

832-G Deducting hybrid mismatch

832-H Imported hybrid mismatch

832-I Dual inclusion income

832-J Integrity rule

832-K Modifications for Division 230 (about taxation of financial arrangements)

Guide to Division 832

832-1 What this Division is about

A “hybrid mismatch” arises if double non-taxation results from the exploitation of differences in the tax treatment of an entity or financial instrument under the laws of 2 or more countries.

There is double non-taxation if a deductible payment is not included in a tax base (this is called a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch), or if a payment gives rise to 2 deductions (this is called a deduction/deduction mismatch). Disallowing a deduction, or including an amount in assessable income, “neutralises” this tax advantage.

Subdivision 832-A — Preliminary

Guide to Subdivision 832-A

832-5 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out some general rules that apply to the provisions of this Division.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-10 Entitlement to receive payment

832-15 Entitlement to receive non-cash benefits

832-20 Losses that arise from payments or parts of payments

832-25 Recipients and payers of a payment

832-30 How this Division applies to entities

832-35 Single entity rule otherwise not disregarded

832-40 Schemes outside Australia

832-45 Relationship between this Division and other charging provisions in this Act

832-50 Relationship between this Division and Division 820

832-55 Division does not affect foreign residence rules

832-60 Valuation of trading stock affected by hybrid mismatch rules

Operative provisions

832-10 Entitlement to receive payment

This Division applies as if an entity (the payer) had made a payment to another entity (the recipient) if the recipient is entitled to receive the payment from the payer, even if the payment is not required to be made until a later time.

832-15 Entitlement to receive non-cash benefits

This Division applies as if an entity (the payer) had made a payment to another entity (the recipient) if the recipient received a *non-cash benefit from the payer.

832-20 Losses that arise from payments or parts of payments

This section applies if:

a loss gives rise to:

(i) a deduction for an entity (the payer) for an income year; or

(ii) a *foreign income tax deduction for an entity (also the payer) for a *foreign tax period; and

in working out the amount of the loss:

all or a part of a payment made, or to be made, to one or more other entities is taken into account; or

2 or more payments made, or to be made, to one or more other entities are taken into account.

Note: This section also applies to losses from Division 230 financial arrangements: see section 832-780.

Payments made to only one entity

(2) If, in working out the amount of the loss, a payment or payments made to only one entity (the recipient) are taken into account, this Division applies as if:

at the end of the income year or *foreign tax period identified in paragraph (1)(a), the payer made a payment to the recipient; and

the amount of the payment was equal to the amount of the deduction or foreign income tax deduction; and

the payment gave rise to the deduction or foreign income tax deduction.

Payments made to 2 or more entities

(3) If, in working out the amount of the loss, a payment or payments made to 2 or more entities (each of which is a recipient) are taken into account, this Division applies as if:

at the end of the income year or *foreign tax period identified in paragraph (1)(a), the payer made a payment to each recipient; and

the amount of each payment was equal to so much of the amount of the deduction or foreign income tax deduction as is reasonable having regard to the amounts of the payments actually made to the recipients; and

the payment gave rise to a deduction or foreign income tax deduction equal to the amount of the payment.

Working out whether the payment has been subject to tax

In working out for the purposes of this Division the extent to which a payment that is taken by this section to have been made is subject to Australian income tax or subject to foreign income tax, regard is to be had to the actual payments made to the recipient.

832-25 Recipients and payers of a payment

(1) To the extent this Division applies to a payment only because of section 832-10 or 832-15 (a payment provision), it applies as if:

the entity that made the payment were the entity identified in the payment provision as the payer; and

the recipient of the payment were the entity identified in the payment provision as the recipient.

If a payment would, apart from this subsection, be made to 2 or more recipients, then this Division applies as if each part of the payment made to each such recipient were a separate payment.

832-30 How this Division applies to entities

Identifying payments between entities etc.

A number of provisions in this Division refer to an entity making a payment to another entity. In determining for the purposes of this Division whether an entity makes or receives a payment, the following are to be disregarded:

subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule);

(b) Part IIIB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

any law of a foreign country that, for the purposes of a foreign tax, treats a different entity as having made the payment, or disregards the payment.

Note 1: The purpose of this subsection is to establish a uniform basis for recognising “payments” between entities across all jurisdictions. (Note that in some countries, a “payment” recognised by this subsection will not have a tax consequence because the payment is disregarded for tax purposes).

Note 2: As a consequence of paragraph (1)(a), a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group may be a hybrid payer under section 832-320 or a deducting hybrid under section 832-550 (it cannot be a reverse hybrid because of subparagraph 832-410(2)(b)(ii)).

In addition, in the case of a trust or partnership, the trust or partnership, instead of a trustee or partner, is taken, for the purposes of this Division, to do the following things:

make or receive a payment;

hold, acquire or dispose of an asset, interest or other property;

enter into or carry out a *scheme or a part of a scheme.

Identifying income or profits of entities

A number of provisions in this Division refer to the income or profits of an entity. For the purposes of this Division, things recognised in accordance with subsection (1) or (2) as being done by an entity are to be taken into account in identifying the income or profits of the entity.

Assessable income and deductions

A reference in this Division to an amount being included in the assessable income of an entity, or being allowable, or not allowable, as a deduction to an entity, is taken to be a reference to an amount that is so included, or allowable or not allowable, as the case requires, in determining:

in the case of an entity that is a trust—the entity’s *net income; or

in the case of a partnership—the partnership’s net income or partnership loss.

This section does not affect the interpretation of other provisions

Nothing in this section affects whether *tax or foreign income tax is imposed on an entity.

Nothing in this section limits, by implication, any other provision of this Act.

832-35 Single entity rule otherwise not disregarded

Subject to section 832-30, subsection 701-1(1) (the single entity rule) is not disregarded in applying this Division.

832-40 Schemes outside Australia

This Division applies in relation to a payment whether or not the *scheme under which the payment is made has been or is entered into or carried out in Australia or outside Australia or partly in Australia and partly outside Australia.

832-45 Relationship between this Division and other charging provisions in this Act

This section applies if an amount is included in the assessable income of an entity under a provision of this Division in relation to a payment.

An amount in relation to the payment that is to be included in the assessable income of the entity under a provision (other than a provision of this Division) is to be reduced to the extent (if any) necessary to ensure that the total amount included in the entity’s assessable income in relation to the payment does not exceed the amount of the payment.

Relationship with section 230-20

This section applies despite section 230-20 (about taxation of financial arrangements).

832-50 Relationship between this Division and Division 820

In determining for the purposes of this Division whether a payment gives rise to a deduction, and the amount of the deduction, disregard the effect of Division 820 (about thin capitalisation).

Nothing in this Division limits Division 820 (about thin capitalisation) in its application to reduce, or further reduce, *debt deductions of an entity.

832-55 Division does not affect foreign residence rules

Nothing in this Division affects the operation of the provisions of Division 6 that provide for the significance of foreign residence for the assessability of ordinary and statutory income.

Note: Amounts included in assessable income under this Division may be ordinary or statutory income for the purposes of Division 6.

832-60 Valuation of trading stock affected by hybrid mismatch rules

If:

an amount of a deduction for an outgoing is disallowed under this Division; and

the outgoing was incurred in connection with acquiring an item of trading stock; and

the item is on hand at the end of an income year;

the amount disallowed is to be disregarded in working out the *cost, market selling value or replacement value of the item at the end of the income year under section 70-45.

Subdivision 832-B — Concepts relating to mismatches

Guide to Subdivision 832-B

832-100 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out rules about identifying deduction/non-inclusion mismatches and deduction/deduction mismatches.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-105 When a payment gives rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch

832-110 When a payment gives rise to a deduction/deduction mismatch

832-115 Disregard effect of Division in determining deductions

832-120 Meaning of foreign income tax deduction

832-125 Meaning of subject to Australian income tax

832-130 Meaning of subject to foreign income tax

832-135 Safe harbour for translation rates

Operative provisions

832-105 When a payment gives rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch

Australian deduction

If:

a deduction (other than a deduction that is solely attributable to a currency exchange rate effect) is allowable to an entity in an income year in respect of a payment (including a part or share of the payment); and

the amount of the deduction exceeds the sum of the amounts of the payment that are:

subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period that starts no later than 12 months after the end of the income year; or

subject to Australian income tax for the income year;

then the deduction is the deduction component of a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch to which the payment gives rise.

Foreign income tax deduction

Note: A deduction/non-inclusion mismatch might give rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch (see Subdivision 832-C), a hybrid payer mismatch (see Subdivision 832-D), a reverse hybrid mismatch (see Subdivision 832-E), or a branch hybrid mismatch (see Subdivision 832-F).

If:

an entity is entitled to a foreign income tax deduction in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period in respect of a payment (including a part or share of the payment); and

the amount of the foreign income tax deduction exceeds the sum of the amounts of the payment that are:

subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country in a foreign tax period that starts no later than 12 months after the end of the foreign tax period in which the foreign income tax deduction arose; or

subject to Australian income tax for an income year that starts no later than 12 months after the end of the foreign tax period in which the foreign income tax deduction arose; and

the foreign income tax deduction is not solely attributable to:

any currency exchange rate fluctuations; or

a difference between an expressly or implicitly agreed currency exchange rate for a future date or time and the applicable currency exchange rate at that date or time;

then the foreign income tax deduction is the deduction component of a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch to which the payment gives rise.

Amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch

The amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch is the amount of the excess worked out under paragraph (1)(b) or (2)(b), as applicable.

832-110 When a payment gives rise to a deduction/deduction mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a deduction/deduction mismatch if the payment, or a part or share of the payment:

gives rise to a foreign income tax deduction in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period; and

also gives rise to:

a deduction in an income year; or

a foreign income tax deduction in a foreign country (other than the country mentioned in paragraph (a)).

Note: A deduction/deduction mismatch might give rise to a deducting hybrid mismatch (see Subdivision 832-G).

(2) Each of the following is a deduction component of the *deduction/deduction mismatch:

the foreign income tax deduction mentioned in paragraph (1)(a);

the deduction mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(i), or the foreign income tax deduction mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(ii), as the case requires.

Amount of the deduction/deduction mismatch

The amount of the deduction/deduction mismatch is the lesser of:

the amount of the foreign income tax deduction mentioned in paragraph (1)(a); and

the sum of the amounts of the deduction, or foreign income tax deduction, mentioned in subparagraph (1)(b)(i) or (ii).

Extended operation in relation to non-payment deductions

This section applies in relation to the following amounts in the same way as it applies in relation to a payment:

an amount representing the decline in value of an asset;

an amount representing a share in the net loss of a partnership or other transparent entity.

If:

an amount representing a share in the net loss of a partnership gives rise to a deduction; and

in a foreign country:

the same share in the income or profits of the partnership forms part of the tax base of an entity under a law of the foreign country dealing with foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)); but

that share is brought to account in that tax base on an item-by-item basis, instead of on a net basis;

the amount is taken for the purposes of subsection (1) to also give rise to a foreign income tax deduction in the foreign country, for an amount representing the share in the net loss of the partnership, and equal to the amount of the deduction mentioned in paragraph (a).

For the purposes of subsection (4), a reference in this Division to the *scheme under which a payment is made is taken to be a reference to:

if paragraph (4)(a) applies—the scheme under which the asset is held; or

if paragraph (4)(b) applies—the scheme under which the net loss arose.

832-115 Disregard effect of Division in determining deductions

In determining for the purposes of this Division whether a payment gives rise to a deduction, disregard the effect of this Division.

832-120 Meaning of foreign income tax deduction

(1) An amount of a loss or outgoing is a foreign income tax deduction in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period to which an entity is entitled, if the entity is entitled to deduct the amount in working out its tax base for the foreign tax period under a law of the foreign country dealing with *foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)).

(2) To avoid doubt, an amount of a loss or outgoing may be a foreign income tax deduction in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period even if the relevant entity’s tax base is nil, or a negative amount.

Effect of foreign hybrid mismatch rules

In determining for the purposes of this section whether an entity is entitled to deduct an amount as mentioned in subsection (1), disregard the effect of the following:

any provisions of foreign hybrid mismatch rules of a foreign country;

any provisions of another law of a foreign country relating to foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)) that has substantially the same effect as foreign hybrid mismatch rules.

832-125 Meaning of subject to Australian income tax

(1) An amount of income or profits is subject to Australian income tax in an income year if it is an amount that is included in an entity’s assessable income for the income year.

However, if:

the entity is a trust or partnership; and

the trust or partnership has *net income for the income year;

then the amount is only subject to Australian income tax to the extent it reasonably represents amounts:

included in the assessable income of another entity for the income year (other than an entity that is a partnership or a trust); or

for a trust—on which the trustee is liable to be assessed and to pay *tax.

Effect of CFC regimes

(3) An amount of income or profits of an entity is subject to Australian income tax if the amount is included under section 456 or 457 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in the assessable income of another entity.

In determining for the purposes of this Division whether an amount of income or profits is subject to Australian income tax, disregard the effect of this Division, unless the contrary intention appears.

832-130 Meaning of subject to foreign income tax

(1) An amount of income or profits is subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period if *foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection (7)) is payable under a law of the foreign country in respect of the amount because the amount is included in the tax base of that law for the foreign tax period.

Note: Subdivision 832-C (Hybrid financial instrument mismatch) has effect as if certain amounts that are subject to a concessional rate of foreign income tax were not subject to foreign income tax: see section 832-235.

(2) To avoid doubt, an amount of income or profits may be subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period even if the relevant entity’s tax base is nil, or a negative amount.

Effect of credits etc. for underlying taxes

Despite subsection (1), if:

(a) an amount (the pre-credit amount) of income or profits would, apart from this subsection, be *subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country; and

an entity is entitled under the law of the foreign country to a credit, rebate or other tax concession in respect of the amount for foreign tax (other than a withholding-type tax) payable under a tax law of a different country (including Australia);

then only so much of the pre-credit amount as reasonably represents an amount not effectively sheltered from *foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection (7)) by the credit, rebate or tax concession is subject to foreign income tax.

Effect of “dividend received deductions” in foreign countries

Note: This subsection is disregarded in working out whether an amount of income or profits is dual inclusion income: see subsection 832-680(3).

Despite subsection (1), if:

(a) an amount (the pre-deduction amount) of income or profits would, apart from this subsection, be *subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country; and

the amount consists of a dividend received by an entity from a company; and

the entity is entitled to a foreign income tax deduction in respect of all or part of the amount of the dividend;

then only so much of the pre-deduction amount as reasonably represents an amount not effectively sheltered from *foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection (7)) by the foreign income tax deduction is subject to foreign income tax.

Effect of CFC regimes

(5) An amount of income or profits of an entity is subject to foreign income tax if the amount is included in working out the tax base of another entity under a provision of a law of a foreign country that corresponds to section 456 or 457 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (including a tax base that is nil, or a negative amount).

Effect of foreign hybrid mismatch rules

In determining for the purposes of this section whether a payment is included in a tax base of a law of a foreign country as mentioned in subsection (1), disregard the effect of the following:

any provisions of foreign hybrid mismatch rules of a foreign country;

any provisions of another law of a foreign country relating to foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection (7)) that has substantially the same effect as foreign hybrid mismatch rules.

Certain foreign taxes disregarded in this Division

This subsection covers each of the following:

credit absorption tax;

unitary tax;

withholding-type tax;

municipal tax;

in the case of a federal foreign country—a State tax;

*foreign GloBE tax or other foreign minimum tax.

Note: The definitions of credit absorption tax and unitary tax are in section 770-15.

(8) Foreign minimum tax mentioned in paragraph (7)(f) includes a tax specified in regulations made for the purposes of paragraph 393(2)(c) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

832-135 Safe harbour for translation rates

If:

a payment has any of the following effects:

it gives rise to a deduction;

it gives rise to a foreign income tax deduction;

it is subject to Australian income tax;

it is subject to foreign income tax; and

for the purposes of this Division, the amount of one or more such effects is to be translated under Subdivision 960-C into an entity’s applicable functional currency, or into Australian currency;

then it is reasonable for the purposes of item 11A of the table in subsection 960-50(6) (as modified by the regulations) to apply an exchange rate to each translation so as best to achieve a consistent measure of the extent to which the payment had each such effect.

Note: Item 11A is added to the table in subsection 960-50(6) by the regulations.

Subdivision 832-C — Hybrid financial instrument mismatch

Guide to Subdivision 832-C

832-175 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision neutralises a hybrid financial instrument mismatch if it involves a deduction, or non-inclusion, in Australia.

A deduction/non-inclusion mismatch is a hybrid financial instrument mismatch if it is attributable to hybridity in the treatment of a financial instrument or an arrangement to transfer a financial instrument, and either the relevant parties are related or the mismatch arose under a structured arrangement.

There is also an integrity rule that covers payments that are made in lieu of hybrid payments.

This Subdivision has an extended application in relation to payments that are subject to concessional tax rates in a foreign country.

A hybrid financial instrument mismatch that is not neutralised by this Subdivision (or by foreign hybrid mismatch rules) is an offshore hybrid mismatch, which might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch under Subdivision 832-H.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-180 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response

832-185 Inclusion in assessable income—Australian secondary response

832-190 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement

832-195 When a hybrid financial instrument mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

832-200 When a payment gives rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch

832-205 Meaning of Division 832 control group

832-210 Meaning of structured arrangement

832-215 Hybrid mismatch

832-220 Hybrid requirement—payments under financial instruments

832-225 Hybrid requirement—payments under transfers of certain financial instruments

832-230 Hybrid mismatch—integrity rule for substitute payments

832-235 Extended operation of this Subdivision in relation to concessional foreign taxes

832-240 Adjustment if hybrid financial instrument payment is income in a later year

Operative provisions

832-180 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response

This section applies to an entity if:

apart from this section, the entity would be entitled to a deduction in an income year in respect of a payment; and

the deduction is the deduction component of a hybrid financial instrument mismatch to which the payment gives rise.

So much of the deduction as does not exceed the amount of the hybrid financial instrument mismatch is not allowable as a deduction.

832-185 Inclusion in assessable income—Australian secondary response

This section applies to an entity if:

the entity is the recipient of a payment that gives rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch; and

the deduction component of the mismatch is a foreign income tax deduction; and

the secondary response is required (see subsection (2)).

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), the secondary response is required unless, in the country in which the foreign income tax deduction arose, the mismatch is covered by foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision, or by a law that has substantially the same effect as foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision.

Inclusion of amount in assessable income

An amount equal to the amount of the hybrid financial instrument mismatch is included in the entity’s assessable income for the income year mentioned in subsection (4). The assessable income is taken to have been derived from the same source as the payment.

The income year is:

if the *foreign tax period in which the foreign income tax deduction arises falls wholly within an income year of the entity—that income year; or

if the foreign tax period in which the foreign income tax deduction arises straddles 2 income years of the entity—the earlier of those income years.

832-190 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement

Sections 832-180 and 832-185 do not apply to an entity in respect of a payment if:

the payment is made under a structured arrangement to which the entity is not a *party; and

subsection 832-200(3) does not apply.

832-195 When a hybrid financial instrument mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

(1) A *hybrid financial instrument mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch if:

the deduction component of the mismatch is a foreign income tax deduction; and

no amount becomes subject to Australian income tax as a result of the application of section 832-185 in relation to the mismatch; and

the mismatch is not covered by foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision, or by a law that has substantially the same effect as foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision.

Note: An offshore hybrid mismatch might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch: see Subdivision 832-H.

The amount of the offshore hybrid mismatch is the amount of the hybrid financial instrument mismatch.

832-200 When a payment gives rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch under section 832-215 or 832-230; and

subsection (3) or (6) applies.

Note: As a result of ordering rules in later Subdivisions, a payment that gives rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch does not also give rise to a hybrid mismatch under a later Subdivision of this Division.

(2) The deduction component of the *hybrid financial instrument mismatch is the *deduction component of the *deduction/non-inclusion mismatch.

This subsection applies if the following entities are related for the purposes of subsection (4):

the entity that made the payment;

each entity that is a liable entity in respect of the income or profits of the recipient of the payment.

Note: For the definition of liable entity, see section 832-325.

Related persons

Two entities are related for the purposes of this subsection if any of the following apply:

the entities are in the same Division 832 control group;

one of the entities holds a total participation interest of 25% or more in the other entity;

a third entity holds a total participation interest of 25% or more in each of the entities.

(5) For the purposes of subsection (4), treat the *direct participation interest of an entity (the holding entity) in another entity (the test entity) as being the sum of the direct participation interests held by the holding entity and its *associates in the test entity.

Structured arrangement

This subsection applies if the payment is made under a structured arrangement.

832-205 Meaning of Division 832 control group

(1) Two or more entities are in the same Division 832 control group if any of the following apply:

each of the entities is a member of a group of entities that are consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group;

one of the entities holds a total participation interest of 50% or more in each of the other entities;

a third entity holds a total participation interest of 50% or more in each of the entities.

(1A) If a trust is in a Division 832 control group as a result of the operation of subsection (1), then the trustee of the trust is in the same Division 832 control group.

(2) For the purposes of subsection (1), in determining a *direct participation interest of one entity in another entity, disregard paragraph 350(1)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (rights of shareholders to vote or participate in certain decision-making).

832-210 Meaning of structured arrangement

(1) A payment that gives rise to a *hybrid mismatch is made under a structured arrangement if:

the hybrid mismatch is priced into the terms of a *scheme under which the payment is made; or

it is reasonable to conclude that the hybrid mismatch is a design feature of a scheme under which the payment is made.

The question whether a hybrid mismatch is a design feature of a *scheme must be determined by reference to the facts and circumstances that exist in connection with the scheme, including the terms of the scheme.

(3) An entity that entered into or carried out the *scheme or any part of the scheme is a party to the *structured arrangement unless:

the entity could not reasonably have been expected to be aware that the scheme gave rise to a hybrid mismatch; and

no other entity in the same Division 832 control group as the entity could reasonably have been expected to be aware that the scheme gave rise to a hybrid mismatch; and

the financial position of each entity in the Division 832 control group would reasonably be expected to have been the same if the scheme had not given rise to the hybrid mismatch.

832-215 Hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch if:

the payment is made under any of the following:

a *debt interest;

an *equity interest;

a derivative financial arrangement;

an arrangement covered by subsection (2); and

the payment might reasonably be expected to give rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch; and

the mismatch that might reasonably be expected to arise, or a part of that mismatch, meets a hybrid requirement in section 832-220 or 832-225.

Transfers of financial instruments

An arrangement is covered by this subsection if:

the arrangement is any of the following:

a reciprocal purchase agreement (otherwise known as a repurchase agreement);

a securities lending arrangement;

a similar arrangement; and

an entity acquires any of the following under the arrangement:

a *debt interest;

an *equity interest;

a derivative financial arrangement.

Amount of the hybrid mismatch

The amount of the hybrid mismatch is:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch, unless paragraph (b) applies; or

if only a part of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch meets a hybrid requirement mentioned in paragraph (1)(c)—the amount of that part of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch.

832-220 Hybrid requirement—payments under financial instruments

A deduction/non-inclusion mismatch, or a part of such a mismatch, meets the hybrid requirement in this section if:

the payment that gives rise to the mismatch is made under any of the following:

a *debt interest;

an *equity interest;

a derivative financial arrangement; and

the mismatch, or the part of the mismatch, is attributable to differences in the treatment of the debt interest, equity interest or derivative financial arrangement, arising from the terms of the interest or arrangement; and

the exception in subsection (2) does not apply.

Example: Redeemable preferences shares that are treated under this Act as a debt interest, and in a foreign country as an equity interest.

Exception for deferrals not exceeding 3 years

This exception applies if:

the difference in treatment mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) primarily relates to a deferral in the recognition of income or profits under the *debt interest, the *equity interest or the derivative financial arrangement; and

the term of the interest or arrangement is 3 years or less.

832-225 Hybrid requirement—payments under transfers of certain financial instruments

A deduction/non-inclusion mismatch, or a part of such a mismatch, meets the hybrid requirement in this section if:

the payment that gives rise to the mismatch is made under an arrangement covered by subsection 832-215(2); and

the mismatch, or the part of the mismatch, is attributable to differences in the treatment of the arrangement; and

the exception in subsection (2) of this section does not apply.

Exception for deferrals not exceeding 3 years

This exception applies if:

the difference in treatment mentioned in paragraph (1)(b) primarily relates to a deferral in the recognition of income or profits under the arrangement; and

the term of the arrangement is 3 years or less.

832-230 Hybrid mismatch—integrity rule for substitute payments

(1) A payment also gives rise to a hybrid mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch; and

the payment is made under an arrangement under which any of the following is transferred:

a *debt interest;

an *equity interest;

a derivative financial arrangement; and

(c) the payment, or a part of the payment, (the substitute payment) could reasonably be regarded as having been converted into a form that is in substitution for a *return (however described) on the interest or arrangement; and

the return is covered by subsection (2).

This subsection covers a *return (however described) on a *debt interest, an *equity interest, or a derivative financial arrangement, that is transferred if any of the following apply:

the return is made to the payer of the substitute payment, and is not subject to foreign income tax or subject to Australian income tax;

the return is not made to the payer of the substitute payment, but if it had been it would not have been subject to foreign income tax or subject to Australian income tax;

if the return were instead made to the payee of the substitute payment:

it would be subject to foreign income tax or subject to Australian income tax; or

it would give rise to a hybrid mismatch under section 832-215.

Amount of the hybrid mismatch

The amount of the hybrid mismatch is the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch.

832-235 Extended operation of this Subdivision in relation to concessional foreign taxes

This section applies in working out, for the purposes of this Subdivision, whether an amount is subject to foreign income tax.

(2) An amount of income or profits of an entity is treated as if it were not *subject to foreign income tax if:

apart from this section, the amount would be subject to foreign income tax; and

(b) the rate of *foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)) (the lower rate) on the amount under the law of the relevant foreign country is lower than the rate (the ordinary rate) that would ordinarily be imposed on interest income derived by an entity of that kind in the foreign country.

Amount of a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch

However, for the purposes of working out the amount of a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch that is affected by this section, the amount of a payment that is treated by this section as not being subject to foreign income tax is to be discounted by multiplying it by the following fraction:

where:

lower rate means the lower rate mentioned in paragraph (2)(b).

ordinary rate means the ordinary rate mentioned in paragraph (2)(b).

832-240 Adjustment if hybrid financial instrument payment is income in a later year

(1) There is an adjustment under this section for an entity in an income year (the adjustment year) if:

an amount was not allowable as a deduction for the entity in an earlier income year under section 832-180 in respect of a payment that gave rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch; and

(b) an amount (the taxed amount) of the payment is:

subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period that ends within 12 months after the end of the adjustment year; or

subject to Australian income tax in the adjustment year.

The taxed amount is an amount the entity can deduct in the adjustment year.

Subsection (2) does not apply if, on the assumption that subsections 832-180(2) and 832-725(6) were disregarded, no amount would have been allowable as a deduction in respect of the payment because of subsection 832-725(3).

The total amounts deducted under this section in respect of a payment must not exceed the amount that was not allowable as a deduction in respect of the payment as mentioned in paragraph (1)(a).

No adjustment for concessional taxes

This section does not apply if the hybrid mismatch would not have arisen apart from section 832-235.

Subdivision 832-D — Hybrid payer mismatch

Guide to Subdivision 832-D

832-280 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision neutralises a hybrid payer mismatch if it involves a deduction, or non-inclusion, in Australia.

A deduction/non-inclusion mismatch is a hybrid payer mismatch if it is made by a hybrid payer, and the mismatch would not have arisen, or would have been less, if the payment had instead been made by an ungrouped entity. It is also a requirement that the relevant parties are in the same control group or the mismatch arose under a structured arrangement.

An entity is a hybrid payer if a payment it makes is disregarded for the purposes of the tax law of one country (resulting in non-inclusion), but is deductible for the purposes of the tax law of another country.

The neutralising amount for the hybrid payer mismatch is reduced by dual inclusion income.

A hybrid payer mismatch that is not neutralised by this Subdivision (or by foreign hybrid mismatch rules) is an offshore hybrid mismatch, which might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch under Subdivision 832-H.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-285 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response

832-290 Inclusion in assessable income—Australian secondary response

832-295 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement

832-300 When a hybrid payer mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

832-305 When a payment gives rise to a hybrid payer mismatch

832-310 Hybrid mismatch

832-315 Hybrid requirement—assume payment was made to same recipient but by an ungrouped payer

832-320 Hybrid payer

832-325 Meaning of liable entity

832-330 Neutralising amount

832-335 Adjustment if hybrid payer has dual inclusion income in a later year

Operative provisions

832-285 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response

This section applies to an entity if:

apart from this section, the entity would be entitled to a deduction in an income year in respect of a payment; and

the deduction is the deduction component of a hybrid payer mismatch to which the payment gives rise.

So much of the deduction as does not exceed the *neutralising amount for the hybrid payer mismatch is not allowable as a deduction.

Note: The neutralising amount is worked out under section 832-330.

832-290 Inclusion in assessable income—Australian secondary response

This section applies to an entity if:

the entity is the recipient of a payment that gives rise to a hybrid payer mismatch; and

the deduction component of the mismatch is a foreign income tax deduction; and

the secondary response is required (see subsection (2)).

When secondary response is required

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(c), the secondary response is required unless, in the country in which the foreign income tax deduction arose, the mismatch is covered by foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision, or by a law that has substantially the same effect as foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision.

Inclusion of amount in assessable income

An amount equal to the *neutralising amount for the hybrid payer mismatch is included in the entity’s assessable income for the income year mentioned in subsection (4). The assessable income is taken to have been derived from the same source as the payment.

(4) The income year (the inclusion year) is:

if the *foreign tax period in which the foreign income tax deduction arises falls wholly within an income year of the entity—that income year; or

if the foreign tax period in which the foreign income tax deduction arises straddles 2 income years of the entity—the earlier of those income years.

832-295 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement

Sections 832-285 and 832-290 do not apply to an entity in respect of a payment if:

the payment is made under a structured arrangement to which the entity is not a *party; and

subsection 832-305(3) does not apply.

832-300 When a hybrid payer mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

(1) A *hybrid payer mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch if:

the deduction component of the mismatch is a foreign income tax deduction; and

no amount becomes subject to Australian income tax as a result of the application of section 832-290 in relation to the mismatch; and

the mismatch is not covered by foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision, or by a law that has substantially the same effect as foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision.

Note: An offshore hybrid mismatch might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch: see Subdivision 832-H.

The amount of the offshore hybrid mismatch is the *neutralising amount for the hybrid payer mismatch.

832-305 When a payment gives rise to a hybrid payer mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a hybrid payer mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch under section 832-310; and

subsection (3) or (4) applies.

(2) The deduction component of the *hybrid payer mismatch is the *deduction component of the *deduction/non-inclusion mismatch mentioned in section 832-310.

Control group

This subsection applies if the following entities are in the same Division 832 control group:

the hybrid payer;

each entity that is a liable entity in respect of the income or profits of the hybrid payer.

Note: For the meaning of Division 832 control group, see section 832-205.

Structured arrangement

This subsection applies if the payment is made under a structured arrangement.

Note: For the meaning of structured arrangement, see section 832-210.

832-310 Hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch; and

the payment meets the hybrid requirement in section 832-315.

Amount of the hybrid mismatch

The amount of the hybrid mismatch is the lesser of:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch; and

if there is an excess under either subparagraph 832-315(2)(b)(i) or 832-315(3)(b)(i)—the amount of the excess.

Ordering rule

(3) However, a payment does not give rise to a hybrid mismatch under this section if it gives rise to a *hybrid financial instrument mismatch.

832-315 Hybrid requirement—assume payment was made to same recipient but by an ungrouped payer

The payment meets the hybrid requirement in this section if:

the payment is made by a hybrid payer; and

subsection (2) or (3) applies.

Payment would have been taxed in Australia

This subsection applies if:

the non-including country identified in subsection 832-320(3) is Australia; and

either:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch exceeds the amount that would be the amount of that mismatch if the amount of the payment that was subject to Australian income tax for an income year was instead worked out on the assumption in subsection (4); or

on the assumption in subsection (4), the payment would have given rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch.

Payment would have been taxed in a foreign country

This subsection applies if:

the non-including country identified in subsection 832-320(3) is a foreign country; and

either:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch exceeds the amount that would be the amount of that mismatch if the amount of the payment that was subject to foreign income tax for a *foreign tax period was instead worked out on the assumption in subsection (4); or

on the assumption in subsection (4), the payment would have given rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch.

Assumption—payer was an ungrouped entity

For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), assume that the payment had instead been made:

to the same recipient; but

by an entity that was a liable entity in the non-including country identified in subsection 832-320(3) only in respect of its own income or profits.

Note: For the meaning of liable entity, see section 832-325.

832-320 Hybrid payer

(1) An entity (the test entity) is a hybrid payer in relation to a payment it makes if:

subsection (2) applies to the entity in relation to a country and the payment; and

subsection (3) applies to the entity in relation to a different country and the payment.

Note: The entity, the payments it makes, and its income or profits are generally identified disregarding tax provisions: see section 832-30.

Deducting country—entity is not grouped with recipient

(2) This subsection applies to a test entity in relation to a country (the deducting country) and a payment the test entity makes if:

the test entity, or another entity, is a liable entity in the deducting country in respect of income or profits of the test entity (or a part of those income or profits); and

(b) that liable entity is not also a liable entity in the deducting country in respect of income or profits of the recipient of the payment.

Non-including country—entity is grouped with recipient

(3) This subsection applies to a test entity in relation to a country (a non-including country) and a payment the test entity makes if:

the test entity, or another entity, is a liable entity in the non-including country in respect of income or profits of the test entity (or a part of the income or profits); and

that liable entity is also a liable entity in the non-including country in respect of income or profits of the recipient of the payment.

832-325 Meaning of liable entity

Entity is a taxpayer in respect of its own income or profits

(1) An entity is a liable entity, in a country, in respect of its income or profits if:

for Australia:

*tax is imposed on the entity in respect of all or part of its income or profits for an income year; or

the entity is a public trading trust (including a trust that makes a choice under section 703-50 (Choice to consolidate a consolidatable group)); or

the entity is an entity to which Division 295 (about superannuation entities) applies; and

for a foreign country—foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)) is imposed under the law of the foreign country:

on the entity in respect of all or part of its income or profits for a *foreign tax period; or

on the income or profits of the entity in a way that corresponds to the way that foreign income tax is imposed under the law of that country on the income or profits of a company (regardless whether the foreign income tax is actually imposed on that entity, or another entity).

Note 1: The entity, and its income or profits, are generally identified disregarding tax provisions: see section 832-30.

Note 2: An example is an entity that is a company (and is not a subsidiary member of a consolidated group or MEC group). In Australia, a company is the liable entity in respect of its income or profits.

Entity is a taxpayer in respect of another entity’s income or profits

(2) An entity is a liable entity, in a country, in respect of the income or profits of another entity (the test entity) if:

for Australia—*tax is imposed on the entity in respect of all or part of the income or profits of the test entity for an income year; and

for a foreign country—foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)) is imposed under the law of the foreign country on the entity in respect of all or part of the income or profits of the test entity for a *foreign tax period.

Note 1: The test entity, and its income or profits, are generally identified disregarding tax provisions: see section 832-30.

Note 2: An example is a test entity that is a partnership. In Australia, each partner in the partnership is a liable entity in respect of the income or profits of the partnership.

(2A) However, an entity is not a liable entity in a country in respect of the income or profits of a test entity under subsection (2) if the test entity is the liable entity in that country in respect of the income or profits as a result of the operation of subparagraph (1)(a)(ii), (a)(iii) or (b)(ii).

To avoid doubt, the following outcomes may arise under subsection (2) in a country:

there may be one or more *liable entities in respect of the income or profits of a test entity;

there may be one or more interposed entities between the test entity and an entity that is a liable entity in respect of the income or profits of the test entity.

Entity not required to be actually liable to pay tax or foreign income tax

To avoid doubt, an entity may be a liable entity in respect of its own, or another entity’s, income or profits in a country even if any of the following situations exist:

there are no actual income or profits;

there are income or profits, but no part of the income or profits is:

for Australia—subject to Australian income tax; or

for a foreign country—subject to foreign income tax in that foreign country;

the entity is not actually liable to pay an amount of *tax or foreign income tax.

Note: In determining whether an entity is a liable entity in such a situation, assume that income or profits within the tax base of the country exist.

Effect of CFC regimes

(5) An entity is not a liable entity in respect of income or profits of another entity (the test entity) merely because all or part of the income or profits of the test entity are:

(a) included under section 456 or 457 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 in the assessable income of the other entity; or

included under a corresponding provision of a law of a foreign country in working out the tax base of the other entity (including a tax base of nil, or a negative amount).

832-330 Neutralising amount

(1) The neutralising amount for a *hybrid payer mismatch is the amount of the *hybrid mismatch from subsection 832-310(2), reduced (but not below nil) by the amount of any *dual inclusion income that is available to be applied in working out the neutralising amount.

Australian deduction—inclusions must be in Australia and in the non-including country

An amount of dual inclusion income is available to be applied to reduce the *neutralising amount for a hybrid payer mismatch to which section 832-285 applies if:

the hybrid payer is eligible to apply the amount (see subsection 832-680(7)); and

the amount is subject to Australian income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the income year mentioned in subsection 832-285(1); and

the amount is subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the non-including country identified in subsection 832-320(3).

Note: Section 832-680 modifies the meanings of subject to Australian income tax and subject to foreign income tax for the purpose of working out dual inclusion income.

Australian non-inclusion—inclusions must be in Australia and in the deducting country

An amount of dual inclusion income is available to be applied to reduce the *neutralising amount for a hybrid payer mismatch to which section 832-290 applies if:

the hybrid payer is eligible to apply the amount (see subsection 832-680(7)); and

the amount is subject to Australian income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the inclusion year mentioned in subsection 832-290(4); and

the amount is subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the deducting country mentioned in subsection 832-320(2).

Offshore hybrid mismatch—inclusions must be in the deducting country and the non-including country

An amount of dual inclusion income is available to be applied to reduce the *neutralising amount for a hybrid payer mismatch that is an offshore hybrid mismatch if:

the hybrid payer is eligible to apply the amount (see subsection 832-680(7)); and

in the same *foreign tax period as the period in which the foreign income tax deduction arose, the amount is subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the deducting country mentioned in subsection 832-320(2); and

the amount is subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the non-including country identified in subsection 832-320(3).

832-335 Adjustment if hybrid payer has dual inclusion income in a later year

(1) There is an adjustment under this section for an entity in an income year (the adjustment year) if:

in an earlier income year, all or part of a deduction of the entity in respect of a payment that gave rise to a hybrid payer mismatch was not allowable under section 832-285; and

an amount of dual inclusion income is:

available to be applied by the hybrid payer in the adjustment year; and

subject to Australian income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the adjustment year; and

subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the non-including country identified in subsection 832-320(3).

So much of the amount of dual inclusion income that satisfies paragraph (1)(b) as does not exceed the amount that was not allowable as a deduction is an amount the entity can deduct in the adjustment year.

For the purposes of a later application of this section, treat the amount that was not allowable as a deduction under section 832-285 as being reduced by the amount deducted under subsection (2) of this section.

Subdivision 832-E — Reverse hybrid mismatch

Guide to Subdivision 832-E

832-375 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision neutralises a reverse hybrid mismatch if it involves a deduction in Australia.

A deduction/non-inclusion mismatch is a reverse hybrid mismatch if it is made directly or indirectly to a reverse hybrid, and the mismatch would not have arisen, or would have been less, if the payment had instead been made directly to an investor in the reverse hybrid.

An entity is a reverse hybrid if it is transparent for the purposes of the tax law of the country in which it is formed, but non-transparent for the purposes of the tax law of the country in which investors in it are subject to tax (resulting in non-inclusion).

A reverse hybrid mismatch that is not neutralised by this Subdivision (or by foreign hybrid mismatch rules) is an offshore hybrid mismatch, which might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch under Subdivision 832-H.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-380 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response

832-385 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement

832-390 When a reverse hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

832-395 When a payment gives rise to a reverse hybrid mismatch

832-400 Hybrid mismatch

832-405 Hybrid requirement—assume payment was made to an investor

832-410 Reverse hybrid

Operative provisions

832-380 Deduction not allowable—Australian primary response

This section applies to an entity if:

apart from this section, the entity would be entitled to a deduction in an income year in respect of a payment; and

the deduction is the deduction component of a reverse hybrid mismatch to which the payment gives rise.

So much of the deduction as does not exceed the amount of the reverse hybrid mismatch is not allowable as a deduction.

832-385 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement

Section 832-380 does not apply to an entity in respect of a payment if:

the payment is made under a structured arrangement to which the entity is not a *party; and

subsection 832-395(3) does not apply.

832-390 When a reverse hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

(1) A *reverse hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch if:

the deduction component of the mismatch is a foreign income tax deduction; and

the country in which the foreign income tax deduction arose does not have foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision.

Note: An offshore hybrid mismatch might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch: see Subdivision 832-H.

The amount of the offshore hybrid mismatch is the amount of the reverse hybrid mismatch.

832-395 When a payment gives rise to a reverse hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a reverse hybrid mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch under section 832-400; and

subsection (3) or (4) applies.

(2) The deduction component of the *reverse hybrid mismatch is the *deduction component of the *deduction/non-inclusion mismatch mentioned in section 832-400.

Control group

This subsection applies if the following entities are in the same Division 832 control group:

the entity that made the payment;

the reverse hybrid;

each entity that is an investor identified in paragraph 832-410(2)(c) in relation to the reverse hybrid.

Note: For the meaning of Division 832 control group, see section 832-205.

Structured arrangement

This subsection applies if the payment is made under a structured arrangement.

Note: For the meaning of structured arrangement, see section 832-210.

832-400 Hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch; and

the payment meets the hybrid requirement in section 832-405.

Amount of the hybrid mismatch

The amount of the hybrid mismatch is the lesser of:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch; and

if there is an excess under either subparagraph 832-405(2)(b)(i) or (3)(b)(i)—the amount of the excess.

Ordering rule

(3) A payment does not give rise to a hybrid mismatch under this section if it gives rise to a *hybrid financial instrument mismatch or a *hybrid payer mismatch.

832-405 Hybrid requirement—assume payment was made to an investor

The payment meets the hybrid requirement in this section if:

the payment is made directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, to a reverse hybrid; and

subsection (2) or (3) applies.

Payment would have been taxed in Australia

This subsection applies if:

the investor country identified in subsection 832-410(3) is Australia; and

either:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch exceeds the amount that would be the amount of that mismatch if the amount of the payment that was subject to Australian income tax for an income year was instead worked out on the assumption in subsection (4); or

on the assumption in subsection (4), the payment would have given rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch, a hybrid payer mismatch or a reverse hybrid mismatch.

Payment would have been taxed in a foreign country

This subsection applies if:

the investor country identified in subsection 832-410(3) is a foreign country; and

either:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch exceeds the amount that would be the amount of that mismatch if the amount of the payment that was subject to foreign income tax for a *foreign tax period was instead worked out on the assumption in subsection (4); or

on the assumption in subsection (4), the payment would have given rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch, a hybrid payer mismatch or a reverse hybrid mismatch.

Assumption—payment was made to the investing taxpayer

For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), assume that the payment had instead been made:

by the same entity; but

directly to the investing taxpayer identified in paragraph 832-410(3)(a) or (b).

832-410 Reverse hybrid

(1) An entity (the test entity) is a reverse hybrid in relation to a payment made to it if:

subsection (2) applies to the entity in relation to a country and the payment; and

subsection (3) applies to the entity in relation to a different country and the payment.

Note: The entity, the payments it makes, and its income or profits are generally identified disregarding tax provisions: see section 832-30.

Formation country—entity is transparent and payment is not within the tax base

(2) This subsection applies to a test entity in relation to a country (the formation country) and a payment made to the entity if:

the test entity is formed in the formation country; and

for the formation country, the test entity is:

not a liable entity; and

for Australia—not a *member of a consolidated group or MEC group; and

(c) for the formation country, another entity (an investor) is a liable entity in respect of income or profits of the test entity.

Note: For the meaning of liable entity, see section 832-325.

Investor country—entity is not transparent

(3) This subsection applies to a test entity in relation to a country (the investor country) and a payment made to the entity if, in the investor country:

(a) an investor identified in paragraph (2)(c) is a *liable entity (an investing taxpayer) in respect of its own income or profits, but not in respect of the test entity’s income or profits; or

(b) an entity that is a liable entity (also an investing taxpayer) in respect of the investor’s income or profits is not also a liable entity in respect of the test entity’s income or profits.

Subdivision 832-F — Branch hybrid mismatch

Guide to Subdivision 832-F

832-450 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision neutralises a branch hybrid mismatch if it involves a deduction in Australia (and the non-inclusion was not also in Australia).

A deduction/non-inclusion mismatch is a branch hybrid mismatch if it is made directly or indirectly to a branch hybrid, and the mismatch would not have arisen, or would have been less, if the residence country had not recognised the permanent establishment.

An entity is a branch hybrid in relation to a payment made to it if, for the purposes of the tax law of the country in which it is a resident, the payment is treated as being allocated to a permanent establishment in another country, but in the other country, the payment is treated as not being allocated to a permanent establishment in that country.

A branch hybrid mismatch that is not neutralised by this Subdivision (or by foreign hybrid mismatch rules) is an offshore hybrid mismatch, which might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch under Subdivision 832-H.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-455 Deduction not allowable

832-460 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement

832-465 When a branch hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

832-470 Branch hybrid mismatch

832-475 Hybrid mismatch

832-480 Hybrid requirement—payment made directly or indirectly to a branch hybrid

832-485 Branch hybrid

Operative provisions

832-455 Deduction not allowable

This section applies to an entity if:

apart from this section, the entity would be entitled to a deduction in an income year in respect of a payment; and

the deduction is the deduction component of a branch hybrid mismatch to which the payment gives rise.

So much of the deduction as does not exceed the amount of the branch hybrid mismatch is not allowable as a deduction.

(3) However, this section does not apply in relation to the *branch hybrid mismatch if subsection 23AH(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply in relation to the payment because of subsection (4A) of that section.

832-460 Exception where entity not a party to the structured arrangement

Section 832-455 does not apply to an entity in respect of a payment if:

the payment is made under a structured arrangement to which the entity is not a *party; and

subsection 832-470(3) does not apply.

832-465 When a branch hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

(1) A *branch hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch if:

the deduction component of the mismatch is a foreign income tax deduction; and

the country in which the foreign income tax deduction arose does not have foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision; and

(c) subsection 23AH(4A) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 does not apply in relation to the branch hybrid mismatch.

Note: An offshore hybrid mismatch might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch: see Subdivision 832-H.

The amount of the offshore hybrid mismatch is the amount of the branch hybrid mismatch.

832-470 Branch hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a branch hybrid mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch under section 832-475; and

subsection (3) or (4) applies.

(2) The deduction component of the *branch hybrid mismatch is the *deduction component of the *deduction/non-inclusion mismatch mentioned in section 832-475.

Control group

This subsection applies if the following entities are in the same Division 832 control group:

the entity that made the payment;

the branch hybrid.

Note: For the meaning of Division 832 control group, see section 832-205.

Structured arrangement

This subsection applies if the payment is made under a structured arrangement.

Note: For the meaning of structured arrangement, see section 832-210.

832-475 Hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch; and

the mismatch, or a part of the mismatch, meets the hybrid requirement in section 832-480.

Amount of the hybrid mismatch

The amount of the hybrid mismatch is the lesser of:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch; and

if there is an excess under either subparagraph 832-480(2)(b)(i) or (3)(b)(i)—the amount of the excess.

Ordering rule

(3) A payment does not give rise to a hybrid mismatch under this section if it gives rise to a *hybrid financial instrument mismatch, a *hybrid payer mismatch or a *reverse hybrid mismatch.

832-480 Hybrid requirement—payment made directly or indirectly to a branch hybrid

The payment meets the hybrid requirement in this section if:

the payment is made directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, to a branch hybrid; and

subsection (2) or (3) applies.

Payment would have been taxed in Australia

This subsection applies if:

the residence country identified in subsection 832-485(2) is Australia; and

either:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch exceeds the amount that would be the amount of that mismatch if the amount of the payment that was subject to Australian income tax for an income year was instead worked out on the assumption in subsection (4); or

on the assumption in subsection (4), the payment would have given rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch or a hybrid payer mismatch.

Payment would have been taxed in a foreign country

This subsection applies if:

the residence country identified in subsection 832-485(2) is a foreign country; and

either:

the amount of the deduction/non-inclusion mismatch exceeds the amount that would be the amount of that mismatch if the amount of the payment that was subject to foreign income tax for a *foreign tax period was instead worked out on the assumption in subsection (4); or

on the assumption in subsection (4), the payment would have given rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch or a hybrid payer mismatch.

Assumption—residence country treated payment as non-branch income

For the purposes of subsections (2) and (3), assume that the payment was instead treated as income derived by the liable entity but not in carrying on a business at or through a *PE in another country for the purposes of:

if the residence country is Australia—this Act; or

if the residence country is a foreign country—the law of the residence country relating to foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)).

832-485 Branch hybrid

(1) An entity is a branch hybrid, in relation to a payment made to the entity, if:

subsection (2) applies to the entity in relation to a country and a payment; and

subsection (4) applies to the entity in relation to the payment.

Residence country applies branch profits exemption

(2) This subsection applies to an entity in relation to a country (the residence country) and a payment made to the entity if, for that country:

the entity satisfies the residency test in subsection 832-555(9) and is a liable entity in respect of its own income or profits; and

the payment is treated as income derived by the liable entity in carrying on a business at or through a *PE in another country; and

as a result of an exemption or other tax concession to which that liable entity is entitled in respect of income derived in carrying on a business at or through the PE, the payment is not:

if the residence country is Australia—subject to Australian income tax; or

if the residence country is a foreign country—subject to foreign income tax in that foreign country.

Note: For the meaning of liable entity, see section 832-325.

(3) In determining whether subparagraph (2)(c)(i) is satisfied, disregard the effect of subsection 23AH(4A) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Branch country fails to tax payment

(4) This subsection applies to an entity in relation to the other country mentioned in paragraph (2)(b) (the branch country) and a payment made to the entity if:

(a) the payment is treated as not having been derived in carrying on a business at or through a *PE of the entity, or as otherwise not having a sufficient connection to a taxable presence in the branch country, for the purposes of:

if the branch country is Australia—this Act; or

if the branch country is a foreign country—the law of the branch country relating to foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)); and

as a result, the payment is not:

if the branch country is Australia—subject to Australian income tax; or

if the branch country is a foreign country—subject to foreign income tax in that foreign country.

Modified meaning of permanent establishment

Subsection (6) applies if:

the residence country has entered into, with the branch country:

if either the residence country or the branch country is Australia—an international tax agreement; or

if subparagraph (i) does not apply—a treaty or other agreement relating to the avoidance of double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income and capital; and

the agreement or treaty (as the case requires) contains:

if either the residence country or the branch country is Australia—a permanent establishment article; or

if subparagraph (i) does not apply—a provision corresponding to a permanent establishment article.

A reference in this section to a *PE in a country is taken to be a reference to a permanent establishment within the meaning of the relevant agreement or treaty in the country.

Subdivision 832-G — Deducting hybrid mismatch

Guide to Subdivision 832-G

832-525 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision neutralises a deducting hybrid mismatch if it involves a deduction in Australia.

A deduction/deduction mismatch is generally a deducting hybrid mismatch.

An entity is a deducting hybrid if a payment it makes is deductible for the purposes of the tax law of 2 countries.

However, unless the deducting hybrid is a dual resident, there are rules identifying which country is the primary response country. If Australia is not the primary response country, this Subdivision will not neutralise the deducting hybrid mismatch unless:

the primary response country does not have hybrid mismatch rules; and

the relevant parties are in the same control group, or the mismatch arose under a structured arrangement.

The neutralising amount for the deducting hybrid mismatch is reduced by dual inclusion income.

A deducting hybrid mismatch that is not neutralised by this Subdivision (or by foreign hybrid mismatch rules) is an offshore hybrid mismatch, which might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch under Subdivision 832-H.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-530 Deduction not allowable

832-535 Additional requirements for secondary response

832-540 When a deducting hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

832-545 When an amount gives rise to a deducting hybrid mismatch

832-550 Deducting hybrid

832-555 Identifying a secondary response country

832-560 Neutralising amount

832-565 Adjustment if deducting hybrid has dual inclusion income in a later year

Operative provisions

832-530 Deduction not allowable

This section applies to an entity if:

apart from this section, the entity would be entitled to a deduction in an income year; and

the deduction is a deduction component of a deducting hybrid mismatch.

So much of the deduction as does not exceed the *neutralising amount for the deducting hybrid mismatch is not allowable as a deduction.

Note: The neutralising amount is worked out under section 832-560.

832-535 Additional requirements for secondary response

However, if there is a secondary response country in relation to the deducting hybrid mismatch (see section 832-555), and that country is Australia, section 832-530 does not apply in relation to the deducting hybrid mismatch unless:

the secondary response is required (see subsection (2)); and

subsection (3) or (4) applies.

When secondary response is required

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), the secondary response is required unless:

a liable entity in respect of the income or profits of the deducting hybrid satisfies the residency test in subsection 832-555(9) in the primary response country; and

in the primary response country, the mismatch is covered by foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision, or by a law that has substantially the same effect as foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision.

Control group

This subsection applies if the following entities are in the same Division 832 control group:

the deducting hybrid;

if one or more entities other than the deducting hybrid is a liable entity in respect of the income or profits of the deducting hybrid in a deducting country—each such liable entity.

Note: For the meaning of Division 832 control group, see section 832-205.

Structured arrangement

This subsection applies if the payment is made under a structured arrangement.

Note 1: For the meaning of structured arrangement, see section 832-210.

Note 2: If the deduction is a non-payment deduction, see also subsection 832-110(5).

832-540 When a deducting hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch

(1) A *deducting hybrid mismatch is an offshore hybrid mismatch if:

the only deduction components of the mismatch are foreign income tax deductions; and

the mismatch is not covered by foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision, or by a law that has substantially the same effect as foreign hybrid mismatch rules that correspond to this Subdivision, in any country in which a foreign income tax deduction arose.

Note: An offshore hybrid mismatch might give rise to an imported hybrid mismatch: see Subdivision 832-H.

The amount of the offshore hybrid mismatch is the *neutralising amount for the deducting hybrid mismatch.

832-545 When an amount gives rise to a deducting hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment or other amount gives rise to a deducting hybrid mismatch if there is a *deducting hybrid in relation to the payment or other amount.

(2) Each *deduction component of the *deduction/deduction mismatch mentioned in paragraph 832-550(a) is a deduction component of the *deducting hybrid mismatch.

(3) A *deducting hybrid mismatch is also a hybrid mismatch.

Ordering rule

(4) However, a payment does not give rise to a deducting hybrid mismatch if it gives rise to a *hybrid financial instrument mismatch, a *hybrid payer mismatch, a *reverse hybrid mismatch or a *branch hybrid mismatch.

832-550 Deducting hybrid

An entity is a deducting hybrid in relation to a payment or other amount if:

the payment or other amount gives rise to a deduction/deduction mismatch; and

the entity is:

for a payment—the entity that makes the payment; or

for an amount that represents the decline in value of a depreciating asset (see paragraph 832-110(4)(a))—the entity that holds the asset; or

for an amount that represents a share in the net loss of a partnership or other transparent entity (see paragraph 832-110(4)(b))—an entity that has an interest in the partnership or other transparent entity; and

the entity:

is a liable entity in one deducting country (but not both); or

satisfies the residency test in subsection 832-555(9) in both deducting countries, and is also a liable entity in both deducting countries; or

is a *member of a consolidated group or a MEC group.

832-555 Identifying a secondary response country

This section applies if an amount gives rise to a deducting hybrid mismatch, other than a deducting hybrid mismatch covered by subsection (2).

Dual residents—no secondary response

This subsection covers a deducting hybrid mismatch if:

the only liable entity in respect of income or profits of the deducting hybrid is the deducting hybrid; and

the liable entity satisfies the residency test in subsection (9) in both deducting countries.

Note 1: For the meaning of liable entity, see section 832-325.

Note 2: If the deducting hybrid is a dual resident, the mismatch may be neutralised by any country.

Country is a primary response country unless this section provides otherwise

(3) A country in which the amount gives rise to a deduction or *foreign income tax deduction (a deducting country) is a primary response country in relation to the *deducting hybrid mismatch unless the country is identified as the secondary response country under subsection (4), (5), (6), (7) or (8).

Both countries recognise the same liable entity—residence country is secondary response

If:

the deducting hybrid is itself the liable entity in each deducting country; and

in one deducting country, the deducting hybrid does not satisfy the residency test in subsection (9); and

(c) in the other deducting country, the deducting hybrid does satisfy the residency test;

then the country mentioned in paragraph (b) is the secondary response country.

If:

in both deducting countries, the same entity is the liable entity in respect of the income or profits of the deducting hybrid; and

in one deducting country, the liable entity does not satisfy the residency test in subsection (9); and

(c) in the other deducting country, the liable entity does satisfy the residency test;

then the country mentioned in paragraph (b) is the secondary response country.

Countries recognise different liable entities—non-parent country is secondary response

If:

the liable entity for one deducting country is a different entity to the entity that is the liable entity for the other deducting country; and

in one deducting country, the deducting hybrid is the liable entity;

then the country mentioned in paragraph (b) is the secondary response country.

If:

the liable entity for one deducting country is a different entity to the entity that is the liable entity for the other deducting country; and

the deducting hybrid is not the liable entity in either country; and

in one deducting country, the entity that is a liable entity is also a liable entity in respect of the income or profits of the entity that is the liable entity in the other deducting country;

then the country mentioned second in paragraph (c) is the secondary response country.

If:

the liable entity for one deducting country is a different entity to the entity that is the liable entity for the other deducting country; and

subsections (6) and (7) do not apply; and

in one deducting country, the deducting hybrid and the liable entity both satisfy the residency test in subsection (9);

then the country mentioned in paragraph (c) is the secondary response country.

Residency test

An entity satisfies the residency test in this subsection in relation to a country, if:

if the country is Australia—the entity is an Australian entity; or

if the country is a foreign country:

the entity is a resident of the foreign country for the purposes of the law of the foreign country relating to foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)); or

the tax base of the entity, as it relates to foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)), includes income from worldwide sources.

832-560 Neutralising amount

(1) The neutralising amount for a *deducting hybrid mismatch is worked out by:

starting with the lesser of the amounts of each deduction or foreign income tax deduction to which the amount gives rise; and

reducing (but not below nil) the result from paragraph (a) by the amount of any dual inclusion income that is available to be applied in working out the neutralising amount.

Australian deduction—inclusions must be in Australia and in the other deducting country

An amount of dual inclusion income is available to be applied to reduce the *neutralising amount for a deducting hybrid mismatch to which section 832-530 applies if:

the deducting hybrid is eligible to apply the amount (see subsection 832-680(7)); and

the amount is subject to Australian income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the income year mentioned in subsection 832-530(1); and

the amount is subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the foreign country in which the foreign income tax deduction arose.

Note: Section 832-680 modifies the meanings of subject to Australian income tax and subject to foreign income tax for the purpose of working out dual inclusion income.

Offshore hybrid mismatch—inclusions must be in the deducting countries

An amount of dual inclusion income is available to be applied to reduce the *neutralising amount for a deducting hybrid mismatch that is an offshore hybrid mismatch if:

the deducting hybrid is eligible to apply the amount (see subsection 832-680(7)); and

the amount is subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the foreign country in which one of the foreign income tax deductions arose, and in the same *foreign tax period; and

the amount is also subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the foreign country in which another of the foreign income tax deductions arose.

832-565 Adjustment if deducting hybrid has dual inclusion income in a later year

(1) There is an adjustment under this section for an entity in an income year (the adjustment year) if:

in an earlier income year, all or part of a deduction of the entity in respect of an amount that gave rise to a deducting hybrid mismatch was not allowable under section 832-530; and

an amount of dual inclusion income is:

available to be applied by the deducting hybrid in the adjustment year; and

subject to Australian income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the adjustment year; and

subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection 832-680(1) in the foreign country in which the foreign income tax deduction arose.

So much of the amount of dual inclusion income that satisfies paragraph (1)(b) as does not exceed the amount that was not allowable as a deduction is an amount the entity can deduct in the adjustment year.

Subsection (2) does not apply if:

the amount that was not allowable as a deduction under section 832-530 relates to a payment; and

on the assumption that subsection 832-530(2) were disregarded, no amount would have been allowable as a deduction in respect of the payment because of subsection 832-725(3).

For the purposes of a later application of this section, treat the amount that was not allowable as a deduction under section 832-530 as being reduced by the amount deducted under subsection (2) of this section.

Subdivision 832-H — Imported hybrid mismatch

Guide to Subdivision 832-H

832-605 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision neutralises an imported hybrid mismatch. This mismatch is an integrity rule that applies when one or more entities are interposed between a hybrid mismatch and a country that has hybrid mismatch rules.

Identifying an imported hybrid mismatch involves testing whether a hybrid mismatch involving 2 foreign countries has been “imported” into Australia by a deduction. If so, there are priority rules that allocate the neutralisation of the mismatch between countries that have hybrid mismatch rules.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-610 Deduction not allowable

832-615 When a payment gives rise to an imported hybrid mismatch

832-620 Hybrid mismatch

832-625 Meaning of importing payment

832-630 Working out the amount of the imported hybrid mismatch

832-635 Carry forward of residual offshore hybrid mismatches

Operative provisions

832-610 Deduction not allowable

This section applies in relation to an imported hybrid mismatch if, apart from this section, an entity would be entitled to a deduction in an income year in respect of a payment that gives rise to the imported hybrid mismatch.

So much of the deduction as does not exceed the amount of the imported hybrid mismatch is not allowable as a deduction.

Note: The amount of the imported hybrid mismatch is worked out under section 832-630.

832-615 When a payment gives rise to an imported hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to an imported hybrid mismatch if:

the payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch under section 832-620; and

an item in the table in subsection (2) applies to the importing payment.

Note: The amount of the imported hybrid mismatch is worked out under section 832-630.

Priority rules for importing payments

(2) If more than one item in the following table covers an *importing payment in relation to an *offshore hybrid mismatch, apply the first item that covers it. However, an item does not apply to an importing payment if:

an item higher in the table applies to one or more other importing payments in relation to the offshore hybrid mismatch; and

the offshore hybrid mismatch is, or will be, fully neutralised by the application of this Subdivision, and equivalent provisions of applicable foreign hybrid mismatch rules, to those other importing payments.

Note 1: For the meaning of structured arrangement, see section 832-210.

Note 2: For the meaning of Division 832 control group, see section 832-205.

832-620 Hybrid mismatch

(1) A payment gives rise to a hybrid mismatch if the payment is an *importing payment in relation to an *offshore hybrid mismatch.

Note: For the meaning of offshore hybrid mismatch see sections 832-195, 832-300, 832-390, 832-465, and 832-540.

Ordering rule

(2) A payment does not give rise to a hybrid mismatch under this section if it gives rise to a *hybrid financial instrument mismatch, a *hybrid payer mismatch, a *reverse hybrid mismatch, a *branch hybrid mismatch or a *deducting hybrid mismatch.

Note: However, for an imported hybrid mismatch to arise, a different payment must have given rise to an offshore hybrid mismatch that is of one of these kinds.

832-625 Meaning of importing payment

(1) A payment an entity (the payer) makes is an importing payment in relation to an *offshore hybrid mismatch if:

either:

apart from section 832-610, the payment, or a part of the payment, gives rise to a deduction in an income year covered by subsection (2); or

the payment, or a part of the payment, gives rise to a foreign income tax deduction in a foreign country that has foreign hybrid mismatch rules, in a *foreign tax period covered by subsection (2); and

the payment is made directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities, to another entity; and

(c) the other entity (the offshore deducting entity) is:

the entity that made the payment that gave rise to the offshore hybrid mismatch; or

if the offshore hybrid mismatch is a deducting hybrid mismatch—the deducting hybrid.

Period within which mismatch may be imported

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(a), a *foreign tax period or income year is covered by this subsection if:

it ends at or after the end of the foreign tax period in which a deduction component of the offshore hybrid mismatch arose; and

it has at least one day in common with that period.

Indirect importations

For the purposes of determining whether a payment is made indirectly through one or more interposed entities to the offshore deducting entity:

it is sufficient if payments exist between each interposed entity, and it is not necessary to demonstrate that each payment in a series of payments funds the next payment, or is made after the previous payment; and

each payment made by an interposed entity must:

give rise to a foreign income tax deduction in a country that does not have foreign hybrid mismatch rules; and

not give rise to a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch.

Loss surrender and grouping relief

Subsection (5) applies if:

(a) a payment is made to an entity (the first entity); and

(b) another entity (the second entity) makes a payment (the second payment) to a third entity; and

the first entity and the second entity are in the same Division 832 control group; and

under the law of a foreign country relating to foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)):

a foreign income tax deduction arises in respect of the second payment; and

the foreign income tax deduction may, as a result of a concessional feature of that law, be transferred to, shared with, or otherwise applied by, the first entity.

Note: For the meaning of Division 832 control group, see section 832-205.

For the purposes of this section, treat:

a payment as having been made by the first entity to the second entity; and

the payment as having given rise to a foreign income tax deduction (but not a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch) in the foreign country mentioned in paragraph (4)(d).

832-630 Working out the amount of the imported hybrid mismatch

The amount of the imported hybrid mismatch is the lesser of:

the importing deduction amount worked out under subsection (2) in relation to the deduction; and

the amount worked out using the following formula:

where:

importing deduction means the amount of the importing deduction amount worked out under subsection (2) in relation to the deduction.

remaining offshore hybrid mismatch means:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the amount of the offshore hybrid mismatch; or

if an item higher in the table in subsection 832-615(2) applies to one or more other *importing payments in relation to the offshore hybrid mismatch—the amount of the offshore hybrid mismatch that is not, or will not be, neutralised by the application of this Subdivision, and equivalent provisions of applicable foreign hybrid mismatch rules, in relation to those other importing payments.

total importing deductions of equal priority means the amount worked out by:

identifying each *importing payment in relation to the offshore hybrid mismatch to which the same item in the table in subsection 832-615(2) applies; and

working out under subsection (2) the importing deduction amount in relation to the deduction or foreign income tax deduction to which each such importing payment gives rise; and

summing the results from paragraph (b) for each such importing payment.

(2) The amount (the importing deduction amount) worked out under this subsection in relation to a deduction or *foreign income tax deduction is:

if the *importing payment is made directly to the offshore deducting entity—the amount of the deduction or foreign income tax deduction; or

if the importing payment is made indirectly through one or more interposed entities to the offshore deducting entity—the lesser of:

the amount of the deduction or foreign income tax deduction; and

the smallest amount of any foreign income tax deduction to which a payment by an interposed entity gave rise.

832-635 Carry forward of residual offshore hybrid mismatches

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) a payment made in a particular *foreign tax period gave rise to an *offshore hybrid mismatch (the original mismatch); and

the original mismatch is only partly neutralised by the application of this Subdivision and equivalent provisions of applicable foreign hybrid mismatch rules.

This Subdivision applies as if:

the offshore deducting entity had made a payment in the next *foreign tax period; and

(b) the payment gave rise to an *offshore hybrid mismatch (the residual mismatch); and

the amount of the residual mismatch was the amount of the original mismatch that was not neutralised by the application of this Subdivision and equivalent provisions of applicable foreign hybrid mismatch rules.

Subdivision 832-I — Dual inclusion income

Guide to Subdivision 832-I

832-675 What this Subdivision is about

Income that is taxed in 2 countries is dual inclusion income. It can be applied to reduce the neutralising amount for the hybrid payer mismatch and the deducting hybrid mismatch.

This Subdivision modifies the concepts of “subject to Australian income tax” and “subject to foreign income tax” for the purposes of calculating dual inclusion income.

It also identifies which entities are able to apply dual inclusion income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-680 Dual inclusion income, and when an entity is eligible to apply it

Operative provisions

832-680 Dual inclusion income, and when an entity is eligible to apply it

(1) An amount of income or profits is dual inclusion income if 2 or more of the following outcomes arise for the amount:

it is subject to Australian income tax in an income year;

it is subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country in a *foreign tax period;

it is subject to foreign income tax in a foreign country (other than the country mentioned in paragraph (b)) in a foreign tax period.

Note: In certain circumstances, dual inclusion income can be applied to reduce the neutralising amount for a hybrid payer mismatch (see section 832-330) or a deducting hybrid mismatch (see section 832-560).

In determining for the purposes of subsection (1) whether an amount of income or profits is subject to Australian income tax, disregard subsection 832-125(2) (which is about when an amount included in the assessable income of a trust or partnership is subject to Australian income tax), so far as it applies in relation to assessable income from a foreign source.

Effect of Australian foreign income tax offset for underlying taxes

For the purposes of subsection (1), if:

(a) an amount of assessable income of a *corporate tax entity (the assessable amount) would, apart from this subsection and subsection (1A), be *subject to Australian income tax; and

an amount of foreign income tax (except a tax covered by subsection 832-130(7)) paid in respect of the assessable amount counts towards a tax offset for an entity under Division 770;

then:

if the amount of the tax offset equals or exceeds the amount of *tax that would, having regard only to the assessable amount and the rate at which tax is imposed on the entity, be payable on the assessable amount—the assessable amount is treated as if it were not subject to Australian income tax; and

if the amount of the tax offset is a proportion of the amount of that tax—then that proportion of the assessable amount is treated as if it were not subject to Australian income tax.

Effect of credits etc. for underlying taxes

In determining for the purposes of subsection (1) whether an amount of income or profits is subject to foreign income tax in a *foreign tax period, disregard subsection 832-130(3).

Extension for certain on-payments through grouped entities

Subsection (5) applies, if:

an entity is a member of a dual inclusion income group in a country (see subsection (6)); and

(b) an amount of income or profits of the entity (the on-payment amount) is a payment received by the entity from another member of the dual inclusion income group at a time; and

(c) it is reasonable to conclude that the payment was funded by an amount of income or profits of the other member (the funding income or profits); and

it is reasonable to conclude that the funding income or profits were:

if the country mentioned in paragraph (a) is Australia—subject to Australian income tax; or

if the country mentioned in paragraph (a) is a foreign country—subject to foreign income tax in the foreign country; and

the funding income or profits were not dual inclusion income under subsection (1) (disregarding subsection (5)) in the country.

In determining whether paragraph (4)(d) is satisfied, have regard to any previous application of subsection (5).

For the purposes of subsection (1), the on-payment amount is treated as if it were:

if the country mentioned in paragraph (4)(a) is Australia—subject to Australian income tax in the income year in which the time mentioned in paragraph (4)(b) occurs; or

if the country mentioned in paragraph (4)(a) is a foreign country—subject to foreign income tax in the foreign country in the *foreign tax period in which the time mentioned in paragraph (4)(b) occurs.

(6) Two or more entities (the member entities) are members of a group (a dual inclusion income group) in a country for the purposes of this Division if in that country:

the same entity or entities are *liable entities in respect of the income or profits of each of the member entities; and

no other entity is a liable entity in respect of the income or profits of any of the member entities.

Note: For example, entities that are members of a consolidated group or MEC group.

When an entity is eligible to apply dual inclusion income

An entity is eligible to apply an amount of dual inclusion income if the amount is income or profits of:

the entity; or

if paragraph (a) does not apply and the entity is a member of a dual inclusion income group in any country—an entity that is a member of the dual inclusion income group.

However, an entity is not eligible to apply the amount if it has already been applied by any entity by a previous application of a provision of this Division.

Interaction with other provisions

To avoid doubt, if a provision of this section has the effect that an amount is treated for the purposes of subsection (1) as if it were subject to Australian income tax, or subject to foreign income tax, then that effect extends to another provision of this Act that refers to an amount that is (as the case requires):

subject to Australian income tax for the purposes of subsection (1) of this section; or

subject to foreign income tax for the purposes of subsection (1) of this section.

Note: For example, an amount that would not be subject to Australian income tax for the purposes of subsection (1) apart from subsection (1A) satisfies paragraphs 832-330(2)(b) and (3)(b) and subparagraph 832-335(1)(b)(ii).

Subdivision 832-J — Integrity rule

832-720 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision contains an integrity measure that disallows an Australian deduction for a payment of interest (or a payment of a similar character) made by an entity (the paying entity) under a scheme to a foreign entity (the interposed foreign entity). The deduction will be disallowed if certain conditions are satisfied, including that:

(a) the paying entity, the interposed foreign entity and another foreign entity (the ultimate parent entity) are in the same Division 832 control group; and

the payment is not subject to Australian income tax; and

(c) the highest rate of foreign income tax (the foreign country rate) on the payment is 10% or less; and

it is reasonable to conclude (having regard to certain matters) that the entity, or one of the entities, that entered into or carried out all or part of the scheme did so for a purpose including a purpose of enabling a deduction to be obtained in respect of the payment, and enabling foreign income tax to be imposed on the payment at a rate of 10% or less.

However, the deduction will not be disallowed if, assuming that the payment had been made directly to the ultimate parent entity:

the rate of foreign income tax on the payment in the country of residence of the ultimate parent entity would be less than or equal to the foreign country rate; and

the payment would not give rise to a hybrid mismatch of a particular kind.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-725 Payments made to interposed foreign entity (integrity measure)—denial of deduction

832-730 Back to back arrangements, etc.

832-735 Determination may specify kinds of scheme and circumstances where no denial of deduction

Operative provisions

832-725 Payments made to interposed foreign entity (integrity measure)—denial of deduction

Subsection (3) applies if:

(a) an entity (the paying entity) makes a payment under a *scheme to a *foreign entity (the interposed foreign entity), either directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed *Australian trusts or Australian partnerships (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); and

(b) the paying entity, the interposed foreign entity and another foreign entity (the ultimate parent entity) are in the same *Division 832 control group; and

the ultimate parent entity is not controlled by any other entity (other than an entity that is not a member of the Division 832 control group); and

the payment is of:

(i) an amount of interest (within the meaning of subsection 128A(1AB) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936); or

an amount under a derivative financial arrangement; and

an entity is entitled to a deduction in an income year in respect of the payment (disregarding this section); and

the payment is not subject to Australian income tax; and

either:

(i) the payment is *subject to foreign income tax in one or more foreign countries, and the highest rate (the foreign country rate) at which the payment is subject to foreign income tax is 10% or less; or

the payment is not subject to foreign income tax; and

it is reasonable to conclude (having regard to the matters in subsection (2)) that the entity, or one of the entities, who entered into or carried out the scheme or any part of the scheme did so for a principal purpose of, or for more than one principal purpose that includes a purpose of:

enabling a deduction to be obtained in respect of the payment; and

enabling foreign income tax to be imposed on the payment at a rate of 10% or less, or enabling foreign income tax not to be imposed on the payment.

For the purposes of subsection (1), disregard paragraphs 832-130(7)(d) and (e) (exclusion of municipal and State taxes in working out what is subject to foreign income tax).

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(h), have regard to the following matters:

the facts and circumstances that exist in relation to the *scheme;

if the payment is an amount of interest as mentioned in subparagraph (1)(d)(i)—the source of the funds used by the interposed foreign entity to provide the paying entity with the loan or other debt interest in respect of which the payment of interest is made;

whether the interposed foreign entity engages in substantial commercial activities in carrying on a banking, financial or other similar business.

The entity mentioned in paragraph (1)(e) is not entitled to the deduction mentioned in that paragraph.

Subsection (3) does not apply if it is reasonable to conclude that:

the following requirements are satisfied:

(i) the amount of the payment is taken into account under Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

the sum of the *attribution percentages of each attributable taxpayer in relation to the interposed foreign entity, for the purposes of sections 456 and 457 of that Act in respect of the income year in which the payment is made, is at least 100%; or

requirements similar to those in paragraph (a), under the law of a foreign country that has substantially the same effect as Part X of that Act in respect of that foreign country, are satisfied in relation to the interposed foreign entity; or

assuming that the payment were treated as being divided into 2 separate payments:

the requirements in paragraph (a) would be satisfied in relation to one of those separate payments; and

the requirements in paragraph (b) would be satisfied in relation to the other of those separate payments.

Subsection (3) does not apply if it is reasonable to conclude that, assuming that the payment had been made directly to the ultimate parent entity:

the payment would:

be subject to foreign income tax at a rate that is the same as, or less than, the foreign country rate; or

not be subject to foreign income tax; and

the payment would not give rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch, a hybrid payer mismatch or a reverse hybrid mismatch.

Subsection (3) does not apply if the payment gives rise to a hybrid financial instrument mismatch, a hybrid payer mismatch, a reverse hybrid mismatch, a branch hybrid mismatch or an imported hybrid mismatch.

Subsection (3) does not apply to the extent that an amount to which the payment relates was not allowable as a deduction under subsection 832-530(2).

832-730 Back to back arrangements, etc.

Subsection (2) applies if:

(a) an entity (the original paying entity) makes a payment of a kind mentioned in subparagraph 832-725(1)(d)(i) to another entity; and

the other entity, or a further entity, pays an amount of that kind to a foreign entity; and

the payments mentioned in paragraphs (a) and (b) are made under an arrangement involving back-to-back loans or an arrangement that is economically equivalent and intended to have a similar effect to back-to-back loans.

For the purposes of this Subdivision, treat the original paying entity as having made the payment mentioned in paragraph (1)(a) to the foreign entity mentioned in paragraph (1)(b).

832-735 Determination may specify kinds of scheme and circumstances where no denial of deduction

Subsection 832-725(3) does not apply if:

where a determination made for the purposes of paragraph (2)(a) specifies a kind of *scheme—the scheme mentioned in subsection 832-725(1) is of that kind; or

where a determination made for the purposes of paragraph (2)(b) specifies a kind of circumstances in relation to a scheme—circumstances of that kind exist in relation to the scheme mentioned in subsection 832-725(1).

For the purposes of subsection (1), the Minister may, by legislative instrument, make a determination that:

specifies kinds of *schemes; and

specifies kinds of circumstances in relation to schemes.

Subdivision 832-K — Modifications for Division 230 (about taxation of financial arrangements)

Guide to Subdivision 832-K

832-775 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision contains modifications applying to gains and losses from financial arrangements.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

832-780 Section 832-20 applies to Division 230 losses

832-785 Adjusting Division 230 loss

832-790 Modifications relating to Division 230 gains and losses

Operative provisions

832-780 Section 832-20 applies to Division 230 losses

To avoid doubt, the reference in paragraph 832-20(1)(a) to a loss includes:

a loss from a *Division 230 financial arrangement; and

an amount treated under section 832-790 as a separate loss from a Division 230 financial arrangement.

832-785 Adjusting Division 230 loss

(1) This section applies if a provision of this Division (a disallowing provision) would, apart from this section, apply to make not allowable all or a part of a deduction for:

a loss from a *Division 230 financial arrangement; or

an amount treated under section 832-790 as a separate loss from a Division 230 financial arrangement.

The disallowing provision does not apply.

Note: See instead section 230-522.

However, the following provisions (about adjustments) apply as if the disallowing provision had applied to make the deduction, or the part of the deduction, not allowable:

832-240(1)(a);

832-335(1)(a);

832-565(1)(a).

832-790 Modifications relating to Division 230 gains and losses

This section applies to the following:

a gain that, apart from this Division, would be included in an entity’s assessable income for an income year under Division 230;

a loss that, apart from this Division, would be allowable as a deduction to an entity for an income year under Division 230;

a gain or a loss that, apart from this Division, would be dealt with in accordance with subsection 230-310(4) in relation to an income year.

Separation of currency effects for Division 230 gains and losses

For the purposes of this Division, split a gain into 2 separate gains, or a gain and a loss, as follows:

to the extent to which the gain represents a currency exchange rate effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss;

to the extent that it does not represent that effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which this Division applies.

For the purposes of this Division, split a loss into 2 separate losses, or a gain and a loss, as follows:

to the extent to which the loss represents a currency exchange rate effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss;

to the extent that it does not represent that effect, treat it as a separate gain or loss from the financial arrangement to which this Division applies.

For the purposes of this Division, assume an amount treated under paragraph (2)(b) or (3)(b) as a separate loss would, apart from this Division, be allowable as a deduction to the entity for the income year.

This Division applies to a non-currency component that is a gain

If there is an amount treated under paragraph (2)(b) or (3)(b) as a separate gain from a financial arrangement, the gain is treated as consisting of any actual payments made under the financial arrangement and taken into account in working out the amount of the gain or loss the entity made under the arrangement.

For the purposes of this Division, assume the gain is an amount that, subject to Division 6 (about effect of foreign residence), is included in the entity’s assessable income.

Division 840 — Withholding taxes

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 840

840-M Managed investment trust withholding tax

840-S Labour mobility program withholding tax

Guide to Division 840

840-1 What this Division is about

This Division provides the rules to determine if you are liable to pay income tax in respect of certain Australian sourced income paid to you, or which you are entitled to receive.

The rules are relevant for foreign residents and certain other entities.

The income tax payable is a withholding tax. The associated withholding obligations are in the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Amounts on which there is a liability to pay withholding tax are non-assessable non-exempt income.

Subdivision 840-M — Managed investment trust withholding tax

Guide to Subdivision 840-M

840-800 What this Subdivision is about

If you are a foreign resident you may be liable to pay income tax on certain amounts of Australian sourced net income (other than dividends, interest and royalties) of a withholding MIT that are either paid to you or to which you become entitled.

A beneficiary (other than a foreign pension fund) of a trust in the capacity of a trustee of another trust will not be liable to income tax on these amounts.

Amounts on which there is a liability to pay withholding tax are non-assessable non-exempt income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

840-805 Liability for managed investment trust withholding tax

840-810 When managed investment trust withholding tax is payable

840-815 Certain income is non-assessable non-exempt income

840-820 Agency rules

Operative provisions

840-805 Liability for managed investment trust withholding tax

Liability

You are liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on the amount identified in subsection (2), (3) or (4) as the fund payment part if that subsection applies to you.

Note 1: The tax, which is called managed investment trust withholding tax, is imposed by the Income Tax (Managed Investment Trust Withholding Tax) Act 2008 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.

Note 2: See Subdivision 12-H in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for provisions dealing with withholding from fund payments, and Subdivision 12A-C in that Schedule for provisions dealing with obligations to pay the Commissioner amounts analogous to such withholding in relation to AMITs.

Note 3: This subsection does not apply to residents of information exchange countries for the first income year starting on or after the first 1 July after the day on which the Tax Laws Amendment (Election Commitments No. 1) Act 2008 receives the Royal Assent. Subdivision 840-M of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 applies instead.

Payments from withholding MITs

This subsection applies to you if:

you are paid an amount from a trust that is a withholding MIT in relation to an income year, or an amount is applied or dealt with as you direct by such a trust; and

(b) all or part of that amount (the fund payment part) is represented by a *fund payment in relation to that year; and

you are, in respect of the fund payment part, a beneficiary (but not a beneficiary in the capacity of a trustee of another trust); and

you are a foreign resident when you are paid the amount or when the amount is applied or dealt with as you direct.

Note 1: Because a fund payment can be adjusted to account for earlier fund payments and the expected amounts of later fund payments (see subsection 12A-110(5) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953), the amount of a particular fund payment may not reflect the actual amount you are paid for the purposes of this subsection.

Note 2: If the withholding MIT is an AMIT, under subsection 12A-205(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, amounts may be treated, for the purposes of this Subdivision, as having been paid to you from the trustee of the AMIT.

Payments from custodians

This subsection applies to you if:

you are paid an amount from a custodian, or an amount is applied or dealt with as you direct by a custodian; and

(b) all or part of that amount (the fund payment part) is reasonably attributable to a *fund payment in relation to an income year by a trust that is a *withholding MIT in relation to that year; and

you are, in respect of the fund payment part, a beneficiary (but not a beneficiary in the capacity of a trustee of another trust); and

you are a foreign resident when you are paid the amount or when the amount is applied or dealt with as you direct; and

either:

the custodian is not a company; or

if it is a company, it would be acting in the capacity as your *agent apart from section 840-820.

Note: If the withholding MIT is an AMIT, under subsection 12A-205(5) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, amounts may be treated, for the purposes of this Subdivision, as having been paid to you from the custodian.

Entitlements to amounts from other entities

This subsection applies to you if:

you are a beneficiary of a trust (that is not a withholding MIT or a custodian) and are presently entitled to a share of the income or capital of the trust; and

(b) all or part of that share (also the fund payment part) is reasonably attributable to a payment that is a *fund payment in relation to an income year made by a trust that is a withholding MIT in relation to that year; and

you are not, in respect of that share, a beneficiary in the capacity of a trustee of another trust; and

(d) you are a foreign resident at the time (the entitlement time) when you became presently entitled.

Modification—foreign pension funds

For the purposes of subsections (2), (3) and (4), if:

the beneficiary, in respect of a fund payment part, is a beneficiary in the capacity of a trustee of another trust; and

the beneficiary is a foreign pension fund;

the foreign pension fund is taken, in respect of that fund payment part, to be a beneficiary in its own right, and not a beneficiary in the capacity of the trustee of another trust.

(4B) Foreign pension fund means:

an entity, the principal purpose of which is to fund pensions (including disability and similar benefits) for the citizens or other contributors of a foreign country, if:

the entity is a fund established by an *exempt foreign government agency; or

the entity is established under a foreign law for an exempt foreign government agency; or

a *foreign superannuation fund that has at least 50 *members.

If:

(a) a *foreign pension fund is liable to pay income tax on a fund payment part (a taxed part) because of the operation of subsection (4A); and

you are a beneficiary of the foreign pension fund and are presently entitled to a share of the income or capital of the foreign pension fund;

then, in working out for the purposes of paragraph (4)(b) whether all or part of that share is reasonably attributable to a payment that is a fund payment, disregard the taxed part.

Modification—AMITs

If the managed investment trust mentioned in paragraph (2)(a), (3)(b) or (4)(b) is an *AMIT for the income year mentioned in that paragraph:

if paragraph (2)(a) applies—disregard the phrase “(but not a beneficiary in the capacity of a trustee of another trust)” in paragraph (2)(c); or

if paragraph (3)(b) applies—disregard the phrase “(but not a beneficiary in the capacity of a trustee of another trust)” in paragraph (3)(c); or

if paragraph (4)(b) applies—disregard paragraph (4)(c).

If:

(a) a trustee of a trust is liable to pay income tax on a fund payment part (a taxed part) because of the operation of subsection (4D); and

you are a beneficiary of the trust and are presently entitled to a share of the income or capital of the trust;

then, in working out for the purposes of paragraph (4)(b) whether all or part of that share is reasonably attributable to a payment that is a fund payment, disregard the taxed part.

Entitlement to capital of a trust

(5) For the purposes of this section, section 95A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to capital of a trust in the same way as it applies to income of the trust.

Exception—Australian permanent establishments

This section does not apply to you if:

you are paid the fund payment part, or it is applied or dealt with as you direct; or

you become presently entitled to it;

in the course of a business you carry on at or through an *Australian permanent establishment.

Exception—distributions on carried interests

Subsections (2) and (3) do not apply to you to the extent that the fund payment part:

is included in your assessable income under subsection 275-200(2) (Gains etc. from carried interests) for the income year because you hold or held a CGT asset that carries an entitlement to a distribution mentioned in subsection 275-200(2); or

would be so included if subsection 275-200(3) were disregarded.

Subsection (4) does not apply to you to the extent that the fund payment part:

is attributable to an amount included in the net income of the trust mentioned in that subsection because of subsection 275-200(2) (Gains etc. from carried interests) for the income year because the trust holds or held a CGT asset that carries an entitlement to a distribution mentioned in subsection 275-200(2); or

would be so included if subsection 275-200(3) were disregarded.

Subsections (2), (3) and (4) do not apply to you to the extent that the fund payment part relates to an amount that is non-assessable non-exempt income of yours because of:

Division 880; or

(b) Division 880 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

840-810 When managed investment trust withholding tax is payable

*Managed investment trust withholding tax is due and payable by you at the end of 21 days after:

if subsection 840-805(2) or (3) applies to you—the end of the month in which the fund payment part is paid, applied or dealt with; or

if subsection 840-805(4) applies to you—the end of the month in which the entitlement time occurs.

If any of the managed investment trust withholding tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

starts at the beginning of the day by which the withholding tax was due to be paid; and

ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the withholding tax;

general interest charge on any of the withholding tax.

Note: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

The Commissioner may give you a notice specifying:

the amount of any managed investment trust withholding tax that the Commissioner has ascertained is payable by you; and

the day on which that tax became due and payable.

The ascertainment of an amount of managed investment trust withholding tax is not an assessment for the purposes of this Act.

The production of a notice given under subsection (3), or of a copy of it certified by or on behalf of the Commissioner, is conclusive evidence that the notice was given and of the particulars in it.

840-815 Certain income is non-assessable non-exempt income

An amount on which managed investment trust withholding tax is payable is not assessable income and is not exempt income of an entity.

Subsection (1) does not apply to an Australian resident to the extent that:

managed investment trust withholding tax is payable on the amount because of subsection 840-805(4D); and

the Australian resident is entitled, directly or indirectly, to the amount.

840-820 Agency rules

This section applies to:

(a) a payment (the first payment) made to a *custodian in the capacity as *agent for another entity; and

another payment made by the custodian to the extent that it is reasonably attributable to the first payment.

This Subdivision has effect as if the custodian were not an *agent in relation to the payments.

Subdivision 840-S — Labour mobility program withholding tax

Guide to Subdivision 840-S

840-900 What this Subdivision is about

If you are a foreign resident who is employed under a labour mobility program, you may be liable to pay income tax on the salary, wages etc. paid to you under that program.

Amounts on which there is a liability to pay the tax are non-assessable non-exempt income.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

840-905 Liability for labour mobility program withholding tax

840-906 Covered labour mobility programs

840-910 When labour mobility program withholding tax is payable

840-915 Certain income is non-assessable non-exempt income

840-920 Overpayment of labour mobility program withholding tax

Operative provisions

840-905 Liability for labour mobility program withholding tax

You are liable to pay income tax at the rate declared by the Parliament on income:

that is salary, wages, commission, bonuses or allowances paid to you as an employee of an Approved Employer under a program covered by section 840-906; and

that you *derive at a time when you are a foreign resident and:

you hold a Temporary Work (International Relations) Visa (subclass 403); or

you hold a Temporary Activity Visa (subclass 408) having previously held a Temporary Work (International Relations) Visa (subclass 403); or

you hold a visa of a kind prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this subparagraph.

Note 1: The tax, which is called labour mobility program withholding tax, is imposed by the Income Tax (Labour Mobility Program Withholding Tax) Act 2012 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.

Note 2: See Subdivision 12-FC in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 for provisions dealing with withholding from the salary, wages etc. You are entitled to a credit under section 18-33 in that Schedule for amounts withheld from your salary, wages etc. under that Subdivision.

840-906 Covered labour mobility programs

This section covers the following programs:

the Seasonal Labour Mobility Program;

the Pacific Australia Labour Mobility scheme;

each program prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

840-910 When labour mobility program withholding tax is payable

*Labour mobility program withholding tax is due and payable by you at the end of 21 days after the end of the income year in which you *derived the income to which the tax relates.

If any of the labour mobility program withholding tax that you are liable to pay remains unpaid after the time by which it is due to be paid, you are liable to pay the general interest charge on the unpaid amount for each day in the period that:

starts at the beginning of the day by which the withholding tax was due to be paid; and

ends at the end of the last day on which, at the end of the day, any of the following remains unpaid:

the withholding tax;

general interest charge on any of the withholding tax.

Note: The general interest charge is worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

The Commissioner may give you a notice specifying:

the amount of any labour mobility program withholding tax that the Commissioner has ascertained is payable by you; and

the day on which that tax became due and payable.

The ascertainment of an amount of labour mobility program withholding tax is not an assessment for the purposes of this Act.

The production of a notice given under subsection (3), or of a copy of it certified by or on behalf of the Commissioner, is, except in proceedings under Part IVC of this Act on a review or appeal relating to the notice, conclusive evidence that the notice was given and of the particulars in it.

(6) You may object, in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, against a notice given to you under subsection (3) of this section, if you are dissatisfied with the notice.

840-915 Certain income is non-assessable non-exempt income

An amount on which labour mobility program withholding tax is payable is not assessable income and is not exempt income.

840-920 Overpayment of labour mobility program withholding tax

If labour mobility program withholding tax has been overpaid:

the Commissioner must refund the amount overpaid; and

(b) the employee is not entitled to a credit under section 18-33 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 in respect of the amount overpaid.

Division 842 — Exempt Australian source income and gains of foreign residents

Table of Subdivisions

842-B Some items of Australian source income of foreign residents that are exempt from income tax

842-I Investment manager regime

Subdivision 842-B — Some items of Australian source income of foreign residents that are exempt from income tax

Guide to Subdivision 842-B

842-100 What this Subdivision is about

If you are a foreign resident, some of the income you derive while in Australia, or from Australian sources, may be exempt income.

Table of sections

842-105 Amounts of Australian source ordinary income and statutory income that are exempt

842-105 Amounts of Australian source ordinary income and statutory income that are exempt

The amounts of ordinary income and statutory income covered by the table are exempt from income tax. In some cases, the exemption is subject to exceptions or special conditions, or both.

Note 1: Ordinary and statutory income that is exempt from income tax is called exempt income: see section 6-20. The note to subsection 6-15(2) describes some of the other consequences of it being exempt income.

Note 2: Even if an exempt payment is made to you, the Commissioner can still require you to lodge an income tax return or information under section 161 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 842-I — Investment manager regime

Guide to Subdivision 842-I

842-200 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision sets out rules about the taxation of some foreign residents (known as IMR entities) that invest into or through Australia.

Income and capital gains from IMR financial arrangements are not subject to Australian income tax. Deductions and capital losses from IMR financial arrangements are disregarded for the purposes of this Act.

Table of sections

Object of this Subdivision

842-205 Object of this Subdivision

IMR concessions

842-210 IMR concessions apply only to foreign residents etc.

842-215 IMR concessions

842-220 Meaning of IMR entity

842-225 Meaning of IMR financial arrangement

IMR widely held entities

842-230 Meaning of IMR widely held entity

842-235 Rules for determining total participation interests for the purposes of the widely held test

842-240 Extended meaning of IMR widely held entity—temporary circumstances outside entity’s control

Independent Australian fund managers

842-245 Meaning of independent Australian fund manager

842-250 Reductions in IMR concessions if independent Australian fund manager entitled to substantial share of IMR entity’s income

Object of this Subdivision

842-205 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is to encourage particular kinds of investment made into or through Australia by some foreign residents that have wide membership, or that use Australian fund managers.

IMR concessions

842-210 IMR concessions apply only to foreign residents etc.

(1) This Subdivision applies only for the purposes of working out the assessable income of an entity (the foreign entity) that:

is a foreign resident; and

(b) is not a trust or partnership.

Despite subsection (1), this Subdivision applies in relation to a partnership or trust, to the extent necessary to work out an amount included in the assessable income of the foreign entity.

Note 1: This Subdivision applies, for example, in working out the net income of a partnership or trust, to the extent necessary to work out the assessable income, attributable to that partnership or trust, of a partner or beneficiary who is a foreign resident.

Note 2: This Subdivision could operate in relation to an entity (if it is a partnership or trust) and/or one or more partnerships or trusts interposed between the entity and the foreign resident.

842-215 IMR concessions

Concessions relating to IMR financial arrangements

The following consequences apply to an IMR entity for an income year in relation to an IMR financial arrangement if the requirements of subsection (3) or (5) are met in relation to the year:

what would otherwise be the entity’s assessable income for the year is non-assessable non-exempt income of the entity, to the extent that it is attributable to a return or gain:

from the arrangement (if the arrangement is a derivative financial arrangement); or

from the entity disposing of, ceasing to own or otherwise realising the arrangement;

an amount is not deductible by the entity for the year, to the extent that it is attributable to an outgoing or loss:

from the arrangement (if the arrangement is a derivative financial arrangement); or

from the entity disposing of, ceasing to own or otherwise realising the arrangement;

disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss that is from a CGT event that happens in the year in relation to the arrangement.

Further concessions relating to permanent establishments

Without limiting subsection (1), the following further consequences apply to an IMR entity for an income year if the requirements of subsection (5) are met in relation to the year:

income that relates to or arises under the IMR financial arrangement, and that would otherwise be the entity’s assessable income for the year, is non-assessable non-exempt income of the entity, to the extent that the income:

if the entity is resident in a country that has entered into an international tax agreement with Australia containing a business profits article—is treated as having a source in Australia because it is attributable to a permanent establishment (within the meaning of the relevant international tax agreement) of the entity in Australia; or

if subparagraph (i) does not apply—is treated as having a source in Australia because of subsection 815-230(1);

an amount is not deductible by the entity for the year, to the extent that it is attributable to gaining income that is non-assessable non-exempt income of the entity because of paragraph (a);

disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss that is from a CGT event that relates to or arises under the IMR financial arrangement, and that happens in the year in relation to a CGT asset that:

is covered by item 3 of the table in section 855-15 in relation to the entity; or

is covered by item 4 of the table in section 855-15 in relation to the entity because it is an option or right to *acquire a CGT asset covered by item 3 of that table in relation to the entity.

Direct investment by IMR widely held entity

The requirements of this subsection in relation to the year are that:

during the whole of the year, the IMR entity is an IMR widely held entity; and

during the whole of the year, the interest of the entity in the issuer of, or counterparty to, the IMR financial arrangement does not pass the *non-portfolio interest test (see section 960-195); and

none of the returns, gains or losses for the year from the arrangement are attributable to:

if the entity is a resident of a country that has entered into an international tax agreement with Australia containing a permanent establishment article—a permanent establishment (within the meaning of the relevant international tax agreement) of the entity in Australia; or

otherwise—a permanent establishment of the entity in Australia; and

(d) the IMR entity does not, during the year, carry on in Australia a trading business (within the meaning of section 102M of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that relates (directly or indirectly) to the arrangement; and

subsection 842-225(2) does not apply to the IMR financial arrangement.

For the purposes of paragraph (3)(a), disregard any part of the year during which the entity did not exist.

Indirect investment through independent Australian fund manager

The requirements of this subsection in relation to the year are that:

the IMR financial arrangement was made, on the IMR entity’s behalf, by an entity that is an independent Australian fund manager for the IMR entity for the income year (see section 842-245); and

if the issuer of, or counterparty to:

the IMR financial arrangement referred to in paragraph (a), if it is a financial arrangement; or

otherwise—the IMR financial arrangement to which that arrangement relates;

is an Australian resident, or a *resident trust for CGT purposes—during the whole of the year, the interest of the entity in the issuer or counterparty does not pass the *non-portfolio interest test (see section 960-195); and

(c) the IMR entity does not, during the year, carry on in Australia a trading business (within the meaning of section 102M of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) that relates (directly or indirectly) to the arrangement.

Withholding taxes etc.

If what would otherwise be the IMR entity’s assessable income is non-assessable non-exempt income of the entity because of subsection (1) or (2), for the purposes of determining an entity’s liability to pay, in relation to that income:

withholding tax; or

(b) an amount that must be withheld under Division 12 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (even if the amount is not withheld);

assume that any independent Australian fund manager for the IMR entity is not a permanent establishment of the IMR entity.

For the purposes of subparagraphs (2)(a)(i) and (3)(c)(i), an entity is taken to be a resident of a country that has entered into an international tax agreement with Australia if the entity is such a resident within the meaning of that agreement.

842-220 Meaning of IMR entity

An entity is an IMR entity for an income year if the entity:

is not an Australian resident at all times during the income year; and

is not a *resident trust for CGT purposes for the income year.

842-225 Meaning of IMR financial arrangement

(1) A *financial arrangement is an IMR financial arrangement unless it is or relates to a *CGT asset that is:

taxable Australian real property (see section 855-20); or

an indirect Australian real property interest (see section 855-25).

(2) Without limiting subsection (1), a sub-underwriting arrangement that is not a *financial arrangement is an IMR financial arrangement if it was entered into by an *IMR entity for the purpose of providing for the entity to invest or trade in a financial arrangement that is an IMR financial arrangement under subsection (1).

IMR widely held entities

842-230 Meaning of IMR widely held entity

(1) An IMR widely held entity is any of the following:

a widely held entity;

an entity that is covered by paragraph 275-20(4)(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (g), (h), (i) or (ia);

an entity of a kind specified in regulations made for the purposes of this paragraph.

(2) An entity is a widely held entity if:

either:

no other entity has a total participation interest in the entity of 20% or more (see section 842-235); or

there are not 5 or fewer other entities the sum of whose total participation interests in the entity is 50% or more (see section 842-235); or

the entity has never satisfied the requirements of paragraph (a), but investment in the entity is being actively marketed with the intention that the entity satisfies the requirements of that paragraph; or

the reason for failing to satisfy the requirements of paragraph (a) relates to the entity’s activities and investments being wound down.

842-235 Rules for determining total participation interests for the purposes of the widely held test

(1) For the purposes of subsection 842-230(2), apply the rules in this section in determining an entity’s *total participation interest in another entity (the test entity).

If an entity has, through one or more interposed entities, an indirect participation interest in the test entity, treat each of those interposed entities as having a total participation interest in the test entity of nil.

If the test entity is a trust, do not treat an object of the trust as having a direct participation interest or indirect participation interest in the test entity.

(4) Treat the following (the affiliated entities):

an entity;

each of the entity’s *affiliates;

as together being one entity, that has all of the interests and rights of the affiliated entities.

Note: Such interests and rights may give rise to a participation interest in the test entity.

(5) If an entity (the nominee) has interests and rights in the capacity of nominee of another entity:

(a) treat the nominee as not having those interests and rights; and

instead, treat the other entity as having those interests and rights (in addition to the other entity’s interests and rights apart from this subsection).

If an entity that has a direct participation interest or indirect participation interest in the test entity is an entity covered by:

paragraph 842-230(1)(a), (b) or (c); or

paragraph 275-20(4)(f) (foreign collective investment vehicles with a wide membership);

treat the entity’s total participation interest in the test entity as nil.

The application of subsection (6) to an entity that has a direct participation interest or indirect participation interest in the test entity does not affect the total participation interest in the test entity of any other entity that has a direct participation interest or indirect participation interest in the test entity.

(8) In determining a *direct participation interest of one entity in another entity, disregard paragraph 350(1)(b) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (rights of shareholders to vote or participate in certain decision-making).

If the test entity is an IMR entity and another entity is an independent fund manager for the test entity, in determining the total participation interest of the other entity, or any entity *connected with the other entity, in the test entity, disregard any direct or indirect entitlements (including contingent entitlements) of the other entity, or connected entity, to remuneration from the test entity:

to the extent that the remuneration is subject to income tax in relation to the income year for which the consequences (if any) under subsection 842-215(1) or (2) are being determined in relation to the test entity; and

to the extent that the remuneration is subject to taxation in relation to that income year under a foreign law.

Example: Assume that 4 entities have interests in an IMR entity, as follows:

a life insurance company has a 55% interest;

an endowment fund has a 5% interest;

company A has a 25% interest. It has 2 shareholders (who are not affiliated): shareholder Y holds 60% of the shares and shareholder Z holds 40%;

company B has a 15% interest. It has several shareholders.

The IMR entity is an IMR widely held entity because:

under subsection 842-235(6), the life insurance company has a total participation interest of nil, as it is covered by paragraph 275-20(4)(a); and

the endowment fund has a total participation interest below the 20% threshold in subparagraph 842-230(2)(a)(i); and

under subsection 842-235(2), company A’s 25% interest is divided between shareholder Y (15%) and shareholder Z (10%), and company A is treated as having a total participation interest in the IMR entity of nil; and

company B’s 15% interest is below the 20% threshold, so none of its shareholders can have a total participation interest above that threshold. (In these circumstances, it is not necessary to determine the total participation interests for each of those shareholders.)

(Treating the life insurance company’s 55% interest as a total participation interest of nil ensures that no summing of the other total participation interest can exceed the 50% threshold in subparagraph 842-230(2)(a)(ii).)

842-240 Extended meaning of IMR widely held entity—temporary circumstances outside entity’s control

Without limiting section 842-230, an entity is an IMR widely held entity if:

apart from a particular circumstance, the entity would be an IMR widely held entity because of section 842-230; and

the circumstance is temporary; and

the circumstance arose outside the entity’s control; and

it is fair and reasonable to treat the entity as an IMR widely held entity, having regard to the following matters:

the matters in paragraphs (b) and (c);

the nature of the circumstance;

the actions (if any) taken by the entity to address or remove the circumstance, and the speed with which such actions are taken;

any other relevant matter.

Independent Australian fund managers

842-245 Meaning of independent Australian fund manager

(1) An entity (the managing entity) is an independent Australian fund manager for an *IMR entity for an income year if:

the managing entity is an Australian resident; and

the managing entity carries out investment management activities for the IMR entity in the ordinary course of business; and

the managing entity’s remuneration for carrying out those activities is what the remuneration would be between parties dealing at *arm’s length; and

one or more of the following applies:

the IMR entity is an IMR widely held entity;

70% or less of the managing entity’s income, for the income year, is income received from the IMR entity or entities *connected with the IMR entity;

if the managing entity has been carrying out investment management activities for 18 months or less—it takes all reasonable steps to ensure that the proportion of its income received from the IMR entity or entities connected with the IMR entity, for the income year in which that 18 month period ends, will be reduced to 70% or less.

In applying paragraph (1)(c), have regard to the documents covered by section 815-135.

842-250 Reductions in IMR concessions if independent Australian fund manager entitled to substantial share of IMR entity’s income

The application of section 842-215 to an IMR entity for an income year is modified, as provided by subsection (4) of this section, if:

an entity is an independent Australian fund manager for the IMR entity; and

that entity, or another entity *connected with the entity, has a direct or indirect right to receive part of the profits of the IMR entity for the year; and

(c) the sum of the amounts that the entity, and any other entity connected with the entity, receive for the year in connection with the entity being that independent Australian fund manager exceeds 20% of the amount (the unadjusted concessional amount) worked out under subsection (3); and

the requirements of subsection 842-215(3) in relation to the year are not met.

However, this section does not apply if:

the circumstances giving rise to the requirements of paragraph (1)(c) being met arose outside the control of:

the IMR entity; or

the independent Australian fund manager or any entity *connected with the independent Australian fund manager; and

the independent Australian fund manager, or an entity connected with the independent Australian fund manager, is taking steps to address those circumstances.

Work out the unadjusted concessional amount as follows:

where:

amount not assessable or exempt is the sum of:

(a) the amount (the 842-215(1)(a) amount) of the *IMR entity’s income for the income year that is, or would (apart from this section) be, *non-assessable non-exempt income of the IMR entity because of paragraph 842-215(1)(a); and

(b) the amount (the 842-215(2)(a) amount) of the IMR entity’s income for the income year that is, or would (apart from this section) be, non-assessable non-exempt income of the IMR entity because of paragraph 842-215(2)(a), and not because of paragraph 842-215(1)(a).

amounts not deductible is the amount obtained by adding together:

the sum of the amounts that are not deductible by the IMR entity for the income year because of paragraph 842-215(1)(b); and

the sum of the amounts that are not deductible by the IMR entity for the income year because of paragraph 842-215(2)(b), and not because of paragraph 842-215(1)(b); and

the sum of the amounts that would otherwise be deductible by the IMR entity for the income year under section 8-1 if the income in relation to which they were incurred were not income that is non-assessable non-exempt income of the IMR entity because of paragraph 842-215(1)(a); and

the sum of the amounts that would otherwise be deductible by the IMR entity for the income year under section 8-1 if the income in relation to which they were incurred were not income that is non-assessable non-exempt income of the IMR entity because of paragraph 842-215(2)(a), and not because of paragraph 842-215(1)(a).

disregarded capital gains is the amount obtained by adding together:

(a) the sum (the 842-215(1)(c) amount) of the amounts of the *capital gains that:

are from *CGT events that happen in the income year; and

are, or would (apart from this section) be, disregarded in relation to the IMR entity, because of paragraph 842-215(1)(c); and

(b) the sum (the 842-215(2)(c) amount) of the amounts of the capital gains that:

are from CGT events that happen in the income year; and

are, or would (apart from this section) be, disregarded in relation to the IMR entity because of paragraph 842-215(2)(c), and not because of paragraph 842-215(1)(c).

disregarded capital losses is the amount obtained by adding together:

the sum of the amounts of the *capital losses that:

are from *CGT events that happen in the income year; and

are disregarded in relation to the IMR entity because of paragraph 842-215(1)(c); and

the sum of the amounts of the capital losses that:

are from CGT events that happen in the income year; and

are disregarded in relation to the IMR entity because of paragraph 842-215(2)(c), and not because of paragraph 842-215(1)(c).

Apply the sum referred to in paragraph (1)(c) to reduce (including reduce to zero) the following amounts:

the 842-215(1)(a) amount;

the 842-215(2)(a) amount;

the 842-215(1)(c) amount;

the 842-215(2)(c) amount.

Do not apply the sum to reduce an amount referred to in a paragraph (other than paragraph (a)) unless the sum has been applied to reduce to zero the amount referred to in each paragraph preceding that paragraph.

If the 842-215(1)(c) amount or the 842-215(2)(c) amount relates to more than one *capital gain, a reduction of the amount under subsection (4) is taken to reduce each of the capital gains by the following amount:

(6) Without limiting the circumstances in which the requirements of paragraph (1)(c) are not met, those requirements are taken not to be met in relation to the *IMR entity for an income year if they are not met in relation to the IMR entity for a period (a qualifying period) of up to 5 consecutive income years including the income year (but not including any future income years).

In ascertaining for the purposes of subsection (6) whether the requirements of paragraph (1)(c) are not met in relation to the IMR entity for a qualifying period, assume that the qualifying period is the income year referred to in subsection (1).

For the purposes of paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) (including paragraph (1)(c) as affected by subsections (6) and (7)), disregard any direct or indirect entitlements (including contingent entitlements) of the independent Australian fund manager, or any entity *connected with the independent Australian fund manager, to remuneration from the IMR entity:

to the extent that the remuneration is subject to income tax in relation to the income year referred to in subsection (1); and

to the extent that the remuneration is subject to taxation in relation to that income year under a foreign law.

Division 855 — Capital gains and foreign residents

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 855

855-A Disregarding a capital gain or loss by foreign residents

855-B Becoming an Australian resident

Guide to Division 855

855-1 What this Division is about

A foreign resident can disregard a capital gain or loss unless the relevant CGT asset is a direct or indirect interest in Australian real property, or relates to a business carried on by the foreign resident through a permanent establishment in Australia.

Special rules apply for individuals who were Australian residents but have become foreign residents (see also Subdivision 104-I) and for foreign resident beneficiaries of fixed trusts.

There are also rules dealing with what happens when a foreign resident becomes an Australian resident.

Subdivision 855-A — Disregarding a capital gain or loss by foreign residents

Table of sections

855-5 Objects of this Subdivision

855-10 Disregarding a capital gain or loss from CGT events

855-15 When an asset is taxable Australian property

855-16 Meaning of permanent establishment article

855-20 Taxable Australian real property

855-25 Indirect Australian real property interests

855-30 Principal asset test

855-32 Disregard market value of duplicated non-TARP assets

855-35 Reducing a capital gain or loss from a business asset—Australian permanent establishments

855-40 Capital gains and losses of foreign residents through fixed trusts

855-5 Objects of this Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are to improve:

Australia’s status as an attractive place for business and investment; and

the integrity of Australia’s capital gains tax base.

This is achieved by:

aligning Australia’s tax laws with international practice; and

ensuring interests in an entity remain subject to Australia’s capital gains tax laws if the entity’s underlying value is principally derived from Australian real property.

855-10 Disregarding a capital gain or loss from CGT events

Disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss from a CGT event if:

you are a foreign resident, or the trustee of a foreign trust for CGT purposes, just before the CGT event happens; and

the CGT event happens in relation to a CGT asset that is not taxable Australian property.

Note: A capital gain or capital loss from a CGT asset you have used at any time in carrying on a business through a permanent establishment in Australia may be reduced under section 855-35.

The CGT asset in relation to which a CGT event happens includes the following:

for CGT event D1 (about creating contractual or other rights)—the CGT asset that is the subject of the creation of the contractual or other rights;

Example: You grant an easement over land in Australia. The land is the subject of the creation of the rights in the easement. Therefore, the CGT event happens in relation to the land.

for CGT event D2 (about granting an option)—the CGT asset that is the subject of the option;

for CGT event F1 (about granting a lease)—the CGT asset that is the subject of the lease;

for CGT event J1 (about a company ceasing to be a member of wholly-owned group after roll-over)—the roll-over asset.

855-15 When an asset is taxable Australian property

There are 5 categories of *CGT assets that are taxable Australian property. They are set out in this table.

Note 1: An asset is also taxable Australian property if it was acquired by a company after 28 January 1988 and before 26 May 1988 from a foreign resident as a result of a disposal for which there was a roll-over under section 160ZZN or 160ZZO of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936: see section 136-25 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 2: Payments may need to be made to the Commissioner for acquisitions of some kinds of taxable Australian property if foreign residents are involved (see Subdivision 14-D in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953).

855-16 Meaning of permanent establishment article

A permanent establishment article is:

(a) Article 5 of the United Kingdom convention (within the meaning of the International Tax Agreements Act 1953); or

a corresponding provision of another international tax agreement.

855-20 Taxable Australian real property

A *CGT asset is taxable Australian real property if it is:

real property situated in Australia (including a lease of land, if the land is situated in Australia); or

a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right (to the extent that the right is not real property), if the *minerals, petroleum or quarry materials are situated in Australia.

855-25 Indirect Australian real property interests

(1) A *membership interest held by an entity (the holding entity) in another entity (the test entity) at a time is an indirect Australian real property interest at that time if:

the interest passes the *non-portfolio interest test (see section 960-195):

at that time; or

throughout a 12 month period that began no earlier than 24 months before that time and ended no later than that time; and

the interest passes the principal asset test in section 855-30 at that time.

For the purposes of subsection (1), in working out whether the interest passes the *non-portfolio interest test and the principal asset test in section 855-30:

(a) apply section 350 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as if the words “, or is entitled to acquire,” (wherever occurring) were omitted; and

apply section 351 of that Act as if:

the words “, or that the beneficiary is entitled to acquire” (wherever occurring) were omitted; and

the words “, or that the entity is entitled to acquire” in paragraph 351(2)(d) were omitted.

The first element of the *cost base and reduced cost base of a *CGT asset on 10 May 2005 is the *market value of the asset on that day if, on that day:

the CGT asset was a *membership interest you held in another entity; and

you were a foreign resident, or the trustee of a trust that was not a *resident trust for CGT purposes; and

the CGT asset was a post-CGT asset; and

the CGT asset did not have the necessary connection with Australia (within the meaning of this Act as in force on that day) disregarding the operation of paragraph (b) of item 5 and paragraph (b) of item 6 of the table in section 136-25 (as in force on that day).

Also, Parts 3-1 and 3-3 apply to the asset as if you had *acquired it on that day.

855-30 Principal asset test

The purpose of this section is to define when an entity’s underlying value is principally derived from Australian real property (see paragraph 855-5(2)(b)).

(2) A *membership interest held by an entity (the holding entity) in another entity (the test entity) passes the principal asset test if the sum of the *market values of the test entity’s assets that are *taxable Australian real property exceeds the sum of the *market values of its assets that are not taxable Australian real property.

Note: The market value of any of the latter kind of assets that are duplicated within the test entity’s corporate group could be disregarded (see section 855-32).

(3) For the purposes of subsection (2), treat an asset of an entity (the first entity) that is a *membership interest in another entity (the other entity) as if it were instead the following 2 assets:

(a) an asset that is *taxable Australian real property (the TARP asset);

(b) an asset that is not taxable Australian real property (the non-TARP asset).

For the purposes of subsection (2), treat the *market value of the TARP asset and the non-TARP asset according to the following table.

Note 1: For the purposes of item 2 of the table, it is necessary to work out the market value of any TARP assets and non-TARP assets in relation to any membership interests held by the other entity before working out the value of the TARP asset and non-TARP asset held by the first entity.

Note 2: The market value of an asset of the other entity that is not taxable Australian real property, and is duplicated within the other entity’s corporate group, could be disregarded (see section 855-32).

For the purposes of working out the *total participation interests held by the holding entity and its *associates under item 1 of the table in subsection (4), take into account:

a particular direct participation interest; or

a particular indirect participation interest;

held in the other entity only once if it would otherwise be counted more than once because the entity holding it is an associate of the holding entity.

(5) For the purposes of this section, disregard the *market value of any asset acquired by the test entity, or by any other entity, if the *acquisition was done for a purpose (other than an incidental purpose) that included ensuring that a *membership interest in any entity would not pass the principal asset test in this section.

855-32 Disregard market value of duplicated non-TARP assets

The purpose of this section is to prevent double counting of the *market value of the assets of a corporate group that:

are not taxable Australian real property; and

are created under *arrangements under which corresponding liabilities are created in other members of the group.

For the purposes of subsections 855-30(2) and (4), subsection (4) of this section applies to an asset that is not taxable Australian real property if:

the parties to an arrangement included the 2 entities referred to in subsection (3); and

an effect of the arrangement was to create, before the CGT event happened:

the asset as an asset of one of those 2 parties; and

(ii) a corresponding liability of the other (the other party).

The 2 entities are either:

the first entity and the other entity (see subsection 855-30(3)), if table item 2 in subsection 855-30(4) applies to those entities; or

both:

that first entity or that other entity; and

an entity that is a first entity or other entity for the purposes of a related application of subsection 855-30(3) and table item 2 in subsection 855-30(4).

Disregard:

if the other party is the test entity (see subsection 855-30(2))—the asset’s *market value; or

otherwise—the percentage of the asset’s market value equal to the percentage that is the test entity’s total participation interest in the other party.

Example: The test entity loans money to its wholly-owned subsidiary. The market value of the loan asset created as an asset of the test entity is disregarded for the purposes of subsection 855-30(2).

855-35 Reducing a capital gain or loss from a business asset—Australian permanent establishments

This section applies to a CGT asset that is taxable Australian property under item 3 of the table in section 855-15 because you have used it at any time in carrying on a business through a permanent establishment (as mentioned in that item) in Australia.

The *capital gain or *capital loss you make from a CGT event in relation to the asset is reduced if you used it in this way for only part of the period from when you *acquired it to when the CGT event happened.

The gain or loss is reduced by this fraction:

855-40 Capital gains and losses of foreign residents through fixed trusts

The purpose of this section is to provide comparable taxation treatment as between direct ownership, and indirect ownership through a *fixed trust, by foreign residents of *CGT assets that are not taxable Australian property.

A *capital gain you make in respect of your interest in a *fixed trust is disregarded if:

you are a foreign resident when you make the gain; and

(b) the gain is attributable to a *CGT event happening to a *CGT asset of a trust (the CGT event trust) that is:

the *fixed trust; or

another fixed trust in which that trust has an interest (directly, or indirectly through a chain of trusts, each trust in which is a fixed trust); and

either:

the asset is not taxable Australian property for the CGT event trust at the time of the CGT event; or

the asset is an interest in a fixed trust and the conditions in subsections (5), (6), (7) and (8) are satisfied.

Note: Section 115-215 treats a portion of a trust’s capital gain as a capital gain made by a beneficiary, and applies the CGT discount to that portion as if the gain were made directly by the beneficiary.

You are not liable to pay tax as a trustee of a *fixed trust in respect of an amount to the extent that the amount gives rise to a *capital gain that is disregarded for a beneficiary under subsection (2).

(4) To avoid doubt, subsection (3) does not affect the operation of subsection 98A(1) or (3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about taxing beneficiaries who are foreign residents at the end of an income year).

Conditions

(5) The conditions in subsections (6), (7) and (8) must be satisfied if the relevant *CGT event happens to an interest in a *fixed trust (the first trust) and the interest is *taxable Australian property at the time of the CGT event.

At least 90% (by *market value) of the *CGT assets of:

the first trust; or

a *fixed trust in which the first trust has an interest (directly, or indirectly through a chain of trusts, each trust in which is a fixed trust);

must not be taxable Australian property at the time of the relevant CGT event.

If the condition in subsection (6) is not satisfied for the first trust (but is satisfied for a trust covered by paragraph (6)(b)), the condition in subsection (8) must be satisfied for the first trust, and for each other trust in the chain of trusts between the first trust and the trust that satisfied the condition in subsection (6).

The condition is that, assuming any interest in a *fixed trust in that *chain not to be taxable Australian property, at least 90% (by *market value) of the *CGT assets of the trust must not be taxable Australian property.

Subdivision 855-B — Becoming an Australian resident

855-45 Individual or company becomes an Australian resident

855-50 Trust becomes a resident trust

855-55 CFC becomes an Australian resident

855-45 Individual or company becomes an Australian resident

If you become an Australian resident, there are rules relevant to each CGT asset that you owned just before you became an Australian resident, except an asset:

that is taxable Australian property; or

that you *acquired before 20 September 1985.

Note: This section has effect subject to section 768-950 (individuals who become Australian residents and are temporary residents immediately after they become Australian residents).

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset (at the time you become an Australian resident) is its *market value at that time.

Also, Parts 3-1 and 3-3 apply to the asset as if you had *acquired it at the time you became an Australian resident.

This section does not apply to an *ESS interest if:

Subdivision 83A-C (about employee share schemes) applies to the interest, and the *ESS deferred taxing point for the interest has not yet occurred; or

the provisions referred to in paragraphs 83A-33(1)(a) to (c) (about start ups) apply to the ESS interest.

855-50 Trust becomes a resident trust

If a trust becomes a *resident trust for CGT purposes, there are rules relevant to each CGT asset that the trustee owned just before the trust became a resident trust for CGT purposes, except one:

that is taxable Australian property; or

that the trustee *acquired before 20 September 1985.

The first element of the *cost base and *reduced cost base of the asset (at the time the trust becomes a *resident trust for CGT purposes) is its *market value at that time.

Also, Parts 3-1 and 3-3 apply to the asset as if the trustee had *acquired it at the time the trust became a *resident trust for CGT purposes.

Exception

(4) This section does not apply to a trust if, just before it became a *resident trust for CGT purposes, it was a *CFT because of paragraph 342(a) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: This section is disregarded in calculating the attributable income of a trust: see section 102AAZB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

855-55 CFC becomes an Australian resident

(1) This section applies to a *CFC that stops at a time (the residence change time) being a resident of a *listed country or an *unlisted country and becomes an Australian resident.

Section 855-45 does not apply to the CFC.

(3) The modifications of Parts 3-1 and 3-3 of this Act in sections 411 to 414 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 have the effect they would have, in relation to each *commencing day asset owned by the *CFC at the residence change time, if those modifications were used to work out the taxable income of the CFC rather than its *attributable income.

(4) However, if a *capital gain on a *commencing day asset of the *CFC (for a period before the residence change time) was *subject to foreign tax in a *listed country, the modifications of Parts 3-1 and 3-3 of this Act in sections 411 to 414 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 have the effect they would have in relation to the asset if:

those modifications were used to work out the taxable income of the CFC rather than its attributable income; and

the *commencing day of the CFC were the residence change time.

Note: This section is disregarded in calculating the attributable income of a CFC: see section 410 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Division 880 — Sovereign entities and activities

Table of Subdivisions

880-A Basic concepts

880-B Basic tax treatment of sovereign entities

880-C Sovereign immunity

880-D Consular activities

Subdivision 880-A — Basic concepts

Guide to Subdivision 880-A

880-10 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision defines several terms that are fundamental to the operation of this Division, such as sovereign entity and sovereign entity group.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

880-15 Meaning of sovereign entity

880-20 Meaning of sovereign entity group

Operative provisions

880-15 Meaning of sovereign entity

A sovereign entity is any of the following:

a body politic of a foreign country, or a part of a foreign country;

a *foreign government agency;

an entity:

in which an entity covered by paragraph (a) or (b) holds a total participation interest of 100%; and

(ii) that is not an Australian resident; and

(iii) that is not a resident trust estate for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

880-20 Meaning of sovereign entity group

(1) Each of the following is part of a sovereign entity group:

a body politic of a foreign country (other than a body politic of a part of that foreign country);

a *foreign government agency in relation to that foreign country (other than a foreign government agency in relation to a part of that foreign country);

an entity:

in which an entity covered by paragraph (a) or (b) holds a total participation interest of 100%; and

(ii) that is not an Australian resident; and

(iii) that is not a resident trust estate for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(2) Each of the following is part of a sovereign entity group:

a body politic of a part of a foreign country;

a *foreign government agency in relation to that part of that foreign country;

an entity:

in which an entity covered by paragraph (a) or (b) holds a total participation interest of 100%; and

(ii) that is not an Australian resident; and

(iii) that is not a resident trust estate for the purposes of Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(3) Each entity that is part of a *sovereign entity group is a member of the group.

Subdivision 880-B — Basic tax treatment of sovereign entities

Guide to Subdivision 880-B

880-50 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides that a sovereign entity is liable to pay tax. It also provides that a body politic (or a foreign government agency) of a foreign country, or part of a foreign country, is treated as being a person that is not a resident of Australia, but is a resident of the foreign country.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

880-55 Sovereign entity liable to pay tax

880-60 Bodies politic of foreign countries and foreign government agencies treated as foreign residents

Operative provisions

880-55 Sovereign entity liable to pay tax

A sovereign entity is liable to pay *tax.

Note: The actual amount of tax payable may be nil.

880-60 Bodies politic of foreign countries and foreign government agencies treated as foreign residents

For the purposes of this Act, treat a body politic of a foreign country, or a part of a foreign country:

as being a person that is not a resident of Australia; and

as being a resident of the foreign country.

For the purposes of this Act, treat a *foreign government agency in relation to a foreign country (including a foreign government agency in relation to a part of a foreign country):

as being a person that is not a resident of Australia; and

as being a resident of the foreign country.

Subdivision 880-C — Sovereign immunity

Guide to Subdivision 880-C

880-100 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides a tax exemption for certain sovereign entities in respect of certain returns on membership interests (etc.) in entities that are Australian resident companies or managed investment trusts. To obtain this exemption, the relevant sovereign entity group can hold only a portfolio interest in the entity, and cannot have relevant influence over the entity.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

880-105 Sovereign entity’s income from membership interest etc. in trust or company—non-assessable non-exempt income

880-110 Sovereign entity’s deduction from membership interest etc.—loss not deductible

880-115 Sovereign entity’s capital gain from membership interest etc.—gain disregarded

880-120 Sovereign entity’s capital loss from membership interest etc. in trust or company—loss disregarded

880-125 Covered sovereign entities

880-130 Meaning of public non-financial entity and public financial entity

Operative provisions

880-105 Sovereign entity’s income from membership interest etc. in trust or company—non-assessable non-exempt income

An amount of ordinary income or statutory income of a sovereign entity is not assessable income and is not exempt income if:

the sovereign entity is covered by section 880-125; and

(b) the amount is a return on any of the following kinds of interest that the sovereign entity holds in another entity (the test entity):

a *membership interest;

a *debt interest;

a *non-share equity interest; and

the test entity is:

(i) a company that is an Australian resident at the time (the income time) when the amount becomes ordinary or statutory income of the sovereign entity; or

a managed investment trust in relation to the income year in which the income time occurs; and

the sovereign entity group of which the sovereign entity is a member satisfies the portfolio interest test in subsection (4) in relation to the test entity:

at the income time; and

throughout any 12 month period that began no earlier than 24 months before that time and ended no later than that time; and

the sovereign entity group of which the sovereign entity is a member does not have influence of a kind described in subsection (6) in relation to the test entity at the income time.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b), treat an interest that a sovereign entity holds in another entity as a partner in a *partnership as not being an interest that the sovereign entity holds in the other entity.

If the amount is a fund payment, subsection (1) does not apply to the extent that the amount is attributable to:

(a) *non-concessional MIT income (see section 12-435 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953); or

an amount that would be non-concessional MIT income if the following provisions were disregarded:

subsection 12-437(5) in that Schedule;

sections 12-440, 12-447, 12-449 and 12-451 in that Schedule.

Portfolio interest test

A sovereign entity group satisfies the portfolio interest test in this subsection in relation to the test entity at a time if, at that time, the sum of the *total participation interests that each *member of the group holds in the test entity:

is less than 10%; and

would be less than 10% if, in working out the direct participation interest that any entity holds in a company:

an *equity holder were treated as a shareholder; and

the total amount contributed to the company in respect of *non-share equity interests were included in the total paid-up share capital of the company.

For the purposes of subsection (4), in working out the sum of the *total participation interests held by each *member of the group in the test entity, take into account:

a particular direct participation interest; or

a particular indirect participation interest;

held in the entity only once if it would otherwise be counted more than once.

Influence test

A sovereign entity group has influence of a kind described in this subsection in relation to the test entity at a time if any of the following requirements are satisfied at that time:

a *member of the group:

is directly or indirectly able to determine; or

in acting in concert with others, is directly or indirectly able to determine;

the identity of at least one of the persons who, individually or together with others, make (or might reasonably be expected to make) the decisions that comprise the control and direction of the test entity’s operations;

at least one of those persons is accustomed or obliged to act, or might reasonably be expected to act, in accordance with the directions, instructions or wishes of a member of the group (whether those directions, instructions or wishes are expressed directly or indirectly, or through the member acting in concert with others).

However, a sovereign entity group does not have influence of a kind described in subsection (6) if, disregarding any breach of terms of a *debt interest by any entity, the sovereign entity group would not have influence of that kind.

For the purposes of subsection (6), in working out whether an entity is a *member of a sovereign entity group, treat the references in paragraphs 880-20(1)(c) and (2)(c) to 100% as instead being references to more than 50%.

880-110 Sovereign entity’s deduction from membership interest etc.—loss not deductible

A sovereign entity cannot deduct an amount if:

the sovereign entity is covered by section 880-125; and

the amount is a loss in respect of any of the following kinds of interest that the sovereign entity holds in another entity:

a *membership interest;

a *debt interest;

a *non-share equity interest; and

the requirements in paragraphs 880-105(1)(c), (d) and (e) would be satisfied, on the assumptions that:

the amount were ordinary income or statutory income; and

the amount became ordinary income or statutory income of the sovereign entity at the time it arose; and

references in those paragraphs to the test entity were references to the other entity mentioned in paragraph (b) of this section.

880-115 Sovereign entity’s capital gain from membership interest etc.—gain disregarded

Disregard a *capital gain of a sovereign entity from a CGT event that happens in relation to a CGT asset if:

the sovereign entity is covered by section 880-125; and

the CGT asset is a *membership interest, *non-share equity interest or *debt interest in another entity; and

the requirements in paragraphs 880-105(1)(c), (d) and (e) would be satisfied, on the assumptions that:

the capital gain were an amount of ordinary income or statutory income; and

the amount mentioned in subparagraph (i) became ordinary income or statutory income of the sovereign entity immediately before the time the CGT event happened; and

references in those paragraphs to the test entity were references to the other entity mentioned in paragraph (b) of this section.

880-120 Sovereign entity’s capital loss from membership interest etc. in trust or company—loss disregarded

Disregard a *capital loss of a sovereign entity from a CGT event that happens at a time if, on the assumption that the loss were a *capital gain that happened at that time, the capital gain would be disregarded because of section 880-115.

880-125 Covered sovereign entities

A sovereign entity is covered by this section if it satisfies all of the following requirements:

the entity is funded solely by public monies;

all returns on the entity’s investments are public monies;

(c) the entity is not a partnership;

(d) the entity is not any of the following:

a public non-financial entity;

a public financial entity (other than a public financial entity that only carries on central banking activities).

880-130 Meaning of public non-financial entity and public financial entity

(1) An entity is a public non-financial entity if its principal activity is either or both of the following:

producing or trading non-financial goods;

providing services that are not financial services.

(2) An entity is a public financial entity if any of the following requirements are satisfied:

it trades in financial assets and liabilities;

it operates commercially in the financial markets;

its principal activities include providing any of the following financial services: financial intermediary services, including deposit-taking and insurance services; financial auxiliary services, including brokerage, foreign exchange and investment management services; capital financial institution services, including financial services in relation to assets or liabilities that are not available on open financial markets.

financial intermediary services, including deposit-taking and insurance services;

financial auxiliary services, including brokerage, foreign exchange and investment management services;

capital financial institution services, including financial services in relation to assets or liabilities that are not available on open financial markets.

Subdivision 880-D — Consular activities

Guide to Subdivision 880-D

880-200 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides a tax exemption for income of an entity that arises from its consular functions.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

880-205 Income from consular functions—non-assessable non-exempt income

Operative provisions

880-205 Income from consular functions—non-assessable non-exempt income

An amount of ordinary income or statutory income of an entity is not assessable income and is not exempt income if the income arises from the entity’s consular functions.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self - repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Chapter 5—Administration 1

Part 5-30—Record-keeping and other obligations 1

Division 900—Substantiation rules 1

Guide to Division 900 1

900-1 What this Division is about 1

Subdivision 900-A—Application of Division 1

900-5 Application of the requirements of Division 900 2

900-10 Substantiation requirement 2

900-12 Application to recipients and payers of certain withholding payments 2

Subdivision 900-B—Substantiating work expenses 3

900-15 Getting written evidence 4

900-20 Keeping travel records 4

900-25 Retaining the written evidence and travel records 5

900-30 Meaning of work expense 5

900-50 Exception for domestic travel allowance expenses 7

900-55 Exception for overseas travel allowance expenses 8

900-60 Exception for reasonable overtime meal allowance 8

900-65 Crew members on international flights need not keep travel records 8

Subdivision 900-C—Substantiating car expenses 9

900-70 Getting written evidence 9

900-75 Retaining the written evidence and odometer records 9

Subdivision 900-D—Substantiating business travel expenses 10

900-80 Getting written evidence 10

900-85 Keeping travel records 11

900-90 Retaining the written evidence and travel records 11

900-95 Meaning of business travel expense 11

Subdivision 900-E—Written evidence 13

Guide to Subdivision 900-E 13

900-100 What this Subdivision is about 13

Operative provisions 13

900-105 Ways of getting written evidence 13

900-110 Time limits 13

900-115 Written evidence from supplier 14

900-120 Written evidence of depreciating asset expense 15

900-125 Evidence of small expenses 15

900-130 Evidence of expenses considered otherwise too hard to substantiate 16

900-135 Evidence on a payment summary 16

Subdivision 900-F—Travel records 17

Guide to Subdivision 900-F 17

900-140 What this Subdivision is about 17

900-145 Purpose of a travel record 17

Operative provisions 17

900-150 Recording activities in travel records 17

900-155 Showing which of your activities were income-producing activities 18

Subdivision 900-G—Retaining and producing records 18

Guide to Subdivision 900-G 18

900-160 What this Subdivision is about 18

900-165 The retention period 19

Operative provisions 19

900-170 Extending the retention period if an expense is disputed 19

900-175 Commissioner may tell you to produce your records 19

900-180 How to comply with a notice 19

900-185 What happens if you don’t comply 20

Subdivision 900-H—Relief from effects of failing to substantiate 20

900-195 Commissioner’s discretion to review failure to substantiate 20

900-200 Reasonable expectation that substantiation would not be required 21

900-205 What if your documents are lost or destroyed? 21

Part 5-35—Miscellaneous 22

Division 905—Offences 22

905-5 Application of the Criminal Code 22

Division 909—Regulations 23

909-1 Regulations 23

Chapter 6—The Dictionary 24

Part 6-1—Concepts and topics 24

Division 950—Rules for interpreting this Act 24

950-100 What forms part of this Act 24

950-105 What does not form part of this Act 25

950-150 Guides, and their role in interpreting this Act 25

Division 960—General 26

Subdivision 960-B—Utilisation of tax attributes 26

960-20 Utilisation 26

Subdivision 960-C—Foreign currency 27

960-49 Objects of this Subdivision 27

960-50 Translation of amounts into Australian currency 28

960-55 Application of translation rules 39

Subdivision 960-D—Functional currency 40

Guide to Subdivision 960-D 40

960-56 What this Subdivision is about 40

Operative provisions 41

960-59 Object of this Subdivision 41

960-60 You may choose a functional currency 41

960-61 Functional currency for calculating capital gains and losses on indirect Australian real property interests 44

960-65 Backdated startup choice 45

960-70 What is the applicable functional currency? 50

960-75 What is a transferor trust? 51

960-80 Translation rules 52

960-85 Special rule about translation—events that happened before the current choice took effect 59

960-90 Withdrawal of choice 60

Subdivision 960-E—Entities 63

960-100 Entities 63

960-105 Certain entities treated as agents 64

Subdivision 960-F—Distribution by corporate tax entities 64

960-115 Meaning of corporate tax entity 65

960-120 Meaning of distribution 65

Subdivision 960-G—Membership of entities 66

960-130 Members of entities 66

960-135 Membership interest in an entity 67

960-140 Ordinary membership interest 67

Subdivision 960-GP—Participation interests in entities 68

960-180 Total participation interest 68

960-185 Indirect participation interest 68

960-190 Direct participation interest 69

960-195 Non-portfolio interest test 70

Subdivision 960-H—Abnormal trading in shares or units 70

960-220 Meaning of trading 71

960-225 Abnormal trading 71

960-230 Abnormal trading—5% of shares or units in one transaction 72

960-235 Abnormal trading—suspected 5% of shares or units in a series of transactions 72

960-240 Abnormal trading—suspected acquisition or merger 72

960-245 Abnormal trading—20% of shares or units traded over 60 day period 73

Subdivision 960-J—Family relationships 73

Guide to Subdivision 960-J 73

960-250 What this Subdivision is about 73

Operative provisions 74

960-252 Object of this Subdivision 74

960-255 Family relationships 74

Subdivision 960-M—Indexation 75

Guide to Subdivision 960-M 75

960-260 What this Subdivision is about 75

960-265 The provisions for which indexation is relevant 76

Operative provisions 77

960-270 Indexing amounts 77

960-275 Indexation factor 78

960-280 Index number 81

960-285 Indexation—superannuation and employment termination 82

960-290 Indexation—levy threshold for the major bank levy 84

Subdivision 960-S—Market value 85

Guide to Subdivision 960-S 85

960-400 What this Subdivision is about 85

Operative provisions 86

960-405 Effect of GST on market value of an asset 86

960-410 Market value of non-cash benefits 86

960-412 Working out market value using an approved method 86

960-415 Amounts that depend on market value 87

Subdivision 960-T—Meaning of Australia 87

Guide to Subdivision 960-T 87

960-500 What this Subdivision is about 87

Operative provisions 88

960-505 Meaning of Australia 88

Subdivision 960-U—Significant global entities 88

Guide to Subdivision 960-U 88

960-550 What this Subdivision is about 88

Operative provisions 89

960-555 Meaning of significant global entity 89

960-560 Meaning of global parent entity 91

960-565 Meaning of annual global income 91

960-570 Meaning of global financial statements 92

960-575 Meaning of notional listed company group 92

Division 961—Notional tax offsets 94

Subdivision 961-A—Dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset 94

Guide to Subdivision 961-A 94

961-1 What this Subdivision is about 94

Entitlement to the notional tax offset 95

961-5 Who is entitled to the notional tax offset 95

Amount of the notional tax offset 96

961-10 Amount of the dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset 96

961-15 Reduced amounts of the dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset 96

961-20 Reductions to take account of the dependant’s income 97

Subdivision 961-B—Dependant (sole parent of a non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset 97

Guide to Subdivision 961-B 97

961-50 What this Subdivision is about 97

Operative provisions 98

961-55 Who is entitled to the notional tax offset 98

961-60 Amount of the dependant (sole parent of a non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset 98

961-65 Reductions to take account of change in circumstances 99

Division 974—Debt and equity interests 100

Subdivision 974-A—General 100

Guide to Division 974 100

974-1 What this Division is about 100

974-5 Overview of Division 101

Operative provisions 102

974-10 Object 102

Subdivision 974-B—Debt interests 104

974-15 Meaning of debt interest 105

974-20 The test for a debt interest 107

974-25 Exceptions to the debt test 109

974-30 Providing a financial benefit 110

974-35 Valuation of financial benefits—general rules 111

974-40 Valuation of financial benefits—rights and options to terminate early 113

974-45 Valuation of financial benefits—convertible interests 113

974-50 Valuation of financial benefits—value in present value terms 114

974-55 The debt interest and its issue 115

974-60 Debt interest arising out of obligations owed by a number of entities 116

974-65 Commissioner’s power 117

Subdivision 974-C—Equity interests in companies 118

974-70 Meaning of equity interest in a company 118

974-75 The test for an equity interest 121

974-80 Equity interest arising from arrangement funding return through connected entities 124

974-85 Right or return contingent on aspects of economic performance 126

974-90 Right or return at discretion of company or connected entity 127

974-95 The equity interest 127

Subdivision 974-D—Common provisions 128

974-100 Treatment of convertible and converting interests 128

974-105 Effect of action taken in relation to interest arising from related schemes 128

974-110 Effect of material change 129

974-112 Determinations by Commissioner 132

Subdivision 974-E—Non-share distributions by a company 134

974-115 Meaning of non-share distribution 134

974-120 Meaning of non-share dividend 134

974-125 Meaning of non-share capital return 134

Subdivision 974-F—Related concepts 134

974-130 Financing arrangement 135

974-135 Effectively non-contingent obligation 137

974-140 Ordinary debt interest 138

974-145 Benchmark rate of return 138

974-150 Schemes 139

974-155 Related schemes 140

974-160 Financial benefit 141

974-165 Convertible and converting interests 141

Division 975—Concepts about companies 143

Subdivision 975-A—General 143

975-150 Position to affect rights in relation to a company 143

975-155 When is an entity a controller (for CGT purposes) of a company? 144

975-160 When an entity has an associate-inclusive control interest 144

Subdivision 975-G—What is a company’s share capital account? 145

975-300 Meaning of share capital account 145

Subdivision 975-W—Wholly-owned groups of companies 146

975-500 Wholly-owned groups 146

975-505 What is a 100% subsidiary? 147

Division 976—Imputation 148

976-1 Franked part of a distribution 148

976-5 Unfranked part of a distribution 148

976-10 The part of a distribution that is franked with an exempting credit 148

976-15 The part of a distribution that is franked with a venture capital credit 149

Division 977—Realisation events, and the gains and losses they realise for income tax purposes 150

CGT assets 150

977-5 Realisation event 150

977-10 Loss realised for income tax purposes 150

977-15 Gain realised for income tax purposes 151

Trading stock 151

977-20 Realisation event 151

977-25 Disposal of trading stock: loss realised for income tax purposes 151

977-30 Ending of an income year: loss realised for income tax purposes 152

977-35 Disposal of trading stock: gain realised for income tax purposes 153

977-40 Ending of an income year: gain realised for income tax purposes 153

Revenue assets 154

977-50 Meaning of revenue asset 154

977-55 Loss or gain realised for income tax purposes 154

Division 980—Affordable housing 156

Guide to Division 980 156

980-1 What this Division is about 156

Subdivision 980-A—Providing affordable housing 156

Operative provisions 156

980-5 Providing affordable housing 156

980-10 Eligible community housing providers 157

980-15 Affordable housing certificates 157

Part 6-5—Dictionary definitions 159

Division 995—Definitions 159

995-1 Definitions 159

Chapter 5 — Administration

Part 5-30 — Record-keeping and other obligations

Division 900 — Substantiation rules

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 900

900-A Application of Division

900-B Substantiating work expenses

900-C Substantiating car expenses

900-D Substantiating business travel expenses

900-E Written evidence

900-F Travel records

900-G Retaining and producing records

900-H Relief from effects of failing to substantiate

Guide to Division 900

900-1 What this Division is about

This Division sets out the substantiation rules that apply to certain types of losses or outgoings.

Subdivision 900-A — Application of Division

Table of sections

900-5 Application of the requirements of Division 900

900-10 Substantiation requirement

900-12 Application to recipients and payers of certain withholding payments

900-5 Application of the requirements of Division 900

(1) The requirements of this Division apply to an individual.

(2) They also apply to a partnership that includes at least one individual, as if the partnership were an individual.

(3) They do not apply to any other entity.

900-10 Substantiation requirement

To deduct certain types of losses or outgoings, you need to substantiate them under this Division.

Note: There are exceptions to these requirements:

• Subdivision 900-B has some specific exceptions about work expenses.

• Subdivision 900-H provides for relief from the effects of failing to substantiate.

900-12 Application to recipients and payers of certain withholding payments

Application to recipients

If an individual receives, or is entitled to receive, *withholding payments covered by subsection (3), this Division applies to him or her:

in the same way as it applies to an employee; and

as if an entity that makes (or is liable to make) such payments to him or her were his or her employer; and

as if the withholding payments covered by subsection (3) that he or she receives (or is entitled to receive) were salary or wages.

Application to payers

This Division applies to an entity that makes, or is liable to make, *withholding payments covered by subsection (3):

in the same way as it applies to an employer; and

as if an individual to whom the entity makes (or is liable to make) such payments were the entity’s employee.

Withholding payments covered

(3) This subsection covers a *withholding payment covered by any of the provisions in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 listed in the table.

Subdivision 900-B — Substantiating work expenses

Table of sections

900-15 Getting written evidence

900-20 Keeping travel records

900-25 Retaining the written evidence and travel records

900-30 Meaning of work expense

900-50 Exception for domestic travel allowance expenses

900-55 Exception for overseas travel allowance expenses

900-60 Exception for reasonable overtime meal allowance

900-65 Crew members on international flights need not keep travel records

900-15 Getting written evidence

(1) To deduct a *work expense:

it must qualify as a deduction under some provision of this Act outside this Division; and

you need to substantiate it by getting written evidence.

Subdivision 900-E tells you about the evidence you need.

To find out whether an expense qualifies as a deduction under this Act, see Division 8 (Deductions).

If your expense is for fuel or oil, you have a choice of either:

getting written evidence of it under Subdivision 900-E; or

keeping odometer records for the period when you owned or leased the car in the income year.

Subdivision 28-H tells you about odometer records.

Note: In certain circumstances (for example, under a hire purchase agreement) the notional buyer of property is taken to be its owner (see subsection 240-20(2)).

900-20 Keeping travel records

You need to keep travel records if your expense is for travel that involves you being away from your ordinary residence for 6 or more nights in a row.

The travel may be within or outside Australia. Subdivision 900-F tells you about travel records.

Note: Members of international flight crews may be exempt from keeping travel records for losses or outgoings covered by travel allowances: see section 900-65.

900-25 Retaining the written evidence and travel records

(1) Once you have the material required by section 900-15 or 900-20, you must retain it for 5 years. There is no need to lodge it with your *income tax return. The Commissioner may require you to produce it: see Subdivision 900-G. The period for which you must retain it is called the retention period.

(2) The 5 years start on the due day for lodging your *income tax return for the income year. If you lodge your return later, the 5 years start on the day you lodge it.

(3) However, the *retention period is extended if, when the 5 years end, you are involved in a dispute with the Commissioner that relates to the expense. See section 900-170.

(4) If you do not retain the material for the *retention period, you cannot deduct the expense. If you have already deducted it, your assessment may be amended to disallow the deduction.

(5) If you lose any of the material, there are rules that might help you in section 900-205.

900-30 Meaning of work expense

General

(1) A work expense is a loss or outgoing you incur in producing your salary or wages.

Note: This Division also applies to withholding payments that are not salary or wages: see subsection 900-12(3).

Travel allowance expenses included

(2) Travel allowance expenses count as *work expenses. A travel allowance expense is a loss or outgoing you incur for travel that is covered by a *travel allowance. The loss or outgoing must:

be for accommodation or for food or drink; or

be incidental to the travel.

(3) A travel allowance is an allowance your employer pays or is to pay to you to cover losses or outgoings:

that you incur for travel away from your ordinary residence that you undertake in the course of your duties as an employee; and

that are losses or outgoings for accommodation or for food or drink, or are incidental to the travel.

The travel may be within or outside Australia.

Meal allowance expenses included

Note: This Division also applies to individuals who are not employees: see section 900-12.

(4) Meal allowance expenses count as *work expenses. A meal allowance expense is a loss or outgoing that you incur for food or drink that is covered by a *meal allowance.

(5) A meal allowance is an allowance that your employer pays or is to pay to you as an employee to enable you to buy food or drink. However, an allowance is not a meal allowance if it is a *travel allowance or part of one.

Note: This Division also applies to individuals who are not employees: see section 900-12.

Motor vehicle expenses excluded

(6) A loss or outgoing to do with a *motor vehicle is not treated as a *work expense unless it is:

a loss or outgoing incurred, or a payment made, in respect of travel outside Australia; or

a taxi fare or similar loss or outgoing.

However, most losses or outgoings to do with a motor vehicle are covered by the rules about car expenses. See Division 28 and Subdivision 900-C.

Other types of losses or outgoings included

(7) In addition to losses or outgoings within the general scope of subsection (1), any of the following is a *work expense:

the decline in value of property you own and that is used, or is installed ready for use, by you in order to produce your salary or wages;

expenditure you incur that qualifies as a deduction under section 25-60 (Parliament election expenses) or section 25-65 (about local government election expenses);

expenditure you incur that entitles you to a deduction under section 25-100 (transport expenses incurred in your travel between workplaces), other than car expenses;

(d) a loss or outgoing you incur in relation to producing your salary or wages that entitles you to a deduction under section 25-125 (COVID-19 tests).

Note 1: This Division also applies to payments that are not salary or wages, but are PAYE earnings: see section 900-12.

Note 2: In certain circumstances (for example, under a hire purchase agreement) the notional buyer of property is taken to be its owner (see subsection 240-20(2)).

Note 3: See Subdivision 900-C for car expenses that are also transport expenses incurred in your travel between workplaces.

900-50 Exception for domestic travel allowance expenses

(1) You can deduct a *travel allowance expense for travel within Australia without getting written evidence or keeping travel records if the Commissioner considers reasonable the total of the losses or outgoings you claim for travel covered by the allowance.

(2) In deciding whether the total of the losses or outgoings you claim is reasonable, the Commissioner must take into account the total of the losses or outgoings of the following kinds that it would be reasonable for you to incur for the travel:

accommodation;

food or drink;

losses or outgoings incidental to the travel.

900-55 Exception for overseas travel allowance expenses

(1) You can deduct a *travel allowance expense for travel outside Australia without getting written evidence under the same conditions as for domestic *travel allowances, except that you still have to get written evidence for losses or outgoings for accommodation.

Consequently, in deciding whether the total of the losses or outgoings you claim is reasonable, the Commissioner must disregard losses or outgoings for accommodation.

(3) However, for overseas travel covered by a *travel allowance you must still keep travel records if the travel involves you being away from your ordinary residence for 6 or more nights in a row: Subdivision 900-F tells you about travel records.

900-60 Exception for reasonable overtime meal allowance

You can deduct a meal allowance expense without getting written evidence if:

the allowance is to enable you to buy food or drink in connection with overtime that you work; and

the allowance is paid or payable to you under an *industrial instrument; and

the Commissioner considers reasonable the total of the losses or outgoings you claim that are covered by the allowance.

900-65 Crew members on international flights need not keep travel records

You can deduct a travel allowance expense without keeping travel records if:

the allowance covers travel by you as a crew member of an aircraft; and

the travel is principally outside Australia; and

the total of the losses or outgoings you claim for the travel that are covered by the allowance does not exceed the allowance.

Subdivision 900-C — Substantiating car expenses

Table of sections

900-70 Getting written evidence

900-75 Retaining the written evidence and odometer records

900-70 Getting written evidence

(1) For the “log book” method of deducting a *car expense, you need to substantiate the expense by getting written evidence. Subdivision 900-E tells you about the evidence you need.

Subdivision 28-F tells you about the “log book” method.

(3) If you are using the “log book” method and your expense is for fuel or oil, you do not need to get written evidence of it, because section 28-100 already requires you to keep odometer records for the period when you *held the *car in the income year.

900-75 Retaining the written evidence and odometer records

(1) Once you have the material required by this Subdivision, you must retain it for 5 years. There is no need to lodge it with your *income tax return. The Commissioner may require you to produce it: see Subdivision 900-G. The period for which you must retain it is called the retention period.

(2) The 5 years start on the due day for lodging your *income tax return for the income year. If you lodge your return later, the 5 years start on the day you lodge it.

(3) However, the *retention period is extended if, when the 5 years end, you are involved in a dispute with the Commissioner that relates to the expense. See section 900-170.

(4) If you do not retain the material for the *retention period, you cannot deduct the expense. If you have already deducted it, your assessment may be amended to disallow the deduction.

(5) If you lose any of the material, there are rules that might help you in section 900-205.

Subdivision 900-D — Substantiating business travel expenses

Table of sections

900-80 Getting written evidence

900-85 Keeping travel records

900-90 Retaining the written evidence and travel records

900-95 Meaning of business travel expense

900-80 Getting written evidence

(1) To deduct a *business travel expense:

it must qualify as a deduction under some provision of this Act outside this Division; and

you need to substantiate it by getting written evidence.

Subdivision 900-E tells you about the evidence you need.

To find out whether an expense qualifies as a deduction under this Act, see Division 8 (Deductions).

If your expense is for fuel or oil, you have a choice of either:

getting written evidence of it under Subdivision 900-E; or

keeping odometer records for the period when you owned or leased the car in the income year.

Subdivision 28-H tells you about odometer records.

Note: In certain circumstances (for example, under a hire purchase agreement) the notional buyer of property is taken to be its owner (see subsection 240-20(2)).

900-85 Keeping travel records

You need to keep travel records if your expense is for travel that involves you being away from your ordinary residence for 6 or more nights in a row. Subdivision 900-F tells you about travel records.

900-90 Retaining the written evidence and travel records

(1) Once you have the material required by section 900-80 or 900-85, you must retain it for 5 years. There is no need to lodge it with your *income tax return. The Commissioner may require you to produce it: see Subdivision 900-G. The period for which you must retain it is called the retention period.

(2) The 5 years start on the due day for lodging your *income tax return for the income year. If you lodge your return later, the 5 years start on the day you lodge it.

(3) However, the *retention period is extended if, when the 5 years end, you are involved in a dispute with the Commissioner that relates to the expense. See section 900-170.

(4) If you do not retain the material for the *retention period, you cannot deduct the expense. If you have already deducted it, your assessment may be amended to disallow the deduction.

(5) If you lose any of the material, there are rules that might help you in section 900-205.

900-95 Meaning of business travel expense

General

(1) A business travel expense is a *travel expense, in so far as you incur it in producing your assessable income other than salary or wages.

Travel expense

(2) A loss or outgoing is a travel expense if you incur it for travel by you that involves you being away from your ordinary residence for at least one night. The travel may be within or outside Australia.

Salary and wages travel expenses excluded

(3) In so far as you incur *travel expenses in producing your salary or wages, the expenses are not treated as *business travel expenses. Instead, they are dealt with as *work expenses in Subdivision 900-B.

Note: This Division also applies to withholding payments that are not salary or wages: see subsection 900-12(3).

Travel allowance expenses excluded

*Travel allowance expenses are not treated as business travel expenses. They too are dealt with as *work expenses in Subdivision 900-B.

Motor vehicle expenses excluded

(5) A loss or outgoing to do with a *motor vehicle is not treated as a *business travel expense unless it is:

a loss or outgoing incurred, or a payment made, in respect of travel outside Australia; or

a taxi fare or similar loss or outgoing.

However, most motor vehicle expenses are covered by the rules about car expenses. See Division 28 and Subdivision 900-C.

Subdivision 900-E — Written evidence

Guide to Subdivision 900-E

900-100 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you how you must get written evidence to support a claim for a deduction.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

900-105 Ways of getting written evidence

900-110 Time limits

900-115 Written evidence from supplier

900-120 Written evidence of depreciating asset expense

900-125 Evidence of small expenses

900-130 Evidence of expenses considered otherwise too hard to substantiate

900-135 Evidence on a payment summary

Operative provisions

900-105 Ways of getting written evidence

Each of the following sections has a set of rules for a particular way of getting written evidence to substantiate a deduction. Which ones you can use depends on the type of expense. You only need to use one set of rules to support an expense.

900-110 Time limits

There is no time limit for getting written evidence of an expense (unless you want to record the expense yourself under section 900-125 or 900-130). But until you get written evidence of it, you are not entitled to a deduction for the expense.

If when you lodge your income tax return for the income year you have good reason to expect to get written evidence of the expense within a reasonable time, you can deduct the expense without actually getting the evidence. But if you don’t get the evidence within a reasonable time, your entitlement to the deduction ceases. If you have already deducted the expense, your assessment may be amended to disallow the deduction.

(3) Even if you only get written evidence of the expense after the end of the income year, you deduct the expense for that income year, not the income year in which you get the evidence.

900-115 Written evidence from supplier

(1) You may use this set of rules for any type of expense except the decline in value of a *depreciating asset.

(2) You must get a document from the supplier of the goods or services the expense is for. The document must set out:

the name or business name of the supplier; and

the amount of the expense, expressed in the currency in which it was incurred; and

the nature of the goods or services; and

the day the expense was incurred; and

the day it is made out.

(3) There are 2 exceptions to these requirements:

if the document does not show the day the expense was incurred, you may use a bank statement or other reasonable, independent evidence that shows when it was paid;

if the document the supplier gave you does not specify the nature of the goods or services, you may write in the missing details yourself before you lodge your income tax return for the income year.

(4) The document must be in English. However, if the expense was incurred in a country outside Australia, the document can instead be in a language of that country.

900-120 Written evidence of depreciating asset expense

(1) You may use this set of rules only for a *depreciating asset expense.

(2) You must get evidence of the original acquisition of the *depreciating asset. It must be a document that you get from the supplier of the asset and that specifies:

the name or business name of the supplier; and

the cost of the asset to you; and

the nature of the asset; and

the day you acquired the asset; and

the day it is made out.

(3) However, if the document the supplier gave you does not specify the nature of the asset, you may write in the missing details yourself before you lodge your *income tax return for the income year in which you first claim a deduction for the decline in value of the asset.

If you don’t get the document in time, for example because you only decided to use the asset for income-producing purposes several years after you acquired it, there are rules that might help you in Subdivision 900-H (Relief from effects of failing to substantiate).

(5) The document must be in English. However, if you *imported the asset into Australia, the document can instead be in a language of the country from which the asset was originally exported.

900-125 Evidence of small expenses

(1) If your expense is small, and you have a small total of small expenses, you can make a record of the expenses instead of getting a document from the supplier.

(2) Each expense must be $10 or less, and the total of all your expenses that:

are each $10 or less; and

you incurred in the income year and wish to deduct; and

you must get written evidence for under this Division;

must be $200 or less. These limits can be increased from time to time by regulations made under section 909-1.

(3) If the expense is not the decline in value of a *depreciating asset, you must get a document with the same information as required by section 900-115, except that you may create the document and record all the details yourself. You must do so as soon as possible after incurring the expense.

(4) If the expense is the decline in value of a *depreciating asset, you must, as soon as possible after the last day of the income year, record in a document the following:

the nature of the property;

the amount of the decline in value;

who made the record;

the day the record is made.

(5) A record must be in English.

900-130 Evidence of expenses considered otherwise too hard to substantiate

(1) If the Commissioner considers it unreasonable to expect you to have got written evidence of an expense in any other way permitted by this Subdivision, you can use the method in section 900-125 to get written evidence of your claim.

(2) The expense may be more than $10 and does not count towards the $200 limit in section 900-125.

900-135 Evidence on a payment summary

(1) If the nature and amount of a *work expense are shown on your copy of a *payment summary given to you by your employer, you can use the copy as written evidence of the expense.

Note: This Division also applies to entities that are not employers, but pay (or are liable to pay) withholding payments covered by subsection 900-12(3).

(2) Expenses of the same nature need not be separately itemised; it is acceptable if they are totalled together on the *payment summary.

Subdivision 900-F — Travel records

Guide to Subdivision 900-F

900-140 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you how to keep travel records. A travel record is a record of activities you undertake during your travel.

Table of sections

900-145 Purpose of a travel record

Operative provisions

900-150 Recording activities in travel records

900-155 Showing which of your activities were income-producing activities

900-145 Purpose of a travel record

The purpose of a travel record is to show which of your activities were undertaken in the course of producing your assessable income, so that your losses or outgoings, or portions of them, can be attributed to income-producing purposes.

Operative provisions

900-150 Recording activities in travel records

(1) You record an activity by specifying in a diary or similar document:

the nature of the activity;

the day and approximate time when it began;

how long it lasted;

where you engaged in it.

(2) An activity must be recorded before it ends, or as soon as possible afterwards. Each entry must be in English.

900-155 Showing which of your activities were income-producing activities

You need not record an income-producing activity. But if you don’t, the activity cannot be taken into account in working out the extent to which you can deduct an expense you incur for the travel.

Example: If you fly to Los Angeles for the sole purpose of attending a 7 day conference, but you don’t record the conference in your travel record, you cannot deduct the cost of the air fare. This is so even if you have written evidence that you paid the fare (eg a receipt), as required by Subdivision 900-E.

You don’t need to record any other kind of activity, although you may do so.

Subdivision 900-G — Retaining and producing records

Guide to Subdivision 900-G

900-160 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision tells you how long you need to retain records of an expense and when you have to produce those records.

Table of sections

900-165 The retention period

Operative provisions

900-170 Extending the retention period if an expense is disputed

900-175 Commissioner may tell you to produce your records

900-180 How to comply with a notice

900-185 What happens if you don’t comply

900-165 The retention period

Whenever you are required to retain records of an expense under this Division or Division 28, you need to retain the records for 5 years.

Operative provisions

900-170 Extending the retention period if an expense is disputed

The retention period is automatically extended if one of the following types of dispute relating to the expense is unresolved when the 5 years end:

an objection;

a review or appeal arising from an objection;

a request for amendment of an assessment.

The extension lasts until the dispute is resolved.

900-175 Commissioner may tell you to produce your records

(1) The Commissioner may give you a written notice telling you to produce records of expenses specified in the notice. The records must be ones that you have to retain for the *retention period: you do not have to produce records if the retention period for those records is over.

(2) The notice must give you 28 days or more to comply, starting on the day after the notice is given. The Commissioner may allow you more time to comply with the notice.

900-180 How to comply with a notice

(1) To comply with the notice, you must produce to the Commissioner, for each of the expenses, the material that this Division or Division 28 requires you to retain during the *retention period.

(2) You must also produce a summary that, for each expense for which you produce written evidence (see Subdivision 900-E):

notes the expense; and

has a cross-reference to the written evidence of the expense; and

summarises the particulars set out in the written evidence; and

if the expense was in a foreign currency—shows the amount of the expense in Australian currency.

The summary must be in English in a form approved by the Commissioner.

900-185 What happens if you don’t comply

(1) If you do not comply with a notice for a particular expense, you cannot deduct the expense. If you have already deducted it, your assessment may be amended to disallow the deduction.

(2) You do not commit an offence merely by not complying with the notice, despite section 8C of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 900-H — Relief from effects of failing to substantiate

Table of sections

900-195 Commissioner’s discretion to review failure to substantiate

900-200 Reasonable expectation that substantiation would not be required

900-205 What if your documents are lost or destroyed?

900-195 Commissioner’s discretion to review failure to substantiate

Not doing something necessary to follow the rules in this Division does not affect your right to a deduction if the nature and quality of the evidence you have to substantiate your claim satisfies the Commissioner:

that you incurred the expense; and

that you are entitled to deduct the amount you claim.

900-200 Reasonable expectation that substantiation would not be required

Not doing something necessary to follow the rules in this Division does not affect your right to deduct an amount if the only reason was that you had a reasonable expectation that you would not need to do it in order to be able to deduct that amount.

900-205 What if your documents are lost or destroyed?

(1) If you have a complete copy of a document that is lost or destroyed during the *retention period, it is treated as the original from the time of the loss or destruction.

(2) If you don’t have such a copy, but the Commissioner is satisfied that you took reasonable precautions to prevent the loss or destruction, the rest of this section explains what to do.

(3) If the lost or destroyed document was a travel record, log book or other document that is not written evidence of an expense under Subdivision 900-E, you do not need to replace it; your deduction is not affected by your failing to retain or produce the document.

(4) If the lost or destroyed document was written evidence, you must try to get a substitute document that meets all the original requirements (except the time limit for getting the original).

(5) If you succeed, your deduction is not affected by your failing to retain or produce the original document. The substitute document is treated as the original from the time of the loss or destruction.

(6) If it is not reasonably possible to succeed, your deduction is not affected by your failing to retain or produce the original document.

(7) If it is reasonably possible for you to get a substitute document, but you don’t get one, this section does not protect you from the consequences of failing to retain or produce the original.

Part 5-35 — Miscellaneous

Division 905 — Offences

905-5 Application of the Criminal Code

Chapter 2 of the Criminal Code applies to all offences against this Act.

Note: Chapter 2 of the Criminal Code sets out the general principles of criminal responsibility.

Division 909 — Regulations

909-1 Regulations

The Governor-General may make regulations prescribing matters that:

this Act requires or permits to be prescribed; or

are necessary or convenient to prescribe for carrying out or giving effect to this Act.

The regulations may prescribe penalties for offences against the regulations. A penalty may not exceed a fine of 5 penalty units.

Note: Section 4AA of the Crimes Act 1914 deals with penalty units.

Chapter 6 — The Dictionary

Part 6-1 — Concepts and topics

Division 950 — Rules for interpreting this Act

Table of sections

950-100 What forms part of this Act

950-105 What does not form part of this Act

950-150 Guides, and their role in interpreting this Act

950-100 What forms part of this Act

These all form part of this Act:

• the headings of the Chapters, Parts, Divisions and Subdivisions of this Act;

• *Guides;

• the headings of the sections and subsections of this Act;

• the headings for groups of sections of this Act (group headings);

• the notes and examples (however described) that follow provisions of this Act.

(2) The asterisks used to identify defined terms form part of this Act. However, if a term is not identified by an asterisk, disregard that fact in deciding whether or not to apply to that term a definition or other interpretation provision.

950-105 What does not form part of this Act

These do not form part of this Act:

footnotes and endnotes;

Tables of Subdivisions;

Tables of sections.

950-150 Guides, and their role in interpreting this Act

(1) A Guide consists of:

sections under a heading indicating that what follows is a Guide to a particular Subdivision, Division etc.; or

a Subdivision, Division or Part that is identified as a Guide by a provision in the Subdivision, Division or Part.

Guides form part of this Act, but they are kept separate from the operative provisions. In interpreting an operative provision, a Guide may only be considered:

in determining the purpose or object underlying the provision; or

to confirm that the provision’s meaning is the ordinary meaning conveyed by its text, taking into account its context in the Act and the purpose or object underlying the provision; or

in determining the provision’s meaning if the provision is ambiguous or obscure; or

in determining the provision’s meaning if the ordinary meaning conveyed by its text, taking into account its context in the Act and the purpose or object underlying the provision, leads to a result that is manifestly absurd or is unreasonable.

Division 960 — General

Subdivision 960-B — Utilisation of tax attributes

Table of sections

960-20 Utilisation

960-20 Utilisation

None of the following can be *utilised, to the extent it has already been utilised:

a *tax loss;

a net capital loss;

net exempt income.

Utilisation of losses

(2) A *tax loss is utilised to the extent that:

it is deducted from an amount of assessable income or net exempt income; or

it is reduced by applying a total net forgiven amount; or

it is *carried back.

(3) A *net capital loss is utilised to the extent that:

it is applied to reduce an amount of *capital gains; or

it is reduced by applying a total net forgiven amount.

Utilisation of net exempt income

(4) *Net exempt income for an income year is utilised to the extent that:

it is subtracted:

from deductions; or

(ii) under subsection 268-60(4) in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or subsection 165-70(4) or 175-35(4) of this Act;

in determining a *tax loss for the income year; or

because of it, the extent to which a tax loss can be deducted in that income year is reduced; or

because of it, an amount is reduced under subsection 35-15(2) (about deferral of deductions from non-commercial business activities); or

because of it, a quarantined amount is reduced under subsection 26-47(8); or

it is reduced under subsection 65-35(3) because of a tax offset carried forward; or

because of it, an amount is reduced under step 2 of the method statement in subsection 160-10(2) (which is a step in calculating a loss carry back tax offset component).

Subdivision 960-C — Foreign currency

Table of sections

960-49 Objects of this Subdivision

960-50 Translation of amounts into Australian currency

960-55 Application of translation rules

960-49 Objects of this Subdivision

The objects of this Subdivision are as follows:

to set out a basic rule requiring an amount in a foreign currency to be translated into an Australian dollar amount (the basic rule is subject to the functional currency rules in Subdivision 960-D and to certain specific exclusions);

to ensure that the rules for identifying the exchange rate for the translation of a foreign currency amount into Australian dollars:

reflect an appropriate prevailing exchange rate; and

take into account, as appropriate, commercial practices for the translation of foreign currency amounts into Australian dollars.

960-50 Translation of amounts into Australian currency

For the purposes of this Act, an amount in a foreign currency is to be translated into Australian currency.

Examples of an amount

The following are examples of an amount:

an amount of ordinary income;

an amount of an expense;

an amount of an obligation;

an amount of a liability;

an amount of a receipt;

an amount of a payment;

an amount of consideration;

a value.

The amounts set out in paragraphs (2)(b) to (h) may be amounts on revenue account, capital account or otherwise.

Amounts that are elements in the calculation of other amounts

In applying this section:

first, translate any amounts that are elements in the calculation of other amounts (except *special accrual amounts); and

then, calculate the other amounts.

Special accrual amounts

In applying this section:

calculate a special accrual amount without translation; and

then, translate the special accrual amount.

Special translation rules

The table has effect:

Subsection (6) has effect subject to any modifications made by the regulations.

Despite subsections (6) and (7), an amount that is relevant for the purposes of quantifying, for the purposes of section 960-565, the annual global income of an entity as shown in global financial statements for the entity is to be translated into Australian currency at the average exchange rate applicable for the period for which the statements are prepared.

For the purposes of subsection (7A):

the entity must obtain:

all of the exchange rates that it will use to work out the average exchange rate; or

an average exchange rate that has been worked out for the period referred to in that subsection;

from one or more sources that are not *associates of the entity, and not the entity itself, or from one or more sources specified by the Commissioner in a notice to the entity; and

the entity must use the average exchange rate so worked out in translating into Australian currency any amount referred to in that subsection that is relevant to that period.

A notice under paragraph (7B)(a) is not a legislative instrument.

Regulations about translation

An entity must comply with the regulations (if any) in translating an amount into Australian currency.

Note: For example, the regulations could require the use of a particular translation method and require consistency in the use of the translation method.

Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (8) may make provision in relation to a matter by applying, adopting or incorporating (with or without modifications) matter contained in any of the accounting standards:

as in force or existing at a particular time; or

as in force or existing from time to time.

Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (8) do not apply to translating an amount into Australian currency under subsection (7A), unless they provide otherwise.

Operation of certain provisions unaffected

This section does not affect the operation of the following provisions:

section 220-110 (*maximum franking credit);

section 775-210 (notional loans under *facility agreements);

Subdivision 960-D (functional currency);

subsection 974-35(6) (valuation of financial benefits for the purposes of the debt/equity provisions).

960-55 Application of translation rules

Section 960-50 applies to:

a transaction, event or thing that:

involves an amount in a foreign currency; and

occurs on or after the applicable commencement date (within the meaning of Division 775); or

a transaction, event or thing that:

involves an amount in a foreign currency; and

occurs before the applicable commencement date (within the meaning of Division 775);

to the extent to which the transaction, event or thing is relevant for the purposes of Division 775; or

(c) an amount that Division 12 of Part 2-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 requires to be withheld from a payment, if the time when the amount is required to be withheld occurs on or after 1 July 2003; or

(d) a payment that Part 5-30 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 requires to be reported, if the amount is paid on or after 1 July 2003.

Note: For applicable commencement date, see section 775-155.

Exceptions

Despite subsection (1), section 960-50 does not apply to a transaction, event or thing that involves:

an amount covered by subsection 775-165(1); or

a right, or a part of a right, covered by subsection 775-165(2); or

an obligation, or a part of an obligation, covered by subsection 775-165(4).

Note: Subsections 775-165(1), (2) and (4) are transitional provisions relating to forex realisation events.

Subdivision 960-D — Functional currency

Guide to Subdivision 960-D

960-56 What this Subdivision is about

The net income of any of the following entities (or parts of entities) that keeps its accounts solely or predominantly in a particular foreign currency can be worked out in that currency, with the net amount being translated into Australian currency:

(a) an Australian resident who is required to prepare financial reports under section 292 of the Corporations Act 2001;

a permanent establishment;

an offshore banking unit;

a controlled foreign company (CFC);

a transferor trust.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

960-59 Object of this Subdivision

960-60 You may choose a functional currency

960-61 Functional currency for calculating capital gains and losses on indirect Australian real property interests

960-65 Backdated startup choice

960-70 What is the applicable functional currency?

960-75 What is a transferor trust?

960-80 Translation rules

960-85 Special rule about translation—events that happened before the current choice took effect

960-90 Withdrawal of choice

Operative provisions

960-59 Object of this Subdivision

The object of this Subdivision is, for the purposes of reducing compliance costs and reflecting commercial practice, to allow certain entities (or parts of entities) whose accounts are kept solely or predominantly in a particular *foreign currency (the functional currency) to calculate their net incomes by reference to the functional currency.

960-60 You may choose a functional currency

The table has effect:

Note: The attributable income of a controlled foreign company is calculated separately for each attributable taxpayer—see section 381 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

A choice must be in writing.

A choice under item 1 of the table in subsection (1) continues in effect until:

a withdrawal of the choice takes effect (see section 960-90); or

(b) immediately after the end of the income year in which you cease to be subject to a requirement to prepare financial reports under section 292 of the Corporations Act 2001;

whichever happens first.

A choice under item 2, 3, 4 or 5 of the table in subsection (1) continues in effect until a withdrawal of the choice takes effect (see section 960-90).

960-61 Functional currency for calculating capital gains and losses on indirect Australian real property interests

Subsection (2) applies if:

you are a foreign resident; and

a CGT event happens in relation to a CGT asset that is an indirect Australian real property interest for you; and

the sole or predominant currency in which you keep your accounts at the time of the CGT event is a currency other than Australian currency.

You must use the applicable functional currency to work out the amount of your *capital gain or *capital loss (if any).

960-65 Backdated startup choice

The table has effect:

960-70 What is the applicable functional currency?

Australian resident required to prepare financial reports under section 292 of the Corporations Act 2001

(1) If you make a choice under item 1 of the table in subsection 960-60(1) with effect from the start of a particular income year, your applicable functional currency for:

that income year; and

each later income year for which the choice is in effect;

is the sole or predominant foreign currency in which you kept your accounts at the time when you made the choice.

Permanent establishment, offshore banking unit or transferor trust

(2) If you make a choice under item 2, 3 or 5 of the table in subsection 960-60(1) in relation to a *permanent establishment, an *offshore banking unit or a *transferor trust with effect from the start of a particular income year, the applicable functional currency of the establishment, unit or trust for:

that income year; and

each later income year for which the choice is in effect;

is the sole or predominant foreign currency in which the establishment, unit or trust kept its accounts at the time when you made the choice.

Controlled foreign company

(3) If you make a choice under item 4 of the table in subsection 960-60(1) in relation to a *controlled foreign company (CFC) with effect from the start of a particular *statutory accounting period, the applicable functional currency of the CFC for:

that statutory accounting period; and

each later statutory accounting period for which the choice is in effect;

is the sole or predominant foreign currency in which the CFC kept its accounts at the time when you made the choice.

Calculating capital gains and losses on indirect Australian real property interests

Note: The attributable income of a controlled foreign company is calculated separately for each attributable taxpayer—see section 381 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

(3A) If subsection 960-61(2) applies, your applicable functional currency for the purposes of that subsection is the sole or predominant currency in which you keep your accounts at the time of the *CGT event.

Accounts

(4) For the purposes of this section, accounts means:

ledgers; and

journals; and

statements of financial performance; and

profit and loss accounts; and

balance-sheets; and

statements of financial position;

and includes statements, reports and notes attached to, or intended to be read with, any of the foregoing.

960-75 What is a transferor trust?

A transferor trust is a trust where, having regard to all relevant circumstances, it would be reasonable to conclude that another entity is, or is likely to be, an attributable taxpayer in relation to the trust for the purposes of Division 6AAA of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

960-80 Translation rules

The table has effect:

Note: The attributable income of a controlled foreign company is calculated separately for each attributable taxpayer—see section 381 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Examples of an amount

The following are examples of an amount:

an amount of ordinary income;

an amount of an expense;

an amount of an obligation;

an amount of a liability;

an amount of a receipt;

an amount of a payment;

an amount of consideration;

a value;

a monetary limit or other amount set out in this Act or any other law of the Commonwealth.

The amounts set out in paragraphs (2)(b) to (i) may be amounts on revenue account, capital account or otherwise.

Amounts that are elements in the calculation of other amounts

In applying this section:

first, translate any amounts that are elements in the calculation of other amounts (except *special accrual amounts); and

then, calculate the other amounts.

Special accrual amounts

In applying this section:

calculate a special accrual amount without translation and without applying the first rule set out in the relevant item of the table in subsection (1); and

then, translate the special accrual amount to Australian currency for the purposes of applying the second rule set out in the relevant item of the table in subsection (1).

Special translation rules

Subsection 960-50(6) has effect, in relation to the translation of an amount into the applicable functional currency, as if each reference in that subsection to Australian currency were a reference to the applicable functional currency.

Regulations about translation

An entity must comply with the regulations (if any) in translating an amount into:

the applicable functional currency; or

Australian currency.

Note: For example, the regulations could require the use of a particular translation method and require consistency in the use of the translation method.

Regulations made for the purposes of subsection (7) may make provision in relation to a matter by applying, adopting or incorporating (with or without modifications) matter contained in any of the accounting standards:

as in force or existing at a particular time; or

as in force or existing from time to time.

960-85 Special rule about translation—events that happened before the current choice took effect

Australian resident required to prepare financial reports under section 292 of the Corporations Act 2001

If:

(a) as the result of a choice (the current choice) made by you under item 1 of the table in subsection 960-60(1), subsection 960-80(1) requires that an amount be translated to the *applicable functional currency; and

(b) the amount is attributable to an event that happened, or a state of affairs that came into existence, at a time (the event time) before the current choice took effect;

the table has effect:

Permanent establishment, offshore banking unit, CFC or transferor trust

If:

(a) as the result of a choice (the current choice) made by you under item 2, 3, 4 or 5 of the table in subsection 960-60(1), subsection 960-80(1) requires that an amount be translated to the *applicable functional currency; and

(b) the amount is attributable to an event that happened, or a state of affairs that came into existence, at a time (the event time) before the current choice took effect;

the table has effect:

960-90 Withdrawal of choice

The table has effect if you have made a choice under section 960-60:

A withdrawal must be in writing.

Withdrawing a choice does not prevent you from making a fresh choice under section 960-60.

Subdivision 960-E — Entities

Table of sections

960-100 Entities

960-105 Certain entities treated as agents

960-100 Entities

(1) Entity means any of the following:

an individual;

a body corporate;

a body politic;

a partnership;

any other unincorporated association or body of persons;

a trust;

a superannuation fund;

an approved deposit fund.

Note: The term entity is used in a number of different but related senses. It covers all kinds of legal person. It also covers groups of legal persons, and other things, that in practice are treated as having a separate identity in the same way as a legal person does.

Paragraph (1)(e) does not include a non-entity joint venture.

(2) The trustee of a trust, of a *superannuation fund or of an *approved deposit fund is taken to be an entity consisting of the person who is the trustee, or the persons who are the trustees, at any given time.

Note 1: This is because a right or obligation cannot be conferred or imposed on an entity that is not a legal person.

Note 2: The entity that is the trustee of a trust or fund does not change merely because of a change in the person who is the trustee of the trust or fund, or persons who are the trustees of the trust or fund.

(3) A legal person can have a number of different capacities in which the person does things. In each of those capacities, the person is taken to be a different entity.

Example: In addition to his or her personal capacity, an individual may be:

• sole trustee of one or more trusts; and

• one of a number of trustees of a further trust.

In his or her personal capacity, he or she is one entity. As trustee of each trust, he or she is a different entity. The trustees of the further trust are a different entity again, of which the individual is a member.

(4) If a provision refers to an entity of a particular kind, it refers to the entity in its capacity as that kind of entity, not to that entity in any other capacity.

Example: A provision that refers to a company does not cover a company in a capacity as trustee, unless it also refers to a trustee.

Note: Under section 87-35, certain parts of Australian governments and authorities are treated as separate entities for the purposes of ascertaining whether another entity is conducting a personal services business.

960-105 Certain entities treated as agents

(1) This Act applies to an entity as if the entity were an agent of another entity (the principal) if:

the principal is outside Australia; and

the entity is in Australia and, on behalf of the principal, holds money of the principal or has control, receipt or disposal of money of the principal.

This Act, or a provision of this Act, applies to an entity as if the entity were an agent of another entity if the Commissioner determines in writing that the entity is the agent or sole agent of the other entity for the purposes of this Act or of that provision.

A determination under subsection (2) is not a legislative instrument.

Subdivision 960-F — Distribution by corporate tax entities

Table of sections

960-115 Meaning of corporate tax entity

960-120 Meaning of distribution

960-115 Meaning of corporate tax entity

An entity is a corporate tax entity at a particular time if:

the entity is a company at that time; or

the entity is a corporate limited partnership in relation to the income year in which that time occurs; or

the entity is a public trading trust in relation to the income year in which that time occurs.

960-120 Meaning of distribution

(1) What constitutes a distribution by various *corporate tax entities is set out in the following table:

(2) A *corporate tax entity makes a distribution in the form of a dividend on the day on which the dividend is paid, or taken to have been paid.

Subdivision 960-G — Membership of entities

Table of sections

960-130 Members of entities

960-135 Membership interest in an entity

960-140 Ordinary membership interest

960-130 Members of entities

(1) The following table sets out who is a member of various entities.

(2) If 2 or more entities jointly hold interests or rights that give rise to membership of another entity, each of them is a member of the other entity.

(3) An entity is not a member of another entity just because the entity holds one or more interests or rights relating to the other entity that are *debt interests. This subsection has effect despite subsections (1) and (2) of this section.

Example: An entity is not a member of a company as defined in this section merely because it is a member of the company in the ordinary sense of the term because it holds a finance share in the company, if the finance share is a debt interest. However, if the entity holds other shares in the company that are not debt interests, it will be a member because of those other shares.

960-135 Membership interest in an entity

If you are a *member of an entity:

each interest, or set of interests, in the entity; or

each right, or set of rights, in relation to the entity;

by virtue of which you are a member of the entity is a membership interest of yours in the entity.

Note: In conjunction with subsection 960-130(3), this means that a debt interest is not a membership interest.

Example: A member of a company holds a finance share in a company that is a debt interest and some other shares in the company that are not debt interests. Only the other shares are membership interests in the company. The finance share is not, because the member is not a member of the company because of that share (see subsection 960-130(3)).

960-140 Ordinary membership interest

A *membership interest in a *corporate tax entity is an ordinary membership interest if:

in the case of a membership interest in a company—it is an ordinary share; and

in the case of a membership interest in a corporate limited partnership—it is an interest in the income of the partnership; and

in the case of a membership interest in a public trading trust—it is a unit in the trust.

Subdivision 960-GP — Participation interests in entities

Table of sections

960-180 Total participation interest

960-185 Indirect participation interest

960-190 Direct participation interest

960-195 Non-portfolio interest test

960-180 Total participation interest

An entity’s total participation interest at a particular time in another entity is the sum of:

the entity’s direct participation interest in the other entity at that time; and

the entity’s indirect participation interest in the other entity at that time.

960-185 Indirect participation interest

(1) Work out the indirect participation interest that an entity (the holding entity) holds at a particular time in another entity (the test entity) by multiplying:

(a) the holding entity’s *direct participation interest (if any) in another entity (the intermediate entity) at that time;

by:

the sum of:

the intermediate entity’s direct participation interest (if any) in the test entity at that time; and

the intermediate entity’s indirect participation interest (if any) in the test entity at that time (as worked out under one or more other applications of this section).

(2) If there is more than one intermediate entity to which paragraph (1)(a) applies at that time, the holding entity’s indirect participation interest is the sum of the percentages worked out under subsection (1) in relation to each of those intermediate entities.

960-190 Direct participation interest

(1) Use the following table to work out the direct participation interest that one entity holds in another entity.

For the purposes of subsection (1):

(a) apply sections 350 and 351 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 as if those sections apply for the purposes of this Division rather than only for the purposes of Part X of that Act; and

do not apply subsections 350(6) and (7) and 351(3) and (4) of that Act.

For the purposes of item 3 of the table in subsection (1), assume that:

the *partnership is a company; and

the partners in the partnership are shareholders in the company; and

the total amount of assets or capital contributed to the partnership is the total paid-up share capital of the company; and

a partner’s right of distribution of capital, assets or profits on the dissolution of the partnership is a shareholder’s right to distribution of capital or profits of the company on winding-up; and

a partner’s right of distribution of capital, assets or profits otherwise than on the dissolution of the partnership is a shareholder’s right to distribution of capital or profits of the company otherwise than on winding-up.

960-195 Non-portfolio interest test

An interest held by an entity (the holding entity) in another entity (the test entity) passes the non-portfolio interest test at a time if the sum of the *direct participation interests held by the holding entity and its *associates in the test entity at that time is 10% or more.

Subdivision 960-H — Abnormal trading in shares or units

Table of sections

960-220 Meaning of trading

960-225 Abnormal trading

960-230 Abnormal trading—5% of shares or units in one transaction

960-235 Abnormal trading—suspected 5% of shares or units in a series of transactions

960-240 Abnormal trading—suspected acquisition or merger

960-245 Abnormal trading—20% of shares or units traded over 60 day period

960-220 Meaning of trading

Shares in a listed public company

(1) There is a trading in *shares in a company if there is an issue, redemption or transfer of those shares, or any other dealing in those shares, but only if it changes the respective proportions in which all the registered holders of shares in the company:

can exercise the voting power in the company; or

have the right to receive, as registered holders (whether or not for their own benefit) any dividends that the company may pay; or

have the right to receive, as registered holders (whether or not for their own benefit) any distribution of capital of the company.

Note: A special rule applies in working out whether an asset has stopped being a pre-CGT asset: see section 149-10.

Units in a unit trust

(2) There is a trading in units in a unit trust if there is an issue, redemption or transfer of those units, or any other dealing in those units, but only if it changes the respective proportions in which all the registered holders of units in the trust hold (whether beneficially or not) interests in the trust income or trust capital.

Note: A special rule applies in working out whether an asset has stopped being a pre-CGT asset: see section 149-10.

960-225 Abnormal trading

(1) There is an abnormal trading in *shares in a company, or in units in a unit trust, if a *trading in the shares or units is abnormal having regard to all relevant factors, including these:

the timing of the trading, when compared with the normal timing for trading in the company’s shares or in the trust’s units;

the number of shares or units traded, when compared with the normal number of the company’s shares, or the trust’s units, traded;

any connection between the trading and any other trading in the company’s shares or in the trust’s units;

any connection between the trading and a *tax loss or other deduction of the company or trust.

There may also be an abnormal trading under any of the following provisions.

960-230 Abnormal trading—5% of shares or units in one transaction

There is an abnormal trading in *shares in a company, or in units in a unit trust, if 5% or more of the shares or units are *traded in one transaction.

960-235 Abnormal trading—suspected 5% of shares or units in a series of transactions

(1) There is an abnormal trading in *shares in a company, or in units in a unit trust, if the company or trustee knows or reasonably suspects that an entity (or an entity and one or more of the entity’s *associates) has acquired (or redeemed) 5% or more of the shares or units in 2 or more transactions and would not have done so if the company or trust did not have a *tax loss or other deduction.

Time when abnormal trading happens

The abnormal trading happens at the time of the particular transaction that causes the 5% figure to be exceeded.

960-240 Abnormal trading—suspected acquisition or merger

There is an abnormal trading in *shares in a company, or in units in a unit trust, if a *trading in those shares or units happens which the company or trustee knows or reasonably suspects is part of an acquisition or merger of the company with another company, or of the trust with another trust.

960-245 Abnormal trading—20% of shares or units traded over 60 day period

(1) There is an abnormal trading in *shares in a company or units in a unit trust if more than 20% of the shares or units are *traded during a 60 day period.

Time when abnormal trading happens

The abnormal trading happens at the end of the 60 day period concerned.

Subdivision 960-J — Family relationships

Guide to Subdivision 960-J

960-250 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision has 2 principles for defining family relationships.

The first principle is to treat an unmarried couple (whether of the same sex or different sexes) in the same way as a married couple if:

their relationship is registered under particular State or Territory laws; or

they live together on a genuine domestic basis.

The second principle is to treat anyone who is defined to be an individual’s child in the same way as the individual’s natural child would be treated.

Both principles extend to tracing other family relationships, including beyond couples and children and their parents.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

960-252 Object of this Subdivision

960-255 Family relationships

Operative provisions

960-252 Object of this Subdivision

The first object of this Subdivision is to ensure that the same consequences flow under this Act and the other Acts to which this Subdivision applies from the relationship between 2 people who are an unmarried couple (whether of the same sex or different sexes) as from a marriage, if:

(a) the relationship is registered under a *State law or *Territory law (as mentioned in paragraph (a) of the definition of spouse in subsection 995-1(1)); or

they live together on a genuine domestic basis.

The second object of this Subdivision is to ensure that under this Act and the other Acts to which this Subdivision applies, anyone who is defined to be an individual’s *child is treated in the same way as if he or she were the individual’s natural child.

960-255 Family relationships

Relationships between couples

(1) If one individual is the *spouse of another individual because of the definition of spouse in subsection 995-1(1), relationships traced to, from or through the individual, and family groups of which either individual is a member, are to be determined in the same way as if the individual were legally married to the other individual.

Example: George and Angelika are not legally married but live together on a genuine domestic basis in a relationship as a couple. This Act treats them as part of each other’s family.

Relationships involving children

(2) If one individual is the *child of another individual because of the definition of child in subsection 995-1(1), relationships traced to, from or through the individual, and family groups of which either individual is a member, are to be determined in the same way as if the individual were the natural child of the other individual.

Example: Clare’s stepfather Frank has a sister Angela. This Act applies as if Angela were Clare’s aunt because Clare is defined to be Frank’s child. That is, Clare’s relationship to Angela is determined on the basis that Clare is Frank’s natural child.

Application

Subsections (1) and (2) apply for the purposes of this Act. They also apply for the purposes of a provision of another Act if one or more of the following applies for the purposes of that provision (or would apply if it were used in the provision):

(a) the definition of child in subsection 995-1(1);

(b) the definition of parent in subsection 995-1(1);

(c) the definition of relative in subsection 995-1(1);

(d) the definition of spouse in subsection 995-1(1).

Subdivision 960-M — Indexation

Guide to Subdivision 960-M

960-260 What this Subdivision is about

There are a number of provisions that require amounts to be indexed. This Subdivision shows you:

• how to index those amounts; and

• how to calculate the indexation factor.

Table of sections

960-265 The provisions for which indexation is relevant

Operative provisions

960-270 Indexing amounts

960-275 Indexation factor

960-280 Index number

960-285 Indexation—superannuation and employment termination

960-290 Indexation—levy threshold for the major bank levy

960-265 The provisions for which indexation is relevant

This table sets out the provisions for which indexation is relevant.

Note: There are provisions of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 dealing with indexation that have not yet been rewritten.

Operative provisions

960-270 Indexing amounts

Some provisions of this Act require amounts to be indexed. You index an amount by multiplying it by its *indexation factor.

You do not index the amount if its *indexation factor is 1 or less.

This section does not apply in relation to amounts mentioned in the provisions listed at items 8 to 12, or at item 14, in section 960-265.

Note: For the indexation of those amounts, see sections 960-285 and 960-290.

960-275 Indexation factor

(1) For indexation of amounts on an annual basis, the indexation factor is:

(1A) However, for indexation of the amounts mentioned in the provisions listed at items 5, 6 and 7 in section 960-265, the indexation factor is:

(1B) For indexation under subsection 110-36(1A) of the *cost base of a *CGT asset (except the first element of the cost base of an asset covered by subsection (3)), the indexation factor for expenditure:

in an element of the cost base; and

incurred on or after 1 July 2027;

is:

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note 1: This includes expenditure taken to have been incurred on 1 July 2027 as mentioned in paragraph 112-155(2)(b), 112-165(2)(b) or 112-175(2)(b).

Note 2: There are rules affecting when the expenditure was incurred: see Division 114.

(1C) For indexation under subsection 110-36(1A) of the first element of the *cost base of a *CGT asset that is a *share in a company, or unit in a unit trust, the indexation factor for an amount in that first element that was paid to the company or trust at a time:

after the asset was *acquired; and

on or after 1 July 2027;

is:

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

The amount Narina paid to Peter for the shares is indexed under subsection 960-275(1B) from the quarter in which she incurred the expenditure to acquire the shares.

The amount Narina later pays for the call on the shares is indexed in accordance with this subsection from the quarter in which she made that later payment.

Example: Peter acquires shares in a company. The shares are partly-paid, and the company makes a call on the shares. Peter sells the shares to Narina before Peter is liable to pay the call.

(2) For indexation under subsection 110-36(1) of the *cost base of a *CGT asset (except the first element of the cost base of an asset covered by subsection (3)), the indexation factor for expenditure in an element of the cost base is:

The expenditure can include giving property: see section 103-5.

Note 1: This rule does not apply to expenditure incurred after on 21 September 1999 or any expenditure relating to a CGT asset acquired after that time: see section 114-1.

Note 2: This rule applies even if you do not actually pay some of the expenditure until a later time (for example, under a contract to purchase an asset by instalments).

Note 3: There are rules affecting when the expenditure was incurred: see sections 114-15 and 114-20.

For indexation under subsection 110-36(1) of the first element of the cost base of a *CGT asset that is:

a *share in a company; or

a unit in a unit trust;

the indexation factor for an amount in the first element of the *cost base of the asset that was paid to the company or trust at a time after it was *acquired is:

The payment can include giving property: see section 103-5.

The amount Narina paid to Peter for the shares is indexed under subsection 960-275(2) from the quarter in which she incurred the expenditure to acquire the shares.

The amount Narina later pays for the call on the shares is indexed in accordance with subsection 960-275(3) from the quarter in which she made that later payment.

Example: Peter acquires shares in a company. The shares are partly-paid, and the company makes a call on the shares. Peter sells the shares to Narina before he is liable to pay the call.

Note 1: This subsection does not apply to shares or units you acquired before 16 August 1989: see section 960-275 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 2: This subsection does not apply to an amount paid after on 21 September 1999 or an amount paid in relation to a CGT asset acquired after that time: see section 114-1.

However, you cannot index expenditure in the third element of the *cost base of a CGT asset (costs of ownership).

You work out the *indexation factor to 3 decimal places (rounding up if the fourth decimal place is 5 or more).

Example: If the factor is 1.102795, it would be rounded up to 1.103.

This section does not apply in relation to amounts mentioned in the provisions listed at items 8 to 12, or at item 14, in section 960-265.

Note: For the indexation of those amounts, see sections 960-285 and 960-290.

960-280 Index number

(1) In most cases, the index number for a *quarter is the All Groups Consumer Price Index number (being the weighted average of the 8 capital cities) first published by the Australian Statistician for the quarter.

Car limit

(2) For calculating the *car limit, the index number for a *quarter is the index number for the motor vehicle purchase sub-group of the Consumer Price Index, being the weighted average of the 8 capital cities, first published by the Australian Statistician for the quarter.

If the Australian Statistician changes the index reference period for an *index number, only index numbers published in terms of the new index reference period are to be used after the change.

Genuine redundancy, early retirement schemes, pre-1 July 88 funding credits

(4) For calculating the amounts mentioned in the provisions listed at items 5, 6 and 7 in section 960-265, the index number for a *quarter is the estimate of full-time adult average weekly ordinary time earnings for the middle month of the quarter first published by the Australian Statistician in respect of that month.

Subsection (3) does not apply to the index numbers mentioned in subsection (4).

Exceptions

This section does not apply in relation to amounts mentioned in the provisions listed at items 8 to 12, or at item 14, in section 960-265.

Note: For the indexation of those amounts, see sections 960-285 and 960-290.

960-285 Indexation—superannuation and employment termination

This section applies in relation to the amounts listed at items 8 to 12 in section 960-265.

Indexing amounts

You index the amount by:

first, multiplying its base amount mentioned in subsection (3) by its *indexation factor mentioned in subsection (5); and

next, rounding the result in paragraph (a) down to the nearest multiple of its rounding amount.

Example 1: An amount of $140,000 is to be indexed, with a rounding amount of $5,000. If the indexation factor increases this to an indexed amount of $143,000, the indexed amount is rounded back down to $140,000.

Example 2: An amount of $140,000 is to be indexed, with a rounding amount of $5,000. If the indexation factor increases this to an indexed amount of $146,000, the indexed amount is rounded down to $145,000.

(3) The amount (the base amount) for an amount to which this section applies is:

unless paragraph (b) or (c) applies—the amount for the 2007-2008 income year or financial year; or

if the amount is mentioned in item 9 or 10A in section 960-265—the amount for the 2017-2018 financial year; or

if the amount is mentioned in item 10B or 10C in section 960-265—the amount for the 2026-27 income year.

You do not index the amount if the *indexation factor is 1 or less.

Indexation factor

(5) For indexing an amount, its indexation factor is:

where:

base quarter means:

unless paragraph (b) or (c) applies—the quarter ending on 31 December 2006; or

if the amount is mentioned in item 9 or 10A in section 960-265—the quarter ending on 31 December 2016; or

if the amount is mentioned in item 10B or 10C in section 960-265—the quarter ending on 31 December 2025.

You work out the *indexation factor mentioned in subsection (5) to 3 decimal places (rounding up if the fourth decimal place is 5 or more).

Index number and rounding amount

For indexing an amount to which this section applies:

(a) the index number for a *quarter is set out in column 2 of the relevant item in the following table; and

(b) the rounding amount is set out in column 3 of that item.

960-290 Indexation—levy threshold for the major bank levy

You index, on a *quarterly basis, the amount mentioned in the provision listed at item 14 in section 960-265 by:

first, multiplying the amount by its *indexation factor mentioned in subsection (3); and

next, rounding the result in paragraph (a) down to the nearest multiple of $1,000,000.

You do not index the amount if the *indexation factor is 1 or less.

(3) For indexation of the amount, the indexation factor is:

where:

GDP number for the base quarter is the estimate that is, at the end of the *quarter to which the indexation is to be applied, the estimate of the Gross Domestic Product: Current Prices-Seasonally Adjusted most recently published by the Australian Statistician for the *quarter ending on 30 June 2017.

GDP number for the preceding quarter is the estimate of the Gross Domestic Product: Current Prices-Seasonally Adjusted first published by the Australian Statistician for the *quarter preceding the quarter to which the indexation is to be applied.

You work out the *indexation factor mentioned in subsection (3) to 3 decimal places (rounding up if the fourth decimal place is 5 or more).

Subdivision 960-S — Market value

Guide to Subdivision 960-S

960-400 What this Subdivision is about

The expression “market value” is often used in this Act with its ordinary meaning.

However, in some cases that expression has a meaning affected by this Subdivision.

The Commissioner may approve methods to use for working out the market value of assets or non-cash benefits.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

960-405 Effect of GST on market value of an asset

960-410 Market value of non-cash benefits

960-412 Working out market value using an approved method

960-415 Amounts that depend on market value

Operative provisions

960-405 Effect of GST on market value of an asset

(1) The market value of an asset at a particular time is reduced by the amount of the *input tax credit (if any) to which you would be entitled assuming that:

you had *acquired the asset at that time; and

the acquisition had been solely for a creditable purpose.

(2) Subsection (1) does not apply:

to an asset the supply of which cannot be a taxable supply; or

in working out the *market value of economic benefits, or of *equity or loan interests, for the purposes of Part 3-95 (about value shifting).

Note: Some assets, such as shares, cannot be the subject of a taxable supply.

960-410 Market value of non-cash benefits

In working out the market value of a *non-cash benefit, disregard anything that would prevent or restrict conversion of the benefit to money.

960-412 Working out market value using an approved method

The *market value of an asset or *non-cash benefit that you work out using a method approved under subsection (2) for that kind of asset or benefit binds the Commissioner in relation to you.

Note: You do not have to use the method.

The Commissioner may, by legislative instrument, approve methods for working out the *market value of assets or *non-cash benefits. A method may include conditions.

Note 1: Different methods may be approved for different kinds of assets or non-cash benefits (see subsection 13(3) of the Legislation Act 2003).

Note 2: Any approved method would need to be consistent with the other rules about market value in this Subdivision.

960-415 Amounts that depend on market value

To avoid doubt, apply the rules in this Subdivision to the *market value component of any calculation that involves market value.

Subdivision 960-T — Meaning of Australia

Guide to Subdivision 960-T

960-500 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision includes rules about the meaning of Australia when used in a geographical sense.

The ordinary meaning of Australia includes each State and internal Territory of Australia and their internal waters and any islands that are part of those State and Territories.

This Subdivision extends the ordinary meaning of Australia to include each external Territory of Australia (other than the Australian Antarctic Territory) and certain offshore areas and certain offshore installations.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

960-505 Meaning of Australia

Operative provisions

960-505 Meaning of Australia

Territories

(1) Australia, when used in a geographical sense, includes each of the following:

Norfolk Island;

the Coral Sea Islands Territory;

the Territory of Ashmore and Cartier Islands;

the Territory of Christmas Island;

the Territory of Cocos (Keeling) Islands;

the Territory of Heard Island and the McDonald Islands.

Note: Section 15B of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901 provides that an Act is taken to have effect in the coastal sea of Australia as if the coastal sea were part of Australia.

Offshore areas

(2) Australia, when used in a geographical sense, includes an offshore area for the purposes of the Offshore Petroleum and Greenhouse Gas Storage Act 2006.

Note 1: The offshore area includes all things located in that area, including all installations and structures such as oil and gas rigs. The area also extends to the airspace over, and the sea-bed and subsoil beneath, that area.

Note 2: The offshore area includes the exclusive economic zone and the continental shelf of Australia.

Subdivision 960-U — Significant global entities

Guide to Subdivision 960-U

960-550 What this Subdivision is about

Generally speaking, a significant global entity is:

a global parent entity with an annual global income of $1 billion or more; or

any member of such a global parent entity’s group.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

960-555 Meaning of significant global entity

960-560 Meaning of global parent entity

960-565 Meaning of annual global income

960-570 Meaning of global financial statements

960-575 Meaning of notional listed company group

Operative provisions

960-555 Meaning of significant global entity

(1) An entity is a significant global entity for a period if the entity is a *global parent entity:

whose annual global income for the period is $1 billion or more; or

in relation to whom the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (3) for the period.

(2) An entity is also a significant global entity for a period if:

the entity is a member of a group of entities that are consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group; and

one of the other members of the group is a global parent entity:

whose annual global income for the period is $1 billion or more; or

in relation to whom the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (3) for the period.

(2A) An entity is also a significant global entity for a period if:

the entity is a *member of a notional listed company group; and

one of the other members of the group is a global parent entity:

whose annual global income for the period is $1 billion or more; or

in relation to whom the Commissioner makes a determination under subsection (3) for the period.

(3) The Commissioner may make a determination under this subsection in relation to a *global parent entity for a period if:

global financial statements have not been prepared for the entity for the period; and

on the basis of the information available to the Commissioner, the Commissioner reasonably believes that, if such statements had been prepared for the period, the entity’s annual global income for the period would have been $1 billion or more.

The Commissioner must give a notice of the determination to the global parent entity, or to another entity that becomes a significant global entity as a result of the determination.

(4) An entity who is dissatisfied with a determination made in relation to the entity may object against the determination in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

However, if:

(a) there has been a taxation objection (within the meaning of section 14ZL of the Taxation Administration Act 1953) against an *assessment relating to the entity; and

(b) the assessment involved the application of section 177DA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (schemes that limit a taxable presence in Australia) in relation to the entity;

the right of objection under subsection (4) of this section is unaffected, but the outcome of that objection has no effect on the assessment or on the outcome of the taxation objection.

Note: Section 14ZVA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 excludes from a taxation objection to an assessment any grounds (or potential grounds) for an objection to a determination under subsection (3) of this section.

A determination under subsection (3) is not a legislative instrument.

(7) Section 175 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (validity) applies to a determination under subsection (3) of this section in the same way as it applies to an *assessment.

960-560 Meaning of global parent entity

A global parent entity is an entity that, according to:

*accounting principles; or

if accounting principles do not apply in relation to the entity—commercially accepted principles relating to accounting;

is not controlled by another entity.

Note: A global parent entity may be a single entity that is not a member of a group of entities.

960-565 Meaning of annual global income

(1) The annual global income of an entity for a period is:

if the entity is a *member of a notional listed company group—the total annual income of all the members of the group (worked out on the assumption that all members of the group were consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group); or

if paragraph (aa) does not apply and the entity is a member of a group of entities that are consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group—the total annual income of all the members of the group; or

otherwise—the total annual income of the entity;

as shown in the latest global financial statements for the entity for the period.

Subsection (3) applies if:

global financial statements have not been prepared for the entity for the period; or

global financial statements have not been prepared for the entity for the period that show the total annual income mentioned in subsection (1).

(3) Despite subsection (1), the annual global income of the *entity for the period is the amount that would be, on the assumption that such statements had been prepared, the total annual income mentioned in subsection (1) shown in those statements.

960-570 Meaning of global financial statements

Global financial statements for an entity for a period (the relevant period) are the financial statements that:

have been prepared and audited in relation to that entity, or that entity and other entities, in accordance with:

*accounting principles and *auditing principles; or

if such principles do not apply—commercially accepted principles, relating to accounting and auditing, that ensure the statements give a true and fair view of the financial position and performance of that entity (or that entity and the other entities on a consolidated basis); and

are for the most recent period ending:

no later than the end of the relevant period; and

no earlier than 12 months before the start of the relevant period.

960-575 Meaning of notional listed company group

(1) A notional listed company group is a group of entities that would be required to be consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group, on the assumption that an entity (the test entity) were a listed company (within the meaning of section 26BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

(2) Each entity in that group is a member of the *notional listed company group.

For the purposes of subsection (1), determine whether a group of entities would be required to be consolidated for accounting purposes as a single group according to:

*accounting principles; or

if accounting principles do not apply in relation to the test entity—commercially accepted principles related to accounting.

In applying the *accounting principles or commercially accepted principles referred to in subsection (3):

disregard any exceptions in those principles to requirements in those principles for entities to be consolidated as a single group; and

(b) without limiting paragraph (a), disregard any rule in those principles providing that one or more entities (the excepted entities) are not required to be consolidated as a single group with one or more other entities because the effect of such consolidation would be immaterial as a result of:

the size of the excepted entities; or

any other matter.

Division 961 — Notional tax offsets

Table of Subdivisions

961-A Dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

961-B Dependant (sole parent of a non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

Subdivision 961-A — Dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 961-A

961-1 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides for a notional tax offset for an income year if you contribute to the maintenance of a non-student child or a student dependant. The notional tax offset can only be taken into account in working out certain tax offsets under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Table of sections

Entitlement to the notional tax offset

961-5 Who is entitled to the notional tax offset

Amount of the notional tax offset

961-10 Amount of the dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

961-15 Reduced amounts of the dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

961-20 Reductions to take account of the dependant’s income

Entitlement to the notional tax offset

961-5 Who is entitled to the notional tax offset

You are entitled to a notional tax offset for an income year if:

you are an individual; and

you are an Australian resident; and

(c) during the year you contribute to the maintenance of another individual (the dependant) who:

is less than 25 years of age, and is a full-time student at a school, college or university; or

if subparagraph (i) does not apply—is less than 21 years of age; and

during the year:

the dependant is an Australian resident; or

you had a domicile in Australia.

You may be entitled to more than one notional tax offset for the year under subsection (1) if you contributed to the maintenance of more than one dependant during the year.

Note: The amount of the notional tax offset in relation to each subsequent dependant may only be part of the full amount: see subsection 961-15(1).

(3) The notional tax offset only affects your *income tax liability as provided for by sections 23AB, 79A and 79B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: Section 23AB of that Act provides a tax offset for service with an armed force under the control of the United Nations; section 79A provides a tax offset for residents of isolated areas; section 79B provides a tax offset for members of the Defence Force who are serving overseas.

Amount of the notional tax offset

961-10 Amount of the dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

The amount of the notional tax offset to which you are entitled in relation to a dependant under section 961-5 for an income year is $376.

However, if you are entitled to 2 or more such notional tax offsets for the income year in relation to individuals covered by subparagraph 961-5(1)(c)(ii), the amount of the notional tax offset under section 961-5 is:

in relation to the oldest of those individuals—$376; and

in relation to each of the others—$282.

961-15 Reduced amounts of the dependant (non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

The amount of the notional tax offset under section 961-10 is reduced by the amount in accordance with subsection (2) of this section if one or more of the following applies:

paragraph 961-5(1)(c) applies during part only of the year;

paragraph 961-5(1)(d) applies during part only of the year;

during the whole or part of the year, 2 or more individuals contribute to the maintenance of the dependant;

the dependant only meets the description of the individual covered by subparagraph 961-5(1)(c)(i) or (ii) for part of the year.

The amount of a notional tax offset is reduced to an amount that, in the Commissioner’s opinion, is a reasonable apportionment in the circumstances, having regard to the applicable matters referred to in paragraphs (1)(a) to (d).

961-20 Reductions to take account of the dependant’s income

The amount of the notional tax offset under sections 961-10 and 961-15 in relation to the dependant for the year is reduced by $1 for every $4 by which the following exceeds $282:

if you contribute to the maintenance of the dependant for the whole of the year—the dependant’s adjusted taxable income for offsets for the year;

if paragraph (a) does not apply—the dependant’s adjusted taxable income for offsets for that part of the year during which you contribute to the dependant’s maintenance.

Subdivision 961-B — Dependant (sole parent of a non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

Guide to Subdivision 961-B

961-50 What this Subdivision is about

This Subdivision provides for a notional tax offset for an income year if you are the sole contributor to the maintenance of a non-student child or a student dependant. The notional tax offset can only be taken into account in working out certain tax offsets under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Table of sections

Operative provisions

961-55 Who is entitled to the notional tax offset

961-60 Amount of the dependant (sole parent of a non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

961-65 Reductions to take account of change in circumstances

Operative provisions

961-55 Who is entitled to the notional tax offset

You are entitled to a notional tax offset for an income year if:

(a) during the year you have the sole care of another individual (the dependant) who:

is less than 25 years of age, and is a full-time student at a school, college or university; or

if subparagraph (i) does not apply—is less than 21 years of age; and

you are entitled to a notional tax offset under Subdivision 961-A for the dependant; and

(c) during the year you did not have a *spouse.

Paragraph (1)(c) does not apply if, in the opinion of the Commissioner, because of special circumstances, the paragraph should not apply.

(3) The notional tax offset only affects your *income tax liability as provided for by sections 79A and 79B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: Section 79A of that Act provides a tax offset for residents of isolated areas; section 79B provides a tax offset for members of the Defence Force who are serving overseas.

961-60 Amount of the dependant (sole parent of a non-student child under 21 or student) notional tax offset

The amount of the notional tax offset to which you are entitled under section 961-55 for an income year is $1,607.

Note: The amount of the offset under this section applies regardless of whether you have one or more dependants that satisfy section 961-55.

961-65 Reductions to take account of change in circumstances

The amount of the notional tax offset under section 961-60 is reduced in accordance with subsection (2) if:

paragraph 961-55(1)(a) applies during only part of the year; or

paragraph 961-55(1)(c) does not apply because of subsection 961-55(2).

The amount of the notional tax offset is reduced to an amount that, in the Commissioner’s opinion, is a reasonable apportionment in the circumstances, having regard to the matters referred to in paragraphs (1)(a) and (b).

Division 974 — Debt and equity interests

Table of Subdivisions

974-A General

974-B Debt interests

974-C Equity interests

974-D Common provisions

974-E Non-share distributions by a company

974-F Related concepts

Subdivision 974-A — General

Guide to Division 974

974-1 What this Division is about

This Division tells you whether an interest is a debt interest, or an equity interest, for tax purposes. An interest that could be characterised as both a debt interest and an equity interest will be treated as a debt interest for tax purposes (except for certain interests that fund returns on equity interests).

Whether an interest is a debt interest or an equity interest matters because returns on debt interests are not frankable but may be deductible while returns on equity interests are not deductible but may be frankable.

This Division extends beyond shares the range of interests that are recognised as equity in a company. An interest that is an equity interest in a company but is not a share will be treated in the same way as a share for some tax purposes (particularly in relation to the determination of the tax treatment of returns on the interest).

This Division also tells you how to work out which distributions made in respect of a non-share equity interest in a company will be non-share dividends and which will be non-share capital returns. Those that are non-share dividends will be treated, for most tax purposes, in the same way as dividends.

Table of sections

974-5 Overview of Division

Operative provisions

974-10 Object

974-5 Overview of Division

Test for distinguishing debt and equity interests

The test for distinguishing between debt interests and equity interests focuses on economic substance rather than mere legal form (see subsection 974-10(2)). The test is designed to assess the economic substance of an interest in terms of its impact on the issuer’s position.

Debt interests

Subdivision 974-B tells you when an interest is a debt interest in an entity. The basic test is in section 974-20.

Equity interests

Subdivision 974-C tells you when an interest is an equity interest in a company. The basic test is in section 974-75.

Tie breaker between debt and equity

If an interest satisfies both the debt test and the equity test, it is treated as a debt interest and not an equity interest.

Distributions in relation to equity interests that are not shares

If you have an equity interest in a company that is not a share, Subdivision 974-E tells you what will count as a non-share distribution, a non-share dividend and a non-share capital return in relation to the interest.

Concepts used in the debt and equity tests

Subdivision 974-F defines a number of concepts that are used in the debt and equity tests (financing arrangement, effectively non-contingent obligation, benchmark rate of return and converting interest).

Operative provisions

974-10 Object

An object of this Division is to establish a test for determining for particular tax purposes whether a *scheme, or the combined operation of a number of schemes:

gives rise to a *debt interest; or

gives rise to an *equity interest.

Note 1: The test is used, for example, for:

identifying distributions that may be frankable and which may be subject to dividend withholding tax; and

identifying returns that may be deductible to the company making the return; and

resolving uncertainty as to the proper tax treatment for debt/equity hybrid interests (interests that have some debt qualities and some equity qualities); and

identifying debt capital for the purposes of Division 820 (thin capitalisation rules).

Note 2: Subdivision 167-A has special rules for working out rights to dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters. Those rules include disregarding debt interests.

Another object of this Division is that the test referred to in subsection (1) is to operate on the basis of the economic substance of the rights and obligations arising under the *scheme or schemes rather than merely on the basis of the legal form of the scheme or schemes.

Note 1: The basic indicator of the economic character of a debt interest is the non-contingent nature of the returns. The basic indicator of the economic character of an equity interest, on the other hand, is the contingent nature of the returns (or convertibility into an interest of that nature).

Note 2: The test is intended to operate, for example, to:

deny deductibility (but allow franking) for “interest” in relation to a scheme that has the legal form of a loan if the economic substance of the rights and obligations arising under the relevant scheme gives the interest characteristics that are the same as or similar to those of a dividend on an ordinary share (and thereby prevent deductible returns on equity); and

allow a deduction (but not franking) for a “dividend” in relation to a scheme that has the legal form of an ordinary share if the economic substance of the rights and obligations arising under the relevant scheme gives the dividend characteristics that are the same as or similar to those of deductible interest on an ordinary loan (and thereby prevent frankable returns on debt).

This will not happen if a provision in this Act specifically provides for a different treatment for the interest or dividend.

Another object of this Division is that the combined effect of *related schemes be taken into account in appropriate cases:

to ensure that the test operates effectively on the basis of the economic substance of the rights and obligations arising under the schemes rather than merely on the basis of the legal form of the schemes; and

to prevent the test being circumvented by entities merely entering into a number of separate schemes instead of a single scheme.

(4) Another object of this Division is to identify the distributions and credits made in respect of *non-share equity interests in a company that are to be treated as *dividends (non-share dividends) and those that are to be treated as returns of capital (non-share capital returns).

Note: Non-share dividends will generally be included in the recipient’s assessable income and may be frankable.

The Commissioner must have regard to the objects stated in subsections (1) to (3) in exercising the power to make a determination under any of the following provisions:

subsection 974-15(4);

subsection 974-60(3), (4) or (5);

section 974-65;

subsection 974-70(4);

subsection 974-150(1).

Note: An entity can apply to the Commissioner to have a determination made and can object under Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953 if it is dissatisfied with a determination (see section 974-112).

Regulations may also be made under the provisions of this Division:

to clarify the meaning of certain words and phrases in the light of emerging commercial practices, conditions and products; and

to give guidance on the detailed operation of particular provisions.

The regulations must be consistent with the objects stated in subsections (1) to (3).

(7) Without limiting subsection 13(3) of the Legislation Act 2003, the regulations made for the purposes of this Division may specify different rules for different classes of circumstances.

Subdivision 974-B — Debt interests

Table of sections

974-15 Meaning of debt interest

974-20 The test for a debt interest

974-25 Exceptions to the debt test

974-30 Providing a financial benefit

974-35 Valuation of financial benefit—general rules

974-40 Valuation of financial benefits—rights and options to terminate early

974-45 Valuation of financial benefits—convertible interests

974-50 Valuation of financial benefits—value in present value terms

974-55 The debt interest and its issue

974-60 Debt interest arising out of obligations owed by a number of entities

974-65 Commissioner’s power

974-15 Meaning of debt interest

Single scheme giving rise to debt interest

(1) A *scheme gives rise to a debt interest in an entity if the scheme, when it comes into existence, satisfies the debt test in subsection 974-20(1) in relation to the entity.

Note 1: A debt interest can also arise under subsection (2) (related schemes) or section 974-65 (Commissioner’s discretion).

Note 2: Section 974-55 defines various aspects of the debt interest that arises.

Related schemes giving rise to debt interest

(2) Two or more *related schemes (the constituent schemes) together give rise to a debt interest in an entity if:

the entity enters into, participates in or causes another entity to enter into or participate in the constituent schemes; and

(b) a scheme with the combined effect or operation of the constituent schemes (the notional scheme) would satisfy the debt test in subsection 974-20(1) in relation to the entity if the notional scheme came into existence when the last of the constituent schemes came into existence; and

it is reasonable to conclude that the entity intended, or knew that a party to the scheme or one of the schemes intended, the combined economic effects of the constituent schemes to be the same as, or similar to, the economic effects of a debt interest.

This is so whether or not the constituent schemes come into existence at the same time and even if none of the constituent schemes would individually give rise to that or any other *debt interest.

Note: Section 974-105 explains the effect, for tax purposes, of actions taken under the schemes.

Subsection (2) does not apply if each of the *schemes individually gives rise to a *debt interest in the entity.

(4) Two or more *related schemes do not give rise to a debt interest in an entity under subsection (2) if the Commissioner determines that it would be unreasonable to apply that subsection to those schemes.

Without limiting subsection 974-10(5), the Commissioner must, in exercising the power to make a determination under subsection (4), have regard to the following:

the purpose of the *schemes (considered both individually and in combination);

the effects of the schemes (considered both individually and in combination);

the rights and obligations of the parties to the schemes (considered both individually and in combination);

whether the schemes (when considered either individually or in combination) provide the basis for, or underpin, an interest issued to investors with the expectation that the interest can be assigned to other investors;

whether the schemes (when considered either individually or in combination) comprise a set of rights and obligations issued to investors with the expectation that it can be assigned to other investors;

any other relevant circumstances.

If:

2 or more *related schemes give rise to a debt interest in an entity; and

(b) one or more of those schemes (the hedging scheme or schemes) are schemes for hedging or managing financial risk; and

the other scheme or schemes give rise to a debt interest in the entity even if the hedging scheme or schemes are disregarded;

the debt interest that arises from the schemes is taken, for the purposes of Division 820 (the thin capitalisation rules), not to include the hedging scheme or schemes.

Note: This means that in these circumstances the losses associated with the hedging scheme or schemes are not debt deductions under section 820-40.

974-20 The test for a debt interest

Satisfying the debt test

A *scheme satisfies the debt test in this subsection in relation to an entity if:

the scheme is a financing arrangement for the entity; and

the entity, or a *connected entity of the entity, receives, or will receive, a financial benefit or benefits under the scheme; and

the entity has, or the entity and a connected entity of the entity each has, an effectively non-contingent obligation under the scheme to provide a financial benefit or benefits to one or more entities after the time when:

the financial benefit referred to in paragraph (b) is received if there is only one; or

the first of the financial benefits referred to in paragraph (b) is received if there are more than one; and

it is substantially more likely than not that the value provided (worked out under subsection (2)) will be at least equal to the value received (worked out under subsection (3)); and

the value provided (worked out under subsection (2)) and the value received (worked out under subsection (3)) are not both nil.

The scheme does not need to satisfy paragraph (a) if the entity is a company and the interest arising from the scheme is an interest covered by item 1 of the table in subsection 974-75(1) (interest as a member or stockholder of the company).

Note: Section 974-30 tells you when a financial benefit is taken to be provided to an entity.

(2) The value provided is:

the value of the financial benefit to be provided under the *scheme by the entity or a *connected entity if there is only one; or

the sum of the values of all the financial benefits provided or to be provided under the scheme by the entity or a connected entity of the entity if there are 2 or more.

Note: Section 974-35 tells you how to value financial benefits.

(3) The value received is:

the value of the financial benefit received, or to be received, under the *scheme by the entity or a *connected entity of the entity if there is only one; or

the sum of the values of all the financial benefits received, or to be received, under the scheme by the entity or a connected entity if there are 2 or more.

For the purposes of paragraph (1)(b) and subsections (2) and (3):

a financial benefit to be provided under the *scheme by the entity or a *connected entity is taken into account only if it is one that the entity or connected entity has an effectively non-contingent obligation to provide; and

a financial benefit to be received under the scheme by the entity or a connected entity is taken into account only if it is one that another entity has an effectively non-contingent obligation to provide.

Multiple financial benefits

Paragraphs (1)(b) and (c) apply to 2 or more *financial benefits whether they are provided at the same time or over a period of time.

Regulations

The regulations:

may specify circumstances in which paragraph (1)(d) is satisfied or not satisfied; and

may otherwise specify rules to be applied in determining whether or not paragraph (1)(d) is satisfied.

974-25 Exceptions to the debt test

Short term schemes

A *scheme does not satisfy the debt test in subsection 974-20(1) in relation to an entity if:

at least a substantial part of a financial benefit mentioned in that subsection does not consist of either of the following or a combination of either of the following:

a liquid or monetary asset;

an amount of money; and

the scheme requires the financial benefit mentioned in paragraph 974-20(1)(c) to be provided within a period of no more than 100 days of the receipt of the first financial benefit mentioned in paragraph 974-20(1)(b); and

the financial benefit mentioned in paragraph 974-20(1)(c):

is in fact provided within that period; or

is not provided within that period because the entity required to provide the benefit neglects to provide the benefit within that period (although willing to do so); or

is not provided within that period because the entity required to provide the benefit is unable to provide the benefit within that period (although willing to do so); and

the scheme is not one of a number of *related schemes that together are taken to give rise to a *debt interest under subsection 974-15(2).

Regulations

The regulations may make provision in relation to the application or operation of subsection (1). Without limiting this, the regulations may:

specify what constitutes a substantial part of a financial benefit for the purposes of paragraph (1)(a); or

specify a period to be substituted for the period referred to in paragraph (1)(b).

974-30 Providing a financial benefit

Issue of equity interest

The following do not constitute the provision of a financial benefit by an entity or a *connected entity of the entity:

the issue of an *equity interest in the entity or a connected entity of the entity; or

an amount that is to be applied in respect of the issue of an equity interest in the entity or a connected entity of the entity.

Providing a financial benefit to an entity

A financial benefit is taken to be provided to an entity if it is provided:

to the entity; or

on the entity’s behalf; or

for the entity’s benefit.

Obligation to provide future financial benefit

For the avoidance of doubt, if you have a present obligation to provide a financial benefit to an entity at some time in the future:

the financial benefit is taken to be a financial benefit to be provided in the future; and

the obligation to provide the financial benefit is taken not to be a financial benefit being provided at the present.

974-35 Valuation of financial benefits—general rules

Value in nominal terms or present value terms

For the purposes of this Subdivision:

the value of a financial benefit received or provided under a *scheme is its value calculated:

in nominal terms if the performance period (see subsection (3)) must end no later than 10 years after the interest arising from the scheme is issued; or

in present value terms (see section 974-50) if the performance period must or may end more than 10 years after the interest arising from the scheme is issued; and

the regulations may make provisions relating to the valuation of a financial benefit.

Assume scheme runs its full term

The value of a financial benefit received or provided under a *scheme is calculated assuming that the interest arising from the scheme will continue to be held for the rest of its life.

Note 1: Section 974-40 makes specific provision for cases in which there is a right or option to terminate the interest early.

Note 2: Section 974-45 makes specific provision for cases involving convertible interests.

Performance period

(3) The performance period is the period within which, under the terms on which the interest is issued, the *effectively non-contingent obligations of the issuer, and any *connected entity of the issuer, to provide a *financial benefit in relation to the interest have to be met.

An obligation is treated as having to be met within 10 years after the interest is issued if:

the issuer; or

the *connected entity of the issuer;

has an effectively non-contingent obligation to terminate the interest within that 10 year period even if the terms on which the interest is issued formally allow the obligation to continue after the end of that 10 year period.

Benefit dependent on variable factor

If:

a financial benefit received or provided in respect of an interest depends on a factor that may vary over time (such as a variable interest rate); and

that factor is one commonly used in commercial arrangements; and

it would be unreasonable to expect any of the parties to the *scheme to know, or to anticipate accurately, the future value of that factor; and

(d) that factor has a particular value (the starting value) when the scheme is entered into;

the value of the financial benefit is calculated assuming that the factor’s value will retain the starting value for the whole of the life of the scheme.

Scheme wholly in foreign currency etc.

Note: For example, the value of a return based on a floating interest rate is calculated on the basis that the interest rate remains the interest rate that is applicable when the scheme is entered into.

If all the *financial benefits provided and received under a *scheme are denominated in a particular foreign currency or in terms of quantities of a particular commodity or other unit of account, they are not to be converted into Australian currency for the purpose of comparing their relative values for the purposes of this Subdivision.

974-40 Valuation of financial benefits—rights and options to terminate early

This section deals with the situation in which a party to a *scheme has a right or option to terminate the scheme early (whether by discharging an obligation early, converting the interest arising from the scheme into another interest or otherwise).

Note 1: An example of terminating a scheme early by discharging an obligation early is terminating a loan by discharging the obligation to repay the principal (and any outstanding interest) early.

Note 2: In certain circumstances, conversion of an interest into another interest can terminate its life (see section 974-45).

The existence of the right or option is to be disregarded in working out the length of the life of the interest arising from the *scheme for the purposes of this Subdivision if the party does not have an effectively non-contingent obligation to exercise the right or option.

If the party does have an effectively non-contingent obligation to exercise the right or option, the life of the interest ends at the earliest time at which the party will have to exercise the right or option.

This section does not limit subsection 974-35(2).

974-45 Valuation of financial benefits—convertible interests

This section deals with the situation in which a *scheme gives rise to an *interest that will or may convert into an *equity interest in a company.

The life of the interest ends no later than the time when it converts into that *equity interest.

The possibility of the conversion is to be disregarded in working out the length of the life of the interest arising from the *scheme for the purposes of section 974-35 if it is uncertain:

whether the interest will ever convert; or

when the interest will convert.

Note: Section 974-40 deals with the situation in which a party to the scheme may exercise a right or option to convert the interest.

This section does not limit subsection 974-35(2).

974-50 Valuation of financial benefits—value in present value terms

(1) Subject to the regulations made for the purposes of subsection (5), the value in present value terms of a *financial benefit to be provided or received in respect of an interest (the test interest) is calculated under subsection (4).

If you need to calculate the values in present value terms of a number of *financial benefits, the value of each financial benefit is to be calculated separately.

The value of a financial benefit is to be calculated assuming that all amounts to be paid by an entity in respect of the test interest are paid at the earliest time when the entity becomes liable to pay them.

The value of a financial benefit in present value terms is:

where:

adjusted benchmark rate of return is 75% of the *benchmark rate of return on the test interest.

n is the number of years in the period starting on the day on which the test interest is issued and ending on the day on which the *financial benefit is to be provided. If the period includes a part of a year, that part is to be expressed as the fraction:

year means a period of 12 months.

The regulations may provide for the method of calculating the value in present value terms of a financial benefit.

Without limiting subsection (5), the regulations may:

provide for an entirely different method of calculating the present value of the financial benefit; or

specify the adjusted *benchmark rate of return; or

provide for a different method of determining the adjusted benchmark rate of return; or

specify rules for determining whether a *debt interest is an ordinary debt interest.

974-55 The debt interest and its issue

If a *scheme, or 2 or more *related schemes, give rise to a debt interest in an entity, the debt interest:

consists of the interest that carries the right to receive a financial benefit that the entity or a *connected entity has an effectively non-contingent obligation to provide under the scheme or any of the schemes; and

is taken, subject to section 974-60, to be a debt interest in the entity; and

is taken to be issued by the entity; and

(d) is issued when the entity (or a connected entity of the entity) first receives a *financial benefit under the scheme or any of the schemes; and

(e) is on issue while an effectively non-contingent obligation of the entity (or a connected entity of the entity) to provide a financial benefit under the scheme or any of the schemes remains unfulfilled.

The interest referred to in paragraph (1)(a) may take the form of a proprietary right, a chose in action or any other form.

974-60 Debt interest arising out of obligations owed by a number of entities

This section deals with the situation in which a *scheme, or a number of *related schemes together, would, apart from this section, give rise to the same *debt interest in 2 or more entities.

Note: A scheme may give rise to the same debt interest in 2 or more entities if each of those entities has non-contingent obligations to provide financial benefits under the scheme.

The *debt interest:

is a debt interest in the entity identified under subsection (3) or (4); and

is not a debt interest in the other entity or entities.

The *debt interest is a debt interest in the entity identified using the following method statement:

Method statement

Step 1. Work out, for each of the entities, the total value of the *financial benefits that the entity is under an *effectively non-contingent obligation to provide under the *scheme or schemes: this is the entity’s obligation value.

Step 2. The *debt interest is taken to be a debt interest in the entity with the greatest obligation value.

Step 3. If it is not possible to determine which entity has the greatest obligation value (whether because of an equality of, or uncertainty as to, obligation values or otherwise), the *debt interest is taken to be a debt interest in the entity agreed on by all the entities.

Step 4. If the entities do not agree, the interest is taken to be a *debt interest in the entity determined by the Commissioner.

Despite subsection (3), the Commissioner may determine that the *debt interest is a debt interest in the entity specified in the determination.

The Commissioner may make the determination only if satisfied, having regard to the economic substance of the relevant transactions, that the *debt interest is properly considered from a commercial point of view to be an interest in the entity specified in the determination.

974-65 Commissioner’s power

(1) Despite subsection 974-20(1) (the debt test), the Commissioner may determine that a *scheme gives rise to a debt interest in an entity if the Commissioner considers that:

the scheme would satisfy paragraphs 974-20(1)(a), (b), (c) and (e); but

instead of satisfying paragraph 974-20(1)(d), the scheme would satisfy all the following subparagraphs:

it is substantially more likely than not that the value of the financial benefit to be provided by the entity (or a *connected entity of the entity) under the effectively non-contingent obligation will be at least equal to the substantial part of the value of the financial benefit received or to be received by the entity (or its connected entity) under the scheme;

it is substantially more likely than not that other financial benefits will be provided by the entity (or its connected entity) to one or more entities under the scheme;

it is substantially more likely than not that the sum of the values of the financial benefits mentioned in subparagraphs (i) and (ii) will be at least equal to the value of the financial benefit received by the entity (or its connected entity) under the scheme.

In making the determination, the Commissioner must have regard to the following:

the difference between the value of the financial benefit received and the value of the financial benefit to be provided under the effectively non-contingent obligation;

the degree of likelihood of other financial benefits being provided under the *scheme;

the degree of likelihood of the sum of the value of the financial benefits mentioned in subparagraphs (1)(b)(i) and (ii) being equal to or greater than the value of the financial benefit received under the scheme;

the particular circumstances surrounding the scheme (including circumstances of the parties to the scheme and their purposes for entering into the scheme).

If the Commissioner determines under this section that a *scheme gives rise to a *debt interest, the scheme has that effect for all purposes of this Division.

Subdivision 974-C — Equity interests in companies

Table of sections

974-70 Meaning of equity interest in a company

974-75 The test for an equity interest

974-80 Equity interest arising from arrangement funding return through connected entities

974-85 Right or return contingent on aspects of economic performance

974-90 Right or return at discretion of company or connected entity

974-95 The equity interest

974-70 Meaning of equity interest in a company

Scheme giving rise to equity interest

(1) A *scheme gives rise to an equity interest in a company if, when the scheme comes into existence:

the scheme satisfies the equity test in subsection 974-75(1) in relation to the company because of the existence of an interest; and

the interest is not characterised as, and does not form part of a larger interest that is characterised as, a *debt interest in the company, or a *connected entity of the company, under Subdivision 974-B.

Note 1: An equity interest can also arise under subsection (2) if a notional scheme with the combined effect of a number of related schemes would give rise to an equity interest under this subsection. To do this, the notional scheme would need to satisfy paragraph (b). This means that the related schemes will not give rise to an equity interest if the notional scheme would be characterised as (or form part of a larger interest that would be characterised as) a debt interest in the company or a connected entity.

Note 2: An equity interest can also arise under section 974-80 (arrangements for funding return through connected entities).

Note 3: Section 974-95 defines various aspects of the equity interest that arises.

Related schemes giving rise to equity interest

(2) Two or more *related schemes (the constituent schemes) are taken together to give rise to an equity interest in a company if:

the company enters into, participates in or causes another entity to enter into or participate in the constituent schemes; and

(b) a scheme with the combined effect or operation of the constituent schemes (the notional scheme) would give rise to an *equity interest in the company under subsection (1) if the notional scheme came into existence when the last of the constituent schemes came into existence; and

it is reasonable to conclude that the company intended, or knew that a party to the scheme or one of the schemes intended, the combined economic effects of the constituent schemes to be the same as, or similar to, the economic effects of an equity interest.

This is so whether or not the constituent schemes come into existence at the same time and even if none of the constituent schemes would individually give rise to that or any other equity interest.

Note: Section 974-105 explains the effect, for tax purposes, of actions taken under the schemes.

Subsection (2) does not apply if each of the constituent *schemes individually gives rise to an *equity interest in the company.

Two or more related *schemes do not give rise to an *equity interest in a company under subsection (2) if the Commissioner determines that it would be unreasonable to apply that subsection to those schemes.

Without limiting subsection 974-10(5), the Commissioner must, in exercising the power to make a determination under subsection (4), have regard to the following:

the purpose of the *schemes (considered both individually and in combination);

the effects of the schemes (considered both individually and in combination);

the rights and obligations of the parties to the schemes (considered both individually and in combination);

whether the schemes (when considered either individually or in combination) provide the basis for, or underpin, an interest issued to investors with the expectation that the interest can be assigned to other investors;

whether the schemes (when considered either individually or in combination) comprise a set of rights and obligations issued to investors with the expectation that it can be assigned to other investors;

any other relevant circumstances.

974-75 The test for an equity interest

Basic test for equity interest

A *scheme satisfies the equity test in this subsection in relation to a company if it gives rise to an interest set out in the following table:

This subsection has effect subject to subsection (2) (requirement for financing arrangement).

Financing arrangement

Note: Section 974-90 allows regulations to be made clarifying when a right or return is taken to be at discretion of a company or connected entity.

A *scheme that would otherwise give rise to an *equity interest in a company because of an item in the table in subsection (1) (other than item 1) does not give rise to an equity interest in the company unless the scheme is a financing arrangement for the company.

Form interest may take

The interest referred to in item 2, 3 or 4 in the table in subsection (1) may take the form of a proprietary right, a chose in action or any other form.

Exception for certain at call loans—until 30 June 2005

If:

a financing arrangement takes the form of a loan to a company by a *connected entity; and

the loan does not have a fixed term; and

either:

the loan is repayable on demand made by the connected entity, and repayment is required immediately on the making of the demand, or is required at the end of a particular period after the demand is made (being a period that is not longer than is reasonably necessary to arrange repayment); or

the loan is repayable on the death of the connected entity (if the connected entity is an individual); and

the arrangement was entered into on or before 30 June 2005;

the arrangement does not give rise to an equity interest in the company. Instead, the arrangement is taken, despite anything in Subdivision 974-B, to give rise to a debt interest in the company. This subsection ceases to have effect on 1 July 2005.

Note: If this subsection ceases to have effect in relation to an interest that is, according to the other provisions of this Division, an equity interest immediately after the cessation, an adjustment to the company’s non-share capital account will occur at that time (see subsection 164-15(2)).

(5) If, while subsection (4) applies to a *financing arrangement, a circumstance occurs that would otherwise have attracted the operation of subsection 974-110(1) or (2) in relation to the arrangement:

that subsection of section 974-110 does not apply to change the result that subsection (4) of this section produces in relation to the arrangement; but

for the purpose of applying this Division in relation to the arrangement after subsection (4) of this section has ceased to have effect, that subsection of section 974-110 is taken to have produced the result that it would have produced if subsection (4) of this section had not applied to the arrangement.

Further exception for certain related party at call loans

(6) In applying this Division in relation to a particular *scheme and a particular income year (which may be the income year in which the scheme is entered into or a later income year), the scheme is taken not to give rise to an equity interest in a company, and instead to give rise to a debt interest in the company, if:

the scheme takes the form of a loan to the company that satisfies paragraphs (4)(a), (b) and (c); and

the company’s GST turnover (worked out at the end of the income year) is less than $20,000,000.

Note: If this subsection does not apply in relation to the previous income year or the next income year, and the scheme gives rise to an equity interest according to the other provisions of this Division, an adjustment to the company’s non-share capital account will occur at the end of the previous income year or the start of the next income year (see subsections 164-15(2) and 164-20(3)).

For the purpose of paragraph (6)(b), the question whether a company’s GST turnover (worked out at the end of an income year) is less than $20,000,000 is to be determined in accordance with subsection 188-10(2) of the GST Act, as if that amount of $20,000,000 were a turnover threshold for the purposes of that subsection of the GST Act.

974-80 Equity interest arising from arrangement funding return through connected entities

This section deals with the situation in which:

an interest carries a right to a variable or fixed return from a company; and

the interest is held by a *connected entity of the company; and

apart from this section, the interest would not be an *equity interest in the company; and

the *scheme that gives rise to the interest is a financing arrangement for the company; and

(d) there is a scheme, or a series of schemes, designed to operate so that the return to the connected entity is to be used to fund (directly or indirectly) a return to another person (the ultimate recipient).

(2) The interest is an equity interest in the company if:

the amount of the return to the ultimate recipient is in substance or effect contingent on aspects of the economic performance (whether past, current or future) of:

the company; or

a part of the company’s activities; or

a *connected entity of the company or a part of the activities of a connected entity of the company; or

either the right itself, or the amount of the return to the ultimate recipient, is at the discretion of:

the company; or

a connected entity of the company; or

the interest in respect of which the return to the ultimate recipient is made or another interest that arises from the scheme, or any of the schemes, referred to in paragraph (1)(d):

gives the ultimate recipient (or a connected entity of the ultimate recipient) a right to be issued with an *equity interest in the company or a connected entity of the company; or

is an *interest that will, or may, convert into an equity interest in the company or a connected entity of the company;

and if the interest does not form part of a larger interest that is characterised as a *debt interest in the entity in which it is held, or a *connected entity, under Subdivision 974-B. The return may be a return of an amount invested in the interest.

Company B1 operates Trust Fund C. An interest in Trust Fund C is issued to person H and the return on that interest is contingent on aspects of the economic performance of Company A.

Trust Fund C lends the money paid by H for the purchase of the interest to Company B1 which lends the money to Company B2 which lends the money to Company B3 which lends the money to Company A.

Under the arrangements under which the interest is issued and the loans made, payments of interest by Company A on the loan that Company B3 makes to Company A are intended to pass back through Company B2 and Company B1 to fund the return on H’s interest in Trust Fund C.

Under subsection (2), Company B3 will have an equity interest in Company A. If the return to Company B3 were itself contingent on Company A’s performance, Company B3’s interest would be an equity interest in Company A under item 2 of the table in subsection 974-75(1) (and not under subsection (2) of this section).

Company B2 has an equity interest in Company B3 and Company B1 has an equity interest in Company B2. This is because the returns they get are intended to fund the return on H’s interest in Trust Fund C and that return is contingent on aspects of the economic performance of Company A (which is related to both Company B3 and Company B2).

Note 1: Section 974-90 allows regulations to be made clarifying when a right or return is taken to be at the discretion of a company or connected entity.

Note 2: Paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) parallel items 2, 3 and 4 of the table in subsection 974-75(1).

Example: Company A, Company B1, Company B2 and Company B3 are connected entities.

The interest referred to in paragraph (1)(a) or (2)(c) may take the form of a proprietary right, a chose in action or any other form.

974-85 Right or return contingent on aspects of economic performance

(1) A right, or the amount of a return, is contingent on aspects of the economic performance of an entity, or a part of the entity’s activities, if the right or return is contingent on the economic performance of that entity, or that part of those activities, but not solely because of one of the following:

the ability or willingness of an entity to meet the obligation to satisfy the right to the return;

the receipts or turnover of the entity or the turnover generated by those activities.

The regulations may specify circumstances in which a right or return is to be taken to be contingent, or not contingent, on aspects of the economic performance of an entity or a part of an entity’s activities.

The regulations may provide that paragraph (1)(b) does not apply in the circumstances specified in the regulations.

The regulations may provide that an interest that:

is covered by item 2 in the table in subsection 974-75(1) or paragraph 974-80(2)(a); and

arises in the circumstances specified in the regulations;

is not an equity interest because of:

the limited extent to which the right or return that the interest carries is contingent on aspects of the economic performance of an entity or a part of the entity’s activities; or

the practical insignificance of the right or return that the interest carries being contingent on that performance.

974-90 Right or return at discretion of company or connected entity

The regulations may specify circumstances in which a right, or the amount of a return, is to be taken to be at the discretion of a company or a *connected entity of the company.

974-95 The equity interest

If a *scheme gives rise to an *equity interest in a company because of an item of the table in subsection 974-75(1), the equity interest consists of the interest referred to in that item.

If 2 or more *related schemes give rise to an *equity interest in a company because of an item of the table in subsection 974-75(1), the equity interest consists of the combination of interests under the schemes that satisfy the requirements of that item.

Subsection 974-80(2) also provides that certain interests are *equity interests in a company.

If the returns on a non-share equity interest in a company are payable to 2 or more entities:

each entity is taken to be the holder of a non-share equity interest in the company; and

each entity’s non-share equity interest consists of the interests that:

constitute the non-share equity interest; and

are held by that entity.

The company in which an *equity interest exists is taken to be the issuer of the interest.

Subdivision 974-D — Common provisions

Table of sections

974-100 Treatment of convertible and converting interests

974-105 Effect of action taken in relation to interest arising from related schemes

974-110 Effect of material change

974-112 Determinations by Commissioner

974-100 Treatment of convertible and converting interests

If a *debt interest is an *interest that will or may convert into an *equity interest, the conversion is taken, for the purposes of this Division to give rise to a new interest (and is not treated merely as a continuation of the debt interest).

If an *equity interest is an *interest that will or may convert into a *debt interest, the conversion is taken, for the purposes of this Division to give rise to a new interest (and is not treated merely as a continuation of the equity interest).

974-105 Effect of action taken in relation to interest arising from related schemes

If:

a *scheme, or schemes, give rise to a debt interest in an entity or an *equity interest in a company; and

(b) the entity or company pays a return, or undertakes any other transaction, in respect of any of the following (the component element):

the scheme; or

a part of the scheme; or

one of those schemes; or

a part of one of those schemes;

then, for the purposes of the provisions that subsection (2) covers, the return is taken to be paid, or the transaction to have been undertaken, in respect of the debt interest or equity interest and not in respect of the component element.

Example: Company A issues a convertible note to Company B. Company C, a connected entity of Company B, provides a binding collateral undertaking to Company A that Company B will exercise the option to convert the note into shares in Company A. The convertible note and the undertaking are related schemes that may give rise to an equity interest in Company A if their combined effect satisfies section 974-70. If so, the returns on the note are taken to be returns in respect of the equity interest.

This subsection covers:

the provisions of this Division (other than this section); and

any other provision of this Act whose operation depends on an expression whose meaning is given by this Division.

974-110 Effect of material change

Change to existing scheme—general rule

If:

a *scheme or schemes give rise to a *debt interest (or an *equity interest) in a company; and

the scheme, or one or more of the schemes, are subsequently changed, including where one or more (but not all) of the schemes cease to exist; and

the scheme or schemes as they exist immediately after the change would give rise to an equity interest (or a debt interest) in the company if they came into existence when the change occurred; and

subsection (1A) does not apply to the change;

this Division applies after the change as if the scheme or schemes as they exist immediately after the change came into existence when the change occurred.

Change to existing scheme—special rule for changing a related party at call etc. loan to a private company from equity to debt

Note 1: This will mean that the characterisation of the interest will change at that time.

Note 2: This section can apply to an interest a number of times so that, for example, an interest that is equity when issued may change to debt because of one subsequent change and then back to equity because of a later change.

Note 3: There will be an adjustment to the company’s non-share capital account when the change occurs (see subsections 164-15(2) and 164-20(3)).

If:

a *scheme takes the form of a loan that satisfies paragraphs 974-75(4)(a), (b) and (c); and

the scheme gives rise to an *equity interest (disregarding the effect this subsection has on the characterisation of the interest because of the change referred to in paragraph (c) of this subsection); and

(c) the scheme is subsequently changed; and

(d) the change occurs in the period starting immediately after the end of a particular income year (the year of effect) and ending at the end of the earlier of the following days:

the due date for lodgment of the company’s income tax return for the year of effect;

the date of lodgment of the company’s income tax return for the year of effect; and

(e) the scheme, as it exists immediately after the change, would give rise to a *debt interest in the company if the interest came into existence when the change occurred; and

the company is a private company in relation to the year of effect; and

subsection 974-75(6) does not apply in relation to the loan and the year of effect; and

the company elects that this subsection is to apply to the change;

this Division applies as if the scheme, as it exists immediately after the change, had come into existence at the start of the year of effect, and as if no other change of a kind referred to in subsection (1) had occurred in relation to the interest in the period commencing at the start of the year of effect and ending when the first-mentioned change was made.

Note 1: This will mean that:

the characterisation of the interest will change, with effect back to the start of the year of effect; and

that characterisation will not be affected by other changes that occurred after the start of the year of effect and before the change to which this subsection applies.

Note 2: This section can apply to an interest a number of times so that, for example, an interest that is an equity interest when issued may change to debt because of one subsequent change and then back to equity because of a later change.

Note 3: An adjustment to the company’s non-share capital account will be taken to have occurred at the start of the year of effect (see subsection 164-20(3)).

An election for the purposes of paragraph (1A)(h):

must be in writing; and

can only be made in the period referred to in paragraph (1A)(d); and

cannot be revoked.

Entering into a new related scheme

If:

a *scheme or schemes give rise to a *debt interest (or an *equity interest) in a company; and

the company subsequently enters into, participates in or causes another entity to enter into or participate in a new related scheme; and

the scheme or schemes, together with:

the new related scheme; and

any other related scheme that the entity (or company) enters into, participates in or causes another entity to enter into or participate in before the new related scheme is entered into;

would give rise to an equity interest (or a debt interest) in the company if they all came into existence when the new related scheme is entered into;

this Division applies after the new related scheme is entered into as if all the schemes referred to in paragraph (c) had come into existence when the new related scheme is entered into.

All prior changes to be taken into account

Note 1: This will mean that the characterisation of the interest will change at that time.

Note 2: This section can apply to an interest a number of times so that, for example, an interest that is equity when issued may change to debt because of one subsequent change and then back to equity because of a later change.

Note 3: There will be an adjustment to the company’s non-share capital account when the change occurs (see subsections 164-15(2) and 164-20(3)).

In applying paragraphs (1)(c), (1A)(e) and (2)(c) to the *scheme or schemes, take into account:

all changes to the scheme or schemes that occur before the change or before the new related scheme is entered into; and

all *related schemes entered into before the change or before the new related scheme is entered into; and

all changes to related schemes referred to in paragraph (b) that occur before the change or before the new related scheme is entered into.

974-112 Determinations by Commissioner

Determinations covered by this section

This section covers a determination by the Commissioner under any of the following provisions:

subsection 974-15(4);

subsection 974-60(3), (4) or (5);

section 974-65;

subsection 974-70(4);

subsection 974-150(1).

Determination on own initiative or on application

The Commissioner may make a determination covered by this section:

on his or her own initiative; or

on an application made under subsection (3).

Application for determination

An entity may apply to the Commissioner for a determination covered by this section in relation to:

an interest of which the entity is the issuer; or

an interest of which the entity would be the issuer:

if the determination were made; or

if the determination were not made.

Note: Paragraph (b) may apply, for example, if the effect of the determination applied for would be to allow, or to prevent, a number of related schemes giving rise to a debt interest or an equity interest.

The application:

must be in writing; and

must set out the grounds on which the applicant thinks the determination should be made; and

must set out any information relevant to deciding whether to make the determination.

Review of determinations

(5) A taxpayer who is dissatisfied with a determination covered by this section may object against the determination in the manner set out in Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Subdivision 974-E — Non-share distributions by a company

Table of sections

974-115 Meaning of non-share distribution

974-120 Meaning of non-share dividend

974-125 Meaning of non-share capital return

974-115 Meaning of non-share distribution

A company makes a non-share distribution to you if:

you hold a *non-share equity interest in the company; and

the company:

distributes money to you; or

distributes other property to you; or

credits an amount to you;

as the holder of that interest.

974-120 Meaning of non-share dividend

(1) Subject to subsection (2), all *non-share distributions are non-share dividends.

(2) A *non-share distribution is not a non-share dividend to the extent to which the company debits the distribution against:

the company’s non-share capital account; or

the company’s share capital account.

974-125 Meaning of non-share capital return

A non-share capital return is a *non-share distribution to the extent to which it is not a *non-share dividend.

Subdivision 974-F — Related concepts

Table of sections

974-130 Financing arrangement

974-135 Effectively non-contingent obligation

974-140 Ordinary debt interest

974-145 Benchmark rate of return

974-150 Schemes

974-155 Related schemes

974-160 Financial benefit

974-165 Convertible and converting interests

974-130 Financing arrangement

(1) A *scheme is a financing arrangement for an entity if it is entered into or undertaken:

to raise finance for the entity (or a *connected entity of the entity); or

to fund another scheme, or a part of another scheme, that is a financing arrangement under paragraph (a); or

to fund a return, or a part of a return, payable under or provided by or under another scheme, or a part of another scheme, that is a financing arrangement under paragraph (a).

The following are examples of *schemes that are generally entered into or undertaken to raise finance:

a bill of exchange;

income securities;

a convertible interest that will convert into an *equity interest.

Note: Paragraph (a) is likely to be relevant for debt interests, paragraph (b) for equity interests and paragraph (c) for both.

The following are examples of *schemes that are generally not entered into or undertaken to raise finance:

a derivative that is used solely for managing financial risk;

a contract for personal services entered into in the ordinary course of a business.

Note: These may be relevant for both debt interests and equity interests.

For the purposes of subsection (1), the following *schemes are taken not to be entered into or undertaken to raise finance:

a lease or bailment that satisfies all of the following:

(i) the property leased or bailed is not property to which Division 16D of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (arrangements relating to the use of property) applies;

the lease or bailment is not a relevant agreement for the purposes of section 128AC of that Act (deemed interest in respect of hire-purchase and certain other arrangements);

the lease or bailment is not an arrangement to which Division 240 of this Act (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan), or Division 242 of this Act (about luxury car leases), applies;

the lessee or bailee, or a *connected entity of the lessee or bailee, is not to, and does not have an obligation (whether contingent or not) or a right to, acquire the leased or bailed property;

Division 250 of this Act does not apply to a person and the property leased or bailed;

(b) a securities lending arrangement under section 26BC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

a life insurance or general insurance contract undertaken as part of the issuer’s ordinary course of business;

(d) a scheme for the payment of royalties (within the meaning of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) other than:

(i) a qualifying arrangement for the purposes of Division 16D of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

a relevant agreement for the purposes of section 128AC of that Act; or

a scheme or arrangement for the payment of royalties in relation to an asset if Division 250 of this Act applies to a person and the asset.

The regulations may:

(a) specify that particular *schemes are not financing arrangements; and

(b) specify circumstances in which a scheme will not be a financing arrangement.

974-135 Effectively non-contingent obligation

(1) There is an effectively non-contingent obligation to take an action under a *scheme if, having regard to the pricing, terms and conditions of the scheme, there is in substance or effect a non-contingent obligation (see subsections (3), (4) and (6)) to take that action.

Without limiting subsection (1), that subsection applies to:

providing a financial benefit under the *scheme; or

terminating the scheme.

(3) An obligation is non-contingent if it is not contingent on any event, condition or situation (including the economic performance of the entity having the obligation or a *connected entity of that entity), other than the ability or willingness of that entity or connected entity to meet the obligation.

The existence of the right of the holder of an *interest that will or may convert into an *equity interest in a company to convert the interest does not of itself make the issuer’s obligation to repay the investment not non-contingent.

An obligation to redeem a preference share is not contingent merely because there is a legislative requirement for the redemption amount to be met out of profits or a fresh issue of *equity interests.

In determining whether there is in substance or effect a non-contingent obligation to take the action, have regard to the artificiality, or the contrived nature, of any contingency on which the obligation to take the action depends.

Note: The artificiality, or the contrived nature, of a contingency would tend to indicate that there is, in substance or effect, a non-contingent obligation to take that action.

(7) An obligation of yours is not effectively non-contingent merely because you will suffer some detrimental practical or commercial consequences if you do not fulfil the obligation.

Note: For example, a contingent obligation to make payments in respect of an income security issued by an approved deposit-taking institution (ADI) is not effectively non-contingent merely because of the detrimental effect non-payment would have on the ADI’s business.

The regulations may make further provisions relating to the following:

what constitutes a non-contingent obligation;

what does not constitute a non-contingent obligation;

what constitutes an effectively non-contingent obligation;

what does not constitute an effectively non-contingent obligation.

974-140 Ordinary debt interest

(1) A *debt interest arising from a scheme is an ordinary debt interest if none of the obligations under the scheme is in substance or effect *contingent on aspects of the economic performance of:

the issuer of the interest; or

a *connected entity; or

a part of the operations of the issuer or a connected entity.

The regulations may specify rules for determining whether a *debt interest is an ordinary debt interest.

974-145 Benchmark rate of return

(1) The benchmark rate of return for an interest (the test interest) in an entity is the annually compounded internal rate of return on an *ordinary debt interest that:

is issued, immediately before the test interest is issued, by the entity, or an equivalent entity, to an entity that is not a *connected entity; and

has a comparable maturity date; and

is in the same currency; and

is issued in the same market; and

has the same credit status; and

has the same degree of subordination to debts owed to the ordinary creditors of the issuer.

(2) If there is no interest that satisfies subsection (1), the benchmark rate of return for the test interest is the annually compounded internal rate of return on an interest that is closest to the test interest in the respects referred to in that subsection (adjusted appropriately to take account of the differences between that interest and the test interest).

The regulations may:

specify the meaning to be given to an expression used in this section; or

provide for a different method of determining the *benchmark rate of return.

974-150 Schemes

The Commissioner:

may determine that what would otherwise be a single *scheme is to be treated for the purposes of this Division as 2 or more separate schemes; and

may determine that the schemes are to be taken for the purposes of this Division to not be *related schemes.

Without limiting subsection 974-10(5), the Commissioner must, in exercising the power to make a determination under subsection (1), have regard to the following:

the purpose of the *scheme (considered both as a whole and in terms of its individual components);

the effects of the scheme and each of its components (considered both as a whole and in terms of its individual components);

the rights and obligations of the parties to the scheme (considered both as a whole and in relation to its individual components);

whether the scheme (when considered as a whole or in terms of its individual components) provides the basis for, or underpins, an interest issued to investors with the expectation that the interest can be assigned to other investors;

whether the scheme (when considered as a whole or in terms of its individual components) comprises a set of rights and obligations issued to investors with the expectation that it can be assigned to other investors;

any other relevant circumstances.

The regulations:

may provide that, in the circumstances specified in the regulations, what would otherwise be a single *scheme is to be treated for the purposes of this Division as 2 or more separate schemes; and

may provide that the schemes are to be taken for the purposes of this Division to not be *related schemes.

974-155 Related schemes

(1) Subject to subsection (3), 2 *schemes are related to one another if they are related to one another in any way.

(2) Without limiting subsection (1), 2 *schemes are related to each other if:

the schemes are based on stapled instruments; or

one of the schemes would, from a commercial point of view, be unlikely to be entered into unless the other scheme was entered into; or

one of the schemes depends for its effect on the operation of the other scheme; or

one scheme complements or supplements the other; or

there is another scheme to which both the schemes are related because of a previous application or applications of this subsection.

(3) Two *schemes are not related to one another merely because:

one refers to the other; or

they have a common party.

The regulations may specify circumstances in which 2 *schemes:

are taken to be related to one another; or

are taken not to be related to one another.

974-160 Financial benefit

In this Act:

financial benefit:

means anything of economic value; and

includes property and services; and

includes anything that regulations made for the purposes of subsection (3) provide is a financial benefit;

even if the transaction that confers the benefit on an entity also imposes an obligation on the entity.

In applying subsection (1), benefits and obligations are to be looked at separately and not set off against each other.

(3) The regulations may provide that a thing specified in the regulations is a financial benefit for the purposes of this Act.

974-165 Convertible and converting interests

An interest (the first interest) is an interest that will or may convert into another interest (the second interest) if:

the first interest, or a part of the first interest, must be or may be converted into the second interest; or

the first interest, or a part of the first interest, must be or may be redeemed, repaid or satisfied by:

the issue or transfer of the second interest (whether to the holder of the first interest or to some other person); or

the acquisition of the second interest (whether by the holder of the first interest or by some other person); or

the application in or towards paying-up (in whole or in part) the balance unpaid on the second interest (whether the second interest is to be issued to the holder of the first interest or to some other person); or

the holder of the first interest has, or is to have, a right or option to have allotted or transferred to the holder or to some other person, or for the holder or some other person otherwise to acquire:

the second interest; or

a right or option to acquire the second interest.

Division 975 — Concepts about companies

Table of Subdivisions

975-A General

975-G What is a company’s share capital account?

975-W Wholly-owned groups of companies

Subdivision 975-A — General

Table of sections

975-150 Position to affect rights in relation to a company

975-155 When is an entity a controller (for CGT purposes) of a company?

975-160 When an entity has an associate-inclusive control interest

975-150 Position to affect rights in relation to a company

(1) A person is in a position to affect rights of a company in relation to another company if the person has a right, power or option:

to acquire those rights from one or other of those companies; or

to do something that would prevent one or other of those companies from exercising its rights for its own benefit, or from receiving any benefit arising from having those rights.

It does not matter whether the person has the right, power or option because of the *constitution of one or other of those companies, any agreement or otherwise.

However, the right, power or option of an owner of *ownership interests in the *head entity of a demerger group to *acquire, under a demerger, ownership interests in the demerged entity is not a right, power or option covered by subsection (1).

975-155 When is an entity a controller (for CGT purposes) of a company?

An entity (the first entity) is a controller (for CGT purposes) of a company if:

the first entity has an associate-inclusive control interest in the company of at least 50%; or

the first entity has an associate-inclusive control interest in the company of at least 40% and entities other than the first entity or associates of the first entity do not control the company; or

the first entity controls the company (alone or with an associate).

975-160 When an entity has an associate-inclusive control interest

(1) An entity has an associate-inclusive control interest in a company in the circumstances set out in Subdivision A of Division 3 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

However, in working out whether an entity has an associate-inclusive control interest of a particular percentage for the purposes of section 975-155, there are these modifications to the way Part X of that Act operates:

that Part is applied to any company, including one acting as a trustee; and

subsection 349(4) applies in all cases in working out which entity holds a direct control interest or a control tracing interest equal to 100%; and

subsections 350(6) and (7) and 355(1) are ignored; and

despite subsection 352(2), an interposed entity may be taken into account in calculating an indirect control interest if the interposed entity is:

a company of which the first entity or an associate is a controller; or

a partnership or a trust; and

section 354 applies as if it referred to partnerships rather than CFP’s; and

section 355 applies as if it referred to trusts rather than CFT’s.

Note 1: Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 defines company to exclude a company in the capacity of a trustee.

Note 2: The terms direct control interest and control tracing interest are relevant to working out associate-inclusive control interests in a company: see sections 350, 351, 353, 354 and 355 of that Act.

Note 3: Under subsection 349(4) of that Act, if 2 or more entities would have a direct control interest or a control tracing interest in a company or trust equal to 100%, only one of them holds the interest.

Note 4: Subsections 350(6) and (7) of that Act deal with direct control interests in a company. They deal with interests held by Australian entities. Under subsection 355(1), certain entities are taken to hold a control tracing interest in a trust equal to 100%.

Note 5: Paragraphs (2)(d), (e) and (f) of this section are necessary because Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies only to CFE’s (which comprise CFC’s, CFP’s and CFT’s).

Subdivision 975-G — What is a company’s share capital account?

Table of sections

975-300 Meaning of share capital account

975-300 Meaning of share capital account

(1) A company’s share capital account is:

an account that the company keeps of its share capital; or

any other account (whether or not called a share capital account) that satisfies the following conditions:

the account was created on or after 1 July 1998;

the first amount credited to the account was an amount of share capital.

If a company has more than one account covered by subsection (1), the accounts are taken, for the purposes of this Act, to be a single account.

Note: Because the accounts are taken to be a single account (the combined share capital account), tainting of any of the accounts has the effect of tainting the combined share capital account.

However, if a company’s share capital account is *tainted, that account is taken not to be a share capital account for the purposes this Act, other than:

subsection 118-20(6); and

Division 197; and

paragraph 202-45(e); and

(c) the definition of paid-up share capital in subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

(d) subsection 44(1B) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

(f) subsection 159GZZZQ(5) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Subdivision 975-W — Wholly-owned groups of companies

Table of sections

975-500 Wholly-owned groups

975-505 What is a 100% subsidiary?

975-500 Wholly-owned groups

Two companies are members of the same wholly-owned group if:

one of the companies is a *100% subsidiary of the other company; or

each of the companies is a *100% subsidiary of the same third company.

975-505 What is a 100% subsidiary?

(1) A company (the subsidiary company) is a 100% subsidiary of another company (the holding company) if all the *shares in the subsidiary company are beneficially owned by:

the holding company; or

one or more 100% subsidiaries of the holding company; or

the holding company and one or more 100% subsidiaries of the holding company.

(2) However, the subsidiary company is not a 100% subsidiary of the holding company if a person is *in a position to affect rights, in relation to the subsidiary company, of:

the holding company; or

a 100% subsidiary of the holding company.

(3) The subsidiary company is also not a 100% subsidiary of the holding company if at some future time a person will be *in a position to affect rights as described in subsection (2).

(4) A company (other than the subsidiary company) is a 100% subsidiary of the holding company if, and only if:

it is a 100% subsidiary of the holding company; or

it is a 100% subsidiary of a 100% subsidiary of the holding company;

because of any other application or applications of this section.

Division 976 — Imputation

Table of sections

976-1 Franked part of a distribution

976-5 Unfranked part of a distribution

976-10 The part of a distribution that is franked with an exempting credit

976-15 The part of a distribution that is franked with a venture capital credit

976-1 Franked part of a distribution

The franked part of a *distribution is an amount worked out using the formula:

where:

applicable gross-up rate means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.

976-5 Unfranked part of a distribution

The unfranked part of a *distribution is the amount that is left after deducting the *franked part of the distribution from the total distribution.

976-10 The part of a distribution that is franked with an exempting credit

The part of a distribution that is franked with an exempting credit is worked out using the formula:

where:

applicable gross-up rate means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.

976-15 The part of a distribution that is franked with a venture capital credit

The part of a distribution that is franked with a venture capital credit is worked out using the formula:

where:

applicable gross-up rate means the *corporate tax gross-up rate of the entity making the distribution for the income year in which the distribution is made.

Division 977 — Realisation events, and the gains and losses they realise for income tax purposes

Table of sections

CGT assets

977-5 Realisation event

977-10 Loss realised for income tax purposes

977-15 Gain realised for income tax purposes

Trading stock

977-20 Realisation event

977-25 Disposal of trading stock: loss realised for income tax purposes

977-30 Ending of an income year: loss realised for income tax purposes

977-35 Disposal of trading stock: gain realised for income tax purposes

977-40 Ending of an income year: gain realised for income tax purposes

Revenue assets

977-50 Meaning of revenue asset

977-55 Loss or gain realised for income tax purposes

CGT assets

977-5 Realisation event

For a *CGT asset, a realisation event is a *CGT event (except CGT event E4, CGT event E10 and CGT event G1).

977-10 Loss realised for income tax purposes

(1) A loss is realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event that happens to a *CGT asset if, and only if, an entity makes a *capital loss from the event. That capital loss is the loss realised by the event.

If a provision of this Act reduces the loss that would, apart from that provision, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event, the *capital loss is reduced by the same amount.

977-15 Gain realised for income tax purposes

(1) A gain is realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event that happens to a *CGT asset if, and only if, an entity makes a *capital gain from the event. That capital gain is the gain that is realised by the event.

If a provision of this Act reduces the gain that would, apart from that provision, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event, the *capital gain is reduced by the same amount.

Trading stock

977-20 Realisation event

For an item of *trading stock, a realisation event is a disposal of the item or the ending of an income year.

977-25 Disposal of trading stock: loss realised for income tax purposes

(1) A loss is realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event consisting of disposal of an item of *trading stock if, and only if:

the item is disposed of, for less than its *cost, in the same income year in which it became part of the trading stock on hand of the entity disposing of it; or

the item is disposed of in a later income year for less than its *value as trading stock of the entity on hand at the start of the later income year.

The loss that is realised for income tax purposes by the event is the difference between the amount included in the entity’s assessable income because of the disposal and:

the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s *cost; or

the item’s *value as trading stock on hand at the start of the later income year;

as appropriate.

If a provision of this Act reduces the loss that would, apart from that provision, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event:

the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s *cost; or

the item’s *value as trading stock on hand at the start of the later income year;

as appropriate, is reduced by the same amount.

977-30 Ending of an income year: loss realised for income tax purposes

(1) A loss is realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event that happens to an item of *trading stock and consists of the ending of an income year if, and only if, the *value of the item, as trading stock of an entity on hand at the end of that income year, is less than:

its *cost, if it became part of the trading stock on hand of the entity during that income year; or

otherwise, its value as trading stock of the entity on hand at the start of that income year.

The loss that is realised for income tax purposes by the event is the difference between the *value of the item, as trading stock of the entity on hand at the end of that income year and:

the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s *cost; or

the item’s *value as trading stock on hand at the start of the income year;

as appropriate.

If a provision of this Act reduces the loss that would, apart from that provision, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event:

the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s *cost; or

the item’s *value as trading stock on hand at the start of the income year;

as appropriate, is reduced by the same amount.

977-35 Disposal of trading stock: gain realised for income tax purposes

(1) A gain is realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event consisting of disposal of an item of *trading stock if, and only if:

the item is disposed of, for more than its *cost, in the same income year in which it became part of the trading stock on hand of the entity disposing of it; or

the item is disposed of in a later income year for more than its *value as trading stock of the entity on hand at the start of the later income year.

The gain that is realised for income tax purposes by the event is the difference between the amount included in the entity’s assessable income because of the disposal and:

the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s *cost; or

the item’s *value as trading stock on hand at the start of the later income year;

as appropriate.

If a provision of this Act reduces the gain that would, apart from that provision, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event, the amount that is included in the assessable income of the entity because of the disposal is reduced by the same amount.

977-40 Ending of an income year: gain realised for income tax purposes

(1) A gain is realised for income tax purposes by a *realisation event that happens to an item of *trading stock and consists of the ending of an income year if, and only if, the *value of the item, as trading stock of an entity on hand at the end of that income year, is greater than:

its *cost, if it became part of the trading stock on hand of the entity during that income year; or

otherwise, its value as trading stock of the entity on hand at the start of that income year.

The gain that is realised for income tax purposes by the event is the difference between the *value of the item, as trading stock of the entity on hand at the end of that income year and:

the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s *cost; or

the item’s *value as trading stock on hand at the start of the income year;

as appropriate.

If a provision of this Act reduces the gain that would, apart from that provision, be *realised for income tax purposes by the event:

the amount that the entity can deduct for the item’s *cost; or

the item’s *value as trading stock on hand at the start of the income year;

as appropriate, is increased by the same amount.

Revenue assets

977-50 Meaning of revenue asset

A *CGT asset is a revenue asset if, and only if:

the profit or loss on your disposing of the asset, ceasing to own it, or otherwise realising it, would be taken into account, in calculating your assessable income or *tax loss, otherwise than as a *capital gain or *capital loss; and

the asset is neither trading stock nor a depreciating asset.

977-55 Loss or gain realised for income tax purposes

For a revenue asset:

(a) disposing of, ceasing to own, or otherwise realising, the asset is a realisation event; and

(b) a loss is realised for income tax purposes by the *realisation event if, and only if, there is a loss on the event; and

(c) a gain is realised for income tax purposes by the realisation event if, and only if, there is a profit on the event; and

the loss or profit on the event is the loss or gain realised for income tax purposes; and

if a provision of this Act reduces the loss or gain that would, apart from that provision, be realised for income tax purposes by the event, the loss or profit to be taken into account in calculating your assessable income or *tax loss is reduced by the same amount.

Division 980 — Affordable housing

Table of Subdivisions

Guide to Division 980

980-A Providing affordable housing

Guide to Division 980

980-1 What this Division is about

A dwelling is used to provide affordable housing if certain conditions are met, including that the dwelling is tenanted or available to be tenanted, and that tenancies of the dwelling are exclusively managed by a community housing provider.

Subdivision 980-A — Providing affordable housing

Table of sections

Operative provisions

980-5 Providing affordable housing

980-10 Eligible community housing providers

980-15 Affordable housing certificates

Operative provisions

980-5 Providing affordable housing

A *dwelling is used to provide affordable housing on a particular day (the test day) if:

on the test day, the dwelling is taxable Australian real property and is residential premises that:

are tenanted or available to be tenanted; and

are not commercial residential premises; and

on the test day, the tenancy or prospective tenancy of the dwelling is exclusively managed by an eligible community housing provider; and

the eligible community housing provider has given each entity that holds an *ownership interest in the dwelling a certificate under section 980-15 that covers the dwelling for the test day; and

(d) no entity is entitled to receive an incentive, under the Scheme prescribed for the purposes of Part 2 of the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008, for the dwelling for the NRAS year (within the meaning of that Scheme) that includes the test day; and

in the case of a managed investment trust holding an *ownership interest in the dwelling on the test day—none of the tenants or occupants of the dwelling on that day holds an interest in the trust that passes the *non-portfolio interest test at any time during that day.

980-10 Eligible community housing providers

(1) An eligible community housing provider is:

an entity registered (however described) under an Australian law as a provider of community housing services; or

an entity registered (however described) by an *Australian government agency as a provider of community housing services.

(2) However, an entity that ceases to be covered by subsection (1) continues to be an eligible community housing provider for the 90-day period starting on the day of the cessation.

980-15 Affordable housing certificates

For the purposes of paragraph 980-5(c), a certificate must:

include a declaration that the eligible community housing provider reasonably believes paragraphs 980-5(a) and (b) to be satisfied for the dwelling for the test day; and

be given in the approved form on or before the 31st day after the end of the income year that contains the test day.

Part 6-5 — Dictionary definitions

Division 995 — Definitions

995-1 Definitions

In this Act, except so far as the contrary intention appears:

4% build to rent manner has the meaning given by subsection 43-145(2).

4% manner has the meaning given by section 43-145.

70% DFE rule has the meaning given by section 394-35.

95% services indirect value shift has the meaning given by section 727-700.

100% subsidiary has the meaning given by section 975-505.

165-CC tagged asset has the meaning given by section 715-30.

170-D deferred loss has the meaning given by section 715-310.

ABN has the meaning given by the A New Tax System (Australian Business Number) Act 1999.

abnormal trading has the meaning given by Subdivision 960-H.

above-average special professional income has the meaning given by section 405-15.

acceptable amount of an instalment for an *instalment quarter has the meaning given by section 45-232 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

accountable membership interest has the meaning given by section 208-30.

accountable partial interest has the meaning given by section 208-35.

account-based annuity has the meaning given by the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994.

accounting principles: A matter is in accordance with accounting principles if it is in accordance with:

accounting standards; or

if there are no accounting standards applicable to the matter—authoritative pronouncements of the Australian Accounting Standards Board that apply to the preparation of financial statements.

accounting principles for tax cost setting has the meaning given by:

subsection 705-70(3); and

subsection 711-45(1A).

accounting standards has the same meaning as in the Corporations Act 2001.

accrued leave transfer payment has the meaning given by subsection 26-10(2).

accumulated AASL debt has the meaning given by section 35 of the Australian Apprenticeship Support Loans Act 2014.

accumulated ABSTUDY SSL debt has the meaning given by section 9C of the Student Assistance Act 1973.

accumulated HELP debt has the meaning given by section 140-25 of the Higher Education Support Act 2003.

accumulated SSL debt has the meaning given by section 1061ZVEC of the Social Security Act 1991.

accumulated VETSL debt has the same meaning as in the VET Student Loans Act 2016.

ACNC type of entity means an entity that meets the description of a type of entity in column 1 of the table in subsection 25-5(5) of the Australian Charities and Not-for-profits Commission Act 2012.

acquire:

(a) a *CGT asset: you acquire a CGT asset (in its capacity as a CGT asset) in the circumstances and at the time worked out under Division 109 (including under a provision listed in Subdivision 109-B); and

Note: A CGT asset acquired before 20 September 1985 may be treated as having been acquired on or after that day: see, for example, Division 149.

(b) an item of *intellectual property: an entity does not acquire an item of intellectual property merely because a licence relating to a patent, design or copyright is surrendered to the entity.

acquisition time has the meaning given by section 58-5.

acquisition year has the meaning given by section 58-5.

active asset has the meaning given by section 152-40.

active build to rent development has the meaning given by subsection 43-151(2).

active build to rent development area has the meaning given by subsection 43-151(1).

active build to rent part has the meaning given by section 44-25.

active foreign business asset of a company that is a foreign resident has the meaning given by section 768-540.

active foreign business asset percentage of a company has the meaning given by section 768-510.

active participant:

in a *scheme under which there is a direct value shift, has the meaning given by subsection 725-65(2); and

in a *scheme under which there is an indirect value shift, has the meaning given by subsection 727-530(3).

actual cost method of working out the *value of a *registered emissions unit has the meaning given by section 420-53.

actuary means a Fellow or Accredited Member of the Institute of Actuaries of Australia.

additional investment requirements for ESVCLPs has the meaning given by subsection 118-428(1).

ADI (authorised deposit-taking institution) means a body corporate that is an ADI for the purposes of the Banking Act 1959.

ADI equity capital of an entity at a particular time means the total of the following: all the entity’s *equity capital at that time; and the total value of all the *debt interests *issued by the entity that satisfy all of the following: at that time, the interests are *on issue and have been on issue for 90 days or more; none of the interests gives rise to any cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a). A debt interest is treated as having satisfied subparagraph (b)(i) at that time if it was on issue at that time, and the total period for which it remains on issue is 90 days or more.

all the entity’s *equity capital at that time; and

the total value of all the *debt interests *issued by the entity that satisfy all of the following:

at that time, the interests are *on issue and have been on issue for 90 days or more;

none of the interests gives rise to any cost, at any time, that is covered by paragraph 820-40(1)(a).

A debt interest is treated as having satisfied subparagraph (b)(i) at that time if it was on issue at that time, and the total period for which it remains on issue is 90 days or more.

adjacent land has the meaning given by subsection 118-120(2).

adjacent structure has the meaning given by subsection 118-120(6).

adjustable value:

of a depreciating asset, has the meaning given by section 40-85; and

of an asset, for the purposes of determining the consequences of a choice under any of sections 715-100, 715-105, 715-125, 715-130 and 715-185, has the meaning given by section 715-145; and

of an equity or loan interest:

for the purposes of determining the consequences of a direct value shift—has the meaning given by sections 725-240, 725-315 and 725-325; and

for the purposes of determining the consequences of an indirect value shift—has the meaning given by sections 727-830, 727-835 and 727-840.

adjustable value method means the method (for determining the effect of *indirect value shifts) for which Subdivision 727-H provides.

adjusted assessed tax has the meaning given by section 45-375 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

adjusted assessed taxable income has the meaning given by section 45-370 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

adjusted available frankable profits has the meaning given by subsection 215-25(2).

adjusted average debt has the meaning given by sections 820-85, 820-120, 820-185 and 820-225.

adjusted average equity capital has the meaning given by sections 820-300, 820-330, 820-589 and 820-613.

adjusted Division 6 percentage, in relation to a trust estate, has the same meaning as in Division 6 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

adjusted net third party interest expense has the meaning given by section 820-54.

adjusted on-lent amount has the meaning given by sections 820-100, 820-200 and 820-210.

adjusted tax on *adjusted taxable income or on *adjusted withholding income has the meaning given by section 45-340 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

adjusted taxable income has the meaning given by sections 45-330 and 45-480 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

adjusted taxable income for offsets means adjusted taxable income for rebates within the meaning of subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

adjusted unrealised loss at an *alteration time for a company has the meaning given by section 165-115U.

adjusted withholding income has the meaning given by sections 45-335 and 45-485 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

adopted child of a person means someone the person has adopted: under a State law or Territory law about adoption of children; or under a foreign law about adoption of children, if the adoption would be recognised as valid under a State law or Territory law. affected interest: in the losing entity for an *indirect value shift, has the meaning given by section 727-460; or in the *gaining entity for an indirect value shift, has the meaning given by section 727-465. affected owner: of *down interests, has the meaning given by section 725-80; and of *up interests, has the meaning given by section 725-85; and for an indirect value shift, has the meaning given by section 727-530.

under a State law or Territory law about adoption of children; or

under a foreign law about adoption of children, if the adoption would be recognised as valid under a State law or Territory law.

affected interest:

in the losing entity for an *indirect value shift, has the meaning given by section 727-460; or

in the *gaining entity for an indirect value shift, has the meaning given by section 727-465.

affected owner:

of *down interests, has the meaning given by section 725-80; and

of *up interests, has the meaning given by section 725-85; and

for an indirect value shift, has the meaning given by section 727-530.

affiliate has the meaning given by section 328-130.

affordable dwelling has the meaning given by subsection 43-153(2).

AFOF means an *Australian venture capital fund of funds.

agent: this Act applies to some entities that are not agents in the same way as it applies to agents: see section 960-105.

aggregated turnover has the meaning given by section 328-115.

Agriculture Department means the Department administered by the Minister administering the Farm Household Support Act 2014.

Agriculture Secretary means the Secretary of the *Agriculture Department.

alienated personal services payment has the meaning given by section 13-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

All Groups Consumer Price Index number means the All Groups Consumer Price Index number (being the weighted average of the 8 capital cities) published by the Australian Statistician.

allocable cost amount has the meaning given by section 705-60 and subsection 711-20(1).

allocated annuity means an *immediate annuity that satisfies the requirements of subregulation 1.05(4) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations.

allocated pension means a *current pension that satisfies the requirements of subregulation 1.06(4) of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations.

allowable OB deduction has the meaning given by subsection 121EF(2) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

alteration time:

for a company has the meaning given by sections 165-115L, 165-115M, 165-115N, 165-115P, 165-115Q, 715-245, 715-250 and 719-725; and

for a trust, has the meaning given by section 715-270.

AMIT (short for attribution managed investment trust) has the meaning given by section 276-10.

AMIT cost base increase amount has the meaning given by section 104-107E.

AMIT cost base net amount has the meaning given by section 104-107C.

AMIT cost base reduction amount has the meaning given by section 104-107D.

AMIT DIR payment has the meaning given by section 12A-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

AMIT dividend payment has the meaning given by section 12A-30 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

AMIT interest payment has the meaning given by section 12A-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

AMIT member annual statement: see AMMA statement.

AMIT royalty payment has the meaning given by section 12A-40 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

AMMA statement (short for AMIT member annual statement) has the meaning given by section 276-460.

amount includes a nil amount.

amount required to be withheld by an entity from a *withholding payment means:

(a) the amount that the entity must withhold from the payment under Division 12 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; or

the amount that Division 12A in that Schedule requires the entity to pay to the Commissioner in respect of the payment; or

the amount that Division 13 in that Schedule requires the entity to pay to the Commissioner in respect of the alienated personal services payment to which the withholding payment relates; or

the amount that Division 14 in that Schedule requires the entity to pay to the Commissioner in respect of the *non-cash benefit, capital proceeds or taxable supply to which the withholding payment relates;

or that amount as varied by the Commissioner under section 15-15 in the Schedule.

amount withheld by an entity from a *withholding payment means:

(a) an amount that the entity withheld from the payment under Division 12 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; or

an amount that the entity paid to the Commissioner under Division 12A in that Schedule in respect of the payment; or

an amount that the entity paid to the Commissioner under Division 13 in that Schedule in respect of the alienated personal services payment to which the withholding payment relates; or

an amount that the entity paid to the Commissioner under Division 14 in that Schedule in respect of the *non-cash benefit, capital proceeds or taxable supply to which the withholding payment relates.

ancillary fund means:

a public ancillary fund; or

a private ancillary fund.

ancillary mining activities has the meaning given by section 40-740.

ancillary or community charity trust fund means:

a public ancillary fund; or

a private ancillary fund; or

a community charity trust.

annual exploration cap for an income year has the meaning given by subsection 418-103(1).

annual global income has the meaning given by section 960-565.

annual instalment component of your *tax position has the meaning given by section 45-610 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

annual investment income report means a report, relating to *Part VA investments, that an entity is required to give to the Commissioner, in respect of a *financial year, under section 393-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

annual payer means an entity that has become an annual payer under section 45-140 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953, and has not since ceased to be an annual payer under section 45-150 or 45-155 or former section 45-180 in that Schedule.

annual tax period election has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

annual turnover has the meaning given by section 328-120.

annuity includes:

(a) an annuity, within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993; or

(b) a pension, within the meaning of the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997.

annuity instrument means an instrument that secures the grant of an annuity (whether dependent on the life of an individual or not).

apartment building has the meaning given by section 43-95.

applicable functional currency has the meaning given by section 960-70.

applicable fund earnings has the meaning given by section 305-75.

applicable insurance contracts accounting standard means:

unless paragraph (b) applies—*accounting standard AASB 17, as in force on 31 December 2022; or

if the regulations prescribe another accounting standard (which may be AASB 17 as in force at another time)—that accounting standard.

Applicable MNE Group, for a *Fiscal Year, has the same meaning as in the *Minimum Tax Act, as affected by section 28 of that Act.

applicable trust fund guidelines means:

in relation to a public ancillary fund—the public ancillary fund guidelines; or

in relation to a private ancillary fund—the private ancillary fund guidelines; or

in relation to a community charity trust—the community charity trust guidelines.

apportionable deductions are:

amounts deducted or deductible under section 25-75 (which provides a deduction for rates and land tax); or

amounts deducted or deductible under section 30-15 because of item 1, 2, 7 or 8 in the table in that section, except amounts deducted or deductible for gifts of trading stock in cases where:

the gifts are covered by section 70-90 (which has the effect that the giver’s assessable income includes the market value of the gift); and

no election has been made, or is made, under Subdivision 385-E (which allows the giver to choose to spread the market value of a gift of live stock over the giver’s assessable income for 5 income years or to reduce the amount included in the giver’s assessable income by the cost of replacement live stock).

approved deposit fund has the meaning given by section 10 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

approved deposit fund payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

approved form has the meaning given by section 388-50 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

approved investment plan, of an *ESVCLP, has the meaning given by subsection 13-15(2) of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

approved management plan for land has the meaning given by section 40-640.

approved occupational clothing guidelines has the meaning given by subsection 34-55(1).

approved residential care home has the same meaning as in the Aged Care Act 2024.

approved stock exchange means a stock exchange named in regulations made for the purposes of this definition.

APRA means the Australian Prudential Regulation Authority.

area covered by an international tax sharing treaty: if, under an *international tax sharing treaty, Australia and another country share tax revenues from activities undertaken in an area identified by or under the treaty, that area is an area covered by an international tax sharing treaty.

arm’s length: in determining whether parties deal at arm’s length, consider any connection between them and any other relevant circumstance.

arm’s length capital amount:

for an *outward investing entity (ADI)—has the meaning given by section 820-315; and

for an *inward investing entity (ADI)—has the meaning given by section 820-410.

arm’s length conditions has the meaning given by section 815-125.

arm’s length profits has the meaning given by section 815-225.

arrangement means any arrangement, agreement, understanding, promise or undertaking, whether express or implied, and whether or not enforceable (or intended to be enforceable) by legal proceedings.

arrangement payment has the meaning given by section 240-65.

arrangement payment period has the meaning given by section 240-70.

arrangement period for a *tax preferred use of an asset has the meaning given by section 250-65.

ART means the Administrative Review Tribunal.

artistic support has the meaning given by subsection 405-25(5).

Arts Minister means the Minister administering the National Gallery Act 1975.

Arts Secretary means the Secretary of the Department administered by the *Arts Minister.

artwork means:

a painting, sculpture, drawing, engraving or photograph; or

a reproduction of such a thing; or

property of a similar description or use.

ASIC means the Australian Securities and Investments Commission.

assessable amount has the meaning given by subsection 155-5(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

assessable FHSS released amount, for an income year, means the amount included in a person’s assessable income for the income year under section 313-20 in respect of the person’s *FHSS released amounts.

assessable film income for an income year is so much of the amount, or the sum of the amounts, to which section 26AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to you for the income year as is assessable income.

assessable income has the meaning given by sections 6-5, 6-10, 6-15, 17-10 and 17-30.

For the effect of GST-related amounts on assessable income, see Division 17.

assessable labour income has the meaning given by subsection 25-130(4).

assessable non-primary production income has the meaning given by subsection 392-85(2).

assessable primary production income has the meaning given by subsection 392-80(2).

assessable professional income has the meaning given by subsection 405-20(1).

assessable recoupment has the meaning given by section 20-20.

assessed build to rent development misuse tax means *build to rent development misuse tax, as assessed under Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

assessed Division 293 tax means *Division 293 tax, as assessed under Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

assessed Division 296 tax means *Division 296 tax, as assessed under Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

assessed excess transfer balance tax means *excess transfer balance tax, as assessed under Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

assessed first home super saver tax means *first home super saver tax, as assessed under Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

assessed GST has the meaning given by the *GST Act.

assessed net amount has the meaning given by the *GST Act.

assessed net fuel amount has the meaning given by the Fuel Tax Act 2006.

assessment:

Note: For income years before 1997-98, assessable income has the meaning given by section 6-3 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

of an assessable amount, means an ascertainment of the assessable amount; and

in relation to a tax-related liability not covered by paragraph (a), has the meaning given by a *taxation law that provides for the assessment of the amount of the liability.

Note: The table lists provisions of taxation laws that define assessment.

assessment day for an income year of a *life insurance company has the meaning given by section 219-45.

asset, of a *sub-fund of a *CCIV, means any of the assets of the sub-fund, ascertained in accordance with Subdivision B of Division 3 of Part 8B.5 of the Corporations Act 2001.

asset-based income tax regime has the meaning given by section 830-105.

asset entity has the meaning given by section 12-436 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

asset for insurance acquisition cash flows has the same meaning as in the *applicable insurance contracts accounting standard.

asset included in the total assets of a company that is a foreign resident has the meaning given by section 768-545.

associate has the meaning given by section 318 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

associated enterprises article has the meaning given by subsection 815-15(5).

associated government entity means:

Note: Under section 87-35, Australian government agencies, and certain parts of Australian governments and authorities, are not treated as associates for the purposes of ascertaining whether an entity is conducting a personal services business.

for the Commonwealth—each authority of the Commonwealth; or

for an authority of the Commonwealth—each other authority of the Commonwealth; or

for a State—each authority of the State; or

for an authority of a State—each other authority of the State; or

for a Territory—each authority of the Territory; or

for an authority of a Territory—each other authority of the Territory.

associate entity has the meaning given by section 820-905.

associate entity debt has the meaning given by section 820-910.

associate entity equity has the meaning given by section 820-915.

associate entity excess amount has the meaning given by section 820-920.

associate-inclusive control interest in a company has the meaning given by section 975-160.

associate interest has the meaning given by section 820-905.

associate pair: an entity is an associate pair of another entity if any of the following conditions are satisfied:

the entity is an associate of the other entity;

the other entity is an associate of the entity.

at risk has the meaning given by section 118-430.

attributable income has the meaning given by Division 7 of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

attributable taxpayer has the meaning given by Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

attribution managed investment trust: see AMIT.

attribution percentage, in relation to a *CFC or a *CFT, has the meaning given by Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

audited consolidated financial statements for an entity for a period has the meaning given by section 820-935.

auditing principles: a matter is in accordance with auditing principles if it is in accordance with:

*auditing standards; or

if there are no auditing standards applicable to the matter—authoritative pronouncements of the Auditing and Assurance Standards Board that apply to the preparation of financial statements.

auditing standard has the same meaning as in the Corporations Act 2001.

Australia has the meaning affected by section 960-505.

Australian agricultural land for rent has the meaning given by section 12-448 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Australian Business Register means the Australian Business Register established and maintained under the A New Tax System (Australian Business Number) Act 1999.

Australian Business Registrar means the Registrar of the *Australian Business Register.

Australian carbon credit unit has the same meaning as in the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011.

Australian controlled foreign entity has the meaning given by section 820-745.

Australian controller:

of a controlled foreign company mentioned in paragraph 820-745(a)—has the meaning given by section 820-750; and

of a controlled foreign trust—has the meaning given by section 820-755; and

of a controlled foreign corporate limited partnership—has the meaning given by section 820-760.

Australian corporate tax entity: an entity is an Australian corporate tax entity at a particular time if the entity is:

a corporate tax entity at that time; and

for a company or a corporate limited partnership—an Australian resident at that time; and

for a public trading trust—a resident unit trust for the income year in which that time occurs.

Australian DMT tax means tax payable under section 8 of the *Minimum Tax Act.

Australian DMT tax amount means a Domestic Top-up Tax Amount (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act).

Australian DMT tax return has the meaning given by section 127-45 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Australian entity has the same meaning as in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Australian financial market means a financial market (within the meaning of Chapter 7 of the Corporations Act 2001) operating under an Australian market licence granted under subsection 795B(1) of that Act.

Australian financial services licence has the same meaning as in the Corporations Act 2001.

Australian fund has the meaning given by section 74 of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

Australian GloBE tax means:

Note: DMT is short for Domestic Minimum Top-up.

(a) *Australian DMT tax; and

(b) *Australian IIR tax; and

(c) *Australian UTPR tax.

Australian GloBE tax affairs means affairs relating to: *Australian IIR/UTPR tax; or Australian DMT tax.

*Australian IIR/UTPR tax; or

Australian DMT tax.

Australian government agency means:

the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory; or

an authority of the Commonwealth or of a State or a Territory.

Australian IIR tax means tax payable under section 6 of the *Minimum Tax Act.

Australian IIR/UTPR tax means:

Note: IIR is short for income inclusion rule.

Australian IIR tax; and

Australian UTPR tax.

Australian IIR/UTPR tax amount means:

an IIR Top-up Tax Amount (within the meaning of the Minimum Tax Act); or

a UTPR Top-up Tax Amount (within the meaning of that Act).

Australian IIR/UTPR tax return has the meaning given by section 127-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Australian law means a *Commonwealth law, a *State law or a *Territory law.

Australian legislature means:

the Parliament of the Commonwealth of Australia; or

the Parliament of a State; or

the Legislative Assembly for the Australian Capital Territory; or

the Legislative Assembly of the Northern Territory of Australia.

Australian/overseas fund has the meaning given by section 74 of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

Australian permanent establishment, of an entity, means a *permanent establishment of the entity that is in Australia.

Australian resident means a person who is a resident of Australia for the purposes of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Australian source: without limiting when *ordinary income or *statutory income has an Australian source, it has an Australian source if it is *derived from a source in Australia for the purposes of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Australian-sourced amount has the meaning given by the regulations mentioned in section 312-5 (about trans-Tasman portability of retirement savings).

Australian superannuation fund has the meaning given by section 295-95.

Australian trust has the same meaning as in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Australian UTPR tax means tax payable under section 10 of the *Minimum Tax Act.

Australian venture capital fund of funds has the meaning given by subsection 118-410(3).

authorised ASIO officer has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

authorised law enforcement agency officer has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

available expense has the meaning given by section 175-30.

available fraction for a *bundle of losses has the meaning given by sections 707-320, 719-310 and 719-315.

available frankable profits has the meaning given by section 215-20 and affected by subsection 215-25(1).

available income has the meaning given by section 175-30.

available loss exposure amount has the meaning given by paragraph 830-50(1)(a).

average equity capital has the meaning given by sections 820-395, 820-420 and 820-615.

average income has the meaning given in subsection 392-45(1).

average taxable professional income has the meaning given by subsections 405-50(1) and (2).

averaging adjustment has the meaning given in section 392-75.

averaging component has the meaning given in subsection 392-90(1).

balancing adjustment event has the meaning given by section 40-295.

BAS amount means any debt or credit that arises directly under the *BAS provisions.

base assessment has the meaning given by sections 45-320 and 45-470 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

base interest rate has the meaning given by section 8AAD of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

base penalty amount: the base penalty amount for calculating the amount of an administrative penalty is worked out under the relevant provision in this table:

Note: UTPR is short for undertaxed profits rule.

Note: Subsection 417-30(1) provides that certain events (connected with Timor Sea petroleum) are taken not to be balancing adjustment events.

Note: BAS stands for Business Activity Statement.

base value, of a *depreciating asset, has the meaning given by subsection 40-70(1).

base year, in relation to an income year, has the meaning given by sections 45-320 and 45-470 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

basic assessable income has the meaning given by subsection 392-45(2).

basic concessional contributions cap means the concessional contributions cap under subsection 291-20(2), disregarding any increase under subsection 291-20(3).

basic rates has the meaning given by subsection 392-35(4).

basic taxable income has the meaning given by section 392-15.

BAS provisions means:

(a) Part VII of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986; and

the indirect tax law; and

(c) Parts 2-5 and 2-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (which are about the PAYG system); and

(d) Division 389 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; and

(e) the Major Bank Levy Act 2017.

Note: BAS stands for Business Activity Statement.

behaviour that is harmful or abusive means one or more of the following: emotional abuse; sexual abuse; physical abuse; suicide; self-harm; substance abuse; harmful gambling.

emotional abuse;

sexual abuse;

physical abuse;

suicide;

self-harm;

substance abuse;

harmful gambling.

benchmark franking percentage has the meaning given by section 203-30.

benchmark instalment rate has the meaning given by sections 45-360 and 45-530 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

benchmark rate of return for an interest has the meaning given by section 974-145.

benchmark rule is the rule in section 203-25.

benchmark tax has the meaning given by sections 45-365 and 45-535 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

beneficiary, of a *CCIV sub-fund trust, means a *member of the *sub-fund who is taken because of subsection 195-110(1) to be a beneficiary of the trust.

bereavement Subdivision has the meaning given by section 52-20.

bid period has the meaning given by section 9 of the Corporations Act 2001.

borrowed securities amount of an entity at a particular time means the total of the liabilities of the entity, to the extent that they meet these conditions: the value of the liability at that time is worked out by reference to the value at that time of securities that the entity has short sold; as at that time, the entity has settled the sale using securities it acquired under one or more of these *arrangements: a reciprocal purchase agreement (otherwise known as a repurchase agreement); a sell-buyback arrangement; a securities loan arrangement.

the value of the liability at that time is worked out by reference to the value at that time of securities that the entity has short sold;

as at that time, the entity has settled the sale using securities it acquired under one or more of these *arrangements:

a reciprocal purchase agreement (otherwise known as a repurchase agreement);

a sell-buyback arrangement;

a securities loan arrangement.

borrowing means any form of borrowing, whether secured or unsecured, and includes the raising of funds by the issue of a bond, debenture, discounted security or other document evidencing indebtedness.

branch hybrid has the meaning given by section 832-485.

branch hybrid mismatch has the meaning given by section 832-470.

bribe to a foreign public official has the meaning given by section 26-52.

bribe to a public official has the meaning given by section 26-53.

build to rent capital works deduction amount has the meaning given by section 44-25.

build to rent compliance period has the meaning given by subsection 43-152(5).

build to rent development has the meaning given by subsections 43-152(1), (2) and (3).

build to rent development misuse tax means tax imposed by the Capital Works (Build to Rent Misuse Tax) Act 2024.

build to rent misuse amount has the meaning given by section 44-20.

build to rent withholding amount has the meaning given by section 44-30.

bundle of losses has the meaning given by section 707-315.

business includes any profession, trade, employment, vocation or calling, but does not include occupation as an employee.

business continuity test has the meaning given by Subdivision 165-E.

business continuity test period has the meaning given by sections 165-13, 165-15, 165-35, 165-40, 165-45, 165-126, 165-129, 165-132, 166-5, 166-20, 166-40, 707-125, 707-135, 715-50, 715-55, 715-60, 715-70, 715-95, 715-355 and 715-360, and affected by sections 415-35, 415-40 and 707-400.

business day means a day other than: a Saturday or a Sunday; or a day which is a public holiday for the whole of: any State; or the Australian Capital Territory; or the Northern Territory.

a Saturday or a Sunday; or

a day which is a public holiday for the whole of:

any State; or

the Australian Capital Territory; or

the Northern Territory.

business kilometres has the meaning given by sections 28-25 and 28-90.

business meeting has the meaning given by subsections 32-65(3) and (4).

business profits article has the meaning given by subsection 815-15(6).

business travel expense has the meaning given by section 900-95.

business use percentage has the meaning given by section 28-90.

capital allowance means a deduction under: Division 40 (capital allowances) of this Act; or Division 43 (capital works) of this Act; or Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities) of this Act; or former Division 10BA of Part III of that Act (Australian films); or former Division 10B of Part III of that Act (copyright in Australian films). capital gain: for each *CGT event a capital gain is worked out in the way described in that event. capital loss: for each *CGT event a capital loss is worked out in the way described in that event.

Division 40 (capital allowances) of this Act; or

Division 43 (capital works) of this Act; or

Subdivision 328-D (capital allowances for small business entities) of this Act; or

former Division 10BA of Part III of that Act (Australian films); or

former Division 10B of Part III of that Act (copyright in Australian films).

capital gain: for each *CGT event a capital gain is worked out in the way described in that event.

capital loss: for each *CGT event a capital loss is worked out in the way described in that event.

capital proceeds has the meaning given by Division 116.

capital protected borrowing has the meaning given by section 247-10.

capital protection has the meaning given by section 247-10.

capital stake has the meaning given by section 166-235.

capped defined benefit income stream has the meaning given by section 294-130.

capped life of a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 40-102.

car means a *motor vehicle (except a motor cycle or similar vehicle) designed to carry a load of less than 1 tonne and fewer than 9 passengers.

carbon sequestration has the meaning given by section 40-1015.

carbon service provider means an entity that carries on the *business of providing services wholly or mainly relating to offsets projects (within the meaning of the Carbon Credits (Carbon Farming Initiative) Act 2011), including services involving the entity carrying out such projects as the project proponent (within the meaning of that Act).

car expense has the meaning given by section 28-13.

car fringe benefit has the meaning given by subsection 136(1) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

car limit has the meaning given by section 40-230.

carried interest:

Note 1: There are some CGT events for which there is no capital gain.

Note 2: For income years before 1998-99, capital gain has the meaning given by section 102-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note 1: There are some CGT events for which there is no capital loss.

Note 2: For income years before 1998-99, capital loss has the meaning given by section 102-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

of a general partner in a VCLP, an ESVCLP or an AFOF—has the meaning given by subsections 104-255(4) and (6); and

of a limited partner in a VCMP—has the meaning given by subsections 104-255(5) and (6).

carry back: you carry back to an income year so much of a *tax loss for a later income year as you specify, in a *loss carry back choice, to be carried back to the earlier income year.

carry-forward trust component deficit, of a particular character, has the meaning given by section 276-330.

carrying on an *enterprise includes doing anything in the course of the commencement or termination of the enterprise.

cash management trust means a trust that satisfies these requirements: the trust is of a kind commonly known as a cash management trust; each unit in the trust carries the same rights as every other unit in the trust.

Note: You can make a loss carry back choice only for the 2020-21, 2021-22 or 2022-23 income year.

the trust is of a kind commonly known as a cash management trust;

each unit in the trust carries the same rights as every other unit in the trust.

cash settlable has the meaning given by subsection 230-45(2).

CBC reporting entity: see country by country reporting entity.

CBC reporting group: see country by country reporting group.

CBC reporting parent: see country by country reporting parent.

CCIV: see corporate collective investment vehicle.

CCIV sub-fund trust has the meaning given by subsection 195-110(2).

cease to be an *active build to rent development has the meaning given by subsection 43-152(4).

cessation event, in relation to a *provisional head company of a *MEC group, has the meaning given by subsection 719-60(6).

CFC has the meaning given by Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

CFT has the meaning given by section 342 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

CGT asset has the meaning given by section 108-5.

CGT cap amount has the meaning given by section 292-105.

CGT concession stakeholder has the meaning given by subsection 152-60.

CGT event means any of the CGT events described in Division 104. A CGT event described by number (for example: CGT event A1) refers to the relevant event in that Division.

CGT exempt amount has the meaning given by section 152-315.

CGT retirement exemption limit has the meaning given by section 152-320.

CGT small business entity has the meaning given by subsection 152-10(1AA).

chain of trusts has the meaning given by section 104-71.

changeover time for a company has the meaning given by sections 165-115C, 165-115D and 719-705.

child: without limiting who is a child of an individual, each of the following is the child of an individual:

the individual’s *adopted child, stepchild or exnuptial child;

a child of the individual’s *spouse;

(c) someone who is a child of the individual within the meaning of the Family Law Act 1975.

child recipient of a *superannuation income stream has the meaning given by section 294-175.

class of a taxable income or a *tax loss of a *life insurance company has the meaning given by section 320-133.

class: *membership interests in a company or trust form a class if the interests have the same, or substantially the same, rights.

clean building has the meaning given by section 12-430 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

clean building managed investment trust has the meaning given by section 12-425 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Climate Change Minister means the Minister administering the National Greenhouse and Energy Reporting Act 2007.

Climate Change Secretary means the Secretary of the Department administered by the *Climate Change Minister.

closing pool balance has the meaning given by:

for a low-value pool—section 40-440; or

for a general small business pool—section 328-200.

closing pool value has the meaning given by section 40-830.

CMPTI community benefit rules has the meaning given by subsection 419-145(1).

CMPTI expenditure has the meaning given by section 419-25.

CMPTI processing activity has the meaning given by section 419-20.

CMPTI tax offset has the meaning given by subsection 419-5(1).

collectable has the meaning given by section 108-10.

commence to be an *active build to rent development has the meaning given by subsections 43-152(1) and (2).

commencing day of a *CFC has the meaning given by section 406 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

commencing day asset of a *CFC has the meaning given by section 406 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

commercial horticulture has the meaning given by 40-535.

commercial residential premises has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

Commissioner means the Commissioner of Taxation.

Commissioner’s instalment rate has the meaning given by section 45-115 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

committed capital of a partnership has the meaning given by section 118-445.

common area, for *dwellings of an *active build to rent development, has the meaning given by subsection 43-151(3).

common ownership: see under common ownership.

common-ownership nexus: see section 727-400.

common stake has the meaning given by sections 124-783 and 124-783A.

common stakeholder has the meaning given by section 124-783.

Commonwealth education or training payment has the meaning given by subsection 52-145(1).

Commonwealth labour market program has the meaning given by subsection 52-145(2).

Commonwealth law means a law of the Commonwealth.

Commonwealth of Nations country means:

Note: The office of Commissioner of Taxation is created by section 4 of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

a foreign country that is a member of the Commonwealth of Nations; or

a colony, overseas territory or protectorate of such a member; or

a territory for whose international relations such a member is responsible;

other than one declared by the regulations not to be a Commonwealth of Nations country.

Commonwealth public sector superannuation scheme has the same meaning as in the Superannuation (Unclaimed Money and Lost Members) Act 1999.

community charity corporation has the meaning given by section 426-180 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

community charity corporation guidelines has the meaning given by section 426-185 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

community charity trust has the meaning given by section 426-117 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

community charity trust guidelines has the meaning given by section 426-118 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

community shed means a public institution that satisfies all of the following requirements: the institution’s dominant purposes are advancing mental health and preventing or relieving social isolation; the institution seeks to achieve those purposes principally by providing a physical location where it supports individuals to undertake activities, or work on projects, in the company of others; either: there are no particular criteria for membership of the institution; or the criteria for membership of the institution relate only to an individual’s gender or Indigenous status (in that membership is, for cultural reasons, open only to *Indigenous persons) or both.

the institution’s dominant purposes are advancing mental health and preventing or relieving social isolation;

the institution seeks to achieve those purposes principally by providing a physical location where it supports individuals to undertake activities, or work on projects, in the company of others;

either:

there are no particular criteria for membership of the institution; or

the criteria for membership of the institution relate only to an individual’s gender or Indigenous status (in that membership is, for cultural reasons, open only to *Indigenous persons) or both.

company means:

a body corporate; or

any other unincorporated association or body of persons;

but does not include a partnership or a non-entity joint venture.

company’s share:

Note 1: Division 830 treats foreign hybrid companies as partnerships.

Note 2: A reference to a company includes a reference to a corporate limited partnership: see section 94J of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

of a partnership’s *notional loss or *notional net income—has the meaning given by sections 165-80 and 165-85; and

of a partnership’s full year deductions—has the meaning given by sections 165-90.

comparison rate has the meaning given by section 392-55.

compensable work-related trauma has the meaning given by subsection 136(1) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

completed:

in relation to a film, has the meaning given by subsection 376-55(2); and

in relation to a digital game, has the meaning given by subsection 378-25(2).

complying approved deposit fund means a complying approved deposit fund within the meaning of section 47 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

complying health insurance policy has the meaning given by the Private Health Insurance Act 2007.

complying superannuation asset has the meaning given by subsection 320-170(6).

complying superannuation asset pool has the meaning given by subsection 320-170(6).

complying superannuation class:

for a taxable income of a life insurance company—has the meaning given by section 320-137; or

for a *tax loss of a life insurance company—has the meaning given by section 320-141.

complying superannuation entity means:

a complying superannuation fund; or

a complying approved deposit fund; or

a pooled superannuation trust.

complying superannuation fund means a complying superannuation fund within the meaning of section 45 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

complying superannuation liabilities of a *life insurance company means liabilities of the company under *life insurance policies referred to in subsection 320-190(1).

complying superannuation life insurance policy means a *life insurance policy that: is held by the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity; or is held by an individual and: provides for an *annuity that is not presently payable, if the annuity was purchased out of a superannuation lump sum or an employment termination payment; or (ia) provides for an *immediate annuity, if the annuity is a *superannuation income stream that is not in the *retirement phase; or is so held in the benefit fund of a *friendly society, being a fund that is a regulated superannuation fund; or is held by another life insurance company and is a complying superannuation asset of that company; and is not an excluded complying superannuation life insurance policy.

is held by the trustee of a *complying superannuation entity; or

is held by an individual and:

provides for an *annuity that is not presently payable, if the annuity was purchased out of a superannuation lump sum or an employment termination payment; or

(ia) provides for an *immediate annuity, if the annuity is a *superannuation income stream that is not in the *retirement phase; or

is so held in the benefit fund of a *friendly society, being a fund that is a regulated superannuation fund; or

is held by another life insurance company and is a complying superannuation asset of that company;

and is not an excluded complying superannuation life insurance policy.

complying superannuation plan means:

a complying superannuation fund; or

a public sector superannuation scheme that is:

a regulated superannuation fund; or

(ii) an exempt public sector superannuation scheme (within the meaning of section 10 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993); or

a complying approved deposit fund; or

an RSA.

component of your *tax position has the meaning given by section 45-610 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

concessional contributions has the meaning given by sections 291-25 and 291-165.

concessional contributions cap has the meaning given by section 291-20.

concessional cross staple rent cap has the meaning given by sections 12-443 and 12-444 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

conduit foreign income has the meaning given by Subdivision 802-A.

connected entity of an entity means:

an associate of the entity; or

another member of the same *wholly owned group if the entity is a company and is a member of such a group.

connected with: an entity is connected with you in the circumstances described in section 328-125.

connecting power to land or upgrading the connection has the meaning given by section 40-655.

conservation covenant has the meaning given by section 31-5.

consideration, for a *taxable supply, has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

consideration receivable:

Note: This meaning is affected by section 152-78.

(a) consideration receivable on the disposal of a leased *car has the meaning given by section 20-115; and

(b) consideration receivable for *trading stock changing hands has the meaning given by subsection 70-100(11).

consolidatable group has the meaning given by section 703-10.

consolidated group has the meaning given by section 703-5.

consolidation transitional year for a *member of a *consolidated group or a member of a *MEC group, is an income year for that member that satisfies both of the following conditions:

Note 1: Part 3-90 contains rules relating to the tax treatment of consolidated groups. Division 719 (of that Part) applies those rules to MEC groups with modifications (see section 719-2).

Note 2: Provisions in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 and in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (other than in Part 3-90) referring only to consolidated groups do not apply to MEC groups.

the group is in existence during all or any part of that year;

(b) Subdivision 45-Q in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (including that Subdivision as applied under Subdivision 45-S in that Schedule):

does not apply at all to the *head company or the *provisional head company of the group during that year; or

starts to apply at any time during that year to the head company or the provisional head company of the group because of subsection 45-705(2) or subparagraph 45-705(3)(c)(ii), (4)(d)(ii) or (iv), or subsection 45-915(2) or subparagraph 45-915(3)(c)(ii), (4)(b)(ii) or (iv), in that Schedule.

Constituent Entity, of an *Applicable MNE Group, has the same meaning as in the *Minimum Tax Act, as affected by section 28 of that Act.

constitution of a company means the memorandum and articles of association of the company, or any other rules or document constituting the company or governing its activities.

constitutional corporation means:

a corporation to which paragraph 51(xx) of the Constitution applies; or

a body corporate that is incorporated in a Territory.

constitutionally protected fund means a fund that is declared by the regulations to be a constitutionally protected fund.

construction expenditure has the meaning given by section 43-70.

construction expenditure area has the meaning given by section 43-75.

contingent on aspects of the economic performance has the meaning given by section 974-85.

continuing shareholders has the meaning given by sections 175-10, 175-20, 175-25, 175-45, 175-60, 175-65 and 175-85.

continuous disability policy has the meaning given by section 9A of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

contract of reinsurance, in respect of *life insurance policies, does not include a contract of reinsurance in respect of:

the parts of *complying superannuation life insurance policies in respect of which the liabilities of the company that issued the policies are to be discharged out of a complying superannuation asset pool; or

policies that are *exempt life insurance policies.

contributions segment has the meaning given by section 307-220.

contributions-splitting superannuation benefit has the meaning given by the regulations.

control a non-fixed trust has the meaning given by Subdivision 269-E in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

control (for value shifting purposes) has the meaning given by sections 727-355, 727-360, 727-365 and 727-375.

controlled foreign company has the same meaning as in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

controlled foreign corporate limited partnership has the meaning given by section 820-760.

controlled foreign entity debt has the meaning given by section 820-885.

controlled foreign entity equity has the meaning given by section 820-890.

controlled foreign trust has the same meaning as in Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

controller (for CGT purposes): an entity is a controller (for CGT purposes) of a company in the circumstances mentioned in section 975-155.

controller (for imputation purposes) has the meaning given by subsections 207-130(5) and (6).

convertible interest means a convertible interest in a company or in a trust or unit trust and: (a) a convertible interest in a company is an interest of the kind referred to in item 4 of the table in subsection 974-75(1); and (b) a convertible interest in a trust or unit trust is an interest that has the same or a similar effect in relation to the trust or unit trust. convertible note: (a) a convertible note of a company has the meaning given by section 82L of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and (b) a convertible note of a trust or unit trust means a note that has the same or a similar effect in relation to the trust or unit trust.

(a) a convertible interest in a company is an interest of the kind referred to in item 4 of the table in subsection 974-75(1); and

(b) a convertible interest in a trust or unit trust is an interest that has the same or a similar effect in relation to the trust or unit trust.

convertible note:

(a) a convertible note of a company has the meaning given by section 82L of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

(b) a convertible note of a trust or unit trust means a note that has the same or a similar effect in relation to the trust or unit trust.

co-operative company has the same meaning as in Division 9 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

copyright collecting society means either of the following bodies: a body that satisfies all of the following conditions: (i) a declaration under the Copyright Act 1968 is in force in respect of the body; the body is a company whose *constitution contains provisions about the distribution of amounts collected or *derived by it, including a requirement that a *member of the society cannot direct the body to pay an amount at a particular time; other conditions prescribed by the regulations (if any) for the purposes of this subparagraph are met; a company that satisfies all of the following conditions: the company is incorporated under an Australian law relating to companies; the company has and maintains the purpose of collective administration of copyrights; if the company has other purposes—these purposes are incidental to the purpose described in subparagraph (ii) or, if the company is the resale royalty collecting society, relate to the company’s functions or duties as resale royalty collecting society; the company collects or derives, and distributes, income of a kind mentioned in paragraph 51-43(2)(a) or (b); the company’s constitution allows any copyright owner, or his or her *agent, to be a member of the society, or allows all copyright owners of a particular type to be members; the company’s constitution prohibits the payment of *dividends; the company’s constitution contains provisions about the payment, out of amounts collected or derived by it, of the administrative costs of collecting those amounts; the company’s constitution contains provisions about the distribution of amounts collected or derived by it, including a requirement that an amount must be paid to a member as soon as is reasonably possible after the allocation of the amount to the member, as well as a requirement that a member cannot direct the company to pay an amount at a particular time; the company’s constitution, or contracts with members, contains such other provisions as are prescribed by the regulations (if any), being provisions necessary to ensure that the interests of members or their agents are protected adequately; the company’s constitution requires the company to hold amounts on trust for copyright owners who are not members, or for members pending the payment of amounts to them; the company’s constitution, or contracts with members, allows all members to access the company’s records; other conditions prescribed by the regulations (if any) for the purposes of this subparagraph are met. core R&D activities has the meaning given by section 355-25.

a body that satisfies all of the following conditions:

(i) a declaration under the Copyright Act 1968 is in force in respect of the body;

the body is a company whose *constitution contains provisions about the distribution of amounts collected or *derived by it, including a requirement that a *member of the society cannot direct the body to pay an amount at a particular time;

other conditions prescribed by the regulations (if any) for the purposes of this subparagraph are met;

a company that satisfies all of the following conditions:

the company is incorporated under an Australian law relating to companies;

the company has and maintains the purpose of collective administration of copyrights;

if the company has other purposes—these purposes are incidental to the purpose described in subparagraph (ii) or, if the company is the resale royalty collecting society, relate to the company’s functions or duties as resale royalty collecting society;

the company collects or derives, and distributes, income of a kind mentioned in paragraph 51-43(2)(a) or (b);

the company’s constitution allows any copyright owner, or his or her *agent, to be a member of the society, or allows all copyright owners of a particular type to be members;

the company’s constitution prohibits the payment of *dividends;

the company’s constitution contains provisions about the payment, out of amounts collected or derived by it, of the administrative costs of collecting those amounts;

the company’s constitution contains provisions about the distribution of amounts collected or derived by it, including a requirement that an amount must be paid to a member as soon as is reasonably possible after the allocation of the amount to the member, as well as a requirement that a member cannot direct the company to pay an amount at a particular time;

the company’s constitution, or contracts with members, contains such other provisions as are prescribed by the regulations (if any), being provisions necessary to ensure that the interests of members or their agents are protected adequately;

the company’s constitution requires the company to hold amounts on trust for copyright owners who are not members, or for members pending the payment of amounts to them;

the company’s constitution, or contracts with members, allows all members to access the company’s records;

other conditions prescribed by the regulations (if any) for the purposes of this subparagraph are met.

core R&D activities has the meaning given by section 355-25.

core shipping activities has the meaning given by section 51-110.

corporate change has the meaning given by section 166-175.

corporate collective investment vehicle or CCIV has the same meaning as in the Corporations Act 2001.

corporate limited partnership has the meaning given by section 94D of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

corporate tax entity has the meaning given by section 960-115.

corporate tax gross-up rate, of an entity for an income year, means the amount worked out using the following formula:

corporate tax rate:

(a) in relation to a company to which paragraph 23(2)(a) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986 applies—means the rate of tax in respect of the taxable income of a company covered by that paragraph; or

in relation to another entity—means the rate of tax in respect of the taxable income of a company covered by paragraph 23(2)(b) of that Act.

corporate tax rate for imputation purposes, of an entity for an income year, means:

unless paragraph (b) applies—the entity’s *corporate tax rate for the income year, worked out on the assumptions that:

the entity’s aggregated turnover for the income year is equal to its aggregated turnover for the previous income year; and

(ii) the entity’s base rate entity passive income (within the meaning of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986) for the income year is equal to its base rate entity passive income for the previous income year; and

the entity’s assessable income for the income year is equal to its assessable income for the previous income year; or

(b) if the entity did not exist in the previous income year—the rate of tax in respect of the taxable income of a company covered by paragraph 23(2)(a) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

correction notice, in relation to a *registered PGO certificate, has the meaning given by section 421-40.

cost:

(a) cost of a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by Subdivision 40-C; and

(b) cost of an item of *trading stock, in the case of an animal that you acquired by natural increase, has the meaning given by section 70-55; and

Note: The cost of an animal acquired by natural increase before the 1997-98 income year is the cost price of the animal under former section 34 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936. See subsection 70-55(2) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

(c) cost of a *registered emissions unit has the meaning given by section 420-60.

cost base of a *CGT asset has the meaning given by Subdivision 110-A.

cost-free debt capital has the meaning given by section 820-946.

COT transfer of a loss has the meaning given by section 707-210.

country by country reporting entity has the meaning given by section 815-370.

country by country reporting group has the meaning given by section 815-380.

country by country reporting parent has the meaning given by section 815-375.

CRC program means the program administered by the Commonwealth known as the Cooperative Research Centres Program.

created:

(a) a *consolidated group is created from a *MEC group if the consolidated group comes into existence under section 703-55 at the time the MEC group ceases to exist (as mentioned in that section); and

(b) a MEC group is created from a consolidated group if:

the MEC group comes into existence under section 719-40 when a *special conversion event happens to a potential MEC group derived from an eligible tier-1 company of a top company; and

the eligible tier-1 company was the *head company of the consolidated group (as mentioned in paragraph 719-40(1)(b)).

creditable acquisition has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

creditable importation has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

creditable purpose has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

credit absorption tax has the meaning given by section 770-15.

credit reporting bureau has the meaning given by subsection 355-72(7) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

critical mineral has the meaning given by section 419-15.

cross-character allocation amount, of a particular character, has the meaning given by section 276-330.

cross staple arrangement has the meaning given by section 12-436 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Crown lease has the meaning given by section 124-580.

CRS (short for Common Reporting Standard) has the meaning given by subsection 396-110(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

CRS Commentary has the meaning given by subsection 396-110(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

crystallised pre-July 83 amount means the amount mentioned in paragraph 307-225(2)(e) in relation to the interest.

crystallised reduction amount has the meaning given by section 136-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

crystallised segment has the meaning given by section 307-225.

currency exchange rate effect has the meaning given by section 775-105.

current GST turnover has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

current pension means a pension that has begun to be paid.

current termination value of a *life insurance policy, or of the *net risk component of a life insurance policy, has the meaning given in prudential standards made under section 230A of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

current year means the income year for which you are working out your assessable income, deductions and *tax offsets.

custodian has the meaning given by section 12-390 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

customs dealing has the meaning given by the *Wine Tax Act.

customs duty has the meaning given by the *GST Act.

date of the settlement or order, for a *structured settlement or a *structured order, has the meaning given by section 54-5.

death benefits dependant has the meaning given by section 302-195.

death benefit termination payment has the meaning given by subsection 82-130(3).

debenture of a company or unit trust includes debenture stock, bonds, notes and any other securities of the company or trust, whether or not constituting a charge on its assets.

debit value, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream, has the meaning given by section 294-145.

debt account discharge liability has the meaning given by section 133-120 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

debt capital, of an entity and at a particular time, means any *debt interests issued by the entity that are still *on issue at that time.

debt deduction has the meaning given by section 820-40.

debt interest in an entity has the meaning given by Subdivision 974-B.

debt-like trust instrument has the meaning given by section 276-505.

debt property has the meaning given by section 243-30.

decrease time for a *direct value shift has the meaning given by section 725-155.

decreasing adjustment has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

deduct has the meaning given by sections 8-1 and 8-5.

deductible gift recipient has the meaning given by section 30-227.

deducting hybrid has the meaning given by section 832-550.

deducting hybrid mismatch has the meaning given by section 832-545.

deduction means an amount that you can deduct.

deduction component:

Note: For income years before 1997-98, deduction has the meaning given by section 8-3 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

of a deduction/non-inclusion mismatch—has the meaning given by subsections 832-105(1) and 832-105(2); and

of a deduction/deduction mismatch—has the meaning given by subsection 832-110(2); and

of a hybrid financial instrument mismatch—has the meaning given by subsection 832-200(2); and

of a hybrid payer mismatch—has the meaning given by subsection 832-305(2); and

of a reverse hybrid mismatch—has the meaning given by subsection 832-395(2); and

of a branch hybrid mismatch—has the meaning given by subsection 832-470(2); and

of a deducting hybrid mismatch—has the meaning given by subsection 832-545(2); and

of an offshore hybrid mismatch—means the deduction component of the relevant hybrid financial instrument mismatch, hybrid payer mismatch, reverse hybrid mismatch, branch hybrid mismatch or deducting hybrid mismatch.

deduction/deduction mismatch has the meaning given by section 832-110.

deduction/non-inclusion mismatch has the meaning given by section 832-105.

deduction year has the meaning given by section 170-20.

default commutation notice has the meaning given by section 136-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Defence Minister means the Minister administering section 1 of the Defence Act 1903.

Defence Secretary means the Secretary of the Department administered by the *Defence Minister.

deferral reversal, for a *superannuation interest, has the meaning given by section 133-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

deferred BAS payer, at a particular time, means an entity that has an obligation to notify the Commissioner of a *BAS amount at that time, other than:

an entity that has an obligation at that time to give the Commissioner a GST return for a monthly tax period; or

an entity whose obligation to notify a BAS amount at that time relates only to one or more of the following:

an amount withheld by a medium withholder or a large withholder;

the PAYG instalment of an annual payer.

Note: You are therefore a deferred BAS payer if you have an obligation to give the Commissioner a GST return for a quarterly tax period or if you are a GST instalment payer within the meaning of the GST Act.

deferred non-residential capital gain has the meaning given by subsection 102-6(3).

deferred residential capital gain has the meaning given by subsection 102-6(4).

deferred roll-over gain: an asset has a deferred roll-over gain at a particular time if:

before that time there was a roll-over under a provision or former provision of this Act in relation to a disposal or a CGT event that happened in relation to the asset; and

as a result of the roll-over all or part of a *capital gain from the disposal or CGT event was disregarded.

The amount of the deferred roll-over gain is equal to the amount of the capital gain that was disregarded, reduced by the amount (if any) by which the gain has been taken into account in working out a net capital gain (section 102-5) or net capital loss (section 102-10) in relation to the asset between the roll-over time and the particular time.

deferred roll-over loss: an asset has a deferred roll-over loss at a particular time if:

before that time there was a roll-over under a provision or former provision of this Act in relation to a disposal or a CGT event that happened in relation to the asset; and

as a result of the roll-over all or part of a *capital loss from the disposal or CGT event was disregarded.

The amount of the deferred roll-over loss is equal to the amount of the capital loss that was disregarded, reduced by the amount (if any) by which the loss has been taken into account in working out a net capital gain (section 102-5) or net capital loss (section 102-10) in relation to the asset between the roll-over time and the particular time.

deferred superannuation income stream has the meaning given by the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994.

deferred to a debt account, for a *superannuation interest, in relation to *assessed Division 293 tax, has the meaning given by section 133-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

deferred to a Division 296 debt account, for a *superannuation interest, in relation to *assessed Division 296 tax, has the meaning given by section 134-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

deficit:

(a) section 205-40 sets out when a *franking account is in deficit; and

section 208-125 sets out when an exempting account is in deficit; and

section 210-130 sets out when a venture capital sub-account is in deficit.

defined benefit contributions has the meaning given by sections 293-115, 293-150 and 293-195.

defined benefit income has the meaning given by section 303-2.

defined benefit income cap has the meaning given by section 303-4.

defined benefit interest has the meaning given by section 291-175.

defined benefit tax has the meaning given by section 133-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

demerged entity has the meaning given by section 125-70.

demerger has the meaning given by section 125-70.

demerger dividend has the meaning given by subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

demerger group has the meaning given by section 125-65.

demerger subsidiary has the meaning given by section 125-65.

demerging entity has the meaning given by section 125-70.

demutualise: a mutual entity (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001) that issues one or more MCIs (within the meaning of that Act) is taken not to demutualise by doing so.

departing Australia superannuation payment has the meaning given by section 301-170.

depository entity has the meaning given by section 166-260.

depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 40-30.

depreciating asset lease: a depreciating asset lease is an agreement (including a renewal of an agreement) under which the entity that *holds the *depreciating asset grants a *right to use the asset to another entity. However, a depreciating asset lease does not include a *hire purchase agreement or a *short-term hire agreement.

Deputy Commissioner means a Deputy Commissioner of Taxation.

derivative financial arrangement has the meaning given by subsection 230-350(1).

derive has a meaning affected by subsection 6-5(4).

design of a uniform has the meaning given by subsection 34-25(2).

Designated Filing Entity has the meaning given by section 127-25.

designated infrastructure project means an infrastructure project designated under section 415-70.

designated infrastructure project entity has the meaning given by section 415-20.

Designated Local Entity has the meaning given by section 127-15.

determined member component has the meaning given by section 276-205.

determined trust component has the meaning given by section 276-255.

development assistance for a *film has the meaning given by section 376-55.

development expenditure:

Note: MCI is short for mutual capital instrument (see section 167AD of the Corporations Act 2001).

in relation to a film, means expenditure to the extent to which it is incurred in meeting the development costs for the film and includes expenditure to the extent to which it is incurred on any of the following:

location surveys and other activities undertaken to assess locations for possible use in the film;

storyboarding for the film;

scriptwriting for the film;

research for the film;

casting actors for the film;

developing a budget for the film;

developing a shooting schedule for the film; and

in relation to a digital game, has the meaning given by section 378-35.

died in the line of duty has the meaning given by subsection 302-195(3).

digital currency has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

digital game has the meaning given by section 378-20.

diminishing value method has the meaning given by sections 40-70 and 40-72.

dining facility has the meaning given by section 32-60.

direct equity interests in a company are *shares in the company.

direct forestry expenditure has the meaning given by section 394-45.

direct participation interest has the meaning given by section 960-190.

direct roll-over replacement has the meaning given by section 723-110.

direct small business participation percentage has the meaning given by section 152-70.

direct SRWUIP payment has the meaning given by subsection 59-67(3).

direct value shift has the meaning given by section 725-145.

direct voting percentage in a company has the meaning given by section 768-550.

disability policy means a *life insurance policy under which a benefit is payable in the event of: (a) the death, by accident or by some other cause stated in the contract, of the person whose life is insured (the insured); or injury to, or disability of, the insured as a result of accident or sickness; or the insured being found to have a stated condition or disease; but does not include a contract of consumer credit insurance within the meaning of the Insurance Contracts Act 1984.

(a) the death, by accident or by some other cause stated in the contract, of the person whose life is insured (the insured); or

injury to, or disability of, the insured as a result of accident or sickness; or

the insured being found to have a stated condition or disease;

but does not include a contract of consumer credit insurance within the meaning of the Insurance Contracts Act 1984.

disability superannuation benefit means a *superannuation benefit if: the benefit is paid to an individual because he or she suffers from ill-health (whether physical or mental); and 2 legally qualified medical practitioners have certified that, because of the ill-health, it is unlikely that the individual can ever be gainfully employed in a capacity for which he or she is reasonably qualified because of education, experience or training. disaggregated attributable decrease: section 727-775 sets out how to determine whether an *indirect value shift has produced a disaggregated attributable decrease in the *market value of an *equity or loan interest. disaggregated attributable increase: section 727-805 sets out how to determine whether an *indirect value shift has produced a disaggregated attributable increase in the *market value of an *equity or loan interest. disallow: a net capital loss—has the meaning given by section 175-40; or a *capital loss—has the meaning given by section 175-55.

the benefit is paid to an individual because he or she suffers from ill-health (whether physical or mental); and

2 legally qualified medical practitioners have certified that, because of the ill-health, it is unlikely that the individual can ever be gainfully employed in a capacity for which he or she is reasonably qualified because of education, experience or training.

disaggregated attributable decrease: section 727-775 sets out how to determine whether an *indirect value shift has produced a disaggregated attributable decrease in the *market value of an *equity or loan interest.

disaggregated attributable increase: section 727-805 sets out how to determine whether an *indirect value shift has produced a disaggregated attributable increase in the *market value of an *equity or loan interest.

disallow:

a net capital loss—has the meaning given by section 175-40; or

a *capital loss—has the meaning given by section 175-55.

disallowed capital allowance percentage has the meaning given by subsection 250-150(4).

discount: an *equity or loan interest is issued at a discount as provided in section 725-150.

discount capital gain has the meaning given by Subdivision 115-A.

discount percentage has the meaning given by Subdivision 115-B.

discretionary benefits means investment account benefits (as defined by section 14 of the Life Insurance Act 1995) that are regarded as non-participating benefits for the purposes of that Act solely because of the operation of Prudential Rules No. 22 in force under section 252 of that Act.

disease has the meaning given by subsection 34-20(3).

disentitling event has the meaning given by section 385-163.

disposal year has the meaning given by subsection 385-105(2).

dispose of a *CGT asset: you dispose of a CGT asset (in its capacity as a CGT asset) in the circumstances specified in section 104-10.

disregarded small fund assets has the meaning given by section 295-387.

distributable profits of a company has the meaning given by section 317 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

distributing body has the meaning given by section 128U of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

distribution, by a *corporate tax entity, has the meaning given by section 960-120.

distribution event has the meaning given by subsection 207-120(5).

distribution statement has the meaning given by section 202-80.

diverted profits tax means tax imposed by the Diverted Profits Tax Act 2017.

dividend has the meaning given by subsections 6(1) and (4) and 6BA(5) and section 94L of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

dividend stake has the meaning given by section 166-235.

dividend stripping operation has the meaning given by section 207-155.

Division 6C land has the meaning given by section 12-448 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 230 financial arrangement: a *financial arrangement is a Division 230 financial arrangement if Division 230 applies in relation to your gains and losses from the arrangement.

Division 230 starting value:

(a) the Division 230 starting value of an asset or liability that is or is part of a *Division 230 financial arrangement to which Subdivision 230-C (fair value method) applies is the amount of the asset or the amount of the liability according to the relevant standards mentioned in section 230-230 that apply in relation to the arrangement; and

(b) the Division 230 starting value of an asset or liability that is or is part of a Division 230 financial arrangement to which Subdivision 230-D (foreign exchange retranslation method) applies is the value of the asset or the amount of the liability according to the relevant standards mentioned in section 230-280 that apply in relation to the arrangement; and

(c) the Division 230 starting value of an asset or liability that is or is part of a Division 230 financial arrangement to which Subdivision 230-F (reliance on financial reports method) applies is the value of the asset or the amount of the liability according to the relevant standards mentioned in section 230-420 that apply in relation to the arrangement.

Division 293 tax means tax imposed by the Superannuation (Sustaining the Superannuation Contribution Concession) Imposition Act 2013.

Division 293 tax law means:

(a) the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997, so far as it relates to the *Division 293 tax; and

any Act that imposes Division 293 tax; and

(c) the Taxation Administration Act 1953, so far as it relates to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) and (b) (or to so much of that Act as is covered); and

any other Act, so far as it relates to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (c) (or to so much of that Act as is covered); and

regulations and other legislative instruments under an Act, so far as they relate to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (d) (or to so much of that Act as is covered).

Division 296 debt account has the meaning given by section 134-60 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 296 debt account discharge liability has the meaning given by section 134-120 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 296 deferral reversal, for a *superannuation interest, has the meaning given by section 134-20 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 296 end benefit has the meaning given by section 134-130 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 296 excluded interest has the meaning given by subsection 296-55(3).

Division 296 fund earnings has the meaning given by section 296-60.

Division 296 tax means tax imposed by the Superannuation (Building a Stronger and Fairer Super System) Imposition Act 2026.

Division 296 tax law means:

(a) the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997, so far as it relates to the *Division 296 tax; and

any Act that imposes Division 296 tax; and

(c) the Taxation Administration Act 1953, so far as it relates to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) and (b) (or to so much of that Act as is covered); and

any other Act, so far as it relates to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (c) (or to so much of that Act as is covered); and

regulations and other legislative instruments under an Act, so far as they relate to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (d) (or to so much of that Act as is covered).

Division 405 payment has the meaning given by section 405-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 405 report has the meaning given by section 405-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 410 payment has the meaning given by section 410-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 410 report has the meaning given by section 410-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 415 payment has the meaning given by section 415-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 417 payment has the meaning given by section 417-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Division 832 control group has the meaning given by section 832-205.

documentary has the meaning given by section 376-25.

down interest has the meaning given by section 725-155.

DPT assessment has the meaning given by section 145-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

dual inclusion income has the meaning given by section 832-680.

dual listed company arrangement has the meaning given by section 125-60.

dual listed company voting share has the meaning given by section 125-60.

dual resident investment company has the meaning given by section 6F of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

dwelling has the meaning given by section 118-115.

early retirement scheme has the meaning given by section 83-180.

early retirement scheme payment has the meaning given by section 83-180.

early stage venture capital limited partnership has the meaning given by subsection 118-407(4).

economic infrastructure facility has the meaning given by section 12-439 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

education direction means:

a superannuation guarantee education direction; or

a tax-records education direction.

effective life: the effective life of a *depreciating asset is worked out under sections 40-95, 40-100, 40-102, 40-103, 40-105 and 40-110.

effectively non-cancellable has the meaning given by section 250-130.

effectively non-contingent obligation has the meaning given by section 974-135.

election to rely on financial reports has the meaning given by section 230-395.

electronic payment means a payment by way of electronic transmission, in an electronic format approved by the Commissioner.

electronic sales suppression tool has the meaning given by section 8WAB of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

electronic signature of an entity means a unique identification of the entity in electronic form that is approved by the Commissioner.

element taxed in the fund has the meaning given by section 307-275.

element untaxed in the fund has the meaning given by section 307-275.

eligible community housing provider has the meaning given by section 980-10.

eligible continuing substantial member of a *former exempting entity has the meaning given by section 208-155.

eligible Division 166 company means a company: (a) that is not a *widely held company; and in which: *voting stakes that carry rights to more than 50% of the voting power in the company; or dividend stakes that carry rights to receive more than 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or *capital stakes that carry rights to receive more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company; are beneficially owned (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities) by: a widely held company; or an entity mentioned in subsection 166-245(2) that satisfies the condition in subsection 166-245(3); or a non-profit company; or a charity; or 2 or more entities mentioned in subparagraphs (iv) to (vii).

(a) that is not a *widely held company; and

in which:

*voting stakes that carry rights to more than 50% of the voting power in the company; or

dividend stakes that carry rights to receive more than 50% of any dividends that the company may pay; or

*capital stakes that carry rights to receive more than 50% of any distribution of capital of the company;

are beneficially owned (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities) by:

a widely held company; or

an entity mentioned in subsection 166-245(2) that satisfies the condition in subsection 166-245(3); or

a non-profit company; or

a charity; or

2 or more entities mentioned in subparagraphs (iv) to (vii).

Note: For subparagraphs (b)(i), (ii) and (iii), Division 167 has special rules for working out rights to voting power, dividends and capital distributions in a company whose shares do not all carry the same rights to those matters.

eligible for a granny flat interest has the meaning given by subsection 137-10(2).

eligible security has the meaning given by section 775-190.

eligible tier-1 company has the meaning given by section 719-15.

eligible venture capital investment has the meaning given by sections 118-425 and 118-427.

eligible venture capital investor has the meaning given by subsection 118-415(2).

eligible venture capital partner has the meaning given by section 118-420.

employee share scheme has the meaning given by subsection 83A-10(2).

employee share trust has the meaning given by subsection 130-85(4).

Employment Secretary means the Secretary of the Department responsible for employment policy.

employment termination payment has the meaning given by section 82-130.

end benefit has the meaning given by section 133-130 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

endowment policy has the meaning given by section 295-480.

ends, in relation to a *corporate change, has the meaning given by section 166-175.

end user of an asset has the meaning given by section 250-50.

end value of an asset has the meaning given by section 250-180.

enterprise has the meaning given by section 9-20 of the *GST Act.

entertainment has the meaning given by section 32-10.

entity has the meaning given by section 960-100.

entity EBITDA has the meaning given by section 820-55.

entity maintenance deduction has the meaning given by subsection 86-65(2).

environmental protection activities has the meaning given by section 40-755.

Environment Minister means the Minister administering the Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999.

Environment Secretary means the Secretary of the Department administered by the *Environment Minister.

equity capital of an entity at a particular time means the total of the following as at that time: the issue price (however described) of each *equity interest in the entity that is still *on issue, reduced by so much (if any) of the issue price as remains unpaid; the entity’s general reserves and asset revaluation reserves; the entity’s retained earnings; the entity’s net earnings (if any) for the current year, reduced by: the *tax the entity expects to pay in respect of those net earnings; and so much of each distribution to the entity’s *members that has been made or declared as at that time as is attributable to the entity’s earnings for the current year; if the entity is a corporate tax entity—provisions for *distributions of profit; if paragraph (e) does not apply—provisions for distributions to the entity’s *members; reduced by the total of the following as at that time: the entity’s negative retained earnings (if any); the entity’s net loss (if any) for the current year.

Note: This meaning is also affected by subsection 118-435(2).

the issue price (however described) of each *equity interest in the entity that is still *on issue, reduced by so much (if any) of the issue price as remains unpaid;

the entity’s general reserves and asset revaluation reserves;

the entity’s retained earnings;

the entity’s net earnings (if any) for the current year, reduced by:

the *tax the entity expects to pay in respect of those net earnings; and

so much of each distribution to the entity’s *members that has been made or declared as at that time as is attributable to the entity’s earnings for the current year;

if the entity is a corporate tax entity—provisions for *distributions of profit;

if paragraph (e) does not apply—provisions for distributions to the entity’s *members;

reduced by the total of the following as at that time:

the entity’s negative retained earnings (if any);

the entity’s net loss (if any) for the current year.

equity holder in a company means an entity that holds an *equity interest in the company.

equity interest in an entity has the meaning given by:

in the case of a company—Subdivision 974-C; and

in the case of a trust or partnership—section 820-930.

equity or loan interest has the meaning given by section 727-520.

ESS deferred taxing point, for an *ESS interest, has the meaning given by sections 83A-115 and 83A-120.

ESS interest, in a company, has the meaning given by subsection 83A-10(1).

ESVCLP means an *early stage venture capital limited partnership.

ETP cap amount has the meaning given by section 82-160.

excepted MIT CSA income has the meaning given by section 12-442 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

excepted trust has the meaning given by section 272-100 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

excess concessional contributions has the meaning given by section 291-20.

excess concessional contributions determination has the meaning given by section 97-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

excess exploration credit tax means tax imposed by the Excess Exploration Credit Tax Act 2015.

excess franking offsets has the meaning given by section 36-55.

excess non-concessional contributions has the meaning given by section 292-85.

excess non-concessional contributions determination has the meaning given by subsection 97-25(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

excess non-concessional contributions tax means tax imposed under the Superannuation (Excess Non-concessional Contributions Tax) Act 2007.

excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment has the meaning given by sections 292-230 and 292-310.

excess tax EBITDA amount has the meaning given by section 820-60.

excess transfer balance has the meaning given by section 294-30 and modified by section 294-140.

excess transfer balance determination has the meaning given by section 136-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

excess transfer balance earnings has the meaning given by section 294-235.

excess transfer balance period has the meaning given by section 294-230.

excess transfer balance tax means tax imposed by the Superannuation (Excess Transfer Balance Tax) Imposition Act 2016.

excess untaxed roll-over amount has the meaning given by section 306-15.

exchangeable interest has the meaning given by section 130-100.

excisable goods has the meaning given by the *GST Act.

Excise Acts has the meaning given by the Excise Act 1901.

excise duty has the meaning given by the *GST Act.

excise-equivalent goods has the same meaning as in the Customs Act 1901.

excise law means:

Note 1: ESS is short for employee share scheme.

Note 2: For ESS interests acquired before 1 July 2009, see subsection 83A-5(4) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note: ESS is short for employee share scheme.

(a) the Excise Act 1901; and

any Act that imposes excise duty; and

(c) the Taxation Administration Act 1953, so far as it relates to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) and (b); and

any other Act, so far as it relates to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (c) (or to so much of that Act as is covered); and

regulations under any Act, so far as they relate to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (d) (or to so much of that Act as is covered).

excluded complying superannuation life insurance policy means a *life insurance policy that: provides only for *superannuation death benefits, *disability superannuation benefits or temporary disability benefits of a kind referred to in paragraph 295-460(c), that are not *participating benefits; or is an exempt life insurance policy.

provides only for *superannuation death benefits, *disability superannuation benefits or temporary disability benefits of a kind referred to in paragraph 295-460(c), that are not *participating benefits; or

is an exempt life insurance policy.

excluded equity interest has the meaning given by section 820-946.

excluded foreign resident has the meaning given by subsection 118-110(4).

excluded loss has the meaning given by sections 175-5 and 175-40.

excluded STB has the same meaning as in section 24AT of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

exempt Australian government agency means:

the Commonwealth, a State or a Territory; or

an authority of the Commonwealth or of a State or a Territory whose ordinary income and statutory income is exempt from income tax because of Division 50; or

(c) an STB (within the meaning of Division 1AB of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) whose *ordinary income and *statutory income is exempt from income tax under that Division of that Part.

exempt entity means:

an entity all of whose ordinary income and statutory income is exempt from income tax because of this Act or because of another Commonwealth law, no matter what kind of ordinary income or statutory income the entity might have; or

an untaxable Commonwealth entity.

Note: See section 11-5 for a list of entities of the kind referred to in paragraph (a).

exempt film income for an income year is so much of the amount, or the sum of the amounts, to which section 26AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies in relation to you for the income year as is *exempt income.

exempt foreign employment income means amounts that are exempt from tax under section 23AF or 23AG of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

exempt foreign government agency means:

the government of a foreign country, or of part of a foreign country; or

an authority of the government of a foreign country, if the authority is of a similar nature to an authority that is an *exempt Australian government agency; or

an authority of the government of part of a foreign country, if the authority is of a similar nature to an authority that is an *exempt Australian government agency.

exempt income has the meaning given by section 6-20.

exempting account means an account that arises under section 208-110.

exempting credit has the meaning given by section 208-115.

exempting debit has the meaning given by section 208-120.

exempting deficit has the meaning given by subsection 208-125(2).

exempting entity has the meaning given by section 208-20 and affected by section 220-500 if relevant.

exempting percentage has the meaning given by section 208-95.

exempting surplus has the meaning given by subsection 208-125(1).

exempt institution that is eligible for a refund has the meaning given in section 207-115.

exempt life insurance policy has the meaning given by section 320-246.

exempt life insurance policy liabilities of a *life insurance company means liabilities of the company under the *life insurance policies referred to in subsection 320-245(1).

expand, in relation to an *active build to rent development, has the meaning given by subsection 43-152(3).

expected financial benefits has the meaning given by section 250-95.

exploration benefit has the meaning given by subsection 40-1100(2).

exploration credit means an exploration credit created, or to be created under Subdivision 418-D.

exploration credits allocation for an entity for an income year has the meaning given by section 418-81.

exploration credits remainder for an income year has the meaning given by subsection 418-103(2).

exploration investment has the meaning given by section 418-111.

exploration or prospecting has a meaning affected by subsection 40-730(4).

external indirect equity or loan interest in a *subsidiary member of a *consolidated group or *MEC group has the meaning given by section 715-610 or 719-775.

facility agreement has the meaning given by section 775-185.

failure to notify penalty means the penalty worked out under Division 2 of Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

fair value election has the meaning given by subsection 230-210(1).

Families Department means the Department administered by the *Families Minister.

Families Minister means the Minister administering the Data-matching Program (Assistance and Tax) Act 1990.

Families Secretary means the Secretary of the *Families Department.

family law superannuation payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

family trust has the same meaning as in section 272-75 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

farm-in farm-out arrangement has the meaning given by subsection 40-1100(1).

farm management deposit has the meaning given by Subdivision 393-B.

FATCA Agreement has the meaning given by section 396-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

feature film includes a *film that is an animated feature film, but does not include a film that is not *feature-length.

feature-length: a *film is feature-length if:

Note: For income years before 1997-98, exempt income has the meaning given by section 6-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Note: This definition is affected by sections 207-119 to 207-136.

Note: This definition is affected by section 320-247.

if the film is a large format film—the film is at least 45 minutes in duration; and

otherwise—the film is more than 60 minutes in duration.

feedstock revenue has the meaning given by subsection 355-445(4).

fencing asset has the meaning given by subsection 40-520(4).

FHSS eligible concessional contribution for a *financial year means a *concessional contribution for the financial year that is eligible to be released under section 138-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

FHSS eligible non-concessional contribution for a *financial year means a *non-concessional contribution for the financial year that is eligible to be released under section 138-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

FHSS maximum release amount has the meaning given by section 138-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

FHSS releasable contributions amount has the meaning given by subsection 138-30(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

FHSS released amounts has the meaning given by section 313-10.

FIFO cost method of working out the *value of a *registered emissions unit has the meaning given by section 420-52.

film means an aggregate of images, or of images and sounds, embodied in any material.

film authority has the meaning given by section 376-55.

film component has the meaning given by section 36-40.

film deductions for an income year are the following:

(a) amounts you could deduct for the income year under former section 124ZAFA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936;

amounts that you could deduct for the income year and to which former section 124ZAO of that Act applied in relation to you for the income year.

film loss has the meaning given by section 36-40.

final RUNL has the meaning given by section 715-35.

Finance Department means the Department administered by the *Finance Minister.

financed property has the meaning given by section 243-30.

Finance Minister means the Minister administering the Public Governance, Performance and Accountability Act 2013.

Finance Secretary means the Secretary of the *Finance Department.

financial arrangement has the meaning given by sections 230-45 to 230-55.

financial benefit has the meaning given by section 974-160.

financial entity, at a particular time, means an entity other than an *ADI that is any of the following at that time:

Note: Section 701-30 (rules about where an entity is not a subsidiary member for the whole of an income year) may affect a film loss.

an entity that:

(i) is a registered corporation under the Financial Sector (Collection of Data) Act 2001; and

at the particular time, carries on a business of providing finance, but not predominantly for the purposes of providing finance directly or indirectly to, or on behalf of, the entity’s associates; and

in the income year in which the particular time occurs, derives all, or substantially all, of its profits from that business;

a securitisation vehicle;

an entity that:

(i) is a financial services licensee within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 whose licence covers dealings in at least one of the financial products mentioned in paragraphs 764A(1)(a), (b) and (j) of that Act; or

(ii) under paragraph 911A(2)(h) or (l) of the Corporations Act 2001, is exempt from the requirement to hold an Australian financial services licence for dealings in at least one of those financial products;

and carries on a business of dealing in securities, but not predominantly for the purposes of dealing in securities with, or on behalf of, the entity’s *associates;

Note 1: Paragraphs 764A(1)(a), (b) and (j) of the Corporations Act 2001 deal respectively with securities, managed investment products and government debentures, stocks and bonds.

Note 2: Paragraph 911A(2)(h) of that Act exempts financial services provided to wholesale clients by a person who is regulated by an overseas regulatory authority if the provision of the service is covered by an exemption from the Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC).

Note 3: Paragraph 911A(2)(l) of that Act empowers ASIC to exempt financial services.

an entity that:

(i) is a financial services licensee within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001 whose licence covers dealings in derivatives within the meaning of that Act; or

(ii) under paragraph 911A(2)(h) or (l) of the Corporations Act 2001, is exempt from the requirement to hold an Australian financial services licence for dealings in such derivatives;

and carries on a business of dealing in such derivatives, but not predominantly for the purposes of dealing in such derivatives with, or on behalf of, the entity’s associates.

financial institution has the meaning given by section 202A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

financial investment includes the following: a *share in a company; (b) an interest in a managed investment scheme (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001); a forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme; a right or option in respect of an investment referred to in paragraph (a), (b) or (c); an investment of a like nature to any of those referred to in paragraphs (a) to (d).

a *share in a company;

(b) an interest in a managed investment scheme (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001);

a forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme;

a right or option in respect of an investment referred to in paragraph (a), (b) or (c);

an investment of a like nature to any of those referred to in paragraphs (a) to (d).

financial statement net third party interest expense has the meaning given by section 820-54.

financial year means a period of 12 months beginning on 1 July.

financing arrangement has the meaning given by section 974-130.

financing cost has the meaning given by section 26-80.

firearms surrender arrangements means:

an Australian law; or

administrative arrangements of a State or Territory;

implementing:

the agreement arising from the meeting of the Police Ministers held on 10 May 1996 concerning the surrender of prohibited firearms; or

(d) the national firearms program (within the meaning of item 2 of Schedule 2 to the Combatting Antisemitism, Hate and Extremism (Firearms and Customs Laws) Act 2026).

first continuity period has the meaning given by section 165-120.

first home super saver determination has the meaning given by subsection 138-10(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

first home super saver scheme means the scheme set out in: Division 313; and (b) Division 138 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; and other provisions as they relate to those Divisions.

Division 313; and

(b) Division 138 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953;

and other provisions as they relate to those Divisions.

first home super saver tax means the tax imposed by the First Home Super Saver Tax Act 2017.

first use time has the meaning given by section 41-30.

Fiscal Year has the same meaning as in the *Minimum Tax Act.

FITO allocation amount, of a particular character, has the meaning given by section 276-335.

fixed entitlement:

(a) an entity has a fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of a company, partnership or trust if the entity has a fixed entitlement to that share within the meaning of Division 272 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

(b) despite paragraph (a) of this definition, a *beneficiary of a *CCIV sub-fund trust is taken to have a fixed entitlement to a share of the income or capital of the trust as provided by section 195-120 of this Act.

Note: Section 165-245 of this Act affects when an entity is taken to have held or had, directly or indirectly, a fixed entitlement to a share of income or capital of a company.

fixed ratio earnings limit has the meaning given by section 820-51.

fixed ratio test disallowed amount has the meaning given by section 820-57.

fixed trust: a trust is a fixed trust if entities have *fixed entitlements to all of the income and capital of the trust.

flows indirectly:

Note: AMITs are treated as fixed trusts (see section 276-55).

subsections 207-50(2), (3) and (4) set out the circumstances in which a *franked distribution flows indirectly to an entity; and

subsection 207-50(5) sets out the circumstances in which a franked distribution flows indirectly through an entity; and

section 208-175 sets out the circumstances in which a *distribution *franked with an exempting credit flows indirectly to an entity; and

section 220-405 sets out the circumstances in which a supplementary dividend (as defined in section OB1 of the Income Tax Act 1994 of New Zealand) flows indirectly to an entity; and

subsections 380-25(2), (3) and (4) set out the circumstances in which *NRAS rent flows indirectly to an entity; and

subsection 380-25(5) sets out the circumstances in which NRAS rent flows indirectly through an entity.

FMD provider (short for farm management deposit provider) has the meaning given by subsection 393-20(3).

fodder storage asset has the meaning given by subsection 40-520(3).

Foreign Affairs Minister means the Minister administering the International Development Association Act 1960.

foreign bank means an *ADI that is a *foreign entity.

foreign controlled Australian company has the meaning given by section 820-785.

foreign controlled Australian entity has the meaning given by section 820-780.

foreign controlled Australian partnership has the meaning given by section 820-795.

foreign controlled Australian trust has the meaning given by section 820-790.

foreign currency means a currency other than: Australian currency; or digital currency; or anything prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

Australian currency; or

digital currency; or

anything prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of this paragraph.

foreign currency hedge has the meaning given by subsection 230-350(2).

foreign DMT tax has the meaning given by section 770-150.

foreign entity means an entity that is not an *Australian entity.

foreign equity distribution has the meaning given by section 768-10.

foreign exchange retranslation election has the meaning given by subsections 230-255(1) and (3).

foreign general insurance company means a company that is a foreign resident, and whose sole or principal business is *insurance business.

foreign GloBE tax means:

foreign DMT tax; and

foreign IIR tax; and

foreign UTPR tax.

foreign government agency means:

the government of a foreign country or of part of a foreign country; or

an authority of the government of a foreign country; or

an authority of the government of part of a foreign country.

foreign hybrid has the meaning given by section 830-5.

foreign hybrid company has the meaning given by section 830-15.

foreign hybrid limited partnership has the meaning given by section 830-10.

foreign hybrid mismatch rules means a *foreign law corresponding to any of Subdivisions 832-C, 832-D, 832-E, 832-F, 832-G or 832-H (which are about hybrid mismatches).

foreign hybrid net capital loss amount has the meaning given by section 830-55.

foreign hybrid revenue loss amount has the meaning given by paragraph 830-45(1)(a).

foreign hybrid tax provisions means:

(a) the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (other than Division 5A of Part III); and

this Act (other than Subdivision 830-A and 830-B); and

(c) an Act that imposes any tax payable under the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or this Act; and

(d) the Income Tax Rates Act 1986; and

(e) the Taxation Administration Act 1953, so far as it relates to an Act covered by paragraph (a), (b) or (c); and

any other Act, so far as it relates to an Act covered by paragraph (a), (b), (c), (d) or (e); and

regulations under an Act covered by any of the preceding paragraphs.

foreign IIR tax means tax that: is payable under a foreign law; and satisfies the requirements of the IIR (within the meaning of the GloBE Rules).

is payable under a foreign law; and

satisfies the requirements of the IIR (within the meaning of the GloBE Rules).

foreign income tax has the meaning given by section 770-15.

foreign income tax deduction has the meaning given by section 832-120.

foreign law means a law of a foreign country.

foreign life insurance company means a company that is a foreign resident, and whose sole or principal business is life insurance.

foreign pension fund has the meaning given by subsection 840-805(4B).

foreign public official has the same meaning as in section 70.1 of the Criminal Code.

foreign resident means a person who is not a resident of Australia for the purposes of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

foreign resident life insurance policy means a *life insurance policy that: was issued by a company in the course of carrying on a business at or through the permanent establishment of the company in a foreign country; and (b) is held by an entity that is neither an *associate of the company nor a Part X Australian resident (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

Note: Foreign country is defined in section 2B of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901.

Note: Foreign resident is not asterisked in this Act.

was issued by a company in the course of carrying on a business at or through the permanent establishment of the company in a foreign country; and

(b) is held by an entity that is neither an *associate of the company nor a Part X Australian resident (within the meaning of Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

foreign revenue claim has the meaning given by section 263-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

foreign service of document request has the meaning given by section 263-60 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

foreign superannuation fund:

(a) a *superannuation fund is a foreign superannuation fund at a time if the fund is not an *Australian superannuation fund at that time; and

(b) a superannuation fund is a foreign superannuation fund for an income year if the fund is not an Australian superannuation fund for the income year.

foreign tax period, in relation to an entity, in relation to a foreign tax imposed by a tax law of a foreign country, means the accounting period used by the entity for the purposes of determining the tax base under that law.

foreign trust for CGT purposes means a trust that is not a *resident trust for CGT purposes.

foreign UTPR tax means tax that: is payable under a foreign law; and satisfies the requirements of the UTPR (within the meaning of the GloBE Rules).

is payable under a foreign law; and

satisfies the requirements of the UTPR (within the meaning of the GloBE Rules).

foreign venture capital fund of funds has the meaning given by subsections 118-420(4) and (5).

forestry interest in a *forestry managed investment scheme has the meaning given by subsection 394-15(3).

forestry managed investment scheme has the meaning given by subsection 394-15(1).

forestry manager of a *forestry managed investment scheme has the meaning given by subsection 394-15(2).

forestry road has the meaning given by subsection section 43-72.

forex cost base has the meaning given by section 775-85.

forex entitlement base has the meaning given by section 775-90.

forex realisation event means any of the forex realisation events described in Division 775.

forex realisation gain: for each *forex realisation event a forex realisation gain is worked out in the way described in the event.

forex realisation loss: for each *forex realisation event a forex realisation loss is worked out in the way described in the event.

forgive a debt has the meaning given by sections 245-35, 245-36 and 245-37.

forgiveness income year means the income year in which the debt is forgiven.

form approved by Industry Innovation and Science Australia has the same meaning as in section 33-5 of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

former exempting entity has the meaning given by section 208-50.

fourth element expenditure has the meaning given by section 104-185.

frankable distribution has the meaning given by section 202-40.

frankable with a venture capital credit has the meaning given by section 210-50.

franked distribution: a *distribution is franked if an entity *franks it in accordance with section 202-5.

franked part of a *distribution has the meaning given by section 976-1.

franking account means an account that arises under section 205-10.

franking account balance has the meaning given by section 214-30.

franking assessment has the meaning given by subsection 214-60(1) and affected by section 214-100.

franking credit has the meaning given by section 205-15.

franking debit has the meaning given by section 205-30.

franking deficit has the meaning given by subsection 205-40(2).

franking deficit tax means tax imposed under the New Business Tax System (Franking Deficit Tax) Act 2002.

franking entity has the meaning given by section 202-15.

franking percentage has the meaning given by section 203-35.

franking period has the meaning given by sections 203-40 and 203-45.

franking return means a return required under Subdivision 214-A.

franking surplus has the meaning given by subsection 205-40(1).

franking tax has the meaning given by section 214-40.

franks with an exempting credit has the meaning given by section 208-60.

frank with a venture capital credit has the meaning given by section 210-30.

friendly society means:

Note: Subdivisions 245-C to 245-G (about forgiveness of commercial debts) apply to certain arrangements as if the arrangements were forgiveness of debts: see section 245-45.

Note 1: Section 205-15 sets out when a credit arises in that account.

Note 2: Section 205-30 sets out when a debit arises in that account.

Note: That Act imposes tax where it is payable under section 205-45 of this Act.

(a) a body that is a friendly society for the purposes of the Life Insurance Act 1995; or

a body that is registered or incorporated as a friendly society under a State law or a Territory law; or

(c) a body that is permitted, by a *State law or a *Territory law, to assume or use the expression friendly society; or

(d) a body that, immediately before the date that is the transfer date for the purposes of the Financial Sector Reform (Amendments and Transitional Provisions) Act (No. 1) 1999, was registered or incorporated as a friendly society under a *State law or a *Territory law.

friendly society dispensary means an approved pharmacist (within the meaning of Part VII of the National Health Act 1953) that is: a *friendly society; or a body carrying on business for the benefit of members of a *friendly society.

a *friendly society; or

a body carrying on business for the benefit of members of a *friendly society.

fringe benefit means:

(a) a fringe benefit as defined by subsection 136(1) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986; and

(b) a benefit that would be a fringe benefit (as defined by subsection 136(1) of that Act) if paragraphs (d) and (e) of the definition of employer in that subsection of that Act were omitted.

fringe benefits taxable amount has the meaning given by section 5B of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

fringe benefits tax law means a provision of an Act or regulations under which the extent of liability for tax imposed by the Fringe Benefits Tax Act 1986 is worked out.

FRT disallowed amount: see fixed ratio test disallowed amount.

FS assessment debt means an FS assessment debt under: (a) subsection 19AB(2) of the Social Security Act 1991; or (b) the Student Assistance Act 1973 as in force at a time on or after 1 July 1998.

(a) subsection 19AB(2) of the Social Security Act 1991; or

(b) the Student Assistance Act 1973 as in force at a time on or after 1 July 1998.

FTB amount for an income year means an amount of family tax benefit (within the meaning of the A New Tax System (Family Assistance) (Administration) Act 1999) to which an individual is entitled in respect of the income year.

fuel tax credit has the meaning given by section 110-5 of the Fuel Tax Act 2006.

fuel tax law has the meaning given by section 110-5 of the Fuel Tax Act 2006.

fuel tax return means a return under the Fuel Tax Act 2006.

fuel tax return period has the meaning given by section 61-20 of the Fuel Tax Act 2006.

full year amounts has the meaning given by section 165-60.

full year deductions has the meaning given by subsections 165-55(5) and (6).

funded aged care service has the same meaning as in the Aged Care Act 2024.

fund payment has the meaning given by sections 12-405 and 12A-110 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

fund-raising event has the meaning given by section 40-165 of the *GST Act, as modified by the omission of subparagraph 40-165(1)(b)(i) of that Act.

funeral policy means a *life insurance policy issued by a *friendly society for the sole purpose of providing benefits to pay for the funeral of the insured person.

Future Fund Board means the Future Fund Board of Guardians established by section 34 of the Future Fund Act 2006.

gainfully employed means employed or self-employed for gain or reward in any business, trade, profession, vocation, calling, occupation or employment.

gaining entity for an *indirect value shift has the meaning given by section 727-150.

GDP-adjusted notional tax has the meaning given by section 45-405 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

GDP amount for a *quarter has the meaning given by section 45-405 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

general class investor has the meaning given by subsections 820-46(2) and 820-583(1).

general deduction has the meaning given by section 8-1.

general insurance company means a body corporate that carries on *insurance business.

general insurance policy means a policy of insurance that is not a *life insurance policy or an *annuity instrument.

general interest charge means the charge worked out under Part IIA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

general partner means a partner of a *limited partnership whose liability in relation to the partnership is not limited.

general small business pool has the meaning given by section 328-185.

general transfer balance cap has the meaning given by section 294-35.

genuine redundancy payment has the meaning given by section 83-175.

geothermal energy extraction has the meaning given by subsection 15-40(4).

geothermal energy resources means matter occurring naturally within the Earth and containing energy as heat.

geothermal exploration information has the meaning given by subsection 15-40(3).

global financial statements has the meaning given by section 960-570.

global GST amount has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

global method:

of working out whether a company has an unrealised net loss at a particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115E; and

of working out whether a company has an adjusted unrealised loss at a particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115U.

global parent entity has the meaning given by section 960-560.

GloBE Entity means an Entity (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act).

GloBE Excluded Entity means an Excluded Entity (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act).

GloBE Implementation Framework:

means the GloBE Implementation Framework (within the meaning of the Minimum Tax Rules); or

if the expression GloBE Implementation Framework is not used in the Minimum Tax Rules—has the meaning given by the regulations.

GloBE Information Return has the meaning given by section 127-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

GloBE Investment Entity:

means an Investment Entity (within the meaning of the Minimum Tax Rules); or

if the expression Investment Entity is not used in the Minimum Tax Rules—has the meaning given by the regulations.

GloBE Joint Venture means a Joint Venture (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act).

GloBE JV Subsidiary means a JV Subsidiary (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act).

GloBE located: a *GloBE Entity or *GloBE Permanent Establishment is GloBE located in a jurisdiction for a *Fiscal Year if the GloBE Entity or GloBE Permanent Establishment is located in that jurisdiction for the Fiscal Year for the purposes of the *Minimum Tax Act.

GloBE Main Entity, in respect of a *GloBE Permanent Establishment, means the Main Entity (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act) in respect of the GloBE Permanent Establishment.

GloBE partnership has the meaning given by subsection 128-20(6) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

GloBE Permanent Establishment means a Permanent Establishment (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act).

GloBE Rules has the same meaning as in the *Minimum Tax Act.

GloBE Securitisation Entity means a Securitisation Entity (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act).

GloBE Transition Year, of an *Applicable MNE Group:

means the Applicable MNE Group’s Transition Year (within the meaning of the Minimum Tax Rules) for Australia; or

if the expression Transition Year is not used in the Minimum Tax Rules—has the meaning given by the regulations.

GloBE Ultimate Parent Entity, of an *Applicable MNE Group, means the Ultimate Parent Entity (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act, as affected by section 28 of that Act) of the Applicable MNE Group.

goes for at least 4 hours, in relation to a *seminar, has the meaning given by subsection 32-65(2).

government entity has the meaning given by section 41 of the A New Tax System (Australian Business Number) Act 1999.

granny flat interest has the meaning given by subsection 137-10(1).

greater benefit from franking credits has a meaning affected by subsections 204-30(7) and (8).

greater benefits:

under an indirect value shift, has the meaning given by subsection 727-150(3); and

under a presumed indirect value shift, has the meaning given by subsection 727-855(1).

greenfields minerals expenditure has the meaning given by section 418-80.

greenfields minerals explorer has the meaning given by section 418-75.

GR group has the meaning given by section 820-53.

GR group member has the meaning given by section 820-53.

GR group net third party interest expense has the meaning given by section 820-54.

GR group parent has the meaning given by section 820-53.

grid matching requirements has the meaning given by section 421-25.

gross averaging amount has the meaning given by section 392-70.

gross forgiven amount has the meaning given by section 245-75.

gross vehicle mass of a vehicle means:

the road weight specified by the manufacturer of the vehicle as the maximum design weight capacity of the vehicle; or

in the absence of such a specification, the sum of:

the weight of the vehicle; and

the weight of the maximum load for which the vehicle was designed (including the weight of the driver and a full tank of fuel, if applicable).

group EBITDA has the meaning given by section 820-55.

Group Entity, of an *Applicable MNE Group, has the same meaning as in the *Minimum Tax Act.

group heading has the meaning given by section 950-100.

group ratio has the meaning given by section 820-53.

group ratio earnings limit has the meaning given by section 820-51.

GST has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

GST Act means the A New Tax System (Goods and Services Tax) Act 1999.

GST-free has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

GST group has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

GST inclusive market value has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

GST joint venture has the meaning given by section 51-5 of the *GST Act.

GST law has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

GST return has the same meaning as in section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

GST turnover has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

guaranteed residual value for an asset that is put to a tax preferred use has the meaning given by subsection 250-85(3).

guarantee period, for an annuity provided under a *structured settlement or a *structured order, has the meaning given by subsection 54-35(2).

Guide has the meaning given by section 950-150.

head company:

in relation to a consolidated group or consolidatable group—has the meaning given by section 703-15; and

of a MEC group—has the meaning given by section 719-75.

head entity of a demerger group has the meaning given by section 125-65.

Health Minister means the Minister administering the National Health Act 1953.

Health Secretary means the Secretary of the Department administered by the *Health Minister.

hedged item has the meaning given by subsections 230-335(10) and (11).

hedging financial arrangement has the meaning given by subsections 230-335(1) to (9) and sections 230-340 and 230-345.

hedging financial arrangement election has the meaning given by section 230-315.

held: see hold.

Heritage Secretary means the Secretary of the Department administered by the Minister administering the Australian Heritage Council Act 2003.

HIH company has the meaning given by section 322-5.

HIH Trust has the meaning given by section 322-5.

hire purchase agreement means:

a contract for the hire of goods where:

the hirer has the right, obligation or contingent obligation to buy the goods; and

Note: An example of a contingent obligation is a put option.

the charge that is or may be made for the hire, together with any other amount payable under the contract (including an amount to buy the goods or to exercise an option to do so), exceeds the price of the goods; and

title in the goods does not pass to the hirer until the option referred to in subparagraph (a)(i) is exercised; or

an agreement for the purchase of goods by instalments where title in the goods does not pass until the final instalment is paid.

hold:

(a) hold a car for the purposes of Division 28 has the meaning given by section 28-90; and

(b) hold a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 40-40; and

(c) hold a *registered emissions unit has the meaning given by section 420-12.

holder, of a *registered production profile, means the holder of the profile under the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024.

horse opening value has the meaning given by subsection 70-65(1).

horse reduction amount has the meaning given by subsection 70-65(2).

horticultural plant has the meaning given by section 40-520.

horticulture has the meaning given by section 40-535.

hotel building has the meaning given by section 43-95.

housing and welfare means:

residential accommodation; or

health, education, recreation or similar facilities, or facilities for meals; or

works carried out directly in connection with such accommodation or facilities, including works for providing water, light, power, access or communications.

Housing Secretary means the Secretary of the Department administered by the Minister administering the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008.

HPTO community benefit rules (short for “hydrogen production tax offset community benefit rules”) means the rules made under section 421-45.

hybrid financial instrument mismatch has the meaning given by section 832-200.

hybrid mismatch has the meaning given by sections 832-215, 832-230, 832-310, 832-400, 832-475, 832-545 and 832-620.

hybrid payer has the meaning given by section 832-320.

hybrid payer mismatch has the meaning given by section 832-305.

hydrogen production tax offset has the meaning giving by subsection 421-5(1).

hypothetical tax position has the meaning given by section 45-615 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

IGIS official (short for Inspector-General of Intelligence and Security official) means:

the Inspector-General of Intelligence and Security; or

(b) any other person covered by subsection 32(1) of the Inspector-General of Intelligence and Security Act 1986.

immediate annuity means an *annuity that is presently payable.

Immigration Department means the Department administered by the Minister administering the Migration Act 1958.

Immigration Secretary means the Secretary of the *Immigration Department.

import has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

import declaration has the meaning given by the Customs Act 1901.

import declaration advice has the meaning given by the Customs Act 1901.

imported hybrid mismatch has the meaning given by section 832-615.

importing payment, in relation to an *offshore hybrid mismatch, has the meaning given by section 832-625.

improvement threshold has the meaning given by section 108-85.

imputation benefit has the meaning given by subsection 204-30(6).

imputation system means the rules in Part 3-6.

IMR entity has the meaning given by section 842-220.

IMR financial arrangement has the meaning given by section 842-225.

IMR widely held entity has the meaning given by sections 842-230 and 842-240.

in a position to affect rights has the meaning given by section 975-150.

incapacitated entity has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

incidental costs has the meaning given by section 110-35.

incidental forestry scheme receipts has the meaning given by subsection 394-30(4).

incidental shipping activities has the meaning given by section 51-115.

income bond means a *life insurance policy issued by a *friendly society under which bonuses are regularly distributed.

income company has the meaning given by section 170-10.

income for surcharge purposes, for a person and an income year, means the sum of the following:

(a) the person’s taxable income for the income year (disregarding the person’s *assessable FHSS released amount for the income year and subsection 271-105(1) in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936);

the person’s reportable fringe benefits total (if any) for the income year;

the person’s *reportable superannuation contributions for the income year;

the person’s *total net investment loss for the income year;

less the amount mentioned in subsection 301-20(3) for the person for the income year if the person is entitled to a tax offset under subsection 301-20(2) for the income year.

income tax means income tax imposed by any of these: (a) the Income Tax Act 1986; (b) the Income Tax (Diverted Income) Act 1981; (c) the Income Tax (Former Complying Superannuation Funds) Act 1994; (d) the Income Tax (Former Non-resident Superannuation Funds) Act 1994; (e) the Income Tax (Fund Contributions) Act 1989.

(a) the Income Tax Act 1986;

(b) the Income Tax (Diverted Income) Act 1981;

(c) the Income Tax (Former Complying Superannuation Funds) Act 1994;

(d) the Income Tax (Former Non-resident Superannuation Funds) Act 1994;

(e) the Income Tax (Fund Contributions) Act 1989.

income tax law means a provision of an Act or regulations under which is worked out the extent of liability for: *tax; or Medicare levy; or franking tax; or withholding tax; or mining withholding tax; or tax payable in accordance with subsection 276-340(2), 276-410(2), 276-425(2) or 276-820(6) (AMIT offset taxation). income tax liability, of an entity for an income year, is the amount assessed as being the amount of income tax that the entity owes (as mentioned in step 4 of the method statement in subsection 4-10(3)) for the financial year applicable to the entity under subsection 4-10(2).

*tax; or

Medicare levy; or

franking tax; or

withholding tax; or

mining withholding tax; or

tax payable in accordance with subsection 276-340(2), 276-410(2), 276-425(2) or 276-820(6) (AMIT offset taxation).

income tax liability, of an entity for an income year, is the amount assessed as being the amount of income tax that the entity owes (as mentioned in step 4 of the method statement in subsection 4-10(3)) for the financial year applicable to the entity under subsection 4-10(2).

income tax return means a return under section 161, 162 or 163 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

income year: the basic meaning is given by subsections 4-10(2) and 9-5(2). Some provisions refer to a particular income year. (They may describe it in different ways: for example, as the income year ending on 30 June 1998, or the 1997-98 income year.) For an entity that adopts an accounting period in place of the particular income year, the reference includes:

the adopted accounting period; or

(b) if the adopted accounting period ends under section 18A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936:

in relation to the commencing of the income year—the adopted accounting period (as ending under that section); or

in relation to the ending of the income year—the accounting period ending under that section on the day on which the adopted accounting period would (but for that section) have ended.

Note 1: The Commissioner can allow you to adopt an accounting period ending on a day other than 30 June. See section 18 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: An accounting period ends, and a new accounting period starts, when a partnership becomes, or ceases to be, a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP. See section 18A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

in connection with: an economic benefit is *provided in connection with a *scheme if at least one of the tests in section 727-160 is satisfied.

increase time for a *direct value shift has the meaning given by section 725-155.

increasing adjustment has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

independent Australian fund manager has the meaning given by section 842-245.

independent candidate has the meaning given by section 30-244.

independent member has the meaning given by section 30-245.

indexation factor:

(a) for an amount mentioned in a provision listed at items 8 to 12 in section 960-265—indexation factor has the meaning given by section 960-285; or

(aa) for the amount mentioned in the provision listed at item 14 in section 960-265—indexation factor has the meaning given by section 960-290; or

(b) for an amount mentioned in a provision listed at another item in section 960-265—indexation factor has the meaning given by section 960-275.

index number:

(a) for an amount mentioned in a provision listed at items 8 to 12 in section 960-265—index number has the meaning given by section 960-285; or

(b) for any other amount (other than the amount mentioned in the provision listed at item 14 in section 960-265)—index number has the meaning given by section 960-280.

Indigenous holding entity has the meaning given by subsection 59-50(6).

Indigenous land means any estate or interest in land that, under an *Australian law relating to *Indigenous persons, is held for the use or benefit of Indigenous persons.

Indigenous person means an individual who is: a member of the Aboriginal race of Australia; or a descendant of an Indigenous inhabitant of the Torres Strait Islands.

a member of the Aboriginal race of Australia; or

a descendant of an Indigenous inhabitant of the Torres Strait Islands.

indirect Australian real property interest has the meaning given by section 855-25.

indirect equity interests: an entity has indirect equity interests in a company if it has *shares or other interests in entities interposed between the entity and the company.

indirect equity or loan interest has the meaning given by section 727-525.

indirectly: entities have the right to receive *dividends or capital of a company indirectly for their own benefit if they would receive the dividends or capital for their own benefit if:

the company were to pay or distribute the dividends or capital; and

the dividends or capital were then successively paid or distributed by each entity interposed between the company and those entities.

An *ultimate owner indirectly has a beneficial interest in a *CGT asset of an entity, or in *ordinary income that may be *derived from a *CGT asset of an entity, as described in section 149-15.

indirect participation interest has the meaning given by section 960-185.

indirect primary equity interest has the meaning given by section 727-220.

indirect roll-over replacement has the meaning given by section 723-110.

indirect small business participation percentage has the meaning given by section 152-75.

indirect SRWUIP payment has the meaning given by subsection 59-67(4).

indirect tax means any of the following: GST; wine tax; luxury car tax.

GST;

wine tax;

luxury car tax.

indirect tax document means a document that: was obtained by you in the course of: your appointment or employment by the Commonwealth; or the performance of services by you for the Commonwealth; or the exercise of powers, or the performance of functions, by you under a delegation by the Commissioner; and was made or given under, or for the purposes of, an indirect tax law.

was obtained by you in the course of:

your appointment or employment by the Commonwealth; or

the performance of services by you for the Commonwealth; or

the exercise of powers, or the performance of functions, by you under a delegation by the Commissioner; and

was made or given under, or for the purposes of, an indirect tax law.

Example: A GST return is a document made for the purposes of an indirect tax law.

indirect tax information means information that: was obtained by you in the course of: your appointment or employment by the Commonwealth; or the performance of services by you for the Commonwealth; or the exercise of powers, or the performance of functions, by you under a delegation by the Commissioner; and was disclosed or obtained under an indirect tax law; and relates to the affairs of an entity other than you.

was obtained by you in the course of:

your appointment or employment by the Commonwealth; or

the performance of services by you for the Commonwealth; or

the exercise of powers, or the performance of functions, by you under a delegation by the Commissioner; and

was disclosed or obtained under an indirect tax law; and

relates to the affairs of an entity other than you.

indirect tax law means any of the following: the GST law; the wine tax law; the luxury car tax law; the fuel tax law.

the GST law;

the wine tax law;

the luxury car tax law;

the fuel tax law.

indirect tax or excise ruling means a *public ruling or a *private ruling, to the extent that the ruling relates to: an indirect tax law (other than the fuel tax law); or an *excise law.

an indirect tax law (other than the fuel tax law); or

an *excise law.

indirect value shift has the meaning given by Subdivision 727-B.

indirect voting percentage in a company has the meaning given by section 768-555.

individual means a natural person.

individual asset method:

of working out whether a company has an unrealised net loss at a particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115E; and

of working out whether a company has an adjusted unrealised loss at a particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115U.

individual base superannuation guarantee shortfall has the same meaning as in the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992.

individual final superannuation guarantee shortfall has the same meaning as in the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992.

industrial activities has the meaning given by section 43-150.

industrial instrument means:

an Australian law; or

an award, order, determination or industrial agreement in force under an Australian law.

Industry Department means the Department administered by the Minister administering the Industry Research and Development Act 1986.

Industry Innovation and Science Australia means the board established by section 6 of the Industry Research and Development Act 1986.

Industry Secretary means the Secretary of the *Industry Department.

information exchange country has the meaning given by section 12-385 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Infrastructure CEO means the Chief Executive Officer of Infrastructure Australia appointed under section 29 of the Infrastructure Australia Act 2008.

infrastructure project capital expenditure has the meaning given by subsection 415-75(4).

infrastructure project designation rules has the meaning given by section 415-100.

in-house dining facility has the meaning given by section 32-55.

in-house software is computer software, or a *right to use computer software, that you acquire, develop or have another entity develop:

that is mainly for you to use in performing the functions for which the software was developed; and

for which you cannot deduct amounts under a provision of this Act outside Divisions 40 and 328.

initial head company instalment rate, for a *head company of a *consolidated group, or a *provisional head company of a *MEC group, is an *instalment rate worked out on the basis of:

for a group that comes into existence in an income year under section 703-50 or 719-50—the first base assessment of a company as the head company of that group for which the *base year is that income year; and

(b) for a group (the later group) for which either of the following conditions is satisfied:

(i) the later group is *created from a group (the first group) that comes into existence under section 703-50 or 719-50;

starting from the first group, consolidated groups or MEC groups are successively created, ending in the creation of the later group;

the first base assessment of a company as the head company of the first group, the later group or any other group covered by subparagraph (ii), for which the base year is the income year in which the first group comes into existence.

initial participant in a *forestry managed investment scheme has the meaning given by subsection 394-15(5).

initial reconciliation period, for a *registered PGO certificate, has the meaning given by section 421-35.

injected amount has the meaning given by sections 175-10, 175-20 and 175-85.

injured person:

Note: For example, subparagraph (b)(ii) covers a consolidated group that is created from a MEC group, which was in turn created from a consolidated group that came into existence under section 703-50.

in relation to a structured settlement, has the meaning given by subparagraph 54-10(1)(a)(i); and

in relation to a structured order, has the meaning given by subparagraph 54-10(1A)(a)(i).

input tax credit has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

input taxed has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

installed ready for use means installed ready for use and held in reserve. However, a *mining, quarrying or prospecting right is not installed ready for use.

instalment group has the meaning given by section 45-145 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

instalment income has the meaning given by sections 45-120, 45-260, 45-280, 45-285, 45-286 and 45-465 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

instalment month has the meaning given by section 45-65 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

instalment of petroleum resource rent tax is an instalment of tax payable under Division 2 of Part VIII of the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax Assessment Act 1987.

instalment quarter has the meaning given by section 45-60 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

instalment trust has the meaning given by section 235-825.

instalment trust asset has the meaning given by section 235-825.

insurance business has the same meaning as in the Insurance Act 1973.

intellectual property: an item of intellectual property consists of the rights (including equitable rights) that an entity has under a *Commonwealth law as:

the patentee, or a licensee, of a patent; or

the owner, or a licensee, of a registered design; or

the owner, or a licensee, of a copyright;

or of equivalent rights under a foreign law.

interest in membership interests has the same meaning as in section 177EA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

interest realignment adjustment has the meaning given by subsection 40-364(7).

interest realignment arrangement has the meaning given by subsection 40-363(5).

interest that will or may convert into another interest has the meaning given by section 974-165.

intermediate controller has the meaning given by subsection 727-530(2).

international tax agreement means an agreement (within the meaning of the International Tax Agreements Act 1953) to which that Act gives the force of law.

international tax sharing treaty:

means an agreement between Australia and another country under which Australia and the other country share tax revenues from activities undertaken in an area identified by or under the agreement; and

(b) does not include an agreement within the meaning of the International Tax Agreements Act 1953.

invalidity segment, of an *employment termination payment, has the meaning given by section 82-150.

investment body for a *Part VA investment has the meaning given by section 202D of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

investment commitment time has the meaning given by section 41-25.

investment registration requirement:

(a) in relation to a *VCLP—has the meaning given by subsection 9-1(2) of the Venture Capital Act 2002; and

(ab) in relation to an *ESVCLP—has the meaning given by subsection 9-3(2) of the Venture Capital Act 2002; and

(b) in relation to an *AFOF—has the meaning given by subsection 9-5(2) of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

investor for a *Part VA investment has the meaning given by section 202D of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

invoice means a document notifying an obligation to make a payment.

involuntary roll-over superannuation benefit has the meaning given by section 306-12.

inward investing entity (ADI) has the meaning given by sections 820-395 and 820-609.

inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) has the meaning given by section 820-185 and 820-583(1).

inward investment vehicle (financial) has the meaning given by sections 820-185, 820-583, 820-609 and 820-610.

inward investor (financial) has the meaning given by section 820-185.

irrigation water provider has the meaning given by section 40-515.

IRU is an indefeasible *right to use a telecommunications cable system.

issued, in relation to a *debt interest, has the meaning given by paragraph 974-55(1)(d).

issue pool, for exploration investment made in an entity in an income year, has the meaning given by section 418-115.

IVS period has the meaning given by section 727-150.

IVS time has the meaning given by section 727-150.

joint venture operator for a *GST joint venture has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

JPDA (short for Joint Petroleum Development Area) has the same meaning as it has in the Petroleum (Timor Sea Treaty) Act 2003.

KiwiSaver scheme has the meaning given by the KiwiSaver Act 2006 of New Zealand.

KiwiSaver scheme provider means a provider (within the meaning of the KiwiSaver Act 2006 of New Zealand).

Kyoto unit has the same meaning as in the Australian National Registry of Emissions Units Act 2011.

labour hire notional withheld amount has the meaning given by section 16-125 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

labour mobility program withholding tax means income tax payable under Subdivision 840-S.

Laminaria and Corallina decommissioning levy means levy imposed by the Offshore Petroleum (Laminaria and Corallina Decommissioning Cost Recovery Levy) Act 2022.

landcare operation has the meaning given by section 40-635.

large superannuation balance threshold has the meaning given by section 296-30.

large withholder has the meaning given by section 16-95 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

last retirement day means:

Note: Section 820-430 allows an inward investor (financial) to be treated as an inward investing entity (ADI) in certain cases.

Note: Section 820-430 allows an inward investment vehicle (financial) to be treated as an outward investing entity (ADI) in certain cases.

Note: Section 820-430 allows an inward investor (financial) to be treated as an inward investing entity (ADI) in certain cases.

Note: The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Labour Mobility Program Withholding Tax) Act 2012 and the rate of the tax is set out in that Act.

if an individual’s employment or office would have terminated when he or she reached a particular age or completed a particular period of service—the day he or she would reach the age or complete the period of service (as the case may be); or

in any other case—the day on which he or she would turn 65.

law enforcement agency has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

legal personal representative means:

an executor or administrator of an estate of an individual who has died; or

a trustee of an estate of an individual who is under a legal disability; or

a person who holds a general power of attorney that was granted by another person.

legal practitioner means a person who is enrolled as a barrister, a solicitor or a barrister and solicitor of: a federal court; or a court of a State or Territory.

a federal court; or

a court of a State or Territory.

leisure facility has the meaning given by subsection 26-50(2).

lesser benefits:

under an indirect value shift, has the meaning given by paragraph 727-150(3)(a); and

under a presumed indirect value shift, has the meaning given by paragraph 727-855(1)(c).

liability, of a *sub-fund of a *CCIV, means any of the liabilities of the sub-fund, ascertained in accordance with Subdivision C of Division 3 of Part 8B.5 of the Corporations Act 2001.

liability for incurred claims has the same meaning as in the *applicable insurance contracts accounting standard.

liability for remaining coverage has the same meaning as in the *applicable insurance contracts accounting standard.

liable entity has the meaning given by section 832-325.

LIC capital gain has the meaning given by section 115-285.

life benefit termination payment has the meaning given by subsection 82-130(2).

life events test has the meaning given by subsection 118-110(5).

life insurance business means:

Note: For how to work out the adjusted liability for incurred claims, see section 321-20.

Note: For how to work out the adjusted liability for remaining coverage, see section 321-60.

a business to the extent that it consists of issuing *life insurance policies; and

any business that relates to a business to which paragraph (a) applies.

life insurance company means a company registered under section 21 of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

life insurance policy has the meaning given to the expression life policy in the Life Insurance Act 1995 but includes:

a contract made in the course of carrying on business that is *life insurance business because of a declaration in force under section 12A or 12B of that Act; and

a sinking fund policy within the meaning of that Act.

life insurance premium includes consideration received or receivable in respect of the grant of, or the undertaking of liabilities in respect of, an *annuity or a *personal injury lump sum.

like customable goods has the same meaning as in the Customs Act 1901.

limited partner means a partner of a *limited partnership whose liability in relation to the partnership is limited.

limited partnership means:

Note: Certain other amounts are treated as life insurance premiums when the life insurance business of a life insurance company is transferred to another life insurance company: see section 320-320.

an association of persons (other than a company) carrying on business as partners or in receipt of ordinary income or statutory income jointly, where the liability of at least one of those persons is limited; or

an association of persons (other than one referred to in paragraph (a)) with legal personality separate from those persons that was formed solely for the purpose of becoming a VCLP, an ESVCLP, an AFOF or a VCMP and to carry on activities that are carried on by a body of that kind.

limited recourse debt has the meaning given by section 243-20.

linked assets and liabilities has the meaning given by subsection 705-59(2).

linked group has the meaning given by section 170-260.

listed country has the meaning given by section 320 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

listed investment company has the meaning given by section 115-290.

listed public company means a company *shares in which (except shares that carry a right to a fixed rate of *dividend) are listed for quotation in the official list of an *approved stock exchange. However, a company is not a listed public company if: a person (who is not a company) controls, or is able to control, or up to 20 persons (none of them companies) between them control, or are able to control, 75% or more of the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or a person (who is not a company) has, or up to 20 persons (none of them companies) have between them, the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities) 75% or more of any *dividends that the company may pay; or a person (who is not a company) has, or up to 20 persons (none of them companies) have between them, the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities) 75% or more of any distribution of capital of the company.

a person (who is not a company) controls, or is able to control, or up to 20 persons (none of them companies) between them control, or are able to control, 75% or more of the voting power in the company (whether directly, or indirectly through one or more interposed entities); or

a person (who is not a company) has, or up to 20 persons (none of them companies) have between them, the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities) 75% or more of any *dividends that the company may pay; or

a person (who is not a company) has, or up to 20 persons (none of them companies) have between them, the right to receive for their own benefit (whether directly, or *indirectly through one or more interposed entities) 75% or more of any distribution of capital of the company.

listed widely held trust has the meaning given by section 272-115 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

live stock does not include animals used as beasts of burden or working beasts in a *business other than a *primary production business.

local governing body means a local governing body established by or under a *State law or *Territory law.

lodge electronically: a document is lodged electronically if it is transmitted to the Commissioner in an electronic format approved by the Commissioner.

long service leave employment period has the meaning given by subsection 83-90(4).

long term bond rate, for a period, means:

the average, expressed as a decimal fraction to 4 decimal places (rounding up if the fifth decimal place is 5 or more), of the daily assessed Australian Government bond capital market yields in respect of 10-year non-rebate Treasury bonds published by the Reserve Bank in relation to the period; or

if no such yields in respect of bonds of that kind were published by the Reserve Bank in relation to the period, the decimal fraction determined by the Minister by legislative instrument for the purposes of this definition in relation to the period.

look-through earnout right has the meaning given by subsection 118-565(1) or (4).

losing entity for an *indirect value shift has the meaning given by section 727-150.

loss carry back choice has the meaning given by section 160-15.

loss carry back tax offset has the meaning given by section 160-5.

loss carry back tax offset component has the meaning given by subsection 160-10(2).

loss company:

at a particular time, has the meaning given by section 165-115R or 165-115S; and

in relation to a transfer of a *tax loss or a net capital loss has the meaning given by section 170-10 or 170-110.

loss denial balance of a *loss denial pool of an entity has the meaning given by sections 715-60, 715-70, 715-110, 715-135, 715-355 and 715-360.

loss denial pool of an entity has the meaning given by sections 715-60, 715-70, 715-110, 715-135, 715-355 and 715-360.

loss exposure amount has the meaning given by section 830-60.

loss-focussed basis has the meaning given by section 727-780.

loss year has the meaning given by sections 36-10, 165-70 and 175-35.

low-cost asset has the meaning given by section 40-425.

low rate cap amount has the meaning given by section 307-345.

low tax component has the meaning given by section 295-545.

low tax contributions has the meaning given by sections 293-25 and 293-105.

low-value asset has the meaning given by section 40-425.

luxury car: a *car is a luxury car at a time if section 40-230 would reduce its *cost as a *depreciating asset if an entity acquired it at that time for its *market value.

luxury car lease payment, in relation to a *car to which Division 242 (about luxury car leases) applies, means an amount that the lessee under the lease is required to pay for the rental or hire of the car, but does not include:

Note: The meaning of loss year in sections 36-10, 165-70 and 175-35 is modified by section 36-55 for a corporate tax entity that has an amount of excess franking offsets.

Note 1: Division 242 treats a lease of a luxury car as a notional sale of the car by the lessor to the lessee financed by a notional loan by the lessor to the lessee.

Note 2: Section 242-10 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 extends this definition to cover reductions of cost under former provisions corresponding to section 40-230.

an amount in the nature of a penalty payable for failure to make a payment for rental or hire on time; or

a termination amount.

luxury car lease payment period means a period for which a *luxury car lease payment under the lease is allocated or expressed to be payable.

luxury car tax has the meaning given by section 27-1 of the *Luxury Car Tax Act.

Luxury Car Tax Act means the A New Tax System (Luxury Car Tax) Act 1999.

luxury car tax law has the meaning given by section 27-1 of the *Luxury Car Tax Act.

majority control has the meaning given by section 45-145 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

majority underlying interests in a *CGT asset has the meaning given by section 149-15.

make, in relation to a *film, has the meaning given by section 376-125.

managed investment scheme means an entity, with more than 20 members, that is: (a) a managed investment scheme for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001; or an entity with a similar status to a managed investment scheme under a foreign law relating to corporate regulation.

Note: If a luxury car lease payment period for a lease of a luxury car would otherwise be longer than 6 months, subsection 242-35(3) divides the original period into periods of no longer than 6 months.

(a) a managed investment scheme for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001; or

an entity with a similar status to a managed investment scheme under a foreign law relating to corporate regulation.

managed investment trust has the meaning given by section 275-10.

managed investment trust withholding tax means income tax payable under: Subdivision 840-M of this Act; or (b) Subdivision 840-M of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

Subdivision 840-M of this Act; or

(b) Subdivision 840-M of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

margin scheme has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

market integrity rules means rules made under section 798G of the Corporations Act 2001.

market value has a meaning affected by Subdivision 960-S.

market value method of working out the *value of a *registered emissions unit has the meaning given by section 420-54.

maximum allowable debt:

for an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI)—has the meaning given by section 820-90 (or that section as applied by section 820-120); and

for an *inward investing financial entity (non-ADI) covered by paragraph 820-185(1A)(a) (or 820-225(1)(a))—has the meaning given by section 820-190 (or that section as applied by section 820-225).

maximum available release amount, for a *superannuation interest, has the meaning given by section 131-45 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

maximum exempt area has the meaning given by section 118-255.

maximum exploration credit amount for an income year has the meaning given by subsection 418-85(2).

maximum franking credit for a distribution has the meaning given by subsection 202-60(2).

MBL benefit has the meaning given by section 117-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

MBL reporting day, for a *quarter, has the meaning given by subsection 115-5(3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

MDO has the meaning given by section 5 of the Medical Indemnity Act 2002.

meal allowance has the meaning given by section 900-30.

meal allowance expense has the meaning given by section 900-30.

MEC group has the meaning given by section 719-5.

Medicare levy has the meaning given by the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Medicare levy (fringe benefits) surcharge means Medicare levy surcharge imposed by the A New Tax System (Medicare Levy Surcharge—Fringe Benefits) Act 1999.

Medicare levy surcharge means:

Note 1: Part 3-90 contains rules relating to the tax treatment of consolidated groups. Division 719 (of that Part) applies those rules to MEC groups with modifications (see section 719-2).

Note 2: Provisions in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 and in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 (other than in Part 3-90) referring only to consolidated groups do not apply to MEC groups.

(a) an amount (other than a nil amount) of *Medicare levy that is payable by you only because of section 8B, 8C, 8D, 8E, 8F or 8G of the Medicare Levy Act 1986; or

Medicare levy (fringe benefits) surcharge.

medium withholder has the meaning given by section 16-100 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

member:

in relation to a GST group—has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the GST Act; and

in relation to a consolidated group or consolidatable group—has the meaning given by section 703-15; and

in relation to a MEC group—has the meaning given by section 719-25; and

in relation to a potential MEC group—has the meaning given by section 719-10; and

in relation to a country by country reporting group—has the meaning given by section 815-380; and

in relation to a notional listed company group—has the meaning given by section 960-575; and

in relation to a sovereign entity group—has the meaning given by section 880-20; and

in relation to an entity—has the meaning given by section 960-130; and

in relation to a copyright collecting society, means:

any entity that has been admitted as a member under the society’s *constitution; or

any entity that has authorised the society to license the use of his or her copyright material; and

in relation to an *NRAS consortium—means:

an entity (other than in the capacity as a partner of a partnership) that is a party to the contractual arrangement, or to one of the contractual arrangements, that established the NRAS consortium (whether or not the entity was a party to the arrangement when the NRAS consortium was established); or

a partnership, if all of the partners of the partnership are parties to the contractual arrangement, or to one of the contractual arrangements, that established the NRAS consortium (whether or not the partners were parties to the arrangement when the NRAS consortium was established); and

(f) in relation to a *sub-fund of a *CCIV—means a person who is, under subsection 1222Q(3) of the Corporations Act 2001, a member of the sub-fund; and

in relation to an obligor group—has the meaning given by section 820-49.

member component has the meaning given by section 276-210.

member of the Forces has the meaning given by section 52-105.

member of the tax preferred end user group has the meaning given by paragraph 250-60(4)(a).

member of the tax preferred sector has the meaning given by paragraph 250-60(4)(b).

membership interest in an entity has the meaning given by section 960-135.

member spouse means a member spouse within the meaning of Part VIIIB or VIIIC of the Family Law Act 1975.

metering point on land has the meaning given by section 40-655.

minerals has a meaning affected by subsection 40-730(5).

minerals treatment has the meaning given by section 40-875.

minimum capital amount:

for an *outward investing entity (ADI)—has the meaning given by section 820-305 (or that section as applied by section 820-330); and

for an *inward investing entity (ADI)—has the meaning given by section 820-400 (or that section as applied by section 820-420).

minimum holding period, for an *ESS interest, has the meaning given by subsection 83A-45(5).

Minimum Tax Act means the Taxation (Multinational—Global and Domestic Minimum Tax) Act 2024.

minimum tax capital gain has the meaning given by section 119-5.

minimum tax gap amount has the meaning given by subsection 119-10(2).

Minimum Tax law means:

the Minimum Tax Act; and

any Act that imposes *Australian GloBE tax; and

(c) the Taxation Administration Act 1953, so far as it relates to an Act covered by paragraph (a) or (b); and

any other Act, so far as it relates to an Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (c) (or to so much of that Act as is covered); and

regulations or any legislative instrument under an Act, so far as they relate to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (d) (or to so much of that Act as is covered).

Minimum Tax Rules means the Rules (within the meaning of the *Minimum Tax Act).

minimum training expenditure amount has the meaning given by subsection 376-27(6).

mining and quarrying operations has the meaning given by section 40-730.

mining building site has the meaning given by section 40-740.

mining capital expenditure has the meaning given by section 40-860.

mining entitlement has the meaning given by subsection 124-710(2).

mining payment has the meaning given by section 128U of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

mining, quarrying or prospecting information has the meaning given by subsection 40-730(8).

mining, quarrying or prospecting right is:

an authority, licence, permit or right under an Australian law to mine, quarry or prospect for *minerals, petroleum or quarry materials; or

a lease of land that allows the lessee to mine, quarry or prospect for minerals, petroleum or quarry materials on the land; or

an interest in such an authority, licence, permit, right or lease; or

any rights that:

(i) are in respect of buildings or other improvements (including anything covered by the definition of housing and welfare) that are on the land concerned or are used in connection with operations on it; and

are acquired with such an authority, licence, permit, right, lease or interest.

However, a right in respect of anything covered by the definition of housing and welfare in relation to a quarrying site is not a mining, quarrying or prospecting right.

mining site rehabilitation has the meaning given by section 40-735.

mining withholding tax means income tax payable under section 128V of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

MIT agricultural income has the meaning given by sections 12-448 and 12-449 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

MIT cross staple arrangement income has the meaning given by sections 12-437 and 12-440 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

MIT participation interest has the meaning given by section 275-40.

MIT residential housing income has the meaning given by sections 12-450 and 12-451 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

MIT trading trust income has the meaning given by sections 12-446 and 12-447 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

MLS lump sums has the meaning given by section 61-590.

modified market value of an entity has the meaning given by section 707-325.

money, in relation to the *consideration for a *taxable supply, has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

money equivalent means:

a right to receive money or something that is a *money equivalent under this definition; or

a financial arrangement (within the meaning of section 230-45).

moneylending debt means a debt resulting from a loan of money in the ordinary course of a *business of lending money carried on by the creditor.

monthly payer has the meaning given by section 45-136 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

more than 50% of the company’s capital distributions has the meaning given by section 165-160.

more than 50% of the company’s dividends has the meaning given by section 165-155.

more than 50% of the voting power has the meaning given by section 165-150.

more than a 50% stake:

(a) more than a 50% stake in a company has the meaning given by section 165-37; and

(b) more than a 50% stake in the income or capital of a trust has the meaning given by section 269-50 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

motor vehicle means any motor-powered road vehicle (including a 4 wheel drive vehicle).

MPR test day has the meaning given by subsection 45-138(4) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

multi-rate trustee has the meaning given by section 45-455 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

mutual affiliate company has the meaning given by section 121AC of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

mutual insurance company has the meaning given by section 121AB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

MySuper product has the same meaning as in the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

National Rental Affordability Scheme has the same meaning as in the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008.

native title has the same meaning as in the Native Title Act 1993.

native title benefit has the meaning given by subsection 59-50(5).

natural resource means *minerals or any other non-living resource of the land, sea-bed or sea.

NDIS amount has the meaning given by the National Disability Insurance Scheme Act 2013.

net amount has the same meaning as in section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

net assessable film income for an income year is your *assessable film income for that year reduced by your *film deductions for that year.

net asset amount has the meaning given by section 104-95.

net capital gain has the meaning given by sections 102-5 and 165-111.

net capital loss has the meaning given by sections 102-10 and 165-114 and affected by section 701-30.

net current termination value of a *life insurance policy means so much of the *current termination value of the policy as relates to the part of the policy that is not reinsured under a *contract of reinsurance.

net debt deductions has the meaning given by section 820-50.

net exempt film income for an income year is your *exempt film income for that year reduced by:

Note: For income years before 1998-99, net capital gain has the meaning given by section 102-20 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997.

any taxes payable in respect of that income in a country or place outside Australia; and

any expenses (not of a capital nature) so far as you incurred them during that year in deriving that income.

net exempt income has the meaning given by section 36-20.

net forgiven amount, of a debt, has the meaning given by sections 245-85 and 245-90.

net fuel amount has the meaning given by section 60-5 of the Fuel Tax Act 2006.

net GST: Your net GST for a *supply, is:

the GST payable by you on the supply; plus

the sum of any *increasing adjustments that you have relating to the supply; minus

the sum of any *decreasing adjustments that you have relating to the supply.

net income:

(a) of a partnership—has the same meaning as in Division 5 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

of a trust (other than a public trading trust or an *AMIT)—has the same meaning as in Division 6 of Part III of that Act; and

of a public trading trust—has the same meaning as in Division 6C of Part III of that Act; and

of an AMIT—means the AMIT’s total assessable income, reduced by all deductions of the AMIT.

net input tax credit: Your net input tax credit for an *acquisition or *importation is:

the amount of any input tax credit to which you are entitled for the acquisition or *importation; minus

the sum of any *increasing adjustments that you have relating to the acquisition or *importation; plus

the sum of any *decreasing adjustments that you have relating to the acquisition or *importation.

net investment component of ordinary life insurance policies has the meaning given by subsection 713-515(4).

net overstated amount has the meaning given by subsection 104-525(3).

net premium for a *life insurance policy means the amount of the *life insurance premium for the policy less the part (if any) of that premium that is reinsured under a *contract of reinsurance.

net risk component of a *life insurance policy means so much of the policy’s risk component as: is not reinsured under a *contract of reinsurance; or (b) is reinsured under a contract of reinsurance to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies. net small business income, of a *small business entity, has the meaning given by section 328-365.

is not reinsured under a *contract of reinsurance; or

(b) is reinsured under a contract of reinsurance to which subsection 148(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies.

net small business income, of a *small business entity, has the meaning given by section 328-365.

net understated amount has the meaning given by subsection 104-525(3).

net value of an entity means the amount by which the sum of the *market values of the assets of the entity exceeds the sum of its liabilities.

net value of the CGT assets of an entity has the meaning given by section 152-20.

neutralising amount:

for a hybrid payer mismatch—has the meaning given by section 832-330; and

for a deducting hybrid mismatch—has the meaning given by section 832-560.

new investment threshold has the meaning given by section 41-35.

new residential dwelling: see subsection 26-160(3).

new residential premises has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

New Zealand-sourced amount has the meaning given by the regulations mentioned in section 312-5 (about trans-Tasman portability of retirement savings).

non-ADI financial institution has the meaning given by subsection 128A(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

non-arm’s length component has the meaning given by section 295-545.

non-arm’s length income has the meaning given by sections 295-550 and 275-610.

non-arm’s length limited recourse debt has the meaning given by subsection 243-20(7).

non-assessable non-exempt income has the meaning given by section 6-23.

non-cash benefit is property or services in any form except money. If a non-cash benefit is dealt with on behalf of an entity, or is provided or dealt with as an entity directs, the benefit is taken to be provided to the entity.

non-complying approved deposit fund means an *approved deposit fund that is not a *complying approved deposit fund.

non-complying superannuation fund means a *superannuation fund that: is a fund; and is not a complying superannuation fund. non-compulsory, in relation to a *uniform, has the meaning given by subsection 34-15(2).

is a fund; and

is not a complying superannuation fund.

non-compulsory, in relation to a *uniform, has the meaning given by subsection 34-15(2).

non-concessional contributions has the meaning given by section 292-90.

non-concessional contributions cap has the meaning given by section 292-85.

non-concessional MIT income has the meaning given by section 12-435 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

non-debt liabilities, of an entity and at a particular time, means liabilities that the entity has at that time, other than:

any *debt capital of the entity; or

any *equity interest in the entity; or

if the entity is a corporate tax entity—a provision for a *distribution of profit; or

if paragraph (c) does not apply—a provision for a distribution to the entity’s *members; or

any liability of the entity under a securities loan arrangement if, as at that time, the entity:

has received amounts for the sale of securities (other than any fees associated with the sale) under the arrangement; and

has not repurchased the securities under the arrangement; or

a liability of the entity, to the extent that it meets the conditions for being taken into account in working out the *borrowed securities amount of the entity as at that time.

non-entity joint venture means an arrangement that the Commissioner is satisfied is a contractual arrangement: under which 2 or more parties undertake an economic activity that is subject to the joint control of the parties; and that is entered into to obtain individual benefits for the parties, in the form of a share of the output of the arrangement rather than joint or collective profits for all the parties.

under which 2 or more parties undertake an economic activity that is subject to the joint control of the parties; and

that is entered into to obtain individual benefits for the parties, in the form of a share of the output of the arrangement rather than joint or collective profits for all the parties.

non-equity share means a *share that is not an *equity interest in the company.

non-fixed trust means a trust that is not a *fixed trust.

non-membership equity interest: an interest in an entity is a non-membership equity interest in the entity at a time to the extent that it is not an accounting liability (within the meaning of subsection 705-70(1)) of the entity at that time, if:

Note: A share will not be an equity interest if it is characterised as, or forms part of a larger interest that is characterised as, a debt interest under Subdivision 974-B.

(a) the interest is not a *membership interest in the entity at that time; and

(b) the interest is not a *debt interest in the entity at that time.

In determining the extent to which the interest is not an accounting liability at that time:

treat each reference in subsection 705-70(1) to the joining entity as instead being a reference to the entity; and

treat the reference in that subsection to the joining time as instead being a reference to that time.

non-member spouse means a non-member spouse within the meaning of Part VIIIB or VIIIC of the Family Law Act 1975.

non-portfolio interest test: an interest held by an entity in another entity passes the non-portfolio interest test in the circumstances set out in section 960-195.

non-primary production deductions has the meaning given by subsection 392-85(3).

non-primary production shade-out amount has the meaning given by subsections 392-90(2) and (3).

non-profit company has the meaning given by section 3 of the Income Tax Act 1986.

non-profit sub-entity has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

non-quotation withholding payment means a *withholding payment covered by Subdivision 12-E in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

non-residential capital gain has the meaning given by subsection 102-6(1).

non-share capital account means the account provided for by section 164-10.

non-share capital return has the meaning given by section 974-125.

non-share distribution has the meaning given by section 974-115.

non-share dividend has the meaning given by section 974-120.

non-share equity interest in a company means an *equity interest in the company that is not solely a *share.

no-TFN contributions income has the meaning given by section 295-610.

notional buyer has the meaning given by section 240-17.

notional depreciation for a lease period has the meaning given by section 20-120.

notional employer has the meaning given by section 28-185.

notional interest has the meaning given by section 240-60.

notional listed company group has the meaning given by section 960-575.

notional loss:

Note: Subdivision 12-E and Division 14 in that Schedule deal with collecting amounts on account of income tax payable by recipients of certain payments or non-cash benefits who have not quoted their tax file number or ABN, as appropriate.

of a company—has the meaning given by sections 165-50 and 165-75; and

of a partnership—has the meaning given by sections 165-80 and 165-85.

notional net capital gain has the meaning given by section 165-108.

notional net capital loss has the meaning given by section 165-108.

notional net income of a partnership has the meaning given by sections 165-80 and 165-85.

notional seller has the meaning given by section 240-17.

notional tax has the meaning given by sections 45-325 and 45-475 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

notional taxable income has the meaning given by sections 165-50 and 165-75.

notional taxed contributions has the meaning given by section 291-170.

notional written down value of a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 58-75.

NRAS approved participant (short for National Rental Affordability Scheme approved participant), of an *NRAS consortium, means a *member of the NRAS consortium who is the approved participant (within the meaning of the regulations made for the purposes of the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008) for the NRAS consortium.

NRAS certificate (short for National Rental Affordability Scheme certificate) means a certificate issued by the *Housing Secretary under the *National Rental Affordability Scheme.

NRAS consortium (short for National Rental Affordability Scheme consortium) means a consortium, joint venture or *non-entity joint venture:

established by one or more contractual *arrangements, the purpose of which are to facilitate the leasing of *NRAS dwellings; and

that is not a corporate tax entity, a superannuation fund, a trust or a partnership.

NRAS dwelling (short for National Rental Affordability Scheme dwelling) means an approved rental dwelling (within the meaning of the regulations made for the purposes of the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008).

NRAS rent (short for National Rental Affordability Scheme rent) means rent *derived from a *NRAS dwelling under the *National Rental Affordability Scheme for an income year.

NRAS year has the same meaning as in the National Rental Affordability Scheme Act 2008.

NZ franking choice has the meaning given by section 220-35.

NZ franking company has the meaning given by section 220-30.

NZ resident has the meaning given by section 220-20.

OB activity has the meaning given by section 121D of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

obligor group has the meaning given by section 820-49.

occupation specific clothing has the meaning given by subsection 34-20(1).

officially quoted price has the meaning given by subsections 124-784A(6) and (7).

off-market buy-back means a purchase that is a buy-back and an off-market purchase for the purposes of Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

off-market purchase has the meaning given by section 159GZZZJ of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

offset period has the meaning given by section 421-30.

offshore banking unit has the meaning given by section 128AE of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

offshore document has the meaning given by section 353-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

offshore hybrid mismatch has the meaning given by sections 832-195, 832-300, 832-390, 832-465 and 832-540.

offshore information has the meaning given by section 353-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

ongoing development, in relation to a *digital game, has the meaning given by subsection 378-25(6).

on issue:

(a) a *debt interest is on issue as provided in paragraph 974-55(1)(e); and

an *equity interest in an entity:

(i) is on issue from when it is issued until it stops being on issue because of subparagraph (ii); and

(ii) stops being on issue when, for reasons other than the economic performance of the entity (or of a *connected entity of the entity), there is no longer a reasonable likelihood that a substantial *financial benefit will be provided in respect of the interest under the *scheme, or under any of the schemes, that give rise to the interest.

on-lent amount, of an entity and at a particular time, means the value, as at that time, of:

all the assets of the entity that are comprised by *debt interests issued by other entities; and

all the assets of the entity that are comprised by leases for the hire of goods that are not covered by paragraph (a) and in relation to which the following subparagraphs are satisfied:

each of the leases is for a term of 6 months or more;

the leases are part of the business of hiring goods that the entity carries on;

the entity’s business of hiring goods is not carried on predominantly for the purposes of hiring goods to the entity’s *associates; and

all the securities that were held by the entity that:

have been sold by the entity under a reciprocal purchase agreement (otherwise known as a repurchase agreement), sell-buyback arrangement or securities loan arrangement; but

have not yet been repurchased by the entity under the agreement or arrangement; and

if the entity:

carries on a business of dealing in securities; and

does not carry on that business predominantly for the purposes of dealing in securities with, or on behalf of, the entity’s *associates;

all *shares that:

the entity holds at that time; and

are listed at that time for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; and

are not shares in an associate entity at that time of the entity.

on-market buy-back means a purchase that is a buy-back and an on-market purchase for the purposes of Division 16K of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

opening adjustable value of a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 40-85.

opening pool balance has the meaning given by section 328-195.

operating entity has the meaning given by section 12-436 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

oral ruling has the meaning given by section 360-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

ordinary capital gain has the meaning given by section 124ZW of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

ordinary class for a taxable income of a *life insurance company has the meaning given by section 320-139.

ordinary class for a *tax loss of a *life insurance company has the meaning given by section 320-143.

ordinary debt interest has the meaning given by section 974-140.

ordinary income has the meaning given by section 6-5.

ordinary investment policy means a *life insurance policy that is not: a complying superannuation life insurance policy; or an exempt life insurance policy; or a policy that provides for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits; or a policy (other than a funeral policy) under which amounts are to be paid only on the death or disability of a person. ordinary payment is defined as set out in this table: original excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment day has the meaning given by section 292-305.

a complying superannuation life insurance policy; or

an exempt life insurance policy; or

a policy that provides for *participating benefits or discretionary benefits; or

a policy (other than a funeral policy) under which amounts are to be paid only on the death or disability of a person.

ordinary payment is defined as set out in this table:

original excess non-concessional contributions tax assessment day has the meaning given by section 292-305.

original franking assessment day has the meaning given by subsection 214-95(2).

outstanding, within the context of *franking returns, has the meaning given by subsection 214-45(3).

outstanding foreign hybrid net capital loss amount has the meaning given by section 830-70.

outstanding foreign hybrid revenue loss amount has the meaning given by section 830-65.

outstanding tax-related liability of an entity at a particular time means a *tax-related liability of the entity:

that has arisen at or before that time (whether or not it is due and payable at that time); and

an amount of which has not been paid before that time.

outward investing entity (ADI) has the meaning given by sections 820-300, 820-583 and 820-609.

• allows an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) to be treated as an outward investing entity (ADI) in certain cases; and

• allows an inward investment vehicle (financial) to be treated as an outward investing entity (ADI) in certain cases.

outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) has the meaning given by sections 820-85, 820-583, 820-609 and 820-610.

over, of a particular character, has the meaning given by section 276-345.

over-franking tax means tax imposed under the New Business Tax System (Over-franking Tax) Act 2002.

overseas fund has the meaning given by section 74 of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

overseas permanent establishment, of an entity, means a *permanent establishment of the entity that is in a country other than Australia.

owner of a *farm management deposit has the meaning given by subsection 393-25(1).

ownership interest: an ownership interest:

Note: Section 820-430:

Note: Section 820-430 allows an outward investing financial entity (non-ADI) to be treated as an outward investing entity (ADI) in certain cases.

Note: The Act imposes tax where it is payable under section 203-50 of this Act.

in land or a dwelling—has the meaning given by section 118-130; and

in a company or trust—has the meaning given by section 125-60.

Ownership Interest Percentage has the same meaning as in the *Minimum Tax Act.

ownership period of a *dwelling has the meaning given by section 118-125.

ownership test period has the meaning given by sections 165-12, 165-37 and 165-123, and affected by sections 415-35 and 415-40.

ownership test time has the meaning given by section 166-145.

paid-up share capital of a company means the amount standing to the credit of the company’s *share capital account reduced by the amount (if any) that represents amounts unpaid on shares.

parent: an individual is the parent of anyone who is the individual’s *child.

parental leave pay has the meaning given by the Paid Parental Leave Act 2010.

part of the *spectrum specified in a *spectrum licence has the meaning given by section 5 of the Radiocommunications Act 1992.

partial interest in a *corporate tax entity has the meaning given by subsection 208-25(3).

participant:

(a) participant, in relation to a *GST joint venture, has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act; and

(a) participant in a *forestry managed investment scheme has the meaning given by subsection 394-15(4).

participating benefit has the meaning given by section 15 of the Life Insurance Act 1995.

participating PDF has the meaning given by section 210-40.

partnership means:

an association of persons (other than a company or a *limited partnership) carrying on business as partners or in receipt of ordinary income or statutory income jointly; or

a limited partnership.

Note 1: Division 830 treats foreign hybrid companies as partnerships.

Note 2: A reference to a partnership does not include a reference to a corporate limited partnership: see section 94K of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

partnership cost setting interest, in a partnership, has the meaning given by section 713-210.

partnership loss has the same meaning as in Division 5 of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

partner’s proportion has the meaning given by subsection 355-505(2).

part of a distribution that is franked with an exempting credit has the meaning given by section 976-10.

part of a distribution that is franked with a venture capital credit has the meaning given by section 976-15.

Part VA investment means an investment of a kind mentioned in section 202D of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

party, in relation to a *structured arrangement, has the meaning given by subsection 832-210(3).

passes: a *CGT asset passes to a beneficiary in an individual’s estate in the way described in section 128-20.

PAYG instalment means an instalment payable under Division 45 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

PAYG instalment period means:

for a quarterly payer—an instalment quarter in relation to which a PAYG instalment is paid; and

for an annual payer—an income year in relation to which a PAYG instalment is paid.

PAYG instalment variation credit means a credit under section 45-215 or 45-420 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

PAYG payment period means:

for a personal services entity that is a small withholder—any quarter; or

for any other personal services entity—any month.

PAYG withholding branch has the meaning given by section 16-142 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

PAYG withholding non-compliance tax means the Pay as you go withholding non-compliance tax imposed under the Pay As You Go Withholding Non-compliance Tax Act 2012.

payment, of a *carried interest, includes the meanings given in subsection 104-255(7).

payment split means a payment split within the meaning of Part VIIIB or VIIIC of the Family Law Act 1975.

payment summary has the meaning given by section 16-170 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

pays a PAYG instalment has the meaning given by subsection 205-20(1).

pays Australian DMT tax has the meaning given by subsection 205-20(3B).

pays diverted profits tax has the meaning given by subsection 205-20(3A).

pays income tax has the meaning given by subsection 205-20(3).

PDF (pooled development fund) means a company that is a PDF within the meaning of the Pooled Development Funds Act 1992.

PE: see permanent establishment.

pension age has the meaning given by subsection 23(1) of the Social Security Act 1991.

performing artist has the meaning given by subsections 405-25(2) and (3).

periodic aggregate tax information has the meaning given by subsection 355-47(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

period of review, for an assessment of an *assessable amount, has the meaning given by section 155-35 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

period of the loan has the meaning given by subsection 25-25(5).

permanent establishment has the meaning given by subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

permanent establishment article has the meaning given by section 855-16.

permitted entity value has the meaning given by section 118-440.

permitted loan has the same meaning as in section 9-10 of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

person includes a company.

personal injury annuity has the meaning given by section 54-5.

personal injury lump sum has the meaning given by section 54-5.

personal services business has the meanings given by subsection 87-15(1) and section 87-55.

personal services business determination means a determination under section 87-60 or 87-65.

personal services business test has the meaning given by subsection 87-15(2).

personal services entity has the meaning given by subsection 86-15(2).

personal services income has the meaning given by section 84-5.

personal services payment remitter has the meaning given by section 13-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

personal use asset has the meaning given by section 108-20.

petroleum has the meaning given by subsection 40-730(6).

Petroleum Exploration Permit WA-523-P permit area has the meaning given by subsection 417-10(2).

petroleum resource rent tax means tax imposed by any of the following: (a) the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax (Imposition—General) Act 2012; (b) the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax (Imposition—Customs) Act 2012; (c) the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax (Imposition—Excise) Act 2012; as assessed under the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax Assessment Act 1987.

Note: In Subdivision 52-E, pension age has the meaning given by subsection 52-131(9).

Note 1: For the purposes of diverted profits tax, this definition is modified in respect of a DPT assessment (see section 145-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953).

Note 2: For the purposes of Laminaria and Corallina decommissioning levy, this definition is modified in respect of an amount of that levy (see section 125-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953).

Note 3: For the purposes of Australian IIR/UTPR tax and Australian DMT tax, this definition is modified in respect of an amount of those taxes (see section 127-75 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953).

(a) the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax (Imposition—General) Act 2012;

(b) the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax (Imposition—Customs) Act 2012;

(c) the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax (Imposition—Excise) Act 2012;

as assessed under the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax Assessment Act 1987.

petroleum resource rent tax amount means any debt or credit that arises directly under the *petroleum resource rent tax provisions.

petroleum resource rent tax law means:

(a) the Petroleum Resource Rent Tax Assessment Act 1987; and

any Act that imposes petroleum resource rent tax; and

(c) the Taxation Administration Act 1953, so far as it relates to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) and (b); and

any other Act, so far as it relates to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (c) (or to so much of that Act as is covered); and

regulations under an Act, so far as they relate to any Act covered by paragraphs (a) to (d) (or to so much of that Act as is covered).

petroleum resource rent tax provisions means the *petroleum resource rent tax law, other than *BAS provisions.

PHIIB (short for private health insurance incentive beneficiary) has the meaning given by the Private Health Insurance Act 2007.

plant has the meaning given by section 45-40.

policy owners’ retained profits for *life insurance policies means Australian policy owners’ retained profits, or overseas policy owners’ retained profits, as defined by section 61 of the Life Insurance Act 1995, in relation to the statutory fund (within the meaning of section 29 of that Act) to which the business of issuing the policies relates.

policy termination value means the amount that is, within the meaning of prudential standards made under section 230A of the Life Insurance Act 1995, the termination value of that policy at that time.

pooled development fund means a *PDF.

pooled interest in an *eligible tier-1 company that is a member of a *MEC group has the meaning given by section 719-560.

pooled superannuation trust means a pooled superannuation trust within the meaning of section 48 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

pool of construction expenditure has the meaning given by section 43-85.

ported, in relation to a *digital game, has the meaning given by subsection 378-25(4).

position to affect rights has the meaning given by section 975-150.

post-17/8/93 period has the meaning given by subsection 83-90(3).

post-AMMA actual payment has the meaning given by section 12A-210 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

post-CGT asset means a *CGT asset that is not a *pre-CGT asset.

post-choice NZ franking company has the meaning given by section 220-300.

post, digital and visual effects production for a *film has the meaning given by section 376-35.

potential MEC group has the meaning given by section 719-10.

potential residential land has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

PPL superannuation contribution payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

pre-16/8/78 period has the meaning given by subsection 83-90(1).

pre-18/8/93 period has the meaning given by subsection 83-90(2).

pre-AMMA actual payment has the meaning given by section 12A-210 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

pre-CGT asset has the meaning given by section 149-10.

pre-CGT proportion has the meaning given by section 705-125.

precious metal has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

precluded asset has the meaning given by subsection 122-25(3).

predominant economic interest in an asset has the meaning given by sections 250-110 to 250-140.

predominantly-services indirect value shift has the meaning given by section 727-725.

pre-existing audited book value of a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 58-85.

pre-July 83 segment, of an *employment termination payment, has the meaning given by section 82-155.

pre-owned has the meaning given by subsection 118-428(2).

pre-school course has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

prescribed dual resident has the meaning given by subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

prescribed excluded STB means an *excluded STB that is prescribed by the regulations for the purposes of Division 1AB of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

present value of a *financial benefit has a meaning affected by section 250-100.

preservation age has the meaning given by Part 6 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Regulations 1994.

pre-shift gain has the meaning given by section 725-210.

pre-shift loss has the meaning given by section 725-210.

presumed indirect value shift has the meaning given by section 727-855.

previous recoupment law has the meaning given by section 20-55.

price, for a *taxable supply, has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

primary course has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

primary equity interest in an entity has the meaning given by section 727-520.

primary interest in an entity has the meaning given by section 727-520.

primary loan interest in an entity has the meaning given by section 727-520.

primary producer registered emissions unit has the meaning given by section 420-13.

primary production business: you carry on a primary production business if you carry on a *business of:

cultivating or propagating plants, fungi or their products or parts (including seeds, spores, bulbs and similar things), in any physical environment; or

maintaining animals for the purpose of selling them or their bodily produce (including natural increase); or

manufacturing dairy produce from raw material that you produced; or

conducting operations relating directly to taking or catching fish, turtles, dugong, bêche-de-mer, crustaceans or aquatic molluscs; or

conducting operations relating directly to taking or culturing pearls or pearl shell; or

planting or tending trees in a plantation or forest that are intended to be felled; or

felling trees in a plantation or forest; or

transporting trees, or parts of trees, that you felled in a plantation or forest to the place:

where they are first to be milled or processed; or

from which they are to be transported to the place where they are first to be milled or processed.

primary production deductions has the meaning given by subsection 392-80(3).

prime cost method has the meaning given by section 40-75.

principal beneficiary of a *special disability trust has the meaning given by:

(a) for a special disability trust within the meaning of the Social Security Act 1991—subsection 1209M(1) of that Act; or

(b) for a special disability trust within the meaning of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986—subsection 52ZZZWA(1) of that Act.

principal class of shares in a company means:

those ordinary or common shares of the company that represent the majority of the voting power and value of the company; or

if no single class of ordinary or common shares represents the majority of the voting power and value of the company—those classes of ordinary or common shares that represent the majority of the voting power and value of the company.

private ancillary fund has the meaning given by section 426-105 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

private ancillary fund guidelines has the meaning given by section 426-110 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

private company means a company that is not a *public company for the income year.

private ruling has the meaning given by sections 359-5 and 362-25 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

private use, of a *car, has the meaning given by subsection 136(1) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

privatised asset has the meaning given by section 58-5.

proceeds of crime order has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

proceeds of the disposal or death has the meaning given by subsection 385-100(2).

proceeds of the sale of 2 wool clips has the meaning given by subsection 385-135(3).

processed minerals has the meaning given by section 40-875.

production associate has the meaning given by subsection 405-25(4).

production emissions intensity has the meaning given by section 421-20.

production expenditure has the meaning given by Subdivision 376-C.

production pathway has the same meaning as in the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024.

production profile has the same meaning as in the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024.

production sharing contract has the meaning given by the *Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty.

product ruling means a public ruling under the Taxation Administration Act 1953 that states that it is a product ruling.

professional arts business has the meaning given by section 35-10.

professional year 1 has the meaning given by subsection 405-50(3).

professional year 2 has the meaning given by subsection 405-50(4).

professional year 3 has the meaning given by subsection 405-50(4).

professional year 4 has the meaning given by subsection 405-50(4).

profit on the disposal of a leased *car has the meaning given by section 20-115.

project amount has the meaning given by section 40-840.

project life has the meaning given by section 40-845.

Project Wickenby officer has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Project Wickenby taskforce agency has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

Project Wickenby taskforce supporting agency has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

promoter has the meaning given by section 290-60 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

property right or interest has the meaning given by subsection 354-5(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

property subdivision plan has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

prospecting entitlement has the meaning given by subsection 124-710(1).

prospective gaining entity for a *scheme has the meaning given by section 727-860.

prospective losing entity for a *scheme has the meaning given by section 727-850.

protected information has the meaning given by section 355-30 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

protective clothing has the meaning given by subsection 34-20(2).

provide a *fringe benefit or economic benefit includes allow, confer, give, grant or perform the benefit.

provide affordable housing has the meaning given by section 980-5.

provided in relation to a tax preferred use of an asset, in relation to a *financial benefit, has a meaning affected by section 250-85.

provides medical indemnity cover has the meaning given by section 5 of the Medical Indemnity (Prudential Supervision and Product Standards) Act 2003.

provisional head company of a *MEC group means the company that holds an appointment in force under section 719-60 as the provisional head company of the group.

provisionally designated infrastructure project means an infrastructure project designated provisionally under section 415-65.

prudential capital deduction, for an entity and at a particular time, means the total amounts that must be deducted in calculating the following in accordance with the *prudential standards as in force at that time:

Note: This is based on the definition of provide in subsection 136(1) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

the eligible tier 1 capital of the entity at that time (within the meaning of those standards);

the sum of the eligible tier 1 and tier 2 capital of the entity at that time (within the meaning of those standards).

prudential standards means the prudential standards determined by *APRA and in force under section 11AF of the Banking Act 1959.

public ancillary fund has the meaning given by section 426-102 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

public ancillary fund guidelines has the meaning given by section 426-103 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

public company means a company that is a public company (as defined by section 103A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936) for the income year.

public financial entity has the meaning given by section 880-130.

publicly traded unit trust has the meaning given by section 149-50.

public non-financial entity has the meaning given by section 880-130.

public official means an employee or official of an *Australian government agency or of a *local governing body.

public ruling has the meaning given by sections 358-5 and 362-5 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

public sector superannuation scheme has the same meaning as in the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

public trading trust has the meaning given by section 102R of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

purpose of producing assessable income: something is done for the purpose of producing assessable income if it is done:

for the purpose of gaining or producing assessable income; or

in carrying on a business for the purpose of gaining or producing assessable income.

Note: Sections 26-19 (about using property in gaining or producing rebatable benefits) and 32-15 (about using property in providing entertainment) treat use of property as not being for the purpose of producing assessable income.

purposes of the Project Wickenby taskforce has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

put to a tax preferred use, in relation to an asset, has the meaning given by section 250-60.

QE day has the same meaning as in the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992.

Qualified Domestic Minimum Top-up Tax:

means Qualified Domestic Minimum Top-up Tax (within the meaning of the Minimum Tax Rules); or

if the expression Qualified Domestic Minimum Top-up Tax is not used in the Minimum Tax Rules—has the meaning given by the regulations.

qualifying Australian development expenditure has the meaning given by section 378-40.

qualifying Australian production expenditure has the meaning given by Subdivision 376-C.

Qualifying Competent Authority Agreement has the meaning given by subsection 127-20(3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

qualifying forex account means an account that: is denominated in a particular foreign currency; and either: has the primary purpose of facilitating transactions; or is a credit card account.

is denominated in a particular foreign currency; and

either:

has the primary purpose of facilitating transactions; or

is a credit card account.

qualifying investor has the meaning given by section 43-220.

qualifying security has the same meaning as in Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

qualifying SME investment means an *SME investment that is made in accordance with Division 1 of Part 4 of the Pooled Development Funds Act 1997.

quarter means a period of 3 months ending on 31 March, 30 June, 30 September or 31 December.

quarterly instalment component has the meaning given by section 45-610 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

quarterly payer means an entity that is liable to pay *PAYG instalments and is not an *annual payer or *monthly payer.

quarterly payer who pays 2 instalments annually on the basis of GDP-adjusted notional tax has the meaning given by section 45-134 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

quarterly payer who pays 4 instalments annually on the basis of GDP-adjusted notional tax has the meaning given by section 45-132 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

quarterly payer who pays on the basis of GDP-adjusted notional tax has the meaning given by section 45-130 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

quarterly payer who pays on the basis of instalment income has the meaning given by section 45-125 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

quasi-ownership right over land means:

a lease of the land; or

an easement in connection with the land; or

any other right, power or privilege over the land, or in connection with the land.

quote:

(a) quote an entity’s *ABN means quote in a form and manner approved by the Commissioner;

(b) quote a *tax file number in connection with a *Part VA investment: you quote your tax file number in connection with the investment if you are taken, for the purposes of Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936, to have quoted the number in connection with the investment;

(c) quote a tax file number to a trustee: the beneficiary of a trust quotes the beneficiary’s tax file number to the trustee of the trust if:

(i) Division 4B of Part VA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 applies to the trustee and to the beneficiary; and

the beneficiary is taken, for the purposes of that Part, to have quoted the beneficiary’s tax file number to the trustee.

quoted (for superannuation purposes) has the meaning given by section 295-615.

RBA has the same meaning as in Part IIB of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

RBA surplus has the same meaning as in Part IIB of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

R&D activities has the meaning given by section 355-20.

R&D entity has the meaning given by section 355-35.

R&D partnership has the meaning given by subsection 355-505(1).

realisation event has the meaning given by sections 977-5, 977-20 and 977-55.

realisation-time method means the method (for determining the effect of *indirect value shifts) for which Subdivision 727-G provides.

realised for income tax purposes:

(a) a gain is realised for income tax purposes as provided in sections 977-15, 977-35, 977-40 and 977-55; and

(b) a loss is realised for income tax purposes as provided in sections 977-10, 977-25, 977-30 and 977-55.

reasonably arguable has the meaning given by section 284-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

reasonably arguable threshold for an income year has the meaning given by subsection 284-90(3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

receives a refund of Australian DMT tax has the meaning given by subsection 205-35(1B).

receives a refund of diverted profits tax has the meaning given by subsection 205-35(1A).

receives a refund of income tax has the meaning given by section 205-35.

recognised company accounts, for a period, of a company that is a foreign resident means:

accounts that are prepared in relation to the company for the period in accordance with standards covered by subsection 820-960(1C) or (1D); or

if there are no such accounts for the period—accounts that:

are prepared in relation to the company for the period in accordance with commercially accepted accounting principles; and

give a true and fair view of the financial position of the company.

recognised consolidated accounts, for a period, of 2 or more companies that are foreign residents means:

consolidated accounts that are prepared in relation to those companies for the period in accordance with standards covered by subsection 820-960(1C) or (1D); or

if there are no such accounts for the period—consolidated accounts that:

are prepared in relation to those companies for the period in accordance with commercially accepted accounting principles; and

give a true and fair view of the financial position of the companies on a consolidated basis.

recognised new investment amount has the meaning given by section 41-20.

recognised tax adviser means:

a registered tax agent; or

(b) a registered BAS agent (within the meaning of the Tax Agent Services Act 2009); or

(c) a qualified tax relevant provider (within the meaning of the Corporations Act 2001); or

a legal practitioner.

recoupment has the meaning given by section 20-25.

recreation includes amusement, sport or similar leisure-time pursuits.

recreational club has the meaning given by subsection 26-45(2).

redeemable shares means:

*shares that are liable to be redeemed; or

shares that, at the option of the company that issued them, are liable to be redeemed.

reduce a franking assessment has the meaning given by subsection 214-125(2).

reduced beneficiary’s share of a trust’s net income for an income year has the meaning given by section 45-483 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

reduced cost base of a *CGT asset has the meaning given by Subdivision 110-B.

reduced net asset amount has the meaning given by section 104-100.

reduced no beneficiary’s share of a trust’s net income for an income year has the meaning given by section 45-483 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

reduction amount has the meaning given by subsections 385-120(2) and (3).

referable: a *share in a *CCIV is referable to a *sub-fund of the CCIV if it is so referable under subsection 1230(1) of the Corporations Act 2001.

registered auditor, in relation to an entity, means:

a person registered as an auditor under a law in force in a State or a Territory; or

if the entity is not an Australian resident—a person registered as an auditor under a law in force in the country of which the entity is a resident.

registered charity means an entity that is registered under the Australian Charities and Not-for-profits Commission Act 2012 as the type of entity mentioned in column 1 of item 1 of the table in subsection 25-5(5) of that Act.

registered CMPTI processing activity has the meaning given by subsection 419-35(1).

registered emissions unit has the meaning given by section 420-10.

registered health promotion charity means an institution that is: a registered charity; and (b) registered under the Australian Charities and Not-for-profits Commission Act 2012 as the subtype of entity mentioned in column 2 of item 13 of the table in subsection 25-5(5) of that Act. registered PGO certificate: a PGO certificate (within the meaning of the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024) is a registered PGO certificate if the Clean Energy Regulator: has decided to register the certificate under section 56 of that Act; and has not invalidated the certificate under section 64 of that Act. registered production profile: a *production profile is a registered production profile if: (a) the Clean Energy Regulator has decided to register the profile under section 33 of the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024); and the registration of the profile has not been: cancelled under section 45 of that Act; or surrendered under section 48 of that Act.

a registered charity; and

(b) registered under the Australian Charities and Not-for-profits Commission Act 2012 as the subtype of entity mentioned in column 2 of item 13 of the table in subsection 25-5(5) of that Act.

registered PGO certificate: a PGO certificate (within the meaning of the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024) is a registered PGO certificate if the Clean Energy Regulator:

has decided to register the certificate under section 56 of that Act; and

has not invalidated the certificate under section 64 of that Act.

registered production profile: a *production profile is a registered production profile if:

(a) the Clean Energy Regulator has decided to register the profile under section 33 of the Future Made in Australia (Guarantee of Origin) Act 2024); and

the registration of the profile has not been:

cancelled under section 45 of that Act; or

surrendered under section 48 of that Act.

registered public benevolent institution means an institution that is: a registered charity; and (b) registered under the Australian Charities and Not-for-profits Commission Act 2012 as the subtype of entity mentioned in column 2 of item 14 of the table in subsection 25-5(5) of that Act.

a registered charity; and

(b) registered under the Australian Charities and Not-for-profits Commission Act 2012 as the subtype of entity mentioned in column 2 of item 14 of the table in subsection 25-5(5) of that Act.

registered scheme has the same meaning as in the Corporations Act 2001.

registered tax agent has the meaning given by subsection 90-1(1) of the Tax Agent Services Act 2009.

registration requirements of an AFOF has the meaning given by subsection 9-5(1) of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

registration requirements of an ESVCLP has the meaning given by subsection 9-3(1) of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

registration requirements of a VCLP has the meaning given by subsection 9-1(1) of the Venture Capital Act 2002.

regulated superannuation fund has the same meaning as in the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

related entity has the meaning given by subsections 26-35(2) and (3).

related scheme has the meaning given by section 974-155.

related spousal interest has the meaning given by subsection 292-102(4).

relative of a person means:

the person’s *spouse; or

the *parent, grandparent, brother, sister, uncle, aunt, nephew, niece, lineal descendent or *adopted child of that person, or of that person’s spouse; or

the spouse of a person referred to in paragraph (b).

Note: Section 960-255 may be relevant to determining relationships for the purposes of paragraph (b) of the definition of relative.

release entitlement has the meaning given by section 135-10 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

relevant interest has the same meaning as in the Corporations Act 2001.

relevant superannuation earnings has the meaning given by sections 296-65 and 296-70.

religious practitioner means:

a minister of religion; or

a student at an institution who is undertaking a course of instruction in the duties of a minister of religion; or

a full-time member of a religious order; or

a student at a college conducted solely for training persons to become members of religious orders.

remaining effective life of a *depreciating asset:

has the meaning given by section 40-75; and

if the asset is a vessel to which subsection 40-103(2) applies—includes the meaning given by that subsection.

rent from land investment means rent that is derived or received from investments in Division 6C land.

replacement asset period has the meaning given by section 104-190.

replacement-asset roll-over: a replacement-asset roll-over allows you to defer the making of a *capital gain or a *capital loss from one *CGT event until a later CGT event happens where your ownership of one CGT asset ends and you *acquire another one. The replacement-asset roll-overs are listed in section 112-115.

reportable employer superannuation contribution has the meaning given by section 16-182 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

reportable fringe benefits amount for an income year in respect of an employee’s employment by an employer has the same meaning as in the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986 (as it applies of its own force or because of the Fringe Benefits Tax (Application to the Commonwealth) Act 1986).

reportable fringe benefits total has the same meaning as in the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

reportable superannuation contributions, for an individual and an income year, means the sum of:

the individual’s *reportable employer superannuation contributions (if any) for the income year; and

the individual’s deductions (if any) under Subdivision 290-C for the income year;

reduced (but not below zero) by the amount of any excess concessional contributions the individual has for the financial year corresponding to the income year.

representative of an *incapacitated entity has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

representative member for a *GST group has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

required to be registered has the meaning given by the *GST Act.

resale royalty means resale royalty under the Resale Royalty Right for Visual Artists Act 2009.

resale royalty collecting society means the collecting society, within the meaning given by the Resale Royalty Right for Visual Artists Act 2009.

resale royalty right has the meaning given by the Resale Royalty Right for Visual Artists Act 2009.

residence article has the meaning given by subsection 815-120(6).

residency requirement:

for an entity making a *distribution—has the meaning given by section 202-20 (as affected by section 220-100, if relevant); and

for an income year that is one in which, or in relation to which, an event specified in a table in one of the following sections occurs:

section 205-15 (general table of *franking credits);

section 205-30 (general table of *franking debits);

section 208-115 (table of *exempting credits);

section 208-120 (table of *exempting debits);

section 208-130 (table of franking credits that arise because of an entity’s status as a former exempting entity or exempting entity);

section 208-145 (table of franking debits that arise because of an entity’s status as a former exempting entity or exempting entity);

or an income year that is described in section 205-70 or 220-205—has the meaning given by section 205-25; and

for an entity receiving a distribution—has the meaning given by section 207-75; and

for the purposes of determining whether an entity is an exempt institution that is eligible for a refund at the time a *franked distribution is made—has the meaning given by section 207-117.

residential capital gain has the meaning given by subsection 102-6(2).

residential dwelling: see subsections 26-160(1) and (2).

residential dwelling asset has the meaning given by section 12-452 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

residential premises has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

resident investment vehicle has the meaning given by section 118-510.

resident trust for CGT purposes: a trust is a resident trust for CGT purposes for an income year if, at any time during the income year:

for a trust that is not a unit trust, a trustee is an Australian resident or the central management and control of the trust is in Australia; or

for a unit trust, one of the requirements in column 2 and one of the requirements in column 3 of this table are satisfied.

resident unit trust has the meaning given by section 102Q of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

residual unrealised net loss for a *changeover time has the meaning given by section 165-115BB.

responsible entity, of a *registered scheme, has the same meaning as in the Corporations Act 2001.

restricted DPT evidence has the meaning given by subsection 145-25(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

retail CCIV has the meaning given by subsection 1222J(1) of the Corporations Act 2001.

retail fuel means taxable fuel, within the meaning of the Fuel Tax Act 2006, that is sold by retail.

retained cost base asset has the meaning given by subsections 705-25(5), 713-515(1) and 713-705(2).

retention period has the meaning given by sections 28-150, 900-25, 900-75 and 900-90.

retirement phase:

(a) section 307-80 sets out when a *superannuation income stream is in the retirement phase; and

(b) a *superannuation interest is in the retirement phase at a time if it supports a superannuation income stream that is in the retirement phase at that time.

retirement phase recipient of a *superannuation income stream has the meaning given by section 294-20.

retirement phase superannuation income stream benefit (or RP superannuation income stream benefit) has the meaning given by section 307-75.

retirement village has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

retirement village residence contract has the meaning given by paragraph 230-475(4)(a).

retirement village services contract has the meaning given by paragraph 230-475(4)(b).

return on a *debt interest or *equity interest does not include a return of an amount invested in the interest.

returning New Zealand-sourced amount has the meaning given by the regulations mentioned in section 312-5 (about trans-Tasman portability of retirement savings).

revenue asset has the meaning given by section 977-50.

reverse hybrid has the meaning given by section 832-410.

reverse hybrid mismatch has the meaning given by section 832-395.

reviewable fuel tax decision has the meaning given by subsection 112-50(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

reviewable GST decision has the meaning given by subsection 110-50(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

reviewable GST transitional decision has the meaning given by subsection 110-50(3) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

reviewable wine tax decision has the meaning given by subsection 111-50(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

revive: a *170-D deferred loss revives as mentioned in section 715-310.

right to future income has the meaning given by subsection 701-63(5).

right to use includes the right to possess.

risk component:

(a) the risk component of a premium for a *life insurance policy has the meaning given by subsection 26-85(2); and

(b) the risk component of a claim paid under a life insurance policy has the meaning given by section 320-80.

risk-weighted assets, of an entity and at a particular time, means the sum of the entity’s risk exposures that the entity has at that time, as is determined in accordance with:

if the entity is an Australian entity that is not a foreign controlled Australian entity—the prudential standards; or

in any other case—either of the following:

the prudential standards;

the prudential standards determined by the prudential regulator in the country of which the entity, or the foreign bank that has *TC control interests of at least 40% in the entity, is a resident.

roll-over cost has the meaning given by subsection 328-455(2).

roll-over superannuation benefit has the meaning given by section 306-10.

rounding adjustment deficit has the meaning given by section 276-310.

rounding adjustment surplus has the meaning given by section 276-315.

rounding amount has the meaning given by section 960-285.

royalty has the meaning given by subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

RSA has the meaning given by the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997.

RSA component has the meaning given by section 295-555.

RSA payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

RSA provider has the same meaning as in the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997.

rural land irrigation water provider has the meaning given by section 40-630.

safeguard mechanism credit unit has the same meaning as in the National Greenhouse and Energy Reporting Act 2007.

safe harbour capital amount:

for an *outward investing entity (ADI)—has the meaning given by section 820-310; and

for an *inward investing entity (ADI)—has the meaning given by section 820-405 or 820-615.

safe harbour debt amount:

for an *inward investment vehicle (financial)—has the meaning given by section 820-200; and

for an *inward investor (financial)—has the meaning given by section 820-210.

same-asset roll-over: a same asset roll-over allows you to disregard a *capital gain or *capital loss you make from:

*disposing of a CGT asset to another entity; or

entering into an agreement with another entity that constitutes CGT event B1; or

creating a CGT asset in another entity.

The same-asset roll-overs are listed in section 112-150.

scheme means:

any arrangement; or

any scheme, plan, proposal, action, course of action or course of conduct, whether unilateral or otherwise.

Note: The Commissioner may determine that, for the purposes of the debt and equity interest rules in Division 974, what would otherwise be a single scheme is to be treated as 2 or more separate schemes, and that the schemes are not related: see section 974-150.

scheme benefit has the meaning given by section 284-150 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

scheme for a disposition, in relation to *membership interests or an *interest in membership interests, has the same meaning as in section 177EA of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

scheme period for a *direct value shift has the meaning given by section 725-55.

scheme shortfall amount has the meaning given by section 284-150 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

scholarship plan means a *life insurance policy that: is issued by a *friendly society for the sole purpose of providing benefits to help in the education of nominated beneficiaries; and is not being used, and has never been used, as security for borrowing or raising money; and if it is issued on or after 1 January 2003—contains a provision prohibiting use of the policy as security for borrowing or raising money.

is issued by a *friendly society for the sole purpose of providing benefits to help in the education of nominated beneficiaries; and

is not being used, and has never been used, as security for borrowing or raising money; and

if it is issued on or after 1 January 2003—contains a provision prohibiting use of the policy as security for borrowing or raising money.

secondary course has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

secondary equity interest has the meaning given by section 727-520.

secondary interest has the meaning given by section 727-520.

secondary loan interest has the meaning given by section 727-520.

Second Commissioner means a Second Commissioner of Taxation.

second continuity period has the meaning given by section 165-120.

section 124ZZB SME assessable income for a *PDF for an income year is the assessable income allocated to the PDF’s SME assessable income for the income year under section 124ZZB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

securities dealer means a person who, for the purposes of the Corporations Act 2001 or for the purposes of a law of a State or Territory that corresponds to that Act, deals in securities.

securitisation vehicle has the meaning given by section 820-942.

securitised asset has the meaning given by section 820-942.

segregated current pension assets has the meaning given by section 295-385.

segregated exempt assets of a *life insurance company means assets from time to time segregated by the company under Subdivision 320-H, whether segregated at the time of the initial segregation or included at a later time.

segregated non-current assets has the meaning given by section 295-395.

self-assessed clearance declaration advice has the meaning given by the Customs Act 1901.

self assessment means an assessment: for the making of which the Commissioner wholly accepts statements of the taxpayer; or (b) that, under section 166A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or a provision of another law, is taken to have been made by the Commissioner.

for the making of which the Commissioner wholly accepts statements of the taxpayer; or

(b) that, under section 166A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 or a provision of another law, is taken to have been made by the Commissioner.

self-assessment entity means a full self-assessment taxpayer (within the meaning of subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936).

self managed superannuation fund has the same meaning as in the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

seminar has the meaning given by subsection 32-65(1).

Senior Executive Service office means a position occupied by an SES employee or acting SES employee.

serious offence has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

service period has the meaning given by section 307-400.

share:

in a company means a share in the capital of the company, and includes stock; and

of a *capital gain has the meaning given by section 115-227; and

of an *exempting credit has the meaning given by section 208-180; and

of a *franked distribution has the meaning given by section 207-55; and

of a *franking credit has the meaning given by section 207-57; and

of *NRAS rent has the meaning given by section 380-30.

share capital account has the meaning given by section 975-300.

shareholders’ ratio for an income year of a *life insurance company has the meaning given by section 219-50.

shareholders’ share of the *income tax liability of a *life insurance company for an income year has the meaning given by section 219-50.

shareholding interest has the meaning given by section 175-95.

share of the PHII benefit (short for share of the private health insurance incentive benefit) has the meaning given by the Private Health Insurance Act 2007.

shift proceeds has the meaning given by sections 140-55 and 140-90.

shipping activities has the meaning given by section 51-105.

shipping cargo has the same meaning as in the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012.

shipping exempt income certificate has the same meaning as in the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012.

shipping passenger has the same meaning as in the Shipping Reform (Tax Incentives) Act 2012.

shortfall amount has the meaning given by section 284-80 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

shortfall interest charge means the charge worked out under Division 280 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

short-term hire agreement: a short-term hire agreement is an agreement for the intermittent hire of an asset on an hourly, daily, weekly or monthly basis. However, an agreement for the hire of an asset is not a short-term hire agreement if, having regard to any other agreements for the hire of the same asset to the same entity or an *associate of that entity, there is a substantial continuity of hiring so that the agreements together are for longer than a short-term basis.

sickness policy means a *life insurance policy issued by a *friendly society for the sole purpose of providing: benefits in respect of a sickness of the insured person; or benefits covered by paragraph (a) and benefits to pay for the funeral of the insured person.

benefits in respect of a sickness of the insured person; or

benefits covered by paragraph (a) and benefits to pay for the funeral of the insured person.

significant global entity has the meaning given by section 960-555.

significant individual has the meaning given by section 152-55.

significant stake has the meaning given by sections 124-783 and 124-783A.

significant stakeholder has the meaning given by section 124-783.

single-rate trustee has the meaning given by section 45-450 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

SIS dependant means a dependant within the meaning of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

small business entity has the meaning given by section 328-110.

small business participation percentage has the meaning given by section 152-65.

small superannuation account means an account within the meaning of the Small Superannuation Accounts Act 1995.

small superannuation account payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

small superannuation fund means a *complying superannuation fund with no more than 6 members.

small withholder has the meaning given by section 16-105 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

SME income component has the same meaning as in section 124ZU of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

SME investment has the meaning given by section 124ZW of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

sort of loss has the meaning given by section 701-1.

sovereign entity has the meaning given by section 880-15.

sovereign entity group has the meaning given by section 880-20.

special accrual amount means an amount that is included in assessable income, or an amount that can be deducted from assessable income, under any of the following: Division 230 (about taxation of financial arrangements), other than Subdivision 230-B; Subdivision 230-A if: the accruals method provided for in Subdivision 230-B is applied to take account of the gain or loss concerned; and all the *financial benefits provided and received under the financial arrangement concerned are denominated in a particular foreign currency; Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan); Division 242 (about luxury car leases); Subdivision 250-E of this Act if all the financial benefits provided and received under the financial arrangement concerned are denominated in a particular foreign currency; (e) Division 16D of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about certain arrangements relating to the use of property); (f) Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about accruals assessability in respect of certain security payments).

Division 230 (about taxation of financial arrangements), other than Subdivision 230-B;

Subdivision 230-A if:

the accruals method provided for in Subdivision 230-B is applied to take account of the gain or loss concerned; and

all the *financial benefits provided and received under the financial arrangement concerned are denominated in a particular foreign currency;

Division 240 (about arrangements treated as a sale and loan);

Division 242 (about luxury car leases);

Subdivision 250-E of this Act if all the financial benefits provided and received under the financial arrangement concerned are denominated in a particular foreign currency;

(e) Division 16D of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about certain arrangements relating to the use of property);

(f) Division 16E of Part III of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (about accruals assessability in respect of certain security payments).

special company means:

a mutual affiliate company; or

a mutual insurance company; or

a trade union registered under an Australian law; or

a sporting club; or

a company that is prescribed by the regulations.

special conversion event, in relation to a *potential MEC group, has the meaning given by section 719-40.

special disability trust means:

(a) a special disability trust within the meaning of the Social Security Act 1991; or

(b) a special disability trust within the meaning of the Veterans’ Entitlements Act 1986.

specialist aged care program has the same meaning as in the Aged Care Act 2024.

specialist credit card institution has the meaning given by section 820-588.

special professional has the meaning given by subsection 405-25(1).

special value, of a *superannuation interest that supports an income stream that is, or was at any time, a *capped defined benefit income stream, has the meaning given by section 294-135.

specifically entitled:

(a) specifically entitled to a *capital gain has the meaning given by section 115-228; and

Note: A trustee of a trust estate that makes a choice under section 115-230 is taken to be specifically entitled to a capital gain.

(b) specifically entitled to a *franked distribution has the meaning given by section 207-58.

specific deduction has the meaning given by section 8-5.

specified child abuse offence has the meaning given by section 139-15 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

specified roll-over amount of a *life insurance company means so much of an amount paid to the company as constitutes the *element untaxed in the fund of a *superannuation benefit that is a *roll-over superannuation benefit because of subparagraph 306-10(d)(ii).

spectrum has the meaning given by section 5 of the Radiocommunications Act 1992.

spectrum licence has the meaning given by section 5 of the Radiocommunications Act 1992.

splittable payment means a splittable payment within the meaning of Part VIIIB or VIIIC of the Family Law Act 1975.

sporting club means a society, association or club that: is established for the encouragement of sport or a game; and (b) is not carried on for profit to its members.

is established for the encouragement of sport or a game; and

(b) is not carried on for profit to its members.

sporting competition has the meaning given by subsection 405-25(7).

sportsperson has the meaning given by subsection 405-25(6).

spouse of an individual includes:

(a) another individual (whether of the same sex or a different sex) with whom the individual is in a relationship that is registered under a *State law or *Territory law prescribed for the purposes of section 2E of the Acts Interpretation Act 1901 as a kind of relationship prescribed for the purposes of that section; and

another individual who, although not legally married to the individual, lives with the individual on a genuine domestic basis in a relationship as a couple.

spread entity means a *member of the group that is not a *stick entity in relation to the group.

spreading period for an amount has the meaning given by sections 716-15, 716-25, 716-70 and 716-100.

SRWUIP expenditure has the meaning given by subsections 26-100(2) and (3).

SRWUIP payment has the meaning given by subsection 59-67(2).

SRWUIP program has the meaning given by subsection 59-67(1).

stake interest has the meaning given by subsection 124-783A(3).

stake option has the meaning given by subsection 124-783A(3).

standard component has the meaning given by section 295-555.

stapled entity:

Note: Those sections deal with assessable income and deductions spread over several periods of membership or non-membership of a consolidated group or MEC group.

(a) in relation to a *cross staple arrangement—has the meaning given by section 12-436 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; or

otherwise—has the meaning given by section 124-1045.

starting day has the meaning given by section 149-60.

starting instalment quarter has the meaning given by subsection 45-125(2) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

start time of a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 40-60.

State insurer means a body that carries on State insurance (within the meaning of paragraph 51(xiv) of the Constitution).

State law means a law of a State.

statement worldwide assets of an entity for a period has the meaning given by subsection 820-933(3).

statement worldwide debt of an entity for a period has the meaning given by subsection 820-933(1).

statement worldwide equity of an entity for a period has the meaning given by subsection 820-933(2).

statutory accounting period has the meaning given by Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

statutory demand has the same meaning as in the Corporations Act 2001.

statutory income has the meaning given by section 6-10.

statutory licence has the meaning given by section 124-140.

stick entity:

in relation to a consolidated group—means a *member of the group that is:

the *head company of the group; or

(ii) a chosen transitional entity (within the meaning of Division 701 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997); or

(iii) a transitional foreign-held subsidiary (within the meaning of Division 701C of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997); or

in relation to a MEC group—means a member of the group that is:

the head company of the group; or

(ii) a chosen transitional entity (within the meaning of Division 701 of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997); or

(iii) a transitional foreign-held subsidiary (within the meaning of Division 701C of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997); or

an eligible tier-1 company.

stratum unit has the meaning given by section 124-190.

structured arrangement has the meaning given by section 832-210.

structured order has the meaning given by section 54-10.

structured settlement has the meaning given by section 54-10.

structured settlement contribution has the meaning given by section 294-80.

Student Assistance Minister means the Minister administering the Student Assistance Act 1973.

Student Assistance Secretary means the Secretary of the Department administered by the *Student Assistance Minister.

Subdivision 230-G assessable gain from a *financial arrangement means an amount that is taken, as a balancing adjustment under Subdivision 230-G, to be a gain you make from the arrangement for the purposes of Division 230.

Subdivision 230-G loss from a *financial arrangement means an amount that is taken, as a balancing adjustment under Subdivision 230-G, to be a loss you make from the arrangement for the purposes of Division 230.

sub-fund, of a *CCIV, has the meaning given by subsection 1222Q(1) of the Corporations Act 2001.

subject to Australian income tax has the meaning given by section 832-125.

subject to deemed loan treatment, in relation to a *financial benefit, has the meaning given by section 250-160.

subject to foreign income tax has the meaning given by section 832-130.

subject to foreign tax has the meaning given to the expression “subject to tax” by Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

subordinated debt interest means a *debt interest issued to: an unsecured creditor; or a secured creditor who, in the event of the liquidation of the entity issuing the interest, can only make a claim regarding that interest after the claims of other secured creditors regarding other debt interests issued by that entity have been met. subsidiary: the question whether a company is a subsidiary of another company is to be determined in the same way as the question whether a corporation is a subsidiary of another corporation is determined under the Corporations Act 2001. subsidiary member: of a consolidated group or a consolidatable group—has the meaning given by section 703-15; and of a MEC group—has the meaning given by section 719-25.

an unsecured creditor; or

a secured creditor who, in the event of the liquidation of the entity issuing the interest, can only make a claim regarding that interest after the claims of other secured creditors regarding other debt interests issued by that entity have been met.

subsidiary: the question whether a company is a subsidiary of another company is to be determined in the same way as the question whether a corporation is a subsidiary of another corporation is determined under the Corporations Act 2001.

subsidiary member:

Note: The expression 100% subsidiary has the meaning given by section 975-505.

of a consolidated group or a consolidatable group—has the meaning given by section 703-15; and

of a MEC group—has the meaning given by section 719-25.

substantial continuity of ownership has the meaning given by section 166-145.

substantial renovations has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

substantial shareholding: see part of a substantial shareholding.

successor fund, in relation to a transfer of a *superannuation interest of:

a member of a superannuation fund; or

a depositor with an approved deposit fund; or

a holder of an RSA;

means another superannuation fund, approved deposit fund or RSA if the following conditions are met:

that other fund or RSA confers on that member, depositor or holder equivalent rights to the rights he or she had under the first-mentioned fund or RSA in respect of the interest;

the conferral of these equivalent rights was agreed, before the transfer, between:

the *superannuation provider of that other fund or RSA; and

the superannuation provider of the first-mentioned fund or RSA.

superannuation annuity has the meaning given by the regulations.

superannuation annuity payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

superannuation benefit has the meaning given by section 307-5.

superannuation co-contribution benefit payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

superannuation death benefit has the meaning given by section 307-5.

superannuation fund has the meaning given by section 10 of the Superannuation Industry (Supervision) Act 1993.

superannuation fund for foreign residents has the meaning given by section 118-520.

superannuation fund payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

superannuation guarantee education direction means a direction given under subsection 384-10(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

superannuation guarantee payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

superannuation guarantee shortfall has the same meaning as in the Superannuation Guarantee (Administration) Act 1992.

superannuation income stream has the meaning given by section 307-70.

superannuation income stream benefit has the meaning given by section 307-70.

superannuation income stream provider for a *superannuation income stream means:

Note: Sections 307-10 and 307-15 affect the meaning of superannuation benefit.

for a superannuation income stream provided by a superannuation fund—the trustee of the fund; or

(b) for a superannuation income stream that is a pension for the purposes of the Retirement Savings Accounts Act 1997—the *RSA provider; or

for a superannuation income stream provided by an approved deposit fund—the trustee of the fund; or

(d) for a superannuation income stream provided by a *life insurance company—the life insurance company.

superannuation interest means:

an interest in a superannuation fund; or

an interest in an approved deposit fund; or

an RSA; or

an interest in a superannuation annuity.

Note: The meaning of superannuation interest may be affected by regulations made for the purposes of section 307-200.

superannuation lump sum has the meaning given by section 307-65.

superannuation member benefit has the meaning given by section 307-5.

superannuation plan means:

a superannuation fund; or

an approved deposit fund; or

an RSA.

superannuation provider, in relation to a *superannuation plan, means:

for a superannuation fund—the trustee of the fund; or

for an approved deposit fund—the trustee of the fund; or

for an RSA—the RSA provider.

supplementary amount of a payment is defined as set out in this table:

supply has the meaning given by section 9-10 of the *GST Act.

supporting R&D activities has the meaning given by section 355-30.

surplus:

(a) section 205-40 sets out when a *franking account is in surplus; and

section 208-125 sets out when an exempting account is in surplus; and

section 210-130 sets out when a venture capital sub-account is in surplus.

tainted: for when a company’s *share capital account is tainted, see subsections 197-50(1) and (2).

tainting amount has the meaning given by subsection 197-50(3).

takeover bid means a takeover bid under Chapter 6 of the Corporations Act 2001, or under a *foreign law relating to corporate regulation.

taskforce officer of a prescribed taskforce has the meaning given by section 355-70 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax means:

(a) income tax imposed by the Income Tax Act 1986, as assessed under this Act; or

income tax imposed as such by any other Act, as assessed under this Act.

taxable Australian property has the meaning given by section 855-15.

taxable Australian real property has the meaning given by section 855-20.

taxable component:

(a) the taxable component of an *employment termination payment has the meaning given by section 82-145; and

(b) the taxable component of a *superannuation benefit has the meaning given by section 307-120; and

(c) the taxable component of a *superannuation interest has the meaning given by section 307-215.

taxable contributions has the meaning given by section 293-20.

taxable dealing, in relation to *wine, has the meaning given by section 33-1 of the *Wine Tax Act.

taxable fuel has the meaning given by section 110-5 of the Fuel Tax Act 2006.

taxable importation has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

taxable importation of a luxury car has the meaning given by section 27-1 of the *Luxury Car Tax Act.

taxable income has the meaning given by section 4-15.

taxable non-primary production income has the meaning given by subsection 392-85(1).

taxable primary production income has the meaning given by subsection 392-80(1).

taxable professional income has the meaning given by subsection 405-45(1).

taxable purpose has the meaning given by section 40-25.

taxable purpose proportion has the meaning given by section 328-205.

taxable superannuation earnings has the meaning given by section 296-40.

taxable supply has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

taxable supply of a luxury car has the meaning given by section 27-1 of the *Luxury Car Tax Act.

tax accounting period has the meaning given by Part X of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

tax affairs means affairs relating to *tax.

taxation law means:

Note: For a list of cases where taxable income is worked out in a special way, see subsection 4-15(2).

Note: Subsection 417-30(1) provides that certain uses etc. of assets (connected with Timor Sea petroleum) are taken to be for a taxable purpose.

an Act of which the Commissioner has the general administration (including a part of an Act to the extent to which the Commissioner has the general administration of the Act); or

legislative instruments made under such an Act (including such a part of an Act); or

(c) the Tax Agent Services Act 2009 or regulations made under that Act.

taxation officer has the meaning given by section 355-30 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax audit means an examination by the Commissioner of an entity’s financial affairs for the purposes of a *taxation law.

tax benefit has the meaning given by section 45-605 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax cost has the meaning given by section 830-100.

tax cost is set has the meaning given by section 701-55 or 830-90.

tax cost setting amount has the meaning given by section 701-60 or 830-95.

tax debt has the same meaning as in section 8AAZA of the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax detriment has the meaning given by section 45-624 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax EBITDA has the meaning given by section 820-52.

tax-exempt bonus share has the meaning given by subsections 204-25(4) and (5).

tax-exempt foreign resident has the meaning given by subsection 118-420(3).

tax exempt vendor has the meaning given by section 58-5.

tax exploitation scheme has the meaning given by section 290-65 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax file number means a tax file number as defined in section 202A of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

tax-free amount of a payment is defined as set out in this table:

tax free component:

(a) the tax free component of an *employment termination payment has the meaning given by section 82-140; and

(b) the tax free component of a *superannuation benefit has the meaning given by section 307-120; and

(c) the tax free component of a *superannuation interest has the meaning given by section 307-210; and

(d) the tax free component of an *Australian-sourced amount has the meaning given by the regulations mentioned in section 312-5 (about trans-Tasman portability of retirement savings).

taxing event generating a gain has the meaning given by sections 725-245 and 725-335.

tax invoice has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

tax loss means:

a tax loss worked out under section 36-10, 165-70, 175-35 or 701-30 of this Act (including such a tax loss as increased under section 415-15 or reduced under section 418-95); or

Note 1: The meaning of tax loss in section 36-10 is affected by section 268-60 in Schedule 2F to the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note 2: The meaning of tax loss in sections 36-10, 165-70, 175-35 and 701-30 is modified by section 36-55 for a corporate tax entity that has an amount of excess franking offsets.

Note 3: A life insurance company can have a tax loss of the complying superannuation class and/or a tax loss of the ordinary class for the purposes of working out its income tax for an income year: see Subdivision 320-D.

(b) a tax loss as defined by section 36-105 (Tax losses for 1989-90 to 1996-97 income years) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997; or

(c) a tax loss as defined by section 36-110 (Tax losses for 1957-58 to 1988-89 income years) of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997; or

(d) a tax loss determined under section 24 of the International Tax Agreements Act 1953 (about relief from double taxation where profits are adjusted) (including such a tax loss as increased under section 415-15 of this Act).

tax offset has the meaning given by section 4-10.

tax offset refund, of yours for an income year, means a refund you can get as mentioned in item 40 of the table in subsection 63-10(1) (refundable tax offsets) for the income year.

tax period has the meaning given by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

tax position has the meaning given by section 45-610 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax preferred end user has the meaning given by section 250-55.

tax preferred entity means:

an *exempt entity; or

an *exempt Australian government agency; or

an *associated government entity of an exempt Australian government agency; or

a prescribed excluded STB; or

an *exempt foreign government agency.

tax preferred use of an asset has the meaning given by sections 250-60(1) and (2).

tax profit on the disposal or death has the meaning given by subsection 385-105(3).

tax receipt means a receipt given to you under subsection 70-5(1) of Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax-records education direction means a direction given under subsection 384-12(1) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

tax-related liability has the meaning given by section 255-1 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

TC control interest has the meaning given by section 820-815 (which is affected by sections 820-820 to 820-835).

TC control tracing interest has the meaning given by section 820-875.

TC direct control interest:

for a company—has the meaning given by section 820-855; and

for a trust—has the meaning given by section 820-860; and

for a partnership—has the meaning given by section 820-865.

TC indirect control interest has the meaning given by section 820-870.

telecommunications site access right means a right (except an *IRU) of a carrier (as defined in the Telecommunications Act 1997): to share a facility (as defined in section 7 of that Act); or to install such a facility at a particular location or on a particular structure; or to enter or cross premises for the purposes of installing or maintaining such a facility that is on the premises, or is at a location, or on a structure, that is accessible by way of the premises. telephone signature of an entity is a unique identification of the entity that can be given by telephone and that is approved by the Commissioner. temporary resident: you are a temporary resident if: (a) you hold a temporary visa granted under the Migration Act 1958; and (b) you are not an Australian resident within the meaning of the Social Security Act 1991; and (c) your *spouse is not an Australian resident within the meaning of the Social Security Act 1991. However, you are not a temporary resident if you have been an Australian resident (within the meaning of this Act), and any of paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) are not satisfied, at any time after the commencement of this definition.

to share a facility (as defined in section 7 of that Act); or

to install such a facility at a particular location or on a particular structure; or

to enter or cross premises for the purposes of installing or maintaining such a facility that is on the premises, or is at a location, or on a structure, that is accessible by way of the premises.

telephone signature of an entity is a unique identification of the entity that can be given by telephone and that is approved by the Commissioner.

temporary resident: you are a temporary resident if:

(a) you hold a temporary visa granted under the Migration Act 1958; and

(b) you are not an Australian resident within the meaning of the Social Security Act 1991; and

(c) your *spouse is not an Australian resident within the meaning of the Social Security Act 1991.

However, you are not a temporary resident if you have been an Australian resident (within the meaning of this Act), and any of paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) are not satisfied, at any time after the commencement of this definition.

terminal medical condition has the meaning given by the regulations.

terminating value has the meaning given by sections 705-30, 711-30 and 713-575.

termination amount means an amount payable because an *arrangement in relation to property ends and includes: if, at the end of the arrangement, one party to the arrangement acquires the property from the other party—an amount payable for the acquisition; or if, at the end of the arrangement, the property is lost or destroyed—any amounts paid to the owner of the property as a result of the loss or destruction; or otherwise—the *market value of the property at the end of the arrangement.

Note: The tests in paragraphs (b) and (c) are applied to ensure that holders of temporary visas who nonetheless have a significant connection with Australia are not treated as temporary residents for the purposes of this Act.

if, at the end of the arrangement, one party to the arrangement acquires the property from the other party—an amount payable for the acquisition; or

if, at the end of the arrangement, the property is lost or destroyed—any amounts paid to the owner of the property as a result of the loss or destruction; or

otherwise—the *market value of the property at the end of the arrangement.

termination value has the meaning given by section 40-300.

Territory law means a law of a Territory.

tertiary course has the same meaning as in the *GST Act.

test day has the meaning given by section 149-55.

test period has the meaning given by sections 165-165, 166-5, 166-20, 166-40 and 166-80, and affected by sections 415-35 and 415-40.

test time for the purposes of applying the *business continuity test has the meaning given by sections 165-13, 165-15, 165-35, 165-40, 165-45, 165-115B, 165-115BA, 165-126, 165-129, 166-5, 166-20, 166-40, 166-80, 707-125, 707-135, 709-215, 715-50, 715-55, 715-60, 715-70, 715-90, 715-95, 715-355 and 715-360, and affected by sections 415-35 and 415-40.

TFN declaration means a declaration made for the purposes of section 202C of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 on or after 1 July 2000.

TFN withholding tax means tax payable in accordance with section 14-55 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

TFN withholding tax (ESS) means tax payable in accordance with section 14-155 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

third party debt conditions has the meaning given by section 820-427A.

third party earnings limit has the meaning given by section 820-427A.

this Act includes:

Note: The tax is imposed by the Income Tax (Deferred Interest Securities) (Tax File Number Withholding Tax) Act 1991.

Note: ESS is short for employee share scheme.

(a) the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; and

(b) Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, so far as that Part relates to:

(i) this Act or the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936; or

(ii) Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953; and

(c) Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953;

except in Division 950 (Rules for interpreting this Act).

tier-1 company has the meaning given by section 719-20.

tier 1 prudential capital deduction, for an entity and at a particular time, means the amounts that must be deducted in the calculation of the eligible tier 1 capital (within the meaning of the *prudential standards) of the entity at that time in accordance with the prudential standards as in force at that time.

timber mill building has the meaning given by section 43-72.

timber operation has the meaning given by section 43-72.

Timor Sea Maritime Boundaries Treaty means the Treaty between Australia and the Democratic Republic of Timor-Leste Establishing their Maritime Boundaries in the Timor Sea done at New York on 6 March 2018, as in force from time to time.

top company has the meaning given by section 719-20.

total debt amount has the meaning given by sections 820-100, 820-200 and 820-210.

total film expenditure has the meaning given by section 376-170.

total forestry scheme deductions has the meaning given by subsection 394-30(3).

total net forgiven amount has the meaning given by subsection 245-105(1).

total net investment loss of an individual for an income year means the sum of: the amount (if any) by which the individual’s deductions for the income year that are attributable to *financial investments exceed the individual’s gross income for that year from those investments; and the amount (if any) by which the individual’s deductions for the income year that are attributable to rental property exceed the individual’s gross income for that year from rental property.

Note: Subsection (2) of this section prevents definitions in the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 from affecting the interpretation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

Note: The Treaty could in 2019 be viewed in the Australian Treaties Library on the AustLII website (http://www.austlii.edu.au).

the amount (if any) by which the individual’s deductions for the income year that are attributable to *financial investments exceed the individual’s gross income for that year from those investments; and

the amount (if any) by which the individual’s deductions for the income year that are attributable to rental property exceed the individual’s gross income for that year from rental property.

total participation interest has the meaning given by section 960-180.

total release amount, in relation to an *excess non-concessional contributions determination, has the meaning given by paragraph 97-25(1)(c) in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

total superannuation balance has the meaning given by section 307-230.

total superannuation balance value has the meaning given by section 307-230A.

total superannuation earnings has the meaning given by section 296-55.

total voting percentage in a company has the meaning given by section 768-560.

tracing rule means a rule in one of the following sections: section 166-225; section 166-230; section 166-240; section 166-245; section 166-255; section 166-260. trading in *shares in a *listed public company, or in units in a unit trust, has the meaning given by section 960-220.

section 166-225;

section 166-230;

section 166-240;

section 166-245;

section 166-255;

section 166-260.

trading in *shares in a *listed public company, or in units in a unit trust, has the meaning given by section 960-220.

trading stock has the meaning given by section 70-10, as modified by section 70-12 of this Act and sections 124ZO and 124ZQ of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

trading stock loss has the meaning given by subsection 165-115A(1D).

traditional security has the meaning given by section 26BB of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

transfer balance has the meaning given by section 294-30.

transfer balance account means an account that arises under section 294-15.

transfer balance cap has the meaning given by section 294-35 and modified by section 294-185.

transfer balance credit has the meaning given by section 294-25.

transfer balance debit has the meaning given by section 294-80.

transferor trust has the meaning given by section 960-75.

transfer pricing benefit has the meaning given by sections 815-15, 815-120 and 815-220.

transfer value of an asset means the amount that could be expected to be received from the disposal of the asset in an open market after deducting any costs expected to be incurred in respect of the disposal.

transitioned petroleum activities has the meaning given by section 417-10.

transition entity has the meaning given by section 58-5.

transition time has the meaning given by section 58-5.

transition year has the meaning given by section 58-5.

transport capital expenditure has the meaning given by section 40-865.

transport expense has the meaning given by section 25-100.

transport facility has the meaning given by section 40-870.

travel allowance has the meaning given by section 900-30.

travel allowance expense has the meaning given by section 900-30.

travel between workplaces has the meaning given by section 25-100.

travel expense has the meaning given by section 900-95.

trial year has the meaning given by section 707-120.

trust component, of a particular character, has the meaning given by sections 276-260.

trust component deficit, of a particular character, has the meaning given by sections 276-320.

trustee:

of a superannuation fund, an approved deposit fund or a pooled superannuation trust—means:

if there is a trustee (within the ordinary meaning of that expression) of the fund or trust—the trustee; or

in any other case—the person who manages the fund or trust; and

(b) otherwise—has the meaning given by subsection 6(1) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

trust restructuring period has the meaning given by section 124-860.

trust share amount has the meaning given by subsection 207-120(4).

trust voting interest has the meaning given by section 124-781.

ultimate controller has the meaning given by section 727-350.

ultimate holding company of a *wholly-owned group has the meaning given by section 124-780.

ultimate owner has the meaning given by section 149-15.

ultimate stake of a particular percentage has the meaning given by sections 727-405, 727-410 and 727-415.

unclaimed money payment has the meaning given by section 307-5.

unconditionally registered: a *VCLP, *ESVCLP or *AFOF is unconditionally registered if:

(a) its registration under the Venture Capital Act 2002 is not based, or is no longer based, on its conditional registration under section 13-5 of that Act; or

it is taken to be unconditionally registered under subsection 13-10(2) of that Act.

undeducted construction expenditure has the meaning given by section 43-235 and 43-240.

undeducted pre-existing audited book value of a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 58-80.

under, of a particular character, has the meaning given by section 276-345.

under-assessment, in the context of a *franking assessment, has the meaning given by subsection 214-115(2).

under common ownership: 2 companies are under common ownership if, and only if:

they are members of the same wholly-owned group; or

after tracing the direct and indirect ownership of the *shares in each of the companies (through any interposed companies and trusts) to the individuals who ultimately hold it, that ownership is held by the same individuals in the same proportions.

In doing the tracing, ignore *shares whose *dividends can reasonably be regarded as being equivalent to the payment of interest on a loan having regard to:

how the dividends are calculated; and

the conditions applying to the payment of the dividends; and

any other relevant matters.

unequal share structure has the meaning given by subsection 167-10(3).

unfrankable has the meaning given by section 202-45.

unfranked part of a *distribution has the meaning given by section 976-5.

uniform has the meaning given by subsection 34-15(1).

unitary tax has the meaning given by section 770-15.

United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea means the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea, done at Montego Bay on 10 December 1982.

unlisted country has the meaning given by section 320 of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

unrecouped FMD deduction (short for unrecouped farm management deposit deduction) has the meaning given by subsections 393-10(2), 393-16(3) and 393-55(6) and (7).

untainting tax has the meaning given by subsection 197-60(2).

untaxable Commonwealth entity means an untaxable Commonwealth entity as defined by section 195-1 of the *GST Act.

untaxed plan cap amount has the meaning given in section 307-350.

unused allocation of exploration credits from an income year has the meaning given by section 418-82.

unused annual leave payment has the meaning given by section 83-10.

unused concessional contributions cap has the meaning given by section 291-20.

unused long service leave payment has the meaning given by section 83-75.

unused tax profit on the disposal or death has the meaning given by subsection 385-110(3).

unutilised means not *utilised.

up interest has the meaning given by section 725-155.

utilise, a *tax loss, a *net capital loss or *net exempt income, has the meaning given by section 960-20.

valuation days, in relation to the calculation of the average value of a matter for an entity under Division 820, means the particular days at which the value of that matter is measured under Subdivision 820-G for the purposes of that calculation.

Valuation Standard means any prudential standard made under section 230A of the Life Insurance Act 1995 that: (a) provides for a valuation of the policy liabilities mentioned in subsection 114(2) of the Life Insurance Act 1995; and is in force under that Act.

Note: The text of the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea is in Australian Treaty Series 1994 No. 31 ([1994] ATS 31) and could in 2014 be viewed in the Australian Treaties Library on the AustLII website (http://www.austlii.edu.au).

(a) provides for a valuation of the policy liabilities mentioned in subsection 114(2) of the Life Insurance Act 1995; and

is in force under that Act.

valuation time for a *life insurance company has the meaning given by sections 320-175 and 320-230.

value:

Note: This definition is affected by section 713-525.

(a) the value of the liabilities of a *life insurance company under the *risk components of *life insurance policies means the value worked out under section 320-85; and

(b) the value of an item of *trading stock has the meaning given by Subdivision 70-C; and

(c) the value of a *registered emissions unit has the meaning given by Subdivision 420-D; and

(d) the value of a *superannuation interest has the meaning given by section 307-205.

variation credit component has the meaning given by section 45-610 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

variation GIC component has the meaning given by section 45-610 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

VBIF (short for value of business in force) has the meaning given by section 820-310.

VCLP means a *venture capital limited partnership.

VCMP means a venture capital management partnership within the meaning of subsection 94D(3) of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

venture capital credit has the meaning given by section 210-105.

venture capital debit has the meaning given by section 210-120.

venture capital deficit has the meaning given by section 210-130.

venture capital deficit tax means tax imposed under the New Business Tax System (Venture Capital Deficit Tax) Act 2003.

venture capital entity has the meaning given by section 118-515.

venture capital equity has the meaning given by section 118-525.

venture capital limited partnership has the meaning given by subsection 118-405(2).

venture capital sub-account means a sub-account that arises under section 210-100.

venture capital sub-account balance has the meaning given by section 214-35.

venture capital surplus has the meaning given by section 210-130.

very large superannuation balance earnings component has the meaning given by section 296-45.

very large superannuation balance threshold has the meaning given by section 296-35.

visiting force has the meaning given by section 5 of the Defence (Visiting Forces) Act 1963.

voting share in a company means:

(a) if the company is a body corporate—a voting share as defined by section 9 of the Corporations Act 2001; and

otherwise—a share that would be a voting share as defined by that section if the company were a body corporate.

voting stake has the meaning given by section 166-235.

Water Department means the Department administered by the *Water Minister.

water entitlement has the meaning given by section 124-1105.

water facility has the meaning given by section 40-520.

Water Minister means the Minister administering the Water Act 2007.

Water Secretary means the Secretary of the *Water Department.

whole of life policy has the meaning given by section 295-480.

wholly-owned group has the meaning given by section 975-500.

wholly-owned subsidiary of an entity has the meaning given by section 703-30.

widely held company means:

a company, *shares in which (except shares that carry a right to a fixed rate of dividend) are listed for quotation in the official list of an approved stock exchange; or

a company with more than 50 members, other than a company where at least one of the following conditions is met during an income year:

no more than 20 persons held, or had the right to acquire or become the holders of, shares representing at least 75% of the value of the shares in the company (other than shares that only carry a right to a fixed rate of dividend);

at least 75% of the voting power in the company was capable of being exercised by no more than 20 persons;

at least 75% of the amount of any dividend paid by the company during the year was paid to no more than 20 persons;

if no dividend was paid by the company during the year—the Commissioner is of the opinion that, if a dividend had been paid by the company during the year, at least 75% of the amount of the dividend would have been paid to no more than 20 persons.

widely held entity has the meaning given by subsection 842-230(2).

widely held foreign venture capital fund of funds has the meaning given by subsection 118-420(6).

wine has the meaning given by Subdivision 31-A of the *Wine Tax Act.

wine tax has the meaning given by section 33-1 of the *Wine Tax Act.

Wine Tax Act means the A New Tax System (Wine Equalisation Tax) Act 1999.

wine tax credit has the meaning given by section 33-1 of the *Wine Tax Act.

wine tax law has the meaning given by section 33-1 of the *Wine Tax Act.

WIP amount asset has the meaning given by subsection 701-63(6).

withholder means a *large withholder, a *medium withholder or a *small withholder.

withholding MIT has the meaning given by section 12-383 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953.

withholding payment means:

(a) a payment from which an amount must be withheld under Division 12 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 (even if the amount is not withheld); or

a payment that arises because of the operation of section 12A-205 in that Schedule (deemed payments) in respect of which Subdivision 12A-C in that Schedule requires an amount to be paid to the Commissioner; or

an alienated personal services payment in respect of which Division 13 in that Schedule requires an amount to be paid to the Commissioner; or

a *non-cash benefit, the capital proceeds or a taxable supply, in respect of which Division 14 in that Schedule requires an amount to be paid to the Commissioner.

Note 1: A withholding payment that consists of a non-cash benefit is made when the benefit is provided. The amount of the withholding payment is taken to be the market value of the benefit at that time.

Note 2: Divisions 12, 13 and 14 in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 deal with collecting amounts on account of income tax payable by the recipient of the payment, alienated personal services payment, non-cash benefit or capital proceeds.

withholding payment covered by a particular provision in Schedule 1 to the Taxation Administration Act 1953 means a *withholding payment consisting of:

a payment from which an amount must be withheld under that provision (even if the amount is not withheld); or

a payment that arises because of the operation of section 12A-205 in that Schedule (deemed payments) in respect of which that provision requires an amount to be paid to the Commissioner; or

a *non-cash benefit provided by an entity if that provision would have required the entity to withhold an amount if, instead of providing the benefit, the entity had paid the *market value of the benefit; or

a non-cash benefit provided to an entity if that provision would have required the entity to withhold an amount if the benefit had been a payment of an amount equal to the market value of the benefit; or

the capital proceeds in respect of which Subdivision 14-D in that Schedule requires an amount to be paid to the Commissioner; or

the taxable supply in respect of which Subdivision 14-E in that Schedule requires an amount to be paid to the Commissioner.

withholding tax means income tax payable under: section 301-175 (departing Australia superannuation payments); or section 306-15 (excess untaxed roll-over amounts); or Division 840 (withholding taxes); or (d) Subdivision 840-M of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 (managed investment trust amounts); or (e) section 128B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (dividends, interest and royalties).

section 301-175 (departing Australia superannuation payments); or

section 306-15 (excess untaxed roll-over amounts); or

Division 840 (withholding taxes); or

(d) Subdivision 840-M of the Income Tax (Transitional Provisions) Act 1997 (managed investment trust amounts); or

(e) section 128B of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (dividends, interest and royalties).

work and income support withholding payments means work and income support related withholding payments and benefits, within the meaning given by the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936.

workers’ compensation law has the meaning given by subsection 136(1) of the Fringe Benefits Tax Assessment Act 1986.

work expense has the meaning given by section 900-30.

working holiday maker has the meaning given by subsection 3A(1) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

working holiday taxable income has the meaning given by subsections 3A(2) and (3) of the Income Tax Rates Act 1986.

work in progress amount has the meaning given by section 25-95.

worldwide capital amount, for an *outward investing entity (ADI), has the meaning given by section 820-320.

worldwide debt of an entity and at a particular time has the meaning given by subsection 820-932(1).

worldwide equity of an entity and at a particular time has the meaning given by subsection 820-932(2).

worldwide gearing debt amount:

for an *outward investing financial entity (non-ADI)—has the meaning given by sections 820-110 and 820-111; and

for an inward investment vehicle (financial)—has the meaning given by section 820-217; and

for an *inward investor (financial)—has the meaning given by section 820-219.

written down value of a *depreciating asset has the meaning given by section 45-40.

you has the meaning given by section 4-5.

your area has the meaning given by sections 43-115 and 43-120.

your construction expenditure has the meaning given by sections 43-115 and 43-120.

your earning activity has the meaning given by section 40-755.

zero-capital amount has the meaning given by section 820-942.

(2) So far as a provision of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 gives an expression a particular meaning, the provision:

(a) does not also have effect for the purposes of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1936 (the 1936 Act), except as provided in the 1936 Act; and

(b) does not also have effect for the purposes of Part IVC of the Taxation Administration Act 1953, except as provided in that Part.

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self -repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Endnotes 1

Endnote 1—About the endnotes 1

Endnote 2—Abbreviation key 3

Endnote 3—Legislation history 4

Endnotes

Endnote 1—About the endnotes

The endnotes provide information about this compilation and the compiled law.

The following endnotes are included in every compilation:

Endnote 1—About the endnotes

Endnote 2—Abbreviation key

Endnote 3—Legislation history

Endnote 4—Amendment history

Abbreviation key— E ndnote 2

The abbreviation key sets out abbreviations that may be used in the endnotes.

Legislation history and amendment history— E ndnotes 3 and 4

Amending laws are annotated in the legislation history and amendment history.

The legislation history in endnote 3 provides information about each law that has amended (or will amend) the compiled law. The information includes commencement details for amending laws and details of any application, saving or transitional provisions that are not included in this compilation.

The amendment history in endnote 4 provides information about amendments at the provision (generally section or equivalent) level. It also includes information about any provision of the compiled law that has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law.

Editorial changes

The Legislation Act 2003 authorises First Parliamentary Counsel to make editorial and presentational changes to a compiled law in preparing a compilation of the law for registration. The changes must not change the effect of the law. Editorial changes take effect from the compilation registration date.

If the compilation includes editorial changes, the endnotes include a brief outline of the changes in general terms. Full details of any changes can be obtained from the Office of Parliamentary Counsel.

Misdescribed amendments

A misdescribed amendment is an amendment that does not accurately describe how an amendment is to be made. If, despite the misdescription, the amendment can be given effect as intended, then the misdescribed amendment can be incorporated through an editorial change made under section 15V of the Legislation Act 2003.

If a misdescribed amendment cannot be given effect as intended, the amendment is not incorporated and “(md not incorp)” is added to the amendment history.

Endnote 2—Abbreviation key

Endnote 3—Legislation history

Income Tax Assessment Act 1997

No. 38, 1997

Compilation No.   266

Compilation date: 1 July 2026

Includes amendments: Act No. 17, 2025, Act No. 57, 2025, Act No. 49, 2026 and Act No. 58, 2026

This compilation is in 12 volumes

Each volume has its own contents

About this compilation

This compilation

This is a compilation of the Income Tax Assessment Act 1997 that shows the text of the law as amended and in force on 1 July 2026 (the compilation date).

The notes at the end of this compilation (the endnotes) include information about amending laws and the amendment history of provisions of the compiled law.

Uncommenced amendments

The effect of uncommenced amendments is not shown in the text of the compiled law. The details of amendments made up to, but not commenced at, the compilation date are underlined in the endnotes. Any uncommenced amendments affecting the law are accessible on the Register (www.legislation.gov.au).

Application, saving and transitional provisions

If the operation of a provision or amendment of the compiled law is affected by an application, saving or transitional provision that is not included in this compilation, details are included in the endnotes.

Editorial changes

For more information about any editorial changes made in this compilation, see the endnotes.

Presentational changes

The Legislation Act 2003 provides for First Parliamentary Counsel to make presentational changes to a compilation. Presentational changes are applied to give a more consistent look and feel to legislation published on the Register, and enable the user to more easily navigate those documents.

Modifications

If the compiled law is modified by another law, the compiled law operates as modified but the modification does not amend the text of the law. Accordingly, this compilation does not show the text of the compiled law as modified. Any modifications affecting the law are accessible on the Register.

Self -repealing provisions

If a provision of the compiled law has been repealed in accordance with a provision of the law, details are included in the endnotes.

Contents

Endnotes 1

Endnote 4—Amendment history 1

Endnotes

Endnote 4—Amendment history